IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


/. 


%o 


1.0 


I.I 


14^121    |2.5 

150     "^        HHH 


2.2 


us 

u 


IM 


M 


' 

1.25      1.4    1 1.6 

■• 6"     

► 

'/ 


A 


c,*' 


^1" 


T^Jf^ 


% 


>y 


/A 


.'» 


'^i 


7 


Hiotographic 

Sdences 

Corporation 


^^.  <^' 


23  WfSI  >«AN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.v.  14530 

(716)  877  «S03 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Techn'cal  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


D 


n 


n 
n 

D 
E 

D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommagie 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurie  et/ou  pelliculde 


I      I    Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  g6ographiques  en  couleur 


Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
Relii  avec  d'autres  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serr6e  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intirieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajout^es 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  dti  filmies. 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  una 
modification  dans  la  mithode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquds  ci-dessous. 


□   Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□    Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommag6es 

I      I    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 


n 


Pages  restaurdes  et/ou  pellicul6es 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxei 
Pages  ddcolordes,  tachetdes  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  ddtach^es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

Quality  indgale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  materia 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppl^mentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 


I      I  Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

Lkd 

I      I  Pages  detached/ 

r~~|  Showthrough/ 

I      I  Quality  of  print  varies/ 

I      I  Includes  supplementary  material/ 

1^  Only  edition  available/ 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  'mage/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  peiure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  filmdes  A  nouveau  de  facon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppldmentaires: 


Irregular  pagination  :  xxxwi,  [1»1- 411, 812,  413-630,633-646.  [31  p. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X 


26X 


SOX 


y 

12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


Th«  copy  filmad  bar*  has  baan  raproducad  tbanks 
to  tba  ganaroaity  of: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  British  Columbia 


L'axamplaira  film*  f ut  raproduit  grAca  A  la 
ginArosIt*  da: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  British  Columbia 


Tba  jrnagas  appaaring  bara  ara  tba  baat  quality 
potxibia  considaring  tba  condition  and  lagibility 
of  tiia  original  copy  and  in  Itaaping  witb  tba 
filming  contract  spacif icationt. 


Original  copiaa  in  printad  papar  covars  ara  filmad 
baginning  witb  tba  front  covar  and  anding  on 
tba  last  paga  witb  a  printad  or  illustratad  impras- 
sion,  or  tba  back  covar  wban  appropriata.  All 
otbar  original  copias  ara  filmad  baginning  on  tba 
first  paga  witb  a  printad  or  illustratad  impras- 
sion.  and  ending  on  tba  last  paga  w!tb  a  printad 
or  illustratad  impression. 


Tbe  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — «»  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  y  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  tbe  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  images  suivantaa  ont  4tA  raproduitas  avac  la 
plus  grand  soin,  compta  tanu  da  la  condition  at 
de  la  nattetA  da  raxamplaira  film*,  et  en 
conformity  avac  las  conditions  du  contrat  da 
filmaga. 

Les  axamplairaa  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimAa  sont  filmis  en  commenpant 
par  la  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
darniire  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  la  second 
plat,  salon  la  cas.  Tous  las  autras  exemplairas 
originaux  sont  filmAs  en  commenpant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  at  er  terminant  par 
la  derniire  paga  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
derniAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  seion  le 
cas:  le  symbols  ^^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  le 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
filmAs  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diffArents. 
Lorsque  ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clicbA,  il  est  filmA  A  partir 
de  Tangle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  baut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  diagrammas  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthode. 


:        1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

vpy-«ff  "t>  .-^■^ 


.•^  »*.. 


*^^Wt 


■'€ 


€OAS 


801 


M 


PR 


PU] 


THE 

AMEBICAN  COAST  PILOT; 

COKTAINIKO 

DIRE€TIO]\S 

FOR   THE  - 

PRINCIPAL  HARBORS,  CAPES  AND  HEADLANDS 

ON   THE 

COASTS  OF  NORTH  A^D  SOUTH  A1IIERI€A: 

DESCRIBINO   THE 

SOUNDINGS,  BEARINGS  OF  THE  LIGHTHOUSES  AND  BEACONS  FROM 
THE  HOCKS,  SHOALS,  LEDGES,  &c 

WITH   THE   FREVAiriNO 

WINDS,  SETTING  OF  THE  CURRENTS,  &c. 

AND   THE 


^m 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITUDES 


or    THE 


PRINCIPAL   HARBORS   AND   CAPES; 

TOGETHER  WITH 

A  TIDE  TABLB. 

BY  EDMUND  M.  BLUNT. 

SIXTBBKTH     SDITIOZT, 

BY  E.  &  G.  W.  BLUNT. 


NEW-YORK: 

PUBLISHED  BY  EDMUND  AND  GEORGE  W.  BLUNT, 

179  WATER  STREET,  CORNER  OF  BURLING  SLIP. 


OCTOBER,  1850. 


^ 


mm 


•■ipipppww»iw-"""»w 


^  Tlie  Reader  in  particularly  referred  to  the  Appendix,.^ 

Page  643. 


DIRI-:CTI().\S  TO  THE  BINDER. 


00 00 

"■  ■     '  :■ 

PAOE 

CHART  OF  STORM  TRACKS TO  FRONT ^19 


PLAN  OF  PORTLAND  HARBOR 

PORTSMOUTH  HARBOR , 

ISLE  OF  SHOALS 

NEWBURVPORT  HARBOR , 

ANNIS  SQUAM  HARBOR, 

CAPE  ANN  HARBOR 

BOSTON  HARBOR, 

NEWPORT  HARBOR 

LONO  ISLAND  SOUND , 

BAY  AND  RIVER  DELAWARE, 

CHART  OF  CHESAPEAKE  BAY 

PLAN  OF  CHARLES rON  HARBOR 

SAVANNAH  BAR 

DOBOY  SOUND , 

PENSACOLA  HARBOR , 

VIRGIN  ISLANDS 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


.151 
.156 
.167 
.159 
.160 
.162 
.167 
.192 
.196 
.219 
.224 
.240 
.243 
.244 
.271 
.393 


Entered  nccordiug  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  tlio  yenr  1850,  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt,  in 
I'     -^^luik's  Office  of  tlio  District  Court  of  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


CHRONOMETERS  rated,  sold,  und  repaired,  by  E.  &  G.  W.  BLUNT. 


PRINTKU  BY  J.  M.  KLLIOTT,  133  WATER  ST.,  W.  T. 


j^>^  i,.j3i^ . 


i>AaE 

n9 

151 

156 

157 

159 

160 

162 

167 

192 

196 

219 

224 

240 

243 

244 

393 


mmmm 


PREFACE 

TO   THE 

TWELFTH  EDITION  OF  THE  MVIERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Nearly  forty  years  have  elasped  since  the  subscriber  commenced  this 
work.  To  it  he  has  devoted  the  largest  portion  of  his  life,  unwearied 
labor,  and  great  expense ;  and  the  reception  it  has  met  with  from  that 
respectable  class  of  society  by  whom  it  is  used,  maybe  inferred  from  the 
fact,  th.'it  ELEVEN  EDITIONS,  Comprising  thirty-seven  thousand  copies,  have 
been  sold,  previous  to  the  publication  of  the  present  edition. 

The  difficulties  of  procuring  all  the  improvements  incident  to  a  work  of 
this  character,  not  only  intended  to  enable  the  mariner  to  recognize  the 
coast  at  a  distance,  but  to  direct  him  into  a  port  when  pilots  cannot  be 
obtained,  render  it  a  work  of  great  labor  and  responsibility.  The  life  of 
the  most  experienced  is  more  endangered  when  he  approaches  the  coast, 
than  when  exposed  to  the  tempests  which  agitate  the  mid-ocean.  Pilots, 
who  are  not  always  to  be  found  in  the  discharge  of  thoir  duty,  are  often 
prevented  by  storms  and  violent  winds  from  offering  their  services  to  ves- 
sels endeavoring  to  make  a  harbor.  In  such  CMses,  unless  the  masters  are 
acquainted  with  the  port,  the  safely  of  the  vessel  depends  upon  the  accuracy 
of  the  Sailing  Directions.  Charts  are  intended  rather  to  give  a  general 
idea  of  the  coast,  than  minute  and  accurate  descriptions  of  particular  har- 
bors. It  is,  therefore,  to  their  printed  directions  that  they  must  resort,  to 
procure  information  which  at  such  moments  is  vitally  important.  Their 
mstrumcnts  and  charts,  by  which  they  have  been  enabled  to  shape  their 
course  through  a  trackless  ocean,  are  rendered  useless  from  their  ignorance 
of  the  channel  by  which  they  are  to  enter  the  harbor;  and  mariners,  who 
have  escaped  all  former  dangers  of  the  voyiige,  are  often  shipwrecked  upon 
some  sunken  rock  or  shoal,  at  the  entrance  of  their  destined  port.  The 
knowledge  of  such  dangers,  important  as  it  is  to  seamen  generally,  is  par- 
ticularly so  to  those  of  the  United  States.  Navigating  waters  filled  with 
shifting  sand-banks  and  bars,  which  are  formed  by  the  Gulf  Stream,  and 
by  the  mighty  rivers  which  discharge  themselves  from  the  coast  of  the 
North  American  continent,  they  require  no  ordinary  skill  and  knowledge 
to  avoid  those  extensive  and  intricate  shoals  that  line  our  shores.  This 
coast  is  rendered  still  more  dangerous  by  rapid  tides  and  eddies  peculiar 
to  the  American  seas,  and  by  a  strong  current  running  counter  to  the  Gulf 
Stream,  from  the  Banks  of  Newfoundland  to  Cape  Florida.  The  bois- 
terous and  variable  weother,  so  common  in  this  climate,  also  tends  to  in- 
crease the  difficulties  and  dangers  of  our  coasting  trade. 

The  Charts  of  the  American  Coast,  of  foreign  publication,  were  drawn 
from  information  obtained  previous  to  the  revolution,  from  the  imperfect 
sketches  of  such  ports  as  the  policy  of  the  British  government  caused  to  be 
surveyed  at  the  time  it  held  us  as  colon'es.  These  were  few  in  number, 
and,  since  the  publication  of  American  charts,  the  English  charts  have  fallen 
entirely  into  disuse.  In  general  the  mariners  w^te  left  to  acquire  their 
knowledge  from  the  shipwrecks  of  others.  Those  we  now  publish,  are  from 
authentic  sources;  and  fiom  the  surveys  of  our  own  government,  the  ob- 
servation of  ship-maste»o,  and  our  own  exertions,  we  drive  thatin'brmatioa 
which  is  here  published  concerning  the  coast  of  the  United  States. 

In  preparing  the  American  Coast  Pilot  ibr  press-  recourse  has  been  had 
to  every  Nautical  work  of  merit ;  and  with  the  assurance  that  neither  pains 
nor  expense  have  been  spared,  it  is  presented  to  the  world  as  perfect  as  the 
nature  of  the  work  will  admit.    Every  source  of  marine  intelligence  which 

r  '  -^^  N.W.HiatofyDapt. 

91274  PROVINCIAL-  LIBHARY 

'**"'■'  VICTORIA,  B.  C. 


■  i 


wm 


wmmmm 


IV 


PREFACE. 


our  country  affiirds  has  been  successively  restored  to.  Letters  have  been 
addressed  to  the  Collectors  and  Pilots  in  the  several  ports  of  the  United 
States,  requesting  nautical  information,  which  they  have  given  with  com- 
mendable promptitude. 

fesrirveys,  in  pursuance  of  various  acts  of  Congress,  have  been  made  of 
Savannah  River,  Capes  Fear,  Hatteras,  and  Look-out ;  of  the  entrance  of 
the  Chesapeake,  the  river  Darion,  Isles  of  Shoals,  Portsmouth,  Boston,  and 
Newport  harbors;  copies  of  which  the  author  has  been  permitted  to  take, 
and  which  are  inserted  in  this  edition  of  the  Pilot.  These,  however,  are 
but  part  of  the  improvements.  The  Bahama  Bank  and  the  adjacent  keys, 
which  lie  directly  in  the  course  of  all  vessels  bound  to  New  Orleans  and 
Havana,  and  which  have  long  been  the  dread  of  our  West  India  mariners, 
■were  surveyed  in  1S20,  at  the  expense  of  the  subscriber.  The  next  year, 
the  sloopOrbit.  a  surveying  vessel  in  his  employ,  was  sent  to  examine  the 
South  Shoal  of  Nantuclut,  the  extent  and  situation  of  which  he  had  long 
suspected  to  be  incorrectly  described.  It  was  then  ascertained  that  this 
Shoal,  which  had  been  laid  down  in  all  the  English  charts,  as  extending  to 
the  south  as  far  ns  lat.  40^  42'  N.,  in  f;ict  terminated  in  lat.  41°  4'  N.  The 
importance  of  this  discovery  to  the  navigation  of  the  United  Slates,  may  be 
easily  conceived.  Heretofore,  mariners  bound  from  Europe,  or  from  the 
eastern  potts  to  New  York,  Philadelphia,  or  any  of  the  southern  ports,  in 
their  desire  to  avoid  this  dangerous  shoal,  kept  so  far  to  ihe  south-east  as 
often  to  run  into  the  Gulf  Stream,  and  were  then.^by  retarded  from  60  to 
70  miles  perday.  By  this  survey,  a  clear  and  perfectly  safe  channel,  twenty- 
two  n)iles  wide,  is  added  to  the  space,  supposed  to  be  between  the  stream 
and  the  shoal,  which  will  enable  them  to  keep  more  to  the  north-west,  and 
to  take  advantage  o(  the  south-west  curient  on  the  inner  edge  of  the  Gulf. 
An  average  gain  of  twenty-four  hours  may  be  thus  made  in  the  home  pas- 
sage of  most  European  traders. 

The  accuracy  of  this  survey,  which  was  at  first  disputed,  has  been  fully 
proved  by  two  different  expeditions  subsequently  sent  from  Nantucket  to 
ascertain  the  extent  of  the  shoal. 

The  surveying  sloop  Orbit  also  accompanied  a  vessel  sent  by  Capt.  Isaac 
Hull,  at  the  request  of  the  subscriber,  to  examine  St.  George's  Bank,  and 
the  result  is  published  in  this  edition  of  the  AmtTican  Coast  Pilot. 

Since  the  publication  of  the  eleventh  edition,  Messers  £.  S^  G.  W.  Blunt 
have  made  a  minute  survey'  of  Long  Isliind  Sound,  and  also  completed 
their  survey  of  New  York  Harbor.  Great  improvements  have  been  made 
in  the  directions  for  the  coasts  of  Newfoundland  and  Nova  Scotia,  for  which 
the  author  is  indebted  to  the  surveys  of  Messrs.  Bullock,  Lane  and  Lock- 
wood,  under  the  direction  of  the  British  Admiralty.  He  has  also  availed 
himself  of  the  labors  of  Baron  Itouisshi,  who,  since  the  publication  of  the  last 
edition  of  the  Pilot,  surveyed  the  coast  of  Brazil,  from  St.  Catharine  to 
Maranham,  by  order  of  the  French  Government,  and  of  the  continuation 
of  that  survey  from  St.  Catharine's  to  the  River  La  Plata,  by  Lt.  Barrel. 
To  the  care  and  ability  of  Capt.  King,  of  the  British  Navy,  who  has  com- 
pleted the  survey  of  the  Straits  of  Magellan,  he  is  indebted  for  the  direc- 
tions of  those  straits  in  the  following  work. 

To  Capt.  Beuvfnrt,  hydwgrnphcr  to  the  British  Admiralty;  Capt.  R. 
Owen,  of  the  British  Navy;  Don  Martin  F.  dc  Navarctte,  hydrograper  to 
the  Spanish  government ;  Lt.  Col.  Abcrf,  of  the  U.  S.  topographical  engi- 
neers; andto  the  officers  in  the  British,  French,  Danish,  and  Dutch  service, 
bis  thanks  are  particularly  due  for  the  new  and  valuat)le  information  which 
they  have  voluntarily  furnished  of  the  coasts  that  have  fallen  under  their 
observation,  and  in  a  manner  which  indicate  that,  in  their  opinion,  the 


A 


:  \&it 


PREFACE. 


advancement  of  the  science  of  Hydrography  is  the  common  interest  of  all 
nations. 

Many  improvements  are  made  in  this,  which  have  increased  its  contents 
one-third  over  the  last  edition,  by  sailing  directions  for  every  harbor  in  the 
West  Indies,  Spanish  Main,  &c.  &c.,  with  a  full  description  of  the  many 
Beacons,  Buoys,  and  the  new  Lighthouses,  which  have  been  erected  on  the 
coast  of  the  U.  S. ;  together  with  the  alterations  that  have  been  made  in 
some  of  the  Lighthouses,  and  a  complete  revision  of  the  Latitudes  and 
Longitudes,  adapted  to  recent  observations. 

These  are  part  of  the  improvements  of  the  present  edition  ;  though  some 
material  corrections  have  been  made,  whenever  the  author  was  satisfied, 
by  the  testimony  of  mariners,  or  by  surveys,  that  his  former  directions  were 
inaccurate.  Alterations  have  not,  however,  been  made,  unless  upon  stronger 
evidence  than  what  prompted  him  to  insert  the  original  directions. 

In  presenting  the  TWELFTH  EDITION ohhe  American  Coast  Pilot 
to  the  public,  the  author  does  not  flatter  himself  that  it  will  prove  entirely 
free  from  errors.  The  shifting  nature  of  certain  parts  of  the  coast,  may 
occasionally  present  deviations  from  the  present  directions.  Imperfection 
too  is  the  lot  of  man,  and  in  attempting  to  give  directions  for  the  navigation 
of  a  coast  6000  miles  in  length,  and  which  was  discovered  long  after  the 
European  coast  had  been  fully  explored,  he  is  sensible  that  he  has  under- 
taken a  duty,  the  performance  of  which  belonged  rather  to  the  govern- 
ment THAN  TO  AN  INDIVIDUAL.  Of  such  a  momentous  task,  it  is  matter 
of  astonishment  that  so  much  has  been  done,  and  not  that  so  much  re- 
mains to  be  performed.  During  the  many  years  devoted  to  its  execution, 
his  zeal  has  not  been  excited,  nor  his  industry  quickened  by  the  conscious- 
ness that  he  was  engaged  in  a  brilliant  undertaking,  which  would  attract 
the  attention  of  mankintl ;  neither  was  there  opportunity  or  place  in  a  work 
addressed  to  a  class  using  a  peculiar  dialect,  and  who  required  only  per- 
spicuity and  accuracy,  for  the  beauties  of  style  and  language.  His  pecu- 
niary reward  has  hitherto  been  nothing,  the  profits  of  the  work  having 
been  wholly  absorbed  in  the  expense  of  improvements. 

It  is,  however,  no  small  satisfaction  to  reflect,  that  the  average  rate  of 
insurance,  since  the  first  publication  of  the  Pilot,  has  been  diminished  more 
than  one-half  upon  coasting  vessels,  and  four-fifths  upon  vessels  bound  to 
New  Orleans,  and  that,  among  other  causes,  the  improvements  in  hydro- 
graphy must  have  contributed  to  eflfect  this  great  reduction.  Still  more 
satisfactory  is  the  consciousness  derived  from  many  public  and  private  ac- 
knowledgments that,  in  no  small  number  of  instances,  by  following  his 
directions,  both  vessels  and  crews  have  been  saved  from  the  rage  of  a  mer 
ciless  element,  when  the  pilots  were  unable  to  come  to  their  assistance. 

This  conviction  ofthe  utility  of  his  labors  has  encouraged  him  to  continue 
them  even  when  the  embarrassments  of  our  commerce  had  extinguished  all 
expectation  of  any  adequate  recompense.  For  the  greater  part  of  his  life 
he  has  devoted  himself  to  the  improvement  of  American  hydrography;  and 
with  a  constitution  broken  by  exposure  and  fatigue,  and  a  fortune  literally 
"cast  upon  the  waters,"  he  now  retires  from  thesuperintendanceof  a  work 
which  his  increasing  infirmities  will  not  permit  him  any  longer  to  continue, 
with  an  expression  of  gratitude  to  that  class  of  our  citizens 

"  Wliose  march  is  on  the  mountain  wave," 

for  the  encouragement  given  him  in  their  uniform  preferenceof  his  publica- 
tions, and  parts  from  them  with  a  wish,  that  ihe  American  Coast  Pilot  may 
long  prove  a  safe  and  unerring  guide  in  their  journeys  through  the  track- 
less ocean. 
July,  1833.  EDMUND  M.  BLUNT. 


^^^nnipipiqpifiiippipippippiwMPtPiP 


PREFACE 

TO   THE 

FOURTEENTH   EDITION. 


In  preparing  this  edition  for  the  press,  every  care  lias  been  taken, 
many  atlditicms  linve  been  made,  and  such  errors  as  existed  in  the  thir- 
teenth edilion,  and  have  been  discovered,  have  been  corrected. 

The  editors  feel  indebted  for  many  communications  to  this  work  ;  more 
especially  to  Capt.  Beaufokt,  hydrographer  to  the  Admiralty,  for  the 
continuation  of  his  valuable  favors  ;  to  Lieut.  Beecheb,  R.  N.,  and  to  the 
invaluable  work,  the  English  Nautical  Magazine,  he  edits  ;  to  Commanders 
Owen  and  Baknett,  U.  N.,  for  their  surveys  of  the  West  Indies  and 
Great  Bahama  Bank ;  to  Lieut,  Com.  Powell,  and  Lieut.  Jos.  F.  Bor- 
den, U.  S.  N.,  for  their  information  of  the  Coast  of  West  Florida  ;  and  to 
Capts.  Green  Walden  and  Josiah  Stuugis,  of  the  U.  S.  Revenue  Ser- 
vice, for  their  description  of  part  of  the  Coast  and  Harbors  of  the  State  of 
Mait.e.  William  C.  Redfield,  Esq.,  of  this  city,  has  contributed  the 
articles  on  Storms  and  Currents. 

The  Tables  of  Longitudes  and  Latitudes  have  undergone  an  entire 
revision,  and  have  been  adapted  to  those  observers  who  have  been 
deemed  most  worthy  of  credit,  viz: 

The  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  anil  adjacent  coasts,  from  the  observation  of 
Capt.  R.  N.  Bayfield,  R.  N.,  and  other  British  officers.  Those  of  our 
own  coasts  from  difterent  authorities  ;  but  more  especially  on  our  south- 
western coast  to  Capt.  A.  Talcott,  who  determined  the  longitude  and 
latitude  of  the  Balize,  and  the  other  mouths  of  the  Mississippi,  after  many 
observations ;  Major  J.  D.  Graham,  U.  S.  T.  E.,  who  determined  the 
longitude  and  latitude  of  the  Sabine;  and  Capt.  Campbell  Graham,  U. 
S.  E.,  for  points  on  the  coast  of  East  Florida. 

The  lon<j;itudes  and  latitudes  of  the  West  Indies  have  been  taken  from 
the  chronometric  surveys  of  Com.  R  Owen  and  E.  Barnett,  as  far  as 
finished  ;  and  in  the  absence  of  their  observations,  the  French  and  Span- 
ish authorities  have  been  consulted. 

The  longitudes  and  latitudes  of  the  coast  of  South  America,  from  Ma- 
ranham  to  Rio  Janeiro,  from  the  observations  of  Baron  Rouissm.  The 
Englii;h  determination  of  Rio  Janeiro  has  been  preferred;  from  tlience  to 
the  River  La  Plata,  the  French;  and  from  the  Kiver  La  Plata  to  Cape 
Horn,  the  observations  of  Capts.  King  and  Fitzroy,  of  the  R.  N.,  are 
adopted. 

Much  yet  remains  to  be  done  to  make  this  work  as  pe-fect  as  the  editors 
desire.  This  is  only  to  be  attained  by  continued  industry,  by  collecting 
and  carefully  collating  the  various  descriptions  of  places,  sailing  directicns, 
surveys  of  harbors,  coasts,  &c.  The  important  survey  of  the  coasts  of 
the  United  States,  now  in  progress,  under  charge  of  Professor  Hassler, 
aided  by  a  corps  of  scientific  assistants,  will,  at  a  future  day,  aff()rd  mate- 
rials for  further  corrections  and  im[)rovements.  'J'o  this  survey  of  the 
American  Coast,  and  to  the  surveys  of  the  English  and  French  liydro- 
graphers,  of  the  coasts,  harbors,  &c.  embraced  in  this  work,  to  commu- 
nications and  sailing  directions  from  intelligent  ship-masters,  and  to  an 
extensive  correspondence,  the  attention  of  the  editors  is  constantly  directed. 

January  1, 1842.  E.  &  G.  W.  BLUNT. 


■MPHMHnili 


■■11 


PREFACE 

T 

T')   THE 

SIXTEENTH    EDITION. 

The  editor  renews  his  thanks  to  those  mentioned  in  the  preface  to  the  Four 
teenth  Edition,  and  who  have  continued  their  cornmiinicalions. 

Since  the  publication  of  the  Fourteenth  Itditiun,  Professor  Hassi.eu,  who  ori- 
ginated the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  has  died,  and  Professor  A.  D.  Baciie  has  taken 
charge  of  the  work ;  and  it  has  progressed  with  great  activity.  Tlie  editor  is 
under  many  obligations  to  him  for  permissifm  to  use  the  infornintion  in  the  Coast 
Survey  Office;  and  also,  the  directions  of  Lieuls.  Com'g.  Bi.ake,  Bachk  and 
Davis,  U.  S.  N.,  Assistants  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  embodied  in  this  work.  To  Lt, 
M.  F.  Maury,  U.  S.  N.,  who  has  charge  of  the  Observatory  and  Hydrogrn,  ,.ical 
Bureau,  he  is  also  indebted.  To  l^t.  Ciiaiu.es  H.  Mimuis,  U.  S.  N.,  whoso  early 
death  before  Tobasco  destroyed  the  promise  of  an  useful  life,  the  elitor  is  under 
obligations. 

Captains  W.  F.  W.  Owrn  and  R.  Bahnett,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  have  fnvored 
the  editf  r  with  their  communications,  not  being  influenced  by  the  misrepresenta- 
tion of  their  acts  and  motives  charged  by  a  poition  of  the  American  Press,  who 
could  not  see,  in  their  earnest  'abor  for  information  and  in  the  caui-e  if  humanity 
any  thing  but  the  proceedings  of  spies,  sent  "  to  spy  out  the  na'edness  of  the  land.'» 

Many  alterations  and  additions  have  been  made  in  this  edition  ;  and  it  is  a  mat- 
ter of  congratulation,  that  the  getting  and  printing  of  accurate  nautical  informa- 
tion has  become  a  subject  of  general  national  importance.  Heretofore,  in  our  own 
country,  up  to  1834,  tliere  had  been  no  surveys  of  any  part  of  our  sea-coast  north  of 
the  Chesapeake,  and  very  little  south  nf  it.  excepting  those  made  at  the  expense  of 
E.  M.  Blunt,  or  by  an.l  at  that  of  E.  &  (.J.  \V.  Blunt ;  but  a  better  day  has  dawned, 
and  the  progress  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  under  its  energetic  head,  and  those 
general  surveys  on  our  coniinent,  by  order  of  the  Biitish  Admiralty,  at  the  sug- 
gestion (if  their  distinguished  hydrographer,  Admiral  F.  Beaufokt,  leaves  the 
task  for  the  future  comparatively  easy. 

The  name  of  the  subscriber  only  is  used,  as  Edmnnd  Blunt  has  been  for  the 
last  sixteen  years  engaged  as  one  of  the  first  Assistants  on  th''  U.  S.  Coast  Sur- 
vey.    His  iluties  upon  that  work  have  thrown  the  responsibility  upon 

Ci.  w.  blujnt. 

October,  1850. 


-:* 


it 


mmiimr^ 


mmm 


mmmmmn^'^im 


w 


i 


t 


INDEX 


PofC 

Abnco.  Baliamns 250 

Abiico  lales,  HithamiiB 218 

Abmllioii,  Hrnzil 5J3, 534 

Absecuni  Inlet,  Nbw  Jersey 218 

Aciinilii  River,  Briizil 5.36 

Ai:liiiliirrtyii  Buy,  Louisiana 279 

Adntinira  Cove,  Newfoundliind 14 

Adniiriiliy  Sound,  Putugonia 580 

Af?Hbiiinii  River,  Cubii 333 

AKinnentlcus  Hill,  Miiine 154 

kgnm  Island,  Piitaiionia (>01 

Anuadu  Bay,  St  Domingo 355 

Aguiidii  Bay,  West  Indies 389 

Aguiidilla  Bay,  West  Indies 389 

Agugas  Point,  St  Domingo 350 

Agujii  Cape,  Venezuela 461 

AbacMitrases  Shoal,  Cuba 323 

Alacnin,  OuU"  of  Mexico 286 

Albemarle  Sound,  North  Carolina 287 

Albion  Bank,  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Aclantra,  Braz  1 522 

Alden'a  Rock,  Maine 151 

Alicia  River,  Nova  Scotia 112 

Allig.itor  Pond  Key,  Jamaica .379 

Ahnirante  Bay,  New  Grenada 485 

Alright.  Capo  ond  Reef,  Gulf  of  Saint 

Lawrence 71 

Altavela,  WeHt  Indies 350 

Alvarado,  Gulf  of  Mexico 290 

Ainanibo  River,  Guyana 510 

i  Amazon  River,  Guyana 510 

Ambergris  Key,  West  Indies 500 

Amelia  Sound,  Georgia 245 

Amherst  Harbor  and  Island,  Gulf  of  St. 

Lawrence 72 

Amufades,  Brazil 515 

Anchora  Inlands,  Brazil 532 

Anchor  Island,  Florida 268 

Andros  Islands,  Bahamas  . . .  .248,  249,  251 

Anegada.  West  Indies 393,  399 

Angerstein's  Rocks.  Brazil 51il 

Angostura,  River  Orinoco 507 

Anguilla.  West  Indies 257  399 

Anhatomirim  Island,  Brazil 645 

Annapolis,  Nova  Scotia 123,  124 

Annapolis  Roads,  Maryland 232 

Ann,  Cape,  Massachusetts 160,  162 

Annemesix  River,  Maryland 229 

Anrds  Squam,  Massachusetts 160 

Anficosti  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.  76 

Aniigonish.  Nova  Scotia 91 

Antigua,  West  Indies 404 

Antiqua  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 294 

Antonio,  Cape  Cuba 337,  343 

Anton  Lizardo,  Gulf  of  Mexico..  ,291,  293 
Anse  a  Cliouchou  Bay,  St.  Domingo. .  .361 

Ants,  West  Indies 371 

Apahuhicola  Bay  and  River,Florida.266,270 

Apple  River,  Hay  of  Fundy 125 

Apponegauset  River,  Massachusetts. . .  .189 


Pag* 

Apronnk  River,  Guyana 508 

Aquadores  River,  Cuba 329 

Aqua  Fort  Harbor,  Newfoundland 14 

Aquin  Bay,  St.  Domingo 353 

Aracary  River.  Brazil 544 

Areas,  Gulf  of  Mexico 285 

Arcahais,  S^.  Domingo 363 

Aracati  Town,  Brazil 517 

Arachat  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 93,  96 

Arncouba  River,  Guyana 510 

Aranza  Inlet,  Gulf  of  Mexico 282 

Araya,  Colombia 445 

Arbushee,  Nova  Scotia 91 

Arce  Bay,  Patagonia 592 

Archimedes  Bank,  Brazil 552 

Arenas  Key,  Gulf  of  Mexico 286 

Arenas  Point,  New  Grenada 471 

Armedias  Shoal,  Cuba .323 

Arnotta  Bay,  Jamaica 383 

Arrecibo,  West  Indies 389 

Arrepira  River,  Brazil 543 

Artibonite  River,  St.  Domingo 365 

Arvoredo  Island,  Brazil 548 

Asauritaun  Port,  Paragonia....! 613 

Ascensao  Island,  South  Atlantic 531 

Ashapo  River,  South  Carolina 241 

Aspotogon  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Assateague  Island,  Delaware 223 

Atmosphere , *11 

Atwood's  Key,  West  Indies 302,  308 

A  ubushee,  Nova  Scotia 91 

Audierne  Island,  Newfoutdland 43 

Augusta  River,  Cuba 329 

Aux  Cayes,  St.  Domingo 351 

Aves  Islands,  West  Indies 408 

Ayautau  Islands,  Putugonia 613 

B 

Back  Harbor,  Newfoundland 30 

Backalieu  Island,  Newfoundland 18 

Bacalou  Island,  Newfoundland 18 

Bacon  Bone  Rock,  Newfoundland 24 

Bad  Bay.  Patagonia 616 

Bahama  Banks 248,  250,  256 

Bahamas 248 

Bahia,  Brazil 528 

Bahia  Bank,  Cuba 345 

Bahia  Honda,  Florida 260,  264 

Bahia  Honda  Harbor,  Venezuela 459 

Bahia  Honda  Harbor,  Cuba 344 

Buie  du  Meslo,  >St.  Domingo 352 

Bale  de  Eumedio,  Gulf  of  Mexico 295 

Baitiqueri,  Cuba 327 

Bajo  Naviilttd,  West  Indies 316 

Baker's  Island,  Maine ^ 129 

Baker's  Island,  Massachusetts 163, 162 

Bald  Head,  North  Carolina 237,235 

Balize,  Honduras 497 

Balona  Shoal.  Cuba 338 

Baltimore,  Maryland 232 


■d^j^ 


1 


■ppp 


mmmw'^ 


ipwiir'^Miww'wi'MPp'Pwrw 


■-^!-'. 


INDEX. 


I 


( 


Page. 
Bande  de  TArinr  Bay,  Newfoundland..  49 

Bane  Harbor,  Newfoundland 43 

Bane's  Port,  Cuba 320 

Bangor,  Maine 140 

Bang's  Island,  Maine 152 

Bank  of  Cainpeche,  Gulf  of  Mexico... 285 

Banks  of  Florida 250 

Bannistre  Road,  St.  Domingo 354 

Banqiipreau,  Isle  of  Snble ]  20 

Baraiioa  Town,  Cuba 317,318 

Baradaires  Bay,  St.  Domingo 368 

Barawally  Bay,  West  Indies 423 

Barbadoes,  West  Indies 426 

Barbuda,  West  Indies 404 

Barburot  Island,  New  Grenada 493 

Barcelo  B:ty,  Patagonia 599 

Barcelona,  Colombia 448,466 

Bariay  Harbor,  Cuba 320 

Biirilla  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 290 

Barneeat,  New  Jersey 209,  216 

Barn  Island,  New  Grenada 468 

Barnstable  Boy,  Massachusetts 174 

Barnstable  Harbor,  Massachusetts  ....174 

Barnvell  Islands,  Patagonia 606 

Barometer,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 65 

Barrataria,  Gulf  of  Mexico 278, 233 

Barren  Bay,  Labrador 2 

Barren  H.irbor,  Newfoundland 35 

Barren  Island,  Moryhmd 231 

Barrington,  Nova  Scolia .■..1....II6 

Barriiigttm  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 116 

Barrister  Bay,  Patagonia 599 

Bdrrysway  Buy.  Newfoundland 50 

Barrysway  Harbor,  Newfoundland. ,. .  54 

Bartiett'sReef,  Connpcticut 195,  204 

Basque  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence..  72 

Busso-terre,  Guadalope,  W.  1 409 

Bnsse-terre,  Marie  Galnnte,  W.  1 411 

Basse-terre,  St.  Kitts.  W.  1 403 

Basse-terre,  Tortue,  W.  1 361 

Bass  Eliirbor,  Maine 139,148 

Bass  Rip,  Maine    182 

Ba.=8  River,  Miiine 177 

Bastiniento  Harbor,  New  Grenada 47(> 

B:Uav!ino.  Cuba 33G 

Batclielor  River,  Patagonia 5r9 

Baxo  del  Coinboy,  New  (Jrenada 489 

Baxo  Nicolao  Slioal.  Cuba 323 

Baxo  Nuevo.  Gulf  of  Mexico 2fi() 

Biiyaliu  Hiirbor,  St.  Domingo. ..  ,357,  3.")8 

Bayanette.  St.  Domingo 351 

Bay  de  lEau,  Newfounflhind 49 

Bay  de  I'ortago.  (iulfof  St.  Lawrence.   10 

Bay  r Argent.  Newfoun<iland 48 

Bay  of  Acul,  St.  |)omingo 355 

Bay  of  All  Saints,  Brazil 528 

Bay  of  Bidls,  Newfoundland 15,19 

Bny  of  Cortez,  Cuba 337 

Buy  iif  Cutteau.  Newfoundland 65 

Bay  of  Despair,  Newfoundland 51 

Bay  of  Fair  and  Folse,  Newfoundland. .  27 

Bay  of  Fundy 120,  125,  130 

Buy  of  lUia  (Jrande,  Brazil 538 

Bay  of  Islands,  Newfoundland 59 

Bay  of  Islands,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Bay  of  xVotre  Daiiio,  Newfoundland ....  27 
Bay  of  Ucoa,  Cuba 327 


Page. 

Bay  of  Porlas,  St.  Domingo 365 

Bay  of  Rencontre,  Newfoundland,.. . .  52 

Bay  of  Rotte,  Newfoundland 65 

Bay  of  San  Cristoval,  New  Grenada. .  .476 

Bay  of  St.  Barbe,  Newfoundland 62 

Bay  of  St.  Geneveive,  Newfoundland,.  62 

Bay  of  St.  John,  Newfoundland 61 

Bay  of  St.  Louis,  Louisiana 247 

Bay  of  Truxillo,  New  Grenado 492 

Bayou  St.  Bernard,  Gulf  of  Mexico. . .  .281 

Bayou  St.  Jean,  Louisiana 274 

Bay  Roberts,  Newfoundland 19 

Bay  Verde.  Newfoundland 18 

Bay  Verte,  Nova  Scotia 88 

Beach  of  Destretto,  Brazil 550 

Beach  of  Fernambuco,  Brazil 549 

Beach  of  Torres,  Brazil 549 

Coagle  Island,  Patagonia 610 

Bear  Bay,  Anticosti 80 

Beata  Island,  West  Indies, 319 

Beaufort,  North  Carolina 237 

Beaver  Harbor,  New  Brunswick.  .127,  128 

Benver  Harbor.  Nova  Scotia 100 

Bedeque  Bay.  Prince  Edward's  Islands  94 

Bedford  Bay,  Patagonia 583 

Bedford  Bay,  Prince  Edward's  Islands  95 

Bedlow's  Island,  New  York 212 

Belem  City,  Brazil 525 

Belen  Rivrr,  Cuba 336 

Uelize,  Ho.idurns 497 

helinonte  City,  Brazil 535 

Belle  Bay,  Patagonia 587 

Belle  Harbor,  Newfounilhmd 49 

Belle   Island,  Newfoundland 16 

Belle  Isle,  Newfoundland 34,  37 

Belle  Isle,  Straits  of, 67 

Beminis,  Bahamas 255 

Benevento,  Bru/il 532 

lierbice.  Guyana 505,  511 

Beriiiija  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 287 

Bermudas 296 

Bernal  Chico  Island,  (Julf  of  Mexico,.  .294 

Beriioija  River,  Brazil 5^1 

Herry  I-ilands,  Bahamas 248,251 

Hescie  River,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence....  79 

Beverly,  Massachusetts 165 

Hickerton  Haibor,  Nova  S(!Otia 144 

Big  Pelican  Island,  Alabama 273 

Rillingsgate  Island.  Massachusetts 173 

liiid  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 76 

Bird  Key,  West  Indies 371 

Bird  Pock  and  Island,  West  Indies. ..  .303 

Bird  Islands.  West  Indies 408 

Bishops,  (Julf  Mexico 286 

Bishop's  Rocks.  Rhode  Island 195 

Black  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 7 

Blackhead  Bay,  Nc-wfuundland 18,23 

BliK'k  Bivt-r,  Jamaiia 379 

Black  River.  New  (frenada 491.  495 

Black  Rock  Harbor,  New  York  ..198, 199 

Black  Rock,  Massachusetts 163 

Black  Rock  Point,  Bay  of  Fundy 124 

Black  Rock  River.  New  Grenada 490 

Blake's  Channel.  Delaware  Bay 220 

Blanca  Isliiuds.  West  Indies 450 

Blancherotte,  Breton  Island 96 

Blanquillo  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico. 284,  295 


INDEX. 


XI 


•  -Page- 

BInnquille  Island,  West  Indies 450 

BInnquille  Shonl.  Gulf  of  Mexico 291 

Blewfield's  Lngoon,  New  Grenndii. . .  .486 

Block  Island,  R.I 183,  192,200,208 

Bluetields,  Jamaica 379 

Bluefioid's  Lagoon,  New  Grenada  . . .  .486 

Blue  Hill  Bay.  Maine 139 

Blue  Pinion  Harbor,  Newfoundland   . .  49 

Butf  Cape,  Labrador 4 

Blunt's  Channel,  Delaware  Bay 222 

Boat  Harbor,  Newfoundland 43,  63 

Boat  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 90 

Boca  Cliica,  Venezuela ,465 

Boca  Grande,  Venezuela 465 

Boca  Grande  Harbor,  Florida 269 

Boca  Grande  Key 259 

Bocos,  West  Indies 436,  438 

Boddy's  Island,  North  Carolina 235 

Bokhen  Island,  West  Indies 398 

Bolantlero  island.  New  Grenada 472 

Bombay  Hook,  Delaware  Bay.... 220,  221 

Bonacca  Island,  West  Indies 492 

Bomiveiiture  Island,  Gulf  St.  Lawrence  82 
Bonaventure  Port,  Newfoundland  ....  20 
Bonaventure  Town,  Gulf  St.  Lawrence  87 
Bonavista  Bay  and  Cape,  Newfoundland  22 

Bonavista  Port,  Newfoundland 23 

Bonj^  Island,  Newfoundland 30 

Bonne  Bay,  Newfoundland 51,  60 

Bonnetta  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 116 

Booby  Island,  West  Indies 300 

Boon  Island,  Maine 153,  151 

Bouqeiones  Point,  New  Grenada  ....472 

Borja  Bay,  Patagonia 591 

Borna  River,  Cuba 317 

Borracha  Island,  Colombia 449 

Boston,  Massachusetts 167 

Bottomless  Bay,  St.  Domingo 350 

Boucan  Point,  St.  Domingo 354 

Bouchasje  Bay,  Patagonia 685 

Bougainville's  IJay  &  Port,  Pat'g'na  585, 58() 

Bowbear   Harbor,  Mn'me 137 

Bowditc^li's  Ledge.  Massachusetts  ,...164 

Boxf^y  Harbor.  Newfoundland 49 

Braces  C/'ove,  Massachusetts 16-J 

Bracnti  River,  New  Grenada 490 

Braganca  Bank,  Brazil 524 

Braha  Harbor,  Newfoundland 35 

Brain's  Point,  Guyana 503 

Branca  Island.  Brazil .532 

Brangmiin's  BlulF,  New  Grenada  ...496 
Braiidford  Reef,  Long  Island  Sound  ..197 
Brandt  Point,  Massachusetts  ....171,  178 
Brandywine  Shoal,  Delaware  Bay.... 219 

Bra's  d'(ir,  Breton  Island 97 

Brazil,  ( ^oast  of, .51 5 

Brazil   Kock,  Nova  Scotia .1 17 

Brazos  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 281 

Breakneck  Passage,  Patagonia 60J 

Breaker   Bay,  Patagonia 600 

Breaksoa   Island,  Patagonia 612 

Breakwater,  Delaware  Bay 219 

Brenton's  Reef,  Rhode  Island 193 

Bret(n)  Island,  Nova  S'"Hia 95 

Brewster,  Massachusetts 173 

Bridgetown,   West  Indies 426 

Bridgeport,  Connecticut 207 


Page. 
Bridgeport  Harbor,  Breton  Island... . ..  98 

Brier's  Island,  Bay  of  Fundy, 123 

Brig  Rock,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Brigus  Bay,  Newfoundland 17 

Brigus  Harbor,  Newfoundland 14 

Bristol,  Maine 145 

Bristol,  Rhode  Island 195 

Briton  Harbor,  Newfoundland 50 

Brooks'  Harbor,  Patagonia 580 

Brothers,  Bahamas 255 

Brother's  Islands,  Colombia 449 

Brown's  Bay,  Patagonia 683 

Brown's  Shoal,  West  Indies 306 

Brune  Bank,  Jamaica 379 

Brunet  Island,  Newfoundland 47 

Bryon  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence...  75 

Buck's  Harbor,  Maine 148 

Buck  Island.  West  Indies 396 

Bucksport,  Maine 140 

Buenavista  Point,  Cuba 340 

Buen  Ayre  Island,  West  Indies 456 

Buenos  Ayres,  Brazil 556 

Buey  Inlet,  Gulf  of  Mexico 289 

Buffet  Harbor,  Newfoundland 52 

Bulkley's  Chan-iel,  West  Indies 594 

Bull's  Bay  and  Harbor,  South  Carolina. 240 

Bunker's  Ledge,  Maine 138 

Buoys  Miramichi  Bay,  New  Brunswick  88 

Burgeo  Islands,  Newfoundland 54 

Burin  Bay  &  Harbor,  Newfoundland. 44,  45 

Bcsh  Key,  Florida 258 

IJutler's  Hole,  Massachusetts 175,  177 

Buzzard's  Bay,  Massachusetts. . .  .185,  190 

Byiioe  Island,  Patagonia 583 

Byron  Island,  Patagonia 612 


Cabagan  River.  Cuba 3,35 

Cabane  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ...  73 

Cabiiilos  Port,  New  Grenada 494 

Cabezo,  Gulf  of  Mexico 286 

Calioiiico  Harbor.  Cuba 319 

Cabra  Island,  West  Indies 363 

Cabras  Island,  West  Indies 363 

Cii<;io  River,  Cuba 336 

Calameto  Bay,  St.  Domingo 347 

('alcasu  River,  Louisiana 280 

Caldera  Point,  St.  Domingo 349 

Calciidia  Island,  Brazil 532 

(Jalmana  Town,  Brazil 536 

Camden,  Maine 142 

t'amol's  Islands  Hari)or,Newfoundland. .  35 

Cameron's  Castle,  Guyana 503 

Ciimpoche,  (lulf  of  Mexico 285 

Ciimpo  Bello,  Maine 135 

Canada  Hay  and  Head,  Newfoundland.   33 
Canal  de  la  Tempestad,  Patagonia, . . .  .587 

('anaiiea  River,  Brazil 543 

Ciincnn  Island,  (lUlf  of  Mexico 284 

(jindelaria.  Bay  of.  New  Grenada 472 

Canje  Creek,  (iiiyana 605 

Canoe  Cove,  West  Indies 312 

Canso  Cspe,  Nova  Scotia 99 

(Janso  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 99 

Cape  Alright,  Newfoundland 71 

Cape  Ann,  Massachusetts 160,  162 

Cape  Ann  Harbor,  .Massachusetts 162 


i^-i;? 


XII 


INDEX. 


i  . 


Pafre. 

Cape  Antonio,  Cuba 327,  338 

Cape  Blanco,  Patagonia 572 

Cape  Bluff.  Labrador 4 

Cape  Bluff  Harbor,  Labrador 4 

Cape  Bonavista,  Newfoundliind 22 

Cape  Broyle  Harbor,  Newfoundland  ...   14 

Cape  Bueno,  Cuba 3-27 

Cape  Canaveral,  Florida 260 

Cape  Cameron,  New  Grenada 492 

Cape  Chhso,  Nova  Scotia 99 

Cape  Ciipstnn,  Buy  of  Fundy 125 

Cape  Catoche,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Cape  Cancedo,  St  D«.  ningo 347,  3r)4 

Cape  Cnasepour,  Guyana   . 508 

Cane  Chiitte,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. . .  85 

Cape  Charles,  Labrador 1 

Cape  Charles  Harbor,  Labrador 1 

Cape  Cod,  Massachusetts 173 

Cape  Cod  Harbor,  Massachusetts 172 

Cape  Corrientos,  Cuba 337 

Cape  Cortado.  Patagonia 598 

Cape  Cruz,  Cuba 330 

Cape  Cuevas,  Patagonia 597 

Ciipe  Diiine  Maria,  St.  Domingo 369 

Cape  Oesendo,  Patagonia 612 

Cape  Desolation,  Patagonia 602 

Cope  Despair,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence..  82 

Cape  Dytr.  Patngonia 612 

Cape  Kast,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 7 

Cape  KlizHbeth.  Maine .....151 

Cape  Kngimo,  St.  Domingo 317 

Cape  Enrage.  Buy  of  Fundy 1 25 

Cape  Fairweather,  Paliigonia 571 

Cape  Fear,  North  Carolina 237 

Cape  Fear  River,  North  Carolina 238 

Cape  Flond.i,  Florida 260 

Cape  Fourchu,  Nova  .Scotia 122 

Cape  Freels,  Newfoundland 28 

Cape  Frio,  Brazil 53 1 

Ciipe  Froward,  Patagonia 586 

Cape  Gnrupi,  Brazil ,523 

Cape  Gaspe.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ...   83 

Cape  (ili)ucester,  Patagonia 600 

Capo  Good  Success,  Patagonia 607 

Cape  Haldiman.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.   84 

Cape  Hatteras,  North  Carolinn 2.35 

Cape  Hayden  Harbor,  St.  Domingo. .  .359 

Cape  Henlopon,  Virginia 217,  219 

Ciipe  Henry,  Virginia .220 

Ciipe  Holland,  Patagonia 588 

Cape  Horn,  Patagonia 620 

Cape  Inlet,  Patagonia 571 

Cape  .leiliBon  Harbor,  Maine 141 

Cape  Ionian,  Patagonia 600 

Cape  .Tude,  Newfoundland 43 

Capo  La  Hume.  Newfoundland 52 

Cape  La  Vela,  Venezuela 460 

Cape  Lookout,  North  Carolina 235 

Capo  Machado,  Patagonia 613 

Capo  May,  New  Jersey 217 

Cape  Maysi,  Cuba 317 

Capo  Neddick.  Newfoundland 14 

Cape  Negro,  Bnizii 631 

Capo  Negro  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 115 

Cape  Neddick,  Newfoundland 14 

Capo  Neddock,  Maine 155 

Cape  Norman,  Newfoundland 30 


Page. 

Cape  North,  Magdalen  Islands 74 

Cape  Notch,  Patagonia 593 

Cape  of  Providence,  Patagonia 623 

Cape  Observation,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  80 

('ape  Orange.  Guyana 508 

Cape  Parker,  Patagonia 598 

Cape  Pillar,  Patagonia. .  .595,  598,  621,  623 

Cape  Porcupine,  Nova  Scotia 92 

Cape  Poge,  Massachusetts 179 

Cape  Porpoise,  Maine 155 

Cape  Porpoise  Harbor.  Maine 155 

Cape  Possession,  Patagonia 573 

Cape  Providence.  Patagonia 596 

Cape  Quebra  Cabaco,  Brazil 548 

Cape  Quod,  Patagonia 597 

Cape  Race,  Newfoundland, 13,  37 

Cape  Race  Rocks,  Newfoundland 13 

Cape  Raphael,  St.  I'omingo 347,  354 

Ciipe  Ray,  Newfoundland. 57 

Cape  Ray  Habor,  Newfoundland 58 

Cape  Red,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 72 

Cape  Roman,  South  Carolina 40 

Cape  Romano,  Florida .267 

Cape  Roger  Harbor,  Newfoundland. ...  43 
Cape  Rouge  Harbor.  Newfoundland...  34 
Cape  Rosier,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence..,.  86 

Cape  Sable,  Nova  Scotia 116 

Cape  Samana.  St.  Domingo 354 

Cape  San  Diego,  Patagonia 607 

Cape  Santa  Lucia,  I'atagonia 610 

Cape  Saiiiiago,  Patagonia 611 

Cape  Schelky.  Patagonia ...600 

Cape  .Spear.  Newfoundland 15 

Cape  Split  Harbor,  Maine 136 

Cape  St.  Anthony.  Patagonia 608 

Cape  St.  Antonio,  Brazil 529,  554 

Cape  St.  Bias,  Florida 267 

Cape  St.  Francis,  Newfoundland 16 

Cape  St.  George,  Newfoundland 60 

Cape  .St.  George,  Nova  Scotia 92 

C'upe  .St.  (jregory,  Newfoundland 60 

Cape  St.  John,  Newfoundland 31 

Capo  St.  Martha  Grande.  Brazil  ..548,  549 

Cape  St.  Mary,  Newfoundland 39 

Ciipe  St.  Mary,  Brazil 554,  559 

Cape  St.  \Michael.  Labrador 4 

Ca|)es  of  Virginia 223 

Capo  St.  Valentyn,  Patagonia 581 

Cape  .St.  V  incent,  Patagonia 607 

Cape  .Sunday,  F^ataijonia .604 

Capo  Tttinar,  Patagonia 596,  624 

('ape  'I'Hto.  Patagonia 600 

(Jiipe  Temple,  Labrador 1 

(Jape  Thomas.  Brazil 522 

Cape  Three  Points.  Patagonia. . .  .566.  611 

Ciipo  Tiljuron,  St.  Domingo 353,  369 

C^ipo  Tres  Montes.  Patagonia 615 

Cupe  Two  Boys.  Patagonia 566 

Ciipe  Upright,  Patagonia 596 

Cape  Victory,  Patagonia 595,  010,  623 

(.'ape  Virgins,  Patagonia 573 

Cape  Whittle,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence..   11 

Ca()p  York,  Laljiador 1 

(-"nplin  Bay,  Labrador 4 

Cnplin  Bay,  Newfoundland 14 

Capstan,  Capo,  Bay  of  Fundy 125 

Captain's  Island,  Long  Island  Sound  . .  .198 


INDEX. 


Xlll 


Page. 

I  Cnraccns,  Venezueln 4o() 

Caratascu  Liigoon,  Now  Grenudn 491 

Caiboniere  Isltind,  Newfoundltmd 18 

Ciirdenas,  Cuba 3'J3 

I  Cardigan  Bay,  Prince  Edward's  Islands,  !)4 

CnreeiiHgo.  Trinidad,  W.  1 434 

Caribano  Point,  New  Grenada 471 

Caribou  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 89 

Carizal  Town,  Venezuela 454 

Carlet  Island.  West  Indies 386 

Carlisle  Bay,  Antigua 407 

Carlisle  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. .. .  87 

Carlisle  Bay,  Jamaica 378 

Carman  Point,  Newfoundland 46 

Carmen  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico,  285, 287, 288 

Carmen  Town,  Gulf  of  Mexico 288 

Caroline  Bay,  New  Grenada 473 

Carreto  Harbor,  New  Grenada '.  .473 

Carriage  Harbor.  New  Brunswick  . . .  .127 

Carribe  Islands,  West  Indies  . . , 392 

Carron  Point,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  . .  87 

Cartago  Lagoon,  New  Grenada 491 

Carthagena,  New  Grenada 482 

Carrupano  Town,  Colombia 442 

Carysfort  Reef.  Florida 262 

Casas  River,  West  Indies .340 

Cascabel's  Islands,  Colombia 443 

Cascade  Harbor,  Patagonia 587 

Cascapedia,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 87 

Cttscumpic  Harbor,  Prince  Edward's  Isl- 
ands   94 

Cashes'  Ledge,  Maine 131 

Casilda  Port.  Cuba 333,  334 

Castillo  Island,  Brazil 554 

Castinc,  Maine 143 

Castle  Harbor,  Bermudas 298 

Castle  Hill,  Rhode  Island 193 

Castle  Island,  Rhode  Island 194 

Castle  Island,  West  Indies 302 

Cata  Bay,  Venezuela 452 

Cataiina  Harbor,  Newfoundland 21 

Cat  Anns,  Newfoundl.ind 53 

Catch  Harbor.  Nova  Scotia 107 

Cat  Cove,  Newfoundland 28 

Cat  Island,  Mississippi 274 

Cat  Islands.  Bahamas 248 

Cat  Keys,  Bahamas 254 

Catt  Island,  West  Indies 301 

Cnuldwf'll's  Island,  Maine 145 

Cavallos  Port,  New  Grenada 494 

Cavaillon  Bay,  St.  Domingo 352 

Casca  de  Muertos.  West  Indies 3S7 

Cavanas,  Cuba 345 

Cayaguaneque  Port,  Cuba, 318 

Cay amas  Poit,  Cuba 336 

Caycos,  Bahamas 248 

Caycos,  West  Indies 308,  311 

Caycos  Passage.  West  Indies 311 

Cayenne.  (Juyana 509 

Cayes,  St.  D,)mingo 352 

Caylos  Bay,  Florida 268 

Cayman  Brack,  West  Indies 3P5 

Caymans,  West  Indies 384 

Caymites,  West  Indies, 368 

Cayo  Bivoras,  Florida 264 

Cayo  Diana,  Cuba 323 

Cayo  Holaudes,  Florida 260 


Page 

Cayte  River,  Brazil 323 

Cebellos  Harbor,  Cuba 319 

Cedar  Island.  Isles  of  Shoals 158 

C'ed.ir  Island,  Long  Island 207 

Cedar  Keys,  Florida 268 

Cedar  Point,  Maryland 231 

Cedros  Town,  Brazd 349 

Cerberus  Rock,  Nova  Scotia 92 

Chacalacas  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 294 

Chacha-Chacharo  Island,  West  Indies.. 435 

Chagauramus  Bay,  Trinidad 434 

Chagres,  New  Grenada 479.  480 

Chaleur  Bay,  Newfoundland 52 

Chaleur  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence . . .  .H6 

Chamalacon  River,  New  Grenada 494 

Champeton  Town,  Gulf  of  Mexico, . .  .285 

Chance  Harbor,  Newfoundland 41 

Chance  Harbor,  New  Brunswick 1 27 

Chandeleur  Islands,  Louisiana 274 

Chandler's  Reach,  Newfoundland 24 

Chandler'8  River,  Maine 1.36 

Change  Island  Tickle,  Newfoundland. .  30 

Channel  of  Florida 265 

Channel  of  Tortue,  West  Indies 261 

Charles'  island,  Labrador l 

Charles'  Islands,  Patagonia 589 

Charles  River.  Nova  S<otia 103 

Charleston,  Nevis,  W.  1 402 

Chi.rlfSlon,  South  Carolina 240,  243 

Charlotte  Harbor,  Florida 269 

Charlotte  Harbor,  Labrador 1 

Charlotte  Town,  Dominica 412 

Charlotte  Port.  Labrador 3 

Charlotte  Town,  Prince  Edward's  Isl- 
ands    94 

Cilrfteaudin  Road,  St  Domingo 352 

Chatham,  Massachusetts 175 

Clialte  Cape,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. . .   85 

Ciiobaw  River,  ^•onth  Carolina 241 

Chedabucto  Bay,  Breton  Islands 98 

Chester.  Delaware  River 220 

Chester  Town,  Nova  Scotia 110 

Chichibacott  Capo,  Venezuela 459 

Chichiriviciie  Harbor,  Venezuela 453 

CIrgnecto  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 125 

Chlltepec  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 289 

Chimaims  Islands,  Colombia 449 

Chincoteague.  Maryland 217 

Chincotoague  Shoals,  Maryland 223 

Chiriqui  Lagoon,  New  Grenada 482 

Choco,  New  Grenada 472 

Clioiseul  Bay,  Patagonia 589 

Chouchou  Bay,  St.  Domingo 3GI 

Chraco  Mola  Rive.'-,  New  Grenada  . . .  .483 
Christianstaed  Town,  West  Indies  . . .  .398 

Christinas  Sound,  Patagonia 603 

Chub  Cut,  Bermudos 297 

(.'huburna.  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Chupara  River,  Dominica 4,30 

Chuspa,  Venezuela 454 

Cienuga  River,  Cuba .336 

Cieiifuegos  Town,  Cuba 335 

Cinque  Isles  Bay,  Newfoundland 49 

Cirujano  Island,  Patagonia 614 

Cispata  Horbor,  New  Grenada 469 

City  of  Capo  Hayfien,  St.  Domingo. .  .357 
Clam  Buy,  Nova  Scotia 103 


■'*/.■ 


mm 


wmmm^m 


wmmmw 


mmmm 


XIV 


INDEX. 


1 


Page. 

Clamb  Bny,  Nova  Scotia 103 

Clnpperton  Inlet,  Patngoniti G16 

Cliitiste  Eliirbor,  Newfoundland 41 

Ciearbottoni  Bny,  Patngonia 604 

Clode  Sound,  Newfoundland 25 

Clouds *13 

Clyde  River,  Nova  Scotia 116 

Coche  Isliind,  Colombia 445 

Cochinos  Bay,  Cuba 335 

Cocliinos  Island.  New  Grenada 493 

Cockbiirn  Harbor,  West  Indies 313 

Cockspur  Island,  Geor<!ia 243 

Coclet  Kiver,  New  Grenada 484 

Coco  Point,  Guyana 511 

Cocos  Bny,  Dominica 432 

Codera,  Cape,  Venezuela 450 

Coddle's  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Cod  Roy  Road  and  Island,  Newfound- 
land  58 

Coffin  Island,  <iulf  of  St.  Lawrence.,. .  71 

Coffin  Island,  South  Carolina 241 

Cofre  de  Perote,  Gulf  of  Mexico 291 

Cohansoy.  New  Jersey 220 

Cohnsset  Rocks.  Massachusetts 170 

Colares  Island.  Brazil 524 

Cold  Sprinj:.  New  York 198 

Cole  Point.  Nova  Scotia 90 

Coliniliba  River,  Brazil 527 

Colinet  Ray,  Newfoundland ,39 

Collier's  Bay,  Newfoundland 16 

Colombia 441,  466,  463 

Colonia  Town,  Brazil 552,  557 

Colorado  Reef,  Cuba 34,3 

Colorado  River,  Now  Grenada 487 

Coloros  Island,  West  Indies 434 

Colunibiano  Town,  Brazil   535 

Columbier  Island,  Newfoundland 46 

Columbuie   Shoals,   Gulf  of  St.   Law- 
rence  , 71,  75 

Comowinie  River,  Guyana 504 

Conceicao  Town,  Brazil 542 

Conception  Bay,  Newfoundland. 16 

Conception  Island,  West  Indies 302 

Conception  Shoal,  Patagonia 618 

Conch  Harbor,  Newfoundland 34 

Concord  Light.  Maryland 234 

Congress  Bank,  Brazil 531 

Connaigre  Bay  and  Harbor,  Newfound- 
land    50 

Connanticut  Island,  Rhode  Island 192 

Connecticut  River 199 

Conney  Bay,  Newfoundland 56 

Connoire  Bay,  Newfoundland 54 

Contoy  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Cooke  Bay.  Patagonia 603 

Cook's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 36 

Cooper's  Island,  Bermudas 299 

Coponamo  River,  Guyana 511 

Corbin  Bay,  Newfoundland 49 

Corbin  Harbor  and  Head,  Newfound- 
land     45 

Coral  Island.  Brazil 548 

Corentiiie  Kiver,  Guyana 511 

Cordes  Bay,  Patagonia 588 

Cormorant  Point.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  78 

Cornfield  Harbor,  Virginia 227 

Corn  Island,  New  Grenada .487 


Page. 

Corn  wallis.  Nova  Scotia 1 24 

Coro  River,  Venezuela 454 

C^orsaw  River,  South  Carolina 241 

Coster's  Harbor,  Rhode  Island 193 

Country  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Courtland  Bay,   Dominica 427 

Cove  Point,  Maryland 230 

Cow  Bay,  Breton  Island 98 

Cow  Head.  Newfoundland 60 

Cow  Keys,  Florida 266 

Cuzumel  Island,  West  Indies 500 

Crab  Island,  Guyana 505,  511 

Crab  Island,  West  Indies 387 

Cranberry  Islands  and  Harbor,  Maine..  139 

Crawl  Key,  Mosquito  Coast 491 

Cremalliere  Cove,  Newfoundland 34 

Cristales  River  New  Grenada 493 

Crockett's  Bay,  Maryland 229 

Crocodile  Point.  Cuba .339 

Crooked  Islands,  Bahamas 248 

Crooked  Islands,  West  Indies 302,  308 

Crool.od  Islands  Passage,  W.  I.  ..303,  305 

Croque  Harbor,  Newfoundland 34 

Crow  Harbor,  Breton  Island 98 

Crow  Harbor,  Georgia, ,  .-^45 

Crow  Inlet,  New  York 215 

Cruz  Harbor,  Venezuela .....451 

Cuagua  Island,  Colombia. 445 

Cuba,  West  Indies 317 

Cubagua  Island,  Colombia 445 

Cuidado  Reef,  West  Indies 307 

Culebra  Island,  West  Indies 386 

Culteaux  Bay,  Newfoundland 54 

Cnmana    Colombia 446 

Cumana,  Venezuela 466 

Cumarebo  Bay,  Venezuein 454 

Cumbnhau  River.  South  Carolina 241 

Cumborland  Harbor,  Cuba 328 

Cumberland  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence       8 

Curazao  Island,  West  Indies 456 

Curleu  Harbor,  Labrador 5,  6 

Currents *26 

Currents,  Const  of  the  United  States  ..*45 

Currents,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence "66 

Currents.  Prince  Edward's  Islands  ....  95 

Cuniau  Town.  Venezuela 450 

Cutter  Harbor,  Labrador 1 

Cutwell  Harbor,  Newfoundland 30 

Cuyajuatejo  River,  Cuba 337 

D 

Damnriscotta  River,  Maine 146 

Dniunalde  Harbor.  Newfoundland 26 

Dantzic  Coves.  Newfoundland, 47 

Darby  Cove,  Patngonia 597 

Daricn,  Georgia 244 

Dartmouth  Bay,  Nova  Scotia Ill 

Dartmouth,  Nova  Scotia 106 

Dartmouth  River,  Breton  Island 97 

Das  Bocas,  Gulf  of  3Iexico 289 

Dauphin  Island,  Alabama 272 

Dawson  Islnnd,  Patagonia 579 

Dead  Island's  Harbor.  Newfoundland..  56 
Deailman  Ishtt,  (lulfof  St.  Lawrence..  75 

Deadman's  Chest,   West  Indies 387 

Deadnian's  Harbor,  Labrador 4 


INDEX. 


XV 


Page. 

124 

454 

olina 241 

sland 193 

lotia 100 

1 427 

230 

98 

1 60 

266 

lies 500 

505,  511 

387 

rbor,  Mniiie..l39 

Bt 491 

undlund 34 

nada 493 

1 229 

339 

1 248 

dies 3n'J,  308 

W.  I.  ..303,  305 

illaud 34 

lid 98 

..-^45 

215 

.....451 

445 

317 

445 

sa 307 

ies 386 

land 54 

446 

1 466 

a 454 

ai'olina 241 

H 328 

of  St.  Law- 

8 

lea 456 

5,6 

, *26 

ited  States  ..*45 

enpe *66 

Iblands  ....   95 

450 

1 

dl.iiid 30 

337 

146 

indland 26 

land, 47 

597 

244 

tia Ill 

106 

aland 97 

289 

272 

579 

rfuundland..  56 
Lawrence,,  75 

ndies 387 

dor 4 


Page.  \ 

Deane  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 102 

Dean  Harbor.  Nova  Scotia 103 

Dean  Harbor,  Patagonia., 583 

Deep  Bay,  West  Indies , . .  .344 

Deep  Harbor,  Labrador 2 

Deer  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Deer  Inland,  Louisiana 279 

De  Oennes  River,  Patagonia 586 

Do  Grat  Cove,  Newfoundland 35 

Delaware  Bay  and  River 219,  221 

Delaware  River,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Demerara,  Guyana 503,504,506 

Denbigh  Island,  Labrador 4 

Dennis,  Mnsaacliusetts 173,  177 

Deseada,  West   Indies 411 

Deseclieo,  West  Indies 436 

Desirnde,  West  Indies 411 

Despair  Cape,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,.  83 

Devil's  Bay,  Newfoundland '52 

Diagon  Bay.  Newfoundland 51 

Diamond,  St.  Domingo 353 

Diana  Bank,  West  Indies 303 

Diegos  Isl'inds,  West  Indies 434 

Dildo  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Dies  Keys,  Cuba 336 

Disappointment  Bay,  Patagonia 618 

Dislocation  Harbor,  Patagonia 599 

Doboy  Inlet,  Georgia 244 

Dog  Island,  Florida 267,  270 

Dog  Island,  Miasitjsippi 274 

Dog  Island.  West  Indies 399 

Dominica,  West  Indiea 412 

Doris  Cove,  Patagonia G03 

Douglas  Town,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  83 

Dover  Buy,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Dover  Port,  Nova  Scotia 107 

Doyle  Reef,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. ...  70 

Drake's  Islet,  New  Grenada 248 

Drum  Point,  Maryland 231 

Drunken  Man's  Key,  West  Indies 374 

Dry  Harbor,  Jamaica 382 

Duarte    Islets,  New  (Jreneda 477 

Duck  Island,  Isles  of  Shoals 158 

Duck  Island,  Labrador 1 

Duck  Harbor,  Labrador 4 

Duck  Harbor.  Patagonia 600 

Duckti'iip,  Maine 141 

Duncan   Harbor,  Patagonia 610 

Durel's  Ledge,  Newfoundland 29 

Dutch  Island,  Rhode  Island 193 

Dutch  Key,  Trinidad,  W.  1 260 

Dyers  Bay,  Maine 137 

Dynoley  Bay,  Patagonia 612 

Dyneley  Land,  Patagonia .582 

E 

Eagle  Bay,  Patagonia 585 

Eagle  Cove,  Labrador 4 

Eagle  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawroiico.,     9 

Eagle  Island,  Maine 151 

East  Cape,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 77 

East  Caycos,  West  Indies 313 

Easter  Bay,  Patagonia 618 

Eastern  Harbor,  New  Grenada 488 

East  Greenwich,  Rhode  Island 194 

Easihnm,  Massachusetts 173 

East  South  East  Keys,  New  Grenada  ,  ,488 


Page. 
Ebb  Stream,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. ...  75 

Ebenicook  Harbor,  Maine 150 

Eddy  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 1 23 

Edgartown,  Massauhusetts 179 

Egg  Island,  West  Indies 299,  435 

Egmant  Harbor,  Plorida 269 

Egmont  Harbor,  West  Indiea 425 

Elbow  Reef,  Baliamas 249 

Eleuthera,  Bahamas 249,  .300 

Elk  River,  Maryland 234 

Ellis  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 77,  79 

Elizabetii  Capo,  Maine i51 

Elizabeth  Island,  Brazil 57 o 

Elizabeth  River,  Virginia 225 

Elsinborough,  New  .lerdey 220 

Eiiceado  de  Brito,  Brazil 549 

Eiidymion  Reef  and  Shoal,  West  Indies. 314 

Englee  Harbor,  Newfoundland 33 

English  Harbor,  Antigua 405 

English  Harbor,  Newfoundland 21,  48 

English  Key,  Mosquito  C^oast 498,  499 

Enrage  Cape,  Nova  Scotia 105 

Ensenada  de  Majana,  Cuba 337 

Entry  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. . .  73 

Epinotte  River,  Martinique 418 

Escondido  Harbor,  Trinidad 414 

Escondido  Port,  Cuba .■!28 

Escondido  River,  St.  Domingo 349 

Escribanos  Harbor,  New  Grenada 475 

Esi'udo  Island,  New  Grenada 482 

Esmeraldo  River,  Colombia 442 

Bspanola  Point,  St.  Domingo 355 

Espirito  River,  Brazil 533 

Espiritu  Santo,  Brazil 532 

Esquimaux  Bay  and  River,  Gulf  of  St. 

I      Lawrence 8 

Essequibo,  Guyana 511 

Etang  Harbor,  New  Brunswick 127 

'  Ethera,  Bahamas 249 

^  Euston  Bay,  Patagonia 600 

;  Kvangelists.  Patagonia 598 

\  Exuma,  Bahamas 249,  .301 

Execution  Rocks,  Long  Island  Sound.. 199 

F 

Faclieux,  Newfoundland 51 

Fair  and  False  Bay,  Newfoundland  ...   27 
Fairweather's      Island,     Long      Island 

Sound 198,  207 

F'alkiier's  Island,  Long  Island  Sound  ..196 

Fallen  City,  West  Indies 394 

Falmouth,  Antigua 405,  407 

Falmouth,  Jamaica 382 

Falmouth,  Nova  Scotia 124 

False  Cape  Horn,  Patagonia .604 

Falne  Bank,  Newfoundland 12 

Fatal  Bay,  Patagonia 619 

Favorite  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 117 

Fear,  Cape,  North  Carolina 237 

Federal  Point,  North  Carolina  .    2:i8 

Fell's  Point,  Maryland 233 

Fen  wick's  Island,  Delaware  Bay 223 

Fermose  Harbor,  Newfoundland 14 

Fernandino,  Cuba 3.35 

Fernando  Noronha,  Brazil 514 

Ferrolle  Point,  Newfoundland 62 

Ferry  land  Harbor,  Newfoundland 14 


«V1 


INDEX. 


i  : 


Page. 

Ferryland  Hend,  Newfoundland 45 

Field's  Buy,  Piitngonid 583 

Figo  Tsliind,  Brnzil .543 

Figuera  Islund,  Urnzil • .  .543 

Finchnm  Ittliuids,  PntiigoDia 600 

Fire  Islands,  New  York 215 

First  Narrow,  PatabOuia 574,  623 

Fisgii  Point,  Cuba 337 

Fisherman's  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Fisherman's  Point,  Cuba 329 

Fisher's  Island  and    Sound,   Connecti- 
cut   194,195 

Fishing  Bay,  Maryland 231 

Fishing  Kip,  Nantucket 183 

Fishing  Ship  Harbor,  Labrador 3 

Fitzroy  Islands,  Patagonia 582 

Five  Fathom  Bank,  New  Jersey 218 

Fire  Islands  Harbor,  West  Indies.  .405,  407 

Flamingo  Bay,  Martinique 421 

Flamingo  Bay,  St.  Domingo .352 

Flemish  Cap,  Newfoundland 12 

Fleur  de  Lis  Harbor,  Newfoundland...  32 

Flynn  Sound,  Patagonia 612 

Flynn's  Knoll.  New  York 211 

Floras  Island,  Brazil 555,561 

Florida,  Coast  of 259 

Florida  Banks  and  Reef, 256,  259,  261 

Flushing  Bay,  New  York 199 

Fog  Bay,  Patagonia 618 

Fogo  Islands,  Newfoundland 29 

Fogs *13 

Fogs,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 64 

Folly  Island,  Maine 155 

Fond  la  Grange  Bay,  St.  Domingo 361 

Forked  Harbor,  Breton  Island 98 

Forlorn  Hopo,  Guyana 511 

Formigas,  West  Indies 371 

Forteau  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. . .     7 

Fortescue  Bay,  Patagonia 588 

Fort  Amsterdam,  Guyana 604 

Fort  Diamond.  New  York 212 

Fort  George,  Mosquito  Coast 498 

Fort  Madison,  Maryland 232 

Fort  Mifflin,  Delaware  Bay 221 

Foit  Point  Cove,  Maine 141 

Fort  Royal,  Martinique 414,  418 

Fortune  Bay,  Newfoundland 47,  50 

Fortune  Bay,  Patagonia 616 

Fortune  Harbor,  Newfoundland 30 

Fortune  Island,  West  I  ndies 302 

Fouchee  Harbor,  Newfoundland 33 

Foul  Hole  St.  Domingo 350 

Fourchu,  Cape,  Nova  Scotia 122 

Fowey  Rocks,  Florida 262 

Fox  Bay,  Patagonia 580 

Fox  Harbor,  Labrador 2 

Fox  Island,  Breton  Island 98 

Fox  Island,  Newfoundland 40 

Fox  Island  Passage,  Maine 142 

Fox  Point,  Antioosti 81 

Francois  Bay,  Newfoundland 52 

Frankfort,  Maine 141 

Franklin  Island,  Maine 145 

Franklin  Sound,  Patagonia 605 

Frank's  Island,  Louisiana 277 

Frayles,  Colombia, 444 

Fre'derickstudt,  Town,  West  Indies.... 398 


Pagt. 

Freels,  Cape,  Newfoundland  > 28 

French  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 1 09 

French  Keys,  West  Indies 307,  310 

Fresh  Wntor  Cove,  Patagonia 587 

Friar's  Head,  Long  Island  Sound 199 

Friar's  Point,  Cuba 317 

Frisbee's  Ledge,  Long  Island  Sound  ..215 
Frying  Pan  Shoals,  North  Carolina  ...237 

Fundy,  Bay  of 120,125 

Funk  Island.  Newfoundland 28 

Fury  Cove,  Patagonia 619 

Fury  Harbor,  Patagonia 682,  602 

G 

Gabarus  Bay,  Rhode  Island 98 

Gabriel  Channel,  Patagonia 579 

Galafre  River,  Cuba 337 

Galera  Point,  Venezula 463 

Galet  Cove,  St.  Domingo 367 

Galina  Point.  Jamaica -. . .  .383 

Galloping  Andrews,  Newfoundland. ...  44 
Gaily  Boys  Harbor,  Newfoundland... .  55 

Galtaus  Harbor,  Newfoundland 58 

Galveston,  Texas 280 

Gambier  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Gannet  Rock,  Bay  of  Fundy 129 

Gannets,  Labrador 5 

Gardner's  Bay  and  Isl'd,  N.  Y.201, 202,  205 

Gardner's  Point,  N.  Y 204 

Garia  Bay.  Newfoundland 56 

Garrotte  Harbor,  New  Grenada 477 

Gaskin  Bank,  Georgia 243 

Gaspa  Grande  Island,  West  Indies. ..  .434 
Gaspe  Bay,  Cape  and  Harbor,  Gulf  of 

St.  Lawrence 83,  84 

Gay  Head,  Massachusetts 185 

Gay's  Cove,  Maine 146 

Gedney's  Channel,  New  York 213 

George  Town,  Guyana 506 

George  Town,  Prince  Edward's  Island.  94 

Georgetown,  South  Corolina 239 

Georgetown,  West  Indies 417 

(ifeorge's  Banks 131 

George's  River,  Maine 145 

(Jibara  Harbor,  Cuba 320 

Gilbert's  River,   Labrador..., 4 

Gilkey  Harbor,  Maine 141 

Gingerbread,  Grand  Bahamas 255 

Ginger  Keys,  Bahamas 259 

Glacier  Bay,  Patagonia 593 

(■JInsgow,  Guyana 506 

Glasgow  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 99 

Gligo  Inlet,  New  York 215 

Gloucester,  Massachusetts 163 

Gloucester,  Vu'ainia 226 

Glover's  Reef  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Goat  Island,  West  Indies 398 

Goazacoalcos  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico.  ...290 

(toIT's  Key,  Mosquito  Coast 498,  499 

Goldsborough,  Maine 137 

Gonaives,  St.  Domingo 364 

Gonave  Island,  St.  Domingo 366 

Good  Harbor,  Patagonia 612 

Good's   Bay,  Patagonia 616 

Good  Success  Bay,  Patagonia 607 

Goose  Bay,  Newfoundland 24 

Goose  Cove,  Newfoundland 34 


■f 


INDEX. 


XVI 


Pogt. 

Dd 28 

109 

i 307,310 

)nia 587 

Sound 199 

317 

md  Sound  ..215 

Carolina  , . .  237 

120,126 

d 28 

619 

582,602 

d 98 

a 579 

337 

463 

367 

- 383 

lundiand. ...  44 
)undlHnd....  55 

Jliind 58 

280 

otia 113 

y 129 

5 

Y.201,202,205 

204 

56 

enada 477 

243 

t  Indies...  .434 
ibor,  Gulf  of 

83.  84 

185 

146 

ork 213 

506 

ard's  Island.  94 

H 239 

417 

131 

145 

320 

4 

, 141 

as 255 

259 

593 

, 506 

tia 99 

215 

163 

226 

hst 497 

.198 

Mexico... .290 

498,  499 

137 

.%4 

366 

612 

616 

ia 607 

24 

34 


Page. 
Oct's  Cove,  Newfoundland    20 

Governor's  Town,  New  Grenada 496 

Gracios  a  Dios,  Now  Grenada 490 

Grafton  Inlands,  Patagonia 601 

Granadinea,  West   Indies 423 

Granadillus,  West  Indies 423 

Granby  Island,  Labrador 4 

Grand  Bay,  Newfoundland 67 

Grand  Bruit   Harbor,  Newfoundland,.  55 

Grand  Cayman,  .Jamaica  , 384 

Grand  Entry  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence  71 

GraniiFathor's  Cove,  Newfoundland,.,.  33 

Grand  Goave  Bay,  St.  Domingo 368 

Grand  Harbor,  Bay  of  Fundy 129 

Grand  Key,   Florida 259 

Grand  Key,  West  Indies 315 

Grand  le  Pierre  Harbor,  Newfoundland  48 

Grand  Passage,  Nova  Scotia 123 

Grand   Point  of  Mecatina,  Gulf  of  St. 

Lawrence 10 

Grandsway  Harbor,  Newfoundland. .. ,  34 

Grand  Terre,  Guadaioiipe 410 

Grand  Turk,  West  Indies 313,315 

Grange,  St.  Domingo .357 

G  raves,   Massachusetts 168 

Great  Adventure  Cove,  Newfoundland..  26 

Great  Bahama  Island 249 

Great  Barrysway  Point,  Newfoundland  54 
(Treat  Bay  do  I'Eau,  Newfoundland    ..  49 

Great  Bay,  West  Indies 307 

Great  Burin   Harbor,   Newfoundland..  44 

Great  Cat  Arms,  Nowfoundhnd 35 

Groat  Chance  Harbor,  NewConndland..  24 
Great  Choptauk  River,  Maryland  . . .  .232 
Great  Coney  Arm,  Newfoundland....  32 
Great  Corn  Island,   New  Gnmada  . ,  ..488 

Great  Egg  Harbor,  New  Jer^iey 217 

<rreat  Exuma,  West  Indies 301 

Great  Fox  River,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  86 
Great  Gallows  Harbor,  Newfoundland   43 

Great  Guana  Key,  Bahamas 249 

<>reat  Harbor  Deep,  Newfoundland  ,,  33 

Great  Harbor,  Newfoundland 55 

Great  Heneagna,  West  Indies 306 

Great  Isaac,  iSalmmas   , 255 

Great  Inajua.  West  Indies 306 

Great  Jarvis  Harbor,  Ncnvfonndland..  51 
Great    Miquelon  Island,   Newfoundland  46 

Great  Picudia,  VeiioKuela 449 

tJreat  Point,  Nantucket 179,  183 

Great  Pond  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence  S6 

Great  Quirpon  Harbor,   Newfoundland  35 

Great  River,  New  Grenada, ., 400 

Great  River  Segovia,  New  Grenada  ..491 
Great  Round  Harbor,  Newfoundland.,  31 
Great  Round  Shoal,  Massachusetts.  ...176 
Great  Salmon  River,  Newfoundland  .,  39 
Great  Sandy  Harbor,  Newfoundland  .,  41 

Great  Satilla  River,  Georgia 245 

Great  South    Harbor,  Newfoundland  ..  41 
Great  St,  Julien  Harbor,  Newfoundland  34 
Great  St.  Lawrence  Harbor,  Newfound- 
land  45 

Green  Bay,  Newfoundland 18 

Greea  Bay,  New  Grenada 482 


Page. 

Green  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Green  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 114 

Green  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 291 

Green  Island,  Maine 147 

Green  Island,  Newfoundland 46 

Green  Island.  Nova  Scotia 109,  122 

Green  Port,  New  York 206 

(ireenspond  Tickle  Isl'd.  Newfoundland  28 
Greenville  Bay,  Prince  Edwards  Islands  95 

(treenville.  West  Indies 424,  425 

Gregory  Bay,  Patagonia 622,  624 

Grenada,  West  Indies 423,  425 

GriflRn  Cove,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.,.,  86 

Griguet  Bay,  Newfoundland 35 

Grindstone  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  72 

Groais  Island.  Newfoundland 34 

Guadaloupe,  West  Indies 388 

Guaguinico  River,  Cuba 335 

Gtiaianeco  Islands.  Patagonia  ........612 

Guajaba  Island,  West  Indies 322 

Guanaja  Island,  New  Grenada 492 

Guanamau  River,  Cuba 336 

Guanashani,  West  Indies 301 

Guanayara  River,  Cuba 334 

Guanico  Harbor,  West  Indies 388 

Guanico  Harlwr,  St.  Domingo.  ..,357,  359 

Guanos  River,  Cuba 337 

Guaurabo  River,  Cuba 332 

Guantnnanco  Harbor,  Cuba 328 

Guantima  River,  Cuba 557 

Guarnpari  River.  Brazil 532 

Guaratiba  Point,  Brazil 536 

(luaratuba  River,  Brazil 544 

Guincha  Key,  Bahamas. 257 

Guines  River.  Cuba 336 

Guirior  Bay,  Patagonia 593 

Gulf  of  Darien,  New  Grenada 471 

(tulf  of  Honduras,  New  Greneda 492 

Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Gulf  of  Morrisquillo,  New  Grenada. ..  .469 

Gnlfof  Paria 429,  437 

Gulf  of  Penas,  Patagonia 616 

Gulf  of  San  Bias,  New  Grenada 474 

Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 63,  82 

(Tulf  of  Trinidad.  Patagonia 611 

(iulfof  Triato,    Venezula 453 

Gulf  of  Uraba,  New  Grenada 471 

(iiilfof  Xaltegua,  Patagonia 594 

(5nlf  Stream  «32 

(luUiver's  Hole,  Nova  Scotia 124 

(Jull  Islands.  Long  Island  Sound.. 200,  204 

Gull  Rock,  Newfoundland 36 

(5uu  Bay,  Patagonia 585 

Gun  Boat  Shoal.  New  Hampshire. ..  .156 

Gun  Key,  Bahamas 256 

Gurnet  Head,  Massachusetts 171 

Gustacia  Town,  West  Indies 401 

Gut  of  Canso 91,  92 

Guyana 501  to  514 

Gysborough  Harbor,  Breton  Island. ...  99 

Gypsum  (.'ove.  Nova  Scotia 92 

Gwinu's  Island,  Virginia 227 

H 

Hadlock's  Harbor,  Maine 139 

Ha  Ha,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 9 

Ha  Ha  Bay,  Newfoundland 36 

B 


•f^mmmffm 


XflU 


INDBX. 


Page. 

Ha  Ha  Harbor,  Newfonndland 54 

Hail •IS 

Haldironnd  Cnpe.Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  84 

HaMimand  Port,  Nova  Scotia 116 

Haley's  Cove,  Isles  of  Shoals 158 

Half  Moon  Bay,  Jamaica 380 

Hair  Moon  Key,  Mosquito  Const 497 

Half  Way  Rock,  Maine 151 

Half  Way  Rock,  Massachusetts 163 

Halibut  Point,  Massachusetts 162 

Halifax,  Nova  Scotia 104,1 05 

Halt  Bay,  Patagonia 619 

Hamilton,  Bermudas 397 

Hamilton,  Golf  of  St.  Lawrence 87 

Hamper  Bay,  Patagonia 617 

Hampton  Harbor,  Newhnmpshire 1 59 

Hampton  Roads,  Virginia 224 

Hanover  Island,  Patagonia 6l6 

Hant's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Harbor  Briton,  Newfoundland 50 

Harbor  Buffet,  Newfoundland 42 

Harbor  Delute,  Maine 135 

Harbor  Femme,  Newfoundland.. . ....  48 

Harbor  Grace,  Newfoundland 17 

Harbor  Island,  Newfoundland 60 

Harbor  Island,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Harbor  Island,  West  Indies 299 

Harbor  La  Conte,  Newfoundland 48 

Harbor  Main,  Newfoundland 16 

Harbor  Mille,  Newfoundland ''8 

Harbor  of  Mercy,  Patagonia.  .598,  599.  (   -i 

Harbor  Parish,  Massachusetts 163 

Hare  Bay,  Newfoundtand 52 

Hare  Harbor,  Labrador... » 6 

Hare  Harbor,  Newfoundland 49 

Hardy's  Rock's  Massachusetts 1 64 

Harpaweli  Sound,  Maine 150 

Harrington    Harbor,   Prince    Edward's 

Island 95 

Harris  Bay,  Patagonia 580 

Hart  Islan'd,  New  York 198,  199 

Harwiek,  Massachusetts 173 

Harvey  Bay,  Patagonia 613 

Hatchett's  Reef,  New  York 199 

Hat  Island,  West  Indies... 400 

Hat  Key,  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Hatteras  Cape  and  Inlet,  North  Caro- 
lina  236 

Haute  Island,  Boy  of  Fundy 1 24 

Haut  Fond,  St.  Domingo 357 

Havana,  Cuba »325 

Havre  de  Grace,  Maryland  . . ., 234 

Hawke  Bay,  Labrador 4 

Hawke  Channel,  Florida 263 

Hawkins  Bay,  Patagonia 586 

Hawk's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 61 

Hayti,  West  Indies 346 

Head  Harbor,  Maine 135 

Head  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Head  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Heart's  Content  Harbor,  Newfoundland,  19 

Heath  Point,  Anticosti 78 

Hedge  Fence,  Massachusette 186 

Hell  Gate,  Now  York lyg 

Hen  and  Chickens,  Bahamas 255,  264 

Hen  and  Chickens^Delawave... »223 


Page. 

Henderson  Island,  Maine 147 

Hendrick's  Head,  Maine 150 

Heneagua  Island,  West  Indies 303 

Henlopen  Cape,  Virginia 217 

Henley  Island,  Labrador 1 

Henry,  Cape,  Virginia 226 

Hereford,  New  Jersey 209 

Hermanos  Islands,  West  Indies 449 

Hermitage  Bay,  Newfoundland 50 

Heme  Bay,  St.  Domingo 264 

Herring  Cove,  Massachusetts 170,  173 

Herring  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Herring  Gut  Harbor,  Maine 1 47 

Herring  Neck  Harbor,  Newfoundland..  31 

Hickman's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 20 

Hidden  Harbor,  Patagonia 587 

Hidden  Harbor,  St.  Domingo 349 

Highlands  of  Neversiuk.New  Jersey,209, 210 

High  Water 629 

Higuey,  West  Indies 374 

Hillsborough  Bay,  Prince  Edward's  Isl- 
and   94 

Hillsborough  Inlet,  Florida 260 

Hill's  Town,  Prince  Edward's  Island...  95 

Hinchinbroke  Rocks,  West  Indies 301 

Hodkin's  Cove,  Massachusetts 161 

Hog  Island,  Isles  of  Shonls 158 

Hog  Island,  Mississippi 275 

Hog  Island,  West  Indies 299 

Hogsties,  West  Indies 306 

Holandes  Channel,  New  Grenada 475 

Holandes  Point,  Cuba 338 

Holdernesse  Island,  Nava  Scotia 109 

Hole  in  the  Wall,  Bahamas 250 

Holland  Harbor.Prince  Edward's  Island,  95 

Holland's  Islands,  Maryland 230 

Iloilin's  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 104,  105 

Holloway  Sound,  Patagonia 615 

Holyrood  House,  Newfoundland 16 

Honda  River,  West  Indies 334 

Honduras ...468 

Honey  River,  West  Indies 334 

Hood  Port,  Cupe  Breton 96 

Hooper's  Straits,  Maryland 230 

Hooping  Harbor,  Newfoundland..  _. ... .  33 

Hope  Harbor,  Pntagonio 581,  600i 

Hornos  Island,  Brazil 517 

Horse  Islands,  Newfoundland..., J} 

Horse  Shoe,  No»a  Scotia 109 

Horse  Shoo,  Virginia 226 

Horton,  Nova  Scotia 124 

Hose  Harbor,  Patagonia 616 

Hospital  Rock,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  14,  74 
House  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.  72 

Housetima  River,  New  Grenada 49C' 

How  Harbor,  Newfoundland. 35 

Hubert's  Cove,  Nova  Scotia  . . . , 104 

Huevo  Island,  West  Indies 436 

Hull's  Cove,  Maine .139 

Humber  River,  Newfoundland 60 

Huntingdon  Harbor,  Labrador 6 

Huntington  Bay,  New  York .199 

Hurricane  Bay,  Bahamas 248 

Hussey'a  Sound,  Maine 151 

Hyannes,  MasaachusettB 178 

Hypocrite  Passage,  Massachusetts.,...  169 


T 

agt, 
.147 
.150 
..303 
.217 
.     1 
.226 
.209 
.449 
.  50 
.264 

173 
.113 
.147 
.  31 
.  20 
.587 
.349 
,210 
.629 
.374 
- 

.  94 
.260 
.  95 
.301 
.161 
.158 
.276 
.299 
.306 
.475 
.338 
.109 
.250 
\,  95 
.230 
,  106 
.615 
.  16 
.334 

.468 
.334 

.  96 

.230 
.   35 
,  6001 

.517 

.  a 

.109 

.226 
.124 
.616 
4,74 

».  72 
.49C 
.  35 
.104 
.436 
.139 

..  60 

..  6 
.199 
.248 

..151 
.178 

,.168 

dies ....... 

ndies 

land 

itts 170 

ne. ........ 

undland.... 

igo 

Edwnrd'8  h 

t  Indies.... 

irenada  . . . . 

Scotia 

ward's  Isliint 
d 

tia 104 

a 

idland 

\ 

diand....... 

Lawrence, ; 

oniida  .... 
id 

ft  ........ 

idor .,,,.. 

INDEX. 


XIX 


Page. 

I 

Icacos  Point,  Trinidad,  W.  1 433 

Ice,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 63 

Ichabouge  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 122 

Idaparatuba,  Urazil 527 

Ignacio  Bay,  Patngonia 613 

Iguape  River,  Brazil .543 

Ilha  Grande  Bay,  Brazil 539 

Incurucu  River,  Brazil 535 

Independent  Harbor,  Labrador 6 

Indian  Arm,  Newfoundland 23 

Indian  Cove,  Patagonia 604 

Indian  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101, 108 

Indian  Keys,  Cuba 340 

Indian  River  Shoal,  Cape  Henlopen  ...223 

Indian  Sound,  Patagonia 604 

Indies  River,  New  Grenada 484 

Ingornaclioix  Bay,  Newfoundland 61 

Ingram  River,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Inhabitant  Buy,  Nova  Scotia 92 

Inland  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Inraan  Bay,  Patagonia 586 

Ipswich,  Massachusetts 160 

Ipswich  Island,  Patngonia 601 

Irish  Point,  St.  Domingo 3fi9 

Ironbound  Island,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Iron  Island,  Newfoundland 44 

Isaac's  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 1 00 

Isabella  Island,  Patagonia 601 

Isabella  Point,  St.  Domingo 356 

Isla  Fuerto,  New  Grenada 470 

Island  Harbor,  Patngonia 619 

Island  of  St.  Paul,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  68 

Islas  de  Aves,  West  Indies 465 

Isle  au  Hiiut,  Maine, 140 

Isle  do  Mel,  Brazil 544 

Isles  of  Pines,  West  Indies.. 338,  339,  341 

Isles  of  Ramea,  Newfoundland 44 

Isles  of  Shoals,  New  England 157 

Isthmus  Bay,  Labrador 6 

Itncolomis  Rocks,  Brazil 535,  544 

Itnparica  Island,  Brazil 528,  536 

J 

Jackson's  Arm,  Newfoundland 32 

Jack  Taylor's  Roof,  Cuba 339 

Jncquemel,  St.  Domingo 350 

Jageno's  Islnnd,  Rnizil 5.39 

Jngeson'fl  Island,  Brazil 539 

Jagua  Harbor,  Cuba 335 

Jaguaripe  River,  Brazil 517 

Jamaica.  West  Indies 372 

Jnquet  Bank,  Newfoundland 12 

Jaragua  River,  Brazil 528 

Jardinellos.  West  Indies 338 

Jardines,  West  Indies 338,  343 

Jatibonica  River,  Cuba 333 

Javinal  Point,  Gulf  of  Mexico 285 

Jayna  Island,  (Milf  of  Mexico 284 

Jean  Ravel  Road,  St.  Domingo 362 

Jebouge  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 122 

Jedore  Harbor  and  Ledges,  Nova  Sco- 
tia   103,  104 

Jegogan  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Jekyl  Island,  Georgia 245 

Jeremie,  St.  Domingo 368 


Page. 

Jericoacoara,  Brazil 518 

Jerome  Channel,  Patagonia  .   589 

Jestico  Harbor,  Breton  Island 96 

Jesuit  Sound.  Patagonia 613 

Joceno,  Cuba 324 

Joe  Flogger  Shoal,  Delaware  Bay  ....220 

Joe's  Hole,  Mosquito  Coast 498 

John's  Bay  Harbor  and  Island,  Maine,  .145 

Jolie  Port,  Nova  Scotia 114 

Jolvos  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Jones'  Harbor,  Maine 136 

Jones'  Harbor,  Newfoundland 19 

Jordan  River,  Nova  Scotia 114 

Joujou  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Juragua  River.  Cuba 329 

Jururu  Port,  Cuba 320 

K 

Kate  Harbor,  Newfoundland 24 

Keel's  Harbor,  Newfoundland. 23 

I  Kelly  Harbor,  Patagonia 613 

I  Kempe  Harbor,  Patagonia 586 

Kennebeck,  Maine 1 49 

Kennebunk,  Maine 156 

Kent  Harbor,  Breton  Island 97 

Keppel  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 103 

Key  Andote,  Florida 268 

Key  Arenas,  Gulf  of  Mexico 282 

Key  Biscayno,  Florida  ..248,  260,  263,  264 

Key  Bivoras,  Florida 260 

Key  Bokel,  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Key  Francis,  West  Indies 322 

Key  Largo,  Florida 248,  260 

Key  Melcliior  Rodriguez,  Florida 260 

Key  Romano,  West  Indies 322 

Key  Sal,  West  Indies 257 

Key  Sanibel.  Florida 268 

Key  Tavernier,  Floiida 260 

Key  Verde,  Bahamas 256 

Key  West,  Florida 259,  266 

Kiinberly's  Reef,  New  York 197 

King  Islands,  Patngonia 582 

King's  Harbor.  Newfoundland 54 

Kingston  Bay,  St.  Vincent's,  W.  1 423 

Kingston,  Jamaica 373 

Kitty  Vitty.  Newfoundland 16 

Knowles'  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 103 


Labrador,  Coast  of 1 

Labrndin-  Harbor,  Gulf  of  ^'t.  Lawrence,     7 

La  Bras  d'Or,  Breton  Island 96 

La  Conte  Harbor,  Newfoundland 48 

La  Cone  Harbor,  Newfoundland 56 

Laguyra,  Venezuela 451 

Laguna  City,  Brazil 548 

Laguna,  Gulf  of  Mexico 2H8 

La  Hacho  City,  Venezuela 460 

La  Hune  Bay  and  Harbor,  Newfound- 
land  52,  53 

Lake  George,  Florida 246 

Lake  of  Terminos,  Gulf  of  Mexic. . .  .285 

Lake  Ponchartrain,  Louisiana 274 

La  Maire  Harbor,  Newfoundland 56 

Lambert's  Cove,  Massachusetts 187 

Lance  de  Loup,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,     8 
Lance  Point,  Newfoundland 39 


»• 


filifWipBPW^I^ 


imf I       I    niw!r-»^||p|B|jpp 


i"»"tfP*Wi^ 


«iip(pi^ii^ui«i«u<ui.  < 


XX 


INDBX. 


fv 


Lance  Union  Cove,  Newfoundland ....  33 

Landfnll  Islands,  Patagonia 600 

Land  Breezes *17 

Lan^iira  Buy,  Patiigoniu 5'J'i 

L' AiiKuille  IhIo,  St.  Domingo 353 

Langloy  Island,  Newfoundliind 46 

L'Anse  a  I'onu,  St.  Domingo 368 

L'Anse  u  I'eHU,  West  Indies 30') 

La  Perclie  Hmbor,  Newfoundland 42 

La  Poile  Buy,  Newfoundland 55 

Laredo  Bay,  Patagonia 577 

Largo  Key,  West  Indies 339 

Lark  Hal  l)or,  Newfoundland 60 

La  Scie  Harbor,  Newfoundland 31 

La  Tete  Harbor,  Now  Brunswick 127 

Latitudes  and  Longitudes 633 

Latitude  Bay,  Patagonia 600 

Latour  Port,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Laura  Basin,  Patagonia 601 

La  Vaclie,  St.  Domingo .351 

Lavandera  ShonI,  New  Grenada 477 

Lavanderas,  West  Indies 256 

Lavantados  Shoal,  St.  Domingo 354 

Latin  Buy  and  l8liinds,Newfoundland,45,  46 

Leading  Hill,  Patagoiiii 604 

LeiiniltM- SJioal,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence..   1)2 

Lel)iiinclie  River,  West  Indies 4.'i2 

L'Eliert  Port.  Nova  Scotia 114 

Lediies,  Nova  Scotia 105 

Le  Diamaiit  Isle,  .St.  Dnmingo 35;i 

Leeward  Bay,  Patanonin 617 

Leeward  It;|iinds,  West  Indies 3'}3 

Leeward  Stocking  Isliiiul,  West  Indies. 301 

Le  (losier  Town,  Maitini(|ue 410 

Le  Hare  River,  Nova  .Scotia 112 

Leitli  Harbor,  No.'a  Scotia 108 

Le  Mouton,  St.  Domingo 353 

Lennox  Island,  Patagonia 60G 

LeproHu  Point,  New  Brunswick 127 

Le  Regalt  Isle,  St.  Domingo 353 

Lernm.  Gulf  of  Mexico 28R 

Les  Alcatrnzes,  Brazil 341 

Level  Bay,  Patagonia 61<J 

Life  Saving  Benevolent  Association  ...214 

Lighthouses xxiii 

Lime  Key,  West  Indies 374 

Lime  River,  Cuba 332 

Lingan,  Breton  Island 98 

Liunyard  Bay,  Bahamas 250 

Lion's  Den,  Newfoundland 25 

Liscomb  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Little  Adventure  Cove,  Newfoundland.  26 

Little  Bahama  Bank 248 

Little  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 8 

Little  Cape  Mongon,  St.  Domingo 319 

Little  Catalina  Bay,  Newfoundland  ....  21 

Litiie  Cat  Arms,  Newfoundland 33 

Little  Catt  Island,  West  Indies 301 

Little  Corn  Island,  New  Grenada 468 

Little  Coney  Arms,  Newfoundland  ....  32 

Little  Cumberland  Island,  Georgia 245 

Little  Egg  Harbor,  New  Jersey 217 

Little  Exuma  Island,  West  Indies 301 

Little  Fish  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence      9 

Little  Flamingo  Bay,  St.  Domingo  ....353 
Little  Fogo  Islands,  Newfoundland  ....  30 


Page. 
Little  Gallows  Harbor,  Newfoundland..  43 

Little  George's  Bank 133 

Little  Gonave  Isle,  St   Domingo 367 

Little  Harbor  Deep,  Newfoundland....  33 
Little  Harbor,  Newfoundland. . .  .15.  41,  65 

Little  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia. 103 

Little  Meneagua,  West  Indies 307 

Little  Isaacs,  Bahamas 255 

Little  Mark  Island,  Maine 150 

Little  Mataeumbe,  Florida 260 

Little  Miquelon  Island,  Newfoundland.  46 
Little  Mortier  Bay,  Newfoundland  ....  44 
Little  Paradise  Harbor,  Newfoundland.  42 
Little  Plaoentiu  Harbor,  Newfoundland.  40 
Little  Quirpon  Harbor,  Newfoundland. .  35 
Little  Kaslico,  Prince  Edward's  Island.  95 

Little  River,  Maine 135 

Little  Round  Harbor,  Newfoundland...  31 
Little  Round  Shoal,  Massachusetts  . . .  .176 
Little  .Sandy  Harbor.  Newfoundland...  41 
Little  South  Harbor,  Newfoundland  ...  41 
Little  St.  Lawrence,  Newfoundland  ...   45 

Little  Turk,  W^est  Indies 315 

Little  Wutts  Island.  Maryland 229 

l.ivisB  Harbor,  Cuba 319 

Liverpool  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Lloyd's  Neck,  New  York 196 

Lolios  Island,  Brazil 554 

Lobos  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 295 

Lobster  Harbor,  Newfoundland 32 

Lobster  Rocks,  MassHchusetIs 161 

Lodazur.  Gulf  of  Mexico 289 

Lom;is  Key,  Patagonia 579 

Londoiideriy,  Nova  Scotia 124 

Loniloner's  Rock.  Isle  of  Shoals 158 

Louij  Beach,  New  Jersey 216 

Long  Branch,  New  Jersey 209,  216 

Long  Harbor,  Newfoundland 48 

Long  Island,  Bahanuis 248 

Long  Island  Bay,  New  Brutiswick  . , .  .188 
Long  Island  Harbor,  Newfoundland  ...  51 

Long  Island,  Newfoundland 25 

Long  Island,  New  York 208 

Long  Island,  Nova  .'^cotia 123 

Long  Island,  West  Indies 301 

Long  Islands,  Newfoundland 25 

Long  Island  Sound,  New  York 196 

Long  Reach,  Patagonia 622 

Long  Spit,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 70 

Long's  Wharf,  Jamaica 376 

Lookout,  Cape,  North  Carolina 237 

Lord  Nelson  Strait,  Patagonia 610 

Lounging  Island,  Isle  of  Shoals 158 

Love  Key,  Florida 262,  266 

Lua  River,  New  Grenada 494 

Lucea  Harbor,  Jamaica 381 

Lunenburgh  Bay,  Nova  Scotiu Ill 

Lurcher  Rock,  Nova  Scotia 122 

Lynch's  Bay,  Trinidad 435 

Lynhaven  Bay,  Virginia 225,  226 

M 

Macao  Town,  St.  Domingo 347 

Macayo  Town,  Brazil 528 

Mace's  Bay.  New  Brunswick 127 

Machapungo  Shoalb,  Delawai-e  River  .  .223 
Machias,  Maine 136 


INDBX. 


xxi 


Page. 

Mnchos  Key,  Cuba 332 

Mnckernl  Cove,  Rhode  Island 193 

Mnckensio  Slionl,  Nova  Scotia 90 

Mac  Nab's  Island,  Nova  Scotia 10(i 

Mncouria  River,  Guyana 510 

Macuto  Town,  Vont'/.uela 457 

Madagascar  Shoal,  Gulf  of  Mexico. . .  .287 

Madeira  Inland,  Brazil 539 

Magalhuen,  Straits  of  . .  .565,  579.  589,  595 

[621,  623 

Magdalen  Islands,  Newfoundland 69 

Magdalen  River,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  S6 

Magdalen  River,  Venezuela 459 

Magdalen  Sound,  Patagonia 581 

Magothy  River,  Maryland 234 

Mahon,  Delaware 220 

Mahone  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 110 

Majana  Port,  Cuba 317 

Mojorfield,  New  Brunswick 127 

Malaquasli,  Nova  Scotia Ill 

Mttlaqueta  Bay,  Cuba 321 

Mai  Bay,  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence 82 

Mai  Bay,  NewfoK.idlaPd 38 

Mnldonado,  Brazil 551 

Malpec  Harbor,  Prince  Edward's  Island,  95 

Manan  Islands,  New  Brunswick 127 

Mamin  Ledges.  Bay  of  Fundy 129 

Manare,  Colombia 447 

Mannti  Harbor.  Cuba 321 

Mancheigun  Island,  Maine 145 

Manchester,  Massachusetts 165 

Manchioneid  Point,  St.  Domingo 357 

Manduba  Point,  Brazil 541 

Manduga,  New  (Jrenada 474 

Mangrove  Islands,  Florida 259 

Manoel  Luiz  Shoal.  Brazil 520 

Man  of  War  Bay,  West  Indies 430 

Man  of  War  Keys,  New  Grenada  . . .  .490 

Manzanares  River,  Colombia 442 

Manzanilla.  Cuba 331 

Manzanilla  Bay.  St.  Domingo 357,  3(53 

Manzanilla  Harbor.  New  Grenada 479 

Manzanilla  Point.  West  Indies 432 

Marabona  Bay,  .Jamaica 382 

Maraccas  Bay,  West  Indies 4:!0 

Mnracaybo,  Venezuela 451 

Maracu'no  Inlet,  Brazil 523 

Maranbaya,  Brazil 538 

Maranham,  Brazil 520 

Maravi,  Port,  Cuba 318 

Marhlolioiul.  Mussac-huHotts 165 

JMarch  Harbor,  Patagonia 603 

Marcus  Hook.  Delaware  River 220 

Mnrearet's  Bay,  Nova  Scotia, 108 

Margnritta  Island,  Colombia 442 

Maria  (Jorda  Bay,  Cuba 338 

Marian's  Cove,  Patagonia 594 

Maria  Town.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ...   87 

Marice  Islands,  Brazil 531 

Marie  Galante,  West  Indies 411 

Mariol.  Colombia 345 

Marigot  Ray.  West  Indies 400 

Mariguann,  West  Indies 307 

Maroni  R iver.  Guyana 510 

Marowyno  River,  (inyana 603 

Marquese  Key,  Florida 259 

Mark  Island,  Maine 151 


Page. 

Marshall  Point,  Maine.. 147 

Marsh  Isle,  Louisiana 280 

Martha  Brae  Harbor,  .Tamoica 382 

Martha's  Vineyard.  Massachusetts  . . .  .185 

Martine's  River,  Cuba 337 

Martinique,  West  Iriflies 413 

Martin  Va»'  Rocks,  Brazil 629 

Masio  Harbor.  Cuba 334 

Mason's  Bay,  New  Brunswick 127 

Massacre  River.  St.  Domingo 363 

Matagorda,  Gulf  of  Mexico 281 

Matahambre  Bay,  Cuba 336 

Mata  Harbor,  Cuba 317 

Matinilla  Reef,  Bahamas 249 

Matonzas,  Cuba 324 

Matanzas,  Florida 261 

Matapoisett  Harbor,Massachusett8, 191, 192 

Maternillos  Point.  Cuba "21 

Matinicns  Island,  Maine 140 

Matomkin  Harbor,  Delaware 223 

Matoon  Point,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Maud's  Bank,  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Maugor  Key.  Mof  quito  Coast 497 

Mayaguana,  West  Indies 307,  308 

Mayaguez,  West  Indies 388 

May,  Cape,  New  . Jersey 217,  218 

Mayero  Bay.  West  Indies 432 

May  Point.Newfoundland 87 

Mavuana,  Bahamas 249 

McCobb's  Island,  Maine 145 

McCrie's  Shoal,  Capo  May 218 

Mecatina  Harbor  and  Island,  Gulf  of  St. 

Lawrence 10 

Mecklenburgh  Harbor,  Labrador 2.  3 

Medicasa  Point,  Cuba. 337 

Medway  River,  Georgia 242 

Megere's  Island.  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

MflviJle  Sound,  Patagonia 582 

Memory  Rock,  Bahamas 249 

Merasheen  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  42 

Merchantman  Harbor,  Labi  ad  )r 3 

Merida,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Merigonish  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 91 

Merrimack  River.  Massachusetts 159 

Met  way.  Port.  Nova  Scotia 112 

Middle  Arm,  Newfoundland 32 

Middleburgh,  Guyana 511 

Middle  Cape,  Patagonia 608 

Middle  ({round.  Long  Island  Sound  . . .  .200 

Middle  Passage,  Maine 1 34 

Middle  Race  Rock.  Long  Island  Sound. 203 

Milford  Haven,  Breton  Island 99 

Minchin's  Cove.  Newfoundland 25 

Miniit's  Ledge,  Massachusetts 170 

Miragoane,  St.  Domingo 368 

Mirainichi  Bay,  New  Brunswick 88 

Mira-por-vos  Shoal,  West  Indies 304 

iVTiray  Bay,  Breton  Island 98 

Misequash  River.  Nova  Scotia T25 

Misery  Island.  Massachusetts 163 

Mistaken  Cove,  Newfoundland 63 

Mistanogue  Bay,  Gnlf  of  St.  Lawrence,      8 

Misteriosa  Bank.  Mosquito  Coast 497 

Mississippi  River 278 

Moa.  Cu ba 319 

Moal,  Gnadaloupe,  West  Indies 412 

Mobile  Bay,  Alabama 278 


xxn 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Mobinck  Bay,  Virginia 'iU6 

Mocnino  Hnrbor,  ColunibJB 447 

Muela  iHJiiiid,  tiiOKJl 541 

Morin  iHland  and  FuBsago,  WeHt  Indies,  346 

iVlonii  iMJunda,  West  Indies 43.5 

Moniis  SIiohI,  Cuba 33'J 

Modus  iHJand,  Culumbiii 448 

Muniliu  K<iy,  Cuba 323 

Munitu  Igjiiiid,  West  Indies 346 

MonuHKiy  Point,  Miissacliusetts 177 

Muntu  Clirisii  Bunli  and  Kuad,  St.  Do- 
mingo   357,  363 

MontPgo  Bay,  Jamaica 381 

Monte  Video,  Brazil 551, 555,  56'J 

Montociv  Poi-  „  New  Yorlt 200,  215 

Montu8o,  West  Indies 388 

MouUerrat.  West  Indies 408 

Monument,  Brazil 531 

Monument  River,  Massachusetts 1*J0 

Moos*!-n-beck  Head,  Maine 136 

Moose  Inland,  Maine 135 

Mora  River,  Cuba 336 

Morant  Point,  Jamaica 373 

Morant  Keys,  West  Indies 370 

Morne  Ruuge,  St.  Domingo 350  j 

Morris  Cove,  Newl'uundland 26 

Morris  Island,  South  Carolina 210,  241  i 

Morro  Castle,  Cuba 325 


Pafte. 

Naah'a  Island,  Maine 13H 

Nassau  Bay,  Patagonia G05 

Nassau  iHlands,  Patagonia 585 

Nassau,  West  Indies , 300 

Navasas  Port,  Cuba 318 

Navasa.  West  Indies 370 

Nave  Bay,  St.  Domingo 349 

Navy  Bay,  New  Orenado 480 

Necumkey  Clit)',  Massachusetts 187 

Neddock,  Capo,  Maitio 155 

Ned,  Cape,  Newfoundland 121 

Ned's  Point,  Masctachusetts 191 

Negril  Harbor,  Jamaica 380 

Negrillo  Shoal,  Venezuela. 464 

Negro  Island,  Maine 155 

Negr.)  Point,  Martinique 421 

Netsbuctoke,  Labrador 6 

Newman's  Sound,  Newfoundland 25 

Neuse  River,  North  Carolina 236 

Neuva  Island,  (iulf  of  Mexico '.284 

Neversink,  Highlands  of,  New  Jersey.. 209 

Nevis  Island,  West  Indies 402 

New  Bedford.  Massachusetts 188 

New  Brunswick 120 

Newbury  port,  Massachusetts 158 

New  Carlise,  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence  ....  87 

New  Castle,  New  Brunswick 88 

New  Ferrolle  Bay,  Newfoundland 62 


Mortier  Bay,  Newfoundland 44  i  Newfoundland,  Grand  Bank  of 12 


Moselle  Shoal,  Bahamas 255 

Mosquito  Coast 468,  4'J5 

Mosquito  Cove,  Jamaica 381 

Mowquito  Harbor,  Maine 148 

Mosquito  Harbor,  Newfoundland 53 

Mosquito  Inlet,  Florida 246 

Mossu  Town,  Brazil 535 

Mouchoir  Quarre  Shoal,  West  Indies  .  .315 

Mount  Boqueron,  Patagonia 581 

Mount  Buckland.  Patagonia 560 

Mount  Dosert  Island,  Maine 138,  13'J 

Mount  Pond,  Patagonia 587 

Mount  Prospect,  Long  Island  Sound  .,  .215 

Moustrque  Key,  St.  Domingo 353 

Moutoii,  Port,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Mulas  Point,  Cuba 320 

Murgnin  Bay.  Breton  Island 98 

Murr  I:*liin(ls,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ...   10 

Muscle  Harbor,  Newfoundland 42 

Muscle  Ridge,  Maine 144 

Mushaboon  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 102 

Muskeket  Channel,  Massathusatts  ...  .184 

Musketeers,  New  Grenada 48'J 

Musquiisli  Harbor,  New  Brunswick 127 

Mutton  Bay,  Newfoundland 38 

N 

Nantasket  Roads,  Massachusetts 167 

Naiilicoke  River,  Marybind    229 

Nantucket  Hnrijor  and  Itiland,  Miissacliu- 

Sfll'* 178,  181 

Nantucket  Slioids,  Miissachusutls 176 

Naraiijo  Port,  Cub 3jn 

Narhorougli  Pecketl's  Hiubor,  Fatugoniao76 
Narraaarisiitt  Bay,  Rhiide  Inland. . .  153,  J'J3  | 
Narriiw  (Juiigt^s  Harbor,  Maine 137 


Newfoundland,  Gulf  of 37 

Newfoundland  Island 12 

New  Hampshire 166 

New  Harbor  Lodges.  Maine 145 

New  Harbor,  Newfoundland  . . .  .27,  28,  48 

New  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101 

New  Haven,  Connecticut 207 

New  Inlet,  North  Carolina 237,  238 

New  Jersey 216 

New  London,  Connoclicut 205,  206 

New  London,  New  Brunswick 95 

Newman  Inlet,  Patagonia 615 

New  Meadows,  Maine 150 

New  Perlican  Harbor.  Newfoundland..   19 

New  Point  Comfort,  Virginia 226 

Newport,  Rliode  Island 192,  194 

Newport  River,  (Jeorgia 234 

Nt!W  Providence,  West  Indies 2^9 

New  Shoal,  New  (Jrenada 489 

New  South  Shdol,  Nantucket 182 

New  Smyrna,  Florida 261 

New  Topsail  Inlet,  North  Carolina  . . .  .237 

New  York, 209,  210 

Nicaragua,  Coast  of 483 

Nicholas  Shoal,  Cuba 323 

Nick's  Mate,  Massachusetts 168 

Nipe  Harlior,  Cuba 319 

Nipisi^lif  Roads,  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence  .   87 

Nipi)er's  Harbor,  Newfounilhind 31 

NoliH(|uo  Point,  Massiicluisi'tts 177 

Noddy  Harbor,  Newfoundland 36,  63 

Nt.ir  Island.  Piilagoina 601 

Nouibro  di'  Dies  Ilarljor,  Now  Grenada. 476 

Noll  Entry  Bay,  Patagonia 580 

Nonsucli  Harbor,  Antigua 404 

Norfolk,  Virginia 225 


Nashawina,  Massachusetts 188  I  Norman,  Cnpo,  Newfoundland 36 

Nash  Harbor,  Patagonia 589 1  Norman's  Island,  West  Indies 397 


INDBX. 


XXUl 


Pagt. 

NorniRn'fl  Woe,  MnsitachuHetts 163 

Nouvelle  Harbor,  Ouif  of  St.  Lawrence.  87 

Nova  Scotia 88,  120 

Nova  Scotia  Hiiiika 11!) 

North  Anuliorago,  I'atagonia ....583 

Noi'tli  Hroad  Oovo,  Newfoundland 2G 

North  (^ipe,  (Juif  of  St.  Lawrence 74 

North  Cove,  Patat^onia 603 

Nortli  Dumplin,  ('onnecticut 195 

Nortli-easl  Arm,  Newl'oundland ,.   bb 

North  Kddisto,  South  (.'arohna 24 1 

North  Harbor,  Labrador 6 

North  Harbor,  Newfoundland. . .  .35,  30,  41 

North  Inlet,  South  Carolina 23'J 

North  Point,  Maryland 233 

Northport,  Maine 141 

North  Reef,  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence 81 

Northumberland  Str-iit,  New  Hrunswick  88 

North-west  Arm,  Newfoundland 28 

North-west  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 109 

Nueva  Kiver,  Cuba 33f> 

Niievas  (irandes  Port,  Cuba 321 

Nuevas  liiver.  West  Indies 340 

Nuevitas.  Cuba 321 

Nutlaml  Hay,  Patagonia 583 

Nyatt  Point,  Rhode  Island 194 

O 

Oar  Bay,  Newfoundland 53 

Oake  Bay,  Patagonia 616 

Oak  Island,  Long  Island 215 

Oak  Island,  North  Carolina 23'J 

Oasy  Harbor,  Patagonia 576 

Observation,  Cape,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  80 
Observation  River,  Culf  of  St.  Lawrence  79 

Obstruction  Sound,  Patagonia 61C 

Occasional  Harbor,  Labrador 4 

Ocho  Rios,  Jamaica 382 

Ocoa  Point,  Cuba 327 

Ocoa  River.  St.  Domingo 349 

Ocracock,  North  Carolina 236 

Ocumara  Island,  Venezuela 452 

Odiome's  Point,  Now  Hampshire 156 

OgHochee  River,  (Jeorgia 244 

Oil  Spot,  New  York 210 

Okonofrisky  River,  Florida 269 

OInndes  Point,  Cuba 338 

Old  Cape  Francois,  St.  Domingo 355 

Old  Ferrolle  Island,  Newfoundland  ....   62 

Old  Harbor,  .lamaica 376 

Old  Harry  Head,  (Julf  ofSt.  Lawrence.   70 

Old  .Jerusalem.  West  Indies 394 

Old  Man,  Nantucket 187 

Old  Man's  Bay,  Newfoundland 53 

Old  iMatecumbe,  Florida 260 

Old  Point  Comfort,  Virginia 'J25 

Old  Port  au  Clioix,  Newfoundland 61  | 

01(1  Toisail  Inlet,  North  Carolina 2,?7  ' 

Old  Town.  (}iilf  of  Mexico -.'95 

Old  Slioal,  Nantucket Irtl 

Old  Silas,  Now  York 201 

Old  Stnge  Ilaibor.  Massachusetts 177 

Olinda  City,  Brazil 526 

Omoa,  New  (xreiiiida 494 

On^ilow,  New  Brunswick 124 

Open  Bay,  Patagonia 619 

Ora  Cabeca,  Jamaica 382 


PaK*' 

Orange  Bay,  Jamaica 380 

Orange  Bay,  Newfoundland 33 

Orange  Bay,  Patagonia (j04 

Orange  Keyi,  Bahamas 262 

Orchila  Island,  Venezuela 454 

Orinoco  River 60,3,  606,611,512 

Orleans,  Massachusetts 173 

Orotoire  River,  West  Indies 432 

Orphan  Island,  Maine 144 

( )rtii6  Bank,  Brazil 562 

(Jruba  Island,  West  Indies 456 

( )8orno  iiay,  Patagonia 592 

Ossabp.u,  (leorgia 244 

Oswald  Keys,  Florida .262 

Otter  Bay,  Newfoundland 66 

Otter  Island,  Maine 146 

Otway  Bay,  Patagonia , 604 

Outer  Bank,  Newt()undland 12 

Outer  Bay,  New  Brunswick 88 

Ovidos,  (luyana 501 

Owl's  Head  Harbor,  Maine 144 

Owl's  Head,  Nova  Scotia   103, 109 

Ox  Island,  (iulf  of  Mexico 289 

Oyapoc  River,  (»uyana   508 

Oyster  Bay,  Long  Island 198 

Oyster  Pond  Point.  Long  Island 207 

Ozama  River,  St.  Domingo 347 

P 

Padre  Harbor,  Cubo 321 

Padre  Point,  Cuba '. 335 

Palmer's  Island,  Massachusetts 188 

Palanca  Key,  Cuba 336 

Palamas  Key,  Cuba 322 

Palona  Island,  Brazil 555 

Pamlico  River  and  Sound,  North  Caro- 
lina  236 

Pampntar,  Colombia 444 

Pampatar.  Venezuela 466 

Paquet  Harbor,  Newfoundland 31 

Para,  Brazil 523 

Paradise  Sound,  Newfoundland 42 

Paraguay  River,  Brazil 551 

Para  Island,  Brazil 537 

Paramaribo  River,  (luj'ana  .  504 

Paranagua  Bay,  Brazil 544 

Parana  River,  Brazil 551 

Parham  Town,  Antigua 406 

Park  Bay,  St.  Domingo 367 

Park  Bay,  Patagonia 581 

Parkham  Town,  Antigua 404 

Parry  Harbor,  Patagonia 580 

Parsborough  River.  Nova  Scotia 124 

Passa  del  Caballo,  (iulf  of  Mexico 281 

Passaniaquoddy  Bay,  Maine 134 

Passe  n  I'Outre,  Louisiana 277 

Passage  Islet,  West  Indies 303 

Passages,  West  Indies 397 

Pass  Island,  Newfoundland 510 

Pasto(|uash  Rivor,  North  Carolina 237 

I'atngonia 565 

Patridge  Island,  New  Brunswick 126 

Patuxent  River,  Maryland 231 

Pauronia  River,  Guyana  511 

I'awcaluck  Rivor,  Connecticut 196 

Peake  Bay,  Jamaica 377,  379 

Peak  of  Orizaba,  Gulf  of  Mexico  ..291,  294 


IP 


"tm 


T" 


•»rT»!ni»w(i,^«  wii^i>(|i,»W'.  I , 


XXIV 


INDEX. 


i 


Page. 

Peak  of  Tarqnino,  Jamaica 382 

Pea  Patch,  Delaware  Bay 220 

Pearl  Lagooo,  New  Grenada 487 

Pearl  Reef,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 72 

Pedro  Bay,  Jamaica 379 

Pc  dro  Key,  West  Indies 379 

Pee!  Inlet,  Patngoniii '>18 

Pelican  Keys,  Bahamas , 251 

Penguin  Islands,  Ne\^foundland 52 

Penguin  Island,  Paiagonia 568 

Penikese  Island,  Massachusetts 188 

Penniston  Island,  West  Indies 393 

PeomequidHarbortS.;  Point,  Maine,  145, 146 

Penobscot  Bay,  Maine 140,  144 

Penobscot  River,  Maine 141 

Pensacola,  Florida 271 

Perce  Town  and  Rock,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence     82 

Perkins'  Island,  Maine 14!) 

Pernambuco.  Brazil 525 

Petcudia  River,  Nova  Scotia 125 

Petit  Bois  Island,  Alabama 273 

Petite  Goave  Bay,  St.  Domingo 368 

Petite  Iron,  St.  Domingo 368 

Petite  Terre  Island,  West  Indies 410 

Petit  Fort  Harbor,  Newfoundland 42 

Petit  Passage,  Newfoundland 123 

Petty  Harbor,  Labrador 2 

Petty  Harbor,  Newfoundland 15 

Petuxent,  Rhode  Island 294 

Phillipsburgh,  West  Indies 400 

Picarre  Harbor,  Newfoundland 51 

Pickersgill  Cove,  Patagonia 603 

Pickle  Bank.  West  Indies 385 

Picolonaya  River,  Brazil 551 

Pictou  Island  and  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia  .   90 

Pictou  Opening,  Patti  ;jnia 612 

Piedras  Keys,  Cuba. . '. 323,  325 

Pigeon  Cove,  Newfoundland 35 

Pine  Islands,  Florida 259 

Piney  Point,  Maryland 230 

Pine's  Key,  West  Indies 313 

Piper's  Hole,  Newfoundland 41 

Pirasonungo  Point,  Brazil 540 

Pistolet  Bay,  Newfoundland 36 

Pitt's  Harbor,  Labrador 1 

Pitt's  Town,  West  In, lies 302 

Placentia  Bay  and  Harbor,  Newfound- 
land   39,  40 

Plana  Keys,  West  Indies 307 

Phinlatluii  Keys,  New  (irenada 482 

Plaster  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 92 

Plate  Cove,  Newfoundland 23 

Plate  River,  Brazil 538 

Platform,  St.  Domingo 3(i  1 

Playa  de  Miel.  Cuba 317 

Playa  Parda  Cove,  Patagonia 593 

Pleasant  Bay,  (iuif  of  St.  Lawrence. ...  72 

Pleasant  Bay,  Maine 136,  137 

Pleasant  Bay,  Massachusetts 175 

Plumb  Gut  and  Island,  J^ong  Island,  203,  206 

Plum  Island,  Massachusetts 158 

Plum  Point,  Jamaica 373,  377 

Plymouth,  Massachusetts 171,  172 

Pochick  Rip,  Nantucket IH' 

Pocillos,  Cuba 338 

PockliDgton  Island,  Labrador 1 


Page. 

Poco  Harbor,  Brazil 526 

Pocoraocke  Bay,  Maryland 229 

Pocomo,  Massachusetts 179 

Pocosin,  Virginia 226 

Poge,  Cape,  Massachusetts 179 

Pogwash  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 89 

Point  Macon,  St.  Domingo 353 

Point  Alderton,  Massachusetts 167 

Point  il  Petre,  (iuadaloupe 410 

Point  au  Fer,  Lotiisiana 281 

Point  au  Gaul,  Newfoundlund 16 

Point  Barracos,  Cuba 329 

Point  Baranca,  Patagonia 575 

Point  Bernal,  Gn!f    f  Mexico 294 

Point  Brava,  Brazil 555 

Point  Brava,  Cuba 321 

Point  Brazo  Ancho,  Patagonia 619 

Point  Bynoe,  Patagonia 612 

Point  del  Tuna,  Colombia 444 

Point  Desconocida,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Point  des  Irois,  St.  Domingo 369 

Point  Esj)inello,J}razil 557 

Point  Ferrolle,  Newfoundland 62 

Point  (taleota.  West  Indies 432 

Point  Guanico,  Cuba 319 

Point  Indio,  Braz-i 556,  564 

Point  Itapacoroya,  Brazil 643 

Poitit  Jaragua,  Cuba 318 

Point  .Jarmal,  (J  u  If  of  Mexico 285 

Point  Judith,  Rhode  Island 192,  193 

Point  Lance,  Newfoundland 39 

Point  Lepreau,  New  Brunswick 127 

Point  Liana,  Cuba 337 

Point  los  Morillos,  Gulf  of  Mexico 290 

Point  Lucretia,  Cuba 320 

Point  Macao,  St.  Domingo 347 

Point  Maconba,  Martinique 420 

Point  Manabi(|ue,  Now  (Jrenada 494 

Point  Manare,  Venezuela 460 

Point  Manduri,  Brazil 545 

Point  Manzanilla,  Venezuela 454 

Point  iMaternillos.  Cuba 321 

Poitit  IMay,  Newfoundland 47 

Point  Milford  l\ees,  Patagonia 615 

Point  Mulas,  Cuba 318 

Point  Nasio,  St.  Domingo 348 

Point  Negro.  Mrazil 555 

Point  No  Point,  Long  Island  .Sound. . .  .197 

Point  No  Point,  Maryland 231 

Point  Peter,  (iulfof  St.  Lawrence 83 

Point  Peris.  .St.  Domingo 364 

Point  Piedras,  Cuba 337 

Point  J\ich,  N(!wt()nn(lliind 61 

Point  .Santa  Atina,  Patagonia 578 

Point  St.  Juan,  Venezuela 453 

I'oiiit  St.  Mary,  Patagonia 577 

Point  Ubero,  Venezni'la 454 

Point  Vaj'-ncia.  New  Grenada 483 

Ptiint  Xiealanjio,  (lulf  of  Mexico 284 

Point  Ytapeiia,  Brazil 543 

Pollock  Reef,  Maj^sachusetts 176 

Pollack  Shoi'',  Nova  Scotia 104 

Pomket  HarlKM',  Nova  .Scotia 91 

Ponce,  V^cist  Indies 387 

Poole  Island,  .Maryland 234 

Pope's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 20 

Pope's  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 103 


mmi^mmF 


m 


mm 


mm 


mmtimmm 


INDEX. 


XXV 


Page. 

536 

i 229 

179 

226 

s 179 

;otia 89 

353 

setts 167 

410 

281 

Hid 16 

329 

575 

CO 294 

555 

321 

)niii 619 

612 

444 

Mexico 284 

;o 369 

■ 557 

ind 62 

.432 

,..319 

556.  564 

543 

318 

CO 285 

192,  193 

1 39 

wick 127 

337 

klexico 290 

320 

347 

420 

nadii 494 

460 

545 

1 454 

321 

47 

nil 615 

318 

348 

555 

I  Sound.,.. 197 

231 

'rence 83 

364 

■ 337 

61 

& 578 

453 

577 

454 

11 483 

tico 284 

543 

176 

104 

Y 91 

387 

234 

id 20 

103 


Page. 

Poplar  Island,  Maryland 233 

Poplar  Point,  Rhode  Island 194 

Porotvpine,  Cape,  Nova  Scotia 92 

Porpoise,  Cnpe,  Maine , 155 

Port  I'Eftu,  St.  Domingo 362 

Port  Antonio,  Jamaica 383 

Port  a  Port,  Newfoundland 58 

Port  au  Basque,  Newfoundland 56 

Port  au  Choix,  Newfoundland 61 

Port  au  Prince,  St.  Domingo 366,  367 

Port  Bonaventure,  Newfoundland 20 

Port  Cabnllo,  Venezuela 457 

Port  Castries,  West  Indies 421 

Port  Cavannas,  Cuba 345 

Port  Cayaguaneque,  Cuba 318 

Port  Cliarlotte,  Labrador 3 

Port  Churucca,  Patagonia 597 

Port  Clerke,  Patagonia 603 

Port  Cook,  Patagonia 580 

Port  Dauphin,  St.  Domingo 357,  358 

Port  de  (irave  Bay,  Newfoundland 17 

Port  Desire,  Patagonia 567 

Port  d'Espngne,  Trinidad 435 

Port  El  Roqno,  Venezuela 455 

Port  Escondido,  Cuba 328 

Port  Famine,  Patagonia 578,  622 

Port  Francois,  St.  Domingo 3C0 

Portgriive,  Newfoundland 17 

Port  Ilaldimand.  Nova  Scotia IIC 

Port  Henry.  Patagonia 611,  616 

Port  Hood,  Cape  Breton  Island 96 

Port  Jolie,  Nova  Scotia 114 

PortLagunn,  Gulf  of  Mexico 288 

Portland  Harbor,  West  Indies 303 

Portland,  Jamaica 377 

Portland,  Maine 115 

Port  L'Evert,Nova  Scotia 114 

Port  iNFiinham,  Labrador 2 

Port  Maria,  Jamaica 383 

Port  Mariol,  Cuba 45 

Port  Mntoon,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Port  Maxwell,  Patagonia GOG 

Port  Metwny,  Nova  Scotia 112 

Port  Mora  lit,  Jamaica 384 

Port  Moustiquo,  St.  Domingo 362  i 

Port  Mouton,  Nova  Scotia 113! 

Port  Naras,  Cuba 318; 

Porto  Bello.  Now  (Trenada 477  i 

Porto  Cabello,  Venezuela 453  \ 

Porto  Eico,  West  Indies 385,  380 

Porto  Seciiro,  Brazil 537 

Port  Otway,  Patagonia 615,  GIG 

Porto  Volo,  New  (Jrenada 477 

Port  Paix,  St,  Domingol 3C1,  362 

Port  Piinent,  St.  Domingo 3G4 

Port  Plata,  St.  Domingo 356 

Port  Kosoway,  Novn  Scotia 114 

Port  Royal,  Jamaica 373,  377 

Port  Ivoyal,  New  (ironndii, 402 

Port  Royal.  South  Carolina 242 

Port  Santa  Haibara.  Patagonia 616 

Port  San  Antonio,  Patagonia 57!) 

Port  Saunders.  Newfoundland Gl 

Portsmouth.  Dominica 312 

Portsmouth,  Now  Hampshire 156 

Port  St.  Elena,  Patagonia 565 

Port  St.  Julian,  Patagonia 569 


Page. 
Portuguese  Ascension,  South  Atlantic. 531 

Port  Vita,  Cuba 320 

Posadas  Bay,  Colombia 448 

Posadas  Bay,  Patagonia 592 

Possession  Bay,  Patagonia 573 

Potomac  River, 227,  229 

Prado,  City,  Brazil 535 

Presque  Harbor,  Newfoundland 32 

Prince  Amilca  River,  New  Grenada. . .  .489 

Prince  Edward's  Island 94 

Prince's  Bay,  New  Jersey 213 

Prince's  Bay,  West  Indies 421 

Prospect  Harbor,  Maine 138,  144 

Prospect  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 108 

Providence  Channel,  Bahamas. . .  .250,  254 

Providence,  Guyana 506 

Providence  Islands,  New  Grenada 489 

Providence,  Rhode  Island 194 

Provincetown,  Massachusetts 172 

Provision  Islands,  New  (trenada 483 

Provision  I'osts,  Anticosti 77 

Pubnico  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 121 

Puerto  Casilda,  Cuba 332,  334 

Puerto  de  Cavannas,  Cuba 345 

Puerto  del  Padre,  Cuba 321 

Puerto  de  Manati,  Cuba 321 

Pueito  de  Plata,  St.  Domingo 356 

Punta  Cnstilla,  New  Grenada 492,  493 

Punta  Frayle,  Cuba 317 

Punta  Piedras,  Gulf  of  Mexico 281 

Punta  .Sal.  New  Grenada 493 

Purcell  Island.  Patagonia 615 

Purwick  Cove,  Newfoundland 32 

Q 

Quaco,  New  Brunswick 125 

Quemada  Point,  Trinidad 433 

Quick's  Hole,  Massachusetts 1 88 

Quilmos,  Town,  Brazil 556 

Quirpon  Harbor,  Newfoundland 35 

Quirpon  Island,  Newfoundland 35 

Quita  Sueno  Bank,  New  Grenada 489 

R 

Race,  Cape,  Newfoundland 13 

Race  Point,  Massarhusetts 173 

Ragged  Harbor,  Newfoundland 21,  29 

Bagged  Island  Harbor,  Novn  Scotia  ...  .114 

Bagged  Islands,  West  Indies 304 

Rain *13 

Ram  Islands,  Newfoundland 40 

Riimt'a  Harbor,  Newfouiuliaiid 53 

Ramslieg  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 89 

l^andom  Sound,  Newfoundland 19 

Rappahannock  River,  Maryland. .  .227,  228 

Raspberry  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Rastico  Harbor,  Prince  Edward's  Island,  95 

Rat  Island,  Brazil 537 

Rattan  Island,  New  (irenada 493 

Rat's  Key.  West  Indies 352 

Rol)('!lioii  Roads,  South  Carolina 241 

Red  Ba_y.  «iuir  "f  St.  Lawrence 7 

Red  Cape,  Gulf  ut  St.  Lawrence 72 

Red  Harbi)!'.  Newfoundland 43 

Red  Island,  Newfoundland 42 

Red  Island  Ilarbnrs,  Ncnvfoundland. ...  54 

Rediimla  Island,  New  Grenada 536 

Redondo,  West  Indies 408 

c 


"^wmmmmm^w' 


XXVI 


INDEX. 


' 


Page. 

Reedy  Island,  Delaware  River 221 

Reef  Point,  Anticosti 81 

Relief  Hnrbor,  Patngonia 618 

Rennet  Island,  Patiigonin 617 

Renowe's  Rocks,  Newfonndland 14 

Rhode  Island 194 

Rhode  Island  Harbor 192 

Richard's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 62 

Richibucto  Harbor.  New  Brunswick. . .  88 
Richmond  Bay,  Prince  Edward's  Island,  95 

Rich  Point,  Newfoundland 61 

Rickard's  Channel,  Delaware  Bay 222 

Riduig  Rocks,  Bahamas 253,  254 

Rigolets,  Louisiana 274 

Rio  Bueno  Harbor,  Jamaica 382 

Rio  del  Norte.  Gulf  of  Mexico 283 

RiodeMieJ,  Cuba 327 

Rio  de  San  Fernando.  Gulf  of  Mexico.  .283 

Rio  do  Santa  Fe,  West  Indies 342 

Rio  Doce,  Brazil 533 

Rio  Dulce,  New  Grenada 494 


Page. 

Sabanilla  Harbor,  Venezuela 462 

Sable,  Cape,  Nova  Scotia 116,  120 

Sable  Island 117,  118 

Sable  River,  Nova  Scotia 114 

Saco  Grande  Bay,  Brazil 545 

Saco  River,  Maine 155 

Sacred  Islands,  Newfoundland 36 

Sacrificios  Islond,  Gulf  of  Mexico 291 

Saddle  Back  Islet,  Newfoundland 43 

Saddle  Back  Ledge,  Maine 140 

Sagona  Island,  Newfoundland 43 

Sagua  la  Grande,  Cuba 323 

Sail  Harbor,  Maine 144 

Saintes,  Guadaloupe 410 

Salado  Chico  River,  Gulf  of  Mexico  ...290 

Sttlado  River,  New  Grenada 471 

Salamanquilla  Channel,  Venezuela  . . .  .468 

Salem,  Massachusetts 163 

Salem,  New  Jersey 220 

Salibia  River,  West  Indies 387 

Salinas  Point,  West  Indies 349 


Rio  Grande  de  San  Pedro,  Brazil.  .549,  550  j  Salina  Town,  Brazil 523 

Rio  Janeiro,  Brazil 537  |  Salisbury,  Massachusetts 159 

Rio  Lagartos,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284  !  Salmas,  West  Indies 387 

Rio  Negro.  Brazil 564  ]  Snlniedina,  (xulf  of  Mexico 291 

Rio  San  Francesco,  Bi-izil 544  ■  Salmedina  Shoal,  Venezuela 465 

Rio  Sc-a,  Brazil 533  ,  Salmon  Cove,  Newfoundland 16,  21 

Rio  St.  Joao.  Brazil 544  ■  Salt  Key  Bank,  West  Indies 347 

Ristigouche  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Law-  j  Salt  Key,  West  Indies 313,  315 

rence 87  ;  Salt  Lake  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.. .  78 

River  Gallegos,  Patagonia 571  |  Salt  River  Cove,  St.  Domingo 361 

River  John,  Nova  Scotia 89    Salt  River,  Jamaica 376 


River  of  Tupiico,  Gulf  of  Mexico 289 

River,  Philip,  Nova  Scotia 89 

River  Plate,  Brazil 538,  551 

River  San  Tadeo,  Patagonia 614 

River  St.  Ander,  Gulf  of  Mexico 283 

River  St.  Francisco,  Gulf  of  Mexico. .  .284 

Road  of  Naso,  Louisiana 274 

Roanoke  Island,  North  Carolina 237 

Robbin's  Reef,  New  York 212 

Robeirao,  Town,  Brazil 549 

Rubinhood's  Bny,  Newfoundland 21 


Salvage  Bay,  Newfoundland 26 

Samana  Bay,  St.  Domingo 354 

Sama  Port,  Cuba 320 

Samliro  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 107 

Sambro  Lighthouse,  Nova  Scotia 104 

Samhros  Keys,  Florida 266 

Sand  Hill  Cove,  Labrador 2 

Sand  Key,  Key  West 259 

Sand  Key,  West  Indies 314,  371 

Sand's  Point,  Long  Island 197 

Sandwich  Bay,  Labrador 6 


Roca  Partida,  Gulf  Mexico 290   Sandwich,  Massachusetts 174 

Roccas,  Brazil C"  '  Sandy  Bay,  Labrador 5 

Rochalois  Keef,  St.  Domingo 367  |  Sandy  Bay,  Massachusetts 161 

Rochester,  Ma.ssachusetts 190  '  Sandy  Bay,  New  (frenada 496 

Rockaway  Inlet,  Long  Island 21 6    Sandy  Bay,  Patagonia 577 

Rocky  Bight,  Patagonia 619    Sandy  Cove,  Ntnvfoundland 26 

Rodriguez  Key,  Florida 263  j  Sandy  Hock  Channel,  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 

Romnn.  Cape,  South  Carolina 240        rence 73 

Roiner,  New  VTork  Harbor 210   Sandy  Hook,  New  Jersey 210,  213 

Roques,  Venezuela 454  j  Sandy  I.sland  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence     8 

osario  Islands,  New  Grenada 468   Sandy  Key,  Wes't  Indies 313 


R 

Rosi 
Ro! 


ario  Key,  Cuba 339  I  Sandy  Po'int,  Patagonia 577 


seau,  Town,  St.  D< 


Rose  Blanclie  [Tarlji 


Rose  [sla 


ommgo 
NewF 


.412  i  Sandy  Point,  Town,  St.  Kitts 


.403 
bniiilland. .   56    San  K.*tt'vati  Cl.anncI,  i'ataaonia 618 


R09 


West  liiilieH :i00    San  (iabriel  Ileighls,  Gulf  of  St.   La 


oway  Port,  Nova  Scotia 114  ;      \ 


w- 


onc( 289 


Round  Harbor.  Laijrador 3  ^  San    Juan    do     Nicaragua,     New   Gre 

Rouge's  Hay,  Wost  Iiidii-s :J9£ 


Ro/.i.-r.  Cape.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ...   86    San  Juan  il«  Ulua,  (.'(df  of  Mexico 
Rum  Key,  West  Tu.lies .301    San  Juan  Kiver,  Cuba 


Ruiidle  Pass,  Fata 


nada 484.  486 

.281 
.337 


Ryder's  Harl)or,  Newfoundland 20  i  S 


612    San  Juan  River,  New  Grorjada 493 


Saba,  West  Indies 40I '  Sau  Pedro  Sound,  P 


ankaty  Head.  Massacliusctts  . .  .  .179,  18( 
San  Pedro  River,  (Julf  of  Mexico 289 


atugonia 587 


INDEX. 


XXVll 


Page. 

San  Policarpe  Port,  Patagonia 613 

Santa  Anna  Island,  New  Grenada 532 

Santa  Cntalina  Island,  New  Grenada. .  .489 
Santa  Catalina  Island,  West  Indies  . . .  .347 

Santa  Clara.  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Santa  Cruz  Bay,  Colombia 448 

Santa  Cruz,  Brazil 537 

Santa  Cruz,  Cuba 330 

Santa  Cruz  River,  Patagonia 569 

Santa  Cruz,  West  Indies 397 

Santa  Martha,  Venezuela 453,  461 

Saiitiirem,  BalianiHS 254 

Santarem  Channel,  West  Indies 257 

Santee  River,  South  Carolina 240 

Santero  Town,  New  Grenada 470 

Sant  Marcello,  Brazil 529 

Santos,  Brazil 541,  542 

Sapelo  Island,  (tcorj^ia 284 

Saramacca  River,  Guyana 504 

Sardinero  River,  Cuba 329 

Sarmiento  Channel,  Patagonia 618 

Sarmiento  River,  Patagonia 584 

Sarrana  Bmik,  New  Grenada 489 

Sasardi  Channel,  New  Grenada 473 

Satan's  Rock,  Massachusetts 163 

Satilla  Rivt'r,  Georgia 245 

Saumarez  Island,  Patagonia 619 

Sausett,  Massachusetts 174 

fe'avage  Cove,  Newfoundland 63 

Savage  Harbor.  Prince  Edward's  Island.  95 

Savanna  do  la  Mar,  St.  Domingo 355 

Savannah, (u'orgia 243 

Savannah  la  Mar,  Cuba 337 

Savanna  Key,  West  Indies 371 

Savanna  la  Mar,  Jamaica 380 

Say  brook,  Connecticut 206 

Scarborou£;ii,  Martinique 427 

Scatara  Islimd,  Breton  Island 98 

Schaperliaiii  13ay,  Patagonia 604 

Schooner's  Cove,  Nova  Scotia 113 

Scituate,  Massschusetts 171 

Scoodic  River,  Maine 135 

Sea  Bear  Bay,  Patagonia 568 

Sea  Breezes' *17 

Sealing  Bight.  Labrador 2 

Seal  Isliuui,  Lalirador ] ,     5 

Seal  Islands,  Miiine 129 

Seal  Rdcks.  (lulfof  St.  Lawrence 83 

Seiira,  Brii/.il 518 

Second  Narrow,  Patagonia 575,  622 

Second  IVivcr,  Patagonia 584 

Secretary  Wren's  Island,  Patagonia. . .  .589 

Sedger  IJiver,  Patagonia 584 

Segovia  River,  New  (Jrenada 491 

Scguiiic,  iVIiiiiie 146 

Se|)iinili(iii  Kiver,  Patagonia 598 

Scraiiillii  r.aiiU.  Ni^w  (ironada 'lt<9 

Seieiilicii  i'iver.  15rii/,il 528 

Serjfipci  I'ivor,  Wy;v/.\\ 527 

Serpent's  Island,  West  Indies .'{HG 

Selwiirt  Ifarlhir,  Patagonia 602 

Severn  liivci'.  V'iry:iMiii 2-'G 

Shamiwiiiinnck  Reef,  Long  Isl.ind  .201),  204 

oMiig  Hmlior.  iNova  Scotia 121 

Shiig  Isliind,  (t(df  of  .'^t  Lawrence, . .  .8.  71 

Shallow  Bay,  Liilirador 5 

Shalloway  Island,  Newfoundland 44 


Page. 
Shecnticn  Bay,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence ...     8 

Sheep  Keys,  Bahamas 252 

Sheepscut  River,  Maine 150 

Sheet  Haroor,  Nova  Scotia 102 

Shelburne  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 1 14 

Shelter  Island,  New  York 205 

Ship  Cove,  Newfoundland 47 

Ship  Harbor,  Newfoundland 44 

Ship  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 92,  103 

Shippan  Point,  Long  Island  Sound 198 

Shoal  Bay,  Newfoundland 29 

Shoal  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 103 

Shell  Bay,  Patagonia 581 

Shell  Harbor,  Patagonia 586 

Shrewsbury  River.  New  Jersey 216 

Shut  in  Harbor,  Newfoundland 20 

Siasconset,  Massachusetts 173 

Siguena  Bay,  Cuba 339 

Silan,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Silver  Key  Bank,  West  Indies 315 

Silver  Key  Passage,  West  Indies 316 

Silver  Spring  Harbor.  Massachusetts. .  .173 

Sinamari  River,  Guyana 510,  511 

Sina  River,  New  Grenada 470 

Sinnepuxent  Shoals,  Delaware 223 

Sippican  Harbor,  Massachusetts 190 

Sir  John  Narborough's  Island,  Patagonia  598 

Sisal.  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

Sisal  Shoal,  Gulf  of  Mexico 287 

Sisibou  River,  Nova  Scotia 123 

Skiff's  Island,  Massachusetts 185 

Skinner's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 30 

Skyring  Water,  Patagonia 598 

Small  Craft  Bight.  Patagonia 619 

Sujith's  Island,  Cape  Charles 224 

Smith  Sound,  Newfoundland 20 

Smith's  Point,  Virginia 228,  250 

Smithville,  North  Carolina 238 

Smutty  Nose  Island,  New  Hampshire.  .158 

Smyth  Channel,  Patagonia Cl6 

Smyth  Ilnrbor,  Patagonia 584 

Smyrna,  Florida 246 

Stndte  Island,  West  Indies 386 

Snowy  Sound,  Patagonia' 591 

Snug  Cove,  Maine 135 

Snug  Harbor,  Labradort 4 

Soan  Island,  West  Indies 347 

Sod  Channel,  New  Jersey 217 

Sombrero  Island,  West  Indies 398 

Sombrero  Key,  Florida 262 

Somer's  Islands 297 

Sola  Islet.  Colombia 444 

Sophia  IIiirl)or,  Labrador 2 

Sorda  I'oint,  Cuba 338 

Soundings,  Anticosti G9 

Soundings,  Straits  of  Belle  Isle 37 

Souti'comapa  Ijagoon,  Gulf  of  Mexico  .  .290 

South  America 514 

South  Uroiul  Cove,  Newfonndland 24 

South  Carolina 243 

South  Kdislo  lliver,  North  Carolina 241 

South  TTiii  i)or.  IjaiiradiH' 5 

South  Point,  Anticosti 78 

South  SIiomI,  NantiicUet 181 

Sontliwiiid  Arm,  Nc^wfoundliind .^2 

Soutliwiird  Buy,  Newfoundland 24 

South-west  Harbor,  Maine 139 


nwnpRqppw 


XXVUl 


INDEX. 


Page. 

South-west  Islnnd,  Nova  Scotia 109 

South-west  Point,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  79 

South-west  Rock,  Newfoundland 3^ 

Sow  and  Pigs,  Massachusetts 187 

Spaniards  Bay,  Newfoundland ) 7 

Spanish  Town  Island,  West  Indies 393 

Spear,  Cape,  Newfoundland 15 

Spear  Harbor.  Lai)rador 2 

Specutia  Island,  Maryland 234 

Speedwell  Bay.  Patagonia 612 

Spoightstown,  West  Indies 426 

Spirings  Bay,  Patagonia 568 

Spotted  Island,  Labrador 5 

Spruce  Creek  Hirbor,  New  Hampshire  157 

Spry  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 102 

Squam  Inlet,  New  Jersey 216 

Sqnam,  Massachusetts 1 60 

Square  Handkerchief  Shoid,  W.  Indies  315 

Square  Island  Harbor.  Labrador 2 

Squibnncket,  Massachusetts 187 

Squirrel  Island,  Maine 43 

S.  S.  W.  Key,  New  Grenada 488 

Staples  Inlet.  Patagonia 586 

Star  Islnnd,  New  Hampshire 158 

Stnten  Island,  New  York 212 

Staten  Island,  Piitagonia 608,  620 

Statira  Shoal,  West  Indies 307 

Stewart's  Bay,  Patagonia 5!»2,  593 

Stinking  Islands,  Newfoundland 27 

Stirrnp  Key,  Bahamas 251 

Stoke's  Bay,  Patagonia GOl 

Stone  Key,  Cuba 323 

Stonington,  Connecticut 195 

Stormy  Bay,  Patagonia 581 

Strait  Le  Maire,  Patagonia 608 

Strait  of  Magalhaens.579, 589,  595.  621,  623 

Stratford,  Connecticut 196 

St.  Annstasia  Island,  Florida 216,  261 

St.  Andrew's  Bay,  Florida 271 

St.  Andrew's  Harbor,  New  Brunswick  .128 

St.  Andrew's,  Georgia 245 

St.  Andrew's  Island.  West  Indies 487 

St.  Andrew  Sound,  Patagonia 619 

St.  Anne  Harbor,  Curazao 456 

St.  Anne's  liay,  .Jamaica 382 

St.  Anne's  Hiirbor,  Breton  Island... 96,  97 

St.  Ann's  Island,  I'atagonia 594 

St.  Anthony,  Cape,  Brazil 527 

St.  Anthony's  Harbor,  Newfoundland..   35 

St.  Aubin  Island.  Martinique 417 

St.  Anu;n'^rine,  Brnzil 527 

St.  Augustine,  Florida 246.  261 

St.  Augustine   Porl  and  River,  Gulf  of 

St.  Lawrence 9 

St.  Binbe  Bay,  Newfoundland 62 

St.  Bartholomews,  West  Indies 400 

St.  Catherine  Island.  West  Indies 317 

St.  Catherines,  Georgia 244 

St.  Catherine's  I.^shiiid,  Brazil 537.  541 

St.  Croix  River,  Maine 135 

St.  Croix,  West  Indies 397 

St.  David's  Head.  }?ermuda 297 

iSt.  Dnvid's  Sound,  Patagonia 5!-'9 

St.  Domingo  City,  West  Indies 348 

St.  Dominao  Key,  West  Indies 'M)\ 

St.  Diuniniro,  West  Indie" 346 

St.  Esprit  Reef,  West  Indies 413 


St.  Estevan  Gulf.  Patagonia 614 

St.  Eustatius  Islnnd,  West  Indies 413 

St.  Francis',  Cape  &  Harbor,  Labrador,     2 

St.  Francis,  Cape,  Newfoundland 16 

St.  Francisco  River,  Brazil 527,  547 

St.  George,  Cape,  Nova  Scotia 92 

St.  George's  Bay,  Newfoundland 58 

St.  George's  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 91 

St.  George's  Bay,  West  Indies] 424 

St.  George's  Harbor,  Bermuda 298 

Sr.  George's  Sound,  Florida 270 

.St.  Genevieve  Bay,  Newfound' uid  ....  62 

St.  Helena  Sound,  North  Carolina 241 

St.  Jngo  de  Cuba,  Cuba 329 

St.  Jaques  Harbor,  Newfoundland 49 

St.  Joao  Island,  Brazil 523 

St.  John's  Bay,  Newfoundland 61 

St.  John's  Cape,  Newfoundland 31 

St.  John's,  Florida 24.5,  246 

St.  John's Harbor.NewBrunswick,  125,  126 
St.  John's  Harbor,  Newfoundland. .  .15,  16 
St.  John's  Island,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.  9i 

St.  John's  Island,  West  Indies 395 

St.  John's  Town,  Antigua 404 

St.  Joseph's  Bay,  Florida 271 

St.  Juan  Bnptista,  Gulf  of  Mexico 289 

St.  Juan  River,  Cuba 334 

St.  Juan,  West  Indies 386 

St.  Kilt's  Island,  West  Indies 403 

St.  Lewis  River  and  Sound,  Labr.idor. .     1 

St.  Lorenzo  Bay,  St.  Domingo 355 

St.  Louis,  Guadaloupo 410 

St.  Louis,  St.  Domingo 352 

St.  Lucia,  West  Indies 421 

St.  Lunnire,  Newfoundland 35 

St.  Marco  Bay.  Brazil 520 

St.  Marc,  St.Domingo 365 

St.  Marin,  Capo,  Brazil 551 

St.  Marks,  Brazil 521 

St.  Marks,  Florida 268 

St.  Martin's  Cove,  Patagonia 606 

St.  Martin's  1'own,  Bay  of  Fundy 125 

St.  Martin's,  West  Indies 400 

St.  Mary's  Bay,  Newfoundland 36 

St.  Mary's,  (Jeorgia 245 

St.  .Mary's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 38 

St.  Mary's  River,  Nova  Scotia 101, 123 

St.  Michael's  Bay  and  Cape,  Labrador.     4 

.St.  Nicholas  Bay,  Patagonia 585 

St.  Nicholas  Channel,  West  Indies. . .  .257 

St.  Ni(diol«s  Mole,  St.  Domirigci 362 

!  St.  Patrick's  Channel,  Breton  Island...   97 
I  St.   Peter's   Harbor.    Prince   Edward's 

j      Island 94 

St.  Peter's  Islands,  Labrador 1 

St.  Peter's  Island,  Newfoundland 46 

St.  Peter's  Martinique 414,  419 

St.  Phillips  Reef.  West  Indies 308 

'  St.  Pierre  Island,  Newfoundland 46 

'  St.  Pierre,  Martinique 414,  419 

\  St.  Qnentin's  Sound,  Patagonia 614 

:  St.  Roque,  Cape.  Brazil 516 

!  St.  Rosa's  Buy,  Florida 271 

I  St.  Salvador.  Mahamas 248 

'  St.  Salvador  Islnnd,  West  Indies 301 

j  .St.   Sebastian's  Island  and  Town.  Bra- 
l      zil 540,542,547 


St. 
St. 
St. 
St. 

Sug 


SwJ 
Sw( 
SwJ 


INDEX. 


xx\x 


Page. 

St.  Shcf  8  Bay,  Newfoundland 36 

St.  Simon's.  Georgia 245 

St.  Thoiniis'  Island,  "West  Indies 396 

St.  Vincents,  West  Indies 4'J'2 

Sugar  Luaf,  Biazil 5oU,  536 

Suiibury,  Georjiin 244 

Sunken  Rock,  Nova  Scotia 8i),  9'i 

Sunuani,  Uiiynnn 503 

Susannah  Cove,  Patagonia 575 

Suwanee  River,  Florida 268 

Swallow  ilarbor,  Patagonia 592 

Swan  Islands,  New  (irenada 496 

Swan  Islands,  West  Indies 498 

Swash  Channel,  Maryland 234 

Kwash  Channel,  New  York 211 

Sweet  Bay,  Newfoundland 24 

Swimmer  Bank,  West  Indies 314 

S.  W.  Key,  Florida 258 

S.  W.  Key,  West  Indies 371 

Sydney  Harbor,  Breton  Island 97 

T 

Tabano,  Florida 263 

Tabasco,  Cult"  of  Mexico 2rf'J 

Table  Buy  and  Harbor,  Labrador 5 

Taco  Harbor,  Cuba 318 

Tacurucu  Island,  Brazil 53y 

Talbot's  Island,  Florida 286 

Tallaboca  River,  Cuba 533 

1  amandaro  Harbor,  Brazil 5'^f> 

Tamar  Hmbor,  Patagonia 5^6,  623 

Tanibor  Isliiiiil,  New  Grenada 472 

Tampa  Bay,  Florida 268 

Tanipico,  (lull'  of  Mexico 2^5 

Taiiamo  Ilaihor,  Cuba 319 

Tangier  Harbor,  Nova  .Sccitia 103 

Tangier    Islands    and    Sound,    Mary- 
land  227,  228,  229 

Tapion  ]\iver,  St.  Domingo 358 

Tarn  Bay,  Patagonia 613 

Tarrant  llarbor,  Maine. . .    144 

Tartan  Bay,  Martini(;',.e 417 

Tatniagouidio,  Neva  Scotia 89 

Taylor's  Bay,  Newfoundland 46 

Taypu  Point,  Brazil 541 

Temple  Cape.  Labrador 1 

Tennant  Bay  and  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia.  107 

Ten  Pound  Island.  Massachusetts 162 

Terrin  Point,  New  Grenada 475 

Testigos  Islands,  Colombia 441 

Texas 280 

Thatcher's  Island,  Massachusetts 161 

Thimble.  Virginia 225 

Three  Fathoms  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia  ,.104 

Throgs  Point,  Long  Island 199 

Thunder  Storms  and  Gusts *14 

Thrum  Cap  Island,  Maine 145 

Thurin's  Bay,  Martinique 419 

Tianitau  Port,  Patagonia 613 

Tiburon  i]ay,  St.  Domingo 370 

Tiburon  Cape,  New  Greiuida 472 

Tides 625 

Tides,  Newfoundland 57,  63 

Tides,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  67,  75,  H 1 ,  87, 

[88,  93 
Tierra  del  Fuego,  Patagonia.  .565,  599,  608 
Tiger  Keys,  dew  Greuada 483 


Page. 

Tigioca,  Brazil 524 

Tigrillo  Bay,  Colombia 447 

Timbalier  Island,  Louisiana 278 

Tobago.  West  Indies 427 

Tobas  Islands,  Massachusetts 1 90 

Tolu  River.  New  (Jrenada 469 

Tom's  Harbor,  Patagonia C()2 

Tonala  Kiver.  Gnlf  of  Mexico 290 

Tongnia  Biver.  New  Grenada 490 

Torl>ay,  Newfoundland l6 

Torbay,  Nova  Scotia 100 

Torbec  Town,  St.  Domingo 352 

Tortola,  West  Indies 394 

Tortue  Island,  West  Indies 361 

Tortuga  Iclnnd,  West  Indies 450 

Tortugas,  Florida 248, 258 

Tortugas,  West  Indies 361 

Toulinquet  Island,  Newfoundland 31 

Townsend  Harbor,  Maine 149 

Townsend  Harbor,  Patagonia 602 

Traca'  ie  Bay,  Prince  Edward's  Islands  95 

Trade  Winds *l6 

Transition  Bay,  Patagonia 581 

Treble  Island,  Patagonia 603 

Trebuppy,  New  (Jrcnada 496 

Trent  Hi'ver.  Nova  Scotia 93 

Trepassey,  Newfoundland 38 

Triangles,  Gulf  of  Mexico 2S6 

Trinidad,  Cuba 332,  334 

Trinidad,  Gulf  of  Mexico 283 

Trinidad  Island,  South  Atlantic 529 

Trinidad,  West  Indies 429 

Trinity  Bay.  Fewfoundland 18 

Trinity  Harbor,  Newfoundland 20 

Trinity,  Maitinitpjo 416,  418 

Trinity  Lodge.  Nova  Scotia 122 

Triton  Ilarlior,  Newfoundland 40 

Triunlb  do  la  Cruz,  New  (h'enada 494 

True  Pdue  River,  South  Carolina 241 

Truro,  Nova  Scotia 124 

Truxillo  Bay,  Patagonia 598 

Truxillo  River,  New  Grenada 492 

Tucacos  Bay,  Venezuela 453 

Tuckanuck,  Massachusetts 177 

Tucker's  Island,  New  Jersey 217 

Tuesday  Bay,  Patagonia' 598.  623 

Tuma  island,  Brazil 554 

Tupani  Riv(!r,  New  Grenada 490 

Turbalton  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 93 

Tiiricamo  Ilai  bor,  Venezuela 452 

Turiviizo,  Brazil 523 

Turk's  Island  Passage,  West  Indies. . .  .313 

Turtle  Heads,  .Jamaica 374 

'Purtle  Rocks,  Bahamas 255 

Tusket  River,  Nova  Scotia 121 

Tuspam  Kiver.  tiulf  of  Mexico 294 

Tuternates  Island,  New  Gienada 472 

Tuxtia  V'  Icano,  Gulf  of  Mexico 290 

Tweed's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 55 

Ty bee,  Ge(H'gia 243 

Tyreh's  Bay,  West  Indies 423 

U 

Uhas  River,  Brazil 536 

Umbrella  Key,  Florida 264 

'  Unare  Bay,  Colombia. 441,  449 

j  Upaueraa  River,  Brazil 517 


mmmmtm 


wmmfm^ 


XXX 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Upright  Bay,  Patngonis 595 

Umba.  Gult  of.  New  Grenada 417 

Uriarte  Port,  Patagonia 697 

Uruguay  River,  Brazil 551 

Useless  Bay,  Patajroiiia 579 

Uiila  IsIanH  N-^r  Grenada 493 


Valdez,  Port,  Patagonia 519 

Valencia  Point,  New  Grenada 48'2 

Valentine  Harbor,  Patagonia 697,  6i23 

Vasnsousa  Bay,  Florida '-6^ 

Vazez  Point.  St.  Domingo 365 

Velnsco,  Gulf  of  Mexico 281 

Venados  Island,  Colombia 447 

Venezuela 467 

Vera  Cruz,  Gulf  of  Mexico 293 

Verde  Island,  Gulf  of  Mexico 291 

Verde  Island,  Venezuela 463 

Vermeille  Point.  Bri.zil 539 

Vermillion  Bay,  Louisiana 280 

Verte  Bay,  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence 125 

Vice  Admiral's  Cove,  Newfoundland.  14,  20 

Victoria  City,  Brazil 533 

Victoria  Island,  Brazil 540 

Vicque  Island.  West  Indies -itiG 

Villa  Grande  Town,  Brazil 538 

Villa  Nova  da  Princeza,  Brazil 540 

Villena  Cove,  Patagonia 592 

Vine  Island,  Louisiana 279 

Vineyard  Sound,  Massachusetts 187 

Vinhas  Island,  Brazil 548 

Viper  Key,  Florida 264 

Virgin  Gorda,  West  Indies 393 

Virgin  Islands.  West  Indies 397 

Virginia,  Capes  of. 223 

Virgin  Rocks,  Newfoundland 13.  37 

Virgin's  Passage,  West  Indies 387 

Vita,  Port,  Cuba' 320 

Voces  Bay,  Patagonia 584 

Volage  Bank,  Brazil 537 

Voorbnrg,  Guyana 504 

W 

Wadham  Islands,  Newfoundland 29 

Wager  Island,  Patagonia 612 

Waldoborough,  Maine 145 

Walker's  Key,  Bahamas 249 

Wank's  River,  New  Grenada 495 

Warcaller  River,  Florida 268 

Wareliam,  Massachusetts 191 

Warnari  River,  Guyana 508 

Warp  Bay,  Patagonia 581 

Warsaw  Sound.  South  Carolina 242 

Warwick,  Rhode  Island 194 

Water  Cove,  Patagonia 605 

Waterfall  Bay,  Patagonia 619  j 

Watering  Bay,  St.  Domingo 355  j 

Watering  Bay,  West  Indies 313 

Waterman  Island,  Patagonia! 603 

Watling's  Island,  West  Indies 301 

Water  Spouts •315 

Wedge  Isle,  Nova  Scotia 102 

'elcome  Bay,  Patagonia 617 

Wellfleet  Bay.  Massachusetts 173 

West  Cape,  Patagonia 605 

West  Chop,  Massachusetts 186 


Page. 

Western  Patagonia 615 

Western  Passage,  Maine 134 

West  Harbor,  Connecticut 195 

West  Harbor.  Jamaica 377 

West  Indies 299 

Westminister  Hall,  Patagonia  . , .  .698,  699 

Westpoint.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 80 

Westpoint,  Nova  Scotia 90 

Westward  Arm,  Newfoundland 32 

Wet  Island,  Patag(mia 583 

Whiile  Bank,  Newfoundland 12 

Whale  Boat  Bay.  Patagonia 6l7 

Whale  Key,  Bahamas 249 

Whale  Rock,  Newfoundland 52 

Whale's  Hack,  New  Hampshire 156 

Whale  Sound,  Patagonia 589 

White  Bay,  Newfoundland 32 

White  Bear  Bay,  Newfoundland 54 

White  Haven,  Nova  Scotia 101 

White  Head  Light,  Maine 143 

White  Hills,  Now  Hampshire 154 

White  Horse  Reef,  Gulfof  St.  Lawrence  74 

White  Island,  Isles  ofShoaU 157 

White  Islands,  Newfoundland 35 

While  Kelp  Cove,  Patagonia 619 

Whittle  Bay,  Gulfof  St.  Lawrence....    15 
Whittle,  Capo,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ..   11 

Whirlwinds "IS 

Whookamagh,  Breton  Island 97 

Wicomack,  Maryland 230 

Wille's  Bay,  Patagonia 580 

Williainstown,  Bahamas 251 

Willis'  Point,  Long  Island 200 

Willonghl)y  Bay,  Antigua 404 

Wilmington,  North  Carolina 239 

Wind. "l  to  *11 

Windmill  Point,  Virginia 228 

Winds,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 64 

Windsor,  Nova  Scotia 1 24 

Windward  Channel,  West  Indies  .305,  370 

Windward  Islands,  West  Inciies ,39J 

Windward  Passages,  West  Indies 311 

Wine  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 101 

Winter  Harbor,  Maine 155 

Winter  Island,  Massachusetts 164 

Wilhy  Wood  Bay,  Jamaica 378 

Wolf  Ray,  Newfoundland 54 

Wolf  Key.  Bahama  Bank, 257 

Wolf  Islands,  Now  Brunswick 128 

Wolf's  Cove,  Gulfof  St.  Lawrence. ...     7 

Woodend,  Massachusetts 173 

Wood  Island,  Bay  of  Fundy 1  29 

Wood  Island,  Maine 155 

Wood  Islands,  Patagonia 603 

Wood's  Bay,  Patagonia 587 

Wood's  Harbor,  Newfoundland 60 

VV^ood's  Hole,  Massachusetts 178 

Worsley  Bay  and  Sound,  Patagonia. . .  .619 
Wreck  Hill,  Bermuda Q97 


Xagua  Harbor,  Cuba 335 

Xaultegua,  Gulfof,  Patagonia 694 

Xavier  Island,  Patagonia 613 

Xibera  Harbor,  Culm 320 

Xicalangn  Point,  Gulfof  Mexico 284 

Xingui  River,  Guyana 501 


MP 


MP 


■t-WCWI 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Y 

Yngunnabo  River,  Cuba 334 

Yaguaneque  Harbor,  Cuba 319 

Yallnli's  Point,  Jamaica 373 

Yainma  Bay,  West  Indies 387 

Yarmoutii,  Nova  Scotia 122 

Yarmoutii,  Massachusetts 177 

Ycacos,  Cuba 327 

Ycacos  Keys,  Cuba 323 

Yguanojo  River,  Cuba 333 

Ygil,  Gulf  of  Mexico 284 

York  Bay,  Labrador 1 

York  Cape,  Labrador 1 

York  Harbor,  Maine 1 54 

York  Harbor,  Newfoundland, 60 

York  Ledge,  Maine 154 


XXXI 


Page. 


York,  Virginia 226 

Ysabeila  Point,  St.  Domingo 356 

Yucatan 468 

Yunn  Point,  St.  Domingo 358 

Yunke  de  Baraooa,  Cuba 318 


Zacheo,  West  Indies 346.  388 

Znmba  Island,  Venezuela 463,  464 

Zamuro  Point,  Venezuela 454 

Zapadillas,  New  Grenada 483,  494 

I  Zapara,  Venezuela 458 

\  Zapote  Point,  New  Grenada 470 

Znpotilan  Point,  Gulf  of  Mexico 290 

Zarza  Keys.  Cuba 327 

Zempoalo  Point,  Gulf  of  Mexico  ..... .*<a;^4 


«RIHHRM«P*I 


ipniw 


rmwmmi^fm 


■Mppp^iP^niWi 


wmm 


LIST    OF    LIC^HTHOIJSES 

DESCRIBED  IN  THIS  WORK.    . 

Pagt. 

ST.  JOHN'S  HARBOR. ..On  Fort  Amherst  on  the  South  Point  or  entrance  of  St.  John's 

Harbor 15 

OAPB  BONA  VISTA....On  the  east  coast  of  the  Island  of  Newfoundliuid W 

CANNON  rOINT On  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Inner  Harbor,  Island  of 

St   I'ien  e 41 

GALLANTRY  HEAD. . . . South  side  of  the  Island  of  St.  Peter 46 

ST.  PAUL'S On  the  northern  extremity  of  the  Island  of  St.  Paul's  entrance 

to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 68 

ST.  PAUL'S On  the  southern  extremity  of  the  Island  of  St.  Puitd's fiS 

S.  W.  I'OINT Island  of  AuticoBti 09,77,79 

HEATH  POINT On  the  western  extremity  of  the  Island  of  Anticosti 78 

POINT  E8CUMINAC On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  Miramachi  Bay,  Gulf  of  St. 

Lawrence 88 

PICTOU On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  Pictou  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St. 

Lawrence 90 

GUT  OF  CANSO West  side  of  the  north  entrance  to  the  Gut  of  Canso 9',' 

SYDNEY On  a  low  point  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand  going  in, 

at  ihe  entrance  of  the  Harbor  of  Sydney,  Cape  Breton  Island,    97 

8CATARA On  thu  N.  B.  point  of  Scatara  Island,  Cape  Breton  Island 98 

CRANBERRY  ISLAND  ..On  Cranberry  Island,  oif  the  eastern  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  near 

Cape  Canso 9'J 

OUTER  BEAVER On  Beaver  Island,  on  the  S.  B.  side  of  the  Coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  lOJ 

BRIER'S  ISLAND On  the  western  part  of  Brier's  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Ship 

Harbor,  Nova  Scotia. . . .' 103 

SAMBRO On  Sanibro  Iitland,  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  entrance  to  Halifax 

Harbor 105 

MAUGER'S  BEACH  ....  Halifax  Harbor 105 

CROSS  ISLAND Ou  Cross  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Lunenburgh  Harbor,  Nova 

Scotia Ill 

COFFIN'S  ISLAND On  Coffin's  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Liverpool  Bay.Nova  Scotia,  113 

LOUISBOUHGH On  the  East  Head,  at  the  entrance  of  Louisbourgh  Harbor,  S.  B. 

side  (if  Cape  Breton  Island ..,jj 98 

SHELBURNE On  the  S   B.  point  of  McNutt's  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Shel- 

burue  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia Hi 

SEAL  ISLAND OH'  the  southern  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  near  Cape  Sable l!2l) 

BRYER'S  ISLAND On  the  western  side  of  St.  Mary's  Bay,  at  the  enirance  to  the 

Bay  of  Fundy 123 

POINT  PRIM At  the  entrMUce  of  Annapolis  Gut,  western  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  124 

BLACK  ROCK  POINT..  .On  the  western  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  near  the  Basin  of  Mines..  124 

CAPE  ENRAGE On  tiie  non hern  shore  of  Chignecto  Bay,  Nova  Scotia 12,0 

CAPE  CAPSTAN To  murk  the  entrance  of  Apple  River,  Nova  Scoiia 125 

QUACO On  a  smiill  rock  oil' Quaco  Head,  north  coast  ol  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  125 

PARTRIDGE  ISLAND. .  .On  Partridge  Islund,  two  miles  to  the  south  of  St.  John's  Harbor, 

New  Brunswick 12e 

CAPE  FOURCHU At  the  entrance  of  Yarmouth  Harbor,  on  the  western  side  of  the 

const  of  Nova  Scotia 122 

GANNET  ROCK At  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  S.  S.  E.  CJ  miles  from  the 

S.  \V.  bead  of  Grand  Manan 129 

SEAL  ISLANDS OH"  Macliliis  Buy  at  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  W.  by  S. 

i  S.  from  Grand  Manan 12.'> 

CAMPO  BELLO On  the  norlh-eust  point  of  the  Island  of  Campo  Bello 134. 

PORTLAND Portland  Head,  otf  Portland  Harbor,  south  side 151 

SEGUIN On  the  Island  of  Seguin,  off  the  mouth  of  Kennebec  River 147 

WHITEHEAD On  Whitehead  Isliind>-S.  W.  of  W.  entrance  to  Penobscot  Bay..   U:i 

FRANKLIN  ISLAND On  the  north  end  of  Franklin  Island,  W.  of  entrance  to  St 

George's  Kiver 145 

WOOD  ISLAND On  Wood  Island,  near  the  entrance  to  Saco  Harbor 155 

WEST  QUODDY   HEAD. On  West  Qiiaddy  Head,  near  Eastport,  S  side  of  entrance  to  W. 

Qiioddy  Bay 134 

PETIT  MANAN On  the  South  end  of  Petit  Manan  Island 137,138 

POND  ISLAND West  side  to  the  entrance  ol  Kennebeck  River 149 

BURNT  ISLAND Ou  Burnt  Island,  West  side  of  Townsend  Harbor,  Maine 149 

LIBBY  ISLAND ...On  Libby's  Island, entrance  of  Machias  Bay 13e 

MONHEGAN  ISLAND  . .  .On  Moiihegan  Island,  Lincoln  county,  Maine 145 

OWL'S  HEAD Off  Thonuiston  Harbor,  Maine,  on  the  west  side  of  the  west  en- 
trance of  Penobscot  Bay 141 

MOOSE  PEAK  ISLANDS,  On  Mistake  Island,  8.  W.  of  W.  entrance  to  the  Bay  of  Fundy..   ISG 

MATINICUS  ROCK On  Mutinicus  Rock,  off  Penobscot  Bay 140 

PENMEQUID  POINT....  On  Penmequid  Point,  S.W.  of  the  entrance  to  Bristol  Bay.  andB. 

side  of  entrance  to  John's  Bay 145 

MKEJR'S  ISLAND On  Baker's  Island,  off  Mount  Desert,  and  S.  of  entrance  to 

Frenchman's  B«y 136 


XXXIV 


LIST   OF   LI0HTH0USB8. 


SADDLEBACK  LEDGE. 

PROSPECT  HARBOR.. 
LONGiSLAND  HEAD.. 


Pagt. 

OAPB  ELIZABETH  ....On  CnpoElizobetl),  8  8  B.  of  Portland l.il 

DICE'S  HK\D On  Diou't  HemI,  near  Cwtine 143 

HENDRICK'S  HEAD....On  Hendrick'n  Heiid,  MioiillnirNheepHcutHiv.T,  E  side 150 

MOUNT  DESERT  ROCK,  On  .Mount  Dosert  Rock,  about  20  luiles  S.  S.  E.  of  Mount  Deuel  t 

Islmid  138 

LITTLE  RIVER In  Cutler,  Miiine 136 

NEWCASTLE Soulh-west  bide  of  ihe  entrance  of  PortHmouth  Harbor 158 

WHITE  ISLAND The  souih  wi-stem  Island  ol  the  Isle  of  SlioaU 157 

WHALR'8  BACK On  Wliide'*  Back,  north  and  east  side  of  outer  entrance  to  Ports- 

inoulti  Hurlior 156 

BOSTON Norlh  siile  .  f  Main  outer  entrance  to  Boston  Harbor lf,7 

THATCHER'S  ISLAND. .On  Thiilthfr's  Island,  about  two  miles  otf  Cape  Ann 161 

BAKER  8  ISLAND On  Baker's  Isl  jnd,  S  sido  of  principal  or  N.  Ef.  entrance  to  Salem 

Harbor 163 

PLUM  ISLAND On  Plum  Island.  8.  side  of  entrance  to  Newburyport  Harbor 158 

CAPE  COD  HIGHLANDS,  OuUidtf  of  Cape  Cod,  Truro 178 

PLYMOUTH On  Gannet  Point,  N.  side  of  entrance  to  Plymouth  Harbor 171 

WIGWAM  POINT On  Wigwam  Point,  oast  side  of  entruucu  of  Squam  Harbor 160 

RACE  POINT Norlh-westerly  point  of  Cape  Cud 170 

BROWN'S  HEAD On  the  south  rn  of  the  Fox  Islands,  E  side  of  W.  entrance  to 

Penobscot  Bay 142 

MARSHALL'S  POINT  . .  .On  Marnhull's  Point,  Lincoln  county,  Maine 147 

GOAT  ISLAND Mouth  of  Cape  Porpoise  Harhor,  North  side 155 

NEGRO  ISLAND South  side  of  entrance  to  Camden  Harbor,  Penobscot  Bay 141 

FORT  POINT On  old  Fort  Point,  above  Castiue,  to  indicate  the  entrance  of  Pros- 

pect  Harbor 142,  143 

BOON  ISLAND On  Boon  Island,  off  York  Harbor,  Maine 153 

EAGLE  laLAND  POINT, On  Bajjle  Island,  Head  of  Isle  au  Haut  Bay,  to  guide  to  the  N.  E. 

entrance  to  Penobscot  Bay 141 

NASHE'S  IS  LAND Off  the  mouth  of  Pleiisant  River,  east  side 136 

BEAR  ISLAND On  one  of  the  Cranberry  Islands, about  5  miles  N.  W  of  Baker's 

Island  Light 138 

.Near  S  W  end  of  Isle  au  Haut,  and  E.  side  of  enti.uiue  of  Isle 

au  Haut  Bay 140 

.On  Goat  Island,  Prospect  Harbor,  town  of  Goldsborough,  Maine,  138 
.On  the  noith  end  of  Long  Island,  Boston  Bay,  and  8.  side  of  in- 
ner ship  ontrnnce 167 

TEN  POUND  ISLAND  ...On  Ten  Pound  Island,  in  Gloucester,  orCape  Ann  Harbor 162 

BILLLNGSGATE  ISLAND,  on  Billingsgate  Island,  W.  side  of  entrance  to  Wellfleet 173 

SANDY  NECK West  side  of  entrance  to  Barnstable  Harbor,  Cape  Cod  Bay....   174 

LONG  POINT On  Long  Point  Slioal,  inside  of  Cape  Cod,  and  W.  side  of  en- 
trance to  Proviucetown  Harbor 172 

GLOUCESTER  POINT  ..On  Gloucester  Point,  E.  side  of  entrance  to  Gloucester  or  Cope 

Ann  Harbor 162 

8TRAITM0UTH  HARBOR,  on  Straitmouth  Island  N.  side  of  Cape  Ann 162 

MARBLEHEAD East  Entrance  to  Marbiehead  Harbor,  S  E.  side 166 

IPSWICH On  Patche's  Beach,  8  side  of  entrance  to  Ipswich  Harbor 160 

GAY  HEAD On  Gay  Head,  W.  point  of  Martha's  Vineyard 185 

CLARK'S  POINT On  Clark's  Point,  W.  sido  of  entrance  to  New  Bedford  Harbor.  188 

CUTTEKHUNK  ISLAND.On  S.  W.  point  of  Culterhunk  Island,  and  S.  of  W.  entrance  to 

Buzzard's  Bay 187 

NANTUCKET On  (Jr.'at  or  Sandy  Point,  the  north  point  of  Nantucket  Island . .   178 

NANTUCKET  BE.\CON.. Nantucket  Harbor,  Brant  Point 178 

NANTUCKET  HARBOR..Naniucket  Harbor,  south  side 178 

8ANKATY  HEAD S.  E.  end  of  Nantncket 179 

OAI'E  POGE North-east  Point,  Martha's  Vineyard 179 

CHATHAM Inside  of  Chiitliam  Harbor 175 

POI.NT  GAMMON On  Point  Gammon,  S.  side  of  Capo  Cod,  inside  of  entrance  to 

Hyannis  Harbor 177 

HOLME'S  HOLE On  West  Chop  of  Holme's  Hole  Harbor 177,  185 

TARPAULIN  COVE West  side  of  Tarpiiuliu Ctive,  Vineyard  Sound 186 

BIRD  ISLAND On  Bird  Wiind,in  Buzzard's  Bay,  E.  side  of  the  entrance  to  Sip- 

.»,^«^.  picaa  Hnibor 190 

MONOMOY  POINT On  Sandy  Point,  S.  extremity  of  Cape  Cod 176 

NOBSQUE  POINT On  Nobacpie   Point,  Vineyard  Sound,  B.   S.  E.  of  entrance  to 

_  „-,„^  Wood's  Hi.le 177 

DUMPLIN  ROCK Buzzard's  Bay,  S.  S,  W.  of  New  BedJord  and  of  Clark's  Point 

light 189 

EDGARTOWN Entrance  to  Edgartowii  Harbor,  Martha's  Vineyard 179 

PALMER'S  ISLAND  ....N.  E.  partcf  Palmer's  Island,  New  Bedford  Harbor 188 

WEDS  POINT Near  Matiopoiselt,  New  Bedlord 191 

NAUSETT  BEACH. East  side  of  Cape  Cod 175 

MAVU'S  BEACH Head  of  WellHeet  Bay 173 

NANTUCKET  CLIFF  ...NMnlucket  Harbor.... 178 

MINOT'S  LEDGE Mluot's  Ledge,  Harbor  of  Boston u\ 


LIST  OP  MOHTHOUSES.  XXXr 

Pa  ire 

8ANKATY  HEAD Siuikaty  Head,  Nantucket 179 

HVANNIS Dieiikwatcr,  HyannU  Harbor 177 

N  BWrOKT On  south  point  of  Coiimiiiicut  hluiid,  culled  Denver  Tail 1"2 

WATUH  HH.L On  Watch  Point,  abiiut  2  mile*  S.  E.  of  iSloningtiin 194 

POINT  JUDITH On  Boutheast  point  of  Nnrragansett  shore,  beiween  Deaver  Tail 

and  Block  I»lnnd  lights 1!»2 

GOAT  ISLAM) On  the  north  end  of  O  .at  Island,  Newport  Harbor 1!>3 

DUTCH  ISLAM) (In  Souih  end  of  Dutch  Island 1!)3 

WAKWICKNECK On  south  end  ol  Warwick  Neck 194 

N AYATT  POIN  r On  Nuyntt  Point,  Providence  River 194 

BLOCK  ISLAND On  the  north  end  of  Block  Island 192 

POPLAR  Pl )INT Wickford,  North  Kingston 1 94 

NEW  LONDON West  side  of  entrance  to  River  Thames 206 

FAULKNER'S  ISLAND  ..On  Faulkner's  Island,  off  Guilford  Harbor 196 

LYNDK  POINT West  side  of  the  mouth  of  Connecticut  River 206 

8TONINGTON East  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stoiiinston  Harbor 194 

MORGAN'S  POINT In  Guton,  north  side  of  Fisher's  Island  Sound,  near  Mystic 195 

FIVE  MILE  POINT East  side  of  the  entrance  to  New  Haven  Harbov 207 

STRATFORD  I'OI  NT  ...  .South  of  Stratford,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river 197 

FAIRWEATHE  R  ISLAND,  entrance  of  Black  Rock  Harbor,  Fairfield 198 

NORWAI.K Entrance  of  Norwalk  River 198 

GREAT  CAPTAIN'S  ISLAND,  near  Greenwich  Point,  Connecticut 1!»8 

NORTH  DUMPLIN In  Fisher's  Island  Sound,  on  North  Dumplin  Island 195 

EATON'S  NECK East  side  of  entrance  to  Huntington  Bay,  Long  Island 197 

EXECUTION  ROCKS. ...On  Sand's  Point,  Long  Island  Sound 197 

SAND'S  POINT On  Sand's  Point,  Long  Island  Sound.  E  of  entrance  to  Cow  Bay.   197 

OLD  FIELD  POINT On  Old  Field  Point,  Long  Island,  opposite  Stratford  Light 196 

FIRE  ISLAND  INLET.  ..On  Long  Island,  south  side.  B.  side  of  Fiio  Island  Inlet 208 

THBOG'SNECK On  S  E.  point  of  Throg's  Neck,  east  of  Huh  Gate 19!) 

FORT  TOMPKINS On  Staten  Island,  New  York  Harbor 213 

MONTACK East  end  of  Long  Island 200 

LITTLE  GULL On  Little  Gull  Island,  near  N.  K.  end  of  Long  Island  Sound.... .  196 

PLUMB  ISLAND Near  the  N   E.  extremity  of  Long  Island 197 

ROBBIN'S  REEF Off  the  upper  end  of  Staten  Island,  New  York  Harbor 212 

CEDAR  ISLAND In  Sag  Iliirbor,  N.  B.  of  Long  Island 207 

SANDY  HOOK Sandy  Hook,  New  York  Harbor 210 

NEVERSINK Highlands  ot  Neversiuk.  New  Jersey 210 

BARNEGAT  SHOALS  . . .  South  side  of  Baniegat  Inlet,  and  north  end  of  Long  Bench 209 

CAPE  MAY Entrance  to  Delaware  Bay,  on  S.  W.  Point  of  Capo  May 218 

EGG  ISLAND Delaware  Bay,  north  side 219 

COHANSEY  CREEK  ....  Delaware  Bay,  north  side 220 

TUCKER'S  BEACH Tucker's  Beach,  between  Old  Inlet  and  Now  Inlet 2 17 

CAPE  HBNLOPEN On  Cape  Henlopen,  S  side  of  entrance  to  Delaware  Hay 219 

CAPE  HENLOPEN  BEACON,  Cape  Henlopen,  S.  side  of  entrance  to  Delaware  Bay 219 

BO.MBAY  HOOK North-west  end  ol  Bombay  Hook  Island,  Delaware  Bay 220 

MAHON'S  DITCH At  Mahon's  Ditch,  Delaware  Bay 220 

MI8PILLI0N  CREEK...South  side  of  Delaware  Bay 221 

CHRISTIANA  RIVER  . . .  .Mouth  of  Christiana  River,  Delaware  Bay 221 

REEDY  ISLAND N.  W.  part  of  Del.iware  Bay 2i.'0 

BREAKWATER  BEACON.on  Delaware  Breakwater 2 1!» 

BODKIN  ISLAND South  side  of  entninco  to  Patapsco  River,  Chesapeake  Itay 233 

NORTH  POINT North  side  of  entrance  to  Putnpsco  River,  Cliesai)eake  Bay 23;{ 

THOMAS'  POINT South  of  entrance  to  Annapolis,  Chesapeake  Buy 232 

POOL'S  ISLAND On  Pool's  Island,  Chesapeake  Hay 234 

SMITH'S  ISLAND On  Smith's  I.-lund.  Clu-sapeake  Bay 229 

CONCOKD  POINT Entrance  of  Susqiiehiinnnh  River,  Chesapeake  Buy 234 

COVE  POINT North  of  the  entrance  to  Putuxent  River,  Cliesiipeake  Bay 230 

POINT  LOOKOUT North  side  of  the  eutnnice  to  Potomac  River,  Clio.supeako  Bay ..  227 

I'INEY  POINT On  Potomac  River,  E.  side,  about  M  miles  from  ils  mouth 230 

SHARP'S  ISLAND In  Chesapeake  Bay,  off  the  entniiice  to  Clmpiaiik  River 232 

CAPE  HENRY South  side  of  the  entrance  to  Chesapeake  Bay 224 

OLD  POINT  COMFORT.. Mouth  of  James  River,  entrance  to  Hampton  Roads .^..  225 

SMITH'S  POINT Near  the  mouth  of  Potonnic  River,  south  side '..  227 

NEW  POINT  COMFORT. About  18  miles  north  of  Old  Point  Comfort,  Chesapeake  Bay....   226 

SMITH'S  ISLAND North  end  of  Smith's  Lsland.andufN.  entninco  toCliesapeake  Bay  224 

BACK  RIVER  POINT. .  .Souih  side  of  entrance  to  Back  River     '.  225 

CHINCOTEAGUE Between  Cape  Ilenhipen  and  Cape  Charles 223 

LITTLE  WATTS  ISLAND.  East  side  ot  Chesapeake  Bay 229 

BALD  HEAD Near  mouth  of  Cape  Fear  River 237 

FEDi,RAL  POINT North  side  of  Inlet  to  Cape  Fear  River 238 

UAPB  HATTERAS On  Cape  Hatteras 235 

PAMPLICO  POI  NT South  side  of  entrance  to  Pami)lico  River 236 

BODDY'S  ISLAND On  Boddy's Island 235 

OCHACOKE West  end  of  Ocracocke  Island 236 

CAPE  LOOKOUT On  Cape  Lookout 237 

CHARLESTON . Qu  LighthouBe  Island,  W.  of  Ship  Cluuinel^to  Charleston  Harbor,  240'. 


XXXVI 


LIST   OF    LIGHTHOUSES. 


Page. 

BACOON  KEY ....OnCape  Romnn 240 

NORTH  ISLAND Emit  w.le  of  ontrmicc  to  I'odeu  Kivi-r 24l) 

MOUHIS  ISLAND For  th<?  Ovoriill  Chmiiiel,  toClisuleitton  llmlior 2-10 

au  L  LI  VAN'S  ISLAN  D. .  .To  Riii.Io  <ivfr  CImi  lesion  lliir -40 

TYIIKU South  Miilo  ol' eiitiniico  to  Siiviiiiiiiili  Hivcr S43 

TYItKK  BEACON Eii.teiiy  ofTybfo  Lighlhoiw«Mliiitiiiil  li  inilo 24:1 

KIG  ISLAND  DEACON . .On  V\f;  IhIiiikI,  Saviiiiiiiih  Kivt-r 243 

ST.  S  MON'S  USLA.<D...Soulht'ii(lofSt  SimoiiS  IhIiukI 245 

•SAIi'ELO  ISLAND North  bIiIi!  of  entriiiu-eto  Dolioy  Sound 244 

WOLl'S  ISLAND  BEACON,  North  end  of  Wolf's  IhIiukI 244 

LITTLE  CL'MhBHLAND  ISLAND,  South  sideof  entrunco  to  Simtillii  River 24/5 

ST.  AU(ii;STINE North  end  of  Aniwtiisiii  Uliuid 24(i 

ST.,IOHN'S  UIVBR Neiir  inonthofSt  .John's  liiver 245 

CAl'E  CANAVERAL.... On  CuiwCiiuaveral 201 

CAl'E  KLOKIDA On  Key  Bi.icnyno 218,  2fil 

DHYT0KTU(5AS On  Bu'sh  Island,  Florida  Reef 248,  25!) 

KEY  WB.vr.. On  Key  WestM.ind 2(i0,  2fi(! 

CAl'E  ST  GEORGE West  I'lisg  to  St.  George's  Sound 27(1 

«T.  MARK'S Entrance  to  St  Mark's  Iliirlior 2G!) 

PBNSACOLA Entrunce  to  I'ensacola  Ilurbor 271 

AMELIA  ISLAND Entrunce  to  St.  Mary's  River 27 1 

CAl'E  ST.  BLAS On  Cape  St.  Bias 271 

D0(}  ISLAND Eaht  side  of  middle  entrance  to  St.  George's  Sound 270 

EGMONTKBY Entrance  of  Tnmpii  Bay 2(i!) 

MOBI  LE  roiNT Entranco  to  Mobile  Bay 272 

6AND  ISLAN D 3  mites  S.  S.  VV.  from  .Mobile  Point 272 

CAT  ISLAM) East  of  the  entrance  to  Lake  Borgne 274 

PASS  CIlRISf  IAN N.  Westerly  of  Cat  Isl.ind  Light 274 

RAYOU  ST  .lOH  N Bayou  St.  .lohn,  5  miles  N.  of  Now  Orleans 274 

FRANKS  ISLAND On  Friuik's  Island,  mouth  of  Mississippi,  N   E.  Pass 277 

SOU  PH-WEST  PASS  ....  Entrance  of  .Mississippi  River,  8.  W.  Pass 277 

SOUTH  POINT South  Pass.  Mississippi  River 277 

POINT  AU  FER Entrance  of  Aichafalaya  Bay 279 

VER.VULLION  BAY On  Marsh  Island 280 

CHANDELEURISLAND.Norlh  end  of  Ulmndeleur  Island 274 

GUN  KEY Southern  edge  of  Gun  Key 25fi 

ABACO Hole  in  the  Wall.  Island  of  Abaco 250 

SALT  KEY  BANK Double  Headed  Shot  Keys 2.57 

BERMUDA Southern  part  of  Bermuda 2!)fi 

NASSAU Harbor  of  Nassau,  New  Providence 300 

VERACRUZ OntheCaslleofSan.IuandoUUoa 202 

MATEHNILLOS North  side  of  Island  of  Cuba 321 

CAYO  PIEDRAS Cayo  Piedras,  north  side  of  Island  of  Cuba 323 

CA  YO  DIANA Cayo  Dianii,  north  side  of  the  Island  of  Cuba 324 

HAVANA On  Morro  Castle,  Cuba 325 

ST.  .IA(iO St.  Jago  de  Cuba,  south  side  of  the  Island  of  Cuba .32l» 

CIENFUEGOS Xagua  Harbor,  south  side  of  the  Island  of  Cuba 335 

MORANT  POINT Easternmost  extremity  of  the  Island  of  Jamaica 372 

SAN.1UA.\ Entrance  to  the  Harbor  of  San  Juan,  Island  of  Porto  Rico 38(> 

ST.  THOMAS Harbor  of  St.  Thomas 39(i 

NEVIS On  the  Island  of  Nevis,  west  side 403 

GUADALOUPE Islets  of  Petite  terre,  near  Guadaloupe 410 

■"""""'"-  ■        ••    building  in   18.11 42(; 

427 


BARBADOES Island  of  Barbadoes,  South  point,  b 

TOB  A(iO Port  Scarborough.  Islmid  of  Tobiigo 

TRINIDAD Entrance  of  Port  d'Espagnc,  Island  of  Trinidad 4'J5 

POINT  TUCACAS At  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Triste,  Vmexiiela 453 

CAYO  GltANDE On  Cayo  Grande,  on  the  Coast  of  Vriti-Aw'm,  building  in  1850  . .   455 

BUEN  AYRE On  Point  Rasa  del  Lacre,oa  thelsliuid  ( '  Buen  Ayre 45() 

CU RAZAO On  Little  Curazno  Island 450 

ST.  ANNE'S EntranceofSt  Anne  Harbor,  Curazao  Island 456 

MAUGKR  KEY Honduras   498 

DEMEIURA Guyana  SOU 

POINT  MACORIPB Seara,  Brazil 518 

MA RANHAM On  Mount  Itacoloini,  western  side  of  Bay  of  Maranham 52 1 

PERNAMBUCO At  Pemambiico,  Brazil 526 

CAPEST.  ANTONIO....  On  Cape  St.  Antonio,  Brazil 529 

CAPE  FRIO On  Cape  Frio.  Rio  Janeiro 531 

BARE  ISLAND Entrance  to  Harbor  of  Rio  Janeiro 537 

SANTA  CRUZ  FORT  ....Within  the  Harbor  of  Rio  .Janeiro 537 

ISLAND  OFMOELA Otf  the  eastern  entrance  of  the  Harbor  of  Santos,  Brazil 541 

RIO  GRANDE  DE  SAN  PEDRO,  entrance  of  the  Harborof  Rio  Grande  de  San  Pedro,  Brazil,  550' 

ISLAND  OF  FLORES       .Near  the  mouth  of  River  Plate 552 

MONTE  VIDEO On  the  Cairo  of  Monte  Video.  Brazil 555,  562 

An  accoimt  of  the  LIGHT  VESSELS  of  the  United  States,  with  their  present  position,  as  near 
u  can  be  ascertained,  will  be  found  in  the  Description  of  the  Harbors  and  in  the  Sailing  Directions 
in  this  work.  They  are  frequenUy  changed  to  other  places,  and  oilen  with  no  previous  notice,  and> 
are  not  included  in  this  table 


Pa/te. 
210 
1»40 
UIO 
240 

1243 

24:1 
....  2-13 

245 

244 

244 

245 

24(1 

24,"i 

2(il 

...24S.  2fil 
...248,  25!) 
...200,  Sfid 

27(r 

2fiD 

271 

271 

271 

270 

2(i!l 

272 

272 
'.'..'....  274 

274 

274 

277 

277 

277 

279 

280 

274 

, 250 

, 250 

257 

2!)fi 

300 

292 
........  321 

323 

324 

325 

32!> 

33.'» 

372 

Rico 38() 

3!){i 

403 

410' 

42(1 

4i:7 

435 

453 

ligin  I80O  ..   455 

45t) 

45()' 

45G 

, 498 

50() 

518 

am 521 

, 526. 

529 

531 

537 

537 

izil 541 

edro,  Brazil,  550' 

552 

.......655,  562 

position,  B8  near 
Sailing  Directions- 
ivioui  notice,  and> 


ui:\D^<. 


WIND  Is  a  RPiisililf"  curront  or  movement  of  tho  ntinoMplicro  ovpr  Iho  oailli'H  Burfnco.  Wind, 
The  witiils  iirci  dividod  into  I'eriMiniiil,  I'erindical,  and  V'lU'iiililo.  Tlwy  nro  idno  dividi-d 
into  (JiMicnd  iiiiJ  I'Hrliddiir.  IVit'iiniid,  or  ('(iii.iliint  WIikIm.  urn  tlii),s«<  wliicdi  always 
liliiw  llio  Biiint"  way  ;  such  in  lliut  tinsl.'rly  wind,  l)t«t\viifn  llin  trii|)iiH,  cuiinnnnly  calltul 
th(<  Tradii  Wind.  Peiimlicid  Winds,  arn  tliosn  wliidi  constantly  return  at  cortain  liincs  : 
su'li  iirn  land  and  hini  Incnzes,  blowing  alti'rnalidy  iVoin  land  to  aca,  and  from  sea  to  land. 
Vnri.il)lt',  or  Kri'atic  Winds,  aro  Mnidi  as  blow  imvv  liiis  way,  now  that,  and  nru  now  up, 
now  IniHlied,  witliout  rp;>ularity  either  as  to  time  or  placu  :  lucli  mo  the  winds  pruvulont 
to  t!iH  northward  of  30°  N.  latitinle. 

I'KIIENNIAL,  or  TRADK  WIND.— Over  extinsivo  trnclH  of  ocran.  in  tlie  lower    Perennial, 
Iiititndt'g,  or  toward  tlie  P()uator,  P('ri!niiial  or  Trade  Winds  are  found  to  prevail,  wiiieh    or  TWadt 
follow  the  course  (d"  the  sun  :  thus,  on  tiie  Atlantic  Ocean,  at  about  100  leaf^nt's  from  llio     Wind. 
African  shore,  between  the  iatiludcs  ef  10  and  2li  dc>;ree9,  a  con.-^fant  brefze  prevails  from 
tile  nortli-eastward.     Upon  approachinjr  tlio   American  side,  this  N.  E.  wind  bucoinos 
more  easterly,  or  seldom  blows  more  than  ono  point  of  the  compass  from  llio  east,  either 
to  the  iiortliward  or  southward. 

'I'ho  Perennial,  or  Traile  Wind,  on  tlie  Ameiicnn  side  of  tlie  Atlantic,  extends, nt  times, 
to  30  degrees  of  latitude,  whicli  is  about  4  dej;r<'ea  further  to  tlie  northward  than  on  the 
African  side.  Likewise  on  the  south  of  the  e(|uator,  tiie  Perennial  Wind,  whicdi  is  here 
from  the  S.  R.,  extends  3  or  4  defjrees  farther  towanls  tlut  coast  of  lira^il  than  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  ocean.  The  general  cause  of  this  wind  is  the  motion  of  the  earth, 
ill  its  diurnal  rotafon,  connocteil  with  its  orbital  movements. 

HEAT  increases  evaporation,  and  renders  the  almospliero  cnpal)Ie  of  supporting  a  Heal- 
greater  quantity  of  moii-ture  tlian  it  would  do  in  a  c(Joler  state  :  were  the  atmosphere  of 
Olio  continued  warmth,  and  its  motion  uniform,  there  would  lie  no  rain  ;  for  it  woulil  not 
imbibe  more  moisture  in  exiialalion  than  it  could  supjiort.  Ilcat  often  produces  diver- 
sity in  winds  and  weather,  for  near  the  land,  when  the  sun  has  great  influence,  it  occa- 
sions Und  and  sea  breezes  near  the  shore ;  and,  in  |)articular  situations,  heavy  gusts  and 
squalls  of  wind.* 

Small  islands,  lying  at  a  great  distance  from  the  main  land,  operate  very  little  upon  the 
Trade  Wind.  If  elevated,  these  islands  arc  mori*  subject  to  ruin  tliun  if  low  :  this  may 
be  occasioned,  principally,  by  the  ascent  <;iven  to  the  wind,  or  iitmosphere,  in  vl,  ing  over 
tiio  tops  of  the  liills  ;  when,  being  cooled,  it  condenses  into  small  dri/./.ly  rain.  'I', 'is  is  an 
effecl  peculiar  to  all  mountains,  even  in  the  middle  of  continen  s,  when  the  atmosphere 
is  sulliciently  charged  with  moisture.  For  the  sun's  rays,  by  healing  the  iitmosphere, 
according  to  its  density,  renders  it  much  warmer  at  the  bottom  than  at  the  top  of  hills. 
Upon  a  mountain  sloping  from  the  sea  towards  the  top,  and  about  700  yards  in  height,  a 
pleasant  breeze  has  been  observed  in  shore,  and  fine  cli^ar  weather;  the  nir  in  ascending, 
(being  condensed  by  cold,)  at  about  half  way  up,  had  the  appearance  of  fog,  or  thin  light 
(lying  cloulds ;  but  at  the  top  was  a  misling  rain  ;  and  this  may  frequently  bo  seen  in  any 
iiiouiitainous  country. f 

The  clouds,  in  the  higher  regions  of  the  air.  are  fre(piently  seen  to  move  in  a  direction 
contrary  to  the  wind  below.  The  N.  E.  Trade  Wind  has  frequently  a  south-westerly 
wind  above  it;  and  a  .S.  E.  wind  often  (irevails  boneiith  one  whoso  dircjction  is  N.  W.  It 
is  found  'hat,  just  without  the  limits  of  the  Trade  Wind,  the  wind  generally  blows  from 
the  opposite  quarter.  The  counter  current  of  air,  above,  is  often  seen  in  a  fresh  Trade 
Wind. 


♦  Tbn  cnufics  of  tornndocs,  liurricnnes,  and  Bqnnlls,  Imvi;  boon  thus  assigned  by  Dr.  Hnre,  of  Pliila- 
(lelnliiii:  The  air  heiag  ti  perlbcllv  elastic  flaiil.  its  (lensity  is  di^pemlunt  on  pressiiro,  a?  well  ns  on  heat, 
and  it  dofs  not  lullow  ihut  air,  which  may  he  heated  in  consrcjuoncn  of  it.-*  |iroxiiiiity  to  thn  eurili,  will 
give  place  to  colder  nir  (Vom  uhove.  The  pressure  ol  th ;  utmosphi're  vnryiiiy  with  the  elevution,  one 
stratum  ol'  air  iniiy  he  ns  much  rnrcr  I)}'  the  diminution  of  presr^uro  cuascqiient  to  its  altitude,  us  (hmser 
by  the  cold  consequent  toils  remiitrne?s  from  the  earth,  and  Hnotherniny  bo  n?  iiiMch  denser  hv  the  in- 
creased pressure  arising  from  its  pruximity  to  llio  curlh,  us  rarer  hy  beins  warmer.  Ilencr,  wlien  une- 
qually heated,  diflerent  strulu  of  die  atmosphere  do  not  always  disturb  each  other.  Yet,  after  a  time,  iho 
rareficatioii  in  die  lower  stratum,  by  greater  bent,  may  so  far  exceed  that  iu  the  upper  stratum,  uttciidiint 
on  an  inferior  degree  of  pressure,  that  this  stratum  may  prepoiicierale  and  begin  to  descend.  Whenever 
lueh  a  movement  commences,  it  must  proceed  with  inereasim;  velocity;  for  the  |)rcssiire  on  the  upper 
ttrntum.  and  of  ceiirse,  its  density  and  weii;ht,ini  reuses  ua  it  fullri;  whilst,  on  the  contrary,  the  density 
and  weight  of  the  lower  must  lessen  it  us  it  rises,  und  hence  the  change  is,  at  times,  so  inucli  nccelerated 
>9  to  occasion  the  furious  und  suddenly  varying  currents  of  air  which  attend  tuniadoes,  hurriuunea,  and 
squalls. — -^illiman's  Jouknai..  No  12. 

t  Oriental  Navigator,  or  East  India  Uircctory. 


RLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


' 


ii 


There  nresevernl  heii;lit.s  of  clouds  on  the  const  of  North  America;  the  highest  nnd 
tlioso  whicli  iii)|)i'ar  ol  the  fmci-t  tnxtiiro,  (if  1  iimy  be  iillowed  the  exjjression,)  Itoiitliigh- 
est  in  the  ntmosphero.  Ciouds  of  tliis  dpscriptioii  iilwnys  conio  from  the  westward;  just 
before  the  n|)poiiriinco  of  iin  ensterly  storm,  they  gather  in  the  S.  W.  and  S.  S.  W.,  and 
if  a  glim  (as  the  siiiiors  call  il)  in  tin*  N.  E.  iind  N.  N.  K.,  tlx-ir  Hi)|)onrance  in  the  si<y  in- 
dicates a  N.  E.  storm  of  snow  or  rain.  All  great  st()rn)s  which  are  mot  with  above  the 
latitude  of  30^,  whether  snow  or  rain,  begin  to  the  westward  and  advance  gradually  to 
the  eastward,  along  the  const  of  North  America,  in  conformity  with  the  general  atmos- 
pheric current  of  the  region.  When  a  S.  W.  wind,  in  the  upper  regions  of  the  atmos- 
phere, is  attended  witii  a  N.  E.  or  opposite  wind  below,  the  latter  is  commonly  accompa- 
nied with  low  (lying  clouds,  which  drive  before  the  wind,  while  the  higher  clouds  go  iu  a 
contrary  direction. 

Ship-masters  and  pilots,  on  leaving  the  coast,  outward  bound,  may  notice  that  so  long 
ns  these  higher  clouds  do  not  gather  anil  thiclien  in  the  \V.,  or  S.  W.,  so  long  a  heavy  or 
Ions  storm  of  snow  or  rain  will  not  occur.  Any  rain  or  foul  weather,  that  proceeds  from 
winds  which  rise  from  the  eastward,  and  drive  before  the  wind  to  the  westward,  without 
a  fall  of  the  barometer,  is  not  attended  with  violent  wind. 

The  space  fioin  latitude  05°  to  28^,  or  L'!J°  between  the  Variable  and  Trade  Winds, is 
remarkable  tor  a  jontinuul  change  of  winds,  with  sudden  gusts  and  calms,  niin,  thunder 
and  lightning.  This  space  has  been  called  the  Horse  Latitudes,  because  it  has  often 
been  found  necessary  hero  to  throw  overboard  the  horses  which  were  to  be  transported 
to  the  West  Indies,  itec.  To  the  northward  of  those  latitudes,  upon  the  American  ccast, 
and  more  than  one-third  over  the  Atlantic,  westerly  winds  prevail  nearly  nine  months  in 
the  year. 

In  the  latitude  above  the  Trade  Winrls,  the  wind  from  the  W.  S.  westward  being  re- 
plete with  moisture,  from  the  great  (^'^halation  between  the  tropics,  as  it  approaches  the 
cold  and  higher  latitudes,  becomes  condensed  into  showers  of  hail,  rain,  or  snow. 

There  is  often  an  interval  of  cnlm  between  the  Trade  Winds  and  the  opposite  winds 
in  high  latitudes.  This  is  not,  howevei-,  always  the  case  ;  for,  if  the  Trade  Wind  in  its 
borders  be  much  to  the  eastward,  it  fretjuently  changes  gradually  round  without  an  in- 
terval (>C  cnlm.  There  is  generally  also  a  calm  in  a  certain  space  between  the  two  pre- 
vailing winds  blowing  in  opposite  directions,  as  between  the  Trade  Wind  and  the  west- 
erly wind  on  the  African  coast.  Iii  the  limits  of  the  Trade  ^Vind,  a  dead  calm  is  gener- 
ally the  prelude  to  a  storm,  and  it  ougiit  always  to  ho  considered  as  a  prognostic  thereof, 
though  a  storm  often  nfipears  without  this  warning.  ' 

When  the  sun  is  at  its  greatest  dediniition,  north  of  the  equator  Uio  S.  E.  wind,  par- 
ticularly betwecm  Hrii/.il  and  AtVica,  varying  towards  the  course  of  the  '  un,  changes  a 
quarter  or  half  a  point  njore  to  the  southward,  nnd  the  N.  E.  Trade  Witid  veers  more 
to  the  eastward.  Tlio  contrary  h-.()pons  when  the  sun  is  nc^ur  the  southern  tropic  ;  for 
then  the  S.  E.  wind,  south  nf  the  Ime,  gets  more  to  the  east,  and  the  N.  E.  wind,  on  the 
Atlantic,  veers  moie  to  tin   north. 

On  the  African  side  of  the  .S.  Atlantic,  the  winds  are  nearest  to  the  south,  nnd  on  the 
America']  side  iiearest  th'*  east.  In  these  seas,  Doct.  Halh^y  observed,  that  when  the 
wind  was  eastward,  the  weather  was  gloomy,  dark,  and  rainy,  with  hard  gales  of  wind; 
but  when  the  wind  veered  to  the  southward,  the  weather  generally  bocoirea  serene,  with 
gentle  hreoy-f"*  next  to  a  calm. 

The  I'^iJUATor.iAi,  Limits  of  the  N.  E.  or  Perennial  Trade  Wind,  between  the  mei:- 
dians  ',i  H  and  'JC  degrees  west,  have  been  found,  upon  the  comparison  of  nearly  400 
jjiiriu.ls,  English  and  French,  to  vary  considerable  even  in  the  same  months  of  the  year. 
V/e  have  shown,  by  the  annexed  tai)le,  where  the  N.  E.  Trade,  according  to  the  pr(>ba- 
ble  mean,  may  bo  expected  to  cease  in  the  dilfereut  months  :  and  it  will  be  found  to  na- 
swer  the  purpose  with  sufficient  precision. 

In  this  table  the  columns  of  extremes  show  the  uncertain  termination  of  tiie  Trade 
Winds,  as  expin'ienced  in  ditferent  ships.  The  annexed  columns  show  the  probable 
mean  ;  and  the  last  column  exhibits  the  mean  breadth  of  the  interval  between  the  N.  E. 
and  S.  E.  winds. 

Thus  the  table  shows,  that,  in  the  month  of  January,  the  N.  E.  Trade  has  been  found 
sometimes  to  cease  in  the  pij'allel  of  10°,  and  sometimes  in  that  of  3°  N.  That  the 
probable  mean  of  its  limit  is  about  5°  N.;  th.at  the  S.  E.  Trade,  at  the  same  time,  has 
been  found  to  cease  sometimes  at  only  half  a  degree  north  of  the  line,  and  soiuetimes  at 
4  degrees;  that  the  probable  mean  of  its  limit  is,  therefore,  two  degrees  and  a  quarter; 
and  that  the  interval  between  the  assumed  means  of  tiio  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  Trade  Winds 
is  eq:r:i  to  2i  degrees:  and  so  of  the  rest. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


•3 


he  highest  and 
ion,)  floiit  high- 
westward;  just 
I  S.  S.  W.,  and 
e  in  the  sliy  in- 

with  above  the 
ICO  graduiilly  to 

goiii-ral  iitinos- 
s  of  the  ntmoa- 
lonly  accompa- 
r  clouds  go  iu  a 

ice  that  so  long 
long  a  heavy  or 
t  proceeds  from 
3tward,  without 

Trade  Winds,  is 
IS,  niin,  thunder 
ise  it  has  often 
I  be  transported 
American  ccast, 
'  nine  months  in 

stward  being  ro- 
;  approaches  the 
jr  snow. 
J  opposite  winds 
•ado  Wind  in  its 
3  without  an  in- 
en  the  two  pre- 
d  and  the  west- 
id  calm  is  gener- 
ngnostic  thereof, 

S.  E.  wind,  par- 
B  '  un,  changes  a 
''ihd  veers  more 
lern  tropic  ;  for 
E.  wind,  on  the 

outh,  and  on  tho 
,  that  when  the 
d  gales  of  wind ; 
res  serene,  with 

tween  the  niei:* 
m  of  nearly  400 
iths  of  tho  year, 
ing  to  the  proba- 
1  be  found  to  ua- 

on  of  the  Trade 
)W  the  probablo 
twoen  the  N.  E. 

^  has  been  found 
P  N.  That  tho 
)  same  time,  has 
nd  sometimes  at 
s  and  a  quarter ; 

E.  Trade  Winds 


Table  showing  the  Equinoctial  Lvr' 
MeridiariD 


of  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E,  Trade  Winds  between  iLe 


18  and  26  Degrees  West. 


N.    r..    TRADE   WIND. 


rPicira  General 

CEASES.        Extremes. 

In  January  at..  3°  to  10° 
Fobrnary. . .  2    to  10 

March 2    to    8 

April 24  to    9 

May 4    to  10 

June 6i  to  13 

July- 84  to  14 

August 11    to  15 

Soptoinber ..   9    to  14 

October 74  to  14 

November  . .  6    to  11 
December . .  3    to    7 


N. 


Probable 
Mean. 
b°  N. 

4  — 
4i  - 

5  — 
64  — 
84  - 

11    — 

13     — 

114  — 

10  — 
8  — 
54  — 


3.    K.   TRAT         VIND. 


General 
Extremes. 

04°  10  4=  N. 

04  to  3  — 
to  24  — 
to  24  — 
to  4  — 
to  5  — 
to  6  — 
to  5  — 
to  5  — 
to  5  — 
to  5  — 
to  44  — 


I.NTK.RVAL 
BETWKKN. 


04 

0 
0 
0 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


Probable 
Mean . 

25='  N. 

U  — 

li  - 

l.i  - 

24  - 

3  — 

34  — 

3i  - 

3  -- 

3  — 

3  — 
34 


Mean  Breadth 

2i  degrees. 

3} 

34 

35 

4 

54 

74 

9i 


—     I      2 


7 

4i 

2i 


In  the  space  of  varial)Ie  winds  between  the  trades,  exhibited  in  the  last  colunm,  it  has 
been  foun(l  tliat  southerly  winds  prevail  more  than  any  other  ;  more  particularly  when 
tlio  sun  has  great  northern  declination.  Homeward  bound  East  India  ships  are  there- 
fore enabled,  at  this  season,  to  cross  the  space  more  quickly  than  those  outward  bound; 
which  they  do,  in  some  degree,  at  all  other  times.  Yet  calms  and  variable  winds  are 
experienced  in  every  month  in  the  year  within  this  space  ;  but  tho  former,  which  are 
more  generally  in  the  vicinity  of  the  N.  E.  Trade,  seldom  continue  long.  These  calma 
are  frtupiently  succeeded  by  sudden  squalls,  against  which  every  precaution  should  be 
taken,  as  mimv  shijis  have  lost  tMoir  topmasts,  and  have  been  otherwise  damaged  by  them. 
Wliirhvinds  have  sometimes  accompiiiiied  these  squalls. 

On  tho  eastern  coast  of  North  America,  and  among  its  islands,  tho  course  of  the  general 
ensterly  or  triule  wind  is  uninterrupted,  though  subject  to  some  modifications  in  direc- 
tion and  force.  At  a  short  distance  from  tho  land  the  sea  breeze  calms  at  night,  and  is 
replaced  by  the  land  breeze.  This  variation  happens  every  dny,  unless  a  strong  wind 
prevails  from  tho  northward  or  southward  ;  the  first  of  these  being  experienced  from 
Octolier  to  May,  and  the  second  in  July,  August  and  September. 

To  the  southward  of  Newfoundland,  shifts  of  wind  are  very  common,  and  it  frequently 
happens  that,  after  blowing  a  gale  upon  one  point  of  the  compass,  tho  wi'ia  suddenly 
shifts  to  the  opposite  point,  and  blows  equally  strong.  It  has  been  known  th  it  while  one 
vessel  has  been  lying  to,  in  a  heavy  gate  of  wind,  another,  not  more  than  30  leagues  dis- 
tant, has,  at  the  very  same  time,  been  in  another  gale  equally  heavy,  and  lying  to.  with 
the  wind  in  quite  an  opposite  direction.  This  fact  shows  the  whirlwind  character  of  thesa 
gales,  the  opposite  winds  being  on  opposite  sides  of  the  ciixuit  of  the  gale. 

In  tho  year  1782,  at  the  time  the  Ville  de  Paris,  Centaur,  Ramillies,  and  several  other 
ships  of  war,  either  foundered,  or  were  rendered  unserviceable,  on  or  near  tho  banks, 
together  with  a  whole  fleet  of  West  Indiamen,  excepting  five  or  six,  they  were  all  lying 
to  with  a  hurricane  from  E.  S.  E.,  the  wind  shifted  in  an  instant  to  N.  W.j  and  blev/ 
equally  heavy,  and  every  ship  lying  to,  under  a  square  course,  foundered. 

This  disiister  was  owing  to  their  being  hove  to  on  tho  wrong  tuck.  We  insert  tho  fol'-' 
Inwinp,  as  it  has  met  the  approvol  ofsi.v.io  of  our  most  experienced  ship-mnstcps  : 

"  Halting  To." — The  recent  disasters  which  havo  occurred  to  American  ships,  such  Ileavivg  tt. 
as  the  Dorchester,  Medora,  Ambassador,  and  many  others,  havo  caused  some  inquiry, 
and  it  has  been  suggested  by  experienced  men,  borne  out  by  the  facts,  that  the  disasters 
may  be  traced  to  the  "  heaving  of  ships  to"  on  the  wrong  tock  ;  that  is,  that  vessehs  bound. 
to  tho  westward  from  Europe,  instead  of  "  heaving  to"  with  their  larboard  tacks  on  board,, 
in  a  southwcf ";  gale,  as  is  too  often  tho  case,  should  "  heave  to  "  on  the  starboard  tack. 

It  is  well  known  that  our  h  mvy  westerly  gales,  in  tho  winter  season,  often  begin  at  the 
Bouth  or  southwest,  and  as  they  increase  in  intensity,  haul  round  gradually,  but  oftentimes 
suddenly,  in  a  squall,  to  tho  northwest.  Take,  then,  tho  case  of  a  ship  bound  to  the  west- 
ward, tlie  wind  commencing  at  the  south  or  southwest,  the  ship  on  tho  larboard  tack ; 
the  master,  anxious  to  get  to  the  westward,  carries  his  canvas  as  long  as  possible,  and 
continues  on  that  tack  until  ho  has  his  ship  under  a  close  raefed  main-topsail,  tiiizen 
staysail  or  trysail — in  fact,  "  hove  to"  on  the  larboard  tack,  the  sea  making  heavy  from 
tho  southwest,  tho  wind  keeps  hauling  to  the  westward,  and  tne  ship  fdlls  off  with  it  until 
she  lays  in  tho  trough  of  tho  sea — tho  ioathen  having  tho  control  over,  nod  breaking  with, 
its  full  forco  on  the  broadside,  there  is  Di.  c.uvas  at  this  time  set  that  she  can  ware  und6r 


''pwiii^'^p^ 


iiwujniw.^j||il«|lllt.><!k  ■■  ■'"■ 


4»  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

with  snfety— the  ship  is  then  disabled,  nnd  sometimes  founders — the  fact  is,  over  anxiety 
to  get  to  the  westward  has  kept  the  ship  too  long  uj)on  this  tnck. 

Now,  what  is  the  best  course,  as  n  gonernl  rule,  to  bo  adopted  /  We  think  that  the 
rule  should  bo  laid  down,  that  wlien  it  is  blowiii^i;  so  hard  as  to  make  it  necessary  to  furl 
the  fore»uil,  or  head  sails,  previoud  to  doing  so,  the  ship  should  I;-j  wore  round,  and  "hove 
to"  on  the  starboard  tack  ;  and  as  the  wind  hauls,  she  comes  up  heading  the  sea  more  and 
more,  until  it  is  on  the  bow,  and  of  coui-se  in  the  best  position  to  avoid  its  shock. 

Again,  often  the  wind  shifts  so  suddenly  in  a  S.  \V.  gale,  that  a  ship  is  taken  aback  by 
being  on  tho  larboard  tuck,  whicli  is  fearful  at  any  time,  and  particularly  so  at  such  a  time. 
Those  wiio  have  cx|)orienccil  it  on  a  winter's  passage  from  Europe,  with  n  crew  worked 
down  witli  hard  weatiier,  and  on  a  dark  night,  can  only  imagine  what  a  scene  it  is. 

This  cannot  occiii-  on  being  •'  hove  to"  on  the  starboard  tack. 

Tho  wn)(ls  within  tho  gulf  are  not  so  liable  to  sudden  shifts  as  on  the  outside,  or  to  the 
eastward  of,  Breton  Island.  The  weather  to  the  southward  of  Magdalon  Islands,  be- 
tween them  and  i'rince  Edward  Island,  is  generally  much  clearer  than  on  tho  north. 

On  the  Wauls,  aswjlucnch^  the  tracks  soiled  by  Bermuda  Vessels:  and  on  the  advan- 
luge  which  maij  be  derived  from  iSaiiivg  on  Curved  Courses  when  meeting  with  pro- 
gressive lievoiving  Winds. 

In  high  latitudes  the  prevailing  atmospho  'ic  currents,  wlien  undisturbed,  are  westerly, 
particularly  in  tho  winter  season.  As  storms  and  gales  revolve  by  a  fixed  law.  and  we  are 
able  by  ohrtfrvafion  to  distinguish  revolving  gales  from  steady-blowing  winds,  voyages  may 
be  shorUMied  by  taking  advantage  of  thein. 

The  indications  of  a  Progressive  Revolving  (Jale,  are,  a  descending  barometer  with  a 
regularly  veering  wind,  or  with  the  wind  changing  suddenly  to  the  opposite  point. 
In  the  Northern  Hemisphere  Storms  revolve  from  right  to  left. 
[n  the  Southern  Hemisphere  Storms  revolve  from  left  to  right. 

The  indications  of  a  steady-blowing  wind  which  will  not  revolve,  but  blow  in  a  straight- 
line  direction,  is  a  high  l)arometer  remaining  stationary.  When  the  steady  wind  blows 
from  either  J'olo,  according  to  tho  side  of  the  Kpator,  the  atmosphere  wdl  be  both  dry 
and  cool.  An  increase  of  warmtli  nnd  atmospheric  moisture,  are  indications  of  the  ap- 
proach of  a  Progressive  Revolving     .'ind. 

Sailing  from  Bermuda  to  New-  iork. — The  first  half  of  ii  revolving  gale,  is  n  fair  wind 
from  Bermuda  to  New- York,  because  in  it  the  wind  blows  from  the  east;  but  tho  lust 
half  is  a  ■•  wind  from  New-York  to  Bermuda.  During  the  winter  season,  most  of 
the  gales  which  pass  along  the  coast  of  North  America  ar(^  Revolving  Gales.  Vessels 
from  Bermada  bound  to  New- York,  should  put  to  sea  when  the  7iorth  west  wind  which  is 
the  conclusion  of  a  jjassing  gale  is  becoming  moderate,  and  tho  barometer  is  rising  to  its 
usual  level.  The  probability  is,  more  particularly  in  the  winter  season,  tliat.  after  a  short 
calm,  the  next  succeeding  wind  will  be  easterly,  the  first  part  of  u  fresh  Revolving  Wind 
coming  up  In  .1    tlie  south-west  (piarter. 

A  ship  at  Bermuda  bound  to  New- York  or  the  Chesapeake,  might  sail  whilst  the  wind 
is  still  west,  and  blowing  hard,  provided  the  barometer  indicate,  that  this  west  wind  is  ow- 
ing to  a  Revolving  Gale  which  will  veer  to  the  northward.  But  as  the  usual  track  which 
gales  follow  in  this  hemis|)hero  is  noitherly  or  north-easterly,  such  a  sliip  should  be  steer- 
ed to  the  southwu"d.  As  the  wind  at  west,  veei-s  towards  north-west  and  north,  the  vessel 
would  come  up,  arul  at  last  make  a  course  to  the  westwaril,  ready  to  U\Ve  advantage  of 
the  east  wind,  iit  the  setting  in  of  the  next  revolvitig  gale. 

'ailing Jroni  Sac  York tu  Bcimn/a. — A  vessel  at  New  York  and  bound  to  Bermuda, 
at  the  time  wlien  a  Revolving  Wind  is  passing  along  the  North  American  coast,  should 
not  wait  in  pmt  lor  ihe  westerly  wind,  but  sail  as  souii  as  the  first  |,orli(in  (d'tlie  gale  has 
[lansed  by,  and  ihe  N.  K.  wind  is  veering  towards  north,  ])rovided  it  slionld  not  blow  too 
hard.  For  the  north  wind  will  veer  to  llit!  wata-urd,  and  become  every  hour  fairer  for 
the  voyage  to  Bermuda. 

Sailing  bdicem  Halijax  anil  Urrmula. — A  great  niinilier  of  gales  pass  along  tho  coast 
of  North  America,  lollowing  nearly  Minilar  tracks,  and  in  tho  winter  season  make  the 
voyages  between  Bermuda  nun  Hulifax  very  boisterous.  These  gales  by  revolving  as  ex- 
tended whirlwiiuls,  give  a  north- rly  wind  alon'4  tho  shore  of  lli(«  American  Continent,  nnd 
H  suutherli/  \vm\  on  tho  Whirlwiml's  op|)nsit(<  side  far  out  in  the  Allanlic.  In  siiiiint:  from 
Halifax  lo  Berinud.i.  it  is  desirable  for  this  reason  to  keep  to  iho  westward,  as  allbrdn.'' 
a  betler  ciiance  (d' having  a  wind  blowing  at  north,  instead  of  one  nt  south;  as  well  aa  be- 
cause tin  current  of  the  Gulf  Stioam  sets  vessels  to  the  eastward. 

From  Barhadoes  to  Bermuda- — When  vessels  coming  from  Biirliadoc's  or  its  neighboring 
West  India  Islands,  sail  to  Bermuda  on  11  direct  course,  they  sometimes  fall  lo  tho  east- 
ward of  it,  and  find  it  very  dillicult  to  make  Bermuda  when  westtndy  winds  prevail. 
Tliey  should  therefore  take  advantage  of  the  trade  wind,  to  nake  the  06°  or  70'^  of  west 
longitude,  before  they  louve  tho  !Ju'^  of  lutitudo. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


•6 


la,  over  anxiety 

think  that  the 
ncessnry  to  furl 
mid,  and  "  hove 
e  sea  more  and 
shock. 

tiiken  abnck  by 
lit  such  11  time. 
n  crow  worked 
cene  it  is. 

nfside.  or  to  the 
len  Isliinds,  be- 
a  the  north. 

I  on  the  advan- 
'.eitng  wkk  pro- 


d,  nra  westerly, 
law,  and  we  are 
ds,  voyages  may 

romefer  with  a 
ite  point. 


ow  in  a  stniight- 
;iuly  wind  blows 
will  be  both  dry 
iitious  of  the  ap- 

!o,  is  a  fair  wind 

list ;  but  the  last 
season,  most  of 
Gidcs.     Vi'ssels 

t  wind  which  is 
is  rising;  to  its 
liat.  after  a  short 

.evolving  Wind 

whili^t  the  wind 
«t  wind  is  ow- 
il1  truck  which 
uiuld  b(i  steer- 
nurlh,  tli<!  vessel 

0  advantago  of 

1  to  IJormudn, 
n  coast,  should 
of  tlio  jiiilo  has 

1  not  blow  too 
hour  fairer  for 

along  the  coast 
iiison  niiike  the 
rovolvitig  as  ex- 
ContiniMit,  and 
In  siiilint^  from 
(1,  as  iilfordii.'i 
as  well  as  be- 
lts neighboring 
fall  to  liio  cast- 
winds  prevail, 
or  70'^  of  west 


Sailing  from  England  to  Bermuda. — On  a  ship  leaving  England  for  Bermuda,  instead 
of  steering  a  direct  course  for  the  destined  port,  or  following  the  usual  practice  of  seeking 
for  the  trade  winds,  it  may  bo  found  a  better  course,  on  the  setting  in  of  an  eas/rr/?/ wind 
to  steer  west,  and  if  the  wind  should  veer  by  the  south  towards  the  wtst,  to  cuntinuo  on 
the  port  tack,  until  by  changing,  the  ship  could  lie  its  course.  If  the  wind  should  continue 
to  veer  to  north,  and  as  it  sometimes  does  even  to  the  eastward  of  north,  a  ship  ujmn  the 
starboard  tack,  might  be  allowed  to  come  up  with  her  hend  to  the  westwar  1  of  her  direct 
coui'se.  On  both  tacks  she  would  have  sailed  on  curved  lines,  the  object  of  which  would 
bo,  to  carry  her  to  the  westward  against  the  prevailing  wind  and  current-i.  There  is 
reason  for  believing  that  many  of  the  Revolving  Winds  of  the  winter  bcison,  originate 
witiiiii  the  tropics  :  and  that  ships  seeking  for  the  steady  trade  winds,  even  fiirthcr  south 
than  the  tropic  at  that  period  of  the  year  will  frequently  be  disappointed.  How  near  to  the 
Kipiator  the  revolving  winds  originate,  in  the  winter  season,  is  an  important  point  not  yet 
sutficiently  observ>id.  The  quickest  voyage  from  England  to  Bermuda,  therefore,  may 
j  perhaps  bo  tirade,  by  sailing  on  a  course  composed  of  many  curved  lines,  which  cannbt  be 
previously  laid  down,  but  which  must  be  detei'mined  by  the  winds  met  with  on  the  voyage. 
This  principle  o*' taking  advantage  of  tht!  changfis  of  Revolving  Winds,  by  sailing  on  curved 
lines,  is  applicable  to  high  latitudes  in  both  hemispheres,  when  ships  are  sailing  westerly. 

GOVKR.NMKNT    HoUSK.    BERMUDA,  W.  R. 

iil,«t  March.  1840. 
The  above,  by  C  '    Reid,  then  Governor  of  Bermuda,  exhibits  the  general  character  of 
the  winds  in  both  hemispheres,  in  high  latitudes. 

"  The  general  easterly  wind  of  the  tropical  resions  is  felt  on  the  coast  of  Guyana,  and 
on  the  coasts  of  the  Carrbbean  and  Mexican  Seas,  but  with  variations  which  may  be  de- 
nominated diurnal  and  annual.  The  diurnal  period  is  that  which  the  sea  breeze  causes, 
and  which  stvi'uis  the  coast  usually  at  an  angle  of  two  i)oints.  less  or  more,  according  to 
the  loca  i!  '  ai  ,/^er  circumstances;  and  then  the  land  wind,  which,  coming  from  the  in- 
terior, ,il  J  -  ',.9  offshore.  The  sea  breeze  comes  on  at  about  nine  or  ten  in  the 
forenoon,  ,111(1  continues  while  the  sun  is  above  the  horizon,  increasing  its  force  as  tliat  lu- 
minary augments  its  altitude,  and  diminishing,  in  a  similar  [u-oportion,  as  the  sun's  altitude 
decreases.  Thus,  when  the  sun  is  on  the  meridian,  the  sea  breeze  is  nt  the  muxinioin 
of  its  strength ;  and  at  the  time  the  sun  reaches  the  horizon,  tiiis  breeze  has  perceptibly 
ceased.  Tlie  I-ind  breeze  commences  befoi'e  midnight,  nod  continues  until  the  rising  of 
the  sun.  sometimes  longer.  A  space  of  some  hours  intervenes  between  the  land  breezes 
ceasing  and  sea  breezes  coming  on,  during  which  there  is  a  perfect  calm. 

"The  annual  jieriod  of  the  trndo  wind  here  is  produced  by  the  proximity  or  distance  of 
the  sun,  which  occasions  the  only  two  seasons  known  in  the  tropic — the  rainy  and  the 
dry  Reii:^oii'j.  The  first  is  when  the  sun  is  in  the  trttpic  of  Cancer,  and  heavy  ruins  with 
loud  tbunder  are  prevalent.  In  this  season  the  wind  is  generally  to  the  southward  of  east, 
but  interrupted  by  frequent  calms,  yet  it  occasionally  blows  with  force  and  obscures  the 
atmosphere. 

"  When  the  sun  is  into  the  tropic  of  Capricorn,  the  dry  season  commences,  nnd  then 
the  trade  wind,  wliich  is  steady  at  N.  E.,  is  cool  and  agi-eeable.  At  this  season,  N.  and 
N.  W.  winds  are  sometimes  found  blowing  with  much  force,  and,  indeed,  in  some  (h-gree, 
the.\  regukiily  alternate  v,  ;'li  too  general  wind,  as  they  are  more  frequent  in  November 
and  Di^cember  than  in  '     '.i'dm;';   and  .March. 

"  In  the  change  of  tlu  -  «i'  -  there  is  a  remarkable  difference:  for  in  .\pril  and  May 
no  change  is  oxperien  c  ■  )',  i:  i  mospliere,  and  the  weather  is,  in  sjeneral,  beautifully 
fine;  but  in  Aueust,  Septi'i.ii  r,  ..  1  October,  there  are  usually  calms,  or  very  li'jht  winds  ; 
and  dreadful  hurricanes  in  tliei  v<  .nc'ths  sometimes  render  the  navigation  perilous'.  From 
those  perils,  however,  are  exemj)fi'd  the  Island  of  Trinidad,  the  coasts  of  Coloinbiii,  (late 
Terra  Kirinii.)  the  (Julfs  or  Bays  of  Darien  nnd  Honduras,  and  the  Biaht  of  Vera  (^-uz, 
to  which  the  liuriicanea  do  not  rf  ,,ch.*  In  the  space  of  sea  between  the  Great  .\ntilbi3 
luul  the  con-it  of  (Jolombia,  the  genei-al  N.  K.  or  trade  wind  regularly  prevails  ;  but  near 
the  shore  the  following  peculiarities  are  found: 

"  At  tlie  Greater  Antillas,  the  sea  breeze  constantly  prevails  by  day,  and  the  land  breeze 
by  niniit.  Tliese  land  breezes  are  the  fn^she.'^t  which  are  known,  and  assist  vt'ssels  much 
in  getting  to  the  eastward,  or  reinountin<i  to  windward,  which  without  them  wou'.il  be 
dlinost  iiiipossible.  At  tin;  Lesser  Antillas,  as  Dominica,  Martinique,  and  St.  Lucia,  fie, 
there  are  no  land  brf    '.es. 

"On  the  coasts  el"-  Guyana  there  are  no  land  breezes,  nor  more  wind  than  is  generally  ex- 
;;c-iic;.ceil  between  tii  >  .  onic.  In.fanuary,  February,  and  .March,  the  winds  ln-re  b|nw 
from  N.  to  N.  E.,  ami  '•Ui>  weatiier  is  clear.  In  April,  May,  and  .lune,  the  winds  are 
IVein  10.  to  S.  K.  In  .Tnly,  August,  and  ."September  there  are  culms,  with  toriridocs  from 
S.  to  S.  W. :  and  in  October,  November,  and  December,  there  are  continual  rains,  while 


*  lIiirrii'iiiK's  biivi'  soiiioiiuios  occurri'd  ia  tlio8c  icgious. — W.  C.  R. 


6* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  C,©AST  PILOT. 


the  Bky  is,  in  general,  obscured  by  clouds.  lu  the  dry  season,  which  is  from  January  to 
June,  the  heat  is  very  great;  and  in  the  wet  season  rains  and  thunders  are  constant  and 
violet:  t. 

"On  the  coasts  of  Cuniana  and  Cnraccns,  to  Cape  la  Vela,  the  breeze  follows  the  regu- 
lar course;  but  from  that  cape  to  Cape  S.in  Bias  the  general  wind  alters  its  direction; 
for  it  blows  from  N.  E.  to  N.  N.  E.,  excepting  in  the  months  of  March,  April,  May,  and 
June,  when  it  comes  to  E.  N.  E.,  and  is  then  so  unconmoiily  strong  as  to  render  it  ne- 
cessary for  vessels  to  lie  to.  These  gales,  which  are  well  Unown  to  mariners,  extend 
from  about  mid-channel  to  within  2  or  3  leagues  of  the  roast,  where  they  become  weak, 
especially  at  night.  On  this  coast,  about  tlio  Gulf  of  Nicaragua,  are  westerly  winds, 
which  the  pilots  of  that  country  call  vendovalos,  (rainy  winds,)  in  the  months  from  July 
to  December;  but  tliese  winds  never  pass  the  parallel  of  13°  N.,  nor  do  they  blow  con- 
stantly, but  alternate  with  the  sea  breeze. 

"  Upon  the  Mosquito  Shore,  Honduras,  and  eastern  coast  of  Yucatan,  the  general 
winds  or  breezes  prevail  in  February,  March,  April,  and  May  ;  but  during  the  first  two 
of  these  months  they  are  occasionally  interrupted  by  norths.  In  June,  July,  and  Au- 
gust, the  winds  here  are  from  the  eastward  and  westward  of  south,  with  tornadoes  and 
calms.  In  September,  <^)ctober,  November,  December,  and  January,  they  are  from  the 
northward  or  southward  ot  west,  with  frequent  gales  from  \V.  S.  W.,  W.,  N.  W.,  and 
Dortli. 

"  On  the  northern  and  western  coasts  of  Yucatan,  i)etween  Cape  Catoche  and  Point 
Piedras,  or  Descondidfi.  and  thence  to  Campeche,  there  is  no  other  than  'ho  N.  E.  or 
general  wind,  interrupted  by  hard  norths  in  the  season  of  them  ;  and  about  the  end  of 
April,  tornadoes  commence  from  N.  I  '  S.  E.  These  tornadoes  generally  form  in  the 
afternoon,  continue  about  an  hour,  and     i  .  "jU  the  serenity  of  the  atmosphere  is  re- 

established.    The  season  of  the  tornadoea  .  les  until  September,  and  in  all  iho  time 

there  are  sen  breezes  upon  the  coast,  which  ^  i  from  N.  N.  \V.  to  N.  E.  It  has  been 
remariiod  that,  as  the  sea  breeze  is  more  fresh,  the  more  fierce  is  the  tornado,  espe- 
cially from  June  to  September.  The  sea  breezes  come  on  at  about  11  of  the  day  ;  and  at 
night  the  wind  gets  round  to  E.,  E.  S.  E.,  or  S.  E.,  so  that  it  may  be  in  some  degree 
considered  as  a  land  breeze. 

"On  the  coast  of  the  Mexican  Sea,  from  Vera  Cruz  to  Tanipico,  the  breeze  from  E. 
S.  E.  and  E.  prevails  in  Ajiril,  May,  June,  and  July;  and  at  ni};ht  the  land  breeze  comes 
oflT  from  S.  to  S.  \V. ;  but  if  the  land  breeze  is  from  the  N.  \V.,  with  rain,  the  wind  on 
the  following  day  will  be  from  N.,  N.  N.  E..  or  N.  E.,  particularly  in  August  and  Sep- 
tember: these  winds  are  denominated  in  the  country,  '  vicntos  do  cabezn,  o  veiidcvalus,' 
(head  winds,  or  rainy  winds ;)  they  are  not  strong,  nor  do  they  raise  the  sea  ;  with  thorn, 
therefore,  a  vessel  may  take  an  anchorago  as  well  as  with  the  general  brec/e;  but  they 
iujpede  getting  out,  for  which  the  land  breo/.o  is  re(|uircil.  The  vientos  de  cal)eza,  or 
head  winds,  reach  to  about  20  or  30  leai;iies  from  the  coast,  at  which  dista:ice  are  found 
those  at  E.  and  E.  S.  E. 

"  Fi'om  the  middle  of  Soptemlcr  until  the  month  of  March,  caution  is  necessary  in 
making  Vera  Cruz,  for  the  ncn-tlis  are  then  very  heavy.  The  narrowness  of  this  hai'bor, 
the  oi)sfi'uction  formed  by  the  shoiilsat  its  entrance,  and  the  slender  shelter  it  afibrdsfrom 
the  norths,  render  an  attempt  to  make  it  during  one  of  them,  extremely  dangerous,  for 
it  will  be  impossible  to  take  the  anchorage.  The  following  description  of  the  winds  hero, 
has  been  written  by  Don  Beruanlo  de  Orta,  n  captain  in  the  Spanish  navy,  who  has  been 
cajjtain  of  the  Tort,  and  who  surveyed  it : 

"Although  in  tli(t  (Julf  of  IMi.xito  wo  camiot  see  that  there  is  any  other  constant 
wind  than  the  general  breeze  of  tiiis  region,  notwithstanding  that,  from  S('|)t('mbor  to 
March,  the  north  winds  interrupt  the  get)eral  course,  anil,  in  some  degree,  divide  the 
year  into  two  seasons,  wet  ami  dry.  or  of  the  Breezes  and  Noiths:  the  first,  in  which 
the  lireozi's  aro  settled,  is  from  March  to  September;  and  !lie  second,  in  which  the 
norths  blow,  is  from  September  to  March.  For  greater  clearness  wo  shall  ex[)laiu  each 
sepiiralt'ly. 

" 'i'lie  first  of  the  norths  is  r^'jidarly  felt  in  the  month  of  Septemlier ;  but,  in  this 
month  and  lln^  following  one,  UctobiM',  the  norths  do  not  blow  with  mucdi  force.  Some- 
times it  h»i)jiens  that  they  do  not  appear,  but,  in  that  case,  the  breeze  is  interrupted  by 
heavy  ruins  and  fortiadops.  In  November  the  norths  are  established,  blow  with  iimch 
strength,  and  coulinuo  a  length  of  time  during  December,  .lanuary,  and  Feliiinny.  In 
these  mouths,  after  they  bej;in,  tiir'v  increase  fast ;  and  in  four  hours  or  a  littb'  unire,  at- 
tain their  utmost  str<'ngth,  with  which  they  c(uitiuue  blowing  for  48  hom's  :  but  after- 
wards, tlumgh  they  do  not  ccii-ic  tbr  some  days,  they  are  moderate.  In  these  months  tho 
norths  nre  obscure  and  nurth-we.-terly.  and  they  come  on  so  fn-quently,  that  there  is,  in 
generid,  not  nn)re  thiiu  4  or  G  <liiys  between  them.  In  .^larch  and  April  they  aro  lU'ither 
so  fre<|ueut,  nor  last  so  long,  and  are  clearer;  but  yet  they  are  more  fierce  for  tho  first 
24  hours,  nud  have  less  north-westing.     In  the  iuleivul  before  November,  in  which,  us 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•7 


)in  January  to 
e  coDstant  und 

lows  the  regu- 
its  direction; 
pril,  May,  and 
3  render  it  ne- 
I'iners,  extend 
become  weak, 
Bsterly  winds, 
itha  from  July 
hey  blow  con- 

1,  the  general 
;  the  first  two 
July,  and  Au- 
tornaduea  and 
1  are  from  the 
.,  N.  W.,  and 

die  and  Point 

-ho  N.  E.  or 

out  the  end  of 

ly  form  in  the 

jsphore  is  ro- 

n  all  the  time 

It  has  been 

torniido,  espe- 

le  day  ;  and  at 

some  degree 

•eezo  from  E. 
breeze  conjes 
1,  the  wind  on 
cust  and  Sep- 
o  vemlcvales,' 
I ;  with  thoni, 
'zo;  but  they 
do  ciilioza,  or 
ICO  aro  found 

necessary  in 
f  this  harbor, 
it  adbrdti  from 

muorons,  for 
(^  winds  here, 
who  has  been 

tlii'i'  constant 
Srpicniber  to 
'11,  (liviilo  the 
ii<t,  in  which 
in  wiiich  tho 
explain  each 

;  hut,  in  this 
rco.  Somi'- 
tcirnpled  by 
V  with  iiuich 
I'biuary.  la 
Hie  MKire,  at- 
H  :  but  after- 
■  months  the 
t  there  is,  in 
y  aro  neither 
for  the  first 
in  which,  us 


we  have  said,  tho  norths  are  established,  tho  weather  is  beautiful,  and  the  general  breeze 
blows  with  great  regularity  by  day;  the  land  breeze  as  regular  by  night. 

"There  are  various  signs  by  which  tho  coming  on  of  a  north  may  be  foreseen:  such 
are,  tho  wind  steady  at  south;  tho  moisture  of  the  wails,  and  of  tlio  pavements  of  the 
houses  and  streets:  seeing  clearly  the  Peak  of  (3riziiba  and  riie  Mountains  of  Perote  and 
Villa-Rica,  with  the  cloud  on  those  of  St.  Mailiii,  having  folds  like  a  white  sheet;  the 
increase  of  heat  and  dew;  and  a  thick  fog  or  a  low  scud,  flying  with  velocity  to  the 
southward  ;  but  tlie  most  certain  of  all  is  the  baronietor:  for  this  instrument,  in  the  time 
of  the  norihs  at  Vera  Cruz,  does  not  vary  more,  between  its  highest  and  lowest  range, 
than  eight-tenths;  that  is  to  say,  it  does  not  rise  higher  than  30 J'^^  inches,  nor  fidl  lower 
than  29^"^  inches.  The  descent  of  tho  mercury  |)redicts  the  norths;  but  they  do  not 
begin  to  blow  the  moment  it  sinks,  which  it  always  does  a  short  time  before  the  norths 
come  on ;  at  these  times  lightnings  appear  on  the  horizon,  especially  from  N.  W.  to  N. 
E.;  the  i^ja  sparkles,  cobwebs  are  seen  on  tho  rigging,  if  by  day;  with  such  warnings 
trust  not  V,  the  weather,  for  a  north  will  infallibly  come  on. 

"  This  wind  generally  moderates  at  tho  setting  of  the  sun  :  that  is  it  does  not  retain  tho 
same  strength  which  it  had  from  0  in  tlio  morning  to  3  in  the  afternoon,  unless  it 
commences  in  tlie  evening  or  at  night,  for  then  it  may  increase  olherwise.  Sometimes 
it  happens  that,  after  dark,  or  a  little  before  midnight,  it  is  found  to  bo  the  land-wind,  from 
the  northward  and  westward;  in  whicli  case,  should  ii  get  round  to  tlie  southward  of 
west,  tho  north  will  be  at  an  end,  and  the  general  breeze  will,  to  a  certainty,  come  on  at 
its  regular  liour  ;  but  if  it  does  not  happen  at  the  rising  of  the  sun,  or  afterwards,  and 
at  the  turn  of  the  tide,  it  will  return  to  blow  from  the  north,  with  the  same  violence  as 
on  tlie  day  before,  and  then  it  is  called  a  Norte  do  Marea,  or  Tide-North. 

"Tho  Norths  also,  sometimes,  conclude  by  taking  to  the  northward  and  eastward, 
which  is  more  certain;  for,  if  \\w  wind  in  the  evening  p(*ts  to  N.  E.,  although  the  sky 
remained  covered  tho  day  following,  but  by  night  the  land  breeze  lias  been  from  the  north- 
ward and  westward,  the  regular  breeze  will  surely  ensue  in  the  evening,  good  weather 
succeeding  and  continuing  fur  4  or  G  days;  the  latter  perii>d  being  the  longest  that  it  will 
last  to,  in  the  season  of  the  norths  ;  but,  if  tho  wind  retrograde  from  N.  E.  to  N.  N.  E., 
or  N.,  tho  weather  will  be  still  unsettled. 

"Examples  are  not  wanting  of  norths  happening  in  May.  June,  July,  and  August,  at 
which  times  they  are  most  furious,  and  are  called  Nortesdel  Muesu  Colorado  ;  the  more 
moderate  are  called  Chocolateros,  but  these  are  rather  uncommon. 

"Tho  wet  season,  or  tlie  season  of  tho  breezes,  is  from  March  to  September;  the 
breezes,  at  the  end  of  March,  and  through  tho  whole  month  of  April,  as  already  exi)lained, 
are  from  time  to  time  interrupted  l)y  norths,  and  are  from  E.  S.  E.  very  fresh  ;  the  sky 
sonielimos  clear,  at  other  times  obscure.  At  times  these  touch  from  S.  E.,  and  continue 
all  night,  without  giving  place  to  the  land-breeze,  which  prevails,  in  general,  every  night, 
excepting  when  the  north  wind  is  oi:.  The  land-bre(>ze  is  freshest  when  the  rains  have 
begun. 

"  After  the  sun  passes  the  zenith  of  Vera  Cruz,  and  until  he  returns  to  it,  that  is,  from 
the  10th  of  May  to  the  27tli  r)f  July,  the  breezes  aro  of  the  lightest  description:  almost 
calms,  with  much  mi-<t  or  haze,  and  slight  tornadoes.  After  that  time,  the  pleasant 
breezes  from  the  N.  W.  to  N.  E.  sometinies  remain  fixed. 

"From  the  UTth  of  July  to  the  middle  of  Octolicr,  when  the  norths  become  established, 
the  tcUMiadoes  are  fierce,  with  heavy  rains,  thunder,  and  lightning;  those  which  bring  the 
heaviest  winds  are  from  the  east,  l)nt  tliev  are  also  of  the  shortest  <luration. 

"In  the  season  of  the  breezes,  tlui  total  variation  of  the  barometer  is  four-tenths;  the 
greatest  ascent  of  tlie  mercury  is  \i\  :!()  inches  lhirty-fiv(!-oiui-hundredths,  and  its  gi'eatest 
descent  to  2!t  inches  ninety-six-one-hiindredths.     The  thernuimcter  in  ,1  uly  rises  to  87°, 

and  does  not  fall  to  83^'^  ;  in  Decemlier  it  rises  to  SOi",  Init  never  falls  biduw  GG.i° 

This,  it  nmstbe  understood,  was  ascertained  in  the  shade,  the  instrument  being  placed  iu 
one  of  the  cooli'st  and  best  vimtilated  halls  in  the  castle. 

'•  In  the  niDiittisof  August  ami  September,  rarely  a  year  passes  wilhout  hurricanes  near 
Florida  ami  the  n(n'tliern  Antillas;  biit  to  Vera  Cruz,  or  any  jiart  of  the  coast  thence  to 
Cani|)eche,  they  never  ai'ise:  all  that  is  felt  being  the  litMvy  sea,  which  has  arisen  in  the 
hiiiher  latitudes.  Hurricanes  begin  l)lowing  I'rom  the  n(uthward  and  eastward;  and  al- 
lhon.;h  they  do  not  always  go  round  the  same  way,  yet  in  gtMieral  they  next  go  to  tho 
southward  and  eastward,  wilh  tliick  squally  weather  and  rain." 

From  Ta.  ipico  to  Bay  of  St.  Mernird,  the  winds  are  continually  from  E.  to  S.,  and 
light  from  the  month  of  .\pril  to  Ani;nst:  the  contrary  is  experienced  in  the  other  months. 
This  coast  is  exposed  (m  ai'count  of  the  hardness  of  gales  from  Y,.  and  E.  S.  E.,  which 
blow  without  inl(M*missioti  tor  two  or  three  days  bet'ore  lianrmg  to  the  northward. 

In  latitude  20°  30'  N.,  then;  are  land  breezes  at  night,  which  blow  from  midnight  to 
nine  A.  iM. 

Frinn  May  St.  Hernard  to  the  Mississippi,  there  aro  l„nd  breezes  at  daylight,  and  on 
the  days  entering,  the  winds  haul  to  S.  E.  und  E.  S.  E.,  and  iu  the  afternouu  it  generally 


mn^fmnm^m' 


8#  "  BLUNT'S  A^ifiRICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

hauls  S.  W.  In  winter  the  southerly  winds  nre  very  tempestuous,  nnd  blow  for  the  spnco 
of  two  or  three  days.  The  months  most  to  bo  feared  to  niivij;iite  this  son,  are  Auoust, 
September.  October,  nnd  Noveiiibor,  in  which  there  nre  huniciines  and  winds  on  shore 
so  heavy  thiit  no  canvns  can  stand  thorn ;  upon  the  Mississippi,  and  all  its  mouths,  tiiore 
are  very  thick  fogs  very  frequently,  especially  in  February,  Mtiruh,  and  April,  and  in  June 
nnd  July. 

From  the  Mississippi  to  lat.  28°  N.,  in  the  month  of  April  to  July,  the  reigning  winds 
are  generally  from  N.  to  K.  and  from  E  to  S.  in  tin'  morning,  and  in  the  afternoon  they 
haul  S.  \V.  These  S.  W.  winds  are  tempestuous  in  August,  September,  and  October, 
nn  epoch  in  which  are  also  experienced  heavy  southers  and  hurricanes.  From  Novem- 
ber to  March  the  winds  blow  from  the  northward,  beginning  first  from  S.  E.  and  S.  with 
heavy  rain,  when  it  hanis  to  S.  W.  and  W.,  and  blows  very  heavy,  till  it  hauls  to  N.  W. 
and  N.,  wiien  it  clears  the  weallier,  nnd  then  to  N.  E.,  nnd  is  mild. 

From  lat.  28°  N.,  to  the  soutliornmost  of  the  Florida  Keys,  the  trade  wind  reigns  in 
the  morning,  and  at  tnid-day  it  hauls  in  from  ilie  soa.  This  happens  in  summer,  but  in 
winter,  especially  from  November  to  March,  the  winds  blow  from  S.  to  W.,  and  raise  a 
very  heavy  sea. 

In  the  new  channel  of  Bahama,  the  reigning  wind  is  the  trade,  interrupted  in  winter 
by  UiU'ths,  and  in  sunimrr  by  calms.     AMiough  the  northern  limit  of  this  chaiuiel  is  in 
28°  30'  N.,  and  consequently  within  the  limits  of  the  trades,  yet  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
in  mind  that  in  winter,  that  is,  from  Novemlier  to  April,  you  will  m(!et  with  the  varia- 
bles at  or  before  yon  arrive  to  lat-  27°,  which  variables  are  from  E.  to  S.  and  from  S.  to 
\V.,  nnd  in  summer  von  have  cairns  nnd  light  airs  from  S.  to  VV.  and  from  \V.  to  N. 
On  the  east-         ON  THE  EASTERN  COAST  OF  BRAZIL,  between  the  months  of  September 
em  coast  of      and  March,  the  winds  generally  prevail  from  N.  by  E.  to  N.  E.  by  E.     Between  March 
Btazil.  and  .September  the  preva'ling  winds  nre  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  S.  E. 

The  fornu3r  of  these  is  generally  termed  the  nortiierly  monsoon,  and  the  latter,  the 
southerly  one;  although  there  appears,  in  fact,  to  be  no  direct  and  opposite  change  in 
them  on  or  about  the  equinoxes,  as  is  generally  the  case  with  the  winds  so  called. 

These  winds  are  simply  a  eontinuat  on  of  the  S.  E.  trade,  which  changes  its  direc- 
tion as  above  descriliei),  and  is  influenced  by  the  land  on  its  approach  thereto.  When 
the  sun  is  to  the  northward,  no  |)articular  (lilference  is  ol)served  in  the  S.  E.  trade,  but 
it  may  be  carried  within  sight  of  the  coast,  with  scarcely  any  deviation:  nevertheless, 
about  both  e(piinoxes,  but  more  especially  when  the  sun  is  ad.'ancing  to  liie  northward, 
calms  and  veiy  light  winds,  with  apparetuly  no  settled  quarter,  will  prevail  near  the  coast; 
and  this  may  be  said  to  be  ir  ore  particularly  the  case  on  that  part  of  it  between  the 
Abrolhos  and  Capo  Frio.  As  the  sun  advances  to  the  southwaid.  the  trade  wind  will 
genei'ally  come  round  to  the  north-eastward,  and  will  have  its  retrograde  movenu'iit  with 
the  return  of  the  sun  to  the  equinox.  At  this  lattei'  season,  ships,  on  approaching  the 
coast,  will  begin  to  observe  this  northerly  inclination  of  the  .S.  E.  trade,  when  within 
four  or  five  degrees  of  it,  aud  which  they  will  find  gradually  to  increase  as  they  incline 
to  the  westward. 

AVithin  a  few  miles  of  the  coast,  nnd  in  the  difleient  roadsteads  nnd  hnrbors,  the  wind 
generally  blows  directly  upon  it;  nnd,  in  \]u'  deep  harbors,  and  upon  the  sliore,  this  is 
generally  superceded  by  a  land  brec^/e  which  scnnetimes  lasts  a  greatei'  part  of  the  night. 
About  Hio  Janeiro  this  land  breeze  sometimes  extends  as  far  seaward  as  Round  Island, 
while  at  Pernambuco  it  rarely  reaches  the  roadstead. 

The  preceding  remarlis  nre  those  of  Lieutenant  Ilewett.  Pimentel,  and,  after  him, 
M.  D'Apres,  has  said  that  the  winds  of  the  northeily  monsoons,  between  .Septem  )er  and 
March,  are  from  N.  E.  and  E.  N.  E.,  or  less  nortl.  -'V  than  as  above;  and  that  those  of 
the  southerly  monsoon  are  fiom  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  E.,  o.  nore  southerly.  It  n)ay  there- 
fore be  admitted,  that  they  do  sometimes  prevail  m')ro  from  the  south,  and  that  those 
near  the  north  but  seldom  occur. 

Mr.  Lindli'v,  in  his  narrative  of  nvoynan  to  Bia/.il,  having  resided  u  considerable  time 
on  shore,  at  Bahia,  Arc,  has  described  the  in-shore  wind  as  follows: — "From  Cape  St. 
Augustine,  (south  .vard.)  the  wind  blows,  9  months  in  the  year,  chiefly  north-easterly  in 
the  morning,  and  norlh-westerly  durin;:  the  evening  and  niulit.  This  conlitjucs  gradu- 
ally changing  along  the  coast,  till,  at  Rio  .laneiro  and  the  Rio  Plata,  it  becomes  a 
regular  laml  breeze  from  evfiiing  to  morning,  and  thronghonf  the  day  the  reverse. 
During  the  three  stormy  months,  that  is,  from  the  latter  end  of  February  to  that  of  May, 
the  wind  is  generidly  southerly,  blowing  veiy  fresh  and  squally,  at  times,  from  the  south- 
west. 

Lieutenant  Ilewett  1ms  observ(Ml,  that  the  winds  off  Cape  Frio  are  seldmn  found  to 
the  southward  of  east;  and  in  the  northern  monsoen  they  are  genendly  to  the  northward 
of  N.  E.  Heavy  nnd  'iolent  squalls  nre  occasionally  met  with  in  roni'iding  tlie  Cape,  to 
obviate  the  elfects  of  which  every  prerantirm  is  re(piired. 

The  same  oflicer  adds,  that  at  Rio  de  .faneiro,  the  sea  breeze  varies  in  its  commenre- 
ment  from  ton  to  oue  o'clock  in  the  forenoon,  aud  ceases  in  the  evening  belwoeu  the 


■■■■ 


mm 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


r  for  tho  spnco 
,  mo  Auguat, 
inds  on  shore 
iiuutha,  tlinre 
I,  and  in  June 

Mgning  winds 
teriioon  they 
and  October, 
roin  Novem- 
',.  and  S.  with 
uls  to  N.  W. 

ind  reifins  in 
innier.  hut  in 
.,  und  raise  a 

tod  in  winter 
channel  is  in 
isary  to  keep 
ith  tho  v.nia- 
id  from  S.  to 
\V.  to  N. 
f  Septcniher 
ween  March 

c  lat'ior,  tlio 
o  cliango  in 
ailed. 

Bs  itd  diroc- 
'to.  Wlien 
).  trade,  hut 
iJBVorlheless, 
J  northward, 
ar  tho  coast; 
)et\veon  tho 
o  wind  will 
I'emi'nt  with 
roadiing  the 
.^hen  within 
thoy  incline 

rs,  tlio  wi!id 
lore,  this  is 
tho  niftlit. 
)und  Ifbnd, 

,  nftor  him, 
)tom  icr  an(l 
liat  those  of 
:  may  tliere- 
that  those 

t?rnMo  time 
n  Capf  St. 
i-castcriy  in 
iUrs  ^radu- 
hecdiiics  a 
ho  ri'vcrso. 
iiat  of  May, 
n  tiio  south- 


H)  round  to 
"  norliiward 
lie  Capi',  to 

ccunmcnro- 
utwoon  the 


iioura  of  seven  and  eleven.  At  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  violent  squalls  from  the 
pj.  W.,  named  by  tho  i'ortugueao  "  Tere  Altos,"  immediately  BUiJersedo  the  sea  breeze, 
lasting  fiom  four  to  six  hours. 

The  late  Captain  .lohn  M'Bride,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  kept  a  regular  journal  of  the  winds 
and  weather  at  tho  KalUlnnd  Islands,  from  1st  of  February,  l/OO.  to  ILIth  January,  1767, 
which  WHS  published  in  1775,  by  Mr.  Dahymplo.  The  journal  concludes  with  the  fol- 
lowing general  remarks  : 

"From  going  over  tho  following  journal  of  the  winds,  for  the  space  of  one  year,  they 
will  be  found  to  prevail  in  tho  western  quarter,  and  generally  blow  a  close-retfod  topsail 
gale,  with  a  cool  air.  In  Novembt-r  the  winds  begin  to  bo  more  frequent  in  the  N.  W. 
quarter,  generally  hazy  weather,  and  for  tho  most  part  blow  about  l(>  or  20  houi's,  when 
it  begins  to  rain:  the  wind  then  regularly  shifts  into  the  westward,  and  so  on,  tdl  it  gets 
to  the  S.  W.  by  8.,  and  S.  S.  W..  when  it  blows  fresh,  and  cleai's  u]).  This  S.  S.  W. 
wind  continues  foraliout  IG  hours,  then  dies  away,  when  the  wind  shifts  again  to  the  N. 
W.  quarter;  this  continu(!8  during  Decembei',  January,  and  Fel)ruary,  imd  changes 
in  the  manner  above  mentioned,  every  three  or  four  days.  As  March  conit-s  on  you 
have  these  changes  but  seldom  ;  and  as  the  winter  advances,  they  ai'o  seldom  in  the  N. 
W.  quarter,  but  rather  incline  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  which  is  generally  accompanied  with 
sloet  and  snow.  There  is  not  tho  least  proportion  in  the  gules  between  winter  and  sum- 
mer. In  summer,  (as  I  have  before  observed,)  as  the  winds  are  in  tho  westward,  they 
blow  in  such  heavy  squalls  off  the  tops  of  the  mountains,  that  it  is  sometimes  an  hour 
before  a  cutter  can  row  to  the  shore,  although  the  water  is  smooth,  and  tht*  distance  of 
bat  one  cable  and  a  half  off.  In  the  winter,  the  winds  are  pent  up  by  a  keen  frosty 
air.  Tho  most  lasting  gales  are  those  from  S.  by  E.  to  S.  by  \V'.,  and  are  extremely 
cold." 

Ohservalions  on  the  Winds,  by  Cajptain  Frederick  Chamier,  R.  N. 

"The  trade  winds,  in  the  Wtst  Indies,  generally  blow  f:om  N.  E.  to  S.  E.,  varying 
according  to  circumstances,  whicii  will  be  hereafter  expressed.  About  Bnrbadoes  and 
tlie  Windward  Islands,  that  is,  from  Tobago  to  Barbuda,  tho  wind  will  bo  found  to  veer 
more  to  the  nortlnvard  in  tho  early  part  of  the  year,  than  in  the  months  of  June,  July, 
and  August.  In  the  more  northern  islands,  such  as  Dominica.  Montserrat,  Antigua, 
Nevis,  <5i:c.,  the  wind,  in  tho  evenings  of  January,  February,  and  March,  veers  lound  to 
about  north,  or  N.  N.  E.,  blows  very  fresh  in  scpjails;  and  from  the  extensive  space  of 
ocean  over  which  it  travels,  becomes  cool  and  very  I'efieshing.  The  thermometer,  even 
in  English  Harbor,  in  the  above  ninnths,  at  8  o'clock,  F.  M.,  I  never  saw  above  7G\  In 
this  season  of  the  yeai',  the  sickness  of  the  hot  months  is  no  longer  experienced  ;  tho 
general  lassitude  of  the  mornings  and  noons  of  July  and  August  seems  forgotten  ;  and  no 
Mian  who  visited  these  islands  during  tho  first  three  months  of  the  year,  wimld  believe 
that  the  change  of  seventy  or  eighty  days  could  make  such  an  annizing  diflerence  in  the 
look,  as  well  as  in  the  energy,  of  tho  inhabitants  of  the  Windward  Islands.  In  the  change 
of  seasons  (from  wet  to  dry)  a  great  dillerence  is  experienced  in  the  winds.  In  April 
anil  May,  the  atmosphere  is  in  general  clear,  and  fine  weather  prevails;  but  in  August, 
September,  and  Uctuber,  cahiis  or  very  high  winds  are  not  uncommon.  Strong  hurri- 
canes blow  in  tlieso  nmnths. 

"  in  speaking  of  hurricain^s,  they  are  well  known  to  have  been  very  rarely  experienced 
in  Trinidad.  The  main  land  of  Colombia,  the  (inlf  of  Darien  and  Honduras,  and  like- 
wise Vera  (Jruz,  two  almost  exenipt  from  tliis  scourge.  In  the  '  Derrotero  de  liis  An- 
tillas,'  however,  mention  is  made  of  a  hurricane  having  been  experienced  on  the  morning 
of  the  18Lh  of  August,  1810. 

"  In  the  greater  Antillas,  such  as  Janaiicn,  Cuba,  St.  Domingo  (or  Hayti,)  and  Porto 
Rico,  the  sea  breeze  blows  by  day.  and  the  land  wind  by  night ;  but  in  the  lesser  Antillas, 
such  as  iSIiirtinieo,  Dominica,  St.  Lucia.  Antigua,  &c.,  land  winds  are  very  uncommon  ; 
and  certainly,  in  all  my  cruizing  in  these  seas,  about  these  islands,  I  never  oxpeiieuced 
tiic  land  wind. 

"  From  the  Coast  of  Cunnina  to  Punta  Aguja,  tho  common  trade  wind  constantly 
blows  at  E.  S.  E.  to  E.  N.  K.,  the  land  wind  beiu'^  uncommon,  l)iit  still  in)t  unknown. — 
At  anchor,  in  La  (Jnayra  Koad.  in  Felirnary,  18J7,  a  very  liglit  cool  land  wind,  froin  the 
S.  .S.  W.  occasionally  reached  tlie  ship,  but  I  di)ul)t  its  ev(M'  extending  more  than  five 
mil  s  to  sea.  On  the  evening  of  the  tiOih  Octobei',  181(),  a  heavy  squall  came  from  the 
S.  8.  W.  off  Cape  la  V't-la,  and  blew  t'or  some  time  with  violence.  1  have  merely  men- 
tioned tho  two  above  facts,  because  in  the  Derrotero  it  is  ass(  ited  that  land  winds  are 
rarely  known  on  this  coast. 

"The  ri>\s{  l)ei\ve(!ii  Cape  la  \'ela  and  Santa  Martha  seems  more  uccusloined  to 
changes  of  wind  llian  any  oilier  part  of  tlie  West  Indies.  Alliimigh  ilio  ri^nniiks  of  some 
celebiated  .*<pan;>h  iiiivi;:atois  would  liMd  us  to  believe  tliat  tho  winds  blow  so  fiercely 
from  tho  E.  N.  E.  that  ships  are  obliged  to  lie  to;  yet  I  have,  in  tho  mouth  of  August, 


le* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


by  keeping  close  In  shore  between  Punta  Agnjn  nnci  Ciipo  la  Vela,  hnd  tlie  wind  ut  west 
for  two  or  three  diiys  together;  nnci  until  wo  hnd  passed  Rio  de  In  Ilticha,  niul  openod 
Cnpe  In  Vein,  we  neither  hnd  easterly  winds  nor  westerly  currents. 

"In  thnt  pnrt  of  the  const  of  Yucitnn,  botweon  Cnpe  Cntoche  and  Puntn  Piedrns,  or 
Deconocida,  and  thnt  const  wiiich  trends  to  the  southward  to  Cntnpeche,  the  trade  winds 
hnve  genernlly  been  nt  E.  N.  E.  In  the  evoninj;,  towards  Se])teiiil)er,  the  wind  occa- 
sionnllv  veers  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  and  this  has  been  called  n  'land  wind'  by  mnny  autliors. 

"  At  all  seasons  of  the  year,  1  have  experienced  land  winds  on  the  const  of  Culm  ;  that 
is,  from  Capo  Corrientes  to  St.  Jnjjo  do  Cuba.  If  tlio  son  breeze,  which  in  Cubn  ns  well 
as  Jnmaicn  and  St.  Domingo  (or  Hnyli,)  generally  begins  about  nine  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  freshens  until  noon,  should  in  the  evening  about  sun-set  dwindle  to  nearly  n  cabn, 
you  niny  be  certain  of  a  light  nir  off  the  land: — n  mark  to  judge  by,  nnd  which  I  never 
l<new  to  fail,  was  tlie  clouds  linnginglieavily  over  the  blue  mountains  of  Jnuinicn,  or  Cop- 
per Hills  of  Cuba. 

"  The  winds  operate  very  little  upon  the  thermometer.  From  Mny  to  October,  in  Ta- 
ranicn,  nt  day-dawn,  82°  will  be  the  average ;  it  will  bo  88°  nt  noon,  nnd  again,  8i°  in  tho 
evening.  To  find  the  thermometer  nt  78°  during  the  night,  even  in  n  place  where  tlio 
wind  circulates  freely,  cooled  also  by  tho  dew,  is  a  luxury  so  rarely  likely  to  occur,  thnt 
in  looking  over  my  private  journal  for  two  years,  I  cannot  discover  one  instance  of  it  in 
the  nhove  months;  yet  still,  the  land  winds,  to  those  who  Imve  been  long  residents  in  tho 
country,  is  n  luxury  most  eagerly  expected,  and  most  welconiely  received.  It  is  of  so 
different  a  kind  from  the  sea  breeze,  that  respiration  becomes  easy  ;  whereas,  with  tlio 
thcmometer  at  90°  at  Port  Royal,  nnd  the  sea  breeze  blowing  nearly  a  gale,  I  havo 
found  inhaling  the  hot  wind  very  oppressive  nnd  relnxing. 

"  Between  Jnmnica  and  Mnracaybo,  and  in  the  space  between  the  latter  nnd  St.  Do- 
mingo, I  hnve  always  observed,  that  should  the  trade  wind  at  daylight  be  at  E.  N.  1'^.,  nt 
noon  it;  will  generally  be  about  E.  by  S.,  if  tho  day  is  clear.  The  knowledge  of  this  gives 
n  great  advantage  in  n  windward  bent;  nnd  by  this  means,  watching  the  variation  of  tho 
wind,  you  will  be  able  to  lieud  the  current  for  some  hours, — un  ndvaatngo  whicli  every 
one  must  perceive." 

U.  S.  S.  Mississippi,  at  Sea,  Dec.  31,  184G. 
Sin — III  compliance  with  your  request,  I  have  tho  honor  to  make  the  following  re- 
mnrks  (the  results  of  observations)  on  the  manner  in  which  the  bnrometer  is  ntfected  by 
the  chniigesof  weather  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  nnd  tho  indications  it  gives  of  suchchangen. 
I  have  kept  n  memorandum  of  the  barometer  since  this  ship  left  Boston,  in  August,  1845, 
I  noted  the  height  of  the  barometer  at  8  A.  M.,  12  M.,  4  P.  M.,  and  8  P.  M.,  nnd  wns 
olso  observant  of  the  changes  of  weather  thiittodU  place. 

The  general  range  <if  tho  barometer,  for  fnir  and  pli^asant  weather,  is  from  30,',,",.  to 
30|-„"j  inches  ;  althongh  I  havo  often  seen  (*xtr(>mely  unpleasant  weather  (mist,  and  wli;it 
may  be  termed  n  double-reefed  topsail  breeze)  when  the  barometer  was  nt  this  range, 
particularly  when  on  the  coast  of  Yucatan;  nnd  I  have,  at  such  times,  observed  that  tho 
wind  would  be  from  the  north  nnd  northward  and  eastward,  whilst,  on  tho  western  const, 
and  nt  Vera  Cruz,  tho  wind  was  from  the  northward  and  westward  ;  but,  previous  to  this, 
the  barometer  had  fallen  to  30,  or  even  below  30  inches. 

It  is  .«ai(l  thnt  these  are  unfailing  indication  he  approach  of  what  is  called  n 

*'  Norther" — those  severe  galee  that  prevail  in  tnr  .  If  from  tho  month  of  September 
to  April,  'i'hese  indications  nre,  the  clearness  of  the  atmosphere,  known  hy  the  high 
lands  being  visilde,  particularly  Mount  Orizaba  ;  heavy  dews,  and  the  falling  of  the  bnro- 
meter :  but  I  havo  often  noted  the  appearance  of  these  iiidicaiions  when  the  norther  ('iij 
not  succeed.  I  havo  also  known  northers  to  take  plnco  when  not  preceded  by  these  indi- 
cations, i)articularly  when  Mount  Orizaba  had  not  been  vii^ihle  for  many  days;  but  1  havo 
never  known  a  norther  to  happen  without  being  preceded  hya  fall  of  the  barometer — and 
its  intensity  may  be  determined  by  the  degree  of  the  change,  and  its  rMi)iility.  if  tho  full 
of  the  barometer  be  from  ,'„"„  to  ,-„",,,  in  throe  or  four  hours,  you  may  look  for  a  cliaiii;o 
of  weather;  nnd  if  it  be  during  tlie  season  for  nortlicrs,  you  mny  exp(H:t  one  in  a  few 
hours;   if  in  the  tornado  months,  you  liiay  exjiectoiie  offlK'tn,  or  a  sudden  violtMit  sipnill. 

I  hnve  also  noticed  that  a  change  is  indicated  riither  hy  the  n/^W/Vy  than  by  the  eiicnt 
of  the  fill  of  the  mercury  in  the  barometer.  The  bnrometer  falls  before  a  norther,  and 
then  rises  ns  it  comes  on,  nnd  continues  rising  as  the  intensity  of  the  gale  increases. 
When  the  barometer  again  commences  falling,  it  is  an  indication  thnt  the  gale  is  at  its 
greatest  height,  nnd  thnt  it  is  about  abating. 

I  hnve  also  noticed  that  ♦he  bnroineter  falls  when  tho  wind  is  southerly,  particularly 
when  from  tho  southward  and  eastward,  and  that  it  rises  when  the  winds  are  from  tho 
northward. 

I  have  already  noticed  that  the  winds  seldom  blow  from  tho  northward  and  westward 
on  the  coast  of  Yucatan.     During  tho  uortliers,  vessels  bound  north,  and  those  ntanclior 


Com. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•11 


I  wind  tit  west 
a,  niid  opened 

ta  Piedrns,  or 
le  trniie  windu 

e  wind  occa- 
ny  (lutliors. 
)f  Culm;  tlmt 

Cuba  as  well 
;  ill  tlie  morn- 
ncaiiy  n  calm, 
vhicli  I  nevor 
mica,  or  Cop. 

)ctober,  in  Ja- 
in, »-2°  in  the 
ce  wlicro  the 
to  occur,  that 
itiinco  of  it  in 
sidonts  in  tiin 
It  is  of  go 
fas,  witii  tho 
I  gale,  I  have 

and  St.  Do- 

E.  N.  K.,  lit 

I  of  this  gives 

•iation  of  tiio 

which  every 


31,  184G. 

following  re- 
is  atfocted  liy 
nichcli.ingos. 
\ui;u9t,  1845, 

M.,  and  was 

•_om  30  ,'„"„  to 
ist,  and  wli;it 
It  this  rango, 
rvud  that  tlio 
ostorn  const, 
)vi()us  to  flii-i, 

t  is  callod  a 
f  Snptoniber 
I  hy  tho  hi;;h 
;  of  tho  baro- 
?  iiortlu-r  ('id 
ly  tliesf!  indi- 
3;  l)ut  1  have 
)nict('r— and 
••  If  tho  full 
for  a  cliai);;(i 
ono  in  a  fi'w 
ioltMit  squiill. 
)y  tiio  extent 
norther,  and 
lo  inrrcast's. 
i^alt!  is  at  its 

piirticularly 
iro  fi'oni  tho 

d  wo.-tward 
so  nt  anchor 


off  Tarnpico,  make  for  tho  Campecho  Banks,  where  the  northers  are  not  folt,  but  a  mode- 
rated N.  E.  wind  prevuiis. 

I  would  suggest  the  supposition  that  these  violent  northers  are  iiiot  l)y  tlie  N.  E.  trades, 
which  prevent  tho  northers  from  blowing  homo  on  the  Campeche  Banks,  and  render  these 
Banks  a  safe  retreat  for  vessels  in  cases  of  violent  northers. 

I  am,  Sir,  with  sentiments  of  respect,  your  obedient;  servant, 

M.  H.  BEECHER,  Prof.  Matli. 
Com.  M.  C.  Perry,   U.  S.  S.  Mississijjpi. 


CURSORY  REMARKS  AND  SUGGESTIONS  ON  VARIOUS 
TOPICS  IN   METEOROLOGY. 

BT    AN    AMATEUR   OBSERVER. 

The  science  of  Meteorology  is  not  only  interesting  to  tho  philosophic  observer,  but  tho 
natural  plienomena  of  which  it  takes  cognizance  are  such  as  daily  affect  the  interest  and 
comfort  of  every  member  of  the  human  family.  But  to  no  class  of  persons  are  these 
phenomena,  as  exhibited  in  various  parts  of  tho  world,  of  so  much  practical  importance 
(IS  to  the  members  of  the  nautical  jirofession.  A  competent  knowledge  of  these  exhibi- 
tions, or  of  geographical  meteorology,  is  therefore  an  important  element  of  that  varied 
knowledge  which  is  acquired  by  the  skilful  navigator. 

In  tho  preceding  pages  of  the  American  Coast  Pilot,  will  be  found  a  valuable  collection 
of  observations  on  the  winds  which  have  been  found  to  prevail  in  tho  Atlantic  Ocean,  and 
on  dill'erent  portions  of  the  American  Coast.  Wo  now  proceed  to  exhibit  a  more  general 
and  cursory  view  of  the  atmosphere  and  winds,  and  of  various  atmospheric  phonomena 
which  occur  in  these  regions. 

General  View  of  the  Atmosjfhere. 

The  transparent  aerial  fluid  which  surrounds  our  globe,  and  which  we  denominate  tlie 
atmosphere,  forms  a  comparatively  thin  sti'atum  or  envelope,  which  in  tho  immediate  vi- 
cinity of  the  earth,  is  greatly  compressed  by  its  own  weight,  and  which  in  its  most  ex- 
panded and  tenuous  state  is  supposed  to  extend  itself  to  tho  height  of  only  foi'ty-five  or 
fifty  miles  from  the  earth's  surface.  Its  superincumbent  pressure  or  weight  is  ascertain- 
ed by  means  of  the  barometer,  and  is  (squal  to  a  colunui  of  mercury  about  tliirty  inches  in 
height.  By  moans  of  this  instrument  we  learn  that  one-half  its  weight  or  actual  quantity 
is  within  three  miles  and  a  half  of  tlui  surface  of  tli(!  ocean  ;  and  it  is  within  tliis  limit  that 
nearly  all  the  visible  or  important  phenomena  of  the  atmosphere  are  apparently  developed. 
The  lower  surface  of  tho  atmosjihero  is  equal  to  about  200,000,000  square  miles;  and  as 
a  comjiression  of  the  whole  mass  to  the  common  density  which  it  exhibits  at  the  sea  level, 
would  reduce  its  entire  height  to  about  (ivo  miles,  it  follows  that  by  this  standard  of  com- 
parison tho  height  or  (hickness  of  tho  atmosphere  is  to  its  superficial  extent  in  the  pro- 
portion of  only  1  to  40,000,000. 

These  several  facts  are  too  important  to  bo  lost  sight  of  in  our  general  rensotiings  upon 
tho  pheiion)ena  of  tho  atmosphere;  and  the  more  so,  as  wo  are  prone  to  give  too  much 
altitude  to  our  conce))tions  on  these  sulijects.  If  we  even  consider  tho  ])ioper  height  or 
thickness  of  tho  atmosphen^  as  ecjual  to  lifty  miles,  still,  as  compared  with  its  entire  sur- 
face, this  is  only  equal  to  one-five  hundredth  of  tho  proportion  which  the  thickness  of  a 
common  sheet  of  paper,  of  the  foolscnj)  si/.o,  bears  to  its  surface  dimensions;  and  if  we 
view  tho  atmosphere  either  as  condensed  to  the  mean  of  the  surface  pressure,  or  in  rela- 
tion to  tho  actual  limit  of  all  its  tangible  phenomena,  it  will  only  be  equal  to  one-five- 
thousandth  part  of  the  proportional  thickness  above  mentioned.  We  uniy  hence  per- 
ceive tho  inapplicability  of  analogical  reasonings  tlmt  are  founded  on  tho  movements  which 
occur  ill  a  chimney,  or  in  an  inclosed  apartment,  as  attempted  to  bo  applied  in  explana- 
tion of  the  general  movements  of  tho  atmosphere. 

Two  instruments  of  modern  invention,  iho  barometer  and  thermometer,  nro  truly  in- 
valuable as  testing  the  condition  of  tho  atmos])1iere,  and  their  use  should  bo  familiar  to 
overy  navigator.  By  the  first,  as  wo  have  seen,  tho  amount  or  weight  of  the  superin- 
cuii.lieiit  atinospliere,  at  any  place,  may  always  bo  accurately  known,  and  by  the  indica- 
tions of  the  other,  the  tomperaturo  of  the  air,  us  well  as  of  the  ocean,  may  be  ascertained 
With  e(|iial  precision. 

Among  tho  most  striking  peculiarities  of  tho  atmosphere,  :.re  its  rajiid  and  almost  con- 
stant movements  of  progression  or  circulation,  which,  with  some  unimportant  excep- 
tions, appear  to  prevail  throughout  the  globe.     These  movements  evidently  show  the 


mm 


12»  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

continued  opeinfion  of  snmo  powpifiil  inipulse.  which,  to  tho  wrifor  nt  lonst.  flops  not  np- 
penr  to  hiivo  l)i'nn  snti.sfiictdnly  cxpliiiiicil.  Tt  w  ostimnft'd  from  tlio  iivorii;;(>  riito  of  mii). 
ing  of  Hliips  (hii'inj;  lonn  voynu'«'s  lliiimsh  diU'i'iPiit  hi-iis,  iind  from  otlicr  iliitn,  that  tlio 
nvprimo  v.-locity  oftlio  wind  nciir  tliti  surface  of  tiio  orcnn  is  cqiinl  to  oinlifciMi  niilos  an 
hour  fliroiiyliout  tho  yt'ar,  and  in  the  common  region  of  tho  clouds  tlio  volocity  must  bo 
much  gruutor. 

Temperature  of  Elevation. 

Elevnfion  nhove  the  level  of  the  son,  or  the  gennrni  level  of  n  country,  cnu^oH  n  repiu- 
Inr  vnriiifion  in  ffinpenitnrc.  Tho  (irxt  300  feet  UHUidly  ciMisi's  a  diircrcnce  of  .iliiiut  onn 
doareo  of  I'liiireiihi-if's  linrniDmi'ter.  After  asivMiilinu  300  feet,  it  is  cstiniatcd  iliatthn 
thermomefer  falls  a  dea;rpe  in  '.'!>">  feet,  then  at  277,  •J.'J'J,  2'J3,  and  ]'.)■}  feot:  lint  300  feet 
to  a  (les-'ree  is  a  common  role.  On  tlio'e  principles  the  limit  (d"  perpetnid  frost  li;m  been 
calcnliPted.  It  is  nnide  a  little  mr)vo  llian  ir),0{!0  feet  at  the  ('((uator.  iind  fiinn  that  to 
13,00(1  helween  the  tropics,  and  from  D.OIKl  to  4,000  feet  lictween  liiiitudes  ')<i"'  anil  59", 

It  has  been  found,  however,  that  the  above  rule  is  subject  to  areiit  variations,  owing, 
probably,  to  the  course,  temperature,  and  super-position  of  the  atmos|)li('ric  currents 
which  prevail  in  different  regions  at  dillerent  nllitmles.  Colder  currents  are  ol'ien  found 
resfinc  upon,  or  interposed  between,  those  of  a  hi-iher  temperMtiire.  and  rirr  vrrsn.  On 
the  Ilioiul.iya  Mountains,  in  Asia,  between  the  latitudes  of  2fl'^  and  .'U'  norlli,  tho  ro- 
gion  of  vegetation  has  been  found  to  extend  several  thousand  feet  above  the  supposed 
line  of  congelation  in  those  liititudes.  It  is  also  remarkable,  thaf  the  line  of  pi'ipetunl 
enow  is  found  at  a  much  greater  altitude  on  the  vnrtliern  side  of  these  inounfiiiiis  than 
on  the  southern  side,  in  a  lower  latitude.  Frmu  this  it  may  bo  inferred  that  the  tttnipe- 
rntnre  in  high  regions,  as  widl  as  in  lower  situations,  is  grently  alfected  by  the  geogra- 
phical com  se  and  physical  condition  of  the  currents  of  iitmusphero  which  prevail  in  these 
regions. 

Stratification  and  FJcvalion  of  the  Currents  of  the  Almonphrre. 

It  is  oi)vi(ius,  from  tlie  courses  of  the  clouds  and  other  light  bodies  wdiich  sometimos 
float  in  the  atmosphere,  that  ihe  movements  of  the  latter  aro  mainly  hori/mitid,  or  pa- 
ridlel  to  the  earth's  siirfice.  Notwitlistandiug  tiiis,  the  coniinnn  tlieory  of  winds  sup- 
poses n  ronsti.mt  rising  of  the  atmosphere  in  the  equatorial  regions,  coimecti'd  with  n 
flow  in  the  higher  atmosphere  towards  the  polar  regions,  and  a  (uiuiiter  llow  at  the  sur- 
face towards  the  etpiator,  to  supply  the  ascending  current.  This  nsccMiding  ni'ivement, 
however,  has  never  j'et  been  discover(>d.  and  it  is  easy  to  perceive  that  if  it  exisleil  in  the 
manner  supposed,  its  magnitude  and  velocity  must  be  altogether  too  great  to  have  eluded 
observation. 

It  is  app.irent,  however,  tint  dilTerent  currents  often  prevail  nt  diflPerent  altitudes,  au- 
periuii  used  one  upon  another,  and  moving  nt  tht<  same  time  in  dilferent  directions. 
Tlieso  currents  are  often  of  different  temperatures  ami  hygrometrical  con  litions,  and  are 
found  moving  with  dilferent  deijrees  of  vcdocity.  It  is  by  the  inlluenco  of  thesis  currents 
that  volcanic  ashes,  atid  other  light  sidistancu^s,  wliictli  are  elevated  by  means  of  whirl- 
winds to  the  higher  reuions  of  the  atmospliere,  are  conveyed  to  great  disinnces.  and  in  di- 
rections which  are  often  cfintrary,  to  the  prevailing  wind  at  tho  surface.  On  the  erup- 
tion in  St.  Vincent,  in  1812.  a-<hes  were  thus  deposited  at  llarbadoes,  which  is  GO  or  70 
miles  to  the  windward,  and  also  on  the  decks  of  vessels  still  farther  eastward,  wlide  the 
trade  wind  was  blowing  in  its  usual  direction.  On  tlio  iireat  eru[)'ioii  of  the  vulcau''  of 
Co.>iiguinn,  on  the  shores  of  the  Pacific,  in  Gautemala.  in  .lanuary,  1835.  the  volr-Muic  as  les 
fell  upon  the  Island  of  Jamaica,  at  the  distance  of  800  miles  in  a  direct  line  from  tho  v  1- 
cano.  Fa(-ts  like  these  oujlit  to  put  at  rest  the  common  theni-y  of  the  tra<l(!  winds,  ac- 
cording to  which,  these  ashes  would  =0'iner  have  fdlen  upon  the  northern  shores  of  tho 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  or  the  neninsula  of  Florida.  On  tho  same  occasion  the  volcanic  ashes 
were  also  carried  westward  in  the  direction  contrary  to  the  trade  wiial  on  that  coast,  nnd 
fell  upon  II.  M.  ship  Conway,  in  the  Pac  fie.  in  lat.  T"  N  ,  long.  10.5°  W..  m  ok  than 
1,200  miles  flistant  from  Ihe  v(dcMUo.  in  the  direction  wdiicdi  is  uearlv  oppo-ilc  from  .Ta- 
maica.  These  phenomena  were  doubtless  the  effect  (d"  two  dilferent  currenis  pii-vailing 
at  different  elevations;  but  we  shall  seek  in  vain,  in  these  develojimenls,  for  Jjroof  of  tho 
comrnonly  received  but  ima;;inary  system  id' the  trade  winds. 

The  occasional  interposition  ofu  warmer  current  of  atmosphere  between  the  lower 
current  and  the  hijzher  regions  has  been  (iroved  by  the  observations  of;eron:iuts.  In 
countries  Mitnafed  like  the  United  States,  where  the  surf  ice  is  often  occupied  in  winter, 
for  long  periods,  by  an  intensely  cold  stratum  of  air  from  tin?  interior  idevntioiis,  the 
warm  cnri-ents  from  lower  lafiludes  aiipi-ar  'o  find  their  way  at  a  superim-  elevatimi;  nnd 
tlieir  presence  in  this  position  is  ofteu  deinonstnited  by  tho  phenouienu  which  they 
iuduco. 


t.  flops  not  np. 
ii>  nito  (»f  siiil- 

(llltll,   tllllt  llio 

iff'i'ii  miles  nn 
locity  must  bo 


nM«f»s  fi  rejiu- 

t  of  illlDIlt  otio 
iliiN'il  tllllt  tiin 
:  hilt  ;!()()  fiifit 
i'liit  li;n  hi'i'ri 
I  tViini  ilmt  to 
'10'  iinil  59^. 
iilioiis,  owing, 
eric  ciirreiita 
p  oI'kmi  found 
•r  xXTsn.  On 
iDi'ih,  tlio  ro- 
tlii'  siipposod 

of    piM|lptUlli 

iinitniiiH  than 
It  tli(<  tompe- 
•  lilt'  iieojjra- 
cvail  in  these 


li  sniiiptimes 
/iiintiil.  or  pa- 
f  winds  sup- 
(u-trd  with  a 
V  lit  tlin  8ur- 
;  iiMvomont, 
xisti'i!  in  tile 
liiivo  oludod 

iiltUiidog,  au- 
t  (lirf'ctions. 
ons,  Mild  nre 
t'S((  (Mirrenfs 
IIS  (if  whirl- 
'f<,  II nd  in  di- 
)i)  tile  erup- 
1  is  no  or  70 
I,  wliilo  (he 
'  vijfiinf  of 
liMiiic  as  iRa 
Din  tlie  V  !■ 
I'  winds,  ac- 
lorcs  of  tho 
Iciiiiii:  ashes 
It  coast,  and 
in  IK!  than 
Ic  fnini  ,In- 
s  pifvailiiig 
iroof  of  tho 

I  llin  lower 
iiniils.  In 
ill  winter, 
'iitioiis,  tiie 
^'iitiiin;  nnd 
vliiiii   they 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Clouds,  Fogs,  and  Rain. 

The  atmosphero  is  always  porvndod  by  water  in  tlio  form  of  transparont  or  iiivisihia 
viipor,  iiikI  tlio  process  of  evaporiition  is  continiially  carried  on,  except  in  cases  where 
the  tlitiiinomcfiM'  is  below  what  is  culled  the  ilew  point,  or  when  tlio  vapor  is  lieitif;  con- 
iloiised  in  tlie  form  of  cliiuds,  foj;s,  or  ruin.  •'  (Monds  nnd  fugs  are  the  same  thin;;,  iieing 
an  MSHcmliJii^o  of  sinall  vesicles  (if  wilier  lloatiiii;  in  the  atmosphere.  At  ii  distnnco  in 
till)  atiiidspliere  we  see  the  whole  as  a  <doud,  bnt  when  the  vapor  sinks  to  I  lie  eartli,  or 
will  not  MM',  and  w  iiro  imiiKM-sed  in  it,  we  call  it  ii  foj;.  Dew  fogs,  which  haiij;  over 
fields,  are  ulnitus  ilouds;  iinil  fogs  which  involve  elevated  idijects,  are  cuinubius  clouds." 
It  is  to  circumstances  of  distribution,  Jiglit,  siiade.  distance,  and  perspective,  that  the 
great  vaiiely  in  the  iipprardTice.  of  the  clouds  is  owing  ;  and  on  this  variety  of  appeanince 
tlie  fdll.nviiig  classilication  has  been  founded,  by  wliich  the  clouds  havo  been  consideroJ 
03  pciSiining  to  seven  classes: 

1.  LiUe  a  lock  of  hair,  or  a  feather,  called  cirnts. 

2.  A  (doud  in  conical  or  rounded  heaps,  culled  cumulus, 

3.  A  horizontal  sheet,  calltMl  striitus. 

4.  A  Hv^tciii  of  small  (leecy  or  rounded  clouds,  called  cirro-cumulus, 

5.  'I'ho  wavy  or  undulating  stratus,  called  cfrro-s^  <itus. 

G.  TIk!  cumulus  and  cirro-stratus  mixed,  called  cumulo-slnifus. 

7.  A  (Miiimlus  spreading  out  in  cirrus,  and  raining  beneath,  called  nimhus. 

The  cirrus  is  usually  the  most  elevated — sometimes  as  a  gauze  veil,  or  ])urall;d  threads. 
Its  height  is  appareurly  from  one  to  four  miles 

Dew  is  the  condensation  of  iiqu>M)us  vapor  upon  the  surface  of  a  condensing  body  or 
substance.  Clouds  and  fogs  are  watery  particles  condensed  from  aqueous  vapor  while 
lloating  in  tho  atmosphoro,  where  they  continue  to  float  till  [irecipitated,  or  again  dis- 
solvoil.  if  by  the  concentration  of  these  particles,  or  by  any  additional  condensation, 
their  weiglit  lie  increased  beyond  that  which  the  extent  of  thiur  surface  can  sustain,  they 
then  descend  in  tho  form  of  raiti  ;  and  as  the  condensation  ordinarily  increases  as  the 
drops  iiurea.'^^e  in  magnitude,  it  is  common  to  have  more  rain  fall  on  the  surface  of  the 
grout'd  than  on  an  ecpjiil  sjiace  upon  the  top  of  a  lioiine  or  church.  Clouds,  fogs,  and 
ruin  are  therefore  essentially  the  same,  tho  latter  being  the  continuation  or  extension  of 
the  same  process  which  produced  the  former. 

Owing  to  the  evaporating  (pialities  of  the  atmosphere  in  tho  higher  regions,  as  well  as 
to  the  intensity  of  cold  which  there  uiiifornily  prevails,  distinct  clouds  are  seldom,  if  ever, 
found  at  a  greater  elevation  than  tho  suminits  of  the  highest  mountains,  which  is  about 
five  mil(!H.  At  an  intenri(Mliato  rijgion,  however,  the  clouds  are  often  at  a  temperaliire 
iibovo  freezing,  wliile  tlie  air  at  the  surface  is  much  bidow  the  freezing  point,  and  tho 
earth  covered  with  snow.  This  condition  of  the  clouds  seems  not  nnfroipionlly  evident 
hy  their  appearance  to  tho  eye  of  nn  observer.  Snowy  or  frozen  clouds  are  usually  dim 
and  undolined  in  their  aspect  or  appeuranco;  and  a  fall  of  snow  may  not  unaptly  be 
tornicd  the  full  of  a  frozen  cloud. 

Of  Hail. 

Hail  of  small  size,  na  it  falls  in  wintory  storms,  nppenrs  ns  frozen  rain-drops.  From 
theoccnrreiice  of  this  phenomenon  in  a  freezing  state  of  weather,  wo  find  evidence  that 
a  stratum  of  air  in  the  region  of  clouds  is  at  a  temperature  above  the  freezing  point,  or 
wanner  than  that  whicti  is  found  at  the  surface  at  the  same  time.  A  heavy  fall  of  snow 
affords,  perha|)s,  tho  same  indication. 

Siinim(!r  liail  of  largo  size,  which  is  deposited  in  a  definite  bath  or  vein,  or  in  a  locality 
tf  limited  extent,  is  usually  accompaniecl  hy  heavy  thunder  and  vivid  or  continued  light- 
nings, or  u  heavy  rumbling  sound  or  rapid  concussions,  high  winds,  (fee,  and  is  believed 
to  be  the  production  of  a  vortex  or  whirlwin  J  in  tho  atmosphere,  whicli  is  connected  at 
its  upper  extremity  with  an  overlaying  stratum  of  unusually  cold  nir.  A  portion  of  this 
cold  btratuin  probably  descends  on  the  exterior  of  the  vortex,  nnd  reaching  the  earth's 
surface,  is  pressed  into  tho  vortex,  and  there  entwined  or  laminated  with  the  layer  of 
warm  and  humid  air  of  tho  surface,  which  is  drawn  in  at  the  same  time.  A  rapid  con- 
densation, ns  is  known,  thus  commences  at  tho  lower  extremity  of  the  whirling  mass  or 
column,  and  tho  condensed  drops,  alternately  in  a  freezing  and  unfrozen  layer  of  air,  are 
carried  upward  by  the  powerful  whirling  and  ascending  action  of  the  vortex,  till,  with 
the  successive  coatings  of  ccidensation  received,  they  aro  finally  discharged  into  the  cold 
stratum  at  tho  upward  extremity  of  the  vortex,  owing  to  the  reduced  temperature  of 
which,  they  are  prepared  to  rcceivo  a  renewed  accession  during  their  fall  to  the  earth; 
or  perhaps  by  their  accumulated  weight  they  are  sometimes  thrown  through  the  sides  of 
the  voitex  before  reaching  its  higher  extremity.  By  this  violent  gyratory  nnd  elevating 
action,  some  of  the  hail-stones  are  thrown  against  each  other  and  broken  ;  and  each  sue- 


•13 


14» 


BLUNT'S  AiMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

cesBivo  Inyor  of  coiiKflation  iiiiiy  ho  oflPii  hcoii  in  llin  fiiirltirri)  Hcclinris  of  ihr  Imil.  Tn 
all  vorticii'lnr  c(iiMlcn^iiti(.iis  of  thin  clinnnl.'r,  wlioii  llio  colil  is  not  mimcioiilly  iiiti-rmo  to 
proiliico  imil,  (lro|)Mot'niiii  iin,-  produced  ofii  iiin<;li  groator  si/o  tliiiii  aro  ovor  foimd  iti  u 
coiiiinoM  mid  diri'i.'t  tall  ol' ruin.  ,     ,        .  ,        •       , 

Hail  storms  of  this  (diurctcr  arc  Ions  fri'<pu'Mt  in  tiio  tropicnl  ro-ions  than  in  tlio  toin- 
perati-  InlitiidoH.  for  the  reasons,  prolialily,  that  a  stratum  of  snnii'iciit  cold  to  prodiico  tlio 
Imil  issoldom  found  so  near  tlio  iiiforior  Htrntiim,  that  a  vortiriilar  coniinniiicMtioii  can  lie 
estabiislicd  with  tlio  fornior,  by  means  of  an  ordinary  «iist,  spout,  or  wliiiKviiid.  Nor 
does  tliis  ordiiiarilv  liappeii  in  llie  temperate  Intitudes;  lint  only  when  the  lower  warm 
stratum  liHconies  "overlaid,  in  closo  proximity,  by  a  :<liatum  from  a  colder  region;  an 
event  wliifli  is  not  unfiiMpieiit  in  most  eoiiiitries  within  the  teinperato  latitudes.  It  (Miin- 
monly  liappeiis,  therefore,  that  severil  liiiil  storms,  of  greater  or  less  magnitudo  and  vio- 
lonco.  occur  on  the  same  day,  or  about  tlio  same  period. 

Of  Thunder  Storms  and  Gusts. 

Whon  a  cold  strnfuni  or  current  of  the  upper  ntnin^phero  moves  or  rests  upon  a  warm 
one  which  is  next  the  earth,  neither  stratum,  as  sucii,  can  jieiietrate  or  displace  the  other. 
Nor  can  a  sudden  interchuiifie  or  coinininnling  take  place  belwcMMi  the  masses  or  particlog 
of  which  these  strata  are  composed,  except,  by  llie  slow  and  tedious  process  of  the  suc- 
cessive action  and  convolution  <if  single  particles,  or  small  j^roups  of  particles,  ujion  or 
around  each  other ;  but  if  a  communication  or  iiitercliango  between  tho  two  strata  bo- 
coines  established  by  moans  of  the  actimi  of  a  uradiially  excited  whirlwind  or  water-spont, 
or  if,  owin;;  to  any  ineipinlity  of  surface  or  oilier  accident,  a  (le|)ression  is  made  upon  the 
lower  strutiiin,  so  as  to  enable  the  colder  air  to  descend  at  this  point,  then  an  immediiito 
gyration  or  convoluti<in  will  take  place  in  the  two  masses  at  this  point,  the  warm  air  rising 
as  it  becomes  displaced,  and  co|)ioiis  coiidi<iisatioii  will  immediately  follow.  It  is  move- 
ments of  this  cliarih/er  which  jiroduco  the  dense  and  convoluted  appeiiranco  known  as  a 
thundercloud,  and  the  thunder  and  lightninu;,  rain,  and  perhaps  hail,  follow  as  necessary 
results. 

The  precipitation  of  tho  coMor  stralnm  thus  commenced,  is  re^'i'arly  continued  and 
enlar;.'ed  till  ii!i  e(|nilibrium  is  pitidnced.  and  the  thunder  storm  thus  engendered,  a  sumes, 
of  course,  the  direction  of  the  upper  current  to  wliiidi  it  is  appended,  imil  wliicii,  in  tho 
temperate  latitudes,  is  commonly  from  tho  wivsterii  (|uarter.  'I'ho  warm  .surt'aco  air 
which  is  thus  displaced  at  the  commencement  of  tiie  process,  rises  immediately  in  front 
of  the  colder  intruding  mass,  and  by  the  gyratory  action  thus  commenced  becomes  con- 
voluted in  detached  masso-  or  layers,  with  the  colder  surrounding  air,  and  by  the  reduc- 
tion 'A'  temperature  thus  jirodiiced,  furnishes  the  largo  supply  of  mpieoiis  vipor  wliich  is 
first  condensed  in  the  litMivy  thunder-cloud,  and  then  precipitated  in  a  heavy  fall  of  rain; 
anil  the  electric  phenomena  which  are  induced  by  this  sudden  contact  ;;r  intermiiigling  of 
masses  of  air  of  ditferent  temperatures  and  hygrometric  conditions,  becomes  highly  vivid, 
and  too  often  destructive.  The  active  gyration  which  is  commonly  |iroilucfd  within  the 
body  of  lie  Uiunder  storm  or  gust,  is  in  tiie  direction  id"  the  advance  of  the  storm,  and  of 
tho  risii  g  warm  air  wliich  is  forced  upward,  or  in  the  direction  of  I'orward  and  upward  ut 
tlie  lower  frmitof  tho  storm. 

Ill  conse(pience  of  tins  gyratory  action,  a  storm  which  advances  at  th«  rate  of  fifteen  or 
twenty  miles  an  hour,  is  (dteii  known  to  exiii.  it  a  vidocity  of  wind  during  tho  period  of 
its  greatest  violence,  of  sixty  or  eighty  miles  an  hour.  If  the  axis  of  this  gyration  in  a 
thunder  storm  assumes,  from  any  cause,  a  viM-tical  position,  wo  then  have  a  perfect 
whirlwind  or  tHrnado,  which,  if  it  be  so  .'iituated  us  not  to  reach  the  earth  by  its  direct 
actiou,  will  exhibit  to  us  liie  phenomena  of  a  heii'/y  thunder  storm  iicciniipanied  by  rum- 
bling sounds  and  concussion,  and  a  fall  of  hail  in  or  .lear  some  portion  of  its  |)ath.  Hut  if 
tho  regular  action  of  tho  whirlwind  should  reatdi  tho  earth,  and  continue  for  some  time, 
great  destruction  may  bo  (expected  to  follow.  The  jiatli  of  these  destructive  whirlwinds 
is  generally  narrow,  and  often  but  a  few  hundred  yards  in  wiiltli. 

From  the  nature  of  the  causes  which  we  have  set  forth  as  being  favorable  to  iho  occur- 
rence of  a  thunder  storm,  it  follows  that  many  of  these  storms  will  be  likely  to  occur  on 
tiie  same  day,  in  ditferent  parts  of  the  same  country,  as  has  la-en  already  remarked  in  the 
case  of  hail  storms,  with  which  they  are  often  idiMitical ;  aiiiJ  the  writer  has  often  found 
this  to  be  true  to  a  reinarkablo  extent.  The  fatal  accidents  by  lightning,  in  dilierent  parts 
of  the  country,  have  often  happened  on  the  same  days,  and  we  have  reason  to  believe  that 
scores  of  tornadoes,  hail  storms,  and  thunder  storms,  have  sometimes  occurred  on  tho 
same  afternoon.  It  usually  liappens  that  the  precipitations  of  colder  atiiiospliei-«  at  those 
numerous  points  of  disturbance  is  sufficient  to  produce  a  marked  change  in  tho  temper- 
ature of  the  surface  stratum  within  a  period  of  IJ  hours  thereafter. 

Atmospheric  disturbances  of  this  kind,  which  do  not  produce  violent  thunder  or  hail, 
are  usually  denominated  sr/tttz/Zf,'  and  it  ajiiiears  highly  probable  that  the  presence  of  air 
of  a  tomporuture  considerably  above  tho  freezing  point  is  necessary  to  tho  production  of 


m'^mm 


BLUNT'S  >"ERICAN  COAST  PIL<yr. 


'16 


thuniliT  1111(1  lishtniii);.  In  tlio  u  .,..411  of  MitKiilliiions,  in  Patagoniii,  wliero  tho  aii*  ut  tho 
iiiirt'iK'o  is  nt'itliiir  warm  nor  ynt  vi<ry  cold,  tlif  h(|UiiIIi4,  culled  l>y  ilio  Hailurs,  wiliiwinvM.  aro 
vury  ri'o(|iu'nt,  and  trunicndoUHly  Hi-vcrt';  Imt,  accoi'dinj;  to  tho  obxorvatiunH  of  Capt.  1'. 
1',  KiiiR.  liKlitiiin;;  and  tliundtir  aro  Hcldoni  known. 

'riiD  heavy  conihinHalion  pit'Heiitttd  in  a  thunder  cloud  in  often  H|)olven  of  in  a  niannor 
which  iuipliuH  tiiat  tiio  cloud  posHi'Hse.s  Home  inechiinical  or  other  tmer^y,  hy  nu-aiis  of 
wlilch  the  violent  wind  is  Kent  fortli  ;  but  nothing  can  he  more  uru'eid  than  hucIi  a  HUppu- 
Hitlen.  'I'he  cloud  may  indeiMl  lie  tho  iiieans  of  electric;  di^veiopment,  and  furniNlutii  alrto 
tiiu  watery  doporiitionH  for  the  had  or  rain,  hut  all  lliu  particles  of  the  clouil  arc;  passively 
inert,  like  thoso  (jf  a  commini  fog  or  mi^t,  and  the  violent  winds  and  disturhini;  forceit 
wliicli  niiiy  lie  pn<Hent,  ()|)i)rato  tu  pruduuo  tlio  cloud,  but  du  not,  in  any  important  sumte, 
result  from  itii  uctiun. 

Watcr-sjMuls  and  Whirlicinds, 

Tho  character  of  theao  nioteors  lias  already  been  described,  in  n  iiieaauro,  in  our  nc- 
coiint  of  hail  and  thunder  Htorms.  Tho  identity  of  whirlwinds  and  water-spouts  was 
laaiiitained  by  Franklin,  and  althou<^li  at  a  later  period  this  has  been  called  in  (luustiun,  it 
iipijeara  to  have  been  done  without  sullicient  roason. 

l<'roni  the  ei|ual  distribution  of  tho  atmosphere  as  tho  oceanic  envelope  of  our  earth,  it 
results,  that  no  movement  of  great  violence  can  take  place  in  any  of  its  parts,  except  by 
aieansof  a  direct  circuit  of  rotation  in  the  form  of  a  vortex  or  active  whirlwind. 

A  vortex  will  not  be  regularly  formed,  nor  continue  itself  in  action,  witluiut  tho  aid  of 
;in  external  propelling  force,  and  a  constant  spiral  discharge  from  that  extremiiy  of  its 
iixis  towards  which  is  the  tendency  of  motion.  IJoth  these  conditions,  it  is  believed,  are 
I'uHilh'il  to  the  letter  in  the  case  ot  a  common  whiiKvindor  water-spout.  The  au'  at  the 
upper  ext'cMuity  of  the  whirling  colur'Mi,  owing  to  its  elevation,  is  rarer  than  at  the  base, 
luid  the  column  itsell,  particularly  in  its  central  portions,  is  mi^chanicaily  rarilied  by  the 
centrilugal  ell'ect  of  its  own  whirling  motion.  \\'e  have  thus  a  sort  of  rarilied  chintney 
into  whicli  tlie  denser  air  at  the  base  (d'  tho  column  is  continually  forced  by  the  pressure 
(if  tiie  surrounding  atmos])here  ;  not  to  iiscetid  in  a  separate  current,  as  in  the  common 
cliiuiney,  but  entering  into  the  organization  of  the  whirling  vortc^x,  to  supply  the  place 
(if  the  preceding  portions  of  air  which  are  winding  inwards  and  upwards  to  he  again  dis- 
charged at  tlio  upper  extremity.  The  condition  of  force  by  which  tho  |>ropulsion  is 
maintained,  is  f  ul  in  the  jiressuro  of  tho  surrounding  atmosphere  upon  all  sidcis  of  the 
au'chanically  )d  column,  and  if  tho  expansive  whirling  motion  be  suflicieutly  active 

tu  jiroduce  ne  'acuuur  at  the  centre,  tlie  extcsrna!  propelling  force  will  bo  nearly  fif- 

teen pounds  i»  Miu  S(|uare  inch;  and  as  the  whirling  column  turns  witliiu  its  own  coin- 
pass  like  a  top  or  any  other  rotative  body,  this  force  is  cpiite  sulficient  to  account  for  all 
tiio  violence  that  is  ever  jiroduced. 

Weretiiere  no  vorticular  or  whirling  action  already  excited,  and  no  discharge  from  tlie 
up|)er  extremity  of  the  vortex,  the  external  pressure,  it  is  true,  could  not  produce  rota- 
tion ;  but  this  movement  and  upward  discharge  having  once  commenced,  from  any  cause, 
the  particles  near  the  exterior  of  tho  column,  like  tlioso  of  water  in  a  funnel,  yitdd  at  a 
little  more  than  a  right  angle,  to  tho  external  pressure,  in  tlieir  spirally  approximating 
cuurse  towards  the  rarilieii  centre.  By  the  slowness  of  this  central  a|)proxiinatinn  ns 
coinpiired  with  the  whirling  action,  the  intensity  or  magnitude  of  the  external  pressure 
becomes  merged  in  tlu'  velocity  of  the  rotative  action.  As  the  area  of  tho  spiral  circuit 
decreases  rapidly  as  we  approach  the  centre,  it  follows  that  the  velocity  of  the  whirling 
iiKivement  must  be  pro[)ortional)ly  increased,  as  we  perceive  it  to  be  in  tlie  funnel  and  in 
all  regular  formed  vortices.  Thus,  if  the  rotative  velocity  near  the  exterior  of  a  column 
be  at  tho  rate  of  but  ten  miles  an  hour,  at  one-third  nearer  tho  centre,  tho  velocity  must 
bu  inoro  than  doubled,  and  at  two-thirds  of  the  distance  from  tho  first  named  point  to  the 
centre,  the  absolute  whirling  velocity  must  he  increased  nin(«  fold,  which  in  this  case  is 
e(]Uiil  to  ninety  miles  an  hour;  and  in  conseciuenco  of  the  reduced  diameter  of  the  cir- 
cuit of  gyration,  at  tho  last  point,  tho  number  of  revolutions  must  hero  he  ns  four  hun- 
dred, to  one  of  the  iKiint  first  mentioned.  The  increased  ascending  velocity,  however,  is 
not  here  taken  into  account,  which  may  perhajis  reduce  the  number  of  comparative  rev- 
olutions in  the  central  portions  of  the  column.  Tho  condensing  and  electric  elfects  which 
often  attend  or  follow  these  active  whirlwinds,  have  been  cursorily  noticed  under  the  head 
of  thunder  storms. 

It  is  not  intended  to  dwell  here  upon  the  causes  by  which  whirlwinds  and  spouts  are 
excited  or  first  set  in  motion,  but  the  local  disturbance  of  heat  is  probably  the  chief  ex- 
citing cause  as  in  thunder  storms.  The  agency  of  heat  may  also  bo  effective  in  continu- 
ing the  upward  discharge  and  vorticular  organization,  in  cases  where  there  is  great  dis- 
parity in  the  temperatures  of  tho  air  at  the  upper  and  lower  extremities  of  tho  whirling 
mass  or  column,  but  it  is  to  the  mechanical  expansion  of  the  centrifugal  action  and  the 
powerful  impulse  of  the  atmospheric  pressure,  that  tho  iucrouse  and  powerful  activity  of 
tlie  whirlwind  is  chiefly  to  be  referred. 


pmpvn*" 


16* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

The  terra  water-spout  ia  undoubtodly  n  misnomer,  as  there  is  no  effect  produced  of 
which  this  term  is  pr  jb.ibly  descriptive,  altliough  the  term  air-apout  would  not  be  greutly 
jnnpproprittte.  The  visible  column  of  condensed  v..,)or,  which  often  iippeiira  in  the  rrtri- 
fied  cntio  of  the  vortex  when  the  latter  is  not  enveloped  in  cKnnI,  hiis  probably  given 
name  to  this  meteor.  But  the  water  of  th-^  sea  is  not  taken  up  by  the  spout  or  whirl- 
wind,  except  in  nslipht  degree  ai.J  in  the  form  of  fine  spniy,  like  other  light  ?n:itter  which 
is  swept  from  the  surface.  This  cloudy  stc-"  or  column  frequently  appears  and  disnp- 
pears,  while  the  action  of  the  whirlwind  continues  without  any  impoit.int change.  Owin^ 
to  this'  fact,  observers  sometimes  !)elii!ve  that  tliey  witnes:^  the  commei-cemont  of  iv  water- 
spout, or  tornado,  when  the  same  has  picn-iousiy  been  in  action  fo'  one  or  morn  hours, 
and  when  the  cloudy  pipe  or  pillar  happima  to  disappear  the  spout  is  sup|;osed  to  have 
'burst,'  while,  often,  it  iias  undergone  no  important  change,  except,  perliaps.  a  alight  de- 
crease in  its  activity.  The  active  and  violent  portion  of  tlie  whirlwiiiil  surrounds  the 
spout  invisiiily,  rnd  is  probably  of  much  gn-ater  diameter  at  a  disfanci-  from  the  surfafo 
of  the  earth  i'.ian  at  the  base  of  the  spout.  Thus,  when  a  sp  lut  or  wliiilwiiid  has  passed 
near  a  ship,  tho  upper  spars  have  been  converted  into  a  wreck  while  no  violence  of  -vind 
WHS  felt  on  tlid  deck. 

Wator-spouts  follow  the  course  either  of  the  surfaca  wind  or  of  the  higher  current 
with  which  they  may  communicate,  or  their  course  may  be  moililied  by  both  these  influ- 
ences  without  being  absolutely  determined  by  eitlK^r.  They  abound  most,  however,  in 
those  calm  regions  which  are  found  at  the  external  limits  of  the  trade  winds,  and  in  the 
regions  near  the  equator. 

It  has  been  comjiion  to  ascribe  whirlwinds  and  water-spouts,  ns  well  as  larger  whirl- 
wind storms,  to  an  impulse  produced  by  the  meeting  of  contrary  currents,  bu*-  the  laws 
of  distribution  and  of  motion  in  an  oceanic  body,  are  such  as  do  not  permit  the  move- 
ments of  its  different  currents  and  gyrnti.ms  to  meet  in  conllict  with  each  other,  besides 
any  conflictiug  movement  in  the  air  would  necessarily  produce  a  rise  in  th;-  barometer, 
whereas  it  is  generally  linown  to  fall  at  the  commencement  of  a  storm,  either  of  large  or 
small  extent.  We  miiy  o'iserve,  also,  thi.t  whiflwiiiil.s  and  spouts  ajipear  to  commence 
gradually,  and  to  arquiie  their  full  activity  without  the  aid  of  forei'.yi  causes  :  besides,  it 
is  well  kiiown  tliat  they  are  most  frequent  in  th'»r<e  ciilm  regions  where,  apparently,  there 
are  no  active  currents  lu  meet  each  otlier,  and  rhey  are  at  loist  'reiiuent  where  currents 
are  in  full  activity. 

Of  Trac^e  Winds  and  the  Circuilnus  Character  of  llie  Atmospheric  Currents. 

It  is  found  thpt  in  almost  every  cotmtry.  and  in  every  ea,  the  wind  is  more  or  less  pre- 
dominant i'l  a  rarticular  direction.  In  open  sea.  betweiMi  tiie  eipiator  and  the  .'iOth  par- 
allel of  north  '.uid  south  latitudes,  the  wind,  for  the  most  part,  blows  from  the  eastward; 
but  near  the  eastcn  borders  of  any  ocean,  bclnw  these  latitudes,  the  wind  blows  in  a  di- 
rection mo:e  towards  tlie  equator  than  in  its  central  or  western  )inrtions. 

In  the  higher  latitudes  north  of  30°,  the  westerly  winds  are  found  greatly  to  predomi- 
nate, although  the  eddying  or  rotative  action  which  is  ac(piired  by  large  portions  of  the 
lower  sfratum  of  air  in  these  latitudes,  causes  much  diversity  and  frcipient  changes  in  the 
initial  direction  of  the  wind.  But  in  the  common  re-zioii  of  clouds  where  this  eddying 
moveuKsnt  is  less  Iriiipient,  the  main  atmospheric  current,  at  least  i'  the  United  States,  is 
fully  as  constiint  from  the  westward  as  is  the  trade  wiml  fnuu  the  eastward  in  uny  trop- 
ical region. 

At  Xew  York,  in  four  .  uccessivo  years,  the  westerly  winds  hav(>  been  found  to  be  to 
tiio  easterly,  as  nearly  two  to  one.  ()l)servatioiis  on  the  courses  of  tli(!  clouds  for  the 
same  period,  show  the  prevaleace  of  an  atmospluu'ic  current  from  the  westward  at  that 
elevatior  to  be,  as  c  )mpart!d  wi'ii  those  from  the  eastward,  nearly  as  fourteen  to  one;  the 
prevailing  wind  being  soi.rli-westerly.  At  .Montreal,  in  f  jower  Canada,  as  ajjpears  by  the 
oiiservatiuns  of  .1.  M'Ciud,  Ksip,  the  westerly  surface  winds  also  appear  to  exceed  the 
easterly.  In  the  proportion  of  more  than  four  to  one.  lu  consecpience  of  the  general 
prevalence  of  werlerly  winds  and  currents  in  ttieso  latitudes,  the  passages  of  the  faste.-'t 
ships,  I'roin  Kuro|v  to  America,  are  hmnd  to  occupy  a  much  longer  period  than  from 
America  to  Kurope. 

The  (irst  movement  of  the  trixle  wimls  towards  the  eipiator  and  westward,  necessarily 
occasions  an  e(pial  movement  from  the  higher  latitude  to  supply  their  place;  and  as  the 
trade  winds  in  tlieir  pro,;ress  westward  arc*  opposoil  by  the  .\mericau  and  Asiatic  conti- 
nents, across  whicdi  tlicse  winds  do  not  (lass,  it  follows  that  ihe.3(<  winds  become  dellected 
or  thrown  olf  towards  the  noles  in  order  to  support  an  eipial  distri!)ution  of  tlie  atmos- 
phere in  the  higher  hitiludes;  but  the  an*  thus  translerred  to  these  latitudes,  carries  with 
it  the  rotative  ii)>|)ulse  which  if  acquired  in  the  tropical  latitudes,  and  by  reason  of  the 
slower  rotative  motion  which  hero  prevails,  is  thrown  to  llio  eustwurd  in  tho  form  of 
westerly  winds. 


II. 
III. 


IV. 


^^PDt^imni^ 


^lmm^^m^lf^^mmf'm^ 


mmnmn^ 


Oct  produced  of 
(I  not  he  ereutly 
leiirs  in  the  ruri- 
3  probably  fjiven 
spoilt  or  wliirl- 
lit  initler  which 
pours  nnd  disnp- 
cliiiiiso.  Owing 
lent  of  ti  Wcitnr. 
or  more  hours, 
upposed  to  liiive 
iips,  (I  alifjht  do- 
I  surrounds  tho 
roM)  tho  sui1ii''0 
wind  has  passed 
ifioleiiee  of-vind 

liijiher  curront 
)(itii  those  influ- 
out,  however,  in 
rinds,  and  in  the 

as  larger  whirl- 
its,  bu''  the  laws 
M'lnit  tho  inovo- 
li  other,  besides 
th!>  barometer, 
ther  of  larj^o  or 
r  to  corninenco 
I  SI'S  :  besides,  it 
lipiirenlly.  there 
ivhere  curronts 


Currents. 

lore  or  less  pre- 

1  the  ;!Oth  jiar- 

I  tlie  eastward ; 

d  blows  in  a  di- 

itly  to  predomi- 
piU'tioiiy  of  the 
(diiiMiies  in  the 

re  this  etldying 
nited  States,  is 

ird  ill  uiiy  trop- 

found  to  be  to 
cloitds  for  tho 
St  ward  at  that 

oen  to  one;  the 

appears  by  the 
to  exceed  the 

of  the  general 
of  the  fastest 

iod  than   from 

ird,  necessarily 
CO  ;  nnd  na  the 

1  Asiatic  conti- 
conie  dcdected 
I  of  the  atinns- 

8,  (tarries  with 
reason  of  the 

n  tho  form  uf 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

An  entire  circuit  of  atmospheric  currents  is  thus  maintained  on  both  sides  of  the  equa- 
tor, the  most  oquiible  and  deterininiito  ;'jrtion  of  which  is  to  lie  found  in  the  region  of  the 
trade  wiiuls;  and  this  appears  to  be  rho  general  oiilliiio  of  the  great  system  of  circulation 
inoiiratmosplu're,  as  well  as  in  the  ocean  itself.  It  is  to  the  geographical  course  pursued 
by  tho  svinds  in  dilfurent  portions  of  these  great  circuits,  that  the  peculiarities  of  teni'- 
peraturo  and  climate  pertaining  to  di.Tjrent  countries  lying  in  the  same  latitudes,  are 
cliiedy  to  be  reterred,  as  also  tho  remarkable  ubsonce  or  |)redomiuance  of  rain  which  is 
poculinr  to  certain  regions. 

The  monsoons  of  the  Indian  Seas  are  but  a  modilicafion  of  tlie  satne  system  of  circula- 
tion ;  the  regular  trade  witu!,  instead  of  turning  towards  thi.i  higher  latitudes,  being  liero 
dollected  iicross  the  eipiator,  where  it  returns  to  tlie  eastward  in  the  I'oriii  of  the  tvtsli  dn 
monsoons;  l\w  easterly  monsoons  being  the  regular  trade  wind.  The  monsoons  have,  in- 
deed been  ascribed  to  local  refraction  in  Asia  and  New  Holland,  but  the  north-westerly 
monsoon,  regardless  of  this  hypothesis,  soniutiiiies  sweeps  ovi-r  half  tho  bieudth  of  the 
great  Pacific  in  its  eastwardly  progress. 

T'lo  foregjing  generalization  may  also  be  expressed  in  the  following  form: 

I.  Between  ilio  two  pandlels  of  ;?0°  N.  and  S.  the  atniosjiiiore  at  the  earth's  surface, 
for  the  ii'.oHt  part,  revolves  around  the  axis  of  the  earth  with  a  slower  motion  than 
the  earili's  ciust,  or  is  constantly  being  left  behind  in  tlie  movement  of  rotation. 
II.  Tlie  s|)aco  ]  ievioiisly  occupied  by  the  atmosplu^ie  so  left  behiinl,  is  by  the  ceutrifu- 
g;d  action  of  the  earti  s  rotation,  constantly  supplied  from  the  higher  latitudes. 

III.  Tl'at  portiui  of  t!:>.  atmosphere  which  is  left  behind  in  liie  tropical  latitudes,  and 
jKisses  westrt'ur  1  by  the  earth's  lotalioii,  as  above  des^criljcd,  is,  by  the  force  of 
direct  gravitation,  constantly  transferred  to  the  higher  l.ilitndes ;  t!.us  jireserving 
the  equilibrium  of  distribution,  so  far  as  tho  same  is  over  maintaiiieJ  in  these  lati- 
tudes. 

IV.  That  ])ortinn  of  tlio  atmosphero  which  is  so  transf nM(>d  to  the  higher  latitudes  after 
having  acquired  the  high  rotative  velocity  of  the  equatorial  regions,  is,  iiy  this  jire- 
viously  actjuired  impulse,  thrown  rapidly  eastward  in  llie  form  of  westerly  winds, 
thus  completing  the  great  circuit  of  perpetual  gravitation,  which  is  developed  in  each 
of  tile  oceanic  basins  on  lioth  sides  of  the  equator. 

It  is  l)V  the  currents  of  these  natural  circuits  of  gravitation,  that  hurricanes  nnd  storms 
are  fotind  to  be  transported  tVoni  one  region  or  locality  to  another  ;  and  the  tracli  of  thi^so 
storms  alfords  demonstrative  evidence  of  the  predominating  course  which  these  currents 
pursue.  TliecurriMits  themselves  often  become  modified  in  their  apparent  courses  from 
viirions  causes,  and  being  often  Btratilied,  or  as  it  were  slit n>rled  \i\nm  each  other,  they 
exhibit  in  their  crossings,  initial  movements  in  dilferent  directimis,  and  fretpient  changes 
Rt  tile  surface,  while  still  pertorming  with  no  little  regularity  the  systiMuatic  courses  which 
'lave  been  summarily  pointed  (mt.  One  obvious  cause  of  the  iriegularity  and  su[)erpo- 
sitioii  of  those  currents  is  found  in  tho  retardation  to  which  tho  lowest  portions  aro  sub- 
ject, oving  to  the  resistance  of  the  earth's  siirt'ace. 

The  rotative  motion  of  the  atmosphere  and  the  i^irth's  surface  in  the  latitudes  between 
the  trade  winds  and  the  returning  westerly  winds  being  nearly  ecpial,  this  region  is  neces- 
sar.'y  h<ibiectto  calms,  and  to  those  sudden  gusls  and  scjualis  which  are  usually  excited  in 
wan  1  regions  in  the  absence  of  a  jirevailing  wind,  'i'liis  region,  in  tlio  Norlli  Atlantic,  is 
know  to  navigators  as  tho  horsiiiitltadcs,  because  the  traders  between  Now  Jingland  and 
the  \^  est  Indu's,  in  c(inse(|ueiico  of  the  lack  of  sustenanco  occasioned  by  those  calms,* 
were  sometimes  under  the  necessity  of  throwing  oviNlioard  the  whole  or  a  jiart  of  their 
dock  loads  of  horses.  The  great  circuits  of  winds  •olersect  and  caress  these  latitudes  in 
both  directions  on  almost  every  meridian,  but  with  little  sensibhf  eli'ect  at  the  surface,  ex- 
cept towards  tho  eastern  margin  of  tho  Atlantic,  where  tho  northerly  winds  decidedly 
prevail;  und  towards  the  we..lerii  margin  of  tho  Atlantic  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  tho 
southerly  winds  nro  usually  prevalent. 

Similarresults  are  found  in  nearly  all  tho  regions  which  separate  the  great  natural  cir- 
cuit of  winds  from  each  other,  and  these  tracts  of  oiH'an  are  known  by  tho  designation  of 
tho  tulmi,  and  sometimes  are  called  the  ritins  or  the  vnriiihlcs.  .Such  is  the  region  about 
tho  o(]uator,  whiidi  separates  the  northern  from  tin.'  southern  trade  winds,  and  tho  easterly 
from  tho  westerly  nnmsoons.  Tho  easterly  monsoons  in  approaching  tho  er|uator.  where 
they  run  into  the  westerly  monsoons,  necessarily  acquire  the  same  velocity  of  rotation  as 
the  earth's  crust,  which  of  course  produce.,  calms  ;  the  northerly  or  southerly  tendencyof 
the  monsoons  being  here  too  Htuull  to  produce  a  loading  breeze  at  tho  surfaco. 

Land  and  Sea  Breezes. 

Near  tho  shorog  of  no  island  or  country  it  is  often  found  that  tho  wind,  during  'ilToront 
hours  of  tho  day  nnd  night,  blows  alternately  to  .ind  from  the  land.  Or  in  tho  case  of  a 
general  or  trade  wind  which  is  parallel  to  the  coast,  its  course  becomes  alternately  modi- 
fied by  UD  approxiuiatioa  to  the  abuvo  result.     This  olfect  has  probably  been  ascribed  to 


•17 


mmmm 


^W 


'W 


"-"■B"! 


mry^mgr'r^'^m 


1S«  BLUNTS   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 

the  influence  of  diurnal  boat  and  cold.  Not  that  any  vacuum  is  created  by  the  heat  into 
which  the  eurrounding  air  rushee,  as  has  sometimes  been  supposed ;  for,  aside  from  the 
general  error  of  this  notion,  a  flht,  low,  and  strongly  heated  island  or  coast,  has  less  effect 
in  producing  these  breezes  than  a  high  sloping  country  of  more  even  temperature. 

The  truth  iippenrs  to  be  that  when  the  stratum,  which  lies  upon  the  inclined  surface 
of  a  coast  hecomes  wtiimed  mid  rnrified  by  the  daily  heat,  it  is  forced  by  the  increment  of 
pressure  at  its  lowest  margin  to  move  along  the  inclined  surface  in  the  direction  of  great- 
est elevation,  or  as  near  thiit  direction  as  the  prevailing  tendency  of  the  lower  current  will 
allow.  Owing  to  the  cooling  process  which  goes  on  during  the  night,  the  specific  gravity 
of  the  inclined  stratum  becomes  piedominani,  and  the  reverse  movemiuit  then  commences 
and  continues  into  the  following  morning.  We  find,  too,  that  on  the  slopes  of  certain 
coasts  and  islimds  where  there  is  sufficient  elevation,  the  higher  margin  of  this  stratum, 
at  certain  seasons,  will  daily  reach  an  altitude  at  which  it  is  brought  in  contact  with  n 
higher  stratum  sutririeiitly  cold  to  set  in  opemtion  a  squall  or  thunder  storm,  at  a  certain 
hour ;  after  which,  the  equilibrium  is  restored,  and  the  usual  counter  movement  again 
follows  in  its  turn. 

Some  diurnal  effect  of  this  kind  upon  the  wind  '<.'••  observed  at  times  in  almost  every  re- 
gion ;  and,  taken  altogether,  it  is  probably  the  most  extensive  agency  which  is  exercised 
by  heat  in  the  production  of  winds. 


OBSERVATJONS 

ON    THE 

HURRICANES  AND  STORMS  OF  THE  WEST  INDIES  AND  THE 
COAST  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

BY  W.  C.   REDFIELD. 

From  a  careful  attention  to  the  progress  and  phenomena  of  some  of  the  more  violent 
storms  which  have  visited  the  Western  Atlantic,  I  have  found  that  they  exhibit  certain 
characteristics  of  great  uniformity,  'i'his  appears,  not  only  in  the  terminate  course  which 
these  storms  are  found  to  pursue,  but  in  the  direction  of  wind  and  succession  of  changes 
which  tliey  exliihit  while  they  continue  in  action.  The  same  general  characteristics  ap- 
pear also  to  pertain,  in  some  degree,  to  many  of  the  more  common  variations  and  vicissi- 
tudes of  winds  and  weather,  at  least  in  the  temperate  latitudes.  The  following  points  1 
consider  as  established  : 

1.  The  storms  of  greatest  severity  often  originate  in  the  tropical  latitudes,  and,  notun- 
frequentl)  ,  to  the  eastward  of  the  West  India  Islands  ;  in  tiie  tropical  regions  they  are 
distinguished  liy  the  name  ui hurricanes, 

2.  These  storm«  cover,  at  the  same  moment  of  time,  an  extent  of  contiguous  surface, 
the  diameter  of  which  may  vary  in  different  storuis,  from  one  hundred  to  five  hundred 
niilon,  ami  in  some  cases  they  have  been  nnich  more  extensive.  They  act  with  dimin- 
ished violence  towards  the  exterior,  and  with  increased  energy  towards  the  interior,  of  the 
space  which  they  occupy. 

3.  While  in  the  tropical  latitudes,  or  south  of  the  parallsl  of  30°,  these  storms  pursue 
their  course,  or  are  drijleii  by  the  natural  atmospheric  current  of  the  region  towards  the 
west,  on  a  track  which  inclines  gradually  to  the  northward,  till  it  approaches  the  latitude 
of  30°.  In  the  vicinity  of  this  Darnllel,  their  course  is  changed  somewhat  abruptly  to  the 
nortliwanl  and  eastward,  and  the  truck  contiiuies  to  incline  gradually  to  the  east,  towards 
whirl)  point,  after  leaving  the  lower  latitudes,  they  are  found  to  progress  with  an  accele- 
rated velocity. 

The  rate  at  which  these  storms  are  found  thus  to  advance  in  their  course,  varies  in  dif- 
ferent c;ises,  but  n)ay  be  estimated  at  from  12  to  30  miles  an  hour.  The  extent  to  which 
their  course  is  finally  pursued,  remains  unknown  ;  but  it  is  probable  tliat  as  they  proceed, 
they  be(  oine  graduidly  extended  in  their  dimens'ons,  and  weakeneJ  in  their  action,  till 
they  cease  to  command  any  peculiar  notice.  One  of  the  hurricanes  of  August,  1830, 
has  been  traced  in  its  daily  protzress,  from  near  the  Caribbeo  Islands  to  the  coast  of  Flor- 
ida and  the  Carolinas,  and  from  thence  to  the  banks  of  Newfoundland,  o  distance  of  more 
than  three  thousand  miles,  wiiich  was  passed  over  by  the  storm  in  about  six  days.  The 
duration  of  tho  most  violent  portion  of  this  gale,  at  the  different  points  over  which  it  passed, 
wos  about  12  hours,  but  its  entire  duration  was  in  many  places  more  thnn  twice  that  pe- 
riod. Another  hurricane  which  occurred  in  the  same  month,  passed  from  near  tho 
Windward  Islands,  on  a  more  eastern  but  similar  route,  and  has  rIso  been  traced  in  its 


mmmmm 


"^^PH 


the  heat  into 
aide  from  the 
las  less  effect 
'nture. 

lined  surface 
increment  of 
tion  of  great- 
r  current  will 
jecific  ginvity 
1  commoncos 
as  of  certain 
this  stratum, 
)ntBCt  with  R 
I,  nt  a  certain 
rennent  again 

lost  every  re- 
is  exercised 


\ND  THE 


I  more  violent 
jxhibit  certain 
course  which 
n  of  changes 
icteristics  np- 
[)8  and  vicissi- 
wing  points  1 

and,  not  un- 
ions they  are 

uous  surface, 
five  liundrcd 
with  dimin- 

iiterior,  of  the 


torms  pursue 
towards  the 
B  the  latitude 
)ruptly  to  the 
east,  towards  % 
th  an  acceic-    '-i 

varies  in  dif- 
tent  to  which 
hey  proceed, 
)ir  action,  till 
ugust,  1830, 
coast  of  Flor- 
ance  of  more 
;  days.  The 
lich  it  passed, 
wice  that  pe- 
)m  near   the 

traced  in  iti 


c 

il   N 

|{  T      1.    BLUNT's 

American  Coast  Piht  M 

100  ■•                            9.'."                            00"                             «6-                               1 

i 
] 

• 1 -' 1 1 ! 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 i„ 1 ■-. -A—a' 

« 

i 

WITH       TUli      I'Ot'USES 

! 
Ill'    \',iniiii« 

1 

I                       rar'iMJflrAi'ViB.'^,. .--'"' 

■j-i- 

1 

j                                                                 /<v_,„-'-"                    . 

i 

»',i:  UF.ni'iEi.u.               f 

I- 

N^'.'.T'i''        i.'i:.:.,                      ,-■"'•■-- 

1 

iV'''            «illi  Ail.Uli.ms.            ,--''/ 

1 

In  l»-.0       ^  .'     ''                _,..A 

i     1 

rj,A  — 

\ 

• 
w 

1 
1 

■1 
1 
t 

i 

.'^'' 

1      1 

1      j 

,     !  i 

1 
i.j 

,-'''\'     :•'  jll 

1 

1                                                             "  ^ 

\    > 

j 

,1"' 

'   ./I      . '    .j\  i 

1                           *i,„../  ,;;,---,   ,j 

t 

\     !,:--v'  .„„•.-■■■'•'     .-  Y 

j 

— 

I 

,'■;■',  1       i 

i 

1       + ,.'.  V'.' 

1 
!' 

( 

\^       /            \     il 

'                                  M     ,'l 

'^oi 

■^    -^.       ..V         '^^'-l 

u 

[i 

y.lff 

1      i' 
] 

"k     ;r-<-r-i.  ■■■■  /• 

^;*^-'«,             "      "^          '      T  '7:-,^...      .•^-. 

! 
i     i 

J 

b"J 

>  -'  ■''■•'"<..„,,  ■ 

"\ 

:.••'■ 

i    H 

"-•X.. 

j 

1    ' 

1 
1 

\     Lt'Jtl,*tWb4    ,j 

1 

'                 I*     •     I'     . 

^^'''\    V 

1                  '  "  , 

'>-?-^-    '■,  )■' 

lie 

1 

1 

•0° 

L_ 

i«i 

'   V  ' 

! 

1 

_._ 

if                                 !).'.'                                 'lU                                   «.V 

i'  II   V  \l  T       I.    BLUNT  ^  American  wait  hint  16"  JuUt 


100" 


.."ij 


I 


9(1" 


86" 


ao" 


^ 


WITH       THE      I'HrnsES 

of    V.'ividli  K 


tfvl^^'"' 


■  I'K' 


ir,r.  HKBfiiu.u. 

itil   '  witli  Aililitii.iis. 

Ill  iitrio 


")^ " 


I'' 


-T 


/.•1>' 


.  \'"' 


■¥■'  ',/       '' 


i'iuj,„',.i,.i,i.-,- -i;'^: />' ,^_ 


H 


sol^— 


/       ; './'•''/•.ii,'.,iA'    /  '  .' 

I  ■'•'''...9!''' 


I     1'  ,r      /.■I.J  -  -''  '      / 


^1.-^ 


■»A.. 


>■  I  :?        '        V     -  '       ,' 


'■'j"4j 

ft 


//-    -^  y    /*-'  — ^.  . 

,^''^ ^'i-.-^'.  iv;„  /'.y; 


.0»v' 


'A: 


\i\ 


i     i  ^    \ 


.I7rt.'>l ;...y  •/....». 


/■      -^ 


'.'M'W 


,1 

i     fl 


v/.„.,^„, 


.c^  •-, 


r'i. 


''>, 


'"/4, 


'z' 


'v^-^-. — 


.r 


■<y-       '•  S 


^  ..V  •<■■■•>■...„,; 


"••,>v 


/ 


ai«>" 


oi* 


•■•'W., 


\ 


\     'i.  -  ' 


90" 


«a* 


flo"w  o7T;i«ti  ^i*"  7.1"  '     "   '/ 0'~ 


■^. 


"  •mm 


mmmmmmm 


70"  Oi"  60-  _  49-  jfl. 

/        .. ..'  .--'■•     v--^'.>  f    ,>.  o'^  .'  >•  .--     .--Mill' 


■Id" 


,^„t»^^^ 


,^'-J--" 


./^*^ 


s.A*'--'^ 


.cl'v--'  K^  ■""^^^ ^-UZ^^ _.,....'^- 


.i 


^'^', 


■r     /W^y 


^v/    ../       .^''        .r        1--      y 


;^^^ 


^•'..o.-i-' 


A-'/ 


/       .-••' 


.tolMris4i.<m[; 


■  v 


■iDc 


h«' 


05'l 


(t'SO' 


\.. 


^  . .V>"',t,u)'  h'j  t.'XIl, 


K<. 


■^      '•      'r^/J  ^if'ji s^l-i: ^ 

■■■<■/"■     "-S: 


'  '/// 


3.i' 


•  'y^:y^.^-y .  ^-ym^  ;  -,,.x-^* 


I      I. 

I      ii 


t---- 


ao* 


''^■'^--» , 


'^^ 


/'-tr- 


-t, 


'-?? 


irfih/eff        s^ 


M    n    I    A. 


■'^■;yn 


"'"  .10' 


10 


-,.5* 


dfiily  stnges 
hundred  mil 
Ramsey,  su 
and  ol'  Barb 
ascertained, 
icoand  Now 
a  distance  o: 
Many  cases 

4.  The  di 
and  the  rate 
the  time  wl: 
route.  Sto 
place  to  ano 

5.  The  c( 
direction  of 
wind  in  all  s 
common  cei 
course  of  n 
horizontally 
with  the  CO 

6.  In  the 
the  commei 
em  quarter, 
part  of  the 
whole  offec 

7.  After 
northward  i 
em  qunrtei' 
distinctly  u 
attended  wi 

8.  On  th 
lion  of  it  w 
mencemeni 
westward,  i 

g.  [n  the 
the  wind 
changes  sue 
posite  to  th 
blows  with 
change  of 
margin  of 
nlar  pi-ogre 
north-east, 
in  the  sami 
fall  of  the  I 
change  of 
usually  attc 
after. 

10.  Ont 
thest  inlan 
em  or  nort 
north,  to  a 
first  part  of 
ern  portion 
part  of  its 

It  shoulc 
lina,  where 
from  a  nor 
will  comm( 
become  aoi 

11.  A  fi 
j  clusively  tl 
!  body  of  th( 

cal  or  som 
the  course 
operates  n^ 


niMPM 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


»19 


daily  stngeB  by  means  of  the  journals  and  reports  of  voyagers,  near  two  tbousnnd  five 
hundred  miles.  It  was  in  this  storm  that  the  Russian  Corvette,  Kensington,  Captiiin 
Ramsey,  suilered  so  severely.  The  hurricane  of  August,  1831,  which  desolated  the  Isl- 
and ol"  Barbndoes  on  the  10th  of  that  month,  the  daily  progress  of  which  has  also  been 
ascertained,  passed  in  nearly  a  direct  course  to  the  northern  shores  of  the  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico and  Now  Orleans,  where  it  arrived  on  the  IGth  of  the  same  month,  having  passed  over 
a  distance  of  twenty-three  hundred  statute  miles  in  6  days  after  leaving  Harbadoes.* 
Many  cases  of  like  character  might  be  adduced 

4.  The  duration  of  the  storm,  at  any  place  within  its  track,  depends  upon  its  extent 
and  the  rate  of  its  progressive  velocity,  as  these  circumstances  are  found  to  duteniiine 
the  tiiuo  which  is  required  for  the  storm  to  pass  over  any  given  locality  falling  within  its 
route.  Storms  of  smaller  extent,  or  dimensions,  are  usually  found  to  move  from  one 
place  to  another  with  greater  rapidity  than  larger  storms. 

5.  The  course  thus  pursued  by  the  storm,  is  found  to  be  entirely  independent  of  the 
direction  of  wind  which  it  may  exhibit  at  the  different  points  over  which  it  jjasses — the 
wind  in  all  such  storms  being  found  to  blow  after  the  manner  of  a  whirlwind,  around  a 
common  centre  or  vortex,  during  their  entire  progress,  and  in  a  determinate  direction  or 
course  of  rotation,  which  is  from  right  to  left  (or  in  the  direction  from  west  to  south) 
horizontally.  The  direction  of  the  wind,  therefore,  for  the  most  part,  does  not  coincide 
with  the  course  of  the  storm. 

6.  In  the  lower  latitudes,  while  drifting  to  the  westward,  the  direction  of  the  wind  at 
the  commencement,  or  under  the  most  advanced  portion  of  these  storms,  is  from  a  north- 
ern quarter,  usually  at  some  point  from  north-east  to  north-west,  and  during  the  latter 
purt  of  the  gale,  it  blows  from  a  southern  quarter  of  the  horizon,  at  ull  places  \>  here  the 
whole  effect  of  the  gale  is  experienced. 

7.  After  reaching  the  more  northern  latitudes,  and  while  pursuing  their  course  to  the 
northward  and  eastward,  these  storms  commence  with  the  wind  from  an  eastern  or  south- 
ern quarter,  and  terminate  with  the  wind  from  a  western  quarter,  as  will  appear  more 
distinctly  under  the  three  following  heads,  the  latter  portion  of  the  storm  being  usually 
attendcMl  with  broken  or  clear  weather. 

8.  On  the  outer  portion  of  the  track,  north  of  the  parallel  of  30°,  or  within  that  por- 
tion of  it  which  Wea  farthest  from  tlie  American  coast,  these  storms  exhibit  at  their  com- 
mencement a  southerly  wind,  which  as  the  storm  comes  over,  veers  gradually  to  the 
westward,  in  which  quarter  it  is  found  to  terminate. 

9.  In  the  same  ktitudes,  but  along  the  central  portions  of  the  track,  the  first  force  of 
the  wind  is  from  a  point  near  to  south-east,  but  after  blowing  for  a  certoin  period  it 
changes  suddenly,  and  usually  after  a  short  intermission,  to  a  point  nearly  or  directly  op- 
posite to  that  from  which  it  has  previously  been  blowing,  from  which  opposite  quarter  it 
blows  with  equal  violence  till  the  storm  has  passed  over,  or  has  abated.  This  sudden 
change  of  a  south-easterly  wind  to  an  opposite  direction,  does  not  occur  towards  cither 
margin  of  the  storm's  track,  but  only  on  its  more  central  portion,  and  takes  effect  in  reg- 
ular progression  along  this  central  part  of  the  route,  from  the  south-west  towards  the 
north-east,  in  an  order  of  time  which  is  exactly  coincident  with  the  progress  of  the  storm 
in  the  same  direction.  It  is  under  this  portion  of  the  storm  that  we  notice  the  greatest 
fall  of  the  barometer,  and  the  mercury  usually  begins  to  rise  a  short  time  previous  to  the 
change  of  wind.  In  this  part  of  the  track,  the  storm  is  known  as  a  south-easter,  and  is 
usually  attended  with  rain  previous  to  the  change  of  wind,  and  perhaps  for  a  short  time 
after. 

10.  On  that  portion  of  the  track  which  is  nearest  the  American  coast,  or  which  is  far- 
thest inland  if  the  storm  reaches  the  continent,  the  wind  commences  from  a  more  east- 
ern or  north-eastern  point  of  the  horizon,  and  afterwards  veers  more  or  less  gradually,  by 
north,  to  a  north-western  or  westerly  quarter,  where  it  finally  terminates.  Here  also  the 
first  part  of  the  storm  is  usually,  but  not  always  attended  with  rain,  and  its  latter  or  west- 
ern portion  with  fair  weather.  The  first  or  foul  weather  portion  of  the  storm,  is  ou  this 
part  of  its  track,  recognised  os  a  north-easter. 

It  should  be  noted,  however,  that  near  the  latitude  of  30°,  and  on  the  shores  of  Caro- 
lina, where  the  storm  enters  obliquely  upon  the  coast,  while  its  track  is  rapidly  changing 
from  a  northwardly  to  an  eastwardly  direction,  the  wind  on  the  central  track  of  the  storm, 
will  commence  from  an  eastern  or  north-eastern  point  of  the  compass,  and  will  gradually 
become  south-easterly  as  the  storm  approaches  its  height. 

11.  A  full  and  just  consideration  of  the  facts  which  have  been  stated,  will  show  con- 
clusively that  the  portion  of  the  atmosphere  which  composes  for  the  time  being  the  great 
body  of  the  storm,  whirls  or  blows  as  obove  stated,  in  a  horizontal  circuit,  around  a  verti- 
cal or  somewhat  inclined  ox\a  of  rotation  which  is  carried  onward  with  the  storm;  that 
the  course  or  direction  of  this  circuit  of  rotation  is  from  right  to  left ;  and  that  the  storm 
operates  nearly  in  the  same  manner  as  a  tornado  or  whirlwind  of  smaller  dimensions; 

*  Th:  iracks  of  these  and  other  hurricanes  appear  on  the  annexe  J  chart. 


WW  Ml 


t^mmmm 


"wiP" 


will" «  ip.:W^wimi^»?p^ipipiwaR"w^»p»" 


■  lu  J  IP  '  iiflP^w^wiinwpwiPflpr 


20* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  ! 

the  chief  diflference  being  in  the  more  disk-like  form  of  the  whirling  body  nnd  the  mag. 
nitmlo  of  the  Bcnlo  of  operation.*  This  view  of  the  subject,  when  fully  comprehended, 
ntTords  a  Biitisfiictory  solution  of  the  olherwiae  inexjdicable  phenomena  of  storms,  and 
will  also  be  found  to  nccord  entirely  with  the  fact  which  appears  in  the  above  stntuinont, 
that  in  the  phases  or  changes  which  pertain  to  a  stoi  m,  the  wind,  on  one  margin  of  its 
track,  veers  tvith  the  sun,  or  from  left  to  right,  while  under  the  opposite  margin  of  the 
same  storm  it  veers  against  tht  sun,  or  from  right  to  left;  for  this  peculiarity  necessarily 
attends  the  progressive  action  of  any  wliirlwind  which  operates  horiKontally. 

12.  Owing  to  the  centrifugal  action  of  these  rotative  storms,  the  barometer,  whether 
in  the  higher  or  lower  latitudes,  always  sinks  wliile  under  the  first  portion  or  moiety  of 
the  storm  on  every  part  of  its  track,  excepting,  perhaps,  its  extreme  outward  margin, 
and  commonly  all'ords  us  the  earliest  and  surest  indication  of  the  approaching  tempest, 
'j'lie  mercury  in  the  baronujter  always  rises  again  during  the  passogo  of  the  last  iJortion 
of  the  gale,  and  commonly  attains  the  maximum  of  its  elevations  on  the  entire  departure 
of  the  i-torm. 

The  ureat  value  of  the  barometer  to  navigators  is  becoming  well  understood,  and  ita 
practical  utility  might  be  greatly  increased  by  hourly  entries  of  the  precise  heigh.'  of  the 
mercurial  column,  in  a  table  prepared  for  the  purpose.  Its  movements,  unless caiofully 
recorded,  often  esca])e  notice  or  recollection;  which  may  easily  happen  at  those  times 
when  a  distinct  knowledge  of  its  latest  variations  might  prove  to  be  of  tlio  greatest  im- 
portance. 

Li  the  foregoing  statements  our  design  has  been  to  designate  in  a  summary  manner 
the  principal  movements  which,  in  these  regions  at  least,  constitute  a  storm;  and  we  do 
not  attempt  to  notice  tile  various  irregidiiritie.s,  and  subordinate  or  incidental  movements 
and  ])lieiH)mena  of  the  atmo.sphere  with  wliicli  a  storm  may  chance  to  be  connected,  or  | 
which  may  necessarily  result  from  such  violent  movements  in  a  fluid  whicli  is  so  tenuous 
and  elastic  in  its  character.  It  may  bo  remarked  in  general,  that  the  most  active  or  vio- 
lent storms  are  usually  the  most  regular  and  uniform  in  the  development  of  those  charnc- 
toristic  movements  which  we  have  already  described.  It  is  also  probable,  that  the  vortex 
or  rotative  axis  of  a  violent  gale  or  hurricane,  oscillates  in  its  course  with  considernUo 
rajjiility,  in  a  moving  circuit  of  moderate  extent,  near  the  centre  of  the  hurricane;  nnd  I 
such  an  eccentric  movement  of  the  vortex  may,  for  ought  we  know,  bo  essential  to  the 
continued  activity  or  force  of  the  hurricane.  Such  a  movement  will  fully  account  for 
the  violent  Jhnvs  or  gusts  of  wind,  and  the  intervening  lulls  or  remi-ssions,  which  are  so 
often  experienced  towards  the  heart  of  a  storm  or  hurricane,  when  in  open  sea;  but  of  | 
its  existence  wo  have  no  positive  evidence. 

In  Purdy's  Memoir  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  it  is  stated  "that  while  one  vessel  has  been  I 
lying  to  in  a  heavy  gale  of  wind,  another,  not  more  than  30  leagues  distant,  has  at  the  very 
same  time  been  in  another  gale  equally  heavy,  and  lying  to  with  the  wind  in  quite  an  I 
opposite  direction." 

This  stotemont  is  obviously  to  ho  understood  as  applicable  to  two  vessels  falling  under  | 
the  two  opjiosito  sides  or  portions  of  tlio  same  slorm,  where  the  wind  in  its  regular  cir- 
cuit of  rotation  must,  of  course,  blow  from  the  opposite  quarters  of  the  horizon.      Wei 
will  suppose  one  of  the  vessels  to  be  at  A  nnd  llie  other  at  B,  in  the  annexed  figure.— I 

The  storm  is  pursuing  its  course  from! 
N     W.  towards  N.,  will  strike  the  first  men- 
/'     tioned  vessel  in  the  direction  which  is 
shown  by  the  wind  arrows  nt  the  poiDt 

c,  which,  if  the  position  be  in  the  tem- 
perate latitudes,  north  of  30°,  will  be 
from  eastward.  Now,  it  is  obvious, 
that  as  the  storm  advances  in  its  course 

I         north-eastward,    this    vessel,    if    nearly 

stationary,  will  intersect  the  body  of  tlie 

gale  on  the  line  c  A.  d.      As  the  storm 

advances,  the  wind  must  also  veer  to 

the  northward,  as  shown  by  the  arrows, 

being  nt  N.  E.  when  the  vessel  is  brought 

G    under  the  point  A,  and  near  the  close  or 

departure  of  the  storm  by  its  further 

_  progress  eostward,  the  wind  will  haw 

W  further  veered  to  the  direction  shown  al 

d,  which,  with  due  allowance  for  the 


-».. 


*  It  is  to  hn  iindprstood  thnt  tlie  dinmrter  of  the  whirlwind  which  constitutes  the  storm  is  commcnsu 
rnt<!  witli  the  width  of"  the  track  over  which  the  storm  pusses.  '1  ho  mnin  body  of  the  storm  is  supposH 
to  luovo  ill  the  form  of  nn  extensive  disk,  whirling  around  its  own  centre  as  it  advances  in  it.s  regulai 
track — with  thi.s  diirjrenco,  dint  die  rotative  movement  ia  far  more  rapid  in  the  interior  portions  of  tin 
whirling  body,  than  towards  its  exterior  limits. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


•21 


y  nnd  the  mag. 
coinprolicMided, 

of  storms,  and 
bovo  Htntumont, 
3  mnrg'm  of  ita 

mnrsiii  of  tlio 
rity  nccossarily 
ly. 

neter,  whether 
>n  or  moiety  of 
utwiird  margin, 
ichiiig  tempest. 
th«  last  ijov'tion 
ntire  dejiiirturo 

erstoori,  nnd  its 

0  heigh."  of  tliD 
unless  en lofully 

at  those  times 
ho  greatest  im- 

immary  manner 
jrin;  and  we  do 
intal  movements 
ie  connected,  or 
ich  is  so  tenuous 
ust  active  or  vio- 
of  those  charnc- 
\  that  the  vortex 
ith  considernWo 
(  hurricane ;  nnj 

1  eHsential  to  tlie 
ully  account  for 
ns,  which  are  so 
ipou  sea;  but  o[ 

I  vessel  has  been 
r,  has  at  the  very 
nm\  in  quite  an 

pIs  falling  under 
n  its  regular  cir- 

horizon.  We 
inoxed  figure.— 
its  course  from 
l<e  the  first  men- 
ection  which  ij 
ws  at  the  point 

be  in  the  tera- 
of  30°,  will  be 
it  is  obvious, 
ces  it)  its  course 
Bssel,    if    nearly 

the  body  of  the 

As  the  storm  I 

1st  also  veer  to 

II  by  tho  arrows, 

vessel  is  brought 

near  the  close  or 

i)y  its  further 

wind  will  linTe 
rection  shown  a! 
lowance  for  the 


!torm  IS  comment 
e  storm  is  suppose! 
ncea  in  its  reguto 
riur  purtiona  of  tbi 


progressive  motion  of  the  storm,  we  will  sot  down  at  N.  N.  W.  The  other  vessel,  ns 
is  equally  obvious,  will  first  take  the  wind  from  the  southward,  ns  shown  at  e,  in  which 
nuarter  it  will  blow,  with  no  great  variation,  till,  by  the  advance  of  tho  storrn.  the  ship 
i'g  brought  under  the  point  B.  The  barometer,  which  hud  previously  boon  falling,  will 
nowcummeiico  rising,  and  the  wind,  veering  more  westerly,  will  at  the  dt)|)arluro  of  the 
storm,  bo  found  in  the  direction  shown  at  /.  which,  after  the  allowance  already  referred 
to,  may  bo  stated  at  W.  N.  W.  Such,  substantially,  aro  the  facts  commonly  ro|)ortHd 
by  vessels  which  fall  under  the  lateral  portions  of  the  Atlantic  storms,  ai.J  it  is  readily 
seen,  that  tho  opposite  winds  which  u.-o  exhibited  on  tho  two  dilferent  intersections  of  the 
Btorm,  as  above  described,  will  very  naturally  be  mistukeu  fur  two  su|)arate  and  distinct 
gales. 

Tlio  phases  of  tho  wind  in  these  gales  aro,  however,  in  all  cases  modified  more  or  loss 
by  the  course  or  changing  position  of  the  vesijol  exposed  to  its  action.  For  exutnplo;  a 
ship  on  taking  tho  gale,  say  at  E.  S.  E.  at  the  point  h,  on  the  figure,  and  lying  to  with  her 
head  fo  the  northward,  may  by  that  iiiouns  be  brought  to  intersect  tho  storm  on  the  lino 
h  i,  and,  at  the  point  i,  would  suddenly  be  takeu  aback,  with  t'iO  wind,  say  at  N.  N.  W., 
as  in  the  case  of  the  Jamaica  homeward-bound  Heet  in  1782,  md  the  barometer,  which 
reaches  its  lowest  depression  under  the  central  portion  of  the  storm,  would  about  this 
period  bo  found  to  have  commenced  rising  with  some  degree  of  rapidity. 

A  further  reference  to  the  figure  will  show  that  a  ship,  which  may  bo  at  the  point  G 
during  tho  passage  of  the  gale,  would  be  exposed  to  a  heavy  swell  from  the  southward 
nnd  westward;  but,  being  beyond  the  organized  limits  of  the  storm,  may  remain  entirely 
unaffected  by  tho  violence  of  the  wind,  which  at  the  same  time  may  bo  raging  with  de- 
structive fury  at  the  distance  of  a  few  leagues.  The  writer  has  k'lowlodgo  of  many  such 
examples. 

It  lias  been  suggested  that  "the  larboard  tack  is  the  proper  one  to  lie  to  on,  as  the 
wind  will  then  bo  found  to  draw  aft;"  liut  this  will  frequently  prove  orronoous.  as  tlie 
wind  may  draw  either  way,  on  either  tack,  according  to  the  position  and  course  of  the 
ship,  in  the  storm,  and  tho  extent  and  rale  of  progress  of  tho  latter.  In  tho  case  of  the 
fleet  which  encountered  the  gale  of  178'2,  it  was  probably  tho  best  course  to  carry  sail  to 
the  northward  at  the  very  commencement  of  the  galo,  and  as  far  and  as  long  as  possible. 
By  this  means  the  fleet  might,  perhaps,  have  been  drawn  as  far  northward  as  the  point 
Aon  tho  figure,  and  the  change  of  wind  to  the  northward  and  westward  would  have 
been  rendered  more  gi'adual.  The  chief  difliculty  and  danger,  is  when  tho  direction  of 
the  wind  at  the  first  setting  in  of  tho  galo,  is  found  to  be  nearly  at  right  angles  with  the 
known  course  of  the  storms  in  the  region  whore  tho  gale  is  encountered,  and  it  is  thou 
desirable  to  pursue  such  a  course  as  to  avoid,  if  possible,  falling  into  the  heart  of  the 
storm. 

It  frequently  happens  that  a  storm,  during  the  first  part  of  its  progress  over  a  given 
point,  fails  to  take  effect  upon  the  surface,  while  it  exhibits  its  full  activity  at  a  greater 
altitude.  This  commonly  happens  when  this  portion  of  the  storm  arrives  from,  or  has 
recently  blown  over  a  more  elevated  country,  or  is  passing  or  blowing  from  the  land  to 
the  sea.  On  land,  the  most  violent  effects  aro  usually  felt  from  those  storms  which  enter 
and  blow  from  tho  open  ocean  upon  the  shores  of  an  island  or  continent.  Upon  the  lat- 
ter, under  such  circumstances,  the  first  part  of  the  gale  is  usually  tho  most  severe,  and 
that  coast  of  an  island  upon  which  a  storm  first  enters,  or  blows,  also  suffers  most  from 
the  early  part  of  the  gale,  but  its  later,  or  receding  part,  often  acts  with  tho  greatest  fury 
upon  tho  o|)posite  side  of  the  island,  which  had  previously  derived  some  degree  of  shol- 
tec  from  tho  intermediate  elevations  and  other  obstacles  opposed  to  tho  force  of  tho  wind, 
the  benefit  of  which  is  now  lost  by  its  counter  direction  from  tho  open  ocean.  Owing  to 
similar  causes,  the  force  of  tho  storm  is  sometimes  very  unequal  at  different  places,  situ- 
ated in  nnarly  tho  same  part  of  its  track,  and  .such  inequality,  as  we  have  before  intimated, 
necessarily  pertains  to  two  places,  one  of  which  is  near  the  centre  and  the  other  towards 
the  margin  of  the  route. 

Of  the  multitude  of  facts  by  whicli  these  views  might  be  illustrated,  we  will  only  state, 
thnt  ill  tlio  late  hurricane  at  Barbadoes,  (that  of  August,  1831,)  the  trees  near  the  northern 
cuast  of  that  island,  lay  from  N.  N.  W.  to  S.  S.  E.,  having  been  prostrated  by  a  northerly 
wind  in  the  earlier  part  of  the  storm,  while  in  the  interior  and  some  other  parts  of  the 
island,  they  were  found  to  lay  from  south  to  north,  having  fallen  in  tho  latter  period  of  tho 
gale.  That  after  the  same  hurricane,  advices  that  were  received  from  the  islands  of  St. 
Croix  and  Porto  Rico,  (which  lay  near  the  northern  margin  of  its  track,)  stated  that  no 
hurricane  had  been  experienced  at  those  islands ;  but  it  afterwards  appeared  that  some 
portions  of  these  islands  had  suffered  damage  from  this  hurricane  in  the  night  of  tho  r2th 
to  1.3th  of  August,  two  days  after  it  ])assod  over  the  Island  of  Barbadoes. — That  the  sea- 
islands  which  border  the  coast  of  (ieorijia  and  tho  Carolinas,  aro  Known  to  sutler  greatly 
from  these  tem|)ost8,  while  little  or  no  injury  is  sustained  in  tho  interior  at  the  distance 
of  a  few  miles  from  tho  const.  One  of  tho  most  striking  characteristics  of  these  storms 
is  tho  heavy  swell  which  in  open  sea  is  often  known  to  extend  itself  on  both  sides  of  tho 


i2» 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

trnck,  piitiiely  boyorul  tlio  rimgo  of  the  gnle  by  wliich  it  wns  produced.  Tho  lost  liurri- 
cnno  to  which  wo  hiivo  niluded,  throw  itH  hwhII  with  tremeiidoua  force  upou  the  uoithern 
shores  of  .riiniiiciii,  having  passed  to  the  northward  of  that  island. 

So  stronj;  is  the  induenco  of  our  estiildishcd  modes  of  thiiiiiing  on  this  subject,  that  it 
soeins  to  bo  difficult,  even  for  those  who  n  Iniit  the  rotntivo  chnrnctor  of  these  luirricniies 
to  understand  correctly  tho  ttuo  bearing  and  relations  of  tho  ditforent  phases  of  the 
wind,  wliich  are  presented  at  two  or  more  points  or  places  visited  by  tho  same  storm, 
unless  the  subject  has  been  thoroughly  and  carefully  studied.  Speculative  opinions,  also, 
upon  a  course  of  a  storm,  are  usually,  if  not  always,  founded  upon  tho  erroneous  notion 
of  a  rectilinear  course  in  the  wind.  In  tlie  accounts  received  of  the  hurricanes  at  llarba- 
does,  on  the  3d  September,  1835,  which  raged  for  a  few  liours  from  E.  N.  E.,  fears  were 
expressed  for  the  safety  of  tho  islands  to  tlie  northward  ;  but  subsequent  intelligence  frmn 
Guaduloupe  and  Martinico  showed  that  tho  gale  had  not  extended  to  these  islands.  Hnd 
the  direction  and  changes  of  the  wind  in  this  storm  been  viewed  in  their  true  relations,  it 
would  have  been  perceived  that  the  heart  of  the  gale  must  have  possed  to  the  southward 
of  Barbadoes  ;  and,  as  a  general  rule  in  tho  West  India  latitudes,  where  the  onset  of  the 
stoiin  is  found  to  be  in  the  general  direction  of  the  trade  wind,  or  more  eastward,  the 
observer  may  consider  himself  as  under  the  northern  verge  of  tho  gale  ;  but  if  the  onset 
of  tho  gale  be  from  north-westward,  veering  afterwards  by  west  to  tho  southern  quarter, 
the  heart  of  the  storm  will  be  found  to  have  passed  to  the  northward  of  the  point  of  ob- 
servation, the  latter  being  under  the  southern  margin  of  the  gale. 

In  order  to  illustrate  the  foregoing  statements,  I  annex  a  chart  of  the  Western  Atlan- 
tic, on  which  is  delineated  the  route  of  several  hurricanes  and  storms,  as  derived  from 
numerous  accounts  which  are  in  my  possession,  by  which  their  progress  is  sjiecifically 
identified  from  day  to  day,  during  that  part  of  their  route  which  ajipears  on  the  chart. 

The  route  designated  as  No.  I,  is  thi't  of  the  hurricane  which  visited  the  isliuids  of 
Trinidad,  Tobago,  and  Grenada,  on  t!,e  23d  .luno,  1831.  Pursuing  its  course  thniiigh 
tho  Caribbean  Sea,  it  was  subsequently  encountered  by  H.  M.  scliooner  Minx,  and  other 
vessels,  and  its  swell  was  thrown  with  great  force  upon  the  south-eastern  shores  of  Ju. 
maica,  on  the  2uth,  while  passing  that  island,  where  the  wind,  at  this  time,  was  light  from 
the  nortliward.  After  sweeping  through  the  Caribbean  Sea.  this  hurricane  entered  upon 
tho  coast  of  Yucatan,  on  tho  night  of  Jun(>  '-'7.  having  moved  over  tho  entire  route  from 
Trinidad  to  the  western  shore  of  tho  Bay  of  Honduras  in  a  little  more  than  a  hundred 
hours,  a  distance  of  about  seventeen  hundred  nautical  miles,  which  is  equal  to  nearly 
seventeen  miles  an  hour.  1  have  no  account  of  this  storm  after  it  crossed  the  |)eninsula 
of  Yucatan,  and  it  is  probable  that  it  did  not  again  act  with  violence  upon  the  ocean  level, 
Its  courso  of  track  to  Honduras  was  N.  74^  W. 

Tiack  No.  II  is  that  of  tho  memorable  hurricane  which  desolated  Barbadoes  on  the 
night  of  August  10,  1831,  and  which  passed  I'orto  Rico  on  the  I'Jth,  Aux-Cayes  and  St. 
Jago  de  Cuba  on  the  13th,  Matanzas  on  the  14th,  was  encountered  off  tho  Tortugas  on 
the  loth,  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  on  the  IGth,  and  was  at  Mobile,  Pensacola,  and  New 
Orleans  on  the  17th  ;  a  distance  of  2000  nautical  miles  in  about  150  liours,  equal  to  some- 
thing more  than  13i  miles  an  hour.*  Its  course,  until  it  crossed  tho  tropic  of  Cancer, 
was  N.  04°  W.,  or  W.N.  W.,  nearly.  In  pursuing  its  northern  course,  after  leaving 
the  ocean  level,  it  must  have  encountered  the  mountain  region  of  the  Alleganies,  nnd  wiis 
perhaps  disorganized  by  the  resistance  ojiposed  by  these  tdevations.  It  appears,  liow- 
ever,  to  have  caused  heavy  rains  in  u  large  extent  of  country  lying  north-eastward  of  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico. 

Track  No.  Ill  is  that  of  the  destructive  hurricane  which  swept  over  the  Windward 
Islands  on  the  17th  of  August,  1827;  visited  St.  Martin's  and  St.  Thomas  on  the  IHth; 
passed  the  north-east  coast  of  Hayti  on  tho  19th  ;  Turk's  Island  on  the  20th  ;  tho  Ba- 
hamas on  the  21st  and  22d  ;  was  ciicnuntored  olfthe  coast  of  Florida  and  .South  Carolina 
on  23d  and  24tli ;  off  Cape  Hatleias  on  the  25th  ;  olf  the  Delaware  on  the  2(illi;  elf 
Nantucket  on  the  27tli;  and  olf  Sable  Island  and  the  Porpoise  Bank  on  the  28th.  Its 
ascertained  course  and  progress  is  nearly  3000  miles, f  in  about  eleven  ilays  ;  or  at  tho 
average  rate  of  about  eleven  miles  an  hour,  Tho  direction  of  its  route,  before  crossing 
the  tropic,  may  be  set  down  at  N.  Gl°  W.,  and  in  latitude  40°  while  moving  eastward,  at 
N.  58°  E. 

Track  No.  IV  is  that  of  the  extensive  hurricane  of  September,  1804.  It  swept  over 
tho  Windward  Islands  on  the  3d  of  that  month  ;  the  Virgin  Islands  and  Porto  Rico  on  tho 
4th  ;  Turk's  Island  on  the  5th;  the  Bahamas  and  Gulf  of  Florida  on  the  Gtli :  the  coast 
of  Georgia  and  the  Carolinas  on  the  7th  ;  the  great  bays  of  Chesapeake  and  Delaware, 
and  the  contiguous  portions  of  Virginiii,  Maryland,  and  New  Jersey,  on  the  8th ;  and 
tho  states  of  Massachusetts,  New  Hampshire  and  Maine,  on  tho  !)tli;  being  on  the  liijjh- 
lands  of  New  Hampshire  a  violent  snow  storm.     The  destructive  action  of  this  sloim 


•  Mr.  Piirdy  states  llint  this  gala  wi..-  fc'n  at  Niitclicz,  300  miiLSUp  tlio  Mississippi. 
T  All  the  distances  arc  expressed  ^n  nautical  miles. 


WI19  widely 
fact  pertains 
pears  to  ha' 
Mnarinchuse 
2J0O  miles,  f 
'  Track  No 
jrua,  Nevis, 
St.  Croix,  a 
ity  of  Matai; 
of  Mexico  01 
and  n^o  at  ] 
most  violent 
directly,  and 
lylaods,  it  h 
noithward. 
miles  in  6  da 

Track  No 
the  Windwn 
IStb ;  at  the 
tliB  coast  of  ( 
and  New  Y- 
the  l'*orpoist 
about  seven 
more  than  3 
suppose  tho 
than  this  rat 
be  found  eqi 
applies,  in  s 
stronger  evii 
cousideratioii 

Route  No, 
era  Atlantic 
islands  on  tl 
wo  have  occi 
it  was  founc 
widely  exte 
analogous  to 
ricaiie  of  Oc 
tho  average 

Route  N( 
encountered 
Bahamas,  an 
the  morning 
New  York 
across  the  «t 
not  in  posses 
The  diamete 
route  and  pr 

The  last 
similar,  but 
United  Stat*. 

No.  IX  re 
tered  to  the 
lialianias  on 
of  tiiu  same 


*  Siricn  the  i 
const  dl'  'rcxii 
ris.->i|)|>i,  nnd  i 
ciciit  to  iivi'rti 
inort"  ('011111)1111 
nitioiialc  of  w 
till'  I'liiut,  purii 

IIm'  iTIHT.'ll  eh 

bli'  |MiiiMiii  III 
t  l''or  11  iiiori' 
{Tho 


xx.  |)p, 


no  iilK-no 
ip.  2 1-27, 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•20 


lie  lost  liurri. 
the  uorthern 

uhjoct.  tliat  it 
e  hiirricnneg, 
iliHBeH  of  the 
siuno  Btoiiii, 
)pinioiin,  niso, 
inoous  notion 
nes  at  IJnrba- 
l.,  feiii'8  Were 
lligoncc  from 
aliiiKJs.  Hnd 
10  reliitions,  it 
le  Bouthwnrd 
Donsot  of  the 
^nHtwiirtl,  the 
t  if  the  onset 
liern  quarter, 
s  point  of  ob- 

Bstorn  Atlnn- 
dorivod  from 
9  Hpecificaliy 
the  chart, 
he  i»Iiin(ls  of 
jrse  tliroiigh 
IX,  and  other 
shores  of  Jh- 
;ii8  light  from 
BUtorod  upon 
J  route  from 
in  It  hundred 
ml  to  nearly 
;he  peninsula 
ocenii  level. 

[idoes  on  the 
liiycH  nod  .St. 
Tortugiis  on 
hi,  and  New 
)uul  to  sonie- 
icof  Ciinccr, 
lifter  leaving 
[lies,  nnd  wiis 
ipenrs,  Ijow- 
itward  of  the 

e  Windward 
i)u  the  J  Hth ; 
th ;  the  Ha- 
nth  Carolina 
he  i2(ilh;  off 
le  2tith.  Its 
(S  ;  or  at  the 
"ore  rroHsing 
eastward,  at 

swept  over 
I  Rico  on  the 
h ;  the  coast 
]  Delaware, 
he  8th ;  and 
on  the  hi;;b- 
)f  tins  storm 


^KS  widely  extended  on  both  sidoa  of  the  track  indicated  upon  the  chart,  and  the  same 
fact  pertains,  in  a  greater  or  less  decree,  to  the  other  storms  herein  mentioned.  It  ap- 
puiirs  to  have  passed  from  Martitiico,  and  the  other  Windward  Inlands,  to  lioston,  in 
Ma8:'nnhusett8,  by  the  usual  curvilinear  rout(!,  in  about  G  days ;  a  distance  of  more  than 
n'jOO  milea,  nt  an  average  progress  of  alxtut  15j  miles  per  hour. 

"  Tracli  No.  V  represents  the  route  of  the  hurriuano  which  ravaged  the  Islands  of  Anti- 
irua,  Nevis,  and  St.  Kitt's  on  the  ni^^ht  and  afternoon  of  August  I'Jth,  l6['o  ;  St.  Thomas, 
St.  Croix,  and  I'orto  Rico  on  the  13th  ;  Ilaytiand  Turk's  Island  on  the  11th  ;  the  vicin- 
ity of  Matan/.as  and  Havana  on  tho  LOth  ;  was  encountered  olF  the  Tortugas,  in  the  (Julf 
of  Mexico  on  the  Kith  ;  inlat.  27°  21',  long.  94'',  and  other  points,  on  the  17th  and  18th; 
nnd  al-'o  at  Matnniora,  on  the  coast  of  Mexico,  (lat.  20"  4',)  on  the  IHth,  where  it  was 
niost  violent  during  the  succeeding  night.*  This  storm  is  reniarkitble,  as  moving  mure 
directly,  and  farther  to  the  west,  than  \n  usual  for  storms  which  pass  near  tho  West  India 
InlnodH,  it  having  reached  tho  shores  of  Mexico  before  commencing  its  sweep  to  the 
northward.  Its  course,  so  far  as  known,  ia  N.  73^  W.  Its  progress  more  than  22U0 
miles  in  G  days,  which  is  nearly  equal  to  1.5^  miles  per  hour. 

Track  No.  VI  is  that  of  the  memorable  gale  of  August,  1830,  which,  passing  close  by 
tho  Windwanl  Islands,  visited  St.  Thomas  on  the  12th ;  was  near  Turk's  I.sliind  on  the 
\Mi\  at  tho  Bahannis  on  the  Hth;  o:  the  gnlf  and  coast  of  Florida  on  the  loth  ;  along 
tliecoastof  Georgia  and  the  Carolinas  on  the  Ifith;  oil"  Virginia,  Maryland,  New  .Jersey, 
and  New  York  on  tho  17th  ;  oil"  (Jeorgo's  Hank  and  Capo  .Sable  on  the  ISth;  and  over 
tho  Porpoise  and  Newfoundland  Banks  on  the  19th  of  the  same  month  :  having  occupied 
about  seven  days  in  its  ascertained  course  from  near  the  Windward  Islands,  a  distarnuj  of 
more  than  3000  miles — the  rate  of  its  progress  being  equal  to  18  miles  nn  hour.f  If  we 
suppo.se  the  actual  velocity  of  the  wind,  in  its  rotary  movement,  to  he  five  times  greater 
than  this  rate  of  progress,  which  is  not  beyond  tho  known  velocity  of  such  winds,  it  will 
be  found  equal,  in  this  period,  to  a  rectilinear  coui'se  of  1.5,000  miles.  The  same  remark 
applies,  in  substance,  to  a'l  the  storms  which  are  passing  under  our  review.  What 
stronger  evidence  of  the  rotative  action  can  be  required  than  is  nllbrded  by  this  single 
consideration  ? 

Route  No.  VII  is  that  of  an  extensive  gale,  or  hurricane,  which  swept  over  tho  west- 
ern Atlantic  in  1830,  and  which  was  encountered  to  tho  northward  of  the  West  India 
Islands  on  the  29th  of  September.  It  passed  on  a  more  eastern  route  than  any  which 
wo  have  occasion  to  describe,  to  the  vicinity  of  the  Grand  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  whore 
it  was  found  on  the  2d  of  October,  having  caused  great  damage  and  destruction  on  its 
widely  extended  track,  to  the  many  vessels  which  fell  on  its  way.  Its  course  is  quite 
analogous  to  that  which  we  have  considered  as  having  been  probably  pursued  by  the  hur- 
ricane of  October  3d,  1780.  The  ascertained  route  may  be  ostiniuted  at  1800  miles,  and 
the  averago  progress4)f  tho  storm  at  25  miles  an  hour. 

Routo  No.  VIII  is  that  of  a  much  smaller  but  extremely  violent  hurricane,  which  was 
encountered  off  Turk's  Island  on  the  1st  of  September,  182!  ;  to  the  northward  of  the 
Bahanuis,  and  near  tho  lat.  of  30^.  on  the  2d;  and  on  the  coast  of  the  Carolinas  early  in 
tho  morning  of  tlu^  3d  ;  and  from  thence,  in  the  course  of  that  day,  along  tho  sea  coast  to 
New  York  and  Long  Island ;  and  which,  on  the  night  following,  continued  its  course 
across  the  striesof  Connecticut,  Massachusetts,  New  Hampshire,  and  Maine.  Wo  are 
not  in  [)ossessi()n  of  accounts  by  which  its  farther  progress  can  be  successfully  traced. t — 
The  diameter  of  this  storm  appears  not  to  have  greatly  exceedeil  100  mih's  ;  its  ascertained 
route  and  progress  is  about  1800  miles  in  GO  hours;  ecjual  to  30  miles  an  hour. 

The  last  mentioned  route  amy  also  be  considered  to  be  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  u 
similar,  but  less  violent  storm,  which  swept  along  the  same  |)ortion  of  the  coast  of  tho 
United  States  on  the  28th  of  April,  1835. 

No.  IX  ropresenis  tho  route  of  a  violent  and  extensive  hurricane,  which  was  encoun- 
tpred  to  tho  northward  of  Turk's  Island,  on  the  22d  of  August,  1830  ;  northward  of  the 
Ilaliainas  on  the  23d  ;  and  olF  tho  coast  of  tho  United  .Slates  on  tho  24th,  2otli,  and  2Gth 
of  the  siMue  month. 


*SincR  the  nhovo  wna  written,  it  is  nscortniiiod  tint  this  storm  also  imsscd  ovnr  fiidvestnn  Hay  on  tlici 
coii.*t  (if  Texas,  «!»  re  llio  liurriciiiiP  l>low  with  violnice  IVoiii  tin;  N.  10.,  wliilo  iit  llie  iiioiuli  ol  tlio  M\-'- 
tUA\)\n,  niul  nldni;  llio  nordn  ii:  slioir'^  iif  tlif  ^iill',  tlu:  f^iilo  vviis  mil  li'lt.  tSiicli  liii'ts  ii|i]ii'ar  (|(iiti'siirii- 
ticnt  to  (ivcrtliiow  the  liypotiiosis  of  I'miiUliii  rohitiiij."  'o  iiurlli-rust  storms,  imd  iiro  rcjimlly  lUtiil  to  lli>^ 
more  coiiiiijiiii  theories.  At  (iidvestoa,  this  storm,  in  passinj;  over,  veered  liy  east  to  the  soiilli-i'iist ;  llio 
nitiDiiMJe  of  \vhi,!li  iimv  l)e  made  oviili'iit  hy  drHwiov;  a  line  ihroui^h  the  nortliera  side  of  the  figure  on 
till' iliait  parallel  to  the  track  of  the  storm.  A  little  further  uttenlion  to  the  lifrare  will  also  illustr.ite 
l!ir  ;'.  ri  ral  <harii<terof  tho  northers,  whieh  are  so  eoannon  on  the  coast  of  .Mexi(!o  during  a  cousiLlora- 
ble  imi  11(111  (if  the  year. 

t  l''or  a  more  extended  notiee  of  this  storm,  see  Anicrienn  Joiirniil  of  Scieuee,  vol.  xx   pp.  :U-3f!. 

f  The  i)lieriamenn  and  pruirress  of  this  storin  have  been  inoro  fully  noticed  in  Sillinmn's  Journal,  vol. 
XX.  pp.  24-27. 


S4» 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Much  dnmnjje  wns  done  on  tlm  ocrnn  by  tli'w  storm  ;  hut  it  »cnrcoly  roncht'd  tlio  Aino- 
ricnii  nhores.  Uh  dmiition  olK  thin  <im»t  wiis  iiboiit  10  hours,  nud  itn  pnigrcHs  iiiipoiug  to 
iiiivo  btipn  nioro  tiiidy  tliiin  llint  of  hoiiio  dtlior  hIoiiiib. 

No.  X  ropi'OHcntH  llio  tnirk  of  ii  vii>li«iit  liurricimo  iind  Hiiow-fttoiiii,  wliicli  HWrpt  nlong 
tlio  AnicriciincoiiHt.  from  llio  liititudo  of  "0"  N.,  on  lln'.'Jtli  nnd  (illi  Di'cc'iiilicr,  1h:!(). 

Till"  lust  mentioned  truck  idso  (•oii'oxpondB  to  llmt  of  iinotlicr  Htorni,  of  like  clmr.jcter, 
wliicli  swept  idoiij;  the  ceii-eoiift  on  the  l.'tlh,  llth,  iind  ITith  of  .Iiiniiiiry,  is.TI.  'I||,,„8 
viideiit  winter  alorniH  I'xliihit  neiirly  theniiine  plin.^t'H  ot  windund  genend  clinninteiiitics 
iia  thii.'<o  whicli  iip|)enr  in  tlio  summer  iind  iiutnmii. 

Trnck  No.  XI  represents  ii  portion  of  the  j;eneiHl  route  of  tlio  violont  inliind  storm 
whicli  swept  over  tho  lidies  Erie  iin<t  Oiitiirid,  on  iho  l.'5lli  of  November,  IHSy.  'I'lji^ 
storm  WIIS  V(>ry  extensivti,  Hjireiidin^  from  llio  sen-const  of  Vir^inlii  into  liie  (Jiiniidim,  to 
n  limit  nt  pre;<enf  unknown,  'i'he  iinterior  portion  of  this  j;iiio  wiis  Iml  modrniicly  |',.|t^ 
nnd  its  access  wii.s  noted,  ciiielly,  by  the  direction  of  tlie  wind,  iiiiil  the  ;iieiit  fidl  nf  tl,Q 
biirometer;  the  violence  of  the  storm  beins  cliielly  exiiibited  by  tlie  pusterior  mid  colder 
portion  of  the  jii\\i\  lis  is  ciiiiimon  witli  t>.Nteiisive  ovei  hind  Ht(iriii,4.  'riiii  re};iiliir  pidyrcj. 
sidii  of  this  storm  in  iiii  easterly  direction  is  clearly  established,  by  f  icts.  (udlected  \,y  ||,q 
wriliT,  from  the  borders  of  Luke  Michigiiu  to  tlio  (Uilf  of  St.  Lawieuco  and  the  sca- 
coast.s  of  New  Kn^liiiid  and  Nova  Scdtiii. 

We  h;ivo  liiiis  j;iveii  a  snmmnry  description  of  the  roiilo  of  twelve  storms,  or  hurri- 
canes which  hiivti  visited  the  Ameiiciiii  coasts  and  seas  at  various  periods,  mid  at  dilloi- 
ent  seasons  of  the  year.  The  lines  on  the  chart,  which  represent  the  routes,  me  but 
npproximatioiis  to  the  centre  of  the  track,  or  course,  of  the  several  storms  ;  and  the  'mIos 
nro  to  be  considered  asexteiidinj;  their  rotative  circuit  from  .50  or  .">(Hl  miles,  oi-  imirc.  on 
oncli  side  of  the  delineations;  the  supeiHcial  extent  of  the  storm  beiiif;  estimiittdl  both 
by  actual  iiiformalion  and  by  its  duration  at  any  point  near  the  cenlrid  portion  of  its  route, 
ns  compared  with  its  avenif^o  rate  of  piojjross.  'J"he  liuiire  wiiicli  nppears  upon  tbo 
chart,  on  tracks  Nos.  I,  V,  and  VII.  will  serve,  in  some  def;ree,  to  ilhislrato  Iho  cour,-o  of 
the  wind  in  tlio  various  portions  of  the  su])eilic!es  covered  by  tlio  storm,  and,  also,  to  ex- 
jilain  tho  chaiij;es  in  the  direction  of  the  wind  wliicli  occur  successively  at  viirious  points, 
duriiij;  the  res^ular  progress  of  the  gale.  The  dimensions  of  tho  several  stoniiH  apjioar 
also  to  have  gradually  «)xpiiiidt>d  diirin;^  tlieir  course. 

Storms  of  this  cdiaracter  do  not  often  net  with  great  violence  on  i\iiy  consideraMe  ex- 
tent of  intcM'ior  countiy  to  whicli  the}  in.iy  arrive.     Kveii  upon  the  coasts  on  wliicl;  ijuy 
enter,  such  violence  is  not  often  experienced  un     r  tho  posterior  limb  of  the  gale  which 
sweeps  back  from  its  circuit  over  llie  land,  the  usual  woodlands  and  eleviijions  bcin^  h 
sulhcieiit  protection.     Often,  indeed,  the  interior  elevations  atl'ord  such  a  shelter  as  en- 
tirely to  neutndi/.o  tho  elfoct  of  tho  wind  at  and  near  tho  surface,  and  the  presence!  and 
passage  of  tho  hurricane  is,  in  such  cases,  to  be  noted  cliielly  by  the  unusual  dei)i<'--iiin, 
whicli  the  creat  whirlim;  movement  of  the  iiutumbent  stiatiiin  of  air  iirodiiccs  in  tho 
mercury  of  tho  barometer,  which  thus  indicates  the  presence  or  passage  of  the  huiri- 
canes  in  positions  whero  the  force  of  the  wind  is  not  fell  at  all.  or  only  witli  a  inodcrnte 
degree  of  violence.     The  action  of  theso  storms  a|)pears,  imlued,  to  b(f  at  first  conlined  to 
the  stratum  or  current  of  nir  moving  next  the  earth's  surface,  and  they  siddoni,  wh  !((  in 
this  position,  iip()ear  to  exceed  a  mile  or  so  in  altitude;  and  the  course  of  tho  next  highest 
or  overlaying  stratum  does  not,  in  these  cases,  seem  to  be  at  all  all'ected  by  tlie  action  of 
tho  storm  below.    During  the  jirogress,  however,  by  the  inlliieiice  of  high  land  and  oilier 
causes,  the  storms  often  become  transferred,  in  whole  or  in  part,  to  the  next  higher  strn- 
tum  of  current.     'J'hus  we  sometimes  see  a  stratum  of  (douds  ninvirig  with  the  lull  vt> 
locity  of  n  viidont  storm,  while  the  stratum  of  surface  wiinl  is  nearly  at  rest,  or  iimvos 
with  its  ordinaiy  velocity  ;  and  thus,  also,  it  happens  that  balloons,  nsceiiding  uiidir  such 
circumstances,  are  carried  forward  with  a  velocity  of  iVom  (10  to  100  miles  an  hour.    Tlio 
foregoing   remarks  are  by  no  means  hypothetical,  but  are  tho  result   of  long  coiiliiuied 
observation  and  inquiry. 

It  will  hardly  escajje  notice,  llint  the  track  of  most  of  the  hurricanes,  as  presented  on 
tho  chart,  apiiearsto  form  part  of  an  elliptical  or  paraoolic  circuit,  and  this  will  be  mure 
obvious  if  we  make  correction,  in  each  case,  for  the  slight  disloitioii  of  the  iippai\'at 
course  in  tho  higher  latitudes,  which  is  proikiced  by  the  |)liine  jwdj.'ition.  Wo  are  A<o 
struck  with  the  fact  that  the  vertex  of  tho  curve  is  iinil'ormiy  foiiiid  on  or  near  the  .'.iitli 
degree  of  latitude.  In  connection  with  this  fact  it  may  also  be  iioicd,  that  the  latitialc  of 
30°  marks  tho  external  limit  of  the  trade  winds,  on  both  sides  of  the  ivpiator;  and  per- 
haps it  may  not  prove  irrelevant  to  ii()tic(\  even  further,  that  by  the  par.dbd  id'  .')0  tho 
surface  area,  as  well  as  the  atmosphere,  of  each  heinispliere,  is  ecpially  dnided  ;  llioai'ea 
between  ties  latitude  and  the  etpiator  bidng  about  etpial  to  that  of  the  entire  siiifiice  bo- 
tween  tho  same  latitude  and  the  pide.  It  is  not  intiuided,  however,  to  luakc!  these  facts 
tho  basis  of  any  theoretical  inductions  on  the  jiresiMit  occasion. 

A  variety  of  (b-duclions  may  be  drawn  from  the   gciiend  facts  wdiicli  wo  have  stated, 
soino  of  which,  though  deejdy  intcrestingto  tho  philosopher  and  votary  of  scieuc*.     iiiijht 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•28 


itfl  IlifiAine- 
'na  ii|i|)(mi'g  to 

I  swept  iilono 
Ikt,  Isrjo,    "* 

lv<'  rliiiiMcter 
■^■■il.  TIm-so 
mriictitii.tics 

inliititl  >i(inn 

I  ClItJIIcillH,  to 
llrnilfly  r,.|t, 
lit  (nil  „(  11,0 
•r  and  mUU-j 
iilar  |ii(i-ic8. 
lUMod  l,y  ijio 
IIIMJ    tlui  dUU. 

•iH,  (ir  liiiiTi- 
iiiil  lit  ilitFor. 
iiti'H,  arc  l)ut 
ml  tliii  i;alo8 
•If  iiiiirc.  (in 
tirniitin!  lioth 
I  orilsniiite, 
I'H  upon  III,, 
hr  ciiiir-o  of 
,  also,  t(i  I'x- 
rioiiH  ))(iims, 
OMiiH  a|)j)(Mir 

iMcriililc  ex- 

wliii-li  tlloy 

>  gain  which 

oils  lll'ill:;  (I 
t'lttT    ilS  oil- 

i-»'Sfiic(t  iind 
ll('ll^^'^,-i()n, 
iicfH  ill  tlio 
r  till'  liiiiti- 
a  iiioilcriite 

CDiiliiicil  to 
111.  wli.le  in 
fxt  liiL^liest 
II'  iictiuii  of 
I  iiiii!  (itluT 

i^lifi-  r^tra- 
thi^  lull  v(> 
t,  or  imnog 
iimUi'  such 
lonr.    Tho 

coiitiiiiicJ 

f'scntui]  (m 
111'  inure 
■  !i|'|i;ir.'iit 
/(s  iii'c  iiNi) 
r  tlm  .".nth 
hililiKlc  uf 

illl'l    [JIT- 

of  .';ii  iiii) 

lln'  a'cu 
iiri'iici'  hn- 
Iicsi'  licts 

iivo  sfiitiid, 


bo  out  of  pince  in  n  tmuticnl  work  of  this  dogcription.  For  ourBolvos  wo  iliscinim  nny 
lioiiiliiyt)  tu  oxIatiiiK  thforiua  in  inetiMiroIogy  ;  iind  hIiiiII  on  tlio  prnHoat  occiiHioii  only  pro- 
(uimI  to  iinticK  n  fow  uf  tliu  mnro  pnicticnl  inluroncoH  which,  tu  nuvigutors  und  others,  nmy. 
perliiip^'  bo  of  nu  douhtfiil  ntility. 

1,  A  vcMHcl  hound  to  tho  ciistwnrd  liotweon  tho  liitifndcB  of  32°  and  i!)"  in  tho  wi'Htern 
pni't  of  tho  Atlantic,  un  lioiii);  ovci'takoii  liy  ii  pdo  wliidi  coninicnceH  hlowini;  from  any 
point  tu  tho  eastward  of  S.  K.  or  E.  S.  K.,  may  avoid  soniu  portion  of  itn  violence,  hy  |)Ut- 
tiii^  lii<r  luMid  to  tiio  northward,  and  when  tho  f{iile  has  vuerod  Huflkiontly  in  tho  same 
(jirt'clioii,  may  sut'oly  roHiime  iiur  course.  Hut  liy  standing;  to  the  southward  under  like 
cir^'Uiiiutances,  she  will  prohahly  fall  into  the  heart  of  tho  storm. 

'J.  Til  tho  same  region,  vessels,  on  taking  a  galu  from  S.  K.,  or  jioints  near  thereto,  will 
piiiliahly  soon  find  themselves  in  the  heart  of  tho  Htnrm,  niid  iit'ter  its  first  fiti';,  is  spent, 
limy  t«xpoct  its  recurrence  from  the  opposite (|uiiiter.  Tho  most  proniiHiii)»  mode  of  miti- 
ratiiii;  its  violunco,  and  at  the  hiiiiio  time  shortening  its  duration,  is  to  stand  to  the  south- 
ward npiiii  the  wind,  as  lon{i;  us  may  ho  necessary  or  pussihio;  and  if  tho  movement  suc- 
ceeds, tho  wind  will  gradually  lieail  you  oil'  in  tho  same  direction.  It'  it  hecomc.  no- 
(I'Sfinry  to  houvo  to,  and  the  wind  duos  not  veer,  be  prepared  for  a  hiast  from  tho  nurth- 

Wl'bt. 

3.  In  the  same  latitudes  n  vcbboI  Hciidding  in  n  gale,  with  tho  wind  at  east  or  nortli- 
I'list,  slioi'tons  its  duration.  On  the  contrary ,  a  vessel  scudding  before  a  south-westerly 
or  wcntorly  giilo,  will  thorehy  incroaso  its  duration. 

4.  A  vessel  which  is  pursuing  her  course  to  tho  westward  or  south-westward,  in  tliis 
nni'tof  tho  Atlantic,  meets  the  storms  in  their  course,  and  thereby  shortens  the  periods 
of  their  occurrenci!;  and  will  encounter  more  gales  in  an  equal  number  of  days,  than  if 
gtiitioiiiirv,  or  sailing  in  a  dill'.  i'i>nt  direction. 

'}.  (Jii  th(!  other  hand,  vet  si  \s  while  sailing  to  the  eastward  or  north-eastward,  or  in 
ihe  course  of  tho  storms,  will  lengthen  tho  periods  between  their  occurrence,  and  conso- 
(|Uoiitly  e.xpurienco  them  less  frequently  than  vessels  sailing  on  a  dill'erent  course.  Tho 
liiirurence  uf  exposure  which  results  from  these  opposite  courses,  on  the  Americau  coast, 
iniiy  in  most  cases  bo  estimated  as  nearly  two  to  one. 

(i.  The  ha/.ard  from  casnalties,  andofconse({uence  the  value  of  insurance,  is  enhanced 
ordiminishnd  by  tho  direction  of  the  passage,  as  shown  under  the  two  last  heads. 

7.  As  the  ordinary  routine  of  Mie  winds  and  weather  in  these  latitudes,  often  corres- 
ponds to  the  phases  which  are  exhibited  by  tho  storms  as  before  described,  a  correct 
opiiiiuii,  founded  upon  this  ritsemblanco,  can  ofi^en  be  furmud  of  the  approaching  changes 
of  wind  and  weather,  which  miiy  be  highly  useful  to  the  observing  navigator. 

8.  It  will  1)0  ponieivod,  fioiu  'he  foregoing  facts,  tliat  the  occurrence  of  a  storm  at  a 
particular  locality,  has  no  ii  .'nf  to  connection  with  astronomical  periods,  such  as  the 
cliiiiiges  of  the  moon,  or  the  tiu.j  of  the  equinoxes. 

9.  A  ihio  consideration  of  the  facts  which  have  been  stated,  particularly  those  under 
our  twelfth  head,  will  inspire  adilitional  confidence  in  tho  indications  of  tho  barometer, 
imd  these  ought  not  to  bo  neglected,  oven  should  the  fall  of  tho  mercury  be  unattended 
liy  liny  iippearanceH  of  violence  iii  the  weather,  as  tho  other  side  of  tho  gale  will  bo  pretty 
t;ure  to  tnke  ell'ect,  and  often  in  a  manner  so  sudden  and  violent  as  to  mure  than  coin- 
pcHSMle  for  its  [irevious  forlteiiranco.  Not  the  least  reliance,  however,  should  be  placed 
updii  the  prognostics,  which  are  usually  attached  to  tho  scale  of  tho  barometer,  such  as 
Sft  Fair,  Fair.  (Miiinge,  Uniii,  lie.,  as  in  tliis  regiiui  at  least  they  serve  no  other  .purpose 
than  to  bring  this  valuable  iiistrnmont  into  discredit.  It  is  tho  mere  rising  und  falling  of 
the  mercury,  which  chiolly  deserves  attuntion,  and  not  its  conformity  tu  a  particular  point 
ill  the  scale  of  elevation. 

10.  These  pnutical  inferences  apply,  in  terms,  chiedy  to  storms  which  have  passed  to 
the  iiiirtlnviird  of  tho  30th  degree  of  latitude  on  tho  American  coast,  but  with  tho  neces- 
fiiiy  luodificfilion  as  to  the  jioint  of  tho  compass,  which  results  from  the  westerly  course 
pursued  by  tho  storm  while  in  the  lower  latitudes,  are,  for  the  most  part,  equally  ajipli- 
ciilile  to  tho  storms  and  hurricanes  whicdi  occur  in  the  West  Indies,  and  south  of  the 
]wnillel  of  .'iO'^.  As  tho  marked  occurrence  of  tempestuous  weather  is  hero  less  frequent, 
il  limy  bo  sulTicif^nt  to  notice  that  tlio  direction  of  the  winds  of  tho  West  Indian  seas,  is 
fioiii  8  to  11  points  of  tho  com|)ass  more  to  the  lijl  than  on  tho  coast  of  tho  United  States 
ill  the  latitude  of  New  York. 

Vicissitudes  of  wind  and  weather  on  this  coast  which  do  not  conform  to  tho  foregoing 
spcciticiitioiis,  are  more  fre(|ueiit  in  April,  May,  and  .Tune,  than  in  other  montlis.  At  this 
si'iisoii  it  is  not  niicoiiimon  to  Iind  a  regular  curienl  of  easterly  wind  jirevailiiig  for  many 
ihiys,  |)i'oiliiciiig  somolimt's  heavy  rains,  and  always  iin  elevated  state  of  the  barometer. 
Easterly  or  southerly  winds  under  which  the  barometer  rises,  or  maintains  its  elevation, 
arc  not  of  a  gyratory  or  stormy  character;  but  such  winds  frequently  terminate  in  tlio 
fulling  (it'llie  barometer  and  tho  nsiiiil  phenoinona  of  an  eastiM'ly  storm. 

The  typhoons  and  storms  of  the  (^hina  sea  and  eastern  coast  of  Asia,  appear  to  bo  sim- 
ilar in  character  to  tho  luirriciinus  of  tho  West  Indies  and  the  storms  of  this  coast,  when 


mm 


m^mm 


'T^^PHip 


9«* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

prevailing  in  the  same  latitudes.  There  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  great  circuite  of 
wind,  of  which  the  trade  winds  t'orin  an  integnil  part,  are  nearly  uniform  in  all  the  great 
oceanic  basins;  and  that  the  course  of  rhdse  circuits  and  of  the  stormy  gyrations  which 
they  may  contain,  is,  in  the  southern  heinibphero,  in  a  counter  direction  to  those  north  of 
the  equator,  producing  a  corresponding  dlirerence  in  the  general  phases  of  stoims  and 
winds  in  the  two  hemispheres. 

From  the  foregoing  results  we  infer  the  value  and  importance  of  correct  marine  re- 
ports relating  to  violent  gales.  Those  reports  should  always  comprise  the  date,  the  lati- 
tude and  longitude,  and  the  principal  direction  and  changes  of  the  wind. 


CVKREIVTS. 

A  CURRENT  "  at  present  to  be  understood  as  a  stream  on,  or  a  particular  set  in 
the  direction  of,  the  surface  of  the  soa,  occasioned  hj  winds  and  uthor  impulses,  exclu- 
sive of  (but  whitli  miiy  be  influenced  by)  the  cMnses  of  the  tides.  It  is  an  observation  of 
Dampier,  that  currents  are  scarcely  ever  ft  .  out  at  sea,  and  tides  but  upon  the  coasts; 
and  it  is  certainly  an  established  fact,  that  currenid  prevail  mostly  in  thos'!  parts  where 
the  tides  are  weak,  and  scarcely  perceptible,  or  where  the  sea,  ap;)arently  little  influenced 
by  the  causes  of  the  tide,  is  disposed  to  a  quiescent  ptate.  Tii.s  will  be  obvious  by  an 
attentive  con-'deration  of  the  following  detcriptions.  The  necessity  of  attention  to  the 
silent,  imperceptible,  and  therefore  dangerous,  operation  of  currents,  will  bo  equally 
apparent. 

The  currents  of  the  Atlantic  are  often  of  a  local  and  temporary  nature;  yet  experience 
has  shown  where  and  how  they  predominate,  and  reason  will  inform  the  miiriner  whore 
he  is  to  expect  and  allow  for  their  operation. 

With  the  greatest  velocity  of  the  equinoctial  current  we  cannot  pretend  to  be  accu- 
rately acquainted.  Its  central  direction,  when  in  full  torce,  is  W.  N.  W.,  and  generally, 
it  is  imagined,  about  one  mile  and  a  half  in  the  hour,  but  increasing  to  the  westward;  so 
that  otT the  coast  of  Guyana  it  commonly  sets  at  the  rate  of  two  oi  three  miles. 

At  a.iy  considerable  distance  from  tiie  coast  of  America,  the  easterly  current,  caused 
by  the  action  of  violent  W.  or  N.  W.  winds,  is  seldom  felt  to  the  southward  of  lut.  30"; 
consequently  the  soa  about  the  Bennudas,  and  thence  to  southward,  is  free  from  the  influ- 
ence of  this  current.  The  currcnrs  here,  though  slow,  are  produced  in  the  direction  of 
the  wind,  particularly  when  it  is  of  long  continuaiice.  These  currents  are  found  sirong(!r 
near  the  islands  and  rocks  of  HernuKlas  than  ii'-  a  distiiiico.  In  a  brisk  gale,  the  current 
here  has  been  ex"firienced  from  12  to  18  miles  in  24  hours,  in  the  direction  of  the  wind; 
at  other  times,  when  the  wind  was  not  settled,  no  current  has  boeti  found. 

To  continued  westerly  winds  are  to  lie  attributeii  tho  common  occurrence  of  a  pas- 
sage from  Halifax  to  the  English  Channel  in  IG  or  18  days,  with  such  currents  as  thoj-e 
which  carried  tho  bowsprit  of  the  Little  lii'lt,  sloop  of  war,  lost  near  Halifax,  in  18 
months,  to  the  entrance  of  IJiisque  Roat's.  The  current?  of  the  Atlantic  have  sent  to 
the  shores  of  the  Hebrides  tho  products  of  Jumiiica  and  Cuba,  and  of  tlie  southern  parts 
of  North  America. 

The  easterly  end  south-easterly  currents  are  blended  in  their  southern  regions  with 
the  Florida  or  Gulf  .Stream,  hereafter  descrilied,  and  they  do  not  seem  to  j)revail  to  ttie 
S.  W.  of  tho  Azores.  On  the  contrary,  to  the  W.  .S.  W.  and  S.  W.  of  those  isliinds, 
tlie  currents  appear  to  follow  the  course  of  the  trade  winds  towards  tho  Caribbi  an  .Sea; 
and  to  tho  southward  of  the  tropic  they  blend  witli  the  equatorial  current,  which  sets  from 
E.  S.  E.  to  W.  N.  W.  end  W.  Towards  tho  west,  tiicy  occasionally  extend  to  the  nortli- 
wardofthe  Boi'mudas,  and  even  unite  with  tlie  southern  ed;;e  or  reflowoftlio  (iulf  Streiiin. 
The  exiptjnce  of  these  currents  has  ionj;  ijeen  known,  l)ut  a  farther  examiniition  and  more 
precise  information  are  still  ilesidenita.  The  recent  (fxamples  of  them  which  we  iiavo  to 
adduce  are  not  numerous,  but  they  are  satisfactory ;  they  also  accord  with  natural  facts, 
aud  are  in  unison  with  that  theory  which  derives  its  currents  from  the  rotary  movement 
of  tho  earth,  and  the  o|)eratiot)  of  tlit^  trade  winds. 

"Tlie  currents  of  the  Cari!;be.':n  .Sea  are  probably  varied  by  the  influence  of  the  moon, 
and  combine,  in  some  degree,  with  the  tides,  especially  about  (Jubu,  Jamaica,  and  St. 
Domingo." 

The  Derrotero  adds,  "this  idea  is  confir'iod  by  what  Don  Torquato  Pedrola,  the 
captain  of  a  frigate,  has  communicated  to  the  Hyilrographic  Board.  'Although,  gene- 
rally,' says  this  officer,  'the  currents  botwecin  the  .Spaiiisli  Main  and  tho  VVest  India 
Islands  set  towards  ihe  fourth  <|nadrant,  (that  is,  north-wostorly,)  yot  it  sometimes,  though 
seldom,  happens  that  they  are  found  setting  to  the  first  quadrant,  or  N.  E.;)  in  proof 
of  which  he  stataa  that  he  perfectly  reiuembers,  though  he  cunuul  give  the  eltiineuts,  in 


.ii^iiiW.«p«)i 


'at  circuits  of 
I  all  the  great 
"(itions  which 
;hose  north  of 
if  storms  nnd 

!t  niniino  re- 
late,  the  lati- 


ticuliir  set  iD 
uls?>8,  exclu- 
ibservutjoii  of 

I  tlie  coasts; 
pni'fs  wliere 

;Ie  itiHueiicod 
)bviou3  by  un 
entioii  tu  the 

II  bo  equally 

t  experience 
iriner  where 

!  to  1)6  nccu- 
nd  goneriiily, 
restward;  so 

BS. 

rent,  caused 
I  of  hit.  Sfi'^; 
oil)  the  inllu- 
3  direttioi)  uf 
utid  sirongur 
,  tlio  current 
of  tiie  wind; 

ICO  of  a  pas- 
nta  lis  those 
aiifiix,  in  18 
hiivo  sent  to 
uthorn  parts 

regions  with 
rtu'Hii  to  the 
lose  islands, 
ibbf  an  Sea; 
cli  sets  from 
'•>  tlin  north- 
iulf  Strean). 
>ti  and  more 
I  wo  iiavo  to 
atural  facts, 
raovemout 

if  tlio  moon, 
ica,  and  St. 

'I'tlrolu,  the 
•u{,'li,  finne- 
VV'ost  India 
iioH,  though 
.;)  in  proof 
ileiaeuts,  ia 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

consequence  of  bavin,  ■  lost  his  journals,  that  in  July,  1795,  or  1796,  when  sailing  with  a 
fresh  breeze  from  Santa  Martha  to  Jamaica,  in  a  schooner,  he  steered  for  Morant  Point; 
but  considering  that  by  keeping  as  close  hauled  as  that  course  required,  he  must  be  una- 
ble to  make  it  before  the  day  was  spent,  he  preferred  keeping  away,  to  make  the  land  to 
leeward  of  it,  and  did  so  at  8  A.  M.,  thus  augmenting  the  rate  of  the  vessel's  sailing.  At 
noon  he  observed  the  latitude,  in  conjunction  with  the  piloi,  Don  Miguel  Patina,  and 
found  that  they  were  some  minutes  to  the  northward  of  Morant  Point ;  and  keeping  away 
W.  by  '''•.  they  saw  it  at  2  P.  M.  Although  fhey  calculated  the  direction  and  velocity  of 
the  current,  lie  remembers  only  that  it  was  to  the  N.  E.,  and!  that  they  were  three 
days  crossing  from  Santa  Martha  to  Jamaica. 

"On  leaving  the  pamllel  of  the  Bago  del  Comby  (15°  30')  the  first  time  that  the 
Spanish  surveying  vessels  went  in  search  of  it,  and  being  to  leeward  of  the  meridian  under 
whi(di  the  charts  placed  it,  by  12  leagues,  they  made  sail  so  that,  at  the  rate  of  sailing, 
thoy  exjiected  to  join  the  brig  Alerta  next  evening,  as  they  knew  she  was  waiting  for 
thorn  at  her  anchorage  at  the  southernmost  of  the  Pedro  Keys.  At  8  A.  M..  next  day, 
a  ves?o!  was  seen  ahead,  which  at  first  they  mistook  for  a  rock,  but  soon  made  out  that  it 
was  n  vessel  at  anchor  :  and  by  9  A.  M.  they  saw  not  only  the  Alerta  at  anchor,  but  also 
the  Pedro  Key .  towards  which  the  current  carried  them  with  much  strength  ;  and  in  spite 
of  having  to  m.tke  several  tacks,  in  order  to  fetch  the  proper  channel,  they  were  anchored 
beside  the  Alerta  by  mid-day.  '1  he  commander  does  not  recollect  the  longitude  he  ob- 
served that  morning,  but  remembers  that  the  current  had  carried  them  to  the  northward. 
In  the  next  year,  when  surveying  tiie  west  end  of  the  Pedro  Shoals,  they  found  the  cur- 
'  rent  nearly  the  same ;  and  this  ought  to  be  a  warning  to  navigators  not  to  make  too  free 
with  the  southern  edge  of  the  Pedro  Shoals  during  the  night. 

"  Much  current  has  also  been  found  near  the  Baxo  Nuevo,  lat.  15°  50',  and  long.  78° 
40',  as  was  remarked  by  the  brig  Alerta.  when  near  its  '.•.rthern  extremity.  The  same 
is  the  case  on  its  southern  side  ;  for  in  prior  years,  the  scnooner  St.  Gregorio,  bound  from 
Ciirthagona  to  Trinidad,  saw  the  soutli  end  of  the  shoal  at  4  P.  M.  At  5  she  was  three 
miles  from  it;  but  noticing  that  the  current  set  strongly  towards  the  shoal,  they  set  all  sail 
nnd  ran  to  the  south  until  they  considered  the  vessel  9  miles  from  the  southern  point :  and 
the  following  morning  tacked  to  sight  it,  which  she  did  not  efl^ect,  having  doubtless  passed 
to  leeward  of  it." 

"In  more  than  thirty  voyages  made  by  Captain  Pedroln,  from  the  Spanish  Main  to 
Porto  Rico,  St.  Domingo  and  Cuba,  sometimes  with  chronometers,  and  others  without 
them,  he  remarked  that  between  the  last  two  islands  nnd  the  coast  of  the  main,  sixteen 
miles  daily  rriigbt  be  counted  on  for  a  westerly  current,  but  not  so  much  for  the  former." 
In  the  Memoir,  3d  edition,  pp.  (J8-9,  was  this  passage  : — "  Tiie  trade  wind  blows  with 
strong  and  continued  vigor  at  certain  seasons,  particularly  in  the  winter  months,  and  rolls 
the  waves  over  a  great  extent  of  sen,  into  the  great  bay  westward  of  Carthagena,  which 
we  have  calleil  the  Hay  of  (lualemala.  This  may  couse.  at  times,  an  outset,  but  no  con- 
stant current  is  to  be  found."  To  this  is  added,  in  the  Derrotero,  "  omong  the  original 
pnpevs  possessed  by  the  Doposito  Ilydrografica,  the  fc)IK)wit)g  observations,  by  different 
offiiors,  have  been  found,  which  may  tend  to  throw  some  light  upon  the  matter  : 

"  In  the  examination  of  the  coast  between  Porto  Volo  (Porto  Bello)  and  the  Bocas 
del  Toro,  made  in  1717,  by  Don  Fubinn  Abantes,  he  found  on  that  coast,  in  tlio  month 
of  April,  strong  currents  setting  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  at  the  rate  of  two  miles  an  hour;  so 
that,  heaving  to  at  night,  off  Code  Point,  he  found  himself  in  the  morning  up  atClingro. 
The  winds  at  the  time  wore  either  calm  or  squally  froui  the  south-westward.  Don  Fa- 
bian proceeded  to  the  northward,  to  the  parallel  of  lO'^,  and  thon  met  with  winds  from 
N.  and  N.  N.  E.,  with  which  he  steered  \V.  and  W.  N.  W.,  until  he  considered  himself 
10  leagues  to  the  west  of  the  Bocas  del  Toro  ;  but  the  current  had  carried  him  to  the  E. 
S.  E.,  so  that,  when  ho  expected  to  make  the  Bocas,  ho  found  himself  n't  the  point  of 
Miguel  do  Borda,  about  5  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Clingre.  During  the  whole  time, 
from  leaving  Porto  Volo,  he  never  gained  an  observation,  tlio  weather  being  adverse. 
On  the  11th  May  he  noticed  that  the  waters  of  the  Lagoon  of  Chiriqui  ran  out  through 
the  Bocas  with  violence,  and  formed,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  coast,  an  angle  bonding 
to  the  E.  S.  E." 

Again,  •'  Tho  captain  of  tho  ship  of  the  line  Don  Pedro  de  Obrogon,  in  the  month  of 
July,  was  bound  from  the  Rio  Tinto  (Black  River)  to  tho  Havona,  and  he  experienced 
currents  to  tho  north-westward,  with  winds  from  the  N.  E.,  E.  N.  E.  scjU'ills  and  calms, 
and  in  such  a  manner  that  ho  made  tho  Tortugas  Bank  of  Florida,  without  having  beea 
able  to  sight  Cape  Antonio  or  west  end  of  Cuba." 

"  Don  J()a(|uim  de  Asunsola  and  la  Azuela,  in  July,  found  strong  currents  to  the  S.  \V. 
of  Capo  Giocias  a  Dios,  after  having  strong  winds  from  tho  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  S.  E.,  with 
squalln;  and  from  the  said  capo  to  tho  westward  he  found,  also,  that  the  current  took  the 
Bume  course;  and  ho  concludes  that,  atler  he  had  made  Providence  Island,  and  until  ho 
arrived  at  Black  River,  the  currents  were  strong  to  tho  W.  and  S.  W. 


•97 


m 


i^iipwrTs^jMiiijiiijMiiiii^Nw.miJMPpiipw 


28»  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

"  The  captain  of  a  frigate,  Don  Gonzalo  Vallejo,  when  at  anchor  on  the  Mosquito  const, 
near  Barrancas,  or  Bragiiian's  Bluff,  observed  that  the  current  set  to  the  north,  at  the  rate 
of  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  in  the  hour." 

Finally,  "  Don  Ignacio  Sanjust,  commanding  the  frigate  Flora,  on  a  voyage  from  Havana 
to  the  Gulf  of  Honduras,  and  being  off  Cavallos  Point,  noticed  that  the  current  ran  with 
rauch  force  to  the  N.  E.  in  the  month  of  December ;  and  ho  adds  that,  in  this  gulf,  the 
currents  followed  no  known  rule ;  that  near  the  keys  tliey  run  with  violence,  and  into  the 
channels  between  them;  so  that  by  them  a  vessel,  during  a  calm,  may  soon  be  carried  on 
the  reefs.  lu  the  channel  between  the  keys  and  coast  of  Honduras,  to  the  south,  the 
water  was  found  setting  to  the  N.  E.,  and,  near  the  coast,  to  the  east." 

Near  the  parallel  of  10°  N.,  the  currents  produced  by  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  trade  winds 
may  bo  imagined  to  unite  ;  and  this  united  stream,  being  divided  by  the  Island  of  Trinidad 
and  the  Southern  Antillas,  thence  passes  into  the  Caribbean  Sea. 

From  the  mouths  of  the  Amazon,  Oronoco,  and  other  rivers,  a  vast  efHux  of  water 
falls  into  the  Equatorial  Sea,  more  particularly  in  the  wet  season  :  what  effect  this  water 
mayhava  on  the  current  is  at  present  unknown.  But  we  learn  from  the  Dorrotero  de  las 
Antillas.  that  "  off  the  coasts  of  Guyana  there  are  two  cjrrents:  1st.  The  general  or 
equinoctial  current,  and  another  caused  by  the  tides :  the  boundary  of  the  first  is  12 
leagues  from  shore,  or  in  the  depth  of  9  fothoms  of  water  tioin  which  towards  the  shore 
that  of  the  title  is  ex|)eriencod.  The  ebb  sets  to  the  N.  E.,  and  the  flood  towards  shore. 
In  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  also,  the  tide  influences  the  currents. 

•'  In  the  southern  straits  or  channels  of  the  Antillas,  the  velocity  of  the  current  inward 
is  seldom  under  a  mile  an  hour;  but  its  changes  are  so  great  that  it  is  impossible  to  point 
out  its  exact  direction,  or  to  establish  any  general  rule  for  its  velocity." 

"On  the  Coloml)ian  coast,  from  Trinidad  to  Cape  la  Vela,  the  current  sweeps  the 
frontier  islands,  inclining  something  to  the  south,  according  to  the  straits  which  it  comes 
from,  and  running  about  14  mile  an  hour  with  little  difference.  Between  the  islands  and 
the  coast,  and  particularly  in  the  proximity  of  the  latter,  it  has  been  remarked  that  the 
current,  iit  times,  runs  to  the  west,  and  at  others  to  the  east.  From  Cape  la  Vela,  the 
principal  i/iirt  of  the  current  runs  W.  N.  W. ;  and  as  it  spreads,  its  velocity  diminishes; 
there  is,  however,  a  branch,  which  runs  with  the  velocity  of  about  a  mile  an  hour,  direct- 
ing itself  towards  the  coast  about  Cnrthagena  :  from  this  point,  and  in  the  space  of  sea 
comprehended  between  14  degrees  of  latitude  and  the  coast,  it  has,  however,  beenjob- 
eerved  that,  in  a  dry  season,  the  current  runs  to  the  westward,  and  in  tlio  season  of  the 
rains,  to  the  eastward. 

"  On  tlio  Mosquito  Shore,  and  in  the  bay  of  Honduras,  no  rule  con  be  given  for  the  al- 
terations of  the  current.  All  that  can  bo  said  is,  at  a  good  distance  from  laud,  it  has  gene- 
rally been  found  setting  towards  the  N.  W. 

"  In  crossing  from  tlie  coast,  or  from  Carthagena,  to  the  islands,  it  has  been  observed 
that  from  Laguayra  to  the  eastern  part  of  St.  Domingo,  on  a  voyage  made  in  December, 
a  difference  of  106  miles  to  the  westward  was  fjund  during  the  seven  days  the  voyage 
lasted," — Uerrotcro  de  las  Antillas. 

Mr.  Town,  in  his  Directions  for  the  Colombian  Coast,  has  said,  "  although  between  the 
Island  of  Jamaica  and  the  .Spiuiish  Main  westerly  currents  are  most  frequent,  yet  they 
do  not  always  prevail  ;  for  ships  have  boon  known  to  bo  driven  by  the  current  from  50  to 
GO  miles  to  the  eastward  in  4  or  5  days.  From  the  beginning  of  May  till  November,  (the 
rainy  season,)  the  sea  Ijreezc  seldom  or  never  blows  home  to  the  main  ;  and  ships  going 
there  siiould  never  go  to  the  southward  of  the  latitude  of  11'^.  until  they  are,  at  least,  40 
or  50  miles  to  the  westward  of  their  intended  \wa ;  after  which  they  niay  make  a  south 
course,  as  the  land  breeze,  which  is  generally  from  the  S.  W.,  and  the  strong  easterly 
current,  will  set  you  to  the  eastward  of  your  intended  port,  if  great  care  bo  not  taken. 
When  to  the  eastward,  if  light  winds  prevail,  you  must  stand  to  the  northward  until 
you  meet  tlie  sea  breeze,  which  will  bo  between  the  latitudes  of  10  and  11  degrees,  and  then 
run  to  the  westward. 

"  Being  off  Porto  Bello,  in  his  Majesty's  ship  Salisbury,  on  or  idwut  the  12th  of  Au- 
gust 181(!.  and  being  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  that  port,  with  light  variable  winds  for 
several  days,  the  ship  was  set  to  the  eastward,  at  the  rate  of  50  miles  per  day;  and, 
havinj;  been  afterwards  placed  in  the  same  situation,  I  found  it  necessary  to  make  the  laud 
well  to  the  westward,  and  to  keep  close  to  it.  From  November  until  .May,  (tiie  dry  sea- 
son.) you  should  endeavor  to  make  the  land  well  to  the  eastward,  and  run  along  shore,  as 
the  sea  breezes  generally  blow  very  strongly,  and  the  current  sots  to  the  westward  at  the 
rate  of  about  12  or  3  miles  in  an  liDiir. 

"  I'etween  Cliagre  and  Porto  Bello.  during  the  rainy  scMson,  there  is  generally  a  north- 
erly curr(;nt,  at  the  rate  of  from  U  to  'Ji  miles  an  hour.  After  the  end  of  the  rainy  sea- 
son the  current  seM  to  the  southward  and  westward,  and  strong  soutlierly  and  easterly 
winds  prevail  here.  From  November  until  May.  (the  dry  season,)  the  southerly  and 
westerly  are  very  light  wioih.  except  in  squalls,  which  end  with  vtsry  heavy  rain  lu  sud- 
den squalls  you  will  often  have  the  winds  from  all  points  of  tlio  compass. 


"^npinmiipmnmiippi 


^  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

"If  at  Chngre,  at  any  time  during  the  rainy  season,  (May  till  November,)  and  bound  to 
the  eastward,  endeavor  to  get  4  or  5  leagues  from  the  land  so  soon  as  you  can  ;  for  the 
winds  are,  in  general,  very  light,  and  the  current  veiy  strong.  The  latter  sets  from 
Chagre  directly  on  the  rocks  of  Porto  Bello,  and  thence  along  the  land  from  E.  by  N., 
E.  N.  E.,  E.  S.  E.,  and  according  as  the  land  lies;  its  general  rate  being  from  Ij  to  2i 
miles  in  an  hour.  Great  care  should  be  taken  when  near  the  land,  if  a  heavy  squall  and 
rain  appear  to  be  coming  on.  During  this  you  will  have  the  wind  from  all  points  of  the 
compass,  and  often  so  strong  that  all  sail  must  be  taken  in. 

"  In  crossing  the  Gulf  of  Darien,  little  or  no  current  will  be  found ;  whenever  there  is 
eny,  it  sets  about  south,  S.  by  W.,  or  S.  by  E.,  up  the  Gulf. 

"  Near  Carthagena  the  current  generally  goes  by  the  wind ;  but  o(T  the  islands  of  Ro- 
snrio  it  sets  to  the  N.  W.,  and  N.  N.  W.,  from  one  to  two  miles  an  hour. 

"Between  Carthagena  and  the  Magdalena,  in  the  rainy  season,  you  cannot  put  any 
dependance  on  the  winds  or  currents ;  but,  from  November  to  M../,  the  trade  wind  blows 
home. 

"  I  should  recommend,  if  turning  to  windward,  with  strong  trade  winds,  to  keep  the 
ghore  close  to;  whereas,  by  going  olF  from  the  land,  you  will  not  only  have  a  heavy  sea, 
but  also  a  strong  N.  W.  current.  If  you  have  light  variable  winds,  approach  no  nearer 
to  the  land  than  4  or  5  leagues,  as  you  may  be  certain  of  an  easterly  current." 

Captain  Livingston  says,  "  during  5  weeks  in  which  I  remained  at  Carthagena,  in  June 
and  July,  1817,  the  current  in-shore,  set  constantly  and  strongly  to  the  northward,  at  a 
rate,  I  am  convinced,  of  not  less  than  14  mile  an  hour,  or  nearly  as  strong  as  the  Missis- 
sippi at  New  Orleans.  I  have  seen  the  Esk.  sloop  of  war,  current-rode  against  a  very 
fresh  sea-bi'eeze,  when  at  anchor,  nearly  west  from  the  city,  distant  about  1  inilo." 

Upon  the  current  between  the  Grand  Cayman  and  Cape  Antonio,  Captain  Monteath 
has  said,  "in  the  months  of  May,  1814  and  1815,  (two  voyages  in  which  I  was  chief- 
mate  of  the  ship  Prince  Regent,  from  Kingston,)  in  June,  1817,  in  the  ship  Fame ;  and 
in  April  and  December,  I8ii(),  in  the  ship  Mary,  between  Grand  Cayman  Island  and  Cape 
Antonio,  I  invariably  found  the  current  setting  strong  to  the  eastward,  or  E.  S.  E.;  and 
1  have  heard  it  generally  remarked  that,  vessels  shaping  a  course  from  the  Caymans  for 
Cape  Antonio,  have  found  themselves  off,  or  even  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Corrientes ; 
tliis  has,  in  the  above  cases,  invariably  happened  to  myself." 

Farther  on,  "in  my  passage  from  Kingston,  towards  Campeche,  i:i  the  ship  Fame, 
June,  1817,  between  Cape  Antonio  and  Cape  Catoche,  I  found  the  current  to  set  duo 
north  27  miles  in  a  run  of  18  hours." 

We  have  already  given  in  the  preceding  page,  the  remark  of  the  Spanish  navigators 
on  the  currents  of  the  Mosquito  Shore  and  Bay  of  Honduras.  We  now  add  those  of 
Captains  W.  J.  Capes,  of  London,  and  John  Burnett,  of  Port  Glasgow. 

Captain  Capes  saj's,  "bettveen  Jamaica  and  Bonaccathe  current  generally  sets  to  tlie 
northward  and  westward.  Hero,  in  May,  1816, 1  was  set  60  miles  to  the  westward  by 
the  current,  and  found  that  it  sot  rather  northerly,  from  one  quarter  to  half  a  mile  an 
hour.  Between  Jamaica  and  Bonacca  are  the  islands  called  tlie  Swan  Islands,  in  lati- 
tude 17"  22',  longitude  83°  36'.  I  would  not  advise  any  one  bound  to  the  Bay  to  make 
these  islands,  for  it  cannot  be  of  service,  and  the  current  is  so  very  irregular  about  them, 
that  the  attempt  serves  only  to  bewilder  the  navigator;  and  by  falling  in  with  them  in  a 
dark  night,  a  ship  would  be  in  danger  of  running  on  shore,  as  the  land  is  very  low. 

"  About  the  southern  Four  Keys  the  currents  are  very  uncertain.  I  have  known  three 
ships  to  be  lost  on  thebe  Keys  by  lying  to  for  the  night,  after  they  have  made  them  ;  for,  at 
nil  times,  the  current  sets  strongly  on  them  ;  and,  in  two  of  the  cases  the  ships  wore 
every  two  hours,  with  an  intention  to  keep  their  station.  In  one  voyage  I  took  my  de- 
parture from  Bonacca  at  four  P.  M.,  with  a  strong  breeze  from  the  east,  which  continued 
till  midnight;  it  then  died  away,  (no  uncommon  circumstance  in  this  part,)  so  that  I  did 
not  lift  the  southern  Four  Keys  before  four  P.  M.  the  next  day.  from  the  fore-yard.  I 
then  made  all  snug,  and  plted  to  windward,  under  single-reefed  topsails  and  top-gallant 
sails  over  them  ;  tacked  ship  every  three  hours  during  night,  and,  to  my  surprise,  in  the 
morning,  we  wore  not  more  than  ono  or  two  miles  to  w'ndward  of  them  :  so,  if  I  had 
hove  the  ship  to,  I  have  no  doubt  but  she  would  have  been  driven  on  shore  by  the  cur- 
rent. 

"  If  a  ship  be  lying  to  under  Rattan,  it  will  not  be  amiss  to  try  the  current.  It  is  my 
opinion,  that  the  current  about  Bonacca  takes  two  different  directions ;  one  part  setting 
to  the  N.  W.  and  the  other  part  branching  to  the  S.  S.  W.  I  have  found  it  so  on  several 
trials,  which  is  the  reason  that  I  prefer  taking  a  departure  (for  the  bay)  from  the  middle 
or  east  end  of  Rattan  ;  for,  if  a  ship  take  her  dej)arture  from  the  west  end  her  course 
will  bo  N.  N.  W. ;  but  it  very  frequently  happens  that  ships  get  down  on  those  reefs 
wlion  they  take  their  departure  from  the  west  end.  The  reason  is  this  :  a  ship  steering 
N.  W.  from  the  west  end  has  more  of  the  current  on  hor  beam,  which  sweeps  round 
the  west  end  of  Rattan  very  strong  at  times  ;  consequently,  ships  that  take  their  depar- 
ture from  the  east  or  middle  part  do  not  foe!  bo  much  of  the  current." 


•29 


•mmr'791^ 


80* 


Mexican 
Stream,  S(V, 


JJLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Captain  Burnett,  in  his  directions  for  sailing  from  the  Bay  of  Honduras,  says,  "  whea 
the  trade  wind  prevails,  n  current,  often  very  strong,  sets  down  between  Mauger  Key  and 
the  Northern  Triangle;  there,  dividing  itself,  it  sots  to  the  southward,  between  Turneff 
and  the  Main  Reef,  and  to  the  northward  between  the  Triangle  Reef  and  Ambergris  Key, 
It  is  niDst  advisable,  with  the  wind  from  the  east  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  to  sail  to  leeward  of  the 
Triangle,  as  you  will  have  a  strong  current  in  your  favor  so  soon  as  you  bring  it  to  the 

eastward  of  you.  ,     .  .      ,  ^  .       ,    ,       ,  ,  , 

In  the  channel,  between  the  island  Cozumel  and  tho  shore,  the  current  along  shore 
runs  at  the  rate  of  nearly  24  miles  an  hour,  till  lost  in  the  Mexican  Sea." 

MEXICAN  STREAM,  &c. — It  is,  wo  believe,  a  well  established,  although  a  contro- 
verted fact,  that  there  is  a  constant  indraughi  on  the  western  side  of  the  Channel  of  Yu- 
catan, into  tho  Moxican  Sea  ;  and  that  there  is  commonly  a  rellow  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  same  channel  around  Cape  Antonio,  ice. 

With  the  former  in  its  favor,  his  Majesty's  ship  Resistance,  Captain  Adam,  off  the 
Bank  of  Yucatan,  made  a  course  W.  N.  W.  I^  W„  nearly  80  leagues,  in  the  24  hours, 
December  16  and  17,  ISOG  ;•  and  we  have  no  doubt  that  many  instances  may  be  found 
to  prove  the  same  effect ;  on  the  Cuba  side  only,  it  appears  that  vessels  have  been  set  to 
the  southward ;  and  Captaia  Manderson  has  stated,  that,  when  a  strong  easterly  wind 
has  been  blowing  between  Cuba  and  Florida,  vessels  heaving  to  off  the  south  side  of 
Cape  Antonio,  at  about  two  leagues  from  shore,  have,  in  the  course  of  one  night,  been 
carried  against  a  strong  seo  breeze,  nearly  as  high  as  Cnpo  Corrientes,  being  a  distance 
of  10  Icagues.f 

From  Cape  Antonio  the  current  sots,  at  times,  to  the  E,  S.  E.  \mst  tho  Isle  of  Pines. 
Captain  Livingston  has  informed  us  that,  in  March,  1818,  he  found  the  current  between 
the  Great  Cayman,  and  Isle  of  Pines  to  set  in  that  direction,  at  the  rate  of  full  2  milea 
and  a  half  an  hour,  or  CO  miles  in  the  24  hours.  In  August,  1817,  he  found  the  set  nearly 
the  same,  but  the  current  not  half  so  strong.  The  Spanish  Directory  says,  "  from  Capo 
de  Cruz,  on  the  south  side  of  Cuba,  it  is  noticed  that  there  is  a  constant  current  to  the 
westward,  with  some  inclination  to  the  southward  or  northward,  and  which  has  been 
known  sometimes  to  set  20  miles  in  a  single  day."  In  opposition  to  this,  the  exact  words 
of  Captain  Livingston  are,  "  I  have  twice  experienced  a  strong  current  setting  a!)out  E. 
S.  E.  between  tho  Caymans  and  Isle  of  Pines;  and  on  the  latter  of  these  occasiuiis,  both 
my  mate  and  myself  separately  calculattid  it  to^set  about  CO  miles  per  day,  or  2i  per  hour. 
This,  however,  1  incline  to  think  a  very  particular  case,  suth  as  may  but  seldom  occur. 
The  winds  at  tliis  time  woie  li^ht  and  westerly.  On  the  other  occasion,  so  far  as  I  re- 
collect, it  set  about  12  or  14  miles  per  day  only.  All  my  papers  on  these  subjects  have 
been  lost;  but  the  first  instance,  was  too  romarkal)Ie  to  be  forgotten." 

On  the  northern  coast  of  St.  Domingo,  and  in  the  witidward  passages,  there  does  not 
ap|)ear  to  be  any  general  current.  On  tho  north  side  of  Cul)a  tho  case  is  nearly  the 
same  ;  but  in  the  channel  here  is  a  regular  tide  throughout  the  year,  subject,  however, 
to  certain  variations. 

The  currents  of  the  Caribbean  Sea,  are  probably  varied  by  the  influence  of  the  moon 
and  change  of  seasons,  and  combine,  in  some  degree,  with  the  tides ;  especially  about 
Cuba,  Jamaica,  ond  St.  Domingo. t 

In  an  old  book,  (Kelly's  Navigation,  vol.  i.  1733.)  is  an  nljstract  from  a  journal,  which 
contains  the  following  passage: — "between  the  west  end  of  Hispaniola  and  the  island  of 
Jamaica,  if  I  took  my  departure  upon  a  full  or  change  of  the  moon,  I  found  that  I  made 
many  leagues  more  than  1  did  at  the  quarters  of  the  moon.  At  the  full  and  change,  I 
was  looking  out  for  the  land  long  before  I  saw  it;  and,  at  the  quarters,  I  was  down  upon 
it  long  before  I  looked  for  it.  The  reasons,  as  I  found  afterwards,  were  that  the  full  and 
change  made  u  strong  windward  current,  and  the  contrary  on  the  quarters.  This  has 
been  exemplified  in  many  instances." 

On  this  subject  Ca|)tain  Livingston  says,  "  it  is  a  prevailing  opinion  with  many,  that 
tho  moon  governs  entirely  the  currents  among  the  West  India  Islands.  No  doubt  tho 
moon  has  some  ell'ecton  tlietn,  but  I  am  of  opinion  that  tho  winds  huvo  d  «iill  more  pow- 
erful intluenco. 

"  It  is  rarely,  indeed,  on  the  north  side  of  the  Island  of  Jamaica,  that  there  is  a  west- 
erly current  when  the  norlii  and  N.  W.  winds  prevail ;  the  current  then  always,  or  al- 
most always,  setting  to  tho  eastward. 


•  The  nortliernmoi't  part  of  the  trm-k  extends  to  St"  50'  N.,  longitmie  90°  39'  W. 

t  Cuptuin  Kowliind  liourke,  wlica  once  lying  to  for  the  niglit,  ofl*  Cupu  Antonio,  found  himself  next 
tnorning  oil'  Cape  Corrientrs. 

t  Cuptuin  Collrr.of  the  whip  Rol)rrt,  from  the  Clyde,  some  yenrs  since  threw  nl>ott1e  overbonril  to  tlie 
eafltwnrd  of  Alto  Vein,  on  tin;  coutli  <-oast  of  Hnyti,  luid  iibmit  thirteen  months  afterwards  he  saw  a 
Charleston  newspaper,  at  KincKton,  Jiinmifa,  which  stated  lluit  the  bottlo  hud  been  picked  up  on  tlio 
shore,  near  St.  Mury'a,  in  Florida. 


snys,  "  whea 
iger  Key  and 
reeu  Turneff 
ibergfia  Key, 
ewiird  of  the 
•iiig  it  to  the 

;  along  shore 

gh  a  cnntro- 
tinel  of  Yu- 
istern  side  of 

(Inm,  off  the 
he  24  hours, 
lay  be  found 
9  been  set  to 
laterly  wiml 
loiith  side  of 
night,  bnen 
ig  u  distance 

sle  of  Pines, 
ent  between 

full  2  miles 
le  set  nearly 

'  from  Capo 
irrent  to  the 
ch  has  been 

exact  woids 
ing  a!)out  E. 
casiiiMs,  both 
2i  jior  hour, 
sl'loni  occur, 
)  far  as  I  re- 
ubjects  have 

oro  does  not 
3  nearly  the 
ct,  however, 

of  the  moon 
sciaijy  about 

iirnal,  which 
the  island  uf 

that  I  made 
lid  change,  I 
I  down  upon 

the  full  and 
.     This  has 

many,  that 
\o  doubt  the 
1  more  pow- 

re  is  a  west- 
Iways,  or  al- 


J  himself  next 

erbonril  to  tlie 
irda  he  saw  a 
ked  up  un  tlie 


mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

"  On  the  south  side  of  Cuba,  when  the  wind  is  westerly,  which  it  often  is,  you  are  al- 
ways cprtain  of  a  re-flowing  current  round  Capo  Antonio.  This  is  easily  accounted  for: 
09,  when  the  fresh  trade  wind  ceases,  uud  the  westerly  winds  set  in.  the  barrier  is,  in 
eoino  degree,  removed,  which  confined  the  waters  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  ihey  seek  to 
regain  their  level  as  well  by  the  Channel  of  Yucatan  as  by  the  Strait  of  Florida." 

In  th«  windward  Channel  of  Jamaica,  the  current  generally  sets  with  the  wind  to  lee- 
ward, or  S.  W.,  yet  both  hero  and  at  Jamaica,  it  is  variable.  Some  have  affirmed  that, 
when  a  curront  runs  to  leeward,  on  the  south  side  of  Jamaica,  there  is  frequently  one  set- 
ting eastward  on  tho  north  side  ;  and,  at  other  times,  no  current  is  to  be  perceived  ;  also 
that,  when  a  leo  current  runs  on  the  north  shore,  the  same  circumstances  may  be  per- 
ceived on  tho  south  shore  as  were  before  observed  on  the  north. 

But  between  tho  Mona  Passage  and  tho  Caymans,  south  of  the  islands,  the  tendency 
of  the  currents  towards  shore  is  most  commonly  found  to  the  north-westward. 

In  the  Bahama  Passages  the  currents  are  devious ;  both  weather  and  leo  currents 
having  been  found.  These  also  appear  to  he  influenced  by  the  tidal  causes ;  for  the  tides 
are  operative  on  tho  banks,  and  sometimes  set  strongly. 

The  following  is  an  additional  detail  of  the  best  information  we  have  been  able  to  col- 
lect, of  the  currents  in  the  Caribbean  and  Mexican  Seas,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  An- 
tillas,  &c. 

In  the  channel  between  Trinidad  and  Grenada  the  current  has  been  found  to  set  near- 
ly west;  on  the  south  side  half  a  point  southerly,  and  on  the  north  side  half  a  point 
northerly.     Its  velocity  from  a  mile  to  a  mile  and  a  half  per  hour. 

Between  Grenada  and  St.  Vincent's,  among  the  Grenadines,  the  currents  are  devious; 
but  the  general  inset  afipears  to  be  \V.  by  N. 

Between  St.  Vincent's  and  St.  Lucia,  the  current,  from  the  eastward,  sets  in  more 
northerly;  and  within,  on  the  west,  it  has  been  found  setting  to  the  N.  W.  Between 
those  islands  it  seems  to  be  as  strong  as  in  any  other  part  of  the  range. 

Between  St.  Lucia  and  Mariiniquo  it  has  been  found  nearly  north.  Very  variable  on 
the  western  side  of  the  latter. 

The  current  sets  nearly  in  the  same  manner  between  Martinique  and  Dominica  ;  but 
to  the  north-westward  of  tho  latter,  it  has  been  found  nearly  S.  VV.  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  hourly.  Northward  of  Guadaloupe  it  sets  W.  i  S.,  and  between  Monslerrat  and 
Antigua  N.  W. 

Between  Redondn  and  Novis  it  has  been  found  \V.  S.  W.  half  a  mile  hourly. 

Without  Barbuda  and  tho  northern  isles,  it  has  set  about  W.  by  N.,  and  to  the  north- 
ward of  tho  Virgin  Isles  and  Porto  Rico  about  W.  S.  W. 

At  tho  distance  of  about  one  degree,  within  tho  range  of  the  Caribbee  Ishnds,  and  to 
the  Virgin  Islands,  tho  current  has  been  found  setting,  in  general,  to  the  W.  N.  W.,  from 
one  mile  to  one  mile  and  a  half  an  hour. 

In  the  Mona  passage,  between  Porto  Rico  and  Ilayti,  the  current  has  been  marked  as 
frequently  setting  to  the  N.  VV.,  and  we  have  instances  of  a  set  through  to  the  S.  W., 
hut  Captain  Monteath,  in  February,  1816,  when  proceeding  southward  towards  Porto 
Rico,  in  from  latitude  234°  to  22°,  and  longitude  64°  to  65°,  found  the  current  setting  N. 
N.  E.  at  the  rate  of  20  miles  in  the  24  hours:  and  he  says  that,  off  the  N.  W.  end  of 
Porto  Rico,  it  invariably  set  from  the  Caribbean  Seu  to  the  north  and  N.  N.  E.  On  tho 
western  side  of  the  passage  it  set  north,  two  miles  an  hour. 

From  Trinidad,  westward,  and  off  the  north  side  of  the  Spanish  leeward  Isles,  the  cur- 
rent h;is  been  found  setting  west  and  S.  W.  to  the  Gulf  of  Maraciiyho ;  thence  S.  W.  also 
to  Carthagcna ;  but  it  varies,  as  has  been  already  noticed. 

From  Carthagpiia  towards  the  channel  of  Yucatan,  it  has  been  found  N.  N.  W.,  N.  W., 
W.  N.  \V.,  and  N.  W.  by  N.,  from  1  to  nearly  2  miles,  and  then  decreasing  to  14  mile 
per  hour.  It  has  also  been  found  setting  to  the  eastward,  as  shown  in  tho  preceding 
pages. 

At  about  40  miles  northward  of  Cape  Catoche,  the  current  has  been  found  N.  W.  by 
W. :  chimging  thence  to  S.  S.  W.  off  the  N.  W.  point  of  Yucatan,  nearly  at  the  same 
distance  trom  the  coast.  Rate  something  less  than  half  a  mile  an  hour.  Between  this 
and  Vera  Cruz  the  current  ceases. 

Tiie  action  of  the  S.  E.  trade  wind,  in  the  equatorial  regions,  and  the  ispparent  dispo- 
sition of  the  waters  in  these  regions  to  retire  westward,  which  has  been  attributed  to  tho 
rotary  motion  of  the  earth,  are  considered  as  the  causes  of  a  current  which  is  known  to 
flow,  during  a  great  part  of  the  year,  from  the  Ethiopic  Ocean  to  tho  Caribbean  Sea,  and 
which  has  frequently  carried  ships  considerably  to  the  west  and  W.  N.  W.  of  their  reck- 
onings, when  off  tho  N.  W.  part  of  Brazil. 

On  the  oast  coast  of  Brazil  the  currents  generally  partake  of  the  direction  of  tlie  mon- 
soons, as  before  explained,  but  vary  in  velocity  according  to  thu  advance  and  decline  of 
them,  as  well  as  the  part  of  the  coast. 

Lieutenant  Hewett  says,  during  the  southerly  monsoon,  tho  currents  to  the  southward 
of  Cape  St.  Augustin  are  not  so  powerful  as  to  the  northward,  where  they  increase  in 


SI* 


mm 


!>*PW 


32* 


Ou  Mny  20,  1802,  the  Cuffnela,  East  Indinmnn,  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  8i°  north, 
.  22°.     Gained  the  S.  E.  trndo  June  4,  in  3°  N.,  long.  21°.     From  the  equator  tho 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Btrength  until  the  months  of  June  and  July,  and  then  gradually  decline.  On  the  con- 
trary,  in  the  northerly  monsoon,  they  are  generally  very  strong  to  the  southward  of  Cape 
St.  Augustin,  when  they  are  weak  to  the  northward,  as  they  have  some  difficulty  in  de- 
taching  themselves  from  the  stream,  which  runs  from  the  S.  E.  trade  around  Capo  St. 

Mr.  Lindley  also  notices  that,  "  a  strong  current  runs  sonthwiird  from  Cape  St.  Au- 
gustin,  commencing  about  the  middle  of  October,  and  contiiining  until  January,  after 
which  there  is  no  particular  current  till  the  middloof  April,  when  u  powerful  one  sets  ia 
northerly  till  July,  and  then  subsides  in  like  manner." 

The  currents  of  the  River  Plata,  and  other  local  currents  near  tlie  shores,  have  been 
before  noticed,  in  the  Descriptions  and  Sailing  Directions. 

The  following  f;>cts  establish  the  existence  of  n  combined  current;  and  they  show,  in 
some  degree,  its  force  and  direction  towards  the  Brazilian  coast: 

1.  In  June  and  July,  1795,  the  Bombay  Castle,  East  Indiaman,  between  the  Islo  nf 
Palma  (of  the  Canaries)  and  the  coast  of  Brazil,  experienced  a  westerly  current,  amount- 
ing to  Gi° 

2. 
long. 

current  was  found  to  set  W.  and  W.  by  N.,from  30  to  52  miles  daily,  till  the  coast  of 
Brazil  was  in  sight  on  the  1 1th  in  8°  S. 

3.  May  23, 1802,  the  Sir  Edward  Hughes  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  G°  N.,  long.  23°,  and 
the  wind  was  from  S.  S.  E.  on  the  23th,  in  5°  N.,  and  23°  30'  W.  The  trade  kept  fur 
at  southward,  and  the  current  set  strongly  to  the  west. 

4.  October  16,  1805,  the  European  fleet  lost  the  N.  E.  trade  in  11°  N.,  long.  28°,  and 
gained  the  S.  E.  trade  on  the  20'th,  in  4°  N.,  long.  29°.  On  the  4th  of  November,  the 
land  of  Brazil  was  seen  in  lat.  G°  S. ;  the  wind  near  the  land  was  at  E.  by  S.  and  E.  S. 
E.  By  proceeding  too  far  to  the  westward,  two  ships  of  the  fleet  were  wrecked  in  the 
morning  of  the  Istof  November,  on  the  Roccas,  or  Low  Keys,  in  lat.  3°  52'  S.  and  33i^ 
W.,  and  several  others  had  nearly  shared  the  same  fate,  'i'his  catastrophe  had  probably 
been  avoided  by  a  duo  knowledge  of,  and  attention  to,  tho  effects  of  the  current,  which  was 
subsequently  ascertained  to  set  24  miles  per  hour  to  the  westward  near  the  Roccas. 

5.  On  the  Ist  of  Juno,  1793,  the  King  George,  East  Indiaman,  crossed  the  line  in  30" 
W.,  and  from  the  2d  to  the  5th  experienced  a  westerly  curient  of  1°  33'.  On  tho  5th 
Cape  St.  Roque  was  in  sight,  and  the  ship  was  kept  working  until  the  10th,  endeavoring 
ineff"ectually  to  weather  it.  She  then  stood  to  the  north-eastward,  closely  hauled,  to  Int. 
1°  N.,  in  order  to  regain  tho  variable  winds  in  north  latitude,  and  then  proceeded  to  cross 
the  equator,  which  was  at  length  eflected. 

6.  In  May  and  Juno,  1807,  the  transports  laden  with  ordnance  stores,  for  the  army  i,t 
Monte  Video,  by  crossing  the  equator  too  far  to  the  westward,  were  carried  so  fur  in  this 
direction  by  the  current,  that  they  could  not  get  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Augustin,  (lat. 
8°  23'  S.,)  and  were  twice  obliged  to  stand  to  tlio  northward,  into  variable  winds,  to  re- 
gain easting,  after  having  attempted  ineifectually  to  gain  the  regular  south-east  trade 
wind. 

7.  It  is  a  well  known  fact,  that  several  ships  have  made  the  isle  of  Fernando  Noronlin, 
on  their  outward  bound  passage  to  India,  by  currents  having  set  them  to  tho  westward, 
after  the  failure  of  the  N.  E.  trade  wind.     The  current  runs  strongly  about  this  island. 


OULF  STREAM  AIVD  STRAIT  OF  FLORIDA. 

THAT  immense  current  which  continually  sets  from  the  gulfs  of  Mexico  and  Florida,  to 
the  northward  and  north-(!astward.  should  bo  well  utiderstood,  as  all  who  navigate  the 
coast  of  North  America,  experience  more  or  less  of  its  influence. 

Three  degrees  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  Vera  Cruz,  the  current  has  been  found  setting  to  the 
N.  E.  one  mile  an  hour.  Then  N.  N.  E.  and  N.  by  E.,  and  again  N.  E.,  nearly  to  tho 
parallel  of  52i  '\  long.  914°.  Here  it  changes  more  to  the  east,  and  becomes  in  lat.  2G^  E. 
by  S.,  changingsoutliward  to  S.  E.  by  S.  In  the  direction  of  the  River  Mississippi,  and 
lat.  25°  30'  N.,  the  current  sists  variously  to  the  south-eastward.  Its  extent  and  exact 
direction  are  here  unknown,  but  it  is  certain,  that  setting  towards  the  N.  VV.  part  of  Cuba, 
and  striking  on  the  banks  of  Isalxdiaand  Colorados,  a  portion  of  it  winds  round  Capo  An- 
tonio to  tho  south-etLstward,  wliilo  tho  groat  body  of  it  sots  eastward,  to  the  northward  o; 
Cuba,  winding  to  E.  N.  E.,  N.  E.,^and  N.,  through  tho  Strait  of  Florida,  into  tho  Atlautic 
Ocean. 


"mtfiinm 


-«ip^P'w"«:'^ipi^»»^ 


On  the  con- 
nrd  of  Cnpe 
iculty  in  de- 
id  Capo  St. 

upe  St.  Au- 
iiuury,  after 
1  one  sets  io 

,  Imvo  been 

loy  show,  in 

the  Islo  nf 
nt,  amount- 

i  Bh°  north, 
equator  tho 
the  coast  of 

ng.  23°,  nnd 
ido  kept  fur 

ng.28°,and 
vomber,  tlie 
s.  nnd  E.  S. 
jckcd  in  the 
S.  nnd  33i^ 
ind  probiihly 
,  which  was 
Roccns. 
3  hne  in  30° 
On  the  .5th 
endeavoring 
luled,  to  int. 
dod  to  cross 

the  army  i.t 
30  fur  in  this 
igustin,  (lilt, 
'inds,  to  re- 
i-enst  trade 

Jo  Noronha, 
1  westward, 
lis  idliind. 


DA. 

1  P^lorida,  to 
uvignto  the 

Btting  to  tho 
Hiirly  to  tho 
1  lilt.  l.'C^  E. 
tissippi,  and 
nnd  exact 
art  of  Cuba, 
1  Cape  An- 
rthwiird  o; 
ho  Atlantic 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

The  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas  Bnys,  "By  the  Strait  of  Florida,  we  understand  the 
space  included  between  the  meridinn  of  the  Dry  Tortugns  and  the  parallel  of  Cape  Ca- 
naveral. The  simple  inspection  of  the  chart  will  show  this  to  be  a  bed  or  course,  which, 
like  a  river,  conducts  the  water  to  the  northward.  This  river,  or  general  current,  flows 
first  to  the  E.  N.  E.  as  far  as  the  meridian  of  the  western  part  of  the  Double  Shot  Keys, 
by  which  keys  the  stream  is  diverted  from  E.  N.  E.  to  N.  by  E.,  the  direction  which  it 
pursues  on  the  parallel  of  Cape  Florida:  thence  to  Cape  Canaveral  it  -una  north,  inclin- 
ing a  little  to  the  east. 

"On  the  meridinn  of  the  Havana,  stripes  of  current  are  at  times  found  setting  to  the 
G.  S.  E.  nnd  S.  E.  from  the  Tortugas  soundings.  Cnrn  should  be  taken  not  to  confuse 
the  southern  ditferences,  caused  by  this  branch  of  the  current,  with  those  caused  by  the 
eddy  current  near  the  Colorndos — tho  one  giving  eastern  departure,  the  other  west. 
The  distinction  is  very  clear,  nnd  can  admit  of  no  doubt,  because  the  eddy  current  is  met 
only  from  the  meridians  of  Cavanas  and  Buy  Honda  to  Cape  Antonio,  and  not  farther  out 
from  the  coast  than  the  parni,.-!  of  23  degrees. 

"As  the  velocity  of  the  current  varies,  it  is  requisite  for  every  navigator  to  ascertain  its 
strength  as  frequently  as  possible,  while  within  the  stream.  Every  one  who  enters  thia 
channel,  having  marked  well  either  the  lands  of  Cuba  or  the  Florida  Reef,  so  as  accurate- 
ly to  establish  this  point  of  departure,  ought  to  determine,  in  his  first  day's  work,  the  ve- 
locity of  the  current  by  the  dilFerence  of  latitude,  by  nccount  and  observation.  We  say 
during  the  first  dny's  work,  because  the  generality  of  common  navigators  make  use  of 
meridian  altitudes  and  tho  sun  alone,  to  find  the  latitude:  but  it  is  very  clear,  that  alti- 
tudes  of  the  planets  and  fixed  stars  ought  not  to  he  neglected;  not  only  because  by  this 
you  cannot  be  in  doubt  of  your  real  latitude,  but  also  because  they  may  be  more  exact  than 
latiludes  deduced  from  meridian  altitudes  of  the  sun,  when  that  luminary  passes  in  the 
proximity  of  the  zenith,  and  because  these  repeated  observations  during  the  night  assume, 
as  much  as  possible,  the  situation  of  the  ship.  Thus  you  may  go  on,  wiih  a  clear  idea  of 
the  operation  of  the  current,  and  the  way  that  the  ship  is  making.  Having  ascertain- 
ed the  velocity  of  the  current,  use  can  be  made  of  it  to  find  the  ship's  departure,  and 
this  knowledge  will  be  most  important  when  you  fail  in  obtaining  observations  for  latitude ; 
because,  in  such  a  case,  wanting  a  knowledge  of  the  difference  of  latitude  given  by  the 
current,  you  will  be  in  want  of  every  thing;  but  if  you  know  the  velocity  of  the  current, 
and  with  it  the  course  which  it  follows,  you  may  find  the  difference  of  latitude  and  de- 
parture which  the  current  gives,  nnd  which,  though  it  will  not  give  the  position  of  the 
ship  with  that  precision  with  which  it  might  be  obtained  by  latitude  observed,  will  still  ap- 
proximate sufficiently  to  the  truth  to  enable  one  to  avoid  danger,  if  prudence  and  seaman- 
like conduct  are  combined." 

For  those  who  have  little  experience  in  the  art  of  navigation,  we  add — 

1.  That  it  is  most  convenient  to  direct  your  course  in  mid-channel,  not  only  because  it 
is  the  farthest  from  danger,  but  because  you  will  there  have  the  strongest  current,  which 
is  desirable.     (See  Remarks  of  Mr.  Romans  on  the  Gulf  Stream.) 

2.  That,  as  you  cannot  ascertain  with  all  necessary  certainty  the  position  of  the  ship, 
notwithstanding  the  rules  given  to  diminish  the  errors  occasioned  by  the  currents,  you 
ought,  with  the  utmost  care,  to  shun  the  eastern  coast  of  Florida,  as  being  verj'  danger- 
ous, the  trade  wind  blowing  upon  it,  while  there  is  not  the  least  risk  in  running-nlong  the 
Salt  Key  Bank,  and  the  edge  of  the  Great  Bank  of  Bahnma.  Upon  the  latter,  also,  you 
meet  with  good  anchorages,  very  fit  to  lie  in  during  tho  hard  northerly  gales  experienced 
between  November  and  March,  and  which  do  not  fail  to  cause  much  damage,  nnd  some- 
times even  force  vessels  to  bear  away,  which  is  always  dangerous,  for  the  weather  is  gen- 
erally thick,  with  such  winds,  nnd  the  greatest  danger  will  be  to  run,  in  one  of  them, 
ashore  upon  the  coast  of  Cuba,  when  hoping  to  have  made  Havana  or  Mntanzns.  There- 
fore, 80  soon  as  there  is  an  appearance  of  a  northerly  gale,  the  best  way  is,  if  near  the 
Salt  Key  Bank,  to  anchor  on  it;  nnd  if  near  the  great  Bank,  to  approach  the  edge  of  it, 
in  order  to  be  able  to  anchor  when  it  may  be  necessary;  for,  although  you  may  have  a 
hard  norther,  so  long  as  you  can  lie  to  in  it,  you  ought  to  pursue  your  voyage,  as  tho  cur- 
rent will  certainly  carry  the  ship  through  the  strait. 

3.  It  is  very  necessary  to  sight  the  keys  on  the  bank,  even  though  you  have  no  fear  of  a 
norther,  nnd  there  may  be  occasions  in  which  every  exertion  should  be  made  t.^  see  them, 
especially  if,  from  want  of  observations,  the  situation  of  the  ship  is  not  well  known. 

4.  When,  owing  to  calms  or  light  winds,  a  vessel  not  bound  to  the  northward  is  in  dan- 
ger of  being  carried  through  the  strait  by  the  current,  she  ought  immediately  to  npproach 
the  edge  of  the  Salt  Key  Bank,  or  of  the  Groat  Bahama  Bank,  and  return  from  thence 
by  tho  Santaren  Channel  to  the  const  of  Cuba,  without  trying  to  beat  back  the  lost 
ground;  for  by  doing  this,  she  would  only  render  the  chance  of  being  carried  through 
more  certain. 

5.  Should  you  involuntarily  approach  the  coast  of  Florida,  you  should  take  extraordi- 
nary care  to  examine  whether  you  have  advanced  out  of  the  general  current,  and  into 
the  eddy.    That  you  may  know  this,  observe  the  eddy  forms  a  remarkable  and  visiblo 

3* 


•33 


34* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


line  between  it  and  the  general  current,  which  line  of  division  is.  in  many  jjlaces,  out  of 
siuht  of  liind ;  that  In  general  you  have  no  soundings  on  it,  and  rhnt  it  shows,  not  only 
by  the  change  in  the  color  of  the  water,  but  that  also  in  it,  during  the  greatest  ciiImB, 
there  is  a  l*ind  of  boiling  or  overfallingof  the  water.  From  this  line  of  division  the  wa- 
ter gradually  changes  color,  so  that  near  the  Florida  Keys  it  is  e  beautiful  sea  green,  and 
at  last  it  becomes  almost  as  white  as  milli. 

6.  When  in  the  eddy,  you  have  to  make  the  correction  of  currents  on  courses  entirely 
different  from  those  in  the  stream.  This  is  the  more  necessary  to  be  attended  to,  be- 
cause, from  ignorance  of  this  circumstance,  many  have  been  shipwrecked. 

7.  When  you  enter  the  channel,  or  strait,  from  the  Torfugas  Bank,  with  the  intention 
of  passing  through,  take  care  to  become  certain  of  the  land  of  Cuba,  or  some  part  of  the 
Reef  of  Florida,  in  order  to  have  a  good  departure;  for  although  the  latitudes  and  sound- 
ings on  the  Tortugaa  Bank  are  more  than  sufficient  to  ascertain  the  place  of  the  ship,  yet 
the  variable  set  of  the  current  toward  the  Havana  may  produce  a  serious  error,  if  not 
properly  attended  to.  The  meridian  of  the  Havana  is,  in  n  word,  the  best  point  of  de- 
parture fiir  ships  bound  to  the  north-eastward. 

At  about  3i  degrees  north  of  Cape  Antonio,  the  current  has  at  times  been  found  setting 
to  the  S.  W.,  winding  towards  the  northern  edge  of  the  Yucatan  Bank  ;  but  at  a  degree 
thence  eastward,  setting  nearly  S.  E.  Off  the  west  end  of  Cuba,  at  10  leagues  N.  W. 
from  Cape  St.  Antonio,  it  has  been  found  setting  S.  W.  by  W.  one  mile  an  hour.  But 
these  cannot  be  considered  as  its  "general  directions." 

The  stream  in  mid-channel,  on  the  meridian  of  Havana,  acquires  the  direction  of  E. 
N.  E.,  and  velocity  of  about  2i  miles  an  hour.  On  the  meridian  of  the  southernmost 
point  of  Florida,  its  velocity,  at  about  one-third  over  from  the  Florida  Reefs,  is  commonly 
'2i  to  3i  mileH.  Between  the  Bernini  Isles  and  Cape  Florida,  its  direction  is  about  N. 
by  E.,  and  \ilocity  the  same. 

On  ttu«  Cuba  side  the  stream  is  weak,  and  it  sets  to  the  eastward.  On  the  opposite 
side,  iijoiig  the  Florida  Reefs  and  Keys,  there  is  a  re-flow  or  counter  current,  setting  to 
thii  S.  W.  and  W.  By  the  assistance  of  the  latter,  many  small  vessels  have  nnvigiited 
through  the  strait  from  the  northward;  but  this  navigation  is  too  dangerous  to  be  attempt- 
e>i  by  strangers.  The  tides  set  strong  among  these  reefs,  and  are  more  particularly  de- 
scribed in  this  work. 

The  winds  are  found  to  affect  the  position  of  the  stream  considerably.  Between  Cuba 
and  Florida  northerly  winds  press  it  southward  towards  the  shore  of  the  former;  south- 
erly winds  have  a  contrary  effect.  When  turned  to  ihe  north,  easterly  winds  press  it  to 
the  (^lorida  side,  and  westerly  winds  nearer  to  the  Bahamas.  Southerly  winds  cause  it 
to  spread,  and  so  may  those  fiom  the  north. 

In  the  Strait  of  Florida,  within  the  Bahamas,  when  a  northerly  gale  increases  to  a 
Btorm.  it  opposes  the  stream  in  its  course,  and  its  adverse  power  causes  it  to  fill  all  the 
channels  and  oi  enings  among  the  isles  and  reefs,  and  to  overflow  all  the  low  coast.  Ship- 
ping have  even  been  carried  over  the  low  keys,  and  left  dry  on  shore.*  The  water  13 
supposed  at  times  to  have  risen  to  the  height  uf  30  feet,  and  to  have  been  running  ngiiinst 
the  fury  of  the  winds  at  the  rate  of  7  miles  an  hour.  During  these  times  the  Struitof 
Florida  exhibits  a  scene  terrific  beyond  description. 

Remarks  on  the  Slream,  SfV.,  by  Captain  J.  Steele  Park. 

"Sailed  from  Jamaica  for  London,  on  the  20lh  May,  1824.  At  noon,  on  the  27(h, 
was  off  the  S.  W.  side  of  Cuba,  in  latitude  21°  26',  longitude  by  chronometers  and  luniira 
84°  47'  W.  Here  was  discovered  a  current  setting  to  the  N.  W.  at  the  rate  of  2  miles 
an  hour.  At  7h.  30m.  Cape  Antonio  bore  N.  W.,  5  or  6  miles.  The  current  to  the  N 
W.,"  says  Cnpt.  Park,  "swept  us  into  tlie  Gulf  of  Mexico;  and  there  we  were  beating 
about  three  or  four  days,  making  northing  and  westing  in  spite  of  our  teeth.  All  this 
time  the  wind  was  easterly,  and  we  might  have  cruised  at)out  there  till  Christmas,  hiid  the 
wind  not  got  a  liltle  to  the  southward  uf  east,  which  enabled  us  to  get  over  to  the  N.  E, 
side,  where  we  found  the  current  running  directly  opposite  to  the  former,  being  now  in 
the  Florida  stream. 

"After  rounding  Cape  Antonio  the  land  of  Cuba  was  not  seen.  At  this  time,  (the  latter 
days  of  May,  1824,)  the  stream  along  the  Florida  side,  and  even  in  the  strait,  was  by  no 
means  so  strong  as  it  is  generally  found.  In  the  narrowest  part,  where,  of  course,  we 
had  a  right  to  expect  the  greatest  velocity,  it  was  running  at  the  rate  of  only  2i  miles  in 
the  hour.  This  was  correctly  ascertained  by  meridian  altitudes  of  sun  and  moon,  and  an 
excellent  chronometer. 

"In  the  month  of  September,  1769,  there  happened  an  inundation,  which  covered  the  tops  of  the 
highest  trees  on  the  Cayu  Larga.  Sic,  and  during  which  the  Ledbury  Snow,  Juhn  Luriiin,  muster,  was 
carried  over  Ihe  reef  by  the  N.  W.  current  of  llie  sirenui,  caused  liy  a  gule  from  N.  K  The  vessel  liilged 
in  shulli  w  water,  but  an  anchor  was  thrown  out,  and  the  next  day  the  vessel  was  lound  to  have  ground- 
ed on  £lliot'8  Key  with  its  anchor  among  the  trees.— [Ue  Braham's  Atlantic  Pilot.] 


"  When 
the  influen( 
came  on  tu 
by  S  from 
favorite  trat 
ring  this  gn 
W.  S.  W., 
getting  finul 

"On  Jun 
26'  (by  altit 
24  hours  ru 
true  differei 
hud  been  n 
miles.  A  Ik 
sequently.  o 

"  After  til 
W.  and  S.  ' 
a  fine  north' 
lat.  43°  35' 

Cunenlsj 


Jan.  16  L 

"  17 

"  18 

"  19 

"  20 

It  21 

"  22 

"  23 

"  24 

"  25 

"  26 

"  27 

"  28 

"  29 

From  the 

to  set  S.  S. 
Honda,  or  P 

The  hoist 
begin  in  Sep 

On  the  so 
rent  sets  nhu 
about  E.  by 


Between  1 
had  set  80  m 
(iioithwardc 
72°  30'  to  7] 
Next  day,  J 
On  the  follo\ 
9,  to  lat.  3!>° 
tinued  each 

The  strea 
about  31°,  it 
westerly ; 
tude  35°,  or 
tlie  Cape. 

The  strea 
eastward,  at 
and  to  throw 

*  A  scientifii 
out  of  it  as  ea 
rent  will  notct 
tend  that  part 


>tW"   '' 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


•06 


ices,  out  of 
'8,  not  only 
iteat  ciilniB, 
ion  the  wn- 
green,  and 

les  entirely 
ided  to,  be- 

le  intention 
part  of  the 
I  and  sound- 
he  ship,  yet 
?rror,  if  not 
point  of  de- 

ound  setting 
Rt  a  decree 

B;ue8  N.  W. 
hour.     But 

ection  of  E. 
tuthernmost 
s  commonly 
I  is  about  N, 

the  opposite 
it,  setting  to 
ve  nnvigiited 
be  at  tern  pt- 
ticukrly  de- 

tween  Cuba 
mer;  south- 
Is  press  it  to 
nds  cause  it 

reases  to  a 
o  fill  all  the 
;oaat.  Ship- 
^he  water  is 
iiing  ngiiinst 
the  Strait  of 


on  the  27th, 
rs  nud  luniirs 
te  of  3  miles 
nt  to  tlie  N 
vera  beating 
All  tliis 
mas,  hiid  the 
to  the  N.  E. 
)eing  now  in 

e,  (the  latter 
t,  was  by  no 
course,  we 
r  2i  miles  in 
noon,  and  an 


ho  tops  of  the 
n,  muster,  was 
3  veKBcl  bilged 
I  have  ground- 


"  When  we  cleared  the  Qulf,"  (Strait)  Cnpt.  Park  adds,  •>  I  was  anxious  to  keep  ia 
the  influence  of  the  stream,  and  pass  near  the  Tail  of  the  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  but  it 
came  on  tu  blow  hard  from  the  northward,  in  latitude  34°  35',  and  longitude  72°  20'  (E. 
by  S  from  Cape  Elatteras.*)  Thin,  of  course,  drove  us  away  to  the  eastward,  out  of  the 
fiivorite  track,  and  we  passed  about  300  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  Bermudas.  Du- 
ring this  gale,  for  several  days  a  current  was  found  to  proceed  from  the  eastward  to  the 
W.  S.  W.,  but  in  latitude  38°  and  longitude  about  59°,  the  ship  was  in  the  Gulf  Stream, 
setting  finally  to  the  N.  £. 

"On  June  23d,  at  noon,  lat.  37°  51',  long.  Gl°  54';  June  24th,  lat.  39°  56',  long.  57° 
Of;'  (by  altitudes  and  chronometer.  Here  the  ship  really  made  4°  28'  of  easting  in  the 
24  hours  run,  and  the  log  gave  only  3°  IG'.  In  the  same  time  northing  was  made.  The 
true  ditference  of  latitude  was  12.j  minutes,  but  the  log  gave  about  80  only.  The  vessel 
hud  beeu  running  all  tiie  time  E.  by  N.,  by  compass,  and  went  through  the  water  173 
mdes.  Allowing  half  a  point  of  variation,  gives  the  true  course  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  Sub- 
sequently, on  making  Scilly,  there  was  not  an  error  in  the  watch  of  a  single  mile. 

•■  After  the  gale  from  the  northward  subsided,  the  winds  became  variable  between  N, 
W.  and  S.  W.  The  ship  passed  near  the  Tail  of  the  Great  Bank,  and  continued  to  carry 
a  line  north-easterly  current,  at  the  rato  of  30,  25,  and  2U  miles  a  day,  until  she  reached 
lat.  43°  35'  and  long.  36°  50',  where  it  ceased." 

Currents  from  the  Bay  of  Honduras,  and  Ihence  through  the  Strait  of  Florida,  as  ob- 
served by  Capt.  W.  J.  Capes,  in  Jan,  1824. 

Jan.  16  Lat.  17°  55'  Long.  87°  30'  Current  16  miles  southerly  in  the  24  hours. 
"      17  18  ■ 


18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 
25 
26 
27 
28 
29 


18 
19 
20 
20 
22 
23 
23 
24 
26 
28 
30 
30 


24 
14 
31 

6 
47 

9 
13 
22 
47 
52 
22 

0 
31 


87 
86 
85 
85 
85 
85 
84 
82 
80 
79 
79 
78 
76 


8 
35 
58 
17 
39 
44 

8 
42 
10 
54 
50 
34 

7 


14 

do. 

do. 

16 

do. 

do. 

5 

do. 

northward. 

6 

do. 

do. 

5 

do. 

do.  and  20  eastward. 

29  do. 

northward. 

11 

do. 

do. 
no  current. 

9 

miles  northward, 

and  55  eastward 

49 

do. 

northward. 

29 

do. 

do. 

37  do. 

do. 

24  do. 

do. 

Frotn  the  S.  W.  corner  of  the  Tortugns  Bank,  the  current  has,  at  times,  been  found 
tnset  S.  S.  W.  directly  over  to  the  Colorados.  But  between  the  Tortugas  and  Bahia 
Honda,  or  Port  Cavanas,  it  takes  its  regular  set  to  the  eastward. 

The  boisterous  east,  N.  E.,  and  N.  winds,  which  aflfect  the  Gulf  Stream,  generally 
begin  in  September,  and  continue  until  March. 

Un  the  southern  ed^e  of  the  Tortugns  Soundings,  lat.  24°  30',  long.  83°  30'  the  cur- 
rent sets  about  E.  by  S.  20  miles  in  the  24  hours ;  and  in  lat.  24°,  lung.  82°  20',  it  seta 
about  E.  by  N.  42  miles. 

Remarks  on  the  Stream,  by  Captain  W.  J.  Monteath. 

Between  latitude  25°  40'  and  28°  20',  Captain  Monteath  found  the  current  in  the  Strait 
had  set  80  miles  in  the  24  lioursof  June  27,  1820.  On  the  southern  border  of  the  stream, 
(noithward  of  the  parallel  of  Cape  Halt  eras,)  6th  July,  1820,  lat.  35°  20'  to  36°  30'.  long. 
72°  30'  to  71°  3',  Captain  M.  found  the  current  setting  N.  E.  75  miles  in  the  24  hours. 
Next  day,  July  7,  to  lat.  37°  40',  long.  69°,  he  found  it  N.  53°  E.  86  miles  in  24  hours. 
On  the  following  day,  July  8,  to  lat.  38°  38',  long.  67°.  it  ran  N.  58°  E.  30  miles.  July 
9,  to  lat.  39°  10',  long,  6fi°  10',  westward,  only  10  miles.  The  observations  were  con- 
tinued each  day  by  chronometer,  which  agreed  within  a  few  miles. 

The  stream,  from  lat.  26°  to  28°,  generally  sets  north,  rather  easterly;  from  28°  to 
about  31°,  it  appears  to  run  north,  inclining  a  little  in  the  direction  of  the  coast,  rather 
westerly  ;  it  thence  suddenly  turns  to  the  N.  E.  by  E.,  or  a  little  more  easterly,  to  lati- 
tude 35°,  or  about  the  parallel  of  Cape  Uatteras,  where  it  runs  within  about  18  miles  of 
tlie  Cape. 

The  stream,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  coast  at  Cape  Hatteras,  inclines  more  to  the 
eastward,  at  the  rate  of  about  2j  knots;  then  the  shoals  of  Nantucket  appear  to  front  it, 
and  to  throw  it  off  to  the  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  by  N.  northerly.     In  about  the  parallel  of  394°, 


ic  navigator  says,  "  When  in  the  Gulf,  eastward  of  Hatteras,  I  eenerally  endcnvor  to  get 
irly  us  podsiblo,  especially  with  a  strong  N.  E.  wind,  tor  I  think  the  advantiige  of  the  cur- 


*  A  scientific 
out  of  it  as  ear ,        .  .     .  . 

rent  will  not  compensate  fur  the'efiects  of  the  destructive  sea  and  squally  weather,  whicHT generally  at- 
tend that  part  of  the  ocean." 


36* 


lias 
thermi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

longituilo  634°,  It  hiiB  beon  found  to  run  nt  tlio  rate  of  two  knotB  between  E.  by  N.  and 

E  N  K 

Col   WilliHinB,  in  his  "  Thermomotriciil  Niivigntion,"  stntes  thnt  the  whirlpools  ontho 
northern  ed««  of  the  stream,  have  been  seen  in  lat.  41>^  57'.  long.  6.5°  1'.     He  also  ob- 
servi'd  creat  qiiantilitM  of  weed,  supposed  to  be  on  tlio  nortliern  edge  of  Iho  stream,  in 
Jotitude  41°  53'.  long.  65°  33'.     It  has  sulwoqueiitly  been  ascertained  by  Limit.  Charles 
Hare    R.  N.,  that  on  the  meridian  of  57^  W.,  in  the  summer  season,  the  northern  ed^B 
of  the  stream  ranges  upto4.2:|  '  N.,  and  even  in  the  winter  months  to  above  4'J°  N.   This 
been  confirmed  by  twetify-tive  voyages  across  the  Atlantic,  assisted  by  chronometer, 
■rimometpr,  &c.,  tlie  last  of  whirli  was  made  in  tlie  fall  of  the  year  18'.'4. 
It  is.  however,  to  be  considered,  that  a  north.  N.  K.  or  east  wind  torcea  the  stream 
towards  the  coast,  contracts  its  i)rea(llh,  and  thus  increases  its  riipidity.     On  the  con- 
trnry,  S.  W.,  west,  and  N.  W.  winds,  force  the  stream  farther  into  the  ocean,  and  dinii- 
iiislies  its  strength.*     It  is  clear,   tlien,  that  the  stream  fluctuates  in  its  direction  and 
force,  according  to  circumstances,  and  no  al)si)lute  rule  can  be  given  for  ascertaining  its 
more' ordinary  boundaries;  it  tlierel()re  follows,  that  a  description   of  tin-  indications  by 
which  it  may  be  known,  is  of  more  importance.     These  are,  the  appearance  and  tem- 
perature of  the  water;  the  stream,  in  its  lower  latitudes,  and   usual  course  in  fair  wea- 
ther, where  it  tlovvs  uninterruptedly,  m;iy  be  known  by  its  smooth  and  clear  surface,  and 
blue  color.     Tho  margin  of  tiie  stream  is  marked  by  n  ripple  (jn  its  edge;  the  water  in 
some  places  appears  like  boiling  water;  and  m  other  places,  it  foams  like  the  waters  of  a 
cataract,  even  in  dead  calms,  and  in  places  which  are  tiithondess;  and  during  strung  N. 
E.  winds,  that  jtart  from  Cape  Roman  to  the  north  and  east  breaks  violently,  so  much  so 
that  it  has  been  mistaken  for  shoals  during  the  night. 

On  the  outer  edge  of  the  stream,  especiidly  in  fair  weather,  there  are  great  ripplinga, 
which  arc  very  perceptible ;  and  it  has  lu>en  observed,  by  many  navigators,  that  in  tho 
Gulf  the  water  does  not  sparkle  in  the  nigiit,  but  with  south-eisterbj  winds  itdoesaimuch 
as  in  other  parts  of  the  ocean.  The  appearance  of  the  wned  called  Gulf-weed  is  also  an 
indication  of  being  in  or  near  tho  stream,  as  it  is  never  seen  far  north  of  it. 

By  the  advantaiio  of  knowing  how  near  to  the  coast  a  ship  may  venture,  nnd  how  to 
distinguish  the  Gulf  Stream  from  tlie  water  between  it  nnd  tiio  coast,  wo  can  be  sure  of 
B  favorable  current  either  way  ;  and  asniiill  vessel  might  make  a  short  voyage  tVom  Hali- 
fax to  Georgia,  which  is  thongiit  by  some  a  longer  one  than  to  Kuropo.  pose  you 
Lad  the  wind  ahead  all  the  way;  take  your  departure  and  stand  for  the  8trl^  ;  so  soon 
as  you  find  the  water  to  increase  in  heat  about  half  as  much  as  you  know  it  would  when 
in  the  stream,  heave  about  nnd  stand  for  the  coast ;  you  will  infallibly  discover  the  edge 
of  soundings  by  the  cooling  of  the  water;  then  stand  off  again,  and  so  on  to  the  end  of 
the  voyage;  when  it  is  almost  certain,  that  the  distance  would  be  run  in  n  shorter  time 
than  if  there  wore  no  stream,  for  you  would  have  a  favorable  inside  current.  On  the 
return  passage,  take  your  departu.  J,  and  run  olf  till  you  get  into  tho  warmest  water,  which 
will  be  the  middle  of  tho  stream,  and  take  tI:o  advantage  of  its  currents. 

The  following  fact  may  serve  to  iihistnite  the  propriety  of  these  directions.  In  June, 
17'JS,  the  Mail-Packet  for  Charleston,  had  -Jj  days'  passage  in  going,  but  returned  in  7. 
The  cnotain  accounted  for  this  by  having  calms,  or  very  light  airs  and  a  northerly  cur- 
rent. '1  his  was  the  true  cause,  lie  was  m  the  middle  of  tho  stream,  where  there 
ptnt^rally  are  calms  or  light  winds;  the  edges  only,  which  come  in  contact  with  colder 
legions  being  tempestuous.  After  being  in  tlie  latitude  of  Cape  Hatteras,  he  found  him- 
self in  that  of  Cape  Henry,  (100  miles  to  tho  northward.)  The  vessel,  however,  arrived 
at  last;  and  on  the  return  voyaee,  the  captain  steered  the  same  course  back  again;  ami, 
with  the  same  light  airs,  he  performed  tho  voyage  in  seven  days.  Had  this  captain 
known  the  use  of  the  thermometer,  need  he  to  have  been  much  longer  in  going  than  in 
coming  ? 

The  thermometer  is  not  only  useful  for  ascertaining  when  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  but  it 
is  likewise  advantageous  in  discovering  the  approach  to  soundings  on  the  Coast  of  North 
America  between  Cape  Canaveral  and  the  Island  of  Newfoundland. 

We  believe  the  thermometer  only  indicates  the  dilference  of  temperature  caused  by 
going  into  or  leaving  the  Gulf  Stream,  on  the  principle  tliat  its  temperature  is  influenced 


*  An  expeiionrrd  nRvi2:nlor,  before  qiiotrd,  'a_v.«,  "  It  is  always  found  thnt  tho  atronf^eRt  current  is  in 
the  warmest  water.  I  have  uliserved  the  greatest  dPRrce  of  licut  of  the  Gulf,  between  the.  meridian  of 
Cape  Hatteras  anil  that  of  Nantucket,  to  vary  ut  different  limes  from  75°  to  67"  of  Fahrenheit,  and  the 
strongest  current  ti>  dilfer  from  3  to  H  miles  per  hour;  thnt  the  breadth  of  the  gtrenin  current  is  much 
less  than  is  geaerully  supposed,  and  tliiit  the  wmds  cause  a  great  elfert  on  the  Gulf;  fur  instance  a  wind 
that  would  produce  a  current  of  one  knot,  would  retard  one  of  3  knots  to  2  knots  if  opposed  lu  it ;  and 
would  accelerate  the  euiiic  to  4  knots,  if  in  the  same  direction ;  and  that  a  wind  crossing  a  current  ob- 
liquely, would  affect  it  as  die  sine  of  the  angle  at  which  it  is  opposed.  The  direction  of  a  current  can- 
not, however,  be  materially  change  J,  when  forced  against  an  oppuiing  barrier." 


and  govern 

mean  temp( 

or  changes 

At  the  ed 

collier  than 

colder  still. 

On  tho  c( 

degrees  win 

wanner  stil 

leaving  the  i 

On  the  CI 

(legieos  will 

wiirincr  stil 

leaving  tliet 

Mr.  Willi 

snys,  '•  bo  ki 

Tlie  plate  si 

tube  will  noi 

the  instrumt 

30°,  should  I 

in  tlie  water 

three  cross-l 

Fix  one  iiist 

out  of  the  w 

cliions,  und( 

"  Let  the 

in  the  de  id 

"Put  the 

case  of  accid 

Aiiuut  the 

reciioii,  whi( 

to  the  strenn 

direction  of  I 

In  the  wi 

proceed  froii 

Cape   Ilatti 

being  aided 

the  force  of 

p;is.st'S  along 

fiistwai'd  as 

of  wind. 

During  tl 
tho  current 
llein^  thus 
isnreatly  di 
been,  in  pai 
Nantucket 
of  (Jeorgia  a 
the  current 
the  lutti-r  pi 
With  woi 
These  re 
stream.    Tl 
weather,  tli 
My  an  in; 
Williams,   I 
Truxton  has 
Hiitteras,  a 
nil  hour.     T 
?anio :  that 
the  warmest 
(."apt.  Liv 


•The  hank, 

Scolia,  il('t'|)iMi 
IV"  liiillk  lietw 
sli()aliii}.';;rii(lii 
bleslones  Oi 
or  160  fathom* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


»87 


itti  governed  entirely  hy  the  fact  that  it  comos  from  the  Tropical  roRion",  where  the 
meftii  teriiperoturu  is  H'-i°,  and  it  requires  a  loiig  time  before  so  large  a  body  of  wuter  Iobhs 
orcliiinges  its  temperature  in  a  very  erenr  decree. 

At  the  edge  of  the  Great  'icink  of  Newfuundiand,  the  water  has  been  found  5  degrees 
coldor  than  llio  derp  ocean  to  the  t'ltittward.  The  hi^liost  part  of  tlie  banlc  is  10  degrees 
colder  Htill,  or  15  degrees  colder  than  the  ocean  eastward. 

On  tlio  coast  of  New  England,  near  Cape  Cod,*  the  water  out  of  8oundings  is  8  nr  10 
degrees  warmer  (lian  in  aiiuiidinzs,  in  tlie  winter;  and  in  the  stream  it  is  about  8  degrees 
wiirnier  still,  ra  that,  in  coming  from  tlie  eastward,  a  full  ol  8  degrees  will  indicate  your 
loiiving  the  stream,  and  a  farther  tall  of  8  degrees  will  indicate  your  being  on  soundings. 

On  the  coast  from  Capo  Ilenlopen  to  Cape  Henry,  the  water  out  of  sovindings  is  five 
degrees  warmer  than  in  soundings  in  the  winter  ;  and  in  the  stream  about  5  degrees 
^Vl^•anT  still;  so  that,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  a  fall  of  5  degrees  will  indicate  yotir 
leiiviiig  tlie  stream,  and  a  farther  fall  of  5  degrees  will  give  notice  of  soundings. 

Mr.  Williams  recommends  to  seamen  to  tiil»e  thici'  tliermomctrrs.  "  Lei  them,"  he 
jnys,  '■  bo  kept  in  one  place  some  days  previous  to  sailing,  in  order  to  try  theirunilormity. 
TJie  plate  should  bo  made  of  ivory  or  metal,  for  wond  will  swell  at  sea;  and  as  the  ghigs 
tube  will  not  yield,  it  is  from  this  reason  very  liiilile  to  break  :  bell  metal  is  the  best.  Let 
th<3  instrument  be  fixed  in  a  s(piare  metal  box.  llie  bottom  of  which,  as  hii;h  as  the  mark 
3U°,  should  be  water  tight;  so  that,  in  examining  the  degree  of  heat,  the  ball  may  be  kept 
in  tlio  water;  the  remainditr  of  the  length  should  be  open  in  the  front,  with  only  two  or 
three  cross-bars  to  ward  off  any  accidental  blow,  like  the  thermometer  used  by  brewers. 
Imx  one  instrument  m  some  part  of  the  ship,  in  the  tihade,  and  in  open  air.  but  as  much 
out  of  the  wind,  and  in  as  dry  a  place  as  possible.  The  after  part  of  one  of  the  after  staii- 
cliioris,  under  the  quarter  rail,  may  answer,  if  no  better  place  can  be  found. 

"  Let  the  second  instrument  bo  neatly  sluni;,  with  a  sufficiency  of  line  to  allow  it  to  tow 
in  the  de  »d  water  of  the  wake. 

"  I'ut  the  other  away  safely,  to  be  ready  to  supply  the  place  of  either  of  the  others  ia 
case  of  accident." 

About  the  edges  of  the  stream  there  is  generally  a  current  running  in  a  contrary  di- 
rection, which  is  accelerated  by  the  wind,  in  |)roportion  to  its  strength,  blowing  contrary 
to  the  stream,  and  retarded,  or  perhaps  altogether  obstructed,  by  the  wind  blowing  in  the 
direction  of  the  stream.     In  the  latter  case,  the  limits  of  the  stream  will  be  extended. 

In  the  winter,  heavy  and  continued  gales  very  frequently  prevail,  which  commonly 
proceed  from  between  the  north  and  west,  across  the  course  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  from 
Ciipe  Ilatteras  utitil  past  (ieorge's  Bank,  and  bend  its  direction  more  to  the  eastwaid ; 
being  aided  at  the  same  time  by  the  dischiirge  of  the  great  bays  and  rivers,  increased  by 
the  force  of  the  wind  blowing  down  upon  tliiin.  and  the  constant  snjiply  of  stream  that 
p;is.ses  along  the  coast  of  the  Caroliiias,  the  whole  jirodiires  so  strong  a  current  to  the 
eiistwiird  as  to  render  it  impossible  fur  a  ship  to  approach  the  coast  until  there  is  a  change 
of  wind. 

Daring  the  prevalence  of  a  southerly  or  nouth-easterly  wind,  it  ha.M  been  found  that 
the  current  is  forced  close  to  the  shore.  Tliis  proves  the  gulf  is  influenced  by  winds, — 
Being  thus  pent  in  between  the  wind  and  the  slioal  grounds  near  the  shore,  the  breadth 
is^reiitly  diminished,  and  the  velocity  proportionally  increased.  ThiH  circumstance  hi:9 
been,  in  particular,  observed  from  about  the  longitude  of  Hlock  Island,  along  the  edges  of 
Nnntucket  Shoal,  thenc^e  beyond  (leorge's  Bank  ;  it  has  the  same  effect  along  the  coast 
of  (Jeorgia  and  part  of  South  Carolina.  In  tlie  first  | dace,  the  southerly  winds  forced 
tlic  current  to  the  edge  of  the  soundings,  where  it  then  ran  from  14  to  2  knots;  and,  in 
the  liitti-r  place,  that  the  easterly  wind  forced  the  current  upon  soundings. 

With  west  and  N.  VV.  winds,  the  stream  wuulil  be  removed  some  leagues  farther  oflT. 

These  remarks  are  aiifficient  to  show  the  uncertainty  ottlie  boundaries  or  edges  of  the 
stream.  These  eddies  on  the  inner  edge  are  inconsiderable  ;  but  on  the  outer  one,  in  line 
weallier,  they  are  siroiig,  and  rif  considerable  extent. 

My  III!  ingenious  work,  ciitilled  "  'riicrmoiiieiiical  Navigation,"  written  by  Mr.  John 
Williams,  and  published  at  Philadidphia,  in  1701),  we  are  informed  that  Commodore 
Truxton  has  often  ascertained  the  velocity  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  to  the  northward  of  Cape 
Hiilteriis,  and  found  it  to  bo  seldom  less  than  one  knot,  and  never  more  than  two  knots, 
an  liiMir.  The  temperature  of  the  air  and  water  without  the  stream  was  generally  the 
?nmo ;  that  is,  the  diderence  seldom  exceeded  2  or  3  degrees;  the  air  being  sometimes 
the  warmest,  at  other  times  the  water. 

()a|)t.   Living-iton  says,  "  it  set  me  off  Cape   Hatteras,  one  degree  and  eight  miles, 


•  Tbi"  Iiniik.  from  Oiipe  Cod,  ex'ends  olino'^t  as  far  as  ('ai>e  SaMe,  wliere  it  joins  ihe  linnks  of  Nnra 
Pcolia,  ili>i'|ionifi{r  i,'n  dually  Iroiri  'JO to. 'id or 'ir)  liillioiiis,  wliicli  ile|)tli  lliiTe  is  in  laliliide  13°.  In  orossins; 
t'leliank  lictwciii  hit  Ino  II'  iind  lut  lit',  tlie  liolloin  is  very  reniarkalile.  On  the  outside  il  is  (inesaiui, 
slioalai!;  gradually  lor  several  ji-nf-'ues.  On  tlie  middle  of  Ihe  hank,  it  is  coarse  sand  or  shin«le  with  peb- 
ble stones  Oa  ihe  iasiJe  it  is  muddy,  with  pieces  of  slielU,  and  deepens  suddenly  from  45  or  48  to  130 
orlGOfaCbums. 


39* 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 


by  BidflreHl  nnd  iolnr  obseivntioM.  to  the  norrJiwnrd.  in  16  hourn.  by  dPHtl  reckoning ;  nni 
Capt.  J.  Colttiif, of  Philtidelphin.  inA<i nifd  nio  thiit  it  Hut  occnsioniilly  witli  grouter  velciiiy." 
AJr.  Williiim8oi)Berve»,  •' In  tlio  streiim  tho   wiiter  is  much  wiirnier  fJinn  the  itir ;  in- 
dMd,  I  have  known  it  10  dej!r«"i!9  wninier ;  but  bo  hodu  iia  you  >{of  witliin  tho  siivmn, 
(that  ia.  between  it  nnd  tho  const,)  tho  wiilor  bocomes  colder  timn  tho  iiir  ;  und  the  more 
as  you  get  on  soundingH  mid  iipproiiLh  tho  shore,*     If  mnriners,  who  have  not  the  op. 
portunity  of  deierniining  iheir  longitude  by  rclcstiid  oliHorvations,  will  only  carry  with  Ihim 
a  good  thermometer,  nnd  try  the  tenipeniture  of  the  water,  nnd  conipiiro  it  with  llmt  of 
the  (lir  every  two  hours,  they  mny  idways  know  when  they  come  into  or  go  out  of  ilm 
Gulf  Stream.     Indeed,  I  hnve  iilwiiys  mnde  n  pruclico,   when  lit  sen,   of  comparing  the 
temperature  of  the  air  nnd  water  daily:  and  often  very  frequently  during  the  day  through, 
out  my  voyage:  whereby    1   immediately  discovered  niiy  thing  of  ii  current  that  way  go. 
ing,  nnd  afterwards  found   its  Hlreiigth  and  direction  by  observations  for  the  latitude  nnd 
longitude.     It  is  of  the  utmost  consequence,  in  makinu  n  passage  to  and  from  Kurope.  to 
be  ncquainted  with  this  (julfStream;  as  by  keejiing  it  when  bound  eastward,  you  shorien 
your  voyage,  nnd  by  avoiding  it  when  returning  to  the  westward,  you  facilitate  it  incnn- 
ceivablj  ;  so  much  so,  tiiat  1  have  frequently,  when  bound  from   Kurope  to   Anierirn, 
spoken  European  sljips,  unacquainted  with  the  .>*treiigtli  nnd  extent  of  it,  off  the  banks  of 
Newfoundlniid,  and  been  in  port  a  very  considerable  time  befoie  them,  by  kee|)ing  out  of 
the  stienm,  whereas  they  lengthened  their  passage  by  keeping  in  it.     The  general couise 
of  the  Uulf  Stream  is  marked  on  the  chart    published   by  K.  Sc  (J.  W.  Blunt,  in  lH47; 
and  I  would  advise  those  who  make  the  northern  passage  from  Kurope,  never  to  coma 
nearer  the  inner  line  of  it.  by  choice,  than  10  or  13  leagues;  and  then  the  piobability  wi|| 
be,  that  their  passage  will  be  assisted  by  the  help  of  a  counter  current  which  often  runs 
within  it.     In  coming  off  n  voyage  from  the  southward,  be  sure  to  steer  N.  W.  when  ap. 
proaching  the  stream,  if  the  wind  will  permit  you  ;  and  continue  that  coutse  till  you  are 
within  it.  wliich  may  be  easily  known  by  the  temjierature  of  the  water,  as  before  men- 
tioned.    I  hnve  always  considered  it  of  the  utmost  consequence,  when  bound  in,  to  ciosj 
the  stream  as  speeddy  as  possible,  lest  I  should  bo  visited  by  calms  or  adverse  winds,  nnd 
by  these  means  drove  far  out  of  my  way,  which  would  prolong  the  voyage  considerably, 
especially  in  the  winter  season. 

The  course  of  shq)8  bound  from  Europe  to  the  ports  of  the  United  States  is  controlled, 
in  n  grent  degree,  by  the  operation  of  the  Florida  Stream.  Little,  therefore,  requires  to 
be  added  to  the  subject  here.  Those  bound  to  the  northern  nnd  middle  ports,  when 
pnesing  the  shoal  grounds  on  (leorge's  Hank,  should  take  care  to  pass  between  these 
shonls  and  the  stream.  Also,  when  passing  the  Nantucket  Shoali),  to  keep  between  them 
and  the  stream. 

Ships  crossing  tho  strenm,  when  bound  to  tlie  westward,  must  get  over  as  quickly  as 
possible  ;  or  it  is  clear  that  they  will  be  cnrried  far  out  of  their  course. 

It  has  been  remarked  that  "ships  from  sea.  approaching  any  part  of  the  Amerirnn 
coast  between  Long  Island  nnd  Cape  Hatterns,  if  in  doubt  about  their  reckoning,  shoald 
take  notice  of  what  is  commonly  called  the  gulf- weed,"  which  is  in  grentei  plenty,  and  in 
larger  clusters,  to  the  eastward  of  the  (Julf  Stream  than  in  it,  where  the  sprigs  are  hut 
small  and  few.  Within  the  stream  there  is  no  weed,  unless  in  rare  instances,  and  there 
the  color  of  the  water  chansies  to  n  still  darker  and  muddy  color. 

The  outer  edge  of  the  bank  off  this  part  of  the  coast  appears  to  bo  very  steep;  for  it 
has  been  frequently  found  that,  while  the  lead  has  been  kept  going,  there  have  been  luund 
43  fathoms,  soon  alter  33,  and  n  mile  nearer  the  shore  only  25  or  20  fathoms;  from  these 
depths  the  shoaling  to  the  shore  varies  in  different  directions. 

Sir  Charles  Blagden,  M.  D.  and  F.  R.  S.,  in  tlie  transactions  of  tho  Philosophical 
Society,  says,  "  During  a  voyage  to  America,  in  the  spring  of  the  yenr  1776,  I  used  fro- 
quendy  to  examine  the  heat  of  sea  water  newly  drawn,  in  order  to  compare  it  with  that 
of  the  air.     We  made  our  pAssage  fur  to  the  southward.     In  this  situation,  the  greatest 


•  Bythe  journals  of  Capt  W.  Billings,  of  Philadelphia,  i*  appearx  that  in  .1 
last  of  Amerifa  w.i8  atlhetein|)erH!iireofrilo.  and  in  the  fiiiil  f'ireHiii  iit  77 
ims,  It  ap|)ear8  that  in  November,  17&II,  the  water  on  the  coasl  \va.s  17",  and 


coast 
bams 
viz 


appears  that  in  Tune,  1791 .  the  water  on  the 

..I.     -;•_ nTi  TJ..    .1 ^.    HA  ^       I      II'   I 


°.    By  these 01  Mr  J  \Vi|. 
lid  in  tho  Gulf  iStream  at  'iW^ 


1791,  June,  Coast    01° 
Stream  77 


17S9,  Nov.,  Coast    "170 
Sirtam  7U 


DifTereiice  liclwt'cn  )  Coast    14° 
JuiieuadMov.      )  Stream    7 


Stream  warmer  IR  Stream  warmer  23 

Theditrerenceiil  heat  is  tlierefireprealtr  in  winter  than  in  summer. 

Captain  A.  Liviiifj»t.)asay>,  '  On  my  voyuife  Iroiii  I'liil;idel|iliia  tu  Kingston,  Jamaica, October,  1&17, 1 
parliciihirly  atteiiileU  lotlii-  tlit'rm>inieler  (-"lose  oil'  the  iiiuuili  ol  the  Deluuaie,  in  about  Itj  lalh(>Ill^,  it 
utood  at  tjijo;  on  lilt  inner edfie  ot  tlif  Ciull  Stream  it  ro>e  p-elty  rapidly  to  litio,  and  in  ilie  coiiise  nl  im 
houi  to  7li°  ;  nexi  mnming  7^'^.  which  heat  continued  till  we  were  to  the  soiitliwiird  ol  lieriiiuda,  wlniice 
itgradiiallv  increased  unul  between  Cuba  and  St.  Duiniiifjo,  and  ul  Juuiuicu  it  was  b2<^,  which  appears  to 
me  to  be  the  lucan  temperature  ot  the  sea  water  about  Jamaica. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•39 


■koninR ;  rind 

IT  vt<l(ic'iiy." 

ihtuiir ;  in- 

tlio  Bliemn, 

11(1  the  more 

not  till)  op. 

■ry  with  thm 

Willi  tlint  of 

o   out  of  tllH 

rn  paring  the 

Itiy  Ihroiiyh- 

tlmt  wny  no. 

Iiitilude  1111(1 

Kuropn.  to 

you  slioiipn 

tiife  it  iiicdn. 

ro   AniPi-icn, 

tlie  biinkH  of 

i-epinj;  out  of 

Btienil  course 

int,  in  1H47; 

Bvpr  to  come 

•obiibiliiy  will 

•li  often  runs 

V.  when  up. 

B  till  you  lire 

hefoie  nicn- 

(I  in.  to  CI 088 

o  wiiKJs,  niiii 

conaidei'ubly, 

18  controlled, 
\  ref|uir<'9  to 
ports,  when 
twcpn  these 
otween  them 

as  quickly  as 

lio  Amerirnn 
i>ning.  should 
ileiity,  iiikI  in 
prigs  lire  hut 
B8,  and  there 

steep ;  for  it 
e  been  found 
;  from  the!>e 

Philosophical 

!,  I  used  fro- 

9  it  with  that 

the  greutest 


le  water  on  the 
•oi  Mr  J  \Vi|. 
ijlreain  at  TU'^ 

ist    14° 
iom    7 


Ictiibi-r,  1SI7, 1 
10  lulii(iiii>,  it 
e  itMiise  (il  au 
iiiudii,  wliiiiee 
ili-li  ujtpeurs  to 


litiiid  of  the  water,  which  I  observed,  wns  such  as  raised  the  quicksilver  in  Fahrenheit's 
thermometer  to  774°.  This  happened  twice;  the  first  time  on  the  10th  of  April,  in  Int. 
21°  10'  N>.  and  loriK',  by  reckoning,  5'i°  W.,  and  the  second  time,  three  diiysdfterwatdi, 
io  liit>  32°  7'.  and  long.  56° ;  but  in  general,  the  heat  of  the  sea,  near  the  tropic  of  Can- 
cer, about  the  middle  of  April,  was  from  76°  to  77°. 

•'Tho  ren  lozvous  appointed  for  tlie  fleet  being  off  Cape  Fear,  our  course  on  approach- 
ing the  American  coast,  became  norlh-westwiird.  On  the  l.*3d  of  April,  the  lieut  of  the 
lea  was  74°,  our  latitude,  at  noon,  28°  7  N.  Next  day  the  heat  was  only  71°  ;  we  were 
then  in  latitude  2!)''  1*2';  the  heat  of  the  water,  therefore,  was  now  Inssening  very  fast, 
in  proportion  to  the  change  of  latitude.  Tho  35th,  our  latitude  was  31°  3';  but  though 
wo  had  thus  gone  almost  2°  farther  to  the  northward,  the  heat  of  the  sea  was  this  day 
increased,  it  being  73°  in  the  morning,  and  72^°  in  tlie  evening.  Next  day,  36tli  of 
April,  at  half  past  8  in  the  morning.  I  again  plunged  the  thermometer  into  sea  water,  and 
wiiH  greatly  surprised  to  see  the  quicksilver  rise  to  78°,  liigher  than  I  had  ever  observed 
it  oven  within  the  tropic.  As  the  differonco  was  too  great  to  be  imputed  to  any  accidental 
vitriatiun,  I  immediately  conceived  that  wo  must  have  come  into  the  (iulf  Stream,  the 
water  of  which  still  retained  great  part  of  the  heat  that  it  had  acquired  in  the  torrid 
zone.  This  idea  was  confirmed  by  the  subsequent  regular  and  quick  diminution  of  th? 
heat;  the  ship's  run  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour  had  lessened  it  3°,  the  thermometer,  at 
three-quarters  after  8,  being  raised  by  sea  water,  fresh  drawn,  only  to  76°;  by  0,  ti;c 
heat  Vi'us  reduced  to  73°;  and  in  a  quarter  of  an  hour  more,  to  71°  nearly:  all  this  time 
the  wind  blew  fresh,  and  we  were  going  seven  knots  an  liour  on  a  nortli-western  course. 
The  water  now  began  to  lose  the  fine  transparent  blue  color  of  the  ocean,  and  to  assume 
something  of  a  greenish  olive  tinge,  a  well  known  indication  of  soundings.  Accordingly, 
between  4  and  5  in  the  afternoon,  ground  was  struck  with  the  lead,  at  the  depth  of  80 
fiilhoms  the  heat  of  the  sea  being  then  reduced  to  09°.  In  the  course  of  the  following 
night  and  next  day,  as  we  came  into  shallower  water,  and  nearer  the  land,  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  sea  gradually  fell  to  65°,  which  was  nearly  that  oft!  o  air  at  the  time. 

"  Unfortunately,  bad  weather  on  the  26th  prevented  us  from  taking  an  observation  of  the 
eun;  but  on  the  37th,  though  it  was  then  cloudy  at  noon,  we  calculated  the  latitude  frotn 
two  altitudes,  and  found  it  to  be  33°  26  N.  The  difference  of  this  latitude  from  that  which 
wo  had  observed  on  the  25tli,  being  2°  23',  was  so  much  greater  than  could  be  deduced 
from  the  ship's  run,  marked  in  the  log  book,  as  to  convince  the  seamen  that  we  had  been 
set  many  miles  to  the  northward  by  the  current. 

"On  the  35th,  at  noon,  the  longitude  by  our  reckoning'  was  74°  W.,  and  I  believe  the 
computation  to  have  been  pretty  just;  but  the  soundings,  together  with  the  latitude,  will 
determine  the  spot  where  these  observations  were  made,  better  than  any  reckoning  from 
tlio  eastward.  The  ship's  run  on  tho  26lh,  from  9  in  the  forenoon  to  4  in  the  afternoon, 
WHS  about  10  leagues  on  a  N.  W.  by  N.  course;  soon  afterwards  we  hove  to  in  order  to 
sound,  and  finding  bottom,  wo  went  very  slowly  all  night,  till  noon  the  next  day. 

"From  these  observations  I  think  it  may  bo  concluded  tiint  the  Gulf  Stream,  ohoul  the 
33d  degree  of  north  latitude,  and  the  76tli  degree  of  longitude  west  of  Greenwich,  is,  in 
the  month  of  April,  at  least  6  degrees  hotter  than  the  water  of  the  sea  through  which  it 
runs.  As  the  lieat  of  the  sea  water  evidently  began  to  increase  in  the  evening  of  the 
25th,  and  as  the  observations  show  that  we  were  getting  out  of  the  current  when  1  first 
tried  the  heat  in  the  morning  of  the  26th,  it  is  most  probable  that  the  ships's  run  during  the 
night  is  nearly  the  breadth  of  the  stream,  measured  obliquely  across;  that  as  it  blow  a 
fresh  breeze,  could  not  be  less  than  35  leagues  in  15  hours,  tlte  distance  of  time  be- 
tween the  two  observations  of  the  heat,  and  lience  tho  breadth  of  the  stream  may  be 
estimated  at  20  longues.  The  breadth  of  the  Gulf  of  Florida,  which  evidently  bounds 
the  stream  of  its  origin,  appears  by  the  charts  to  be  2  or  3  miles  less  than  this,  excluding 
the  rocks  and  sand-banks  which  surround  the  Bahama  Islands,  and  the  shallow  water 
that  extends  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the  Const  of  Florida ;  and  the  correspond- 
ence of  these  measures  is  very  remarkable,  since  the  stream,  from  well  known  principles 
of  hydraulics,  must  gradually  become  wider  as  it  gets  to  a  greater  distance  from  tlio  clian- 
nel  by  which  it  issues. 

"If  the  heat  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  were  known,  many  curious  calculations  might  be 
formed  by  comparing  it  with  that  of  the  current.  The  mean  heat  of  .Spanish  Town  and 
Kiiij;stonT  in  Jamaica,  seems  not  to  exceed  81°* ;  that  of  St.  Domingo,  on  the  sea  coast, 
may  be  estimated  at  the  same,  from  Mons.  Godin's  observations  ;f  but  as  tlio  coast  of  the 

*  History  of  Jinii!ii(!a.  London,  1754,  vol.  ill.  pnge  652,  fi53.  The  difToront  observations  of  the  bent 
leeordcd  in  tlint  work,  dii  nut  agree  together,  bat  those  adopted  here  are  taken  from  thut  actiesi  which 
appeiired  1 1  ine  most  correct. 

t  Moiisier  Godin's  expeiiinents  apnn  the  pendulum  were  made  nt  tlie  petit  grove.  They  continacd 
fruin  the  "^Ith  of  August  to  the  4th  of  Sopieaiher,  and  the  nvenif;>'  beat  during  that  time  was  such  ns  is 
indicati'd  by  'J5"  of  M.  do  Rcaiinier'rt  thorinometer,  (sc-e  Mem.  Aciid.  Science,  1735,  ii.  .5,  7.)  According 
to  M.  do  Luc's  calculation,  (see  ModUicutiuns  dc  rAtniosphure,  vol.  i.  p.  378.)  the  30th  degree  of  Reau- 


mmm 


Wi^W^""™""' 


40» 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

continent,  which  bounds  the  gulf  to  the  westwnrd  and  southward,  is  probably  warmer, 
porhaps  a  degree  or  two  may  be  allowed  for  the  mean  temperature  of  the  clin  ate  over 
the  whole  buy ;  let  it  be  stated  at  82  or  83  degrees.  Now  there  seems  to  be  great  proba- 
bility in  the  supposition  that  the  sea,  at  a  certain  comparatively  small  distance  below  its 
surface,  agrees  in  heat  pretty  nearly  with  the  average  temperature  of  the  air,  during  (he 
whole  year,  in  that  part;  and  hence  it  may  be  conjectured  that  the  greatest  heat  of  the 
water,  as  it  issues  out  of  the  bay  to  form  the  stream,  is  about  82  degrees,*  the  small  va- 
riation of  temperature  on  the  surface  not  being  sufflcient  to  .iflfect  materially  that  of  the 
general  mass.  At  the  tropic  of  Cancer,  I  found  the  heat  to  be  77°  ;  the  stream,  there- 
fore, in  its  whole  course  from  the  Gulf  of  Floridn,  may  be  supposed  to  have  been  con- 
stantly running  through  water  from  4  to  6  degrees  colder  than  itself,  and  yet  it  had  lost 
only  4°  of  heat,  though  the  surrounding  water,  where  I  obseived  it,  was  10°  below  the 
pupposed  original  temperature  of  the  watir  which  forms  the  current.  From  this  small 
diminution  of  the  heal,  in  a  distance  of  probably  300  miles,  some  idea  may  be  acquired  of 
the  vast  body  of  fluid  which  sets  out  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  of  the  great  velocity  of 
its  motion.  Numerous  observations  of  the  temperature  of  this  stream,  in  every  part  of  it, 
and  at  different  seasons  of  the  jbar,  compared  with  the  heat  of  the  water  in  the  eurround- 
ing  seas,  both  within  and  without  the  tropic,  would,  I  apprehend,  be  the  best  meaus  of 
ascertniiiing  its  nature,  and  deiermining  every  material  circumstance  of  its  movement, 
especiiilly  if  ^he  effect  of  the  current,  in  pushing  ships  to  the  northward,  is  carefully  at- 
tended to.  at  the  same  time  with  the  obseivations  upon  its  heal." 

On  the  2;  h  September,  17/7,  as  the  ships  which  had  transported  Sir  William  Howe's 
army  up  Chesapeake  Bay  were  returning  towards  the  Delaware,  with  the  sick  and  stores, 
they  were  overtaken,  between  Cape  Charles  and  Cape  Henlopen,  by  i  violent  gale  of 
wind,  which,  after  some  variation,  fixed  ultimately  at  N.  N.  E.,  and  continued  five  days 
without  intermission.  It  blew  so  hard  that  they  were  constantly  losing  ground,  and  driven 
to  the  south  ivard.  We  also  purposely  made  some  easting,  to  keep  clear  of  the  danger- 
ous sho,  'i  which  lie  off  Cape  Hatteras. 

O"  the  28th,  at  noon,  our  latitude  was  3C°  40'  N.,  and  the  heat  of  the  sea,  all  day, 
Goiiut  65°.  On  the  29th  our  lat.'itude  was  36°  2'.  We  had.  therefore,  in  the  course  of 
thi'se  24  hours,  been  driven  by  the  wind  38  nautical  miles  to  the  southward.  The  tem- 
perature of  the  sea  continued  nearly  at  65°.  Next  day,  the  30th,  our  latitude,  at  noon, 
was  35°  44",  only  18  miles  farther  to  the  southward,  though  in  the  opinion  o'tlie  seamen 
aboard,  as  well  as  my  own,  it  hud  blown  at  least  as  haid  on  this  as  on  any  of  the  preced- 
ing days,  and  we  had  not  been  able  to  carry  more  sail ;  consequently  it  may  bo  concluded 
that  soino  current  had  set  the  ship  20  miles  to  the  northward.  To  know  whetlier  this 
WiiB  tiiu  Gulf  Stream,  let  us  consult  the  thermometer.  At  half  past  nine  in  llio  forenoon 
of  this  day.  the  heat  of  the  water  vv;is  76°,  no  less  than  11°  above  the  femperntiire  of  the 
sea,  before  we  came  into  the  current. 

Towards  evening  the  wind  fell,  and  we  stood  N.  W.  by  N.,  close  hauled.  As  the  sea 
still  ran  very  high,  and  the  ship  scarcely  went  above  two  knots  an  hour,  we  did  not  uiiike 
less  tliiin  three  points  of  leeway  on  this  tack.  The  course  we  made  good,  therefore,  was 
W.  N.  W.,  which  on  the  .istnnie  run  by  noon  next  day,  gave  us  atiout  16  miles  of  north- 
ing; but  that  day,  the  firsr  of  October,  our  Intilude  was  36°  22'.  38  miles  further  to  the 
north  tliiin  we  hud  been  the  day  before;  the  difference,  22  miles,  must  be  attributed  to 
the  (julf  Stream.  This,  however,  is  only  part  of  the  effect  which  the  current  would  have 
produced  upon  the  ship,  if  we  had  continued  in  it  the  whole  24  hours;  for  tliiiuf;li  we 
were  still  in  the  stream  at  five  in  the  ufiernoon  of  t;:e  30tli,  as  appeared  by  the  heat  of  the 
water,  l>uing  then  above  75°,  and  iit  eight  in  tho  evening  the  heat  being  still  74".  yet  by 
seven  tl.rf  next  morning  vve  had  n'rliiiiily  got  clear  oi' it,  the  heiitof  tho  sea  being  then  re- 
duced to  '•< '  former  standard  of  (!.')'.  (hi  this  occasion,  therefore,  we  did  not  cross  tho 
strenin.  bur,  having  fallen  in  with  it  obfujuely  on  the  western  .side,  we  pushed  out  again 
on  the  fame  side,  as  soon  as  the  gule  abated. 

These  observations  having  been  miide  3  '  to  the  northward  of  my  former  ones,  it  ia  ru- 
rious  to  ()l)rterve  that  the  heat  of  tiie  <«ulf  Siieain  was  2°  less.  The  seasons  of  the  year, 
indeed,  were  very  dili'erent ;  but,  perliiij)8  under  s-udi  circiioistanceH,  that  their  elfecfs 
weie  nearly  balanced.  In  the  hiiiei  observations,  .lie  meridian  iiltitudc  of  the  sun  was 
less,  but  then  a  hot  summer  preceded  them;  whereas  in  the  former,  though  the  sun's 


mer'*  Tlifr  llu'rmoinctor  nn'werf  tn  nlidiit  Ibe  8.5th  of  Fiihreiih*iil^;  but  tbr  avorntrr'  b<'iit  in  Jiiinnicn, 
duniitr  till'  iiiontli-'  ol  Aumist  mid  Scplciiilier,  is  iil-o  &'t";  licnti'  wt?  imiy  coiifliliidc!  llmt  the  iiioiiii  In  iit  lor 
the  ttlicil''  vcio  i.s  in  iirly  llic  siunc  on  thi^  s^!nccu^ts  ol  liolh  islamls. 

"The  lowr..it  ciili  iiliitiuu  lit  llui  imsiii  t(n:i|it'nitiirc  (it  the  L'lill'is  preferrrj  on  thi.<  <ii-.  usiiii  li.ciuisr  of 
the  roii-iunl  iiiliiix  (il  iicsv  water  iVniii  the  /  liuiifw  Oeeuii.  iirodnceil  |i\  rlir  trmic  wiik.'s,  vvhieh  wiiier, 
not  ii  iviiii:  lieen  near  iiii\  liiiid.  Uiii-l.  I  think  lie  r^.  nsili|\  ccildcr  thiin  th^:  »hi(li  Im-  n-iiiitineil  ..^iiiiii>  time 
ciicldsi'd  ill  the  liav.  On  tliis  fiilijeei,  ihe  oh-ervmidiis  made  liy  Ale„  .mjer  lliilrv  ni|>lo,  ['',si\..  r>  lalivc^  u> 
llie  hi'at  ul'  Ujf  sea,  ueur  llio  couft  ol  <>uiuea,  ou^ht  to  be  coiisulteu. — See  I'lul.  Truiis.  \oi.  Uviii.  p. 
394,  &o. 


power  was  b< 
Iflting  upon  tl 
tnde,  which  i 
biy  to  lose  its 
tinues  to  lose 
some  variatio 
ferent  season 

The  prece 
Stream  on  m 
Bfter  we  had 
to  handle  a  tl 
intelligent  mi 
day  of  the  gi 
degree  of  w( 
who  allege  tl 
a  distance  of 
lation  I  have 
tare  of  the  ( 
the  heat  that 
perceived  by 
December. 

An  opinioi 
about  the  Gu 
increased  by 
producing  an 
vatioDs. 

Perhaps  d 
than  the  sun 
by  the  ther 
ranked  amoi 
known  to  be 

In  the  mei 
to  prove  that 
the  use  of  tl 
viaces  of  Nc 
discover  ven 
heat;  and  a 
how  long  he 
lor  the  numl 
velocity  of  tl 
want  of  som 
uncertainty  i 
tho  streHiu,  ( 
ascertain  its 
other  eircun 
tho  current; 
ly  be  poiniei 
the  lest'  hea 
observation, 
it  nijiy  peril 
of  Mexico,  1 
in  proportior 
III  winter  I 
Buniiner,  bu 
greiittr;  am 
little  of  its  ( 
perature,  so 
ship  entered 
Vessels  n 
calcnlritions 
precautions 
naliinilly  sul 
the  stream, 
morning  anc 
HCtjuainted  v 
VHter,  liiivo 
westward,  ii 


BLQNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PIJ^OT. 


*41 


power  was  become  very  grent,  yet  the  winter  has  been  passed  but  a  short  time.  Calcu- 
lating upon  this  proportion,  we  may  be  led  to  suspect,  that  about  the  27th  degree  of  lati- 
tude, which  is  as  soon  us  the  stream  has  got  clear  of  the  Gulf  of  Florida,  it  begins  sensi- 
bly to  lose  its  heat  from  82°,  the  supposed  temperature  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  con- 
tinues to  lose  it  at  the  rate  of  about  2°  of  Fahrenheit's  scale  to  every  3°  of  latitude,  with 
Bome  variation,  probably,  as  the  surrounding  sea  and  the  air  are  warmer  or  colder  at  dif- 
ferent seasons  of  the  year. 

The  preceding  facts  had  made  me  very  desirous  of  observing  the  heat  of  the  Gulf 
Stream  on  my  passiige  homeward,  but  a  violent  gale  of  wind,  which  came  on  two  days 
after  we  had  sailed  from  Sandy  Hook,  disabled  every  person  ou  board,  who  knew  how 
tc  handle  a  thermometer,  from  keeping  the  deck.  The  master  of  the  ship,  however,  an 
intelligent  man,  to  whom  I  had  communicated  my  view.  ired  me,  thatou  the  second 
(jay  of  the  gale,  the  water  felt  to  him  remarkably  warm;  we  were  then  near  the  70th 
degree  of  west  longitude.  This  agrees  very  well  with  the  common  remark  of  seamen, 
who  allege  that  they  are  frequently  sensible  of  the  Gulf  Stream  off  Nantucket  Shoals, 
a  distance  of  more  than  1000  miles  from  the  Gulf  of  Florida.  According  to  the  calcu- 
lation I  have  before  aropted,  of  the  loss  of  2°  of  heat  of  every  3°  of  latitude,  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  Gulf  St;  earn  here  would  be  nearly  73°,  the  ditference  of  which  from  59°, 
the  heat  that  I  obsorvod  in  the  sea  water,  both  before  and  after  the  gale,  might  easily  be 
perceived  by  the  master  of  the  vessel.  This  was  in  the  winter  season,  at  the  end  of 
December. 

An  opinion  prevails  among  seamen,  that  there  is  something  peculiar  in  the  weather 
about  the  Gulf  Stream.  As  far  as  I  could  judge,  the  heat  of  the  air  was  considerably 
increased  by  it,  as  might  be  expected,  but  whether  to  a  degree  or  extent  sufficir  "*  for 
producing  any  material  changes  in  the  atmosphere,  must  be  determined  by  future  oi  .:er- 
vatioDS. 

Perhaps  other  currents  may  be  found,  which  issuing  from  places  warmer  or  colder 
than  the  surrounding  sea,  differ  from  it  ir  their  temperature  so  much  as  to  be  discovered 
by  the  thermometer.  Should  there  be  many  such,  this  instrument  will  come  to  be 
ranked  amongst  the  most  valuable  at  sea,  as  tlio  difficulty  of  ascertaining  currents  is  well 
known  to  be  one  of  the  greatest  defects  in  the  present  nit  of  navigation. 

In  the  mean  lime,  I  hope  the  observations  which  have  been  here  related  are  sufficient 
to  prove  that  in  crossing  the  Gulf  Stream,  very  essential  advantages  may  be  derived  from 
the  use  of  the  thermometer;  for  if  a  muster  of  a  ship,  bound  to  any  of  the  southern  pro- 
vinces of  North  America  will  be  careful  to  try  the  heat  of  the  sea  frequently,  he  must 
discover  very  accurately  his  entrance  into  the  Gulf  Stream  by  the  sudden  increase  of  the 
heat;  nnd  a  continuance  of  the  same  experiments  will  show  him,  with  equal  exactness, 
liow  long  ho  remains  in  it.  Hence  ho  will  always  be  able  to  make  a  proper  allowance 
I'or  the  nuniljer  of  miles  a  ship  is  set  to  the  northward,  by  niulliplying  the  time  into  the 
veldcity  of  tlio  current.  Thou{;li  this  velocity  is  hitherto  very  imperfectly  known  from 
want  of  some  method  of  dotermiiung  how  long  the  current  acted  upon  the  ship,  yet  all 
uncertainly  arising  from  thonce  must  soon  cens(%  as  a  few  experiments  upi  n  the  heat  of 
tiu»  stri'Hiii,  compared  with  the  ship's  I'un,  tliecUed  by  observations  of  the  I'uitude.  will 
ascertain  its  motion  with  sufficient  precision.  From  dillcrences  in  the  wind,  a.^''  perhaps 
other  circumstiinces,  it  is  probable  th<it  there  may  be  some  variations  in  the  vilocity  of 
tlie  current;  and  n  will  be  curious  to  observe  whether  ,'ieso  variations  may  not  frioueiit- 
ly  be  pointed  out  i)y  a  difference  in  its  temperature,  as  the  quicker  the  current  nioves, 
the  lesf  heat  is  likely  to  bo  lost,  and  consequently  ihe  hotter  will  the  water  be.  In  r.h's 
observation,  howevci',  the  season  of  tlie  year  nmst  always  be  considered,  partly  because 
it  may  perhaps  in  sonio  degree  affect  the  original  temperature  of  Ihe  water  in  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico,  but  princii)ally  because  the  actual  heat  of  the  stream  must  be  greater  or  less, 
in  proportion  as  the  track  of  the  sea  through  which  it  has  flown,  was  warmer  or  colder. 
In  winter  I  shall  suppose  that  the  heat  of  the  strean  ilself  would  be  rather  less  that  in 
8unun(;r,  but  that  the  iliU'erence  between  it  and  the  snrrouiiHing  sea  would  be  much 
greati  r;  and  I  conceive  that  in  the  middle  of  summer,  thoujiji  the  stream  had  lost  very 
little  of  its  original  heat,  yet  the  sea  might,  in  some  part--,  acquire  nearly  the  same  tem- 
perature, 8.1  as  to  render  it  scarcely  possible  to  distinguish  by  the  tht-rmometer  when  a 
ship  entered  into  the  current. 

Vessels  may  with  '^niVty  avoid  the  eddy  of  the  gulf,  or  make  allowance  for  it  in  their 
calculations;  that  is,  if  lliey  cannot  help  falling;  into  them,  after  they  have  taken  all  the 
precautions  by  soundings  in  l)iue  water,  and  when  they  had  bottom,  stood  off,  they  will 
naturally  subtract  what  longitude  they  make  in  the  eddy,  from  what  they  had  made  in 
the  stream,  and  begin  a  new  departure,  being  at  the  same  time  very  precise  in  their 
morning  and  iiieridiaii  observations.  Many  shi|)s  bound  through  the  Strait  of  Florida,  un- 
ac([iiainled  with  the  stream's  eddy,  and  i;;iionint  also  of  the  soundings  being  under  blue 
water,  have  been  lost  in  fair  weather.  They  were  swept  insensibly  I'V  the  eddy  to  the 
westward,  and  when  they  fjund  by  their  calculations  that  ihey  had  a  sufficient  offing  east 


tmm 


42*  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

of  Tape  Florida,  they  stood  north,  and  instead  of  entering  the  strait,  ran  directly  upon  a 

If  with  adverse  northerly,  easterly,  or  N.  E.  winds,  vessels  happen  to  be  in  the  mouth 
of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  that  is.  between  the  Havana  and  Cape  Florida,  they  had  best  en- 
deavor to  make  the  Bahama  Islimds,  or  at  least  the  soundinfts  of  them,  and  proceed  un- 
der the  lee  side;  but  when  they  are  to  the  north  of  them,  it  is  best  to  keep  in  the  east- 
ern extent  of  the  stream,  or  else  they  will  not  be  able  to  clear  their  way  through  the 
■trait,  nor  olong  the  coast  of  East  Florida,  and  may  get  on  shore  u()on  the  reefs  either  of 
Cape  Florida  or  Cape  CanHvenil,  if  no;  upon  the  bench  betweea  the  two  capes,  which  is 
tfie  le«st  evil  of  the  two;  for  thus  the  crew  and  cargo  may  be  saved  ;  and  some  vessels 
may  »!«•»  be  brought  off,  provided  the  storm  ceases  before  the  vessel  is  made  a  wreck  of. 
But  if  »T  any  time  of  f  ht-  iwiuth  sun,  or  at  im y  other  time,  the  winds  are  west wnrdly,  then 
the  Adariric  coast  atfordc  thi  most  eligible  lee  for  navigators  who  do  nut  choose  to  take 
the  stream;  but  if  the  current  in  the  gulf  is  well  understood,  it  will  greatly  facilitate  the 
progress,  when  bound  to  tli*-  northward. 

Speakmg  of  the  GULF  STRKAiVI,  Mr.  Romans.*  whose  surveys  of  the  coast  of 
Florida  rHiected  great  credir  on  him.  n-^e:  "  Tii*»  All-gracious  Ruler  of  the  Universe, 
has  eo  flis^sed  the  several  siiwes  of  rhw  rewzy  labvntith,  as  to  cause  this  current  to  run 
in  a  directrtw  N.  E.  and  at  flif  'Ht^  nt  '  and  3i  nules  in  an  hour;  by  which  means  we 
are  enabled  better  to  avoid  th<»  imwiint-^r  dangers  of  the  ret^t.  where  it  becomes  a  lee 
ffaore  ;  for  tin*  vioj«*nce  of  the  easterly  g»i«^  beats  tlie  {;ulf  water  over  the  reefs,  so  as  to 
destroy  the  HTect  of  flood-tides,  by  causin*!*  cwnstant  reverberwing  current  from  the 
shore  over  tite  reef,  insomuch  that  a  vessel  ivtS<ig  under  the  r«ef  will  lay  with  her  stern 
to  windward. 

"  I  once  came  out  from  Matacumbe.  aftd  wa*"  scarcely  clear  of  the  reef,  before  I  was 
overtaken  l)y  a  gale  from  the  ensiNNnrd.  wi>icli  was  very  violent.  It  was  5  o'clock  in  the 
evening,  and  it  being  durk.  to  attempt  a  re-entnince  of  ihe  reef,  I  was  forred  to  heave  (he 
vessel  to.  whi'-li  1  did  under  the  balanced  mainsail  :  she  wiis  i\  heavy  schomiei-  of  about  70 
tons,  iind  a  dull  sailer.  The  succeeding  niijlit  I  passed  in  the  deepest  dwtress  of  itiind^ 
seeing  the  burning  of  the  breakers  in  conslant  succession  on  the  reef  till  past  one  i'(!lock  ; 
the  storm  continued  till  ten  next  morning,  when  I  mmle  sail  to  the  northward,  and  at 
noon,  to  my  utter  astonishment,  I  had  an  observation  of  the  sun's  altitude,  which  proved 
mo  to  be  iii  26^  50'  latiuide,  by  which  I  had  made  a  difference  of  latitude  of  118  miles, 
in  the  short  space  of  IH  hours,  17  of  which  I  lay  to. 

"  1  iim  an  utter  enemy  (continues  .Mr.  Romims.)  to  all  theoretic  and  systenwitic  posi- 
tions, which  has  caused  in  me  an  indefiitigable  thirst  for  finding,  in  my  experience,  causes 
for  all  extraordinary  iippeanmces,  be  they  what  they  may.  And  my  experimental  posi- 
tion of  the  cause  of  the  increase  of  the  velocity  of  this  current,  during  the  gal*-*(  that 
blow  contrarj'  to  its  direction,  is  no  other  than  the  reverbei'ating  current  occasioned 
by  the  swelling  of  the  water  within  the  reef  which  in  the  inemoral)le  gale  of  Octo- 
ber, 17G9,  when  the  Ledbury  was  lost,  was  no  less  than  thirty  feet  above  its  orainary 
level." 

Besides  the  convenience  of  correcting  a  ship's  course,  bj-  knowing  how  to  make  a  pfr>- 
per  allowance  for  the  distance  she  is  set  to  the  northw.ird  by  the  current,  a  method  of 
determining  with  certainty  when  she  onter-i  into  the  (Jiilf  .Stream,  is  attended  with  the 
farther  inestimable  advantage  ofsiiowing  her  pluco  upon  the  ocean  in  the  most  cnficf 
situation;  for,  as  the  current  sets  along  the  coasf  of  America,  at  places  on  sounding:'. 
the  mariner  when  ho  (inds  this  sudden  increase  of  lic-af  ii'  the  sea,  will  be  warned  of  iii-- 
approach  to  the  coast,  and  will  thus  liave  timely  noti<'e  to  fake  the  necessary  prwautions 
for  the  safety  of  i  '  vessel.  As  the  course  of  the  (iulf  ,'^tream  comes  to  be  nior*-  accu- 
rately known,  from  repeated  observations  of  the  heat  and  latitude*,  this  method  of  deter- 


*  Mr.  Romnns  observes,  "  If  bv  keeping  to  the  northward,  tlu>  current  of  llj*  Mexican  Gulf  has  se! 

you  on  foundings  on  Tortiisas  "^luiiil.  tliosp  soiiiidins'',  in  foil^'v  wiMchfr.  iiiav  U   *  tfuiilc,  hriii^  |iro|)(>rlv 

Idid  down  III  the  dinrt.     You  do  nut  i:liiii)Kc  the  color  of  yuur  wiiti'r  till  yiiii  ii'i   ,••  .-H  in  « idi  tnr  -liiml, 

but  there  is  pemrilly  an  oddy  rurrent  CO  soon  um  yon  mr  on  soiiiidinc-- .  liii'riCon    /you  filiiiid -/i.  .  lo 

till'  I'Moiidu  stii.'i    no  soon  iis  vou  iiri"  ii|i  to  lln'  l.ilitiide  of  'J3"  'J.i'.  kcrji  u»  tmn.'li  to  llW  eiistw.ird  .if  N. 

N.  K.  or  'S   K   li.  .N'..  til!  you  gft  soiindiiign.     And,  wliiitcver  leriililc  idi-ii  iii-nplc  iiiiiy  Uuvc  of  lliiit.«li()r<', 

if  tlic  wind  will  allow  you.  keep  it  on  liouid  e^ppciiillv  in  the  iiulnniii  iiml   "'intor  8>'iii<ofpi   when  tlie  N 

and  N  NV  wind^  are  frequent,  loid  ibe  i  iiriTiil  often  runs  lo  lecwiird.     In  tliose  Heasorty,  ym  iii.iv  t.iUe  an 

adviiiilajrc  of  the  tile?  on  soundinirn,  by  ciiri'fully  observiiitl  tlieii  linies;  nnd  Ibis  (■(,■ 

■llor'ci   \iinr  pa.ssage      When,  however,  you  iire  ^ot  iih  fir  wiiidw^od   !)■<  the  Hmoli  .  ' 

Reo(  .  D.li  Hvor  to  pel  »ll  the  euHiiiig  vou  ciin  poHsihIy  ii<i|uire    m  ordi'r  I"  r,. 

boar  I,  Hhieh  iii  the  niuKt  eligible  in  ^oinz  nurlliuard      'l'h<   proxiinity  of  ihi 

r«^r  ilseil  eleiirly  in  iliiylight  hy  the   wiilte  color  of  the  vvuier,  and  thus   ||i.  n   m  .  rm  c! 

pr««rhing  it ;  Init  this  i<  (iir  from  lieiiii;  tl  <•  ease  at  iii>;ht    vvht'ii  it  onulil  to  lie  cnret  illy  Hvi.! 

iPttd  if.' ^f  constantly  goiin; ;  beeiiuse  liiiving  .s,.iindiugj<  to  the  distuuce  of  two  miUi  wilhu.. 

part  (jt  If,  they  will  siiow  tbo  pruxituiiy  ol  danger." 


ii-nil  t(i 
iil»' 
'  (in 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•43 


mining  the  ship's  plnce  will  be  proportionnbly  more  aiiplicable  to  use.  And  it  derives  nd- 
ditiunul  imporltmce  from  the  peculiiir  circumstances  of  the  American  coast,  which  from 
the  mouth  of  the  Delaware  to  the  southernmost  point  of  Florida,  is  every  where  low, 
nod  beset  with  frequent  shoals,  running  out  far  into  tiie  sea.  The  Gulf  Stream,  there- 
fore, which  hns  hitherto  served  only  to  increase  the  perplexities  of  seamen,  will  now,  if 
these  observations  are  found  to  be  just  in  practice,  become  one  of  the  chief  means  of 
their  preservation  upon  this  dangerous  coast. 

Off-Set  from  the  Gulf  Slream. 

From  the  superior  elevation  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  its  water,  about  the  Bahamas,  ap- 
penrs  to  have  a  declivity  or  tendency  to  the  eastward  ;  and  there  is  reason  to  believe  that 
nn  otT-get  of  the  stream,  from  without  the  Maternillo  Bank,  sets,  if  not  generally,  very 
frequently,  to  the  eastward  and  S.  E.  With  the  usual  set  of  the  currents, along  the  east- 
ern range  of  the  Bahama  Islands,  we  are  not  accurately  acquainted ;  but,  with  a  N.  W. 
wiiiH,  we  have  no  doubt  that  it  is  in  a  S.  E.  direction.  The  Europa,  n  ship  of  war,  re- 
turning to  Jamaica,  by  this  passage,  from  a  cruise  off  Havana,  in  1787,  steered  east  on  the 
paiiillel  of  30°  N.  with  a  westerly  wind,  untd  the  run  was  supposed  to  have  brought  her 
on  tlie  meridian  of  Turk's  Islands,  by  which  it  was  intended  to  pass  southward,  but  an 
easterly  current  had  swept  her  along  as  liigh  as  that  of  the  Mona  Passage.  Captain  Man- 
dersori,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  who  first  noticed  this  event,  observes,  "if  it  were  once  ascer- 
tained that  a  current  was  common  in  that  part  of  the  ocean,  might  it  not  be  favorable  for 
vessels  bound  from  Jamaica  to  the  Cnrrihee  Islands,  especially  in  the  summer  months, 
during  the  prevalence  of  the  sea  breezes?" 

"  The  ship  Fame,  Captain  J.  W.  Monteath,  a  good  lunarian,  assures  me,"  says  Cap- 
tain Livingston,  "that  he  had  been  carried  three  degrees  and  upwards  to  the  eastward, 
between  the  time  of  his  departure  from  the  American  const  and  making  the  Winitward 
Passages;  but  this  may  have  been  partly  occasioned  by  the  Gulf  Stream,  which  he  may 
have  crossed  too  oltliquely  in  proceeding  from  Norfolk."  The  Fame  above  mentioned  was 
bound  from  Norfolk,  in  Virginia,  to  Kingston,  Jamaica,  in  May,  1816;  and  in  a  run  of 
thirteen  days,  until  in  the  latitude  of  29°,  and  longitude  61°,  it  was  found  that  the  cur- 
rent had  set  the  vessel  3°  10'  E. 

"  Captain  Hall,  in  the  Brig  Lowland  Lass,  passed  to  windward  of  Porto  Rico,  when  he 
thought  that  he  had  run  through  the  Mona  Passage.  Captain  Patterson,  of  the  brig 
Clyde,  as  I  am  informed,  passed  down  the  Anegada  Passage,  when  he  intended  to  have 
made  the  Mona."' 

Ciipt.  Romans,  before  quoted,  says,  "  within  the  edge  of  the  stream  is  a  smooth  eddy, 
graduiilly  changing,  as  it  approHches  Hawke  Channel  and  its  islands,  from  the  stream's 
deep  blue  to  a  beautiful  sea  green,  and  at  lust  into  a  milk  white.  The  soundings,  under 
the  blue  colored  water,  are  generally  on  a  fine  white  tniirl;  under  the  sea  green,  on  the 
said  marl,  you  meet  with  sponge,  wiiite  coral,  sea-fenthers,  turtle-grass,  and  sometimes 
banks  of  rocks ;  and  under  the  white  colored  water,  the  soundings  are  on  while  marl, 
with  banks  of  rocks,  or  white  sand.  The  eddy  takes  its  current  in  an  o])posite  direction 
from  that  of  the  contiguous  stream,  viz.  south-weslwnrdly." 

'I'lie  soundings  of  the  eddy,  provided  no  reef '.je  in  the  way  between  the  stream  and  the 
Hnwke  Channel,  run  from  iiO  tathums  to  2i  ;  i>.;id  when  ilie  reef  divides  the  stream  and 
the  Hawke  Cliiinnel,  the  soutiditigs,  in  some  places,  are  from  bottomless  at  once  to  12  or 
11  tiitlioma.     Ilawke  Channel  i.m  the  channel  betweer)  Klurida  Reef  mid  Keys. 

"  III  addition  to  tlie  above  notices,  I  have  been  assured,  by  an  intelligent.  Spanish  navi- 
entor,  thut,  about  thirty  years  since,  vessels  bound  from  Havana  to  Europe,  used  gener- 
ally to  cut  oir  three  degrees  of  longitude  from  their  reckoning,  on  account  of  this  set, 
wliirh  he  said,  was  considered  then  as  certainly  exisling.  .'\t  that  time  the  chai't.s  were 
about  a  degree  wrong,  which  would  reduce  the  S|)aniaid's  allowance  to  two  degrees,  or 
thereabout. 

"  These  notices  tend  to  prove  that  an  easterly  oflT-set,  from  the  Gulf  Stream,  sets  to  the 
nortlnvard  of  the  Bahannis;  of  tin?  I  am  so  firmly  convinced,  that  if,  in  charge  of  a  phij) 
friini  the  Havana,  or  even  New  Orlraiis.  bound  to  Jamairn.  I  should,  if  allowed  to  follow 
my  own  plan,  run  out  the  Strait  of  Florida,  and  attempt  mukiiig  my  passage  with  the  aid 
of  tins  ofi"-80t.  This  is  to  be  understood  in  case  I  should  not  have  westerly  winds  in  the 
soutlitTii  piiriilltds  ;  fur  such  winds  are,  1  am  told,  more  fifquent  than  formerly  ;  and  I 
know  that  they  are  by  no  means  of  rare  occurrence  on  the  S.  W.  of  Cuba."* 


Tnptiiin  Tliomn,"  Flnniiin,  in  tlir  \mf:  Rcciivnrv,  tlion  in  ihr  fiiilf  Stronm,  was  pet  to  the  northward 
I'll  iiiilrr'.  Ml  the  ','1  lioiirf  (if  llie  ',Mlili  ,<i'  Miircli  I  WO.  Tin-  >hi|)",'  |iliicc.  iil  niMiii.  'J!l"  I'  N.  "It  >'  '  W. 
Til  ill  •  nnrlli-i  HHlwiiril.  on  ibc  O'-xl  day,  wiiboiil  ibi'  stri'iiiii  in  liil  ".'!)"  .')5'.  hiiig.  77" 'JO'  the  currriil  was 
ff  ml  loliavr  st'lonlv  II  mill's  iiiiilli   liiif  rdiiHiilcriilily  iiion'  lo  I  bo  i'ii.<l«nril. 

Un  the  llilh  ul  Fcbruury,  liilU,  the  ijIh|i  Mum,  under  die  ^uaic  cuiaiuuudcr,  was  at  the  back  of  the 


mmmmm^^f 


ni«M*ms»!nwi  i„  ipiwitkiiiwfpiiiii , 


•44  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Tt  has  been  found  that  when  Cape  Henry,  (the  south  point  of  the  Chesapeake,)  bore 
N.  W.,  160  leagues  distant,  a  current  was  setting  to  the  southward,  at  the  rate  of  10  or 
12  miles  per  day,  which  so  continued  until  Cnpe  Henry  bore  W.  N.  W.  89  or  00  leagues' 
the  current  was  then  found  setting  to  the  N.  E.  at  the  rate  of  33  or  34  miles  per  day' 
which  continued  until  within  32  or  30  leagues  of  the  land  ;  then  a  current  set  to  tlie 
southward  and  westward,  at  the  rate  of  10  or  15  miles  per  day,  to  within  12  or  15  miles 
of  the  land.  This  current,  (which  is  a  continuation  of  the  Labrador  current,)  sets,  more 
or  less,  to  the  S.  W.,  according  to  the  figure  of  the  coast. 

It  has  also  been  observed  b}'  others,  that  a  southern  and  western  current  constantly  sets 
in  high  latitudes  befv\een  tiie  Gulf  stream  and  coast,  more  particularly  in  soundings,  at 
the  rate  of  half  a  mile  an  hour,  or  more,  according  to  the  wind. 

An  experienced  officer  of  the  navy  before  quoted,  has  said,  that  "  in  all  the  observa- 
tions I  made,  during  five  years  cruising  on  the  American  coast,  I  never  found  this  eastern 
current  t)  the  southward  of  latitude  36°,  and  only  once,  (the  above  mentioned  time.)  sq 
far;  it  generally  prevailing  between  the  latitudes  of  37°  and  40°,  from  the  longitude  of 
60°  to  that  of  69°.  And"!  have  often,  about  the  latitude  of  36°  or  37°.  and  about  the 
above  longitude,  found  a  strong  current  to  the  south,  and  riouth-west.  Therefore,  ships 
from  Europe,  bound  to  America,  should  endeavor  to  make  the  passage  either  to  the  souili- 
ward  of  latitude  37°,  or  to  the  northward  of  latitude  40°  :  that  is  to  say,  when  as  far,  or  to 
the  westward  of  the  Bunks  of  Newfoundland,  they  should,  as  much  as  possible,  avoid 
beating  against  the  wind  to  the  westward,  between  the  latitudes  of  37°  and  40°. 

Up'in  soundings,  along  the  coasts  of  Georgia,  Carolina,  Virginia,  Now  .Jersey,  and 
New  York,  the  current  runs,  in  general,  parallel  to  the  shore;  and  is,  in  general,  influ- 
enced by  the  wind,  which  mostly  pi'eviiils  from  between  the  south  and  west,  producinga 
slow  current  of  about  one  or  a  half  ktiot  to  the  N.  E. ;  but  when  the  N.  and  E.  winds  pre- 
vail, the  current  along  shore  to  the  south-west  will  frequently  run  two  knots  :  on  which, 
the  pilots  of  this  coast  remark,  that  the  south  and  S.  W.  currents,  though  they  but  sel- 
dom happen,  yet  they  are  always  stronger  than  those  to  the  nortliward,  which  are  more 
frequent.  It  is  probable  the  tides  may  have  some  intluenre  on  these  currents,  particu- 
larly near  the  entrance  of  the  great  bays  and  inlets.  The  flood  on  this  coast  come,  from 
the  N  E.  In  the  months  of  April  and  IMay  I  hava  observed,  on  crossirjg  the  Gulf  Stream 
in  the  liititude  of  Cape  Henry,  that,  when  near  the  inside  of  the  stream,  the  water  be- 
gins to  color  of  a  deeper  green  ;  and  thence  to  the  edge  of  soundings  there  is  u  strong 
current  from  the  eastward.  The  color  of  the  water  from  green,  turns  to  muddy  when 
on  soundings,  the  current  still  continuing  until  within  the  influence  of  the  tide;  this  east- 
ern current  is.  no  doubt,  occasioned  by  the  dischiirge  of  wafer  out  of  the  Chesapeake,  by 
the  floods  from  the  snow  melting  in  the  country  ;  and  it  prevails,  in  some  degree,  through- 
out the  year,  but  its  etfect  is  greater  at  this  time.  It  is  probable  that  a  similar  curryiit 
prevails  off  the  mouth  of  the  Delawai'e. 

Round  the  east  end  of  Long  Island,  and  thence  to  the  eastward  round  Nantucket 
Shoals,  across  George's  Bank,  to  Cape  Sable,  a  strong  tide  runs;  the  flood  setting  to  the 
north  and  west,  in  order  to  till  up  tliw  bays,  rivers,  and  iidels,  and  the  ebb  the  contrary. 
The  fiiies  tnat  set  across  (ieorge's  Bank  into  tlu'  Hay  of  rundy,  are  very  much  inllu- 
enceil  by  the  winds,  pnrticuliirly  if,  after  a  strong  S.  or  S  E.  wind,  it  should  snddiMiiy 
change  to  W.  or  N.  W.  (circonistances  that  often  hiippen.)  ships  will  tlieu  find  tlicin- 
selves  drifted  by  the  outset  oO  or  6()  niilos  in  the  '^4  hours,  or  more,  to  the  S.  E.  The 
indraught  is  also  great  with  S.  or  S.  E.  winds,  which  ought  to  be  paid  particular  atten- 
tion to. 

Upon  the'  Nova  Scotia  coast  the  currents  run  parallel  to  the  sliore.  but  more  frequent 
from  the  eastward  than  from  the  westward,  particularly  in  the  spring:  the  southerly 


Mnternilln  Rank,  nnc!  nn  uortlifrlv  nirroiit  wm'i  found;  nnil  nfnrly  two  (leirrcs  fiirthor  oiislwiiril,  in  US" 
7'  N.  mill  7()"  ■>;;'  \V.,  the  ciirri'iii.  in  Jl  hours  li.id  set  :j'  fj.  iiiid  11'  L.  'i'lie  sliij)  was,  tln-relorc,  cvi- 
deiitlv  ill  tlic  oH'-flPI  of  thi!  Giiif  Strimii. 

la  pri(cp(>rliii:>  on"  ird  lowiinU  In-liiii  I,  ip  Murcli,  Ciipt.  Ilmriliii  p^i'scil  about  four  ili-urni's  to  llin 
norlhwMril  ot'  A/ores.  Mid  w.is  Civon-il  liy  mi  citsli-rly  cnrn-nl  troin  tli(>  (iiinilli'l  ol  :r)J",  anil  iin'ridimi  of 
57",  iiiiiil  ii,'  ri'icli'd  tlii>  Suiters  on  Ihn  8.  K.  const, 'wIktc  his  diiriTi-iici-s  aiiMiiinlPd  to  ',W  'M'  K, 

Captain  Hamlin,  ii:  llu'  Kcoovitv,  on  his  p.issajro  outward  to  Hiilifix,  .Sept.  inlicr,  IKI'.t  toiiiid  the 
current  wcsli-rlv,  IVoiii  l-'v  to  iill' pt-r  ilay.  beiwriMi  the  parallels  of  .jl"  and  l(i"  loiia. '.".)",  h)  :!■  ',  A 
Rale  from  the  Jiih  to  the  itnih  of  .•!e|i|  ,'.lisfiirl)i>d  the  ship's  eoiirsc  in  nlioiit  43"  iN  and  II  \V.  after 
which  to  the  eastrturd  111' the  .\e«foii:idliin(l  Hank,  the  eurrent  w.is  found  to  set  "fr'aisilv  l-  the  east- 
ward. I  he  slii|i  passed  over  lli'>  I)  oik  in  the  parallel  of  1 1" ;  the  current  still  stroll,  loth-  eastward; 
apparently,  the  (inlf  .Stream  The  It.  covery  tli  'nei'  proee'ded  to  the  southern  edire  ol  lliimpiereuu  still 
finding  a  strong  easterly  current,  hut  with  diniiiiishcd  .strenEth,  which  continind  tb.-lice  lo  tin'  Hunk  of 
Sahle  Island. 

'I'he  hrii;  afterwards  proceeded  froin  klalif  ix  to  Jnniaii-a  ;  and  on  (he  ,'j,l  ..i  Nov.,  Ift!*.  In  Vi"  N  62'' 
W  ,  fiiuii  1  a  sliirht  curivntt.  the  soutiiw.ird;  which  in  the  |iaiallcl  of 'Jil"  to  i:)",  n.^^  jtie  lueridian  ". 
61'',  had  chan^eil  to  the  eastward,  hut  on  appioachini:  the  Siher  Key  pansHi,'0,  a  *.'«<lit  current  to  tlio 
wcstwurd  appeared  to  prevail. 


^.tN.  '"■■'»HP»S'!'WW1»'-I"t- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ffiods  force  them  upon  the  shore  by  the  water  runoing  in  to  fill  up  the  bays  and  inlets, 
and  N.  and  N.  W.  winds  have  the  same  efTect  in  forcing  them  off  shore.  A  regular  tide 
Ijere  runs  along  shore  ;  the  flood  from  E.  N.  £. 

Remarks  on  the  Oeneral  Character  of  the  Currents  near  the  coasttf  the  United  States, 

by  W.  C.  Redfield. 

It  appears  from  observations  found  on  the  pages  of  the  Coast  Pilot,  that  immediately 
contiguous  to  the  borders  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  on  the  const  of  the  United  St.ites,  ii  mod- 
erate current  is  generally  found  setting  to  the  southward  and  westvviird,  or  in  the  direc- 
tiou  which  is  opposite  to  the  stream,  and  parallel  tu  the  American  const.  By  a  familiar 
Qjsociiition,  this  is  usually  called  an  eddy  current ;  but  we  shall  probably  find,  on  more 
pArticulur  inquiry,  that  it  has  litile  or  no  claim  to  this  character.  An  eddy,  as  is  well 
known,  is  usually  caused  by  some  fixed  obstacle  opposed  to  a  stream,  and  exhibits  a  rotary 
g^oveinent.  It  also  derives  its  watars  from  the  parent  stream,  and  necessarily  partakes 
of  the  same  temperature.  I  must,  therefore,  dissent  from  the  views  of  those  persons  who 
refer  this  current  to  the  eddying  action  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  for  the  following  reasons : 

Ist.  Because,  in  open  sea,  it  nowhere  assumes  the  form  of  an  eddy  ;  but,  when  unob- 
structed by  violent  winds,  pursues  its  course  towards  the  south-west,  parallel  to  the  gene- 
ral direction  of  the  coast. 

iid.  Because,  on  the  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  on  this  coast,  there  are  no  obstacles 
presented  which  could  divert  the  progress  of  a  portion  of  the  stream,  or  circumscribe  the 
giiine  n  eddies. 

3d.  Because,  if  this  current  was  derived  from  the  Gulf  Stream,  it  must  necessarily 
partake  of  its  temperature,  as  above  suggested  ;  but  the  sudden  reduction  of  tempera- 
ture on  leaving  the  margin  of  the  Gulf  Stream  is  roost  remarkable,  and  •■i\  almost  unpar- 
nlleled.  except  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  ice. 

We  shall  in  vain  attempt  to  explain  this  extraordinary  change  of  temperature  by  the 
proximity  of  shallows  or  soundings,  for  this  cannot  avail  if  the  water  itself  be  derived 
fi'om  the  Gulf  current,  to  say  nothing  here  of  the  general  unsoundness  of  this  expla- 
nation. 

I  have  long  since  become  satisfied  that  the  current  in  question  is  neither  more  nor  less 
tlian  a  direct  continuation  of  the  polar  or  Labrador  current,  which  bears  southward  the 
great  stream  of  drift  ice  from  Davis'  Strait,  and  which,  in  its  progress  to  tlie  lower  !»Ui- 
tiides,  is  kept  in  constant  proximity  to  the  American  ooant  by  the  same  dynamical  law  or 
influence  which,  in  the  northern  hemispheres,  causes  all  cuironts  which  pass  in  a  south- 
erly direction  to  incline  to  the  westward,  in  consequence  of  the  increasing  rotative  velo- 
city ot  the  earth's  surface  in  the  opposite  direction,  as  in  the  case  of  the  trade  winds  in 
tlio  lower  latitudes. 

In  collating  tho  observations  of  various  navigators,  we  find  reason  to  conclude,  that,  in 
ordinary  states  of  weather,  this  current  may  be  traced  from  the  coast  of  Newfoundland 
to  Cape  Hutterns,  and,  perhaps,  to  Florida,  tlin  reflux  iufluenco  which  sometimes  follows 
a  violent  gale  being  of  short  duration. 

According  to  this  view  of  the  case,  the  Gulf  .Stream  in  its  course  from  Florida  to  the 
Bank  of  Newfoundland,  is  in  part  imbedded  upon  a  colder  current  which  is  setting  in  the 
opposite  direction,  in  its  progress  from  the  polar  regions.  The  impulses  by  which  these 
opposite  currents  are  maintained,  being  as  pbrmaneiit  and  unchanging  as  the  diurnal  ro- 
tation of  our  planet,  their  opposite  courses  on  tliis  coast,  while  in  contact  with  each  other, 
are  no  more  surprising  cr  inexplicable  than  those  of  two  opposite  currents  of  atmos- 
phere moving  in  the  same  manner,  and  the  latter  are  often  known  to  maintain  opposite 
courses  for  a  long  period  and  at  high  velocities. 

From  the  fact  that  these  great  currents  have  their  origin,  one  in  the  tropical  and  the 
other  in  tho  polar  seas,  thoir  presence  can  be  d^)to^mined,  in  most  cases,  by  meuui  of  the 
thermometer;  and  with  tho  aid  of  good  chronoinelers  thoir  position  and  extent  may  be 
ascertained  with  greater  certainty  thpn  has  yot  been  done,  particularly  in  tho  latitudes 
betwt  en  Nantucket  and  Fli>rida.  In  this  dopartmont  of  hydrology  every  navigator  may 
contribute  something  of  value  to  hin  profesaion  and  to  science,  for  which  no  other  quali- 
fications are  rfquirod  than  frequent  jrvatiuns  and  proper  attention  to  the  ship's  place. 
It  IS  desirable,  therefore,  that  every  s'lp  master  who  travei-ses  this  region,  should  makt) 
and  record  his  observations  hourly  np.Mi  those  currents. 

Tho  drift  ice  from  the  polar  *m>i.  .  is  .  II  found  in  the  western  portion  of  the  Arctic  and 
North  Ailantio  oceant',  nij^i Mistf-iding  the  influence  of  violunt  westerly  winds.  A 
writer  in  th«  London  Nt  .^.'ca;  Mitgaziiie,*  supposes  that  a  portion  of  the  polar  current, 
after  bearing  the  ico  alf  tg  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Grand  Bank  into  the  Atlantic,  there 


•46 


*  Nautii»t  Mngnzine  for  March,  1»37,  , .  139.  He  states  that  between  42"  and  43°  w»^st,  is  he  farthest 
ewterly  piMtion  in  win,  li  floating  masses  of  ice  huve  been  found;  but  we  have  shown  that  they  sume> 
tiiuei  ezlead  to  ioo^.  •i^". 


wm 


46» 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PIIX)T. 

becomes  exhausted,  or  joins  the  Florida  Stream.  By  its  action  the  great  stream  of  ice 
is  undoubtedly  thus  brought  within  the  dissolving  influence  of  the  Uult  ^tream.  and  the 
Grand  Bunk  itself,  perhaps,  owes  its  origin  to  the  deposites  which  have  resulted  froin  this 
process  during  a  long  course  of  ages.  But  this  portion  of  the  polar  current  prolmbly, 
"joins"  the  Gulf  Stream  in  no  other  manner  than  by  intruding  upon  and  passing  under 
the  same,  the  order  of  super-posirion  being  determined  by  the  diversity  of  temperatuie, 
or  by  the  deeper  position  of  the  polar  stream.  The  iceberns  being  thus  carried  soutji, 
ward  by  thf  deeper  polar  current,  I  heir  rapid  destruction  is  here  effected  by  the  wnter 
of  the  Gulf  Stream,  and  we  are  thus  relieved  from  these  dangerous  obstructions,  which 
would  otherwise  bo  found  in  the  lower  latitudes  of  the  Atlantic.  These  two  streams  of 
current,  therelbie,  do  not  coalesce  in  any  propor  sense,  but  like  other  currents,  both  nt- 
mQ^pheric  and  aqueous,  pursue  each  its  determinate  course,  the  Gulf  Stream  being 
thrown  eastward  by  the  greater  rotative  velocity  which  it  ac<iuired  in  latitudes  near  tlie 
equator,  and  the  polar  current  being  thrown  westward  along  the  shoals  and  soundings  of 
the  American  continent,  and  its  contiguous  ocean  depths,  by  the  slower  rotation  which  it 
derived  in  higher  lutiluilos. 

The  writer  iibove  alluded  to,  supposes  the  natural  course  of  the  polar  current  from 
Davis'  Strait,  to  be  towards  the  coast  of  ftforocco,  in  North  Africa;  but  a  little  attention 
to  the  effect  of  the  earth's  rotation-on  this  current,  will  nhow  that  both  it  and  the  ice  drifts 
that  are  borne  on  its  surface  must  be  turned  westward  as  here  described,  in  despite  of 
the  powerful  westerly  '^nlos  which  prevail  in  these  latitudes.  Light  articles,  however, 
like  bottles,  which  are  set  afloat  to  determine  the  drift  of  currents,  will  not  only  yjelj 
greatly  to  the  influence  of  these  winds,  but  on  falling  into  the  surface  current  of  the  Gulf 
Stream  will,  of  course,  accompany  that  current  in  its  progress  to  the  coast  of  Europe, 
where  a  leading  branch  of  thit  stream  is  found  penetrating  the  polar  sea  along  the  const 
of  Norway,  and  appears  to  be  ultimately  resolved  info  the  |)olar  current.  The  soutli- 
easterly  branch  of  the  warm  stream  assumes  the  shorter  and  more  direct  circuit  ofgriivi- 
tation,  by  the  const  of  North  Africa  to  the  tropical  latitudes,  from  whence  it  again  merges 
in  the  Florida  Stream.  It  is  by  this  system  of  compensation,  aided  by  various  subordi- 
nate circuiU,  such  for  instance  as  Rennel's  current,  that  the  great  mechanical  system  of 
oceanic  circulation  is  apparently  maintained  ;  and  were  the  influence  of  winds  wholly 
unfelt  upon  the  ocean,  it  is  probable  that  the  same  sysfein  would  still  be  maintained,  in 
all  its  essential  features,  by  the  mechanical  influences  of  the  earth's  rotation,  combined 
with  the  tides  and  a  state  of  unstable  equilibrium. 

From  the  temperature  of  the  sea  upon  the  North  American  banks  and  soundings,  and 
in  some  other  positions  which  are  analogous,  it  has  been  assumed  that  the  mean  tem- 
perature of  the  sea  is  lower  on  shoiils,  than  in  deep  water,  but  it  seems  difficult  to  ac- 
count satisfactorily  for  such  a  result,  unless  upon  the  ground  already  mentioned.  It 
has  indeed  been  ascribed  to  incrr'ased  radiiition  from  the  bottom,  and  again  it  has  been 
denied  that  such  radiation  can  be  carried  on  through  water  from  a  non-luminous  body; 
and,  as  the  colder  particles  can  have  no  tendency  to  rise  tnwanls  the  surface,  it  does  not 
appear  how  the  supposed  reduction  in  the  temperature  of  the  bottom  can  materially  af- 
fect the  temperiifure  of  a  current  of  fifty  or  sixty  fathoms  in  depth,  which  is  derived 
fi&'i  a  foreign  source;  for  on  none  of  these  shoiils  or  soundings  is  tlie  water  perma- 
nently quiescent.  Were  it  otherwise,  we  might  reasonably  expect  a  diminution  of  tem- 
perature on  shoals  in  winter,  and  an  increase  of  tem[)erBture  in  summer,  wi;h  a  perma- 
nent increase  if  in  tropical  latitudes.  I  am  informed  by  Mr.  Geo.  W.  Blunt,  one  of  tlie 
proprietors  of  this  work,  who  has  kept  a  tlierrnometriciil  journal  while  crossing  the  At- 
lantic, that  on  entering  upon  soundings  in  the  Kn^lish  Chuunel.  he  has  found  an  increase 
of  temperature  in  the  water  of  '2°,  Fahrenlieit.  'I'hoso  who  differ  from  our  views  in  re- 
gard to  these  currents,  ought  iheretoro  to  propose  some  more  rational  hypothesis  to  ac- 
count for  the  great  reduction  of  temperature  in  the  waters  which  lave  tiio  Atlantic  const 
of  the  United  .States.  Were  these  waters  derived  as  an  eddy  current  from  the  (iulf 
Stream,  it  is  prohable  that  they  would  no  longer  serve  for  tlie  myriads  of  codflsh  which 
now  frequent  our  shores,  and  which  (ire  known  to  inhabit  the  coldest  waters. 

Many  experiments  upon  the  drift  of  currents  have  been  made  with  bottles  containing 
memorandums  of  the  date  and  locality  in  which  they  were  committed  to  the  sea.  Tliesa 
exrieriiiiunts  are  not  without  their  value,  although  it  is  obvious  th'it  a  cwcuitous  course  is 
liable  to  be  construed  into  a  direct  one,  and  that  storms  and  the  common  drift  caused 
by  the  iirevaHiiii;  winds  may  greatly  affect  the  course  of  such  objects  upon  the  surface 
of  the  ocean,  while  an  important  diversion  may  result  from  a  more  superficial  cross 
current,  as  we  have  noticerl  in  the  case  of  the  Gulf  .Stream.  Perhaps  the  suspension  ul 
a  light  weight  to  those  floats  with  a  line  from  five  to  twenty  fathoms  in  wingth,  would 
afford  results  ol  a  more  satisfactory  character,  although  the  duration  of  Huct>  pendulous 
fixtures  can  hardly  be  reliod  on.  If  lilted  in  this  manner  the  fact  8h»+Hld  be  noteu  upoc 
the  meinorauduin  inclosed,  which  bhoulJ  specify  also  the  length  of  line  wbicti  may  be 
attachod. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


^ 


•47 


earn  of  ice 
m,  Hnd  the 
d  from  this 
t  [)rolmbly, 
•sing  under 
nperntuie, 
lif'l  south- 
file  wiiter 
"lis,  wtiicii 
strenins  of 
ts,  both  nt- 
enm  being 
98  uear  the 
jundings  of 
n  which  it 

rrent  from 

le  attention 

e  ice  drifts 

dospite  of 

however, 

only  yielj 

)f  the  Gulf 
of  Europe, 
g  the  const 
I'he  south- 
lit  of  grnvi- 
nin  merjjes 
is  subordi- 
system  of 
lids  wholly 
intained,  in 
,  combined 

tidings,  and 
meitn  tein- 
Rcult  to  ac- 
tioncd.  It 
It  has  been 
nous  body; 
it  does  not 
iterinlly  nf- 
is  derived 
er  pernia- 
ioii  of  teni- 
1  a  pernia- 
one  of  tlie 
ng  the  At- 
in  increase 
ews  in  re- 
lesis  to  iic- 
untic  const 
I  the  (iulf 
fish  which 

containing 
sa.  Thesa 
1  course  is 
'ift  caused 
e  furtkcH 
IcihI  cross 
pension  ot 
th,  would 
pendulous 
uteU  u|)oB 
li  inay  be 


ADDITIONAL  REMARKS.      ~ 

It  was  hoped,  when  this  ediiion  was  commenced,  that  the  editor  would  be  able  to  add 
something  more  precise  about  the  Gulf  Stream;  but  this  hope  has  been  disappointed. 
Some  alterations  and  additions  have  been  made  in  the  preceding  pages;  but  there  is  still 
wanting  a  general  and  well-digested  collection  of  facts. 

A  series  of  observations  had  been  commenced  by  order  of  Professor  Bache,  U.  S.  C. 
Survey ;  and  Lt.  Chas.  H,  Davis,  U.  S.  N.,  in  the  U.  S.  Brig  Washington,  in  the  year 
1845,  traversed  that  portion  immediately  S.  E.  of  Nantucket ;  but  his  work  did  not  com- 
mence until  lute  in  the  season,  and  Lt.  Geo.  M.  Bache,  U.  S.  N.,  took  charge  of  the  ves- 
sel the  following  year.  He  traced  three  sections  S.  E.  of  Sandy  Hook,  extending  to 
Hatteras,  but  on  his  return  to  the  Chesapeake,  he  was  overtaken  by  the  violent  gale  of 
Sept.  1946  ;  end  while  endeavoring  to  save  his  vessel  and  crew,  was  unfortunately 
washed  overboard,  and  perished  with  ten  of  his  seamen.  Most  of  his  observations 
were  lost,  as  the  deck  cabin  was  swept  overboard. 

A  few  general  facts  have  been  collected  : 

1.  That  in  the  summer  the  tem|)erature  of  the  Gulf  water,  south  of  Hatteras,  is  about 
the  same  as  the  water  on  soundings.  In  iiie  months  of  July  and  August.  1845,  the  tem- 
perature of  the  water  from  the  Mississippi  to  Cape  Hatteras,  both  in  and  out  of  the 
stream,  even  to  the  very  mouth  of  the  Atlantic  rivers,  was  84°  to  82°.  This  fact  was 
ascertained  by  journals  kept  for  the  editor. 

2.  That  the  temperature  of  the  (Julf,  south  of  Hatteras  to  Savannah,  in  the  winter 
months,  is  from  72°  to  73°,  and  that  on  soundings,  on  the  same  limit,  at  the  same  time, 
59°  to  66°  ;  and  north  of  Hatteras,  48°  to  64°,  showing  a  ditferonce  of  from  U  to  5  de- 
grees higher  temperature  to  the  south  of  the  cape. 

3.  The  general  direction  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  from  Key  Biscayno  until  it  gets  to  the 
lat.  of  31°  10',  is  North,  velocity  3  to  34  knots  ;  from  thence  it  turns  to  the  N.  N.  E.,  and 
ns  it  progresses  to  the  north,  it  turns  more  to  the  N.  E.  On  the  western  edge  of  the 
Stream  the  Gulf- weed  is  mixed  with  the  river  sedge ;  on  the  eastern  edge  it  is  clean  as 
when  first  torn  from  the  rocks.  It  appears  from  a  notice  in  the  iNautical  Magazine,  that 
some  of  the  weed  grows  on  the  shores  of  the  Andros  islands. 

4.  Tlie  western  edge,  from  Key  Biscjyno  to  lat.  31°  10'  N.,  is  generally  on  the  meridi- 
an of  80\  the  eastern  edge,  after  passing  the  Little  Bahama  Bank,  in  about  79°,  until 
in  the  latitude  of  30°  30',  when  it  is  turned  more  to  the  eastward.  This,  however,  is  in 
moderate  weather.  During  heavy  gales  from  the  N.  E.  to  the  S.  E.,  the  stream  is  forced 
immediately  on  and  over  the  shoals  of  the  (Japes  of  North  Carolina ;  and  with  N.  W.  and 
Westerly  gales,  the  stream  is  driven  from  the  shore,  and  no  limit  within  thirty  miles  caa 
be  fixed  to  it;  and  under  such  circumstances  the  warm  water  of  the  Gulf  is  displaced, 
so  that  at  times  there  will  be  uo  current  in  the  warm  water,  aud  current  in  the  cold 
water. 

5.  The  edges,  in  moderate  weather,  are  shown  by  the  ripplings  in  the  low  latitudes, 
and  m  tliu  high  latitudes,  during  tlie  winter,  with  northerly  weather,  by  the  evaporation 
from  the  suift!"e. 

C.  The  precise  part  where  the  stream  bogins  to  form  is  not  known.  It  is  shown  before, 
under  the  general  article  of  "Currents,"  that  the  current  sets  to  the  W.  N.  W.  aud  N. 
W.,  over  the  Cam|)(xlio  Hank;  and  that  at  a  short  distance  West  of  the  Tortuj^us  the 
current  sets  to  the  S.  S.  E. ;  but  where  the  proper  head  of  the  current  is,  is  yet  to  be 
found. 

G.  W.  BLUNT. 

September,  1850. 


mpi 


% 


^% 


m 


,;#■■. 


Vark 

YORFv.  «ii 
point  of  l?oll 
known  by  tv 
tho  eiitriiiico 
them  hiivo  tli 
to  tlio  bny,  V 
may  ni)t  bo  i 
the  lietter  m 
uniform  fifjui 
whiio  tiio  liir 
near  tho  sho 

To  sail  int 
boaril  sid(!.  a 
WPStiM'ti  poir 
jusraijpoiiriii 
Isliiiiii,  then 
nearly  midw 
Isianii,  liiiiil 
Wliiilo  Islim 
to  upon  the  i 
bor,  tlion  liii 
open  of  Wli 
clear  from  di 
thtlioniw,  witl 
your  fisliory 
Henloy  Ishin 

Ono  milt) 
Ducii  Ishinf 
the  Wiitcr,  I 
G  mill's,  iire 
iigooil  pliice 
he  iiiucli  frO' 

CAl'K  C 
making  with 

to  tllO    \VfSl\ 

Island  lies  S 
moderiite  he 
it.  From  S 
miles ;  betw 
several  smiill 
or  iiitrtliwiiri 
S)  fathoms  wi 

CMM-:  c 
Ca|)e  (Jharle 
by  Eyro  unc 
there  is  ii  ve 
iinil  you  inii_^ 
il  and  Little 

P'roin  (^ii| 
(listiuice  44  1 
»  lari,'e  milo 
round  lit  the 

From  the 
W.  distiint ! 
Islands,  you 
vessels  may 

CUTTEl 
bor,  the  cou 
smnil  vesselE 


'  WM  "I   Wi 


COAST  OF  LABRADOR, 

FROM  YORK  POINT  TO   SANDWICH   HARBOR, 

Variation  allowed  from  York  Point  to  Sandwich  Harbor  2j  and  3  Points. 

YORK,  or  CHATEAUX  BAY,  lies  nbout  10  miloa  N.W.  J  N.from  tho  sou  tli- western  York,  or 
point  of  Bullo  Islo,  and  8  lenguos  N.  J  W.  from  tho  hiirborof  Quiriioii;  it  may  eiisily  be  Chateaux 
known  by  two  very  reiniirl(iii)lu  hills,  situnted  on  Castle  and  Hoiiley  Islands,  which  lie  at  Bay. 
the  entrance  of  the  bay ;  these  rocky  hills  ap|)ear  flat  at  tho  tops,  and  tho  stoop  liills  around 
tliPin  have  the  appearance  of  castle  walls ;  the  islands  form  tho  eastern  side  of  the  entrance 
to  tiio  bay,  while  the  Capes  York  and  Temple  are  to  the  westward;  but  as  the  mariner  j, 

may  not  bo  able  to  discover  the  above  hills  at  a  distance,  because  of  the  high  land  behind,  * 

the  lietter  marks  will  be,  to  observe  that  all  the  land  to  the  westward  is  of  a  high  and 
uniform  figure,  terminating  at  the  west  side  of  tho  bay  with  a  conspicuous  knob  or  hillock, 
while  th(»  land  to  the  eastward  of  Chateaux  Bay  is  hilly  and  broken,  having  many  islands 
near  the  shore ;  while  to  the  westward  there  are  none. 

To  sail  into  Chateaux  Bay,  you  must  leave  Castle  and  Henley  Islands  on  your  star- 
boiird  sid(!.  and  endeavor  to  keep  Point  Gronville,  which  has  a  beacon  upon  it,  on  with  the 
wpsteni  point  of  Henley  Island;  this  point  is  a  smooth  black  rock,  having  a  little  dark  rock 
jusr  !i|)poiiring  above  water  olf  its  point ;  keep  this  mark  on  until  you  get  abroast  of  Whale 
Isliimi.  then  to  avoid  the  middle  rock,  over  which  are  only  9  feet  of  water,  and  which  lies 
nearly  midway  between  the  east  point  of  Whale  Island  and  the  black  point  of  Henley 
Island,  haul  over  close  to  Henley  Black  Rock,  or  bori'ow  towards,  but  not  too  near,  to 
Whale  Island,  for  here  it  runs  oft'  shallow  and  flat ;  and  when  you  are  so  far  advanced  as 
to  open  the  luirrow  channel  into  Temple  Bay,  with  the  view  of  sailing  up  into  Pitt's  Har- 
bor, then  haul  to  the  westward,  until  you  bring  the  outer  point  of  Castle  Island  a  little 
open  of  Whale  Island  ;  this  mark  will  lead  you  up  into  Pitt's  Harbor,  which  is  spacious, 
clear  from  danger,  and  well  sheltered  from  all  winds  ;  here  you  may  ride  in  10  or  14 
tiithoins,  with  plenty  of  timber  ready  for  your  vise,  and  every  convenience  for  carrying  on 
vour  fishery.  There  is  also  a  narrow  jjassage  into  Pitt's  Harbor,  to  the  northward  of 
Henloy  Island,  through  which  you  will  have  3  fathoms  water. 

One  nnle  to  tho  eastward  of  Henley  Island,  lies  Seal  Island,  and  3i  miles  further  is 
Duck  Island;  between  those  is  Goose  aid  Bad  Bay,  full  of  rocks  both  above  and  below 
the  Wiitcf,  and  also  open  to  easterly  winds.  To  the  eastward  of  Seal  Island,  distant 
G  mill's,  are  St.  Peter's  Islands,  a  cluster  of  barren  rocks,  within  which  is  St.  Peter's  Bay, 
11  good  place  of  anchorage,  but  too  much  exposed  to  the  south  and  south-easterly  winds  to 
be  much  frequented. 

CAPK  CHARLIES — To  the  north-eastward  of  St.  Peter's  Island  is  Cape  Charles,  CapeCharles. 
making  witii  a  high  hill,  steep  to  seaward,  and  sloping  down  inland,  so  that  when  j'ou  are 
to  the  wt'si  ward  of  Chateaux  Bay,  it  has  the  appearance  of  an  island.  Cape  Charles 
Island  lies  S.  K.  by  K.  }  E.  distant  about  one  ami  a  half  mile  from  Cape  Charles;  it  is  of 
moderate  height,  and  has  several  small  rocks  both  to  tho  eastward  and  to  the  westward  of 
it.  From  St.  Peter's  Islands  to  Charles  Island  tho  course  is  K.  N.  E.  \  E.  distant  14 
miles;  between  them  lies  Niger  Sound,  an  inlet  about  two  leagues  Jeep,  ami  having 
several  small  islands  before  it ;  to  enter  Niger  Sound  you  may  pass  either  to  the  southward 
or  niirthward  of  these  islands,  and  obtain  anchorage  on  the  northern  side  of  tho  sound,  in 
9 fathoms  wal(!r  ;  the  course  in  will  be  nearly  N.  by  W. 

C  \  PE  CHARLES  HAKBOK — From  the  north  point  of  Capo  Charles  Island  into  Cape  Charles 
Cu\h:  Charles  Harbor,  the  course  is  N.  W-  5  N.  distant  4  miles;  this  harbor  is  formed  Harbor. 
by  Eyre  and  Little  Caribou  Islands,  on  the  eastern  sides,  and  by  the  main  on  the  west ; 
there  is  a  very  good  anchorage  in  from  17  to  'J'J  fathoms  water  in  it,  on  a  muddy  bottom, 
imd  yen  may  sail  in  on  either  side  of  tho  centre  island  ;  but  the  best  passage  is  between 
it  and  Little  (Jaribou. 

P'roin  (^apo  Charles  Island  to  the  Battle  Islands  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  i  N.  and  the 
distance  4i  miles  ;  this  course  will  carry  you  clear  to  the  eastward  of  the  rocks  which  lie 
II  liiri;i'  mile  to  the  eastward  of  northernmost  Battle  Island,  which  will  appear  high  and 
round  at  the  top. 

From  th(!  northernmost  Battle  Island  to  tlie  River  Islands,  your  course  will  be  N.W.  i 
W.  distant  '2  leagues:  here,  to  tho  westward  of  Poclington,  which  is  one  of  tho  River 
Islands,  you  will  find  anchorage  in  30  and  35  fathoms  water,  with  the  bottom  of  mud;  and 
vessels  may  pass  to  the  southward  of  these  islands  up  the  river  St.  Lewis. 

CUTTER  HARBOR. — From  tho  south  point  of  Poclington  Island  to  Cutter  Har-  Cutter 
bor,  the  course  is  W.  |  S.  distant  one  mile  :  in  this  harbor  tlicro  is  good  anchorage  for  Harbor. 
small  vessels. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


St.  Lewit 
River. 


St.  Lewis's 
Sound. 


DeerHarhor 


Cape  St. 
Lewis, 


Petty  Har- 
bor. 


ST.  LEWIS  RIVER. — From  tlio  iiorthorninost  Battio  Island,  to  the  entrnnco  of  the 
Rivor  St.  LowiH,  iIid  couiho  in  N.  N.  \V.  ;]  W.  distiinco  7  miles;  Htoor  in  N.W.  \  W.  5 
miles  then  N.  N.  \V  i  \V.  8  milos,  to  Woody  isiiind.  WlnMi  yon  are  aliout  4  niiit's  up 
this  river  from  its  ontnince,  you  will  find  (,'ood  anchorage,  and  this  will  conliMue  until  you 
arrive  at  VVooily  Island;  butahove  that  tlio  river  becomes  intricate  and  has  many  slioids. 
Tlio  north  point  of  the  river  is  low  for  about 'i  miles  up,  tlien  both  sides  become  ratlier  hijili 
and  woody;  at  the  head  of  the  river  are  dilTerent  kinds  of  very  fine  wood,  birch,  fir,  junipor, 
and  spruce;  and  the  river  is  plentifully  stored  with  salmon. 

ST.  LKWIS'.S  SOUND. — One  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  north  point  of  St  Lewis 
Rivi'r  lies  the  entrance  to  ,St.  Lewis's  Sound,  which  runs  up  nearly  N.  W. about  3  miles, 
having  very  good  uuchorago  at  its  upper  part,  l)ut  care  should  be  taken,  lest  a  slioul, 
which  stretches  off  from  a  sandy  beach  on  the  larboard  side,  about  2  milos  within  Um 
entrance,  should  you  do  any  injury;  you  will  therefore  bo  sure  to  give  this  a  good  berth 
in  passing. 

DKKR  HARBOR. — From  the  northernmost  Battle  Island,  to  the  entrance  of  Deor 
Harimr,  the  course  is  N.  N.  W.  i  N.  distant  2'1  leagues.  This  is  considered  to  bo  uvory 
good  harbor,  secure  from  all  winds,  and  in  which  vessels  will  find  luichorage  in  from  10  to 
18  fathoms*  there  is  no  danger  in  entering,  and  the  best  anchorage  is  at  the  back  of  Deer 
Island,  called  alsoiMarnhiini  Island.  Port  Marnham  is  formed  by  the  east  end  of  Mara- 
ham  Island  and  the  main  to  the  north  and  eastward  of  it. 

CAPE  ST.  LEWIS. — From  the  northernmost  Battio  Island,  to  Cape  St.  Lewis,  the 
course  is  N.  i  W.  distant  5  nnles;  this  cape  is  high  ragged  land;  aquarterof  a  mile  from 
the  point  there  are  two  Hat  rocky  islets,  and  several  sunken  rocks  about  the  point  of  the 
cape ;  round  the  point  is  the  entrance  of  a  small  cove  running  in  S.  W.  'l  W.  Indf  a  mile  ; 
it  is  commonly  called  Deep  Water  Creek,  being  very  narrow,  and  having  from  20  to  40 
fathoms  within  it.  About  14  mile  N.  N.  W.  J  N.  from  tho  Cajx*,  is  Fox  Harbor,  which 
is  small  and  fit  for  shallops,  but  appears  to  be  a  convenient  place  for  the  fisheries. 

PETTY  HARBi  >R. — From  the  northern  part  of  Cape  St.  Lewis,  to  the  south  head 
of  Potty  Harbor  Bay,  tho  course  is  about  N.  N.  E.  J  E.  distant  li  mile;  the  shores  are 
bold  ami  lofty;  the  entrance  is  a  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  the  north  point  boars  from  the 
southern  point  N.  E.  by  N.;  the  bay  runs  up  nearly  N.  W.  by  N.  full  one  mile,  having 
from  20  to  U)  fathoms  water  in  it.  At  tho  bottom  of  tho  bay  you  will  perceive  Petty 
Harbor;  the  entrance  is  to  the  northward  of  a  low  point  of  land,  which  shuts  the  harbor 
in  from  tho  sea,  so  as  to  render  it  very  dilFieult  to  distinguish  its  situation;  it  is  not  above 
50  fathoms  broad  at  tho  entrance,  with  5  fathoms  mid  cliannel,  and  3  towards  the  sides; 
but  this  narrow  passage  continues  only  a  short  way,  t()r,  having  passed  through  it,  the 
hnrlior  opens  wide,  and  vessels  will  have  plenty  of  room,  and  iiniy  anchor  in  any  part,  iu 
from  7  to  12  fathoms,  lying  land-locked. 

From  the  north  head  of  Petty  Harbor  Bay  to  Point  Spear,  the  course  is  N.  E.  j  N. 
distant  •2\  miles;  and  from  Capo  Lewis  to  Cape  Speai,  in  nearly  the  same  direction,  (J^ 
mil(!s;  between  are  liarren  Bay  and  Spear  Harbor;  Barron  Bay  is  a  little  to  tho  norllnvunl 
of  tin'  northern  part  of  Petty  Harbor  Bay,  and  alfords  no  shelter;  but  Spear  Ilaibor, 
which  lies  to  the  soutiiward  of  Point  Spear,  is  a  very  excellent  harbor ;  in  coming  froai 
the  northward,  and  making  Point  Sponr,  you  will  open  two  islands,  in  the  bottom  of  u 
small  buy;  the  best  passage  into  Spear  Harbor  is  between  these  islands;  keep  tho  north- 
ern islands  close  on  board,  there  being  4  fathoms  along  siile  of  it,  and  at>eryou  get  abo't 
a  cable's  length  within  the  islands,  steei'  for  the  middle  of  the  harbor,  and  anchor  in  7  or 
8  fathoms;  there  is  good  room  to  moor.  .Small  vessels  may  go  on  either  side  of  tliu 
islands,  the  least  water  being  2  fiithoms  :  but  you  ought  to  observe  that,  in  coming  from  tbo 
southward,  you  will  oidy  lie  able  to  distinguish  one  island,  for  tho  northei'iimost  islands 
will  be  shut  in  with  the  land,  so  as  not  to  be  seen  until  you  get  within  the  heails. 

SOPIHA,  CHARLOTTE,  and  MECKLENHlJlldll  HAIIIJORS.— From  Point 
Spi'ar  to  the  entrance  of  tlnise  three  harixirs,  rhe  course  is  N.  W.  by  N.  about  3  miles; 
andM-rldcti'  between  are  several  small  but  high  islands,  lying  wilhin  half  a  mile  of  the  shore;  thesn 
are.  commonly  calle.d  Spear  Islaiuls;  they  are  bold  to,  and  th«ire  are  channels  between 
them  with  20  fathoms  water.  N.  E.  by  E.  \  E.  from  the  southern  head  of  tho  entrance 
to  the  three  harbois  lie  two  small  islands,  close  togtither,  and  therefore  named  the  Donhk? 
Island;  these  apjjoar  to  l)e  as  high  as  they  are  broad;  about  a  cable's  length  to  the  east- 
wai'd  of  these  islands  are  two  snnken  rocks,  over  which  thi*  sea,  in  bad  weather,  constantly 
breaks.  Nearly  in  tln!  middle  of  the  cmtranco  also  lie  two  other  islands,  being  so  cIo.jo 
to  each  other  as  to  seem  one  island;  these  ai'o  steep  to,  and  ships  may  pass  on  either  side 
of  them  in  12, 13,  ami  14  fathoms,  anchoring  within  them,  in  (Queen's  Road,  in  IG  fathoms; 
but  to  the  southward  of  these  islands  you  will  find  tho  widest  passage,  and  most  room  for 
ships  to  work  out. 

'' -oi'HiA  Harbor  — The  first  and  southernmost  of  those  threo  harbors  is  Sophia  Harbor, 
1  :inning  in  .S.  .S.  W  about  li  mile,  with  from  10  to  15  fathoms  water ;  it  then  trcii.la 
away,  rounrl  a  low  point  to  the  eastward,  and  becomes  a  mile  broad;  it  is  iheuce  shoul 
water,  and  fit  only  for  small  vessels 


Sophia, 
Charlotte. 


burgk  I/ar- 
bors. 


S'fphia 

l.-.r. 


Mar- 


Port  Ch^ 

tho  starboarc 

over;  to  avoi 

to  the  shore, 

in  any  part  ii 

•hat  lies  on  I 

.Mfxki.km 

VV.  i  N.  mid 

t'litlioniH,  but 

tlmii  12  tathd 

tlio  larboard 

iibout  30  fatl 

liiirlior,  and  1 

of  the  harboi 

ST.  FRA 

distance  are 

burs  to  Capo 

to  the  westw 

tlioHgh  snnd 

fisheries  beiii 

boiag  to  the 

lying  directly 

inlet  called  l^ 

nsyon  enter, 

you  hav(i  5  a 

you  shoidd  b( 

reofolfit:  gi 

two  points  of 

)io  neartu-  lo 

nearer  tho  st 

you,  turn  we 

up  to  the  cov 

Capk  St. 

is  a  very  inir: 

N.  N.  Westf 

Island's  soutl 

two  narrow  < 

To  the  nortl 

running  nor 

will  have  i\v 

fathoms ;  tli 

to  5.  7,  10, 

iif  Hare,  Is 

into  S(Mdini 

SEALIN 
host  anchor 
y(ni  may  sa 
eevcriil  cove 
sels  may  aiii 
entrance  to 
nnd  Fox  Isl 
which  stretc 
very  high  in 
borrow  dos 
cliantinan  II 
from  7  to  15 
FISI1IN( 
Islnnil,  th(> 
nunilier;  tli 
Fishing  Shi 
from  5  to  14 
Isliind  ;   the 
fnnn  Hare  1 
rii^lit  throng 
anchor  in  1'. 
into  this  ])la 
nortliwar( 
row  that  yo 


•a! 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


8 


ten  of  the 
■  1  W.  5 

llllll'H  U|) 

until  jou 

y  slioiils. 

tlu>r  liit;h 

junipor, 


Port  Ciiarlottk  i«  tlio  miildlo  liarbor,  iiml  fit  for  any  nliii)»;  thero  is  ii  low  lint  i^<lllll(l  on  Port 
tho  stiirlnmrd  sido  of  its  oiitrnnri',  from  wliicli  runs  iiroofof  rockH  oiio-lliinl  of  tliotlmniiel  Charlotte, 
uvur;  lo  avoid  tliin,  koop  iho  Houtlicni  nido  on  lioiird  .  you  will  tlicii  Imvn  1)  fiillioins  close 
ti)  llio  nlioro,  tiritil  yo'i  gi'tw  (|imrtor  of  ii  milu  up  wiiliiu  (lie  Imrlior  ;  you  iriiiy  tli'-ii  iiriflior 
In  iiiiy  pint  in  from  1'.'  to  17  fittiiuins,  only  giving  tho  Htarliuitrd  side  a  lii-rtlt  to  avoid  a  roof 
rhiit  ill's  on  thai  niiio. 

.MhXKLK.NBUKiiii  [(ahhor  Ih  tli(>  niu'thcrii uiont  ofthothnv  lmrl)i)rM.  md  turns  in  N.  N.  ^ficlrlen- 
W.  i  N.  and  N.W.  by  N.  about  two  milcH  ;  in  tlio  lower  purl  of  llih:  1  .ihor  llicri'  an-  -JO  Ijniiili,  Har- 
fiitlioias,  but  as  you  aihiiiico  tho  water  Icsmimih,  and  in  the  upper  pail  tliore  lire  no  inorB  i'"". 
tjinii  I~  fatlioniB  for  n\u\)ti  to  moor  in.     'I'o  hiiII  ii|)  to  the  head  of  I  he  bay.  yiMi  must  lu'<-p 
tliu  larboard  sido  luiarust,  hi  order  to  avoid  tin*  ledj^o  of  roekn  that  lies  on  tho  stiirboni'il, 
(ihout  30  fathoius  fnau  tho  slmro.     These  rocks  lio  within  the  imrrowost  part  of  tho 
Imrlior,  and  abuvo  tho  low  |ioiiiton  tho  Btarboard  tiide;  tho  iiost  anchorage  ix  at  tho  head 
of  tho  harbor. 

ST.  FRANCIS  HARROR,— From  Point  Spoar  to  Cape  St.  Francis,  tho  conrso  and  >•'•  Francit 
(iistaiice  are  nearly  north  (i  miles,  and  from  the  Islands  at  tho  ontranco  of  the  tlii'ee  liar  ITurhur. 
burs  to  Capo  St.  Francis  N.E.  J  N.  about  5  miles;  bistween  them  and  nearly  iiiilfa  milo 
to  the  westward  of  the  cape.  U  St.  Francis  Harbor.  'J'his  is  a  snuij;  and  si^cuie  liaibor, 
tlioHuh  small  and  gonerally  (illeil  with  vessels  diiriii};  the  fishing;  season,  consideniblo 
(isheries  being  carried  on  in  its  virinity.  To  outer  this  harlior  there  are  two  entrance*,  oiio 
boiiig  to  the  northward,  tho  other  to  the  south-westward  of  Pi^^eoii  Island,  tills  i  l;md 
lying  directly  boforo  its  ontranco;  the  sfiith-oastern  chaiiiiel  leads  to  n  small  but  iiuirnw 
inlet  culled  Round  Harbor;  every  who'o  clean  grouml,  with  10  t'al bonis  in  tlie  cjiiiiinel 
n3  you  enter,  and  the  depth  gradually  ih  creasing  as  you  advance  towiirds  its  hcail.  where 
VdU  have  5  and  .'?  fathoms.  In  entiiring  to  the  south-westwiird  for  St.  Francis  ITaibnr, 
jiai  .should  b(!wiir()  of  and  given  berth  to  the  western  side  of  Pifieon  Island,  for  a  roilsy 
recfolfit:  give  this  a  berth,  jjrocoed  on  N.  N.  E.  4  N.  and  having  gott'aiily  betwe'ni  the 
two  points  of  the  harbor,  you  will  perceive  on  your  starboard  side  a.  siiiidl  white  rock;  j^o 
no  nearer  to  it  than  7  fathoms,  stoer  up  north,  and  having  passed  mid-chaiiiicl.  or  rather 
nearer  tho  starboard  shore,  tho  rocks  above  water,  which  you  will  sei*  on  each  side  of 
you,  turn  we.sti-rly,  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  Small  vessels  go  to  RirneirB  Bench,  or 
up  to  the  cove  at  tho  nortlKn'ii  extremity  of  the  harbor, 

Capk  St.  Francis  is  the  eastern  point  of  an  island,  between  whicluind  (iraiiby  Island  Cupe  St, 
is  a  very  narrow  passage  for  boats,  with  4  fathoms  wnter  in  it.  From  this  cnpe,  in  n  Francis, 
N.  N.  Westerly  direction,  about  J  of  a  milo,  is  Indian  Point,  between  whicli  and  .lasper 
Islniid's  south-eastern  point,  is  an  opening  leading  into  Indian  Riijjit  and  !~^hoiil  Tickle, 
two  narrow  coves,  tho  latler  being  shallow,  and  with  only  ii  and  Li  fathoms  water  in  it:. 
To  the  northward  of  Indian  Point  are  Hare  and  Fox  Islands,  having  a  narrow  passage 
running  northward  between  them  ;  on  ci'i'-'sing  from  Indian  I'ight  to  the  idianiiel,  you 
will  have  deep  water,  but  when  you  enter  •  passage  it  will  sliiiliow  to  .5,  4,  '.i,  and  2 
fatlionis  ;  tliis  tlat  will  continue  for  a  (|niirter  I'li  mile, you  then  di'open  your  wnter  ngiiin 
to  5,  7,  10,  and  1'-'  fathoms  ;  vessels  freipiently  anchor  in  this  place,  on  the  western  silo 
of  Hare  Island, or,  lounding  tlio  northern  end  of  Fox  Island,  run  thri/iigli  Pcarce's  Tickle 
into  Sealinij  Bight. 

SKALlNd  I'KtHT  is  a  very  commodious  and  convenient  plnce  t'lrtho  (isheries;  the  Siu'tng 
l)e.«t  nnchonii.''  on  the  .southern  part  of  the  bny,  to  the  westward  ol  -per  island  :  here  '"' 
ynu  may  safels  iido  in  8,  10,  or  11  fathoms,  c-  ftirtlicr  in  with  less  tei-.  Thn  are 
several  coves  situntcMl  along  shore,  to  the  norii  wnrd  of  this  aiadiorage.  here  smiih  ves- 
sels may  ancdior ;  freshwater  can  easily  bo  oi.  lined,  but  wood  Is  scni(  '.  thi;  soullicrn 
entrance  to  this  place  is  between  Indian  Point  and  .Inspar  Tsliitid,  on  one  -ide,  iii  1  Hare 
niid  Fox  Islands  on  tho  otlii^r;  the  water  is  deep  and  there  is  no  diiiiger,  except  i  vecf 
which  stretches  out  to  the  south-westward  from  (rull  island,  over  wliicli  the  sea  breaks 
very  liigli  in  stormy  weather;  it  will,  tlasrefore,  to  avoid  this  reef,  ■  always  iirudeiit  to 
borrow  close  towards  Indian  Point,  in  either  sailing  in  or  out  of  S- ding  BIglit.  Mer- 
ciinnfinan  Ilarlior  is  about  'J  niilos  W.  i  S.  from  St.  Francis  Island  :  it  is  sinnll,  but  has 
from  7  to  l.'j  fathoms  water. 

FISIIIXC  snip  IIAKBOR.— From  St.  Francis  Island  to  the  northMrnmostFi.slung 
Island,  the  cQUrso  is  N.  N.  E.  ^'  N.  dijtant  3  miles.  The  Fishing  Islands  are  tl  r.'o  in 
naiiiber;  the  two  northern  ones  are  ci  nnected  by  a  beach,  which,  witli  tli--  mniii,  roriiis 
Fisliiiig  Ship  Harbor,  where  vessels  mir'  ride  land-locked,  and  secure  from  all  winds,  in 
friiin  5  to  14  fathoms  water,  the  entrance  beingtothe  southward  of  the  Soutlurn  l'"lshing 
Island;  tho  best  passage  will  be  between  the  two  v.e.'^rev.i  islands,  that  entrance  bearing 
from  Hare  Island  N.  by  W. ;  there  is  no  danger  in  this  i  huiinel,  and  vessels  may  sail 
rinbt  through  it,  in  nearly  a  N.  by  W.  direction,  up  to  th"  very  head  of  the  liarl  ir,  and 
anchor  in  1'2  fathoms,  having  good  room  for  ships  to  i.inor  ;  there  are  two  other  p  i--iage3 
into  this  places  one  to  the  westward  from  the  entranci  "t'  '  ulbert's  River,  the  other  to  the 
northward  of  all  the  Fisliing  [slaiids  ;  the  latt(!r  has  7  fallioms  throughout,  but  is  so  nar- 
row that  you  will  havo  some  difficulty  iu  discovering  the  opening. 


Bigkt. 


Fishinff  Ship 
Harbo''. 


'iu 


&. 


^\a? 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


1.0 


I.I 


—    6' 


^m  iiM 

^  1^    ill  2.2 
lAO     12.0 


1.8 


1^  IIIIII.4    mil  1.6 


V 


7}. 


^W 


f^    )*' 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  Wtit  ?  v\'?<  STMIT 

WEBSTER,  N.V    1«580 

(716)  872-4503 


<? 


#3    ^        /M 


'? 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Gilbert's  GILBERT'S  RIVER — Between  Fishing  Island  nnd  Granby  Island  is  the  northern 

River.  entrance  to  Gilbert's  River;  the  southern  entrance  is  between  Denbigh  Island  and  the 

main,  and  this  is  much  the  wider  of  the  two ;  there  is  also  u  channel  between  Denbigh 

Bnd  Granby  Islands.     The  passage  in  has  deep  water  every  whore  ;  the  eourso  of  the 

river  is  nearly  N.  W.  by  N.  for  about  6  miles;  it  then  divides  into  two  branches,  one 

running  N.  W.  by  N.  7  or  8  miles,  the  other  S.  \V.  by  W.  about  6  miles:  both  these 

branches  are  full  of  rocks,  small  islands,  and  shoals;  but  in  the  middle  the  anchorage  m 

good  all  the  way  up  from  '20  to  10  fathoms :  this  river  has  also  u  passage  out  to  sea 

between  Hare  and  the  Fishing  Islands. 

Cape  SI.  CAPE  ST.  MICHAEL — Six  miles  N.  N.  E.  i  N.  from  the  northernmost  Fishing 

Michael.         Island,  and  IC  miles  N.  N.  K.  J  N.  from  Point  Spear,  is  Cape  St.  Michael,  high  and 

steep,  and  easily  known  by  a  large  bay  to  tl:e  northward  of  it. 
Occasional         OCCASIONAL  HARBOR.— About  2,i  miles  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Si.  Michael, 
Harbor.  's  Occasional  Harbor,  easily  known  by  the  twins,  two  large  rocks  lying  two-tiiirds  of  a 

mile  outside  of  the  entrance;  they  are  very  near  each  other,  and  vessels  may  puss  on 
either  side  of  them;  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  between  two  high  lands,  and  runs  in 
W.  by  N.  for  2  miles,  then  N.  W.  by  iS. ;  both  sides  are  steej)  to,  without  any  dangers, 
nnd  having  good  anchorage  in  from  10  to  7  fathoms,  about  2  miles  from  the  entrance- 
the  winil  between  the  high  lands  always  sets  right  into  or  out  of  the  harbor. 
St. Michael's  ST.  MICHAEL'S  BAY.— From  Cape  St.  Michael  to  Cape  Blurt",  the  course  is  nearly 
Bay.  N.  N.  E.  about  7i  miles,  and  these  two  capes  form  the  points  of  entrance  to  the  Bay  of 

St.  Michael,  which  contains  a  vast  nuniber  of  islands,  inlets,  and  rivers;  the  largest  isiiind 
is  named  Square  Island,  lying  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  and  being  3i  miles  long  and  very 
high;  its  N.  E.  point  forms  a  lofty  round  hill,  and  makes,  in  coming  from  the  southward, 
like  a  separate  island,  being  only  joined  by  a  narrow  neck  of  land ;  the  best  anchornge 
for  small  vessels  is  on  the  southern  side  of  St.  Michael's  Bay  ;  to  go  there  you  should 
keep  Cape  St.  Michael's  shore  on  board,  then  run  along  the  south  side  of  the  first  island 
you  meet  with,  which  is  called  Long  Island,  till  you  get  nearly  to  its  western  end,  there 
you  may  anchor  in  from  12  to  20  fathoms,  land-locked,  and  can  work  out  to  sea  again  on 
either  side  of  the  island.  From  Cajje  St.  Michael  to  the  entrance  t)f  Square  Island  Har- 
bor, the  course  is  N.  N.  W.  3i  miles;  at  the  entrance  lies  a  small  Isl;  nd  of  modenito 
height,  to  the  westward  of  which  is  the  best  passage  into  the  harbor,  there  being  only  2 
fathoms  in  that  to  the  eastward  of  it.  About  a  league  N.  N.  W.  froin  Scpiaro  Islinid 
^  round  hill  is  the  entrance  to  Deadman's  Harbor,  which  is  formed  by  a  number  of  little 

islands,  an<l  fit  only  for  vessels  of  small  dimensions.     There  is  a  passage  between  these 
islands  and  Cape  lilulV,  by  which  vessels  may  put  out  to  sea. 

Ca|)e  Blurt"  is  very  high  land,  rugged  at  top,  and  steep  toward  the  sea;  it  may  be  seen 
15  or  1(3  leagues.  Capo  BlulV  Hariair  is  a  small  place,  and  unfit  for  large  vessels  ;  to  sail 
into  it  you  should  keep  the  cape  on  board  until  you  reach  a  small  island,  which  you 
should  pass  to  the  "'istward,  and  then  anchor.  The  several  Bays  and  inlets  in  St, 
Michael's  Bay  are  well  stored  with  wood. 

From  Cape  Blnlfto  Barren  Island,  the  course  is  N.  Eastward  about  one  league ;  and 

frtun  the  south  point  of  Harren  Island  to  Snug  Harbor,  N.  W.  by  W.  14  mile.     .Snug  is 

a  small  harbor,  but  in  it  is  very  good  anchorage  in  2()  fathoms,  and  no  danger  to  be  aj)pre- 

heiuled  either  in  sailing  in  or  out  of  it.     About  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  Barren  is 

Stony  Island,  anil  within  these  islands,  on  the  main,  are  Martin  and  Otter  IJays  ;  in  fiio 

nortliernmi.'st  is  good  anchorage,  and  no  invisible  danger  in  entering  ;  wood  anil  water  are 

plentit"ul. 

Duck  DUl'K  HARBOR  lies  on  the  western  side  of  Stony  Island,  and  is  a  very  convenient 

Harbor.  place  for  small  vessels  ;  large  ships  may  also  anchor  Ix'tween  the  west  point  of  .Stony  and 

Double  Islands,  in  from  20  to  24  fathoms,  sailing  from  thence  to  seaward  on  either  jide 

of  Stony  Island  in  great  safety. 

HawkeBay.       HA  WKE  BAY. — About  oneniil:>  to  the  northward  of  Stony  IslamHics  Ilawke  Island, 

within  which   is   Ilawke   Bay,  running  in  westerly  2  leagues;  it  then  divides  into  two 

branches,  one  going  W,  by  .S.  6  miles,  the  otlu»r  N.  W.  i>y  W.  ;")  miles  ;  the  shores  of 

thest!  are  w<dl  supplied  with  wood.     After  you  get  within  Pigeon  Island,  the  anchorage 

is  gciiid  up  to  the  very  head  of  both  branches. 

Eagle  Cove.        KA(iLH  C()\'E  lies  on  the  south  side  of  Hawko  Island  ;  this  place  art'ords  good  riding 

for  large  ships  in  130  or  40  fathoms  of  water,  nnd  also  for  smidler  vessels  in  7  and  -  t'alhonis 

at  the  upper  end  of  the  Bay. 

Caplin  Bay.       CAPLlN  BAY. — On  the  main,  within  Hawke  Island,  anrl  nearly  r)  utiles  E.  by  N. 

from  Hawke  Bay,  is  Caplin  Bay,  having  good  anchorage  and  plenty  of  wood. 
Partridge  PAKTKIDGE  BAY'  lies  44  miles 'o  the  northwanl  of  Hawke  Island;  the  anchorage 

Bay.  is  good,  but  the  bay  is  dilficult  of  access,  urdess  to  those  who  are  well  ac(|uaiii!ed  with  the 

place,  ou  account  of  the  numerous  small  islands  whi(di  (incunilx-r  its  entrance;  but  the 
land  hcri^about  iiniy  be  very  easily  known,  fertile  southern  jiointof  the  bay  is  a  remsirknlilo 
high  tablit  hill  of  veiy  iiarreu  appearance,  and  all  the  land  butwoeu  it  and  St.  .'.ichuol's 
Capo  is  high,  while  that  to  the  northward  is  low. 


ippip 


wm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


e  northern 
"J  »nd  the 
n  Denbigh 
ii'""'  of  the 
nches,  one 
hoth  tliese 
iichornge  is 
out  to  8oa, 

o«t  Fishing 
il.  l»igh  and 

Si-  Michael, 
thirds  of  a 
'.V  puss  on 
iMii  runs  in 
uy  (liingors, 
entrance; 

|rso  is  nearly 

tlio  Hay  of 

irgt'st  island 

njiand  very 

southward, 

iiiiLhorngo 

you  should 

!  first  island 

I  end,  there 

INI  iijjiiin  on 

Isliiiid  Har- 

)f  moderate 

oiiig  only  2 

uiiro  Isliiiid 

|l»!r  of  little 

ween  these 

liny  ho  seen 

iscls;  to  sail 

which  you 

niots  in  St. 

fidgue ;  and 
0.  Snug  h 
to  he  uppre- 
('  i>iirren  is 
ays :  in  the 
id  water  are 

convenient 

•i  Stony  and 

eitlier  Me 

wke  Island, 
i^s  into  two 
u'  .sliori'S  of 
)  anohorage 

good  riding 
d  H  tiithonia 

!9  E.  hy  N. 

nnfdiiirago 
(m1  with  the 
•t';  lint  the 
rennirknldo 
.  .Mchaol's 


SEAL  ISLANDS. — From  Cnpe  St.  Michael  to  the  southernmost  Seal  Island,  the  Seai  Islands. 
course  is  N.  E.  i  N.  distant  nine  leagues,  and  from  thence  to  Round  Hill  Island  N.  E.  Hi 
nilcs  ;  this  latter  island  is  the  easternmost  limd  on  this  part  of  the  const,  and  may  also  be 
reco'inii^<'<l  ''Y  i  remarkable  high  round  hill  on  the  western  part  of  it. 

sflALLOV/   VAY. — From  Round  Hill  Island  to  Spotted  Island,  the  course  isN.  N.  SliallowBay. 
W.  i  N.  distaiil;  4i  miles;  and  from  .Spotted  Island  the  land  turns  N.  N.  Westerly,  and 
is  fronted  witli  numerous  Islands.     From  the  southornniost  Seal  Island  to  White  Rock, 
the  course  is  N.  N.E.  4  E.  about  5  miles;  and  from  this  rock,  to  enter  Shallow  Bay,  you  ; 

must  steer  W.  i  S.  nearly  4  miles ;  there  is  very  fair  anchorage  within  this  bay,  and  no 
diini'er,  excepting  a  small  rock  which  liesofTa  cove  on  the  larboard  hand,  about  one-third 
over  the  bay;  this  rock  is  visible  at  low  water,  and  at  other  times  the  sea  breaks  over  it: 
there  is  little  wood  visible  on  the  shores  of  this  bay. 

From  White  Rock  to  Porcupine  Island,  the  course  is  N.  N.  W.  distunt  2  leagues ;  thia 
Island  is  high,  barren,  and  steep  to ;  vessels  may  pass  on  either  side  of  it  to  Porcupine 
Bav.  where  the  riding  is  good,  but  little  or  no  wood. 

SANDY  HAY  lies  on  the  southern  part  of  the  Island  of  Ponds,  and  N.  4  W.  from  Sandy  Bay. 
White  Rock,  from  which  it  is  distant  5  miles.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  this  bay,  with 
10  fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  sand,  and  would  bo  a  very  convenient  resort  for  the 
fishing  ships,  but  for  the  total  absence  of  wood.  Between  this  bay  and  Spotted  Island 
are  niimerous  islands  and  rucks,  both  above  and  under  the  water,  rendering  this  part  of 
the  const  cixtremely  dangerous. 

SPOTTED  I.SLAND  is  high  barren  land,  and  may  be  recognized  by  several  white  S/w<terf 
spots  on  its  eastern  side;  it  is  about  3  miles  long,  and  of  nearly  a  similiar  breadth;  tho  Island. 
northern  part  lying  in  latitude  53°  30'  N.  To  tlio  westward,  and  within  side  this  island, 
is  Rocky  Bay.  To  sail  into  this  bay. you  should  run  in  to  tho  northward  of  Spotted  Island, 
and  go  lietwi^en  either  of  tho  islands  that  lie  before  the  entrance  of  the  bay  ;  but  there  is  no 
good  anchorage  in  it,  the  bottom  being  so  rocky,  until  you  get  between  Level  Point  and 
Eagle  Isliinil,  where  ycni  may  ride  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  the  ground  good  and  clean,  only 
taking  care  to  give  Level  Point  a  free  berth  ;  tlio  best  anchorage  will  be  on  the  western 
side  of  Eagle  Island,  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  mud.  In  passing  between  Eagle  Rocks  and  the 
Duck  Rooks,  you  may  borrow  on  either  side  to  within  two-thirds  of  the  length  of  a  cable, 
or  you  may  run  up  and  anchor  on  the  southern  side  of  Narrow  Island,  in  Narrow  Harbor, 
and  be  handy  for  both  wooding  and  watering. 

From  Spotted  Island  to  Wolf  Rock,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  i  N.  about  18  miles;  this 
rock  is  ab{)ve  water,  and  lies  14  miles  from  tho  main  ;  there  are  some  sunken  rocks  about 
it,  and  several  islands  between  it  and  the  coast.  About  two  miles  to  tho  norlhwanl  of 
the  entrance  to  Rocky  Bay,  is  Indian  Island;  this  is  remarkable  high  land,  particularly  at 
the  wcf'tern  end;  between  the  island  and  the  main  is  tolerably  good  shelter  for  small 
vessels,  and  it  appears  to  be  a  fit  place  for  a  seal  fishery. 

SAND  HILL   COVE. — This  place  is  so  called  from  several  sand  hills  lying  on  the  .''rtwt^  Hill 
southern  side  of  its  entrance  ;  itis  .-iluated  4  good  leagues  to  the  westwardof  Indian  Island ;  Cuvc. 
here  tli(!  aiichoraco  is  good  about  half  it  mile  up  from  its  entrance,  in  4  or  3  fathoms  water, 
sandy  ground.     When  you  are  sailing  into  this  cove,  you  should  take  care  to  give  the  north 
point  a  good  berth,  because  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  stretches  off  about  a  cable's  length 
from  the  point,  and  runs  westward  along  shore  the  length  of  two  cables. 

T..  BliE  BAY. — The  southern  head  of  this  bay  lies  about  two  leagues  N.  by  W.  from  Table  Bay. 
Sand  Hill  Cove,  and  may  be  known  by  a  remarkable  table  hill  on  the  north  side  of  the 
bay,  about  8  miles  within  the  entrance  ;  this  hill  may  be  seen  from  tho  Wolf  Rock,  which 
lies  N.  W.  i  N.  7i  leagues  from  the  (Mitrance  of  tho  bay.  In  this  bay,  about  4  miles  from 
its  entrance,  lies  Ledge  Island,  so  called  from  a  ledge  of  rocks  stretching  westerly  from 
till!  island  u|)  the  bay  for  ti  iiiilps.  On  tho  soutluu'ii  side  of  this  island  is  anchorage,  in  12 
or  11  fatlioiiis.  in  what  is  calltul  South  Harbor;  or  you  can  run  further  up,  and  andior  in 
Table  I  larbor.  On  the  north  side  of  the  Bay,  just  within  Ledjio  Island,  lies  North  Har- 
bor, having  very  good  anclKU'iige  in  it.  In  sailing  ii])  to  Table  Harbor,  you  should  take 
care  to  keep  the  main  land  close  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  ii  rock  that  lies  half  way 
between  the  ledge  that  runs  ulf  Ledge  Island  and  the  main. 

Tlie  (iANNE'l'.S  are  a  cluster  of  islands,  lying  from  7  to  11  miles  oft'  the  main  land ;  ThcGannets, 
the  oiilciiiiost  island  bears  from  the  Wtdf  Kock  N.  N.  W.  ^'  W.  distant  10  leagues. 

CUB  LEW  HARBOR  lies  nearly  S.  W.  of  the  Gannet  Islands,  on  the  main, and  may  Curlew 
bo  distinguished  by  a  green  round  island  lying  before  its  entrance;  tho  channel  into  the  Harbor. 
liarlKa-  is  betwetui  this  island  and  a  low  point  to  the  southward,  having  a  small  rock  above 
water  clost*  to  tlu!  point;  there!  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  this  place;  the  best  anchor- 
aun  will  be  about  one  niilii  within  its  tiiitraiice  ;  here  large  ships  may  ride  in  safety, 
briiigin;.'  the  small  rock  oil"  the  entrance  point  on  with  the  northern  point  of  Long  Island  ; 
they  will  tlitMi  ride  in  14  or  1.5  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground.  Long  Island  lies 
about  \h  mile  N.  by  W.  from  (Jreeii  Island.  Small  vessels  run  higher  up  the  bay,  and 
generally  anchor  in  from  10  to  7  fathoms.  On  the  southern  side  of  the  harbor  is  a  shoal, 
lying  ut  u  small  distance  from  the  siiure  ;  wood  is  scarce  in  this  buy,  hut  water  (ileutiful. 


mmm 


6 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


If.thmxu  Bay,     ISTHMUS  BAY. — This  bay  lies  round  the  western  point  of  Curlew  Harbor,  Bailing 

from  whence  you  should  endeavor  to  keep  Great  Island  on  board,  in  order  that  you  mny 

go  clear  of  a  shoal  that  stretches  off  the  point  towards  the  island.     There  is  also  another 

passage  into  Isthmus  Bay,  between  the  western  point  and  a  siiitill  bare  rock  of  moderate 

height,  that  lies  off  the  south  point  of  the  Gront  Island;  this  channel  is  narrow,  and  has  a 

dei)th  of  three  fathoms  within  it.     Both  wood  and  water  may  bo  obtained  here. 

Hare  HARE  HARBOR. — One  league  to  the  westward  is  Hare  Harbor,  fit  only  for  small 

Harbor.         craft,  the  bottom  being  foul,  except  towards  the  head,  whore  you  may  anchor  in  3^ 

fathoms  water,  the  ground  tolerably  good.     Hare  Island,  which  lies  before  the  entrance 

to  the  harbor,  is  high  land.     The  eastern  point  of  Huntingdon  Island  lies  about  2  niilosto 

the  northward  of  Hare  Island,  and  W.  S.  W.  J  W.  about  13  miles  from  Gannet  Island- 

it  is  moderately  high,  and  in  length,  from  east  to  west,  7  miles  ;  off  its  eastern  point  are 

some  small  islets,  named  Sadler's  and  Leveret's  Island,  and  a  little  to  the  northwanl  of 

the  latter  is  a  rocky  flat;  these  lie  li  mile  off  the  extreme  point  of  Huntingdon  Island. 

There  is  a  safe  passage,  above  a  mile  wide,  along  the  southern  side  of  Huntingdon  Island- 

this  leads  into  HHnting,don  Harbor,  opposite  which  you  may  ride  safely  in  from  5  to  I3 

fathoms  water ;  further  in  towards  the  island  it  shallows,  but  the  best  anchorage  is  behind 

Egg  Island,  in  6  fathoms,  near  that  Island ;  here  you  will  be  secure  from  all  winds,  and 

ride  very  convenient  for  both  wooding  and  watering,  there  being  abundance  of  both  on 

the  island. 

Sandwith  SANDWICH  BAY",  called  by  the  natives  Netsbuctoke. — On  the  south-western  side 

Bay.  of  Huntingdon  Island  are  Earl  and  Diver  Islands,  on  either  side  of  which  is  a  passage  into 

Sandwich  Bay ;  but  the  channel  between  Diver  Island  and  Earl  Island,  called  Diver's 

Tickle,  is  very  narrow,  and  has  in  some  places  not  more  then   G  feet  water,  while  that 

between  Diver  and  Huntingdon's  Islands  is  over  a  sandy  flat  9,  Vi,  and    18  feet  water, 

and  consequently  not  to  be  attempted  by  large  vessels.     To  the  eastward  is  Cartwright's 

Harbor,  leading  to  the  Favorite's  Tickle,  and  thence  to  Sandwich  Bay  :  fhis  has  det-per 

water,  and  by  keeping  the  southern  land  well  open  of  Earl's  Island,  you  will  go  tlirouuh 

it  until  you  reach  the  Narrows,  when  the  two  points  forming  the  Norrows  must  be  brought 

on  with  each  other,  and  this  will  lead  between  the  eastern  small  island  and  the  main,  in 

4,  7,  and  9  fathoms;  between  the  Narrows  are  18  fathoms.     Sandwich  Bay  is  a  very  fine 

harbor,  6  or  8  miles  broad,  and  C  leagues  deep,  with  plenty  of  wood  and  water,  and  four 

rivers  running  into  it,  abounding  with  salmon.     There  is  very  good  riding  in  a  cove  on  tlie 

eastern  side  of  the  bay,  and  also  on  the  northern  side,  under  a  mountain;  from  the  shore 

at  the  footof  the  mountain,  and  five  miles  to  the  westward,  the  soundings  stretch  gnidually 

ort'  the  shore,  from  5  to  25  fathoms,  nmddy  ground,  and  extend  full  three  miles  from  the 

land.     The  passage  into  the  bay,  on  the  western  side  of  Huntingdon  and  Earl  Islands,  is 

the  widest  and  best  channel,  for  that  to  the  southward  we  have  just  shown  to  be  narrow, 

ehallow,  and  inconvenient;  to  enter  to  the  northward  of  Huntingdon  Island  you  must 

beware  of  the  flats  which  lie  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Leveret's  Island  ;  there  is  deep 

water  at  the  entrance,  and  you  will  see  the  Island  of  Plantation  to  the  northward,  a  little 

to  the  westward  of  which  is  Henrietta's  Island  ;  between  these  two  is  Independent  Harbor, 

a  snug  retreat  running  in  north,  and  having  every  convenience  for  the  fisheries.     Directly 

before  this  harbor,  and  in  the  fairway  of  the  channel  to  Sandwich,  are  the  Double  Islands ; 

in  entering  you  will  leave  Wedge  Island  and  Bellows  Rock  to  the  nurtliward,  and  Gull 

Island  to  the  southward,  and  pass  on  eitlicir  side  of  the  Double  Islands;  your  course  then 

will  b(!  N.  W.  by  W.  44  miles;  and  having  got  beyond  the  N-  W.  point  of  IIuniiiigili)D 

Island, you  will  perceive  Entrance  Island  lying  midway  betw(!en  the  point  and  the  opposite 

shore :  the  channel  now  bends  to  the  S.  \Vi?stward.  and  is  bounded  to  the  northward  by 

the  North  River  Flats,  and  to  the  south  by  Huntingdon  Flats,  the  deep  water  passage 

being  about  a  mile  broad:  you  may  sail  in  on  either  side  of  Entrance  Island;  proceed  W. 

by  .S.  towurds  Main  Tickle  Point;  from  off  this  point  a  spit  extends  E.  N.  IC.  \h  mile, 

contracting  the  channel,  and  making  the  navigable  passage  very  narrow  for  large  ships  to 

enter:  on  the  starboard  side  are  the  two  Brenton  Islands,  situated  in  Table  Hill  Cove; 

when  you  get  these  open  of  each  other,  a  lini!  passing  directly  between  them,  or  when 

the  North  Hrenton  opens  its  own  length  to  the  eastward  of  the  southern  one,  you  will 

clear  the  spit  in  4i  fathoms;  when  these  islands  come  on  with  each  other,  you  will  pass 

over  the  spit  in  2  fathoms  water  ;  the  cross  mark  is  Green  and  Leading  .Mark  Islands  in 

one  ;  these  lead  on  to  the  centre  of  the  spit,  and  are  two  Islands  situated  im  I  Inntiiigdon 

Flats;   the  leading  mark  to  go  through  the  Main  Tickle  Passage  is  Leading  >!ark  Island 

on  Old  Man's  Head:  this  will  carry  you  clear  of  the  shoals  on  i)oth  sides,  in  from  (i  to  14 

fathoms,  right  into  Sandwich  Bay  ;  to  sail  out  of  the  bay, bring  the  ludlow  part  of  Leading 

Mark  Island  in  one  with  the  gaj)  of  Old  .Man's  IL^ad,  until  you  are  within  three  rallies' 

length  of  the  former,  then  give  the  island  a  berth  of  equal  distance  in  passing,  and  steer 

direct  for  Entrance  Island. 


mmmm 


mmmimmifmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


[arbor,  sailing 
thnt  you  mny 
>  also  another 

of  modernte 
)w,  and  ha8  a 
lere. 

Illy  for  small 
xnclior  in  3i 
the  entrance 
)ut  2  miles  to 
innet  Ibliind; 
ern  point  are 
northward  of 
igdon  Island, 
igdon  Island; 

from  5  to  I3 
■age  is  behind 
ill  winds,  and 
!e  of  both  on 

western  side 

I  passage  into 
ailed  Biver's 
ir,  while  that 
3  feet  water, 
Cartwi-ifjht's 
s  has  deeper 

II  go  tliroush 
3t  be  brought 
I  the  main,  in 

is  a  very  tine 
ter.  and'  four 
a  cove  on  the 
:)in  the  shore 
tch  gradually 
iles  from  the 
nrl  Islands,  is 
lO  be  narrow, 
nd  you  must 
there  is  deep 
iward.  a  little 
dent  Harbor, 
;b.  Directly 
ublo  Islands; 
iird,  and  Gull 
r  course  then 
Huntingdon 
1  the  op])osite 
lorthwiird  by 
k'ater  passage 
;  proceed  W. 
.  11.  lA  mile, 
large  sliips  to 
le  Hill  Cove; 
3m,  or  when 
one,  you  will 
you  will  pass 
irk  Islands  in 
lluntiiigd(jn 
>:nrk  Isliind 
from  (1  to  14 
rtof  Leading 
three  rabies' 
ng,  and  steer 


FROM  CHATEAUX  BAY  TO  THE  ESQUIMAUX  ISLANDS,  AT  THE 

ENTRANCE  OF  THE  RIVER   ST.  LAWRENCE.  /    ; 

Variation  alloived  2  Points. — It  now  is  (1850)  2i  Points. 

from  Ybi '  Point,  the  southern  entrance  of  Chateaux  Bay,  to  Barge  Point,  the  courae 
gnil  distance  are  W.  by  S.  5i  leagues;  from  Barge  Point  to  Saddle  Island  is  nearly  west 
|0  miles;  between  these  is  Green  Bay,  b  place  whore  small  vessels  may  anchor  in  12  fath- 
oms water,  but  open  to  the  S.  Easterly  winds 

RE  ii  BAY. — This  is  an  excellent  harbor,  and  may  always  bo  known  by  Saddle  Island,  Red  Bay, 
^hich  lies  at  its  entrance;  this  island  rises  up  at  each  end,  and  sinks  down  in  the  middle, 
somewhat  similar  to  a  saddle ;  there  is  also  a  remarkable  round  hill  on  the  western  side  of 
the  bay,  and  opposite  to  the  west  end  of  Saddle  Island,  which  will  tend  to  point  out  the 
harbor;  the  land  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay  is  high,  the  eastern  side  rather  low,  and 
the  head  of  the  bay  is  high  and  woody:  in  sailing  into  this  place  there  is  little  danger, 
the  passage  is  to  the  westward  of  Saddle  Island,  only  taking  care  to  give  a  berth  to  the 
rock,  which  at  a  quarter  ebb  is  above  water,  and  lies  off  the  western  point  of  the  main 
laud,  and  also  not  to  come  too  near  to  the  inner  part  of  Saddle  Island,  as  a  shoal  stretches 
otf  it  about  the  length  of  a  cable.  The  western  bay  lies  in  to  the  northward  of  the  west- 
ern point,  and  has  very  good  anchorage  with  westerly  winds,  but  somewhat  open  to  the 
eastward;  there  is  no  passage,  except  for  boats,  to  the  eastward  of  Saddle  Island;  vessels 
coming  from  the  eastward  must  be  careful  to  go  clear  of  a  small  rock,  which  lies  about  a 
mile  from  the  two  black  rocky  islets,  which  are  at  the  east  end  of  Saddle  Island,  and  near 
a  mile  off  the  shore:  the  high  round  hill  at  the  west  side  of  the  bay  on  with  the  saddle 
of  Saddle  Island,  will  lead  you  directly  upon  the  rock,  and  the  sea  commonly  breaks 
oyer  it. 

BLACK  BAY  lies  to  the  W.  S.  Westward,  distant  10  miles  from  Saddle  Island;  the  Black  Bay. 
anchorage  here  is  tolerably  good,  but  too  much  exposed  to  the  S.  E.  winds.  S.  W.  by 
S,  from  Ship  Head,  which  ia  the  western  point  of  entrance  to  Black  Bay,  distant  1^  mile, 
is  St.  Modeste  Island;  it  is  small  and  low,  but  vessels  frequently  run  into  a  place  within 
the  island,  called  St.  Modeste  Bay,  and  anchor;  but  this,  though  occasionally  used,  can- 
not be  recommended. 

WOLF'S   COVE,   OR   L'ANCE   DE   LOUP.— S.   W.  by  S.  from  St.  Modeste  Wolfs  Cme, 
Islmid,  distant  4^  miles,  begin  some  remarkable  red  cliffs,  which  continue  full  2  miles,  or  L'Ance  de 
ami  form  the  eastern  point  of  Wolf's  Cove;  this  is  high  table  bind,  terminating  with  steep  Loup. 
dill's  towards  the  sea.    The  entrance  to  Wolf's  Cove  is  about  2  miles  wide,  the  two  points 
of  the  cove  bearing  from  each  other  S.  W.  and  N.  E. ;  there  is  good  anchorage  at  the 
head  of  this  cove  in  12  fathoms  water,  and  also  on  the  western  side,  in  Schooner's  Cove, 
wliere  small  vessels  may  lie  safely  in  7  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of  sand. 

FORTE AU  BA  Y  liosS  or  6  miles  to  the  westward  of  Wolf's  Cove ;  the  shore  between  ForleauBay. 
them  is  rather  low :  Forteau  Bay  is  about  3  miles  broad,  and  runs  in  nearly  the  same 
(iistiince;  on  the  western  side,  near  the  head  of  the  bay,  is  good  riding,  in  from  10  to  16 
fathoms,  but  exposed  to  the  southward.  Olf  (he  east  point  of  the  bay  is  a  rock,  which  ap- 
pears like  a  shallop  under  sail ;  and  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay  is  a  fall  of  water,  whicii, 
on  coming  from  the  eastward,  will  easily  be  perceptible.  West  7  miles  from  the  western 
point  of  Forteau  Bay  is  Island  au  Bois,  and  2  miles  westward  of  that  is  Green  Island;  the 
former  of  these  is  of  moderate  height,  and  has  a  good  passage  round  it;  it  lies  in  front  of 
Blanc  Sablon  Bay,  where  a  vessel  may  occasionally  find  anchorage;  but  the  ground  is 
looHB  sand,  and  will  not  hold.  The  channel  between  Bois  and  Green  Islands  is  good,  and 
has  11  fathoms  water  in  it ;  there  is  a  cove  on  the  eastern  side  of  Green  Island,  where  a 
fisiiory  is  sometimes  carried  on ;  there  is  also  a  passage  between  Green  Island  and  the 
main,  which  leads  to  Brador  Bay  and  Harbor;  but  you  should  be  careful  to  give  Grand 
Po'Ht  a  good  berth  in  passing,  as  some  sunken  rocks  lie  directly  off  it. 

LABRADOR  HARIUJR. — From  Green  Island  to  Island  of  Ledges,  the  course  is  Labrador 
nearly  north,  distant  5  miles;  tlie  Harbor  of  Brador  may  readily  be  known  by  the  land  be-  Harbor. 
tweoii  it  and  Point  Belle's  Amour:  the  point  itself  is  low  and  green,  but  about  a  rnile  in- 
land it  rises  up  to  high  table  land ;  and  further  inland  are  three  remarkable  hills,  called  Our 
Lady's  Bubbles;  these  are  round,  and  may  be  seen  all  along  the  coast,  lying  to  the  N. 
Eastward  about  2  leagues  distant  from  the  Island  of  Ledges;  this  island  is  of  modernte 
heij^ht.  having  a  great  many  islets  and  rocks  about  it;  on  its  eastern  side  is  Blubber  Cove, 
whore  small  vessels  maj'  anchor  in  2  and  vJi  fathoms.  There  are  two  i)assages  into  Brador 
Harbor,  but  that  to  the  northward  of  the  Island  of  Ledges  is  by  no  means  safe,  on  account 
of  the  number  of  rocks  scattered  about  it.  To  enter  the  eastern  passage,  you  must  take 
care  to  avoid  a  small  rock,  which  lies  about  S.  W.  by  W.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the 
low  point  on  the  main,  wliere  the  houses  stand;  on  this  rock  the  sea  commonly  breaks 
and  shows  itself  at  quarter  ebb  ;  on  the  eastern  side,  within  this  rock,  is  Shallop  Cove; 


g  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

from  the  point  nbove  the  cove  n  shonl  stmtohog  off  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore 
and  continues  noarly  the  same  distiinco  (juite  to  tlio  head  of  the  harbor.  ' 

Esquimaux        ESQUIMAUX  R^'KR  AND  BAY  —From  Point  Bollo's  Amour  to  the  outer  Rs- 
/?i«er  tS'Bav.  q"'"""'"  Island,  the  course  and  distimoo  aro  W.  by  S.  10  or  11  miles,  N.  N.  E.  about  4 
miles  from  which  there  is  Rood  iiiichorage,  between  two  high  islands,  for  small  vessels- 
and  within  these  lies  the  River  Esquimaux.     From  hence  to  Dog  Island  is  a  chain  or 
cluster  of  small  islands  and  rocks,  the  easternmost  of  which  are  commonly  called  the 
Esquimaux  Islands ;  tiie  middle  ones,  the  Old  Fort  Islands ;  and  the  western  ones,  the 
Dog  Islands;  within  these,  and  on  the  main  land,  are  various  good  bays  and  places  of 
shelter;  but  the  entrances  to  thiMU  are  so  intricate,  narrow  and  dangerous,  that  no  per- 
son,  unless  well  acquainted,  should  attempt  to  navigate  a  vessid  through  them.      These 
islands  extend  from  the  outer  Esquinniux  Island  nearly  4  leagues,  and  some  of  theraare 
full  4  miles  frmn  the  land. 
Little  Bay.         LITTLE  BAY. — W.  N.  W.  about  5  miles  from  the  Dog  Islands,  is  Little  Bay,  in 
which  small  vessels  may  (ind  very  good  anchorage  ;  nearly  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Lit- 
tle Bay,  is  the  Bay  D'Omar ;  this  Bay  runs  up  N.  E.  by  N.  nearly  3  miles,  the  land  on 
both  sides  being  very  high,  but  the  western  shore  is  the  highest ;  its  width  is  about  two 
cables'  length,  but  off  the  coves  it  is  broader  ;  outside  of  the  eastern  point  of  the  buy  are 
two  small  islets  a  cable's  length  from  land.     This  bay  has  good  anchorage,  the  best  ])liice 
being  2  miles  within  the  entrance,  opposite  a  woody  cove  on  the  west  side,  whore  you 
will  lie  secure  in  14  and  lO"  fathoms,  with  abundance  of  wood  and  water.     On  the  west 
dide,  also,  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  is  a  remarkable  green  cove,  but  this  becomes  slionl 
a  short  distance  from  the  shore.     From  the  entrance  of  tho  Bay  D'Omar  to  Bowl  Isliind 
the  course  and  distance  ar^  W.  S.  W.  4  S.  2  miles.     This  is  a  remarkable  round  island', 
of  moderate  height,  and  lies  a  mile  from  the  main  land  ;  about  it,  and  between  Bowl  Island 
and  Shecatica,  aro  a  great  number  of  islets  and  rocks,  the  coast  being  thereby  rendered 
dangerous  to  navigate,  unless  you  have  a  fresh  of  wind  ;  tho  rocks  will  then  show  them- 
selves by  the  sea  breaking  over  them. 

From  Bowl  Island  to  Sliecatica,  the  course  is  W.  by  N.  about  2  leagues;  and  3  miles 

E.  N.  E.  from  Shecatica  Island  is  th(<  Bay  of  Petit  Pene,  running  in  N.  N.  E.  about  5 

miles  ;  but  this  place  is  scarcely  fit  for  vessels  to  go  into,  because  the  water  is  too  deep, 

the  entrance  too  narrow,  tho  ground  bad,  and  the  wholo  l)ay  open  to  the  southerly  winds. 

Mistanogue        MiSTANOtUIK  BAY  lies  about  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  Petit  i'ene  ;  there  is  a 

Bay.  good  channel  between  the  Island  Shecatica  and  the  main,  and  many  seals  are  frequently 

caught  there.     Before  the  entrance  to  the  Bay  of  Mistanogue  lies  an  island  of  the  sanie 

name  ;  here,  between  the  island  and  tho  river,  the  anchorage  is  good,  with  from  1  j  to  20 

fathoms  water;  the  grounil  holds  well,  and  there  is  room  enouLdi  tn  moor.     To  go  into 

this  road,  you  should  pass  round  the  western  end  of  tht;  island,  which  is  bold  to,  or  else 

,  round  its  eastern  end,  and  between  it  and  Shecatica;  but  this  bitter  passage  is  lit  otdy  I'ur 

~  small  vessels.     In  the  Bay  of  Mistanogue  the  anohorage  is  good  up  to  the  very  licail, 

the  channel  is  both  long  and  narrow  ;  the  island  and  the  main  land,  at  tht;  entnmce,  h;is  a 

barren  appearance,  and  is  high  ;  but  both  wood  and  wati'r  may  bo  DlitaitUMi  in  the  buy. 

Shecatica  SHECATICA  BAY  runs  close  in  to  the  westward  of  Mistimogue  Island,  and  extcmls 

Bay.  many  miles  up  the  country,  its  course  bending  to  the  northward,  anil  having  varinus 

brandies  and  turnings,  with  numerous  islands,  capable  of  giving  sludter  to  vessels  of  nil 

descriptions;  but  these  are  little  frequiMited,  and  consequently  not  wtdl  known;  besides 

the  passages  are  too  inirrow  for  strangers  to  attempt  the  navigation  of 

Shag  Island       SHA(J  ISLAND  AND  ROCKS.— Nearly  S.  W.  by  W.  distant  above  2  leagues  from 

and  Rocks,     tho  Is';     '  of  Mistanogue,  is  the  Shag  Island  and  Rocks;  tho  island  is  small,  higli,  and  iiiis 

a  round  peeked  hill  in  the  middle  ;  to  the  eastward  of  it  are  a  number  of  rocks  above  water. 

the  outermost  Iving  E.  S.  E.  A  E.  one  mile  and  one-third  from  tho  island. 

Cumberland       CUM15KRLAND  HARBOR  lies  N.  N.  E.  i  N.  about  three  miles  from  the  enter 

Harbor,  Shag  Rocks,  anil  nuiy  readily  be  distinguished  by  a  reirnirkable  high  hill  on  the  main  land, 

ap|)earing  like  a  castle  at  its  summit,  being  a  st(!ep  dilf  looking  like  walls  ;   this  hill  lies  N. 

by  W.  nearly  3  i  leagues  from  the  ontrance  to  the  liarl)or.    The  (uiter  Islniuls,  which  form 

the  harbor,  are  called  the  Duke  anil  Cumberland  Islands  ;  these  aro  moderatidy  high,  tiie 

eastern  one  making  in  two  round  hills.     'I'o  enter  ihisliarbio'  there  is  no  danger  but  wliiit 

appears  above  water,  exce|)t  one  small  rock,  which  lies  sontii  about  half  a  mile  from  the 

western  head  :  the  entrance  to  tho  harbor  is  a  quarlcr  of  a  mile  wide,  and  the  iidc^t  half  a 

mile  long  ;  from  the  eastern  head  you  must  stei^r  t()r  tho  inner  point  on  the  western  side. 

uud  after  you  reach  that  point,  haul  over  to  the  eastward,  ami  anchurin  from  20  to  7  fiitli- 

oms,  excellent  uround,  and  room  enough  for  any  ships  :  this  is  by  fir  the  most  c<nninodi- 

ous  and  best  harlior  on  the  coist,  and  also  the  easiest  ef  access;  fresh  water  is  plentiful, 

but  f  )r  woimI  von  most  no  to  Shecatica  Bav, 

Snndylsland     S.VNDV  ISLAND  i'.W.— N.  W.  by  .\.  about  2A  mib's  from  Shag  Island,  is  thelmy 

Buy.  anil  harbor  of  San  iy  Isl  nid  ;  to  sail  into  this  yim  slimiM  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  \|urr 

Rocks,  kcepiir,'  the  st;irboar.l  poiiit  ol"  the  bay  on  boai-il  ;  you  will  tlii-ii  jierceivo  a  sinall 

rock  ttbovo  water  to  the  N.  N.  Westward  :  this  lies  olf  the  ontrancH  to  tho  harbor;  you 


S.  S.  E. 
known  by 
there  are 
from  tho  1 
N.  N.  We 
snfe  passag 
fioai  all  wii 
however, 
islands. 

This  par 
weather,  < 
the  latter 
therefore, 

H.\  HA 
small  islanc 
lies  betwet 
thi-i  is  a  wi 
ill  to  tho  ni 
within  tilt 
wnter ;  ves 
14  fathoms 
N.  about  t 
heai'  N. 
will  havi 
which  tliei 

LITTI. 
jt  is  small, 
(he  island; 
to  the  sou 
from  tho 


^wMinp^M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


may  pni^  on  either  side  of  this  rocii,  and  tlien  steer  in  N.N.  E.  i  N.  For  the  hnrbor;  there 
I,  no  other  danger;  here  you  will  have  room  enough  to  moor  in  5  and  6  fathoms  water, 
with  eood  ground  and  safe  riding;  there  is  no  wood  here,  but  water  in  plenty. 

PORT  AND  RIVER  ST.  AUGUSTINE.— The  entrance  to  the  Port  and  River  St.  Portand  Riv- 
Xugustine,  is  between  Shng  Island  and  St.  Augustine  Square;  the  West  Island,  which  is  er  St.  Augtu- 
nioiloiately  high,  the  western  part  being  the  highest,  and  quite  low  in  the  middle,  butnot(in«. 
easily  to  be  distinguished  at  a  distance,  on  account  of  f'  e  islands  within  it  being  much 
liiolier;  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  this  is  the  kast  Island,  somewliat  larger,  not 
qmte  so  high,  but  oven  at  the  summit;  between  those  islands,  after  passing  the  Chain  and 
Square  Islands,  is  a  snfe  passage  for  small  vessels  to  enter  this  port;  and  they  can  anchor 
between  the  West  and  Round  Islands,  or  run  to  the  northward,  pass  Round  Island,  and 
stop  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  with  plenty  of  room  to  moor.  S.  W.  by  W.  about  half  a  league 
from  west  part  of  St.  Augustine's  Islands,  is  a  string  of  small  islands,  commonly  .called  St. 
Augustine's  Chain,  the  outermost  of  which  is  a  remarkable  smooth  round  rock,  and  to  the 
ift'Stwnrd  of  this,  one  quarter  of  a  mile,  are  several  rocks  under  water,  over  which  the  sea 
is  coiwtnntly  breaking;  some  of  these  are  visible  at  one-third  ebb:  half  a  mile  W.  S.  W. 
from  these  is  a  high  black  rock  abovo  water,  and  between  these  two  is  the  best  passage  for 
liirgu  vessels  into  the  Port  of  St.  Augustine.  You  should  steer  from  this  black  rock,  to- 
waiils  a  remarkable  low  point,  which  will  bear  N.  N.  E.  }  N.  until  you  open  the  port; 
[hen  haul  in  and  anchor  as  before  directed;  or  you  may  steer  up  the  passage  between  this 
point  iind  Round  Island,  and  anchor. 

THE  RIVER  ST.  AUGUSTINE  is  4i  leagues  from  the  entrance  of  the  port,  and  River  St.  Av- 
lies  to  the  N.  N.  W.  having  several  islands  lying  in  the  passage;  but  the  river  is  shallow,  gustine. 
and  only  fit  for  boats  to  enter;  there  is  a  sandy  bar  across,  which  dries  at  low  water     Two 
miles  up,  it  divides  into  two  branches,  bot'i  running  to  the  N.  N.  Westward  for  14  or  15 
leagues;  wood  and  water  are  plentiful. 

From  St.  Augustine's  Chain  to  the  bluff  head  of  Great  Mecatina  Island,  the  course  and 
distance  are  W.  S.  W.  8  leagues  and  1  mile;  the  coast  is  lined  with  islands,  within  and 
shout  which  are  many  harbors ;  the  main  land,  in  sailing  along  this  part  from  Shecatica  to 
Ha  Ha  Bay,  cannot  be  seen,  and  the  adjacent  islands  are  so  high,  so  numerous,  and  so 
near  each  other,  that  although  there  are  navigable  passages  between  them,  yet  you  cannot 
discover  their  entrances,  nor  perceive  them  to  be  islands,  until  you  get  near  and  entangled 
among  them. 

EAGLE  HARBOR. — This  lies  at  the  western  end  of  Long  Island,  to  the  eastward  Eagle  Hat- 
of  Ha  Ha  Buy,  and  is  formed  by  a  cluster  of  islands,  being  capable  of  holding  a  great  5or. 
number  of  vessels  in  security;  in  it  are  from  20  to  10  fathoms  water,  the  ground  holding 
well.  In  order  to  find  out  this  anchorage,  it  will  be  advisable  to  make  for  the  Great  Island 
of  Mecatina,  from  whence  you  should  shape  j'our  course  for  the  Fox  Islands,  which  lie 
S.  S.  E.  4  S.  one  large  mile  from  the  westernmost  entrance  of  the  harbor;  it  may  also  be 
known  by  a  deep  bay  to  the  eastward,  without  any  islands  in  it,  while  to  the  westward 
there  are  a  great  many.  But  if  you  intend  sailing  in  to  the  eastward,  you  should  steer 
from  the  Fox  Islands  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  2i  miles,  into  the  bay.  when  you  will  observe  to  the 
N.  N.  Westward  of  you,  a  remarkable  high  island,  round  which,  to  the  northward,  is  a 
safe  passage  of  3  fathoms  into  the  harbor,  where  you  will  ride  with  safety,  well  sheltered 
from  all  winds.  In  the  western  passage  to  this  harbor,  there  are  24  fathoms;  this  is, 
however,  a  narrow  channel,  lit  only  for  small  vessels,  and  running  in  between  many  small 
islands. 

This  part  of  the  coast  is  very  dangerous  for  any  vessels  to  fall  in  with,  in  dark  and  foggy 
weather,  on  account  of  the  infinite  numbe)' of  small  low  islets  and  rooks  al)()Ut  it,  many  of 
the  latter  being  under  water,  and  to  avoid  which  no  practical  mark  can  l)o  given;  it  will, 
therefore,  always  be  advisable  and  prudent  to  keep  off  the  coast  to  a  considerable  distonce. 

HA  riA  B.\Y  lies  on  the  main,  to  the  westward  of  Eogle  Harbor,  and  has  several  Ha  Ha  Bay. 
small  islands  at  its  entrance,  forming  separate  entrances;  the  best  of  tliese  is  that  which 
lies  between  Seal  Point  and  Round  Island,  leaving  all  the  islaniis  on  the  starboard  side ; 
tliH  is  a  wide  and  sale  passage,  having  no  danger  but  what  is  visible  Ha  Ha  Bay  runs 
ill  to  the  northward  about  7  miles,  and  has  many  islands  at  its  head,  on  the  starboard  side; 
witliin  these  islands,  to  the  eastward,  are  numerous  anchorages.  wilVi  from  9  to  20  fathoms 
wnti'r  ;  vessels  may  also  occasionally  anchor  all  along  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay  in  12  and 
14  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  but  on  tho  western  side  the  water  is  too  deep.  N.  N.  W.  4 
N.  about  two  niilris  from  the  entrance  on  llie  west  side,  is  a  high  binlf  head;  round  this 
hoai'  N.  W.  by  W.  half  a  mile,  is  a  small,  but  safe  harbor  for  small  vessels,  in  which  you 
will  have  12  fathoms,  good  ground ;  this  harbor  is  formed  by  an  island,  on  either  side  of 
wliich  theri^  is  a  narrow  but  safe  passage. 

LITTLE  FISH  HARBOR  is  to  the  southward  of  Ila  Ha  Bay,  and  runs  in  westerly;  Little  Fish 
it  is  small,  and  formed  by  an  island  covered  with  wood;  you  may  sail  in  on  either  side  of  Harboi: 
[ho  island;  but  the  northern  passage  is  considered  to  be  tho  better  of  the  two;  in  tlie  bay 
to  the  southward  of  the  island,  is  a  ledge  of  rocks,  partly  visible  at  all  times.     S.  E.  by  E. 
from  the  Woody  Island  Uea  a  rock,  ou  which  are  only  2  fathoms  at  low  water.    You  may 

2 


10' 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cheat   Meea 
tina  bland. 


Meeatina 
Harbor, 


The  Grand 
Pointof Meea- 
tina. 


Bay  de  Por- 
tage. 


anchor  in  the  harbor  at  the  bock  of  this  ieinnd  in  7  or  8  futhoms,  nnd  hnvo  plenty  of  room 
to  moor.  Off  the  northern  point  at  the  entrance  to  this  harbor,  called  Seal  Point,  are  t^o 
little  JBlaiids,  and  a  small  sandy  cove,  where  a  seal  lieheiy  is  carried  on. 

Between  Fish  Harbor  and  Hu  Ha  Bay  there  is  ii  very  reniarknble  round  high  Iii|| 
making  a  peak,  which  may  serve  as  a  landmark  to  point  out  either  of  these  places  of 
anchorage. 
-  GREAT  MECATINA  ISLAND  lies  threemilesoff  the  main  land;  itisSi  miles  long 
and  about  3  miles  broad,  being  the  most  remnrknblo  land  at  this  part  of  the  const;  it  rises 
up  in  the  middle,  which  is  much  higher  than  either  of  the  ends;  its  K.  N.  E.  point  ninkes 
like  a  bluff  head,  and  round  this  head  to  the  northward,  within  a  cluster  of  small  islands 
there  is  a  cove  running  in  about  one  mile  and  a  half;  in  this  cove  vessels  can  safely  ap^ 
chor,  in  from  14  to  20  fathoms,  good  ground,  and  may  obtain  both  wood  and  water. 

MECATINA  HARBOR. — 'I'his  harbor  is  formed  behind  Meeatina  Island  on  thenmin 
it  is  safe  but  small,  yet  will  admit  vessels  of  burthen,  there  being  not  less  than  3  fiitlionis 
at  low  water,  in  either  passage  to  it;  but  they  must  moor  head  and  stern,  there  being  no 
room  to  moor  otherwise.  To  sail  in  through  the  western  passage  tliere  is  no  danger,  but 
to  sail  in  through  the  eastern  channel  you  must  observe  the  following  dirt'ctions.  From 
the  eastern  point  of  Meeatina  Island  steer  north  towards  the  main  land;  keep  that  close 
on  board  until  you  get  the  western  point  of  the  island  on  with  the  point  of  Dead  Cove;  tliis 
is  a  small  cove  on  the  main,  which  lies  open  to  the  eastward;  the  land  which  forms  it  ij 
very  low,  with  some  brushwood  upon  it;  then  sail  on  in  that  direction  until  you  get  above 
a  stony  point,  which  is  to  the  north  side  of  the  said  cove;  or  until  you  brinn  the  north 
point  of  Gull  Island,  which  is  a  small  island  lying  E.  by  N.  distant  one  mile  from  MocatinH 
Island,  on  with  the  E.  N.  E.  point  of  Meeatina  Island;  you  will  then  bo  within  a  spit  of 
rocks  which  stretches  off  the  island,  and  must  haul  over  for  Meeatina  Island,  in  order  to 
avoid  a  ledge  which  runs  off  from  the  point  of  Dead  Cove;  and  when  you  bring  the  west- 
ern passage  open,  you  may  anchor  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water.  Vessels  coming  from  tiio 
eastward,  and  bound  for  the  Harbor  of  Meeatina,  in  passing  to  the  northward  of  GuH 
Island,  should  be  careful  either  to  keep  (Jull  Island  or  the  main  land  dose  on  board,  in 
order  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock  that  lies  near  half  way  between  Gull  Island  and  the  main,on 
one  part  of  which  there  are  not  above  3  feet  water.  The  highest  part  of  the  land  between 
Grand  Point  and  Ha  Ha  Bay  is  directly  over  the  Harbor  of  Meeatina. 

THE  (JRAND  POINT  of  MECATINA  is  theextremity  of  a  promontory,  which  runs 
out  from  the  main  land ;  it  is  low  at  the  point,  but  rises  inland,  sloping  gnidunlly  up  until 
it  becomes  of  con8ideral)le  height;  it  may  easily  be  recognized  i)y  the  adjacent  islands  nnd 
rocks  which  are  about  it;  the  nearest  is  a  small  low  rock,  not  far  from  the  point;  two  of 
these  islands  are  much  larger,  and  rise  much  higher  than  the  others;  and  the  outfrniost 
are  small  low  rocky  islands,  lying  2i  miles  off  the  point.  S.  E.  by  E.  live  miles  and  a  li«|f 
from  the  Grand  Point  are  the  Murr  Islands  and  rocks,  and  these  are  the  most  soiiijicily 
islands  on  all  the  const.  The  northernmost  Murr  Island  bears  from  the  other  north  a  Ijtle 
westerly,  distant  one  mile:  they  are  remarkable  objects,  being  two  barren  rocks,  of  mode- 
rate height  and  steep  all  round.  About  half  a  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the  soutliern  Murr  isl- 
and, are  the  two  Murr  Rocks,  both  appearing  above  water,  and  E.  i  S.  from  the  same 
island  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  under  water,  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks. 

BAY  DE  PURTACiE.— N.W.  by  N.  from  the  Murr  Islands,  distant  two  len-iues,  is 
the  Bay  de  Portage,  the  land  over  which  makes  in  a  valley,  each  side  being  liigli;  nt  its 
entrance  lies  an  island  of  moderate  height,  which  forms  the  harbor;  you  may  enttron 
either  side  of  this  island,  but  the  eastern  passage  is  It  only  for  small  vessels,  there  heinfr 
only  2  fathoms,  in  some  parts  of  it,  at  low  water.  The  western  channel  is  suflicionily 
largo  nnd  safe  for  any  vessel  to  turn,  there  being  from  6  to  8  fathoms  in  it;  but  they  must 
be  careful  to  avoid  two  sunken  rocks,  on  which  are  only  2i  fathoms  at  low  water.  The 
northernmost  of  these  lies  from  .Mutton  Island  S.  by  W.  distant  one  mile  and  a  half;  tlie 
southernmost  rocks  bear  from  the  !Seal  Rocks  N.  E.  %  N.  distant  half  a  mile ;  they  are  bciih 
bold  to.  and  vessels  may  borrow  within  a  cable's  length  of  Mutton  Island  or  the  Seal 
Rocks. 

Courses  and  Distances  from  Island  to  Island  along  the  Coast,  between  Grand  Pokl 
and  Shecatica,  which  courses  will  carry  you  outside  of  all  ttic  other  Islands  and  Hocks. 

From  Grand  Point  of  Meeatina  to  the  outer  rocks  the  coarse  and 

distance  are S.S.E  h  E.     2i 

the  outer  rocks  to  the  Murr  Rocks E.S  E.  i  S.    3.i 

Murr  Rocks  to  Flat  Island E.N.E.  j  E.  5 

Flat  Island  to  Treble  Hill  Island N.E.  by  N.    5^ 

Treble  Hill  Island  to  Fox  Islands,  a  cluster  of  islands  lying  S. 

h  E.  from  Eagle  Harbor N.N.E.  ?  E.  9 

Fox  Islands  to  .St.  Augustine's  Chain E.  by  N.       15 

St.  Augustine's  Chain  to  Shag  Island E.N.E.  i  N.  7i 


miles, 
do. 
do. 
do. 


do. 
do. 
do. 


■P" 


Nil 


\ 


V*y  of  room 
oiiit,  are  two 

nd  high  hill. 
'Be  places  of 

i  miles  long, 
onst;  it  rises 
point  niiikes 
•mull  iBhinds, 
n  Biifely  bq' 
wnter. 
on  the  mnin, 
nil  3  liitiiunis 
Bro  boiiig  no 

0  iliiiiger.but 
ions.  From 
'P  tlmt  close 
"i  Cove;  this 
h  forms  it  ig 
'ou  get  above 
ng  the  north 
Din  Mecatinii 
hin  a  spit  of 
I,  in  order  to 
ing  the  west- 
ling  from  the 
ward  of  Gull 
on  board,  in 
the  main, on 
nnd  between 

',  which  runs 
iiilly  up  until 
lit  islands  iiiul 
point;  two  of 
ho  oiitfrniost 
lies  and  a  linjf 
osl  soiitlicriy 
r  north  a  liife 
cks,  of  mode- 
ern  Murr  Isj- 
oni  the  tiiime 

'o  longuos,  is 
?higli;  at  its 
may  enter  on 
I,  tliere  heinn 
is  sunicienily 
)ut  they  imijt 
ivaler.  The 
id  a  lialf;  the 
tliey  are  lidth 

1  or  the  Seal 


Grand  Point 
and  Jiocks. 

:.  2i  miles. 

S.  3.i  do. 

E.  5     do. 

i.  6.i  do. 

K.  9     do. 

15     do. 

N.  7i  do. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

From  St.  Augustine's  Chain  to  Shng  Rocks E.  by  N.  9  miles. 

Shag  Rocks  to  the  east  end  of  Shecatica  Island E.N.E.  ^E.     9     do. 

Courtes  and  Distancea  along  shore,  passing  within  the  Great  Mecatina  Island. 

From  the  outer  rocks  to  the  Bay  de  Portage N.N.W.  i  N.  4  miles. 

do  outer  point  of  Mecatina  Island N.  j  E.  4     do 

outer  point  of  Mecatina  Island  to  Gull  Island E.  by  N.  1     do. 

Gull  Island  to  Green  Island  at  the  entrance  of  Red  Bay.  .N.E.  j  E.         3    do. 

This  couru  will  carry  you  clear  of  th«  Shag  Rock,  lo  Tar  ai  jrou  pau  ouliide  ol  Oull  Iiland. 
Oull  Island  to  La  Boule  Rock,  off  the  N.N.W.  end  of  Me- 
catina  E.N.E.  i  N.    4     do. 

La  Boule  Rock  to  Green  Island W.  by  N.         li  do. 

La  Boule  Rock  to  Duck  Island N.  }  W.  3    do. 

Duck  Island  to  Round  Island,  Ha  Ha  Bay ...N.E. iN.         1,-1  do. 

Round  Island  into  Little  Fish  Harbor W.  i  S.  14  do. 

Round  Island  into  Ha  Ha  Bay N.E.  j  E.        Ij  do. 

ThU  will  leare  all  the  iilandi  to  the  itarboard. 

La  Boule  Rock  to  Loon  Islands N.N.E.  ^  E.    3    do. 

La  Boule  Rock  to  Goose  Island E.N.E.  5i  do. 

Goose  Island  to  Fox  Island. , N.E.  by  E.     6     do. 

The  Great  [stand  of  Mecatina  being  the  most  remarkable  point  of  land  about  this  part 
of  the  coast,  from  whence  vessels  frequently  take  their  departure,  and  shape  their  courses 
to  other  places,  the  following  table  may  be  useful  in  showing  the  bearings  and  distances 
of  the  most  remarkable  points,  rocks,  headlands  and  harbors  from  it,  allowing  the  variation 
to  be  2  points  westerly,  which  is  sufficiently  near  the  truth  for  any  purpose  of  navigation. 

From  the  Round  Head  of  Mecatina  to  Mecatina  Island. . .    ....  W.  by  N.  i  N.  3i  miles. 

. ^^____-  to  the  outer  rocks  off  the 

Islands  of  Entrance. . .  .S.W.  IS.  5     do. 

•'  to  Murr  Islands... I S.S.W.  i  S.        5nearly 

— to  Flat  Island 3.  by  E.  6  miles. 

to  Loon  Islands N.  4  E.  4     do. 

toRoundlsland.HaHaBayN.N.W.  4  N.     64  do. 

_ to  Treble  Hill  Islands E.  |  S.  34  do. 

to  Double  Hill  Islonds N.N.E.  54  do. 

. to  Gooso  Islands N.E.  3  N.  54  do. 

. to  Fox  Islands N.E.  4  E.  11  do. 

to  St.  Augustine's  Chain... E.N.E.  25  do. 

. • to  Shag  Island E.N.E.  314  do. 

to  Shecatica E.N.E.  41  do. 

The  land  from  the  Grand  Point  of  Mecatina  runs  about  W.  S.  W.  15  leagues,  to  Cape 
Wliittle,  and  is  skirted  by  many  islands  and  rocks,  some  of  which  lie  7  miles  off  shore; 
therefiiro.  in  coasting  along,  the  land  must  always  have  a  wide  berth  given  to  it;  vessels 
entering  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  and  being  abreast  of  Chateaux  Point,  distant  7  or  8  miles, 
or  hiivin"  brought  the  Red  Cliffs  to  bear  west,  distant  5  or  6  miles,  may  steer  a  W.S.W. 
j  \V.  course,  and  they  will  go  clear  of  all  dangers;  when  having  passed  the  Southmaker's 
Ledge,  which  is  the  outermost  reef,  distant  7  miles  from  Cape  Whittle,  ond  brought  that 
cHpe  to  l)ear  N.  by  W.  or  N.  distant  8  or  more  miles,  they  may  steer  W.  by  N.  past  Wolf 
Isliinii,  until  they  see  Mount  .Toli*,  u  sandy  ridge,  on  the  main  land;  bring  that  to  bear  N. 
W.  1)V  N.  and  n  N.  W.  4  W.  course  will  take  them  to  St.  Genevieve  Island. 

RKMAKKS.--A11  the  islands  along  the  coast  of  Labrador  have  a  barren  appearance,  the 
outer  ones  being,  for  the  most  part,  small  low  rocky  islets,  and  the  inner  ones  largo  and 
high,  covered  with  a  sort  of  green  moss.  There  is  no  wood  to  be  obtained,  except  at 
tliose  places  where  we  have  mentioned. 

T.DKS. — The  course  and  flowing  of  the  tides  along  the  whole  coast  are  irregular  and 
uncertain,  depending  much  upon  the  prevailing  winds;  nnd  when  the  weather  has  been 
settled,  it  was  high  water  at  Shecatica,  full  and  change,  about  11  o'clock,  and  at  Mecatina 
at  liiJf  after  two,  the  rise  of  the  tides  being  about  7  feet. 

At  \\m\  Bay  the  tide  flows,  full  and  change,  at  half-past  nine  o'clock;  nt  Forteau  Bay 
at  eleven ;  at  Labrador  at  half  after  eleven;  and  at  all  these  places,  spring  tides  rise  7  feet, 
Doiips  4  feet. 

*Tiii'<  is  u  Kimdy  ridjre,  with  spruce  trees,  near  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  NatnBhquan  Point.  Between 
Miisnimrro  nnd  Ni\tusli(]iinn,  piiriillcl  to  the  shore,  from  6  to  11  uiilea  distant,  there  are  sand  banlvi,  with 
fruiu:;;4lo4J  lulhoing  water,  ahounding  with  codfiah. 


11 


AEIVERAL  DFISCKIPTIOIV  OF  THE  ISLAIVD  AI\'0 

•nAIVKS  OF  AfEWFOVIVDLAlVD. 

The  Island  of  THE  ISLAND  OF  NRWFOUNDLAND  is  situated  on  the  enstnrn  side,  and 
Newfound-  directly  in  front  of  the  (iulf  iind  River  St.  Lawrence,  its  northern  part  being  sepainted 
from  the  const  of  Lnbrndor  by  the  Straits  of  Belle  Isle;  and  its  south-wosteru  oxtr«niiiv 
from  Breton  Island  and  Nova  Scotia,  by  the  great  entrance  into  the  gulf.  Its  longfli,  d,,- 
Capo  Race  to  Cape  Nornmn,  is  nearly  five  dt-greos  and  a  half;  and  its  breadth,  from  Can 
Spear  to  Cape  Anguille,  about  .5  degrees  13  miles;  being  very  narrow  at  the  northward,  bm 
becoming  wiile  ^  you  approach  southerly  :    its  extremes  lie  betweiMi  the  latitudes  of  4G!> 

circuit  of 


land. 


Great  Bank 
if  Noufiiund 
land. 


Outer,  nr 
False  Bank. 


40'  and  .51°  40'Pfind  the  loiigitudoa  of  612°  25'  and  5J°  2.T  west.      The  whole      ^ 

the  island  is  indented  with  inlets  and  bays,  many  of  which  are  extensive,  comnuidioiis' 
and  well  sheltered,  where  vessels  ride  in  perfect  security.  Into  these  bays  and  liarbora 
numerous  rivulets  continually  run,  which,  besides  the  fine  purity  of  their  water,  atlurd 
abundance  of  trout  anil  other  fish.  Most  of  thoir  harbors  have  complete  anchorages,  with 
clear  and  good  channels  into  them,  so  that  they  can  bo  navigated  at  all  times  without  fho 
assistance  of  a  pilot;  they  are  freipiontly  situated  so  near  to  one  another,  that,  in  maav 
places,  thoy  form  a  succession  of  harbors,  but  they  are  not  all  inhabited.  ThotownsaiiH 
villages  are  in  general  to  bo  found  in  the  larger  branches  only,  where  the  situation  and 
soil  are  most  convenient;  the  inhabitants,  therefore,  are  not  numerous,  and  the  sottlo. 
monts  but  small. 

The  GaKAi'RANK  oFNKWFOuNDi-ANn  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  island,  and  extends  from 
-  about  tho  latitude  of  42°  north  to  50°  or  upwards,  but  recent  observations  seem  to  piovn 
that  its  southern  extent  does  not  (sxceed  the  paralhd  of  42°  50'  north.     Its  form  like  tiiosi 
of  the  other  banks,  is  irrcguliir,  and  not  easily  asc(irtained  or  defined ;  but  about  tho  latitude 
of  45°,  its  breadth,  including  the  .laquet  and  Whale  Banks,  is  nearly  4  degrees.     To  tho 
northward  and  southwanl  it  narrows  almost  to  a  point,  and  seems  insensibly  to  drop  into 
fathomless  water.     The  Jnquet  and  Whiilo   Banks  nniy  be  fairly  considered  parts  of  tho 
Great  Bank,  being  only  divided  from  it  by  channels  of  somewhat  deeper  water.      Tlie 
Jaquet  lies  to  the  eastward,  and  has  55  fathoms  upon  it.    Its  edge  is  very  steep.    Between 
it  and  the  edge  of  the  (treat  Bank  are  112,   120,  and    ICO  fathoms.     The  nniriner,  wlien 
entering  upon  the  Great  Bank,  will  change  his  soundings  from  fiO  to  30,  37,  44,  45,  and  fiO 
fathoms;  and  as  he  advances  towards  tho  Whale  Banks,  he  will  have*  55  and  GO  fathoms. 
Between  the  Great  Bank  and  the  Whale  Bank  are  72,  75,  and  80  fathoms,  and  npontjio 
Whale  Bank  50,  45,  55,  and  60   fathoms;  being  over  which,  you  again  drop  into  100  and 
200  fathoms,  no  ground.     On  tho    western  side  of  tho  (ireat  Bank,  and  to  tho  soutiiwaid 
of  the  Island  of  Newfoundla.id  and  Nova  Scotia,  a  chain  of  banks  extends^  almost  two 
degrees  from  the  land.     Thfse  are  called  (Jreen  Bank,  Banijuerf^au,  Sable  Island  Bank 
&c.     All  these  have  soundings  over  them  of  various  d«!pths,  from  20  to  70  fathoms! 
admirably  situated,  in  dark  weather,  to  warn  the  mariner  of  his  a|)proach  towards  tlie  land. 
The  Outer,  or  Falsk  Bank,  called  al.xo  the  FUmish  Cap. — This  is  a  patch  of  ri.sing 
ground  lying  two  degrees  to  the  eastward  of  the  edge  of  tlu;  (freat  Bank,  in  latitndt'  4(j- 
50'  and  longitude  46°.     Its  length  is  sujjposed  to  bt;  about  ttO  miles,  and  breadth  50inili's. 
On  it  are  from  1 00  to  158  fathoms.     Bi^ween  it  and  the  eastern  i'(l<»e  of  the  (treat  Bank  i,s 
much  deeper  water,  the  bottom  being  very  fine  sand  and  oozo.  which  will  hardly  stick  to 
the  lead.     As  you  enter  upon  the  (ireat  Bank  you  will  have  fine  whitish  sand,  speckled 
black.     The.se  banks  are  frequently  enveloped  in  most  horrid  fogs,  which,  from  the  middle 
of  spring  to  December,  have  been  known  to  last  H  and  10  days  successively.     At  such 
times  they  are  often  so  thick  that  you  will   not  be  able  to  see  any  object  at  ten  failionis 
distance.    .\  continual  drizzling  rain  is  dropping  from  your  sails  and  rigging,  a  general  calm 
prevails,  and  somiMinies  attended  with  a  considerable  swell  of  the  sen,  so  that  you  are 
constantly  in  fear  of  running  foul  of  sonio  vessel,  or  being  drifted  by  the  currents  \\\h,\\ 
some  danger,  which,  from  thetotnl  inability  of  discovering,  yon  will  have  great  diflicnliv  in 
avoid.     Adiled  to  this,  the  currents  which  surround  the  Island  of  Newfoundland  an'  (ie- 
quently  so  violent  and  so  irregular,  sometimes  driven  towards  the  shores,  and  sometimes 
towanis  the  sea,  that  the  greatest  caution  will  always  be  found  necessary,  while  \\w.  kmiwii 
current  coming  from  the  northern  regions,  sweeps  along  the  shores  of  Labrador,  and  ii; 
tho  spring  detaches  itnmense  icebergs,  which  float  to  the  southward,  and  boconn!  exci'cd- 
ingly  dangerous,  especially  iti  foggy  weather.     .Some  (jf  these  masses  will  fre(|U('nlH   iie 
gi'oundeu  in   40  or  50   fathoms   water,  and   others   will  be  met  with  further  out  to  sim- 
ward,  at  tho  distance  of  125  or  130  leagues  from  tho  land.      Forlunalojy,  these  forniida. 


*E.  &,  G.  W  Bl-UNT  bnvc  publicbeil  ri  fMlAKT  nf  tliff  Hniik  and  CmM  of  Newfoundland.  Gut  of 
Canso,  and  Oulf  of  ht.  Lawrence,  from  the  Admlralt/  and  Frenc  h  .Sorvoy.-i. 


CAPK 

taile,  and 

Near  it  is 

E.  S.  F 

water.     It 


m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


13 


ble  objects  mny  generally  be  dlBcovered,  even  in  dark  weather,  by  n  white  and  bright 
•puearnnce  on  the  Hl<y  above  them,  and  also  by  thi;  roar  of  the  waters  breaking  against 
therii ;  they  also  may  bo  npprohendod  by  the  intense  coldness  they  diffuse  to  a  great  dis- 
taiico  around  them.  They  continue  and  are  usually  met  with  as  late  as  June,  July,  and 
AuRU**'-  Your  approach  towards  the  Hanks  may  be  known  by  the  numerous  soa  fowls 
whicb  will  attend  you,  as  rochos,  malimauks,  and  divers.  Theuo  latter  are  seldom  found 
jf^ote  than  30  leagues  olf  the  hanks.  Malimauks  and  others  are  occasionally  seen  all  across 
[l,p  Atlantic,  but  in  the  vicinity  of  the  banks  thov  become  numerous. 

The  following  directions  are  translated  from  the  report  of  a  recent  survey  of  the  Banks 
of  Newfoundland  by  the  French: 

"The  quality  of  the  bottom  varies  greatly;  but  we  will  remark,  that  on  the  Great  Bank 
oflfewfoundlaad  the  bottom  is  generally  of  sand,  or  sand  mixed  with  gravel;  seldom  of 
pobblos. 

»Tlie  eastern  approach  is  a  fine  white  or  whitish  sand,  often  brilliant.  In  the  deep 
pinces  which  separate  the  banks,  and  more  particularly  in  the  Whale's  Hole,  the  muddy 
bottom  which  is  found,  has  a  fetid  smell. 

'•The  currents  on  the  Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland  have  a  variable  direction.  The 
fvind  is  not  the  sole  cause  of  them.  It  is  not  rare  for  the  current  to  be  against  the  wind. 
\ife  think  that  the  tide  has  also  some  influence;  fur  wo  liave  remarked,  while  at  anchor, 
tbiit  the  direction  of  the  current  varied  as  well  as  the  velocity.  Veracious  fishermen  have 
g99ured  us,  that  the  current  daily  n)ade  the  round  of  the  compass.  However,  we  can 
gay  with  a  certainty  which  results  from  what  we  have  seen  and  discovered  during  our 
navigntion  on  these  coasts,  that  must  frequently  beyond  the  meridian  of  Cape  Race,  the 
current  runs  to  the  westward;  that  to  the  north  as  well  as  to  the  south  of  the  Great 
Bank  of  Newfoundland,  and  on  the  eastern  approach,  its  direction  varies  little  from  E.  S. 
K.  to  S.  S.  E.,  and  most  generally  is  between  these  points.  The  velocity,  which  is  sel- 
dom heiow  8  or  10  miles  in  24  hours,  increases  sometimes  to  24  or  30  miles. 

» We  should  inform  navigators  that  on  the  outside  approaches  of  ail  the  banks,  and 
principiiily  on  the  southern  approach  of  the  (rreat  Bank,  the  currents  boil  and  form  eddies 
in  such  a  nninnor  that  a  vessel  becalmed,  or  with  a  light  wind,  cannot  estimate  their  course 
with  exactness. 

"The  courses  on  the  parallels  between  45°  and  46°  of  latitude,  are  the  best  for  cros- 
Bing  the  Great  Bank  of  Newfoundland,  and  arriving  ut  Green  Bank  and  St.  Peter's  Bank. 
When  these  are  reoched,  if  you  are  bound  to  St.  Peters,  in  foggy  weather,  you  must 
lieep  on  the  northern  side  of  St.  Peter's  Bank,  and  wait  u  favorable  opportunity  of  reach- 
ing land. 

"By  sounding  frequently,  the  position  of  the  vessel  will  be  known  well  enough  to  ar- 
rive lit  the  islands  of  St.  Pierre  and  Miquelon." 

TlIK  VIRGIN  or  CAPE  RACE  ROCKS  ore  extremeh  dangerous.     They  extend  The  Virginor 
in  an  irregular  chain  or  cluster  S.  W.  by  W.  and  N.  E.  by  E.  800  yards,  the  breadth  Cape  Race 
varying  from  200  to  300  yards.   The  least  water  on  a  white  rock  is  4i  fathoms,  with  from  Hocks. 
0  to  Ci  fathoms,  about  one  hundred  yards  all  around  it,  the  bottom   distinctly  visible. 
TownrJs  the  extremities  of  tho  shoal,  the  soundings  are  from  7  to  9  fathoms,  on  detached 
rocks,  with  deep  water  between  them,  the  current  setting  a  mile  an  hour  to  tlie  W.  S. 
W.  with  a  confu.sed  cross  swell  to  the  S.  E.    South,  S.  W.,  West,  and  W.  N.  W.  of  the 
shoiil,  the  water  deepens  gradually  to  ."JO  fathoms,  half  a  mile  distant,  to  the  N.  W.,  North, 
and  N.  E,  one-thinl  of  a  mile,  and  to  E.  N.  E.,  East,  und  E.  S.  E.  a  mile. 

The  bank  upon  which  tho  shoal  is  situated  extends  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  4  miles  and 
aqunrter;  and  23  miles  across  its  broadest  part,  with  regular  soundings  of  from  28  to  30 
fatliDuis,  until  they  suddenly  deepen  on  its  outer  edge  to  39  and  43  fathoms. 

Tho  bottom  is  seen,  and  large  patches  of  sea-weed  on  the  sand  around  them.  Over 
them  th(!  sea  breaks  so  violent  as  to  make  it  unsafe  to  pass  in  a  gale.  Lat.  4G°  26'  15" 
N.,  l-oui;.  .''j(P  :)7'  30"  W. 

A  SHOAL  of  21  feet  is  said  to  have  been  found  by  Capt.  Ryder,  of  Provincetown,  A  Shoal. 
Mass.,  in  Lat.  40°  30'.     It  is  a  rock  between  one  and  two  hundred  feet  surface,  about  50 
miles  oast  of  tho  Virgin  Rocks. — See  the  Chart. 


KAWr  tOANT  OF  I^K\VF«1JI\DLAIVD, 

FROM  CAPE  RACE  TO  ST.  JOILN'S  HARBOR, 

Variation,  2{i°  West. 

CAPE  RACE  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  Newfoundland,  and  lies  in  4G°  39'  44"  north  lati-  Cape  Race. 
tudo,  and  in  i)'V  Or>'  loiiiiitmli!    vest  from  (Jreenwich.     It  is  table  land,  moderately  high. 
Near  it  is  a  black  rot'k,  and  sevi'i;il  smaller  ones  around  it. 

E.  S.  E.  from  Cape  Rare  is  a  lishing  bunk,  over  which  are  from  17  to  25  fathoms 
water.     It  is  nained  the  New  Bunk,  and  is  about  5  miles  lung  and  2  miles  broad. 


^p 


14 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Renowea, 


Fermose, 


Aquafort, 


Ferryland 
Harbor, 


Caplin  Bay. 


Cape  Broyle 
Harbor. 


BriguB. 


I'rom  Cnpe  Rnce  to  Cape  Biillnrd  the  couree  in  N.  E. 
I  tnila  sourhwHrd  of  Cnpe  Biillnrd  is  Chiiin   Covo   lit 


by  E.  (iistiint  81  miloi.  About 
one  mile  goutriWHrii  oi  i^npn  uiumru  in  vjiiiiiii  v^.i.iT  »lt»iiii,  iippeiiriii);  hif^h  ntiil  l\\\r\^, 
Betwoon  the  points  in  a  cuvi-  ">ul  to  tlio  westward  of  Chain  Cove  Head  is  Chain  Cove' 
having  a  hliicl*  rock  alM)vo  wu.. .  lyinj;  hoforo  it. 

RENOWK.'^. — Almnt  three-ouarters  of  a  hmcu"  N.  E.  from  Capo  Ballard  lie  gome 
BHiall  rocks,  olf  .Small  Point;  and  H  "dies  beyond  Small  Point  are  flio  Honowim  Uocki. 
Thoy  aro  moderately  high  and  bold  to,  being  distant  from  the  land  about  one  milo.  (j^g 
mile  and  tliri'0f|uartei8  to  tho  northward  of  those  lies  Kenowos  Island,  situated  near  tlio 
main  land,  and  about  one  mile  to  tho  southward  of  the  entrance  to  Kenowos  Eiarbiir 
which  is  Init  an  indiU'orcnt  place  of  shelter,  with  a  de|)th  of  water  15  feet.  To  sail  into  It 
you  nmst  keep  the  north  shore  on  board,  for  soveral  rocks  lie  scattered  about  its  entrence 
and  S    E.  winds  commonly  send  in  a  very  rough  sea. 

FER.M().SE. — Near  .T  miles  further  north  is  Eermose  or  Fermouse  Ilarlmr,  nnd 
betwuen  them  is  Bear's  Cove,  oH' which  a  sunken  rock  lies  n  cable's  length  from  thoHhoro, 
There  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  Fermose  HarlM)r,  tliough  the  entrance  is  narrow. 
Just  within  it,  on  the  north«'rn  siihs  is  a  small  cove,  where  a  fishery  is  carried  on,  but  the 
anchorage  is  indillerent.  Further  in  is  Admirnl's  Cove,  where  merchant  vossels  lidg 
land-locked  in  7  and  8  fathoniB;  and  one  mile  within  that  is^Vico  Admiral's  Covo.  Liirj^o 
ships  anchor  on  its  south  side  in  Vi  and  15  fathoms,  muddy  ground,  and  very  convenient 
for  both  wood  iind  water.  t)n  the  same  side,  further  in,  is  .Slioep's  Head  Covo,  directly 
oil' which,  near  the  middle  oi'the  channel,  is  a  bank  with  only  9  feet,  constituting  tho  only 
known  danger  within  this  harbor. 

From  Fermose  Harbor,  about  one  mile  N.  E,  by  E.  is  Bald  Head.  N.  by  E.  from 
which,  oil"  mile  further,  is  Black  Head. 

AQUAFORT. — From  Black  Head  to  the  entrance  of  Aquafort  Harbor  the  course  is 
N.  by  W.  distant  one  mile,  at  the  mouth  of  which  is  a  rock  above  water.  To  the  ninth, 
ward  of  this  rock  is  the  passage  in,  having  15  fathoms  water.  The  harlM)r  runs  in  W.  N. 
W.  abou.  3  miles,  l)econ)ing  narrow  as  you  advance.  Hero  you  havo  4  fathoms  water. 
Within  the  narrows,  on  the  northern  shore,  is  a  little  cctve,  where  vj'ssels  nmy  Jiouve 
down,  the  shore  being  steep.  To  sail  up,  give  the  stony  beach  on  the  north  »  loro  a  berth, 
it  being  shoal,  except  at  tho  point  of  the  narrows,  where  it  is  iiold  to. 

FERRYLAND  HARBOR  is  to  tho  northward;  and  its  entrance  is  between  Ferry- 
land  Headland  Bois  Island,  being  little  more  than  half  a  cable's  lengtli  wide.  Ferrylanil 
Head  has  two  rocks  near  it,  called  the  Hare's  Ears.  When  y(m  have  passed  tiiese  imj 
are  within  Hois  Island,  it  boconjes  wider,  having  good  anchorage  with  8  and  10  fatlionis, 
but  north-east  winds  send  in  a  heavy  sea  over  tho  lower  rocks,  which  run  from  Bois  Isl- 
and to  the  main. 

From  Bois  Island  to  Goose  Island  the  coursti  is  N.  N.  E.  ?I  E.  distant  lialf  a  mile;  and 
from  (ioose  to  .Stone  Island  the  coursi^  is  N.  N.  E.  j  N.  distant  half  a  mile. 

CAPLIN  BAY. — Two  and  a  half  miles  from  (loose  Island  is  Caplin  Bay,  running  in 
N.  W.  by  N.  There  is  a  passage  into  it  on  either  side  t)f  (Joose  Island.  To  the  iiortli- 
ward  of  (loose,  and  lattwei^n  it  and  Stone  Island,  there  is  no  danger,  the  islands  i>ein<;l)(i|i| 
to;  but  in  passing  between  it  and  the  Island  (d'  Bois,  take  care  to  keep  tho  point  of 
Ferryland  Head  open  to  the  eastward  of  Bon;  by  which  means  you  will  avoid  a  sniikcn 
rock,  having  only  ~  fathoms  water  over  it.  This  rock  lies  nearly  midway  betwcHtn 
Goose  Island  and  Cold  Hast  Point;  and  having  passed  this  rock,  no  other  danger  will  ho 
found  in  sailij)g  up  the  bay  to  the  li(>st  anchorage,  which  is  uhrt^ast  of  a  covo  on  the  lar- 
board shore,  and  halfa  mile  within  .Scogin's  Head,  with  1(3  tiithoms  water. 

From  Ferryland  Head  to  Cape  Broyle,  the  course  is  nearly  N.  N.  E.  distant  '1\  mileg. 
Cape  liroyle  is  high  land,  making  somewhat  in  the  form  of  a  saddle.  South  of  the.  nortii 
part  of  the  cape,  J  of  a  mile,  lies  the  Old  Harry  Rock,  over  which  are  only  .']  fathoms 
water,  though  between  tho  main  and  it  are  20  fathoms.  E.  N.  E.  of  tlio  cape,  distant  \ 
of  a  mile,  are  the  Horse  Rocks,  having  from  7  to  IJ  fathoms  over  them.  The  nnirk  for 
tliese  rocks  is  a  white  house  on  Ferr\  hind  Downs  opcMi  with  Stone  Islands;  and  the  liend 
of  Capo  Broyle  Harbor  open  will  lead  directly  upon  them.  In  stormy  weather  tho  stta 
breaks  very  liigh  over  them. 

CAPE  BROYLE  HARBOR  runs  in  about  4  milos,  between  Cape  Broyle  and  Biigus 
Head,  their  distance  from  each  other  being  li  milo.  Within  the  entrance,  on  the  north 
side,  is  Adinirars  (Jove,  where  you  may  an-lior  in  IL'  fathoms  water,  good  gnmnil.  hut 
exposed  to  the.S.  E.  Tho  best  anchorage  will  be  found  above  tho  Narrows,  in  7  fatlionis. 
The  only  danger  in  the  way  is  the  .Saturday's  Ledge,  which  lies  about  li  cable's  leiiyth 
outside  of  the  Narrows,  on  the  north  shore.  Bring  the  saddle  of  Brigus  Head  open  of  tlio 
point  of  Adiiiir'd's  Cove,  and  you  will  clear  it;  and  after  you  get  beyond  the  Narrows 
anchor  in  7  fiill,oms,  good  gnmiid,  very  convenient  for  both  wood  ami  water. 

BKIGUS. —  This  is  a  small  cove,  or  harbor,  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Brigus  Head; 
but  it  is  only  fit  for  boats. 

Four  and  a  half  miles  from  C;apo  Broyle  is  Cape  Neddick,  a  kind  of  table  land  moderaiely 
elevated,  and  steep  to.      From  Capo  Neddick  to  Bubno  Head  ia  li  mile.      One  quar- 


ter of  n  mile  I 
of(!rcat  Islai 
Head  to  Spei 
is  a  (ishery,  b 
ward  is  Tom 
(outliern  boui 
\\i  northern  | 
iViiia  which  ii 
Dull  lfli"'<'t  " 

^'tlllTTL 
the  sea;  the  , 
is  n  ledge  of  r 

BAY  OF 
joutliern  poll 
Head,  the  co 
the  bay  runs 
to  the  river  li 
you  have  pas 
r,'ck,  at  the  d 
from  danger, 
i„g  It  to  btNir 
iher  in  to  10 

Kroni  Cap 
Pioin  Bull's 
rocks  streiidii 
south  point  o 
tlio  bay,  rum 
way  he  twee  I 
init,  through 
reniarkablo  i 
imiiicd  the  S 

From  the 
mill's;  it  has 
uml  lies  in  la 
(Mist ward,  up 
point.  Befw 
Cupi-  Bay,  ai 
liny,  and  lie? 
liny,  and  fu-r 

There  is  i 
above  the  lev 

ST.  .lOH 
BPHl  of  gover 
dituiilion  reti 
Fort  Amlier 
ciiaiinel,  fro 
points  than 
the  latter  to 
being  above 
tiie  south  si( 

la  upproii 
till-  Vestal  1 
over  this  nx 
just  o|)en  of 
Cuckold's  i 
nlwiiys  abov 
by  W.  the  i 
side  a  small 
keeping  Foi 
you  will  by 
of  another  r 
its  outside; 
are  within, 
shores  beinj 
mud,  and  ly 

The  wiiK 
directions  o 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  16 

tefof  a  milo  to  the  northward  of  thin  is  HhI'iiio  Covo,  fit  only  for  honta.  Tho  outrr  pnrt 
pfCircHt  IhIiukI  in  ithout  'J^  tiiiloH  N.  K.  Iiv  K.  4  K.  t'roiii  Cnpo  N(M)(hcl<;  nrni  frmn  Hiilin« 
Henil  'o  ^P'^itr  lolnnd,  tlio  coiirHo  in  N.  N.  K.  i  E.  diHtant  ono  milo.  Within  ihix  ixliind 
j,  gfiHlinrVi  hut  tho  itnchoriiKO  is  unNiifo,  iind  tho  hottoni  rocky.  Orio  iiiilti  to  tho  north- 
wai'd  in '1  oad'M  Cove,  tit  only  lor  lioiittt;  hull' a  milo  t'rooi  which  is  Tinkor'H  I'oiiit,  the 
(outlicrn  boundary  of  MomiihloH  Ihiy ;  this  pliico  iu  noiirly  oiio  milo  doop;  it  is  opon,  ,ind 
\\i  iiui'thorn  point  forms  hIio  sonthorn  part  of  Witloss  Hiiy  ;  aixiut  thrco-oiiiirtorH  of  a  i.iilo 
from  which  is  (iroxn  Island;  and  tho  samo  distanco  to  tho  noithward  ot  Uroon  Isliiml,  is 
^uli  liiland,  about  u  milo  in  longth,  and  n  iiuurtur  of  a  milo  in  breadth,  tho  land  ap|)iiaring 

bi)!li- 
VVIIITTLK  BAY  oxtonds  inwards  full  two  miles  f  ,)m  Oull  Island,  but  lios  open  to  Whittle  Bay. 

tiieHca;  tho  ground  is  tidorably  good,  and  tho  dopth  of  wator  Oiodorato;  but  halfway  up 

in  n  icdgo  of  rocks  off  tho  northern  shore,  part  of  which  uro  seen  at  half  tide. 

B.VV  OF  IUJIjLS. — Uno  milo  and  a  quarter  to  tho  northward  of  (iull  Island  la  tho  Bay  of  BulU, 
loutborn  point  of  tho  Hay  of  Hulls,  and  from  henco  to  tho  northern  point,  called  liull 
Ht'ud,  the  course  is  K.  N.  K.  i  K.  distant  one  nnle  and  n  quarter;  between  the^o  ixiinta 
tliB  bay  runs  up  N.  W.  by  W.  nearly  two  mihis,  un<l  then  N.  W.  by  N.  one  mile  turthor 
to  the  river  head.  Within  this  bay  tho  riding  is  good,  in  from  '20  to  10  fathoms;  and  after 
vou  have  passtMl  Hreadund  (Jheestt  Point  thttre  is  a  cove;  off  this  latter  point  lies  a  sunken 
ri'ck,  at  tho  distance  of  about  half  a  cable's  length,  having  |)as8ed  which,  tho  bay  is  froo 
fi'um  danger,  and  tho  shores  bold ;  run  up  and  anchor  over  against  .lohn  Clay's  Hill,  briug- 
jnjT  it  to  bear  N.  K.  by  N.  having  12,  13,  and  14  fathoms;  tho  merchant  vesMds  run  fur- 
thor  in  to  10  and  7  fathoms. 

From  Capi*  Hroylo  to  tho  Hay  of  Hulls,  tho  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  distant  4i  leagues. 
From  Hull's  Head  to  tho  south  point  of  Littio  or  Potty  Harbor,  from  which  a  reef  of 
rocks  stretches  out  about  a  quarter  of  a  milo,  tho  coui'se  is  N.  E.  distant  f*\  mih^s.  The 
south  point  of  I'etty  Harbor  is  distant  from  tho  north  point  'Jj  miles,  between  which  lies 
tliu  buy,  running  in  two  mdes;  at  the  bottom  of  this  is  a  covo  and  lishery.  About  mid- 
way between  tlu*  Bay  of  Hulls  and  Littio  iiay,  is  a  cavern,  having  an  opening  at  its  sum- 
mit', through  which,  whenever  the  sea  runs  hig'ri.  tho  water  spouts  through,  forming  a 
runiarkai)lo  appearance,  which  uniy  be  scon  fur  oflf:  it  Is  thoroforo  significantly  enough 
mimed  the  Spout. 

From  the  North,  or  Lady  Point  of  Littio  Harbor,  Capo  Spear  hears  N.  E.  distant  2i 
miles;  it  has  a  low  and  ragged  appt^arance,  and  is  tho  easternmost  part  of  Newfoundland, 
uml  lies  in  Intitudo  47"  .iO'  5;j"  N.  and  in  longitude  5'2°  39'  '20"  W.  Vessels  from  the 
ciisitward,  upon  getting  into  soundings,  and  bound  for  St.  John's,  generally  steer  for  this 
point.  Between  the  captf  and  tho  entrance  to  iSt.  John's,  are  three  bays;  tlio  first  is  called 
Cu|ii'  Hay,  and  lies  betwetMi  Capo  Spear  and  Black  Head ;  the  second  is  called  Deadman'g 
iiiiy,  and  lies  between  Hliick  Heiul  nnd  Small  Point;  and  tho  third  is  called  Freshwater 
IJiiy,  and  lies  between  .Small  Point  and  Fort  Amherst. 

There  is  a  lightiiouse  on  Cape  Spear,  containing  a  revolving  light,  elevated  275  feet 
above  the  level  of  tlu*  sea.     Tho  times  of  light  and  darkness  are  equal. 

ST.  JOHN'S  HARBOR  is  one  of  the  principal  places  in  Newfoundland,  being  the  St. /o/in'» 
scHt  of  government;  and  although  its  entrance  is  narrow,  its  harbor  is  excellent,  and  its  i/arbor. 
sltmition  readily  known,  both  by  tlie  blockhouse  built  on  Signal  Hill,  at  tho  nortii  side,  and 
Fort  Amherst,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  light,  on  its  south  head  or  point  of  entrance.  The 
cliiiiinel,  from  point  to  point,  is  only  3li0  fathoms  wide;  but  it  gets  wider  just  within  the 
poiiitH  than  iietween  them,  decreasing  again  as  you  approach  the  Chain  Rock,  for  froin 
the  latter  to  tho  Pancake  Rock,  tho  distance  is  only  95  fathoms:  these  aro  rocks,  both 
being  above  water,  and  steep  to;  Chain  is  the  northern  rock,  and  Puucuke  rock  lies  on 
tlie  south  side  of  the  channel 

hi  approaching  tho  Harbor  of  St.  John's  with  a  large  ship,  cnre  must  bo  taken  to  avoid 
the  Vestal  Rock,  which  li»!s  about  50  fathoms  off  tho  southern,  or  Fort  Amherst  Point; 
over  this  rock  are  '.'5  feet  water;  the  marks  for  it  are  Fort  William,  or  the  Old  Garrison, 
just  open  of  the  south  head;  and  tho  outer  Wash  Hall  Rock  o|)en  to  tho  eastward  of  the 
Cuckold's  Head:  thesi>  latter  rocks  lie  close  to  the  northern  point  of  the  harbor,  nnd  are 
always  above  water,  being  steep  to,  and  therefore  not  dangerous.  Tho  course  is  N.  W. 
by  \V.  tho  shores  continuing  bold  until  you  get  noar  tho  Pancake,  then  give  tho  south 
side  a  small  berth,  continue  tho  same  course,  or  rather  more  inclined  to  the  westward, 
kee|)iiig  Fort  Amherst  Flagstaff  open  to  the  northward  of  Frederick's  Battery  Flagstaff; 
you  will  by  these  means  avoid  the  Prosser,  a  rock  on  the  larboard  side,  running  off  the  end 
of  another  rock,  formed  like  a  saddle,  with  18  feet  water  in  the  hollow,  and  only  5  feet  on 
its  uutsido;  yet  it  is  steep  to,  having  not  less  than  5  fathoms  close  to  it;  so  soon  as  you 
are  within,  und  have  jmssed  tho  Prosser  rocks,  you  may  steer  up  as  you  please,  both 
iihures  being  clear  of  dangers,  and  anchor  in  from  4  to  lU  futhoius  water,  on  a  bottom  of 
mud,  and  lying  quite  land-lnckod. 

The  winds  from  tho  S.  W.  to  the  southward,  as  far  as  N.  E.  by  E.  blow  in,  all  other 
directions  of  the  wind  either  bafllo  or  blow  out  of  the  Narrows ;  with  the  latter  winds  you 


Ji»i 


16 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


must  varp  in,  for  the  convenience  of  doing  which,  rings  nre  fixed  in  the  rocks  on  each 
side:  the  nnchonige  within  the  Narrows  has  from  10  to  16  fathoms,  and  a  little  before 
you  enter  the  Nnrrows  there  are  20  fathoms. 

Vessels  bound  into  St.  .John's  at  nightcan  have  n  pilot  by  hoisting  a  light  at  the  yard-nrm 
The  tides  rise  6,  7,  and  8  feet,  but  very  irregular,  being  much  influenced  by  the  winds! 

FROM  ST.  JOHN'S  HARBOR  TO  BACCALOU  ISLAND. 

We  recommend  the  mariner  to  be  careful,  lest,  if  a  stranger  to  the  coast,  he  should 
mistake  Kitty  Vitty,  a  small  place  fit  *  i  ly  for  bouts,  lying  about  one  niilo  to  the  northward 
of  St.  .John's,  for  St.  John's  itsolf;  at  a  distance  it  has  the  appearance  of  a  good  harbor- 
he  will  therefore  observe,  that  at  Kitty  Vitty's  south  side  is  a  round  hill,  shaped  like  a 
hay  cock,  standing  upon  Cuckold's  Head;  while  St.  John's  Harbor  may  be  distinguished 
by  Fort  Amherst,  which  appears  white;  and  by  the  Flag-staves  on  the  hill,  over  the  north 
point  of  entrance;  these  will  sufficiently  denote  the  right  entrance. 

About  one  mile  from  Cuckold's  Point,  is  a  small  point  or  projection  of  the  land;  and 
two  miles  further  is  Sugar  Loaf  Point  tapering  upward,  and  much  resembling  a  sugar 
|<inf.     One  league  further  is  Red  Head;  between  Sugar  Loaf  Point  and  which  is  Logy 
Bay. 
Torbay.  TORHAY. — One  mile  and  a  half  from  Red  Head  is  the  south  point  of  Torbay,  which 

is  somewhat  lower  than  the  others.  From  this  Point  to  Green  Cove,  the  customary  place 
where  vessels  anchor,  the  course  is  W.  N.  W.  about  two  miles,  where  you  may  ride  in 
14  and  I'J  tiithoms,  but  it  is  much  exposed  to  seiiwtir-'  This  bay  is  large,  l)eing  full  a 
league  in  extent ;  from  otf  its  northern  point  is  a  Hat  rock,  where  the  sea  breaks;  a  heavy 
swell  sets  from  the  eastward  into  the  bay,  so  that  it  is  not  a  good  |)laco  to  lie  in. 

From  F^lat  Rock  Point,  which  is  low  dark  land,  the  coast  runs  northerly  to  Red  Head 
a  distance  of  two  miles;  and  from  thence  to  Black  Head,  N.  E.  by  E.  two  miles  more' 
the  latter  bearing  north,  distant  6d  miles  frun  Torbay  .South  Point. 
Cape  St.  CAPt'  ST.  FRANCIS. —From   Black  Head  to  Cape  St.  Francis  the  course  is  N. 

Francis.  N.  W.  distant  one  league.     Cape  St.  Francis  has  a  white  appearance,  and  is  itself  low 

but  above  it  the  land  rises  high.  A  little  south  of  the  Cape  is  Shoo  Cove,  a  place  used  in 
bad  weather  for  splitting  and  salting  fish.  Olftlie  Cove  there  is  good  fishing,  and  with 
northerly,  westerly,  and  southerly  winds  you  will  lie  safe  within  the  cove. 

About  one  mile  and  a  half  east  of  the  cape  lie  the  Brandy  Rocks,  iti  triangular  position 
the  outermost  being  distant  from  the  cape  IJ  mile:  the  sea  bi  aks  over  them,  and  tlieie 
is  a  channel  between  them  and  the  cape,  but  too  dangerous  to  be  attempted.  These  rociis 
considerably  add  to  the  safety  of  Shoe  Cove. 

There  is  also  another  small  cove,  fit  for  boats,  to  the  northward  of  the  cape,  which  may 
be  used  with  the  wind  olf  shore. 

CONCEPTION  BAY.— Cape  St.  Francis,  which  we  have  already  described,  is  the 
southern  point  of  Conception  Bay.  From  Cape  .St.  Francis  to  the  southern  point  of 
Baccalou  Island,  which  may  be  considered  the  other  point  or  boundary  of  (^'onccption 
Bay,  the  course  and  distance  is  N.  N.  K.  i  N.  03  leagues;  this  is  an  extensive  and  ileep 
bay,  running  to  the  south-westward,  and  comprehending  many  lesser  bays  and  inlets. 

BKLLK  ISLF. — Four  leagues  S.  W.  by  W.  from  (.'ape  St.  Fnincis  is  Bclbi  Isle,  in 
length  oi  miles,  in  brejidth  about  two;  this  island  is  lofty,  and  its  (^astern  side  is  neartliit'e 
miles  olf  the  main;  there  is  on  this  side  a  IxMich,  to  the  southward  of  which  is  good  nii- 
chorage,  in  ;K)  fathoms,  sandy  ground;  and  a  league  further,  near  tlu!  south  partoflhe 
island,  is  also  tolerable  anchorage  in  from  15  to  :!0  fathoms.  At  the  south  end  of  tlu?  i-^lainl 
is  a  snuill  cove,  called  Lanco  Cove,  which  fishing  vessels  sometimes  resort  to,  and  find  «im,\ 
shelter  for  five  or  six  vesscds.  One  mile  from  the  south  part  of  the  island  lies  a  rock,  ovor 
whicii  are  '2i  fathoms  water.  Two  mili^s  S.  by  \V.  fiom  Lance  Cove,  lies  a  small  low 
island,  culled  Little  Belle  Isle,  W.  .S.  W.ofwhidi,  distant  I4  mile,  is  Ivelley's  Island,  ui' 
middling  height,  and  about  three-cpiarters  ofa  mile  in  leng'h. 

Within  Belle  Isle,  on  tlienniin.is  Portugal  Cove,  the  anchorage  within  which  is  not 
considered  safe.  To  the  southward  is  Broad  Cove,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  is  Ilu|. 
lyrood  Harbor,  in  d(!pth  about  Ui  miles;  in  a  cove  on  the  W(?sf  side  tjf  which  is  good  an- 
choraae,  in  8,  !l,  10  or  TJ  fathoms  water,  and  room  cuongh  to  moor. 

F(dlowing  the  coast,  ab(»ut  li  mile  from  Ilollyrood  entrance,  is  Harbor  Main,  nboiitU 
mde  in  deptli,  andhidfa  mile  wide;  it  is  uii  open  place,  but  near  tlie  upjier  part  you  niav 
anchor  in  tVom  7  to  10  fathoms  water. 
Salmon  Cove.  .SALMON  COVK. — One  mile  further  is  Salmon  Cove,  the  entrance  to  which  is  a  mile 
wide;  tlie  course  in  is  W.  S.  W.  about  i.'i  miles:  it  then  divides  into  two  branches,  0110  in 
the  westward  al)out  one  mile,  l\w  otiier  t^outhward  one  ti\\U\  and  a  half;  in  ('itlii^r  of  llicsi; 
branidies  the  anchorage  is  good,  but  the  southern  river  is  considered  the  better  one,  lln'ie 
being  no  clanger  in  entering.  In  the  western  bran(di  u  rock  lies  at  a  snndl  distance  from 
the  starboard  shore,  having  on  either  side  a  passage,  but  tlu*  southern  one  is  Iho  wider  of 
the  two. 
Collier's  Bay.  COLLIKR'.S  BAY. — To  the  northwani  neurone  league,  lies  Collier's  Bay,  running 
inward  soulh-weHterly  full  two  leagues;  one  mile  and  a  half  from  tho  entrance  of  which 


Conception 
Bay. 


Belle  hie. 


lies  a  sunken  i 
p^li  is  visible  1 
in  10  fathoms  • 
„ay  go,  and  r 
further  distanc 
anchorage  is  g 

imious  I 

but  by  small  v( 
gead  about  1 1 
bay,  behind  a 
with  3  and  4  fa 
be  iviiown  by  it 

P0RTGR;> 
lias  within  it  S 
a  good  place  fo 
and  having  no 
(dp  rocks  and  1 
and  called  Spe 
and  5  fathoms 
about  a  cable  11 

Portgrave  is 
within  tho  islai 
whore  you  wil 
of  Portgrave  B 
trn  point  of  th( 
westward  5  m 
iiiaher  than  an 

BAY  ROB 
^ido  or  go  clos 
wliicli,  you  mi 
the  island  and 
sunken  rocks,  ( 
the  main.  Tw 
of  the  bay,  on 
rocks  uniler  w 

SI'ANIAR 
This  bay  is  di 
within  it,  near 

Two  leagut 
tnnt  from  Caf 
ant"s  Cove, 
entrance. 
5  fathoms  wai 

HARBOR 
for  to  the  sou 
ground  is  foul 
no  danger  is 
Mig  near  the 
you  are  withi 
tlie  west  side 
the  main,  call 
carry  you  in 
lint  toward  th 
on  with  tho 
must  'ake  cai 
lloiid  is  opei 
Wi'stei'i  Lai 
Cove  at  Ship 
will  he  in  the 
marks  in  on: 
bring  the  Kai 
will  lie  withii 
this  harbor  a 
over  towards 
2,  3  and  .li  fa 
ern  shore,  w 
wilii  the  poii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


17 


may 


lies  a  sunken  rock,  nearly  mid-channel,  on  both  sides  of  which  the  channel  is  good;  this 
fock  is  visible  at  three-quarters  ebb.  Two  and  a  half  milHS  up  the  bay  is  good  anchorage 
jQ  10  fiithoms  water,  on  the  eastern  side  and  opposite  a  small  cove;  into  this  cove  vessels 
niny  g<'<  "■^^  '''^^  '"  "^  "'"^  ^  fathoms  water.  Higher  up  the  bay  is  another  cove,  at  the 
further  distance  of  li  mile,  but  it  is  both  foul  and  shallow.  Near  the  head  of  the  bay  the 
anclinrnue  is  good  in  8,  9,  and  10  fathoms. 

BRK'US  BAY  is  two  miles  to  the  northward  of  Collier's  Bay,  and  seldom  frequented  Brigut  Bay. 
[lUt  by  small  vessels,  it  being  open,  and  too  far  up  Conception  Bay ;  it  runs  in  from  Brigus 
(iend  about  li  mile,  and  has  anchorage  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms;  or  at  the  head  of  the 
[laV,  behind  a  small  island,  on  the  south  side,  small  craft  may  lie  secure  from  all  winds, 
^i'th  3  nml  4  fathoms  water,  and  moor  to  the  shores.  The  south  point  of  Brigus  Bay  may 
be  known  by  its  peculiar  ragged  appearance. 

PORTGRAVE,  or  PORT  DE  GRAVE  BAY,  lies  to  the  northward  of  Brigus,  and  Portgrave 
has  vvitliin  it  Sheep's  and  Cupid's  Coves;  the  latter  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  and  is  Bay, 
g  good  place  for  2  or  3  ships  to  ride  in,  with  4,  5,  and  6  fathoms  water,  almost  land-locked, 
anil  having  not  above  one  point  open.  Its  north  side  is  bold,  and  you  may  lie  alongside 
thp  rocks  and  take  in  your  cargoes.  The  shore  on  the  northern  side  is  remarkably  high, 
anil  called  Spectacle  Head.  Sheep's,  or  Ship  Cove,  will  accommodate  small  vessels  iu  4 
„,id  5  fathoms  water,  mooring  head  and  stern,  having  their  S.  W.  anchor  in  22  fathoms, 
abnut  a  cable  and  a  quarter's  length  from  the  ship. 

Portgrave  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Ship  Cove;  the  water 
witliia  the  islands  is  shallow,  but  without  them  the  anchorage  is  20  and  25  fathoms  duep, 
wliPi"  yo"  ^^'"  ^^  quite  exposed  to  south-easterly  winds.  Burnt  Head  is  the  south  point 
of  Portgrave  Bay;  from  whence  24  miles  N.  E  i  N.  lies  Bay  Roberts  Point,  the  south- 
ern point  of  the  entrance  to  Roberts  Bay,  which  is  14  mile  broad,  and  runs  in  to  the  snuth- 
westNS'ard  5  miles.  One  mile  above  Bay  Roberts  Point  is  Blow-me-down  Head,  which  is 
lijnher  than  any  land  near  it;  half  a  mile  within  this  is  a  cove. 

BAY  ROBERTS  has  no  invisible  donger  at  its  entrance;  you  may  borrow  on  either  Bay  Roberts 
^idn  or  go  close  to  the  island,  which  lies  further  in  on  your  starboard  side;  having  passed 
which,  you  may  run  on  about  a  mile,  and  lie  land-locked  in  9  or  10  fathoms.  Between 
the  island  and  main  vessels  can  anchor,  but  the  ground  is  foul  and  bad;  and  there  are  two 
sunken  rocks,  one  being  near  the  inner  part  of  the  island,  the'other  above  the  island  and  near 
the  main.  Two  miles  above  the  island  is  excellent  anchorage,  in  the  N.  W.  arm  or  branch 
of  the  bay,  on  muddy  ground.  Give  the  south  point  a  good  berth  in  sailing  in,  as  some 
rocks  under  water  lie  near  it,  and  the  starboard  shore  shoals  near  half  a  cable's  length. 

SPANIARD'S  BAY  is  divided  from  Bay  Roberta  by  an  isthmus,  or  neck  of  land.  Spaniard's 
This  hay  is  deep  and  extensive,  but  open  to  the  S.  Easterly  winds.     There  is  anchorage  Bay, 
within  it,  nearly  all  over,  especially  at  its  head,  in  7  and  8  fathoms  water. 

T\V(i  leagues  N.  E.  from  Spaniard's  Bay  are  the  islands  of  Harbor  Grace;  they  are  dis- 
tant from  Cape  St.  Francis  about  6  leagues,  bearing  E.  i  S.  To  the  southward  is  Bri- 
ant's  Cove,  a  good  place  for  fish,  but  not  for  shipping.  There  is  a  rock  midway  of  the 
entrance.  You  may  sail  in  on  either  side  of  this  rock,  and  find  good  anchorage  in  4  imd 
5  fathiinis  water.     The  ground  within  the  rock  is  clean. 

HARBOR  GRACE. — The  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  to  the  northward  of  the  islands.  Harbor 
for  to  the  southward,  and  betwetMi  them  and  the  shore,  the  channel  is  narrow  and  the  Grace 
ground  is  foul;  the  course  in  will  be  nearly  west.  Almost  tiiid-channel  is  the  Salvage  Rock ; 
no  danger  is  outside  of  this  rock.  There  is  also  another  rock,  called  the  Long  Harry,  ly- 
ing near  the  north  shore;  both  those  rocks  are  above  wiiter,  and  always  visible.  When 
voii  are  within  the  Salvage,  go  no  nearer  tlie  west  shore  thiiu  just  to  open  a  passnge  on 
iiie  west  sid(i  of  the  Long  Harry,  the  leading  mark  for  sailing  in  being  tlio  high  point  of 
the  main,  calUul  Mosquito  Point,  justopim  to  tlie eastward  of  Long  Harry  Rock;  tliis  will 
carry  you  in  with  not  less  than  22  fathoms,  fpiite  up  to  the  liaibor,  clear  of  alt  dang  -; 
lint  toward  the  eastern  shore,  you  may  stand  over  until  you  bring  the  Western  Landmark 
on  with  the  Cupcda  of  the  Chapel;  you  will  then  bo  up  to  the  north  side  of  the  bar.  and 
must  'ake  care  not  to  open  these  marks,  especially  if  the  mark  in  the  Cove  at  Ship's 
lleiid  is  open  with  the  nuirk  on  the  point  of  Admiral's  Beach;  but  if  you  can  bring  the 
Western  Landmark  at  the  back  of  the  Cha|)el  on  with  the  Ci'.pola,  befor(!  the  mark  at  the 
Cove  at  Ship's  lliMid  comes  on  with  the  mark  at  the  point  of  Admiral's  Beach,  then  you 
will  ho  iu  the  narrows,  and  must  not  stand  fnther  over  to  the  eastward  than  to  bring  those 
murks  in  one,  and  continue  turning  with  ihese  marks  to  the  east  and  west,  until  you 
bring  the  Eastern  Landmark  at  the  back  o!'  the  Chapel  on  with  the  Cu|X)la;  then  you 
wilihe  within  the  bar,  and  should  stand  we!l  over  to  the  eastward.  About  half  way  down 
this  harbor  a  broad  spit  of  sand  runs  otf  from  the  southern  sliore,  extending  full  two  thii-da 
over  toivardsthe  Chapel;  this  appears  to  be  what  Mr.  Lane  has  called  the  bar;  it  has  14, 
2,  li  and  34  fathoms  in  some  placesover  it;  but  there  isa  channel  between  it  and  the  north 
era  shore,  with  4  and  5  fathoms  water;  to  sail  thiough  which  bring  Otterbury  Head  on 
witli  the  point  of  the  beach,  at  Ship's  Head ;  this  will  also  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  isl 


18 


Carbonkrre 
Island. 


Green  Bay. 


Bay  Verde. 


TrnHy  Bay, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

and  of  the  Harbor  Grace,  A  white  rock  on  the  beach  at  the  west  end  of  Father  Ewer's 
House,  near  the  Catholic  Chapel,  will  clear  the  east  end  of  the  spit;  the  western  post  of 
tlie  said  Father  Ewer's  Gate  on  with  tho  opening  between  the  Spire  and  the  west  end  of 
the  Catholic  Chapel,  will  clear  the  west  end  of  the  spit;  and  the  outer  edge  of  the  Long 
Harry  on  with  the  extreme  point  of  the  northern  shore,  will  "lear  the  shoal  on  its  north- 
ern  side.  This  is  a  vnry  Rood  and  convenient  anchorage,  with  room  enough  for  a  vessel 
to  turn  in  or  out  of  the  narrows;  and  the  marks  here  given  are  very  easily  to  be  distin- 
guishod,  and  will  clear  all  dan«ors.  The  Middle  Mark  at  the  back  of  the  Chapel  on  with 
the  Cupola,  and  the  mark  at  Ship's  Head  on  with  that  at  Admiral's  Beach,  leads  on  to  the 
shoalest  part  of  the  bar.  To  the  northward  of  Harbor  Grace  is  Carbonierre  Island  and 
Harbor-,  before  you  reach  which  is  Mosquito  Cove,  a  place  between  Harbor  Grace  and 
Carbonierre,  littlo  frequented,  although  the  anchorage  is  good,  it  not  being  convenient  for 
the  fisheries. 

CARBONIERRE  ISLAND  lies  about  18  miles  from  Cape  St.  Francis:  its  southern 
end  is  low  land,  but  upon  it  stands  a  small  fort,  built  for  the  defence  of  the  fishermen. 
The  island  is  bold  to.  so  are  tho  shores  of  the  harbor,  but  off  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  islimd 
are  several  rocks  under  watn. ;  tho  passage  therefore,  between  the  island  and  the  main, 
should  not  be  atlom|)ted.  On  the  north  side,  opposite  Carbonierre  Island,  are  two  smnll 
coves,  whore  tlio  planters  live,  who  keep  fishing  boats;  the  northern  of  these  is  cidied 
Clown's  Cove,  fit  only  for  boats:  tho  other  is  colled  Crocker's  Cove,  and  is  separated  only 
from  Carbonierre  Bay  by  a  small  point  of  land,  named  Crocker's  Point.  Off  these  coves 
are  several  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water;  therefore,  in  sailing  either  in  or  out  of  the 
Bay  of  Carbonierre,  these  must  have  a  berth;  and  after  you  reach  Otterbury  Point  you 
may  stand  in  to  either  shore,  both  being  bold  to,  until  you  near  the  head  of  tho  harbor; 
this  is  a  good  pluco  for  riding  in.  It  is  wide,  and  with  water  of  various  depths  for  anchor- 
ing every  where. 

Two  mihis  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Carbonierre  Island  is  Salmon  Cove  Head,  high  and  steep; 
behind  which  is  a  cove,  where  abundance  of  salmon  are  caught;  an  island  hes  in  the  mid- 
way of  the  channel,  but  the  cove  is  only  fit  for  boats. 

GREEN  BAY. —  Four  or  five  railos  further  north  is  Broad  Cove  Head,  and  .3i  milei 
further  is  (Jreen  or  Western  Bay  Point;  off  the  shore,  and  about  a  milo  to  the  northward 
of  Broiid  Cove,  is  anchorage  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms.  At  tlie  entrance  to  Green  Bay,  jg 
anchorage  in  15  and  IG  fathoms,  but  it  would  be  dangerous  to  go  far  into  the  Bay,  which 
if  ijuite  open  to  tho  eastward. 

Fivb  miles  to  the  northeastward  of  Green  Bay  ia  Devi!''-  Point  Cove,  a  place  of  little 
note,  and  further  on  is  Flamborough  Head,  black  and  steep  to.  There  is  no  good  place 
of  sh<'ltor  hereabout,  nor  from  Carbonierre  to  tho  Island  Lacalieu,  except  with  the  wind 
oil"  sliore. 

BAV  VERDE  is  about  half  a  mile  to  the  westward  oi'tf-.e  head,  and  up  to  the  cot«  is 
threc-qiifirtersof  a  mile:  the  entrance  is  not  above  a  caldo's  length  across,  and  vessels  lio 
about  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  head  of  the  bay,  in  5  fathoms  water,  having  n  caMe 
fasti'oed  to  tho  slions  and  an  anchor  out  astern.  Six  or  sevon  sliifjs  can  lie  in  this  man- 
IUM-,  l)iU  S.  W.  winds  blowing  right  in,  wotdd  make  that  adangorous  situation:  it  is  alsn 
a  bad  place  for  eillidr  wood  or  water,  but  the  great  quantities  of  fish  which  resort  here, 
occasion  it  to  bo  much  frequented.  It  is  a  ])laco  easily  known  by  l^acalieu  and  the  pro- 
jecting land,  calloii  Split  Point.  Bay  Verdo  Head  itself  will  servo  to  i)oint  out  its  poai- 
tion,  for  these  tliroo  iicads.  Bay  Viirdo  lIiNid,  Split  Point  and  Bacalieu  Island,  appear 
prominent  bluiriand,  very  siniiliir  to  one  anotliur,  as  you  come  from  \\w  southward;  ami 
there  is  no  hidden  danger  in  ciilering  tho  bay.  The  Island  l^tcaliou  is  liigh  land,  n(farly 
4  Miilos  long  and  li  broad;  it  is  distant  l-i  milo  from  tho  main,  and  between  is  a  good 
channel.  Nearly  midway  hotwuen  its  soutliern  point  and  Split  Point  is  a  sunken  rock, 
ovor  which,  in  blowin:;  wculhrr,  the  sea  generally  breaks,  although  it  is  six  fiithoms  under 
wator,  and  steop  to  all  round. 

Erion  Split  I'oint  about  4.i  miles  is  tho  Point  of  Grates,  having  rounded  which,  you  will 
open  Trinity  Bay. 

FROM  BACALFKU,  OR  BACCALOU,  ISLAND  TO  CAPE  BONAVIS'J'A. 

PKINITY  BAY  is,  liko('onc'.)|)tinn  Bay,  wide,  oxtensivo,  and  forms  itself  south-west- 
word:  like  that  al.-^o.  it  contains  many  lessor  hays  and  harbors  within  it;  these  will  be  veijii- 
lirly  described  in  rotation.  I'oint  (Jrate.'-is  tho  .  Ka,sterti  point  (d"the  bay;  from  wliicli, 
distant  abinit  2  miles,  is  Break-heart  Point,  and  between  them  is  a  kind  (d' bay,  wliei'o 
bonis,  with  Ml  ofl'-shoro  wind,  ride  in  sat't^ty.  Within  thisbay  is  a  ledgoof  rocks  above  water, 
Ti)tlie  southward  ofBroikdnnirt  I'oint  is  .Scurvy  Island,  and  between  this  island  and  .Slier- 
wi(d<  Point  is  a  bay  running  In  .S.  S.  E.  al)out  throe -(luiirters  of  a  mile;  the  course  from 
Breiik-hi-arl.  Point  to  Sherwick  Point  is  S.  W.  by  W.  .'}  miles.  Olf  the  latter  is  a  rock 
aboV(t  Wilier;  this  forms  the  niirthern  point  of  Old  Perliciiii :  vessels  cannot  go  between 
tho  isliind  and  point,  altlioiiuh  tint  passag(>  appears  good  and  op(Mi,  because  tho  ground  is 
ullogether  foul  and  rocky;  always  therefore  run  in  to  tho  southward  of  the  island,  and 


ffhen  you  havi 
harbor,  as  the 
obliged  to  l)U03 
distant  5  mdes 
from  it;  the  pi 
g.  distant  7  m 
craftonly;  two 
brio?  King's  t 
miles  further  i 
tance  is  S.  W 

Eastward  ol 

NEWPEt 
perlican,  the  1 
jinnll.  but  tolei 
The  shores  ar 
being  bounded 
you  advance  t 
n  milfi  broad. 

HEART'S 
harbor,  fit  for 
fathoms  watei 
beyond  that  is 
Delight,  abou 
leiigne  furthei 
the  bottom  roi 
you  lottve  on  ; 

One  mile  ft 
10  tiitlioms. 
Harbor,  a  pla 

DILDOH 
in  which  is  ve 
10  to  •-'()  fathn 
the  mouth  of 
ii  small  iiiliind 
miles  to  the  i 


Ch 

•d, 

I 


roction  to 
runs  iiiwar 
tliii"i;b  lit'l 
HAY  OK 
eriy  ilirectioi 
(iarhi)ra','t!  in 
western  side 
fitlioin-i,  sain 
|!(ith  these  li 
ihm\  liir  unci 
Tickle  Point 
i;cnius;  but 
hi-inu  the  i)oi 
westward  in 
side  of  Shal 
|Miillt  of  Dee 
iiavo  passed 
The  eiitniii 
tint  iiliout  i:i 

l-'iili  -Ih  111 
which  is  not 
li'ss.  ll  nil 
To  the  soiitl 
which  is  l?al 
iiiiiru  than  ;i 
1-J,  and  1.')  fi 
II  siiiikeii  ro' 
rock,  by  son 
fnini  Hando 

Raiidoiii 
Island,  and  i 

HANDO 
thus  lltindo 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PIDOT. 


19 


ffhen  you  have  passed  it,  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  This  cannot  be  considered  a  good 
harbor,  as  the  ground  is  bad  for  holding,  and  with  the  wind  at  N.  W.  you  will  then  be 
g\)\\ged  to  buoy  your  cables.  From  Old  Perlican  to  Salvage  Point  the  course  is  W.  i  N. 
jjjtant  5  miles.  Salvage  Point  requires  a  good  berth,  having  a  reef  of  rocks  running  out 
from  it;  the  point  itself  is  low.  From  Salvage  Point  to  Hants  Head  the  course  is  W.  by 
g.  distant  7  miles;  and  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  head  is  Hants  Harbor,  fit  for  small 
craftonly !  two  miles  otf  which  is  Hants  Harbor  Rock,  over  which  the  sea  generally  breaks; 
brio"  King's  Head  open  of  the  Sugar  Loaf,  and  you  will  clear  it  to  the  northward.  Two 
miles  further  is  King's  Head,  and  from  King's  Head  to  the  Sugar  Loaf  the  course  and  dis- 
tance is  S.  W.  i  W.  about  3  miles. 

Eftdtwani  of  the  Sugar  Loaf  is  Sillee  Cove,  fit  only  for  boats,  and  unsafe  for  vessels. 

NEW  PERLICAN. — From  the  Sugar  Loaf  to  the  north  point  of  the  entrance  of  New  NewPerliean. 
Perlicnn,  the  bearing  is  S.  W.  i  W.  distant  2  miles:  and  one  mile  further  is  the  harbor, 
sinftll,  but  tolerably  good,  within  which  you  may  ride  land-locked  in  from  5  to  10  fathoms. 
The  shores  are  bold  to,  and  free  from  danger.  The  entrance  is  nearly  two  miles  wide, 
being  bounded  by  Smutty  Nose  Point  on  the  east,  and  Gorlob  Point  on  the  west;  but  as 
you  Advance  the  harbor  becomes  narrower,  so  that  at  the  anchorage  it  will  scarcely  be  half 
a  iniio  broad. 

HEART'S  CONTENT.— Three  miles  from  New  Perlican  is  Heart's  Content,  a  good  Heart'i  Cm- 
hiirbor,  fit  for  any  ship,  with  excellent  anchorage  towards  the  north  shore,  in  from  8  to  12  tent. 
futhoms  water.    One  league  further  is  Heart's  Desire,  fit  for  boats  only;  and  3i  miles  ^ 

beyond  that  is  Heart's  Delight,  nnotlior  cove,  adapted  for  small  craft  only.  From  Heart's 
Delight,  about  three  miles,  is  Long  Point  projecting  considerably  into  the  bay,  and  a 
leii''ne  further  is  Witless  Bay,  i)y  no  means  a  place  of  safety,  being  too  much  exposed,  and 
the  bottom  rocky.  Between  Long  Point  and  Witless  Bay  are  two  small  islands,  which 
you  leave  on  your  larboard  side. 

One  mile  from  Witless  Bay  is  Green  Harbor,  where  vessels  may  anchor  in  from  7  to 
10  fiithoins.  Three  miles  further  is  Hope-all-a-hoad;  two  miles  bayond  which  is  New 
Harbor,  a  place  of  shoal  water,  and  only  fit  for  boats. 

DILDO  HARBOR. — Two  and  a  half  miles  from  New  Harbor  is  Dildo  Harbor,  with-  DiidoHarhw. 
in  which  is  very  good  anchorage,  in  a  cove,  at  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance,  in  from 
11)  to  '-'()  fathoms  water,  good  clean  ground.  Three  miles  from  thence  is  Chapel  Bay, 
the  mouth  of  which  is  a  mile  broad,  and  the  bay  about  throe  miles  deep.  Here,  behind 
iismiill  island,  about  two  miles  in,  is  good  anchorage  in  from  8  to  12  fathoms.  About  5 
miles  to  the  northward  is  Collier's  Bay,  very  similar,  and  running  nearly  in  the  same  di- 
rection to  Chapel  Bay.  Seven  miles  further  is  the  Point  of  Tickle  Harbor  Bay,  which 
runs  inward,  in  a  southerly  direction,  full  8  miles;  there  is  nr  danger  in  the  way,  and 
tliiiu!:li  little  frequented,  the  anchorage  is  safe. 

HA  V  OP  BU  LLS.— To  the  nortliward  is  the  Bay  of  Bulls,  running  in  a  N.  N.  West-  Bay  of  BnUs. 
eriy  dinHrtioii  to  within  2  miles  of  Chance  River,  in  Placentia  Bay.  Tliere  is  very  good 
jinclioni;:"  in  various  parts  of  this  hay,  in  12  and  10  fathoms  water,  particularly  on  tho 
westi'i'M  side  in  a  cove,  about  one  mile  and  a  half  from  the  entrance,  with  from  10  to  15 
t'ltliouH.  siiiidy  ground.  To  tho  N.  JC.  is  Bull  Island,  and  5  miles  further  Cojipor  Island. 
Both  these  lie  very  near  tho  shore.  We  now  open  Deer  Harbor,  a  place  extensivt!,  and 
miDil  lor  anchorage,  but  barred  with  miiny  shoids.  The  (irst  shoal  lies  midway  IxHwoen 
Ticklt'  Point  anil  Deer  Island,  having  (i  fathoms  on  its  siioiUest  part,  and  therefore  tiot  dan- 
st-rous:  but  one-third  of  a  mile  further  in,  is  a  bank  witli  only  2  and  24  fathoms  water; 
brin::  tho  point  of  the  N.  E.  cove  open  of  Shallop  Cove  Point,  and  you  will  go  clear  to  tho 
wcsfwnnl  in  7  fathoms  water.  There  is  also  another  shoal  lying  off  the  ))oint  on  the  out- 
sidi!  of  Sliidlop  Cove,  on  which  are  2i  fathoms.  Thij  will  be  avoided  by  just  opening  the 
|Hiiiit  of  Deer  Island  with  the  first  point  on  the  main,  within  D(!or  Island;  and  after  you 
iiiivi)  passed  Harbor  Island,  you  may  anchor  on  good  ground,  in  from  10  to  2(\  fatlioms. 
Tiio  (Mitr;inc(>  of  Doer  Harbor  bears  from  the  north  point  of  Bacalieu  Island  W.  i  S.  dis- 
tmit  iilioni  II!  leagues. 

Kali  •i\  miles  N.  E.  from  tho  entrance  to  Deer  Harbor  is  Jones'  Harbor,  the  mouth  of 
which  is  not  ai)i)ve  a  (juarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and  the  cliannel  in  is,  in  several  parts,  still 
l.'ss.  It  runs  in  24  or  3  miles,  and  has  good  anchorage  in  from  .'>  to  21  fathoms  water. 
To  tile  southward  is  a  high  and  steep  island,  called  .Tones'  Ishind;  about  4  miles  from 
which  is  Bald  I  load;  and  2  miles  fnrtlier  (Jantiy  Cove  ;  its  entrance  is  fonfinod.  being  not 
miac  tliaci  ii  (inarter  of  a  mile  widiv.  there  is,  niiV(M-thidess,  good  riding  within  it,  in  10, 
I'.',  nnij  1')  fathoms.  Abimta  cal)le's  leii'^th  otV  the  nortli  shore,  just  at  the  entrance,  lies 
iisuiiImmi  rock,  and  about  a  inile  S.  S.  V..  from  the  soutii  point  of  Long  Island,  is  another 
rock,  by  some  called  White  Island,  just  appearing  above  water.  This  rock  bears  S.  W. 
t'roiii  Uiindom  South  Head. 

Random  North  Ih-ad  lies  W.  by  N.  distant  04  leagues  from  tho  north  end  of  Bacalieu 
Isliind,  and  about  l4  leagues  N.  by  W.  from  New  I'erlican. 

R.WDO.M  SOI  IN  I)  lies  to  the  westward,  and  comprcdiends  several  arms  and  harbors:  Random 
thus  Random  and  Smith's  Sounds  unite  and  form  Random  Island,  the  channels  being  Sound. 


f^l 


30 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


narrow,  long,  and  circuitous.  At  the  junction  of  the  two  sounds  is  a  small  island  with  t 
bar  of  only  two  fethoras  water,  the  passage  being  not  a  mile  broad.  About  3  leagues  from 
Random  North  Head,  lies  Hickman's  Harbor,  where  you  will  find  good  anchorage  in  is 
fathoms.  Random  North  Head  bears  from  Random  South  Head  N.  E.  d  E.  distnnt  3 
miles.  When  you  are  within  the  entrance  of  Rimdom  Sound  there  is  a  branch  runs  in 
toward  the  south;  about  1  mile  within  which  is  Fox  Cove,  fit  for  boats,  and  2  miles  further 
«  ^  Little  Heart's  Ease,  a  similar  cove,  running  in  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  then  dividing  into  two 
branches;  the  western  one  has  4  and  5  fathoms  within  it,  but  the  eastern  branch  is  shallow 
and  adapted  for  boats  only.  There  is  also  an  anchorage  2  miles  further,  on  the  same  side 
in  a  cove  with  an  island  before  it,  with  8  fathoms;  and  not  far  from  this  is  another  cove  on 
the  northern  side,  where  a  vessel  may  ride  in  7  fathoms. 
Smith  Sound.  SMITH  SOUND  has  generally  deep  water,  and  is,  in  most  places,  one  miie  wide 
until  you  get  near  the  head.  Shut-in  Harbor  is  on  the  starboard  side;  it  is  nearly  nt  the 
entrance,  and  has  no  safe  anchorage,  the  ground  being  rocky.  Three  miles  further  up 
is  Pope's  Harbor;  this  also  is  encumbered  with  rocks,  a  shoal  lying  near  the  middle  of  it 
The  direction  of  the  channel  is  westward  about  7i  leagues.     To  the  eastward  of  Random 


Island  are  Duck  and  Green  Islands,  both  lying  a  considerable  distance  from  the 


mam; 


Port  Bona- 
venture. 


TVinity  Har 
bor. 


the  latter  is  high,  and  may  be  seen  as  far  as  Trinity  Harbor;  it  bears  from  Bonaventure 
Head  S.  W.  i  S.  distant  about  6  miles;  and  Bonaventure  Head  bears  from  the  entrance 
of  Smith's  Sound  E.  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  5  miles.  To  the  north-westward  of  Green  Island 
is  Anthony  Island  and  Ireland's  Eye;  the  latter  is  3i  miles  in  length,  and  lies  in  a  S 
W.  and  N.  E.  direction,  making  the  larboard  side  of  the  entrance  to  Smith's  Sound 
The  northern  point  of  Ireland's  Eye  bears  from  Bonaventure  Head  nearly  S.  W.  distant 
5i  miles. 

There  is  a  small  place  of  anchorage,  called  Ryder's  Harbor,  formed  by  a  little  island 
near  the  main,  and  bearing  from  Green  Island  S.  E.  1  E.  distant  4  miles;  the  passage  to 
it  is  round  the  west  end  of  the  point,  off  which  are  some  scattered  rocks,  both  above  and 
under  water.  Within  this  harbor  are  3  fathoms  water,  and  about  a  quarter  of  n  mile 
from  Ryder's  Island  the  N.  W.  arm  branches  off,  loinning  westward  one  mile,  and  bein 
about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide;  here  are  7  fathoms  and  good  anchorage.  From  Bonaven- 
ture Head  to  Port  Bonaventure  is  2  miles;  but  when  you  are  a  mile  off,  and  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Head,  the  harbor  to  the  Admiral's  Stage  will  lie  about  N.  by  W. 

PORT  BONAVENTURE'S  best  entrance  is  between  two  small  islands  ;  but  you  may 
goon  either  side  of  them  in  3  and  4  fathoms  water:  with  a  leading  wind  there  will  be  little 
danger;  and  when  you  are  witiiin,  and  have  passed  these  islands,  anrlior  in  4  and  5  fath- 
oms. Southerly  winds  here  send  in  a  very  heavy  sea;  there  is,  however,  a  S(!cure  place 
for  boats  within  a  point  behind  the  Admiral's  Singe,  appearing  like  a  great  pond,  where 
100  boats  may  lie,  even  with  bad  weather,  in  safety. 

From  Bacalieu  North  Point  to  Bonaventure  Head  the  course  and  distance  is  N.  W.  1 
W.  2Qi  miles.     Bonaventure  Head  is  remarkably  high  and  steep. 

From  Bonaventure  Head  to  the  entrance  of  Trinity  Harbor,  the  course  and  distance  is 
N.E.  i  N.  4i  miles;  and  from  Bonaventure  Head  to  the  Horsecliops  E.N.E.  i  E.  8  miles. 
TRINITY  HARBOR  is  considered  one  of  the  best  and  largest  harbors  in  all  New- 
foundland, having  several  arms  and  coves,  where  some  hundred  ships  may  ride  land- 
locked. It  is  a  place  wliicli  you  may  safely  turn  in  or  out.  being  bold  to  on  each  side,  and 
having  no  danger  but  what  is  visible,  except  when  going  into  the  S.  W.  arm.  Where  the 
Admiral's  Stiige  usually  is,  there  is  a  shoni,  called  the  "Muscle  Bank,  from  which  shoots 
off  the  point  within  thesnuill  island  on  the  larboard  side  going  in,  and  extends  over  N.  N. 
W.  about  a  third  of  the  breadth  of  that  nriii.  Being  within  that  bank,  which  will  discover 
itself  by  the  color  of  the  water,  you  may  edge  over  close  to  the  south  shore,  or  keep  your 
lead  going  to  avoid  the  Muscle  Bank,  giving  it  a  little  distance;  the  mark  for  avoiding' it  ig 
the  house,  standing  over  the  steep  perpendicular  rock,  situated  between  Tavernor's  Point 
and  Ship  Cove,  open  of  the  Noddick.  Keep  this  mark  on  until  you  are  halfway  over  to 
the  Neddick,  then  haul  toward  the  S.  W.  branch,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  south  shore  till 
you  shut  in  Tavernor's  Point  with  the  Neddick ;  yon  will  then  go  within  the  Muscle  Uank. 
You  may  anchor  in  from  14  to  10  fathoms,  and  approach  near  to  the  stage  on  shore,  so  as 
to  make  a  stage  with  topmasts  t<j  your  stage  on  shore,  to  load  or  unload  your  ship.  Thig 
will  be  found  a  most  excellent  harbor:  for,  after  you  are  in  the  S.  W.  arm.  you  will  per- 
ceive another  branch  running  up  U>  the  N.  W.  which  is  continued  by  another  to  the  S. 
W.;  but  there  is  a  bar  or  lodge  at  the  entrance  of  the  S.  W.  arm.  The  N.  W.  arm  is 
also  a  large  place,  having  good  anchorage  for  500  sail  of  ships.  Besides  the  foro-nion- 
tioned  arms,  the  main  harlNir  turns  up  to  the  north. 

Ships,  being  within  the  harlwr's  mouth,  may  safely  ride  in  a  largo  cove  on  the  starboard 
or  east  side,  land-locked,  on  good  ground;  hero  the  planters  live.  Over  against  that 
cove,  on  the  larboard  or  west  side,  are  two  other  coves;  the  southernmt.st  of  them  is 
called  the  Vice  Admiral's  Cove,  very  convenient  for  curing  fish;  and  above,  or  to  the 
oortfaward  of  that,  is  a  large  cove  or  arm,  called  Got's  Cove,  where  there  is  rooui  enough 


for  300  or  4t 
tide  can  hurt 
clear  and  op( 

There  are 
bottom  every 
of  the  shore; 
dleofthearr 
riBSS  about  4 

ROBINH 
bor,  forms  al 
a  mile  wide, 
ride  and  fish, 
are  some  spo 
Points  there 

SALMOf 
Bay,  being  o 
mer  of  these 
gers,  and  has 
bold  to,  and  i 
about  two  mi 

ENGLIS: 
ig  a  clean  bai 
rounds  to  tht 
bigli  land,  st( 
Bay.  open  ai 
small  sandy  I 
rnnvenient  f( 
tering  cove  c 

RAGGEI 
rounding  roc 
who  intend  { 
rocks  at  its  e 
steer  in  betw 
most  of  the  i 
all,  or  until  j 
and  the  mail 

CATALI 
is  in  th(t  latit 
north,  distar 
gular  green 
island  is  the 
on  either  sid 
the  island 
Just  within 
over  which 
and  on  with 
the  rock ; 
the  north  si 

L  ITT  LI 
Harbor  to 
head  of  the 
anchor  clos 
Little  Groe 
In  the  S. 
bor  runs  w« 
fall  again,  a 
with  saltno 
cove,  at  tlie 
excellent  w 

From  th 
and  betwee 
ground,  anc 

From  th 
2i  miles;  i 
between  Fl 
on  the  outs 
Point,  or  b; 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


91 


»nd  with  a 
"gues  from 
I^Re  in  15 
'•  distnnt  3 
ch  runs  in 
leB  further 
g  into  two 
'  is  shallow 
snme  side, 
ler  cove  on 


for  300  or  400  sail  of  ships  to  ride,  all  on  clear  ground ;  there  neither  winds  nor  sea  nor 
tide  cnn  hurt  you;  and  in  this  place  ships  may  lie  undiscovered  until  the  weather  beccnaes 
clear  and  open. 

There  are  several  other  anchoring  places  in  this  harbor,  with  good  clean  ground.    The 
bottom  every  where  is  tough  clay,  with  4  and  5  fathoms  water,  within  two  boats'  length  '* 

of  Uie  shore;  and  6,  7,  8,  9, 10, 12,  and  14  fathoms;  and  in  some  places  more,  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  arms  and  channels.  You  may  turn  in  or  out  rendily,  observing  your  tide,  which 
rises  nbout  4  feet,  and  sometimes  more. 

ROBINHOOD'S  BA  Y".— Sherwick  Head,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  Trinity  Har-  Robinhood't 
|)or,  forms  also  the  south-western  boundnry  of  Robinhood's  Bay,  the  entrance  to  which  is  Bay. 
a  mile  wide,  and  the  bay  extends  northward  nearly  two  miles.     Here  vessels  frequently 
ride  and  fish,  in  from  7  to  1 7  fathoms  water.     At  the  further  or  upper  end  of  this  bay  there 
are  some  spots  of  shallow  water,  but  at  its  entrance,  and  between  Sherwick  and  Fox  Island 
points  there  is  no  danger  whatever. 

SALMON  COVE  and  ENGLISH  HARBOR  lie  to  the  eastward  of  Robinhood's  Salmon    Com 
Bay,  being  only  divided  from  it  by  a  narrow  neck  of  land,  called  Fox's  Island.     The  for-  and    Engli$k 
jaer  of  these  runs  in  northerly,  and  is  considered  a  good  fishing  place;  it  is  clear  of  dan-  Harhar, 
gers,  and  has  a  good  depth  of  water,  from  17  to  10  and  8  fathoms;  the  eastern  shore  is 
bold  to,  and  at  the  further  end  of  the  cove  there  is  a  small  run  of  water,  which  extends 
about  two  miles  to  the  northward. 

ENGLISH  HARBOR  is  situated  at  the  south-eastern  entrance  of  Salmon  Cove.  It  English  Har- 
ts a  clean  bay,  where  you  may  ride  in  4  and  5  fathoms  water.  From  hence  the  coast  bor. 
rounds  to  the  eastward  to  the  Horsechops,  a  distance  of  more  than  three  miles;  it  is  all 
high  land,  steep  to  and  without  danger.  To  the  north-eastward  of  Horsechops  is  Green 
Bay.  open  and  entirely  exposed  to  the  southward.  At  the  eastern  part  of  this  bay  is  a 
small  sandy  beach  with  a  rivulet  of  water.  This  place  is  little  frequented,  and  is  neither 
convenient  for  ships  to  fish  or  ride  in.  When  you  have  passed  this  bay  there  is  no  shel- 
tering cove  or  place  until  you  reach  Ragged  and  Catalina  Harbors. 

RAGGED  HARBOR  is  so  named  from  the  rough  and  craggy  appearance  of  the  sur-  Ragged  Har- 
rounding  rocks,  which  render  it  unsafe  for  either  boats  or  ships  to  enter;  but  for  those  bor. 
who  intend  going  there,  we  shall  observe,  they  must  go  to  the  northward  of  the  reef  of 
rocks  at  its  entrance,  running  on  north,  until  the  harbor  becomes  quite  open,  then  you  may 
steer  in  between  the  Round  Island  near  the  main,  and  a  large  black  rock,  being  the  outer- 
most of  the  ragged  ones  before  mentioned.  Sail  on  until  you  are  to  the  westward  of  them 
all,  or  until  you  get  the  south  head  of  Catalina  to  appear  between  the  westernmost  rock 
and  the  main,  then  anchor.     A  river  of  good  water  is  at  the  head  of  the  harbor. 

CATALINA  HARBOR  is  nearly  two  miles  to  the  northward  of  Ragged  Harbor,  and  CatalinaUm- 
is  in  the  latitude  of  48°  31'  15"  N.  bearing  from  the  north  point  of  Bacalieu  Island  nearly  bor. 
north,  distant  24  miles.  It  is  a  good  harbor  for  small  vessels,  and  may  be  known  by  a  sin- 
gular green  island  at  the  south  points  of  its  entrance.  Near  half  a  mile  to  the  north  of  this 
island  is  the  Brandy  Rocks,  a  ledge  over  which  the  sea  frequently  breaks.  You  may  go 
on  eitlier  side  of  these  rocks,  gMng  the  little  island  a  berth,  or  with  a  leading  wind  between 
the  island  nnd  the  main,  though  this  passage  is  exceeding  narrow,  in  4  and  5  fathoms. 
Just  within  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  is  Charlton  Rock  or  shoal,  lying  near  mid-channel, 
over  which  are  only  8  feet  water.  You  must  avoid  bringing  the  north  point  of  Green  Isl- 
and on  with  Burnt  Head,  the  south  point  of  the  harbor,  for  that  will  carry  you  right  upon 
the  rock;  there  is  a  passage  between  the  island  and  rock,  and  also  between  the  rock  and 
the  north  shore,  only  steering  nearer  the  main,  about  two-thirds  over. 

LITTLE  CATALINA  BAY  lies  inwards  on  the  northern  side.  From  Catalina  Little  CataU- 
Harbur  to  Little  Catalina,  the  course  is  about  N.  E.  1^  mile;  and  thence  to  the  north  na  Bay, 
head  of  the  bay  E.  N.  E.  a  little  eosterly,  4i  miles.  When  within  the  harbor  you  may 
anchor  close  to  the  shore  in  4  and  5  fathoms,  land  locked;  or  to  the  southward  of  the 
Little  Green  Island  in  3^  fathoms,  or  by  running  up  two  miles  further  obtain  fresh  water. 
In  the  S.  W.  arm  or  branch  of  the  river,  where  there  is  anchorage  in  5  fathoms,  the  har- 
bor runs  westerly.  Sometime"  *^^  water  in  this  harbor  willsuddenly  rise  3  or  4  feet,  then 
fall  again,  and  in  certain  seasons  u  will  often  do  so  2  or  3  times  in  3  or  4  hours.  It  abounds 
with  salmon,  and  the  herb  Alexander  grows  luxuriantly  on  the  Little  Island.  Near  a  small 
cove,  at  the  N.  W.  is  a  sort  of  mineral,  of  a  glittering  nature,  generally  called  Fire  Stone ; 
excellirnt  willicks  may  he  found  on  the  rocks. 

From  the  south  to  the  north  head  of  Catolina  the  course  is  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  5il  miles, 
and  between  them  are  from  13  to  5  fathoms  water.  The  whole  way  is  a  kind  of  broken 
ground,  nnd  in  blowing  weather  the  sou  frequently  breaks  high  over  it. 

From  the  north  head  of  Catalina  to  Flower's  Point,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  distant 
2J  miles;  and  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  point  lie  some  sunken  rocks;  yc;  may  go 
bptwoen  Flower's  Point  and  these  rocks  in  6  fathoms  water,butit  is  more  advisable  to  pass 
on  the  outside  of  tliem ;  this  you  will  readily  do  by  bringing  Gull  Island  open  of  Spiller's 
Point,  or  by  keeping  the  south  bead  of  Catalina  open  of  the  north  head. 


92 


Cape  Bona- 
visla. 


Boiutvista 
Bay. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

From  Flower's  Point  to  Bird's  Island  is  2  miles-  Within  Bird's  Island  is  a  small  bay 
where  ships  can  occasionally  ride,  in  one  branch  which  runs  up  towards  the  west,  and  in 
the  other,  amidst  some  rocks,  which  are  above  water.  Bird's  Island  Bay  extends  so  far 
as  Cape  L 'Argent. 

Froiu  Flower's  Point  to  Cape  L'Argent  is  3i  miles.  It  it  rather  a  low  rocky  point, 
having  also  a  large  rock  above  water  lying  off  it. 

From  Cupe  L'Argent  to  Spiller's  Point  is  li  mile.  Between  these  points  the  lead  fulls 
into  very  deep  water.  Spiller's  Point  is  steep  and  bold  to,  but  not  very  high,  withnrock 
above  water  near  it.  Over  the  point,  you  may  discern  the  high  land  of  Port  Bonavista  a 
great  way  off  at  sea. 

From  Spiller's  Point  to  Cape  Bonavista  the  course  is  north,  distant  almost  one  league. 
Between  them  is  a  deep  bay,  which  might  be  misttiken  for  the  Harbor  of  Bonavista,  from 
the  head  of  which  it  is  only  divided  by  u  neck  of  land.  Two  miles  over,  and  from  Red 
Head  Bay,  it  is  not  above  a  musket  shot. 

Hitherto  the  allowance  made  for  the  variation  of  the  compass  has  been  two  points  west- 
which,  it  is  presumed,  will  be  found  sufficiently  near  to  the  truth  for  all  the  purpcses  of 
navigation;  but  from  hence  to  the  northward  it  appears  to  have  generally  increagui.  At 
the  Capes  which  form  Bonavista  Bay,  tlie  variation  in  1820  was  30°  28'  W.;  atilarrow 
Harbor  28°  30'  W.;  and  at  Happy  Adventure  only  28°. 

FROM  CAPE  BONAVISTA  TO  CAPE  FREELS  (NORTH.*) 

CAPE  BONAVISTA  is  in  latitude  48°  42'  N.  and  longitude  53"  05'  W.  On  it  there 
is  a  revolving  light  of  two  minutes  intervals,  showing  a  red  and  white  light  alternately.  It 
is  150  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Kept  open  with  Spiller's  Point,  it  keeps  vessels  clear 
of  the  rocks  called  the  Flowers. 

The  cupe  appears  from  a  distance  of  a  bluish  color,  and  is  a  steep  rocky  point,  having4 
fathoms  close  to  the  shore.  Somewhat  loss  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  N.  N.  E.  from 
the  extremity  of  the  capo  lies  Gull  Island;  which,  though  small,  may  easily  be  recognized, 
by  being  of  moderate  height,  and  elevated  in  the  middle,  making  something  like  a  round 
hat  with  broad  green  brims,  and  visible  4  or  5  leagues  off,  when  the  weather  is  clear.  N. 
N.  E.  i  E.  distant  3i  miles  from  Gull  Island,  is  the  Old  Harry  Rock,  having  i  t  ly  13  feet 
water  over  it.  From  this  a  reef  or  bank  extends  to  the  N.  E.  nearly  three  miles,  having 
several  dangerous  spots  upon  it,  of  only  18  feet  and  3  or  4  fathoms.  The  outeredgoofthis 
danger  is  called  the  Young  Harry.  At  its  northern  extremity  are  10  fathoms  water,  and 
a  little  farther  oft'  45  fathoms.  13etween  the  Young  Harry  and  the  middle  ground  of  18 
feet,  are  12,  20,  and  50  fathoms;  to  the  northward  of  the  middle  ground  are  (50  and  40 
fathoms;  to  the  eastward  are  19  and  20  fathoms;  to  the  southward,  and  between  it  and 
the  Old  Harry,  26  and  31  fathoms.  At  the  north  part  of  the  OKI  Harry  are  11  fathoms; 
to  the  westward  30  fathoms;  to  the  S.  W.  i)  fathoms  ;  and  a  little  further  S.  W.  57 
fathoms.  Abundance  of  fish  are  caught  by  the  boats  which  frequent  this  bank,  but  it  la 
very  dangerous  for  shipping.  The  sea  commonly  breaks  over  Old  Harry,  unless  in  fine 
weather,  and  the  water  be  very  smooth;  but  the  other  part  of  the  shoals  show  themselves 
only  in,  or  immediately  after,  heavy  gales  on  the  shore. 

In  order  to  avoid  the  Old  Harry,  you  should  bring  Gull  Island  on  with  the  Green  Ridge, 
which  lies  considerably  inland;  but  you  must  bewiirc!,  forthismark  willcarryyou  too  close 
to  tho  Young  Harry.  Vessels  running  along  shore,  to  avoid  these  rocks,  must  be  careful 
in  keeping  Cape  Bonavista  open  with  the  westernmost  extremity  of  a  high  range  of  land 
to  the  southward,  called  the  Inner  Ridge;  these  dangers,  together  with  the  long  ledge, 
called  the  Flowers,  already  noticed,  render  it  very  imprudent  for  a  mariner  to  attempt 
making  land  hereabout  in  thick  or  boisterous  weather;  indeed,  at  any  time,  the  Island  of 
Bacaliou  is  the  best  and  safest  landfall  for  tho  stranger  that  is  bound  to  any  part  of  Bona- 
vista Hay. 

BONAVISTA  BAY. — This  extensive  bay  is  formed  on  the  south  by  Cape  Bonavista, 
and  on  the  north  by  Cape  Freels.  These  capes  lie  N.  3  E.  and  S.  3  \V.  from  each  other, 
and  compndiend  a  distance  of  40  miles;  between  which  the  coast  is  much  indented  with 
bays  and  inlets  of  the  sea,  most  of  which  are  navigable,  but  difficult,  rocky,  and  dangerous. 
Tho  land,  on  the  south,  is  generidly  high  and  mountainous,  and  the  shores  steep  and  iron- 
bound;  the  north  side  is  low  and  marshy,  from  which  the  water  runs  off  shoal  to  a  con- 
siderable distance.  The  whole  bay  abounds  with  small  islands,  and  is  on  every  side 
encompassed  with  dangers.  The  harbors,  sounds,  and  inlets,  are  deep,  extensive, 
numerous,  well  sheltered,  and  safe ;  but  they  are  generally  so  deeply  embiiyed,  tho  pas- 
sages into  them  so  intricate,  and  tho  surrounding  land  so  similar  in  appearance,  that  few, 
except  those  to  whom  the  navigation  is  familiar,  ever  attempt  to  enter  them.  Of  those 
which  seem  to  offer  tlio  i)est  refuge  to  strangers,  who  from  necessity  should  bo  compelled 
to  seek  n  place  of  shelter,  the  following  appear  best  calculated  to  suit  his  circumstances: 


8o  called  to  diritin^aixii  it  from  a  cape  of  the  larau  name,  situated  on  the  soutliem  part  of  Newfuund- 
land,  near  Sit.  Mary's  iiay. 


mmmmmmmm 


mmmmmmim 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


23 


BfliTow  Harbor,  or  Great  Chance  Harbor,  on  the  south;  and  New  Harbor,  or  Cat  Cove, 
on  the  north  side  of  the  bay  ;  but  the  pxtreme  narrowness  of  the  entrance  to  New  Harbor 
is  H  (ireat  impediment,  and  renders  Cp  .  Cove  the  most  to  bo  preferred. 

PORT  I30NAVESTA,  or  Bonc/ista  Harbor,  lies  within  and  about  3i  miles  to  the  Port  Bonavis- 
south-eastward  of  Cape  Bonavista;  and  vessels  intonding  to  rendezvous  there,  may  either  <a. 
piisd  to  it  between  Gull  Ishiiid  and  the  Cape,  or  between  Gull  Island  and  the  Old  Harry 
flock,  or  to  the  northward  of  the  Young  Harry  altogether;  if  the  former,  between  Gull  • 

Igliind  and  Bonavista.     The  passage  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  and  both  the  "  ' 

ctipe  and  island  steep  to,  having  4  fathoms  water  close  to  each  side,  and  IG  or  18  fathoms 
mill-channel;  but  it  will  bo  advisable  not  to  go  too  near  to  the  Gull  Island,  on  account  of  a 
rock  under  water,  which  lies  about  300  yards  offtho  S.  E.  part  of  the  island.  Having  passed 
through  this  channel,  and  finding  yourself  to  the  westward  of  the  cape,  you  will  see  Green  ' 

Islnnd,  distant  about  half  a  mile  from  the  cape.  Large  vessels  commonly  leave  this  island 
on  their  larboard  side,  in  their  passage  to  Port  Bonavista,  going  between  Green  and  Stone 
Isinnds.  The  channel  is  full  one  mile  and  a  quarter  wide,  and  with  12, 16,  and  18  fathoms 
ffttter  in  it,  and  no  danger  whatever,  except  a  sunk  rock  of  3  fathoms  water,  which  lies 
about  200  yards  to  the  N.  E.  of  Groen  Island ;  or  they  may  go  to  the  westward  of  Stone 
Island,  and  run  on  southerly  until  they  open  the  points  of  the  harbor,  and  having  passed  ^^   '  '■>-"■ 

Moses  Point,  sail  to  the  southward  of  the  Swerry's  Rocks;  these  are  always  visible,  and 
have  no  passage  between  them  and  the  point.  Here  they  may  anchor  in  10  or  8  fathoms. 
The  inner  passage,  between  Cape  Bonavista  and  Groen  Islnnd,  is  frequently  attempted 
by  small  vessels.  The  channel  is  in  some  parts  narrow,  and  the  ground  foul.  About  a  mile 
to  tlie  south-eastward  of  the  Green  Island  is  the  ledge  of  red  rocks ;  you  may  go  between 
these  and  the  laud  into  Red  Cove.  There  are  6  fathoms  water. and  in  the  cove,  4i,  4,  and 
3  fathoms;  but  the  ground  is  all  foul.  There  is  a  passage  also  to  the  southwiird  of  these 
rocks,  and  between  them  and  Western  Head,  in  which  are  6  fathoms.  A  little  to  the 
eastward  of  Western  Head  there  is  a  small  rock  under  water.  It  lies  about  a  caljle's  ItMigth 
from  the  shore,  and  the  sea  commonly  breaks  over  it,  but  boats  can  go  between  it  iind  the 
shore.  To  the  southward  is  Red  Head,  or  Point,  and  further  on,  is  Moses  Point.  Between 
these  is  another  opening,  called  Bay  ley's  Cove.  You  may,  in  case  of  extreme  necessity, 
run  in  here  and  anchor,  but  the  ground  is  foul  and  rocky  throughout.  There  was  on  the 
north  side  of  this  cove  ^  stage  for  fishing.  Moses  Point  is  the  northern  point  of  Bona- 
vista Bay.  This  place  is  a  very  eligible  situation  for  carrying  on  the  fishery;  but  it  is  so 
open  to  the  weather,  that  with  north-westerly  gales,  following  a  continuance  of  strong 
winds  from  seaward,  the  waves  break  right  athwart  of  the  harbor's  mouth,  and  sometimes 
the  whole  of  the  fishing  boats  founder  at  their  anchors,  and  not  unfrequently  many  of 
their  stages  are  destroyed.  Vessels  during  the  summer  months  conmionly  moor  under 
Swerry  Head  in  8  or  10  fathoms;  but  even  here,  and  in  every  other  part  of  this  harbor, 
the  ground  is  so  rocky  and  uneven  that  you  will  be  obliged  to  buoy  up  your  cable. 

BLACK  HEAD  BAY. — This  is  a  wide  and  deep  bay,  comprehended  between  Binck  Black  Head 
Head  to  tlie  eastward  and  Southern  Head  to  the  westward.  Black  Head  bears  from  Bay. 
Capo  Bonavista  W.  S.  W.  4  S.  distant  5}  miles;  Southern  Head  bears  from  Ciipe  Bona- 
vista W.  5  N.  distant  12  miles;  and  Black  Head  and  Southern  Head  bear  from  each 
other  K.  S.  E.  ?  S.  and  W.  N.  W.  |  N.  being  nearly  8  miles  apart.  On  the  western 
side  of  Black  Head  Bay  is  King's  Cove  distant  about  4  miles  from  Southern  Head.  This 
also  is  a  fishing  establishment,  but  still  more  objectionable,  as  a  place  of  shelter,  than 
Bonavista.  for  this  is  directly  open  to  seaward,  and  the  ground  is  all  foul. 

KEELS. — This  is  another  establishment  for  the  fisheries,  and  situated  in  one  of  the  Keels. 
coves  about  midway  between  Southern  and  Western  Heads.     Between  these  two  heads 
are  four  other  coves;  but  neither  Keels  nor  any  of  these  coves  are  fit  or  good  places  for 
anchorage,  especially  with  ships  of  burthen. 

From  Western  Head  the  land  bends  W.  S.  W.  J  S.  and  leads  to  numerous  coves, 
bays,  and  arms  of  the  son,  most  of  which  have  deep  water,  and  places  of  anijhornge.  We 
shall  here  enumerate  the  principal  of  these,  with  their  respective  situations;  but.  nsmnny 
of  them  are  too  deeply  embayed  for  general  navigation,  we  shall  not  extend  our  directions 
to  a  minute  or  particular  description  of  them  all,  but  confine  ourselves  to  such  only  ns  are 
situated  in  prominent  parts  of  the  bay,  and  are  mostly  fitted  for  general  use,  and  commonly 
frequented. 

We  have  already  stated,  that  from  Western  Head  the  land  turns  W.  S.  Westward,  and 
leads  to  Plate  Cove,  Indian  Arm,  and  Southward  Bay. 

PLATE  COVE  is  situated  on  the  coast  about  7i  miles  distant  from  Western  Head,  Plate  Cove. 
Its  entrance,  between  Arrow  Point  and  Plato  Cove  Head,  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide, 
from  whence  it  bends  in  more  than  a  mile  to  the  southward.  At  its  eastern  extremity  is  a 
run  of  fresh  water,  but  the  iiottom  is  foul  and  rocky.  It  is,  therefore,  not  nmch  frequented. 
INDIAN  ARM  lies  about  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Plate  Cove  Head,  distant  3  miles.  It  is 
a  narrow  inlet  running  in  nearly  S.  W.  about  two  miles,  and  terminates  in  u  rivulet  of 
fresh  water. 


34 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Southward 
Bay. 


Bacon-Bone 
Rock. 


i>weet  Bay. 


SOUTHWARD  BAY  is  ieparated  from  Indian  Arm  only  by  a  narrow  neck  of  Innd 
This  is  an  extensive  branch  of  the  sea.  Its  entrance,  between  Red  Head  and  Kate's  Hnr! 
bor  Head,  is  a  full  mile  wide,  with  30,  50.  80,  and  90  fathoms  water,  mid-channel,  Fro^ 
hence  it  bends  to  tho  south-westward  7i  miles,  becoming  narrower  as  you  advance,  but 
with  deep  woter  and  no  danger.  On  the  western  side  there  is  an  opening,  called  Hayeg 
Cove.     It  lies  about  two  miles  from  Kate  Harbor  Head. 

BACON-BONE  ROCK.— It  will  be  proper  here  to  remark,  that  vessels  intending  to 
seek  either  of  these  places,  must  beware  of  the  Bacon-Bone  Rock,  a  danger  of  only  ig 
feet  water  over  it:  this  lies  W.  i  N.  distant  one  mile  from  Western  Head,  and  directly  in 
the  fiiirway  of  the  navigation.  To  avoid  this  danger,  do  not  shut  in  Southern  Head  until 
Little  Denier  comes  on  with  the  outer  Shag  Island. 
Kate  Harbor.  KATE  HARBOR  lies  to  the  westward  of  Plate  Cove.  Its  entrance  is  three-qunrterg 
of  a  mile  wide,  and  the  harbor  runs  in  about  one  mile  and  a  quarter.  The  depth  of  water 
is  36,  29,  and  27  fiithoms  mid-channel,  decreasing  as  you  advance  to  the  further  end. 
There  is  a  rock  under  water  off  its  entrance,  with  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms  round  it;  this  lieg 
nearer  to  Kate's  Head,  but  there  is  a  passage  between  them,  and  also  a  still  wider  chan- 
nel on  the  western  side  of  the  rock. 

SWEET  BAY. — This  is  another  extensive  inlet,  lying  to  the  westward  of  Kate  Har- 
bor. Ita  entrance  is  between  Cutler's  Head  and  Chance  Point,  and  leads  also  to  Maiden- 
hair Cove,  and  Little  and  Great  Chance  Harbors.  Sweet  Bay  is  the  easternmost  inlet, 
which  having  entered  and  passed  Cutler's  Head,  which  is  rocky  and  steep  to.  you  will  see 
Turfpook  Island :  it  is  small  and  narrow.  About  half  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  this  is  Woody 
Island,  and  between  them  a  rock  under  water.  There  is  a  passage  on  either  side  of  these, 
and  when  you  get  beyond  Woody  Island,  the  bay  becomes  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
wide,  with  60  fathoms  water,  mid-way.  Advancing  still  further,  you  will  observe  several 
islands  in  your  passage.  There  is  also  a  rock  under  water  on  your  starboard  side,  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  beyond  Woody  Island.  It  lies  abreast  of  a  little  island  which  is  mid- 
channel.  Further  on  is  Wolf  Island,  between  which  and  the  main  there  is  no  passage. 
Off  this  lies  Gooseberry  Island;  between  which  and  Wolf  Island  there  are  30  fathoms 
WHter,  but  the  channel  is  narrow,  and  that  on  the  eastern  side  of  Gooseberry  Island  is  much 
wider.  Sweet  Bay  here  divides  into  two  b^inches;  that  to  the  eastward  is  called  the 
south-west  arm,  and  has  directly  before  it  mtrance  Hunt's  Island,  the  channel  to  the 
eastward  of  which  has  10,  12,  and  14  fathoms  water,  and  that  to  the  westward  7  and  9 
fathoms.  You  will  then  see  on  your  starboard  side  a  small  island :  you  may  pass  it  on 
either  side;  and  having  so  done,  will  drop  into  24,  22,  and  20  fathoms  water.  The  head 
of  the  arm  is  foul  and  rocky.  The  N.  W.  arm  is  divided  from  the  S.  W.  arm  a  little 
below  Hunt's  Island,  and  at  the  further  end  of  Wolf's  Island  is  nearly  a  mile  wide;  from 
whence  it  runs  south-westerly  ^  \  miles,  with  good  depth  of  water,  and  clear  of  dangers. 
At  the  bottom  is  a  sandy  beach  and  a  small  rivulet. 

GREAT  CHANCE  HARBOR.— This  is  an  excellent  and  convenient  place  of  nnchor- 


Great  Chance 
Harbor. 


Chandler's 
Reach. 


Goose  Bay. 


age,  the  entrance  to  which  lies  W.  }  S.  distant  lOi  miles  from  Western  Head.  Vessels 
sailing  for  this  place  should  recollect  the  mark  already  given  to  avoid  the  Bacon-Bone 
Rock.  Having  passed  this  danger,  you  may  sail  on  directly  for  the  harbor;  the  course 
will  be  W.  i  N.  until  you  get  abreast  of  Chance  Point.  You  will  now  guard  against  a 
sunken  rock  at  the  southern  part  of  the  entrance,  which  has  only  16  feet  water  over  it. 
To  avoid  and  go  clear  of  this  danger,  be  careful  not  to  shut  in  the  westward  Mustard-bowl 
Island  with  the  eastern  one:  these  are  situated  at  the  larboard  side  of  the  channel. 
Having  passed  the  eastern  island,  stand  boldly  in.  approaching  each  side  as  nearly  as  you 
like,  and  anchorany  where  above  the  narrows  in  from  11  to  5  fathoms.  The  ground  is  good 
and  holds  well.  You  will  lie  sheltered  from  all  weather,  and  may  procure  wood  and  water 
with  great  facility.  Chance  Point  and  Cutler's  Head  are  both  steep  to.  Off  the  former, 
and  directly  in  a  line  between  the  southern  part  of  Long  Islands,  there  is  a  spot  of  ground 
with  only  7  fathoms  of  water;  during  heavy  gales  from  the  seaward  this  will  show  itself  by 
the  sea  breaking  over  it,  but  in  fine  weather  it  is  not  dangerous.  N.  £.  a  little  northerly, 
distant  almost  one  mile,  is  the  Chance  Gull  Rock,  steep  to,  and  always  visible.  To  the 
westward  is  Deer  Island,  one  mile  and  a  quarter  long,  but  narrow.  There  is  a  good  chan- 
nel between  it  and  the  main  to  Chandler's  Reach. 

CHANDLER'S  REACH  is  the  channel  leading  to  Goose  Bay  and  Clode  Sound; 
tho  course  through  which  is  W.  i  S.,  which,  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Deer  Island,  will 
take  you  to  Connecting  Point;  this  is  the  point  of  the  peninsula  that  divides  the  former 
from  the  latter. 

GOOSE  BAY  runs  in  south-westerly  about  7i  miles,  and  by  keeping  in  mid-channel 
you  will  meet  with  no  danger,  but  have  47, 40,  and  36  fathoms  water,  until,  having  passed 
Lubber's  Hole,  the  depth  decreases  to  12,  13,  10,  and  8  fathoms,  when  you  will  see  a 
small  island  situated  to  the  westward  of  Goose  Head;  behind,  and  to  tho  westward  of  this, 
you  may  anchor  ir.  from  4  to  7  fathoms,  or  further  to  the  southward  in  5i  fathoms.  In 
most  of  these  inlets  you  will  lie  perfectly  safe,  and  entirely  land-locked.  Fresh  water  and 
wood  are  plentiful,  and  easily  obtained. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


26 


wk  of  land, 
date's  Har' 
_,8l.  Prom 
ivance,  but 
lied  Hayes 

ntending  to 
of  only  18 

d  directly  in 
Head  until 

_ee-qunrter8 
nh  of  Water 
V*er  end. 
it;  this  lies 
vider  chan- 

r  Kate  Bar- 
to  Maiden- 
nmoBt  inlet, 
you  will  see 
is  is  Woody 
ide  of  these, 
rs  of  a  mile 
erve  several 
side,  threc- 
>ich  is  mid- 
no  passage, 
30  fathomg 
and  is  much 
i  called  the 
innel  to  the 
■ard  7  and  9 
'  pass  it  on 
I  The  head 
arm  a  little 
wide;  from 
of  dangers. 

Bof  nnchor- 

d.  Vessels 
3acon-BoDe 

the  course 
•d  against  a 
Iter  over  it. 
ustard-bowl 
le  channel, 
mrly  as  you 
tund  is  good 
d  and  water 
the  former, 
it  of  ground 
ow  itself  l)y 
I  northerly, 

e.  To  the 
good  clinn- 

de  Sound; 
Island,  will 
the  former 

lid-channel 
ving  passed 
will  see  a 
'ard  of  this, 
loma.  In 
iwaturnnd 


CLODE  SOUND  is  h  fine  branch  of  the  sea,  running  in  from  Chandler's  Reach  full  20  Clode  Sound. 
piles.  It  has  many  good  places  of  very  good  anchorage,  and  without  any  danger.  Ves- 
sels may  find  perfect  safety  on  the  northern  shore,  at  Brown's  Cove,  or  further  in,  at  Long 
Core,  or  Platter  Cove ;  or  on  the  southern  shore,  at  Bunyan's  and  Love  Coves ;  or,  pas- 
liDg  the  Platter  Rocks,  and  steering  westward,  at  Freshwater  Cove.  The  mid-channel 
liBS  all  the  way  deep  water,  and  there  are  no  rocks  except  near  the  shores. 

LION'S  DEN.— This  is  an  opening  lying  at  the  N.  W.  end  of  Chandler's  Reach  ;  to  Lion's  Den. 
enter  which  you  must  sail  to  the  northward  of  the  Deer  and  Cluster  Islands,  and  pass  the 
Qgrrows,  which  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  and  has  24  fathoms  water  in  it.  Having 
oRSsed  the  entrance  about  one  mile,  there  is  a  sunken  rock,  round  which  are  4,  5,  and  6 
fathoms :  you  may  then  perceive  the  inlet  to  branch  off  into  two  divisions ;  that  to  the  N.W. 
is  very  narrow,  and  has  a  rocky  islet  at  its  entrance  :  but  that  which  runs  to  the  S.  W.  is 
broader,  and  has  11, 14  and  10  fathoms  water  in  it.  It  runs  in  from  the  sunken  rock  about 
1]  mile,  and  at  its  further  end  becomes  shoal,  narrow  and  rocky. 

THE  LONG  ISLANDS  are  4  in  number,  having  narrow  channels  between  them,  The  Long 
some  of  which  are  encumbered  with  rocks,  and  dangerous.  The  eastern  island  is  the  Islands. 
largest  and  broadest;  the  next  to  it  is  the  longest;  the  two  western  ones  are  smaller  and 
narrower.  They  form  the  northern  boundary  of  the  passage  from  Western  Head  to 
Chandler's  Reach ;  and  also  the  southern  boundary  to  Swale  Tickle  and  Newman's  Sound. 
Off  the  northeastern  point  of  the  largest  Long  Island  lies  a  sunken  rock  ;  it  is  close  to  the 
land,  and  therefore  may  easily  be  avoided  ;  this  point  bears  from  Western  Head  nearly 
W.  by  N.  distant  6  miles. 

NEWMAN'S  SOUND.— This  is  a  large  arm  of  the  sea,  running  in  W.  by  N.  having  Newman's 
gtlts  entrance  Swale  Island,  which  is  nearly  4  j  miles  long,  and  not  one  broad  in  the  widest  Sound. 
part,  this  divides  the  entrance  into  two  channels;  the  southern  passage  is  called  the 
Swalo  Tickle,  and  the  northern  one  goos  by  the  general  name  of  Newman's  Sound.  To 
Bail  from  abieast  of  the  Western  Head  into  the  Swale  Tickle,  you  must  steer  W.  N.  W. 
^  W.  To  sail  from  abreast  of  the  Bonavista  Gull  Island,  steer  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  29  miles, 
and  it  will  carry  you  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Little  Swale  Island,  and  in  the  fairway 
of  the  passage ;  but  in  advancing  through  this  channel  there  are  several  obstructions,  and 
the  passages  from  thence  into  Newman's  Sound  are  so  narrow,  that  it  will  always  be  ad- 
visible  to  go  to  the  northward  of  the  Great  Swale  Island.  'To  do  this,  having  rounded 
the  Gull  Island,  steer  W.  N.  W.  \  W.  27  or  28  miles ;  you  will  then  have  the  sound 
open,  and  can  proceed  accordingly.  It  is  full  11  mile  wide,  and  extends  in  nearly  a  N.  by 
W.  direction  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  Swale  Island  1 1  miles,  having  several  places  of  good 
anchorage.  Those  on  the  southern  shore  are  South  Broad  Cove,  Minchin's  Cove,  and 
Stanford  Cove. 

SOUTH  BROAD  COVE  is  situated  two  miles  and  a  half  beyond  the  western  point  South  Broad 
of  Swale  Island,  and  is  a  place  of  great  safety.     The  passage  in  is  to  the  south-westward.  Cove. 
and  you  will  ride  well  sheltered  in  10  fathoms,  free  from  any  danger.     There  is  a  small 
island  at  the  entrance,  which  you  will  leave  on  your  larboard  side. 

MINCHIN'S  COVE  is  to  the  westward;  to  go  to  this  place,  there  is  a  long  narrow  jyiinchin's 
point  of  land  running  out  to  the  northward,  which  you  will  round,  and  turning  southerly,  Cove. 
the  cove  will  appear  open  :  here  you  will  lie  in  5  fathoms,  opposite  a  sandy  beach.  To 
the  westward  is  Mount  Stanford,  off  the  point  of  which  lies  a  small  island,  reaching  half 
way  over  the  passage,  making  the  channel  in  this  part  very  narrow.  The  best  course 
through  is  to  the  eastward  of  this  island,  in  9  fathoms.  Here  an  opening  appears  to  the 
eastward,  called  Buckley's  Cove,  fit  for  small  vessels.  The  coast  now  winding  to  the  west- 
ward forms  a  broad  bay,  with  20,  26  and  27  fathoms  water  in  it,  free  from  any  danger,  and 
shallowing  on  each  side  towards  the  shores.  At  the  south  western  part  of  this  is  Stan- 
ford Cove,  having  a  sandy  beach,  the  approach  towards  which  shallows  gradually. 

The  anchorages  on  the  northern  shore  are.  North  Broad  Cove,  Great  and  Little  Happy 
Adventure  Coves,  and  Barrow  Harbors.  Barrow  Harbor  is  tolerably  safe,  and  the  most 
convenient  harbor  on  the  south  side  of  Bonavista  Bay;  it  is  situated  on  the  southern  side  of 
the  peninsular  which  divides  Newman's  Sound  from  Salvage  Bay,  and  is  formed  by  three 
large  islands,  Keat's,  Goodwin's  and  Richard's  Islands.  That  part  between  Goodwin's  Isl- 
and and  the  main  is  the  entrance,  about  500  yards  wide,  and  not  difficult  of  access.  The 
harbor  is  a  full  mile  in  length,  the  outer  part  is  rocky  and  not  well  sheltered,  but  the  inner 
part  is  completely  land-locked,  and  has  good  holding  ground.  Vessels  taking  their  depar- 
ture from  (juII  Island,  Bonavista,  should  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  }  W.  about  22  miles.  But 
if  coming  from  the  northward,  their  course  from  the  Eostern  Gooseberry  Rock,  towards 
Barrow  Harbor,  will  bo  S.  W.  1  W.  18  miles,  (iooseberry  Rock  appears  just  above 
water.  In  this  course  tlioy  will  have  to  avoid  the  Malone  Rock  und  Ledge,  the  latter 
being  a  shoiil,  lying  S.  |  W.  distant  one  mile  from  the  rock,  which  is  always  above 
water;  this  shoal  has  never  less  than  4  fathoms  over  it,  so  that,  in  fine  weather,  no  dan- 
ger whatever  is  to  bo  apprehonded.  In  sailing  on,  and  approaching  Little  Denier  Island, 
which  is  almost  opposite  the  harbor's  iiionth,  you  must  be  particularly  careful  of  the 
outer  Rock,  lying  N.  3  W.  of  Denier,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  this  has  only  4 


26 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Coves, 


North  Broad 
Cove, 


and  6  foot  upon  it,  but  fortunately  the  sou  constnntly  bronkH  over  it,  thereby  pointing  out 
itH  situiition,  iimi  onabling  the  iniiriiior  to  RUiird  njiiiiiiHt.  mid  etoor  cietir  of  the  dim(>Br, 
Hnvirig  roncliod  the  Littli*  Doiiier.  it  will  l)o  butter  to  f^o  on  its  nortiiern  8ido,  for  betwtien 
Little  Dnnierand  Riclmrd'H  Isliinil  tluuo  lio8  ii  dniij;eniUH  reof  of  rocUs,  called  the  Hrim. 
diHhes;  those  extend  nearly  in  n  line,  but  nt  varioun  diHtancoH,  ahiioMt  halfway  ov(t|'  the 
ciiannej.  Upon  these  rooks  are  from  12  to  17  feet,  with  narrow  chimnelH  of  7  and  8  futh. 
♦*  onis  between  them;  to  navigate  thin  jiassago,  therefore,  requires  a  pilot.     To  clear  the 

Brandishes,  you  sliould  keep  Wed|u;o  I'ointa  little  open  to  the  southward  of  Smoky  Hiilge, 
which  is  a  rari^ie  of  high  lands  at  the  top  of  the  iiarlior,  until  you  bring  lironm  lleiidoQ 
witli  the  Middle  Shag  Island ;  the  passage  then  will  i)e  open,  and  without  ot)structinn, 
until  you  got  near  to  Wedg(»  I'oint;  o(f  whi(h,  only  70  yards,  lies  n  sunken  rock,  with  8 
feet  water;  you  may  then  sail  up  Pudner's  Cove,  until  you  are  entirely  shut  in  from  the 
sea;  then  you  can  anchor  in  from  10  to  18  fatlioms.  Some  vessels  prefer  anclioring  jn 
Garland's  Creek,  but  without  running  well  up,  the  ground  is  foul.  The  land  about  Har- 
row  Ilnrbors  is  higher  than  the  neighbouring  sliores,  and,  con8e(|uently,  may  bo  the  innro 
readily  recognized  by  its  projection. 
Sandy  Cove,  SANDY  COVE  lies  further  up  Newman's  Sound,  and  has  good  anchorage;  it  may 
readily  be  known,  having  the  only  sandy  bench  on  tlie  north  side  of  the  sound.  There  k 
no  danger  in  entering,  and  it  is  perfectly  safe,  the  depth  of  water  being  from  10  to  20 
fathoms.  In  sailing  to  this  place,  and  keeping  along  the  northern  shore,  between  Harrow 
Harbor  and  Sandy  Cove,  you  will  meet  with  t\  rocky  islet,  called  the  Half  way  Kock ;  it 
is  steep  to,  and  has  4  fathoms  close  to  it;  there  is  also  a  di-ep  water  channel  between  it 
and  the  main,  but  keep  outside  and  pass  to  the  southward  of  it,  and  there  will  be  nu 
danger. 
Great  Sf  Little  GREAT  AND  LITTLE  ADVENTURE  COVES.— These  are  two  snug  litlh*  coves 
Adventure  lying  about  three-rpiarters  of  a  mile  above  Sandy  Cove,  and  on  the  same  side  of  New- 
man's Sound;  but  from  the  narrowness  of  their  entrances  they  are  fit  oidy  for  j^niiili 
vessels.  Between  these  coves,  and  olF  a  point  of  land  wliich  separates  them,  lies  a  saiik- 
en  rock,  about  80  yards  from  the  shore,  with  only  4  feet  over  it.  t)lf  the  entrnnceto 
Great  Adventure  Cove,  lies  Sidney  Island ;  the  passage  in  is  to  the  northward  of  tliis  isl- 
and, for  between  the  island  and  Harbor  Head,  there  is  no  thoroughfare. 

NORTH  BROAD  COVE.— The  entrance  to  this  place  lies  one  mile  and  three- 
quarters  from  Harbor  Head,  and  is  on  tho  northern  shore.  It  is  a  convenient  and  well 
sheltered  anchorage,  and  may  be  easily  known  by  a  round  island  lying  at  its  western  side : 
this  is  named  Black  Duck  Island.  SailitTg  into  the  cove  you  should  keep  the  island  on 
board  until  you  make  a  tickle*  between  it  and  the  western  shore,  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock 
at  its  eastern  side;  after  which,  it  is  advisable  to  keep  as  close  as  possilile  to  the  eastern 
shore,  (or  there  is  n  dangerous  rock  lying  mid-channel ;  being  inside  this  rock,  you  amy 
anchor  in  from  10  to  125  fathoms,  muddy  ground. 

In  advancing  further  up  Newman's  .Sound,  there  are  some  other  dangerous  rocks,  lying 
ofl"  tho  northern  shore  ;  one  of  those  is  called  the  Shag  Rock,  and  lies  three-quarters  of 
tt  mile  beyond  Black  Duck  Islet ;  and  one  mile  further  on  is  Hall's  Rock  ;  both  tiiese  nro 
underwater,  and  <listantabout  a  cable's  length  irom  the  land;  they  have  4  and  i)  fiilhonis 
close  to  them,  and  a  passage  between  them  and  tins  shore  of  6  and  7  fathoms  ;  therefure, 
in  sailing  up  Newman's  Sound,  the  northern  shore  should  always  have  a  good  berth. 
Keep  nearly  hall  a  mile  olf,  and  you  will  avoid  them  all. 

SALVACiE  BAY  lies  on  the  northern  side  of  the  promontory  which  divides  it  from 
Newman's  Sound ;  it  has  several  runs  of  fresh  water  within  it,  but  no  place  of  good 
shelter. 

DAMNABLE  HARBOR  lies  to  tho  northward  of  Salvage  Bay;  between  them  are 
several  small  islands  and  rocks;  the  largest  of  these  is  named  the  Baker's  Loaf,  and  is  n 
narrow  island,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long.  To  go  to  this  place  from  (iull  Isl- 
and, Bonavista,  you  should  steer  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.  about  7  h^ngnes,  and  round  the  Shag 
Islands;  proceed  thence  to  tho  northward  of  the  iJaker's  Loaf,  or  steer  N.  W.  by  W. 
from  the  (xull  towards  the  Ship  island,  which  may  readily  be  knownl);^  a  remarknblM  Imld 
point,  like  a  sugar  loaf;  then  W.  i  S.  from  Ship  Island  5',  miles,  will  bring  you  to  the 
er. trance  of  Damnable  Hart)or.  This  place  is  well  adapted  for  the  reception  of  suibH 
vessels,  but  its  very  narrow  entrance  dis(|ualilies  it  for  ships  of  burden.  There  is  a  rock 
off  the  southern  part  of  the  cwitrance,  and  another  olT  the  norlhern  side  of  the  islami, 
which  lies  in  the  middle  of  tlm  harbor;  thert*  is  good  aiiclioragri  all  round  the  island  in  4 
and  5  fathoms,  sandy  bottom. 
Morris'sCove.  MORRIS'S  COVE. — This  lies  on  the  north  side  of  Moriis's  Island,  and  is  considcrod 
to  be  a  safe  anchorage.  In  sailing  for  this  place,  keep  Ship  Island  well  on  board,  on  ac- 
count of  a  dangerous  reef,  which  extends  from  Klat  Island  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  way 
towards  Ship  Island,  on  some  j)arts  of  which  tliere  arc  not  above  17  or  18  feet;  |)rocc(.'d 
therefore  to  tho  northward  of  .Ship  Island,  passing  at  not  'noro  than  half  a  mile  distance; 


Salvage  Bay, 


Damnable 
Harbor. 


and  when  yi 
this  lutti'r  w 
being  sovera 
until  you  ge 
oxtroinity  ol 
rocks  o(f  the 
can  enter  w 
but  the  wesi 

BAY  OF 
but  It  is  so  (i 
of  any  use  ti 
full  M  miles 
nier'ible,  wi 
Cay,  and  M( 
westward,  ui 
nml  llie  nort 
direction,  so 
Harbor:  all 
wood,  and  wi 
jjloody  and 
Other  chant 
tween  the  L 
and  thence  I 
Locker's  Tr 
good  anchori 
of  necessity : 
traders;  we 
ore  better  sit 

Vessels  co 
Greonspond 
their  departt 
clear  the  Ei 
Gooseberry  ] 
mouth  of  (ir 
tills,  or  iniy  t 
pond  Island 
drifted  on  sh 
eued  cable  ii 

Ships  con 
(he  Charge 
Freels.    Th 
Csiiing  groui 
you  may  rui 
to  the  easlw 
a  good  look- 
by  E.  i  E. 
commended 
and  foggy,  a 
you  will  run 
scattered  so 
clinit  call  e> 
orally  heavj 
Stinking  Ba 
places  then 
would  not  st 
would  then 
smooth,  the 

Having 
Cove,  you  ti 
berry  Islan( 
tlii'u  be  two 
Isliind;  tho 
only  11  feel 
Chalky  Hil 
dangers;  th 
you  can  con 
bv  its  sembi 
W.  for  Indi 


•  "  Tickle,"  a  narrow  pasgage  bctwcan  iulandf  and  rucks. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


»7 


oiiitiiig  out 
lie  iliiii(;()r. 
)!•  Imtwuen 
1  tlni  IJriin- 
"vor  the 
liiid  8  filth. 
»  <:lftirthe 
"ky  Kiilgo, 
in  HiMidon 
•l)struction, 
ock.witha 
n  from  the 
nclioring  in 
iii>out  )}Rr. 
)o  tho  inoro 

ige ;  it  may 
1  liero  ID 

in  10  to  20 
en  Hiirrow 

ly  Kook;  it 
l)otweon  it 
will  be  no 

Z  litth' coves 
lo  of  New- 
ly for  simtll 
lies  ii  siiiik- 
I'ntrnnce  to 
I  of  tliiH  isl- 
and tliree- 
int  inid  well 
osterii  side : 
le  island  on 
sunken  rock 
the  eastorn 
;k,  you  may 

rocks,  lying 
i-quiirtcrsof 
h  tiiese  (iro 
id  o  fathoms 
;  tlionifiire, 
good  berth. 

'ides  it  from 
uco  of  good 

i!n  tliem  are 
oaf,  and  is  a 
in  (iull  Isl- 
d  the  Shag 
W.  by  W. 
arkiible  liidd 
you  to  tile 
on  of  .small 
M'o  is  a  rock 
'  the  island, 
)  island  in  4 

i  considered 
jnrd,  on  nc- 
of  the  way 
't ;  proceed 
lo  distance; 


and  when  you  are  wull  inside,  avoid  shutting  in  Liickington  Bock  with  Vnrkot  Island;  y -^ 

this  Iiitter  will  be  known  by  its  ii|i|)ttnring  like  two  Hingular  liuiiiriiocks,  on  account  of  there 
beinu  soveial  clusters  of  rocks  between  Ship  and  Ilorsechop  Islands.  Iriteor  for  Vurket 
until  you  get  iibroast  of  Lnckingtoii  Rock,  tlit^n  keep  Luckingtoii  Kock  on  the  northern 
extremity  of  Ship  Island,  until  tlie  Vurket  bears  north,  in  order  to  clear  tho  two  sunken 
rocks  oil  the  end  of  Morris  Island;  you  iimy  then  stutu'  directly  for  the  cove,  which  you 
can  enter  without  fearing  obstruction,  and  anchor  in  any  part  thereof,  in  25  to  H  fathoms; 
but  the  western  side  of  the  cove  is  to  bo  iireferred. 

BAV  of  fair  and  FALSK. — This  place  may  contain  several  good  anchorages,  i?ni/ o/" Fair 
but  It  is  so  filled  with  small  islands  and  rocks,  that  no  description  wo  could  give  would  be  ana  False. 
of  any  use  to  the  mariner.  A  cluster  of  large  islands  extends  off  the  frontage  of  this  bay, 
full  -"  miles,  or  so  far  as  Olfer  Gooseberry  Island;  between  these  are  passages  iniiu- 
laorible,  with  deep  water;  there  is  also  a  wide  channel,  running  from  Fair  and  False 
Bay,  and  Morris  Island,  to  the  northward.  This  leads  to  Uloody  Bay,  which  then  turns 
westward,  and  is  divided  into  various  branches,  forming  the  N.  W>  arm,  the  middle  arm, 
laul  the  north-ehst  arm  ;  this  latter  being  a  peculiar  and  extensive  channel,  running  in  one 
direction,  southward,  almost  to  Newman's  Sound;  and  in  another,  almost  to  Damnable 
Harbor:  all  these  are  navigable,  uiid  alford  places  of  good  anchorage,  and  plenty  of  both 
wood,  and  water.  There  is  also  an  open  strait  from  ISloody  Kay  to  the  eastward,  througVi 
Bloody  and  Cottel's  Reaches,  and  out  to  the  northward  of  OlFor  Gooseberry  Island. 
Other  channels  branch  olf  to  the  northward  from  Bloody  and  Cottel's  Reaches,  and  be- 
tween the  Lakeman's  Islands,  running  into  Pitt's  Sound,  Locker's  and  Content  Roachds; 
and  thence  to  Freshwater  Bay :  within  these,  and  on  the  northern  shore,  are  Har«, 
Locker's  Trinity,  Indian,  and  many  other  lesser  bays,  coves,  and  inlets,  abounding  with 
good  anchorages,  and  calculated  to  aflford  shelter  for  shipping  of  all  descriptions,  iu  cases 
of  necessity:  tliet.  are,  ;it  present,  but  little  known,  and  frequented  only  by  tho  constant 
traders;  we  shall,  therefore,  proceed  to  those  which  are  tho  usual  places  of  resort,  und 
ore  better  situated  for  t:ie  jiurpose  of  fishing. 

Vessels  coming  from  tho  south-eastward,  und  bound  to  the  northward,  for  New  Harbor, 
tireonspoiid  Tickle,  Cat  Cove,  the  N.  W.  arm,  or  anchorages  adjacent,  frequently  lake 
their  departure  from  Cape  Honavista;  in  which  cuse,  their  course  will  be  N.  by  W.  to 
clear  the  Eastern  Rock,  which  lies  E.  S.  E.  distant  one  mile  and  a  quarter  from  Oflbr 
Gooseberry  Island.  From  thence  they  should  steer  N.  f  E.  to  Copper  Island,  at  the 
mouth  of  Greensjjond  Tickle;  hero  pilots  may  frecpioiitly  be  obtained  to  conduct  you  to 
tiiis,  or  any  of  the  adjoining  anchorages.  Tliere  is  good  holding  ground  between  ( Jreens- 
pond  Island  and  the  main ;  but  the  water  is  generally  so  deep  that  a  vessel  is  liable  to  bo 
drifted  on  shore  in  the  act  of  weighing;  nor  is  there  sulhcioiit  room  to  veer  out  a  length- 
eued  cable  in  heavy  gales  from  the  S.  W.,  to  which  quarter  it  is  much  exposed. 

Ships  coming  from  the  eastward,  or  round  Capo  Freels,  must  be  careful  to  go  clear  of 
the  Charge  Rock,  which  lies  S.  E.  3  S.  two  and  a  half  miles  from  Gull  Island  oQ"  Cape 
Freels.  This  has  only  six  feet  water  over  it,  and  is  circumscribed  by  a  large  spot  of  rough 
fishing  ground,  with  from  8  to  30  fathoms  upon  it.  From  tho  Gull  Island  of  Cape  Freels 
you  may  run  immediutoly  for  the  Stinking  islands,  taking  care  not  to  open  Cape  Freels 
to  the  eastward  of  tho  former;  this  will  carry  you  inside  the  danger.  You  should  keep 
a  good  look-out  for  the  mid-rocks,  which  appear  just  above  water,  und  lie  two  miles  N.  E. 
by  E.  i  E.  from  tho  Slinking  Islands;  but  vessels  not  bound  up  the  bay,  are  strictly  re- 
commended to  keep  outside  of  them  all;  for,  should  tho  weather  boconie  suddenly  thick 
and  foggy,  a  circumstance  by  no  means  unusual,  more  especially  with  an  easterly  wind, 
you  will  run  great  hazard  of  getting  bewildered  among  the  innumerable  rocks,  which  are 
ecuttored  so  profiiscdy  about  this  part  of  the  coast;  and  from  which  neither  compass  nor 
cliait  call  extricate  you.  Iu  the  winter  months,  when  the  north-easterly  gales  are  gen- 
erally heavy  and  continuous,  the  sea  breaks  exceedingly  high  over  several  sjiots  of  tho 
Stinking  Banks,  which  lie  E.  by  N.  i  N.  from  the  islands,  distant  about  2i  miles;  in  two 
places  there  are  only  7  fathoms  over  these  banks;  and  in  such  weather,  although  a  ship 
would  not  strike,  she  would  bo  iu  great  danger  of  foundering  in  tho  tremendous  sea  which 
would  then  frecjuently  break  over  her;  but  when  the  weather  is  settled,  and  the  sea 
smooth,  they  are  by  no  means  dangerous. 

Having  rounded  the  Stinking  Islands,  and  wishing  to  sail  into  New  Harbor,  or  Cat 
Cove,  you  may.  with  propriety,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  {  \V.  directly  for  tVie  Offer  Goose- 
berry Island,  Uiitil  you  bring  I'ouch  and  Flower  Islands  to  touch  each  other;  you  will 
tJKMi  be  tvvo  miles  outside  of  the  three  rocks,  which  lie  1^  milo  to  the  southward  of  Flower 
Island;  tho  outer  rock  has  3  fathoms  over  it,  the  middle  rock  14  feet,  and  the  inner  rock 
only  11  feet.  You  will  now  alter  your  course  to  W.  |  S.  keeping  the  white  face  of 
Ciialky  Hills  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow,  which  will  take  you  clear  of  Copper  Island 
dangers;  then  should  tho  inclemency  of  the  weather  pr(!vont  you  getting  a  pilot  on  board, 
you  can  continue  tliis  course  until  yuu  bring  Slioi^  Cove  Point,  wliicli  may  be  distinguished 
by  its  semblance  to  white  marble,  to  bear  N.  W.  i  W.,  then  shape  your  course  W.  N. 
W.  for  Indian  Bay. 


98 


MLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


North-weit 
Attn* 


New  Harbor.  NEW  HARBOR  Is  iltUBted  on  the  enstern  iidn  of  Indian  BBy.  about  two  miles  from 
the  Shoe  Cove  Point.  This  pliice,  durins;  the  enaterly  windH,  will  be  qnito  inacce«gib|. 
on  account  of  it«  narrow  entrance:  in  this  cage,  you  muit  proceed  onward,  about  four 
miles,  for  Car  Cove. 

Cat  Cove.  CAT  COVE.— In  order  to  reach  this  place,  you  will  proceed  between  Silver  Hn-rand 

Brown  Fox  TfllandB  and  the  main;  and  as  you  approach  the  latter  the  channel  nnrrowi 
and  you  will  have  a  narrow  island  on  your  starboard  side ;  this  is  Cat  Island,  behind  whicli 
is  Cat  Cove.      You  will  have  no  difliculry  in  diHtinguishinK  this  island,  it  being  the  oni* 

Eiart  that  is  covered  with  Livr.  woons,  for  the  surrounding  forests  have  all  been  dt^troyed 
y  some  general  conflagration.  Ofl*  the  upper  part  of  Cat  Island  lie  two  high  green  rocjia- 
you  most  go  round  these,  for  the  water  is  too  shoal  to  go  between  them:  having  dunew 
you  may  run  on  until  you  get  some  distance  inside  the  upper  point  of  the  island,  whenyoQ 
may  anchor  in  from  !i  to  13  fathoms,  with  a  hawse  open  to  the  N.  W.,  the  winds  from 
that  quarter  being  most  heavy  und  squally.  In  working  in,  you  may  stand  close  to  either 
shore,  except  off  the  point  of  the  island,  as  there  is  a  sunken  rock  within  100  yards  ofit, 
with  not  more  than  10  feet  water  over  it. 

NORTH-WEST  ARM.— This  is  situated  on  the  main,  and  is  the  place  of  gnfef. 
nearest  to  Cape  Froels;  but  its  entrance  is  very  difficult,  on  account  of  the  number  of 
islands  that  urround  it,  and  those  islands  are  almost  undistinguishable  one  from  the 
other,  from  their  similarity  of  appearance,  fn  coming  froiii  the  southward  for  the  North- 
west  Arm,  the  greatest  danger  which  you  will  have  to  encounter  is  the  Northern  Rock 
which  never  has  less  than  22  feet  over  it;  this  lies  N.  E.  distant  one  mile  and  thrce^ 
quarters  from  the  Copper  Island;  this  island  you  will  easily  recognize  by  its  having  no 
wood  upon  it,  and  by  its  height.  In  fine  weather,  and  a  smooth  sen,  vessels  pass  over  it 
in  perfect  safety ;  but  in  hard  gales,  the  waves  beat  over  it  incredibly  high,  'i'o  avoid 
it,  be  careful  to  open  Fool's  Island,  which  is  somewhat  higher,  and  more  prominent  than 
the  rest,  and  which  is  covered  with  trees,  except  about  the  summit,  to  the  westward  of 
the  Western  Pond  Rock,  until  you  get  Butterfly  Island  to  touch  the  inner  part  of  Flower 
Island,  or  until  Puflin  and  Copper  Islands  touch  each  other;  then,  leaving  the  Pond  Roclia 
on  your  starboard  side,  steer  in  for  Fool's  Island.  It  is  advisable  to  keep  this  island  well 
on  board,  for  there  is  a  sunken  rock,  lying  mid  channel,  exactly  between  it  and  Partridge 
Island  Rocks;  this  danger  has  only  18  feet  water  over  it;  but  no  mark  can  be  given  to 
avoid  this  rock.  The  course  then  up  the  arm  will  be  N.  W.  |  W.;  and  so  soon  na  you 
get  inside  of  Odd  Island,  you  may  anchor,  on  muddy  ground,  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms, 
Fool's  Island  Hill  bearing  S.  E.  to  S.  E.  by  S. 

GREENSPOND  TICKLE. — Greenspond  is  a  square  island,  about  a  mile  in  brondth 
each  way.  A  reef  of  rocky  islets  runs  off  its  southern  part  all  the  way  to  Puffin  Island. 
Greenspond  Tickle  lies  on  the  south-eastern  part  of  the  island,  and  is  of  very  littlu  impor- 
tance, being  incapable  of  receiving  any  vessel  whose  draught  of  water  excecils  14  feet. 
The  dangers  in  going  to  this  place  are,  the  Northern  Rock,  the  Cook-room,  and  Ilnrljor 
Rocks;  but  it  will  be  almost  impossible  to  get  into  this  harbor  with  an  adverse  wind,  or 
even  with  a  fair  one,  without  the  assistance  of  a  pilot. 

Ships  sometimes  run  in,  and  anchor  between  Greenspond  Island  and  the  main,  but  the 
channel  is  narrow,  the  water  is  very  deep,  and  it  lies  too  open  to  the  S.  W.  winds  to  be 
considered  a  place  of  safety.  In  order  to  sail  into  it  you  must  get  to  the  westward  of  the 
Copper  Islands;  in  so  doing,  be  careful  of  the  Midsummer  Rock,  which  lies  nearly  W.  by 
S  I  S.  distant  one  mile  from  Copper  Island,  and  has  only  5  and  G  feet  water  over  it. 
Observe,  when  you  shut  in  Silver  Hare  Island  by  Shoe  Cove  Point,  you  will  bo  withio 
Bide  of  the  danger;  it  is  also  necessary  to  give  Newal's  and  Ship  Island  a  wide  berth,  as 
the  water  shoals  off  them  to  a  considerable  distance. 

CAPE  FREELS  TO  THE  STRAIT  OF  BELLE  ISLE. 

CAPE  FREELS  is  formed  of  three  points,  the  South  Bill,  tho  North  Bill,  and  the 
Middle,  or  Cape  Freels.  There  are  many  shoals  and  rocky  dangers  about  them  nil,  there- 
fore a  wide  berth  should  be  ;:;iven  them  at  all  times.  Over  these  points  is  some  high  land, 
commonly  called  the  Cape  Ridge,  which  is  visible  at  a  considerable  distance. 

FUNK  ISLAND.— N.  54°  E.  from  Cape  Freels,  distant  27  miles,  Vwa  the  Funk 
Island.  This  is  little  more  than  a  sterile  rock,  and  cannot  be  seen  further  than  at  the  dis- 
tance of  10  or  12  miles;  but  it  will  always  be  distinguished  by  the  great  number  of  birds 
which  continually  hover  over  it.  About  200  yards  north  of  Funk  Island  is  a  largo  rock 
above  water,  and  N.  W.  by  W.  180  yards  from  this  are  still  larger  rocks;  they  ore  all 
barren,  and  only  the  resort  of  sea  birds,  that  inhabit  and  breed  there.  Between  tlipse 
rocks  are  18,  37,  and  42  fathoms  water,  with  a  clear  passage;  but  between  the  eiistem 
rock  and  Funk  Island  there  is  a  dangerous  sunken  rock,  of  only  10  feet  water,  over  which 
the  sea  generally  breaks:  neiir  this  sunken  rock  are  14  and  Ifi  fiithoin.s,  and  between  it 
and  Funk  Island,  30,  25,  M],  38,  24,  and  17  fathoms.  Off  the  western  point  of  Funk  Isl- 
and are  some  rocks,  and  nt  its  eastern  part  a  sort  of  creek  witli  .'i  fiithiiiiis  in  it.  It  is  also 
reported  that  a  lodge  of  rocks  lies  S.  W.  from  Funk  Island,  distant  about  7  miles. 


Ortfiupond 
Tickle. 


Cape  Freda. 


Funk  Island. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


89 


pUHPL'y  LEDOE,  or  Snap  Rock. — This  is  n  dongernui  reof,  nnd  laid  to  lie  about?  DureVi 
I  iffuus  N>  W.  Iiy  N.from  Funk  Isliirul.     Thti  8«a  bruaks  ovur  it  contiuuully:  and  nearly  Ledge. 
\!  \V.  by  W  diMtarit  3  loiif(ue8  from  Durid'H  L«d((«<  i*  another  dnncer,  named  Cromwell'i 
I  edisu-     ''  iaBUPPosedtoheiirK.  H.  K.  \  K.  diHtaut  I  Our  IGiniiei  from  Little  F<)(;o   ulandi). 

N.  N-  VV-  i  ^-  ^''"'"  C"P<*  Freels,  diatiint  (>i  niil«ii,  is  the  Outer  Cat  iBlund.  It  ia 
oiincctud  to  tne  main  by  a  aandy  reef,  which  ia  iinpnaHitiilo  ibr  shippinft,  and  forma  the 
inutliern  point  of  Deadnnin'a  Hay.  A  little  heforo  you  come  to  the  Outer  Cut,  you  will 
.g  n  reniiirkablu  hill,  called  the  Windmill  Hill,  and  near  it  the  Little  ('at  Uland.  In 
MJlinK  to  or  from  Cape  Freela  the  shore  should  have  a  roo<I  berth,  although  there  are 
lOundinK"  ""  ^^'°  ^"X'  ""^  ^^^'V  derreaae  gradually  towardn  the  shore.  Deadinan's  liay 
lirortiied  by  the  outer  Cat  Island  to  the  southward,  and  Doudman's  Point  to  the  north- 
wnrd.  The  soundings  within  it  are  regular,  and  the  bay  without  rocks,  unless  close  to  the 
ihure;  but  it  is  totally  unsheltered,  and  open  to  nil  easterly  winds. 

Having  passed  Deadman's  Point,  you  will  approach  the  Penguin  Islands.  These  are  2 
jn  number,  and  bear  from  Cape  Freels  N.  N.  W.  \  W.  distant  14  and  16  miles.  Between 
them  the  passage  is  clear,  with  from  5^  to  7  fathoms  water;  but  vessels  should  not  go 
witiiin  them  and  the  shore,  for  there  are  sevend  rocky  reefs,  which  render  it  particularly 
dangerous. 

(lAdK'H'D  HARBOR  Ilea  to  the  north-westward  of  the  Penguins,  distant  GJ  mWea.  Rageed 
The  main  land  hereabout  ia  low  and  sandy,  and  the  passage  from  the  eastward  rocky  and  Harbor, 
il„i)ireious;  it  should,  therefore,  not  be  attempted  by  a  stranger,  or  without  a  pilot.  To 
tlienurth-westward  is  Ladle  Cove  Island,  atid  7  utiles  l)eyond  that  is  Rocky  Buy.  At  its 
eiitiance,  which  is  wide,  lie  throe  islands.  Noggin  Island,  Cireen  Island,  und  further  south 
jjWbitu  Island.  You  may  pass  between  each  of  these  in  7  fathoms;  between  Rocky 
I'uint  atid  <treen  Island  in  7,  H,  1.3,  or  10  fathoms  ;  and  between  Green  and  White  Islanda 
in  13  and  14  fathoms.  Between  Noggin  Island  and  the  western  point  of  the  bay  there 
are  3}i  ?<  ^'^'  "'  ""^  ''  fi>tl>oins.  The  bottom  of  these  bays,  for  there  are  3  openings,  ia 
rocl(V>  '■■>*'  vessels  cannot  go  far  into  them. 

TIIK  WADHAM  I.SLANDS.— These  are  a  cluster  of  islands  lying  to  the  north-  The  Wadham 
westward  of  Cape  Freels.  They  consist  of  8  or  10  scattered  Islands,  separated  from  each  Itlanda, 
otlier  l>y  cliunnt'ls  more  than  I  and  2  miles  wide.  The  largt^st  of  these  is  called  Peck- 
foril's  Island,  which  is  almost  a  mile  long,  lies  in  the  direction  of  north  and  south,  and 
bnars  IVoMi  Cape  Freels  nearly  N.  by  W.  dislant  '20  miles.  From  its  southern  part,  to- 
wurds  the  land  about  Kagged  Harbor,  there  are  a  number  of  rocky  islets  and  reefs,  with 
cliiitiiiKl!*  between  them,  rendering  the  navigation  of  this  part  extremely  hazardous.  N. 
N.  \V.  ,',  N.  1 ,',  mile  from  Peckford's  Island  is  White  Island,  but  a  passage  between  thein 
should  not  be  attempted,  fur  there  are  several  small  rocks  lying  oft'  the  north  and  north- 
western part  of  Peckford's  Island, some  of  whichstretchoutalmost  as  far  as  White  Island. 
J{.  W.  by  W.  from  Peckford's  Island,  about  4i  miles,  is  Copper  Island.  Green  Island 
lies  W.  N.  W.  I  N.  2i  miles  from  Peckford's  Island,  and  about  a  similiar  distance  S.  S. 
K. .',  K.  from  Copper  Island.  There  are  also  some  small  rocks  lying  off  the  N.  W.  end  of 
Green  Island,  which  being  visible,  can  always  be  avoided  with  ease. 

S.  \V.  R<  '(/'K. — This  is  a  small  detached  Rock  above  water,  bearing  from  Peckford's  S.  W.  Rock. 
Iiilimd  S.  S.  K.  i  K.  distant  3.^  miles  :  near  it  are  13,  17,  and  21  fathoms.  About  N.  N. 
E,  distant  '2  miles  from  the  S.  W.  Rock,  is  a  small  flat  island  ;  and  a  little  more  to  the 
eastward  is  OD'er  Island  ;  this  is  the  most  easterly  of  all  the  Wadham  Islands.  There  is 
retn  rock  to  (lescril)e,  which  lies  E.  8.  E.  \  E.  from  Olfer  Island,  distant  about  one  mile 
nod  H  half:  this  is  dangerous,  and  must  have  a  berth  in  passing  either  north  or  south  of  it. 

THK  FO(iO  ISLANDS  lie  to  the  north-westward  of  the  Wadham  Islands.  Great  The  Fogo 
Foj^o  is  a  large  island,  4  leagues  long  and  9  miles  broad.     Olf  its  south-western  point  lie  Islands. 
the  liidiiin  Islands;  and  N.  E.  by  N.  4  miles  from  the  body  of  Great  Fogo,  are  the  Little 
Fdgo  Islands. — Numerous  other  rocks  and  small  islands  are  scattered  about. 

SHOaL  BAY. — This  harbor  is  very  secure,  with  good  anchorage  in  any  part  above  iS/ioa^  Bay. 
the  Harbor  Rock  :  it  has  two  tickles,  so  called  in  Newfoundland,  and  intended  to  describe 
uaruw  passages  between  islands  and  rocks  :  these  may  be  entered  with  any  wind  except 
from  the  south  to  the  S.  W.  which  wind  blows  out  of  both.  To  enter  the  Eastern  Tickle, 
you  should  borrow  on  Rag's  Island,  keeping  the  extreme  of  Fogo  Island  nearly  open  of 
Lime's  Island,  until  (nappy's  Island  comes  open  of  Simon's  Island  ;  you  will  then  clear 
the  shoals  of  Filly's  Point.  To  avoid  the  Harbor  Rock,  bring  Slade  and  Cox's  Flagstaff 
on  with  the  eastern  chinmey  of  their  dwelling  house  :  it  will  be  necessary  to  get  this  mark 
oDhffore  Hoatswuin's  Island  closes  Bullock's  Point.  In  coming  from  the  westward,  it  is 
advisiililc  to  make  free  with  Fogo  Island,  in  order  that  you  may  distinguish  the  small  isl- 
ands that  form  the  tickle,  which,  if  passed  with  westerly  winds,  can  never  be  regained, 
owing  to  the  constant  s(>t  there  is  to  the  eastward.  Having  passed  Little  Motion,  keep 
the  exirenio  point  of  the  head  over  the  Narrows  Point,  until  you  get  past  BuUock's  Point, 
wlica  the  above  directions  will  clear  all  the  harbor's  dangers. 

Coining  from  the  eas^tward,  and  bound  to  Fogo  Harbor,  N.  W.  port  of  Fogo  Island,  you 
must  be  careful  to  avoid  the  Dean's  Rock,  which  is  a  sunken  rock,  and  lies  between  Joe 


PipiPPPMiliMiil 


30  BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Batt's  Point  and  the  Harbor.  Steer  W.  N.  W.  until  Brimstone  Hill,  a  reninrkoble  round 
mountain,  appears  in  the  centre  of  the  harbor;  then  steer  for  the  East  Tickle,  which 
maybe  known  by  the  lantern  on  the  top  of  Sim's  Tsland.  Make  the  west  side  of  the  tickle 
Give  a  good  berth  to  the  point  on  the  starboard  side,  and  run  right  up  the  harbor,  keeni 
ing  near  the  south  side,  and  you  will  carry  from  5  to  3  fathoms  through.  Immedintelv 
you  get  round  the  point,  steer  S.  W.  to  avoid  the  Harbor  Rocki  and  follow  the  directions 
given  above  for  anchoring.  The  middle  tickle  appears  the  widest,  but  it  is  fit  only  fot 
boats.  The  other  two  must  be  adopted  as  best  suits  the  wind. 
Little  Fogo  LITTLE  FOGG  ISLANDS  lie  nearly  N.  E.  distant  4i  miles  from  Joe  Batt's  Point. 
hlands.  There  are  numerous  rocks  about  them,  both  above  and  under  water,  making  this  part  of 

the  coast  exceedingly  dangerous.     A  little  to  the  eastward  of  Little  Fogo  is  a  small  rock 
just  above  water,  called  the  North-eastern  Rock  ;  and  somewhat  in  this  direction,  distant 
10  or  11  miles,  is  said  to  lie  Cromwell's  Ledge,  whose  exact  position  is  i  )t  well  determin- 
ed, although  it  is  considered  to  be  extremely  dangerous.     Northward  of  Little  Fogo  are 
the  Turr  Rocks,  and  from  hence  in  the  direction  of  the  western  side  of  Great  Fogo  Is], 
and  aijd  the  Storehouse  Rocks,  the  Seal  Nests,  Gappy  and  Sto'  i  Islands,  the  Jigger  and 
Black  Rocks,  and  various  other  dangers,  all  having  deep  water  round  them,  and  tending  to 
in^^rease  the  difficulty  of  the  navisation. 
Change  Isl-         CHANGE  ISLAND  TICKLE.— This  harbor  is  accessible  when  Fogo  Harbor  is  not. 
arul  Tickle.      It  is  very  secure,  and  has  good  anchorage  with  6  or  7  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.   In  general 
the  islands  about  it  are  low  and  marshy,  but  there  is  abundance  of  firewood,  though  water 
is  scarce.     The  passage  in  from  the  eastward  is  between  Ruth's  Rock  and  the  Tobacco 
Islands,  the  mark  being  Brimstone  Head  kept  between  both;    this  will  clear  all  the 
dangers  on  the  northern  shore,  and  also  off  Skinner's  Harbor ;   or  you  may  bring  the 
tickle  to  the  westward  between  the  points  of  the  land,  and  steer  directly  through  in  great 
Bafety. 
TmUinqiiet  TOULINQUET  HARBOR — This  harbor  is  sheltered  from  all  winds  but  thos  i  which 

Harbor.  blow  from  the  north  and  north-oast,  when,  in  heavy  gales,  it  becomes  dangerous.    In 

entering,  either  by  the  east  or  western  channel,  you  must  take  the  greatest  caie  to  avoid 
the  White  Ground,  to  clear  which,  you  must  bring  Messrs.  Sliide's  dwelling-house  open 
of  Sim's  Island,  and  keep  it  so,  until  French  Head  opens  through  the  Eastern  Passage. 
This  is  very  commonly  called  Burnt  Island  Tickle,  and  should  not  be  attempted  without 
you  are  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  navigation,  or  in  cases  of  great  emergence. 
The  anchorage  is  mostly  foul,  but  the  best  and  most  secure  is  about  5  or  6  fathoms,  off 
Colburn's  Stores.  Both  water  nod  wood  are  scarce.  If  ho  mariner  should  be  here 
either  early  or  late  in  the  year,  Back  Harbor,  which  lies  otftho  western  side  of  the  tiibio 
land,  will  be  found  a  preferable  place  for  shelter,  and  a  few  small  vessels  may  ride  there 
with  much  safety.  You  may  proceed  in  on  either  side  of  Gull  Island,  lying  witii  the 
Western  Head  open  of  Batrix  Island  and  the  Bliilf  Head,  or  with  the  Eastern  Stiige  on 
Batrix  Island.  The  islands  about  the  liarbir  of  Toulinquet  are  moderately  high,  and 
bounded  by  dark  colored  slate  cliffs.  It  may  readily  be  known  by  the  Gull  Island  or  table 
land. 

FORTUNE  HARBOR.— This  harbor  lies  between  the  Bay  of  Exploits  and  New 
Bay.  It  is  good  when  attained;  but  the  entrance,  which  is  the  Western  Ticklo,  is  ex- 
tremely narrow  and  dnngerouB,  on  account  of  the  high  limd  around  it:  from  which  all 
winds  baffle,  except  those  blowing  directly  in. 

TRITON  HARBOR.  (Great  Triton  Island.)— The  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  between 
the  Great  and  Littl<>  Denier  Islands.  In  entering  you  will  see  Francis  Island,  which  hna 
a  reef  runnini;  to  the  south-westward.  Give  this  a  berth ;  but  both  the  Denior  Isliimis 
are  bold  to  and  free  from  danger.  Little  Denior  Island  lies  S.  W.  three  miles  anil  a  (|unr- 
ter  from  Sculpin  Rocks;  on  approaching  which,  the  harbor  opens  off  the  higli  liiini  of 
Great  Denier.  Its  shores  are  exceedingly  bolil,  and  therefore  it  is  always  to  bo  preferred 
to  Cutwell  Harbor.  Its  great  depth  of  water  will  be  avoided  by  running  into  Inspector's 
or  Scrub  Cove,  where  vessels  may  moor  with  hawsers  ti)  the  trees,  in  perfect  secnrity. 
The  tides  here,  and  also  upon  all  the  eastern  const  of  Newfoundland,  have  nearly  the 
same  rising,  the  springs  being  about  fi  feet,  neaps  4  feet;  but  these  are  much  influenced 
by  the  winds. 
Cutwell  CUTWELL  HARBOR  (Bong  Island.)— This  hnrlmr  has  a  spacious  entrance,  siiffi- 

Harbnr.  cieiit  for  the  largest  ship  to  beat  in  to  aerure  anchorage,  in  frotn  10  to  5  fallioin-i.  siiml  and 

mud.  'Pho  best  anchorage  is  nbi)Ut  W.  by  N.  (iistiint  three  miles  from  the  soiilln^rn 
head.  The  arm  runs  in  full  one  mile  and  a  half  iibove  t^'o  narrows,  in  which  is  nbundiince 
of  wood  and  water,  and  well  adapted  for  hciivitig  down  and  refitting  vessels.  At  the  en- 
tronco  is  tlie  Koiil's  (Jap  Rock,  the  marks  t'or  which  are  (.'uppci'  Tsliind  seen  tlirout;li  Inilian 
Tickle,  and  Mark  Islii'id  on  with  tiie  W^hife  Point.  To  clciir  the  h'ool's  Cap  Rock,  keep 
the  extremity  of  Soutlieri)  lltMid  toiu'.liini;  the  north  end  of  Hurdrix  Island,  niilil  (ircon 
Buy  (Jul!  Isliiiid  opiMis  to  tiii-  westward  of  the  Ha'i  Rock.  The  only  danijer  within  tlio 
\ieads  is  the  rocks  on  the  eastern  slioro,  and  most  of  these  are  visible  at  lialf  tide. 


Fortune 
Harbor. 


Triton 
Harbor. 


THE  ISL 

I  jmali  islands 
I  westward  of ' 
cious,  fine  ha 

CAPE  ST 
U.  distant  12 
known  by  the 
pitch  of  thee 
jjme  on  this 
tinguish  this  i 
Cape  Freels 

Between  tl 
deep  Imys  »"« 
little  doubt  th 
places  of  goo 
hereafter  freq 

LASCIE. 
Cove,  of  La  i 
ffhere  in  fron 
(hrow  in  a  he 
gide.  in  15  fat 

GREAT  A 
convenient  pi 
or  out  of  it,  b 
ffhere  vessel 
land-locked, 
about  one  ml 

NlPPKR'i 
about  4i  miles 
but  the  best  a 
deep  and  the  s 
accommodate 
John,  and  has 
it  is  high  and 
the  islands  \\. 

PAQUET 
Pnquet  Harb( 
S.  W.  by  S. 
tain.    The  " 
directly  off 
rucky  islets 
tlii'se  throe 
9  to  19  and 
the  harbor  di\ 
west.    Th 
uins  at  its  e 
keep  the  sta 
side  there  is 
other  part  of 
'liannel  and 
..allow,  ant 
.ilies  about  U 
the  northern 
and  hold,  an 
lowh  to  the  1 
This  is  a  snu 
To  the  north 
in^a  signal  I 
THE  HO 
iind  Cape  8t, 
leagues.     Tl 
moderately  1 
eiusternniost; 
iirotch  out  ir 
llun'o  is  also  , 
these  islands 
Following 


IS 
it 
is 
r 
2( 


10 

ent 


rlia 


"   !IM'.UM!.l"#li.   lljg||»ll»llfW»I^B«^W 


""^■^'^'vwHminnmiPKPipipiPi 


rkable  ronnd 
ickle,  which 
of  the  tickle, 
inrbor,  keep. 
Iminedintely 
le  directions 
8  fit  only  for 

Bntt's  Point. 
;  this  part  of 
fi  smnii  rocit 
ction,  distant 
ell  deteimin- 
tie  Fogo  are 
ent  Fogo  hi- 
e  Jigger  and 
nd  tending  to 

Inrbor  is  not 
In  genera! 
hough  water 
the  Tobacco 
clear  all  the 
>nj  bring  the 
Bugh  in  great 

:  thos  1  which 
ngerous.    In 

cm  e  to  avoid 
?-hou3e  open 
srn  Passage. 
pted  without 

emergence. 
i  fttthoins,  off 
aid  be  here 
B  of  the  table 
iiy  ride  there 
ring  witli  the 
ern  Stage  on 
•ly  high,  and 
slnnd  or  table 

its  and  Now 
Fickli!,  is  ex- 
im  which  all 

or  is  Iwtwoen 
d,  which  has 
i!Mi(;r  Islands 
8  nn<l  ii(|iinr- 
high  iiiml  of 
bp  prt^fcrred 
I)  Inspector's 
ict  secnrity, 
.'o  nearly  the 
;h  influenced 

trance,  siiffi- 
ms.  siinil  and 
lie  southern 
is  nbundiince 
.  At  the  en- 
rou!;li  Indian 
I  Rock,  keep 
until  (ireen 
'T  within  the 
fide. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  TOULINQUET  lies  to  the  westward  of  Fogo, 
mall  islands  about  it.     Here  is  situated  what  is  called  ToulinquetJBay ; 


St 

and  has  several  The  Island  of 
and  to  the  south-  ToiUinquel. 
TestWHi''^  of  Toulinquet  Island  is  the  Harbor  of  Herring  N  .ick.     This  is  said  to  be  a  spa- 
cious, fine  harbor,  and  fit  for  any  vessels. 

CAPE  ST.  JOHN. — From  Toulinquet  Bay  to  Cape  St.  John,  the  course  is  N.  W.  by  Cape  St.  John. 
«  distant  12  or  13  leagues.  This  is  a  high  and  rugged  point  of  land,  and  may  readily  be 
known  by  the  smoll  high  round  island  to  the  south-eastward,  distant  from  the  northern 
nitch  of  the  cape  about  2i  or  3  miles.  This  is  called  the  Gull  Island,  and  is  the  third  of  that 
name  on  this  side  of  Newfoundland.  Perhaps,  it  would  be  better  we  should  horenfler  dis- 
tinguish this  as  the  Northern,  or  St.  John's  Gull;  that  near  Cape  Freels.as  the  Middle, or 
(<jpe  Freels  Gull ;  and  the  one  lying  off  Cape  Bonavistn,  as  the  Bonavista,  or  South  Gull.         .  ;.  ,  _^,'^' 

Between  the  Fogo  Islands  and  Cape  St.  John  the  charts  commonly  represent  various 
deep  bays  and  inlets,  but  their  particulars  are  very  little  known,  although  there  can  be 
little  doubt  the  Great  Bay  and  River  Exploits,  and  the  Bay  of  Notre  Dame,  afford  many 
pisces  of  good  anchorage,  and  of  easy  access,  which,  when  fully  explored,  may  become 
hereafter  frequented,  better  understood,  and  prove  highly  beneficial. 

LA  SCIE. — About  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  St.  John,  is  the  Little  Harbor  or  La  Scie. 
Cove,  of  La  Scie ;  to  sail  into  which  there  is  no  danger  whatever,  and  you  may  anchor  any 
ffhere  in  from  3  to  8  fathoms.    It  is  easy  of  access,  and  open  to  the  N.  N.  W.  winds,  which 
throw  in  a  heavy  sea.     The  best  holding  ground  is  just  within  a  little  cove  on  the  starboard 
jide,  in  15  fathoms,  muddy  ground;  but  further  in  the  ground  is  not  good. 

'  GREAT  AND  LITTLE  ROUND  HARBORS.— The  former  of  these  is  a  good  and  GreatandLit- 
convenient  place  for  vessels  engaged  in  the  fishing  trade.     There  is  no  danger  in  sailing  in  llcRoundHar- 
or  out  of  it,  both  shores  being  bold  to.     The  anchorage  lies  within  the  two  inner  points,  hor. 
where  vessels  may  ride  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  secure  from  the  weather  and  entirely 
land-locked.      But  Little  Round  Harbor,  which  lies  round  a  point  to  the  north-eastward, 
jljout  one  mile  and  ahalf  distant,  is  merely  a  cove,  and  totally  unfit  for  shipping. 

NIPPKR'S  HARBOR.— This  harbor  lies  to  the  north-eastward  of  Green  Bay  Island  Nipper's  Har- 
about  4i  miles,  and  is  fronted  by  several  small  islands,  between  which  are  several  channels ;  hor. 
but  tho  best  and  safest  is  between  them  and  the  northern  shore,  in  which  the  water  is  very 
(Jeep  and  the  shores  bold.    Theharborisrather  confined  and  small,  and  therefore  only  fit  to  ..    '  . 

accommodate  small  vessels ;  but  it  is  the  most  safe  and  secure  on  the  shores  of  Cape  St. 
John,  and  has  an  excellent  anchorage  with  from  7  to  14  fathoms  water.  The  land  about 
it  is  high  and  barren,  but  it  is  well  supplied  with  water,  and  may  be  easily  distinguished  by 
the  islands  which  lie  off  it. 

PAQUET  HARBOR.— About  5  miles  N.  W.  by  N.  from  Great  Round  Harbor  lies  Paquet  Har- 
Pnquet  Harbor.  Its  entrance  bears  from  the  channel  between  the  Horse  Islands,  nearly  ior. 
S,  W.  by  S.  It  may  be  known  Ijy  its  Southern  Head,  which  is  a  high  and  rocky  moun- 
tain. The  Northern  Head  is  somewhat  lower,  and  there  are  three  rocky  islets  lying 
directly  off  its  point.  Both  points  are  bold  to;  but  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  three 
rocky  islets  is  a  small  shoal  with  2i,  3,  and  4  fathoms  upon  it.  The  channel  between  it  and 
dicse  throe  rocks  has  7,  8,  and  fl  fathoms;  and  the  water  across  the  entrance  is  from  8  and 
9  to  19  and  20  fathoms.  A  similar  depth  continues  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in,  where 
ihelinrbor  divides  into  two  channels,  the  one  running  northward,  the  other  west  and  south- 
west. Tho  northern  arm  is  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  long,  and  has  20,  18  and  19  fath- 
oms at  its  entrance,  becoming  shallower  as  you  advance.  Vessels  running  in  here  should 
keep  the  stnrljoard  shore  on  board,  tVr  about  two-thirds  up  the  channel.  On  the  larboard 
side  there  is  a  rocky  shoal,  a  small  i)iirt  of  which  occasionally  appears  s'bove  water.  On  the 
other  part  of  this  shoal  are  from  3  to  4  fathom;.*.  Having  passed  this  shoal,  stoer  up  mid- 
chiinnel  and  anchor  in  5,  7,  or  8  fathoms.  '^I'he  northern  part  near  tho  land  becomes 
lihullow,  and  a  rivulet  here  falls  into  tlie  bay,  which  is  said  to  issue  from  some  extensive 
likes  about  two  miles  inland.  Tho  south-western  channel  is  somewhat  narrower  than 
the  northern  one,  but  is  quite  free  from  danger.  Tlie  shores  on  both  sides  are  steep  to, 
and  bold,  and  you  will  have  12,  10,  9,  8.  and  7  fathoms  for  half  a  mile  in;  it  then  shal- 
lowt  to  the  head  of  tlio  bay,  whero  there  is  a  sandy  beach  and  a  river  running  southward. 
Tills  is  a  snug  and  secure  place  for  vessels  io  run  into  whenever  occasion  may  require. 
To  the  north  tvard  of  the  northern  point  is  a  mountain  called  Signal  Hill,  commonly  hav- 
iniia  sigmilpost  upon  it,  and  serving  !o  point  out  its  situation. 

THE  IKJRSE  ISLANDS  are  situated  nearly  oqai-distant  between  Partridge  Vo\n\.  Horse  Islands. 
and  Cape  .*^t.  Jolin,  bi-aring  from  tlie  latter  N.  by  \V.  and  N.  N.  W.  distant  about  5 
lengues.  These  are  two  islands,  and  form  a  circuit  of  nearly  two  leagues,  appearing 
niuderately  high.  There  are  three  rocks  abiivo  water  lying  to  the  nortluvard  of  the 
eiustemmost;  and  on  the  oast  side  of  the  same  island  there  •■.:-<  some  sunken  rocks,  which 
!lri!tch  out  in  soino  places  neiii-  a  mile  from  tho  sliore.  At  the  T'  E  part  of  this  island 
iIk'I'o  is  also  a  little  cove,  fit  only  for  bouts.  There  is  pn)l)al)ly  a  safe  channel  between 
these  islands,  but  it  is  seldom  atlempted.     The  eastern  island  is  the  largest. 

Following  tho  shore  of  Nowfoundland  to  tiio  nortli-westward  of  Capo  St.  John,  there 


32 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


FUur  de  Lis 
Harbor. 


White  Bay. 


Lobster  Har- 
bor, 


The  Smth- 
tcard  At  71. 


Middle  Arm. 


are  two  bays,  called  Pine  Bay  and  Bay  Verte ;  but  although  these  may  be  places  of  good 
anchoraKe.  they  are  little  frequented  by  shipping.  '^" 

FLEUR  DE  LIS  HARBOR.— This  harbor  lies  to  the  south  eastward  of  Partrida 
Point,  from  which  it  is  distant  one  league,  and  derives  its  very  appropriate  name  from 
three  remarkable  hillocks  just  over  it.  It  is  small,  but  safe,  and  secure  from  all  winds 
having  excellent  anchorage  in  its  N.  E.  arm,  in  4  fathoms  water.  To  avoid  a  rocity 
shoal  that  lies  about  100  yards  off  the  island,  borrow  towards  the  eastern  shore,  until  yo„ 
get  Bluff  Head  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  island.  There  is  plenty  of  wood,  but  in  a  drv 
season  water  becomes  scarce.  It  is,  however,  very  conveniently  situated  for  the  fishery 
and  commonly  is  frequented  by  8  or  10  French  Vessels.  ^' 

WHITE  BAY. — This  is  a  large  and  extensive  arm  of  the  sea,  being  at  its  entrance 
from  Cape  Partridge  to  Cat  Head,  full  4  leagues  wide,  and  running  in  a  south-westerly 
direction  about  14  leagues  to  its  head,  where  it  is  contracted  to  a  river's  mouth  1^  niila 
wide.  In  this  bay  or  gulf  are  several  Islands,  coves,  and  inlefa,  affording  both  anchorage 
and  shelter;  these  are  Lobster  Harbor,  Southward  Arm,  Middle  Arm,  Pigeon  Islands 
Westward  Arm,  Purwick  Cove,  Gransby's  Island,  Gold  Cove,  or  River's  Head,  Goat  and 
Sop  Islands,  Sop's  Arm,  Jackson's  Arm,  French  Cove,  Great  and  Little  Coney  Arms 
and  Great  and  Little  Cat  Arms.  ' 

LOBSTER  HARBOR. — This  is  a  small  round  harbor, with  a  shallow'narrow  entrance 
having  at  low  water,  in  some  places,  not  above  8  or  9  feet  water ;  but  when  you  are  once 
entered,  you  will  have  12  and  13  fathoms  all  over  the  harbor.  Small  vessels,  therefore 
sail  in  commonly  at  the  flood  tidea  ' 

THE  SOUTHWARD  ARM  lies  about  8  milos  from  Lobster  Harbor,  and  further  up 
the  bay.  Here  a  ship  may  anchor  with  great  safety,  in  17  fathoms  water,  about  3  miles 
within  the  heads;  but  there  is  also  good  anchorage  in  any  part  beluw  this,  and  before  yoii 
are  advanced  so  far  up  in  20  and  25  fathoms.  A  little  above  the  inner  point,  on  the  north- 
ern side,  is  a  muscle  bank,  which  stretches  quite  across  the  arm,  and  nearly  dries  at  low 
water;  and  when  you  have  passed  this,  you  will  have  11  and  12  fathoms  water,  and  the 
Channel  continues  deep  until  you  approach  the  River's  Head.  This  is  the  first  great  in- 
let  on  this  side  of  the  guif,  and  may  therefore  be  readily  recognized. 

MIDDLE  /IRM.— This  inlet  lies  about  U  mile  S.  W.  from  the  Southward  Arm;  at 
its  entrance  is  a  rocky  island,  which  is  joined  to  the  shore  by  a  shoal,  over  which  are  1  3 
and,  in  some  places,  3  fathoms  water.  This  inlet  runs  in  to  the  southward,  about  3  or  4 
miles.  To  enter  it  you  will  do  well  in  keeping  the  larboard  shore  on  board :  it  is  fitted  on- 
ly for  small  vessels.  Two  leagues  W.  Iiy  S.  from  Middle  Arm,  is  Hawling  Point;  and 
between  them  lie  the  Pigeon  Islands,  about  which  the  ground  is  good  for  fishing. 

WESTWARD  ARM.— This  lies  E.  S.  E.  i  S.  of  Hawling  Point,  and  runs  up  nearly 

4  miles.  Here  large  vessels  may  anchor  in  18  fathoms  water:  there  is  a  cove  on  each 
side  of  its  entrance  ;  that  to  the  north-eastward  is  named  Bear  Cove,  where  smaller  ves- 
sels may  moor  securely,  and  ride  safe  from  all  winds,  in  aI)out  12  fathoms  water.  The 
other  is  called  Wild  Cove,  a  very  indifferent  anchorage,  open  to  the  north  westerly  winds, 
and  the  bottom  rocky  and  foul. 

PURWICK  COVE. — About  five  leagues  down  from  the  River's  Head,  and  near  the  S. 
E.  side  of  the  bay,  lies  Gransby's  or  Mid  Bay  Island,  without  either  cove  or  place  of 
shelter  :  on  the  south-eastern  ])art  of  this  island  is  a  shoal  running  off  the  length  uf  two 
cables,  with  not  more  than  9  feet  water  over  it ;  and  nearly  abreast  of  this  island,  on  tho 
S.  E.  side  of  White  Bay,  is  Purwick  Cove,  where  shijjping  may  find  safe  anchorage,  and 
lie  with  good  conveniencies  for  the  fishi—'-s. 

Having  passed  to  the  southward  of  Gruusby's  Island,  the  bay  narrows  and  runs  up  about 

5  leagues  towards  Gold  Cove,  where  the  river  branches  out  into  several  streams,  and  is 
commonly  called  the  River's  Head. 

On  returning  up  the  western  side  of  White  Bay,  you  will  perceive  Sop's  Island,  iilwut 
3  miles  in  length,  and  11  miles  in  circuit;  near  its  southern  end  is  Goat's  Island;  these 
foim  a  long  jjassage,  or  arm,  culled  Sop's  Ann,  at  tlie  north  part  of  which  a  vessel  may 
safely  anchor,  jus-t  inside  the  north  side  of  Sop's  Island  ;  this  will  bo  the  best  side  of  the 
channel,  or  passage,  in  the  arm  ;  but  there  is  anchorage  in  deep  water  between  Sop's 
Island  and  the  main  before  you  reach  so  far  u|)  as  (loat's  Island  :  there  is  also  a  smiiJI  cove 
at  the  north  end  of  the  island,  called  Sop's  Cove,  and  two  otiier  coves  opposite  the  inuin, 
called  Heart's  Coves,  in  which  the  fisheries  are  carried  on,  although  ships  generally  an- 
chor in  the  upper  part  of  the  arm.  and  within  side  of  (ioat'»  Island. 

JACKSON'S  ARM. — About  4  or  5  miles  to  the  northward  of  Sop's  Island,  is  Jackson's 
Arm,  to  enter  which,  you  will  puss  a  ragged  point,  low  and  round  ;  the  water  here  is  deep, 
except  in  a  small  cove  cm  the  starbord  side,  wiiere  a  vessid  should  moor  head  and  stern. 
This  place  affords  the  largest  timber  in  White's  Bay.  Frenchman's,  or  French  Cove,  is 
about  a  league  U^  the  nortiiward  of  .lackson's  Arm,  and  offers  good  and  safe  anchorage. 
LUtleSfGrrat  LITTLE  AND  GKKAT  CONEV  ARMS.— Nearly  1  miles  to  the  north-eastward  of 
Coney  Arms.    Frenchman's  Cove,  is  Coney  Arm  Head,  the  most  remarkable  land  on  the  western  side 


Westward 
Am. 


Purwiek  Cove. 


Jack  ton' I 
Am. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


33 


f  White  Bnyi  and  bears  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  distant  6  lenses  from  Cape  Partridge;  the  land 
here  projects  out  one  mile  and  a  haiti  forming  a  deep  bight,  called  Great  Coney  Arm.  In 
this  place  there  is  no  good  shelter  for  shipping;  but  in  Little  Coney  Arm,  which  lies  to 
the  westward  of  the  head,  is  convenient  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  although  its  entrance 
.  (go  shiillow  for  large  ships.     Here  fishing  craft  frequently  rendezvous. 

GRKAT  AND  LITTLE  CAT  ARMS.— To  the  uorth-eiistward  of  Coney  Arm  Great  and 
Head,  distant  3  miles,  lies  the  Great  Cat  Arm,  and  5  miles  further  is  Little  Cat  Arm.  Little  Cat 
Tiiis  latter  inlet  runs  up  to  the  westward  full  two  miles.     OIF  its  northern  point  are  some  Armes. 
rocks  above  water;  to  avoid  which,  keep  near  to  the  southern  shore.     You  will  find  the 
>vnter  deep,  and  no  good  shelter,  unless  you  approach  the  head  or  further  end  of  the  arm, 
where  you  will  lie  secure  and  land-locked 

LITTLE  HARBOR  DEEP.— You  will  now  be  to  the  northward  of  White  Bay,  and  Little  Har- 
following  the  shore,  will  perceive  the  entrance  to  Little  Harbor  Deep,  called  by  the  bor  Deep. 
FreDch  La  Vuche.    This  place  is  much  exposed  to  south-easterly  winds,  and  by  no  means 

mod  harbor :  oflF  its  northern  point  are  some  rocks  which  are  always  above  water;  they 
lie  halt  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  utlbrd  good  fishing  about  their  environs.  The  water  is 
not  very  deep  in  any  part  of  this  inlet,  and  when  you  get  halfway  from  the  entrance  to 
the  head,  or  further  end,  it  becomes  quite  shoal. 

GRANDFATHER'S  COVE,  or  L'ANCE  UNION,  is  an  inlet  about  two  miles  Grand/a- 
deep,  lying  ""^  '"'1"  ^""^  i  half  from  Little  Harbor  Deep.    This  is  also  open  to  the  south-  ther's  Cove,or 
grly  wiiidsi  and  may  be  known,  when  near  the  shore,  by  the  northern  point  appearing  L'anceUnion 
like  un  island,  and  bearing  N.  N.  W.  d  N.  from  Cape  Partridge.     It  is  but  an  indillerent 
nlace  for  shipping,  and  seldom  frequented. 

ORANGfc:  BAY,  or  GREAT  HARBOR  DEEP — This  may  be  known  from  any  OrangeBay, 
other  inlet,  by  the  land  at  its  entrance  being  much  lower  than  any  land  on  the  north  side  or  Great 
of  White's  Bay,  and  by  its  bearing  north,  distant  5  leagues,  from  Cape  Partridge.    It  HarborDeep. 
forms  a  large  harbor,  and  when  you  get  about  three  miles  within  its  entrance,  divides 
into  three  branches.     In  the  northern  arm  the  water  is  too  deep  for  vessels  to  anchor, 
until  they  have  run  up  near  the  head  ;  but  the  middle  arm  has  a  good  bottom,  and  safe 
anchorage  in  C  and  7  fathoms  water.     A  little  within  the  entrance  of  Orange  Bay  there  is 

II  cove  on  each  side,  frequented  by  the  fishing  vessels ;  but  these  are  very  dangerous  tor  a 
ship  to  liu  in,  for,  although  they  moor  head  and  stern,  yet  should  a  gale  come  on  from  the 
fastward,  tliere  is  little  safety  to  be  depended  upon. 

FOUCHE'E. — This  place  is  little  frequented,  and  there  is  no  anchorage  until  you  Fouchee. 
jipproiich  its  further  end,  where  you  will  find  a  cove  on  the  northern  side.  This  cove  is 
■jor  3  miles  above  the  entrance,  and  very  small  vessels  may  anchor  there  in  ISfathoins, 
mooring  lioad  and  stern.  The  land  on  both  sides  is  extremely  high  and  sleep  to  the 
jlwie.  There  is  also  another  arm  running  in  above  two  miles  further  than  the  cove  ;  but 
It  is  so  niinow,  and  has  such  a  depth  of  water,  tliat  it  is  almost  useless  to  sliipping. 

HOUIMNG  HARBOR. — About  eight  miles  to  the  north-eastward  of  Fouclide,  and  a  Hooping 
little  to  tlio  south-westward  of  Canada  Head,  lies  the  entrance  to  Hooping  Harbor,  or  Harbor. 
Siiiis  Kond.  This  place  has  two  arms  or  buys,  one  running  up  northward,  the  other 
westerly.  Like  many  of  the  adjiicoiit  inlets,  there  is  deep  water  all  the  way,  until  you 
jjftnear  to  the  head  of  the  northern  branch;  there  the  bottom  is  a  kind  of  loose  sand,  open 
lu  the  soutlierly  winds,  and  by  tio  means  a  safu  place  to  lie  in;  but  in  the  western  arm  a 
vessel  may  anchor  in  a  moderate  depth  with  safety. 

CANADA   HEAD  lies  about  throe  miles  to  the  south-westward  of  Canada  Point,  or  Canada 
Hido'.-i  Head.     It  is  elevated  land,  and  very  easily  to  be  distinguished,  either  from  the  Head. 
iiortlnviird  or  southwanl;  but  when  jou  are  directly  to  the  eastward  of  it,  it  becomes 
hidden  hy  the  high  land  up  the  country,  commonly  culled  the  Clouds. 

CANADA  BAV. — This  is  an  inlet  of  considerable  size  and  extent.  At  its  southern  CunadaBay. 
entrance  is  Canada  Htiad;  from  whence  it  runs  N.  N.  Easterly  full  5  leagues.  Here  ves- 
sels ciuii:lit  in  easterly  gules  may  seek  shelter,  and  anchor  in  safety.  In  entering,  when 
viiu  gt't  ahove  the  two  rocky  islets  whi'di  lie  near  Hide's  Head,  and  culled  the  Cross  Isl- 
iiiids,  you  will  see  a  low  white  point,  and  unothor  low  black  one  n  little  beyond  it.  Off  this 
litter,  distant  two  cables'  length,  lies  a  sunken  rock;  keep  therefore  towards  the  middle  of 
the  buy,  and  you  will  lind  no  danger,  except  a  ruck  iibovo  water,  which  lies  aliout  a  mile 
lielow  the  |)()int  of  the  narri)W8;  this  you  will  endeavor  to  keep  on  your  larl)oard  hand, 
lii'cping  mid-channel,  and  you  will  liitvo  Irt  tiilhoms  through  the  narrowest  part.  Soon 
alier  yuu  have  passed  the  narrows,  the  bay  widens,  and  is  uhovo  a  mile  across,  and  you  may 
tlien  anchor  in  fi'om  18  to  'JO  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  and  secure  from  all  winds. 
Uuttliis  bay  is  not  nmch  fre(|uent(Ml,  and  only  occasionally  resorted  to  in  case  (tf  necessity. 

KN(>LE'E  HARBOR  is  silnuli'd  on  the  north  side  of  Canuda  Bay.  To  sail  into  this 
plico,  you  nmst  pass  a  low  point,  appei\ring  white,  and  forming  the  northern  point  of 
pMtnince  to  Canuda  Bay;  then  keep  near  the  short'  until  you  get  abreast  of  the  nextpoint, 
which  inaketi  tho  harbor:  haul  round  it  to  the  S.  h'..  taking  care  not  to  come  too  near 
""I"  :.;;,  I'or  it  shoals  a  full  cable's  longlh  oil".      Having  so  far  advanced,  you  can  anchor 

III  fruin  15  to  7  fathoms,  good  holding  ground;  but  this  is  well  up  the  cove,  which  is  too 


34 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Coneh  Har- 
bor. 


Cape  Rouge 
Harbor. 


Belle  Isle. 


Groais  Isl- 
and. 


Croque  Har- 
bor. 


small  to  lie  in,  unless  you  moor  head  and  stern.  In  Side's  Arm,  which  runs  up  N.  N.  E 
from  Engine  almost  2  leagues,  there  is  no  good  anchorage,  the  water  being  too  deep;  but 
within  the  south  end  of  Engine  Island  is  a  good  harbor  for  shallops,  although  from  thence 
to  where  the  ships  lie  there  is  no  channel,  even  for  boats,  unless  at  high  water,  or  beyond 
half  tide. 

CONCH  HARBOR  bears  nearly  E.  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  7  or  8  miles  from  the  entrance 
of  Canada  Bay.  It  lies  very  open  to  the  winds  from  the  south,  but  has  good  anchorage 
well  up  to  thehead.i  nil  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground.  S.  by  W.  from  Conch 
distant  2  leagues,  is  Hilliard's  Harbor,  called  by  the  French,  Botitot.  This  is  a  bad  place 
for  shipping,  but  very  convenient  for  the  fishing  craft. 

CAPE  ROUGE  HARBOR.— This  hariwr  lies  to  the  westward  of  Groais  and  Belle 
Isle  Islands,  which  contribute  to  shelter  it  from  the  heavy  swells  of  the  Atlantic.  The 
southern  part  of  its  entrance  is  shallow  and  rocky,  and  in  the  S.  W.  arm  is  the  Harbor 
Shoal.  The  best  anchorage  is  in  the  northern  arm,  in  any  depth  of  water.  Ships  vntn 
beat  in  or  out,  but  the  centre  of  the  harbor  is  too  deep  for  anchorage.  Directly  opposite 
to  its  entrance  is  a  small  island,  which  is  named  after  the  harbor,  Rouge  island.  It^ 
northern  end  requires  a  berth  in  passing. 

BELLE  ISLE  and  GROAIS  ISLAND.— These  are  high  islands,  lying  off  the  N. 
E.  coast  of  Newfoundland,  from  which  they  are  separated  9  or  10  miles.  Belle  Isle  is  the 
southernmost  and  the  larger  island,  being  8  miles  in  length  and  3  broad.  There  is  a  little 
harbor  at  its  south  part,  where  fishing  craft  occasionally  resort,  but  not  calculated  for 
shipping.  Other  coves  may  be  found  about  the  shores  of  the  island,  where  shallops  some- 
times take  shelter.  Oft"  its  south-eastern  side  lies  Green  Island,  a  small  rocky  islet,  and 
to  the  southward  a  bank  of  soundings  extends  wilh  112,  iiO,  25,  and  30  fathoms.  There 
are  some  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  at  the  south  point  of  Belle  Isle ;  but  these 
lie  close  in  to  the  land. 

GROAIS  ISLAND  lies  to  the  north-eastward  of  Belle  Isle,  and  is  about  8  miles  in 
length  and  '24  niiies  broad;  its  northern  point  lying  in  latitude  51°.  Oft"  this  end,  and 
also  off  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  island,  are  several  rocks  above  water;  otherwise  this  island 
is  bold  all  round ;  and  between  it  and  the  main  are  from  i>0  to  70  fathoms  water.  There 
are  also  two  islets  mid-way ;  the  southern  one  is  commonly  called  Red  Island.  They  are 
both  steep  to,  and  without  any  known  danger. 

CROQU  h,  HARBOR. —  .  he  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  half  a  mile  wide,  and  somewhat 
difTicuit  to  discover.  It  bears  N.  \V.  from  (iroais,  distant  3  leagues.  When  the  north 
point  of  Belle  Isle  is  clear  of  the  southern  point  of  (troais,  you  will  be  a  little  to  the 
southward  of  Croque  ;  and  this  mark  will  not  fiiil  pointing  out  to  those  unarquuinted  with 
this  navigation  the  fairway  to  its  entrance,  especially  as  the  headland  forming  the  south- 
ern shore  is  bare  of  trees  and  lias  a  round  ajjpcarance,  with  some  rocks,  which  are  always 
visible,  and  lie  about  40  yards  to  the  S.  E.  of  it.  The  shores  of  the  harlior  are  bold  to, 
and  even  a  frigate  may  easily  work  into  it.  Tlie  anchorago  is  excellent,  being  good  hold- 
ine-ground,  of  dark  slate-colored  mud.  Having  opened  the  harbor's  mouth,  steer  in  N. 
W.  by  N.,  i)roceed  mid-channel,  and  when  you  have  advanced  up  about  a  mile,  you  will 
seethe  river  divide  into  two  liranches.  Anclior  hereabout.  There  is  a  little  cove  at  the 
southern  entrance,  called  Irish  Bay,  in  wliich  are  13,  10,  8,  and  5  fathoms,  and  two  rocks 
above  water  at  the  head  of  the  liay,  near  which  is  a  little  rivulet  of  fresh  water. 

GRKAT  AND  LITTLE  S  l\  JULIEN.— To  the  north-eastward  of  the  harbor  o 
LittleStJu-  Croque,  lie  Negro  and  St.,Iulieo's  Ishiiuls,  near  which  are  the  harl)ors  of  Great  and  Lit- 
lien.  tie  St.  Julien,  and  also  that  of  (trandswiiy.     These  are  all  adjacent  to  the  Ishmd  of  St. 

.Tulien,  and  bear  to  the  north-west  ward  of  the  northern  part  of  tiie  Island  of  (Jroais.  Tho 
S.  W.  end  of  tho  Island  of  St.  .Inlien  is  hut  little  sejjarated  from  the  main,  and  cannot  be 
distinguished  to  be  an  island  until  you  arrive  very  near  it.  There  is,  at  tliis  end,  no  passnire 
excepr  for  bouts;  therefore,  to  sail  into  eitlier  of  these  harbors,  you  may  keep  close  to  tho 
north-east  end  of  the  island,  and  in  passing  that  the  harbors  will  o|)en  to  your  view. 

Great  .St.  Julien  is  the  easternmost  harbor,  t<j  whi(di  there  is  no  danuer,  until  you  get 
within  the  entrance;  then  you  wdl  find  the  starboard  shore  to  be  siioalriearlv  one-third 
over;  but  when  you  have  passed  the  first  stages,  you  may  anchor  in  from  8  to  4  fatiionis 
water. 

To  sail  into  Little  St.  Julien's  you  will  lirst  steer  for  Great  St.  Juiien's  Harbor,  in  order 
to  clear  a  sunken  rock,  whicli  lies  directly  before  the  harbor's  mouth;  ami  liaviog  nrrivcd 
opposite  the  entrance  of  Grandsway.  sltM-r  into  the  hiirhor,  and  anchor  in  5  or  4  fiithoins 
water.  It  will  he  requisite  for  all  ships  which  uo  into  either  of  these  harbors  to  moor  both 
head  and  stern  ;  hut  (Jrandsway  is  not  a  harbor  for  shipping,  altliough  it  is  extreimdy  con- 
venient for  fishiii!;  craft. 
Oremnllire  CRK.VIALLIRK  and  (iOOSK  COVES.— These  places  lie  on  tho  northern  shores  of 

and  Ooose       Hare  Bay.     Cremallire  has  spacious  and  gnod  anchorage  in  7  or  8  fashoms.  nnd  is  sun- 
Coves.  plied  with  abundance  of  wood  and  water.     Trois  Montagues  is  merely  a  small  creek,  in 

which  a  few  French  vessels  moor  during  the  wintcir  season.  It  is  situated  to  the  soath- 
westward  of  Crennilhro,  and  has  a  rivulet  which  extends  eastward  to  Goose  Covo. 


Oreat  and 


nmnnipi 


mm 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


S6 


Goose  Cove  is  sttuuted  on  the  western  side  of  Goose  Cnpe  ;  it  is  small,  but  very  secure, 
gnd  has  most  excellent  anchorage  in  4  and  5  fathoms.  Vessels  can  sail  into  it  with  a  west- 
.,\y  wind,  or  int«  Cremallire  with  an  easterly  one. 

ST.  ANTHONY'S  HARBOR.— This  lies  a  little  to  the  north-eastward  of  Cremallire  St.  Antho- 
Bbv,  tt"''  '^  •*  ''^'■y  ^"'^  place,  having;  good  anchorage  with  6  and  7  fathoitis  water,  on  a  ny'a  Harbor. 
bottom  of  blue  clay.     Its  entrance  lies  west,  distant  one  mile  and  a  half  from  Cape  St. 
Anthony.     It  cannot  be  easily  mistaken,  from  the  remarkable  high  land  on  'ts  southern 
shore.    It  is  well  supplied  with  wood  and  water,  and  is  commonly  frequented  by  some 
French  fishing  vessels. 

BRAHA  harbor. — This  harbor  is  small  but  safe,  having  good  anchorage  within  it;  Braka  Har- 
the  bottom  is  sandy,  and  the  shores  are  bold  and  steep  to.     The  Bralia  Shoal  lies  S.  74°  bor. 
K.  (triio)  distant  li  mile  from  the  Needle  Rocks ;  it  is  reported  to  have  not  more  than  6 
feet  water  over  it,  but  Capt.  Bullock  says  he  never  found  less  than  16  feet.     With  a  little 
sen  it  occa9i')ns  breakers,  but  the  common  current  will  always  create  a  constant  ripple. 

HOW  HARBOR  lies  on  the  northern  shore  of  Hare  Bay.     The  entrance  to  this  place  HowHarbor. 
benrs  N.  48°  W.  distant  12  miles  from  Fishot'a  Northern  Island,  and    is  by  far  the  best 
harbor  in  Hare  Bay,  having  safe  anchorage  over  every  part.     The  surrounding  hills  are 
barron,  but  small  stunted  wood  may  be  found  in  the  valleys.     To  the  northward  a  range 
of  marshes  and  ponds  extends  as  far  as  Pistolet  Bay.     The  harbor  is  about  half  a  mile  ^ 

wide,  and  a  full  mile  and  a  half  long.  A  small  rock  lies  off  the  western  poi.:^  but  it  is 
very  near  the  land,  and  the  upper  part  of  the  harbor  shoals  gradually. 

ST.  LUNAIRE  BAY. — This  excellent  harbor  will  contain  100  vessels  in  perfect  se-  St.  Lunaire 
curity,  is  remarkably  easy  of  access,  and  may  always  be  recognized  by  the  appearance  of  Bay. 
the  White  Cape  ;  the  best  and  most  convenient  anchorage  will  be  found  at  Amelia  Cove, 
in  from  5  to  7  fathoms.     The  approach  and  entrance  are  bold  and  steep  to,  only  observing 
to  give  the  point  of  the  Southern  Islands  a  good  berth.     Both  wood  and  water  are  to  be 
obtiiined  without  difficulty,  and  it  affords  in  every  respect  a  good  and  secure  anchorage. 

GRIOUET  BAY  and  CAMELS'  ISLANDS  HARBOR.— The  North  Bay  is  inse-  GriguetBay 
cure  in  spring  and  fall,  on  account  of  its  being  exposed  to  the  southerly  galea;  the  S.  W.  and  Camels' 
liay  is  therefore  recommended,  where  there  is  good  anchorage  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water.  Islands  Har- 
Canieis'  Islands  Harbor  will  always  be  found  too  intricate  for  a  stranger,  and  should  never  bor. 
be  attempted  without  the  assistance  of  a  pilot. 

THK  NORTH  HARBOR  runs  in  with  Stormy  Cape,  and  has  nt  its  entrance  a  rock  The  North 
above  water ,  which  is  bold  to  all  round,  and  vessels  may  sail  on  either  side  of  it,  and  anchor  Harbor. 
in  6  fiitlioms  water.  In  the  passage  which  leads  t^othe  N.  W.  and  S.  W.  Harbors,  there 
is  an  island  which  contracts  the  channel,  rendering  tlie  passage  narrow;  the  best  and 
gafest  entrance  is  the  northward  of  this  Island,  giving  the  outer  point  of  the  N.  W.  Har- 
bor a  little  berth,  and  so  soon  as  you  get  within  the  island  you  will  open  both  harbors  ;  that 
which  runs  in  north-weslward  is  the  larger  of  the  two,  and  is  two  miles  deep  ;  you  should 
sail  «p  on  its  western  side,  having  14,  16  and  18  fathoms,  until  you  get  inside  the  point,  a 
little  within  which  is  a  bank  of  7  or  8  fathoms  :  but  when  you  have  passed  over  this,  you 
will  again  drop  into  16  and  17  fathoms  ;  and  as  you  a|)proach  the  head  of  the  bay,  you  will  ^ 

lessen  your  water  to  7,  6  and  5  fathoms,  every  whure  good  anchorage,  and  well  sheltered 
from  ail  winds.  The  two  islands  of  Griguet  lie  outside  of  Camels'  Island,  and  together 
form  between  them  severii'  s-.i.ail  i)ut  snug  harbors  for  fishing  vessels. 

WHITE  ISLANCS. — You  will  now  perceive  the  White  Islands,  lying  to  the  north-    White  Isl- 
wnrd  of  Stormy  Cape,  from  which  they  are  distant  one  leai;ue  and  about  "34  miles  from  ands.  ^ 

the  shore  opposite  ;  they  are  small,  of  moderate  height,  anrl  have  several  rocks  inside,  both 
above  and  under  water;  but  these  are  not  considered  to  be  dangerous,  ns  they  are  easily 
discdvoralde,  even  in  fine  wciatluM',  and  the  passage  betweeti  them  and  the  main  is  very  safe. 

QUIRPON  ISLAND. — This  lies  off  the  north-eastern  part  of  Newfoundland,  and   Quirpon  Id- 
forms  the  S.  K.  point  of  entrance  to  the  Strait  of  Bidle  Isle.     It  is  large,  high,  and  bar-  and. 
ron,  and  Cape  Do  (init  is  visi!)le,in  clear  weather,  full  I'i  leagues  to  seaward. 

LITTLE  QUIRI'ON. — There  is  a  narrow  channel  wliic''  runs  in  to  the  southward  Little  Quir- 
of  Quirpon  and  divides  it  from  tlie  main;  here  lies  Little  Quirpon  Harbor,  to  enter  which  pan. 
thnr((  is  no  danger  hut  what  you  will  easily  perceive.     Vessels  commonly  moor  head  and 
stern,  and  lie  tliere  perfectly  secure. 

DK(iRAT  AND   I'HJKON  COVKS.— These  coves  lie  on  the  eastern  side  of  Quir-  Degrat   and 
pon  Island,  and  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Degrat;  at  their  entrance   are  several  snndl  Pigeon 
rocky  islets  and  rocks  aliove  water,  and  iilfordin^  behind  them  very  fair  security  for  ship-   Coi'es. 
ping  in  4  fathoms  water,  and  good  convmiieniM's  for   tisliing.     Banld  Cape,  which  is  the 
northern  extremity  of  (Quirpon  Island,  lies  in  latitude  51°  39'  45''  N.  and  in  longitude  55° 
ii7'  50"  W. ;  it  is  rocky  and  steep  to,  and  may  be  approached  very  near,  with  great  safety. 
Having  rounded  this  cape  you  will  pen'eive  a  rocky  point  to  the  southward  leading  to  the 
Harbor  of  Quirpon. 

(iRKAT  QUIRPON  HARBOR  lies  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  island,  and  its  entrance  Great  Quir- 
is  between  it  and  Grave's  Island  ;  in  your  approach  towards  it  from  the  northward  you  pon  Harbor. 
may  borrow  as  close  us  you  please  to  Bauld  Head,  there  being  no  invisible  danger  until 


wmmmmmi'^ 


86 


Noddy  Har- 
bor. 


Gull  Rock 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

you  arrive  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  where  there  are  Bome  shoals  which  must  be  left 
on  your  larboard  side  ;  to  do  this  keep  Blacit  Head  on  Quirpon  IsJiuid  open  of  all  the  other 
land,  until  Raven  Point  comes  over  Noddy  Point,  then  haul  in  for  the  harbor,  going  not 
nearer  than  the  dislnnco  of  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  point  of  Grave's  Islimd  ;  the 
anchorage  within  the  island  is  every  where  good,  with  room  and  depth  enough  for  any 
ship,  and  the  ground  holds  well ;  but  the  best  place  to  ride  in  will  bo  towards  the  upper 
end  of  Grave's  Island,  abreast  of  Green  Island,  in  9  fathoms  water;  the  passage  to  the 
Inner  Harbor,  on  either  side  of  (Jreen  Island,  is  very  good  for  ships  of  moderate  water, 
through  whirh  y  >  will  have  3  fathoms,  and  above  Green  Island  you  have  excellent  riding 
in  7  fathon.3.  There  is  also  a  passage  to  this  harbor  tlirough  Little  Quirpun  Harbor,  but 
it  is  too  narrow  and  intricate  for  any  one  to  attempt,  unless  they  are  perfectly  acquainted 
with  the  navigation. 

NODDY  II  ARBOR. — This  place  liesa  little  to  the  westward  of  Quirpon  Harbor,  and 
runs  in  between  Noddy  point  and  Cape  Raven  ;  there  is  no  danger  in  entering,  and  you 
will  pass  to  the  starboard  of  the  little  island  that  lies  about  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  and 
anchor  above  it  in  3  fathoms  water ;  or  you  may,  with  a  small  vessel,  run  further  up  into 
the  basin,  and  anchor  in  2^  or  3  fathoms  ;  here  is  a  stage  within  the  island,  and  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  harbor,  with  convenient  room  for  many  vessels. 

GULL  ROCK  and  MARIA'S  LEDGK.— The  Gull  Rock  lies  W.  N.  W.from  Rauld 
and  Maria's  Cape,  in  the  island  of  Quirpoti,  distant  2i  miles;  and  N.  N.  E.  J  E.  nearly  3  miles  from 
Ledge.  Cape  Raven  ;  it  is  always  above  water.     Maria's  Ledge  lies  nearly  S.  W.  from  the  Gull 

Rock,  distant  2  miles,  and  N.  by  E.  li  mile  from  Cape  Raven,  being  distant  about  a  mile 
from  Marin's  Head.  In  standing  in  from  the  northwardfor  either  QUIRPON  or  NODDY 
HARBORS,  you  need  be  under  no  apprehension  of  danger  from  the  Gull  or  Maria's 
Rocks,  for  both  are  above  water,  the  passage  between  them  is  half  a  league  wide  and  very 
safe  ;  but  it  will  be  prudent  tj  pass  nearer  the  Gull  Rock,  because  of  the  N.  W.  Ledge, 
which  never  appears  but  in  bad  weather:  this  N.  W.  Ledge  bears  W.  a  little  S.  distant 
1|  of  a  mile  from  the  Gull  Rock,  and  you  should  not  attempt  the  passage  between  it  and 
the  main,  on  account  of  other  rocks  that  are  said  to  lie  about  it,  and  places  of  sliallow  water. 
To  the  westward  are  the  Sacred  Islands  :  Great  Sacred  Island  lies  about  N.  W.  by 
W.  i  W.  from  Bauld  Cape,  distant  5i  miles,  and  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  Cape  Norman 
nearly  13  miles.  Little  Sacred  Island  is  one  mile  to'the  southward  of  the  great  island; 
the  passage  between  them  is  si-fe,  and  you  may  sail  round  both,  for  they  are  high  and 
bold  ;  within  them  on  the  main  and  to  the  W.  South-westward  is  Sacred  Bay,  tolerably 
large,  with  numerous  rocky  islets  within  it :  the  shores  of  this  place  abound  with  wood, 
and  therefore  it  is  much  resorted  to  for  the  use  of  the  fisheries  at  Quirpon  and  Griguet, 
dec.  Cape  Guion  forms  the  north  point  of  Sacred  Bay,  being  high  and  steep;  near  it  is  a 
remarkable  rock  called  the  Mewstone,  and  much  resembling  that  in  Plymouth  Sound. 
There  is  a  little  cove  to  the  southward  of  this  rock,  where  a  vessel  may  occasionally  resort 
to  with  safety. 
Ha  Ha  Bay.  HA  HA  BAY.— From  Cape  Onion  to  Burnt  Cape  the  course  is  \V.  }  N.  about  6  miles; 
it  has  a  white  appearance,  and  rises  from  the  seaward  to  a  considerable  height  On  tho 
eastern  side  of  Burnt  Cape  is  Ha  Ha  Bay,  which  runs  in  southerly  about  2  miles ;  it  lies 
open 'to  northerly  winds,  but  when  you  are  within  tho  cape  you  will  find  anchorage  in  6 
or  7  fathoms;  or  you  ran  go  further  u|)  and  ride  well  sheltered  in  3  or2i  fathoms.  This 
is  a  convenient  place  for  the  fisheries,  and  has  plenty  of  wood. 
FistoletBay.  PLSTOLET  BAY. — This  buy  lies  between  Burnt  Capo  and  the  Norman  Ledges, 
which  bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  by  N.  and  S.  K.  by  S.  distant  8  miles  ;  tho  bay  is  ex- 
tensive, and  reaches  several  miles  each  way,  having  good  anchoring  ground  in  most  parts, 
particularly  on  the  western  side,  a  little  above  the  islands,  in  about  5  fathoms  water;  tho 
shore  is  tolerably  well  furnished  with  wood,  and  contributes  to  supply  those  places  which 
are  destitute  of  that  article. 
Cook's  Hat.  COOK'S  HARBOR  lies  in  tho  N.  W.  part  of  Pistolet  Bay,  and  within  the  islands, 
hor.  about  two  miles  above  Norman  Ledee  Point,     'i'hese  ledges  are  about  one  mile  to  the 

eastwaid  of  the  north  point:  to  clear  these  dangers  as  you  enter,  be  sure  to  keep  Burnt 
Cape  well  open  of  the  outer  rocks,  that  lie  ofl'the  islands  at  the  western  entrance  to  Pis- 
tolet Harbor;  and  if  goini;  in,  so  soon  as  you  consider  yourself  to  bo  to  the  southwiiid 
of  these  ledges,  steer  in  for  the  haroor.  leaving  the  inlands  and  rocks  on  yonr  larboarii 
side;  keep  the  southern  shore  on  tioard,  foi'  fear  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  juts  out  from 
a  little  rocky  island  on  the  other  side  ;  and  so  soon  as  you  get  withui  tho  island  haul 
over  for  the  northern  shore,  and  anchor  in  4  or  b  fathoms  water.  This  harbor  is  capiilile 
of  being  made  very  convimient,  and  several  fishing  rooms  and  proper  stages  for  the  boats 
to  resort  to,  and  cure  their  fish,  might  bo  erected  in  all  tho  coves  between  it  and  Cape 
Norman. 
Cipc  No:-  CAPE  NCJRMAN  is  tho  northernmost  point  of  Newfoinidland,  being  of  a  moderate 

mun.  Ten  height,  and  very  barren  appearance,  which  continues  far  inland;   it  is  ai)out  a  league 

;  J  the  north-westward  of   the  ledges  ;   from  Cape  Norman  tho  shores  of  Newfoundland 
turn  south-westerly,  and  will  bo  described  hereafter. 


''<"«"""'^^X"V"<R||M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


m 


37 


BELLE  ISLE. — This  island,  which  lies  at  the  entrance  of  the  strait  to  which  it  com-  Belle  Isle. 
niunicntes  its  nume,  should  be  cnlled  the  Northern  Belle  Isle,  to  distinguish  it  from  those 
we  htive  iilreiidy  deacribod,  lying  to  the  southward;  it  is  about  8  miles  long  and  3  broad, 
or  7  leagues  in  circumference,  being  distant  from  Bauld  Head,  in  Quirpon  Island,  about 
14  miles,  and  from  the  coast  of  Labrador  12  miles;  it  is  moderately  high,  and  wears  a 
uniform  sterile  appearance.  On  its  north-western  shore  there  is  a  small  harbor,  called 
Lark  Cove,  or  Harbor,  lying  within  an  island  almost  close  to  the  land,  and  fit  only  for 
giimll  craft;  and  nt  the  eastern  side  of  this  island  is  another  cove,  callod  Batteaux  Creek, 
fr«queiitod  occasionally  by  shallops.  About  two  miles  to  the  north-eastward  of  this  island 
lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  part  of  which  appear  above  water,  and  over  these  the  sea  breaks 
very  high;  this  is  called  the  N.  E.  Ledge;  you  will  have  15  and  20  fathoms  close  to  it, 
and  55  between  it  and  the  north  part  of  the  island.  The  soundings  about  this  Belle  Isle 
are  very  irregular;  near  the  island  you  will  seldom  find  less  than  20  fathoms,  except  on  u 
small  bank  said  to  lie  to  the  northward,  distant  4  miles  from  its  north-eastern  part,  where- 
on are  only  5  fathoms.  The  northern  part  of  this  island  is  said  to  lie  in  about  the  latitude 
of51°  57'  N. 

SouNDiNos  IN  THK  Strait  OF  Bellg  Isle. — In  crossing  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  from  Soundine;sin 
Quirpon  to  Chateaux  Bay,  your  soundings  will  be  irregular;  from  20  to  30  fathoms  on  the  Strait  of 
tiio  Newfoundland  side,  and  in  some  places  from  30  to  38  fathoms;  in  the  stream  or  mid-  Belle  Isle. 
(lie  of  the  strait,  you  will  find  25  and  35  fathoms,  coarse  sand  and  broken  shells;  and  to- 
wards Chateaux  Bay,  45  to  80  fathoms,  and  within  a  mile  of  the  coast  of  Labrador,  35.  30, 
and  25  fathoms.     To  the  northward,  between  Belle  Isle  and  St.  Peter's  Buy,  there  are 
59,  87,  96,  63,  and  20  fathoms. 


THE  $$OUTHERI¥  COA^T  OF  IVEWFOV.\DLA\D, 

FROM  CAPE  RACE  TO  CAPE  CHAPEAU  ROUGE. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS.— Vessels  bound  towards  the  Gulf  of  Newfoundland 
should  take  the  greatest  care  to  notice  and  make  a  proper  allowance  for  the  currents, 
which  set  from  the  eastward,  all  along  the  southern  coast  of  Newfoundland,  with  fre- 
quoiitly  tatal  velocity,  causing  an  impetuous  indraught  into  the  various  bays,  ond  occasion- 
ini;  the  nmch-to-bo  deplored  loss  of  many  lives,  and  the  wreck  of  numerous  vessels. 
Tiu'se  local  currents  chiefly  prevail  on  that  part  between  Cape  Race  and  Cape  Ray: 
niore  vo^isels  have  been  cast  away  on  the  small  point  of  land  which  divides  the  two  bays 
of  Trepassey  and  St.  Mary  than  on  any  other  part  of  the  island:  that  these  accidents 
were  occasioned  by  the  currents  there  can  be  little  doubt. 

An  able  navigator,  who  has  been  20  years  employed  in  the  fisheries,  and  who  is  a  native 
of  Newfoundland,  observes,  it  is  well  understood  by  all  the  boat  masters,  thiit  there  is  in 
jrenoral  a  strong  current  sotting  in  from  the  eastward,  along  the  western  coast  of  New- 
foundland, which,  after  passing  Cape  Pine,  runs  more  towards  .St.  Mary's  and  Playontia 
Hays ;  this  current  will  be  felt  at  least  20  leagues  to  the  S.  VV  of  Cape  Pine,  and  becomes 
more  rapid  as  you  approach  the  land;  its  velocity  increasing  as  the  winds  favor  its  direc- 
tion ;  but  at  all  times  of  sulfmient  magnitude  to  endanger  the  safety  of  any  vessel  approach- 
iii<;  from  the  south  or  west  in  foggy  weather,  and  being  ignorant  of  its  existence. 

Ill  order  to  avoid  the  danger  arising  from  this  current,  the  fishermen,  in  foggy  weather, 
when  returning  from  the  western  coast  to  their  homos  on  the  eastern  shore,  invariably  use 
tlio  load,  d(»pendii ,;  more  upon  the  depth  of  water  than  their  compass,  and  always  keep- 
iiii;  a  sufficient  distance  from  the  land  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  vessel.  On  passing  to 
fill!  eastward  of  Capo  Race  they  never  ap[)roach  nearer  to  the  land  than  35  fathoms  water ; 
tlic  ground  being  more  of  an  inclined  plane  on  the  west  than  on  the  oast  coast,  you  will 
find  that  depth  of  water  at  a  considerable  distance;  the  ground  beconies  more  broken, 
aiid  l\w  ilepth  of  water  increases  so  fast,  that  in  yourcoursefrom  Cape  St.  Mary's  to  avoid 
Ciipe  Race  you  will,  when  to  the  eastward  of  it,  find  yourself  in  50  fathoms,  and  when  ad- 
viiiR'e  I  a  very  short  distance  further,  you  will  drop  into  CO  and  70  fathoms;  consequently,  you 
will  then  be  clear  of  any  laml,  and  may  safely  pursue  what  course  you  think  proper;  but, 
in  nil  thi.-i  navigation,  tlu*  mariner's  safety  may  bo  insured  by  a  duo  attention  to  the  lead. 

f'.VI'l'-  ll.VCK  is  situated  on  the  southernmost  part  of  Newfoundland,  and  lies  S.  W.  Cape  Race. 
i  W.  distant  .'J  loiigui^s  from  Ca|)o  Ballard:  before  it  lie  2  or  3  rocks  above  water;  these  are 
close  to  the  land,  and  have  10  fathoms  water  very  near  them.  Between  G  and  7  miles 
K.S.H.  from  Cape  Race  is  the  New  Bank,  being  4  miles  long  and  l-i  broad,  and  lying  N.  E. 
by  N.  and  S.  W.  by  W.:  on  it  are  17,  20  and  25  fathoms,  with  very  deep  water  on  its 
(latside.  and  30  i'lthoms  Just  within  it.  Vessels  making  this  part  of  the  coast  may  know 
their  approach  toward  tlie  land,  by  suddenly  h^ssoning  their  water  to  the  ni)ovo  depths. 

The  Virgin  Rocks,  which  are  dangerous,  lie  in  the  direct  track  to  Cape  Race,  Newfound- 
laud,  the  point  which  vessels  bound  to  (Quebec  generally  endeavor  to  make.  (See  p.  13.) 


38 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Trepassey 
Harbor. 


Lighthouse 

building. 

1850 


Near  Cape  Race  is  a  small  inlet  named  Cripple  Cove;  the  land  then  turng  westerly 
towards  Mistaken  Point,  a  distance  of  4i  miles;  the  shores  are  bold,  and  off  Mistiiken 
Point  is  a  rock  above  water.  N.  W.  by  W.  about  two  miles,  is  the  French  Mistaken 
Point;  this  also  hus  a  rock  off  its  extremity.  From  hence  the  shore  winds  N.  by  W. 
into  Trepassey  Buy,  at  the  northern  part  of  which  lies  Biscay  and  Mutton  Bays,  and  Tre- 
passey Harbor.  The  two  former  of  these  are  seldom  frequented,  and  is  considered  dan- 
gerous to  get  embiiyed  there,  for  the  sea  commonly  drives  in,  and  there  li  hardly  any 
current  to  help  you  out  again.  Mutton  Bay  is  formed  to  the  eastward  by  Cape  Mutton 
and  to  the  westward  by  Cape  Powles;  this  last  is  the  extreme  point  of  a  narrow  neck  of 
land  that  divides  Mutton  Bay  from  Trepassey  Harbor;  it  is  a  long,  low,  sandy,  and  stony 
beach,  over  which  the  ships  lying  in  Trepassey  Harbor  can  be  distinctly  seen.  Mutton 
Bay  is  about  two  miles  deep,  and  hus  from  12  to  3  fathoms  water  in  it;  but  the  bottom  ig 
foul  and  rocky. 

TRKPASSEY  HARBOR.— The  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  to  the  eastward  of  Cnpe 
Powles,  and  the  direct  course  in  will  be  N.  E.  i  E.  Cape  Powles  lies  from  French  Mis- 
taken Point  N.  W.  about  8  miles;  from  Cape  Mutton  W.  S.  VV.  |  W.  one  mile;  and 
from  Cnpe  Pines  N.  E.  by  E.  5  miles.  The  entrance  to  Trepassey  Harbor  is  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  wide,  and  continues  of  that  breadth  full  2i  miles  up;  it  then  narrows  to  less 
than  half  a  mile,  and  opens  again  to  its  former  width,  and  there  vessels  commonly  ride. 
To  enter  this  harbor  ships  comntonly  steer  over  from  Mistaken  Point  towards  Cape  Pine 
until  you  fairly  open  the  harbor;  you  may  then  safely  run  along  the  shore,  for  it  is  bold. 
In  sailing  into  the  hari)or,  you  will  meet  with  a  rock  on  the  south-eastern  shore,  lying 
about  a  mile  from  Powles  Head,  and  one-third  of  a  cable's  length  off  the  shore.  There 
is,  also,  on  the  northern  side,  a  shonl  which  runs  along  up  the  harbor,  so  far  as  a  low  green 
point;  to  clear  thisslionl,  bring  Baker's  Point  on  with  a  low  rocky  point  at  the  entrance 
of  the  harbor,  tind  when  yon  get  so  fur  up  as  the  low  green  point,  you  may  steer  more 
westerly,  and  anchor  either  in  the  N.  W.  or  N.  E.  arm,  in  5  or  fi  fathoms  water.  Both 
wood  and  water  can  be  obtained  with  ease. 

From  Mistaken  Point  to  Ca|)o  Pine  the  course  and  distance  are  W.  N.  W.  \  W.  4 
leagues  and  a  half;  and  from  Cape  Pine  to  tJape  Freels,  west,  one  mile.  The  land  about 
Cape  Pine  is  barren  and  moderately  high ;  from  Cape  Freels,  the  shores  extend  W.  N. 
W.  one  mile  to  Black  Head,  and  thence  N.  W.  ^'  W.  to  the  eastern  reef,  and  head  of  St. 
Shot's  Bay. 
St.  ShoVsBay  ST.  SHOT'S  BAY. — This  is  the  fatid  spot  where  so  many  vessels  have  been  recently 
wrecked;  the  bay  is  about  a  mile  deep,  and  from  the  eastern  to  the  western  head,  the 
bearing  is  N.  by  W.  \  W.  distant  two  miles;  it  lies  entirely  open  and  exposed  to  the  sea. 
ST.  MARY'S  BAY. — This  is  an  extensive  bay,  or  gulf,  commencing  on  the  eastern 
side  at  St.  .Shot's,  and  on  the  western  side  at  Point  Lanre;  the  course  from  the  eastern 
head  of  .St.  Shot's  to  Point  Lance  being  N.  W.  h  W.  about  20  miles:  from  thence  the 
land  runs  up  E.  N.  E.  9  leagues  and  a  quarter;  the  land  on  each  side  being  moderately 
high,  and  having  several  good  harbors  in  it.  In  proceeding  from  St.  .Shot's  along  the  east- 
ern shore  you  will  pass  two  little  coves,  and  reach  (iull  Island:  this  lies  close  in  to  the 
land,  and  boars  from  the  western  head  of  St.  Shot's  N.  4  E.  distant  4  miles. 

From  (tuII  Island  to  Cape  English  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  by  E.  f  E.  two 

leagues;  Cupe  English  is  high  tal)le-Iand,  terminating  in  a  low  rocky  point,  and  formir.' 

a  bay,  about  a  mile  deep,  to  the  southward  of  it;  at  the  bottom  of  this  bay  is  a  stony  hoach, 

within  which  is  Holyrood  Pond,  running  E.  N.  E.  nearly  six  leagues,  and  from  half  ainiln 

to  3  miles  in  breadth ;  this  occasions  the  cupe  to  appear  like  un  island  when  you  are  to  tiie 

southward  of  it.      One  mile  and  three-quarters  N.  E.  1  N.  from  Cape  English  is  False 

Cape  ;  six  and  a  half  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Cape  English  is  Point  la  Ilayo :  this  is  low,  and 

has  a  ledge  of  rocks  running  from  it  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  into  the  sea,  and  above  a 

mile  along  the  shore,  on  which  the  waves  break  furiously  in  bud  weather :  this  is  the  only 

danger  vou  will  meet  with  in  St  Mary's  Harbor. 

St.  Mary's         ST.  M  ARY'S  HARBOR.— From  Point  la  llaye  to  Double  Road  Point,  which  is  the 

Harbor  southern  extreme  of  St.  Mary's  Harbor,  the  course  and  distance  are  E.  N.  E.  one  niilo 

and  a  half;  the  land  between  U  low  and  wears  a  barren  appearance.      Within  Doiihlo 

Road  I'oint  is  Ellis'  Point,  di  lant  half  a  mile:  these  two  form  the  starboard  points  ofon- 

trunco  to  tlie  harbor,  which  is  here  nearly  a  mile  wide      You  will  now  perceive  the  river 

to  be  divided  into  two  branches,  the  one  running  E.   X.  E.  into  what  is  calletl  Mai  Buy, 

the  other  sdutli-easterly  into  .St.  Mary's  Ilarljor.     When  you  are  within  Ellis"  Point,  in 

.St    Mary's  Jlariior,  you  can  haul  to  the  southward,  and  anchor  abreast  of  the  (ishing-stiiiii'H 

and  houses,  upon  a  llat,  in  4  or  5  fathonjs  water,  whore  you  will  ride  lan<l-lockf(l:  this 

flat  runs  oli'  shore  about  half  a  mile,   and  between  if  and  the  opposite  shore  are  from  15 

to  30  fathoms  water.     The  best  anchorage  is  about  two  miles  above  the  town,  opposite  to 

Brown's  Pond,  where  it  is  above  half  a  mile  wide;  here  also  you  will  lie  land-locked  in  12 

futliorns,  and  have  excellent  ground  to  tho  further  end  of  the  bay. 

Mai  Bay.  MAL  BAY,  on  the  E.  N,  E.  branch,  is  about  one  mile  wide,  and  runs  up  'Jj  miles;  but 

the  anchorage  is  not  good;  a  heavy  sea  frequently  seta  into  it,  and  unless  you  run  up  to 


St.  Mary's 
Bay. 


thorns  b( 
In  a  simi 
tance,  am 
rocks,  n\ 
ingover 
and  have 
cppting 
Hetwee 
the  Capi 
also  betw 
(lunger; 

PL  AC 
on  the  ei 
former  1\ 
N.  W.a 
land  on 
the  crow 
to  seawa 

From 
from  1*0 
from  the 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


89 


I  westerly 
Mistaken 
Mistaken 
^.  by  W. 
•  nnd  Tre- 
lered  dan- 
lurdly  any 
e  Mutton, 
'W  neck  of 


unit,  in 


its  very  hend,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  you  can  have  no  place  even  for  occasional  security.  It 
therefore  is  seldom  resorted  to.  The  entrance  to  these  harbors  bears  from  Point  Lance 
nearly  east,  distant  19  miles.  From  Trapeau  Point,  the  coast  runs  N.  N.  E.  i  N.  above 
tffo  miles,  to  Shoal  Boy ;  and  opposite  to  the  northern  point  of  this  Shonl  Bay  lies  Great 
Colinet  Island.  This  is  about  a  league  in  length  and  one  mile  broad ;  the  southern  end  of 
which  boars  from  Cape  English  N.  by  E.  distant  three  leagues.  There  is  a  safe  channel 
on  either  side  of  this  island,  only  taking  care  to  give  Shoal  Bay  Point  a  good  berth  of  a  quar- 
ter of  a  mile,  in  order  to  avoid  some  rocks  which  lie  off  it.  On  the  northern  side  of  the 
Great  Colinet  is  a  stony  beach,  off  which  runs  a  bank  with  from  7  to  17  fathoms  water, 
focky  ground  One  mile  and  a  half  north-eastward  from  Great  Colinet  is  Little  (.'olinet 
Islnnd,  above  a  mile  in  length,  and  half  a  mile  in  breadth.   There  is  deep  water  all  round  it. 

GREAT  SALMON  RIVER.— E.  N.  E.  five  miles  and  a  half  from  the  northern  part  Great  Sal- 
of  Little  Colinet  Island  is  the  entrance  to  Great  Salmon  River,  which  is  nearly  three-  mon  River. 
quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  and  runs  E.  N.  E.  7  or  8  miled.  About  three  miles  up  this  river, 
gild  on  its  southern  shore,  is  an  opening  called  Little  Harbor.  Opposite  this,  in  a  small 
cove,  is  the  best  anchorage  in  the  river,  although  it  is  generally  good  throughout.  Here 
you  may  ride  safely  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water.  The  river  narrows  as  you  advance  up  it, 
aud  towards  its  furthest  end  becomes  very  shallow. 

COLINET  BAY — N.  W.  by  N.  from  the  entrance  of  Great  Salmon  River,  distant2i  Colinet  Bay. 
miles,  and  N.  E.  i  E.  5i  miles  from  Little  Colinet  Island,  is  the  mouth  of  Colinet  Bay. 
Between  Salmon  River  and  Colinet  Bay,  is  a  cove  a  good  mile  and  a  half  deep,  wilh  from 
]8  to  4  fathoms  in  it,  but  it  is  exposed  to  the  S.  W.  and  therefore  not  much  resorted  to. 
Colinet  Bay  runs  in  N.  E.  by  N.  about  two  miles,  where  the  point  of  an  island  on  the  star- 
board side  narrows  the  passage ;  having  passed  which  the  channel  opens  wider  again,  and 
tlio  top  of  the  bay  is  a  sandy  shallow  bench.  Throughout  the  whole  of  Colinet  Bay,  the 
a!;c!:i>iage  is  good.  You  will  have  from  12  to  6  fathoms  water  up  to  the  narrows.  In  pas- 
sing the  narrows  there  are  7 and  8  fathoms, and  above  it  6,  5,  and  4 fathoms;  all  good  ground. 

NORTH  HARBOR.— To  the  W.  S.  W.  of  Colinet  Bay.  4  miles,  and  N.  by  E.  about  North  Har- 
2  miles  from  the  northern  end  of  Little  Colinet  Island,  is  the  entrance  to  North  Harbor,  h(yr. 
which  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  and  runs  up  to  the  northward  3  miles.  The  nn- 
churnge  is  very  good  about  two  miles  up  the  river,  whore  it  is  half  a  mile  wide,  in  5  or  6 
fathoms;  or  vessels  may  run  further  up,  where  two  sandy  points  stretch  out,  being  half 
a  cable's  length  asunder;  keep  the  starlioard  point  on  board,  and  anchor  close  within  the 
starboard  shore.  In  entering  North  Harbor  always  keep  mid-channel,  for  the  eastern  land 
is  somewhat  shallow. 

The  land  now  trends  W.  S.  W.  i  S.  towards  Point  Lance.  There  are  one  or  two  covea 
in  the  way,  but  no  place  fit  for  the  reception  of  shipping. 

POINT  LANCE  lies  in  lat4G°  48',  and  is  a  low  ragged  point,  although  the  land  in  the  PointLanet. 
interior  rises  up  and  becomes  highly  elevated.      We  have  already  stated  that  the  course 
and  distance  from  the  eastern  head  of  St.  Shot's  to  Point  Lonce  is  N.  W.  i  W.  about  22 
miles;  from  Point  Lance  to  Cape  St.  Mary  is  N.  W.  i  W.  about  64  miles. 

CAPE  ST.  MARY  is  a  high  l)lufr  point  of  land,  making  like  Cape  St.  Vincent's  on  Cape  St. 
the  coast  of  Portugal;  the  land  to  the  northward  nlong  shore,  to  a  considerable  distiince,  Mary. 
has  nil  even  appearance,  and  is  nearly  of  equal  height  with  thecnpe  itself.  W.  by  S.from 
Cape  Lanoe,  distant  full  two  miles,  lie  the  Bull  and  Cow  Rocks:  these  are  two  flat  rocks 
lying  very  near  each  other,  and  having  many  small  rocks  about  them.  About  a  similar 
distance,  hut  nearer  to  tho  main,  is  another  rock,  appealing  at  half  tide:  there  are  10  fa- 
thoms between  it  and  the  shore,  and  15  fathoms  botwern  it  and  the  Bull  and  Cow  Rocks. 
In  a  similar  direction  to  the  Bull  and  Cow  Rocks  from  Cape  Lance,  but  at  3  leagues  dis- 
tfluce,  and  nearly  S.  S.  W.  distant  7i  miles,  from  Cape  St.  Mary's,  are  two  other  little 
rocks,  appearing  just  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  having  the  sea  constantly  break- 
ing over  tliein.  They  lie  S.  .S.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  from  each  other,  distant  3  cables'  length, 
and  have  15  fathoms  between  them.  The  same  depth  of  water  is  all  round  them,  ex- 
cepting townnls  the  S.  S.  E.  where  only  6  fathoms  will  be  found  2  cables'  length  off. 
Between  these  Rocks  and  Cape  St.  Mary  are  32,  25  and  19  fathoms  water;  and  near 
the  Cape  ure  13,  14  and  15  fatlioms.  Vessels  therefore  may  proceed  between  them,  and 
also  between  the  Bull  and  Cow  Rocks  and  the  main,  if  necessary,  for  there  is  no  hidden 
danger;  lint  pcuhaps  it  will  always  bo  more  i)rudent  to  go  to  the  southward  of  both. 

PLACENTIA  BAY.— The  entrance  to  IMacentia  Buy  is  formed  by  Cape  St.  Mary  Placentia 
on  the  east,  and  Cape  Chapeau  Rouge,  or  Mountain  of  the  Rod  Hat,  on  the  west;  tho  Bay. 
former  lying  in  latitude  46°  49'  N.  the  latter  in  4()°  53'  N.  bearing  from  each  other  W. 
N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  distant  17  leagues.  Ca|)o  Chapeau  Rouge  is  the  most  remarkable 
land  on  all  the  t'oasts,  appearing  liiuher  than  tlie  surrounding  shore,  and  somewhat  like 
tlie  crown  of  a  hat,  from  which  singularity  it  obtains  its  name;  it  is  visible  11  or  12  leagues 
to  seaward,  in  clear  weather. 

From  Cnjie  St.  Mary  to  Cape  Bronio  your  course  will  be  N.  by  E.  about  9  miles,  and 
from  Point  Iheme  to  tho  Virgin  Rocks  N.  E.  by  E.  13  miles:  these  rocks  lie  li  mile 
from  tho  main,  and  always  appear  above  water;  a  little  to  the  southward  of  tho  Virgin 


40 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Rocks  nre  some  whitish  clifl's  in  the  Innd,  by  which  it  mny  be  known  if  falling  in  with  the 
land  hereiibouts  in  tiiick  weiithor. 

From  tlio  Virgin  Rocks  to  Point  Vordo,  the  Houthornmost  point  of  Placentia  Harbor 
the  courfin  and  distanco  aro  N.  K.  by  E.  \  K.  5  miles.     From  St.  Mary's  Capo  to  Verde 
Point  thoro  is  no  hiirhoror  place  ofshollor  for  ships  of  any  size. 
Placentia  PLACKNTIA  H ARIU  )R.— Point  Vordo,  or  (Jroon  Point,  is  low  and  lovol,  and  forms 

Harbor.  tlie  southern  point  ot  the  road.      It  hue.  a  pebbly  boach  on  each  sido,  and  8((vcral  fmliing 

8ta>;es  within  it.      At  the  end  of  this  beach  is  a  high  rocky  cliff,  extending  to  the  S.  l] 
corner  of  the  bay,  where  it  again  terminates  in  a  pebbly  beach.     This  bench  then  rung 
E.  N.  K.  one  mile  to  the  Fort  Point,  and  on  the  inside,  which  faces  the  S.  K.  arm  of  th<( 
linrbor,  stands  tlie  town  of  Placentia.     A  little  sonthwind  of  the  town  is  a  high  hill,  with 
B  remarkable  cliff  on  the  middle  of  the  beach.     The  outer  sido  of  the  north  point  is  level 
with  a  day  clilf  on  its  outer  part,  bearing  nearly  N.  E.  by  N.  distant  from  Point  Verde 
li  mile.     From  this  point  the  land  forms  a  small  bay,  with  a  stony  bench  round  it,  to  the 
corner  of  the  cliff  under  Signal  Hill.     This  cliff  continues  to  Freshwater  Ihiy,  which  n 
formed  in  a  valley  between  Signal  Hill  and  Castle  Hill,  having  a  pebbly  beach  round  it. 
Here  a  small  rivulet  runs  down  the  valley,  at  which  vessels  nniy  obtain  water.     To  saii 
into  this  roid,  if  coming  from  the  southward,  you  should  keep  a  league  off  the  land,  j^ 
order  to  avoid  the  Gibraltar  Rock,  which  lies  about  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  (Jiocii 
Point,  and  has  only  8  feet  water  over  it:  the  mark  to  go  to  the  northward  of  which  is 
the  castle,  standing  on  a  hill  at  the  northern  side  of  the  harbor,  and  very  cons|)icu()U8to 
seaward,  open  of  Point  Verde.      Wlum  you  have  this  castle  on  with  the  point,  you  will 
pass  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  rock;  but  when  you  have  the  castle  well  o|)en  of  the 
point,  you  will  give  tho  rock  a  wide  berth  :  run  in  with  this  mark;  keep  your  lead  going; 
for  there  are  regular  soundings  on  both  sides,  and  give  Green  Point  a  good  berth  of  two 
cables'  length,  passing  it  in  4  fathoms  water:  then  proceed  to  tho  anchorage  in  Fresh- 
water I5ay,  and  under  Castli«  Hill,  at  three-quarters  of  the  distance  over  from  that  side 
where  you  willlio  in  0  or  7  fathoms  water,  good  ground.     At  tho  bottom  of  the  road  is  a 
long  beach,  which  terminates  in  n  point  to  tho  northward,  on  which  stand  some  houses 
and  an  old  fortress.     There  is  also  a  fort  on  tho  opposite  point.    The  entrance  to  the  har- 
bor is  between  these.     It  is  very  narrow,  not  above  CO  fatlioms  across,  and  has  .'3i  fathoms 
water  in  it.     When  you  get  within  these  points  tho  harboro|)ens,  becomes  one-third  ofn 
mile  wide,  and  extends  E.  N.  E.  abovt*  Ij  mile,  where  ships  may  lie  in  perlict  security, 
with  fi  and  7  fntlioms  water.    In  going  in,  keep  nearer  to  tho  starboard  side.   The  streiiui 
runs  into  the  harbor  more  than  4  knots  an  hour.     'I'he  tide  rises  C  or  7  feet;  and  it  is  high 
water,  Inll  and  change,  at  15  minutes  offer  9  A.  M. 

N.  K.  i  E.  from  Point  Verde,  distant  two  mdes,  and  N.  N.  W.  from  Moll  Point,  about 
3  of  a  mile,  is  tho  Moll  Rock,  over  which  are  oidy  1,>  feet  water,  with  8  and  10  fathoms 
near  it.  N.  E.  by  N.  5}  miles  from  Point  Venle,  is  I'oint  Latinn.  S.  \V.  from  Point 
Latinn,  distant  one  mile,  is  the  Wolf  Hock.  Tlies^e  lie  about  half  a  mile  from  the  mnin, 
and  between  Placentia  Harbor  and  Point  Latiiia,  and  therefore  must  have  a  good  berth  in 
passing.  The  shore  all  the  way  is  low  near  the  sea,  but  high  and  ragged  inland.  A  largo 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Latina  is  Point  Roche,  which  has  a  shoal  off  it  extending 
one-(|uarter  of  a  mile  out. 
Little  Pla-  LITTLE  PLACENTIA  HARBOR  runs  in  to  tho  southward  from  Point  Kocho; 

eentiaHarhor  iun\  S.  E.  I)y  E.  4  E.  fnnn  Point  Roche,  distant  2  miles,  is  the  opposite,  or  Fox's  Point, 
which  may  be  considered  to  be  tho  eastern  entrance  to  Placentia  Sound.  On  the  western 
side  of  this  sound  is  the  harbor  of  Little  Placentia,  which  extends  W.  by  S.  above  li 
mile,  and  is  nearly  half  a  mile  broad.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  a  cove  on  the  northern 
shore,  which  you  nniy  know  by  the  western  side  of  it  being  woody.  Off  the  east  jiointof 
the  cov(*  lies  a  shoal,  stretching  nearly  one-third  across  the  channel.  In  this  covo  aro  7 
nnd  8 

water,  liut  little  treii 
cove,  fit  for  boats  only. 

Ship  Harbor,      SHIP  IIARHOR. — From  Point  Latina  to  Ship  Harbor  tho  course  nnd  distance  is  east 

nearly  7  miles.     This  inlet  runs  up  northerly  two  miles  and  three-quarters,  and  is  half  u 

i  mile  wide.     Tho  best  anchorage  is  in  a  cove  on  the  west  side,  in  10  iathoms  water,  about 

one  mile  from  the  entrance. 
Fox  Island.  FOX  ISLAND  is  small  and  round,  and  lies  N.  E.  i  N.  distant  three  miles  from  Point 
Latina,  and  N.  W.  by  W.  full  three  miles  from  .Ship  Harbor  Point:  this  latter  is  a  low 
stony  point,  lying  a  mile  and  a(|uarter  from  tho  entrance  of  tho  harbor.  Between  Fox's 
Island  and  .Ship  Harbor  Point  is  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which,  in  bad  weather,  will  show  break- 
ers quite  across.  Between  the  rocks  aro  'Ji,  ,5,  7,  and  10  fathoms  water.  N.  N.  W.  one 
mile  and  ajnilffrom  Fox's  Island,  is  Fishing  Rock,  a  steep  rock  always  above  water;  nnd 
N.  N.  E.  one  mile  and  a  half  from  Fishing  Rock,  is  Rowland's  Sunken  Rock,  over  which 
tho  sea  most  commonly  breaks. 
The  Ram  THE  RAM  ISLANDS.— This  is  n  cluster  of  high  islands,  lying  nearly  N.  E.  3  E. 

Islands.  from  Fox  Island,  distant  throe  miles.    On  tho  eastern  side  of  these  islands  is  Long  Harbor. 


<  fathoms  water.     To  the  eastward  an  arm  also  runs  in  almo.it  a  league,  with  det'|) 
r,  but  little  freiiuented:  ills  called  Placentia  Sound.     Fox's  Harbor  is  a  small  sandy 


iy 


m^mm 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  41 

There  is  no  clnnR»»r  in  ontorinK  this  place,  but  the  bostnncl'  •"iro  will  bo  on  the  northern 
iiilo,  to  ilii'  Diistwiiril  of  lliirhor  r»iuii(l,  lietwoon  it  and  the  ..in,  in  (J  or  7  fathoms  water, 
tt'liuro  yo"  will  rido  Hccuro  from  all  winds. 
j,>i)iii  lioMfi  Hnrbor  tho  slioro  riins  N.  N.  il.,  N.  by  K,,  and  N  ,  full  15  inilos,  having 
liiirliDK  or  jilaco  fit  for  tlio  roeoptioii  of  vchscIh,  until  you  roaidi  Littlo  Harbor,  Little 
«ioiitli  Harbor,  ami  (SnMit  South  Harbor.  Williin  this  uparo  «rn  Hiiid  to  bo  sovoral  low 
Lliiiuijt  I'i'd  rock.H ;  ono  of  whirh,  cailod  the  Whito  Ilock,  from  bciii;^  covorod  with  the 
ijiiiijjof  birda,  lio8  N.  K.  by  N.  from  Point  Latina.  distant  1.3  niilos,  ond  diroet  mid-woy 
li^twtH'M  t'ox  Island  and  Littlo  Harbor.  It  is  abroast  of  a  small  place  called  Tinny  Cove, 
ami  full  -  mil«s  olf  tlio  land.     VohsoIs  pass  on  oithor  sido. 

LlfTIiK  HARBOR  haw  vory  bad  unchorafjo,  and  is  much  exposed  to  S.  Westerly  Little  Har- 
iciiids;  tli'M'oforo  not  mufii  fro{)uentod.  bor. 

LITTLK  SOUTH  HARBOR  lies  ono  miln  to  tho  N.  Westward  of  Little  Harbor,  TJttU  South 
iinil  liiiH  Hovoral  rocky  iMJanclH  at  its  ontniiico,  which,  in  sailing  in,  must  bo  loft  on  your  stnr-Harbor. 
hoiinl  Mo,  fxenptinij  one,  on  oithor  sido  of  which  there  is  a  good  passage,  witii  I.*)  fathoms 
iviiliM'.  ( bi  tho  Houthorn  shore,  within  those  islands,  is  a  sunken  rock, over  which  the  sea 
ciiiiiiiioiily  broaks  :  it  lios  about  a  cablo's  length  from  the  land.  Nearly  opposite!  are  also 
jiiiiiii  locks,  half  a  cablo's  length  from  the  slioro,  which  appear  othalf  ebb.  This  harbor 
,4  0110  niilo  and  a  half  long,  half  a  milo  wide,  and  has  7,  8,  10,  and  I'ifathoms  water  in  it; 
and  till'  ground,  except  where  those  rocks  are  situated,  tolerably  good. 

GHKAT  south  HAUISORlies  ono  milo  to  tho  northward  of  Little  South  Hnrbor,  Great  South 
lU  entnuiio  is  between  the  mi  idle  point  anil  tho  Isle  au  Bordeaux,  ono  mile  and  a  quarter  Harbor. 
wiilo,  with  from  'JO  to  'M)  fathoms  water.    There  ia  no  danger  in  going  in,  and  tho  anchorage 
oiinaiiloanda  half  U|), or  iitMir  tho  headoflho  harbor,  isverygood,  in  6  and  7  fathomswator. 

CiiAN(;K  HARBOR. — The  Islo  au  Bordeaux  is  a  high  round  island,  from  which  ChanceHar- 
(lie  const  runs  N.  Easteijy  4  miles,  to  tho  entrance  of  an  inlot,  called  Como-by-Chanco.  bor. 
I'liid  runs  up  full  .3  miles,  and  has  from  120  to  3  fathoms  water,  graduidly  decreasing  in 
j,.|)tli  unto  the  further  end.     Vessels  may  anchor  here  on  a  sandy  bottom,  but  they  will 
tfqnito  exposed  to  S.  Westerly  winds. 

NORTH  HARBOR — About  N.  N.  W.  3  milesfrom  the  entronceof  Come-by-Chance,  North  Har- 
[i  iliiit  of  North  Harbor.     It  is  ai)ovo  a  milo  wide;,  and  tli  •  e  is  no  danger  in  sailing  into  it ;  6>r. 
Iiiit  like  the  former,  it  is  too  opcm  to  bo  trusted  to.     There  is,  howovor,  fair  anchorage 
jbout ','  miles  ii|)  in  7  fathoms  water. 

PIl'KR'H  HOLK.— N.  W.  by  N.  distant  2i  miles  from  the  entrance  to  North  Har-  Piper'sHole. 
bor,  iii  that  which  leads  to  Piper's  Hole.  Tho  channel  in  it  is  between  Sound  Island  and 
iho  amin.  In  tho  passage  you  will  have  19,  15,  and  1'2  fathoms;  and  when  to  the  north- 
ffiiril  of  tho  island  8,  7,  and  (J  fathoms.  From  hence  Piper's  Hole  runs  to  tho  northward 
fiillliv(t  miles  ;  but  the  water  is  shallow  and  unlit  for  shipping.  From  Piper's  Hole  in  a 
S.W.  direction,  lie  Sound,  Woody  and  Barren  Islands,  having  a  channel  between  thenvand 
tliK  N.  Western  shore  half  a  milo  wide,  in  which  are  from  7  to  'JO  fathoms,  and  good  an- 
c!i(inige  all  tho  way.  Between  woody  and  Sound  Islands  is  a  passage  with  from  7  to  16 
tatlmiiis  wafer  in  it ;  that  between  Woody  and  Barren  Islands  is  much  wider  and  deeper, 
hiiviiig  40  and  50  fathoms.  Opposite  tho  northern  part  of  Barron  IslantI  is  a  small  cove, 
ciilli'(i  La  IMant.  (it  only  for  boats.  Harron  Is-land  is  3i  miles  in  length  and  1  in  breadth; 
it  is  high  land,  and  at  its  S.  Kasternpart  isa  small  cove,  in  which  is  tolerable  good  anchorage, 
ill  liDai  ri  to  1()  fathoms.  N.  W.  by  VV.  from  tho  southern  partof  Barren  Island  is  Gulsh,  an 
iiilft  of  very  little  importance.     Furtlmr  south-west  are  Great  and  Little  Sandy  Harbors. 

(illK  \T  SANDi'  HARBOR  lies  W.  i  S.  distant  four  miles  from  the  south  end  of  GreatSandy 
B:ar('n  Island.     To  this  place  ther')  is  a  passage  between  Ship  Island  and  tho  main,  with  Harbor. 
7.0,  and   17  fathoms  water ;  but  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  very  narrow,  and  much 
iMicuailiored  with  rocks:  these  are  all  above  water,  and  have  channels  between  them  ;  but 
wlitMi  you  yet  wiiliin  the  harbor  there  are  (»  and  7  fathoms,  and  good  shelter. 

LlTTfiE  SANDV  HARBOR  is  a  (|uarter  of  a  milo  to  tho  southward  of  tho  Great  Little  Sandy 
lliiriior:  init\ou  \  ill  have  G  and  7  fathoms  water,  good  ground.    In  sailing  in,  you  shotild  Harbor. 
|)iiss  to  tho  northwar  I  of  a  low  rock  which  lies  at  tho  entrance.     You  may  readily  know 
lliis  harbor  liy  the  Bell  Island,  which  lies  S.  K.  i  K.  ono  mile  and  a  half  from  the  mouth 
(if  it,  and  N.  H.  by  N.  13  miles  from  the  wt^stern  j)oint  of  Morashoon  Island.     This  island 
liiis  a  remarkal)le  appearance,  resooibling  a  bell  with  tho  bottom  upwards. 

CLATISK  HARBOR.  A:c.— S.  W.  by  S.  from  Ihdl  Island  lie  the  Burgoe  Islands,  Clatise  Har- 
nnd  farther  soulhthe  White  Islands.  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  Burgoe  Islands,  nearlj'  5  bor. 
miles,  is  the  entrance  to  Clastiso  Harbor,  between  the  (Jreat  Isle  of  Valon  and  tho  main, 
Till!  shore  all  along  from  tho  Sandy  Harbors  is  steej)  to,  and  tho  passage  to  Clatise  threo- 
qiiiirters  of  a  mile  wide,  with  40  and  50  fathomswator  ;  but  tlio  cove  itself  is  very  narrow. 
Tim  best  anchorage  is  in  tho  western  branch,  which  is  a  mile  long,  in  from  10  to  17  fath- 
oms, good  ground.  TIkm'o  is  also  a  good  chamiid  from  the  southward,  between  great 
ami  Little  Valen  Islands  and  the  main,  with  'JO,  30,  and  50  fathoms  in  it.  Grammet 

URA  M  ME  R'S  ROCKS. — Those  are  a  cluster  of  low  rocks  just  appearing  above  wa-  Rocks. 


48 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Merasher.n 
liland. 


ter,  and  lyl.ig  E.  by  N.  i  N.  14  mile  from  tho  noitliorn  oiid  of  Viilnn  I»lnii(l.  There  ii  I 
piiHHiiuo  between  (mint  nnd  LittloJ/iilen  IsliintU,  but  it  in  iMiciiinbereil  with  Bevenil  rn<-L  *l 

i\ii:ka><hkkn  island. 


1  HMvenil  roclt, 
-ThiH  is  H  lonn  nurrow  iiiland,  ninninfr  nniiiy  in  tha  i " 


Red  liland. 


Long  Island 


Harbor 
Buffet. 


Muicle  Har- 
bor. 


Prague. 


La  Perche. 


Paradise 
Sound. 


Petit  Fort 
Harbor. 


reclion  of  the  cimiit  full  six  IciiKuen.     Olfitii  northern  slioreH  nr«  a  liir^je  chmturof  rock  I 
»nil  iMhinils,  denoininiiteil  tho  Kn^JKod  IidiindN.     At  itH  Boulh-western  piirt  'h  u  »nml|  bn'tl 
good  hiirbor,  with  from  6  to  10  fiilhoniH  wiitt<r  in  it.     To  ttiiil   into  thin  |)Ihc«,  you  uliouuf 
keep  the  gtiirboiird  shore  on  board,  in  onler  to  avoid  ii  Hunktm  rock  thntlieN  a  cmIiIhh  l«nirti 
offu  rn^Ked  rooky  point  on  tho  larboard  wide  K"i"S  '"•    Thoro  iH  aUo  n  Huiall  rluHrur  of 
rocks  lying  olf  the  Houth-euHtern  part  of  Murasheou,  three  cpiurtura  of  u  inilu  fronuhore- 
these  lie  l)i>tw)<i<ti  it  nnd  Heil  Island. 

liKD  ISLAND  is  hijih,  Iming  visible  11  or  12  leugues,  nnd  wenra  a  '•"•'ren  iippeiirnncn 
about  Ii  niili'H  long  nn«l  V-'i  broad.  Its  southern  point  benrs  N.  N.  W.  •lictani  li  mHj' 
from  I'lacentia  Koad.  and  E.  by  N.  l(j  leagues  from  Mortier  Plead.  On  tlie  easturii  8j,i„ 
of  the  island,  and  near  its  northern  end,  is  a  sninll  cove  or  bay,  tit  only  for  snndl  crnrt 

LON(»  ISLAND.— I Jirertly  N.  E.  from  Red  Island,  distant  7  miles,  lies  tlio  ninin 
body  of  Long  Island,  and  midway  between  them  is  Woody  Island,  o(f  the  .S.  W.  of  which 
are  two  small  rocks  above  water.  The  passage  between  l{ed  and  Woody  Islands  is  otlicf. 
wise  clenr  from  dang(>rs,  and  nearly  three  miles  wide:  that  between  Woody  and  I^ui,. 
Islands  is  2  miles  across,  both  have  deep  water.  Long  Island  is  irregularly  simptd,  imH 
indented  with  inlets.  Its  length  is  full  8  miles;  its  breadth  nowhere  much  above  on,, 
Olf  its  southern  end  is  Iron  Island,  and  a  small  rock  above  water  :  the  southern  point  \n). 
ing  formed  of  high  and  iteep  rucks.  From  Point  Lalina  to  this  end  of  Long  |h|iiii,| 
the  course  and  distance  are  N.  4  K.  44  leagues,  and  from  thence  to  Indian  Hiirbor.vvlrnh 
is  situated  on  the  eastern  side  of  Merasheon  Island.  N.  W.  by  W.4  miles.  To  outenlijj 
place,  you  nniy  go  on  either  side  of  a  snudl  island  at  the  entrance;  the  passage  is  hale,  hut 
the  only  anchorage  is  to  tho  westward  of  the  island,  between  it  and  JVl(M'asheen,  and  Jiur, 
the  ground  is  uncertain. 

llAlinoii  BUFFET. — On  the  eastern  side  of  Long  island,  about  n  league  from  Iron 
Island  is  Harbor  HulVet,  a  tolerably  good  harbor,  tho  entrance  to  which  is  narrow,  but  liuj 
1.'3  fathoms  water  in  it.  This  place  may  be  known  by  the  islands  that  lie  in  the  ninuih 
and  to  the  southward  of  it,  and  by  Harbor  Bullet  Island,  which  lies  E.4  S.  otu"  inilelVom 
the  entrance.  To  sail  into  tliis  harbor,  you  must  steer  to  the  northward  of  the  islaiidHat 
its  mouth,  and  being  within  them,  you  will  perceive  the  harbor  divide  into  two  branch^ 
one  running  westward,  the  other  northward.  The  best  atichumge  is  in  the  northern  arm 
in  1.5  fathoms  water, 

MUSCLE  HARBOR. — On  the  western  side  of  Long  Island,  nnd  about  4  miles  from 
its  southern  end,  is  Muscle  Harbor,  the  entrance  to  which  is  between  a  low  green  puitit 
on  the  starboard  side  and  a  small  island  on  your  larboard.  The  Harbor  is  nearly  two  inilij 
Jong  and  one  broad,  and  has  from  10  to  20  fathoms  water  within  it.  Vessels  bound  to 
this  |)lacc,  may  run  in  between  Woody  and  Iron  Islnnds,  from  the  southward,  or  between 
Long  and  IVleraslieen  Islands  from  the  northward  ;  but  in  the  latter  track  there  are  smne 
rocks  to  bo  guarded  against,  which  lie  nearly  mid-channel  between  the  nortliern  ends  of 
botl)  Islands.  There  aro  also  some  rocks  above  water,  to  \\w  uorth-tMistward  of  Long  Isl- 
and, cidled  the  Bread  and  Butter  Islands  ;  but  these  are  always  visible  and  steep  tu. 

PRKSQUE.— W.  N.  W.  ?  N.  distant  4  miles  from  the  south-western  point  of  Mern- 
sheen  Island,  lies  the  little  harbor  of  Presquo.  The  water  here  is  sufliciently  deep,  hut 
there  are  so  many  rocks  about  its  entrance,  tliat  it  is  rendered  thereby  ditlicult  of  aceps?, 
S.  W.  4  W.  two  miles  from  Pres(|ue,  is  the  Black  Rock,  nnd  a  quarter  of  a  mile  witliin 
this  is  a  sunken  rozk.  West  from  the  Black  Rock,  distant  2  miles,  is  the  Island  of  iMiir- 
ticot,  about  one  mile  in  length,  and  half  a  mile  broad.  Within  the  lilnck  Rock  and  Mur- 
ticot  Island  lie  the  Harbors  of  La  Perche  nnd  Little  and  Ureat  Paradise. 

LA  PERCHE  runs  in  to  the  northward  of  the  Black  Rock.  Its  entrance  is  difficult, 
and  there  is  uo  good  anchorage.  Little  Paradise  lies  to  the  westward  of  La  Perche.  nnd 
to  the  northwaid  of  the  east  point  of  Marticot  Inland.  The  only  safe  anchorage  is  in  a 
cove,  at  tho  head  of  the  hai'lior,  on  the  larboard  side  :  then  you  may  moor  to  tlio  sliiirp, 
and  lie  land-locked,  (ireat  Paradise  is  lit  oidy  for  boats  :  it  iiivi  lo  the  westward  of  Littlo 
Paradise.  Between  the  north-western  point  of  Martici  i  mi',  the  nniin  is  Fox  Island: 
betwe«?n  tlieso  islands  is  a  safe  passage  into  Paradise  Sonnii,  with  nine  fathoms;  but  ves- 
sels must  never  attemi't  going  between  l-'ox  Island  and  lhi>  main. 

PARADISE  SUL'Nl). — To  the  westward  of  Fox  Island,  idjout  1  inilo,  is  the  entrance 
to  Paradise  Sound,  extending  N.  E.  by  E.  4  leagues,  and  being  about  a  mile  broad,  Imv- 
ing  very  deep  water  throughout,  and  no  safe  anchonige,  except  at  its  head.     .lust  wiliiin 
the  sound,  on  its  eastern  side,  is  a  cove,  with    10  futlioms  water;  but  there  aro  -cvo 
rocks  above  water  in  it,  and  the  bottom  is  rocky,  so  that  you  cannot  well  ancdior  tli  re. 
passing  to  the  north-westward   of  Fox    Islanii,   there  is   a   sunken  rock  which  ni:ist 
avoideil.     To  tho  south-westward  of  Paradise  .Sound  lies  Long  Ishdid,  rutniiiig  W.  S.  W. 
4  S.  about  .'!4  miles  :   it  is  |)riiicipally  high  land,  making  in  several  peaks. 

PETIT  FORT  HARBOR.— One  milo  to  the  westward  of  Purudiso  Sound  lies  Petit 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


49 


,  Therein! 

I'y  "I  the  ,ii.L 

["•••..(•rook,! 

r "  """.11  butl 

r,,'''/'""8thl 
I".  HuHter  ofl 

I ''•""•  shore  J 
"PPoiirntico 

mull  criift. 
Iv'  "i"  ""•in 

Mi'Ihih  other.! 
'y,  "'"1  Long 
«tmpf(l,an,ll 
I'  fihovB  (,n,, 

"'"  point  I,,,.' 
'""K  IhIiiiiiI, 

"i-lmr.whith 
'<»oi"lt<ri||ij 
;•'  i»  HiH.,  but 
'■"i  mill  hera 

""from Iron  I 

■••I'W,  but  iiiis  I 

"  iIk'  niouth  i 
""' •"ilHlVom 
''">  isliiiid.Hiit 
*vo  liniiicliiig, 
'i"lln!rnnrniJ 

4  inilfsfrnm 
^  SM'fi)  pdirit  I 
•ly  two  mil,., 
lels  l)ouri(l  to 
1,  or  in'twccii 
ere  ine  suine 

of  Long  U\. 
tfi'P  to. 
iiit  of  Mera. 
'y  'If/')),  hut  I 
nil  of  iicces?, 
'»ilo  wiijiin 
mid  ol'Miir. 
L'k  iiiid  Miir. 

o  is  difficult, 
I'orche.  nnd 
jriifio  is  in  a 
u  the  siiure, 
ifd  of  Littlo 
"ox  Island: 
18 ;  but  ves- 

ho  ontrnnce 
hroiiil,  liHv. 
•'list  within 
iiro  .(no 
r  til  ro. 
Il  in:i!jt 
W.  S.  W. 

J  lies  Pi'iit 


If  rf  IInrl)or,  n  vory  K""d  inlet,  having  in  it  from  14  ti 
I  tnuii'i'  i)*  ■■■<*■***  "I      '^  (|uiirt«i-  of  it  niilo  .  iuu,  i"i 


IviiiiiiH'li  IIiirl)or  liiiM  no  ko'xI  iiticlioniKo 
CAl'l''  HOtiKK  llAliiioKlmiclom 


to  7  fiithoinn  wiitrr,  goixl  ground      Tlin 
•rl  lii<H  N.  K.  (iitttiitit  5  iiiiloH  from  the 
ITtii  I'oi'*'  "'  ''""K  I'^lond.  iind  N.  Iiy  K.  tjj  nido.    from  tliu  tiurtli  point  of  tlio  Hiimo. 
I!!l^,.„  iH  no  ilmig«r  in  going  in ;  and  tint  l)oat  iin.'iioriigo  iit  on  tlio  Ht.irbourd  or  imihIim-ii 
\  u  for  ^*-  ^'"  winilu  lieiivii  in  h  grout  hwoII  on  ttie  wt'Hltwn  ehuru,  wlion  it  bloWH  hiird. 
'     '    IIiirl)or  liiiM  no  good  iiticliorii) 

)ito  to  tim  WHBtwurd  of  Ciipo  Kogor,  whicli  is  a 


,|  I,  round,  Imrritn  liutul,  lying  N.  4  K.  :i>t  miJPH  from  tho  houiIi  point  of  Long  iHliind. 
iThcrt*  arit  Hoverul  low  rocliiiimd  iHlunds  lying  off  the  oiiHtitrn  point  of  the  onlritnco.  In  the 
Ikrliix''  "'  "  'I""''''"*  "'  '^  '"'''*  within,  on  tho  wostorn  Hido,  liuti  ii  hiiihII  iHliind,  to  tiio  noith- 
I  iriril  of  which,  hotwoon  it  nnd  ihu  miiin,  iH  ii  very  good  unchorngo  in  7  or  8  futhoiiiH  wu- 

or  fiirthor  up  in  (J  or  7  fiithomH. 
I    I'iRKAT  (J ALLOWS  HARBOR.— N.  N.  W  2  miles  from  tho  south  point  of  Long 

Miiiiil,  lit")  1'  snnill  groen  inliind,  whicli  hiiH  a  shual  all  round,  to  nearly  a  ciiblu'H  liMittth. 

iruin  ('i'^'^"  Isliind  N    N.  W.  '2i  mih^H,  lioH  Great  Oallowtt  Ilurbor  IhIuuiI,  which  \h  high. 

\',,,i„i>li<  iiKiy  P'i^>*  on  either  Hide  of  thix  itiland  into  Orent  (iallowtt  Harbor,  which  liot«  one 

III,.  II)  ilie  K.  N.  K.  of  the  ixland.  In  thia  harbor  ia  exceedingly  good  anchorage  in  7  fath- 
I  g„|„wiiti'r,on  the  Htarboard Hide,  JuHt  within  a  low  stony  point,  taking  cure  to  give  the  point  ii 
Liiiiilllii'i'h.  in  order  tr)  avoid  a  rock,  which  is  altornetely  covered  and  uncovered  with  the  tide. 
I    IJTTLK  (JALLOW.S  HARHOR  lies  close  round  to  the  eastward  of  Oreat  Gallows 

Ijarlior,  and  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  which  must  be  moored  to  the  shore.  A  ruck 
I  ,|K,ve  water  lies  at  the  entrance,  and  tho  two  liarbors  are  only  divided  by  a  narrow  neck 
Lflnml.    To  tho  north-westward  of  Great  (inllows  Harbor  are  Little  Harbor,  IJuy  do 

I'Y.iwu  and  Boat  Harbor:  the  iirst  of  these  ia  only  fit  for  boats.     Bay  do  L'Kou  runs  in  a 
I  |eiit:iie,  and  has  deep  water  all  the  way  up,  except  at  its  head,  where  there  appears  a 
^nily  licacli.     liiM'e  vessels  may  ride  in  3  fathoms. 

IIOAT  harbor  lies  round  the  western  point  of  Bay  do  L'Eau,  off  which  is  a  rock 
ul^ive  water;  this  harbor  runs  up  N.  E.  3  miles,  with  deep  water,  until  you  get  near  its 
furlhi'r  t-nd.  The  land  from  hence  luns  south-westward  to  Bane  Harbor;  this  lies  on  the 
iiiuiii  liiiid,  and  is  fronted  by  sev(M'al  islands,  tho  largest  of  which  is  called  Cross  Island,  be- 
ini; two  miles  in  length,  and  one  in  breadth.  The  other  islands  are  named  (iooseherry,  Pet- 
ticdiit,  ('ull  and  Jersey  man's  Islands,  and  are  situated  between  Cross  Island  and  the  main. 
liANK  HARBOR  is  a  good  place  for  small  vessels;  its  entrance  is  narrow,  but  when 
v(in  iiif  within  it,  there  is  sufficient  room  to  moor  with  3  fathoms  water.  There  are  good 
ciiannels  between  nil  these  islands,  through  which  vessels  may  pass  to  the  harbors  at  the 
oorihwm'd.  One  mile  nnd  three-quarters  S.  W.  from  Bane  Harbor  is  Rashoon,  too  shal- 
luff  for  any  vtissels;  nnd  about  tho  same  distance  from  Rashoon  is  Broad  Cove;  here  the 
«nchoiiine  is  exceedingly  good,  with  8  and  9  fathoms  water;  it  lies  to  the  north-eastward 
qI'ii  point  of  land,  which  juts  out,  and  is  named  Broad  Cove  Head. 

REU  HARBOR  lies  3  miles  from  Broad  Cove  Head,  and  is  a  good  harbor,  buttoo  open 
to  tho  southward;  in  it  are  17,  13,  and  9  fathoms.  S.  W.  from  hence,  distont  3i  miles, 
oud  situated  on  the  main,  is  John  le  Bny ;  in  your  passnge  to  which,  and  nearly  mid-chan- 
nel, Ix'tween  Flat  Islands  and  the  shore,  is  a  cluster  of  small  islands,  with  deep  water  nil 
round  them;  and  further  on,  near  the  land,  is  r  rock  above  water;  you  may  sail  on  either 
fiile  of  this ;  the  channel  between  it  nnd  the  land  is  narrow,  and  has  17  fathoms ;  that  ou 
tlie  eiistern,  or  outside,  has  1 8,  25,  nnd  2C  fathoms,  and  lends  directly  out  to  Placentin  Bny. 

AUDI  ERNE  ISLAND  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Cape  J  nde,  or  Middio  Isl- 
and, on  the  west  side  of  which  there  is  a  tolerably  good  liarbor.  At  about  a  ca!,!i  ^length 
from  Audierne  Island,  to  the  southward  of  the  harbor,  is  a  sunken  rock,  the  mark  for 
Bvuiihng  which,  in  coming  in  from  the  southwurd,  is  not  to  hnul  in  for  the  harbor  till  you 
open  n  roiuarkablo  green  point  on  the  southern  side  of  the  harbor.  The  best  anchorage  is 
on  tint  north  shore,  just  within  a  small  island.  A  s|)it  of  rocks  stretches  off  tho  green 
point  on  the  south  shore,  which  is  covered  at  high  water. 

Vessels  bound  for  Audierno  Harbor  may  pass  between  Cnpe  Judo,  or  Middle  Island,  nnd 
Audit  nie  IsImikI.  nnd  between  Crow  nnd  Patrick's  Islands,  which  nre  two  smnll  islnnds 
lying  olf  the  S.  W.  |)oiiit  of  Audieriie  Island.  Olf  the  enstern  point  of  Audierne  is  Ford's 
l^liiiiil.  to  the  west  of  which  is  n  sunkt^n  rock,  nbout  n  cable's  length  from  the  island,  nnd 
anolliuron  the  enstern  sid(!,  which  almost  always  breaks.  W.  i)y  N.  about  Ij  mile  from 
Kurd's  lsiiin<l  is  Green  Island,  having  a  little  itH;ky  islet  ofl' its  cMistern,  and  another  olf  its 
WPstiTii  end  ;  there  is  drep  water  all  round  it,  11  fathoms  close  to  the  rocky  islets,  70 
fiillionis  bclwecn  it  and  Ford's  Island,  73  and  U3  fnthoms  between  it  and  Long  Island,  and 
Elill  ilcepcr  water  tdwurds  the  (inllows  Hnrbors. 

TIIH  SADULK  BACK  ia  nn  islet  lying  K.  N.  E.  84  lengues  from  Corbin  Head;  E. 
by  N  from  iMorticr  West  Point,  and  E.  5  S.  3  lengues  from  John  the  Bay  Point.  Be- 
tween it  and  the  main  arc*  n  great  number  of  rocks  and  little  islands,  which  render  this 
part  of  tho  coast  very  dangerous.  A  chain  of  rocks  extends  N.  E.  by  E.  2  miles  from  tho 
Siiddio  Back. 

t'AI>E  JUDE,  or  iMIDDLE  ISLAND,  is  about  2i  miles  in  length.  2  in  breadth,  nnd 
lies  Ii  mile  north  of  tho  .Saddle  Buck.     Ou  ths  south  end  of  it  is  a  round  hill,  wbicb  is 


Cape  Roger 
Harbor. 


Great  Gal- 
Iowa  Harbor. 


LitlU  Gal- 
Iowa  Harbor. 


DoatHarbor. 


1 


Bane  Har- 
bor, 


Red  Harbor, 


Audierne  Isl- 
and. 


The  Saddle 
Back. 


CapeJudeor 
Mil/die  Itl- 
vnd. 


44 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


cnlled  the  Cape.    Between  this  island  nnd  the  main  are  a  cluster  of  islands  and  low  ro  U 
with  a  great  number  of  sunken  rocks  about  them,  called  the  Flat  Islands,  the  innerir 
'    '  of  which  lies  about  one  mile  from  the  main.  "* 

Wests}  miles  from  the  south-eastern  Flat  Island,  and  2  miles  to  the  N.  N.  W.of  Joi» 
the  Bay  Point,  lies  John  the  Bay,  in  which  there  is  tolerably  good  anchorage,  with  about! 
fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom. 
RockHarbor.      ROCK  HARBOR.— From  .John  the  Bay  Point  to  Mortier  East  Head,  the  beaiin 
and  distance  are  S.  W.  i  W.  8  miles.     Two  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  from  John  the  fin 
Point  lies  Rock  Harbor,  not  fit  for  shipping.     Between  lie  two  sunken  rocks,  ueiuiy  hul 
a  mile  from  the  shore. 
MortierBay.       MORTIER  BAY.— Two  miles  W.  S.  W.  from  Rock  Harbor  is  the  openiri<r  ;„ 
Mortier  Bay,  at  the  western  antrance  of  which  is  a  small  harbor,  called  Boboy,  ofoiilvl 
feet  water.     The  course  into  Mortier  Bay  is  N.  xN.  E.  for  about  2  miles;  and  in  it  tliepj 
are  from  50  to  70  fathoms  water,  the  land  on  each  side  being  high.    It  then  extends  wegti 
ward  about  2  miles,  and  is  nearly  2  miles  wide.     On  the  eastern  side,  at  about  3  mjuj 
from  the  entrance,  is  an  exceedingly  good  harbor,  called  Spanish  Room,  in  wliich  vesscj 
may  anchor  in  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water,  good  ground,  and  secure  from  all  winds     Tlierd 
is  not  the  least  danger  in  going  into  this  harbor,  only  giving  tlio  low  rocks  above  water,  od 
the  larboard  hand  at  the  entrance,  a  bertli  of  one  cabUf's  length.  '    | 

Little  Mot-        LITTLE  MORTIER  BAY.— Two  miles  and  a  lialf  from  the  entrance  of  Mortier  B„J 
tier  Bay.        lies  Crony  Ponit  and  Islands.     About  2  miles  fiuther  southward,  and  nearly  a  inilo  westJ 
ward  of  Mortier  East  Point  is  Little  Mortier  Bay,  at  the  entrance  of  which  is  a  round  is|J 
and,  called  Mortier  Island,  lying  one-third  of  the  distance  from  the  west  side;  it  is  bold  toT 
all  round,  and  may  be  piissed  on  either  side.     Close  to  the  first  point  beyond  tlio  islui.d,  ^^1 
the  larboard  side  going  in,  ia  another  little  island,  close  undci  tlio  iiind;  and  two  cnbles'l 
length  from  it,  in  a  direct  line  towards  the  i-jter  island,  is  a  sunken  rock,  on  which  thesei 
breaks  in  bad  weather,  which  is  the  only  danger  in  the  bay.     At  the  bottom  of  it,  1^  i|],|( 
from  Mortier  Island,  on  the  east  side,  is  a  cove,  called  Fox  Cove,  where  there  is  [\w  un.L 
chorage,  and  room  for  one  ship  to  moor  in  9  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  two  points  openl 
to  the  sea,  from  S.  S.  E.  to  S.  E.     On  the  west  su\o.  of  the  bay  is  the  harbor,  wiiidi  \\ 
small  and  narrow,  but  a  very  good  one  for  small  ships,  where  they  lie  moored  to  the  shore,] 
OTthe  starboard  point,  going  in.  is  a  rock,  which  is  always  covered  at  high  water.  I 

One  mile  and  a  half  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Mortier  East  Point  lies  Mortier  West  Hend  I 
one  mile  beyond  which  is  Iron  Island;  and  S.  E.  i  E.  2  leagues  from  Iron  Island,  ami  ^\ 
W.  i  VV.5  leagues  from  C«pe  Jude,  lies  the  Mortier  Bank,  tha  shoal  part  of  wiiicii  is  iiboutj 
one  league  over,  and  on  v»'hich  there  are  said  to  be  only  4  fathoms.     The  sea  breaks  hein. 
ily  on  it  in  blowing  weatlier. 
Iron  Island.        IRON  ISLAND  is  sinalland  high.     OtTitsS.  W.  jwint  is  a  rork  under  water.    Three 
quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it  is  Gregory's  Rock,  S.  i  W.  j  of  a  mile  tVoml 
winch  i?  Galloping  Atidrews;  and  S.  E.  by  E,  from  Iron  Island  is  the  White  Horse! 
of  8  fathoms.      A  West  S.  W.  crnrse  from  Marticot's  Island  wili  clear  all  these  dangers  I 
Orerit  and-         GREAT  AND  LITTLE  BURIN  HARBORS.— S.  W.  i  W.  from  Iron  Islan.CdisJ 
Little  Burin   tn;it  one  league,  is  the  S.  K.  point  of  Great  Burin  Islam!;  and  W.  N.  W.  li  n)ile  from  it| 
Harboas.         is  the  north  pnrt  of  Pardy's  Island.     On  the  main,  within  these  islands,  lie  the  harbdrsof 
Gr.-'at  ard  Little  Burin.     Vessls  bound  for  Burin  may  pass  on  either  side  of  Iron  Isiand, 
The  only  danger  in  passing  to  the  northward  is  tlie  leclge  called  the  Brandys,  which  iiliiio«t 
always  breaks;  they  lie  near  a  (|uarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  >,  'ow  rock,  aliDve 
water,  close  '.ifidi^r  the  land  of  .Mortier  West  Head.      By  keeping  Mortier  \V;wf  H,,.,,] 
open  to  ;''e  westward  of  Iron  Island,  you  will  avoid  (Jregory's  Rock,  on  which  arendyj 
fathers  water,  am!  which  almost  always  breiiks.     Vessels  may  pass  with  safety  between 
this  rock  and  Iron  Islaml.  by  niving  the  latter  a  berth  of  above  a  cable's  length. 
Galltyping  (JALLOPING  ANDREWS. — On  the  main,  within  I*ard\'s  Island,  are  two  remark- 

Andrews.  able  white  marks  in  the  rocks;  the  northernmost  of  these  bronglit  on  with  the  iiortli  part 
of  Pardy's  Island,  and  Iron  Island  N.  E.  i  N.  will  lead  on  the  Galloi)ing  Andrews,  uslioid 
wi  )i  ')  fathoms  water  on  it. 

The  White  Horse  is  a  shoal  with  8  fatlioms  on  it,  which  b(!ars  .S.  E.  by  E.  one  mile 
from  Iron  Island. 

The  Dodding  Rock  lies  about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  easternmost  part  of  Great 
Burin  Island 

(ireat  Burin  Island  is  about  2<i  miles  in  length,  lying  N.  N.  E  and  .^.  S.  W.  b-in:;  hj^h 
land.  Near  its  south  end  is  Cat  Island,  high  and  round,  lying  E.  N.  E.  nearly  1  inile.^ 
from  Corbin  Head. 

P"'roni  Corbin's  Head  to  .Shallosvay  Point  the  hearing  and  distance*  are  N.  V.   i  N.  \\ 
miles-     Between  tlieiii,  and  nearly  iti  the  sanii' direction,  lie  ("oriiin  and  Little  Biirin  Isl- 
ands, b)tli  hi<.'li  and  inntid,  not  more  thi^.i  a  ciljle's  length  from  the  shore. 
Shalioway  SH.iLLOWAY  ISLAND  lies  N.  >J.  W.  i  W.  one  mile  from  Cat  Island,  an.1  N.  K. 

Island.  by  E.  a  ()'iarter  of  a  mile  from   Little  Bnri'i   fslatid.     The  passage  info  Burin   Ilarburs, 

from  the  ai  uthward,  is  to  tho  westward  of  Shalioway  Island. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


45 


.  gailing  in,  take  care  to  give  Poor  Island  a  berth  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  when 

liji,  sbulloway  Island,  you  may  anchor  in  safety  between  it  and  Great  Burin  Island,  in 

Jl  12  to  18  tathoma.  The  best  anchorage  in  Great  Burin  Harbor  is  in  Ship  Cove.  The 

rse  up  to  it,  after  you  are  within  Nock  Point,  which  is  to  the  westward  of  the  Shal- 

,  Island,  is  N.  N.  E.  about  one  mile.   '*  -  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide.    In  sailing 

avoid  a  sutiken  rock  on  the  east  shore,  at 


li'eei)  the  west  shore  on  board,  in  orde 
kutliiilf  way  up,  and  near  a  cable's  length 


m  the  shore.    Directly  o!f  this  is  a  ren)ark- 


&  liole  in  the  rock,  on  the  same  side,  and  i  gully  in  the  land  frotii  t'jp  to  bottom,  on  the 
iprii  shore.     Another  rock,  with  2  hithons  on  it,  lies  above  a  ( 


LfiiBrii 


o's  length  to  the  S. 
ight,  joined  to  Great 


J^  jf  jjiirbor  Point,  which  is  round  and  grivjn,  and  of  a  moderatb 
jriii  Island  by  a  low,  narrow  sandy  neck. 

RLiRiN  BAY"  is  about  one  mile  N.  N.  E.  of  Little  Burin  Island.    It  is  clear,  and  about  Burin  Bay. 
-lie  wide  every  way.     Here  ships  may  occasionally  anchor,  and  lie  almost  land-locked. 
1  this  bay  are  two  islands,  one  called  Poor  Island,  low  and  barren  ;  the  other  lies  to  the 
Lihwnid,  before  the  entrance  of  Burin  Inlet,  and  is  high  and  woody. 

pL'RlN  INLET  may  be  entered  on  either  siiie  of  the  island.  It  extends  up  5  miles.  Burin  Inlet. 
1  little  within  the  entrance,  on  the  east  side,  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  is  a 
(k, covered  at  three-quarters  flood;  and  If  mile  from  the  entrance,  near  \he  middle,  is 
llier  rock,  to  the  westward  of  which  is  good  room  and  fair  anchorage,  ir,  from  7  to  12 
lAms-  There  are  15  fathoms  in  the  entrance,  and  in  the  middle,  two  miles  up,  15  to 
jjlutlioins;  and  thence  up  to  the  head  are  from  10  to  5  fathoms. 

the  eaiit  passage  in  is  between  Pardy's  Island  and  Iron  Island;  but  is  not  safe  without 
litoninianding  gale,  and  that  between  the  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  E. 

I  (SORBIN  HARBOR  is  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Corbin  Head,  and  is  a  good  Corbin  Har- 
toborfor  small  vessels.  A  quarter  of  a  mile  eastward  from  this  harbor,  and  two  cables'  tor. 
Lth  fro'"  fl'8  shore,  is  a  sunken  rock,  of  5  or  6  feet  water,  on  which  the  sea  braks  in  bad 
ireiitlifii''  Vessels  bound  for  this  harbor  must  also  avoid  a  shoal  of  two  fathoms  water, 
Ifliicli  lies  E.  S.  E.  from  the  south  point  of  the  entrance,  distant  half  a  mile.  The  best 
iprboi'Hge  is  in  the  north  arm,  and  about  half  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  opposite  a  cove 
jnthestnrboard  side. 

from  Corbin  Head,  which  is  high  bluff  land,  to  Small  Point,  the  lowest  hereabout,  the 
(Ourseiii:d  distance  are  \V.  S.  W.  2i  miles;  and  from  Small  Point  to  Sauker  Head,  W. 
ij.i  miles.  There  are  inany  head-lands  between,  which  form  coves,  but  alford  no  shel- 
ler,  The  coast  is  clear  of  rocks,  and  there  are  30  fathoms  water  close  .to  the  shore;  but 
J  little  to  the  S.  WoL'tvvard  of  Sauker  Head  there  is  a  small  rock  under  water.  It  lies 
(lose  ill  with  the  land. 
Kiom  Sauker  Head,  which  is  a  high  hill  in  the  shape  of  a  sugar-loaf,  to  Cape  Chapeau 
Roiiee,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  west,  3  miles ;  between  lie  the  harbors  of  Great  and 
Lillli!  St.  Lawrence. 

LIT'I  LK  ST.  LAWRENCE.— The  harbor  of  Little  St.  Lawrence  is  the  first  to  the  Little  St. 
westward  of  Sauker  Head.     To  fail  in  you  must  keep  the  west  shore  on  beard,  to  avoid  a  Lawrence. 
iiinken  rock  which  lies  a  little  without  tlie  |)oint  of  the  peninsula,  which  stretches  olffrom 
lljieeast  side  of  the  harbor.     The  anchorage  is  above  the  peninsula,  (wliich  shelters  i   ♦"rem 
lljesea  winds,)  in  3  or  4  fathoms  water,  a  fine  sandy  bottom.     Ships  may  anchor  without 
[the  peninsula,  in  12  fathoms,  good  ground ;  but  this  ])lace  is  open  to  S.  S.  E.  winds. 

(iRKAT  ST.  LAWllENCi"'..— The  harbor  of  (ireat  St.  Liiwrgnce,  which  is  the  Great  St. 
Imstt'rninost,  is  close  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Chapeau  Rouge.     To  sail  in,  you  should  Lawrence. 
[if  careful  with  westerly,  particularly  with  S.W.  winds,  not  to  approach  too  near  the  Hat 
iMiiunlain,  in  order  to  avoid  the  fUitV.s  and  eddy  winds  under  the  high  land.     There  is  no 
limscr  l)ut  what  is  very  near  the  shore.      The  course  in  is,  first,  N.N.W.  till  you  open 
itiii'  upper  part  of  the  harbor,  then  N .  i  W.     The  best  anchorage  for  large  shifjs  is  before 
lariive,  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor,  in  13  tiilhoms  ^ifater.     A  little  nlwve  Blue  Beach 
JPiiiiit,  which  is  the  first  on  the  west  side,  you  may  lie,  only  having  two  points  open,  and 
liniivanclior  any  where  i)etween  this  point  and  the  point  of  Low  Beach,  on  the  same  side, 
Incur  the  head  of  the  hiirbor,  observing  th.ii,  close  to  the  west  shore,  the  ground  is  not  so 
jiiixl  us  on  the  other  side.   Wishing  vessels  commonly  lie  at  the  head  of  the  harbor  above 
jtlii' beacli,  sheltered  from  all  wimls. 

Giinlcii  Bank,  whereon  are  from  7  to  \C>  fiithoms  water,  lies  about  half  a  mile  off  Little 
\Su  Lawrence,  with  Blue  Beach  Point  on  with  the  east  point  of  CJreat  St.  Lawrence. 

FROM  CHAPEAU  ROUGE  TO  CAPE  RAY. 

FKRHVLAND  HKADli(>s  W.  S.W.  onc!  mile  from  Cape  C'iinpeau  Rouge.     It  is  a  Ferryland 
I'lliriicky  isliiiiil,  just  separated  from  the  main,  and  with  Chapeau  Rouge,  are  infallible  Head. 
Iiil'li'cts  to  point  (tut  the  liarl)or  of  St.  Lawrence. 

LAUN   BAY. — W.  N.W.  f<  miles  from  Kenvliind  Head,  lies  the  point  of  Laun,  from  Laun  Bay. 
I  Hiifiiico  the  land  turns  to  the  iiorllnvaiil,  mid  t'orins  the  Bays  of  Lmimi.   Here  are  two  small 
liiii'is,  called  (ireat  and  Little  Laun.      Lilllf  Laiiii  is  tin*  eMstiMiiiiiost,  lies  (ipiMi  to  tiie  S. 
/.  wiuds,  an<l  therefore  is  no  place  to  anrhor  in.     (ireat  Laun  riiii«  in  N .  K.  by  N.  two 


46 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Laun  Isl- 
ands. 


Taylor's 
Bay. 

Point  Aux 
Gaul. 


St.  Pierre,  or 
St.  Peter's 
Island. 


Lighthouse. 


Lighthouse. 

Island  of  Co- 
lumbier. 


Oreen  Island 


Langley,  or 
Little  Mique- 
Ion. 


Great  Mifjue- 
lon. 


miles ;  is  near  half  a  mile  wide,  and  has  from  14  to  3  fathoms  water.  In  sailing  in  u 
direful  to  avoid  a  sunken  rocit  which  lies  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  off  the  east  noind 
The  best  anchonige  is  on  the  east  side,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  head,  in  6  and  5  fathJ 
oms,  tolerably  good  bottom,  and  open  only  to  the  S.  and  S.  by  W.  winds,  which  canj 
a  great  swell,  as  the  liead  of  this  place  is  a  bar  harbor,  where  boats  can  ascend  at  h  ll 
tide,  and  find  conveniences  for  fishing,  with  both  wood  and  water.  '' 

LAUN  ISLANDS  lie  off  the  west  point  of  Laun  Bay,  not  far  from  the  shore;  tU 
westernmost  and  outermost  of  which  lies  W.  N.  W.,  westerly,  14  miles  from  Feriylonj 
Head.  Nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  this  island  is  a  rock,  whereon  thl 
sea  breaks  in  very  bad  weather.  There  are  other  sunken  rocks  about  these  islands  h  I 
not  dangerous,  being  very  near  the  shore.  '      i 

TAYLOR'S  BAY  lies  open  to  the  sea,  about  4  miles  to  the  westward  of  Lnun  IgiJ 
ands.     Olftlie  cost  point  are  some  rocks,  near  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,        j 

POINT  AUX  GAUL  is  a  low  narrow  point  of  laud,  which  stretches  out  a  little  to  thJ 
westward  of  Taylor's  Bay.  A  rock  lies  off  it  above  water,  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  cnjM 
Gaul  .Shag  Rock,  which  bears  from  Ferryland  Head  W.  N.W.  i  W.  64  leagues :  tliere  ari 
14  fathoms  close  to  the  off  side  of  it,  but  some  rocks  on  its  inside.  From  Point  Aux  Gaul 
Shag  Rock  to  the  Lanielin  Islands,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.W.  by  W.  one  leasueJ 
Between  is  the  Bay  of  Lamelin,  which  is  unfit  for  shipping,  being  shallow,  and  havini 
several  rocks  and  islands  about  it.  The  river  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay  abounds  with  SKlinonJ 

Near  tlio  south  point  of  the  westernmost  Lamelin  Island  is  a  rock  high  above  water] 
called  Lamelin  Shag  Rock.  From  Lamelin  Shag  Rock  to  Point  Muy  the  distance  jg  9I 
miles.  Between  lie  the  Lamelin  Ledges,  which  are  very  dangerous,  some  of  tliem  bein» 
3  miles  from  the  land.  To  avoid  them,  in  the  day  time,  you  should  not  bring  the  LnniJ 
elin  Islands  to  the  southward  of  E.  S.  E.  until  Point  May  bears  N.  E.  by  N.  from  youl 
you  may  then  steer  northward,  between  Point  May  and  Green  Island,  with  safety.  Byl 
niglit.  a|)proach  no  nearer  than  in  30  fathoms  water.  '■ 

Rkmakk. — ^iariuers  who  navigate  this  part  of  the  coast,  will  do  well  by  oljservinjl 
the  appearance  of  the  land,  for  all  that  part  of  Chapeau  Rougue  and  Laun  is  very  high! 
and  hilly-close  to  the  sea;  from  Laun  Islands  to  Lamelin  it  is  only  moderately  high;and| 
from  Lamelin  to  Point  May  the  land,  near  the  shore,  is  low,  with  beaches  of  sand,  whil 
inland  it  becomes  mountainous. 

ST.  PIERRE,  or  ST.  PETER'S  ISLAND.— The  island  of  St.  Pierre  lies  131 
leagues  W.  by  N.  from  Cape  Chapeau  Rouge.  It  is  about  4  leagues  in  circumference  I 
and  pretty  high,  with  a  craggy  'irokeii,  uneven  surface.  On  coming  from  the  westward'! 
Point  Cronier.  which  is  the  >.  il.  point  of  the  island,  makes  in  a  round  hummock, 
a  small  islinid,  separated  fron)  St.  Pierre.  A  little  to  the  N.  E.  of  Point  Cronier  lie  tlireel 
smal/  inds,  the  innermost  of  which  is  the  largest,  and  called  Dog  Island  ;  within  it  are! 
the  road  and  inirl)or  of  St.  Pierre.  The  harbor  is  small,  and  has  from  20  to  12  feot  wa-l 
ter  :  but  there  is  a  bar  across  the  entrance,  with  only  (i  feet  at  low  water,  and  12  or  14 1 
at  high  water.  The  roail  lies  on  the  west  side  of  Dog  Island,  and  will  i;dmit  ships  of  any  I 
burthen,  in  ri,  10,  or  12  fathoms  water.  The  best  anchorage  is  on  the  north  side;  buti'iil 
general  it  is  rocky,  anl  exposed  to  the  N.  E.  winds.  Be  cautious,  in  going  out,  of  soniel 
sunken  r  ;-ks  wliich  lie  about  a  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  Boai  Island,  which  is  the  eastern aiost I 
of  the  three  islands  above  mentioned.  This  is  the  only  danger  about  St.  Peter's,  bull 
what  lies  very  near  the  shore. 

On  Cannon  Point,  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  inner  hnrl)or,  there  is  n  iifilit. 
house  containing  a  fixed  light,  which  is  lit  from  the  1st  of  May  to  the  Ifith  of  November.  I 
With  this  light  bearing  W.  i)y  N.,  or  W.  i  N.  about  two  cables'  length  distant,  tliere  jsl 
ancliorage  in  .jj  and  (i  fathoms  water 

A  fixed  light  of  the  second  class,  210  feet  high,  is  on  Gallantry  He, id,  the  south  side  of  I 
the  Islind  of  St    Peter. 

THE  ISL.\ND  OF  COLU.MBIER  lies  very  near  to  the  N.  E.  point  of  St.  Pierre.  I 
It  is  rather  high.     Bi-tween  them  is  a  passage  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  with  12  liithoins 
water.     On  the  north  side  of  the  island  is  a  rock,  called  Little  Colunibier;  and  abuutoiiol 
quarter  of  'i  mile  E.  N.  E.  of  it  is  a  sunken  rook,  with  two  fathoms  on  it. 
,     tiRKEN   ISLAND  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  circuit,  and  low.     It  lies  E.N.  I 
E.  about  .")  miles  from  St.  Pierre,  and  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  channel  between  itninl  1 
Point  May,  in  Newfmindland.     On   its  south  side  are  several  rocks,  above  and  under 
water,  extending  1  |  miltt  to  the  W.  S.  W. 

L.\N(iLKV,  or  LITTLE  MiqUELON.— Langley  Island  lies  to  the  N.  W.  of  St. 
Pierre,  with  a  passage  of  about  2i  miles  wiile  between,  free  from  danger.      It  is  aliout  8 1 
lea<rues  in  circuit,  of  a  moderate  and  equal  heicht,  excepting  at  (he  north  end,  wliiiii  is  a 
low  point,  with  sand  hills;  olfwhich,  on  both  sides,  it  is  a  llat  a  little  way  ;  but  evei  ;•  oilier  | 
part  of  the  island  is  bold  to.    There  is  anchornge  on  the  N.  E.  siile  of  the  island,  near  Seiil 
Cove,  in  .5  or  n  fitlioins,  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  sand  hills,  on  a  fine  sandy  l)i)ttoi;!. 

(jKKAT  MK^UELON. — From  the  north  point  of  Langley  to  the  south  point  of 
Miquelon,  the  disluncu  is  scarcely  one  mile,  and  the  depth  of  water  betwuou  iu  2  luthonis,  | 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


47 


liaueloQ  is  4  leagues  in  length  from  north  to  south,  and  is  about  5  miles  in  breadth  at  the 
jjjjgtpnrt.     The  middle  of  the  island  is  high  land,  called  the  High  Lands  of  Dunne;  but 
Ijgwn  ^y  '''^  shore  it  is  low,  excepting  Cape  Miquelon,  which  is  a  lofty  promontory  at  the 
lijrtbern  extremity  of  the  island. 
On  tli8  S   E.  side  of  the  island  is  the  little  Harbor  of  Dunne.     It  is  abar  harbor,  admit- 

Mifisbing  shallops  at  half  flood,  but  no  way  calculated  for  shipping. 
Miqueluii  Rocks  stretch  off  from  the  eastern  point  of  the  island,  under  the  hi^li  land,  1^ 

nile  to  the  eastward.  Some  are  above,  and  some  under  water.  The  outermost  are 
,  ,59  water,  and  there  are  12  fathoms  water  close  to  them,  with  18  and  20  a  mile  off. 
L  J),  If  £.  about  ii  miles  from  these  rocks,  lies  Miquelon  Bank,  on  which  are  6  fathoms 

Jliquelon  Road,  which  is  large  and  spacious,  lies  towards  the  north  end,  and  on  the  east 

jj of  the  island,  between  Cape  Miquelon  and  Chapeau,  which  is  a  very  remarkable 
M\ii  mountain  near  the  shore,  off  which  is  some  sunken  rocks,  at  the  distance  of  about  a 
I  inBrter  of  a  mile;  but  every  where  else  it  is  clear  of  danger.  The  best  anchori.ge  is  in  6 
It  fathoms,  near  the  bottom  of  the  road,  online  sandy  bottom;  but  there  you  lie  exposed 
fp  easterly  winds. 

The  Seal  Rocks,  two  'n  number,  are  above  water,  and  lie  about  14  league  off  from  the 
north-west  side  of  Miquelon.     The  passage  between  them  and  the  island  is  very  safe,  and 
I  itere  are  14  or  15  fathoms  water  within  a  cable's  length,  all  round  them. 

Point  Mny  has  a  rocky  islet  at  its  point,  and  from  thence  the  land  turns  N.  N.  E.  to- 
wards Dtinlzick  Cove  and  Point,  and  thence  E.  N.  E.  towards  Fortune  Head. 

FORTUNE  BAY,  &c. — From  Point  May  to  Pass  Island,  the  bearing  and  distance  Fortune 
lireN.  i  E.  12  leagues.     Between  them  is  the  entrance  to  Fortune  Bay,  which  is  about  Bay. 
'  jior  23  leagues  deep  ;  ...id  in  which  are  numerous  bays,  harbors,  and  islands. 

BRUiNKT  ISLAND. — The  Island  of  Brunei  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  Brunei 
I  into  Fortune  Bay;  it  is  above  5  miles  in  length,  two  in  breadth,  and  of  moderate  height;  Island. 
tlie  eastern  part  appears,  in  some  points  of  view,  like  islands.     On  its  east  side  is  a  bay, 
ffberein  there  is  tolerable  anchorage  for  ships,  in  14[or  IG  fathoms  water,  sheltered  from 
joutherly  nnii  wfattrly  winds.     In   the  bottom  of  the  bay,  at  about  n  quarter  of  a  mile 
jrom  th"  i'l     ",  Jme  rocks,  which  must  be  avoided.     Opposite  to  this  bay,  on  the 

1  joutli-west  ^   .'  aland,  is  a  small  cove,  with  6  fathoms  water.     The  islands  lying  off 

(lie  west  one!  Ill  tJrunet.  to  the  southward,  are  called  the  Little   Brunets,   which,    with 
Briiiiet,  iniiy  be  appioiichoii  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  all  round. 

Tiie  Piiito  rsiandsare  three  rocky  islets,  of  a  moderate  height,  fhe  nearest  of  which  lies 
\V,  S.  W.  one  I(!iif;ue  from  tho  west  end  of  Great  Brunet.  The  southernmost  is  about  2 
Diile9  farther  oil",  and  bears  fi'om  Cape  Miquelon  E.  i  S.  3']  leagues;  and  in  a  direct  line 
between  Point  May  and  I'ass  Island,  17  miles  from  tho  fornmr,  and  19  miles  from  the 
latter.  E.  S.  E.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  (Jreat  Pfate,  (which  is  the  northernmost,) 
isa  sunken  roi'k,  whereon  the  sea  breaks,  and  this  is  the  only  danger  nboutthem.  There 
are  toveral  strong  and  irregular  settings  of  the  tides  or  currents  about  the  Plate  and  Bru- 
net IsIkhu's,  v/hich  seem  to  have  no  dependency  on  the  moon,  and  the  course  of  the  tides 
on  tli«  coast. 

,SA(i()N.\  ISLAND,  which  lies  N.  E.  21eaguesfrom  tho  east  end  of  Brunet,  is  about  Sagona 
a  mile  across  each  way,  of  a  moderate  height,  and  bold  to  all  round ;  on  its  western  side  Island, 
there  is  a  small  creek,  admitting  fisliing  slialiops  ;  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  to  this,  is 
a  sunken  rock,  which  occasions  it  to  be  difficult  of  access,  except  in  very  fine  weather  :  a 
Bjiui  'Mink  surrounds  this  islan  '.,  running  westerly  full  7  miles,  upon  which  are  14, 17,  and 
iO  fiiibonis  water. 

POINT  MAY  is  tho  s  jihi  •!.  extremity  of  Fortune  Bay,  and  the  S,  W.  extremity  of  Point  May. 
this  part  of  Newfoundlii  ,  \  ■     '  "i  y  be  known  by  a  great  black  rock,  nearly  joining  to  the 
pitch  uf  the  point,  and  s        T  i  ij;:  iiighiM'  than  the  land,  which  makes  it  look  like  a  black 
buniinoi;k  on  the  point.      '     :.  .-d'    <  (piarter  of  a  mile  directly  off  from  this  black  rock  are 
three  sunken  rocks,  im  whici    t'  e  s.  a  always  breaks. 

DANTZlc;  COVES.— N.  uy  K   1.?  of  a  mile  from  Point  May,  is  Little  Dantzic  Cove  :   Danlzic 
and  2  miles  faither  is  (Jrcat  Dantzic   Cove.     From  Dantzic  Point,  (which  is  the  north  Coves. 
point  of  the  coves,)  to  Fortune  Iload.  tho  bearing  and  distance  are  E.  N.  E.  2i  leagues; 
anil  thence  to  the  town  of  Forlun.s  li  mile  S.  E.  by  E.     This  is  a  fishing  village,  and  the 
mini  where  tlii>  ships  lie  has  from  (!  to  10  fathoms  water,  quite  exposed  to  nearly  half  the 
compass;  if  lies  S.  by  W.  frr)m  the  east  end  of  Brunet.     To  the  N.  N.  Westerward  of 
Dmilzic  I'oiiil  is  the  long  narrow   bunk  of  .lerseyman's,  with  24  and  25  fathoms  over  it, 
extending  f'runi  ai)rtMist  of  the  point  in  the  direction  of  tln^  Plate  Islaiids. 

SHIP  ('l)VH. — The  Cape  offJrand  Bank  is  high,  and  lies  one  league  E.  N.  E.  from  Ship  Cove. 
Fiiitune.     To  the  t  .    ward  of  this  cape  is  .Ship  Cove,  where  tluMO  is  good  anchonige  for 
s^liippinu  in  f^  oi-  1(*      ';  .nns  water,  slieltorod  from  south,  west,  and  north-westerly  winds. 
(iiHuil  Bank  lies  ^    '.       alf  a  leaj/ue  from  tho  cape,  and  is  a  lishing  village,  where  there  is 
no  security  lor  shippii;,.  and  the  entrance  is  barred. 

From  the  cape  of  the  Grand  Bank  to  the  Point  Enrageo  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 


48 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Bay  L' Ar- 
gent. 
HarborMUli 


distant  8  leagues.  The  coast  between  forms  a  circular  bay,  in  which  the  shore  generallv 
is  low,  with  several  sandy  beaches,  behind  which  are  bar  harbors,  tit  only  for  boats  nf 
which  the  princii)al  is  Great  Garnish,  lying  4i  Ibagues  from  the  cape  of  Grand  Bank',  it 
may  be  known  by  several  rocks  above  water,  lying  before  it  at  two  miles  distance  from 
the  shore.  The  outermost  of  these  is  steep  to  ;  but  between  them  and  the  shore  aresev- 
erai  dangerous  sunken  rocks.  To  the  eastward,  and  within  tlieso  rocks,  is  Frenchman's 
Cove,  where  small  vessels  sometimes  run  in  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  tolerably 
well  sheltered  from  the  sea  winds.  This  is  a  convenient  place  for  the  cod  fishery.  'f(,g 
passage  in  is  to  the  eastward  of  the  rocks  that  appear  the  highest  above  water.  IJetween 
them  and  some  other  lower  rocks  lying  oil  to  the  eastward  of  the  east  point  of  the  cove 
there  is  a  sunken  rock  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  |)ass»go,  which  you  must  be  aware  of 
The  shore  is  bold  all  the  way  from  Point  May  to  Cape  of  Grand  Bank,  there  bcsing  lo  or 
12  fathoms  within  2  cables'  length,  and  30  or  40  nt  a  mile  olf.  Between  the  latter  anj 
Great  Garnish  the  water  is  not  so  deep,  and  ships  may  anchor  any  where  in  8  or  10  fn, 
thorns  water,  sheltered  only  from  the  land-winds. 

From  Poini  Enrages  to  the  head  of  the  bay,  the  course  is,  first,  E.  N.  E.  k  E.  3  lenguea 
to  Grand  Jervey  ;  then  E.  i  N.  7i  leagues  to  the  head  of  the  i)ay.  The  land  in  general 
along  the  south  side  is  high,  bold  to,  and  of  uneven  appearance,  with  hills  and  valleys  uf 
various  extent,  the  latter  mostly  covered  with  wood,  and  having  many  freshwater  rivulets. 
BAY  L'ARGENT. — Seven  leagues  to  the  eastwardof  Point  Enragee  is  thel5ayL'Ar- 
gent,  where  there  is  anchorage  in  30  or  40  fathoms  water,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

HARBOR  MILLE'. — The  entrance  to  Harbor  MilltJ  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  east 
point  of  L'Argent.  Before  this  harbor,  and  the  Bay  L'Argent,  is  a  remarkable  rock 
which,  at  a  distance,  appears  like  a  shallop  under  sail.  Harbor  Mdio  branches  into  two 
arms,  one  lying  to  the  S.  E.  the  other  to  the  east:  at  the  upper  part  "f  both  are  good 
anchorages.  Between  this  harbor  and  Point  Enragee  are  several  bar  harbors,  or  siniiH 
bays,  with  sandy  beaches:  but  the  'u-  all  along  the  coast  is  very  deep.  You  may  safely 
anchor  any  where,  but  it  must  be  ve  /  iie  shore. 

Cape  Mille  lies  N.  E.  i  E.  one  loag^  vi  the  Shallow  Rock  above  mentioned,  and 
near  3  leagues  from  the  head  of  Fortune  j  ;  it  is  n  high,  reddish,  barren,  rocky  puiut, 
The  width  of  Fortune  Bay  at  Cape  Mille  does  not  much  exceed  half  a  league ;  but  niune- 
diately  below,  it  becomes  twice  as  wide,  by  which  the  capo  nniy  readily  be  known;  and 
above  this  cape  the  land  on  both  sides  is  high,  with  steep  craggy  clitls.  The  head  uf  tiie 
bay  is  terminated  by  a  low  beach,  behind  which  is  a  largo  pond,  or  bar-harbor,  lit  only 
for  boats.  In  this,  and  in  all  the  bar  harbors  between  this  and  the  (jirand  Bank,  are  con- 
venient places  for  building  stages,  and  good  beaches  for  drying  fish,  fitted  to  accomnioiliite 
numerous  boats. 
Grand  U  GRAND  LE  PIERRE  is  a  good  harbor,  situated  on  the  north  side  of  the  ba),  Imifa 

Pierre,  league  from  the  head.     The  entrance  cannot  lie  seen  until  you  are  abreast  of  it.     Tlieio 

is  no  danger  in  going  in,  and  you  may  anchor  in  any  depth,  from  6  to  4  tatlioms,  sheltered 
from  all  winds. 
English  Hat-    ENGIjISH  HARBOR  lies  n  little  to  the  westward  of  Grand  Pierre ;  and  to  the  west- 
bor.  ward  of  English  Harbor  is  the  Little  Bay  de  L'Eau,  both  of  which  are  small,  and  only 

fit  for  boats. 
New  Harbor.      NEW  HARBOR  is  situated  "opposite  to  Cape  Mille,  and  to  the  westward  of  the  Hay 
de  L'Eau;  it  is  a  small  inlet,  and  has  good  anchorage  on  tho  west  side,  in  from  H  to  j 
fathoms,  sheltered  from  S.  W.  winds. 
The  Harbor       THE   HARBOR  FExMME  lies  half  a  league  to  the  westward  of  New  Harbor;  it  is 
Femme.  narrow,  and  has  in  it  20  and  23  fathoms;  before  its  entrance  is  an  islet,  near  to  which  are 

some  rocks  above  water;  one  league  to  tho  westward  of  Harl)or  Femme  is  Brewer's  Hole, 
fit  only  for  boats;  before  this  cove  is  also  a  small  island  near  the  shore,  and  some  rucks 
above  water. 
Harbor  La         HARBOR  LA  CONTE  is  situated  one  mile  to  tho  westward  of  Brewer's  Hole ;  hcf.jre 
Conte,  this  are  some  islands,  the  outer  one  is  called  the  Petticoat  Island,  the  inner  Smock  Island, 

there  are  also  two  smaller  ones  between  these,  and  a  sunken  rock  or  two;  the  best  pas- 
sage in  is  on  tho  west  side  of  tho  outer  island,  and  between  the  two  larger  ones;  so  soon 
us  you  begin  to  open  the  harbor,  keep  tho  inner  island  close  on  board,  to  avoid  some  sunken 
rocks  that  lie  nc'ar  a  small  island,  which  yon  will  discover  between  the  N.E.  point  of  ilie 
outer  island  and^tlie  opposite  point  on  the  main  :  there  is  also  another  rock  which  ap|iears 
nt  low  water,  and  lies  higher  up  on  the  side  of  the  main;  and  wluii  you  get  beyond  tliese 
dangers,  you  may  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  cliaiiiKd,  and  will  soon  open  a  tine  spiuioiis 
harbor,  wherein  you  may  anchor  in  any  (ie|)tli,  from  ti  to  Ki  fathonis  water,  on  a  bottom 
of  sand  and  mud,  shut  in  from  all  winds  'J'o  the  eastward  of  the  outer  island  there  is  a 
email  cove,  fit  for  small  vessels  and  iioals,  and  otherwise  convenient  lor  lln'  (islieries. 

LONG  HARBOR  lies  4  miles  to  the  westward  of  Harbor  La  Coiite,  and  N.  K.  by  i;. 
distant  ft  leagues  from  Point  Enragee.  It  may  be  known  liy  (lull  Ishiiid,  which  lies  at  its 
mouth,  and  a  small  rock,  which  lies  hall  a  mile  willioiit  the  ishiiid,  and  has  the  a|)|iear- 
ance  of  a  small  boat;  there  is  a  passage  into  this  harbor  on  each  sidt;  of  this  island;  tho 


Long  Har- 
bor. 


■■ 


mmmmmm 


3  leuguea 
''  "">  Senernl 
(i  valleys  of 
ter  rivulets, 

'J5»yL'Ar- 

iiuis. 

J  of  the  east 
■kiible  rock, 
139  into  two 
li  are  good 
•rs.  or  siniilj 
I  may  sulely 

itloned,  and 
■ocUy  puiut. 

I'ut  inline. 
inowti;  niid 

'  i;iii]  oltiii. 
[bi»r,  lit  only 
Ilk,  lire  coti- 
tcomuiociale 

?  I'Q),  liall'a 
f  it.  Thero 
8,  eheltoied 

to  tlio  West- 
ill,  anil  only 

1  of  tllO  Hiiy 

from  H  to  0 

[iirbor;  it  is 
J  which  iiri! 
wcr's  Hole, 

80H11)    IDiIvS 

lolo;  Iji'fcjre 

lock   Islllllll, 

10  hent  pas- 
t's;   so  fdOll 

jiuo  suiiiien 
point  of  iliu 
ich  ajipcais 
nyoiid  llicse 
no  wpmioiis 
on  II  Ijiittuiii 
il  tlit'io  i.s  a 
lu'i'ics. 
M.  K.l.yK. 

■ll   11(13  ill  ItB 

tho  up|Har- 
i.slanil;  tliu 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  49 

western  one  is  the  broader  of  the  two  :  nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  channel,  a  little  out- 
side of  the  island,  is  a  ledgo  of  rocks,  wheroon  are  two  fathoms  wiiter :  and  a  little  within 
the  island,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  others,  2  cabk-s'  lergth  from  the  shore:  they  lie  off 
two  biindy  coves,  and  are  visible  at  low  water.     Long  Hiirbor  runs  5  leagues  up  into  the  «.   / 

country,  but  the  only  anchoring  place  is  in  Morgan's  Cove,  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the 
hnrl)')r,  about  2  miles  within  Gull  Island,  in  15  fathoms  water,  unless  you  run  above  the 
Narrows  :  there  is  a  salmon  fishery  at  the  head  of  the  bay. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  Long  Harbor,  is  Hare  Harbor,  fit  for  small  vessels  only. 
Two  miles  to  the  northward  of  Hure  Harbor,  is  Mai  Buy,  having  very  deep  water,  ex- 
tending north-easterly  about  5  miles,  and  having  no  anchorage  except  at  its  furthest  end  : 
to  the  westward  of  Mai  Bay,  near  the  shore,  lie  the  Rencontre  Islands,  the  westernmost 
(if  which  is  the  largest,  has  a  communication  with  the  main  at  low  water.  In  and  about 
this  island  is  shelter  for  small  vessels  and  boats. 

HKLLE  HARBOR  lies  4  miles  N.  W.  by  N.  from  the  westernmost  Rencontre  Isl-  Belle  Har- 
aiul ;  the  passage  into  it  is  on  the  western  side  of  the  island,  and  so  soon  as  you  have  pass-  bor. 
ed  tiio  iilands  you  will  open  a  small  cove,  on  the  east  side,  where  small  vessels  can  anchor, 
but  liiigi'  vessels  must  run  up  to  the  head  of  the  harbor  and  anchor  in  20  fathoms,  where 
there  is  n  ost  room  :  it  is  but  an  inditferent  harbor.  About  1|  of  a  mile  westward  of  Belle 
Harbor  i  •  Lally  Cove,  behind  an  island,  fit  for  small  vessels  only.  The  west  point  of  this 
cove  is  high  and  bluff,  and  is  called  Lally  Head ;  to  the  northward  of  this  head  is  Lally 
Hack  Covo,  where  ships  may  anchor  in  14  or  16  fathoms  water. 

Two  miles  to  the  northward  of  Lally  Cove  Head,  are  East  Bay  and  North  Bay  ;  in 
both  of  these  there  is  deep  water,  but  no  anchoruge  near  the  shore.  At  the  Head  of 
North  Bay  is  the  largest  river  in  Fortune  Bay,  and  appears  to  be  a  good  place  for  the 
salmon  fishery,  from  which  circumstance  it  is  named  Salmon  River. 

CINQ  ISLES  BAY.--The  Bay  of  Cinq  Isles  lies  to  the  southward  of  the  North  Bay,  Cinq  Isles 
and  (i[)po3ite  to  Lally  Cove  Head ;  there  is  tolerably  good  anchorage  for  large  ships  on  the  Bay. 
S.  W.  side  of  the  islands,  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay.     The  north  arm  is  a  very  snug  place 
for  siniiU  vessels,  and  salmon  may  be  caught  at  its  head. 

CORBEN  BAY. — A  little  to  the  southward  of  the  Bay  of  Cinq  Isles  is  Corben  Bay,  Corben  Bay. 
where  there  is  good  anchorage,  for  any  ships,  in  22  or  24  fathoms  water.  About  2  miles 
south-eastwii'-d  from  Lally  Cove  Head  are  two  islands,  about  a  mile  distant  from  each 
other;  the  north-easternmost  is  called  Belle  Island,  and  the  other  Dog  Island  ;  they  are 
bold  to  all  round.  Between  Dog  Island  and  Lord  and  Lady  Island,  which  lies  of!"  to  the 
fioufh  point  of  Corben  Bay,  something  nearer  to  the  latter,  is  a  sunken  rock,  with  deep 
water  all  round  it;  and  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Lord  and  Lady  Isl- 
and, is  a  rock  which  appears  at  low  water. 

B.VNDE  DE  L'AlllER  BAY  hes  on  the  west  point  of  Belle  Bay,  and  N.  i  W.  3  Bande  de 
leagues  from  Point  Enrngee  ;   it  may  be  known  by  a  very  high  mountain  over  the  bay,  L'ArierBay, 
which  rises  almost  perpendicular  from  the  sea,  called  Iron  Head.      Chapel  Island,  which 
forms  the  east  side  of  the  Bay,  is  high  land  also  ;  the  harbor  lies  on  the  west  side  of  the 
bay,  just  within  the  pointformed  by  a  narrow  lowbeach,  and  is  a  snug  place;  between  the 
harbor  and  Iron  Head  there  is  tolerably  good  anchorage,  in  18  or  20  fathoms. 

Hand  de  L'Arier  Bank  has  7  fatiioiiis  water  on  it,  and  lies  with  the  beach  of  Bando  de 
L'.Vrier  Harbor  just  open  of  the  wett  point  of  the  bay,  and  Boxy  Point  on  with  the  north 
end  of  St.  .laques  Island. 

,S T.  .1 AQUES. — Two  inil(!s  to  the  westward  of  Bando  do  L'Arier  is  the  Harbor  of  St.  St,  Jaques, 
.laques,  which  may  be  readily  known  by  the  island  before  it  being  high  at  eacli  end,  and 
low  ill  the  middle.     The  pussago  into  the  harbor  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  island,  free  from 
daiiiier,  as  is  the  harbor,  whore  you  m;iy  anchor  in  from  17  to  4  fathoms. 

HLUE  PINION. — Ai)out  one  and  a  half  mile  to  the  westward  of  St.  Jaques,  is  the  Bltce  Pinion. 
harlior  of  Blue  Pinion;  and  a  little  to  tlit!  westward  of  that  is  English  Cove. 

l!OX  Y  HARBOR  —Boxy  I'oint  lies  W.  i  S.  6  miles  from  St!  Jaques  Island,  and  E.  BoxijHarbor. 
N.  K.  i  E.  12i  miles  from  tlic  east  end  of  Brunet  Island  ;  it  is  of  moderate  height,  and 
the  iiuist  advanced  to  the  southward  of  iiny  land  i>n  the  coast.  Boxy  Harbor  lies  N.  E.  3 
miles  from  Boxy  Point,  in  which  there  is  aiicliorage  in  4  or  5  fiitlioins  water,  fine  sandy 
proiiiid  :  to  sail  in,  bring  Boxy  Point  open  of  a  little  black  head  just  within  the  point,  called 
Friars  Head  ;  in  this  direction  you  will  keiip  the  middle  of  the  channel,  and  between  the 
bhuals  which  lie  olf  each  point  of  the  harbor  wlufir,  the  stages  are. 

W.  N.  W.  one  mile  from  Boxy  Point,  is  the  Island  of  St.  John  ;  and  N.  N.  W.  half  n 
leamic  from  St.  John's  Island  is  St.  .lohn's  Head,  high,  steep,  and  craggy.  Between  St. 
.hiliii's  Head  and  Boxy  Point  is  St.  John's  Bay,  quite  exposed;  in  the  bottom  of  this  is 
.Inhn's  ll.irbor,  fit  for  boats  only.  On  the  north  side  of  St.  John's  Head  are  two  rocky 
isleis,  ciillcd  the  (iiill  andShiig;  at  the  west  end  of  which  there  are  several  sunken  rocks, 

(iKEA  P  BAY  DE  L'E.VU  is  about  li  league  to  the  northward  of  St.  John's  Head,  Grmt  Hay 
In  this  bay  there  is  good  anchorage  in  vari(uis  depths,  sheltered  from  all  winds.     The  pas-  de  L'Eau- 
ea^o  in  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  Island,  which  lies  in  its  entrauce;  for  only  very  small 
vessels  can  enter  to  the  westward. 


Connaigre 
Bay. 


50  BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Barrysway         B  ARRYSWAY  BAY  —To  the  .vestward  of  Bay  de  L'Euu,  about  3  miles  north  from 
Bay.  St.  John's  Head,  is  Little  Bay  Ba^iy  8Way  ;  on  tho  west  side  of  which  there  is  good  anchor- 

age for  large  ships,  in  7,  8.  or  10  fathoms :  aiiU  both  wood  and  water  to  be  obtained  with  ease 
Harbor  Bri'  HARBOR  BRITON  Hes  to  the  westward  of  Little  Barrysway,  and  N.  N.  E.  i  E,  2 
ton.  leagues  from  the  Island  of  Sagona.     The  heads  which  from  the  entrance  are  high,  and 

lie  from  each  other  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  distant  about  2  miles.  Near  the  east  head  is  a  rock 
above  water.  The  only  danger  in  going  in  is  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which  stretches  2  cnljleg' 
length  from  the  south  point  of  the  S.  W.  arm,  which  is  more  tiian  a  mile  within  the  west 
head.  The  only  place  for  ships  of  war  to  anchor  in  is  above  this  ledge,  before  the  entrance 
of  the  S.  W.  arm,  in  16  or  18  fiithoms,  mooring  nearly  east  and  west:  the  bottom  is  very 
good,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water  is  to  be  obtained  here.  Opposite  to  the  S,  W.  arm 
is  the  N.  E.  arm  or  .Jersey man's  Harbor,  which  is  capable  of  holding  a  great  number  of 
ships,  secure  from  all  winds,  in,fi.  7,  and  8  fathoms  water :  it  has  a  bar  at  the  entrance,  on 
which  there  are  3  fathoms.  The  mark  to  sail  over  the  bar  is,  the  point  of  Thonipson'a 
Beach,  which  is  the  south  point  at  the  entrance  into  the  S.  W.  arm,  open  of  Jerseynmn'g 
Head,  which  is  high  and  bluff  on  the  north  side  of  tho  entrance  into  .Terseyman's  Harbor  : 
80  soon  as  you  open  the  harbor,  haul  up  to  tho  northward,  and  anchor. 

From  the  wost  end  of  Harbor  Briton  to  Connaigre  Head  the  bearing  and  distance  ore 
W.  5  miles;  between  are  Gull  Island  and  Deadman's  Bay,  off  which  there  is  a  bank 
stretching  from  the  shore  between  2  and  3  miles,  whereon  the  depths  vary  from  34  to  4 
fathoms.  The  sea,  during  storms,  will  sometimes  break  for  a  considerable  way  out  from 
Gull  Island. 

CONNAIGRE  BAY.— From  Connaigre  Head,  which  is  high  and  craggy,  to  Basse- 
terre Point,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W.  i  W.  7  miles;  between  is  Connaigre  Hay, 
which  extends  about  4  leagues  inland.  In  the  mouth  of  the  bay  lie  the  Connaigre  Rocks 
above  water,  which  may  be  approached  very  near,  there  being  no  danger  but  what  shows 
itself:  tho  channel  between  them  and  Connaigre  Head  is  the  safest,  as  a  ledge  of  rocks 
extends  a  mile  from  the  north  shore,  which  renders  tho  other  channel  rather  dangerous. 
Connaigre  Harbor  is  near  5  miles  above  the  head,  within  a  point  en  the  south  side  of 
'  the  bay ;  it  is  very  small,  and  the  depth  of  water  is  7  fathoms ;  the  passage  in  is  on  the  S. 

E.  side  of  the  island,  which  lies  before  it.  Abreast  of  this  harbor,  nearly  in  the  mitjcjle 
of  the  bay,  are  two  islands ;  on  the  south  side  of  tho  westernmost  are  some  rocks  above  water. 
Dawson's  Cove  is  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  bay,  and  bears  N.  N.E.  about  4  miles  from 
Connaigre  Head,  and  W.  N.  W.  2  miles  from  tho  west  end  of  the  westernmost  (and  tho 
greatest)  island  ;  the  anchorage  is  in  G  or  5  fathoms,  quite  exposed  to  southerly  winds. 
Basseterre  Point,  which  forms  the  west  point  of  Connaigre  Bay,  is  of  moderate  height, 
clear  of  wood,  and  from  thence  to  Pass  Island,  bold  to  :  Pass  Island  lies  nearly  W.by  N. 
distant  3  miles  from  Basseterre  Point. 
Past  Island.  P.ASS  ISL.VND,  which  is  the  north-western  extremity  of  Fortune  Bay,  is  a  full  mile 
in  length,  and  narrow  ;  it  bears  from  the  N.  Point  of  Miquclon  N.  E.  by  N.  7  leagues,  ami 
from  Point  .May,  N.  i  E.  12  leagues.  It  lies  near  the  shore,  and  is  rather  lofty  ;  on  its  S. 
Western  side  there  are  several  rocks  above  water,  which  extend  a  full  mile  from  the  islaini; 
and  to  the  N.  W.  is  asuiiken  rock  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  island:  there  is  a  pas- 
sage between  this  island  and  the  main,  about  the  length  of  two  cables  wide  ;  it  frequently 
is  traversed  by  small  vessels,  who  sometimes  anchor  there  on  fine  sandy  bottom,  in  6  fiitii- 
oms  water.  The  cod-fishery  about  this  part  iugenerally  considered  good  and  productive. 
Rkm.*kks  cn  Fortune  Bay. — The  general  ap|)oarance  of  the  land  on  tho  northern 
side  of  Fortune  Bay  is  hilly,  rising  directly  from  tho  sea,  with  craggy,  barren  hills,  ex- 
tending 4  or  5  leagues  inland,  having  many  rivulets  and  ponds  ;  while  that  on  the  south- 
ern side  of  Fortune  Bay  has  a  very  different  a|)pearance  ;  having  less  of  these  rugged 
hills,  and  being  better  clothed  with  wood  of  a  short  brushy  kind,  giving  to  the  country  an 
air  of  greeness  and  fertility, 

SouNDi.NGS. — In  the  night  time,  or  in  il.''  foggy  weather,  the  mariner  should  not 
place  much  dependanco  on  the  soundings  in  Fortu..  (Jay,  for  therein  they  might  be  great- 
ly and  fatallj'  deceived,  inasmuch  as,  in  many  places,  the  water  near  the  shores  and  in  its 
creeks  and  harbors,  is  often  deeper  than  in  tho  middle  of  tho  bay  itself. 

HERMITA(iE  BAY.— This  extensive  bay  is  bounded  on  tho  S.  W.  by  Pass  Island, 
and  to  the  northward  by  the  islands  that  form  the  Bay  of  Bonne  and  Great  .larvis  Ilaibor, 
tho  width  boing  more  than  two  leagues ;  and  by  tiio  southern  shores  of  Long  Islnnii, 
where  it  begins  to  narrow.  In  sailing  along  the  southern  coast  from  Pass  Island,  you  will 
discover  tho  Fox  Islands,  which  are  flislant  from  Pass  Island  10  or  11  miles;  those  isl- 
ands are  situated  opposite  to  the  entrance  to  Hermitage  Cove,  about  %  of  a  mile  from  the 
land,  and  are  said  to  liavo  good  fishing  about  them;  off  the  Northern  Fox  Island  are 
several  rocks  ab(jve  water,  and  a  sunken  rock  lies  also  off  the  south  side  of  this  Island. 
To  enter  Hermitage  Cove  you  should  keep  between  tlio  islands  and  the  shore,  borrowing 
somewhat  towards  the  main  land,  whore  you  will  find  30,  32,  and  37  fathoms  water;  here 
you  will  see  the  cove  oi)en,  and  may  turn  in  south,  having  deep  water,  and  without  the 
ie;  -!  il.mger;  tho  nnchorage  is  good,  with  every  convoniency  for  fishing,  and  plenty  of 


Smmdings. 


Hermitage 
Bay. 


of  wood, 

GRE.' 
It  is  a  safe 
cure  from 
the  (irea 
gerin  it  h 
yoii  shouli 
side,  and  I 
lie  on  tho 
this  harbor 
crnagy  poi 
to  tho  liarl 

BONN! 
N. by  E. 
erninost  ot 
largest  islai 
aud  there 
ant',  whicl 
islands  on 
fiitlioms; 
oins,  clear 
Isluni],  wit 
secure  fro 
islands. 
Island,  as 
little  to  th 
oins  watei 

W.N. 
gon.   Thii 

FACII 
in  N.  N.  1 


■*■■ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


51 


both  wood  and  water.      From  hence  Hermitage  Bay  runs  in  nearly  west  for  12  miles, 

with  very  deep  water,  until  you  get  near  the  head,  where  it  gradually  lessens  to  25  and  a 

23  fiithoms,  and  further  in  to  9  fathoms ;  there  is  a  small  islet  or  two  on  the  southern  side, 

but  no  danger  whatever. 

LONG  ISLAND,  which  separates  the  Bay  of  Despair  from  Hermitage  Bay,  is  of  a  Lvng  Island. 
square  form,  about  8  miles  long  and  nearly  8  leagues  in  circuit.  The  eastern  passage  is 
very  good,  but  narrow,  and  is  between  the  east  end  of  Long  Island  and  the  main,  called 
the  Passage  of  Long  Island.  The  west  entrance  into  the  Bay  of  Despair  from  Hermi- 
tnce  Bay  is  by  the  west  end  of  Long  Island.  About  half  a  mile  from  its  S.  W.  point  are 
two  rocks  above  water,  with  deep  water  all  round  them. 

GALTAUS  harbor. — There  are  four  harbors  on  the  south  side  of  Long  Island,  Oaltaus 
tho  easternmost  of  which  is  called  Galtaus;  this  is  but  small,  and  lies  near  the  south-east  Harbor. 
point  of  the  island.     The  best  channel  into  the  harbor  is  on  the  west  side  of  several  rocky 
islands,  which  lie  at  the  entrance,  wherein  are  4  fathoms;  but  in  the  harbor  there  are 
from  15  to  24  fathoms. 

PICARRE  harbor.— The  next  is  Picarre,  which  lies  N.  by  E.  half  a  league  from  PicarreHar- 
the  easternmost  Fox  Island.   In  going  in  here,  keep  near  the  west  point,  in  order  to  avoid  bor. 
some  sunken  rocks  off  the  other.    The  anchorage  is  in  the  first  cove  on  the  east  side,  in  9 
or  10  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

ROUND  HARBOR. — The  next  harbor,  called  Round  Harbor,  is  about  2mileiJtothe  Round  Har- 
westwiiid  of  Picarre,  and  fit  only  for  small  vessels,  the  channel  in  being  so  narrow.  bor. 

LONG  ISLAND  HARBOR  is  the  fourth,  and  lies  about  2i  miles  from  the  west  end  Long  Island 
of  Long  Island.    This  harbor  has  two  arms,  one  running  in  to  the  north,  the  other  to  the 
eastward.     They  are  both  very  narrow,  artd  have  from  40  to  7  fathoms  water.    The  east- 
ern arm  is  the  deepest,  and  affords  the  best  anchorage.     The  passage  in  is  on  either  side 
of  an  island  which  lies  off  the  entrance,  and  has  several  rocks  above  water  about  it. 

BAY  OF  DESPAIR. — The  entrance  oftheBay  of  Despair  lies  between  the  west  Bay  q/^  Dej- 
end  of  Long  Island  and  Great  Jarvis  Island,  (which  lies  in  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  of  that  pair. 
nnino,)  the  distance  between  is  one  mile  and  a  quarter,  and  midway  no  bottom  is  found 
with  a  line  of  280  fathoms.  The  Bay  of  Despair  forms  two  capacious  arms,  one  extend- 
inc  full  8  leagues  to  the  north-T.ct'ward,  the  other  about  13  miles  northward.  In  the  N. 
E  arm  are  several  arms  and  islands,  and  tolerably  good  anchorage  in  several  places.  In 
the  north  arm  there  is  very  deep  water,  and  vn  nnohoi-age  excepting  in  the  small  bays 
anil  coves  wliich  lie  on  each  side  of  it;  but  in  an  arm  of  this  bay,  which  runs  easterly, 
there  is  a  fine  salmon  fishery,  and  wood  in  plenty.  In  the  N.  E.  arm  also  there  are  good 
salmon  fisheries  at  Little  River  and  Conne  River.  All  the  country  about  this  part  is 
mountainous  and  barren,  but  about  the  head  of  the  bay  it  be<:omes  level,  and  has  abundance 
of  wood,  such  as  fir,  pine,  birch,  witch  hazle,  spruce,  &c. 

GREAT  JARVIS  HARBOR  is  situated  at  the  west  entrance  into  the  Bay  of  Despair.  Great  Jarvis 
It  is  11  safe  harbor,  with  good  anchorage  in  every  part  of  it,  in  from  16  to  20  fathoms,  se-  Harbor. 
euro  from  nil  winds,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water.  The  passage  in  is  on  either  side  of 
tho  (ireiit  Jurvis  Island;  but  the  southernmost  channel  is  the  safest,  there  being  no  dan- 
dier in  it  but  the  shore  itself.  In  the  northern  channel  are  several  sunken  rocks.  To  sail  in 
you  should  bring  the  north  point  between  the  two  rocks  above  water,  on  the  starboard 
side,  and  then  steer  directly  in.  This  will  carry  you  clear  of  some  sunken  rocks  which 
iio  on  tho  west  point  of  the  island.  These  rocks  appear  at  low  water.  The  eiitraiico  to 
this  harbor  may  be  known  by  the  east  end  of  Great  Jarvis  Island,  which  is  a  high,  steep, 
crnsj^y  i)oint,  called  Great  Jarvis  Head,  and  is  the  northern  point  of  the  south  entrance 
to  tiio  harbor. 

BONNE  BAY  lies  about  a  league  to  the  westward  of  Great  Jarvis  Head,  and  nearly  Bonne  Bay. 
N.  by  E.  distant  7  miles  from  Pass  Island.  It  has  several  islands  at  its  entrance ;  the  west- 
ernmost of  which  is  the  largest  and  highest.  The  best  passage  in  is  to  the  eastward  of  the 
largest  island,  between  it  and  the  two  easternmost  islands.  The  bay  runs  in  north  4  miles, 
ami  there  is  no  danger  but  what  shows  itself.  You  may  go  on  either  side  of  Drake  Isl- 
am', wliich  is  small  and  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  bay ;  between  which,  and  two  small 
isliinds  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  within  Great  Island,  there  is  anchorage  in  20  or  30 
fathoms;  but  the  best  place  for  large  ships  is  near  the  head  of  the  bay,  in  12  or  14  fath- 
oms, clear  ground,  and  convenient  for  wood  and  water.  On  tho  N.  W.  side  of  Great 
Island,  within  tho  two  small  islands,  is  very  good  anchorage,  in  from  16  to  24  fathoms. 
secure  from  all  winds.  The  entrance  from  this  bay  is  to  the  northward  of  the  two  small 
islaiiils.  In  sailing  in  or  out  of  the  buy,  approach  not  too  near  the  south  point  of  Great 
Island,  as  there  are  some  sunken  rocks  lying  at  one-quartor  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  A 
little  to  the  westward  of  Bonne  Bay  is  Mosquit"  Cove,  a  small  inlet  of  from  30  to  47  fath- 
oms water. 

W.  N.  W.  4  miles  from  Bonne  Bay,  is  the  entrance  to  the  Bays  of  Facheux  and  Dra- 
gon.  This  entrance  being  very  conspicuous  at  sea,  the  coast  may  here  be  readily  known. 

FACHEUX,  which  is  tho  easternmost  branch,  is  very  easily  seen  to  seaward;  it  runs  Facheux. 
in  N.  N.  E.  2  leagues,  and  is  one-third  of  a  mile  wide  at  the  entrance,  with  deep  water  in 


52 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Hare  Bay. 


DeviVs  Bay. 


ChaleurBay. 


most  parts  of  it.  On  the  west  side  of  the  bay  are  throe  coves,  where  ships  tnny  anchor 
in  from  10  to  20  fathoms.  Dragon  Bay  lies  in  N.  W.  ono  league,  and  is  near  half  a  mile 
wide,  with  60  or  70  fathoms  water,  and  no  anchorage  excepting  near  the  head ;  and  then 
you  must  lie  very  near  the  shore.  One  mile  to  tho  westward  of  Facheux  is  Little  Hole 
with  shelter  for  small  craft;  and  one  league  to  the  westward  of  Facheux  is  Richiird's 
Harbor,  a  place  fit  only  for  small  vessels  and  fishing  shallops,  with  23  fathoms  water  in  it. 
HARE  BAY.— N.  W.  by  W.  one  league  from  Richard's  Harbor  is  Hare  Bay,  which 
runs  in  N.  N.  E.  about  5  miles,  and  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  with  doop  water 
close  home  to  both  shores  on  all  parts  of  it,  excejjt  about  one  league  up  on  the  west  side' 
where  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  from  8  to  15  fathoms,  with  plenty  of  wood  and  wiitor' 
and  a  small  covo  about  one  mile  up  on  the  east  side,  where  there  are  30  fathoms,  with 
gradual  soundings  to  the  shore. 

DEVIL'S  BAY. — N.  W.  about  44  miles  from  Hare  Bay,  and  one  league  N.  E.  from 
Hare's  Ears  Point,  is  Devil's  Bay.  a  narrow  inlet,  extending  a  league  to  the  northward 
with  deep  water,  and  no  anchorage  until  you  come  close  to  the  head. 

The  Bay  of  Rencontre  lies  to  the  northward  of  Hare's  Ears  Point,  and  runs  in  N.  W. 
by  W.  2  leagues;  it  has  deep  water  in  most  parts  of  it,  and  is  near  half  a  mile  wide  nt 
the  narrowest  part.  The  anchorage  is  in  30  fathoms,  above  a  low  woody  point  on  the 
south  shore,  quite  land-locked.  Hare's  Eors  Point  is  large,  with  n  ragged  rocit  upon  it, 
which,  from  some  points  of  view,  looks  like  the  ears  of  a  hare.  It  lies  W.  by  N.  i  N.  dis- 
tant  10  miles  from  Richard's  Harbor,  divides  the  Bays  of  Rencontre  and  Cholour,  and 
bears  N.  W.  i  W.  6  leagues  from  Pass  Island.  Off  this  point  is  a  fishing  bank,  extend, 
ing  a  full  mile  from  the  shore,  having  from  '20  to  3G  fathoms  over  it. 

CHALEUR  BAY. — Two  mdes  to  the  westward  of  Hare's  Ears  Point  is  tho  Boy  of 
Chaleur,  which  runs  in  about  2  leagues  N.  N.  W.  It  is  very  narrow,  and  has  deep  water 
in  most  parts.  At  the  north  entrance  into  the  bay.  and  close  to  tho  land,  is  a  small  island 
of  moderate  height,  and  half  a  league  within  tho  island,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  tho  bay,  is  a 
rock  above  water;  a  little  within  this  rock,  on  the  some  side,  is  a  small  cove,  with  asondy 
beach,  off  which  you  can  anchor  in  28  fathoms,  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 
FratifoisBay  FRANCOIS  BAY.— West  nearly  half  a  league  from  the  Boy  of  Chaleur,  is  the  Bny 
of  Fnmrois,  a  small  inlet  running  in  N.  W.  \  W.  one  mile,  being  at  the  entrance  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  brood,  and  17  fiithoms  deep,  but  just  within  are  50  and  60  fathoms.  At 
the  head  are  from  30  to  20  fathoms,  good  anchoroge,  und  very  convenient  for  carrying  on 
the  fishing  business. 

OAR  B.\Y. — Westward  4  miles  from  the  Bay  Franrois,  on  the  east  side  of  Capp  ]« 
Hune,  lies  Oar  Bay.  Otf  the  eost  point  of  its  entrance  is  a  low  rocky  islet,  and  in  tho 
entrance  of  the  bay  is  another,  with  a  passage  on  each  side  of  it.  The  bay  runs  in  N.N. 
E.  about  4  miles,  and  is  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  with  deep  water  close  to  both  shores  nil 
the  way  up.  At  the  head  is  a  harbor  for  small  vessels,  with  only  5  fathoms  water.  At 
tho  west  side  of  the  entrance  into  the  bay  is  Cul  do  Sac,  a  little  cove,  with  3  and  4  fothoms 
water,  and  good  shelter  for  snndl  vessels. 

CAPE  LA  HUNE  is  the  southernmost  point  of  lond  on  this  part  of  tlie  coast,  and  lios 

n  lat.  47°  31'  N.  bearing  W.  N.  W.  4  N.  8  leagues  from  Pass  Island,  and  N.  N.  W.  4 

N.  10  leagues  from  Cape  iMiquelon.    Its  figure  much  resembles  a  sugar  loaf.    This  cope 

may  also  be  known  by  the  high  land  of  La  Hune,  which  lies  one  league  to  the  westward 

of  it,  appearing  flat  at  the  top.  ond  may  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  16  leagues. 

THE  PENGUIN  ISLANDS  lie  W.  S.  W.  4  S.  104  miles  from  Cape  la  Ilune.nnd 
N.  W.  4  N.  10  leagues  from  Capo  Miquelon.  They  ore  an  assemblage  of  barren  rocks 
lying  near  to  eoch  other,  and  altogethc^r  about  2  l"ng""s  in  circuit,  and  nniy  be  approached 
in  the  daytime  to  the  distance  of  half  a  league  •  -  .nd.  On  the  W  S.  W.  side  oftlio 
large  island,  which  is  the  highest,  is  a  small  cove  hi,  tor  shallops,  and  convenient  for  the 
fisheries,  and  the  ground  about  it  is  considered  to  be  good  for  fishing. 

WHALE  ROCK.— E.  S.  E.  8  miles  from  the  Penguin  Islands,  and  S.  by  W.  3  lengueg 
from  Cape  la  Hune,  lies  tho  Whale  Rock,  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks;  it  is  ohiuit 
100  fathoms  in  circuit,  with  10,  12,  and  14  fathoms  close  to  all  round  it.  From  this  rock 
a  narrow  bank  extends  one  league  to  the  westward,  and  holf  a  league  to  the  eastward, 
with  from  24  to  58  fathoms  water  on  it,  rocky  and  gravolly  bottom.  In  tho  channel  be- 
tween the  shore  and  this  rock,  and  also  between  the  shore  and  the  Penguin  Islands,  ore 
120  and  130  fothoms  of  woter,  muddy  bottom,  and  there  is  the  same  depth  of  water  at 
one  league  without  them. 

LA  HUNE  BAY  lies  close  to  tho  westward  of  Cape  La  Hune.  It  is  nl)out  two 
leagues  deep,  and  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  with  deep  water  in  most  parts  of  it;  but  tlicro 
is  a  sunken  rock  which  lies  off  the  west  point  of  the  entrance,  nearly  one-fhiid  of  tho 
channel  over.  In  sailing  in  or  out  of  this  bay,  you  should  keej)  the  eastern  shore  i>n  board, 
in  order  to  avoid  a  sunken  rock  which  licis  oflFthe  west  point  of  the  entrance  into  flie  l)ay, 
nearly  one-third  over.  Two  miles  up  the  bay  is  Lance  ( "ove,  having  anchorage  i'l  14  and 
16  fathoms  water,  good  clean  ground.  A  cable's  length  off  the  southern  point  of  ti>is  covo 
is  a  small  shoal  with  9  feet  water,  and  between  it  and  the  point  there  are  5  fatliomL.    To 


Oar  Bay. 


Cape  la  Hune 


The  Penguin 
Islands. 


Whale  Rock. 


La  Hune  Bay 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


63 


in  N.  W. 

wide  at 
It  on  the 

upon  it, 

J  N.  dis. 
>lcur,  and 

extend- 


gail  into  this  plnce,  keep  the  east  point  of  the  bny  open  of  n  red  cliff  point,  off  which  is  a 
fock  iibovo  wiUer,  until  the  round  hill  you  will  soe  over  thevaliey  of  the  cove  is  brought  on 
ffith  the  north  side  of  the  valley;  you  will  then  be  above  the  shoal,  and  may  haul  in  to  the 
cove  with  safety.  There  is  n  narrow  bank  which  stretches  quite  across  the  bay,  from  the 
S,  point  of  the  cove  to  the  opposite  shore,  whereon  are  from  27  to  45  fathoms. 

LA  IIUNE  HARBORIies  halfa  league  to  thewestward  of  Capo  La  Hune;  it  has  an  La  Ilune 
island  before  its  entrance,  and  is  fit  only  for  small  vessels,  and  open  to  westerly  winds.  Harbor. 
Before  it  lies  an  islnndnear  the  shore.  Thechannel  into  the  harbor  is  on  the  N.  W.  side 
of  the  island.  There  is  no  danger  in  going  in,  and  you  must  anchor  closeup  to  the  head, 
in  10  fathoms  water.  This  harbor  is  well  adapted  forthe  fishery.there  being  good  fishing 
ground  about  it,  and  a  large  beach  quite  across  from  the  head  of  the  harbor  to  La  Huno 
Buy;  "  space  of  800  feet,  exposed  to  the  open  air,  and  well  calculated  for  drying  fish. 

Four  leagues  N.  W.  |  W.  from  Capo  La  Hune  is  the  entrance  of  Little  River,  which 
is  about  100  fathoms  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  10  fathoms  deep.  A  little  way  up  there 
is  anchorage  in  10.  8, and  7  fathoms  water,  good  ground.  Between  Cape  La  Hune  and 
Little  River,  the  land  is  tolerably  high,  and  forms  a  bay,  whore  there  are  several  small 
isiandsand  rocks  above  water,  the  outermost  of  which  lie  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  3  leagues  from 
the  Penguin  Islands,  and  are  called  the  Magnetic  Rocks. 

S.  by  W.  4  W.  7  miles  from  the  entrance  of  Little  River,  and  N.  by  W.  i  W.  from 
the  Penguin  Islands,  lie  the  Little  River  Rocks,  which  are  just  above  water,  with  very 
dflpp  water  all  round  them. 

THE  ISLES  OF  RAMEA,  which  are  of  various  extent,  both  in  height  and  circuit,  TTie  Islet 
lie  N.  W.  i  N.  5i  leagues  from  the  Penguin  Islands,  and  one  league  from  the  main :  they  of  Ramea. 
extend  oast  and  west  5  miles,  and  north  and  south  3  miles,  and  have  several  rocks  and 
breakers  about  them ;  but  more  on  the  south  side  than  on  tho  north.  The  easternmost 
island  is  the  largest,  and  is  very  high  and  hilly;  the  westernmost,  called  Columbe,  is  a 
remarkably  high  round  island,  of  small  circuit,  with  some  rocky  isiandsand  sunken  rocks 
near  it. 

RAMEA  HARBOR — There  is  a  harbor  for  small  vessels,  formed  by  the  islands 
which  lie  near  Great  Ramea  and  the  Columbe,  called  Ramea  Harbor,  where  they  may 
lie  sheltered  from  all  winds.  To  enter  this  from  the  westward,  you  should  give  the 
southern  point  a  berth,  on  account  of  some  rocks  that  lie  off  tho  starboard  island ;  these 
are  all  above  water:  steer  E.  N.  E.  towards  the  harbor,  keeping  as  nearly  mid-channel 
asyou  can — the  passage  is  above  a  cable's  length  broad — and  run  for  the  anchorage  in  Ship 
Gov?:  this  is  the  second  inlet  on  tho  north-western  shore.  You  will  here  ride  safely,  on 
clean  ground,  in  5  fathoms  water.  To  enter  from  the  eastward,  you  must  keep  the 
northern  side  of  Great  Ramea  on  board,  until  you  are  up  to  the  west  end  thereof,  then 
steer  S.  W.  into  the  harbor,  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  in  about  three  fathoms, 
ami  anchor  as  before  directed.  This  harbor  is  very  convenient  for  fishing  vessels;  in  it, 
and  also  about  the  islands,  are  several  places  fit  for  erecting  stages  and  drying  fish,  which 
seem  to  bo  well  calculated  for  that  purpose. 

The  Ramea  Rocks  are  two  in  number,  close  to  each  other  :  they  lie  about  south,  dis- 
tant 4  miles  from  the  east  end  of  Great  Ramea.  W.  S.  W.  one  league  from  these  rocks, 
is  a  small  bank  with  only  C  fiithoms  water  on  it;  and  nearly  in  the  middle,  between  Ra- 
mea and  tlie  Penguin  Islands,  is  tho  New  Hank  with  from  14  to  50  fathoms  water.  To 
run  upon  the  shoalest  part  of  this  bank,  bring  the  two  Ramea  Rocks  on  with  the  south- 
western part  of  Ramea  Islands,  and  between  them  and  Columbe,  and  tho  entrance  to 
Little  River  N.  E.  |  E. 

OLD  MAN'S  r>  AY.— Four  miles  to  the  westward  of  Little  River  is  Old  Man's  Bay,  Old  Man's 
which  runs  in  N.  N.  E.  about  7  miles,  and  is  nearly  a  mile  wide.     The  water  throughout  Bay. 
the  bay  is  very  deep.    About  one  mile  and  a  half  up  the  bay,  on  the  eastern  side,  is  a  small 
island,  called  Adam's  Island,  behind  which  vessels  can  ride,  if  nocessarj',  in  30  and  40 
fathoms  water;  but  the  best  anchorage  is  at  tho  head,  in  14  or  16  fathoms. 

MOSQUITO  HARBOR  lies  about  halfa  league  to  the  westward  of  Old  Man's  Bay,  Mosquito 
It  is  a  snug  and  safe  harbor,  and  will  hold  a  groat  number  of  vessels  in  perfect  security  ;  Harbor. 
but  the  entrance  is  so  narrow,  being  only  48  fathoms  in  breadth,  that  it  is  difficult  to  get 
in  or  out.  The  laud  on  both  sid.ts  is  high,  and  olf  the  southern  point  of  entrance  is  a  large 
wliito  rock,  ai)out  a  cable's  length  from  which  is  a  black  rock  above  water,  on  the  south- 
ern side  of  which  is  a  sunk  rock,  whereon  the  sea  breaks.  From  this  black  rock  to  the 
ontrance  of  tho  harbor,  tho  course  is  about  N.  N.  W.  distant  one-third  of  a  mile.  In  sail- 
inj;  either  i[>  or  out,  you  should  give  the  black  rock  a  small  berth,  keeping  the  western 
shore  on  board,  and  if  obliged  to  anchor,  be  as  quick  as  possible  in  getting  a  rope  on  shore, 
lest  you  drift  on  the  rocks.  In  this  harbor  you  will  have  from  18  to  30  fathoms  water, 
with  good  riding  every  where,  and  plenty  of  both  wood  and  water.  In  the  narrows  you 
will  find  12  fiitlionis,  tho  shores  being  bold  to.  South  and  easterly  winds  blow  right 
in,  northerly  winds  right  out ;  and  with  westerly  winds,  it  is  commonly  either  quite  calm 
or  descends  in  irregulrr  puffs. 

Fox  Island  Harbor  is  formed  by  an  island  of  the  same  name.     It  lies  about  halfa  league 


64 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


W/iite  Bear 
Bay. 


Red  Island 
Harbors. 


The  Burgeo 
Isles. 


Wolf  Bay. 


Ha  Ha. 


Great  Bar- 
rysway. 


Connoire 
Bay. 


to  the  westward  of  Mosquito  Harhor;  between  nro  severnl  rocky  islnndannd  sunken  rnck§ 
This  isn  commodious  harbor  for  smnll  vessels,  which  nmy  nnchor  in  8,  9,  nnd  10  fiithoina 
water.  You  may  go  in  on  either  side  of  the  island,  and  there  ia  no  danger  but  what 
shows  itself. 

WHITK  BRAR  BAY  lies  about  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  Fox  Island  Ilurbor,  nnd 
N.  N.  E.  one  league  from  (heat  Kamea  Islond.  It  lias  several  islands  ot  its  entrance.  U 
runs  in  N.  E.  J  N.  about  4  leaguen,  in  near  hiiif  a  mile  wide  in  'the  niirroweHt  part,  and 
has  deep  water  close  to  both  shores,  in  most  parts,  totho  distance  of  8  miles  up;  then  flie 
ground  rises  at  once  to  9  fathoms,  whence  it  shoalens  gradually  to  the  head,  with  good 
anchorage.  The  best  passage  into  the  bay  is  to  the  eastward  of  all  the  islands.  On  the 
S.  W.  side  of  Bear  Island,  which  is  the  easternmost  and  lorgest  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay 
is  a  small  haibor,  running  in  about  east  half  a  mile,  with  from  10  to  22  fathoms  of  water 
but  thiu-e  are  several  sunken  rocks  before  its  mouth,  rendering  it  difficult  of  access.  \l 
the  western  entrance  is  a  high,  round,  white  island;  and  S.  W.  half  n  mile  from  this 
island  is  a  black  rock  above  water.  The  best  passage  into  the  bay,  from  the  Westward 
will  be  to  the  westward  of  this  black  rock,  nnd  between  White  and  Bear  Islands.  Some 
of  the  rocks  are  above  a  mile  off  the  land. 

RI:D  island  harbors.— Five  or  six  miles  to  the  westward  of  White  Bear 
Bay,  and  nearly  north  from  Ramea  Colmnbo,  are  two  small  harbors,  called  Red  Island 
Harbors,  formed  by'Red  Island,  which  lies  close  under  the  land.  The  westernmost  is 
the  largest  and  best,  and  has  from  (i  to  8  fathoms  water,  good  anchorage.  In  going  in 
keep  the  island  close  on  board,  the  outer  part  of  which  ia  composed  of  steep  red  clids. 

The  BURGEO  ISLES  are  a  cluster  of  islands  extending  about  5  miles  along  shore 
nnd  forming  several  snug  and  commodious  harbors.  They  lie  about  3  leagues  N.  W.  u 
N.  from  Ramen  Columlie.  To  sail  into  Burgeo  from  the  eastward,  the  best  passage  is  on 
the  N.  E.  side  of  Boor  Island,  which  is  the  northernmost,  and  lies  N.  N.  W.  from  Ramoa 
Columbe.  S.  E.  by  S.  from  this  islond,  half  n  league,  is  a  rock,  uncovered  nt  low  water 
on  wliiih  the  sea  generally  breaks.  You  may  go  on  any  side  of  this  rock,  the  water 
being  deep  nil  round  it.  So  soon  as  you  are  to  the  N.  W.  of  it,  keep  the  nortli  side  of 
Boar  Island  on  boord.and  steer  W.  i  N.  forGrandy's  Cove,  the  north  pointof  which  is  the 
first  low  point  on  your  starboard  bow ;  haul  round  that  point,  nnd  nnchor  in  the  cove  in  14 
fnthoms.  and  moor  with  a  fast  on  shore.  The  best  place  for  large  ships  to  nnchor  in  i3 
betwixt  Grandy's  Cove  and  a'  smnll  island  lying  ner..  the  west  point  of  Boar  Island,  in  20 
or  24  fathoms,  good  ground,  and  sheltered  from  nil  winds.  To  sail  into  Grand;  :;;ove, 
from  the  westward  is  dangerous,  unless  well  acquainted.  There  are  several  safe  passa- 
ges in  from  the  southward  and  eostward,  between  the  islands,  and  good  anchorage ;  and 
in  bad  weather  all  the  sunken  rocks  discover  themselves,  and  you  may  run  in  without 
any  fear ;  but  the  islands  do  not  afford  eitlier  wood  or  water. 

WOLF  BAY  extends  inward  N.  E.  by  E.  one  league  ;  the  entrance  is  E.  N.  E.  two 
miles  form  Boar  Island,  and  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Red  Island  Harbor.  The  east 
point  of  the  entrance  is  composed  of  low  ragged  rocks,  off  which  is  n  sunken  rock,  ntthe 
distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore,  over  which  the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather. 
Near  the  head  of  the  bay  is  tolerably  good  onchorago,  and  plenty  of  wood  and  water. 

King's  harbor  lies  round  the  west  point  of  Wolf  Bay,  nnd  runs  in  N.  E.  by  E.  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  ;  before  its  mouth  is  a  cluster  of  little  islands.  To  sail  in,  keep  the  east 
jKiiiit  of  these  islands  on  board,  and  steer  N.  i)y  W.  nnd  nortli  for  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor, anchoring  under  the  east  shore,  in  9  fathoms. 

HA  HA. — On  the  south  side  of  the  islands  before  King's  Harbor,  and  nearly  north  one 
mile  from  Boar  Island,  is  the  entrance  into  the  Ha  Ha,  which  runs  in  W.  N.  W.  one 
mile,  nnd  is  about  a  quarter  of  n  mile  brond,  with  from  20  to  10  fathoms  water,  and  good 
ground  all  over.  Over  the  south  point  of  the  entrance  into  this  harbor  is  n  high  green  hill; 
nnd  a  r.ibhf's  length  and  a  half  from  the  point  is  a  sunken  rock  that  always  ahowf  itself. 
Over  the  head  of  the  Ha  Ha  is  Richard's  Head,  a  mark  for  running  upon  Ramea  Slioal. 
GREAT  BARRYSWAY.— About  4  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Burgeo  Isles  is  the 
Great  Barryswny  Point,  which  is  low,  white,  and  rocky  ;  and  E,  N.  E.  i  E.  half,  league 
from  this  point  is  the  west  entrance  into  the  (ireatBarrysway,  wherein  is  room  an  Mcpth 
of  water  for  small  vessels.  Between  the  Burgeo  Isles  and  the  (ireat  Barryswa^  Point 
are  several  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  half  a  league  from  the  shore. 

CONNOIRE  BAY,— N.  W.  4  N.  4  leagues  from  the  Burgeo  Isles,  is  the  east  point 
of  the  Bay  of  Connoire.  This  point  is  so  far  remarkable,  that  it  rises  with  an  easy  nscent 
to  a  moderate  height,  nnd  much  higher  than  the  land  within  it.  The  west  i)oint  of  the 
bay  is  low  nnd  fiat,  and  to  the  westward  of  this  are  several  small  islands.  The  bay  runs 
in  N.  E.  by  N.  about  a  league  from  the  east  point  to  the  middle  head,  which  lies  between 
the  two  arms,  and  is  hnlf  a  league  wide,  with  14,  12,  10,  nnd  8  fathoms,  close  to  both 
shores,  good  anchorage  nnd  clear  ground,  but  open  to  S.  W.  winds.  The  N.  E,  arm 
affords  shelter  for  small  ve.ssels  from  all  winds.  To  sail  in,  keep  nearest  the  starboard 
shore,  nnd  anchor  before  a  small  cove  on  that  side,  neaithe'lieadof  the  arm,  in  .Ti  fathoms. 
Towards  the  head  of  the  arm,  on  the  north-western  side,  is  a  bunk  of  mud  and  sand,  upon 
which  a  vessel  may  run,  if  necessary,  and  receive  no  damage. 


hiiif  a  mi! 
the  only 


MP 


m 


M| 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 


66 


jikonrockg. 

|1»  fiitlioing 

l>ut  what 

|""'>or,  nnd 

h  I""t,  Bnd 

■»;  thon  the 

with  good 

|<»f  tho  Imy, 
I  "'■  Witter ; 
|(-'ce.ss.  j^t 
I  'rom  tliia 
I  Westward, 
Ids.     8oine 

^'lite  Boar 

^*'fl  Island 

I'ernmostis 
Koiiig  in 

i  clids. 

long  shore, 
N.  W.  by 
""ip*'  is  on 

"'II  Knmoa 

'"w  water, 
'lie  Water 
!»'»Ji  sido  of 
vliichistho 
'cove  in  14 
nclior  in  is 
sliind.  in  20 
't'r  3ove, 
s'lfe  passa- 
';»'iige;  and 
i"   Without 

N.  K.two 

The  east 

■Ofk.  nt  tlie 

i  weather. 

(vnfcr. 

K.  three- 
pptlie  east 
of  tlio  har- 

north  one 
r.  W.  one 
.  nnd  good 
greo'.i  hill; 
owf  itself. 
«'ii  Slioal. 
B\ri  is  tho 
If  i  leiiguo 

HP  Wll'jith 

mij  Point 

?nst  point 
sy  nacont 
lint  of  tho 
bay  runa 
I  between 
B  to  both 
.  K.  arm 
starboard 
fatiioins. 
nd,  upon 


THE  BAY  OF  CUTTEAU  Una  iilmut  2  loneiies  to  the  westward  of  Connoiro.  Its  The  Bay  of 
(loptli  will  iidniit  Binall  vossels  only.  Round  tho  west  point  of  Cuttenu  in  Cuu[  Surf,  where-  Cultcau. 
jiiiau  11  number  of  islunils,  whicii  form  Huveral  smtillsnu^  harbors.  Ri^ht  ()l)'(Jin(|  Serf, 
about  liiilf  11  loiiguo  from  tho  shore,  is  a  low  rocky  island,  westward  of  which  is  tho  anfoBt 
piissu^ii  into  thtt  larj^est  harbor:  keep  near  this  rock,  steering  E.  N.  E.  \  E.  towards  the 
jDUth-oiistern  shore,  until  you  K"t  abreast  of  a  small  woody  island:  this  is  the  castornmost 
pxcopt  one,  nnd  lies  about  a  (pnirter  of  a  mile  E.  N.  E.  from  a  white  rock  in  the  middle 
oftho  channel:  haul  short  round  this  island,  and  anchor  behind  it,  in  7  fathoms  water: 
Imro  you  will  lie  safely  sheltered  from  nil  winds;  or  you  may  go  further  up,  nnd  anchor 
at  its  bend,  in  4  fathoms. 

GRAND  BRUIT. — Four  miles  to  tlio  westward  of  tho  rocky  island  of  Cinq  Serf,  is  GrandBruit. 
the  harbor  of  (irnnd  Bruit,  which  is  small  but  commodious,  and  may  be  known  by  n  very 
lijjrh  remarkable  mountain  over  it,  hnlf  n  league  inland,  which  is  the  highest  land  on  all 
tho  coast;  down  this  mountain  runs  a  consiilerabhf  brook,  emptying  itself  by  a  cascade 
juto  the  hnrbor.  before  the  mouth  of  tho  harbor  ui-o  several  little  islands,  tho  largest  of 
vfliicii  is  of  middling  height,  with  three  green  hillocks  on  it.  A  little  outside  of  this  isl- 
and is  a  round  rock,  rather  high  above  water,  called  the  Columbe  of  Great  Bruit;  nnd  a 
mini  tor  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  this  rock,  is  a  low  rock.  In  n  direct  line  between 
till'  luw  rock  nnd  the  rocky  isles  of  Cin(|  Serf,  Ijnlf  n  league  from  tho  former,  is  a  sunken 
rocii.  wiiereon  the  sea  does  not  break  in  fine  weather.  The  safest  passage  into  Grand 
Briit  is  to  the  north-eastward  of  this  rock,  and  of  the  islands  lying  bi'fore  the  harbor, 
between  them  nnd  the  three  islands,  which  nre  low,  and  lie  under  the  shore;  nnd,  after 
you  are  to  the  northward  of  the  sunken  rock  above  mentioned,  there  is  no  danger  l)Ut 
what  shows  itself.  The  harbor  extends  N.  N.  E.  half  a  mile,  and  is  but  a  (pnirter  of  a 
inilo  wide  in  the  broadest  part;  but  it  is  bold  to  on  both  sides,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  4 
to  7  fathoms. 

B.VY  OF  ROTTE.— To  the  westward  of  Grand  Bruit,  between  it  and  La  Poihi  Bay,  Bay  of 
lin9  the  Bay  of  Rotte,  whei'cin  are  a  gi'eat  many  islands  and  sunken  rocks.  The  soutli-  Kolle. 
crninost  ia  a  romarknble  high  round  rock,  called  tho  Columbe  of  Rotte,  whicli  lies  N.  W. 
by  W.  8  J  longues  from  the  southernmost  of  tho  Burgees.  Between  this  island  and  Grand 
Bruit  is  a  reef  of  rocks,  some  nbovo  and  some  under  water,  but  they  do  not  lie  to  the 
southward  of  the  direct  line  between  the  islands.  Within  the  Islnnds  of  Rotte  there  is 
shelter  for  shipping ;  the  safest  passage  is  to  tho  westward  of  tho  islands,  between  them 
and  Little  Ireland,  which  lies  oil' the  east  ])oint  of  La  Poile  Bay. 

LA  POFLE  BAY  is  large  and  spacious,  and  has  sovernl  commodious  harbors.  It  may 
be  known  by  the  liigh  land  of  Grand  Bruit,  which  is  only  5  miles  to  tho  eastward  of  it, 
and  likewise  by  the  land  on  the  oast  side  of  the  bny,  which  rises  in  ronnirkable  hig!  crag- 
gy hills.  About  li  mile  S.  W.  from  its  east  point  lies  Little  Ireland,  a  small  low  island, 
environed  with  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  one-third  of  a  mile  oil".  North,  about 
half  a  mile  from  Little  Ireland,  is  a  sunken  rock  that  shows  itself  ut  low  water ;  this  is 
tho  only  danger  in  going  into  the  bny  excepting  such  as  lie  very  near  the  shore. 

GREAT  AND  LITTLE  HAK150RS.— Two  miles  within  the  west  point  of  the  bay. 
nnd  N.  i  W.  'i  miles  from  Little  Freliind,  is  Tweeds,  or  Great  Harbor;  its  south  point  ia 
luw,  and  it  extends  inwards  W.  N.W.  one  mile;  it  ia  about  14  cable's  length  wide  in  the 
narrowest  part;  nnd  the  anchorage  is  near  the  head  of  tVie  harbor,  in  18  or  20  fathoms, 
eleiu'  ground,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds.  Haifa  mile  to  the  northward  of  Gr»'at  Har- 
bor is  Little  Harbor,  the  north  point  of  which,  called  Tooth's  Head,  is  tho  first  high  blulF 
lieail  on  the  west  side  of  llio  buy;  tho  harbor  exhMids  inwards  W.  N.  W.  about  a  mile. 
In  sailing  in,  give  the  south  point  a  small  berth.  You  may  anchor  about  half  way  up  the 
harhor.  in  10  fathoms  water,  before  the  stage  which  is  on  its  northern  side. 

GALLY  BOY'S  HARHOR  lies  on  the  oast  side  of  the  buy,  opposite  Tooth's  Head;  Gaily  Boy's 
it  is  small,  snug,  and  convenient  for  ships  bound  to  the  westward.  The  north  point  is  Harbor. 
hh^h  and  steep,  with  a  white  spot  in  tho  clilF,  and  near  its  southern  i)oint  are  some  hillocks 
close  to  the  shori  .  To  sail  in  or  out,  keep  the  north  side  on  board.  You  must  anchor 
so  scon  as  you  are  within  the  inner  south  point,  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  good  ground,  and 
sheltered  from  all  winds.  One  mile  to  tho  northward  of  Gully  Boy's  Harbor,  between 
two  siindy  coves  on  the  east  side  of  tlie  bay,  and  nearly  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore, 
is  a  sunken  rock  that  just  uncovers  at  low  water. 

Ihviad  Cove  is  about  two  miles  to  tho  northward  of  Tooth's  Head,  on  the  snme  side  of 
the  l)ay.     In  tliis  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  12  or  14  fathoms. 

NORTH-EAST  ARM. — About  two  leagues  up  tho  bay,  on  the  enstern  side,  is  the  Norlh-East 
North-East  Arm.  which  is  a  spacious,  safe,  and  commodious  harbor.     In  sailing  in,  give  Ann. 
tho  low  sandy  point  on  tho  S.  E.  side  a  small  berth,  and  anchor  above  it  where  convenient, 
in  10  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground,  sheltered  from  nil  winds,  nnd  very  convenient 
for  wood  nnd  wnter.  • 

Indian  Harbor  and  De  Plato  ho  just  within  the  outer  west  point  of  La  Poile  Bay; 
those  are  two  small  roves,  conveniently  situated  for  the  fishery,  but  fit  only  for  small  ves- 
sels, who  may  get  in  at  high  water. 


La  Poile 
Bay. 


Great  and 
Lit  He  Har- 
bors. 


56 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Littio  Trelnnd  heni-H  from  thp  HouthornnioBt  of  tlio  HurgooH  N.  W.  by  W.  i  \\r_  g, 

leiiRUoH,  and  Vwa  nonrly  11  longuos  to  tho  eiislwiinl  of  Cnpo  Hiiy.  '     ' 

O aria  Bay.        (JAIUA  BAY. — From  Litllo  Indnnd  to   lliiihor  In  (Joiie,  iind   La  Moine  Hny,  tli 

courge  i8  W.  N.  W.  f  W.  !»  or  10  iiiilcH;   hotwciMi  lioH  the  Hay  of  (Jiiria  and  Hc'vcr,,^ 

COVH8,  fit  only  (or  Himdl  vpshhIs;  before  thoBo  there  are  several  iHlaiid!)  .tiid  Huiikeii  i„g|, 

sciittiTod  along  the  shore,  but  none  of  tlieni  lie  without  the  above  courne.     In  hud  wttallin' 

all  the  sunken  rocks  diFcover  tlieinselves.     'I'o  sail  into  (laria  Hay,  you  will,  in  coiintj,,, 

along  shure,  discover  a  wliite  head;  this  is  the  south  point  of  an  island  lying  under  th 

Innd,  olf  the  eastern  point  of  tho  boy,  and  a  littio  t(»  tho  westward  of  two  green  hilldcU 

on  the  main;  bring  this  white  point  N.  N.  E.  and   steer  directly   towards   it;    keen  L. 

tween  it  and  the  severni  islands  that  lie  to  tho  W.  S.  Westward;  from  tho  wliite  odi,,. 

the  course  into  the  bay  ia  N.  by  W.;  borrow  towards  tiio  eastern  point,  wiiicli  in  |o^y' 

The  Hny  of  (inria  affords  plenty  of  timber,  large  enough  for  Imilding  ships. 

La  Moinr  LA  MOINE  AND  LA  COUE  llARHOKS.— Tho  S.  W.  point  of  the  ontrnnce  into 

arul  La  Couc  Harbor  la  Couc,  called  Rose  Blanche  Point,  (near  to  which  are  some  rocks  above  watci) 

Harbors.  is  tolerably  higli,  and  tho  land  near  tlio  shore  over  Hari)or  la  Coue  and  La  Moine  Buy  ig 

much  higher  than  any  other  land  in  the  vicinity:  by  this  they  may  be  known.     La  Aloine 

Bay  extends  inwnrda  N.  E.  \  (].  about  4  miles,  and  is  one  quarter  of  a  mile  broad  in  the 

narrowest  part.     (^If  the  east  point  are  some  email  islands,  and  rocks  above  water.     In 

sailing  in,  keej)  the  west  point  on  board,  until  you  have  entered  tho  bay;  then  edge  over 

towards  tho  oust  shore,  and  run  up  to  tho  head  of  tho  bay,  where  you  may  anchor  in  10 

or  11  fathoms,  good  ground:  liere  is  plenty  of  wood  and  water.     To  sail  into  llarlior  In 

Coue,  which  lies  at  tlio  west  «tiitranco  into  La  IMoino  Bay,  steer  in  N.  N.  W.  betwctMi  n 

rock  above  water,  in  the  moiitli  of  tho  liarbor,  and  tho  west  shore.     So  soon  as  you  m-g 

within  tlio  rock,  haul  to  tho  westward,  into  the  harbor,  and  anchor  in  0  or  8  fiitliotng 

water,  mooring  with  a  hawser  on  shore;  or  you  may  steer  into  tho  arm,  which  runs  'm 

N.  E.  by  E.  from  the  harbor,  and  anchor  in  'JO  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  winds.     Tins 

has  been  the  resort  of  the  small  fishing  vessels  for  many  years. 

Rose  ROSf]  BLAN'CHE. — To  the  westward  of  Hose  Blanche  Point,  is  the  liarbor  of  ijm 

BLanche.  same  name.     It  is  small  and  snug,  and  the  anchorage  is  in  !)  fathoms  water.     The  cluin. 

nel  into  tho  harbor  is  between  tho  island  lying  off  its  western  point,  and  Rose  Bliuicho 

Point.     (live  the  island  a  good  berth,  on  account  of  some  sunken  rocks  which  lie  on  its 

eastern  side,   anu  keep   the  west  side  of  a  small  island  whi(di  lies  close  to  the  point,  on 

board,  anchoring  within  tho  N.    E.  point  of  this  island  in  !)  fathoms.     To  outer  into  tlio 

N.  W.  part  of  the  harbor  would  bo  dangerous,  if  a  stranger,  because  of  its  nuincrous 

islands  and  rocks. 

iVInll  race  is  a  small  cove  0  miles  to  tho  wcslwardof  Rose  Blanciio  Point,  whorcin  is 
anchorage  for  small  vessels  in  4  fathoms.  Off  the  west  point  of  the  cove  are  two  siniijl 
islands,  and  s<'verid  sunken  rocks.     The  j)assage  in  is  to  the  eastward  of  thi'se. 

Several  miles  to  tho  westward  of  Rose  Blanche  Point  are  the  Burnt  Islunds,  which  |io 
close  under  tlie  shore,  and  are  not  easily  to  bo  distinguished  from  it.     Behind  thes(<  is  a 
shelter  for  small  vessels.     Olf  these  islands  oro  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  half  u 
mile  from  the  shore. 
Conneyand         CONNEY  AND  OTTER  BAYS.— Six  miles,  to  the  westward  of  Rose  Bl.iiirho 
Otler  Bays,     Point,  are  Coiiney  Bay  and  Otter  Bay.  both  of  which  are  rendered  difficult  of  access  by 
several  sunken  rocks  outside  of  the  passage,  which  do  not  show  themselvi^s  in  fine  wiia- 
ther:  but  when  once  you  aro  safe  within  Otter  Hny,  there  is  good  riding  in  7,  8,  and  9 
fathf  ills  water. 
Dead  M-  DiCAD  ISLANDS  H ARBOR.— W.  N.  W.  ?  W.,  nearly  4  leagues  from  Rose  HIihk ho 

ands  Har-       Point,  are  the  Dead  Islands,  which  lie  close  uiiderthe  shore.     In  the  passage  to  Dead  Isl- 
hor,  ands  Harbor,  between  the  islands  and  the  main,  is  good  anchorage  for  shi|)piiig  in  (i  or  8 

fathoins,  slndtered  from  all  winils;  but  it  is  very  dangerous  of  accei^s  to  strangers,  as  tliero 
are  severnl  sunken  rocks  in  both  the  east  and  west  entrance.  The  eastern  entrance  can 
be  known  by  a  remarkable  white  spot  on  oiif?  of  the  islands.  Bring  this  spot  to  bciir  N. 
by  W.  and  st«!or  in  for  it,  keeping  tho  st4irboard  rocks  on  board,  and  leave  the  white  s()()itcd 
island  on  your  larboard  side.  The  western  en'rance  may  be  recognized  b}'  a  high  pdint 
on  the  main,  n  little  to  the  westward  of  the  islands,  on  the  western  jmrt  of  which  point  is 
a  green  hillock:  keep  this  point  cloi^e  on  board,  until  you  get  within  a  little  round  rock, 
near  to  the  westernmost  island,  nt  thi^  eastern  point  of  entrance;  then  haul  over  to  llin 
eastward  for  the  great  island,  distinguished  by  a  high  hill,  aud  steer  E.  \  N.  keeping  the 
before  mentioned  little  rock  in  sight. 
Port  aux  PORT  AU\  BASQUE.— From  tho  Dead  Isles  to  Port  au  Basque,  the  courses  and 

Basque.  distance  are  W.  N.  W.  about  4  miles;  between  which  lie  several  small  islands  close  un- 

der the  shore,  and  there  are  sunken  rocks,  some  of  which  are  half  a  mile  from  tlii^  slniro. 
•  Port  anx  Basque  is  a  small  commodious  hiirlior,  which  lies  about '.*<)  leagues  to  the  east- 
ward of  Cape  Ray.  To  fall  in  with  it,  bring  the  Sugar-Loaf  Hill  over  Cape  Ray,  to  hear 
N.  N.W.  <i  W.  or  the  west  end  of  tho  Table  Mountain  N.  N.W.  Steer  in  for  the  hinil 
with  either  of  theso  marks,  and  you  will  fall  directly  in  with  the  harbor.    Tho  S.  W.  point, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


A7 


illcd  Point  niiinche,  in  of  a  moderiito  hoinlit,  htkI  of  wliitti  ii|ipoiiini)re;  but  tli«  N.  E. 

lint  iH  low  ■'*"'  ""^  '*'"'  '""*<  cloHd  to  it,  a  Itliick  vnck  iibovo  water.  In  onli'i*  t<i  avoid  tho 
'utiT  slioal.  on  which  nro  throo  fathoniH,  and  whicli   hot)  K.  S.  K.  thii'o  (jnmtfUH  of  n 

lil,.  iVoni  I'oint  lilanclio,  kcop  •'  aid  point  on  boiivd,  and  brin^  tho  flau-Htalt' which  is 
un  lilt'  lii"  "*'"'' ''"'  woHt  »iilo  (  «a(l  of  tho  harbor,  on  witli  tho  S.  W.  point  of  Road 

Iflniul-  That  diroclion  will  ItMiu  ^ou  in  tiio  iniildle  of  tliu  ciiannol,  butwiMMi  thn  (mihI  and 
„,.st  rocks,  tho  fornior  (»f  whidi  always  show  ihenmolvoB,  and  those  you  leave  on  your 
jinrliiiin'l  hand.  Continue  this  course  up  to  Road  Island,  and  keep  the  west  point  on 
bdiiril.  in  order  to  avoid  the  Frying-pan  Rock,  which  stretches  out  from  a  cove  on  the 
^,.gt  nhore,  opposite  the  island;  and,  so  soon  as  you  nro  above  the  island,  haul  to  the  R. 
\  [].  iiiul  anchor  betwi'on  it  and  Harbor  Island  wherever  you  please,  in  9  or  10  futhoniB, 
£0(1(1  ground,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds.  This  is  called  the  Road  or  Outer  Harbor,  and 
jjtlio  only  anchorinj!  place  for  men  of  war,  <<r  ships  drawing  n  great  depth  of  water,  but 
iiimll  vessels  always  lie  U|)  in  the  Inner  Harbor.  To  sail  into  it,  run  in  between  tho  west 
jiliuru  and  the  S.  W.  end  of  Harbor  Island,  and  anchor  behind  the  said  island,  in  .3  or  4 
latliunis.  In  some  parts  of  this  harbor  ships  can  lay  their  broadsides  so  near  to  the  shore 
jj  to  reach  it  with  a  plank.  This  place  has  boon  frequented  by  fishermen  formally  years. 
j[  is  well  situated  for  their  purposes,  and  is  capable  of  most  excellent  accommodations. 
One  mile  lo  the  eastward  of  Basque  is  Little  Hay. 

(iRAND  HAY  lies  about  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Port  aux  Basque;  there  are  Grand  Bay, 
,(>verid  small  islands  and  rocks  in  and  before  it,  the  outermost  of  which  are  not  above  n 
qunrtcr  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  ;  on  these  tho  sea  generally  breaks.     It  is  only  fit  for 
sinali  vessels. 

Kioni  Port  Aux  Basque  to  Point  Krnng6o,  the  bearing  and  distance  nre  W.  N.  W. 
abouta  leaj^ue,  and  thence  to  Capo  Ray  N.  N.  W.  nearly  Ij  league.  Point  Erangc-o  is 
{(iw :  iilf  it  and  to  the  eastward  of  it,  are  some  sunken  rocks  a  mile  from  tho  shore,  on 
which  the  sea  breaks. 

CAPK  ray  is  tho  S.  W.  extremity  of  Newfoundland;  the  land  of  the  cape  is  very  Cape  Ray, 
riMiiiiikable  ;  near  the  shore  it  is  low,  but  three  miles  inland  isu  very  high  table  mountain, 
wiiicli  rises  almost  perpendicular  from  the  low  land,  and  appears  to  be  quite  flat  at  tho 
to|),  excepting  a  small  hillock  on  tho  .S.  W.  Point  of  it.  This  land  may  bo  seen,  in  clear 
neiitlicr,  from  the  distance  of  IG  or  18  leagues.  Close  to  the  foot  of  the  table  mountain, 
between  it  and  the  point  of  tlie  cape,  is  a  high  round  hill,  resembling  u  sugar  loaf,  (called 
the  Sugar  Loaf  of  Cape  Ray,)  whose  summit  is  a  little  lower  than  that  of  the  table  inoun- 
liiin ;  and  to  the  northwiird  of  this  hill,  under  the  table  mountain,  are  two  other  conical 
liills,  resembling  sugar  loaves,  which  are  not  so  high  as  tho  former.  One  or  other  of 
these  sugar  loaf  hills  are,  from  all  points  of  view,  seen  detached  from  the  table  mountain. 

There  is  a  sandy  bay  between  Capo  Ray  and  Point  Erangee,  wherein  ships  may  anchor 
witii  the  winds  from  N.  N.  W.  to  East,  but  they  should  bo  cautious  not  to  be  surprised 
tiiiTi'  with  '  "V.  winds,  which  blow  directly  in,  and  cause  n  great  seo.  The  ground  is 
Dot  the  bee  olding,  being  lino  sand.     Towards  the  oast  side  of  this  bay  is  a  small 

Icilge  of  r  0  mile  from  sliore,  on  which  the  sou  does  not  break,  in  fine  weather. 

Tiie  best  place  for  large  ships  to  anchor  in  is,  to  bring  the  point  of  the  cape  N.  W.  and 
the  liij;h  white  sand-hill  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay  N.  E.  in  10  fathoms  water.  Small  ves- 
sels iniiy  lie  further  in.  Be  careful  not  to  run  so  far  to  the  eastward  as  to  bring  tho  end 
of  the  table  mountain  on  with  tho  sand-hill  in  the  bottom  of  tho  bay,  by  which  means  the 
ledge  of  rocks  before  mentioned  will  be  avoided. 

N.  W.  4  W.  nearly  one  mile  from  tho  point  of  the  cape,  is  n  small  ledge  of  rocks,  called 
tlie  Capo  Rocks,  whereon  tho  sea  always  breaks;  and,  one  mile  to  tho  northward  of  the 
ciipp,  close  under  tho  land,  is  a  low  rocky  island.  There  is  a  channel  between  the  ledge 
and  the  cape,  with  14  and  15  fathoms  water,  and  also  between  it  and  the  island,  with  4  and 
5  tiitlioms;  but  tho  tides,  which  run  here  with  great  rapidity,  render  itunsafo  for  shijiping. 

The  soundings  under  100  fathoms  do  not  extend  above  a  league  from  the  land  to  the 
southward  and  eastward  of  the  capo,  nor  to  the  westward  and  northward  of  it,  except  on 
abiiiik  which  lies  olf  Port  aux  Haf!(|uo,  between  2  and  .3  leagues  from  tho  land,  whereon 
are  tVoin  70  to  100  fathoms,  good  fishing  ground.  S.  E.  4  S.  about  13  leagues  from  Port 
aux  Basque,  in  the  lat.  of  47*^  14'  noHh,  is  said  to  be  a  bank,  whereon  are  70  fathoms. 

TiiK  TiDKS. —  Between  Capo  Chapeau  Rouge  and  Cape  Ray,  in  all  the  bays,  &c.  the  Tides, 
tide  generally  (lows  till  i)  o'clock,  on  full  and  change,  and  its  perpendicular  rise  is  about 
7  or  rt  t'eet  on  springs, ;  but  it  must  bo  observed,  that  tho  tides  are  »)very  where  greatly 
iiilluenciul  by  the  winds  and  weather.  On  the  coast  between  Cape  Chapeau  Rouge  and 
St.  Pierre,  the  current  sets  gtMierally  to  the  S.  W.  On  the*  south  side  of  Fortune  Hay, 
it  sets  to  the  eastward,  and  on  tho  north  side  to  tho  westward.  Between  Cape  La  Ilune 
and  ()ap((  Ray,  tho  (lood  sets  to  the  westward  in  the  oiling,  very  irregularly;  but  gone- 
rally  '2  or  3  hours  after  it  is  high  water  l)y  tho  shore.  The  tide  or  current  is  inconsider- 
able,  excepting  near  ( .'ape  |{ay,  where  it  is  strong,  and  at  times  sets  quite  contrary  to  what 
mi>;iit  be  expected  from  the  common  course  uf  the  tides,  and  much  stronger  at  one  time 
than  at  another.     These  irregularities  seem  to  depend  chiefly  on  tho  winds. 


68 


ULUNT'S  AMERICAN  CO/.ST  PILOT. 


Islanu'  Cod 
Roy. 


THE  IFESTER^r  COAST  OF  rVEH^FOIJMDLAlVD 

FROM  CAPE  RAY  TO  THE  bTRAIT  OF  BELLE  ISLE. 

FROM  Cape  Rny  to  Cape  Anguille,  the  course  and  distance  are  N.  \  E.  17  or  18  mile 
Cape  Anguille  is  the  northernmost  point  of  land  you  can  see,  after  passing  to  the  west 
wurd  of  Cape  Ray.  It  is  high  table  Ian  1,  and  covered  with  wood,  in  thi  country  nho-e  }(" 
Bptweon  the  high  land  of  the  two  capes  the  coast  is  low,  and  the  shore  forms  a  bnv 
wherein  are  the  great  and  little  rivers  of  Cod  Roy  ;  the  northernmost  is  the  groat  river 
which  has  a  bar-harbor,  fit  to  admit  vessels  of  8  or  10  foot  dri.ught  only  at  high  water' 
The  shore  may  be  approached  between  the  two  capes  jto  half  a  league,  there  beinj 
no  danger  so  far  off.  It  is  a  good  salmon  fishery,  and  for  building  small  vessels  and  boats 
there  being  timber  in  abundance.  • 

ISLAND  COD  ROY— The  Island  of  Cod  Roy  lies  li  or  2  miles  to  the  southward 
of  Cape  Anguille,  close  under  the  high  land.     It  h  a  low,  flat,  green  island,  of  nearly  o 

of  a  horse-shoe,  forming  between  it  and  the  mam,  a  small 


The  safest  entrance  to  it  is  from 


miles  in  c<.mpass,  in  the  shape 

snug  bar  harbor  for  vessels  of  10  or  12  feet  draught, 
the  southward. 

Cod  Roy  COD  ROY  ROAD. — South-eastward  from  the  island  is  Cod  Roy  Road,  wherein  is 

Road.  \6TY  good  anchorage  for  shipping,  in  8,  7,  or  C  fathoms,  on  a  clay  bottom.     ""Vith  the  south 

point  of  the  island  bearing  about  W.  N.  W.,  and  the  point  of  the  beach  on  the  inside  of 
the  island,  at  the  south  ontraiico  into  the  harbor,  on  with  a  point  on  the  main  to  the  north- 
ward  of  the  Mland,  you  will  lie  in  7  fathoms,  and  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.  One 
leogue  to  the  southward  of  Cod  Roy  Island  is  a  high  bluff  point,  called  Stormy  Point,  off 
which  a  shoal  stretches  out  a  full  mile.  This  |)oint  covers  the  road  from  the  S.  S.  E. 
winds,  and  there  is  good  anchorage  all  along  tho  shore,  botwefui  it  and  the  island. 
St.  George's  ST.  GEORGE'S  BAY.— From  Capo  Anguille  to  Cape  St.  George,  the  course  and 
Bay.  distance  are  N.  N.  E   i  E.  nearly  1'-  leagues.     These  two  capos  form  the  Great  Bay  of 

St.  George,  which  extends  inwards  E.  N.  E.  18  leagues  from  the  former,  and  E.  S.E.  H 
leagues  from  the  latter.  At  the  head  of  this  Bay,  on  the  south  side,  round  a  low  point  of 
latjd,  is  a  good  harbor,  with  excellent  anchorage  in  8,  10,  or  '2  fathoms  water.  The  river 
St.  George  emi)tio8  itself  into  the  head  of  this  bay,  but  ii  is  not  nuvigal)lo  for  any  thing 
but  boats.  On  tho  north  sido  of  the  bay,  before  the  isthmus  of  Port-a-Port,  is  good  an- 
ciiorago  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  with  northerly  winds.  From  off  this  place  a  fisliinj^-bank 
Btretchb?  two-thirds  across  the  bay,  with  from  7  to  19  fathoms  water  on  it,  darii  sandy 
bottom. 
Cape  St,  CAPE  ':5T.  GEORGE  may  be  readily  known  not  only  by  its  being  the  north  point  of 

George.  the  bay  oi'  St.  George,  but  also  by  the  steep  cliffs  on  tho  north  part  of  it,  which  rlso  por- 

pendicularly  from  the  sea  to  a  considerable  height;  and  by  Red  Island,  which  lies  5  miles 
to  tho  north-eastward  of  the  cape,  and  halt'  a  mile  from  the  shore.  This  island  is  about 
li  mile  in  length,  and  of  middling  height;  tho  steep  clills  around  it  are  of  areildisli  color. 
There  is  anchorage  with  off-shore  winds  under  tho  N.  E.  end  of  tho  island,  before  a  sundy 
cove  on  the  main,  which  lies  just  to  the  northward  of  the  steep  rlill's,  in  12  or  14  f  itiioma. 
You  will  there  ride,  covered  from  the  S.  W.  winds  by  the  island,  and  from  the  soiitlii'ily 
and  easterly  •"•nds  by  the  main  land,  but  there  is  no  shelter  whatever  with  winds  from  the 
N.  or  N.  W.,  although  this  place  was  heretofore  much  reso.  ed  to  by  vessels  in  the  fish- 
ing trade. 

From  abreast  of  Red  Island,  distant  4  or  5  miles,  to  Long  Point  at  the  entrance  into 
Bearings  and  the  bay  of  Port-a-Port,  the  hearing  and  distance  are  E.  by  N.  7  or  8  leagues.  From  Red 
Distances,  Island  to  Guernsey  Island,  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay  of  Inlands,  E.  N.  H.  i  N.  nearly  Kj 
leaiues :  from  Red  lahii  d  to  Cape  .St.  (}regory,  N.  K.  by  E.  full  20  leagues:  ami  tVniri 
Red  Island  to  Pcint  ^J.Jn,  which  is  the  nortli  jjoint  of  Ingornaclioix  Bay,  N.  E.  \  E.  48i 
leagues. 
Port-a-PM.  PORT-A-  PORT.— The  land  befw.-en  Red  Island  a"(l  the  entrance  into  Port-a-Port 
is  rather  low,  with  sandy  beaches,  oxcc])t  one  reniarkahio  high  hillock,  called  Round  I  lend, 
clos(i  to  the  shore,  about  2  hiagues  to  the  E.  N.  Kastward  of  lied  Island;  but  up  in  tho 
country  ovei  Port-a-Port  are  high  laiidn;  and,  if  you  are  .1  or  4  Ica^iues  oil"  at  sea,  ynu 
cannot  discern  the  long  point  of  land  which  forms  the  bay.  This  bay  is  capacious,  hi'ing 
above  h  miles  broad  at  the  entrance,  and  4  leagues  deep,  running  in  to  the  South  and  .S. 
Westward,  with  good  anclKiragcs  in  most  parts  of  it.  Long  pon.t  is  the  west  jjoint  oltlio 
bay  :  it  is  low  and  rocky,  and  a  ledgciof  rocks  extends  fioin  it  K.  N.  E.  nearly  a  mile.  S. 
E.  by  E.  \  E.  4  miles  from  Long  I'oint,  ami  half  a  league  from  the  east  shore,  lii^s  Fox 
Island,  which  is  sniaii.  but  of  middling  height.  From  tlie  nortli  end  of  this  iHlamI  a  slioa! 
Btretche;:  out  nearly  2  miles  to  N.  N.  Eastward,  called  I'oy's  Tail ;  ami  nearly  in  tli(!  mid- 
dle ,)f  the  li.iy,  between  Kox  Island  and  (he  west  shore,  lies  the  Midillo  Grouiiil,  on  onn 
place  of  which,  near  tho  S.  W.  end,  there  are  not  above  3  or  4  feet  water.  From  tin  liuad 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


59 


nfthe  bay,  projecting  out  into  the  middle  of  it,  is  a  low  point,  called  Middle  Point,  off 
ffbichi  extending  2  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  is  a  shonl  spit,  part  of  which  dries  at  low  water. 
This  Middle  Point  divides  the  bay  into  two  parts,  called  East  and  West  Bays.  From  the 
head  of  the  East  Bay.  over  to  the  Bay  ..^f  St.  George,  the  distance  is  a  large  quarter  of  a 
^jle:  this  isthmus  is  very  low,  and  has  a  pond  in  the  middle  of  it,  into  which  the  sea  fre- 
nuently  dashes  over,  especially  at  high  tides,  and  with  gales  of  wind  from  the  southward. 
L  tlie  east  side  of  it  is  a  tolerably  hi'ih  mountain,  rising  directly  from  the  isthmus,  and 
Aatattop:  to  the  northward  of  this,  uni!  at  about  5  miles  distance  from  the  isthmus,  isacon- 
(picuous  valley,  or  hollow,  hereafter  to  be  used  as  a  mark.  N.  E.  by  E.  4  E.  above  two 
leagues  from  Long  Point,  and  half  a  league  from  the  shore,  lies  Shag  Island,  which  ap- 
neai's  nt  n  distance  like  a  high  rock,  and  is  easily  to  be  distinguished  from  the  main :  and 
\V.  N.  W.  about  a  league  from  it  lies  the  middle  of  Long  Ledge,  which  is  a  narrow  ledge 
ofrocks  stretching  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  about  4  miles:  the  eastern  part  of  them  is 
above  water,  and  the  channel  into  the  bay  of  Port-a-Port,  between  the  west  end  of  thif 
;.Jte  and  the  reef  which  stretches  off  from  the  west  point  of  the  bay,  is  a  league  wide. 

]n  sniling  into  Port-a-Port,  if  coming  from  the  S.  Westward,  advance  no  nearer  to  the 
Long  Point  of  the  bay  than  14  mile,  until  you  have  brought  the  valley,  in  the  side  of  the 
i„iuiitain  before  mentioned,  (on  the  east  side  of  the  isthmus,)  over  the  east  end  of  Fox 
Island,  or  to  the  eastward  of  it,  which  will  then  bear  south  a  little  easterly ;  you  will  then 
be  clear  of  the  Long  Point  Reef,  and  may  haul  into  the  bay  with  safety;  but,  if  coming 
jfoin  tlio  N.  E.  without  the  Long  Ledge,  or  turning  into  the  bay,  in  order  to  keep  clear  of 
(lie  S.  W.  end  of  Long  Ledge,  bring  the  isthmus,  or  the  foot  of  the  mountain,  (which  is 
on  the  east  side  of  the  ist'imus,)  open  to  the  westward  of  Fox  Island,  nearly  twice  the 
breadth  of  the  island.  "-lU  it  will  lead  you  into  the  bay  clenr  of  Long  Ledge;  and  when 
Sbag  Island  is  brought  on  with  the  foot  of  the  high  land  on  the  south  side  of  Coal  River, 
bearing  then  E,  |  S.  you  will  be  within  the  Long  Ledge :  there  is  also  a  safe  passage  into 
the  bay,  between  the  Long  Ledge  and  the  main,  on  either  side  of  Shag  1  (and,  and  taking 
care  to  avoid  a  small  shoal,  ot  24  fathoms,  which  lies  W.  by  N.  one  mile  from  the  island. 
To  sail  up  in  the  West  Bay  and  Head  Harbor,  keep  the  western  shore  on  board ;  this 
ehore  is  bold  to.  in  turning  between  it  and  the  Middle  Ground,  stand  no  nearer  to  the 
middle  tlian  into  8  fathoms ;  but  you  may  stand  to  the  spit  of  the  Middle  Point  into  G  or 
5fatiioms.  The  anchorage  in  West  Bay  is  in  about  8  fathoms,  and  in  Head  Harbor,  in 
about  5  fathoms.  The  West  Road  lies  before  a  high  stone  beach,  about  2  miles  south- 
westward  of  Long  Point,  where  you  may  lie  very  secure  from  westerly  and  N.  W.  winds, 
in  about  10  or  12  fathoms  water:  this  beach  is  steep  to,  and  forms  an  excellent  place  for 
landing  and  drying  your  fish;  there  is  a  good  place  at  the  northern  end  of  Fox's  Island 
for  the  same  purpose.  The  whole  bay  and  the  adjacent  coasts  abound  with  cod,  and  ex- 
tensive fishing  banks  lie  all  along  the  coasts. 

The  East  Road  lies  between  Fox  Island  and  the  east  shore:  to  sail  up  to  it,  you  should 
kee[)  the  high  bluff  head,  which  is  about  a  league  to  the  E.  N.  E.  of  the  island,  bearing 
totiie  southward  of  S.  E.  by  E.  4  E.  until  the  isthmus  is  brought  to  the  eastward  of  Fox 
Island,:  you  will  then  be  within  the  shoal  called  the  Fox's  Tail,  and  may  haul  to  the 
Fouthward,  and  anchor  any  where  between  the  island  and  the  main,  in  trom  10  to  18 
futhoms. 

To  sail  up  the  East  Bay,  pass  between  the  island  and  the  east  shore,  and  after  you  are 
above  the  island,  conio  no  nearer  to  the  main  than  half  a  mile,  until  you  are  abreast  of  a 
Mud' point  above  the  island,  called  Road  Point,  just  above  which  is  the  best  anchorago  with 
; '.  E.  winds,  in  about  12  fathoms  water;  and  to  nail  up  the  East  Bay  between  the  Middle 
C'Mund  and  the  Fox's  Tail,  bring  the  said  bluff  point  on  with  the  S.  W.  point  of  Fox 
Island;  this  mark  will  lead  you  up  in  the  fairway  between  the  two  shoals;  give  the  island 
a  berth,  and  anchor  as  before  directed,  in  froni  8  to  12  falhoms  water. 

DAY  OF  iSLANJJS. — From  the  Long  Poinint  the  entrance  of  Port-a-Port  to  the  Bay  nf  Id- 
Bay  of  Islands,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  E.  by  E.  8  leagues.  Bo  careful  to  avoid  ands. 
the  Long  Lodge;  the  Inn'!  between  is  of  considerable  height,  rising  in  craggy  barren  hills, 
directly  from  the  shore.  The  Bay  of  Islands  may  be  known  by  the  many  islands  in  the 
mouth  of  it,  |)Mrticnlarly  the  thiee  nnnied  GuMiisey  Island,  Tweed  Island,  and  Pearl 
Island,  which  are  nearly  of  equal  height  with  the  limd  on  the  main.  If  you  are  bound  for 
Lark  or  York  Harbors,  which  lie  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  bay,  and  are  coming  from  tlu.< 
soutliwurd,  rui-  in  between  (tuornsey  Island  and  the  South  Head,  both  of  which  are  ''v)ld 
to;  but  with  southerly  and  S.  W.  winds  approach  not  too  near  the  South  Head,  lest 
calaii  mill  suilden  gusts  of  wind  s'niuld  proceed  from  the  high  land,  under  which  you  can- 
not anchor  with  safety .  There  are  several  channels  formed  by  the  different  islands,  through 
wiiicli  you  may  sail  in  or  out  of  the  liay,  there  being  no  danger  but  what  shows  itself,  ex- 
cept a  Hmall  ledge  of  rockn,  which  lie  half  a  !nilo  north-eastward  from  the  northern  Shag 
Rock,  and  in  a  lino  with  the  two  Shag  Rocks  in  one.  If  yo\i  bring  the  South  Shag 
Kockopen  on  either  side  of  the  Noith  Rock,  you  will  go  chnir  tn  the  eastward  or  west- 
ward of  the  l('il;;e.  The  safest  piissage  into  this  hay  from  the  nortliward,  is  between  the 
two  Shag  Rocks,  and  then  between  Tweed  Island  and  Pearl  Island. 


6C 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Lark  Harbor     LARK  HARBOR.— From  Guprnsey  Islimd  to  Tortoise  Hend,  which  is  the  north 
of  Yorl<  Hnrhor.  nnd  the  S.  E.  point  of  Lnrk  Harbor,  the  course  and  distance  are 


I  point 


York  Harbor 


Cape  St. 
Gregory. 

Bonne  Bay. 


Cow  Head. 


Ul    J.  ui  i\  xAfii  uui  •  fii»»*  HIV'   *^.  *-..   f..^....  w»  .b^f  ■■    «.«»•»«•«,   »«.^   wuiD«^  uiju    ujDuillcU  are  nnni*! 

S.  S.  W.  6  miles;  Lark  Harbor  extends  inwards  W.  S.  W.  nearly  two  miles,  and  is  o 
third  of  a  mile  broad  in  the  entrance,  which  is  the  narrowest  part:  in  sailing  into  it  \Jlt 
a  large  ship,  keep  the  larboard  shore  on  board,  and  anchor  with  a  low  point  on  the  m 
board  side,  bearing  W.  N.  W.,  N.  N.  W.,  or  N.  N.  E.,  and  you  will  ride  in  6  or  7  M>' 
oms  water,  secnre  from  all  winds.  ^" 

YORK  HARBOR. — From  Tortoise  Head  into  York  Harbor,  the  course  anddistnn 
3  W.  S.  W.  nearly  a  league;  there  is  good  turning  room  between  the  Head  and  G  "^^ 
ernor's  Island,  which  lies  before  the  harbor:  but  you  must  be  careful  to  avoid  a  sh"*! 
which  runs  off  from  a  low  beach  point  on  the  west  end  of  Governor's  Island,  called  Swn*i 
Point;  there  is  also  n  shoal  which  spits  oft'  from  the  next  point  of  Governor's  Island  whi  V, 
must  also  be  avoided:  Tortoise  Head  just  touching  Sword  Point  will  lead  clear  of  jt. 
sailing  in,  give  Sword  Point  a  berth,  passing  which,  the  best  anchoring  ground  is  in  in 
fathoms,  along  a  sandy  beach  on  the  main,  with  Tortoise  Head  open  of  Sword  Point. 
W.  and  N.  Westerly  winds  blow  here  with  great  violence.  ' 

Harbor  Island  liosnt  the  entrance  of  the  River  Humber,  and  S.  by  E.  i  E.  7  miles  from 
uernsey  Island:  at  its  S.  W.  point  is  Wood's  Harbor,  which  is  unfit  for  shipping,    Tii« 


Gueri 


'PP'.ng-    Tlie 


River  Humber,  at  about  5  leagues  within  the  entrance,  becomes  narrow,  and  the  strenm 
is  so  rapid  in  some  places,  for  about  4  leaguer  >•{),  to  a  lake,  that  it  is  with  great  ditficuitv 
that  even  a  boat  can  stem  the  current.  •' 

The  North  and  South  Arms  are  both  long  inlets,  with  very  deep  water  up  to  tl 
heads.  On  the  east  side  of  Eagle  Island,  between  the  North  and  South  Arms,  isanohor- 
rge  in  8,  10.  or  12  fathonjs  water.  Under  the  North  side  of  Harbor  Island  also  is  good  an- 
chorage with  S.  W.  winds:  and  opposite  to  the  S.  E.  end  of  Harbor  Island,  on  the  south 
side  of  the  bay,  is  Frenchman's  Cove,  wherein  is  good  anclii)rag(^  in  from  '20  to  12  fathoms 
The  Bay  of  Islands  was  formerly  much  frequented  by  vessels  in  the  cod  fishery,  ind  stages 
were  erected  at  Small  Bay,  which  lies  a  little  on  the  outside  of  South  Head ;  and  ihe  large 
beach  on  Sword  Point,  in  Governor's  Island,  is  an  excellent  place  for  drying  the  fish, 

From  the  North  Shag  Rock  to  Cape  St.  Gregory,  the  course  and  distance  are  nearly 
N.  E.  8  miles;  and  thence  13  or  14  miles,  on  a  similar  bearing,  will  carry  you  to  the  en- 
trance of  Honne  Bay.  The  land  near  the  shore  from  the  North  Shag  Rock  to  Cape  St, 
Gregory  is  low,  along  which  lie  sunken  rocks,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore:  but  a 
very  little  way  inland  it  rises  into  a  high  n)ountaiii,  terminating  at  the  top  in  round  hilU, 
CAPE  ST.  GUEGORY  is  high,  and  between  it  and  Bonne  Bay  the  land  rises  directly 
from  the  sea  shore  toaconsideiiible  height;  it  is  the  most  northerly  land  you  can  discern 
when  sidling  along  shore  between  Red  Island  and  the  Bay  of  Islands. 

B(^NNK  BAY  may  he  known,  at  the  distance  of  4  or  5  leagues,  by  the  land  nboutit' 
all  that  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  bay  being  very  high  and  hilly,  and  that  on  the  N.  K.  side 
and  thence  along  the  sea-coast  to  the  northward,  being  low  and  (lat;  but,  at  about  one 
league  inland  is  a  range  of  mountains,  which  runs  parallel  with  the  sea-coast.  Over  the 
Boiilh  side  of  the  bay  is  a  very  high  mountain,  terminating  at  top  in  a  remarkable  round 
hill,  very  conspicuous  when  you  are  to  the  northward  of  the  bay.  This  bay  extends  inward 
E.  S.  K.  nearly  '_'  leagues,  then  branches  into  two  arms,  one  of  which  runs  in  to  the  south- 
wai'd,  and  the  other  to  the  eastward;  the  soutliern  arm  aH'ords  the  best  anchorage;  smiill 
vessels  should  ride  just  above  a  low  woody  point  at  the  entrance  into  this  arm,  on  the  star- 
board side,  before  a  sandy  beach,  in  -^or  10  fathon)s  water,  aboutn  cable's  length  from  the 
shore;  there  is  no  other  anidiorage  in  less  than  ,'50  or  40  fiithoms,  excepting  at  the  bond  of 
the  arm,  where  there  are  from  2"j  to  20  fathoms  water;  in  sailing  into  the  East  Aru),  keep 
the  starboard  shore  on  board;  and,  a  little  routid  a  point  at  the  entrance,  will  be  I'oiiiida 
small  cove,  with  good  anchorage  in  17  to  20  fiithoms,  but  you  must  moor  to  the  shore. 
There  is  a  snug  cove  also  close  within  the  North  Point,  with  anchorage  in  C  or  7  fathoms 
water;  in  sailing  in  or  out  of  Bonne  Bay,  witli  W.  S.  W.  winds,  come  not  near  the  wea- 
ther shore,  lest  you  sliouM  happen  to  bo  becalmed,  or  should  meet  with  heavy  gusts  of 
wind,  as  tlio  depth  of  wiitiT  is  too  great  to  admit  of  your  anchoring. 

Ten  miles  to  the  northward  of  Bonne  Bay  is  iMiirtin  Point,  high  and  white,  off  which, 
about  tliice-qiiarters  of  a  mile,  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks,  whereon  the  sea  breaks.  Brooino 
point  i-i  low  and  white,  and  lies  about  a  leagui?  to  the  northward  of  .Martin  Point;  iitwut 
half  a  iiiile  W.  .S.  W.  I'rom  it  lies  a  sunken  rock  that  seldom  shows  itstdf;  on  the  iiortli 
siileof  15roomi>  Point  li"s  the  Bay  of  .St.  Paul,  wherein  vessels  may  anchor  with  oll'-slioie 
winils,  but  it  isijuile  exposed  to  the  sea. 

C'()\V'  11  K\  I)  lies  about  I  nnlcs  to  the  northward  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Paul:  this  is  a 
priimiiiitiiry,  which  has  the  a{i|iearaiice  of  an  i.sl.nnl,  it  beiiii;  joined  to  the  main  only  by  a 
very  Iipw  ami  niirrow  neck  (d'laml:  iiixmt  tliief-(|iiarterH  of  ii  mile  (iff  this  head  1  es  Sti'er- 
ing  l>liind,  which  is  low  and  rorky,  ami  is  the  only  island  on  the  ciiast  between  the  liay 
ot  Islands  and  Point  Iticli.  (  ow  Cov(>  lies  on  the  south  side  of  ( 'ow  I  lend,  and  ships  may 
lio  there  in  from  7  to  10  lathoms,  sheltered  frmn  northerly  and  easterly  winds.    Slmlluw 


mmm 


distnnce 
and  Gov- 
"shoal 
'd  Sword 
0'  which 
:*!*"'t;in 
'IS  in  10 

d  Point; 

i'es  from 
'g-  The 
"Stream 
difficuhy 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  61 

Hgv  lies  on  the  north  side  of  Cow  HeRcl,nnd  has  water  sufficient  for  smoll  vessels ;  at  the 
«  E.  sido  of  the  entrance  is  a  cluster  of  rocky  islands,  extending  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W. 
niot  the  W.  S.  W.  side  are  two  sunken  rocks  close  to  each  other,  which  generally  show 
Lmselves;  they  lie  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  and  there  is  a  channel  into  the  bay 
neither  side  of  them.  Steering  Island  lies  right  before  this  bay,  which  you  may  pass 
either  side,  but  come  not  too  near  its  N.  E.  end,  as  there  are  some  sunken  rocks  ex- 
tending from  it.  This  is  considered  the  best  situated  for  a  fishery  of  all  the  roast,  and  the 
fround  about  its  environs  is  eminently  productive. 

"^INGORNACHOIX  BAY. — From  Steering  Island  to  Point  Rich  the  course  is  nearly  Ingomachoix 
«  E-  distni't  50  miles;  Point  Ricli  is  the  northern  point  of  Ingornachoix  Bay.  From  Bay. 
iballow  Bay  to  the  southern  point  of  Ingornachoix  Bay  the  coast  is  nearly  in  a  straiglit 
fine,  there  being  all  the  way  neither  creek  nor  cove,  where  a  vessel  can  find  shelter  from 
the  sea  winds,  although  there  are  a  few  places  where  they  might  anchor  occasionally 
«jlh  innd  winds.  About  6  leagues  from  Steering  Island  there  is  a  hill,  standing  lialf  a  mile 
Inland,  which  is  commonly  called  Portland  Bill,  probably  because  it  resembles  Portland  Bill 
in  the  English  channel,  and  alters  not  its  appearance  in  whatever  point  oi  view  it  is  taken. 

POKT  SAUNDERS  and  H  AWKE'S  HARBOR.— These  are  situated  within,  and  .o  Port  Saun- 
the  eastward  of  Ingornachoix  Bay.     At  tht  entrance  lies  Keppel  Island,  which,  at  a  dis-  ders  and 
{aDce,  will  not  easily  be  distinguished  from  the  main  land.     There  is  a  passage  on  both  Hawke's 
sides  of  the  island.    To  sail  into  Port  Saunders  there  is  no  impediment  or  danger.    You  Harbor. 
^ill  leave  Keppel  Island  on  your  starboard  side,  and  when  you  get  about  half  a  mile  with- 
in the  entrance  you  can  anchor  in  12  or  14  fathoms  water;  but  if  you  are  intending  to 
run  up  to  tlie  lieod  of  the  harbor,  you  must  keep  the  larboard  shore  on  board,  in  order  to 
avoid  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which  lies  near  the  mid-channel.     This  is  considered  to  be  the  best 
liarborfor  vessels  that  are  bound  to  the  southward. 

HAWKE'S  harbor. — 'i\)  enter  this  harbor  vessels  commonly  go  to  the  southward  Hawke's 
of  Keppel  Island.  The  starboard  shore  is  shoal,  and  has  a  sand  bank  which  stretches  Harbor. 
along  the  land,  and  runs  out  two-thirds  of  the  passage  over,  great  partof  which  dries  atlow 
wnter.  Your  course  in  will  be  E.  S.  E .  keeping  nearer  to  Keppel  Island  than  to  the  main, 
untilthe  eastern  end  of  the  island,  which  is  a  low  stony  beach,  bears  N.  E.  by  N.  or  N. 
>;.  E.  then  steer  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  for  a  small  island  you  will  see,  situated  further  up  the 
iinrhor,  i^ceping  the  larboard  sliore  well  on  board  ;  run  direct  for  this  island,  and  when 
vou  have  iii'oiight  the  |)()int  at  tile  soutli  entrance  of  the  harbor  to  bear  N .  N.  K.  i  N.  and 
ire  nt  the  S.  S.  E.  point  of  a  bay  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  harbor,  you  will  then  be  be- 
Tiiiid  tlic  .«h(ial  ground,  find  nitiy  iiiuhor  in  112  fiilhonis  wiiter;  or  else  run  within  half  a 
niileof  the  small  island,  and  anchor  there,  which  will  be  more  convenient  for  both  wood 
8!iJ  wulor.  This  is  the  best  harbor  for  ships  bound  to  the  northward.  The  land  round 
about  these  harbors  is  generally  low,  and  covered  with  wood.  You  may  occasionally  an- 
chor'ontside,  ill  the  Bay  of  Ingornachoix,  according  as  you  find  the  prevailing  winds. 

POINT  RICH  is  the  soutii-western  point  of  a  peninsula,  which  is  almost  surrounded  Point  Rich. 
by  tlie  sea,  being  every  where  of  moderate  height,  anil  projecting  further  to  seaward 
thiiii  any  other  land  on  this  side  of  Newfoundland,  the  coast  from  thence,  each  way,  taking 
an  inwaril  direction. 

PORT  All  CIIOIX. — Rounding  Point  Rich,  on  its  northern  side,  you  will  meet  with  Port  au 
Port  au  Clioix,  small,  but  yet  capable  of  admitting  a  sliip  of  burden,  mooring  head  and   Clioix. 
stern.    To  sail  in  you  siionl  I  keep  tlie  starboard  shore  on  board,  and  ancrhor  just  i        e  a 
siiwll  isliiiid  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor.     In  this  place,  and  also  in  Boat  Cove,      aich 
lies  ft  little  to  the  north  eastward,  there  are  several  stages  and  places  for  drying  fish. 

OLD  POUT  AU  CHOiX  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Boat  Covo  ;  it  is  a  small  but  safe  Old  Port  aw 
harlHir,  hiiviiig  at  its  entrance  uii  island  called  Harbor  Island,  and  on  its  western  side  some  Clioix. 
rockm,  Imtli  iiliove  and  under  water.  There  is  also  another  island  lying  K.  N.  E.  4  N.  dis- 
tant nearly  a  mile  from  Harbor  Island,  about  which  are  siiveral  rocks,  some  of  which 
gtii'ttli  out  towards  Harbor  Island,  and  render  the  passage  very  narrow  between  them. 
ThtM-e  are  4,  •").  l>,  and?  fathoms  water  between  Savage  Island  and  the  main,  and  4  and  5 
fiitliiiiiis  between  Savage  Island  Rocks  iind  Harbor  Island;  and  nearly  the  same  depth 
lictwci  n  Harbor  Isbiiid  and  the  western  shore.  To  sail  into  Old  Port  au  Choix,  on  the 
western  side  of  Harbor  Island,  you  must  keep  the  island  close  on  board  ;  but  to  go  in  on 
the  eastern  side  of  the  island,  yive  the  north-eastern  point  of  the  island  ii  berth,  and  hav- 
ini;  Wfil  fiili-reil,  you  iii.iy  anchor  any  wliere  on  the  larboard  side  of  the  harbor,  only 
avdiiliii;;  the  starboiird  sid(',  fir  a  shoal  of  sand  and  nuid  runs  all  along  it. 

liW  OF  ST.  JOHN.— This  is  an  open  and  extensive  bay,  lioiiiided  by  Point  Rich  to  Buy  of  St. 
tho  similiw.iid.  and  Foiiit  Fcrolle  to  t\\'  iioriliward.  luivin:;  smi'i'MJ  isliimls  within  it,  and  Jokn. 
siiiiic  suiilviMi  rocks.  The  largest  of  llies(<  islands  is  St.  .lohn's,  about  'JfJ  miles  in  length, 
ami  11  broiul ;  this  lies  F..  N.  F.  distmt  rti  miles  from  Point  Rich:  on  its  sou'h-western 
siiie  is  a  sm  i!l  liuriior.  well  (•  ilciililed  for  the  cod  lisliery.  but  too  much  exposed  for  ship- 
ping, ass  lilt li  westerly  winds  coniinoiily  drive  in  a  heavy  sea.  On  the  south-eastern  or 
inner  side  of  tlin  island,  and  b  'twi'i'ii  it  ainl  One  Head  Island,  vessels  may  lie  much  more 
secure,  in  14  or  Ki  fathoms  water,  and  sheltered  from  most  winds  ;  and  this  is  considered 


63 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•     to  be  the  only  safe  anchorage  in  the  whole  bay.     West  from  St.  John's  Island,  one  Jarir 
mile,  is  Fiat  Island,  having  a  rock  above  water  at  its  southern  end.     The  channel  betwe 
St.  John's  and  Flat  Island  has  from  13  to  35  fathoms  in  it,  and  they  are  both  bold  to.    Tu^ 
Twin   Islands  lie  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Flat  Island,  distant  one  league,  and  have  no  dane    I 
about  them.     To  the  westward  of  the  Twins  are  several  scattered  rocks  above  virat  .  ' 
named  the  Bay  Islands ;  they  have  deep  water  around  them,  but  do  anchorage.    Th' 
land  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay  is  very  high,  and  there  is  the  little  river  ''f  Castors,  the  e  * 
,  trance  to  which  is  dangerous  and  shallow,  therefore  seldom  frequented.     From  the  north" 

ern  point  of  this  bay  a  rocky  shoal  extends  all  the  way  to  Point  Ferolle,  stretching  o  't 
24  miles  from  the  shore.  ^^ 

PointFerolle.  POLNT  FEROLLE  lies  N.  E.  by  E.  from  Point  Rich,  distant  22  miles;  it  ig  f 
moderate  height,  and  joined  to  the  main  by  a  nock  of  land,  which  divides  the  Bay  of  Si 
John's  from  New  Feroiie  Bay,  making  it  appear  like  an  island,  when  seen  from  a  distance' 
its  northern  shore  is  bold  to,  and  this  part  of  the  coast  will  easily  be  known  by  the  adi  ' 
cent  table  land  of  St.  John's,  the  west  end  of  which  mounttiin  lies  from  the  middle  f 
Ferolle  Point  S.  by  W.  and  its  eastern  end  S.  E.  3  S.  ' 

New  Ferolle     NEW  FEROLLE  BAY  is  a  small  cove  lying  t'   .he  eastward  of  the  point,  and  is  quite 
Bay.  flat  all  over, there  being  not  more  than  2  and  3  futiionn  at  any  part;  it  is  quite  open  to  tha 

northerly  winds,  has  a  stage  on  each  side  of  it,  with  j)Ienty  of  room  for  others. 

St.  Margaret's  Bay  is  large,  and  has  several  islands  within  it ;  also  various  inlets  or  coves 
affording  good  anchorage,  particularly  on  its  western  side,  which  is  the  best  situation  for 
ships,  being  most  clear  of  danger,  and  convenient  for  wooding  and  watering.  On  its  banks 
are  spruce  and  fir  trees  in  plenty,  and  many  rivulets  of  fresh  water.  Dog  Island  is  to  the 
eastward  of  Point  Ferolle  full  3  miles,  and  only  divided  from  the  main  at  high  water;  it  is 
higher  than  any  land  near  it,  which  gives  it  the  appearance,  when  seen  from  the  eastward 
of  an  island  situated  at  some  distance  from  the  main.  ' 

Old  Ferolle.  OLD  FEROLLE. — To  the  eastward  of  Dog  Island  about  5  miles  is  Ferolle  Island. 
This  island  lies  parallel  to  the  shore,  and  forms  the  Imrbor  of  Old  Ferolle,  which  is  very 
good  and  safe.  The  best  entrance  to  it  is  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  island,  passing  to  the 
southward  of  a  small  island  at  the  entrance,  which  is  bold  to.  As  soon  as  you  are  within 
it,  haul  up  E.  N.  E.  and  anchor  under  the  S.  W.  end  of  Ferolle  Island,  in  8  or  9  fmh. 
oms,  good  ground,  quite  land-locked.  Tliero  is  also  good  anchorage  any  whore  along  the 
inside  of  the  island,  and  a  good  channel  up  to  the  N.  E.  end  tlier«!of.  There  are  sumo 
httle  islands  lying  at  the  N.  E.  end  of  Ferolle  Island,  and  on  the  outside  are  some  ledges 
of  rocks  a  small  distance  olT. 
Bay  of  St.  BAY  OF  ST.  GENEVIEVE.— From  the  north  end  of  Ferolle  Island  to  St.  Genevieve 

Genevieve.  Head,  the  course  is  E.  N.  E.  44  miles,  and  thence  to  the  west  end  of  Current  Island  it  is 
north-eastward  about  3  miles.  There  are  several  small  isiiinds  lying  in  and  l-jfore  this  hiiy 
only  two  of  which  are  of  any  considci'able  extent.  The  iil'oro  iiuMitioiKul  Current  IsliinJ 
is  the  northernmost  of  the  two,  and  the  largest;  it  is  of  a  modtMato  lu'ij;ht,  and  when  yon 
are  to  the  E.  N.  E.  of  it,  the  western  point  will  afipear  blulf  but  not  high;  ami  when  you 
are  to  the  westward  of  it,  it  appears  flat  and  white.  The  otlitir,  culled  (tooscfberry  Island, 
lies  nearly  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  it,  and  its  west  point  bears  from  the  west  point  of 
Current  Island  S.  S.  W.  4  VV.  nearly  a  mile.  (Jooseberry  Island  has  a  cross  on  its  S.W. 
end,  from  which  point  stretches  out  a  ledge  of  rocks  near  linlf  a  mile  to  the  southwnrd. 
There  is  also  a  shoal  about  half  a  mile  to  the  W.  S.  W  from  the  .S.  W.  point  orCmrent 
Island.  The  best  channel  into  this  bay  is  to  the  southwanl  of  these  islands,  between  the 
rocks  which  stretch  off  them  and  a  small  island  lying  .S.  S.  W.  from  them,  which  islimd 
lies  near  the  south  shore.  In  this  channel,  which  is  very  narrow,  there  are  not  less  tlinn 
5  fathomsat  low  water, and  the  course  in  is  E.by  S.  southerly,  until  you  come  to  the  Icnmh 
of  the  afore-mentioned  island,  passing  which,  you  should  haul  to  the  southward,  aiidhrinir 
St.  Genevieve  Head  between  the  small  island  and  the  main,  in  order  to  avoid  the  middle 
bank.  You  may  either  anchor  behind  the  small  island  in  a  or  C  fathoms  water,  or  pm- 
ceed  farther,  with  the  said  mark  on,  until  the  S.  W.  arm  is  ojjcm,  and  anchor  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  bay,  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water.  Here  is  wond  and  uuter  to  bo  had.  Tliero  is 
tolerably  good  anchoring  in  most  parts  of  the  bay,  but  ilie  snuyuest  phice  is  in  the  S.  W, 
arm.  The  entrance  to  it  is  narrow,  and  lius  oidy  4  t;illioms  at  low  water.  In  coniinj; 
into  the  bay,  if  you  get  out  of  the  channel  on  eiilier  side,  you  will  shoalen  your  waturiiii- 
mediately  to  3  or  2  fathoms. 
Bay  of  St.  BAY  OF  ST.  BARBK.— From  the  west  end  of  Current  Island  to  St.  Barbe  Point  itis 

Barbe.  E.by  N.  24  miles,  and  from  .St.  Bariie  Point  to  Anchor  Point  it  is  N.  N.  I',,  nearly  liuiilr. 

Between  them  lies  the  Bay  of  .St.  Barbe;  it  runs  in  .S.  by  E.  about  2  miles  t'ldiii  .Smlior 
Point.  To  sail  in,  give  Anchor  Point  and  all  the  east  side  of  llie  bay  a  good  berth,  to  avoid 
the  sunken  rocks  which  lie  along  that  shore.  You  must  be  well  in  before  you  can  discover 
the  entrance  into  the  harbor,  which  is  but  narrow;  then  sti'cr  south,  kee|)iiig  in  the  niiddlo 
of  the  cl.riiiiiel,  and  anchor  as  soon  as  you  are  withi  tlie  two  points,  in  asinnll  cove,  on  the 
west  side,  in  5  fathoms  \witer,  on  sand  and  mud,  quite  Iniid-loiki'd.  N(uir  this  ;  '  uu*  liriinch 
out  two  arms  or  rivers,  one  called  th  '  -outb,  the  other  the  east;  the  latter  has  3  fath- 


■i 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


63 


'■^s;  it  is  of 
Bay  of  St. 
a  distance- 

e  middle  of 

and  is  quite 
open  to  tba 
s. 

lets  or  coves 
ituation  for 
On  its  banks 
and  is  to  the 
water;  it  ig 
le  eastward, 

rollo  Island, 
liicli  is  Very 
's«'ng  to  the 
I  «'••-'  within 
8  or  9  faiii. 
•e  along  the 
re  iiro  sumo 
some  ledges 

t.  Cienevieve 
\t  Island  it  is 
;or«>  this  hny, 
rreiit  Isluml 
111  when  you 

1(1  wluMlyou 

lerry  Isliuid, 
■est  point  of 
on  itsS.AV. 
soiitliwaid. 
t  ofCiiiTent 

ll'fWtHMlthe 

vliicli  isliiiid 
lot  less  than 

0  tlie  Icnjrth 
il,  mid  hrine 

1  the  niidilie 
iter,  or  pro- 
ill  tilt)  mid- 

.  There  is 
the  S.  W. 
Ill  cipiniiij; 

ir  water  iiu- 

le  I'oint  itis 
rly  14  mik 
oiii  Anchor 
ill,  to  avoid 
:an  iliscover 
the  iiiiiidle 
nive,  on  the 
lace  In  iiiich 
has  3  t'ath- 


I M}  a  gooi  ^"^7  "P'  ''"''  *'^®  former  is  shoal.  Between  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  bay  and 
est  po'O''  of  tl^®  harbor  is  a  cove,  wherein  are  sunken  rocks,  which  lie  a  little  without  the 
rpe  of  the  two  points.  In  the  open  bay  are  7,  8,  or  9,  fathoms ;  but  the  N.  W.  winds 
'ea  heavy  sea  to  fall  in  here,  which  renders  it  unsafe. 

from  Anchor  Point  to  the  extremity  of  the  Seal  Islands,  the  course  is  N.  E.  i  E.  one 

I  ague.    Off  Anchor  Point  a  ledge  stretches  itself  W.  by  S.  about  one-third  of  a  mile. 

I  rjlijere  are  no  ether  dangers  between  it  and  the  Seal  Islands,  but  what  lie  very  near  the 

'  The  Seal  Islands  are  white  and  rocky,  and  must  not  be  approached  but  with  care  on 
their  north  and  western  sides,  because  there  are  some  sunken  rocks  near  them. 

prom  the  N.  W.  Seal  Island  to  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  Flower  Ledge,  it  is  N.  N.  E. 
near  two  miles.    Part  of  this  ledge  appears  at  low  water,  and  there  are  10  fathoms  close 

J  its  off  side. 

MISTAKEN  COVE. — From  the  north  part  of  Flower  Ledge  to  Orenvillo  Ledge,  it  Mistaken 
ijabout  li  mile  E.  by  S.,  and  Grenville  Ledge  lies  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  W.  by  N.  Cove. 
from  the  eastern  point  of  Mistaken  Cove ;  between  which  and  Seal  Islands  lie  also  Name- 
less Cove  and  Flower  Cove,  neither  of  which  are  fit  for  ships. 

SAVAGE  COVE. — Close  to  the  eastward  of  Mistaken  Cove  is  Savage  Cove,  which  Savage 
ijjga  little  island  in  its  entrance,  and  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels  and  boats.  Ccwe. 

g  udy  Bay  lies  2  miles  eastward  from  Savage  Cove,  where  small  vessels  may  ride  in  3 
5, :  .iithoms  water,  with  the  winds  from  E.  to  S.  W. 

About  E.  N.  E.  5  large  miles  from  Sandy  Bay,  is  Green  Island;  between  them,  at  3 
jiiles  distant,  W.  i  S.  from  Green  Island,  is  the  north  extremity  of  Double  Ledge, 
ivbich  extends  nearly  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  has  only  8  or  9  feet  water 

on  it- 
Green  Island  lies  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  the  main,  is  two-thirds  of  a  mile 
in  length,  very  low  and  narrow,  and  agreeable  in  color  to  the  name  it  bears.  From  the 
east  end  of  it  a  ledge  of  rocks  extends  three-fourths  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward,  on  which 
the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather.  There  are  4  or  5  fathoms  water  in  the  channel  between 
ihe  island  and  the  main,  where  ships  may  anchor  if  necessary.  To  go  in  from  the  west- 
irard,  keep  the  island  close  on  board  for  the  deepest  water,  which  is  4  fathoms ;  and  going 
in  from  the  eastward,  keep  the  main  on  board.  From  this  island  to  the  opposite  part  of  the 
coast  of  Labrador,  called  Castles,  or  Red  Cliffs,  which  is  the  narrowest  part  of  the  Strait 
ofljelle  Isle,  the  distance  is  about  33  leagues,  and  they  bear  from  each  other  N.  N.  W. 
nnd  S.  S.  L. 

BOAT  HARBOR. — From  Green  Island  to  Boat's  Head  it  is  E.  i  N.  eight  leagues ;  Boat  Har- 
betweeu  there  is  no  shelter  on  the  coast ;  but  to  the  south-eastward  of  Boat's  Head  is  a  bor. 
cove,  called  Boat  Harbor,  where  small  vessels  and  boats  may  lie  very  secure,  except  with 
N.  E.  winds. 

Cape  Norman  lies  E.  4  miles  from  Boat's  Head,  and  is  the  northernmost  point  of  land 
in  NHwfouudland.     This  has  been  already  described.     (See  page  36.) 

TiDKS. — The  tides  flow  at  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon  as  follow:  at  New  and  Old  Tidet. 
Fcrolle,  till  a  quarter  after  11  o'clock;  in  the  Buys  of  Genevieve  and  St.  Barbe,  at  half 
after  10,  and  at  Green  Island  until  9.  Spring  tides  rise  7  feet,  neaps  4  feet.  In  the  Bay 
ofl'istolet  it  flows  till  three-quarters  after  C,  and  in  Noddy  Harbor  and  Griquet,  until  a 
qaarter  after  5.  Spring  tides  rise  j  feet,  neaps  about  3.  Before  Quirpon,  in  settled  wea- 
ther, the  tide  sets  to  the  snutliwurd  9  hours  out  of  the  12,  and  stronger  than  the  northern 
stream.  In  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  the  flood,  in  the  ofiing,  sets  to  the  westward  two  hours 
after  it  is  high  water  on  the  shore  ;  but  in  blowing  weatlier  the  stream  is  subject  to  many 
uiterutious. 


GULF  OF  «T.  L/IWREIVCE. 

The  following  directions  for  navigating  this  Gulf  are  taken,  with  some  alterations  as  to 
nrraiifonient,  from  those  of  Captain  H.  W.  Bayfield,  R.  N.,  who  has  been  employed  in  a 
minute  survey  of  this  (iulf  tor  some  years. 

The  main  entrance  into  this  Gulf  is  between  Capo  Ray,  the  south-western  point  of 
Newfoundland,  and  Capo  North,  the  north-cast  point  of  Cape  Breton  Island, 

IcK. — Among  the  difhculties  of  navigation  may  bo  mentioned  the  ice.  In  spring  the  Ice. 
pntrance  and  eastern  parts  of  the  Gulf  are  fre(iuently  covered  with  it,  and  vessels  are 
snnictimes  beset  for  many  ilays.  Being  unfitted  for  contending  with  this  danger,  they 
often  suffer  from  it,  and  are  occasiorudly  lost;  but  serious  accidents  from  this  cause  do 
not  frequently  occur,  because  the  ice  is  generally  in  a  melting  state  from  the  powerful 
elfect  ot  the  sun  in  spring.  In  the  fall  of  the  year  acL-idents  from  ice  seldom  occur  ex- 
cept when  the  winter  commi'iiccs  siiddonly,  or  when  vessels  linger  imprudently  late  from 
the  teniptatiuii  of  obtaining  high  freights. 


64 

FogB. 


Winds. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Foas. — But  all  danger  from  ice  is  far  less  than  that  which  arises  from  the  prevalance  of 
fogs:  they  may  occur  at  any  time  during  the  open  or  navigable  season,  but  are  most  fro 
quent  in  the  early  part  of  summer.  They  are  rare,  and  never  of  long  continuance  durin» 
westerly  wiuds,  but  seldom  fail  to  accompany  an  easterly  wind  of  any  strength  or  dura 
tion.  The  above  general  observation  is  subject,  however,  to  restriction,  according  to  locn" 
lity  or  seoson.  Thus  winds  between  the  south  and  west,  which  are  usually  clear-weathe" 
winds  above  Anticosti,  are  frequently  accompanied  with  fog  in  the  eastern  parts  of  th' 
Gulf.  Winds  between  the  south  and  east  are  almost  always  accompanied  with  rain  and 
fog  in  every  part.  E.  N.  E.  wir.ds,  above  Point  de  Monts,  are  often  E.  S.  E  or  S.  E 
winds  in  the  Gulf,  changed  in  direction  by  the  high  lands  of  the  south  coast,  and  havo 
therefore  in  general  the  same  foggy  character.  I  speak  of  winds  of  considerable  strenoth 
and  durotion,  and  which  probably  ijxtend  over  great  distances.  Moderate  and  partial  fine- 
weather  winds  may  occur  without  fog  at  any  season,  and  in  any  locality.  In  the  emly 
part  of  the  navigable  season,  especially  in  the  months  of  April  and  May,  clear-weather 
N.  E.  winds  are  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  they  also  sometimes  occur  at2other  seasons 
in  every  part  of  the  Gulf  and  River  St.  Lawrence.  ' 

The  fogs  sometimes  last  several  days  in  succession,  and  to  a  vessel  either  running  up  or 
beating  down,  during  their  continuance,  there  is  no  safe  guide  but  the  constant  use  of  the 
deep  sea  lead,  with  a  chart  containing  correct  soundings. 

The  fogs,  which  accompany  easterly  gales,  Extend  high  up  into  the  atmnanhere,  and  can- 
not  be  looked  over  from  any  part  of  the  rigging  of  a  ship.  They,  however,  are  not  so 
thick  as  those  which  occur  in  calms  after  a  strong  wind,  and  which  are  frequently  so 
den^r  as  to  conceal  a  vessel  within  hail;  whilst  the  former  often,  but  not  always,  admit 
the  land,  ui  other  objects,  to  be  distinguished  at  the  distance  of  a  half  a  mile  or  more  in  the 
day  time. 

The  dense  fogs  which  occur  in  calms,  or  even  in  very  light  winds,  often  extend  only  to 
small  elevations  above  the  sea;  so  that  it  sometimes  happens,  ihat  when  objects  are  hid- 
den at  the  disumce  of  50  yards  from  the  deck,  they  can  plainly  be  seen  by  a  person  50  or 
60  feet  up  the  rigging.  In  the  months  of  October  and  November  the  fogs  and  rain  that 
accompany  easterly  gales  are  replaced  by  thick  snow,  which  causes  equal  embarrassment 
to  the  navigator. 

Winds. — The  prevailing  winds,  during  the  navigable  season,  are  either  directly  up  or 
directly  down  the  estuary,  following  the  course  of  the  chains  of  the  high  lands  on  either 
side  of  the  great  valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence.  Thus  a  S.  E.  wind  in  the  Gulf  becomes  K. 
S.  E.  between  Anticosti  and  the  south  coast,  E.  N.  E.  above  Point  de  Monts,  and  N.  li. 
above  Green  Island.  The  westerly  winds  do  not  appear  to  be  so  much  guided  in  direction 
by  the  high  lands,  excepting  along  the  south  coast,  where  wo  have  observed  a  W.  S.  W. 
wind  at  the  island  of  IJic  become  W.,  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.,  as  wo  ran  down  aionj;  tiie 
high  and  curved  south  const,  until  it  became  a  N.  N.  W.  wind  at  Cape  Gaspe.  Tlieso 
winds  frequently  blow  strong  for  three  or  four  days  in  succession;  the  westerly  winds  be- 
ing almost  always  accompanied  with  fine,  dry,  clear  and  sunny  weather;  the  easterly  winds 
OS  frequently  tiie  contrary,  cold,  wet,  and  foggy.  In  the  spring  the  easterly  winds  most 
prevail,  frequently  blowing  for  several  weeks  in  succession.  As  the  summer  advances, 
the  westerly  winds  become  more  frequent,  and  the  S.  W.  wind  may  be  said  to  \w  the 
prevailing  wind  in  summer  in  all  parts  of  the  river  and  gulf.  Light  south  winds  take  place 
occasionally;  but  north  winds  are  not  common  in  summer,  although  they  somotimeg 
occur.  Steady  N.  W.  winds  do  not  blow  frequently  before  Stiptemher,  excepting  for  a 
few  hours  at  a  time,  when  they  generally  succeed  easterly  winds  wliich  have  died  away 
tea  calm,  forming  the  commencement  of  strong  winds,  and  usually  veering  to  the  S.  W. 
The  N.  W.  wind  is  dry,  wiili  bright  clear  sky,  flying  clouds,  and  showers.  AficM' the 
autumnal  equinox,  winds  to  the  northward  of  west  become  more  common,  and  arc  tiniii 
often  strong  steady  winds,  of  considerable  duration.  In  the  months  of  October  and  Xo- 
veinber,  the  N.  W.  wind  frequently  blows  with  groat  violence  in  heavy  squalls,  with  pas- 
sing showers  of  hail  and  snow,  and  attended  with  sharp  frost. 

Thunder  storms  are  not  uncommon  in  July  and  Augu^^t:  they  seldom  Inst  above  an  hour 
or  two;  but  the  wind  proceeding  from  them  is  in  general  violent  and  sudden,  particularl} 
when  near  the  mountainous  part  of  the  coast:  sail  should,  therefore,  be  fully  and  (|uickly 
reduced  on  their  approach. 

Strong  winds  seldom  veer  quickly  from  one  quarter  of  the  compass  to  another  directly 
or  nearly  contrary :  in  general  they  die  away  by  degrees  to  a  calm,  and  are  succeedi-d  hy 
a  wind  in  the  opposite  direction.  I  do  not  mean,  liowexer,  by  tiiis  observation,  tliat  tliey 
miy  not  veer  to  theamount  of  several  points.  N.  W.  winds  seKloin  or  never  veer  round 
by  N.  and  N.  E.  to  east  and  S.  E.;  but  they  do  frequently,  hy  degrees,  to  the  S.  \V.  nfler 
bciconiing  moderate.  S.  W.  winds  seldom  veer  bv  the  N.  W.  and  north  to  the  enntward, 
hut  sometimes  by  the  south  to  S.  E.  and  East.  Easterly  winds  generally  decrease  to  a 
calm,  and  are  succeeded  by  a  wind  from  the  opposite  diri^ction. 

In  the  fine-weuther  wi!sterly  winds  of  summer,  a  fi-esh  t()p'j;allant  breeze  will  often  do- 
crease  to  a  light  breeze  or  calm  at  night,  and  spring  up  again  from  the  same  quarter  on 


^e  following  i 
coast  be  lookec 
jjly  or  extend 
over  to  the  soi 
extend  more  t 
that  is  with  a  I 
ffiil  frequentlj 
early  part  of  tl 
not  fall  with  th 
5t  night  in  the 
common  seaso 

from  M»y  to  <■ 
Occasionally, 
Gales  of  wind 
from  opposite 

Bakometef 
tor,  becomes  \ 
indications,  wl 
(lie  St.  Lavyrt 
30,5  inches  in 
clianges  accon 
stancy.     The 
there  than  in 
alarming,  may 
in  the  wind  oi 
changes,  as  a  ( 
decisive  indicr 
ing  remarks  v 
of  a  gnlo  of  c< 
pation  of  whii 
to  the  length 
weather,  the 
inches,  or  beg 
given  by  the 
precipitation  ( 
the  approach 
appears  mucl 
proportions  o 
images,  such 
certain, 
weather,  but 
the  contrari 
overcast  by 
tinue  during 
dissipated  by 

If  the  fall 
the  gnle  will 
short  duratio 
inches,  a  cl 
The  strengt 
and  to  the 
dom  many 
dies  away  t( 
gale  springs 
barometer 
gale,  at  oth( 
quite  clear, 
of  the  west 
the  haro'Ui 
that  the  circ 
eriy  gale, 
light  at  tirst 
a  falling  bai 
become  mo 
bo  expecte 
within  cert 
If,  on  the  c 
Dot  be  imp 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


65 


the  following  morning :  under  those  circumstances  only  may  a  land  breeze  off  the  north 
coast  be  looked  for.  I  have  observed  the  same  ofT  the  south  coast  also,  but  not  so  decid- 
ediy  0^  extending  so  far  offshore.  I  have  occasionally  carried  the  north  land  wind  nearly 
over  to  the  south  coast  just  before  daylight,  but  have  never  observed  the  south  land  wind 
extend  more  than  5  or  6  miles  off,  and  that  very  rirely.  Under  the  same  circumstances, 
that  is  with  a  fine-weather  westerly  wind  going  down  with  the  sun,  a  S.  W.  land  breeze 
ffili  frequently  bo  found  blowing  off  the  north  coast  of  Anticosti  at  night  and  during  the 
early  pi''!^  "f  the  morning.  If,  however,  the  weather  be  not  settled  fair,  and  the  wind  does 
not  fall  with  the  sun,  it  will  usually  prove  worse  than  useless  to  run  a  vessel  close  in  shore 
at  night  in  the  hope  of  a  breeze  off  the  land.  Such  is  the  usual  course  of  the  winds  in 
common  seasons,  in  which  a  very  heavy  gale  of  wind  will  probably  not  be  experienced 
from  M'ly  to  October,  although  close-reefed  topsail  breezes  are  usually  common  enough. 
Occasioiiiilly,  however,  there  are  years,  tlie  character  of  which  is  decidedly  stormy. 
Gales  uf  winds,  of  considerable  strength,  then  follow  each  other  in  quick  succession  and 
from  opposite  quarters. 

Barometer. — The  marine  barometer,  which  is  at  all  times  of  great  use  to  the  naviga-  Barometer. 
tor,  becomes  particularly  so  in  such  sunsons  :  and  the  Ibllowing  remarks  upon  its  general 
iodicBtions,  when  taken  in  connexion  with  the  usual  course  of  the  winds  and  weather  in 
the  St.  Lawrence,  may,  thorofore,  be  useful.  The  barometer  has  a  range  from  29  to 
30,5  inches  in  the  Gulf  and  River  of  St.  Lawrence  during  the  navigable  season,  and  its 
changes  accompany  those  of  the  winds  and  weather  with  a  considerable  degree  of  con- 
jtancy.  The  fluctuations  of  the  barometric  column  are  much  greater  unJ  more  frequent 
there  than  in  lower  latitudes ;  and  sudden  alterations,  which  in  other  climates  would  be 
alarming,  may  occur  there  without  being  followed  by,  any  corresponding  change  either 
iu  the  wind  or  weather.  But  the  navigator  should  not  be  inattentive  to  those  minor 
changes,  as  a  constant  attention  to  the  instrument  can  alone  enablo  him  to  appreciate  those 
decisive  indications  of  the  mercury  which  seldom  or  never  prove  deceptive.  The  follow- 
ing remarks  will  apply  to  those  well-marked  changes  which  usually  indicate  the  approach 
of  a  gale  of  considerable  strength,  or  of  a  shift  of  wind  and  weather  ;  the  correct  antici- 
pation of  which  is  often  of  the  utmost  consequence  to  the  safety  of  a  vessel,  as  well  as 
to  the  length  of  her  voyage.  When,  after  a  continuance  of  westerly  winds  and  fine 
weather,  the  barometer  has  risen  nearly  to  its  greatest  height,  say  some  tenths  above  30 
inches,  or  begins  to  fall  a  little,  an  easterly  wind  may  be  soon  expected.  If  to  this  notice 
given  by  the  barometer  be  added  a  warm  hazy  atmosphere  during  the  day,  and  a  heavy 
precipitation  of  dew  at  night,  with  very  bright  twinkling  stars,  or  a  colored  aurora  borealis, 
the  approach  of  an  east  wind  is  almost  certain.  If  land  be  in  sight  at  such  a  time,  and 
appears  much  distorted  by  terrestrial  refraction,  or  if  vessels  in  sight  have  the  relative 
proportions  of  their  hull  and  sails  change  by  the  mirage^  or  present  double  or  treble 
images,  such  appearances  will  render  the  before  probable  indications  of  the  barometer 
certain.  At  the  commencement  the  easterly  wind  will  probably  be  light  with  fine  clear 
weather,  but  this  will  not  last  above  a  few  hours  if  the  barometer  continues  to  fall ;  on 
the  contrary,  the  wind  will  gradually  increase,  ond  as  it  does  so  the  sky  will  become 
overcast  by  degrees  until  it  is  completely  clouded.  Rain  and  fog  will  follow,  and  con- 
tinue during  the  continuance  of  the  easterly  wind  with  little  intermission,  until  they  are 
dissipated  by  a  fresh  breeze  from  the  contrary  quarter. 

If  the  fall  of  the  barometer,  during  the  continuance  of  the  easterly  wind,  be  very  slow, 
the  gnio  will  probabiy  continue,  and  not  be  very  violent ;  if  rapid,  it  will  probably  be  of 
short  duration,  and  of  greater  strength  :  at  any  rate,  when  the  mercury  falls  towards  29 
iiichos,  a  change  is  certainly  at  hand,  and  the  galo  will  in  general  come  from  the  N.  W. 
The  strength  of  this  succeeding  gale  will  bo  in  proportion  to  the  fall  of  the  barometer, 
and  to  the  strength  of  the  easterly  gale  which  preceded  it.  In  such  a  case  there  is  sel- 
dom many  hours  interval  between  the  one  galo  and  the  other.  The  east  wind  generally 
dies  away  to  calm,  and  in  a  very  few  hours,  or  sometimes  in  much  less  time,  the  N.  W. 
gale  springs  up.  A  heavy  cross  sea  remains  for  some  time  from  tlie  previous  gale.  The 
barometer  sometimes  begins  to  rise  in  the  interval  of  calm  which  precedes  the  N.  W. 
galo,  ut  others  at  its  commencement:  the  fog  and  rain  cease,  and  the  weather  becomes 
quite  clear,  generally  in  a  few  hours,  and  sometimes  almost  immediately.  The  strength 
of  tiie  westerly  gale  is  usually  greatest  soon  after  its  coaimencoment,  and  diminishes  as 
the  baro'uotor  rises,  veering  gradually  to  the  W.  and  S.  W.  It  is  worthy  of  remark, 
that  the  circumstances  just  mentioned  are  exactly  the  reverse  of  those  attending  the  east- 
erly gale.  The  latter  usually  commences  with  clear  weather  and  a  high  barometer, 
hglit  at  first  from  the  S.  or  S.  E.  and  gradually  increasing  as  it  veers  to  the  ea8^ward,  with 
a  falling  barometer.  To  return  to  the  westerly  gale. — If,  after  it  has  veered  to  S.  W.  and 
become  moderate,  the  barometer  remains  steady  at  a  moderate  height,  fine  weather  may 
be  expected.  If  it  remains  at  a  considerable  height,  but  still  fluctuating  and  unsteady, 
within  certain  limits,  variable,  but  not  heavy  winds,  and  variable  weather  may  be  expected. 
If,  on  tho  contrary,  it  rises  quickly  to  a  grojit  height,  a  repetition  of-  tha  easterly  gale  will 
Dot  be  improbable.    We  hiive  experienced  seasons  in  which  the  barometer  may  be  said 

6 


H' 


66 


■*' 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Currents. 


to  have  been  no  iooner  blown  up  by  one  wind,  than  it  has  been  blown  down  by  nnothe 
and  this  stormy  alterniition  to  hnvo  continued  for  several  months,  whilst  in  others  we  bav'' 
Bcnrcely  had  a  double-reefed  topsail  breeze  during  tlie  whole  summer.  ° 

There  is  in  fact  so  great  a  dillorence  in  the  phenomena  of  the  weather  in  diirernnt  sen 
sons,  that  it  becomes  very  difficult  to  write  any  thing  respecting  it.  thatslmil  not  be  iiabi" 
to  many  exceptions.  There  are,  however,  some  strongly  marked  cases  of  connexiun  b  * 
tween  the  indications  of  the  barometer  and  changes  of  the  winds  and  weatiier,  wiijch" 
within  our  experience  of  eight  or  niao  years,  have  been  subject  to  few,  I  miglit  ninioat 
say  no,  exceptions.  The  first  of  these  cases  is  that  most  common  one,  which  I  have  en 
dettvored  to  describe,  of  an  easterly  golo,  with  a  falling  barometer,  being  olways  wet  anil 
foggy,  and  succeeded  by  a  strong  wind  from  the  opposite  quarter  with  a  rising  barometer 
A  second  case,  not  of  so  frequent  occurrence  in  common  seasons,  excepting  in  spring  or 
early  in  summer,  is  the  easterly  wind  with  a.  rising  barometer;  which,  although  it  mnv 
not  bo  at  first  for  a  few  hours,  will  almost  always  become  fine  and  clear,  and  end  in  fine 
weather.  A  third  case  may  be  considered  certain  ;  if  the  barometer  fail  suddenly  and 
greatly,  at  ony  time,  a  northerly,  and  most  probably  a  N.  W.  gale,  of  groat  strength,  mav 
be  confidently  expected.  It  does  not  follow  that  it  will  be  immediate,  for  it  may  be  prn. 
ceded  by  a  strong  gale  from  S.  W.  for  a  few  hours,  during  which  the  boromoter  will  ge]. 
dom  rise,  and  even,  probably,  continue  to  fall,  but  when  the  S.  W.  gale  dies  away  the 
northerly,  or  N.  W.  will  soon  succeed,  with  a  rising  barometer. 

In  conclusion,  I  may  remark  that  as,  on  the  one  hand,  a  considerable  fall  of  the  bn- 
rometer  may  occur,  without  being  followed  by  a  strong  wind:  so,  on  the  other,  n  breeze 
of  considerable  strength  may  come  on  without  any  indication  from  the  barometer:  biit 
not  any  thing  thot  deserves  the  name  of  a  gale.  Tliero  has  never,  within  our  experience 
oecurretl  a  gale,  so  heavy  as  to  be  of  serious  consequence  to  a  good  vessel,  tlio  iippronch 
of  which  has  not  been  indicated  by  the  barometer.  But  it  must  bo  remomhered  that  a 
high  barometer,  in  this  climate,  and  under  the  circumstances  which  I  have  mentioned 
is  often  indicative  of  an  easterly  gale.  It  is  remorkable  tliat  in  tlie  gulf  and  (istuary  of 
the  St.  Lawrence,  a  high  barometer  may  bo  considered  as  the  forerunner  of  wet  and  foitgy 
weather,  which  usually  accompanies  its  fall ;  wiii'st  a  low  baromett^r  renders  it  onunlly 
probable  that  dry  weather  will  ensue,  since  it  ol'ten  accompanies  its  rise.  1  am  fully  of 
opinion,  that  the  marine  barometer  is  of  the  greatest  assistance  in  the  navi^alit)n  of  the 
Gulf  and  River  .St.  Lawrence,  and  that  by  attending  constantly  to  its  state  tind  chiniffcs, 
with  reference  to  the  winds  and  weather  which  preceded  tiiem,  condjined  with  the  indi- 
cntions  alforded  by  the  appearance  of  the  sky.  Arc,  those  changes  of  the  wind  and  weather 
which  are  about  to  take  place,  may  l)0  anticipated  with  a  degree  of  certainty  snflicient, 
in  most  cases,  to  enable  us  to  avoid  being  caugiit  oti  a  bus-shore,  or  in  an  unsafe  aiiclior- 
age,  as  w(dl  as  to  regulate  onr  course  in  a  voyage,  in  unticiputioii  of  tlii!  coming  clianne. 

CuRRKNTs. — It  is  a  generally  received  opinion  that  a  current  sets  constantly  to  the 
south-eastward  out  of  the  (Julf  of  St.  Lawrence,  between  Newfoundland  niid  ('ape  Bre- 
ton Islands,  and  also  that  it  is  freipiently  deflected  to  the  southward,  towards  liio  sliorc3 
of  tlie  island  last  named,  by  another  current  from  the  northwai'd,  which  is  said  to  enter 
the  gulf  by  the  Strait  of  Hello  Isle. 

I  have  myself  obsfirved  that  a  current  sets  out,  bcftween  Capo  Roy  odd  .St.  Paul  Island, 
during  westerly  winds  and  in  calm  weather;  but  it  is  checked  by  easteily  winds,  and  I 
believe  that  it  may  sometimes  run  in  a  contrary  direction  from  the  sanio  cause.  North- 
erly winds,  and  perhaps  also  the  above  named  current  from  the  northward,  may  causn 
the  sti'cam  to  set  to  the  southward  towards  Cape  Rreton  Islimd.  lint  the  truth  is,  that 
winds,  iioth  present  and  at  a  distance,  possess  so  powerful  and  irregular  an  action  upon 
the  set  and  strength  of  the  currents  and  tides  in  tiiis  entrance  of  the  gulf,  that  I  cansav 
nothing  certain  or  definite  resixicting  them. 

The  reality  of  a  current  inwards  tliroui;!!  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  is  confirmed  by  the 
prpseiifo  of  icebergs,  which  it  trans|)orts  into  tl  e  gulf  tivery  summer,  against  the  prevail- 
ing S.  W.  winds,  fre(]uently  carrying}  thcMn  as  far  as  Mecatlna,  and  .soiiictinn's  even  to 
the  neigiiborliood  of  the  east  point  of  Anticosti.  It  is  proljalile  fliat  this  is  a  branch  of  tho 
great  current  from  Davis  Strait,  wliich  is  known  to  run  along  the  coast  ul'  Labrador,  and 
to  transport  numerous  ici>l)ergs  far  to  the  southward  every  year.  Its  strength  is  very 
much  increased  by  a  prevalence  of  N.  E.  winds;  at  such  times  it  runs  at  tlie  rate  of  2 
knots  tlirouch  the  strait,  and  for  .'$()  to  40  miles  further  to  the  westward,  diiiiinisliing  gra- 
dually in  force  as  it  spreads  out  in  the  wider  jiarts  of  the  gulf.  Usually,  however,  its  rate 
is  much  less.  At  times,  when  S.  W.  winds  prevail,  it  becomes  very  weak  :  and  it  has 
even  been  reported  to  me,  that  a  current  has  been  observed  setting  out  of  the  gulf,  in  a 
contrary  direction,  to  the  N.  E.  for  days  together,  but  this  wos  never  oiiserved  by  us  dur- 
ing either  of  the  three  seasons  which  we  passed  there.  There  is,  however,  no  doubt 
that  this  current  is  extremely  irregular,  as  mii;ht  bo  expected  at  the  narrow  outlet  of  a 
great  inland  sea,  where  winds,  both  within  and  without,  must  of  necessity  possess  groat 
iiilhience. 


Al>er  entei 
0  or  3  miles  f 
Jf  the  tides,  v 
tttDoque,  the 
direction  give 
ward,  by  the 
ticosti  and  tlu 
from  Natashq 
dimini*li'"g  a 
aod,  tii"»lly-.i' 
count  will  be 
trance  of  the 
from  the  nort 
ticosti;  and  } 
pass,  has  bee 
pectedly  on  t 
Rosier.  (Jasp 

Both  these 
tlie  .St.  Lawi 
nurtliorn  curi 
checked  iiy  tl 
tide.  These 
nnd  conseque 
oxtroniely  di 

TlUKS  IN  1 

ly  a  regular  i 
The  flood 
K,,froin  Ca| 
often  turned 
Greon  Island 
the  strait.     'J 
,jr,vs  tog(!tlie 
from  Point  h 
especially  wi 
west  coast  of 
constancy  eit 
tiiodity  the 
dithfult,  if 
current  froi 
h  is  efien 
and  fVc(]ue 
ground  in 
inudi  more 
pieces  of  iei 
above  half 

I  have  ol) 
running  fill 
report(ul  tli 
this  report  > 
winds  previ 
there  is  at 
fouiidlaiid 

From  th 
with  very 
to  run  tliro 
the  vessel's 
dark  or  fosis 
the  mn'tli  s 
Gulf,  and 
until  she  ai 
not  1)0   eiit 
anchorage 
her  run  tl 
easily  deai 
approach  ( 
east  \va  111. 
the  Newfi 
Ferolle. 


MM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

After  entering  the  gulf,  it  runs  nlong  the  north,  or  Lnbriiilor  const,  nt  the  distance  of 
oor  3  niilos  from  tlio  outer  islunda,  lonving  a  narrow  Bpiice  iimhore,  in  which  the  streiims 
oftiie  tidoH,  when  uninfluencod  hy  winds,  are  tolernhly  rogulnr.  Piissing  outside  of  Mis- 
tanoque,  tlio  isliinds  of  (iriind  Mcciitinn,  nnd  tlie  Soutli  Mnlter's  Lodge,  it  pursues  a 
direction  given  to  it  by  the  trending  of  the  const,  till  it  is  turned  grnduidly  to  the  south- 
warci,  l>y  the  wonk  current  which  is  often  found  coming  from  the  westwnrd  between  An- 
ticosti  imd  the  north  const,  during  westerly  winds,  nnd  which  is  set  off  to  the  eouthwnrd 
from  Niitnshqunn  Point.  The  united  streams  continue  thoir  southern  course  nt  n  rnte 
dimiiiifliing  ns  they  become  more  widely  sprend,  nnd  which  seldom  exceeds  hnlfn  knot: 
ml  rniidly«.io'"'"g  tlio  '""'"  downward  current  out  of  thn  St.  Lnwrenco,  of  which  an  uc- 
coiint  will  l)e  given  immediately,  they  nil  pursue  a  S.  E.  direction  townrds  the  main  en- 
trance of  the  gulf,  between  Cape  Ray  nnd  the  Islnnd  of  St.  Paul.  It  is  this  current, 
from  tlie  northward,  wliich  is  felt  i)y  vessels  crossing  from  off  the  Rird  Rocks  townrds  An- 
licosti;  nnd  which,  together  with  neglecting  to  nllow  for  the  local  nttr-'-tion  of  the  com- 
pass, liiis  been  the  principal  cause  of  musters  of  vessels  so  often  finding  theinsolves  unex- 
pectedly on  the  south  const.  Muny  shipwrecks  have  arisen  from  this  cause  near  Cape 
Rosier.  (iasp6,  Mai  Bay,  &c. 

Botli  these  currents,  viz.,  that  from  the  northward,  nnd  the  nniin  downward  current  of 
the  St.  Lawrence,  are  mollified  by  the  tiiles.  but  in  a  way  directly  contrary  ;  for  the 
nurtlinrn  current,  in  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle,  is  accelerated  by  the  flood,  nnd 
clieclied  i)y  the  ebb  ;  whilut  the  other  is  nccelerated  by  the  ebb,  and  checked  by  the  flood 
tide.  Tiieso  modifying  causes,  viz.,  the  tic'es  nnd  winds,  give  rise  to  various  combinations, 
nnd  consequent  irregularities,  in  the  direction  and  strength  if  these  streams,  which  it  is 
extronicly  difficult  at  all  times  to  estimate  nnd  allow  for  correctly. 

TiuKs  IN  TiiK  Strait  of  Bki.lk  Islk. — Near  the  shores,  on  cither  side,  there  is  usual-  Tides. 
ly  a  regular  alternation  of  flood  and  ebb  in  fine  weather,  but  it  is  not  constant. 

Tiio  (lood  comes  from  the  northward  nlong  the  const  of  Labrador,  and  alrfo  from  the  S. 
E.jfroni  Cape  Bauld  to  Cnpo  Norman.  The  latter  stream.  I  hnvo  reason  to  believe,  is 
often  turned  off  to  the  northward  by  Cape  Norman  ;  and  the  same  thing  takes  place  nt 
Green  Island,  on  the  Newfoundland  side,  towards  Greenly  Island,  on  tlio  oppsite  side  of 
tlio  stniit.  There  is,  moreover,  at  times,  a  stream  running  from  the  S.  W.  for  several 
dnvs  together,  along  the  west  coast  of  Newfoundland.  This  stream  occasionally  sets 
frclin  Point  b'erolle  obliqiudy  across  the  strait  towards  Forteau  Bay.  Sinnetinios,  and 
especially  with  N.  E.  winds,  the  current  runs  directly  in  an  oi)posite  direction,  along  the 
westcoast  of  Newfoundland,  from  Point  FeroUo  past  Point  Rich.  In  short,  there  is  no 
constfincy  either  in  the  rate  or  set  of  these  streams,  for  the  winds  and  the  irregular  tides 
moility  tlie  set  and  rate  of  the  oepially  irregularcurrents,  in  a  miiiiner  which  it  is  extremely 
diiricult,  if  not  impossible,  to  calculutaupon  with  nny  degree  of  certainty.  The  prevalent 
current  from  the  northward  comes  from  between  Belle  Isle  and  the  coast  of  Labrador. 
Itisiifien  at  the  temperature  itf  \he  frflczing  jinint,  bringing  many  icebergs  into  tlie  strait, 
and  fr<'(|neiitly  carrying  tlieni  througli  it  many  miles  up  the  gulf.  Some  of  these  bijrgs 
ground  in  deep  water,  whilst  others  are  continually  changing  their  positions.  They  are 
iiuicli  more  numerous  in  some  seasons  than  in  others,  ns  I  have  seen  200  bergs  nnd  largo 
pieces  of  ice  in  the  strait  in  the  month  of  August,  in  one  year,  whilst  there  were  not 
above  half  a  dozen  to  be  seen  in  the  same  month  of  the  following  season. 

I  have  observed  this  current  from  the  northward  and  eastward,  assisted  iiy  a  N.  E.  wind, 
runiiiijg  full  two  miles  an  hour,  whilst  at  other  times  it  was  almost  insensible.  It  is  even 
reported  tliat  there  is  sometimes  a  current  in  the  oppositr?  direction,  and  [  believe  that 
tliis  report  of  the  fishermen  is  ecjrrect,  especially  during  the  ebb  tide,  and  when  S.  W. 
winds  prevail  in  the  (tuU'.  At  the  same  time  that  thiscurrt^nt  is  running  to  the  westward, 
tiien;  is  at  times  a  stream  of  warmer  water  running  out  to  the  eastward  on  the  New- 
fouinlluiid  side,  especially  during  the  ebb  tide. 

From  these  remarks  it  wdl  jdainly  appear  that  the  navisjation  of  this  strait  is  attended 
with  very  great  danger  in  dark  or  foggy  nights,  during  which  no  vessel  should  attempt 
to  run  through,  for  I  have  found  that,  with  all  our  experience,  we  could  not  be  sure  of 
the  vessel's  |)ositi()ii  within  10  miles,  under  such  circumstances.  On  the  approach  of  a 
dark  or  foggy  night,  therefore,  it  would  be  prudent  to  anchor  in  some  one  of  the  bays  on 
the  north  side  of  the  strait,  rnthe'-  than  to  continue  under  way.  A  vessel  bound  in  to  the 
Gulf,  and  running  with  an  easterly  wind,  will,  however,  find  no  place  fit  for  that  puri)oso 
until  she  arrives  at  Black  Bay,  and  that  is  not  a  very  good  anchorage,  for  Red  Bay  can- 
not 1)0  entered  by  a  l;irge  vt^ssel  with  an  enst(uiy  wind.  Loup  Bay  is  the  first  good 
anciiorage  under  such  circumstances,  and  there  the  vessel  would  be  so  far  advanced  in 
lier  run  through  the  strait  that  it  would  not  bo  worth  while  to  stop,  since  she  might 
easily  clear  every  thing  in  the  remaining  short  distance.  But  with  a  S.  VV.  \yind,  nt  the 
appniach  of  night,  nnd  appearance  of  a  fog,  a  vessel  bound  out  through  the  str'iit  to  the 
eastward,  liiul  belter  stand  olV-aiid-on  under  easy  sail,  tacking  by  her  dcciisca  lead  from 
the  Newfuuiidland  side  till  morning,  if  she  be  not  further  to  the  eastward  than  Point 
Ferollo.     If  she  be  further  advanced,  she  had  better  endeavor  to  make  Forlcau  Bay 


67 


68 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


hlandofSt 
Paul. 


Lighthouse. 


before  dork,  nnd  anchor  there  for  the  night.  In  light  winds  or  nnhns,  during  darii  nights 
or  foggy  wenther,  it  is  bettor  to  bring  up  with  the  Btroiini  nnchor  any  whtM-o  in  the  strujt 
thun  to  drive  about  with  the  tides,  witliout  knowing  whither  ;  but  tlie n  a  lodk-out  nmJ 
be  kept  for  drifting  icebergs. 

ISfjAND  OF  ST.  PAUL. — Vessela  bound  to  Canada,  or  to  any  of  the  ports  in  th 
Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  should  endeavor  to  make  the  Island  of  St.  Paul,  which,  bejim   f 
considerable  elevation  and  bold  all  round,  may,  with  care  and  a  good  look  out,  bo  iniiJo  nt 
night,  or  even  in  fogs,  unless  the  former  be  very  dark  or  the  latter  very  thick. 

On  this  island  there  are  two  lighthouses  erected  ;  one  on  the  northern  extremity  nn 
feet  high,  containing  n  fixed  light.     This  light  can  be  seen  on  any  bearing,  exceptinj;  hr. 
tween  N.  by  K.  and  E.  by  N.,  when  it  is   obscured  by  the  hills  to  the  southward  df  ,1 
The  southern  light  can  bo  seen  on  any  bearing,  except  between  S.  S.  E.  and  \V.,  wlig  ' 
it  is  obscured  by  tlie  hills  to  the  north  of  it.  '         ' 

This  island  lies  in  the  main  entrance  to  the  (lulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  between  Cnpo  Rnv 
ntthe  S.  W.  extremity  of  Newfoundland,  and  Capo  North,  near  the  northern  extremis,' 
of  Cape  Dreton  Island.  From  the  south  point  of  the  Island  of  St.  Paul,  Capo  North 
bears  W.  S.  \V.  \  W.  by  compass,*  distant  13  miles;  and  from  the  north  point  of  tlin 
same  island,  Cape  Ray  bears  E.  by  N.  distant  414  miles.  J n  approaching  St.  Pnul  fium 
the  S.  E.  with  northerly  winds,  the  current,  which  is  at  times  coming  from  tlie  noith. 
ward,  and  setting  towards  the  shore  of  Capci  Breton,  should  be  guarded  against.  'J'lie 
south  coast  of  Newfoundland,  eastward  of  Capo  Ray,  is  broken,  rocky,  nnd  dangi-rous 
The  tides  and  currents,  being  inthu'riced  by  the  winds,  are  irregular  ;  whilst  all  southmlv 
ond  easterly  winds,  and  often  also  south-westerly  winds,  bring  a  thick  fog,  which  is  most 
dense  near  the  lee-shore.  On  these  accounts  this  coast  should  not  be  appronclieil 
excepting  with  a  decided  nortiierly  wmd  and  clear  weather.  ' 

St.  Paul  island  is  2f"j  miles  long,  by  1  mile  broad.  Its  N.  E.  point  is  a  small  detnched 
islet,  although  it  does  not  appear  as  such  from  the  sea.  This  ish^t  is  separated  hy  n 
very  narrow  channel  from  a  peninsula,  between  .3  and  401)  feetliigh  ;  which,  togctliHr  with 
the  isthmus,  is  so  precipitous  as  to  bo  nearly  inaccessible.  The  remaining  greater  ixirt 
of  the  island,  which  is  also  very  steep  and  precipitous  towards  the  sea,  has  two  pnrallel 
ranges  of  hills,  that  on  the  Atlantic  coast  being  tlie  highest,  and  attaining  an  elevation  of 
about  450  feet.  A  valley  runs  through  between  these  hills,  having  two  small  lakes  or 
ponds,  2  or  ;jOO  feet  above  the  s-a.  These  supply  the  principal  stream  on  the  islimd 
which  is  about  a  fathom  wide,  of  yellowish-brown  water,  well  tasted  and  wholesonio,  and 
descending  into  the  sea  in  the  southern  part  of  Trinity  Cove.  'J'here  are  several  otiipr 
but  much  smaller,  runs  of  water,  one  of  which  is  into  Atlantic  Cove.  These  two  coves  are 
nearly  a  mile  from  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  the  island,  the  first  being  on  the  gulf  siijn,  umi 
the  other  on  that  which  is  towards  the  Atltintic,  as  its  name  implies.  They  afford  the 
only  shelter  for  boats,  and  the  only  good  landing  on  the  island,  which  is  easier  of  ascent 
from  them  than  at  ony  other  part.  Olf  the  two  coves  just  mentioned,  small  fishing 
schooners  anchor,  with  the  wind  offshore,  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  sand  nnd  gravel  bottom 
an<l  at  the  distance  of 'Jcaliles'  length  from  the  rocks.  In  very  fine  weather.  lar"e  V03! 
eels  might  venture  to  ride  with  a  stream  anchor,  in  from  25  to  .'JO  fathoms,  al)out  half  a 
mile  ofl' shore,  but  should  bo  in  constant  readiness  to  weigh  at  the  (irst  sign  of  a  cliainre 
in  the  wind  or  weather.  Further  olf  shore  the  water  bttcomes  extremely  dee]),  as  will  ho 
Been  in  the  chart,  so  that  there  is  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead  in  ap|)roachin<'  this 
island  in  foggy  weather. 

The  irregularity  of  the  tidal  streams  and  currents  add  much  to  the  danger  arising  from 
the  fogs,  which  prevail  in  southerly,  easterly,  and  often  also  with  S.  W.  winds.  Dinini' 
the  whole  of  a  fine  calm  day,  at  the  end  of  June,  we  observed  the  current  to  set  to  tlioS^ 
£.  at  the  rate  of  one  knot.  |)ast  the  north  point  of  the  island. 

After  having  made  St.  Paul,  vessels  bound  to  Canada  should  endeavor,  if  the  weather 
be  clear,  to  make  the  IJird  Rocks,  the  largc^st  or  south-easternmost  of  wliich  bears  from 
the  north  point  of  St.  Paul  N.  N.  VV.  \  W.  55  miles. 

There  is  a  deep  channel  between  .St.  Paul  and  the  bunk  on  which  the  Ma^dalcns, 
Bryoii  Island,  and  the  Uird  Kocks  are  situated.  This  channel  is  12  milps  wide,  and  no 
soundings  have  been  found  in  it  with  00  fathoms  of  line.  Twelve  miles  N.  W.  from  St. 
Paul,  on  the  S.  E.  extremity  of  the  bank  above  mentioned,  there  are  50  fathoms  of  water 
over  a  bottom  of  fine  sand  ;  and  1,'ii  miles  from  the  island,  on  the  same  line  of  beariiiL', 
there  are  ,"35  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  the  same,  with  the  occasional  addition  of  gruvel. 
From  this  point  the  water  shoals  gradually  towards  the  Magdalens,  distant  42  iniies. 
Following  the  eastern  edge  of  the  bank  to  the  northward,  inclining  gradually  to  the  N. 
W.,  regular  soundings  exiend  from  2S  to  35  fathoms,  over  sand,  stones,  and  broken 
shells;  the  latter  depth  being  where  the  Great  JJird  Rock  bears  W.  N.  W.;  and  when 
the  same  rock  bears  W.  S.  W.  k  W.  distant  13i  miles,  there  will  be  50  fathoms,  over 

•  III  tiieso  directionB  all  bearings  are  ningnutic,  or  given  by  cunipass,  uiilcsa  when  the  contrary  is 
expi«8sed. 


fioe  sand,  on  tl 
At  the  di8tanc( 
fiithoins;  and  1 
of  the  rocks, 
flfcother,  whic 
circumstances 
to  eoTue  into  It 
past  them  by  t 

III  northerlj 
ward,  it  will  b 
inking  care  to 
not  approachii 
iajniids  a  smoo 
„ud  excellent  1 

Another  luh 
vfinils  very  ge 
Miigdalons  wit 
\V.  wind  will 

¥xo\\\  the  Di 
course  is  N. 
(i3  inilos 

From  the  ni 
bears  N.  46° 
ticosti  N.  14° 

After  leaviii 
Jeep  all  the  w 
oms  of  line,  ir 
the  gulf,  the  fi 
causes  of  shii 
should  be  com 
be  used:  fori; 
tallied  nearly 
nnd  Cape  Gas 
eO  fathoms  of 

With  a  fair 
the  S.  W.  po 
and  which  ca 
be  easy  to  1111 
weather  bo  tl 
ward,  may  se 
island  above 
and,  as  will 

In  theevi 
Deeded  in  mil 
often  be  pr 
nel,  rathei 
Aiiticosti  si 
there  is  a  1 
avoid  the  cu 
between  the 
westward  ii 
olf  thenortl 
her,  even  alt 

THE  M 
an  irregular 
horst  Island 
dently  form 
man  to  the  < 

There  ar 
of  French  o 
the  exceptic 
East  Island, 
of  fresh  pr 
Harbor,  eitl 
small  streai 
for  fuel  is  h 
\Yhen  they 
bo  obtained 


reti 
tl 


he 


^t 


mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


6U 


jne  Band,  on  the  edgo  of  the  bank,  off  which  thoro  is  no  bottom  with  70  fitthonis  of  line. 
jVttlio  diHtuncu  of  10  niilod  from  the  roel<,  and  on  tlio  humui  line  of  iittaring,  thoro  are  43 
fiitlioms;  ii'id  at  <>  miUis,  33  fathoms,  Hhoalin^  graduuliy  in  to  'M  tiitliomit,  within  a  mile 
of  tlio  rocks.  This  l)ank  is  an  excellont  ^uido  up  to  tho  IJird  Hocks  at  niglit,  or  in  thick 
ffotttlier,  which  almost  always  accompanies  oustorly  and  soutliurly  winds :  but  under  such 
eircunistancos  it  will  bo  safer  to  run  alonj;  the  northorn  edjjo  ol'tlio  bunk,  taking  care  not 
tociiiiie  into  less  than  40  fathoms,  than  to  attempt  to  make  tho  liird  Rocks.  When  well 
past  tiiem  by  thp  reckoning,  a  course  can  iio  shaped  up  the  gulf. 

In  northerly  winds  the  weather  is  usually  clear;  and.  if  the  ship  be  far  enough  to  wind- 
ffiircl,  it  will  be  advisable  to  stand  to  the  westward,  and  endeavor  to  make  Entry  Inland, 
inking  care  to  avoid  Dnylo  Reef,  and  the  sandy  spit  olftlie  east  end  of  the  Magdalens,  by 
iiut  approaching  the  islands  in  that  part  nearer  than  'JO  fathoms.  Under  the  lee  of  these 
isJniids  a  smooth  sea  will  be  found,  sudicient  guidance  by  the  soundings,  and  good  shelter 
null  excellent  anchorage  in  Pleasant  Bay. 

Another  advantage  of  following  this  course  arises  from  the  circumstance  that  the  N.W. 
winds  very  generally  veer  to  tho  S.  W.,  so  that,  if  a  vessel  has  passed  to  leeward  of  the 
Miigdidons  with  the  northerly  or  N.  W.  winds  on  the  stariioard  tack,  the  succeeding  S. 
\V.  wind  will  enable  her  to  stanil  on  the  opposite  tnck  towards  Capo  Gasp^. 

From  the  north  point  of  the  Island  of  .St.  Paul  to  the  (!ast  point  of  the  Magdalens,  the 
conrso  is  H.  W.  \  W.  distance  66  miles;  and  to  Entry  Island,  N.  W.  by  W.  3  W. 
()3  miles 

From  the  north  Bird  Rock  the  lighthouse  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  Island  of  Anticosti 
bears  N.  4G°  13'  W.  true,  or  N.  N.W.  by  compass,  134  miles;  and  tho  east  point  of  An- 
ticosti N.  14°  4G'  VV.  true,  or  N.  ^{  E.  by  compass,  80  iniles. 

After  leaving  the  Bank  of  So-ndings,  northward  of  the  Bird  Rocks,  the  water  is  very 
deep  all  the  way  until  near  tho  shores  of  Anticosti,  there  being  no  bottom  with  80  fath- 
oms of  line,  nor  probably  at  much  greater  depths.  In  nniking  this  jmrt  of  the  voyago  up 
the  gulf,  the  fre(|uent  current  from  tho  northward,  mentioned  as  having  been  one  of  the 
cuuses  of  shipwrecks  in  the  neighborhood  of  Capes  Rozier  ond  Gaspe,  Mai  Bay,  &c., 
should  be  considered.  Accidents,  however,  from  this  cause  can  never  occur  if  the  lead 
be  used:  for  upon  consulting  the  chart,  it  will  be  seen  that  there  are  soundings  to  be  ob-  Soundings. 
lained  nearly  all  the  way  upon,  and  to  the  southward  of,  a  line  joining  the  Bird  Rocks 
and  Cape  Gaspe,  whilst  a  few  miles  to  the  northward  of  that  line  there  is  no  bottom  with 
to  fullioms  of  line. 

With  a  fair  wind  tho  object  should  be  to  make  the  lighthouse  or  revolving  light  upon  Lighthouse. 
the  S.  W.  point  of  Anticosti;  and,  with  westerly  winds,  any  part  of  tho  const  of  that  isl- 
and which  can  be  attained.  When  the  lighthouse  on  Heath  Point  shall  be  lighted  it  will 
be  easy  to  mako  the  east  end  of  the  island  at  niglit,  if  the  weather  be  clear;  and,  if  the 
weather  be  thick,  the  Bank  of  Soundings,  which  extends  off  it  28  miles  to  the  south-east- 
ward, nniy  seem  to  determine  the  vessel's  position  by  the  lend.  At  the  distance  from  the 
island  above  named  there  are  G'2  fathoms  of  water,  shoaling  gradually  in  towards  the  isl- 
and, as  will  bo  seen  by  the  chart. 

In  the  event  of  a  vessel  oeing  near  the  eastern  extremity  of  Anticosti,  and  liaving  suc- 
ceedeil  in  making  tho  east  point,  or  the  light  on  Heath  Point,  with  a  S.  W.  wind,  it  will 
often  bo  preferable  to  proceed  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  where  there  is  a  good  chan- 
nel, rather  than  to  tuck  and  stand  back  to  the  southward  and  eastward.  Under  tho  lee  of 
Anticosti  she  will,  in  this  case,  have  a  smooth  sea,  and  otten  also  clear  weather,  whilst 
there  is  a  heavy  swell  and  frequently  a  thick  fog  to  windward  of  it.  She  will,  mort!Over, 
avoid  the  current  out  of  the  St.  liawrence.  which  runs  constantly  with  westerly  winds 
between  the  south  coast  and  Anticosti,  and  thus  be  able,  at  all  times,  to  make  way  to  the 
westward  in  moderate  weather.  At  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  the  Bank  of  Soundings 
olftlie  north  coast,  and  further  westward  the  banks  olftlie  Mingan  Islands,  will  safely  guide 
her,  even  although  the  land  should  not  be  visible. 

THE  MAGDALEN  ISLANDS. — The  Magdalens  are  a  chain  of  islands,  assuming  TlieMagda 
an  irregular  curved  direction,  the  greatest  length  of  which,  from  the  S.  W.  cape  of  Am-  Icn  Islands 
herst  Island  to  tho  east  point,  is  35  miles;  but  if  the  smaller  isles  be  included,  as  they  evi- 
dently form  a  part  of  the  Magdalen  group,  the  whole  l(«ngtli  of  the  I'ange,  from  the  Dead- 
man  to  the  Great  Bird  Rock,  will  be  5C  miles,  in  an  E.  N.  E.  direction. 

There  are  at  present  upon  the  islands  about  1100  inhabitants,  the  miijority  of  whom  are 
of  French  extraction,  and  who  all  inhabit  Amherst,  Grindstone,  and  .\lriglit  Islands,  with 
tlie  exception  of  about  11  or  12  families  divided  between  Entry  Island,  Grosse  Isle,  and 
East  Island,  near  tho  N.  E.  extremity  of  the  chain.  Ships  (iiiy  obtain  limited  supplies 
of  fresh  provisions,  especially  at  Entry  Island,  and  water  most  readily  from  Amhorst 
Harbor,  either  from  a  spring  which  issues  from  under  the  Demoiselle  Hill,  or  from  a 
small  stream  which  falls  into  Ance  u  la  Cabane,  near  the  S.  W.  cape  of  the  island.  Wood 
for  fuel  is  becoming  scarce  near  tho  settlements.  Large  spars  are  not  to  be  had,  unless 
when  they  chance  to  be  saved  from'  recks,  but  small  ones,  of  sjiruco  and  juniper,  may 
bo  obtained.     The  latter,  of  which  tho  inhabitants  build  their  lishing  boats  and  shallops 


70 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


or  imnller  «choonor»,  Boiiiewhat  rosernbles  larch  wood ;  it  \a  Bnid  to  bo  extremely  8tron» 
and  (hiriible.  ^ 

Wlioii  first  inado  from  sea,  tl>e  MngdulenB  njipenr  like  novernl  hilly  iHJiitidg,  with  chnti 
nels  botwe»Mi,  but  on  a  nenrer  iip|»roi(ch,  tlipy  lire  seiMi  to  bo  nil  coiiiioctod  togother,  wit) 
tho  oxcoption  of  Knfry  IhIiukI,  by  iidoiihlc  lino  of  siind-lmrH  and  boochos,  incloNJrii;  exten' 
Bivo  ItigoonH,  hiiviiiK  vory  narrow  onfruiicoH,  by  which  tho  tido  (iiids  nccoss  and  (joresg" 
Thesii  Hnnd-biirn  aro  in  somo  parts  only  u  few  foot  abovo  tho  sea,  whilHt  in  others  iht.y  ij,' 
into  hills  of  blown  Haiiil  of  ronsidorahlo  elevation.  They  nppoar  to  be  incronsinj;,  8i„pg 
they  are  generally  ridges  of  sand  with  from  !(  to  12  fiMit  water  parallel  to,  and  from  50t 
100  fathoms  outside  tho  beach.  There  are  ."J  and  4  fathoms  of  water  between  thoso  rlilne 
and  the  shore,  a  circumstance  which  has  often  |)rove(i  fatal  to  tim  crews  of  vossols  wiocke  i 
upon  these  shores.  Those  hilly  islands  thus  disposed  in  a  curvilinear  shape,  and  connccto  I 
togother  by  sand-bnrs,  inclosing  lagoons,  reminds  tuio  forcibly  of  those  islands  in  tronicnj 
seas  which  aro  connected  together  by  coral  reefs. 

In  a  bright  sunny  day  of  summer,  the  clilfa  of  various  colorB,  in  which  dilferent  shades 
of  red  predominate,  and  the  yellow  of  the  sand-bars  contrasted  with  tho  green  piistureg 
of  the  hill  sides,  tho  darker  green  of  tho  spruce  trees,  and  the  blue  of  sen  and  sky,  pro- 
duce an  effect  extremely  beautiful,  and  one  which  distinguishes  these  islands  from  any 
thing  else  in  the  (iidf  of  .St.  Lawrence.  In  stormy  weather,  the  appearance  is  equnllv 
characteristic.  Isolated  hills  and  craggy  cliffs  are  then  dimly  seen  through  the  ruin  nrid 
mist  which  accom|)niiy  an  easterly  gale,  and  ap|)ear  joined  by  long  ranges  of  breakers 
which  almost  hide  the  sand-bars.  At  such  times  it  is  dangerous  to  attempt  making  tho 
islands,  fur  in  approaching  tho  lower  parts,  tho  breakers  would  probably  be  the  tirstthin? 
seen  from  a  vessel. 

The  Magdalens  possess  no  harbor  for  shipp,  but  three  for  small  vessels,  named  Amlierst 
House,  and  Grand  Entry  llnrbors,  which  will  be  noticed  in  tho  following  concise  des- 
cription of  the  sliuresof  the  islands,  and  tho  dangers  ofl' them.. 

Tho  east  point  of  tho  Magdalens  is  of  low  sand,  inclosing  several  shnllow  ponds,  and 
having  several  sand-hills,  some  of  which  are  near  its  extremity,  while  others,  of  greater 
elevation  and  further  to  tho  westward,  extend  in  a  chain  nearly  to  tho  N.  E.  Capo.  Theso 
last  mentioned  sand-hills  aro  inland,  and  on  the  margin  of  tho  north-eastern  part  of  tho 
great  lagoon.  The  N.  E.  Cape  is  a  hill  on  East  Island,  which  stands  at  the  head  oflirand 
Entry  Ilariior.  It  is  a  very  remarkable  cape,  and  its  isolated  dill's,  being  'JliO  fiu-t  lijirh 
can  be  seen  over  all  tho  sand-hills  and  sand-bars,  so  that  when  these  last  are  beluw  tho 
horizon,  the  N.  E.  Capo  appears  to  be  tho  eastern  extremity  of  the  chain. 
Long  Spit.  LONG  .SPIT  is  a  ri<igo  of  sand,  with  from  '2  to  U  fathoms  of  water,  which  extends  off 

tho  east  point  .S.  E.  i  .S.  rather  more  than  14  mile,  and  for  \\  mih*  further  in  tiut  same 
direction,  the  depth  is  from  4  to  (J  fathoms.     To  clear  this  spit  oi)serve  tho  following  re- 
marks and  directions.      The  southern  part  of  Coflin   Islainl  is  a  peninsula,  forming  the 
southern  shore  of  the  Oyster  Pond,  and  coMn«!cted  to  the  remainder  of  the  island  by  a  low 
neck  or  isthmus  at  the  west  end  of  the  |ioi,,(.  Now  the  mark  for  the  .3  fathoms  extremity 
of  the  spit  is  the  north  side  of  this  peninsula  on  with  the  Old  Marry  IL'ad;  and  the  south 
side  of  the  northern  partof  Cotliii  Island  (where  the  narrow  neck  joins  it,  as  above  men- 
tioned) on  with  the  Old  Harry  Head,  will  lend  over  the  s|)it  in  4  fathoms.    A  person  with 
our  charts  before  him  will  liavo  little  dilhcully  in  making  out  these  leading  marks,  hut 
may,  if  he  oleases,  pass  round  the  spit,  by  the  lead,  in  .')  or  C  fathoms,  taking  care  not  to 
bring  the  Did  Marry  to  bear  to  tlu!  southward  of  west.    To  know  when  a  vesstd  from  tho 
eastward  has  passed  it,  observe  that  tim  lino  of  tho  summit  of  the  north  capo  on  witli  tiio 
east  side  of  tho  N.  E.  cape  clears  it  ni-arly  half  a  mile  to  the  .S.  W.,  which  mark  will  also 
be  useful  to  a  vessel  ai)proaching  it  from  tho  westward.      The  tides  set  rapidly  over 
this  spit,  and,  together  with  the  shoal  water,  cause  a  heavy  breaki  ig  sea.     It  is  (vxfronm- 
ly  dangerous,  and  vessels -should  take  care  not  to  got  iiecahued  near  it  without  an  anchor 
clear. 
Doyle  Reef.        DOYLE  REEF.— Doyle  Reef  lies  S.  i  E.  dis'tant  C^  iiules  from  the  East  Point, 
and  consists  cd' pointed  rocks.     It  is  very  snndl,  being  ordy  300  fathoms  long,  and  fjO  futh- 
oms  wide,  from  6  tiithoms  to  G  fathoms.     The  Itnist  water  is  ',]  fathoms  on  one  spot  nearly 
in  the  centre,  and  there  are  V2  and  1.'3  fathoms  all  round  it.  The  only  mark  for  this  reef  is 
the  North  Cape  of  the  iMagdnlens  open  two-thirds  of  its  breadth  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  North- 
East  C'ape.     On  the  rei'f  the  angle  between  these  marks  and  tho  western  point  of  Collin 
Island  is  24°  27'. 

Lying  cf)mpletely  in  t'lo  way  of  vessels,  and  very  seldom  showing,  the  sea  breaking 
upon  it  only  in  heavy  irales,  Doyle  Ke»'f  may  justly  be  considered  as  (me  of  the  worst 
dangers  off  the  iNliigdalens.     It  has  been  examined  and  laid  down  by  us  for  the  lirsl  time, 
ond  was  previously  known  only  to  a  very  few  persons  on  the  Magdalens. 
Old  Harry        OI/D  HAKKV  HEAD.— Proceeding  to  the  south-westward  from  the  East  Point,  the 
Head.  first  headland  is  the  ( )ld  Marry,  the  S.  E.  point  of  Cofhn  Island,  bearing  from  the  K.  point 

W.  .S.  W.  by  compass,  lA  miles.     HetweiMi  them  is  a  sandy  bay,  in  which  vessels  may 
anchor,  with  good  shelter,  in  all  winds  from  VV.  round  by  N .  to  N.  E.:  but  it  is  not  a  place 


loberecommen 

„ltber  side,  and 

-inil.  either  at  i 

The  Old  Mar 

ihe  Bouth-enstw 

COLUMIJIP 

S.  K.  by  H.  2  n 

Pond,  lies  the 

low  water.      > 

,Dd  |)ointed  roc 

1,^  seen  in  the  ( 

jessels  hauling 

eiiBt  sideofthoi 

„fthoOldllari 

outside  of  then 

Point  to  boar  ti 

Coffin  Island  tc 

marks,  an  angl 

outer  edge  of  I 

extroiniiy  of  C 

ouglo.  the  voss 

ffostwnrd  of  tl 

cftllod  the  Oys 

of  CotTin  Islan 

ill-shore,  aud  o 

thftt  this  is  a  v 

night  or  in  fog 

GRAND  E 

and  the  saud-l 

vfftter  enough 

iMiigdalens.     1 

nnd  the  narrov 

Ij  mile  to  the 

avail.     A  nati 

then  the  entn 

and  fine  weatl 

wiiter,  neapti 

immediately 

flood  in  is  al 

a  few  familu 

trnction. 

Within  th 
ing  north-ea 
narrow  cha 
extends  to  \v 
also  extends 
Grindstone 
Throughout 
sheltered  fr 
nninely:  Gv 
which  is  vol 
and  (Jrindst 
time  of  De 
opened  sine 
SHAG  r 
mile  from  1 
tlie  way  of 
CAPE  i 
miles.     It  i 
dill's,  of  a  f: 
the  highest 
westward  < 
ALUKi 
feet  abovo 
named  But 
it. 

ALRIG 
outer  edge 


jso 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


71 


lobe  recommended,  becauie  a  vobboI  would  be  there  very  much  embayed  by  the  ihonla  on 
either  «ide,  mid  mi^ht  find  it  diificult  to  ){ut  out  on  the  occurrence  of  a  sudden  Hhift  of 
jjinil,  oithor  nt  niglit,  or  nttwnded  with  (og. 

fbo  Old  Hurry  Ileiid  haa  red  HiiiidHtoiie  clifTa  of  a  moderate  height,  with  a  reef  oft'  it  to 
(lie  gouth-enHtward  one-third  of  n  mile. 

COLUMIJINK  SHOALS.— From  the  Old  Harry  24  milos  S.  S.  W.  <)  W.  and  S.  Columbine 
S.  K'  by  .S.  ~  miluH  from  the  oast  end  ot'the  cIiD'h,  woHtward  of  tho  entraiioo  of  the  ( )yHter  Shoals. 
Pond,  liea  tho  outurnioat  of  tho  (^iluiniiine  .SIidmIs,  a  patch  of  rucka,  with  .'3  futhmna  at 
Igtr  water.      Witliin  this,  and  towurda  Cofliii  Inland,  arn  numoroua  amall  ahoal  |iat(di()8 
inJ  pointed  rocka,  on  aomo  of  which  th«re  are  not  mure  than  3  ftutt  at  low  wattT,  aa  will 
[^  BOO"  in ''••' ^^l"""'-     Thoai)  ahoala  are  oxtremely  dangeroua,  and  much  in  tho  way  of  •' 

leBsela  hauling  round  tho  eaat  point  of  thu  Ma^daluna  with  iiorthorly  winds.  To  clour  tho 
eiut  aido  of  thorn,  the  whole  of  the  hiith  N.  E.  Cape  nniat  be  kept  wellopentothoeaatward 
of  tho  Old  Harry.  There  are  no  good  marka  for  clearing  the  weat  aido,  or  for  leading  clear 
outside  of  them,  an  that  the  only  guide  for  the  latter  purpoae  ia  not  to  bring  the  East 
Point  to  bear  to  the  cuatward  of  N.  K.  and,  for  tho  former,  ia  not  to  l)ring  the  woat  end  of 
Coffin  lalund  to  bear  to  tho  weatward  of  N.  W.  4  N.  lint  although  there  are  no  good 
marks,  an  angle  with  a  quadrant  will  answer  the  purpoae  aa  well  and  aa  easily.  On  the 
outer  edge  of  ihcao  ahoala,  the  angle  between  tho  Old  Harry  Head  and  tl  e  left  or  weat 
extroniily  of  Codin  laland  ia  77° :  consequontly,  with  those  pointa  aubtonding  any  loss 
nuglo.  the  voasol  will  pass  outaidh  of  the  ahoala.  CofTin  laland  extends  4  miles  to  tho 
ffi'stwni'd  of  tho  Old  Harry,  having  on  its  aonth  aide  a  lagoon  with  a  very  narrow  outlet, 
cajiud  the  Oyster  Pond,  and  which  boats  can  only  enter  in  fine  weather.  Off  the  coast 
of  Cutlin  laland  there  are  several  rocka,  beaidea  the  Columbine  Shoals,  but  i  f  these  are 
ill-shore,  and  out  of  the  way  of  voaaela,  it  ia  auflicient  to  refer  to  them,  unci  to  remark, 
tiint  tliia  ia  a  very  dangeroua  part  of  the  islands,  which  should  never  bo  appronchod  at 
nigiit  or  in  foguv  weather. 

GRAND  ENTRY  HARHOR.— At  the  N.  W.  end  of  CofTm  laland,  and  between  it  Grand  En- 
Bod  tho  sand-bars  to  tho  weatward,  ia  the  entrance  of  Grand  Entry  Hari)or,  which  has  try  Harbor. 
vrater  enough  within  for  large  veaaela,  and  ia  superior  in  this  reapectto  any  other  in  tho 
Miigdaleiia.     liiit  its  entrance  is  extremely  narrow,  not  exceeding  50  fathoiiia  in  breadth, 
and  the  narrow  channi  I  iiading  to  it,  between  sandy  ahoala  which  aro  said  to  ahii't,  extends 
Ij  iiiilo  to  the  weatward.     Theao  circumatances  render  inatructiona  tor  entering  it  of  no 
avnil.    A  nativo   pilot  ahould  be  employed,  or  tho  channel  buoyed  or  ataked,  and  even 
then  the  entrance  ahould  not  be  attempted  excepting  with  a  leading  wind,  flowing  tide, 
and  fine  weather.     Tho  depth  that  can  bo  carried  in,  at  low  water,  is  10  feet.     At  high 
wiiter,  neap  tides,  12  feet;  and  in  spring  tidos.  13  feet.     There  are  28  feet  water  at,  and 
immediately  within,  the  entrance.     The  ebb  tide  runs  out  with  great  rapidity,  and   the 
flood  in  iaalso  strong.      There  are  no  settlements  at  (jrand  Entry  Harbor,  but  there  are 
ttfew  families  in  the  vicinity  of  the  N.  E.  Cape,  who  breed  cattle,  and  aro  of  IJritish  ex- 
trnction. 

Within  this  harbor  there  is  a  largo  expanse  of  water,  from  1  to  3  fathoms  deep,  extend- 
ing north-eaatward  to  t'e  aonthern  shores  of  (irosse  Isle,  and  communicating  by  a  very 
narrow  channel  wi.'i  a  liir,ij;o  shallow  pond,  which  washes  the  base  of  the  N.  E.  Cape,  and 
extends  to  within  alioiu  -  nilos  of  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  chain.  This  grout  lagoon 
also  extends  Houth-westward,  between  a  double  line  of  sand-bars,  to  the  eastern  shores  of 
Grindstone  Island,  and  is,  in  all,  23  miles  long,  and  from  half  a  mile  to  o  miles  wide. 
Tbroughoiit  its  whole  extent  there  is  a  communication  for  boats,  at  high  water,  porf'eclly 
sheltered  from  tho  sea.  There  are,  at  jjresent,  3  trntrancea  into  tiiis  liigoun  from  tlie  sea, 
nninely:  (trand  Entry  Harbor,  alreaily  mentioned;  another  34  miles  to  the  westward, 
which  ia  very  aliallow;  and  House  Harbor,  near  its  S.  W.  extremity,  between  Alright 
niul  (irindatone  Islands.  There  were  formerly  others,  which  have  been  closed  since  tho 
time  of  lies  Harres,  1778;  and,  on  tho  other  hand,  tho  second  mentioned  above,  has 
opened  since  his  time. 

SHA(J  ISLAND. — Shag  Island  ia  anuill  and  low,'and  of  sandstone,  lying  about  a  half  a  Sluig  Island. 
mile  from  the  sand-bars,  nearly  midway  between  Coffin  and  Alright  Islands,  and  out  of 
tlio  way  of  vessels, 

CAPE  ALRIGHT Capo  Alright  boars  from  the  Old  Harry  Head,  S.  72^  W.  liii   Cape  Al- 

miles.     It  is  tho  southern  point  of  Alright  Islaiul,  and  a  very  remarkable  headland.    The  right. 
clifl's,  of  a  greyish  white  color,  with  occasional  brick-red  low  down,  are  400  feet  high,  at 
the  highest  part,  which  is  about  a  miltMo  the  eastward  of  tho  cape;    and  those  to  the 
westward  of  the  cape,  towards  House  IIarl)or,  are  also  very  high,  and  of  the  same  color. 

ALRKJHT  SUxMMIT.— Nearly  a  mile  inland  is  tho  summit  of  Alright  Island,  420  Alright 
feet  above  the  sea.     llotween  this  summit  and  the  cape  there  is  a  very  re!iiarkai)le  hill.  Summit. 
named  Bule-llondo.     Tho  south  extremity  of  the  cape  is  low,  with  a  small  rock  close  off 
it. 

ALRIGHT  REEF— Alright  Reef  lies  S.  80°  E.  31  miles  from  Cape  Alright  to  tho  AlrighlReej , 
outer  udgo  of  thu  reef,  which  is  400  fathoms  long,  by  30U  futhums  wide.     It  ia  of  white 


"T^- 


72 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Pearl  Reef. 


Red  Cape. 


Grindstone 
Island. 

Amherst  Isl- 
and. 


I  pointed  rocks,  hnving  ovortliom  6  feot  lenst  water.    On  this  reef  the  Bute-Rondo  j 
with  the  suiiiinit  of  Griiit.jfoiio  Isintid.     The  west  side  of  Ciipo  Alright  is  on  with  .1^ 


Amherst 
Harbor. 


Pleasant 
Bay. 


andi 

on  with  the  summit  of  Grmt.jfoiio  Isintid.  The  west  side  of  Ciipo  Alright  is  on  with  the 
west  side  of  Cape  Moulo;  and  the  wliole  of  the  woody  Wolf  Tshind  is  just  open  to  the 
westward  o''  Shag  Island.  Tiiereforo,  to  clear  the  S.  W.  side,  keep  the  well  inmlipj- 
summit  of  (.irindstono  Jsland  open  to  tho  south-westward  of  Cape  AIri}:lit;  and  to  clom' 
the  south-cnstern  sido  of  ihis  reef,  keep  tho  east  side  of  tile  woods  of  Wolf  Island  (seen 
over  the  sand-bars)  open  to  the  oas^tward  of  Shag  Island. 

Tho  N.  E.  jwint  of  Entry  Island  hoars  S.  4  E.  7  miles  from  Cape  Alright;  and  the 
channel  hetwoen  them  leads  into  Plfisunt  Bay,  passing  previously  between  Alright  Reef 
and  the  I'enrI  Reef. 

PEARL  REFF. — The  Pearl  Reef  is  small  and  dangerous,  and  of  white  pointed  rocks 
like  most  of  the  reefs  round  these  islands.  It  is  round,  and  aliout  200  fathoms  in  dianipter' 
with  9  fi-et  lenst  water.  ]t  hears  S.  41°  E.  8  1  miles  from  Cape  Alright;  and  N.  HO"^  p' 
4i  I"  iles,  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  Entry  Island.  Ev<mi  with  a  moderate  swell  the  soii 
breaks  heavily  upon  it.  The  murks  on  tliis  recd'aro  the  Demoiselle  Hill,  open  one  qunrter 
of  a  point  to  the  nortliward  of  the  clin's  of  Entry  Island,  and  exactly  on  with  the  extrem- 
ity of  the  N.  W.  spit,  .d)ove  water,  of  the  same  island.  This  spit,  however,  ran  be  sel- 
dom seen  from  the  reef.  The  cross  mark  is  tho  three  high  elitfs,  on  tho  S.  W.  side  of 
Alright  Island,  nearly  in  one,  hearing  N.  44°  W.,  when  the  north-we.'lwai-d  of  those  dilTs 
will  beseenovcir  tlie  middle  one,  and  helween  it  and  the  south-easternmost.  IlciUt^,  keen- 
ing all  tlioeo  :li(Vs  open  will  char  the  ret  *'  to  the  westward,  and  the  north-westerniiiost 
clilf  completcdy  shut  in  behind  tlie  other  twc  <.i!|  clear  it  to  tho  eastward.  The  Doin- 
oiselle  iliii,  shut  in  behinil  tho  north  si(h*  of  Entry  Island  will  clear  it  to  the  sonthwiird' 
and,  lastly,  tho  Demoisidle  kept  meet  ilian  half  a  point  open  to  tho  nortliward  of  Entry 
Island  will  clear  it  to  th<'  northward. 

To  tho  N.  W.  of  (aipe  Alright,  and  distant  2:1  miles,  is  the  entrance  of  House  Harbor, 
a  narrow  and  crouked  channel,  witli  oidy  G  t'cet  at  low  water. 

REr*  C,\PE. — From  ('ape  Alright,  S.  HO"  W.  .')  miles,  across  the  hay  in  which  is 
the  entrance  of  House  Harbor,  brings  us  to  I'.ed  Cape,  the  southern  point  of  (iiiiKistoiio 
Island,  and  the  north  point  of  ricnsant  I>;iy.  The  opposite  point  of  the  bay,  Sandy 
Hook,  is  the  east  point  of  Amherst  Island,  and  bears  from  (Ik;  Red  Cape  S.  by  1).  .J  E."(J 
miles.  From  this  line  to  the  shore  of  Amherst  Ishind  at  the  hcid  of  the  bay,  th(!  distaiico 
is  4i  niilos.  IJelweeii  Red  ('ajie  and  I!ouse  Harbor  is  Cape  iMnuh-,  of  grey  saiidstoiic,  oil' 
which  there  is  a  rock,  with  o  fi-et  of  watej-;  and  there  is  another  rock,  with  3  feet,  olftlio 
west  side  of  Ah'ight  [sland.  These  will  be  seen  in  the  chart,  and  as  they  lie  out  of  tlio 
way  of  vessels,  require  no  further  notice. 

GRINDSTONK  ISfjAND — Grioiistone  Island  is  the  second  largest  of  the  chnin, 
ueing,  in  this  respect,  inter  nediate  betwtM'u  Andierst  and  Alright  Islands.  Jts  summit  is 
elevated  .'j'jO  above  the  sea  at  high  water. 

AMHKIvST  ISLAIn  I). — Amherst  Island,  the  largest  and  south-westernmost  of  the 
Magdiilens,  is  connected  with  (irlnd.-tone  Island  by  a  double  line  of  sand-bars,  inclosinj; 
an  extensive  lagoon,  .'i  o\'  (i  miles  long,  ai.d  from  1  to  3  miles  wide,  the  soutiiern  ])art  of 
which  is  callod  ]>asque  Harbor.  'Y\\\^  lagoon  is  fidl  of  sands,  whi(di  dry  at  low  watir, 
and  has  ."'"  ullets  iiitu  Pleasant  Jh'v,  the  southernmost  being  the  deepest,  but  having  only 
3  feet  water  over  its  bar  at  low  water.  The  others,  incluchng  three  through  I  he  sund. 
bars  of  tho  N.  W.  coast,  will  only  admit  boats  at  high  water,  and  when  the  surf  is  uot  too 
high. 

Tho  hills  in  the  inter'or  of  Amherst  Island  rise  tn  the  heiglit  of  SoO  feet  al)ove  the  sea. 
Towards  ttio  soucli-i'ii'-t  part  of  'he  isbind,  and  about  a  nnle  to  the  N.  W.  of  Airdicist 
Ha'iior,  is  tin- very  remarkable  conical  hill,  named  tiie  Demoiselle,  of  traj)  rock,  and  'J80 
feet  high.  The  perpendicular  and  dark  red  dill's  of  the  Demoiselle  are  washed  by  tho 
Waters  of  Pleasant  \\i\\. 

AAIHKR.ST  HMIUOR. — Amherst  Harlior  is  fiuniu'd  by  a  ])eniiisnla,  presenting  dills 
of  grey  sandstone  to  s. -award,  in  the  .S.  E.  corner  of  Pleasant  May.  Its  I'Ulrance,  between 
this  pi'iiinsulu  and  the  sands  io  the  Sviulliward.  is  ',M  miles  williin,  or  to  the  westward  of 
the  extremity  of  Sandy  Hook,  whicdi  i.^  a  long  and  narrow  sandy  point  with  sand-hills, 
'i'liis  hiubor  is  the  easiest  ot  access  and  e;:i'essof  any  in  the  IMagdalens,  atnl  has,  more- 
over, the  advantage  of  an  excellent  roadstead  outsidi%  where  vessels  nuiy  wail  their  op- 
portunity of  running  in.  Nevertlieh  ■(,  its  entrance  is  extremely  narrow  Mn<l  rather 
crook"d,  so  that,  without  a  pilot,  it  wmdd  he  necessary  to  buoy  or  stake  the  channel 
The  de|;th  over  tli.  bar,  which  i»  rocky,  is  7  feet  at  low  water,  ami  from  9  to  10  feet  at 
high  Water,  according  as  it  may  he  neap  or  spring  tides.  Within  tlie  harbor  there  are 
from  lU  to  17  feet,  over  u  bottom  of  soft,  bla(d(,  and  fetid  mud,  wcdl  sludtered  from  every 
wind. 

PLEASANT  BAV. — Pleasant  Bay  is  the  best  roadstead  in  the  Magdalens,  and  the 
only  jiie  where  vessels  can  venture  to  he  with  all  winds  during  the  three  (inest  months  of 
summer,  .lune,  .Inly,  and  August.  In  those  months,  a  gale  of  wind  from  the  eastward,  so 
heavy  as  to  OFidanger  a  vessel  with  good  anchors  und  cables,  does  nut  occur  above  once  in 


3  or  4  years.     T 

jndtt  vessel  shor 

lecwcrd,  and  all 

Tlio  best  and  I 

of  Amherst  Harl 

J  nillo  from  higV 

oii.l  high  sand-hi 

tjke  notice  that 

ji,  the  chart.     T 

^  vessel,  anchor 

iiy  the  soulhwnr 

coiiipk'toly  open 

sing  over  so  mui 

oiit'n  heavy  east 

ppiit  dimger,  an 

Bliuicos  at  any  ti 

pttcnd  more  tliii 

SANDY  HC 

Ijliind,  the  bear 

running  out  two 

flumisoll'itswf 

wide,  and  4  fath 

tlwtcan  be  safe 

oingoll'tho  S.  ^ 

tho  shore.     Th 

BO  that  large  ve? 

ti-r  so  many  dii 

eiist  side  of  AIri 

theN.  W.  poin 

then  haul  upfo 

to  the  westwan 

KNTUV  IS 

550  feet  above  t 

at  the  N.  E.  pc 

OlTthe  N.  E.  i 

its  north  side  th 

can  be  seen  fro 

Vessels  occa 

J9  rough  riding 

Tlie  iidiabita 

of  tVe.-h  provis 

6Ui)|ilies. 

Kidiii  San 
benches,  wit 
to  the  enlriin 
8 mile  of  I'll 
enter  at  high 
pnoiiuh  lor  lar 
oryoftlu'  eldi 
Tliei-e  is  go 
with  wiiid<  Ire 
A.MIIKKS 
bnsiii,  dill's  co 
tliohigliest  cl 
remarkable  n 
southward  (d' 
CAl'-ANK 
of  .\mlierst  I 
(ind  where  go 
bottom,  olVll 
quarters  of  a  i 
From  the  \ 
rlill's,  without 
West  Lake, 
Grindstone  It 
snnill,  rocky, 
its  west  point 
it,  nearly  1 " 


th 

IC( 

l•a^ 


mpw 


ma 


mmmmm 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


73 


iondo  U 
I  witli  the 
pn  to  the 

'iiiirlip,; 

'0  clpnr 
fi'd  (seen 

nnd  the 
gl't  Reef 

ed  rocks, 
III  meter, 
•  ^-O"  K. 
the  sen 
qiinrter 
pxtrem- 
n  be  sel- 
•  side  of 
|'o?e  clifTs 
'«'.  keep. 
''I'll  most 
"  Detn- 
mliwfird; 


J  or  4  years.  The  riding,  however,  is  often  heavy  nnd  rough  enough  in  north-east  galea, 
and  a  vessel  should  be  well  moored  with  a  whole  cable  on  each  anchor,  an  open  hawse  to 
leewei'il,  h'hI  all  snug  aloft. 

Tlio  bostaiid  most  sheltered  anchorage  is  in  4  fathoms,  with  the  rocky  poi.t  of  entrance 
of  Anil""'^t  Harbor  bearing  S.  W.  i  W.  two-thirds  of  a  mile,  and  a  little  more  than  half 
a  mil«  '^'0'"  ^'SJh  water  mark  on  the  sandy  beach  to  the  southward,  when  a  remarkable 
5,1,1  hij;li  siind-liill  will  bear  S.  4  E.  A  large  ship  should  anchor  further  off,  and  should 
take  notice  that  there  are  only  from  3  to  .3i  fathoms  in  one  part  of  the  bay,  as  will  bo  seen 
iiitiie  rliiirt.  The  bottom  is  every  where  excellent  for  holding,  and  of  red  sandy  clay. 
\  vossel.  iiiichored  as  I  hiive  recommended,  will  be  sheltered  from  E.  N.  E.  4  E.  round 
i,v  tliH  southward  and  westward  to  N.  E.  i  N.  and  will,  consequently,  have  only  3  points 
jonipli'tely  open.  Even  when  the  wind  comes  right  in,  the  son  is  much  lessened  by  pas- 
jjiiffover  so  nmch  of  shoal  water;  nevertheless,  1  am  of  opinion,  that  the  attempt  to  ride 
out  n  lieavy  easterly  gale,  either  bcifore  .June,  or  after  August,  would  be  attended  with 
jiTPiit  diiiiger,  and  do  not  recommend  Pleasant  Bay  as  a  pleasant  place  under  such  circum- 
Biaiices  at  any  timf»  of  the  year.  In  the  northern  nnd  western  parts  of  the  bay,  sandy  flats 
cxtPinl  more  than  a  mile  from  the  bench. 

SANDY'  HOOK  CHANNEL.— From  the  Sandy  Hook  to  the  N.  W.  point  of  Enti-y  Sandy  Hook 
[sliiad,  the  bearing  is  E.,  by  compass,  2i  miles.  There  is  an  extensive  flat  sandy  shoal  Channel. 
ruiiaii'S  •'"'  two  miles  from  Sandy  Hook  towards  Entry  Island,  which  last  has  also  rocky 
jJKinis  oil'  its  west  side.  Sandy  Hook  Chnmiel,  between  them,  is  two-thirds  of  a  mile 
ffiije,  mid  4  fathoms  can  be  carried  through  it  by  n  good  pilot,  but  3i  fathoms  is  the  utmost 
lliiit  ciiii  b((  siifcly  reckoned  on  by  a  stranger.  There  are  several  rocky  patches  of  24  fath- 
oms oil' the  S.  W.  point  of  Entry  Island,  reaching  to  fully  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from 
till)  shore.  The  ebb  tide  sets  strongly  through  this  channel,  and  over  Sandy  Hook  Flat, 
(0  that  large  vessels  should  go  round  to  the  eastward  of  Entry  Island  rather  than  encoun- 
ter so  miiny  difficulties.  To  run  through  Sandy  Hook  Channel  from  the  sea,  keep  the 
eiist  side  (if  Alright  Islmid  just  open  to  the  westward  of  the  shingle  and  sandy  spit  forming 
the  N.  W.  point  of  Entry  Island,  until  abreast  of  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  last  named  island, 
then  liiinl  "P  for  the  summit  of  Grindstone  Island,  looking  out  for  the  edge  of  the  laud  shoal 
to  the  westward,  which  can  generally  be  seen. 

KNTI5Y'  ISLAND. — Entry  Island  is  the  liighest  of  the  Magdalens,  its  summit  being  Entry  Island 
5gOfi'et  aliove  the  sen  nt  high  water.  Its  red  dill's  nre  magnificent  nnd  beautiful,  rising, 
at  the  N.  K.  point,  to  350  feet;  and  at  the  S.  point  to  400  feet  of  perpendicular  height. 
OlVtlio  N.  E.  point  there  is  a  high  rock  nbout  half  n  cable's  length  from  theclifls,  and  on 
its  north  side  the  remarkable  Tower  Rock  of  red  sandstone,  joined  to  the  island,  nnd  which 
can  lie  seen  from  the  S.  W.  over  the  low  N.  W.  point,  as  well  as  from  the  N.  E. 

Vessels  occasionally  anchor  under  Entry  Island  in  northerly  and  easterly  winds,  but  it 
is  rough  riding,  by  reason  of  the  sea  which  rolls  round  the  island. 

The  inhabitants  of  Entry  Island  raise  cattle  nnd  shoej),  depending  more  upon  the  sale 
of  frcnli  provisions  than  the  fisheries.  Vessels  may,  therefore,  almost  always  obtaia 
supplies. 

l'"roiii  Sandy  Hook,  the  south  roast  of  Amherst  Island,  consisting  of  sand-hills  nnd 
beiic'lii's,  with  shoal  water  half  a  mile  off,  curves  round  to  the  westward,  for  C  or  7  miles, 
tiitlic  t'litiMiice  of  a  basin,  which  extends  nearly  across  the  island  to  within  less  than  half 
a  mile  of  I'Icnsiiiit  Haj'.  The  Hasiii  is  now  so  nearly  closed  with  sand,  that  boats  can  only 
enter  at  liii;li  water,  and  in  the  finest  weather;  but,  formerly,  the  entrance  was  deep 
enoimli  l')r  large  schooners,  and  it  has  been  frequented  by  those  vessels  within  the  mem- 
ory of  the  elder  iiilialiitants. 

Tlii'ic  is  good  anchoriige  oft'  the  entrance,  in  from  G  to  9  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  and 
with  winil-  from  the  N.  W.  rounil  by  north  to  east. 

A.MIIKIJST  CLIFFS. — A  mile  and  a  Italf  to  the  westward  of  the  entrance  of  the  Amherst 
bnsii),  clill's  commence  and  continue,  except  in  Cabane  Bay,  to  the  west  cape,  which  is   Cliffs. 
tlio  lii;:lirst  did' of  Amherst  Island,  its  summit  being  300  feet  above  the  sea.     There  is  a 
rt'iimrkahle  rock  above  water  close  to  the  shore,  and  about  n  (luarter  of  a  mile  to  the 
Boiithward  of  it. 

CAl'ANK  HAY. — Cabane  Bay  is  n  small  bight,  between  the  sovth  nnd  S.  'W.  cnpe8  CahaneBay. 
of  Anilicrst  Island,  where  vessels  may  safely  anchor  with  northerly  and  easterly  winds, 
and  where  good  water  may  easily  be  obtained.    The  best  berth  is  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  sandy 
bottom,  olftlu*  centre  of  the  bay,  with  the  south  cape  nnd  Cape  Perce  in  one,  three- 
quiirtersof  a  mile  olf  shore. 

From  the  west  cap(>,  the  remainder  of  the  sea-const  of  Amherst  Island  consists  of  red 
flili's,  without  beach,  but  having  shoal  water  one-third  of  n  mile  ofl' shore,  nil  the  way  to 
West  Lake,  n  smnll  pond  nt  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  snnd-bars,  which  join  Amherst  and 
Grindstone  Islands.  At  the  N.  E,  extremities  of  these  sand-tiaiJ  is  Gull  Islet,  which  is 
snmll,  rocky,  and  close  to  tlio  western  point  of  Grinilstone  Island,  and  has  shoal  water  off 
its  west  point  to  the  distance  of  one-third  of  a  mile.  About  li  milo  south-westward  of 
it,  nearly  l.i  milo  off  the  N.  W.  outlet  of  Basque  Harbor,  nnd  with  the  west  side  of  Gull 


^I^w 


■WHWqpiw 


^'HSIlll'SfPI  !  1 1  HI!lilIfll|(,inPffipnpBP 


74  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Islet  and  Gros  Cap  in  one,  lies  a  rocky  shoal  with  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  havino 
no  good  passage  between  it  and  the  shore.  Close  to  the  N.  E.  of  Gull  Island  is  the  Etflna 
du  Noid,  a  small  islet  affording  good  shelter  to  boats.  * 

Hospital  HOSPITAL  ROCK. — The  northern  shore  of  Grindstone  Island  is  of  red  sandstone 

Rock.  cliffs,  less  high  than  those  of  Amherst  Island.     Near  their  N.  E.  extreme  lies  the  Hospl- 

tal  Rock,  close  to  the  shore,  and  also  some  rocky  3  fathom  patches,  more  than  half  a  mile 
from  the  shore,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  chart. 
White  Horse.  WHITK  HORSE. — The  White  Horse  is  the  name  of  a  very  dangerous  reef,  lying  N. 
60°  E.  7  miles  from  Deadman  Islet;  and  due  W.  N.  W.  5i  miles  from  Gull  Islet.  It 
is  extremely  small,  being  scarcely  more  than  a  cable's  lengtli  in  diameter;  and  having  10 
feet  loast  water  over  jjointed  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  often  breaks.  On  this  reef  the  sum- 
mit of  Entry  Island  is  seen  over  a  low  part  of  the  sand-bars  at  the  N.  E.  outlet  of  Havre 
Basque,  but  this  mark  cannot  be  easily  discerned  by  a  stranger,  nor  is  there  any  other- 
but  the  bearings  and  distances,  tigether  with  the  chart,  will  be  a  sufficient  guide.  To 
those  that  can  take  a  terrestrial  angle  with  a  quadrant,  a  matter  so  simple  that  it  is  aston- 
ishing that  it  is  not  more  generally  known  and  practised,  the  following  may  bo  of  use. 
Whfu  on  the  leef  the  western  extremity  of  Amherst  Islond  and  Hospital  Cape  (the  north- 
eastern extremity  of  the  cliffs  of  (jri-indstone  Island)  subtend  an  angle  of  91'^  30';  conse- 
quently with  these  points  subtendir.g  a  loss  angle  by  3  or  4  degrees,  the  vessel  will  pass 
outside  of  the  reef  With  a  greater  ingle,  94  or  95  degrees,  she  will  pass  inside  of  it,  or 
between  it  and  the  shore. 

There  are  irregular  soundings  and  foul  ground  between  this  reef  and  the  shore,  but 
nothing  less  thon  5  fathoms,  excepting  what  has  been  already  mentioned. 

The  Pierre  de  Gros  Cap  is  another  dangerous  reef  of  rocks,  nearly  of  the  same  size  as 
the  Whito  Horse,  and  having  18  feet  least  water.  This  reef  i<»  seldom  seen,  as  the  sea 
breaks  upon  it  only  in  very  heovy  weather.  It  lies  N.  62°  E.  6  miles,  from  the  White 
Horse;  due  north  from  the  west  point  of  Etang  du  Nord;  N.  56°  W.  from  Hospital  Cape, 
and  3ii  miles  off  Cape  le  Trou,  the  nearest  j)oint  of  Grindstone  Island.  The  marks  on 
this  reef  are — First,  the  summit  of  Alright  Island  seen  over  the  N.  E.  point  of  Grind- 
stone Island,  which  is  in  the  liigoon,  and  very  nearly  on  with  Hospital  Cape.  Secondly, 
the  Hute  de  Portage,  a  hill  of  Amherst  Island,  situated  about  1^  mile  N.  W.  of  the  Dem- 
oiselle, midway  or  in  the  centre  of  the  narrow  passage  between  Gull  Island  and  the  west 
point  of  Etang  du  Nord.  These  marks  kept  oi)en  wdl  clear  the  reef  to  the  N.  E.  and  S. 
W.  and  a  vessel  will  pass  well  clear  outside  of  it,  and  also  of  the  White  Horse,  if  Dead- 
man  Islet  be  not  brought  to  bear  to  the  westward  of  S.  W.  4  W. 

From  Hospital  Cape  to  Wolf  Island,  off  wh'-h  there  is  a  rocky  3  fathom  shoal  nearly 
half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  the  northern  coast  of  the  Magdalens  consists  merely  of  sand- 
beaches  and  sand-hills  for  a  distance  of  9  or  10  miles.      The  low  sandstone  cliffs  of 
Wolf  Island,  which  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long,  interrupt  the  continuance  of 
the  sandy  shore  for  only  half  a  mile;  the  sund-beoches  then  recommence,  and  continue, 
with  high  sand-hills  occasionally,  9  or  10  miles  further,  to  the  north  cape.      In  all  this 
part  the  sand-bars  may  be  safely  approached  by  the  lead  as  near  as  9  or  10  fathoms  of 
depth  of  water. 
North  Cape.        NORTH  CAPE. — The  North  Cape  of  the  Magdalens  is  the  northern  point  of  Grosso 
Isle,  and  u  ])recipice  of  considerable  height,  but  not  so  high  as  the  west  point  of  the  same 
island,  which  is  in  the  great  lagoon,  and  300  feet  above  the  sea. 
North  Cape        NORTH  CAPE  ROCKS.— The  North    Capo  Rocks,  and  some  of  which  always 
Rocks.  show,  lie  to  the  westward  of  the  cope,  the  outermost  being  600  fathoms  oft"  shore.     The 

west  enil  of  these  rocks  bears  S.  S.  E.  from  the  high  S.  W.  side  of  Grosse  Isle,  and  tlitiir 
extent  to  the  eastward  is  marked  by  the  N.  E.  sides  of  the  north  and  N.  E.  capes  in  one. 
Therefore,  in  running  down  from  the  westward  to  anchor  under  tlie  north  cape,  do  not 
come  nearer  to  the  shore  than  1  mile  until  the  above  named  marks  open.  In  this  anchor- 
age, namely,  to  the  eastward  of  the  north  cape,  vessels  may  ride  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  over 
Bandy  bottom,  with  all  soutlKM'ly  winds,  and  will  find  good  holding  ground,  and  plenty  of 
room  to  get  under  way.  Water  may  bo  had  in  small  quantities  near  the  houses  on  tha 
eost  side  of  the  north  cape,  but  there  are  no  good  watering  places  excepting  those  already 
mentioned. 

The  coast  continues  from  the  north  cape,  in  a  curved  line  of  sand-beaches  and  sand- 
hills, for  about  6  miles,  which  distance  again  brings  us  to  the  oast  point,  and  completes 
the  description  of  the  Magdalens. 

Although  1  have  given  a  general  description  of  the  appearance  of  the  Magdalens,  yet 
as  vessels  passing  to  the  sotithward  of  them  have  been  directed  to  endeavor  to  make  En- 
try Island,  it  may  be  useful  to  add,  that  that  Island,  when  first  niaile  from  the  eastward, 
will  a|)pear  like  a  double  peaked  hill,  sloping  somewhat  abruptly  down  to  ])erpendiculftr 
and  high  clilfs  on  either  side.  'J'he  S.  W.  point  of  Andierst  Island  is  also  a  sleep  clill",  but 
of  less  height,  and  as  there  is  no  land  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  it,  it  cannot  be 
mistaken.  The  lanil  ris(>8  from  it  in  undulations  to  the  higlutst  parts  of  the  island.  Should 
the  weather  bu  foggy,  thu  souudings,  as  uhuwu  iu  tho  charts,  will  uufely  guidu  vessels  paa- 


jin?  to  these 
ffhich  exten 
time  been  cc 
iightorinfo 
directions. 

TiDKS   AN 

the  currents 
ffill  not  bo  SI 
intelliee"*  P 
fishing  craft 
jirree  in  stat 
unknown  ca 
Neverthel 
subject  to  oc 
scribe,  will  1 
A  few  mill 
a  current  s« 
flows  betwet 
is  divided  by 
over  tho  Lo 
tlie  soutli-w^ 
Coffin   Islan 
northward  o 
of  Amherst 
\V.;  whilst 
of  Amherst  ] 
the  east  poin 
and  turned 
the  ofiing. 

Ebb  Str 

itrongly  out 

Island.     It  i 

herst  Island. 

the  flood  air 

the  S.  W.  a| 

from  the  N. 

Island  to  the 

the  shoidnes 

the  fishing  s 

The  rate 

tho  points. 

by  w  esterlv 

DKADM 

weft  cape  o 

an  E.  S.  E. 

steeply  slop 

eembles  a  p 

its  outline  ve 

its  name  is 

B  bright  sun 

very  beautd 

ofcntdes'  le 

third  of  a  i 

About  a 

least  water 

is  no  dnnge 

may  safely 

Bels  passing 

or  in  foggy 

water  with 

BRYO> 

by  N.  and 

eastern  eni 

S.  W.  poii 

A  great 

land  tract 

obtained,  b 

north  side 

the  island. 


mmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


76 


ed  enndstoDe 
'8  the  Hospi- 
I"  half  a  mile 

"ff.  lying  N. 
ull  Islet.  It 
•h1  having  lo 
eef  tlio  sum. 
lot  of  Havre 
B  »ny  other; 

guide.  To 
nt  it  is  aston- 
y  IJo  of  use. 
0  (the  north- 

^0';  conse- 
sel  will  pass 
^'Je  of  it,  or 

0  shore,  but 

same  size  as 
't  ns  the  sea 

1  the  White 
5S|)it«l  Cape, 
'10  marks  on 
lit  of  Grind. 

Secondly, 
of  theDem. 
lul  the  west 
'i.  E.  nndS. 
so,  if  Dead- 
shoal  nearly 
•ely  of  sand- 
oiie  cliffs  of 
ntiiiunnco  of 
lid  continue, 

In  all  this 
)  futlioms  of 

lit  of  Grosso 
of  the  same 

lich  always 
hore.  The 
le,  and  their 
ipes  in  one. 
^iipo,  do  not 
this  aiichor- 
thoins,  over 
id  plenty  of 
u.ses  on  tha 
oso  already 

3  and  sand- 
completes 

(liilons,  yet 
iimko  En- 
>  eastward, 
■pendicular 
L'P  did',  but 
ciinnot  be 
1.  Should 
usijoly  pas- 


jipff  to  thesoutL-enBtward  of  the  islands.  The  general  soundings  around  the  Magdalena, 
which  extend  off  them  so  many  miles  in  every  direction,  and  which  have  now  for  the  first 
•iine  been  correctly  laid  down  by  us,  thus  affording  an  invaluable  assistance  to  vessels  at 
iightorinfoggy  weather,  will  be  better  understood  from  the  charts  than  by  any  written 
directions. 

Tides  and  Currents. — I  have  now  only  to  notice  the  important  subject  of  the  set  of  Tides  and 
tlie  currents  or  tidal  streams  around  those  islands,  respecting  which  I  can  say  nothing  that  Currents. 
ffill  not  bo  subject  to  exception,  for  they  are  so  irregular,  that  the  most  experienced  and 
intelligent  pilots  for  the  islands,  who  are  also  fishermen,  who  have  passed  their  lives  in 
fishing  craft  around  them,  can  give  no  certain  account  of  their  rate  and  direction,  but  all 
girree  in  stating,  that  they  vary  in  both  respects,  either  from  the  effects  of  winds,  or  other 
unknown  causes. 

Nevertheless,  the  following  observations  will  hold  good  as  a  general  rule,  ^nd  although 
subject  to  occasional  interruption,  the  set  of  the  tidal  streams,  which  I  am  atjout  to  de- 
scribe, will  be  found  to  recur  with  considerable  constancy  in  fine  weather. 

A  few  miles  outside  of  Bryon  Island  and  the  Bird  Rocks,  there  appears  to  be  usually 
a  current  setting  to  the  south-eastward,  out  of  the  gulf;  but  the  stream  of  flood  tide 
flows  between  tllem  and  the  Magdalens.  The  stream  of  flood  comes  from  the  S.  E.  and 
is  divided  by  the  east  point  of  the  Magdalens.  One  branch  of  the  stream  sets  strongly 
over  the  Long-spit,  which,  with  the  Old  Harry  Head  and  the  shoals  off  it,  turn  it  off  to 
the  south-westward  towards  Entry  Island,  leaving  nearly  slack  water  in  the  baj'  between 
Coffin  Island  and  Cape  Alright,  and  also  in  Pleasant  Bay.  The  other  branch,  to  the 
northward  of  the  islands,  follows  the  shore  from  East  Point  round  to  the  south-west  cape 
of  Amherst  Island,  whence  the  greater  part  of  the  stream  continues  its  course  to  the  S. 
W. ;  whilst  the  remainder  following  the  shore,  runs  round  and  along  the  southern  coast 
of  Amherst  Island,  until  it  meets  the  before-mentioned  other  branch  of  the  stream  from 
the  east  point  setting  off  the  east  side  of  Entry  Island  ;  it  is  overcome  by  this  other  branch, 
and  turned  gradually  round  to  join  the  general  weak  stream  of  flood  to  the  westward  in 
the  ofling. 

Ebb  Stream, — On  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  islands,  the  stream  of  the  ebb  tide  sets  Ebb  Stream. 
rtrongly  out  of  the  lagoons  and  out  of  Pleasant  Bay,  between  the  Sandy  Hook  and  Entry 
lilnnd.  It  is  also  often  found  running  to  the  westward  along  the  southern  shores  of  Am- 
hnrst  Island,  and  right  round  it  in  like  manner,  but  contrary  in  direction  to  the  course  of 
the  flood  already  described.  In  the  ofling,  at  the  s.uno  time,  the  stream  of  ebb  is  from 
tiie  S.  W.  and  sots  over  the  sand-spif  oft' Sandy  Hook  Point,  where  it  meets  the  stream 
from  the  N.  W.  which  has  followed  the  north  shore  of  the  islands,  round  from  Amherst 
Island  to  the  east  point.  The  meeting  of  these  two  streams  of  the  ebb  tide,  together  with 
the  shoiilness  of  the  water,  causes  so  heavy  a  breaking  sea  in  strong  easterly  winds,  that 
the  fishing  shallops  dare  not  venture  at  times  to  pass  the  point. 

The  rate  of  either  streamseldom  amounts  to  a  knot,  excepting  close  in  shore,  orround 
the  points.  The  ebb,  however,  is  generally  the  strongest  stream,  and  its  rate  is  increased 
by  westerly  wind,  as  is  that  of  the  flood  by  winds  from  the  eastward. 

DEADAIAN  ISLET.— The  Deadman  bears  N.  52°  W.  7J  miles  nearly  from  the  Deadman 
west  capo  of  the  Magdalens,  and  is  very  small,  being  not  more  than  300  fathoms  long,  in 
an  E.  S.  E.  direction,  and  less  than  half  that  breadth.  It  is  about  170  feet  high,  with 
steeply  sloping  sides,  meeting  at  the  summit  like  a  prism,  so  that  when  seen  end  on,  it  re- 
sembles a  pyramid.  When  seen  from  a  distance,  with  its  longest  side  presented  to  view, 
its  outline  very  much  resombleslhat  of  a  body  laid  out  for  burial,  from  which  circumstance 
its  name  is  derived.  It  is  composed  principally  of  trap  rocks,  and  when  seen  close  to,  on 
n  bright  sunny  day,  with  the  white  surf  dashing  against  its  variously  colored  sides,  it  is  a 
very  beautiful  object.  It  is  so  bold  on  tho  west  side  that  a  vessel  may  pass  within  a  couple 
of  cables'  length  with  perfect  safety,  but  a  reef  extends  towards  Amherst  Island  one- 
third  of  a  mile. 

About  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  it  there  is  a  rocky  fisliing  ground  with  8  fathoms 
least  water:  and  G  miles  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  of  it,  there  is  another  with  11  fathoms.  There 
is  no  danger  nearer  than  tho  "'White  Horses,"  to  be  mentioned  hereafter,  and  vessels 
inny  safely  pass  between  it  and  Ainhersf  Island.  It  is,  however,  much  in  the  way  of  ves- 
sels passing  round  the  west  end  of  the  Magdalens,  and  they  should  beware  of  it  nt  night, 
or  ill  foggy  weather,  for  the  lead  will  give  little  warning,  since  there  is  nearly  us  much 
water  within  half  a  mile  of  it,  as  at  the  distance  of  several  miles. 

BRYON  ISLAND,  which  is  uninhabited,  is  rather  more  than  4  miles  long,  inn  W.  Bryon  Is- 
by  N.  and  E.  by  S.  direction,  with  the  extreme  breadth  of  rather  more  than  a  milo.     Its  land. 
eastern  eii<l  boars  from  tho  east  point  of  the  Magdalens,  N.  by  E.  i  E.  lOi  miles,  but  ita 
S.  W.  point  approaches  to  within  8f  miles  of  the  north  cape  of  these  islands. 

A  great  part  of  the  island  is  wooded  with  dwarf  spruce  trees,  and  there  is  a  large  up- 
land tract  covered  with  good  native  grass.  Water  is  neither  plentiful  nor  easy  to  be 
obtained,  but  it  may  be  had  in  small  quantities  by  digging,  and  there  is  a  spring  (m  the 
north  side  of  the  narrow  isthmus  which  joins  the  eastern  peninsula  to  the  remuiuder  of 
the  island. 


76 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  Bird 
Rocks. 


Anticosti 
Island. 


I  had  no  opportunity  of  measuring  the  height  of  Bryon   Isinnd,  but  I  conceive  it  n 
wheio  oxcoeda  200  feet  above  tho  sen.     Tlio  clill's)  on  the  uoith  side  are  much  hioVi" 
thim  those  on  the  south,  where  there  are  sinoiiii  smiili  coves  in  which  boats  niiivl  ^ 
easily  with  the  wind  otF  slioro   >  Thore  are  three  reefs  off  Bryon  Island.    One  off  itse" 
end  extends  near  throe-quarters  of  a  niil(>  to  tho  north-eastward  ;  another  oil"  tho  »% 
end  extends  li  mile  to  the  westward,  and  tlie  third,  off  tlie  sandy  S.  W.  point,  U  „,*| 
to  the  soutliward.     No  niariis  can  bo  j^iven   for  ili'iirinj^  these  reefs,  bu!  the  b(!iiriiur' d 
the  land,  as  shown  in  the  chart,  will  afford  sufficient  j;uid(ince  to  the  seaman.     The  r    f 
off  the  S.  W.  point  is  so  much  in  tho  way  of  vcssuls  piissing  between  it  and  the  Miie/  i 
lens,  that  it  may  be  useful  to  add,  that  from  the  southern  ridge  of  this  reef,  Brvon  I  i'l 
land  subtends  an  angle  of  97°,  so  that  with  the  isiiind  subtending  any  less  angle  the  re  fl 
may  be  passed.     Tho  south  reef  assists  greatly  in  turning  otf  the  sea  from  the  roadsteBJi 
to  the  eastward  of  it,  where  vessels  may  safely  anchor  in   C  fathoms  water  and  a  snndvl 
bottom,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  or  more  from  tlie  shore,  and  with  all  winds  from  N.  J' 
round  by  N.  to  \V.  N.  W.     Sunill  vessels  in  heavy  N.  W.  gales  lie  at  anchor  close uni 
der  the  reef. 

There  are  regular  soundings,  from  9  to  11  fathoms,  with  sandy  bottom,  between  Brvon 
Island  and  the  Magdnlens,  with  the  exception  of  an  extensive  patch  of  foul  nnd  rockv  i 
ground,  lying  between  S.  W.  d  W.  and  W.  S.  W.from  the  west  end  of  Bryon  Island,  and  ' 
having  a  clear  channel  on  either  side  of  it,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  chart.  We  could  find  no 
less  than  5  fathoms  here,  and  although  the  fishermen  see  bottom  upon  it  in  calm  weather 
1  have  every  reason  to  think  there  is  no  less  water.  Nevertheless,  large  ships  had  better 
not  run  over  it  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running,  for  a  small  point  of  rock,  with  a  few 
feet  less  water,  might  escape  the  mo8t  rigorous  examination. 

These  rocky  places  are  called  fishing  grounds  by  the  inhnbitimts  of  the  Magdnlens,  be- 
cause codfish  abound  upon  them.  There  is  one  with  11  fathonisof  water  2d  miles  north 
of  Bryon  Island,  and  which  extends  a  considerable  distance  parallel  to  the  island.  There 
is  sandy  bottom,  and  a  greater  depth  of  water  within  this  ridge,  and  vessels  may  anchor 
in  fine  weather  and  southerly  winds,  off  the  bay  on  the  north  side  of  the  island.  The 
soundings  extend  so  far  off  Bryon  Island  to  li-oward  in  every  direction,  that  there  is  no 
possibility  of  a  vessel  on  a  voyage  being  endangered  l)y  it,  if  the  lead  be  used.  Hut  great 
caution  is  requisite  in  ni)proaching  tho  reefs,  for  they  are  very  steep,  especially  that 
which  extends  to  the  southward. 

THE  BIRD  ROCKS  are  of  course  red  sandstone,  or  conglomerate,  in  strata  dipping 
very  slightly  to  the  S.  W.  and  are  constiintly  diminishing  in  .'-izo  from  the  action  of  the 
sea.  They  present  ])erpendicnhtr  dills  on  evei-y  side  :  yet  it  is  |)088ible  to  ascend  them 
with  great  difficulty,  in  one  or  two  |)liicfs.  but  there  is  no  landing  upon  them  except  in 
the  calmest  sea.  Every  ledge  and  fissure  of  th(^  dills  are  occupied  by  gnnnet,s,  nnd  the 
summits  of  both  rocks  are  literally  covered  with  tlieni.  Tho  white  plumage  of  these 
birds  gives  these  rock  tho  appenrjince  of  being  capped  with  snow,  and  reialers  them 
visible,  through  a  nightglass  in  a  clear  and  moonlight  night,  from  the  distance  of  7  or  8 
miles. 

The  two  rocks  bear  from  each  other  N.  N.  W.  A  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  4  E.  and  are  700 
fathoms  apart.  Sunken  rocks  leave  only  a  boat  ])assin:i'  between  them.  The  south-east- 
ernmost  is  the  largest  and  highest,  though  scarcely  'JOO  fiithdnis  long,  and  not  more  than 
140  feet  high  above  the  sea.  'i'he  other  is  divided  into  two  precipitous  mounds,  joined 
toirether  by  a  low  ledge.  The  lesser  of  these  mounds  rc.senibit^sa  lower.  A  reef  extends 
700  fathoms  to  the  eastward,  from  the  Little,  or  N.  W.  Binl  Rock,  and  there  is  a  patch 
of  breakers  nearly  midway  between  the  two,  and  rather  to  the  S.  W.  of  a  line  drawn 
from  one  to  tho  other.  The  (xreat.  or  S.  E.  Bird  Bock,  is  ipiite  bold,  excejiting  in  the 
direction  of  the  other  rock.  Tho  Little,  or  N.  W.  Bird  Bock,  bears  N.  E.  by  K.  \  E. 
distant  If!  I  miles  from  the  east  point  of  the  Magdalens,  and  E.  4  S.  103  miles  from  the 
east  end  of  Bryon  Island. 

The  soundings  olV  the  Bird  Rocks  to  the  eastward  have  been  already  stated  in  tho  de- 
scription of  St.  Paul;  they  extend  still  furilicr  n(V to  the  northward,  so  as  to  iilVord  the 
most  ample  warning  and  assistance  to  vessels  at  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  as  will  be  seen 
in  tho  chart.  B<«tween  them  and  the  east  point  of  the  Magdalens,  the  dejith  no  whore 
exceeds  IG  or  17  fathoms.overa  bottom  of  reddish  sand,  and  strv-eggs  are  very  frequently 
brought  up  by  the  lend. 

Between  the  Birds  and  Bryon  Island,  there  is  a  ridgo  of  rocky  and  toul  ground,  on  some 
parts  of  which,  it  has  been  said,  there  is  as  little  as  4  fiithoms  of  water,  because  bottom  has 
been  seen  in  calm  weather.  We  however,  could  not  find  less  than  7  fathoms,  but  it  may 
nevertheless  exist,  bo  that  a  largo  ship  had  better  not  cross  this  ridge  when  there  is  much 
sea  running.  The  two  cliffy  points,  on  the  north  side  of  Bryon  Island,  in  one,  mark  the 
northern  limits  of  this  rocky  ground. 

ANTICOSTI  ISLAND.— Tho  Island  of  Anticosti,  situated  in  the  entrance  of  the 
N.  W.  arm  of  the  (Julfof  St.  Lawrence,  is  122  miles  long,  IJO  miles  in  extreme  breadth, 
and  alHJUt  270  miles  in  circumference,  following  the  coast  from  point  to  point  across  the  bays. 


mmmm 


■M 


■M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  .  77 

[M  shores  are  every  where  of  rock,  belonging  to  one  great  formation,  nnmoly,  a  very 

I  ,i0|)t  secondary  limestone,  hH'im  ding  in  some  parts  excellent  building  stone,  of  which 

ICtffo  ligtithouses  have  been  (onstructud.  "^ 

'•'idgBiTis  of  excellent  water  descend  to  the  sea  on  every  part  of  the  coast.     They  are 

.pilly  too  small  to  admit  boats,  becomins;   rapid  immcdiatoly  within   their  entruncos, 

'  J  even  the  largest  of  them,  Obsorvutiun  River,   to  the  westward  of  the  S.  W   point, 

baiTO'l  with  sand,  excepting  for  short  intervals  of  time  after  the  spring  freshets  or  heavy 

jIiiDV  of  these  streams  abound  with  trout,  and  are  visited  periodically  by  great  num- 
Ij^^yfrfalmon,  which  are  taken  by  the  2  or  3  resident  families,  and  salted  for  the  Que- 
I  kjc  iiiiH'ket. 

\<iticosti  is  estimated  to  be  no  wiiero  higher  than  700  feet  above  the  sea.   Its  south  coast 

Jjff  and  shelving,  with  roofs  of  Hat  limestone  which  dry  at  low  water.     There  is,  how- 
I  rer,  I'  range  of  highlands  in  rear  of  tlio  S.  W.  point,  and  extending  for  some  miles  both 

(lie  uorth-westward  and  south-eastward  of  it.  The  north  coast,  for  70  or  80  miles  to 
ilie  westward  of  the  east  point,  is  bold,  precipitous,  and  of  considerable  elevation.  Pic- 
mresque  headlands,  the  eastern  termination  of  paralbd  ridges  of  table  land,  that  rise  gently 
KJtJitliB  strata  from  the  S.  VV.  end  in  magniticont  clilfs  of  limestone,  which  are  exter- 

,|ly  so  nearly  white  from  the  elFects  of  weiitlioring,  as  to  resemble  chalk.  Some  of 
(Use  cliffs  are  upwards  of  400  feet  in  perpendicular  liei^lit.  Tlie  remainder  of  the  north 
(OJJtis  low,  with  reefs  of  tlat  limestone,  like  the  southern  shores. 

It  is  unusual  to  find  an  island  so  large  as  Anticosti  without  a  good  harbor.     Limestone 
I  .jjsts  are  in  general  churacterized  by  deep  inlets  and  bays,  peninsulatod  points,  atid  de- 
„f!i('(|  islets  and  rocks,  but  nothing  of  the  kind  will  be  found  hero,  and  there  is  not  a  single 
jatached  shoal  oft'  any  part  of  the  coasts. 

This  island  has  been  generally  believed  to  be  extremely  dangerous.  Its  reefs  of  flat 
limestone,  extending  in  some  parts  to  li  mile  from  the  shore;  the  »vant  of  anchorage  off  i, 

j)Qjt  parts  of  the  coast,  and  above  all  the  frequent  fogs,  justify  this  belief  in  part,  but  pel 
ill  so  great  a  degree,  as  to  render  reasonable  the  dread  with  which  it  seems  to  have  been 
occasionally  regarded,  and  which  can  oidy  have  arisen  from  the  natural  tendency  to  mag- 
uJtViiingers  of  which  we  have  no  precise  knowledge. 

The  people  in  charge  of  the  lighthouses  and  provision  posts,  and  one  man  at  Fox  Bay,  Provision 
lire  the  only  resident  inhabitants  of  the  island.  The  provision-posts  have  been  established  j^osts, 
ly  the  government  and  legislature  of  Lower  Canada,  for  the  relief  of  the  crews  of  vessels 
ffiei'kcd  ui)on  the  island.  Vessels  are  more  frei]uently  lost  here  in  the  bad  weather  at 
tlie  close  of  the  navigable  season,  than  at  other  times,  and  their  crews  would  perish  from 
OTiit  and  the  rigors  of  a  Canadian  winter,  if  it  wore  not  for  this  humane  provision.  The 
lirst  of  these  posts  is  at  Ellis  Hay,  the  second  at  the  lighthouse  at  the  S.  W.  point,  the 
tliird  at  .Shallop  Creek,  (sometimes  called  Jupiter  River,)  and  the  fourth  at  the  lighthouse 
on  Heath  Point.* 

The  lighthouse  on  the  extremity  of  the  S.  W.  point,  has  been  built  of  a  very  beautiful  Lighthouse. 
greyish-wliite  encrinital  limestone,  quarried  on  the  spot.  The  tower  is  of  the  usual  coni- 
cal form,  and  75  feet  high.  The  light,  which  is  bright,  and  revolves  every  minute,  can  be 
seen  from  N.  N.  W.  round  by  west  and  south  to  S.  E.  by  E.  The  lantern  is  elevated 
100  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water  ;  C()n3e(|uently  the  light  can  be  seen  from  a  distance 
not  exceeding  \.)  miles,  when  the  height  of  the  observer's  eye  is  ten  feet  above  the  sea. 
When  the  height  of  the  eye  is  50  feet,  the  greatest  distance  from  which  the  light  can  be 
seen  will  bo  about  19i  miles,  and  if  the  eye  be  elevated  100  feet  the  light  will  be  visible  as 
farolf  as  23  miles  nearly,  in  the  average  state  of  the  refraction.  Hence  by  ascending 
the  rigging  till  the  light  just  shows  above  the  horizon,  and  then  measuring  the  height  of 
tlio  eye  above  the  sea,  a  very  near  estimate  of  the  vessel's  distance  at  night  may  be  obtain- 
ed. This  lisihthouse  and  attached  provision  post,  are  in  charge  of  Lieutenant  Harvey, 
ou  the  half  pay  of  the  navy. 

The  other  lighthouse,  on  the  southern  extremity  of  Heath  Point,  is  of  the  same  form, 
dimensioiiB,  and  color  as  the  above,  and  is  also  built  of  the  island  limestone.  It  has  not 
as  yet  been  lighted,  from  want  of  funds,  but  is  intended  to  show  a  bright  fixed  light  from 
W.  N.  W.  round  by  S.  to  N    E.  by  N.     The  lantern  will  stand  100  feet  above  the  sea. 

Having  given  this  general  description  of  the  island,  I  will  now  notice  more  pai'ticularly 
its  shores,  reefs  and  anchoring  places. 

KA.ST  CAPE. — The  EastCapeof  Anticosti  is  a  perpendicular  cliff  of  limestone,  rising  East  Cape. 
to  the  height  of  100  feet  above  the  sea.     The  ridge,  of  which  it  is  the  south-eastern  ter- 


'There  nro  dirrtuion  bonrds  crectfid  on  the  shore,  or  iinileil  to  trees,  ffota  which  the  branches  have  been 
cut  oil',  iieiir  till!  bcuL'li,  and  on  viirioas  parts  of  the  ooust.  Tliosn  dir(M;|ioii  buards  are  iiiteiuled  to  point 
out  to  sliipwrfick'd  p«rr<()H3  the  way  to  the  provision  posts.  The  direction  boards  were  placed  on  the 
followiiii;  parts  of  the  shorn,  ns  I  find  from  Mr.  1/uiililv  s  HMiiark-book,  for  I  have  not  seen  them  all: — 1st. 
Oa  the  wost  point.  vJnd.  Four  loairues  south-eastwarJ  of  Ellis  Bay.  3rd.  10  leagues  westward  of  Siinl- 
lop  Creek,  ith.  Seven  leagues  eastward  of  Shallop  Creek.  And  there  were  formerly  others  on  Heath 
Puiot  uiid  the  S.  W.  I'oint,  which  the  lightliouses  have  rendered  unueecssury. 


78  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

minntion,  trends  to  the  westward  inltind,  and  the  exi'omity  of  the  very  low  land  to  the 
Lighthouse.  Boutliwnrd  of  it  is  Heiith  Point,  on  which  is  thn  Jishthouso,  bearing  from  the  east  points 
W.  i  S.  3.i  miles.  Between  the  two  points  is  Wreck  Buy,  which  is  dangerous  and  afford' 
no  anchoriige.  Off  to  the  S.  E.  from  the  eost  capo  a  reef  extends  rather  more  than  one 
thinl  of  n  mile. 
Heath  Point.  HEATH  POINT.- -Heoth  Point  is  of  limestone,  about  10  feet  high,  with  a  super, 
stratum  of  peat,  in  which  there  are  several  ponds  of  dark  hog  water.  Being  so  low,  this 
point  disappears  below  the  horizon  at  the  distance  of  a  few  miles,  the  lighthouse  then  an. 
pears  like  a  sail  olf  the  island,  and  is  extremely  useful  in  making  the  extent  of  the  low 
land  to  vessels,  either  from  the  eastward  or  westward,  as  well  as  in  showing  its  position 
from  the  southward,  from  which  direction  it  cannot  be  made  out  at  night,  being  hidden  bv 
the  high  land  behind,  or  to  the  northward.  t    ^ 

The  most  dangerous  reef  off  this  end  of  the  island  runs  out  from  Heath  Point  to  the  E 
S.E.  nearly  '2  miles,  at  which  distance  there  are  5  fathoms  of  water.  Within  tlint  dia^ 
tance  the  reef  is  com|)osed  of  large  square  blocks  of  limestone,  with  very  irregular  sound- 
ings, varying  from  2  to  3  fathoms.  The  rocky  and  irregular  soundings,  from  5  to 7  fathonig 
extend  nearly  3  miles  olf  Heath  Point,  so  that  I  recomtnend  vessels  not  to  approach  nenr- 
er,  on  any  bearing  from  the  point  between  S.  E.  by  ,S.  and  E.  by  S.  With  the  oast  cape 
bearing  N.  by  W.  the  vessel  will  pass  jusi  outside  of  the  shallow  and  irregular  soundings 
n  al)(tut  20  fathoms  of  water. 

Olf  Heath  Point,  to  the  southward  and  westward,  the  shoid  water  does  not  extend  be- 
yond tliroc-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  furtiierotf  on  tliat  sid(>  there  is  one  of  the  liest  open 
nnrhoraires  on  the  island.  The  best  berth  is  in  10  fathoms,  over  sand  and  mud  bottom 
witli  tlie  lighthouse  E.  by  N.  and  C/'onnoriUit  Point  nothiiii;  to  the  westward  of  \V.  N.  w! 
The  vessel  will  then  be  'J  mil(!s  olf  shore,  and  will  be  sheltered  from  all  winds  from  W, 
N.  W.  round  by  the  N.  to  K.  by  N. 
Cormorant  COKMORANT  POINT.— From   Heath   Point  Cormorant  Point  bears  W.  by  N.  6 

Point.  miles;  and  the  south  point  bears  W.  N.  W.  Ki-i  miles  from  Cormorant  Point,     lu  this 

distance  the  coast  is  low  and  undulating,  with  points  of  low  limestone  clilfs,  and  beaches 
of  sand  and  shingle  in  the  bays,  inclosing  lars;e  ponds  or  lagoons,  into  many  of  which  the 
tide  llows.  and  also  small  rtreains  from  the  interior  of  the  islnnil.  This  part  of  tlie  coast 
may  siil'ely  be  approached  by  the  lead,  as  wdl  be  sei-n  in  the  chart,  for  the  reefs  no  where 
extend  fur'lier  olf  than  three-quarters  (d'a  inil(!  till  we  com(^  to  the  South  Point. 
South  Point.  SOH  Til  POINT.—  .  he  .South  Point  is  a  clilf  of  sandy  clay,  resting  upon  limestone. 
It  is  estimated  not  to  exceed  (iO  feet  in  height,  and  there  is  nothing  remarkable  in  its  shape; 
but  there  is  no  other  day  clilf  near  it,  and  as  it  is  nn  extreme  point,  there  will  be  litHo 
difticnlty  in  distinguishing  it  by  the  trending  of  the  land,  'i'he  reef  olf  it  to  the  south- 
ward, runs  out  nearly  li  mile,  and  the  sea  usually  breaks  u|)on  it.  The  light  on  Heiith 
Point  and  t'ormoriint  Point  in  ones  bearing  E.  I)V  S.  clear  this  rtef  at  the  distiiiico  of  2 
mil.'s.  but  I  fi-ar  that  tlie  lii;ht  will  siddoiii  be  seen  up  to  the  reef,  which  is  distant  2'J  miles 
from  it.  The  leading  mark  will  nevertheless  be  of  use  to  vessels  between  South  Poiut 
and  Cormorant  i'oiiit. 
'  FrcMii  Soutii  Point  to  the  lighthouse  on  the  8.  W.  point,  a  distance  of  56  miles,  there 

is  such  a  sameness  in  the  character  of  the  coast,  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  make  out  one 
patt  fVom  another. 

The  houses,  however,  of  Mr.  H;imilton.  in  (diarge  of  the  provision-post  at  Sluillop 
Creek,  will  be  seen  13  mdes  north-westward  of  tlie  south  jioint,  and  at  the  first  limestone 
clilf  to  tlie  iKU'th-westwaid  of  those  houses  is  Pavilion  Piver,  '2i  miles  from  South  Point, 
In  this  distance  the  coast  is  very  low,  and  may  be  approached  safely  by  the  deepsea  lead, 
tin*  soundings  in  moderate  depths  extending  from  ,')  to  H  miles  off,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
chart.  The  roast  begins  to  rise  at  Pavilion  lliver,  tlierc  being  a  high  ridge  close  in  reiir 
of  till"  coast  all  the  way  to  tin'  S.  W.  point,  and  ix'yond  it  for  some  miles.  This  distiiiice 
of  .!•,' miles.  Iiclween  Pavilidii  UiviM'  and  the  S.  \V^  Piiiii!,  cnmprises  the  boldest  [nirtH  of 
the  south  coast  of  the  islanil.  but  should  be  very  cautiously  approached  in  fogsiy  weatliT, 
astlieri'  is  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead.  When  fir  enough  to  tlie  westward,  tin;  light 
on  .South-west  I'oint  bearing  nolliing  to  the  wt^stward  of  N.  N.  W.  as  before  directed, 
will  lie  a  siiflicient  guide. 

In  the  whole  distance  from  South  to  South-west  Points,  the  reefs  n )  where  extend  fur- 
ther olf  from  liiuh  water  mark  than  one  mile,  and  the  island  imty  therefore  be  safely  ap- 
proached to  within  '2  miles. 
.'^alt  Lalcc  SALT  LAKK  MAV. — Eleven  miles  sonth-e-istwiinl  of  Scuith-west  Point,  is  Salt  Liiko 

Bay.  Bay,  wliicli  has  line  sandy  beaches,  inclosing  hmooiis  or  ponds,  into  which  llu;  tide  (lows. 

Olf  the  centre  of  this  bay,  and  with  its  N.  W.  point  bearing  N.  by  E.  i  E.  distant  l'| 
mile,  there  is  very  indilferent  anchorage,  in  7  lathmns,  oV(>r  sandy  bottom.  Vessels  shoulil 
be  cnnd'nl  not  to  anchor  further  to  tin-  S'lithwanl  and  eastward,  since  there  is  some  foul 
and  rocky  ground  about  a  nide  in  that  direitioii  tVoni  the  ))osltiirii  wliii  h  I  have  recoinineii;)- 
ed.  riiere  are  7  fathoms,  rocky  bolloiii.  niaikeil  in  tlii>  chart  on  the  spot  to  which  I 
allude,  and  tlu-re  is  |)roi)aljly  less  water  between  it  and  thi^  south-eustorn  point  of  the  bay, 
so  that  no  unu  should  attempt  to  puss  between  it  and  the  Biu)re. 


The  S.  W. 

jove  on  its  noi 

,eBrofthi8,  to 

there  is  a  bea 

the  north  side 

the  point,  and 

pendicular  an 

5ie  point,  and 

totheW.  anc 

tJiere  nre  30  f 

shells,  at  the  ( 

westward  ot  t 

to  200  fathoir 

There  is  a  I 

fathoms,  over 

oointboa;'ng 

ward  will  be 

\V.  and  small 

in  by  westerl 

to  be  trusted, 

caaeof  neces 

There  is  n 

directions  res 

reefs  of  Hat 

12  fathoms  o 

stand  in  as  n 

tack  in  17  fa 

OBSKRV 

Point,  is  the 

the  melting  ( 

'.he  S.  W.  g 

from  the  eas 

pie  of  the  isl 

ousand  higl; 

ofsnnd,  less 

BESCIE 

affording  shi 

casionally  re 

eastward  of 

ELLIS  I 

Vessels,  wli 

ing  the  thre^ 

moor  with 

for  a  few  he 

ground  nor 

The  best 

i  W.  and  I 

Cape  Eagle 

ouis,  over  i 

about  halfi 

Capes  Hen 

points  of  th 

occurrence 

less  nt  the 

tween  the 

tides  only  i 

swell,     i'l 

Capo  Eagl 

tliem  is  (iO 

these  recti' 

low  8|)ring 

These  Hat! 

time  that  s 

Ellis  Bi 

land  being 

On  a  near 

the  head  ( 

ridges,  or 


wmmi^mmm 


t^mim 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


.7-J 


*'»  'I  super. 
80  low,  this 

'se  then  an. 
of  the  low 
'fs  position 

g  'iidilen  by 

nt  to  the  E 

ill  tlint  dis." 

uliir  sound- 

o  7  fathoms, 

"■ouch  near- 

'o  east  cape 

soundings, 

extend  be- 
oliostopen 
mil  Ijoitnm 

■  ^^'-  N.  w! 
lis  from  W. 

\V.  by  N.  6 
"f-  III  this 
mil  iH'aches 
f  which  tile 
of  tlie  roast 
fs  110  where 
tit. 

Ill  liiiu'stiine. 
ill  itsHhiipe; 
will  ho  hitlo 
'  tliii  sonth- 
it  oil  Heath 
istiinco  of  2 
mifj',>inilc3 
>outh  Poiut 

niWes,  there 
iLo  out  one 

lit  Shailap 
■it  limcstoni) 
oiilli  Point. 
•M'J^i'ii  load, 
Hi'on  in  the 
"HI-  in  rear 
lii-<  ili.staiice 
f'st  PiirlH  of 
;y  wciitli'T, 
'il.  till?  liijiit 
<i  (lirpcted, 

nxtend  fur- 
i  siifc'ly  ap- 

Suit  Lake 
tiihf  (lows, 

ilistiint  1^ 
sols  shoulil 
I  Honio  foul 

('MllllMCIl.l- 

i>  wliicli  I 
of  tlio  bay, 


f  be  S.  W.  point  of  Anticosti  is  a  low  projecting  ridge  of  limeatone,  having  n  smnll 
cove  on  its  north  side,  which  forma  it  into  a  peninsula.     The  land  rises  gradually,  in  the  , 

rear  of  this,  to  the  summit  of  the  ridge  above  mentioned.  On  the  south  side  of  the  point 
there  is  a  beach  of  limestone  gravel  on  which  boats  may  land,  v.a  well  as  in  the  cove  on 
the  north  side,  when  the  wind  is  off  the  land,  and  the  sea  smooth.  On  the  north  side  of 
the  point,  and  for  several  miles  along  the  const,  to  Observation  Rivor,  the  cliffs  are  per- 
pendicular and  washed  by  the  sea.  The  lighthouse  stands  on  the  western  extremity  of  Lighthouse. 
{lie  point,  and  forma  a  very  conspicuous  land-mark.  A  reof  extonds  out  from  the  point, 
to  the  W.  and  S.  W.  not  more  than  half  a  mile;  Ljd  2  miles  off,  in  the  same  direction, 
tJiereare  .30  fathoms,  over  roclty  bottom,  deepening  rapidly  to  65  fathoms,  witii  sand  and 
Bhells.  at  the  distance  of  three  miles.  At  the  distance  of  G  miles,  to  the  southward  and 
westward  of  the  point,  the  depth  is  about  110  fathoms,  with  mud  bottom,  and  increases 
to  200  fathoms  nearl,;'  midway  towards  tlie  south  coast. 

There  is  a  bay  on  the  north  side  of  the  point,  in  which  vessels  may  anchor  in  12  or  13 
fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  and  with  the  extremity  of  the 
point  boB;'ng  S.  S.  W.  -i  W.  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  when  the  cliffs  to  the  enst- 
ward  will  bo  at  the  same  distance.  The  shelter  is  from  N.  by  E.  round  by  E.  to  S.  by 
\V.  and  small  vessels  may  lie  close  under  the  point,  but  it  is  a  dangerous  state  to  be  caught 
in  by  westerly  winds,  wliich  are  preceded  by  a  heavy  swell.  The  ground,  1  think,  is  not 
to  be  trusted,  so  that,  altogether,  I  do  not  recommend  any  vessel  to  anchor  here  unless  in 
(^186  of  necessity. 

There  is  no  anchorage  from  South-west  Poiut  to  Ellis  Bay,  and  as  I  have  already  given 
directions  respecting  this  part  of  tlie  western  coast,  little  remains  to  be  noticed.  The 
reefs  of  llat  limestone  extend  from  it,  in  i  .ost  parts,  fully  a  mile;  anil  often  have  10  or 
12  fathoms  of  water  close  outside  of  them ;  but  vessels,  with  tlio  lead  going,  may  safely 
Btand  in  as  near  as  2  miles,  or,  which  will  be  safer  than  an  estimated  distance,  had  better 
tack  in  17  fathoms. 

OBSKRVATION  RIVER. — Observation  River,  54  miles  northward  of  South-west  Observation 
Point,  is  the  largest  stream  on  the  island,  having  5  or  6  feet  of  water  in  the  entrance  after  River, 
the  melting  of  the  snows  in  the  spring  of  the  year,  but  soon  becomes  barred  with  sand  by 
'Jie  S.  W.  gales.  It  becomes  shoal  and  ra|)id  immediately  within,  though  it  has  a  course 
from  the  eastward  of  many  leagues.  Its  source  does  not  apjjcar  to  be  known  to  the  peo- 
ple of  the  island.  Immediately  to  the  northward  of  this  river  there  are  verj'  conspicu- 
ous and  hiiih  sandy  cliffs.  The  St.  Mary  Cliffs.  21  miles  from  South-west  Poiut,  are  also 
of  sand,  less  high,  and  less  remarkable,  but  yet  not  difficult  to  distinguish. 

BESCIE   UIVER, — Bescie  River  is  a  very  small  stream,  at  the  head  of  a  small  cove,  Bescie  River. 
affording  shelter  to  boats,  and  where  there  is  a  hut,  at  which  a  liuiitor  and  fisherman  oc- 
casionally resides.   It  is  7  miles  north-westward  of  the  St.  Mary  Cliffs,  and  12  miles  south- 
eastward of  Ellis  Bay. 

ELLIS  BAY. — Ellis  Bay  affords  the  only  tolerably  sheltered  anchorage  in  the  island.  Ellis  Bay. 
Vessels,  whose  draught  is  not  too  great  for  a  depth  of  .3  fathoms,  may  safely  lie  there  dur- 
ing the  three  linest  months  of  summer,  namely,  .lune,  .luly,  and  August;  but  tliey  should 
moor  with  an  oj)en  hawse  to  the  southward.  Large  vessels,  whoso  object  is  to  remain 
for  a  few  hours  only,  may  anchor  further  out,  and  in  3i  and  4  fathoms,  but  neither  the 
ground  nor  the  shelter  will  be  found  so  good  as  further  up  the  bay. 

The  best  berth  is  in  a  lino  between  Capo  Henry  and  the  white  cliff,  bearing  W.  S.  W. 
^  W.  and  K.  N.  E.  4  E.  respectively  from  each  other;  Ganmche  House,  N.  by  IC.  and 
Cape  Eaglo  between  S.  S.  E.  4  E.  and  S.  S.  E.  \  E.  The  vessel  will  then  bo  in  3  fath- 
oms, over  muddy  bottom,  distant  about  300  fathoms  from  the  flats  on  either  .siilc,  and 
about  half  a  mile  from  those  at  the  head  of  the  buy.  The  extremities  of  tlin  n'vl^,  off 
Capes  Henry  and  Eagle,  will  bear  S.  W.  by  S.  and  S.  4  E.  rcspt'ctivcly ;  thus  leaving  34 
points  of  the  compass  open,  but  in  a  direction  from  which  heavy  winds  are  of  very  rare 
occurrence,  and  never  last  long.  Moreover,  when  they  do  chance  to  occur,  tlie  sea  is  much 
less  at  the  anchorage  than  might  be  expected,  although  very  heavy  in  the  entrance  be- 
tween the  reefs.  These  r<H'fs  are  of  flat  limestone,  and  dry  at  low  water;  and  as  the 
tides  only  rise  from  4  to  7  feet,  the  sea  always  breaks  upon  them  when  there  is  the  least 
swell.  The  reef  off  Cape  Henry  runs  out  nearly  a  mile  to  the  southward,  and  that  off 
Cape  Eagle  near  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward.  'J'ho  entrance  between 
tliem  is  (iOO  fathoms  wide,  from  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms.  Extensive  Hats  project  from 
these  reetk  quite  round  the  bay,  and  do  not  entirely  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  in  very 
low  spring  tides,  but  there  are  immense  boulder  stones  upon  them  which  always  show. 
These  Hats  occasion  the  landing  to  be  very  bad,  excepting  at  high  water,  which  is  the  only 
time  that  supplies  of  good  water  can  be  obtained  from  Ciamnche  River. 

Ellis  Bay  can  be  easily  made  out  from  sea,  for  Cape  Henry  is  a  hlufV  point,  and  the 
land  being  very  low  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  occasions  the  ojiening  to  show  distinctlj'. 
()n  a  nearer  a|)proacli,  Capo  Eii<;le  and  White  (Mill' on  the  east  side,  and  tlie  lioii.-eH  near 
the  head  of  ihe  bay,  will  be  easily  reeogni/.ed  with  the  assistance  of  our  chart;  wliii.it  two 
ridges,  or  iiills,  will  bo  seen  liir  backm  tlio  country,  and  to  the  northward  and  eastward. 


80 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  long  line  of  breakers  on  either  aide,  and  the  numerous  large  stoneu  so  far  froni 
the  shore  ahead,  will  present  any  thing  but  an  agreeable  appearance  to  those  who  may 
approach  this  bay  for  tlie  first  time,  but  tliere  will  be  no  danger,  if  the  following  direction 
be  attended  to.  In  approaching  the  bay  from  the  westward,  with  westerly  winds,  run 
down  along  the  outside  of  the  reofs  olf  Cape  Henry  by  the  lead,  and  in  10  bith(im9,'unti| 
the  following  leading  murlts  come  on.  Namely,  the  west  side  of  White  Clilf  on  with  the 
eost  side  of  the  westernmost  of  two  hills,  far  back  in  the  country,  and  bearing  N.  E.  J  N.- 
then  hiiul  up  with  these  marks  on,  and  they  will  lead  you  into  smooth  water,  close  under 
Cape  Henry  Reef,  in  'M[  fatlioms.  Contitme  running  in,  with  these  marks  on,  until  Ga- 
niache  House  bears  N.  by  E.;  then  haul  up  for  it,  and  anchor  in  the  berth  which  I  have 
previously  recommended.  The  lead  should  be  kept  going,  and  the  reefs  on  either  side 
should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  three  fathoms,  in  any  part,  until  you  arrive  at  the 
anchorage 

In  running  for  the  bay  from  the  south-eastward,  with  an  easterly  wind,  come  no  nearer 
to  the  west  point  of  Cape  Eagle  Reef  than  7  fathoms,  until  tiio  east  side  of  Wliite  CiifT 
comes  on  with  the  east  side  of  the  same  hill  as  before,  then  haul  up  with  this  mark  oo 
till  the  houses  bear  N.  E.  and  prooeod  as  above  directed.  Take  notice  that  the  west 
side  of  White  Cliff  is  used  for  the  leading  mark  in  westerly  winds,  and  the  east  side  in 
easterly  winds,  the  intention  being  to  keep  the  vessel  in  eitlier  case  from  going  too  near 
the  lee  side  of  the  channel. 

On  the  outside  of  Ca|)e   Henry,  and  continuing  to  the  west  point  of  Anticosti,  reefs 
extend    I.J  mile  from  the  shore;  and  vessels  approaching  it  should  keep  the  load  going, 
and  attend  to  the  soundings  in  the  chart. 
Welt  Point.        WEST  POINT  is  low  and  wooded,  with  reefs  which  do  not  extend  beyond  a  mile 
from  the  shore,  and  vessels  nniy  pass  it  in  15  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  1^  mile. 

The  north  coast  of  Anticosti,  between  the  west  and  north  points,  is  low,  with  reefs  of 
flat  limestone,  extending  one  mile  from  the  shore.  There  aie  soundings,  in  moderate 
depths,  for  more  tlian  one  mile  out  from  the  reefs.  Vessels  should  not  go  nearer  than 
25  fathoms.  In  the  rear  of  the  coast,  and  al)out  half  way  between  the  west  and  north 
points,  are  the  two  hills,  or  ridges,  mentioned  as  forming  one  of  the  loading  marks  for 
Ellis  Bay.  From  North  Point  to  Iligli  Clilf,  a  distance  of  13  miles,  ,he  coast  is  rather 
more  bold  and  elevated,  parallel  ridges,  in  an  east  and  west  directivin,  and  with  sninil 
Btrean)s  between  them,  beginning  to  almt  upon  the  coast.  North  Poi'it  is  wooded,  of 
very  moderate  height,  and  without  any  Llilf.  It  is  so  little  remarkable  as  to  be  only  dis- 
tinguished by  the  change  which  takes  place  at  it  in  the  direction  of  the  coiist.  High 
Clilf  Cape  is  easily  recognized,  being  the  only  clilf  on  the  island  that  has  a  tutus  in  front 
of  it,  or  that  has  not  its  IJuse  washed  by  the  sea  at  high  water. 

From  High  Clifl'  to  White  North  CliCl',  a  distance  of  2G  miles,  the  coast  is  low  in  front, 
with  ridges  of  consi(leral)le  elevation  a  few  miles  back  in  the  country.  This  is  the  most 
dang  -rous  part  of  the  north  (M)ast,  for  tlu*  reefs  extend  nearly  2  miles  out  from  high  water 
mark,  beginning  at  some  low  dill's  7  miles  eastward  of  High  Clilf  Capo,  and  continue  to 
do  so  for  4  or  5  miles  to  the  soLith-eastward,  after  which  they  gradually  diminisli  in  breadth, 
till  at  White  North  Clilf  they  are  not  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.  There  is, 
however,  less  warning  by  the  decipsea  lead  all  along  this  part  of  the  coast  until  we  up. 
preach  White  North  Clilf,  off  which  there  ure  70  liitlioms,  at  the  distance  of  li  mile  from 
the  surf. 

White  North  Cliflfis  very  remarkable,  for  tiiere  is  no  other  high  cliff  near  it.  It  appears 
like  a  white  patch  on  the  land,  and  can  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  G  or  7  leagues. 

Low  clilfs  commence  4  miles  south-eastward  of  White  North  Clilf  and  continue  to 
Carleton  Point,  under  which  vessels  may  anchor  in  fine  weather  and  westerly  winds,  and 
obtain  wood  and  water.  Ten  miles  further  to  the  south-eastward  is  Cape  Observation,  a 
bold,  high,  and  remarkable  headland.  On  its  west  side  there  is  a  magnificent  range  of 
greyish  white  clifl's,  several  hundred  feet  hig'i.  At  the  extremity  of  the  cape,  these  clills 
•'•-  become  suddenly   much  lower,  and  then  rise  again  to  their  former  elevation  for  a  short 

distance  on  the  east  side.  As  this  is  well  described  in  the  chart,  tlio  cape  will  be  easily 
recognized.  Vessels  may  anchor  uniler  it  with  westerly  w.inda  and  fine  weather,  and  ob- 
tain 8Ui)plies  of  wood  and  water  very  conveniently.  Twelve  and  a  half  miles  further 
south-eastward,  along  a  bold  coast  with  high  greyish  white  cliffs,  and  small  bays  between, 
brings  us  to  Bear  Head,  also  of  greyish  wliite  cliffs,  400  feet  high,  and  resembling  in 
some  degree  Cape  Observation.  This  last  named  cliff  has  no  ecjually  high  cliffs  to  tiio 
westward  of  it,  whilst  Bear  Head  has  a  difference  which  will  prevent  the  one  from  being 
mistaken  for  the  other. 

From  the  West  Cliff  to  Bear  Head  the  coast  is  extremely  bold,  there  being  in  most 
parts  100  fathoms  of  water  within  3  miles  of  the  shore. 
Bear  Bay.  BEAR  BAY  is  situated  between  Bear  Head  and  Cape  Robert,  which  are  distant 

nearly  6  miles  from  each  other,  in  a  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  direction  nearly. 
It  is  by  far  the  best  roadstead  on  the  north  coast  of  Anticosti,  and,  indeed,  the  only  one  in 
which  a  large  ship  would  like  to  anchor,  unless  she  bud  some  particular  object  in  view. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


81 


so  far  from 
?o  who  may 
!"« ilirecticn 
winds,  run 
muim,  until 
♦'"  with  the 
N.  E.JN.; 
close  under 
"-  until  Ga- 
liioii  I  have 
*''tlior  side 
'■'iVH  nt  the 

"  "o  nearer 

Wiiite  Cliff 

'3  iniirit  on 

t  the  West 

mist  side  in 

"g  too  near 

icosti,  reefs 
lend  going, 

mnd  a  mile 
mile. 

villi  reefs  of 

in  inodernte 

neiirer  than 

III"!  north 

"iiulis  for 

ist  is  rather 

J  with  small 

wooded,  of 

'Hi  only  dis- 

^i'St.       Pligh 

alus  in  front 

low  in  front, 
is  the  most 

1  high  water 
continue  to 

1  in  breadth, 
There  is, 

intil  we  ap. 

■i  mile  from 

It  appears 

U08. 

continue  to 
•  winds,  and 
)8orvation,  a 
iiit  range  of 
,  these  dill's 
1  for  n  short 
ill  bo  easily 
lior,  nnd  ob- 
iles  further 
fa  between, 
sonibling  in 
clilFs  to  the 
from  being 

)ing  in  most 

are  distant 
tion  nearly, 
only  one  in 
ict  in  view. 


h  is  gufliciently  roomy,  the  bottom  is  excellent  for  holding,  the  depth  of  water  modernte, 
jiidthe  shelter  extends  from  N.  N.  W.  round  by  W.  and  S.  to  S.  K.  by  S.    In  ordTto  ^ 

rocognize  this  unchorago,  it  may  bo  observed  that  Capo  Roliert  consists  of  clUfs  o,  the 
•amo  color  and  elevation  as  those  of  Bear  Head;  and  that  there  are  two  other  points  of 
jlliVs  300  feet  hi«h  within  the  bay,  the  south-easternmost  of  which  is  named  Tower 
Point.  Bolwecn  Power  Point  and  Cape  Robert,  at  n  distance  of  one  mile  from  the  for- 
mer, as  Willi  us  fi'om  the  western  shore,  and  in  13  fathoms  of  water,  over  a  bottont  of 
lifoffn  mu'l,  is  the  best  anchorage,  where  Towor  Point  will  bear  N.  W.  i  W.  Capo  Ro- 
bort  S.  K.  i  S.  and  Bear  Head  N.  by  W.  i  W. 

IJoar  Bay  is  divided  into  throe  snuJler  bays  by  the  two  high  points  of  cliff  which  I  have 
meutiuned.  In  each  of  these  bays  there  are  fine  bold  beaches  of  sand  nnd  limestone 
,|,jiiff|B,  and  streams  where  water  may  be  easily  obtained.  But  the  principal  stream  is 
Bear  River,  which  enters  the  southernmost  of  the  three  bays  close  to  the  S.  K.  side  of 
Xuwer  Point.  It  is  too  shallow  and  rapid  to  admit  boats,  but  the  water  is  clear  and  good. 
The  clilfs  in  Bear  Bay  are  magnificent:  they  are  of  greyish  white  limestone,  in  thin 
jtruta  dipping  very  slightly  to  tlio  southward,  nnd  are  perpendicular  or  overhanging.  At 
thi)  extremities  of  the  points  thecliUs  are  roumlcd  by  the  action  of  the  waves  anri  atmos- 
pbere  so  as  to  resemble  towers,  which  resomblnnce  is  rendered  stronger  by  the  masonry- 
like  appearance  of  the  rock.     The  trees  are  of  diminutive  growth. 

From  Capo  Robert  ta  Table  Head,  a  distance  of  19  miles  to  the  south-eastward,  the 
const  is  broken  into  small  bays,  with  shingle  beach  and  small  streams  between  high  head- 
Innds,  terminating  in  perpendicular  clill's,  the  bases  of  which  are  washed  by  the  sea.    None  , 

of  these  bays  aH'ord  good  anchorage.  Table  Head  is  rendered  remarkable  by  the  hill 
from  whence  it  derives  its  name,  and  which  rises  immediately  from  the  summit  of  the 
clilfs. 

FOX  POINT  is  4  miles  further  to  the  south-eastward,  and  much  lower  than  Table  Fox  Point. 
Hertd.    l"'""  Bay,  which  is  a  little  less  than  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  Fox  Point,  is 
about  1  mile  wide  and  deep,  with  sandy  beach  at  its  head,  where  there  is  a  considerable  ; 

Btreaui  issuing  from  a  small  lake.  Boats  may  enter  the  outlet  of  this  lake  at  high  water. 
The  house  and  store  of  M.  Godin  are  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  are 
ihe  scones  of  the  dreadful  sufferings  and  melancholy  fate  of  the  crew  and  passengers  of 
tneship  Grunicus,  wrecked  on  this  coast  in  November,  1828,  and  who  all  perished  from 
want  of  food,  after  enduring  the  most  horrible  misery,  before  the  following  spring. 

IIEI'JF'  POINT,  of  very  low  limestone,  is  the  southern  point  of  Fox  B'ly,  from  which  Reef  Point. 
a  reef  of  (hit  liiiiestone,  covered  with  only  a  few  feet  of  water,  runs  out  to  ti>e  distance  of 
fiiiiy  14  mil.'.  There  is  a  depth  of  10  fathoms  close  off  the  end  of  this  reef,  so  that  it  ia 
extroinoly  dangerous.  To  be  sure  of  clearing  it  to  the  north-eastward,  a  vessel  should 
lint  be  bniuglit  nearer  by  the  lead  than  17  or  18  fathoms;  or  if  any  of  the  land  to  the 
nurtli-westwiird  of  Table  lload  bo  open  clear  of  it,  yho  will  pass  in  safety. 

NORTH  RKEF. — From  the  northern  point  of  Fox  Bay,  which  is  a  cliff  of  modeiato  Nortk  ReeJ. 
[w'l'iUU  aimtlier  roof  runs  out  more  than  a  half  ti  mile  to  the  south-eastward.  A  point 
of  tlio  soiithorn  reef,  before  mentioned,  extends  to  the  northward  in  such  a  waj'  as  to  over- 
|,i|)tlie  risof  olf  the  northern  point,  leaving  an  entrance  from  the  north-eastward  between 
tbrt  two  only  a  (piarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and  13  feet  deep  at  low  water.  Inside  there  is  a 
8|)iice  half  a  mile  wide,  from  2  fatlionis  to  2  fatlioms,  and  with  IG  feet  in  the  midillo.  over 
inuiiily  buttcun.  A  wind  from  E.  by  N.  or  F.  N.  E.  blows  right  into  the  bay;  but  I  am 
tokl  tliut  the  sD.i  (l>es  not  roll  in,  but  in  heavy  weather  breaks  on  the  reefs  and  in  the  en- 
trance. This  account  I  believe  to  be  correct,  and  that  small  vessels  would  be  perfectly 
siift!  there  during  the  summer  months. 

Bc!tW(fen  Fox  Bay  and  East  Capo,  the  coast  is  of  limestone  cliffs,  100  feet  in  height, 
buIJ  and  free  from  danger.  Between  Ca|)e  Sund-top  and  East  Capo  vessels  may  anchor 
with  all  westerly  winds  in  from  1(J  to  20  fathoms,  over  fine  sand,  ut  a  distance  of  one  mile 
from  the  shore. 

Tiih's  and  currents  around  Anticosti  are  so  irregular  that  I  can  add  very  little  to  that  Tides, 
which  has  lioeii  already  stated 

I  have  seen  the  stream  run  alonj;  the  land  for  a  whole  day  at  the  rate  of  a  mile  perhour» 
in  either  direction,  witlmut  any  apparent  cause,  and  altogether  regardless  of  the  change  of 
tide.  At  other  tiiiius  I  have  found  the  tides  regular  inshore.  Umler  these  circumstances 
it  is  evident  that  the  sot  of  the  stream,  at  any  time  or  place,  cannot  be  reckoned  ui>on  with 
certainty. 

However,  in  addition  to  my  previous  remarks,  I  may  observe  that  there  is  usually  very 
little  stream  in  any  dirocti(Mi  on  the  north  coast,  from  White  Clilf  south-eastward  to 
Table  Head.  From  the  latter  to  East  Cape,  on  the  contrary,  there  is  very  frequently  a 
stream  from  the  northward,  runiiiiii;at  a  rate  varying  from  a  half  to  one  knot.  In  one 
or  two  instances  1  have  seen  this  stream  commence  and  end  with  the  liood  tide,  so  that 
I  have  been  led  to  imagine  a  connection  between  them;  and,  if  this  be  the  case,  it  may 
arise  from  the  circumstance  of  its  being  high  water  sooner  on  the  north  coast,  up  as  high 
as  the  Es(|uimaux  Islands,  than  at  the  east  point  of  Anticosti.     The  waters  having  thus 

G 


83 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


attained  a  higher  love)  to  the  northwnni  may,  in  consequence,  flow  to  the  southward 
On  the  other  hand  it  must  bu  mentioned  that  1  have  ubaerved  this  stream  durins  thn  oki! 


Capf  Des- 
pair. 
Leandf.r 
Slwal. 


ijf' 


Bonavftiture 
Island. 


''\e  Perci 
Bock. 


M  I  Day. 


tide. 


during  the  ebb 

It  frequently  honpens  that,  when  this  current  from  tho  northward  is  running,  another 
from  tlio  W.  N.  W.  comes  along  tlio  soutii  coast,  in  which  case  thoy  meot  at  tlio  reef 
oir  Heath  Point,  and  couse  a  grout  rip|)I<>,  or  irroguliir  breiilting  sea.  Wlien  this  lius  |)B„n 
observed  by  us,  there  has  been  usually  a  frosh  broo/.e  along  the  land  on  oitlicr  siiloot'tim 
island ;  tho  wind  on  the  north  side  of  tho  island  being  from  the  N.  or  N.  by  E.  wiiilHttlmt 
along  tho  south  side  was  W.  N.  W.  I  havo  soen  both  tho-io  winds  Ijlowiiig  a  smart  don, 
blo-ri'ef'cd  topsail  bree/o  at  the  same  time,  and  for  a  wiiole  day  togother,  and  yot  never 
meet  round  the  cast  end  of  tho  island,  which  is  no  wht'ro  more  than  •.'()()  fnot  in  liei"ht 
Between  tho  two  winds  there  was  a  triangular  space  of  calm  and  liglit  budlirig  airs;  the 
biiso  of  this  triangle  extondod  from  Heath  I'oiot  to  Kast  (Jape,  and  its  apex  from  5  to  8 
milos  to  the  eastward  of  the  island.  I  mention  this  circumstance  bocruuso  it  would  bn 
dangerous  for  a  vessel  to  stand  into  the  calm  space  botwfon  tho  two  winds,  whi-re  tlio  liigh 
cross  sea  and  constantly  changing  light  airs  might  loave  her  at  tho  mercy  of  the  current 
in  no  small  danger  of  being  set  on  tho  Uoatli  I'oint  Reef.  ' 

I  have  been  for  hours  endeavoring  to  get  out  of  tiiis  singular  space,  trimming  siiila  to 
light  airs,  which  did  not  remain  steady  to  any  one  point  for  a  minute  of  time;  and  I  wns 
finally,  in  spite  of  every  effort  to  the  contrary,  carried  over  the  roof  by  the  current,  nouini; 
the  rocks  distinctly  under  the  vessel's  bottom,  but  fortunately  drawing  too  little  water  to 
strike  upon  them. 


THE  SOUTH  COAST  OK 
FROM  CAPE  DESl 


F  THE  GULF  AND  RIVER  ST.  LAWRENCE 
iSPAlR  TO  THE  RIVER  MAGDALEN. 


CAPE  DESPAIR,  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Bay  of  Chaleur,  consists  of  rod  sandstone 
cliirs,  without  beach,  and  of  a  moderoto  height  above  tho  sea. 

LKANDER  SIIOAL  bears  from  Cape  Despair  S.  S.  E.  distant  rather  more  than  1^ 
milo.  It  is  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  diameter,  from  4  fathoms  to  4  fiithoms,  and  has  16 
feet  least  water  on  one  spot,  which,  however,  it  is  very  dirticult  to  tind.  It  is  a  rocky  shoiil, 
and  there  is  a  clear  passage  between  it  and  tho  capo.  The  leading  murks  are  as  lidlow: 
the  lino  of  the  White  Head,  in  one  with  tho  inner  or  N.  W.  end  of  I'erce  Hock,  puasps 
just  outside  of  the  shoal,  in  7  fiithoins:  therefore  the  wli  do  of  Perce  Rock,  well  opmito 
the  eastward  of  the  White  Head,  will  lead  clear  outsi  fall.  From  a  half  to  tlie  wlmla 
of  the  Perec  Rock,  shut  in  behind  tho  White  Head,  wui  lead  cloar  between  tlio  Lean- 
dor  and  Cape  Despair. 

BONAVENTURE  ISLAND  has  bold  and  perpendicular  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  and 
conglomerate  on  all  sides  excepting  the  west.  These  clills,  in  some  |)arls,  atl.iin  an  idovii- 
tionof250  foot  above  the  sea,  and  their  ledges  and  fissures  are  the  habitation  of  imiuiiier- 
ble  gannets.  From  the  west  side,  shoal  water  extends  to  the  distniico  of  a  (|iiiir(er  of  « 
milo,  and  thure  is  anchorage  in  15  fathoms  betwt!en  it  and  White  Head;  but  the  lidiii^ia 
insecure  and  heavy  in  consequence  of  the  swcdl,  which,  in  bad  weather,  rolls  round  tho 
island.  The  channel  between  Bonaventuro  Island  and  the  Perce  Rock  is  about  I  J  mile 
wide,  and  free  from  danger. 

THE  PERCE  ROCK  is  288  feet  high,  precipitous  all  round,  and  bold  to  seaward.  It 
is  narrow,  and  about  one-third  of  a  mile  long  in  a  S.  K.  direction,  being  an  outlier  to  the 
range  of  cliffs  on  tho  S.  W.  side  of  Mai  Hay.  It  is  rendered  remarkable  by  two  large  holes 
which  havo  been  perforated  through  it  by  tho  waveernnd  through  one  of  which  a  l)0!it  ciin 
pass  at  high  water.  Between  this  rock  and  the  White  Head  is  tlm  Hay  of  Perco.  havinj 
a  reef  at  the  distance  of  half  a  milo  to  the  S.  \V.  of  tho  Perce  Hock,  and  extonditisout 
nearly  half  a  mile  from  tho  shore,  as  will  be  soen  in  the  chart.  Small  vessids  engaged  in 
tlio  fisheries  unclnn-  on  either  side  of  this  reef  with  winds  off  tho  land,  but  it  is  a  dansennis 
place,  and  not  to  be  recommended  for  large  vessels. 

The  town  of  Perce,  principally  irdiabitod  by  persons  engaged  in  the  fisheries,  occupies 
the  shores  of  the  bay,  and  Mont  Perce,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the  Table  Roulanie, 
rises,  immediately  from  it,  to  tho  height  of  IJ.'SO  feet  above  the  sea.  This  mountain  is  very 
ronnirkable,  and  can  bo  seen  at  sea  from  a  distance  of  40  miles.  A  reef  connects  the  Pored 
Rock  with  Point  Perc^,  and  off  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  latter  snnill  vessels  anchor  with 
westerly  winds.  There  is  generally  a  regular  tide  offlnod  and  (d)l),  of  about  a  kiio,-,  be 
tween  Bonaventure  Island  and  the  main  land:  the  flood  tide  running  to  the  IS.  W.  nmnd 
Cape  Despair  and  up  the  Bay  of  Chaleur;  and  the  obb  in  the  contrary  diroclion.  Two 
or  three  miles  outside,  or  to  tho  eastward  of  Bonaventuro  Island,  the  current  to  the  south- 
wanl  out  of  tho  St.  Lawrence,  will  often  bo  found  runnitig  regardless  of  tlio  tides. 

MAL  BAY  is  between  5  and  fi  miles  wide,  by  4  miles  deep,  and  entirely  open  to  the 
S.  E.  On  its  S.  W.  side,  and  under  tho  Perce  mountains,  there  are  miiguificont  cliffs 
660  feet  in  perpendicular  height  above  the  sea.  Its  N.  E.  side  has  low  cliffs  of  sandstone, 
with  occasional  beaches.     A  fine  broad  sandy  beach  extends  right  across  tho  head  of  the 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


83 


>outhward. 
"8  the  ebb 


l^y,  nnd  incloses  a  shallow  lagoon.  A  considerable  river,  and  soveral  small  streamii,  dis- 
ch'ir;!'*  t'"^"*  wiitors  into  the  lii|{oon,  wliich  has  an  outlet  in  the  N.  W.  corner  of  tlie  bay, 
lulled  the  Tickle,  admitting  boiitH  iit  hijjh  water  nnd  in  fine  weather.  There  is  onchornKn 
jll  round  the  siioreo  of  Miii  Bay,  but  iis  u  heavy  sea  ami  tliiolt  fog  often  |)recedo  u  S.  E. 
pile,  i<nd  render  it  dilficuit  for  a  vesnel  to  beat  out,  it  cannot  be  rocotnnnMided.  Tliore  is 
,„  o|)c  .1  cove  or  Binall  bay  on  the  N.  E.  side,  in  wliich  a  voshi'I  can  be  occasionally  moored 
cliirio  tu  tiie  Hhure,  and  in  3  fathoms  water,  but  this  is  of  no  use  for  the  general  purposes 
of  navijjation. 

I'OINT  PKTKR  is  the  N.  E.  point  of  Vial  Bay,  and  the  south  point  of  Gaspo  Bay  ;  Point  Peter. 
H\io(  low  sandfltone,  and  thiclxly  covered  with  the  white  houses  of  the  Hshermen.  Flat 
IjIiiiuI  lies  about  400  fathomu  o(l'  Point  Peter,  and  is  small,  low,  and  of  sand.ttone.  There 
jj II  cloar  channel  between  the  inland  nnd  the  point,  but  no  good  anchoniite;  for  althouiih 
fcssela  occasionally  anchor  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  yet  the  ground  is  so  foul,  that 
tlu>rc  is  great  danger  of  losing  an  anclior  from  its  hooking  the  rocks. 

Kniin  Flat  Island  to  Cape  CJasp6,  across  the  mouth  of  Gaspe  Bay,  the  course  is  N.  N. 
£,  7|  miles. 

(JASPE  BAY. — The  ndmirnlile  Bay  of  (lusp^  possesses  advantages  which  may  here-   Qa$pe  Bay. 
after  romler  it  one  of  the  most  important  places,  in  a  maritime  point  of  view,  in  tliese  sens. 
It  contains  an  excellent  outer  roadstead  off  Douglas  Town  ;  a  harbor  at  its  lu>nd,  capable 
of  iii)liling  a  rmmerous  fleet  in  perfect  safety ;  and  a  basin  where  the  largest  shii)s  might 
lie  iiove  down  nnd  retitted. 

Tlie  course  up  this  bay  from  Flat  Island  to  the  end  of  Sundy-beach  Point,  wliich  forum 
thn  Imrbor,  is  N.  by  W.  i  W.  rather  more  than  16  miles,  t  rom  the  Flower-pot  Kock 
totiiosame  point,  the  course  is  N.  W.  i  N.  and  distance  nearly  llj  miles. 

From  Point  Peter  the  land  rises  in  undulations  to  the  chain  of  mountains  about  5  milea 
iiiliind  frouj  the  south-western  shore  of  the  bay.  These  mountains,  in  some  points,  attain 
an  elevation  of  1500  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  sweeping  round  Mai  Bay,  termi- 
onto  with  the  Perco  Mountains  before  mentioned.  The  south-western  shore  of  Gasp6 
Bay,  from  Point  Peter  to  Douglas  Town,  a  distnnce  of  Vi  miles,  presents  a  succession  of 
precipitous  headlands ;  the  cliffs,  of  bituminous  shale  and  snndstones,  being  in  their  high- 
er |)iu'ts,  200  feet  above  the  sea.  Shoal  water  extends  nearly  a  third  of  a  mile  from  the 
cliffs,  and  vessels  beating  should  beware  of  this,  since  tlie  water  shoals  too  rapidly  to  allow 
of  much  warning  by  the  lead. 

CAl'E  GASPIO. — Cape  Gasp6  is  an  extremely  remarkable  headland,  of  limestone,  hnv-    Cape  Ga$pi. 
\n»  oil  its  N.  E.  side  a  magnificent  range  of  cliffs,  which  rise  from  the  sea  to  the  height 
of  GUi  feet.     Flower-pot  Rock  lies  close  off  the  S.  E.  extremity  of  the  cape,  and  is  also 
a  very  remarkable  ol)iect ;  the  base  of  it  being  worn  so  small  by  the  waves,  that  it  uppers 
astonishing  thnt  it  can  resist  tlieir  force,  or  the  pressure  of  the  ice.     It  is  sometimes  call-  • 

eel  the  "  Ship's  Head,"  at  others  the  "  Old  Woman,"  by  the  fishermen,  and  is  so  bold  tlint 
vessels  may  haul  round  it  into  the  bay  within  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  ISoats 
limy  pass  between  it  and  the  cape  when  there  is  no  surf.  Th((  limestone  of  Cape  C  spo 
ili[w  to  the  S.  W.  so  that  tlie  cliffs  within  the  bay  are  very  much  lower  than  those  uu  the 
outsiili^  of  the  capo  previously  mentioned. 

Tlio  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay  is  thickly  covered  with  the  houses  of  the  fishermen  for  a  dis- 
tniict)  of  5  miles  within  Cape  (iaspe  ;  the  principal  fishing  establishments  belonging,  us  at 
Perce,  to  Jersey  mercliants.  There  is  an  niicliorage  with  good  holding  ground,  but  in 
not  loss  than  17  fathoms,  except  within  a  (|unrter  of  a  mile  of  the  bIku'c,  abreast  of  St. 
George  Cove,  Grande  Greve,  and  Little  Gaspe.  The  word  Cove  is.  however,  inappro- 
priately applied  to  nny  part  of  tlio  shore  between  (iraiide  (ireve  nnd  the  cape,  for  tliough 
there  are  fishing  establishmoiits  tiicie,  there  are  no  coves  wiiatever.  This  side  is  bold, 
anil  friMi  from  danger  in  every  part,  with  the  exception  of  the  seal  rocks,  which  are  the 
only  ilefacheil  danger  in  the  bay. 

SKAL  ROCKS. — The  Seal  Rocks  are  6}  miles  within  Cape  Gaspe,  one  mile  S  E.  .Seal  Koc/,s. 
by  .S.  from  Cape  Brule,  and  half  a  mde  offshore.  The  length  of  this  reef  from  3  fiithoms 
to  3  fathoms,  and  in  a  direction  paralltd  to  the  shore,  is  half  a  mile;  and  its  breadth  a 
quarter  of  a  mile.  The  least  water  is  4  feet,  and  there  are  3i  fathoms  between  it  and  the 
shore.  Wlicn  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  Seal  Rocks,  Cape  Brule  is  in  one  with  the  next 
cliiry  point  up  the  bay,  bearing  N.  35  W.  by  compass  ;  and  this  only  mark  is  sufficient  for 
the  safety  of  vessels  biNitiiig,  for  tiio  rocks  nre  out  of  the  way  with  fair  winds. 

At  Grande  Grtive,  '.Ih  miles  within  (Jape  Gaspe,  the  ridge  of  land  dips  and  narrows,  so 
that  tliere  is  a  portage  actress  it,  leading  to  the  settlements  at  Cajie  Rozier.  On  the  N. 
W.  side  of  tile  Portage  a  range  of  mountains  commences,  and  they  continue  along  the 
N.  K.  side  of  the  bay,  and  the  N.  W.  arm,  till  they  are  lost  to  view  in  the  interior  of  the 
country.  Opposite  to  tlio  basin  of  Guspe,  they  rise  to  the  height  of  1500  feet  above  the 
sea. 

DDUGLAS  TOWN. — Douglas  Town  is  a  village  of  fishermen  and  farmers,  standing  Douglas 
on  the  rising  ground  at  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  River  St.  John.     Its  position    Town, 
in  relation  to  Point  Peter   has  been  already  mentioned.     The  water  is  very  deep  in  the 


84 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


outer  pnrti  of  the  bny,  being  from  30  to  upwHrds  of  GO  fathonia,  over  mud  bottom ;  but  on 
approaching;  OoiJi(lii»f<  t)i«  dttpth  dHcroitHes  roKuliirly  to  the  unchoriiKe. 


Gaspi  Bay.  (JASPK  HAV.— Tim  roadstnnd  oil'  the  town  of  DoukIiim  in  extensive,  vossols  niHy 
anchor  in  nny  piirt  of  it,  and  in  any  doptli,  from  11  to  (i  fiithoiiiH,  over  8iind  and  cliiy  hot- 
torn ;  but  tli(*  best  berth  is  in  7  fathoms,  witli  the  entrance  of  the  River  St.  John  buiuliiB 
N.  \V.  by  W.  1  \  indo.  The  course  and  distance  from  (Jape  (Janpo  to  this  anchoniun  jj 
N.  W.  by  W.  Tl  miloB.  There  is,  however,  no  shelter  from  winds  between  S.  K,  by  p 
and  S.  .S.  K.  which  blow  directly  into  tho  bay,  and  roll  in  a  heavy  swell.  The  riding  j^ 
neverlhelesK,  much  less  heavy  on  such  occasions  than  mi)> lit  be  expected;  and  uh  tiin 
gntuiid  is  excellent  fur  liolding,  a  vessel  may  safely  anchor  hero  during  the  suinniur 
months. 

Water  may  bo  obtained  by  ascondinj;  the  River  St.  .lohn  to  the  islands,  a  distance  of  2 
miles.  In  the  spring  of  tho  year  there  are  often  !)  feet  water  in  tho  entrance  of  this  river 
which  is  between  ti  points  of  sand,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  chart;  and  there  are  1'^  t'tiutof 
water  in  the  narrow  channel  for  some  distance  within.  At  the  islands  tho  river  becumuj, 
shallow  and  rapid. 
Captf  Haldi-  CAl'K  f  lA[jl)IMAND. — Cape  Haldimand,  2  miles  northward  of  Douglas,  is  ubInIT 
mand.  point  of  Clilf,  and  the  south-eastern  termination  of  the  range  of  hills  which  separutos  tlio 

harliur,  l)a!<in,  and  S.  W.  arm,  from  tlie  valley  of  the  River  St.  John. 
Gaspc  Httr-       (lASl'K   IIARHOK.— Krom  the  N.  E.  side  of  Cape  Haldimand,  Sandy-iuiach  Point 
boT,  runs  out  to  tho  norlhwiird,  and  forms  tho  Harbor  of  Ga8|)6.     it  is  a  very  low  and  niirrow 

point  of  sand,  convex  to  seaward,  on  which  side  the  water  deepens  gradually  from  lii'li 
water  mark  to  the  ilepth  of  3  fathoms,  a  distance  of  nearly  half  a  mile.  On  tho  insiihrit 
is  as  bold  as  a  wall.  Thus  this  spit,  apparently  so  fragile,  becomes  a  natural  dam  or  brimk- 
water,  upon  which  the  heavy  swoll,  which  oft«n  rolls  into  the  bay,  can  produce  no  ellcct 
expending  its  strength  in  the  shoal  water,  before  reaching  the  beach.  The  water  deopcns 
immediately  outside  of  3  fathoms,  all  along  the  outside  of  Sandy  beach  Point,  and  also 
olf  its  nortii  extremity ;  so  that  it  is  both  dangerous  and  difficult  to  beat  in  or  out  of  tho 
harbor  at  night :  the  lead  giving  little  or  no  warning. 

To  tho  northward  of  Sandy-beach  Point,  at  the  distance  of  nearly  a  mile,  is  the  po. 
niusula,  which  is  a  low  sand,  covered  with  spruce  trees,  and  it  has  several  whale  gluula 
near  its  west  point.  Between  the  shoal  water  in  the  bay  to  the  eastward  of  the  peninsulii, 
and  that  which  extends  from  the  extremity  of  Sandy-beach  Point,  is  the  narrowest  part 
of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  which  is  420  fathoms  wide,  from  3  fathoms  to  3  fatlionis, 
and  upwards  of  11  fathoms  deep  in  tho  centre. 

To  run  into  the  harbor  of  Gaspe  ottend  to  tho  following  directions  ond  remarks.  On 
the  N.  K.  side  of  tho  N.  W.  arm,  there  is  o  wooded  jioiut  with  low  clay  clilf,  L'^  inilcs 
above  the  peninsula.  'I'his  point  oppears  as  if  it  were  the  c*xtreme  on  that  side,  wlun 
si-en  over  llie  end  of  the  peninsula  from  a  vessel  opitroachiug  the  entrance  of  the  liaibur, 
and  it*  called  Point  Panard.  Now  this  point  (seen  over  tlio  peninsula,)  in  one  with  tlm 
iimcr  or  north  side  of  the  whale  sheds  before  mentioned,  is  tho  mark  for  tint  northern 
extreme  of  tho  shiial  olf  Sandy-beach  Point.  The  extremity  of  the  B|)ruce  trees  is  as 
far  within  the  whale  sheds  as  these  last  are  from  tho  sandy  extremity  of  the  peninsulii. 
Otitlie  inner  side  cd'  .'^andy-beach  Point,  and  near  to  its  junction  with  tho  main  liiml, 
stands  a  wooden  windmill.  Keep  Point  I'anard  in  one  with  that  extremity  of  the  sprure 
trees  on  the  jieninsula,  bearing  N.  47  W.  untd  the  windmill,  just  mentioned,  comes  in 
one  with  \\ui  west  or  itmer  side  of  the  end  of  Sandy-beach  Point,  bearing  S.  li  W.  when 
you  may  liaul  into  the  anchorage  under  tho  point,  or  steer  for  tlie  basin,  as  may  bo  de- 
sired. 

When  beating  in.  tack  by  tho  lead  from  the  N.  E.  side  of  tho  bay,  and  in  tho  bonrd 
towards  .Sandy-beach  Point,  put  tho  lielni  down  tho  inst^uil  the  marks  for  leading  in,  just 
given,  come  in  one. 

At  niiiht,  when  neither  Sandy-beach  Point  nor  tho  peninsula  can  bo  seen,  it  becomes 
rather  H  difficult  alfairto  tack  a  vessel  into  the  harbor.  The  only  gtiide  thon  is  tho  leu  1. 
There  should  be  a  hand  in  each  chains,  one  heaving  \/hen  the  other  cries  tho  souii(lin!;ri. 
.S<)un<lings  shoidd  be  lirst  struck  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  tlie  bay,  about ",'  miles  outsidcwit 
the  entrtince  of  the  harbor,  and  the  edge  of  the  shoal  water  on  that  side  should  be  follow- 
ed, ill  from  h  to  7  I'athoms,  until  you  judge  by  the  distance  run,  and  the  change  which 
takes  pl'ice  in  the  direction  of  tho  edge  of  the  bank  which  you  are  running  upon,  tlnit 
you  are  approaclnng  the  peninsula  and  have  passed  Sandy-beach  Point,  and  can  in  conse- 
quence, vontiire  to  haul  to  tho  southward  into  the  anchorage.  To  form  this  judj;nii;nt 
ncciirntely  is  the  diflicidt  part  of  the  process,  and  as  to  fail  in  this  would  proliahly  caiiso 
the  loss  of  the  vessel,  if  tho  usual  heavy  swell  should  be  rolling  into  the  bay  with  S.  E. 
winds,  I  recommend  a  vessel  rather  to  trust  to  her  anchors  olf  fJoujiliis  Town  tliiiti  to 
niMktUhe  attempt.  In  case  of  a  vessel  which  has  lost  her  anchors,  the  directions  which 
1  have  given  m:iy  prove  of  use.  Within  !~»andy-beacli  I'oiiit,  that  is  in  the  harbor  of 
(■';i>pe,  tlu^  shelter  is  completo  from  all  winds  The  bottom  is  mud,  and  the  depth  iiu 
where  exceeds  11^  fathoms. 


Having  now  |i 

pciliH't  security, 

liftibor.  with  tho 

,  minute  descri|i 

„ii|  which  is  not 

I  Hliall  iiuu-ely 

\(,  VV.  arm  has 

I'lo  lor  keeled  be 

,l,„  iirin  betwee 

I'he  entrance 

„,;„t».  Iiut  the  n 

1,11,1  r,  fathoms  > 

,vliicli  continuef 

Gaspe.     It  hiiH 

jiipiiciiius  to  hoi 

loctuid  this  arm 

mill  the  navigafi 

nmiiiier,  by  shal 

rivor  it  becomee 

01)  the  inside  c 

watering  place 

side  on  the  shoi 

nrin  mid  the  ha 

whale  fishery, 

hV  the  people  c 

ciiniits.     The  o 

the  people  of  tl 

There  are  rt 

Ijnsiii.     In  the 

ri'sipccting  then 

jliores,  and  eve 

Tlie  current 

Pint  Island,  es| 

jhoidd  he  rome 

wliBO  it  meets 

short,  and  breii 

extending  aero 

quite  unmanag 

the  shore,  by  a 

in  line  sumi 

9  A.  M.  until  f 

the  iiriiis,  whii 

tlio  liny,  ho  wo 

jg  iihiwing  out 

gtMiendly  fron 

The  souiidi 

they  will  pro 

they  been  pre 

juil;;iiig  of  thi 

Island  in  (ias| 

fog,  and  steeri 

ings  IVoiii  20  1 

Htiiick.     No  1 

WHS  coiiceivei 

One  cast  of  tl 

Let  tills  be  a 

111  the  proh 

fre{|ueiited  by 

S.  S.  K.  A  K 

fiithoiiis,  and 

respectively. 

mentioned  is 

const. 

Tlie  liohl  a 

will  reipiire  ( 

The  luouiil 

clilVs,  often  ol 

not  to  bo  set 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


86 


but  on 

"ll  limy 

:li'y  bdt- 

'•t'liiirig 

K'nif-n  jg 

'•y  K. 
•I  iiH  th,; 

tiiiniiior 

CO  of  2 
ix  river, 

-  (tUft  of 


Hnviiif;  now  givon  dirnctuina  to  eniiblH  tiie  leainan  to  tnkn  IiIh  vpgsel  into  ii  placo  of 
pcil'tict  HOC iirity,  from  wliioh  lio  iimy  procood  to  tlin  biiwin,  or  to  iitiy  otlier  |mit  of  tlia 
iiArlioi*.  with  tliu  iiHHiHtiiiico  of  tlio  cliiirt,  or  of  a  pilot,  I  hIiiiII  not  rwhII  thi>Ho  reinuika  by 
griiiiii'^i*  (loHci'iptioii  of  tho  iiitorior  of  tlio  liiirbor,  wliich  tlio  cliurt  ruii(loi'8  unnecottHiiry, 
,n(|  wliicli  is  not  in  any  way  osMonlial  t«i  siifnty. 

I  hIiiiII  ini'iHly  add  that  tlie  harbor  \»  divided  into  tho  N.  W.  and  S.  \V.  arms.  1'ho 
)i,  \V.  arm  lias  doep  wator  for  nearly  3  mileH  abovu  tho  poninsula,  and  ciintinuca  iinvii;a- 
|)|o  for  kcclod  boats  about ;}  milos  fuilhor,  wlioro  the  principal  rivor  of  tho  harbor  oiittotf 
lj,„  arm  between  MarHh  and  Meadow  iHlandH. 

Tlio  entranco  of  the  8.  W.  arm  in  about  180  fiithoms  wide,  and  between  two  snnily 
pniiitHi  iiut  tho  navigable  channel  is  contracteil  liy  elioalH  on  either  Hide  to  iiliout  GO  fiilhoms  ; 
uiiii  5  fathoms  of  water  can  bo  carried  in.  Tlio  deep  water  part  of  the  S.  VV.  arm, 
nhicli  continues  for  throe  qnartera  of  a  mile  within  the  ontranci',  iu  called  the  liaHin  of 
(iaHpe.  It  has  a  depth  of  from  5  to  9  fathoms,  ovnr  a  mud  bottom,  and  is  Hiil'licieiitly 
ciipiii.ious  to  hold  a  voiy  groat  number  of  vessels  as  securely  as  in  a  dock.  Uoiits  can 
isciiiid  this  arm  by  a  narrow  channel,  between  shoals,  aboutS  miles,  as  in  tho  N.  W.  arm, 
und  the  navigation,  for  all  but  caiioos  or  llat-bottomed  boats,  is  torminuted  in  the  same 
iniiaiier,  by  shallow  channels  between  Marsh  and  Meadow  Islands.  Above  this  pnrt  oftho 
rivor  it  becomes  contracted  and  rapid,  and  the  water  fresh.  A  small  rivulet  in  tlie  bay, 
oil  tiie  inside  of  tho  south  point  of  the  ontrancn  of  tho  basin,  is  tho  most  convenient 
watcrinf!  place  in  the  harbor.  Tlio  Collector  of  Customs,  and  iht  principal  families,  ve- 
gjdenn  the  shores  of  the  basin.  Most  of  these  fumilies,  as  well  aj  tliose  of  the  N.  W. 
grin  mid  the  liarbor  genorully,  are  farmers,  but  several  of  them  are  also  oiiuajied  in  iho 
wliiile  fishery,  wliich  they  prosecute  in  small  schooners.  The  cod  fishery  is  carried  on 
liV  the  |)ooplo  of  tho  bay  outside,  for  the  most  part  in  connection  with  the  .leiscy  mer- 
ciiniits.  The  great  majority  of  the  fishyrmou  are  either  from  J  ersey,  or  dosceiided  from 
the  people  of  that  island,  whose  language  t!u*y  retain. 

There  are  regular  but  weak  streams  of  Hood  and  ebb  in  the  entrances  of  tho  linrboraiid 
])!\s\».  In  tho  bay  the  stroamsof  tho  tiiles  are  so  irregular,  that  I  can  say  nothing  cerliiiii 
reiipi'cting  them.  They  are,  however,  usually  almost  imperceptible,  excepting  iioiir  the 
jliuri'S,  and  even  there  tln'y  are  so  weak  as  to  be  of  little  or  no  consecpicnce  to  a  vohhoI. 

Tiio  current  down  tho  St.  Lawrence  runs  strongly  past  Flower-pot  Rock  over  towards 
I'htt  Island,  especially  in  tho  ebb  tide,  which  often  increases  its  rate  to  2  knots,  and  this 
slioulil  be  remembered  by  vessels  making  the  bay  with  a  northerly  wind.  This  current, 
wliuii  it  meets  tho  swell  which  so  often  prevails  from  tho  S.  and  S.  E.  causes  a  high, 
short,  anil  breaking  sea,  all  along  tho  coast  from  above  Capo  Kozier  to  Cajie  (jiispt;,  and 
extending  across  the  entrance  of  Gaspo  Bay.  When  the  wind  is  light,  a  vessid  becomoB 
quite  unmanageable  in  this  sea,  and  it  is  extremely  dangerous  to  be  caught  in  it,  close  to 
tjiu  shore,  by  a  light  bree/.o  on  tho  land. 

Ill  line  summer  weather  there  is  ofiena  sea-breeze  blowing  right  up  tho  bay  from  about 
n  A.  M.  until  sunset.  At  such  times,  thtu'o  is  generally  a  light  land-breeze  at  night  down 
the  iirms,  which  otien  extends  for  several  miles  out  into  tho  bay.  In  the  outer  pint  of 
the  Imy,  however,  it  will  generally  be  found  to  becalm,  even  at  times  when  a  fresh  breeze 
is  blowing  outside  Cape  Gaspe  and  Point  Peter.  Tho  wind  at  sea  on  such  occasions  is 
generally  from  the  S.  \V. 

The  soundings  ofl'tliis  part  of  the  coast  will  be  seen  in  our  charts  for  the  first  time; 
they  will  prove  of  very  great  use  to  vessels  running  up  in  foggy  weather,  and  had 
they  been  previously  known,  might  have  saved  many  vessels.  We  had  an  opportunity  of 
judjjing  of  this  last  spring,  when  a  large  ship,  full  of  emigrants,  ran  stem  on  to  Whale 
Island  in  (jas|)(j  Hay.  .She  was  under  all  sail  before  a  moderate  S.  E.  wind,  in  ii  thick 
fog,  and  steering  N.  W.  from  which  it  appears  that  she  must  have  been  running  in  sound- 
ings from  20  to  40  fathoms,  for  at  least  4  leagues,  and,  probably,  for  .3  hours  before  she 
Htruck.  No  lead  was  hove,  the  existence  of  the  soundings  being  unknown.  The  vessel 
WHS  conceived  to  bo  well  to  the  northward,  and,  consequently,  to  be  steering  a  safe  course. 
One  rast  of  the  lead  would  have  dispelled  this  delusion,  and  might  have  saved  tho  vessel. 
Let  this  be  a  warning  to  seamen. 

Ill  the  prolongation  of  the  line  of  Cape  Gaspe  nearly,  there  are  several  rocky  patches 
fic(|ueiited  by  tlie  fishermen.  They  all  lie  in  the  same  direction  from  Flower-pot  Rock, 
S.  S.  E.  A  K.  The  first  is  a  small  patch  with  8  fatlioms  least  water,  tho  second  has  16 
fiitlioiiiH,  and  the  third  10  fathoms.  Their  distance  from  the  rock  are  J,  14,  and  l^  miles 
rBspectively.  There  is  deep  water  and  irregular  soundings  between  them,  and  the  last 
mentioned  is  on  tho  banks  of  soundings  which  I  have  already  alluded  to,  as  lying  off  this 
const. 

Tlie  bold  and  high  coast  betweenCapo  Gaspe  and  Cape  Chatte.  a  distance  of  117  miles, 
will  reipiirc!  only  a  brief  notice,  as  it  is  free  from  dangers  and  destitute  of  harbors. 

The  iiiountaiiis  every  where  approach  the  shore,  which  is  steep  and  rocky,  displaying 
clilfs,  often  of  great  height,  and  without  beach.  After  heavy  rains,  waterfalls,  which  are 
not  to  bo  seen  at  other  times,  dosceud  from  great  heights,  and  small  bays,  with  saudy 


IHHiPipiliPPPRiM 


"^immimi^mmim 


86 


BLUNT'S  AMERICi^N  COAST  PILOT. 


Griffin 


vovc. 


Oreat  Fox 
River. 


Grrnt  Pnm' 


Magdalen 
River. 


bench  nnd  rapid  streams  at  their  herds,  occur  occasionally ;  yet  these  features  are  not 
generally  so  strongly  marked  as  to  enable  a  stranger  to  make  out  one  part  of  this  coast 
from  another  with  tocility. 
Cape  Rozier.  CAPK  ROZIER.— Cnpe  Rozier,  which  is  nearly  7  miles  N.  i  E.  from  Cape  Gaspe 
is  low,  and  of  greywacke  and  sluto  rocks.  The  shoal  water  does  not  extend  off  it  above 
one  third  of  a  mile,  but  in  the  bay  to  tho  southward  of  it.  at  the  distance  of  l.|  of  a  mile 
°*  there  is  a  reef  which  runs  -^ut  half  a  mile  fiom  the  shore.     Vessels  may  find  shelter  un- 

der Cape  Rozier  from  N.  \V.  winds,  but  the  ground  is  not  very  good,  and  the  easterly 
'  pvvell  that  frequently  rolls  in,  renders  it  a  dangerous  anchorage.     There  are  fishing  es- 

tablishments on  Ciipe  Rozier,  and  in  its  vicinity 

GKIFFIN  COVE.— Griffin  Cove  nnd  River  are  6*  miles  N.  N.  W.nenrly,  from  Cape 
Rozier.  A  small  bay  here  affords  shelter  to  the  boats  of  the  fishermen,  whose  houses 
will  he  seen  around  it.  There  are  from  2  to  3  fathoms  of  water  in  this  bay,  over  sandy 
bottom.  It  is  of  no  use  to  shipping,  except  to  obtain  supplies  of  water,  wood,  and  occa- 
sionallv,  fr-osh  provisions. 

GREAT  FOX  RIVER.— Great  Fox  River  is  lU  miles  N.  N.  W.  nearly,  from  Cnpe 
Rozier.  It  is  a  mere  brook  which  enters  a  small  boy  about  three-quarters  of  a  milewide 
and  half  a  mile  deep.  Off  each  point  of  the  ".'ay  there  are  reefs,  which  diminish  the 
breadth  of  the  entrauce  to  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  anil  afford  shelter  to  boats,  and  to 
very  small  schooners,  in  from  2  to  2i  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  fine  dark  sand.  Round 
the  liond  of  the  bay  there  is  a  fine  sandy  beach.  Outside  the  reefs,  which  extend  only 
a  very  siiort  distance  to  seaward,  there  are  1.5,  18,  a  id  24  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand 
nnd  broken  shells,  at  the  distance  of  a  quarter,  half,  and  one  mile  respectively.  In  fine 
summer  weather  a  vessel  miirht  anchor  off  this  place  and  obtain  water,  wood,  and  supplies 
of  fri^sh  provisions;  but  it  is  otherwise  of  no  use  to  ship])ing.  Seven  families  of  fisher- 
men and  farmers  resided  hern  when  I  visited  it  in  1829,  and  had  plenty  of  cattle,  sheep, 
nnci  swine. 

■  M.'i-x'n   n.^vt^      (•....„.  t>  ,,„i  ; .n-.n  ,..-.,,k  xvl,i,.h  "tr-'nls  sheUor  only  to  1,oiik 

iirui  \v;ll  De  miowii  ny  iik;  iiousi-.s  anci  smj^i's  oi  m.    .lo,..  ....  If)  \. ...>..  N.    .    ... 

from  (ireat  Fox   River,   and  there  are  no  more  houses,  along  the  coast,  till  we  arrive  at 
the  River  St.  Ann. 

MAlJDALEN  RIVER.— The  next  place  worthy  of  notice  is  the  Magdalen  River, 
which  is  24  m'les  from  (treat  Pond,  in  a  N.  VV.  i  VV.  direction,  nearly.  The  mouth  of 
this  river  is  on  the  N.  \V.  side  of  n  sandy  bay,  ond  close  under  (Jape  Magdalen,  its  N.  W. 
point,  wliicli  is  rocky,  with  cliffs  of  moderate  height,  and  juts  out  a  very  short  distitnue 
from  the  range  of  hills  which  forms  the  coast  line.  A  reef  of  rocks,  which  dry  in  pmt  at 
low  water,  extends  from  Capo  Magdalen,  about  200  fathoms  to  the  S.  K.  |)aral!c!  to  tiie 
coast,  and  shelters  the  entrance  of  the  river  from  the  northerly  winds.  The  river  is  30 
yard«  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  7  feet  deep  at  low  water  :  witliiii.  for  a  very  short  dist;ince, 
there  lire  10  feet  over  a  clean  bottom  of  fine  sand.  Furtiici'  up,  the  river  becomes  slini- 
low  .1(1  rapid,  windinij  its  way  tlirough  a  romantic  valley  between  the  mountains.  Thir- 
teen feet  of  water  can  h(f  carried  into  this  river  at  sju'lng  tides,  so  that  it  is  a  consideniblo 
stream,  and  is  orrasionaly  visited  by  schooners  from  30  to  80  tons,  vvhi<h  warp  in  wIumi 
the  sea  is  smooth  and  the  weather  fine.  The  bay  is  not  deep,  being  merely  n  gentle  curve 
with  a  sandy  bearh  tiir  about  a  mile  to  the  ."*!.  E.  id'  the  river.  Vessels  nuiy  anchor  hero 
in  7  fa'homs,  ov(M'  a  bottion  'fsand,  fine  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  atthedistance  of  tliree- 
(|iiarters  of  a  mile  from  the  sandy  beach,  and  from  the  N.  W.  point  bearing  \V.  N.  W. 
The  shelter  is  from  \V.  N.  W.  round  by  .S.  W.  arid  ."<.  to  K.  S.  E.  bat  it  is  only  a  fiiie- 
wi'Mther  anchorage,  which  may  bo  of  use  to  vessels  wanting  wood  am!  water. 

During  two  o('cie'i(ms,  on  which  1  anchored  here,  I  observed  a  regular  alternation  of  tlie 
stream  ot  llood  and  ebb.  Tlie  flood  extended  about  1^  mile  from  the  shore,  ruiiniiii;  1 
knot,  and  at  the  line  of  junction  with  the  almost  constant  downward  current  there  was  a 
strong  rijiple. 

We  extrai  t  the  annexed  manly  testimonial  to  the  merits  of  Captain  IJayfield's  prede- 
cessor in  liH  ai  liious  uiidcrtalvinj;,  from  ('uptairi  H.iytield's  hook  :   (K    <k  (J.  W.  H.) 

"  Our  survey,  from  the  Strait  of  Itflle  Is'e  westward,  ended  at  .Mislanocpie  inclusive, 
and  recommenced  again  at  (irand  M'l-alma.  The  intermediate  coast  was  snrvoyeil  in 
I7(;8  by  Mr.  Miehae'  Lane,  R.  N.  We  examined  it  with  his  original  chart  in  hatid,  ami 
altliouL'li  hi-*  sur»iv  (loos  not  i)ossr---i  the  evaetness  which  superior  iiistiuments  and  an 
improveil  system  i)f  hydrography  yives  to  aiodern  maiitimi^  surveys,  yet  it  is  such  as  to 
confer  h  oior  on  his  memory,  being  (|uite  sutlicieiitly  correct  for  the  usual  purposes  of 
navii;ation." 
We  here  cent  hide  the  extracts  (nun  Captain  Ray  field's  work. 

CHALEUR  RAV,  TO  THE  (iUT  OF  CANSO. 

Chiil'ur  CHAEKKR   HAV. — Point    Mncquereau    and    Miseou    Island  form  the  entranee  ..f 

Buy.  Chaleur  IJiiy.  and  bear  from  each  otlur  S.  .?  E.  anil  N.  ^  W.  distant  ''i  leagne-e.      From 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


87 


JpeGaspe, 
0"  It  above 
.''f  »  mile, 
'helttu-  un- 
Rnsterly 
fishing  es- 

fi'om  Cape 

use  houses 

ver  siindy 

and  occa- 


the  entrance  of  Chaleur  Bay  to  that  of  Ristigouche  Harbor,  which  is  at  its  head,  the 

Histance  on  n  W.  and  N.  W.   by  W.  course,   is  22  leagues.     The  bay  is  of  moderate 

depth  near  the  shore  on  both  sides,  and  has  towards  the  middle,  from  45  to  20  fathoms  ^ 

ffster. 

Nouvelle  Harbor  lies  about  14  miles  W.  by  S.  from  Point  Macquereau,  where  are  a 
church  and  several  houses. 

NKW  CA  tlLISLE. — The  town  of  New  Carlisle,  the  principal  town  of  Chaleur  Bay,  NewCarliale. 
ia  situiifo  in  Coxc  township,  on  the  north  shore,  as  shown  in  the  chart. 

BONA  VENTURE. — In  the  adjoining  t  )wnship  of  Hamilton,  on  the  west,  is  the  vil-  Bonaventure. 
lAge  of  Honavpnture,  containing  a  church  and  several  houses,  standing  on  level  ground. 

From  Bonaventure  the  land  turns  N.  W.  by  N.  towards  Cascapedia  Bay,  along  an  iron 
bound  shore,  and  having  several  rivulets  of  freshwater.  Within  this  buy  is  ancliorago  in 
4,  5,  and  C  fathoms  water.  This  is  in  the  township  of  Maria.  The  head  of  the  bay  is 
shoiil,  into  which  the  Groat  Cascapedia  River  ompties  itself. 

ill  RISTIGOUCHE  HARBOR,  at  the  head  cf  Chaleur  Bay,  there  is  good  anchorage  Ristigouc 
in  from  8  to  12  fathoms,  land-locked  from  all  winds;  but  it  is  so  difficult  of  access,  tliat  it  Harbor. 
should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot.     The  tide  flows  here,  on  full  and  change,  unVil   Tides. 
3  o'clock,  and  its  vertical  rise  ie  6i  or  7  feet. 

NIPISIGIIIT. — Vessels  bound  into  Chaleur  Bay  should  make  for  the  Island  of  Miscou,  Nipisighit. 
wiiich  they  can  round  by  the  lead,  for  it  shoalens  gradually  from  20  to  3  fathoms,  the 
latter  depth  being  near  Miscou  Point.  Should  it  be  foggy,  which  in  summer  time  is  fre- 
quently the  case,  it  will  bo  a<lvisablo  to  steer  from  thence  'owiirds  the  northern  shore, 
when  you  will  moat  probably  fall  in  witli  Nouvelle  Harbor;  up-e  stands  a  church,  upon 
some  rising  ground  to  the  northward  of  the  town  or  village,  which  is  built  along  the  beach 
and  lies  low.  Proceeding  up  the  Hay  of  Chaleur  from  hence,  you  will  pass  round  a  low 
point  and  roach  Crrlisle;  tliis  is  soincwhnt  similar  to  Nouvelle,  for  the  town  stands  on  a 
low  point  iMid  has  ;  church  above  it ;  both  are  near  the  beach.  Having  got  abreast  of 
Carlisle,  if  you  are  bound  across  for  Nipisighit  Roads  or  St.  Peter's,  then  by  keeping  on 
the  northern  shore  as  thus  directed,  you  will  readily  know  how  far  you  have  proceeded 
up  the  bay,  and  may  then  haul  across,  with  greater  certainty,  for  the  land,  bctwijen 
Caruqiiet  Point  and  Capo  Idas,  which  you  may  approach  to  l)y  your  lead  without  the 
least  duiiiier.  The  land  on  tlie  northern  shores  of  Chaleur  Bay  is  in  a  high  state  of  culti- 
ration,  wh.Mi  compared  with  the  southern  shoi'es;  and  this,  perhaps,  is  the  principal  cause 
why  the  fogs  tliiit  obficuro  it  are  less  heavy  on  the  fortner  than  on  the  latter.  From 
Cii|)e  IduH  to  Nipisighit  Roads,  the  siiore  is  clear  of  all  danger,  and  when  the  weather  is 
dark  or  fo^L';y,  you  may  safely  run  along  the  land  by  your  lead,  oidy  jbservin<;  to  come  no 
nearer  Ihau  o  fathoms  water,  for  in  that  depth  you  will  be  only  .'!  miles  olV  the  land.  From 
abreast  of  Cape  Idas,  steer  W.  by  S.  about  9  miles;  you  will  have  from  .5  to  7  fathoms 
all  tli(^  way.  clear  of  all  danger,  and  get  good  anchorage.  In  ojiening  the  i)ay.  you  will 
see  Mr.  .^liller"s  house  and  store  standing  on  Carron  Point,  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  ap- 
pearing lilvo  an  island  ;  there  is  a  large  grove  of  trees  o  the  southward  of  the  house,  and 
the  open  s|)ace  lietween  that  and  Mr.  Southerland's  tees  it  that  appearance;  sttier  for 
the  house  and  stcu'e  on  Carroti  Point  until  you  get  a*  >ut  4  miles  distatit  from  it,  then 
bring  Mr.  Miller's  house  on  Cn.  'on  Point  to  bear  S.  W.  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  5  fath- 
oms, where  yon  may  heave  j'our  ballast;  here  a  pilot  wi;!  board  you,  but  should  no  on» 
come,  and  you  are  inclined  to  enter  the  river,  your  vessel  having  but  a  Mniali  drauiilit  of 
water,  then  the  following  direction-i  by  ('aptain  Aldridge  will  prove  acceptable,  and  lead 
you  over  liotli  liars  :  and  when  you  u:et  inside  of  them  you  will  tind  good  anchoragi!  le  tho 
niirlhward  of  r'arron  I'oint,  in  .'>  and  4  fathoms,  good  i^round. 

IJriiig  .Mr.  Miller's  house  half  a  hands|tik(*'s  length  olf  Indian  Island  ;  this  has  a  round 
tuft  of  trees  oil  it,  and  wdi  leai'  you  in  mid-channel  clear  of  all  daiiL'or.  When  you  arrive 
abreast  of  Carter's  I'oint,  you  should  open  tin;  upper  part  of  Lathwood  House;  steer  in 
that  direction  close  to  the  beach,  until  you  open  the  beach  of  (-'arroti  Point  will)  Mr.  Mil- 
ler's house,  then  run  a  little  furtl^-T  up.  and  antdior  m  12  or  14  f(^et  water,  sandv  ground. 
From  (Jarroii  Poin*^  to  .Monro's  Wharf  there  are  thrt^e  bars,  with  not  more  than  (i  I'eet 
water  over  th.  in,  but  th':;re  are  jjluces  between  them,  with  Ki,  15,  ami  14  feet,  where  a 
miniijer  of  vessels  load. 

The  Tarrzouche,  or  Little  River,  is  only  inivi^able  by  canoes.  Tin'  middle  river  is 
deep,  but  bars  run  across  the  chamii'l  m  many  placi-s  ;  the  banks  on  each  side,  from  tho 
village  to  (Jai'ron  Point,  dry  at  low  water. 

TioK. — It  (lows  full  and  change  at  .'!  o'clock,  and  the  water  rises  on  the  inner  bar  8    Tide, 
feet,  on  the  outer  bar  .'i  feet,  and  in  the  harbor  H  I'eet,  with  regular  springs,  but  it  is  much 
inllnenceil  by  the  winds  which  prevail  in  the  (iulf  of  .St.  Lawreiicti  :   in  sinnmer  tiuui  no 
vessid  shonl  I  load  down  to  more  tiian  13  foet,  and  then  the  bar  should  be  atttuupled  with 
the  lirst  of  tlu^  springs. 

Fntm  abreast  of  the  north  point  of  Miscou  Island  to  the  south  [)oint  of  Shippiviau  Island, 
the  di-.;;;iiii'  is  1',)  nnhts,  and  the  cnurse  is  rx'url}'  .S.  W.  by  .S.  {•''ri. in  Ihesonlli  point  of 
SLip|)i^au  to  Trucudio,  tho  course  and  distance  are  .S.  VV.  i  S.  4  leagues.     From   Truca- 


88 


Lighthouse. 

Miramicki 

Bay. 


Bu0y$. 


T.des. 
Anchorage. 


Soundings. 


Richibucfj^ 


Buoy. 


ThelWirthern 

CodalS  of 

i\ovit  ,^cotia, 


.^. 


Thti  Bi'j 
Veru. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

die  to  Point  Esquiminnc,  or  Escuminnc,  on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  Mirnmich' 
Bny,  tlie  course  is  S.  by  W.  j  W.  distant  9  leagues.  On  Point  Escuminac  thoro  is  « 
fixed  Tmht  70  feet  high. 

MIRAMICni  B\Y — This  is  a  spacious  bny,  having  at  its  entrance  several  islnnds 
The  iKiithern  shorn  is  fronted  by  some  sninll  snnd  islands,  having  channels  between  them 
nnil  ilip  iniiiii,  into  which  boats  iniiy  enter  ;  behind  these  is  an  Indian  village  called  Neco- 
Wiirk.  but  tlie  cliief  piifisago  into  the  harbor  is  between  Waltham,  or  Portage  Island  aiul 
Fo\  Isliitid  :  to  ent'ir  this  you  uuist  borrow  towards  the  southern  point  of  Esruininnc!  and 
pass  to  tlie  sontiiwurd  of  a  Ions  narrow  shoal  which  stretches  in  front  of  Fox's  Island 
and  t'nnns  tlie  channel  of  1  \  mile  wide,  with  4  and  5  fathoms  water  in  it;  having  advanced 
to  tii^  noftluvard  of  Fox  Island,  you  must  turn  westerly,  and  pass  between  the  southern 
p  Ml'  ■  Wiiiiliani  Island  and  the  northern  point  of  Fox  Island;  on  your  starboard  hand 
lie  :i  i)iack  buoys,  wiiich  mari<  the  edge  of  the  Horseshoe  Sand;  there  is  also  a  red  bunv 
on  the  liirbo:ird  (lide  of  the  western  part  fif  the  Bay  do  Vin  Island.  Through  this  part 
oi'  the  (  lianuel  you  wiW  have  Wk  fathoms,  and  having  arrived  abreast  of  the  Ked  Buoy  de 
Vni,  you  may  steii-  W.  N.  \V.  fir  Oak  Point,  in  ,'}.  3i  and  4  fathoms;  here  the  grciitoat 
care  niu*f  be  obser\*eri.  in  ordt-r  to  fRke  the  passage  between  Sheldrake  Island  and  the 
Sanity  SpiT  wbwii  t-tr*  off  Poinit  (^heval ;  run  very  near  the  N.  E.  point  of  that  island 
steer  s(.ittli-w»-r««rlv  \\\r  Nappan  Bay,  and  roiuid  the  south  part  of  Sheldrake  Island,  you 
will  then  sec  (Wfl  <  \mtt\n  House  situated  upon  the  northern  shore;  from  whence,  by 
keeping  niidrhannel,  anir4  f»»llowing  the  situniHities  of  the  river,  you  will  safely  pass  Mid- 
die  Isliiiiit.  and  have  7  amd  6  fathoms  withoui  any  dancer,  until  you  reach  the  town  of 
Newraslle  :  litu'e  thi«  wwVrr  leaoens  to  3  fatlioms;  ahead  you  will  perceive  Benubac or 
Frii/.ier's  Inland,  diviiitiiis  iW  channel  in  two  passages;  that  to  the  south-eastward  ig  the 
better  one,  and  runs  icrtoth*'  S.  W.  bianch  of  the  river;  that  to  the  northwai'd  lends  into 
the  .\.  W.  branrli:  bolli  these  have  their  rise  a  considerable  distance  up  the  country. 
The  New  Custom  House  stands  on  the  southern  slmre.  about  '2  miles  beyond  Middle  Is|. 
and.  I'liere  are  several  places  of  good  anrhorai;o  aoout  this  harbor,  but  the  iiavigalinn 
la  in  ceiicral  so  intricate  lluit  a  |)dot  will  always  be  necessarv.  and  he  will  point  out  tlie 
best  pliiccs  for  riding.  Spring  tides  rise  5  and  6  feet,  and  the  buoys  are  fre(piently 
flh'lted. 

'J'here  is  good  aiichornge  with  olf-shore  winds  in  Outer  Bny,  but  you  must  not  go  into 
less  lliiin  7  I'athoms  water.  Tlie  pilot's  houses  are  4  or  five  miles  to  the  westward  of 
Escuminac  Point,  and  pilots  for  this  place  are  sometimes  obtainerl  from  the  Gut  of  Cunso. 
Considi'ral)le  (pnintities  of  tifn!)er  have  recently  been  shipped  from  this  harbor  for  Kurnpe, 
but  a  liiie  tremendous  and  extensive  fire  having  made  great  devastation  in  the  adjacent 
Wood;-,  lic'siroyiug  the  dwelllu'^s  and  i  roperty  of  most  of  th»-  inhabitants,  and  rediicini; 
them  to  ill.-  Ljrealest  distress,  it  will  take  some  consid»>rable  time  before  they  can  recover 
their  losses,  or  ri'sume  their  tormer  occupations. 

FiMiM  the  northern  part  of  .Miscoii  Island  to  Kscuminnc  Point,  th**  soundings  are  remijiir; 
atii)  111  tiiick  weatliei  the  shore  may  be  ap|)roa(died  by  the  lead  fr>  nie  depth  of  I'J  or  10 
tatlKiiiiH.  In  passing  l',scuminnc  J'oint  you  must  give  it  a  good  berth,  for  a  sandy  spit  runs 
ol"  it  a  I'lill  leauiie 

Kl( 'HI  IJIUJ  ro. — The  depth  id'waterat  the  entrance  of  this  lt*rlior  is,  nt  the  best  and 
highest  fides,  alxjut  Iri  feot,  and  witli  common  tides  HiJl  feet.  Wien  you  are  olf  tlio 
haibor's  mouth,  in  f),  7,  or  8  fathoms  of  water,  you  should  endeavor  to  steer  in,  bringitij; 
the  two  large  beacons  in  a  line,  md  U'eping  them  so,  until  you  get  up  near  to  the  Sniid 
Hill;  then  run  iiloni^  rht<  slion^  aliwut  .N'.  W.  in  .'i  or  'Ji  fitlioms.  until  you  lind  yourself  in 
safi-iy.  Tlmre  is  a  l^ir^e  Ijuoy.  laid  do<vn  in  .'>  fathoms,  outside  r)f  the  bar,  which  is  a  good 
guidiiMio  in.  and  may  be  seen  as  you  approa<-h.  for  upwards  of  a  leaiftie  olf. 

Witlim  (Jape  Tormetitin  is  the  i  'hmus  aii'*  boundary  between  New  IJrimswick  and 
Nova  ."^coti.!,  till'  narrowest  part  of  >>  ich,  from  rhe  Bay  X'^erto  to  ^'umberland  Hasiti,  at 
the  lieii'l  of  ( 'hi'jnerfo  May.    is  onlv  i     miles  in  l^readth. 

THK  .NoKTHKliN  COASTS  OF  NOVA  SCOTIA,  ^'c.— The  general  features 
of  the  NMi;liern  coiisf  of  Nova  Scotia  are  jile  !■./.%■' ;  the  land  low  nf>d  even,  or  sli^lilly 
broki'ii  by  a;;rceabb'  mequidities.  The  few  hiirli'ov  are  of  a  v»'rv  limited  capacity  :  tlio 
8(mI  of  the  country  is  fertile,  ami  the  woods  abound  with  bench,  oak,  elm,  birch,  iniiplt", 
ash.  pine,  spruce,  lai'cii.  juniper,  hemlock,  and  fir.  In  the  .'"itrait  of  Northumberland,  to 
HI1  extent,  from  end  to  end.  of  not  less  than  101'  miles,  the  \fAton\.  in  many  places,  is  nearly 
level,  an  I  varies  in  its  depth  only  from  'JO  to  1(1  fatlioms  lw>mg  generally  a  -ti(f  (day,  and 
the  uioniid  hiddiiitr  well. 

Bitweeii  (Jocagne,  on  the  west,  and  the  lii/h  cock,  caHr-4  lfc«  Barn,  o«i  the  enst.  the 
dhoii'  is  111  general  bounil  with  red  cdilfs,  and  beio  lies  under  th^^iw.  and  the  island  wliicli 
lies  betweiMi  Tatmau'ouche  nnd  the  basin  (d'  Cobei|u.l.  appear.^  r^wwrka'dy  high  to  vewelit 
in  tin-  olfiiit;. 

II  VIM','  rounded  Cii|ie  Tormeiitln.  »*ithiM'  inside  or  '/xtjiide  t/  tivt  G  feet  b-dgo  which 
lies  o(f  it.  you  will  opi'ii  to  the  westw«i»  I  of  the  H»y  Vert*. 

'J'HE  BAY  VEKTE  in  wide  lit  rta  entrance,  iiikJ  Barrows  a»  you  a<l»»«co;  tho  shores 


,re  lined  witli  flats 
,e9  are  good;  he 
Z  On  the  north 
,„lhe  southern  s 
die  bay  is  nnothei 
shipping  10  etite.-. 
„.,u.,nco  of  Its  pi 
|,or?t,  Cumberlan 
,ren8i"S  populatio 
'rive II  PHH 
„ue3,  is  the  ont 

,ce.     Iiiadvan 
b.r  will  bo  seen  o 
sliips  drawing  17 
■r„w  as  to  require 
taiice  from  sl/ore 

E.N.E.iE.f 

nmlfrntnt""!":'  \ 
miles;  trom  (lid 
j„lm  S.  E.  by  h. 
niaooncdie.  whicl 

RAMSHKC, 

from  whudi  exte 

row  cliannel,  thi 

,|.e(,t  velocity,  ai 

the  anchorage  if 

water.      I"  sidlu 

berth  of  a  mile,  i 

leiidgoins.  imtil 

TATMAfiOl 

wcilei'"  sidi'  of 

(';,pc  .lohn  and  ' 

the  ii-le  to  a  ciiis 

most  prudent  to 

ohorM-e  for  ship 

5  fathoms,  nuidi 

the  town  in  10  o 

Hows  till  7  o'cloi 

lUVKH.lol 

ilin.  your  com 

„,ul  rape,  you  v 

Yiiu  will  then  I 

,„ay  obtain  a  pi 

taiiceiVniu  shor 

In  Kamsheg. 

\m\  witli  tiinlit 

CAHliiOO 

Hre  K.  S.  K.  <« 

of  J  or  !>  fathoi 

bna  Uiirlior,  as 

wani.  imd  som 

observed  that  s 

bank,  wliich  s 

wliicli  np'-i-ars 

niDiitory  td'  Ci 

it  appears  like 

and  blind  the  > 

and  some  ot  I 

Caribou   I'oin 

and  round  it  t 

pidly  over  it. 

SllNKKI    !»• 

rock  lies  in  tli 
third  the  breii 
wliind.  The 
over  it  at  tlb- 
water  at  full 
close  tr  it,  as 


IHM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


89 


["■nmichi 
pre  is  a 

islands, 
lenthetn 
J  Nego- 

"fl-  and 
|"nc.  iind 

island, 
dvnticed 
'oufliern 
^^  hand 
f'l  buoy 
|tliis  pmt 
3uoy  ,ig 

ISi'eatnst 
nnd  the 
t  island, 

I' "J.  you 
nee.  by 

['ss  Mid- 
own  of 

"ihncor 
<1  is  flio 
mis  into 
'<iiinfvv. 
•  -\'.  fsl- 
^■itraiififi 
our  the 
■'jiientiy 


jre  lined  with  flnta,  on  which  the  wnter  becomes  shnllovv,  but  mid-chnnnel  the  anchor- 
jirei)  are  good;  here  vessels  of  coiisidenible  burden  may  tako  in  their  cnrgoes  of  timber, 
^0,  On  the  northern  side  of  the  bay,  luid  nenr  its  head,  is  the  small  River  of  (laspereau, 
jutlie  southern  shore  of  whidi  stands  the  l''ort  Aloncton,  and  on  the  southern  part  of 
tlie  bay  is  another  snmll  rivulet  railed  the  River  Tidnish;  they  ore  boih  too  shallow  for 
diippiiig  to  enter.  The  Hay  of  Vorte  is  now  risinj;  into  considorabht  importance,  in  con- 
,j(|Ui)iu'0  of  its  proximity  to  the  BayofFundy;  and  the  inti?rior,  from  the  bay  to  A m- 
lipr.st,  Cunilieiland,  La  Plnnce,  and  Tantann\ree,  is  in  a  highly  improving  state  and  in- 
crensiiig  ))opulation. 

RIVE II  PHILIP. — To  the  southward  of  Cape  Tormentin,  nt  the  distance  of  4 i  liiver  Philip. 
leagues,  is  the  entrance  to  the  Rivor  Philip,  a  bar  harbor,  having  only  10  foot  at  the  en- 
trance. In  advancing  towards  this  place,  wlien  in  the  (le|)lh  of  5  fathoms,  anotiier  har- 
dor  will  be  seen  on  the  eastern  or  larboard  side,  which  is  called  Pogwash.  In  the  litter, 
sliipa  drawing  17  feet  load  with  timber.  This  harbor  is  safe;  but  the  entrance  is  so  nur- 
fi)\v  as  to  require  a  pilot.  Ships  commonly  anchor  outside  in  5  fathoms,  at  3  miles  dis- 
tance from  shore,  with  the  entrance  bearing  to  the  S.  E. 

E.  N.  E.  4  E.  about  8  miles  from  the  enti'ance  to  the  Bay  of  Pogwash'is  the  ClifFCape, 
(inil  from  (^'ape  Tormentin  to  Clilf  Cape  the  bearing  and  distance  are  S.  by  E.  i  E  16 
miles;  from  ('lilT  Ca|)e  to  Shoal  Point  S.  E.  3  miles;  and  from  Shoal  Point  to  t'ape 
John  S.  E.  by  E.  1  i  miles.  Bi'twecwi  the  two  latter  lie  the  harbors  of  Ramsheg  and  Tat- 
niagonche.  which  are  good  and  well  sheltered,  but  each  require  a  j)ilot. 

RAMSHEG  HARIiOR.— ()(f  the  northern  or  Shoal  Point  is  Fox  Island,  the  flats  Ramsheg 
from  which  extend  so  far  from  shore,  ."t  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  as  to  leave  but  a  nur-  Harbor. 
r,i\v  chamu'l.  through  which,  at  all  times,  excepting  at  slack  water,  the  tide  runs  with 
rrent  velocity,  and  renders  the  navigation  into  it  very  unsafe,  although  the  depth  up  to 
[he  nnchoragci  is  suthcient  for  a  frigate;  there  being,  in  mid-chnimel,  3^  filhoms  at  low 
water.  In  sailing  in.  steer  south-westerly,  towards  (iravois  Clilf,  giving  Shoal  Point  a 
berth  of  a  mile,  until  the  N.  \V.  arm  is  well  open;  then  steei  for  the  latter,  keeping  your 
lead  going,  until  the  beach  to  the  N.  \V   of  Gravois  (Mdf  bears  S.  W.  by  W. 

TATM.\(i()UCIIE  is  O-i  miles  to  the  westward  of  I'^ox  Island,  and  the  channel  on  the  Tatmagouchs 
ivi'ilern  side  of  Amet  Isia  is  (piite  cl(  ar;  but,  in  sailing  in  from  the  eastward,  between 
l':i|)e  .lohii  and  the  isle,  you  should  keep  nearest  to  the  cape,  for  a  ledge  extends  from 
the  k\i'  to  a  considerable  distance.  Amet  is  a  low  island,  without  trees,  and  it  will  bo 
most  prudeiii  to  keep  at  lea'^t  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  it  every  way.  Tlie  best  an- 
oliomue  for  ships  is  in  the  H.iibor  or  R'wv.r  .lohn,  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor,  in  4  or 
5  t'litlii'iiis.  mndily  biiitom.  Sin  dl  vessels  iiniy  run  up  to  Talmagouche,  and  aiiihor  off 
the  town  in  10  or  lv2  feet  at  low  water.  Here  the  tide  rises  .'3  feet,  on  full  and  change,  and 
llows  till  7  o'clock. 

RI V  KR  J  Oil  N. — In  coming  from  the  eastward,  when  between  Amet  Island  and  Cape  River  John. 
Joiin,  your  course  towards  River  .lolin  will  be  W.  by  S.  In  passing  between  the  islaii'' 
niiil  cape,  yon  will  have  A/s  fallioms  until  you  open  the  River  .lolui,  on  the  larlmard  side. 
V(Mi  will  then  luive  7.  ft,  and  !)  lathoms;  and  it'liouml  foi-  this  I'iver,  or  foi'  Talinaiiouche, 
may  obtain  a  pij.it,  by  making  the  usual  signal.  There  is  safe  anchorage  at  'J  uiiltis  dis- 
tiuice  from  shore. 

Ill  Rainsheg.  Tatmagouc'ie,  and  Jolui  Harbor,  ships  of  fifteen  feet  draught  ccunmonly 
lend  with  tiiiitier. 

CAKIHOi;  KARROR. — From  Cape  .John  to  Caribou  Point  the  course  and  distance  Caribou 
arc  K.  S.  K.  (i  li-agues.    Here  the  water  gradually  -hcalens  to  the  shore,  from  the  depth   Harbor. 
of-^or  0  fathoms  at  two  miles  otf.      To  strangers  it  may  bo  dangerous  to  approach  Cari- 
bna  tlariiiir,  as  it  has  frequently  been  mistaken  tor   I'ictou   which  lies  to  the  south-wej-t- 
wanl.  and  some  have  run  on  shnie  before  the  error  has  been  discovered.     Vor  it  is  to  bo 
observed  that  ships  are  seen  riding,  not  in  the  entrance  of  th(!  hailxu',  but  within  a  saiut- 
biiiik,  wiiich  stretches  from  side  to  si  le,  having  not  mm'c^  than  3  or  4  feet  o.er  it.  and 
which  ap'-ears  like  a  good  (diannel.       Small  vessels  load  witii  timber  here.       The  pro- 
mmitory  of  Caribou  ii:ay  be  known  from  I'ieton  by  oliserving  that  the  hollow  land  over 
it  a|ipeiirs  like  a  deep  inlet;  but  the  hiiihlaiids  of  Pictou  seem  to  fold  over  each  other, 
ami  blind  the  entrance     The  ledges  about  (^'aribou  extend  u])wardsofa  mile  fiom  shore, 
and  some  of  them  are  dry  at  low  water.       Nearly  in  mid-ciiamiel,  to  the  northward  of 
('ariimu   Pdint,  is  a  rorky  shoal  of  10  feet.       It  is  a  quarter  el'  a  mile  in  circumference, 
and  round  it  the  depths  are  4,  b,  and  (i  fathoms.      The  tides,  both  ebb  ami  ll.iod,  set  ra- 
jiidly  over  it. 

ScNKKN  Rock. — Between  Pictou  Island  and  Caribou  Point,  is  a  sunken  roik.  The  SunkenRock. 
rock  lies  ill  fill-  fail  \v:iy  between  I'ictoii  Island  and  Caribou  Point,  being  distant  about  one- 
third  the  breadfli  of  the  chaimid.  m  a  W  by  N.  direction  from  the  western  point  of  the 
isliiiid.  The  circuiiifeii'iicn  of  tlit<  rock  is  about  400  yiiids,  and  the  tide  was  found  to  set 
over  it  at  the  rate  ot'-'A  miles  per  hour,  the  tlood  settiui;  to  the  N.  N.  VV  uiuking  high 
water  at  full  and  •  lniii;e  at  '.'h.  .'lOm.  On  its  westeiti  »<dgi>,  the  rock  has  4  and  .")  fatlinuis 
close  tr  it,  aud  .i  tf-  7  fathoms  on  its  eastern  edge.    Tlie  position  of  this  rock  renders  it  ox- 


pppuWPMPMpmMmn^ipi 


•oqipmpipmui  \.m»n  V I  -JAW 


90  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

tremely  dangerous  to  ships  leaving  Pictou  Harbor  for  the  westward,  as  it  lies  immediately 
in  the  fairwHy.  The  channel  to  the  westward  of  the  shoal  is  generally  adopted,  in  which 
there  are  from  3i  to  4  futhoms,  irregular  soundings. 

Pictoulsland.  PICTOU  ISLAND,  4.^  miles  long  eiist  and  west,  and  li  mile  wide,  is  of  clay  and 
sandstone,  rising  in  the  central  parts  to  the  extreme  height  of  150  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is 
wooded  on  the  northern  aide,  hut  there  are  settlements  and  farms  along  its  southern  shore. 
Low  clitls  form  its  outline  with  the  exception  of  several  small  bays,  and  Rogers  Point,  on 
the  south  side,  which  is  of  sand,  and  affords  the  best  landing  for  boats. 

West  Point.  West  Point  may  be  passed  in  ;3  fathoms  within  half  a  mile;  but  on  either  side  of  the 
west  end  of  the  island  there  are  rocks,  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  just  within  the  3  fiithoma 
line,  and  extending  to  the  distance  of  300  fathoms  offshore.  The  shallow  water  runs  out 
occasionally  to  the  same  distance  off  the  north  shore  of  the  island,  which  should  not  be 
approached  nearer  than  8  or  9  fathoms  in  the  night  time.  The  southern  shore  nmy  be 
approached  to  5  fathoms ;  but  off  the  East  Point  a  dangerous  reef,  in  great  part  dry  nt  low 
water,  runs  out  half  a  mile  to  3  fathoms,  and  nearly  a  mile  to  the  5  fathoms  line.  There 
are  9  fathoms  not  far  oH' this  reef  both  to  the  northward  and  eastward,  it  should  therefore 
,<  be  approached  with  caution  at  all  times,  but  especially  at  night,  and  with  a  flood  tide.   In 

most  of  the  old  charts  a  shoal  is  laid  down  about  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Pictou  Island 
but  we  have  not  yet  been  able  to  discover  any  indication  of  its  existence. 

Pictou  Har-       PICTOU  HARIJOR,  in  every  respect  the  finest  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  gulf  ensi- 

bor.  Coal,  ward  oft  iiispe,  derives  additional  importance  from  the  coal  mines,  valuable  quarries  of  building 
stone,  and  linely  settled  country  in  its  neighborhood.  It  is  situated  5  miles  to  the  south- 
ward of  Caribou  Point,  an<l  nt  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  which  is  1|  mile  wide  at  its  entrance, 
from  Logan  to  Mocltenzie  Head,  and  1^  mile  deep.  Mackenzie  Head  will  be  retognizeil 
by  its  shnrj)  pointed  clilf  of  clay  and  sandstone  40  foet  high,  and  by  its  bearing  nearly  south 
from  Loaan  Point. 

Mackenzie  MACKENZIE  SHOAL  lies  off  the  head  to  the  N.  E.  h\  E.,  its  outer  ed^o  being  djg- 

ShoaL.  tant  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.      It  is  a  rocky  bani;  nearly  ont^-third  of  a  mile  in  diiinietw, 

with  K)  feet  least  water,  and  with  1!'  or  '20  feet  betw(UMi  it  and  the  sliallaw  water  to  the 
westward.  Large  vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  within  or  to  Hie  southward  and  west- 
ward of  it.  The  niarks  for  clearing  it  to  the  eastward  at  the  distance  of  a  cable,  are  Cari- 
bou and  Doctor  Points  in  one,  bearing  N.  by  W.  i  VV.,  and  the  lighthouse  in  one  with 
the  Town  Point  at  Pictou  bearing  west  will  clear  it  to  the  northward  at  Mio  distance  of 
200  fathoms.  The  shallow  water  extends  a  long  half  mile  out  to  the  northward  from 
Mackenzie  Head,  and  its  edge  in  3  fathoms,  trends  thence  to  the  westward  towards  tie 
liglitlioiise,  the  whole  bay  on  tli;it  side  being  shoal,  with  I'idges  of  siind  drying  i.iittoa 
consi<ien»ble  distance  from  the  shore  at  low  water.     In  the  bay  between  Mackenzie  Mead 

Boat  Harbor,  iind  the  linhtliouse,  and  on  the  west  side  of  Powell  Point,  is  IJoat  Harbor,  the  entrance 
of  an  exten.sive  inlet  or  lake,  full  of  mud  and  weeds,  and  which  boats  can  traverse  only 
when  the  tidi^  is  in.  On  the  opposite  or  northern  side  reefs  exttnid  o(f  Lo;;an  Point  to  tiie 
east  and  south-east,  a  long  half  mile  to  the  line  of  3  fathoms.  The  liglitlionse  and  Cole 
Point  in  one,  bearing  S.  \V.  by  \V.  'i  W.  leail  over  the  south-eastern  extreme  of  these 

Cole  Point,  reefs  in  14  feet  at  low  water,  but  vessels  should  not  go  nearer  than  4  f  ithoms.  Cole  Point, 
which  is  of  day  and  sandstone  clilf  30  feet  high,  and  lies  a  short  mile  further  iii  or  to  tlie 
S.  W.  from  Logan  Point,  has  also  a  reef  strt^tchinij  out  to  the  S.  E.  one-third  of  a  mile, 
and  the  shallow  wat<M'  continues  from  it  westward  to  the  commencement  of  Londoa 
Beach  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  l;'irl)or. 

PicfouLight-      The  liizhthouse,  of  wood,  painted  vi^i'tically  with  red  and  white  stripes,  and  showing  a 

house.  fixed  liglit  U5  feet  above  the  sea,  stands  close  to  tlio  water  at  the  extremity  of  the  sandy 

spit  forming  the  south  side  of  the  entrance. 

Pictou  Bars,  T\w  distance  across  the  hari)or's  month  from  the  sandy  spit  to  London  Beach,  is  2-'0 
fathoms,  and  7  fathoms  deep;  but  the  channel  over  the  inner  bar  is  nmch  narrower,  and 
has  besides  a  turn  in  it,  which,  together  with  the  necessity  of  knowing  exactly  the  set  of 
the  tides,  rt'iidiM'S  a  pilot  indisp(«nsal)le  in  a  large  ship.       Vi^ssels  miming  for  the  hnrlmr 

Outer  Bar.  must  first  pass  the  (.)iiTKa  B.*k,  which  stretches  from  fjoirnu  Point  to  MacVi-nzie  Heiid, 
and  has  'Jl  feet  at  low  water  over  a  botto.n  of  sand.  Aftnr  puKxini;  this  '  ir.  the  depth  in- 
creases to  4,  !),  and  (i  fathoms  in  th<!  distance  of  about  m  mile,  and  thin  suddenly  decreased 

Inner  Bar,  to  11)  feet  on  the  I.n.nkk  Bar,  which  is  also  of  s;i'>  |,  und  clistant  about  400  liitiioius  fnuri 
the  lighthouse.  After  passing  this  inner  biir,  wimli  is  not  uiiove  a  long  calile  wide,  tlio 
water  continues  deep  to  the  entrance  of  tin-  lurttor.      There  is  very  good  anchoraiio  ')o- 

Pictou  Road,  twecii  the  bars  althoujjh  exjio-ieil  to  N.  K  avoids,  and  idso  in  Pii.roij  lloAO  whicliKOUt- 
side  of  the  outer  bar,  and  where  the  depth  \*  .">  fath'  <ov  with  (day  iind  mud  bottom.  ^^  essols 
rnniiiiii;  w  biMtiiii;  up  to  Pictou  Ivoads  at  niulii  «  11  and  the  souuditii;s  in  the  Admiralty 
C^hnrt  snHici(Mit  guidance,  when  keeping  the  son'heru  shor«'  .ibonrd  with  the  previeling  S. 
W.  winds:  and  on  the  opposite  side,  or  with  uoi  lerly  win  Is,  wdl  have  the  advantage  of 
the  following  excellent  leadin;;  marks.  Pictou  li_it  cm  readily  he  seen  in  n  cbvir  night 
fi-om  a  distance  of  I'J  or  II  miles,  and  when  In  oti'  with  Coid  Point  biMiring  S.  W.  U\  W. 
I  W.  clears  the  roof  olf  the  east  end  ot  Pictou  Island  ai  the  distance  of  a  long  halt  wile; 


and  also  th( 
beating,  tac 
hind  Cole  P 
bearing  W. 
edge  of  the 
W.,  taking 
be  in  safe  ar 
to  circumstii 
men,  and  ar 
nary  spring 
able  and  ex 
safely  recko 
er  depth  wi 
Having  a  fai 
has  been  po 
degree  or  tv 
Point,  the  e 
on  until  Loji 
to  the  north 
Sandy  Spit, 
in  one  with 
and  run  fror 
treme  of  M( 
to  the  north 
W.  extreme 
Sandy  Spit 
A  i)ilot  wc 
sels  innst  ki 

is  6  feet  in  c 

MERIGC 
entrance  of 
timber,  witli 
the  east  end 
where  you  i 
ture  to  ento 
is  a  depth  of 
feet.  High 
onis,  soft  mi 

There  is  i 
hish.  and  bo 
of  refuge  foi 
to  the  eastw 
St.  tteorge  i 
sidernbly  ele 
is  said  to  be 
vvliiit  rocky, 

ST.  OEO 
lies  10  miles 
ber  and  gypi 
harbor  is  so 
anchorage  is 

At  Pomkf 
fliifcty.  In 
bcaiil  side,  I* 
'iteep  to,  and 
(jiiiirters  of  i 
rock  II  baN  \n 
with  the  islh 
tho  >limd. 

'vkliUSI 
of  Ciiiso,  foi 
a  innnber  ol 
extends  outs 


Rkmarks. 

the  l;ind  of  f 
time  ihree-q 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


91 


and  bIso  the  southern  extremity  of  the  Pictou  Island  Bank  in  54  fathoms :  therefore,  if 
beating,  tack  in  the  board  to  the  northward,  the  instant  the  light  begins  to  disappear  be- 
hind Cole  Point;  and  if  running  keep  the  light  just  open  to  the  southward  of  Cole  Point, 
bearing  W.  S.  W.,  until  you  strike  soundings  in  the  low  water  depth  of  5  fathoms,  on  the 
edge  of  the  bank  off  L  >gan  Point;  then  follow  the  same  depth  about  Jj  mile  to  the  S. 
W.,  taking  care  not  to  bring  iho  light  to  bear  to  the  northward  of  west,  and  the  vessel  will 
be  in  snfe  anchorage  in  the  road,  whore  she  may  wait  for  daylight,  or  a  pilot,  according 
to  circumstances.  The  branch  pilots  of  Pictou  are  for  the  most  part  able  and  experienced  Pilots. 
men,  and  are  always  on  the  look  out  for  vessels.  Although  19  feet  at  low  water,  in  ordi- 
nary spring  tides,  can  be  carried  over  the  inner  bar,  yet  the  aid  either  of  buoys,  or  of  an 
able  and  experienced  pilot,  would  be  required  to  insure  that  depth;  but  17  feet  may  be 
safely  reckoned  upon,  if  the  following  brief  directions  are  strictly  followed;  and  the  great- 
er depth  will  bo  carried  in,  if  the  endeavor  to  follow  them  exactly  has  been  successful. 
Having  fi  f'dr  wind,  and  being  further  out  than  Mackenzie  Shoal,  the  position  of  which 
has  been  pointed  out,  bring  the  lighthouse  in  one  with  Town  Point  at  Pictou,  bearing  a 
degree  or  two  to  the  southward  of  west;  or,  which  will  be  the  same  thing,  with  Smith 
Point,  the  extreme  of  the  land  on  the  same  side  beyond  the  town.  Run  with  those  marks 
on  until  Logan  and  Cole  Points  come  in  one,  bearing  N.  E.,  when  instantly  sheer  a  little 
to  the  northward,  suflficiently  to  bring  Town  Point  in  one  with  the  north  extreme  of  the 
Sandy  Spit.  Keep  the  last  named  marks  exactly  in  one,  until  the  Roaring  Bull  comes 
in  one  with  Mackenzie  Head,  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  when  change  the  course  smartly 
and  run  from  those  marks,  keeping  tho  Roaring  Bull  only  just  in  sight,  until  the  north  ex- 
treme of  Moodil  Point  (the  first  ])oint  on  the  south  side  within  the  lighthouse)  opens  out 
to  the  northward  of  the  Sandy  Spit:  then  haul  to  the  westward,  at  first  towards  the  S. 
\V.  extreme  of  London  Beach,  and  afterwards  so  as  to  pass  midway  between  it  and  the 
Sandy  Spit  into  the  harbor. 

A  pilot  would  be  indispensable  in  a  Ittrge  ship  with  beating  winds,  and  even  smaller  ves- 
fleU  >nu9f  knew  th"i  tides  and  the  place  well  to  beat  in  or  out  with  safety. 

„'.:    ...'...       /  ''thouse  on  the  full  anil  change  days  at  lOh.;  and  the  rise  Pictou  Tides. 

is  6  feet  in  ordinary  spring  tides,  and  4  feet  in  neap  tides. 

MERIGOMISH,  which  is  an  excellent  bar-harbor,  lies  7  miles  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  the  Merigomish. 
entrance  of  Pictou;  the  merchants  of  which  place  have  ponds  here,  for  the  reception  of 
timber,  with  which  a  number  of  ships  are  annually  laden.  To  sail  in  for  this  place,  bring 
the  east  end  of  Pictou  Island  nearly  north,  and  keep  it  so  until  o(f  the  hnri)or's  moulh, 
where  you  may  either  obtain  a  pilot,  or  anchor  in  4  fathoms.  A  stranger  should  not  ven- 
ture to  enter  the  harbor  without  a  pilot,  as  a  ledge  stretches  oft'  from  either  side.  There 
is  a  depth  of  14  feet  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  and  tho  vertical  rise  of  the  tide  is  about  5 
feet.  High  water  at  full  and  change,  at  lOh.  Cm.  The  depth  within  is  from  4  to  7  fath-  Highwater. 
cms,  soft  mud. 

There  is  no  harbor  between  Merigomish  and  Cape  St.  George ;  but  the  const  is  clear, 
high,  and  bold,  and  vessels  may  sail  along  it  in  safety,  at  tho  distance  of  a  mile.  As  a  place 
of  refuge  for  small  vessels  in  distress,  there  is  a  new  pier  erected  on  the  coast,  7  leagues 
to  the  eastward  of  Pictou,  and  at  the  indent  formed  by  the  rock  called  the  Barn.  Cape 
St.  tieorge  is  a  promontory  which  runs  out  to  the  north-eastward;  it  is  bold  to,  and  con- 
siderably elevated,  forming  the  western  point  of  entrance  to  .St.  George's  Bay,  but  there 
is  said  to  be  good  anchorage  under  the  cape,  in  from  10  to  7  fathoms;  the  ground  is  some- 
what rocky,  but  you  will  rid(3  there  sheltered  from  westerly  winds. 

ST.  (;E0R(JE'S  bay,  ANTKJUNISIL— The  entrance  i)f  the  Harbor  of  Antiffonish  St.  George's 
lies  10  miles  to  the  S.  by  \V.  from  (Jape  St.  (teors;e.      Hero  small  v«'ssel.s  load  with  tim-  Baii,Antigo- 
ber  and  gypsum,  or  plaster,  of  which  there  is  abundance  in  the  neighborhood;  but  the  nish. 
harimr  is  so  shoal,  that  even  these  complete  their  cargoes  outside  of  tlie  bay,  although  the 
atichoniye  is  not  so  siifc. 

At  Pomket  Harbor,  (J  miles  eastward  from  Antigonish,  ships  of  any  size  may  load  in 
safety.  In  ^  '  .ig  in,  when  from  the  northward,  you  will  leave  rba  island  on  the  star- 
biiaiii  side,  k<-.  ing  rluso  to  a  nick,  wiiich  appears  o  or  6  feet  above  water.  This  rock  is 
stt'i'p  to,  and  li<  -  i.ll'  the  oast  oiid  of  the  ishiiid.  Outside  of  it,  at  the  distance  of  three- 
(jiiiirtors  of  H  Miile,  lit-  several  sunken  Io(l<;o3,  which  are  iiani;erous.  After  passing  tho 
rock  II  l)a>  \\  A  o]  en  on  tlie  stai-board  side,  which  you  mur-t  stand  into,  till  you  are  shut  in 
with  iho  isth  ui,  where  there  is  anchorage  in  .'{i  fathoms  water,  at  about  half  a  mile  from 

th,'   >liUMl. 

'.!vI{USHEE,  or  .VUISUSHEE,  is  an  inlet  which  lies  between  Cape  .Tack  and  the  Gut  Arhushee. 
of  CiMso,  forming  a  small  Imrlior.  occupied  by  an  industrious  and  thriving  peojilo.     Here 
a  iminhor  of    aiill  vexsols  luivo  tit^en  built,  oarrying  froii.  15  to  50  tons.     A  rocky  ledge 
extends  outside  liio  hiirlior.  in  a  norili-we.-iterly  directiini 

TIIK  GVT  OF  CANSO  TO  ISLE  MADAME. 

PuiMRKS. —  The  (!«it  .»<  Cause  is  formed  by  the  Island  of Bnton  on  one  side,  and  by 
tho  liiid  of  NovH  Siiiiia  nil  the  nrlior.  Its  length  is  aluiiit  5  loin;ues,  and  bioadlh  more 
thrtii  lliree-quarters  of  a  mile.     Tho  east  siilo  is  low,  with  beaclies,  but  the  west  shore  is 


'"il 


92 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Light. 


Cape  St. 
George. 


SunJcrn 
Rock. 

Shij)  Har- 
bor. 


Gut  of 
Canso. 


Cerberus 
Rock. 


Inhabitant 
Bay. 


for  the  most  part  high  and  rocky ;  Cape  Porcupine  being  remarkably  so.  The  deepest 
water  is  on  the  westorn  shore  ;  but  both  shores  are  bold  to  and  sound,  excepting  some 
sunken  rocks,  one  of  which  lies  near  a  cable's  length  from  the  eastern  shore,  and  iibout 
midway  between  the  southern  entrance  of  the  (iut  and  Ship  Harbor;  a  second  is  between 
Ship  Harbor,  and  Bear's  Head,  running  out  nearly  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  and  a 
third  liesort'  Bear's  Island,  about  100  fathoms  from  the  land.  The  depth  of  water  over 
these  rocks  is  about  6  or  8  feet.  Mill  Creek,  Gypsum  or  Plaster  Cove,  Venus  Cinek 
Ship  Hiirbor  Holland  Cove  or  Pilot  Harbor,  and  Eddy  Cove,  afford  excellent  anchor- 
ages, with  a  moderate  depth,  and  out  of  the  stream  of  the  tide,  which  generally  sets  in 
from  the  sontliward,  but  is  very  irregular  being  much  influenced  by  the  winds.  After 
strong  N.  W.  winds,  which  happen  daily  during  the  fail  of  the  year,  the  water  in 
the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  is  ren<iere(l  low,  wliicdi  causes  the  current  to  run  norlhwmd 
through  tho  Gut,  at  the  rate  of  4  or  3  knots,  and  tho  contrary  happens  after  southerly 
winds. 

Light. — On  the  west  side  of  tho  north  entrance  to  the  Gut  of  Canso  there  is  a  fixed 
light  113  feet  above  the  level  ,of  the  sea;  there  is  good  anchorage  under  the  light  with 
the  wind  ofl"  shore. 

CAPE  ST.  GEORGE,  is  a  remarkable  promontory,  lying  at  the  distance  of  loj 
leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Pictou  Harbor.  A  course  of  G  leagues  thence  to  the  south- 
eastward, will  lead  to  tiie  entrance  of  the  (iut,  whence  you  nuiy  run  ak)ng  the  Breton 
shore.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  in  the  ofTirig,  near  Arbushee, 
already  noticed ;  some  of  these  are  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  and  nearly  in  tho  direct 
course  for  tho  (Jut;  they  must,  of  course,  be  carefully  avoided. 

Opposite  Mill  Creek,  at  tho  upper  end  of  the  (Jut,  on  the  Nova  Scotia  side,  you  iniiy 
stop  a  tide  or  lie  wind-bound,  if  it  does  notovei'blow.  Keep  the  creek  open,  and  come  to 
anchor  in  6  or  10  fiithoins,  within  u  rablo's  iengtli  of  tlie  steep  rocks  on  the  south  sido  of 
the  creek.  Tho  best  water  is  wilh  tho  creek's  mouth  open.  It  will  be  necessnry  to 
carry  a  hawser  on  shore  to  tho  rocks,  to  steady  the  siiip,  as  the  tide  here  runs  in  eddieg. 
You  may  obtain  fresh  water  fiotn  the  ci'eek  at  low  water. 

Upon  entering  the  (jut,  there  will  bo  seen,  on  tiie  larlward  hand,  a  red  house,  on  a  point 
called  Belle  Ashe's  Point,  off  which,  at  nenrly  a  cal)le's  length  from  shore,  there  is  a 
sunken  rock,  which  niay  be  readily  distinguished  by  the  eddy  of  the  tide.  Within  this 
point,  on  the  S.  E.  is  (iypsuni  or  Plaster  Cove,  which  is  known  by  its  white  appeaniiice, 
and  where  you  can  anchor  in  soft  mud,  in  from  4  to  10  falhcnis. 

SHIP  IIABBOIi,  which  lies  Imif  way  down  the  (Jut,  on  the  eastern  side,  is  a  good 
harbor  for  merchant  shipping.  It  is,  however,  more  particuhiily  useful  to  those  sailing 
northwiird,  being  a  good  outlet.  It  is  a  very  proper  jilace  for  ships  of  1(>  feet  dniuj;lit. 
If  bound  in,  from  the  southward,  give  the  starboard  side  a  berth  of  a  cable's  length,  it  being 
flat,  mid  run  in  until  you  shut  the  north  cntranc^e  of  tlie  (iut,  and  come  to  anchor  in  4  or 
5  fa'hdnis,  soft  bottom,  whei-o  you  may  wood  on  \\w  Breton  side,  and  water  on  the  oppo- 
site  shore,  at  Venus'  Creek  ;  the  larboard  side  of  this  hurlxir  is  bolder  to  than  the  siar- 
boai-d  side,  and  deepest  water.  Without  the  harbor,  one-third  fr(un  the  Breton  side, you 
may  aindior  in  9,  10  to  13  fathoms,  loose  ground,  in  the  strength  of  the  tide. 

Ships  bound  through  the  (iiit.fiom  the  northward,  may  prorecil  through  it  with  pnfcty, 
by  keeping  nearly  in  the  mid-cliiinnel,  there  bcintjno  danger  until  they  lUTive  ofi'the  south 
point,  called  Eddy  Point;  but  from  this  |)oint  extends  a  longspit  id"  sand,  'vith  large  roinid 
stones,  which  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  sale,  nt  the  dii^tance  of  half  a  mile  *Voni  what 
may  bo  seen  above  water.  The  race  of  the  tide  svill  serve  to  guide  you  from  it.  lliiviiig 
passed  tho  Spit  of  Eddy  Point,  when  midway,  you  may  steer  to  the  south,  and  after  you 
have  |)asse(l  Cape  Argos,  taking  care  you  do  not  open  Eddy  I'ointwith  Beui'  Islaiid,  until 
you  bring  (Jreen  Island  well  oytv.n  with  Capo  llogan,  when  you  may  shape  your  course 
for  sea  fiom  the  charts. 

(JIT  OF  CANSO.— When  ofl"  Cape  Canso  and  bound  for  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawren.^e. 
the  best  passive  is  through  the  Cut  of  Canso.  being  shorter,  and  having  the  advanliiize  of 
seveial  anchoriog  places,  out  of  tho  strength  of  the  tide,  in  ciise  of  contrary  winds  or  Inul 
weiither. 

C'EHBERUS  R(JCK. — This  is  n  dangerous  rock  in  ('lied;d)uctn  l?ay,  imniedintely  in 
the  fairway  to  and  from  the  Gut  (d"("a!iso  ;  it  has  only  lo  left  water  on  it,  and  breaks  with 
any  thing  (d'a  breeze. 

The  riin:;eto  the  eastward  fortius  rock,  is  (Jreet^  Island  on  with  Point  Hogan,  which 
is  the  i*^.  W.  point  of  Isle  Miidaine.  IJouiid  uf)  :il»e  (Jut  dI  Chiiso.  after  geltiiiir  into 
Cliedalnicfo  Buy,  bring  Eddy  I'oiiit  on  wilh  B»ar  Isimid.  (x«.lii(di  is  ii  smtill  round  i^liiiiil 
ofl' Hear  HcmuI.)  and  run  for  it  nniil  (Jreen  Islimd  is  hid  behnid  <  tpe  Houan,  when  you 
niiiy  shape  your  course  lijr  ihr  fairway  up  the  (Jul,  ns  you  vhen  wdl  have  pasi-ed  the 
Cerlierus. 

IMlABrrAN'T  BAY,  Arc— Tlins,-  who  wi-li  to  anchor  in  Itihabitant  Bay  or  llnrlH.r, 


may  brin^  the  farm  that  is  oppusitc   lo    Bear   Hcadi 


IIK'll.     I 


he  hciid   bearing  W.  S.  W. 


This  mark  will  lead  them  dear,   and  to  the  southward  uf  the  Long  Ledge,  and  in  the 


mid-channel,  I 

time  take  youi 

rive  at  Flat  Pi 

from  the  N.  E 

and  a  hnlfs  le 

fathoms,  mud( 

there  you  maj 

N.  B.  TliB 
sulainalineo 

isltind  to  the  n 

10  or  12  fatho 

Those  who 

end  of  the  Gl 

water,  may  cc 

wind,  down  tl 

^ouUl  wish. 

of  hem-  Point 

to  the  N.  E. 

muddy  botton 

southward  of 

give  this  point 

Marks  for 

W.  or  W.  by 

have  a  good  b 

to  moor  ten  o 

AR.\CHA 

ought  never  t 

to  swing  to  h 

westward  of 

keep  as  near 

Mariiche,  rou 

board  at  near 

will  then  see 

bring  that  on 

thus  pass  mi 

westward  of 

Fiddlehead 

you  will  the 

westward. 

siiiiiiv  bi-ach 

TUPvBaI 

roaohi'd  past 

W.  winil,  ai 

anchor  in  'I 

to  7  fathoms 

bring  tho  pi 

point  of  lam 

on  it,  open  ( 

it  over  the  i 

that  runs  f 

good  holdin 

up  your  mv 

gage  to  the 

\nt  to  wind 

iiig  the  low 

taking  care 

from  15  to ; 

TiiiKS  on 

nipiility  tlir 

pine,  it  sell 

full  iind  (do 

Ailing  bI 

riiuiiilinu;  ll 

of  Niirlhiiii 

The  perpe 

The  tide 

times  the  s 

days. 


w 


r( 


MM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


93 


mid-channel,  between  it  and  the  Bleep  rocks  on  the  east  or  oppoaite  shore ;  at  the  same 
time  take  your  soundings  from  the  Long  Ledge,  or  north  shore,  all  the  way  till  you  ar- 
rive at  Flat  Point ;  then  keep  in  mid-channol  between  Flat  Point  and  the  island  opposite, 
froai  the  N.  E.  side  of  which  runsolfn  spit  or  ledge  of  rocks,  at  the  distance  of  u  cable 
and  a  half's  length  ;  then  jiort  your  helm,  and  run  under  Island  Point,  and  como  to  in  5 
fiithoins,  muddy  bottom.  Up  the  river  Trent  are  plenty  of  salmon,  in  the  season,  and 
there  you  may  wood  and  water. 

N.  B.  The  leading  mark  to  clear  the  steep  rocks  of  Steep  Point  i:'.  to  bring  the  penin- 
juliiina  line  over  the  point  of  Turl)alton  Head,  bearing  S.  or  S.  i  K.  until  you  open  the 
island  to  the  northward  of  Island  Point ;  then  haul  up  for  the  outer  harbor,  and  come  to  in 
10  or  12  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

Those  who  are  bound  up  the  Gut  of  Canso.  and  meet  a  N .  or  N.  \V.  wind,  at  the  south 
end  of  the  Gut,  and  who  are  desirous  of  good  and  safe  anchorage,  in  10  to  12  iiithoma 
water,  may  come  to  on  the  north  side  of  Bear  Island  ;  but  should  it  blow  hard ,  to  a  gale  of 
wind,  down  the  Gut,  this  anchorage  is  not  altogether  so  secure  as  a  careful  master  or  pilot 
would  wish.  You  must  then  leave  the  road  of  Bear  Island,  and  sail  round  the  south  end 
of  bear  Point,  giving  a  berth  to  the  spit  that  runs  olfit,  of  3  cables'  length,  then  haul  round 
of  loj  to  the  N.  E.  into  Sea-Coal  Bay,  and  come  to  anchor,  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  sandy  and 

'le  south-  muddy  bottom.     There  is  also  a  rock  under  water,  said  to  lie  uboiit  100  fatlioms  to  the 

liieton  soutiiward  of  Bear  Island,  having  only  C  or  8  feet  water  over  it;  it  will  be  necessary  to 

'')URliee,  give  this  point  a  good  berth,  for  fear  of  this  danger, 

the  direct  Marks  for  anchi  ring,  viz:  bring  Bear  Head  in  a  line  over  Flat  Head,  bearing  W.  S.  Anchorage, 

W.  or  W.  by  S,  and  Cariton  Cliffs  to  bear  N.  by  E.  or  N.  in  5  or  C  fathoms,  yon  will  then 
have  a  good  berth,  sheltered  from  the  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  winds.  Here  is  sufficient  room 
to  nionr  ten  or  twelve  sail  of  any  ships  of  war,  from  the  sixth  to  tiie  third  rate. 

AR.iCHAT  HARBOR  has  two  entrances;  the  north  western  one  being  very  narrow,  Arachat 
ought  never  to  be  attempted  without  a  leading  wind,  as  there  is  not  room  for  a  large  ship  Harbor. 
to  swing  to  her  anchors,  should  she  Oe  taken  aback.  When  going  in,  give  the  ledge,  to  the 
westward  of  Seymour  Island  a  good  berth,  not  approaching  it  nearer  than  8  fathoms,  and 
keep  as  near  as  possible  in  mid-channel ;  to  enter  by  tlie  S.  Eastern  passage  steer  for  Port 
Maniche,  rounding  it  11  8  fathoms  at  about  two  cables'  length  off,  and  keep  that  shore  on 
board  at  nearly  the  same  distance  and  (i"pth  of  water,  until  the  church  l)oars  north;  you 
will  then  see  a  small  house  (tlie  dead  house)  on  the  top  of  the  hill  behind  the  church  ; 
bring  that  on  with  the  east  end  of  the  church,  and  then  steer  in  that  direction  ;  you  will 
thus  pass  midway  to  the  eastward  of  the  Eleven  and  Five  Feet  Shoals,  and  also  to  the 
westward  of  the  Fiddle-head  Shoal;  proceed  with  this  mark  on  until  a  red  house  on 
Piddlehead  Point  comes  on  with  the  dark  rooky  extreme  of  tlie  point,  bearing  E.  i  S. ; 
VdU  will  then  be  to  the  northward  of  the  Twelve  Feet  Slioal.  and  may  haul  up  to  the 
westward,  where  you  will  have  excellent  ancliorage  on  fine  soft  mud,  opposite  to  the  low 
saadv  beach,  on  the  middle  of  Seymour  Island,  in  10  fathoms. 

TU'-lB.\LTON  B.VY'.— Ships  coming  down  the  (Jur.  of  Canso,  which  may  have  Turballon 
reached  past  Eddy  Point,  or  as  far  as  Cape  Argos,  and  caught  with  a  S.  E.  to  a  S.  S.  Bay. 
\V.  wind,  and  cannot  hold  their  own  by  beating  to  windward,  may  bear  up  and  come  to 
anchor  in  Turballon  Bay,  under  Turbiilton  Head,  where  they  may  ride  safely  in  from  5 
to  7  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom.  The  marks  for  anchoring  in  Turbulton  Bay  are,  to 
bring  tlio  peninsula  poitit  in  a  line  over  'I'uibalton  Head,  bearing  S.  or  S.  i  W.  or  a 
point  of  land  inland,  a  little  up  in  the  (Country  from  Caiie  Argos  shore,  with  pine  trees 
on  it,  open  to  tho  eastward  of  the  Red  Head,  or  the  said  point  of  land  with  pine  trees  on 
it  over  the  pitch  or  point  of  Tmbalton  Head;  you  are  then  sheltered  by  the  rocks  or  spit 
that  runs  from  'i'urbalton  Head  in  -1  to  ,'>  and  6  fathomswater,  and  will  ride  very  safely  on 
good  holding  ground.  But  should  the  wind  shift  to  the  S.  W.  or  N.  W.  you  must  take 
uj)  your  anchor  and  beat  out  of  the  bay  into  rJK^dabucto  Bay,  and  proceed  on  your  pas- 
sage to  the  southward.  ShouM  the  wind  overblow  at  S.  W.  so  as  to  prevent  your  beat- 
init  to  windward  info  (Jhodabueto  Bay, you  may  como  to  an  anchor  in  Eddy  Cove,  bring- 
iiifi  the  lower  part  of  Eddy  Point  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  or  S.  by  E.  in  5,  G,  or  7  fathoms  water, 
tiddii!,'  ''are  to  give  the  ship  sufficient  cable,  lest  you  drive  otf  the  bank  into  deep  water, 
from  IT)  to '20  fathoms. 

TiiiKS  on   tho  south  siilo  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence.     Tho  tide  rushes  with  great   Tides. 
rapidity  thronuh  the  ( iut  of  ( 'anso  ;  and  in  the  narrowest  part  of  the  (Jut.  or  Capo  Porcu- 
pine, it  seldom  runs  at  a  slower  rate  than  4  or  -5  miles  in  an  hour.     Here  it  (lows,  on  the 
full  iinil  (diange,  at  !){li. 

Along  shoie,  past  Arbnshi'  and  Anti^' )nish,  it  sets  towards  Cape  St.  George  ;  and 
rounding  that  ciiiie.  piocei'ds  llieoeo  in  •  iiorth-wesieily  direetion.  On  tlie  south  shore 
of  NorthiiHiberl.ihd  .Striiit,  the  tinn-  id'  (lowuig,  on  the  lull  and  <diange,  is  from  7  to  8h. 
Tlie  perpeiidiculiir  rise  is  tVom  :i  to  7  or  r*  Icel. 

The  tides  hen?  are  very  nnitunally  varied  by  the  winil^;   and  it  has  been  found  that  at 


limes  the  stream  of  the  (iut  of  Canso 
days. 


contnitir  I  to  run  one  way  'or  many  successive 


94 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 
ST.  JOHN'S,  OR  PRINCE  EDWARD'S  ISLAND. 


Cardigan 
Bay,  or  the 
three  Rivers. 


Miray,  or 


This  island  is  well  settled,  and  possesses  n  good  soil,  fit  for  nil  general  purposes.  The 
climate  is  commonly  healthy  and  temperate,  and  not  subject  to  such  frequent  and  heavy 
fogs  as  Newfoundland  and  the  adjacent  coasts  of  Breton  and  New  Brunswick  geneinliv 
are,  nor  yet  to  sudden  changes  of  weather.  The  first  appearance  of  the  island  is  liko  i\,It 
of  a  forest  omorging  from  the  sea ;  the  red  ciifl's,  which  are  not  very  high,  then  npnonr- 
the  lands  are  covered  with  lofty  trees,  and  the  sand-hills  on  the  northern  side  of  the 
island  are  covered  with  verdure.  The  country  is  generally  level,  and  abounds  with  Bpiinoa 
of  fine  water,  and  groves  of  trees,  which  produce  great  quantities  of  excellent  timber 
The  greater  part  of  the  inliabitants  are  employed  in  farming  and  fishing. 

Rifioman's  Shoal  is  situated  off  the  south  coast  of  the  above  island,  and  the  followina 
remarks  were  taken  at  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  about  vii  or  3  cables'  length  S.  S.  W.  of  that 
part  on  which  the  British  ship  Rilloman  grounded,  viz :  Point  Prim,  N.  N.  W.  A  W 
South  Woody  Island  E.  by  S.  i  S.  a  point  (supposed  Point  Jennings)  N.  W.  a  merchant 
brig  on  shore  on  the  Indian  Rocks,  bore  S.  E.  about  3  or  4  miles  distant. 

The  least  water  found  upon  the  shoal  was  8  feet,  about  half  a  cable's  length  to  the 
northward  of  where  the  Rifleman  grounded.  It  appears  to  be  a  rocky  shoal  of  conside- 
rable extent. 

The  coast  forms  numerous  harbors,  many  of  which  are,  however,  fit  for  small  vessela 
only.  Tiio  principal  loiidini;  ports  at  present  are  on  the  eastern  side,  Cardigan  Bay,  or 
the  Three  Rivi^rs,  and  Murray  Harbor;  on  the  S.  10.  Hillsborough  Bay  ami  River;  Be- 
deque  Bay  on  the  southern  side  ;  ami  Ririiuiond  Bay  and  Holland  Harbor  on  tlio  north 

CARDIGAN  BAY,  or  the  TIIBKE  RIVKBS,  lies  between  tioughton  Island  and 
Panmure  Island  ;  it  is  tiie  common  entrance  to  tliroe  rivers,  namely:  Cardigan  Kiver 
BrudeMHJI  Kiver,  and  Montague  River.  In  the  f(»riner  there  are  from  7  to  3  fatlioaiu 
water,  and  in  the  otiiors  from  4  to  '2  fathoms.  George  Town  stands  on  a  peninsula  betwBon 
the  Rivers  Brudenell  and  Cardigan.  In  these  places  many  large  ships  have  been  loaded 
with  timber.  There  is  ani'horage  without,  in  Cardigan  Bay,  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms 
where  a  pilot  may  be  obtiiiiied. 

MIRA V.  or  iViUllRA V  HARBOR,  lies  close  to  the  north-westward  of  Boar  Ciipe; 
MurrayHar-  and  the  entrance  is  narrow  and  slioal,  diiriciilt  of  ac'coss,  and  not  having  more  than  Ijfept 
hoT.  water.     But  small  aliips  have  frequently  loiidiKJ  iicro.     V'essels  coming  from  the  eastward 

and  bound  to  Murray  Harbor,  must  avoid  approac.iiiiig  too  near  to  the  eastern  point,  Fur  a 
ridge  of  rocks  stretclies  out  a  full  mile  iVom  il ;  between  the  east  point  and  Wood  Isliind, 
the  ground  is  clear,  witli  a  deptli  of  3  futliunis  all  tlie  way,  near  the  shore,  and  the  ancho- 
rage good. 
Hillsborough  HILLSBOROUGH  BAY  is  the  finest  bay  in  the  island,  and  the  River  Hillsl.oronah 
Bay.  is  a  large  navigable  river  ;  but  tiinbi^r  here  is  not  plenrit'ul.      At'ler  passing  the  front  aljout 

a  quarter  of  a  mile,  k(ii'p  towards  tlie  entrance  of  York  River,  for  a  shoal  extends  from 
the  opposite  shore  to  some  distance,  and  anchor  olf  the  town   in  fi  or  8  fathoms.     Vcj. 
aels  bound  tor  Cliarlotte  Town,  or  passing  throu;;li  Nortiiinnberland  Strait,  must  be  ('iiro- 
ful  to  avoid  the  Indian  Rocks,  wiiich  are  covered  at  higli  water;  and  by  night  it  will  al- 
ways be  advisable  to  keep  on  the  Nova  Scotia  side,  particularly  when  passing  by  the  Island 
of  Pictoii. 
BedequeBay,      BKDKQUK  BAY,  which  lies  between  ('ape  K.Mnont  and  (Jarleton  Point,  has  good  an- 
chorini;  ground  in  from  (i  to  8  fatiioins      The  harbor  will  admit  sliijis  of  400  tons,  hut  tiie 
channel  is  narrow,  crook<Mi,  and  reipiires  a  pdot.      It  is  llit<  chief  port  for  h)ading  tiuihiM'; 
butthe  water  freezes  much  s    ;ii(!rtlian  at  I'icton.  or  llie  hiirliorsoii  tlni  Nova  Scotia cimst. 
Between  ('ape   Kuinoiit  and  West  (Ja()e,  in    1  lid  las    or    K^niont  Bay,  there    is   ix^mX 
anchora^o,  with  nortln-rly  and  easterly  winds,  in  i;  or  M  f'atlioms.  but  care  must  be  taken  lo 
give  a  ijoiid  bnrth  to  West  ( 'ape,  as  a  shoal  runs  nil'  it  lull  '■>  unU^s,  in  a  S.  W.  direction. 
From  the  North  ( 'iipe  of  the  island  a  shoal  spiti  olf  nearly  2  miles,  closeto  which  llicis 
are  4  fathoms  of  water,  and  \\w  ground  is  dat  uiiich  further  olf,  there  being  otdy  (i  fatliunis 
water  at  the  distance  of  H  or  9   utiles  from  the  c^ape.      Vessels  sailing  through  the  Siiait 
of  Nortiiumlierland,  with  the  intention  of  goiii','  to  any  port  on  tht!  northern  side  of  tiio 
island,  will,  after  giving  the  north  ca|)e  a  wi  li<  lierlli,  liiii  all  the  other  part  of  the  cnast 
clear  from  foul  ground,  to  within  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  niih^  of  th<«  land,  and  may 
anchor  any  where  in  not  less  than  .'{  fathoms  water  ;  and  ships  coming  from  the  eastward 
will  tin  1  an  advaita^e  in  h,i-!ing  .doii;;  tiie  norllifiii  shore  of  tlie   island,  to  going  llironnh 
tli(?  .Slrail   ot'  Norlhumlterland,  tor  tlii'ri'  is  nioii'  si'ii  room,  and  the  prevailing  winds  are 
from  the  siuth-westwar  I ;  they  may  safi-ly  run  along  willnii  a  mdi;  of  the  shore,  until  they 
n|)proach  Richinond  Bay.     There  is  a  reef  i-xtcndini;  fnuii  the  east  point  of  the  islniiilto 
the  distance  of  3  or  4  miles,  nml  which  should  not  be  approached  in  the  ni^ht  neurit' than 
to  tin-  ileptli  of  17  or  H   fiilionis.     Tiii-  only  hai'mrs  on  the  north  side  of  the  island,  fur 
shipsof  I  iruiH)iirtheii,  are  llullaud  Harbor  an      Kichiiioiid  Hay;  and  cdf  these  harbiirn, 
the  sand-l):lnl^s.  wliirli  t'orin  tie"  liars,  run  olf  in., re  iIimu  a  mile  from  the  shore. 
St.  Peter's.         ST.  PfrrKR'.S  is  the  (irst  harhor  on  the  norili  side,  when  coming  iVom  the  eastward, 
and  is  fit  for  small  vessels  only.     The  bar  runs  nut  aiiout  a  ipiarler  of  u  mile. 


Savage  Hnrbo 

TRACAUIE, 

..tends  outward 

HARRINGl 

jjtes  with  Ureal 
M admit  fishery 

NEWLON] 
bar  is  very  dillici 

RICHMONJ 
jpon  the  bar. 
The  shoals  on  e 
in  and  out  is  ne 
coiiio  off.  The 
jnstern  is  the  o 
being  very  shall 
within  Fishery 
,nd  vessels  lie  i 

HOLLAND 
jiile.  Here  th< 
The  harbor  nm; 
halfway  betwe 
near  Conway  1 
at  the  west  end 
in  from  5  to  8  i'l 

On  the  bar  is 
in  with  a  ship  r 
piiiiited  white, 
murks  in  one,  v 
ff  ill  carry  a  ves! 
felt  should  not 
between  that  a 
tlio  port,  if  dri 
they  are  withni 
Ships,  oncoini 
There  is  sli^ 
of  water  in  coi 
complete  ihei 

Hill's  Towi 
the  outer 


bmken  oil' 
TnK  ('uu 

along  the  nc 
T'iikTii) 

gnmetimi'S 

tides,  the  waf 

from  the  no 


r 

i 

ai 

y ' 

lU' 

irt 

K.S 

ei 

( 

at 


GE.NHRAL 

The  N.  W 
the  inland  pa 
towards  the 
iniiy  safely  sti 
Cor|),  or  I  lei 

In  the  will 
of  Breton  Is 
be  I'cund  tow 

The  eastei 
tunre  up  tin 
have  nolhin:: 
Lmiishourg 
The  coast  c 
less  barren. 

The  N.  I''. 
deep,  except 
lait  from  ('n\ 
and  Scatara 
tla-r,  the  wa 
Capt.  Philip 


■I 


e«  of  the 
>  springs 

timber. 

allowing 

of  that 

'•i  W. 

merchant 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Savage  Hnrbor  is  fit  only  for  smnll  criifl,  and  has  a  bar  before  it. 

TRACADIE.or  BEDFORD  BAY,  hus  about  8  or  10  feet  of  water  on  the  bar,  which 
^{tenda  outward  hnlf  a  mile. 

HARRINGTON,  or  LITTLE  RASTICO,  admits  only  small  vessels;  it  communi- 
cates with  Ureat  Kastico,  or  Ilarria  Bay,  which  is  very  shallow  on  the  bur,  and  calculated 
10  admit  fishery  schooners  only.     The  bar  stretches  off  nearly  half  a  mile. 

NEW  LONDON,  or  GREENVILLE  BAY.has  about  B  or  10  feet  of  water,  but  the 
bar  iB  very  difficult,  and  the  channel  runs  in  west.  The  bar  extends  nearly  half  a  mile  out. 

RICHMOND  BAY,  or  MaLFEC,  is  a  spacious  harbor,  having  about  17  or  18  feet 
gpon  the  bar.  The  sands  which  form  the  bur  extend  more  than  a  mile  off  the  harbor. 
The  shoals  on  each  side  are  generally  discernible  from  the  swell  on  them,  and  the  course 
in  and  out  is  nearly  east  and  west.  On  a  vessel's  anchoring  outside  the  bar,  a  pilot  will 
conio  ofi'.  There  are  two  entrances  into  the  bay  ;  between  them  is  Fishery  Island.  The 
eastern  is  the  only  channel  by  which  a  vessel  of  burthen  con  enter,  the  western  channel 
being  very  shallow  and  intricate.  Vessels  usually  complete  their  landing  at  about  a  mile 
within  Fishery  Island,  but  a  considerable  current  runs  there.  The  anchorage  is  good 
,nJ  vessels  lie  in  perfect  safety. 

HOL  LA  N  D  HARBOR,  or  CASCUMPEC,  is  the  westernmost  harbor  on  the  north 
gide.  Here  the  sands  form  a  bar  as  at  Richmond  Bay,  and  run  ofl' about  a  mile  and  a  half. 
The  harbor  niny  easily  be  known  by  the  sand-hills  which  extend  along  the  coast ;  about 
halfway  between  the  entrance  of  Richmond  Bay  and  Holland  Harbor,  is  one  sand-hill, 
nearConwuy  inlet,  much  hijjher  than  the  rest.  Holland  Bay  may  ho  known  by  its  being 
at  the  west  end  of  all  the  raiigo  of  sand-hills.  There  is  good  anchorage  close  to  the  bar 
jnfroni  5  to  8  fathoms. 

On  the  bar  is  a  depth  of  18  feet  of  water.and  it  will  not  be  difficult  for  a  stranger  to  run 
in  with  a  ship  not  drawing  more  than  I'i  feet  of  water.  There  being  two  leading  marks, 
piiinted  white,  bmiring  W.  by  N.  by  compass,  a  vessel  of  this  draft,  by  keeping  the  two 
murks  in  one,  witii  a  loadiiii»  wiinl,  may  run  in  with  perfect  safety.  But  as  these  marks 
will  carry  a  vessel  over  the  south  tail  of  the  northern  sand,  vessels  drawing  more  than  12 
felt  should  not  vonturo  without  a  pilot.  Tlioro  is  a  buoy  on  the  end  of  the  south  sand  ; 
between  that  and  the  tail  of  the  north  shoal  there  are  18  feet  of  water.  Vessels  entering 
the  port,  ifdrawin;;  more  tiinri  Ti  feet  of  water,  should  not  bring  the  marks  in  one  till 
tlipynro  witinii  tlie  hay.  The  soundings  off  the  harbor  are  regular,  and  the  ground  clear. 
Siiips,  on  eomiin;  to  miclior  oil'  the  \ini;  will  immediately  he  attended  by  a  ])ilot. 

Tiiere  is  shoal  wii''(^r  between  tiie  outer  and  inner  harbor  on  which  are  about  14  feet 
of  water  in  common  tides.  Vessels  generally  load  to  1,3  feet  in  the  inner  harbor,  and 
ciiniplete  their  earijoes  in  the  outer  one.  In  the  former,  they  lie  alongside  a  wharf,  at 
Hill's  Town,  in  4  tiithoms  water,  where  they  lie  without  any  current,  as  in  a  dock.  In 
tjio  nuter  linrhor  the  spring  tide  runs  strongly,  but  the  water  is  smooth,  the  sea  being 
broken  otf  by  the  i)ar. 

TiiK  ('uuKKNTs  around  the  island  are  very  irregular,  frequently  running  many 
along  the  north  coast,  from  east  to  west,  and  at  other  times  from  west  to  east. 

TiiK  TioKS,  iiJHo,  in  the  north  side  ports,  are  irregular  excepting  spring  tides.  They 
goaietimcs  keep  (lowing  for  48  hours,  and  at  other  times  not  more  than  3.  In  common 
tides,  the  wafer  sehlom  rises  more  than  2  feet.  In  spring  tides,  (except  in  strong  winds 
from  the  northward  and  eastward.)  not  more  than  5  feet. 

GENKRAL  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   COASTS  OF  BRETON   ISLAND  &;c. 


95 


Tracadie,  or 
Bedford  Bay 
Harrington, 
or  Little 
Rastico. 
NewLmdon, 

Richmond 
Bay. 


Holland 
Harbor,  or 
Cascumpec. 


Currents. 
Tides. 


The  N.  W.  ( 'oast  of  Breton  Island,  nil  along  from  Cape  North  to  Cape  Linzee,  is,  in- 
the  inland  parts  of  the  country,  very  high;  hut,  in  some  places,  it  falls  down  gradually 
towards  the  sliore.  Sailing  along  on  this  side  of  the  island,  from  the  northward,  you 
iniiy  safely  stand  in  to  the  distance  of  two  leagues  from  shore,  until  you  arrive  off  Justau 
Corp,  or  Henry  Ishiinl,  when  you  may  stand  within  one  mile  of  the  shore. 

In  the  winter  s-eason,  when  the  weather  is  mild,  the  S.  E.,  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  shores 
of  Hreton  Ishind  ahound  with  all  sorts  offish  ;  and  plenty  of  lobsters  and  oysters  are  to 
be  I'eund  towards  Prinen  Edward  Island,  especially  in  Hillsborough  Bay. 

The  eastern  extremity  of  Breton  Island  appears,  on  the  sea  shore,  and  to  some  dis- 
timre  up  the  country,  barren  and  rocky;  and  the  tops  of  the  hills,  being  much  alike, 
liiive  nothiii;;  reniMrUal)lo  to  distinguish  them.  The  ruins  of  the  lighthouse  and  town  of 
Lenisbourg  serve,  however,  to  |)oint  out  that  part  of  the  island  on  which  they  stand. 
The  coast  continues  rocky  on  the  shore,  with  a  few  hanks  of  red  earth,  which  appear 
less  l)arren. 

The  N.  E.  const  of  Breton  Island,  from  Capo  North  to  Capo  Ensum6,  the  water  is 
deep,  exre[)t  very  near  file  shore.  From  (!apo  Ensuiiu!  to  Cajjo  Dauphin  is  high  land, 
hut  from  (.'ape  Dauphin  to  Seatara  Island  it  becomes  rather  low.  Between  port  St.  Anno 
anil  Seatara  Islaml,  a  vessel  may  stand  in  shore  to  15,  10,  and  ')  fatlionis,  in  clear  wea- 
tlier,  file  water  cradually  decreasing  in  depth.  The  following  soundings  were  taken  by 
Capt.  Philip  Aldridge,  on  making  Cape  North: 


96 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Soundings. 


LiititudB  40  50    Loiigitudo    59  50 92  futhoms,  bliink  mud, 


■  40  57 
■47  I 
■47  10 


3'J  57 85     ditto, 


ditto. 


5t)  6f) 95     ditto,  rocky  bottoin, 

)8  47 100     ditto,  Hinitll  ri*d  Htoiiog, 


Blanckerotte,      BLANtMlKROTTK,  or  WHITE  CLIKK.— On  tlii^  smitli  const  of  IJ 
or\VhiUCL\ff  mnrkiiblH  cliil'  of  whitish  oiirlh.    Four  milns  to  tho  wcstwiinl  of  it  is  ii  hiiimII  woody  isii, 


>  in  ton  is  a  re- 


lying III  tho  distiiiico  of  two  iiiilns  from  xhoi-o,  and  otf  the  littlo  hiirlior  cidlod  St.  K 
Witliout  this  i;<iuiid,  lit  tii«  distiinco  of  u  inilu  and  n  half,  on  tlio  S.  I ).  is  a  hruakttr. 


lid, 
«prit. 


Tho  land  licnci'  to  the  Islo  of  Madaino,  or  ItiLdimoiid,  is  gi-ncrally  low.     It 
several  lianks  of  brif^ht  rod  tnirth,  with  boachos  botwi-en  tliom.     Albion  Clilf.  on  ti 
8i( 


lu  of  .Madanio,  is  rocky,  roinarkably  high,  and  procijjitous.     On  lliu  S.  W.  side 
island  is  tho  soltloniont.  calked  Anudiat. 


presents 
'  south 
of  this 


In  tho  description  of  tho  iJut  of  Canso,  alroady  ^ivoii,  (paj:o  91,)  wo  liavo  noticed  the 

On  proci-eiling  towards  this  strait,  it  slionid  bo  i 
'  o  Novu  Scotia  sido.  aro  surroundod  with  many  li 


coasts 
marked  tiiat  tho  Islos  of  Canso, 
white  rocks  and  broakcrs.     Tho  soiitl 


re- 
ow 


Jeslico,  or 
Port  Hood. 


St.  Annc^s 
Harbor. 


shoro  of  (Micdabucto  Bay  is  iron  bound  and  steon 
to.     Its  north  shoro  consists  of  rod  dill's  and  bouclios. 

Oil'  tho  Out  of  Cimso,  from  the  southern  entrunco  northward,  the  wostctrn  shore 
throughout,  is  high,  rocKy,  and  st(M'p;  tho  eastern  shore  low,  with  beaches.  Fnnu  thu 
north  end  of  the  gut,  the  eastern  shore  to  .lestico,  or  Port  Hood,  is  distinguished  by  hjj^ii 
rocky,  red  clitl's.  The  opposite  shore  has  several  remarkable  dills  of  gypsum,  or  iihistlir' 
which  appear  extremely  white.  Cape  St.  George  is  iron  bound  and  very  iiigh,  its  sununit 
being  AM  f>'et  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

JESTICO,  or  poll  I'  HOOD,  situate  on  the  western  side  of  Breton  Island,  is  u  side 
harbor  for  frigates  with  any  wind;  tiie  anchoraf;e  is  in  from  4  to  5  fathoms,  mud  and  sandy 
bottom.  Here  you  may  get  both  wooil  am!  water.  The  leading  mark  going  in,  js  Cupg 
Linzee  on  wiih  the  highest  sand-hills  that  are  on  the  i\.  N.  E.  side  of  the  bench,  beiirine 
N.  by  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  These  kept  in  a  line  will  lead  you  dear  of  Spitheail,  in  4  to  6 
fathoms.  On  the  opposite  shore  is  along  and  broad  flat,  sirelchiiig  from  the  siiore  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile,  called  the  Dean,  to  which  coim.'  no  nearer  than  in  4  fathoms.  From 
hence  the  shore  runs  nearly  in  a  straight  N.  E.  direction  to  Cape  St.  Laurent,  whence  it 
turns  easterly  to  Cape  North.  During  the  wholeof  this  distance  tliere  is  no  harlior  of  note, 
but  several  salmon  rivers.  To  the  southward  of '"ape  North,  four  or  live  miles,  is  Ashpee 
ilnrbor.  where  there  is  a  settlement  formed  for  the  reliel'of  shipwrecked  seamen,  and  to 
the  southward  (d'tliat,  at)out  ;>0  miles,  is  the  entrance  to  St.  Anne's  iiarijor. 

ST.  ANNE'S  HARBOR,  situate  on  tlie  N.  E.  side  of  the  island,  was  called  by  the 
FreiK  h,  when  in  their  possession  Foil  Dauphin,  and  is  a  very  safe  and  spacious  lia'rhor. 
It  has  but  a  narrow  entiaiice,  and  carries  4A  fathoms  at  low  water,  uiild  you  jniii  tlie  licncli. 
Wiien  in  mid  cliannd,  you  Will  have  !' to  10  fatlM)ms,  and  in  the  limh.ir  fi'om  5  lo  U)  taili- 
oms,  nniddy  bottom.  On  the  north  side  the  laml  is  very  iiii;h,  and  sliips  of  war  may  lie 
BO  near  to  the  sliore.  that  a  water  hose  may  rea(di  the  fresh  water,  and  a  ship  may  be  loaduil 
in  (ine  day,  from  a  cascade  which  runs  from  the  top  of  the  rock. 

For  more  particular  directions  for  St.  Anne's  Harbcu'.  you  will  observe  as  follow^  - 
After  you  have  passed  the  Siboux  or  Ilerford  Isles,  on  the  ea-t  side  of  the  entrai. 
keep  the  south  sliore  on  board,  if  the  wind  be  to  the  .S.  E.  and  a-i  you  approach  I'ms.-^h^u 
Point  bring  Cape  EusumO.  or  Cape  .Smoke,  wlii(di  lies  to  the  northwani,  nearly  on  wiili 
Black  Point.  Steer  with  these  marks  in  one,  until  you  are  nearly  abreast  of  l'assiii;t; 
Point,  olf  which  lies  a  sunken  rock  of  (j  feet  water,  and  opposite  to  winch  iie^iii-*  the  spit 
of  .St.  Anne's  Flat,  and  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel.  Now  keep  a  small  luiimiioik 
up  in  the  country,  nearest  to  the  shelving  his:l»  land  to  the  westward  (d' it,  wiiicdi  huia- 
mock  is  on  the  middle  land  from  the  water-side,  in  a  line  over  the  lishing-hur,  or  fisliiai;- 
Blage  erected  on  the  beach.  This  will  lead  in  the  best  water,  until  you  enter  tln^  ellnw 
part  of  the  beach.  When  advanced  thus  far  in,  keep  the  opening  open,  ^aboiit  the  si/e 
of  two  gun-ports.)  which  makes  its  appearance  u|)  the  .S.  W.  arm.  'J'lns  oiieiiing  looks 
like  two  steep  dill's,  with  the  sky  n()pearing  between  them,  an  I  will  lead  yon  ijetweeii  the 
beach  and  the  south  shore,  in  mid  channel,  through  !)  and  1 1»  f itlioms.  an  I  past  tlii!  In mh 
point,  o!''  which  a  s|)it  stretches  to  the  S.  W.  about  'J  c.ililes'  |in.;lh.  Having  |)assed  thid 
spit,  con",eto  anchor  in  either  sido  of  the  harbor,  in  from  .0  to  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom, 
and  sheltered  from  all  winds. 
LaBrcu  d'Or  LA  BRAS  D'OR. —  1  his  place  has  hitherto  remained  unknown,  ainl  unfrequented, 
but  having  recently  boon  visited  by  nniny  vcsscds  in  lh(!  timber  trade,  some  d -scription 
may  be  ntcepialde.  It  appears,  from  tin-  (diarts.  fliere  are  Iwo  entrances  to  this  l.ike  or 
inlet,  the  Northern,  or  (ireat  Enlrarice,  and  llie  .'^oiilherii,  uy  Litth"  EiitiMiico ;  they  aro 
thus  d<!scribcd  by  Mr.  Tlionias  Kelly,  tht!  (Oily  pilot  i  f  Hie  |i!.ue:  but  tlie  nuiiies  ni'ihu 
places  ho  rofers  to  uro  generally  unktiowii,  and  cannot  ho  apjdied  lo  any  publ.catiou 
extiiut. 


SAIM50  DiRI 

junl  must  give 
eautern  end  of  t 
,„  uiie.  Make  I 
oil'oint  Noir;  I 
Head  over  M'K 
flood  must  kee 
,iJe  of  the  tlut, 
l(„e|)  the  fair  sti 
■(  t'litlioins,  good 
(.jn'sHead;  nm 
nine  tree,  on  tin 
will  then  make 
jlioids  on  tho  is 
jhoiil  lire  a  whi 
western  end. 
there  being  no 
doubling  tho  Ri 
you  bring  Mr. 
is  tt  depth  offrc 

DiHK.CTIONS 
TO  WllOOKAMA 

Isliind  to  avoid 
western  end  of 
Island.    Then 
Head;  when  i 
shoal  lying  on 
Ureen  Beoch, « 
ijench.     You  ' 
d  the  Narrow 
ciiine  to  tho  v 
iibreast  of  the  1 
Of  thk  An 
Cove,  where  j 
centre  of  the 
Island  a  hand 
Oa  tho  north 
Islands,  and  t<: 
w.irdid'thesai 
tlie  Big  llarbi 
any  time." 

SKT'rl.NO  OF 

northward 
clianiiel,  a 
whicli  occa 
eildies  on  i 
first  qiiartt 
chaiiii: 
ebl),  aiirl  on 
E.  wiii'ls  111. 
\V.  winds  u 
feet,  niil.'ss 

SVDNE 
St.  Aanc.  i-i 
remdar,  from 
i;oMig  ill,  a  li 
elevated  KiO 

Knterin  . 
wlieii  you  w 
perfectly  saff 

111  the  iniu 
to,  hut  Sydiit 
B-acli  Point 
any  depth  y( 

The  hari.i 
9  miles  ah(iv( 
miles  al  Of 
ongiuo  III  ll 


di 

nd 

isio 
acl 
e 

-N. 
t  I 
ak 
nl 
al 
V 


ti 


Mi 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


97 


Sailing  Di- 
rections. 


,\  .s»';  »n. 


Directions, 
St.  Patrick's 
Channel. 


Saiuno  Dirfxtionh  fob  the  Grand  Bras  d'Or  Entrancr. — "Ships  from  tho  i*outh- 
^nrd  must  gwe  Point  le  (-onio  h  l)erth  of  about  two  miles,  niul  steer  from  thenco  fo'  the 
eautern  end  of  the  iimide  Bin!  Island,  until  you  bring  M'K«u/Je  Point  iind  Cory's  bench 
inoiiH-     Miiko  for  tho  Bliick  Kock  Point  until  you  hiive  Messrs.  Dulfus's  store  just  open 
oi  I'oint  Noir;  then  steer  for  Gooseberry  Beach,  until  you  bring  u  clearing  on   Duncan's 
'8  a  re-    S  Heii'l  "ver  M'Konzie's  Point.     It  is  to  be  observed,  that  ships  coming  in  with  the  tido  of 
y  island      «  (Iwti  must  keep  Point  Noir  well  aboanl,  to  avoil  the  eddy  and  whirlpools  on  the  north 
''^spiit!  jiJe  of  the  (}ut,  which  has  various  settings.      Vou  must  then  steer  for  Point  .lano.  to 

keep  the  fair  strenjii  of  tide  as  far  as  Round  Cove,  where  there  is  fair  ondiorage  in  7  or 
prosents  M'uthoms,  good  holding  ground.     When  abreast  of  the  Round  Cove,  steer  over  for  Dun- 

'«  siiuth  can's  Head;  and  when  abreiiatof  this  Head,  steer  for  Long  Beach,  until  you  bring  u  tall 

"  uf  this  iiiii"  "■"''•  ""  ^'"^  Upper  Seal  Island,  in  one  with  a  notch  or  valley  in  tho  mountain.     You 

^^illthen  make  for  the  point  of  llio  Upper  >oal  Island,  which  will  carry  you  clear  of  the 
'^K-'ed  the  jliuajs  on  tho  islands,  as  also  the  South  Shoal,  or  Middle  (iround.     '1  he  marks  for  this 

''0  re-  jlioid  are  a  white  rock  in  tho  bank  for  the  eastern  end,  and  a  white  birch  tree  for  the 

""ly  low  western  end.     When  abreast  tlie  western  end  of  this  shoal  you  may  keep  the  middle, 

J  steup  there  being  no  difficulty  uniil  you  come  to  Rod  Head.     If  bound  to  Kent  Harbor,  after 

doubling  the  Red  Head,  steer  for  a  rennirkable  nnl  bank  covered  with  small  bushes  until 
>*hore,  you  bring  Mr.  DuHus's  house  entirely  open  of  the  beach  which  is  on  the  island.     There 

rum  111,!  19  a  de|)th  of  from  4  to  5  fathoms  in  this  harbor,  and  good  holding  ground." 

'.V  llif;ll,  DlHK.CTIONS  FOR  THAT   ARM  OF  THK   LaKK   CALLED    St.  PatKICK'b   CHANNEL,  AND  UP 

■  piaster,  to  Wuookamauh. — "  Kroin  Red  Head  you  will  steer  well  over  for  the  Dukn  of  Kent's 

'  wuMiiiiit  Islntid  to  avoid  a  iiud  shoal  which  runs  olf  from  M'Kny's  Point.     When  abresist  ef  tho 

wp8t<M'n  end  of  the  Duke  of  Kent's  Island,  sail  for  Wnssaback  Head  until  abreast  of  Stony 

is  II  siile  Isliind.     Then  steer  for  Cranberry  Head,  so  as  to  clear  a  shoal  lying  off  from  Wassaback 

nd  siiiidy  Head;  when  abreast  of  Cranl)erry  Point,  sheer  well  over  for  tho  Bell  Rock,  to  avoid  a 

'^*  '^'ape  jlioal  lying  on  tho  south  side  of  the  channel.     When  abreast  of  tho  Bell  Rock,  steer  for 

'  beiirina  (Jreen  Beach,  observing  to  keep  Bakdock  River  shut  in  until  you  are  well  up  with  Green 

'iencli.     You  will  tlien  steer  for  a  boach  on  tho  south  shore,  until  you  cross  the  opening 

d' tho  Narrows;  you  may  then  sail  through  tho  Narrows,  keeping  the  middle  until  you 

come  to  tho  western  end,  when  you  must  haul  round  the  southern  shore  (boiich)  until 

abreast  of  tho  Pliiister  Clilfs;  you  are  then  clear  of  all,  and  in  tho  Wodkaniiigli  Luke." 

Ok  the  Anchoraue  throuhh  the  Bras  d'Ur. — The  first  anchoni^o  is  tho  Round 
Cove,  where  you  may  riile  in  7  or  H  fathoms.  You  may  ntichor  in  j  or  (i  fathoms,  in  the 
cpntre  of  the  harbor,  on  a  middlo  ground;  tho  marks  for  which  uro  to  bring  tho  Table 
Isliuul  a  handspike's  length  open  of  Black  Rock  Point  and  Point  Jane  bearing  N.  W. 
Oil  tiie  north  side  of  the  harbor  there  is  good  anchorage  ns  far  up  as  the  Lower  Seal 
[shuitis,  and  to  the  (■;i-irward  of  the  Upper  Seal  Islands,  in  5  fathoms,  and  to  the  west- 
ward nf  the  same  islii.  in  7  fathinns.  There  is  no  othor  place  of  anchorage  from  this  to 
tiio  Bi<;  Harbor,  where  you  may  rido  in  7  or  8  fathoms;  from  thence  you  may  anchor  at 
anytime." 

Skttino  of  the  Tide  in  Grand  Bras  d'Or. — 'The  first  quarter  (lood  sets  from  the  Tide. 
northward,  directly  over  the  shnnl.  Last  fpii«rter  W.  S.  W.  boin^  directly  through  the 
chiiiiiiel,  and  nieelini;  witli  the  tide  coming  ii\<'r  the  shoal*,  sets  towards  the  IJlnck  Point, 
whii'li  (iccasions  it  to  shoot  n(!russ  the  Gut.  Miiir  a  number  of  whirlpools  and  strong 
eddies  on  each  sideof  llie  chiuiiiel,  which  slm  woorthrc-  'nnes  during  tin-  tide,  'i'he 
first  t|iiarfer  ebb  sets  o\  •■  the  shoal  to  tlie  nurti;  ard ;  last  ij  irtor  directly  tiiiiMii;h  the 
cliiniiiel. — N.  B.  Tlie  t  I"  ol'  ebb  is  the  tjiirest  sc:  ng  tide.  Tlio  tide  runs  in  'iitil  half- 
ebb,  and  out  until  half-lloixl,  in  regular  tiii^s;  bnf  liie  winds  make  ajireat  alteration,  N. 
E.  winds  making  higli  tides,  and  S.  W.  neajiing  them.  Al-o  tiib-s  rui.ninij;  out  \n  ith  S. 
W.  winds  until  higli  wat(ir,  and  in  until  low  water  with  N.  E.  winds.  Tides  rise  four 
I'eef,  nnl.'ss  all'ected  by  witwls.     High  water  t    n  minutes  past  8  o'cl  "-V,  full  and  change." 

SVDNIOY   UMvMDK,  the  entiaiico  to  w   lich  lies  4  leagues  to  the  S.    K.  of  that  of 
St.  Anne,  i-i  another  exi'i'ljent  liirbor,  having.:  -iafe  mid  secure  entrance,  \v    ii  soundings 
reijular,  from  sea,  in  5  fatiionis.     (Jii  a  low  poiir  which  you  leave  on  your  .   iboard  hand 
iioin;:  in,  a  lialilhonse  painted  red  and  whit(»  veit    ally,  is  erected,  showing  u  fixed  light,  Lighthouse. 
elevated  KiO  fee*,  above  tho  level  of  tho  sea. 

Entering  the  i  arbor,  give  the  |)oint  a  berth  of  one-third  'it'a  milt!.  wA  steer  W.  .S.  W. 
when  you  will  have  from  7  to  1)  fathoms  water.     Wiliiin  tiiy  point  the  slioro  is  bold  and 


Anchorage. 


High  water. 

Sydney  Har- 
bor. 


perfei^tly  safe. 


In  th 


iner  part  of  the  e 


n^la'K" 


Beach  Point  and  Ij 


:;o,  on  the  south  side,  are  steep 


fo,  but  Sydney  Flats,  on  thi    oppisiio  sid(>,  are  regular  to  4  fathoms.      When  i)ast  thi 


I].' 


ii  Point,  yon  iiviv  run  ui) 


ihe  I  iver  Darfinouth  to  the  S.  W.  and  come  to  anchor  in 


any  di'piti  you  please,  to  .'>  an  '  10  ♦'.ithoiiis,  a  tine  muddy  li^ttom 


The  harbor  of  Nortli  Sydn 
above  tlie  li^iith 


,'l 


tl 


\(<  Ves:il 


Is  iir 


e  lull 


I  with  coal  bv  liirhiers,  lies 


111  till!  north  side  of  th 


Th 


0  coal  IS  o 


)bli 


dtl 


iroo 


miles  III. 0.0  the  TilIi  house,  on  the  sai 


no  side  oi 


th 


o  river  as 


tho  town.     There  is  a  sfain 


on; 


;ine  at  tho  coal  inines,  with  throo  very  tall  chimneys,  the  smoke  of  which  can  bo 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


// 


is. 


L/j 


1.0 


1.1 


1.25 


If  1^  1^ 

12.0 


1.4 


18 


^f 


Va 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


'i3  WEST  MAIN  ST»«8T 

WIBSr-ra,*' Y    ICJW 

(716)  875  450a 


^'W<.'"^^ 


^.Sf 


\ 


V 


•^ 


<i^^. 


98 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tide: 


Bridgeport 
Harbor. 


High  water. 
Murgain,  or 
Cow  Bay. 


Scatara  Isl- 
and. 


Lighthouse. 


Louisbourg 
Harbor. 


Lighthome, 


OabarusBay 


Chedabucto 
Bay. 

Fox  Island 
Anchorage. 


Grow  Harbor, 


seen  8  or  9  milea  at  aea  on  a  clear  day.    The  tide  in  the  harbor  flows  at  9h.  and  rises  6 
feet. 

West  of  Sydney  Harbor  are  Indian  Bay  and  Windham  River,  both  places  of  anchoraije 
and  fit  fur  vessels  lo  run  into.  ^  ' 

BRIDGEPORT  HARBOR,  formerly  LINGAN.— The  leading  marlts  for  entering 
the  harbor  are,  the  end  of  the  sand-beach  and  Roach's  Farm-house  in  a  line.  Roacli's 
Farm  may  be  easily  distinguished,  being  the  only  one  that  presents  a  group  of  bulldiuag. 
which  are  also  situated  on  higher  ground  than  any  of  the  rarms  on  the  north  side  of  the 
harbor. 

The  cliffs  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  bay  are  precipitous,  but  not  more  than  30  to  50 
feet  high ;  and  the  land  covered  with  wood,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  clearing  on  the 
eastern  point,  and  is  covered  with  spruce  and  fir  trees. 

From  Flint  Island,  the  North  Head  bears  N.  W.  i  W.  by  compass,  distant  11  miles. 

A  pilot  can  always  be  had  by  making  the  usual  signal. 

There  are  11  feet  of  water  in  the  shallowest  part  of  the  mid-channel  at  high  water,  neap 
tides,  and  13  feet  at  spring  tides. 

At  full  moon  and  change  it  is  high  water  in  the  channel  at  half  past  eight  o'clock. 

MURGAIN,  or  COW  BAY,  at  the  northern  point  of  which  is  Flint  Island.  There 
is  a  passage  between  this  island  and  the  main,  with  14  fathoms  water,  but  this  should  be 
adopted  with  the  greatest  caution,  on  account  of  the  numerous  rocks  underwater  that  are 
scattered  about:  this  bay  is  open  to  the  north-eastward,  and  its  further  end  is  encum- 
bered with  an  extensive  shallow  flat,  which  dries  at  low  water. 

Miray  Bay  is  to  the  southward,  and  its  entrance  is  bounded  by  Cape  Murgain  and  the 
Island  of  Scatara;  the  bay  is  wide,  and  runs  in  three  leagues,  branching  off  at  its  upper 
part  into  two  rivers;  there  is  deep  water  within  it,  from  20  to  6  fathoms,  and  clear  from 
dangers,  but  it  affords  no  shelter  for  shipping. 

SCATARA  ISLAND  lies  in  about  the  latitude  of  46°  north;  its  length  E.  and  W.is 
nearly  3  leagues,  and  its  breadth  about  one :  it  is  separated  from  Cape  Breton  by  a  chan- 
nel into  Miray  Bay,  but  this  is  too  hazardous  for  strangers,  and  frequented  only  by  those 
coasters  who  are  well  acquainted  with  its  dangers. 

On  the  N.  E.  point  of  this  island  there  is  a  lighthouse,  white,  containing  a  revolving  light 
90  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  visible  one  minute,  invisible  half  a  minute. 

Ships  should  not  approach  this  light  on  any  bearing  between  N.  N.  £.  or  S.  E.  by  S. 
or  run  nearer  than  within  two  miles. 

LOUISBOURG  HARBOR  is  situated  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Cape  Breton,  to  the  west- 
ward of  Scatara  Island,  and  is  very  easy  of  access;  you  may  be  soon  in,  and  you  may  Uke- 
wise  be  soon  out,  if  you  please.  In  doing  so,  be  careful  to  avoid  the  Nag's  Head,  a  sun- 
ken rock  on  the  starboard  hand  going  in.  The  east  part  of  the  harbor  is  the  safest.  On 
the  east  head,  and  on  the  site  of  the  old  French  lighthouse,  a  lighthouse  15  feet  high, 
showing  J  fixed  light,  has  been  erected;  it  is  painted  white  with  a  perpendicular  black 
stripe  on  each  side.  The  inhabitants  consist  of  a  few  fishermen  only.  Water  is  plenty 
here,  but  wood  is  scarce.  The  Nag's  Head  Rock  lies  nearly  one-third  from  the  light- 
house point,  and  has  no  more  than  3  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  The  larboard  side  going  in 
is  the  boldest.  * 

GABARUS  BAY. — From  the  entrance  of  Louisbourg  to  Guion  Isle,  called  also  Port 
land  Isle,  the  course  is  S.  W.  by  W.  and  the  distance  more  than  3  leagues.  Between 
lies  the  bay  called  Gabarus  Bay,  which  is  spacious,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  20  to  7  fath- 
oms. Off  the  south  point  of  this  bay,  called  Cape  Portland,  lie  the  Cormorants,  a  number 
of  islets  and  rocks,  which  are  dangerous.  About  4  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Gabarns 
Bay  is  the  Forked  Harbor,  a  narrow  winding  inlet,  where  small  vessels  may  run  into,  ond 
lie  land-locked.  And  five  miles  S.  Westward  of  this  is  the  remarkable  white  cliff,  nlreaiiy 
noticed,  and  called  Cape  Blancherotte.  The  shore  now  winds  to  the  westward,  to  Capo 
Hinchinbroke  and  the  Isie  of  Madame. 

CHEDABUCTO  BAY  is  wide  and  spacious;  it  is  bold  to  on  both  shores,  and  iVee 
from  danger:  on  its  southern  side,  which  is  high  and  nearly  straight,  are  Fox's  Islcnd  and 
Crow  Harbor.     Fox's  Island  is  small,  and  lies  near  the  shore. 

FOX  ISLAND  Anchoiiige  is  one  of  the  greatest  mackerel  fisheries  in  North  America, 
during  the  months  of  September  and  October.  When  sailing  in  you  must  pass  to  the 
westward  of  Fox  Island,  giving  it  a  berth  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  as  there  are  rocks  both 
above  and  under  woter,  with  3  and  4  fathoms  close  to  them.  You  may  anchor  in  from  4 
to  10  fathoms,  with  the  west  end  of  the  island  bearing  from  E.  N.  E.  to  N.  N.  E.  keeping 
about  midway  between  the  island  and  the  main.  The  water  shoals  gradually  to  the  bar, 
which  extends  from  the  ibiand  to  the  opposite  shore ;  it  has  not  more  than  G  or  7  feet  on 
its  deepest  part,  and  dries  in  one  place  about  one-third  of  the  distance  from  the  island  tu  tlio 
main;  with  northerly  and  with  westerly  winds,  the  fishing  vessels  rido  to  the  eastward  of 
it  in  from  two  to  four  fathoms,  and  shift  to  the  westward  with  easterly  winds. 

CROW  HARBOR  is  situated  on  the  south  side  of  Chedabucto  Bay,  and  is  capable 
of  containing  ships  of  war  of  the  6tb  and  Stb  rates,  merchant  ships,  See.    Many  schoou- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

tri  and  sloops  resort  here  in  the  months  of  July  and  August,  to  take  mackerel  and 

btrringSt    The  passage  in  is  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  island  that  lies  in  the  entrance.     On  the 

loath  side  of  the  beach  a  beacon  is  erected,  to  lead  ships  clear  of  the  Curbyn  Rocks. 

Keej'  '''*^  beacon  in  a  line  with  a  remarkable  tree  upon  the  high  land,  and  it  will  lend  you  Beacon. 

ilso  clear  of  the  Rook  Island  Rock,  that  lies  25  fathoms  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Rook 

Isluiid. 

MILFORD  HAVEN,  or  the  Harbor  of  Guysborout^h.  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  is  im-  Milford 
peded  by  a  bar,  but  a  sloop  of  war  may  pass  over  it.  Within  the  bar  vessels  lie  in  per-  Haven. 
j^ct  security ;  the  tide,  however,  sets  in  and  out  with  great  rapidity.  The  town  is  at 
present  a  place  of  little  trade ;  but  it  is  protected  by  a  battery.  A  little  to  the  southward 
of  Guysborough  is  Salmon  River,  which  rises  a  considerable  way  up  the  country,  and 
contributes  to  fertilize  an  extensive  tract  of  good  land.  From  Manchester  round  the  north 
shore  of  Chedabucto  Bay,  the  shores  are  full  of  settlements,  and  wear  a  pleasing  aspect, 
and  on  the  northern  side  of  Chedabucto  Bay,  you  will  see  several  red  cliffs ;  this  shore  is 
gaudy,  with  regular  soundings  in  the  middle  of  the  bay ;  the  water  is  deep,  from  25  to  35, 
(k.  to  50  fathoms. 

At  Milford  Haven,  it  is  high  water  full  and  change  at  S^lh.,  and  the  common  spring  Tidu. 
tides  rise  8  feet.     At  the  Bay  of  Rocks  at  8^h.,  rising  7  and  8  feet;  and,  at  the  Gut  of 
CgDSO,  at  8ih.,  common  spring  tides  rising  i}':  feet. 


99 


THE  SOrXHERIV  COAST  OF  I¥OTA  SCOTIA. 

CHEDABUCTO  BAY  TO  HALIFAX  HARBOR.  v 

Description  of  the  Land. — The  eastern  part  of  Nova  Scotia  is  broken  into  the  sev- 
eral islands  and  passages  as  represented  on  the  charts.  Of  the  Islands,  which  are  low  and 
".overed  with  stunted  fir-trees,  the  first  on  the  N.  E.  is  called  Durell's  Island,  the  second 
George  s  Island,  and  the  third,  Canso  or  St.  Andrew's  Island ;  outside  this  latter  island  is 
the  smaller  one,  called  Cranberry  Island,  which  is  now  distinguished  by  a  lighthouse,  88  Lighthouie. 
feet  high,  painted  red  and  white,  horizontally,  containing  two  fixed  lights. 

CAPE  C  ANSO  is  the  outer,  or  easternmost  point  of  St.  Andrew's  Island.  From  this  Cape  Cans». 
cape,  westward,  to  Torbay,  the  coast  makes  in  several  white  heads  or  points ;  here  the 
country  is  much  broken;  and  near  the  S.  E.  extremity  many  white  stones  appear  from 
the  of^ng.  like  sheep  in  the  woods.  During  a  southerly  gale  the  sea  is  dreadful  here. 
From  Torbay  to  Liscombe  Harbor  there  are  banks  of  red  earth  and  beaches ;  and  from 
LiscoTnbe  Harbor  to  the  Rugged  Islands,  (excepting  the  White  Isles,  which  are  white 
rocl(8,)  the  capes  and  outer  islands  are  bound  with  black  slaty  rocks,  generally  stretching 
out  in  spits  from  east  to  west ;  and  from  the  Rugged  Islands  to  Devil's  Island,  at  the  en- 
trance of  the  Harbor  of  Halifax,  there  are  several  remarkable  steep  red  cliffs,  linked  with 
beach. 

The  fishermen  of  Arachat  are  well  acquainted  with  the  channels  and  inlets  on  this  coast, 
and  frequent  them,  more  particularly  in  the  spring  and  full,  to  catch  mackerel  and  her- 
rings, of  which  large  shoals  commonly  resort  here :  but  the  rocks  are  so  numerous,  and 
the  passages  so  devious,  that  no  stranger  should  attempt  them. 

Of  the  many  rocks  hereabout,  the  outer  breaker,  called  the  Bass,  a  rock  of  3  feet  water, 
lies  more  than  2  miles  E.  i  S.  from  the  lighthouse  on  Cranberry  Island.  At  seven-tenths 
of  a  mile  S.  E.  from  Cape  Canso  is  a  similar  rock,  called  the  Roaring  Bull;  and,  at  one 
mile  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  the  latter,  there  is  said  to  be  another,  discovered  by  a  fisherman 
of  Canso,  in  1813 ;  hut  its  existence  seems  to  be  questionable. 

CANSO  HARBOR. — Sailing  from  the  westward  into  this  harbor,  so  soon  as  you  have  Canto  Har- 
passed  the  Roaring  Bull,  over  which  the  sea  generally  breaks,  run  for  Pitipas,  or  Red  bor. 
Head,  taking  care  when  above  the  Black  Rocks,  to  keep  them  open  of  the  rocky  islets  off 
Cnpe  Canso,  until  you  bring  Ghisgow  Head  and  the  north  end  of  Inner  Island  in  one,_ 
which  will  carry  you  above  Man-of-war  Rock;  then  steer  westerly,  being  careful  to  avoid 
Mackerel  Rock,  and  make  for  Burying  Island,  the  north  end  of  which  you  must  not  ap- 
proach nearer  than  to  have  a  depth  of  five  fathoms ;  then  anchor  to  the  north-westward 
of  it,  on  a  bottom  of  mud. 

St.  Andrew's  Passage,  leading  to  Glasgow  Harbor,  being  so  thickly  encumbered  with 
rocks,  can  only  be  navigated  by  those  who  are  well  acquainted  with  its  dangers. 

Coming  from  the  eastward,  pass  between  Cape  Canso  and  Cranberry  Island,  giving  the 
latter  a  sufficient  berth  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  stretches  to  the  southward  of  it,  and  steer 
for  Pitipns  Head,  as  before  directed.  The  Northern  Passage,  between  Durell's  and 
George's  Islands,  notwithstanding  its  narrowness,  yet  having  a  depth  of  water,  and  a  clear 
channel,  will  bo  found  to  be  the  best  passage.  In  sailing  in,  keep  mid-channel  between  Bald 
sad  Net  Rocks,  the  former  being  above  water,  and  the  latter  drying  at  one-quarter  ebb, 


wmm 


100 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


WhiU 
Haven 


Torbay. 


when  you  may  steer  with  safety  by  attending  to  the  chart,  and  the  situation  of  Burying 
High  Water.  Island.     At  Cape  Canso  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  50  minutes  after  8  o'clock 
and  the  tides  ride  from  5  to  8  feet.  ' 

Dover  Bay.  DOVER  BAY  is  a  wild  deep  indent,  with  a  number  of  islands  and  sunken  rocks  at  its 
head  :  yet  shelter  may  be  found  on  the  western  shore,  or  during  a  south-east  gnle,  by  ah. 
ing  n  berth  to  the  rocks  that  lie  off  the  south  end  of  Big  Dover  Island ;  these  are  very  vis- 
ible in  bad  weather;  haul  up  under  the  island,  and  anchor  between  the  small  islands  on 
the  eastern  side  ;  within  these  islands  Little  Dover  Passage  continues  out  south-eastward 
having  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms  water,  and  quite  safe.  ' 

Eastward  of  Little  Dover  is  St.  Andrew's  Channel,  forwhich  no  directions  can  Le  given 
for  even  those  who  are  well  acquainted  with  the  navigation,  cannot  keep  themselves  clear 
of  the  rocks.  This  channel  leads  to  Glasgow  Harbor,  which  is,  in  fact,  a  part  of  Canso 
Harbor. 

These  places,  says  Mr.  Lockwood,  deserve  notice,  as  they  may  afford  shelter  in  cases 
of  emergency,  and  in  war  lime  are  nests  for  privateers;  while  from  the  heights  adjacent 
may  be  had  an  extensive  view  of  whatever  passes  in  the  Ofhng. 
Raspberry  RASPBERRY  HARBOR  is  to  the  westward  of  that  of  Canso,  or  Port  Glasgow :  it 

Harbor.  is  small,  and  the  shore  is  within  quite  bold.    At  the  entrance,  on  the  eastern  side,  is  an 

island,  having  a  ledge  close  to  it  on  the  S.  E.  By  rounding  this  ledge,  you  may  steer  di- 
rectly into  the  harbor,  and  come  to  an  anchor  under  the  island  which  lies  in  the  middle  of 
it,  in  the  depth  of  7  fathoms,  where  you  will  ride  safely.  The  country  here  is  rocky 
and  barren,  and  there  is  a  quarry  of  granite,  much  in  request  for  millstones.  Tlie 
outlet  betweeu  Raspberry  Island  and  the  main  is  a  complete  dock,  where  vessels  can  Insh 
themselves  to  both  shores,  and  ride  in  30  feet  water;  but  halfway  through  it  has  only  lo 
feet. 

WHITE  HAVEN,  which  is  two  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Raspberry  Harbor,  is  a 
place  of  hideous  aspect.  Of  its  rocky  islets,  the  larger  and  outer  otic,  culled  White  Head, 
from  the  color  of  its  sides,  is  70  feet  obove  the  level  of  the  sea.  This  islet  appears  round 
and  smooth,  and  is  a  useful  mark,  as  the  passage  in,  on  either  side,  is  in  n)id-cliannel,  not 
difficult  to  navigate,  and  the  anchorage  is  good  througliout,  in  a  muddy  bottom.  Off  the 
head  are  two  breakers,  one  S.  S.  E.  and  tho  other  E.  by  S..  half  n  mile  olV. 

TORIJAY. — The  entrance  of  this  bay  is  formed  on  the  west  by  a  bold  headlimd,  called 
Berry  Head.  The  channel  in  is  between  this  head  and  tho  islands  to  the  eastward.  E. 
S.  E.  from  the  head,  and  south  of  George's  Island,  are  three  very  dangerous  rocks,  which 
do  not  break  when  the  sea  is  smooth.  Witliin  the  bay,  under  the  western  peninsula, 
there  is  excellent  anchorage,  in  from  (j  to  4  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  up  to  the  eastern 
part  of  the  bay;  there  is  also  anchorage  on  tho  western  side  of  the  hay,  in  from  7  to  3 
fatiioms,  sitiiilar  ground,  where  a  v(!ssol  may  lie  in  safety  during  any  gnle.  'J'he  adjacent 
lands  are  rcicky,  but  vessels  are  built  hero  of  from  40  to  120  tons,  which  are  employed  in 
tho  lisiiorics. 

The  principal  dangers  to  be  avoided  in  entering,  are  the  small  sunken  rocks  in  tho  ofling, 

which  in  smooth  water  do  not  break  ;  they  shi)uM  bo  left  to  the  eastward.     Witiiin  tlie 

bay  the  iinchoriigo  is  exct-llont,  in  a  muddy  bottom,  with  tho  exception  of  ii  few  spots  of 

rocks,  sJKsltered  from  every  wind. 

Torbay  to  Torbay  to  Country  lfirlii)r.--Frnm  Torbay.  westward,  to  Country  Harbor,  tlio  land,  in 

Country  general,  continues  rocky  and  sterile,  witii  deep  water  close  in,  but  regular  Houmliiigs  witli- 

Harhor.  out,  au'l  from  30  to  •_'()  tatlionis  of  watei'. 

Coddle's  Harbor,  which  is  .Tl  lengncs  to  the  westward  of  Berry  Head,  allbrds  sholtur 
to  small  vessels  only;  and  these  enter  on  tin*  eiistcrn  side  to  clear  the  breakiTs.  Thoro 
IS  a  dci'p  inlet,  ca  led  New  Harbor,  wliieh  lies  about  7  miles  from  tlie  isliimls,  and  cfiii- 
iicctcd  with  a  ctiain  of  extensive  lakes;  but  its  navigation  is  obstructed  by  a  ijar  across  its 
entrance,  and  it  is  open  to  southerly  winds. 
yeiP  Harbor.  NKW  HARBOR. — 'I'his  plact!  is  so  much  (ixposed,  tliat  ev(!n  .small  V(;ssels  which  ic- 
casion:illy  I'esort  there  in  the  (ishing  season,  are  under  the  necessity  of  leaving  it  the  mo- 
ment a  southerly  wind  arises. 

V    Jidanil  Harbor  lies  ln'twe(>n  Harbor  Island  and  the  main,  and  aOords  excellent  anclior- 

nge  on  a  bottom  of  mud ;  it  is  particularly  convenient  for  i;oing  to  sea  witli  iibiiost  any  wind. 

Isiiar's  1  liirbor  is  mi  the  uortli-eiist  side  of  Coutitrv  Harbor,  and  has  j^ood  hoi  ling  yrounil, 

with  snilirient  depth  id'  water  for  any  vessel.     Betweeu  Isaac's  Harbor  and  Harbor  Point 

the  sroiind  is  foul  ami  rocKy. 

Country  COU.NTKY  H.VKMOR.— The  fine  Imrbor,  called   Country  Harbor,  is  iiavi^nlilo  fur 

Harbor.  the  lar;:est  ships,  twelve  miles  from  its  entrance.     It  is,  at  present,  but  thinly  selilcd,  yet 

tiiero  are  reasons  for  hidieving  that,   in  consemii'uce    of  iniprovcnienls  in  the  iieiglibor- 

hood,  th(>  popnl;itioii  will  speedily  increase.      The  shores  are  bold  ;  the  ;inrlioriii;e  soft 

iiiud,  with  a  depth  of  l.'t  to  5  fillioiiis.     Mr.  L"r.'.'ifiri(l  has  s:iid  that,  "  no  piwition  in  Ilia 

province  is  more  advantam'ons  for  setilijrs  than  this  Imrbor ;  at  its  mouth  ilic  idands  all'iird 

shcdler  to  fishermen  and  small  vessels,  as  widl  as  the  means  of  erecting  llicir  sti"i;i.>s;  and 

tho  lishing  grounds,  at  a  short  distance  in  the  ofTiiig,  abound  in  halibut,  hmldock,  cud,  and 


mnmfmm^mm 


mmfi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


101 


frhatthey  term  the  bait  fishery;  that  is,  mackerel,  gasp  reux,  smelts,  dec.  Salmon  are 
plentiful  in  their  senson;  and,  but  for  the  improvident  use  of  this  valuable  addition  to  the 
means  of  subsistence,  would  continue  for  ages."  The  ledges  off  the  harbor  generally 
break,  and  between  them  are  deep  passages.  On  advancmg  from  the  eastward  there  are 
(WO  rocks  to  be  avoided,  which  lie  as  shown  on  the  charts ;  proceeding  inward,  you  should 
give  Green  Island  a  small  berth,  and  the  dangers  on  that  side  will  be  avoided.     The  rocks  / 

on  the  west  of  the  entrance,  named  Castor  and  Pollux,  are  above  water  and  bold  to. 
When  above  them  give  Cape  Mocodame  a  good  berth,  so  as  to  avoid  the  Bull,  a  dangerous 
sunken  rock,  that  breaks  in  rough  weather,  and  lies  about  half  a  mile  from  the  extremity 
of  the  cape.  The  black  rocks  are  partly  dry,  and  from  them  upwards,  there  is  no  dan* 
ger,  and  the  anchorage  is  good.  Vessels  entering  this  harbor,  must  use  the  utmost  cau- 
tion in  steering  between  the  ledges  and  rocks  which  are  scattered  about;  fortunately  they 
commonly  show  themselves  whenever  there  happens  to  be  any  sea ;  this  will  render  the 
entrance  less  difficult;  but  having  passed  the  Black  Ledge,  which  is  the  innermost  dan- 
ger, the  navigation  will  be  perfectly  bale  for  the  largest  fleet.  '1  he  tide  is  scarcely  to  be 
perceived,  except  when  in  the  spring  the  ice  and  snow  dissolve,  and  heavy  rains  are  pre- 
valent. At  the  entrance  of  Country  Harbor  it  is  high  water  on  full  and  change  at  8h.  40.  Hightoater. 
Tides  rise  from  6  to  9  feet. 

FISHERMAN'S  HARBOR. — In  entering  this  place  between  Cape  Mocodame  and  Fisherman't 
the  Black  Ledge,  great  care  must  always  be  taken,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Bull  Rock,  Harbor. 
which  dries  at  low  water,  but  is  covered  at  high  water,  and  only  breaks  when  the  weather 
if  bad. 

HARBOR  ISLAND.->-The  islands  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance.  Green  Island,  Harbor  Ttl- 
Goose  Island,  and  Harbor  Island,  or  the  William  and  Augustus  Islands,  of  Des  Barres,  and. 
are  low  and  covered  with  scrubby  trees.     Within  Harbor  Island  is  excellent  anchorage. 

BICKERTON  HARBOR,  to  the  westof  Fisherman's  Harbor,  is  fitfor  small  vessels  BickerUm 
only.    At  two  miles  to  the  west  of  it  is  Hollin's  Harbor,  a  place  of  shelter  for  coasters.  Harbor. 
and  resorted  to  by  the  fishermen.     Indian  Harbor  is  a  shallow  and  unsafe  creek,  but  has 
good  lands,  well  clothed  with  pine,  maple,  birch,  and  spruce.     The  next  inlet,  called 
Wine  Harbor,  has  a  bar  of  sand,  which  is  nearly  dry.    There  are  a  few,  and  but  few, 
settlers  on  these  harbors. 

ST.  MARY'S  RIVER. — The  navigation  of  this  river  is  impeded  by  a  bar  of  12  feet  St.  Mary's 
water,  which  extends  across  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  three-quarters  above  Gunning  River. 
Point,  the  west  point  of  the  entrance.  Below  the  bar,  towards  the  western  side,  is  a  mid- 
dle ground,  which  appears  uncovered  in  very  low  tides ;  and,  above  the  bar  nearly  in  mid- 
channel,  is  a  small  rocky  islet.  The  passnge  over  the  bar  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  this 
islet.  The  tide,  which  is  very  rapid,  marks  out  the  channel.  The  latter  is  devious,  be- 
tween mud-banks,  extending  from  each  shore,  and  dry  at  low  water.  The  depths  up- 
ward are  from  24  to  18  feet.  Sailing  in  you  should  proceed  for  4  miles  N.  N.  W.  then 
2  miles  N.  by  W.  and  afterwards  N.  N.  W.  to  the  fork,  where  it  divides,  the  western 
branch  terminating  in  a  brook;  the  eastern  branch  continuing  navigable  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
further  up  to  the  rapids.  The  town  of  csherbrook  is,  at  present,  a  small  village  at  the 
head  of  the  river,  about  three  leagues  from  the  sea. 

WEDGE  ISLE.— The  islet  called  Wedge  Isle,  which  lies  at  the  distance  of  half  a  Wedgt 
league  south  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  St.  Mary's  River,  is  remarkable,  and  serves  as  an 
excellent  guide  to  the  harbors  in  the  neighborhood.  The  side  of  this  islet,  towards  the 
main  land,  is  abrupt,  and  its  summit  is  115  feet  above  the  sea.  From  its  S.  W.  end 
ledges  stretch  outward  to  the  distance  of  half  a  mile ;  and  some  sunken  rocks,  extending 
towards  it  from  the  main,  obstruct  the  passage  nearly  half  way  over.  About  2i  miles 
south  from  the  Wedge,  is  a  fishing  bank  of  30  to  20  feet,  the  area  of  which  is  about  200 
acres. 

JEGOGAN  HARBOR  may  be  readily  found,  on  the  eastward  by  Wedge  Island,  and  Jegogan 
OQ  the  westward  by  the  bold  and  high  land,  called  Redman's  Head.     The  passage  in  is  Harbor, 
easy,  at  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  head,  and  anchorage  good,  in  muddy 
bottom.     Three-quorters  of  a  mile  from  it  is  a  dry  ledge,  called  the  Shog. 

LISCOMB  HARBOR. — The  entrance  of  this  harbor,  which  is  one  of  the  best  on  Liseomb 
the  coast,  is  between  Liseomb  Island  and  the  head-land  on  the  west,  called  Smith  or  White  Harbor, 
Point.  From  the  S.  E.  end  of  Liseomb  Island,  a  ledge,  with  breakers,  extends  to  the 
distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  Within  and  under  the  lee  of  the  island  is  safe  an- 
chorage in  from  13  to  8  fathoms.  On  the  N.  E.  of  the  island,  a  vessel  caught  in  a  S.  E. 
gale  may  be  sheltered  by  Redman's  Head,  already  described,  with  the  head  S.  S.  E.  in 
6  and  7  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of  clay. 

On  the  west  side,  the  ground  from  Smith  Point  is  shonl  to  the  distance  of  nearly  a 
mile  S.  S.  E.  and  at  2^  miles  south  from  the  point  is  a  rock,  on  which  the  ship  Black 
Prince  was  lost.  It  constantly  breaks,  and  is  partly  uncovered.  The  island-side  is  bold. 
The  first  direction  of  the  harbor  is  nearly  north,  then  W.  N.  W.  Opposite  to  the  first 
fish-stage,  at  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  is  as  good  a  berth  as  can  be  desired,  in  7  fathoms.  " 

From  this  iilace  the  harbor  is  navigable  to  the  distance  of  four  miles.    It  is,  however,  to 

Pf  nio  N.  W.  History  DQpt. 

PROVMNCIA!-  L  —r-^JARY 
/ICTOrtIA,  B.  C. 


■PMMP 


JOS  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

be  observed,  that  there  are  two  sanken  rocks  on  the  north  aide.  At  Oreen  Bay  (Litcotnb 
Tides.  Harbor)  spring  tides  rise  7 J  feet,  neaps  4^. 

Boy  of  III-         BA  y  OF  ISLANDS. — The  coast  between  Liscomb  and  Beaver  Harbors,  an  extent 
and$.  of  6  leagues,  is  denominated  the  Bay  of  Islands.     Within  this  space  the  islets,  rocks,  and 

ledges  are  innumerable.     They  form  passages  in  all  directions,  which  have,  in  general  a 

food  depth  of  water.  At  the  eastern  part  of  this  labyrinth,  near  Liscomb,  is  Marie-'et- 
oseph,  an  excellent  harbor  for  the  largest  ships,  but  requires  caution  to  enter.  Nicomi 
quirque  is  a  small  settlement  in  the  same  range,  the  inhabitants  of  which  are  an  industri. 
ous  set  of  people.  Newton-quaddy,  next  east  of  Beaver,  is  scarcely  fit  for  any  but  finh- 
ineand  other  small  craft,  as  the  channel  in  is  rocky  and  narrow. 

The  White  Islands,  nearly  halfway  between  the  harbors  of  Beaver  and  Liscomb,  an- 
pear,  of  a  light  stone-color,  with  green  summits.  The  latter  are  about  60  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea.  The  isles  are  bold  on  the  south  side ;  the  passage  between  them  safe 
and  there  is  good  anchorage  within  them,  in  from  10  to  7  fathoms.  From  these  the  rocks 
and  ledges  extend  five  or  six  miles  from  E.  to  E.  N.  E.  They  are  bold  to,  and  mostly  dry 
the  water  within  them  being  always  smooth. 
Betmtr  Hat-  BEAVER  HARBOR.— The  Pumpkin  and  Beaver  Islands  are  very  remarkable  to  ves- 
lor,  sola  sailing  along  the  coast,  particularly  Pumpkin  Island,  which  is  a  lofty  and  uark  barren 

rock;  but  they  afford  a  smooth  and  excellent  shelter  inside  of  them  during  a  southerly 
gale.  Southerland  Island  has,  on  its  N.  W.  side,  a  deep  and  bold  inlet,  where  a  vessel 
may  lie  concealed  and  secure  as  in  a  dock.  When  in  the  offing,  the  harbor  is  remarka- 
ble on  accouut  of  the  small  island  which  lies  north  of  the  Black  Rock,  having  at  its  south- 
ern end  a  red  cliff,  being  the  only  one  on  this  part  of  the  coast ;  having  entered  the  har- 
bor, you  may  choose  your  anchorage,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  wind,  the  bottom 
being  generally  mud.  The  basin  on  the  west  side  is  so  steep  to,  that  a  small  vesse!  may 
lie  afloat,  her  side  touching  the  beach. 
ligkOumte.  Light.— On  the  Outer  Beaver  or  Williams  Island  there  is  a  lighthouse  70  feet  high, 
showing  a  revolving  light,  visible  1^  minute,  obscured  half  a  rainute,< 

The  lantern  is  on  a  square  building,  with  two  black  balls  painted  on'the  seaward  side. 
A  reef  extends  from  the  east  end  of  Beaver  Island  a  considerable  distance,  so  that  on 
entering  the  bay  you  should  give  the  light  a  berth  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 
The  harbor  is  too  intricate  to  be  recommended  to  a  stranger. 
Sheet  Har-         SHEET  HARBOR.— This  harbor  is  nearly  half-way  between  Country  Harbor  and 
bar.  Halifax.     It  is  dangerous  for   vessels  to   approach    in  thick   weather.     The  narrow 

channel  between  Sober  Island  and  the  main,  affords  secure  anchorage,  on  a  bottom  of 
mud. 

Without  the  harbor  are  several  ledges,  which  show  themselves,  excepting  the  outer 
one,  called  by  the  fishermen  Yankee-jack,  and  which,  when  the  sea  is  smooth,  is  very 
dangerous.  It  has  been  asserted,  that  a  rocky  shoal  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  south  of  the 
Yankee,  but  its  position  has  not  been  ascertained. 

Within  the  entrance  is  a  rock,  two  feet  under  water,  which  will  be  avoided  by  keeping 
the  Sheet  Rock  open  of  the  island  next  within  it.  on  the  eastern  side.  In  sailing  or  turn- 
ing up  the  harbor,  give  the  sides  a  very  moderate  berth,  and  you  will  have  from  11  to  | 
fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

The  flood  at  the  entrance  of  Sheet  Hurbor  sets  S.  S.  W.  about  one  mile  an  hour. 
T\de».  High  water,  full  and  change,  at  8h.  50m.     Tides  rise  7  feet. 

Mu$ha^  ^'  MUSHABOON,  to  the  westward  of  Sheet  Harbor  is  a  small  bay,  open  to  the  S.  E., 
which  affords  shelter  at  its  head  only,  in  from  7  to  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  It  is  con- 
nected to  Sheet  Harbor  by  a  clear,  deep  and  bold  passage,  between  an  island  and  the 
main  land,' not  having  a  shoal  or  obstruction  in  it.  Here  you  may  lash  your  vessel  to  the 
trees,  and,  lying  in  5  fathoms,  soft  bottom,  with  the  side  touching  the  cliff,  be  perfectly 
shelterted  from  all  winds.  This  place  is  uninhabited,  the  land  being  incapable  of  cultiva- 
tion. In  going  through  the  passage  to  Sheet  Harbor  you  must  guard  against  a  sunken 
rock  at  its  mouth,  which,  from  the  smoothness  of  the  water,  seldom  shows  its  position. 
This  rock  lies  400  yards  off  Banbury  Islands,  and  may  easily  be  cleared  by  keeping  thf 
Sheet  Rock  open  of  the  Island, 
i^pry  Har-  SPRY  HARBOR  has  on  each  side  of  the  entrance,  a  high  rocky,  barren  cape,  dis- 
ior,  tinguishable  at  a  long  distance.     When  sailing  in  you  will  perceive  the  land  in  the  centre 

of  the  harbor,  appearing  in  three  distinct  hills ;  keep  the  valley  between  the  two  eastern- 
most on  with  the  Bald  Rocks,  which  will  lead  you  between  Mad  Moll  Reef  and  Maio- 
ney  Rock.  You  may  now  steer  in  for  the  anchorage,  at  the  western  head  of  the  harbor, 
where  a  fleet  may  be  land-locked,  in  a  muddy  bottom. 

This  harbor  is  open  to  S.  E.  and  E.  S.  E.  winds.     At  the  entrance,  the  flood  tide  sets 
in  at  about  one  mile  an  hour.    The  tide  at  the  entrance  of  Spry  Harbor,  sets  in  with  the 
velocity  of  about  one  mile  an  hour. 
Deane,  or  DEANE,  or  POPE'S  HARBOR,  on  the  western  side  of  Gerard's  Isles,  above  men- 

Pope't  Har-  tioned,  has  a  ledge  at  its  entrance,  forming  an  obtuse  angle  at  the  two  points,  three- 
tor,  fourths  of  a  mile  from  each,  and  from  which  a  ahoal  extends  to  the  southward  half  a  mile. 


BLUETT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


108 


Bt  a  sunken 


It  may  be  puied  on  either  side ;  but  on  the  west,  care  muit  be  taken  to  avoid  a  shoal  ex- 
leading  from  the  outer  Tangier  Island.  The  best  shelter  is  under  the  smaller  island  on 
the  eastern  side,  where  there  are  from  8  to  6  fathoms,  with  bottom  of  blue  clay,  mud  and 
gaud. 

TANGIER  HARBOR,  aext  to  Dec  ■  or  Pope's,  is  formed  by  craggy  barren  Islands,  Tangier 
ffhich  secure  vessels  from  all  winds.     At  about  two  miles  from  its  mouth  is  a  ledge  that 
dries  ntluw  water.     The  anchorage  is  under  the  eastern  shore,  above  Fisher's  Nose,  in 

5  to  4  fathoms,  stiff  mud.  Here  are  some  good  tracts  of  pasture  land,  and  the  few  inhab- 
itants are  occupied  in  the  fishing  and  coasting  trade. 

SHOAL  BAY  is  the  Saunders  Harbor  of 'Des  Barres.  This  bay  has  a  good  depth  Shoal  Bay. 
ofwater  and  excelleo'i;  anchorage,  on  fine  white  sand  and  strong  mud.  The  hitter  is  to 
the  northward  of  the  island  now  called  Charles  Island,  and  vessels  lie  in  it,  Innd-locked, 
io  7  fathoms.  Off  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  is  a  rock,  that  always  breaks ;  but  it  is  bold 
to,  and  may  be  passed  on  either  side.  Some  parts  of  the  harbor  will  admit  large  ships  to 
lie  afloat,  alongside  tiie  shore,  over  a  bottom  of  black  mud.     Supplies  of  stock,  icc  may  '^ 

be  obtained  from  the  inhabitants  of  this  place. 

SHIP  HARBOR  is  easy  and  safe  to  enter,  having  good  anchorage  in  every  part,  the  Ship  Har- 
bottom  being  a  tougL  clay  of  bluish  color ;  it  leads  to  Charles's  River,  above  the  narrows  bor. 
of  which  a  fleet  of  the  largest  ships  may  lie  alongside  of  each  other,  without  the  smallest 
motion.  In  this  harbor,  and  on  the  isles  about  it,  are  near  twenty  families,  who  keep 
tmall  stocks  of  cattle  dec.  The  entrance,  called  by  Des  Barres  Knowles'  Harbor,  is  deep 
and  bold :  it  lies  between  two  islands,  of  which  the  eastern  is  Brier's  Island,  on  the  west- 
ern part  of  which  is  a  lighthouse.  A  white  cliff,  which  may  be  seen  for  a  considerable  Lighthouse. 
distance  in  the  oflAng,  is  a  good  mark  for  the  harbor :  at  first  it  resembles  a  ship  under  sail, 
but  on  approaching  seems  more  like  a  schooner's  topsail.  Brier's  Island,  before  men- 
tioned, is  a  low  rugged  island,  and  ledges  partly  dry,  extend  from  it  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  to  the  eastward  :  avoiding  these  when  entering  this  wa}%  you  may  range  along  the 
western  island,  and  come  to  an  anchor  under  its  north  point,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  the  bottom 
of  mud.  Ship  Harbor,  proper,  commences  about  7  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Brier's  Island, 
at  a  beach  in  the  western  shore,  which  has  6  fathoms  close  to  its  side  ;  its  entrance  isone- 
tbird  of  a  mile  broad,  wideningjas  you  ascend  it.  Above  Green  Island  are  some  shoals 
and  ledges,  but  the  anchorages  below  them  are  capacious  and  good.  Spars,  stock,  water, 
and  firewood  may  be  obtained  here. 

OWL'S  HEAD,  or  KEPPEL  HARBOR,  which  is  next  to  the  west  of  the  harbor  Owl's  Head, 
last  described,  although  smaller  than  many  other  harbors  on  the  coast,  has  sufficient  space  or  Kcppel 
for  a  fleet.     It  may  be  known,  at  a  distance,  by  Owl's  Head,  on  the  western  side,  which  Harbor. 
appears  round,  abrupt  and  very  remarkable.     The  neighboring  coast  and  isles  are  riigged 
and  barren,  but  the  harbor  has  a  few  settlers.     The  entrance  is  of  sufficient  breadth  to 
allow  a  large  ship  to  turn  in  it;  and,  within  the  harbor,  shipping  lie  land-locked,  when  in 

6  and  7  fathoms,  with  a  bottom  of  mud.  In  taking  a  berth,  you  will  be  guided  by  the  di- 
rection of  the  wind;  as,  with  a  S.  W.  gale,  the  western  anchorage  is  to  be  preferred, 
and  the  eastern  with  a  S.  E.  The  tide  sets  into  this  harbor  from  the  S.  W.  at  the  rate 
of  one  mile  an  hour. 

LITTLE  HARBOR  is  somewhat  to  the  westward  of  Owl's  Head  Harbor,  and  is  a  Little  Har- 
piace  of  safety  for  small  vessels ;  but  its  entrance  is  intricate,  and  requires  a  good  know-  bar. 
ledge  of  the  passages  leading  to  it,  in  order  to  enable  a  vessel  to  enter. 

JEDORE  HARBOR. — In  the  offing,  at  the  distance  of  two  leagues  off  the  land,  the  Jcdore  Har- 
body  of  the  flood  sets  in  S.  W.  by  S.  at  the  rate  of  half  a  mile  an  hour.  From  the  ap-  6or. 
pearance  of  this  harbor  on  the  charts,  it  might  be  presumed  that  it  is  spacious  and  com- 
modious; but  on  examination,  it  will  be  found  to  be  really  different.  The  entrance  is  un- 
safe and  intricate ;  a  shoal  of  only  11  feet  lies  at  its  mouth ;  the  channel  within  is  narrow 
and  winding,  and  there  are  extensive  mud  Hats,  covered  at  high  water,  and  uncovered 
with  the  ebb  :  hence  a  stranger  can  enter  with  safety  only  at  low  water,  the  channel  be- 
ing then  clearly  in  sight,  and  the  water  sufficient  for  large  ships.  The  best  anchorage  is 
abreast  of  the  sand-beach,  two  miles  within  the  entrance,  in  from  9  to  6  fathoms,  on  a  bot- 
tom of  stiff  mud.  Two  and  a  half  miles  above  the  beach  the  harbor  divides ;  one  branch 
to  the  larboard  is  navigable  nearly  to  its  extremity,  and  has  several  sunken  rocks  on  it; 
while  to  the  starboard  is  a  large  space  with  a  clear  bottom,  and  from  3  to  b  fathoms.  On 
the  eastern  shore  are  Oyster  Pond  and  Navy  Pool,  two  deep  inlets,  but  choaked  at  their 
entrance  by  a  bed  of  rocks ;  the  river  terminates  with  a  rapid. 

The  lands  at  the  head  of  the  harbor  are  stony,  but  tolerably  good ;  the  rest  barren  and 
deplorable. 

Without  the  entrance,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  two  isles,  called  Roger  and  Barren  Isl- 
ands, between  and  within  which  the  passages  are  good,  and  afford  shelter  in  case  of  ne- 
cessity ;  from  these  the  land  runs  nearly  E.  N.  E.  and  forms  a  deep  iulet,  called  Clam  or 
Clamb  Bay. 

THE  BRIG  ROCK. — This  is  a  very  dangerous  rock  of  3  feet,  about  the  size  of  a  The  Brig 
frigate's  long  boat ;  it  lies  S.  E.  (^  E.  from  Jedore  Head,  and  S.  W.  two  miles  from  the  Rock. 


mm 


'm 


mm 


mm 


^^^ 


11.11  'I  ".  '"P'liPl 


104  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

isle,  called  Long  Island.   The  weed  on  the  top  of  it  may  frequently  be  seen  at  the  surface 
The  marks  for  this  rock  are  a  house  and  barn  in  Clam  Bay,  just  open  of  the  east  end  of 
Long  Island,  bearing  N.  5°  £.  and  the  house  on  Jedore  Head  open  to  the  N.  £.  of  Je. 
dore  Rock. 

An  account  is  given  of  a  rocky  shoal  over  which  a  vessel  passed  in  8  fathoms  water 

Bearings.       and  upon  which  were  taken  the  following  bearings :  Jedore  Head  N.  N.  W.  i  W.;  west 

end  of  Long  Island  N.  £.  by  N.;  and  Jedore  Outer  Ledge  or  Brig  Rock,  E.  by  S.   This 

shoal  may  have  less  water  upon  it  in  other  parts,  but  as  these  bearings  do  not  agree  with 

the  chart,  we  apprehend  there  must  be  some  error  in  its  exact  pusitiun.     Mention  la  aUo 

made  of  a  rock,  bearing  from  Jedore  Head  S.  38°  E.  distant  6  miles ;  this  has  only  5 

feet  over  it,  and  22  fathoms  close  within  and  without  it.     This  is  supposed  to  be  the  Brig 

Rock,  but  if  so  tlie  bearings  are  not  correct.     These  two  notices  are  inserted  to  show 

that  some  dangers  exist  hereabout,  and  will  be  sufficient  to  warn  the  mariner  to  search 

for  and  cautiously  avoid  them. 

Tide.  It  is  high  water  at  Jedore  Head  full  and  change  at  20  minutes  after  8  o'clock,  and  the 

tide  rises  from  6  to  9  feet.     At  Owl's  Head,  it  is  high  water  at  30  minutes  after  8  o'clock 

and  the  tide  rises  from  5  to  7  feet.  ' 

Polluek  POLLUCK  SHOAL. — At  about  nine  miles  south  from  Jedore  Head  is  a  reef,  called 

Shoal.  the  Pulluck  Shoal ;  its  area  is  about  one  acre,  having  a  depth  of  24  feet  over  it ;  and  during 

a  swell,  the  sea  breaks  on  it  with  great  violence. 
Jedore  JEDORE  LEDGES. — Those  advancing  between  the  Brig  Rock  and  Polluek  Shoal, 

Ledges.  should  be  cautious  in  approaching  any  of  the  Jedore  Ledges ;  they  are  laid  down  on  the 

charts,  and  said  to  extend  from  5  to  9  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  harbor. 

Between  Jedore  and  Halifax,  there  are  no  harbors  of  any  consideration  for  shipping,  but 
there  are  numerous  settlements.  The  land  in  this  extent  is,  in  general,  of  moderate 
height,  rising  gradually  from  the  shore.  Red  and  precipitous  clifl's,  the  charncteriiitic  of 
the  eastern  coast,  may  be  seen  from  7  to  9  miles  oil'.  The  best  harbor  is  that  called 
Three  Fathoms  Harbor.  When  you  are  within  this  harbor  the  passage  will  be  found  to 
bo  clt'iir.  hi'tweon  iwnks  of  soft  mud.  But  it  is  only  fit  for  «;hooi)ers  and  sloops,  nllliuus;li 
it  has  occiisionuliy  been  visited  by  large  vessels.  Tlie  uuchoiiige  is  tough  bluu  clay,  'i  he 
cliflfs  are  composed  of  bright  red  earth,  remarkable  for  vessels  coming  from  the  eastward. 
This  harbor  lies  immediately  to  the  east  of  an  islet  called  Shut-in  Island ;  and,  with  the 
wind  on  shore,  is  difficult  and  dangerous ;  so  that  it  is  to  be  attempted  only  in  cases  of  real 
,,      ;  distress.     The  channel  lies  two-thirds  over  to  the  northward  from  Shut-in  Island,  and 

turns  short  round  the  starboard  point  to  the  westward. 

In  beating  to  windward,  ships  may  stand  to  within  a  mile  and  a  half  of  the  shore,  the 
soundings  being  tolerably  regular,  from  2ii  to  12  and  8  fathoms.  Captain  Aldridge  says, 
"  we  made  the  land  to  the  windward  of  Jedore  Ledges,  which  bore  E.  S.  E.  and  saw  an 
island,  appearing  white  along  the  bottom  ;  between  this  and  another  island  lay  Jedore,  a 
large  rock,  to  the  eastward  ;  the  island  was  quite  white  round  the  bottom,  and  had  a  thick 
green  wood  at  top.  To  the  westward  of  the  westernmost  of  these  islands,  is  Owl's  Head, 
a  large  high  bluff*  land  ;  the  western  part  of  it  is  a  darkish  white,  with  a  patch  of  red.  A 
little  to  the  eastward  of  this  red  patch  are  two  houses,  situated  in  Clamb  Bay,  to  the  west 
'  of  which  is  a  sandy  beach.     In  coming  from  the  bank  we  bad  45  fathoms,  stones,  then  37, 

39  and  40  fathoms,  mud  and  small  pebbles." 

»  .»  HALIFAX  TO  CAPE  SABLE. 

Generai.  Remarks. — Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  bound  for  the  harbor  of 
Halifax,  should  pay  particulor  attention  to  their  soundings,  especially  when  they  consider 
thumsolvos  in  the  neighborhood  of  Sable  Island :  which  island  and  its  surrounding  banks 
we  shall  hereafter  describe;  it  will  therefore  only  bo  necessary  at  present  to  remark,  that 
the  island  is  low,  and  appears  like  small  sand  hillocks ;  that,  in  summer,  it  frequently  jg 
enveloped  in  a  fog,  but  you  may  always  discover  your  proximity  to  it  by  your  soundings; 
and  that  on  its  N.  E  and  N.  W.  sides  are  dangerous  bars :  you  will  have  except  on  these 
sides  2  fathoms,  2  cables'  length  off,  and  your  depths  will  increase  in  proportion  to  the 
distance  ynu  are  from  it.  at  a  general  rate  of  about  2  fathoms  for  every  mile,  until  you 

Signals,  are  more  than  20  miles  from  it.     Signals  are  placed  on  the  island,  and  also  a  gun,  toaa- 

Bwer  such  as  may  be  heard  from  vessels  in  distress,  or  in  thick  weather,  which  have 
already  saved  from  shipwreck  a  number  of  vessels- 

In  making  land  more  to  the  south-westward,  and  about  Cape  Sable,  you  must  be  par- 
ticularly careful  to  avoid  .Seal  Island  Rocks  and  the  Brazil  Rock.  To  the  westward  of 
Groat  Seal  Island,  the  soundings  are  very  irregular  for  upwards  of  20  miles,  at  which 
distance  are  45  fathoms,  gravel  and  stones.     Indeed,  the  soundings  along  Nova  Scotia, 

Soundings,     from  Capo  Canso  to  Cape  Sable,  partake  of  the  same  irregularity,  from  25  to  50  fathoms, 

therefore  you  should  not  come  nearer  the  land  than  35  fathoms,  unl'iss  you  are  well 

«        assured  of  the  exact  part  you  are  in,  for  otherwise  endeavoring  to  enlsr  Halifax,  you 

'      may  be  driven  into  Mahone  or  Mecklenburgh  Bays,  and  be  caught  by  S.  E.  winds.    The 


^■IP 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


106 


t  the  surface, 
east  end  of 
E-  of  Jo. 

horns  Water. 

bys.  This 

I  agree  with 
9"tion  is  alao 
8  has  only  5 
be  the  Brig 
rted  U)  show 
er  to  search 

ock,  and  the 
ler  8  o'clocit, 

leef,  called 
;  and  during 

'lluck  ShonI, 
down  on  the 

shipping,  but 
of  nioderute 
ractenstic  of 
that  called 
I  be  found  to 
ps,  nllhuU!;li 
'  clay.  '1  ho 
lie  eastward, 
nd,  with  the 
cases  of  real 
1  Island,  and 


16  shore,  the 
Idridge  says, 
■  and  saw  an 
ay  Jedore,  a 
d  Imd  a  thick 
Owl's  Head, 
h  of  red.  A 
,  to  the  west 
nes,  then  37, 


he  harbor  of 
ley  consider 
nding  banks 
einark,  that 
i'equently  ig 
r  soundings; 
apt  on  these 
rtion  to  the 
e,  until  you 
gun,  toao- 
which  have 

lust  bo  par- 
vostwnrd  of 
9.  at  which 
[ova  Scotia, 
30  fathoms, 
ou  are  well 
alifax,  you 
inds.    The 


/ 


weather  is  generally  foggy  4  or  6  leagues  off  shore,  both  in  spring  and  Bummer;  but  it 
|)ecomes  clearer  as  you  get  nearer  the  coast,  and  with  the  wind  off  the  land  it  will  be 
perfectly  clear. 

From  one  to  three  leagues  out  to  the  seaward,  mackerel,  halibut,  rays,  haddock,  and 
cod  are  found  in  plenty ;  and  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbors  and  rivers,  salmon  are  taken 
from  April  to  August;  the  buys  abound  with  herrings  in  June  and  July,  and  with  tom- 
(od  all  the  year  round.  *' 

HALIFAX  Harbor. — in  approaching  the  harbor  of  Halifax,  you  will  perceive  the  Halifax 
coast  about  its  environs,  paiticularly  to  the  southward,  to  be  ragged  and  rocky,  with  Harbor. 
patches  of  withered  wood  scattered  about,  but  the  land  is  rather  low  in  general,  and  not 
visible  20  miles  off,  except  from  the  quarter  deck  of  a  74.     The  high  mountains  of  Le 
Have  and  Aspotogon  excepted,  which  may  bo  seen  9  leagues  off.     When  Aspotogon 
HilUi  which  have  a  long  lovel  appearance,  bear  north,  and  you  are  6  leagues  distant,  an 
£,  N.  E.  course  will  carry  you  to  Sambro  lighthouse ;  this  stands  on  Sambro  Island,  and  Lighthoute. 
is  on  a  high  tower,  painted  white,  elevated  above  the  sea  132  feet.     There  are  two  24  <  ,  ,.;^ 

pounders  placed  on  the  island,  under  the  direction  of  a  small  party  of  artillery  men ;  these 
are  fired  on  the  approach  of  vessels,  and  contribute  much  to  the  mariner's  safety  by 
warning  him  off  the  adjacent  breakers.  Sambro  Island  and  lighthouse  lie  on  the  S. 
yfl.  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.  In  standing  in  for  the  land  you  may  know  on 
ffhich  aide  of  the  harbor  you  are,  by  a  remarkable  difference  that  takes  place  immediately 
from  its  mouth  in  the  color  of  the  shores,  which,  if  red,  denotes  you  are  to  the  eastward, 
and  if  white,  to  the  westward  of  it.  S.  by  £.  distant  2  full  miles  from  the  lighthouse,  lies 
the  Henercy  Rock,  with  only  8  feet  water  over  it;  and  £.  N.  £.  distant  one  mile  from  vV' .  U 

the  Henercy,  lies  the  Lockwood,  of  12  feet ;  these  appear  to  be  but  little  known,  although  .1  ,\ 

they  are  both  so  very  dangerous. 

THE  LEDGES. — About  2  miles  to  the  westward  are  the  Western  Lodges,  these  The  Ltdget, 
are  the  Bull,  the  Horses,  and  the  S.  W.  or  Outer  Rock.  The  Bull  is  the  westernmost ; 
and  nearest  to  the  land ;  this  is  a  rock  above  water,  lying  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  S.  E. 
by  E.  from  Pendant  Point,  tlm  lighthouse  bearing  from  it,  E.  70°  S.  The  Horses  are 
about  a  mile  to  tlm  suutli-uasiwurd  of  the  Bull,  the  lighthouse  bearing  E.  by  N.  distant 
one  mile  and  three-quarters ;  and  the  S.  W.  Rock  or  Ledge  lies  with  the  lighthouse 
bearing  E.  by  N.  distant  one  mile  and  a  half.  To  avoid  these,  constant  caution  will  be 
requisite,  though  they  are  surrounded  by  deep  water ;  the  channel  between  the  Bull  and 
the  main  having  10  fathoms  water,  and  the  passage  clear;  between  the  Horses  and  the  Bull 
are  16  fathoms,  and  no  intermediate  danger ;  and  between  the  Horses  and  the  S.  W. 
Rock  there  are  20  fathoms. 

A  ruck  with  12  feet  on  it  has  been  found  by  Capt.  Owen  R.  N.  It  bears  N.  E.  from 
the  light,  one  mile  and  three-quarters,  nearly. 

The  Eastern  Ledges  are  the  Sisters,  or  Black  Rocks;  these  lie  nearly  E.  by  S.  from 
the  lighthouse,  distant  two-thirds  of  a  mile.  There  is  also  the  Bell  Rock,  lying  further 
in,  and  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  land,  the  extremity  of  Chebucto  Head  bearing 
N.  by  E.  i  E.  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  In  advancing  up  the  harbor,  you  will 
meetwith  several  other  rocks,  as  the  Rock  Head  which  lies  with  Chebucto  Head,  S.W. 
^  W.  distant  2i  miles,  and  the  Devil's  Island  N.  E.  i  E.  about  the  same  distance ;  the 
Thrum  Cap,  which  extends  from  the  south  end  of  Me  Nab's,  or  Cornwallis'  Island ; 
the  Lichfield,  on  the  western  side  of  the  harbor,  having  only  16  feet  water  over  it;  and 
the  Mars  Rock,  lying  also  on  the  western  side.  Point  Sandwich  bearing  N.  distant  half  a 
mile,  and  nearly  in  a  line  with  it  and  the  west  side  of  George's  Island ;  all  these  are  dis- 
tinguished by  buoys  and  flags  being  placed  upon  them.  There  is  also  a  reef,  called  the 
Horse  Shoe,  which  runs  out  from  Mauger's  Bench,  on  the  west  side  ,of  Mc  Nab's  Isl- 
and; this  is  dangerous  and  must  be  carefully  avoided.  On  Mauger's  Beach  is  a  tower, 
called  Sherbrook  Tower,  on  which  is  a  lighthouse,  elevated  58  feet  above  the  level  of  the  Lighthouse. 
sea,  erected  for  the  purpose  of  guiding  vessels  up  the  hnrbor. 

When  abreast  of  Chebucto  Head,  or  when  Sambro  Light  bears  W.  S.  W.  the  lighten 
Mauger's  Beach  should  never  be  brought  to  the  westward  of  N.  By  keeping  the  light 
from  N.  to  N.  by  E.  will  lead  clear  of  the  Thrum  Cap  Shoal.  This  lighthouse  beai'S 
from  the  Thrum  Cap  Buoy  N.  i  W.  two  miles  and  a  half.^ 

Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward  must  keep  Sambro  light  open  to  the  southward  of 
Chebucto  Head,  until  the  light  opens  on  Mauger's  Beach,  which  will  then  bear  N.  j  W. 
when  they  will  be  to  tlio  wustward  of  Thrum  Cap  Shoals,  and  may  shape  a  course  up 
the  harbor,  always  keeping  the  light  on  the  beach  open  and  on  the  starboard  bow. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  westward  will  see  the  light  when  they  are  as  far  to  the  east- 
ward of  Chebucto  Head  ;  by  keeping  it  open  and  ou  the  starboard  bow,  it  will  lead  them 
up  to  the  beach. 

The  light  on  Sherbrook  Tower  appears  of  a  red  color,  which  distinguishes  it  from  any 
other  on  the  coast. 

High  Water,  Halifax  Dock  Yard,  8  o'clock ;  apriug  tides  rise  from  6i  to  9  feet.    High  Tidei. 
water  at  Sambro  Isle  8h.  15m.;  spring  tides  rise  from  5  to  7  feet. 


P" 


106 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Half  way  between  Mauger'a  Beach  and  Oeorge'i  Iiland  is  a  shoal,  on  the  oppoaiieilde 
extending  to  the  S.  E.  firom  Point  Pleasant  nearly  one-third  of  the  channel  over,  and 
Buoy.  having  a  buoy  at  its  extremity ;  the  thwart  mark  of  this  buoy  is  a  little  islet  at  the  en- 

trance  of  the  N.  W.  arm  on  with  a  remarkable  stone  upon  the  hill,  appearing  like  a  coach* 
box.  and  bearing  W.  S.  W.  Between  Point  Pleasant  Shoal  and  Mauger's  Beach  ii  a 
middle  ground  of  ii  and  6  fathoms,  sometimes  pointed  out  by  a  buoy.     This  middle 

Sound  extends  north  and  south  a  cable's  length,  and  is  about  30  fathoms  broad.     As  you 
I  off  to  the  eastword  of  it  there  will  be  found  from  7  to  13  fathoms  water,  muddy  bot- 
tom ;  while  on  the  west  side  there  are  from  10  to  14  fathoms,  coarse  rocky  soundingi, 
Reid'i  Rock.      REID'S  ROCK  has  12  feet  water  over  it,  and  lies  in  shore,  about  midway  between 
Point  Pleasant  and  Halifax.     The  thwart  mark  for  this  danger  is  a  farm  house  in  the 
wood,  over  a  black  rock  on  the  shore,  bearing  W.  bv  S.  and  opposite  to  Reid's  Rock  ig « 
buoy  on  a  spit  extending  from  the  N.  W.  end  of  Mac  Nab's  Island. 
Mae  NaVi         MAC  NAB'S  ISLAND  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  and  is  nearly  three 
liland.  miles  in  length  and  one  in  breadth ;  there  is  a  small  island  to  the  eastward  of  it,  called 

Carroll's  Island ;  boats  can  pass  this  way,  or  between  it  and  the  Devil's  Island  shore,  in 
what  is  commonly  called  the  S.  E.  passage,  but  the  channel  is  too  shallow  for  shippin* 
and  it  is  further  obstructed  by  a  bar  of  sand  to  the  southward,  over  which  are  only  6  feet 
water.     Mac  Nab's  Cove  has  good  anchorage  in  from  9  to  4  fathoms,  muddy  ground. 
The  best  situation  is  in  7  fathoms,  with  Mauger's  Beach  and  Sandwich  Point  locked  ■ 
George's  Tower  touching  Ives'  Point. 
Dartmouth  is  a  settlement  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbor,  opposite  Halifax. 
Halifax  Har-      To  sail  for  Halifax  Harbor. — Having  made  the  lighthouse,  and  coming  from  the  weat- 
hoT.  ward  at  night,  with  a  westerly  wind,  the  light  being  7  or  8  miles  off,  steer  E.  N.  E.  or  E. 

by  N.  until  you  have  passed  the  S.  W.  ledges,  and  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  then  run  on 
N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  until  you  bring  it  to  bear  N.  W.  which  being  done,  take  a  N.  N. 
E.  or  N.  E.  by  N.  course,  until  you  bring  it  W.  N.  W.;  you  will  then,  agreeably  to  the 
wind,  haul  up  N.  or  N.  by  E.  for  Chebucto  Head,  avoiding  the  Bell  Rock.  (?hebucto 
Head  is  bold  to  within  half  a  mile  of  the  shore;  run  un  north,  along  the  west  shore,  for 
Sandwich  Point,  which  also  is  bold :  thus  you  will  safely  pass  the  Litchfield  Rock,  leav- 
Buoy.  ing  it  on  your  larboard  side ;  this  rock  has  a  buoy  placed  on  its  eastern  end,  a  mile  north- 

ward of  which  is  the  Mars  Rock,  whose  situation  is  pointed  out  by  another  buoy,  which 
must  also  be  left  to  the  larboard.  When  abreast  of  Sandwich  Point,  get  as  near  Middle 
Channel  osyou  can,  for  on  the  opposite  side  is  the  Horse  Shoe,  a  dangerous  shelf,  which 
stretches  out  from  Mauger's  Beach ;  steer  on  mid-channel  between  Mauger's  Beach  and 
the  Horse  Shoe,  and  having  passed  the  latter,  edge  over  towards  Mac  Nab's  Island.  Mid- 
way between  the  Island  and  Point  Pleosant  Shoals,  on  the  extremity  of  which  is  a  buoy, 
and  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  further,  on  the  same  side,  is  Reid's  Rock,  whose  posi- 
tion is  also  denoted  by  another  buoy :  these  are  all  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  side.  On 
the  starboard,  or  opposite  side,  is  a  red  buoy  placed  upon  the  spit  which  runs  off  Mac 
Nab's  Island ;  you  will  sail  on  between  these  two  latter  buoys,  and  having  passed  the  reef, 
steer  directly  north  for  George's  Island,  which  you  may  pass  on  either  side,  and  run  up 
for,  and  abreast  of  the  town  of  Halifax,  where  you  will  find  anchorage  in  9  and  10  fathoms, 
muddy  ground,  two  cables'  length  east  of  the  mooring  buoys,  or  near  enough  to  the 
wharts  to  throw  your  hawser  on  shore.  There  is  a  middle  ground  between  Mauger's 
Beach  and  Point  Pleasant  Shoal,  which  sometimes  has  a  buoy  upon  it,  but  no  less  than 
5  fathoms  has  yet  been  found  upon  it. 

"  The  great  difficulty  of  making  Halifax  from  the  eastward,  particularly  in  the  winter 
season,  is  that  the  winds  ars  generally  from  the  W.  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  and  blow  so  hard  as 
to  reduce  a  ship  to  very  low  canvass,  if  not  to  bare  poles;  but  should  the  wind  come  to  the 
eastward,  it  is  invariably  attended  with  such  thick  weather  as  to  prevent  an  observation, or 
seeing  any  great  distance ;  and  consequently  renders  it  imprudent  to  run  on  a  lee  shore 
under  such  circumstances,  and  more  particularly  in  the  winter  time,  when  the  easterly 
winds  are  attended  with  sleet  and  snow,  which  lodge  about  the  masts,  sails,  rigging,  and 
every  part  of  the  ship,  becoming  a  solid  body  of  ice  so  soon  as  the  wind  shifts  round  to 
the  N.  W.  which  it  does  suddenly  from  the  eastward.  What  adds  considerably  to  the 
above  difficulty  is,  having  been  several  days  without  an  observation,  and  subject  to  a  cur- 
rent, which  sometimes  runs  strong  to  the  southward,  you  may  have  the  Bay  of  Fundy 
open,  and  be  swept  into  it  by  the  strong  indraught  which  prevails  when  the  wind  has  been 
any  time  from  the  southward  or  eastward. 

"  From  the  above  circumstances,  I  would  recommend  that  ships  bound  to  Halifax  in 
the  winter,  should  shape  a  southerly  course,  and  run  down  their  longitude  in  latitude  from 
38°  to  36°,  in  which  parallel  they  will  make  the  principal  part  of  their  passage  in  a 
temperate  climate,  until  they  approach  the  coast  of  America,  when  they  will  be  met  by 
the  westerly,  or  even  north-west  winds,  which  will  enable  them  (having  got  soundings, 
on  St.  George's  Bank,)  to  make  their  course  good  along  shore,  and  with  a  free  wind  and 
clear  weather,  cross  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  with  confidence  of  their  situation ;  then,  so  soon 
as  they  have  shut  in  the  bay,  keep  the  shore  on  board  the  whole  way  to  Halifax  light- 
house." 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


107 


•PPo«'leiMe, 
'«'  O'er,  RDd 
•»  »t  the  en. 
like  a  coach. 
»  Beach  i,  a 
•This  middle 
""•  As  you 
muddy  bot. 
oundingi. 
vay  between 
louse  in  the 
I  ■  Rock  is  a 

learly  three 
of  't.  called 
nd  shore,  Iq 
or  shippinj. 

9  only  8  feet 
°°y  ground. 
DiDt  locked  I 

fax. 

m  the  West- 
N-E.orE. 
then  run  on 
«ke  a  N.  N. 
eably  to  the 

('hebucto 
8t  shore,  for 
Rock,  lear- 
mile  north- 
>uoy,  which 
near  Middle 
Bhelf,  which 
I  Bench  and 
'land.  Mid. 
!h  is  a  buoy, 
whose  posi. 
d  side.  On 
ins  off  Mac 
led  the  reef, 
and  run  up 
10  fathoms, 
ugh  to  the 
n  Manger's 
10  less  than 

the  winter 
so  hard  as 
ome  to  the 
<  rvation,or 
i  lee  shore 
he  easterly 
igging,  and 
ts  round  to 
My  to  the 
it  to  a  cur* 
of  Fundy 
d  has  been 

Halifax  in 
itude  from 
issage  in  a 
be  met  by 
loundings, 
wind  and 
n«  so  soon 
Ifax  light- 


Observe,  in  coming  from  the  eastward  with  an  easterly  wind,  the  Thrum   Cap  Shoals 
pDit  be  particularly  avoided,  a  red  buoy,  as  before  noticed,  now  marks  their  extremity  ;  Buoy. 
ind  to  go  clenr  of  them,  you  should  bring  the  easternmost  land  in  sight  a  ship's  length  to 
the  southward  of  Devil's  Island,  bearing  E.  N.  E.  nearly,  and  steer  in  W.,  or  W.  by  S.,  ^  . 

II  best  suits  the  distance  you  are  from  tlie  island,  and  according  to  the  wind  and  situation. 
With  respect  to  the  shoals,  you  may  pursue  o  West,  N.  W.,  or  W.  N.  W.  course,  until  y 

George's  Island  comes  a  sail's  breadth  open  to  the  westward  of  Mac  Nnb's  Island ;  then 
stand  up  for  Sandwich  Point,  or  the  fort,  until  St.  Paul's  steeple,  in  Halifax,  is  open  of 
grenton  House ;  keep  this  mark  on,  and  you  will  go  in  the  fairway,  clearing  Point  Pleas- 
lot  Shoals  and  Maugur's  Beach  ;  then  steer  on  as  before  directed. 

The  long  mark  for  Halifax  Harbor,  from  abreast  of  Chebucto  Head,  and  steering  in 
^„  or  N.  A  W.,  is  the  middle  of  three  hills,  over  Dartmouth  village,  having  lome  trees 
upon  it,  in  a  line  with  the  N.  W.  end  of  George's  Island  ;  this  will  lead  clear  of  the  dan- 
gers on  both  sides,  and  over  the  Middle  Ground,  in  from  5  to  8  fathoms,  and  up  to 
George's  Island. 

The  marks  for  the  Litchfield  Rock  are  the  channel  between  the  Devil's  Island  and  the 
niaiD  open,  bearing  E.  N.  E.  and  George's  Island  open  to  the  eastward  of  Sandwich  Point. 
Over  this  rock  are  only  16  feet. 

The  marks  for  the  buoy  at  the  extremity  of  Point  Pleasant  Spit,  is  a  small  island  at  the 
entrance  of  the  N.  W.  arm,  on  with  the  stone  on  the  hill,  bearing  W.  S.  W.  The  marks 
vrbich  clear  Point  Pleasant  Shoals  will  also  clear  the  Reid  Rock :  its  thwart  mark  is  a 
farm-house  in  the  wood  over  a  black  rock  on  the  shore,  bearing  W.  by  S. 

In  approaching  from  the  westward,  round  the  lighthouse,  at  the  distance  of  a  short  Lighthoute. 
league  to  avoid  the  sunken  rocks  which  lie  to  the  southward,  when  the  light  bears  N.  W. 
by  N.  haul  in  N.  by  W.  The  flag  staves  on  the  Citadel  Hill  above  the  town  are  dis- 
tinguishable at  a  considerable  distance;  by  keeping  them  open  of  Sandwich  Point,  you 
are  led  clear  of  the  Bell,  Litchfield,  and  Mars  Rocks,  on  the  west  side,  anr'  the  Rock 
Head  and  Thrum  Cap  to  the  east.  When  arrived  at  Sandwich  Point,  keop  Chebucto 
Head  in  sight,  by  not  allowing  it  to  be  shut  in;  this  plain  mark  will  lead  in  the  fairway 
1  ome  to  George's  Island ;  leaving  Point  Pleasant  Shoals  on  the  left,  and  Mac  Nah's  Shoals 
on  the  right,  round  George's  Island  on  either  side,  and  anchor  any  where  in  6,  10,  or  13 
fiithoms,  muddy  ground.  From  George's  Island  to  the  entrance  of  Sackville  River,  there 
is  not  a  single  obstruction.  Men-of-war  commonly  anchor  off  the  naval  yard,  which  a 
stranger  will  distinguish  by  the  masting  sheers;  merchant  vessels  discharge  their  cargoes, 
and  load  alongside  the  wharves. 

Catch  Harbor,  fit  only  for  small  vessels,  lies  to  the  westward  of  Chebucto  Head;  it  has 
a  bar  across  with  breakers,  and  only  9  feet  water;  within  it  are  3  and  3i  fathoms.  There 
is  a  fine  run  of  fresh  water  at  the  head  of  the  harbor.  Herring  Cove  is  about  100  fath- 
oms wide  at  the  entrance,  and  bold  on  both  sides,  with  7, 5,  and  4  fathoms  up  to  the  elbow 
that  forms  the  Inner  Cove,  within  which  small  vessels  lie  perfectly  sheltered  in  7  and  9 
feet,  soft:  mud,  the  sides  being  one  entire  body  of  rock. 

REMAaKs. — Leaving  Hali^ix,  and  sailing  westward,  you  will  find  the  shores  to  be  steep, 
and  appear  from  seaward  broken  and  rocky,  with  whitish  cliffs :  the  high  lands  of  Aspo- 
togon  and  Le  Have,  before  mentioned,  are  conspicuous  and  remarkable;  to  the  westward 
the  rocks  about  the  land  appear  black,  with  reddish  banks  of  earth.  Le  Have  appears 
bald  or  barren  at  the  top,  with  red  earthy  hillocks  under  it,  and  between  Cape  Le  Have 
and  Port  Medwny,  or  Jackson,  are  some  hummocks  inland,  the  coast  to  the  seaward 
being  level  and  low,  and  the  shores  marked  with  white  rocks,  with  low  barren  points; 
from  thence  to  Shelburne  and  Roseway  it  is  woody.  Near  Port  Latour  are  several  bar- 
ren places,  and  thence  to  Cape  Sable  the  land  is  low,  with  white  sandy  cliffs,  particularly 
Tisihie  at  sea. 

SAMBRO  HARBOR  is  a  mile  and  three-quarters  N.  N.  W.  from  the  lighthouse:  SambroHar- 
off  its  entrance  is  the  Bull  Rock;  there  are  also  two  other  rocks  between.     The  best  bor. 
channel  into  the  harbor  is  between  Pennant  Point  and  the  Bull,  but  vessels  from  the  east- 
ward mny  run  up  between  Snmbro  Island  and  the  inner  Rock ;  you  are  to  leave  the  Isle 
of  Mitn  to  till'  iurl)onr(l  in  entering.     The  anchorage  is  within  the  island,  on  a  muddy  bot- 
tom, with  three  fathoms  water. 

The  strait  which  connects  the  harbor  with  Londy  Basin  is  exceeding  narrow,  and  has 
only  2  fathoms  water.     This  place  is  generally  the  resort  of  coasters  in  bad  weather. 

The  passage  between  the  rocks  and  ledges  that  lie  to  the  southward  of  Sambro  Harbor, 
may  oftentimes  conduce  to  the  safety  of  vessels,  that  make  the  land  by  mistake  so  far  to 
the  westwoni  of  the  light  as  to  be  unable  to  clear  the  dangers  southward  of  it,  but  should 
be  attempted  only  in  cases  of  emergency ;  the  depth  of  water  is  sufficient  for  the  largest 
ships,  but  great  prudence  is  required. 

TENNANT  HARBOR  is  situated  round  the  point  to  the  westward  of  Port  Sambro,  Tennant 
has  a  fair  channel  leading  in  between  Tennant  Great  Head  and  Island,  with  good  and  se-  Harbor. 
cure  anchorage,  particularly  above  the  islands,  in  6  or  8  fathoms ;  it  is  extensive  and  safe 
in  bad  weather,  and  the  dangers  are  all  visible.  TennanPt 

TENNANT'S  BAY  is  well  sheltered  above  Macworth  Point,  and  there  is  anchorrge  Bay. 


108 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tidei. 

Prosnect 
Haroor. 


Leith  Har- 
bor. 


Dover  Port. 


in  0  rathomi  a  bottom  of  tough  blue  clay.  The  pasBBCo  in  Wen  between  the  rocki  of 
Point  Mncworth  and  the  white  rocks.  There  \»  iiIho  a  ante  nassHge  bntwoen  Cnpe  Tea- 
nant  and  Hervey  Islnnd,  with  anchorage  in  from  5  to  8  fiithomn.  Wiien  entering,  the 
land  presents  to  the  eye  of  a  stranger  the  rudest  features  of  nature,  but  it  is  extensive  gnd 
safe,  and  in  bad  weather  the  dangers  all  show  themselves.  The  tides  rise  6  fuet,  and  it  )• 
high  water  at  three-quarters  after  7. 

PROSPECT  HARBOR  lies  about  3  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Cupe  Prospect,  which 
forms  the  west  side  of  Bristol  Buy;  and  its  entrance  is  encuml)ered  with  u  <  luHtor  of  j),|. 
ands  which  form  the  western  side  of  Bristol  Buy.  At  the  bank  of  those  idliindii  i«  a  con' 
Biderable  inlet,  called  by  Des  Barres,  Parker's  River,  but  little  frequented.  Prospect 
Harbor  wears,  at  its  entrance,  a  rugged  broken  appearnnco,  but  it  is  siifu,  comniodiuug 
and  extensive,  and  in  rough  weather  the  dantturs  inoHtiy  show  thetnoelvL's.  Vesadg 
coming  from  the  eastward,  and  rounding  Cupe  Prospect,  must  beware  of  a  ruck  with  17 
feet  over  it ;  it  lies  south  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  cape  ;  go  nut  between  it  and 
the  cape,  but  proceed  on  its  southern  side  in  'JO  and  121  futhoina  water,  by  keeping  morn 
than  half  a  mile  from  the  land,  you  will  steer  quite  clear  of  danger,  and  may  sail  boldly 
up  its  eastern  channel,  between  Prospect  and  Betsey's  Islands ;  having  passed  these,  the 
channel  narrows;  the  western  passage  is  between  Hobson's  Nose  and  Dorman's  Rock: 
there  is  good  anchorage  for  large  ships  above  Pyramid  Island,  and  also  for  smull  vessels 
within  Betsey's  Island,  in  4i  fathoms,  blue  stiff  clay.  At  the  entrance  to  this  hurbor 
depths  are  very  irregular,  and  there  is  a  rock  over  which  the  sea  breaks,  having  3  fath- 
oms water  over  it,  and  lying  2  cables'  length  to  the  eastward  of  Dorman's  Rock.  Thore 
are  some  residents  on  the  western  side  of  the  b'ly. 

LEITH  HARBOR.— This  lies  about  2i  miles  to  the 'north-westward  of  Prospect 
Harbor,  and  here  are  situated  the  inlets  called  Shag  and  Blind  Bays,  both  possessing  ex- 
cellent anchorages.  At  its  entrance  lies  the  Hug.  a  sunken  rock,  having  G  feetwuterover 
it,  and  bearing  E.  S.  E.  about  one  mile  and  a  half  from  Tayi«:'s  Island.  In  fair  weather 
the  Hog  Ruck  may  readily  be  perceived  by  a  constant  ripple  over  it,  and  in  bud  weather, 
with  an  onshore  wind,  it  will  be  distinguished  by  the  breakers.  There  are  good  chauneU 
on  both  its  sides,  but  the  eastern  one  is  always  to  be  preferred  on  account  of  the  ledge  which 
extends  E   S.  E.  about  half  a  mile  towards  it  from  Taylor's  Island. 

DOVER  PORT  lies  at  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Blind  Bay,  and  is  chiefly 
formed  by  Taylor's  and  the  adjacent  islands ;  this  is  the  Port  Durham  of  former  charts, 
aud  alfurdssufe  and  good  anchorage;  the  eastern  passage  is  the  best,  and  sailing  in,  you 
must  give  the  reef  that  stretches  oK  the  east  end  of  Taylor's  Islimd  a  sufhcient  berth, 
anchoring  within  the  body  of  the  largest  island,  in  7,  8,  9,  or  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 
The  western  entrance  has  some  suuken  rocks  in  it,  and  the  water  is  in  some  places  but 
shallow. 

Between  the  harbors  of  Halifax  and  Dover  the  shores  are  craggy,  broken,  and  barren, 
steep  to,  iron  bound,  and  destitute  of  trees ;  but  the  creeks  and  inlets  abound  with  fish, 
and  great  quantities  of  cod,  herrings,  and  mackerel,  are  caught  and  cured  here  for  the 
markets. 

MARGARET'S  BAY.— The  entrance  to  this  bay  is  to  the  westward  of  Taylor's 
Island  about  one  league.  The  bay  itself  is  full  35  miles  in  circumference,  in  length  9 
miles,  and  in  breailth,  from  Peggy's  Point  to  Owl's  Head,  about  2  miles.  Here  are  har- 
bors capable  of  receiving  ships  of  war,  even  against  the  sides  of  the  shore,  and  sufficiently 
wide  to  turn  in.  In  choosing  a  berth,  it  is  usual  to  be  guided  by  the  direction  of  the  wind, 
taking  the  western  anchorage  in  S.  W.  gales,  and  the  eastern  one  in  S.  E.,  where  you 
lie  land-locked,  the  bottom  mud. 
OwVt  Heal.  OWL'S  HEAD  is  very  remarkable,  being  round  and  abrupt.  The  lands  and  islands 
in  the  neighborhood  are  rugged  and  barren.  The  body  of  flood  tide  sets  in  from  S.  W. 
.,-1  ■ .  at  the  rate  of  one  mile  per  hour. 

Following  the  coast,  which  runs  nearly  2  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  Taylor's  Island  to 
East  Point,  there  is  a  rock  uncovared  at  low  water,  which  lies  near  the  land,  having  a 
passage  between,  with  4  and  5  fathoms  water.  The  shore  all  the  way  is  rugged  and 
steep,  against  which  the  sea  beats  violently.  N.  N.  W.  from  East  Point,  one  mile,  is 
Contact  Point;  and  in  the  same  direction,  li  mile  further,  in  Peggy's  Point;  beyond 
which,  a  short  mile,  is  Shut-in  Island,  200  feet  high,  and  covered  with  trees.  Otf  the 
southern  point  of  tliis  island  there  is  a  shoal  of  9  feet,  with  6  nnd  7  fathoms  between  it 
and  the  island  ;  and  near  to  Peggy's  Point  there  is  another  of  15  feet,  with  (i  fathoms  to 
th°>  northward  of  it.  During  southerly  gales  the  water  on  the  lee  side  of  the  islands 
becomes  smooth,  and  the  buttom  holds  well.  Indian  Hurbor  runs  in  here,  and  toims  a 
place  fit  fur  small  vessels,  but  aflfurds  no  shelter,  being  entirely  open  to  the  sea.  To  the 
E.  N.  Eastward  of  Indian  Harbor  is  Hagget's  Cove,  distant  one  mile,  a  cove  or  hurbor 
of  similar  description.  Luke's  Island,  Thrum  Cap,  Jollimun  and  Wedge  Islands  all  lie 
,1  ■  off  the  eastern  side  r)f  Margaret's  Bay,  and  contribute  to  break  off  the  force  of  the  sen,  so 

that  under  the  lee    :'  Luke's  and  Jolliman's  Islands,  there  is  good  anchorage  at  all  times 
.  -n  ,  >  for  ships  of  every  description. 


Margaret's 
Bay. 


■4-.   — L. 


■v 


•'*    BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


109 


FRENCH  COVE  is  easy  of  accoss,  and  may  be  conBidered  ai  a  natural  dock,  extfcn-  French  Cove. 
lirti,  wiHi  plenty  ot'watAr,  and  well  sheltered.     Thern  is  a  shoal  of  10  feet  water  lies 
opjiosite  to  the  entrance  of  this  cove,  nt  the  distance  of  two  miles;  but  as  the  islands  of 
,l,e  oDDtorn  short*  nro  buld  to,  no  vessel  need  go  so  fur  out  into  the  bay  as  to  approach  too 
near  this  dunser. 

HEAD  n.VRHOIl,  or  DELAWARK  RIVER,  lies  ut  the  further  end,  on  the  north-  Head  Har- 
(Mtern  extremity  of  the  biiy,  ond  is  an  anclioriigo  of  most  excellent  description,  forming  hor,  or  Delo' 
^complete  ii  pince  of  safety  that  a  fleet  o*"  snips  might  be  securely  moored  side  by  side,  ware  River. 
ind  remain  undisturbed  by  the  most  violent  hurricane.     The  surrounding  lands  are  high 
tnil  broken.     Mason's  Point  is  in  itself  a  good  farm,  well  stocked  with  cattle,  and  excel- 
lently cultivated ;  and   Moser's  Islands,  at  its  entrance,  are  used  as  sheep-folds.     The 
|,nd  oTi  the  larboard  wide  of  the  entrance  to  the  Head  Harbor  is  446  feet  high. 

INORA  \1   RIVER. — To  the  westward  of  Head  Harbor  is  Ingram  River,  running  in  Ingram 
to  the  northward  of  Moser's  Islands.     At  its  entrance  it  is  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  with  River. 
7, 6,  and  .5  fitlioms  water;  it  then  gradually  decreases  to  its  head,  which  is  shallow  and 
sandy.    To  the  westward  is  Oaspar's  Indent,  open,  shallow,  and  seldom  frequented. 
These  indents  or  coves  have  rugged  points  projecting  southward,  and  it  is  from  these 
places  small  craft  are  omployod  to  take  limestone,  building  sand,  Sic,  the  former  of  these 
being  of  a  very  superiorquality.  Cooper  and  Indian  Rivers  are  both  shallow  rocky  nooks, 
but  are  the  reports  of  salmon,  and  in  the  lakes  above,  trout  abound  in  great  quantities,  of 
Ji'jicnl-T  flavor,  and  commonly  ofa  deeper  red  than  the  salmon. 

HUHKR'r'.S  (JOVK  is  situated  at  the  N.  VV.  corner  of  Margaret's  Bay.  Here  nt  the  HuberCa 
pntraiico  is  a  rid^o  of  rocks  about  100  fathoms  long,  and  covered  at  high  water,  so  that  Cove. 
wiien  the  sen  is  smooth  it  l)ecomo8  invisiijlo.  In  order  to  avoid  this  dnngfi-,  you  have  only 
(oltopp  towards  tlie  western  or  eastern  side  of  the  harbor,  for  both  sides  are  bold  to.  The 
western  chimncO  is  much  tho  wider  and  better  of  tlie  two,  and  by  keeping  the  larboard 
shore  on  board,  a  stranger  or  a  ship  dismasted,  or  in  distress,  or  without  anchors,  may 
turn  in  and  lirid  slielter,  running  aground  with  perfect  safety. 

Long  t!(ivo  is  ','i  inil(!s  to  the  south  of  Hubert's  Cove,  and  affords  good  anchorage  •»  ith 
a  westerly  wind.  To  the  southward  of  Long  Cove  the  coast  is  bold  and  rugged,  witliout 
aiiv  (lHn<i(!r.  I'xi'opt  a  sm:ill  rock  of  six  feot  water,  wliich  lies  close  in  to  the  land. 

NOliTIl    WK.ST  HARBOR  is  about  one  league  to  the  southward  of  Long  Covo  :  nt  North  West 
itspntrancn  is  Hoisn  Isliind,  which  divides  it  into  two  channels.  There  is  a  good  passage  Harbor. 
with  10  latlioins  water  on  eacli  side  of  the  island,  and  small  vessels  maj*  find  anchurago 
bohind  it,  in  from  (>  to  f)  fathoms,  or  further  up,  in  5,  4,  or  3  fathoms.     Owl's  Head  is  uo 
abrH|)t  |)re(ipirf,  ni'd  tonus  the  south  point  of  entrance  to  North  West  Bay. 

SOUTH  WES  r,  or  IIOLDI-IRNESS  ISLAND,  is  a  remarkable  rocky  island,  full  50  South  West, 
foetliii;!!.   iiiul  steep  on   all  sides  :  directly  to  the  lairthward  of  the  northern  part  of  the  or  Hold er- 
Soutli  West  Isle  is  a  small  spot  of  3  f'alhoins  water,  and  to  the  north-westward  of  the  isl-  ncss  Island. 
anil  is  what  is  cominoni}'   calli'd  the  ^olllh  West  Harbor,  formed  between  Owl's  Head, 
wliicli  literally  is  a  rocky  island,   separatedt'rcnii  the   m^iin  by  a  very  narrow  passage,  not 
even  navigaM'  for  boiits  ;  here  nro  .5,  (J,  and  7  fatlioins  water,  but  the  place  is  seldom  fre- 
quonted.     To  tlie  K.  N.  E.  of  .South  West  Island,  distant  nearly  half  a  mile,  is  a  rocky 
fiioid  of  4  fitlioins ;  this  the  sea  freciuontiy  breaks  over,  in  bad  weather,  but  it  cannot  b*! 
conHJilonvl  il  i'i,"'ri)n-f,  ii'dn-js  to  ve-i-ich  that  flraw  very  deep  water. 

TIIH  HI  'US!-:  SIIOK,  or  DO(}  ROCK,  lies  about  south,  distant  one  mile  and  a  hdf 
from  the  South  West  Island  ;  directly  west  from  li^ast  Point,  distant  "3  miles  and  tliree-(|uar- 
ters,  and  from  Taylor's  Island  W.  by  N.  4  miles  and  one-third  ;  there  nro  several  Hinall 
punkon  rocks  a!)oiit  it ;  part  of  it  is  consecpiently  aliove  tlie  surface  of  the  water,  shelving 
oil  nil  side-",  an  1  thu  SIM '11  stormy  \V!:ilhi'r  iiriiiks  violently  over  it;  at  ii  little  distance 
from  it,  on  tlin  we-^ti-rii  side,  ar(>  G  f  ithiims,  and  on  its  OMStern  side,  at  ii  similar  distance, 
nro  8  fiithoiiH;  it  l!i:>ii  sinks  info  dnep  water;  between  the  Horse  Shoe  and  the  So'it!! 
West  Inland  ill, ire  are  1\J,  i  1,  W.  31,  and  30  latlioins  water.  Vessels  from  the  eastv.'iird, 
iMiiiiid  fur  i\I  ir;;i:ret's  Bay,  commonly  go  in  ln'twecii  the  Horse  Shoe  and  East  Point ;  a 
iiortlierly  (■(Hiise  will  carry  you  midway  between  them  right  up  to  the  head  of  the  bay, 
williniit  eiicMiiitering  aii}'  d.iiiL'er,  cxi'eiit  tliosn  already  described. 

To  tlie  we.,tward  of  South  Wtfstlsl.in  1  is  A-<p;)toj;on  Harbor,  too  shallow  for  shipping; 
nt  its  eiitraiHc  arc  Black.  Saddle,  and  (Jravclly  Islands  and  Slioals;  to  the  southward  of 
tli'.'se  is  .Seal  Ll'l^l^  shallow   and  daiiueroiis ;  it  lies  W.  i  N.  distant  2'1  miles  from  the 


sliali 
Horse  Shoe,  and  W.  S.  W.  nearly  3  mili-s  from  the  ^onthern  part  of  South  West  Island. 

IRONI?()U.\i)  ISLAND.— W.  S.  W.  A  S.  from  the  simtli  p.iiiitof  South  West  Isl- 
and, distant  '>  mill's,  is  Iroiilimiiid  Island.  iilHiiit  one  mile  long,  narrow,  and  steep  to;  it  lies 
S.  S.  K.  4  S.  one  mile  and  a  half  from  i!h'  (extremity  (d'tli(>  jioiiinsula  which  divides  Mar- 
garet's and  .Vlalioiie  Bays,  and  is  called  New  llarlnir  Point:  between  which  is  a  good  chan- 
nel, with  IVinii  iI  to  17  fatliom.)  water,  the  ■;:muii  1  bei.ig  cliie'ly  abliuk  sand. 

GRKKN  ISL  \ND.— S.  i  E.  di-^tant  on;^  Icauue  fmm  Iro.ilmn'ul  Island,  S.  \V.  by  S. 
7  miles  i'r.im  :'outli  West  Island,  W.  S.  W.  3  Iciviies  tVoiii  Taylor's  Island,  and  W.  N.  ami, 
W.  .^  W.  from  al'reasi  oi"  Samljiii  Ii;:ht!ioii^e,  lies  (Ti-ceii  Islr.iid;  it  is  small.     Midway  be- 
twoou  Ironbound  and  Green  Islands  there  is  said  to  bo  a  shoal  of  only  2  fathoms,  but  its 


Ironbound 
Island. 


Green  Isl- 


no 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


exact  position  is  not  accurately  known,  and  therefore  it  is  omitted  in  the  charts;  the  ma- 
riner, in  passing  through  the  channel  between  these  islands,  will  do  well  to  look  out  for 
and  gunrd  against  the  probable  existence  of  such  a  danger;  there  is  otherwise  water  suf. 
ficientiy  deep  for  any  vessel. 
MahoTU  MAHONE  BAY  is  separated  from  Margaret's  Bay  by  the  peninsula  upon  which  the 

Bay.  high  and  conspicuous  mountain  of  Aspotogon  is  situated,  whose  appearance,  in  three  re- 

gular risings,  is  a  very  remarkable  object  to  seaward,  being  visible  more  than  20  miles  off- 
.^  its  entrance  is  encumb'  red  with  several  islands,  between  all  which  are  good  passages  with 

plenty  of  water,  and  ioW  dangers;  these  lead  to  most  excellent  harbors,  and  places  con- 
venient and  well  adapted  for  the  fisheries.  We  have  already  noticed  Green  and  Ironbound 
Islands;  these  lie  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Bay  of  Mahone ;  adjacent  to 
these,  and  on  the  same  side,  are  the  Tancook  Islands,  Flat  Island,  and  the  Knohme  Rock- 
there  are  also  the  Bull  Rock,  and  the  Outer  Ledge.  On  the  western  side  are  the  Duck 
and  other  islands. 

Great  Duck  Island  lies  W.  by  S.  from  Green  Island,  distant  4^  miles.  Little  Duck 
Island  lies  N.  W.  i  N.  about  one  mile  and  two-thirds  from  Great  Duck  Island,  and  W.  A 
N.  5  miles  and  one-third  from  Green  Island :  nearly  midway  between  Green  Island  and 
Little  Duck  Island  lies  the  Outer  Ledge,  over  which  the  sea  always  breaks  ;  this  danger 
bears  from  the  east  end  of  the  Great  Duck  Island  N.  E.  i  N.  distant  one  mile  and  two- 
thirds  ;  and  from  Green  Island  W.  i  N.  one  league ;  over  it  are  4  feet  water,  and  round 
it  are  4i,  5,  and  7  fathoms. 

Flat  Island  lies  due  west  from  Ironbound  Island,  distant  one  mile  and  a  quarter;  and 
in  a  similar  direction  from  Flat  Island,  somewhere  about  one  mile  off,  lies  the  Bull  Rocks 
but  the  exact  situation  of  this  danger  is  not  correctly  ascertained,  fur  Mr.  Des  Barres 
places  it  more  to  the  southward,  and  M.  Lockwood  to  the  northward  of  this  position :  It 
is  a  blind  rock,  uncovered  at  one-third  ebb,  with  deep  water  all  round  it.  The  southern 
part  of  Flat  Island,  in  a  line  with  the  southern  points  of  Ironbound  Island,  will  lead  on  the 
rock,  as  Mr.  Des  Barres  has  placed  it,  while  the  northern  part  of  Flat  I^lnnd,  in  a  line 
with  the  northern  shore  of  Ironbound  Island,  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  it;  and  Ches- 
ter Church  open  of  Great  Tancook  Island,  will  carry  you  clear  to  the  westward  of  it,  in 
7  and  10  fathoms  water. 

Great  Tancook  is  one  mile  and  three-quarters  long,  and  about  a  mile  broad;  totheeaBt- 
ward,  between  it  and  the  main  land,  is  the  Litti  Tancook  Island,  sepnnited  by  a  channel 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  in  which  are  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms;  a  similar  passugo  is  between 
Little  Tancook  and  Indian  Point,  on  the  main,  but  there  is  a  middle  ground  in  it  of  4 
fathoms.  Knohme  Rock  is  above  water,  and  shoals  all  round;  it  lies  to  the  eastward  of 
the  south-oast  part  of  Great  Tancook,  and  at  this  part  of  the  island  is  auchorngo  in  8  or  10 
fathoms  water. 

Westward  of  Great  Tancook,  one-third  of  a  mile,  is  a  rocky  shoal  of  6  feet,  while  be- 
tween them  the  channel  has  10  fathoms  water:  to  the  W.  by  N-  of  this  slioni,  one  mile, 
is  another,  with  from  (J  to  12  feet  over  it;  between  these  shoals  the  passage  is  good,  and 
has  from  12  to  25  fathoms  water  in  it.  Off  the  north-west  part  of  Great  Tancook  is  Star 
Island,  and  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  it  is  a  rocky  patch  of  shallow  ground,  so  that  vessels 
should  never  attempt  the  passage  between  Star  and  Tancook  Islancls.  TIkmo  is  yet  an- 
other danger,  called  the  Coachman's  Ledge;  it  lies  2  miles  to  the  northward  of  (jlreat  Tan- 
cook, and  is  only  visible  at  low  water;  to  lead  clear  to  the  eastward  of  this  ledge,  you  should 
bring  the  eastern  point  of  Great  Tancook  and  the  east  side  of  Flat  Island  in  i/,<ie;  to  clear 
it  to  the  southv/ard,  bring  the  west  end  of  Ironbound  Island  open  of  the  west  part  of  Little 
Tancook:  and  Frederick's  Island  north  point  bearing  W.  S.  W.  i  S.  will  curry  you  safe 
to  tlio  northward  of  it. 

Having  passed  the  Coachman,  the  head  of  the  bay  lies  open;  on  your  starboard  side 
is  the  high  land  and  small  River  of  Aspotogon,  whore  small  vessels  occasionally  run  in 
and  anchor;  there  is  a  rocky  shoal  at  its  entrance,  which  must  he  avoided.  To  the  north- 
ward is  Cumberland  Arm,  easy  of  access,  and  allbrding  good  anchorage,  with  7  and  8 
fathoms,  observing  to  give  a  berth  to  the  starboard  shore,  which  shallows  somo  distance 
out.  There  is  also  good  riding  on  the  larboard  shore,  behind  an  island  which  lies  on  the 
eastern  side  of  the  Chester  Peninsula;  hero  vessels  can  ride,  well  sheltiued,  in  8  fathoms 
water. 

Chester  Town  is  situated  at  the  northern  part  of  Mahone  Bay,  and  is  surrounded  by  a 
fine  and  fertile  country;  its  inhabitants  are  industrious  people,  and  the  adjacent  islands  arc 
well  clothed  with  sheep;  wood  and  water  are  in  abundance,  and  several  vessels  are  built 
here;  the  anchorages  between  the  various  islands  and  before  t'le  town  are  good,  well 
sheltered  and  secure,  and  the  depth  of  water  moderate ;  tho  only  danger  is  a  shoal,  which 
«  partly  dries  at  low  water:  this  lies  W.  i  S.  from  the  Town  of  Chester,  from  which  it  is 

distant  one  mile  and  three-quarters. 

On  tho  larboard  side  of  Mahone  Bay,  and  directly  west  of  Tancook  Islands,  is  a  largo 
inlet  or  branch  of  a  river,  named  by  Des  Barres,  Prince's  Sound;  the  passages  into  it  are 


mm^mimm 


IVPP 


W^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ill 


T«iy  safe,  only  giving  a  wide  berth  to  the  southern  end  of  Edward's  Island ;  steer  mid- 
(hannel,  and,  when  well  in,  anchor  in  9  fathoms,  or  within  the  innermost  islands,  in  5  or  6 
fgtboma ;  further  in  it  becomes  flat  and  shallow. 

To  sail  into  Mahone  Bay  from  the  eastward,  the  first  land  visible  will  commonly  be 
Qreen  Island,  which  is  round,  bold,  and  moderately  high;  thence  to  Ironbound  and  Flat 
Islaods,  both  steep  to,  are  two  miles  and  three-quarters;  you  may  proceed  and  pass  be- 
tween them  towards  the  Tancook  Islands ;  these  are  inhabited ;  the  channels  between 
them  are  bold,  and  the  anchorages  Tinder  their  lee  good,  in  from  7  to  12  fathoms  water; 
but  if  you  o.re  proceeding  for  Chester  between  Green  and  Duck  Islands,  you  must  beware 
of  the  Outer  Ledge,  which  always  shows  iteelf  by  breakers;  the  mark  to  lead  clear  through 
this  passage,  is  Chester  Church  well  open  of  Groat  Tancook  Island;  this  mark  will  also 
carry  you  safe  to  the  westward  of  the  Bull  Rock,  already  described ;  and  when  you  get 
near,  or  within  half  a  mile  of  Tancook  Island,  steer  out  westward,  and  bring  the  same 
church  to  bear  about  north,  and  this  will  lead  you  up  to  the  town. 

LUNENBURG  BAY,  called  also  Malaguash,  is  now  a  place  of  great  population  and  LuTunburg 
considerable  trade ;  vessels  carrying  wood,  cattle,  vegetables,  &c.,  are  constantly  employed  Bay. 
from  here  to  Halifax ;  the  harbor  is  very  easy  of  access,  and  there  is  good  anchorage  to 
ths  very  town.     At  its  entrance  lies  Cross  Island,  about  30  feet  high,  and  containing  253 
acres  of  land,  on  which  a  lighthouse,  painted  red,  is  erected,  containing  two  lights,  one  Lighthouse. 
30  feet  above  the  other ;  the  lower  one  is  fixed,  the  upper  one  is  flashing  or  darkened  at 
intervals  of  one  minute :  the  building  is  red.     Crop  Island  is  low  and  thickly  covered 
with  trees.     On  the  N.  E.  side  of  this  island  is  a  nook,  where  coasters  ride  in  safety;  off 
this  part  lie  the  Hounds  Rocks,  which,  in  passing,  must  have  a  berth ;  the  west  and  south 
sides  of  the  island  are  bold;  and  two  miles  from  its  southern  end  is  an  excellent  fishing 
bank,  with  from  14  to  17  fathoms  water.    There  are  good  channels  on  either  side  of 
Cross  Island. 

Vessels  sailing  in  or  out,  through  the  northern  passage,  should  endeavor  to  keep  about 
the  middle  of  the  channel,  in  order  to  avoid  the  shoals  and  rocks  above  mentioned,  and 
also  those  adjacent  to  the  opposite,  or  Colesworth  Point :  having  passed  these  you  should 
keep  the  northern  shore  on  board,  bringing  Battery  Point  to  bear  nearly  N.  W.  by  which 
you  will  also  go  clear  of  the  Sculpin  or  Cat  Rock. 

The  Sculpin  or  Cat  Rock,  lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  bearing  N.  E.  distant 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  Oven's  Point;  according  to  Des  Barres,  there  are  but  three 
feet  over  this  danger,  but  it  will  easily  be  discovered  by  the  breakers  over  it  at  low  water. 
Sailing  through  the  western  channel,  which  is  to  be  preferred,  you  should  endeavor  to 
steer  N.  N.  W.  between  Cross  Island  and  Rose  Point,  where  you  will  have  10  and  12 
fathoms  water;  keep  the  Town  of  Lunenburg  in  sight  over  the  low  land  to  the  eastward 
of  Battery  Point,  and  this  will  lead  you  clear  of  the  rocky  reefs  about  the  Oven's  Point; 
but  beware  lest  you  lessen  your  water  below  7  fathoms,  for  the  soundings  about  the  point 
are  very  irregular;  bring  the  Wagon  Road  at  Lunenburg  open  to  the  westward  of  the 
Battery  Point;  and  this  will  run  you  to  the  westward  of  the  Sculpin,  and  between  it  and 
a  rocky  knoll  of  4  fathoms  water;  having  passed  the  Sculpin,  haul  up  towards  the  north- 
ern shore,  until  you  bring  Moreau  ond  Battery  Points  in  one;  this  being  the  direct  mark 
for  the  Sculpin  Rock,  steer  on  in  the  direction  of  the  Buttery  Point,  approaching  it  no 
nearer  than  a  coble's  length,  then  round  Battery  Point,  and  bring  the  road  well  open  of 
the  Moreau  Point ;  this  will  run  you  clear  into  the  harbor,  and  between  the  Long  Rock 
and  tlie  shoals  off  Battery  Point,  when  you  may  direct  your  course  for  the  town,  where 
you  will  find  12  and  13  feet  water  alongside  the  wharves,  and  near  to  them  20  and  24  feet, 
soft  muddy  ground,  ond  perfectly  secure. 

Vessels  having  occasion  to  go  to  the  southward  of  the  Long  Rock,  which  is  the  wider 
and  safer  passage,  will  observe  there  is  a  reef  runs  out  from  Woody  Point,  called  the 
Shingles,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided ;  to  do  this,  when  you  hove  so  far  entered  the 
bay  as  to  bo  equi-distant  between  the  Ovens,  which  ore  hollow  cliffs,  Battery  and  Woody 
Points,  then  edge  oflf  a  little  to  the  westward,  until  you  bring  a  furm-house,  that  standi 
over  the  middle  of  Sandy  Buy  on  with  the  end  of  a  wood  close  to  an  opening  hke  an 
avenue,  bearing  N.  W.  i  N. ;  steer  with  this  mark  on,  until  the  west  end  of  Lunenburg 
Town  comes  over  Moreau  I*oint,  then  steer  north-eustword  a  little,  approach  Battery 
Point,  and  proceed  as  befon  directed. 

The  best  anchorage  in  tlie  Bay  of  Malaguash  or  Lunenburg,  is  on  its  western  side, 
about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  ond  nearly  midway  between  Oven's  and   Woody 
Points;  where,  with  good  ground  tackling,  you  moy  safely  ride  out  a  south-easterly  gule; 
but  the  bottom  is  generally  rocky  ond  uneven.      It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  9  High  water. 
o'clock. 

DARTMOUTH  BAY. — This  is  situated  between  Oven  and  Rose  Points;  there  are  Dartmouth 
some  settlements  about  the  shoies,  and  on  an  island  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay.     It  is  easy  Bay. 
of  entrance,  and  you  may  anchor  abreast  of  this  island  in  3,  4,  6,  or  7  fathoms.   In  sailing 
into  this  bay,  it  will  be  always  advisable  to  borrow  somewhat  towards  the  Rose  Point 


m 


imp 


wmmm 


'm^mmm 


lit 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


V!fV 


shore,  because  of  the  shoals  which  lie  to  the  southward  of  the  Oven's  Point;  there  is 
otherwise  no  clanger  whatever. 

From  Lunenburg  to  the  Ironbound  Island,  at  the  entrance  to  Le  Have  River,  the 
shores  are  bold,  and  much  indented  with  irregular  inlets  or  bays.  Ironbound  Island  lieg 
about  W.  S.  W.  i  S.  distant  nearly  two  leagues  from  Cross  Island.  It  is  inhabited,  and 
some  small  rocky  islets  surround  its  northern  shore:  S.  E.  H  E.  If}  mile  from  this  island 
is  a  bnnlt  of  20  and  25  fathoms,  and  W  S.  W.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  that,  is  a 
small  spot  of  15  fathoms.  These  have  from  30  to  40  fathoms  about  them. 
Le  Have  LE  HAVE  RIVER. — Vessels  coming  from  the  south-eastward  for  Le  Have  River 

Jtiver,  will  not  fail  to  discover  Cape  Le  Have,  a  steep  abrupt  cliff,  107  feet  high,  bearing  AV  } 

S.  about  12  leagues  distant  from  Sambro  lighthouse.  S.  E.  by  S.  one  mile  from  the 
cape,  is  the  Black  Rock,  10  feet  high,  and  100  feet  long,  with  deep  water  all  round  it 
and  9  to  11  fathoms  between  it  and  the  shore,  except  on  a  small  knoll,  lying  off,  and  op- 
posite to  tlie  cape,  over  which  are  only  4  fathoms.  W.  by  S.  distant  3i  miles,  is  Indian 
Island;  nnC:  to  the  northward  of  the  cape  lie  several  islands,  with  passages  between  them- 
-  but  the  best  entrance  to  the  River  Le  Have  is  to  the  northward  of  them  all.  There  ig 
also  a  channel  to  the  northward  of  Ironbound  Island,  but  it  is  narrow,  and  to  navigate 
this  you  must  give  the  Ironbound  Island  a  good  berth.  You  will  then  have  from  12  to  4 
.  -M,4>  • .  V  ,  fathoms  water  all  through  it ;  but  the  best  passage  is  to  the  westward  of  the  island,  which 
is  above  one  mile  and  a  half  brond,  and  has  from  10  to  14  fathoms  water  within  it.  About 
3  miles  to  the  north-westwnrd  of  Ironbound  Island,  is  a  bar  which  runs  across,  from  shore 
to  shore.  Over  this  are  12  and  15  feet,  the  deepest  water  being  one-third  across  from 
the  eastern  shore.  The  soundings  from  Ironbound  Island  towards  the  bar  are  11,  14, 12, 
9,  7,  G,  5,  4.  and  3  fathoms,  the  latter  depth  being  close  to  the  edge  of  the  bar;  but  when 
you  are  well  over  that,  you  drop  into  4,  5,  and  6  fathoms,  the  river  continuing  navigable 
12  miles  up,  or  so  far  as  the  falls.  The  general  width  of  the  river  is  half  a  mile,  and  when 
you  are  8  miles  up  it,  you  will  meet  with  the  road  from  Lunenburg  to  Liverpool,  where 
a  ferry  is  established. 

Within  and  to  the  westward  of  Cope  Le  Have  is  Palmerston  Bay,  at  the  head  of  this 
is  Petit  Riviere.  Off  the  eastern  entrance  of  this  bay  lies  Indian  Island,  bearing  W.  by  S. 
distant  .'ii  miles  from  Cape  Le  Have. 
PortMetway.  PORT  METWAY  lies  between  Cape  Le  Have  and  Liverpool  Bay;  and  is  a  place 
now  rising  into  considerable  consequence  on  account  of  its  navigable  capacity,  and  its 
convenience  to  the  fiiheries.  The  entrance  to  this  port  bears  from  Indian  Island  W.  S. 
W.  distant  7  miles,  the  land  to  the  eastword  of  it  being  remarkably  broken  and  hilly.  On 
the  starboard  point  of  the  entrance  lies  Frying  Pan  Island,  which  is  connected  by  a  snndy 
reef  to  numerous  islets  which  stretch  along  in  a  N.  N.  E.  4  Northerly  direction,  until 
they  join  tlie  main  land.  That  which  is  ni'xt  to  Frying  Pan  Island  is  commonly  called 
Glover's  Isliind,  and  lies  half  n  mile  to  the  northward,  and  bears  S.  E.  i  S.  a  good  mile 
and  a  h.ilf  from  Mctway  Head.  The  enfronce  to  this  port  may  be  known  by  the  higli 
land  at  Ciipe  Metwoy,  and  the  low  ragged  islands  before  mentioned.  The  width  of  the 
chanm^l  is  about  seven-eighths  of  a  mile,  otid  the  depth  of  water  from  5  to  14  fathoms. 
Directly  in  the  way  of  your  making  for  the  entrance  of  the  channel,  lieg  the  South  West 
Ledge  and  the  Stone  Horse  Rock.  The  former  bears  from  the  Prying  Pan  Island  S.  J 
E.  distant  J  of  n  mile;  there  are  19  feet  water  upon  it,  and  the  sea,  in  rough  »venthor, 
break:*  ovijr  it.  The  latter,  or  Stone  Ilorse  Rock,  lies  E.  I)y  S.  distant  one-third  of  a  mile 
from  thi'  S.  W.  Breaker,  and  dries  at  low  water.  Tlicio  nre  6,  7,  and  R  fathoms  between 
it  and  thn  Frj  ing  Pun  Ledge,  and  should  you  pass  this  way,  you  must  give  the  i.^lund  n 

food  t)(>rtli,  on  account  of  a  s])it  whicli  runs  out  from  it,  in  the  direction  of  the  Stone 
lorso  Rock,  a  full  quarter  of  a  mile  ;  but  the  host  cDurso  will  be  half  a  mile  outside  uf 
both  tlieso  dangers,  you  will  then  pass  in  12  and  14  fnthoms  water,  and  running  on  W.  a 
little  soiitlioily,  toward  Kempenfelt  Head,  j'ou  will  open  the  rhanncd,  and  may  steer  in 
directly  norti).     Or,  3'ou  will  avoid  the  S.  \V.  Led^e  and  Stone  Ilorse  Rocks,  in  covaing 

LighUwusc.  from  the  cMsfwnrd,  hy  liringing  the  Livi-rpodl  liglithouso,  whiili  stands  on  Coffin  Island, 
open  nf  the  land  to  tlio  eastward  of  it ;  and  wlicn  Fryin;;  Pan  Island  comes  N.  N.  E.  dij- 
tant  1 '1  tni!r>.  st('(>r  in  N.  4  E.tliis  will  carry  yon  pnst  Metway  I'oint;  and  when  .ippnsite 
to  Neil's  Point  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  44  fathoms  water.  From  hence  mud  banks  cnn- 
sidc^radly  lurrow  tlii!  passaL'e.  and  a  pilot  will  he  found  ner(?ssary  ;  but  should  you  proceed 
fuitlu'r  without  oni-,  you  will  continue  inid-chjinncd  from  al)i'east  of  Neil's  Point.  N.  N.  W, 
4  N.  until  Collin's  Island  boars  west,  and  until  Alicia  River  is  just  opening  of  Point 
Lurv,  then  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  and  W.  N.  W.  4  W.  and  anchor  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  muddy 
groiiMil. 

To  run  u|)  Alicia  River,  you  must  sail  between  (Jrass  Island  and  Point  Lucy,  keeping 
close  to  the  soiillicrn  and  western  sliores,  in  order  to  avoid  the  flat  which  e\ten(ls  from 
the  iiorlliw  ard,  leaving  a  deep  but  narrow  r1iaii:i(d.  Harry  Bay,  or  Brancli  whi(di  runs  up 
totlic  we.tward,  issliailow  and  t'lillof  rocky  slionis;  and  so  is  Hri(!r  Buy.  which  is  situated 

Tide.  on  the  NT.  {•].  side  of  the  jiort.    The  tide  runs  commonly  with  grout  strength,  and  it  is  high 

water  at  -lo  minutes  alter  seven. 


t;  there  U 

River,  the 
Island  lies 
iHbited,  and 
thiB  island 
m  that,  is  a 

lave  River, 
aring  W  | 
e  from  the 
II  round  it, 
iff,  and  op- 
8,  is  Indian 
veenthem; 
There  ig 

to  navigate 
rom  12  to  4 
land,  which 
I  it.    About 

from  shore 
across  from 
5  11,14,12, 
■;  but  when 
ig  navigable 
>,  and  when 
pool,  where 

head  of  this 
ag  W.  by  S. 

id  is  a  place 
city,  and  its 
3land  W.  S. 
1  hilly.  On 
1  by  a  snndy 
BClioii,  until 
nonly  called 
n  good  mile 

by  the  high 
vidth  of  the 

14  fathoms. 

outh  West 

Isliind  S.  i 
gli  ivonthor, 
of  a  mile 
ms  between 

the  ihiliiiid  a 
the  Stone 

(1  outside  of 

ng  01)  W.  a 

iiiiy  steer  in 
ill  coviiini; 

otViti  Island, 
N.K.dij- 

fii  .ippnsite 
biinlis  con- 
ou  proceed 

t.  N.N.W. 

ng  of  Point 

[)nis,  muddy 

ey,  keeping 
NttMids  iVnin 
icli  runs  up 
li  is  sitiiatod 
iiid  it  is  hi^h 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  US 

At  Cnpe  lie  Have  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  8  o'clock,  tide  rises  from  5  to  7  feet.  Tidet. 

Malaquash  Bay 6  to  8 

Green  Island 6  to  8 

Muhone  Bay 7 

LIVERPOOL  BAY. — The  entrance  to  this  bay  bears  about  W.  by  S.  distant  17  or  Liverpool 
18  leagues  from  Sambro  lighthouse,  Halifax ;  and  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  15  miles  from  Cape  Bay. 
Le  Have.     Before  it  lies  Coffin's  Island,  which  is  now  dininguished  by  a  lighthouse,  LighUunue. 
painted  red  and  white,  horizontally,  75  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     The  light  is  on 
the  revolving  principle,  and  appeai*s  full  at  intervals  of  2  minutes.     Between  this  island 
and  the  western  land  is  the  bay,  atfurding  good  anchorage  for  large  ships,  especially  with 
the  wind  offshore.     In  the  bay  there  is  sufficient  room  for  turning  to  windward,  and  the  " 

deepest  water  will  be  found  near  the  western  coasts.  The  land  in  the  vicinity  of  the  har- 
bor is  broken,  rocky,  and  of  a  barren  appearance,  yet  the  commerce  of  the  town  is  very 
considerable.  The  channel  to  the  northward  of  Coffin's  Island  is  shallow,  having  n  sandy 
gpit  running  from  it  and  joining  the  main  land ;  therefore  none  but  small  vessels  ever  at- 
tempt  it;  but  the  passage  to  the  southward  is  full  one  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  has  15, 
16,  17,  and  18  fathoms  water.  Give  the  lighthouse  point  of  the  island  a  small  berth,  as 
a  flat  of  3  and  4  fathoms  encompasses  it,  and  there  is  no  other  danger.  Buld  Point,  or 
Western  Head,  is  bold  to,  and  rendered  remarkable  by  its  having  no  trees  upon  it.  Hav- 
ing entered  this  bay.  and  passed  between  Coffin's  Island  and  Moose  Head,  bringing  the  ' 
liahthnuse  to  bear  E.  by  N.  distant  1  j  mile,  steer  west.  This  will  bring  you  abreast  of 
Herring,  or  Schooner's  C  jve,  situated  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay,  and  affording  good 
shelter  from  sea-winds  in  3  fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  mud;  or,  proceeding  further, 
vessels  of  two  or  three  hundred  tons,  with  high  w:iter,  mny  pass  over  the  bar,  which  stretches 
from  Fort  Point  to  the  opposite  shore  ;  but  at  low  water  this  cannot  be  done,  for  then  it 
has  not  more  than  9  or  10  feet  over  it.  When  within  the  bar  you  will  perceive  the  chan- 
nel winds  S.  Westerly,  and  you  can  anchor  in  not  less  than  2  fathoms,  opposite  the  Town 
of  Liverpool.  Herring  Bay  is  much  exposed  to  the  heavy  S.  Easterly  swells  of  the  sea,  ^ 
and  has  not  room  for  more  than  two  sloops  of  war. 

It  is  high  water  in  Liverpool  Bay,  full  and  change,  at  50  minutes  after  7,  and  the  tides  Tides. 
rise  from  5  to  8  feet. 

PORT  MATOON,  or  MOUTON,  called  by  Des  Barres,  Gambler  Harbor.— This  PortMatoon, 
port  is  formed  by  the  Island  Matoou,  which  lies  across  its  entrances,  dividing  it  into  two  or  Mouton. 
channels.  In  the  eastern  passage  lies  the  rocky  ledge,  called  the  Portsmouth,  or  Black 
Rocks,  partly  dry.  This  is  about  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  island,  and  lies  S.  W. 
by  W.  distant  5  miles  from  Bald  Point.  The  passage  on  either  side  of  the  ledge  has  deep 
water,  with  sufficient  room  to  turn  into  the  harbor.  From  the  N.  W.  part  of  Mouton  a 
shnal  runs  off  a  full  mile,  having  2,i  fathoms  near  its  outer  extremity.    Over  some  parts  ' 

of  this  shoal  you  will  have  3,  3i,  and  4  fathoms.  Here  also  is  a  small  spot  of  foul  ground, 
wilh  20  feet  over  it ;  this  lies  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  N.  W.  end  of  Mouton  Island, 
and  N.  K.  ^  E.  from  the  northern  Spectacles  Island,  distant  half  a  mile.  The  Specta- 
cles lie  to  the  W.  N.  Westward  of  Mouton  Island,  and  are  visible  as  you  enter  thu  port. 
To  the  northward  and  westward  of  them  are  10,  11,  and  12  fathoms  water,  muddy  and 
sandy  ground,  with  good  anchorage,  secure  from  all  winds.  To  sail  into  Port  Mouton 
by  the  eastern  channel,  and  with  n  leading  wind,  to  the  northward  of  the  Black  Rocks, 
you  may  steer  in  W.  by  N.  passing  at  the  distnnceof  three-quarters  of  a  milofrom  White 
Point,  until  you  bring  the  Spectacle  Islands  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  i  W. ;  this  will  carry  you 
clear  to  the  northward  and  westwa -d  of  Mouton  Island  N.  W.  Shoal,  then  haul  up  S. 
W.  by  W.  for  the  anchorage  before  mentioned.  To  sail  in  to  the  westward  of  the  Black 
Rocks,  you  should  steer  in  N.  W.  mid-channel,  or  nearly  a  half  a  mile  from  Mouton  Isl- 
and, in  this  passage  you  will  find  from  8  to  15  fathoms  water;  always  giving  the  south- 
ern part  of  the  island  a  berth,  on  account  of  a  sandy  flat  which  runs  off  it.  In  adopting 
this  channel,  marinets  must  look  out  for  a  small  knoll  of  6  feet,  said  to  he  E-  N.  E.  |  E. 
distant  one  mile  and  a  half  from  the  southern  extremity  of  Mouton  Island.  This  appears 
to  be  a  modern  discovery. 

The  western  pnssuge  to  Port  Mouton  is  between  the  island  and  the  main,  and  only 
frequented  by  coasters  and  vessels  of  a  small  draught  of  water.  It  is  encumbered  with 
shoals,  and  too  intricate  for  strangers.  The  channel  is  narrow,  and  close  to  the  main  land, 
passing  between  it  and  the  Bull  Rock;  having  passed  which,  you  can  proceed  to  the  an- 
chorages, either  off  the  N.  W.  shore  or  Mouton  Island,  or  round  the  Spectacles. 

The  land  now  turns  S.  W.  i  W.  from  Point  Mouton  towards  Port  .lolie;  midway  ia 
a  black  craggy  point,  with  several  rocks  about  it.  S.  i  E.  distant  2^  miles  from  Black 
Point,  and  S.  W.  14  miles  from  Liverpool  lighthouse,  lies  Little  Hope,  nn  island  21  feet 
high,  and  200  fathoms  long.  This  is  a  very  great  danger,  and  should  have  a  beacon  to 
distinguish  it;  round  the  island  is  a  shoal  ground,  partly  drying,  and  with  3  and  4  fath-  .  [^ 

I  oms  upon  some  parts;  it  lies  direct  E.  S.  E.  from  the  eastern  point  of  the  entrance  to 
Port  Johe,  from  which  it  is  distant  two  good  miles.   Between  the  island  and  point,  some- 

8 


*wiwwiy!^  II  ^jnnmiiMjiiin, ^||^^^yw»l^w^i|[^^^^|^p^p^^!^g»7^B|^^.''"'l''llM■l!ll||^|^| 


yiv    vmft 


114 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


what  nearer  to  the  latter,  there  is  said  to  lie  a  dangerous  shoal,  not  hitherto  noticed  in 
the  chnrts. 

Port  Jolie  is  an  inlet  more  than  5  miles  deep,  but  very  shallow,  and  having  scarce  water 
enough  for  large  boats;  the  lands  adjacent  appear  barren  and  stony,  yet  have  some  fiiiQ. 
ilies  of  fishermen  settled  there.  Nearly  south  from  the  eostern  point  of  Port  Jolie,  dis- 
tant  one  mile,  is  a  spot  of  three  fathoms,  over  which  the  sea  commonly  breaks;  and  on 
the  western  entrance  of  the  port  are  some  rocky  ledges,  which  show  themselves  by  the 
breaking  of  the  water  over  them.  There  is  also  a  small  island,  lying  to  the  S.  Westward 
called  the  Little  or  Lesser  Hope. 

PortVEherl.     PORT  L'EBERT.— This  is  the  third  inlet  west  of  Liverpool,  and  moy  readily  be 
known  by  the  steep  and  abrupt  appearance  of  its  western  head;  and  also  by  Greeu  Is|. 
»  and,  which  lies  to  the  S.  Westward  of  its  entrance.     This  island  is  somewhat  renmik- 

able,  being  destitute  of  trees.  Port  L'Ebert  is  divided  from  Port  Jolie  by  a  peninsula 
which,  at  the  head  of  the  respective  ports,  is  scarcely  half  a  mile  across.  The  channel 
in  runs  nearly  north  6  or  7  miles;  but,  although  small  vessels  may  run  a  considerable 
way  up,  ships  of  larger  size  can  only  find  anchorage  at  its  entrance.  The  depth  half  a 
mile  from  the  head,  is  from  9  to  12  feet;  but  at  the  mouth  of  the  port  are  6,  4,  nod  3 
fathoms. 

Sable  litver.  SABLE  RIVER  lies  to  the  S.  Westward  of  Port  L'Ebert,  distant  5  miles.  At  its 
entrance,  nearly  midway  of  the  channel,  is  a  rocky  islet.  'J'his  lies  S.  W.  by  W.  from 
*  Green  Island,  distant  34  miles;  there  is  a  passage  on  either  side  of  the  rock;  that  to  the 
eastward  has  12,  13,  and  15  fathoms  water,  but  that  to  the  westward  is  somewhat  shal- 
lower. The  two  points  of  the  entrance  of  this  river  are  distant  from  each  other  one  mile 
and  a  quarter,  with  from  6  to  II  fathoms;  but  there  is  a  bar  which  renders  this  place  to- 
tfllly  unfit  for  afiTording  shelter  to  any  but  the  smallest  class  of  vessels.  It  is,  however, 
not  destitute  of  inhabitants,  some  ot  whom  are  settled  in  a  small  nook  close  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  river,  which  is  called  the  Little  Harbor. 

Rugfitd  hi.       RUGGED  LSLAND  HaRBOR  lies  W.  by  S.  distant  15  miles  Gom  the  Hope  Isl- 

mndtlatbor.   and,  and  E.  N.  E.  9  miles  from  Shelburn  Light.     It  seems  to  have  been  so  named  from 
its  craggy  and  rugged  appearance,  and  the  numerous  dangerous  ledges  and  sunken  rocks 
at  its  entrance.     This  harbor  is  difficult  of  access,  and  seldom  resorted  to,  unless  by  the 
fishcM'inen,  who  are  familiar  with  its  navigation ;  yet  the  anchorages  are  good,  with  4^  and 
.,  '■  4  fathoms.    During  gales  of  wind,  the  unevenness  of  the  ground  frequently  causes  the  sea 

,  to  put  on  a  most  formidable  appearance,  breaking  violently  from  side  to  side.      Olf  the 

western  head,  distant  about  a  mile,  is  the  Gull,  a  bed  of  rocks,  over  which  the  water  al- 
ways breaks;  but  between  the  head  and  the  Gull  are  from  6  to  8  fathoms.  Vessels 
coming  from  the  eastward  will  perceive  St.  Thomas's  or  Rugged  Island,  lying  S.  W.  by 
W.  from  Green  Island,  distant  6}  miles.  This  island,  having  liigh  rocky  cliffs  on  its  east- 
ern side,  affords  a  good  mark  for  the  harbor.  To  the  S.  W.  of  Rugged  Island  are  some 
rocky  ledges.  The  outermost  of  these  is  called  the  Bear  Rocks,  being  distant  from  the 
island  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  Between  Rugged  Island  and  the  Bear  Rooks,  are  oth- 
er dangers;  and  a  little  westward  of  the  Bears  is  a  sunken  rock;  these  three  latter, 
lying  in  a  sort  of  triangular  form.  W.  by  N.  from  the  Bear  Rocks,  distant  one  mile,  is 
the  Blow  Breaker,  a  rock  with  only  4  feet  over  it.  This  appears  to  be  the  Tiger  of  Dei 
Barros,  by  whose  description  it  should  bear  south  from  Rugg  Point,  which  is  the  east- 
ern boundary  of  the  harbor.  To  sail  from  the  eastward  for  Rugged  Harbor,  you  will 
see  the  eastern  cliffs  of  Rugged  Island  bearing  north,  distant  li  n»iie.  Keep  a  good  look- 
out for  the  Blow,  or  Tiger  Kork,  and  pass  well  to  the  outside  of  the  foregoing  dangers; 
and  having  cleared  these,  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  for  the  islands  on  the  left,  or  larlward  side  of 
the  harbor.  In  so  doing  you  must  be  careful  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  stretches  half  w;iy 
over  from  the  starboard  shore,  narrowing  the  channel  very  considerably,  so  that  between 
the  shoal  and  Mufliitt  Island,  the  passage  is  not  above  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide.  Pursu- 
ing this  direction,  you  will  readily  reach  the  anchorage  in  the  Northern  Arm.  Ii.  the 
best  of  the  channel,  Centre  Island  will  be  just  open  of  MufVutt  Island.  .Small  vessels 
may  be  well  sheltered  within  Cubb  Basin,  which  is  to  the  northward  of  MuH'att  Isliin,!; 
ond  vessels  coming  from  the  southward  or  westward  will  have  deep  water  on  either  side 
of  the  (tuII  Rucks,  or  between  the  Bear  and  Blow  Rocks.     At  Cape  Negro  and  Rugged 

tttgh  woit).   Island  Harbor,  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  8  o'clock;  and  the  rise  of  the  tide  is 
about  7  feet. 

GREEN  H.'XRBOR. — This  port  is  to  the  westward  of  Rugged  Island  Harbor,  having 
an  ishind  (m  its  western  side  of  entrance,  and  running  in  full  three  miles.  This  and  the 
River  .Ionian,  situated  still  further  to  the  westward,  appear  to  he  places  where  good  nn- 
chornges  nniy  be  obtained,  but  they  are  at  present  little  frequented  by  shipping,  although 
they  have  many  inhabitants.  They  are  open  to  southerly  winds,  which  cause  a  heavy 
rolling  sea. 

SHELBURNE  HARBOR,  or  PORT  ROSE  WAY,  is,  according  to  Mr.  Lock- 
wood,  justly  esteemed  the  best  in  all  Nova  Scotia,  from  the  ease  of  its  access,  and 
perfect  security  uf  it£  anchorage.      At  the  entrance  of  the  liarbor  is  the  Island  of  Rom* 


Green  Har 
bar. 


Shelbume 
Harbor. 


"*».«»' 


ppw" 


J.IJP.PII 


"-wj^ 


""WWJiWfWI^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


llf 


neoth.  or  M'Nutt'a,  which  is  nearly  3  miles  in  length,  and  li  in  its  broadest  part.  On  th& 
S.  E>  point  of  this  island  stands  an  excellent  lighthouse.  This  point  is  a  high  cliff  of  LighthMU*. 
white  rocks,  the  summit  of  which  is  without  trees;  the  west  side  of  the  island  is  low. 
The  lighthouse  is  painted  black  and  white,  vertically,  and  has  a  remarkable  appearance 
Id  the  diy  time,  on  account  of  a  dark  wood  that  is  behind  it;  while,  at  night,  two  lights 
are  exhibited  from  it.  The  upper  li^ht  is  125  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  the 
lower  about  one-third  from  the  top  of  the  building.  This  lighthouse  bears  from  the  light- 
house of  Sambro  W.  S.  W.  distant  30  leagues;  from  Cape  Negro  N.  E.  i  N.  7  miles; 
from  Point  Beny  S.  W.  i  S.  2}  miles;  from  the  breakers  south-west  of  Rugged  Inland 
W.  N.  W.  Ji  W.  8  miles,  and  from  the  Jigg  Rock,  which  has  only  6  feet  water  over  it, 
N.  N.  K-  i  E.  1|  mile.  When  coming  in  from  sea,  make  for  the  lighthouse,  bringing 
it  to  bear  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  by  N.  then  steer  directly  towards  it.  The  dangers  to  be  left 
to  the  eastward  of  you,  are  those  adjacent  to  the  Rugged  Rocks  already  mentioned, 
the  Bell  Rock,  which  is  always  visible,  appearing  black  and  bold  to,  lying  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 
dis^nt  2i  miles  from  the  lighthouse.  In  coming  from  the  westward,  you  may  steer  for 
the  entrance  on  either  side  of  the  Jigg  Rock,  and  if  for  the  eastward,  on  either  side 
of  the  Bell  Rock.  When  you  get  abreast  of  the  lighthouse,  you  may  sail  in  to  the 
northward  of  M'Nutt.'s  Island  about  N.  W.  by  N.  keeping  nearly  in  mid-channel;  the 
islaiut's  side  is  bold  to,  and  the  anchorage  is  good,  in  7,  8,  or  10  fathoms,  the  bottom 
mud;  keep  the  western  shore  on  board,  for  there  is  a  shallow  spot  somewhere  about 
the  eastern  side,  between  George's  and  Sandy  Points.      Sandy  Point  is  about  two  ' 

miles  beyond  the  N.  W.  part  of  M'Nutt's  Island;  give  it  a  berth,  for  a  sandy  spit  ex- 
tentis  from  it  300  yards.  With  M'Nutt's  Island  lucked  to  this  point,  the  anchorage  is 
exceedingly  good,  and  shipping  may,  with  good  ground  tackling,  ride  in  safety  during  the 
moat  violent  storm.     In  the  channel,  about  S.  by  E.  distant  nearly  one  mile  from  Carlton  ' 

Point,  lies  the  Adamant  Rock,  abreast  of  Durfey's  House.  This  will  easily  be  avoided 
by  going  into  no  less  water  than  4jl  or  5  fathoms,  or  by  keeping  Petit's  Island  open  of 
Surf  Point.  The  inlet  which  runs  up  to  the  N.  W.  has  several  shoals  in  it,  but  the 
eastern  shore  has  regular  soundings,  from  Sandy  Point  upwards,  and  is  free  from  dan- 
ger, while  in  the  upper  part  of  the  harbor,  above  Carlton  Point,  vessels  may  ride  in  5, 
6,  or  7  fathoms,  the  ground  holding  well.  We  have  already  stated,  that  your  course 
from  tlio  entrance  towards  Sandy  Point  will  be  about  N.  W.  by  N.  and  having  rounded 
Sandy  Point,  you  can  proceed  N.  by  W.  and  north,  according  to  your  wind. 

In  coming  trom  the  eastward  of  this  harbor,  be  careful  to  avoid,  and  give  a  good  berth 
to,  the  shoals  otT  Rugged  Island;  and  do  not  haul  up  for  the  harbor  until  you  get  the 
lighthouse  to  bear  W.  by  N.  i  N.  by  which  precaution  you  will  go  clear  of  every  danger; 
or  you  may  stop  a  tide  at  the  entrance,  in  from  16  to  10  fathoms,  sand  and  clay. 

Shelburne  affords  excellent  shelter  for  ships  in  distress,  and  is  secure  against  any  wind, 
except  a  violent  storm  at  S.  S.  W.  abreast  of  the  town.  The  wind  from  S.  to  E.  does  no 
harm,  although  from  S.  by  W.  to  S.  W.  by  S.  if  blowing  hard  for  some  considerable 
time,  it  will  t-  i;  the  smaller  vessels  adrift  at  the  wharves;  but  in  the  stream,  as  has  been 
observed  before,  with  good  cables  and  anchors,  no  winds  can  injure  you.  Here  you  nniy 
be8upj)lied  with  cordage,  duck,  spars,  provisions,  and  water.     Carpenters,  pump,  block,  f 

and  sail  makers,  can  bo  obtained,  if  required;  and  the  port  charges  for  vessels  which  put 
in  fur  supplies  only,  is  no  more  than  4d.  per  ton,  light  money,  on  foreign  bottoms;  but 
should  you  enter  the  custom  house,  the  duties  become  much  higher.  It  is  high  water,  High  wattr. 
full  and  change,  at  8  o'clock;  spring  tides  rise  8  feet,  neaps  (>,  but  a  fresh  breeze  from 
the  south-east,  commonly  brings  on  high  water  sooner,  and  causes  an  additional  rise  of  2 
or  3  feet. 

CAPK  NEGRO  HARBOR  is  named  from  Capo  Negro,  the  eastern  limit  of  an  isl-  Cape  Negt9 
and  wliich  lies  before  its  entrance;  this  cape  is  remarkably  high,  rocky,  and  barren,  bear-  Harbtr. 
ing  S.  VV.  4  S,  distant?  miles  from  Shelburne  lighthouse;  this  island  is  very  low  mid- 
way, and  has  the  appearance  of  being  two  islands.  There  are  two  passages  into  the 
harbor,  one  to  t'"'  eastward  of  the  island,  and  the  other  to  the  westward  of  it;  the  former 
is  much  the  btitui  of  the  two,  but  this  is  rendered  dangerous,  on  account  of  two  sunken 
rocks  which  lie  off  its  entrance;  these  are  called  the  Gray  Rocks  and  the  Budget:  the- 
Grey  Rock  lies  N.  N.  E.  from  the  cape,  distant  a  full  mile,  and  is  situated  nearly  on  the- 
etarboard  side  of  the  channel;  some  parts  of  these  rocks  are  always  visible,  and  serve  as 
amark  for  the  harbor.  The  Budget  is  a  blind  rock  of  G  feet,  lying  nearly  mid-charuiei, 
and  only  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  island,  having  deep  water  round  it.  In  the  chan- 
nel to  the  eastward  of  the  Budget  you  will  have  lU,  12,  and  14  fathoms,  and  the  best  direc- 
tion to  enter  the  harbor,  will  be  to  steer  one-third  from  the  rocks  off  the  eastern  point, 
until  Shelburne  lighthouse  is  shut  in,  then  you  will  be  within  the  danger.  There  is  ex- 
cellent anchorage  off  the  N.  E.  part  of  Negio  Island,  in  from  G  to  4  fathoms,  on  a  boMom 
of  stiff  mud.  The  northern  part  of  the  island  presetits  a  low  shingly  bench,  from  which 
a  bar  extends  quite  across  to  tho  eastern  shore,  over  which  are  15  feet  at  low  water; 
above  this  bar  it  is  navigable  full  G  miles,  having  a  smooth  clayey  bottom,  with  3,  4,  and  & 
fiithoms  water. 


11« 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  passage  to  the  westward  of  Negro  Island,  is  somewhat  intricate,  encumbered  widi 
rocks  and  dangers,  and  should  not  be  attempted  except  in  cases  of  extreme  emergency 
in  such  circumstances,  indecision  or  timidity  might  produce  certain  destruction ;  theii 
the  commander's  post  should  be  aloft,  and  if  not  possessing  confidence  himself,  he  should 
ailfect  it.  Mr.  Des  Barres  says,  "  if  coming  iVom  the  westward,  in  hauling  round  Point 
Jeffery,  to  avoid  the  ledges,  blind  rocks,  and  shonla,  extending  easterly  from  the  westera 
shore,  you  should  shape  your  course  N.  N.  £.  j  N.  towards  the  cape,  giving  the 
Savage  Rocks  a  berth  of  three  cables'  length,  until  you  open  Davis's  Island  a  sail'g 
breadth  off  Point  William;  Davis's  Island  is  the  largest,  and  westernmost  at  the  head  of 
the  harbor;  run  up  in  that  direction,  observing  to  keep  clear  of  a  sunken  rock  which 
liesE.  S.  £.  from  Point  William,  about  3U0  fathoms  from  the  shore.  Fishery  Beach  ia 
bold  to." 

To  sail  through  the  north-east  passage,  which  is  not  so  difficult,  keep  Grey's  Rocks 
on  board,  and  steer  N.  W.  for  Point  John,  until  you  see  across  the  isthmus  in  the  mid- 
dle of  Cape  Negro  island,  or  until  Shelburne  lighthouse  is  shui  in,  and  having  pugged 
the  Budget;  from  thence  haul  over  to  the  westward,  keeping  along  the  shore  about 
2  cables'  length  from  the  island  to  avoid  the  shual,  which  extenJs  half  the  distance 
over  from  Point  John  towards  the  island  ;  and  when  you  have  o;iened  the  small  isinndB 
at  the  head  of  the  bay,  shape  your  course  N.  N.  W.  to  the  anchr  ring  ground,  the  bottom 
is  mud  and  clay ;  along  the  N.  E.  side  of  Cape  Negro  island,  the  anchorage  is  good  atiS 
clay. 

The  River  Clyde,  which  descends  from  a  chain  of  lakes  that  extends  E.  N.  E.  andW. 
S.  W.  a  considerable  distance  in  the  interior,  fulls  into  the  head  of  Negro  Harbor,  after  a 
run  of  28  miles. 
P^rt  Latntr,      PORT  L ATOUR,  or  HALDIMAND,  is  situated  a  little  westward  of  Negro  Har- 
•r  Haidi-        bor,  being  separated  from  it  by  a  narrow  peninsula;  the  extreme  points  which  bound  the 
ntmd>  entrance  to  the  southward,  are  Point  Jetfery,  or  Blanche  Point,  to  the  eastward,  aod 

Point  Baccarro  to  the  west ;  between  and  within  there  are  several  clusters  of  rocks,  ren- 
dering the  harbor  unfit  for  any  but  small  crafl :  and  the  tide  leaves  the  head  of  the  inlet 
dry  in  many  places;  the  adjacent  lands  are  barren,  and  the  settlers  are  but  few;  never- 
theless, as  some  vessels  may  be  driven  to  seek  shelter  here,  the  following  directions  of 
Mr.  Des  Barres  may  prove  acceptable.  "  To  sail  into  ihis  \.  •%  coming  from  the  west- 
ward, continue  your  course  easterly,  until  you  have  Brehem  Isle  a  ship's  length  open  to 
the  eastward  of  North  Rocks  :  thence  you  may  steor  northerly  for  Isle  George,  and  when 
you  come  up  within  the  distance  of  two  cables'  length  from  its  south  end,  incline  to  the 
westward  in  a  direction  with  the  western  extremity  of  Pond  Beach,  until  you  open  Pros- 
ppct  House  on  the  north  side  of  the  northernmost  Mohawk  Ledges,  and  then  haul  into 
anchorage,  in  3  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

"  Nearly  midway  between  Baccarro  Point  and  the  South  Ledi^e  lies  the  Folly,  n  sun- 
ken rock,  within  which  and  the  western  shore  is  a  channel  of  6  fathoms.     The  Vulture, 
a  dangerous  breaker,  lies  S.  W.  j  S.  nearly  two  miles  from  Baccarro  Point." 
Baningtion        HARRINGTON  BAY. — This  is  a  spacious  inlet,  situated  to   the  westward  of  Port 
Bay.  Lntour,  and  formed  by  Cape  Sable  Island,  wliich  lies  in  front  of  its  entrance ;  there  are 

two  passages  into  it,  that  to  the  eastward  is  between  Baccarro  Point  and  Sublo  Islnnd, 
being  at  its  entrance  three  miles  wide :  that  to  the  westward  is  not  more  than  a  mile 
.-.,,1  broad;  both  are  encumbered  with  numerous  and  extensive  flats,  narrowing  the  pussnges, 

and  rendering  the  navigation  dangerous  ;  for  altliough  the  channels  may  gentM'ally  he  dis- 
covered, by  the  waters  appearing  dark,  yet  it  will  require  a  leading  wind  to  wind  through 
to  the  anchorage,  which   is  towards  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  about  one  mile  and  a  hiilf 
-.,    •■  b«low  the  town;  here  there  are  from  18  to  26  feet  water.     The  passage  to  the  nortliwaid 

and  westward  is  used  by  small  vessels  only,  and  is  not  safe  without  a  commandinfj  br-eze, 
as  the  fide  of  ebb  is  forced  unnaturally  through  to  the  eastward,  by  the  Bay  of  Fuudy 
tide,  at  the  rapidity  of  3.  4,  and  sometimes  5  knots  an  hour:  setting  immediately  upon 
the  rucks  which  lie  within  it. 

The  Town  of  Barringfon  is  situated  at  the  north-eastern  extremity  of  the  bay.  Ves- 
sels venturing  into  this  bay  by  the  eastern  passage,  must  ho  very  careful  to  avoid  Biicciirrc 
Point,  giving  it  a  wide  berth  of  full  2  miles  on  account  of  the  Bantan,  Shot  Pouch,  the 
Vulture,  and  other  rocks  which  lie  o(f  it;  the  Vulture  Rock  is  very  dangerous,  and  lies 
W.  S.  W.  from  Baccarro  Point,  distant  nearly  2  miles  ;  the  Bantan  bears  S.  S  W.tVom 
the  point  about  a  similar  distance,  and  from  the  Vulture  S.  E.  almost  one  mile ;  they  are 
both  exceedingly  dangerous. 
'OqM  SahU.  CAPK  SABLE  is  the  south-eostern  extremity  of  a  small  narrow  island  which  issep- 
arnted  and  distinct  from  Capw  Sable  Island ;  it  is  low  and  woody,  but  the  cape  itself  is  a 
broken  white  cliff,  apparently  in  a  state  of  decomposition,  and  visible  4  or  5  leagues  off; 
from  this  island  spits  of  sand  extend  outward,  both  to  the  south-east  and  south-westward; 
the  Eastern  Ledge  is  called  the  Horse  Shoe,  and  runs  out  '2i  miles  S.  E.  by  S.;  the 
Western  or  Cape  Ledge,  stretches  to  the  S.  W.  about  3  miles.  The  tides,  both  flood 
■nd  ebb,  set  directly  across  these  ledges  at  the  rate  of  3  and  sometimes  4  knots  an  hour, 


mpipl 


^implii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


117 


dating  a  strong  break  to  a  considerable  distance,  particularly  when  the  wind  is  fresh ;  it 
^11  tbeu  often  extend  full  3  leagues  out,  shitting  its  direction  with  the  tide,  the  flood  car- 
MiDg  it  to  the  westwarii  and  the  ebb  to  the  enstward,  the  former  running  a  considerable 
time  longer  than  the  latler.  This  rippling,  or  breaking  of  the  water,  may  be  considered 
luzardous  to  pass  through  in  a  gale  of  wind,^but  there  b  not  less  than  8,  10,  12,  and  20 
^boms,  rocky  ground. 

It  is  high  water  at  Cupe  Sable,  full  and  change,  at  three-quarters  afl:er  7  o'clock,  and  Higk  tvoler. 
the  spring  tides  rise  12  feet,  neaps  6. 

BUNNETTA  COVE.— To  the  north-westward  of  Cape  Sable  is  a  small  island,  called  Bonnetta 
Green  Island,  to  the  north-east  of  which  an  inlet  runs  in  to  Cape  Sable  Island,  forming  Cove. 
PoDDetta  Cove,  where  good  anchorage  may  be  found  in  3  fathoms  water ;  the  entrance 
to  it  is  narrow,  and  runs  in  between  a  spit  and  the  island  ;  this  will  be  too  difficult  for  a 
itranger  to  discover,  but  is  frequented  by  the  coasters  and  fishermen. 

FaVO£IT£  COVE  is  situated  in  the  Western  Channel,  and  about  the  middle  of  FavoriU 
Cape  Sable  Island  ;  here  also  small  vessels  may  run  in  nnd  anchor  in  2  fathoms,  behind  a  Cove. 
imall  islet  which  lies  mid-channel,  at  its  entrance,  affording  a  passage  on  either  side,  but 
that  to  the  eastward  is  the  best,  nnd  has  the  deeper  water.  With  S.  W.  gales  there  ia 
always  good  anchorage  off  the  N.  E.  side  of  Cape  Sable  Island ;  but  the  Shag  Harbor, 
ffbich  lies  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  Western  Channel,  and  bears  N.  N.  W.  from  Bon- 
netta Cove,  is  full  of  shoals,  and  must  not  be  attempted,  unless  you  are  well  acquainted 
iritb  it.     It  is  here  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  9  o'clock,  spring  tides  11  feet,  neaps  8.  HtghvnUtrt 

THE  BRAZIL  ROCK. — This  is  a  tiat  rock,  covering  a  space  of  10  yards,  over  which  Braal  R$«k. 
are  only  8  and  9  feet  at  low. water ;  a  tail  extends  90  or  lOOyards  from  its  base,  having  6 
to  8  fHthoms  water :  the  tide,  running  strong  over  this,  causes  a  ripple,  and  makes  the  rock 
appear  larger  than  it  really  is.  Southward  of  the  rock,  at  the  distance  of  about  a  mile, 
YOU  will  have  35  and  34  fathoms,  then  30  and  22  as  you  appraoch  nearer  to  it;  but  to- 
wards the  Cape  Sable  shore  the  soundings  are  regular,  from  19  to  15  fathoms;  you  will 
then  lessen  your  water  to  10  and  7  fathoms,  when  you  will  be  at  the  edge  of  the  Race- 
horae  Shoal ;  to  the  northward  of  the  Brazil  Rock,  in  the  direction  of  the  Bantan  Rock, 
vou  will  have  IG,  19,  15,  17,  16,  15,  and  10  fathoms ;  with  this  latter  depth  you  will  b« 
ttu  the  Bantan,  and  must  tack  to  the  westward.  The  exact  position  of  this  rock  has 
been  much  disputed,  but  the  place  assigned  to  it  by  Mr.  Des  Barres  appears  to  be  nearly 
correct;  its  latitude  is  43°  24'  15"  N .  and  longitude  65°  22'  W. 

Magnetic  Bearings  and  Distances  between  Halifax  and  Cape  Salle. 

From  Sambro  lighthouse  to  Cross  Island,  Lunenburg,  nearly  W 84  leagues. 

Cape  Le  Have W.  |  S 12        do. 

Liverpool  lighthouse, W.  by  S 17i       do. 

Hope  Island,  near  Port  .Tolie,  ..W.  S.  W.  i  W 21        do. 

. — entrance  of  Port  Shelburne,. . . .  W.  S.  W 29        do. 

. Cape  Negro, W  S.  W.  a  little  westerly,.  31i       do. 

. Cape  Sable W.  S.  W.  i  W.* 36        do. 

Brazil  Rock Nearly  W.  S.  W 34i       do. 

Shelburne  lighthouse  to  Cape  Negro, S.  W.  i  S 7     miles. 

Cape  Negro  to  the  Brazil  Rock, S.  W.  |  S 10        do. 

Cape  Sable  to  the  Brazil  Rock, S.  E.  by  E 8i        do. 


THE  Ii$LE  OF  SABLE  AND  B AIVKS  OF  HOVA  SCOTIA. 

ON  the  days  of  the  new  and  full  moon,  it  is  high  water  along  the  south  shore  of  the  High  wattr. 
island  at  half  an  hour  after  8  o'clock,  and  it  flows  till  half  an  hour  past  10  o'clock  on  the 
north  side,  and  till  near  11  o'clock  in  the  pond.  Common  spring  tidrs  rise  seven  feet  per- 
pendicular, and  neap  tides  four.  The  flood  sets  in  from  the  S.  S.  W  at  the  rate  of  half 
a  mile  an  hour,  but  it  niters  its  course  nnd  increases  its  velocity,  near  the  ends  of  the  island. 
At  half  flood  it  streams  north,  nnd  south  at  half  ebb.  with  great  swiftness,  across  the  north- 
east and  north-west  bars;  it  ia  therefore  dangerous  to  approach  without  a  cotnmnnding 
breeze.  The  north-east  bar  runs  out  E.  N.  E.  about  six  leagues  from  the  eastern  ex- 
tremity of  the  island,  all  which  is  very  shoal,  having  in  a  few  places  no  more  than  2,  3, 
or  4  fathoms  water,  whence  it  continues  E.  and  E.  by  S.  deepening  gradually  to  12,  15, 
and  18  fathoms  wafer,  at  the  distance  of  8  or  10  leagues,  nnd  shaping  to  the  S.  and  S.  E. 
sloping  gently  to  60  and  70  fathoms  water.     To  the  northward  and  eastward  it  is  very 


*This  course  cannot  bo  sailed,  upon  account  of  the  intervention  of  the  land. 


ilg  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

■tenp,  and.  in  a  run  of  3  milos,  the  water  will  deepen  to  130  fathoms.  Abreast  of  the 
body  of  the  island,  the  soundings  are  more  gradual.  'I'he  shoni  ground  of  the  north-west 
bar  extends  5  leagues  to  the  westward,  and  deepens  gradually  to  70  fathoms  water,  at 
the  distance  of  20  or  25  leagues  from  the  isle,  and  winds  easterly  and  southerly,  until  it 
meets  the  soundings  off  the  north-east  bar.  The  quality  of  the  bottom  in  genenij  isvorv 
fine  Blind,  with  a  few  small  transparent  stones;  to  the  northward,  and  close  to  the  north- 
east  bar,  the  sand  is  mixed  with  many  black  specks;  but  near  the  north-west  bni,  the 
sand  has  a  greenish  color.  The  north-east  bar  breaks,  in  bad  weather,  at  the  distance  of 
8  and  10  leagues  from  the  island.  The  north-west  bar  breaks,  in  bad  weather,  sometimes 
20  miles  from  the  island. 

Extraclofa  Letter  from  Capt.  Joseph  Darby,  Superintendant  of  Sable  Tsland,  to  the  Editors, 

"  I  have  known  the  island  for  the  last  twenty-eight  years,  in  which  time  the  west  end 
has  decreased  in  length  about  7  miles,  although  the  outer  breakers  of  the  N.  W.  bar 
have  the  same  bearing  from  the  west  end  of  the  island  thot  they  then  had,  about  N.  W. 
by  compass,  distant  about  8  miles,  which  clearly  shows  that  the  whole  of  the  bank  and 
the  bar  travels  to  the  eastward.  The  ground  is  high  and  the  water  shoal  outside  of  the 
breakers  7  or  8  miles  in  a  N.  W.  direction.  The  flood  tide  sets  across  the  bar  to  the 
northward  and  eastward  very  strong,  and  the  ebb  tide  to  the  opposite  point,  changing 
alternately  at  half  flood  and  half  ebb.  The  ground  to  the  southward  and  westward  of 
the  bar  is  very  regular,  deepening  very  slowly  to  a  considerable  distance;  but  to  the 
northward  and  eastward  the  ground  is  very  steep,  and  from  the  breakers,  or  from  very 
shoal  ground  outside  of  the  breakers,  you  fall  into  deep  water  all  at  once.  The  bank 
to  the  N.  W.  is  very  uneven,  and  curves  round  to  the  northward  in  a  steep  ridge,  nnd  ni 
the  distance  of  about  35  miles  from  the  island,  in  a  N.  W.  direction,  are  10  fathoms  water 
and  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  from  that  the  ground  falls  very  suddenly  into  deep  water. 
This  ridge  joins  the  middle  ground,  and  extends  in  an  easterly  and  a  N.  E.  direction  to 
a  considerable  distance,  with  shoal  water;  the  bottom  in  small  ridges,  with  11,  Vi,  n, 
13  fathoms  of  water,  and  so  on,  over  it;  and  between  this  bank  and  the  bar,  or  the  island, 
the  water  is  very  deep,  80  or  90  fathoms.  Tlie  bank  extends  to  the  eastward  aiirc^ast  of 
the  island,  the  80uthernm>  .  edge  of  the  bank,  from  20  to  25  miles  to  the  northward  of 
the  island. 

"The  east  end  has  altered  very  little  since  my  knowledge  of  it,  except  in  height,  which 
is  much  greater  than  it  was,  and  the  whole  island  seems  to  increase  in  height  every  year, 
but  grows  narrower.  There  is  a  low  bar  of  dry  sand  running  from  the  high  land  (if  the 
east  end,  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  about  three  miles,  from  whence  shoal  water,  that  idwnys 
breaks,  extends  about  two  miles  further,  in  an  E.  N.  E.  direction,  outside  of  wliicli,  for 
a  distance  of  anout  six  miles,  is  a  passage  across  the  bar,  with  from  2^  to  3  fatlionis  of 
water  in  it.  Outside  of  that,  again,  is  a  piece  of  high  ground  that  always  breaks,  and  is 
sometimes  dry,  and  extends  in  an  E.  N.  E.  direction  between  2  and  3  miles,  from  which 
the  shoal  ground  continues  in  the  same  direction  some  miles  further.  The  fluud  tide 
across  this  bar  sets  very  strong  to  the  northward,  and  the  ebb  tide  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion, but  not  so  strong.  The  soundings  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  the  bar  are  flat 
and  regular  for  a  considerable  distance,  but  to  the  northward  and  westward  the  ground  is 
very  steep — close  to  the  breakers  10  fathoms,  and  goes  down  suddenly  into  70  or  80  fath- 
oms to  100  or  upwards.  I  believe,  in  general,  there  is  a  very  strong  current  setting  to 
the  W.  S.  W.  between  the  Sable  Bank  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  stream;  nnd  there  is  a 
strong  current  sets  down  the  western  side  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  stream,  in  a  S. 
S.  W.  direction.  The  current  along  the  south  side  of  the  island  is  very  shoal  water,  runs 
both  east  and  west,  and  is  principally  intiuenced  by  the  winds.  The  most  of  the  wreclis 
that  happen  here  are  in  error  of  their  longitude;  for  instance,  vessels  hound  to  tlie  east- 
ward think  themselves  past  the  island  when  they  get  on  shore  upon  it,  and  vessels  hound 
to  the  westward  (say  from  Europe)  do  not  think  themselves  so  far  to  the  west  vard 
when  they  get  on  shore  upon  it.  I  have  known  several  coses  of  vessels  from  Europe 
that  have  not  made  an  error  in  their  longitude  exceeding  half  a  degree,  until  they  came 
to  the  Banks  of  Newfoundland,  and  from  that  here,  in  moderate  weather  and  light  winds, 
have  tnade  errors  of  from  sixty  to  a  hundred  miles,  which,  I  think,  goes  so  far  to  prove 
the  existence  of  a  westerly  and  southerly  current  between  the  (Jrand  Banks  and  here, 
and  also  of  the  existence  of  a  westerly  current  between  the  Snhle  Bank  nnd  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico stream,  which  will  bo  stronger  or  weaker  according  to  the  distance  between  the  stream 
and  the  banks. 

"  When  a  casualty  has  occurred,  and  you  find  that  you  are  on  the  body  of  the  island,  I 
would  recommend  that  nothing  of  masts  or  rigging  be  cut  away,  without  the  vessel  should 
be  very  tender,  and  then  you  may  do  it  to  ease  her  a  little;  but  a  vessel  of  ordinary 
strength  will  bear  her  spars  until  she  heaves  up  on  the  beach,  or  settles  in  the  sanl  and 
lays  quiet,  as  lives  and  property  have  often  been  saved  by  a  vessel  having  her  spors  stand- 
ing, 08  from  the  heads  of  which  you  may  often  send  aline  on  shore  when  it  is  not  possible 


mmmm 


mmi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


119 


to  work  a  boat;  and  by  sending  a  good  hawser  after  it  and  securinf;  it  well  on  sho'-e,  a 
chair  or  other  more  efficient  nrticle  may  be  rigged  for  conveying  piissengers,  or  r  .hers, 
or  valuable  property,  over  the  brealters  in  snt'ety;  as  from  the  nature  of  the  soft  snndy 
bottom,  a  vessel  will  not  go  to  pieces  ns  soon  ns  if  she  was  on  rocks,  and  by  the  ri,  ging 
being  left  standing,  it  may  afterwards  be  saved,  whereas,  if  the  mosts  are  cut  away,  the  , 

wliole  of  the  rigging  goes  with  them,  and  all  get  tangled  and  hurried  in  the  sand,  and 
are  generally  totally  lost.     But  if  you  are  on  either  of  the  bars,  the  first  consideriition  ' 

should  be  to  secure  the  boats  and  lighten  the  ship,  and  leave  her  ns  soon  as  ever  you  have 
to  iibaiidoD  the  hope  of  getting  her  oflf;  endeavor  to  get  to  the  leeward  of  the  breakers, 
and  land  on  the  island,  according  to  circumstances,  endeavoring  to  land  on  the  north  side  '^ 

if  possible,  ns  vessels  that  get  on  the  bars  very  soon  disappear  altogether,  either  by  going 
to  pieces  in  the  irregular  sea  and  strong  currents,  or  by  rolling  over  the  steep  bank  to  the 
northward,  and  sinking  in  deep  water.  When  property  can  be  saved  on  the  island,  it  is 
proper  for  the  master  and  his  crew  to  do  the  utmost  in  their  power  to  save  it;  they  can 
get  the  assistance  of  the  people  of  the  island,  with  a  boat  and  teams  of  horses,  not  for 
hire,  for  they  are  employed  by  government,  and  the  island  draws  a  salvage  of  whatever 
mny  be  saved  on  it,  which  is  apportioned  by  the  magistrates  at  Halifax :  the  more  there 
is  saved  by  the  master  and  crew  the  less  salvage  will  be  taken ;  but  it  is  very  often  the 
case  that  the  crews  will  not  assist  to  save  property,  and  whatever  is  saved  is  done  exclu- 
sively by  the  establishment,  in  which  case  the  salvage  is  pretty  high.  There  are  build- 
ings on  the  island  for  the  shelter  of  persons  cast  away  on  it,  with  provisions  for  those 
who  save  none;  also  some  buildings  for  the  reception  of  perishable  goods.  These  build- 
ings, and  whatever  is  put  into  them,  are  under  the  charge  of  the  superintendnnt.  All 
property  saved  must  be  sent  to  Halifax  by  the  first  opportunity:  the  master  can  keep 
inventories  and  continue  with  the  goods  if  he  likes,  but  has  no  control  over  their  desti- 
nntion;  but  I  believe,  by  petitioning  the  governor  at  Halifax,  he  might  get  permission  to 
take  them  where  he  pleases,  on  paying  the  duty  and  salvage.  When  any  property  is 
saved  on  the  island  it  is  sent  to  Halifax,  where  it  is  advertised  and  sold  by  order  of  the 
commissioners,  and  the  proceeds  paid  into  their  hands,  out  of  which  they  pay  the  king's 
dues,  the  salvage  apportioned  by  the  magistrates,  the  expenses  of  freight,  and  other 
small  charges,  and  the  residue  is  paid  over  to  the  master,  or  other  autliorized  agi-nt,  for 
the  benefit  of  tho  underwriters  and  all  concerned.  The  superintendnnt  is  under  the 
control  of  the  governor  and  the  commissioners,  and  can  take  no  new  step  without  orders 
from  them.  The  above  and  before  mentioned  custom  is  nn  old  and  long  established 
rule,  and  supported  by  many  acts  of  the  Provincial  Legislature,  and  more  particularly 
by  an  act  passed  the  4th  day  of  April,  1836.  and  in  the  sixth  year  of  his  Majesty's  reign, 
which  does  more  fully  explain  and  set  forth  tho  rules  for  the  guidance  of  the  ostublisb- 
ment. 

"  Tho  north  side  is  very  safe,  ns  a  vessel  may  approach  any  part  of  it  within  a  mile, 
and  vessels  in  distress  might,  by  standing  in  on  the  north  side  and  near  the  west  end, 
where  the  principal  establishment  is,  get  a  supply  of  fresh  water  or  fuel,  or  a  partial  sup- 
ply of  provisions  and  fresli  meat,  except  in  cases  of  a  strong  breeze  and  in  heavy  sea  on 
shore.  There  is  no  difficulty  in  working  boats  on  this  side  of  the  island.  The  south  side 
is  also  very  safe  to  approach  in  cleor  weather,  but  from  the  heavy  sea  that  constantly 
breaks  on  it,  the  communication  with  a  vessel  by  bouts,  is  extremely  difficult,  except  after 
a  spell  of  northwardly  winds  for  three  or  four  days,  when  the  sea  becomes  smooth,  and 
boats  may  work." 

As  when  a  vessel  is  on  shore  in  a  fog,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  ascertain  her 
true  position,  in  order  to  save  tho  ship  or  the  lives  of  those  on  board,  the  following  direc- 
tions should  be  attended  to. 

If  breakers  are  seen  to  extend  in  a  direction  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  you  are  on  the  N.  W.  bar.  Pireetton$ 

If  breakers  are  seen  to  extend  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  you  are  on  the  N.  E.  bar. 

If  breakers  are  seen  to  the  northward  ahead,  and  extending  from  east  to  west,  you  are 
on  the  south  side  of  the  island. 

If  breakers  are  seen  to  the  southward  ahead,  and  extending  from  east  to  west,  you  are 
on  the  north  side  of  the  island. 

The  eastern  end  of  this  island  is  in  43°  59'  N.  lat.,  long.  59°  48'  W.:  the  western  end 
is  in  43°  57'  N.  Int.,  long.  60°  14'  W. 

Ice. — II.  M.  packet  brig  Express  fell  in  with  two  islands  of  ice  on  Sable  Island  Bank,   Te* 
tho  7th  .July,  1836.  in  45  fathoms  water,  estimated  heights  180  and  150  feet.     Latitude 
43°  13'  N.,  long.  25°  17'  W.     Air  46°,  water  42°. 

Tho  Nova  Scotia  Banks  extend  nearly  70  leagues  in  a  westerly  direction.  From  the 
I.slo  of  .Sable,  they  are  from  20  to  25  leagues  wide,  and  their  inner  edges  are  from  14  to 
18  leagues  off  shore.  They  are  intersected  by  narrow  winding  channels,  (the  bottom  of 
which  is  mud,)  running  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  Between  these  banks  and  the  shore  are  several 
small  inner  banks,  with  deep  water  and  muddy  bottom.  The  water  deepens  regularly 
from  the  Isle  of  Sable  to  the  distance  of  22  leagues,  in  50  fathoms,  fine  gravel ;  thence  pro- 
ceeding westward,  the  gravel  becomes  coarser;  continuing  westward  to  the  western  ex- 


.♦K! 


190 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Smmdingi.  tremity  of  the  biinkR,  the  sounding!  nre  rocky,  nnd  tboalen  to  18  and  16  fathonti  water 
Cape  Snble  bearing  N<  by  W.  diittaut  15  leagues.  ' 

The  south-weat  extremity  of  Uanauereau,  lina  seventeen  leagues  E.  N.  E.  oneholf  K, 
from  the  east  end  of  tlio  Isle  of  Sitble.  This  bnnk  extends  E.  by  N.  35  leagues,  nnd  is 
near  8  leagues  in  width  ;  its  shualest  part  is  about  5  leiigues  from  its  eastern  extremity 
in  16  and  18  fathoms  water,  slimy  sand  and  clams:  whence  it  deepens  regularly  every 
way  to  60  and  70  fathoms,  towards  the  edges  of  the  bank. 

This  bank  i*  steep  to;  and  from  its  soundings  on  the  north  side,  you  fall  immediately 
into  90  or  lUO  fathoms  water,  block  mud ;  and  on  the  south  side,  into  120  fiithuina. 

StMmdingi.  Remarks. — It  may  be  observed,  generally,  that  the  soundings  all  along  the  Nova  Sco- 
tian  Coast,  between  Cape  Canso  on  the  E.  N.  E.  and  Cape  Sable  to  the  W.  S.  W,  ^fg 
very  irregular;  from  25  to  40  and  60  fathoms;  therefore,  in  foggy  weather,  du  not 
■taiid  nearer  in  shore  than  35  fathoms,  lest  you  fall  upon  some  of  the  ledges.  By  no 
means  make  too  bold  with  the  shore  in  such  weather,  unless  you  are  sure  of  the  part 
of  the  coast  you  are  on ;  for  you  may,  otherwise,  when  bound  fur  Halifax,  fall  uoex- 
pectediy  into  Mahone  and  Meckleuburgh  Bays,  and  thus  be  caught  and  endangered  by  a 
S.  E.  wind. 

The  weather  on  the  coast  is  frequently  foggy  in  the  spring  and  some  part  of  the  gum- 
mei-;  in  particular  at  the  distance  of  4  or  5  leagues  from  the  shores ;  but  on  approaching 
nearer,  the  weather  is  found  more  clear;  and  with  the  wind  from  the  laud,  it  ia  perfuctly 
clear  and  pleasant. 


THE  WEST  AND  NORTHERN  COASTS  OF  NOVA  SCOTIA, 
AND  THE  COAST  OF  NEW  BKUN.SVVICK,  INCLUDING  THE 
BAY  OF  FUNDY,  WITH  MANAN  ISLANDS,  &c. 


Tides. 


Lighthouse. 


Rf.harks. — Whoever  examines  and  well  considers  the  situation  of  the  south-western 
coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  Manan  Islands,  will  readily  perceive  the 
dangers  attendant  upon  the  navigation  of  its  harbors,  its  natural  exposure  to  the  Atliintic 
Ocean,  the  variableness  of  its  tides  and  winds,  and  the  iniiny  rocks  with  which  it  is  onvi- 
roned.  These,  therefore,  must  be  expected  to  involve  tht>  mariner  in  occasiuniil  difTicul. 
ties,  which  will  call  forth  his  utmost  energies,  nnd  require  no  common  share  of  iittention 
to  surmount;  yet,  although  the  loss  of  vessels  in  these  parts  fully  justifies  a  perilous  np- 
prehension,  there  are  few  obstacles  which  a  moderate  exorcise  of  skill  and  resuiutioQ 
would  not  have  been  able  to  overcome  ;  nnd  we  fear  it  is  more  to  tlie  want  of  these  quuli- 
fications  in  the  navigators,  than  to  the  dangers  of  the  navigation,  that  such  losses  have  ever 
occurred. 

"  It  is  essential,"  says  Mr.  Lockwood,  "  to  the  safety  of  those  who  are  navigating  the 
Bay  of  Fundy  that  it  should  be  clearly  understood ;"  and  in  cases  of  necessity,  ninny 
are  the  places  of  safety  to  which  vessels  might  resort,  even  without  the  advanta);e  of 
a  pilot,  although  no  man  would  attempt  to  justify  the  economy  of  saving  the  expenno  of 
pilotage,  on  a  coast  like  this,  where  currents,  fogs,  and  changes  of  weather  may  confound 
the  best  judgment. 

In  order  to  lessen  these  accidents,  if  not  totally  to  prevent  such  fatal  occurrences  in 
future,  let  the  mariner  be  fully  convinced  of  the  necessity  of  frequently  sounding  with 
the  deepsea  lead,  and  see  the  expediency  of  having  his  anchiirs  and  ciddcs  fit  for  imme- 
diate use ;  this  cannot  be  too  strongly  impressed  upon  his  mind,  for  vessels  well  equipped 
and  perfect  in  geer.  with  their  anchors  stowed,  ns  in  the  middle  of  the  Atlantic  Oc^tnn, 
have  been  here  wrecked,  in  moderate  weather,  and  so  frequently,  that  such  gross  neg- 
lect cannot  be  too  much  reprobated ;  such  serious  losses  will,  we  trust,  be  liereiifier 
prevented,  more  especially  as  it  is  so  dependant  upon  the  mariner  himself,  and  inny 
be,  in  most  cases,  remedied  by  only  sounding  in  time,  and  keeping  the  lead  in  continual 
action. 

Tides. — Another  subject  most  particularly  essential  to  the  mariner,  is  a  knowledge  of 
the  tides  :  this  we  recommend  seriously  to  his  attention. 

CAPE  SABLE  TO  BRIER'S  ISLAND,  ON  WHICH  IS  A  LIGHTHOUSE. 

The  C  asts,  Istands,  &c. — Before  we  give  a  description  of  the  main  land,  from  Cnpe 
Sablo  to  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  it  may  bo  proper  to  notice  the  islmuls  nnd 
rocks  which  lie  adjacent  and  to  the  westward  of  ^'npe  Sable  ;  these  nre  the  Blond"  Rock, 
the  Seal,  (on  which  is  a  lighthouse  painted  whitfc,  coiituinitig  a  fixed  light,)  and  Mud  Isl- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


191 


no  half  E. 
>c*a.  und  ii 
'xtietnity, 
n\y  every 


the  sum- 
preaching 
perfectly 


indi.  the  Tuaket  Talnnda,  the  Oannet  Rock,  nnd  Grefln  iFland,  ice.  The  Senl  Islnnds' 
louthernmoat  point  benrs  from  Cnpe  Sable  nearly  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  distant  16  miles,  being 
somewhat  more  than  two  miles  in  length  from  north  to  south.  Its  southern  part  is 
covered  with  scrubby  trees,  elevated  about  thirty  feet  above  the  sea ;  to  the  southward  of 
this  port*  distant  two  mi^es  and  seven-tenths,  is  a  rock  uncovered  nt  low  water,  called  the 
Blonde,  from  a  vessel  that  in  1777  was  wrecked  upon  it;  round  this  rock  are  7,  9,  and 
10  futhoma  water.  About  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Blonde,  are  very  heavy  and  dan- 
geroua  overfalls,  having  a  very  alarming  appearance.  The  ship  Waterloo,  in  passing 
between  the  Blonde  Rock  and  Seal  Island,  struck  twice  upon  a  rocky  shoal,  with  only 
18  feet  water  over  it,  and  thereby  knocked  off  her  rudder;  this  was  supposed  to  be  a 
pnrt  of  the  ledge  which  runs  off  to  the  southward  of  the  Seal  Island.  The  Blonde 
Rock  is  particularly  dangerous,  as  the  ebb  tide  sets  so  strongly  towards  it,  and  from  the 
lowness  of  the  Seal  Islands  you  ara  so  likely  to  be  deceived,  even  in  fine  weather.  The 
tide  also  runs  with  great  rapidily  publ  the  Seal  and  Mud  Islands,  which  occasions  the  sea 
to  break  over  the  shoals  in  their  vicinity,  making  them  appear  more  extensive  than  per- 
haps they  really  are.  In  sailing,  therefore,  between  the  Seal  Islaind  and  the  Mud  Islands, 
large  vessels  should  always  keep  one  mile  off  the  latter,  by  which  they  will  avoid  the 
overfalls,  in  3  fathoms.  Off  the  western  part  of  the  Seal  Islnnd.  distant  one  mile,  lie  two 
■mull  rocky  islets,  called  the  Devil's  Limb,  and  the  Limb's  Limb;  the  Devil's  Limb  is 
viaible  at  all  times,  and  the  Limb's  Limb  is  only  seen  at  half  tide.  The  smoothest  an- 
chorage is  midway  between  these  and  Seal  Island,  in  3^  or  4  fathoms,  clear  sipuI  ;  wild 
fowl  and  fish  are  here  in  abundance.  The  fishermen  resort  to  this  island  for  wood  and 
water;  the  former  they  obtain  from  wrecks,  the  latter  from  a  pond  ;i<;ar  the  centre  of 
the  island. 

The  Mud  Islands,  called  also  the  North  Seals,  are  5  or  6  low  ragged  islands,  the  largest 
of  >''iich  licis  N.  K.  by  N.  3:1  miles  from  the  southern  Seal  Island ;  it  is  one  mile  and  a 
quarter  long,  and  off  <ta  southern  point  lies  the  Noddy,  a  little  low  islet,  to  the  southward 
of  which  are  ovcrfiill.4  of  18  feet;  large  vessels,  in  passing  between  Seal  and  Mud  Isl- 
niulB,  sliuuKI  be  cartful  to  burrow  within  a  mile  of  Seal  Island,  for  these  overfalls  extend 
full  three-«]uarters  of  a  mile  from  Noddy  Islet.  To  this  islet  the  petrels,  or  Mother  Tary's 
chicliens,  annually  resort  in  great  quantities  to  hatch  their  young,  flitting  about  in  asto- 
nishing numbers.  Nearly  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  two  miles  from  the  largest  Mud  Island, 
is  a  ridge  of  rocks,  called  the  Soldier's  Ledge;  it  is  commonly  uncovered  at  half  ebb. 
Thi>  course  from  abreast  of  Cnpe  Sable,  to  pass  between  Seal  and  Mud  Islands,  is  N.  W. 
by  W.;  you  will  meet  with  some  overfalls  in  this  direction,  but  no  danger. 

Tusket  Bald  Islands  area  cluster  of  islands  lying  to  the  northward  of  the  Mud  Islands, 
and  to  the  south-westward  of  the  entrance  of  the  Tusket  River;  some  of  them  are  of 
considerable  dimensions,  and  there  are  many  shoals  and  dangers  among  them,  so  that  al- 
though there  may  be  navigable  channels  between,  no  stranger  should  attempt  these  pas- 
sages. In  the  channel  which  separates  the  Tusket  and  Mud  Islands  is  a  rocky  shoal, 
called  by  Des  Barres,  the  Acteon ;  it  lies  N.  N.  W.  distant  4  miles  from  the  largest  Mud 
Island,  but  Mr.  Lockwood  places  it  one  mile  and  a  half  further  off;  nevertheless,  these 
are  generally  supposed  to  be  the  same  dangerous  shoal,  although  its  position  does  not  seem 
to  have  been  exactly  determined  ;  it  appears  to  have  from  2  to  4  fathoms  over  it,  and 
therefore  must  be  carefully  watched  for  and  guarded  against  by  those  who  should  ven- 
ture through  this  channel. 

'lUSKET  RIVER  runs  in  to  the  north-eastward  of  the  Tusket  Islands,  and  is  one  of  Ttuket 
leveriil  inlets  that  are  navigable  on  this  part  of  the  coast;  it  has  several  settlements  on  its  River. 
banks,  but  at  present  is  little  known  or  frequented. 

I'UBNICO  HARBOR  is,  according  to  Mr.  Lockwood's  account,  "  an  excellent  ship  Pubnico 
hiuhor,  easy  of  access,  and  well  situated  for  vessels  bound  for  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  dis-  Harbor. 
tressed  for  either  shelter  or  supplies.  Its  entrance  is  distant  from  the  south  end  of  Seal 
Island  12  or  13  miles,  from  which  it  bears  N.  K.  i  E.  the  depths  of  water  between  them 
being  from  16  to  20  fathoms,  and  from  thence  to  12  and  7  fathoms  up  so  fur  as  the  beach, 
which  is  the  proper  place  for  strangers  to  anchor.  Above  this  beach,  on  the  western  side, 
is  a  ledge,  which  becomes  partly  dry  ut  low  water.  About  2  or  3  miles,  on  the  starboard 
shore,  before  you  arrive  at  the  entrance  of  Pubnico,  is  St.  John's  Island,  under  the  north- 
ern side  of  which  is  good  shelter  in  soutli  easterly  gales;  and  small  vessels  frequently 
lie  round  the  bench  which  forms  its  eastern  part;  but  coasters  commonly  pass  through 
the  inner  channel,  witliin  St.  .Tohn's,  Mutton,  and  Bonne  Portage  Islands,  by  Cockewit, 
and  llmncc  towards  Bnrrington  Bay  by  Shag  Harbor ;  but  these  places  are  partly  shoal, 
and  totally  unfilttid  for  large  vessels. 

From  the  ontrnnce  to  Pubnico  a  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  course  for  4  leagues,  will  lend  clear 
to  the  southward  of  the  Tusket  Islnmls,  but  in  this  route  you  must  be  very  careful  to 
avoid  the  Soldier's  Ledge  ond  the  Acteon,  both  of  which  have  been  already  described. 
Havinpi  passed  to  the  westward  of  the  Mud  and  Tusket  Islands,  you  will  encounter,  in 
your  passage  totlie  noithwaid,  the  Oannet  Rock,  wliich  lies  N.  W.  by  W.  nearly  6  miles 
distant  from  the  Southern  Bald  Island,  and  S.  i  W.  lU  miles  from  Cupe  Fourchu ;  it  is 


1S2 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


36  feet  above  the  iurfiice  of  the  wnter,  nnd  nlwnys  appenra  whitened  by  the  dung  of  hlrdi. 
about  two  miles  to  the  Houlh-weHtwitrd  of   the  (iiinticl  Ih  tht>  ()|ioftNUin'B  Led^e,  which  ii 
Tislble  Ht  hnlf  tide,  nnd  nppenrsto  hnveendan^tered  the  liven  of  iiiiiny,  liiivInK  been  forniorly 
represented  to  lie  4  niilea  VV.  by  N.  from  the  Uiinnet;  Dos  Kurres  has  placed  this  dun 
ger  in  IiUitude  43°  40'  40",  nnd 'longitude  (i«°  9'. 
Oreen  hi-  (JRKKN   INLAND  lies  N.  N.  V..  \  N.  distunt  ni  milfs  from  the  ()imnet  Rock  light- 

and,  there  is  ii  reef  ruuH  out  from  this  itilimd  to  llie  simlh-wcHtwtird  iilniiiHt  1  of  a  iniln  ;  round 

this  reef  are  fi  nnd  .^  fntlu)mH  wiiter,  nnd  between  it  and  the  (iiinru't  Rock  from  12  to  17 
fnth(>m8.  We8t  of  Oreen  Inliind,  about  \h  mile,  iH  aUo  a  sunken  ledge  ;  it  lies  directly  in 
the  fairwny  of  the  chaimel  to  the  Little  Harbor  of  Jebogue,  which  \»  shoal  nnd  intricate 
being  the  common  resort  of  fishermen  and  coasters  ;  the  lands  adjacent  are  modernielv 
high,  and  are  both  well  cultivated  nnd  sellliul.  Should  a  stranger  venture  for  this 
harbor,  he  must  not  only  nvoid  the  dnngers  already  described,  but  alno  a  rocky  iihoni,  ciilind 
the  Drngon,  which  is  situated  i*^.  W.  Southerly  nfull  mile  from  Jebogue  Head,  and  N, 
N.  K.  one  mile  and  three-quarters  fiom  (Jreen  Island  :  there  are  H,  10,  nnd  \'i  fatboins 
between  the  Drngon  nnd  (Jreen  Island  ;  nnd  >5,  fi,  nnd  7  fathoms  between  it  nnd  Jeliogue 
^2end;  there  is  also  a  knoll  of  3  fathoms  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  nnd  shoul  water  off 
its  enstern  side. 
Cape  Four-        CAPK  FOURCHU,  or  the  Forked  Cape,  on  which  there  is  n  lighthouse,  containing 

ehu.  a  revolving  light,  visible  one  nnd  n  quarter  minute,  and  invisible  Inilf  a  minute.     'J'he 

building  is  red  nnd  white,  vertically,  i;!5feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  so  called  from  the 
island  which  forms  it,  having  two  nnrrow  prongs  running  out  to  the  southward,  l)ut  the 
inlet  formed  between  these  uiust  not  be  mistaken  tiir  Yarmouth  Harbor,  which  lies  to  the 
eastward  of  them  both.  This  cape  forn)8  a  remarkable  object  in  these  |)arts.  being  rocky, 
high, and  barren;  it  bears  from  .lehogue  Hend  N.  N.  W.  \  N.  distant  4i  miles. 

Yarmouth.  YARMOUTH Vessels  intending  to  run  for  Fourchu  or  ^  armouth  Harbor,  will  find 

it  the  safest  wny  to  proceed  to  the  westward  of  ."^eal  Island,  the  (iaiinet  Rock,  nnd  (ircon 
Island,  giving  the  CJannet  a  berth  of  about  two  miles;  they  will  then  have  no  danger  to 
encounter,  but  from  20  to  30  fathoms  water  all  the  way.  Having  passed  Oreen  Isliind 
their  course  towards  Yarmouth  Harbor  wdl  be  about  N.  N.  K.  i  N.  In  this  passnge 
they  will  meet  with  the  IJagshot  Rock,  whicii  dries  at  low  water,  and  is  dangerous,  run- 
ning out  shoal  full  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  :  it  bears  from  Cape  Jebogue  nearly  N. 
W.  from  which  it  is  distant  almost  2i  miles,  nnd  from  Cape  Fourchu  .S.  by  W.  nlmostaj 
miles  ;  you  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this  rook,  and  run  on  N.  by  E.  4  E.  for  the  Imr- 
bor's  mouth;  this  is  considered  n  safe  but  small  harbor;  the  fairway  is  to  follow  theeiist- 
em  shore  until  you  reach  the  eastern  point;  this  you  are  to  give  a  berth,  and  proceed 
mid-chanuel :  you  will  readily  perceive  the  istlinius,  with  a  battery  upon  it,  nnd  under  its 
lee,  to  the  northward,  is  the  anchorage  ;  the  ground  is  good,  and  tlie  depth  of  water  from 
6  fofi  fathoms.  About  a  mile  abovo  the  anchorage  is  the  town  of  Yarmouth,  whicli  ia 
numerously  peopled,  the  lionses  large,  though  straggling,  the  grounds  adjacent  well  culti- 
vated, and  the  circumstances  of  tlie  itdiabitants  generally  gr)od. 

From  Cape  Fourchu  to  Cape  Mary  the  main  bind  extends  N.  by  W.  nnd  from  Cape 
Mary  to  the  lighthouse  on  Brier's  Island  is  N.  N.  W.  13  miles.  Almost  oppo!<ite  to  Cape 
Fourchu  is  the  Lurcher's  Rocky  .'»hoal,  nnd  between  that  nnd  Cape  St..  Mary  is  the 
Trinity  Ledge,  nnd  these  are  the  only  dangers  in  the  passage. 

Lurcher  The  LURCHEK  ROCK  lies  nearly  \V.  N.  W.  from  Ciipe  Fourchu, distnnt  13 miles; 

Hock.  it  covers  a  spot  of  about  3  acres  ofslnail  ground,  the  least  water  over  which  is  12  feet; 

around  the  edge  of  the  shallow  water  are  10,  11,  nnd  13  fatlioms,  and  a  little  further  off 
from  20  to  30  fathoms. 

Trirnty  THE  TRINITY  LEDGE  comprehends  a  smaller  space  than  the  Lurcher,  about 

Ledge.  three-fourths  of  an  acre,  having  the  tops  of  three  small  rocks  showing  themselves  at  low 

tides;  this  danirer  bears  from  Cape  Fourchu  N.  by  W.  distant  14  miles,  nnd  from  Cape 
St.  Mnry  S.  W.  \  W.  G\  miles ;  the  depth  of  water  to  a  milo  round  it  is  from  12  to  15 
fathoms.  The  stream  runs  very  strongly  over  these  two  dangers,  but  the  nncliornyes  in 
theii  vicinity  nre  tolerably  good  for  a  tide. 

Vessels  comitig  round  Cape  Sabbs  nnd  intending  to  tnko  the  Tusket  Passages,  may 
steer  N.  W.  by  N  nnd  proceed  through  either  of  the  channels  which  have  been  described 
before,  ns  bpst  suits  tlieir  convenience,  or  el.se  proceed  to  the  soulhwnrd  of  .Seal  Island 
for  about  3.5  miles,  pnssing  at  the  distance  of  20  miles  to  the  westward  of  Seal  Islaiid; 
thus  the  Bay  ofFundy  will  bo  open  and  their  course  up  N.  N.  W.  This  will  carry 
them  outside  of  the  Lurcher,  but  the  tide  will  make  one  point  diU'erenco  in  this  course, 
and  it  sets  S,  E.  nnd  N.  W.  through  the  cliannels  of  Mud  and  Tusket  Islands,  and  lU'nr 
the  Mnnnn  Ledges,  the  ebb  running  W.  S.  W.  nnd  the  flood  E.  N.  E.  at  the  rnto  of  four 
knots  an  hour. 

From  the  .Seal  Islands  up  to  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  soundings  extend  full  20  nnd  30 
lengues  off  the  land  westward  of  Brier's  Island  light,  and  near  tlie  Mannn  Ledges  are 
60,  80,  and  lOU  fathoms  at  3  and  4  miles  distance;  therefore  the  lend  should  always  be 
kept  going. 


;«fl)lrdi; 
•  which  ii 

»*>'■  dun. 

wklipht; 

'  i  '■•>und 
12  to  17 
i-cctly  in 

.  ""triciite, 
lodeinfpU 

"  'or  this 

oi'l.  cnjifid 

'.  niid  N. 

fi'thotng 

I  WMtoroff 

(^ontninine 
ito.  The 
'  lioni  the 
1.  I'ut  the 
li«'»  to  the 
ii"g  rocky, 


Long  bl- 
and. 


St.  Mary'i. 


^^^^ 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  198 

BRIER'S  ISLAND,  AT  TIIR  KNTHANCK  TO  TIIP]    JAY  OF  FUNDY, 

TO  ClilGNECTO  HAY. 

BRIRR'S  ISLAND  lion  nt  thi  H,  W.  ontrancn  of  St.  Mtny'rt  Ray  ;  it  is  4  mileii  long  BritrU 
tnd  1  j  *■"'"  hi'oiid  ;  uri  ItH  wPHtcMti  nidi*  Htiuiilii  n  liglithoiiHo,  piiintfd  wliito,  00  fi'ttt,  con-  hland. 
tainiriK  »  fixt'd  \\g\\t.  In  iidvinicinii  tVoinllin  wiiittwiirdtiiwiird»i  thu  iHland,  tho  tido  i')|iplnii  Ligkthouit, 
■trnnuiy.  ovimi  in  ;I3  iitid  'l'>  rutlioinx,  wl)><n  you  nro  nt,  tlio  diHtiincn  of  H  or  10  rnili<«  oft' tho 
iaiiinil-  Tlinrn  is  n  loni;  and  niirrow  rttnf  ninM  out  .^.  W.  from  tim  Houth-niiMtorii  pint  of 
thfl  iHliiiid,  full  two  iniloN,  Hotnn  piirtitof  wliioli  uro  visihlu,  nnd  ciillod  thu  llhick  Rork  ;  in 
the  Riiriio  direction  to  tlin  S.  W.  Ih  n iinmll  Hpot  of  .1  fiithoins  ;  thin  lir<8  nbout  I'  rniln  from 
tii«  «xti'«inity  of  tho  rci^fa  ;  botwuon  tlie  knoll  nnd  r<M<f,  nnd  nlKonround  the  knoll,  there 
are  from  15  to  .34  fntiioina  ;  veeigols,  therefore,  goinK  round  to  the  Routliwnrd  of  Brier'i 
hliind  iiiuHt  nlwnyH  frivo  it  a  wiile  berth.  About .')  milen  N.  W.  k  W.  from  tlio  northern 
end  of  tlio  iHlnnd,  li(*e  the  N.  VV.  Led);e  of  10  feet;  it  ie  Hinnllnnd  dnnKeroun;  nenrly  S. 
W.  tliri'e-qunrterH  of  (I  milo  from  tliia,  i§  Botson's  Led^e,  nnd  between  tiieso  two  ledges 
■nd  the  iHlnnd  nre  two  others,  ttnid  hIho  to  be  dungeroue,  with  deep  chnnneis  between 
thoni.  but  the  oxnct  Hituiitiona  of  these  nre  nntclenrly  known:  it  will  therefore  be  pnr- 
ticidiirly  dnn^erous  for  tlie  niuriner  to  npprouch  nearer  to  the  northern  side  of  this  island 
Uinn  4  or  .'5  mileH. 

LO.NO  I.SLAND  is  separated  from  Brier's  Island  by  n  narrow  chnnnel,  cnlled  the 
Oriind  PaHsiigo,  in  whicli  are  from  .5  to  15  fathoms  wnter ;  the  island  runs  in  n  N.  E.nnd 
S.  W.  direction,  bein^  nearly  10  miles  lonj;,  nnd  nbout  li  mile  bruid  ;  its  consts  are  nl- 
tnost  strnifjiit,  and  nt  its  fnrther  end  is  the  Petit  Pnssnge,  dividing  it  from  n  narrow  neck 
of  land  which  continues  so  far  as  the  Gut  of  Annnpoiis ;  thus  Brier's  Island,  Long  Island, 
and  this  peninsula,  form  the  northern  shores  of 

ST.  MARY'.S  BAV — while  from  Capo  St.  Mary,  upwnrdsinto  the  bay,  the  southern 
ahnre  is  low.  and  runs  out  with  sandy  flats,  in  some  places  almost  so  far  as  three-quarters 
of  a  utile  ;  the  opposi'e  or  nortliern  shore,  is  constituted  of  hifjii  cliffs,  having  deep  water 
close  under  thorn.  Nearly  mid-chnnnol,  and  full  two-tliirds  up  tlie  bay.  is  a  roiky  bank, 
with  4,  5,  and  (!  fithoms  over  it.  whilst  on  each  side  of  it  are  channels  of  1*2  and  15  fath- 
oms, muddy  ground.  Far  iipthebny,  on  the  southern  shores,  is  the  River  Sisil)ou,  the 
ontriince  to  which  is  shoal,  with  a  depth  of  only  2  fathoms  water.  At  the  further  end  of 
St.  Mary's  Bay,  is  nn  extensive  sandy  beach,  on  entering  which  you  will  lessen  your 
dfipth  from  4,  5,  and  (i  falhotns,  to  Vi  feet,  nnd  should  you  advance,  it  will  become  more 
shallow.  On  tho  north  side,  and  nenrly  opposite  to  .Sisibou  River,  is  Sandy  Covo,  whore 
vessi'ls,  when  i.,  conies  on  to  blow  hard,  may  run  nground  on  a  bottom  of  soft  mud,  nnd 
lie  sheltered  from  nil  winds. 

GRAND  PASSA(}K.  — Wo  have  already  stated  that  this  channel  runs  in  between  Orand 
Brier's  and  Long  Islands ;  its  southern  entrance   bearinj;  north,  distant  29  miles  from  Passage. 
Cnpe  Fourchu,  nnd  N.  by   VV.  12  miles  from  Cape  St.  Mary:  in  running  for  it,  from 
abreast  of  Capo  St.  Mary,  you  will  have  no  impediment  wlintever,  but  a  depth  of  from  14 
to  30  fathoms  ;  at  tho  entrance  of  the  passage  are  18  fathoms  mid-channel,  and    having 
advanced  within  you  will  perceive  Billy  Islet ;  this  may  bo  left  on   either  side,  although 
Mr.  Dfs  Biirres  says  the  western  channel  is  tho  best  nnd  widest;  hero,  n  little  to  the 
northwiird  of  tho  island,  is  one  of  the  safest  and  best  harbors  in  the  vicinity  ;  from  hence 
to  tho  northward  are  4,  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms  ;  following  tho  shore  of  Brier's  Island,  oppo- 
site its  northern  point,  tho  water  deepens  to  13  and  14  fathoms  ;  you  nro  then  clear  of  the 
Grand  Passage,  and  may  borrow  towards  Long  Island,  steering  north-easterly,  or  N  . 
by  N.  into  tho  Bay  of  Fuiidy. 

PKTIT  PASSAGE  lies  at  tho  further  extremity  of  Long  Island,  nnd  is  the  channel  Petit  Pass- 
which  separates  that  island  from  the  nmxn.  It  is  situated  about  3  leagues  to  the  north-  age. 
eastward  of  the  Grand  Passage,  nnd  is  2-<0  fathoms  wide  in  its  narrowest  part;  its  shores 
ore  bold  to,  and  there  are  from  20  n>  30  fathoms  water  within  it :  a  N.  N.  E.  i  Northerly 
course  from  abreast  of  Capo  St  Mary,  will  carry  you  right  through  it.  Near  its  north- 
ern entrance,  on  the  western  side,  is  Eddy  Cove,  a  very  convenient  place  for  vessels  to 
anchor  in,  for  here  they  may  ride  out  of  the  stream  of  tide,  which  commonly  runs  so  ra- 
pidly, that  wiMionta  fresh  leading  wind,  no  ship  could  possibly  stem  it. 

ANNAPOLIS  GUT. — Pursuing  the  coast  along  shore  from  Brier's  Island  to  An-  Annapolis 
nnpolis  (Jut,  it  has  very  few  curvatures;  the  shore  is  bound  with  high  rocky  cliffs,  above  Gut. 
which  a  range  of  hills  rises  gradually  to  a  considernlile  height;  their  summits  appear  un- 
broken, except  at  tho  Grand  nnd  Petit  Passages,  nt  .Sandy  Cove,  ond  Gulliver's  Hole, 
whore  they  sink  down  in  valleys,  and  near  the  gut,  where  they  terminate  by  an  abrupt 
and  steep  declivity.  The  mariner,  in  navigating  this  coast,  will,  by  keeping  nbout  a  mile 
or  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  land,  have  50,  40,  and  not  less  than  30  fathoms  water  all  the 
way ;  and  when  nt  the  entrance  of  the  gut,  one  and  a  half  mile  distant  from  tho  lighthouse 
on  Point  Prim,  he  will  find  tho  latter  depth.  The  shore  on  botli  sides  of  tho  gut  is  iron 
bound  for  several  leagues;  thu  stream  of  ebb  and  flood  sets  through  the  gut  with  the  velo- 


124 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Black  Rock 

Point. 

Lighthouse. 


Bearings. 


city  of  5  knots  an  hour,  causing  various  eddies  nnd  whirlpools,  but  the  truest  tide  will  b« 
found  off  the  eastern  side,  which  is  so  bold  to  npproach  thiit  a  ship  may  rub  her  bowsprit 
Lighthouse,  against  the  cliffs,  and  yet  be  in  10  fnthoms  water.  There  is  u  liglithouse  upon  Puiot 
Prim,  the  light  from  which  is  exhibited  from  a  window  120  feet  above  the  sea,  and  is  aa 
object  of  pitiful  and  useless  economy ;  but  it  may  perhaps  serve  to  prevent  the  fiital  error 
of  mistaking  the  real  entrance  of  the  gut  from  Gulliver's  Hole,  which  the  land  much  re- 
sembles, but  which  the  latter  has  no  such  distinguishing  building  upon.  Point  Prim  runs 
off  shoiil  about  30  fathoms,  and  off  the  eastern  entrance  is  the  Man-of-war  Rock;  it  Heg 
about  a  cable's  length  from  the  land,  nnd  has  no  channel  within  it.  The  entrance  to  the 
gut  is  very  narrow,  but  keep  mid-channel,  and  after  you  get  within  it  the  harbor  widens, 
and  ships  can  anchor  on  the  east  or  west  side  of  the  basin,  or  run  up  to  Goat's  Lland;  if 
the  latter,  tliey  should  observe  that  when  they  get  within  half  a  mile  of  the  island,  they 
must  stretch  two-thirds  of  the  way  towards  the  laiboard  >hore,  until  they  are  past  the 
island,  which  is  shoal  all  round,  and  from  thence  they  can  steer  up  mid  chu'^nel  towards 
the  town. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  Mr.  Lockwood  observf,  "That  the  abrupt  precipices  of  the 
highlands  which  form  the  gut,  cause  those  gusts  oi  wind  which  rush  down  so  suddenly 
and  eo  violently  from  the  mountains.  The  tide  also  hurries  your  vessel  through  with 
great  force.  At  the  entrance  there  is  no  anchorage  except  close  in  shore,  near  theouter 
western  point;  in  some  places  the  depth  is  from  40  to  80  fathoms." 

ULACK  ROCK  POINT. — On  this  point  there  is  a  lighthouse,  45  feet  above  sea  level, 
at  high  water,  (rise  and  fall  about  50  feet.)  three-quarters  uf  a  mile  east  of  it,  and  at 
Givan's  Breakwater,  2i  miles  westerly.  It  will  be  a  guide  light  for  vessels  in  clear 
weather,  making  Spencer's  Island  anchorage  and  the  channel  leading  into  the  Basin  of 
Mines.  The  following  are  bearings  of  the  prominent  head  lands  witiiin  view  from  the 
light  :- 

Long  Point,  south  shore S.  8C  i  degrees  west. 

To  Givan's  Bi-eakwater S.  81         "  " 

Isle  of  Haute N.  19  "  " 

Capo  Chignecto N.  21  •'  " 

Cape  D'Or N.  13i       "        east. 

Spencer's   Island N.  35         "  •• 

Capo  Split N.  66i        "  " 

Range  of  shore  towards  Hall's  Harbor. N.  89  "  " 

ANNAPOLIS  TO  THE  BASIN  OF  MINES.— From  the  Gut  of  Annapolis  up 
the  bay  to  Cape  Split,  the  coast  continues  straight,  and  nearly  in  the  same  direction,  with 
a  few  rocky  clilVs  near  the  gut  or  narrows,  and  many  banks  of  red  earth  under  high  lands, 
wliich  appear  very  even.  In  the  channel  or  narrows  luailing  into  the  Basin  of  Mines,  iVora 
Capo  S|,.it  to  Cape  BInw-ine-down,  and  from  Cape  D'Or  oi;  the  north  side,  to  Partridge 
Island,  the  land  rises  almost  perpendicularly  from  the  shore  to  a  very  great  height.  Be- 
tween Ciijie  Blow-medown  and  Partriiige  Island,  there  is  agroat  depth  of  water,  and  the 
stream  of  tile  current,  even  at  the  time  of  neap  tides,  does  not  run  less  than  5  or  6 
knots.  Having  passed  Cape  Blow-me  down,  a  wide  space  opens  to  the  southward,  lend- 
ing to  the  settlements  of  Cornwallis,  Horton,  Falmouth,  and  Windsor,  &c. ;  tlieao  are 
now  rising  into  great  mercantile  consequence,  and  alwund  in  mines  of  coal,  plaster,  lime- 
stone, and  other  valuable  minerals ;  while  to  the  eastward  the  river  extends  to  (.'obc(|uid 
Bay,  having  on  its  banks  the  towns  of  Londonderry  Truro,  and  Onslow,  this  latter  place 
forming  a  direct  cunnnunication  with  the  Bay  of  Taimagouche.  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence. Off  Cape  Split  there  are  considerable  whirl|)ool8,  which,  with  spring  tides,  are 
very  dangerous  and  frequently  run  9  knots  an  hour.  Should  a  vessel  be  at  anchor  hctweea 
Cape  Sliarpe  and  Partridge  It!lMnd,and  you  should  be  desirous  of  proceeding  to  Windsor 
River,  it  will  he  necessary  to  get  under  way  two  hours  before  low  water,  in  order  to  get 
into  tlie  >tream  of  the  Windsor  tidi!  on  the  southern  shore;  otherwise,  without  a  com- 
manding breeze,  a  vessel  would  run  the  hazard  of  being  carried  up  with  the  Cobequid  tide, 
whii-ji  is  the  main  stream,  and  runs  very  strong  both  with  flooil  and  ebb;  while  the  Wind- 
sor tiile  turns  olf  round  ('ape  Blow-me-down  to  the  southward,  and  is  then  divided  agnin, 
one  part  continuing  its  course  up  to  Windsor,  and  the  other  forming  the  Cornwallis  tide, 
runnini;  up  the  river  of  that  name. 

In  sailing  up  Windsor  River,  the  house  on  Horton  Bluff  should  be  kept  in  a  south 
bearing,  and  the  gap  in  the  I'arshorougli  River  norlli ;  this  will  carry  you  through  the 
chaiint'l  ht'tween  tlie  flats,  which  cannot  'm  passed  at  low  water  by  a  vessel  drawing  15 
feet  nibcli  before  half  tide.  Off  Hoi  ton  Blull'  lh«»  groni:d  is  loose  and  slaty,  and  a  ship 
will  hi'  likely  t((  drag  her  anchors,  with  a  strong  bice/.e,  particularly  at  full  and  change; 
therefore,  it  might,  perhaps,  be  better  for  men-uf  war  to  moor  across  the  stream,  and  full 
one-third  tVom  the  bliilf. 

H  ACTIO  ISLAND. — This  island  is  siluiiled  at  the  entrance  of  the  Mine's  Channel, 
nnd  is  not  Ij  mile  in  length,  and  about  half  a  mile  bro.iil ;  it  bears  from  Capo  Chignecto 
S.  W.  distant  4  miles  ;  the  channel  on  either  side  is  good  ;  that  between  it  and  the  capo 


Annapolis  to 
to  the  Basin 
of  Mines. 


Haute  Island. 


mmmm'fmmm 


wmmm 


^^^mtmmfm 


it 

enst. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  126 

has  14i  S0<  B°^  ^^  fnthoms  water  in  it,  and  that  between  Hnute  and  Jolyffe  Head  from 
•20  to  40  fathoms ;  it  forms  a  prominent  and  very  remarkable  object,  from  the  height      /         ^ 
and  steepness  of  its  rocky  cliffs,  which,  in  a  most  singular  manner,  seem  to  overhang  iu  ^ 

\restern  side ;  there  is,  however,  a  fair  landing  at  its  eastern  end,  and  anchorage  half  r 
mile  otf  in  18  fathoms,  with  the  low  point  bearing  about  N.  E.  by  N.;  here  also  is  a  '' 

gtream  of  fresh  water  running  into  the  sea.  Cape  D'Or  and  Cape  Chignecto  are  high 
lands,  with  very  steep  clitfj  of  rocks  and  red  earth,  and  deep  water  close  under  them. 
You  have  nearly  the  same  kind  of  shore  to  the  head  of  Chignecto  Bay,  where  very  ex- 
tensive flats  of  mud  and  quicksand  are  left  dry  at  low  water.  The  tides  come  in  a  bore, 
ruthiug  in  with  great  rapidity,  and  are  known  to  rise,  at  the  equiuoxes,  from  60  to  70  feet 
perpendiculnr. 

CHKjNECTO  bay  runs  up  E.  N.  E.  and  may  be  considered  to  be  the  north-east-  Chigneeto 
[ern  branch  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy;  it  is  divided  from  the  Mine's  Channel  by  the  penin-  Bay. 
Buin,  of  which  Cape  Chignecto  is  the  western  extremity  :  having  advanced  about  12  or 
13  miles  within  it.  you  will  see  a  point  on  the  larboard  or  northern  shore  tunning  out  to 
seawnrJ ;  this  is  called  Cape  Enrage,  on  which  there  is  a  lighthouse  containing  a  fixed  light ;  Lighlhotue» 
11  miles  beyond  which  it  divides  into  two  branches,  the  one  leading  to  Cumberland  Basin, 
and  by  the  River  Missequash  to  Verte  Bay,  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  and  now  be- 
coming a  place  of  very  considerable  commerce;  the  other  running  northerly,  and  taking 
the  name  of  the  Petcudiac  River ;  these  parts,  like  the  Basin  of  Mines,  are  fast  rising 
into  consequence,  and  becoming  the  seat  of  numerous  settlements.     The  Cumberland 
Branch  is  navigable  to  within  13  miles  of  Verte  Bay ;  and  it  is  remarkable  that  when  the 
rise  of  the  tide  in  Cumberlatid  Basin  is  60  feet,  that  in  Verte  Bay  will  only  rise  8  feet. 
The  River  of  Missequash,  which  runs  across  the  isthmus,  is  the  present  boundary  between 
the  provinces  of  Nova  Scotia  and  New  Brunswick. 

CAPE  CAPSTAN . — On  this  Capo  there  is  a  lighthouse  which  shows  two  lights  hori-  Cape    Cap*- 
Eontnlly,  when  npproiichiiig  it  from  tlie  westward  or  seaward  side.     The  lights  are  about  Ian. 
40  feet  above  higli  water  (rise  and  fall  about  55  feet).     The  building  is  square  and  painted  Lighlhoust, 
white,  and  is  a  conspicuous  beacon  in  the  day  time  to  mark  tiie  entrance  of  Apple  River, 
a  place  of  resort  for  vessels  of  100  tons  and  under.     The  following  bearings  are  given 
from  the  Light: — 

To  the  Sisters  outermost  head S.  61  degrees  west.  Bearings. 

Siiliiion   River N.     9         "  " 

Capo  Kiirajje  Light N.  41         "        east. 

Giirulstone  Liglit N.  51         "  " 

Along  shore.  Easterly N.  62         "  " 

CHIGNECTO  BAY'  TO  THE  MANAN  ISLANDS,  AND  PASSAMA- 

QUODDY  BAY. 

THE  NORTH  COAST  OF  THE  BAY  OF  FUNDY,  from  Cape  Enrage,  towards  Bay  of 
Quaco,  ill  the  township  of  St.  Martin's,  is,  at  present,  but  thinly  inhabited,  and  it  conti-  Fundy. 
nues  to  he  so  as  fur  as  St.  .John's :  the  land  is  good,  but  much  broken  with  steep  valleys  ; 
the  wi>iitliBr  is  generally  humid,  the  winds  boisterous  and  changeable,  and  the  intervals  of 
sunshiiKi  limited  and  eviiiiescent;  but  from  Quaco  to  St.  John  s  the  interior  hills  rise  in 
easy  inequalities;  the  ravines  oftiie  dill's  are  deep  and  gloomy,  and  the  indentations  fre- 
quently imve  boaciies:  at  BIcck  River,  which  is  about  12  miles  west  of  Quaco,  is  a  safe 
inlet  fur  ii  sniiill  vessel,  although  it  is  dry  from  hal'^tide. 

QUACO  LIGHT,  whito  and  red,  horizontal,  is  on  a  small  rock  off  Quaco  Head,  W.  |  Quaco 
S.  from  St.  Martin's  Head;  it  Is  a  revolving  light,  time  of  revolution  30  seconds.  Light. 

QUACO  LEDGK. — This  is  a  dangerous  eraveljy  shoiil,  situated  about  12  miles  S.  E.  Quaco. 
4  E.  from  Quaco,  and  W.  by  N.  distant  11  miles  from  Haute  Island;  it  extends  N.  W.  Ledge, 
by  N.  iiiiii  S.  E  by  S.  alutut  3i  miles,  and  is  half  a  mile  broad;  vessels  have  frequently 
grounded  upon  this  hank  ;  there  nve  several  irregular  [latches  of  rocks  lying  otf  its  N.  E. 
side  ;  the.  led^^e  shows  itself  >it  liiilf  tide,  and  dries  for  about  100  yards,  having  but  12  feet 
water  over  it  witli  coinmoti  tides;  halfamile  to  the  N.  E.  the  eddies  with  the  flood  tides 
are  strong  and  numerous  the  ship's  head  going  nearly  round  the  compass  in  the  space  of 
half  an  lioiir;  tlie  ebb  is  a  true  tide,  and  sets  in  a  W.  S.  W.  directiuu  towards  the  ledge; 
the  soundings  are  from  7  to  14  fathoms,  at  about  two  cables'  length  all  the  way  round, 
but  they  slioal  more  uraduiilly  from  the  N.  E. 

At  low  water,  spring  tides,  tlio  hiiiliest  rock  is  12  or  14  feet  above  water,  and  as  much 
under  iit  high  water.  In  light  winds  and  smooth  water,  it  is  not  visible,  and  therefore 
dangernus. 

The  night  tides  here,  and  generally  through:.'t  the  bay,  are  highest;  atSt.  John's  they 
are  so  during  'he  summer,  but  the  contrary  during  the  winter  months,  or  i)etwe«n  the 
eqninuxes.  The  mark  to  go  clear  to  the  southward  of  the  Quaco  Ledge  is  Cape  D'or  on 
with  the  south  side  of  the  l^iland  Haute.  St..  Jo 

ST.  JOHN'S  HARBOR — The  entrance  to  this  horbor  bears  from  the  Gut  of  Anna-  Harbor. 


120 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


polifl about  N.  i  W,  distant  11  leagues:  it  ia  distinguished  by  a  lighthouse  which  stands 
on  Partridge  Island,  after  nnentioned.  Vessels  coming  from  seaward,  and  making  for  this 
harbor,  should,  so  soon  as  ever  they  can  well  discern  the  lighthouse,  make  their  signal 
for  a  pilot ;  but  if  unable  to  succeed  in  reaching  the  harbor  that  tide,  then  endeavor  to  run 
in  between  jMeogenes  Island  and  the  main,  going  cither  on  the  south  or  on  the  north  side 
of  this  island,  in  doing  which  you  will  have  no  whore  less  than  4,  5  and  6  fathoms  water 
with  a  bottom  of  sand  and  mud.  Here  you  will  obtain  the  best  anchorage,  by  bringing  the 
three  hills  in  the  country  to  the  N.  E.  in  a  line  over  Rocky  Point  Island,  and  the  house 
High  water,  on  Meogenes  Island  S,  E.  by  S.  Higli  water,  llh.  44m.  rise  21  to  25  feet. 
City  of  St.  THE  CITY  UF  ST.  JOHN  stands  on  an  irregular  descent,  having  a  southern  aspect 

John.  and  on  entering  the  river,  has  an  imposing  appearance.     Partridge  Island  is  almut  two 

miles  to  the  southward  of  the  city,  answering  the  double  purpose  of  protecting  the  liarbor 
Lighthouse,  and,  by  its  lighthouse,  painted  white  and  red,  vertical,  guiding  and  directing  the  mariner 
to  its  entrance;  the  lantern  is  1G6  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  the  light  is  good  and 
well  attended.  The  ground  for  several  miles  to  the  southward  of  Partridge  Island  is 
muddy,  the  depth  gradual  from  7  to  20  fathoms,  affording  excellent  anchorage;  the  pns- 
eage  westward  of  this  island  has  in  it  10  feet,  that  to  the  eastward  has  16  feet,  and  abreast 
of  the  city  are  from  7  to  22  fathoms.  Three-fourths  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the 
Beacon.  lighthouse  is  a  beacon,  black  and  white,  vertical,  fixed  on  the  edge  of  a  rocky  ledge,  form- 

ing the  west  side  of  the  channel,  and  having  deep  water  close  to  it.  A  breakwater  is 
erected  further  on  at  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel  and  below  the  town  ;  this  greatly 
intercepts  the  violence  of  the  waves,  which  southerly  gales  usually  occasion.  Every  pog. 
Bible  assistance  is  here  given  to  ships  wanting  repair,  they  lie  upon  blocks,  and  undergo  a 
thorough  examination,  without  incurring  the  expense,  injury,  and  loss  of  time  occasioned 
by  heaving  them  down. 

Vessels  having  made  the  harbor,  and  finding  themselves  able  to  enter,  may,  when  they 
have  passed  Meogenes  Island,  edge  in  shore  towards  Rocky  Point,  until  they  perceive 
Meogenes  Point  is  in  a  line  with,  or  over  the  N.  W.  corner  of  Meogenes  Island  ;  then 
sailing  in  hotween  Rocky  Point  and  Partridge  Island,  with  these  marks  on,  will  lead 
»hom  in  the  deepest  wator,  over  the  bar,  until  they  open  Point  Maspect  to  the  north- 
ward  of  the  low  point  of  Partridge  Island  ;  when  putting  the  helm  starboard,  they  should 
edge  over  towards  Thompson's  Point,  until  they  got  the  red  store  at  the  south  end  of 
St.  John's  in  a  line  over  tho  beacon  ;  keep  them  in  one  until  they  have  passed  the  beacon 
at  the  distance  of  a  ship's  breadth  ;  then  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  for  tho  harbor,  keeping  tlie 
blockhouse,  at  the  upper  part  of  the  harbor,  open  to  the  westward  of  the  king's  store, 
situated  by  the  water  side;  which  mark  will  lead  them,  mid-clninnel,  up  to  the  wharves, 
where  they  may  lie  aground,  dry  at  half  tide,  and  clean  the  ship's  bottom;  or  ride  ufloiit 
in  the  stream  at  single  anchor,  with  a  hawser  fastened  to  the  posts  of  the  wharves  on 
shore.  The  flood  tide  is  weak  here,  but  tho  ebb  runs  down  raj)idly  past  Meogenes  Isl. 
and  into  the  Bay  of  Fundy. 
Tide,  Should  the  tide  of  ebb  have  taken  place  at  the  beacon,  theii  it  would  be  highly  improper 

to  attempt  gaining  the  harbor  that  tide  ;  but  wait  for  the  next  hiilf  Hood  to  go  over  the 
bar;  as  both  sides  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  are  composed  of  .sharp  rocks,  which  dry 
Bt  low  water ;  and  the  tide  of  ebb,  especially  in  tho  spring  of  the  year,  when  tho  iee  and 
snow  are  dissolving,  is  so  exceedingly  rapid  and  strong,  that  all  the  anchors  you  possess 
will  not  bo  sufficient  to  prevent  the  ship  from  driving. 
'  "  Tho  River  St.  John."  snys  Mr.  Des  Barres,  "  has  suflficieut,  depth  oil'  wulur  lor  Jaij^o 

ships  to  the  falls;  whence  u  continues  navigable  eighty  miles  up  the  country,  for  vessels 
T\dt,  of  100  tons.     At  Fort  Frederick  the  rise  of  the  ti(i(«  is  18  feet,  and  at  ecjuinoctiiil  sprint 

tides  25  feet;  above  tho  falls  it  seldom  rises  m(ne  than  4  feet.  When  tho  tide  has  risen 
J2  feet  at  the  fort,  tho  falls  becomo  smooth,  after  which,  during  the  space  of  20  minutes, 
they  are  |)assable.  At  times  of  great  freshets,  which  generally  happeti  between  the  bo- 
ginning  of  April  and  the  etid  of  May,  from  the  melting  of  tho  snow,  the  falls  are  absolute- 
ly impassable  for  vessels  going  up  the  river,  for  then  the  tide  does  not  rise  to  their  lovl," 
The  falls  are  situated  nearly  2  miles  beyond  the  city  of  ."^t.  J(din ;  it  is  a  narrow  ehan- 
nel  60  yards  wide,  and  400  long  ;  this  channel  is  straight,  and  has  a  riilge  of  rocks  stretch- 
ing in  such  a  manner  across  it  as  to  hold  and  retain  the  river  wat(M'  from  running  out  into 
the  sea.  After  passing  tlie  falls,  you  enter  a  gullet,  wliieh  is  a  (jiiiirter  of  a  inde  wide,  and 
two  miles  long,  winding  in  dillerent  courses,  and  having  Ki  fathoms  in  tho  channel. — Next 
to  tills  gullet  is  a  fine  and  extensive  l)asin,  a  mile  and  a  half  wide,  and  eight  miles  long, 
which  enters  the  main  river.  The  river  branches  some  hiindrtds  of  miles  up  in  a  ser- 
pentine manner;  and  runs  through  a  country  which  abounds  with  timber,  coal,  limestone, 
and  many  other  minerals  ;  and  tho  surrounding  lands  are  now  liceoiniiig  highly  cultivated. 
There  is  water  sutricient  to  navigatt;  vessels  of  50  Ions,  ns  high  as  Frederickton,  and  in 
all  the  branches  to  the  lakes  adjacent,  except  in  dry  seasons. 


In  the  middle  of  M'ly,  or  ifailier  in  favorable  seasons,  the  snow  and  ice  in  tho  country, 


dissolving,  occasions  a  general  overflow  in  the  river,  which  in 
to  iuundate  all  tiie  low  lauds. 


now  1 

some  years  rises  so  mgh  as 


■M^JI  J.ll.p|PJ,HH!p|l|l  x^ppupppiipi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


127 


Id  autum,  the  river  St.  John  is  swoln  by  rains,  and  between  the  middle  of  April  and 
th»  beginning  of  May,  by  the  melting  of  the  ice  and  the  greHt  quantities  of  snow  that  nccu- 
mulntes  on  the  bimlis  of  this  vast  navigable  river.  From  those  causes,  the  water  streams 
out  to  seaward  continually;  therefore  vessels,  at  that  time,  seldom  enter  the  harbor 
without  a  fresh  leading  wind.     The  falls  are  then  imjiassable,  as  the  tides  do  not  rise  to  ' 

their  level. 

The  body  of  the  river  is  17i  feet  above  low  water  niiirk,  consequently  after  the  tide 
has  risen  to  that  height,  the  water  descends,  or  literally  falls  up  into  tho  river.     When  ' 

the  tide  has  flowed  12  feet,  the  falls  are  smooth  and  passable  for  21)  minutes.     Above  the 
falls  the  water  rises  4  feet,  and  at  Majorlield,  which   is  GU  miles  in  the  interior,  it  rises 

only  U  f"of' 

To  the  W.  S.  Westward  of  Meogenes  Island  is  Flat  Bay,  called  also  Visarinkum;  it 
is  a  small  harbor,  with  5  and  4  fathoms  water,  used  sometimes  by  the  coasters.  From 
hence  the  land  runs  nearly  W.  S.  \V.  passing  iNetjro  Head  to  Cape  Musquash ;  off  the 
point  of  which  is  Split  Rock  ;  it  lies  close  to  the  cape,  and  has  8  fathoms  water  very  near 
it,  being  distant  from  Partridge  Island  6'i  miles;  the  shore  is  iron  bound  all  the  way,  und 
has  deep  water  close  into  the  land. 

MUSQUASH  HARBOR  lies  about  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Split  Rock  ;  its  en-  MusquaA 
trniico  is  about  half  a  mile  wide,  and  there  is  good  anchorage  a  little  way  in,  with  4  fath-  Harbor. 
oms  water,  but  further  on  a  bar  runs  across  the  harbor,  over  which  is  only  Ij  fathom; 
small  vessels  sometimes  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  islands,  and  run  up  the  river,  which, 
when  past  the  bar,  has  '2,  2^  and  3  fathoms  water ;  but  this  harbor  is  open  to  tho  south- 
ward. 

POINT  LEPREAU. — From  the  entrance  to  Musquash  the  coast  runs  W.  S.  W.  Point 
westerly  nearly  10  miles  to  Point  Lepreau,  on  which  there  is  a  tower,  red  and  white,  Lepreau. 
horizontal,  with  two  fixed  lights,  one  elevated  18  feet  above  the  other.  In  this  space  are 
4  or  5  inlets,  but  only  calculated  for  small  craft;  the  first  of  these  is  about  1^  mile  to  the 
westward  of  Musquash  western  point,  ahd  is  of  no  note  whatever;  in  your  way  to  it  a 
berth  must  bo  given  to  the  shore,  particularly  about  Musquash  Point,  on  account  of  some 
rocks  lying  off  that  part;  there  are  channels  between  these  rocks,  but  few  vessels  will 
venture  through  them.  About  a  mile  further  is  Chance  Harbor,  which  is  a  mere  shallow 
cove  of  2  fathoms  water.  Little  Dipper  is  more  westerly  still,  and  situated  34  miles  from 
Musquash  Point;  this  also  has  only  12  feet  water  in  it,  and  scarce  fit  for  any  thing  but 
bouts.  Ureat  Dipper  is  divided  from  Little  Dipper  by  a  flat  point  of  land,  round  which  are 
several  scattered  rocks;  this  harbor  can  accommodate  small  craft,  which  sometimes  run 
in  there  for  shelter;  but  it  is  by  no  means  to  be  recommended,  unless  in  cases  of  necessi- 
ty; there  is  a  creek  of  fresh  water  runs  into  it,  called  Moose  Creek.  Further  westward, 
anil  aliout  14  mile  from  Point  Lepreau,  is  Carriage  Harbor;  this  is  open  to  the  eastward, 
and  itllbrds  anchorage  at  its  entrance  in  from  7  to  3  fathoms.  The  land  all  the  way  from 
Musquash  to  Point  Lepreau  is  high,  broken,  and  many  scattered  rocks  lie  off  it;  there- 
fore, vessels,  in  passing,  should  carefully  give  it  a  good  berth. 

MACES,  or  MASON'S  BAY,  is  formed  to  the  westward  of  Point  Lepreau,  between  Mace$,or 
it  and  Red  Head  ;  these  bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  i  N.  and  S.  E.  i  S.  distant  full  5  Mason's  Bay 
miles.  There  are  numerous  rocks,  shoals,  and  small  islets  within  it,  but  its  navigation 
seems  insecure,  for  Mr.  Lockwood  emphatically  observes,  "this  point  ought  to  be  classed 
as  one  of  the  dangers  of  tho  Bay  of  Fundy ;  for  many  serious  accidents  have  lately  hap- 
pened in  the  neighborhood  of  this  promontory."  Maces  Bay  he  calls  a  deep  and  ugly 
indent;  so  much  so,  that  ships  bound  to  the  River  St.  John,  dreading  to  pass  its  entrance, 
get  frequently  embayed  there,  and  some  valuable  vessels  have  thus  been  lost.  "  Yet,  at 
the  head  of  this  bay,"  he  observes,  "  is  a  place  called  Pok  Logan,  where  there  is  good 
shelter.  Several  rivers  appear  to  fall  into  this  bay;  and,  perhaps,  abetter  knowledge 
would  tend  mucli  to  strip  it  of  its  fancied  dangers." 

W.  by  S.  from  Point  Lepreau,  distant  3i  or  4  miles,  there  is  supposed  to  be  a  danger- 
ous shoal,  but  its  actual  situation  is  not  known  ;  if  such  should  exist,  it  must  be  surround- 
ed with  very  deej)  water,  for  a  small  distance  from  this  imagined  situation,  are  26,28,  and 
31  fatiioms,  mud,  mud  and  sand,  and  gravel. 

BKAVER  HARBOR  lies  about  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Bliss  Island,  and  ia  above  Beaver  Hat' 
a  mile  wide  at  its  entrance,  with  10  fathoms  water  on  each  side,  and  20  fathoms  mid-  bor. 
chunnol.  In  entering  keep  the  western  shore  on  board,  until  you  bring  the  Goal  Rock  to 
bear  east,  distant  about  half  a  mile,  when  you  may  aiiclior  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  good  holding 
ground.  There  are  no  regular  pilots,  but  tho  fishornieti  on  tho  coast  are  well  qualified 
for  tho  task,  although  in  chiar  weather  they  are  not  absolutely  necessary,  yet  strangers 
to  tile  place  will  most  proliably  ro(iuiro  their  assistance.  Tlioro  are  several  rivulets  run- 
ning into  various  jiart.s  of  the  harbor,  but  there  is  no  convenient  watering  place. 

ETANG  HARBOR  is  situated  to  the  southward  of  the   Maijagadasve,  and  runs  in  to  Etnng  llar- 
tho  north-eastward  (if  Canipo  Bello ;  before  it  lie  many  islands.     There  are  three  en-  bor. 
trances  into  this  harbor,  so  that  vessels  may  go  in  or  out  al  any  time.    The  western  en- 
;;i'aDce  leads  to  La  Tele  Harbor,  where  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  from  10  to  5  fath- 


it 


1S8 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


oms,  bnt  there  is  no  pnasage  for  ships  round  the  northern  end  of  Payne's  Island.    Th^ 
channels  between  Payne's  and  Bliss  Islands  are  considered  to  be  the  beat,  as  they  will  nd- 
*  mit  of  vessels  working  through  them;  but  the  eastern  passage  requires  a  leading  wind* 

A  pilot  will  be  necessary  on  account  of  the  intricacies  of  the  channel,  but  one  can  engjlv 
be  obtained  any  where  on  the  coasi ;  water  can  be  procured  in  various  places.    The  bav 
High  water,   is  extensive,  secure,  and  well  sheltered,  having  good  anchorage  throughout.     High  water 

llh.  lOm.  rise  21  to  25  feet. 
SL  Andrew's      ST.  ANDREW'S  HARBOR  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  River 
Harbor.  Scoodic,  and  has  two  entrances ;  the  eastern  one  is  narrow  and  intricate,  but  is  the  deeper 

Dangers.  having  4  or  5  feet  at  low  water;  the  dangers  in  entering  through  this  passage  are  a  reef 
of  rocks  with  a  beacon  on  it,  extending  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  Navy  Islund 
and  a  reef  of  sand  and  large  stones  with  a  pole  on  it,  extending  nearly  two  miles  from 
the  block-house  on  the  main  land  ;  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel  is  not  more  than 
a  cable's  length  ;  the  mark  for  entering  is  to  keep  the  toWn  of  St.  Andrews  open,  and 
steer  directly  in  for  the  harbor.  In  the  bay,  in  general,  there  re  from  17  to  25  fiithoina 
water. 

The  western  entrance  is  not  so  difficult,  but  has  less  water  thad  the  eastern,  the  bar 
Reef,  being  dry  at  the  last  quarter  ebb.      A  dangerous  reef  of  stones,  with  a  floating  beacon 

on  it,  lies  off  the  west  end  of  Navy  Island.  In  steering  you  must  keep  close  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  two  poles  on  the  bar,  where  at  high  water  yuu  will  have  from  18  to  20  feei 
water. 

There  is  a  harbor  master  and  branch  pilots  belonging  to  St.  Andrews,  and  large  vessels 
Hi^h  Water,  should  never  attempt  to  enter  without  having  one  of  them  on  board.      High  water  lOh. 


Tides 
Wolf  Isl 
ands. 


The  Manan 
Islands. 


Long  Island 
Bay. 


50m      Common  tides  rise  20  feet;  spring  tides  26  feet. 

WOLF  ISLANDS. — The  Wolves  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  having  deep  water 
close  to  them;  but  they  afford  no  sheltered  anchorage,  except  for  small  fishing  vessels  in 
summer  time;  they  are  from  60  to  100  feet  high.  With  light  winds,  a  lee  tide,  or  thick 
weather,  you  may  let  go  an  anchor  any  where  between  the  Wolves  and  Beaver  Harbor 
in  good  holding  ground,  with  a  depth  of  20  or  25  fathoms. 

THE  MANAN  ISLANDS,— Grand  Manan  is  an  island  situated  at  the  north  western 
entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Kundy ;  it  is  in  the  province  of  New  Brunswick,  and  forms  a  part 
of  Charlotte  County;  being  Hi  miles  in  length,  and  7  in  breadth.  According  to  the 
chart,  the  N.  Western  part  of  this  island  is  distant  from  Passamnquoddy  Head  about  7 
miles;  its  N.  Eastern  point,  or  Bishop's  Head,  bears  from  Cape  Maspeck  W.  S.  W. 
nearly  10  leagues,  and  W.  N.  W.  from  the  entrance  to  the  (lut  of  Annapolis,  about  14 
leagues;  and  from  Petit  Passage,  N.  W.  by  N.  32  miles.  Its  S.  W.  end,  or  head,  bears 
from  the  lighthouse  on  Brier's  Island  N.  W.  by  N.  nearly,  from  which  it  is  distant  28 
miles;  and  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  northern  entrance  to  Petit  Passage,  distant  30  miles. 
Thus  situated  it  commands  an  uninterrupted  view  of  every  vessel  that  passes  to  or  from 
the  Bay  of  Fundy.  It  is  naturally  strong,  and  possesses  harbors  where  the  largest  ships 
may  ride  in  peri>;ct  security.     Its  fisheries  are  in  great  estimation. 

On  its  weste)-n  side  the  clilTs  are  nearly  perpendicular,  rising  COO  feet  above  the  level 
of  the  sea;  but  on  this  side  there  is  only  one  little  inlet  along  the  whole  range,  that  can 
shelter  even  boats.  It  is  commonly  called  Dark  Cove,  being  situated  about  4  miles  tVoin 
the  northern  part  of  the  island:  there  is  indeed  a  place  called  Bradford's  (Jove,  about 5 
or  6  miles  more  to  the  southward,  but  this  is  of  no  note  whatever.  Thfre  are  sounditigs 
all  along  the  shore,  from  Bishop's  Head  to  the  S.  W.  Head,  3,  4,  5,  and  6  fathoms  close 
to  the  land,  deepening  to  13,  20,  21,  and  22,  half  a  mile  oil,  to  30,  40.  and  50  fathoms  at 
a  mile  distance,  and  still  deep)>r  as  you  increase  your  distance  from  the  island. 

The  Northern  or  Bishop's  Head,  is  ai)rupt  and  bold;  but  on  its  eastern  side  there  is 
anchorage  in  a  place  called  Whale  Cove.  This  is  situated  between  Swallow's  Tail  and 
the  Noilh  Point;  hero  vessels  iVeqinMiily  ride  during  southerly  winds,  to  wait  the  turn  of 
tide.  The  soundings  are  from  15  to  25  fathoms;  but  it  must  not  bo  resorted  to  in  north- 
erly gules. 

LONG  ISLAND  BAY.— This  lies  to  the  S.  Eastward  of  Whale  Cove,  and  is  formed 
by  the  Swallow's  Tail,  which  is  a  bold,  high,  ragged,  and  barren  looking  point,  and  Lung 
Island,  which  bears  iicaily  s<iuth  from  it,  distant  Id  mile.  This  bay  is  eiisy  of  access,  and 
possesses  all  the  advantages  of  a  harbor.  The  bottom  of  the  hay  is  generally  tnud,  ex- 
cepting a  ridge  of  rocks  and  gravel,  which  extends  from  the  ledge  that  shows  itself  within 
the  Swallow's  Tail,  and  the  cluster  of  sunken  rocks  that  he  half  a  mile  N.  N.  E.  from 
Long  Island  Point,  and  these  are  live  feet  under  water  at  low  spring  tides.  In  the  north- 
ern part  of  the  bay  the  bottom  is  a  stiff  clay,  and  vessels  ill  provided  with  gear  have  often 
rodo  out  the  severest  gale  there ;  and  under  Long  Island  opposite  the  bench  is  good 
anchoiage,  oven  locking  in  the  northern  end  of  Long  Island  with  Swallow's  Tail.  The 
ground  here  is  a  strong  nmd,  and  you  will  ride  safe  and  unaffected  by  sea  or  wind  from 
any  quarter. 

Further  to  the  southward,  and  on  the  eastern  coast  of  Great  Manan,  are  the  Duck 
Islands.     Here  a  pilot  will  be  necessary,  for  though  the  ground  is  good  about  Great  Duck 


Ijlancl,  yet  th( 
To  the  south 
jfhich  is  scare 
fje  connected 
to  the  Diamc 
resides  an  abl 
resort  for  vesi 
place.  At  th 
a  shallow  mui 
venience  som 
outer  ledges. 
bottom;  the  < 

A  little  to  t 
ward  of  the  < 
low  and  ledgy 
be  seen;  and 
dries  at  low  v 
age  may  be  o 
VOOD  U 
three-quartei 
cellent  harbc 
secure  ancho 
with  all  nece 

THE  MA 
lie  to  the  sou 
Old  Propriet 
but  when  cov 
J  E.  distant 
eastern  part  < 
E.  4  leagues 
Island  lighthi 
Passage;  N. 
Annapolis;  a 

About  2i 
shoal  of  4  i  ft 
Crawley's  S 
Rans,  of  5  ft 
miles;  and,  i 
The  marks  I 
land  of  Ma 
ward  of  the 
erly  winds 

There  arc 
point  of  Wl 
a  continual 
called  the  T 
these  show 

S.  S.  E 
ands  is  a  kn 
about  W 
given  to  avo 
There  is  ali 
S.  W.  i  S 

THEG 
cal,  conttiin 
feet  above  m 
Islands,  and 
ber  of  smal 
conspicuou 
ly  W.  S.  M 
which  is  al 
the  Long  I 
with  deep 
are  suppos( 
Seal  Island 
lars  of  the 

SEAL 
On  the  we 


N 


mmmmmmmmiifW 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


129 


Iilund,  yet  there  are  dangers  which,  when  the  tide  becomes  high,  are  completely  hidden. 
To  the  south-westward  of  Ducli  Islands  are  the  Islands  of  Ross,  the  northern  point  of 
ffhich  is  scarcely  separated  from  Manan,  Cheney's  Island,  and  White  Head  Island;  these 
gre  connected  together  by  a  sandy  and  rocky  reef  of  foul  ground,  which  extends  S.  i  W.  '^ 

to  the  Diamond  Rocks,  of  which  we  shall  speak  hereafter.  On  White  Hand  Island 
resides  an  able  and  active  pilot,  and  the  cove  opposite  to  his  house  is  commonly  a  great 
resort  for  vessels  employed  in  the  fisheries;  but  with  easterly  winds  I  his  is  no  desirable  / 

place.  At  the  western  side  of  Ross  Island  is  part  of  what  is  called  Grand  Harbor.  It  is 
ushiillow  muddy  basin;  but  vessels  may  enter  and  lie  securely  in  it,  on  the  mud  ;  a  con- 
venience somewhat  desirable,  should  you  have  lost  your  anchors  and  cables  on  any  of  the 
outer  ledges.  The  entrance  to  this  place  has  4,  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms  water,  with  a  clayey 
Iwttom;  the  channel  is  narrow,  but  secure  from  the  sea. 

A  little  to  the  westward  of  White  Head  Island  are  the  Green  Islands,  and  tothe  south- 
ffnrd  of  the  Green  Islands,  about  one  mile,  are  the  three  Kent's  Islands;  these  latter  are 
low  and  ledgy;  the  eastern,  or  largest  one,  is  bold  to  the  rocks,  which  are  at  all  times  to 
be  seen;  and  to  the  N.  Westward  of  these  rocks  is  a  ledge  called  the  Constable,  which 
dries  at  low  water.  Under  the  lee  of  these  and  the  Green  Islands,  occasional  anchor- 
lee  may  be  obtained  in  from  14  to  7  fathoms. 

WOOD  ISLAND  lies  off  the  southern  part  of  Grand  Manan,  and  is  one  mile  and  Woodltland. 
tliree-quarters  long;  it  runs  parallel  to  the  south-west  head  of  Mnoan,  and  forms  an  ex- 
cellent harbor  between.     The  upper  part  of  this  inlet,  and  the  head  of  it,  afford  most 
fiecurn  anchorage  ;  and  the  inhabitants  about  Seal  Cove  and  Red  Head,  will  furnish  yuu 
^ith  all  necessary  supplies  you  may  stand  in  need  of,  for  these  places  are  all  well  settled. 

THE  MANAN  LEDGES  are  those  more  distant  islets,  rocks,  and  dangers,  which  The  Manan 
lie  to  the  southward  of  Grand  Manan.  The  outer  and  most  dangerous  of  these  is  the  Ledges. 
Old  Proprietor,  covering  a  space  of  half  an  acre  at  low  water,  and  drying  at  half  ebb; 
but  when  covered  the  tide  sets  directly  over  it,  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour.  It  lies  S. 
j  E.  distant  9i  miles  from  Great  Duck  Island;  S.  by  E.  nearly  7  miles  from  the  north 
eastern  part  of  White  Head  Island;  E.  i  S.  6}  miles  from  the  Gannet  Rock;  S.  E.  by 
E.  4  leagues  from  the  south-west  head  of  Manan;  N.  N.  W.  i  N.  18i  miles  from  Brier 
Island  lighthouse ;  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  18  mi'es  from  the  northern  entrance  to  the  Grand 
Passage;  N.  W.  i  W.  18i  miles  from  the  Petit  Passage;  west  35  miles  from  the  Gut  of 
Annnpulis;  and  S.  W.  15  leagues  from  the  lighthouse  on  Partridge  Island. 

About  21  miles  N.  E.  i  N.  from  the  Old  Proprietor  is  the  Clerk's  Ground;  a  rocky 
shoal  of  4i  fathoms.  N.  W.  by  N.  one  mile  and  two-thirds  from  the  Old  Proprietor,  ia 
Crawley's  Shoal,  of  7  feet  only;  and  west  of  the  Crawlej',  one  mile  and  a  half,  is  the 
Rans,  of  5  feet.  The  Roaring  Bull  bears  N.  i  E.  from  the  Old  Proprietor,  distant  4 
miles;  and,  although  it  has  6  fathoms  over  it,  it  usually  has  a  heavy  dangerous  ripple. 
Ttie  marks  to  go  clear  to  the  eastward  of  all  these  dangers,  is  the  north  easternmost  high- 
land of  Manan  well  open  of  the  Long  and  Duck  Islands;  the  mark  to  lead  to  the  south- 
ward of  them  is  the  south-west  head  of  Manan  open  to  Kent's  Three  Islands.  In  east- 
erly winds  the  tide-rips  are  impassable. 

There  are  also  other  rocks  within  these,  a  range  of  which  lies  south  of  the  south-west 
point  of  White  Head  Island;  some  of  those  have  deep  water  between  them,  and  occasion 
a  continual  nipple  three  miles  from  the  shore,  quite  home  to  the  long  point:  these  are 
called  t'lie  Tinker,  Throe  Diamonds,  Rans,  and  many  others  without  names;  some  of 
these  show  themselves,  others  have  only  3  and  4  feet  water  over  them. 

S.  S.  E.  i  S.  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  southern  point  of  the  Three  Isl- 
ands is  a  knoll  called  the  Kent,  it  is  dangerous  and  has  only  7  feet  water  over  it;  it  bears 
about  W.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  Rans,  and  is  not  included  within  the  confines  of  the  mark 
given  to  avoid  the  dangers  to  the  southward,  viz.  the  S.  W.  head  open  of  all  the  islands. 
There  is  also  a  danger  said  to  lie  S.  E.  4  S.  from  the  Kent  Knoll,  distant  2  miles,  and  W. 
S.  W.  i  S.  one  mile  and  a  quarter  from  the  Ran?,  but  this  is  doubtful. 

THE  GANNET  ROCK,  on  which  there  is  a  lighthouse,  painted  black  and  white,  verti-  The  Gannet 
cal,  containing  a  flashing  light,  twenty  seconds  dark  and  forty  seconds  light  each  minute,  90  liock. 
feet  above  water,  and  lies  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  3i  miles  from  the  southern  point  of  the  Three  Light. 
Islands,  and  S.  S.  E.  Gi  miles  from  the  S.  W.  head  of  the  Grand  Manan ;  '«;  has  a  num- 
ber of  small  ledges  and  sunken  rocks  about  it,  which  are  always  breaking:  this  stands 
conspicuous,  being  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  all  the  sunken  rocks  and  dangers.    Near- 
ly W.  S.  W.  from  the  Gannet,  distant  one  mile  and  a  half,  is  St.  Mary's  Ledge:  part  of 
which  is  always  above  water;  and  to  the  ncrthward  of  St.  Mary's  Ledge,  one  mile,  is 
the  Long  Ledge,  equally  visible;  between  and  around  these  are  numerous  rocky  shoals, 
with  deep  water  between  them,  rendering  this  part  particularly  dangerous.    Other  reefs 
sre  supposed  to  exist  to  the  westward,  and  between  the  Gannet  Ledges  and  the  Machias 
Seal  Islands  ;  their  imaginary  situations  are  marked  on  the  chart,  but  no  further  particu- 
lars of  them  are  known. 

SEAL  ISLANDS.— W.  by  S.  i  S,  from  Grand  Manan  lie  the  Western  Seal  Islands.  Seal  Islands. 
On  the  western  island  two  lighthouses  are  erected,  showing  fixed  lights,  distant  from  Lightliouset, 

9 


130 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


■-X 


each  other  about  140  feet,  in  the  direction  of  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  by  which  they  are 
♦    distinguished  from  all  other  lights  upon  the  coast;  they  are  elevated  about  50  feet  above 
high  water  inarli.     From  the  westernmost  of  these  lighthouses  the  following  beoriDes 
were  taken: 
Bearings.  To  the  southernmost  of  the  Murr  Ledges  E.  S.  E. 

To  Gannet  Rock  lighthouse,  E.  by  S.  i  S.  about  12  miles. 

To  N.  E.  Rock,  N.  E  by  N.  about  U  mile. 

To  the  southern  head  of  Grand  Manan,  E.  by  N.  i  N. 
'  To  West  Quoddy  lighthouse,  N.  N.  E. 

To  Little  River  Head,  N.  by  W. 
•    To  Libby  Island  lighthouse,  N.  W.  by  W. 

To  south  point  of  Kent  Island,  (on  the  chart  three  isles,)  East. 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  AND  REMAKS  FOR  SAILING  TO  AND 
WITHIN  THE  BAY  OF  FUNDY. 

Ships  navigating  the  Bay  of  Fundy  have  to  encounter  an  atmosphere  almost  constant- 
.  '  ly  enveloped  in  dense  fogs,  the  tides  setting  with  great  rapidity  over  the  rocks  and  slionig 
with  which  it  abounds,  and  a  difficulty  of  obtaining  anchorage  on  account  of  the  deptli- 
so  that,  under  these  circumstances,  the  most  unremitting  attention  is  requisite  to  prevent 
the  disastrous  consequences  which  must  nescessarily  attend  a  want  of  knowledge  and 
caution. 
I  When  you  are  off  Cape  Sable  with  a  westerly  wind,  and  destined  for  the  Bay  of  Fundy, 

it  will  be  advisable  to  make  for  the  coast  of  the  United  States,  somewhere  about  the 

Shuttock  Hills,  or  Petit  Manan  lighthouse,  asyou  can  pass  with  greater  safety  to  the  west- 
ward of  Grand  Manan  than  to  the  eastward,  having  also,  if  necessary,  shelter  in  Petit 
River,  Machias,  Passamaquoddy,  Etang,  or  Beaver  Harbor,  &c. 

Between  Grand  Manan  and  the  State  of  Maine  the  passage  is  free  from  danger ;  ves- 
sels beating  through  generally  stand  from  side  to  side,  particularly  during  fogs,  the  depth 
being  from  12  to  70  fathoms,  with  a  bold  shore  on  each  side,  and  the  tide  through  strong 
and  regular. 

When  steering  between  Grand  Manan  and  Brier's  Islands  the  utmost  caution  is  requi- 
site during  thick  weather,  as  vessels  are  frequently  drawn  in  among  the  iHlands  and  ledg- 
es to  the  southward  of  Manan,  by  the  flood  setting  directly  upon  them.  The  most  dan- 
gerous of  these  is  the  Old  Proprietor,  which,  at  low  water,  dries  for  the  space  of  half 
an  acre.  When  the  wind,  therefore,  veers  at  all  to  the  southward,  make  the  best  of 
your  way  to  St.  John's  Harbor,  or  you  may  secure  an  anchorage  in  Grand  Passage  or 
St.  Mary's  Bay,  as  it  seldom  blows  in  that  direction  above  18  hours  without  bringiug  on 
a  fog. 

There  is  no  difficulty  in  going  through  Annapolis  Gut,  if  you  have  but  a  commaoding 
breeze,  although  the  tide  is  very  rapid,  the  flood  and  ebb  runnings  knots  an  hour,  and 
the  eddies  strong ;  about  one-third  through  lies  the  Man-of-war  Rock,  about  a  cable's 
length  from  the  eastern  shore  ;  therefore  if  you  keep  mid-channel,  you  will  be  sure  to 
clear  it. 

The  prevailing  winds  here,  and  throughout  the  whole  coast  of  Nova  Scotia,  are  from 
W.  .S.  W.  to  S.  W.  nearly  as  steady  as  trade  winds,  except  during  the  summer  months, 
when  they  become  rather  more  southerly,  accompanied  with  but  little  intermission  of 
fog,  which  requires  a  N.  Westerly  wind  to  disperse.  It  is  therefore  recommended  not 
to  leave  an  anchorage,  without  making  proper  arrangements  for  reaching  another  before 
dark,  or  the  appearance  of  a  fog  coming  on,  which  with  a  S.  W.  wind  is  so  sudden  that 
you  become  enveloped  within  it  unawares ;  neither  should  you  keep  the  sea  at  night,  if 
you  can  avoid  it.  But  you  will  observe  that,  whenever  the  wind  blows  directly  off  the 
land,  the  fog  will  soon  disperse. 
THdei,  Tides. — The  tides  at  the  entrance  and  within  the  Bay  of  Fundy  are  very  rapid,  but 

regular,  and  although  the  wind  against  them  alters  the  direction  of  the  ripplings,  and 
sometimes  makes  them  dangerous,  yet  it  has  little  or  no  effect  upon  their  courses.  The 
flood  tide  sots  from  Cape  Sabl*(  to  the  N.  Westward,  through  the  Seal,  Mud,  and  Tas- 
ket  Bald  Islands,  at  the  rate  of  2  or  3  miles  an  hour ;  and  in  the  channels  among  the 
inlands,  it  increases  to  4  and  5  miles;  from  thence  taking  the  direction  of  the  main  land, 
it  flows  past  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  then  N.  N.'  W.  towards  Brier's  Island;  it  runs  up  St 
Mary's  Bay  but  slowly,  which  adds  to  its  strength  along  the  eastern  shore ;  then  in- 
creasing its  rapidity  aa  the  bay  contracts,  it  rushes  in  a  bore  into  the  Basin  of  Mines,  and 
up  Chignecto  Bay ;  so  that  here  the  water  sometimes  rises  to  the  extraordinary  height 
of  75  feet. 

To  the  above  may  be  added  the  additional  observations :  '•  The  great  volume  of  fresh 
water  which  constantly  flows  down  the  harbor  of  St.  John,  in  April  and  May,  causes  a 
continual  ebb  tide,  during  that  period,  sometimes  to  the  depth  of  nearly  5  fathoms,  under 
which  the  flood  and  ebb  tides  flow  regularly;  the  maximum  of  ib)  velocity  was  found  to 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


131 


ich  they  are 
0  feet  above 
•>g  beoriagg 


►  AND 


)3t  coDstant- 
8  and  shoals 
'  the  depth ; 
e  to  prevent 
owlodge  and 

uyofFundy, 

■e  about  the 

to  the  west- 

Iter  in  Petit 

danger;  veg. 
gs,  the  depth 
rough  strong 

ition  is  requi- 
nds  and  ledg- 
be  most  dan- 
epace  of  half 
te  the  best  of 
i  Passage  or 
t  bringiog  on 


coroman 
an  hour,  and 
liout  a  cable's 
ill  ba  sure  to 

Dtia,  are  from 
liner  months, 
itermission  of 
ninended  not 
•other  before 
I  sudden  that 
ea  nt  night,  if 
rectly  off  the 

'y  rapid,  but 
ipplings,  and 
)ur8e8.  The 
ud,  and  Tus- 
la  among  the 
10  main  land, 
t  runs  up  St. 
no ;  then  in- 
)f  Mines,  and 
Jinary  height 

ime  of  fresh 
[ay,  onuses » 
thorns,  under 
was  found  to 


be  four  knots  and  a  half,  and  the  minimum  at  two  knots;  but  as  the  log  floated  very  deep 
I  lathe  fresh  water,'  and  ultimately  sunk  into  the  salt  water,  underneath,  it  will  not  be  too 
much  to  estimitte  the  maximum  at  five  knots,  and  the  minimum  at  two  knots  and  a  quar- 
ter, 'i^he  fact  of  the  under  tide  beginning  at  the  depth  of  nearly  5  fathoms  was  ascer- 
tained by  linking  a  lead  down  to  that  depth,  when  it  was  carried  the  same  way  as  the 
current  on  the  surface  ;  but  when  lowered  below  that,  it  was  drifted  in  a  contrary  direc- 

"  Between  Brier's  Island  and  the  opposite  northern  coast,  and  for  some  distance  up  the 
bay  to  the  eastward,  the  first  of  the  flood  sets  strongly,  nearly  north,  so  that  it  will  be  ex- 
tremely dangerous  for  a  vessel  to  run  in  the  night,  or  during  thick  weather,  from  any 
part  of  the  southern  towards  any  part  of  the  northern  coast,  without  making  a  large  al- 
lowance for  the  set  of  the  tides,  and  keeping  the  lead  constantly  going.  The  Jaseur, 
Captain  Napier,  was  nearly  run  on  shore,  having  being  drifted  by  this  tide  in  a  fog,  eight 
miles  and  a  half  in  three  hours  and  ten  mintes." 


THE  COAST  OF  THE  Vi\ITEO  STATES. 

FROM  PASSAMAQUODDY  TO  CAPE  COD. 

BANKS. — There  are  four  banks  on  this  part  of  the  coast:  Jeffrey's  Bank,  Jeffrey's  Banks 
Ledge,  on  both  of  which  there  are  from  30  to  50  fathoms  water,  Cashe's  Ledge,  which 
is  dangerous,  and  George's  Bank  and  Shoals,  also  dangerous.     We  have  no  particular  in- 
formation, excepting  of  the  two  latter. 

CASHE'S  LEDGE. — Tiie  position  of  this  shoal  has  been  accurately  determined  Cashews 
by  Lt.  Charles  H.  Davis,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  It  is  in  latitude  42°  56',  longitude  68°  51'  Ledge.. 
30",  and  has  on  it  26  feet. 

East  by  the  compass  17  to  13  leagues  from  Thacher's  Island  you  get  soundings  upon  the 
Fippanies,  a  bank  of  3  or  10  leagues  in  extent  from  North  to  South,  about  six  miles  wide 
in  the  centre  and  the  northern  end ;  on  the  southern  end  it  is  two  to  two  and  half  milea 
wide.    The  depth  varies  from  27  to  46  fathoms,  shelly  and  pebbles. 

From  the  eastern  edgeof  the  Fippanies  east  4  to  5  leagues,  will  bring  you  upon  Cashe's,. 
on  the  shoal  ground,  which  is  on  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Bank :  and  is  a  flat  white  rock  of 
from  200  to  300  feet  in  extent. 

South  of  the  flat  rock  there  is  a  gully ,  90  fathoms  water,  which  mns  in  upon  the  Bank 
in  a  S.  Westerly  direction.  Upon  the  south  side  of  this  gully,  three  miles  south  of  the 
flat  rock,  there  is  a  shoal  nf  7  fathoms,  from  which  the  soundings  run  suddenly  to  15  and, 
30  fathoms  on  all  sides  except  the  east,  where  it  deepens  suddenly  to  80  fathoms. 

N.  by  W.  9  miles  from  the  flat  rock  there  is  another  shoal  of  14  fathoms ;  between 
this  and  the  flat  rock  there  are  from  10  to  35 fathoms,  rocky  bottom :  oa  the  rocky  bottom, 
there  is  kelp  of  45  feet  in  length ;  on  the  flat  rock  there  is  none. 

GEORGE'S  SHOAL.  ^ 

A  Report  relative  to  the  survey  of  George's  Shoal,  made  in  Sloop  Orbit,  by  direction  and 
rf,  me  expense  of  E.  M.  Blunt,  assisted  by  the  United  States. Schooner  Science,  under 
authority  of  Capt.  Isaac  Hull,  at  his  request,in  1821. 

There  are  properly,  four  shoals  on  George's  Bank;  the  whole  of  them  included  be- 
tween latitudes  41°  34'  N.  and  41°  53'  30"  N.  and  longitudes  67°  18'  W.  and  67°  59'  W. 
Between  them  there  are  from  15  to  35  fathoms  water. 

The  largest,  and  on  which  is  the  chief  danger,  is  the  mostsoutherly  and  westerly.     It 
is  somewhat  triangular,  with  a  long  and  narrow  spit  making  out  from  the  S.  E.. angle. 
The  S.  E.  point  is  in   latitude  41°  34'   N.  and  longitude  67°  40'  W.     The  west  point  is- 
in  lat.  41°  42'  N.  and  longitude  67°  59'  W.     The  N.  E.  point  is  in  latitude  41°  48'  N. 
and  longitude  67°  47'  W.     The  eastern  side  of  this  shoal,  although  somewhat  irregular^ 
runs  nearly  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  having  on  it  from  three  feet  to  nine  fathoms  at  com- 
mon low  water.     It  is  composed  of  a  great  number  of  sand  spits,  very  narrow,  so  that  the- 
width  of  a  narrow  vessel  will  make  several  fathoms  difference  in  the  depth  of  water.. 
The  general  range  of  the  spits  is  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.     As  there  are  no  rocks,  they  are^ 
conseque'itly  liable  to  change,  in  some  measure,  their  positions  and  ranges.     On  theeast^^ 
ern  edgo,  even  in  calm  weather,  unless  it  be  high  or  low  water,  the  tides  run  with  great 
rapidity,  and  form  considerable  breakers  when  setting  to  the  westward,  and  a  large  water- 
fall when  setting   to  the  eastward.     This  is  accounted  for,  by  a  knowledge  of  the  fact, 
that  directly  on  the  edge  of  tills  shoal,  there  are  from  twelve  to  sixteen  fathoms  of  water, 
80  that  the  edgo  forms  a  species  of  dam,  stopping  the  force  of  the  flood  tide,  and  over 
which  the  ebb  falls. 


■  5     '  '    '      I     '»■ 


^tfrnimm 


^W^PPP*"!^ 


,i   *i|" 


139  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

When  there  WM  conaiderable  wind,  we  obaerred  that  the  breakers  were  higher  within 
the  edge,  to  the  westward,  than  on  the  edge:  and  I  have  no  doubt  that  the  water  there 
was  still  shoaler,  and  that  we  should  have  seen  the  saod  bad  it  not  been  for  the  heavy  sen 
The  breakers  were  such,  unless  it  were  entirely  calm,  that  it  was  impossible  to  go  arnone 
them  with  boats:  nor  was  it  considered  safe  to  attempt  it  with  the  vessels.  For,  beside 
the  danger  of  striking  on  the  hard  sand  spits,  the  vessels  would  have  been  liable  to  be  filled 
by  the  breakers.  Even  on  the  eastern  edge,  and  at  ne.i.'iy  slack  woter,  the  vessels  were 
at  times  nearly  covered  with  them.  And  it  was  not  thought  necessary  to  attempt  it  » 
the  objects  of  survey,  to  ascertain  if  there  was  danger  on  the  shoals,  and  the  situati'oog 
and  extent  of  them,  could  be  accomplished  without  the  risk. 

Had  not  the  sea  been  very  smooth,  and  at  high  water,  we  should  not  have  been  able  to 
have  gotten  on  where  we  found  three  feet,  reducing  it  to  low  water.  The  prevailing 
wind  was  to  the  eastward ;  and  I  have  no  doubt  but  that  this  place  would  have  been  bare 
with  any  continuance  of  an  off-shore  wind. 

I  think  there  are  no  rocks  about  the  shoals.  We  had  one  cast  on  the  S.  W.  side,  which 
indicated  rocky  bottom  in  15  fathoms :  but  I  believe  it  to  have  been  some  sharp  stone  that 
the  lead  struck  on,  although  I  have  marked  it  according  to  the  appearance,  on  the  chart 
(This  chart  is  published  by  E.  &.  G.  W.  Blunt.) 

The  centre  of  the  northern  shoal  is  in  latitude  41°  63'  30"  N.  and  longitude  67°  43' 
W.  It  extends  east  and  west  about  four  miles.  The  shoalest  part,  having  six  fnthotng 
is  very  narrow,  and  composed  of  hard  sand.  But  there  are  not  more  than  twelve  futh. 
oms  of  water  for  three  miles  south  of  the  above  latitude.  On  the  north  side,  at  two 
eaUes'  length  from  the  shoal,  the  sloop  droped  into  33  fathoms.  The  breakers  on  this 
shoal  are  very  heavy,  and  when  there  should  be  a  sufficient  sea  to  endanger  a  vesaei 
they  may  be  seen  some  miles,  and  heard  at  a  very  considerable  distance;  and  nq  t|,g 
shoalest  part  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  length  inside,  and  no  danger  near  it,  a  vessel  might 
avoid  it. 

To  the  eastward  of  the  last  mentioned  shoal,  in  latitude  41°  51'  N.  and  longitude  67° 
26'  W.  is  another  small  shoni,  with  eight  fathoms  water,  having,  however,  considerable 
breakers.  There  are  but  17  fathoms  for  three  miles  north  of  it;  but  very  near  to  tiie 
«ast  of  it,  are  31  fathoms,  and  from  20  to  30  fathoms  to  the  south  and  west. 

The  centre  of  the  east  shoal  is  in  latitude  41°  47'  N.  and  longitude  G7°  19'  W.  Itjg 
about  two  miles  long  from  east  to  west,  and  has  several  fathoms  watoi.  To  the  south, 
there  are  but  17  fathoms  for  two  miles.  In  other  directions  there  are  from  twenty  to 
thirty  fathoms. 

The  above  described  shoals,  I  am  confident,  are  all  which  are  on  George's  Bank.  Their 
positions  and  sizes  may  be  relied  on,  as  well  as  the  places  of  the  soundings  which  I  have 
laid  down  on  the  chart.  They  were  ascertained  by  a  vast  number  of  celestial  observu- 
iions,  taken  with  good  and  well  adjuiited  instruments  on  board  the  two  vessels,  and  very 
carefully  and  faithfully  calculated.  The  rotes  of  the  chronometers  were  found  by  a  tran- 
sit instrument  previously  to  sailing  from  Boston,  and  after  our  return,  and  nil  the  oljserva- 
•tions  re-calculated  for  the  small  variation  which  appeared. 

At  anchor,  different  places,  and  on  different  days,  we  determined  the  set  and  strength 
of  the  tides,  and  as  nearly  as  possible  their  rise  and  fall.  The  rise  of  them  is  from  ono 
to  one  and  a  half  fathom.  They  set  round  the  compass  every  tide,  setting  S.  E.  nctniv, 
at  full  moon,  and  running  from  one  to  four  knots  per  hour,  at  a  mile's  distance  IVum  tlie 
breakers.  The  mean  rate,  however,  is  materially  varied  by  the  winds ;  they  set  strongest 
at  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  and  which  is  undouijitedly  the  strength  of  the  flood  and  ebb. 
From  these  causes  and  variety  in  the  tides,  arises  a  principal  danger  in  ap|)roaciiiiig  the 
flhoals.  When  under  way  about  the  shoals,  in  a  few  hours  time  we  found  ourselves 
drifted  far  out  of  our  reduinings,  and  to  ascertain  our  situation,  when  both  vessi-is  were 
under  way,  we  took  continued  observations  for  the  longitude  by  the  chronometers,  anil 
at  the  same  time  double  altitudes  for  the  latitudes;  which  latter  were  calculated  by 
Brosier's  new  and  certain  method.  By  allowing  for  the  sets  ot'  tides,  as  ascertuiiied  at 
anchor,  the  observations  and  reckoning  agreed  very  nearly,  so  that  the  latitude  nvd  longi- 
tude of  eviry  sounding  place  on  the  chart  may  be  considered  as  certain.  Should  any 
vessel  fall  m  with  the  slioala,  a  knowledge  of  the  course  and  strength  of  the  tides  would 
be  of  the  greatest  importance.  And  they  can  be  calculated  for  any  day  and  hour  by  the 
preceding  facts. 

In  going  from  Cape  Cod  to  the  shonis,  at  5  leagues  from  the  light,  there  are  36  fath- 
oms, muddy  bottom.  The  water  gradually  deepens  to  133  fathoms;  and  then  gradually 
decreases  towards  the  shoals.  In  lat.  41°  51'  N.  and  long.  68°  11'  W.  there  are  90 
fathoms.  In  lat.  41°  50'  N.  and  long.  68°  3'  W.  there  are  49  fathoms,  sand  and  gravel, 
on  the  western  edge  of  the  bank.  The  water  then  shoals  fast.  To  the  northward  of  the 
flhoal,  in  hit.  41°  59'  N.  and  long.  67°  52'  W.  on  the  south  side  of  the  north  channel,  there 
are  60  fathoms,  soft  mud.  In  lat.  42°  12'  N.  and  long.  67°  51'  W.  there  are  102  fathoms, 
InJat.  42°  10'  N.  and  long.  67°  18'  W.  there  is  no  bottom  at  175  fathoms.  To  the  east- 
ward we  did  not  ascertain  the  extent  of  the  Bank.     In  two  miles  southward  of  the  S.  E, 


■p^ 


■MHM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

poiDt  of  the  shoalB,  there  are  from  20  to  26  fhthoms  of  water,  which  aoandings  eontinne 
for  at  lenat  20  milea  to  the  southward  and  westward. 

The  bottom  of  the  Bank,  so  far  aa  we  ascertained  it,  is  of  anch  a  narrow  character,  that 
it  is  difficult  for  a  veaael  to  aacertain  her  situation  by  it.  We  often  found  a  great  variety 
of  sonndings  in  a  very  short  distance ;  such  as  sands  of  various  colors,  and  differently  mixed, 
{■oarse  and  fine,  gravel  pebbles  of  various  colors,  stones,  sponge,  and  shells.  Of  all  these, 
except  snnd,  I  saved  a  number  of  specimens,  with  marks  to  note  the  places  from  which 
they  were  taken. 

It  mny  be  worthy  of  remark,  that  at  one  cast  of  the  lead,  on  examining  the  arming,  I 
found  one-third  black  sand,  one-third  white,  and  one-third  green  shells,  in  as  distinct  di- 
mensions ns  they  could  have  been  drawn. 

Notwithstanding  this  variety,  some  general  character  of  the  soundings  may  be  useful. 
To  the  westward  of  the  shoals,  and  at  some  distance  from  them,  the  bottom  is  coarse 
land  and  gravel  of  all  colors ;  to  the  N.  W.  a  mixture  of  white,  black,  and  yellow  sand ; 
to  tlie  N.  black  and  white  sand ;  to  the  N.  E.  chiefly  gravel  and  pebbles  ;  to  the  E.  fine 
frhite  and  yellow  sand  ;  and  in  lat.  41°  57'  N.  and  long.  68°  40'  W.  some  white  moss; 
to  tlie  S.  E.  fine  white  and  yellow  sand. 

As  the  shoals  are  approached,  in  whatever  direction,  the  soundings  become  coarse,  and 
are  frequently  mixed  with  shells  of  different  kinds.  Near  the  shoal  much  of  the  bottom 
as;  and  to  the  east  of  the  largest  and  most  dangerous  shoal,  there  are  stones  of 


133 


the  sixe  of  hens'  eggs,  with  moss  and  sponge  on  some  of  them.  Near  the  S.  E.  point 
are  from  15  to  30  fathoms ;  a  prevailing  character  of  the  soundings  is  green  shells,  and 
chiefly  of  the  species  usually  called  sea  eggs.  If  a  vessel  be  far  enough  south  to  avoid 
danger,  she  will  have  no  shells.  The  quality  of  the  soundings,  as  far  as  we  were  able  to 
Burvey  the  bank,  will  be  best  understood  from  the  chart,  where  they  have  been  carefully 
rated. 

The  time  and  weather  prevented  making  a  complete  survey  of  all  parts  of  the  bank ; 
and  nithough  we  ascertained  the  boundaries  of  it  to  the  westward  and  northward,  I  have 
not  delineated  it  on  the  chart,  being  unwilling  to  borrow  any  thing  from  charts  which  dis- 
agree so  essentially,  and  which  we  found  very  incorrect  in  the  material  points.  Of  the 
shonls  themselves,  I  do  not  believe  a  more  perfect  survey  can  be  made ;  unless  in  a  calm 
time,  the  main  shoal  could  be  penetrated.  This,  however,  does  not  seem  to  be  an  object, 
as  no  vessel  would  be  safe  in  attempting  to  pass  over  it. 

Ttie  reports  that  rocks  have  been  seen  on  the  shoals  are  undoubtedly  incorrect.  Had 
there  been  any  there,  we  could  not  have  failed  of  discovering  them.  At  the  west  part  of 
the  bank,  in  strong  tide  rips,  we  saw  large  quantities  of  kelp  and  sea  weed,  which,  at  a 
distance,  had  the  appearance  of  rocks.  But  on  sounding  we  found  good  water,  and  reg- 
ular and  clear  bottom. 

It  will  be  seen  by  the  bottom  that  the  holding  ground  is  not  good.  But  the  vessels  em- 
ployed in  the  survey,  by  having  a  long  scope  of  cable,  rode  out  a  considerable  gale  of  wind 
for  32  hours,  on  the  east  side  of  the  main  shoal  and  to  windward  of  it.  At  this  time  the 
sea  broke  very  high  in  10  fathoms  water. 

Since  this  survey,  in  1821,  the  shoal  has  been  re-surveyed  by  Lt.  Charles  Wilkes,  and 
others,  in  the  U.  S.  brig  Porpoise,  in  the  year  1837,  and  from  his  report  the  following  ia 
taken: 

"  The  shoalest  water  found  on  any  part  of  the  Bank  was  Qi  fathoms,  or  15  feet,  reduced 
to  low  water ;  and  this  is  only  to  be  found  in  two  small  places,  viz, 

Lat.  41°  40'  13"     Long.  67°  44'   10" 
Lat.  41     40    33      Long.  67     44    30 

"  The  whole  of  the  shoal  is  composed  of  hard  sand  spits — fine  sand  on  the  shoalest 
places,  and  coarser  as  the  water  deepens,  until  it  becomes  large  pebbles  without  sand." 

"  The  rise  and  fall  of  tides  is  7  feet,  extremely  regular,  the  first  part  of  the  flood  set- 
ting N.  N.  W.  the  latter  part  N.  by  E.  and  ebb  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  by  W.  The  flood  runs 
ii  hours,  ebb  5i  hours;  greatest  velocity  two  and  six-tenths  of  a  mile  from  half  an  hour 
to  two  hours  in  changing,  going  round  with  the  sun  on  from  north  by  way  of  east.  The 
wind  has  but  little  effect  on  the  velocity.  High  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  10  o'clock  High  icater. 
30  minutes.     Variation  of  the  compass  8°  15"." 

GEORGE'S  BANKS.— A  bonk,  which  is  called  upon  the  chart "  Clark's  Bank,"  has  George'i 
been  discovered  inside  of  George's  Shoal.     Ten  fathoms  water  have  been  found  upon  it,  Batiks. 
in  Int.  41°  34',  long.  69°  15'. 

LITTLE  GEORGE'S  BANK,  having  only  5  fathoms,  and  which  breaks  in  heavy  Little 
weather.     It  is  in  lat.  41°  11',  and  about  long.  68°,  being  about  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the  George'i 
Great  Shcal  of  George's  Bank.     The  fishermen  have  given  it  the  above  name.  Bank. 

Note. — In  coming  from  the  southward  for  George's  Bank,  you  will  get  soundings  in  Soundings. 
lat.  40°  4'  N.  if  on  the  S,  S.  W.  part  of  the  Bank.     Should  you  not  get  soundings  in  the 


134  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ht.  of  40°  30'  N.  you  may  be  certain  you  are  to  the  eaBtward  of  the  shoal,  when  yon 
must  direct  your  courae  accordingly  to  clear  it,  when  your  first  soundings  will  be  in  75 
to  60  fathoms.  When  steering  to  the  northward,  you  will  shoaleu  your  water  graduallv 
to  20  fathoms,  when  you  will  be  in  latitude  41°  20'  N.  which  depth  of  water  you  win 
have  10  or  12  leagues  distant,  either  east  or  west. 

Soundings  from  Geori,c'8  Bnnli  continue  W.  by  S.  until  you  are  nearly  abreast  of  the 
east  of  Long  Island,  then  southward  to  Cape  Hatteras. 
The  Bay  of       THE  BAY  OF  PASSAMAqUODDY  abounds  in  good  anchoring  places,  well shel. 
Passama-       tered  from  all  winds,  and  divides  the  United  States  from  that  of  the  Britiah  territory. 
quoddy.  There  are  three  passages  into  Passamaquoddy  Bay,  namely,  the  Western  PasBaee 

the  Ship  Channel  or  Middle  Passage,  and  the  Eastern  Passage.  The  first  is  that  be- 
tween the  Isle  of  Campo  Bello  and  the  main  land  to  the  west.  Middle  Passage  lies  be. 
twoen  Campo  Bello  and  Deer  Island,  and  the  Eastern  Passage  is  to  the  eastward  niid 
northward  of  both  islands,  which  is  preferred,  being  of  easy  access,  with  good  depth  of 
water. 
We$Um  WESTERN  PASSAGE.— Vessels  bound  to  West  Quoddy  Bay,  and  being  to  the 

Passage.  westward  of  the  lighthouse,  should  give  the  shore  a  berth  of  }  of  a  mile,  and  steer  N.  E, 
by  E.  which  wdl  carry  you  clear  of  Sail  Rock ;  and  when  the  light,  or  sound  of  the  bell 
bears  W.  N.  W.  you  may  steer  N.  W.  Id  mile,  which  course  and  distance  will  bring  you 
up  with  the  Spar  Buoy  on  the  Middle  Ground,  and  if  low  water,  here  you  may  anchor 
and  wait  for  the  tide  to  go  over  the  bar,  which  you  cannot  cross  until  '^h  hours  flood;  but 
if  high  water,  and  you  wish  to  continue  throush  the  Narrows — 
Bearings.  Bring  the  Red  Buoy  to  bear  N.  by  W.  i  W.  and  steer  direct  for  it.     You  may  go  on 

either  side,  by  keeping  it  close  on  board,  and  after  passing  it  one  cable's  length,  steer  N. 
E.  by  N.  for  the  Black  Buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand ;  and  after  passing 
it  half  a  cable's  length,  steer  N.  by  W.  for  Delesdernier's  Point,  which  you  must  lieep 
close  on  board. 

After  passing  this  point  you  must  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  Narrows,  due  regard  being 
Tide.  had  to  the  tide,  as  it  runs  upon  the  flood  and  ebb  from  3  to  5  knots. 

West  Quoddy  Head  light  may  be  seen  at  sea,  in  clear  weather,  6  leagues. 
It  is  situated  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Quoddy  Head,  and  contains  a  fixed  light,  elevated 
Lighthouse,    ninety  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     It  bears  from  the  .Suuihern  Head  of  Grand  Mn- 
nan  N.  k  E.  disttmt  about  16  miles;  and  from  the  Northern  Head  of  said  island,  W.  K, 
W.  distant  about  nine  miles. 

Sail  Rock  bears  from  the  light  S.  S.  E.  about  |  of  a  mile :  it  is  not  covered  at  high 
water,  and  at  some  distance  has  the  appearance  of  a  sail,  from  which  it  derives  its  name. 
There  is  a  passage  between  it  and  the  main  shore,  at  low  water,  but  which  had  better 
not  be  attempted,  unless  forced  by  the  currents,  and  light  winds.  Near  the  above  men- 
Alarm  Bell,  tioned  lighthouse  is  an  alarm  bell,  weighing  28  cwt.  3  qrs,  (twenty-eight  hundred  weight 
and  two  quarters,)  which  is  at  present  rung  by  hand,  and  may  be  heard  at  sea,  from  3  to 
6  miles,  in  thick  weather. 

Liberty  Point  bears  from  the  light  E.  N.  E.  about  one  and  a  half  mile,  this  being  the 
southernmost  point  of  Campo  Bello  Island,  and  forming  the  eastern  side  of  West  Quod- 
dy Bay. 

West  from  said  point,  about  J  of  a  mile  distant,  lies  a  rock,  called  Black  Rock,  which 
is  not  covered  at  high  water,  and  is  bold  all  around. 

The  middle  ground  is  a  sbnal,  near  the  middle  of  West  Quoddy  Bay,  about  i  of  a  mile 
in  circumference,  with  a  good  channel  on  either  side  of  it.  The  shoalest  part  is  often  dry. 
Buoy.  On  the  western  part  of  the  shoal  is  a  Spar  Buoy,  moored  in  5  feet  at  low  water,  and 

which  bears  from  West  Quoddy  Head  N.  N.  W.  distant  about  one  mile. 

From  the  above  mentioned  buoy,  N.  W.  by  N.  k  N.  ai)out  li  mile  distant,  is  a  Nun 
Buoy,  painted  red,  and  moored  in  two  fathoms  at  low  water.  To  the  southward  of  this 
buoy  is  a  rocky  bar,  extending  from  Campo  Bello  Island  to  the  main  shore  of  West  Quod- 
dy Bay,  and  which  is  nearly  dry  at  low  water.  N.  N.  E.  distant  half  a  mile  from  the 
above  Red  Nun  Buoy,  is  a  similiar  buoy  painted  black,  moored  in  4  feet  at  low  water,  od 
the  eastern  part  of  the  Muscle  Bank,  so  called,  which  is  bare  at  half  tide. 

From  the  Black  Buoy  to  Delesdernier's  Point,  itisN.  k  W.  distant  about  %  of  a  mile. 
This  point  is  very  bold,  and  may  be  known  by  a  number  of  fish  houses  upon  it,  which  may 
be  seen  on  the  larboard  hand,  in  running  through  the  narrows. 

The  entrance  of  West  Quoddy  Bay  is  wide,  and  the  shores  are  bold,  and  may  be 
Pilot.  neared  until  up  with  the  Spar  Buoy.     If  in  want  of  a  pilot,  by  displaying  a  signal,  one  cao 

be  obtained  at  the  lighthouse. 

Middle  MIDDLE  PASSAGE. — If  bound  into  Passamaquoddy  in  a  large  vessel,  your  best  way 

Passage.        is  to  go  to  the  eastward  of  Campo  Bello  Island,  on  the  north-east  point  of  which  is  a  light- 

LightMute.     house,  60  feet  above  high  water  mark,  containing  a  fixed  light ;  it  is  placed  between  the 

main  ship  channel  and  the  northern  entrance  into  Head  Harbor,  and  within  250  feet  of 

the  extreme  point.     Ships  in  entering  into  the  main  channel,  or  vessels  bound  to  Head 

Harbor,  may  safely  pass  at  a  cable's  length  from  the  lighthouse.    In  sailing  up  the  main 


frnfm 


mmm 


mmm 


■M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


136 


'«; 


Camjio  Bello 
Lighthouse. 


cbanneli  caro  should  be  taken  not  to  keep  fi  '•  om  the  shorea  of  Cnmpo  Bello,  as  the  flood 
tide  letB  directly  over  from  the  point  at  th»  lighthouao,  to  the  isianaB  and  ledgus  on  the 
north  side  of  the  channel,  whi"h  is  here  upwards  of  n  mile  in  width,  and  at  two  hours  flood 
the  tide  sets  directly  towards  the  Blnck  Rock,  which  is  a  very  dnngerous  ledge  between 
Spruce  and  Ciisco  Bay  iBlnnds,  upon  which  several  vessels  have  been  wrecked  ;  after  pas- 
liog  up  and  lonving  the  light  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward,  the  tide  becomes  more  regular, 
god  gets  along  the  direction  of  Campo  Bella  shore. 

Common  tides  rise  here  25  feet.     At  full  and  change  it  is  high  water  at  half  past  11  High  water, 
o'clock  at  Moose  Island,  and  runs,  when  strongest,  between  Moose  Island  and  Marble  Isl- 
and, and  between  Deer  Island  and  Campo  Bello,  nearly  5  miles  an  hour.    In  the  western 
nnssnge,  common  tides  rise  from  20  to  26  feet,  and  within  Passamaquoddy  Bay  the  stream 
of  tide  is  scarcely  perceptible. 

Vessels  from  the  southward,  when  bound  up  for  this  bay,  should  make  for  the  western 
coast,  or  that  of  the  United  States,  as  it  is  the  most  clear  and  the  flood  most  favorable, 
being  from  7  to  8  miles  wide :  both  shores  bold,  the  depth  quickly  increasing,  on  each 
side, from  12  to  70  and  75  fathoms;  the  greatest  depths  near  Grand  Manan,  whore  you 
haul  quickly  from  10  to  75  fathoms. 

With  the  light  bearing  S.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  there  is  a  depth  of  19  and  20  fathoms,  where 
(hips  may  anchor  securely  from  all  winds. 

Off  the  N.  E.  end  of  Campo  Bello,  is  a  remarkable  large  rock,  called  the  White  Horse 
Rock. 

CAMPO  BELLO  LIGHTHOUSE — The  following  bearings  were  taken  from  the 
top  of  it : 

To  the  east  point  of  Grand  Monon,  (Fish  Head,)  S.  18°  E.  or  S.  by  E.  i  E. 

To  the  southernmost  of  the  Wolves,  S.  66"  30'  E.  or  E.  S.  E. 

To  the  northernmost  do.  S.  87°  E.  or  E.  i  S. 

To  Point  Lepreau,  N.  84°  E.  or  E.  j  N.  •  ' 

To  entrance  of  Beaver  Harbor,  N.  70°  E.  or  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 

To  the  White  Horse  Island,  the  top  of  the  rock,  which  is  white,  N.  45°  E.  or  N.  E. 
Tills  you  leave  on  the  starboard  hand. 

Spruce  Island  bearing  from  N.  6°  E.  to  N.  15°  W. 

To  Black  Rock,  very  dangerous,  N.  61°  30'  W.  or  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

To  Casro  Bay  Island,  N.  33°  W.  or  W.  i  N. 

HEAD  HARBOR,  at  t' e  N.  E.  point  of  Campo  Bello  Island,  is  a  secure  and  safe 
place,  small,  but  of  easy  access,  and  with  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom. 

HARBOR  DELUTE  lies  on  the  western  side  of  Campo  Bello,  and  at  its  S.  W.  end 
is  Snug  Cove,  a  good  harbor.  Moose  Island  is  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  channel,  and 
belongs  to  the  United  States.  Tlie  entrance  to  Passomoquoddy  comprehends  a  space  of 
nearly  twelve  miles. 

If  bound  for  Moose  Island  up  the  River  Scoodic,  as  you  pass  Todd's  Head,  (which  is 
half  a  mile  N.  E.  from  the  town  landing  on  Eastport.)  give  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile,  as  a 
ledge  of  rocks  lies  off  it.  Having  passed  this  head,  the  course  and  distance  to  Oak  Point 
or  Devil's  Head,  will  be  N.  by  W.  8  leagues;  in  going  which  distance,  (24  miles,)  you 
passFross'  Ledge  on  your  larboard  hand,  six  miles  from  Todd's  Head,  and  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  from  the  land ;  when  continuing  your  N.  by  W.  course  5  leagues,  you  will 
come  to  Robinstown,  two  miles  above  which,  off  a  small  island,  from  which  it  bears  N.  E. 
is  a  shoal  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  to  avoid  it  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand  best 
on  board,  till  you  come  up  with  Neutral  Island,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand, 
oae-fourth  of  a  mile  distant;  and  your  course  from  this  to  the  Devil's  Head,  (before  men- 
tioned,) which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  is  N.  N.  W.  3  miles.  When  you  have 
passed  the  Devil's  Head,  your  course  is  W.  N.  W.  one  league,  when  you  will  come  to  a 
large  lodge  of  rocks  that  you  must  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  is  bare  at  two  ' 

hours  ebb,  and  extends  half  way  across  the  river.  Keep  your  starboard  hand  on  board, 
and  when  you  pass  this  ledge,  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  distant  one  mile,  to  Turner's 
Point,  and  from  said  point  to  the  harbor,  your  course  is  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  three  miles, 
and  the  next  reach  to  the  falls  is  W.  N.  W.  distant  one  mile ;  the  tide  flows  here  25  feet, 
and  there  are  only  6  or  7  feet  in  the  channel  at  low  water,  with  long  flats  of  mud  on  both 
sides.     The  Devil'a  Head  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  10  or  12  miles. 

There  are  several  good  harbors  on  the  west  side  of  this  river,  and  all  the  difficulty  is  the 
great  depth  of  water,  which  is,  in  general,  from  1 8  to  24  fathoms.  There  is  also  a  good  har- 
bor on  your  starboard  hand  going  into  Deer  Island,  which  lies  to  the  southward  of  St.  An- 
drews, 2  leagues  distant.  It  may  be  easily  known,  as  there  is  a  large  bay  between  the 
two  isbinds,  whicli  lies  N.  E.  from  the  River  St.  Croix.  3  leagues  distant. 

LITTLE  RIVER. — This  harbor  bears  due  west  from  the  middle  of  Grand  Manan  Little  River. 
Island,  and  is  called  Little  River,  but  you  cannot  see  it  except  yu  are  near  the  north 
shore.     You  must  not  run  in  for  it  before  it  bears  N.  W.  or  N.  N.  W.     There  is  a  bluff 
point  of  rocks  on  the  starboard  hand,  as  you  go  in,  and  an  island  in  the  middle  of  the  har- 
bor,   As  you  pass  in,  leave  the  island  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  when  you  have  passed 


.;■'■ 


Head  Har- 
bor, 

Harbor 
Delate. 


ISO 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


it  hn  1  a  mile,  you  may  Hnchor  in  4  or  ft  fathomi,  muddy  bottom,  and  remain  aafe  from  all 
winda.     Your  courae  from  thia  harbor  to  Weit  Faaaamaquoildy  light,  ia  N.  E.  by  E.  A  E 
Light.  diatant  H  leaguoa.    On  the  weatern  aide  of  the  entrance  there  ia  a  fixed  light,  23  feet  e 

inchea  high. 
Maehias,  MACHIAS.— -If  you  are  bound  to  Mnchina  or  PRaanmnquoddy,  your  courae  fmn 

Mount  D^aert  ia  E.  10  lenguea,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Motmenpeclt  liKht,  wliich 
you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand;  then  ateer  N.  E.  by  E.  Qi  leagues,  for  Mnchina  Ijirht 
a  fixed  light,  65  feet  high,  on  Libby  lalnnd.  AOnr  you  havo  paaafld  the  light,  and  Imve 
the  paaange  well  open,  ateer  north,  until  you  pnaa  Croaa  lalnnd,  which  you  lenvo  on  your 
atarboard  hand;  but  in  paaaing  Croaa  laland,  you  muat  be  careful  of  acme  dangeroua 
ledgea  lying  off  it  li  mile,  in  a  S,  W.  direction,  on  which  courae  you  will  leave  a  larse 
white  rocl«  on  your  larboard  hand;  keep  on  thia  north  courae  untifyou  pnaa  a  round  hish 
iaiand  on  your  larboard  hand,  when  you  may  ahape  your  courae  W,  N.  W.  or  N.  W.  bv 
W.  for  a  point  that  ia  covered  with  young  birch  treea,  and  a  houae  on  it,  for  on  the  atar< 
board  hnnd  there  ia  nothing  but  flata  and  ahoala.  You  niny  keep  your  larboard  hnnd  nf^er 
you  pnaa  thin  houae,  vuti!  the  river  opena  to  the  northward,  when  you  may  run  up  to 
Croaa  River,  where  you  may  anchor  in  4  futhonia;  but  if  you  are  Iwund  up  to  tho  8.W. 
milla,  you  must  haul  away  to  the  weatward.  When  you  get  up  with  Mr.  Parker'a  house 
and  barn,  which  are  on  the  atarboard  hnnd,  you  muat  leave  the  barn  open  to  the  soutli- 
weatward  of  the  Pott-Head.  Thia  Pott-Head  ia  a  large  hill  that  you  leave  on  your  star- 
board hnnd. 
Jorui  Har-  JONES  HARBOR. — After  paaaing  the  above  largo  white  rock  in  your  north  courae 
bor.  haul  to  the  westwnrd  for  one-half  mile ;  bring  a  high  round  iaiand  that  ia  covered  witli 

treea  to  bear  N.  when  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 
MooseaBeck       MOOSE  A  BECK  HEAD  LIGHT  ia  on  Mistake  lalnnd;    it  ia  54  feet  above  the 
Head  Light,  level  of  the  sea,  and  contnina  n  revolving  light;  time  of  revolution  4  minutes,  showing  in 

that  time  two  bright  faces. 
MooieaBcck      MOOSE  A  BECK  REACH. — When  you  come  from  tho  westward,  and  pass  Ladle 
Reach.  laland  on  your  larboard  hand,  ateer  N.  E.  by  E.  for  Tibbet's  lalnnd,  which  you  leave  od 

your  Inrboard  hnnd.  When  you  come  to  the  east  end  of  thia  island,  givo  it  a  good  bertli, 
for  at  low  water  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lies  a  cable's  length  to  the  S.  E,  of  anid 
islnnd.  When  you  pass  it,  and  bring  Moose  a  Beck  Roach  open,  you  may  ateer  enstfor 
Mr.  Beat's  house;  but  you  muat  keep  the  atarboard  hand  best  on  board,  for  there  is  a  rock 
that  liea  about  the  middle  of  the  aound,  which  has  not  above  two  feet  of  water  on  it  at 
low  water.     You  may  anchor  to  the  westward  of  Mr.  Boal's  house. 

When  bound  to  the  eastward  over  Moose  a  Beck  Bar,  which  you  must  not  cross  before 
two  hours  flood,  you  steer  for  Kelley's  Coffee  Houae,  which  lies  on  the  larboard  hand,  as 
you  go  to  the  eastward,  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Moose  n  Beck  Reach.  When  you  are  en- 
tering on  the  bar,  you  will  bring  a  bushy  tree  right  against  Kelly's  Houae,  which  stands 
on  the  point.  Your  course  over  the  bar  is  east.  You  leave  the  Virgin's  Breasts,  one  uq 
your  starboard  and  one  on  your  larboard  hnnd;  but  if  you  are  bound  to  Chandler's  River, 
you  will  leave  the  Virgin's  Breasts  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  Rogue's  Island  on  the 
same  hand.  There  is  a  muddy  bar  that  lies  between  Rogue's  Islond  and  the  main  land, 
but  water  enough  on  it  at  two  hours  flood.  Rogue's  Island  has  n  ^ood  harl)or  at  the  N. 
W.  of  it,  safe  from  all  easterly  winds,  and  a  small  distance  from  Chandler's  River. 

When  you  go  over  Moose  a  Beck  Bar,  bound  to  Mnchias,  you  leave  the  Virgin's  Breasts 
aa  before  mentioned,  keeping  your  course  east,  and  a  bare  rock,  called  Pulpit  Rock,  on 
your  starboard  hand;  you  must  keep  Libby 's  Island  light  open  to  the  southward  of  this 
bare  rock.      [N.  B.  This  bare  rock,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard,  may  also  be  left 
on  vour  larboard,  and  steer  E.  S.  E.  for  Libby's  Islnnd  light.] 
MooseaBeck       MOOSE  A  BECK  HEAD  TO  MACHIAS.— (Jive  the  light  a  berth  of  ono  mile 
Head  to  Ma-  leaving  if  on  the  larboard  hand,  ond  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  24  leagues,  when  you  will  be  up 
chias.  with  Libby's  Island  light  on  your  starboard  hand;  then  run  N.  N.  E.  2  leagues,  which 

will  bring  you  up  with  .Stone's  Island,  on  your  larboard  hand,  having  a  rock  lying  E.  one- 
third  of  tt  mile  from  the  centre  of  the  islnnd;  frt  tti  this  steer  N.  for  Round  Island,  from 
which  follow  the  pattern  directions  for  Machins, 
Cape  Split  CAPE  SPLIT  HARBOR.— When  you  pass  P<stit  Manan  light,  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W. 

Harbor,  i  .S.and  steer  N.  E.  4  N.  fur  Cape  Split,  distant  5  leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you 

safe  into  the  harbor.      In  steering  said  course,  you  will  make  a  black  rock,  which  you 
leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  distant  one  mile  from  Cape  Split.     This  harbor  is  safe  from 
all  winds  but  S.  W.  which  blows  right  in;  but  if  you  anchor  in  a  cove  on  the  starboard 
side  and  moor  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  you  will  lie  safe  from  all  winds 
Nash's  Isl-  NASH'S  ISLAND,  at  the  entrance  of  Pleasant  River.      There  is  n  lighthouse,  47 

and.  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  on  this  island,  containing  a  fixed  light  of  a  deep  rod  color, 

Light,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand  going  in. 

Coming  from  the  westward,  you  must  leave  Petit  Manan  light  on  your  larboard  hand, 
giving  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile;  then  steer  N.  E.  ten  miles,  which  will  carry  you  up  with 
Nash's  Island  light,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand,  one-fourth  of  a  mile,  when  you 


^.-L^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


187 


-.Mit  iteer  N.  E.  by  E.  two  and  a  half  milei,  which  will  take  you  into  Tibbet'a  Narrowi. 
1'i,eie  narrows  are  formed  by  1  bbet's  Island  on  the  N.  W.  side,  and  Ram  Island  on  the 
g,  E,;  tliis  passage  is  a  quarte"  o.  a  mile  wide;  from  the  middle  of  which  you  must 
iteer  N.  E.  i  E.  one  mile,  which  will  bring  vou  up  with  Shabby  Island,  leaving  it  on 
your  starboard  hand  one-eighth  of  u  mile,  and  when  half  a  mile  above  it,  you  may  anchor 
ID  from  6  to  G  futhoms,  good  holding  ground.  Shabby  Island  bearing  S.  W.  by  S. 

Coming  in  from  sea,  and  to  the  eastward  of  nil  the  shoals  and  ledges  hereinafter  men- 
tionod,  bring  Nash's  Island  light  to  bear  N.  by  W.  and  run  for  it,  taking  care  not  to  ap- 
nroBch  the  southern  end  of  the  island  nearer  than  half  a  mile,  as  there  is  a  sunken  ledge 
fully  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

Vessels  may  anchor  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  Nash's  Island,  and  find  a  tolerable  shelter 
from  easterly  and  S.  E.  winds,  one-fourth  of  a  mile  above  the  light,  and  one-eighth  of  a 
mile  from  the  island,  in  10  fathoms,  soft  bottom,  being  but  a  little  out  of  the  regular  track 
from  the  light  to  Tibbett's  Narrows.  In  coming  from  the  light  to  tho  narrows,  you  leave 
on  your  larboard  hand,  about  half  a  mile,  a  large  black  rock,  generally  known  by  the 
iiiitne  of  the  "Pot;"  the  next  is  Ladle  Island,  formed  very  much  like  a  ladle,  and  about 
one  mile  above  the  light;  this  you  pass  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  steering  the  regular 
course:  the  next  lanu  on  thv*^  left  is  Tibbet's  Island,  the  entrance  of  the  narrows,  as  be- 
fore described.  It  may  be  proper  to  observe  that  Tibbet'a  Island  appears  to  be  a  part  of 
the  main  land  until  you  get  above  the  narrows. 

On  the  right  hand,  between  the  light  and  said  narrows,  are  several  islands  and  ledges, 
but  they  lie  a  good  distance  from  the  regular  track. 

Any  shin,  no  matter  how  great  her  draft  of  water,  may  enter  Moose  a  Beck  Reach  by 
folluwing  the  aliove  directions. 

The  following  are  the  bearings  and  distances  of  rocks  and  ledges  from  Nash's  Island  Bearing$. 
light,  which  must  be  borne  in  mind  when  you  are  compelled  to  deviate  from  the  given  di- 
roctiotiB : 

BInck  Rock,  (always  above  water,)  S.  E.  by  S.  i  S.  3j  miles. 

Jourdan's  Outer  Ledge,  which  is  covered  ot  high  water,  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  4  miles. 

PKTIT  MANAN  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  53  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  on  the  Petit  Manan 
south  end  of  Petit  Manan  Island,  and  there  are  several  dangerous  ledges  bearing  from  Light.  , 

the  light. 

Jnckson's  Ledge  or  Eastern  Rock,  on  which  there  are  12  feet  at  low  water,  bears  east 
4  Riiles. 

South  East  Rock,  on  which  there  are  7  feet,  bears  S.  E.  by  S.  4  miles. 

A  lodge  with  16  feet,  S.  S.  E.  '2  miles. 

Moulton's  Ledge,  W.  by  N.  4  miles,  nearly  bare. 

There  are  also  several  shoal  spots  bearing  from  the  light,  from  S.  to  S.  S.  W.  about 
three  miles  distant. 

PLEASANT  RIVER. — When  you  come  from  the  westward,  and  bound  for  Plea-  Pleasant 
ennt  River,  in  passing  Petit  Manan  light,  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  by  S.  and  steer  N.  £.  by  River. 
N.  3  leagues  distant.  In  steering  said  course,  if  it  is  clear  weather,  you  will  see  Captain 
Wosse's  house  open  between  the  island  and  main  land;  but  this  passage  will  not  do  at 
low  water.  You  must  leave  this  island  (and  a  high  dry  ledge  of  rocks  that  lie  to  the  west- 
wnrd  of  it)  on  your  starboard  hand :  when  you  pass  the  bare  ledge,  you  will  see  a  bare 
isle,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand;  then  you  may  hnul  up  for  Capt.  Wasse's 
house  and  anchor,  and  take  a  pilot  for  Pleasant  River,  as  it  in  not  safe  going  without  one, 
except  you  are  well  acquainted. 

Narrow  Gauges  is  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Pleasant  River,  too  difficult  to  be  de- 
cribed,  os  there  are  sundry  small  islands  at  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  or  bay.  The  best 
wny  for  a  stranger  is  to  go  into  Cape  Split  Harbor  and  get  a  pilot,  as  there  is  no  difficulty 
in  going  into  Cape  Split  in  the  duy  time,  keeping  the  larboard  hand  best  on  board. 

BOWBEAR  HARBOR. — In  coming  from  the  westward,  bound  to  Pigeon  Hill,  or  Bowbear 
Bowbear  Harbor,  bring  Petit  Manan  light  to  bear  N.  E.  ond  run  for  it,  giving  it  a  berth  of  Harbor. 
one-fourth  of  a  mile,  and  then  steer  N.  i  W.  4  miles:  in  steering  this  course,  you  will 
leave  the  Egg  Rock  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  you   will  make  the  westerly  shore, 
giving  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile;  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  one  mile,  when  you  will  be  opposite 
Dyer's  houre,  where  vou  may  anchor  safe  from  all  winds  in  3  fathoms  water. 

DYER'S  BAY. — In  coming  from  the  eastward,  bound  to  Dyer's  Bay,  give  Petit  Manan  Dyer's  Bay. 
light  three-fourths  of  a  mile  berth,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand;  bring  the  light 
to  bear  N.  E.  three-fourths  of  a  mile  distant,  then  steer  N.  by  W.  which  will  corry  you 
iato  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  leaving  a  large  dry  ledge  on  your  larboard  hand :  when  abreast 
of  this  ledge,  which  is  bold  to,  give  it  a  berth  of  5  or  6  rods,  then  steer  N.  i  E.  4  or  5  miles, 
where  you  may  anchor  safe  from  all  winds,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

GOLDSBOROUGH  HARBOR  lies  N.  N.  W.  from  Petit  Manon  lighthouse,  two  Goldsbor- 
leogues  distant,  leaving  one  island,  covered  with  trees,  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  two  on  ough  Har- 
your  larboard  hand;  then  your  course  is  N.  N-  W.  li  mile,  then  N.  i  E.  4  miles,  which  bor, 
will  bring  you  up  with  Goldsborough  Point,  where  you  may  anchor  safe  from  all  winds, 
in  3  or  4  iattioms,  muddy  bottom. 


138 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Prospect 
Harbor. 


Light. 


Lifs,ht. 


Mount  Des- 
ert Rock. 
Lighlfiouie. 


Mount  Des- 
ert Island. 


Light. 


Mount  Def- 
er', Eastern 
Pass. 


Bunker'' J 
Ledge. 


Buoy. 


PROSPECT  HARBOR  hns  a  fixed  light,  on  the  east  point  of  entrance.  From  Pe- 
tit  Mnnan,  it  bears  N.  W.  i  W.  distant  6  mileB,  but  is  not  visible  fronn  that  point:  from 
Schepdick  Island  it  bears  N.  N.  E.  distant  4  miles— and  in  sailing  along  the  coast,  is  visi- 
ble  only  between  the  bearing  N,  by  E.  4  E.  and  N.  W.  by  N. 

Clark's  Ledge  (the  eld  point  of  entrance  to  the  harbor)  lies  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  third 
of  a  mile  from  the  light;  Big  Ledge  S.  by  E.  di  .tant  2i  miles;  Little  Black  Ledge  S.  by 
E,  i  mile.  Little  Black  Ledge  is  nearly  covered  at  high  tide  and  bears  S.  J  E.  1  ^\\q 
from  Orenburg  Point  and  E.  i  S.  from  Big  Ledge,  which  is  liigh  above  water.  There  ig 
is  a  good  passage  between  the  two  ledges. 

Bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.  4  N.  ancl  steer  for  it— leaving  Little  Black  Ledge 
on  the  larboard,  and  Cranberry  Point  on  the  starboard  hand — when  up  with  the  lieht 
give  it  a  berth  of  200  fathoms — leaving  it  on  the  starboard,  and  Clark's  Ledge  on  the  lar- 
board hiun(i,  sailing  W.  N.  W.  for  the  middle  of  the  harbor — anchor  with  the  light  bear 
ing  E.  4  N. 

MOUNT  DESERT  TO  GOLDSBOROUGH  AND  MACHIAS. 

In  going  from  Mount  Desert  to  Goldsborough,  you  must  steer  E.  4  N.  for  Scuttock 
Point,  four  leagues,  where  there  is  an  island  which  you  may  pass  either  side  of,  but  it 
is  best  to  leave  it  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  then  steer  N.  E.  about  34  leagues,  which 
will  carry  you  up  with  Goldsborougli  Harbor.  You  will  see  three  islands  which  lie  in 
the  mouth  of  the  harbor;  you  must  leave  them  on  your  liirboard  hand,  and  go  in  the 
eastern  i)assBge.  In  standing  in  forthis  place,  you  will  see  Petit  Manan  lighthouse,  which 
you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  North  from  Petit  Manan,  one-ciglitof  a  mile  distant 
lies  a  ledge,  bare  at  half  tide,  which  you  keep  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  when  going 
over  the  bar,  which  you  pass  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  bound  eastward,  at  which. 
as  you  pass  the  bar,  Scuttock  Island  will  be  a  handspike's  length  open  to  th<-  southward 
of  Scuttock  Point,  but  to  go  over  this  bar  requires  a  pilot.  When  near  the  bar,  and  up 
with  Petit  Manan  Island,  keep  Z.  S.  E.  one  half  a  mile  distant,  which  will  clerr  a  ledge 
having  9  feet  water  at  low  water,  that  lies  E.  of  the  channel  going  over  the  bar,  one-t'ourth 
of  a  mile  distant.  There  is  a  bar  that  runs  from  the  shore  to  this  little  islimd,  which  is 
about  one  league  from  the  land.  This  bar  has  34  fathoms,  at  high  water,  and  9  feet  at 
low  water. 

MOUNT  DESERT  ROCK.— This  Rock  is  15  miles  S.  12  W.  from  Baker's  Island 
light;  on  it  there  is  a  hghthouse,  564  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  containing  a  fixed 
light.  S.  W.  by  S.  3C14  feet  from  the  rock  there  is  a  ledge  of  3  fathoms,  inside  there 
are  22  fathoms,  outside,  close  to  the  rock,  there  are  17,18,  20,  25.  30,  and  35  fathoms  wa- 
ter ;  it  hns  been  callod  Columbia  Ledge  by  Capt.  Owen,  R.  N..  who  surveyed  it. 

MOUNT  DESERT  ISLAND  forms  the  northern  si-'e  of  the  passage  to  Bear  Island, 
and  may  be  known  by  several  high  hills  upon  it.  Tl  is  Island  is  about  15  miles  lung, 
from  north  to  south,  and  12  broad ;  it  is  nearly  divi  'cd  by  a  stream  of  water,  called 
Soaines  Sound,  at  the  head  of  which  is  Eden  ;  at  the  entrance  of  Soames  Sound  are  two 
good  harbors,  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  Harbors. 

Bear  Island  lies  ne.ir  the  centre  of  the  passage  between  Sutton's  Island  and  Mount 
Desert:  it  is  a  small  island,  covered  with  spruce  trees.  The  light  stands  upon  its  western 
end,  elevated  i'>3  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  exhibiting  a  fixed  light,  and  may  be  seen 
in  ';ienr  weather  a  distance  of  12  or  15  miles. 

MOQNT  DESERT,  E  AS!  ERN  PASS.— In  coming  from  the  westward,  and  intend 
going  into  Mount  Dejcrt,  bring  Baker's  Island  light  to  b"»r  north,  and  run  for  it,  leaving 
it  on  your  larboard  hand.  Afttr  passing  it.  steer  N.  N.  W.  until  the  light  on  Bear  Island 
ho'irs  W.  N.  W.  and  run  direct  for  it.  In  running  tliis  course,  y»u  '^viH  leave  Sutton's 
Island  on  your  larboard  hand.  The  shores  around  this  island  are  very  bolu,  and  you  may 
near  it  within  one  cable's  length. 

BUNKER'S  LEDGE,  on  which  is  built  a  stone  beacon,  with  a  cask  placed  upon  a 
staff  in  its  centre,  bears  from  the  eastern  end  ofSuiton's  Island  E.  4  N.  distant  about  one 
mile,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  You  may  near  the  ledge  within  two  ca- 
bles'length.  When  the  light  on  Baker's  Island  is  entirely  obscured  behind  theeaste.n 
point  of  Cranberry  Island,  jou  are  then  the  westward  of  Bunker's  Ledge;  and  should 
you  have  a  head  wind,  you  may  stand  to  the  northward  until  the  light  on  Bear  Island 
bears  W.  by  N.  In  running  for  Bear  Island  light,  you  may  near  Bunker's  Ledge  within 
one  cable's  length,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand.  After  passing  tho  light  one-qunr- 
ter  of  a  mile,  you  may  anchor,  with  the  light  bearing  from  E.  to  E.  N.  E.  in  12  fathoms 
water,  good  holding  ground ;  or  you  can  run  for  N.  E.  Harbor,  about  one  mile  lo  the 
northward  of  the  light. 

N.  W.  by  W.  distant  4  a  mile  f'om  Bear  Island  light,  lies  a  ledge,  hare  at  low  water, 
having  on  the  western  edge  a  spar  buoy  painted  black,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
hand.     Said  ledge  bears  from  tlie  centre  of  N.  E.  Harbor  S.  4  W. 

Sutton's  Island  lies  near  the  centre  of  the  passage,  but  tlie  'ueet  water  is  to  tho  north- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


139 


ffard  of  it.  If  you  wish  to  go  to  the  westward  of  it,  when  between  Bunker's  Lf  Ve  and 
Crnnbeny  Island,  steer  W.  by  S.  until  Sutton's  Isliind  eastern  point  bears  N.  E.  You 
can  then  nnchor,  or  run  further  in,  into  Hndlock's  Harbor,  to  the  south  of  you;  or  steer 
\f.  N.  W.  distant  about  three  miles,  for  S.  W.  Harbor. 

Bunker's  Ledge  bears  from  Baker's  Island  light  N.  by  W.  distant  about  four  miles. 
Bear  Islnnd  light  bears  from  Bunker's  Ledge  W.  by  N.  i  N.  distant  about  three  miles, 
fhe  middle  part  of  Cranberry  Island  bears  from  Bunker's  Ledge  S.  S.  W.  distantly 

mile- 

Bilker's  Island  and  v.     nberry  Island  form  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  pas-  Baker's  Isl- 
gage  to  Bear  Island,  anu  .ire  covered  with  spruce  trees.     The  light  on  Baker's  Island  is  and. 
lociited  near  the  centre  of  the  island,  elevateo     )  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  exhibit- 
ing a  fixed  light,  and  may  be  seen  a  distance       ifteen  miles,  m  clear  weather.  Light, 

A  bar  extends  from  Baker's  to  Cranberry  Islands  covered  at  high  water,  which  is  ofteu 
mistaken  oy  strangers  for  the  passage  going  into  Cranberry  Island  Harbor. 

You  must  always  recollect  that,  before  entering  (.'ranberry  Islnnd  Harbor,  the  light  on 
Baker's  Island  will  be  entirely  obscured  behind  the  eostern  point  of  Cranberry  Island. 

You  niny  go  in  on  either  side  of  Bunker's  Ledge  ;  but  strangers  should  leave  it  on  the 
starboard  hand.  Between  Herring  Cove  and  Bear  Islnnd  light,  near  the  north  shore, 
there  are  several  rocks  and  ledges  covered  at  high  woter. 

S.  W.  HARBOR. — This  is  one  of  the  best  harbuis  on  that  coast;  as  many  as  400  S.  W.  Har- 
vessels  have  been  at  anchor  at  one  time  here;  to  run  in,  if  coming  from  the  westward,  bor, 
when  nn  with  Long  Island,  steer  N.  N.  E.  6  miles,  (leaving  the  two  Duck  Islands  on 
your  stunjoard  and  the  three  Calf  Islands  on  your  larboard  hand.)  This  will  bring  you  up 
midway  between  the  Great  Cranberry  Island  and  Mount  Desert;  steer  up  niidwoy,  until 
you  open  S.  W.  Harbor,  when  you  may  haul  in,  (keeping  nearest  to  the  starboard  hnnd, 
on  ncrount  of  a  ledge  on  the  larboard  hand,  which  runs  off  half  a  mile)  N.  W.  or  W.  N. 
W  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  muddy  bottom,  safe  from  all  winds.  High  water  at  12 
o'clock ;  rise  of  tides  12  feet. 

Off  the  S.  W.  point  of  Cranberry  Island  there  is  a  rock,  bearing  west,  distant  three- 
qunrters  of  a  mile. 

'1  he  eastern  passage  into  S.  W.  Harbor  is  between  Bear  Island  (on  which  there  is  a 
fixed  I'ght)  and  Sutton's  Island ;  after  you  have  passed  these  run  until  you  get  the  har- 
bor ojien,  then  follow  the  above  directions. 

HilLL'S  COVE,  MOUNT  DESERT.— Bring  the  lighten  Boker's Island  to  bear 
S.  W  by  S.  and  steer  N.E.  by  N.  for  the  Great  Porcupine  Island  ;  when  up  with  it  haul 
to  the  westward  of  Hull's  Cove,  leaving  a  dry  ledge  on  your  starboard  baud,  where  you 
may  nnchor  in  3  fathoms,  i  of  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

BASS  HARBOR. — When  you  leave  this  harbor,  bound  to  the  eastward,  steer  out 
S.  W.  till  you  bring  Bass  Harbor  Bar  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  then  run  S.  S.  E.  keeping  the 
laib()iird  hand  best  on  board.  This  bar  has  not  water  enough  for  a  loaded  vessel  before 
half  tide,  having  81  feet  only  at  low  water;  but  a  light  vessel  may  go  over  at  low  water, 
keeping  the  larboard  hnnd  best  on  board.  When  you  get  over  this  bar,  you  steer  E.  by 
S.  till  you  bring  the  S.  W.  entronce  of  Mount  Desert  to  bear  N.  E.  then  you  mny  run 
N.  E.  leaving  Cranberry  Island  on  your  starboard  hand.  But  this  passage  is  shoal  at  low 
water,  and  not  fit  for  loaded  vessels  to  go  through  ;  but  nt  full  f  1e  there  is  water  enough, 
keeping  the  middle  of  the  passage.  Continue  your  course  to  the  N.  E.  till  you  pnss 
Cianherry  Island;  then  you  may  steer  E.  S.  E.  and  anchor  between  the  two  Cranberry 
IslandH,  where  you  will  be  safe  from  easterly  or  S.  W.  winds.  You  may  lie  in  from  4 
to  7  liitlionis,  good  holding  ground. 

When  vou  leave  this  port  bound  to  the  eastward,  you  steer  E.  by  S.  till  you  get  up 
with  Baker's  Island  light,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  Cranberry  Islonds;  then  you 
Bteer  E.  by  N.  4  leagufis  to  Scuttock  Island.  When  you  pass  said  island,  and  are  bound 
to  Goidsborouph,  you  must  steer  N.  E.  about  5  leagues,  and  keep  that  course  till  you  bring 
Gold^borough  Harbor  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  then  you  must  leove  three  islands  on  your  lar- 
board and  one  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  run  into  the  harbor,  where  you  may  lie  safe 
from  till  winds,  and  anchor  in  6  or  6  fathoms. 

CRANBERRY  ISI  ANDS  are  three  island  lying  south  of  N.  E.  Harljr,  Mount  Cranberry 
Desert,  iiuiking  a  good  roadstead  for  nil  winds  but  easterly.  Islands. 

BAKKR'S  ISLAND.— On  this  island,  which  is  the  south-eastern  of  the  Cranberry  Baker's 
Islands,  there  is  a  lighthouse,  containing  a  fixed  light,  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Island. 
It  hems  W.  S.  W.  22  miles  distant  from  Petit  Manan  light.  Lighthouse. 

BLUK  HILL  BAY. — If  you  are  bound  to  Blue  Hill  Bay,  or  Union  River,  as  soon  Blue  Hill 
as  y;iu  pass  Long  Island,  you  will  open  a  large  sound  to  the  N.  N.  W.  which  course  you  Bay. 
are  to  steer  tuven  leagues,  when  you  will  be  up  with  Robertson's  Island,  leaving  the 
Ship  and  Barge  on  your  larboard  hand.  Robertson's  Island  is  the  only  island  near  th't 
place  that  has  a  house  on  it.  The  south  part  of  the  island  is  clear  of  trees,  on  which  the 
house  stands.  When  you  come  near  the  south  part  of  the  island  give  itn  berth  of  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile,  as  there  are  several  sunkc.  rocks  off  said  point.     When  you  bring 


High  water. 


Light. 

Hull's  Cove, 
Mount  Des- 
ert. 

Bass  Har- 
bor. 


140 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Isle-au-haut. 


Saddle  Back 

Ledge, 

Light. 


Malinicus 

Island. 

Lights. 

Penobscot 

Bay  and 

River. 


Lighthouse, 


this  island  to  bear  from  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  you  mayancbor  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  muddy 
bottom ;  but  if  you  are  bound  to  Blue  Hill  Bay,  you  may  stand  to  the  northward  direct 
for  the  Blue  Hills,  which  you  may  see  10  or  15  leagues  off.  If  you  are  bound  for  Union 
River,  you  had  better  take  a  pilot  at  Robertson's  Island,  for  it  is  not  fit  for  a  stranger  to 
go  without  one. 

ISLE-AU-HAUT. — The  Isle-au-haut  is  remarkable  land,  composed  of  high  steep 
cliffs,  and  makes  with  a  large  bay  on  each  side  of  it ;  has  good  landing  on  its  eastern  end 
and  anchorage  half  a  mile  off,  in  18  fathoms,  with  the  low  point  bearing  about  N.  G.  by 
N.  where  is  also  a  stream  of  water  running  into  the  sea.  The  highest  part  of  the  island 
is  in  the  middle,  and  represents  a  saddle. 

SADDLE  BACK  LEDGE  is  a  high  black  rock,  formed  somewhat  likb  a  saddle, 
on  the  S.  £.  end  of  which  is  erected  a  lighthouse,  built  of  hewn  granite,  and  of  that 
color ;  it  is  elevated  40  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  exhibiting  a  fixed  light,  and  may 
be  seen  in  clear  weather  a  distance  of  15  miles.  You  may  near  it  on  all  sides  within  one 
cable's  length.  * 

About  two  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  light  lies  a  small  sunken  ledge,  which  brealo 
at  low  tides,  with  a  little  motion  of  the  sea. 

The  southern  head  of  Isle-au-haut  bears  from  Saddle  Back  light  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  3^ 
miles  distant ;  Seal  Island,  S.  by  W.  about  15  miles ;  Wooden  Ball  Island.  S.  W.  by  S. ; 
Matinicus  Island,  S.  W.  i  W.  18  miles;  Brimstone  Island,  W.  J  N.  2  miles;  Little  Isle- 
au-haut  Harbor,  N.  E.  by  E.  d  E.  6  miles  distant ;  Eagle  Island  light,  N.  distant  about  20 
miles;  Fox  Island  Thoroughfare,  N.  by  W.  distant  about  15  miles.  ^ 

Isle-nu-haut  and  Deer  Islands  form  the  eastern  side  of  Isle-au-haut  Bay  ;  Brimstone 
and  the  Fox  Islands  the  western  side.  The  bay  is  about  5  miles  in  width,  and  Saddle 
Back  lies  near  its  centre. 

In  making  Saddle  Back  light  coming  from  sea,  bring  it  to  bear  from  N.  W.  by  N.  to  N. 
by  W.  and  run  it  close  aboard,  leavingit  on  your  larboard  hand.  If  you  are  bound  up  the 
bay,  bring  the  light  to  bear  S.  and  steer  N.  for  Eagle  Island  light,  which  you  may  near 
within  one  cable's  length  by  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand.  After  passing  Eagle  Isl- 
and light,  steer  N.  N.  W.  about  8  miles,  which  course  and  distance  will  bring  you  up 
with  Channel  Rock,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  Give  it  a  berth  of  one 
eighth  of  a  mile,  and  steer  N.  by  E.  about  10  miles  for  Dice's  Head  light.  In  running; 
this  course  you  will  pass  Cape  Rosier,  a  high  bluff,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboarri 
hand.  When  up  with  Dice's  Head  light,  if  you  wish  to  go  into  Castine  or  up  the  Penob- 
scot, follow  the  directions  given.     (See  pages  142,  143) 

Channel  Rock  may  be  known  by  its  being  a  small  rock  of  a  yellowish  cast,  lying  to  the 
westward  of  a  small    'OHp  of  islands,  and  may  be  seen  at  all  times  above  water. 

N.  B.  In  coming  uom  sea  and  bound  for  the  Isl-au-haut  Bay,  you  leave  the  Wooden 
Ball  and  Seal  Islands  on  your  larboard  hand.  The  Seal  Island  is  the  easternmost  island, 
and  you  may  near  it  within  }  of  a  mile. 

In  coming  from  the  wjstward  and  intend  going  to  the  northward  of  Matinicus  Island, 
and  are  bound  fur  Saddle  Back  light,  bring  it  to  bear  E.  N.  £.  and  run  for  it:  follow  the 
directions  before  given. 

Wooden  Ball  Island  bears  from  Seal  Island  E.  N.  E.  3i  miles  distant;  Wooden  Bail 
from  Matinicus  Rock  light,  N.  N.  E.  7  miles  distant;  Seal  Island  from  Matinicus  Rock 
light,  N.  E.  by  N.  about  4  miles  ;  from  Matinicus  Island,  N.  3^  miles  distant. 

MATINICUS  ISLAND,  at  the  mouth  of  Penobscot  Bay.  On  the  rock  south  of 
this  island  there  are  two  fixed  lights  82  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  attached  to  a  dwel- 
ling house,  40  feet  apart,  bearing  N.  N.  W.  and  S   S.  E.  from  one  another. 

PENOBSCOT  BAY  AND  RIVER— Tliis  extensive  bayis  included  between  Pedg- 
yf'irk  Point  on  the  oast,  and  white  Head  on  the  west;  the  distance  between  those  points 
is  about  11  leagues;  and  it  therefore  includes  the  Isle-au-haut,  Deer  Island,  the  Fox 
Island,  Long  Island,  and  a  number  of  small  isles,  rocks,  and  ledges.  Through  the  buy 
to  the  mouth  of  the  river  if  its  name,  the  western  channel  is  by  the  headland  on  tlis 
west,  called  Owl's  Head,  on  which  there  is  a  lighthouse  containing  a  fixed  light,  147fi>et 
above  the  level  of  the  sea ;  thence,  by  Camden  on  the  west,  nnd  Cape  Rosarie  on  the 
east  to  Bagaduce  Point  or  Castine  River.  The  eastern  channel  is  between  Isle-au-biiut 
on  the  west,  and  the  smaller  isles  on  the  east,  through  a  channel  called  Long  Reach, 
formed  by  the  shore  of  Sedgwick  on  one  side,  and  Deer  Island  on  the  other,  until  it 
unites  with  the  main  channel  between  Cape  Rosarie  and  Long  Island.  Above  this,  on 
the  east,  stands  Fort  Castine,  near  to  which  is  the  town  of  Castine,  opposite  to  Penobscot. 
Castine  is  the  port  of  entry.  This  noble  river,  which  empties  its  waters  into  the  buy.  and 
which  is  now  decorated  with  numerous  townships,  is  the  most  considerable  in  the  State 
of  Maine,  and  has  its  sources  about  130  miles  above  the  inlet  of  Castine.  The  head  of 
tide  and  navigation  is,  however,  at  Bangor,  about  30  miles  from  the  same  ;  but  vessels  of 
30  tons  may  approach  within  a  mile  of  this  place.  At  the  entrance  of  toe  river  is  a  de|)th 
of  10  fathoms. 


■■■ 


■H 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


141 


'gh  steep 
tern  end, 

N.  E.  bj; 

the  island 

a  snddle, 
'>1  of  that 
and  may 
within  one 


i  E.  2J 
.'.byS.; 
ittle  Isle- 

nbout  20 


fidg. 


PENOBSCOT  RIVER. — From  Seguine  to  Manheigen,  the  course  is  east;  but  you  Penohseot 
must  not  bring  Seguine  to  bear  W.  until  you  have  passed  Bantan  Ledge,  as  it  bears  E.  River. 
about  4  miles  from  Seguine.     Manheigen  is  good  land  to  run  for,  being  bold.     There  are 
geveral  high  rocks  on  the  N.  W.  side,  but  they  are  also  bold.     From  thence  to  White 
Head,  the  course  is  N.  E.  leaving  George's  and  Mosquito  Islands  on  the  larboard,  and 
IVIitinick  on  your  starboard  hand.     The  latter  is  foul.     There  are  two  rocks  off  George's  '' 

Island,  called  the  Old  Man  and  Old  Woman,  with  a  passage  between  them.     The  first  ^ 

lies  more  than  a  mile  off.     When  you  can  see   Mosquito  Island  to  the  eastward  of 
George's  you  are  clear  of  them.     There  is  a  ledge  between  George's  Island  and  Mos- 
quito Island,  culled  Scilly;  and  also  another  about  one-third  of  the  way  from  Mitinick  to 
Manheigen,  called  the  Roaring  Bull,  which  latter  bears  about  N.  E.  ^  E.  from  Manhei- 
gen; but  you  have  a  clear  bay  until  you  come  near  White  Head.     There  is  a  ledge  S. 
by  El.  fi  a  mile  from  the  head,  and  several  near  the  land  to  the  westward.     The  head  is 
very  bold.     When  a  little  inside  the  head,  haul  up  nearly  for  the  N.  E.  point  of  a  large 
^hite  island,  with  trees  on  it,  on  the  larboard  hand,  to  avoid  a  ledge  called  the  Gangway 
Ledge.     It  lies  directly  off  the  mouth  of  Seal  Harbor,  and  about  N.  E.  from  the  light. 
The  course  from  White  Head  to  the  point  of  Ash  Island  is  N.  E.     The  point  of  Ash 
Island  is  bold  at  low  water,  but  at  high  water  some  of  the  rocks  are  covered.    There  is  a 
sunken  ledge  off  this  point,  the  kelps  on  which  are  seen  at  low  water,  called  also  Gang- 
way Ledge,  which  you  leave  on  the  starboard  hand.     Thence  to  Owl's  Head  about  N. 
N.  E.     The  course  from  Owl's  Head  to  Castine  is  N.  E.  by  N.  passing  close  to  Mark 
Island,  which  is  the  first  you  come  to,  and  leaving  several  small  islands  and  ledges  on  the 
starboard  hand  ;  Mark  Island  on  the  larboard.     The  passage  is  here  rather  narrow,  but 
with  a  fair  wind  there  is  no  danger.     The  bay,  however,  is  not  so  clear  to  the  eastward 
n3  to  the  westward  of  Long  Island.     From  Owl's  Head  to  Camden  the  course  is  N.  by 
E     0  miles,  leaving  a  high  rock  called  the  Graves  on  your  starboard,  and  Negro  Island, 
on  which  there  is  a  lighthouse,  on  your  larboard  hand.     There  are  some  sunken  rocks  Lighthoxue. 
between  the  Graves  and  the  northern  point  of  the  harbor,  nearest  the  latter,  which  are 
on  the  starboard  hand.     From  Owl's  Head  up  the  bay  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  easterly, 
to  Spruce  Head,  in  Northport,  7  leagues.     You  pass  a  good  harbor  on  Long  Island  side, 
called  Gilkey  Harbor.     It  is  easy  of  access,  but  is  bad  to  find  in  the  night,  the  land  back 
being  higher  than  that  in  front  of  the  harbor.     Here  a  lighthouse  is  much  needed,  as  it  ia 
'r  best  harbor  in  the  whole  bay.     It  lies  directly  opposite  Ducktrap.     From  Spruce 
dead  to  Old  Fort  Point  the  course  is  N.  E.  5  leagues,  leaving  Belfast  and  Cape  Jeilison 
Harbors  on  the  larboard  hand.     If  you  wish  to  harbor  in  Cape  Jeilison,  you  enter  with 
Brigadier  Island  on  the  larboard  hand,  keeping  it  nearest  aboard,  as  there  is  a  long  ledge 
makes  off  from  Squaw  Point  on  the  starboard  hand,  which  is  covered  at  high  water. 
There  is  a  ledge  off  Fort  Point  in  a  southerly  direction,  called  Fort  Point  Ledge,  a  half 
n  mile  or  more.     It  lies  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  and  is  bare  at  half  tide.     There  are  two 
buoys,  one  oil' each  end  of  it.     There  is  a  lighthouse  on  the  point,  near  which  it  is  so  bold  Lighthouse» 
that  there  is  a  good  channel  between  that  and  the  lodge  for  beating.     The  extrenit  point, 
however,  to  the  eastward  of  the  light  is  shoal,  and  you  must  give  it  a  good  berth.     When 
you  have  turned  this  point,  you  have  an  excellent  harbor  on  the  larboard  hand,  called  Fort 
Point  Cove.    There  is  one  small  rock  near  Sandy  Point,  on  which  there  are  about  7  feet 
at  low  water,  near  which  there  is  a  log  buoy  placed.     From  Fort  Point  to  Bucksport  Log  buoy. 
Narrows,  the  course  is  north  5  miles.     Above  Sandy  Point  lies  Odom's  Ledge,  which  is 
uearly  covered  at  high  water.     You  may  go  either  side  of  it,  but  the  eastern  is  the  best 
channel.     When  you  open  Bucksport  village,  your  course  is  N.E.  |of  a  mile,  when  you 
will  open  Marsh  Bay  N.  W.  at  the  head  of  which  is  Frankfort  village,  5  miles.     Run  up 
midway  till  you  come  near  Marsh  River,  on  the  larboard  hand.     The  point  on  the  oppo- 

(if  ti)e  bay  is  called  Drachm  Point,  from  which  a  flat  extends  §  the  distance 

Mi'sh  River,  on  the  end  of  which  a  buoy  is  placed.     Should  you  not  see  the 
i  ic.ard's  I'oiiit  on   McKenzie's  Point  a  handspike's  length,  and  run  until  you  Buoy. 

:i  th    reach  to  Oak  Point.     Picard's  Point  is  the  land  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Marsh 
>;  .u^ii/.ie's  Poii.t  is  the  first  point  on  the  starboard  hand  above  Bucksport 

i  I  in  Marsh  River  to  Oak  Point,  the  course  is  N.  E.  5  miles,  good  anchorage 
all  the  way.  i  honce  to  Hinckley's  E.  by  N.  \  of  a  mile.  Thence  to  Mill  Creek,  N.  by 
E.  1  mile,  leaving  Buck's  Ledge,  on  which  there  is  a  spire  and  ball,  on  the  starboard  hand. 
Thence  to  Bald  Hill,  N.  W.  by  W.  U  mile.  Thence  to  Higgins',  N.  N.  E.  i  mile. 
ThoMce  to  Hragdor's  Ciistlo,  N.  E.  i  of  a  ;nile.  Thence  to  Crosby's  N.  N.  E.  2  miles. 
Tlionco  through  Crosby's  Narrows,  N.  E.ja  mile.  Thence  to  Crosby's  Old  Wharf,  N. 
N.  E.  \  mile.  Thence  to  Brewer  village,  E.  N.  E.  2  miles.  Thence  to  Mitchell's  Steam 
Mill,  N.  E.  by  N.  i  mile.  Thence  to  High  Head,  N.  E.  i  mile.  Thence  to  Bangor, 
N.  E.  by  N.  3  of  a  mile. 

Or,  bound  up  Penobscot  Bay,  leave  Manheigen  on  the  larboard  hand  from  1  to  2  miles 
;..'ant,  and  steer  E.  N.  E.  for  Green  Island  :  when  up  with  the  easternmost  island,  giving 
)  u  berth  of  one  mile,  steer  north  for  Owl's  Head,  then  N.  N.  £.  for  Castine,  as  before 
'.ii-  .ted. 


'■\    1 


site  sill' 
Bcro'-     'i 
buoy   •■ 
fii:  I,    . 
River,  m 
village. 


143 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Fox  Island 
Passage. 


FOX  ISLAND  PASSAGE.— On  Brawn's  Head,  at  the  western  entrance  of  Pos 
Island  thoroughfare,  a  light,  showing  a  fixed  light,  is  erected  on  the  Southern  Fox  Island 
it  stands  two  rods  from  the  shore,  and  is  42  feet  high.  ' 


Camden 
Harbor. 


Lighthouse. 


Fiddler's  Ledge  Bears  from  the  light  W.  i  S.  distant  about  3  miles;  Fiddler's  Ledge 
irom  Crabtree's  Point,  VV.  S.  W.  distant  about  half  a  mile.  Fiddler's  Ledue  i^  nbnBo 
the  surface  ofthe  water  at  two  hours  ebb. 


Crabtree's  Ledgejaears  from  the  light  W.  byS.  distant  about  Ij  mile;  Crabtree's  Ledge 
bears  from  Crabtree's  Point  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  about  half  a  mile.  This  ledge  uiay  be 
seen  breaking  at  high  water  with  a  little  motion. 

Inner  Dog  Fish  Lodge  boars  from  the  light  S.  W.  distant  about  3  miles;  Inner  Dog 
Fish  Ledge  boars  from  Crabtree's  Ledge  S.  S.  G  distant  about  li  mile. 

In  ruiiiiiu;^  from  Owl's  Head  light  for  Fox  Island  thoroughfare,  bring  the  light  to  bear 
W.  and  steer  E.  i  S.  until  you  bring  the  light  on  Browa's  ilead  to  bear  E.  N.  K.  and 
then  steer  for  it  until  you  are  within  one  cable's  length  from  the  light.  In  runulnr  this 
course,  you  pass  between  Crabtree's  Ledge  and  Dog  Fish  Ledge,  leaving  Crabtree's 
Lodge  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  Dog  Fish  Ledge  on  the  starboard,  which  is  separated 
by  a  channel  li  mile  broad;  you  may  then  run  half  a  cable's  length  of  either  ot  them. 
When  abreast  of  the  light,  and  between  the  light  and  Sui^ar  Loaves,  steer  N.  E.  i  li.  for 
Young's  Narrows.  The  Sugar  Loaves  are  two  high  rocks,  formed  somewhat  like  sucar 
loaves,  and  are  located  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  passage.  There  is  good  auchorugo  be- 
tween the  Sugar  Loaves  and  light,  in  7i  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

The  entrance  to  Young's  Point  is  narrow  at  low  water,  off  which  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks 
which  are  covered  at  high  water.  There  is  also  a  quantity  of  sunken  rocks  at  tho  lar- 
board hand,  near  a  mile  to  the  W.  N.  W.  which  lie  off  the  Dumplins.  These  Dumpling 
are  three  islands,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  Your  course  in  this  passage 
is  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  keeping  your  starboard  hand  on  board.  When  you  pasj  this 
point  on  your  starboard  hand,  you  must  keep  your  starboart'  ^and  on  board,  and  steer  E. 
S.  E.  about  two  miles,  when  you  will  make  Deep  Cove  on  your  starboard  hand,  which 
lies  to  the  eastward  of  a  -/  high  bluff  of  rocks.  If  you  have  neither  cables  nor  anchors, 
you  may  run  into  said  ct  t  ;ure  your  vessel  with  the  main  or  fore  sheet,  or  come 

to  anchor  in  7  fathoms  wai^  the  said  cove.     There  the  flood  meets,  one  from  the 

W.  N.  W.  tlie  othorfrom  thu  N.  E.  which  makes  an  eddy  against  this  cove  and  high- 
land ;  here  you  may  rido  safe  with  any  wind.  When  you  leave  this  place,  and  are 
bound  to  tho  eastward,  you  steer  E.  S.  E.  and  keep  your  starboard  hand  on  board  till 
you  come  up  to  a  clear  spot  of  land,  whore  tho  trees  have  been  cut  off.  As  soon  as  said 
spot  bears  \V.  S.  W.  you  steer  E.  N.  E.  for  the  middle  narrows.  When  you  draw  near 
the  narrows,  you  will  see  two  large  white  rocks  in  the  middle  of  tho  passage,  unless  at 
high  water,  at  which  time  they  are  covered  about  one  hour,  but  may  be  seen  at  all  other 
times  of  tide.  You  may  go  on  either  side,  but  the  deepest  water  is  at  the  southward  of 
them.  Continue  your  course  E.  N.  E.  about  one  league,  when  you  must  keo])  your 
starboard  hand  on  board,  as  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  and  ledges  on  your  larboard 
hand,  which  are  covered  at  high  water.  You  will  make  the  eastern  narrows  on  your 
starboard  hand,  and  as  soon  as  you  bring  it  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  you  may  run  through,  where 
you  will  havs  a  fine  harbor,  which  is  safe  to  ride  in  with  all  winds,  except  at  E.  N.  P.. ; 
but  you  may  remain  in  the  west  passage  with  the  wind  at  E.  N.  E.  or  anchor  at  the 
nortliward  of  a  bare  island,  that  you  will  see  on  your  starboard  hand  as  you  go  back  to 
the  westward.  When  you  pass  tho  eastoin  passage  of  Fox  Island,  you  must  steer  K.  N. 
E.  about  4  miles,  which  course  will  carry  you  into  a  large  bay  that  lies  between  F>>x  Isl- 
and and  the  Isle  au-haut.  Tliis  bay  lies  N.  and  S.  and  about  4  leagues  E.  and  W.  When 
you  get  into  this  bay  from  the  above  mentioned  passage,  and  are  bound  to  the  eastward  of 
the  Isle-au-haut,  you  may  steer  E.  S.  E.  (j  leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you  to  the 
southward  of  the  Isle-au-haut. 

CAMDEN  HARBOR. — North-east  Ledges  boar  from  the  light  on  Negro  Island,  at 
tho  mouth  of  Camden  Harbor,  N.  E.  \  N.  distant  about  throe-eighths  of  a  mile.  North- 
east Ledges  to  .Morse's  Point,  N.  by  W.  distant  about  half  a  mile;  these  lodges  are  cov- 
ered at  high  water,  but  are  above  the  surface  of  the  water  at  two  hours  ebb.  B  irrit's 
Point  forms  the  western  side  of  Cainben  Harbor,  and  boars  from  tho  light  S.  W.  by  S.  i 
S.  distant  about  three-eighths  of  a  mile.  Morse's  Point  lies  opposite  the  lighthouse,  and 
forms  the  eastern  side  of  the  harbor.  Barrit's  Point  to  the  Graves,  S.  E.  i  S.  distant 
about  l.i  mile.  From  the  light  to  tho  (iraves,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  distant  about  2  miles.  Osvl's 
Head  lii^lit  bears  from  Camden  light  S.  i  W.  distant  about  12  miles.  From  the  Graves 
to  tho  Owl's  Head  light  S.  by  W.  i  W.  disUnt  about  10  miles. 

Camden  lighthouse  is  situated  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  Negro  Island,  and  contains  a  fixed 
light,  elevated  49  teot  above  the  level  of  tho  sea. 

In  coming  from  the  westward,  and  bound  to  Camden  Harbor,  bring  Owl's  Head  light 
to  bear  south,  and  steer  N.  i  E.  for  Camden  light,  leaving  the  Graves  and  North-east 
Rocks  on  the  starboard  hand;  the  Grave  is  a  small  black  rock,  and  is  above  the  surface  of 
the  water  at  all  times,  and  you  may  near  it  within  a  cable's  length,  on  ail  sides.     Wheo 


ap  with  the  li 

byN.  4N.  01 

from  four  to  fi 

for  Camden  I 

east  Ledges, 

C.^STINE 

It  is  a  fixed 

ledges,  and  fr 

lighthouse  is 

^CASTINI 

lit  the  entrai 

point,  S.  E. 

tfint  about  2 

by  W.  dista 

Point,  S.  E. 

Point  to  the 

from  Otter  B 

quarters  of  a 

about  half  a 

Otter  Roc 

shore,  and  hi 

about  12  fee 

black  rock,  n 

and  lies  on  tl 

Hosraar's 

Harbor,  and 

northern  hei 

in  the  way  c 

If  you  are 

going  into  C 

for  it  until 

Hosmar's  L 

distant,  and  ! 

board  hand. 

within  one  ( 

You  may  ar 

This  harl 

above  direc 

WHITE 

White  HeB 

Cape  Cod, 

live  and  a  hi 

having  no  s 

north  side, 

to  White  I 

sound.     Tl 

by  E.  whic 

ledge  and  tl 

your  coursi 

harbor  on  ; 

white  islan 

N.  W.  and 

5  or  6  fath< 

White  I 

on  llio  Hoi 

feet  above  I 

ing  in  fogg 

as  all  veasi 

through  th 

tlie  westw 

steer  N.  E 

Vessels 

N.  E.  and 

with  calm 

water.    II 

bor,  you  n 

You  will  I 

N.  N.  W 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


143 


■'s  Lejge 
'1  above 

e's  Lodge 
"iiiy  be 


ner  D 


og 


..  1  ? 


gp  with  the  lighthouse  leave  it  on  the  larboard  hand  one  cable's  length,  and  steer  N  W. 
by  N-  i  N.  or  N.  K.  W.  distance  nearly  half  a  mile,  and  anchor  near  the  north  shore,  in 
from  four  to  five  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground.  If  you  are  to  the  eastward  and  bound 
for  Camden  Harbor,  bring  the  light  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  or  S.  W.  by  W.  to  clear  the  North- 
east Ledges,  then  follow  the  above  directions. 

CASTINE  LIGHTHOUSE  is  on  Dice's  Head,  at  the  entrance  of  Castine  Harbor.    Castine 
It  i3  a  fixed  light,  116  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  N.  W.  i  W.  from  Fort  Point  Lighthouse. 
|ed"os,  and  from  the  eastern  end  of  Long  Island,  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.     The  shore  near  the 
lighthouse  is  bold. 

CASTINE. — The  beacon  on  Otter  Rock  bears  from  the  lighthouse  on  Dice's  Head,  Castine. 
nt  the  entrance  of  Castine  Harbor,  S.  E.  i  E.  distant  half  a  mile ;  Noddle's  Island 
I'oiat.  S.  E.  i  S.  distant  about  IJ  mile;  Bull  Head,  on  Holbrook's  Island,  south,  dis- 
tant about  2  miles;  Turtle  Head,  W.  N.  W.  distant  about  44  miles;  Belfast,  N.  W. 
I,y  W.  distant  about  II  miles.  From  the  Beacon  on  Otter  Rock  to  Noddle's  Island 
Point,  S.  E.  by  S.  |  S.  distant  about  three-eighths  of  a  mile;  from  Noddle's  Island 
Point  to  the  beacon  on  Hosmnr's  Ledge,  E.  N.  E.  distant  about  three-quarters  of  a  miL; 
from  Otter  Rock  Beacon  to  the  Beacon  on  Hosmar's  Ledge,  E.  distant  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile ;  Hosmar's  Ledge  Beacon  to  the  town  of  Castine,  N.  N.  E.  distant 
about  half  a  mile. 

Otter  Rock  is  a  small  round  rock,  and  lies  about  2  cables'  length  from  the  northern  • 
shore,  and  has  on  it  an  iron  beacon,  with  a  cask  placed  upon  a  staflT  at  its  centre,  and  is 
about  12  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  at  high  water.     Noddle's  Island  Point  is  a  low 
black  rock,  and  very  bold.     Bull  Head  is  a  high  bluff  of  rocks,  and  of  a  yellowish  cast, 
and  lies  on  the  south  side,  without  the  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Hosmar's  Rock  lies  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile  from  the  southern  shore  of  Castine 
Harbor,  and  has  on  it  an  iron  beacon,  as  described  on  Otter  Rock.  Turtle  Head  is  the 
northern  head  of  Long  Island.  Stubb's  Point  Ledge  lies  opposite  the  town,  but  is  not 
in  the  way  of  vessels  going  into  Castine  Harbor,  on  which  there  is  a  beacon  erected. 

If  you  are  bound  up  Penobscot  Bay,  and  are  to  the  eastward  of  Long  Island,  and  intend 
going  into  Castine  Harbor,  bring  the  light  on  Dice's  Head  to  bear  N.  E.  by  N-  and  run 
for  it  until  you  are  within  half  a  mile  of  it,  then  steer  E.  by  N.  for  the  beacon  on 
Hosmar's  Ledge,  leaving  Ottor  Rock  Beacon  on  the  larboard  hand,  one  cable's  length 
distant,  and  Bull  Head,  Noddle's  Point,  and  the  beacon  on  Hosmar's  Ledge  on  the  star- 
board hand.  You  may  near  the  starboard  shore  off  the  entrance  of  Castine  Harbor 
within  one  cable's  length,  and  steer  E.  N.  E.  which  will  carry  you  in  ship  channel  way. 
You  may  anchor  off  the  town,  near  the  wharves,  in  from  8  to  10  fathoms  water. 

This  harbor  is  easy  of  access,  and  vessels  may  approach  it  with  safety  by  following  the 
above  directions. 

WHITE  HEAD — Vessels  bound  from  the  southward,  and  intending  to  fall  in  with  While  Head 
White  Head  lighthouse,  should  endeavor  to  take  their  departure  from  the  high  land  of  Lighthouse. 
Cape  Cod,  from  which  to  .Manheigen  light,  the  course  is  N.  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  thirty- 
five  and  a  half  leagues.     The  shore  near  M aheigen  is  bold,  with  good  water  on  all  sides, 
having  no  shoals  or  sunken  rocks  about  it;  there  are  some  dry  islands  and  ledges  on  the 
north  side,  but  they  are  bold,  and  good  water  all  among  them.     From  Manheigen  light 
to  White  Head  light,  the  course  is  N.  E.  distant  about  seven  leagues,  with  a  fair  open 
sound.     There  is  a  small  lodge  lies  about  half  a  mile  from  White  Head  light,  bearing  S. 
by  E.  which  is  just  out  of  water  at  common  tides ;  at  low  water  you  pass  between  this  * 
ledge  and  the  light  to  go  in  the  Muscle  Ridge  Channel,  or  into  the  harbor.     You  continue 
your  course  N.  E.  by  the  light  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  when  you  will  open  the 
harbor  on  your  larboard  hand,  between  a  small  ledgy  island  near  the  light,  and  a  high 
white  island  with  some  spruce  trees  on  it.     When  you  open  the  harbor  N.  W.  you  steer 
N.  W.  and  sail  on  till  you  pass  all  the  ledges  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  anchor  in  about 
5  or  6  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

White  Head  light  is  built  on  White  Head  Island,  remarkable  for  the  many  white  rocks 
on  the  Head.  It  is  7  leagues  from  Manheigen,  bearing  N.  E.;  is  a  fixed  white  light,  58 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Attached  to  this  light  is  a  bell,  weighing  1000  lbs.,  strik- 
ing in  foggy  weather,  three  times  a  minute.  The  light  is  small  but  of  great  importance, 
OS  all  vessels  bound  to  Penobscot  bay,  going  in  shore,  are  obliged  to  pass  by  the  light 
through  the  Muscle  Ridges.  A  stranger  wishing  to  pass  this  light  must,  if  coming  from 
tlie  westward,  run  in  for  the  land  ecat  of  Manheigen,  until  the  light  bears  S.  W. ;  then 
steer  N.  E.  and  you  can  pass  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  the  head. 

Vessels  of  60  or  70  tons  may  double  close  around  the  head  of  the  light,  soon  as  it  bears 
N.  E.  and  anchor  right  abreast  of  the  store.  This  is  called  Sail  Harbor.  Vessels  taken 
with  calm  and  ebb  tide,  may  anchor  any  where  off  the  light,  in  from  12  to  20  fathoms 
water.  If  the  wind  takes  you  at  N.  E.  and  ebb  tide,  that  you  cannot  get  into  Sail  Har- 
bor, you  may  run  into  Tarrent  Harbor,  which  bears  W.  by  S.  about  4  miles  distant. 
You  will  continue  your  W.  by  S.  course  till  the  first  house  on  the  starboard  hand  bears 
N.  N.  W.  when  you  may  anchor  in  about  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  good  ground. 


144 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


SailHarbir.      SAIL  HA.RBOR  liea  to  the  northward  and  eastward  of  White  Head,  about  three 
fourths  of  a  mile.     If  you  wish  to  go  into  this  harbor,  haul  up  round  the  Head,  within 
about  a  cable  and  ahnu's  length,  run  until  the  light  bears  S.  W.  then  steer  N.  by  W 
run  in  and  anchor  iii  8  fathonr;  sticky  bottom.     This  is  a  good  harbor  in  winter. 

TARRENT  HARBOR,  MUSCLE  RIDGE  AND  PENOBSCOT  BAY.— In  gaii. 
ing  from  this  harbor,  you  may  steer  east  one  league,  to  White  Head  light,  but  be  curefnl 
not  to  haul  in  for  it  till  it  bears  N.  E.  as  there  is  a  large  ledge  of  rocks  bearing  about  W 


Torrent 

Harbor, 

MuseU 

Ridge  and 

Penobscot 

Bay. 


Lighthouse. 


N.  W.  from  said  Head,  one  mile  distant,  but  within  it,  a  pistol  shot  from  the  shore,  is  gafn' 
navigation.  In  going  in,  you  must  give  the  larboard  hand  a  berth,  as  there  is  a  sunken 
ledge,  which  extends  about  two-thirds  across  the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  that  breaks  when 
there  is  any  sea,  unless  at  high  water. 

Your  course  from  White  Head  light  is  N.  E.  to  Ash  Point  or  Island,  one  league  dis- 
tant, which  has  a  large  rock  to  the  S.  W.  of  it,  about  half  a  mile  distant,  which  you  must 
leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  It  is  not  in  the  way  except  you  are  obliged  to  go  about 
When  you  haul  round  this  island,  give  it  a  small  berth,  and  steer  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  bv 
N.  for  the  Owl's  Head,  leaving  two  islands  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  but  when  you  drnw 
near  the  larboard  shore,  you  steer  about  E.  N.  E.  for  the  Owl's  Head,  which  has  a  good 
harboard  on  the  larboard  hand  as  you  go  to  the  eastward.  This  harbor  makes  with  a  deen 
cove.  You  may  bring  a  rocky  point  that  lies  on  your  starboard  hand  to  bear  N.  E.  and 
a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lies  without  said  point  to  bear  E.  N.  E.  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms 
muddy  bottom.  ' 

This  harbor  is  open  to  the  wind  at  E.  by  N.  and  E.  N.  E.  but  in  all  other  winds  yoa 
are  safe.  The  tide  of  flood  sets  to  tho  eastward,  and  the  tide  of  ebb  S.  W.  through  the 
Muscle  Ridges. 

If  it  is  night  when  you  come  to  White  Head  light,  you  had  better  not  attempt  going 
through  the  Muscle  Ridgos.  Your  best  way  is  to  go  by  Two  Eush  Island,  which  you 
must  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  keeping  the  course  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  E.  [Tvro 
Bush  Island  is  round  and  barren,  but  has  only  one  bush  on  it.  Formerly  it  had  two 
bushes.] 

If  you  are  in  a  large  vessel,  your  best  way  is  to  go  in  this  passage,  as  it  is  the  most  safe. 
You  must  follow  your  course,  as  above  directed,  about  two  leagr.es,  when  you  will  have 
Penobscot  Bay  open,  and  then  you  may  direct  your  course  to  cither  side  of  Long  Island. 
If  you  go  to  the  westward,  your  course  is  N.  N.  E.  to  Great  Spruce  Head,  which  having 
passed  seven  leagues,  your  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  5  leagues,  to  Old  Fort  Point.  In  steer- 
ing said  course,  you  will  leave  Belfast  Bay  and  Brigadier's  Island  on  your  larboard  hand 
which  island  has  a  good  harbor,  and  if  you  mean  to  go  into  it,  you  must  leave  it  on  your 
larboard  hand,  and  steer  in  about  N.  or  N.  by  W. 

You  may  run  up  above  this  island,  and  anchor  on  the  starboard  hand,  if  the  wind  is  to 
the  eastward  ;  but  if  to  the  westward,  or  S.  W.  you  must  not.  There  is  a  bar  that  lies 
from  this  island  to  the  main  land,  which  is  covered  at  high  water.  There  is  also  a  good 
harbor  to  the  westward  of  this  island,  called  Long  Cove.  If  you  turn  into  either  of  these 
harbors,  you  must  be  careful  of  some  rocks  that  lie  to  the  southward  of  this  island,  more 
than  half  a  mile  from  the  main  land.  But  in  going  to  Penobscot,  proceed  as  above,  and 
keep  your  larboard  hand  on  board.  When  you  pass  this  island  for  the  Old  Fort  Point, 
which  has  no  trees  on  it,  you  must  observe  before  you  come  to  it,  that  a  large  ledge  of 
rocks  lies  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  it,  which  is  covered  at  high 
water,  but  bare  at  half  tide.  You  may  go  within  a  cable's  length  of  Old  Fort  Point,  in 
Bmooth  water.     These  rocks  may  be  discovered  when  the  wind  blows. 

If  you  are  bound  up  Penobscot,  from  Old  Fort  Point,  with  tho  tide  of  ebb,  and  tho 
wind  ahead,  you  may  make  a  good  harbor  in  the  east  river,  which  lies  about  E.  N.  E. 
from  Old  Fort  Point,  about  one  league.  This  river  lies  to  the  south-westwiird  of  Orphan 
Island,  in  which  pliice  you  will  lie  safe  from  all  winds,  and  anchor  in  six  or  seven  fatlionis, 
good  holding  ground. 

On  Old  Fort  Point,  above  Castine,  there  is  a  lighthouse,  to  indicate  the  direction  to 
Prospect  Harbor. 

Orphan  Island  is  a  large  island,  wniv.h  you  are  to  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  and 
sundry  rocks  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  are  above  water.  When  you  pass  Orphan 
Island,  you  may  anchor  to  the  N.  W.  of  it  on  the  starboard  hand,  as  you  go  through; 
but  if  the  wind  and  tide  are  in  favor  you  may  proceed  up  to  Marsh  Bay,  keeping  the 
larboard  hand  best  on  board.  Marsh  Bay  is  about  two  leagues  from  Orphan  Island. 
When  you  pass  Marsh  Bay,  you  may  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  river,  and  you  have 
neither  rocks  nor  shoals  till  you  get  up  to  the  falls.  You  have  no  particular  courso  in 
going  up  this  river,  but  may  sometimes  go  to  the  westward  of  N.  and  sometimes  to  the 
eastward  of  N. 

When  you  entnr  Penobscot  Bay,  and  are  bound  to  the  eastward  of  Long  Island,  yon 
must  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  leaving  Long  Island  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  course  will 
carry  you  up  to  Castine.  If  you  intend  going  into  this  harbor,  as  soon  as  it  bears  E.  N. 
£.  you  may  run  in  it,  steering  £.  N.  E.  keeping  the  middle  of  the  channel  until  you  pass 


^miail 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


146 


the  first  island,  giving;  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile;  then  haul  to  the  southward  until  the 
igltind  bears  W.  S.  W.  when  you  may  anchor  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  and  lie 
^fe  from  all  winds. 

Ill  going  into  the  harbor  of  Castine,  you  leave  three  islands  on  your  starboard  hand ;  f  ^ 

but  ifyeu  ttre  bound  up  Penobscot  River,  you  must  steer  north,  leaving  the  ledge  of  rocks 
oD'  the  Old  Fort  Point  on  your  larboard  hand ;  then  follow  the  same  direction  you  have 
for  running  into  the  Penobscot  River,  which  will  carry  you  up  to  the  falls.     The  tide  ebbs  Tidt. 
gnil  tlows,  at  full  and  chan(;e,  about  10  or  1 1  feet. 

[4\NtlIi^I(iBN  LIGHT. — On  Manheigen  Island,  south  of  the  entrance  to  George's  Manheigen 
P,iver,  is  a  revolving  light,  alternafely  red  and  white ;  time  of  revolution  2'  15",  elevation  light. 
170  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     You  can  run  close  to  the  island  on  either  side,  ta- 
liiQtr  care  to  go  between  some  dry  ledges  on  the  northern  side  of  it.     In  the  island  there 
is  a'sniall  harbor,  open  to  the  S.  W. ;  it  bears  E.  N.  E.  from  Seguine  light. 

FRA.NKLIN  ISLAND  LIGHT,  is  on  the  north  end  of  Franklin  Island,  which  is  Franklin 
on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  to  George's  River,  is  a  fixed  light,  50  feet  above  the  Island  light. 
level  of  the  sea. 

PENMKQUID  POINT  LIGHT,  on  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  George's  Penmequid 
j^iver.    A  lighthouse,  containing  a  fixed  light,  is  erected  on  this  point,  30  feet  high,  and  Point  light. 
75  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     It  is  a  light  to  Bristol  and  Waldoborough  Rivers; 
bears  N.  W.  4  W.  from  Manheigen  light,  distant  12  miles. 

GKORGE'S  RIVKR.— Bring  the  North  Damiscove  Island,  which  is  called  White  George's 
Isiiind,  (from  its  being  white,)  to  bear  W.  S.  W.  and  steer  E.  N.  E.  for  Franklin  light-  River. 
iiouse,  that  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  which  you  may  pass  within  a  cable's 
leDgtli  of.  When  abreast  of  Franklin  Island  light,  (which  is  on  your  starboard  hand,) 
steer  N.  E.  for  Otter  Island,  4  miles  distant,  and  continue  until  within  one-quarter  of  a 
mile  of  it,  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand;  then  steer  E.  N.  E.  for  Cauldwell's  island, 
at  the  S.  W.  end  of  which  is  a  high  round  rock,  called  Goosa  Rock.  When  abreast  of 
said  rock,  which  you  may  pass  within  one  cable's  length  of,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard 
band,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  and  N.  E.  keeping  Cauldwell's  Island  best  on  board,  to  avoid  a 
ledge  in  the  middle  of  the  river. 

In  beating  into  George's  River,  you  must  be  careful  of  a  sunken  ledge  which  bears  E. 
N.  B.  from  Franklin  Island  light,  6  miles  distimt;  also  of  a  ledge  off  the  S.  E.  end  of  Ledges. 
Gay's  Island,  w'lich  exier^ds  one-third  of  the  way  across  to  Goose  Rock. 

Siiuuld  you  fi  II  in  with  Munheigen  Ishmu  light,  and  bound  to  George's  River,  you  may 
steer  N.  N.  W.  leaving  Manheigen  Island  on  your  starboard  hand,  until  Franklin  Island 
light  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  when  you  may  run  for  it,  and  steer  as  above  directed.  Franklin 
light  may  with  safety  be  run  for  when  bearing  from  N.  E.  by  N.  to  E.  N.  E. 

In  running  from  White  Islands  for  George's  River,  be  careful  of  New  Harbor  Ledges, 
wiiich  bear  E.  N.  E.  from  Penmequid  Point  light,  one  league  distant,  on  which  are  5 
feet  water  at  low  water.  After  passing  these  ledges,  you  will  see  a  large  dry  rock,  called 
the  Western  Egg  Rock,  which  bears  E.  N.  E.  from  Ponmequid  Point,  two  leagues  dis- 
tant, and  W.  by  S.  from  Franklin  light,  one  league,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard 
hand ;  you  will  also  see  the  Eastern  Egg  Rock,  which  boars  south  from  Franklin  light, 
one  league  distant,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  These  Egg  Rocks  bear 
E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  from  each  other,  one  league  distant,  and  their  appearance  much 
alike,  which  you  pass  between,  with  a  clear  and  open  channel.  You  may  distinguish 
one  from  the  other  by  their  bearings  from  the  light. 

Sliould  yuu  have  the  wind  ahead,  and  be  obliged  to  turn  to  windward,  you  may  stand 
to  the  northward  until  Franklin  Island  light  bears  E.  N.  E.  and  to  the  south-eastward 
until  it  bears  N.  N.  E.  without  danger. 

To  tiie  northward  of  the  range  of  Penmequid  Point  and  the  Western  Kgg  Rock,  and 
M'Cubb's  Island,  the  ground  is  foul  and  rocky,  and  also  to  the  eastward  of  the  range  of 
Friinkiiu  Island  light,  and  the  Eastern  Egg  Rock,  [Notk. — M'Cobb's  Island  is  the 
wedtern  entrance  of  George's  River,  and  bears  N.  W.  1^  mile  distant  from  Franklin 
Island  light.] 

JOHN'S  BAY  HARBOR — John's  Island  bears  from  Thrum  Cap  Island  N.  N.  E.  John's  Bay 
distant  about  tliree  miles.  Thrum  Cap  Island  is  a  small  bare  island,  and  forms  the  west-  Harbor. 
ern  side  of  the  entrance  of  John's  Bay,  bearing  from  Penmequid  Point  W.  S.  W.  dis- 
timt about  two  and  a  half  miles.  Penmequid  Point  forms  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay, 
and  is  a  low  baro  point ;  but  the  shores  are  bold  on  all  sides.  The  lighthouse  is  situated 
on  tlie  S.  E.  side  of  Penmequid,  and  bears  from  the  western  point  E.  N.  E.  distant  about 
half  a  mile :  from  John's  Island  to  Butford's  Island,  west,  distant  about  one  mile ; 
Stuart's  Island,  N.  W.  by  W.  distant  about  one  mile;  High  Island  Head,  N.  }  W.  dis- 
tant about  two  miles;  McFarling's  Point,  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  about  one  and  a  half 
mile— one-eighth  of  a  mile  from  McFarling's  Point  there  are  several  ledges,  covered  at 
higli  water,  but  are  not  in  tho  way  of  vessels  running  into  this  bay,  as  they  lie  so  near  the 
WBiteni  shore  they  may  be  seen  at  all  times,  with  a  little  motion  of  sea; — McCown's 
Puiut  from  Johu's  Island,  north,  distant  about  one  and  a  quarter  mile;  Penmequid  Point, 

10 


146 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


S.  by  E.  distant  about  three  inileB ;  Penmequid  Harbor,  N.  K.  distant  about  holf  n  mile. 
Thrum  Cap  Island  bears  from  White  Island  N.  £.  distant  about  two  miles,  llii'l) 
Island  Head  is  a  high  bluff  covered  with  trees,  and  you  may  near  it  within  200  feet  of 
the  shore. 

John's  island  is  small  and  high,  covered  with  spruce  trees,  located  near  tho  centre  of 
the  bay,  and  has  a  house  on  the  N.  W.  part  of  it,  which  cannot  be  seen  until  you  iiio  up 
with  the  island  ;  if  you  wish  to  run  into  Penmequid  Hiirbor,  you  miiy  go  to  the  eiiHtwiiid 
of  John's  Island,  leaving  two  dry  rocks  on  the  starboard  hand,  keeping  them  closn  un 

board;  or  you  may  leave  them  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  iifter  passing  them  you  will  see 
I      the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  bearing  about  N.  E.  half  a  mile  distant,  where  you  rniiy  iuq 
in,  and  lie  safe  from  all  winds. 

Vessels  westward  bound,  and  falling  in  with  Manheigon  Island,  and  wish  to  miike  n 
harbor  in  a  strong  S.  W.  wind,  must  observe  tho  following  directions : — Bring  Mnnhoigen 
light  to  bear  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  distant  about  11  miles,  for  Penmequid  Point; 
,'>^  and  when  the  light  on  said   point  bears  E.  N.  E.  distant  half  a  mile,  you  are  then  up 

with  the  western  point  of  Penmequid ;  leave  it  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  give  it  j 
berth  of  one-eighth  of  a  mile,  then  steer  north  for  John's  Hay  Harbor,  leaving  John's 
..  Island,  McCoun's  Point,  on  your  starboard  hand;  Butford's  Island,  Stuart's  Isluiul.  and 

McParling's  Point,  on  the  larboard  hand.  If  you  are  from  the  westward  and  Ixjuiid  into 
this  harbor,  you  moy  bring  John's  iMland  to  bear  N.  by  E.  and  run  until  you  are  within 
one  cable's  length  of  it;  then  steer  north  for  High  Island  Head,  which  you  leave  on 
your  larboard  hand,  and  when  abreast  of  said  head  steer  N.  i  E.  about  three-eighths  of  n 
mile,  and  anchor  in  from  4  to  5  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground.  John's  Bay  |ieg 
about  5  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Townscnd  Harbor,  and  ia  a  ifair  open  bay.  having  no 
rocks  or  shoals  at  its  entrance,  and  vessels  may  run  in  without  fear,  by  following  the  above 
directions. 
Damariscotta  DAMARISCOTTA  RIVER — Tho  buoy  at  the  mouth  of  Damariscotta  River,  and 
River,  the  bearings  of  different  objects  about  it,  and  directions  for  the  river : — Hern  Islimd,  S. 

W.  part,  bears  from  the  buoy,  E.  by  N.  distant  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  ;  White  Island, 
S.  4  W.  distant  23  miles;  Varnum's  Point,  north,  distant  about  3i  miles;  Foster's 
Point,  N.  by  E.  distant  about  24  miles;  from  Hern  Islond  to  White  island,  S.  8.  W. 
distant  about  3  miles.  Hern  Island  forms  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  of  l^iiinarig. 
cotta  River,  and  is  high,  covered  with  spruce  trees.  Varnum's  Point  is  a  high  blutl"  point, 
and  is  on  the  western  side  of  the  river,  and  is  also  covered  with  trees.  The  shores  on 
both  sides  of  the  river  are  bold. 

In  coming  from  the  westward,  and  bound  to  Damariscotta  River,  bring  White  Island 
to  bear  .S.  4  W.  and  steer  north,  leaving  the  buoy.  Hern  Island,  and  Foster's  Point  on 
the  starboard  hand ;  give  the  buoy  a  berth  of  a  cable's  length,  and  s^eer  N.  by  E.  keep. 
ing  in  the  middle  of  the  river,  and  when  up  with  Varnum's  Point,  which  you  leave  on  your 
larboard  liainl,  you  will  see  Hodgden's  mills  on  tho  western  side  of  tho  river,  about  ^ 
mile.  Hodgden's  house  and  mills  are  painted  red;  you  inny  anchor  abreast  of  them, 
near  the  middle  of  the  river,  in  5  fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground,  where  you  niiiy 
lie  safe  from  all  winds.  The  above  mentioned  buoy  is  a  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  clevntod 
about  12  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  is  moored  about  100  feet  to  tho  west- 
ward of  the  ledge,  in  6  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

Should  you  full  in  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine,  and  wishing  to  go  outside  of  Daini><cnva 
Islands,  bring  Seguine  light  to  bear  E.  4  N.  and  steer  E.  4  S.  5  leagues  distant,  to  clear 
Bantam  ledge,  which  lies  east  from  Seguine  ■'34  leagues  distant,  and  S.  S.  W.  IVum 
Pumpkin  Rock,  one  league:  you  then  steer  N.  E.  until  you  make  Fronklin  light,  and 
then  steer  as  above  directed,  r  -•  tinue  your  K.  4  S.  course  until  Pumpkin  Rock  lieurs 
north,  then  steer  N.  E.  forFm.i.  .i  light.  Vour  cuurse  from  Putnpkin  Rock  to  Frank- 
lin light  is  N.  E.  by  E.  5  leagues  distant.  In  hazy  weather  you  will  do  well  to  gi!t  a  de- 
parture from  this  rock,  as  you  cannot  see  Franklin  light  more  than  4  miles  distant.  You 
may  anchor  in  Gay's  Cove,  taking  care  to  avoid  a  sunken  ledgo  which  lies  E.  IVoin 
Gay's  Cove,  near  the  middle  of  the  channel  and  has  4  fi'et  nt  low  walcM-.  This  lei|i;e 
must  be  left  on  your  larboard  hand,  keeping  Caldwell's  Island  close  on  board.  'Jiiy's 
Cove  lies  on  your  larboard  hand  about  8  miles  to  the  K.  N.  E.  of  Franklin's  Ishind  jifjlit. 
You  may  know  this  Cove,  as  Gay's  house  and  barn  lie  to  tho  N.  W.  of  it.  But  if  you 
are  bound  through  Herring  Gut,  bring  Capt.  Henderson's  house  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  and 
steer  S.  S.  E.  for  Herring  (iut.  This  Herring  Gut  has  a  bar  from  side  to  side,  i)iit  you 
miygooverit  at  two  hours  flood,  keeping  your  larboard  hand  best  on  board.  As  you 
come  on  tho  bar,  you  will  see  a  large  rock  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  the  deepest  water 
is  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  rock  ;  your  course  over  the  bar  is  S  S.  E.  You  nmy 
anchor  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  bur  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  niuddy  bottom,  and  wait  for  the  tide. 
The  tide  of  flood  sets  to  tho  northward,  and  the  ebb  to  the  sou  hward. 
Buoy.  A  spar  buoy,  jminted  white,  has  been  moored    N.   W.  ab)ut400  feet  from  Bantiim 

Ledse,  in  six  fathoms  water,  bearingj  rem  Burnt  Island  light,  in  Towusend  Harbor,  is, 
by  W.  distant  about  eight  miles 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


147 


ar's  Point  on 


SBGUINE  LIGHTHOUSE  is  situated  on  an  islnnd  near  the  mouth  of  Kennebeck  Seguine 
River,  200  teet  above  the  level  of  the  sen,  and  contains  a  fixed  light.     Ciipe  small  Point  Lighthouie. 
bears  N.  W.  from  it,  and  Wood  Islnnd  N.  N.  W.  1}  miles  distant.     There  are  several 
rocity  ledges  near  Seguine,  which  bearfrom  the  light  as  follows:  Five  Fathoms  Ledge  S.  ■^ 

W. distant  three  quarters  of  a  mile;  Eilingwood's  Rocli  north,  one  quarter  of  a  mile ; 
Secuino  Lodges  N.  N.  E.  half  a  mile,  always  dry;  Jack-knife  Ledge  N.  W.  H  mile,  8 
feet  water ;  Wood  Island  Reef  N.  N.  W.  I J  mile,  4  feet  water ;  Whale's  Back  N.  N.  E. 
1}  mile ;  n"''  White's  Ledge,  with  8  feet  on  it,  bears  N.  E.  one  mile. 

MARSHALL'S  POINT. — On  Marshall's  Point,  at  the  eastern  entrance  of  Herring  MarahalVi 
Gut  there  is  a  fi-ied  light,  elevated  30  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Point  light. 

HERRING  GUT  HARBOR.— Old  Cilly  bears  from  the  light  on  Marshall's  Point,  at  HerringQut 
the  entrance  of  Herring  Gut  Harbor,  S.  distant  about  3  miles ;  Black  Rock,  S.  i  W.  Harbor. 
distant  about  14  mile;  Henderson  Island,  S.  S.  W.  distant   1  mile;  Bradford's  Island, 
\\r.  by  S.  distant  half  a  mile;  Gunning  Rock,  S.   E.  by  S.    |  S.  distant  about  1  mile; 
Two  Brothers,  S.  E.  distant  about  2i  miles;  Henderson  Island  from  Gunning  Rock, 
VV.  distant  about  half  a  mile ;  Gunning  Rock  to  Bhick  Rock,  S.  W.  4  S.  distant  about 
half  a  mile.     S.  E.  by  S.  4  S.  from  Gunning  Rock,  disbmt  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  lies  a 
sunken  lodge,  which  can  be  seen  breaking  at  low  water  in  a  heavy  sea.     From  Old  Cilly 
to  the  lighten  Manheigen  Island  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  about  9  miles;  Mosquito  Island 
from  Old  Cilly,  N.  E.  by  E.  distant  about  4  miles ;  Green  Island  from  the  Brother's  S. 
E.  I  S.  distant  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile.     Old  Cilly  is  a  low  black  rock,  and  can  always 
be  seen  above  the  surface  of  the  water.     A  reef  extends  off  east,  distant  nearly  a  quar- 
ter of  a  mile,  which  must  be  avoided.     Black  Rock   is  a   small  round   rock,  and  is  also 
above  the  surface  of  the  water.     Henderson  Island  is  a  small  low  island,  with  no  bushes 
or  trees  on  it.     Bradford  Island  is  high,  and  covered  with  spruce  trees,  and  forms  the 
western  side  of  Herring  Gut  Harbor.     Green  Island  is  also  a  smalf  bare  island.     The 
two  islands  called  the  Jrothers,  are  small,  and  covered  with  spruce  trees.  Gunning  Rock  is 
high  and  bare,  with  a  yellowish  color ;  this  ledge  is  very  bold,  and  you  may  near  it  within 
100  feet. 

In  running  from  Manheigen  for  Herring  Gut  Harbor,  bring  the  light  on  Manheigen  to 
bearS.  W.  and  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  and  when  the  light  on  Marshall's  Point  bears  N.  by 
W, 4  W.  then  run  for  it:  in  running  for  the  light  you  will  leave  the  Old  Cilly,  Black 
Rock,  and  Henderson  Island  on  the  larboard  hand  ;  Mosquito  Island,  Green  Island,  Two 
Brothers,  and  Gunning  Rock,  on  your  starboard  hand.  Give  the  light  aberth  of  twocai)les' 
iensth,  and  when  it  bears  east  of  you,  steer  N.  N.  E.  distan  tabout  one  mile,  and  anchor  in 
from  4  to  5  fathoms,  where  you  lie  safe  from  all  winds.  You  will  find  good  ancliorage 
any  where  betweon  Marshall's  Point  and  Kradfurd's  Island. 

You  may  run  into  this  harbor  by  bringing  the  light  on  Marshall's  Point  to  bear  W.  N. 
W.  leaving  the  Green  Island,  Two  Brothers,  and  Gunning  Rock  on  the  larboard  hand; 
Mosquito  Island  on  the  starboard.  This  passage  is  full  of  shoals,  and  had  better  not  be 
attempted  unless  well  acquainted. 

This  harbor  is  easy  of  access,  and  vessels  may  approach  it  with  safety  by  following  the 
above  directions. 

When  you  go  out  of  this  harbor,  and  bound  to  the  eastward,  be  careful  and  give  the 
larboard  hand  a  good  berth,  for  there  are  two  ledges  of  rocks  on  the  same  hand  ofthe  east- 
ern point,   which  are  under  water,  and  lie  off  about  a  cable's  length.     When  you  are 
clear  of  these  ledges,  you  may  steer  E.  by  S.  or  E.  S.  E.  one  mile  to  the  barren  island, 
which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  3  or  4  islands  and  ledges  on  the  starboard  hand. 
When  you  pass  those  ledges  and  Mosquito  Islands,  if  bound  to  White  Head,  you  may 
steer  N.  E.  by  E.  2  leagues,  and  when  you  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  E.  run  for  it,  but 
when  you  pass  the  S.  W.  White  Head,  leave  it  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  be  careful  of 
a  sunken  rock  that  lies  S.  E.    from  the  eastern  White  Head,  about  one  cable's  length  Sunkenrock. 
distant.  Your  course  through  to  the  eastward  is  N.  E.,  and  to  the  westward  S.  W.,  keep- 
ing near  tlie  middle  ofthe  passage.     Before  you  come  up  with  Ash  Point,  you  must  be 
careful  of  a  sunken  rock,  which  lies  off  the  point  about  one-third  of  the  passage,  which 
has  not  more  than  8  feet  at  low  water.     But  if  you  should  gothrough  this  passage  in  the 
night,  keep  Potntoe  Island,  which  is  right  against  Ash  Island,  about  S.  S.  W.  from  it,  and 
bare  of  trees,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  best  on  board.     When  you  pass 
Potatoe  Island,  and  are  bound  into  Owl's  Head,  your  course  is  N.  N.  E.  about  2  miles, 
which   wdl   leave  two  islands  on  the  starboard  hand.     When  you  open  the  passage  to 
Owl's  Head,  and  bound  to  Edgemavoggan  Reach,  your  course  is  N.  E.  by  N.  till  you  pass 
the  Lime  Islands,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.    Continue  said  course  till  you 
make  a  large  bare  rock  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  a  little  round  island  to  the  eastward 
on  the  same  hand,  which  is  covered  with  trees.     Continue  your  course  to  the  N.  E.,  and 
you  will  make  a  large  islnnd  on  your  starboard  hand ;  when  you  pass  this  island,  you 
have  the  passage  open  to  Buck's  Harbor ;  continue  your  course  N.  E.  till  you  pass  by 
all  the  islands,  to  the  southward  and   northward.     In  the  day  time  you  may  see  Blue 
Hills,  bearing  E.  N.  E.  over  all  the  land.    This  passage  is  safe  to  go  through  with  a  first 


148  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

rate  mnn-of-war.  When  you  come  within  two  miles  of  the  reach,  you  will  make  a  imall 
iilaiid  on  your  stnrbonrd  hand,  which  has  n  sunlcnn  rock  to  the  northward  of  it.  Your 
safest  wny  is  to  keep  the  middle  of  the  passage,  ns  there  is  a  sunken  rock  (or  ledge)  on 
the  larboard  hand,  that  lies  K.  by  S.  from  an  island  wich  you  leave  on  your  lurbonid 
hand,  about  half  a  mile  distant.  If  you  want  to  make  a  harbor,  you  may  gu  into  Buck's 
Harbor,  by  a  N.  E.  or  N.  K.  by  N.  course.  When  you  come  into  this  harbor,  (which  is 
12  leagues  from  Owl's  head,)  you  must  leave  an  island  covered  with  young  birch  trees 
on  your  starboard  hand,  steering  N.  N.  W.,  and  when  you  get  to  the  northward  of  aaid 
:  .  island,  you  steer  E.  S.  K.till  you  bring  it  to  bear  S.  S.  w.,  where  you  will  be  land-locked 

from  all  winds,  in  4  and  5  fathoms,  sofl  bottom.  When  you  leave  Buck's  Harbor,  and 
bound  to  the  eastward,  you  steer  S.  E.  till  you  come  to  a  large  rock  and  four  islands 
which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  keeping  the  said  rock  and  islands  best  on  board 
for  there  is  a  sunken  ledge  that  lies  S.  S.  W.  from  thom.  You  will  make  a  black  island 
on  your  starboard  hand  with  burnt  trees  on  it.  This  ledge  lies  N.  N.  E.  from  said  island 
near  the  middle  of  the  passage,  but  keeping  the  eastern  shore  best  on  board,  you  will  go 
clear  of  it.  When  you  have  passed  this  ledge,  you  leave  two  islands  ou  your  starboard 
and  two  or  three  on  your  larboard  hand.  Continue  your  course  to  the  S.  E.  till  you  make 
two  islands,  between  which  and  Buck's  Harbor  the  course  is  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  G  Inagueg, 
To  the  eastward  you  may  go  between  both  islands,  steering  E.  by  S.  1  league,  which 
course  will  carry  you  up  with  Thrum  Cap,  which  island  has  a  bar  of  rocks,  tliut  lie  near 
half  a  mile  to  the  northward ;  but  if  you  have  ahead  wind,  and  are  obliged  to  run  through, 
you  will  observe  the  channel  is  two  miles  wide  at  Channel  Rock,  which  is  always  above 
water. 

When  you  leave  this  Thrum  Cap,  steer  E.  by  S.  which  will  carry  you  between  the 
Ship  and  Barge,  and  three  islands  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  are  cov- 
ered with  large  rock-maple  trees.  The  Barge  is  a  bare  rock,  which  you  leave  on  your 
starboard  hand;  but  there  is  a  ronk  about  a  cable's  length  to  the  northward  of  the  Barge. 
Continue  your  course  E.  by  S.  for  Bass  Harbor,  distant  from  Thrum  Cap  5  leagues- 
but  you  must  have  some  regard  to  the  tide  of  ebb,  which  sets  very  strong  to  the  S.  S.  E. 
and  the  tide  of  flood  to  the  N.  N.  W.  If  you  are  bound  into  Bass  Harbor,  you  keep 
Rich's  Point  within  a  cal)le'9  length,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  for  there  is 
a  large  ledge  of  rocks,  which  hos  off  about  half  a  mile,  which  is  bare  at  half  tide,  and 
bears  S.  E.  from  Rich's  Barn,  and  S.  by  W.  from  the  entrance  of  Bnss  Harbor.  Vqu 
give  the  larboard  hand  a  good  bbith  in  going  into  Bass  Harbor;  in  entering  which  you 
must  give  both  sides  a  berth,  for  at  low  water  it  is  shoal.  W  you  get  into  this  harbor, 
anchor  on  the  larboard  hand,  with  a  cove  to  the  westward  of  you,  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  mud- 
dy bottom. 
Timntendto  TOWNSEND  TO  MANHEIGKN  HARBOR.— When  you  take  your  departure 
Manheigen  from  Squirrel  Island,  you  steer  E.  S.  E.  for  Manheigon  light,  on  the  north  side  of  which 
Harbor,  are  some  small  dry  islands  and  ledges,  but  good  water  between  thom  and  the  other  sides 

of  the  islimd,  keeping  that  course  until  the  passage  between  George's  Island  and  Man- 
heigen bears  N.  E.  You  may  then  steer  N.  E.  almut  seven  leagues,  through  a  fair  open 
sound,  for  White  Head  light,  leaving  George's  Islands,  (which  are  three  in  nun)bor,)  on 
your  larboanl  hand.  The  eastern  island  has  no  trees  on  it.  There  are  two  dangerous 
rocks,  bearing  duo  south  from  the  middle  of  the  middle  island,  called  the  Old  Man  and 
the  Oil  Woman,  which  are  bare  before  low  water.  They  lie  about  one  mile  from  the 
shore  ;  and  at  high  water,  when  the  wind  blows  off  the  land,  they  do  not  appear.  If  you 
are  bound  to  the  eastward,  and  the  wind  should  take  you  ahead,  when  you  are  between 
Manheigen  and  George's  Islands,  bring  the  middle  of  Manheigon  to  bear  S.  and  run  in 
N..  which  course  will  carry  you  between  the  eastern  George's  Island  and  the  middle 
island.  You  may  run  as  near  as  you  wish  to  the  eastern  island,  but  the  middle  ishmd 
has  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lies  to  tho  eastward  of  it,  which  are  alvrays  dry,  that  you  are  to 
leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  Whim  you  get  to  the  northward  of  this  island,  you  must 
haul  to  the  westward  and  run  upbetween  it  and  the  western  is  land,  so  as  to  bring  the  body 
of  the  middle  island  to  bear  N.  E.  of  you.  Here  you  moor  yjar  vessel,  if  you  stay  any 
time. 

If  you  are  bound  to  the  eastward  from  this  island,  you  may  70  to  tho  northward  of  the 
eastern  island,  but  you  must  be  careful  of  a  ledge  that  lies  to  ..le  eastward  of  said  island, 
which  you  must  leave  on  your  starboard  hand;  and  when  you  bring  Manheigon  light 
to  bear  S.  W.  you  may  go  N.E.  If  night  should  come  on,  or  the  wind  ahead,  you  miy 
haul  up  about  N.  E.  by  N.  for  Tarrent  Harbor,  which  lies  about  8  leagues  from  Geonje's 
Islands.  You  cannot  miss  this  harbor  in  the  day  time.  You  will  make  Mosquito  lliir- 
bor,  which  lies  between  two  islands,  covered  with  spruce  trees.  The  entrance  of  the 
harbor  is  north.  Having  passed  this  harbor,  you  will  run  about  two  miles,  keeping  your 
course  N.  E.  by  N.,  when  you  will  pass  an  island  with  burnt  trees  on  it,  which  you  leave 
on  your  larboard  hand,  and  two  islands  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  also  have  buint 
trees  on  tliem  ;  tlien  you  must  i)ring  the  harbor  to  hear  W.  N.  W.  before  you  enter, 
This  is  a  good  harbor,  provided  you  have  neither  cables  nor  anciiors,  us  you  may  save 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


U9 


your  veiisel  by  running  up  to  the  head  of  it,  on  muddy  bottom,  which  will  be  dry  at  low 

water. 

TOWNSEND  HARBOR.— The  entrnnceofTownsend  is  wide.     Fromthe  Cuckolds  Tounumi 
to  the  Dtimiscove  Islands  is  about  three  miles ;  and  Squirrel  Island  lies  N.  E.  by  N.  about  Harbor, 
2^  miles;  and  from  Squirrel  Islimd  to  the  western  shore  is  about  H  mile;  and  Burnt 
lelnnd,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  light,  56  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  bears  N.  distant  Light. 
about  two  miles  from  the  westerly  point  of  Squirrel  Island.     Bnnting  Ledge  lies  south  a 
little  westerly,  from  Burntisland  light.  If  you  are  outside  of  Damiscove  Islands,  be  careful 
to  stand  so  far  to  the  westward  as  to  bring  Burntisland  light  to  bear  N.  by  £. ;  then  you 
may  run  for  it  without  fear. 

If  the  wind  should  be  ahead,  and  you  have  to  bent  into  the  harbor,  you  may  stand  from 
ihore  to  shore  without  fear,  and  beat  up  either  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  Squirrel 
liland  ;  you  may  find  good  anchorage  under  the  lee  of  Squirrel  Island,  and  go  round  the 
island  with  any  vessel. 

In  coming  from  the  westward,  leave  Seguine  Island  on  your  larboard  hand,  giving  it  a 
berth  of  about  half  a  mile  ;  then  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  3  leagues,  when  you  will,  if  «lear 
weather,  open  Townsend  light,  on  Burnt  Island,  bearing  about  N.  N.  E.  but  still  con-  Light, 
tinue  your  N.  E.  by  E.  course  until  Burnt  Island  light  bears  N.  by  E.,  then  stand  for  it, 
continuing  N.  by  E.,  leaving  it  on  the  larboard  hand  till  up  the  harbor.  About  thrpe- 
qunrters  of  a  mile  N.  N.  E.  from  the  light,  there  is  a  small  island,  called  Mouse  Island, 
which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  is  bold  ;  after  passing  it,  you  haul  up  N. 
E.  for  the  eastern  hnrbor,  or  continue  your  course  N.  by  E.  till  you  get  the  western  har- 
bor to  bear  W.  N.  W.;  then  you  may  run  in  till  you  shut  Burnt  Island  light  in  by  the 
land;  or  you  may  anchor  any  where  inside  of  Mouse  Island,  as  there  are  neither  rocks 
nor  ehoals  lying  off  from  the  land. 

In  coming  from  the  eastward,  get  Manheigen  light  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  steer  W.  N. 
W.  about  5  leagues,  which  course  and  distance  will  carry  you  into  the  passage  between 
all  the  outer  islands  and  the  main  :  and  in  steering  said  course,  you  will  make  Burnt  Isl- 
and light,  bearing  about  N.  W.  by  W. ;  then  steer  W.  by  N.  till  you  get  Burnt  Island 
light  to  bear  N.  W.,  then  haul  up  for  it,  keeping  it  on  your  larboard  bow,  till  you  get 
up  with  it,  then  steer  N.  by  E.  and  follow  the  directions  before  given  in  coming  from  the 
westword. 

KENNEBECK. — If  coming  into  Kennebeck  River  from  the  westward,  keep  about  Kenneheek. 
one-fourth  of  a  mile  from  Seguine  Islond  light;  in  doing  which  you  will  avoid  Jack-knife 
Ledge,  which  bears  from  Seguine  light  N.  W.  distant  li  mile,  and  Ellingwood's  Rock, 
lying  N.  one-fourth  of  a  mile  from  Seguine.  After  passing  Ellingwood's  Rock,  bring 
Seguine  light  to  bear  S.  and  steer  N.  for  Pond  Island  light,  whit".,  is  a  fixed  light,  52  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  beoring  N.  i  W.  from  Seguine  light,  distant  2^  miles.  Light. 
Leaving  Pond  Island  a  cable's  length  on  the  lai  board  hand,  care  should  be  taken  on  the 
flood  tide  to  haul  quickly  round  Pond  Island  Point,  to  avoid  the  Sugar  Loaves,  (two  small 
islands  N.  i  mile  from  Pond  Island,)  upon  which  the  tide  sets  very  strongly.  '1  he  course 
after  passing  Pond  Island  is  about  N.  W.  to  the  fort  on  Hunnewell's  Point,  (which  you 
will  give  a  berth  of  a  cable's  length,)  and  steer  north  for  Coxe's  Head,  (on  which  also  is  a 
fort,)  one  mile.  The  course  is  then  N.  E.  to  Perkin's  Islond,  which  you  will  leave  on 
the  starboard  hand,  about  one  mile,  and  you  will  give  it  a  berth  of  a  cable's  length,  to  shun 
two  sunken  ledges  that  lie  nearly  abreast  of  Perkin's  Island,  and  about  in  the  middle  of 
the  river;  then  steering  about  north,  one  mile,  you  will  have  fine  anchorage  at  Perkin's 
Flats,  in  4,  5,  ond  6  fathoms.  This  is  as  far  as  it  would  be  prudent  for  a  stranger  to  at- 
tempt with  a  heavy  vessel. 

There  is  good  anchorage  in  moderate  weather  any  where  between  Seguine  and  Pond 
Island,  within  half  a  mile  of  the  latter,  in  from  5  to  8  fathoms.  Should  the  wind  blow 
violently,  or  incase  of  stress  of  weather,  and  if  far  enough  to  windward  to  weather  Elling- 
wood's Rock  and  Seguine  Ledges,  it  might  sometimes  be  advisable  to  run  to  Townsend 
Harljor. 

If  hound  into  Kennebeck.  and  falling  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine,  bringthe  light  on  Pond 
Island  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.,  and  run  for  it  till  within  a  cable's  length,  then  follow  the 
preceding  directions. 

There  is  safe  anchorage,  with  an  off-shore  wind,  any  where  between  Small  Point  and 
Seguine,  avoiding  .lack-knife  Ledge,  before  mentioned. 

Safe  atichorngo  may  bo  had  from  Coxe's  Head  to  Perkin's  Island,  nearest  the  eastern 
shore.    The  usual  rapidity  of  the  tide,  between  Seguine  and  the  mouth  of  the  river,  is   Tide. 
3  and  4  knots. 

There  is  also  a  passage  into  Kennebeck  River,  leaving  Pond  Island  on  the  starboard 
hand;  but  only  16  feet  can  be  carried  at  high  water,  and  it  is  not  recommended. 

You  have  deep  water  to  the  eastward  of  Seguine.     At  the  westward  the  tide  of  flood 
sets  strong  to  the  northward  into  New  Meadows,  and  W.  N.  W.  into  Broad  Sound,  and 
up  to  Portland,  and  the  ebb  tide  the  reverse.     Your  soundings  between  Seguine  and 
Capo  Elizabeth,  are  various;  at  times  you  have  18  or  20  fathoms,  rocky  bottom,  and        ' 
within  a  cable's  length  you  will  find  30  or  35  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 


mmm 


t^mjf^gfimmmi   ■  m  "i" 


IfiO 

Hendriek'i 
Head  light. 
Sheeptatt. 
River 


M^-' 


Little  Mark 
hland. 


.i»).<!%\ 


Tide. 


Hew  Mea- 
dotu. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

HENDRICK'S   HKAD  LIGHT  ii  a  fixed  lisht,  30  feet  nbove  the  level  of  the  lea 
on  thn  itarlmnrd  hnnil  RoinK  in,  nenr  the  mouth  of  Shnepsciit  River.  ' 

SHEKPSCUT  RIVER.— If  you  ore  bound  to  Shnepicut  River  from  the  wentward 
and  make  Seguine  light,  you  may  leave  it  on  your  Htarbonrd  hand,  giving  it  n  berth  of 
half  H  mile ;  when  you  pnaa  it  to  thrt  eastward  you  muHt  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  by  8.  and 
■teer  N.  E.  by  N.,  which  course  will  carry  you  to  Ebenicook  Harbor,  distant  three 
lengut<8.  leaving  three  dry  ledges  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  one  on  your  larbonrd. 
This  harbor  is  very  narrow  at  the  entrance,  but  makes  a  large  basin  when  you  got  into 
it;  in  the  entrance  it  lies  E.  N.  E.  You  cannot  get  in  here  with  a  N.  E.  or  euRterly 
wind,  but  must  have  the  wind  south  or  westerly  ;  after  you  get  into  this  harbor,  you  must 
haul  up  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  by  N.,  for  there  are  several  sunken  rocks  on  the  starboard  hand 
as  you  go  in.  which  you  are  to  avoid.  The  best  anchorage  is  against  Ca|it.  Smith's 
wharf,  where  there  are  4  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  and  you  will  lie  safe  from  nil  winds. 
But  if  you  are  bound  up  .Sheepscut  River,  in  a  largo  vessel,  and  come  from  the  woHiwnrd 
pass  Seguine  light  to  the  southward,  steer  N.  E.  until  you  bring  Hendrick's  Head  to  bear 
N.  a  little  westerly,  then  run  for  it,  keeping  the  starboard  shore  close  aboard.  There  are 
many  rocks  and  ledges,  some  of  them  above  and  some  under  water,  which  are  all  to  the 
eastward  of  Seguine.  When  you  get  upas  high  as  Ebenicook,  you  leave  the  two  Mark 
Islands  on  your  larbonrd  hand,  keeping  your  course  north  a  little  easterly;  but  if  you  only 
come  here  to  make  a  harbor,  when  you  get  up  to  Capt.  Hodecon's  you  will  see  a  bare 
ledge  on  your  lurhnard  hand,  if  it  is  low  water,  which  is  covered  at  high  water;  you  may 
anchor  at  8  fathoms,  to  the  northward  of  it. 

LITTLE  MARK  ISLAND— On  Little  Mark  Island  a  stone  column  is  erected  as  a 
land-mark  for  vessels  running  into  or  passing  either  Harpswell  or  Broad  Sound.  It  is 
also  a  conspicuous  mark  for  the  mariner,  standing  in  from  sea,  in  any  direction  between 
Cape  Elizi)eth  and  Cape  Small  Point.  This  island,  at  the  entrance  of  Harpswell  Sound, 
(halfway  between  Portland  and  the  entrance  of  the  River  Kennebeck.)  is  one-fourth  of 
a  mile  in  length,  without  trees,  its  elevation  40  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea;  the 
column  is  pinced  nenr  the  centre  of  the  island,  50  feet  high,  painted  perpendicularly  in 
black  and  white  stripes,  except  near  the  top,  which  is  black  on  each  side.  Course  up 
Harpswell  Sound  N.  E.  ^  N. 

Bearing  by  compass,  and  distance  in  statute  miles  from  the  column.  < 

To  the  column  on  Cape  Elizabeth, S.  W.  j.  W 

.    "   the  outer  Green  Island, S.  W.  by  W 

i         -   "   Half-way  Rock S,  byW.  iW 

.      "   Drunkard's  Ledge S.  i  W.  to  S.  i  W... 

"   Mark  Island  Ledge S.  E.  i  S 

"   South  Pilot  of  Jaquish E.  i  S 

"   Turnip  Island E.  i  N 

"   Cape  Small  Point, E.  hyS 

"   Whale  Rock,  (out  of  water.) S.  W.  by  W 

"   Hnddock  Rock  or  Island,  (N.  point,) .  .N.  W.  4  W 

»   S.  W.  point  of  Haskill'B  Island N.  N.  W 

"   Middle  of  Eagle  Island W.N.W.iW 

••   Mackerel  Cove, E.  N.  E 2     do. 

If  you  want  to  go  up  to  Wiscasset  Point,  you  must  keep  your  starboard  hand  best 
aboard,  north-easterly,  till  you  come  to  Cross  River,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
hand.  You  will  not  attempt  to  go  up  to  Wiscasset  Pohit  with  a  head  wind  and  the  tide 
of  ebb,  for  it  is  1]  league  from  Cross  River;  but  when  you  have  a  fair  wind  and  tide, 
you  may  proceed  without  fear.  This  rivei*  is  narrow,  and  lies  more  to  the  westward. 
When  you  are  about  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  up,  you  must  keep  your  larboard  hand 
best  on  board,  for  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  reaches  nenr  half  way  across  the  river, 
which  is  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  the  rock  near  the  middle  is  covered  at  high  water, 
but  may  be  seen  twohourb  before.  The  river  runs  straight  to  Decker's  Narrows,  then 
turns  round  to  the  westward:  when  you  enter  these  narrows,  you  may  see  the  town.  In 
case  you  should  go  up  in  the  night,  you  must  be  careful  of  two  large  rocks  that  lie  W. 
S.  W.  of  these  narrows ;  the  tide  of  flood  sets  very  strong  for  them ,  and  they  are  covered 
at  half  tide;  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  them,  and  may  anchor  in  10  or  12  fathoms 
water,  muddy  bottom. 

It  is  high  water  here,  at  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  about  ICh.  45m. 

NEW  MEADOWS.— This  river  bears  N.  E  8  leagues  distant  from  the  pyramid  on 
Cape  Elizabeth,  and  about  one  league  W.  from  Cape  Small  Point.  If  you  should  fall 
into  this  bay  with  the  wind  at  S.  E.  or  S.  S.  E.  and  bound  to  the  eastward,  you  may 
make  a  good  harbor  in  the  al>ove  river.  In  standing  to  the  northward,  you  wil  have  a 
large  round  island  on  your  starboard  band,  covered  with  spruce  trees,  together  with  two 


13  miles 

6     do. 

4     do. 

li  do. 

i  do. 

la  do. 

U  do. 

10     do. 

i  do. 

i  do. 

i  do. 

U  do. 

mm'^mimmimimi^^w 


IWWPP'"'^ 


'^"""^m^m^frnftm^ 


'elofthaiea, 

he  westward, 
it  n  l)erth  of 
W.  by  S.  and 
distnnt  three 
our  larboard. 
n  you  get  into 
3.  or  euflterly 
bor,  you  muit 
tarboard  hand 
I^npt.  Smith's 
om  all  winds. 
he  woRiward, 
Head  to  bear 
I.  There  are 
nre  all  to  the 
the  two  Mark 
)Ut  if  you  only 
rill  see  a  bare 
er;  you  may 

I  erected  as  a 
Sound.  It  is 
stion  between 
pswell  Sound, 
one-fourth  of 
the  Bea;  the 
Bodicularly  in 
■    Course  up 


'        '     i. 


n. 


miles. 

do. 

do. 
i  do. 
I  do. 
i  do. 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


rd  hand  best 
rour  Btnrboard 
1  and  the  tide 
rind  and  tide, 
he  westward, 
larboard  hand 
■08B  the  river, 
it  high  water, 
farrowB,  then 
the  town.  In 
8  that  He  W. 
y  are  covered 
r  12  fathoms 


e  pyramid  on 
9U  should  fall 
ard,  you  may 
1  wil  have  a 
ther  with  two 


w 


wmmimmm 


^/f/'rr/ 


"•     }yi'  -fe 


nil  I 


■Miiiiiiii  iviiitj?y" 


1*^ 


*OUTI,.'..M)  flAICItOI 

1* 

r..i- 

ItliiMis  Ciiisl   I'il.il 

)•• 

£ 

tflifl  /. IIV//<7' 


>jf 


\  \ 


Ci  '       lli.i.i, 

lim.T.frifil ""-■-■  '4-  ,.  \ 

iH-.i  Sliihil.  \M,,i  '"'"/,' I..  \ 


liro.i.l  (-.>\'<'i:<><U 


^      \ 


»  »  iT  :;i.r,'.  \iii;tv  ^X 


„.sl.'. 


*♦:»• 


.Mil<'ii«I{>i.  I, 


"■•'■'^"" .>♦.//«//„.,„. 


//rtY 


in 


lit 


* 


/■.,\  liw r;.ii/  /i" iiiii.i ,v//.-,/  ii  ir  i; 


large  roc 


diatiince 
While  J 
length  o 
8tarl)0iivi 
the  west 
hiilftide 
the  east 
course  v 
gpruce  n 
you  may 
the  heat 
rocks  thi 
in  thin  Ih 
east  side 
board  ha 
hold  30  < 
vessel  af 

bring  it  t 
light,  as 
very  stro 
you  will 
conti'.uo 
gt'-  1  ill  > 
When 
ands  on  ; 
yourstnr 
of  a  mile, 
may  and 
to  the  N. 
you  may 
mav  he  o 
HALF 
above  the 
the  N.  W 
ens  to  25 
about  an 
tol'2  fatl 
find  from 
tant  abni 
by  v..  i 
distant  al 
Portland 
about  5 
about  4i 
of  the  8 
it  as  a  gu 
ered  wit! 
eistern  a 
western 
di&tant  al 
CodL 
and  a  ha 
bears  fro 
iislill  OU! 
miles. 

POR'l 
south  of 
300  yani 
Jiglit  I'evi 
K.  S. 
with  fuui 
S.H  m 
miles  (1i>< 
Thof 
and  reef 
A 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


161 


fi/Vfft    ;-^'\ 


\ 


Cry 
I't'iorns 


y<^ 


Soun 


t 


large  rocks,  one  called  the  Brown  Cow,  and  the  other  the  White  Bull,  which  are  Bome 
distance  from  each  other.  You  must  leave  the  Brown  Cow  on  your  starboard,  and  the 
VVhite  liuil  on  your  larboard  hand,  the  latter  of  which  you  may  go  within  a  cable's 
leiisth  of.  and  when  you  have  passed  it,  must  stand  over  for  Horse  Island,  that  lies  on  the 
starboard,  which  ^ns  a  house  on  it,  that  you  may  go  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of.  To 
th(4  westward  of  i.ne  island  lies  a  large  rock,  which  is  covered  at  high  water,  but  bare  at 
hiilftide;  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  it  when  it  is  in  sight,  but  the  widest  pasbage  is  to 
the  eastward.  When  you  have  passed  this  rock,  steer  N.  by  W.  or  N.  N.  W.,  which 
course  will  carr/  you  up  with  a  large  island,  called  Bear  Island,  which  ia  covered  with 
epruce  and  birch  tiees.  When  you  have  passed  this  island  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile, 
you  may  haul  in  for  the  starboard  shore,  and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water.  This  is 
the  best  place  to  anchor,  with  the  wind  at  S.  S.  E.  or  E. ;  but  be  careful  of  a  ledge  of 
rocks  that  runs  to  the  northward  of  this  island,  about  half  a  milo  off.  You  may  anchor 
in  tlii-)  l)Hy  according  as  the  wind  may  be ;  if  it  should  be  at  the  eastward,  anchor  on  the 
enst  side.  If  you  have  lost  your  cables  and  anchors,  there  im  r  'arge  cove  on  thestar- 
board  hand,  about  two  miles  from  Bear  Island,  bearing  about  N.,  ^hich  is  sufficient  to 
hold  .30  or  40  sail  of  vessels.  It  is  land-locked  all  round,  so  that  no  wind  can  damage  a 
vesoi'l  after  she  gets  into  it. 

HUf*SKY'S  SOUND. — If  you  come  from  the  eastward,  and  make  Seguine  light,  Hmsey'a 
bring  it  to  hear  E.  and  steer  W.  for  Hussey's  Sound,  if  you  have  a  fair  wind  and  day- 
li|;ht.  as  you  have  nothing  but  islands  on  your  starboard  hand.  The  tide  of  flood  sets 
very  stron:;  in  between  these  islands:  when  you  get  within  two  miles  of  Hussey's  Sound, 
yoii  will  make  two  islands  which  have  no  trees  on  them,  called  Green  Islands.  You 
continue  your  course  till  you  make  Hussey's  Sound,  bearing  N.  N.  E. ;  then  you  may 
gtp  ,  in  with  your  course  N.  N.  E. 

When  you  pass  the  two  islands,  after  entering  Hussey's  Sound,  you  leave  three  Isl- 
ands on  ynur  larboard,  and  two  islands  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  the  northern  island  on 
your  stfirhuard.  is  called  Smith's  Island ;  when  you  (tss  said  island,  about  three-quarters 
of  a  mile,  you  may  haul  away  E.  N.  E.  till  you  shut  in  said  island,  to  the  S.  E. ;  then  you 
may  anchor  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  muddy  bottom;  Hog  Island  to  the  S.  W.,  Basket  Island 
to  the  N.  W.,  Great  Gabegue  Island  to  the  N.  E..  and  Smith's  Island  to  the  S.  E.  Here 
you  may  moor  200  sail  of  ships,  safe  from  all  winds,  and  when  wind  and  tide  serve,  you 
may  bo  out  to  sea  in  one  hour. 

HALF  WAY  ROCK  is  high  and  black,  about 600  foot  in  diameter,  elevated  16  feet 
nbovethn  level  of  the  sea,  at  high  water.  At  the  distance  of  600  feet  from  the  rock,  on 
the  N.  W.,  North,  N.  E.,  E.,  and  S.  E.  sides,  there  are  from  5  to  6,  and  gradually  deep- 
ens to  25  fathoms,  within  three-quarters  of  a  mileof  it.  A  reef  extends  off  W.  by  S.  distant 
about  an  eighth  of  a  mile.  Within  one  cable's  length  of  said  reef  you  will  find  from  10 
to  12  fathoms  water.  You  may  near  this  rock  on  all  pides  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and 
find  from  15  to  25  fathoms  water.  Seguine  lighthouse  bears  from  tho  rock  E.  i  y.  dis-  Lighthouse. 
tant  about  15  miles ;  Drunken  Ledges,  N.  N.  E.  distant  about  2^  miles ;  M ark Ismnd, N. 
by  K.  4  E.  distant  about  4.i  miles ;  the  lighthouse  on  Cape  Elizabeth,  S.  W.  by  W.  |  W. 
distant  about  9  miles:  Cod  Rock,  (shoulest  part,)  S.  W.  by  S.  distant  about  6  miles; 
Portland  lighthouse,  W.  i  S.  distant  ab(>ut  114  miles;  Green  Islands,  W.  4  N.  distant 
atwut  5  miles;  Jewill's  Island,  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  about  3  miles;  Eagle  Island,  N. 
about  4i  miles.     Drunken  Ledges  may  be  seen  at  all  times,  breaking  with  a  little  motion  ,  ;; 

of  the  sea.  Mark  Island  is  a  small  bare  island,  and  has  a  stone  monument  erected  on 
it  ns  a  guide  for  vessels  running  into  Broad  Sound.  Eagle  Island  is  a  stnall  high  island,  cov- 
ered with  trees,  at  the  entrance  of  said  sound.  Mark  Island  and  Easle  Island  form  the 
eistorn  side  of  the  entrance  to  Broad  Sound.  Brown  Cow  and  Jewill's  Islands  form  the 
western  side.  Green  Islands  are  two  in  number,  and  bear  from  Jewill's  Island  S.  W. 
distant  about  one  and  a  half  m>le. 

Cod  Ledge  is  almut  half  a  tniin  in  circumference,  and  has  on  the  shoalest  part  of  it  two 
and  a  half  fathoms,  at  low  water,  and  gradually  deepens  to  3,  5,  7,  8,  and  12  fathoms,  and 
bears  from  Portland  lighthouse,  E.  S.  E.  distant  about  7  miles,  and  from  Cape  Elizabeth  Lighthotue, 
lightl  ous"  E.  by  N.  4  N.  distant  about  5  miles;  Green  Island  S.  S.  E.  distant  about  3 
miles.     This  ledge  often  breaks  in  a  heavy  south-east  gale. 

PORTLAND  HARBOR— Cape  Elizabeth  lights  are  situated  on  Cape  Elizabeth, 
Bonth  of  tho  entrance  to  Portland  Harbor,  about  140  feet  above  the  li  irel  of  the  sea,  and 
300  yards  apart,  bearing  from  each  other  S.  W.  4  W.  and  N.  E.  4  E.  The  western 
light  revolves  once  in  two  minutes,  tho  eastern  is  a  fixed  light. 

E.  8.  E.  fror.i  these  lights,  2)  miles  distant,  is  a  dangerous  ledge,  called  Alden's  Rock, 
with  four  feet  water  on  it  at  low  tide.  Also  a  reef,  called  Taylor's  Reef,  bearing  S.  E.  by 
S.  1!  mile  distant,  having  24  fathoms  at  low  water.  E.  by  N.  i  N.  from  the  lights,  5} 
miles  distant,  lies  Bulwark  Ledge,  having  24  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water. 

The  following  are  the  hearings  and  distances,  from  the  north-easterly  light,  of  theshoals 
and  reefs,  and  of  other  lighthouses  in  sight  of,  and  noar  the  cape,  viz. : 

Alden's  Rock, .S.  E.  by  E 2^  miles. 

Hue  andCry, S.  7..  4S 3i     do. 


Half  Way 
Rock. 


Portland 

Harbor, 

Lights. 


Bean\ti$. 


mm>w 


wmmm 


m^ 


'^<p<iipv!""'*^«ppiiiipi 


162 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN.  COAST  PILOT. 


u 

do. 

2 

do. 

2i  do. 

24 

do. 

m  do. 

4 

do. 

TBylor'B  Reef,...  >.. S.  S.  E.  i  E 1^  miles. 

Broad  Cove  Rock N.  N.  R.  i  E.  . 

Outer  point  of  Wfltch  Ledge, S.  W.  i     

S.  E.  side  of  Richmond  Island S.  W , 

Seguine  light, E.  by  N.  ^  N . . , 

Wood  Island  light S.  W.  i  W  .... 

Portland  Head  light N.  ^  E  

Portland  lighthouse  is  on  a  point  of  land  called  Portland  Head,  at  the  western  entrance 
of  the  harbor.  It  is  a  stone  edifice,  72  feet  high,  e.^clusive  of  the  lantern,  which  ig  13 
feet,  and  contains  a  fixed  light. 

A  red  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  Alden's  Rock,  with  a  staff  of  about  12  feet  long,  to  which 
is  attached  a  red  flag.  There  are  also  two  watch  buoys  within  15  or  20  feet  of  this  buoy 
on  the  following  bearings : 

Hussey's  Sound,  viz.,  from  the  buoy  N.  about  8^  miles  distant. 
LighU;  Northern  lighthouse  on  Cape  Elizabeth,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

Southern  lighthouse  on  the  same,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  distant  3  miles. 
The  barn  on  Richmond's  Island,  W.  distauc  4i  miles. 
Portland  lighthouse,  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  distant  6i  miles. 
Wood  Island  lighthouse,  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  distant  13  miles. 

The  most  dangerous  parts  of  this  ledge  are  two  rocks  bearing  from  each  other  E.S.E. 
and  W.  N.  W.     The  distance  between  these  rocks  is  420  feet. 

The  western  rock  is  about  12  feet  in  diameter,  and  has  6i  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  Tlie 
eastern  rock  is  about  30  feet  in  diameter,  and  has  but  7i  feet  at  lov.  wnter.  Between 
these  rocks  are  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms.  The  western  rock  bears  from  the  buoy  S.  by  W. 
distant  240  feet.  The  eastern  rock  bears  S.  E.  i  S.  distant  520  feet.  At  the  dislnnce  of 
600  feet  from  the  eastern  rock,  on  the  S.  V..,  K.  and  N.  £.  sides,  are  4,  5,  and  6fiithnms 
water.  At  the  distance  of  300  feet  from  the  western  rock,  on  the  S.  W.,  W.  and  N.  W, 
sides,  are  6,  7.  and  8  fathoms. 
Light.  Vessels  bound  to  PortlHnd,  falling  in  to  the  westward,  and  making  Wood  Island  light, 

must  bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  13  miles,  which 
will  bring  them  up  with  the  buoy  on  Alden's  Ledge 
Light,  Should  they  fall  in  to  the  eastward,  and  make  Seguine'light,''they  must  bring  it  to  bear 

E.  by  N.  i  N.  and  run  W.  by  S.  i  S.  9  leagues,  which  will  bring  them  up  with  the  buoy. 
In  passing  the  buoy  to  the  E.  give  it  a  berth  of  one-quarter  of  a  mile.     If  to  the  west, 
you  may  near  it  within  a  cable's  length. 

If  running  for  Portland  Harbor,  bring  the  bwoy  to  bear  S.  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  N.  W. 
6.i  miles,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  Portland  light.  Continue  this  course  until  you 
are  half  a  mile  within  the  lighthouse,  then  bring  it  to  bear  S.,  and  steer  N.  by  W.  for 
House  Island,  which  is  two  miles  N.  by  W.  fiom  Portland  light.  Should  you  jWishto 
go  further  up  the  harbor,  follow  the  directions  given  here. 
The  course  from  the  buoy  to  Hussey's  Sound  is  North. 

N.  B.  Vessels  of  large  draft  will  find  the  best  water  by  bringing  Portland  light  to  bear 
N.  W.  by  N  ,  and  running  directly  for  it. 
Coming  from  the  south-westward,  when  within  half  a  mile  of  Cape  Elizabeth,  the  red 
Buoy.  buoy  on  Broad  Cove  Rock  may  be  seen  ;  it  bears  N.  N.  E.  from  the  pitch  of  the  cape, 

distant  one  and  a  half  mile,  and  lies  in  24  feet  water.  When  up  with  this  buoy,  leiive 
it  on  the  larboard  hand,  half  a  cable's  length  distant,  and  steer  N.  by  E.  i  E.  1  mile,  which 
will  carrj'  you  up  with  the  white  buoy  on  Trundy's  Reef,  which  lies  in  16  feet  water. 
Giving  it  the  same  berth  as  the  other,  you  may  then  run  N.  by  W.  i  W.  for  Poitliiin] 
lighthouse,  3  miles  distant.  When  up  with  the  head  on  which  the  lighthouHe  stiuids, 
give  it  a  small  berth,  and  steer  N.  by  W.,  leaving  Bang's  Island  on  the  starboard  hand,  till 
you  come  to  House  Island,  the  S.  W.  point  of  wl.ich  bears  N.  from  tho  lighthouse,  dis- 
tant itlmost  2  miles.  Before  you  are  up  with  this  island,  the  black  buoy  on  S|)ring  Point 
Ledge  may  be  seen;  it  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  House  laliind,  dis- 
tant half  a  mile,  and  lies  in  14  feet  water.  When  up  with  this  buoy,  you  open  the  town. 
Giving  the  black  buoy  a  small  berth,  you  may  haul  up  N.  W.  for  the  white  buoy  on  Stan- 
ford's Ledge;  this  buoy  lies  also  in  14  feet  water,  and  one  mil«  distant  from  S|iring  I'oinl 
Ledge  buoy.  (Jiving  the  white  buoy  a  small  berth,  you  may  keep  up  midway  the  n.er, 
and  ancluir  opposite  the  town,  where  you  |)lense,  in  safety. 

Vessels  coming  from  sea.  and  Imund  into  Portland,  may,  by  giving  the  lights  on  Cape 
Eli/.abi'th  a  berth  of  4  miles,  run  to  the  northward  and  eastward  until  Portland  light  beiirs 
N.  W.,  and  then  stand  dii'ertiy  for  it,  which  will  dear  all  tho  ledges. 

Ther«  are  also  two  small  buoys  on  two  ledges  in  White  Head  Passage,  at  the  N.  E. 
part  of  naiig'h  Island.  This  passage  is  nariow,  and  but  seldom  used  with  large  vessels. 
By  keeping  midway  between  tho  two  buoys,  tho  red  on  tho  stitrboard  and  the  while  on 
the  liirboiird  hanil,  in  coming  in,  you  will  have  not  less  than  5  fathoms  water.  After  pass- 
ing the  buoys,  kee|i  midwiiy  the  passage,  and  run  1  mile  distance,  which  will  curry  you 
into  ship  chunuei,  the  siuie  ua  if  you  hud  passed  the  lighthouse. 


mmfrnm^ 


iH^mmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


153 


U  miles. 

ii  do. 

i    do. 

H  do. 

4     do. 

)i  do. 

4     do. 

em  entrance 

which  is  13 

ng.  to  which 

of  this  buoy 

SN.  B.  All  the  above  mentioned  buoys  are  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  hand,  in  coming  in, 
the  depth  of  water  put  down  is  at  low  water.] 

No  1 E. — If  by  accident  either  of  the  buoys  should  be  removed,  the  follotoing  directions  for 
tailing  into  Portland  Harbor  will  be  found  useful. 

When  you  come  from  the  south-westward,  and  intend  to  go  into  Poitland,  give  Cape 
Elizabeth  a  berth  of  hnlf  a  mile,  and  steer  N.  N.  £.  until  you  bring  Portland  lighthouse  Light. 
to  bear  N.  N.  W.,  when  you  must  haul  up  N.  N.  W.  if  the  wind  will  permit;  but  if  you 
are  in  a  large  ship,  and  the  wind  N.  W.  or  W.  N.  W.,  your  safest  way  is  to  couilirad  ' 

your  course  N.  N.  E.,  which  will  carry  you  safe  into  Hussey's  Sound,  allowing  it  to  be  tide 
of  flood,  as  Portland  Sound  is  narrow,  but  bold  between  the  lighthouse  and  Bang's  Island, 
the  latter  of  which  is  on  your  starboard  hand.  If  you  should  turn  into  Portland  in  the 
DJght,  in  standing  to  the  south-westward,  you  must  go  about  as  soon  as  the  light  bears 
H.  N.  W. ;  and  in  standing  to  the  eastward,  you  must  go  about  as  soon  as  the  light  beara 
\V.  N.  W.,  for  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  bears  S.  by  E.  from  Portland  lighthouse,  and 
also  a  low  island,  called  Ram  Island,  east  northerly,  one  mile  distant  from  the  lighthouse; 
but  if  you  have  a  leading  wind  you  may  go  in  without  fear,  keeping  about  middle  of  the 
channel  way,  and  when  abreast  of  the  light,  steer  about  N.  by  W.  for  House  Island,  which 
you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand:  when  you  pnss  House  Island,  bring  it  to  bear  8.  E. 
by  E.  and  steer  N.  ^\  .  by  W.,  or  W.  N.  W.  with  the  tide  of  flood.  In  steering  the 
above  course,  you  will  see  a  round  bushy  tree  to  the  north  of  the  town,  and  a  house  with 
a  red  roof,  and  one  chimney ;  bring  the  tree  to  the  west  of  the  house,  which  course  will 
carry  you  up  the  channel  way,  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water;  but  when  you  come  abreast  of 
the  fort  which  stands  on  a  hill,  haul  away  W.  S.  W.,  as  there  is  a  shoal  bank  on  your 
starboard  hand  that  has  not  more  than  10  or  12  feet  on  it  at  high  water,  which  you  are  to 
avoid.  Here  you  will  be  careful  of  two  ledges  of  rorks,  one  called  Spring  Point  Ledge,  Ledges 
two  miles  N.  by  W.  i  W.  from  the  lighthouse,  and  the  other  three  miles,  bearing  N.  by 
W.  i  W.,  called  Stanford's  Ledge,  which  has  a  buoy  on  it,  and  stretches  off  from  your 
larboard  hand  near  half  a  mile  in  length.  They  lie  to  the  S.  W.  of  House  Island,  and 
are  all  bare  at  low  water.  If  you  are  obliged  to  turn  in  here,  they  are  much  in  the  wny, 
and  when  you  are  standing  to  the  southward,  be  careful  of  them.  The  marks  will  do  in  the 
day-time,  but  are  of  no  service  in  the  night.  There  is  a  pilot  who  generally  attends  here. 
This  harbor  is  open  to  the  wind  at  N.  £.  and  E.  N  E.  If  you  should  come  in  a  dark 
night,  your  best  way  is  to  go  into  Hog  Island  Road,  which  may  be  done  by  steering  as 
follows  : — whon  yuu  pass  the  lighthouse,  steer  N.  by  W.  until  you  pass  Bang's  Island, 
which  you  will  leave  on  your  stprboard  hand ;  in  steering  this  course,  you  will  make  House 
Island,  which  you  will  leave  on  your  larboard  hand ;  when  you  are  between  both  of  these 
islands,  you  steer  N.  £.  by  E.  till  you  como  to  the  second  island  on  your  starboard  hand. 
If  it  is  day-time,  you  will  see  a  large  house  on  said  island;  and  may  anchor  as  soon  as 
abreast  of  it,  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

If  you  should  fall  in  to  the  eastward  of  Portland,  and  make  Seguine  light,  bring  it  to 
bear  E.  and  steer  W.,  which  course  you  are  to  continue  till  you  make  Portland  light  to 
bear  from  N.  W.  to  W.  N.  W.,  when  you  may  run  for  it  without  fear. 

You  must  have  some  regard  to  the  tide  of  flood,  which  sets  very  strong  between  the  isl- 
ands to  the  eastward  of  Portland. 

Masters  who  sail  from  Portland,  or  ports  adjacent,  are  informed,  thiii  from  the  Ou- 
SERVATORT  ou  Fort  Hill,  by  means  of  the  telescope  placed  tliore,  vessels  njiproncliing 
the  coast  may  be  discovered  at  15  leagues  distance  ;  and  their  rs  or  private  signals  can 
be  distinguished  8  leagues,  if  the  weather  should  be  clear  anc.  .  iliirs  hoisted,  or  sus- 
pended in  such  a  manneras  to  present  them  fair  to  the  Observat  Should  imy  need 
assistance,  they  will  set  their  ensign  over  their  private  signals;  and  may  ho  asHmeil  if  they 
can  be  discerned,  that  their  situation  will  be  made  known  to  their  owners. 

The  Observatory  bears  N.  N.  \V.  4  W.  from  Portland  lighthouse,  4  miles  distnnt;  and 
these,  in  range,  are  a  good  mark  to  clear  Altlen's  Rock  ;  which,  keeping  the  above  in  range, 
you  will  be  nearly  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of. 

The  Observatory  is  on  an  eminence  141  feet  above  high  water  mark;  and  the  building 
32  feet  high,  painted  red,  and  the  telescope  placed  near  the  top. 

Vessels  falling  in  with  Cape  Elizabeth,  and  wishing  to  make  a  harbor  in  a  stron  N.  W. 
wind,  must  observe  the  following  directions: 

(xivo  tliis  cape  a  berth  of  onoquurter  of  a  mile,  and  steer  N.  E.  nine  miles,  leaving  the  Directions, 
Green  Island  on  the  starboard  hand,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  the  S.  W.  point  of 
Crotch  Island.  Give  this  point  a  berth  of  half  a  mile,  and  steer  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  which  will 
carry  you  between  Hope  Island  on  the  north  and  C'rotch  Island  on  the  south.  You  may 
anchor  midway  between  the  two  islands,  in  about  13  fathoms  water.  The  shores  on  each 
side  are  very  bold. 

BOON  ISLAND. — This  island  is  very  low,  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  in  length.     A  Boon  Island. 
lighthouse  is  built  on  the  west  part  of  the  island,  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  form  >    Light. 
light.     It  is  50  feet  above  the  surface,  shows  a  fixed  light,  elevated  about  70  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea. 


mmm 


wmmmmm 


154  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

There  is  a  passage  between  the  island  and  the  main,  half  a  mile  within  the  former 
between  4  and  5  miles  wide,  in  from  12  to  20  fathoms,  nearly  up  with  York  Ledge' 
There  is  a  ledge  off  the  north  part  of  Boon  Island,  one-fourth  of  a  mile  distHnt,  which 
shows  Ht  low  water. 
Boon  Island       BOON  ISLAND  LEDGE  is  about  200  feet  long,  and  about  the  same  in  width-  jg 
Ledge.  bare  at  low  tides,  and  may  be  seen  breaking  at  all  times  in  a  heavy  ground  swell.       ' 

The  Ledge  bears  from  the  island  E.  ^  S.  two  and  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant 
There  is  a  passage  between  the  led^e  and  the  island,  but  it  will  not  do  for  strangers  ai 
there  is  a  reef  extends  |  of  a  mile,  from  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  island. 

The  following  are  the  soundings  around  Boon  Island.      i 

Soundings.                Boon  Island  lighthouse  bearing  W.  i  S 1  mile  distant,  21  fathoms. 

•'  "  "  "            do H  do.  25  do. 

"  "  "  •'           do 1}  do.  24  do. 

"  •'  »  »        W.  i  N 2  do.  12  do. 

p               "  "  •'  »        W.  I  N 2  do.  8  do. 

"  "  »•  "        W.  by  N 2  do.  18  do. 

"  '•  "  "  W.  byN.iN.li  do.  23  do. 

"  "  •'  "  S.  E.  byS...   i  do.  15  do. 

«•  "  "  ••        S.  E.  iE 1  do.  23  do. 

"  "  "  "  S.  E.  byE...2  do.  12  do. 

"  '«  "  "        E,  i  N 4  do.  18  do. 

•  •  From  AgamenMcuB  Hill,  Boon  Island  bears  S.  E.  distant  5  or  6  leagues,  and  when  yon 

come  in  from  sea,  and  make  Agamenticus  Hill,  being  N.  W.  by  N.,  you  are  then  to  the 
westward  of  Boon  Island  Ledge,  but  when  said  hill  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  you  are  to  the 
eastward  of  it.  From  Boon  Island  to  Cape  Elizabeth  tlie  course  is  N.  E.  distant  about 
29  miles. 

I  would  recommend  to  nil  mariners,  in  coming  from  the  eastward,  not  to  go  to  the  north- 
ward of  lat.  43°  N.  in  thick  weather,  unless  they  are  well  acquainted,  and  judge  tliem- 
Belves  to  be  to  the  westward  of  Boon  Island  Ledge,  as  this  has  proved  fatal  to  many  who 
were  unacquainted. 

We  have  been  informed  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  due  north  from  Boon  Island,  one  mile 
distant;  the  gentleman  who  gave  the  information,  since  deceased, and  whose  veracity  and 
experience  could  be  relied  on,  said,  "I  have  passed  this  place  several  times,  but  never 
discovered  the  lodge  till  the  year  1783,  when,  being  bound  to  tiio  eastward,  the  wind  took 
run  from  the  westward,  but  the  vessel  having  no  more  than  steerage  way,  I  hove  over 
a  line  to  catch  fish,  and  found  I  had  24  fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom,  and  in  a  few  min- 
utes I  had  but  10  feet  of  water,  and  my  vessel  drawing  9.  All  that  saved  me  from  strik- 
ing was,  that  the  water  being  entirely  smooth,  the  current  set  mo  to  the  eastward,  and  I 
got  into  24  fathoms  within  the  length  of  the  vessel  from  where  I  sounded,  and  had  10 
feet." 
York  Ledge.  YORK  LEDGE. — This  rock  is  bare  at  three-quarters  tide,  extending  E.  N.  E.  aud 
W.  S.  W.  about  400  feet.     It  is  about  300  feet  wide. 

N.  E.  from  the  main  rock  there  is  a  shoal  runs  off  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  having  upon  it 
only  two  fathoms  at  low  water. 

The  soundings  are  gradual,  from  5  to  20  fathoms  half  a  mile  from  the  rock. 
An  iron  beacon  has  been  placed  upon  this  rock;  it  is  33j  feet  high,  aud  about  25  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  water. 

Upon  the  pillars  restii  an  iron  tabular  column,  supporting  an  iron  base  of  3i  feet  diame- 
ter, upon  which  is  inscrbed  "  York  Ledge.     1841.  " 

The  Triangles,  which  break  in  a  heavy  sea,  and  which  have  4  fatlioms  at  low  water, 
bear  S.  W.  2  miles  distant  from  this  beacon. 
ghtt.  Boon  Island  light  bears  from  this  beacon  E.  ?  N.  5i  niiles;  Whale's  Hack  light,  W.  by 

S.  4  S.  5  miles;  White  Iskud  light,  S.  by  W.   I   W.  8i  miles;  York  Nubble,  N.  by  E. 
4^  miles. 
York  Har-         YORK  H\RBOR. — This  is  a  small  harbor,  luit  once  entered  is  safe;  twelve  feet  can 
bor.  be  carried  in  at  low  water;  rise  of  tide  9  fetst. 

White  Hills.  WHITE  HILLS.— These  hills  lie  N.  W.  from  Portland,  and  N.  N.  W.  from  Wood 
Island  lighthouse.  You  may  see  them  in  clear  weather  when  no  otiior  part  of  the  land 
is  in  sight.  At  the  lirst  sight  they  appear  like  a  cloud,  and  are  always  white.  They 
have  been  seen  when  in  latitude  43  degrees  10  minutes  North,  twenty-ihii-e  miles  Sduth 
from  the  lighthuiise  on  Cape  Eli/abcth.  The  depth  of  water  in  the  above  latitu(li>  is 
eighty  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  When  you  steer  N.  W.  or  N.  N.  W.  from  this  latitude, 
you  will  make  Agamenticus  Hills,  ai>d  when  bearing  W.  by  N.  six  or  seven  leagues, 
they  appear  like  tliiee  hills,  the  smalnst  of  them  to  iheeaHtwiiid.  At  the  same  time  you 
will  make  Well's  Hills,  bearing  W.  N.  W.,  and  when  yuu  ur    uu  the  northern  part  of 


i«i  III  m    r^mm^ 


■"^■PMfP 


ELUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


156 


Saco. 


Richmond'a 
Island. 


Tgffery'B  Ledge,  in  45  fatboms  water,  you  will  see  the  hills  of  Agamenticus  bearing  W. 
by  N.  or  W.  N.  W. 

Between  Jeffery's  and  the  lalea  of  Shnals  you  will  have  70  and  75  fathoms  water,  mud- 
jy  bottom,  and  a  strong;  current  setting  to  the  S.  W.  You  may  see  the  Isles  of  Shoals  5 
or  t>  leagues,  when  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  them  ;  but  will  tirst  see  the  liglithouse, 
^bich  is  on  White  Island,  and  the  meeting-house  on  Star  Island,  bearing  N.  £.  and  S. 
\^.  from  earh  other,  distance  seven-eighths  of  a  njile. 

CAPP:  PORPOISE  TO  WOOD  ISLAND  LIGHT— Wood  Island  light  is  situa-  Cape  Par- 
ted  near  the  entrance  of  Saco  River,  on  the  east  side  of  the  island.    The  liintorn  is  elevated  poise  to 
45  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  revolving  light.      Wood  IslHnd  is  high    Wood  Isl- 
ffoody  land,  and  very  even,  and  lies  N.  E.  3  leagues  distant  from  Cape  Porpoise.     In  run-  and  light. 
ning  for  the  light,  bring  it  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  W..  and  run  till  within  a  cahle's  length 
ffith  safety.     You  may  go  into  this  harbor  either  at  the  eastward  or  westward  of  the 
island.     There  are  several  rocks  to  the  westward  of  the  island,  and  also  a  long  bar  which 
lies  to  the  S.  W.,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant,  together  with  two  ledges,  one 
of  vyhich  bears  S.  E.  by  S.  from  the  light,  distant  half  a  mile,  having  10  feet  water  on  it 
Btlow  tide,  and  the  other  is  a  dangerous  ledge  called  Danceberry.  bearing  S.  by  E.  from 
the  light,  distant  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  and  breaks  at  all  times.     When  you  have 
the  wind  to  the  southward,  you  may  lay  your  course  in,  and  anchor  near  Stage  Island, 
OD  which  is  a  monument:  this  is  called  Winter  Harbor.     You  may  go  in  the  eastern 
way,  nnd  have  room  to  turn  your  vessel,  which  is  an  advantage  you  cannot  have  in  go- 
ing in  to  the  westward :  but  here  you  are  exposed  to  the  wind  at  N.  E.  and  E.  N.  E.,  but 
if  your  cables  and  anchors  are  not  good,  you  may  run  into  the  Pool,  and  lie  safe  from  all 
winds. 

In  running  in  the  eastern  passage,  you  open  a  small  channel  for  boats  only,  between 
Wood  and  Negro  Islands,  but  no  man  of  experience  would  mistake  it.  Negro  Island  is 
small,  with  two  stores  on  it,  and  is  left  on  the  larboard  hand 

Snco  lies  about  a  league  to  the  north-west,  but  is  a  barred  place,  and  has  not  above  10 
feet  at  high  water,  which  makes  it  not  fit  for  a  stranger  to  go  in;  there  is,  however,  con- 
BJderuljle  navigation  owned  here,  and  the  inhabitants  are  enterprising. 

RICHMOND'S  ISLAND.— The  next  place  to  Wood  Island  is  Richmond's  Island, 
which  lies  about  N.  E.  northerly,  4  leagues.  This  place  is  only  fit  for  small  vessels,  such 
B9  coasters,  and  but  few  vessels  put  in  here,  it  being  only  one  league  to  the  westward  of 
Portland,  which  is  the  principal  port  in  the  State. 

In  sailing  by  Richmond's  Island,  you  must  be  careful  of  a  sunken  ledge,  called  Watch 
Ledge,  that  lies  off  about  S.  E.,  near  half  n  mile  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  island:  it 
does  not  show  itself  except  the  wind  blows  fresh,  but  you  need  not  go  so  near  the  island, 
unless  you  have  a  scant  wind,  or  turning  to  windward. 

CAPE  NEDDOCK  TO  CAPE  PORPOISE— Your  course  from  Cape  Neddock  to  Cape  Ned- 
Cape  Porpoise  is  N.  E.,  distant  4|  leagues.     (Jape  Porpoise  is  a  bad  harbor,  and  not  to  be  tfock  to  Cape 
attempted,  unless  you  are  well  acquainted  or  in  distress.      In  going  in  you  must  leave  2  Porpoise. 
small  islands  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  three  on  your  starboard.     It  may  be  known  by 
the  high  land  of  Kennobunk,  v/hich  lies  to  the  north-west  of  it.     When  the  harbor  bears 
N.  W.  you  must  haul  in,  but  be  careful  of  the  point  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  not  go 
too  near  it,  as  it  is  very  rocky.     As  soon  as  you  are  in  the  harbor,  and  clear  of  the  point 
of  rocks  on  your  starboard  hand,  your  course  must  be  N.  W.  about  two  cables'  length,  when 
you  must  come  to,  and  moor  N.E.  and  S.W.  or  run  direct  for  the  wharf     A  vessel  that 
drinvs  10  feet  will  be  aground  at  low  water.     The  harbor  is  so  narrow  that  a  vessel  can- 
not turn  round  ;  is  within  100  yards  of  the  sea,  and  secure  from  all  winds,  whether  you 
have  tmchors  or  not. 

CAPE  PORPOISE  HARBOR.— The  lighthouse  stands  on  the  south-west  part  of  CapePor- 
GoHt  Island,  and  contains  a  fixed  light,  elevated  thirty-three  feet  above  the  level  of  the  poise  light, 
sea.  The  following  are  the  directions  for  the  harbor  : — If  you  are  to  the  eastward,  and  Directiont. 
make  Wood  Island  light,  nnd  bound  to  Cape  I'orpoiso  Harbor,  bring  Wood  Island  light  to 
bear  N.E.  by  N.  and  run  S.W.  until  you  bring  Cape  Por|)oise  light  to  bear  N.  by  W.; 
then  steer  direct  for  the  light  until  you  shut  Wood  Island  in  by  the  eastern  head  of  Cape 
Porpoise  Harbor:  then  you  are  ai)reastof  a  breaking  ledge  called  the  Old  Prince,  which 
bears  from  Cape  Porpoise  lighthouse  S.  E.  by  S.  half  a  mile  ilit^tant;  then  steer  N.  N. 
W.  until  Capo  Porpoise  light  bears  K.  N.  E.:  you  are  then  up  with  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor.  Then,  if  low  water,  keep  midway  between  the  two  points;  but  if  high  water, 
keep  the  larboard  shore  best  aboard.  When  up  with  the  points,  steer  N.  W.  a  quarter 
of  a  mile,  and  anchor  in  three  fathoms  water,  at  low  water.  By  following  these  directions 
you  will  find  from  3  to  6  fathoms  water.  In  coming  in  from  sea.  and  making  Cape  Por- 
poise, and  intending  to  go  into  the  harbor,  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  by  W.  and  follow  the 
above  directions.  This  harbor  is  not  so  safe  for  large  vessels,  nnd  must  not  be  attempted, 
unless  with  a  fair  wind.  Wood  Island  lies  about  10  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of  Cape  Porpoise, 
and  has  on  it  a  repeating  light.  Folly  Island  lies  opposite  the  lightliouse,  and  forms  the 
western  side  of  Capo  Porpoise  Harbor.      The  S.  S.  £.  part  of  Folly  Island  Point  bears 


' 


166 

i 

Buoya. 
LighUunue. 

Kennelunk. 


Tides. 

Portsmouth 
Lighthouse. 


ChmBoat 
ShoiU. 


LiglUhouse. 


Lighthouse. 


|ipipppimiiiiji>iiiiiiiuu.uii^ <fi""'3")!PP!<«iPPP 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


' 


from  the  light  8.  h  W.  distant  al)out  li  mile.    The  shoal  rnns  off  nearly  three-qnarten 
of  a  mile. 

No  IE. — A  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  elevated  9  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  hai 
been  moored  near  the  Old  Prince,  in  8  fathoms  water,  at  low  water,  and  bears  from  Cape 
Porpoise  lighthouse  S.  S.  E.  distant  about  five-eighths  of  a  mile;  Old  Prince  bears  from 
the  buoy  N.  N.  E.  distant  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile;  Folly  Island  Point,  west,  dig. 
tant  about  one-qunrter  of  a  mile.  In  running  for  Cape  Porpoise  Harbor,  you  may  gooQ 
either  side  of  the  buoy,  by  keeping  it  close  on  board,  and  after  passing  it  bring  it  to  bear 
S.  £.  by  S.,  sad  steer  N.  W.  by  M.  for  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  and  follow  the  above 
directions. 

KENNEBUNK. — A  buoy  has  been  moored  near  the  Fishing  Rocks,  at  the  mouthof 
this  harbor.  The  Fishing  Rocks  extend  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W .  nearly  half  a  mile  dis- 
tant. The  ehoalest  parts  of  the  rocks  are  bare  at  2  hours'  ebb,  and  may  be  seen  breaking 
at  all  times,  with  a  little  motion  of  the  sea.  On  this  shoal  there  is  aspindle  erected,  with 
a  small  cask  upon  its  end;  the  buoy  bears  from  the  spindle,  N.  £.  by  E.  ^  £.  distant 
about  a  quarter  of  mile ;  from  the  spindle  to  the  piers  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  N. 
E.  by  N.  i  N.  distant  about  1  mile;  Flying  Point,  E.  by  N.  distant  about  three-quarteri 
of  a  mile;  Fox  Point,  N.  E.  distant  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  Boothby  Point,  N. 
by  W.  distant  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  ;  Harding's  Rock,  W.  N.  W.  distant  about 
three-eighths  of  a  mile.  This  is  a  barred  harbor,  z.z.i  cannot  be  entered  except  at  high 
water.  If  bound  to  Kennebunk,  you  must  leave  the  spindle  and  buoy  on  Fishing  Rocks 
on  the  larboard  hand,  about  a  cable's  length  distant,  and  Flying  Point  and  Fox  Point  on 
the  starboard  hand,  and  after  passing  them  steer  north  or  N.  by  W.  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
and  anchor  in  from  3  to  4  fnthoms  water,  sticky  bottom,  where  you  may  lie  safe,  withthe 
wind  from  N.  E.,  N.or  N.  W.  Flying  Point  and  Fox  Point  are  bold,  and  you  may  near 
them  to  within  an  eighth  of  a  mile.  The  above  mentioned  buoy  is  a  spar,  painted  rnd, 
elevated  10  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  is  moored  in  4  fathoms  at  low  water. 
Kennebunk  is  not  frequented  as  a  harbor,  but  vessels  may,  in  stress  of  weather,  run  ia 
and  lie  safe,  with  the  winds  above  mentioned. 

At  the  mouth  of  Kennebunk  Harbor  are  two  piers,  one  on  the  eastern  and  one  on  the 
western  side  of  the  channel,  running  from  the  shore  about  3  or  400  feet  towards  the  bar, 
extending  a  little  beyond  low  water  mark,  with  a  flag-staff  and  beacon  on  the  top,  which 
may  be  seen  about  one  mile  distant.  A  ledge  of  rocks  lies  off  the  harbor,  called  the 
Fishing  Rocks,  distant  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  head  of  the  piers,  between, 
which  is  the  anchoring  ground.  The  ledge  bears  due  south  from  the  head  of  the  piers 
and  is  all  covered  at  high  water.  Vessels  approaching  the  harbor  should  keep  well  to 
the  eastward  of  the  ledge ;  though  there  is  a  tolerable  passage  to  the  westward,  but  it 
ought  not  be  attempted  by  a  large  vessel  without  a  good  pilot. 

Depth  of  water  on  Kennebunk  Bar,  at  low  water,  from  2  'o  3  feet:  rise  and  fall  of 
common  tides  from  8  to  9  feet,  increasing  sometimes  to  10  and  12  on  full  and  change. 
Time  of  high  water,  full  and  change,  llh.  15m. 

PORTSMOUTH  LIGHTHOUSE  is  near  the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  on  the  west 
aide,  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Great  Island,  near  Fort  Constitution.  It  is  90  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  and  shows  a  fixed  light. 

The  following  are  the  bearings  and  distances  of  places  to  be  observed  and  avoided  ad- 
preaching  the  harbor. 

Kitt's  Rocks  buoy  bears  S.  25°  30'  E.  1  mile  2420  feet  from  Portsmouth  light. 

Odiorne's  Point.  S.  14°  17'  46"  W.  1  mile  5120  feet  from  Portsmouth  light. 

GUN-BO\T  SHOAL.— Four  miles  from  Portsmouth  lighthouse,  bearing  S.  4°  W. 
lies  Gun-boat  Shoal,  having  not  less  than  SiJ  fathoms  on  it,  and  that  only  on  its  shoalest 
part,  which  is  small ;  it  runs  E.  N.  E.  apd  W.  S.  W.  about  2  cables'  length,  and  bears 
from  Whale's  Back  light  S.  by  W.  ^  W.:  from  Odiorne's  Point,  S.  h  E. 

Whale's  Back  lighthouse  is  situated  on  the  east  side  of  Portsmouth  Harbor.  Its  height 
is  68  feet  from  low  water  mark.     It  has  two  fixed  lights,  one  ten  feet  below  the  other. 

The  following  are  the  bearings  and  distances  of  places  from  Whale's  Back  light. 

Western  Sister,  N.  89°  41'  E.  1  mile  1310  feet. 

Eastern  Sister,  N.  75°  53'  30"  E.  1  mile  3480  feet.  ' 

Odiorne's  Point.  S.  44°  30'  W.  1  mile  1920  feet.  • 

Phillip's  Rocks  (12  feet)  S.  83°  30'   E.  1  mile  300  feet. 

Kitt's  Rock  buoy  S.  23°  50'  E.  2130  feet.     High  water  11  10.  Springs  12  feet. 

If  you  fall  in  to  the  eastward,  and  make  Cape  Neddock,  and  are  bound  to  Portsmouth, 
when  within  half  a  mile  of  said  cape  your  course  is  S.  S.  W.  four  leagues ;  which  course 
you  will  continue  till  you  bring  Portsmouth  lighthouse  to  bear  N.  and  the  lights  on 
Whale's  Back  to  bear  N.  N.  E.,  then  steer  N.  k  E.  (leaving  Whale's  Back  light  on  the 
starboard  hand,)  having  four  fathoms  water,  until  you  are  abreast  of  Portsmouth  light, 
which  you  may  round  within  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  when  you  must  steer  N.  W.  until  it 
bears  S.  S.  E.,  and  anchor  in  nine  fathoms,  good  bottom. 


•mfm^iifi^i^^flimT^mm^wvmmmmi^tf^^imJ'  " "J'.wp"  'iu  i  nm-i  «p« 


three-qaart«n| 

*e  water,  haj 
»r8  from  Cape 
ce  bears  fron, 
nt,  west,  di). 
iroumnygoon 
•ring  it  to  bear 
low  the  above  | 

t  the  mouth  of 
lalfamiledii- 
Been  breaking, 
^erected,  with 
!"  i  E.  distant 
the  harbor  N, 
three-quarterg 
iby  Point,  N. 

distant  about 

except  at  high 

'i'ishing  Rocks 

Fox  Point  on 

•ter  of  a  mile, 

sate,  with  the 
you  may  near 
•,  painted  red, 
I  at  low  water. 
Bather,  run  ia 

nd  one  on  the 
wards  the  bar, 
he  top,  which 
•or,  called  the 
iers,  between, 
d  of  the  piers 
keep  well  to 
Bstward,  but  it 

ise  and  fall  of 
ill  and  change. 

,  on  the  west 
feet  above  the 

id  avoided  ad- 
light. 
;bt. 

ring  S.  4°  W. 
n  Its  shoniest 
;th,  and  bears 

or.  Its  height 
r  the  other, 
k  light. 


2  feet. 

Portsmouth, 
which  course 
the  lights  on 
I  light  on  the 
smouth  light, 
^.  W.  until  it 


tit  •'  *     ;; 

'"  „  "■.■*  ••'■■'  ».,/ 


^/:'/////>//v'//  /i>r  ////• .  hmrimn   tjJlViLL. 


iW    «  "  /,.     „  "'  „ ...     " 

i'iit.-A",*:.         1 1      '■•'     »  ■''»  if-i  *'V        '^V'"'"'"/' 

.;     "■    "      my^  "  "■■•'■' 

■''       a  II  ,      ^^,\iUiiiti. 

4\ 


'ihlil  I  \ 


'.^- 


^f,,;''<'"Vjy,%..  Klin  il.w/. 


!        n.w..ia'.'iO';' 

Tilt'  Xi'wnhlh/S    tlh-  HI    /ilthi'tllx    tYihh'Jtt'    /'■'•     '■■///.•/ 
I'lmilih'H  s/'l-lti,/  tu/rx    io/'l 
JJii/h  />"'     //'•    rl . 

i\nHiitt>ii    ih-iip    /•."      7  .. 


'l.TlhinI  ,1'iT' 


C^mi.^iy/TjLiMi 


il^ip 


mmm 


1 


futt/nfi'if  /i>r  t/tf  ./nit-riiyiti  t'lUixf  f*Jit'f .  tti 


:i'/     / 


"        "  "*     •''•■'  u  -. 


'i. 


:!M) 


../ "  .1 


..N*' 


~«.«-' 


.y- 


,1 


■J'"  .' 

>^    .f  "    "-        a  '"  „  5cs'       ^ 

/■/    «.''•<  n:,  lo'i        ^^/■'i.</iiii,/ / 

la  y-t 


lit 


111 


.•»/■' 


,..',v*'<""''/r<' 


ii-i 


■::,  -I  li     a 
1.'-'     j,;j"'»/  '' 

,7     y/ 


,^ 


^^ 


///(■  .vvv///*///.yjf   til,- til  /iilfu'iiix  ti'i/uf"/ /»•  A 
t'ifiiniioit  \fritu/  ////,'.»'    A^/,"' 


,.    "■'•i.,.„,        r,  \4.i  :,  "•        ■  >>''  .,  .,  ••  r'     ,,  >i<;\    :! 

■     ,  7  \tJ      ,  III  ^     -^.r.rl 


X' 


./ 


lillti  lii'ill  Sutilll 


/    W//;;/  ,/,l' 


XJL:li>Iv:..LBLIMIliZL 


T 


mmff 


VPn 


"I'v  l/ir  .liinriiilii   li'iixlf'il,<l.  /ti„^/ii/^\ 


.,,■,>'" 


9       .,  V 
"     „  ;    '        ^ 

V  " 


/I 


:!M)!l''!^S^l()!'■■M'l  I 


.1  .//,■<«..<(/ 1         / 


'■r.si  siiii'iK 


7? 


.<>•< 


«', 


^fUl'l""'VX'.-.hiltUI.»/<s 


^^a' 


4  f 


i 


\ 


y 


/ 


i-t 


t'i 


14 


II 


X 


I 

/     I 


HI  I'x'^tl   >il<iul 


\ 


\  \ 


Var.  10  W.  1847. 


[EL-2lXJllui>:OiiaiTJ2i!ZA^^ 


ullviilin  Si  <!li'.sH  ■ 


■MlMMilMklMtfi 


maim 


Lightfu 


oz 


Pipij.  m^mmii^!mmmipiimmmm?i^'lfFm^'mmi^nf 


PW«l^»""««P^WI 


I    .iJIIIJil      ...  iHipiJI 


1*^.: 


pS*; 


mmmm 


1      II  •  «  •  <«^pff«aBHP 


'.«:' 


'II 
■« 


K      9 


'Ji 

i 


'A 


^m 


■^"^viiiPiinmNPPiiPiPippp 


mmimmifiimf'mmmmmm 


/••♦\v 


/^' 


9l 


^               N 

5 

J«« 

^••^' 

»» 

■^ 

N 

?. 


L 


?, 


:..!/ 


?» 


t;; 


r 


s^ 


^  /•  ♦/ 


\ 


(r 


!^ 


II   III  wpiwp.  i.ii.ini!w  im 


A  black  spar 

LehnrborJal 
I  ^e  larboard  ha 
X  black  spar 
lliland,  in  ten  ft 
llirboard  hand  i 
I  \  black  spar 
Lfwater,  beari 
harbor,  by  leav 
I  iins  water. 

Two  spar  bu 

im:  a  white  b\ 

lliiiof  on  Jamais 

Ifreek  Harbor, 

Uill  have  five  fi 

hredfeetdista 

I  Alter  passing 

I  in  five  fii^horas 

1  running  about 

IJ.  B.  Hick 

I  df  water  oninj 

I  ite  eastward  c 

kyW.  4  W., 

uDtii  White  Ts 

I  until  Portsmoi 

You  may  al 

I  ward  of  them 

I  W.  until  Port 

light  on  the  at 

to  the  eastwai 

ward  further 

1  Shoals,  give  \ 

then  run  N.  h 

On  the  east 

S.  i  W.,  one 

a  black  buoy ; 

200  yards,  an 

fathoms  wiitei 

Between  K 

of  about  500 

When  you 

Salvages,  brir 

course,  you  v 

by  bringing  tl 

Portsmouth  1 

If  you  are 

league  from  I 

four  leagues 

Diust  be  cure 

ISLES  C 

ety,  aided  bj 

towns,  a  me( 

White  Isl 

87  feet  abovi 

that  time  a  1 

The  follo\ 

BOUth-WHSte 

to  N.  W.,  n 

is  a  reef  thi 

you  must  gi 

the  N.  W. 

In  runnin 

ward  or  eii 

Ledge. 

BearinfTS 
distant  74  i\ 
eighths  t)f 
lights,  S.  i 


<l«npH«l 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


157 


f^  black  Bpar  buoy  has  been  placed  on  Cod  Rock,  near  Fort  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  Buoyi. 
Lebnrbor,  in  13  feet  of  water.     Vessels  passing  into  the  harbor,  by  leaving  this  buoy  on 
Lg  larboard  hand  thirty  feet  distant  will  have  six  fathoms  of  water. 

X  black  spar  buoy  has  also  been  placed  at  the  ledge,  at  the  N .  E.  of  Amazun's  or  Goat 
lliland.  in  ten  feet  water.  Vessels  passing  up  the  harbor,  by  leaving  this  buoy  on  the 
IlirbOBrd  hand  thirty  feet  distant,  will  have  seven  fnthoms  water. 

I  li  black  spar  buoy  has  also  been  placed  on  the  eastern  edge  of  sunken  rocks,  in  ten  feet 
|,f  wnter,  bearing  about  east  from  the  monument  on  said  rocks-     Vessels  passing  up  tho  ' ' 

harbor,  by  leaving  this  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand  forty  feet  distant  will  have  seven  fath- 
I  oiDS  water. 

Two  spar  buoys  have  also  been  placed  as  guides,  in  entering  Spruce  Creek  Harbor, 
Ira:  a  white  buoy  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  Hick's  Rock,  in  thirteen  feet  water,  and  a  black 
lliiioy  on  Jnmainji  Point,  (Tiefethen's  Island)  in  ten  feet  water.  Vessels  entering  Spruce 
If'eek  Harbor,  by  leaving  the  white  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand  one  hundred  feet  distant, 
Uill  have  live  fathoms  water,  and  by  leaving  the  blnck  buoy  on  the  larboard  band  one  hun- 
I  (jred  feet  distant,  will  have  three  and  a  half  fathoms  of  water. 

I  Atler  passing  the  two  last  mentioned  buoys  about  one  hundred  feet,  vessels  may  anchor 

ligfive  fiithonis  of  water,  in  good  muddy  bottom;  and  by  keeping  in  mid-channel,  and 

running  about  north,  may  anchor  in  the  creek  in  five  or  six  fathoms  of  water. 

I  N.  B.  Hick's  Rocks  are  under  water  mostly  at  about  two-thirds  tide;  and  the  depths 

I  of  water  named  in  the  preceding  directions  were  taken  at  low  water.     If  coming  from 

I  ihe  eastward  of  the  Isles  of  Shoals  in  the  night,  bring  Portsmouth  light  to  bear  N.  W. 

by  W.  4  W.,  which  course  will  corry  you  clear  of  Duck  Island.     Continue  this  course 

until  White  Island  light  bears  S.  S.  W.,  when  haul  up  W.  by  N.,  and  continue  that  course 

I  until  Portsmouth  light  bears  N.,  when  you  may  run  for  it  with  safety. 

You  may  also,  if  coming  from  sea,  and  make  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  and  are  to  the  east- 
I  ward  of  them,  run  for  them  until  within  one  mile  of  the  eastern  island,  then  steer  W.  N. 
W'  until  Portsmouth  light  bears  N.,  then  follow  your  directions,  passing  Whale's  Back 
light  on  the  starboard  hand.  Bert''  ,^  into  Portsmouth  Harbor,  it  is  not  prudent  to  stand 
to  the  eastward  further  than  to  'ornig  the  light  to  bear  N.  by  W.  4  W.,  or  to  the  west- 
I  ward  further  thon  to  bring  it  to  bear  N.  If  you  are  to  the  westward  of  the  Isles  of 
Shoals,  give  White  Island  light  n  berth  of  one  mile  and  a  half,  bring  it  to  bear  E.,  and 
then  run  N.  by  W.  for  Portsmouth  light.  9  miles  distant. 

On  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  lies  Kitt's  Rock,  on  which  is  a  buoy,  and 
S,  4  W.,  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse,  lie  Steilman's  Rocks,  over  which  is 
a  bJHck  buoy  ;  both  rocks  are  under  water.  Give  both  buoys  a  good  berth,  Kitt's  buoy 
200  yards,  and  Steilman's  100  yards,  and  there  is  no  danger,  as  you  will  have  full  five 
fathoms  witter. 

Between  Kitt's  Rocks  and  the  Western  Sister,  lie  Phillip's  Rock's,  occupying  an  area 
of  about  500  feet  by  900  feet,  with  11,  12,  and  i:?  foet  water  on  them. 

When  you  come  from  the  S.  W.  and  make  Cape  Ann,  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  Dry 
Salvages,  bring  them  to  bear  S.  by  E.,  and  steer  N.  by  W.  or  N.  4  W.  In  entering  this 
course,  you  will  make  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  from  wliencoyou  may  take  a  new  departure, 
by  bringing  the  lighthouse  to  bear  E.  distant  one  and  a  half  mile,  and  run  N.  by  W.  for 
Portsmouth  light. 

If  you  are  bound  to  the  eastward  from  Portsmouth  Harbor,  you  steer  S.  by  E.  one 
league  from  the  lighthouse,  then  steer  N.  N.  E.  for  Old  York  or  Capo  Neddock,  which  is 
four  leagues  from  Portsmouth;  but  if  tho  wind  should  come  from  the  northward,  you 
must  be  careful  of  York  Ledge. 

ISLES  OF  SHOALS. — By  the  benevolence  of  the  Massachuj'Jtts  Missionary  Soci-  Isles  of 
ety,  aided  by  subscriptions  of  several  gentlemen  in  Newburyport  and  the  neighboring  Sfioals. 
towns,  a  meeting-house  has  been  erected  on  Star  Island  (one  of  the  above  islundn.) 

White  Island  lighthouse  is  built  on  the  westernmost  inland  of  the  Isles  of  Shoals  ;  it  is 
87  feet  above  tiie  level  of  the  sea,  and  it  revolves  in  3  minutes  15  seconds,  showing  in 
that  time  n  red  and  white  light. 

The  following  is  the  o  ascription  and  relative  situation  of  the  islands :  White  Island  (the 
south- westernmost  island)  is  a  rocky  island,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  length, from  S.  E. 
to  N.  W.,  and  about  one  mile  and  thiee-qunrters  distont  from  the  meeting-house.  There 
is  a  reef  that  extends  about  one-fehird  of  a  mile  from  the  N.  W.  end,  which,  in  passing, 
you  must  give  a  good  berth.  The  S.  E.  end  bears  from  the  meeting-house,  S.  W.  i  S., 
the  N.  W.  end  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

In  running  in  for  this  light  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  when  coming  from  the  south- 
ward or  eastward,  except  Cedar  Island  Ledgu,  Andarson's  Rock  and  White  Island 
Ledge. 

BearinfTS  from  White  Island  Li^/t/Aouse.-— Portsmouth  lighthouse  bears  N.  N.  W.  Bearinf^s 
distant  74  miles.     Square  Rock  lies  directly  in  the  ranse,  distant  from  White  Island  five-  from   While 
eighths  of  a  mile.     Boon   Island  light,  N.  E.  by    N.  distant  12   miles.     Capo    Ann  Island 
lights,  S.  I  W.  distant  194  rniles.     Rye  meeting-house,  N.  W.  by  W.  4    W.  distont  lighthouse 


.  ^.^'U 


n^mt^mmmmmmimilfi^ 


168 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

9  miles.     Star  Tglond  meeting-house,  N.  E.  distant  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.    North-west  I 
point  of  Hog  Island,  N.  by  E.  i  E.     Cedar  Island  Ledge  E.  by  N.  i  N.  distant  1  rnile 
Anderson's  Ledge  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  distant  Xj^  mile.     White  Island  Ledgn,  W.  S.  w'l 
distant  one-tbird  of  a  mile. 

Londoner's  (or  Lounging)  Island  lies  about  li  mile  to  the  northward  of  White  Island 
is  about  five-eighths  of  a  mile  in  length,  from  S.  to  N.,  and  is  high  at  each  end  :  in  high 
tides  the  middle  is  sometimes  covered  ;  a  number  of  roclis  lie  close  about  the  island  in  ' 

lich  are  always  bare.    The  south  end  bears  W.  from 


almost  every  direction,  some  of  whi 


the  meeting-house;  the  north  end  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  about  half  a  mile  distant.  About 
half  way  between  this  island  and  Star  Island,  lies  a  rock,  which  is  bare  at  low  water-  it 
bears  from  the  meeting-house  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  one-third  of  a  mile  distant. 

Star  Idland  (on  which  the  meeting-housK  stands)  is  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile  Iq 
length  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.,  and  about  half  a  mile  in  breadth  ;  it  is  covered  with  build- 
ings on  the  north  side.  The  meeting-house  stands  on  an  eminence  a  little  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  middle  of  the  island;  is  12  feet  high  from  the  foundation  to  the  roof;  to  tiie 
top  of  the  steeple  is  30  feet  more  ;  the  whole  height  from  the  surface  of  the  water  is  nbout 
65  feet;  it  is  painted  white,  and  the  steeple  is  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  building;  it 
stimds  fronting  the  west,  and  may  be  seen  at  a  distance  of  8  or  9  leagues,  in  almost  any 
direction  at  sea;  it  bears  from  Thatcher's  Island  lights  (Cape  Ann)  N.  E.  6  leagues  dis- 
tant; from  Pigeon  Hill  N.  bj  E.  6  leagues  distant;  from  Newburyport  lighthouses,  N. 
E.  i  £.  6  leagues  disttmt ;  from  Portsmouth  lighthouse,  S.  S.  E.  <i  E.,  three  leagues  dis- 
tant; from  the  western  Agamcnticus  mountain,  S.  ^  £. ;  from  the  eastern  do.,  S.  ^  E. 
from  Boon  island  lighthouse,  S.  W.  d  S.,  4i  leagues  distant;  from  Boon  Island  Ledge, 
(which  lies  one  league  E.  from  Boon  Island,)  S.  W.  by  W.  4|  leagues  distant.  Off  the 
south  end  of  this  island,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  lies  Anderson's 
'  Rock,  which  is  bare  at  half  tide ;  in  passing  give  it  a  good  berth ;  it  lies  fi-om  the  meeting- 

house 8.  S.  E. 

Cedar  Island  is  small,  and  about  one-third  of  a  mile  in  length  from  east  to  west,  situ- 
ated between  Star  and  Smutty-nose  Islands.  The  east  end  of  Cedar  Island  bears  from 
the  meeting-house  E.  ^  N.,  and  the  west  end  E.  N.  E.  i)  E.,  three-eighths  of  a  mile  dis- 
tant. A  rock  lies  otf  the  S .  E.  end  of  this  island,  half  a  mile  distant,  bare  at  half  tide,  bear- 
ing from  the  meeting-house  E.  by  S. 

Between  Cedar  and  Smutty-nose  Islands,  the  government,  a  few  years  since,  erected  a 
sea  wall,  to  afford  a  shelter  to  vessels  from  easterly  gales,  and  to  make  the  roadstead  ofT 
the  northerly  side  of  Star  Island  more  secure;  the  violence  of  the  sea  in  a  short  time 
greatly  injured  the  wall,  so  that  the  object  of  its  erection  has  been  but  partially  effected. 

Smutty-nose  Island  is  about  one  mile  in  length  from  east  to  west,  and  about  half  a  mile 
in  breadth  ;  at  the  west  end  is  a  harbor,  ..tilloil  Haley's  Cove,  where  15  or  20  smiill  ves- 
sels may  lie  safe  from  all  winds.  There  are  several  buildings  near  this  harbor.  There  is 
a  fine  channel  between  this  island  and  Hog  Island,  which  has  water  sufficient  for  any  ves- 
sel, keeping  near  the  middle  of  the  passage.  The  west  end  of  Smutty-nose  Island  bears 
from  the  meeting-house  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  the  east  end  E.  N.  E.  about  five-eighths  of  a 
mile  distant. 

Hog  Island  is  a  high  island  lying  to  the  northward  of  Smutty-nose  Island  ;  is  about  one 
"'     mile  in  length  from  E.  to  W.,  and  five-eighths  of  a  mile  fron»  N.  to  S.     The  west  end 
lies  from  the  meeting-house  N.  by  W.  i  W. ;  east  end  of  do.,  N.  N.  E.  seven-eighths  of 
a  mile  distant. 

Duck  i»<land  (the  northernmost  island)  is  a  long,  low,  rocky  island ;  some  parts  of  it  are 
covered,  at  high  water,  with  rocks  projecting  in  every  direction,  especially  at  the  N.  W. 
>        ,    end,  wnere  a  ledge  runs  off  half  a  mile.     It  is  the  most  dangerous  of  any  of  the  Isles  of 
Shoals,  and  ought  carefully  to  be  avoided;  it  is  about  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  in  length 
from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.     The  east  end  bears  from  the  meeting-house  N.  N.  E.  |  K.    The 
west  end  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  about  3i  miles  distant.     [US^  See  the  Plate.] 
Newburyport     NEWBURifPORT  LlGHrS,  on  Plum  Island,  so  called,  is  situated  between  the 
lighU,  month  of  Mttrrimack  Kiveron  the  north,  and  Ipswich  Bay  on  the  south,  and  is  separated 

from  the  main  land  by  a  narrow  sound.  Its  length  is  about  8  j  miles,  and  its  width,  from 
the  sea  to  the  main,  not  more  than  500  paces.  On  the  north  end  of  the  island  are  two 
Lighthouses,  lighthouses,  conbiining  fixed  lights,  which  are  constantly  lighted  at  night,  and  so  construct- 
ed as  to  be  easily  rnoveJ,  a  circumstance  requisite  from  the  frequent  shifting  of  the  bar 
at  the  mouth  of  Newburyport  Harbor. 

Badger's  Rocks  boar  N.  W.  i  N.  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  half  a  mile  and  are  cov- 
ered at  two-thirds  Hood,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  Black  Rocks  bear  N. 
W.  from  the  lighthouses,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant,  and  are  always  dry,  which  you 
also  leave  on  your  starboard  hand.  Half-tide  Rocks  (on  which  is  placed  a  pier)  boar  W. 
by  S.  I  S.  from  Black  Rocks,  distant  li  mile,  and  bare  at  half  tide,  which  you  leave  on 
your  larboard  hand.  North  Rocks  (which  also  have  a  pier  on  them)  bear  W.  by  S.  from 
Black  Rock!4,  distant  1^  mile,  and  are  seen  only  at  very  low  tides,  which  you  leave  OD 
!»,■.,  your  starboard  hand,  between  which  and  Half-tide  Rocks  ia  the  channel. 


PPWP 


mm 


""I"  'u'"'iii!ffp{pipipipii|ppw«ipniiiip|||^ 


It  to  west,  situ- 
md  bears  from 
i  of  a  mile  dis- 
half  tide,  bear- 


;  is  about  one 
The  west  end 
veu-eighths  of 


li^tffi^-m^ 


WP 


•^ 


iimmmm^ 


mmmmmr^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


159 


To  facilitate  the  means  of  conveying  immediate  asaiatance  to  those  unfortunate  mari- 
ners who  may  be  wroclied  on  this  iBJarid,  a  number  of  gentlemen  were  incorporated  for  , 
the  purpose,  anil  Imve  completed  a  bridge  and  turnpike  road  from  Newburyport  to 
Plumb  Island.  This  road  leads  in  a  south-easterly  direction  from  Newburyport,  and  the 
Ijricleo  across  Plumb  Island  near  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  Seal  Island.  > 
A  hotel  has  been  erected  at  the  east  end  of  the  bridge,  within  100  rods  of  the  sea  shore, 
one  mile  south  from  the  lights.  The  hotel  is  painted  white,  has  three  white  chimneys, 
and  may  serve  as  a  landmark  to  the  seaman. 

It'  a  vessel,  by  stress  of  weather,  should  be  obliged  to  run  ashore  on  this  island,  and 
the  master  can  make  any  choice  of  place,  it  is  most  eligible  to  run  on  as  nearly  opposite 
this  house  as  possible,  as  assistance  and  shelter  can  be  more  promptly  afforded,  and  the 
communication  more  direct  with  Newburyport. 

It  rarely  happens  that  any  life  is  lost  on  this  beach  in  attempting  to  escape  from  the 
wreck,  when  the  crew  remain  on  board  till  low  tide.  Unless  the  vessel  is  in  imminent 
danger  of  going  to  pieces  immediatel}',  the  seameu  should  never  take  to  their  boat. 

In  a  course  nearly  N.  from  the  lighthouses  on  Plumb  Island,  and  about  half  a  mile 
distant,  across  the  mouth  of  Merrimack  River,  is  the  southern  extremity  of  Salisbury 
Beach,  called  Salisbury  Point.  From  this  point  a  sand  beach  extends  on  the  verge  of  the 
ocean,  without  an  inlet  or  interruption  of  any  consequence,  until  it  reaches  Hampton 
River.  'J'liis  beach  is  connected  with  the  main  land  by  a  salt  marsh  of  considerable  ex- 
tent, intersected  by  a  variety  of  small  rivulets  and  creeks,  which  render  it  impossible  for 
a  shipwrecked  mariner  to  reach  the  inhabited  parts  of  Salisbury.  Here,  too,  the  hapless 
seaman  is  sometimes  destined  to  sutler  the  misfortunes  of  shipwreck,  and  to  reach  a  des- 
olate and  inhospitable  shore,  only  to  aggravate  the  horrors  of  his  death.  If  he  can  attain 
the  first  and  wished  for  object,  in  evading  the  jaws  of  the  angry  ocean,  yet  he  finds  him- 
Bolf  a  solitary  wanderer  on  the  coast,  without  shelter  and  without  sustenance  ;  and  in  his 
fruitless  search  for  them,  must  inevitably  perish.  As  the  N.  E.  storms  are  generally 
most  fatal  to  vessels  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  Salisbury  beach  is  not  so  often  a  place  of 
shipwreck  as  Plumb  Island. 

NEWBURYPORT. — When  you  come  round  Cape  Ann,  and  are  two  miles  to  the  Newburyport 
Dortiiward  of  the  Dry  Salvage  Rock,  bring  said  rock  to  bear  S.  E.,  and  steer  N.  W.  by 
W.  3j  leagues,  which  course  and  distance  will  carry  you  up  with  Newburyport  Bar. 
lu  rntinirig  for  the  bar  from  the  eastward,  strangers  should  not  approach  too  near  Hamp- 
ton Harbor,  as  off  the  mouth  of  it  lie  several  sunken  rocks.  Hampton  Harbor  lies  about 
5  miles  north  from  the  southern  extremity  of  Salisbury  Point,  between  which  and  Hamp- 
ton Harbor,  N.  by  E.  4  E.  from  the  lights  on  Plumb  Island,  3  miles  distant,  lies  another 
dangerous  rock,  having  only  .'Ji  feet  water  on  it.  If  you  go  no  further  to  the  westward 
than  for  the  lights  on  Plumb  Island  to  bear  S.  W.,  there  is  no  danger  from  either  of  the 
above  mentioned  rocks,  but  that  course  to  the  bar  would  run  you  on  the  north  breakers ; 
therefore  you  must  bring  the  lights  to  bear  W.  by  S.,  and  anchor  in  11  or  12  fathoms 
water,  if  the  tide  will  not  permit  your  coming  in.  No  vessel,  in  coming  in,  ought  to  go 
nearer  the  south  breaker  than  7  fathoms  water,  nor  nearer  the  north  breaker,  in  coming 
from  the  eastward,  than  9  fathoms.  There  are  several  pilots  belonging  to  this  harbor, 
who  will,  if  possible,  be  outside  the  bar,  to  take  command  of  any  vessel  wanting  their 
BssidtHuco.  If  they  cannot,  you  must  keep  the  lights  in  range,  and  run  for  them  till 
within  a  cable's  length  of  the  eastern  light,  when  you  must  haul  to  the  westward,  and 
anchor  between  the  two  lights,  in  4  fathoms  water.  A  vessel  that  draws  10  feet  water 
may  come  in  at  two-thirds  flood.  They  should  always  keep  to  the  windward  of  the  bar, 
unless  the  wind  should  be  fair.  If  tlie  sea  is  so  great  as  to  prevent  the  pilot's  getting 
over,  a  signal  will  be  made  by  him,  when  you  must  run  direct  for  his  boat,  keeping  the 
lights  in  range,  which  will  carry  you  safe  over.  This  bar  is  constantly  shifting,  and 
should  not  he  attempted  without  a  pilot,  unless  in  a  case  oj  great  necessity.  If  your 
cables  and  anchors  are  not  good,  you  may  bring  the  western  lighthouse  to  bear  S.  E.  by 
S., and  run  N.  W.  by  N.  for  Salisbury  Point;  but  as  soon  as  you  make  said  point,  you 
must  haul  up  N.  W.,  which  course  will  carry  you  clear  of  Badger's  Rocks,  Black  Rocks, 
and  the  Hump  Sands.     Across  the  channel,  from  the  Hump  Sands  to  Black  Rock  Creek,  ' 

lie  7  or  8  piers,  on  which  are  from  7  to  2J  feet  water,  at  low  water,  which  were  sunk  in 
the  year  1776,  and  have  not  since  been  removed:  the  mark  to  pass  between  them  is  to 
bring  the  beacon,  at  the  west  end  of  the  town  of  Newburyport,  (which  may  be  distinctly 
seen  in  clear  weather,)  over  the  south  corner  of  the  north  meeting-house.  The  Hump 
Sands  lie  S.  W.  from  Salisbury  Point,  which  makes  the  channel  very  narrow  and  difficult 
for  strangers.  When  you  pass  the  Black  Rocks,  you  must  haul  up  W.  by  S.  i  S., 
which  will  bring  you  in  channel  way,  and  good  anchorage.  And  if  it  be  in  the  night, 
or  dark  weather,  when  you  judge  yourself  about  half  a  mile  from  Black  Rock,  you  may 
come  to  with  safety.  I  would  recommend  to  all  masters,  whether  they  belong  to  New- 
buryport or  not,  to  avoid  attempting  that  port  in  a  gale  of  easterly  wind,  except  they  are 
well  acquainted,  and  have  a  good  prospect  of  getting  in,  as  no  pilot  can  get  over  the  bar 
when  it  blows  a  gale  from  the  eastward.    And  if  you  should  make  Cape  Ann  lights,  and 


^^mmmm 


'mmmimmin 


"r^f^mt 


mm*'^  wummmifimmimm 


160  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

bring  them  or  the  Dry  Salvages  to  bear  S.  by  E.,  you  may  run  with  safety  N.  by 
W.,   or   N.  i   W.  distant  8  leagues  from  (V.pe    Ann  to    Portsmouth.      In  running! 
the  above  course,  you  will  make  the  Isles  of  Shoals,  if  it  is  any  way  clear,  from  which 
you  take  a  new  departure ;  when  you  pass  tlie  said  isiinds,  you  bring  Star  Island,  (oq 
which  the  meeting-house  stands,)  to  bear  S.  S.  E.,  and  then  steer  N.  N.  W,  distant  from 
said  island  3  leagues  to  Portsmouth  ;  or  give  Wh'te  Island  light  a  berth  of  a  mile  and  a 
half,  bringing  it  to  bear  east,  and  then  run  N.  by  W.  for  Portsmouth  light.     White  Island 
is  the  south-westernmost  island.     There  is  a  very  good  harbor,  in  the  Isles  of  Shoalg 
from  the  wind,  from  north-easterly  round  to  southerly,  and  you  may  lie  land-lorked  with  ' 
any  of  them ;  but  if  the  wind  hauls  to  the  S.  W.,  or  W.  N.  W.,  you  may  run  in  between 
Smutty-nose  Island,  which  has  a  wind-mill  on  it,  and  Hog  Island,  where  there  is  water  I 
enough  for  a  first  rate  man-of-war,  and  where  you  anchor,  have  12  fathoms,  muddy 
bottom. 

When  you  come  from  the  eastward,  with  the  wind  E.,  or  E.  S.  E.,  with  which  wind 
you  cannot  weather  Cape  Ann,  and  you  are  to  the  northward  of  the  Isles  of  Shuala 
your  only  shift  is  to  Portsmouth,  and  you  are  obliged  to  run  so  far  to  the  westward  as  to 
bring  said  port  to  bear  N.  N.  W.,  as,  generally,  the  wind  at  E.,  at  sea,  hauls  two  or  three 
points  to  the  northward,  which  makes  it  a  head  wind.  [See  the  PLATE.] 
Signal*  for  SIGNALS  FOR  VESSELS,  when  in  sight,  supposed  to  be  bound  to  Newburyport, 
Vessels,  and  the  sea  is  so  large  on  the  bar  that  pilots  cannot  get  out  to  their  assistance. 

When  a  vessel  comes  into  the  bay,  and  cannot  come  over  the  bar  at  high  water,  owing 
to  insufficiency  of  the  tide,  a  Red  Square  Flag  will  be  hoisted,  and  a  pendant  under  it, 
and  as  soon  as  those  signals  are  seen  from  the  vessel  in  the  bay,  she  must  keep  otf,  and 
try  some  other  port. 
r  When  the  usual  signals  for  vessels  are  kept  up,  the  vessel  must  lay  off  and  on  at  the 

f  bar,  keeping  to  windward,  until  signals  be  made  for  her  to  come  in ;  and  when  it  is  a 

suitable  time  to  come  over  the  bar,  a  Red  Square  Flag  will  be  hoisted  at  half  mast ;  she 
may  then  come  in,  keeping  the  lights  in  range. 

When  a  Pendant  is  hoisted  half  mast,  the  vessel  may  come  in,  keeping  the  lights  a 
little  open  to  the  northward. 

When  a  Blue  Burgee  is  hoisted  half  mast,  the  vessel  may  come  in,  keeping  the  lights  a 
little  open  to  the  southward. 

When  a  vessel  is  seen  in  the  bay,  and  does  not  come  in  before  night  comes  on,  the  fol- 
lowing lights  will  be  made,  viz  : 

For  a  vessel  to  keep  off,  and  not  attempt  to  come  in  over  the  bar  during  the  night,  a 
Lantern  will  be  hoisted  to  the  top  of  the  flag-staff. 

When  there  is  a  proper  time  for  a  vessel  to  come  in  over  the  bar  during  the  night,  two 
Lanterns  will  be  hoisted,  one  at  the  top  of  the  flng-staff,  and  the  other  half  mast  high. 
The  vessel  must  then  lay  off  and  on  at  the  bar,  until  a  light  is  made  in  the  eastern  light- 
house, at  a  window  about  eight  feet  below  the  lantern.  Toe  vessel  may  then  come  over 
the  bar,  keeping  the  lights  in  range,  and  when  she  gets  abreast  of  the  upper  light,  there  is 
good  anchornge. 

The  signal  for  n  vessel  in  distress,  is  a  White  Square  Flag,  with  a  large  black  ball  in  the 
centre,  hoisted  half  mast  high. 
Ipswich.  IPSWICH. — There  are  two  lighthouses  on  Ipswich  Beach;  they  bear  from  each 

other  W.  i  N.,  and  E.  \  S.  Keeping  the  two  lights  in  one  will  lead  over  the  bnr,  in  the 
best  water,  a  little  to  the  south  of  the  buoy.  Run  in  close  to  the  beach  and  follow  it 
close  up  to,  to  avoid  the  northern  spit  on  the  starboard  hand  ;  run  up  round  the  first  high 
bluff  head,  where  will  be  found  safe  anchorage.  There  are  8  feet  water  on  the  bar  at 
low  water. 
Light,  Tlie  western  light  at  the  entrance  of  Ipswich  Harbor  is  a  revolving  one,  the  eastern 

one  fixed. 

A  cimal  connects  this  harbor  with  that  of  Gloucester.     It  is  about  130  rods  in  length, 
30  feet  wide,  and  has  fur  its  depth  about  the  whole  flow  of  the  tide,  which  is  about  12  feet 
in  spring  tides,  and  8  feet  in  neap. 
AntilsSquam     ANNIS  SQUAM  LIGHTHOUSE  is  a  wooden  building,  of  octagonal  form,  about 
Lighthouse-    40  feet  high,  containing  a  fixed  light,  elevated  about  50  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  wa- 
ter at  common  high  tides.     It  is  painted  white,  and  may  be  known  by  being  lower  than 
any  other  lighthouse  on  the  coast  of  Massachusetts,  and  its  inland  situation.     It  bnars 
from  Portsmouth  lighthouse  about  S.  by  W.,  distant  8  leagues,  and  from  Newburyport 
Bar  S.  S.  E.  3i  leagues. 
AnnisSquam     ANNIS  SQUA.M  HARBOR,  IN  IPSWICH  BAY.— The  masters  of  vessels  outof 
Harbor,  in      Newburyport  should  generally  be  acquainted  with  the  harbor  of  Squam;  and  fur  their 
Ipsunch  Bay.  benefit  a  plan  of  the  harbor  has  been  taken  from  actual  survey,  which  will  be  of  the 
greatest  importance,  when  obliged  to  make  a  harbor  from  Ipswich  Bay,  through  stress  of 
weather.     When  a  vessel  ot  anchor  off  Newburyport  Bar,  cannot  get  into  port,  or  parts 
a  cablo,  with  the  wind  at  N.  E.,  or  E.  N.  E.,  if  she  can  carry  double-reefed  sails,  she 
may  run  S.  S.  E,  2k  leagues,  which  course,  if  made  good,  will  carry  her  a  little  to  the 


■■■ 


■^WPBUPWP 


■W4 


wfety  N.  byl 
In  running! 
,  from  which  I 
tr  Island,  (on  I 
;  distant  from  I 
a  mile  and  a  I 
White  Island  I 
lea  of  Shoals,  I 
l-locked  with  I 
n  in  between  i 
here  is  water  I 
iioms,  rauddy  I 

1  which  wind  I 
es  of  Shoals,  I 
estward  as  to  I 
two  or  three  I 

Tewburyport,  I 
;e.  I 

water,  owing 
dant  under  it, 
keep  off,  and 

and  on  at  the  I 
when  it  is  a  ! 
ilf  mast;  she  : 

;  the  lighu  b 

Bg  the  lights  a 

»  on,  the  fol- 

l  the  night,  a 

he  night,  two 
If  mast  high. 
eastern  light- 
en come  over 
light,  there  is 

ick  ball  in  the 

ir  from  each 
le  bnr,  in  the 
and  follow  it 
the  first  high 
on  the  bar  nt 

the  eastera 

)da  in  length, 
about  12  feet 

I  form,  about 
e  of  the  WH- 
g  lower  than 
nn.  It  boars 
'Jewburyport 

vessels  out  of 
and  for  their 
ill  be  of  the 
ugh  stress  of 
port,  or  parts 
fed  Biiils,  she 
little  to  the 


m^^mfmm^^^'W 


^mmHlfP 


r^^jmmmmnmmmm 


..,.,., 


S  ' 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


161 


eastward  of  Squam  Bar ;  and  if  the  weather  is  so  clear  as  to  see  half  a  nile  when  you 
ninke  the  land  to  the  eastward  of  Squam,  you  may  run  within  a  cable's  length  of  the 
gliore ;  your  course  is  S.  S.  W. 

Squnm  Hiir  bears  from  Halibut  Point,  (the  N.  E.  Point  of  Cape  Ann,)  from  W.  S.  ' 
W.  to  S.  W.  distant  about  3j  miles.  In  running  from  Halibut  Point,  you  must  be 
cnrefiil  of  Plumbe  Cove  Ledge,  which  shows  until  near  high  water,  and  bears  from 
Squam  light  N.  N.  E.  distant  1  j  mile.  When  you  have  passed  this  ledge,  you  leave 
a  deep  covu  cHllod  Hodgliin's  Cove,  and  a  long  point  or  nock  of  land,  called  Davis'  Neck, 
oil  your  larboard  hand.  When  up  with  this  n«>ck,  haul  S.  W.,  or  S.  W.  by  W.,  for 
Squnm  Bar. 

Having  made  Halibut  Point,  or  Folly  Cove  Point,  bring  either  of  them  to  bear  south 
from  a  quarter  to  a  half  a  mile  distant  from  them.  Then  run  W.  S.  W.  until  you  bring 
tlie  light  to  bear  S.  If  you  judge  there  is  sufficient  water  on  the  bar,  you  will  then  run 
for  the  light :  you  will  pass  between  the  two  buoys.  The  white  one  is  on  Harraden's 
Rock,  which  you  will  leave  on  the  larboard  hand.  The  black  one  is  on  the  north  spit  of 
tlie  bar,  which  you  will  leave  on  the  starboard  hand.  You  may  pass  close  to  either  of 
tiie  buoys ;  when  you  have  passed  the  black  buoy  20  or  30  rods,  you  may  run  S.  by  W. 
hnlf  W.  which  will  carry  you  close  along  by  the  monument  on  the  Lobster  Rocks, 
which  you  must  leave  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  pass  on  until  abreast  of  Babson's  Point; 
then  a  S.  S.  E.  course  will  bring  you  into  the  harbor.  If  it  is  so  dark  that  the  buoy 
cannot  be  seen,  continue  your  south  course  until  within  60  yards  of  the  light,  then  your 
course  must  be  S.  S.  W.,  which  will  carry  you  abreast  of  Babson's  Point,  on  your  lar- 
board hand,  and  opposite  the  Dry  Bar  Rocks,  on  your  starboard  hand,  then  S.  S.  £.,  as 
before  directed.  The  bar  has  U  feet  of  water  at  low  tide.  If  j'ou  should  judge  there  is 
not  water  enough  on  the  bar  to  carry  your  vessel  over  safe,  you  will  come  to  outside  of 
the  bar,  and  hoist  a  signal  for  assistance,  which  will  come  off  if  possible;  if  not,  a  Hug  will 
be  hoisted  near  the  lighthouse,  when  there  is  water  enough  on  the  bar  for  a  vessel  to  run 
in  safety.  ' 

On  the  Lobster  Rocks  is  a  monument,  12  feet  at  the  base,  17  feet  high,  built  of  stone, 
and  is  7  feet  out  at  high  water.  The  lighthouse  on  Wigwam  Point  bears  from  the  mon- 
ument N.  E.  by  N.  i  N.  distant  one-quarter  mile;  the  black  buoy  placed  outside  the  bar 
beiirs  N.  i  E.  distant  li  mile:  the  White  buoy  near  the  Harraden  Rocks  bears  N.  by  E. 
i  E.  distant  li  mile;  leaving  the  White  Buoy  on  the  larboard  haud,  you  maj' steer  direct 
fur  the  Monument,  course  S.  by  W.  H  W.  The  channel  abreast  of  the  Monument  is 
about  45  fathoms  wide;  the  Monument,  going  in,  is  left  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  may 
be  approached  at  three  fathoms  distant,  and  then  have  two  fathoms  at  low  water ;  the 
Bliick  Buoy,  just  without  the  harbor,  lies  in  10  feet  at  low  water,  and  bears  from  the  light- 
house N.  i  W.,  and  is  to  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  ;  the  White  Buoy  lies  in  lU  feet 
wnteroff  the  N.  W.  side  of  Harraden's  Rocks,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  N.  by  E.  4  E. 
distant  about  one  mile,  which  is  to  be  loft  on  the  larboard  hand.  A  Red  Buoy  is  placed 
otf  the  Plum  Rock  Ledges,  in  three  fathoms  water,  and  bears  from  Squam  light  N.  N.  E. 
distant  14  mile.  On  Squam  Bar,  at  low  water,  there  are  about  6  feet.  High  water, 
full  and  eliange  of  the  moon,  at  11  o'clock. 

SANDif  BAY  PIKR. — If  from  the  southward,  in  passing  outside  Streightsmouth  Sandy  bay 
Island,  be  careful  of  Avery's  Rock,  which  bears  north  from  the  eastern  part  of  Streights-  pier. 
mouth  Island,  about  one-third  of  a  mile  distant.  Run  W.  by  N.  until  you  bring  tlie 
meeting  house  to  bear  S.  W.  by  S.,  then  run  in  for  the  Pier  Head,  in  approaching  which 
iieep  away  u  little,  and  run  in  until  you  can  see  into  the  Pier  Pool;  then  lulf  and  run  in. 
Those  constantly  in  the  habit  of  entering  said  Pool  when  the  wind  is  eastwardly,  make 
up  tlic  hoadsaiUand  keep  up  the  mainsail,  which  enables  them  to  have  command  of  the 
vessels  and  avoid  falling  against  the  wharf  built  out  from  the  beach.  If  from  the  north- 
ward, after  having  passed  Andrew's  Point,  bring  the  meeting-house  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and 
run  for  it.  This  course  will  carry  you  clear  of  Dodge's  Ledge,  which  you  will  leave  on 
the  starboard  hand. 

The  passage  through  Streightsmouth  Gap  is  not  safe,  except  at  nearly  high  water,  as 
there  are  but  three  feet  water  at  low  tide,  and  rocky  bottom. 

C/\.PE  ANN  LIGHTHOUSES  are  built  on  Thatcher's  Island,  which  lies  about  two  Cape  Ann 
miles  uast  of  the  south-east  point  of  Cape  Ann,  and  forms  the  northern  limits  of  Mnssa-  Lighikouset, 
chusetts  Bay.     The  lanterns  are  elevated  about  90  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and 
coiitiiin  fixed  lights.     The  lights  range  when  bearing  N.  by  E.  |  E.,  or  S.  by  W.  J  W., 
and  are  about  one-third  of  a  mile  apart. 

Thatcher's  Island  Ledge  bears  from  the  body  of  the  island  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  E., 
extending  about  two  miles  from  the  island.  After  getting  the  west  light  to  bear  N.  4  W., 
ou  are  to  the  westward  of  the  ledge;  then  haul  to  the  N.  W.  to  bring  the  lights  to  bear 
E.  by  E.,  and  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  for  the  eastern  point,  which  is  about  74  miles  dis- 
tant from  Thatcher's  Island.  Then  your  course  is  W.  by  S.,  distant  74  miles,  for  the 
lights  on  Baker's  Island. 

Seven  to  ten  miles  P..  S.  E.  from  Thatcher's  Island  there  are  3  to  4  small  stony  spots, 
with  10  to  18  fathoms.    There  are  25  and  30  fathoms  inside.  11 


IS 


iwi^wpwjr-^ 


"WW 


nil  luiiiiiRqiipipqi^i" 


162 


\ 
BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cape  Ann.        CAPE  ANN.— When 


the  iiijiht,  bring  them  to  benr 


you  come  from  the  enitward,  and  make  Cape  Ann  lights,  in 
tenr  S.  W.,  and  run  direct  tor  them,  which  course  will  ca'rrv 


carry 


Ten  Pound 
Island 
Lighthouse. 
Cape  Ann 
Harbor. 


you  wilhiti  the  Londoner ;  and  when  yon  puss  the  siiid  rocks  bring  the  two  lights  in  ohh 
at  which  time  they  will  benr  N.  by  E.  |  E.,  and  then  steer  S.  S.  W.  4  W.,  konping  said 
course  Himut  one  mile,  which  will  carry  you  clear  of  Milk  Island,  which  is  very  low,  ntid 
cannot  be  seen  in  a  dark  night.  When  you  judge  yourself  to  the  westward  of  gajd 
island,  you  haul  to  the  westward  until  you  bring  the  lights  to  bear  K.  N.  E..  whtni  you 
must  steer  W.  S.  W.,  about  5  miles,  which  course  will  carry  you  to  Eastern  Point. 
Wli(>n  you  pass  said  point,  keep  your  course  W.  S.  W.  until  you  bring  Nornmn'B  Woe 
winch  is  the  highest  land  on  the  noilli  side  of  tlio  harbor,  to  bear  N.  N.  W.,  then  ruii 
N.  N.  W.  till  you  shut  the  lights  in,  then  N.  N.  E.  will  carry  you  safe  in. 

If  you  want  to  go  inside  the  Salvages,  keep  close  aboard  Halibut  Point,  which  has  a 
tree  on  the  eastern  part  of  it,  and  steer  .S.  S.  E.  for  Streightsmouth  Island  ;  i)ut  bo  care- 
ful to  avoid  Avery's  Rock,  by  keeping  the  lights  on  the  dry  point  of  Stroi^litHuuiuth 
Island  till  you  get  up  close  aboard,  then  haul  round  the  point,  ntid  S.  S.  E.  will  cany  you 
to  the  lights.  To  avoid  the  Londoner,  you  must  keep  the  lights  close  aboard  the  Ixxly  of 
the  island  on  which  they  st4>nd.  The  Londoner  lies  half  a  mile  otT,  breaks  at  all  times 
of  tide,  ii"  quite  dry  at  low  water,  and  bears  t.  S.  E.  from  the  middle  of  Thatcher's  Island. 
A  long  shoal  runs  off  N.  E.  half  a  mile  distant  from  the  Londoner.  Between  iho  Lon- 
doner and  Thatcher's  Island  there  are  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  From  the  Salviigos  to 
Halibut  Point  and  Sandy  Bay,  there  lies  a  large  spot  of  flat  ground,  which  at  low  water 
will  take  up  a  small  vessel.  Outside  the  Salvages  is  very  bold.  Halibut  Point  bears  from 
the  Salvaijes  W.  N.  W.  2h  miles  distant ;  and,the  Salvages  bear  from  the  lights  N.  N.  E. 
3  miles  distant. 

In  sailing  from  Cape  Ann  lights  to  Cape  Ann  Harbor,  you  will  first  open  Brace'sCove 
before  yon  come  up  with  the  harbor ;  which  will,  when  open,  bear  N.  N.  W.,  which  you 
must  avoid.  Cape  Ann  Harbor  lies  one  mile  farther  to  the  westward,  and  when  open 
bears  N.  N.  E. 

Ten  Pound  Island  lies  in  the  harbor  of  Cape  Ann.  There  is  a  lighthouse  on'it,  con- 
taining a  fixed  light,  45  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

CAl'E  ANN  HARBOR.— Vessels  bound  for  Cape  Ann  Harbor,  and  falling  into 
the  eastward  of  the  eastern  point,  on  which  a  lighthouse,  is  erected,  contnining  a 
fixed  lialit,  must  give  the  point  a  berth  of  aSout  one  mile,  and  when  tho  li;-ht  on 
Ten  Pound  Island  bears  N.  N.  E.,  are  then  '  lie  westward  of  the  ledgo  that  extends 
off  from  the  point,  on  which  is  a  spar  buoy,  head  painted  red,  in  10  feet  water  at 

low  water,  bearing  from  Tfm  Pound  Rock  E  i  S.,  and  may  steer  direct  for  the  li^lit, 
This  ledge  bears  from  the  lijiht  on  Ten  Pound  Island  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  is  uLout  half 
or  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Running  this  N.  N.  E.  course,  will  carry 
them  between  Ten  Pound  Island  and  Ten  Pound  Ledge,  which  bears  from  the  light 
S.  W.  i  W.,  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  distant,  has  but  6  fVet  water  at  low  spring'  tides, 
and  is  about  10  fathoms  diameter.  Passing  between  the  island  and  the  Icilgo,  you  will 
have  13  to  15  feet  water  at  low  spring  tides.  The  east  end  of  Ten  Pound  Llaml  is  foul 
ground,  and  no  safe  passage.  The  south,  west,  and  north  sides  are  bold,  and  miiy  be  ap- 
proached within  40  to  60  fathoms  at  low  water.  Give  the  west  end  of  the  island  a  berth 
of  50  to  70  fathoms,  and  steer  in  for  the  inner  harbor  N.  E.  You  may  anchor  at  any  dis- 
tance, from  100  fathoms  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  island.  The  light  will  then 
bear  from  S.  to  S.  W.  Anchor  in  6,  5,  4,  or  3  fathoms,  spring  low  tides,  muddy  bottom. 
This  inner  harbor  is  safe  against  all  winds  that  blow. 

Bound  for  Cape  Ann  Harbor,  and  falling  into  the  westward,  as  far  as  Half-wny  Rock, 
take  care  not  to  bring  the  lighten  Ten  Pound  Island  to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  E.  by 
N.,  until  you  are  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  eastward  of  Half-way  Rock,  to  avoid 
the  S.  E.  breakers  that  extend  from  Baker's  Island,  and  which  bear  from  the  ligiits  on 
Baker's  Island  S.  E.  h  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  h  E.,  and  about  2\  miles  distant.  On  the  S.  E. 
part  of  these  breakers  is  placed  a  spar  buoy,  painted  black,  bearing  from  Ilalf-way  Rock 
N.  £.  by  E.  about  one  mile  distant,  and  from  the  lights  on  Baker's  Island  S.  S.  K.  j  E, 
2i  miles.  When  passed  to  the  eastward  of  these  breakers,  you  may  then  hung  the  light 
on  Ten  Pound  Island  to  bear  N.  E.,  and  run  for  it.  On  this  course  you  wdl  leave  Ten 
Pound  Ledge  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  the  ledges  oflT  Norman's  Woe  Ror  k  anl  Kresh 
Water  Cove  on  your  larboard  hand.  ^  ^hen  up  with  Ten  Pound  Island,  anchor  as  above 
directed. 

Baker's  Island  lights  bear  from  the  monument  W.  by  S.  i  S.  distant  7  miles:  south 
point  of  Kettle  Island,  W.  h  S.  distant  4  miles  ;  Half-way  Rock,  S.  W.  by  W.  7d  miles; 
lighthouse  on  Ten  Pound  Island,  N.  |  E.  distant  1^  mile ;  the  white  buoy  on  the  weat 
end  of  Dog  Bar,  W.  N.  W.  half  a  mile. 

The  outer  harbor  of  Cape  Ann  is  safe  and  good  aochorage  against  a  northerly  or  enst 
wind,  where  you  may  anchor  in  7i  to  6i  fathoms,  low  tides,  muddy  bottom,  the  light- 
house bearing  about  S.  E.  by  E.  distant  about  one  mile,  or  a  mile  and  a  haK. 

The  S.  E.  Harbor  ia  also  safe  and  good  anchorage  against  a  northerly,  east,  and  to  the 
ix  .     ■  -  •■>■  -■■-■■ 


^nn  liRhtB,  in 
■86  Will  carry 
lights  in  one, 
.  kewpinggaicj 
very  low,  nnd 
twiird  of  said 
K..  whtni  you 
iiBteni  Point. 
>riiimi'8  Woe, 
NV.,  then  run 

which  has  a 
;  hut  bo  ciire- 
troif^litsiiKinth 
will  cmiyyou 
rd  the  JjtMly  of 
18  lit  all  times 
teller's  Island, 
'een  ihn  Lon- 
le  Sniviiges  to 
I  at  low  water 
iiit  boars  from 
ghts  N.  N.  E. 

Braco'sCove 
v.,  which  you 
J  when  open, 

use  on 'it,  con- 

1  fiiUincr  in  to 

containing  a 

tho  li;^ht  on 

3  thiit  extends 

feet  water  at 

for  tho  light. 

(1  is  about  hiiif 

rso,  will  carry 

from  tlio  light 

IV  spring  tides, 

<'|ls,'o,  yon  will 

1  I^lllnd  is  foul 

nd  iniiy  bo  ap. 

island  a  berth 

lior  nt  any  dis- 

light  will  then 

nuddy  bottom. 

alf-wny  Rock, 
•dof  N.  E.by 
Rock,  to  avoid 
n  the  ligiits  on 
On  the  S.  E. 
lalf-wuy  Keck 
S.  S.  E.  i  E. 
hung  the  light 
wdl  leave  Ten 
ook  and  Fresh 
ichor  us  above 

f  milo8 ;  south 

W.  74  miles; 

y  on  the  west 

rtbeily  or  enst 
torn,  the  light- 
C 

a6i,  and  to  the 


mmmmm^m 


'i»'»"i"iiii«ip 


m^^mmm 


:s 


'  •> 


^s^ 


=  ^ 


\^   :  ^(  3   ^>1 


N    ^ 


V, 


^ 


5n 


?    CN 


^■? 


§ 


K 


^ 


■>v   - 


a    -^ 


h    '-■ 


.Sii 


■■■m 


■^  s 


>'••■■>-.. 


:n:;mm.i:  >•">"'■ 


I 


'^.o 


u    ■•         » 


s  /• 


>:  ^. 


^5^ 


P<^ 


:-'-f'^\. 


V'..- 


j^/: 


li 


r¥"?»e"*"»»vi*>. 


"^■^>i/:, 


iv***t—nn»—   11.— ^^i-j-ui    I     im    \itmmmm^ 


'^,r3fi 


'•     ^5^. 


'<  ♦ .  *  I 


I-    \ 


■'•'  i.J'1-i.  ■!<    .|«M"IMaWM«MUH^ 


» 
1; 


'm^ummmmmmmmmmm 


4    '       ' 


ilMVij  I, J  iiiiii,iiiiuiiii  jtjiii-pii  ■"iBwp5W>ll,iiJI.3 


l.       ' 


i- 


south-enst  \ 
7,  or  (i  fiillu 
hiilf  n  mile. 
Gii)ucf!rtte 
by  the  west 
in  I'iistli,  3 
exciiviircil  III 

nmUf'S  off  fi 
tiiiit,  111(1  liii 
point  al)out 

Timro  is 
Woo.  riilled 
he.'iil  ol'  tiiiis 
S.  W.  4  S. 
S.  S.  W.  I 
ami  E.  4  S. 
E.  from  eacl 

A  spur  bi 
wiiti'v.  Th 
distil  nt. 

A  spur  bu 
in  two  fiitlio 
Ishiiifl  y.  b; 
N.  i  E  ,  anc 
E.  i  E. ;  D< 

Tlic  slioal 
ahviiys  the  6 
■of  liir!2;r>  rod 

AlK)iit:30  I 
Woe  Rock, 
guiitlii'rly  fJii 
quiir'icr  of  a 
Bprin^  ti'los, 

II;ilf-W(iy 

E.  I't'  I'lich  o 
HALF  M 
I.  two  miles 
A  iiioiniiiieiil 
(voik  is  ,'i  spi 
SATAN'.- 
Biiliiir's  Isliii 
Diie-sixih. 

.SALE.M 
iHi'vo  the  ful 
ibnut  two  mi 
vith  !'iL-  easi 
;lie  II  up  wit 

'lips  l)OUI 

lliey  hiivc  mi 
Ini  fisiit,  iim 
Jreiilu^r  of  B 
I  verv  (iiinge 
BAKER'S 
lor,  is  iiliDUt 
Iriii,;',  disfiiiit 

|i;lltllOli!4Ut<  u 

ta.    One  is 

Iml  .S.  !•:.  1  : 

hit  flioro  is  I 

fliere  is  ii  sr 

those  who 

MISERY 

|<ittli' Misery 

liP'la;o  lias  8 

IW.,  U  mil 

•  sumIi,  imJ 

ill  point  pr 

he  lights  N. 


wnjinmjipi 


■■wip 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  168 

south-enst  winds.  Bring  the  light  to  bear  from  N.  by  E.  to  N.  N.  W. ;  anchor  in  9,  8, 
7,  or  <i  fiithoms,  at  low  spring  tides,  muddy  bottom,  distant  from  the  light  one-eighth  to 
hftif  II  mile. 

GiiiuiiBMter  Canal,  which  connects  the  harbor  with  Squam  River,  passes  immediately 
by  tlio  west  part  of  the  town,  or  what  is  called  the  Harbor  Parish.  It  is  about  120  rods 
ill  i'ligrli,  30  feet  wide,  and  has  for  its  depth  about  the  whole  flow  of  the  tide.  It  was 
excnv'iiti?'!  ar  low  water  mark,  spriiis;  tides;  sav  in  spring  tides  12  feet,  neap  tides  8  feet. 

LKDUKS  OFF  TEN  POUND  ISLAND,  Bearings,  &c„  viz.— The  ledge  that  Ledges  off 
ninlvt's  off  from  tlio  eastern  point,  bears  from  the  light  S.  by  W.  i  W.  about  2  miles  dis-   Ten  Pound 
tiiiif,  niid  1ms  from  6  to  10  feet  water  at  low  tides;  this  ledge  lies  off  from  the  eastern  Island, 
point  iibuut  half  a  mile.  Bearings^Sfe. 

TliiM-e  is  a  single  reck  that  lies  about  midway  between  the  eastern  point  and  Norman's 
W<)i\  ciilied  the  Kound  Rock,  on  which  is  a  spar  buoy,  in  2i  fathoms,  low  water.  The 
heail  of  tiii."  buoy  is  painted  black,  and  bears  from  the  lighthouse  on  Ten  Pound  Island 
S.  \V.  4  S.  distant  \\  mile.  Round  Rock  and  Ton  Pound  Ledge  bear  from  eiich  cher 
S.  S.  W.  %  W.,  and  N.  N.  E.  }  E.  Ten  Pound  Rock  and  Cove  Ledge  bear  W  4  N. 
and  E.  4  S.  from  each  other.  Round  Rock  and  Cove  Ledge  bear  S.  by  W.  and  N.  by 
E.  frotn  each  other. 

A  f\Y,ir  buoy  is  placed  on  Cove  Ledge,  or  Old  Field  Rocks,  in   i wo  fathoms,  at  low  • 
wnf:'v.     The  top  is  painted  black,  and  it  bears  from  the  lighthouse  W.  by  S.  half  a  mile 
distil  nt. 

A  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  the  west  end  of  Dog  Bar  Ledg.?,  with  the  top  painted  white, 
in  two  fiithonis,  at  low  water,  common  tides,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  on  Ten  Pound 
Isliiiid  S.  by  W.  4  W.  d'stant  limile;  Dog  Bar  and  Ten  Pound  Lndge  Buov  bear 
N.  i  i: ,  and  S.  i  W. ;  Dog  Bar  and  Round  Rock  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  S."  E.  by 
E.  1  K. ;  Dog  Bar  and  Cove  Ledge  S.  by  E.  \  E..  and  N.  by  W.  i  W. 

Tlie  slioiil  called  Round  Rock,  is  a  shoid  formed  by  large  and  siuidl  popple  stones,  and 
fdwnys  the  same  uniform  depth  of  water  on  it,  as  before  mentioned.  Dog  Bar  consists 
iof  Urgi'i  rocks. 

Alioiil;  30  fatlioms  off  from  Norman  Woe  Point  is  a  large  high  rock,  called  Norman's 

Wor   Ruck,  of  20  to   30  fithoins  diamoter;  and  about  100  fathoms  off  this  rock,  in  a 

uutlifi'ly  direction,  is  a  ledge  that  lias  7  or  8  feet  water  on  it  at  low  tides.     About  one- 

iquiiiicr  of  a  mile  olf  from  Fresh  Water  Cove  lies  a  ledge  with  only  3  feet  water,  low 

prin^;  tides,  bearing  from  the  light  W.  J  N.  distant  2  miles. 

ILdf-way  Rock,  and  the  rock  on  Ten  Pound  Island,  bears  S.  \V.  4  W.,  and  N.  E.  4 
dt  I'lieh  other,  (Jistiuit  about  8  or  9  miles. 

HALF  WAY  ROCK.— This  is  a  high  rock  of  about  30  fathoms  diameter,  lyin:^  S.  i 

.two  miles  distant  from   Baker's  Island  lights.     It  is  bold  all  round,  and  40  feel  high 

iiioiiiuneiit  is  erected  upon  it,  the  atone  work  of  'vliich  is  15  feet  high  ;  above  the  stone 
ivork  is  w  spindle  l.'j  feet  high,  on  which  is  a  coppei  i'ldl  2  feet  in  diameter. 

SATAN'S,  OR  BLACK  ROCK,  is  above  wiilor,  s'eep  to,  and  bears  S.  W.  by  S.from 

aiioi's  Island,  distant  Ij  mile,  and  from  Half-way  R  .ck  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W^.  a  inil.>  and 
no-sixtli. 

S  VLE.M  HARBOR. — Vessels  inward  bound,  and  fulling  in  with  Cape  Ann,  mnstob- 
ervo  the  folli)\ving  directions,  viz. :  When  abreast  of  Ca;>o  Ann  lights,  bearing  N.  N.  W. 
bout  two  miles  distant,  steer  W.  S.  W.  about  tliree  leagues,  which  will  carry  them  up 

itb  vit-  eastern  point  of  Cape  Ann,  then  steer  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  74  tuiles,  which  will  carry 
heiii  up  with  the  lights  on  Baker's  Island. 

S'iiipa  bound  to  Salem,  falling  to  the  southward,  and  running  for  the  lights,  must,  when 

ley  have  made  them,  keep  the  northern  or  lower  light  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  south- 
n\  lijiit.  and  run  for  them,  wliicli  wii'  carry  them  to  the  eastward,  and  clear  of  the  south 
reiiker  of  Baker's  Island,  which  bears  from  the  liglits  S.  E.  by  S.,  21  miles  distant,  and 

very  (bingerous. 

BAKKR'S   ISLAND  lies  on  thu  south  siiie  of  the  principal  entrance  of  Salem  liar-  Baker's 
lor,  IS  idiDUt  a  third  of  a  mile  in  leu'.rth,  from  north  to  south,  bearing  K.  from  Foit  Pick-  Island. 
liiii;,  distant  about  5  miles  east  from  the  town  of  Salem.     There  a-'o  now  two  separate 
Iglitliousos  on  Baker's  Island,  the  buses  of  which  are  about  45  feet  above  the  level  of  the 

a.  One  is  72  feet,  and  the  other  814  f«^ot  liigli,  and  l)ear  from  each  other  N.  W.  i  W., 
nd  S.  ]].  \  E.     The  southern  light  is  the  highest.     The  water  is  deep  near  the  island, 

It  tl'ero  is  no  convenient  landing-place.     The  north  and  east  sides  are  high  and  rocky. 

lieit)  is  a  small  channel  between  tlie  south  rocks  and  the  dry  breakers,  but  it  is  safe  only 

those  who  are  acquainted  with  it. 

MISF.RY  ISLAND  lies  from  Baker's  Island  about  one  mile,  is  joined  by  a  bar  to  Misery 

ittli'  Misery,  which  makes  tiie  north  side  of  the  channel  opposite  Baker's  Island.    Misery  hiand. 

^•\'ifi  lias  8  feet  water  at  low  spring  tides,  and  boars  from  tho  lighthouse  N.  W.  by  W. 

\V.,  U  mile  distant.     Misery  Island,  or  Groat  Misery,  is  174  rods  in  length,  fnuii  north 

suirili,  imJ  06  rods  in  breadth.     Little  Misery  is  40  rods  in  length,  with  its  most  wos- 

;ii  point  projecting  into  the  channel.     South  part  of  Littlo  Misery  Island  boars  from 

e  lights  N.  VV .  4  N.,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  diutuDt. 


Ilaff-ivay 
Rock. 


Satan's,  or 
Black  Rock, 

Sa>em 
Harbor. 


164 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


iMf 


!(   li    ' 


■it 


The  Hnste  Rock  is  a  broken  rock  nbove  wnter,  lying  nenr  the  channel,  bearing  from 
Baker's  I&lnnd  lights  W.  i  N.  distant  2i  miles,  and  li  inilo  from  Salem  Rock. 
Beacon.  Hardy's  Rocks  (on  which  a  beacon  is  erected)  bear  W.  i  N.  from  Baker's  Island  lights. 

distant  five-eighths  of  a  mile.  They  are  covered  at  high  wiiter  and  are  dangeroua.  At 
half  tide  they  are  visible.  Rising  States  Ledge  bears  W.  |  N.  from  them,  150  fathoms 
distant. 

Bowditch  8  Ledge,  on  the  east  end  of  which  a  triangular  monument  of  granite,  32  feet 
high,  is  pinced,  in  lii  fathoms,  bears  from  Baker's  Island  lighthouse  W.  N.  W.,  H  niile 
distant,  and  is  seen  at  low  spring  tides. 

Cat  Island  is  situated  about  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Baker's  Island  two  miles  distant,  and 
about  1  \  mile  from  Marblehend  Neck,  and  ranges  from  Baker's  Island  just  clear  of  Mar- 
blehead  Neck.  On  the  N.  W.  end  is  a  high  beach,  directly  opposite  the  point  of  Mar- 
blehead,  called  Peacns  Point.  The  shore  is  irregular  and  rocky.  Beyond,  and  in  a 
Kse  with  the  island,  are  two  other  heads,  of  nearly  the  same  projection;  and  on  the 
MMhern  mde  are  three  high  rocks,  but  not  so  large  as  the  former.  Two  of  them  are 
eaaoeeted  «iitb  the  istwnd  by  bars  of  sand,  out  of  water  at  the  ebb;  the  other  etnncls 
koMty  wp  v»»«iiia  these  two,  but  more  soutlierly.  The  Marblehead  Marine  Scociety  iias 
•reei«d  on  Ctt  Island  Rock  a  spar,  40  feet  high,  to  the  top  of  which  is  annexed  a  cask  of 
abour  13(0  gaMnnuii  measure,  which  is  xeen  at  sea  20  to  30  feet  above  the  land.  A  black 
Spar  bumj.  spar  buoy  lies  off  the  S.  E.  end,  beaitmg  from  the  lights  S.  E.  i  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  Qj 
OiileH  distant. 

Ertgle  Island  in  nbout  1|  mile  from  Peach's  Point,  and  bears  from  the  lighthouses  W. 
by  S.  i  S.  dHrtant  'Jk  mile.  A  bar  runs  off  from  the  western  point  of  this  island  in  a  N, 
W.  direction,  lialf  a  mile  distant,  and  has  a  red  spar  buoy  on  the  end  of  it.  It  may  be 
avoided  by  keeping  Gray's  Rocks  to  the  southward  of  Marblehead  Fort. 

Winter  Island  lies  on  the  north  side  of  tlie^-nt.rance  of  .Salem  Harbor,  about  half  a  mile 
in  length  ;  the  highest  part  is  on  the  south  of  the  island,  opposite  a  point  of  rocks  on  tlie 
neck,  (which  is  u  point  of  land  running  north-easterly  from  the  town,  about  one  nillc.j 
It  has  a  store  and  a  wharf  on  the  southern  end,  at  the  entrance  of  Cat  Cove.  On  the 
eastern  point  istands  Fort  Pickering. 

The  Britnbles  bear  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  li  mile,  S.  S.  E.  from 
Eagle  Island,  nearly  half  a  mile  distant.     They  are  sunken  rocks,  biiro  at  low  water  :  near 
Spar  buoy,      to  it  is  a  spar  buoy,  painted  red.     It  comes  out  of  wattT  at  half  cbi). 

Coney  Islimd  is  a  nmall  island  that  lies  near  tlie  inoutlj  of  iSalem  Ilariinr;  it  bears  from 
Marblehead  Point  N.  E.,  oiu^  mile  distant;  from  F'ort  Pickering,  on  Winter  Island,  K, 
i  iS.,  two  miles  distant;  and  from  Bakcn-'s  Island  light  W.  \  S.,  Si  miles  distant. 

Marblehead  Rock  bears  S.  W.  from  the  westfru  part  of  Cat  Island,  distant  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile.  It  is  above  water,  and  may  be  approached  on  either  side,  very  near, 
with  safety. 

Orgy's  Rock  bears  N.  W.  from  Cat  Island,  distant  tbir«>e-quarters  of  a  mile,  W.  by  S. 
i  S  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  2J  miles,  is  high  out  olf  water,  and  may  bo  approiiclu'd 
with  safety. 

Vertsi^ls  bound  to  Salem,  having  made  tlie  lights  with  a  westerly  wind,  in  beating  up, 
must  not  stand  to  tlip  southward  or  westward,  further  tlH^ii  to  shut  one  light  in  witli  the 
other,  on  account  of  the  south  breaker,  no)-  to  the  nortliwurd,  further  than  to  brin>;llie 
lights  to  hear  W.  by  S  i  S  tn  account  of  (i.ileV  Ledge,  which  bears  from  the  ligiits  .\. 
E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  IJ  mile  iii.-4tJiiit,  having  but  4  feet  water  at  low  tides. 

In  going  i'lto  Salem  by  tlio  common  or  ship  cldmnel,   between  Baker's  Island  niiJ 
Misery  Island,  being  uj)  with  Baker's  Inland,  you  may  pasn  within  100  (iithom.s  of  it,  iiiiJ 
steer  W.  by  N.  for  the  H»«<te  ;  thir;  ».>nYHf  will  carry  you  c>ar  of  Hardy's  Rocks.  lL'ii\iiig  i 
them  to  the  southward,  ,ii.'  will  leat.-  Bovvditch's  Ledfle  lo  the  northward.     If  yoii  iire 
in  the  mid-passage,  belwecii  Maker's  l«l:inil  and  the  Misery,  you  may  steer  W.  N.  W.tilll 
yon  have  passed  Bowditch'M   fjcdge.  'iw  till  you  get  (Jat  Inland  open  to  the  westward  of  I 
Eagle  Island,  then  haul  up  lor  the  Ihn^rf-.     Any  stranger  may  there  anclior  in  safety,  in 
about  5  fathoms  of  water,  goud  ancluaiij^  ■   but  if  you  choo**-  to  |)ri)c'eed  into  .'^aleni  Har- 
bor, yon  must  steer  ai)out  west  for  the  1  Iiii»t.e,  wliirh  )  mi  will  leave  on  your  larhoiird  li.iiiJ, 
about  half  a  mile  distant,  then  steer  .S.  W.  by  W.,  which  will  carry  you  into  .Salem  lliir-l 
bor;  but  you  must  observe,  that  there  is  a  WA^  runs  ofl'  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  Wiiiltrl 
It^land,  and  that  Abbot's   Rock  lies  ahri^ast  of  if  ;  to  avoid  which  you  must  keep  iiboveal 
(jnarter  wf  a  mile  from  the  shore.     Abbot's  Ri><,»  w  found  by  bringing  Cnt-tle  Hill  and  lioiisel 
into  the  cove  north  of  Fort  Pickeriiigi  and  Bevf^^ty  Meeting-huuse  w»*ll  in  with  .hiniperl 
Point  (or  .'^.   E.  point  of  .Sniem   Neck  )     Abfjot  h  ft<M>,k  has  seven  feet  at  common  ilA.  I 
The  mi  an  of  common  tides  is  I'J  feet.     I"  keeping  e#  ahore  to  avoid  AMK)t's  Rock,  yiiiij 
must  not  go  too  far  oil',  for  fear  of  the  A'|ua  Vita-,  whi<ii  are  sunken  rocks,  lying  E.  ."^  K, 
from  Fort  Pickering,  distant  nearly  half  a  mi|p. 

When  coming  from  tl>»  sDuthward,  »f  y  .u  xre  ^\^tiJ  ^  at  iHlnnd  you  may  pass  to  lliej 
ea.stward  or  westward  of  ii;  if  yim  are  to  the  tMstward,  you  must  give  a  berth  of  a  c]uar-f 
ter  uf  a  mile,  and  gt^er  N.  by   W.  i  W.  or  N    N    W.  loav.i.g  the  Brimbles  and  Lugl«| 


•TT-w 


w'^ppiir' 


''HP">"wiWi»,l'Wlii:WWI'l'Jf  SISP'!.    .  I  HiRi-^""J  J<  'mjjUy  I'  mw»' ,1 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


165 


bearing  from 
k. 

Island  lights, 
ngerous.  At 
,  150  fathoms 

rnnite,  32  feet 
W.,  li  niilo 

8  distant,  niid 
clear  of  .Mar- 
point  of  Mar- 
ond,  and  in  a 
i;  and  on  the 
3  of  them  are 
3  Other  stands 
a  Scociety  lias 
exed  a  casli  of 
land.  A  blaci< 
S.  E.  4  E.  2i 

ighthouses  W. 
I  island  in  a  N. 
it.     It  may  be 

tout  half  a  mile 
if  rocks  on  the 
)out  one  mile) 
Cove.    On  the 

S.  S.  E.  IVum 
w  water  :  nuiir 

■ ;  it  boars  fniiii 
inter  Ishinil,  K. 
istant. 

distant  three- 
side,  very  nuiir, 

niilo,  W.  by  S. 
■  bo  approauhi'J 

in  beatini;  up, 
i;lit  in  witb  the 

iin  to  briiii;  tlie 
in  the  lights  N. 

or'fl  Island  niij 
lioins  (if  it,  mid 
s  llufks.  luining 
nl.  If  you  are 
.,-\V.  N.  W.till 
li(^  westwiinl  ol 
hor  In  siilVty.in 
iulo  Sali'iii  liar- 
ir  liirbiiiird  liaiiJ. 
nto  .Salem  liar- 
.  tmd  of  Wii.tcr 
list  Ucop  iibDvea 
Ic  Hill  and  bouse 
in  with  .hiiii|ifr 
at  common  iHli. 
(bot'."  KocU.  yiiu 
M,  lying  E.  S  !■■ 


Island  to  the  starboard,  and  Coney  Island  Ledge  to  the  larboard — that  course  will  carry 

you  clear  of  Eagle  Island  Bar;  continue  upon  the  same  course  till  you  have  passed  the 

Haste,  and  get  into  common  ship  channel,  or  you  may  continue  the  same  course  till  you  j,, 

get  under  the  north  shore,  where  there  is  good  anchorage. 

If  you  are  to  the  westward  of  Cat  Island,  you  may  pass  in  the  middle  channel  between 
that  island  and  Marblehead  Rock,  and  steer  over  north  for  the  ship  channel,  leaving  Gray's 
Rock  and  Coney  Island  to  the  westward.  After  passing  the  Haste  and  entering  the  ship 
channel,  you  may  proceed  as  before  directed. 

If  in  coming  from  the  southward  and  eastward,  you  should  find  yourself  near  Half- 
way Rock,  you  may  bring  it  to  bear  S.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  for  the  Haste,  passing  near 
to  Satan  or  Black  Rock,  leaving  't  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  the  Brimbles  and  Eagle  Isl- 
and on  the  starboard;  c-ntinue  this  course,  and  you  will  leave  the  Haste  on  the  larboard 
hand,  enter  the  common  ship  channel,  and  proceed  ns  above. 

Tliere  are  several  other  channels  for  entering  Salem  Harbor,  but  they  ought  not  to  be 
attempted  without  a  pilot. 

BEVERLY  AND  MANCHESTER.— To  enter  Beverly  Harbor,  follow  the  direc-  Beverly  and 
tions  f  )r  Salem  Harbor,  till  you  bring  the  Haste  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  run  W.  N.  W.  Manchester. 
about  two  miles  and  you  reach  Beverly  Bar,  which  is  a  spot  of  sand  running  out  from  the 
southern  or  Salem  side  of  the  entrance,  and  has  commonly  a  beacon  upon  the  head  of  it, 
above  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  bar  has  very  shoal  water  on  the  eastern 
or  ou'ward  side  near  it,  but  good  anchorage  within.  There  is  good  water  at  the  head  of 
the  bar.  Having  passed  the  I  .-v,  there  is  a  sandy  point  from  Beverly,  on  the  northern 
fide  of  the  entrance,  and  beyond  this  point  are  the  Lobster  Rocks,  which  bear  from  the 
head  of  the  bar  W.  a  little  S.,  and  not  half  a  mile  distant,  and  they  are  above  water  at  half 
tide.  To  avoid  this  point,  after  having  well  cleared  the  bar,  you  will  steer  towards  Ram- 
hnrn  Rock,  which  has  also  commonly  a  beacon,  and  is  to  be  seen  at  half  tide,  bearing  S. 
W.  hy  S.  from  the  head  of  the  bar,  one-eighth  of  a  mile  distant.  There  are  several  fa- 
tlionis  of  water  within  a  vessel's  length  of  Ram-horn  Rock.  Giving  this  a  good  berth,  you 
thon  clear  the  sandy  point,  and  steer  for  the  Lobster  Rock  Beacon,  bearing  from  Ram-horn 
Bi^iicun  N.  W.  by  W.,  distant  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile.  Giving  this  a  good  Ix'itii.  yoa 
are  tlien  opposite  to  the  wharves,  and  may  anchor  in  deep  water,  in  a  very  safe  and  excel- 
lent Inirlior. 

To  enter  Manchester  Harbor,  you  must  bring  the  southern  light  on  Baker's  Island  to 
bear  .S.  .i  E.,  and  run  N.,  one  mile  distant,  where  you  may  anchor  on  good  bottom. 

Eastern  point  bears  from  Raker's  Island  lights  E.  by  N.  4  N.,  74  miles  distant.  Half- 
way KiK'k  bears  fi'om  the  lights  S.  i  E.,  2  miles  distant.  Hardy's  Rocks  bear  from  the 
liuhtH  \V.  •]  N..  distant  five-eighths  of  a  mile. 

M  Ml  RLE  HE  AD. — Vessels  bound  to  Marblehead,  and  falling  to  the  southwar'    and  Marblehead. 
ruiiiiiiii;  fur  till!  lights,  after  makiim  them  must  keep  the  north  and  lower  one  open  t    the 
eiistward  of  the  southern  li:;lit,  and  run  for  them,  which  will  carry  them  to  the  eastward 
and  dear  of  the  south  l)reakei's  olf  Baker's  Island,  which  bear  from  the  lights  from  S.  E. 
i  S.  to  S.  .'<.  E.  4  E.  distant  two  miles  and  one-(|UMrter. 

lluViiij  riiiub^  the  ii^rlits  with  a  W(>3terly  wind,  imd  boating,  when  within  two  and  a  half 
mib'-!  of  tlii'in,  you  m')^t  not  stan<l  to  the  southward  and  westward  so  far  as  to  shut  the 
north  iisilit  up  with  the  south  light,  on  account  of  the  south  breakers,  nor  to  X\ui  northward 
fniMh'i'  tliiiti  to  bring  llu^  liiiiitsto  l)ear  W.  by  S.  4  S..  on  account  of  (inie's  Ledge,  which 
bi'ins  iVom  the  lights  N.  E.  l)y  E.  J,  E..  distant  1^  mile.  Drawing  near  to  the  liglils,  take 
care  of  a  ledge,  called  the  Whale's  Back,  wliich  bears  from  the  lights  N.  by  E.,  distant 
foar-lil'iln  of  a  mile,  and  comes  out  of  water  at  qmirter  el)b. 

In  noiug  into  ,M.irl)li'lieail,  and  iieing  up  with  the  lights,  give  the  north  point  of  Baker's 
Island  a  !)erth  of  onecpnirter  of  a  mile  or  less.  Having  the  lights  one  in  with  the  other, 
yiinareup  with  the  point.  Wiien  the  south  light  is  open  with  the  nortb  light,  you  have 
tiit'ii  piissed  the  point,  (leaving  the  Misei'y  Island  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  bears 
tViihi  th.'  Ii.lits  N.  \V.  4  N.,  three-fourths  of  a  mile.)  "  Then  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  or  .S.  S. 
W.  until  \nu  bring  the  south  linht  to  l)ear  N.  E.  by  E.  4  E. ;  then  steer  S.'W.  by  VV.  i 


\V. 


stniil  :i  miles,  for  iNIiirlihdiead  llarl)or.     You  will  leave  Hardy's  Rocks,  Eagle  Isl- 


and, and  (iiay's  Koik.  on  the  starlioai'd  hand;  Pope's  Head,  (whicdi  is  a  large  high  rock, 
lii'ining  .S.  W.  by  W.  fiom  the  lights,  two-thirds  of  a  mile  distant,)  Brimbles,  and  north 
pnint  of  (4it  Island,  on  the  larlioard  hand.  The  Brimbles  bear  IVom  Eagle  Island  S.  .'2. 
K.  h  E.,  distant  half  a  mde  ;  and  (Jray's  Rock  from  the  north  point  of  Cat  Island,  N.  W. 
by  \V.  seven-eighths  of  <  mile. 

Fiilbna  in  with  the  south  point  of  Baker's  Island,  and  it  bh)wing  hard  from  the  east- 
wai'd,  if  you  cannot  avoid  it.  you  nuiy  pass  the  ])oint  by  keeping  it  well  on  lioard,  say  at 

the  di.st 

tilt! 


aue»" 


of  iVi.m  •.'!)  to  •')()  fathoms  from  the  shiue,  where  you  will  have  from  4  to  5 

nans  water.      When  up  with  the  S.  W.  point,  steer  W.  .S    \V.,  wli.ch  will  curry  you 
t'twi'eii  il.f  north  ( Jiiosebeii  y  Island  (which  l>ears  .S.  \V.  4   S.  from  the  lights,  distant 
I  two  tliir  I-  of  H  mile)  niid  I'ope's  Head,   leaving  'lie   former  on   your  larbinird  hand,  and 
"jpe'u  lie.id  un  your  starboard  hand,  between  which  you  will  have  from  ;i4  to  5  fathoms 


mm 


166 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


of  water.     Aa  soon  as  you  have  passed  Pope's  Head,  haul  to  the  northward,  until  the  I 
south  light  bears  N.  E.   by  E.  i  E.,  then  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.for  Murbleliead  Har- 
bor. 

The  south  entrance  of  the  Harbor  of  Marblehead  is  bold,  and  may  be  approached  with ! 
safety  with  the  light  on  the  point  of  the  neck  at  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  harbor,  bpnrincr  f,,,,^  ( 
N.  N.  W.  to  W,  by  N.  until  you  are  within  half  a  mile  of  it;  then  bring  the  litjht  lo  bear  I 
W.  by  S.,  and  run  for  it  till  within  two  cables'  length;  then  steer  N.  \V.  by  W.  uiuiltho  ! 
lighthouse  bears  S.  S,  \V.;  then  steer  S.  W.,  and  anchor  with  the  light  bearing  tVorii  E. 
by  S.  to  N.  E.  by  E.  from  a  quarter  to  a  half  a  mile  distant,  in  6  fathoms,  good  holding 
ground  and  clear  bottom,  secure  from  all  but  easterly  gales.     The  following  ure  the  bear^ 
ings  from  the  lighthouse: 


Marblehead  Rock S.  E.  by  E.  i  E distant  i  mile. 

Half-way  Rock E.  by  S "  2i  do. 

Cat  Island  Rock E.  i  N »  J  do. 

Baker's  Island  Light N.  E.  by  E •*  3    do. 

Hardy's  Rocks N.  E »  2i  do. 

Eagle  Island N.  E.  i  N "  J  do. 

Gray's  Rock N.  E.  by  E.  i  E "  1    do. 

Peach's  Point N.  by  W.  i  W "  1    do. 

Fort  Head N "  d  do. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  running  for  Half-way  Rock,  (described  in  page 
163.)  must  not  bring  the  rock  to  bear  to  the  southward  of  W.  S.  W.,  to  avoid  the  suutli 
breaker,  which  bears  from  Half-way  Rock  N.  E.  i  E.  distant  one  mile.  Being  up  with 
Half-way  Rock,  and  bound  into  Marblehead,  bring  the  rock  to  bear  E.  by  S.  i  8..  and 
steer  W.  I)y  N.  4  N.  for  Fort  Head,  distant  3  miles,  leaving  Cat  Island  on  the  stinhnaid 
hand,  which  bears  from  Half-way  Rock  W.  N.  W.  distant  1 J  mile,  and  Marblehead  Piick 
on  the  larboard  hand,  which  i)ear8  from  H'llf-way  Rock  \V.  J  N.  distant  '2  miles.  Hjack  ' 
Rock  bears  from  Half-way  Rock  N.  W.  by  W.  distant  li  mile.  Cat  Island  Ivocli  and 
Point  Neck  bear  east  and  west  of  each  other,  distant  alwut  one  mile. 

Vessels  being  up  in  Boston  Bay,  may,  by  bringing  Boston  light  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  run  ' 
N.  N.  E.  for  Marbieheiid  Rock;  thoy  are  distant  from  each  other  about  li2  miles.  ILiH..  \ 
way  Rock  and  Boston  light  bear  from  each  other  S.  \V.  and  N.  E.,  distant  15  mili's. 

Hardy's  Rocks  are  covered  nt  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  at  quarter  ebb.     Whale's  I 
Back  is  covered  nt  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  at  quarter  ebb.     Gale's  Rocks  hi  vo  hut  | 
4  feet  water  at  low  tides,  and  hear  N.  E.  by  K.  -J  E.  from  the  ligl.t'.  distant  1^  iiiie.    The 
south   breakers,  oir  Baker's  Island,  are  always  covered.     The  Briinbles  are  coverrd  nt  i 
high  water,  and  are  seen  at  half  tide.     Black  Rock  is  always  out  of  water,  but  Iciw  ;  Cut  I 
Island  Rock,  Half-way  Rock,   Marblehead   Rock,  (Jray'a  Rock,  and  Pope's  Hciid,  are 
large,  anil  high  above  water.     Half-way  Bock  is  very  b(dd  all  round  it.     Eai;le  Island  is  i 
bold  only  on  the  south  and  east ;  from  the  N.  E.  part  of  it,  quite  to  Hardy's  Rocks,  is  vuiy 
shoal  water,  and  no  pas.-age  for  ships. 

Bearings  and  distances  of  the  principal  Islands,   Rnclcs,  i^c,  in  the  vicinity  of  Salem, 

from  Baker's  Island  Lights. 

The  lights  bear  from  each  other  N.  W.  i  W.  and  S.  E.  i  E.,  40  feet  distant. 

E;isfern  point  of  Cape  Ann  bears E.  by  N.  i  N.,. . .  .7i  miles  distant,  j 

Gale's  Ledge,  Avhich  has  a  white  spar  buoy  on  the 

S.W  'M)d,  anrl  on  which  are  3  ft.  watei-,  low  tide.N.  E.  by  E.J   E.  .IJ  do. 

House  I,«laiid,at  the  mouth  of  Manchester  Harbor. N.  N.  K 1  do. 

.Saubc's  Ledge  in  Maiiclx-ster N.  4  \V ?  do 

East  part  of  Whale's  Back, N.  by  E f  do. 

Pilgrim's  Ledge,  (13  feet  low  common  tides,) N.  E li  do. 

Great  Misery N.  by  W.  ^  W.  .      1  do. 

Misery  Ledge,  (has  8  feet  at  low  tides,) N,  W.  by  W    i  W.li  do. 

Snutli  piM"  of  Little  Misery .N.  W.  4  N ■}  do. 

Whale's  Hack,  (comes  out  at  two-thirds  "W),). . .  .N.  by  K.  4  E J  do. 

Bowditch's  Ledge W   N.  W \\  do, 

Nortli  pan  of  Hardy's  Rocks, W.  ■'  N -^  d'.. 

North  part  of  Haste  Rock W.  4  N 34  do. 

South  part  of  Coney  Island, ...W'.   ',    '> S24  d". 

Nagiis  Head,  or  Marblehead  shore, W.  i   S 

Gray's  UocU \V,  by  S.  4  S 2J  do. 

North  part  nf  Kagle  Island W.  by  .S.  A  S 14  do. 

South  i.art  of  MnrldeI.eiid  Neck .-i.  W.  by  \\  .  \  \V . 

North  part  of  Cat  Island S.  W.  by  W 2  do. 


mmm 


''ifrmmm 


rd.  until  the  | 
lohead  Har- 

onched  with 
beiiritiKfioin 

light  1 0  bear 
W.  umiitiiel 
I'iiig  tVoin  E, 
good  holiiing 
ire  the  bear" 


lo. 


mi 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


ribed  in  pnge 
id  the  suutli 
^iiig  up  Willi 
Si  i  S..  1111,1 
ihe  stiivhdiiid 
jlehend  Hcciv 
niles.  Hliick 
nd  Kock  luid  ; 

i.  S.  W.  run 


miles. 


15  iiiilrs. 


Hiilf- 


Wli 


ale  s 


)cks  hi.vo  l)ut 
The 


■line. 


re  I'overpil  ;it 
but  l.iw  ;  Cut 
I's  HcMil,  me 
lii};li!  Isliind  IS 
Rocks,  is  very 


ity  of  Salm, 


^m 


mm 


"WBP 


i!ipw»' 


••wmtmm^ 


■&  - 


tiuit. 

miles  distnnt. 


do. 


KIHilM'll'lliUH'' 


•mm 


Engruvfil  for  Iftc  American/  I 


/hm  ffrr   h'fnrvii/    //'>/'//////>'///  i''.>y/.S..\' 
o/t/l  //tr  ^ //f/i/  ('/.    ^  lit  / >/f,trt 


.V]illlii;ll  Mili-t 


(iz/m/um/A/fs  ri.xr  /o/i<l .  ■'•/umt/fii/rs  i.i/irt . 
t/i4Uii/h  /rf^i><-/if/t/  I '!///<■</  A  \'///f  irr'/tf/s. 
//itf/ufi/fi'/  ut  /ii//  Af/irni,/,-  ii/  X/'i 


thit  trnhu  fi/iUltti . 


J)iMi.,/,r,t/m  /;//;  WJIhin ' 


PliUPPPP 


wn^^^ypiPii.wii ,  mrt^m^^^^mmvfrf^^^m^ifffmwi^ 


I,  iiujppip  ."Hliilnwii.w.iftniiM^W' 


"■"■•▼^""■^"iiP" 


Engravfil  for  the  American/  Coiist Pilot,  l6*  Bd-. 


2t 


lO 


M 


jf      4*^ 


,  ..    .«  ■** 


«    .^^^»-       ■' 


7V 


^  ;.»,..,,^ 


,jr 


if 


t  /'• 


f? 


Oiirlvii.  /.iliiiil 


il 


,vy 


."■"..■.";> 


4     ')  lltiov 


.'V      ^V,^ 


(■.'(„l/-/   ^:l^-~^''' 


/V// //•/.'  .///(■ICl/f-/ 


iS 


7? 


TJiievi'S 

I';* 


7         y '" 


T/ififiid  .\/t,/tM  /t/ir.v  x/ii-tv  f/tr  JIM'  III  .irk 
TAi'Sf  titi.\ftii/f/-if  f/if /M/fls  ffrvf.i  /.ii'. 
TJic  .si'iiiii/iiiiis  iiie lit/ infill fff  ft*  AM'. 


l\iN,,l,allinfJiiKIU„iii.    \.«   K.rl.-   n^i. 


Ii:/I,;'A,,    Ell,/,. 


mmmmmm 


(hi/utw/t /it/es  ft. If  /O/iil .  ■'if>ri/ti//iifi-       /irf . 
t/iiint/h  fir^Hf/i.'/i/  rt/fif</  /tvf/if  >vt    //v. 

//ll///  fflt/frift/i///  <<'f'/lr>/l//i'  rl/  X/.'i 


IhttMll  htiHhhi/t' 


.    1 


Mwwa 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Middle  of  Pope's  Head S.  W,  by  W i 

North  pnrt  of  Western  Gooseberry S.  W.  i  S ) 

South  Goofieberry S.  S.  W.  i  W i 

Siitnn.  or  Bluck  Rock S.  W.  by  S 1  ? 

Eiwtern  Gooseberry S.  S.  W.  4  W J 

Huir-way  Rock S.  4  E 2 

South  Brenkers  of  Bilker's  Island S.  E.  by  S 2i 

Archer's  Rock,  on  which  is  a  spnr  buoy,  piiinted 
red,  (has  7  feet  at  low  tides) S.  W.  by  W.  i  W..2J 


167 


miles, 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 

do. 


Outer  brenkers,  known  generally  by  the  name  of  Outer,  Middle,  and  Inner  Breakers ; 
this  is  a  very  extensive  and  dangerous  shoal,  extending  from  Searl's  Rocks  in  a  S.  E. 
direction,  about  two  miles,  and  in  a  westerly  direction  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile, 
bearin;;  from  the  lights  iS.  E.  i  S.  to  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  two  and  a  quarter  miles ;  to  pass  to 
the  eastward  of  this  dangerous  shoal,  have  the  northern  or  low  light  a  little  open  to  the 
OBStward  of  the  high  light. 

Sniirl's  Rocks,  a  small  part  comes  out  of  water  at  low  spring  tides,  and  bears  from  the 
Bouth  light,  S.  E.  three-eighths  of  a  mile  distant,  and  from  the  S.  E.  points  of  Baker's 
Island,  S.  E..  distant  a  small  one-fourth  of  a  mile.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  the 
island  and  Searl's  Rocks,  by  keeping  the  island  best  on  board,  say  at  a  distance  of  ;iO  to 
40  t'lithoms;  in  this  channel  are  3  to  5  fathoms  water,  at  low  common  tides. 

BOSTON  LIGHTHOUSE  is  situated  on  the  Little  Brewster  Island,  on  the  north  Boston 
side  oi'  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.    The  light  is  a  revolving  one,  and  is  82  feet  above  the  Lighlhoute. 
level  of  the  sea. 

K.  by  S.  nearly,  and  not  quite  three  miles  from  Boston  light,  there  is  a  spot  4<)  fath- 
oms, called  Thiove's  Ledge. 

LONG  ISLAND  LIGHT,  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Lons:  Island,  is  on  a  tower  of  20  Long  Island 
feet,  with  a  lantern  7  feet  high,  bearing  from  Boston  light  W.  i  N.  Light. 

BOSTON  HARBOR. — From  Cape  Ann  to  Boston  lighthouse,  the  course  is  S.  W.  Boston 
J  S.,  distant  8J  leagues.  After  making  the  light,  with  the  wind  fair,  you  will  bring  it  Harbor, 
to  bear  W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W.,  and  then  run  for  it,  till  you  come  within  2  cables'  length 
of  it.  If  the  weather  is  bad. and  you  cannot  get  a  pilot  from  the  lighthouse,  after  running 
abreast  of  it,  so  as  to  bring  if  to  bear  N.  by  E.  you  may  run  W.  by  S.  two  miles,  until 
the  light  on  Long  Island  Head  bears  N.  W.  by  N. ;  then  steer  N.  W.  atjout  one  mile,  or 
until  the  old  light  is  hid  by  George's  Island,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  7  to  5  fath- 
oms, in  safety,  in  Nantasket  Road. 

The  main  entrance  into  Boston  Harbor  lies  between  Lighthouse  Island,  on  the  north 
side,  and  Point  Alderton  on  the  south,  (off  which  lies  a  shoal,  as  described  in  the  PLATE, 
to  wliich  the  reader  is  referred.) 

To  work  into  Boston  Bay,  you  may  stand  to  the  southward  till  you  bring  the  light  to 
bear  \V.  N.  W.,  and  to  the  northward  till  you  bring  it  to  bear  W.  S.  W.,  till  you  come 
within  one  league  of  the  light;  then  you  must  not  stand  to  the  northward  any  furtiier 
tiiiin  to  bring  it  to  bear  W.  by  N.,  and  to  the  southward  to  bring  it  to  bear  W.  N.  W. 
Yuu  may  anchor  in  the  bay  with  safety  if  th'.i  wind  is  oflF  shore.  If  you  fall  to  the  south- 
ward of  Boston  Harbor  look  out  for  Cohasset  Rocks,  on  which  there  is  a  light,  which  lie 
above  water,  distant  from  the  land  3  miles  ;  the  outer  part  of  which,  called  Minot's  Rock, 
has  a  black  buoy  on  it,  that  lies  in  5  fathoms  water,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard 
hand.  This  roik  comes  out  of  water  at  low  common  tid«s,  ond  bears  from  Boston 
lighthouse  S.  E.  i  E.  9  miles.  Your  course  from  this  buoy  to  the  lighthouse  is  N.  W. 
by  W.,  distant  3  leagues.  N.  N.  E.  from  Minot's,  four  miles  distant,  lies  a  lodge  of 
rocks,  which  is  small  and  bold ;  near  it  you  have  20  fathoms.  In  running  the  above 
course  and  distance,  you  will  pass  a  white  buoy  which  lies  in  4  fathoms  water,  that  is  on 
tile  N.  Vj.  part  of  Harden's  Rocks,  and  bears  S.  E  I  S.  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  Ij 
league  ;  which  rocks  may  be  seen  two  hours  before  low  water,  that  you  also  leave  on  your 
larboard  hand.  There  is  another  buoy  on  your  larboard  hand,  which  is  red,  that  lies  in 
3  fiitlioms  water,  on  •Point  Alderton.  When  in  the  middle  of  the  f  lighthouse  channel, 
steer  W.  by  N.  one  mile  distant,  to  the  beacon  on  the  spit,  which  you  may  run  within 
one-(|uarter  of  a  cable's  length  of,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  opposite  to  which 

*Thf,  sinolk  rock  off  the  north  part  of  Point  Alderton.  The  rock  on  which  th<' first 
fence  that  ruiiB  over  the  east  side  of  Strawberry  Hill ;  Newcoinb's  Barn  (on  Gallop's  Isluiid)  half 
way  butvveun  the  lighthouse  on  Long  Tslund  and  the  beacon  on  the  B))it.  When  Newconib's 
Biiiii  is  on  with  the  beacon,  you  pass  just  to  the  north  of  this  rock,  on  the  north  of  vvliicli  the 
buDv  is  placed,  and  near  it 

t.\lvRKs  FOR  A  SHOAL  IN  LioHTHOHsg  Channkl — The  east  low  point  of  Gallop's  Island,  just 
80011  cleiirof  tlie  N.  E.  of  George's  lal.iiid;  the  buoy  on  the  Centurion  just  clear  to  the-  north  of 
thn  (ii-y;it  Urowster.  This  is  somtithiii"  of  u  shoal  On  it,  at  low  water,  are  12  to  13  feet  Mr. 
W'ilsdii,  pilot  for  Boston  Harbor,  struck  on  this  shoal  in  a  ship  drawing  14  feot  K  iucLes  water. 
Theu  tliu  lldu  hud  ilowed  ubuut  three-quarters  of  on  hour. 


wmmm 


immim 


Mi^^*i"i«p«ipp 


mm 


U  ■ 


168  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Lighthouse,    lies  a  black  buoy  in  2  fathoms  water,  on  George's  Island  RocIib.     Between  the  ligbtbousa 
Buoys.  and  Gourge's  Island  lies  a  rock,  having  a  black  buoy  on  it,  called  the  Centurion,  in  mi,]. 

Lighthouse,  channel,  with  14  feet  water  on  it,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  W.  S.  W.  Your  course 
from  this  to  Gallop's  Island  Point  is  N.  W.  by  N.  half  a  mile  distant.  From  tiii^nce 
through  the  Narrows,  by  Nick's  Mate,  your  course  is  N.  N.  W.  half  a  mile  distiiiit. 
Nick's  Mate  has  a  monument  on  it,  and  must  bo  left  on  your  larboard  hand,  one  ciibiit'g 
length  distant,  and  then  steer  W.  by  N.  for  Castlu  Island,  distant  4  miles.  In  rutinitifr 
W.  by  N.  from  Nick's  Mate,  you  will  first  leave  a  white  spar  buoy  on  the  Lower  iMjd. 
die,  on  your  starboard  hand,  distant  3  miles  from  Nick's  Mate  ;  then,  three-quarters  nf  a 
mile  distant,  you  will  see  a  white  buoy,  which  is  on  the  Castle  Rocks,  in  two  fiithninH, 
which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  When  abreast  of  the  Castle,  steer  N.  N.  W. 
one-quarter  of  a  mile,  to  clear  the  Upper  Middle  Ground,  which  has  a  black  buoy  on  it 
in  2  fathoms  water,  that  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand ;  if  the  buoy  should  be  re- 
moved, run  N.  N.  W.  till  you  bring  the  two  northernmost  steeples  in  JJoston  a  honil. 
spike's  length  open,  then  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  2<i  miles,  which  will  carry  you  opposite  the 
town. 

Broad  Sound,  which  is  the  north  entrance  of 'Boston  Harbor,  is  not  a  proper  channel 

for  large  vessels;  but  those  who  frequent  it,  will  follow  the  directioi  a  here  given  :  when 

up  with  the  Graves,  which  are  a  parcel  of  dry  rocks  that  appear  white,  you  must  leave 

them  on  your  larboard  hand,  two  cables'  length  distant,  then  bring  them  to  bear  8.  K., 

Light.  and  run  8.  W.  by  W.  4  miles,  wheu  you  will  be  up  with  Long  Island  light.  You  leave 

it  on  ,>our  larboard  hand. 
Light.  In  passing  from  the  Graves  to  Long  Island  light,  you  will  see  two  buoys  on  your  lar- 

board hand,  one  of  which  is  on  a  reef  called  the  Devil's  Back,  is  painted  red,  and  lies  in  4 
fathoms  water;  the  other  is  onUam's  Head  Bar,  painted  black,  and  lies  in  15  feet  water 
on  the  N.  E.  end,  bearing  from  Long  Island  light  E.  N.  E.  Y'^ou  will  also  pass  a  white 
buoy  on  your  starboard  hand,  which  lies  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Faun  Bar,  in  '.'i  fathoms, 
(at  which  time  Long  Island  Head  light  will  bear  S.  W.,)  when  you  must  follow  the  di- 
rections above  for  the  town. 

A  bluck  buoy  with  a  white  vane,  has  been  placed  neor  to  the  Barrel  Rock,  which  lies  in 
the  Broad  Sound  channel,  at  the  entrance  of  Boston  Harbor.  The  buoy  is  moored  about 
7  fathoms  N.  E.  from  the  rock,  in  8i  fathoms  water,  about  Ij  mile  W.  by  S.  from  the 
body  of  the  Graves,  one  half  mile  N.  W.  from  the  Devil's  Back,  W.  N.  W.  from  the 
house  on  Green  Island,  and  N.  E.  %  E.  from  the  tree  on  Long  Island  Head.  This  rock 
is  10  or  Ivi  feet  long,  und  6  or  (i  feet  wide,  ranging  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.,  having  4  oro 
feet  of  water  upon  it  ot  low  tide,  and  ^i  fathoms  round  it.  Vessels  may  jjass  witii  salety 
^  either  side  of  the  buoy,  giving  it  a  berth  of  12  or  15  fathoms,  but  the  eastern  passage  is 

said  to  be  preferable  for  strangers. 

The  Lower  Middle  (iround  lying  in  the  way,  the  directions  are  as  follows,  viz. 
The  Lower  Middle  Ground,  which  lies  on  the  north  cide  of  tho  channel,  a  little  ai)ovo 
Spectacle  Island,  is  in  part  dry  at  low  wator.  On  the  eastern  part  is  a  red  buoy,  anil  on 
the  western  part  is  a  black  buoy,  in  two  fathoms  water,  both  which  you  leave  on  your 
starboard  hand,  at  which  time  you  may  see  the  white  buoy  on  the  Custle  Rocks,  bulure 
mentioned. 

Pudding  Point,  or  Shirley  Gut  Entrance,  is  between  Faun  Bar  and  Wins*,  ''s  Bur. 
Y'ou  must  bring  it  to  bear  8.  W.  and  run  for  it,  leoving  Shirley  Point  on  the  sinrboHid 
and  Doer  Island  on  the  larboard  hand.  The  channel  from  this  gut  to  Boston  is  so  crook- 
ed and  iHirrow,  that  no  person  should  attempt  to  go  in  with  a  large  vessel,  unless  ac(|uuint- 
ed,  without  a  pilot. 

In  conse(|uenco  of  part  of  Deer  Island's  washing  away,  a  shoal  has  made  off  from  the 
S.  or  S.  W.  point,  in  about  a  W.  8.  \V.  direction,  called  the  Handkerchief,  about  40  or 
High  water.  50  fathoms  long,  ranging  about  E.  N.  E.  and  VV.  8.  W.  It  is  covered  at  high  water, 
but  dry  at  very  low  tides,  which  makes  it  dangerous  for  vessels  coming  in  and  going  out 
through  Broad  Sound.  A  black  buoy  is  now  placed  near  the  point,  which  must,  in  pas- 
sing, be  left  to  the  northward,  when  passing  through  Broad  Sound. 
Hypocrite  HYPOCRITE  PASSAGE, — In  coming  from  sea,  you   leave  the  Graves,  Roaring 

Passage.  Bull,  (which  lies  between  the  west  end  of  the  (Jravos  and  the  east  end  of  (ireen  Lliind,) 
Green  Island,  and  Half-tide  Rocks,  on  your  starboard,  and  the  Outer  Brewster,  Litllo 
ar.d  Great  Calf  Island,  on  your  larl)oard  hand.  [Notk. — Half-tide  Rocks  lie  to  tlx!  west 
of  Green  Island,  one-third  of  a  mile,  and  opposite  Little  Calf  Island,  distant  about  half  a 
mile,  and  come  out  at  half  ebb.] 

Giving  the  Graves  a  berth  of  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  the  course  up  for  Little  Culf  Isl- 
and's N.  E.  point  is  about  W.  by  S.  distant  1|  mile  from  the  Graves.  As  you  pasi-  up, 
give  the  south  side  of  Green  Island  a  berth  of  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  avi)id  a  ledge  «i 
rocks  that  runs  off  from  the  south  side  of  the  island,  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile.  When 
nearly  up  with  the  N.  E.  point  of  tho  Little  Calf,  give  it  a  berth  of  about  40  or  50  fathoms, 
and  after  passing  it,  steer  for  the  north  point  of  tho  Great  Calf  Island,  from  the  west  end 
of  which  the  course  is  S.  W.,  or  run  up  by  it,  keeping  the  S.  W.  liead  of  Pettick's  lisl- 


^■^M^RWPB 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


169 


md  npon  to  the  west  of  the  beacon  on  the  spit.  In  pnHsing  between  Lovell  ^  Islnnd  and 
the  beiicon  on  the  Hpit,  keep  neiirogt  the  JHliind,  ns  a  ledge  of  nicks  cxtencls  iVom  the  ;  pit 
from  fiO  to  HO  futhonm,  and  comes  out  of  wiiter  at  liidf  ebb,  lyins  iiboiit  one-third  of  a  mile 
N.  K.  I'roiH  the  beacon.  'Tliero  \»  alHoa  ledj;t)  (or  rock)  lying  about  midwny  between  tlie 
beacon  and  the  S.  E.  point  of  LovoH'h  Ixiund,  having  (j  feet  on  it  iif  low  flprinij  tides. 
Alter  pHHsing  the  beacon,  you  enter  the  IS  arrows.  Lovell's  Island  niukos  the  east  aide  of 
the  entrance  to  the  Narrows. 

Marks  taken  on  shore,  at  the  Old  Lif^hthouse. 

White  Buoy  of  Harding's  Rocks S.  E.  i  S. 

Red  Buoy  on  Point  Alderton S.  S.  E. 

Bliick  Buoy  on  the  Centurion VV.  .S.  W. 

Bliick  Buoy  on  George's  Island  Rocks \V.  by  S.  1  S. 

S.  E.  hiMid  of  (Jeorge's  Island W.  by  S.  J  S. 

Beacon  on  the  sjjit W.  f  S. 

East  head  of  Pettick's  Island S.  W.  by  W. 

Outer  rocks  of  Cohasset S.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 

Lighthouse  on  Long  Island  Head VV.  ^  N. 

Bearings  of  sundry  places  from  the  East  Head  of  Nahant. 

Soutli  side  of  Nahant  Rock N.  N.  E.  4,  E. 

Pig  Rocks,  (south  dry  rocks) N.  E.  i  E. 

Hidf-way  Rock N.  E.  by  E. 

^'inker's  Island  (south  point) N.  K.  \  E. 

Baker's  Islnnd  lights N.  E.  i  E. 

East  «ind  of  the  Graves S.  by  E.  J  E. 

Long  Island  lighthouse S.  W.  j'  S. 

North  point  of  Deer  Island S.  W. 

The  buoys  in  Boston  Harbor  have  been  marked  as  shown  by  the  annexed  diagram : 

LIGHTHOU.se  CHANNEL  BUOYS. 


POINT  hunt's  TODDV  FAL*E  >()RTH  .SOUTH  CKOniiE'S    ISL- 

f  ALDERTON.  LEDOE.  ROCKS.  SPIT.  CE>TURI0N.    CENTURION.         AJtD    K0CK3. 


%. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


^ 


// 


4^ 


:/. 


1.0 


|45 


121    12.5 


I.I 


1^1^ 

us 


2.2 


•-  llg 


ia_ 


11-25  111.4   11.6 


6"     


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


M  WIST  WAIN  STRKT 

Wfc '.'»'», N.Y.  14580 

(716)  875-4503 


4^ 


e 


W1IPI«^^W"*"»^I"WI"^W!PPPI« 


WWWWWT" 


170 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


BROAD  SOUND  BUOYS. 


Ite^F^ 


V--2L 


Lighthouse. 


Lighthouse. 


Lighthouse. 


High  water 


Boston 
Lighthouse 
to  Cape  Eli- 
zabeth 
Lights. 


Cohnssrl 
Rocks,  or 
Minot's 
Ledge. 


BARRKL 
RUCK. 


devil's 

BACK. 


FAWN 
BAR. 


LITTLB  Af.DRICH'S    RAM's    LOWER  BOOT  0^1  CASTLE 
FAWN.       LEUOK.        HEAD.   LOWER  MIDDLE.   HOCK. 


Vessels  outwiird  bound,  from  Boston  lifihthouse,  who  would  wish  to  fall  in  with  Cnpe 
Cod,  the  course  is  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  distant  11  lengues,  thence  3  leagues  to  the  lijjhthouse. 
When  up  with  the  lighthouse,  and  it  benrs  S.  W..  2  leagues  distant,  you  may  then  steer 
S.  S.  E.,  which  will  carry  you  out  of  the  south  chnnnel. 

Vessels  in  Boston  Bay,  who  put  away  for  Cape  Cod  Harbor,  must  endeavour  to  fnHin 
with  Race  Point  lighthouse,  which  contains  a  revolving  light,  and  run  for  it  until  witliin 
half  a  mile  ;  when  it  bears  E.  N.  E.  haul  up  E.  S.  E.,  or  as  near  as  the  wind  will  permit, 
and  anchor  in  from  10  to  4  fathoms,  in  Herring  Cove,  where  is  a  good  lee.  with  the  wiml 
from  N.  N.  E.  to  S.  K.  by  E.  Should  the  wind  shift  to  the  N.  W.  Provincetown  Har- 
bor is  under  the  lee,  to  which  we  refer.  Should  you  first  make  Cape  Cod  light,  bring  it 
to  bear  E.  by  N..  and  run  for  it  untilyou  have  soundings  in  14  or  15  fathoms  water  ;  then 
steer  N.  E.  until  the  light  bears  E.  by  S.;  then  run  in  N.  W.  for  the  harbor.  The  course 
from  Boston  liglithouse  to  Sandwich  is  first  S.  E.  by  E.  3  leagues,  to  Cohasset  Rocks, 
thence  to  Sanciwich  .S.  S.  E.  11  leagues. 

Between  Cnpe  Ann  and  Cape  Cod  you  will  have  from  50  to  17  fathoms,  the  latter  4J 
miles  N.  by  E.  from  the  Race  light,  with  35  fathoms  inside.  S.  E  byE.  \  E.  from  Boston 
light  to  the  f^Mce  light,  there  is  a  ridge  of  rocUs  and  sand  of  from  7  to  23  fathoms  wiitcr, 
with  a  small  gully  of  37  fathoms,  20  miles  from  Boston  light.  To  the  north  of  this  ridge 
the  bottom  is  generally  muddy,  and  the  depth  from  40  to  50  fathoms. 

At  full  and  change,  it  is  hisih  wafer  off  Race  Pointat  10  o'clock  and  45  minuff  i.  Ves- 
sels in  leaving  Cnpe  Cod,  bound  to  Boston,  should  calculate  the  tide,  as  tho  (lood  sets 
strong  to  the  S.  W.  off  Cnpe  God,  from  the  Race  to  Chatham;  flood  sets  to  the  south, 
ebb  to  the  north  ;  southern  tide.  9  hours;  northern  tide,  3  hours. 

The  uf)()er  buoys  in  Boston  Harbor  will  be  taken  up  during  the  winter  season;  but 
those  in  the  vicinity,  incliKlinj;  Salem  and  Cape  Ann,  are  not  taken  up  during  the  winter, 

BOSTON  LI(;HTH0USI>:  to  CAPE  ELIZABETH  LIGHTS— From  Boston 
lighthouse  to  Thilt(■her'.^  Island  lights,  which  lie  two  miles  east  from  Cape  Ann,  the  course 
is  N.  E.  A  N.,  ami  the  distnnce  8  leagues  ;  but  to  clear  the  Londoner,  which  you  lenveon 
your  larboard  hand  wlien  bound  to  Cape  Elizabeth,  the  course  is  N.  E.  by  E.  About 
halfway,  and  near  the  north  shore, is  a  high  bold  rock,  called  Half-way  Ro'k,  of  abnut3l) 
fathoms  diameter,  (on  which  is  a  monument)  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  distant  7'j  miles  from 
the  eastern  point  of  ^'ape  Ann,  bi^fore  described. 

From  Thatcher's  Island  E.  S.  E.  one  half  of  a  mile,  lies  a  ledge  of  rocks,  called  the 
Londoner,  which  show  themselves  nt  half  tide,  and  extend  E.  N.  E  and  W.  .S.  W.,ili3- 
tant  two  miles  from  tli('  island.  If  you  should  be  forced  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Ann, 
there  is  a  very  clean  bay,  called  Ipswich  Bay,  and  north-east  from  it  lies  the  harbor  of 
Portsmouth,  the  entrance  to  which  is  formed  by  Great  Island  on  the  west,  and  Gerrisii's 
Island  on  the  east,  i>ii  the  former  of  which  the  town  of  Newcastle  is  built. 

From  Cape  Ann  lights  to  tho  Isles  of  Shoals  light,  the  course  is  N.  }  E.  distant  oj 
leagues. 

COHASSET  ROCKS,  or  MINOT'S  LEDGK,  is  eight  miles  S.  E.  i  E  from 
Boston  light,  and  six  miles  N  i  W.  from  Scitunte  light,  and  consists  of  15  large  rocks ont 
of  water,  and  ledges  all  round  these  rocks.  Thr*  nearest  land  is  Scituate,  3  mdes  distniit. 
These  rocks  extend  north  and  south  from  34  to  4  miles.  Small  vessels  pass  between  tho 
rocks.     The  depth  of  water  round  tho  rocks  is  6  and  6  fathoms. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


171 


T  0:1  CASTLE 
ll>LE.   KOCK. 

fall  in  with  Cnpe 
to  the  li<:)ithouse. 
u  niny  then  steer 

ndenvour  to  fnllin 
for  it  until  within 
wind  will  permit, 
ee,  with  the  wind 
rovincetown  Har- 
Coil  light,  bring  it 
lioms  WHter ;  then 
rbor.  The  course 
)  CohnBset  Rociis, 

niDS,  the  liittf-r'lj 
K.  from  Boston 

3  flltllOlllS  WHttT, 

north  of  tliis  ridge 

5  niinutf- ).  Ves- 
ns  fho  flood  sets 
sets  to  the  south, 

ntor  senson ;  but 
ing  the  winter, 
S. — From  Boston 
e  Ann,  the  course 
hich  you  lenveon 

K.  bv  E.  AlMut 
Ro"k.  (if  about 30 
lint  73  miles  from 

rocks,  called  tlie 
id  W.  S.  \V..dis- 
ird  of  Ciipe  Ann, 
ies  the  hiirbor  of 
i>st,  1111(1  Gerrisli's 
ilt. 
3  E.   distant  5S 

1.  E.  i  E  from 
1.5  liirijo  rocKsout 
3  nnli'i»  ilistnnt. 
pass  between  tlie  I 


On  Minot's  Ledge  there  is  a  fixed  light,  66  feet  above  high  water^  ,,  Light. 

There  is  a  passage  within  Cohasset  Rocks,  used  by  coasters. 

SCITUATE. — The  lighthouse  at  the  entrance  of  Scituate  Harbor  is  discontinued.         Seiluate. 

From  the  northerly  part  of  Cedar  Point,  a  ledge,  called  Long  Ledge,  extends  N.  N. 
W.  nearly  one  mile;  so  that  vessels  falling  in  a  little  more  than  one  mile  northward  of  the 
point,  may  bring  the  point  to  bear  south;  and  if  they  make  good  their  course  north,  they 
will  clear  the  outer  ledges  of  Cohasset  Rocks :  half  a  mile  east  of  the  body  of  the  poiot 
will  clear  Cedar  Point,  Long  Ledge,  and  the  first  Cliff  Ledge. 

[Note. — There  are  ledges  extending  from  all  the  four  rlitTs,  but  none  between  them; 
8DU  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  will  clear  all,  except  frigates  and  large  vessels.] 

From  the  point  running  S.  S.  E.  will  clear  Brandt's  Point,  consequently,  giving  the 
point  half  a  mile  berth,  there  will  be  no  danger  in  running  S   S.  E. 

There  is  a  meeting-h  .-use  about  two  miles  W.  by  N.  from  the  point;  and  a  farm-house 
near  the  northwest  side  of  the  harbor,  with  two  large  barns  a  little  north.  To  go  into 
the  harbor  (the  mouth  of  which  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide)  bring  the  meeting- 
house or  farm-house  to  bear  about  W.  by  N.  from  the  middle  of  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor, oud  run  in  W.  by  N.  for  the  faim-Uouse,  until  you  have  passed  the  bar,  which  is 
a  hard  bed  of  stones  and  gravel  th  it  does  not  shift;  and  after  passing  the  bar,  and 
coming  on  sandy  bottom,  haul  up  and  anchor  near  the  beach  on  the  south  side  of  the 
harbor. 

A  ledge  off  Brandt  Point  has  been  determined  by  Lt.  C.  H.  Davis,  U.  ^.  Coast  Survey. 
It  has  eight  feet  water  on  it,  and  the  following  bearings : 

Gurnet  light  bearing  S.  i  E.  4i  miles  distant;  Brandt  Point  1^  mile  distant;  and  due 
west  from  the  shore,  li  mile,  there  is  a  buoy  on  Philip's  Ledge,  |  of  a  mile  in-shore  of 
it,benrin2W.  N.  W.  i  W. 

GURNET  LIGHTS On  Gurnet  Point,  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance  to  Ply-  Gurnet 

mouth  Harbor,  there  are  two  lighthouses,  86  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  11  feet  6 
inches  apart,  and  containing  fixed  lights,  and  should  not  be  brought  in  range  when  to  the 
northward  of  them ;  but  to  the  southward,  you  may  bring  them  in  one,  which  is  a  good 
mark  to  clear  Brown's  Island  or  sand  bank. 

PLYMOUTH  HARBOR.*— The  high  land  of  Manomet  bears  from  the  lights  S.  i 


Buoy. 


lights. 


W.  .54  miles;  Manomet  Point  S.  S.  E.  6  miles;  and  Brandt's  Point  N.  4  W.  about 
6  miles;  Saquash  Head  W.  4  S.  3  miles;  the  easternmost  part  of  Browu's  Islands  or 
shoiils  that  dries,  S.  S.  W.  one  and  a  quarter  mile,  and  the  Gurnet  Rock  from  the  body 
of  the  lighthouse  E.  by  S.  i  S.  one-third  part  of  a  mile ;  on  this  rock  you  have  but  3  feet 
at  low  water,  at  which  time  all  the  soundings  were  taken,  and  34  fathoms  along  side  at  the 
enme  time.  A  white  buoy  is  placed  near  this  rock,  bearing  £.  S.  E.  from  the  lighthouse, 
distant  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  When  you  have  shut  in  the  Sandy  Hill  with  the  Gur- 
net Head,  you  are  clear  of  the  rock  ;  after  which  you  must  mind  not  to  haul  in  too  close 
to  the  Head,  as  there  are  many  sunken  rocks  some  distance  from  the  shore.  When  you 
bring  Saquasli  Head  to  bear  W.  by  N.  you  may  steer  up  W.  by  S.,  and  if  you  are  bound 
for  Plymouth  you  must  keep  that  course  for  a  large  red  cliff  on  the  main,  which  is  a  very 
good  mark  to  carry  you  clear  of  Dick's  Flat;  then  you  must  steer  more  southerly  for 
Beach  Point,  or  run  up  until  you  are  abreast  of  Saquash  Head,  giving  it  one  quarter  of  a 
mile  distance;  then  steer  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  which  will  clear  you  of  Dick's  Flat,  and  carry 
jou  diiectly  for  Bench  Point,  keeping  within  15  or  20  yards  of  the  Snndy  J'oint,  steering 
away  for  the  sonthward,  keeping  that  distance  until  you  have  shut  in  the  lights,  where  you 
may  anchor  in  3  and  4  fathoiiis.  but  the  channel  is  very  narrow,  having  nothing  but  a  flat  all 
the  way  to  Plymouth,  except  this  small  channel,  which  runs  close  by  this  neck  of  land; 
you  will  have  4  and  5  fathoms  close  to  this  point.  If  you  are  bound  into  the  Cowyard  you 
must  steer  as  before  directed,  which  will  clear  you  of  the  stone  monument  on  Dick's  Flat; 
and  that  on  the  Muscle  Bank,  both  of  which, you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  you 
may'  nndior  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water.  If  bound  to  Kingston,  you  will  keep  the  house  on 
(SurriPt  Head  just  open  with  Saquash  Head,  until  you  have  opened  the  high  pines  with 
Clerk's  Island  ;  then  you  are  clear  of  the  Muscle  Bank,  when  you  may  steer  N.  W. 
until  you  have  three  fathoms  at  low  water,  not  running  into  less. 

In  coming  from  the  northward,  bound  into  Plymouth,  yon  must  not  bring  the  lights 
more  southerly  than  S.  by  W.  to  avoid  High  Pino  Ledge,  which  lies  north  from  the  Gur- 
net Head,  about  24  or  3  miles.     When  you  are  ou  the  shoalest  part  of  this  ledge,  some 


Plymouth 
Harbor. 


*  This  bnrboris  cnjincions,  hut  shallnw.  and  is  fonned  by  a  Inns  and  narrow  nerk  of  land, 
riillivl  .Siiltliiiii.ii;  I'tvich,  (■xtcii'liii!:  southerly  IVniii  Mainlili  Itl,  anil  teiniinaliiig  nt  the  Gurnet 
Hoiid,  iiiid  by  a  smiillcr  bi'inh  within,  riinniiiijiu  an  njiposit"  ilireotion,  and  coiiui'ctetl  with  the 
ninin  IjuuI  near  lOcl  liiver,  nl)  uit  tlivfe  iiiiloH  t'roiii  the  town.  1  'n  Sallbouse  Huaeli  is  jilaced  one 
of  the  lintH  erected  mid  niiiiiilaiiied  by  the  Hiiinuiie  Suciety  of  Mas^iiicliusetts  for  the  i-eceptiou 
and  irlicC  c)t  »iii|)wiccked  iiiiiriiicrs.  There  is  a  lireiicli  in  the  inner  beuuh,  which  exposes  the 
ebiiipiug,  even  at  the  wharves,  duiiiig  an  easterly  storm. 


mif^^rmfK 


172  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

part  of  which  nppenrs  nt  low  ebb,  yoii  will  have  the  high  pines  in  range  with  Cnptnin'a 
Hill,  which  .villthen  bear  W.by  S.  This  ledge  of  rocks  lies  li  mile  from  the  shore,  ex- 
tending about  N.  N.  E.  for  near  n  mile,  and  close  to  this  ledge  you  will  have  4  and  5  fath- 
oms,  which  deepens  gradually  as  you  run  from  it  to  the  eastward :  within  one  mile,  ^ 
will  have  10  and  12  fathoms. 

In  coming  from  the  southward,  bound  into  Plymouth,  you  must  not  open  the  northern 
light  to  the  westward,  but  keep  them  in  one,  which  will  carry  you  in  5  fathoms  by  the 
easternmost  part  of  Brown's  Islands  or  Shoal,  keeping  that  course  until  you  are  witliin 
half  a  mile  of  Gurnet  Head  or  nigher,  where  you  will  have  but  4  fathoms;  then  Saqunsh 
Head  will  bear  W.  by  N.  a  little  northerly,  and  the  two  outermost  trees  on  the  \\eni  in 
one;  then  you  may  steer  directly  for  them,  until  you  bring  the  lights  to  bear  E,  N.  E. 
anc  the  house  on  Saqnash  Head  to  bear  N.  W..  just  open  with  the  first  sandy  bencli 
where  you  may  anchor  in  4  fathoms  in  Saqnash  Road,  good  clear  bottom  ;  but  if  you  nre 
bound  for  Plymouth  or  the  Cow-ynrds.  you  must  steer  as  before  directed.  If  in  the  night 
it  is  best  to  anchor  here,  as  it  is  difficult  to  make  Beach  Point  (as  it  is  mostly  covered  at 
high  water)  if  dark,  or  go  into  the  Cowyard. 

In  turning  into  Plymouth,  you  must  stand  to  the  northward  into  not  less  than  3  fnfli- 
oms,  as  it  runs  a  flat  a  long  way  from  the  Ournet  Head  to  Saquash;  and  from  both  the 
heads  lies  off  a  point  of  rocks  a  good  way  from  the  shore,  many  of  them  but  just  under 
water  a,  low  ebbs.  And  all  the  way  from  Saquash  to  Muscle  Bank,  you  have  shoal  wiiter- 
BO  that  you  must  not  stand  in  less  than  before  mentioned.  And  in  standing  over  for  the 
Bands  to  tiie  southward,  you  muot  go  about  as  soon  as  you  shoalen  your  water  to  4  fiitli- 
oms,  as  it  is  bold  to.  and  you  may  observe  the  rips,  unless  it  is  very  smooth.  This  sand 
'  extends  from  abreast   of  the  lights  to  Beach  Point,  most  of  which  is  dry  at  low  ebbg. 

From  the  easternmost  nart  of  this  sand  to  Dick's  Flat,  it  rounds  witVi  a  consideniMe 
sweep;  you  have  but  5  fathoms  water  from  the  easternmost  part  of  Brown's  Isliiiid  to  the 
Gurnet  Head,  and  not  more  than  7  or  8  until  you  are  abreast  of  Dick's  Flat,  where  you 
will  have  13  or  14  fathoms  in  a  deep  hole,  and  then  shoalen  to  5  fathoms  abreast  of  Bench 
Point. 

If  you  should  full  in  to  the  southward  of  Brown's  Islands  or  Shoal,  between  them  and 
Manomi't  Hill,  where  you  have  20  fathoms  in  some  places,  you  must  not  attempt  to  run 
for  the  lights,  until  you  have  them  shut  in  one  with  the  other,  when  they  will  bear  N.  N. 
W.  i  W.  ;  if  you  do,  you  may  depend  on  being  on  Brown's  Islands  or  shoals,  as  there  is 
no  passage  for  even  a  boat  at  low  water. 

In  coining  in  from  the  northward  in  the  night,  you  must  not  bring  the  light  to  bear  more 
southerly  rliiin  S.  Iiy  \V.  tonvoid  High  Pine  Ledge,  and  keep  that  course  until  you  have 
them  to  bear  N.  W.,  or  N.  W.  by  W.,  when  you  will  be  clearof  the  rock,  and  mny  steer 
up  W.  by  S.  until  -ou  have  lights  to  bearE.  N.  E.  where  you  had  best  anchor  in  the  iiiirht. 
He)-e  the  lido  runs  strong  chnnnel  course  from  the  (lurnet  to  the  Race  Point  of  Cnpo 
Coil;  the  course  is  K.  4  N.  about  0  leagues  distiint;  and  from  the  Gurnet  to  the  point 
going  into  Cape  Cod  Harbor,  is  E.  by  S.  7  letigues. 

If  you  should  make  the  lights  in  hard  norlheilyor  N.  W.  winds,  and  cannot  get  into 
Plymouth,  you  mny  then  run  for  Cape  ( 'oil  Harbor,  bringing  the  lights  to  bear  W.  by  N, 
and  steer  directly  for  Race  Point  light,  following  the  directions  given  for  entering  Prov- 
incetown  Hiirhor,  by  the  (ixcil  light  on  Long  Point,  and  come  to  anchor.  If  it  should 
blow  SI)  hiird  that  you  riinnot  turn  up  the  harbor,  you  may  anchor  off  the  point,  clenr  bot- 
toMi ;  you  have  8  and  !J  fathoms  very  nigh  the  shore,  so  that  there  is  no  danger  of  being  on 
it,  unless  vf-ry  dark. 

At  the  (lUinet  and  Plymouth  the  tides  are  much  the  same  as  at  Boston;  that  is,  a  S. 
E.  moon  makes  full  sea. 
Cape.  Cod  CAPK  CUD  LKJllT.— .\  lighthouse   containing  a  fixed  light  200  foot  above  high 

Light.  water  murk,  is  erected  on  the  Clay  Pounds,  hisrh  liiiids  t)f  Cape  Cod. 

Race  Point         K.VCE   POIN  I'. — (Cape  Cod.)     On  this  point  is  a  revolving  light,  1.5.5  feet  above  the 
Light.  level  ol  the  sen.     It  cannot  i)e  seen  It)'  vessels  inward  bound,  mitil  it  bears  .S.  ,S.  W.  }  .'<, 

Long  Point        hOSG  POINT. — On  Long  Point,   nt  the  entrance  f>f   Provincrtown   Harbor,  is  ii 
Light.  liglitliniise  riintiiiiiiii'j;  a  (ixeil  light,  and  eli-vnted  2.')  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sen. 

Cape  Cod  C.\PK  COD  ll.MIBOK.— (Proviiiretowii.)     This  is  one  of  the  best  Imrbors  on  ihis 

Harbor.  coast.     If  bound  into  tliis  liiirbnr  fnini  the  northwiiril.  you  may  run  within   liiilf  a  mile 

of  the  lighthouse  mi  Race  Point;  utter  piissinu  it.  and  it  beiirs  east,  steer  S.  1^.  K. -.'j 
miles,  when  the  light  on  the  Hiahlamls  will  bciir  K.  Iiy  N. ;  then  run  for  it  Ii  iiiili', 
which  will  put  you  in  the  fiiirwiiy  of  the  hiirlior  ;  then  haul  ii()  N.  X.  \V.  westerly,  ii 
good  mile,  when  you  may  anchor  in  .5  or  7  t'lithoins,  with  the  light  on  Long  Point  beiiriii^ 
fci.  W.  by  S. 

Large  hhips  should  bring  the  lighten  Rnce  Point  to  bear  N.  by  W.anil  steer  .'^.  by  E. 
to  puss  Wood  Eiiil  Hiir  in  10  fnthoiiis:  as  soon  us  the  light  on  Loii"  Point  bears  N.E. 
by  N.,  steer  N.  K.  until  in  rf  t'nihoms  wnter,  when  anchor,  the  light  on  the  Highluniis  of 
Ca|)e  (."lid  blearing  from  E.  i  N.  to  E.  A  S. 

Good  anchorage  may  be  found  in  a  N.  E.  giil(>,  by  running  for  Race  Point  light,  giving 


n^vqpiiPPHiiiPlipR 


■iiiiip 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


178 


on ;  tlint  is,  a  S. 
foet  above  liigh 


'oiiit  liglit,  giving 


itoDe-third  of  a  mile  distanco  as  you  pass  it,  as  soon  as  it  bears  E.  N.  E.,  when  you  will 
be  snfe  with  the  wind  from  N.  N.  E.  to  S.  E.  by  E.;  haul  up  E.  S.  E.  and  anchor  in  from 
10  to  4  fathoms. 

Vessels  inward  bound,  who  fall  in  with  the  back  of  Cape  Cod,  may  bring  the  light  to  bear 
g,  \V.  2  leagues  distant,  and  then  steer  W.  N.  W.  for  Boston  lighthouse,  which  contains 
8  revolving  light. 

When  up  with  Race  Point,  you  will  find  it  very  bold  about  one  mile  to  the  westward 
of  the  lighthouse,  and  it  may  be  known  by  a  number  of  fish-houses  on  it.  About  one 
mile  to  the  southward  of  Race  Point  is  what  is  called  Herring  Cove,  where  you  may 
linve  good  anchorage  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  the  wind  from  £.  to  N.  N.  E.,  in  4,  or 
even  in  3  fathoms  water. 

Id  passing  Race  Point  to  the  southward,  you  must  give  it  a  berth  of  one  mile,  as  there 
is  a  long  flat  of  sand  that  lies  to  the  southward  of  said  point.  You  must  not  haul  to  the 
eastward  until  you  come  near  Herring  Cove. 

Ill  running  from  Race  Point  to  Wood  End,  after  you  pass  the  Black  Land  or  Hum- 
mocks, you  will  come  up  with  a  low  sandy  beach  which  forms  the  harbor,  extending  be- 
twoen  two  and  three  miles  to  Wood  End,  which  is  difficult  to  be  distinguished  in  the 
night;  it  is  very  bold,  and  you  will  have  23  fathoms  water  within  one-quarter  of  a  mile  of 
the  shore. 

In  beatmg  into  Cape  Cod  Harbor,  you  must  keep  the  eastern  shore  aboard  until  you 
get  into  6  fathoms  water.  Stand  no  farther  to  the  westward  than  to  bring  the  light  to 
bear  E.  by  S.,  as  there  is  a  long  spit  of  sand  runs  oft'  from  the  western  shore,  which  bo- 
JDg  very  bold,  you  will  have  1 1  fathoms  water  within  a  stone's  throw  of  the  shore. 

If  it  blows  so  hard  that  you  cannot  beat  into  the  harbor,  you  will  have  good  anchoring 
without,  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms  water.  Or  if  it  blows  hard  at  N.  E.,  bring  Race  Point 
light  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  steer  S.  E.  by  S.  G  leagues,  which  course  will  carry  you 
into  Weilfleet.  In  steering  this  course,  you  will  make  Harwich  right  ahead ;  when  you 
open  the  bay,  you  will  bring  Billingsgate  Island  light  on  your  larboard  hand,  when  you 
may  haul  to  the  eastward,  and  anchor  safe  from  all  winds. 

BILLINGSGATE  ISLAND  LIGHTHOUSE  is  on  Billingsgate  Island,  at  the  en-  Billingsgate 
trance  of  Weilfleet  Bay,  five  leagues  S.  E.  by  S.  from  Race  Point  light,  and  contains  a  Island 
Axed  light.     It  is  40  feet  above  high  water,  and  is  situated  so  far  up  Barnstable  Bay  that  Lighthouse. 
it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  any  other. 

Billingsgate  Island  is  about  13  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea  at  high  water.  It  is  high 
water  in  this  bay,  at  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  at  11  o'clock ;  the  rise  of  the  spring 
tides  is  from  12  to  14  feet;  common  tides  from  9  to  11  feet.  From  the  west  end  of  HW-Tide. 
llngsgnte  Island  extends  a  long  shoal  of  hard  sand  10  or  11  miles,  in  a  W.  by  S.  i  S.  to 
W.  by  N.  from  the  lighthouse,  and  in  a  N.  W.  to  N.  N.  W.  direction,  5  or  6  miles;  at 
the  distance  of  1<1  to  2  miles  from  the  light,  are  about  8  feet  at  low  water,  common  tides ; 
and  the  meeting-house  with  a  steeple  in  Brewster,  S.  by  E.,  at  a  distance  of  5  miles  from 
the  lighthouse,  10  to  12  feet,  the  meeting-house  bearing  S.  S.  E.,  at  the  distance  of  7 
miles,  ai  fathoms  of  water,  the  meeting-house  bearing  S.  E.  by  R. :  at  these  depths  of 
water  the  lighthouse  bore  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  by  N.  i  N.  Crossing  this  shoal  point  of 
Huts,  you  drop  into  4  to  5  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  40  fathoms  from  the  edge  of  this 
shoal,  when  the  lighthouse  will  then  bear  E.  N.  E. 

In  coming  around  the  shoal  approach  no  nearer  than  2h  fathoms.  Soon  as  you  deepen 
to  4  fathoms,  haul  up  for  the  light  and  anchor. 

Vessels  drawing  12  feet  of  water,  or  upwards,  should  bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  E. 
N.  E.  to  N.  E.  by  E.,  and  steer  in  E.  by  S.  to  E.  S.  E.,  until  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  by 
W.,  when  they  will  have  good  anchorage  in  3  to  4  fathoms,  low  water,  common  tides, soft 
muddy  bottom,  and  distance  from  the  lighthouse  14  to  15  mile  ;  Brewster  meeting-house 
on  with  a  wind-mill  that  stands  not  far  from  it,  when  they  will  bear  S.  by  W.  %  W. ;  also 
the  north  niucting-houso,  that  stands  on  a  hill  in  Eastham,  and  no  other  building  near  to 
it,  bore  at  the  same  time  E.  i  N. 

The  following  bearings  and  distances  are  taken  from  the  lighthouse  : — The  high  land  of 
the  north  point  of  Manomet  W.  by  N.  |  N..  distance  about  eight  leagues  ;  entrance  of 
BaiMstable,  the  Bliick  Land,  called  by  some  Scargo  Hill,  in  Dennis,  S.  W.,  distant  IG 
miles,  S.  W.  4  S.  about  11  miles,  Brewster  meeting-house  with  a  steeple  to  it,  S.  by  W. 
to  S.  9  miles;  entrance  of  Orleans,  S.  E.  J  S.  6  miles;  Eastham,  north  meeting-house, 
S.  E.  by  E.  \  E.  4  miles ;  Silver  Spring  Harbor  of  Eastham,  E.  by  N.  J  N.  4  miles.  The 
above  places  are  all  barred  harbors,  and  flats  extend  oft'  shore  from  one  to  two  miles,  with 
httle  water  over  them. 

There  is  a  rock  in  the  passage-way  up  to  Weilfleet,  that  is  about  12  feet  long  and  8  feet 
broad,  called  Bay  Rock,  on  which  there  are  one  or  two  feet  water  at  low  tide,  and  round 
this  rock  are  nine  to  eleven  feet  water  at  low  tide,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  E.  by  S.  4 
S.,  distant  one  and  n  quarter  mile.  When  on  this  rock,  Chipman's  wind-mill,  which  is 
the  south  mill  in  Wellileet,  a  little  open  to  the  north  of  a  large  rock  called  Blue  Rock,  by 
Boine,aDd  stands  near  the  shore  of  Weilfleet,  when  it  will  bear  N.  N.  E.  ^  E. ;  this  rock 


l!PiHiPHPW«P"^^iF«'"""P«FIWi 


"^iRPP 


174 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Barnstable 
Bay. 


Tides. 

High  water. 

Barnstable 

Light. 

Barnstable 

Harbor. 

Liglilliouse. 


High  water. 


\a  covered  nt  high  water;  and  a  wind-mill  on  a  hill  in  Eastham,  over  salt  milla,  which  ig 
near  the  shore  at  RHsthaiii,  these  bearing  E.  by  S.  from  Bny  Rocit.  The  east  point  of 
the  Horse-shoe  bears  from  the  lighthouse  E.  N.  E.,  distant  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  Qq 
the  south  side  of  Billingsgate  Island,  the  fiat«  extend  olT  the  distance  of  one  half  to  three- 
quMiters  of  a  mile,  having  on  them  at  low  water,  common  tides,  6  to  9  feet  water. 

There  is  no  meeting-house  with  a  steeple  to  be  seen  to  the  eastward  of  Barnstable  but 
the  one  in  Brewster ;  and  this  inneting-liouse  is  a  good  mark  to  pass  over  the  long  shoal 
point  that  extends  off  from  the  lighthouse. 

From  the  lighthouse  on  the  Race  Point  of  Cope  Cod,  when  bearing  E.  N.  E.,  the  course 
to  Billingsgate  point  of  flats  is  S.  by  E.,  distant  18  miles.  Vessels  drawing  I'i  feet  wntor 
or  upwards  should  steer  from  the  Race  lighthouse  S.,  when  distant  from  the  Race  one  or 
two  miles. 

BARNSTABLE  BAY — From  Centre  Hill  Point  to  Sausett  Inlet  is  about  4  miles, 
bearing  S.  A  E.  This  i"  a  clean  and  bold  shore,  and  may  be  approached  at  the  distance  of 
one-third  to  half  a  mile,  carrying  3i  to  4  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  There  is  a  bar  of  sRud 
that  lies  parallel  with  the  shore,  near  Centre  Hill  Point,  extending  to  the  southwiird,  nnd 
terminating  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Sausett.  From  the  shore 
ovei-  this  bar  to  3  fathoms  water,  the  distance  is  240  to  250  fathom*,  and  the  bar  is  from 
100  to  140  fathoms  wide,  having  on  it  from  9  to  1 1  foot  water,  and  between  that  uni  the 
shore  from  3  to  3;^  fathoms.  From  the  south  end  of  this  bur  along  shore  to  the  entrance 
of  Sandwich  are  3  fathoms,  and  distant  70  to  90  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  and  rogulur 
soundings  as  you  approach  the  shore. 

On  the  south  side  of  Sausett  Inlet  is  a  low  rocky  point  of  90  ththoms.  Three-fourtha 
of  a  mile  ofl' shore  are  3  fathoms,  and  at  the  distance  of  1^  or  2  miles  are  9  to  10  fathoius, 
muddy  bottom. 

Passing  from  Sandwich  towards  Barnstable,  the  flats  run  ofl'  shore  100  to  180  fiithonia. 

TiDKS. — The  neap  tides  rise  8  feet;  common  tides  9  '  i  10  feet ;  springtides  12  to  13. 
Higli  water  in  the  bay,  ot  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  at  11  o'clock. 

BARNSTABLE  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light  erected  on  a  dwelling-house,  over  which  it 
is  elevated  16  feet. 

BARNSTABLE  HARBOR.— When  coming  from  the  northward,  the  bar  must  not 
be  approached  in  less  than  5  fathoms  water,  until  the  lighthouse  on  Sandy  Neck  bears  S. 
W.  I  W.  which  will  bring  you  up  with  tlie  buoy  on  the  bar ;  haul  close  round  it,  leiiving 
it  onyour  starboard  hand,  run  two  cables'  length  S.  S.  W.,  then  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  \  W. 
li  mile,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  the  tongue  of  Yarmouth  Flats,  or  until  Iholight 
bears  S.  W.  by  S.,  then  steer  for  the  light.  Be  careful  to  make  the  above  course  good, 
as  the  flood  sets  strong  over  Yarmouth  Flats,  and  the  ebb  strong  to  the  northwunl  over 
the  bar.  Continue  to  run  for  the  light  until  within  a  cable's  length  of  thebooch,  and  follow 
the  shore  round  the  point.  There  is  safe  anchorage  inside,  abreast  of  the  light,  ogaiiist 
all  winds,  it  bearing  from  S.  W.  to  N.  E.,  in  5  to  2i  f.ithoms  water. 

Vessels  drawing  8  feet  water  may,  at  high  water,  bring  the  light  to  bear  S.  W.  J  W,, 
and  run  directly  for  it.  Full  sea  at  full  und  change  at  11  o'clock.  Tide  rises  10  feet,  and 
there  are  7  feet  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water. 

At  a  meeting  of  the  Trustees  of  the  Massachusetts  Humane  Society,  on  the  13th 
iuotant,  it  was  Voter,  that  a  statement  of  the  locations  of  the  Life  Boats  ond  Rockets  of 
the  Society  be  distributed,  in  the  form  of  a  circular,  for  the  information  of  navigators. 

Wherefore,  the  undersigned  give  notice  that  the  old  Boats  of  the  Society  are  stationed 
as  follows. 

Life  dresses  for  the  crews, 

Edgnrtown,  Martha's  Vineyard one  boat,        5. 

Nantucket,  near  Tuckernuck, one     "  3. 

Chatham,  near  the  Lights, one     "  8.* 

Nauset  Beach.  Eastham, one     '•  5. 

Between  Highland  Light,  Cape  Cod,  and  Race  Point, three  "  15. 

Plymouth,  north  of  the  town, one     '•  6. 

Scituate,  inside  the  harbor, one     *•  5. 

Cohasset,     do  do         one      "  5. 

Nantasket  Beach  and  Hull, two     "  8. 

Lynn,  neor  Swamscut, one     "  5. 

Marblehead  Harbor, one     "  5. 

(iloucester  Harbor, , one     *'  5. 

Rock  port,  formerly  Sandy  Bay, one     "  5. 

Annisquam one     "  5. 

Plum  Island,  under  the  cure  of,  and  belonging  to  the  Merri- 

mac  Humane  Society,  ...,.,...., one     "  10. 

Total,  eiohtken  Boats. 


PW>"<iil 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


176 


ae,  over  which  it 


iety  are  stiitioned 
SC8  for  the  crews, 


Thore  have  been  located  very  recently,  eighteen  other  bonis,  called  No.  1,  twenty-four 
feet  long ;  No.  2,  twenty  and  twenty -one  feet  long :  No.  3,  fifteen  and  sixteen  feet  long — 
which  are  fitted  after  the  plan  of  ?oi.onk  .  St  iNton,  with  India  Rubber  canvass  flouts, 
made  by  the  Union  Rubber  Company — The  depot  of  which  is  at  No.  19  Nassau  Street, 
New  York. 

Tbey  are  located  at                                                                    Life  dresses  for  the  crews. 

Nnhant,  No.  1, one  boat.  8. 

Cut  River,  Marshfield,  No.  1, one  "  9. 

Point  A'.derton,  No.  2, one  "  -         * 

Cohnsset,           No.  2 one  '>  - 

Scituiite  neck,  south  of  Minot's,  No.  2, one  '• 

Chiithnnn,  near  the  lights.  No.  2,  one  "  see  above* 

3funonioy  Point,  near  the  Light,  No.  2, one  "  5. 

Cuttihunk,  near  the  Light,  No.  2, one  "  8. 

Guy  Head,  near  the  Light,  No.  2, , one  "  5. 

Plymouth,  South  of  the  town.  No.  2, one  '•  - 

Doer  Island,  Boston  Harbor,  No.  3, one  "  5. 

Boston  Light,  No.  3, one  "  5. 

Swampscut,  Lynn,  No.  3, one  "  - 

Ipswich,  near  the  Light,  No.  3, .one  •'  5. 

Marblehead  Neck,  No.  3, one  "  - 

Scituate  Harbor,  No.  3, one  " 

Cuttihunk,  near  the  other  Boat,  No.  3, one  "  — 

Duxbnry,  at  Powder  Point,  No.  3, one    "  5. 

Rockets  for  throwing  a  line  to  wrecks,  so  as  to  establish  a  communication  whereby  a 
boat  may  be  more  safely  hauled  through  the  surf,  are  stationed  at  Boston  Lifiht — at  Point 
Aidertoii — Scituute  Neck,  south  of  Minot's  Lodge — Ipswich  Light,  Highland  Light, 
Cape  Cod — and  at  Chatham. 

Tliree  other  Boats  are  being  built,  under  an  appropriation  by  the  State,  for  Plum  Isl- 
and— Olio  to  be  under  the  care  of  the  Morrimac  Humane  Society  ;  one  at  Race  Point, 
Cape  Cui!,  ai;:l  one  at  Wellfleet,  near  to  Newcomb's  Hollow,  for  tho  Massachusetts  Hu- 
mane Society.  Life  preservers  for  all  the  crews  are  to  be  furnished  from  the  same  up- 
piopriatioi),  so  as  to  insure  safety,  when  boarding  wrecks,  from  the  exposed  beaches. 

Tiie  uiKlersigned  applied  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  to  give  orders  to  the  Rev- 
nue  Cutters  to  protect  the  property  of  the  Humane  Societies,  and  to  afford  facilities  for 
iaspectiii;}!  tlieir  boats  and  houses  on  the  coast,  and  to  make  experiments,  dec.  In  answer, 
the  Secretiiry  writes; 

"  In  so  far  as  tho  aid  of  the  Revenue  vessels,  when  employed  in  the  duties  specially 
assigned  to  tliein  by  the  ninety-ninth  section  of  the  Act  of  March  second,  1799,  may  be 
useful  in  promoting  the  objects  of  the  Society,  the  department  cheerfully  assents  to  your 
request.    Of  litis  the  Collectors  at  Boston  and  Newport  have  been  informed." 

Tho  Coinmittoe  earnestly  recommend  tbose  who  may  be  cast  on  the  exposed  beaches, 
not  to  attempt  to  leave  the  ship  until  low  water — as  many  lives  have  been  sacriliced  by  too 
hastily  aiieinpting  to  land  on  a  rising  tide. 

R.  B.  FORBES, 
DAVID  SEARS. 
SAMUEL  AUSTIN, 

Boston,  April  24,  1849.  Committee  Mass.  Humane  Society. 


CAPR  COD  TO  CHATHAM.— From  the  Highland  light  to  Nausett  lights,  the 
course  is  8.  by  E.  12  miles ;  thence  to  Chatham  lights  S.  i  West  114  miles ;  the  shore  is 
sandy. 

NAUSRTT  BEACH  LIGHTS.— On  Nausett  Beach  throe  lighthouses,  one  hundred 
and  fifty  foiit  apart,  have  been  erected. 

CHATHAM  LIGHTS  are  two  fixed  lights  on  James'  Head,  70  feet  above  the  level 
ofthosea;  they  are  only  of  use  in  running  over  tho  shoals,  as  tho  beach  has  made  out  2 
or  3  miles  to  the  south  since  they  were  erected. 

E.  Uy  S  10  or  11  miles  from  Chatham  lights,  there  is  a  rocky  ground,  called  Crab  Ledge 
with  10  to  1[)  fathoms  on  it.  It  runs  N.  by  £.  and  S.  by  W.  about  15  miles,  and  is  5  miles 
Id  width  from  east  to  west. 

CHATHAM  HARBOR. — Chatham  is  situated  on  the  exterior  extreme  of  Cape  Cod, 
bounded  E.  by  the  ocean,  S.  by  Vineyard  Sound,  W.  by  Harwich,  and  N.  by  Pleasant 
Bay.  Its  haibor  is  convenient  for  the  fishery,  in  which  they  have  usually  40  vessels  em- 
;  ployed,  and  contains  20  feet  at  low  water. 


Caj>e  Cod  to 
Chatham. 

Nausett 
Beach  Light. 
Chatham 
lights. 


Chatham 
Harbor. 


1. 1    >iiiimipji«i 


176 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


While  pnosing  Chiithiun  in  thick  wentlier,  appronch  no  nearer  thnn  5  fnthoms  to  crosg 
the  Pollock  Uip ;  edge  otF  and  on  from  5  to  7  tuthonia,  which  will  carry  you  over  the  Pol- 
lock Rip  ill  ;J  tiithoma. 
Monomoy  .MONOMOY  POINT  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  son,  on 

Point  Light.  Monomoy  Point,  thti  extreme  southern  point  of  the  peninsula  of  Cape  Cod;  to  the  north 

the  sea  \\n»  ninJo  an  inlet  deep  enough  for  small  craft,  making  it  an  idland. 
Butlef  s  Hole  BUTLER'S  HOLE. — To  run  through  Butler's  Hole,  after  passing  Chatham  liirhta 
get  tlioin  in  range;  they  will  then  be  3i  miles  distant,  and  bear  north;  steer  8outh,°iinii 
pass  through  tlieslue,  or  until  Monomoy  light  bears  W.  N.  W. ;  then  run  W.  by  N.,  imj 
pass  the  point  from  one  to  two  miles  distant.  After  passing  the  point,  steer  S.  W.,  until 
past  the  Handkerchief,  when  you  steer  VV.  by  S.  for  the  light-ship  on  Cross  Rip,  Qq 
tliese  courses  you  will  not  have  less  than  3i  fathoms. 

The  south  part  of  the  Handkerchief  bears  S.  W.from^Monomoy  light,  and  N.  ^  E.  from 
Nantucket  light. 
The  S.  E.  point  of  the  Horse-shoe  bears  E.  by  N.  h  N.  from  the  light-ship. 


Pollock  Rip. 


Light  Boat. 


Little  Round 

Skoal. 

Buoy. 

Great  Round 
Shoal, 


SHOALS  TO  THE  NORTH-EASTWARD  OF  NANTUCKET. 

POLLOCK  RIP. — This  rip,  on  which  there  are  but  5  feet  water,  extends  E.  j  \.  q 
miles  from  Monomoy  Point  light;  on  it,  in  14  feet  water,  there  is  a  red  buoy,  benrin» 
from  Monomoy  light  E.  i  N.,  7  miles,  and  from  the  Little  Rouud  Shoal  buoy  N.  E.  by 
N.,  4  miles. 

On  the  east  end  of  the  Rip  there  is  a  fixed  Light  Boat,  which  bears  from  Chatlmm 
lights  south;  from  Monoumy  Point  light  E.  by  S.  J  S.;  from  Great  Point  light,  Nan. 
tucket,  N.  E.  j  N.    It  is  a  miserable  light,  and  is  often  out  of  its  place. 

LITTLE  ROUND  SHOAL.— This  shoal,  on  which  there  are  only  7  feet  water 
bears  from  Chatham  lights  S.  by  W.,  41  leagues;  from  Nantucket  light  N.  E.,  3 
leagues;  on  the  S.  S.  E.  part  there  is  a  white  buoy  in  14  feet  water,  with  a  small  pole  oq 
the  end  of  it. 

GREAT  ROUND  SHOAL.— This  shoal  is  partly  dry  at  low  water;  it  bears  E.  N. 


Tides. 


Chatham  to 

Holmes' 

Hole, 


Buoys. 


E.,  8  miles  from  Nantucket  light :  on  the  northern  part  of  the  shoal  there  is  a  black  buiiy 
in  14  feet  water.  The  white  buoy  of  the  Little  Round  Shoal  bears  from  it  N.  W.  by  N. 
21  miles. 

The  channel  between  the  Great  and  Little  Round  Shoals  should  not  be  attempted  by 
vessels  drawing  over  11  feet. 

TiDKS. — The  flood  tide  sets  north  about  3  hours,  then  E.  S.  E.,  when  the  ebb  com- 
mences at  south,  and  continues  till  low  water.  At  Sankuty  Head  the  flood  sets  N.  E, 
and  the  ebb  S.  W.  In  the  middle  (or  E.  N.  E.  channel)  the  flood  sets  N.  E.  by  E.  and 
ebb  S.  W.  by  \V. 

In  Butler's  Hole  the  ebb  sets  west,  and  flood  east.  From  Chatham  to  Pollock  Rip 
the  flood  sets  S.  S.  W.  and  ebb  N.  N.  E. 

From  Butler's  Hole  to  the  Horse-shoe,  ebb  W.  S.  W.;  then  W.  by  N.  to  Holmes' 
Hole. 

At  Pollock  Rip,  Great  Rip,  Little  Round  Shoal,  Point  Rip  and  the  Handkerchief,  tlio 
tide  rises  and  fails  5  to  G  feet.  At  the  Horse  shoe.  Cross  Rip,  Hedge  Fence,  Squiish 
Meadow  and  Middle  Ground,  the  tide  rises  and  fulls  3  to  4  feet.  S.  1  E.  moon  makes  full 
sea  in  the  sound. 

CHATHAM  TO  HOLMES'  HOLE.— Bring  Chatham  lights  to  bear  N.  N.  W., 
then,  by  steering  S.  S.  E.,  34  leagues,  you  will  puss  the  Pollock  Kip.  in  3  or  4  fathoms 
water;  und  if  the  weather  is  clear  you  will  nuike  the  lighthouse  on  Sandy  or  (Jreut  Point, 
(Nantucket  Island,)  54  leagues  distant,  which  bring  to  bear  S.  W.  4  W.;  then  steer  for 
the  lighthouse,  keeping  it  in  this  direction,  and  you  will  puss  between  the  Great  and  Little 
Round  Shoiils,  on  tho  former  of  which  is  a  black  buoy,  und  on  the  latter  a  white  buoy, 
with  a  small  polo  in  the  end  of  it,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N.  and  S.  E.  by  S.  from  each  other, 
distant  24  miles. 

Wlien  you  are  within  about  3  miles  of  tho  lighthouse,  steer  W.  4  S.  until  you  are  pnst 
the  Point  Rip,  on  t!ie  N.  E.  end  of  which  is  a  rod  buoy  in  14  feet  water,  bearing  from 
Sunkaty  Head  N.  by  W.  4  leogues;  from  Nantucket  light  N.  E.  by  E.  4  E.,  2  miles,  aiij 
from  the  black  buoy  on  the  Horse-shoe  E.  S.  E.  (J  leagues.  Shoalest  water  on  Point  Itip, 
8  feet :  or  you  may  bring  the  lighthouse  to  boar  E.  by  S.  4  S.,  and  steer  W.  by  N.  4  N„ 
taking  care  to  make  your  course  good  for  Holmes'  Hole  light,  1 1  leagues  distant,  observing, 
while  running  from  Nantucket  light  to  Holmes'  Hole,  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand 
Cape  Poge  light,  which  must  bear  W.  f  S.,  to  clear  the  Cross  Rip,  on  the  N.  E.  part  of 
which  is  a  white  buoy,  in  15  feet  water,  bearing  from  Cape  Poge  light  E.  by  S.  5  leagues; 
fronj  Tuckunuck  Island  N.  by  W.,  2  leagues,  and  from  tho  red  broy  on  Squash  Meudow 
E.  by  S.  3  S.,  5  leagues.     Shoalest  water  on  this  rip,  12  feet. 

To  go  through  the  north  Ship  Channel,  Bring  Chatham  lights  to  bear  N.  N.  W.  and 
atoer  S.  8.  E.  84  leagues,  wbeu  you  will  pass  the  Pollock  Rip  in  3  or  4  fathoms  water, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


177 


thorns  to  cro88 
1  over  the  Pol- 

of  tho  sen,  on 
I ;  to  the  north 

hdthiun  liglits, 
oer  south,  iiml 
W.  by  N.,,uid 
iv  S.  W.,  until 
Jross  Rip.    Oq 

id  N.  J  E.  from 
ship. 

:ket. 

ends  E.  i  N.,G 
d  buoy,  bearing 
buoy  N.  E.  by 

1  from  Chntluira 
)int  light.  Nun- 

ly  7  feet  water, 
hght  N.  E.,  3 
a  small  pole  on 

;  it  bears  E.  N. 
)  ia  a  black  bu(iy 
1  it  N.  W.  by  N. 

be  attempted  by 

en  the  ebb  com- 
flooU  sets  N.  E. 
H.  E.  by  E.  and 

to  Pollock  Rip 

N.  to  Holmes' 

indkerchiof,  tho 

Fence,  Squasli 

moon  makes  t'ull 

bear  N.  N.  W, 

3  or  4  fathoms 
or  (jreat  Point, 

tlion  steor  for 

(Jroataud  Littio 

r  u  white  buoy, 

Tom  each  other, 

ntil  you  are  pnst 

er,  bearinj;  from 

E.,  2  miles,  niiil 

teron  Point  Hip, 

W.by  N.  4N., 
istaiit,  obsurvii)^, 
ir  larlmard  hiind 
he  N.  E.  part  of 

by  S.  5  leagues; 
jquash  Meadow 

r  N.  N.  W.  and 

4  fathoms  water, 


when  yon  must  steer  W.  i  S.  5  miles  for  Butler's  Hole,  in  15  fathoms  water,  when  you 
will  gee  a  white  buoy  to  the  north  of  you,  which  lies  in  the  S.  S.  W.  passage,  when  you 
must  run  W.  S.  W.  for  the  south  part  of  the  Handkerchief,  which  has  a  white  buoy  on 
the  west  end  of  it,  bearing  from  Monomoy  Point  light  S.  W.  3  miles,  when  you  will  be  in 
3fi)thom8  water,  line  sand;  from  Nantucket  light  N.  by  E.  i  E.  4  leagues,  and  from  the 
red  buoy  on  Pollock  Rip  W.  by  S.  i  S.  3  leagues. 

Crossing  the  Handkerchief,  on  a  W.  S.  W.  course,  in  3  or  4  fathoms  water,  you  will 
run  W.  for  the  black  buoy  on  the  Horse-shoe,  llj  miles,  leaving  it  on  the  starboard  hand. 
when  you  will  continue  your  course  W.  for  Holmes'  Hole  light,  4i  leagues  distant. — 
\9y0u  enter  the  Swash,  in  the  Horse-shoe,  Hyannis  light  will  bear  N.  N.  E.,  Cape 
Poge  light  W.  S.  W.,  Holmes'  Hole  light  W.  Part  of  the  Handkerchief  dry  at  low 
water. 

There  is  a  channel  of  9  feet,  still  north  of  the  above,  which  may  be  found  by  bringing 
Chntimm  lights  to  bear  N.  W.  when  in  7  fathoms,  and  running  S.  S.  W.  for  Sandy  Point 
,if  Mouomoy  light,  till  the  light  bears  S.  W.,  then  run  for  it  till  you  cross  from  3  to  7 
latho;ns,  when  you  will  be  within  three  cables'  length  of  the  light,  where  you  may  anchor 
;uid  continue  tillSj  hours  flood,  when,  if  bound  to  the  westward,  continue  the  shore  on 
round  the  point,  crossing  a  spit  between  Egg  Island  and  Monomoy  Point,  in  2  fath- 


oms; then  steer  N.  W.  till  the  liglit  bears  E.,  when  you  must  run  W.  N.  W.  for  Hyannis 
light,  or  haul  into  Stage  Harbor  Bay  and  anchor. 

HOLMES'  HOLE — A  lighthouse,  showing  a  fixed  light,  is  erected  on  the  West    Holmes' 
Cliopof  Holmes'   Hole,  on  the  starboard  hand  as  you  enter  the  harbor.     Four  miles    Hole 
west  of  Falmouth  is  Nobsque  Point,  on  which  a  lighthouse  is  erected,  showing  a  fixed    lighthouse. 
light,  elevated  tiO  feet  above  the  sea.     It  is  intended  to  guide  vessels  passing  over  the 
shoals,  through  the  north  channel  into  the  Vineyard  Sound.     The  following  bearings 
iiave  bpen  taken  : — West  Chop  lighthouse,  S.  E.  i  S.,  distant  4  miles ;  east  end  of  Mid- 
dle Ground,  S.  E.  1  S.  34 ;  west  end  of  do.  S.  W.  by  S.   4  ;    Gay  Head  lighthouse, 
S.  W.  4  W.,  15  ;  Tarpaulin  Cove  lighthouse,  W.  S.  W.,«;  Falmouth  Whorf,  N.  E. 
by  £.,  3;  Seconset  Point,   E.  3  N.  7 ;  S.  W.  part  of  the  Hedge  Fence,  E.  S.  E.,  4; 
Cape  Poge  lighthouse,  S,  E.  4  E.,  14  ;  East  Chop   Holmes'  Hole,  S.  E.  6.     By  keep- 
ing the  Nobsque  light  open  by  the  East  Chop  of  Holmes'  Hole,  will  clear  the  Old  Town 
Flnts. 

OLD  STAGE  HARBOR— If  you  intend,  when  passing  Monomoy  Point,  to  make  a    Old  Stage 
harbor,  when  about  100  yards  west  from  the  point,  steer  N.  N.  W.  tVom  5  to  6  miles,  to    Harbor. 
iivoid  the  common  flat  which  makes  oflTiVom  the  beach,  then  steer  E.  N.  E.  two  miles, 
which  will  bring  you  to  anchorage,  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  good  holding  ground.     This 
harbor  in  exposed  to  winds  from  South  to  West  by  North. 

Monomoy  Point  bears  from  the  anchorage  south,  distant  about  eight  miles. 

To  go  through  the  S.  S.  W.  channel,  get  Monomoy  Point  light  to  bear  N.  by  E.  4  E., 
and  run  S.  S.  W.  14  mile,  into  Butler's  Hole,  in  7  fathoms,  and  a  S.  S.  W.  course  con- 
tinued will  carry  you  to  the  westward  of  Nantucket  Point  light,  5  leagues.  In  the  S.  S. 
\V.  channel,  are  two  fathoms  at  full  tide. 

Bring  Chatham  lights  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  on  which  bearing  keep  them  till  you  cross  the 
Poilork  Rip  in  3  fathoms  water,  and  deepen  into  7  fathoms;  then  steer  S.  W.  by  S., 
wiiich  carries  you  across  Butler's  Hole,  to  5  or  4  fathoms ;  then  steer  W.  S.  W.  which 
will  carry  you  to  tlio  northword  (if  the  Little  Round  Shoal,  up  to  Tuckunuck  Channel, 
when  you  will  be  up  with  the  .S.  E.  end  of  the  Horse-shoe,  where  you  have  d  fathoms, 
then  eteer  W.  l)y  N.  for  Cape  Poge  light.  From  the  Stone-horse  to  the  S.  E.  end  of  the 
HorsB-shoH,  the  distance  is  ten  miles.  To  go  through  the  xMuskeeket  Channel,  bring 
ihe  lighten  Cape  Poge  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  and  steer  S.  by  E.,  which  will  carry  you  to  the 
eastward  of  Skiff's  Island,  which  you  may  go  within  half  a  miio  of. 

To  go  through  the  Swash  of  tho  Horse-shoe,  bound  to  the  westward,  after  pissing  the 
Stone-horse,  and  you  deepen  your  water  to  6  fathoms,  steer  W.  till  you  bring  Cape  Poge 
light  to  bear  W.  .S.  W. ;  then  steer  directly  for  it  through  the  Swash  of  the  Horse-shoe, 
till  you  deepen  <welve  fathoms,  then  steer  for  the  Isast  Chop  of  Holmes'  Hole. 

To  the  northward  of  the  Horse-shoe,  bring  Point  Gammon  light  to  bear  K.  N.  E. ; 
Seconset  Point  to  bear  W.  N.  W.,  when  you  will  see  the  northernmost  dry  shoal  of  the 
Horse-shoe.  Bring  Cape  Poge  light  to  bear  S.  S.  W.,  and  run  for  it.  In  beating  to 
windward,  come  no  neiu-er  the  north  shore  than  3  fathoms  ;  when  past  the  dry  spot  of 
[the  Horse-shoe,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  till  you  bring  the  East  Chop  to  bear  W. 

HYANNIS  LIGHT  is  situated  on   Point  Gammon,  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor    Hyannis 
[fuuth  side  of  Cape  Cod.     The  lantern  is  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  ant.    light. 
:outainB  a  fixed  light. 

The  Harbor  light  of  Hyannis,  bears  from  Point  Gammon  light,  N.  22  30  W.  2i  miles 
listant. 

East  from  Hyannis  lies  BassRiver,  near  which  are  the  towns  of  Pennisand  Yarmouth, 

buoy  is  placed  on  Dog-fish  bar.     A  beacon,  (or  rather  a  large  stick,)  on  the  top  of  which 

a  small  cask,  is  also  stuckjup  on  the  Bishop  and  Clerks.  12 


178 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Hyannia  HYANNIS  HARBOR.— Veisels  coining   from  the  eastward,  bound  through  the 

Harbor,  North  Channel,  must  leave  the  Bishop  and  Clerks  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  not  go  nearer 

them  than  4  fathoms.     They  are  a  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks,  bearing  S.  by  E.  finm  tlin 
lighthouse,  2i  miles  distant,  and  are  always  dry. 

When  coming  from  the  eastward,  bring  Point  Qammon  light  to  bear  N.  N.  E.  in  3^ 
fathoms  water,  and  steer  N.  W.;  on  which  course  you  will  have  from  3i  fathoms  to 
quarter  less  3.  When  the  Harbor  light  bears  N.  J  E.,  run  for  it;  which  course  will  carry 
you  two  cables'  length  from  the  east  end  of  the  breakwater.  Give  it  a  good  berth  towurds 
the  shore,  and  round  to  in  2i  pv  3  fathoms  water. 

When  coming  from  the  westward,  bring  Point  Gammon  light  to  bear  E.  by  N  ,  or 
E.  by  N.  i  N.,  run  for  it  until  the  Harbor  light  bears  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  run  tor  it,  rs 
above. 

Vessels  bound  to  the  westward  from  Hyannis,  must  run  to  the  southward  till  the  Ij^ht 
bears  E.  by  N. ;  then  steer  W.  by  S.,  which  course  will  carry  them  clear  of  ibe  south- 
west rock,  which  bears  west  from  the  light,  4  miles  distant,  with  several  sunken  rucks 
near  it ;  said  rock  is  dry  at  low  water.  W.  i  S.,  4i  miles  distant  from  tlio  light,  is  u  dan 
geroua  ledge,  called  Collier's  Ledge,  3  miles  from  the  shore.  There  are  3  fatliuins  water 
round  it,  and  the  ledge  is  part  dry  at  low  water.  In  running  this  "W.  by  S.  course,  (the 
light  bearing  E.  by  N.,)  you  will  have  from  3  to  4  fathoms,  and  sometimes  .'>,  m  it  i»  rM^y. 
If  farther  towards  the  Horse-shoe,  to  tlie  southward,  you  will  have  4,  5,  6,  7,  10,  and  close 
to  the  Horse-shoe,  13  fathoms  :  northern  part  of  the  Horse-shoe  dry  at  low  wiitor.  On 
the  S.  E.  pirt  of  the  Horse-shoe  is  a  black  buoy  placed,  in  16  feet  water,  beiirini;  from 
Great  Point  light  N.  W.  by  W.,  4i  leagues,  and  from  Tuckanuck  Island,  N.  by  E.  i  E, 
5  leagues.  Tide  rises  about  5  feet ;  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  I'i  o'clock ;  and 
runs  from  3  to  3  knots  east  and  west,  in  the  following  manner,  viz  :  it  begins  to  run  to  the 
westward  at  half  flood,  and  continues  to  half  ebb,  then  runs  to  the  eastward,  the  three  last 
hours  of  ebb  and  three  first  of  flood. 

Oro$t  Rip  CROSS  RIP  LIGHT  SHIP  is  on  the  north  point  of  the   Rip,  in  7  fathoms  water. 

Light  Snip.  200  fathoms  south  of  the  light  there  are  eleven  feet  water.  From  the  light  vessel  Point 
Gammon  lighthouse  bears  N. ;  Chatham  light  N.  E. ;  Sandy  Point  light,  N.  E.  by  E.; 
Nantucket  Great  Point  light,  E.  S.  E. ;  Nantucket  Brandt  Point  light.  E.  S.  E.  \  E. ; 
Nantucket  Beacon  light,  S.  S  .  E. ;  Cape  Pogo  light,  W. ;  centre  of  Tuckanucli  jsj. 
and.  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  distant  7  miles. 

Running  from  the  Horse-shoe  towards  Holmes'  Hole,  observe  the  following  direc- 
tions, viz  :  When  to  the  northward  of  the  Horse-shoe,  in'12  tdthoms'water,  one  mile  dis- 
tant from  the  dry  spots,  at  low  water,  steer  S.  W.  for  Holmes'  Hole,  3i  leagues  distnnt. 
If  bound  to  the  northward  of  the  Hedge  Fence,  between  that  and  the  L'Hoininedieu 
Shoal,  get  the  point  on  which  tho  wind-mill  stands,  which  is  eastof  Wood's  Hole,  to  benr 
W.  by  N.,  and  run  for  it  till  within  half  a  mile  ;  then  W.  S.  W.  wjll  carry  you  through 
the  V  ineyard  Sound,  leaving  Tarpaulin  Cove  and  Cutterhunk  lights  on  your  stniboiird 
hand,  and  Gay  Head  lighten  your  larboard  hand.  You  will  not  see  Cutterhunkjight  till 
4  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Tarpaulin  Cove  light,  when  it  will  open  on  the  starboard 
hand  ;  when  it  boars  N.  E.  by  E.,  distant  3i  miles,  you  may  run  west  for  Point  Judiiii 
light,  (if  bound  up  the  sound,)  10  leagues  distant. 

Distances  from  the  Cross  Rip  Light  Boat. 

Nantucket  Great  Point  Light 12i  miles. 

N.  end  Tuckanuck  Shoal :i  do. 

Tuckanuck  Island 0  do. 

Cape  Poge  Light 7i  do. 

East  Chop  Holmes'  Hole 12i  do. 

Point  Gammon  Light 94  do. 

Main  Body  of  Horse-shoe l\  do. 

Nantucket,  or       NANTUCKET,  or  GREAT  POINT  LIGHT,  is  on  the  N.,E.  point'of  Nantaciiei 
Cheat  Point    Island,  is  a  fixed  light,  and  is  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
Light.  Nantucket  Harbor  lighthouse  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor,  on  high  ^'loumi,  auuw 

Lighthouse,      distance  from  the  shore,  is  a  small  pyramidal  building,  and  contains  u  fixod  lluht.   Its  ouly 

use  is  to  assist  vessels  entering  the  harbor,  to  pass  the  bar. 
Nantucket  NANTUCKET  HARBOR.— If  the  lighlliou.se  on  the  south  side  of  tho  harbor  can- 

Harbor.  not  be  seen,  bring  the  light  on  Brandt  Point,  (which  lies  on  the  starboard  hand  andsliom 

a  fixed  light,)  to  bear  S.  by  E.,  (none  to  the  south  of  that,)  and  run  for  it  till  within  about 

a  cable's  length;  then  run  to  the  eastward  for  the  end  of  the  point,  and  pass  it  as  near  as 

you  please  ;  or 
Lights.  Bring  the  south  light  and  the  light  on  Brandt  Point  in  one,  at  the  outer  buoy  ;  and  the 

south  light  should  be  opened  to  the  westward  on  this  range,  one  handspike's  length,  to  nio  { 
the  channel  from  the  bar  or  outer  buoy,  to  the  shoaling  of  the  water  on  Brandt  Point. 


^•^"""^mifmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


179 


and  through  the 
»nd  not  go  nearer 
1.  by  E.  from  the 

r  N.  N.  E.  in  ^ 
m  3i  t'athotna  to 
Goui'He  will  carry 
jod  berth  towards 

lear  E.  by  N  ,  or 
md  run  for  it,  as 

ward  till  tho  lifjli, 
lear  of  the  Houtli- 
rul  suukoii  roclis 
lio  light,  isadmi. 
3  3  fntliuma  water 
y  S.  cuurse,  (the 
IB  .5,  H8  it  is  rMav. 
3,7,  10,  and  close 
t  low  water.  On 
Iter,  bearini;  from 
nd.  N.  by  E.  i  E, 
t  I'J  o'clock  ;  and 
igins  to  run  to  the 
ard,  the  three  last 

7  fathoms  water, 
light  vessel  Point 
ht,  N.  E.  by  E.; 
It.  E.  S.  E.  \  E. ; 
f  Tuckanuck  Isi- 

e  following  dircc- 
iter,  one  mile  dis- 
i  leagues  distant. 
e  L'Hoininedleu 
od's  Hole,  '.0  bear 
arry  you  througii 
jn  your  starboard 
tterhunkjight  till 
I  on  the  atarboani 
for   Point  .ludilli 


1.24 

miles 

3 

do. 

9 

do. 

74 

do. 

l-'4 

do. 

94 

do. 

u 

do. 

oint'of  Nantucket 

igh  i^i'ound,  suuif 
tnl  light.   Its  only 

if  tho  harbor  can- 
rd  hand  and  shows 
it  till  within  about 
patis  it  as  near  a 

ter  buoy  ;  and  tiie 
ike's  length,  to  niD  | 
1  Brandt  Point. 


From  Brandt  Point  N.  N.  W.  4  W.  300  fathoms ;  then  N.  by  W.  4  W.  100  fathoms ; 
I  then  N.  350  fathoms  over  the  bar. 

Krom  the  bar  N.  by  W.  J  W.  eight  and  one-half  miles  will  crosH  Tuckanuck  Shoal  in 
17  or  18  feet  water. 

IHiectiona  far  ships  boundover  the  Shoals  of  Nantucket,  from  ttie  bar. — From  Nantucket  Direetiont, 
Bar,  the  course  is  about  N.  N.  E.  to  the  Great  Point ;  if  a  went  tide,  run  for  the  ligbt- 
house,  pass  the  Great  Point,  keeping  it  about  two  miles  distant  from  you  ;  an  east  tide 
may  set  you  on  the  Point  Rip.  Keep  the  town  open,  clear  of  Great  Point,  until  you  are 
tliree  miles  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  point;  then  run  S.  E.,  keeping  three  miles  from  tho 
land,  until  the  light  is  W.  by  N.  from  you  ;  then  run  East,  keeping  the  lighthouse  bear- 
ing W.  by  N.  will  carry  you  to  sen.  When  you  are  in  25  fathoms,  you  are  without  the 
Great  Rip.  If  a  light  wind,  and  a.  southerly  tide,  there  is  danger  of  being  set  by  the  tid» 
too  near  the  Rip ;  therefore  it  is  best,  after  being  sure  that  you  are  without  the  Round 
Shoal,  to  run  E.  by  N.  or  E.  N.  E.,  according  to  the  wind  and  tide.  When  you  have 
pggged  the  Round  Shoal,  there  is  nothing  to  fear,  from  N.  to  i^,  until  you  come  to  the 
State  of  Maine  on  the  one  hand,  or  the  shoal  of  George's  on  the  other.  The  above  is  the 
Old  Channel-way. 

After  you  are  three  miles  N.  N.  E.  from  the  Great  Point  light,  run  S.  E.,  keeping 
three  miles  from  the  land,  until  Sankaty  Head  bears  S.  W.  by  W. ;  you  may  then  run 
Jf.  E.  by  E.,  which  will  carry  you  channel-way.  The  Round  Shoal  bears  from  the  Great 
Point  light  E.  N.  E.,  eight  miles  off. 

When  you  are  three  miles  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  Great  Point  light,  with  the  town 
apen  clear  of  the  Point,  run  S.  E.,  keeping  three  miles  from  the  land,  until  the  town 
is  over  the  middle  of  the  head  of  the  harbor ;  keeping  it  so,  will  carry  you  out  channel- 
way. 

When  the  town  ie  shut  in  by  the  high  land  of  Pocomo  or  Squiiin,  you  are  in  danger  of 
the  north  end  of  tho  Bass  Rip,  also  the  north  end  of  the  Great  Rip. 

At  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  it  is  full  sea  at  Nantucket  at  12h.  18m.;  rise,  springs 
4  feet  9  inches. 

SANKATY  HEAD  LIGHT  is  1.50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  the  tower  is  70  Sankaty 
feet  high,  painted  with  two  white  and  one  red  rings,  horizontally,  the  red  being  in  the   Head  light. 
rentre ;  it  is  a  fixed  light  when  seen  at  the  distance  of  12  miles  or  less,  beyond  that  it  is  a 
Hashing  light,  two  flashes  at  intervals  of  one  and  a  half  minutt;,  the  third  an  interval  of 
tliree  minutes.     It  bears  S.  by  E.  nine  miles  from  Long  Point  light,  and  irom  the  centre 
of  the  New  South  South  Shoal  N.  4  W.  19i  miles. 

CAPE  POGE  LIGHT  is  on  the  N.  E.  Point  of  Martha's  Vineyard  ;  is  a  fixed  light, 
and  55  feet  above  the  level  of  ihe  sea. 

A  fixed  light  is  erected  at  the  entrance  of  Edgartown  Harbor,  on  a  pier  running  from 
the  west  side,  1000  feet  from  the  bench.     It  is  elevated  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sen. 

EDGARTOWN  HA KBOR.— Vessels  bound  eastward,  and  wishing  to  enter  Edgar- 
town  Harbor,  from  the  east  end  of  Squash  Meadow  Shoal,  will  bring  the  harbor  light  Harbor. 
to  bear  S.  W.  by  S.,  and  Cape  Poge  light  to  bear  S.  E.,  then  steer  S.  S.  W.,  (they  then 
\nllhave  6  and  64  fathoms  water,)  until  the  harbor  light  bears  W.,  then  steer  W.  by  S., 
and  pass  the  light  about  a  cable's  length  to  the  right  hand,  which  course  will  carry  them 
up  to  the  wharves. 

Vessels  bound  westward,  and  wishing  to  enter  Edgartown  Harbor,  after  passing  near 
Cape  Foge,  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  bring  the  harbor  light  to  bear  S.  W.  by  S.,  and  steer 
S,  S.  W.  until  the  harbor  light  bears  W.,  then  steer  W.  by  S.,  and  pass  tho  light  about  a 
cable's  length  to  the  right  hand,  whicli  course  will  carry  them  up  to  the  wharves. 

If  vessels  wish  to  anchor  in  the  outer  harbor,  they  will  follow  the  above  directions  until 
the  horbor  light  bears  W.  by  S.,  and  Cape  Pege  light  bears  N.  E.  4  E.,  when  they  may 
anchor  in  44  or  5  fiithoras  water,  and  very  good  holding  ground.  High  water,  12  17, 
rises  2  feet. 

Ill  l(!iivii]g  Holmes'  Hol((  to  pass  over  the  shoals,  keep  the  West  Chop  open  to  the 
northward  of  the  East  Ciiop,  until  you  have  passed  Squash  Meadow  Shoal,  on  the  N. 
W.  end  of  which  is  a  red  buoy,  with  a  small  pole  in  the  end  of  it,  placed  in  16  feet  water, 
bearing  from  Cape  Poge  light  N.  W.  4  W.,  6  miles  ;  from  West  Chop  light,  S.  E.  by  E. 
\  E.,  6  miles ;  and  from  the  black  buoy  or  Hedge  Fence,  S.  by  E.,  2  miles.  Shoalest 
water  5  feet.  Tho  buoy  lif^s  about  24  miles  from  the  East  Chop,  must  be  left  on  the 
starboard  lianH,  when  your  course  will  be  E.  by  S.,  in  10  or  12  fathoms  water,  which 
conrae  you  must  continue  iill  you  pass  Cape  Poge  light.  If  it  should  be  tide  of  flood, 
you  must  steer  E.  by  S.  4  S.,  as  the  tide  of  flood  sets  very  strong  to  the  northward,  be- 
tween Cape  Poge  and  Tuckanuck  Island,  and  the  tide  of  ebb  to  the  southward,  so  that 
you  must  govern  your  course  by  the  tide.  In  clear  weather  you  may  see  Natitucket 
lighthouse  18  miles,  which  you  must  bring  to  bear  E.  by  S.  4  S.  which  course  you  are 
to  steer,  passing  it  at  the  distance  of  one  league,  when  you  must  bring  it  to  bear  west  and 
steer  east,  taking  care  to  make  this  course  good,  which  will  carry  you  over  the  shoals  in 
ship  channel ;  the  ground  is  very  uneven,  and  you  will  have  from  4  to  8  fathoms  water. 


Cape  Poge 
light. 


Edgartown, 


-msmm^mm^sw 


180  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

When  you  huve  passed  over  the  BhoHls,  you  will  have  from  10  to  14  fathoms  water,  and 
then  by  steering  north,  you  will  make  Cupe  Cod  lighthouse,  (which  contains  a  fixed  light ) 
distant  18  leasues.  '' 

To  go  to  the  Dorthwiird  of  the  Oreat  Round  Slioal,  on  the  northerly  part  of  which  Ih 
a  buoy,  which  you  lonve  on  your  starboard  hand,  placed  in  14  feet  water,  bearing  from 
Saokaty  Head,  N.  by  K.  i  E.,  5  leagues;  from  Nantucket  light  E.  N.  E.  i  N.,  lo  miieg 
and  from  the  red  buoy  on  Point  Rip.  E.  N.  E.,  3  leagues;  shoalest  water  5  feet;  yon 
must  proceed  according  to  liio  foregoing  directions,  until  you  pass  the  lighthouse',  and 
bring  it  to  bear  S.  W.  4  VV.,  then,  by  niiiking  a  N.  E.  i  E.  course  good,  you  will  go  bo- 
twoen  the  Great  und  Little  Round  Shoiiis,  on  the  south  part  of  which  is  u  buoy,  with  » 
Mmall  pole  in  the  end  of  it,  placed  in  14  feet  water,  bearing  from  Chatham  lights  S.  by 
W.,  ii  leagues;  from  Nantucket  li^^ht.  N.  E.,  3 leagues;  and  from  the  black  buoy  on  thri 
Great  Round  Shoal,  N.  W.  by  N.,  -24  miles ;  shoalest  water  7  feel,  in  24,  3,  4  nntl  f, 
fathoms  water,  until  you  have  crossed  the  Pollock  Rip,  where  you  will  have  about  3  or  4 
fathoms  water,  on  which  is  a  red  buoy  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  The 
Little  Round  Shoal  bnnrs  N.  W.  from  the  Great  one,  distant  about  '24  miles.  Continue 
your  N.  E.  4  E.  course,  until  you  deepen  your  water  to  1'2  or  13  fathoms,  and  then  steei' 
north  for  Cape  Cod  liulithouse,  before  me:itioned. 

Bearings,  S^-c,  Bearings  and  distances  jf^om  (he  light  on  Cape  Page,  and  depth  of  water  of  several  most 
dangerous  sfmals  in  sight  of  Cape  Page  lighthouse,  and  oearings  of  the  East  Chon 
of  Holmes'  Hole..  ■' 

East  Chop N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  from  said  light,  74  miles  distflnt. 

Squash  Meadow  .Shoal N.  W.  i  W,,  5  feel  at  low  water,    54 

Norton's  Shoal E.  4  S.,  9  do  do  74 

Muskeeket  Long  Shoiil E.  4  S.,  6  do  do  8 

Tuckanuck  ShonI E.  i  S.,  7  do  do  14 

S>iuth-end  Horse-shoe E.  4  N,,  7  do  do  194        do 

Dry  Spots  Horse-shoe N.E,4N,.dry,  10  do 

Swash  of  Horse-shoe, £.  N.  E.,       12  do  do  9  do 

Tuckanuck  Shoal  from  >  x\t  k..  ivr  -»  j  j 

Nantucket  light,  \ W,  by  N.,       7  do  do 

Horse-shoo  from  do N,  W.  by  W. 

Course  from  Nantucket  light )  ,,r   .     xt    1  m 

bound  westward,  ^     j  . . . -VV.  by  N,  4  N, 

From  Cape  Poge  lo  Skiff's  Island,.  .S.  i  W.,  dry,  9  do 

Hawse's  Shoal,  the  shoalest  part..  .S.  E.  4  E.,      6  do  do  'i\        do 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


lai 


haivtijcket*  olu  and  new  south  shoals,  &c. 

OLD  SHOAL — This  danRerous  ihoal.  which  lies  in  lat.  41°  04'  N.,  Iour  69°  61'  W.,  Old  Shoal. 
bears  S.  bv  E.  from  Sankaty  H«ad  light  13,^  miles.  It  is  composed  of  hard  white  sandi 
orer  whicn  the  sea  breaks  in  the  most  tremendous  manner,  having  on  it  in  many  partSi 
only  3  feet  water,  and  the  tide  meeting  it  obliquely,  passes  over  it  in  different  directions. 
The  course  of  the  tide  is,  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  beginning  to  run  S.  W.  at  lU  o'clock  on  the 
day  of  full  moon,  and  continues  in  that  direction  about  7  hours.  It  extends  from  east  to 
west  one  mile,  and  is  in  breadth  two  cables'  length.  It  often  breaks  in  5  fathoms,  on  the 
east  and  west  of  the  shoal.  The  rip  which  extends  from  the  western  end,  has  about  7 
fathoms  water  on  it. 

South  from  the  old  South  Shoal,  half  a  mile  distant,  the  bottom  is  uneven,  from  3  to  5 
fathoms.  There  is  a  rip  puts  off  from  the  west  end  of  the  shoal  to  the  south  and  west, 
and  sweeps  round  so  that  the  south  end  of  the  rip  bears  nearly  south  from  the  shoal,  on 
which  it  sometimes  breaks  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  at  the  distance  of  five  miles  from 
the  shoal :  between  the  outer  part  of  the  rip  and  the  shoal  is  uneven  bottom  and  full  of 

rips. 

The  tides  run  round  the  compass  in  12}  hours,  but  thb  southern  tide  ht  vi  the  greatest 
durntion,  and  runs  the  strongest. 

All  who  pass  near  the  South  Shoals  should,  for  their  own  safety,  pay  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  tides,  sometimes  a  current  sweeping  them  over  the  bottom  with  a  velocity  as 
great,  and  even  much  greater  in  some  instances,  than  the  vessel  moves  through  the  water. 

Extract  from  the  surveying  tloop  OrbifB  Journal. 


•'  Sankaty  Head  bearing  N.  W. 
Sinsconset  town  N.  W.  ^  N. 

Southerumost  land        W. 


»  Sankaty  Head  bearing 
Siasconset 
Tom  Never's  Head 
Southernmost  land 


N.  by  W. 
N.  N.  W. 
N.  W.  by  N. 
W.  N.  W. 


Came  to  a  large  swash  through  the  Bass 
Rip  with  5  fathoms.  Standing  on  the  rip, 
had  from  9  feet  to  2  fathoms,  hard  sand. 


On  the  south  breaker  of  Bass  Rip,  in  9 
and  8  feet  and  less. 


"  Kept  standing  on  to  the  southward  in  a  channel  of  from  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms  Snnkaty 

Head  bearing  N.  by  W.,  8  miles,  crossed  a  dangerous  rip  in  25  fathoms,  lying  "i   W.  by 

S.    From  this  rip  E.  S.  E.,  3  miles  distant,  is  another  rip.  between  which  are  !),  15,  17, 

14,6,  and  4  fathoms,  which  is  the  shoulest  water  on  the  rip  :  then  standing  east,  had  7 

and  8  fathoms ;  three  cables'  length  from  this  rip,  came  to  another,  with  4  fathoms  water; 

from  this,  at  equal  distance,  came  to  a  third,  then  a  fourth,  all  of  which  were  within  the 

liraitsof  3  miles,  and  lay  N.  and  S.     Although  they  have  the  appearance  of  danger,  there 

are  not  less  than  4  fathoms  on  the  shoalest  part.     After  crossing  the  fourth  rip.  c<i!ne  into 

deep  water  within  one  mile,  viz:  12,  17,  22,  and  25  fathoms,  sand  and  red  gravel.     When 

over,  had  smooth  water  with  3  fathoms,  and  made  a  south  course,  having  4,  11,  18,  and 

tlien  11  fiitlioms.  and  crossed  the  east  end  of  the  South  Shoal  in  2  fathoms,  running  down 

the  south  side  in   13  fathoms,  80  fathoms  distant,  when  we  anchored  in  10  fathoms. 

Got  under  way  and  stood  to  the  westward ;  had  7,  4, 6,  5.  and  7  fathoms ;  doubled  round 

the  west  end  in  3  fathoms,  fine  sand;  when  over,  hai  7  fathoms,  the  tide  settnig  N.  N. 

W.    Kept  along  the  north  side  in  2^,  2^,  and  2  fatiioms,  one  cable's  length  from  the 

i  breakers.     When  about  midway  the  shoal,  perceived  a  swash,  through  which  we  crossed 

I  bptwoen  the  breakers,  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction,  bad  2i  and  2  fathoms,  and  one  cast  9  feet, 

I  at  which  time  it  was  about  half  tide.     In  a  few  moments,  deepened  to  4,  5,  6,  and  7 

i  fathoms,  2  cables'  length  from  the  shoal,  hard  white  sand.     From  this,  steered  S.  j  W., 

I  to  make  a  south  course  good,  kept  the  lead  going,  and  increased  the  soundings  gradually 

to  10  fathoms,  fine  black  and  white  sand,  then  one  mile  from  the  shoal.     From  this 

sounded  every  three  miles,  depth  increasing  about  ono  fathom  per  mile,  till  at  the  distance 

j  of  7  leagues  from  the  south  shoal,  where  we  found  28  fathoms,  fine  black  and  white  sand. 

'This  Shoal,  together  with  George's  Bank,  have  been  surveyed  at  the  expense  of  B.  M.  Blunt, 
nd  published  on  a  large  scale,  by  £.  &G.  W.  BLUNT,  179  Waterstreet,  comer  of  Burling  Slip. 


188 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


This  was  in  Int.  40°  42'  N.  long.  69°  56'  W.  The  same  quality  of  soundings  continue 
till  you  get  in  lat.  40°  31'  N.,  when  you  will  have  40  fathoms,  soft  mud,  from  which  it 
continues  muddy  bottom  tilloflf  sounding?,  and  40°  00'  N.  no  bottom,  with  120  fiirhonis.'' 
NoTK. — The  Orbit.  (Capt.  J.  Colesworthy,)  was  sent  by  the  author  of  this  worli  to  as- 
certain the  exact  situation  of  the  South  Shoal,  which  dittering  so  much  in  latitude  from 
what  it  had  ever  been  laid  down,  induced  several  gentlemen  in  Nantucket,  again  to  ea- 
gage  in  the  entc  'prise,  who  confirm  the  surveys  made  in  that  vessel,  and  make  the  fol, 
lowing  report:  -Observed  in  hit,  41°  4'  11"  N.,  abreast  of  the  shoal,  as  laid  down  by 
Capt.  Colesworthy  ;  steered  off  S.  by  W.,  22  miles,  and  regularly  deepened  the  water 
to  35  fathoms ;  steered  E.  N.  E.,  twelve  miles,  to  30  fathoms;  N.  W.,  twenty  niilfB  to 
18  fathoms ;  S.  S.  W.,  ten  miles,  to  30  fathoms ;  and  N.  N.  W.,  fourteen  miles,  regu- 
larly shoaling  until  6  A.  M.,  made  the  mills,  and  came  in  at  one  P.  M.  These  several 
courses  formed  a  track  over  where  Paul  Pinkham  has  laid  the  South  Sh'ml  of  I^aa- 
tucket,  and  on  which  there  are  28  fathoms." 
Ntv  South  NEW  SOUTH  SHOAL. — This  dangerous  shoal  was  discovered  and  surveyed  by 
Shoal.  Lieut.  Charles  H.  Davis,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.     It  has  on  it  only  8  feet  in  places,  aud 

bears  from  the  middle  of  the  Old  Shoal  from  S.  3°  28'  W.  to  S.  16°  42'  E.,  by  conipasa, 
distance  6^%  miles.  It  is  2^*^^  miles  long  from  east  to  west;  and  its  greatest  breadth,  from' 
north  to  south,  nine-tenths  of  a  mile. 

Between  it  and  the  Old  Shoa'  there  are  from  4  to  18  fathoms  water ;  but  to  the  north 
and  east  there  are  ridges  of  only  20  to  24  feet  water,  to  the  extent  of  about  threo  miles 
from  the  New  Shoals.  Lt.  Davis  states  that  deep  water  intervenes  between  these  ridges 
and  the  soundings  on  the  ridges  were  very  irregular. 

The  tide  rips  showed  that  two,  and  perhaps  three,  lines  of  shoal  ground  are  near  each 
other,  in  parallel  directions.     The  latitude  of  the  centre  of  the  New  Shoals  is  40°  57'  50" 
N.,  longitude  60°  51'  40'  W.,  and  boars  from  Sankaty  Head,  S.  i  E.,  19^  miles. 
THde$.  The  tides  set  regularly  round  the  compass,  the  main  body  of  the  flood  running  to  the 

eastward  and  the  ebb  to  tlie  westward,  varying  north  and  south  of  east  aud  west. 

But  the  flood  begins  to  turn  to  the  southward,  passing  round  to  the  west,  and  ebb  to  the 
northward,  passing  round  to  the  east,  about  li  hour  before  the  principal  set  and  btruagth 
are  attained. 

Upon  the  shoals  the  tides  always  run  i   ross  their  line  of  direction,  and  are  much  more 
rapid,  which  makes  an  approach  on  the  side  to  which  the  tide  is  setting  very  dangerous, 
The  tide  is  never  still;  at  even  slack  water  its  velocity  is  seldom  less  tlian  half  a  mile, 
and  on  tho  second  quarter  of  the  flood  and  ebb  it  sets  at  a  rate  of  2  knots. 

Seven  leagues  to  tho  westward  of  the  South  Shoal,  in  25  or  30  fathoms,  you  will  have 
black  mud  of  n  shining  smooth  nature,  when  you  will  be  in  Tuckanuck  Channel. 

To  the  westward  of  the  South  Shoal  of  Nantucket,  you  have  no  shoals,  rips,  nor  tidcj 
to  hurt  you,  until  you  come  near  tho  land;  but  clear  sea,  good  navigation,  and  regular 
soundings.  To  the  eastward  and  northward  of  the  South  Shoal,  you  will  have  a  rapid 
tide. 
Poehiek Rip.  POCIIICK  RIP  lies  off  the  South-east  part  of  Nantucket  Island.  It  commences 
a  few  rods  south  of  Siasconset  town,  aud  then  runs  E.  S.  E.,  one  mile,  when  you  come 
to  a  corner  on  which  are  (i  feet  at  low  water  ;  between  this  corner  and  the  island  there 
are  a  few  swashes,  from  2i  to  3  fathoms,  through  which  vessels  may  pass.  From  tlie 
corner  the  rip  runs  south,  H  mile,  when  you  come  to  another  swat'^,  ualf  a  mile  vviiJe, 
with  7  lathoms.  W.  S.  W.,  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  this  channel,  is  a  very  shoal  spot, 
with  6  feet,  which  runs  S.  \V.  by  W.,  one-qunrtor  of  a  mile,  when  you  fall  into  a  swash 
40  rods  wide,  Tom  Never's  Head  bearing  N.N.  W.,  3  miles  distant.  You  then  come 
to  the  east  end  of  the  Old  Man,  which  runs  W.  S.  W.,  about  4  miles,  on  which  are  from 
9  feet  to  3  fathoms  ;  when  over  tho  Old  Man,  you  will  drop  into  7  fathoms,  fine  sand, 
with  black  specks. 

Between  the  Old  Man,  Tom  Never's  Head,  and  Pochick  Rip,  there  is  a  very  good 
roadstea<l.  or  anchorage;  and  with  tho  wind  at  N.  W.,  N.  N.  E.,  E.  S.  E.,  and  fiirnj, 
south  or  S.  S.  W.,  preferable  to  any  harbor  in  the  Vineyard  Sound  for  vessels  bound  to 
the  northward  or  eastward,  particularly  in  the  winter  season,  j)rovi(led  your  cnbles  aiid 
anchors  are  good.  Tom  Nover'o  Head  bearing  E.  N.  E.  i  N.,  the  southernmost  land 
W.  by  N.,  you  .vill  have  5  fathoms,  coarse  sand  ;  from  which,  to  the  Old  Man.  you  niil 
have  5,  C,  (ii,  7,  8,  9,  10  to  14  fiithoms,  red  sand,  then  half-way  between  tho  two;  I'roiu  | 
this  you  shoalen  to  13,  11,  8,  7,  5,  4,  and  3  fatlniuis,  line  sand,  with  black  s|)ecks. 
Bats  Kip.  B\.SS  RIP  on  which  there  are  from  4  to  IRfeot  water,  is  4  miles  long  in  a  N.  N,  E.  I 

and  .S.  .S.  W.  direction,  the  N.  E.  Point  bears  E.  10  S.from  Sankaty  iload  Light,  3  iiiiie) 
distant. 

From  Sankaty  Head  light,  north  by  the  way  of  east,  to  the  south,  a  sweep  of  1!)  niileil 
the  ground  is  broken  and   full  of  diMigcrous  shoals,  from  9  feet  upwards.     Vessels  ot .' 
feet  or  over,  should  not  attempt  to  nnviijate  within  this  extent  without  a  pilot. 
The  following  are  from  the  U.  .S.  Coast  Survey  : 
I.  A  dangerous  ridge  near  tho  New  South  Shoal,  lying  in  n  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  \V, 


wt^^^i^w^^mmiimmfim 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

direction,  having  on  it  4,  5,  nnd  6  fathoms,  and  deepening  very  rapidly  outside  to  20  and 
25  fHthoms,  and  inside  to  13  fathoms,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  in  bad  weather. 

The  following  bearings  are  tal<en  from  the  centre  of  this  ridge :  centre  of  New  South 
Shoal,  W.  by  S.,  distant  4  miles;  the  middle  of  the  Old  South  Shoal,  N.  f  W.,  distant 
6  miles. 

2.  A  shoal  spot  with  16  feet  of  water  on  it  in  the  channel-way  to  the  eastward  of  Bass 
Rip,  from  which  Sankaty  Head  bears  W.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  distant  4i  miles ;  and  Great  Point 
light,  N.  W.  i  N.,  distant  lOJ  miles. 

3.  A  shoal  having  14  feet  of  wator  on  it  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  Great  Point 
light,  and  north  of  Bass  Rip,  from  which  Sankaty  Head  bears  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  distant  4^ 
miles;  and  Groat  Point  light,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  distant  5J  miles. 

Four  shoals  having  on  them  from  9  to  15  feet,  bearing  from  Great  Point  light  E.  4  S 


m 


from 


10y\  miles  to  Qi  miles  distont.     From  Sankaty  Head  light  they  bear  N.  E.  j  E. 


from  9-fTs  miles  to  9/*^  miles  distant. 

These  shoals  can  readily  be  discovered  by  the  rip  (or  ripples)  formed  on  them  by  the 
tides  at  all  stages,  except  during  slack  water,  when  they  can  no  longer  be  detected  by 
this  means ;  but,  in  daylight,  they  exhibit  the  usual  discoloration  of  water. 

Two  small  spots  of  18  feet  water,  one  bears  from  Great  Point  light  E.  ^  S.  9/^  miles 
distant  from  Sankaty  Head  light,  N.  E.  4  E.  9y\  miles  distant. 

The  other  from  Great  Point  light  E.  |  S.  11/^  miles  distant  from  Sankaty  Head  light,  ^ 
N.  E.  4  E.  lOi  miles  distant. 

THE  GREAT  RIP  is  about  4  leagues  from  Sankaty  Head.     On  this  rip,  about  E.  S.  Great  Rip. 
E.  from  Sankaty  Head,  there  are  4  feet  water,  and  east  from  Squam  there  are  5;  but  on 
many  other  parts  of  it  there  are  2^,  3,  and  4  fathoms  water. 

FISHING  RIP  is  about  8  leagues  from  Sankaty  Head,  and  has  from  5  to  7  fathoms  Fishing  Hip. 
water  on  it.     Between  this  and  the  Great  Rip  the  ground  is  uneven,  there  are  12,  22, 
and  15  fathoms  water.     These  two  rips  stretch  nearly  north  and  south,  and  are  about  12 
miles  in  length. 

Around  the  coast  of  Nantucket  and  the  shoals,  you  will  have  sandy  bottom,  and  in 
moderate  weather  had  better  anchor  thon  be  driven  about  by  the  tide,  which  is  very  rapid. 
The  course  of  the  tides  at  and  over  Nantucket  Shoals,  is  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  and 
regular.  The  N.  E.  tide  makes  flood.  S.  S.  E.  moon  makes  high  water.  South  moon 
mnkes  full  sea  at  Nantucket  Harbor. 

S.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  moon  makes  high  water  on  the  shoals.  The  tide  of  flood  sets 
N.  E.  by  E.,  and  ebbs  S.  W.  by  \V.,  from  2  to  3  knots  an  hour.  It  ebbs  and  flows  about 
5  or  G  feet. 


E.  and  S.  S.  V, 


BLOCK  ISLAND  CHANNEL,  &c.,— Directions  for  those  rvnning  for  Block  Island  Block  Island 
Channel,  to  the  southward  of  Martha's  Vineyard,  Vineyard  Sound,  Nantucket  Island,  Cfiannel. 
and  such  as  are  bound  into  the  Vineyard  Sound,  and  intend  going  over  the  slwals  to  the 
eastward. 

In  approaching  the  south  end  of  Block  Island  (on  tho  N.  W.  point  of  which  two  light- 
houses are  erected,  as  after  described)  from  tho  southward,  the  water  shoals  gradually. 
Wlien  the  island  boars  from  N.  W.  to  N.  by  W.,  the  bottom  is  mud ;  this  is  commonly 
called  Block  Island  Channel.  This  Island,  if  you  come  from  tho  southward,  appears 
round  and  high;  and  if  you  opproach  it  from  the  S.  E.,  it  appears  like  a  saddle,  being 
high  at  i)otli  ends,  but  highest  to  the  southward.  Your  course  froiu  the  S.  E,  head  of 
Block  Island  to  (Jay  Head  lighthouse  is  E.  by  N.,  15  leagues.  The  current  in  Block 
Island  Channel,  is  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.,  two  knots.  If  you  i,.ll  to  the  southward  of 
Martha's  Vineyard,  and  can  see  Noman's  Land  Island,  and  intend  going  over  the  shoal 
to  tho  eastward,  bring  Noman's  Land  Island  to  bear  W.,  and  steer  K.  by  S.,  8  leagues, 
which  will  bring  you  up  with  Nantucket  Island,  to  which  you  must  give  a  distance  of  two 
milos,  until  you  have  passed  Micomic  Reef,  which  extends  one  mile  from  the  shore,  has 
two  fathoms  water,  and  bears  from  the  South  Tower  of  Nantucket  S.  by  W.  When 
you  get  to  the  eastward  of  this  rip,  you  may  nigh  the  shore  to  within  one-quarter  of  a 
mile,  until  up  with  Tom  Never's  Head,  which  lies  IJ  of  a  mile  to  the  southward 
and  westward  of  a  small  village,  called  8iasconset,  where  you  may  anchor,  if  necessary, 
in  4  or  5  fathoms. 

If  you  wish  to  conrit-.ue  through  tho  channel,  which  lies  between  Nantucket  Island 
and  the  Old  Man,  you  may  run  within  three  cables'  length  of  the  shore,  which  will  carry 
you  over  Pochick  Rip,  on  which  there  are  but  two  fathoms,  and  of  course  only  lit  for 
small  vessels.  When  on  this  rip,  hnul  to  within  one  cable's  length  of  the  sliore,  and 
continue  in  5  fathoms  till  tip  with  Sanknty  Head,  which  is  the  highest  eastern  land  of 
Nantucket.  Bring  Sankaty  Head  to  bear  S.  W.  when  in  5  fathoms  water,  and  run  N. 
E.  till  you  deepen  to  15  fathoms,  when  tho  Round  Shoal  Buoy  will  bear  N.  W. ;  after 
which  yo'?  shoal  into  7  and  rt  fathoms,  tine  ridges,  which  having  passed,  and  come  into  ': 
10  fathoms,  a  north  course  will  carry  you  to  tho  high  land  of  Capo  Cod,  17  leagues  dis- 


I 


iPHMPil 


184  '  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

tant.  If  in  a  Inrge  ship,  and  you  make  the  south  side  of  Nantucket,  bound  over  the 
ehonls,  you  may  proceed  either  within  or  without  the  Old  Man,  but  the  latter  ig  pre. 
ferable. 

If  you  wish  to  go  between  the  Old  Man  and  Pochick  Rip,  bring  Tom  Never's  HcHd  to 
bear  N.  W.  by  W.,  and  run  S.  E.  by  E.  till  Sanknty  Head  bears  N,  N.  W.  i  W.,  whore 
you  will  have  9  fathoms  water,  when  you  will  run  direct  for  Sankaty  Head,  till  in  5  fntii. 
oms,  which  will  be  close  on  board ;  then  continue  your  course  N.E.,  as  before  mentioned 
for  the  Round  Shoal.  In  running  the  S.  £.  by  E.  course,  you  go  through  a  swash  half  a 
mile  wide,  having  7  fathoms. 

If  you  are  coining  from  sea,  and  make  the  Island  of  Nantucket  to  the  northward  of 
you,  it  may  be  known  by  two  towers,  and  four  wind-mills,  which  stand  near  each  other 
upon  an  eminence.  You  may  then  steer  directly  for  the  land,  until  you  are  within  half 
a  mile,  and  may,  if  bound  to  the  eastward,  run  along  the  shore  in  4,  5,  and  G  fathoms 
water,  to  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  island,  where  there  are  shoals  ond  rips,  on  which  you 
will  huve  only  2i  or  3  fathoms  water.  Sankaty  Head  is  the  easternmost  headland  of 
Nantucket. 

If,  when  you  make  the  New  South  Shonl,  you  are  bound  to  Boston  Bay,  and  choose  to 
go  to  the  eastward  of  nil  the  shoals  and  rips,  pass  a  mile  or  two  to  the  southward  of  the 
shoal;  then  steer  N.  E.  by  E.,  about  7  leagues,  when  you  will  be  up  with  the  Fishing  Rjp. 
In  running  this  N.  E.  by  E.  course  you  will  deepen  to  25  fathoms,  which  is  about  niidwny 
of  South  Shoal  and  Fishing  Rip.  From  the  Fishing  Rip.  in  17  or  18  fathoms,  steer  N. 
N.  W.  for  the  high  laud  of  Cape  Cod,  IH  leagues,  uu  which  is  a  lighthouse  containing  a 
fixed  light. 

If  you  come  from  the  eastward,  and  are  bound  for  New  York,  you  should  be  careful 
not  to  go  to  the  northward  of  40°  54'  N.  latitude,  until  you  pass  the  shoals  of  Nantucket. 
If  by  stress  of  weather,  you  should  be  driven  so  far  to  the  northward  as  to  be  near  the 
Vineyard,  you  may  pass  through  the  channel  to  the  westward  of  Nantuiket  Island,  by 
bringing  Cape  Poge  lighthouse  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  and  steering  right  for  it,  will  lead  you 
through,  in  from  3  to  4  fathoms,  clear  of  all  shoals,  leaving  Skitf's  Island,  which  is  a  dan- 
gerous shoal,  ou  your  larboard  hand.  Martha's  Vineyard  Island  lies  in  much  the  same 
latitude  as  Nantucket  Island,  and  may  bo  known  by  a  small  round  island  which  lies  at  the 
the  southward  of  Gay  Head  light,  called  Neman's  Land  Island,  before  mentioned,  8  miles 
distant.  You  may  go  between  this  is!"'..!  and  Martha's  Vineyard  ;  but  you  must  take  cnio 
to  avoid  a  lodge  of  rocks  which  bears  from  Gay  Head  light  S.  by  E.,  5i  miles  distant, 
called  the  Old  Man. 

In  bad  weather,  coining  from  the  eastward,  and  you  wish  for  a  harbor,  and  the  wind  nd- 
mittiiig,  you  may  bring  Nantucket  light  to  boar  E.  S.  E..  and  run  W.  N.  VV.,  making  your 
course  good,  until  Cape  Poge  lighthouse  bears  VV.  by  S.;  if  bound  into  Edgnrtown  Iliir- 
bor,  then  steer  for  the  light  until  you  get  in  3  fathoms  water,  then  run  W.  N.  W. ;  if  it 
ehoals,  haul  to  the  northward  ;  if  not,  keep  on  until  the  light  bears  south,  then  run  W.  S. 
W.;  you  will  have  3  und  4  fathoms,  hard  bottom.  As  soon  ns  ynu  get  ii]  5i  or  6  fatlioiiis, 
Bucky  hottoui,  then  run  S.  S.  W.  until  the  light  bears  N.  E.  i  E.;  then  you  may  anclmr 
in  about  5  or  ti  fathoms  water  with  snlVty,  in  case  your  cables  and  ancliorsare  seaworthy; 
otherwise,  if  you  wish  to  go  into  the  harbor,  when  the  light  bears  N.  E.  i  E.,  you  may 
run  S.  W.  by  W.  until  you  got  3i  fathoms,  hard  bottom,  then  run  west  about  half  a  mile, 
and  you  will  be  within  the  flats,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  coming  in  ;  you 
will  find  it  smooth,  and  about  3  or  4  fathoms  water,  where  you  may  anchor  with  safety, 
though  your  ground  tackling  is  pour. 
Muskeket  MUSKEKET  CHANNEL. — Several  buoys  have  recently  been  placed  in  this  clian- 

Channel.  nol.  which  is  situated  between  Martha's  Vineyard  and  the  Island  of  Nantucket. 

Vessels  bound  westward  over  Nantucket  Shoals,  and  when  abotit  3  miles  from  Cape 
Poge  light,  will  be  near  a  i)lack  imoy  on  the  north  ond  of  Haws'  Shoal,  which  lies  nidoit'il 
in  3  fathoms  water.  Cape  Poge  Light  bearing  W.  i  N.,  the  tall  steeple  in  Edgnrtown  \V, 
l  S.,  and  Sampson's  Hill  S.  W.  by  W.  Leave  this  buoy  on  your  liuboard  hand  ami  s^tecr 
south-westerly,  until  Cape  Pope  light  bears  N.  by  W.,  and  then  steer  S.  by  E..  Yim 
should  be  careful  to  keep  the  light  on  these  hearings,  as  the  tide  runs  strong  throufih  lliis 
channel.  A  south  by  E.  course  will  curry  you  near  a  rod  buoy,  which  lies  moorc^d  in  3 
fathoms  wafer  on  the  outer  end  of  'J'om's  Shoal,  two-thiiils  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and 
bears  from  Cape  Poge  light  S.  i  E.  When  up  with  this  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your 
starboard  hand,  and  bearing  about  ea>t,  one  mile  distnnt.  is  a  black  buoy,  which  lies  inouri'J 
in  3  fntlioms  water,  on  the  S.  W.  end  of  Haws'  Shoal,  which  bears  from  (^ape  i'ii;;e 
light  .S.  E.  by  S.  i  >S.  Leave  this  i)uoy  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  continue  on  ymir 
S.  by  E.  course,  which  will  carry  you  out  to  sea,  having  not  less  than  3  fathoms  wiitcr, 
leaving  Skiff's  Island*  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  Mutton   Shoal  on  your  larboard  hand, 

•  Skifl''B  Island  may,  perhaps,  more  properly  be  termed  a  shoal ;  formerly  it.  was  nn  icliuid  con- 
taining two  or  tliree  acres  of  laud,  now  it  alters  sonievs  hat  during  a  heavy  gale,  hut  some  portioo 
of  it  is  visible  at  all  times. 


mt^mmmmm 


mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


186 


le  northwnid  of 
lear  each  other, 
I  nre  within  half 
',  and  G  fathouis 
,  on  which  you 
lost  headland  of 

y,  and  choose  to 
)uthward  of  tlie 
he  Fishing  Rip. 
is  about  midway 
thoins,  steer  N. 
use  containing  a 

hould  be  careful 
Is  of  NantucliPt. 
8  to  be  near  the 
uciiet  Isliinii,  by 
it.  will  lead  you 
which  is  a  dan- 
much  the  same 
which  lies  at  the 
(utioned,  8  miles 
>u  must  take  core 
)i  miles  distant, 

and  the  wind  ad- 
W.,  making  your 
Edgnrtown  Har- 
W.  N.  W.;  if  it 
,  then  run  W.  S. 
54  or  6  fullioiiis, 
you  may  ancliur 
s  are  seaworthy; 
!.  4  E-»  you  may 
ibout  half  a  mile, 
coming  in  ;  you 
;hor  with  safety, 

:ed  in  this  clian- 
ntucket. 
miles  from  Cape 
hich  lieH  iiiDoml 
1  Edgiirtown  W. 
"d  hand  andbtect 
S.  by  E..  Yoa 
ong  through  liiis 
lies  mooned  in  3 
m  the  tihoro,  and 
on  leavo  on  your 
i'hicli  lios  nioorcJ 
from  (."ape  I'nce 
;oiilinuo  on  ydiir 
3  fathoms  wiiti'r, 
jr  larboaril  band, 

was  nn  iHliiiid  con. 
,  but  Bouie  portiun 


apoD  the  west  end  of  which  is  a  black  buoy,  which  lies  moored  in  3  fathoms  water,  bearing 

from  Cape  Poge  light  S.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  from  Sliiif 's  Island  S.  E.  by  E.,  three-fourths  of  ^ 

I  mile  distant. 

V^hen  abreast  of  Skiff's  Island  you  will  have  25  fathoms  of  water,  and  as  you  go  to  the  / 

southward  you  will  gradually  shoalen  the  water  to  three  fathoms,  which  is  all  you  can  carry 
out  of  the  channel  to  sea. 

Come  no  nearer  the  Vineyard  shore  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  you  can  carry  2 
fathoms  of  water  from  Cape  Poge  to  Washqua  Hill. 

In  beating  through  this  channel,  when  Cape  Poge  light  bears  N.  N.  W.,  go  about. 
Should  the  weather  be  thick,  and  the  light  obscure,  when  you  are  stretching  over  toward 
Hawes'  Shoal,  as  soon  as  you  commence  deepening  your  water  go  about ;  you  are  near 
the  Shoal. 

Should  the  buoys  be  out  of  place,  by  bringing  Cape  Poge  liglit  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  you 
can  go  through  the  channel  in  the  best  water. 

S.  E.  by  E.  from  Cape  Poge  light,  on  Hawes'  Shoal,  lies  the  wreck  of  an  English 
brig,  which  is  awash  of  the  water  at  low  tide. 

Vessels  falling  in  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  Gay  Head,  may  keep  within  three- 
fourths  of  u  mile  from  the  shore,  and  can  carry  2  fathoms  of  water  around  the  island  to 
Cape  Poge.  Be  particular  and  give  Washqua  Point  a  berth  of  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  to 
clear  a  ledge  of  rocks  that  lies  off  the  Point.  Keepitig  this  distance  from  the  shore 
will  carry  you  inside  of  the  slioal  at  the  south  of  the  Vineyard  ;  or  you  mr.y  run  down 
outside,  until  Cape  Poge  light  bears  N.  by  W.,  when  you  may  steer  directly  for  it,  pass- 
ing the  buoys  as  before  mentioned. 

You  should  not  attempt  to  rua  in  for  the  Vineyard  shore  from  sea,  in  order  to  go  down 
inside  the  bar,  unless  you  are  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Catama  Woods,  (a  clump  of 
trees  at  the  south  part  of  Edgartown  Harbor,)  which  will  carry  you  clear  of  the  west  end 
of  the  bar,  upon  which  the  seu  breaks  at  all  times,  and  can  be  distinctly  seen. 

GAY  HEAD  LIGHTHOUSE  stands  at  the  southwest  end  of  Martha's  Vineyard,   Gay    Head 
on  a  remarkable  promontory,  called  Gay  Head,  elevated  above  high  water  134  feet,  eleva-  lighthouse. 
tion  of  light  above  the  sea.  150  feet. 

The  cliff,  which  rises  about  134  feet  above  the  water,  is  very  conspicuous  from  the  dif- 
ferent colors  of  the  earth,  which  have  been  exposed  by  the  action  of  the  elements. 

The  lights  revolve  once  in  about  four  minutes,  and  are  observed  twice  in  each  revolu- 
tion. At  the  distance  of  12  miles  they  are  obscured  about  three-fourths  of  tVie  time;  at 
Smiles  distance  they  may  always  be  seen,  though  dimly,  through  parts  of  each  revolution. 
Cape  Poge  light  at  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Vineyard,  may  be  seen  over  the  land  from  sea, 
is  a  fixed  light,  to  distinguish  it  from  Gay  Head  ;  also  Cutterhuuk  light,  at  the  N.  W. 
part  of  Cutterhunk  Island,  south  entrance  of  Buzzard's  Bay,  which  is  also  a  fixed  light. 
The  Devil's  Bridge,  a  rocky  shoal,  makes  off  about  N.  W.  from  the  light,  one  and  a  half 
mile  distant. 

Bearings  and  distances  from  the  light :  West  part  of  Neman's  Land  Island  bears  S.  8° 
W.  from  Gay  Head,  Gi  miles  distant.  The  island  is  about  three  miles  long  and  one  broad. 
Old  Man  S.  by  E.  This  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  lies  two-thirds  of  the  distance  from 
the  Vineyard  to  Neman's  Land  Island,  which  has  a  passage  on  both  sides,  tliat  is  but  little 
used.  Those  who  go  through  must  keep  near  Neman's  Land  Island  till  the  light  bears 
north.  You  will  have  7  fathoms  water  in  this  passage.  Sow  and  Pigs,  N.  W.  by  W., 
Sj  leagues.  This  is  a  ledge  of  rocks  which  is  very  dangerous.  Newport  (Rhode  Island) 
lighthouse,  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  disUint  11  leagues. 

To  enter  the  Vineyard  SounJ,  bring  Gay  Head  light  to  bear  S.  E.  4  miles  distant,  and 
iteer  E.  N.  E. 

To  enter  Buzzard's  Bay  through  Quick's  Hole,  bring  Gay  Head  light  to  bear  S.  i  W., 
and  steer  N.  4  E.  to  the  entrance  of  Quick's  Hole,  which  is  six  miles  from  Gay  Head. 
Menernsha  Bite,  which  lies  on  tho  north  side  of  Gay  Head,  afi'ords  good  anchorage  24  to 
3  miles  east  from  the  light,  with  the  wind  from  E.  to  S.  W.,  but  being  much  exposed  to 
the  influence  of  northerly  winds,  it  should  be  resorted  to  only  in  tho  summer,  or  at  other 
tiuies  from  necessity. 

From  Gay  Head  lighthouse,  the  south  part  of  Catterhunk  Island  bears  N.  45°  W.,  dis- 
tant 74  miles. 

A  lighthouse  showing  a  fixed  light,  is  on  tho  West  Cliop  of  Holmes'  Hole,  elevated  60  Light. 
feetahovo  tho  sea. 

If  you  wish  to  go  to  Holmes'  Hole,  or  through  the  sound,  bring  Cape  Poge  light  to 
boar  is.  E.  by  E.  i  E,,  and  run  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.;  you  will  run  fur  the  East  Chop,  and 
leave  Squash  Meadow  Shoal  on  your  starboard  hand;  got  3  fathoms  water  on  the  Chop, 
then  haul  to  tho  N.  N.  W.  until  you  deepen  to  7,  8.  or  9  fathoms;  then  run  S.  W.  by  W. 
for  Holmes'  Hole  Roadstead,  in  4  or  34  fathoms,  or  N.  W.  for  the  sound,  to  clear  the  West 
Chop  and  Middle  (xround. 

(Jay  Head  is  the  westernmost  land  of  Martha's  Vineyard.  When  you  come  by  Gay 
Uead  with  u  southerly  wind,  the  south  channel  is  best.     From  Gay  Head  to  Nantucket 


""■'  ""^WWPW 


186  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Point,  the  tide  sets  directly  through  the  Vineyard  Sound  with  a  little  variation,  after 

?n88ing  Cnpe  Poge  to  the  eastward,  which  is  caused  by  a  strong  tide  setting  through 
'uckanuck  Channfil.  The  land  of  Gay  Head  is  high,  and  of  divors  colors,  namely,  red 
yellow,  and  white,  in  streaks.  In  steering  from  Block  Island  for  Gay  Head,  you  must  be 
careful  to  avoid  the  Sow  and  Pigs ;  they  make  a  led^o  of  rocks,  someof  which  are  above 
and  others  under  water.  These  rocks  lie  2i  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  westernmost 
of  Elizabeth  Isles,  and  W.  N.  W.  from  Gay  Head  23  leagues  distant;  the  first  of  the 
flood  tide  sets  strong  to  the  northward  over  them  into  Buzzard's  Bay.  Your  course 
along  Elizabeth  Islos  is  E.  N.  E.  in  15,  14,  12,  8,  15, 16,  and  17  fathoms  water;  give  the 
isles  a  berth  of  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  In  running  from  Gay  Head  lighi.  into 
Vineyard  Sound,  if  you  wish  to  make  a  harbor  on  the  north  side,  bring  Gay  Headligluto 
bear  S.  VV.,  and  run  N.  E.  3  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Tarpaulin  Cove  light, 
where  you  may  anchor  in  from  4  to  18  fathoms,  on  fine  sand,  the  light  bearing  from  w! 
by  N.  to  S.  W.,  aflbrding  safe  anchorage  with  northerly  winds.  You  can  anchor  in  this 
harbor  in  from  4  to  2i  fathoms,  taking  care  to  avoid  two  rocks,  one  on  the  north  the  other 
on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor.  To  avoid  the  northern  one,  of  14  feet,  do  not  bring  the 
light  to  bear  to  the  south  of  S.  S.  W.;  and  to  avoid  the  other,  of  13  feet,  do  not  bring  the 
light  to  bear  south  of  S.  i  W. 
Tarpaulin  TARPAULIN  COVE  LIGHT  lies  on  the  larboard  hand  as  you  enter  that  harbor, 

Cove  light.      and  shows  a  fixed  light,  elevated  80  feet  above  the  sea.    It  bears  about  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
Gay  Head  light,  which  is  a  revolving  light,  3i  leagues  distant. 

A  shoal  of  13  feet,  2i  miles  S.  by  E.  i  E.  from  Tarpaulin  Cove,  has  been  found  by  Lt. 
C.  H.  Davis,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  One-third  of  a  mile  N.  E.  from  the  lighthouse,  there 
is  a  rock  of  7  feet  water,  on  which  there  is  a  black  buoy.  High  water  full  and  chanse 
1145.  ^ 

When  coming  from  sea,  you  may  run  for  Gay  Head  light  when 't  bears  from  N.  N. 
E.  to  E.  S.  E.,  giving  it  a  berth  of  2  miles,  to  clear  the  Devil's  Lrnlge,  which  bears  from 
the  light  N.  W.,  1^  mile  distant.  As  measuring  the  distance  in  the  night  would  be  un- 
certain, you  must  keep  your  load  going,  and  if  you  should  have  7  or  8  fathoms  when  the 
light  bears  S.  E.  by  E.,  or  S.  E.,  haul  up  north  till  you  have  10  or  12  fiithoms ;  then  with 
flood  steer  N.  E.,  and  with  ebb  N.  E.  by  E.  3  leagues  ;  then  E.  N.  E.  will  be  the  course 
of  the  sound,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  northward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  which  hns » 
Buoy.  black  buny  on  the  east  end,  in  16  foot  water,  bearing  from  Tarpaulin  Cove  light  E.  4 

leagues;  from  West  Chop  light  N.  W.  by  W.  half  a  mile;  and  from  the  black  buoy  on 
Hedge  Fence  W.  i  N.  3  leagues,  (shniilest  water  on  Middle  Ground  two  feet,)  when  you 
will  see  the  West  Chop  of  Holmes'  Hole  light,  which  you  may  run  for;  keep  one  mile 
from  shore  till  you  open  the  East  Chop  one  cable's  length,  and  with  a  flood  tide  steer  direct 
for  it,  and  with  ebb  keep  it  one  point  open,  till  you  open  a  wind-mill  on  the  west  side  of 
the  harbor  about  one  cable's  length,  then  run  up  in  the  middle  of  the  river,  till  you  come 
to  4  or  3  fathoms,  where  you  may  anchor  on  good  ground.  The  usual  mark  for  anchor- 
ing is  the  West  Chop,  bearing  from  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  W.  by  N.;  but  if  you  lie  any  time 
here,  the  best  anchoring  is  well  up  the  harbor,  and  close  to  the  shore,  mooring  S.  E.  and 
N.  W.,  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water.  In  this  harbor  which  is  about  two  miles  deep,  you  will 
lie  secure  from  all  winds  except  a  northerly  one. 

You  must  not  keep  further  than  two  miles  from  the  West  Chop,  as  tViere  is  a  shoal 
called  Hedge  Fence,  on  the  east  end  of  which  is  a  black  buoy,  in  16  feet  water,  benrin; 
from  West  Chop  east,  6  miles,  and  from  the  black  buoy  on  Middle  (h'ound,  E.  i  S. ij 
leagues.  The  Hedge  Fence  lies  al)out  oj  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Holmes'  Hole  light, 
and  extends  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.  6  miles,  is  about  half  a  mile  broad,  and  has  4  feet 
water  on  the  slioalest  part.  Between  this  shoal  and  Holmes'  Hole  there  are  from  8  to  12 
fathoms  water. 

If  you  make  the  Chop  in  the  night,  when  it  boars  S.  E.  you  are  clear  of  the  Middle 
Ground  ;  steer  for  the  east  side  of  it  till  you  strike  in  4  or  3  fathoms  on  the  flat  ground 
near  the  Chop,  then  steer  S.  E.  by  E.,  observing  not  to  go  nearer  the  land  than  •)  ftifhonis. 
If,  in  rtuining  .S.  E.  by  E.,  yon  fall  into  (i  or  7  fathoms,  haul  up  S.  by  W.,  or  S.  S.  W., 
anil  run  into  4  or  3  fathoms,  as  before  directed. 

If  bound  into  Vineyard   .Sound,  with  the  wind  at  the  eastward,  and  you  are  near  the 
south  side  of  Martha's  Vineyard,  to  go  between  S(|uil)iiocket  and  the  Old  Man,  run  round  I 
Squibnocket  in  3i  and  4  fiitlioms  water,  continuing  N.  N.  W.  along  the  beach  till  you  | 
come  to  Gay  Head  light,  and  if  ebb  tide,  anchor  in  5  fathoms,  the  light  bearing  fruiuN. 
to  N.  E. 

Vessels   entering  the  Vineynril  Sound  should  leave  Cutterhunk  light  on  the  Inrbonrdl 
hand,  giving  it  a  berth  of  3  miles,  to  avoid  the  So\/  and  Pigs,  the  western  part  of  which 
bears  S.  36°  W.  from  the  light,  24  miles  distant.     Cutterhunk  is  one  of  the  Eliziibeth  I 
Islands. 

Cutterhunk         CUTTERHUNK  LKJIIT  stands  on  the  south-west  part  of  the  island  at  the  entrnnctl 
lxi[ht.  of  Buzzard's  Bay,  intended  to  guide  vessels  into  the  bay,  and  point  out  the  location  of  tbl 


mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


187 


Sow  nnd  Piga  to  those  entering  the  bay  and  Vineyard  Sound.    It  is  a  fixed  light,  elevated 
48i  feet  above  the  sea  nt  high  water. 

SOW  AND  PIGS. — The  floating  light  ofl"  Sow  and  Pigs,  is  moored  in  9  feet  water.  Sow  and 
2A  miles  from  Cutterhunit  lighthouse,  at  the  distance  of  ^  of  a  mile  north-enstorly  from  Pigi- 
tlie  light  vessel,  there  are  3^  fathoms  water  on  the  Sow  and  Pigs,  between  which  point 
and  the  light  vessel  there  is  a  safe  channel.     One  mile  N.  easterly  from  light  vessel  the 
locks  dry  at  half  ebb. 

Gny  Head, 7f»ff  miles,  S.  E.  by  E.  I  E. 

Cutterhunk  lighthouse, 2/^  miles,  N.  E.  by  £. 

Old  Cock  Rock,.. 4j'V  miles,  N.  by  W.  i  W. 

Dumpling  Light, 9j%  miles,  N.  E.  by  Nl  ^  N* 

Bearings  from  Cutterhunk  Lighthouse.  * 

West  part  of  Sow  and  Pigs,  very  dangerous,. S.  SC*  W 2i  miles. 

Seconsot  Point  Rocks, N.  71°  W....13      do. 

Old  Cock,  a  rock  north  side  entrance  Buzzard's  Bay,, .  .N.  45°  W 5 


Mishoin  Point N. 

Dumplin  Rock  lighthouse, N. 

Clark's  Point  lighthouse, N. 

West  Point  Pune  Island, , N. 

Gay  Head  lighthouse N. 


6°E. 
18°  E. 
20°  E. 
34°  E. 
42°  E. 


5 

do. 

64 

do. 

8i 

do. 

12i 

do. 

3 

do. 

7 

do. 

In  entering  Buzzard's  Bay,  bring  Cutterhunk  light  to  bear  east,  3  miles  distant,  and 
gteer  N.  E.  by  N.,  which  course  will  carry  a  vessel  to  good  anchorage,  in  65  and  7  fath- 
oms, about  one  mije  from  the  Dumplin  Rock  light,  with  it  bearing  from  N.  N.  E.  to  N. 
E.  by  N.  This  is  as  far  as  a  stranger  should  venture  without  a  pilot,  who  can  always  be 
had  on  sptting  a  signal. 

VINEYARD  SOUND. — In  coming  into  the  sound  in  the  night,  with  a  strong  north-  Vineyard 
westerly  wind,  haul  to  the  northward  till  you  have  smooth  water  under  the  Elizabeth  Isl-  Sound. 
ands,  where  you  may  anchor  in  14  or  10  fathoms.  Should  you  have  the  wind  to  the 
southward,  it  will  be  best  to  ran  down  through  the  South  Channel  or  Vineyard  side. 
When  Gay  Head  light  bears  S.  S.  E.  your  course  is  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  or  E.  N.  E.,  ob- 
serving not  to  come  nearer  the  land  than  into  7  fathoms  water,  till  you  are  abreast  of 
Lambert's  Cove,  in  which  is  good  anchorage,  with  southerly  or  easterly  winds,  and  may 
be  known  by  a  high  sand-bank,  called  Necunkey  Cliff,  on  the  east  side  of  it,  about  midway 
the  cove,  opposite  which  you  may  come  to  in  5  or  3  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  where  is  the 
best  anchoring.  The  Middle  Ground  lies  about  two  miles  without  the  cove,  and  has  12 
feet  water  on  it.  If  you  intend  running  down  for  Holmes'  Hole,  your  course,  when  oppo- 
site Necunkey  Point,  is  E.  by  N.,  keeping  near  the  land  to  clear  the  Middle  Ground,  the 
east  end  of  which  bears  east  from  Tarpaulin  Cove  light  4  leagues  distant.  You  may  track 
the  shore  by  the  lead  in  from  7  to  4  fathoms,  till  you  come  near  the  light ;  but  come  no 
nearer  than  3  fathoms  ;  and  you  may  track  the  Chop  around,  the  same  as  running  down 
to  the  northward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  which  bears  from  the  West  Chop  light  N.  W. 
by  W.  half  a  mile,  and  from  the  east  end  of  the  Hedge  Fence,  W.  ^  N.  3  leagues.  There 
s  good  anchoring  along  tliis  shore,  in  6  or  4  fathoms,  after  you  are  to  tho  eastward  of 
N(!cunkey  Point,  till  you  come  near  the  West  Chop.  If  you  wish  to  make  a  harbor 
after  entering  the  Vineyard  Sound,  bring  Gay  Head  light  to  bear  W.  distant  8  miles,  and 
run  S.  E.  till  you  come  into  7  fathoms  water,  which  will  be  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay 
in  NimshclMfp,  near  Clark's  Spring,  where  the  best  water  may  be  had  in  great  abundance, 
and  lie  in  ^i-.^t  anchorage  Gay  Head  light  bearing  W.  by  N.  The  tide  flows,  at  change  and  Tide, 
full  diivs  of  the  moon,  at  9  o'clock,  but  in  tho  channel  between  Elizabeth  Islands  and  Mar- 
tha's Vineyard,  the  flood  runs  till  11  o'clock.  In  this  channel  there  is  a  Middle  Ground, 
which  is  a  narrow  shoal  of  sand,  tho  eastern  end  of  which  bears  N  .  W.  by  N.  from  the 
light.  There  are  not  more  than  3  or  4  feet  on  the  eastern  end.  N.  W.  from  Necunkey 
Ciill'aro  3  and  4  fathoms  across  tho  ground.  Opposite  Lambert's  Cove  are  12  feet,  and 
to  the  westward  of  that,  are  3  or  4  fathoms.  The  shoal  lies  W.  l)y  S.  and  E.  by  N.,  is 
about  4  leagues  in  length,  and  has  several  swashes  on  it.  When  the  East  Chop  of 
Holmes' Hole  comes  open  of  the  West  Chop,  you  are  to  tlio  eastward  of  tho  Middle 
Ground.  Your  course  from  Tarpau'.in  Cove  light  to  Holmes'  Hole  light  is  E.  i  N., 
distant  3  leagues.  In  steering  this  course,  you  must  have  regard  to  the  tide,  as  the  ebb 
moy  set  you  too  far  to  the  southward,  and  the  flood  too  far  to  the  northward,  and  stand  in 
for  the  harbor,  wlien  you  have  opened  the  East  Chop,  as  before  directed.  From  Holmes' 
Hole  light  to  Cape  Pogo  light,  the  course  is  E.  S.  E.,  and  the  distance  about  3  lonprufs . 
in  the  channel  between  them  there  are  12  and  11  fathoms  water.    In  going  over  the 


"nil"  11        WWIBW" 


188 


»      BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.        ' 
Bhoal8  through  this  chanuel,  you  must  be  careful  to  keep  your  lead  going,  in  order  to 


Ifeta  Bed- 
ford, through 
Quick's 
Hole. 
Lighthouse. 


Palmer's 

Island 

Light. 


fathoms  water,  the  latter  of  which  is  between  the  east  end  of  the  Horse-shoe  and  Tucli' 
auuck  Shoal  When  Tuckanuck  Island  bears  S.  S.  W.  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  th«, 
Horse-shoe.  On  the  south  side  of  the  chp.nnel,  also,  there  are  several  spots^of  shoals  to 
avoid  which  you  must  keep  your  lead  going. 

NEW  BEDFORD,  THROUGH  QUICK'S  HOLE.— Bring  Gay  Head  lighthouge 
which  contains  a  revolving  light,  to  bear  S  ^  W.  and  run  N.  \  E.  till  you  come  tc  the 
passage  through  the  Islands,  which  forms  Quick's  Hole,  which  you  must  enter  as  near 
the  middle  as  possible;  but  if  you  deviate,  keep  the  starboard  hand  best  on  board,  to 
avoid  a  spit  or  flat  which  runs  off  from  the  S.  E.  point  of  Nashawina,  on  the  larboard 
hand,  when  you  will  have  from  5  to  6  fathoms,  then  haul  square  into  the  Hole,  keeping 
the  larboard  hand  best  on  board,  following  somewhat  the  band  of  the  shore.  You  wifi 
keep  Gay  Head  light  open  about  a  ship's  length  by  the  S.  E.  point  of  Nashawina,  till 
you  are  at  least  one  mile  north  of  the  Hole,  which  will  cb'  ry  you  to  the  eastward  of  a 
ledge  and  rock  that  lie  that  distance  from  it,  with  only  5  tc  12  feet  water  on  them,  to  the 
westward  of  which  is  a  good  channel,  and  5  fathoms  all  round.  Then  steer  N.  \  W.  till 
you  strike  hard  bottom  in  5  fathoms  water,  on  the  S.  E.  corner  of  the  Great  Ledge,  which 
is  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel ;  then  N.  E.  by  N.  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  till 
in  5^  or  6  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  when  the  light  will  bear  N.  N.  W. ;  then  steer  N.  by 
W.  and  run  into  the  river.f  After  passing  {Clark's  Pointlight,  you  will  see  a  small  island 
called  Outer  Egg  Island,  just  above  water,  which  you  will  leave  on  your  starboard  band 
giving  it  some  berth,  as  there  are  rocks  which  lie  south-westerly  from  it,  say  one-third' 
of  a  mile  distant,  but  still  keeping  nearer  to  it  than  to  the  main  land,  to  avoid  Butler's  Flat 
which  makes  otf  from  the  west  shore.  To  steer  clear  of  this  flat,  keep  the  lighthouse 
open  a  ship's  length  to  the  westward  of  the  Round  Hills.  As  soon  as  you  open  the  north 
line  of  the  woods  with  the  clear  land,  about  a  mile  north  of  the  lighthouse,  you  are  to 
the  northward  of  the  flat,  and  may  steer  direct,  either  for  the  hollow  or  the  high  part 
of  Palmer's  Island,  hauling  a  little  to  the  eastward  as  yi «  approach  it.  The  passage  be- 
tween this  island  and  Fort  Point,  on  the  starboard  hand,  is  narrow.  A  flat  which  extends 
out  S.  W.  from  the  point,  makes  it  necessary  to  keep  nearest  the  island.  As  you  draw 
towards  the  north  end  of  the  island,  give  it  a  berth  of  two  ships'  length,  as  a  small  flat  makes 
oft' east  from  its  N.  E.  point.  As  soon  as  you  have  passed  the  island  one  cable's  length, 
the  town  will  appear  open  on  your  larboard  hand,  when  you  may  run  for  the  end  of  the 
wharf  which  projects  out  farthest  into  the  channel  (Rotch's  Wharf)  ;  or,  to  anchor  iothe 
deepest  water,  bring  Clark's  Point  light  without  Palmer's  Island. 

PALMER'S  ISLAND  LIGHT  is  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  Palmer's  Island.  It  i837 
feet  high,  and  a  fixed  light.  With  it  in  range  with  Clark's  Point  light,  you  clear  all  the 
ledges  outside. 

In  the  river  Palmer's  Island  light  on  with  the  most  Northern  Mill  Chimney,  leads  out 
of  the  river  clear  of  danger. 

Other  directions  from  Quick's  Hole  to  New  Bedford  are,  to  make  a  north  course  good 
till  you  strike  hard  bottom  in  5  fathoms,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  and  then  haul 
up  N.  N.  W.,  but  the  former  directions  the  pilots  consider  safest. 

In  coming  into  New  Bedford  from  the  westward,  the  eastern  channel  is, safest  for 
strangers.  Give  the  Sow  and  Pigs  a  berth  of  one  mile,  and  run  N.  E.  by  N.  till  ''eiiikese 
Island  bears  S.  E. ;  then  E.  N.  E.  till  Gay  Head  light  bears  S.,  and  then  N.  A  W.,  us  bo- 
fore  directed. 

A  rock  lies  off  N.  W.  from  the  north  end  of  Penikese  Island  about  one  mile  distant,  on 
which  there  are  only  8  feet  at  low  water.  Between  this  and  Wilke's  Ledge  (on  which 
there  is  a  black  buoy)  is  an  open  ship  channel,  free  from  danger,  and  courses  may  be 
varied  as  circumstances  require.     By  tliose  who  are  acquainted  with  the  bay,  the  western 


*  Tuoknniick  Shoal  liuH  between  Cape  I'oge  and  Tuckanuck  Island.  On  the  shoal  a  Hoatinj 
light  is  moored. 

t  When  ninnin^  from  Quick's  Hole  for  the  N.  T-cdfre,  as  soon  as  you  find  yourself  in  7  futhonu 
water,  you  nmy  be  Kure  that  you  areabruastof  the  (ireut  Ledge,  or  bavcpasded  it. 

t  (Mark's  Point  lipblbouHc  gtaiiils  on  the  south  end  of  Clark's  Neck,  containing  a  fixod  Ijojit, 
eleviitcd  rr2  fi'et  above  the  jt^vcl  nf  the  sea,  at  bij,'li  water,  and  is  intciuled  to  fruitio  vc.isi'luiiito 
tbo  liarljorH  of  New  Hcdford  and  Fairlmveu.  Tlie  light  bears  from  Outterhunk  light,  iN.  i.'03  B, 
Hi  miles  distant. 

From  the  light  to  Dmnplin  Rock  light,  S.  24°  W.  3i  miles. 
••  "  CentreQuick'silolo,  S.  lO'B.  !)       do. 

•♦  •'  liluckUock,  S.O'IJE.SJ    do. 


mmm 


^mfmm 


shoal  afloatini 


»lf  in  7  fathom 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ehaonel  is  most  ^mmonly  used.  Oiving  the  Old  Cock,  Hen  and  Chickens  a  enfficient 
bertbi  the  only  .IdUger  to  be  avoided  in  approaching  Misbaum  Point,  is  a  rock  which  lies 
abouttive-sixt^sof  amile  ti.W.fi-omit,on  which  there  are  only  6  feet  water.  Having  passed 
jyiiBhauin  Point,  S.  W.  of  which,  |  of  a  mile  distant,  there  is  a  ledge,  on  which  there  are 
not  more  than  3^athoms  at  low  water,  and  sometimea  leas,  you  muy  steer  directly  for 
the  Uuinplia  Kock  light,  otf  the  Round  Hills,  and  which  may  be  puHsed  within  two  ca- 
bles' length  to  the  eastward.  Hence  to  Clark's  Point  light  the  course  is  N.  N.  E. ;  but 
to  avoid  the  Middle  Ledge,  (on  which  there  is  a  red  buoy,)  and  which  lies  very  near  in  a 
direct  course  from  the  outer  Dumplin  to  the  light,  it  ia  belter  to  steer  N.  £.  by  N.  about 
a  mile,  and  then  haul  up  N.  N.  E. ;  when  you  will  leave  the  ledge  on  your  larboard  hand. 
"ioa  may  also  carry  in  4  fathoms  to  the  westward  of  the  ledge,  but  the  channel  between 
it  and  the  Lone  Rock,  which  lies  IN.  W.  from  it,  is  narrow. 

DUMPLIN  ROCK  LIGHT,  is  on  one  of  the  Pumplin  Rocks  in  Buzzard's  Bay, 
i^  miles  iS.  8.  W.  from  Clark's  Point  lighthouse.  The  lantern  is  on  a  tower  on  the 
centre  of  a  dwelling-house,  showing  a  fixed  light,  forty-three  feet  above  the  sea.  Buoy 
oa  Middle  Ledge,  iN.  E.  by  N.  1  N.  U  mile;  Buoy  on  North  Ledge,  N.  E.  ii  E. 
2i  miles;  Buoy  on  Great  Ledge,  E.  li  S.  1  mile;  Wood's  Hole,  E.  by  S.  11  miles; 
Quick's  Hole,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  6  miles;  Buoy  on  Wilke's  Ledge,  S.  by  E.  i  E.  1|  mile; 
feoikese  Island,  S.  by  W.  6  miles;  Cutterhunk  lighthouse,  S.  S.  W.  7i  miles;  Sow 
aud  Pigs  S.  ti.  W.  i  W.  I)  miles ,  Mishaum  Point,  S.  W.  ^  W.  2  miles ;  White  Rock, 
N.  i  E.  §  uf  a  mile. 

When  bound  to  sea,  a  S.  W.  by  S.  course  from  the  Dumplin  Rock  light  will  cany  you 
just  without  the  ledge  south  of  Mishaum  Point,  and  in  a  fair  channel  way  between  the 
Sow  and  Pigs,  and  Hen  and  Chickens. 

From  Seacounet  Rocks  (giving  them  a  berth  of  one  mile)  to  the  entrance  of  Buzzard's 
Bay,  the  course  is  E.  Ii  H.  By  this  course  made  good,  all  the  dangers  of  the  Hen  and 
Chickens  will  be  avoided.  Soundings  generally,  from  9  to  7  fathoms,  and  mostly  hard 
bottom,  till  it  deepens  to  16  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  when  Cutterhunk  Island  light  will  be 
upwards  of  a  mile  distant,  and  Clark's  Point  light  will  bear  N.  N.  E.,  and  you  may  run 
directly  for  the  light  till  up  with  tlie  Dumplin  Rocks,  to  which  a  sufficient  berth  must  be 
given.  Or  you  may  stand  on  this  N.  N.  E.  course  till  in  7  fathoms,  sucky  bottom,  which 
will  be  between  Mishaum  Point  and  the  Round  Hills,  and  come  to  anchor,  or  otherwise, 
steer  N.  N.  E.  till  Puiie  Island  bears  S.  E.,  and  then  E.  N.  E.  for  Quick's  Hole  chan- 
nel, as  before  directed.  It  may  be  well  to  observe,  that  if,  when  you  have  stood  in  from 
Seaconnet  Point  towards  Cutterhunk  Island  light,  aud  the  light  on  Clark's  Point  is  not  to 
be  seen,  but  you  can  see  Gay  Head  light,  you  may  stand  on  your  course  E.  i  S.  till  you 
shut  it  in  betiind  the  west  end  of  Cutterhunk,  but  must  then  immediately  change  your 
course  to  N.  N.  E.  If  neither  light  is  to  be  seen,  the  soundings  are  the  only  dependence, 
aud  must  be  very  carefully  attended  to.  In  light  winds  you  must  take  care  the  flood  tide 
does  not  carry  you  into  Buzzard's  Bay,  or  on  the  Sow  and  Pigs. 

Additionai.  Rkmakks. — To  the  S.  E.  of  the  Dumplin  Rock  light,  one-half  to  three- 
quarters  of  u  mile  distant,  is  a  sand-spit  with  only  7  feet  of  water  on  it.  Between  thia 
spit  aud  the  rocks,  there  are  5  fathoms  water. 

Lone  Rock,  on  which  a  black  buoy  lies,  about  35  feet  S.  by  E.  from  the  rock  ;  from 
wliich  Clark's  Point  lighthouse  bears  N.  N.  E  ;  Outer  Dumplin  Rock,  S.  by  W.  i  W. ; 
iiound  Hill  S.  W.  i  S. ;  W^hite  Buoy  at  Hussey's  Rocks  8.  W.  by  W.,  distance  by  es- 
tiiuatiou,  one  mile.  The  entrance  of  Apponeganset  River  N.  W.,  and  N.  W.  of  the 
Middle  Ledge,  nearly  half  a  mile  distant,  is  nearly  or  quite  dry  at  low  water,  when  there 
are  2i  fathoms  around  it.  Between  this  rock  and  the  Hussey  Rock  is  the  entrance  to 
Appuuegaaset  River ;  depth  ot  water  in  the  channel  3^  fathoms.  There  is  also  a  chan- 
ael  between  the  Huasey  Rock  and  White  Rock.  Course  from  Quick's  Hole  to  entrance 
of  Apponegauset  River,  N.  N.  W. 

The  White  Rock,  on  which  a  white  buoy  lies,  about  40  feet  S.  S.  E.  from  the  Hussey's 
Rocks,  from  which  Round  Hills  bear  S.  S.  W. ;  white  Rock  south,  and  distant  by  esti- 
mation, one  mile ;  Clark's  Point  lighthouse  N.  E.  by  N  • ;  Buoy  at  the  Lone  Rock  N.  E. 
by  £.  and  the  entrance  of  Apponeganset  River,  N.  N-  W.  appears  considerably  high 
above  water,  and  the  two  rocks  to  the  westwai'd  of  it,  called  the  Rugged  Rocks,  are 
always  to  be  seen. 

A  small  rock  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  North  Ledge,  (about  one  mile  distant  from  the  buoy,) 
with  only  7  feet  water  on  it,  and  another  small  rock  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  same  ledge,  (about 
bdlf  a  mile  distant  from  the  buoy,)  with  10  feet  water  on  it,  were  recently  discovered  by 
Cupt.  Mosner.  On  the  former  he  struck  with  the  brig  Commodore  Decatur,  and  on  the 
latter  with  the  brig  Elizabeth. 

Facket  Rock,  a  small  sunken  rock,  on  which  there  are  4  feet  water,  lies  half  a  mile,  or 
upwards,  W.  by  N.  from  Black  Rock.  The  passage  for  coasting  vessels  bound  from  New 
Bedlbrd  up  the  bay,  is  between  Packet  and  Black  Rocks. 

The  Boundinga  acrosa  the  western  entrance  of  Buzzard's  Bay,  between  the  Sow  and 


189 


Dumplin 
Rock  Light. 
Lighthouse. 


190 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Buzzard's 
Bay. 


Pigs,  and  Hen  and  Chickens,  and  some  distance  within  them,  are  very  irregular,  varyiov 

from  6  to  10  and  15  fathoms,  and  bottom  generally  hard.  ° 

A  south-east  moon  makes  high  water  in  the  buy,  and  the  average  sat  of  tide  is  1^  knot. 

Bearings  of  lodges  from  Clark's  Point  light. 

North  Ledge S.  by  E. 

Middle  Ledge S.  by  W.  i  W. 

Great  Ledge, S.  by  W. 

Wilke's  Ledge S.  by  W. 

West's  Island  Ledge  (buoy,) S.  E.  by  £. 

Otiier  bearings  from  the  light. 

Old  Bartholomew  Rock, E.  26°  N.,  one-sixth  of  a  mile. 

distant. 

Quick's  Hole S.  9°  E. 

Dumplin  Rocks  light S.  21  W.  or  S.  S.  W.,  nearly. 

White  Rocks S.  25°  W. 

Round  Hill S.  20°  W. 

From  the  North  Ledge. 

The  lighthouse  bears N.  by  W. 

Black  Rock N.  E.  by  E. 

Dumplin  Rocks  light S.  W. 

From  Middle  Ledge. 

Lighthouse N.  by  E.  i  E. 

Dumplin  Rocks  li    -1 S.  W.  by  S.  i  S. 

From  Great  Ledge. 

Lighthouse, N.  i  E. 

Mishaum  Point W.  S.  W. 

North  Ledge, N.  N.  E.,  2  miles  disttint. 

Dumi.lin  Rocks  light W.  i  N, 

From  Wilke's  Ledge. 

Lighthouse N.  by  E. 

Mishaum  Point, W.  by  N.  i  N.,  2  miles  diwtiint. 

Dumplin  Rocks  light, N.  by  W.  i  W.,  about  sumo 

distance. 

From  West's  Island  Ledge. 

Lighthouse N.  W.  by  W. 

Mishaum W.  S.  W. 

Little  Black  Rock N.  by  E. 

Black  Rock N.  W.  i  W. 

BUZZARD'.S  BAY— Thc!  cntriinc*"  of  I5ii///,;ir(l's  Hay  lies  bclwcoii  Bird  l-jmidou 
the  N.  W.,  and  Wing's  Neck  on  tho  S.  E.  Sailing  for  Monument  River,  the  best  water 
is  near  to  Wing's  Neck,  and  from  the  point  of  Wing's  Neck,  nearly  up  to  tiio  southern- 
most of  Tobus  Islands,  are  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water.  Near  to  tho  Island,  ('robus.) 
commences  a  ridgo  of  flats,  extending;  over  to  tlio  N.  W.  shore,  on  which  are  7  to  9  tl'it 
water.  Having  passed  over  this  ridge,  you  will  have  from  15  to  20  foet  water,  wiiicli 
depth  you  mcy  carry  until  abreast  oif  a  large  single  rock,  called  the  Old  Cow,  which  lies 
about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  whtMi  you  will  come  up  with  a  ridge  of  Imrd 
saud,  from  100  to  120  fathoms  wide,  on  which  are  from  7  to  9  feet  water,  which,  after 
passing,  you  will  have  from  18  to  22  feet  water,  (|uite  up  to  Back  River  Harbor.  The 
soundings  are  reduced  to  low  water.  Rise  from  ;i  to  (i  feet.  High  water  at  fulliind 
change  of  the  muon  at  8  o'clock. 

Bird  Island  is  on  the  north  shore  of  Buzzard's  Buy,  neiir  the  east  side  of  Sippican  Hur- 
bor,  in  the  town  of  Rochester,  about  12  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  New  Bedford  lighthouse, 
It  is  small,  not  contaiiiitig  more  than  throe  acres  of  land,  and  is  about  five  foet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea.     The  light  and  dwelling-houses  are  buill  of  stone,  and  are  whitewashed. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


191 


The  tower  of  the  former  is  25  feet  high,  on  which  is  a  lantern  7  feet  high,    .'t  is  a  re- 
volving light;  time  of  revolution  3i  minutes.  ^ 

There  are  three  of  the  Tobus  Islands,  but  at  low  water  *^hey  are  all  connected. 

BUOYS  IN  BUZZARD'S  BAY.— There  are  5  buoys  placed  in  Buzzard's  Bay,  viz  i    Buoys  in 
A  yellow  buoy  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  North  Ledge,  in  2i  fathoms  water ;  a  red  buoy,    Buzzard's 
lyiag  in  very  shoal  water,  on  the  centre  of  the  middle,  which  is  a  small  ledge  ;  a  white    Bay. 
buoy  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  Great  Ledge,  in  3  fathoms  water;  a  black  buoy  on  the  S. 
\V,  part  of  Wilke's  Ledge  in  24  fathoms  water — all  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay ;  and 
a  white  buoy  in  2  fathoms  water,  on  West's  Island  Ledge,  on  the  eastern  side. 

All  these  buoys,  except  the  one  on  West's  laland  Ledge,  are  taken  up  in  the  winter. 

Bearings  and  distances  from  Bird  Island  lighthouse. 

The  south  point  of  West's  Island S.  W.  i  W.  Smiles. 

West's  Island  Ledge, S.  W.  i  W.  9.i  miles. 

The  north  entrance  of  Quick's  Hole S.  W.  by  S.,  15  miles. 

Wood's  Hole,  due S.  9  miles. 

The  entrance  of  Monument  River E.  N.  E.  i  N.  7i  miles. 

Bearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  in  the  vicinity  of  Buzzard's  Bay. 

From  Wing's  Neck  to  the  lighthouse  on  Bird  Island W.  by  S.,  24  miles. 

Minister's  Neck, S.  by  E.  |  of  a  mile. 

From  Great  Rocky  Point  to  the  south  end  of  Mishaum  Island, .  S,  W.  4  W.,  ^  of  a  mile. 

Hog  Island W.  by  S.,  4  of  a  mile. 

Wing  Neck S.  W.,  3  miles. 

Tobus  Island S.  S.  W.,  5  of  a  mile. 

Old  Cow  Rock S.byE.  4  E.,  Jof  a  mile. 

From  the  south  end  of  Mishaum  Island  to  Bird  Island S.W.by  W.ij  W.44  miles. 

Wing's  Neck S.  W.  4  «-,  2 J  miles. 

WEST  ISLAND  LEDGE  BUOY.— West  Island  Ledge  lies  in  Buzzard's  Bay,  be-  West  Island 

tween  3i  miles  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Clark's  Point  lighthouse,  in  from  4  to  44  fathoms  water.  Ledge  Buoy. 
Alnrge  white  bnoy  has  been  placed  over  the  ledge. 

WARE  HAM  HARBOR,  IN  BUZZARD'S  BAY— This  harbor  can  only  be  at-  fVareham 

tPinpted  in  the  day  time ;  and  the  only  safety  is  to  keep  in  between  the  buoya,  of  which  Harbor,  in 

there  nre  9  in  number,  leaving  in  going  in.  the  black  buoys  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  the  Buzzard's 

white  on  the  Inrbonrd.  Bay. 

NED'S  POINT  LIGHTHOUSE  is  situated  on  the  north  side  of  Buzzard's  Bay,  and  IScd's  Point 

on  the  east  side  of  Mattapoisett  Harbor,  about  one  mile  S.  E.  from  the  village,  and  con-  lighthouse. 
tiiins  a  fixed  light.     The  tower  is  built  of  stone,  and  whitewashed,  standing  45  feet  from 
tlie  sea  to  the  S.  W.,  and  250  feet  from  the  sea  to  the  S.  E.     The  lantern  is  elevated^40 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 


Bearings  and  distances  from  Ned's  Point  lighthouse. 

A  buoy  on  Nye's  Ledge,  S.  20',  half  E.,  distant  two  and  a  half  miles. 

A  buoy  on  S.  E.  point  of  Mattapoisett  Ledges,  104°  E.,  distant  one  and  seven-eighths 
of  a  mile. 

A  buoy  on  Snow's  Rock,  S    10°  E.  distant  three  and  one-quarter  miles. 

A  buoy  on  N.  W.  part  of  Mattapoisett  Ledge,  S.  34  W.,  distant  one  and  a  half  mile. 

Cormorant  Rocks,  S.  4°.  half  W.,  distant  three  and  a  half  miles. 

Angoloco  Point,  S.  55°  E.  distant  one  and  three-quarter  miles. 

Wood's  Hole,  S.  22°,  half  E.,  distant  nine  miles. 

Hefore  coming  up  with  West  Island,  bring  Bird  Island  light  to  bear  N.  E.  by  N.,  and 
run  for  it  until  Ned's  Point  light  bears  N.  N.  W.,  half  W.,  when  you  may  haul  up  N. 
W.  half  W.  In  running  this  course,  you  will  pass  a  buoy,  painted  white,  with  two  black 
stripes  around  it,  which  stands  on  the  middle  of  Nye's  Ledge,  in  two  und  one-half  fath- 
oms water  ;  this  ledge  is  about  a  (|uarter  of  a  mile  over,  either  way,  and  not  more  than 
eight  feet  water  on  some  parts  of  it.  Continuing  this  course,  you  will  pass  a  buoy  on 
your  larboard  hand,  painted  white,  with  throe  black  stripes  around  it,  which  stands  on  the 
S.  E.  part  of  iMattapoiset  Ledge,  in  two  and  one-half  fathoms  of  water.  Continue  the 
above  course  and  you  will  |)a9s  two  i)Uoys,  one  on  your  starboard,  and  the  other  on  your 
liiiboard  hand ;  the  latter  stands  on  the  east  side  of  the  Sinking  Ledge,  in  three  fathoms 
of  water;  the  former  stands  by  the  side  of  the  Snow  Rock,  in  two  and  om-half  fathoms 
of  wiitor.  This  rock  has  eight  and  one-half  feet  water  on  it.  Keep  miuway  until  you 
pass  them,  when  you  may  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  until  Ned's  Point  light  bears  east,  when 
you  may  anchor  in  three  fathoms  water,  good  bottom. 


Block  Island. 


Lighthouse. 


Point  Judith. 
Lightfiouse. 


Newport 
Harbor. 


BLUNT'SgAMEEICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

There  are  two  other  buoya  not  numed  above ;  the  one  ataDclB  about  N.  E.  from  Sn 
Rock,  in  three  luthoma  of  water,  by  the  Bide  of  the  Barstow  Kock  ;  the  other  on  th« 
treme  point  of  Ned's  Point,  in  two  fatliuiua  of  wuter.  *** 

Muttupoisett  hiis  a  tine  harbor,  and  eusy  of  acceHs. 

BLOCK  ISLAND. — Two  lighthouaea  are  erected  on  the  N.  W.  Point  of  Block  I  I 
and,  showing  fixed  lights,  bearing  N.  and 8.,  distant  iiufeet  from  each  other,  and  olevut  i 
68  feet  above  the  level  of  the  seu.     From  the  point  extending  into  the  seu,  in  neuil 
N.  i  E.  course,  is  a  shoui,  making  it  dangerous  for  u  vessel  to  pass  within  two  milos*^  *»• 
tiio  light.     i<'roiu  this  shoal,  Montock  i-'oiut  liglithouse  bears  S.  VV.  by  W.  A  W  .  u 
Judith  Point  lighthouse,  N.  E.  by  N.;  Watch  iiill  lighthouse,  W.  N.  W.;  Clay  He"? 
(Block  Island,)  S.  E.  by  E. ;  rocks  olf  Cliiy  Head,  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E. ;  and  the  S    \V  n!« 
of  Block  island,  S.  S.  W.  S  W.  "  '^'P"" 

The  two  lights  cannot  be  made  separate  when  to  the  northward,  unless  in  a  position  t 
make  Point  J  udith  light  N.  E.,  when  they  uppeur  like  the  lights  of  a  steamboat.  ° 

Vessels  coming  from  the  southward,  or  south  and  westward,  will  make  Block  Island 
Give  it  ii  berth  ot  about  one  mile,  on  the  east  and  west  sides.  The  two  lights  situated  on 
the  N.  VV.  point  of  this  island,  are  so  neiu-  together,  they  appear  as  one  light  until  you  aro 
within  two  or  three  miles  of  them.  Ulf  the  N.  W.  Point,  a  shoal  makes  out  N.  J  E 
which  renders  it  dangerous  for  large  ships  to  puss  within  two  miles  of  the  lights.  Paint 
Judith  light  bour«  from  these  lights  N.  E.  i  N.,  distant  11  miles  After  passing  Point 
Judith,  follow  the  directions  for  sailing  into  Newport. 

From  the  IS.  E.  part  of  Block  island  to  Rhode  Island  lighthouse,  the  course  is  N.  by 
£.  i  E.,  and  the  distance  19  miles ;  about  midway  between  them  thore  are  *^>4  fathoms 
water.  If  you  are  on  the  west  side  of  Block  Island,  with  the  body  of  the  island  beuiine 
E.  N.  E.,  in  ti  or  10  fathoms  water,  your  course  to  Point  Judith  light  is  N.  E.  by  £/ 
about  G  leagues.  This  point  appears  like  a  nag's  head,  and  is  pretty  bold ;  between 
Block  Island  and  the  point  there  are  from  liO  to  6  fathoms  water,  except  u  small  shoal 
ground,  which,  in  thick  weather,  is  often  a  good  departure,  say  4  to  5  tatlioras,  bearing 
about  W.  by  S.  from  Point  Judith  light,  distant 3  mUes.  From  Point  Judith,  when  not 
more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  point  to  Rhode  Island  Uaibor,  your  course  is 
N.  E.,  and  the  distance  is  about  ti  miles.  When  in  13  fathoms  water.  Point  Judith  light 
bearing  W.,  or  W.  by  N.,  the  course  to  Rhode  Island  Harbor  is  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  and 
the  distance  to  the  lighthouse  2  leagues.  The  lighthouse,  together  with  the  Dump, 
lins,  must  bo  left  on  your  larboard  hand ;  it  stands  on  the  south  part  of  Couauicut 
Island.  This  point  is  called  the  Beaver's  Tail,  and  is  about  2  leagues  distant  from  Point 
Judith.  J 

POINT  JUDITH. — The  lighthouse  on  Point  Judith  is  u  stone  edifice,  4U  feet  higL 
The  lumps  are  (jU  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contain  a  revolving  light,  to  distin- 
gnisli  it  from  Newport  light,  which  stands  on  Couanicut  Island,  and  is  a  fixed  light.  The 
distance  from  the  lightiiouse  to  high-water  mark,  is  as  follows :  E.  from  the  lighthouse 
to  high-water  mark,  lt>  rods;  S.  E.,  14  rods;  8.  18  rods;  ti.  8.  W.,  23  rods;  which  is 
the  extreme  part  of  the  point,  to  which  a  good  berth  should  be  given.  The  light  oo 
Point  Judith  bears  8.  W.  i  S.,  2  leagues  distant  from  Newport,  (Rhode  Island)  light- 
house. Point  Judith  light  may  be  distinguished  from  Watch  Hill  light,  by  the  light  not 
wholly  disappearing  when  within  3  leagues  of  it. 

N  ii  WPOllT  HARBOR. — Conanicut  Island  lies  about  3  miles  west  of  Newport,  the 
south  end  of  which  (called  the  Beaver's  Toil,  on  which  Newport  lighthouse  stands)  ex- 
tends about  as  far  south  as  the  south  end  of  Rhode  Island,  'i  ne  lighthouse  on  tioat  Isl- 
and bears  N.  6U°  E.  from  the  light  on  Conanicut  Inland,  and  Kettle-bottom  Rock  N.  E. 
The  east  shore  forms  the  west  part  of  Newport  Harbor.  The  ground  the  lighthouse 
stands  upon  is  about  12  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  sea  at  high  water.  From  the  ground 
to  the  top  of  the  cornice  are  50  feet,  round  which  is  u  gallery,  and  within  that  stands  the 
lantern,  which  is  about  11  feet  high,  and  8  feet  in  diameter.     It  contains  a  fixed  light. 

A  Buukeo  rock  lies  south  of  Beaver  Tail,  called  Newton  Rock,  on  which  it  breaks  if 
there  be  any  sea,  distant  200  yards  from  Rhode  Island  lighthouse. 

Thefollovmg  are  the  bearings  by  Compass,  from  Beaver  Tail  lighthouse,  oj  several 
remarkable  places,  together  with  the  distances,  viz : 

Block  Island,  (S.  E.  point,) 8.  W.  by  8.  i  8. 

Point  Judith  light, .8.  W.  ^  8.,  distant 2  leagues. 

Block  Island,  (8.  E.  point,) 8.  W.  i  8.,  or  8.  W.  by  8.,  nearly. 

Block  Island,  (middle,) 8.  W.  i  8.,  distant  6  leagues. 

Block  Island,  (8.  E.  end,) 8.  W.  by  S.  ^  S. 

WhaleRock, ^- *  ^,' 

Brenton'a  Reef, E.  S.  E.  i  E. 

South  Point  of  Rhode  Island,....,..., E.  4  8. 

Highest  part  of  Caatle  Hill, •.,, .,K.  N.  £.  i  £. 


:c!r  I'i  yy  r  n  n  'v  w  a  'n±\  o  \i  ^.  :^. 


■■"  f  *"■■ 


tn^mimftim  iiium 


iY  f«!  yv^  P  ()  JK  ^f     II  .w\  K  li  ()  H ,  iiY  TAi- w.\i»sw<>i(Tii.iJ' 


u        o 
"   '4.* 


',  X,i,'    "  I-      %.  Ill 


t,    '■• 


II 

"m 

„t,                    li,..m,l 

W  '/ 

■hp        "' 

"                  .^.      A 

IT             »' 

a 

""»    „ 

„."                              'M 

«  «  *»         //r       ^, 

rtt  ?/  rt   H 

..«  ■ 

A1 

'/ 

«"'''^ 

CI                         "w 

/I              >/l 

•'  ,1  .»  *'i/[  //   ??  Tf  n  -tii    •ii    t" 
•  (     ■>  i    It 


jt   O  ^  .fw  r  'i^  ^  ?/  'M  »/// 


'''  ,i 


«•  „■ 


A' 


V. 


■^x./ 


'■'  '*  /«  £1  "■""  «•  Vv^ 

'"'.1    lit       tii      ,-,      I.      J-.-     IT  ''*'*'  S/ 


/»( 


M 


H  " 


'.I     {rnxil,. 
IlitI 

...   "  "'  >'^^ 

'.1      <t'<i.<lillnH  It  -'■ 


K:-"y 


HI 
It 


,) 


'( 

I l_ 


'l  1 

I L 


Drciil  Mxsf*  neet  "pal  «»Uoc 


Si'iili'  III':;  StaluU- Milr.s 

'a  'i  1 

I  t ' 


^ 


Srnlf  ol*  ^   XiKitiral  Milt'M. 


A»  // 


"   n  n      '" 


I 

r,;rli,Am,ri,;„i  lo„st  I'ilot  je*!"  tiiir  1,1-fT 


KACaCniiiiil.  l7t>M'nt<>r  SliiM-l.  X<-HV<>rk.  in50. 


«»iwii»iw]»i'"  mm"n>\ 


J*^  W.\l>S\*'0|{Tll.lJMUiI)\i:*'  WILKi:SA  IlLAKi:,  I  '.  sS.  .\ 


„         M         •!  II 

"  •* 

'■'     14. 


«i  '; 


jCiillllllljlllilia  , 
ltMll<>|ll),  0      '"v-**  vY- 

n.'    '    J 


/.(        « 


't 


'       ..' 


.MriMi  iiiiH|iv||i|l 


Pm  i:      'I  '"  I,    "    "I  """./"'V     ^      I 


r-^ 


.e^  Q  o  % ./  rt « ^ " 'Uis,' " "  ■'  ■'  -'-^     '':'".     ^ 


'■     ^  rv; — 


('t»j;'t;i*.f  1 1 » ILs '  1 1  f  <  I  y]!* 


ulmisr?  t  3lcp|-  Si-nlStKook 

■  ++♦■ 


V 


>  II 


rr  Slri'ft.  XiwYork.  IBnO. 


/{ri/Hivr/A/itii/nnvt/  /tvU'i/fiitnt//ii>/ifK 


mmmmfmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


193 


N. 


Brenton's  Point, N.  E.  by  E. 

Fort:  on  Ooat  Island, E.  N.  E.  ^ 

S'Uth-eiisternmostDumplin, N.  E.  }  E. 

Kettle   Bottom N.  E. 

Newton's  Rock S,  near  200  yards. 

}i.  B.  The  anuhoring  place  between  the  town  of  Rhode  Island  and  Coster's  Harbor,  .^ 

N.E.  byE.  ^ 

BRENTON'S  REEF— Brenton's  Reef  extends  about  one  mile  S.  by  W.  from  the   Brentoti't 
main  shore,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance :  some  portions  of  it  are  bare  at  low   Jteef. 
tide,  and  may  at  all  times  be  aeeo  breaking,  with  a  little  motion  of  the  sea-     A  buoy  haa 
been  moored  ontlie  extreme  S.  W.  part  of  the  reef,  in  five  and  ahalf  fathoms  at  low  spring 
tides ;  it  is  a  spar  painted  red,  the  top  of  which  is  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and 
may  be  seen  in  cieiir  weather  from  three  to  four  miles.     Point  Judith  lighthouse  boars    Lighthou$et. 
from  the  buoy  S.  W.  by  W.,  distant  9miles;  Beaver  Tail  lighthouse,  W  by  N.  i  N.,  two 
miles;  Senconnet  Rocks,  E.  by  S.  8  miles;  Castle  Hill,  N.  ^  E.,  one  mile.     The  buoy 
miiy  be  neared  on  nil  sides,  within  a  cable's  length,  but  vessels   should  not  pass  to  the 
Dorthwurd  of  it,  unless  well  acquainted.     After  passing  to  the  southward  of  this  buoy, 
and  bound  to  Newport,  or  up  Providence  river,  follow  the  directions. 

A.  little  within  the  lighthouse,  and  near  to  the  shore,  on  the  west  side,  there  is  a  cove 
ciiiled  Mackerel  Cove,  the  entrance  to  which  is  shoal  and  dangerous.  As  both  ends  of 
these  iiiliinds  are  pretty  bold,  you  may  pass  into  the  anchorina;  at  either  end,  and  ride 
neiirer  to  Goat  Island  side  than  to  that  of  Rhode  Island,  as  the  other  parts  of  the  harbor  ■ 

are  grassy,  and  would  be  apt  to  choke  your  anchors.     Rhode  Island  is  navigable  all  round, 
by  keepini"  in  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

GOAT  ISLAND  lies  before  the  town  of  Newport,  about  5  miles  N.  E  from  Newport  Goat  Island. 
light,  and  has  a  lighthouse  on  the  north  end,  containing  a  fixed  light,  from  which  the  fol-  Lighthouse. 
lowins;  bearings  have  been  hiken  : — Newport  lighthouse  bears  S  60  W.  equal  to  S.  W. 
by  W.  1  W.,'distant  5  miles ;  west  shore  of  Castle  Hill,  S.  54  W.,  or  S.  W.  J  W.,  3| ; 
Brenton's  Point  S.  51  W.,  or  S.  W.  i  W.,  1 ;  South  Dumplin  Rock,  S.  70  W.,  or  W. 
S.  W.  i  W.,  IJ ;  Connnnicut  Ferry,  N.  71  W.,  or  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  2} ;  south  point  of 
Rose  Island.  N.  584  W.,  or  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  J ;  Gull  Rock,  N.  llj  W.,  or  N.  by  W., 
} ;  west  shore  of  I'oster's  Harbor  Island,  N.,  li  ;  buoy  on  the  north  point  of  Goat  Island, 
N.  50  E.,  or  N.  i  E.  }.     Large  vessels  go  south  of  the  buoy.  "^ 

Niirnignnsett  Bay  lies  between  Conannicut  Island  and  the  main.  Your  course  in  ia 
about  north,  taking  care  to  avoid  Whale  Rock  ;  you  may  pass  in  on  either  side,  and  an- 
chor where  you  please.  From  the  lighthouse  on  Conannicut  Island^to  Gay  Head,  on 
Martha's  Vineyard  Island,  the  course  is  E,  by  S.  i  S.,  and  the  distance  9  leagues. 

Yi)U  must  take  care  to  avoid  the  rocks  which  lie  oflf  south  from  Castle  Hill,  some  of 
which  are  above  water.  Castle  Hill  is  on  the  east  side  of  Rhode  Island  Harbor,  N.  E. 
from  which  is  Fort  Adams,  from  the  north  end  of  which  a  reef  extends. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  to  clear  Brenton's  Reef,  bring  Newport  light  to 
bear  W.  N.  W.,  and  stoor  for  it  until  they  see  Goat  Island  light  from  the  deck,  which 
will  then  boar  N.  E.  |  E. ;  then  run  for  Goat  Island  light  until  it  bears  E..  (or  continue 
your  course  until  it  hears  E.  S,  VI.,)  nt  the  same  time  keeping  Newport  light  bearing  S. 
W.  by  W..  and  anchor  in  7  to  0  fathoms,  good  bottom.  In  coming  from  the  west,  after 
pHssiii'j;  Point  Judith,  (tlie  iii^iitlnuise  whereon  has  a  revolving  light,)  steer  N.  E.  by  N., 
until  you  ilniw  up  with  Newport  linlit,  to  which  giving  a  berth,  run  for  Gout  Island  light, 
ami  anchor  as  al)ove  directed.  (tdiI  fsland  lies  before  the  town  of  Newport,  extends 
about  north  and  south,  and  has  a  tort  on  it;  off  the  N.  E.  point  lies  a  buoy  in  16  feet 
water. 

A.  large  whito  buoy  is  also  placed  at  the  end  of  tlie  shoal,  which  makes  out  from  the 
isouth  poil  of  the  island,  in  1  ()  foet  wator.  The  shore  on  the  north  and  south  ends  is 
'ocky,  and  you  must  not  iittiMupt  iji)ini^  botwoen  the  buoys  and  the  island. 

Vessuls  coiniiiii  from  tlio  westward  tlirough  Long  Island  Sound,  bound  to  Rhode  Isl» 
lind,  will  loiivo  Ki.-iher's  Isliuul  on  the  larl)oard  hand, and  steer  E.  by  N.,  which  will  carry 
ihein  to  Point  .Fuditli,  koupin.;  in  not  less  than  10  fathoms  water,  giving  the  pointaberth 
ifoMo  mile,  when  you  will  see  Newport  light  bearing  N.  E.  J  N.,  distant  6  miles;  steer 
for  it,  leaving  it  on  your  larboard  hand  :  you  will  then  steer  for  Goat  Island  light,  which 
ears  from  Newport  light  N.  E.,  distant  about  5  "-^iles ;  keeping  the  latter  bearing  S.  W. 
ly  W.  until  you  bring  Goat  Island  light  to  bear  E.,  or  E.  .S.  E.,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to 

fathoms  water,  good  holding  ground.     Between  Newport  light  and  the  North  Dump- 

D,  you  will  have  from  18  to  28  fathoms  water. 

If,  after  passing  Point  Judith,  as  before  directed,  you  wish  to  proceed  toward  Provi- 
lence  through  the  West  Passage,  your  course  is  N.  E.,  leaving  Newport  light  (on  Co- 

annicut  Island)  on  your  starboard  hand,  half  a  mile  distant,  when  your  course  will  be 
by  W.,  14  league,  to  Dutch  Island  light,  (erected  on  the  south  part  of  the  island,  show- 

13 


i 


iJWliiiWPii" 


"^m'' 


■•^^ 


^«i 


194 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Lighthouie. 


Buoys  and 
Spindles. 


Newport  to 
Prondence. 


Bristol  Har- 
bor. 


Rhode  Island 
light  and 
Ihrnufih  the 
S0nnd. 


Stoning  ton 
Lighthouse. 


ing  a  fixed  light,)  which  you  bIso  Ioa»e  on  your  starboard  hand,  one-quiirter  of  a  mile  dis- 
tant, from  which  you  steer  N.  i  E.,  14  miles,  for  the  light  on  Warwick  Neck,  leaving  it 
on  the  larboard  hand,  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  where  you  may  anchor  in  3  tathuma  water 
as  it  is  not  safe  to  proceed  further  without  a  pilot,  unless  you  chooso  to  depend  on  fiudiiiv 
the  channel,  which  is  marked  out  by  stakes.  ^ 

In  entering  this  passage,  keep  nearest  Conannicut  Island,  to  avoid  the  Whale  Rock 
which  bears  from  Newport  light  S.  82°  30'  W.,  distant  about  three-fourtlis  of  a  mile,  witli 
some  scattering  rocks  north  and  south  of  it. 

Warwick  Neck  lighthouse  is  erected  on  the  south  part  of  Warwick  Neck,  and  showj 
a  fixed  light.  A  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  Long  Island  Point,  off  Warwick  Harbor,  1^  mjlQ 
distant,  which  must  be  left  on  the  larboard  hand  going  into  East  Greenwich. 

BUOYS  AND  SPINDLES  PLACED  AT  NEWPORT  HARBOR— A  spindle 
on  Saddle  Rock,  eastward  of  Rose  Island,  on  either  side  of  which  there  is  a  passai^e. 

A  spindle  with  a  ball,  on  a  rock  at  the  south  end  of  the  island,  which  you  leave  tu  the 
northward. 

One  red  buoy,  with  across,  on  Dyer's  Reef,  south  part  of  Coster's  Harbor,  which  you 
leave  on  the  starboard  hand. 

One  on  the  ledge  off  the  Bishop's  Rock  called  the  Triangle  Rock,  on  either  side  of  which 
you  may  pass,  giving  the  buoy  a  berth. 

One  red  spar  buoy  at  the  south,  and  one  at  the  north  end  of  Gull  Rocks,  both  of  which 
you  pass  to  the  eastward. 

One  spar  buoy  on  Providence  Point,  which  is  the  north  end  of  Prudence  Island,  to  the 
northward  of  which  is  the  main  channel. 

At  Plum  Beach  a  spar  buoy  painted  red  and  moored  on  the  extreme  N.  E.  part  of 
Plum  Beach  point,  in  14  feet  at  low  tide,  bears  from  Dutch  Isliiiid  light  N.  i  E.  disCunt 
2  miles.  Vessels  bound  up  the  Buy  must  leave  it  on  the  larboard  hand  and  give  a  berth 
of  ovt  cable's  length,  and  continue  the  course  up  the  Bay. 

Flat  Rocks  of!'  Wickford,  a  spar  buoy  painted  red,  in  15  feet  at  low  water. 

Manna  Rock,  a  spar  buoy  painted  red.  The  above  buoy  bears  from  Poplar  Point 
Lighthouse  E.  byN.  i  N.  These  buoys  are  in  a  range  and  the  channel  varying ;  do 
proper  directions  can  be  given. 

A  Dolphin  has  been  placed  on  Long  Bed  in  Providence  River,  in  lieu  of  the  buoy  former- 
Iv  nliictid  thoro 

NEWPORT  TO  PROVIDENCE.— Pass  Half-way  Rock,  which  lies  nearly  in 
middle  of  the  river,  about  5^  miles  from  Newport,  and  li  mile  from  the  soul li  end  ot 
Prudence  Island,  there  is  a  passage  on  both  sides  of  the  rock.  West  from  Prudence  Isl- 
and lies  Hope  Island,  having  a  passage  all  round,  giving  the  N.  E,  end  a  small  beitli. 

From  the  Triangle  Rock,  which  lies  off  the  Bishop  Rocks,  on  which  is  n  liuoy  that 
may  be  passed  on  either  side,  to  Warwick  Neck  light,  the  course  is  N.  ^  W.  After 
leaving  Prudence  Island,  3  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Warwick  Neck  light,  ynu  p;iss  m 
your  larboard  hand  a  spar  buoy,  which  you  may  go  very  close  to.  E.  i  S.  from  Wiirwitk 
Neck  light  lies  a  spar  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  the  stiu'board  hand.  When  Wnrwid 
Neck  light  bears  W.,  steer  N.  N.  E.  for  Nyatt  Point  light,  leaving  the  spar  buoy  no 
Providence  Point  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  running  so  far  to  the  eastward  as  tu  brin? 
Prudence  Island  to  bear  south,  by  which  you  leave  the  Middle  Ground,  wliiidi  hiis  iibuoy 
on  it,  on  the  larboai  ]  '  '\nd.  Nyatt  Point  light  is  on  the  starboard  hand,  ami  9  miles  iVoni 
Providence.  Soon  alter  passing  the  light  you  come  up  with  a  pyramid,  directly  ()|). 
posite  the  village  of  Petuxent,  tlie  base  of  which  is  painted  blat^k,  with  a  wliiitt  tnji, 
erected  on  a  ledge  of  rocks,  which  you  may  approach  very  near,  leaving  it  to  the  larlwiird 
hand.  At  a  short  distance  you  come  to  another  pyramid,  and  a  stake,  both  wliichyou 
leave  on  your  larboard  hand.  One-fourth  of  a  mile  from  the  last  pyramid  lie  Loveiti 
Rocks,  having  a  spar  buoy  on  them,  which  must  bo  lefton  tho  starboard  hand,  going  verj 
near  to  them. 

BRISTOL  HARBOR— Bristol  Harbor  lies  9  miles  from  Newport,  and  eaurof  Wiir- 
wick  light.  At  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  lies  Castle  Island,  having  a  pyramid  on  it,  wliicli 
is  left  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  a  red  buoy  on  the  larboard,  steering  N.  E.  wlieneo- 
tering.  i 

RHODE  ISLAND  LIGHT  AND  THROUGH  THE  SOUND.— The  firstcourw 
from  Rhode  Island  lighthouse,  on  Beaver  Tail  Point,  is  S.  W.  i  S.,  distant  2  l(!af;uei 
to  Point  Judith  light;  thence  from  Point  Judith  light  through  the  Race  to  Little  (jullj 
light,  the  course  is  W.  by  S.,  11  leagues  distant,  leaving  Watch  Hill  Point  light,  Stoning- 
ton  light,  and  Fisher's  Island  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  Little  Gull  light  on  your  lar- 
board hand. 

Watch  Hill  light  is  situated  on  Watch  Hill,  at  the  entrance  of  Fisher's  Island  Souail.  | 
The  lantern  is  elevated  f>i)  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  r^volvin?  I'';ht. 

STONINGTON  LIGHTHOUSE  shows  a  fixed  light  on  the  extreme  point  of  W I 
at  Stonington,  and  boars  from  Watch  Hill  Point  lighthouse  N.  W.  ^  W.,  2  miles liii-l 
taut ;  from  Napertree  Point,  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  H  mile;  from  Catumbsett  Rockipiii-| 


'Wl* 


TWf 


K«fi 


'^imm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


196 


die,  N>,  2i  milRs;  Wicopesset,  N.  by  E.,  2  miles ;  Latimer's  Reef,  N.  E.  j  E.  2  miles; 
Wamphasgett  Shoal,  E.  i  N.,  half  a  mile;  North  Dumplin,  E.  by  N.  }  N.,  5i  miles 
distant.     High  water  9h.  5m.  rise  3  feet. 

STONINGTON  HARBOR   AND  FISHER'S  ISLAND.— If  off  the  south-east   Stoningbm 
part,  of  Fisher's  Island,  bring  the  highest  steeple  in  the  town  of  StODington  open  to  the    Harbor  o»d 
gRst  of  Stonington  lighthouse,  and  steer  for  it  N.  6°  E.,  until  Watch  Hill  bears  east,    Fiihefi  Id- 
wben  you  will  have  passed  through  Lord's  Channel,  which  is  between  the  spindle  on   and. 
Wicopesset  Island  Ledge  and  thA  spindle  on  Catumb  Ledge,  you  will  then  be  in  12  to    LighAcmM. 
13fHtlioins  water,  then  steer  north-westerly  to  clear  the  shoal  water  extending  from  Bart- 
let's  Reef,  until  the  light  hears  N.  by  E.,  when  you  may  steer  directly  for  the  lighthouse, 
or  the  breakwater,  into  the  harbor. 

If  rou  should  be  to  the  eastward  of  Watch  Hill  light,  and  bound  through  Fisher's 
Isltiad  Sound,  give  the  light  a  berth  of  one-third  of  a  mile,  and  steer  W.  i  N.,  until  the 
light  un  Stouington  Point  ranges  with  the  highest  steeple  in  the  town,  when  you  may 
gteer  as  above  directed  into  Stonington  ;  or,  if  bound  west,  you  may  continue  your  course 
oD,  passing  the  spindle  on  Latimer's  Reef,  on  your  starboard  hand,  about  150  yards,  until 
Stoniogtun  light  bears  E.  N.  E..  and  the  house  on  Ram  Island  N.  W.,  when  you  may 
iteer  VV.  .S  W.,  and  pass  directly  between  the  North  and  South  Dumplins,  which  are 
two  small  islets  of  moderate  height.  The  North  Dumplin  is  bold  to,  except  on  the  east 
tide.  On  steering  the  last  course,  you  will  leave  Ellis'  Reef,  on  which  is  a  spindle,  on 
your  starboard  hand,  and  East  Rock,  .Middle  and  West  Clumps,  on  your  larboard ;  the 
three  last  are  reefs  of  rocks  trending  W.  by  S.  and  E.  by  N.,  between  the  South  Dump- 
lin mid  Latimer's  Reef.  There  is  a  fixed  light  on  the  North  Dnmplin — elevation  of  Light 
tower  26  feet. 

In  this  harbor,  Lieut.  Blake,  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  has  found  the  two  following 
rocks: — Young's  Rock,  which  just  washes,  lies  south  of  Latimer's  Reef.  Blake's  Rock, 
4feet  water,  a  short  distance  east  from  Latimer's  Reef  Spindle. 

Sould  you  go  to  the  southern  channel,  you  will,  on  psssing  Latimer's  Reef,  keep  over 
towards  Fisher's  Island,  and  steer  about  W.  ^  S.,  to  avoid  East  Rock,  and  the  Middle 
and  West  Clumps,  which  are  nearly  covered  at  high  water,  until  the  centre  of  what  is 
called  Flat  Hummock,  which  is  a  barren  sandy  island,  of  a  few  acres  in  extent,  bears  N., 
distant  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  and  the  west  point  of  Fisher's  Island  in  sight,  bearing  W.; 
New  London  lighthouse  will  then  be  open  between  the  South  Dumplin  and  Fisher's  LighthamM. 
Island,  when  you  may  steer  for  it  N.  W.  4  W.,  keeping  in  mid-channel,  to  avoid  the 
shoal  water  off  the  west  point  of  West  Harbor,  and  the  shoal  which  puts  off  between 
the  South  Dumplin  and  the  Flat  Hummock,  in  the  form  of  n  horse-shoe,  until  you  have 
passed  the  Dumplins.  when  you  are  clear  of  all  danger.  South  of  the  Dumplins  and 
Flat  Hummock,  in  the  west  harbor  of  Fisher's  Island,  where  there  is  good  anchorage  in 
2]  fathoms,  soft  bottom.  Flat  Hummock  bearing  N.,  and  the  west  point  of  the  Harbor  W. 
N.  W.  Ellis'  Reef,  on  which  is  a  spindle,  lies  south  of  the  house  on  Ram  Island,  distant 
about  one-third  of  a  mile,  between  which  there  is  a  very  narrow  passage  of  5  fathoms 
water.  Potter's  Reef  lies  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  North  Dumplin,  distant  one  mile,  be- 
tween which  there  is  a  fine  passage,  free  from  all  danger ;  this  reef  is  of  small  extent, 
and  has  a  spindle  on  it,  which  may  be  passed  on  either  side.  W.  ^  S.  from  Ram  Island, 
and  half  way  to  Potter's  Reef,  is  the  extreme  point  of  Groton  Long  Reef.  This  is  a 
conspicuous  point  on  Fisher's  Island  Sound,  and  may  be  known  by  being  cleared  of  trees 
at  the  iiouth  part:  it  is  not  to  he  approached  from  the  south  nearer  than  half  a  mile.  A 
shoal,  culled  the  Horse-shoo,  lies  west  of  Grotun  Long  Point,  and  N.  E.  from  Potter's 
Reef;  as  there  is  no  spindle  on  the  Horse-shoe,  vessels  should  avoid  going  much  to  the 
north  of  Potter's  Reef. 

There  is  good  anchorage  to  the  east  of  Groton  Long  Point,  in  2i  fathoms,  soft  bottom, 
distant  from  the  shore  one-third  of  a  mile. 

After  you  have  passed  Fisher's  Island  Sound,  you  should  be  careful  to  keep  the  South 
Dumplin  in  range  with  the  N.  E.  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  to  clear  the  Triangle  Rocks, 
which  form  the  south  point  of  Bartlett's  Reef,  on  which  there  is  a  buoy.  When  Two- 
tree  Island  bears  N.  by  W.,  or  Little  Gull  N.  by  E.,  you  are  past  this  danger,  and  may 
follow  the  general  directions  up  the  sound. 

If  bound  through  from  the  westward,  you  should  on  no  account  go  to  the  southward 
of  the  South  Dumplin,  but  should,  after  passing  either  between  the  Dumplins,  or  to  the 
north  of  them,  bring  Stonington  light  to  boar  E.  N.  E.,  and  run  for  it  until  the  Break- 
water bears  N.,  when  you  may  steer  for  the  anchorage. 

If  you  wish  to  pass  through  the  sound,  when  Stonington  light  bears  E.  N.  E.,  and  the 
house  and  Ram  Island  N.  W.,  steer  E.  J  S.  for  Watch  Hill  light,  leaving  Latimer's  Reef 
OD  your  larboard  hand,  and  giving  Napertree  Point  and  Watch  Hill  Point  a  berth  of  about 
one-third  of  a  mile,  leaving  Watch  Hill  Reef,  on  the  east  end  of  which  is  a  spindle,  on 
i  your  starboard  hand.  This  spindle  bears  from  Watch  Hill  light  S.  S.  W.  }  W.,  distant 
I  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile.  A  rock,  with  6  feet  water  on  it,  lies  south  from  Watch  Hill 
Point,  distant  about  one-eighth  of  a  mile. 

High  water  9b.  5m.,  rise  3  feet.  High 


■  ""i .  '  iii<p»*)*»||.JMip  .,miwj(iw.i|.i  »'^»"«|f.»i«! 


w^ 


196 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Spar  bvojf. 


LitUe 
Light. 


GuU 


Old  PUld 
Point  Light. 


f  r» 


Fisher'a  Island  Sound  is  perfectly  safe  with  the  foregoing  directions,  and  to  be  pr„^ 
ferred  if  bound  east  on  the  flood,  or  west  with  an  ebb  tide,  to  going  through  the  raceH 
but  it  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  leading  wind,  by  strangers,  and  great  altentiool 
Bhould  be  paid  to  the  lead.  | 

The  Eel-grass  Shoals  lie  between  Ram  Island  and  Stonington  light,  and  extend  in  I 
spots  for  some  distance ;  the  largest  of  these  shoals  lies  south  of  the  White  Rock  I 
which  is  £.  N.  E.  from  Ram  Island,  half  way  to  the  lighthouse  on  Stonington  Point!! 
and  is  always  conspicuous ;  but  you  are  clear  of  them  when  Stonington  light  bears  £  I 
N.  E.  I 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  black,  moored  on  the  middle  ground  of  the  harbor  of  Stooingtoo  I 
in  12  feet  water  at  low  tide ;  aud  Stonington  lighthouse  S.  by  W.  1  mile  distant ;  vesselsl 
bound  into  Stonington  harbor,  and  of  a  larger  draft  than  12  feet,  must  give  the  buoy  a  berthl 
of  i  mile  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  steer  N.  by  £.  for  *he  lighthouse.  East  end  ofl 
Fisher's  Island  from  the  buoy  S.  W.  by  S.  i  S.  distant  2  miles,  Napjrtree  Point  S.  E.! 
by  S.  1  mile.  'I 

At  Bartlet's  Reef  is  also  a  spar  buoy,  painted  black,  and  moored  in  9  feet  of  water  I 
Stonington  lighthouse  S.  by  E.  distant  i  of  a  mile — vessels  bound  into  Pawcatuck  River  I 
must  leave  this  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand.  I 

At  Folly  Rocks  (mouth  of  Pawcatuck  River)  au  iron  spindle,  with  a  keg  upon  the  top 
it  bears  from  Stonington  lighthouse  E.  by  S.  'I 

Race  Rock  buoy  is  a  spar  painted  black,  with  a  red  top,  the  top  of  which  is  15  feet  I 
above  the  level  of  the  sea.  It  in  moored  in  2^  fathoms  at  low  tides,  and  bears  from  the! 
lighthouse  on  Watch  Hill  south  one-quarter  of  a  mile.  I 

Watch  Hill  Reef  buoy  is  a  spar,  painted  red  and  white,  with  a  black  ball  on  the  top  i 
moored  E.  from  the  reef  about  one  cable's  length,  in  twenty-two  feet  of  water  at  low  tides  | 
the  top  of  which  is  elevated  twenty  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  may  be  seen  in  I 
clear  weather  three  miles.    This  buoy  bears  from  the  Watch  Hill  lighthouse  S.  W.  byS. 
I  S.  one  and  one  quarter  mile. 

Napertree  Point  buoy  is  a  spar  painted  red,  with  a  white  top  which  is  elevated  twelve  I 
feet  abve  the  sea,  moored  in  fourteen  feet  of  water  at  low  tides,  and  bears  from  Watch  I 
Hill  lighthouse  W.  b^'  N.,  two  and  a  half  miles.     Napertree  Point  bears  from  the  buoy  N. 
one-quarter  of  a  mile.     Watch  Hill  Reef  Buoy  bears  E.  S.  E.,  about  two  miles  distant; 
depth  of  water  between  Race  Rock  buoy  aud  Watch  Hill  Reef  buoy,  six,  five,  fuur,  and 
three  fathoms  may  be  found  within  one  cable's  length  of  either  buoy.     Vessels  from  the  i 
eastward  who  intend  going  through  Fisher's  Sound  should  leave  Race  Rock  buoy  on  the  I 
starboard  hand,  and  Watcli  Hill  Reef  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand ;  after  passing  them  fbl<  | 
low  the  directions. 

LONG  ISLAND  SOUND Little  Gull  light  is  situated  on  Little  Gull  Island,  at  the! 

entrance  of  Long  Island  Sound,  through  the  race.     This  light  may  be  considered  as  the  I 
key  to  the  sound.      The  lantern  is  elevated  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  con> 
tains  a  fixed  light.     High  water  9h.  38m.,  rise  2  feet  9  inches. 

You  must  be  careful  to  avoid  n  reef  which  runs  off  from  the  west  of  Fisher's  Island,  I 
W.  S.  W,  towards  Race  Rock,  on  which  is  a  spindle,  distant  one  mile  from  the  point  ofl 
the  island,  and  which  you  must  leave  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  continue  your  course  f 
until  the  Little  Gull  is  south  of  you,  if  the  tide  should  be  flood,  about  one  mile ;  if  the 
tide  should  be  ebb,  you  should,  as  soon  as  the  Little  Gull  bears  west,  and  New  London 
light  in  range  with  the  highest  steeple  in  the  town  (N.  2°  W.)  steer  north-westerly,  until  | 
it  is  south  of  you  2  miles,  when  you  may  steer  W.  1^  N.  for  Falkner's  Island  light,  el- 
evated 75  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  exhibits  a  fixed  light,  distant  8  Itmgues,  on  I 
which  cours^  you  should  be  careful  tu  avoid  the  Long  Island  Sand  Shoal,  off  Cornfield 
Point,  and  which  extends  east  and  west  5  miles.     Should  you  make  tlie  above  courses 
good,  you  will,  when  off  Cornfield  Point,  be  Ij^  mild  south  of  the  shoalest  part.    Thii 
shoal  is  very  narrosv,  and  as  you  approach  it,  you  will  shoalen  your  water  from  12  to  2 1 
fathoms  very  suddenly.     You  should  in  the  night  time  come  no  nearer  to  Falkner's  Isl- 
and, when  north  of  you,  than  14  fathoms,  (three-fourths  of  a  mile  distant,)  wlieii  you  mnj  I 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  |  VV.  for  Old  Field  Point  light,  8  leagues,  which  carries  yuu  to  the  | 
south  of  the  Middle  Ground. 

The  lighthouse  on  Uld  Field  Point  shows  a  fixed  light,  elevated  67  feet  above  the  sea,] 
and  27  feet  from  the  base.     It  bears  from  Eaton's  Neck  light  N.  89°  6'  E.,  12|  miles  ( 
tant.    From  Stratford  light  S.  9°  W.,  10  J  miles  distant.     From  Black  Rock  light  S.  19°  | 
4'  E.,  11  miles  distant.     From  New  Haven  light  S.  34°  28'  W.,  18i  miles  distant. 

You  should  come  no  nearer  Old  Field  Point  than  8  fathoms,  (distant  half  a  mile,)  ml 
the  night ;  and  when  it  bears  south  of  you,  steer  W.  i  N.  17  miles,  which  will  take  you  | 
to  the  north  of  Lloyd's  Neck,  in  13  fathoms  water,  leaving  Norwalk  light,  which  is  revolr- 
ing,  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  Huntington  light  (on  Eaton's  Neck)  on  your  larboard  I 
hand,  from  whence  you  may  steer  S.  66°  W.,  which  will  take  you  between  Sands'  Point 
and  Execution  Rocks,  ou  the  latter  of  which,  on  tho  east  end,  is  a  buoy,  boarin<;  N.  by  [ 
W.  from  the  light,  distant  sevon-eighths  of  a  mile.     If,  when  up  with  Falkner's  IhIadiI, 
you  should  prefer  going  to  the  north  of  tho  Middle  Ground,  steer  W.  i  S.  for  Strat&ni  { 


m.itm^ff^iM   -'."iPP^^ipilipiiipi 


*  *,j     •.•V'";'.r''f^Vii.i..  i;     « 

••'•  ..  -  \'  '      '.■•/•^Wi.l.hllillP 

•  ••^  M       /-        -    ,  '"  "  ...         -"         '■''         I., 

^yS-    ''■■   .;.-^,-  !*.„i,i;r  '•■'      1.1    w     w 

.i7  w.n'ali 


lit«.»li.  .. ,  ,/,      ;<>         ;. 

.)Jj'       „,       ••'  '"  '■''     T         '.• 

y     ;i    "     ',-        •«       ".        t»      ..       I- 
^*/»  (VIiciiihSIiimu  ' 

.         I/I"*-'     U  ,.  M 

,.     -      •'     >■>     Li         ....     •"  •• 

*  '■         "    ',-    „    "' 
"L   '■■         ,  "         ' 

f      "  «      li^SluiHriwiiiMMkR'. 


^'.K.Illi.Hp. 
I 


■"'■'■fd'''L'("'' 


•«    '^'^^/V 


*'  "  •  I''  L    ^ 


Di.ivii-" 


.?*J'„„/.<i,«/./''        " 


ohi  n,i,i>,„.r'.      "' 


.^i,,    ^'    « 


n 


■''       ,,,    .''  o'SlHUllWl'Sl      ,;. 

...rl.':    n      "  „      „ 


■<;       r 

StiiiitaiikHniit  » 

"'  U.W.VIllMo™  IX 

fotiri^ifhimi  Sfiofi/ 


"     m 


"  II 


141' 


LON(r    ISLAM)    SOIM) 

llciliii'i'il  I'l'iiiu  llii'  I  .S.CiasI  Smvi'v. 
.\.l).ISA('ilIvSii|H'hiili-iiil<-iil . 

KXr..\V.lll,('NT.NKW  Y((KK. 
.      Ki.-)!  . 


^5l> 


N;lll1ir  Mili'K , 


()        /         2        .1        «        .<        A 


|)riwi»XKii);'Iliy»'haHt's('<)|)li' 


■^  r 


.It) 


9$fm 


ri  i 


^ 

*.;' 


IJ 


_^>       .4 


mtm 


m,wm  u  I      <  ■MvnpFI^npmppn^ 


••^pqnTCWi<'.'<i>i'wwii>'  ■"«! 


I     fli"-<'Jh    ■    "•  .w "           "V^            *" 
"v.' >    W".,  nil    '  ,.  .J'         "w     ,^>r^  "'    ' ~ 

M..,u..i.H..-.k,..,  /IJl         «  »  _y<,     •«    *        iy    -•    X         £ 


k^^  '-"v^  •  .'.U 

';    \        >i      tiv,';^  7    /   y\\  IL.H..I 


u- 


-  ,..„-i^^^   ,-...<  .J!L--— -~— ..HJ-^""^^         >.«iIimII,   "  -^ 


('•'iiiit'\iii< 


t-^-^,*V^N,.,l 


^ '■^'^^Hft:V 


n„u, 


Ilu„.,„s1.«.     '"""i 


v> 


N 


O 


o 


"^WWf-^WiWP" 


i-    c^  ) '^i*.  .ji  V  (^^^— ■•■  •     .Jt^r  ■''•.■       '        •     '-^  '■  '■,    i.Wiit.iiiiaii"        ,;   ~   "■    III  '■■ 


11  *■".: 

I*;  --'    ...I 


I   (      M 


l« 


.  r  '.      '.  i.|,         1...  i.i       I. 


Siui.(>.c,':.i 

i,.(  I.'     '.•     ",  py% /v.i.vi..//*'  .... 


II     " 

'  ..ScHllllWl'St      ,. 

r  1."      ,.        " 


5      "         .../^  I.' 


M<iiiiiiiiki\iiiii  , 

•■  llWVlll'-LV"  « 

■    I"       "     ... 


'iirt'ithi'jii  Shi'iil 


LONd    ISLAM)    SOIM) 


|{(>i)i(i't'il  I'li.nillii.r  S  r,  ,..|s(  Siirvt.y . 
.\  |).I\.\I'1IK  Siii...nMl..ii,l..i,l  . 

K.vcNv  III  r\r  \K\v  V((iiK. 


. 


lh.tMli.\  Ki|..;.'l>>  t'Kuli.sl  u)il|. 


■^ppn* 


"Wl'"' »^:'» 


'i 


m 


*'■?. 


I 


*  ■# 


light,  20  mi 

I  for  Saoda'  1 

Eaton'a  1 

I  rated  134  fi 

died  light. 

reef  extend 

I  water  llh. 

Vessela  b 

I  bears  betwc 

Sands'  P 

I  ind  six-tent 

I  of  a  mile. 

Stratford 
I  [|;ht  once  in 
New  Havei 
taot;  Black 
Id  case  o 
course  shoul 
taking  care 
change  days 
ihouid  not  b 
Misery,  or  if 
the  light,  ope 
If  a  ship  ( 
run  in  a  darl 
Stratford  ligl 
carry  you  1| 
north  of  the' 
tod  New  Hn 
and  will  pas 
with  Stratfoi 
light  is  W.  S 
is  shoal  for  sc 
bears  W.  J  f 
Plumb  Isia 
point  of  the  ii 
Falkner'a  1 
KIM  BE  R] 
aer's  Island  I 
Should  you 
the  east  and  a 
Itlie  west,  is  c' 
3j  fathoms. 
bold  to,  but  yc 
|W.,  and  whet 
The  pnssng 
[over  towards 
JThis  point  nia 
E.  from  Falkr 
Island,  you  sh 
[list  clear  of  it 
fathoms,  rocky 
wuthward,  to 
brdReef.whi 
Dd  light  W.  3 
miles.  To  t 
empted  by  str 
'filled  to  nnvigi 
ghthouse  to  bi 
if  30  or  40  yn 
te  outer  Rock 
fyou.  Vessi 
l^hetton's  Re( 
irown's  Reef, 
le  west  of  the 
lardhand;  thi 
iven-eighths  o; 
[tratford  Point, 
'oal  on  the  een 


f'J""f"w 


pumpa 


mm 


m 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  If7 

light  20  miles,  and  giving  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile,  in  3|  fathoms  water,  steer  S.  66°  W. 
for  Sands'  Point  lighthouse. 

Eaton's  Neck  lighthouse,  fronting  from  the  east  round  north  to  the  south-west,  is  ele-  EatorCi  Neek 
ntod  134  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sen,  and  49  feet  8  inches  from  its  base,  and  shows  a  Light. 
(xed  light.     It  bears  S.  6°  15'  E-  from  Norwalk  light,  distant  5  miles  and  nine-tenths.     A 
reef  extends  from  the  light  N.  N.  E.  half  a  mile,  on  which  are  a  number  of  rocks.    High 
fBter  llh.  Im.,  rise  9  feet  2  inches. 

Vessels  should  not  come  nearer  the  shore  than  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  when  the  light 
lieBre  between  west  and  south.     On  the  west  side  the  shore  is  sandy  nnd  pretty  bold. 

Sands'  Point  lighthouse  is  N.  4Q"  30'  E.  from  Throg's  Point  light,  distant  4  miles   Sands'  Point 
ind  six-tenths.     The  rocks  extend  from  the  shore  opposite  the  light,  N.  W.  one-eighth    Light, 
of  n  mile.     High  water  llh.  12m.,  rise  8  feet  7  inches. 

Stratford  lighthouse  contains  a  revolving  light.     The  revolution  is  such  as  to  exhibit  the    Stratford 
ight  once  in  90  seconds.     From  it  Old  Field  Point  light,  on  Long  Island,  bears  S.  9°  W.;  LigM. 
New  Haven  light  N.  63°  E.,  10  miles  distant;  Middle  Ground  S.  3°  W.,  5i  miles  dis- 
tant; Black  Rock  light  S.  88°  W. 

Id  case  of  flood  tide  and  southerly  wind,  when  you  come  through  the  Race,  your 
course  should  be  W.  |  S.  until  you  come  up  with  Old  Field  Point  light,  distant  16  leagues, 
taking  care  to  allow  for  the  tide,  which  runs  very  strong,  and  flows  on  the  full  and 
chnnge  days  of  the  moon  until  11  o'clock.  In  coming  up  with  Old  Field  Point  light,  you 
liiould  not  bring  it  to  bear  to  the  west  of  W.  by  S.  h  S.,  on  account  of  a  shoal  off'  Mount 
Misery,  or  if  in  the  day-time,  keep  Crane  Neck,  which  is  a  bluff",  two  miles  to  the  west  of 
tiie  light,  open  clear  of  the  light,  and  pass  the  point  in  8  fathoms  as  above  directed. 

If  a  ship  could  have  a  fair  departure  from  the  middle  of  the  Race,  and  is  compelled  to 
run  in  a  dark  night,  or  in  thick  weather,  the  best  course  would  be  west  15  leagues  toward  ' 

Stratford  light,  as  it  would  afford  the  largest  run  on  any  one  course,  and  if  made  good  will 
carry  you  1^  mile  south  of  Stratford  Point  lieht  in  6  fathoms  water,  and  4  miles  to  the 
Dorth  of  the  Middle  Ground ;  on  this  course  you  will  leave  Saybrook,  Falkner's  Island 
New  Haven  lights  on  your  starboard  hand.  Plumb  Island  light  on  your  Inrbonrd  hand, 
and  will  pass  three  miles  south  of  Falkner's  Islands,  in  17  fathoms  water.  When  up 
with  Stratford  light,  and  it  bears  north  1|  mile  distant,  your  course  to  Sands'  Point 
light  is  W.  S.  W.  11  leagues.  West  of  Stratford  light  li  mile  is  Point-no-Point,  which 
isshoal  for  some  distance  from  the  shore,  but  you  are  clear  of  it  when  Black  Rock  light 
bears  W.  i  N. 

Plumb  Island  light  is  a  revolving  light,  63  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  on  the  S.  W.    Plumb  III- 
point  of  the  island.  and  Light. 

Falknup's  Island  light  is  fixed,  93  feet  above  high  water  mark. 

KIMBERLY'S  REEF,  on  which  there  are  13  feet  water,  bears  E.  |  N.  from  Falk-    Kimherl^t 
aer's  Island  light,  distant  one  k  mile.  Reef. 

Should  you  wish  to  anchor  under  Falkner's  Island,  there  is  good  holding  ground  on 
the  east  and  west  side  in  24  and  3  fathoms  water,  but  the  best  place  with  the  wind  from 
west,  is  close  to  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island,  the  lighthouse  bt-aring  S.  W.  by  S.,  in 
2j  fathoms.  North  from  the  Island  a  narrow  shoal  puts  off'  one-qunrter  of  a  mile,  and  is 
bold  to,  but  you  are  to  the  north  of  it,  when  the  centre  of  Goose  Island  bears  S.  W.  by 
W.,and  when  the  light  bears  S.  E.  by  E.  you  may  run  for  it  and  anchor. 

The  passage  inside  of  Falkner's  Island  is  perfectly  safe,  but  you  should  not,  in  standing 
over  towards  the  Connecticut  shore,  bring  Hammonassett  Point  to  the  south  of  east. 
This  point  may  be  known  by  having  two  small  blufl^s  at  the  extremity,  and  it  bears  E.  N. 
E.  from  Falkner's  Island,  distant  54  mdes.  When  standing  to  the  south  towards  Goose 
Island,  you  should  be  careful  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  north  of  it.  nnd  when  you  are 
list  clear  of  it  when  Falkner's  Island  light  bears  E.  S.  E.  nnd  Goose  Island  S.  by  W.,in  9i 
fathoms,  rocky  bottom;  after  you  have  passed  Goose  Island  you  should  keep  more  to  the 
Buthward,  to  avoid  Whetton's  and  Brown's  Reef  lying  off  the  Thimble  Islands,  and  Bran- 
ford  Reef,  which  is  dry  at  very  low  tides:  on  this  reef  is  a  buoy  bearing  from  Falkner's  Isl- 
nd  light  W.  I  N.,  distant  6i  miles,  nnd  from  New  Haven  light.  S.  E.  by  E.  |  E.,  distant 

miles.     To  the  north  of  Brunford  Reef  there  is  a  good  passage,  but  it  should  not  be  at- 

mpted  by  strangers  without  a  favorable  opportunity  ;  but  in  case  you  should  be  com- 
piled to  navigate,  as  during  the  late  war,  you  may,  after  passing  Goose  Island,  bring  the 
ighthouse  to  bear  E.  S.  E.  and  steer  W.  N.  W.  for  the  Outer  Thimble,  giving  it  a  berth 
130  or  40  yards,  then  steer  W.  4  S.,  on  which  course,  if  made  gooil,  you  will  kei»p 
he  outer  Rock  of  the  Thimble  in  range  with  the  large  Hotel  on  Sachem's  Head,  astera 
if  you.     Vessels  of  any  draft  of  water  may  go  through  this  passage,  and  you  will  leave  it 

hetton's  Reef,  which  is  one-fourth  of  a  mile  S.  S.  W.  from  the  Outer  Thimble,  and 

irown's  Reef,  on  which  there  is  a  buoy,  on  your  larboard  hoiid,  and  Thimble  Buoy  to 

e  west  of  the  Thimble,  half  a  mile,  nnd  the  buoy  on  the  Nigger  Heads,  on  your  star- 

lard  hand;  this  range  takes  you  within  100  yards  of  the  Nigger  Head  Buoy,  and  about 

iven-eighths  of  a  mile  north  of  Branford  Reef,  when  you  may  steer  W.  by  S.  4  S.  for 
Itratford  Point.     Goose  Island  is  W.  S.  W.  from  Falkner's  Island,  one  mile  distant ;  it  is 

oal  on  the  east  and  north  sides,  and  a  resting  place  for  gulls,  which  are  purposely  left 


II 


i 


I 


m^ 


198 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


undisturbed,  u  their  noise  aerves  to  give  notice  of  your  approach  to  the  island  in  thick 
weather. 

S.  i  W.  froui  Stratford  light,  distant  5^  miles,  is  the  Middle  Ground,  the  entrance  of 
which  bears  from  Eaton's  Neck  light  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  15  miles;  from  BJHck  Rock 
light  S.  E.  i  S.,7i  miles;  and  from  Old  Field  Point  light  N.  l>y  E.  i  E.,  distant  T)  mileg. 
On  this  shoal  are  two  feet  water  at  low  tide ;  on  the  south  side  is  n  white  npar  buoy,  nnd 
on  the  north  side  a  black  spar  buoy,  both  in  19  feet  water,  bearing  nearly  N.  by  1;;,  ani 
S.  by  W.  from  each  other,  half  a  mile  diutant.  You  may  go  on  oilher  side  of  the  shonl 
.  you  please  :  on  the  north  are  from  3  to  11  fathoms,  and  on  the  south  side  from  8  to  24 

fathoms  water;  a  mile  either  to  the  east  or  west  of  thiH  shonl  you  will  have  12  tnthntna. 

A  ledge  lies  off  the  N.  E.  point  of  Eaton's  Neck,  three-fourths  of  u  mile  from  the  shore 
^    .  but  after  the  light  bears  S.  E.,  the  shore  is  bold  to  all  the  way  up  on  the  cast  side  of 

Huntington  Bay,  where  you  may  anchor  in  easterly  winds. 
BUuk  Rock         Black  Rock  light  is  on  Fnirweather's  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Black  Rock  Hnrbor. 
Light.  45  feet  above  high  water  mark.     High  water  11  hours  1  minute,  riues  9  feet  1  imh. 

In  beating  up  sound,  when  Eaton's  Neck  light  bears  S.  W.  by  S.,  you  should  not 
stand  over  to  the  north  shore  nearer  than  to  bring  Norwulk  light  to  boar  \V.  by  S.  4  H. 
on  account  of  the  reef  which  puts  off  from  Caukeen  Island  E.  by  S.  ]<}  mile,  nnd  on 
which  there  is  a  buoy.  When  Goose  Island,  which  is  the  first  island  S.  W.  from  Cau- 
keen, is  west  from  you,  you  ore  south  of  the  reef.  There  is  a  passage  for  small  vesscla 
between  these  islands,  but  to  the  west  of  Goose  Island  there  is  no  passage,  as  the  rvcfg 
extend  to  the  buoy  on  Green  Ledge,  one  mile  W.  by  S.  i  S.  from  Norwalk  light.  W. 
by  S.  from  Norwalk  light,  3  miles  distant,  is  Long  Neck  Point ;  there  is  good  ni,cliurnge 
to  the  eastward  of  it  when  the  light  bears  E.  from  you,  but  when  you  aro  to  the  west  of 
Long  Neck  Point,  you  should  be  careful  of  Smith's  reef,  which  lies  S.  W.  one  niiln  from 
it,  and  also  of  a  reef  called  the  Cows,  which  is  also  S.  W.  from  Long  Neck  Point,  2} 
miles,  and  south  from  Shippan  Point,  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  on  both  which  there  nre 
buoys,  and  they  are  bold  to  until  you  are  close  on  th-  rocks.  After  you  pass  the  Cows, 
the  first  point  is  Greenwich  Point,  which  is  bare  of  trees,  and  is  the  >S.  E.  point  of  a 
neck  of  land  running  into  the  sound,  the  S.  W.  point  of  which  is  called  Flat  Neck  Pol  it, 
and  covered  with  trees  ;  the  water  off  both  these  points  is  shoal.  1'he  easternmost  uf 
the  Captain's  Isles  lies  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Fiat  Nock  Point,  1^  mile  distant,  between 
which  is  a  fair  passage  ;  but  in  going  in.  you  must  keep  half  way  between  Flat  Neck 
Point  and  the  island,  on  account  of  the  rocks  extending  N.  E.  from  the  island,  and  8.  E. 
from  the  point,  and  steer  north,  ond  when  Flat  Neck  bears  east  ynu  may  anchor.  The 
'  *  passage  between  Captain's  Islands  and  the  main  should  not  be  attempted  by  a  stranger. 

*  Captain's  Islands  are  three  in  number,  the  largest  of  which  is  the  westernmost  one, 

which  has  a  lighthouse  oo  its  east  end,  shoM'ing  a  fixed  light,  bearing  from  Norwalk  light 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  distant  lOi  miles  ;  from  Eaton's  Neck  light  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  11  miles, 
and  from  Sands'  Point  light  N.  E.  i  N.,9  miles.  You  may  opproach  near  these  ishindi, 
but  after  you  have  passed  them  to  the  west,  you  should  keep  at  least  half  a  tnile  iVom 
the  shore,  on  account  of  several  rocks  and  reefs  between  those  islands  and  Rye  Puiut. 
High  water  11  hours  1  minute,  rises  8  feet  2  inches. 

On  the  south  shore  of  the  Sound,  after  passing  Eaton's  Point  to  the  wostwar  1,  is  Lnyd's 
Neck,  the  north  point  of  which  is  low,  and  sandy,  K.  by  N.  from  which  is  a  reef  on  which 
there  is  a  buoy,  lying  off  the  highest  bluff,  half  a  mile  from  the  shore  :  the  reef  la  very 
amall,  and  has  3  fathoms  close  to  it.  To  clear  this  reef  and  the  Sandy  Point,  you  slimild 
not  bring  Eaton's  Neck  light  to  the  N.  of  E.  i  S.  in  passing  it.  To  the  west  of  Loyd's 
Neck  is  Oyster  Bay,  in  standing  in  towords  which  you  should  be  careful  of  iho  shuul 
which  puts  off  from  the  north  point  of  Hog  Island,  in  a  N.  N.  W.  direction,  nearlya  mile; 
you  are  to  the  north  of  it  when  (.*ak  Point  is  open  of  a  hill  on  Matinicock  Point  (S.  W. 
by  W.)  and  Cooper's  Bluff,  which  is  the  highest  up  the  bay,  is  open  clear  of  the  en»t 
point  of  Hog  Island,  (S.  S.  E.,)  when  you  may  steer  S.  E.  for  the  eastern  sidct  of  the 
bay,  to  clear  the  Middle  Ground,  nnd  make  a  harbor  either  in  Cold  Spring  or  Oyster 
Bay,  keeping  but  a  short  distance  fioin  tho  shore. 

One  mile  east  of  Sands'  Point  light  is  the  Pulpit,  a  lorge  rock  on  the  shore ;  when 
this  rock  is  between  .S.  S.  W.  and  S.  E.  from  you.  you  should  not  bring  .Sands'  I'uiiit 
light  to  bear  W.  of  S.  W.,  on  account  of  u  reef  of  rocks  ofl'  it,  and  in  standing  to  the 
north,  you  should,  when  the  light  is  S.  by  E.  from  you.  make  but  short  tacks,  on  account 
of  the  Execution  Rocks,  which  lie  N.  N.  W.  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  from  the  light,  nud 
also  on  account  of  some  scattering  rooks,  ono-eighth  of  a  mih*  fVom  the  point.  After 
you  pass  the  point,  your  course  is  S.  W.  for  tho  south  point  of  llait  Island,  on  which 
course  you  pass  Success  and  Gangway  Rocks,  on  both  which  are  buoys,  left  on  the  iiir- 
board  hand  on  the  above  course,  although  you  may  go  on  either  side  of  them.  Success 
Rock  is  bare  at  low  water,  and  is  S.  W.  from  the  lighthouse  on  Sands'  Point,  about  one 
mile.  Gangway  Rock  has  6  feet  of  water  on  it,  and  is  one-sixth  of  a  mile  W.  N.  W. 
from  Success  Rock,  lying  (as  its  name  imports)  in  mid-chunnel.  The  south  puiiitof 
Hart  Island  has  two  single  trees  on  it,  and  is  bold  to.     The  course  from  this  to  Throg'a 


BLUNT'S'AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


19d 


Point  lighthouse,  (which  stands  on  the  south-east  point  of  Throg's  Neck,  and  contains  a 
txei  light)  is  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  on  which  course  you  will  leave  the  buoy  on  the  Stepping  '' 
Stoaes  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  you  may  stand  over  to  the  westward,  guiding  by  your 
\ttii ;  but  as  you  come  up  with  the  Stepping  Stones,  which  is  about  hall  way,  do  not 
bring  the  trees  on  Hnrt  Islnnd  to  bear  to  the  N.  of  N.  N.  W.,  and  give  Throg's  Point  a 
berth  of  one-eighth  of  a  mile.  You  may,  after  passing  Throg's  Point  light,  steer  west 
mwards  Whitestone  Point,  which  is  the  first  point  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  Old  Ferry 
Point,  which  is  beyond  it,  on  your  starboard  hand,  between  which  and  Throg's  Point 
ihore  is  good  anchorage.  Other  bays  that  put  in,  to  the  west  of  Old  Ferry  Point,  are 
ilioni  until  you  are  beyond  Wnddington's  Point,  which  is  opposite  Riker's  Island.  Be- 
tween Old  Ferry  and  Waddington's  Point  are  Clauson's  and  Hunt's  Points,  the  former 
of  which  has  a  buoy  off  it,  and  both  are  shoal  for  a  short  distance.  South  of  Clauson's 
Point,  and  nearly  two-thirds  over  to  the  Long  Island  shore,  is  a  reef  of  rocks,  on  which 
there  is  a  buoy,  which  must  be  left  on  the  larboard  hand  ;  you  open  Flushing  Buy  when 
vnu  come  up  with  it,  and  from  mid-channel  may  continue  your  course  on  west  from  the 
north  point  of  Riker's  Island,  which  is  bold  to;  you  can  anchor  to  the  westward  of  it  in  ' 

guch  water  as  you  think  proper,  with  the  north  point  bearing  east. 

EXECUTION  ROCKS  LIGHT  is  a  red  fixed  light  424  feet  above  high  water.  Execution 

It  bears  from  Sands'  Point  light,  N.  N.  W.,  distant  |  of  a  mile ;  from  Throg's  Point  Rocks  Light. 
light,  N.  E.  by  N.  5  miles. 

The  rocks  extend  ono  mile  in  a  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  direction,  and  are  ;)  of  a 
mile  wide  in  the  broadest  part,  where  the  lighthouse  is  placed,  near  the  middle  of  the 
reef. 

There  is  a  black  spar  buoy  with  one  white  horizontal  stripe  on  the  N.  E.  point  of  the 
reef,  in  4i  fathoms  water,  distant  800  feet  from  the  light.  High  water  llh.  12m.,  rise  8i  fnet. 

THROG'S  POINT — At  Throg's  Point  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  lOh.  59m.,  Tlirog'i Point. 
rise  7i  feet. 

HELL  GATE.--It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  lOh.  04m. 

HART  ISLAND  affords  good  anchorage  either  in  easterly  or  westerly  winds.  To 
anchor  on  the  east  side  you  may  stand  towards  a  barn  which  is  in  the  bend  towards  the 
south  part  of  the  island,  and  anchor  in  3  fathoms,  the  trees  bearing  S.  S.  W.,  distant  half 
a  mile.  Should  you  wish  to  anchor  on  the  west  side,  between  that  and  City  Island,  you 
mny  haul  close  round  the  south  part  of  Hart  Island,  and  anchor  west  of  the  trees,  in  such 
wnter  as  you  think  proper. 

HUNTINGTON  BAY  has  a  fair  entrance  and  sound  ground.  There  is  good  an- 
chornge  in  Lloyd's  Harbor,  in  2  fathoms  water,  secure  from  all  winds.  To  enter  it,  steer 
S.  W.  h  S.  from  the  light,  when  it  bears  N.  E.  4  N.,  until  the  north  point  of  Lloyd's  Har- 
bor, which  is  a  low  sand  point,  is  W.  from  you,  when  you  may  steer  directly  info  the 
hnrbor.  leaving  Sandy  Point  20  yards  on  your  starboard  hand.  High  water  llh.  Ira. 
risfis  9i  feet. 

In  going  in  or  coming  out  of  Lloyd's  Harbor,  you  should  be  careful  of  the  shoal  water, 
which  is  to  the  east  of  the  Sandy  Point,  and  on  the  west  side  of  Huntington  Bay. 

SHOALS  IN  THE  SOUND.— We  will  now  notice  more  particularly  the  shoals  in   Shoals  in  the 
Long  Island  Sound.  Sound. 

Hntchett's  Reef,  to  the  east  of  Connecticut  River;  it  bears  E.  i  S.  from  Saybrook 
lif:htli<iuse,  and  S.  8.  W.  from  Hatchett's  Point,  and  is  dangerous.  Between  this  reef 
and  the  shore  is  Burrows'  Rock,  lying  W.  N.  W.  from  it.  Strangers  should  not  ap- 
prourh  the  north  Rhore  on  account  of  these  reefs,  the  bar  off  Connecticut  River,  and  the 
shoiil  (iff  Cornfield  Point. 

Rlionld  you  want  a  pilot  to  enter  Connecticut  River,  by  making  a  signal  off  the  bar, 
they  will  cotne  on  board.     The  bar  extends  li  of  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

To  the  S.  W.  of  Norton's  Point,  which  is  on  the  Long  Island  side,  and  S.  E.  from 
Fiilkner's  lipht,  the  water  is  shoal  for  the  distance  of  3  miles,  but  from  thence  the  shore 
is  l)oUl  until  you  cotno  up  with  Roanoke  Point,  a  distance  of  10  miles;  after  passing  this 
point,  you  shoniil  not  come  nearer  to  the  shore  than  one  mile,  until  you  are  west  of  Wad- 
ing River,  on  account  of  a  shoal  off  the  Friar's  Head,  and  Herrod's  Point;  after  passing 
Wilding  River,  you  may  come  within  half  a  mile  of  the  shore,  till  nearly  up  with  Mount 
Misery,  when  you  should  not  bring  Old  Field  Point  light  to  bear  W.  of  W.  by  S.  i  S., 
on  account  of  n  shoiil  already  described. 

Tiie  Friar's  Head  is  a  remarkable  sand-hill  to  the  east  of  the  Horse  and  Lion,  which 
resembles  the  biild  head  of  a  friar,  if  being  bare  of  trees  on  the  top,  and  the  soil  white. 
The  Horse  and  L<on  are  two  small  spots  in  the  bank,  bare  of  bushes,  which  some  years 
ago  resembled  those  animals. 

Second  Dikkctions  for  Black  Rock  Harbor. — Bring  the  light  on  Fairweather 
Island  to  bear  N.  i  W.,  and  run  for  it,  if  it  should  be  in  the  day  time,  when  on  that  bear- 
ing it  will  range  with  a  single  hill,  situated  in  the  interior  several  miles,  which  you  must 
keep  in  range,  until  you  are  distant  half  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse  ;  you  will  then  have 

Kissed  the  spindle  on  the  Cows,  and  will  be  in  4  fathoms  wafer,  when  you  may  steer  N. 
.  W.  until  the  light  bears  E.  by  S.,  leaving  a  rock  S.  by  W.  from  the  light,  on  which  is 


Hell  Gate. 
Hart  Island. 


Huntington 
Bay. 


^^•P! 


900  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

»  buoy,  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  you  may  nnchnr.     In  ateering  the  above  couriei 
vou  will  have  fi  falhoma,  when  up  with  the  spindle  on  the  Cowa,  and  it  shonlens  gradual. 
Mtmtoek  ly.     Hish  wiiter  11  h.  3ni.  rises  6  feet  6  inches. 

Point  light.         MONTOCK  POINT  LIGHT  is  on  the  enat  end  of  Long  Ii.lnnd,  bonrinjr  W.  by  S. 

from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Block  Isliind,  4  lenguva  distant.     From  Montuck  lichlhouHe  to 

the  west  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  N.  W.  by  N.,  13i  miles  distant.     The  lighlhuugf  coq. 

Block  Itland   taioHnfixed  li(;ht,elttvQtedl()Ofeetiili(ivtttholt<velnflhf  sea.  High  wiiterHh.  15ni.,  rise'Ji  it 

to  Gardner's       BLOCK  ISLAND  TO  GARDNER'S  BAY.— Moniotk  Point,  the  eiisternmuHt  port 

Bay  of  Long  Island,  is  4  leagues  W.  by  8.  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Block  Island,  on  the  N, 

W.  point  of  which  are  two  lighthouses:  between  the  islnnd  iind  the  point  there  ure  16 

and  18  fathoms  water.     As  you  approach  the  point,  you  will  cpiickly  come  into  9,  7,  a,,,] 

5  fathoms  water.     A  flat  runa  oil'  from  the  iibove  point,  on  the  outer  part  of  which  there 

are  5  fathoms  water,  rocky  bottom,  and  S.  by  W.  from  the  light,  <J  miles  distnnt,  lin 

Frisby'a  Ledge,  extending  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  4  miles,  with  from  ti  to  15  fathoms  on  It,  linrd 

rocky  bottom,  nud  deep  water  very  near. 

Between  Montock  Point  and  Block  Island  there  is  a  shoni  with  only  H  fathoms  on  its 
shoalest  part,  on  which  the  son  breaks  in  moderate  gales  from  the  southward.  It  Jleg 
nearly  half  wny  between  the  Point  of  Mimlock  and  the  south-west  part  of  the  IhIuikI, 
W.  by  S.  from  the  latter,  and  about  E.  i  N.  from  the  lighthouse  on  Montock,  dibtiint  ^j 
miles.  You  suddenly  shoal  your  water  from  13  to  fi  fiith<inis  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the 
shoal,  and  before  you  get  a  second  cast  of  the  lend  you  are  over  the  shoalest  part,  into  7, 
8,  10,  and  12,  and  then  into  14  fathoms.  The  rippling  of  the  tide  is  very  conspicuous 
'  when  approaching  the  shoal  in  fine  weather,  and  the  son  breaks  on  it  so  in  bad  weather 

that  evon  in  small  vessels,  it  is  recommended  to  avuid  coming  near  it,  especially  in  southpr- 
ly,  or  S.  W.  gales.  You  will  suddenly  shoal  from  13  to  U  fathoms,  and  Montock  li);ht 
bearing  W.  |  S.,  8  miles  distant,  you  will  have  [>i  fathumf.  The  (^oundingH  from  tim 
shoal  towards  Montock  ar(«  6,  !),  14,  13,  11,  10.  and  !)  fallions.  Townrds  the  lighthouse, 
when  it  bears  from  W.  to  S.  W.  by  W.,  the  bottom  is  strong ;  towuids  the  shoal  the  Imt- 
tom  is  coarse  sand,  and  a  very  strong  tide.  A  shoal  runs  otffrom  the  north  side  of  Block 
Island,  '2  miles. 

In  rounding  Montock,  come  no  nearer  than  !t  fathoms,  or  keep  the  two  bluffs,  or 
high  parts  of  the  land,  (to  the  westward  of  Montock,)  open  one  of  the  other,  until 
"Willis'  Point  comes  open  <'f  Montock  False  P«)int.  These  markw  will  carry  y<iu  clear 
of  all  the  shoals  in  3i  and  I)  fathoms,  and  a  N.  by  W.  course  will  then  carry  you  clear 
of  the  Shagawanock  Reef,  v\hich  lies  N.  W.  i  N.,  .'3i  miles  from  Montock  lighthouse, 
and  has  6  feet  on  its  shoalest  part,  G  fathoms  on  the  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  sides,  3  and  4  I'liili- 
oms  on  the  S.  E.  and  8.  VV.  sides,  and  3.  4,  and  5  fathonis  between  the  shonl  and  Mon- 
tock False  Point.  The  tide  sets  strong  round  Montock  I'oint;  the  flood  N.  E.,  niid 
ebb  to  the  contrary.  At  tlio  Shaguwunock  the  flood  sets  W.  by  S.,  and  ebbs  to  the 
contrary.  When  on  the  Shaguwnnock  in  6  feet,  aiiclioicd  u  boat,  and  took  the  folluwing 
marks: 

1.  Willis'  Point  in  a  line  with  the  westernmost  point  of  Fort  Pond   Bay,  or  the  bay 
,                        closed  by  the  points  being  broufiht  in  a  line  .S.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

2.  Montock  False  Point  .'^.  about  \i  n.i!r>. 

3.  The  White  Clifl',  or  hij;h  suiid-liills,  on  tlie  west  end  of  Fisher's  Island,  culled  Mount 
Prospect,  N.  by  W.  3  W. 

4.  The  Gull  Islands  N.  W.,  and  flie  lihilfsand  clifl"  of  Gnrdiier's  Island,  W.  Montock 
False  Point  is  2  miles  N.  W.  from  the  liglitliouso.  Willis'  Point  is  the  eusternmost  point 
of  Fort  Pond  Hay. 

In  rounding  Montock  in  the  night  (when  the  land  or  light  can  be  seen)  with  westerly 
gales,  ytiu  amy  anchor  when  the  liglitli.'i'i.''ie  bears  8.  W.  by  S.  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  coarse 
sand.  Having  brought  Montock  to  the  -ovihward  of  west,  the  weather  thick,  you  cannot 
clearly  ascertain  the  distance  you  ni''  li  i  'O  the  point,  the  lend  must  be  your  guide.  Steer 
as  high  as  W.  N.  W.,  until  you  have  ;;i)t  into  !i  fatliDnis.  Steer  oft'  again  into  13,  and  if 
you  suddenly  shoal  from  10  to  fi,  steer  ofl"  E.  by  N.  until  you  are  in  11  or  12.  which 
BUiideuly  deepens,  (as  a  bank  of  not  more  than  .Oj  fntlioms  extends  from  the  N.  E.  Heef 
to  the  Shagawanock,)  and  a  good  lead  kejit  going  will  prevent  you  going  too  near  these 
shoals,  by  steering  otf  in  12  or  13  futhoiiis,  before  you  attemiit  to  steer  to  the  weslwnrd, 
after  having  sounded  in  (>  or  7  tathoins.  In  the  day  time,  having  rounded  Montock,  nnd 
bound  to  Gardner's  Bay,  steer  N.  by  W.  until  you  clearly  discover  that  Fort  Pond  Bny, 
and  the  red  clifl' on  the  westtrii  iioint,  are  ojieii  ot  Willis'  Point;  you  may  then  sleer  W. 
by  S.  for  the  bluff  point  of  (iniilner's  island,  and  you  will  pass  between  the  Shagawanock 
and  Middle  (iround,  or  Cerberus  Shoals. 

The  Middlo  Ground  (or  Cerberus)  is  a  rocky  shoal,  having  from  23  to  5  fathoms  on 
the  shoalest  part;  the  north  and  east  sides  are  steep,  having  10  and  15  fathoms  wilhin 
liulf  a  cable's  length  of  the  shoalest  part.  It  extends  N.  by  E.  nnd  S.  by  W.  three-qunr- 
ters  of  a  mile.  The  south  and  west  sides  shoulen  gradually  from  13.  10,  9,  8,  7,  to  5  fa- 
thoms, sandy  bottom.  It  lies  N.  W.  i  N.,  7i  miles,  from  Montock  lighthouse:  E.S.  E. 
7  miles  from  the  Gull  light;  S.  W.  by  S.  'Ji  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Watch  Hill 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


301 


point;  5i  tnileiS.  by  E.i  E.from  Mount Proiipect, or  tlm high snnd  hillHonthewnitendof 
Fiiher's  Islund.  Th«  tide  in  genernl  niiiltos  a  great  rippling  over  the  shonlpot  part.  To 
ivoid  these  rocks  in  the  diiy  time,  observe  n  consnicuous  hill,  witli  n  notch  in  ita  centre,  at 
the  bRcit  of  Mew  London,  ciiiled  Pole's  Hill.  This  kept  a  ship's  length  open,  either  to 
the  esMtward  or  westward  of  Mount  Prospect,  (or  the  sand-hills  of  Fisher's  Island,)  will 
keep  cleur  of  the  rocky  ihoal  in  10  or  15  fathoms  to  the  eastward,  and  in  8  or  !)  fathoms 
to  the  westward.  The  tide  seta  strong  over  the  shoal.  In  culm  or  little  winds,  ships 
ibould  anchor  before  any  of  the  marks  or  bearings  are  tor  near. 

Being  bound  for  New  London,  and  having  brought  the  Gull  light  W.  by  N.,  and  the 
lighten  Watch  Hill  N.  E.,  steer  so  as  to  open  New  London  lighthouse  of  Finher's  Isl- 
ind;  and  when  the  spire  of  New  London  church  is  in  one  with  a  gap  on  Pole's  Mill, 
iteering  with  it  in  that  direction  will  carry  you  between  the  Race  Rnrk  (on  which  is  a 
ipindle,  or  beaco.i)  and  the  Middle  Race  Rock,  on  which  are  17  feet  at  hulf  flood,  and  lies 
aiwiit  half  way  from  the  Race  beacon  and  the  Gull  light :  or  you  may  bring  Now  London 
lighthouse  n  sail's  breadth  to  the  eastward  of  the  church  spire,  bearing  N.  5°  E.,  which 
will  carry  you  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle  Race  Rock,  or  between  that  and  the  Gull 
lighthouse.     You  may  then  steer  direct  for  New  London  lighthouse. 

About  3  miles  within  Montock  Point,  H  mile  from  the  shore,  lies  a  reef,  hearing  N. 
W.  h  N.  from  the  point,  on  which  there  are  6  feet  water,  which  is  very  dan{;erouB. 

S.  by  W.,  about  9  miles  from  Montock  light,  is  a  small  fishing-bank,  having  8,  10,  11, 
and  15  fathoms  on  it,  before  mentioned. 

Id  the  ofTing,  between  Montock  and  Block  Island,  it  is  high  water  at  half  past  0,  full  and 
change. 

Montock  False  Point  is  about  2  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  the  true  point.  The  Shaga- 
Tvnnock,  or  Six  Feet  Rocky  Shoal,  lies  N.  1  j  mile  from  it,  and  has  been  previously  de- 
scribed. Willis'  Point  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  Fort  Pond  Rny.  This  bay 
is  very  convenient  for  wooding  and  watering :  the  ground  is  clear  and  good,  and  you  may 
anchor  in  any  depth  you  please.  In  a  large  ship  you  may  bring  Willis'  Point  to  bear  N. 
E.,  nnd  even  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  then  have  in  the  middle  about  7  fathoms  water.  Near 
the  shore,  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  there  is  a  pond  of  fresh  water. 

The  N.  E.  part  of  Gardner's  Island  is  ^l  leagues  W.  N.  W.  from  Montock  Point. 
With  westerly  winds  you  may  anchor  off  this  part  of  the  island,  which  is  sandy ;  the 
innrks  for  anchoring  are  the  lighthouse  of  Plumb  Island  N.  W.  and  the  south  pnrt  of 
Gardnei's  Island  in  sight,  bearing  S.  by  W.  or  S.;  yo:^  will  havo  12  or  10  fathoms  water. 
The  bottom  is  sand  and  mud. 

The  entrance  of  Gardner's  bay  is  formed  by  the  north  end  of  Gardner's  Island,  and  the 
south  end  of  Plumb  Islond.  If  you  are  bound  through  the  sound  towards  New  York,  your 
passage  from  Gardner's  liny  is  between  the  west  end  of  Plum  Island  and  Oyster  Pond, 
through  which  channel  you  will  have  from  4  to  20  fathoms  water.  When  going  into  the 
bay,  you  moy  go  within  a  cable's  length  of  Gardner's  Island,  whore  you  will  have  10  fath- 
oms water.  You  should  be  careful  not  to  go  too  near  <ii<Il  Rock,  which  is  a  single  black 
rock  between  Plumb  Island  and  Great  Gull,  and  called  Oid  Silas,  "as  there  is  a  rocky  spot 
one  and  a  half  mile  from  it,  on  which  there  are  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  This  shoal  lies 
with  the  following  marks  and  bearings,  viz  : — A  house  on  Plumb  Island  (standing  about 
one-third  of  the  way  between  the  middle  and  the  north-east  end)  on  with  the  northern- 
most of  the  two  trees  which  appear  beyond  the  house;  the  north  end  of  Plumb  Island  to 
bear  N.  N.  W.,  or  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  the  southernmost  end  of  Plumb  Islnnd  on  with 
the  northernmost  point  of  Long  Island.  In  order  to  avoid  this  rock,  when  going  into,  or 
coining  out  of  Gardner's  Bay,  you  must  be  sure  to  keep  the  south  point  of  Plumb  Islnnd 
open  of  the  north-west  point  of  Long  Island,  whilst  the  house  on  Plumb  Island  is  on  with 
the  northernmost  of  the  two  trees,  as  before  mentioned.  There  are  several  trees,  but 
they  appear,  when  viewed  at  a  distance,  to  be  only  two  trees.  This  shoni  is  called  by 
some  the  Bedford  Rock,  because  the  English  ship  Bedford  grounded  on  it,  August  15, 
1780.  E.  by  N.  one  league  from  Plumb  Island,  lies  a  dongerous  reef,  which  extends  to 
the  Gull  Islands,  and  the  passage  between  is  not  fit  to  be  attempted,  as  there  are  several 
rocks,  some  of  which  may  be  seen.  In  Gardner's  Bay  you  may  anchor  in  what  depth  of 
water  you  please,  from  5  to  8  fathoms. 

On  the  S.  W.  side  of  Gardner's  Island  there  is  very  good  riding.    If  you  are  to  the  east- 
ward of  this  islnnd,  with  an  easterly  wind,  and  wish  to  take  shelter  under  the  south-west  * 
side,  you  must  give  the  northwest  end  of  the  island  a  large  berth,  as  above  directed,  and  as 
you  open  the  west  side  of  the  island,  you  may  haul  round  the  north-west  point,  and  an- 
chor where  you  please.     The  soundings  are  regular. 

Ships,  in  turning  up  into  Gordner's  Bay,  and  standing  to  the  southward,  will  observe  a 
single  conspicuous  tree  on  the  south-east  part  of  Plumb  Islnnd,  and  tacking  before  it  ia 
brought  to  touch  the  south  end  of  the  wood  on  Plumb  Island,  will  avoid  the  Superb'a 
Reef,  which  lies  E.  by  N.  i  N.  from  the  low  point  on  Gardner's  Island,  one-third  of  a 
mile  distant.  It  then  extends  S.  E.  by  E.  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile,  and  is  about  200 
yards  broad:  three  fathoms  on  the  middle,  6  fathoms  close  to  the  north-west  end,  4,  44, 
aud  5  fathoms  close  to  the  south-east  end,  5  and  6  fathan^  clo^  to  tjhti  MLat^idfl.ib'iqg  r^        > 

PROVINCIAL   LIBRARY 
VICTORIA.  B.  C. 


/ 


■     luijn^jiii  ,ij.i.iiLiiinni*^iM 


203         ■'  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

parallel  with  the  low  point  of  the  islard.  To  avoid  this  shoal,  the  leading  mark  into 
Gardner's  Bay  is  to  keep  Plumb  Gut  a  ship's  breadth  open.  Stand  to  the  northward 
until  Plumb  Gut  is  nearly  closing  on  the  north-east  bluff  of  Long  Island,  nearly  touchinir 
the  south-east  point  of  Plumb  Island,  and  until  New  London  lighthouse  is  brought  to  the 
north  and  west  of  Gull  lightliouse,  but  tack  before  the  points  close,  or  stand  into  no 
less  than  7  fathoms  water,  otherwise  you  may  shoot  over  on  the  Bedford  Reef,  wliich 
is  a  bed  of  rocks,  about  30  yards  wide  and  400  long,  lying  S.  E.  and  N.  W.,  with  IG  or 
17  feet  on  its  shoalest  part.  You  may  anchor  in  Giirdner's  Bay  in  5  or  6  fatliuins. 
New  London  lighthouse  kept  a  ship's  breadth  open  to  the  eostward  of  Plumb  Island  will 
run  you  up  into  the  middle  of  the  bay,  into  the  deepest  water,  and  out  of  the  tide.  Ships 
going  in  through  the  Race,  or  going  out  of  New  London,  in  order  to  avoid  the  middle 
Race  Rock,  (which  has  only  17  feet  on  it  at  half  flood,  and  lies  about  half  way  from  the 
Race  beacon  and  the  Gull  lighthouse,)  having  from  30  to  32  fathoms  on  the  north  side 
and  from  10  to  30  on  its  south  side,  .-hould  observe  the  foU'wing  marks: — Going  out  of 
the  roads,  and  to  the  wesf.vard  of  the  rock,  which  is  the  best  chonnel,  bring  the  spire  of 
New  London  church  a  soil's  breadth  open  to  the  westward  of  the  lighthouse;  keep  this 
mark  until  a  grove  of  trees  standing  on  a  high  hill  on  Fisher's  Island,  comes  on  with  the 
east  side  of  Mount  Prospect,  or  the  white  sandhills  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  Fisher's  Island 
N.  60°  E.,  or  the  Gull  light  W.  S.  W.  The  tide  flows  at  the  Gull  11  h.  30  m..  full  and 
change. 

To  go  to  the  northward  of  this  rock,  and  to  the  southward  of  Race  Rock  beacon,  bring 
New  London  church  spire  in  one  with  the  middle  of  the  gap  on  Pole's  Hill,  at  the  back 
of  New  London  (N.  8°  VV.;)  keep  this  niHrk  until  Watch  Hill  liglithouso  comes  a  little 
open  of  thfc  south  side  of  Fisher's  Island,  N.  70°  E.,  and  when  the  Gull  lighthouse  is  in 
one  with  the  middle  ot  Great  Gull  Island,  S.  73°  W.,  you  are  then  to  the  eastward  of  the 
rock.  Coming  up  the  sound  through  the  Race,  bring  Watch  Hill  lighthouse  just  open 
of  the  south  side  of  Fisher's  Island,  until  the  South  Dumplin  conies  open  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  north  part  of  Fisher's  Island,  or  until  Now  London  lighthouse  bears  north; 
you  are  then  to  the  weutward  of  the  Race  Rock,  and  may  steer  for  the  lighthouse  of 
New  London,  and  anchor  in  tho  roads,  with  Montock  lighthouse  S.  E.  by  S.,  then  juu 
open  of  the  west  point  of  Fislu'r's  Island,  Gull  lighthouse  S.  W.  by  S.,  and  New  London 
lighthouse  N.  by  W.,  and  the  gap  and  spire  of  the  church  in  one.  You  will  have  12 
fathoms,  stiff  clay  bottom. 

Going  to  the  westward  through  the  race,  and  to  the  southward  of  the  Roee  Rock,  steer 
for  the  Gull  lighthouse,  keeping  it  to  the  nort'/ward  of  west  until  New  London  ligl/t- 
houje  bears  N.  j  E.,  then  steer  for  it,  leaving  the  Gull  lighthouse  half  a  mile  on  the  lar- 
board hand. 
The  first  half  flood  sets  N  W..  the  last  'lalf  about  W.  N.  W.,  and  the  ebb  E.  S.  E. 
'I'he  above  is  to  bo  observed  in  case  the  wenther  should  be  thick,  and  New  London  church 
spire  not  to  'je  seen,  or  when  Gull  lighthouse  iiears  S.  by  W.  You  may  then  steer  N. 
N.  E.  for  the  roads,  making  allowances  for  tides,  which  are  very  strong  in  the  race.  Flood 
runs  to  the  westwaid  till  9  h.  38  m.  full  and  chonge  days  of  the  moon ;  but  in  New  Lon- 
don roads  only  9  h.  30  m.  It  rises  2i  feet,  spring  tides.  The  flood  sets  through  the 
roads,  first  half  flood  W.  N.  W.,  last  half  \V.  S.  W.  Ebb,  first  quarter,  sets  S.  S.  E., 
the  last  three-quarters  S.  E.,  for  the  S.  W.  poir.tof  Fisher's  island. 

Vessels  bound  eastward  through  the  Race,  in  the  i:'jrht,  when  abreast  of  Gull  Island 
light,  with  the  tide  of  flood  and  a  leading  wind,  should  steer  E.  by  S.,  or  E.  S.  E.,  until 
Gull  Island  light  bears  S.  by  W.;  preserve  that  bt  aring  until  you  see  Stonington  light 
over  the  low  land  of  Fisher's  Island;  they  are  then  clear  of  Race  Point  and  Race  Rock. 
I'he  spring  tides  in  the  Race  run  about  five  knots  per  hour;  ni  up  tides  about  four  knots, 
High  water,  full  and  change,  at  9h.  SEm.  The  first  half  flood  «et8  N.  W.,  the  Inst  half 
about  W.  N.  W.;  consequently,  upon  steering  E.,  or  E.  by  N.,  which  is  the  Sound  course, 
they  have  a  strong  tide  upon  the  starboard  bow,  which  forces  them  over  to  the  northward, 
and  instead  of  making,  as  they  suppose,  an  E.,  or  E.  by  N.  course,  often  carries  them  on 
Rare  Point,  from  which  runs  out  far  ofl"areef  of  rocks  under  water. 

To  go  through  Plumb  Gut  to  the  westward,  give  Pine  Point,  which  is  steep,  a  be'thof 
2i  cables'  length,  and  steer  so  as  to  bring  the  north  bluff  of  Plumb  Island  N.  by  W.  i  W. 
Keep  it  in  that  bearing  until  you  have  brought  the  poplar  tree  clear  of  ^he  east  end  of  Mr- 
Jerome's  house,  or  until  you  have  got  Pine  Point  to  the  southward  of  east;  you  v» ill 
then  observe  a  wood  close  inland  of  the  high  blulfof  Long  Island,  which,  when  benring 
W.  i  S.,  will  be  in  one  with  the  rocky  point,  which  is  the  next  |)o:!)t  to  the  Oyster  Pond 
Point,  Steering  with  the  wood  and  this  point  in  one,  will  carry  you  clear  of  tht  reef, 
which  lies  off  the  north  bluff. 

In  running  through  to  the  eastward,  keep  the  point  over  the  middle  of  the  wood  before 
mentioned,  until  the  poplar  tree  is  to  the  west  end  of  the  house;  then  steer  to  the  south- 
ward, giving  Pine  Point  a  berth  as  before.  Pine  Point  £.  ^  S.  will  lead  c)oar  of  the  shoali 
coming  to  the  eastward. 

The  tide  runs  4  or  5  knots  in  the  gut.  The  flood  sets  about  N.  N.  W.,  and  the  ebb 
S.  S.  £.    It  is  high  water  at  9b.  38ai.,  full  aud  change. 


■■HP 


MW 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


203 


flarlcsfor  the  Valiants  or  Middle  Race  Rock,  which  has  only  17  feet  on  it  at  half  flood, 
anc      i  about  half  way  from  the  Race  beacon,  and  the  Gull  lighthouse. 

1.  New  Loi.  .on  lighthouse  in  one  'v'.th  two  ccnapicuous  trees,  which  standon  the  de- 
clivity of  a  hill,  at  the  back  of  New  ndon,  being  remarkable  for  a  gap  on  its  summit, 
N.4°  W. 

2.  The  went  Bide  of  the  South  Dumplin  just  touching  with  the  north  hill  or  point  of 
fisher's  Island,  N.  41''  E. 

3.  The  enst  bluff  point  of  the  Great  Gull  Island  in  one  with  the  west  lower  extreme 
of  Little  Gull  Island,  or  the  Gull  lighthouse,  a  small  sail's  breadth  open  to  the  eastward  oi 
the  east  part  of  Great  Gull  Island,  S.  64°  AV. 

4.  The  norih  end  of  Long  Island  just  shut  in  with  the  N.  W.  point  of  Plumb  Island, 
S.  76°  W.;  Gull  lighthouse  S.  63°  W.,  and  Mount  Prospect,  or  high  white  sand-hills  on 
Fisher's  Island,  N.  60°  E.     - 

SJarksfor  the  New  Bedford  Reef,  a  bed  of  locks  about  30  yards  broad,  and  400  yards 
long,  lying  H.  E.  and  N.  W.,  with  16  or  '  I  feet  on  its  shoalest  jinrt. 

1,  The  N.  E.  end  of  the  northernmost  grove  of  trees  on  Plumb  Island  touching  the 
south  declining  end  of  the  southernmost  of  the  white  sand-hills  on  Plumb  Island.  These 
eand-hills  are  the  two  next  south  of  the  houses  in  the  bay. 

2.  A  huge  notch  or  gap  in  the  wood  on  the  main  land,  to  the  westward  of  Black  Point, 
8  sail's  breadth  open  to  the  northward  of  a  single  black  rock,  which  is  between  the  south 
end  of  Great  Gull  Island  and  the  N.  E.  end  of  Plumb  Island,  N.  W.  by  N. 


Thus  appears  the  rock  called  Old  Silas 


d 


Marks  for  a  bed  of  rocks,  about  40  yards  square,  lying  three-quarters  of  a  mIc  off  shore, 
on  the  S.  E,  side  of  Plumb  Island.  At  low  water  the  shoalest  part  has  not  more  than 
tlireefect  on  them,  and  about  the  size  of  a  small  boat's  bottom.  It  may  be  seen  at  low 
water;  three  fathoms  all  round,  not  more  than  &  feet  from  the  rock.  Other  parts  of  the 
reef,  Q  fathoms  are  around  Oie  shoal. 

1.  The  largest  house  with  two  chimneys,  in  the  bay,  east  side  of  Plumb  Island,  in  one 
with  a  large  stone  or  rock  on  a  hill  behind  the  house,  N.  33°  W. 

2.  The  Gull  lighthouse  touching  the  east  end  of  Great  Gull  Island,  N.  65°  E. 

3.  The  white  sand-hills  nn  the  south  side  of  Fisher'b  Island,  or  Mount  Prospect,  half 
way  open  to  the  westward  of  Great  Gull  Island.  S.  D.  part  of  Plumb  Island,  S.  74°  W., 
end  the  N.  E.  end  of  same,  N.  45°  E. 

Marks  fir-  a  shoal  in  the  middle  of  Plumb  Gut,  which  is  a  compound  of  rocks  and  large 
stones,  with  only  \6feet  on  it,  having  16  and  17  fathoms  on  the  N.  E.  side,  20  on  the  iV. 
W.,  and  Band  7  on  the  south  side.     When  on  the  shoal,  took  the  following  marks. 

1.  A  small  poplar  tree  in  one  with  Mr.  Jerome's  door,  N.  N.  E. 

2.  A  single  conspicuous  tree  in  one  with  the  east  side  of  a  grey  cliff  on  Gardner's  Isl- 
and, S.  E.  by  I^. 

3.  Oyster  Pond  Point  W.  i  N.,  and  the  S.  E.  (or  Pine  Point)  of  Plu/nb  Island,  E.  by 
N.,  and  the  roc!  y  point  or  bluff  point  of  Plumb  Island,  north.  Tht  passage  through 
Plumb  Gut  is  to  the  northward  of  this  rock. 

There  is  another  rock,  with  only  24  feet  upon  it,  about  400  yards  from  the  rocky  or 
bluff  point  on  Plumb  Islond,  on  the  latter  of  which  is  a  revolving  light. 

Marks  for  anchoring  in  Plumb  Island  Roads. 

Movnt  Prospect,  or  the  white  sand-Iiills  of  Fisher's  Island,  touching  the  Gu'l  light- 
house, N.  E.,  and  the  N.  E.  part  of  Long  Island  in  one  with  the  S.  E.  end  ot  Plumb 
Island,  bearing  W. ,  or  the  east  bluff  points  o  f  Gardner's  Island  in  one  with  the  low  beach 
which  extends  from  the  north  side  of  the  island,  S.  45°  E.  With  these  marks  you  will 
have  from  7  to  8  fathoms,  soft  mud,  and  .juite  out  of  the  tide,  and  not  more  than  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  of  Plumb  Island,  where  there  is  very  convenient  and 
good  water. 

From  Block  Island  a  reef  of  rocks  iies  one  mile  distant  from  the  north  end  of  the 
iilBDd. 


mm  ■■i|i|iiifm>pnipp 


204 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Buoyt  and 
Sjnndlts. 


South-west  Ledge  lies  W.  S.  'W.  from  Block  Island,  4  miles  distant,  having  4^  fathnins 
at  low  water,  and  breaits  a  heavy  sea.  As  you  open  the  passage  between  Montock  aud 
Block  Island,  you  will  deepen  your  water,  and  have  soft  bottom  on  an  E.  N.  E.  course 
and  when  abreast  of  Block  Island,  you  will  shoalen  your  water  to  sandy  bottom  ;  when 
past  it,  you  will  again  deepen  to  soft  bottom. 

Bearings  and  distances  of  sundry  places  from  the  lighthouse  ou  Montock  Point, 

The  S .  part  of  Block  Island  bears  E.  by  N.  from  the  lighthouse  on  Montock  Point,  20 
miles  distant. 

The  eastern  rips  lie  E.  by  N.  li  mile  from  the  lighthouse.  The  northern  rips  lie  N. 
E.  j  E.  3  miles  from  the  lighthouse.  These  rips  although  they  may  appear  to  the  ma- 
riner dangerous,  may  be  crossed  with  any  draft,  in  6,  7,  S,  and  9  fathoms. 

Shagawnnock  Reef,  on  which  a  spear  is  placed,  bears  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  the  lighthouse 
on  Montock  Point,  3i  miles  distont ;  the  reef  ranges  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  aSaut  one- 
quarter  of  a  mile  in  length.  There  is  a  good  channel- way  between  the  reef  and  Long 
Island,  about  li  mile  wide,  in  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms  water. 

Frisbie's  Ledge  is  only  a  place  of  hard  rocky  bottom  before  you  approach  the  lighthous , 
to  the  westward,  from  8  to  15  fathoms,  and  no  ways  dangerous  to  any  vessel.  You  may 
keep  the  shore  on  board  from  the  Highlands  (say  three-quarters  of  a  mile)  and  haul  rouDd 
Montock. 

The  east  end  of  Fisher's  Island  bears  N.  |  W,  from  the  lighthouse  on  Montock  Point 
13i  miles. 

Watch  Hill  Point  lighthouse  (which  contains  a  repeating  light)  bears  nearly  N.  from 
Montock  Point  lighthouse,  distant  14  miles  :  there  is  a  reef  extending  from  Fisher's  Tsl- 
and  to  Wuifh  Hill  Point,  leaving  a  passage  between  the  E.  end  of  the  reef  and  Watch 
Hill  Point,  half  a  mile. 

The  Riiie  Rock,  where  there  is  an  iron  spear  placed,  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  threeq    r 
ters  of  a  mile  from  the  W.  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  bears  from  Montock  ligiiti.'  ise, 
W.  by  N..  13i  miles  distont. 

The  Gull  Islands  bear  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  Race  Rock,  4  miles  distant.  Tiie  light- 
house  standing  on  the  West  Chop  of  New  London  Harbor,  bears  N.  by  W.  {  W.b  miles 
from  the  s^piMiron  the  Race  Rock.  On  the  little  Gull  Island  there  is  a  lighthouse  con- 
taining a  fn  1  light,  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  west  point  of  Fisher's  Island,  4  miles 
distant. 

Bartlett's  Reef,  on  which  a  buoy  nnd  light  vessel,  with  one  mast  and  a  bell,  are  placed, 
bmirs  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  4  miles  distant  from  the  Race  Rock. 

Littio  Goslien  Roef,  where  a  buoy  is  placed,  bears  N.  E.  |  E.,  about  2  miles  distant 
from  the  buoy  on  Bartlett's  Reef. 

The  lightliouae  ot  New  London  Harbor, bears  from  the  buoy  on  Little  Goshen  Reef, 
N.  N.  K.  4  K.,  about  li  mile  distant,  and  contains  a  fixed  light. 

The  S.  W.  ledge,  where  a  buoy  is  placed,  bears  N.  by  W.  from  the  Race  Rock,  4i 
miles  distant. 

The  Kast  Chop  of  New  London  Harbor,  bears  N.  by  E.  J  E.  from  the  S.  "W.  ledge,  J 
mile  distant. 

The  lighthouse  bears  from  the  buoy  on  S.  W.  ledge  N.  W.  by  N.  }  mile  Oistont. 

LIST  OF  HUOYS,  HEACONS  AND  SPINDLES  IN  THE  DISTRICT  OF 
NEW  LONDON,  which  have  been  numbered. 

Vessels  standing  to  the  northward  keep  to  the  westward  of  red  buoys. 

"  "  "      westward       "         "     northward       "        " 

"  "  "      southward     "        "     eastward  of  black  buoys. 

"  '«  •'       eastward        "         "      southward       *'         " 

either  side  of  red  nnd  black  striped.    Black  and  white  perpendicular  stripes  mark  a 

channel.     Buoy  in  best  water. 

BUOYS. 

«0.  WIIKRE  SITUATED.  COLOR. 

1  Roof  in  Rranford  Harbor Red. 

2  Bniwn's  Reef. Black. 

3  Nt'aro  ll(>ii(l.  north  of  llrnnford  Beacon do. 

4  Wlifaloirs  Reef,  near  Thimble  Island, do. 

.5  Bniwn's    Ledue Red. 

6  North  onii  of  Falkiier's  Island do. 

7  Cliarles'  Roef,  off  Madison, Black. 

8  .Middle  Reef.     "         "  do. 

9  Kanterti  Roef    "         »'         do. 

1 0  K illingworth  Point do. 

11  West  bide  Killingworth  Karbor, ..#.. do. 


U. 


nHH 


■ipiiPi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


206 


12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

60 

51 

52 

63 

54 

55 

No.  1 


East  aide  Killingworth  Harbor Red.        ' 

Stony  Island  Reef,  off  Killingworth, Black. 

Crane's  Reef, do. 

Hen  and  Chickens, do. 

OflFCornfield  Point do. 

West  end  Sand  Shoal,  south  of  Cornfield  Point, >  Cross  striped. 

East     "         "        ••        "  '•  *•     J  red  &  black. 

Saybrook  Bar, ..^ Black. 

Griswold's  Rock, do. 

Hatchett's  Reef,  in  shore, Red. 

"  »      offshore, Black. 

Black  buoy,  west  of  Black  Point,... do. 

Pond  Reef, ,    do. 

White  Rock, .'    do. 

Two  Tree  Island Red. 

North  end  of  Bartlett's  Reef, do. 

Great  Goshen  Reef, Black. 

Little     "  "       do. 

Cormorant  Reef,  S.  S.  W.  of  New  London  lighthouse, do. 

Mercer's  Rock, Crossed  strp'd  red  &  black. 

South-west   L edge, Red. 

Black  Ledge Black. 

Can  Buoy,  Black  Ledge, do. 

Melton's  Ledge,  New  London  Harbor, Black. 

Horse-shoe  Reef,   Fisher's  Sound, do. 

Long  Point, do. 

First  buoy  east  of  Long  Point, Red. 

Second  •' N.E.        "        "  do. 

Off  Mouse  Island,  S.  and  W.  of  Mystic  lighthouse do. 

South  and  east  "  "         do. 

Ram  Island  Channel,  east  of  "  "        do. 

North-east  end  of  Ram  Island, do. 

Off  Gate's  Island,  west  of  Whale  Rock  spindle, do. 

North  of  Whale  Rock do. 

N.  W.  point  of  Eel-grass  t;;ound, do. 

Ellis'  Reef,  south  of  Ram  Island  spindle, Black. 

Young's  Rock,  north  of  east  end  of  house  on  Fisher's  Island ?ved. 

Wicopesset  Channel,. .Cross  strip'd  red  &  black. 

East  of  Latimer's  Reef, Black. 

North  Hill  Reef, Red. 

Race  Point, Black. 

Race  Rock, , do. 

Gull  Island Red. 

Shagnwanock do. 


BEACONS. 
On  Branford  Reef 
Mouth  of  Connecticut  River. 

SPINDLES. 
Lord's  Channel, 


No.  3  Latimer's  Reef. 

4  On  Whale  Rock. 

5  East  of  Morgan's  Point  lighthouse. 

6  South        "  '■ 

7  Ellis'  Reef,  south  of  Ram  Island. 

8  On  Sea-flowor  Reef. 


f.  l  i>NRR'S  ISLAND  TO  SHELTER  ISLAND.-If  you  fall  in  with  Gardner's 
Islana,  y.i  must  sail  on  the  N.  side  of  it  till  you  come  up  with  a  low  sandy  point  at  the 
W.  end,  wtjich  puts  off  two  miles  from  the  Highland.  You  tnay  bring  the  island  to  bear 
east,  and  anchor  in  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  as  soon  as  within  the  low  sandy  point. 

GARDNERS  ISLAND  TO  NEW  LONDON— If  your  course  from  the  east  end 
of  Gardner's  Island  to  New  London  is  N.  i  E.  about  4  leagues.  In  steering  this  course 
you  will  leave  Plumb  Island  and  Gull  Islands  on  your  larboard,  and  Fisher's  Island  on 
your  starboard  hand.  In  this  pass,  you  will  go  through  the  Hurse  Race,  where  you  will 
have  a  strong  tide.  This  place  breaks  when  there  is  any  wind,  especially  when  it  blows 
against  the  tide.     Your  Boundings  will  sometimes  bo  5  fathoms,  at  others  15  and  20. 

In  passing  the  west  end  of  Fisher's  Island,  you  must  give  it  a  berth  of  one  mile,  as 
there  is  several  rocks  to  the  westward  of  it;  then  your  course  to  the  lighthouse  is  N. 
by  W.,  distant  two  leagues;  but  in  going  in  here  you  must  not  make  long  hitches  ;  you 
\>ill  leevo  n  sunken  ledge  on  your  larboard,  and  one  on  your  starboard  hand.  When 
within  ono  milo  of  the  lightliouse,  you  may  stand  on  to  the  eastward,  till  the  light  bears 
N.  N.  W..  and  then  run  up  about  N.  N.  E.  till  abreast  of  the  light,  where  you  may  safeiy 
anchor,  or  run  N.  for  the  town. 


Gardner's 
Island  to 
Shelter  Isl- 
and. 

Gardner's 
Island  to 
New  Lon- 
don. 


,.yili|;iiiiivnaifiiiMKfuMH|t  ipi.i  J  N  J I  I  •>i-^7r'Ti!v:- 


.PLJIIW^ilU  .§  1  IJIJIJIM 


S06 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•  u  London  NEWLONDON  LIGHTHOUSE  stands  at  the  entrance  ofthe  harbor,  on  the  west. 
lighthoiue.  ern  side.  The  lantern  is  elovated  80  feet  above  the  level  ofthe  sea,  contains  a  fixed  light. 
Light.  and  bears  N.  by  E .  from  Little  Gull  light,  about  6i  miles.    High  water  9h.  30m.,  rise  24  ft. 

NewLondon.  NEW  LONDON. — If  you  are  bound  into  New  London,  after  getting  to  tho  north- 
ward of  the  S.  W.  part  of  Fisher's  Island,  keep  New  London  light  bearing  from  N.  N 
W.  to  N.  N.  E.,  if  you  are  beating  to  windward,  but  if  the  wind  is  fair,  bring  the  li<'ht  to 
bear  N.  when  at  Ihe  distance  of  2  leagues,  and  run  directly  for  it;  leave  it  on  your  lar- 
board  hand  in  running  in  ;  when  in,  you  may  have  good  anchoring  in  4  or  5  fathoms  wa- 
ter, clayey  bottom.  In  coming  out  of  New  London,  and  bound  west,  when  you  have  left 
the  harbor,  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  N.  E.  and  steer  directly  S.  S.  W.  till  you  come  into 
15  fathoms  water,  in  order  to  clear  a  reef  thut  lies  on  your  starboard  hand,  when  (he north 
part  of  Fisher's  Island  will  bear  E.,  distant  2  leagues. 
New  London  NEW  LONDON  OR  WESTWARD— Keep  Gull  Island  light  to  bear  W,  N.  W. 
0r  wettward.  until  you  judge  yourself  within  about  two  miles  of  the  light;  your  course  then  to  New 
London  light  (after  you  pass  Race  Rock,  which  lies  W.  S.  W.  from  the  point  v  f  Fisher's 
Island,  distant  l  of  a  mile)  is  N.  J  W.  In  coming  in,  or  going  out  of  New  Lonu,  n  (wiien 
opposite  the  Gull  light)  bring  the  Gull  lijtht  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  and  New  London  licr^t  j^^ 
N.  K.,  leave  the  light  on  your  larboard  hand  in  going  into  the  harbor  ;  keep  wdII  to  the 
W.  if  it  be  winter  season,  and  wind  at  N.  E.  and  stormy — your  course  to  break  off  a  N. 
E.  gale  in  good  anchorage,  is  W.  N.  W.  from  the  Gull,  distance  5  miles,  then  haul  up,  if 
the  wind  be  N.  E.  and  steer  N.  W.  until  you  get  into  10  fathoms  of  water,  muddy  bot- 
tom ;  anchor  as  soon  as  possible — you  will  be  between  Hatchott's  Reef  and  Black  I'oint- 
this  is  the  best  place  you  can  ride  in,  if  you  have  a  N.  E.  gale,  and  thick  weather,  auj 
cannot  get  into  New  London.  Saybrook  light  wi"  then  bear  W.  by  N.  or  W.  N.  W, 
Sayhrook  S.VYBROOK  POINT  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Connecticut  River, 

Point  light,     on  the  west  c:      '  r^  the  entrance  to  that  river;  it  stands  on  a  low  sandy  point,  projecting 
into  the  sea,  hu  .  .  s  west  side  a  considerable  tract  of  salt  marsh,  containing  a  pond 

of  brackish  watec,  i  by  its  evaporation,  creates  a  mist,  at  times,  which  very  much 

impedes  the  light,  ta     yeather  at  the  same  time  clear  oil'  shore.     Height  of  the  Iigh^ 
house  from  the  sea  44  feet. 

Siiybrook  is  not  a  good  harbor  to  enter,  but  if  you  must  attempt  it,  bring  the  lighthome 
to  bear  N.  N.  W.  and  steer  for  it  until  within  one  mile,  then  steer  N.  E.  till  tho  light  bears 
N.  W.  by  W.,and  then  run  for  it  until  within  half  a  mile  distant,  from  which  a  N.  N.  W. 
course  will  carry  a  vessel  up  the  river  to  good  anchorage  near  the  town. 

When  bound  up  Sound,  and  off  Saybrook  light  in  clear  weather,  give  it  a  berth  of  three 
or  four  miles;  your  sound  course  then  is  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  50  miles  distant,  which  will 
carry  3'ou  up  with  Eaton's  Neck  light,  leaving  Stratford  Shoal  on  the  starboard  hiind. 
This  shoal,  which  has  a  white  spar  buoy  on  the  south,  and  black  spar  buoy  on  the  north, 
between  which  you  cannot  go.  bears  north  from  Satauket  (Long  Island)  and  S.  ,3"  W, 
from  Stratford  Point  light.  The  buoys  are  placed  in  10  feet  water.  In  leaving  FaJk. 
ner's  Island  light  nortli  two  miles,  steer  W.  (until  you  get  into  5  or  7  fathoms  water,) 
distance  20  miles  to  Stratford  Point  light,  hard  bottom,  which  loaves  Stratford  Shoiil,  that 
boars  S,  by  W.  from  the  light,  on  the  larboard  hand ;  then  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  to 
Matinicock  Point. 

FROM    PLUMB   GUT  TO  GREENPORT.— Vessels  bound  to  Greenport  may 

make   their  course  S.  W.  and  run  .3  miles,  which  will  carry  you  u|)  to  Ben's  Point,  on 

Long  Bench.     This  beach  is  3i  miles  long,  and  covered  with  low  cedar  trees,  which  you 

leave  on   your  starboard  hiind  going  up  to  (ireenport.     You  will  have,  from   Plunili  Gut 

to  Ben's  Point,  from  4  to  44  fathoms  water,  and  then  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  34  miles.  Iq 

running  this  course  you  will  shoal  your  water  to  3  fathoms,  and  if  you  get  any  less  water, 

haul  to  tlie  southward,  an  1  as  soon  as  you  get  3  fathoms,  keep  your  course,  and  run  until 

you,  l)y  heaving  your  loud,  from  one  heave  will  have  from  3  to  7  fathoms  water.     As  soon 

as  you  got  T'  or  8  fathoms  water,  your  course  is  W.  N.  W.  one  mile,  which  will  carry 

you  to  Hay  ilcach  Point,  on  Shelter  Island,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand  ;  haul 

close  round  Hiiy  Bench  Point,  and  your  course  is  W.  S.  W.  14  mile  to  Greenport;  then 

you  may  come  to  anchor  in  a  good  harbor. 

From  Gard-       FROM  GARDNER'S  POINT  TO  GREENPORT  the  distance  is  12  miles,  and 

ner'a  Point  to   your  course  is  W.  by  S.     Running  this  course  you  will  shoal  your  waterfrom  G  fathoms, 

Greenport.       gradually,  to  3  fathoms,  on  Long  Beach  side  ;  and  then  you  follow  the  above  directions  to 

Greenport.     Five  fathoms  of  water  can  be  carried  into  Greenport,  but  large  vessels  should 

take  a  pilot—one  is  always  to  be  had. 

Oyster  Pond       OYSTER  POND  POINT  AND  PLUMB  ISLAND —In  sailing  through  this  pas- 

Point  and        sage,  (called  Plumb  Gut,)  you  leave  the  light  on  your  larboard  hand,  running  boluly  for 

Plumb  the  cliifon  which  it  stands,  then  steering  S.  E.  by  E.  till  the  Gull  light  bears  N.  E.  by 

Island.  E.,  when  you  may  shajie  your  course  for  Point  Judith,  or  wherever  you  may  wish. 

When  passing  the  liglit,  you  will  open  (Gardner's  Bay,  which  is  the  passage  to  Sag 
Harbor,  and  also  leave  Oyster  Pond  Point  on  your  starboard  hand,  ofT  the  eastern  part  of 
which  a  shoal  oxteiids  one-third  over  toward  the  aouth  end  of  Plumb  Island. 


From  Plumb 
Gut  to 
Greenport. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


■■I 


207 


The  bearings  of  the  lighthouse  have  been  takenfrom  the  following  places  : — From  Oyster    Btarings. 
Pond  Poiut  and  the  reef,  N.  E.  by  E.,  dtstnnt  tVoiii  the  outer  pnrt  of  the  reef  1|  mile; 
from  Siiybrook  light  S.  £.  j   S.,  diataat  8|  milea ;  from  Pine  Point  (the  S.  W.  purt  of     /' 
Plumb  Island)  N.  W.  by   N.,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  from  Cherry  Harbor 
Point  (the  S.  W  part  of  Gardner's  Island)  N.  30°  W.,  distant  6  miles  ;  from  Gardner's    '  "" 

point  N.  W.  I  W.,  distant  3 i  miles;  from' New  London  light  S.  W.  i  S.,  distant  10 
miles ;  from  Cedar  Island  (at  the  entrance  of  Sag  Harbor)  N.  N.  £.  i  E.  distant  8 
miles. 

On  Cedar  Island  is  a  fixed  light;  it  is  elevated  33  feet  above  high  water,  and  as  it  may   Lighthouse. 
be  seen  from  a  high  decked  vessel,  over  the  sandy  point  of  Gardner's  Island,  veaselsshould 
oot  run  fur  it  when  passing  that  point,  until  it  bears  S.  of  S.  W. 

The  bearings  and  distances,  by  compass,  of  this  light  from  the  following  places,  are, 
P.am  Head  S.  i  E.,  distant  2\  miles;  Plumb  Island  lighthouse,  S.  S.  W.  i  W..  8i  miles; 
Gull  Island  lighthouse,  S.  W.  |  S.,  l'2i  miles;  sandy  poiut  of  Gardner's  Island,  S.  W.  i 
W.,  8  miles. 

NEW  HAVEN  LIGHTHOUSE  is  situated  on  Five  Mile  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  iVew  Haven 
the  harbor,  and  lies  on  the  starboaril  hand.    The  lantern  is  elevated  33  feet  above  the  sea,    Lighthoiue. 
aud  contains  a  fixed  light.     From  New  Haven  light  the  following  bearings  and  distances 
Bre  taken,  viz :— Stratford  Point  light,  S.  63°  W.,  104  miles;   Middle  Ground  S,  42°  W., 
14  miles;  buoy  on  Adam's  Falls.  S.  60°  W.:  buoy  on  S.  W.  Ledge  S.  30°  W.;  beacon 
on  Quick's  Ledge  S.  1°  E.;  Falkner's  Island  light  S.  74°  E.,  12  miles. 

If  bound  into  New  Haven,  give  Falkner's  Island  a  berth  of  one  mile,  and  steer  W.  by 
N.,  until  New  Haven  light  is  north  of  you,  in  6i  fathoms  water,  when  you  may  steer  N. 
\V.,  giving  the  light  a  berth  of  li  mile,  to  avoid  the  S.  W.  Ledge,  on  which  there  is  a 
black  buoy,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  S.  W.  by  S.  4  S.,  distant  1  mile,  which  you  leave 
OQ  your  starboard  hand,  and  when  the  light  bears  N.  E.  you  may  steer  up  N.  E.  by  N. 
for  the  Fort,  to  the  north  of  r.he  Pullisades,  leaving  the  white  buoy  on  Adams'  Fulls  on 
your  starboard  hand.  When  you  are  nearly  abreast  of  the  Fort  give  it  a  berth  of  one- 
fourth  of  a  mile,  and  steer  up  N.  |  W.  for  the  end  of  the  Long  Wharf,  leaving  HIack 
Ledi^e,  which  is  one-fourth  of  a  mile  N.  W.  of  the  Fort,  on  your  starboard  hand. 

The  buoy  on  Adams'  Falls  bears  from  the  light  S.  W.  half  a  mile,  and  from  the  S.W. 
Ledge  N.  by  E.,  half  a  mile. 

There  is  a  spindle  on  Quick's  Rock,  which  bears  from  the  light  S.  |  E.,  distant  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile.  The  buoy  on  Adams'  Falls  bears  from  the  spindle  N.  W.,  distant 
half  a  mile.  The  buoy  on  S.  W.  Ledge  bears  from  the  spindle  W.  S.  W.,  distant  half 
a  mile. 

Vessels  bound  in  from  the  eastward,  may  pass  between  the  buoy  on  the  South-west 
Ledge  and  the  spindle,  as  there  are  3  fathoms  water  in  this  channel,  keeping  about  mid- 
way between  them,  and  leaving  the  white  buoy  on  Adams'  Falls  iiO  rods  to  the  eastward 
of  them,  aud  then  steer  for  the  end  of  the  wharf.  Ou  this  shore,  in  channel-way  you  will 
have  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom.   Bringing  the  light  to  bear  S.  E.  you  may  , 

BQchor  in  Morris'  Cove,  near  the  east  shore,  in  two  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom.  Your 
course  from  this  up  the  harbor  with  a  fair  wind,  is  north.  Give  the  Fort  Rock,  in  run- 
ning for  the  pier,  a  small  berth. 

Vessels  bound  in  from  the  westward  will  leave  both  buoys  on  the  starboard  hand,  and 
they  may  pass  with  safety  within  20  rods  of  either  of  them.  If  beating  in,  your  sounduigs 
will  be  from  2  to  3  and  4  fathoms.  Stand  in  no  further  than  2  fathoms  upon  the  west 
shore,  on  which  you  will  have  hard  bottom.  In  beating  up,  after  getting  in  muddy  bot- 
tom, (which  is  channel  soundings,)  it  is  best  to  keep  the  lead  agoing  often,  on  account  of 
bordering  on  the  west  shore,  where  you  will  have  hard  bottom,  and  soon  aground.  High 
water  llh.  16m.,  rise  6  feet  6  inches. 

BRIDGEI^ORT. — Vessels  bound  into  Bridgeport  must  leave  the  outer  buoy  on  the    Bridgeport. 
larboard  hand,  and  steer  direct  for  the  beacon  on  Wells'  Point,  which  bears  N.  E.  from 
the  outer  beacon  that  is  on  the  west  flat,  about  350  yards  distant,  leaving  the  buoy  on 
Stony  Bar  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  Allen's  Flats  on  the  larboard. 

In  the  Harbor  of  Bridgeport  are  three  buoys,  placed  as  follows,  viz:  One  on  Marchand 
Flats,  which  lies  a  mile  S.  i  W.  from  the  outer  beacon;  one  on  Stony  Bar,  bearing  S. 
E.  from  the  beacon,  150  yards  distant;  one  on  Allen's  Flats,  being  inside  the  harbor. 
High  water  llh.  11m.,  rise  8  feet  8  inches. 

FAIR  WEATHER  ISLAND,  OFF  BLACK  ROCK  HARBOR.— The  harbor  of  Fairweather 
Black  Rock,  although  safe  and  easy  of  access,  is  so  situated,  that  no  direct  course  can  Island. 
be  given  to  steer  for  the  light,  that  will  carry  you  direct  into  the  harbor,  as  that  depends 
wholly  on  the  distance  you  are  from  the  light  nt  the  time  you  make  for  it;  therefore, 
judgment  is  to  be  used  in  varying  the  bearing  of  the  light  as  you  draw  near  in,  which  is 
easily  done  by  observing  the  following  rules: — In  coming  from  the  westward,  if  you  mean 
to  harbor,  to  avoid  the  reef  called  the  Cows,  you  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  and 
run  directly  for  it,  until  within  three-quarters  or  half  a  mile  distant,  when,  if  occasion 
Itquires,  you  may  stretch  in  to  the  westward*  in  a  fine  beating  channel,  having  from  5  to 


^r^m 


i'ip"f  « 


•' iiju/mwt.i  inK,  tiijiini 


208 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


3  fathoms  water,  uadgood  ground.  As  you  approach  the  light  which  stands  on  the  east 
side  of  the  harbor,  the  water  gradually  shoals  to  about  two  fathoms.  The  mouth  of  the 
harbor,  nithuugh  not  very  wide,  is  not  difficult;  the  light  bearing  east  brings  yon  com- 
pletely into  the  harbor.  The  island  on  which  the  lighthouse  stands,  and  the  reef  called 
the  Cows,  oil  the  south  and  west  sides,  form  the  harbor  of  Black  {lock.  On  the  eastern* 
most  rock  ut  this  reef  stands  a  spindle,  distant  from  the  light  half  a  league,  and  from 
which  the  light  bears  north.  The  light  stands  44  rods  from  the  south  point  of  said  isU 
and  at  low  water.  From  this  point  puts  off  a  single  rock,  30  rods  distant,  on  which  are  8 
feet  at  high  water,  making  in  all  about  74  rods  distance.  The  light  bears  from  this  rock 
X.  by  E.  i  E.  As  soon  as  you  pass  this  point  or  rock,  the  harbor  is  fairly  opened  to  the 
northward,  in  any  point  from  N.  to  W.  N.  W.  You  can  run  for  the  light  with  safety 
observing,  as  you  draw  nearly  in,  the  above  directions,  and  due  attention  to  the  lead! 
The  bottom,  for  some  distance  from  this  rock,  southerly,  is  hard,  but  you  may  continue 
your  course,  and  it  will  soon  deepen.  It  is  safe  and  good  anchorage  to  the  eastward  of 
the  light  for  all  winds  from  W.  S.  W.  to  N.  N.  E.,  quite  down  to  the  mouth  of  Bridge- 
port Harbor,  which  is  distant  about  two  miles.  The  shore  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
light  is  bold  to,  in  3  fathoms,  close  aboard  the  light,  and  so  continues  until  you  are  quite 
down  to  the  south  point  of  the  island.  This  bay,  to  the  leeward  of  the  light,  between  that 
and  Bridgeport,  is  one  of  the  best  bays  for  anchorage  on  the  north  shore  in  Long  Islnnd 
Sound,  and  affords  from  4  to  3  fathoms  water,  the  light  bearing  west.  In  coming  from 
the  eastward,  crossing  Stratford  Point  light  close  aboard,  your  course  to  Black  Rock 
light  is  W.  by  N.,  and  yuu  keep  sounding  on  the  starboi^rd  hand,  not  less  than  4  fitth- 
oms,  nor  more  than  8  fathoms,  toihe  north  of  Bridgeport  Harbor,  which  is  distant  about 
two  miles.  The  shore  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  light  is  bold  to,  in  3  fathoms  close 
aboard  the  light,  and  so  continues  until  you  are  quite  down  to  the  south  point  of  the 
island. 

Between  Fainveather  Island  and  the  entrance  of  Bridgeport  Harbor  there  is  good  an- 
chorage, in  from  2i  to  4  fathoms,  sticky  bottom,  with  the  wind  from  E.  N.  E.  to  S.  W,, 
by  way  of  North;  bring  the  woods  on  the  west  of  the  harbor  to  bear  N.  E.,  and  anchor 
in  such  depth  nf  water  as  you  wish. 

Longlsland.  *  LONG  ISLAND. — Long  Island,  from  Montock  Point  to  Red  Hook,  extends  W. 
by  S.  about  102  miles,  and  is  at  the  broadest  part  about  25  miles  across.  The  land  is 
generally  pretty  low  and  level,  excepting  a  few  hills,  which  lie  about  forty  miles  to  the 
westward  of  Montock  Point,  and  Hempstead  Ilill,  which  is  319  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea.  Along  the  south  side  of  the  island  a  flat  extends  about  half  a  mile  from  the 
shore.  The  east  end  of  the  flat  is  sand;  the  middle  and  west  parts  are  sand  and  stones. 
Yc  jr  course,  Montock  Point  light  bearing  north,  7  miles  distant,  along  Long  Island  shore, 
is  \V.  S.  W.,  22  leagues,  and  W.,  12  leagues.  About  4  leagues  distant  from  the  island 
there  are  from  15  to  18  fathoms  water,  and  from  that  distance  to  20  leagues,  the  water 
deepens  to  80  fathoms;  in  the  latter  depth  you  will  have  oo/.y  ground,  and  sand  with  blue 
specks  on  it.  About  four  leagues  off  the  east  end  of  the  island,  you  will  have  coarse 
eand  and  small  stones;  and  at  the  same  distance  from  the  middle  and  west  end,  there  is 
small  white  sand  and  <^ravol,  with  black  specks.  From  the  S.  W.  end,  off  Coney  Island 
Point,  a  shoal  extends  about  G  miles  towards  Sandy  Hook,  which  forms  the  east  liiink. 

Th  M'e  are  a  few  inlets  on  the  south  side  of  the  island.  The  first  one  of  any  importance 
is  Fire  Island,  on  which  bar  there  are  7  feet  at  low  water.  It  is  a  dangerous  bar,  and 
only  to  bo  attempted  by  the  aid  of  a  pilot,  who  can  be  found  on  board  of  the  coasters 
plying  from  the  place.  The  reujaining  inlets  are  shallow,  with  the  exception  of  Rock- 
awav,  to  which  bur  the  remarks  on  Fire  Island  above  will  apply. 

Block  Island       BLOCK  ISL\N  i)  TO  .sEW  YORK.— Bound  into  New  York,  if  you  fall  into  Block 

to  yew  York.  Island  Channel,  you  wiil  —ive  soundings  in  lut.  40"  N.,  100  fathoms,  mud  and  ooze, 
which  quality  of  soundings  co.itinue  decreasin<;  gradually  till  you  get  into  40  fathoms. 
In  38  fathoms,  Block  Island  bearing  N.  by  W.,  4i  leagues  distant,  you  will  have  fine 
red  and  bliick  sand:  two  and  ont;-half  leagues  distant,  same  bearing,  you  Wdl  have  38 
fathoms,  coarse  sand.  When  Block  Island  l)ears  N.,  distant  4  or  5  leagues,  you  cannot 
see  any  land  to  the  northward  or  eastward;  but  as  you  approach  the  island,  you  see 
Montock  Point  to  the  westward,  making  a  long  low  point  to  the  eastward,  on  which  is  a 

Lighthouse-  lighthouse.  In  sailing  W.  S.  W.,  you  will  make  no  remarkable  land  on  Long  Island. 
From  the  eastward  of  said  island  to  the  westward,  its  broken  land  appearing  at  a  distance 
like  islands;  but  may  discover  Fire  Island  lighthouse,  which  shows  a  revolving  liglit, 
containing  18  lamps,  elevated  8!)  feet  3  inches  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  70  feet  10 
inches  from  the  base,  bearing  N.  77°  35'  K.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  12  leagues  distant. 
From  Fire  Island  light,  a  shoal  extends  south  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  and  joins  the  bar. 


*  I.onp  [sland  Sound  is  a  kind  of  iidand  sea,  commencing?  at  Sands'  Point,  where  is  ali<;hthi)a«e, 
and  extendiiij;  to  fiull  Islnnd  lif^ht.  It  is  from  3  lo  17  miliis  broad,  and  iilFoiiU  a  safe  aiidcnnv* 
uieut  iiilmid  iiavit;iitiuii,  liiiviu^^ood  anchoring  places,  and  several  iiue  lighthouses  to  gii'iAc  the 
mariuer  throughout  its  whole  length. 


wmm. 


mmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


209 


which  is  very  dnngerous,  as  it  shoals  suddenly  from  8  to  6  futhoms,  then  directly  on  the 
ihonl,  on  which  the  flood  tide  sets  very  strong.  It  is  not  sufr  to  approiich  the  shore 
jeni'i'i"  than  two  miles  when  the  light  beurs  to  the  K.  of  N.  To  theeiistwisrd  of  the  light 
the  shore  is  bold  ;  the  \mv  is  subject  to  change,  and  has  7  feet  water  on  it.  When  Kire 
Island  light  bears  N  ,  in  10  fathoms  water,  you  may  steer  W.  by  S.,  which  will  carry 
rnu  up  with  Sandy  Hook  light.  The  quality  of  the  bottom  is  various,  viz.;  yellow,  red, 
brown,  blue,  and  grey  sand,  within  short  distances.  About  south  from  Fire  Inland,  33 
iiiiles  distant,  and  40  miles  S.  E.  by  E.  from  the  Highlands,  lies  a  bank,  extending  from 
\;,  K.  by  E.  to  S.  W.  by  W.,  having  on  it  from  10  to  14  fathoms,  pebbles.  On  the  bank 
is  plenty  of  fish.  Within  this,  a  short  distance,  you  will  get  20  fathoms,  when  it  shoals 
into  10  fathoms,  grey  sand,  which  depth  you  will  carry  till  you  get  into  what  is  called  the 
Jluil  Hole,  where  are  from  20  to  3(5  fathoms  water,  marl  or  green  ooze,  and  sometimes 
pebi)les,  the  deepest  part  of  which  bears  east  from  the  nortliernmost  part  of  tho  wood- 
IjihI,  10  n)iles;  and  S.  E.  i  S.,  15  miles  from  Sandy  Hook  light.  From  tho  Mud  Hole 
to  the  bar  of  Sandy  Hook  the  water  shoals  gradually,  us  laid  down  on  the  chart. 

You  will  have  20  or  22  fathoms  water  out  of  sight  of  the  land,  sandy  bottom  in  some, 
and  clay  in  other  places.  Before  you  come  in  sight  of  Sandy  Hook  lighthouse,  you  see 
the  Hiiihiandsof  Neversink,  which  lie  W.  S.  W.  from  Sandy  Hook,  and  is  tho  most  re- 
maikable  land  cm  that  s-hore.     On  the  Highlands  two  lighthouses  are  erected. 

NKW  YOIIK. — If  you  fall  in  to  the  southward,  and  make  Cape  May,  on  which  is  a  New  York 
hchtbiinse  exhibiting  r.  revolving  light,  it  would  be  prudentto  keep  about  thre,^  leagues  off, 
toiivoid  Herreford  Bar,  which  lies  from  four  to  six  leagues  from  the  cape  to  the  noith- 
waril,  and  8  miles  from  the  inlet  of  that  name.  This  iidet  is  frequented  by  the  Uelii- 
ffiiie  pilots,  having  no  other  harbor  to  the  northward  until  they  reach  Egg  Harbor. 
Alter  passing  Herreford  Bar,  you  may  steer  N.  E.  when  in  10  fathoms  water,  taking 
care  that  the  flood  tide,  which  sets  very  strong  into  the  inlet,  does  not  draw  you  too 
closo;  this  course  continued  will  carry  you  up  with  Egg  Harbor;  you  will  then  have 
ino  white  r.nil  blacl:  sand,  intermixed  with  sniill  bniken  shells;  by  continuing  the  same 
course,  you  will  deepei.  your  water,  n:id  so  continue  till  you  draw  near  Barnogat  Inlet. 
[liiruiniing  along  the  shore,  do  not  steer  to  the  northward  of  N.  r>.,  if  in  10  fathoms 
wnter  or  le«s  as  you  will  be  apt  to  get  on  Absecorn  Shoals,  or  Egg  Harbor  Bar.]  On 
the  south  side  of  Barnegat  Inlet,  a  lighthouHe,  containing  n  fixed  light,  is  erected,  oft"  Light. 
which  you  will  get  bright  coarse  yellow  gravel.  The  shoal  olf  Barnegat  does  not  extend 
bi'vonti  two  miles  fron>  the  beach,  and  is  stoop  to ;  you  may  turn  this  shoul  in  six  fath- 
oms wuter,  within  pistol  shot  of  the  outer  breaker.  It  would  always  be  jjrudentto  keep 
in  0  or  10  fathoms  water  during  the  night,  and  not  steer  to  tho  north  of  north-east,  unless 
certiiin  of  being  to  the  north  of  the  shoal.  The  soundings  are  so  much  to  be  depended 
on,  thiit  the  moment  you  lose  the  above  soundings  you  are  past  tho  ahoal,  when  you  will 
iiHVo  line  black  and  white  sand,  and  very  hard  hotiom;  you  may  then  haul  in  for  tho 
kill]  N.  by  E..  which  coui-se  will  bring  you  along  tliore  in  from  15  to  17  fathoms  wiitrr, 
but  if  the  wind  and  weather  permit,  I  would  recommend  hauling  in  N.  N.  W.,  which 
will  bring  you  in  with  the  southernmost  part  of  tho  Woodlamls,  which  is  very  remarka- 
ble, having  no  other  such  land  in  the  distance  from  Cape  .May  up  to  the  Highlands,  and 
can  be  distinguished  by  its  being  very  near  the  beacli,  and  extending  to  Long  J^ranch. 

In  passing  from  Barnegat  to  Sandy  Hook,  when  to  the  soutliwaril  of  the  lights  on  the 
Higlibiiids,  you  must  not  open  tho  northern  light  (which  is  a  fixed  light)  to  the  westward 
of  the  soutlieru  light,  (which  shows  a  revolving  light)  as  that  will  bring  you  too  near  the 
Jersey  shv  .e. 


'■'  a 


The  south  part  of  the  WOODLANDS. 

By  passing  Barnegat  in  the  day  time,  it  may  easily  be  known ;  should  you  bo  so  far 
oft'  as  not  to  see  the  breakers,  you  may  perhaps  see  n  grove  of  woods  back  in  the  country, 
,i|ipar('ntly  3  or  4  miles  long,  known  to  the  coasters  by  the  mime  of  Little  Swamp,  and 
lies  (lircctly  in  the  rear  of  the  inlet  of  Barnegat,  so  that,  by  sailing  to  the  northward, 
your  having  the  north  end  of  this  land  directly  abreast,  you  are  certaiidy  to  the  northward 
of  Barnegat;  there  is  also  another  grove  directly  in  the  rear  of  Egg  Harbor,  known  by 
the  name  of  the  (treat  Swamp,  which  has  tho  same  references  as  respects  Egg  Harbor ; 
but  that  the  otie  may  not  bo  taken  for  the  other,  it  must  be  observed,  the  Great  Swamp 
of  Kgg  Harbor  will  appear  much  higher,  and  in  length  8  or  10  miles  ;  neither  can  they 
be  seen  at  the  same  lime,  as  Barnegat  and  Egg  Harbor  are  15  miles  npar".  Barnegat 
bears  due  S.by  W.,  41  miles  from  Sandy  Hook.  Iti  hauhng  in  for  the  Woodlands  before 
mentioned,  you  may,  if  the  wind  is  ofl'  the  shore,  keep  within  a  cable's  'ength  of  it  all 
the  way,  until  nearly  up  with  the  highlands. 


SIO 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


As  a  number  of  vessels  hnve  been  lost,  bound  into  New  York,  from  heaving  to  with 
their  head  on  shore,  we  cnnnot  too  strongly  urge  on  the  ship-master  the  necessity,  j/ftg 
is  in  doubt  of  his  position,  of  heaving  to  with  the  head  off  shore. 

The  bottom  on  the  New  Jersey  shore  is  of  uncertain  depth,  not  at  nil  dependent  on 
the  distance,  there  being  ridges  parallel  to  the  shore,  with  7  and  8  fathoms,  and  9  and  10 
fathoms  inside. 


HIGHLANDS,  N.  63°  W. 

Light-ship.  LIGHT-SHIP. — A  light-ship,  of  about  ;i60  tons  burthen,  and  showing  two  lights,  \a 

anchored  off  Sandy  Hook,  near  the  place  of  the  old  light-ship  in  1827.     The  tuiwurd 

light  is  30  feet  above  the  deck,  and  the  after  one  40  feet.     Hho  is  also  provided  with  a  boll 

J,  of  800  pounds  weight,  which  will  be  rung  in  thick  weather.     She  is  placed  in  13  ruihoius 

woter.     Sandy  Hook  lighthouse  bears  from  the  light-ship  W.  by  N.,  distant  CJ  miles 

Highland  lighthouse,  \V.  S.  W.,  distant  7  miles. 

Highlands  HIGHLANDS   OF    NEVERSINK— Noversink  Hills,  on  which  two  lighthouses 

o/Neversink.   are  built,  extend  N.  W.  and  S.  E.,  about  S.  W.  from  Sandy  Hook,  on  the  Atluntic 

Ocean,  to  lluritan  Buy.     The  correct  altitudes  of  the  following  places,  which  preaent 

themselves  to  mariners  as  they  approach  tliem,  are — 

Mount  Mitchell,  the  highest  point  of  Neversink,  Monmouth  co.,  (N.  J.)  382  feet. 

Tompkins'  Hill,  on  Stuten  Island, 307  do. 

Hempstead  Hill,  Queen's  county,  Long  Island, 31'J  do. 

HIGHLAND  LIGHTS. — On  the  Highlands  of  Neversink  there  are  two  lighthouses 
bearing  N.  ti3°  W.  and  S.  23°  E.  from  each  other,  distant  100  yards.  The  southen 
light  is  a  revolving  one,  on  the  Fresnol  plan,  and  is  without  doubt  the  best  light  on  the 
coast  of  the  United  States.  It  is  248  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  The  northern 
light  is  a  fixed  light,  240'  feet  7  inches  above  the  sea. 

SAND^  HOUK  LIGHT  is  on  the  northern  point  of  Sandy  Hook,  and  is  a  fixed 
light,  90  foot  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

Two  beacnns  are  erected  on  the  Hook ;  the  easternmost  one  ranges  for  the  buoy  of  the 
Upper  Middle,  and  the  westernmost  one  ranges  for  the  buoy  of  the  S.  VV.  spit;  they  are 
both  lit  at  night. 

LEDGE  OFF  SANDY  HOOK — On  this  reef  there  are  but  9  feet  water.  The 
northern  light  on  the  Highlands,  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  southern  one,  lends 
right  on  the  reef. 

This  Ledge  is  S.  i  E.  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  7  miles  distant,  and  about  one  and  a 
quarter  mile  from  the  shore,  and  on  which  the  ship  William  Thompson  struck. 

OIL  SPOT. — E.  S.  E.  1 J  mile  from  Sandy  Hook  light,  is  the  Oil  Spot,  huving  only 
10  feet  water  in  one  spot,  at  low  water;  it  is  of  a  triangular  shape,  and  about  hulf  ii  tndo 
on  each  side  in  extent ;     ^<    \long-shore  Channel  is  inside  of  it. 

FALSE  HOOK. — C.  d  a  quarter  milu  E.,  a  little  northerly,  from  Sandy  Hook 
light,  there  is  a  small  shoiil  spot,  with  only  12  feet  water  upon  it  at  low  water ;  it  is  the 
remains  of  the  old  False  Hook. 

NEW  YORK  HARBOR. — There  are  three  channels  over  New  York  Bar;  the  first 
is  that  along  and  parallel  to  the  Jersey  shore,  inside  of  the  Outer  Middle  ;  the  second  is 
the  main  ship  channel  between  the  buoys  of  the  bar  ;  the  third  is  a  slue  of  deep  waterto 
the  northward  of  the  black  buoy  of  the  bur,  over  which  you  can  carry  24  feet  at  low  water; 
this  chttimel  runs  in  nearly  W.  by  S.;  it  was  first  discovered  by  Lieut.  Gedney,  of  tho 
U.  S.  Coast  .Survey,  ond  is  used  by  our  largest  class  ships  of  war. 

ALONG-SHORE  CHANNEL.— It  bound  into  Now  York  from  the  southward,  and 
close  in  with  the  Jersey  shore,  and  you  do  not  draw  over  10  feet  water,  you  may  continue 
on  until  you  get  Sandy  Hook  light  to  bear  W.,  or  W.  by  N.,  when  you  may  steer  N.  by 
E.  to  avoid  the  point  of  tho  False  Hook,  until  you  get  deep  water,  say  7  fathoms,  Sandy 
Hook  light  bearing  S.  W.,  then  steer  W.  N.  W.  until  the  light  hoars  S.  by  E.,  tlioii  with 
the  flood  tide,  steer  N.,  or  with  an  ebb  steer  N.  N.  W.,  (the  true  course  is  N.  by  \V.) 
which  will  carry  you  over  the  East  Bank,  and  up  to  the  black  buoy  of  the  Middle. 

In  going  over  the  East  Bank,  be  careful  you  do  not  get  set  by  the  ebb  tide  on  Romer; 
the  mark  to  keep  clear  of  Romer  is,  to  keep  Sandy  Hook  light  open  with  tho  east  end  uf 
the  Highlands. 
Beacon  on  BEACON  ON  RO.MER. — A  granite  beacon,  25  feet  high,  has  been  placed  on  the 

Romer.  north-western  point  of  Romer,  9  feet  above  water. 


Highland 
lights. 


Sandy  Hook 
light. 


Ledge  off 
Sandy  Hook. 


Oil  Spot. 
False  Hook. 


New  York 
Harbor. 


Along  Shore 
Channel. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


211 


It  bears  from  the  light  on  Sandy  Hook  N.  10°  W.;  from  the  light  at  the  narrowa,  S. 
15°  K. 

This  beacon  was  intended  to  mark  out  the  Swash  Channel.  It  is  on  the  wrong  end  of 
t),e  shunl. 

Vessels  bound  in  will  infallibly  get  on  shore  if  they  run  for  it. 

There  is  another  passage  over  the  east  bank  between  Romer  and  Long  Island.  This 
passage  has  been  buoyed  o(f,  and  the  following  are  the  directions : 

The  buoys  to  mark  out  this  channel  to  the  northward  and  eastward  of  Romer,  are  ten 
jQ  number,  and  with  the  following  distinguishing  marks.  Those  on  the  larboard  hand 
coiiiii)!;  in,  are  black  and  white,  in  horizontal  stripes ;  those  on  the  storboard  hand,  red 
jud  black. 


The  first  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand  coming  in,  is  in  25  feet  water. 

"     second  buoy  "        "            «'        "         *•     •'      19  " 

«<     third       "  "        "            "        "        "    "     24  " 

"    fourth     "  "        "            "        "        "     "     24  " 

it     fifth        "  "        *'            "        "         "     **     24  " 

The  tirst  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand  coming  in,  is  in  19  " 

"     second  buoy  "        "            "        "        "     »•      19  •• 

ti    third        *'  *'        "            "        "        "     '*     24  " 

"    fourth     "  '•        "            "        "        "     «•     24  " 

ii     fifth         "  "        "            "        "        "     "     24  " 


tt 

41 

ii 
ii 


The  above  named  buoys  are  placed  in  the  shoalest  water  in  the  channel,  and  on  the 
edirfl  of  the  banks  which  form  the  channel ;  and  in  no  one  case  must  a  vessel  stretch  be- 
yond the  buoys  on  either  side. 

There  is  a  true  tide  setting  through  the  channel,  the  time  of  high  water  the  same  aa  at 
the  Hook,  viz.  full  and  change  7h.  29m. 

The  course  in  after  entering  the  channel,  is  W.  N.  W.  by  compass,  until  the  Hook 
and  Highland  lights  are  in  range.  Keep  these  in  range,  and  run  up  for  the  Narrowa, 
which  will  carry  you  clear  of  every  thing. 

To  the  northward  of  the  black  buoy  of  the  Bar,  the  following  spar  buoys  have  been 
placed.  Those  on  the  larboard  hand  coming  in  are  black,  with  white  tops ;  and  those  on 
the  starboard  hand  white,  with  black  tops. 

The  1st  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand  is  in  31  feet  water, 
it     2d     "         "  "  "         "  24     "         " 


1st    » 

ii 

starboard 

•i 

"  30 

2d     '• 

it 

.« 

ti 

"  24 

The  flood  tide  sets,  first  half,  N.  W.,  last  half,  S.  W.    All  the  above  depths  are  at  low 
water. 

The  spar  buoys  at  the  entrance  will  be  changed  in  the  spring,  and  can  buoys,  with  the 
same  intuks  will  be  put  down. 

SANDV  HOOK  CHANNEL-WAY.— In  running  into  New  York,  if  intending  to  Sandy  Hook 
go  ship-channel-wny,  give  the  Jersey  shore  a  berlh  of  3  miles,  until  the  light  on  Sandy  Channel-way. 
Hook  hears  W.,  which  will  bring  you  midway  between  the  buoys  of  the  bar;  then  steer 
in  for  the  point  of  the  Hook,  keeping  the  lighthouse  well  open  on  the  larboard  bow, 
(taking  care,  if  it  is  flood,  not  to  be  set  too  far  to  the  northward,  and  if  ebb,  to  the  aouth- 
wiird,)  when  abreast  of  the  Hook,  so  that  the  lighthouse  and  east  beacon  range;  keep 
within  half  a  mile  of  the  shore,  to  avoid  Flynn's  Knoll,  which  has  on  it  only  7  feet  water, 
and  lies  N.  by  W.  Ij  mile  from  the  light,  and  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  from  the  point  of 
the  Huok.  After  you  have  passed  the  beacon,  if  you  mean  to  anchor,  you  may  haul 
into  the  bay,  S.  W.,  giving  the  Hook  a  berth  of  a  mile,  until  you  bring  the  lighthouse  to 
bear  K.  by  N.,  or  E.  N.  E.,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms  water,  soft 
muddy  bottom.  But  should  you  wish  to  proceed  to  New  York,  when  you  have  come  in 
as  before  directed,  and  got  abreast  of  the  beacon,  or  the  point  of  Sandy  Hook,  steer  up 
W.  by  N.  until  you  get  the  lighthouse  on  Sandy  Hook  to  bear  S.  E.,  when  the  light 
and  west  beacon  will  bo  in  range ;  keep  them  in  range,  and  run  directly  for  the  black 
buoy  of  the  S.  W.  Spit,  which  you  leave  on  the  starboard  hand,  giving  it  a  berth  of  200 
yards. 

After  you  have  passed  the  buoy  of  the  S.  W.  Spit,  steer  N.  by  E.  i  E.  for  the  black 
buoy  of  the  Upper  Middle,  which  is  2|  miles  distant  from  the  S.  W.  Spit  buoy  :  on  this 
course  you  will  leave  the  white  buoy  of  the  Knoll  on  your  larboard  hand  ;  after  you  get 
up  with  the  black  buoy  of  the  Uppor  Middle,  steer  N.  by  E.  until  you  pass  the  white 
buoy  of  the  West  Bank,  when  you  open  two  hummocks  in  New  Jersey  ;  the  western- 
niostoDe  is  called  Snake  Hill;  keep  this  hummock  open  with  the  bluff  of  Staten  Isl..  .}, 
and  steer  N.  by  W.,  which  course  will  carry  you  through  the  Narrowa.    Between  the  can 


■wr 


21S 


Lighthouse. 


High  water. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

buoy  of  the  West  Bniik  ntid  the  bluff  ofStiiton  laliind,  are  4  white  spnr  buoys.*  which 
leave  on  your  sfiirbourd  hand.     When  thus  far,  you  must,  to  puss   Kort  Diainutid.  k^-e 
Staten  Island  shoio  aboard.     The  mark  to  pass  Fort  Diamond  is  to  keep  bfdlow'H  |,s| 
and  open  with  the  point  of  Long  Island ;  for  if  you  can  son  Bedlow's  Inland  in  c 


you 
p 


through  the  Narrows,  there  is  no  danger  from   the  nairows  to 


I'diiiiiig 


mt 
on 


come  up  to  Now  Vmk  • 
you  will  steer  up  for  Bedlow's  Island  to  avoid  the  Mud  Flai,  on  which  four  blai  k  buoys  rt,e 
placed,  which  you  leavti  on  your  starboard  hand  This  Flat  is  a  kind  of  oyster  bci  „, 
bank  of  mud  and  shells,  and  has  not  more  than  11  feet  on  it  at  low  water;  U 
to  avoid  this  flat  do  nut  stand  too  far  to  the  westward,  on  account  of  I<ol)bin's  Kf<|,  1,1 
which  there  is  a  lighthouse,  between  which  and  Bedlow's  Island  are  throi!  whitu  Jo'. 
buoys,  which,  to  avoid  running  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel,  the  mark  is  to  Keep  the 
puinj  of  laoil  up  the  North  Uiver  (on  which  Fort  Leo  stands)  open  with  the  oust  si  |(  „f 
Bedlow's  Island,  after  which  there  is  nothing  material  to  obstruct  the  navigation  to  N,.w 
York,  it  being  very  steep  near  the  point  of  Oovernor's  Island,  and  tho  roiks  nt^iir  dm 
Battery  do  not  extend  100  yards  from  the  shore.  There  are  three  reefs  of  rocks  in  fim 
East  liiver,  viz  :  one  off  the  north  side  of  Governor's  Island,  with  15  foot  wafer  on  if 
one  off  the  Battery,  having  9  feet  over  it,  and  one  off  Corlaer's  Hook,  whicli  is  veiy 
dangerous;  they  may  generally  be  distinguished  at  all  times  by  the  rip  of  tide  going  over 
them,  both  flood  and  ebb. 

These  directions  are  for  slack  water;  those  following  them  should  remember  tlmttlie 
flood  tide  below  the  Narrows  sets  to  the  westward,  and  the  ebb  to  the  eastward. 

Between  the  buoy  of  the  West  Bank  and  Statea  Island  there  is  a  shoal,  dry  ut  \^^ 
water ;  the  mark  to  avoid  this,  is  to  keep  Snake  Hill  open  with  the  bluff  of  SiutHQ 
Island. 

Other  Directions, — Or  you  may,  after  making  the  Highlands  of  Neversink,  vnu  \n  bolj. 
ly  within  three  miles  of  the  beach,  and  in  steering  along  to  the  nttrthward,  obsfrmto 
keep  in  about  8  fathoms  water,  until  you  get  the  lighthouse  to  bear  W.  i  N.,  then  if  you 
have  a  round  hill,  called  Mount  Pleasant,  some  distance  in  Jersey,  in  one  view  witii  uie 
land  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  lighthouse,  you  are  in  a  Kituution 
to  pass  the  bar ;  steer  in  AV .  by  N.  until  you  are  over  it ;  v  >  will  have  on  it  at  low  wiii>)r 
3  fathoms  ;  when  over,  you  will  be  in  4^  fathoms.  Pass  the  Hook  and  lighthouse  about 
half  a  mile,  at  which  distance  you  will  have  5  and  6  fathoms.  When  you  have  tlio  point 
of  the  Hook  on  which  the  beacon  stands  bearing  S.  S.  E.  you  may  then  haul  to  tint  south- 
ward, and  round  the  Hook  and  come  to,  from  one  to  two  miles  distant,  the  Hook  bciiiing 
from  E.  to  N.  E.,  in  good  holding  ground,  5  fathoms  water.  Whon  you  make  Lonu  Isl- 
and,  it  is  necessary  to  keep  somewhat  in  the  offing,  on  account  of  the  East  Bank,  and  ob- 
serve the  same  marks  running  in  as  before  mentioned. 

If  sailing  up  in  the  night,  wihen  abreast  of  the  S.  W.  Spit,  the  two  lights  on  the  Hi;>h- 
lands  will  range,  when  you  may  steer  N.  by  E.  {  E.  until  you  muku  the  but>y  of  tin;  Up- 
per Middle,  when  the  East  Beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  light  wdl  range  in  one.  Afiei' pa.^s- 
ing  the  Upper  Middle,  you  will  deepen  your  water  to  C  fathoms,  when  you  n)ny  si.^er  X, 
up  through  the  Narrows,  and  you  will  deepen  your  water  to  7,  8,  10,  Vi,  and  Hi  fathoms. 
High  water  at  full  and  change  of  moon  on  the  bar  and  Sandy  Hook,  7h.  29in.  A.  M. 
Average  rise  and  fall  of  tide  on  the  Bar,  bh  feet. 


Set  of  tide  on  the  Bar.  and  be-  ? 
tween  the  Hook  and  Romer.  \ 


first  quarter  flood,  from  2    A.  M.  to    34  A.  M.    S.  W, 


Do. 

do. 

do. 

second 

do. 

do. 

from    34  A.  M.  to 

5    A.M. 

W. 

Do. 

do 

do. 

third 

do. 

do. 

from    5    A.  M.  to 

G4  A.  M. 

N.W 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

last 

do. 

do. 

from    6i  A.  M.  to 

8    A.  M. 

N. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

first 

do. 

do. 

from    '     A.  M.  to 

9]  A.  M. 

N.  F. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

second 

do. 

do. 

from    t  i  A.  M.  to 

11    A.  M. 

K. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

third 

do. 

do. 

from  11    A.  M.  to 

124  P.  M. 

S,  E. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

last 

do. 

do. 

from  124  A.  M.  to 

2    P.  M. 

S. 

In  the  spring  of  the  year,  when  freshets  run,  the  flood  runs  to  the  S.  W.  and  W. 
S.  W. 

N.  B.     The  above  answers  for  the  Upper  Middle  and  Buoy  of  West  Bank,  with  the 
exception  of  one-half  hour  later. 
High  water.        High  water  at  Governor's  Island,  full  and  change,  8h.  19m.,  rise  5  feet  8  inches. 

*  The  spar  buoys  are  not  always  put  down,  but  the  can  buoys  aro,  except  in  the  winter  seasoD 
when  they  are  substitated  by  apar  buays,  which  are  put  in  the  tome  spot. 


■i^HMHiil 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


213 


'  *.^ 


^"^     Bearings  from  the  Telegraph  at  Neversink  Hills.    ^  '' 


..  M. 

W. 

.  M. 

N.W. 

..  M. 

N. 

..  M. 

N.E. 

L.  M. 

E. 

\  M. 

S.  E. 

».  M. 

S. 

).  W. 

and  W. 

iank, 

with  the 

inches. 

winter  seasoa 

f^iiinly  Hook  lipihtliouaB   N.  7°  W..  with  the  west  side  of  Fort  Lnfnyetto  in  range. 
^-^Irui  null  1)11  Still  on  Isliind  N.  10°  W.     Liwttl  of  the  hill  at  tlio  Tolugniph  wliere  the    Bearings. 
lij,|irlini!)«M  are  erected,  U05  feet,  making  the  two  liinterns  i.'50  feet  above  the  level  of 

llie  n«ii> 

Bearings  from  Prince's  Bay  lighthouse.  ' ' 

ri)iiit  of  the  Neversink  Hills.  S.  54°  E. 

Siimly  Hook  lijjlithotise,  S,  71°  E.,  distant  10  miles. 

S|)iir  Hiiiiy.  oil  the  iitirth  side  of  the  Round  or  Middle  Shoal, at  the  entrance  of  Prince's 
Bav,  S.  8(i^'E. 

At  Priiieo'i*  Bay,  where  the  lighthouse  is  erected,  the  level  of  the  hill  is  77  feet  above 
tide-water.     The  elevation  is  3U  feet  from  its  base. 

Directions  for  sailing  in  by  Sandy  Hook,  corrcsjwnding  with  the  Chart  published  by 

E.  Sc  G.  W.  IkusT. 

In  comini;  up  with  the  bar,  when  midway  between  the  buoys,  steer  W.  by  N.  till  the 
Ijitlit  on  ."Jaiidy  Hook  ranges  with  the  oiititerninost  of  five  trees  on  the  Hii^hliinds;  you 
iiiiiy  then  steer  \V.  until  you  get  tlie  West  Beacon  on  the  point  and  the  lighthouse  in 
piiii;!',  aiil  ao  keep  them  till  you  make  the  black  buoy  of  the  S.  VV.  .Spit:  after  hauling 
rounJ  tlie  spit,  steer  N.  by  E.  i  E  ,  until  you  make  the  buoy  of  the  Upper  Middle,  but 
beciiri'ful  of  the  flood  tiilt»,  which  sets  directly  over  to  tiio  VVest  Bank  ;  after  you  have 
pdsstiil  the  buoy  of  the  West  Bank  (which  is  the  upper  buoy)  you  should  not  bring  Staton 
IsliiiiJ  light  north  of  N.  by  W.,  us  the  edge  of  this  bank  is  very  shoal,  and  extends  to  the 
point  uf  the  island.  ^ 

if  yiiu  wish  to  run  for  Prince's  Bay,  bring  the  light  to  boar  W.  N.  W.  and  run  for  it, 
annluiriiig  as  near  the  shore  as  you  please;  E.  S.  E.  ^  S.  from  the  ligiit  will  take  you  on 
the  N.  point  of  the  shoal,  on  which  a  buoy  is  placed  ;  this  buoy  is  loft  on  tho  larboard 
hmiii  ill  going  in,  but  as  it  is  liable  to  be  carried  away  by  the  ice,  the  light  should  never  bo 
broii^lit  to  bear  north  of  W.  N.  W. 

i'liiK^o's  Bay  lighthouse  stands  on  a  bluff  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  bearing  N.  71° 
W.  tVoiii  Sandy  Hook  light,  distant  10  miles,  and  W.  from  the  Knoll  Buoy.  It  shows  a 
fiji-il  liulit,  facing  E:  S.  E.,  having  eleven  lamps,  elevated  106  feet  11  inches  above  the 
level  of  the  sei,  ami  ■'29  feet  1 1  inches  from  its  base. 

(iEDNEVS  CHANNEL.— There  are  three  can  buoys,  painted  with  bluck  and  Gedruy'i 
wliito  vertical  stripes,  in  (itodney's  Channel.  Tliey  are  in  mid-channel,  so  that  vessels  Chun>iel. 
ciiii  |);iss  on  either  side  of  them  by  following  these  'lirections. 

Li'iist  water  23  feet.  Bring  the  light-house  on  Sandy  Hook  to  range  with  the  black 
buoy,  mid  the  beacon  on  Romer  to  hear  W.  N.  W.  Stoor  W.  N.  W.  with  the  ebb,  and 
W.  Iiy  N.  on  the  Hood,  until  you  drop  into  0  fathoms  water,  when  the  lighthouse  will  range 
wifli  II  clump  of  trees  on  the  Highlands  with  the  eastern  side  cut  down  square.  You 
tlitMi  steer  for  the  K.  beacon  on  the  Hook,  keeping  it  a  little  open  on  tho  larboard  bow, 
until  you  get  mid-channel  way,  when  you  steer  for  the  buoy  of  the  S.  W.  Spit. 

The  following  are  the  bearings,  courses,  and  distances  of  the  buoys  placed  in  the  Harbor 

of  New   York. 

C,\N  BUOYS.— The  black  buoy  on  the  bar,  bearing  E.  by  N.  from  the  lighthouse,    Can  Buoy$. 
(ii.<linit  "i  miles,  ranges  with  the  liglithouse  and  Mount  Pleasant,  in  New  .lersey. 

Till!  white  buoy  on  the  bar,  bearing  E.  i  S.  from  the  lighthouse.  IJ  mile  distant,  and 
.'^.  fiMin  the  black  buoy  1  \  mile  distant ;  between  these  buoys  is  the  channel.  This  buoy 
laiiiifswith  the  West  Beacon  and  Block  House. 

The  liliiik  buoy  on  .S.  W.  Spit,  2|  miles  from  the  lighthouse,  bearing  N.  W.  by  W., 
niniiHS  with  tlio  West  Beacon  and  lighthouse. 

Till)  white  buoy  on  the  Knoll,  bearing  N.  W.  <l  N.  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  4  miles 
and  oiu'-teiith. 

The  l)lii(!k  buoy  of  the  Middle,  distant  5  miles  from  tho  lighthouse,  bearing  N.  15°  W., 
nin^i'M  with  the  East  Beacon  and  lighthouse. 

TliH  white  buoy  of  the  West  Bank,  N.  15°  W.  from  the  lighthouse.  6\  miles  distant, 
miijies  with  Snake  Hill,  in  New  Jersey,  and  tlie  blulf  of  Staten  Island,  where  the  light- 
ImusB  is  erected,  as  before  mentioned,  and  where  the  telegraph  now  stands. 

SPAR  BUOYS, 

Between  (he  Ocean  and  the  City  of  New  York,  in  coriformity  to  Act  of  Congress. 
Five  spar  buoys  between  the  outer  bar  and  the  black  can  buoy  of  the  Spit. 


www 


214 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Four  black  apar  buoya  between  the  can  buoy  of  the  Spit  and  the  can  buoy  of  the 
Middle. 

Throe  binck  apnr  buoys  between  the  can  buoy  of  the  Middle  and  Coney  Island. 

Four  black  spur  buoys  on  the  ehonl  opposite  Gownnus  liny. 

On  the  S.  K.  part  of  the  ruins  of  Flinn's  Knoll,  in  3  fathoms  water,  is  a  black  spar  buoy 
bearing  N.  from  Sandy  Hook  li){hthouse.  ' 

VosHuls  from  soa,  );oing  up  Ship  Channel,  must  leave  it  on  the  starboard  hand,  and 
those  bound  through  the  Swash  Channel  on  the  larboard  hand. 

On  the  west  tide  of  the  Main  Channel. 

One  black  spar  buoy  on  the  north  side  of  the  Round,  or  Middle  Shoal,  oppogJtQ 
Prince's  Bay. 

Four  white  spar  buoys  between  the  white  can  buoy  of  the  bar  and  the  point  of  Siindv 
Hook.  ' 

Six  white  spar  buoya  between  the  can  buoy  of  the  Knoll  and  the  can  buoy  of  the  West 
Bank. 

Four  white  spar  buoys  between  the  can  buoy  of  the  West  Bank  and  Sinten  Island. 

Throe  white  spar  buoys  between  the  point  of  Robbin's  Reef  and  Bedlow's  Island. 

In  the  East  River  and  Long  Island  Sound. 

One  white  spar  buoy  on  the  Middle  Ground,  opposite  Bushwick  Creek,  where  the  Dry 
Dock  is  located. 

One  black  spar  buoy  on  the  Governor's  Table,  Blackwell's  Island. 

Olio  black  spar  buoy  on  Lawrence's  Reef,  south  from  Westchester  Creek,  near  Long 
Island. 

[Note. — In  sailing  .Ship  Channel,  the  white  buoys  are  to  be  loft  on  the  larboard,  nnd 
the  bliick  buoys  on  the  starboard  hand.  None  of  the  buoya  are  in  loss  than  19  feet 
water.] 

THE  LIFE  SAVING  BENEVOLENT  A.SSOCIATION  OF  NEW-YORK, 
chartered  by  the  Legislnturo  on  the  29th  of  March,  1849.  Its  object  is  to  furnish  nieiuis 
to  savo  lives  from  shipwrecked  vessels,  and  by  donations,  to  reward  meritorious  "onduct 
and  acts  of  courage  in  the  preservation  of  human  life.  Its  means  are  der<  from 
voluntary  contributions.     By  the  aid  of  an  appropriation  from  the  United  !  ';ov- 

ernment,  the  association  has  erected  the  following  houses,  and  placed  in  the  is' 

Su|)eri()r  Metallic  Life  Boats  and  other  facilities  for  communicating  with  wrecked  vessels, 
ami  for  taking  persons  from  them  to  the  beach.  Houses  have  been  built  under  tiie 
superintendence  of  Mr.  Watta,  United  Statea  Engineer,  between  Coney  Island  and 
Montock  Poiut. 

On  the  South  side  of  Long  Island,  the 

Keepers  of  the 
keys  of  the  houses, 
Ist  la  located  at  Barren  Island  west  side  of  Rockaway  Inlot, 

about  8  miles  from  the  west  end  of  Coney  Island 

2d.  At  Long   Beach,  between  Hog  Island  Inlet  and  Now   Inlet, 

about  18  miles  east  from  Coney  Island, Oliver  Denton. 

3d.  At  Fire  Island  Beach,  near  the  lighthouse Selah  .Strong. 

4tli.  At  Mastic,  about  IH  miles  east  from  Fire  Isliind  lighthouse,.   Samuel  Carman. 
Stii.  At  Morichos,  about  t.*5  miles  east  from  P^ire  Island  light,, . . .   P^dw.  Toppaii. 

6th.  At  Quoguo,  about  37  miles  east  from  Fire  Island  light 

7tli.  AtSagg  Beach,  iihout  127  miles  west  from  Montock  lighthouse,  John  Hedges. 
8th.  At  Amaganset,  about  18  miles  west  from  Montock  light,. .. .   Chas.  Barnes. 

And  on  the  North  side  of  Long  Island, 

9th.  At  Eaton's  Neck,  near  the  lighthouse Downing. 

10th.  At  Fisher's    Island,  west  end,  between  Gull   Island  and 

Watch  Hill  lights Winthrop. 

Neiv  Jersey,  hrtwren  Sandy  Hook  and  Little  Egg  Harbor,  erected  under  the  siiperintfii- 
dance  of  Lieulcnnvt  Otiingucr,  acting  under  the  advice  of  a  committee  of  the  .Vt 
York  Board  of  Underwriters. 

Keepers  of  the  kqs. 

1.  On  Sandy  Hook,  about  3  miles  south  from  thelighthousea,.. . .   John  V.  Conover. 

2.  Long  Branch,  about  6  miles  south  of  the  highland  lights,. . . .  Major  Wurdcll. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  815 

3,  Donl  BeHch,  nbout  25    do.      do.  do.        do Abner  Atlon. 

4,  Squiim  Beach,  nbout  15  miloa  north  of  Bnrnegat  light....... .  John  Mhxbod. 

5,  Shuik  llivnr,  about  10       do.       do.  do.  do Jiicob  Smith. 

6,  Mix  Miles  BoHch,    do.      do.       do.  do.  do.. Jiicob  O.  Fhillipa. 

7  and  8.  Two  on  Long  Beach,  between  Barnegiit  light  and  Egg  >    Sam'l  Perinu  aud 

Harbor, \    LIuyd  Jones. 

Thoro  are  bIx  Boat  Houses  eroctod  by  the  United  States  government,  under  the  super- 
intondiinco  of  Lieutenant  John  Mc(}owan,  acting  under  the  advice  of  the  Philadelphia 
Board  of  Underwriters,  between  Little  Egg  Harbor  and  Cape  May,  viz  ; 

1.  Brigantine  Beach, 
'2.  Absecom      do. 

3.  Peck's  do. 

4.  Ludliim's     do. 

5.  Fivo  Mile    do. 

6.  Cape  May,  near  the  lighthouse. 

These  houses  are  under  the  supervision  of  the  Philadelphia  Board  of  Underwriters. 
Eitcli  house  under  the  charge  of  the  Life  Saving  Benevolent  Association,  when  com- 
pleto,  is  to  bo  furnished  with  the  following  articles  : 

One  metal  surf-boat  with  air  chambers  and  cork  fenders,  seven  oars,  and  two  India 
rubber  bailing  buckets. 

One  metal  life-car,  with  cork  or  India  rubber  floats  and  fenders,  and  rings  and  chains 
for  each  end. 
One  manilla  hawser,  ii  inch,  IRO  fathoms. 
One  hauling  line,  '2^  inch,  310  fathoms. 
Two  rocket  lines,  ,",  of  an  ounce  per  yard,  300  yds.  each. 
One  coiling  frame  fur  rocket  lino  and  box. 
One  crotch  and  range  for  throwing  rockets. 
One  sand  anchor,  strop  and  bulls-eye. 
One  tackle  with  20  fathoms  full,  of  2i  inch  Manilla. 
One  heaver  and  strop. 

One  mortar  of  iron,  and  10  shot  fitted  with  spiral  wire. 
One  copper  powder  canister  and  4  lbs.  powder  for  same. 
Twelve  blue  lights  and  box,  containing  50  quick  matches. 
Five  rockets  and  rocket  box  of  tin. 
Eigiit  pieces  of  match-rope  and  12  pieces  of  port-fire. 
Two  lanterns  and  oil  can,  and  oil  for  same. 
One  lamp  feeder  aud  wick. 
Onu  stove  and  pipe. 
One  cord  of  wood. 
Two  shovels. 
One  priming  wire. 

WALTER  R.  JONES,  President. 

BACHE  McEVERS,  Vice  President 

ROBERT  C.  GOODHUE,  Treasurer. 

JOHN  D.  JONES,  Secretary. 

South  side  of  Long  Island. 

MONTOCK  SHOAL  lies  S.  by  E.  from  the  lighthouse,  distant  24  miles,  is  of  hard    Montock 
sand,  extending  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  about  one  mile,  having  four  fathoms  on  it,  shoaling  sud-    Shoal. 
denlv.  and  breaks  in  heavy  weather.     It  has  12  fathoms  on  the  inside. 

FRISBIE'S  LEDGE.— See  page  201.  Frishie's 

Tiio  soundings  are  in  general  very  regular,  shoaling  gradually  as  you  approach  the  Ledge. 
ehoro;  there  is,  however,  deeper  water  to  the  east  of  Fire  Island  lighthouse,  when  op- 
posite Racoon  Woods,  near  the  shore,  than  in  otlier  parts  of  the  coast;  as  10  fathoms  are 
found  about  a  mile  distant.  The  shoal  off  Fire  Islands  lighthouse,  composing  part  of  the 
bar,  extends  about  a  mile  from  the  sliore,  and  one  mile  from  where  the  lighthouse  stands. 
It  is  bold  to  on  the  eastern  side,  having  six  fathoms  close  to  it;  to  the  west  of  the  light- 
hous<o  it  shoalens  more  gradually. 

Fire  Islands  Iidet  is  navigable  for  vessels  drawing  nine  feet  water.  It  is  subject  to 
chnn^o,  and  those  who  are  acquainted  with  its  entrance  are  guided  by  the  breakers  in 
entering  as  much  as  by  any  thing  else. 

Oak  Island,  Glii^o.  Crow  and  Hog  Island  Inlets  are  all  barred  harbors,  having  very  little 
water;   they  do  not  extend  out  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  general  line  of  the  shore. 


216 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Kockaway  ROCKAWAY  INLET  lies  N.  E.  from  Snndy  Hook,  distant  nine  miles.    The  bur 

Inlet.  is  subject  to  change;  12  feet  mny  be  about  the  average  depth  at  low  water,  and  the  bar 

extoiKls  iibout  two  miles  from  the  shore. 
Bamegat  to         BARNE(MT  TO  SAN  I)  Y  HOOK.— Bnrnegat  liflhthotiso  is  40  feet  above  the  level 
Sandy  Hook,  of  the  sen,  niiii  conttiins  a  fixed  li.j^ht;  it  is  on  the  southern  side  of  the  entrance. 

1  lie  shore,  from  Bnrnegat  to  tlie  north  end  of  Long  Biunch.  is  nearly  stniight.ninning 
N.  33  mill's.  I"  ilien  bends  grnduully  to  the  fi.  N.  W.,  to  the  Intitude  of  Sandy  Hook 
lighthouse,  distant  nine  miles  from  the  northern  part  of  Long  Branch. 

The  beach  north  of  Bamegat  is  bnro  jf  timber,  until  nearly  up  with  Squnm  Inlet;  (19 
miles;)  but  the  pines,  which  are  en  the  main  land  from  two  to  three  miles  inside,  show 
plainly  over  the  sand-hills. 

The  Woodlands,  which  commence  ii!)ont  one  mile  south  of  Squam,  are  close  to  the 
shore,  and  extend  to  Long  Bnmcli,  eiaht  miles. 

Long  Branch  is  that  part  of  this  shore  where  low  table  land  shows  itself  close  to  the 
beach;  numerous  houses  a'>  l)uilt  on  it,  and  they  are  generally  known  to  the  seamen  as 
•'the  Tavern  houses."     It  is  about  five  miles  in  length. 

North  of  Long  Branch  the  beiich  is  low,  and  nothing  remarkniile  until  up  with  llie  en- 
trance to  Shrewsbery  River,  opposite  the  lighthouses  on  the  Highlanls  of  Nevcrsink 
where  it  is  tree  from  sand-hills,  and  when  the  entrance  is  closed,  which  issometinii'stlio 
case,  it  appears  perfectly  level.  After  passing  this  flat  part,  distant  about  six  miles  tVoni 
Lons  Hnmcii,  tiie  cedars  on  Snndy  Hook  commence,  and  extend  up  to  the  lighthouse. 

.'^(pi'im  Inlet  is  navigal)le  for  sniull  vessels  ;  and  as  they  are  frequently  detained  iit  an- 
chor on  tho  inside  of  the  bar,  strangers,  not  knowing  their  latitude,  have  supposed  tliem- 
selves  opposite  Barnegat  fi'om  sec  ing  them  at  anciior.  At  Barncgat  the  pines  show  as 
remote  from  the  shore,  while  at  Stjuam  they  are  near. 

The  shore  between  Barnegat  and  the  Highlands  nniy  be  approached  within  one-tliird 
of  a  mile  i)y  all  cbisses  ot  shipping,  in  (dear  weatiier,  in  the  day  time;  and  there  is  iiotliiiinr 
*()  fenr,  save  c  spot  to  the  nortli  (d"  Long  Bencdi,  about  one  mile  from  the  beach,  on  wiiioh 
there  is  but  11  feet.  The  ship  William  Thompson  struck  on  this  shoal.  It  lies  S.  S.  E. 
from  the  lightiionse  on  the  Highlands,  ilistnot  3  miles,  as  described  in  page  'JIO. 

Although  vessels,  in  clear  weiiilier,  mn\  venture  with  safety  near  this  part  of  tlio  Jer- 
sey shore,  in  the  day  time,  they  ciinnol  be  too  careful  in  thick  weather  and  at  night;  and 
when  in  less  than  13  fathoms  water,  should  ki'ep  the  lend  constantly  going,  as  there  are 
nniny  places  on  this  coast  where  10  and  1'-'  fiithoms  depth  mny  be  found  within  one  or 
two  miles  of  the  shore,  where  the  bottom  is  irngular,  and  where  your  ajjpronch  to  the 
beach  can  only  be  known  li;i  iiie  rapid  (^hnni'-.;  in  depths.  Not  many  years  since  one  uf 
our  |)nrkets  was  lost  on  tl  .s  shore,  and  the  Captain  assurcvl  me  that  he  had  "JO  liiilioms 
about  U)  minutes  befort*  thi^  ship  struck.  On  examining  the  chart,  I  found  his  nite  wiinid 
place  him  in  about  13  fathoms,  and  ho  did  not  hoave  to,  when  sou  iding,  although  going 
at  the  rate  of  lU  knoi:s. 


Soundings  hctwrcn  Cape  May  and  Montonk  Point. 

The  nverage  extcMit  off  the  const  of  New  .lers(>y  is  GO  miles;  this  \  ill  lake  yon  to  tho 
Forty  I'athoms  Line,  from  wliicli  it  shortly  nfterwnrds  deepens  to  50  iini  100  Intbonis. 
The  Forty  Fathoms  Line  extends  its.  J"  paralhd  with  the  coast  until  i.|  with  IViriieyit, 
whi'ii  it  begins  to  widen,  atnl  ticnn  thenc^e  (extends  over  towards  Alontoek  I'liiiii;  .S.  S. 
E.  from  which,  40  miles,  you  have  40  fathoms;  Go  miles,  uO  fathoms;  and  bO  mdes,  100 
fathoms. 

When  you  get  soiiudings  on  the  edge  of  this  bank,  and  are  unreilnin  as  to  yoiir  pnsii 

tiot.,  never  rely  on  sounding  i»icr  or  lirict'  to  determine  it;  but  sound  fi'(>(pienlly,  pnijett- 

ii':,  your  ciojrse,  distance,  ami  depth  of  water,   the  simie  scale  iis  your  cliart,  on  ii  cleiin 

sheet  of  paper.     After  you  tnive  continued  tiie  same  for  snlhcient  time  to  net  n  pi'olileuf 

the  ground  sailed  over,  com|)are  tl"i  depth  and  changes  by  cutting  out  su(di  parts  ol' your 

projection  where  there  are  no  soiindiogs,  so  as  to  enable  you  to  slide  it  over  tlie  eliiiif  to 

such  place  as  it  will  correspond;  or,  what  is  better,  make  your  own  projection  and  siinnd- 

ings  on  transpiLieni  paper,  and  slide  it  over  su(di  piirts  near  which  you  suppose  yoiii'-'ellto 

be,  until  the  prolile  of  depth  correspcoids  v  ith  it,  preserving  the  meridians  on  botli  piOiiilcls. 

NoTK. — The  chart  ot  iippronch  to  New  York  is  now  engraving  in  the  ollice  td'tlie  I',  S, 

Coast  Survey,  Washington  City,  and  Ijy  attention  to  the  aliove  (me  may  nnvigiite  with  the 

greatest  safety  with  it,  bearing  in  mind  that  a  siiisle  depth  (d'  water  will  no  more  giveyoa 

your  location  at  sea,  than  your  idlitinie  above  the  sea  would  give  your  position  on  the  linnl. 

'fyoii  wish  to  navigate  with  the  lead,  in  addition  to  having  a  good  chart,  you  must  watch 

the  (dianaes  as  you  would  the  aspect  of  a  country  ov(^r  which  you  ar(»  trav(dliiig. 

Coasi  fouth-         COAST  SOUTHWARD  OF  SANDY  HOOK.— If  yim  come  in  near  Ciipe  Hut- 

ward  of  3 'in-    teras,  be  eand'nl  of  its  shoals,  and  mnke  yoor  way  to  tln^  N.  N    E..  whiidi  will  cnrrv  yim 

dy  Hook.  on  the  soun  Im^s  of  the  .lers(<y  shore.      When  you  gtit  "JO  fathoms  wiiter,  in  Int.  Ai)°  N., 

then  haul  '>■!  to  imike  tho  land,  by  wlii(.h  you  will  avoid  the  dilficulties  of  tho  coast,  uu J 

the  shoals  nourer  in  shore;  but  if  you  cannot,  see  tho  fidlowing: 


mmrmni'mmm'mmm 


mpmpuppjijpniiJj  ■  V H' 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  817 

When  you  are  up  with  Cbiiicoteague  Shoals,  in  16  fathoms  water,  it  is  cear  enough  to 
approach  them ;  fiom  thia  station,  if  bound  into  the  Dalaware,  steer  N.  N.  E.  |  E.,  which 
is  the  course  parallel  to  tlio  hnid,  until  Cape  Henlopen  light  bears  W.  You  may  then 
run  in  for  it ;  or,  if  bound  to  Nuw  York,  keep  on  that  course,  until  you  have  passed  the 
pitch  of  Long  Beach,  taking  cure,  as  remarked  before,  not  to  run  into  less  than  10  fath- 
0198  water,  if  night.  You  can  tiieii  steer  for  the  Hook.  If,  in  running  up,  you  deepen 
your  water  suddenly,  fron  14.  Id  to  2o  and  30,  or  35  fathoms,  oozy  bottom.,  you  are  in 
wl'.iit  is  called  the  Mud  Hole,  the  centre  of  which  is  13  miles  from  the  taverns,  at  Long 
Biiinch,  and  S.  E.,  15  miles,  from  rfandy  Hook  lighthoui-^. 

SANDY  HOOK,  CiVPK  MAY,  AND  CAPE  HEN  LOPEN.— When  sailing  from   Sandy  Hook, 
SuDcly  Hook  lighthouse,  as  soon  as  to  the  eastward  of  the  bar,  steer  south,  if  night,  till   Cape  May  8f 
vou  pass  Barnegat ;  if  day-time  when  passing,  you  may  go  nigh  the  breaker,  say  5i  fath-    Cape  Henlo- 
oiiis.    In  sailing  between  the  Higlilauds  and  Barnegat  in  the  day-time,  you  may  go  within  pen. 
oiie-quarter  of  a  inilo  of  the  land,  if  tire  wind  is  ofl' shore.     When  you  have  possed  Barne- 
ait,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.,  10  or  11  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Great  Egg  Harbor, 
iviiich  has  a  shoal  bank  one  league  from  the  shore,  thathas  not  more  than  6  feet  water  on  it. 

lu  the  day-time  you  may  go  withiu  2  leagues  of  the  shore,  but  in  the  night  it  will  be 
prudent  to  keep  further  off.  When  yoi;  have  passed  Great  Egg  Harbor,  steer  S.  W.  by 
W.  10  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  up  with  Cape  May  light. 

Between  Barnegat  and  Cape  IMay  there  am  three  inlets,  one  of  which  is  fit,  at  high 
water,  for  vessels  diawiug  15feot,  viz :  Little  Egg  Harbor,  as  below.  Great  Egg  Harbor 
may  be  run  tor  in  time  of  danger,  and  will  give  ''2  feet  at  high  water.  The  navigation  is 
not  60  safe  as  other  places. 

lu  running  for  Cape  May,  while  steering  your  S.  W.  by  W.  course,  you  will  pass  five 
iuk'ts  before  you  come  up  with  Cape  May  Light,  viis :  Coston's.Townsend's,  Herreford, 
I'ui'tle  Gut,  and  Cold  Spring,  all  of  which  hi'.ve  bars  lying  off  their  entrances;  when 
abreast  of  Herreford  iulot,  you  may,  if  bound  to  Cape  May,  steer  W.  by  S.,  but  if  bound 
to  Cape  Henlopen,  steer  S.  S.  W.  till  the  lighthouse  bears  W.,  when  you  may  run  for 
illill  witiiin  2  miles. 

E.  by  S.  from  Cape  May  light,  15i  miles  distant,  lies  Five  Fathom  Bank,  with  12  feet 
wiiter  on  it.  The  south  point  bears  E.  S.  E.  from  Cape  May,  and  from  Cape  Henlopen 
It  bcfiirs  J%.  <i  N.,  21  miles  distant,  and  ranges  N.  and  S.  It  is  dangerous  for  vessels  with 
ovi'f  lU  foot  water. 

Lli'i'Lii]  EGG  HARBOR  lighthouse  is  a  fixed  red  light;  the  tower  is  \.'A,  46  feet    TAMe  Egg 
\\\^n,  uiid  IS  about  220  yards  in  a  southerly  direction  from  the  old  boarding-house,  which    Harbor. 
bUui'mid  down. 

ilio  li,i;lit  is  about  Id  ludes  in  a  S.  W.  by  W.  direction  from  Barne~at  light.  Vessels 
uiuluiig  it  should  not  steer  to  the  N.  of  N.  E.  until  they  make  Barnegat  light. 

Tills  notice  is  daemed  necessary,  as  the  land  at  Barnegat  runs  nearly  in  a  N.  by  E. 
direction,  and  to  one  nut  acquainted,  both  lights  being  of  the  same  character,  the  Tucker's 
UeacL  light  would  bu  apt  to  make  him  haul  to  the  northward  too  soon. 

Hailing  directions,  by  the  late  Lieut,  Geo,  M.  Baclie,  Asst.  U.  S,  Coast  Survey, 

Hob  Channkl. — Coasters  bound  to  the  northward  will  generally  make  this  harbor,  Sod  Channel. 
wheu  caught  by  a  north-easter,  after  having  passed  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  before  being 
able  to  make  Sandy  Hook.  In  running  down  within  sight  of  the  land,  pass  tlie  house 
uear  the  point  of  Long  Beach,  giving  the  breakers  ofi'tho  Old  Inlet  a  berth  of  half  a  mile. 
;iud  keeping  in  24  feet  water  until  the  lighthouse  on  Tucker's  Island  hears  N.  W.  by  W. 
Hiffli  water  7h.  10m.,  rise  4  feet. 

Being  in  24  feet  water,  fine  black  sand,  with  the  lighthouse  on  Tucker^^  Island  bearing 
X.  W.  by  W.,  steer  W.  by  S.  for  the  outer  buoy,  uear  the  middle  of  the  entrance  of  Sod 
Clmiiiicl. 

Whiio  abreast  of  Tucker's  Island,  and  before  reaching  the  ctUer  buoy,tliere  will  not 
l)H  much  tide,  and  the  le.ist  water  will  be  10  feet  at  low  water.  When  up  with  the  outer 
bui)y,  the  S.  W .  point  ot  Tucker's  Island  being  900  feet  distant  to  the  westward,  steer  S. 
W .  i  S.  fo'  Ino  middle  buoy,  keeping  on  the  outside.  Strong  tide  will  here  be  met. 
Tlie  tluod  setting  over  the  shoal  oft'  the  point  of  Sods,  and  the  ebb  setting  over  towards 
tiie  Rdund  Shoal,  for  which  allowance  must  be  niado.  Turn  the  middle  buoy  in  19  feet 
wiiiar  and  steer  for  the  inner  buoy.  With  a  scant  wind  and  an  ebb  tide,  vessels  will  be 
uoiigedtii  anchor  hero,  or  oven  beloro  reaching  this  point.  With  a  change  of  tide  a  bet- 
ter imchorage  will  be  found  further  up,  bt-tween  Anchoring  Island  and  the  marsh  to  the 
northward.  This  part  of  tlie  harbor,  from  the  N.  W.  ixtremity  of  Anchoring  Island  to 
iiiitlibld's  store,  is  1.1  mile  long,  and  i  of  a  mile  wide. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  southward  and  wishing  to  enter  by  the  Sod  Channel,  will  bring 
the  lighthouse  on  Tuckers  Island  to  bear  N.  i  W.,  and  steer  for  it,  giving  the  Round 
Shoal  a  berth.  When  the  hillock  on  the  south  end  of  the  island  bears  W.  il  N.,  haul  up 
W.  by  S.  fur  the  outer  buoy,  and  afterwards  follow  the  directioas  given  above. 


'"■T'fTTpf¥?'?»p--.i;»- 


f,  -M  mi^t.%t,i.  I  Jiuuijq 


218 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


South  Chan-       South  Channel. — Vessels  from  the  southward  will  give  the  Brigantine  Shoah  a  good 
net.  berth,  keeping  in  4  fathoms  water  until  the  northernmost  house  on  Brigantine  Beach 

bears  N.  W.  by  N.,  then  steer  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  if  the  weather  be  clear.  Hatfield's 
store  on  the  miirsh,  will  be  seen  ahead,  4^  miles  distant.  Keep  on  this  course  until  the 
northern  hoii  i  on  the  Brigantine  Beach  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  |  W.,  when  they  will  be 
between  the  breakers  on  the  south  point  oi  the  Bound  Shoal  and  those  on  the  beach- 
then  haul  up  to  the  N.  E.  |  N.,  and  continue  on  that  course  |  of  a  mile,  until  the  north- 
ern house  on  Brigantine  Beach  bears  west,  and  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  sand  hillock  on  the 
south  end  of  Tucker's  Island  bears  N.  ?  W.,  haul  in  then  N.  }  W.,  and  steer  for  this 
hillock  until  nearly  up  with  the  middle  buoy,  after  which  proceed  as  before  directed. 
Abaecum  ABSECUM  INLET. — Absecum  lies  5i  miles  S.  W.  from  Little  Egg  Harbor.    Qif 

Inlet,  Absecum,  from  E.  to  E.  by  S.,  3  miles,  lies  a  shoal,  having  on  it  several  lumps,  on  whicii 

there  are  only  10  feet  water.  The  ground  is  broken,  faaviug  between  the  lumps  4  and  6 
fathoms.     On  this  shoal  the  ship  Citizen  was  lost  in  1822. 

2h  enter  the  Harbor. — Brmg  the  house  which  is  on  the  starboard  hand  point  to  beiir 
N.  W.,  and  steer  directly  for  it,  until  within  one-fourth  of  a  mile  from  the  house,  wiien 
you  must  steer  north  nil  you  get  to  the  marsh,  where  you  may  anchor  in  from  :i  to  (j  h- 
thoms.     Depth  of  water  on  the  bur  at  low  water,  9  feet ;  common  rise  of  the  tide,  5  feet. 
Five  Fathom       FIVE  FATHOM  BANK. — Vessels   bound  into  the  Delaware,  coming  from  the 
Bank.  northward,  or  having  fallen  to  the  northward  of  Oiipe  Ht;nlopen,  should  be  careful  not  to 

approach  nearer  than  12  fathoms  water,  until  they  have  got  into  the  latitude  of  said  Cupe 
to  avoid  the  shoal  called  the  Five  Fathom  Bank ;  on  which  a  light-vessel,  having  two 
masts,  with  a  lantern  on  each,  is  moored  in  7^  fathom's  water,  Cape  May  lighthuuH' 
bearing  W.  2U^  30'  N.,  distant  15^  miles ;  the  centre  of  the  sboalest  ground,  on  which 
is  found  12  feet  water,  bears  t>.  28°  E.  from  the  light-ship,  distant  2'i  miles.  It  extends 
H.  by  E.  4  E.,  and  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  and  is  half  a  mile  in  brei.dtii, 
and  bold  on  its  eastern  edge,  as  there  are  7  fathoms  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
shoal  water. 

'i'he  Bank,  having  on  it  4  and  5  fathoms,  is  9  miles  long,  in  a  N.  and  S.  direction,  and 
has  an  average  breadth  of  1^  mile,  in  an  E.  and  W.  direction. 

Vessels  coming  li'om  tlie  northward  should  not  run  for  the  light-ship,  while  beuriii^ 
from  it  between  N.  14°  E.  and  N.  41"  E.  S.  E.,  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  the  lighi- 
shij),  there  are  6  fathoms  water. 

There  is  a  passage  inside  of  tliis  shoal,  by  taking  your  soundings  from  tbo  land,  in  G  or 
7  fathoms,  but  strangers  in  large  vesseia  should  not  attempt  it. 

McCRIE'S  SHOAL.  OFF  CAPK  MAY —This  shoal  bears  7i  miles  south-east 
from  Cape  May  lighthouse,  and  has  17  feet  water  upon  it.  W.  by  N.,  one  and  oue- 
eighth  of  a  mile  from  McCrie's  Shoul,tbere  are  18  feet  water  on  a  small  spot.  Aiiotlier 
shoul,  15  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  Cape  Henlopen  lighthouse,  with  4i  fathoms  water  upon  it, 
The  above  were  examined  by  Lt.  Bache,  U.  S.  N.,  Assistant  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  in  ia44. 

South-east,  li  mile  from  Congress  Hall,  there  is  a  shoal  one  mile  in  extent,  on  which 
theie  are  only  6  feet  water.     There  are  3i  fathoms  inside  of  it.     It  is  called  Old  Eph, 

CAPE  MAY  LIGHTHOUSE  is  on  the  extreme  south-west  point  of  the  Cape,  at 
the  entrance  of  Delaware  Bay  :  its  elevation  from  the  sea  is  80  feet,  contains  a  revolving 
light,  and  makes  a  revolution  in  three  minutes.  It  bears  N.  E.  by  M.  i  ii.  from  Cupe 
Heniupon  light,  distant  about  10^  miles. 

South-west  from  Cupe  Mny  light,  half  a  mile  distant,  there  is  a  shoal  of  one-fourth  oi 
a  mile  in  extent,  having  on  it  10  feet  water. 

The  south  point  of  (Jrow  Shoul  bears  W.  22°  N.  from  the  light,  distant  Ij  mile.  Tho 
ehoul  is  four  miles  in  extent,  in  a  N.  direction,  having  ou  it  only  seven  feet  in  places. 

There  is  good  anchorage  and  haibor  under  Capo  Alay  light,  with  the  wind  at  iN.  ur  \, 
N.E.;  and  after  passing  the  light  and  keeping  the  land  on  board,  in  3  to  5  fathoms  water, 
vessolH  will  find  safe  auchorogo,  and  a  good  harbor,  with  the  wind  ut  the  eastward. 
Cape  May.  CAPE  MAY. — Vessels  approaching  the  Delaware  by  Cape  May,  will  get  the  light  to 

bear   W.  N.  W.,  in  4  or  5  fatiioms,  then  run  for  it,  and  make  a  safe  entrance  intoilie 
Delaware,  clear  of  all  shoals,  with  vessels  drawing  10  feet  water. 

Kuntiiiig  for  the  light,  keep  about  two  miles  to  the  northward  and  eastward  of  it,  ui ;:, 
about  tliiee-quartei's  of  a  mite  from  the  shore.  From  this  you  must  keep  the  shore  dm 
on  board,  wheu  you  will  be  in  5  fathoms  water,  till  you  double  round  the  Cupe ;  \TLeu 
you  will  leave  the  Great  Shoul  on  your  larl>oai'd  hand,  over  which  it  continually  breaks, 
wheu  covered,  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  from  the  light,  distant  li  mile,  bare  at  low  water.— 
After  you  have  doubled  the  Cupe,  steer  N.  till  the  light  beuis  S.  E.  j  S.,  when  you  niuiit 
steer  N.  W.  until  you  deepen  into  7  and  8  fathoms.  In  running  the  above  course,  yuu 
will  have  from  6  to  Ij  fathoms  at  low  water  ou  Crow  Shoul,  betbre  you  come  into  vigbt 
fallioms,  which  is  5  miles  distant  from  (he  light.  After  you  have  got  into  8  fathoms,  yuu 
will  immediately  come  into  3  fathoms,  when  you  must  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  3  leuguts, 
which  will  curry  yuu  into  the  main  channel,  between  the  Brandy  wine  light-bout  on  your 
larboard,  and  Cross  Ledge  on  your  starboard  hai'd,  bearing  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  and  8.  S.K. 
i  E.  from  each  other,  distant  llj  miles. 


McCrie's 
Shoal,  off 
Cape  May 
Lighthouse. 


Cape  May 
Lighthouse. 


iHip|||qR;w  I 


mmm 


^^^KmmiKmmmm 


mmsmm9mii'''mmmimmiiKii 


9  Shoala  a  good 
igantine  Beach 
Jur.  Hatfield's 
:ourse  until  the 
en  they  will  be 
I  on  the  bench ; 
until  the  north- 
id  hillock  on  the 
id  steer  for  this 
)re  directed. 
;g  Harbor.  Olf 
lumps,  on  which 
3  lumps  4  and  5 

id  point  to  beiir 
he  house,  wiien 
I  from  ;j  to  6  i'u- 
the  tide,  5  feet. 
iniug  from  the 
)e  careful  not  to 
de  of  said  Ciipe, 
seel,  having  two 
iMay  lighthouse 
ouud,  on  which 
les.  It  extends 
mile  in  breudtii, 
eastward  of  the 

i.  directbn,  and 

»,  while  bearing 
.  from  the  light- 

the  land,  in  G  or 

uiles  south-east 
.,  one  and  one- 
spot.  Anotlier 
8  water  upon  it, 
^survey,  in  ltl44. 
xtent,  on  which 
called  Old  Eph, 
of  the  Cape,  at 
:aiua  a  revolving 
[  IN .  from  Ca|)B 

af  one-fourth  oi' 

itli  mile.  Tho 
et  in  places, 
viodat  iN.  or  X. 
»  fathoms  water, 
eastward. 
1  gut  the  light  to 
ntranco  into  the 

ward  of  it,  uii!:i 
)  the  shore  closb 
lie  Capo ;  when 
itiuuully  brealis, 
at  low  water,— 

when  you  must 
love  course,  yuu 
come  into  eiglit 
)  U  fathoms,  you 

W.,  3  leagues, 
ght-boat  on  your 
M^.  andS.  b.£. 


'<"i.'lfe'. 


ijVi, 


^mmmmmmmm 


IP 


Cross  Led 
I  buoy. 

On  the  firf 

guarded  ngai 

I  the  contrary. 

Id  ruDQin^ 
tlie  main  cht 
to  the  eastw 
crossed  this 
jjto  7  fathon 
jnly  5  fathoi 
jnJ,)  and  the 

CAPE  H] 
light.  S.  E, 
neareBt  part 
the  land,  dis 
vine  Shoal  I 

The  Beac 
It  bears  N.  t 
Kiln  Roads, 
beacon  light 
E.,  and  ancli 

E.  i  S.  fr 

Bring  Ca 
Bbreast  of  it, 
N.  W.  til!  y 
the  breakwo 

There  is  i 
8outbwnrd  ( 
bv  the  passn 
W. end  of  t 

In  approa 
the  pitch  of 
west  end  of 
as  you  can  \ 

Brandywi 
Cope  Henlo 
of  tlie  shoal 

One  and 
buoy  on  the 

Cape  Ma 

DELAVi 
}  E,,  steer  i 
the  lijiht,  9; 
with  the  Bt 
2,  near  Cro 
ebb,  N.  N. 
the  buoy  ok 
14  feet  banl 
iight-bont. 

The  tide 
the  channel 
connexion  \ 

You  mak 
is  upon  adi 
mile  from  t 
ger  Shonl,  i 
for  that  dis 
wpstwnrd  i 
ed  iiloiig  tb 
6  fathoms, 

The  led; 
anJ  is  m  >ni 
Ci'()93  Lod 
miles  in  lei 
aboard,  anc 
W.  on  the 
carry  you  i 
the  Middle 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


2X9 


Cross  Ledge  has  a  beacon  boat  with  one  mast,  moored  on  it  in  summer:  and  in  winter 

I  buoy. 

Od  tlie  first  of  the  flood,  the  tide  sets  to  the  westward,  and  in  light  winds  should  be        ^ 
luarded  against,  by  steering  from  one  to  two  points  more  to  the  eastward,  and  on  the  ebb 
the  contrary. 

la  running  the  above  course,  you  will  have  3,  3<i,  and  2|  fathoms,  till  you  come  near 
tlie  main  channel,  when  you  will  deepen  into  5  fathoms,  which  is  a  swash  that  runs  up 
to  the  eastward  of  the  Cross  Ledge;  still  keep  your  N.  W.  by  W.  course  till  you  have 
crossed  this  swash,  when  you  will  shoal  your  soundings  into  2i  fathoms,  and  then  deepen 
ioto  7  fathoms,  which  is  the  main  ship  channel,  when  you  must  steer  N.  W.  till  you  have 
only  5  fathoms,  which  is  on  the  Fourteen  Feet  Bank,  (which  has  a  buoy  on  the  S.  S.  £. 
jnd,)  and  then  alter  your  course  to  N.  N.  W.  for  Cross  Ledge.  High  water,  8  19,  rise  6  ft. 

CAPE  HENLOPEN  LIGHT  is  160  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  containing  a  fixed    Ca'pt  Henlo- 
light.    S.  E.  by  S.  of  the  lighthouse  is  the  Hen  and  Chickens  Shoal,  after  described.  The    pm  Light. 
nearest  part  of  the  Overfalls,  which  has  on  it  from  2  to  5  fathoms,  bears  N.  E.  by  N.from 
tlie  land,  distant  4i  miles;  the  outer  point  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  distant  7  miles.     Brandy- 
vine  Shoal  bears  N.  i  W.,  distant  11^  miles. 

The  Beacon  stands  on  the  extreme  north  end  of  Cape  Henlopen,  very  near  the  beach. 
It  bears  N.  5°  W.,  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse.  Ships  running  in  for  Old 
Kiln  Roads,  may,  when  the  beacon  light  and  the  lighthouse  are  in  one,  approach  the 
beacon  light  within  a  cable's  length ;  then  steer  W.  N.  W.  until  the  lighthouse  beara  S. 
£„  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

E.  i  S.  from  Cape  Henlopen,  25  miles,  is  a  shoal,  with  4  fathoms  on  it,  gray  sand. 

Bring  Cape  Henlopen  light  to  bear  W.,  and  run  for  it  till  within  two  miles;  when 
abreast  of  it,  you  will  have  15  or  16  fathoms  water.  After  you  have  passed  it,  steer  W. 
N.  W.  till  you  bring  it  to  bear  E.  S.  E.,  when  you  may  anchor,  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  near 
the  breakwater. 

There  is  no  difficulty,  with  common  attention,  in  running  into  the  anchorage  to  the 
southward  of  the  Breakwater,  even  in  a  gnle  of  wind,  either  between  ilic  two  works,  or 
by  the  passage  to  the  S.  E.  of  both.  There  is  a  red  fixed  light,  56  feet  high,  on  the  N. 
^V.  end  of  the  Breakwater. 

In  approaching  from  sea  and  going  in  by  the  south  passage,  give  the  beacon  light  on 
the  pitch  of  the  Cape  a  berth  of  from  four  to  five  hundred  yards,  and  when  you  bring  the 
west  end  of  the  Breakwater  to  bear  N.  W.,  steer  for  it,  and  anchor  as  close  on  the  works 
as  you  can  with  safety,  the  light  on  the  west  end  bearing  about  N.,  or  N.  by  W. 

Brandy  wine  light-boat  is  on  the  went  side  of  the  shoal,  bearing  N.  i  W.  12i  miles  from 
Cape  Henlopen  light ;  the  light-boat  is  nearly  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  the  south  point 
of  the  shoal. 

One  and  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  on  a  N.  by  W.  course  from  the  light-boat,  there  is  a 
buoy  on  the  northern  point  of  the  shoal. 

Cape  May  light  bears  E.  S.  E.,  7|  miles,  from  the  light-boat. 

DELAWARE  BAY  AND  RIVER.— In  running  up  the  Bay,  the  light  bearing  S.   Delaware 
i  E.,  steer  north,  a  little  west,  for  the  buoy  of  the  Brown,  which  bears  N.  4"  W.  from    Bay  and 
the  li^ht,  9i  miles  distant,  which  you  leave  to  the  westward;  keep  on  that  course  until  up   River 
with  the  Bradywine  light-boat,  (No.  1,)  then  steer  from  light-boat  N.  1  to  light-boat  No. 
'i,  near  Cross  Ledge.     Your  course,  on  the  flood  tide,  is  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  and  on  the 
ebb,  N.  N.  W.,  the  distance  114  n<iles.     Soundings  from  4j  to  8  fathoms.     You  leave 
the  buoy  on  the  north  end  of  the  Brandy  wine  Shoal  to  the  eastward,  and  the  one  on  the 
14  feet  bank  to  the  westward :  the  former  being  IJ,  and  the  latter  five  miles  from  the 
light-boat. 

The  tides  are  influenced  very  much,  in  direction  and  strength,  by  the  winds  ;  but  as 
the  channel  is  well  defined  by  the  two  light-boata,  (which  are  moored  in  line  with  it,)  in 
connexion  with  the  buoys,  there  can  be  no  difficulty  in  clear  weather. 

You  make  Egg  Island  light  bearing  about  north,  soon  after  leaving  the  Brandywine  :  it 
is  upon  a  dwelling-house,  elevated  about  40  feet,  visible  12  miles.  N.  W.  by  W.,  li 
mile  from  the  buoy  on  the  14  feet  bank,  is  the  southern  extremity  of  Joe  Flogger,  or  Fol- 
ger  Shoal,  a  narrow  ridge  running  N.  N.  W.  15  miles,  nearly  dry  in  places,  and  forming 
fur  that  distance  the  west  side  of  the  main  channel.  In  beating  up,  do  not  stand  to  the 
westward  into  less  than  four  fathoms.  In  thick  weather  Joe  Flogger  may  be  safely  track- 
ed iilong  the  whole  extent,  hauling  on  to  four  fathoms,  hard,  and  deepening  off*  to  5  and 
6  fiithnms,  soft. 

The  ledge,  or  No.  2  light-boat,  shows  a  single  light,  elevated  45  feet,  visible  7  miles, 
anJ  is  m  lored  about  mid-channel  botwi'en  Joe  Flogger  and  the  buoy  on  the  lowqr  end  of 
Cr()s3  Ledge,  which  is  a  narrow  ridge  of  hard  sand  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel,  4i 
miles  in  length,  and  nearly  dry  in  places.  Leave  the  light-bnat  to  the  westward,  close 
aboard,  and  the  course  then  to  the  Middle  is  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  on  the  flood,  and  N.  N. 
W.  on  the  ebb  tide,  distance  5  miles,  soundings  from  ?i  to  5  fathoms.  These  courses 
carry  you  about  mid-channel  between  Joe  Flogger  and  Cross  Ledge.  From  the  buoy  of 
the  Middle  unto  Bombay  Hook  Bar,  the  Thrum  C^p  (the  lower  of  two  insulated  clumps 


miMnwrna 


^vpmpwmppnvmpwiisRip 


•mmfimumf' 


220 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


oftrees  on  tho  wostern  shorB,  bearing  S  W.,)  the  course  is  N.  W.  il  W.,  on  the  flood 

and  N.   W.  by  N.  on  the  ebb,  distiince  7i   milea.     Soundings  from  5  to  Cj   fiitlionis 

Bombay  Hook  Bnr  is  very  bolil ;  tho  soundings  in  the  chnnnei  off  it  are  from  6  to  6  j  futh. 
oms.     It  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  5  fathoms. 
Cohansey  ('ohnnney  lifjiit,  on  tho  Jersey  sliore,  is  in  sij^ht  from  the  Buoy  of  the  Jliddle,  bearing 

light.  N.  N.  W. ;  it  is  upon  a  dwelling-house,  elevated  40  feet,  and  visible  12  miles.     Mahun 

light  in  also  upon  a  dwelling-houi^e,  elevatod  30  feet,  visible  10  miles,  and  is  in  sight,  buur. 
ing  W.  by  8.  4  S.     Egg  Island  light  bears  E.  by  S.  i  S. 

When  nearly  up  with  the  northern  end  of  ,Ioe  Flogger,  Bombay  Hook  light  will  he 
made  just  open  with  Bombay  Hook  Point,  and  bearing  N.  W.  It  is  elevated  40  fnet 
and  is  visible  112  miles.  When  up  wirh  Bombay  Hook  Point,  Reedy  light  will  bo  made 
bearing  N.  W.  by  N.,  elevated  55  feet,  and  visible  14  miles. 

The  channel  westward  of  .loe  PIngger  cannot  be  considered  available  until  it  is  buoyed. 

The  f(dlowing  directions  are  given,  because  it  has  sometimes  been  entered  by  niiBtiiko 
and  con9ideral)le  embarrassment  experienced  in  working  back,  to  get  into  the  main  chun- 
nel  again.  This  channel  is  as  direct  as  the  main  channel,  though  not  so  wide.  Tho 
southern  extremity  of  Joe  Klogger  ShonI,  as  already  observed,  bears  N.  W.  by  N.  li  mile 
from  the  buoy  on  the  14  feet  bank.  Entering  with  that  buoy  bearing  east  1^  mile,  ste^r 
N.  W.  by  N.  i  N..  which  course  will  carry  you  along  the  western  side  of  the  shoal,  in 
not  less  than  four  fathoms,  until  Malion  light  bears  W.  by  N.,  when  you  strike  a  middle 
ground  lH  mile  long,  least  water  13  feet;  having  passed  it,  you  drop  into  four  fathuma 
again. 

When  the  buoy  of  the  Middle  (main  channel)  bears  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  and  Mahon  light 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  Hteer  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  ond  you  pass  through  into  the  main  channel,  a 
little  below  the  Thrum  Cap,  and  in  not  less  than  3?  fathoms. 

The  following  directions  will  also  serve  for  this  channel,  and,  with  a  head  tide,  more 
safely  than  the  foregoing: — Entering  as  before  directed,  track  tho  west  side  of  the  chiiii. 
nel  along,  shoaling  to  3i  and  deepening  to  4  and  5  fathoms,  until  Mahon  light  bears  W.  N, 
W.,  when  you  take  your  soundings  from  .Toe  Flogs^er  cautiously,  (not  shoaling  to  less  tlian 
three  fathoms,  for  the  shoal  is  very  bold,)  and  carry  3i  to  4^  fitthoms  through,  between  it 
and  the  Middle  Ground.  When  past  the  Middle  Ground  track  the  west  of  thd  cbuii- 
nel  along  as  before. 
Note.  Note. — Courses  and  bearings  magnetic,  and  distances  are  in  nautical  miles. 

The  name  of  Blake's  Cliannel  has  been  given  to  the  channel  west  of  Joe  Flogger,  which 
was  made  known  in  the  progress  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey. 

From  Bombay  Hook  Bar  to  Liston's,  (the  tree  bearing  south,)  the  course  is  N.  W.  J  N., 
distance  13  miles;  soundings,  as  far  as  Bombay  Hook  light,  6  to  4,',  fathoms,  and  between 
the  light  and  Listen's  3',  to  3}  fiithnms  i)eing  the  least  water  in  any  part  of  the  channel  be- 
tween Cape  Henlopen  and  the  Pea-Patch. 

From  Liston's.  (tho  tree  bearing  south,)  to  give  Stony  Point  bar  a  berth,  steerfor  Port 
Penn  Piers,  a  little  to  the  westward  of  Reedy  Island  light,  1.',  mile,  or  until  Barney's  house, 
on  the  Delaware  shore,  (yellow,  with  two  single  poplars  near  it,)  bears  S.  W.  by  W.,  sound- 
ings 4  fathoms:  then  your  course  is  N.  by  E.  ^  E  4  miles,  to  Salem,  or  Elsingborou;;h 
Point,  on  the  Jersey  shore ;  soundings,  up  to  the  middle  of  Reedy  Island,  4  to  5  fathoms, 
then  deepening  to  7  and  8  fathoms.  '1  here  are  two  channels  to  pass  the  Pea  patch :  tor 
the  eastern,  or  Goose  Island  Channel,  track  the  Salem  flats  along,  which  commence  iit 
Elsingborough  Point,  hauling  on  and  off.  shoaling  to  3^,  and  deepening  to  5  and  6  fathoms. 

When  up  with  the  north  end  of  the  Pea-patch,  take  your  soundings  from  the  New  Jer- 
sey shore,  hauling  on  to  the  flat  to  3.  and  deepening  to  4  fathoms,  tracking  the  flat  along 
until  New  Castle  spire  bears  N.  by  W.,  when  you  are  clear  of  the  north-eastern  end  of 
Bulkhead  Shoal,  and  may  haul  out  into  the  middle  of  the  river. 

The  channel  westward  of  the  Pea-patch  is  divided  i)y  a  middle  ground,  commencing 
about  midway  between  the  Pea-patch  and  Delaware  shore,  and  following  the  bend  of  the 
river  about  1^  mile  ;  least  water  upon  it  10  feet. 

The  channel  westward  of  this  Middle  is  narrow;  least  water  20  feet.  To  take  it,  run 
from  Elsingborough  Point  for  the  Pea-patch,  until  up  with  Reedy  Point,  from  which  tlie 
shore  trends  suddenly  to  the  N.  W.;  then  track  the  flats  on  the  Delaware  shore  along, 
passing  between  the  E.  and  W.  buoys,  and  near  the  W.  buoy,  up  to  the  Hamburg  buoy. 

The  channel  east  of  the  middle  is  not  so  difficult  ;  least  water  13  feet.  When  up  with 
Reedy  Point,  take  your  soundings  from  tho  Pea-patch  side,  and  track  the  flats  up  to  the 
E.  buoy,  and  then  the  Middle  to  tlm  Hamiiurg  buoy. 

From  New  Castle  to  Marcus  Hook  the  general  course  of  the  river  is  N.  E.  by  N.  lU 
miles.  The  best  water  olf  tho  eastern  shore,  until  past  Cherry  Island  flats,  a  middle  ground 
off  Christiana  Creek  about  2-^  miles  long;  least  water  1 1  feet.  Having  passed  tho  flats,  tiie 
best  water  is  ofl'  the  western  shore;  keejiitig  it  pretty  well  aboard,  you  clear  Marcus 
Hook  Bar,  which  lies  oft"  that  place. 

From  Marcus  Hook  to  Chester,  tho  course  is  about  N.  E.  by  E.,  3\  miles ;  best  wiiter 
off  the  western  shore.  When  one  mile  above  Chester,  you  are  up  with  the  buoy  on  tho 
spit  which  makes  down  the  river,  from  Tinicum  Island,  which  you  leave  to  the  westward. 


^Pll 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


8S1 


MOON. 


rs. 

E. 

byE.^ 

s. 

E. 

s. 

E. 

s. 

S. 

E. 

s. 

by 

E. 

s. 

s. 

s. 

W. 

s. 

w 

, 

makes  fuU  sea  at 


The  trend  of  the  river  is  then  nearly  east  of  the  bar,  below  Port  Mifflin,  upon  which  there 
are  two  buoys. 

CioHS  the  bar  between  the  two  buoys,  Bnd  steer  for  Fort  Mifflin,  passing  to  the  north- 
irard  of  the  Old  Pier,  which  lies  otf  tlmt  worli.  Tlio  river  tlieii  trends  eiistwurd  iigHin  up 
totiie  Horse-shoe,  upon  which  there  is  a  buoy,  which  is  to  be  loft  to  the  Dorthwiiid. 

Hiiving  pflssod  the  Horse-shoe,  the  trend  uf  tlie  river  is  neurly  north  up  to  Knighn's 
Point,  the  bf^st  water  on  the  eiistorn  shore,  until  theCiinHl  Bnsin.un  the  Pennsylviiniii  side, 
beiH's  W.  by  N.,  steer  across  the  river,  and  keep  the  western  shore  nboiird  up  to  the  city. 

Kkmahks. — The   Hnrhor  of  Reedy  IsliL.t]  is  much  used,  piirticuliirly  in  winter,  while    Rem*rki. 
icH  ia  running.     A  sniiill  spit  miikes  south  from  the  lower  end  of  the  island  a  ^  mile;  be- 
ing rienr  of  this,  your  course  is  north.     Anchor  off  the  Piers,  in  4  to  6  fathoms,  mud. 

llombHy  Hnok  Roads  is  nn  anchorage  much  used  by  vessels  waiting  wind  or  tido,  Bring 
Bainbiiy  Hook  Point  to  beai'  S.  by  E.,  the  light  W.  by  N.,  and  auchor  in  troin  3  to  4  fu- 
tl)iiin3,  sticky  liottom. 

The  above  directions  are  by  Lt.  George  S.  Blake,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  excepting  the 
Goose  Idland  channel,  which  was  ro-surveyed  in  1845 — 6,  by  Lt.  Arthur,  the  change  in 
the  channel  having  made  it  necesr^ary. 

TIDE  TABLE. 

'  Cape  May. 

Cnpe  Henlopen. 

Brown  and  Brandywine. 

Bombay  Hook. 

Reedy  Island. 

New  Castle. 

Chester. 
_  Philadelphia. 

Setting  of  the  THdes  within  the  Capes. 

First  quarter  flood W.  N.  W. 

Second  to  last  quarter, N.  N.  W. 

First  quarter  ebb , E,  S.  E. 

Second  to  last  quarter, S.  S.  E. 

Lighthouses  in  Delaware  Bay,  the  eastern  side  : 

A  fixed  light  on  Egg  Island  Point, Lat.  39  10  28 

A  fixed  light  at  Cohansey  Creek 39  20  15 

On  the  western  side  : 

A  fixed  light  at  Mispillion  Creek,  on  a  dwelling  house, 38  56  33 

A  fixed  light  at  Mnhon's  Ditch,  on  a  dwelling  house  , 39  10  13 

A  fixed  light  at  Bombay  Hook,  on  a  dwelling  house, 39  21  43 

A  fixed  light  on  Reedy  Island 39  29  57 

A  fixed  light  at  Christiana  River 39  43  12 

DELAWARE  BAY. — The  following  spar  buoys  have  been  placed  at  the  entrance  of    ' 
Delaware  Bay. 

No  1  is  painted  red. 

It  marks  the  point  of  shoal  (Prissy  Vicks)  off  Cape  May  lighthouse.  It  stands  in  18 
feet  water,  bottom  coarse  gray  sand  and  gravel ;  the  shoal  to  northeasthas  10  feet  on  it. 

No,  2  is  painted  red. 

Has  letters  B  W  in  black  on  a  square  white  board.  It  marks  the  southern  end  of  the 
rouiul  or  E.  N.  E.  shoal.  It  stands  in  18  feet  water,  bottom  fine  grey  sand  and  blue 
mud.  The  E.  N.  E.  or  Round  shoal  has  3  feet  water  on  it,  and  the  shoal  to  S.  and  E., 
of  the  buoy  has  7  feet ;  the  channel  way  is  close  to  the  buoy. 

No,  3 — CroBsed-striped  red  and  black. 

It  marks  the  S.  E.  spit  of  Mummy  Shoal,  and  stands  in  17  feet  water ;  bottom  fine  grey 
sand  with  white  specks.  The  Mummy  Shoal  has  6  feet  water  on  it.  Blunt's  channel  is 
to  the  westward  of  this  buoy  (not  yet  buoyed  out,)  and  Rickard's  channel  to  the  N.  and  £. 


222  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

No.  A—Crotsed'$triped  red  and  black. 

With  one  fluke  of  anchor  on  top  of  buoy  ;  it  ninrka  the  southern  apit  of  Crow  ahoal 
and  atiincJd  in  15  I'ael  wiitor,  bottom  coiirao  gray  Hand  and  gravel.  Cruw  shonl  haa  7  fool 
water  on  it.  The  liicknrd'a  channel  ia  to  the  westward,  and  the  ordinary  coaater'a  chan- 
nel to  the  eastward  ut  this  buoy. 

No.  5 — Perpendicular  white  and  black  stripes. 

It  marks  the  centre  of  Ricknrd's  channel,  nnd  stands  in  18  feet  water;  bottom blu« 
mud.     Crow  shoal  to  tlie  eastward,  and  Mummy  shoal  to  the  westward. 

No.  6 — Perpendicular  white  and  black  stripes. 

"  It  marks  the  western  entrance  to  Rickard's  channel;  stands  in  19  feet  water ;  bottom 

fine  gray  sand  and  blue  mud. 

Qtnrrid  Directions. — Vessela  entering  keep  to  port  of  red  buoys,  starboard  of  binck  • 
either  aide  of  red  and  black  stripud.  Black  and  white  perpendicular  stripus  mark  a  clum. 
Del  buoy. 

Compass  bearings  of  buoys  from  Cape  May  and  light. 

No.  1.— S.  S.  W.  i  VV. 
"    2.— S.  W.  by  W. 
'•     3.— W.  S.  W. 
"     4.— W.  by  N.  little  northerly. 
"    5.— N.  VV.  by  W.  i  W. 
"    C— N.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 

Compass  bearings  of  buoys  from  buoy  No.  1.  \ 

No.  2.— W.  S.  W.  '  \V. 

••    3.— W.  I  N. 

"     4— N.  W.  J  W. 

"     5.— N.  W.  little  northerly. 

"    6— N.  W. 


Rickard's 

Channel. 

Bl*nC$ 

Channel. 

Through 

Channel  to 

Breakwater. 


To  pass 
through  the 
»  Through 
Channel"  to 
Breakwater. 


To  pass 
through 
Rickard's 
Channel 


The  following  sailing  directions  fur  entering  Delaware  Bay,  are  givea  by  Lieutennnt 
R.  Bache,  in  connexion  with  these  buoys  : 

Rickard's  Ciiannkl,. — Vessels  drawing  15  feet  water  can  poss  through  this  chunnei 
at  ordinary  low  water — smooth  sea. 

Blu.nt's  Channkl. — Not  yet  buoyed. 

TiiRoi;oH  Chanmcl  to  Brkakwatkr. — Vessels  drawing  16  feet  can  pass  through  this 
channel  at  ordinnry  low  water — smooth  sea. 

The  rise  of  the  tide  may  be  estimated  at  5  feet.  Strong  tides  running,  nn  rdlowiince 
of  two  points  must  be  made  on  the  course  steered,  crossing  the  direction  of  the  tides, 
The  lend  is  a  guide.  The  shoals,  although  pretty  stoe|)  to,  can  be  avoided  by  constant 
and  true  soundings. 

When  off  the  boarding-houses  on  Cope  Island,  in  the  Coasters'  or  Cnpe  May  chnniiel, 
buoy  N.  1  will  be  seen  bearing  W.  by  N.  4  N.  per  compass — steer  for  it,  leaving  it  close 
on  board  on  starboord  hand  in  possing — when  up  with  buoy  No.  1,  buoys  Nos.  2,  3,4,5, 
and  (i  in  clear  weather  will  be  in  sight. 

To  pass  thbough  the  "Through  Channei,"  to  Breakwater. — This  channelis 
narrow  ;  on  the  S.  E.  is  a  shoal  with  7  feet  water  upon  it,  nnd  the  Round  or  E.  N,  E, 
shoal  is  to  the  northward,  and  has  4  feet  water  on  it,  and  the  breakers  show  plainly  in 
any  breeze.  When  abreast  of  N.  1,  stand  VV.  J  N.  towards  buoy  N.  3,  keeping  it  open 
on  the  port  bow  a  point,  and  gradually  hauling  up  for  it.  When  up  with  No.  3,  ieaveit 
on  the  starboard  hand,  and  steer  S.  VV.  by  S.  for  No.  2,  which  leave  close  on  board  an 
starboard  hand,  and  continue  on  S.  VV.  by  S.  for  Breakwater. 

To  I'Ass  THROUGH  Riukard's  Channel. — This  chaimel  lies  between  Crow  and  the 
Mummy  shools;  the  Crow  shoal  having  on  it?  feet  water,  and  the  Mummy  shoal  6  feet 
water.     After  passing  buoy  N.  4,  it  is  a  good  beating  channel. 

From  buoy  No.  1,  steer  N.  W.  3  W.  for  No.  4,  which  leaves  1  on  the  starboard  hand 
at  a  short  distance,  and  steer  N.  N.  W.  westerly  for  No.  5,  which  pass  on  either  band, 
and  haul  up  N.  W.  i  W.  westerly  for  No.  G,  which  pass  on  either  hand,  and  shape  your 
course  VV.  }j  N.,  whicli  brings  you  between  the  buoy  and  the  Brown  and  light-boat  oo  the 
Brandy  wine  shoal,  in  the  main  ship  channel. 

Nt.  rE. — All  soundings  are  given  at  at  low  water. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


823 


water;  bottom 


188  through  this 


THK  HEN  AND  CHICKENS.— On  thiB  ahoul  there  nre  6  feet  water,  In  places. 
iflie  eoutltern  point,  on  which  there  are  13  t'eot  wiitor,  buiira  8.  E.  by  >S.,  2^  miles  from 
CipH  Hunlupuii  light.  The  beacon  in  range  with  the  light  on  the  Breakwater  puts  you 
OD  thu  edge  of  the  shoal. 

IiihIiIo  uf  the  shoal,  and  parallel  to  the  shore,  there  is  a  channel  of  4i  to  5  fathoms. 

CAl'K  HENLOl'EN  TtJ  CAPK  HKNRY.— The  coast  is  studded  with  shunis, 
lying  at  a  distance  otf,  from  3  to  ti  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of  land.  The  Cap,  on  which 
there  art)  ^ '"thorns,  lies  8.  E.,  easterly,  six  and  a  half  miles. 

Indiiin  River  Shoal  of  3  fathoms,  beuis  S.  S.  K.  j  E.  11  miles  from  Cape  Henlupen 
light.  Lt.  Lee,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  has  discovered  two  new  shoals,  Konwick's  Island 
Shoul,  of  15  feet,  lat.  38°  '27',  long.  74°  59',  being  Hi  miles  from  the  nearest  land,  and  11 
niiluD  S.  i  W.  from  Indian  River  Slioal.  Isle  of  Wight  Shoal,  of  3^  fathoms,  lat.  3d°  2',H, 
long.  78°  o8'  ;  being  S.  nearly  of  Fenwick's  Island  SliualJ^  miles. 

S.  VV.  by  S.  from  the  Isle  of  Wight  Shoal,  lU  miles,  is  the  Little  Uull  Bank,  of  2 
fiitlionis. 

Gull  Bank,  of  5  fathoms,  is  15  miles  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the  Isle  of  Wight  Shoal. 

The  Sinepuxent  Shoals  are  between  the  Gull  Bank  and  the  Sinepuxent  Inlet. 

CHINCO  TEAGUE  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  is 
oDtlio  S.  E.  point  of  Assateague  Island,  lat.  37°  55',  long.  75°  21'.  When  you  are 
witliiu  half  u  mile  of  Fenwick  and  Chincoteaguu  Shoals,  you  will  have  12  fathoms  water. 
The  land  from  Chincoleague  to  Cape  Charles  makes  broken  land,  with  islands  and  sev- 
eral Hinall  inlets.  There  is  a  good  harbor  within  Chincuteague  Shoals,  which  goes  by 
the  suine  name. 

The  Winter  Quarter  Shoal,  of  2  fathoms,  bears  E.  i  N.,7  miles  from  the  light;  there 
are  euveral  shoal  spots,  with  clmunels  for  small  vessels  inside  this  shoal. 

The  next  shoals  are  those  generally  known  by  the  naiiie  of  Clnncotoague  Shoals,  and 
are  clustered  around  the  southern  end  of  Assateague  Island,  on  which  there  is  a  light- 
house, containing  a  fixed  light.  These  shoals  have  deep  channels  between  them,  but 
they  lire  only  attempted  by  the  coasters.  From  Chincoteaguo  to  Cape  Charles  the 
land  trends  S.  S.  W.  i  vV.,  with  several  burred  inlets.  Tlie  land  is  low,  sandy,  and 
iniiraliy. 

REIKJBOTH  BAY  lies  9  miles  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Henlopen  lighthouse.  This 
bay  i'l  unly  for  small  vessels  that  draw  not  more  than  (J  feet  water. 

The  north  end  of  Fenwick's  Island  lies  10  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  lighthouse, 
anil  separates  Delaware  from  Maryland.  It  has  a  grove  of  trees  on  it,  and  you  will  have 
6  or  7  t'itthoms  of  water  within  a  league  of  the  land,  and  a  strong  current  setting  to  the 
Bouthwiird. 

MaToMKIN  harbor  has  12  feet  water  on  the  bar  ut  spring  tides.  In  running  in 
for  the  bar,  you  will  have  gradual  soundings  from  7  fathoms.  One  cable's  length  from  the 
bar }  uu  will  have  2^  to  2  tiithoms. 

lu  running  over  the  bur,  keep  the  north  shore  on  board,  and  steer  S.  W.  On  the  Inr- 
boai'd  bund,  one  mile  from  tlie  bar,  give  the  point  a  small  berth,  and  round  in  to  the  N.  W., 
and  luiuhor  in  4  fathoms  water. 

To  the  northward  of  tJie  bur,  one-quarter  of  a  mile  lies  the  wreck  of  a  vessel.  From 
the  l»ir  up  the  inlet,  the  navigation  is  very  dangerous,  being  filled  with  oyster  beds. 

These  are  very  danjiorous  harbors  in  a  gale  of  wind,  but  you  may  rido  along  shore 
with  tlio  wind  from  N.  W.  to  S.  VV.  When  the  wind  blows  hard  at  N.  E.,  or  E.  N.  E., 
and  you  are  in  sight  of  Chincoteugue  Shoals,  your  only  cliunce  fur  safety  is  to  sliind  to 
the  Houthwurd  ;  for  you  cannot  clear  the  land  to  the  northward,  or  go  into  the  hailHir  of 
Chiiicoteayue.  When  the  wind  is  to  the  eastward,  it  is  generally  tliick  woaiher  on  the 
const.  After  you  pass  to  the  southward  of  Chincoteague,  steer  .S.  S.  W.  for  the  liglit- 
huuse  on  (.-'a|)e  Henry,  for  the  nortliei'n  part  of  Machapungo  Shouls  lies  4  or  5  leaj;ue8 
to  tlio  northward  of  Smith's  Island,  and  the  southern  part  of  them  comes  near  abreast  of 
Biiid  isliind.  In  steering  to  the  S.  W.  westward,  5  or  6  leagues  S.  E.  of  Smith's  Island, 
yu!:  will  have  12  or  13  fathoms,  and  in  some  places  3  or  4  fathoms.  When  you  are  20 
ieajiues  from  the  land,  in  the  latitude  of  37°  30',  you  will  have  from  30  to  33  fathoms  ;  but 
when  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Henry,  you  will  have  from  7  to  8  fathoms,  within  a 
league  of  tlie  land,  and  a  strong  southerly  current,  which  in  general  runs  from  2  to  2<l 
knots  an  hour. 

CAl'K.S  OF  VIRGINIA. — In  coming  from  sea,  and  falling  in  to  the  northward,  you 
may  make  an  island,  called  Hog  Island,  which  has  a  shoal  on  tlie  N.  E.  side,  5  miles  from 
the  island,  and  r<so  Machapungo  Island;  the  latter  is  a  siiiiiller  island.  Hog  Island  and 
Smitli's  Island  are  about  6  or  7  leagues  from  each  other,  and  the  latter  has  a  lighthouse  on 
it.  Hog  Island  is  longer  than  Smith's;  the  trees  stand  more  open,  and  nre  not  so  thick 
aa  on  Smith's  Island ;  and  in  going  on  to  the  southward  tram  otf  Hog  Island,  you  will 
make  sand-hills  which  lie  between  Hog  Island  and  Smith's  Island,  being  a  sure  mark  you 
have  not  passed  Smith's  Island.  Be  careful  not  to  come  nearer  than  7  fathoms  when  otf 
the  sand-hills,  as  nearer  than  that  deptii  the  ground  is  broken. 


The  Hen  and 

Chickens. 


Cape  Hen' 
hpen  to  Cape 
Henry. 


Chincoteague 
light. 


Rehoboth 
Bay. 


Matomldn 
harbor. 


Capes  of  Vir- 
ginia. 


"Ill  "I  11  l»W,i«il"«(ip,iij|pii 


224 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


to 
Wost- 


Cape  Charles      A  I'mhtbonKo  lias  Iioph  erpctod  on  thn  north  end  of  Sniitli'i  Islund,  N.  E.  from  Cnno 
Lighthouse.      CIiihIi'h  ;  it  hIkiwh  ii  ri<v(ilviii.>  li^lit.  nixiiit  (iri  fi-ot  iiliovr  tlin  lovel  of  tli((  nnii. 

Sinirh'ii  Ittliiiid  is  thn  Ih'Ht  isliind  iilutr  |)ii<*sin^  tlio  Hiiiid-hillM  iiliovo  iiiHritioiitnl,  ()„  >u. 
northoni  end  of  it  ihoro  urn  Momi'  Mtiimj;'i"'.<  li't"'s.  which  iipiicar  hl<o  ii  griivo,  hut  vvliidi 
join  on  to  thn  isliind.  Ah  jiiii  ihuvv  up  with  Smith's  l.tliind,  you  iniiy  hiitil  intu  (i  am]  r 
futhoin«.  till  you  (i<'t  tu'nr  iilirciixt  of  it. 

Sniith'H   Ulaiid  h  ii  ijoml   pliicn   to  anchor  under,  with  tlio  winds  from  N.  N.   \V 
'•  ■"•         W.  N.  W.,  and  vosstds  ot'tfii  couih  to  tlioro  if  the  wind  t«  coniinj;  out  fioni  N.  and 
want. 

If  you  intond  to  anchor  thorH,  brin^  thn  fmht  to  Imnr  W.  S.  \V.  nnd  run  for  if,  and  yon 
may  go  in  as  nn  ir  as  your  flraujhl  of  wiitor  will  admit,  into  3  futhoina,  or  loss,  d'you  cliniiye 
Yon  will  have  liluo  mud  iiiid  HHiid  ;  and  when   yon  get    under  way  from  thcnii  e,  HlHcr  .S 

by  W.  till  you  cro^s  tin*  north  cluinni'l  in  7\  fati is ;  keep  on  till  you  raise  yournniunil" 

into.')  fathoms  on  thf  Mid  lie  Oround,  then  nloer  S.  W.,  whi(  h  wiil  cross  the  ,Midi||„  j^ 
4  fathoms;  keep  on  S.  W-  unldyou  deepen  into  (i  ov  7  I'atlioms,  ship  (diannel ;  ihon  wj'li 
a  strong  breeze  steer  W.  by  N  ,  which  will  curry  you  across  in  deep  water  iintd  yon  raiso 

!four  ({lound  on  the  Utrse-shoe.     When  Ht  anchor  under  Smith's  luland,  Capo  lleury 
ight  bears  about  S.  S.  \V. 

In  roniin'.;  in  from  the  soutliwnrd,  bound  to  Cape  Henry,  keep  in  7  fathoms  until  you 
begin  to  draw  up  with  False  Capr.  which  lies  about  7  leagues  from  Cape  Henry  towards 
Currituck  ;  then  'J  to  10  t^ttioms  is  full  near  eiiongli  to  Katse  Cape.  After  yoii  iiuve  m,i 
to  the  nortliwiird  of  False  ("ape,  yon  may  then  keep  ngiiin  in  7,  8,  and  9  fatlioms  (slilp 
channel)  till  you  get  up  witli  Cii|ie  Henry.  Kromolf  Roanoke  the  soundings  alon;;  slioie 
aro  hard  sand  all  along  until  nearly  up  with  Cape  Honry,  wheu  it  is  sticky  buttoin,  am] 
you  will  bo  in  channel  way. 

'I  he  shore  between  False  Cape  and  Capo  Henry  makes  in  like  n  bay,  something  liko 
Lynhavon  Bay,  and  in  thick  weather  u  stranger  might  mistake  it  for  Lynhaven  Hay.  and 
False  Cape  for  Cape  Henry,  if  it  is  so  thick  that  the  lighthouse  on  the  latter  ciiniiot  he 
seen;  but  in  round  False  Cape  it  is  nil  hanl  bottom,  and  in  Lynhaven  Bay  it  is  soft  or 
sticky  bottom,  and  in  some  places  very  tough  bottom. 

The  piissage  between  (Jape  (Charles  and  Outer  Middle  is  little  known, and  not  freq  lented 
by  large  vessels.     It  is  only  used  by  small  vessels  of  rt  or  10  feet  water. 

CVI'E  HKNR  V  lies  IJ  miles  S.  by  W,  from  Ciipe  Charles,  both  of  wliich  form  tlio 
entrancp  to  (Jhesapeake  Bay.  On  it  is  a  lighthouse,  the  lantern  of  which  is  elevated  IJO 
feet  above  the  livel  of  the  sea,  showing  a  fixed  light. 

When  comii.g  in  from  sea  in  the  latitude  of  Cape  Henry,  you  meet  with  Biiuii(liii!,'s 
about  2o  leagues  oil",  which  you  may  observe  by  the  color  of  the  water.  In  the  south 
edge  of  the  bank  you  will  have  40  fathoms  water,  which  will  shoal  to  '20,  and  still  de 
crease  ns  you  approach  the  shore,  generally  sandy  bottom.  In  clear  weather,  you  imiv 
see  the  land  when  in  about  10  or  11  fathoms,  regular  soundings,  at  which  time  you  will 
be  about  5  leagues  to  the  southward  of  it.  To  the  northward  of  the  land,  in  (i  futiiuiiis, 
the  soundings  are  irregular,  and  the  ground  coarser.  In  coming  in  with  the  wind  iiDrih- 
wardly,  you  must  be  careful  of  the  outer  part  of  the  Middle  Cround,  which  lies  '.)  mik's 
E.  N.  E.  from  Cape  Henry,  and  7  miles  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Cape  Chailes.  Vou  niiy 
go  so  near  it  as  to  bring  Cape  Henry  to  bear  W.  i  S.,  which  will  carry  yon  round  tho 
tail  of  it,  in  44  or  5  fathoms  water,  wl  en  you  will  deepen  into  11,  13,  or  13  fathoms,  and 
then  haul  away  for  the  bay,  the  Cape  being  steep  to.  The  channel  between  the  Cnpo 
and  Middle  Ground  is  about  4  miles  wide,  and  5  and  6  fathoms  water  close  to  the  Intter, 
When  Cape  Henry  lighthouse  bears  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  distant  about  3  leagues,  it  appears 
thus: 


Cape  Henry. 
Lighthouse. 


Hampton 
Roaa$. 


With  a  fair  wind  you  may  bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  W. ;  but  if  you  have  the  wind 
ahead,  and  are  obliged  to  turn  in,  you  may  stand  to  the  southward  till  the  ligbthuiiso 
bears  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  to  the  northward  till  it  bears  W.  by  S.  You  will  have  9  or  10 
fathoms  within  a  mile  of  the  lighthouse,  nnd  from  6  to  5  fathoms  close  to  the  Middle 
Ground. 

FOR  HAMPTON  ROADS — When  abreast  of  Cape  Henry,  and  the  lightlioiise 
bears  S.  S.  W  ,  distant  about  2i  miles,  steer  W.  by  N.  till  you  get  on  the  Horse  Shoe,  in 
5  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  There  are  no  soundings  at  5  fathoms  on  that  course  between 
Cape  Henry  and  the  Horse  Shoe.    The  first  soundings  as  you  approach  the  Shoe,  on 


•"■I"»1(H)P«: — ■•"^w 


y  III^H«Hiipi 


•  >'-  from  Cnpo 

MI'll. 

"VO.   but  W|||,,|, 
III    Itlt.)    (i  |„„J  ,-j 

n  N.  N.  W.  to 

l»    N.IIIkI  \V(,n|. 

•'  I'""' it,  mill  you 
<^-  i^'yoii  (tli(i(')se, 

tll(M|l(>,  Nle,,,.  J^_ 

"^*'yi>Mf:-niiiii,i 
><  til"  Ali,M|„i„ 
"••"I;  thuii  wi'l, 
r  until  Vdii  riuHB 
'.   Ciipi)  IJeiiry 

hoins  until  you 
ll.'iiry  towiinls 
!•  yiiii  ImvH  g„i 
>  t■|ltll(liI|,^  (sliip 
iii«^iil(iii4  Hlioie 
;ky  boltoiii,  luiil 

sotnothiiii;  like 
hiiVHi)  H,iy.  iind 
liittcr  (Nitiiiot  he 
iiy  it  id  soft  or 

1  not  freq  lented 

wliicli  forin  tlio 
is*  i.'lov;itwl  l','U 

with  8()iiiiilinj;3 

111     till'    SOIItll 

0.  mid  still  (le 
iither,  yon  iniiy 
h  tinin  yoii  will 
i.  in  (i  iiitiioiiis, 
ihfi  wind  Morili- 
licli  lios  !l  inili'H 
Ifs.  Vim  niiiy 
you  round  tlm 
1.'5  t'litlionis,  1111(1 
irii(>li  tliti  ("npo 
so  to  tlio  iiitter. 
guos,  it  iippniirs 


)mvo  tJin  wind 
tlio  liglitliouso 
II  hnve  9  or  10 
to  the  Middle 

the  lighthouse 
Horse  Shoe,  in 
curse  between 
I  the  Shoe,  on 


)»i    ../;'si>'':  <c^ 

i»it.ri"'' /'•  v\i^ 

f  I.- ',  rt  *  ,1     ■■> 

/        •'  /  .....x- 


.1 

.■I  / 

4      ! 


Ix^  •  /      i 


^^mmummmmmmif'm'it 


— Kiiiiiiiivd  IKi'  l/ir  .liiuTiiiiii  (jii/xt  /'rtiif  ifi !!' /',',/    _ 


''■"■/^ai0'y ) 


■ft 


Vj 


.V  -'V  ' 


,1 


\ 


"'nA- 


<'  \ 


■■,.1v    \ 

^ .' 


i':.v'ru.\\('K  TO  Til K 
CHESAPEAKE  BAY, 

lii'i/i«<'(/  /ii'/n  //ii'Sun'fi/.s  /itii<f) 
livl)I?.\(l.iiii.s  iiiul  olluMs/vz/f'/ylv 
(>/  //ic^iwy  ('uiiniiJ.s.si<Hi<i's  o/'  tfi,- 

r.s 


1 


\ 


\ 


in      K.IUJTXT. 


.,.1 '' 


H.W.  at  Old  m  Comfort.  Vm.  IH*™ 
rise 31i-.'3l 


Z^'   ...7 


\ 


i>»  »>!.'. 


>N^'»     ^j'^ 


■  ; 


1 


'•■^r 


,  v-<--' -m^r  L.....i,,^ 


'  fX 


-f ■ f  ■• 

,■  -  •>  t        ■'    J. 

''     .iV,-~ '- " 

t'ni'iii'  /■'/,// 


Iiiifiiiiiii  Cuiixf  I'ilol  lfi'!'/:'i/ 


\\   «* 


\ 


vj 


'^-m. 


IJ?M 


r/ZJ 


)  ^ 


^•-;:-^  (i 


'>   ■'•'"■  -^v 


?.^  A 


'It/  l.iifht 


\ 


% 


v). 


)v 


^d- 


"''/{■.. 


.:..:'''^.^i#^ 

•IS  vy 
•'  .» 


o 


V 


i^"^' 


//t>i>Arr_rrT//ii>xi/ 


miBsmsmmmmmm. 


I 


this  course,  ar 

I  iiooae  on  Cnpi 

you  will  have 

I'hen  steer  Vi 

I  aflwd,  steer  ' 

snuth  side ;  tl 

gticky  bottom, 

to  9  or  10  fath 

Point,  where 

W.  by  S.,  nntl 

I  s.  W.  by  W. 

S.  W.,  passin 

gooJ  iinchorir 

The  centre 

Comfort,  disti 

Old  Point  < 

niles.    It  sho 

ttiHe  for  ve8s 

A  floating  1 

Old  Poin 

Back  Ri' 

(Jiipe  He 

Vi!33els  go 

of  this  vessel. 

I  fort,  by  havin 

\  bell  will  be 

Sliould  yoi 

j  Comfort  light 

ton  Bar,  on  tl 

I  when  Old  Po 

cliDriiig-    Afl 

I  S.  \V.,  and  hi 

From  Han 

recommend  i 

I  carry  them  t( 

As  you  api 

warrl  of  the 

by  the  Colon 

I  this  courdo  ti 

boat  oil'  Crar 

lijht  in  with 

jeaviiif;  her  o 

tlie  larboard  1 

[  J  E.  till  you 

A  light-ves 

I  Craiiev  Islnn 

LVN  HA 

anchor  in  Lj 

I  house  on  Cu| 

(to  10  fatho 

shore,  anil  ir 

I  tanco  of  the 

)ay  and  drop 

Rkmarks. 

I  Roads,  you  e. 

I  in  about  C  or 

I  Jianlins  to  th 

channel  tlm 

towards  Wil 

I  whore  the  g 

I  Point  as  8001 

Of  the  Th 

I  distant  3i  m 

I  is  steep  to.  f 

[shoal  off  Wi 

I  is  the  reusor 

I  Thimble  yoi 

J  may  be  cons 

I  which  is  a  i 


ijwHimni«n^.ii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  886 

I  course,  are  6  and  7  fathoms,  a  sticky  or  tough  bottom,  at  about  4  miles  from  the  light- 
I  iiouae  on  Cnpe  Henry ;  and  a  mile  further  on,  (say  about  5  miles  from  the  lighthouse) 
mu  will  have  the  5  fathoms,  sandy,  on  the  tail  of  the  shoe,  where  vessels  can  anchor. 
•['hen  steer  W.  until  y_u  get  o;j  the  south  side  of  the  channel  for  an  ebb  tide;  but  tide 
jtiaod,  steer  W.  i  N.  or  W.  by  N.  Those  courses  will  carry  you  into  5  fathoms  on  the  '  ^ 
south  side;  then  you  may  steer  W.  N.  W.,  which  will  carry  you  into  6  or  7  fathoms, 
jtlcky  bottom,  until  nearly  up  with  Willoughby's  Point,  and  when  you  deepen  your  water 
to  9  or  10  fathoms  on  your  W  N.  W.  course,  you  have  passed  the  bank  off  Willoughby's 
point,  where  there  is  a  light  vessel ;  then  bring  the  light  on  Old  Point  Comfort,  W.  or 
W.  hv  S.,  and  steer  for  it  until  nearly  up  with  it,  say  within  half  a  mile;  then  haul  up 
S,  W.  by  W.  till  you  bring  the  light  on  OM  Point  Comfort  to  bear  N.  W.,  when  you  steer 
g,  W.,  passing  bptween  Fort  Calhoun  and  Old  Point,  for  the  Roads,  5,  6,  or  7  fathoms, 
jTooJ  anchoring. 

The  centre  of  the  Castle  (Fort  Calhoun)  is  S.  17°  E.  from  the  lighthouse  at  Old  Point 
Comfort,  distant  about  one  mile. 

Old  Point  Comfort  lighthouse  bears  from  Cape  Henry  light,  N.  18°  W.  distance  15   Light 
miles.    It  shows  a  fixed  light  elevated  about  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  is  a 
guide  for  vessels  bound  info  Norfolk  or  Hampton  Roads.     High  water  8h.  22m.,  rise  3  ft. 

A  floating  light-vessel  has  been  stationed  off  Willoughby's  Bank  in  3^  fathoms  water.      Light-ship. 
01(1  Point  Comfort  lighthouse,  bearing  W.  i  N.    2  miles. 
Back  River  Point,        '•  "        N.  i  W.    5     •• 

Cnpe  Henry.  "  "        E.  S.  E.  13     " 

V(!3sels  going  out  or  coming  into  Hampton  Roads,  should  not  pass  to  the  southward 
of  this  vessel.  She  may  be  distinguished  in  the  night  from  the  light  on  Old  Point  Com- 
fort. Iiy  having  two  lanterns,  the  forward  one  elevated  41  feet,  and  the  after  one  32  feet. 
Xbfll  will  be  rung  in  foggy  weather. 

Should  you,  after  passing  Willoughby's  Point,  fall  into  14  or  15  fathoms.  Old  Point 
Comfort  lighthouse  bearing  W.  N.  W.,  steer  up  S.  W.  by  W.,  but  go  no  nearer  to  Hamp- 
ton Bar,  on  the  N.  side,  than  10  fathoms,  it  being  steep  to,  until  you  pass  Sowell's  Point, 
when  Old  Point  Comfort  bearing  N.  E.,  you  will  fall  into  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms,  good  an- 
clinriiig.  After  passing  Fort  Calhoun,  be  careful  of  the  shoal  which  extends  from  it  W. 
S.  W.,  and  bending  to  the  south  connects  with  the  bar  off  Sowell's  Point. 

From  Hampton  Roads  to  Norfolk  the  channel  is  intricate  to  strangers,  and  we  should 
recommend  anchoring  in  the  Roads,  but  the  following  directions,  strictly  followed,  will 
cnrry  them  to  Norfolk  : 

As  you  approach  Old  Point  Comfort,  you  will  discover  a  low  tree  standing  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  lighthouse ;  steer  S.  W.  until  you  bring  this  tree  over  the  house  occupied 
by  the  Colonel,  which  is  the  first  house  to  the  westward,  and  painted  white ;  continue 
this  coiirdo  till  up  with  Sowoll's  Point,  when  you  may  haul  to  the  southward  till  the  light- 
boat  olf  Cranoy  Island  bears  S.  by  E.,  observing  at  the  same  time  not  to  shut  Old  Point 
li;;lit  in  with  Sowell's  Point,  and  continue  steering  S.  by  E.  till  you  pass  the  light-boat, 
leaviiig  her  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  then  take  your  soundings  off  Lambert's  Point,  on 
the  liirbonrd  hand,  in  4  fathoms,  and  steer  S.  S.  E.,  till  you  get  into  5  fathoms ;  then  S.  E. 
i  E.  till  you  get  up  to  the  fort,  3  miles  distant,  having  from  5  to  6  fathoms. 

A  light-vessel,  having  one  light  at  her  mast-head,  has  been  placed  at  the  extremity  of 
Cranoy  Island  Flats,  in  Elizabeth  River,  in  4i  fathoms. 

LYN  HAVEN  BAY. — If  requisite,  when  entering  the  Capes,  and  it  is  advisable  to  Lyn-Haven 
anchor  in  Lyn-Haven  Bay,  you  may  run  in  clear  of  the  Middle  Ground,  when  the  light-  Bay. 
house  on  Cape  Henry  bears  W.  Iiy  S.,  as  this  course  will  lead  to  the  channel-way,  in  from 
7  til  10  fathoms,  sticky  bottom.  It  is  then  proper  to  take  soundings  towards  the  southern 
shore,  anil  in  order  to  do  this,  steer  west  until  you  have  advanced  to  within  a  short  dis- 
tnnco  of  the  lighthouse,  (say  half  a  mile;)  then  rounding  the  point  you  may  haul  into  tVie 
baynnd  drop  anchor,  as  most  convenient,  in  from  7  to  4  fathoms. 

RKMAaKs. — If  in  going  along  the  southern  side  of  the  channel  bound  to  Hampton 
Roads,  you  shoalen  your  water  to  less  than  5  fathoms,  haul  off  to  the  northward,  and  keep 
in  nhout  0  or  7  fathoms,  until  you  judge  yourself  nearly  up  with  Willoughby's  Point.  By 
iiaiiling  to  the  northward  you  v.  .11  deepen  your  water.  On  the  Horse  Shoe  side  of  the 
channel  tlu'  brtttom  is  hiirrl  sand,  and  on  the  south  side  it  is  soft  bottom,  until  drawing  on 
towards  Willoughby's  Point,  when  it  becomes  hard;  therefore,  being  on  the  south  side, 
whore  the  ground  is  soft,  you  may  always  know  your  drawing  up  with  Willoughby's 
Point  as  soon  as  you  get  hard  bottom.     Go  no  nearer  Willonghby's  Point  than  7  fathoms. 

Of  the  Thimbu.— h  in  a  small  lump,  E.  15°  N.  from  Old  Point  Comfort  lighthouse,  TkeThimble. 
distant  31  miles,  and  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  with  about  9  feet  water  on  it.  It 
is  steep  to.  say  7  fathoms,  but  btVmg  small,  is  quickly  passed.  It  lies  a  little  bi'low  the 
shoal  off  Willoughby's  Point,  (where  the  channel  is  about  one  mile  wide,)  to  avoid  which 
is  the  reason  why  it  is  necessary  to  get  soundings  first  on  the  Horse-shoe.  Near  the 
Thimble  you  will  have  sticky  bottom,  and  on  the  Horse  Shoe  hard  sand.  The  Thimble 
mny  be  considered  as  on  the  edge  of  the  Horse  Shoe,  and  when  Back  River  Point  light, 
which  is  a  revolving  one,  bears  N.  N.  W.,  you  are  abreast  of  it.  15 


•mmm 


926 

Horse-shoe. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tide. 


Cape  Henry, 
or  Lyn-haven 
-Bay,  to 
York  River. 


Light. 


Neu>  Point 
Comfort, 
Mohjack 
Bay  and 
SevernRiver 


Light. 


THE  HORSE-SHOE.— The  tail  of  the  Horso-shoe  lies  about  5  miles  N.  W.  from  I 
Cape  Henry  lighthouse,  and  12  miles  east  from  the  lighthouse  on  Old  Point  Comfort' 
the  least  water  in  that  place  is  4  fathoms,  bard  sand,  broken  ground.   The  southern  edee 
of  this  shoal  runs  W.  i  N-,  until  it  connects  with  the  main  shore,  a  little  to  the  north  of  I 
Old  Point  Comfort,  forming  the  northern  side  of  the  channel  into  Hampton  Roads.  The! 
N.  E.  side  extends  in  a  N.  W.  direction,  until  it  connects  with  the  Pocosin  Flats,  nearlr 
up  to  the  entrance  to  York  River,and  forms  the  western  side  of  the  Bay  Channel.    There 
is  good  anchorage  on  the  Horse-shoe,  from  the  tail  to  within  3i  or  4  miles  oi  the  shore 
and  the  smaller  class  of  vessels  may  go  nearer  in.  ' 

Tide. — The  flood  tide  runs  in  round  Cape  Henry  and  Lyn-Haven  Bay  until  8  o'clock  I 
on  the  full  and  change,  in  the  mid-channel ;  and  out  of  the  way  of  the  Chesapeake  stream 
it  flows  at  8  ;  in  Hampton  Roads  at  8h.  23m.,  rise  3  feet.  As  the  tide  varies  considerahlv  J 
in  its  direction  according  to  the  time  from  ebb  to  flood,  and  is  influenced  by  the  wind,  at- 
tention should  be  paid  to  the  bearings  of  the  lights,  as  well  as  to  the  soundings,  when  run- 
ning either  up  to  Willoughby's  Point  or  towards  New  Point  Comfort,  for  fear  you  cross 
the  channel.  The  ebb  from  James'  and  York  River  sets  over  the  Middle  Ground  to  the 
eastward,  which  renders  the  navigation  there  dangerous  in  the  night  or  in  tiiick  we.iiher 

CAPE  HENRY,  OR  LYN-HaVEN  BAY,  TO  YORK  RIVER.— As  CupeHenry 
S.  S.  E.  would  lead  you  near  the  tail  of  the  Middle  Ground,  and  as  the  proceeding  with  it 
at  S.  E.  would  carry  you  on  the  tail  and  north  edge  of  the  Horse-shoe,  your  keeping  the 
cape  on  any  bearing  between  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.  will  carry  you  through  between  the  two 
shoals.  On  the  tail,  and  along  the  north  side  of  the  Horse-shoe,  the  shoalings  aregrmlual 
With  Cape  Hunrv  bearing  S.  S.  E.,  or  S.  E.  by  S  ,  steer  N.  N.  W..  or  N.  \V.  by  N,, 
until  you  bring  Cape  Charles  to  bear  E.  by  N.;  you  are  then  to  the  northward  of  the 
Horse-shoe,  and  may  steer  N.  W.,  or  N.  W.  by  W.,  according  as  you  have  the  wind 
and  tide.  As  the  ebb  sets  strong  out  of  the  Chesapeake  over  the  Horse  shoo,  you  u)u$t 
not,  with  a  northerly  wind  and  ebb  tide,  approach  any  nearer  to  the  shoal  than  5  or  ij 
fathoms  water.  When  you  have  brought  New  Point  Comfort  to  boar  N.  N.  W.,  and 
Back  River  light  to  bear  S.  by  W.,  you  are  then  on  the  tad  of  York  Spit,  in  3  fathoms 
water.  When  you  are  a  little  above  Long  Isle,  you  must  not  come  any  neater  tu  the 
shore  than  3  fathoms,  until  you  enter  the  river  above  the  marsh  ;  tlien  keep  in  9  ^r  10 
fathoms,  and  run  up  and  anchor  between  York  and  Gloucester  in  what  depth  you  pitmse. 

WUii  a  contrary  wind  stand  towards  the  Horse-shoe  in  4i  or  5  fathoms,  and  from  it 
into  6i  or  7^  tathums,  until  you  are  abreast  of  the  entrance  of  Pocosin,  where  tliere  is  a 
gut  of  7  fathoms,  which  runs  close  to  the  entrance  ;  you  should  therefore  be  carelul  to 
avoid  going  too  fat  n,  and  thereby  getting  on  the  tail  that  extends  from  Toes'  Marsh.  When 
you  have  got  thus  far  up,  you  should  go  no  nearer  to  the  shore  on  this  side  than  7  or  (U 
fathoms,  all  the  way  up  to  York  Town.  On  the  other  side  you  should  not  stand  nny 
nearer  to  the  small  isles  on  York  Spit  than  10  or  11  fathoms.  Close  to  the  tail  uf  this 
spit  there  are  6  fathoms;  close  to  the  middle  of  it  there  are  10  fathoms;  and  close  to  it, 
abreast  of  the  islands,  you  will  have  13  fatlioms,  and  before  you  can  get  another  cast  of  tiie 
lead,  you  will  be  ashore.  When  you  have  entered  the  river,  you  must  not  come  any 
nearer  to  the  flat  than  8  or  9  fathoms  water.  This  flat  extends  from  the  north  shore  al- 
most one-tiiird  over  the  river. 

The  lighthouse  on  Back  River  Point  contains  a  revolving  light,  elevated  40  feet,  and 
serves  as  a  guide  fur  vessels  bound  into  the  river,  aa  well  us  assists  vessels  bound  up  the 
bay. 

NEW  POINT  COMFORT,  MOBJACK  BAY  AND  SEVERN  RIVER.— When 
you  bring  Cape  Henry  to  bear  S  S.  E.,  you  may  steer  N.  N.  W.,  8  leagues,  which  course 
and  distance  will  carry  you  up  to  New  Point  Comfort.  If  you  wish  to  anchor  at  New  I'oint 
Comfort,  which  bears  from  the  Cape  about  N.  W.  by  N.,  distant  8  leagues,  you  must  tiike 
care  of  the  spit  that  runs  oft'  the  point  about  8.  E.,2  miles.  Keep  to  the  westward  cjf  this 
point  of  sand,  and  you  may  run  in  under  the  point,  and  anchor  in  4  or  5  fatlioms  water, 
fine  bottom,  in  Mobjack  Buy,  where  you  will  be  secure  from  northerly  or  N.  E.  wiiiiis. 

On  New  Point  Comfort,  whicii  f.iiins  tho  eastern  side  of  Mobjack  Bay,  is  a  lighthouse 
containing  a  fixed  light,  elevated  (iO  feet  abo.'o  the  level  of  the  water. 

Vessels  ut  anchor  in  Mobjack  Bay,  are  exposed  to  tho  wind  from  E.  S.  E.  toS.  E.,  and 
I  would  therefore  recommend  in  that  case  to  go  into  Severn  River,  where  tlicty  will  lie 
safe  from  all  winds.  Your  directions  for  this  port  are  to  bring  the  south  point  of  New 
Point  Comfort  to  bear  E.  by  S.,  and  steer  W.  by  N.,  2  leagues,  which  course  you  will 
continue  till  Severn  River  bears  W.  S.  W.,  when  you  must  steer  into  tho  river  W.  S. 
W.,  orS.  W.  by  W.,  which  will  carry  you  safe,  where  you  may  lie  land-locked  from  all 
winds.  In  running  for  this  river,  you  will  make  two  bunches  of  trees  on  your  larboard 
hand,  which  at  a  distance  appear  like  two  islands;  but,  as  you  approach  them,  you  will 
find  they  are  on  the  main  land.  In  going  into  this  river,  you  must  keep  your  lead  going; 
keep  in  the  middle,  and  go  between  two  points  of  marsh,  and  you  will  have  no  more  than 
3  fathoms  between  New  Point  Comfort  aod  Severn  River,  muddy  bottom.  You  may  go 
to  sea  from  this  river,  with  the  wind  from  S.  W.  to  N.  W. 


BLtTNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


227 


CAPE  HENRY  UP  THE  BAY  TO  THE   POTOMAC   RIVER   &c.— When    Cape  Henry 
jou  come  in  from  sea,  and  are  bound  up  the  Bay.  bring  Cape  Henry  light  to  bear  S.  S.  E.,    up  the  bay  to 
ind  steer  N.  N.  W.,  about  4  leaenes,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  northward  and  west-    me  Potomac 
I  ward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  that  lies  between  the  two  capes,  and  when  you  have  Smith's    River,  Sfc, 
Island,  (off  Cape  Charles,)  to  bear  E.  by  S.,  or  Back  River  Point  lighthouse  W.  S.  W.,  * 

you  will  be  to  the  northward  of  the  shoal  part. 

If  you  have  the  wind  ahead,  and  are  obliged  to  turn  to  windward,  you  must  not  stand 
jlirther  to  the  eastward  after  the  lighthouse  (or  the  Cape,)  bears  S.  S.  E.,  as  the  western 
part  of  the  Middle  Ground  is  steep  to.  In  stiinding  to  the  westward,  you  may  go  in  SJ 
or4  fiithoms  without  danger;  but  in  standing  to  the  eastward  do  not  go  in  less  than  8  fath- 
oms, as  you  will  be  near  the  Middle  Ground. 
Back  River  Point  light  is  a  revolving  light,  and  bears  from  Light. 

Cape  Henry N.  W.  J  W 16    miles. 

Old  Point  Comfort N.  N.  E 51     » 

New  Point  Comfort S 13i     " 

After  you  are  clear  of  the  Middle  Ground,  as  before  directed,  (Cape  Henry  bearing  S. 
S,E.,)  and  having  a  fair  wind,  you  may  steer  up  the  Bay  north.  6  leagues.  Come  not  to 
the  westward  of  north  until  you  have  Gwinn's  Island,  (which  is  about  3  leagues  north  of 
ffew  Point  Comfort)  bearing  W.  N.  W.  from  you,  to  avoid  a  dangerous  shoal  called  the 
Wolf  Trap,  which  lies  N.  N.  E.  2  leagues  from  New  Point  Comfort  lighthouse,  and  S.  E. 
from  Owinn's  Island,  which  is  small. 

A  light  vessel,  showing  2  lights,  is  anchored  near  the  Wolf  Trap.  The  forward  light  is 
elevHted  30  feet,  the  after  one  38  feet. 

Wlien  past  the  Wolf  Trap  steer  north  about  11  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  up  the 
mouth  of  the  Potomac  River.  In  running  the  above  course  you  will  have  from  10  to  4 
fiithoms  before  you  come  up  with  the  Tangier  Islands.  If,  as  you  approach  theee  Islands, 
you  shoalen  your  water  to  3  fathoms,  hard  bottom,  you  must  haul  a  little  to  the  westward, 
when  you  will  deepen  your  soundings.  You  will  pass  the  light  vessel  off  the  mouth  of 
tlie  Rappahannock  on  the  larboard  hand.  This  light  vessel  is  anchored  on  the  end  of  the 
shoRJ  off  Windmill  Point,  and  shows  one  light. 

If  the  wind  should  be  ahead,  be  careful  as  you  approach  Lower  Tangier  Island  that 
you  do  not  got  hooked  in  behind  the  spit,  which  extends  oft'  from  the  southern  point  S. 
W.  about  4  miles ;  and  do  not,  until  you  pass  it,  bring  the  lighthouse  on  Smith's  Point  to 
bear  to  the  west  of  N.  W.     (See  Tangier  Islands.) 

When  Little  Watts  Island,  which  lies  E.  by  S.  from  the  south  end  of  Lower  Tangier, 
4  miles  distant,  and  or;  which  is  a  fixed  light,  ranges  with  the  trees  on  Lower  Tangier, 
you  will  begin  to  deepen  your  water  from  5  to  10  and  12  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  continu- 
ing your  course  north  until  Smith's  Point  lighthouse,  which  is  on  the  southernmost  point 
of  Potomac  Rivor  bears  W.  and  keeping  rather  on  the  Tangier  side,  you  will  bo  in  10  or 
12  fathoms  water.  Should  you  deepen  your  water  to  15  or  20  fathoms,  you  will  be  very 
near  the  spit,  which  extends  off  from  Smith's  Point  into  the  bay  E.  S.  E..  about  4  miles 
and  on  the  end  of  which  is  a  light  vessel  showing  two  lights.     (See  directions  iiom  . 

Rappahannock  to  Smith's  Point.) 

The  lighthouse  on  Smith's  Point  shows  a  fixed  light.at  an  elevation  of85  feet.   It  is  a   Light. 
leading  light,  and  wants  some  improvement. 

When  Smith's  Point  light  bears  nearly  N.  by  W.  |  W.,  9  miles,  and  appears  as  repre- 
sented in  the  annexed  figure,  with  a  house  on  its  west  side  open,  it  leads  in  a  fairway  up 
the  chnnnni,  equally  clear  of  the  shoals  to  the  east  and  west. 


SMITH'S  POINT  LIGHTHOUSE. 

When  'mith's  Point  lighthouse  bears  west  of  you,  and  soundings  in  10  or  12  fathoms 
on  the  T;  , 'or's  side,  as  before  directed  ;  you  may  haul  up  N.  W.  by  N.  for  Point  Look- 
out, which  is  the  northern  point  of  Potomac  River,  and  come  to  within  one  mile  of  the 
poir  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  and  have  4  or  5  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  Or  if  you 
Wis  harbor,  having  the  wind  down  the  bay,  you  may  run  in  round  Point  Lookout,  giv- 
ing It  a  small  berth,  and  anchor  in  Cornfield  Harbor,  so  called,  where  you  will  be  sheltered 
from  all  northerly  winds.  r  •  j,  i 

On  Point  Lookout  there  is  a  lighthouse  containing  a  fixed  light  in  a  lantern  on  the   Ltghlnouae. 
keeper's  dwelling,  of  service  to  those  bound  into  the  Potomac,  or  up  th«  bay,  with  tba 


"w'liwr 


imm 


888 


New  Point 
Comfort  to 
Rappahan- 
nock River. 


,\:\: 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 

wind  to  the  westward.    OfTthe  point  a  bar  PAtends  half  a  mile  S.  i  W.    The  light  bear.! 
ioff  W.,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  diatunt,  you  will  have  3<1  fathoms,  sticky  bottom. 

NEW  POINT  COMFORT  TO  RAPPAHANNOCK  RIVER.— Fromihig  pointi 
a  spit  extends  S.  E.  2  miles,  which  you  will  avoid  by  not  going  into  less  tlian  j  iHthomgl 
water.  The  Wolf  Trap  lies  about  5  miles  N.  N.  E.  from  the  lij^ht  on  New  Point  ComJ 
fort:  on  it  there  are  I'i  feet  at  common  tides,  and  between  it  and  New  Point  ('omfortl 
there  are  8  or  9  fiitlioms,  and  near  it,  7  fathoms  water.  A  light-ship  is  anchored  nearl 
this  shoal  showing  two  lights.  The  shore  from  New  Point  Comfort  up  to  Cherry  Point  I 
the  N.  point  ot'Gwinn's  Island,  isnot  bold  to,  but  you  can  feel  your  way,  keeping  in  not  less! 
than  4  fathoms.  A  spit  extends  off  nortb  from  this  point  some  distnace,  and,  should  you  I 
wish  to  harbor  in  tho  Piaukatank,  after  turning  it  haul  over  towards  Stingriiy  Point,  from  I 
which  a  spit  puts  off  E.  about  2  miles,  and  keeping  your  soundings  on  the  sturboiud  Bidel 
of  the  river,  you  mny  haul  up  S.  W.  qhogsingyour  anchorage  in  3  fathoms  water,  secure! 
from  all  winds. 

If  you  wish  to  go  into  Rappahannock  River,  off  which  lies  a  light-vessel,  showing  the! 
end  of  the  spit  extending  from  Wind  Mdl  Point,  and  which  you  leiive  on  your  starboard  I 
hand,  keep  your  soundings  on  the  larboard  hand,  in  from  3  to  7  fathoms,  nnd  do  not! 
deepen  your  water  more  than  7  fathoms  to  the  northward,  to  avoid  the  sand  spit  wliichl 
runs  off  from  the  northern  point  of  the  river,  (Windmill  Point)  which  is  very  steep  i 
but  keep  the  southern  side  in  the  above  de|ith  of  water,  when  you  may  anchor  in  7  orSJ 
fathoms,  good  bottom;  or  you  miiy  anchor  on  tho  northern  side  of  the  river,  about  cue 
mile  above  Windmill  Point,  within  a  short  distance  of  the  shore,  in  3  fathoms  water 
good  bottjm.  secure  from  all  winds. 


Rappahan- 
nock to 
Smith's 
Point. 


Light-ship. 


Tangier  lil- 
andi. 


View  of  Windmill  Point  at  (he  North  Entrance  of  the  Rappaliannock. 

This  point  is  just  half  way  between  New  Point  Comfort  and  Smith's  Point.    Ths 
Windmill   Heef  now  extends  about  3  miles  from  the  point  to  the  S.  E.  by  E.,  and  furiiij  I 
a  broad  shelf  of  2i,  2,  and  li  futhoms,  thence  shoaling  to  the  dry  shore,  on  the  oiid  of  I 
which  is  a  floating  light,   bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Wiudmill  Point,  two  miled  distant,! 
and  showing  one  ligbt. 

RAPPAHANNOCK  TO  SMITH'S  POINT.— From  the  light-vessel  off  Windmill  | 
Point  to  the  end  of  the  flat  ofl'  Smith's  Point  light,  whicli  is  tlie  bouth  side  of  the  Poto- 
mac River,  the  course  is  N.  i  E.  and  the  distance  5i  leagues  :  you  may  run  tliiH  in  G  or7 1 
fathoms  water.     After  passing  Windmill  Point  bo  cartful,  in  standing  to  tho  westward, 
to  keep  the  light  on  Smith's  Point  open,  to  avoid  a  spit  which  puts  ufl'from  Ucininieiun'i  I 
Marsh,  about 'J  miles  north  of  Wiudmill  Point.     When  you  draw  near  the  sliuiil  wliichl 
runs  oti  from  Smitli's  Point,  you  should  not  go  into  loss  than  7  fathoms.     This  sliualeic. 
tends  about  4  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the  point :  on  its  extremity  there  are  only  -i  t'lithums  I 
water,  and  very  near  to  it,  eastward,  there  are  from  10  to  2U  Itithoms.     Tho  murk  tor  the 
shoalest  part  ot'thisspitis  a  house  with  a  white  chimney,  standing  among  tho  trees  on  the  | 
shore  within  Smith's  Island,  (.Smith's  Point  is  sotnelimes  called  Smith's  Islaiul.     It  isse- 

farated  from  the  main  land  by  a  creek.  We  mention  this,  us  there  are  two  otiior  Smith's  | 
slands,  one  at  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  and  the  other  opposite  thn  mouth  of  tlic  Potomac, 
on  botli  of  which  are  lighthouses,)  open  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  and  bearing  west,  I 
When  this  house  bears  W.  by  N.  you  are  to  the  southward  oftheextromity  of  the  shoal, 
and  when  it  bears  W.  by  S.  you  are  to  the  northward  of  it. 

That  which  adils  considerably  to  the  danger  of  this  shoal,  in  going  either  up  or  down 
the  Chesapeake,  is  the  broken  islands  which  lie  on  the  eastern  side  of  tho  cliaiiuel,  aad 
tlie  flats  which  extend  to  the  westward  from  them. 

A  li^ht-vessel  has  been  stationed  otf  this  spit  in  4^  fathoms  water,  showing  two  lights;  { 
the  tbremost  one  34^  feet   elevation,  the  after  one  39  feet.     Vessels  passing  either  up 
or  down  the  bay,  should  avoid  going  between  it  and  Smith's  Point. 

TANtilER  ISLANDS. — Lower  Tangier  lies  S.  E.  from  the  mouth  of  tho  Potomac  I 
River:  it  is  about  4  miles  in  length,  being  mostly  marsh,  with  small  humniucksof  lirm 
soil,  on  which  tho  iiihabitauts  have  built  their  houses.     A  cluster  of  pine  trues  on  the  | 
southern  part  of  the  island  is  the  only  timber  now  standing,  and  a  collection  of  woodeo  I 
buildings  close  to   them,   whitewashed,  used  during  camp   meeting,  serves  to  puiat  out 
the  southeru  point  of  a  chain  of  islands,  which  extend  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel 
of  the  bay,  as  tar  aa  Kedge's  Straits. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


9S9 


Ppper  Tangier  lies  N.  a  little  westerly  of  Lower  Tangier,  separated  by  an  openin);, 
fbich  is  very  shallow,  of  3  miles  in  width :  It  is  called  generally  Smith's  Island,  U  about 
} miles  in  length,  being  directly  opposite  the  Potomac  River,  and  resembles  Lower  Tan- 
jljf,  siive  that  it  is  wooded  in  several  parts,  towards  the  centre  and  north  end.  A  light- 
L.o  showing  a  fixed  light  has  been  erected  on  Fns 


[louse  snowing  a  nxea  light 

liiti);  the  tower  is  on  the  keeper's  house. 

ilint 


g  Point,  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  isl- 
Point  Lookout  bears  from  it  W.  13  miles  dis- 


Light. 


This  light  serves  as  a  guide  to  Kedge's  Straits,  and  alsc  to  warn  you  of  the  bar 

irhicli  puts  off  S.  W.  from  Holland's  Island. 

These  islands  are  intersected  by  creeks,  navigable  only  by  canoes :  the  shores  are  not 

lobe  approached  except  by  vessels  of  light  draft  of  water.     The  flat  extending  off  on  the 

»pstern  side,  narrows  the  channel  of  the  bay,  and  the  spit  off  the  S.  end  of  Lower  Tan- 


h''"" 


extends  S.  W.  about  4   miles   from  the  cluster  of  trees  spoken  of;  but  yon  may 


p,.joffand  on  in  what  water  you  please,  keeping  your  lead  constantly  going.     The  in 

labitants  are  a  hardy,  honest  and  industrious  set  of  men,  accustomed  to  the  navigation  of 

be  bay.  and  on  making  a  signal,  should  assistance  be  wanted,  it  will  be  rendered  promptly. 

TANrilKll  SOUND. — If  you  wish  to  go  into  Tangier  Sound,  bring  Windmill  Point  Tangier 
obenr  S.  W.  I)y  W.;  steer  N.  E.  by  E.,  and  you  will  get  soundings  on  the  Tangier  Bar,  Sound. 
I  in  5  fathoms ;  the  cluster  of  pine  trees  and  buildings  on  the  south  part  of  Lower  Tangier 
Uilltlien  be  seen  bearing  N.  E.  of  you,  and  you  may  edge  off  and  on  the  southern  side 
ofthe  bar  in  what  water  you  please,  from  3  to  15  fathoms,  bottom  hard  and  sandy  ;  but 
it  19  not  advisable  to  come  nearer  the  Tangier  Bar  than  6  fathoms,  as  it  shoalens  from  6 
to  2  fathoms  in  200  yards ;  should  you  wish  to  anchor,  when  the  cluster  of  trees  hear  W. 
ofvoii,  haul  up  to  the  northward  and  westward,  where  there  is  good  anchorage  for  small 
tessels.  secure  from  westerly  winds,  in  a  bay  called  Crocket's  Bay,  about  S.  E.  from  -  i^ 

the  houses   in    tlie   middle   of   the    island,    and   N.  £.   of  the   cluster  of  trees.      If  '    ' 

vou  proceed  up  the  sound,  it  is  proper  to  get  soundings  on  the  Watts'  Island  side,  as  it  is         .  j  i  .:■. 
rather  more   gradual,  steering  parallel  with  the  islands  on  your  starboard  hand.  N.  and 
keeping  in  mid-channel ;  when  Great  Fox  Island  bears  E.  of  you,  which  has  a  few  pines  .  ..  >    i 

on  it,  you  will  see  a  tall  poplar  on  Jane's  Island  bearing  N.  E.  by  N.;  haul  towards  it, 
fleering  N.  N.  E.  and  keeping  your  soundings  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  channel,  to 
avoid  the  flat  which  puts  off  from  Horse  Hummock,  on  which  are  some  houses  and 
apple  trees;  keep  this  course  until  the  poplar  bears  S.  E.  of  you,  when  you  will  steer  N. 
N.  W..  getting  soundings  on  your  larboard  hand  on  Terrapin  Bar;  you  will  then  see  a 
house  with  a  clump  of  cedars  on  the  N.  point  of  Upper  Tangier,  called  Kedge  Island, 
which  you  will  steer  for  when  it  bears  W.  N.  W.  keeping  in  not  less  than  2  fathoms 
vater,  and  giving  it  a  berth  of  attout  100  yards.  Continue  this  course  until  the  light-  Lighthoute. 
house  on  Fog  Point  bears  S.  when  you  may  steer  S.  W.  to  clear  the  point  of  the  spit 
which  puts  off  from  the  .S.  point  of  Holland's  Island.  This  spit  Is  about  4  or  5  miles  in 
lengtii.  of  hard  sand  and  irregular  bottom.  Should  you  wish  to  go  to  the  Nanticoke, 
Manoliin,  or  Annemesix  Rivers,  you  can  obtain  a  pilot  soon  after  entering  Tangier  Sound 
by  hoisting  a  signal. 

LITTLE  WATTS'  ISLAND  AND  POCOMOKE  BAY.— There  is  a  lighthouse    Little  Watts' 
on  this  island  exhibiting  a  'fixed  light,  in  a  tower  40  feet  high.   The  island  is  small,  and    Island  and 
forms  the  western  point  of  Pocomoke  Bay.     A  long  spit  extends  off  from  it  S.  W.  about    Pocomoke 
Smiles;  you  can  keep  on  the  edge  of  it  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms  water,  if  bound  up  this    Bay. 
hay.  and  anchor  either  under  the  east  side  of  Great  Watts'  Island,  or  on  the  opposite  side, 
when  you  must  take  a  pilot  if  bound  to  either  Apes'  Hole  or  Pocomoke  River. 

Little  and  Great  Watts'  Island  with  the  Fnx  Islands,  divide  Tangier  Sound  from  this 
bay;  there  is  a  narrow  possage  for  vessels  drawing  5  feet  water,  at  the  north  of  Great 
Watts'  Island  into  Tangier  Sound,  and  save  that,  there  is  no  other  passage  between  these 
islands. 

POTOMAC  RIVER  separates  Virginia  from  Maryland.     Its  entrance  is  between    Potomac 
Smith's  Point  on  the  south  side,  and  Point  Lookout  on  the  north;  on  both  of  these  points    River. 
there  are  lighthouses;  the  distance  between  them  is  10  miles. 

To  enter  llie  Potomac,  when  up  with  Smith's  Point  lighthouse,  bring  it  to  bear  S  W.  Lighthoust. 
about  3  miles  distant,  and  steer  N.  W.  5  leagues,  in  from  9  to  10  and  11  fathoms,  which 
will  carry  you  to  the  mouth  of  St.  Mary's  River,  lying  on  thestarboord  hand,  at  the  mouth 
of  which  lies  St.  George's  Island,  making  a  bluff".  From  St.  George's  Island,  if  bound  up 
the  Potomac,  steer  N.  W.  i  W.  6  miles,  'saving  the  lighthouse  on  Piney  Point  on  your 
starboard  hand,  which  will  carry  you  obreast  of  Ragged  Point,  lying  on  the  larboard 
hand,  off  which  you  must  not  go  into  less  than  8  fathoms,  and  continue  N.  W.  i  W.till 
you  drop  into  quarter  less  5  fathoms,  when  you  haul  up  W.  by  N.  8  miles,  which  will 
rnrry  you  above  Blackstone's  Island,  lying  on  the  starboard  hand,  then  W.  N.  W.  till  you 
come  in  sight  of  the  light-boat  ott"  Cedar  Point,  then  N.  W.  ti''  the  boat  bears  N.  i  E., 
and  keep  soundings  on  tho  larboard  hand,  in  4  and  5  fathoms.  When  up  to  Cedar  Point, 
steer  for  Mathias  Watkins'  Point,  giving  it  a  small  berth  ;  then  steer  up  for  Cedar  Point, 
giving  it  a  small  berth ;  from  thence  the  courses  to  Georgetown  are  about  midway  the 
river,  the  flats  showing  on  each  side  in  most  places. 


fa 


S30 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


By  R  letter  addressed  to  the  Mayor  of  Washington,  we  learn  that  the  bar  nt  the  mouth 
of  the  Ea&t  Branch  of  the  Potomac  is  so  much  deepened,  that  there  is  now  a  depth  ofJi 
feet  at  common  title,  sufficient  for  the  largest  frigate  with  her  guns  on  board. 

The  lighthouse  on  Piney  Point  is  a  tower  25  feet  in  height,  showing  a  fixed  light  Itig 
about  a  mile  above  George's  Island. 

If  yuu  are  bound  to  St.  Mary's  River,  you  must  give  the  shoal  off  Point  Lookout  a 
good  berth;  and  when  you  approach  St.  Ueorge's  Island,  you  must  keep  nearer  to  the 
main  than  to  the  shoal  which  extends  from  the  island.  Your  course  into  the  river  ig  H, 
W.,  and  as  it  is  all  open  to  your  view,  you  may  anchor  when  you  please,  in  5  or  6  futh- 
oms  wiiter. 

If  you  are  bound  to  Wicomack,  in  Potomac  River,  your  course  from  the  east  end  of 
St.  George's  Island  to  Ragged  Point  is  N.  W.  i  W.,  and  the  distance  2  leHgues.  Oo 
the  south,  or  larboard  side,  there  are  flats  lying  off  from  the  shore,  which  m  sumo  pjncea 
extend  one  mile  ;  come  no  nearer  to  them  than  7  fathoms.  In  the  middle  of  the  chiinnel 
you  will  have  11,  lU,  13,  10,  and  8  fathoms.  You  must  give  Ragged  Point  a  good  berth 
^  to  avoid  the  shoal  which  extends  from  it  nearly  one  mile.     From  Ragged  Point  to  Cle! 

nient's  Island,  your  course  is  W.  i  N.,  and  the  distance  2  leagues.  In  the  middle  of  the 
channel  you  will  have  G,  5,  4^,  and  7  fathoms  water.  On  the  south  side,  a  little  below 
Clement's  Island,  is  Nomine  Bay.  From  abreast  of  Clement's  Island  steer  W,  N.  W. 
in  6,  5,  and  4  fathoms  water,  until  you  have  Wicomack  River  open  ;  then  pass  pretty 
near  to  the  island,  which  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance,  in  order  to  avoid  the  ghogj 
which  runs  off  from  the  point  on  the  west  side.  Steer  about  N.  into  the  river,  and  an- 
chor on  the  south  side  of  Newton's  Point,  in  5,  or  4i  fathoms  water. 
Smith's  SMITH'S  POINT  TO  COVE  POINT.— From  the  light  vessel  at  the  end  of  the 

Point  to  shoal  off  Smith's  Point  to  Cove  Point  the  course  is  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  dintant  3.!  miles, 

Cove  Point,     which  course  will  carry  you  in  mid  channel  until  nearly  up  with  the  lighthouse  on  Cove 
Main  Point,  which  you  will  make  on  your  larboard  bow  ;  your  soundings  will  decrease  to  6  and 

channel.  7  fathoms,  and  as  you  approach  Cove  Point  they  will  deepen.     Should  you  shualen  your 

water  in  steering  as  above,  when  you  approach  Barren  Island  Bar,  you  must  haul  to  the 
westward. 

When  you  are  up  as  far  as  Point  Lookout,  and  have  the  wind  ahead,  you  have  a  good 
channel  to  beat  in,  up  as  far  as  Pntuxent  River.  You  may  stand  on  each  tack  Co  4  or  5 
fathoms,  but  in  standing  to  the  eastward,  when  you  have  9  or  lO  fathoms,  it  is  best  totncit, 
as  the  ground  rises  suddenly  to  4  or  5  fathoms,  and  then  lessens  into  two,  hard  sand:  the 
western  side  is  more  regular.  Your  course  from  Point  Lookout  west,  three  miles  dis- 
tant, to  Patuxent  River,  with  a  fair  wind,  is  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  the  distance  5  leagues, 
in  6,  7,  and  10  fathoms  water,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  Cedar  Point,  which  is  pretty 
bold,  and  makes  the  first  point  south  of  Patuxent  River.  If  the  wind  is  to  the  north- 
ward, and  you  cannot  get  into  Patuxent  (which  is  often  the  case)  you  may  run  in  under 
Cedar  Point,  and  anchor  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  good  bottom,  and  secure  from  the  wind  down 
the  bay. 

Should  you  be  nearer  in  with  Point  Lookout  than  3  miles,  and  the  wind  from  the  west, 
you  may  steer  N.  2  leagues,  which  will  carry  you  parallel  with  the  shore,  past  Point  No- 
Point;  then  steer  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  for  Cedar  Point,  3  leagues,  which  will  bring  you  up 
with  it,  and  if  you  continue  on  up  the  bay  a  N.  course,  5  miles  distant,  will  bring  you  up 
to  Cove  Point.     (See  Holland's  Island  and  Barren  Island.) 

If  you  should  stand  in  towards  the  "  Red  Cliffs,"  between  Cedar  Point  and  Cove 
Point,  do  not  shoalen  your  water  to  less  than  4  fathoms,  as  a  spit  puts  off  there  some 
distance. 

The  lighthouse  on  Cove  Point  contains  a  fixed  light,  elevation  50  feet.  It  is  a  lending 
light,  and  should  be  seen  soon  after  passing  Point  Lookout,  coming  up  the  bay,  and  from 
abreast  of  Sharp's  Island  going  down. 

HOLLAND'S  ISLANDS.— On  the  north  side  of  Hedge's  Straits  are  several  islands, 
extending  to  Hooper's  Straits,  called  under  the  above  name.  The  southernmost  one  is 
properly  Holland's  Island,  and  has  two  poplars  on  its  southern  extremity.  The  next  in 
order  on  the  bay  is  Long  Island,  on  the  northern  end  of  which  are  some  cedars;  it 
stands  out  to  the  west  more  than  any  of  the  others.  Bloodworth's  is  the  largest  and 
must  northerly  of  these  islands ;  it  forms  the  south  side  of  Hooper's  Straits,  and  is  mostly 
mursh,  with  some  hammocks  of  trees  on  it.  On  the  east  of  these  are  several  other  small 
islands,  which,  with  the  Tangier  Islands,  make  the  western  boundary  of  Tangier  Sound. 
A  sand  spit  or  bar  puts  off  from  the  S.  W.  of  Holland's  Island,  which  vessels  drawing 
only  4  feet  water,  would  clear  on  a  N.  W.  course  from  Fog  Point  light.  It  is  bard  sand 
bottom,  irregular,  but  you  can  avoid  it  by  sounding.  (See  Hedge's  Straits.)  There  are 
no  passages  through  these  islands,  and  the  flats  extend  out  from  them  on  all  sides. 
Mocker's  HOOPER'S  STRAITS.— A  light  vessel  has  been  moored  in  Hooper's  Straits,  in  2J 

Straits.  fathoms  water.     It  is  necessary  to  lead  vessels  clear  of  the  flat  off  Hooper's  Island  on  the 

N.,  and  those  extending  from  off  Bloodsworth's  Island  on  the  S.  side  of  the  passage.    It 
ia  of  service  to  vessels  bound  either  to  Nanticoke  River  or  to  Tangier  Sound.    In  thick 


Light. 


Holland's 
Islands. 


mmmmmff^ 


mmm 


tmm 


mUPMHPiWM 


mmmi 


^^mn 


BLUNT'S  AMERICilN  COAST  PILOT. 


281 


ffenther,  by  night  or  day,  a  bell  will  be  rung  on  board  at  short  intenralB,  ar>d  if  it  ii  thick 
and  blowing,  it  is  ordered  to  be  conutantly  kept  ringing. 

If  from  up  the  bay,  ond  bound  through  the  stmits,  bring  the  light  vessel  to  bear  E.  by 
H.,  and  run  for  it.  which  course  will  carry  you  across  Hooper's  Island  bar,  in  about  4 
fathoms  water ;  continue  your  course  until  you  deepen  your  water  into  7  fathoms,  then 
steer  G.  N.  E.  until  the  light  bears  E.,  and  run  for  it ;  or  you  may  bring  the  vessel  to 
^,  N.  E.,  and  run  directly  for  it ;  pass  on  your  starboard  band,  which  will  carry  you 
into  chiinnel  way  ;  continue  your  course  after  you  pass  the  light  vessel  E.  and  E.  by  S., 
towards  Bishop's  Head,  keeping  rather  on  the  northern  side  of  the  passage,  and  by  snow- 
ing a  signal  you  can  obtain  a  pilot  to  take  you  through  Fishing  Bay,  Nanticoke  River,  or 
into  Tangier  Sound.  The  flats  are  steep  to  on  both  sides,  and  you  can  anchor  opposite 
Todd's  bouse,  on  Bishop's  Head,  in  3  fathoms  water,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore, 
the  extreme  S.  point  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.,  distant  about  }  of  a  mile. 

If  from  down  the  bay,  bring  the  light  vessel  to  bear  N.  E.,  and  steer  for  it,  when  you 
frill  gradually  shoalen  your  water  on  the  S.  side ;  you  may,  with  safety,  course  round 
the  shoal  in  3  fathoms  until  you  bring  the  light  to  bear  £.,  when  you  may  steer  as  above. 

BARREN  ISLAND  BAR — N.  by  W.  25  miles  from  the  light  vessels  off  Smith's  Barren 
Point,  will  carry  you  to  the  S.  W.  edge  of  this  bar,  which  is  very  shoal,  and  extends  off  Island  Bar, 
from  the  south  end  of  the  island  about  S.  S.  E.,  4  miles.  There  is  anchorage  for  small 
vessels  on  the  eastern  side  of  it,  but  there  is  no  passage  between  it  and  Hooper'»  Island. 
Barren  Island  may  be  known  from  the  other  islands  by  its  being  heavily  timbered,  and 
standing  out  more  in  the  bay  than  either  Hooper's  or  Taylor's  Island.  The  bar  is  some- 
what bold  to,  but  serves  well  as  a  guide,  bound  up  the  bay,  when  you  get  soundings  on 
that  side,  which  is  rather  to  be  preferred,  unless  the  wind  is  from  the  westward. 

EOIOMAC  RIVER  Tu  PATUXENT  RIVER.— From  Point  Lookout,  which  is    Potomac 
the  northern  point  of  the  Potomac  River,  a  flat  runs  off  a  considerable  way.  which  you    River  to 
must  be  careful  to  avoid  by  not  coming  any  nearer  to  it  than  7  or  8  fathoms  water.  There    Paluxent 
is  a  lighthouse  (the  lantern  being  on  the  top  of  the  dwelling  house,)  on  this  point,  show-    River. 
ing  a  flxed  light. 

Opposite  to  this  point  the  flat  of  Upper  Tangier  or  Smith's  Island,  extends  so  far  to  the 
westward  as  to  narrow  the  channel  of  the  Chesapeake  to  about  6  miles.  This  part  of 
the  flat  is  steep,  and  has  10  fathoms  close  to  it.  About  *2  leagues  to  the  northward  of 
Point  Lookout  is  Point  No-Point,  off  which,  H  mile  from  the  shore,  lies  a  shoal,  on 
which  there  are  1 8  feet  water.  It  is  steep  to,  having  I'roin  3  to  7  fathoms  close  to  it.  It 
is  about  50  feet  square. 

Cedar  Point  is  3  leagues  north-westerly  from  Point  No-Point.  It  is  low  and  sandy, 
with  some  bushes  and  scattering  trees  on  it :  the  water  is  so  bold  to  on  the  southern  side, 
that  you  cannot  be  too  careful  in  approaching  it  in  the  night.     It  extends  out  into  the  ' 

bny,  the  shore  line  making  a  bend   to  the  westward,  between  that  and  Point  No-Point,    . 
and  if  it  is  sufilciently  clear  to  see  the  white  beach  at  the  distance  of  100  yards,  you  can 
run  with  safety.     You  may  keep  in  7  or  8  fathoms  between  these  points.     On  the  north 
side  of  Cedar  Point  it  is  shoal,  so  that  after  passing  it,  if  bound  into  the  Patuxent,  keep 
no  nearer  the  shore  than  5  fathoms. 

Cove  Point  lies  about  5  miles  to  the  northward  of  Cedar  Point.  A  lighthouse  is  erected  Lighthouse. 
on  it,  showing  a  fixed  light,  50  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water ;  the  point  is  low  and 
sandy,  extending  out  into  the  bay,  so  as  to  make  this  the  narrowest  part  of  the  Chesa- 
peake. Vessels  of  light  draft  of  water  can  anchor  close  under  the  south  side  of  Cove 
Point,  secure  from  the  northerly  winds,  in  3  fathoms  water  ;  or  you  may  anchor  under 
the  yellow  cliffs  secure  from  N.  W.  winds,  in  case  you  cannot  get  up  the  bay,  in  4  or  5 
fathoms. 

PATUXENT  RIVER  discharges  itself  into  the  bay  between  Cedar  Point  and  Cove  Patuxent 
Point;  it  is  easy  of  access,  and  Drum  Point,  which  is  its  northern  point,  lies  N.  W.  3  JH'^er, 
miles  from  Cedar  Point.  The  first  high  land  met  in  going  up  the  bay,  is  the  "  Red 
Cliffs,"  commencing  on  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance  to  this  river.  If  you  go  into 
this  river  give  Cedar  Point  a  small  berth,  and  stand  to  the  northward  until  you  have  the 
river  open,  when  you  may  stand  for  Drum  Point,  which  is  on  your  starboard  hand.  This 
is  a  low,  sandy,  bold  point.  After  passing  this  point  you  can  anchor  opposite  the  first 
bank  or  bluff  in  24  or  3  fathoms,  secure  from  all  winds.  In  beating  into  this  river,  you 
may  stand  on  the  north  side  for  the  high  red  cliffs  to  3  fathoms  water,  and  to  the  south 
to  5  fathoms ;  in  the  channel  you  will  have  7  fathoms.  When  standing  to  the  south  side 
of  the  river,  you  will  see  some  buildings  on  the  north  side  of  the  river,  above  Drum 
Point ;  as  soon  as  the  buildings  come  on  with  Drum  Point,  you  must  tack  to  avoid  a  spit  . 

that  runs  off  from  the  south  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  frequented  harbors  on  the  Chesapeake,  and  it  is  common  with 
those  who  seek  shelter  here,  waiting  for  a  fair  wind,  to  remain  at  anchor  until  daylight 
before  getting  under  weigh,  even  when  the  flood  makes  early  in  the  morning,  and  the 
wind  is  from  the  eastward.  You  should  always  keep  in  mind  the  time  lost  in  beating  out 
into  the  bay  ;  and  if  bound  up  the  bay,  by  leaving  on  the  latter  part  of  the  ebb  tide,  yoa 


msmB 


Wi 


939  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

will  have  the  whole  flood  to  help  you  io  passing  between  Cove  Point  and  Taylor's  Islnnd 
Half  tin  hour's  stiirt  has  eniibled  ine,  frequently,  to  pass  Cove  Point,  and  beat  up,  when 
R  whoi»  fleet  hns  returned  to  Drum  Point. 

If  you  should  harbor  in  the  Putuxent,  when  you  come  out,  bound  up  the  bny,  give 
the  hi^h  land  on  tlio  northoni  Hide  of  tiio  river  soiriothin^  of  a  berth,  going  into  imi  i<t. 
than  6  fuhtoina  wiitur,  and  lUi  nut  haul  to  tlm  northward  untd  you  Imvo  got  into  9  or  '() 
fathoins  water,  aa  a  large  apit  runs  uff  from   the    I'aluxunt  ('lill's,  about  8.  K.,  oxt)Midii)'> 
from  Drum  Point  nearly  to  Oovt;   Pniiit.  which  should  be  avoided.  " 

Cove  Point.  FR(JM  COVE  POINT  150UNJ)  UP  Till.  UAV— That  pari  of  the  bay  opposit,, 

Cove  Point,  is  about  6  miles  in  width  :  the  flood  and  obb  sets  alrong  hero  ;  a  fust  Huiljn,, 
vessel  may  beat  throui^h  it.  " 

When  up  with  Cove  Point,  you  may  give  it  a  berth  of  not  less  than  i  of  u  mile,  and 
steer  up  mid  cliannel  M.  by  W.,  which  will  carry  you  up  with  the  north  end  of  I'oplm- 
Island  ;  tlie  distanco  is  about  8  leauuea.  In  running  this  cnurso,  you  will  have  from  K)  i,, 
15  fathoms,  and  you  pass  Sharp's  Island  on  your  starboard  hand  ;  when  it  boars  l'^.  vou 
may  have  18  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 
Tjgfil  On  the  north  end  of  Sharp's  Ittland  iH  a  lighthouse,  the  lantern  on  the  keeper's  dwell- 

ing, showing  n  fixed  light.  The  island  is  about  'J  miles  long,  and  well  wooded  on  its  nortii 
end.     A  spit  puts  otf  from  tlie  south  point,  and  the  shore  is  not  bold  to. 

If,  after  leaving  Putuxent  River,  you  intend  going  into  IJreat  Clioptank  River,  steer  N. 
by  £.  5  leagues,  for  James'  Isliind  or  Point,  which  you  must  leave  on  your  starboard,  ami 
Sharp's  island  on  your  larboard  hand,  giving  both  a  good  berth,  as  there  are  long  spitu  un 
from  both  those  places.  Ater  you  have  passed  lames'  Point,  steer  away  about  N.  N.  E, 
in  seven  and  eight  fathoms,  which  will  carry  you  in  under  Sharp's  Island,  where  you  inny 
anchor  within  half  a  unle  of  the  island,  and  lie  secure  from  northerly  and  N.  W.  winds 
and,  if  you  wish  it,  take  a  pilot  at  this  place. 

Note. — The  land  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  from  Patuxent  to  Annapolis  river,  is 
something  high,  with  several  bays,  such  as  Herring  and  West  River  Bays,  where  tlm 
soundings  are  gradual  on  both  sides,  near  which  there  are  shoals  which  should  be  avoided. 

POPLAR  ISLAND  is  about  two  miles  in  length,  having  timber  on  the  northern  m\ 
Poplar  s.  E.  parts;  a  spit  puts  olTon  tlio  southern  part,  and  vessels  may  anchor  S.  W.  from  tlie 

Island.  island,  secure  from  northerly  winds.     The  possage  un  the  eastern  side  is  only  for  v»i8sels 

drawing  about  8  foet  water. 

After  you  are  up  with  Poplar  Island,  n  beors  E.,  you  niny  then  steer  away  about 

N.,  distant  5i  longues,  which  will  carry  yo,  jp  to  Annopolis  Roads,  which  aftbrd  a  fin? 
anchorage,  and  protection  from  N.  and  N.  W.  winds  I'he  channel  into  Annapolis  is  dif- 
ficult and  narrow ;  few  vessels  ever  attempt  it.  The  State  House  at  Annapolis  is  re- 
markable for  having  a  large  steeple,  by  whicii  it  may  be  known,  and  may  be  seen  when 
abreast  of  the  h<^ad  of  Poplar  Island. 

In  running  N.  and  N.  W.  from  Poplar  Island,  for  Annopolis  Roads,  you  pass  Thomas 
'^oint  lighthouse  ;  and  in  n  S.  E.  direction  lies  a  shoal,  which  should  be  avoided,  hb  it  is 
bold  to.  milking  it  more  dangerous.  The  dwelling-house  of  the  keeper  stands  betwecii 
two  large  walnut  trees,  neai'  the  lighthouse  ;  you  will  also  pass  in  this  distance,  on  your 
larboard  hand,  three  small  islands,  called  the  Sisters,  lying  below  South  river. 
Lighthouse.  Thomas'  Point  lighthouse  contains  a  fixed  light,  in  a  tower,  30  feet  high;  it  is  importiiDt 

to  the  navigation  of  Chosapeake  Bay.  and  those  bound  for  Annapolis  Road.  The  buoys 
offTally's  Point  bear  from  the  light  N.  N.  E. 

North  of  Poplar  Island,  4  miles  distant,  is  the  south  point  of  Kent  Island;  you  may 
anchor  under  insecure  from  all  winds  but  the  S.  \V. 
Annapolis.  Vou  also  have,  in  running  from   Poplar   Island   to   Annapolis  or   Talley's   Point,  (and 

whicli  is  the  southerti  point  of  Annapolis  River,  o(f  \\  Inch  a  buoy  is  placed  in  6  futhoms 
water,  bearing  E.  S.  K..  one  mile  distant,  and  N.  N.  E.  fi'om  Thomas  Point  liglit)  from 
7  to  16  I'ltthoiiis.  If  you  go  into  Aniiapolitf  River,  give  Talley's  Point  a  good  berth,  and 
haul  in  to  tlie  westward  of  the  mouth  of  the  liver,  taking  your  soundings  otf  the  south  side 
in  .3  and  4  fathoms  water,  and  puss  in  belween  Talley's  and  Greenberry  Points,  tlie  latter 
of  whicli  has  a  buoy  oil' it  in  lii  fathoms,  bearing  from  the  buoy  olf  Hackett's  Poiat  W. 
by  S.  li  mile,  and  from  Tall«y's  Point  buoy  N.  W.  i  N.,  2  miles  distant,  giving  siiiJ 
points  a  berth  of  an  eijual  widdi,  and  run  just  iibove  them,  where  you  may  anchor  in  8or 
4  fathoms,  and  lie  secure  from  all  \  inds.  High  water  4h.  A'.i  m.,  rise  3  feet  G  inches. 
Jguoys.  Buoys,  beside  those  above  named,  have  been  placed  at  Annu[ioh8.  viz  : 

Buoy  oir  I  Inckett's  Point  in  ti  fathoms,  bearing  from  Talley's  Point  buoy  N.  i  E,. 
distance  between  the  two  buoys,  two  miles. 

Buoy  oD'Horii  Point  in  4  liitlioms,  bearing  from  Greenberry  Pdint  buoy  N.  i  W.  westerly. 

Buoy  in  15  feet  water,  in  the  harbor,  I-ort  Madison  bearing  N.  E.,  Horn  Point  S.  \V., 
and  Horn  Point  buoy  S.  E. 

Foil  Madison  is  an  old  fort,  on  a  high  red  bank,  bearing  from  Horn  Point  buoy  iN. 
by  W. 
Baltimore.  BALTIMORE. — After  you  are  up  with  Annapolis,  and  bound  to  Baltimore,  when  Id  | 


li" 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


233 


r  be  seen  when 


tant,  giving  m: 


jt  buoy  N.  i  E„ 


ll,e  m\M\f>  of  the  clinnnel,  your  courBe  is  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  which  will  give  the  beet  WHter,  until 
y„u  gHt  the  Budlviii  liglitliuuao  tu  bear  W.  N.  W.,  then  due  N.  till  (he  Budkin  liyhthouae 
l,i'iii!«W'|S.,iin(l  the  twuii^hthuuBoa  utNortli  Point  in  one,  or  neiirly  hu,  keeping  the  east 
ilittli'  i*|)un  with  eiicli  other,  until  the  Itodkin  lighttuiuKe  beiiiH  S.  W.  by  W.,  when  you 
vtilUttM'r  W.  by  N.,  until  you  get  the  eiiiitorn  light  house  iit  North  Point  to  bear  N-,  wiicu, 
il'iit  ni):iit.  you  ciin  iinchor  in  the  best  wuter :  it'  in  the  (liiy-tinie,  when  you  get  the  liod- 
liiii  li^lithouide  to  hear  W.  j  8.  and  the  two  li^htliouBOH  on  North  Point  in  one,  or  the 
bluli  of  Woods  on  Not  III  Point  on  with  ii  large  walnut  tree  on  Spiirruw'it  Point,  steer  lor 
eilliei  N.  ()0°  W.  until  you  get  the  white  rocks  to  range  with  the  ceniro  of  u  red  iiank  on 
tl,e  wist  side  of  ilie  liver;  then  N.  Stii°  W..  continuing  the  said  course  until  you  get  tlie 
eini  lit  Sparrow's  I'uint  to  range  with  a  gap  in  the  woods,  on  Sailer's  i'oint,  and  a  white 
liouse  iiiliiiid,  for  which  you  will  steer  N.  3fi°  W.,  until  you  get  Leading  Point  a  sail's 
breiiilili  open  with  lliiwliins'  Point  (a  dusky  wood  beyond)  then  N.  GJi*^  W.,  with  these 
iiiiiiks  on  until  North  I'oint  bears  N.  f35''  K.,  then  steer  S.  85°  W.,  till  Hawkins'  Point 
riiiif;es  with  Leading  Point;  then  N.  61°  W.;  with  these  iniirkson  until  jou  uet  the  lliig- 
iliill  on  Fort  M'Henry  to  range  with  the  Washington  Monument,  which  dillors  t'roiii  the 
Slidt  Towers,  from  iis  Ixing  white,  and  Hliinds  to  the  westward  of  them ;  steer  tor  these 
N.  41°  W.,  until  you  are  up  with  the  Narrows  between  Fort  APllenry  and  Lnziiretto 
Puiiit,  tiiking  cine  to  avoid  the  Lazaretto  bar  on  the  Inrboard  hand,  bihI  a  heap  of  ballast 
itoiies  iiiid  Foit  M'llenry  bur  on  the  opposite  hand;  then  steer  tor  Fell's  Point,  not  for- 
gelling  a  Middle  Uiound  or  Shoul  just  ubreust  of  Euston  un  the  starboard  hand,  with 
ffliieii  you  must  not  inieifere. 

Vuu  niiiy  anchor  at  Fell's  Point,  or  continue  up  to  the  town,  us  the  track  is  plain. 
Oilier  directions  are,  after  sailing  as  before  described  until  you  get  the  eastern  lighthouse 
at  North  I'oint  to  beiir  N.,  you  may  bring  the  two  lights  a  little  open  with  a  gap  of  woods 
(111  Spill  row  I'oint,  which  will  curry  you  in  3  fathoms  water,  soft  bottom,  being  most  you 
will  liiive  in  this  channel,  common  tides;  keep  these  marks  till  iiodkin  Point  light  bears 
S.  S.  W. ;  then  stetu'  W.,  or  W.by  N-,  into  the  river,  giving  No-th  I'oint  lights  a  berth  of 
iiLout  one  mile,  by  which  you  avoid  a  shoal  off  the  point,  of  12  feet,  hard  bottom,  near 
wliili,  III  Iti  feet,  soft  bottom,  is  u  black  Spar  Buoy,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard 
hiiiiil.  When  abreast  of  North  Point  light,  steer  away  for  the  White  Rocks,  which  you 
will  M'l)  on  tho  boutli  side  ol  the  river,  until  youare  abreast  of  them,  when  you  must  haul 
to  liin  southward  till  you  bring  Leading  Point,  (which  is  high  blulf  woods)  within  two 
Biiib  liieiidth  of  Hawkins' Point,  and  keep  it  till  you  are  almost  abreast  of  the  rocks,  when 
yuu  must  again  haul  to  the  southward  till  you  bring  the  said  point  within  n  small  sail's 
bniiiltb  of  each  other,  which  must  lead  you  up  to  Hawkins'  Point,  to  which  give  a  berth 
ot  uiie-quarter  of  a  mile.  When  up  with  Hawkins'  Point,  you  may  steer  away  for  the 
Niniows  (on  which  the  fort  stands)  about  N.  W.  by  N.,  which  course  has  nothing  to  ob- 
slruct  you,  where  you  will  have  from  ai  to  5  fathoms.  When  you  are  up  with  the  Nar- 
niws,  puss  between  the  two  points,  and  give  the  larboard  side  n  good  berth,  '  >  keep  clear 
ot  11  slioal  just  above  the  Narrows;  then  haul  to  the  S.  W.  up  for  the  wharves,  or  the 
point  wliich  is  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  there  anchor,  or  proceed  to  Baltimore.  If  you 
leiive  the  point,  keep  yciur  larboard  hand  on  board,  when  you  will  find  good  bottom,  from 
wirn:liyou  may  proceed  to  the  wharves,  or  come  to  with  safety. 

There  are  several  small  shoals  of  about  two  fathoms,  on  each  side  of  the  channel, 
wliicli  lire  steep,  and  the  channel  between  them  not  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide. 

Tlie  Bodkin  is  a  fixed  lij;hr,  requisite  for  vessels  bound  to  Baltimore.  The  North  Point 
ii;;lit  serves  to  show  vessels  the  direction  through  the  Ship  Channel,  also  through  the 
Swiisli.  There  are  twenty  buoys  off  the  Putapsco  and  in  the  river,  some  on  bars  and  otliers 
on  knolls.  As  they  are  now  all  of  one  color,  it  is  impossible  for  a  stranger  to  designate 
tlipiii.  They  were  formerly  pninted  white,  black,  and  the  knoll  buoys  black  and  white 
nlleiiiiitely.  'I'hey  are  now  without  paint,  and  a  person  unacquainted,  is  as  likely  to  pass 
theiii  on  the  wrong  as  on  the  right  side. 

There  are  two  lighthouseo  on  North  Point,  which  exhibit  white  lights,  bearing  N.  by    Lighthauiei. 
W,  i  U'.from  the  Bodkin. 

Furvissvts  of  small  draft  of  watir. — Give  Sandy  Point  n  good  berth,  on  account  of  its 
bur,  that  maki's  out  considerably,  but  you  may  safely  pa.ss  it  in  8  fathoms.  This  point  is 
ea.-ily  known  tVoiii  its  having  a  few  small  detached  round-topped  pine  and  cedar  trees  on 
it,  iii^ar  its  outer  extremity,  and  a  brick  two-story  house  with  wings,  a  little  inland. 

Wiu'ii  abreast  of  llie  point,  and  pretty  near  the  bar,  with  a  leading  wind,  steer  N.  12i° 
W  ,  which  will  lead  yon  to  the  Swash  Channel,  and  the  course  through  it;  but  it  will  be 
wi'll  to  observe  the  imlural  inland  marks  for  this  channel,  which  are  a  small  house  stand- 
ing a  little  to  the  westward  of  a  large  house  having  a  steeple  or  dome  to  it;  to  the  east  of 
North  Point,  up  the  bay,  well  on  with  a  tree,  as  in  the  margin, farther  inland 
until  you  are  abreast  of  the  Bodkin  lighthouse.  You  will  not  have  less 
than  lit  feet,  (•iimmon  tide,  and  afterwards  not  less  than  13  feet.  Steer  with 
the  above  marks  on  until  you  ojien  a  house  at  the  head  of  Bodkin  Creek,  or 
until  yuu  open  Leading  Point  a  little  with  Hawkins"  Point,  when  you  can 


mmm 


934  BLUNT'M  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ernai  Bodkin  Bnr  nnd  ntnnrl  up  thn  rivor  for  Hnwkin's  Point,  when,  Kivin(;ii  TnirhArth  to 
Hawkinii'  Point  Biir.  you  inny  run  for  thn  chnnnol  hi>fw»'pn  Knrt  M'Hflni  y  and  tho  \,nf,^. 
rotto  Bur  on  the  InrlKJont  linnd,  when  you  will  follow  tlin  dirertions  previously  given  for 
venHols  of  honvy  dnuiaht  of  wiiter.     (Sop  Chnrt  of  Chosnponko.) 

Nnvjgntors  who  froqiiniit  tho  Swnsli  Phnnnpl  l«>ndinjt  into  tho  Pntnpuro  River,  will  re- 
Coll<>('t  thiit  n  linrd  knoll  or  oyntpr  biink  lion  iihout  two  inilos  nhovn  the  mouth  of  Miiijotliv 
Rivf^r,  hiivinc;  legs  tliiin  7  foetwntoron  it,  with  4  fiithoms  noft  nround  it,  from  whidi  the 
Bodkin  liiihthounobenrii  N.  41°  W.;  blnfTofr  Snndy  Pidnt,  S.  !)>'  W.;  nnd  two  vory  |ig|,t 
gr«<nn  trppH,  nppeRrlng  n«  ono  to  tho  niikcd  eye,  itHndinif  over  tho  Rfd  Bunk  to  tlio  nnrth- 
wiird  of  Mngothy.  S.  R4°  W.  to  tho  Rod  Bank,  two  niilon.  A  Hmiill  mimt  buoy,  iMiinrpd 
black  and  white  alternately,  with  nn  O  upon  it,  both  in  tho  black  and  white,  is  pliiccd  on 
the  northern  edge  of  it. 

Rattg  of  Pilotage, 

American  vesRels  pay  S.*)  00  down,  and  $4  00  up,  per  foot. 
Foreign         do.      do.     4  00       do  4  33  up,         do. 

BuoyainShip     BUOYS  IN  SHIP  CHANNEL.— No.  1.  a  mast  buoy,  paintei.  white,  to  the  wpst. 

Oiannel.  ward  of  which  you  should  not  po.     Another  white  buoy,  No  2,  to  range  with  it  and  No, 

4,  which  last  will  bo  red,  and  placed  exoctly  on  tho  Ship  Channel  range,  no  that  by  nb^ 
serving  it,  you  will,  without  further  notice,  know  when  to  run  in  for  the  river,  ns  it  win 
range  precisely  with  tho  two  li^jhthousea  on  North  Point.  No.  3,  a  white  buoy,  uponnr 
near  a  small  knoll  of  16  feet  hard,  on  tho  larboard  side  of  the  Sip  f?hannel.  No.  .5,a  MhcIi 
and  white  buoy  on  a  hard  knoll  of  15  feet,  which  lies  in  tho  Ship  Channel,  with  tho  mnrks 
nearly  on.  It  is  best  to  leave  it  on  tho  starboard  hand  coinir  up.  Nos.  9  and  10,  two 
black  mast  buoys,  mark  the  southern  extremity  of  tho  Man-of-war  Shoals  ;  vessels  hmit- 
ing  through  must  not  pass  this  range.  N.  fi,  nnd  No.  7,  two  white  buoys,  desiunute  the 
southern  or  larboard  side  of  tho  Ship  Channel,  and  will  range  with  No.  .3,  before  men- 
tioned.    No.  8,  R  white  buoy,  on  the  end  of  tho  Bodkin  Bur. 

These  buoys,  when  first  put  down,  were  painted  as  described,  but  the  person  etn- 

Eloyed  by  the  government  to  keep  them  in  order,  receives  a  salary,  whether  he  ncj'iectj 
is  duty  or  not. 

Directions  for  coming  out  of  the  Susquehanna  River  with  small  draft  of  water  onhj. 

Keep  tho  eastern  ferry-house  opposite  Havre  do  Grace  (a  stone  building)  astorn,  nnd 
passing  near  Point  Concord  lighthouse,  run  for  a  largo  tree  near  tho  thoroughfiire  IkI- 
and  of  Specutia  Island,  until  you  just  shut  in  two  Louibardy  poplars,  or  till  you  get 
Turkey  Point  and  a  gap  in  the  Highlands,  south  side  of  Elk  River,  to  range  ;  nor  for  the 
last  marks  until  you  open  a  single  tree  on  the  Iliglilands,  south  si<ie  of  Sassafrns  RIvit, 
with  the  easternmost  point  of  Specutia  Island  ;  then  run  (or  a  red  bank  east  side  of  tiie 
bay,  having  Langsdale's  house,  which  is  a  large  brick  ono  above  Havre  do  Griice,  riglit 
ostern,  until  you  open  a  single  tree,  east  end  of  a  long  ridge  of  black  woods  south  side 
of  KIk  River  with  Turkey  Point,  then  N.  W.  westerly,  for  Foole  Island  :  a  short  dis- 
tance below,  and  on  the  starboard  hand,  after  leaving  Point  Concord,  lies  a  shoal  ciillftd 
Devil's  Island,  which  at  low  tide  is  nearly  out  of  water,  and  on  the  opposite  sido  of  the 
channel  is  a  very  extensive  flat  or  shoal,  which  also  must  be  avoided  by  making  short 
tacks  when  beating  in  or  out  of  the  river. 

Lighthouse.  Concord  light,  at  Havre  de  Grace,  is  a  fixed  light,  the  navigation  to  which,  in  passing,  to- 

gether with  the  port,  is  fit  only  for  vessels  drawing  not  over  8  feet;  the  channel  is  narrow 
and  crooked  ;  on  the  shoals  are  only  3  feet  water.  It  is  impossible  to  give  a  stianaer 
courses  and  distances,  who  must  be  guided  altogether  by  the  lead,  and  it  should  not  be 
run  in  the  night. 

Lighthouse.  On  Poole  Island  is  a  lighthouse,  containiiig  n  fixed  light;  it  shows  the  way  through  the 
western  channel,  in  which  there  are  only  7  feet  water.  Few  vessels  take  this  clmnnpj, 
as  the  eastern  is  the  safest,  having  from  3  to  7  fathoms  water.  A  bell  is  tolled  in  thick 
weather. 

NAVIGATION  OF  THE  PATAPSCO. 

Directions  for  Mariners.  Bay  Crafsmen,  i^c,  for  sailing  up  or  dotvn  the  Patapsco,  and 
for  passing  through  the  Sivash  Channel. 

The  can  and  log  buoys  heretofore  used  to  buoy  off  the  Swash  Channel  and  River  Pa- 
tapsco  having  been  removed,  and  spar  or  mast  buoys  adopted  in  lieu  thereof,  as  heing 
more  conspicuous  from  their  erect  position,  and  showing  a  mast  of  from  9  to  20  feet  above 
the  water,  it  is  conceived  necessary  to  give  duo  notice  of  tho  changes,  vi/,.: 

The  buoys  now  moored  are  numbers  H,  nnd  from  11  to  20,  and  are  painted,  some  of 
them  entirely  white,  others  entirely  black,  and  others  again  black  at  the  surface  of  the 


HLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


9; 


titer  iind  nt  the  hend,  with  wliitn  b«4tw»en.     The  white  buoys  deaii^nate  the  south  or 
^iboHi'il  Hido  of  the  chiinrifl,  (MiinitiK  up;  the  liliick  liuoyn  tho  north  ur  ititrboHrd  tide; 
I  |g,|  iliti  wliirtf  lind  blnck  buoyii  deriotii  the  kiiollit  thiit  lie  in  the  cbHiiiiel-wny,  or  elitewhure, 
LgJ  til  bit  ttvoided.     Their  piirlicubir  |)0iiitiuMH  nro  na  tollows: 

No.  '>■ — A  l)uoy  pninted  liliiik  uiid  wliile  iilicrniitcly,  ou  the  ed^n  of  a  hiird  knoll  of  15 
f^et,  iininfiiiiitely  on  tlie  Sliip  Cliiinnel  ritnge,  iibreuHt  of  the  oiiMternniost  Mun-uf-wur 
Shoid.  in  3  fiitlioniM,  Hticky  bdllotii. 

Ni>.  1  '.'■ — A  while  buoy  is  pliicud  on  the  larboard  side  of  the  chiinnel,  to  mark  the  aouth- 
aH  biir. 

Nil.  13. — Shows  the  sturbuHrd  aide  of  the  channel,  and  is  placed  juet  nt  the  edge  of  the 
J  feet  kniill. 

iV'i).  11. — A  white  buoy  in  18  foot,  soft,  on  the  outer  edijo  of  the  Rock  Point  Shonl. 

Nil.  11. — A  white  atid  bliick  Htriped  buoy,  in  18  feet,  soft,  ou  the  edge  of  a  hard  knoll 
gfl4  I't'et,  between  North  Point  and  Kock  Point, 

Nil.  l'». — A  bliir-k  buoy  in  16  foot,  soft,  (ieiiotos  the  Shonl  off  North  Point. 

Ni).  Hi — A  white  and  black  striped  buoy  in  IH  feet,  juHt  outside  ot  the  Rock  Knolls. 

Nil.  17. — A  black  buoy  in  18  feet,  soft,  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  Spurruw's  Point  Knolls, 
of  Id  liiff,  hard. 

Nil.  IH. — A  white  buoy  in  4  futhoma,  soft,  on  the  outer  eJge  of  the  shonl,  extending 
fruin  lliiwkiti!)'  I'oitit  liar. 

No.  1'.). — A  black  buoy  in  1.'0  feet,  soft,  on  the  outer  ed^e  of  a  ahoal  of  14  feet,  hard, 
eituriiliiiK  from  Soller'a  Point  liar. 

No. '.'().— A  binck  buoy  in  18  feet,  soft,  on  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  shoal,  extend- 
JDgtVoin  the  La/.aretto. 

No. '.'.'. — There  is  a  buoy,  pninted  black  and  white  alternately,  on  the  sunken  rockbe- 
tweim  North  Point  and  S|)arr(iw'8  Point. 

NoTK. — No.  5  shows  1-2  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water;  all  the  others  show  from 
1210  11  feet,  except  No.  19,  which  dooa  not  show  as  high. 

A  niiiiil  berth  should  be  given  to  the  stripe  buoys,  aa  they  are  expressly  placed  to  mark 
tiie  sboals. 

The  l>lack  buoya  indicate  the  northern  extremity  of  the  channel. 

Tlio  white  buoys  indicate  the  aouthern  extremity  of  the  channel,  so  that  it  is  danger- 
ous tu  attempt  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  firat,  or  to  the  southward  of  the  latter. 

iiesidos  the  above  enumerated  buoys,  there  will  be  placed  a  bluck  and  white  buoy  at 
the  old  wharf,  abreast  of  Fort  IM'Henry,  which  will  be  No.  '21. 

i;\ii\T  or  mast  buoya  will  also  be  placed,  na  soon  ns  they  can  be  completed,  to  buoy  off 
the  ship  channel  leading  from  the  Chesapeake  Bay  into  the  River  Putapaco,  of  which 
due  notice  will  be  given. 

CAPE  HENRY  TO  CAPE  HATTERAS. 

BUDDY'S  ISLAND  LIGHT  ia  a  revolving  light,  36i  feet  above  the  aea,  in  lot.  35° 
47  30  ',  ;5i  miles  north  of  Capo  Hatterns. 

CAPE  HATTERAS.— This  cape  lies  about  S.  S.  E.,  37  lenguea,  from  Cape  Henry; 
between  them  lie  the  inlets  of  Cuirituck,  which  nre  shonl,  and  New  Inlet,  on  which  nre 
5feet  wnter.  About  6  lengues  N.  by  E.  from  the  cape  lie  the  Wimble  Shoals,  on  which 
are  3  and  4<1  fattioma  wnter,  extending  N.  by  W.  nnd  S,  by  E.  about  3  miles,  and  is  about 
3  miles  wide.  The  inner  edge  oi  this  shoal  ia  about  three  miles  from  the  ahore,  and  the 
suundings  between  them  8,  10,  nnu  7  fathoms.  About  5  miles  N.  by  W.  from  the  north 
end  of  this  shoal,  nnd  3  miles  S.  E.  from  the  north  end  of  Hatterns  Islnnd,  there  lie  some 
siniill  knolls,  on  which  are  only  9  feet  at  low  wnter. 

Cupe  Hatteraa  Shoals  extend  8  iniles  in  n  south-easterly  direction,  with  5  and  6  fath- 
oms on  the  extreme  parts.  The  most  dangerous  shoal  lies  in  latitude  35°  10'  N.,  the  mid- 
dle of  which  is  4  miles  distant  from  the  cape,  and  has  barely  9  feet  water.  This  is  called 
the  Diamond  Shoal,  between  which  and  the  cape  there  is  n  good  passage  fur  small  vessels, 
in  moiiernte  weather,  or  when  the  wind  is  off  the  land;  but  it  would  be  always  safest  to 
go  round  the  ahoal  in  10, 12.  and  15  futhoma. 

CAPE  HATTERAS  LIGHT  ia  U  mile  from  the  point  of  the  cape;  the  lighthouse 
is  white,  95  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sen,  containing  n  fixed  light.  There  ia  a  good  chan- 
nel, three  miles  from  the  light,  keeping  the  land  on  board.  The  light  beara  from  the  S. 
W.  part  of  the  outer  ahonia  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  nnd  from  the  S.  E.  part  N.  W.,  distant  3 
leagues;  from  the  S.  W.  pnrtof  the  middle  shoals,  within  which  vessels  bound  along  the 
coast  generally  pass,  the  light  bears  N.  N.  W. 

The  light  at  Cape  Hntteras  will  be  seen  from  a  considerable  distance  without  ihe 
outer  shoala,  and  to  a  vessel  steering  from  Ocracock,  W.  by  N.,  W.  N.  W.,  or  even  N. 
W.  by  W.,  the  light  on  the  cape  will  first  show,  and  will  continue  to  be  seen  till  the  light 
appears  within  the  bar. 

The  lighthouse  at  Cape  Hatteraa  exhibits  a  fine  light  when  in  order,  and  can  be  seen 
Tery  plaiuly  iu  9  and  10  fathoms  water  on  the  outer  part  of  the  shoala,  when  only  10  feet 


Baddy's  Is 
and  Light. 
Cape  Hatit 
raa. 


Cape  Haiti 
raa  Light. 


mmm 


pw«ffwip|B7» 


'mnmi^i 


386 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Hifrh  water , 


HuUcrasCffve 
and  Inlet. 


Ocracork 
Ligkthouse. 


Lighthouse. 


above  the  level  of  the  sea;  but  when  on  bonrd  n  large  vessel,  it  might  be  seen  in  20  or  ' 
25  fiithoms.     The  Bonndipcs  from  the  cnpe  are  li,  3,  4,  4i,  5,  6,  and  7  fnthoms,  nml  then 
deepen  to  9  on  the  S.  S.  E.  part.     There  is  a  cuirenl  with  a  south  wind  which  runsN 
N.  K.  two  inilrs  per  hour,  and  with  a  north  wind  S.  S.  W.  two  miles  per  hour.  '  \ 

W.  S.  W.  from  Cape  Hntteras,  8  leagues  distant,  is  Ocracoclt  Inlet,  on  the  bar  of  I 
which  are  9  feet  water;  this  bar  is  subject  to  change,  and  should  not  be  entered  without 
a  pilot. 

From  Cnpe  Hatteras  to  Cnpe  Henry  the  ground  is  fine  sand,  and  to  the  northward  of  1 
Cnpe  Henry,  con<-se  snnJ,  with  some  shells  among  it. 

It  is  high  water  at  Cnpe  Hntterns  Shonls,  on  full  and  rhange  of  the  moon,  at  about  9 
o'cldcii,  nnd  the  ti(!e  flows  fiom  4  to  5  feet,  being  governed  by  the  winds  in  the  offing- 
in  ensterlv  gnles  it  nin<»  s>Hvernl  feet  liigher. 

HAT'iERAS  COVE  AND  INLET,  both  of  which  have  been  discovered  and  ex- 
amined by  Lieuts.  Alden  and  Mnffit,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  are  good  harbors  of  roluoe  for 
our  Htniill  coasters. 

HATTERAS  COVE.— This  nncliornge  nflbrds  protection  from  all  winds  exceptthopa 
from  tlif>  ^nuthwnrd  nnd  westward,  being  exposed  from  S.  to  W.  N.  W. 

To  enter  from  the  southward  nnd  westward  bring  Hntteras  light  to  benr  N.  E.  by  N. 
f  N.  nnd  run  for  it.  Anchor  wheti  in  from  5  to  4i  fnthoms  water,  muddy  bottom,  with 
thehrenktM's  on  the  S.  W.  spit  benring  south. 

To  enter  from  the  nortliwnrd  nnd  eastward,  giving  Hntterns  Point  (which  Ilea  2  miles 
S.  S.  W.  of  the  light)  a  berth  of  halt"  a  mile,  will  cnrry  you  ncross  the  shonls  in  3i  fatli- 
onis  wnter.  Bring  the  lialit  to  benr  N.  Vj.  by  N.  |  N.  and  run  for  it.  Anchor  when  in 
from  .5  to  4i  fnthoms  wnter,  muddy  boftoi.i,  with  tlie  brenl<ers  on  the  S.W.  spit  benring  S. 

1\)  go  outside  the  siionls  keep  in  12  fnthoms  wnter  until  the  light  benrs  N.  N.  W.,then 
steer  N.  W.  until  the  light  benrs  N.  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  and  steer  in  for  the  anchornge  hs  be- 
fore directed. 

To  heal  in.  Vessels  beating  in,  should  go  about,  on  npprnnching  the  western  shore,  or 
in  Ftnnding  towards  the  spit,  or  getting  into  less  than  four  fnthoms. 

HATTKKAS  INLET  benrs  S.  70<=  W.,  (W.  by  .'«■•.  H  S.,)  12  miles  distant  from  Cape 
Hatt?"nis  liulithouse.  It  is  ensily  known  by  a  remarkable  round  hummock,  covered  with 
ti'ees,  on  the  enst  side  of  the  entrance. 

Th(>  l)reakei's  seldom  extend  entirely  ncross  the  entrance,  but  at  nearly  all  times  miikeon 
each  side,  nnd  between  them  lies  the  channel. 

'I'he  bur  should  bo  appronched  from  the  nortliwnrd  and  eastward.  Keep  in  from  4  to 
5  fntliomii  wnfer,  niong  the  brenkers,  until  up  with  the  opening.  The  course  in  is  N.  \V, 
by  W.,  i  n  mile,  keeping  tlio  eastern  brenkers  nlionrd,  until  the  house  on  the  Eiist  Point 
of  the  entrniice  is  on  with  the  south  eilge  of  the  trees  on  the  humniock,  when  thecmirse 
is  N.  W.  i  W.  i  of  a  mile,  briiiuiug  the  house  on  the  Enst  Point  just  open  to  tlie  liorih- 
ward  of  the  trees  on  the  huniuiock;  then  the  course  up  is  N.  W.  I)v  N.  ?  N.,  ^  of  ii  mile 
to  tlie  nncliernge  just  inside  of  the  snnd-spits,  which  are  bnront  low  water,  and  sliowatiill 
times  di.-titictly. 

Tl  e  best  nnchornge  for  vessels  drawing  not  over  10  feet  is  marked  on  the  sketch. 

'IMie  Icnst  \\-nter  on  the  bnr  is  14  feet  nt  menu  low  water,  to  which  the  soundings  are 
reduced.     Tlie  menu  rise  nnd  full  of  tides  is  2  feet. 

The  tides  nnd  currents  are  much  influenced  by  the  winds :  the  ordinary  veltcity  in  ttie 
chnniKd  is  ,'i  kii"ts. 

T\\i'.  bottom  is  hnrd  sand,  except  a  few  sticky  spots  about  the  anchornge  at  the  iiciid  of  j 
the  chnnnid. 

OCKACOCK  LIGHTHOUSE.— On  Ocrncock  Isbind  is  a  lighthouse  oxhiliitinj;  a 
revolviii'i  light,  which  you  lenve  on  your  stnrlionrd  hniid  entering  the  inlet.  The  tiiiit' 
of  each  revolution  is  two  minutes.     It  is  elevated  7.5  feet  above  the  wnter. 

A  flouting  ri;ilit  is  stntioned  within  the  point  of  the  It  feet  shonl,  nenr  Pencil's  Hole 
^'wash.      She  is  tniiored  in  2  fnthoms  wnt(!r,  with  the  light  on  Ocrncock   benring  S.  K., 

iring  8.  W.  i  W.  44  miles,  nnd  the  light-boat  nt  the  S. 


A  bell  will  be  tolled  at  intervale  in  thick  nnd  tcjgiiy 


diHlant  2i  liiile:<;   Siiell  ('n"lle  l)enr 
W.  Straddle  W.  by  S.,  !)  Miilcs. 
weather. 

Vessels  bound  to  Wn^hnigton,  from  the  .S.  W.  end  of  Koynl  .Shoal,  on  which  is  n  liglit- 
boat,  wi';  make  their  c*>«rse  good  N.  \V.  by  N.,  which  will  bring  them  up  the  innin  cimn- 
nel  of  I'liinplico  Kivf^r    rtiul  w»l  he  Witliin  a  (imiiterof  n  mile  of  the  light. 

A  light-vessel  is  mi  the  .*».  k    end  of  Brnndf  Isiniid  Shoiil. 

(hi  a  |)oint  of  liind  on  iht-  ^fUtli  side  uf  Paiiiplico  River,  .'}.'»  miles  below  Wnsliiniitoii, 
ru  ininf;  into  Pamplicu  Sound,  sti'.iids  a  lighthouse,  30  I'eet  above  the  level  of  the  sen,  wiih 
a  fixed  light. 

A  floating  light  if  nl^'o  floored  nt  the  moutli  of  Neiise  Hiver.  She  is  mudreil  in  1j 
fiithiiins  wnter,  sticky  boil.ini,  iienr  th»>  upper  i  dge,  or  westctn  side  of  the  shoid,  extend- 
in.i  out  from  the  point  of  uiarrJi,  with  the  poiii'  benring  due  si>\ith,  distnnt  nlioiit  lliive 
miles;  (ium  Thicket  bearsog  S.  W.  4  W, ;  Urniid  Island  due  N.;  Swan  Ivlami  S.  K.,  ami 


^' 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


237 


,.j  S.  W.  Straddle  light-boat  due  E.     A  bell  of  200  lbs.  weight  will  be  tolled  at  ititervuU 
I  Ji' thick  iind  foggy  weather. 
Hiirbor  Isliiiid  light-veusel  of  72  tons,  is  between  Pamplico  and  Cone  Sounds. 
LoiiK  Shoal  Point  lloating  light  is  on  the  eastern  end  of  the  shuid. 

ALlil'-MARLB  SOUND  LIGHTS. — Roanoke  Island  floating-light  at  the  north  end  Albemarle 
lofCiotoii  Sound.  ;Sound  Lights 

Wade's  Point  floating-light  on  the  north  side  of  Pastoquasb  River. 
Roa'iiitie  River  Hoating-light  off  Walnut  Point. 

CAPfc^   LOUKUUT. — Cape  Looiiout  lightliouse  is  painted  with  red  and  white  stripes  Cape  Lookout. 

I  borizuntally,  and  can  be  seen  tti  or  18  miles,  and  resembles  a  sliip  under  sail.    It  contains 

jlixed  liuhr,  elevated  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.     The  house  is  surrounded  by  a 

growth  (if  trees,  from  which  a  bold  sandbeauh  extends  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  about 

1 3  miles,  in  the  centre  of  which  are  small  hillocks  of  sand.      This  light,  akliougii  seen  ' 

clearly  all  night,  until  near  the  approach  of  day,  cannot  then  be  discerned,  owing,  it  is 

uglit.  to  a  mist  that  rises  between  the  vessel  and  lamps.     It  is  judged  imprudent  to  ap- 


excBpttho.«3  ■?"""= 


h  the  shouls  of  Lookout  in  the  night  nearer  than  7  fathoms  on  the  east,  or  10  on 


west  side. 

The  shoals  extend  from  the  capo  10  miles,  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction,  being  broken  ground 
as  till- as  lar.  34"  28'  N.  In  that  latitude  there  are  14  fathoms  water,  and  from  timnci^  lo 
the  Gulf  ."Stream  the  soundings  are  gradual,  9a  fathoms.  The  tracks  are  faillii'ully  laid 
jowu  ill  the  chart,  (published  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt,)  together  with  all  the  souiidmgs 
from  the  outer  part  of  the  shoal  to  the  edge  of  the  (julf  Stream. 

The  outer  part  of  Cape  Lookout  Shoals  lies  S.  W.  .1  VV.,  22  leagues  from  Capo  Hat- 
teras,  and  22  leagues  S.  W.  ?  W.  from  the  outer  par'  .Capo  Hiuteras  Shoals.  Seven 
miles  from  Capo  Lookout  light  lies  a  shoid  which  is  liiy  at  low  water,  bearing  S.  i  E. 
from  the  light;  the  sea  breaks  constantly  S.  E.  from  this  shoal  for  the  distance  of  2  miles, 
ffliidi  is  tlie  S.  E.  point  of  breakers.  Between  this  shoal  and  the  shore  there  are  nu- 
iiiei'oas  spots,  on  which  are  li  and  li  fathoms;  south  of  this  slioal  tlie  least  water  is  2i 
fallioins.  On  the  oastern  part  of  ('ape  Lookout  Shoals  there  are  2i  fathoms;  near  them, 
on  the  northern  and  southern  sides,  are  4,  5,  and  U  fathoms.  (Jn  the  N.  and  E.  of  Cape 
Lookout  Shoals  you  will  have  7  and  ri  fathoms,  dead,  dark,  broken  shells,  with  sand. 

15EALJl'"ORT. — Old  Topsail  Inlet,  or  entrance  to  Beaut'oit,  lies  about  3  leagues  W.N.  Beaufort. 
\V.  I'loiii  Capo  Lookout.  It  has  2i  fathoms  water,  but  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance 
IS  formed  by  a  long  spit  extending  westward.  The  channel  in  lies  first  N.  W.  by  N.,  and 
then  alters  gradually  round  the  flat,  which  extends  from  the  larboard  or  western  side  to 
the  N.  iN.  W.  In  proceeding  up  to  Ueaufort,  you  will  have  3,  4,  and  3  fathoms  in  the 
chiinuel,  and  may  anchor  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water. 

If  yuu  wish  to  come  within  the  shoals  of  Cape  Lookout,  after  making  Beaufort,  keep 
along  the  shore  at  the  distance  of  2  miles,  until  you  come  up  with  the  point  of  sand,  form- 
iinu|)r('liy  good  haibor,  with  the  wind  from  the  N.  W.  to  E.,  for  small  vessels.  If 
l)ouiiil  to  the  northward,  keep,  as  near  as  you  ciui  judge,  the  same  distLinca,  or  a  little  less, 
fr  in  the  beach,  until  you  bring  the  lighthouse  ',  -  bear  N.  W.  by  N.;  you  will  atlhatdis- 
laiite  have  not  loss  than  ijuarter  less  three;  tho'.  '.teep  N.  E.,  and  you  will  deepen  to  5 
and  (J  t'athoins  in  a  few  minutes.     High  water  71;    46m.,  rise  3  feet. 

\V't!st,  10  leagues  fioip  Cape  Lookout,  lies  Bongue  Inlet,  on  which  are  8  feet  water; 
\V.  by  S.  i  S.,  4i  leagues  from  Bougne  Inlet,  lie..  New  River,  on  which  you  liave  8 
feet  water;  S.  W.  i  \V.,  (i  leagues  from  Nev/  Rive.-  light,  lies  New  Topsail  Inlet,  on 
wiiicli  lire  10  feiit  water;  S.  'vV.  1  W.  from  New  Topsail  Inlet,  3  leagues  distant,  you 
make  iJeep  Inlet,  on  which  are  7  feet  water;  S.  S.  W.  from  Deep  Inlet,  0'  leagues,  lies 
New  Inlet,  on  which  are  7  feet  water.  This  inlet  is  between  the  sea  coast  and  N.  E. 
end  of  .Siiiiiii  s  island.  It  will  admit  vessels  drawing  6  feet,  and  is  about  2  miles  wide  at 
itspntraiii'o.  having  7  feet  water,  at  low  tide,  over  the  bar.  It  continues  its  breadth  to 
tliti  tiat,  aiul  IS  navigable  .'or  large  vessels  21  miles  from  its  moulli,  and  20  miles  to  Wil- 
mington, to  which  town  vessels  iliawing  10  or  12  feel  can  reach  withoia  any  risk.  S.  by 
E.,  d  leagues  from  New  IiiIjm.  will  carry  you  luto  15  fathoms,  south  from  th)  Fryingpan 
Shoiils. 

C.\P1';  FKAR,  or  B.\LD  HE,\D  LIGHTHOUSE.— On  the  S.  W.  end  of  Smith's 
ManJ,  HaM  HtMul  lighthouse  is  erected,  it  stands  one  mile  from  the  sea,  is  90  feet  high, 
and  coiitiiiii.s  a  lixeii  light.  The  lamps  are  110  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  50 
feet  iibove  ilie  lops  of  the  trees  which  stand  on  the  hills  betwt^en  the  light  and  the  sett. 
Smith  and  O.ik  islands  form  the  main  entrance  into  the  river. 

To  go  over  the  main  bar,  bring  the  lighihouse  to  bears  N.  i  E.  The  buoy  is  within 
the  bar.  close  to  it.  and  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel.  From  the  buoy  the  light- 
house lieiirs  about  N.  N.  E.,  distant  one  and  a  half  mile.  On  the  bar,  at  high  tide,  you 
have  Hi  feet,  and  its  rise  is  5  feet.  Froia  the  point  of  iho  cape  the  lighthouse  bears  N. 
\V,,  (lisiant  4  miles,  and  from  the  extremity  o*"tho  Fryingpan  Shoal,  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N., 
5  liwgues. 

The  general  direction  of  the  laud  from  Bald  Head  lighthouse  to  Little  River,  (30 
.mles  from  the  bar,)  is  W  i  S.      Froi:".  t'.iu  w  jstoru  projection  of  Fryingpan  Shoals  to 


Lighthouse. 


m 


m 


ill 


mmm 


■pwiiWWUlin 


imm* 


238 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


•in 


41 


Lighthouse. 


I^th  Bar 
IS'evD  Inlet. 


Old  Bar  at 
New  Inlet, 


The  Main 
Bar  of  Cape 
Fear  River, 


the  mouth  of  Little  River,  the  soundings  are  from  9  to  10  fiithoms,  sometimes  snnd,  and 
sometimes  rock. 

It  miiy  be  necessary  to  observe  to  strnngers,  that,  in  passing  the  shoals,  esperiiillv  Id  o 
darit  nifjht,  it  is  most  prudent  to  stoer  W.  in  Int.  33°  20',  or  '25  at  most,  until  they 'shoal 
their  water  to  7  or  8  fntboms;  by  doing  this  they  may  be  sure  of  being  to  the  Westwurd 
of  the  bar. 

Your  course  from  Cape  Fear  Bar,  when  in  9  fathoms  water,  to  clear  Cnpe  Romnn 
Shoal,  is  S.  W.,  and  distance  7i2  miles.  When  sailing;  towards  these  coasts  it  is  prudent 
to  koej»  nearly  a  degree  to  the  southward  of  the  latitude  of  the  place  you  intend  to  iTmlip 
until  you  reckon  yourself  on  the  edy;e  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  when  you  must  be  directed 
by  judgment,  according  to  circumstances.  Do  not,  if  possible  to  avoid  it,  siiil  to  tlio 
northward  of  33°  '20',  or  at  highest,  33°  25',  until  you  obtain  10  fathoms  water.  In  this 
depth  you  will  be  within  the  south  or  outer  end  of  the  Fryingpan  Shoal,  which  liesinjut 
33°  36'.  In  approHcliing  the  coast,  in  33°  20',  your  first  soundings  will  be  from  30  to  35 
fathoms;  in  thin  depth  you  will  he  very  near  to  the  edge  of  the  Gulf  .Stream.  You  will 
have  fio«  grey  sand,  with  black  spots,  when  yon  will  got  into  17  fathoms :  there  is  a  Jono 
flat  in  tlhiw  depth  of  water.  In  steering  west  you  will,  for  the  first  5  or  6  leagues,  slioaJen 
tb«  w-aii*^  very  lirTi»*.  When  you  come  in  \A  fathoms,  you  shoalen  your  water  quicker 
b*?  grHrfoaily.  You  will  see  the  land  from  10  fathoms  water,  if  the  weather  be  cleur' 
and  m»»  rh«n  be  sure  that  you  are  within  the  Fryingpan,  from  the  outside  of  tliis  shoal! 
To  rhe  vPiwHtward  of  N.  W.  no  land  can  be  seen,  when  without  the  shoals. 

The  cur»«»t«  on  the  coast  of  Uiortli  Carolina  are  governed  mostly  by  the  wind  :  durine 
the  sumine'  -nunths,  the  prevailing  winds  are  south-westerly,  and  the  currents  thonset 
the  fiirei»tl(H.  i^  the  coast  to  tlie  eastward,  and  when  the  southerly  winds  ceiise  blowing 
it  changes  surtuv^nly  to  the  contrary  direction,  which  is  a  sure  precursor  of  a  N.  E. 
wind. 

Tlio  lighthouse  on  Federal  Point  bears  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Bald  Head  light,  distnnt 
about  8^  miles.  It  is  elevated  48  I'eet  atMive  the  level  of  the  sea,  painted  white,  and  sfnnda 
on  the  main  land,  north  side  of  the  entrance  of  Capo  Fear  River,  where  formerly  etood 
a  beacon.     Tlie  bar  bears  from  the  light  E.  S.  E.,  distant  one  mile. 

NORTH  BAR  NEW  INLET.— To  enter,  rim  marks  are,  to  bring  the  west  end  of 
Buzzard's  15ay  point  of  sand  on  H.  Helly's  large  white  house,  in  Smithville,  im,!  the 
bearings  will  be  .S.  W.  by  W.,  keeping  tlie  point  of  Smithville  with  these  bearings  until 
over  the  bar;  then  keep  the  spit  of  sand  or  beacli  that  miikes  off  from  Federal  Point 
light  close  on  board,  which  will  carry  you  into  the  >iver  channel,  where  there  is  good  im- 
ciionigeall  along  the  sand,  in  3  and  4  fathoms  w«tor.  On  this  bar  there  are  10  feet  at  low, 
and  \1  at  high  water. 

The  land  on  Cape  Lookout  is  very  low,  and  caanot  be  seen  more  than  a  league  in  the 
clearest  weather,  frotn  on  board  a  small  vessel. 

[We  derline  giving  directions  for  sailing  into  many  ports  in  North  Carolina,  as  nil  the 
harlwrs  are  barred,  and  always  suliject  to  alteratif>n  by  every  gale,  particularly  in  the 
equinoctial  storms;  but  the  bars  create  only  a  part  «f  the  danger  in  sailing  into  thn>« 
portj* ;  it  is  the  vast  bed  of  shoals  that  lies  within  th«*  bars,  with  their  innumeraliie  siimll 
channels,  which  give  to  tide  so  many  different  dirertKMis  that  even  the  pilots  wlio  live  un 
the  spot,  find  it  difficult  to  carry  a  vessel  in  without  sofne  accident.] 

OLD  BARat  NEW  INLET,  or.  as  now  called,  THK  SOUTH  BAR.— In  running 
in,  when  the  lighthouse  on   Federal  Point  bears  W..  or  W.  by  S.,y()u  will  make  a  tiiiok 
and  high  hummocl'  of  vn-wds.  called  Merryck's  Wood  Blulf.  before  yon   make  the  lij;iit; 
but  should  it  bear  to  the  N.  of  W.,  you  will  make  the   lighthouse  and  bintf  at  the  sniin' 
time,  the  former  of  which  may  bo  seen  in  clear  weatlier  about  15   miles,  from  a  sli   ' 
deck,  in  about  10  or  M  fathom>'  water,  and,  when  first  discovered,  has  the  appearun. 
a  distant  sail.     As  yo'    ipproaeh  rt».- light,  the  water  beromes  gradually  shoal.     In  4  i 
fathofns  water,  one  1111,    nnd  a  liaKfrom  the  lightbou*'',  bearing  W.  S.  W.  to  W.,  tii' 
is  good  anchorage,  soft  in.ttom. 

In  running  in  bring  thi>  lighthot»«M»  on  with  the  south  end  of  the  barracks,  which  yoi, 
will  ronlinuf!  till  over  the  bar,  and  \^*r  the  lieach.  and  i>  along  the  beach  until  you  are 
in  the  river.  On  the  bar  at  high  vvaipc.  11  to  1'^  6'<'t;  at  low  water  (J  feet  only  The 
depth  of  water,  and  channel  however,  are  subject  to  variation,  so  that  it  is  not  advjsiibie 
for  strangers,  except  in  cases   )♦"  iiecessifv.  to  run  in  without  a  pilot. 

THE  .MAIN  BAR  OF  CAPE  FEAR  RIVKR.  -Vessels  running  down  from  the 
westward,  should  not  Bfiproach  nearei-  ''  ''  !  tie  (iround,  than  to  bring  the  eajje  (which 
is  till-  tnost  eastern  part  of  the  B.iM  1  ,<ids)  to  bear  V..  by  N.      When  yon  hiiiig 

the  lighthouse  t(j  l)enr  N.  ^  E.,  in  «'*out  4  Uu^r  wat'  1 ,  steer  immediately  for  it,  which 
will  be  a  little  open  to  the  eastwarri  ■/  11  p(de  Im-  •  /■  .  with  a  cask  on  thetop  painted  bliick. 
A  continuation  of  this  course  will  car»/  you  clear  <»f  the  Fingers,  when  you  will  seea 
buoy  ahead,  or  a  little  on  the  larbr)ard  Imiw,  whi^h  y'»9  Will  pass,  leaving  it  on  the  lar- 
board liand;  as  soon  an  you  leave  the  bu'^r  stei^  3*  W.,  or  keep  the  breakers  close  on 
board  the  larboard  dide    ^ben  you  wiM  .uff.  ur  bettr  avruy,  lu  the  water  may  doopen,  or 


il«HP"lsl|lH!'i«"W«|W4i''»l«i 


ll«iil>illi.i. 


mmmmmmn 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


239 


Oak  Island 
Channel. 


Ijflcotno  more  shoal,  to  be  ascertained  by  heaving  the  lead.  This  will  carry  you  clear  of 
along  sand  shoal  thut  miikes  olf  tim  point  of  Bald  Head,  which  is  dangerous  to  ground 
apon,  us  the  flood  tide  sets  directly  over,  and  breaks  upon  it  with  the  wind  from  the  S. 
\V.  I'l  approaching  Bald  Head,  caution  is  necessary,  as  the  shoals  on  both  sides  aie 
very  steep,  frequently  from  6  to  3  fathoms  at  one  cast  of  the  lead.  Keep  close  to  this 
shoal  by  sounding  as  above  directed,  until  you  reach  Oak  Island,  when  you  may  steer 
ijirect  for  Smithville.  Outside  of  the  bar,  in  5  or  G  fathoms  water,  the  lighthouse  bear- 
ing Nm  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  soft  bottom.  There  are  on  the  bar,  at  low  water,  10 
feet,  and  at  high  water,  144  t'oet;  and  the  sea  is  scarcely  ever  so  rough  as  to  prevent  a 
pilot's  boarding  a  vessel  at  the  buoy. 

OAK  island  channel. — Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  9  feet  water,  running 
iato  Wilmington  tlirough  Oak  Island  Channel,  may  bring  the  easternmost  part  of  the 
luinpof  trees  on  the  east  end  of  Oak  Island  to  bear  N.  E.  by  E.,  and  run  for  it,  which 
ffiilciin'y  them  over  in  the  best  of  the  watei',  7i  feet  ut  low  water,  and  11  feet  at  high 
ffiiier;  as  soon  as  you  deepen  your  water  over  the  bar,  steer  for  the  end  of  the  sandy 
point  of  Oak  Island,  till  close  up  with  it,  then  steer  E.  S.  E.  for  opening  Cape  Creek, 
till yuu  deepen  into  4  fathoms,  then  haul  up  N.,  or  N.  N.  W.,  along  the  beach,  till  you  get 
up  with  Fort  Johnson,  where  you  may  anchor. 
GEORiiETOWN. — Georgetown  entrance  is  72  miles  S.  W.  ^  W.  from  Cape  Fear.        Georgetown. 

In  sailing  to  Little  River  Inlet,  which  divides  North  from  South  Carolina,  you  pass 
Locliwood's  Folly  Inlet,  which  lies  west  from  Cape  Fear  light,  3S  leagues  distant.  The 
laiiJ  appears  broken,  and  contaiOs  no  safe  harbor. 

Oil  your  course  towards  Georgetown,  several  other  inlets  may  be  seen,  and  you  pass 
Xortii  Inlet,  about  3  league's  from  Georgetown  lighthouse ;  this  inlet  is  the  northern 
boundary  of  North  Island.  The  entrance  into  this  inlet  is  from  the  northward;  the  south 
breaker,  forming  nearly  a  crescent,  runs  apparently  across  the  mouth  of  the  inlet;  there 
are  generally  not  less  than  (i  feet  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  but  the  depth  varies  with 
the  direction  and  violence  of  the  prevailing  winds-  The  direction  of  this  channel  has 
been  within  a  few  years  considerably,  though  gradually,  changed  by  the  elongation  and 
curve  of  the  south  breaker  throwing  the  channel  more  to  the  northward.  In  entering 
it,  Gteorgotown  lighthouse  wdl  bear  about  S.  by  W.,  distant  3  leagues :  a  small  but  dis- 
tinct sand-hill,  (the  most  northern  on  the  north  end  of  the  North  Island,)  S.  W.  4  S. ; 
the  must  southern  building  on  the  south  end  of  the  opposite  islands  W.  by  S. ; 
vou  may  then  run  in  between  the  heads  of  the  two  breakers,  rounding  along  the  edge 
of  tlie  south  breaker,  and  thus  passing  between  the  breakers  into  the  harbor.  The  flood 
tide  comes  in  from  the  S.  E.,  and  sets  across  the  south  breaker  towards  the  north 
brealier.  On  the  north  end  of  North  Island,  about  3  leagues  from  the  light,  there  is  a 
villiii'eof  about  20  or  30  dwelling-houses,  (a  summer  residence,)  which  is  distinctly  seen 
fioni  sea,  and  often  mistaken  for  Sullivan's  Island,  near  Charleston:  there  ar^  several 
houses  on  the  north  point  of  the  opposite  island.  To  small  vessels,  this  inle  Tords  a 
snfe  liiirbor ;  tiiere  are  two  passii2;es  leading  from  it  up  to  Georgetown,  but  ;iom  the 
8hoiilii«H»  of  the  water,  they  cannot  be  conveniently  navigated,  except  by  boats ;  in  case 
of  ni-cessity,  however,  vessels  of  (1  or  7  feet  draught  may  bo  navigated  with  some  delay 
thncJiili  the  most  southern,  which  is  the  deepest  passage  into  the  bay,  or  river,  leading 
tolliw  town. 

(ih^^RGETOWN  HARBOR. — Georgetown  lighthouse  is  u  white  tower,  erected  on 
Nortli  Island,  which  is  on  the  northern  and  eastern  sides  of  the  harbor,  at  the  en- 
truucH  of  Winyaw  Bay,  on  a  low  sandy  spot,  and  exhibits  «  lixed  light,  90  feet  above  the 
Ifvel  of  the  sea  at  hi;-!!  water,  bearing  N.  i  Vv^.  trom  the  entrance  of  the  bar,  0  miles  dis- 
tant. From  the  south-easternmost  part  of  Cape  Romnn  Shoals,  to  the  entrance  of  the 
biir,  the  course  is  N.  N.  K.,  and  the  distance  174  miles. 

In  iip|)i'oacliHig  Goor;;ftown  Bar  from  the  northward,  the  harbor  is  shut  out  from  view 
bv  Nurtli  Island,  and  the  lighthouse  appears  to  be  situated  in  a  low  wood. 

Ill  pujising  the  liitlit,  either  northerly  or  southerly;  vessels  will  firi  I  fi  fathoms  water, 
within  ')  miles  of  the  land.  S.  S.  E.,  54  miles  from  Georgetown  light,  there  is  a  shoal 
bunk  with  74  feet  water. 

There  are  several  spar  buoys  placed  in  the  best  water  on  the  bar,  and  in  the  channel, 
in  sitiliiij;  by  which,  tiie  following  directions  must  be  observed,  viz.:  The  lirst  buoy  on 
till)  Imr  lies  directly  in  the  channel,  which,  of  course,  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  close 
to;  from  this  to  the  second  (channel)  buoy,  the  course  is  about  N.  W.,  one  mile  distant, 
and  when  up  with  it.  immediately  steer  N.  E.,  14  mile  distant,  which  is  also  in  the  cliaii- 
nel,  to  the  tiiird  boo  when  you  will  immediately  steer  N.  by  W.  for  the  lighthouse,  4 
miles  distant,  keepiiijr  that  course  until  within  lUO  fathoms  of  the  light,  leaving  it  on  the 
lUflioard  hand,  when  you  will  be  in  good  anchorage. 

Tlk)i  north  inlet  channel  into  Georgetown,  cannot  be  recommended,  under  any  circuin- 
stancea. 

Vess  ds  at  sea  will  find  deep  water,  and  when  the  wind  is  to  the  southward  and  west- 
I  ward,  coDvenieut  aud  safe  anchorage  near  the  land,  about  14  or  '2  miles  to  the  northward 


Georgetown 

Harbor, 

Light. 


Buoys. 


I 
r 


w 


Pi«pippi>iiqpiP«9n;^v 


S40 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cape  Roman 
light. 

Cape  Roman. 


High  water,    of  the  lighthouse.     A  common  flood  tide  rises  nearly  4  feet;  it  is  high  water  on  the  bai 
at  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  about  7  o'clock. 

CAPE  ROMAN  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light  87.i  feet  above  the  sea;  the  lighthouse  ii 
painted  alternutely  bbick  and  white,  begining  with  white  at  tlie  base,  it  is  on  the  east  em 
of  the  Great  Riicoon  Key,  and  bears  W.  by  S.  from  Capo  Roman. 

CAPE  ROMAN. — Cape  Roman  is  very  low  land  ;  it  has  neither  tree  nor  busli,  andl 
appears,  when  seen  at  a  distance,  to  be  a  sand  left  dry  by  the  tide. 

The  Shoal  otf  Cape  Roman  runs  off  S.  E.,  about  ii  milos  from  the  light;  the  oute 
point  has  only  4  feet  water,  with  a  swash  channel  of  2i  fathoms,  between  that  and  tli,, 
light;  olT  the  point  of  the  Shoal,  the  water  shoals  from  7  to  5  fathoms,  then  diiectly  oj 
the  breakers. 

From  the  south  entrance  of  Santee  River,  to  G  miles  S.  E.  of  Cape  Roman,  the  shoal 
extends  to  a  considerable  distance  from  the  land;  the  S.  E.  point  of  it  lies  17^  miles  S.  S 
W.  from  Georgetown  lighthouse.     Close  to  this  shoal  there  are  4  and  3  fathomH,  and  tli 
land  is  so  low  that  you  cannot  see  it  from  the  deck  of  a  ship,  at  the  extremity  of  thi 
shoal. 

In  hteering  W.  N.  W.  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  Cape  Roman  Shoal,  you  will  soon  sej 
Racoon  Key  liglit,  then  steer  W.  S.  W.,  or  S.  W.  by  W.,  in  about  5  fathoms  water.  As 
,  '  .  there  is  a  shoal  runs  off  about  5  milos  S.  E.  by  E.  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  Bull's  Isliiml 
you  should  taKe  care  to  avoid  it  in  passing.  Senee  Bay,  or  Bull's  Harbor,  lies  betweea 
Racoon  Keys  and  Bull's  Island.  There  are  shoals  lyinsj  off  the  west  end  of  Racoon  Krvs 
and  you  should  anchor  near  to  Bull's  Island,  in  6  fathoms  water. 

From  the  shoal  off  the  N.  E.  end  of  Bull's  Island  to  Charleston  Bar,  the  course  to  go 

clear  of  the  Rattle  Snake,  is  S.  W.  by  W.,  and  the  distance  7  leagues.     There  are  four 

islands  between  Sonee  Bay  and  Charleston  Bar,  viz  :  Bull's,  Cooper's,  Davies',  and  Li)n» 

Island.     Flats  extend  from  all  the  inlands,  alongwhich  the  soundings  are  regular.    With 

Charleston  churches  northward  of  Sullivan's  Island,  you  will  be  in  .5i  fathoms  water,  on 

the  "idgo  of  the  Rattle  Snake  ;  and  when  the  churchf"  are  open  to  the  southward  of  Sul 

livnn's  Island,  you  are  clear  of  that  shoal.     You  should  approach  no  nearer  to  this  bank 

than  .5  fathoms  water. 

Georgetown,       GEORGETOWN.  (S.  C.)  TO  CHARLESTON,  (S.  C  )— From  Georgetown  Bur, 

(S.  C.)  to        outside  of  Roman  Shoal,  steer  S.  by  W.,  distance  15  miles.  —  From  thence  to  Cliarles- 

Charleston,      ton  Bar,  S.  W.  by  W.,  distant  39  miles.     If.  after  [)a9-«ing  Roman  Shoal,  you  wish  tu  jo 

(S.  C.)  to  Bull's  Harbor,  steor  W.  by  S.,  until  you  bring  Bull's  Island  to  bear  W.  N.  W.  or  N, 

W.  by  W.     In  steering  for  Bull's  Island  you  will  pass  Racoon  Keys. 
Bull's  Bay.  BULL'S  BAY  is  about  23  miles  North-east  of  Charleston  light,  on  the  coast  of  South 

Carolina.  Thirteen  foet  can  be  carried  across  the  bar  at  low  water  sprinr  tides,  the  risn  ami 
fall  of  which  is  six  and  three-quarters  feet.  To  enter,  "  bring  the  N.  E.  bluff  or  point  of 
Bull's  Island  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  (by  compass)  and  run  for  it.  When  within  tluie- 
quartersof  a  mile  of  the  point,  stoer  N.  tVireo-quartera  W.  until  it  is  passed.  Then  t'j 
low  round  the  shore,  and  anchor  at  pleasure  in  soft  bottom."  "  In  leaving  the  hay,  ki'np 
away  until  the  outer  spit  is  cleared,  which  bears  S.  E.  by  S.  from  the  bluff  point  of  Bull's 
Island,  distant  three  and  a  quarter  miles." 
Lighthouse.  Charleston  lighthouse,  which  is  1254  feet  high,  is  built  on  Lighthouse  Island,  and  oon 

tains  a  revolving  light.     On  Morria  Island  there  are  two  beacons,  intended  as  the  marks 
for  the  Overall  Channel. 

Buoy.  The  south  breaker  has  a  buoy  on  the  east  end,  in  12  feet  water,  and  in  the  miiiileuf 

this  channel  is  a  buoy  with  a  sin  il'  white  flag  upon  it,  in   18  feet  water,  low  tide— on 
either  side  of  which  you  may  go  when  running  in. 
High  water.        There  are  also  two  beacons  on  Sullivan's  Island,  as  a  range  for  the  Ship  Channel.    Hijh 
water,  7h.  15ni.,  rise  6  feet. 


'.^ki^i 


>)ittmmi 


Ltwford  CliuiDcl  B«>coD. 


Ueviihiiig. 


I'lved  Light. 


Charleston,  CHARLESTON.(S.C.)—SHlpCii*!«»iir.— Standing  in  for  thoBar  having  theBifin!iiij 

(S.C.)—Ship  to  "ppear  as  above,  a  hundspi.-i  '-i  I.><mtK  to  the  N    .>f  the  lighthouao    and  you  wdl  simii! 

Channel,  make  the  Bar  Buoy  lying  in  3  fatho-us  water,  anil  which  may  bo  passed  on  eitln-r  biile.l 

Nearly  in  the  same  range  lie  two  m'    r  Biiov!'      Iih  first  oh  the  soulli  iwint  of  tlio  Northl 

Breaker,  and  the  other  on  the  iiinei    -t»uth  f>»iint  (or  S.  W.  points  ot  'he  same  hn'  ' 

These  buoys  are  to  be  loft  <>u  the  starmjard  baud,  at  the  ilistauce  of  a  isiiip's  length      Ml 


"■•Ijr 


"wwiim»BBPP«r- 


'^mm  jgp^i^rv^m 


jorgetown  BirJ 
nee  to  Cliiirles-j 
you  wish  tu  "ol 
•  N.  W.  oi-N.I 


[alatiil,  und  con-l 
:d  Ha  the  innrksl 


!^hannol.    IMI 


I'lvetl  Light. 

ivinij  the  noiicoal 
id  you  will  siMniI 
on  oitlhT  tiiilt'.j 
lilt  of  tHe  Nurtlil 
J  sutiio  liri'  '■ 


-...((iy 


^f^^mmmm 


■■•■'W-. 


fid  '.-/■-  •.r%'^3n.,'f  ..rr.'  -~^'i 

•V  ..-■••  vv^r' — ^-\  /'a  II '^     — -■'ciJ^'Ci-.Si^Sii       ». 


fc.5 I    ,i«l I >i 


TmiiSMI::;.!  .Villi- 


rj-  — f*     /\    -rj-''    -r:J    ri^r^    rV"l^*' 

~.<'  _-^.  ..J  .-.ri__,  .J  .^.    ,^._-_J  ..^  ....111      ^.^^  ...^  J 


/^/>     ,  w^  /     /.  /^/ 

•     ''I r////t/t/ //'/>///  //ft   r   /'/f// /////•  y//;/r// 
/  or  /  / 

.M.\.ii)ii  II.  !t.\i::!-:  i    .s.t  :•;. 
A/ai/r  III  lAK'l ,\  .')  ///,//  fi'iynt\i/i-r/  in  //ir 
y't>/>tH'in/'//iii//  /Itiii'iiii  I//  irti.\/iii/,'70>n 
I'liiyi-.n  r«l  \W  Wiill.iili  ',ii>o'v«T.\cu-^'«ir\ 

!■',<!■  Ilii-  .llllri  I,  ii/i    I  ii,i^/  li,,>/    la  '''  l-.'illtnili 


WW.  \  111. 

<  riiiiiii'ti  ii\f  i>l'  l;i/i:r  .'> /i>  .'i'^ /',:l . 
Till- Si'iiiiiliiit/x  iiiv  ill  I'lvl III  li'ir  U%il,i- 

.Viilf.  Tin-  Siiiinitiiiif.f  III  Itir  iii-ii/lilioiii/iin'if  o/'  l/ir 
I'tiir.  iiif  OiHii  l/if  I'/iiiil  />r  /.I'll/  •S/:irtniiiir  rxXii\\\ 
IIS  i\  ///iiriM-  l/ii'  I'tiiiiiiii'ii  of  I'll-  I'fiii/'ii.ss 


tmsmmmt 


mmm 


mm 


mm 


X;Vx.  .■.■^'  ^il '.- /,  .A ^./..': -' -^'M ii"^. 


k 


-...  1./    ■       /,.     ,-.■     .i; 


"kn    \     rrt' l! i- 


I'.i. S;.!ii:;.i  Mili'K. 


'r— ""J 


\j'\ 


/« 


Ji 


/^ />  >        '  /  ^        /    //  /  ^ 

•!.».. KHi  11.  :».\t':::':  v.  s/:'.  ;•:. 

Mi/t/f  ui  i,'<'\' /  ,\- ,')  ti/;//   i'f/ii>\itfil  III  //ir 
Jo/un'iii/i/iim/  /III  11-4111  11/  H)i.\7ii/i^i/tin 
r.iiy liix't'il  \W  Will'iiiii  II«,ii\«'r.\(">'Vor,\ 

.".•///(,■  .hliri  11,111    Ciiil.vl  /'t/nl     IS  '''   /ulltli'/l 


i   '•       M 


:i  \r  \  111. 

li'lilUH'li   f4Mitl'  l;,l,\v  .'■  ;r.'i'^  /',;•/. 
TlirS-'iiililiiii/.t  'ilf  lit  /ivi  III  li'li-  h'liltl: 

.Vi»l«'  J'/ii  .S'lmm/im/.y  in  l/w  iifii//i/ioiir/iiiinf  i'/'  tin- 
/!iir.  iir4- fy'ittn  //if  I'l'inr/  />y  /.ml  S/ui/nirin-  f'XXii\;\ 
il.s  /.»  ///i/'/v.w  l/ir  I  ntiit/ii'fi  !>/'  ifir  /'/•//i/iii.i.t 


•■■■ 

/ 

l> 

\ 

-•           •! 

\ 

I 

Z     ,.l  II' 

\ 

'if  '■■■   ' 

2   V 

''v   f\ 

/..  „ 

'    t* 

■v. 

.\'.ii  <(•/«/'»•''»'/. /(.. //'I  /•;■  /.  If  /•I'll,'.  /■'■ 


!! 


/'i,;.ii, I, ..//.,  /■;,  n  W li/i,i,i,)Hi» 


J 


ipwwiP^ ppraajfT' 


lurfMssing  the 
IforSullivHn'a  Ii 
Jgpvvith  the  bu 
Iciiminin'a  IVii 
|\Vlioii  inidwny 
|« Middle  Gruui 
loive  tlio  island 
Lawkord  C 
hautli  Hoacun 
I  Leave  the  buoj 
Je,  to  clear  shoii 

■  [jurse  should  b 
I  On  MoiTJa'  Ii 
Ihiug  at  the  oni 
Ijllier,  and  steei 
l[or  Sullivan's  Is 
llhis  channel, — i 

There  are  th 

■llie  lurboard  hn 

limer  on  the  lai 

lOreridl  Channe 

STONO  IN 

llnreen  them  lie 

lijland  culled  thf 

1^0  elf  Br  of  the  I 

JCoffin  Island,  y( 

Itloje  to  the  bre 

limooth,  show  > 

Iwater,  but  it  wii 

From  3  ttitho 

|.  W.  by  W.  I 

Iwhicii  lie  oir  Sti 

ST.  HELKI 

llslaiid  and  the  i 

ItHvigiible  by  ves 

Tiry  at  low  wate 

JAsliappo,  Cumh 

lonie  of  tliem  < 

wemek  of  6  feel 

If  St.  Helena  S 

bS.  W.  i  S.,  J 

HP  5  or  C  filth 

S.\INT  HE 

hover  1.3  feet 

lud  the  Slew  cl 

|liiuige,  excepli 

'  .\  light-ship  \i 

lie  following  be 

;.iN.;  Ship  I 

To  go  in  Sle' 

I  will  then  bear 

J)  for  Otter  Isli 

Ins,  the  inner 

pip  ns  above  m 

1  it  strong. 

J  To  go  in  by  t 

p.  S.  W.,  whe 

f  it— run  for  it 

.  N.  W.,  the 

.  W.  by  N.,  V 

ptcr  Island,  ius 

luth  end  of  tin 

JBtJint  from  the 

I  NORTH  EI 

■  \V.,  and  the 
loalings,  when 
Ir  of  North  Ec 
m  the  land. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


241 


Lrpftssing  t'l^  inner  buoy,  stflor  N.  or  N.  i  W.  (according  as  tho  tide  is  flood  or  ebb) 

||gr  Sullivan's  Island,  keeping  the  two  beacons  on  Sullivan's  Island  in  range  until  you  aro 

|,p  with  the  buoy  off  Cummin's  Point,  which  you  leave  on  your  larboard  hand.     From 

Icuininin's  Point  Buoy  the  course  is  N.  W.  by  N.  to  tlie  anchorage  in  Rebellion  Roads. 

Iwiioii  midway  between  Sullivan's  Island  and  Cummin's  Point  i3uoy,  you  will  clear  the 

|„.Mid(llB  Ground"  by  steering  for  Fort  Pinckney,  keeping  it  a  little  on  the  larboard  bow. 

Igive  tlio  island  a  berth  of  about  100  yards  as  you  approach  it,  and  anchor  off  the  city. 

I  Lawkord  Channel  has  one  buoy  at  its  entrance,  which  you  will  find  by  keeping  the    Lawford 

hoiith  Beacon  open  to  the  northward  of  the  lighthouse  about  three  handspikes'  length.    Channtl. 

Ueave  the  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand  at  the  distance  of  50  yards,  and  then  steer  N.  N. 

Ie.Iu  clear  shoals  on  the  larboard  hand,  until  the  lighthouse  bears  W.  N.  W.,  when  the 

ItDiirse  should  be  directed  to  Sullivan's  Island.     Tho  South  Beacon  is  not  lighted. 

On  Morris'  Island  are  two  white  beacons,  which,  kept  in  range,  will  bring  you  to  a  buoy  • 

living  Bt  the  entrance  of  the  Ooerall  Channel.     Keep  the  beacons  directly  on  with  each 
Ijilier,  and  steer  for  them  until  you  strike  5  fathoms  water,  and  then  shape  your  course 
|[or  Sullivan's  Island.     They  are  both  lighted.     At  low  water  7  feet  can  be  carried  through 
iisdiannel, — at  high  water,  13. 

There  are  three  buoys  in  the  North  Channel.  Run  for  the  outer  buoy,  leaving  it  on 
Ithe  larboard  hand, — thence  for  the  middle  buoy,  which  leave  on  the  starboard,  and  tho 
limier  on  the  larboard  hand.  Nearly  the  same  water  may  be  found  in  the  north  as  in  the 
lOrernll  Channel,  but  the  latter  is  to  be  preferred. 

STONO  INLET  is  about  two  leagues  from  the  south  channel  of  Charleston;  be-  Stono  Inlet. 
Iineen  them  lie  two  islands,  viz. :  Morris  Island,  on  which  the  lighthouse  stands,  and  the 
Kliiinl  culled  the  Coffin  Island.  With  the  lighthouse  open  of  the  Coffin  Island,  you  will 
Ijo clear  of  the  Stono  Shoals,  in  6  fathoms  water;  but  if  you  shut  the  lighthouse  in  with 
ICoffin  Island,  you  will  not  have  more  than  5i  fathoms  off  Stono  Shoals ;  you  will  pass 
[close  to  the  breakers,  and  consequently  be  in  danger:  the  breakers,  unless  the  sea  be 
limooth,  show  where  the  shoal  is.  In  Stono  Inlet  there  are  9  or  10  feet  water  at  low 
|walei',  but  it  was  not  much  frequented  until  Charleston  was  blockaded  in  the  year  1775. 
From  3  fathoms  water,  south  of  Charleston  Bar  to  North  Eddisto  inlet,  the  course  is 
Is.  W.  by  W.  I  W.,  and  the  distance  5  leagues  ;  this  course  will  carry  you  clear  of  shoals 
|which  lie  o(F  Stono  Inlet,  which  lie  further  off  than  any  that  are  in  your  way  to  Eddisto. 

ST.  HELENA  SOUND. — The  entrance  of  this  sound  lies  between  South  Eddisto   SaintHeUnM 
llslaiid  and  the  northernmost  Hunting  Island ;  it  is  about  2  leagues  wide.      This  place  is    Sound. 
iDavigiible  by  vessels  of  7  or  8  feet  water  only ;  it  is  full  of  sand-banks,  many  of  which  are 
Tdrv  nt  low  water.     Six  rivers  empty  themselves  into  this  Sound,  viz:  South  Eddisto, 
jislmppo,  Cumbahaw,  Chehaw,  True  Blue,  and  Corsaw.     These  rivers  are  all  navigable; 
lonip  of  them  come  200  miles  down  the  country,  but  few  of  them  can  be  navigated  by 
Jesisels  of  6  feet  water,  for  more  than  30  or  40  miles  fiom  the  sound.     From  the  entrance 
f  St.  Helena  Sound,  along  the  Huntin^j;  Islands,  to  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal,  the  course 
S.  \V.  i  S.,  and  the  distance  about  5i  leagues.      The  soundings  are  regular:  you  will 
lave  5  or  C  f;ith"ni8  water. 
S.\INT  HELENA  SOUND. — This  is  a  good  place  for  shelter  for  vessels  not  draw- 
h^oviM- 13  foot  water.     There  are  two  channt^ls,  the  Ship  channel,  which  has  14  feet, 
iDiltlie  Slew  channel,  which  has  9  feet  at  low  water.     Time  of  high  water,  at  full  and    High  vtattr. 
lliiinge,  excepting  during  a  freshet,  7h.  40m. — rise  of  tide  about  7  feet. 
A  light-ship  is  moored  inside  the  bar,  excepting  during  6  weeks  in  the  summer,  with 
he  foliuwing  bearings  :  north  point  of  Hunting  Island,  W.  i  S. ;  the  two  blew  buoys, 
,.J  N.;  Ship  bar  buoy,  S.  E.  by  S. 

To  go  in  Slew  channel,  get  the  light-ship  on  with  the  north  end  of  Hunting  Island — 
twill  then  bear  W.  i  S. ;  run  in  until  you  are  in  4  fathoms  water,  when  you  can  haul 
Ip  for  Utter  Island.  On  this  bar  there  are  two  buoys,  the  outer  one  is  white,  in  'ii  fath- 
liij,  tlie  inner  one  is  black,  on  the  inside  edge  of  the  bar.  They  range  with  the  light- 
|ii|)  ns  above  mentioned.  The  best  water  is  close  to  the  north  breaker,  but  the  flood  sets 
1  it  strong. 

[Togo  in  by  the  Ship  channel,  get  a  gap  in  the  southernmost  Hunting  Island  to  bear 
'  S.  W.,  when  you  will  have  a  launch  of  woods  that  looks  like  an  island  over  the  centre 
:  it— run  for  it  until  you  get  the  sand  point  of  the  northernmost  Hunting  Island  to  bear 
N.  W.,  then  run  for  the  point  until  the  light-ship  or  the  S.  point  of  Otter  Island  bears 
I.  W.  by  N.,  when  you  will  be  in  fair  channel  way.  You  can  then  run  for  the  point  of 
Itter  Island,  inside  of  which  there  is  a  good  harbor  of  4  fathoms,  muddy  bottom;  on  the 
lutii  end  of  the  north  breaker  there  is  a  black  buoy,  which  bears  S.  E.  by  S.,  2i  miles 
pint  from  the  light-ship. 

[NORTH  EDDISTO — From  Stono  Inlet  to  North  Eddisto  Inlet,  the  course  is  W.    North 
.W.,  and  the  distance  11   tmles;  between  them  the  soundings  are  regular,  and  the    EUditto. 
oalings,  when  you  are  coming  from  the  offing  towards  the  shore,  are  very  gradual ;  the 
Ir  of  North  Eddisto,  and  the  shoals  which  are  contiguous  to  it,  lie  off  about  4  or  5  miles 
|im  the  land.    Close  to  the  bar  and  shoals  there  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water.    South  Ed- 

16 


mm 


mi^^mtfmm 


^(frf^mmmmmiim 


242  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

disto  ia  3  leftgues  W.  S.  W.  from  North  Eddisto.  The  shore  of  the  islands  which  lii 
between  them  mny  be  approiiched  with  your  lend  without  danger.  Th«  ahonlinirg  tn 
words  it  nre  grRdual. 

If  bound  to  the  southward  or  northward,  and  obliged,  through  stress  of  wontlier  tJ 

make  a  harbor  in  North  Kddisto,  you  must,  when  within  about  6  miles  of  the  land,  upej 

a  tree  (which  resemblus  nn  umbrella,)  with  the  south  po'nt  of  the  harbor,  and  tlieti  sfp^J 

in  N.  W.  without  any  danger,  and  anchor  in  fi  fathoms  water,  on  the  northern  sido  of  thi 

harbor.     [The  tide  hero  is  very  rapid.]     In  the  harbor,  4  miles  west  from  aiicliuraL'eJ 

you  may  get  good  water.  1 

Port  Royal.         POUT  ROYAL  is  5  leagues  N.  E.  k  E.  from  Tybee  lighthouse,  at  the  entrance  o^ 

Savannah  River.  1 

Light  ship.  A  LIGHT  SHIP,  showing  one  light  safeet  above  the  sea.  in  6|  fathoms  at  linlf  ebbj 

;  has  been  moored  between  the  S.  E.  point  of  Martin's  Industry  and  the  north  bank  ol 

Port  Royal  entrance. 

Tybee  light  bears  from  it  W.  S.  W.  about  18  miles,  the  north  point  of  Trench's  Isinnl 
N.  W.  h  N. 

When  you  are  coming  from  sea,  for  Port  Royal  Harbor,  you  should  get  into  tlio  lutij 
tude  of  St.  Michoel's  Head,  which  is  3"2°  6'  N.,  then  steer  W.  for  tho  Huad,  and  wlipaj 
*  you  come  within  13  leagues  of  it,  you  will  have  from  20  to  25  fathoms  wotor.     Continuel 

your  west  course  until  you  make  tho  land,  which  you  will  do,  if  the  weather  be  ciiMir.  ntl 
a  distance  of  6  leagues,  in  12  fathoms  water.     Tho  land  hereabouts  is  generally  Inw,  hnj 
,.  .\  the  trees  are  high.    Port  Royal  entrance  is  known  by  a  small  grove  of  trees,  which  standi 

on  the  west  side  of  it,  and  tower  above  all  the  other  trees,  like  a  high-crowned  hat ;  iioncel 
this  grove  is  called  the  Hat  of  Port  Royal.     Continue  to  steer  as  before,  keepin>;  your] 
lead  going  until  you  get  into  8  fathoms  water,  when  you  will  be  about  3  leagues  from  .St, 
Michael's  Head.     You  may  then  steer  a  point  to  the  southward  of  west,  until  jou  getl 
into  5  fathoms  water;  then  steer  more  souaierly,  taking  care  not  to  bring  St.  Miciiiu>rs| 
Head  to  the  northward  of  N.  W.  by  N.  until  you  see  the  great  north  breaker,  ciilled I 
Coles'  Care,  close  to  which  there  are  4  fathoms  water:  this  shoal  must  be  left  on  thoi 
starboard  side.     As  you  approach  this  breaker  from  the  northward,  you  will  see  aniitlierj 
breaker  to  the  southward,  called  Martin's  Industry;  between  these  two  breakei-s  lies  the  I 
entrance  of  the  channel  into  Port  Royal  Harbor,  which  is  about  a  mile  wide.    TIim  nmrli ! 
to  go  clear  the  north  breaker  is  a  parcel  of  high  trees,  which  stand  near  the  mouth  of  the 
River  Vlay,  and  appear  like  an  island,  kept  just  open  of  Elizabeth  Point.    Your  course  j 
through  between  the  two  shoals,  is  W.  i  N.,  or  W.  by  N.     In  this  channel  there  uienot 
less  than  3i  or  4  fathoms,  at  low  water.     Continue  to  steer  as  aforesaid  between  tho  two 
breakers,  until  you  bring  Philip's  i^oint  to  bear  N.  N.  W..  then  steer  directly  for  if,  ani) 
»  you  will  have  as  you  proceed,  9,  8,  and  7  fathoms  water.    When  you  are  abreast  of  l'liili|)'a 

Point,  give  it  a  small  berth,  and  steer  up  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  in  Ct  and  .5  fathoms ;  in  tho  latter 
depth  you  may  anchor,  very  safe  harbor. 

There  is  also  a  channel  between  Martin's  Industry  and  Gaskin  Bank,  called  the  South 
Channel,  in  which  there  are  not  less  than  12  foot  at  low  water.  In  order  to  go  in  through 
this  channel  you  must  when  in  7  fathoms  water,  bring  Hilton's  Head  to  bear  N.  W.  by 
N.,  and  then  steer,  with  an  ebb  tide,  N.  W.,  and  with  a  flood  tide,  N-  W.  i)y  N.,  until 
Philip's  Point  bears  N.  by  W.  i  W.  You  may  then  steer  for  the  po,  and  proceedns 
before  directed. 

About  3i  miles  S.  E.  from  Hilton's  Head,  and  4  miles  S.  by  E.  from  Philip's  Point. 
lies  the  east  end  of  the  Joiner's  Bank  ;  it  thence  extends  \V.  N.  W.  about  2^  miles,  and  I 
has  .'tjl  fathoms  on   it  at  low  water.     Hilton's  Head  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor,  I 
and  is  a  higher  blufl'  point  of  land  than  any  thereabouts. 

Tybee  Inlet  lies  b  leagues  S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal  south  clian-  i 
nel ;  between  them  is  lidton's  Head  Island  ;  it  is  large,  fertile  and  well  inhabited.    From  [ 
this  island  the  Gaskin  Bank  extends  obout  8  miles  on  tho  broadest  jmrt.     You  niiiy  pro- 
ceed along  this  bank,  in  5  fathoms  water.     Some,  when  bound  to  Port  Royal,  reel<onit| 
best  to  make  the  land  about  Tybee,  because  the  lighthouse  makes  that  part  of  the  cuast 
distinguishable  from  any  other  part.     Tybeo  Inlet  is  the  entrance  of  Savannah  River. 
Ships  which  draw  14  or  15  feet  water,  may  go  in  at  Tybee,  and  proceed  through  land  to 
Beaufort,  in   Port  Royal  Islands,  and  from  Beaufort,  vessels  of  8  or  !)  feet  water,  may 
go  through  land  to  Charleston.     From  Charleston,  vessels  drawing  7  or  8  feet  water 
may  go  through  land  to  the  River  Medway,  in  Georgia,  which  lies  30  miles  south  of 
Savannah. 
Tida  On  this  coast  it  is  observed,  that  N.  E.,  easterly  and  S.  E.  winds,  cause  higher  tides 

than  other  winds,  and  also  somewhat  alter  their  course.  At  Port  Royal  fvntrancft  the 
tide  flows,  on  the  change  and  full  days  of  the  moon,  i  past  7  o'clock.  About  G  lca;;ues 
from  the  land,  in  12  fathoms  water,  the  flood  sets  strongly  to  the  southward,  and  the  ebb 
to  the  northward ;  further  off"  from  the  shore  there  is  no  tide  at  all.  Near  to  the  en- 
trance of  the  harbor  there  is  a  stroag  indraught  during  the  flood  tide,  and  an  outset  with  j 
an  ebb  tide. 


lands  which  1 
i«  shonlings  to 

of  woBther,  J 
the  land,  uped 
and  tliHti  stp^J 
lern  sido  of  thj 
oni  Htichoraga 

he  entrance  o| 

ms  nt  hftlff^ 
north  bank  oi 

trench's  IslanJ 

Bt  into  thfi  liiti. 
t'lid,  and  wlienl 
ter.  Continuej 
ler  be  clear,  nt  j 
erajly  I„w,  but 

BS,  which  standi 
led  hat;  hfiiicej 
I  keeping  your] 
iiguesfroin  St.l 
1  until  you  got! 
;  St.  Miclwel'sf 
breaker,  call, 
be  left  on  tlm  j 
'ill  see  aniitliorj 
eake'-s  linstliej 
Jo.    Tlio  niiirk  | 
3  mouth  of  the 
Your  course! 
il  there  are  not 
tween  tho  two 
ictly  for  it,  iiiiii  I 
east  of  Philip's 
i ;  in  the  latter  I 

lied  the  South  j 
■  go  in  th rough 
)ear  N.  W.  by 
^  by  N.,  until 
ind  proceed  (13 1 

Philip's  Point,  | 
;  2^  miles,  and  | 
)f  the  harbor, 

al  south  chiiu- 
nbited.    Frnin  j 
You  may  pro- 
oyal,  reckon  it  I 
I't  of  the  coflst  I 
vnniiah  River. 
irougli  land  to  I 
it  water,  may 
•  8  feet  Wiiter 
miles  suuthofi 

3  liighor  tides 
1  fintrance  the 
bout  C  leagues  I 
],  and  the  ebb 
lar  to  the  en- 
an  outset  with 


^*. 


^, 


^^^.o. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


tiitM  §2.5 

|5o   "^  ilBW 

■^  1^  12.2 

2f  I4i  i^ 


LA.  111.6 


pV 


"> 


/2 


/ 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


^1^  ^' 


33  V^fVr  MAIN  STRiET 

WEBSTkie  "JY.  M5B0 

(716)  872-4^0;^ 


'%'■ 


f/i 


<\ 


> 


w       •,  H 


i 


««.-       V  %   n" 


WiiiJ  r, 


;C^-^"N)     i,K.ii<-«. 


f    •   ■,■:■•  •■•  l', 
■  \  Mm)  \ 


,  m  *•'  <•■ ' ' 


■>  i''iA      fn 


53 


ij.  \-  •'■''       *'"  •'■■ 


i.«  -1  .   .';,'     .,.  -'  ■.•/     '".ii    .•;         ■  *■  t:  ,.•:.■•'■ 


'     »        ,'  .; 


■'(-'-5. 


I  up  .        "  /.-.  :    •      ;       ■•'      .    4'      ''l-/        .  .;    I 


■V^   \  ;"■■•'  \     ■'         9,  '■■    "  -.v       ;•■■  ■"  "c  •'  ..  /  A     /        ..;".;     , 


Sillllll    llll-llldTN 


■ *•••   «•;     »    /■>    *•    ).i   ;..      *■    "  '  "     „    «  '  — t"  .,    \         *•    • 


rilfal4i.|i« 


*'    «,  *' 


•a 

•« 
•n 


*;       /•■ 


"      lt,ml  Xiihl 


' "  '■   « 


C      ' 


-5" .. 


n 

/.< 

t: 

i'- 

ii 

It 

/.i 

II 
II 


.7." , 


Hill'  Hum' 


liir. 

II.W.iil  tiH^:v/iir 

/v:.',' ,-/•//;/.'  .v' 

Si'liiiiliiiitx  ill  liil.iil  foil    mi/,f. 
t'lf  ilmtiii<ii.'>-,  .!»»■  lUiiiilx.l'oiixl  I 


i:.<  <;.\v.  iJijMT,  sKi'vi 


PWiPWPPW^WS 


TYBEiR    BAY. 

■,  Mil'! 

,    SAVANNAH    RIVER. 

licilitcnl  Iniiiillif  siinf.>N  olL'.AVILKKS  X-  oiIkts. 

t/. r  /M//y//i  //  //I  f/ti ■//.//  '/i'i/>/f.\t ■///.  :.'/i  ■« x 

Dli.snv.itiiry  on  ('oi-I<!<|>iirI'.'  liiiil,);'.  B«.  J7  lo. 
I  J.  "  J,nl.    l\:i.\mlA. 


* 


V\ 


■.\.i     .    '  .,      .  ."  /     .■;  "    ■.•     ■'  •"  ^."V  ''.         "  *■'»,,-        »■•■  *'    "    ^         n     '  *'  .,- 

"\  .i/    .  .,        ,."•"   <.-r"c  v  •>'  .,!     uti  ..!■       ^-i."-         -.1.  ...1  ■••'  ■-•■■I       '■ 

■v^    .■(      .,    V  .•/•■       . ./      ../  .1/ ,-  .•'  .».  <  —  1,  *•.       .    /J       11      ..    //       ,.  .......        *' 


_„.^A--r  *'  ^'^    i    .;''n;v..,     :,  ,,  ■:!    -r: -^i;-;;  ^     ■'■"'•/      \,    ia  '  •V^'|;«i<s  i"^ 

'■■     „      V"'-  ■^  VV^^i^   V   ■"       .   *'    /f    '     '■'■'',;/         V'^J"  '^!5j^fe^  Jl.:.1.vn,:--.-  .'y.,  tl,.J',,r.  1h- 

'    »     /      ■  ;  X»'* A- «  •■■■         ■!  ■■■      ,    /,  ■"  ,     ■'     ■     '    '    '.-•.■.     r» 


J 


(:"  *■   ,-•■1 


'HmiXM.n   i-  '•  , .;  0'^'i>;^.,     '  /. 


,»•..// 


C 


U 


^^.^  ^J 

■"             -t          v 

"-..    -s?*-:* 

•-,     ',  .iA»aP 

-     '\««* 

"         U 

II  II 

■-..    -C'S 

r  II 

X  ■>. 

-.X 


;/      ;/    ki    II  t? 


»••      /,- 


Sntiitf  Mill'.. 


ir.        

.7."  1.7/;. 

'.  (I.'i//  tiilx/vir 
/■»■  1'/' //«/•• 

*         / 

,V''.-,"'- 

'/1//1////1/X  ill  //*<■/ 

ni 

/t>H 

«v/Av. 

'•/■  ,tll\tlil<IIS,    Mi- 

lUllllIx 

<','ft.v/  Pifot. 

(m  o«^',*|»liiiMl   ^lilrs. 


i;,v  <;.w.  iiLiuNT,  SKI".'  m  II . 


-.■.i.Aj^fe.'-.  . 


PfWH^viii     w"!-  'ir,VJ«  >.ip,  ipntW! 


4^^ 


«^ir¥il^;I^il^    MAY. 


V 


'.iii'i 


u       SAVANNAH   RIVER. 

^    iiiiiiillif  siinos  «)(i;'.'W||.KKS  K-  oHhts. 

S  'tf'//y/i'  1/  /;\  //ti  //./•/  /</'//  '.tv  ///f///i  1 .1: 

.rrviit»r_»   uii  <'oi-kii|Mirl^  1.»||,|>'.  Hit  .'t7  iu. 
f,  I J  III.    .'l.2?oo'jil. 


'v\ 


'% 


(1 


■•    /. 


'  i; 


J    S    L   A    N   1)  g^Y  ' 


^'..  ^i?  « 


■^S-^, 


\,  a      ft- 


,    ^       ^"T"  •    ,. *• "       x;''"..-    ■■■''1:       a  " 

4         ..■■-9  ':    ;»!'..    ;»*■'"■     ''  "   '4     '      ■■:  .f 


■■••ft,      v/  ■"      •'■' 


II  -I 


■  .■"tl    •■.        .i'    .'III'I   "'  ■-'.'  •,  M  ** 

"  ■■  -    •-■  ....  .7  -  ll  «.• 

n;   >"    ;.l      ■'    l<.  /.;  IK  ...  ;,i 


..^      .„  t'    '  '        '■'       11    '  II  iv  U'         ■■ 

I  '•'  "'1  '■{,,.  '••.'.       'fcft**^' 


■'■•''  •'  // 


/ ./  .''•»"*>^  JU:\I  n'lii^'r  I'll r  tlir  J'tir.   IJif 

"  »'  '",.  '*'<*'".»   ^  IhIIiM'i  I'/in  ll   h'Uh-tnt/H-.Wl-lll 

„        /'    ..  '\,  ^*;V'/       iri.'i'l.i.i.'il  If.'iur 


u^.-  -.  „ 


I 


V»«./..;.mH  (;"  , .;  :,'"^i>.^..  '^/. 


-'*.*^y 


■..  •/ 


!        I 
I 

!Kiv.ih« 


'•  -\  I  :  ■■■-. — ^'  ■■••'■;'?.      ^J 


'    I 


."        ^-.. 


.»;■// 


"     /I 


f 


«  // 

/•■•  ;/ 


■■««*. 

--  ■'■t.V 


Si, Hull-  \|il.-;. 


(» ■■•■T.i|>liii  mI  ^lilis. 


SOUTH 
,niin,  it  comt 
(uch  winds 

S.  E.  wii 
in  6,  8,  or  1 
produces  rn 
wind  will  fl} 
tlear  sky. 

N.  W.  w 
hard,  but  se 

Gnles  on  t 
conclusion, « 

The  most 
from  the  N. 
the  most  set 

Thunder- 
froin  the  N. 
[ury ;  they  > 
igainst  the  e 

CHARL 
course  is  S. 
[ranee,  whic 
dustry;  it  lit 
ikle  of  Hiltt 
pur  lend  goi 
Dins :  the  tid 

bS.  Em  14 

Head,  you  w 

Tybee  Isit 
!  very  pleas 
giay  lie  in  at 
ind. 

SAVAN^ 
kf  going  nea 
bf  tiie  iighth 
P'ybee  light 

Near  the  ( 
which  may  I 

TYBEE 

Oir  Tybee 
Mter,  bearii 
Ihe  iighthou! 
lad  tide  will 

A  beacon  i 
louse,  600  y 

The  beaco 
lirect  course 
;.  S.  W.  to 
each.  On 
torn  the  ligh 
lead. 

On  Snvani 
re  not  more 
)n  the  nortl 

Stone  He 

or  7  miles. 
7th  Sept.,  1 
8,  very  I 

Alter  gett 

^^  N.  w.  I 

The  point 
^om  the  shi 
I  low  tide, 
nclior  in  4  ( 

Vessels  di 
ndrun  into 
ait  flood,  tl 


mi 


w 


^mm 


mF 


w/mmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

SOUTH  CAROLINA. — When  the  wind  blows  hard,  in  the  N.  E.  quarter,  without 
rain,  it  commonly  continues  to  blow  violent  for  some  time,  perhaps  ^  or  4  days  ;_but  if 


343 


South 
Carolina. 


luch  winds  are  attended  with  rain,  they  generally  shift  to  the  E.,  E.  S.  E.  and  S.  E 

S.  E.  winds  blow  right  in  on  the  coast,  but  they  seldom  blow  dry,  or  continue  long; 
jQ  6.  8.  or  10  hours  after  their  commencement,  the  sky  begins  to  look  dirty,  which  soon 
produces  rain.     When  it  comes  to  blow  and  rain  very  hard  you  may  be  sure  that  the  i 

vind  will  fly  round  to  the  N.  W.  quarter,  and  blow  very  hard  for  20  or  30  hours,  with  a 
c!e«r  sky. 

N.  W.  winds  are  always  attended  with  clear  weather.  They  sometimes  blow  very 
bard,  but  seldom  do  so  longer  than  30  hours. 

Gales  on  the  coast  of  South  Carolina  frequently  increase  much  in  violence  toward  their 
conclusion,  and  then  break  off  at  once,  leaving  a  cross  sea,  with  almost  no  wind. 

The  most  lasting  winds  are  those  which  blow  from  the  S.  S.  W.  and  W.  N.  W.,  and 
from  the  N.  to  the  E.  N.  £.  When  the  wind  is  in  any  of  these  quarters,  the  weather  is 
the  most  settled. 

Thunder-gusts  are  very  common  on  this  coast  in  the  summer  time ;  they  always  come 
from  the  N.  W.  quarter,  and  are  sometimes  so  heavy  that  no  canvass  can  withstand  their 
fury;  they  come  on  so  suddenly,  that  the  greatest  precautions  are  necessary  to  guard  ' 

igainst  the  effects  of  their  violence. 

CHARLESTON  BAR  TO  TYBEE.— When  over  the  bar,  in  8  fathoms  water,  the    Charleston 
;aurse  is  S.  W.,  distant  20  leagues.     As  you  come  near  the  latitude  of  Port  Royal  en-    Barto'Vyhet. 
Tance,  which  is  32°  8'  N.,  be  careful  to  avoid  a  very  dangerous  shoal,  called  Martin's  In- 
dustiy ;  it  lies  4  leagues  from  the  S  side  of  the  entrance  of  Port  Royal,  which  is  the  north 

ide  of  Hilton  Head,  the  highest  land  in  sight:  come  no  nearer  than  7  fathoms,  keeping 
pur  lend  going ;  and  in  the  night,  or  thick  weather,  do  not  approach  nearer  than  10  fath- 
ims:  the  tide  of  flood  sets  boldly  in.  Shoal  ground,  with  6  or  7  fathoms,  coarse  shells, 
ifs  S.  E.,  14  or  15  miles  from  Tybee  light.  When  you  get  to  the  southward  of  Hilton 
Hend.  you  will  see  the  lighthouse,  which  stands  on  the  Island  of  Tybee. 

Tybee  Island  lies  at  the  mouth  of  the  Savannah  River,  ^o  the  southward  of  the  bar.  It 
iivijiy  pleasant,  with  a  beautiful  creek  to  the  west  of  it,  where  a  ship  of  any  burthen 

ay  lie  in  safety  at  anchor.     Warsaw  Sound  is  formed  by  the  southern  end  of  this  Isl* 

Dd. 

SAVANNAH. — If  in  the  night,  and  you  are  to  the  northward  of  Tybee,  be  careful    Savannaii, 
if  guirig  nearer  the  Gaskin  Bank  than  5  fathoms.     In  fresh  winds  you  take  a  pilot  abreast 
if  tlie  lighthouse — in  moderate  weather  without  the  bar.     In  clear  weather  you  may  see 
Tybee  light  at  the  distance  of  12  miles. 

Near  the  Gafakin  Bank  and  Martin's  Industry,  the  flood  runs  strong  into  Port  Royal,  to 
fvhich  may  be  attributed  the  loss  of  so  many  vessels  on  these  banks. 

TYBEE  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  80  feet  high,  on  the  north  end  of  Tybee  Island.  Tyhee  light. 

UlV  Tybee  there  are  two  large  coppered  buoys,  one  on  the  tail  of  the  knol',  in  2  fathoms 
ifdter,  bearing  from  the  lighthouse  N.  N.  W.,  the  other  in  4i,  bearing  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
he  lighthouse,  in  mid-channel,  where  large  vessels  may  anchor  with  safety,  when  wind 
nd  tide  will  not  permit  to  proceed  higher  up. 

A  beacon  is  erected  on  Tybee  Island.which  is  lighted,  and  bears  E.  i  S.  from  the  light- 
louse,  600  yards  distant.     It  is  lOi  feet  high. 

The  beacon  light  open  a  handspike's  length  to  the  northward  of  Tybee  light,  is  the 
lirect  course  over  the  bar.  The  bestanchoring-ground  is  with  Tybee  light  bearing  from 
.  S.  W.  to  S.,  the  former  to  be  prefeired,  and  distant  about  one  cable's  length  from  the 
each.  On  the  bar  is  a  buoy  with  a  white  top,  in  Ah  fathoms  water,  distant  4;^  miles 
nm  the  lighthouse.  The  deepest  water  is  between  the  buoy  and  the  south  breaker 
ead. 

On  Savannah  Bar  there  are  18  and  19  feet  at  low  water.  On  the  south  breaker  there 
re  not  more  than  7  or  8  feet  water;  and  li  mile  from  the  light,  it  is  bare  at  low  tide. — 
•n  the  north  breaker  there  are  not  less  thon  12  feet  for  the  distonce  of  a  mile.  The  head 
f  Stone  Horse  Shoal  commences  at  the  north  breaker,  and  extends  from  the  land  about 

or  7  miles.  [The  brig  Pocahontas,  Capt.  Walford,  was  totally  lost  on  this  shoal,  the 
7th  Sept.,  1829,  at  flood  tide;  Tybee  light  then  bearing  about  N.  N.  E.,  distant  about  8 
liles,  very  bold  near  the  shore.] 

Alter  getting  into  4  fathoms  water,  you  will  be  over  the  bar,  when  you  must  haul  up 
I'.  N.  W.  until  the  lighthouse  bears  S.  S.  W.,  then  anchor. 

The  point  of  shoal  which  runs  down  from  Cockspur  Island,  and  separates  that  channel 

om  the  ship-channel,  bears  N.  i|  W.  from  the  light,  and  has  not  mpre  than  5  feet  on  it 

low  tide.     When  to  the  northward  of  this  point,  the  light  bearing  S.  S.  E.,  you  may 

chor  in  4  or  5  fathoms. 

Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  8  or  9  feet  may  keep  the  light  or  island  side  on  board, 

d  run  into  Cockspur  and  anchor,  as  they  cannot  pass  the  upper  end  of  the  island  until 

H  flood,  there  being  only  7  or  8  feet  at  low  tide. 


MI|iiiai«P   ii^  ,11 


■^'"ifi^pwmpsippm 


844 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Buoys. 


There  are  three  bars,  having  from  two  to  three  fathoms,  on  the  back  of  Tjrbee  and 
Cabbage  Islands;  hut  they  are  never  to  be  attempted  but  in  absolute  necessity. 

Note. — Sailing  into  Savannah,  you  will  observe  the  Tollowing  marks  and  buoys,  vi?.:  A 
large  buoy  lies  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar,  in  the  deepest  water,  having  all  the  lending 
marks  on  the  behcon  and  lighthouse  in  one,  bearmg  W.  i  N.,  distant  4  miles.  Another 
buoy  lies  in  the  same  direction,  one  mile  within  the  bar;  a  third  buoy  lies  one  mile  liir- 
ther  W.  by  N.  from  the  second,  a  fourth  buoy  lies  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  third;  after 
passing  which,  there  is  safe  anchorage  for  a  largo  fleet,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  at  low  water 
the  lighthouse  bearing  S.  S.  W. 

The  buoys  lie  and  lead  in  the  deepest  water,  having  a  channel  halfamileto  the  north- 
ward, and  one-quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  them,  (the  narrowest  place)  nearly  I 
the  same  depth  of  water;  and  there  are  20  feet  on  the  bar  at  lowest  tides ;  you  may  sail  I 
either  side  uf  the  buoys.  I 

1'ybee  Creek  has  11  feet  through  it,  at  low  water.  Forty  miles  south  of  Savannah  lies  I 
Sunbury,  a  port  of  entry,  at  the  head  of  St.  Catharine's  Sound,  between  Medwny  and  I 
NeW|jrt  Rivers,  about  15  miles  south  of  Ogechee  River.  There  is  a  bar  here,  but  the! 
harbor  is  capacious  and  safe,  and  has  water  sufficient  for  ships  of  great  burthen. 

Warsaw  has  1 0  feet  on  the  bar,  bur  it  is  too  intricate  for  strangers. 
OgecheeRiver  OGECHEE  RIVER. — Ossabaw  Bar,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Ogechee,  has  18  feetl 
water  on  it,  to  cross  which,  bring  Green  Island  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.,  steer  in  W.  by  N.  tillf 
you  deepen  your  water,  then  haul  upN.  W.  by  N.,  and  you  will  soon  get  in  8  or  9  fiitlioim, 
when  your  eye  and  lead  will  be  your  best  directions ;  at  the  extremity  of  the  channel  you  I 
will  keep  Ossabaw  nearest  on  board,  until  nearly  up  with  the  lower  part  of  Buzzard's  hi- f 
and,  when  the  channel  will  be  close  under  the  starboard  shore. 

Gr^en  Island  is  much  higher  land,  has  taller  timber  than  the  surrounding  foreDtSiConi 
taining  several  hundred  acres,  covered  with  pine,  which  generally  has  a  greenish  appear- 1 
ance.  | 

ST.  CATHARINE'S  BAR,  which  is  difficult  for  strangers,  lies  one  mile  south  cf  the  I 
north  point  of  the  island,  has  but  8^  feet  at  low  tide;  channel  not  more  than  200  yardjl 
wide,  the  shoala  generally  dry  at  each  side  of  the  bar.    It  is  better  for  vessels  bound  toNew- 
port,  Sunbury,  or  up  these  streams,  to  enter  at  Sapelo  or  Ossabaw,  and  go  the  inland  pas- 
sage, which  is  not  difficult. 

DARIEN  OR  DOBOY  LIGHT,  is  erected  on  the  south  point  of  Sapelo  Island,  7^1 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  contains  a  revolving  light,  revolving  once  in  (iveiuin-f 
utes.     To  distinguish  it  from  any  other  lighthouse  on  the  neighboring  coasts  in  the  ( 
the  tower  is  painted  red  and  white,  in  horizontal  stripes. 

Two  beacons  have  been  erected  on  the  east  i.ido,  and  nearly  on  the  north  end  of  Wolfl 
Island,  in  a  S.  S.  E.  direction  from  the  lighthouse,  on  the  south  point  of  Sapelo  Isl-I 
and. 

To  designate  these  beacons,  the  tower  of  the  western,  or  highest  beacon,  is  paiiiteil| 
white.     The  lantern  is  25  feet  above  the  surface. 

The  eastern  beacon  is  painted  black,  and  is  15  feet  above  the  surface. 

DARIEN. — Vessels  making  the  land,  when  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  will,  during clear| 
weather,  see  the  beacons  on  Wolf  Island,  which  must  be  brought  to  bear  W.  ^  S., ! 
run  this  course  till  the  buoy  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  bar  is  made,  which  miiy  l)e  piissedl 
on  either  side.  Continue  this  W.  ^  S.  course  till  near  the  inner  buoy,  opposite  the  nuribl 
breaker,  by  which  you  will  pass  the  8  feet  knoll  on  your  starboard  hand.  In  passjins  thenl 
the  north  breaker  is  to  be  kept  on  the  starboard,  and  the  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand,  takinj 
care  at  the  same  time  that  the  flood  tide  does  not  set  the  vessel  on  the  north  breaker,  lil 
running  this  course,  the  bar  is  crossed  with  not  less  than  12  feet  at  low  w  iter.  Wlieil 
abreast  of  the  inner  buoy,  run  from  it  li  mile  in  a  direction  exactly  N.  W.  by  W„  wherel 
the  anchorage  is  excellent,  in  4  fathoms,  at  low  water,  which  will  bring  the  vessel  iu  tlie| 
vicinity  of  the  lighthouse. 

Or  you  may,  after  making  the  light  on  Sapelo  Island,  and  steering  directly  for  the  beacoiii| 
on  Wolf  Island,  bringing  them  in  aline,  and  keeping  the  lead  constantly  going,  the  liglii 
house  bearing  W.  i  N.,  (true  course,)  cross  the  bar  in  13  feet  water.     Neap  tide  ebtei 
feet. 

The  following  are  the  depths  of  water,  bearings,  and  distances  of  the  two  buoys,  plactil 
in  Doboy  Inlet,  leading  to  Darien,  Georgia: —  f 

Buoy  No.  1,  sunk  in  18  feet  water,  at  low  wnter,ontheouteredgeofthebar,  beHringEl 
i  N.  from  the  beacon  on  Wolf  Island,  3}  miles  distant,  and  4i  miles  from  the  south  | 
of  Sapelo,  in  an  E.  S.  E.  direction. 

Buoy  No.  2,  sunk  in  21  feet  water,  at  low  water,  oft'  the  north  breaker  head,  beariDeli| 
i  N.  from  the  beacon  aforesaid,  about  2|}  miles,  and  in  a  S.  E.  by  E.  direction,  3^  milof 
from  the  south  point  of  Sapelo.     This  buoy  is  S.  K.  by  E.  i  E.,  5i  miles  from  Diil»t| 
Island,  and  from  the  most  southern  part  of  the  north  breaker,  one  third  of  a  mile  W.l 
S.  4  S. 


St.  Catharine^  s 
Bar. 


Darien  or 
Doboy  Light 


Darien. 


Buoyi. 


'.»»"W!* 


1 1^f9i.^fm>if^  W!iWt4?r- 


"  n^ 


of  Tybee  and  1 
asity. 
id  buoys,  viz:  a  I 

all  the  lending  I 
(liles.  Another! 
38  one  mile  llir- 1 
[he  third;  after  I 
8,  at  low  water,  | 

lile  to  the  north- 
8t  place)  neiirlyl 
!B ;  you  may  i 

of  Savannah  lies  I 
[jD  Medwny  nndl 
tar  here,  but  the  | 
irtheD. 

cbee,  has  18  feet  I 
irin  W.byN.tilll 
in  8  or  9  fiithoins,  I 
the  channel  you  I 
of  Buzzard's  Isl- 1 

iding  forests,  con- 1 
greenish  appear- [ 

I  mile  south  of  the  I 
e  than  200  yart^l 
lela  bound  to  New- 
go  the  inland  [ 

Sapelo  Island.  74 1 
;  once  in  live  luiii-l 
coasts  in  the  day,] 

lorth  end  of  Wolfl 
int  of  Sapelo  hiT 


beacon,  is 


',  will,  during  clearl 
Dear  W.  i  S.,  anil 
ich  may  be  piisseJl 

opposite  the  nortbl 
In  passing  tJieml 

board  hatid,  taliinj 
north  breaker.  IdI 
ow  w  iter.    Wlieil 

W.'by  W.,wlier(l 

g  the  vessel  iu  t'ctl 

ctly  for  the  bencool 

ly  noing,  the  lifliij 

Neup  tide  ebbs  i 

6  two  buoys,  placeil 

the  bar,  bearing  El 
torn  the  south  poiill 

Ker  head,  bearinsEl 
,  direction,  3J  milf 
\  miles  from  Dubol 
irdof  a  mileW.k 


-.N^ 


'  ill] '!»  '!■' 


X 


I L  -_-  .^l )Ll^ J 

.v/,-. I :,,,/•;,;/  .////.■ 

.\i  ii/i  /li/rx  /v.y  ,~/i; / II  //ii/irs 
l.ii/    ,i/' f/ii" /idi  /'<■  ii^ni/'N/iifii'fi  ■''/":•/' .V. 
/.fill/  .   iU.    'ili  11' 


!■:  niiinf  ,/,/• 


(in  ,ti»'r'A 


4 


I'Uii/nii'tii  fcr  l/i''  ■i.'iii.-'iU!    {'t'.i.i/  t  ■/</ .  tfi  '" /', 


1 \....:,,U-. 


,'n.-  .\..,J.:,,/  .11,!,- 

.\i  ii/i  /iili's  JIM-  ^  /',  I  / 1'  iiii/ir.y 

l.ii/   ,'/' ///<■  /J I ///'•■  ,( ■m/iu/i ifii  w  . 'V "  L' /  .  I ! 

/.,■//,/  ol.   ■'.!•  It: 


".V/7.,/W  %^Vi'     '• 


•"'S/" 


/:  lUiiiif  ,/,  /' 


.VV1U,;IMT,  18&0 


'HHBiJ  '«  >W 


(^'' 


■.\i«.\K!T.\   J       ,^ 


3*' 


I  I 


/;//•.;".;,;'/;• 


'•■'■'•/.,•, 


•sf 


.p^ 

<" 


f-C  ,/,■:■  „/  'i  n,/,- 


w 


\ 


'!) 


-■'         -'     -'  v   \f",  ;,'<"/,  ?l  ,,'       '"         >tSi"  -t  -  : 

■■■»  „     ,,  ~»i;-;r>:y      ■■". '" '„."*"•.  V. 


"X 


//  /,  ,,  V  '  ;,      ,;'     '"  '/   'i  "'    '■!        \        i 


^  t.^    ft        f'l-fU'HI  ,. 


'^W 


vVr.l,iiriT,18&0 


'     -~z'    - ;.  - -ifvc/(cr  ,yru'/'L 


■■•      '  H  P 


»"W|F|T"»HPP« 


I   '        ' 


pp^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

TYBEE  TO  ST.  SIMONS.— BrinK  Tybi>e  lighthouse  to  benr  N.  W.  wh«n  in  10 
{itliom»  wnter,  Hnci  Bt«pr  H.  W.  by  S..  distant  21  leitgues,  to  go  clfiir  of  the  shonlof  St. 
Jjmnns,  which  lies  off  St.  Simon  E.  S.  E.,  2  lengues.  There  are  4  nnd  5  fnthoms  close 
tnthis  shonl,  to  nvoid  which,  come  no  nenrer  thnn  8  or  v)  fnthoms.  The  Isbind  of  St. 
(liiDons  is  on  the  nortli  side  of  tho  sound  or  hnrbor  of  the  snme  nnme.  whicli  lies  in  liiti- 
Iijje31°7'  N.,  nnd  mny  be  l<nown  by  four  trees  standing  thus  f  f  f  t-  <^"  the  south 
,i(ln  of  thnt  hnrbor  lies  .Iei<yl  Islnnd,  on  which  nro  reinnrknblo  trees,  nppenring  like  urn- 
brBlliifl,  nnd  thence  cnlled  the  umbrella  trees.  St.  Simons  nnd  JekyI  Islnnd  beaches  nre 
reiimiknbly  white.  The  bar  nt  the  entrance  of  St.  Simons'  Sound  lies  6  m'les  from  the 
lijht. 
ST.  SIMONS  — St.  Simons'  light  is  on  tho  south  point  of  St.  Simons'  Islnnd  ;  it  is  75 
eet  in  height,  nnd  contnins  n  fixed  light. 

On  St.  Simons'  Bnr  there  nre  two  buoys ;  the  norlhernmost  is  a  bhick  buoy,  nnd  is  in 
2j  fnthoms  nt  low  wnter ;  itbenrs  from  the  light  S.  E.  by  E.  4  E..  six  miles  distiuit. 

Tlio  southernmost  buoy  is  white,  nnd  is  on  tho  N.  E.  point  of  the  south  breaker,  in  3 
Ijthoins  wnter ;  it  benrs  S.  S.  E.,  1|  mile  from  the  binck  buoy  ;  3i  fnthoms  is  the  least 
(fnter  between  the  buoys. 

Inside  of  the  bnr  there  is  a  shonl  ground,  called  the  Middle  Ground;  on  the  northern 
(ide  there  is  n  bInck  buoy,  which  benrs  from  the  lighthouse  S.  E.  by  E.  4  E..4  milesdistnnt. 
Vessels  nppronching  tlie  bnr,  should  endeavor  to  get  the  bInck  buoy  on  the  north  brenker 
benr  W.  S.  W.,  nnd  run  for  it,  pnssingnt  two  cnbies' length,  leaving  it  on  thestnrbonrd 
band.  When  nbrenst  of  it,  hnul  up  W.  N.  W.,  the  chnnnel  course,  to  pass  the  middle 
iround,  leaving  the  buoy  on  the  middle  ground  on  the  Inrbonrd  hand,  giving  it  a  good 
ierth.  Then  steer  W.  by  N.,  to  pass  the  light ;  upon  passing  which,  tY-  .esselisin 
tafety,  in  ten  fnthoms  water.  The  shonlest  soundings  in  the  chnnnel  are  three  nnd  one- 
juiirter  fnthoms,  nt  low  wnter.  By  these  directions,  any  vessel  drawing  less  thnn  17  feet 
tan  come  into  jmrt  at  deod  low  water.  The  tide  rises  on  the  bnr  six  feet,  common  tides. 
LIGHT. — On  the  north  end  of  Little  Cumberland  Islnnd,  nnd  on  the  southern  side  of 
eentrance  to  St.  Andrews  .Sound,  there  is  n  fixed  li^ht,  53  feet  high. 
ST.  ANDREWS. — The  entrnnceto  St.  Andrews  is  between  JekyI  nnd  Cumberland 
[tliinds;  nnd  on  the  bar  there  are  11  feet  nt  low  water.  There  nre  three  buoys  at  the 
ntrniice  ;  one  large  buoy  inside  the  bar,  in  3  fnthoms,  nt  low  water:  one  spar  buoy  on 
ihespit  off  the  ncrth  end  of  F^ittle  Cumberland  Island  ;  nnd  one  spar  buoy  on  a  shoal  at 
le  mouth  of  the  Greot  Satilla  River. 

Bring  the  lighthonso  on  Little  Cumberland  Island  to  bear  W.  by  N.,  when  the  outer 

luoy  will  be  in  a  rnnge  with  the  lighthouse ;  and  run  for  it  till  over  the  bar,  and  up  with 

outer  buoy  ;  the  south  point  of  Jekyl  will  then  be  N.  W.  4  W. ;  niter  the  course  N. 

iV,  l)y  W..  until  between  the  points  of  Cumberland  and  Jekyl  Islands,  and  abreast  of  the 

pur  buoy  olfCumberlund  Point,  leaving  it  to  the  south,  where  will  be  found  good  sound- 

iofs  from  3  to  5  fnthoms,  near  the  shore. 

Siitillii  River  empties  into  St.  Andrew's  Sound.     Crow  Harbor  lies  up  Sntilla  River, 

ibout  30  miles,  and  is  a  great  timber  depot;  about  15  miles  above  Crow  Hnrbor  is  the 

wn  of  .Jefferson,  where  vessels  drawing  12  feet  cnn  go. 

ST.  MARY'S  AND  AMELIA  BAR.— Vessels  from  tho  northward,  after  passing 
ekyi  Island,  which  lies  in  latitude  31 '^,  ought  to  keep  in  7,  6,  or  5  fathoms  water,  as 
Piittierand  size  of  the  vessel  Tnay  permit.  As  you  proceed  towards  the  southern  part 
fCumberland,  you  will  open  Dungeness House,  which  is  nbout  1|  mile  distant  frou)  the 
iiiilli  point  of  said  islnnd,  and  is  the  only  conspicuous  large  building  on  this  const,  and  is 
by  tlie  trees  when  you  nre  to  the  northwurd.  Southward  of  this  house  there  is  a 
pace  of  about  two  miles,  with  no  trees  on  it,  which  makes  the  south  point  of  the  island 
ippmir,  nt  a  distniice,  like  an  island  of  about  two  miles  in  length. 

Sl\  MARY'S. — On  the  north  pointof  Amelia  Islnnd  there  is  n  lighthouse  containing  a  re 
folviiiirliglit,  50  feet  high.  In  running  for  the  Bar,  which  is  about  3  miles  in  an  E.  byN.  diroc- 
iorifi'iin  lilt)  ninth  end  of  \inelia  Island,  and  has  on  it  12  feet  at  low  water,  bring  the  light- 
luiise  on  Amelia  Island  to  benr  S.  W.  by  S.,  southerly,  to  ennble  you  to  find  the  outer  buoy, 
eiir  which  are  4  fnthoms  water,  which  you  lenve  on  the  Inrbonrd  hnnd.  your  course  on  the 
boil  tide  is  S.  W.  by  S.  to  the  next  buoy,  which  you  leave  on  tho  starboard  hand.    After 
rassing  this  buoy,  your  course  is  W.  by  N.,  to  pass  the  buoy  on  tho  Spit  off  the  north  end 
if  Amelia  Island,  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  hand,  nnd  give  a  good  berth  to. 
The  channel  is  i.mw  shown  by  the  north  breakers  and  dry  sand-onnks  on  the  eastern  side. 
fter  passing  the  buv^y  off  AmBlin  Island,  your  course  is  nbout  west.    From  Tiger  Island, 
ere  is  nn  extensive  snnd-flat  as  far  as  Jolly  River. 

The  buoys  are  wood,  coppered,  and  of  that  color,  with  iron-tops  painted  black. 
The  lighthouse  on  Amelia  Island  is  too  fur  south  for  use,  excepting  to  find  the  outer 
10V9  of  the  Bar. 

Full  sea  at  St.  Mary's  Bar,  on  full  and  change,  at  half  past  7  o'clock ;  Average  tide  7 
let. 

ST.  JOHN'S  LIGHT  is  a  fixed  light,  65  feet  high,  on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance 
tlie  river. 


WB 


24ft 


Tyb«e  to  St. 
Simons. 


Si.  Simont. 
Buoys. 


Tides. 
Light. 

St.  Andrews. 


Lighthouse. 


St.  Mary's 
and  Amelia 
Bar. 


St.  Mary's. 


Tide. 

St.  John's 
Light. 


946 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


St.  Mary'i 
to  St.  John't. 


Tidet. 


St.  Angus- 
tine  light' 
home. 


4- 


Tide. 

Mosquiiii 
Met. 


ST.  MARY'S  TO  ST.  JOHN'S.— The  courie  is  S.  by  E.,  distant  7  longuei  to  St. 
John'a ;  in  making  thifi  place,  when  bound  into  St.  Augustine,  there  ia  n  round  high  blulf 
at  the  south  side  of  the  river,  known  by  the  name  of  the  General's  Mount;  (he  gmnlj 
craft  running  in  from  Amelia  to  St.  Augustiiies«<Derally  makeit,  and  take  their  deptirture 
On  the  north  side  of  the  harbor  is  Talbot's  Island,  full  of  trees,  lying  nortli  and  south 
and  about  the  same  height  with  the  General's  Mount :  thero  are  11  feet  water  on  thti  Imr 
at  high  water.  In  running  into  St  John's  bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  S.  W.  j  W. 
and  open  the  top  of  the  chimney  in  the  west  end  of  the  dwelling-house,  about  3  Coetto 
the  S,  and  E.  of  the  light ;  then  run  in  until  within  the  South  Breaker  Head ;  then  gtncr 
S.  S.  W.  for  the  General's  Mount,  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore;  then  haul  up  to 
the  westward,  keeping  the  shore  about  the  same  distance  from  you,  to  clear  the  Midille 
or  North  Breakers,  which  show  plain  if  there  is  any  wind.  When  nearly  opposite  the 
swash,  incline  towards  the  north  shore,  or  Fort  George  Ibland,  to  clear  n  flat  tiiat  mnkea 
off  from  the  shore  a  considerable  distance.  Spring  tides  rise  la  or  1.3  feet;  neap  tiiles 
not  more  than  10  feet.  The  currents  run  out  until  quarter  flood,  and  somotinios  Imlf 
flood.  High  water,  at  full  and  chan<!e  of  the  moon,  about  20  minutes  past  7.  The  tiiiea 
are  very  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 

The  outer  buoy  is  a  large  coppered  can  buoy,  in  16  feet  at  low  water,  N.  N.  E.  from 
the  light;  at  about  3  miles  distant,  S.  by  W.  j  \V.,  ahalf  mile  distant,  is  a  coppered  spur 
buoy,  in  10  feet  water.  There  is  another  spar  buoy,  S.  by  W.,  lialf  a  mile  distant, 
in  8  feet  water;  another  spar  buoy,  S.  E.  by  ^  E  .  one-fourth  of  a  mile  otF;  one  other 
small  spar  buoy,  S.  by  E.,  one-eighth  of  a  mile  off,  in  10  feet  water.  The  buoys  nie  nil 
well  anchored,  with  heavy  anchors,  in  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

The  St.  John's  is  a  long  and  broad  bay,  which  receives  the  impressions  of  the  tide  at 
more  than  150  miles  from  its  mouth,  running  parallel  with  the  ocean. 

Lake  (Jeorge  is  a  little  sea  of  nearly  60  miles  in  circumference,  at  the  extremity  of 
which  is  found  a  bank  of  sliells,  on  which  you  have  only  about  5  feet  water  ;  but  nt  two 
or  three  miles  above  this,  the  branches  of  tlie  St.  John's  reunite,  and  a  broad  auddetp 
char  nel  conducts  you  ton  lake. 

ST.  AUGUSTINE  LIGHTHOUSE  is  budt  on  the  north  end  of  St.  Annstnsi,  I,,|. 
and,  and  shows  a  fixed  light.  It  is  a  fqunre  tower,  painted  white,  70  feet  high  fruni  the 
ground,  exclusive  of  the  lantern,  which  is  7  feet. 

St.  Augustine  is  situated  on  the  main,  about  2  miles  within  the  bar,  immediately  op. 
posite  the  inlet.  When  in  9  fathoms  water,  ort"  the  bar  of  St  John's,  the  course  isS.  S. 
E.,  distant  10  lengups.  The  northernmost  land  of  the  bay  is  called  Point  Ciirlel.  When 
you  are  as  far  to  the  southward  as  this  point,  you  will  see  the  Island  of  Aiiastasin,  ja 
length  15  miles,  and  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  on  the  north  end  of  which  is  a  light- 
house, showing  a  fixed  light. 

The  bur  at  the  entrai.ce  of  this  harbor  has  opened  in  a  new  jdace,  rendering  the  pus- 
aajre  much  more  direc  and  easy.  In  crossing  the  bar  with  the  lighthouse  bearing  W. 
by  S.,  steer  W.  S.  W.,  which  secures  14  feet  water  at  high  tide. 

Depth  on  the  bar,  at  high  water, 12  feet. 

"  "         '*         half  tide, 9  do. 

«*  *•        "        low  water 6ido. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  northward  will  run  down  till  the  lighthouse  boars  W.  by  S., 
keeping  in  3  fathoms  water. 

The  pilots  in  good  weather,  board  vessels  outsiile  the  bar.  They  will  bo  on  the  bar 
with  a  flag,  and  a  wave  to  the  right  or  left  will  indicate  whether  the  vessel  is  to  iinjcieii 
either  larboard  or  starboard.  When  the  staff  is  erect,  the  vessel  will  bear  down  For  the 
pilot-boat. 

If  the  wind  bo  to  the  south,  bring  the  light  to  bear  W. ;  if  moderate,  come  to,  and  ao- 
chor  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms  water,  muddy  bottom. 

All  vessels  bound  to  this  port  will  show,  when  off  the  bar,  how  much  water  they  draw 
by  signal,  hauling  down  the  flag  and  hoisting  it  again  equal  to  the  number  of  tVot  they  dniw, 

The  tide  flows,  at  full  and  change,  S.  E.  by  S.  and  N.  W.  i)y  N.,  feh.  4m. ;  variiition 
ofl'St  Augustine,  7°  E..  1819. 

MOSQUITO  INLET — Sixty-five  miles  to  the  southward  of  St.  Augustine  lidit- 
house  is  Mosquito  Inlet.  On  the  bar  there  are  .'i  feet  at  low  water.  Rise  of  tide,  Dh  iWt. 
On  the  south  side  of  the  inlet  there  was  a  *|ighthou8e  intended  for  a  fixed  light.  The 
town  of  Smyrna  is  within  this  inlet. 


*  This  11;.     Iiniise  was  never  lighted  :  a  ft>w  months  after  bring  built  [by  coiitnicf]  it  fell  to  the 
ernund.     li  u  uncertain  when  a  new  lighthouse  will  be  lighted   to  indicate  the  entrance  tu  tbis 


inlet. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


947 


RiMAHKS  orr  St.  Auoustinb. — From  the  first  of  November  to    the   Inst  of  Fe- 

Ibrairy,  the  hnrdest  gnles  prevail  thnt  blow  on  this  const,  nml  in  genernl  from  N.  N. 
,  to  s-  S.  E.     Th^  wind  nny  way  easterly  comes  on  very  suddenly  to  a  gnln  during 

Itlietengon  nbove  mentioned;  nnd  those  gnles  give  but  very  little  warning.  An  experU 
encfld  navigator  snys  :  "  I  was  nt  nnchoi  in  St.  Augustine  Ray.  whnn  it  came  on  to  blow 

I  It  E.  N.  E.,  nnd  in  fifteen  minutes  T  \\  is  obliged  to  slip,  nnd  had  we  not  carried  snil  to  tiie 
iitmost.  we  should  not  have  clenred  the  Innd  to  the  southward."  When  the  wind  backs 
ininst  the  sun,  with  a  small  rain,  you  will  perceive  the  sen  to  rise  before  the  wind 
comes ;  then  prepare  for  a  gnle,  which  in  general  will  last  50  or  GO  hours.  If  you 
ihould  be  obliged  to  cut  or  slip,  cnrry  nil  the  snil  you  possibly  ran,  to  get  an  offine  before 
it  iDcrenses  so  as  to  put  you  past  carrying  nny  snil,  which  is  always  the  cnse :  and  observe, 
that  the  flood  tide  setting  to  the  southward  will  be  of  no  service  to  you  farther  out  thnn 
12  fiithoms  water,  when  you  will  be  in  the  southern  current  until  you  get  into  4(>  fath- 
oms,  which  is  about  15  leagues  from  the  land,  and  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  where  the  current 
raiisBtrong  N.  N.  E.  as  far  to  the  northward  as  latitude  35°  15'  N.,  when  it  sets  more 
easterly,  or  about  N.  E.  by  N.,  as  far  as  latitude  37°  N.;  from  thence,  as  fnr  ns  the 
Capes  of  Delaware,  its  direction  is  nbout  E.  N.  E.,  and  from  latitude  38°  57'  N.  it  sets 
nearly  E. 

To  keep  in  the  best  current  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  when  in  long.  79°  30',  lat.  29°  30', 
jteer  north  until  in  Int.  30°  30',  thence  N.  N.  E.,  ensterly,  until  up  with  Hotteras. 

Note. — Along  the  southern  const  of  Amoricn,  you  will  find  no  tid^  farther  out  from 
the  sliore  thnn  10  or  12  fathoms  water;  from  that  depth  until  the  edge  of  soundings,  you 
willimvo  n  current  setting  to  the  southward,  nt  the  rate  of  one  mile  per  hour  :  when  out 
ofsoiinditigs,  you  will  have  the  Gulf  Stream  setting  to  the  N.  E.  quarter,  and  the  farther 
you  got  lo  the  northward,  it  sets  more  ensterly,  but  not  so  strong  as  before  nu  tiouod  ; 
ffheD  you  get  to  the  northward  of  39°,  it  sets  nbout  E. 

The  setting  of  the  Tide  along  the  ilwrefrom  New  York  to  St.  Augustine. 

Flood.  Ebb. 

From  the  west  end  of  Long  Island  to  Cape  May. .  .W.  by  S E.  by 

"     Cape  Henlopen  to  Cape  Charles, S.  by  W N.  by 

"     Cape  Charles  to  Cape  Hatteras S.  S.  W N.  N. 

"     Capo  Hntteras  to  Cape  Lookout S.  W.  by  W.  . .  N.  E 

"     Cape  Lookout  to  Cape  Fear, S.  W 

"     Cape  Fear  to  Cape  Roman W.  S 

"     Cnpe  Roman  to  Charleston, W.  .S 

"     Charleston  to  Tybee W.  S, 

"     Tybee  to  St.  Simons' S.  S.  W 

"      St.  Simons*  to  St.  John's S.  by  vV, 


by  W.  ..N.  E. 

W E.N. 

W E.N. 

W E.N. 

,N.  N 
.N.by 


N. 
E. 
E. 

by  E. 
by  E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 


St-  John's  to  the  Bay  of  St.  Augustine South North. 

GENERAL  REMARKS. 


■w 


NoU. 


When  over  the  Bank,  and  bound  for  New  Orleans,  you  mny  shorten  your  dis- 
tance very  much  by  running  down  the  Florida  Reef,  keeping  in  colored  wiiter  in 
day  time,  nnd  off  into  the  btrenin  by  night,  as  a  strong  eddy,  or  counter  current,  sets 
westwnrdiy  along  the  outside  of  the  reef,  between  it  and  the  regular  set  of  the  (julf.  To 
do  this  with  advantage,  you  must  calculate  to  fall  in  with  the  Florida  const  as  ear'y  in 
the  forenoon  as  possible,  that  you  may  take  advantage  of  the  ed()y  through  the  r.^iMi/n- 
derof  the  day.  Your  best  way,  therefore,  will  be.  on  leaving  the  Rank  in  Int.  2P  40', 
with  a  good  breeze,  to  steer  W.  S.  W.,  25  leagues,  nnd  if  at  daylight  Florida  Reef  is 
not  in  slight,  steer  West  by  N.,  or  W.  N.  W.,  and  make  them  at  once  ;  you  will  fall 
in  with  them  between  Key  Largo  nnd  Old  Matacumbe,  which  has  high  trees  on  its 
north  end,  the  tops  of  which  are  quite  level,  and  at  first  sight  appear  like  tni)le  land; 
iieep  down  in  colored  water  by  daylight,  nnd  at  night  haul  out  at  a  respectful  distance, 
until  fairly  daylight  again,  when  you  may  haul  into  the  northward,  and  again  make  the 
land.  Or,  should  you  be  so  far  to  the  westward  as  between  the  .Marques  Keys  and  the 
Torlugas  light,  where  you  cannot  see  tlie  Innd,  unless  within  4  leagues  of  the  one  or  the 
other,  you  must  keep  a  lookout  for  colored  water,  and  when  fairly  into  it,  keep  down  to 
tiie  westward,  and  make  the  Tortugas,  which  you  may  pass  at  a  respectful  distance  either 
to  windward  or  leeward,  as  best  suits  your  fancy,  and  as  the  winds  will  admit  of.  Be- 
tween Sonil)rero  Key  and  Sand  Key  light,  you  may  see  the  beocon  on  Looe  Key,  which 
is 30  feet  high,  and  on  which  is  a  largo  ball  painted  red;  4  or  5  miles  E.  of  Looe  Key  is 
a  white  buoy  on  a  reef,  in  3.i  feet  of  water,  and  between  Looe  Key  and  the  west  end  of  Buoy. 
Florida  Reef,  you  may  make  the  lighthouse  on  Sand  Key. 

Should  the  wind  be  far  southerly  or  light,  it  would  be  most  advisable,  on  leaving  the 
Bank,  to  keep  to  the  southward,  and  get  under  Double-headed  Shot  Bank,  and  out  of  the 


248 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


force  of  the  Btrenm  ;  and  with  light  and  westerly  winds,  (which  sometimes  continue  for 
sevtMul  tltiys  during  the  summer,)  it  is  usual  to  get  on  the  Double-hended  Shot  Bunk,  and 
lay  on  its  western  edgH  for  a  hrot  zo,  or  cross  over  into  St.  Nicliolas  Channel,  and  take  ad. 
vantaye  of  the  land  breeze  from  the  Island  of  Cuba,  to  get  to  the  westward. 
lAghthouse.  A  lighthouse,  showing  a  fixed  liijht,  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  400 
yards  fnun  the  beach,  and  about  7  miles  from  the  Gulf  Stream,  is  built  on  the  south  point 


Tartugas 
Ught. 


Vessels  drawing  10  feet  may  approach  it  till  within 'U 
Gulf  Stream,  lat.  25°  40',  N.,  long.  80°5'  \V.,a  liitle 


of  Key  Biscayno  [''ai)e  Florida.] 
miles,     it  is  about  V  miles  from  the 
aoutli  of  Cape  Florida. 

<  >n  the  Reef  olf  Key  Largo  is  a  floating  light-vessel,  showing  two  fixed  lights,  nm  about 
60  feel  high,  the  other  40  feet,  bearing  from  the  highest  land  on  Key  Largo  E,  by  S.  7 
miles  distant ;  from  the  elbow  on  Carysfort  Rfief,  N.  i  F.,  distant  3  or  4  miles  ;  the  outer 
reef  [say  14  fathoms  water]  bearing  F.,  '2i  miles  distant,  lat.  2o°  VS  N.,  long.  jO°  1G' 
W.  It  may  gener.dly  be  seen  G  miles,  and  its  object  is  to  warn  vessels  fiom  the  dnn- 
poroiis  rocks  and  slioals  near  which  she  is  moored.  In  hazy  weather,  a  bell  will  be  struck 
frequently  to  warn  vessels  to  keep  olf. 

TOlirUGAS  LIGHT.  Stationary,  on  one  of  the  Dry  Tortugas  Islands,  near  the 
western  extremity  of  the  reef 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  white,  in  15  or  18  feet  water,  showing  3  feet  above  the  watnr,  is 
placed  at  the  west  end  of  the  quicks)' -uls,  [  Dry  Tortugas,]  15  miles  F.  i  S.  from  Fust  Key. 
which  is  the  most  easternmost  key,  and  where  there  is  a  shoal  of  not  more  than  7  or  8 
feet  water. 

Sarjd  Key  light  is  not  rebuilt.     [1850.] 

For  these  lights,  see  Appendix. 


DESCRIPTION!  OF  THE  RAHAITIA  BATIKS,  IISLA^OS, 

A.MJI  CHAI\I^EL!§. 

THF  following  directions  are  confined  to  that  part  of  the  Bahamas  which  Amnricaa 
vessels  navisrate  in  their  route  from  the  Atlantic  ports  to  those  in  the  (Julf  of  Mexico. 
Bahamat.  B.AHAAI.\.S. — Under  this  general  denomination  are  included  all  thoge  groups  wliieli 

ni)pear  on  the  banks  between  the  Mataiiilla  Bank  on  the  N.  W.  and  Square  Handkerchief 
on  tiie  S.  F.  The  principal  islands  are  situated  on  those  remarkable  (lats,  calji-d  the 
GRKAT  and  LITTLF  BANKS  OF  BAHAMAS,  which  are  divided  by  the  diannel 
of  Providence,  and  of  so  much  importance  did  we  consider  a  correct  descri|)ti()n  ot' its 
naviL'Mtiiin,  being  the  passage  for  vessels  from  the  ports  of  the  United  States  to  tlidseof 
the  .Mexican  .Sea,  as  to  induce  the  author,  in  18,'0,  to  send  the  sloop  Orbit,  under  tho  di- 
rection of  F.  C.  Ward,  U    S.  Navy,  to  make  surveys. 

The  banks  are  generally  of  sand,  with  coi'al.  The  islands  are  low,  flat,  and  intcrspprRei] 
with  porous  rocks,  of  fresh  water;  but  the  su[)ply  is,  however,  scanty,  it  Immiii!;  olilniniible 
only  from  pools,  formed  durini;  the  rains,  or  from  wells  dug  in  tho  sand,  into  wiiichthe 
sea  water  filters.      In  the  woods  are  found  the  wild  hog  and  tho  agouti. 

Within  till!  jurisdiction  (d' the  iiahamas  are,  therefore,  included   tho  Great  I'liliiirans 
and  Aljaro  Isles,  New  I'rovidonce.  Aridros,  the  Bi^rry  Isles.  Klutliera,  or  Fihera,  (luaniia- 
han,  otherwise  .St.  .Salvador  or  ("at  Island.  Watlanil's  Island,  Fxuma,  Yunnt.  or  Ijons;  Isl- 
ands, the  Crooked  Islands.  Mayiiiina,  tlie  Cavcos,  the  Inagues,  and  many  smaller  yrnups 
hereafter  descriijed  under  the  head  of  West  Indies. 
Little  Baha-       LITTLF  BAHA.MA  BANKS,  WITH    ITS  ISLANDS.— The  Hole-in-the-wall, 
ma  Banks,        which  is  the  soullienimost  extreme  of  the  island  Abac.o,  bears  N.  N.  W.  from  Kas;  Isl- 
unthitiisl-       and,  7i    leagues  distant,  and   the   two  form  the   mouth  of  what  is  called  the  Novlb-east 
andt.  Channel  of  Providence;  and  the  Mole-in-the-wall,  with  Stirrup's  Key,  forms  the  eastern 

mouth  of  what  is  c.dleil  the  .North-west  (Jhannel  of  Providence;  and  this  Northwest 
Channel's  nnmth  is  formed  by  the  (Jreat  Isaac,  atid  the  western  extremity  of  the  Island 
of  Great  or  (Jrand  Bahama.  About  one  nnie  west  ot'flie  N.  F.  point  of  Abaco  is  a  line 
bay,  called  Hurricane  Hay,  with  water  enough  for  small  vessels. 

After  passing  the  Hole-in-lhn-wall,  the  land  is  inilented,  both  on  its  surface  and  hench, 
and  trends  nearly  east  and  wi^st,  forming  a  slopes;  the  highest  land  to  the  eastward.  Two 
miles  VV.  by  S.  from  it  lies  the  southernmost  point  of  tho  Island  of  Abaco,  and  Little 
Bahama  Bank. 

From  the  south  point  of  Great  .\baco  to  Rock  Point,  the  bearing  and  disfnncn  are 
N.  W.  by  W.,  l()  miles;  the  latitude  of  the  latter  is  (exactly  2()'^  ;  f-om  Rock  Fointto 
Key  Gorda,  on  which  fresh  water  may  be  found,  is  N.  W.  by  W.  3  W,,  10  miles.    Along 


^■"■PW 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


249 


the  edge  of  the  Bank,  N.  W.  i  N.  from  Key  Gordii,  in  iiii  extent  of  G  lensues,  is  u  con- 
tinued Ht'i'ies  of  keys  nnd  reefs,  iind  vviiliin  tliese  on  tlie  biiuk  ia  Moose  Island.  In  this 
distiiDce  you  will  hiivo  a  diiii^eroua  rueky  shore,  on  the  west  end  of  the  himk.  Ahout 
balt'wiiy  between  Moose  Island  and  the  S.  E.  end  of  (jreut  Bahama  Islandii,  are  Bur- 
rows Keys. 

Tiie  Island  of  Abnco  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  small  shoiil  channel,  and  when  it  is 
seen  lo  the  eastward,  it  forms  two  pretty  high  lumps.  There  arecoiiiinu(li()UsaiK-liiirii>:t'S 
ootiio  western  and  southern  edges,  well  sheltered  from  the  sea,  one  of  wliiidi  is  on  tlie 
western  part  of  Abaco,  which  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall  bears  N.  W.,  and  termiiiiites  in 
8  bay,  9  miles  from  the  point. 

Tins  bay,  with  winds  at  N.  W.,  N.  N.  E.,  E.,  and  oven  S.  E.,  affords  a  gond  shelter, 
with  a  dejilh  of  7i,  H.  and  9  iitthoms  water,  and  although  the  wind  at  S.  E.  is  along  shore, 
itmukes  no  sea,  and  it  is  excellent  holding  ground. 

Ill  the  button)  of  tliis  bay  is  the  channel  which  divides  the  Island  of  Aliaco  irto  two 
parts;  a  numi)er  of  houses  ai-e  erected  there  by  people  from  New  Providence,  who  como 
to  cut  wood.  This  anchorage  is  safer  in  winter  than  in  summer,  as  during  tiie  hitler  you 
have  constant  squalls  from  the  southward,  from  which  the  lightning  often  does  h.ii'in, 
and  eiirtlujuakes  are  frequent,  which  drive  olf  the  people,  who  retire  to  Providence  and 
Eleutliera. 

From  the  west  part  of  this  bay  a  chain  of  keys  extends  20  miles  W.  by  N.,  after  which 
rou  will  see  the  east  end  of  the  Island  of  (treat  iSahama,  whicii  continues  on  nearly  the 
same  direction  for  It)  leagues,  and  the  whoh  of  these  two  spaces  of  the  bank  are  foul, 
ffitli  reefs  and  rocks,  as  far  us  the  middle  of  Ureat  Bahama,  from  whence  it  is  clean  and 
has  II  sinoolh  bottom. 

The  south-east  side  of  GREAT  BAHAMA  ISLAND,  which  is  wholly  bordered  with 
areef,  furms  a  bight,  which  is  14  leagues  in  length,  and  very  dangerous  with  strung  S. 
\V,  winds.  Within  the  S.  E  ,  or  more  properly  the  south  point,  there  is  fit^sh  water; 
and  lit  this  point,  in  lat.  2G°  26',  long  78^  40',  is  a  narrow  spot  of  good  anchoring  gruund, 
having  10  or  11  fathoms.  Towards  this  coast  there  is  generally  an  outset  from  the 
Fhiiidii  Stream  on  the  west,  whiidi,  however,  varies  according  to  the  wind,  &c.,  and  at 
all  times  it  is  necessary  to  give  the  west  (Mid  of  Great  Baliama  a  good  berth,  not  only  (m 
account  of  its  shoals,  for  if  the  wind  should  hang  to  the  southward,  you  would  be  embayed. 

On  the  western  edge  of  LITTLE  BAHAMA  BANK  are  several  keys  and  dangerous 

reefs.    Olf  the  N.  W.  point  of  Gnat  Bahama  Island  are  the  Wood  nnd  Indian  Keys,  at 

«^,jA  a  lengue  to  the  norlhwaid  of  which  is  Sandy  Key,  and  at  three  leagues 

^^^^^pr  to  the  N.  W.  of  Sandy  Key,  is  Memory  Kock,  which  stands  about  half 

,r"^,     M  vrrt  league  within  the  eilge  of  the  bank,  and  appears  when  tearing  N.  N. 

Memorv  Hocks,  N.  N.„        *"  »     i  •     .i  '  ii  a 

E.,ikiLe  inilts.     E.  as  represented  m  the  margin. 

Fruiii  Memory  liock  the  edge  of  the  bank  trends  to  the  N.  N.  W..  and  at  4  miles  from 
theroik  is  the  south  end  of  a  reef  which  is  even  with  the  water's  edge.  It  is  succeeded 
by  others  to  the  entire  N.  W.  point  of  the  Bank  in  lut.  -27°  19',  long.  79°  05'.  The  west- 
ertiMiiist  edge  of  the  Bank,  and  which  is  dangerous,  is  in  lat.  27°  OG',  long.  79°  I'i',  bi-ar- 
ingN.  'JO*^  W.,  10  miles  distant  from  Memory  Kock. 

Inside  the  reefs  the  Bank  is  clear  to  some  extent,  with  from  .14  to  4  fathoms  water. 

When  th(!re  is  a  sea  from  the  N.  E.  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  this  bank,  it  makes  at  llood 
tided  race,  and  whirlpools,  produced  by  its  encountering  with  the  Gulf  current,  so  as  to 
cause  it  to  break  heavy,  and  makes  it  iip|)ear  like  shoal.-..  The  bottom  is  sand,  gravel, 
and  some  stones,  upon  which  you  may  occasionally  anchor.  On  this  bank  the  water  is 
green,  and  you  cannot  see  the  bottom  until  in  ',4  and  3  fathoms,  upon  which,  or  in  the 
green  water,  there  never  has  been  any  current  experienced;  therefore  the  Gulf  StriMun 
does  no  more  than  touch  along  the  edge  of  soundings. 

MATANILLA  KEEP. — This  reef,  which  is  a  succession  of  shoal  patclies,  was  sur- 
veyed by  dipt.  E.  Burnett,  R.  N.,  in  184(i;  his  objtxt  being  to  find  a  snitalile  place  for 
the  location  of  a  lighthouse.  The  rcsef  appears  to  be  a  succession  of  very  shoal  spots  with 
narrow  channels  between,  of  5  and  6  fathoms  water,  commencing  to  the  north  and  west 
of  Walker's  Key,  running  W.,  northerly,  from  the  latitude  of  27°  19',  longitude  78°  40', 
to  longitude  79°  05',  latitut'..-  27°  24'. 

TliB  extensive  chain  of  keys  which  borders  the  north-o.istern  siile  of  the  Little  Bahama 
Bank,  extends  from  the  Elbow  Reef  34  leagues  W.  N.  \V.,  and  the  late  delineations 
prove  how  very  inaccurately  they  have  ever  before  been  represontetl.  The  bank  which 
supports  these  keys  is  generally  shoal,  but  there  is  a  passage  between  them  and  the 
Abiico  Isles,  having  from  4  to  2  fathoms,  which  leads  to  the  centre  of  the  bank.  The 
entrance  to  this  passage  is  close  to  the  west  of  (Jreat  (Juaria  Key  nnd  the  Whale  Key 
Rucks,  in  lat.  26°  45',  long.  77°  6',  To  small  vessels  it  all'ords  excellent  shelter  between 
the  keys  and  Abaco. 

But  it  is  to  bo  noted,  generally,  that  n  very  heavy  swtdl  commonly  sets  upon  this  coast; 
nnd  it  is  never  r  'visable  for  a  stranger  to  advance  nearer  than  two  leagues,  as  the  wind  is 
mostly  from  the  eastward.      This  is  the  case  along  the  whole  of  the  north-eastern  keys, 


Great  Baha- 
ma Island. 


Little  Baha- 
ma Bank. 


Mnfanilla 
Reef. 


250 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  therefore,  when  sailing  in  this  part,  whether  beating  up  or  running  down,  a  too  netr 
approach  is  both  unnecessary  and  dangerous. 
Abaeo,orthe       ABACO.  OR  THE  HOLE-IN-THE-WALL.— The  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of 
Hole-in-the-    Abaco  lies  in  latitude  26°  17'  N.,  longitude  76°  57'  W.     When  in  its  latitude,  distant  nine 
wall.  miles,  steer  S.  by  W.  }  W.,  12  miles,  which  will  carry  you  on  the  bank  off  the  Hole-in- 

the-wall,  in  about  14  fathoms  water.  The  first  island  to  the  northward  of  the  N.  E.  point 
is  Little  Harbor  Key.  North  of  this,  Linnyard's  Key.  and  still  farther  north.  Little  Guana 
Key.  Linnyard  and  Pelican  Keys  run  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  N.  by  E.  i  E.  The  distance 
between  Linnyard's  Key  and  Abaco  is  about  two  miles,  fine  sandy  bottom,'clear  of  rocks 
and  good  anchorage,  and  bears  north  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  Abaco. 

On  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  Island  of  Abaco,  in  a  direction  N  N.  W.  from  said  point,  N. 
W.  from  the  south,  and  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the  north  end  of  Linnyard's  Key,  is  a  good 
watering  place,  called  Wertherford's  Well.  To  enter  the  channel  leading  to  the  water- 
ing place,  which  lies  between  Linnyard's  Key  and  Little  Guana  Key,  you  must  keep  a 
small  island  which  forms  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  (about  300  yards  from  Linnyard's 
Key,)  well  on  board  on  your  starboard  hand,  and  you  will  pass  the  bar  in  3  fathoms,  and 
find  good  anchorage  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  within  about  two  miles  west  from  the  north 
point  of  Linnyard's  Key.  This  channel  is  far  preferable  to  the  one  at  the  N.  E.  point  of 
Abaco,  independent  of  its  safety  and  facility  in  getting  water,  as  you  may  approach  with- 
in a  mile  and  a  half  of  the  watering  place  with  three  fathoms,  or  come  immediately  nhrenst 
in  two  fathoms,  within  300  yards  of  the  shore.  Wood  may  be  had  in  abundance  amoD» 
the  keys,  together  with  scale  and  shell  fish.  ^ 

The  water  breaks  where  there  is  danger,  with  the  wind  to  the  eastward,  and  it  is  ad- 
visable to  have  a  lookout  aloft  while  going  in. 

The  eastern  part  of  the  coast  is  completely  iron-bound,  and  fragments  of  wrecks  are 
found  on  all  its  shores  and  keys. 

The  first  point,  south  of  the  N.  E.  point  of  Abaco,  is  called  Rocky  Point.  S.  S.  W.  j 
W.  from  this  point,  6  miles  distant,  is  a  reef  of  rocks  9  miles  in  length,  and  li  in  breadth 
running  in  the  same  direction  as  the  shore,  inside  of  which  is  Cheeric  Sound,  which 
makes  a  channel  between  the  two. 

After  passing  the  reef  which  lies  off  Rocky  Point,  the  water  is  bold  to  within  half  a 
mile  of  the  shore,  till  up  with  the  Hole-in-the-wall. 

The  land  between  Rocky  Point  and  the  Hole-in-the-wall  forms  a  deep  bay,  in  which 
you  must  be  careful  not  to  be  caught  with  a  south-easterly  wind. 
Providence  PROVIDENCE  CHANNEL,  BAHAMA  BANK,  with  its  islands.  Gulf  Pnssaje, 

Channel.  and  the  FLORIDA  COAST. — In  preference  to  running  down  for  Rocky  Point,  (which 

lies  abont  2  miles  .S.  S.  W.  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of  Abaco,)  where,  if  you 
get  embayed,  you  must  lie  up  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  E.  by  E.,  to  run  along  the  land,  it  is  more 
prudent  to  run  into  the  latitude  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  and  with  the  wind  any  way  to 
the  southward  of  east,  it  is  presumed  every  man  would  do  it. 
Abaco  light.  ABACO  LIGHT. — At  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall  this  liglithnuse 
has  been  erected,  in  25°  51'  30"  N.  Int.,  and  77°  10'  45"  W,  long.  Its  base  is  fiO  feet 
above  high  water,  and  the  tower  is  80  feet  high.  The  light  revolves  once  in  every  min- 
ute, and  may  be  seen  in  all  directions,  except  where  the  high  parts  of  the  islnnd  Inter- 
▼ene;  and  being  160  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  it  will  be  visible  in  clear  weather  at 
the  distance  of  15  miles  to  an  eye  elevated  10  feet. 
17     do.  do  20  do. 

19     do.  do.  40  do. 

21     do,  do.  80  do. 

There  is  good  anchorage,  [during  thn  ordinary  winds,]  in  10  and  11  fathoms,  with  the 
High  water,    lightliouse  hearing  K.  by  N.,  aitout  half  a  milo  from  the  shore.    The  time  of  high  water, 
at  full  and  change,  is  at  8h.,  and  the  tide  rises  3  feet. 

HOLE-IN-THE-WALL.— The  Hole-in-the- Wall  lies  in  latitude  25°  51'  nortli,  lon- 
gitude 77°  10'  west,  and  is  the  south-east  point  of  Ahnro.  By  making  Rocky  Point  in 
the  iliiy  time  you  may  have  a  safe  run  on  your  S.  by  W.  J  W.  course,  12  leiinucs,  i 
then,  if  you  do  not  choose  to  run,  lay  by.  should  it  be  in  the  night.  The  geiifiialifyof  I 
the  vesseU  make  the  land  too  far  north,  in  the  lotitudo  of  2G°  10',  or  26°  20',  boniuseaD 
opinion  (irevails  that  the  land  theronbouts  is  soonest  seen,  and  are  notnwaro  nf  lis  forming 
a  l)iiy  to  the  south  and  west.  If,  at  night,  they  make  the  land  in  the  parallel  a(-2C>°  10', 
with  a  strong  breeze  from  the  N.  E.,  they  ore  so  close  in  shore,  l)efore  they  can  diiscnver 
the  land,  thot  it  is  olmost  impossiiilo  to  clear  it,  for  the  land,  in  that  latitude,  trends  a  little 
to  the  westward,  forming  o  bny,  a  few  miles  north  of  the  •llole-in-the-wall,  with  a  reefo( 
rocks  outside,  in  one  part,  half  a  mile  from  the  shore;  and  should  they  make  the  ifliiii 
farther  ii  rth.  the  danger,  with  a  scant  wind,  is  still  greater,  as  there  is  constantly  alieary 
BWiill  netting  on  the  shore. 


•  Till?  H"ilp-in-tlip-w!tll  i«  sol(l<im  seen  when  to  the  eastward  of  it,  as  it  is  not  oj)ea  until  veij 
near  the  Bhore,  or  when  you  are  S.  W.  of  it. 


^f 


■PIP 


PiPPPPHRIiPI 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


261 


Vesaels  should  run  down  their  longitude  in  the  parallel  of  25°  50',  or  from  that  to  26°, 
ind  not  farther  north.  By  keeping  in  this  latitude  they  cannot  miss  the  Hole-in-the-wall, 
md  they  will  likewise  avoid  the  land  on  the  south  or  Harbor  Island  side.  , 

Olf  the  Hole-in-the-wull  lies  a  bank,  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  7  or  8  miles  in  length,  and 
ibuut  4  miles  broad  in  the  middle,  ending  at  a  point  on  the  S.  E.  extremity. 

Soundings  taken  on  the  Bank. 

Hole-in-the-Wall,  W.,  2  miles 12  fathoms. 

»  W.iN., Smiles 15  do. 

"  W.,  7  miles ..60  do.  no  bottom. 

"  W.  by  S.,  6  miles 30  do.        do. 

"  W.  i  S.,  3  miles 13  do. 

"  W.  4  N.,  3  miles 12  do. 

"  W.  by  N..  24  miles 11  do. 

»  N.  W.  4  N.,  24  miles 15  do. 

"  N.  W.  by  N.,  3  miles,  off  the  bank. 

Beyond  15  fathoms  there  were  no  soundings  with  80  fathoms.  You  may  know  when 
on  this  bank,  as  the  water  changes  at  once  from  a  dark  sea  blue  to  a  beautiful  vivit'.  green, 
is  more  agitated  by  a  ground  swell,  and  discovered  the  moment  you  are  off,  particularly 
nitli  a  S.  E.  wind,  at  which  time  the  above  soundings  were  taken. 

The  Hole-in-the-wall,  (or  Hole-in-the-rock,)  is  an  arch  through  the  land,  about  10 feet 
wide,  and  4  or  5  feet  high,  the  bottom  nearly  one  foot  above  the  water,  which  breaks 
through  the  Hole,  and  may  be  seen  when  bearing  S.  S.  W.  to  W.  S.  W.,  and  N.  N.  E. 
tu  E.  N.  £.,  and  at  fir  t  sight  appears  like  a  sand-bluff,  but  at  3  or  4  miles  distance  may 
be  pininly  distinguished  to  be  an  arch-way  through  the  land. 

South  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  100  yards  distant,  is  a  rock,  60  or  70  yards  long,  hol- 
lowed out  all  round  at  its  base  by  the  water,  which  may  be  doubled  within  half  a  mile. 

On  the  south  point  of  the  main  land  is  another  corresponding  projection,  both  which 
gppear  to  have  been  caused  by  some  convulsion  of  nature,  of  which  the  whole  coast 
bears  evident  marks.  It  is  covered  with  fragments  of  vessels,  spars,  &c.,  and  the  western 
side  has  a  complete  barrier  of  stones,  formed  on  the  beach,  above  the  tide  mark,  both  by 
nature  and  the  S.  W.  gales,  which  at  times  blow  very  hard. 

Five  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Hale-in-the  wall,  and  about  300  yards  from  shore, 
the  soundings  are  regular,  24  and  3  fathoms,  and  deepening  rapidly  as  you  leave  it. 

One-quarter  of  a  mile  off  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  island,  you  will  have  2  fathoms,  fine 
level  sandy  bottom.  The  land  here  is  low,  and  covered  with  brushwood.  Here  the  ebb 
sets  N.  E.,  and  tide  rises  3  feet.  Tide. 

Vessels  of  any  draught  ought  not  to  approach  the  land  nearer  than  about  400  yards, 
where  they  will  lie  in  about  4  fathoms  water.  Inside  this  the  water  shoals  suddenly  to 
two  fathoms. 

Vessels  in  the  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  may  run  to  the  westward,  when  in  latitude 
25°  46'  N.,  and  sound  till  they  get  in  14  or  15  fathoms,  and  be  then  sure  to  clear  the  Hole- 
iii-tlie-wail  by  a  west  course,  six  miles,  when  it  will  bear  north,  and  then  run  W.  i  N., 
sixteen  leiigues,  when  Stirrup  Key  will  bear  south,  six  miles  distant.  Vessels  running 
down  in  the  latitude  of  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  will  not  get  soundings  till  up  with  it. 

In  tiiking  your  departure  from  th<)  Hole-in-the-wall  for  the  Great  Bahama  Bank,  steer 
west  twelve  leagues,  and  if  the  land  be  not  in  sight,  haul  W.  S.  W.,  or  S.  W.  by  W., 
and  miike  the  Berry  Islands ;  keep  down  past  these  islands,  and  keep  a  good  lookout  for 
the  westernmost  key,  cnlled  Stirrup  Key,  before  mentioned,  which  lies  in  latitude  25° 
49'  N.,  and  lon^itudo  77°  53'  W. 

OH'  Stirrup  Key  there  is  good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms.  To  get  shelter  from  strong 
enslerly  winds,  in  order  to  repair  any  dnninge  or  to  obtain  water,  you  may  anchor  to  the 
west  of  the  westernmost  island,  in  74  or  8  fathoms,  on  good  holding  ground.  W.  S.  W. 
tVnin  Stirrup  Key,  4  miles  distant,  the  Brig  Dromo  struck  in  9^  feet,  hard  coral  bottom, 
having  24  fathoms  to  the  S.  and  W.  on  ench  side,  and  5  fathoms  to  the  northward.  On 
Stirrup  Key  there  is  a  settlement,  and  a  Custom  House  established;  the  place  is  called 
Wijiiiinistown.     Hero  refreshments  of  every  kind  can  be  obtained. 

The  Berry  Islands  consist  of  about  thirty  large  keys,  with  innumerable  smaller  ones; 

they  lie  to  the  N.  K.  of  A  mhos  Island,  the  south-easternmost  of  which  is  Frozen  Key, 

and  the  nortliernmost  Stirrup  Key.     There  ore  soundings  oil  round  the  group;  and  20 

j  fiitiiuiiia  niny  be  found  at  two  miles  from  any  of  the  keys.     The  surface  of  '^he  bottom  is 

1 81111(1,  iind  below  that,  a  kind  of  linjestone.     The  isles  form  several  small  harbors,  where 

I  wiiter  and  other  refreshments  may  be  hod,  but  are  seldom  frequerited  by  any  other  than 

[the  people  of  Now  Providence.     At  the  Berry  Islands  the  tide  rises  two  feet  more  when  Tides. 

I  the  sun  is  to  the  northward  of  the  equator,  than  it  does  when  to  tlie  southward  of  it.     In 

[thennehuriifie,  or  little  harbor  of  these  islands,  the  tide  runs  with  strength  among  the 

rocks,  in  a  N.  W.  direction. 


mpiMMP 


mmmm 


^m 


|""Pfl 


263 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and 
in 


Extract  from  the  log-book  of  the  surveying  sloop  Orbit, 

"In  approaching  the  Berry  Islnnrls,  the  water  is  bold  close  in;  two  and  a  half  tnileg 
from  till)  sliore,  11  fathoms  ;  two  miles,  9  fathoms;  one  mile,  8  fathoms ;  the  northern. 
DioHt  pint  of  Siirrup  Key  hearing  W.  hy  N.,  three  and  a  half  miles,  7  fathoms  ;  W.  N.  W. 
two  and  a  half  uiilcH,  8  fathoms,  rocky  bottom;  west,  one  milo,  7  fathoms;  W.  S.  W. 
three  qnaiters  of  a  mile.  !)  fathoms;  and  ull  along  to  the  westernmost  key,  8,  9,  and  10 
fathoniH.  generally  fine  sandy  bottom,  'i'he  moment  you  g»t  on  soundings,  in  approach- 
ing the  Berry  Islands,  the  water  changes  color. 

"  Saded  aroutid  the  Berry  Islands  till  they  bore  N.  N.  E.,  two  miles,  and  had  5,  4,  3 

id  34  latlioms ;  and  far  as  five  miles.  4,  3,  4,  4.  3,^.  4,  3},  and  3i  fathoms;  N.  by  E.,8i)t 

iles,  "Ji  fathoms.  West  Berry  bearing  N.  N.  E..  and  Blackwood's  Bush  S.  S.  E. 
course  W.  N.  W..  the  soundings  were  2.  4,  and  ft  fathoms;  at  23h.  steered  W,,  4  fg! 
thorns;  at  3h..  S.  S.  W.,  7  fathoms;  at  3ih.,  S.  S.  W.,  7  fathoms;  3|h.,  6i  fatho.nsi 
at  4h.,  G  fathoms;  at4.ili..  5i  fathoms;  at4<ih..  4J  faihoms;  at  4jh.,  3|  fathoms;  iit  5h. 
3  fathoms;  at  54h.,  3  fathoms;  at  6.^h.,  2-i  fathoms;  at  53h.,  2i  fathoms;  at  6,  2^  fa' 
thorns ;  at  6ih.,  2j  fath(tiiis;  at  63h  ,  24  fathoms  ;  at  7h.,  only  11  feet,  and  came  to  nn- 
chor  among  black  patches,  which  we  sounded  and  found  to  be  flat  rocks,  about  one  foot 
high,  covered  with  weeds.  The  water  was  shoal  far  to  the  westward  of  this.  Vessels 
should  not  go  among  these  black  patches;  the  regular  channel  is  quite  free  from  them, 
and  the  water  is  muddy,  having  a  milky  appearance,  which  prevents  the  bottom  being 
easily  seen." 
Sheep  Keys.  SHEEP  KEYS  bear  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  7  or  8  leagues  from  Stirrup  Key,  and  lie  off  the 
N.  N.  W.  part  of  Andnis  Islands;  from  these  keys  it  is.  as  before  observed,  very  tbul  to 
the  westward,  and  the  shoal  extends  quite  round  to  Stirrup  Key;  »'".o  not  torn  covered 
with  spots  of  sponge  and  rocks,  the  size  of  a  barrel  or  the  head  of  a  hogshead ;  nnJ  niiy 
object  on  the  bottom  may  as  plainly  be  seen  as  if  no  water  intervened.  Here  the  tide 
rises  four  feet. 

The  best  courses  for  crossing  the  Bahama  Bank  are  the  following,  viz.:  when  Stiirup 
Key  bears  S.,  8  miles  distant,  (at  which  lime  it  can  be  just  seen  from  deck,)  steer  W.  S, 
W.,  6  leagues,  then  haul  to  S.  W.  by  S..  10  leagues ;  thence  S.  S.  W.,  or  between  that 
and  S,  W.  by  S.,  to  latitude  24°  55',  when  you  may  keep  away  W.,  and  make  Orange 
Keys,  or  continue  on  your  course  to  latitude  24°  45'.  when  you  may  keep  down  west, 
and  leave  the  Bank  without  danger.  In  case  you  should  prefer  to  haul  to  sooner  tiiiin 
directed,  in  crossing  the  Bank,  and  find  your  water  shoaling,  you  may,  by  ketipiiig  off 
W.  3  leagues  or  more,  find  the  deep  water  of  the  channel,  which  is  5  leogues  in  hremith; 
bear  up  as  soon  as  you  get  but  2^  fathoms,  as  it  shoals  suddenly  and  irregularly  from  that 
depth. 

You  may  even  run  7  leagues  on  your  W.  S.  W.  course,  after  leaving  Stirrup  Key, 
without  danger;  be  careful  to  oilow  for  the  tide.  On  the  north  side,  the  flood  sols  S.  S. 
E.,  and  ebb  N.  W.,  and  as  you  draw  on  the  Bank,  the  force  of  the  tide  decreases,  for 
when  you  have  got  4  or  5  leagues  on  the  Bank,  the  tide  is  but  a  slight  set.  Or  when 
Stirrup  Key  bears  south.  5  miles  distant,  you  may  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  44  miles,  and  then 
S.  S.  W.  until  off  the  Bank.  The  water  in  the  regular  channel  is  milky  white;  to  the 
eastward  you  have  it  clear  with  black  spots  on  the  bottom,  and  to  the  westward  with  clear, 
hard  white  bottom. 

Or  you  may  follow  the  courses  as  given  on  the  large  chart  of  the  Great  Bahomn  Bank, 
from  the  Admiralty  Surveys,  republished  by  E.  6c  G.  W.  Blunt. 

Centre  of  lireat  Stirrup  Key,  bearing  south  three  miles  distant,  steer  W.  S.  W„  33 
miles,  then  S.  W.  by  S.  southerly,  70  miles.  Or  S.  W.  i  W.,  2Gi  miles,  then  S.  W.bv 
S.  (')(>  miles. 

Either  of  the  above  courses  will  ploce  you  about  lOi  miles  from  Orange  Key,  and  in  a 
proper  place  to  run  off  the  Bank. 

The  straight  course  is  S.  W.  95  miles  :  this  has  the  best  water,  but  it  is  necessary  to 
be  very  accurate  in  steering,  to  prevent  running  on  the  Sheep  Key  Shoals. 

All  the  courses  are  by  Compass. 

Every  atte.ifion  should  be  paid  to  the  steering  and  log,  as  it  will  be  seen  that  the  courses 
laid  down  border  cli>sely  on  the  edge  of  the  channel. 

By  crossing  the  Bank  as  above  directed,  you  will  see  fewer  no  spots  of  sponcre,  andihe 
bottom  is  with  difficulty  discerned,  and  may  be  sure  of  3  faihoms  all  the  way,  at  higb 
water. 

Be  careful  of  Orange  Keys  in  the  night  time,  as  they  are  very  low.  and  cannot  bespH 
until  on  board  of  them,  and  the  soundings  are  deepened  regular,  until  very  near  tlieinoii  | 
their  east  side. 

Orange  ORAN(iK  KEVS  is  a  cluster  of  shoals  and  keys,  lying  near  the  west  edge  of  the] 

Keys.  Great  Raliama  Bank,  extending  from   lat.  24°  52',  to  24°  58'  N.,  and   long.  79°  !)' 30 

W.     The  main  rock  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  milo  iu  length,  and  the  broadest  pari  I 


""'"'"'v^'wnmpqfppK^lipp 


'^'miiii'mi^^'mm^mmmigimimifm 


t  Bahn  mil  Blink, 


le  Key,  and  in  a 


that  the  courses 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ibont  120  yards,  highest  part  20  feet,  and  narrowest  8  yards.  It  is  a  barren  rock,  the 
eastern  side  quite  slruight,  and  runs  8.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E.  S.  by  W.  of  the  iiiaiu  isl- 
and, distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  are  two  rocks,  6  feet  out  of  water,  about  15  feet  in 
leugtli ;  and  one  half  a  mile  S.  by  W.  of  these,  lie  two  snmller  rocks.  It  is  dnngoious  to 
pass  between  either  of  these  rocks  and  the  principal  island,  ns  reefs  run  out  and  connect 
tiiem,  30  or  40  yards  broad,  and  soon  as  over  4  fulhunis.  Three  miles  south  of  these  rocks 
you  may  sail  with  safety.  They  ure  a  mass  of  solid  rock,  and  may  be  approached  at  the 
westward  to  their  very  edge,  on  11  feet  water.  N.  W.  of  them  is  good  aiichonif:e  in  8i 
fiithonis,  foul ;  there  is,  also,  good  anchorage  S.  E.  of  Orange  Keys,  in  6  fmhoins,  with- 
out other  danger  than  the  eye  announces.  To  the  northward  it  is  not  safe  to  approach 
within  three  miles,  as  the  water  breaks,  and  has  a  ridge,  projecting  to  a  very  considerable 
extent.     There  is  no  sign  of  verdure  on  these  keys,  but  round  them  plenty  of  ti»li. 

Many  persons  mistake  Orange  Keys  for  the  Riding  Rocks,  north  of  which  you  cannot 
go;  but  north  from  Orange  Keys,  3  miles  distant,  you  will  find  a  passage,  although  it  is 
not  safe  for  strangers  to  go  this  way,  neither  should  it  be  attempted  by  any  one,  as  you 
are  obliged  to  pick  your  way  through  black  patches,  which  are  shoal.  Var.  4°  ^6'  E. 
1820. 

S.  W.  from  Orange  Keys,  5  or  6  miles  distant,  is  good  anchorage  in  20  fathoms  water. 
When  up  with  these  keys,  a  passage  is  secured  through  tlie  Gulf,  for  then  you  may 
mnke  soil  either  in  the  morning  or  at  midnight,  steering  S.  W.  10  or  11  leagues;  that 
will  enable  you  to  fall  in  with  Salt  Key  Bank,  which  for  10  leogues  on  the  north  side 
stretches  E.  and  W.,  and  consequently  the  current  sets  stronger  as  you  come  to  the 
westward.  In  coming  over  you  have  good  soundings  all  along  by  it.  There  is  anchor- 
age by  spots  all  the  way  in,  but  the  soundings  are  narrow  at  the  Double-headed  Shot,  the 
N.  W.  point  of  which  lies  in  latitude  23°  62'  N.  This  route,  however,  demands  the  most 
zealous  care,  hi  order  to  avoid  any  shoal  which  may  exist,  although  unknown.  North 
4°  W.,  four  miles  distant  from  Orange  Keys,  is  the  Galeon  Shoal,  having  only  twelve 
feet,  and  from  thence  to  the  Riding  Rocks  is  a  number  of  shoal  patches,  one  mile  and  a 
quiirterto  the  eastward  of  the  edge  of  the  Bank. 

RIDING  ROCKS  lie  6  leagues  north  of  Orange  Keys,  consisting  of  one  rock  or  key, 
about  half  a  mile  long,  and  12  yards  wide  in  the  broadest  part,  which  is  nearly  divided 
one-third  from  its  south  point  by  a  bay.  This  key  is  very  irregular  in  its  height,  and 
more  uneven  than  Orange  Keys;  about  2^  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  rock,  is  a  small 
ieliind  about  2i  miles  long,  and  250  or  300  yards  broad  in  the  broadest  part.  To  the 
northward  of  the  southernmost  key  lie  three  small  rocks,  about  10  or  12  yards  long,  each 
running  N.  W.  by  N.  The  southern  key  runs  N.  by  W. ;  the  one  next  to  this  key  is  50 
yards  from  it;  this,  100  yards  from  the  third,  and  the  third  100  yards  from  the  second. 
These  rocks  are  about  3  or  4  feet  high.  South  of  this  key  are  two  haycock  rocks,  just 
out  of  water,  6  or  8  yards  from  the  land.  There  are  also  two  rocks  which  lie  half  a  mile 
east  of  the  southernmost  key,  the  largest  80  feet  long,  and  the  smallest  60  feet  long,  about 
one  hundred  feet  asunder,  and  12  feet  high.  These  two  rocks  lie  N.  and  S.  i'here  is 
a  rock  as  big  as  a  small  boat  about  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  these  two  rocks.  A 
reef  extends  all  along  between  these  rocks,  with  the  southernmost  of  the  Riding  Rocks 
bearing  N.  N.  W.,  distant  ii  mile,  5  fathoms.  Eastern  Rock  and  the  northern  key,  in 
a  line  bearing  N.  by  W.  2!^  miles,  4d  fathoms  fine  level  sandy  bottom;  2i  fathoms  imme- 
diately, and  3  miles  distant  3  fathoms.  Nortliern  Riding  Rocks  bearing  W.  5  miles,  3^ 
fathoms.  Southern  Key,  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.  2  miles,  34  fathoms.  Main  or  North- 
ern K«y  bearing  W.  N.  W.  24  miles,  3  fathoms.  There  is  a  shoal  runs  out  from  this 
iiey  in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction,  on  which  are  6  feet  water.  Vou  will  not  have  a  passage 
to  the  northward  of  the  Riding  Rocks  for  vessels  drawing  6  feet  water.  Ebb  sets  N. 
E.  U  mile  per  hour.  S.  by  E.  14  mile  from  the  east  lump  of  the  Riding  Rocks,  there 
is  a  sizeable  isle,  with  various  small  keys  in  its  vicinity,  called  Rock  Key  ;  there  is  good 
anchorage  o.  °'"  west  part  in  7^  and  8  fathoms,  sand  ;  and  the  edge  of  soundings  lies  14 
mile  off. 

In  steering  from  the  Orange  Keys  to  the  Riding  Rocks,  the  deepest  soundings  are  84 
and  the  shoalest  44  fathoms.  The  western  edge  of  the  bank  is  an  iron  bound  shore,  be- 
ing connected  by  one  grand  chain  of  rocks,  extending  under  water  from  key  to  key. 

Extract  from  the  Orbit's  Log  Book. — "Laying  at  anchor,  among  these  shoals,  allow 
water  hud  12  feet,  and  at  high  water  13  feet;  had  a  light  wind  at  W.  S.  W.,  and  could 
seethe  edge  of  soundings  otf  deck,  not  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant:  got 
underway  at  Prst  ebb,  and  in  making  a  tack  crossed  over  some  shoals  with  only  13  feet 
water  on  them,  on  which  there  could  not  bo  more  than  7  or  8  feet  at  low  water ;  and  I 
have  no  doubt,  but,  at  times,  after  heavy  gales,  these  shoals  may  be  above  the  water's 


263 


Ridinf! 
Rocks. 


"High  water,  at  full  and  change,  on  the  edges  of  the  bank,  at  8h.  50.     On  the  north    High  water 
side  the  rise  is  2  feet;  on  the  west,  to  the  northward  of  Orange  Keyp,  3  feet;  to  the 
southward  of  Orange  Keys,  4  feet,  and  in  lat.  24°  10',  5  and  G  feet.     The  flood  and  ebb 
set  from  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  two  miles,  on  and  uff  the  bank." 


m 


wmimmmmimni^^iimmmim'' 


m^m 


I'wmm^wv^^mim 


'^m 


264 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 

The  eSge  of  soundings,  between  the  Riding  Rocks  and  Orange  Keys,  is  clean ;  yon 
may  enter  on  it  without  other  care  than  that  of  the  lead.  From  Orange  Keys,  which  are 
the  southernmost  keys  on  this  side  of  the  bank,  the  ediie  of  soundings  runs  about  S.  b* 
E.  very  clean  to  24"  10',  and  more  or  lets  deep;    it  forms,  with  the  keys  on  Salt  ke» 


Bank,  a  channel,  which  is  bottomless,  and  called  Santaren 


Ke, 


The  above  observation,  m 
entering  on  the  Bank  between  Orange  Keys  and  Riding  Rocks,  means  only  the  very 
edge;  as  you  get  further  on,  you  find  the  so'indings  obstructed  in  their  regularity  bv 
many  coral  shoals,  but  by  day,  and  with  a  free  wind,  you  can  pick  your  way. 

In  atnr-light  nights  the  bank  reflects  a  bright  light  into  the  air,  which  may  be  seen  at 
4  or  5  leagues.  You  may  observe  this  reflection  all  over  both  the  Bahama  Banks,  but 
not  on  Salt  Key  Bank  :  neither  ran  you  see  it  while  on  the  bank  ;  but  when  in  the  Gulf 
you  can  plainly  distinguish  the  Providence  Channel  having  none  of  this  reflection  be- 
tween the  two  reflections  of  the  Great  and  Little  Bahama  l)<>nks. 

It  is  not  presumed  the  same  depth  of  water  can  always  be  carried  over  the  bank,  even 
in  the  same  track,  as  it  must  occur  to  the  mind  of  every  per  on  that  a  strong  ensterlv 
wind  will  drive  the  water  oflTthe  Bank,  as  well  as  a  strong  norcherly  increase  its  qunntity 
In  all  paits  of  the  channel  the  bottom  is  of  a  sticky  quality,  whereas  to  windward  the 
bottom  is  hard,  and  spots  thicken  as  you  shoal  your  water.  Almost  every  regular  trader 
has  a  different  course  to  run  across  the  Bank,  but  the  principal  object  is  to  clear  Sheen 
Key  Shoals  ;  with  the  wind  scant,  and  not  drawing  a  heavy  draught  of  water,  you  should 
haul  to  a  little  sooner,  but  not  without  a  leadsman  constantly  in  the  chains,  and  should 
bear  up  as  soon  as  you  shoalen  your  water  to  2i  fathoms  With  the  wind  steady  and 
free,  so  that  you  could  lay  to  windward  of  south,  you  should  always  make  sure  of  west- 
ing to  clear  the  shoals  to  windward,  taking  care  not  to  run  so  far  as  to  get  among  the 
shoals  which  stretch  off  from  the  east  side  of  the  keys  which  border  the  bank  on  its  west- 
ern edge. 

When  you  anchor  on  any  part  of  the  edge  of  the  Bank,  in  order  to  pass  the  night,  or 
for  a  favorable  tide,  you  ought  to  have  every  thing  ready  to  make  sail  the  moment  it  may 
be  necessary  ;  and  also,  if  the  sky  looks  ill,  you  should  have  the  topsails  reefed.  From 
Buy  one  of  these  anchorages  you  may  make  sail  with  any  'ind;  and,  generally  speaking, 
every  one  in  these  parts,  who  requires  to  anchor,  may  find  a  proper  place  to  do  an,  and 
in  which  he  may  be  sheltered  from  the  winds  that  molest  him,  or  which  he  foresees 
coming;  and  without  eddy  winds  to  leeward,  which  cause  trouble  in  case  of  fouling  the 
anchor,  though  they  only  require  vigilance  and  a  seaman-like  dexterity. 

On  leaving  the  bank,  you  must  be  careful  not  to  fall  in  with  the  Florida  Shore,  or 
Doulile-headed  Shot  Keys,  in  the  night  time;  but  with  day -light  and  a  breeze,  there  ij 
no  danger  in  making  either. 
HightDater.  High  water,  at  full  and  change,  on  the  edges  of  the  Bank,  at  8h.  and  50m.;  on  the 
north  side  it  rises  2  feet;  on  the  west,  to  the  northward  of  Orange  Keys,  threo  feet; 
to  the  southward  of  Orange  Keys,  four  feet;  and  in  lat.  24°  10',  it  rises  five  and  six  feet. 
The  flood  and  ebb  set  from  three-quarters  to  two  knots  on  and  off  the  bank. 

There  were  scarcely  two  men  who  crossed  the  Bahama  Bank  that  agreed  as  to  the 
latitude  of  the  ( )raiige  Keys,  and  many  doubted  their  existence ;  this  diflTerence  of  opinion 
induced  sending  the  sloop  Orbit :  the  subject  is  now  at  rest,  as  marine  and  land  surveys 
have  been  made  by  her  oflRcers,  of  the  Orange  Keys,  Riding  Rocks,  Cat  Keys,  Great  and 
Little  Isaac,  with  the  rocks,  &c.  adjoining,  all  which  are  previously  described. 

On  the  Bahama  Bank,  in  latitude  24°  10'  to  latituae  24°  32',  it  is  shoal  near  the  edi;e. 
The  tide  rises  6  feet,  and  there  nre  many  spots  in  this  space  with  less  than  10  feet  at  low 
water.  The  shoals  lie  within  one  ntile  of  the  edge  of  the  Bank  ;  they  are  of  quicksand, 
and  of  course,  the  depth  of  water  on  them  must  alter  with  every  gale. 

Should  you  prefer  running  down  the  Cuba  shore,  you  may  steer  S.  W.  after  leaving 

the  Bank,  in  latidute  24°  40',  and  when  sure  of  having  passed  the  Double-headed  Shot, 

haul  a  little  more  southerly,  say  S.  W.  by  S.,  and  make  the  Island  of  Cuba;  this  is  cnllpd 

the  route  by  the  Santaren  Channel,  and  is  at  all  times  preferable.     Keep  down  in  shore 

as  far  as  the  table  land  of  Mariel.  which  cannot  be  mistaken,  when  you  may  run  overN. 

W.,  and  if  not  more  than  24  hours  in  the  Gulf,  you  will  clear  the  Tortugas;  butifjou 

are  a  longer  time  in  crossing,  it  will  be  prudent  to  keep  a  look  out  for  colored  water  and 

the  Tortugas.     The  Pan  of  Matanzas  bearing  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  appears  like  one  round  hill, 

but  at  any  other  bearing  you  will  see  another  each  side  of  it  not  so  high,  and  adjoining 

to  it.     If  you  are  near  in  shore,  on  passing  the  Havana,  you  will  see  the  shipping  in  the 

barbor.  and  the  Moro  Castle  light  may  be  seen  6  leagues  off.     The  table  of  Marieli89 

leagues  from  Havana. 

Providence  PROVIDENCE  N.  W.  CHANNEL,  AND  N.  W.  EDGE  OF  THE  GREAT 

N.  W.Chan-   BAHAMA  BANK. — As  vessels  drawing  over  13  feet  water  cannot  cross  the  Great 

nel,  and  N      Bahama  Bank,  from  the  Berry  Islands  to  the  Orange  Keys,  it  is  necessary  to  navigate 

W.  Edge  of    along  the  edge  to  the  north  of  the  Isaacs,  and,  doubling  them,  go  as  far  south  as  the 

tk«  Great        Orange  Keys;  the  best  course  is,  when  up  with  the  Hole-in-the-wall,  to  steer  W. }  N., 

Bank.  95  miles,  which  will  carry  you  to  the  west  edge  of  the  Bank,  and  about  4  miles  from 


UPPl^P 


^^ 


i^lp 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


256 


the  Little  Isaac,  ta''ing  care  to  keop  in  12  or  16  fathoms,  in  which  you  ought  to  pass  2 
miles  from  the  CiOat  Isaac;  then  shnpe  your  course  through  the  Gulf,  exercising  the 
utmost  cnre  so  as  not  to  get  far  out  from  the  edge  of  soundings,  because  the  moment 
you  leave  the  edge,  and  get  into  blue  wiUer,  you  will  be  in  the  general  current,  or  Gulf 
Stream,  which  sets  strongly  to  the  noithward;  therefore,  if  the  wind  does  not  permit 
iteering  along  the  edge  of  the  Bank,  you  ought  to  anchor  on  it,  imd  wait  till  the  wind  be 
fgvoriible.  He  who  has  no  experience  in  this  place,  ought  not  to  puss  beyond  the  Great 
Isaac  by  night,  but  may  anchor  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  centre  of  the  island,  in  from  7  to  10 
fathoms,  on  sand,  and  wait  for  daylight. 

To  run  along  the  edge  of  these  banks,  you  have  to  attend  to  the  tend,  and  keep  an 
unusually  strict  lookout,  as  the  Gingerbread  Ground,  in  the  neighburhuod  of  the  Little 
Isaac,  makes  up  at  once  from  deep  water,  with  which  guide,  and  the  notice  we  have 
given,  you  will  have  sufficient  information  to  enable  you  to  avoid  hII  danger.  On  the 
edge  of  soundings,  although  you  do  not  feel  the  general  current,  yet  there  is  a  set  of  the 
tide,  which  may  either  run  a  vessel  otf  the  edge,  or  upon  the  keys ;  but  this  cannot  hap- 
pen if  the  lead,  which  ought  to  be  kept  constantly  going,  is  properly  attended  to,  as  it 
ffill  warn  whether  to  keep  to  starboard  or  lurbonrd,  in  order  to  preserve  the  proper 
deptb.    In  passing  you  will  pass  Little  Isaac,  Great  Isaac,  Bernini  Isles,  and  Gun  Key 

liglit. 

THE  GINGERBRKAD  GROUND  is  a  shoal  of  ten  miles  in  extent,  in  an  E.  S.  E. 
and  W.  N.  W.  direction,  and  varying  in  width  from  one  to  four  miles.  It  is  full  of  rocky 
heads,  with  as  little  as  6  feet  water.  The  S.  E.  point  is  in  lat.  26°  50',  long.  78°  34', 
and  bears  W.  4°  S.,  78  miles,  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall.  The  N.  W.  point  is  in  lat.  '26° 
56',long.  78°  44',  and  bears  E.  13°  S..  74  miles,  from  the  Eastern  Little  Isaac.  Between 
itand  the  Little  Isaac  is  broken  ground  ;  the  shoal  is  about  one  and  a  quarter  mile  withm 
tiie  edge  of  the  Bank. 

The  Little  Isaacs  are  three  small  rocky  keys,  running  in  an  E.  S.  E.  direction  ;  the 
Eastern  one,  which  is  11  feet  high,  is  in  bit.  28°  58'  30",  long.  78°  51'  30".  The  N.  W. 
Key  bears  from  the  Eastern  one,  W.  27°  N.,  3  miles,  E.  7°  S.,  one  and  a  half  mile. 
Tliere  is  a  rock  a-wash  at  high  water.  There  is  anchorage  on  the  Bank,  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Isaacs,  but  which  you  must  have  daylight  and  the  Chart  before  you  to  run 
for. 

THE  BROTHERS,  which  are  two  small  rocky  keys,  bear  W.  28°  N.,  7  miles,  from 
the  Little  Isaacs.     The  bank  is  clear,  and  good  navigation  between  them  and  the  Isaacs. 

THK  GREAT  ISAAC,  which  is  40  feet  high,  isin  lat.  26°  0-2'  N.,  long.  79°  6'  30". 
N.  E.  of  it,  li  mile,  is  a  rock  12  feet  high;  and  in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction,  one  mile  from 
the  rock,  there  are  3  fathoms.  To  the  south  of  the  Great  Isaac,  fur  some  distance,  there 
is  good  anchorage,  much  bettor  than  to  the  northward;  as  the  only  thing  to  be  dreaded 
in  anchoring  is  a  sudden  change  of  wind  to  the  northward;  and  in  that  case  you  have 
plenty  of  room  to  drift  or  get  under  way,  which  is  not  the  case  to  the  north  of  the  Great 

THE  HEN  AND  CHICKENS  bear  W.  53°  S.,  31  miles,  from  the  Great  Isaac, 
and  are  three  small  Keys  on  a  bank  of  one  mile  in  extent  in  that  direction  :  from  these 
to  the  lieiniiii  Island,  the  bank  is  clear,  with  the  exception  of  the  INIoselle  Shoal, 

TIU']  .MOSELLE  SHO\L,  of  6  feet,  bears  from  the  north  point  of  the  North  Be- 
rnini, N,  -24°  W.,  distance  '2^  miles.     It  is  about  one  mile  in  length,  in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction. 
It  bears  W.  57°  S.,  13  miles  distant,  from  the  Hen  and  Chickens. 
The  llond  here  sets  at  the  rate  of  about  Ij,  and  the  ebb  3  miles  an  hour. 
THE  BEiMlNIS  run  S.20°  W.,  6i  miles.    They  are  low  sandy  keys, two  in  number. 
On  the  southern  one  there  is  a  well.     The  south  point  of  the  South  Bernini  is  in  lat.  25° 
44'  30".  long.  79"  20'.     The  edge  of  the  Bank  is  very  narrow  here,  not  being  over  u  mile 
I  from  tile  keys. 

Tlie  Heniini  Isles  are  low,  with  some  small  trees,  or  rather  bushes,  on  them,  particu- 
larly on  tile  S.  E.  part  of  the  South  Isle.  They  are  the  westernmost  isles  of  the  Great 
;  Bafll(.  Under  the  south  point  there  is  a  bay,  with  some  low  keys  lying  S.  S.  E.  and  S. 
i  E.  of  it,  in  which  you  can  anchor  and  have  shelter  from  winds  at  N.  round  to  S.  E.,  with 
1 4i,  5,  and  6  fathoms,  or  you  can  pass  the  night  here  when  bound  southward.  On  these 
I  keys  and  islands  there  is  some  wood  and  water. 

The  inlet,  or  harbor,  between  the  Beminis,  has  throughout  from  12  and  II  to  10  and  9 
[  feet  at  low  water. 

From  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  Southern  Bernini,  n  chain  of  low  keys  and  rocks,  called 
[the  Turtle  Rocks,  extends  about  3  miles  to  the  south.  Some  of  them  do  not  rise  to  the 
I  level  of  the  water.  Here  the  bank  is  very  steep,  as,  at  the  distance  of  a  pistol  shot,  no 
Iwttom  is  to  be  found,  and  at  the  half  length  of  a  ship,  are  14  and  15  fathoms,  on  sand. 
JBarnett's  Harbor,  a  hole  in  the  bank,  of  24  fathoms,  divides  this  from  a  succeeding  group 
[of  keys,  called  the  Cat  Keys,  which  extend  to  the  south  nearly  to  25°  30'  N. 
I  Prom  the  South  Point  of  the  South  Bemini,  the  bank  runs  S.  4°  E.,  some 64  miles, 
jwhich  brings  you  nearly  up  with  Gun  Key  light. 


The  Ginger- 
bread 
Ground. 


The  Bro- 
thers. 
The  Great 
Isaac. 


The  Hen  and 

Ckickent. 

The  Moselle 
Shoal. 


The  Bemi- 
nis. 


"^WW^Wpi 


'mmmm^ni^ 


""•PWIWIP^B^P^t^liPI 


266 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Gun  Key 

Lighthouse. 


GUN  KEY  LIGHT.— At  250  yards  from  the  southern  extreme  of  Gun  Koy  (n  ^^ 

row  ri(l;;e  of  corn!,  which  sttiiids  on  tlie  western  edge  of  the  Oretit  Bnhania  Bunk)  alight. 

house  hiis  been  erected,  in  '.'3°  34'  30''  north  latitude,  nnd  79°  18' 24"  west  lungitude" 

Its  biiso  is  23  feet  nbove  high  wnter,  nnd  the  hoiglit  of  the  lower  is  55  feet.     The  light 

revolves  once  in  every  minute,  and  miiy  seen  in  all  directions,  except  between  the  benr. 

♦  ings  of  S.  by  W.  j  W.,  and  S.  }  K.,  (magnetic,)  where,  ut  the  distance  of  about  8  miles 

it  will  be  intercepted  by  tlie  Ueinini  Islands.  '  ' 

When  witiiin  5  miles  distance,  vessels  sliould  not  bring  the  hght  to  the  southward  of 

the  S.  K.,  as  the  chain  of  keys  nnd  ret  fs  projects  in  a  curve  to  the  westward,  and  as  they 

lie  within  a  mile  of  the  outer  edge  of  the  bank,  there  might  be  scarcely  time  to  obtajj 

soundings.     The  flood  tide  also  sets  strongly  to  the  eastward  through  the  interviila  of 

HighvaUr.     the  keys,  where  it  is  high  water,  at  full  nnd  change,  at7h.  3Um.,  and  the  tide  rises  three 

feet. 

The  light  being  80  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  it  will  be  visible  in  cleor  weather  at 
the  distance  of  12  miles  to  an  eye  elevated  10  feet. 

13 20  do.  , 

15 40  do. 

27 80  do. 

From  Gun  Key  light,  the  bank  runs  S.  27°   E.,  23  miles,  which  is  up  with  the 
South  Riding  Rock.     From  here  the  edge  of  the  Bank  runs  agnia  to  S.  4°  E.,  19  nijleg 
to  Orange  Keys. 
I  From  ( )nmgB  Keys  you  may  leave  the  bnnk  nnd  enter  the  Gulf,  without  dreodof  the 

I  current,  steering  ns  before  directed  for  the  Double-headed  Shot  Keys.  Or  you  may  from 

the  Riding  Rocks  steer  for  the  Salt  Key  Bank,  navigating  along  its  edge,  and,  as  it  were 
having  doubled  the  western  angle,  steer  for  the  const  of  Cuba ;  but  to  do  this  it  is  ne- 
cessnry  to  steer  from  the  Riding  Rocks  S.  S.  W.,  nnd  sail  more  than  4  miles  the  hour 
and  ns  one  is  not  master  of  the  winds,  if  it  should  be  calm,  you  will  be  in  danger  of  drift- 
ing  to  the  north,  a  thing  you  should  by  nil  means  guard  against,  on  which  account  we  con- 
sider the  navigation  by  the  Santaren  Channel  ns  preferable. 

This  navigation,  wh'  *•  we  have  just  described,  is  not  in  common  practised  by  those 
bound  from  Europe  to  .i!avann,  or  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  as  it  oflfers  no  ndvantn^e  over 
that  of  the  old  channel,  or  that  to  the  south  of  Cuba,  which  is  more  direct ;  but  it  may 
be  well  for  vessels  from  the  United  States,  and  for  those  who,  driven  out  of  the  Bnhania 
Channel,  by  calms  or  accident,  wish  to  avoid  the  long  circuitof  gaining  sufficient  east  lonir- 
gitude  to  make  Point  Maysi  and  return  to  Havana  by  the  old  channel. 

From  the  south,  say  5  or  6  miles,  of  the  Orange  Keys,  steer  S.  W.  i  W.,  80  miles, 
which  wil'  bring  you  up  with  the  light  on  the   Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  and  from 
thence,  if  bound  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  steer  W.  by  S.,  which  puts  the  current  on 
your  larboard  bow,  steering  a  little  more  south,  if  night,  that  you  may  make  the  FLO- 
'  RIDA  REEF  in  the  daylight.     After  making  the  reof  you  steer  the  following  courses, 

as  shown  on  the  Chart  published  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt,  of  the  Florida  Ropf. 

The  floating  light,  bearing  W.  |  S.  41  to  5  miles  distant,  steer  S.  W.  by  S„  19  miles, 
thence  S.  W.  ^  W.  29^  miles,  then  W.'S.  W.  Al\  miles,  when  the  West  Samlmes  Key 
will  bo  north  of  you,  2j  miles  distant;  from  thence  W.  |  S.  will  carry  you  up  with  the 
"'  west  end  of  the  reef. 

N.  B.  The  greatest  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  steering,  and  the  log,  in  runningthese 
courses  and  distances. 

West  of  the  meridian  of  Key  West  there-is  often  a  westerly  current  12  miles  in  width, 
south  from  the  reef. 

SOUTHERN  BORDER  OF  GREAT  BAHAMA  BANK.— Key  Verde  is  the 
south-easternmost  key  of  the  Great  Bahama  Bank,  in  Int.  22°.  It  is  only  a  tnilenmU 
half  in  length,  and  about  two  cables'  length  broad,  extending  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  V,, 
and  is  destitute  of  fresh  woter.  From  this  key  the  edge  of  the  bank  extends  W.  S.  \V., 
11  leagues,  to  the  Key  of  St.  Domingo,  in  the  mouth  of  the  Bahama  Channel.  The 
ground  between  Key  Verde  nnd  St.  Domingo's  Key  is  generally  clean;  but  there  are 
two  shoals  :  one  at  13  miles  from  Key  Verde,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank,  is  called  St.  Vin- 
cent's, and  does  not  exceed  a  cable's  length  in  extent  from  N.  N.  W.  to  S.  S.  E.,  by  hiilf 
a  cable  at  its  greatest  breadth,  with  only  3  feet  over  it;  the  second  shoal  is  also  on  the 
edge  of  the  bank,  9  miles  from  St.  Vincent's,  and  22  from  Key  Verde:  it  is  forraeilof  | 
rocks,  is  not  so  large  as  the  former,  and  has  one  fathom  over  it. 

The  Key  of  St.  Domingo  is  arid  :  it  is  a  cable's  length  long,  and  half  a  one  broad,  ( 
its  middle  forms  a  small  hill,  covered  with  the  Indian  fish-bush,  which  looks  like  an  u|jset 
vessel,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues.     A  breaker  extends  from  the 
S.  S.  W.  side  to  the  distance  of  three  leagues;  and  W.  by  S.  from  its  middle,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  two  or  three  cables,  there  is  a  bank  of  G  and  7  fathoms,  with  very  clear  wnter,  j 
where  shelter  from  the  breezes  may  be  found. 

On  the  southern  part  of  the  bonk,  to  the  westward  of  the  Key  of  St.  Domingo,  thereis  I 
no  particular  object  which  is  not  sufficiently  described.    The  only  spots  above  water  an 


Southern 
Border  of 
Great  Baha 
ma  Bank. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


967 


__j  two  keys  called  LoboB,  on  which  there  ia  a  beacon  20  feet  high,  anil  Guincho,  o\  Wolf 
I'nd  Ginger  Keys,  both  of  which  have  foul  ground  obout  them,  from  north  round  by  east 
to  south,  80  that,  in  these  directions,  they  should  not  bo  approached  nearer  than  a  mile.     ' 
Both  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  6  or  8  miles.     The  shoal  grounds  named  the  Muca-  '■ 

pi9,  which  are  about  20  miles  to  the  south-eastward  of  Lubos,  have  weeds  or  grass  at  the 
bottom,  and  it  is,  therefore,  requisite  to  notice  that  the  water  on  them  remains  as  dark 
colored  as  in  tho  mid-channel.  Without  them  are  no  soundings,  and  they  should,  there- 
fora,  be  approached  with  great  caution,  for  without  this  n  vessel  may  easily  be  lost,  even 
in  daylight.  On  the  very  edge  of  the  bank,  between  Lobos  and  Guincho,  there  are  some 
oilier  iihoal  spots;  and  vessels  of  great  draught  should  not  venture  upon  the  bank.  There 
are.  likHwise,  some  rocky  spots  to  the  westward  of  Guincho,  so  that  caution  here  is  also 
required. 

ANGUILA,  or  salt  key  bank — This  bank  lies  opposite  the  western  end  of  Anguila, 
the  Old  Channel  of  Bahama,  between  the  Great  Bank  of  Bahama  and  the  Island  of  Cuba, 
and  foims  the  channels  of  Santaren  and  St.  Nicholas,  the  former  on  its  N.  E.,  and  the 
latter  on  its  south  side. 

At  the  north-western  extremity  of  the  Salt  Key  Bank,  on  the  elbow,  or  north-western- 
niostnnil  highest  of  the  narrow  ridgo  of  detached  biirren  rocks,  commonly  known  as  the 
Doubln-lieaded  Shot  Keys,  a  lighthouse  has  been  erected  in  25°  56'  23"  N.  latitude,  and  Lighthouu. 
80»  'iT  38"  W.  longitude. 
Its  base  is  46  feet  above  high  water,  and  the  height  of  the  tower  is  54  feet. 
Theli^ht  is  fixed,  and  maybe  seen  in  all  directions,  except  on  the  bearing  of  S.  W.  by 
W,  i  W.,  (magnetic,)  when,  at  the  distance  of  about  9  miles,  it  will  be  interrupted  by 
Wiiter  Key. 

From  the  lighthouse,  the  south-westernmost  of  the  Double-headed  Shot  Keys  bearB 
S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  (magnetic,)  distant  3^  miles. 

The  Florida  Stream  is  generally  found  to  set  strongly  lo  the  N.  E.,  within  a  mile  and 
a  liiilt' of  these  rocks,  but  through  the  intervals  of  the  keys,  the  ebb  and  flood  tides  run 
1  rapidly  olf  and  on  the  bank.     It  is  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  9  o'clock;  the  tide    Highvmttr. 
\  rises  from  2  to  3  feet. 

Tho  light  being  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  it  will  be  visible  in  clear  weather 
I  at  the  distance  of  14  miles  to  an  eye  elevated  10  feet. 
15i  '*  ••  •'  20    " 

17i  ••  "  "  40    '* 

29     "  "  ••  80    " 

The  following  description  of  this  bank  is  by  Mr.  De  Mayne,  who  surveyed  it  in  1825: 
"Its  greatest  extent  is  from  N.  W.  to  S.  E.,  about  20?  leagues,  and  the  broadest  part 
{is  nbout  12  leagues.  Its  western  edge  is  bounded  by  a  chain  of  barren  rocks,  called  the 
Uoublo-headed  Shot  Keys,  the  north-westernmost  of  which,  called  Elbow  Key.  lies  in 
latitude  23^  55'  N.,  and  longitude  80°  25'  30"  W.  From  this  point  they  extend  to  tho 
N.  E.  by  E.,  in  rather  a  circular  direction,  9  miles  to  Water  Key,  which  is  the  largest  of 
tliiHchiiin.  being  nearly  2  miles  in  length,  and  about  half  a  mile  broad.  Near  the  centre 
lofihisktty.  and  close  to  a  good  bout  landmg-place,  on  the  south  side,  is  a  natural  well  of 
[fresh  water,  formed  by  a  hole  in  the  rock. 

'Opposite  Water  Key,  as  well  as  all  these  chains  of  rocks,  on  the  south,  or  bank  side, 
Itliere  is  good  anchorage,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  at  any  distance  from  them,  and  good 
I  holding  ground;  and  from  these  rocks  being  so  closely  connected,  they  form  a  complete 
[breakwater  against  the  winds  from  the  W.,  N.  W.,  N.,  and  N.  E.  quarters,  which  some- 
[liaies  blow  with  groat  violence,  particularly  in  the  months  of  February  and  March.  The 
jwinu  tVum  any  other  quarter  seldom  blows  stronger  than  what  may  be  termed  a  brisk 
jgiilo. 

'From  abreast  of  Water  Key,  the  bank  trends  to  E.  N.  E-  about  8  or  9  leagues,  and 
jthenci)  S.  K.  by  S.  to  tlio  Angnihi  Islands,  a  distance  of  about  134  leagues.  In  this  sjiace 
ItlierB  are  several  clusters  of  rocks,  rugged  and  barren,  some  of  which  are  very  little  above 
Itiirt  sea,  situated  at  about  4  miles  within  the  edge  of  tho  bank,  forming  channels  or  pas- 
Isiiges  to  the  bank,  which  appear  safe  to  sail  through.  They  are  distant  from  each  other 
Jfroiu  1  lo  10  miles.  On  examining  the  four  westernmost  of  these  passages,  there  was  not 
Ifiiiiiul  loss  than  5  fathoms  water;  the  bottom  very  rocky,  until  you  get  well  on  the  bauk. 
|Sliips  should  be  cautious  not  to  approach  too  near  these  clusters  of  rocks;  the  deepest 
Fiitor  will  be  found  by  keeping  as  near  mid-channel  as  possii)le. 
"The  S.  E.  extremity  of  the  Anguila  Islands  is  in  latitude  '23"  29'  40"  N.,  and  longi- 
Me7n°  -iT  40"  W.  The  north-westernmost  of  the  Dog  Rocks,  in  latitude  24°  4'  10", 
and  longitude  79°  50'  W.  A  dangerous  shoal  is  represented  near  Wie  eastern  edge  of  the 
biink,  ia  latitude  23°  46^' ;  but  tliis.  with  the  various  keys  near  the  edge,  and  rocky  heads 
In  the  interior  of  the  bank,  will  be  best  understood  by  inspecting  the  chart. 

"K(\y  Sal  is  situated  near  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  the  bank,  and  distant  from  the  El- 
bow Key  of  tlie  Double-headed  Shots  about  4^  leagues.  This  island  is  of  a  triangular 
kkpe,  and  about  li  mile  in  length,  having  an  excellent  salt  pond  in  \t»  centre,  the  pro- 

17 


mm 


tmmmm 


^mm 


258  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

dure  of  which  is  of  tho  finest  quality.  The  centre  of  this  key  is  in  latitude  230  40/  vj 
and  loHKitude  80°  aoj'  W.  Noiirly  pnst  from  Key  Stil,  distant  24  railas,  is  asninJI  sIk,  i| 
even  witli  the  water's  edge,  eiilJed  LnvtindurHs;  and  in  a  north- west  direction  fruinthiT 
same  liey,  about  4  miles,  is  nnothorsinikll  slioid,  also  oven  with  the  water's  edge,  |j  ,j 
these  dangers  can  be  seen  at  all  times,  in  the  day,  at  a  sufhcient  di  tnnco  to  avoid  thi'mJ 

"The  general  depths  un  the  interior  of  thu  bunk,  those  on  the  rocky  heads  excei)telJ 
are  from  4  to  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms.  ' 

Tides.  "The  tides  on  the  west  piutof  the  bank,  being  much  influenced  by  the  Gulf  Stionmj 

run  in  various  directions.  'JMie  flood  sets  strong  through  all  the  openings,  or  Ijorwi.^f 
the  rocks,  towards  the  centre  of  ilitt  bank,  and  the  ebb  contrary.  It  is  hi|;h  wiiter  oJ 
full  and  ciiange  (lays,  at  Anguila  Island,  at  three-quarters  after  8,  and  nt  Water  [slaiii|,|l 
9  o'clock.  Spring  tides  generally  rise  3  feet  4  inches,  neaps  2  feet  3  inches;  but  iniK-ir 
dependaon  the  wind."  ] 

The  Derrotero  says.  Key  Sal  may  be  discovered  nt  the  distance  of  10  miles,  and  fr,.,J 
water  may  be  procured  on  it  with  facility,  although  there  is  not  any  on  Anguila,  or  1 
other  keys  in  its  vicinity.     This  bank  has  three  rocky  shoals  upon  it,  as  shuwu  in  th^ 
charts;  but  vessels  may  navigate  u|>on  it  without  danger  in  7^,  8,  and  9  fatliuuiH  wiuorj 
in  all  the  months  from  Octol)er  to  May.     Whiuiever  the  appearance  of  tho  sky  iiKJiciitei, 
vf    »  hard  north,  it  is  advisable  to  enteron  tho  bank,  and  anchor  under  tho  shelttT  of  the  k^.y^ 

or  you  may  lie  to  there,  being  careful  only  to  make  use  of  the  load,  until  the  wind  clianJeJ 
so  as  to  enable  you  to  proceed.  "  T 

The  current  does  not  always  set  through  Nicholas  Channel  to  the  westward,  but  n  reJ 
ulur  tide  of  ebb  and  flood  prevails  throughout;  the  flood  setting  eastward,  und  thu  ebb  wmJ 
ward,  at  the  rate  of  alrout  one  mile  in  an  hour.  [ 

In  the  Santaren  Chaimel,  between  the  (ireat  Bank  of  Bahama  and  the  Salt  Koy  ]]wA 
there  is  said  to  be  rarely  any  current,  unless  aftor  heavy  gales,  when  it  runs  with  "ivij 
violence  up  and  down,     if  it  |)redominate8  in  one  direction  more  than  another,  it  is  tdtln 
N.  N.  W.,  and  about  one  mile  an  hour. 

DeBcrij'tion  of  the  Southern  and  Eastern  Coasts  of  East  Florida,    . 

Torlugas  Isl-      TORTUGAS  ISLANDS. — On  the  southern  edge  of  soundings,  which  extend  oi 
ands.  the  western  coast  of  tho  promontory  or  peninsula  of  East  Florida,  are  10  or  11  ki'vsi)! 

small  islands,  called  the  Tortugas  Itijands,  which  is  the  westernmost  land,  and  wliidin 
nounces  the  proximity  of  the  (ieiiural  Florida  Reef,  which  terminates  the  soutbi'rii  i;i| 
of  soundings,  and  which  continues  to  the  east,  doubling  the  above  mentioned  pruuiunturyl 
and  extends  to  Cape  Florida.  ' 

The  Tortugas  (otten  called  the  Dry  Tortugas)  are  generally  looked  upon  to  be  very 
dangerous,  and  to  a  person  unac(|uainted  with  them,  they  undoubtedly  are  so,  especiillil 
in  the  night  time;  yet,  when  they  are  known,  on  many  occasions,  they  may  be  fuuDjI 
both  useful  and  convenient.  They  extend  east  and  west  9  miles,  and  north  and  siiuihq 
miles,  and,  although  very  low,  can  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  12  miles,  being  covnri'dwiii 
bushes:  you  should  not  come  nearer  them  than  6  miles,  as  they  have  some  ruclty  $p J 
which  extend  that  distance  from  them. 

To  the  west  there  is  a  large  bank  of  coral  rocks,  intermixed  with  white  pntcliesol 
sand,  on  which  the  soundings  are  irregular;  but  as  the  bottom  shows  itself  very  pliiJDlr] 
there  is  no  danger.      This  bank  is  of  an  oblon;;  form,  and  between  it  and  tho  Tuiiu;! 
Islands  there  is  a  clear  channtd  of  three  miles  wide,  with  soundings  from  13  to  ITliii 
cms  water. 

The  Tortugas  are  situated  N.  14°  W.,  true,  about  30  leagues  from  tho  nearest  parijl 
Cuba,  the  table  laud  of  Mariel.  and  14  leagues  from  tho  westernmost  of  the  Kloriiiii  K-i 
The  S.  W.  key,  which,  though  one  of  the  smiiliest,  is  tho  most  material  to  he  kmwd 
is  in  lat.  24°  36'.     A  reef  of  coral  rocks  runs  olf  it  S.  W.  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  on  wiutij 
the  water  is  discolored. 

If  you  are  bound  to  the  eastward,  and  meet  with  a  strong  easterly  gale,  which  isfrfJ 
quent  there  in  the  summer  st-ason,  you  may  saftdy  come  to  an  anchor  in  5  or  (i  tiilliwinl 
about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  olf  shore,  under  the  Ice  of  the  long  sandy  island  to  tliHi.n 
ward  of  the  South-west  Key.     There  is  a  good  anchonigo,  also,  in  several  other  pWsi 
particularly  in  a  small  but  snug  harbor,  near  Bush  Key,  which  is  entirely  slioltercil  I'nJ 
tin;  sea  by  a  large  reef  of  rocks,  and  a  flat  shoal  within  them,  about  half  a  inilKbroi 
the  bottom  is  soft  clay  and  mud       This  harbor  is  quite  smooth,  even  in  a  gale  i)f\riii( 
and  in  case  of  necessity  a  vessel  might  easily  bo  hove  down  there,  as  there  are  3  fathoi 
water  close  to  the  bank.      There  is  no  drinkable  water  to  be  got  on  any  of  the  Tortiisi 
except  on  the  northernmost  island:  nor  is  there  any  fire-wood,  except  a  few  Uh 
r  which  it  were  a  pity  to  cut  down,  as  they  serve  to  distinguish  the  keys  at  a  distance; 

the  Tortugas  abound  with  a  variety  of  se.'  birds,  turtle,  and  excellent  fish. 

There  is  a  channel  of  17  miles  in  width  between  the  eastern  key  and  the  wcsteoil^ 
the  Florida  Reef.     Thirteen  and  a  quarter  miles  from  the  Eastern  Key,  in  an  E,  6'^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


869 


uthur,  it  istdtlij 


l&ection,  thore  iBashoRl  of  12  feet,  offtbout  4  of  nmilo  in  extent.    Bush  Kny  lif(bt  benn  ^  , 

Ifest  from  tliH  ahonl,  17.i  miles  distant.     This  is  the  only  danger;  with  cnro,  iind  seeins  , 

Itbe  I'ch'' ''  '^  "  channel  wtiich  should  be  taken  by  daylight  in  preference  to  going  round        / 

Le  Tortusiis:  the  chart  makes  it  perfectly  safe. 

I  Cnyo  Marquese  is  a  very  dangerous  and  extensive  bank  of  quicksand,  on  every  part  of 

Uliicl)  yoii  )*'>VH  no  more  tlian  4  or  5  feet  water.     It  is  of  n  riMnm'kablo  white  color,  es- 

Ipfciiilly  <ill  aionuthe  north  edge,  and  may  easily  be  seen  and  avoided  in  the  day  time. 

Tlie  'ii'"  between  the  Tortugae  and  Cnyo  Marquese  sets  variably  through  tlio  north- 
Itnnl.  and  obbs  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  about  3  or  3i  feet,  by  the  shore. 

Tlio  proximity  of  the  Florida  Keef  is  shown  clearly  in  the  day  time  by  tlio  wliitcnoss 

ofllie  water,  so  that  there  can  be  no  danger  in  drawing  in  withi  it;  but  if  safe  l)y  day,  it 

I  guilt  80  by  night,  nor  in  bad  weather,  when  you  should  carefully  avoid  it,  and  be  sure  to 

litiep  the  lend  going,  bv  which  means  you  can  avoid  danger  at  the  distance  of  two  miles 

froin  the  edges  of  the  keys  or  reefs. 

I  111  passing  the  pronmntory  of  Florida  it  is  not  this  reef  alone  which  you  see,  but  an  in- 
DUinenilile  quantity  of  keys  and  islands,  raised  upon  a  bank  north  of  it. 
On  13u»h  Key  (Garden  Key)  one  of  the  Dry  Tortugas,  is  a  lighthouse,  elevnted  70  Lighthoute. 
feet  iilxivu  the  level  of  the  sen,  showing  a  fixed  light,  nnd  can  be  seen  when  a  vcssd  is  on 
fi,(,rf,  find  is  without  doubt  the  worst  kept  light  on  the  coast.  It  can  be  appioaclu'd  with- 
,„3  miles  on  the  west  and  east  sides,  but  on  the  S.  W.  you  should  keep  at  the  distance 
L|  8  miles,  as  there  is  a  shoni  of  11  feet,  of  about  300  feet  in  length,  in  a  N.  by  E.  and  S. 
y  \V.  direction,  bearing  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  Ti  miles  from  the  light. 

BANKS  AND  CJAST  OF  FLORIDA.— Seventfsen  and  a  half  miles  to  the  east-    Bankt  and 
Unru  "*  tlie  easternmost  Tortugas,  is  placed  the  west  edge  oftho  bank,  called  the  Mar-    Coast  of  Flo- 
qiieje  linii!:,  and  15  miles  farther  east  are  placed,  on  this  bank,  the  key  called  Marquese    rida. 
Uev,  whicii  8  the  westernmost  of  a  group,  of  which  tlio  northernmost  is  called  IJoca 
Griiiiiie  Key;  this  key  is  the  largest  of  the  group,  and  is  near  six  miles  east  nnd  west. 
].\lK)Ut  one  mile  to  the  eastward  of  this  key  the  first  bank  ends,  whose  eastern  edge  runs 
Lhuiit  nortli  and  south.      Tho  first  bank  is  sojiarated  from  the  following  by  a  chiinnel  of 
livo  miles  wide,  with  10  or  12  feet  water,  sandy  bottom.     This  channel  is  called  Boca 
Gmiiile,  but  no  man  who  is  not  well  acquainted,  should  ever  attempt  to  take  the  channel, 
listliero  are  some  shoals  in  it. 

Tiio  seeond  bank,  called  the  Mangrove  Islands,  is  like  the  first,  upon  which  is  raised  a 
lixirtion  (if  irtiniids,  of  which  the  three  southernmost  have  white  sandy  beaches.  This  sec- 
|oml  Imnk  may  be  viewed  as  distinct  from  the  following,  although  they  are  united  on  their 
Inorthern  part  by  on  isthmus  of  half  a  mile  wide  :  otherwise  they  are  separated  by  a  chan- 
iDei  of  1  mile  in  breadth,  which  contains  from  10  feet  to  12  fathoms  water,  low  tide. 

Tiie  tliiril  bank  is  tiiat  of  Key  West  and  the  Pine  Islands,  at  the  western  part  of  which 
Ijtiscnlled  by  the  former,  and  at  the  eastern  by  the  latter  name. 

A  lit;litliouse  is  built  on  Key  West,  containing  a  fixed  light,  and  a  number  of  buoys  are    Lighthau»e, 
Iplsced.  viz: 

A  wliito  buoy,  showing  3  feet  above  the  water,  and  on  the  reef,  in  2fi  feet  water,  bear- 
iiQcfi'din  tho  lightliouse  on  Whitehead  I'oint  S.  S.  E.,  and  from  the  lighthouse  on  Sand 
iKey,  E.  by  N.  i  N. 

A  while  buoy,  showing  3  feet  above  water,  moored  in  27  or  28  feet,  and  bearing  S.  S. 
IW.  1  U.  fi'om  the  lighthouse  on  Whitehend  Point,  [Key  West,]  near  the  dry  rocks 
Iwhicli  lie  to  tiie  west  of  .Sand  Key,  to  show  the  west  channel  into  Key  West. 

The  first  island  on  its  western  edge,  is  Key  Wost.  which  lies  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  ^., 
lli  miles  ill  length,  N.  and  S.  2  miles  in  breiidtli,  and  about  56  miles  from  tlie  iniiiii  liiud  of 
iFluriiiii,  nnd  its  southern  coast  is  very  sandy.  This  island  is  covered  with  trees,  especially 
Ion  Its  western  part,  in  which  there  is  a  secure  aiichornge,  with  a  chnnnel  of  4i  latlioms 
Tto  enter  it,  nnd  2i  fnthoms  within,  well  sheltered.  To  enter  this  chnnnel  you  must  ob- 
jeeive  the  following  diroctioiis,  viz: — In  running  niong  the  Gulf  .Stream  you  must  not  at- 
llempt  to  |)iiss  the  reef,  which  is  about  six  miles  from  the  island,  until  you  bring  Whitehead 
Pdiiit  lislithouso,  which  is  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  tho  island,  and  which  exliibits  a  fixed 
di;;lir.  to  l)enr  N.  N.  W.;  then  steer  for  the  harlior,  which  lies  nt  the  N.  W.  point,  leav- 
ing Sand  Key  lighthouse,  which  exhibits  a  rc^vdving  light,  on  your  larboard  hand,  as  you 
jiuis  liie  reef,  and  taking  care  to  give  Whitehead  Point  a  berth  of  one  mile  on  account  of 
ireef  tliiit  makes  off  from  it.  The  lighthouse  on  Sand  Key  bears  from  Key  West  lisht- 
|iuu8o,  S.  S.  W.,  nine  miles  distant.  After  you  pass  the  reef  (nt  the  inner  edge  of  which 
lliuoy  lias  been  placed,  as  before  mentioned,)  haul  up  for  the  flag-staff.  You  will  have 
bi  tu  4  fatlioins  water  crossing  the  reef,  and  then  from  (i  to  7  fathoms  until  you  enter  the 
Diirbor,  where  you  may  anchor  with  perfect  safety.  There  is  a  powerful  tide  here,  rising 
nd  fulling  about  4  to  5  feet,  and  setting  alternately  N.  E.  and  S.  W. 
Sand  Key  lighthouse  was  blown  down  in  164() — not  yet  rebuilt. — July,  1850.  ' 

Tlieio  is  a  passage  through  Key  West  from  Florida  Stream,  into  the  Bay  of  Mexico, 
or  vessels  drawing  12  feet,  ut  low  water.    This  passage  is  about  6  miles  in  extent,  and 


wmmmtmrn 


'anl 
IbJ 


260  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

,  Tesatds  by  pauing  through  it,  save  the  danger  and  dolny  of  going  round  thn  Dry  forti^ 

giiB,  which  nru  a  group  uf  ten  distinct  iHliindii  or  kuya,  lying  otFthu  went  coniit  oi  Ku 
Florida,  li>w,  aome  covered  with  niiingrovoH,  aurrounded  with  reelH  itnd  Hiind-hnnka  ex. 
tending  N.  K.  iind  S.  W.  10  or  11  nilloH,  and  from  eiiat  to  weat  8  inilnN,  and  may  be  •eeJ 
at  the  ihutiince  of  4  leaguea.  Oood  pilotn  can  l)o  obtiiitiod  at  Key  Weat,  to  carry  vosinJ 
tlir(iu)!l).  The  liarbor  is  largo  and  commodiiiUH,  admitting  voHaeJH  of  the  iurgi^Ht  rlu  J 
where  ihuy  aro  protected  from  nil  winda  within  'JOO  yarda  of  the  N.  W.  point  uf  tlm  i  U 
and,  iind  aeverul  ponda  of  freah  water,  which  tor  ninu  moutha  in  the  year  produce  excel 
lent  water.  T 

From  Key  Weat  eaatwurd  for  24  milea,  there  are  nothing  hut  low  mangrove  ialnndJ 
in  wluiae  channela  nothing  but  canoea  can  paaa.  Thia  third  bank  terminated  at  |]„|,J 
Honda,  and  the  itthinda  to  the  vaalward  areaomewhat  larger,  and  covered  with  piimt|.gj 
but  are  low  and  drowned  like  the  othern,  and  their  channela  are  navigable  only  for  |)(,uJ 
Of  the  whideof  theae  ialanda  there  ia  but  one,  which  in  13  milea  from  Key  VVest,  wJiiciJ 
although  amall,  ia  of  tolerable  height,  ia  rimgh  and  covered  with  treea,  and  in  wimiovel 
direi'tiiin  you  aee  it,  appeara  in  the  form  of  a  aaddle. 

Olf  liahia  Honda  a  buoy  ia  placed,  in  '27  feet  water,  bearing  north,  when  Looe  Ki>< 
Beacon  will  bear  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  ' 

'  'riie  next  bunk  in  called  Kahia  Knnda,  aeparatod  from  the  last  by  a  channel  of  half  ninilJ 

wide,  which  channel  is  called  Bahiu  Honda,  and  in  which  there  ia  anchorage  in  3  iuk)  J 
fathomH.  Thia  channel  is  ea^iily  known,  because  on  its  western  part,  and  on  tlie  veJ 
eastern  part  of  the  last  bank  of  Key  West  and  Pine  Islands,  there  are  three  Hinall  iHlnndd 
and  on  its  eastern  part,  upon  thia  fourth  bank  of  llahin  Honda,  there  is  one  called  I'uln 
Island,  wliich  ia  large,  and  hna  a  sandy  beach,  and  is  remarkable  by  the  nniny  liidi  piiliy 
trees  with  which  it  ia  covered,  and  are  the  tirat  you  aee  coming  from  the  wentwan 
This  bank  uf  iiahia  Honda  haa  but  few  keys,  and  extenda  £.,  about  four  leagues. 

From  the  fourth  the  tifth  follows,  called  Key  Vacas,  orCow  Keys,  extending  to  tiJ 
eastward  about  5  leaguea,  upon  which  bank  a  group  called  by  the  same  name  is  raised 
the  ea^te^l!m(lst  of  which  ia  culled  Dutch  Key,  or  C'ayo  Holandea;  between  this  Iteyi 
Key  Bivoras  ia  one  league.  Thia  key  ia  remarkable  by  its  white  sandy  beach,  aid  b 
tolerable  high  hill  covered  with  trees,  which  is  on  ita  weatern  part. 

Concertini^  the  whole  of  the  channel  to  the  weatward  of  the  Cow  Keys,  it  may  I 
necossnry  to  state  thn  following  remarks,  namely,  that  you  will  have  two  fathoms  wtitJ 
all  the  way  within  a  mile  of  the  key  a,  and  will  always  find  tlio  deepest  water  nearest  tl 
the  reef.  That  the  uaual  method  navigating  between  the  reef  and  the  keys,  is,  toproren 
in  the  day  time,  and  lie  at  anchor  in  the  night;  and  that  ahould  you  be  obliged  tu  Rnchu 
where  there  is  any  coral,  it  will  aometimus  be  necessary  tu  buoy  up  your  cable  to  pieveJ 
ita  being  rubbed. 

From  the  eastern  extreme  of  Key  Bivoras  to  the  weaternmost  part  of  Old  Matpcunih 
is  34  miles.  Old  Matecumbe  ia  4  miles  long  in  the  direftion  of  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  amJiti 
N.  K.  point  is  covered  by  aome  very  high  Iroec,  appearing  like  tahle-hind.  On  Ihenon 
end  ol'Uld  Matecumbe  ia  a  natural  well,  in  a  ruck,  containing  excellent  water. 

One  mil(<  east  of  Old  Matecumbe,  lies  Indian  Key,  to  the  eastward  of  which  there iji 
channel  running  to  the  northward,  with  10  and  I'J  feet  water,  where  by  douljling  tlicNl 
K.  point  uf  Old  Matecumbe,  you  tiuiy  anchor,  sheltered  from  all  winds.  ThischHiinflif 
easily  discovered  by  the  white  shoals  uf  only  2  or  3  feet,  bordering  both  sides  uf  it.  whici 
serve  as  an  excellent  beacon. 

Two  mill's  N.  K.  of  Old  Matecumbe  you  will  find  Little  Matecumbe,  which  in  I 
same  direction  has  4  miles  in  length :  this  key  is  covered  with  high  tre(>9.     OiritsXl 
K.  part  there  is  a  small  mangrove  island,  separated  by  u  channel  of  half  a  niilewjilj 
and  N .  K.  of  the  last  there  is  another,  of  tolerable  size,  separated  by  another  chatiiielufilM 
same  breadth    This  is  also  separated  by  another  channel,  like  the  others,  from  LunsUhv 

N.  K.  from  Long  Island  lies  Key  Largo,  separated  like  the  others  by  a  sniiill  nam^ 
channel.  Nearly  east  from  this  channel,  li  mile,  lies  Key  Tavernior,  tu  the  iiortima! 
of  wliich  there  is  excellent  ancSiorage  for  vessels  drawing  not  over  8  feet  water,  and  isoM 
of  the  anchorages  much  frequented  by  the  fishermen.  About  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Key  'hm 
nier  lies  ihe  Key  Melchor  Rodrigues,  which  is  an  island  of  tolerable  extensiuii,  aiiili 
land  so  spongy  that  the  roots  of  the  trees  are  discftvered. 

A  floating  light  ia  placed  ofi''  Key  Largo,  bearing  from  the  highest  land  on  the  kpjE 
Floating  by  S.,  distant  7  miles;  from  the  elbow  of  Carysfort  Reef,  N.  i   E.,  distant  ,'!  to  4  milt 

Light.  1'l>e  outer  reef  (say  14  fathoms  water)  bears  E.,  distant  2i  miles.     Lat.  25°  V2'  N'  ,Iodj 

80°  10'  20"  W. 

The  coast  runs  from  Melchor  Rodrigues  to  Key  Largo  N.  N.  E.,  N.  by  E.,  nndNJ 
which  last  course  there  are  various  keys  for  aome  distance,  of  which  the  lust  is  culledKej 
*  Biscayno:  and  the  eastern  point  of  which  is  called  Cape  Florida. 

From  Key  Biscayno  to  Hillaborough  Inlet  there  ia  a  narrow  reef,  running 
the  shore,  about  five  miles  distant,  having  on  it,  oii  New  River,  12  feet. 


wm 


mmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


261 


I  Tha  ihorpi  of  this  con»t  nre  lined  with  a  bnnk  of  regular  iioundin)(8,  which  mn  off  «    ' 
J  distance;  this  re«ulnrity  of  BoiindinRs  extends  from  Cnpe  Florida  to  Int.  27°  17' 
ffliere  there  ia  a  shoal  of  15  feet  three  miles  from  the  land;  from  thenoe  to  Ciipe  ; 

jiAVflral  the  noaHt   is  clean.     The  soundings  oti'  Cape  Canaveral,  that  capo  bearing  W. 

fH„  are  55,  75,  and  00  fathoms,  nt  32,  30.  and  ;)9  miles  distance. 

J'Key  Itiscayno  lies  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Florida.     On  it  is  a  lighthouse,  the    Lighlhou$e. 
Ltdrn  elevated  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  exhibits  a  fixed  light. 
I  A  white  buoy,  showing  3   feet  above  water,  is  placed  on   a  roof  near  (Japo  Florida; 
Isoliiiei''*  Koy  bears  from  it  W.  by  N.,  and  Saunders'  Hat  bears  S.  S.  W. 

CiVPE  CAN/VVKRAL  light  is  a  revolving  light,  55  foot  height  of  tower.  Cape   Cana- 

OlTtliis  capo  in  an  K.  by  S.  direction,  8i  miles  distant,  there  are  44  fathoms,  iiisido  2i.    veral  light' 

The  slioals  off  this  cape  is  not  yet  surveyed  ;  a  good  berth  had  belter  bti  given  to  them,    house. 

From  Capo  Canaveral  the  coast  runsN.  W.  byN.,  26  leagues,  to  the  entroiice  of  New 
Ijmyrnn,  wliich  is  barred,  and  only  fit  for  boats  and  launches  ;  the  coast  is  very  clean,  and 
Irouniiiy.  without  danger,  keep  within  two  miles  of  it. 

SevpM  leagues  N.  25°  W.  from  New  Smyrna,  is  the  entrance  to  Matanzus.  but  only  Tides. 
Lfflols  of  very  light  draft  can  enter  it:  this  bar  has  8  feet,  at  high  water.  Frnm  this  en- 
limnce  there  is  m\  inland  navigation  to  St.  Augustine,  formed  by  the  island  of  St.  Aoasta- 
luiiind  the  main.  The  tide  rises  4  feet  at  spring  tides,  and  it  is  hich  water  at  full  and 
IdiaDgeat  7h.  15m.  The  wholo  of  this  piece  of  coast  is  equally  clean  with  the  anterior. 
Ifou  have  8  fathoms  one  league  from  the  land. 

prom  Matan/as  to  .St.  Augustine  is  12  miles,  and  the  Island  of  St.  Anastasia  extends 
jlliewliole  length;  you  may  keep  along  it  at  two  miles  distant,  in  5  and  «J  fathoms.  You 
■tin  see  this  island  from  15  fathoms,  as  it  is  pretty  high,  and  also  diHtinguishod  by  the 
IlijhtlioHse,  showing  a  fixed  light :  the  coast  to  the  northward  is  very  low.  and  you  can 
Le  it  but  a  short  distance,  so  that  it  makes  a  good  mark  to  know  if  you  are  north  or  south 
IrfSt.  Augustine. 

SOUNDINGS  OFF  FLORIDA. 

The  wholo  of  the  coast  from  Cape  St.  Rias.  as  after  mentioned,  sends  off  a  bank  of 
lioanilings  which  stretches  a  long  distance  from  the  land,  and  these  soundings  are  gene- 
Inlly  known  by  the  name  of  Tortugas  soundings,  and  are  so  clean  that  other  danger  is 
Ijot  known  in  the  whole  of  it.  than  a  spot  or  knoll  of  sand  in  lat.  28°  35',  and  lies  about  12 
I  east  of  tho  meridian  of  St.  Bias.*  This  knoll  iiae  but  3  feet  on  it,  and  so  steep  that 
Ifrom  100  fathoms  you  will  be  upon  it,  and  is  probably  what  was  called  in  ancient  charts 
Iprovideiice  Island.  The  whole  of  these  soundings  are  very  equal,  diminishing  gradually 
Ibwai'da  the  shore. 

When  you  enter  on  these  soundings,  without  a  sure  knowledge  of  the  latitude,  and  in 
IparnileiiJ  near  tho  Tortugas,  it  is  necessary  to  run  carefully  to  got  soundings  on  its  edge, 
linil  not  get  into  loss  than  40  or  35  falhonjs,  which  is  a  depth  to  keep  clear  of  the  Tortugas, 
jwliichlie  in  30  (iitlioms  ;  that  is.  if  they  did  not  exist  the  regular  soundings  of  the  bank 
Iwould  be  30  fathoms  where  they  are  placed  ;  ou  the  western  part  of  these  keys  the 
|»undin;is  are  steep. 

i'ou  should  take  the  same  precaution  when  entering  on  soundings  in  parallels  north 
lolthe  Tortugas.  You  should  take  this  same  precaution  when  navigating  to  tho  aouth- 
(ward,  that  you  may  leave  soundings  with  safety  olf  its  southern  edge,  so  that  what  is  said 
hi  sufficient  to  liberate  you  from  all  danger  offered  by  tho  Tortugas. 

Ontlie  edges  of  this  bank  the  waters  run  lively  to  tho  southward,  so  that  when  navigat- 
lingfrom  the  westward,  with  intention  of  sounding  on  its  edge,  the  ship  will  be  retarded 
Iby  the  wind,  which  fixes  itself  at  E.  N.  hi.  or  E.;  but  when  for  two  days  you  experience 
IB  dilTeienco  of  latitude  to  tho  southward  of  20  miles  more  than  account,  you  may  be  sure 
Ithatyouare  in  the  vicinity  of  soundings,  in  which  case  you  may  suppose  yourself  in  the 
Imeridiiin  of  the  edge,  and  calculate  un  error,  if  not  exceeding  30  miles,  and  thence  take  Florida 
your ronte  with  security.  Reef. 

'  FLORIDA  REEF. — To  the  eastward  of  the  Tortugas,  and  ot  the  distance  of  17 
Imiies,  the  Florida  Reef  commences.  Its  breadth  is  about  3  miles,  and  it  preserves  the 
pine,  or  nearly  tlio  same  breadth,  ns  far  as  the  eastern  meridian  of  Boca  Grande,  and 
jtiius  fur  has  at  least  3  fathoms  water  over  it.  You  can  cross  this  portion  of  the  reef  with 
W  ship  of  K!  (net  draft ;  but  you  should  ever  rememl)er.  that  over  White  Shoals  you 
ilffuys  enJaii^jer  the  ship  if  she  is  large,  especially  if  tho  weather  is  thick,  when  the  bot- 
jtoindoes  nut  show  itself  clearly.  You  ma\  in  such  weather  soon  encounter  a  coral 
■iioal  of  otdy  one  f  ithom,  or  even  less ;  so  that  when  wo  say,  that  the  least  water  is  3 
Jfiithoinsoa  this  portion  of  tho  reef,  it  is  because  it  is  so  generally,  and  that  tho  ine(]ualitios 
Kiund  on  the  other  parts  of  the  same  reef  to  the  eastward,  are  not  found  here  on  this  por- 
Itlott  of  it. 

From  tho  eastern  meridian  of  Boca  Grande  tho  navigation  is  safe,  till  within  44  miles 

t'.Sand  Key,  on  which  is  a  lighthouse,  showing  a  revolving  light,   bearing    S.  S.  \V.    LighlhouM.. 

*  It  ia  extremely  doubtful  whether  this  kuoll  exists. 


tJ? 


262 


BLDNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


from  Key  West  light,  distant  9  miles  :  4  miles  from  Sand  Key,  W.  i  S.,  on  the  pufo  I 
edge  of  the  reef,  lies  a  group  of  dry  rocks,  and  N.  E.  by  E.  from  these  rocks  is  nnothn  I 
group  of  dry  rocks,  bettring  N.  from  Sand  Key,  and  between  them,  in  the  sumo  direction  I 
are  two  or  three  shoals  with  only  9  feet  on  them.  One  and  a  half  mile  eiist  from  Siintil 
Key  is  another  group  of  dry  rocks,  on  a  blink  which  extends  4  miles  east  fron)  the  Sun  ll 
:'.     '  Key.  on  wliich  there  are  from  two  to  three  and  a  half  fathoms  water.     Six  niilea  K.  bvN  I 

i  N.froin  Sand  Key  is  a  coral  shoal,  with  3  fathoms  on  it,  between  which  and  .Sand  KevI 
lies  tho  eastern  channel  into  Key  West.     From  this  shoal  the  reef  leads  K.  N.  K,,  andi  I 
very  'langerous,  being  full  of  coral  rocks,  on  which  there  is  as  little  as  10  feet  water  till! 
you  come  up  with  Looe  Key.  on  which  is  a  beacon  with  a  red  ballon  the  top.     OIlLnoe! 
Key  the  bank  is  very  steep.     Sixteen  miles  from  Looe  Key  lies  Sombrero,  wliicli  is  the 
easternmost  key  on  the  reef.     To  the  eastward  of  this  key  is  very  dangerous,  bt'jiKr  g,  J 
up  by  coral  rocks,  with  channels  which  should  only  be  attemjited  througi.  necessity^  iukI 
in  daylight,  as  nothing  is  so  useful  in  the  navigation  of  this  reef  as  a  good  lookout.    S.  S 
W.  to  S.   by  W..  .54    miles  distant  from  Dutc'    Key,  (the  easternmost  of  Cow  Keys' 
.y  are  two  groups  of  dry  rocks.     S.,  4i   miles,  from  the  west  end  of  Old  Mutecuinhe,  ig",',  i 

coral   bank,  with  only  8  feet  on  it.     S.  E.  by  E.,  4i  miles  from   the  eastern  end  of  Oi,! 
Matecumbo,  is  another  shoal,  with  only  2  feet,  calle<l  Alligator  Shoal,  from  the  riicuui- 
stance  of  the  U.  S.  schooner  Alligator  being  lost  on  it,  and  on  which  the  ship  S|)eriiio  was  I 
also  lost.     North  of  Key  Tavernier,  which  is  in  lat.   24°  59',  lies  the  great  inlet  oftlip 
Florida  Reef.     From  this  inlet  the  reef  takes  a  sudden  bend,  and  makes  what  is  culled' 
Carysfort  Reef,  on  which  the  current  sets  very  strong.     From  this  the  reef  trends  N.  \  1 
Lifththouse.     E.  till  up  with  Cape  Florida,  passing  Key  Biscayno,  on  which  is  a  lighthouse  showins  a 
fixed  light.  ^    I 

Cfirysfort  CARVSFORT  REEF. — This  dangerous  reef  has  been  surveyed,  and  the  position  I 

Reef.  of  the  light-ship  determined.     It  is  moored  inside  the  reef,  in  lati  ude  25°  12',  loiioitude 

80° 16' 20".  " 

We  advise  shipmasters  not  to  place  much  reliance  on  this,  oi  any  of  tho  Florida  !i<Thtj 
as  they  are  all  bad. 

Carysfort  Reef,  inside  of  which  there  ia  alight-ship  stationed,  as  described  Ixfore  I 
is  the  most  dangerous  reef  on  the  whole  coast,  the  south  extremity  of  which  is  in  latituila 
24°  5!)'  N..  ami  lies  immediately  olF  Sound  Point. 

In  latitude  25°  35'  N  ,  according  to  Mr.  Bishop,  his  Majesty's  ship  Fowey,  after  losin» 
all  hor  anchors,  beat  over   tho  reef  in  3  fathoms  water,  and  when  within   it,  diil'ted  live  I 
leagues  to  tho  northward  in  5  or  G  fathoms  water  ;  and  was  afraid  of  drifting  out  in  the 
Florida  Stream. 
Thf  Fowey  The  FOWEY  ROCKS,  lie  at  the  north  end  of  tho  roof,   and  are  partly  dry.    The  I 

Bockt.  eastern  edge  of  these   rocks  lies  about  6   miles  to  tho  eastward  of  Key  IJisciiyno:  thov 

have  many  bad  bars  within  tiiem.     Key  Biscayno  hath  also  a  bank  lying  oiriVoin  its  I'nit 
side. 

There  are  several  openings,  or  in  and  outlets,  over  this  reef;  all  of  which  ant  sate  com- 
munications between  the  Hawke  Channel  and  Florida  Streams,  having  a  depth  of  iiDJes,  i 
than  18  f-'et  water.  By  placing  a  bout  on  the  reef  at  those  entrances,  it  will  always  point 
them  out  in  such  a  manner,  that  you  may  be  able  to  enter,  safely,  any  oiii*  of  tiiein,  in 
moderate  weather,  when  want  of  fresh  water,  contrary  wind,  or  any  other  caust^  renders 
this  shelter  necessary.  Two  of  these  inlets,  however,  require  u  little  more  to  be  saidof  | 
thoin  ;  those  are  (ireat  Inlet  and  Spencer's  Inlt  t. 

(jrt'iit  Inlet,  in  25°  04'  latitude,  has  a  knoll  of  dry  rocks  on  the  south-east  paint  iif| 
the  reef,  directly  on  the  edge  of  the  channel,  whereby  it  is  easily  known.  Ilereyuiir 
eye  must  be  your  guide  ;  the  land  may  also  help  a  little,  as  tho  two  small  mangrove  liovj, 
Tavernier  an<l  Rodrigues,  show  themselves  plainly  enough  in  the  west. 

The  soundings  in  both  are  as  iimrkiMl  in  the  chart;  and  to  any  |)ersoii  who  knows  that  I 
in  a  uahi.  bv  reas(/n  of  a  reverting  current,  anchorage  is  full  as  safd  under  a  reel' as  iiiiilHr 
land.  W(i  need  not  enlarge  much  about  the  utility  and  kiiowlediiiMif  these  (dianiii  Is;  iniich 
less  to  a  man  who  is  either  in  want  of  water,  or  who,  upon  falling  in  with  the  sIiomIs,  iril[ 
thinks  himself  in  dangiM*.  has  courage  enough  not  to  despair.     At  the  outer  inlels,  tlieliiii(i 
appears  so  inu(di  alike,  that  it  re(piires  years  of  experience  to  know  it. 

The  followins;,   although  not  intended  to  be  p.'rmaiient,   will  be  found  useful  to  tli(j>e  | 
navigating  the  Florida  Reef     They  are  signals  for  the  U.  S.  coast  survey. 
Signal  poles.        1.  A  si^inal  pole  on    'I'arlI.e  lierf,  bciring  S.  K.  from  Ca-sar's  Creek,  12  feet  iiimve  the 
water,  witli  braces  ti  feet  from  the  base  ;  on  the  top  a  tin  cone— tho  upper  liiilt 'piiiiiliJ 
red,  the  lower  white. 

2.  A  siijnal  on  the  Pacific  Rref,  E.  S.  E   from  Cieser's  Creek,  of  the  same  diniensionil 
— the  upper  part  of  the  cone  (minted  white,  the  low(M'  part  red. 

3.  On  AjiiT  Rirf,  commonly  called  the  Hf/i/Jiir/c  Hief.  bearing  E.  by  N.  from  Casiri  I 
Creek,  of  the  same  dimensions— the  upper  part  of  the  cone  painted  led,  the  lower  \vh 

4.  On  [jong  Riff,  btmrini;  K.  of  ^  Hiott's  Key,  also  of  the  same  dimunsiuiis— the  upiwl 
part  of  tho  cone  painted  white,  the  lower  part  red. 


n^VK 


mmm 


^m 


mr^mmmmmifm 


1  usiH'iil  to  tliu'e 


iiiiK^  iliinensioDi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  263 

Two  bpRcone  of  similar  dimensions  were  also  put  up  on  the  Triumph  Reef,  nnd  on  the 
!/>«'/  ^ocA's,  but  by  some  nccident  or  design  they  were  lately  removed.     Arrnngements,  '' 

llowever,  have  been  mnde  to  have  them  repiiiced  during  the  first  culm  weather,  and  their 
Ijjjrings  tind  chnrncter  will  be  ns  follows: 

friuiiiph  Reff — E.  of  Rugged  Keys,  pninted  red  nbnve,  white  below. 

fowey  Rocks — S.  i  W.  from  Soliiier's  K((y.  white  iibwe,  and  red  below. 

It  wiia  (ittempted  to  place  u  signal  or  beacon  on  Ledbury  Reef,  but  it  was  found  im- 
linirrituhlo. 
'  Tlin  f"'llovving  large  signals  and  bencnns  were  put  up  Inst  year  and  recently  : 

Siiinbrfro  Key — 3G  feet  high,  barrel,  bnicf^s  25  feet  long. 

lone  Key — ."JS  feet  high,  barrel,  braces  '22  feet  long  ;  leans  somewhat  to  the  east. 

]Vi'st  Sambo — :!5  feet  high,  barrel,  braces  25  feet  long. 

Hiand  Key — (Astronomical  station) — 23  feet  high,  barrel,  braces  26  feet  long;  the 
IjidfS  rec<'ntly  boarded  up  by  Lieutenant  Rodgers. 

jUndern  Dry  Rocks — near  Sand  Key  ;  triangle,  18  feet  poles. 

Western  Dry  Rocks — near  Sand  Key  ;  18  feet  poles. 

Unl(tli'  Ground — also  near  Sand  Key;  triangle,  22  feet  poles;  the  E.  and  W.  sides 
lloaided  up.— May,  1850.  A.  D.  BACHE. 

Directions  for  sailing  from  the  Eastward  through  the  Hawke  Channel. 

Kpy  Biscayno,  on  which  there  is  n  liuhthouse  containing  n  fixed  light,  lies  within,  and  Lighthotu€, 
Ifornis  the  west  side  of  the  northern  entrance  of  the  channel  or  passage  between  the 
iFlnriclii  Keys,  or  Martyrs,  on  the  west  and  north  side,  and  the  Florida  reefs  on  the  east 
I  mil  south  side,  called  Hawke  Channel.  The  coast  for  4  or  5  leaunes  to  the  northward 
lofllie  kej',  has  foul  ground,  and  the  sea  breaking  upon  it  has  a  frightful  appearance,  but 
Itliprp  is  nowhere  less  than  3  fathoms;  but,  by  keeping  off  5  or  6  miles  from  shore,  you 
Lill  fiiiil  generally  5  or  6  fathoms,  fine  sandy  bottom;  and  when  you  approach  the  end 
loftlie  reef,  you  may  haul  in  towards  Key  Biscavno.  observing  to  give  the  reef  a  good 
I krlli  without  ytiu,  on  account  of  several  bad  sand-bars  on  its  inner  edge.  You  will  not 
I  Slid  less  than  3  fathoms  any  where  within,  till  you  come  abreast  of  the  south  end  of  the 
Itey,  where  there  is  a  small  bank  of  eleven  feet  only;  but  be  careful  to  give  the  key  a 
IjooiI  berth,  as  a  large  flat  stretches  from  it. 

Vou  then  steer  to  the  eastward  of  south,  and  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  shallow  bank 
ItliatsuiniHuds  Oswald  Keys,  when  the  course  will  be  more  westerly,  by  the  edge  of  the 
Itenk.  The  general  rule  to  sail  along  through  the  channel,  from  the  Soldier's  Keys  to  the 
Liiitliward.  is,  to  have  a  careful  man  at  the  mast-head,  to  look  out;  he  will  see  ail  the 
liu'iuls  and  other  shoals,  in  a  clear  day,  at  least  a  mile  off.  Thus,  making  the  eye  your  pi- 
I  lot.  come  no  nearer  to  the  Soldier's  Keys  than  12  feet,  and  no  farther  off  to  the  eastward 
lofthi'in  than  18  feet. 

Aliout  a  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  Saunders'  Cut  lies  a  small  round  bank  with  only  9  feet 
UiittTon  it:  from  this  black  spot  to  Csesar's  Creek,  there  are  several  sunken  lieads,  and 
I  the  bill'  i>f  that  crtjek  reaches  a  great  way  out.  Right  abreast  of  this  spot,  and  northward 
lot' till'  bar,  is  a  very  fine  ancliorago  of  22  feet  water,  close  to  the  back  of  the  reef,  which 
Imakpn  the  iidct. 

Pniiu  Saunders'  Cut  to  Saunders'  Point  there  are  only  11  feet  of  water  to  be  depended 
lo";  tliut  is.  if  you  keep  in  that  part  of  the  channel  wii'.cli  is  clearest  of  rocks;  you  may 

ul  ii(H>|icr  water,  by  going  out  nirlhor  towards  tlie  reef;  but  the  care  necessary  to  bo 
Itiikcn  in  order  to  avoid  the  heads  is  inconceivable. 

Wlien  you  are  clear  to  the  sou'hward  of  Angel  Fish  Creek,  the  same  rule  of  keeping 
llji'lwecn  18  and  12  feet  in  'he  clianiirl  is  to  be  observer!;  but  after  all  that  can  bo  said,  n 
[cinvrul  inspection  of  tlin  chart,  togc^flier  with  a  comparison  of  it  with  the  course  of  the 
liiiiil  yrni  sail  by,  and  especially  a  gond  liir>kout,  will  constitute  you  a  better  pilot  than  any 
Idiicclioii  that  can  l)e  given  for  tliis  navi^iarioTi.  The  course  IVom  Angel  Fish  Creek  to  the 
[iiiirih  |)iiit  of  Sound  Point,  is  S.  by  W ■  i  W.,  an<l  the  distance  is  5  leagues. 

.'<  laml  Point  is  the  oidy  s|)ot  that  may  bo  said  to  form  a  true  promontory,  from  the  spring 
I  ill  till'  rncU. 

KiDin  tlie  north  end  of  Sound  Point  to  Rodrigues  K(\y.  the  course  and  distance  are  S. 

{ \V.  i  S.  74  miles.     Therct  is  a  good  harbor  for  small  cnil't  olf  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  key, 

firiacil  by  a  reef  running  olf  its  N.  E.  point;  and  luiother  good  place  for  shelter  to  the  S. 

W.  of  it, ;  but  neither  has  a  greater  depth  than  0  fei-t  at  low  water.     Tavernier'a  Key,  or 

Tiilmiri,  is  only  a  large  thicket  of  inangrovv.-,  Wn'iout  any  dry  soil  on  it,  and  aflbrds  oidy 

[.•iimo  iiquntic  birds  and  ihi'ir  egas. 

Ki.an  aliicast  of  Sound  Point  to  abreast  of  Tabano,  the  course  is  S.  W.  i  S.,  and  the  dia- 
jtiince  is  3  Icauues.  From  Tabano,  tlm  direction  of  the  coa.st  alters  to  S.  W.,  nnd  to  the 
[cast  (Mill  of  New  Matacuinbe,  the  distance  is  7  miles.  New  Matacumbe  has  nothing  re- 
jiimrkiibie,  except  a  wrdl  of  good  fresh  water  on  its  east  end  :  but  that  being  known  to  few, 
Itlio  island  is  little  frequented.     Olf  ita  S.  W.  end  lies  a  small  drowned  mangrove  island, 


264 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


called  Umbrella  Key;  a  channel  10  feet  deep  runs  in  to  the  south-westward  of  it,  and  ex- 
tends up  to  the  larger  island;  but  the*-e  being  nothing  worthy  of  notice  on  this  key,  jt  jj 
very  seldom  visited.  In  coming  this  way  from  Tabano,  the  channel  is  in  general  deeper 
than  before ;  but  the  same  rule  for  keeping  without  12  and  within  18  feet,  still  holds  goud' 
but  observe  that  directly  abreast  of  New  Matacumbe,  within  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  euat! 
ward  of  the  land,  are  several  dangerous  sunken  heads,  called  the  Hen  and  Chickens,  which 
require  particular  attention. 

The  next  to  the  south-westward,  is  the  Island  of  Old  Matacumbe,  remarkable  for  being 
the  most  convenient,  and  best  watering  place  on  all  this  coast.  On  its  east  end  are  five 
wells  iu  the  solid  rock,  which  appear  tu  be  natural  chasms,  yielding  excellent  water  Iq 
abundance;  and  some  ponds  near  them  likewise  afford  some;  insomuch,  that  in  a  vim 
season,  all  the  east  end  of  the  key  is  overflown,  and  water  enough  may  be  had  to  supply 
a  whole  fleet.  There  are  likewise  some  ponds  and  wells  at  the  west  end,  but  the  water 
is  of  a  much  inferior  quality.  This  island  was  one  of  the  last  habitations  of  the  indiims 
of  the  Coloosa  nation.  About  a  mile  from  its  N.  E.  end,  on  the  extremity  of  a  reef,  jjeg 
the  small  bushy,  gravelly  key,  called  Indian  Key,  which  is  the  leading  mark  for  finding 
the  watering-place  on  Old  Matacumbe.  Run  to  about  a  cable's  length  off  the  east  side 
of  the  key,  and  the  channel  will  be  easily  distinguished  by  your  eye,  as  before  said.  Ob- 
serve that  the  tides  being  very  rapid,  require  particular  attention,  in  going  in  or  out;  nnd 
that  the  channel  is  very  narrow,  having  only  just  room  enough  for  a  small  vessel  to  turn 
to  windward. 

From  the  south-west  end  of  Old  Matacumbe  to  the  west  end  of  Cayo  Bivoras,  or  Vi. 
per  Key,  the  course  and  distance  are  S.  W.  by  \V.  i  W.,  7  miles ;  the  depth  of  water 
is  frotn  16  to  18  feet,  sandy  bottom;  but  you  must  be  careful  to  give  the  Bivoras  a  berth 
of  at  least  a  mile  and  a  half.  From  abreast  of  the  west  end  of  Bivoras,  S.  W.  by  \V,  i 
W.,  11  or  12  miles,  brings  you  to  a  contraction  of  Hawke  Channel,  between  the  Outer 
Reef  and  Cayos  de  Vacas;  your  depth  is  generally  18  feet,  the  bottom  is  sandy,  nnda 
broad  Lank  runs  off  from  the  V^ncas  Islands.  At  this  contraction  of  the  channel  ilie 
course  must  be  altered  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  going  through  the  like  depth  of  water  for  5 
miles.  In  running  this  last  distance,  cnre  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  shoals  lying  (,1)'  the 
S.  W.  part  of  Cayos  de  Vacas,  heretofore  described. 

From  the  west  end  of  Cayos  de  Vacas  to  Cabbiige  Tree  Island,  or  Bnhia  Honda,  the 
course  and  distance  are  W.  S.  \V.  i  W.,  10  miles.  In  this  run  you  will  find  3  fiillioms 
water  all  along  within  a  mile  of  the  keys,  the  deepest  water  being  nearest  to  the  reef. 
Hence  to  the  west  end  of  Cayo  Hueso,  or  Key  West,  the  course  and  distance  are  W.  S, 
W.,  31  miles,  the  depth  of  water  from  17  to  23  feet-  Key  West  is  about  5i  niiii'siii 
length,  having  a  shallow  bank  before  it,  which  extends  close  round  its  west  end,  us  hns  iil- 
ready  been  said,  and  near  which  end  is  a  well  of  ordinary  water.  All  these  keys  hme 
plenty  of  venison,  and  in  some  of  llieni  honey  is  found.  From  iibreast  of  Key  West,  a 
W.  by  S.  course,  5  leugues,  and  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  8i  lengues,  will  carrj'  you  to  the  west 
end  of  the  channel,  abreast  of  the  west  end  of  the  Quicksands,  which  extend  weslwiirl 
from  Cayo  Murqueso.  'J'his  bank  of  (juicksiind  may  be  always  seen  iu  the  day  time, it 
being  v»'ry  white,  and  therefore  iniiy  bo  easily  avoided. 

Directions  for  Key  liiscayno. — J5ound  into  Key  Biscayno  from  the  north,  you  can  m 
close  in  with  the  bench  until  within  one  or  half  a  niilo  of  Bare  Cut*  ;  you  musttlipj 
give  the  shore  a  berth  of  not  loss  than  one  mile;  (bo  ciireful  not  to  get  in  less'tlmn  three 
fathoms  water;)  your      arse  will  be  S.  by  K.,  made  good. 

When  Soblier  Key]  bears  W.  by  N.,  steer  for  it  until  the  lighthouse  on  Key  IJiscnyno 
bears  N.  by  W. ;  then  steer  for  tho  lighthouse  until  Lillle  Soldier  KcyX  is  on  with  .Si. 
dier  Key  ;  your  course  will  he  thenco  from  N.  by  W.  to  N.  by  E.,  according  to  thetilo, 
eh!)  or  flood  ;  but  the  points  of  the  two  Soldier  Keys  must  bo  ke|)t  just  on,  or  very  iieiulv 
BO,  (the  little  ono  to  tho  east  of  llie  large  one)  until  the  sand  point,  of  the  beach  (siiutji  eij 
of  Key  Bisfiiyiio)  is  opened  out  to  the  ivcsticuril,  |)ass  the  hij;li  point  of  mangroves,  (X.  W, 
and  inner  point  of  t*am(>)  from  thirty  to  fifty  yards  ;  this  will  bring  you  close  to  the  imrili. 
orn  sand-bar,  thence  off  for  the  lighthouse,  about  N.  W.,  keeping  tho  sand-bars  ((ju  juur  I 


•Pare  Cut  is  the  first  opening  north  of  Key  BipcDyno  light,  niid  is  diKtnnt  frnin  sunie  (iIkjm; 
miles. 

Narrow  Cut  is  north  of  Bare  Cut  about  3  miles,  and  isimmedititely  abreast  of  Vinnm  liivcr.a: 
the  entrance  of  which  there  are  Bottlers,  wliuae  houses  show  very  pluin  while  passing. 

tSoi.DiF.n  Key  i.s  a  Hiimll  key  wilhlii^jli  growth,  beiiriu';  from  Key  nirtcayiioliglithi)ii8o  S  P  i;i 
W.,[diBtiiut  about  (i  miles,  and  is  from  5  to  700yards  iu  circuniteruiice. 

\  I.iTTi.K  SotniKR  Kit  bears  nbnut  R.  from  Soldier  Key,  and  is  very  small,  with  •  l."<: ,  ^,,,iv:!! 
thiin  the  lillle  one  ;  it  is  iibniif  (idO  yiirdn  distiint  fmtii  ihi-  olher. 

The  tirh'  leTo  sets  about  E.  8.  E.  ebb,  and  \V.  N.  W.  Hood,  and  runs  very  swift  oil  the  fulUti  I 
cbunyu  of  the  moon. 


ipi 


•nin  sunic  aliiiut; 


'lithoiiso  S,  !':» 


if't  oil  the  full  mil 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  , 

right)  close  nbonrd,  which  at  nil  times  show  themselves  very  plain.  As  you  draw  up  with 
the  point  of  the  island,  keep  a  little  further  off  of  the  sand-bars,  pass  the  point  fioin  lOOto 
oflO  yards  distant,  and  when  the  liglithouse  bears  N.  30°  E.,  anchor.  Here  the  channel 
\j  bold  up  to  tlio  beach,  and  over  to  the  south  bank,  which  forms  the  harbor,  and  in  which 


2C5 


you 


will  have  from  24  to  3  fathoms  water. 


Directions  for  crossing  the  Kerf  at  Cape  Florida. — Get  the  lighthouse  to  bear  W.  N. 
W.,  no'l  steer  for  it  until  you  get  into  three  fathoms  water,  and  then  keep  S.  W.  by  S. 
When  Soldier  Key  bears  W.  by  N.,  distance  one  or  two  miles,  then  you  will  have  good 
anchorage  under  Fowey's  Rocks.  The  reef  will  then  bear  E.  by  N.  i  N.  iJepth  of 
water  3  fathoms. 

Pircclionsfor  running  down  inside  of  the  reef  from  Cape  Florida  to  Key  West. — The 
course  from  Cape  Florida  to  Soldier  Key  is  S.  by  W. 

From  Soldier  Key  to  Bolles'  Bank,  S.  i  E.,  depth  of  water  2  fathoms. 

From  Bolles'  Bank  to  CjBsar's  Creek,  S.  by  W.,  distant  25  miles. 

From  CiPsar's  Creek  to  Old  Roads,  S.  by  W. 

From  Old  Kouds  to  Basin  Hill  is  S.  W.  by  S.  4  S.,  depth  of  water  24  fathoms. 

From  Basin  Hill  to  Upper  Sound  Point,  is  S.  S.  W.,  depth  of  water  from  10  to  12 

feet. 

From  Upper  Sound  Point  to  Lower  Sound  Point  there  are  15  feet  water,  soft  bottom. 

From  hidf  way  between  these  two  points  to  Tavernier  the  course  is  S.  \V.  by  S.,  with 
from  10  to  12  feet  water. 

From  Tavernier  to  Snake  Creek,  S.  W.  by  S.,  with  three  fathoms  water. 

From  Snake  Creek  to  Indian  Key,  S.  W.,  with  14  feet  water. 

Get  Matacumbe  Cut  just  open,  and  then  steer  S.  W.,  hard  bottom,  with  from  12  to  14 
feet  wiiter. 

Get  Indian  Key  to  hear  N.  N.  W.,  and  steer  for  it  until  within  a  ^  of  a  mile,  then  the 
anchoriige  is  good.     Water  from  10  to  12  feet. 

From  Indian  Key  to  the  east  point  of  Viper  Key  the  course  is  S.  W.  4  W.,  depth  of 
wiiterfrom  15  to  18  feet. 

From  the  east  point  of  Viper  Key  to  the  east  point  of  Duck  Key  the  course  is  S.  W. 
by  W.  4  W.,  and  then  W.  S.  W.  to  Crane  Cut,  and  then  S.  W.  to  Jacob's  Harbor,  and 
W.  by  S.  to  Sister  Kej's,  with  from  18  to  24  feet  water. 

From  Sister  Keys  to  Loggerhead  Key  is  \V.  by  S.  4  S. 

From  Loggerhead  to  Saddle  Hills  is  W.  by  S. 

From  Saddle  Hills  to  Boca  Chica,  W.  S.  W.,  with  from  4  to  5  fathoms  water. 

From  Boca  Chica  to  Key  West  the  course  is  W.  by  S.  4  S. 

Thk  Tidks. — The  tide  ebbs  and  flows  here  regularly,  and  the  time  of  high  water, 
on  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  at  Key  West  harbor,  is  20  minutes  after  8  o'clock, 
Springtides  rise  4  feet  5  inches,  and  it  is  nearly  the  same  every  where,  from  the  Dry 
Tortiigas  to  the  Cayos  de  Vacas.  The  tides  from  Cayos  de  Vacas,  north-eastward,  rise 
not  quite  so  high,  and  the  time  of  high  water  is  earlier.  Within  the  northern  entrance 
of  Hawke  Channel,  opposite  Soldier's  Keys,  it  is  high  water  at  half  an  hour  after  5 
o'cl(ici<,  und  spring  tides  rise  otdy  2  feet  6  inches.  To  the  northward  of  Key  Biscay  no, 
tiie  stream  on  soundings  is  much  influenced  by  the  wind  when  it  blows  fresh  ;  hut  with 
nioilt'i'iite  breezes  the  ebb  sets  northward,  and  the  flood  southward;  a  due  attention  to 
this  will  contribute  to  shorten  a  passage  over  soundings  to  the  reef. 

Hiiving  oli«erved,  in  the  course  of  long  experience,  that  several  masters  of  vessels,  who 
linii  the  misfortune  to  be  cast  away  on  the  Martyrs,  and  the  coast  of  Florida,  ignorant  of 
tlie  existence  of  any  settlement  at  Cape  Florida,  liave  attempted  to  proceed  to  tlie  north- 
Wiini  ill  tlu'ii'  biiiitm,  deprived  of  every  assistance,  1  feel  it  incumbent  upon  me  to  inform 
siicl)  iis  niiiy  liereafti-r  experience  a  like  misfortune,  that  if  they  pass  to  the  north  side  of 
Key  Bisciiynn,  on  vvliidt  a  lighthou-ie  is  erected,  as  before  mentioned,  they  will  find  the 
cutnince  of  Boca  Ratones.  through  which  they  can  safely  go  with  their  boats,  and  they 
will  sec  tli<^  houses  in  front,  on  the  main  land. 

Ill  ciise  of  shipwreck  to  the  iioitliward  of  Boca  Ratones,  at  the  distance  of  2  miles 
itlierclVuin.  tliey  will  perceive*  maiiiiroves  thinly  scattered,  from  whence  the  houses  may 
:l)e  seen,  mikI  in  that  situation,  on  nniking  a  signal  with  fire,  or  otherwise,  they  will  obtain 
InssisliiMcc. 

If  it  slioiilil  liiip|)cii  to  the  southward  of  New  River,  they  may  proceed  southwardly 
|iil(ini:  till-  lii'iicli.  wii('r(*  llicy  will  nu'et.  every  4  miles,  with  posts  fixed  in  the  ground,  on 
Iwliicli  IS  nil  iiiscripiion.  in  Knulish,  French,  and  Spanish,  informing  where  wells  of  fresh 
[wiitcr  imve  been  purposely  dug  for  ridiof. 

Channel  of  Flurida,  between  the  Reef  and  Keys. 

The  western  part  of  this  chimnrl  begins  with  a  breadth  of  34  or  4  miles,  and   you 
fiiiij  ill  it  I'lom  (i4    to  10  failioiiis  water,  sand   and  mud,  or  oo/.e,  as   far  as  B  "a 
jiiiiidc,  from  which  to  Key  West  light  it  is  generally  about  3  miles  wide,  und  its  depth 


Tides. 


nniPlPiP^ 


iqppiMpF>V^lpnn^nHpi.  I  .mw  i 


uiJU|ipiinraB!pif<^pn^Pliq|l 


266 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PfLOT. 


6  and  10  fntlioms,  fine  sand  and  mud.  In  this  Inst  piece  of  the  channel  there  urt\  t^To 
shonis ;  the  one  noiirly  north  and  south  with  the  easternmost  |mrt  of  Key  BiKa  (jiMiiilo 
and  the  other  S.  S.  W.  from  the  westernmost  part  of  Key  West,  and  both  in  the  iiiidjlj 
of  the  chiinnel. 

From  these  shoals  the  channel  continues  with  a  breadth  of  4  miles  as  fur  as  Siunlxipg 
Keys,  from  which  to  the  eastward  its  breadth  dimiiiisiies,  iind  the  reef  increases  in  tbg 
same  proportion,  so  that  the  chiinnel  is  only  Ij  mile  wide  at  tiie  liistaiice  of  5  inlhvs  wr^i; 
of  Looe  Key  beacon,  and  this  is  the  narrowest  part  of  tiie  r-haniu'l,  but  driiwiiii;  U|i\vith 
LooH  Key  helicon,  the  channel  begins  to  widfin,  so  that  north  iiiul  soutii  of  Hiiliiii  ll(iin],i 
it  is  3  miles  wide.  The  depth  in  these  narrows  is  3  fiitlioms,  iind  cotitiiiuiiig  to  the  uust- 
ward,  you  auijiiient  your  depth  to  (J  fathoms. 

There  is  a  beacon  on  Looe  Kej'  ,^0  feet  high,  on  which  is  a  liirgo  bull,  painted  red. 

From  Ijooo  Key  the  channel  continues  to  its  end  with  a  broadtii  of  vJ  or  3  miles,  but 
its  depti)  varies  remarkably,  so  that  as  far  as  Cow  Keys,  you  have  4  to  6  fatiioins,  nnd 
from  thence  to  the  eastward  of  it  goes  on  diminisiiiiij";,  and  wii'-u  abreast  of  Old  Muta- 
cuml)e  you  have  but  3  fathonjs,  and  abreast  of  Key  Tabaiio  only  2  and  -'A  ;  bi'sides 
which,  from  Looe  Key,  the  channel  has  many  coral  shoals,  wliich,  although  by  day  they 
offer  111)  risk,  (as  the  dark  color  shows  their  place,)  yet  by  nii;lit  they  are  very  diiii^eiouj. 
and  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  anchor,  and  lie  by  for  the  tiight,  throughout  all  pints  of 
this  channel. 

In  l?nhia  Honda  you  get  excellent  water  by  digging  wells,  and  on  the  south  siijo  of 
Cow  Keys,  about  8  miles  from  its  western  end,  you  again  have  a  line  spring. 

These  are  the  only  places  among  the  keys  where  you  can  find  water  from  n;itural 
springs;  but  there  are  many  natural  tanks,  where  rain  water  is  preserved  till  eviipuiuted. 

On  the  north  side  of  Cow  Keys,  ,ind  about  G  mifes  east  of  the  west  end,  you  wdl  find 
a  natural  pond,  that  never  wants  wafer,  which  is  in  a  valley,  distant  from  the  beiicli  iilmut 
100  yards,  and  the  landing  is  something  to  the  westward  of  three  small  mangrove  ishnids 
called  Stirrup  Keys.  Vou  may  also,  at  times,  fiml  water  on  the  western  extreme  of 
Key  Vacas  (Cow  Keys:)  also  in  somti  of  the  keys  in  its  vicinity,  and  on  Dutcli  Ki-y,  ^md 
generally  in  all  those  places  where  the  earth  is  rocky,  you  will  find  water,  e-jiicii  ||y 
after  rains. 
Lighthouse,  A  lighthouse  is  erected  on  Whitehead's  Point,  which  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  l-iland 

of  Key  West.     The  light  is  elevated  63  feet  6  inches  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  sliuws 
a  fixed  light. 
Key  West.  KKY   WK.ST. — A   wliito  spar  buoy  with   a  flag,  is  stutioned  on  the  reef,  iiIjihu  nine 

miles  from  the  lighthouse,  on  Whitelioad's  Point,  from  which  it  bears  S.  S.  K.  h  is 
anchored  in  -27  feet  of  water,  at  low  tide,  and  vessels  ci-ossiiig  the  reef  by  this  clmiiiad, 
will  find  the  best  water  close  to  the  buoy  on  the  west  side. 

The  proper  course  to  pursue,  to  l)riMg  into  the  harbor  llu*  greatest  draught  nl  wafer 
from  this  buoy,  will  bo  to  run  for  the  li>;hthiiuse,  passing  at  the  distance  of  iibiiiit  ii  qunr- 
ter  of  a  mile,  a  tub  buoy,  with  a  stalf  and  imitation  ball  painted  black — markiiii;  the  situ- 
ation of  three  coral  heads,  on  one  of  which  thei'e  are  only  fourteen  feet  of  WMterat  low 
tide.  You  leave  this  buoy  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  when  two  miles  distant  iVoin  iho 
lighthouse,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  until  you  pass  a  second  tub  buoy,  painted  lilmk,  !it:i- 
tionod  olf  the  linhthouso  point  in  G  fathoms  water;  you  thiMi  steer  N.  by  K.  4  ll.  until 
you  open  Freeming's  Ke^',  a  small  mangrove  island  in  the  northern  part  of  the  hMibnr, 
for  which  you  then  run. 
A'.  IV.  Pas-  N.  W.  PA.S8A(}F. — Vessels  bound  through  the  North- West  Passaife,  will  run.  tiMin 
iuge.  the  last  named  buoy,  N.  W.,  and  they  wdl  then  enter  the  passage,  which  is  sIhImiI  nut 

for  about  G  mihfs.  The  stakes  on  the  north  and  south  sides  are  puinted  white,  mid  liiin< 
keys  on  their  summits  also  painted  white  ;  tnose  on  the  larije  midille  around  lire  piiuti'l 
white  with  i)lack  crosses,  and  those  on  the  small  niiddie  ground  are  all  biiick. 

The  sJakes  are  all  in  about  two  feet  of  water  at  low  tide,  and  a  vessel  (Irawiiig  !l  t'ect  if 
water  Ciin  api)roach  gi^nerally  within  40  yards  of  any  one  (d' tlitnii  ;  but  3i  I'.illi'inb. ;it 
least,  can  be  carried  betwet^n  either  of  the  middle  gi'ouiids  and  the  north  or  soiiiii  sidoj 
of  the  passage,  or  about  9  feet  between  the  two  middle  grounds. 

After  passing  the  stakes,  vesscds  will  shapt)  their  course  for  a  tub  hnoy,  piiiiifeil  U\m% 
having  an  imitation  ball,  which  is  amdiored  in  .'!<5  fathoms  Wiiter  about  half  way  lidiii  the 
last  stake  to  the  bar.  Passing  this  buoy  on  either  side,  you  will  at  present  run  N.  \V.  i 
W.,  about  two  miles,  which  will  bring  you  to  the  bar,  and  on  hauling  up  north  ymi  will 
cross  it  in  ten  or  cdeven  fe(!t  water  at  low  tide. 

The  light-vessel  for  the  nortli-wesi  bar  of  this  harbor,  lies  about  8  miles  fioiii  Key 
West  at  the  Junction  of  the  north-west  channels,  so  as  to  servi^  as  a  guide  to  vesstds  en- 
tering either. 

Vessels  from  the  W(!stwaril,  coming  in  iiy  the  North  Chuniiel.  will  bring  the  liizlit  vw- 
sel  to  lavir  due  south,  and  run  directly  for  her;  and  on  reaching  htu' station,  will  then 
run  for  the  lighthouse  on  Kej'  West,  unless  the  tide  should  be  extraordinarily  liw.  Tiitre 
are  not  ten  feet  in  this  channel  at  low  water,  and  twtdve  fret  at  high  water. 


"1W"^W^»W5W^ 


^mmmmmmmim 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


267 


Vessels  coming  in  by  the  North-west  Chnnnol,  will  bring  the  light  vessel  to  bonvsouth- 
I  easthtilf  pnst,  run  for  her,  and  then  stoer  tor  the  lijihlliouse  as  befon;.     This  cliiinnel  is 
considered  the  best,  hiiving  from  one  to  two  ioot  more  water  than  the  other. 

Tiio  light-vessel  fhows  one  light  at  an  elevation  of  about  60  feet,  which  may  be  seen, 
Id  clear  weather,  nine  or  ten  miles. 

Dlnclions  for  Key  Wtst — South  Channel, —  Get  Key  West  light  to  bear  N.  E.  by  N., 
mid  run  for  it.  Leave  Sand  Key  light  i  a  mile  on  the  starboard  hand  ;  dejiiii  of  water, 
"i  fiilhoms.  Run  for  the  light  until  you  get  iMaugrove  Key  to  bear  i\.  by  K.,  then  steer 
N.  N.  K. 

Directions  for  the  Ship  Channel. — Get  Key  West  light  to  bear  N.  N.  W.,  and  run  di- 
rect for  it.  until  within  two  miles  of  the  liglit,  and  then  give  the  lighthouse  point  a  berth 
jf  one  mile,  until  you  open  Mangrove  Key  from  the  wliarfs  of  Key  West,  about  a  hand- 
spike's length.     Keep  these  bearings  on,  and  they  will  take  you  up  in  the  best  wnter. 

Directions  fur  the  North  Bar. — Get  the  lightsliip  to  boar  south,  and  steer  direct  for 
it.  Cross  the  bar  in  11  or  12  feet  of  water.  When  you  deepen  the  water  to  ;!4  fathoms, 
stper  S.  E.  iiy  S.     This  course  made  good  will  carry  you  clear  of  every  thing. 

Directions  for  the  N.  W.  Channel.— (lut  the  light-boat  to  bear  iS.  S.  E.,  and  stper  N. 
;},  W.  Keep  the  bearings  of  tlie  light-boat  on,  and  you  will  have  from  11  to  12  feet  at 
high  tide. 

Dirrcl inns  for  crossing  the  reef  at  Lofigerhead  Key. — Get  this  key  to  bear  N.  N.  W., 
and  steer  for  it.     Yon  will  cross  the  reef  in  .3i  or  4  fathoms  water. 

Directions  for  crossing  the  reef  at  Bahia  Honda. — (Jet  Bahia  Honda  to  bear  from  W. 
toN-  W.,  and  you  will  have  from  24  to  3  and  4  fathoms. 

Directions  Jbr  crossing  the  reef  at  Knight's  Key. — (iet  Knight's  Key  to  bear  N.  N.  E., 
and  steer  for  it,  and  you  will  cross  the  reef  in  34  or  4  fathoms  water. 

Directions  for  crossing  the  reef  at  Duck  Key.— Get  Duck  Key  to  bear  W.  by  S.,  and 
steer  for  the  east  point,  having  from  3  to  4  fathoms.  , 

Directions  for  crossing  the  reef  at  Indian  Key. — Get  Indian  Key  to  bear  N.  by  E.,  and 
steer  for  it,  and  cross  the  reef  in  3  and  3i  fathoms. 

Directions  for  crt/ssing  the  reif  at  Tavernier. — Get  Tavernier  to  bear  W.  by  N.  4  N., 
and  steer  for  it.     You  will  cross  the  reef  in  9  and  10  feet  water. 

CAPE  RO.MANO  is  a  long  low  point  with  mangrove  trees  on  it.  Off  this  point  lies  a  Cape  Ro- 
sand-bank,  which  extends  otf  9  miles  S.  W.  from  the  point,  and  has  about  throe  feet  water  mano. 
on  it.  Tlie  siioal  is  regular  as  you  a|)proach  it.  Thirty  miles  to  the  N.  W.  lies  the  Isl- 
and of  Snnibel.  If  you  are  running  for  this  island,  keep  in  44  and  5  fathoms  water.  At 
iho  S.  W.  end  of  this  island  there  is  a  good  harbor  with  1'2  feet  water  in  it.  which,  if  you 
wish  to  enter,  give  .Sanibel  Point  a  berth  of  5  miles,  as  there  is  a  long  bunl^  making  olf 
from  it;  run  in  for  the  land  in  24  fathoms,  and  then  steer  up  N.  W.  until  you  shut  in 
the  point  of  the  islands,  where  you  can  anchor  in  12  feet  water. 

Tiiere  is  a  large  Spanish  establishment  for  fishing,  and  you  can  obtain  provisions,  wood, 
and  water. 

Gncral  Description  of  the  Coast  from  Cape  St.  Bias  to  Point  Tunvha. 

(JAPE  ST.  BLAS. — Capo  St.  Bias  is  a  low  point,  which  runs  to  the  soutliward  two  Cape  St. Bias, 
miles.  From  that  part  where  trees  end  on  this  ()oint,  a  shoal  of  sand  runs  S.  S.  E.,  4 
miles,  i)earing  from  S.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  VV.  from  the  point.  Various  sliouls  and  small 
spots  of  sand  having  less  than  3  fathoms  water  on  them,  also  lie  olf  the  sanuf  point,  the 
southernmost  of  which  is  17  miles  distant;  between  these  shoals  there  are  7,  8,  and  9 
tiitlionis  water. 

,S.  77'^  K.,  10  miles  from  Cape  St.  Bias,  lies  the  south  point  of  St.  George's  Island, 
culled  Cape  St.  (toorge,  between  which  is  the  main  entrance  to  St.  George's  Sound  and 
ApaliK  liii'ohi  Hay;  the  bay  is  distant  about  12  miles  from  the  entrance  into  thii  sound  be- 
tweiMi  St.  Vincent's  and  St.  George's  islands  in  a  straight  line,  but  owing  to  the  obstruc- 
tions in  lliis  part  of  the  sound,  vessels  are  obliged  to  bend  their  course  to  t!ie  ^a^t  to  reach 
Apidachioola  River,  which  increases  the  distance  to  18  miles. 

Vessels  drawing  10  feet  water  can  anchor  in  the  bay,  but  only  74  feet  can  bo  carried  to 
the  town. 

From  Capo  St.  George's  (which  Is  shoal  to  tho  south)  for  5  miles  the  coast  doubles 
rnuiid  to  E.  N.  E.,  and  at  tho  distanci'  of  21  miles  from  the  cape  is  the  east  end  of  this 
islaiiil,  and  the  middle!  entrance  into  the  sound;  this  entrance  is  formed  by  the  east  end  of 
.'>t.  (teorge's  and  the  west  end  of  Dog  Islands;  the  distance  between  the  two  is  3  miles. 
Tliochnnnel  is  contracted  between  by  shoals,  which  make  out  from  the  two  islands;  the 
defitli  of  water  on  tho  bar  is  about  14  feet,  and  the  width  one-third  of  a  mile.  Tlie  chan- 
nel is  iH'ar  Dog  Island. 

Dug  Island  is  (i  miles  long,  and  trends  nearly  tho  same  as  St.  George's;  at  tho 
eiist  ond  is  tho  eastern  (mtrance  into  .St.  (ieorge's  Sound;  this  entrance  olfers  a  depth 
of  14  feet  on  the  bar,  which  is  abovo  i  of  a  mile  wide,  and  is  within  that  distance  of  the 
island. 


mm 


wm 


268 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


■:  1 


St.  Ooorfifo's  Sound,  from  the  eastern  to  the  middle  puss,  aflTorda  from  2i  to  3  fnthomi 
water;  but  to  tlio  wostwiird,  towards  the  miiin  entrance,  the  sound  is  much  obstructed 
by  oystor-biuiks.  throunh  which  vessels  dnuving  more  than  6  feet  water  cannot  shape 
Tide.  their  conrso.     Tiio  mi'iin  rise  of  tide.  2.^  fei^t. 

N.  50'^  E.  from  the  east  end  of  Dou  island,  7  miles  distant,  is  the  S.  W.  Capo;  this 
distance  is  shoal,  if  wo  except  the  channel  above  mentioned,  and  to  the  south  of  tlio  enpo 
the  shoal  extends  to  the  distance  of  3  miles. 

From  the  S.  W.  Cape  the  coast  bends  to  the  northward,  and  after  to  the  eastward,  and 
forms  a  large  bay.  into  which  the  river  Apalache  is  emptied. 

This  river  is  shoal,  anil  obstructed  at  its  entrance,  and  for  a  long  distance  otf,  by  many 
Tide.  oyster-banks,  which  are  dry  at  low  water.     The  tide  rises  21  feet. 

About  H  milps  up  tlte  river  from  the  bar,  is  the  Fort  of  St.  Mark's,  situated  on  a  point 
which  forms  the  confluence  of  the  river,  of  which  the  east  branch  is  called  St.  Mark's. 
and  the  other  Warcaller.  The  shoal  water  which  is  found  in  this  river,  is  also  found  ail 
over  this  largo  bay,  and  8  feet  is  the  best  water  in  the  channels. 

St.  .Mark's  River  aflords  8  foot  water  at  its  mouth  at  hi£;h  water,  and  8  miles  lower 
down,  sjood  anohoraiii'  for  vessels  drawing  10  foot  Here  are  two  bars,  one  3  miles  bdlow 
Fort  .St.  Mark's,  called  the  Devil's  Klbow.  with  a  depth  over  it  of  8  feet  at  high  water- 
the  other  calU'il  the  Outer  liar,  8  miles  from  the  Fort.  From  this  bar  to  the  Devil's  K|! 
bow  the  average  depth  is  10  feet;  the  channel  takes  a  sudden  turn  at  the  Devil's  Ellmw 
and  the  width  is  rcilucod  to  about  40  feet  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  From  the  Devil's  K|. 
bow  to  Fort  Sf.  Mark's.  8  feet  can  be  carried  through  at  high  water.  The  place  culled 
the  .Spanish  FIolo.  .'5  miles  within  the  outer  bar,  is  the  best  place  to  anchor;  the  depth  is 
12  feet  at  high  wati^r.  The  outer  bar  is  in  some  way  connected  with  the  extensive  slinl- 
low  banks,  which  to  the  oast  end  and  west  obstruct  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  servo  to  pro- 
tect the  anchorage  within  the  outer  bar,  which  is  the  only  shelter  for  vessels  drawiii"  lo 
feet  water  from  the  S.  W.  Cape  to  Espiritu  Santo. 

From  Apalache  Bay  the  coast  bonds  o(F  to  the  southward  and  eastward  to  the  River 
Suwannee  in  Vassasousa  Hay,  wliich  is  23  leagues  distant  from  the  River  of  .\paliulio. 
Oyster-banks  ,)bstruct  this  bay,  and  the  Suwannee  cannot  be  entered  at  high  tide  by  ves- 
sels drawing  more  than  5  feet. 
Cedar  Keys.  CED  VFl  KE'lTS. — South,  a  little  east,  10  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Suwannee,  are 
Cedar  Keys.  Tlio  Sea-horse  shoal  boars  off  7  miles,  in  a  S.  W.  direction,  from  i{ird 
Keys.  The  channel  is  buoyed  olf,  and  pilots  can  bo  obtained.  The  latitude  of  Sea-horse 
Key  is  20°  7'  N.,  long.  82=  56'  W. 

Fifty-five  miles  south  of  Cedar  Keys,  lies  the  Key  Anclote,  or  Anchor  Island,  and  before 
you  come  to  it  you  may  discover  the  coast.  The  whole  of  the  coast  from  S.  W.  Cape  to 
this  key,  is  so  shoal,  that  at  ten  leagues  from  the  land  you  have  but  5  and  6  fatlmnis,  nnil 
two  loagui's  you  will  have  from  G  or  7  feet-  Key  Anclote  is<1istant  across  from  tlio  miiin 
land  four  miles,  and  in  length  about  eight  miles  north  and  south  ;  it  is  divided  into  three 
parts,  aril  its  south  part  has  gooii  anchorage  in  3  fatliiims  water. 

From  Key  AiKdote  the  coast  runs  S.  E.  by  E  3i)  miles  to  the  entrance  to  Tampa  llav, 
or  IJahia  del  Espiritu  Santo.  The  coast  between  is  clear  and  deepen*  than  the  antiMiur. 
At  3  leagues  from  the  land  you  will  have  (i  fathoms  water,  and  no  imiXMlimi'iit  to  your 
keeping  in  witii  it  by  tlie  lead.  O.f  this  coast  there  are  various  keys,  which  lie,  at  most, 
only  four  miles  from  the  main. 

From  Tiimpa  the  coast  continues  S.  E.  by  S.  22  leagues,  to  the  Ray  of  St.  Carlos:  nil 
this  pier(M)f  coast  is  b  irdered  with  kt>ys  which  lie  about  4  miles  olf  from  the  main  liind; 
the  whobi  is  clear  with  the  exception  of  a  sand-bar,  which  runs  off  from  what  is  ciilli'd 
]5oca  (^iiara/ote,  which  is  an  opening  formed  by  two  of  the  above  mentioned  keys,  and  ij 
distant  from  Tampa  21  miles.  On  this  bar  there  are  2  fathoms  water,  and  all  aliin;;llie 
coast  yon  will  have  1  fathoms  at  .5  or  H  miles  from  it,  so  that  there  is  no  danger  in  keeping 
hi  with  it  by  the  lead. 

Carlos  Bay  is  a  argo  entrance  made  in  the  coast,  in  which  are  emptied  various  rivers, 
whose  months  are  covered  by  many  keys  ami  shoiil^,  which  leave  between  them  channi'lj 
more  or  less  wide  :  tht>  northertiniost  is  called  Fj-iar  (raspar,  and  has  0  feet  water;  the 
next,  called  Boca  Grande,  is  the  deepest,  having  11  feet  water.  This  bay  is  only  "no: 
for  vessels  of  H  feet  draught,  by  the  little  shi'lter  which  it  alFonls  in  galcM  in  winter;  and 
althou;;h  the  holding  groiitnl  is  gornl,  yon  aveobligi'd  to  look  fir  the  bends  of  tint  Ikiv  to 
sliidter  yon  from  the  wiml  which  blows.  The  tide  rises  two  feet,  and  when  tlio  wind  u 
Tide.  off  shore,  it  runs  with  great  velocity. 

The  key,  whose  innlh  i-xtreine  forms  wliat  is  call(>d  Roca  Cautivo,  is  the  same  who^e 
southern  extreme  form-"  Boca  Ciega.  which  is  the  opening  whi(di  said  k(^y  forms  to  the 
northward,  and  S mihid  to  the  southward.  This  opening  extends  to  Shoal  Lagoon,  wliith 
c<imininricates  bv  various  shcil  cliinne!.!  with  l>  ly  St.  ('irlos. 

Ki^y  Sanibel  has  <_'i)[)  1  iimdioi-agtt  on  its  smitii  part  in  2  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  v/'mk 
This  anch'iiMge  of  S  mil).'!  is  kniwn  by  a  pd'u  tree,  two  leagues  to  the  soiilliw.inl  of  it, 
and  is  the  only  ono  you  so.;  on  the  wliole  coist.      Po  anchor  in  Sauibel,  it  is  uocossiiiyto 


'*rw 


BLUNTS   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


269 


fan  with  cnre,  nnd  the  lead  in  hand,  thnt  you  tniiy  avoid  the  shoiil  bottoms  which  run  ofT 
four  miieB  from  Sanibel,  and  the  lieys  S.  K,  of  it. 

From  Sanibel  the  coast  runs  S.  E.  i)y  K.  eleven  leagues  to  Point  Largo,  or  Key  Roman. 
1'his  piece  of  coast  is  clean,  having  3  fathoms  ut  2  miles    from  the  liiiul.     Point  Largo 
geiida  out  S.  and  S.  W.  of  it  a  shoal,  which  runs  from  it  seven  milos.  and  the  coast  bend- 
ing to  the  eastward  forms  a  bay  of  12  feet  water,  in  which  vesst-ls  of  light  draft  may  en-  ^ 
ternnd  find  shelter  from  winds  any  way  on  the  northern  board. 

The  coast  from  hence  runs  S.  S.  E.  twonty-tive  leaguea  to  Cape  Sable,  which  is  the 
gouthernniost  promontory  of  the  peninsula  of  East  Florida. 

The  whole  of  the  coast  has  regular  and  clean  soundings,  whence  the  lead  is  the  best 
juiile. 

BOCA  GRANDE,  or  CHARLOTTE  HARBOR.— The  course  into  Charlotte  Har-  BocaGrande. 
boris  K.  N.  E.     Charlotte  Harbor  forms  a  large  bay  of  8  or  10  miles  in  width,  but  very  or  Charlotte 
slioal,  having  only  from  10  to  12  feet  water.  Harbor. 

In  entering  this  harbor  you  pass  between  Boca  Grande  Key  and  Casperillo  Key.  bearing 
JJ.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  from  each  other,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  having  six 
fiithoms  water  between  them.  When  Casperillo  Point  bears  N.  E.  by  E.,  distant  four 
miles,  you  are  then  up  with  the  outer  bar.  which  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  widih, 
liaving  three  fathoms  water  at  low  tide.  The  current  sets  in  and  out  of  the  harbor  at  the 
rate  of  yi  knots,  running  in  7  and  out  5  hours.  The  entrance  of  the  harbor  may  be  known 
by  a  bunch  of  trees  at  the  northward    and  westward  of  the  entrance. 

N.  B.  This  harbor  produces  the  finest  oysters,  and  the  greatest  variety  of  fish,  wild 
fowl  and  deer,  of  any  other  upon  the  whole  coast. 

TAMPA  B.\Y. — The  next  horbor  to  the  N.  W.  is  Tampa  Buy,  or  Spiritu  Santo.    Tampa  Bay. 
In  entering  the  Ship  Channel,  bring  Mullet  Key  to  bear  E.  by  N.  and  Egniont  Key  E. 
by  S. :  the  N.  E.  point  of  Egmont  Key  is  bold.     Keep  midway  between  the  two  keys, 
leaving  Egmont  Key  on  the  starboard,  and  Mullet  Key  on  the  larboard  hand,  having  from 
3  to  5  fathoms  water.     The  bar  extends  off  from  Egniont  two  miles.     At  high  water  on   High  wattr. 
the  bar,  2i  fathoms. 
On  Egmont,  Key  there  is  a  fixed  light,  40  feet  high.  Light. 

Directions  for  the  IF.  S.  Passage  to  Tampa  Buy. — Bring  the  S.  W.  end  of  Egmont 
to  bear  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  run  for  it,  in  2i  and  3  fathoms  water,  at  low  tide. 
One  high  tide  in  12  hours;  runs  in  six  and  out  six  hours. 

This  bay  has  sufficient  depth  of  water  for  frigates  ;  for  there  are  within  it  5  and  6  fath- 
oms water,  and  although  there  is  a  bar  at  its  entrance,  the  least  depth  on  it  is  3,1  fathoms. 
The  entrance  is  obstructed  by  several  sand-banks,  upon  which  rise  some  inlets;  be- 
tween these  banks  there  are  three  channels,  named  the  West,  the  South-west,  and  the 
South  east.  The  two  first  have  plenty  of  water  on  their  bars;  for  the  first  has  3.t  fiith- 
ouis.  and  the  second  has  23  fathoms.  The  channels  are  clear,  and  to  take  them  there  is 
no  necessity  fur  instructions,  as  the  shoals  are  distinctly  seen  at  high  water,  and  at  low 
wiitor  they  are  dry. 

A  few  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  Tampa  Bay  is  Prince  Edward's  Islands,  the  western  one 
of  which  is  a  small,  round,  hijjli  island ;  the  course  of  these  islands  from  this  to  St.  Mark's 
forms  a  deep  shallow  bay  ;  the  shoal  ground  runs  7  miles  from  the  land,  and  the  bank  is 
nearly  up  and  down,  with  3  fathoms  along  the  edge  of  it. 

A  li"hthouse,  73   feet  high,  containing  a  fixed  light,  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  en-    Lighthouse. 
trill  30  to  St.  Mark's. 

ST.  MAKK'S.— If  you  are  bound  to  St.  Mark's  and  fall  in  to  the  S.  E.  of  it,  work  St.  Mark's. 
oloag  this  bank,  which  will  bring  you  up  to  the  mouth  of  the  river :  and  if  you  wish  to 
run  into  I*ort  St.  Mark's  Harbor,  the  entrance  affords  12  feet  water,  and  you  will  see  on 
tiie  N.  E.  b;ink,  which  is  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  a  large  stake  sticking  on  it,  and  the  one 
on  the  other  side  has  three  stakes  on  it.  You  will  see  a  small  house,  on  an  island  four 
miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  river,  which  bring  to  bear  N.  by  VV.,  leaving  the  lighthouse 
on  your  starboard  hand,  and  that  course  will  carry  you  up  between  the  two  stakes;  when 
you  are  between  the  banks,  half  way  up.  you  have  good  anchorage.  From  this  up  to 
Kort  St.  Mark's  you  can  have  but  9  feet  of  water.  A  pilot  can  bo  obtained  hero  at  any 
time.  S.  S.  W.  from  St.  Mark's  lighthouse,  15  miles  distant,  lies  the  south  point  of 
Jnnies'  Island,  calhsd  the  S.  W.  Cape;  a  bay  makes  in  between  St.  Mark's  entrance 
Mid  this  cape,  into  which  the  River  OkonotVisky  discharges  itself;  this  river  is  shoal  at 
the  entrance,  and  the  shore  from  the  capo  to  the  light  should  not  bo  approached  nearer  « 

than  two  miles. 

A  shoal  having  throe  feet  water  on  it,  lies  E.  by  N.  from  the  cape ;  and  the  eastern- 
most end  bears  from  the  lighthouse  south. 

The  coast  trends  from  S.  W.  Cape,  S.  W.  ,\  W.,  37  miles,  to  Cape  St.  George,  which 
is  the  southernmost  point  of  George's  Island  ;  this  island  is  24  miles  long,  and  forms,  with 
Di)g  Island,  the  south  side  of  (Jeorge's  Sound.  The  east  end  of  Dog  Island  is  S.  W.  -J- 
W.,  7  miles  from  the  S.  VV.  Cape,  between  which  is  the  eastern  entrance  to  St.  George's 
Sound.    Dog  Island  is  about  ti  miles  in  length. 


m 


«^PiPPW««"»HilP 


mmmmmm 


270  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Do/f  Island         DOG  ISLAND  LIGHT  is  a  revolving  light  on  tho  wnst  end  of  Dog  Islnnd.  and 
light.  50  feet  high.     It  revolves  in  three  minutes,  mid  bours  frciin  the  bur  N.  i  K.,  distant 

miles.  To  distinguish  it  in  the  dny  time  from  the  i^^'.ithouses  of  St.  Mark's  and  Si 
George's,  it  litis  a  bliick  horizontal  strip  near  the  top. 
Middle  En-  MIDDLK  KNTR.VNCK  IN  PO  ST.  (JKOIKJK'S  SOUND.— For  vessels  drawinl 
trance  into  12  feet  of  \Viit(>r  this  oiitniiice  is  to  bn  taken,  iis  yon  cannot  carry  into  the  iniiin  oiiti'iinc 
St.  George's  so  called,  whioli  is  between  the  N.  W.  end  of  St.  George's  Island  and  St.  Vincent's  Isi 
Sound.  and,  over  11    (ei't  at  high  water.     The  middle   entrance   or   passage  into   St.   ({eori'o 

Sound  is  between  the   west  end  of  Dug  Island  and  the  east  end  of  St.  George's  laliin 
and  is  about  3  miles  wide ;  it  is  ratlicr  dilfi(Milr  to  find  for  strangers,  as  the  west  end 
Dog  Island  and  the  east  end  of  St.  (ieorge's  Island  are  both  low  sand-beaches,  and  thci 
is  a  sanil-b(>a<di  on  the  main  directly  in  front  of  tho  passage,  so  that  it  looks,  at  3  ur 
miles  distant,  like  one  continued  beaidi. 

After  making  the  passage,  steer  for  it,  keeping  most  towards  Dog  Island,  as  the  chiinn 
is  altogether  on  Dog  Island  side.  You  will  soon  see  a  large  green  buoy,  which  lies 
the  best  water  on  tho  buoy  ;  pass  close  to  this  buoy  on  either  side,  and  stand  in  N.  N.  \V 
iilongDog  Island  Reef,  which  cin  bo  pbiinly  seen,  until  the  eastern  point  uf  (ieorge's  Isl 
and  bears  S.  W.,  or  S.  W.  j  W.,  then  haul  up  the  sound  for  the  shipping,  say  abuut  W 
S.  W. ;  continue  on  this  course  until  the  oastern  point  of  St.  (ieorge's  Island  boars  nbiiul 
E.,  2  miles  distant,  and  a  black  buoy  on  shore,  well  under  St.  George's  Island,  bears  abum 
S.  E.  r,  S.,  half  a  mile  distant,  when  you  may  anchor  in  from  2  to  2^  fathoms. 

There  is  a  biirrel  buoy  a  short  distance  outside  the  green   buoy,  a  black  buoj'  on  Do 
Island  Ikcef,  ami  a  white  buoy  on  the  eastern  extreme  of  St.  George's  Island  Reef;tli.si 
buoys  are  not  to  be  relied  on,  as  they  shift  their  position  with  every  strong  breeze ;  tJK 
are  placed  there  by  tho  pilots ;  the  channel  being  perfectly  plain  and  the  reefs  visibia 
they  would  in  any  case  be  of  liitle  use. 
Light.  On  the  south  point  of  George's  Island  there  is  a  lighthouse  65  feet  high,  with  a  fixei 

light. 

Apalaehicola       APALACHICOLA  BAY — When  tlie  south   point  of  St.  George's  Island,  (wliid 
Buy.  lies  to  the  southward  of  Apalaehicola  Bay,)  bears  north,  two  leagues  distant,  you  will  I 

in  2.\  fathoms.     From  these  bearings  and  depth  of  water,  steer  N.  N.  W.,  or  N.  by  W 
until  you  make  the  large  black  buoy,'*  which  can  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  4  niilos;  by 
keeping  the  buoy  close  on  board,  you  have  the  bejt  water;  the  course  from  the  bnuy 
due  north,  until  you  bring  the  three  tidl  trees  on  St.  Vincent's  Island  to  bear  N.  E.,  thci 
run  for  them.     The  entrance  then  being  fairly  open,  steer  for  the  point  of  St.  (iiorgi 
Island,  or  between  the  point  of  that  island  and  St.  Vincent,  you  will  have  three  fiithonii 
when  over  the  bar,  deepening  gradually;  and  between  the  Islandfl  of  St.  (ieorge's  am 
St.  Vincent,  you  will  have  8  fathoms  when  fairly  in.     When  past  the  point  of  St.  Georje'i 
haul  to  the  eastward,  and  keep  from  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant  tioii 
St.  George's  Island.     The  water  will  shoal  in  this  course  to  2  fathoms,  soft  bottom,  wlie 
you  had  better  come  to  anchor  and  wait  for  a  pilot,  which  you  will  obtain  by  hoisting  the 
usual  signal. 

When  off  the  entrance,  in  6  fathoms,  no  inlet  can  be  discovered  between  the  two  isi- 
ands,  but  the  place  may  be  known  by  tho  bearings  of  the  laud.  It  is  a  low  sand-bench 
having  a  hummock  of  bushes  about  one  mile  from  the  west  point  of  St.  George's  Isiniid 
to  the  westward  of  which  are  four  umbrella  trees,  the  two  easternmost  standing  0  or  8  tW' 
apart,  at  top  connected,  and  at  a  distance  having  the  appearance  of  one  tree.  To  the  wisi 
of  these  trees  is  a  hummock  of  palmetto  trees,  which  stand  nearly  on  tho  extreme  wot 
end  of  St.  George's,  which  are  considerably  larger  than  the  hummock  of  bushes  bcr'nv 
mentioned;  and  these,  when  distant  so  far  that  you  cannot  see  the  beach,  that  bciiiiii;^ 
N.  E.,  appears  as  separated  from  tho  other  land,  and  to  form  an  island  by  itself,  but  whin 
bearing  N.  W.,  appears  connected  with  the  Island  of  St.  Vincent,  which  is  thickly  wood 
on  the  ea-    rn  end.     This  hummock  is,  however,  on  .St.  (ieorge's. 

The  south  point  of  the  Island  of  St.  George's  ia  thickly  wooded,  and  can  be  discerneJ 
when  in  10  fathoms,  bearing  N.  E. 

Should  you  have  a  foul  wind,  and  be  obliged  to  turn  to  the  windward,  keep  the  Isim 
of  .St.  George's  on  board;  when  fairly  to  tho  westward  of  the  south  point,  the  water  is 
good  near  the  beach,  and  soundings  regular. 

Directly  off  the  south  point  of  St.  George's,  there  is  a  dangerous  shoal  of  2  or  3  leiiguc 
extent. 

The  Shoal  of  Cape  St.  George  makes  off  at  least  6  miles  from  the  south  pnrt  (if  the 
island,  and  has  not  more  than  5  or  G  feet  of  water,  perhaps  less.     The  soundings  neiutl 
shoal,  on  the  W.  edge,  are  irregular,  from  3  to  4  and  2  fathoms. 


*  An  Island,  called  Flag  Island,  ibrinerly  existed  at  the  entrance  of  this  port,  but  it  was  washei 
away  in  18J5 ;  the  buoy  alluded  to  was  placed  ou  a  ruck. 


^UPPRPR 


mmmm 


m 


mi 


Island,  and 
;  l''M  distntit ' 
VInrk'a  and  sl 

'essols  drawinl 
iniiiii  DtitniiicI 
Vincent's  Isl 
St.  (TOdrgHi 
Horge's  laliind 
IR  wont  011(1 
ho8,  mid  thcr 
ooks,  lit  3  or  j 

ns  the  chiitino 
,  wliioli  lies  ji 
id  in  N.  N.  \V1 
if  (iBori;e's  \A 
;,  siiy  iiliuut  \v1 
nd  boiirs  nbuu 
nd,  boars  aboul 
unis. 
k  buoy  on  DoJ 
nd  Roof;  th:. 
gbroo/.o;  tlioj 
e  roefs  visible 

h,  with  a  fixed 

Island,  (whic 
int,  you  Will  1) 
.,  or  N.  byW, 
of  4  inilort;  Ir 
oin  file  buoy  i 
virN.  E.,  i'li,.i 
if  St.  Gfoi'!;i'i 
>  three  fatluiiiii 
,  George's  am 
of  St.  George'; 
le  dJHtnnl  linm 
't  bottom,  when 
by  hoisting  the 

sen  the  two  isl- 
)W  sand-bench 
reorge's  Island 
iding  fi  or  f*  tWt 
I.  To  the  West 
extreme  \vi>t 
bushes  botliiv 
:h,  that  bciiiin; 
tsejf.  but  wlii'ii 
thickly  woui 

in  be  discerneJ 

eop  Iho  Isliini 
It,  the  water  is 

f  2  or  3  ieiiguis 

ith  part  (if  the 
udings  near  till 


at  it  was  wmlieii 

r 


^1 


^ 


n 


wmmmm 


mm 


"pqpPiP 


mrnm 


iiiifpiunapiiM'iKW 


,jPII     ii«  I  'i'-.    <lli|| 


tmmmamm* 


A  rovoW 

of  tllO  8IIU 

From  (,' 
forming  th 
niiiuili  of  I 
point  <i|'  til 
of  wiitcr  ft 
nboiit  oiw.  t 
bur  lit  low  I 

ill  »<I)IIU<   pill 

liiiii'  1)1'  mil 
'I'd  ciilur 

pilHH  II   Idllgl 

E.  1111(1  K.  r 
N.  \V.  bj 
driiw's;  in  i 
count  (if  II  t 
be  eiistily  (.Jin 
uiid  tint  hI)o« 

nw  OK 

C(mi|irflieii(| 
'J'luTu  an 
Croukoil  imd 
is  oiiH-sixth  ( 
above  two-tli 
Andrew 'h  Isl 
tniiico  in  tiboi 
very  lurj^e,  bi 
for  HJieltor  in 
eiitraiicH  yo>! 
N.  W.  by 
Sound :  in  ih 
to  the  liind.    I 
are  iijso  aoin 
ST.  KOS 
ored  blurts, 
iibiir  of  only 
cxtreiiip  of  th 
l)iiy  is  of  extr 
6  mill's.    Th 
Willi  tho  red 
buy  is  full  of 
From  St 
Tliis  long  am 
covers  a  sou 
it  tliere  are  ii 
for  Vi-snt'h  of 

N.  I).v  W.  fro 

m'g»\c  heigl. 

fi'i'in  the  wea 

minute  ten  a 

PEN  8  AC 

oil  till!  bill-,  2 

tlie  western  | 

it  very  consp 

le«gues,  iind  , 

piles,  wash  il 

There  nre  so 

ono  of  which. 

nenr  the  fron 

liariincns. 

The  chnnn 

ground  whicl 

I  t'le  eastward 


w 


BLUNT'S  AMERCIAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Deicripiion  of  Ihe  Coast  from  Cape  St.  Dlai,  Westward. 


S71 


V 


A  rovulving  light,  GSfeot  high,  hns  boon  orncti^d  on  Cnpo  St.  DIhb,  about  two  inilea  north    Light. 
of  tlut  south  point  of  the  cupo.     St.  JoHcph'B  liglit  hiiii  boon  diHcontinuiHl. 

KiDin  ('iipe  St.  HhiH  II  nnrrow  pi<i)iiiHiilii  or  tuMKut*  of  liinil  oxtonilH  N.  by  W.  17  inilfli, 
furrnlii);  tbo  liny  of  St.  Jonitph.  Thin  buy  is  iioiirly  biiui-l<icli*<il,  iiml  iiiiit  ii  \vi(bh  itt  its 
niDUili  of  iibdut  3  niibts,  iiml  is  iibont  14  niibis  in  Ittngtli.  Tlio  hiir  lidH  v/vnt  of  th«  nortli 
point  iif  tlio  poniiiHulii  iibout  iinti  inilo.  Within  thn  bnr  thu  buy  iittordii  from  .'5  to  ;!3  foot 
uf  wiiDM-  for  nbout  H  iiiiltm  u|)  iho  buy,  nnd  it  is  Mhtdlered  from  all  wiiiils.  'riit«  tido  rJMes 
iiboiit  oiM^  foot.  This  is  tliu  noxt  best  harbor  tu  FfiiHUColii  on  this  const,  thu  dcptii  on  the 
bur  at  low  tide  biting  17  fuet.  Tlin  tongue  of  land  that  forms  this  buy  is  so  niirrow,  thiit 
in  t<i)iiu<  places  it  is  only  two  cables'  length  in  width.  There  are  various  brenchus  in  it  in 
tiiiin  of  rains,  by  which  the  water  of  the  buy  unites  with  thn  ocean. 

Til  I'litor  this  bay,  you  must  coast  along  tho  tongue  of  land  in  4  or  5  futlioins,  until  you 
piiH8  II  liiiigueof  siind,  a  littlo  before  you  come  to  the  mouth,  from  whence  you  steer  N. 
K.  mid  H.  N.  K.  till  within,  always  coaHling  thu  tongue,  which  is  the  deepest  water. 

N.  W.  by  N.,  10  miles  from  St.  Joseph's  Bur,  is  the  entrance  to  tho  lliiy  of  St.  An- 
drtw's;  in  this  distance  the  coast  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  5  miles,  on  uc- 
cuuiit  of  II  shoal  that  extends  the  whole  distunco,  culled  the  Middle  Ground,  which  may 
be  eii!<ily  discovered  by  the  whiteness  of  the  water.  The  S.  K.  extreme  of  this  shoul 
uiiil  till'  above  tongue,  form  the  entrance  to  the  Huy  of  St.  Joseph. 

HA  V  Oh"  ST.  ANDRK  W'S  is  covered  by  Crooked  and  St.  Andrew's  Islands,  which    Bay  of  St. 
ciiin|iriliend  between  tliein  and  tho  Main  .St.  Andrew's  Sound,  which  lends  into  the  bay.        Andrew's. 

Tlu'io  are  three  entrances  into  tliis  bay;  the  eastern  is  through  the  opening  between 
Cruukoil  and  St.  Andrew's  islands,  the  depth  3  fathoms  on  the  bar,  and  the  channel,  which 
isiiiiH-sixth  of  a  mile  wide,  close  by  the  latter  island;  the  distance  between  the  islunds  is 
aliuve  two-thirds  of  a  mile.  The  middle  or  main  entrance  is  near  the  western  end  of  St. 
Aiiilrt'w's  Islnnd  ;  the  depth  21  feet,  nnd  the  channel  200  yards  wide.  The  western  on- 
tiiiiite  is  about  two  miles  N.  W.  of  the  latter;  tho  depth  on  the  bar  10  feet.  This  hay  is 
wry  huge,  but  as  yet  there  can  be  no  motive  for  ships  to  call  hero ;  but  should  you  do  it 
for  slieltiii'  in  bad  weather,  tho  bay  is  said  to  be  shoul,  but  from  the  muin  to  the  eastern 
entrance  yon  have  3  futhoins  in  the  sound,  and  good  shelter  uni!?r  St.  Andrew's  Island. 

N.  \V.  by  W.  from  St.  Andrew's  Bay,  distant  50  miles,  is  the  entrance  to  St.  Rosa's 
Sound:  in  the  whole  of  this  distance  the  shore  is  bold,  and  you  will  have  4  fathoms  close 
to  tliH  land.  On  this  coast  the  trees  are  very  thick,  and  close  to  the  shore,  where  there 
are  also  some  red  bluD's,  and  white  sand  hummocks. 

ST.  ROSA'S  BAY. — The  east  point  of  this  bay  is  known  by  some  bright  reddish  col-  St.  Rosa's 
ored  hill  lis,  which  are  upon  it.  Tlie  channel,  or  mouth  of  the  bay,  is  very  narrow,  and  Bay. 
II  bur  (if  only  5  or  (j  feet  impedes  its  entrance.  To  enter,  st ■  er  N.  till  you  pass  the  east 
extrenip  of  the  island,  whence  steer  N.  W.,  and  anchor  as  soo  i  as  you  have  shelter.  This 
buy  is  of  extraordinary  length,  extending  24  miles  to  the  eastward,  with  a  breadth  of  4  to 
6  mill's.  The  best  water  in  it  is  3  fathoms,  which  is  only  found  when  you  are  E.  and  \V., 
witli  tlio  red  clifl's  at  the  entrance,  about  two  miles  from  the  bar.  The  other  part  of  the 
bay  is  full  of  shouls  and  palisudoes,  navigable  only  for  boats. 

From  St.  Rosa  Bur  to  the  western  end  of  St.  Rosa  Islnnd,  the  distance  is  44  miles. 
This  long  and  narrow  island  lies  about  W.  by  S.  and  E.  by  N.,  parallel  to  the  main,  and 
coviMs  a  sound  of  the  same  name;  its  greatest  breadth  is  not  more  than  half  a  mile:  on 
it  there  are  many  sund-bluii's  und  some  scattering  trees.  The  sound  affords  a  navigation 
I'ur  vi'ssi'ls  of  less  druught  of  water  than  4  feet  to  Pensncolu.  ' 

PKNSACOL  A  LUiHTHOUSE  is  on  an  eminence,  about  40  feet  high,  and  directly    Pensacola 
N.  by  W.  from  the  b;ir;  the  lantern  is  about  40  feet  from  its  foundution,  making  an  ag-    lighthousg, 
prcijiitc  height  of  80  feet  above  tho  level  of  the  sea.  and  is  about  half  a  mile  north-westerly 
imin  the  west  point  of  St.  Rosa  Island,      'i  he  light  is  revolving,  each  revolution  one 
miiiute  ten  seconds. 

PENSACOLA. — Tho  Bay  of  Pensacola  aflbrds  a  good  harbor,  having,  at  low  water,  Pensacola. 
on  till?  bar,  21  feet,  i  he  eastern  point  of  its  entrance  is  called  Point  Siguenza,  nnd  is 
tlie  western  point  of  the  Islnnd  of  St.  Rosa,  on  which  fortifications  are  erected,  making 
it  very  conspicuous  from  the  sea.  St.  Rosa  Island  extends  E.  by  N.  md  W.  by  S.,  14 
leagues,  and  completely  fronts  the  whole  Bay  of  Pensacola;  it  is  so  low  that  the  seas,  in 
plies,  wash  its  tops,  tiiul  is  tio  where  more  than  one-fourth  or  one-third  of  a  mile  wide. 
There  are  some  red  bluli's  on  the  main  coast,  which  are  higher  than  tho  rest  of  it,  nnd 
one  of  which,  and  the  largest  of  all,  is  on  tho  eastern  side  of  Pensacola  Bay;  nnd  in  or 
near  the  front  of  the  entrance,  are  three  red  bluffs  adjoining  each  other,  and  culled  the 
BarnncBS. 

The  channel  entering  Pensacola  Boy  is  from  the  south-east,  nnd  turns  round  a  middle 

ground  which  projects  nearly  one  pule  to  the  S.  W.  of  Point  Siguenza;  it  then  bends  to 

j  the  eastward  towards  the  buy.     A  uar,  projecting  about  two  miles  to  the  south,  and  ex- 


IP 


rmmmmn 


""■""^IPBP" 


272 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Mobile  Bay, 
Lighthouse. 


Lighthoute. 


tending  from  the  western  end  of  St.  Rosn  Island  to  the  mnin  opposite,  hns  nt  low  tide  21 
feet  on  it.  The  width  of  the  bnr  taken  a  the  direction  of  the  channel  is  about  oiio  mile. 
The  entrniico  ixHween  St.  Rosa's  and  Foster's  Islands,  is  iibont  ii  mile  and  a  quiirttM-  wide 
After  piissing  the  bar  the  ontrnnce  to  the  bay  is  between  the  Barancns  and  Point  Sinu! 
enza.  This  port  would  be  difficult  to  recognize,  were  it  not  for  the  lighthouse  and  blutfs 
which,  consisting  of  3  adjoining  each  oth»jr.  cannot  be  easily  mistaken. 

The  interior  of  the  bay  affords  great  depth  of  water  and  good  l)ottom  for  anchorins. 
However,  a  considerable  extent  of  its  shores  are  shallow,  but  at  some  points  a  good  depth 
is  found  witiiin  a  short  distance  of  the  land,  viz  :  at  the  Careening  Ground,  18  feut  ai-B 
to  be  found  at  about  50  yards  from  the  shor'*;  at  Tartar's  Point,  where  the  Navy  YnrJ 
is,  30  feet  are  found  within  a  few  yards  of  the  point,  and  12  feet  west  of  it;  at  the  En- 
glish Careening  Ground  18  feet  can  bo  carried  close  to  the  shore. 

The  bur  is  not  the  only  difficulty  entering  Ponsacola.  sinco  you  meet,  when  within  it, 
the  Middle  Ground,  as  previously  stated;  and  ahhough  it  is  decidedly  the  best  hiirhor  in 
the  (luif  of  Mexico,  you  must  observe  the  directions,  and  frequently  have  recourse  to 
your  plan  of  the  port,  which  will  give  a  correct  idea  of  its  configuration. 

Vessels  coming  from  the  eastward,  should  keep  in  7  fathoms  water  until  the  light- 
house bears  by  compass  N.  by  W.,  when  they  can  stand  in  for  the  bar,  until  in  ;5i  futli. 
oms.  which  is  tha  shoalest  water  on  the  bar  at  low  water,  with  the  light  bearing  N.  by  W, 

Vessels  of  large  draught  of  water  should  not  attempt  to  enter  in  the  night,  as  tiiere  is  a 
Middle  (Ground  on  the  east  side  of  the  main  channel,  one  mile  inside  the  bar,  on  vvliicli 
there  are  not  more  than  7  feet  water,  and  the  course  around  it  is  very  circuitous. 

Vessels  nniking  the  land,  should  keep  off  four  or  five  miles,  nntil  they  make  the  light- 
house,  which  cannot  be  seen  until  nearly  opposite,  as  the  trees  on  St.  Rosa  Island  to  the 
east,  and  on  the  main  I.  ad  to  the  west,  obscure  it  from  the  river. 

To  come  in  over  the  bar,  on  which  generally  there  are  4  fathoms,  bring  the  light 
to  bear  N.  by  W.,  and  run  directly  for  it,  until  over;  the  bar  is  about  600  yards  across, 
on  which  is  u  buoy;  soon  as  over,  the  vvater  deepens  to  5  and  6  fathoms,  when  run  N. 
W.  until  the  lighthouse  bears  N.,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Middle  Ground,  when  run  fur  it 
until  within  the  point  of  St.  Rosa  Island;  then  haul  up  east  until  the  west  end  of  St. 
Rosa  Island  bears  S.  W.,  when  you  may  anchor  in  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  safe  from  all 
winds. 

Small  vessels  drawing  pot  more  than  14  feet,  can  bring  the  light  to  bear  N.  |  W,, 
and  stoer  for  it  in  the  night  until  within  half  a  mile,  where  they  can  anchor  with  the 
wind  offshore;  but  if  they  have  a  fair  wind,  they  can  steer  E.  by  N.  until  sheltered  by 
St.  Rosa  Island,  where  they  can  anchor  in  a  "jod  harbor  until  daylight,  as  it  is  every. 
whe.'e  excellent. 

Vessels  coming  in  or  going  out  on  ebb  tide,  should  (preserving  the  necessary  depth  of 
water)  keep  near  the  eastern  edge  of  the  channel,  uS  the  tide  runs  to  the  south-west 
across  the  Caucus  Shoal,  and  the  flood  sets  directly  over  the  Middle  Ground. 

Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  10  feet  water,  can  pass  through  a  small  chunnei  be- 
tween the  Middle  Ground  and  the  Point  of  St.  Rosa  Island. 

Oilier  Direclions  for  Pcnsacola. — Run  along  the  coast  in  from  6  to  7  fathoms  water,  until 
the  light  bears  N.  by  W. ;  then  steer  direct  for  it.  In  crossing  the  bar  you  wdl  Iwve 
from  3  to  34  fathoms  in  the  best  water.  AftbV  you  cross  the  bar  and  deepen  the  water. 
you  must  haul  more  to  the  westward,  and  keep  tne  'arbnard  shore  best  on  board  to  iivind 
the  Middle  Ground,  on  which  are  not  more  than  7  feet  .v:'ter  at  low  ebb ;  this  yon  leiive 
on  your  atarboard  hand.  After  passing  the  Middle  Ground,  steei  \.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  iin- 
ebor  within  half  a  mile  of  the  north  shore,  in  3  ftthoms  water. 

The  course  from  Mobile  to  Ponsacola  is  E.  N.  E.,  distant  about  38  miles. 

From  Ponsacola  to  St.  .Joseph's  the  course  is  E.  i  S.,  distant  9.0  miles. 

The  coast  from  Pensacola  to  St.  Andrew's  is  very  bold,  and  yua  may  keep  within  hiilf 
a  mile  from  the  shore. 

From  Petisacolo  Bay  the  coast  trends  W.  by  S.  to  Pentido  Bay,  distant  11  miles;  this 
bar  is  subject  to  change,  and  affords  but  about  4  feet  water,  and  28  miles  to  the  westward 
is  the  bar  and  entrance  to  Mobile  Bay. 

MOBILE  BAY. — A  lighthouse  is  erected  on  Mobile  Point;  the  lantern  is  55  wt 
above  the  ocean  level,  and  shows  a  revolving  light  of  one  minute  in  duration.  S.  5- 
E.  from  the  light,  5  miles  distant,  you  have  3  fathoms  on  the  bar.  TLa  east  end  of  Dau 
phin  Ibland  will  then  bear  N.  N.  W.  \  W.,  and  Sand  Island  (just  above  water)  will  be 
on  the  middle  of  Dauphin  Island.  On  Sand  Island  there  is  a  lighthoui^e  containii\;a 
fixed  light  50  feet  high. 

The  entrance  to  Mobile  Bay  is  between  Mobile  Point  and  the  eastern  point  of  i)au- 
phin  Island ;  the  distance  between  them  is  34  miles.  To  the  south  of  Daupiiin,  ate 
one  mile,  is  Big  Pelican  Island,  which  is  barren  and  of  small  extent,  and  E.  S.  K.  frmn 
the  latter  island,  distant  34  miles,  is  Little  Pelican  or  Sand  Islatiil,  which  is  of  butfeff 
yards  in  extent,  and  nearly  oven  with  the  wator's  edge.  A  bank,  project  iig  to  the  soutli 
of  Dauphin  Ibluud  and  Mobile  Point,  on  which  are  the  above  islands,  onatrucis  thr  eu- 


>' 


mmm 


mmmmmimn 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


273 


■itliiii  hiJf 


irii  h  55  .Wt 
ilion.  S.6- 
mill  of  Diiu 
illcf)  will  1)6 
coiitainir'a 


Itnoee  to  the  bay ;  but,  howevor,  Hflfords  through  it  various  channels,  the  main  one  having 
|5  feet  on  the  bar  at  the  lowest  tide.  The  interior  of  this  bay  has  water  enough  for  any 
(D^el  that  ran  pas"  over  the  bar ;  but  un  account  of  a  shoal  formed  r.pposite  the  mouth 
of  l^^S  River,  11  js  south  of  the  town,  vessels  drawing  more  than  8  or  9  feet  cannot. 
It  low  tide,  ascena      ^  bay  further  up. 

By  following  cIoh^.  to  the  south  shore  of  "Oauphin  Islund,  and  having  Big  Poliean  Isl- 

ind  on  the  starboard  hand,  coming  from  (       westward,  vessels  drawing  7  feet  water  can 

eater  the  Imy  nt  lov  water ;  but  to  do  tti  ^,  you  must,  when  the  east  point  of  Dauphin 

[Island  is  north  of  you,  steer  to  the  southward,  to  avoid  a  narrow  sand-spit  which  projects 

glffr^m  the  point  li  mile  S.  S.  E. ;  haul  close  round  this  spit,  and  steer  up  the  bay. 

There  is  good  anchorage  between  Big  Pelican  and  Dauphin  Islands,  and  close  to  the 
latter,  for  vessels  drawing  12  feet ;  this  anchorage  can  be  entered  either  from  the  west- 
VAi'd,  by  steering  close  to  Dauphin  Island,  or  from  the  main  channel,  leaving  it  when  Big 
Pelican  Island  bears  W.  by  N.,  (about  2  miles  S.  W.  from  Mobile  Point.)  During  the 
prevalence  of  northerly  winds,  when  vessels  from  sea  are  prevented  from  entering  the 
bay,  this  anchorage  affords  good  shelter. 

Those  off  Mobile  should  recollect  the  necessity  of  getting  an  ofling  as  soon  as  there 
ire  appearances  of  a  gale  on  shore,  either  to  weather  the  Balize,  or  which  is  better,  to 
take  in  time  the  Road  of  Naso,  as  destruction  is  irevitablt.  if  you  come  to  anchor  outride 
Hiibile  Bar  during  the  gale. 

Strangers  approaching  .Mobile  Point  in  the  night,  should  keep  in  10  fathoms  water  till 
t^e  light  bears  north,  to  avoid  the  dangerous  sands  lying  to  the  eastward,  and  the  shoals 
oiT  Pelican  and  Sand  Islands,  on  which  is  a  beacon,  to  the  westward  of  the  bar.  Beacon. 

In  running  in  for  the  land,  should  you  make  it  to  the  westward  of  the  bar,  it  will 
ippeiir  broken,  as  it  consists  of  small  islands,  which  occasion  several  openings.  More 
to  the  westward  the  land  is  very  level.  Dauphin  Island,  on  the  western  point  of  the 
bay,  appears  high  and  bluff;  Mobile  Point,  low  and  sandy,  with  a  single  tree  on  the 
extppinity. 

Vessels  approaching  the  entrance  to  Mobile  Hay  in  the  day,  should  not  run  for  the  bar 
ob'il  the  light  on  Sa  :d  Island  ranges  between  the  east  and  west  ends  of  the  woods  on 
Ditjphin  Island. 

Vessels  not  drawing  over  10  or  11  feet,  and  with  easterly  winds,  may  haul  in  for  the 
bar  as  soon  as  the  beacon  comes  on  within  the  west  end  of  the  woods,  and  keep  it  on 
thus  until  they  get  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  when  they  will  gradually  haul  more  northerly ; 
It  this  time  all  the  dangers  will  be  vi^tible.  Heavy  ships  must  bring  the  beacon  on  with 
the  centre  of  the  woods,  and  cross  the  bar  with  it  thus,  in  about  18  feet  water,  steering 
up  N.  N.  W.  until  abreast  or  past  the  beacon  and  island  on  the  larboard,  from  which  au 
extensive  shoal  makes  in  every  direction.  Within  the  bar  are  two  buoys,  the  first  to  be 
left  on  the  starboard,  and  the  second  on  your  larboard  hand.  The  channel  up  thence  is 
deep  and  plain.  Mobile  Point  lighthouse  bearing  between  N.  and  N.  N.  E.  Tide  rises  IHdet 
ii  feet. 

Other  Direclionafor  Mobile. — Bring  Sand  Island  light  to  boar  N.  W.,  and  run  direct  for    Other  Dirw- 
it,  until  one-quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  light ;  then  bring  Mobile  Point  light  (which  is  a  re-   tiotu. 
Tolving  light)  to  bear  N.  by  £.  and  run  for  it,  leaving  it  on  your  starboard  hand  about  J  of 
1  mile  distant :  you  may  then  steer  N.  i  W.  up  the  bay  about  25  miles ;  you  will  then  ob- 
tain n  pilot  over  Dog  River  Bar,  and  up  to  the  city. 

In  running  in  for  Sand  Island  light,  you  will  cross  the  bar  in  from  3i  to  3  fathoms  water. 
After  crossing  the  bar,  should  you  have  the  wind  ahead,  you  must  not  stand  further  to  the 
westward  than  into  G  fathoms  water,  or  to  the  eastward  in  less  than  9i  fathoms. 

From  Mobile  Bay  to  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis,  the  distance  is  65  miles  west :  on  this 
extent  of  coast  there  is  a  chain  of  islonds  parallel  to  the  main,  forming  a  sound,  which 
otfurds  a  partial  inland  navigation,  and  is  about  7  miles  wide.  This  coast  is  r.arshy,  but 
at  two  or  three  miles  f>-'/m  the  shore  it  is  covered  with  pines  and  oaks.  The  islands  are 
landy. 

The  sound  enters  Mobile  Bay  between  the  main  and  Dauphin  Island.     At  this  place 
the  bottom,  formed  by  oyster-b»ds,  presents  three  shallow  passes,  viz.:  Pass  Aux  Huiters, 
I  wiih  a  depth  of  three  feet  at  high  water ;  Pass  Guillori,  2  feet  at  common  high  tides,  and 
I  the  Pass  au  Heron,  with  nearly  5  feet. 

Dauphin  Island  is  7  miles  in  length,  and  the  next  succeeding  is  Pettit  Bois  Island.     The 
entrance  bet.  een  these  two  is  one  mile  wide,  and  the  depth  of  water  5  feet.     Pettit  Bois 
I  Island  is  narrow,  but  it  is  very  easily  known,  since  it  has  a  wood  in  the  middle  of  it :  it  is 
I  about  9  miles  in  length. 

The  passage  between  Pettit  Bois  and  Horn  Islands  is  two  miles  wide,  and  vessels  draw- 
ing 9  feet  water  can  enter  it.     The  length  of  Fiorn  Island  is  ab<iut  15  miles.     There  are 
I  Mme  groves  on  it,  but  at  the  eastern  part  it  is  entirely  barren.     There  is  no  lighthouse  on 
I  this  ialand. 

The  next  of  the  chain  is  Dog  Island,  a  cnall  island  lying  midway  between  Horn  and 
I  Ship  Islands.     To  the  east  of  Dog  Island  there  is  a  passage  close  to  Horn  Island,  of  1 8 

18 


mmm* 


874 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


feet :  but  to  the  west  there  is  no  passHge,  as  the  shoal  which  extends  off  from  Ship  Ig). 
and  extends  beyciid  Dog  Island,  having  a  channel  of  only  one-third  of  a  mile  wide 
The  distnnce  from  Horn  to  Ship  Island  is  about  5  miles.  Ship  Inland  is  7  miles  long 
and  wider  than  the  re!>t  of  the  chain  :  in  its  middle  it  is  covered  with  herbs  and  some 
pines,  but  the  rest  is  entirely  bare.  There  is  a  well  of  very  good  water  on  it,  on  the 
north  side,  about  the  middle. 

West  from  Ship  Island  is  Cat  Island,  between  which  the  distance  ■ .  5  miles.  There 
is  a  bunk  which  puts  off  from  Cat  Island,  towards  the  west  end  of  Ship  Tslnnd,  having  a 
channel  of  only  a  mile  wide,  which  turns  round  the  west  end  of  Ship  Island,  and  in 
which  there  are  18  feet. 

Cat  Island  is  the  last  of  the  chain  extending  to  the  westward,  and  forming  the  Sound. 

Lighthouses.  On  its  western  point  there  is  a  lighthouse,  with  a  fixed  light,  45  feet  high,  and  nn  the 
main  land,  bearing  nearly  N.  W.  from  the  former,  there  is  another  lighthouse,  30  feet 
high,  with  a  fixed  light.  These  two  lighthouses  indicate  the  passage  througli  Puss 
Christian  and  Pass  Mary  Ann.  To  the  S.  W.  of  Cat  Island  are  several  keys,  disinnt 
about  3  miles  :  (which  are  neiir  the  coast,  and  called  St.  .Michael's  Keys  :)  this  ohnniiel 
is  no  where  less  than  15  feet;  but  within  this  part  of  the  sound,  vessels  drawing  more 
than  8  feet,  cannot  reach  the  Aux  Malheureux  Island,  or  steer  to  the  eastward  betwedn 
Cat  Island  and  St.  MaryV  Key,  or  enter  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  ;  thus,  between  the  Island 
Aux  Malheureux  and  this  buy,  the  sound  b(icoines  shallow  and  obstructed. 

The  impeded  part  of  the  sound,  in  the  dirccticm  of  Cat  Island  and  the  entrance  of  the 
Bay  of  St.  Louis,  is  called  i'ass  Christian  :  and  does  not  admit  of  vessels  drawing  mure 
than  8  feet  at  medium  tide.  This  draft  of  water  can  be  carried  through  Lake  BorgnB, 
From  Pass  Christian  to  Pass  au  Heron,  12  feet  can  be  carried  through  the  sound  by 
keeping  on  the  island  side;  but  vessels  drawing  8  feet  must  have  the  sound  liotween 
Pettit  iJois  and  Horn  Islands,  and  shape  their  course  for  the  main  entrance  of  Mobile  Bhv, 
Lake  Ponchartrain  is  separated  from  Lake  Borgne  by  Pine  Island,  to  the  nortli  of 
which  is  the  entrance  called  Rigoletts,  and  to  the  south  called  the  Chief  Mentour;  tues? 
entrances  and  outlets  afford,  on  their  respective  bars,  in  Lake  Borgne,  a  dep'li  i*"  <)  f 
at  high  water,  and  8  feet  at  medium  tide.  This  depth  can  be  carried  througl)  \ 
within  a  short  distance  of  the  shore,  to  Madisonville,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Riimrlnie, 
and  to  the  mouth  of  Bayou  St.  Jean,  which  connects  the  city  of  New  Orleans  with  the 
lake. 

Bayou  St.  BAVOU   ST.  JEAN,  on  LAKE  PONCHARTRAIN.— To  enter  the  Bayou,  brin; 

J -"^^  n, on  Lake  the  lightto  bearS.  E.  i  S.     The  entrance  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  light,  and  usual  depth 

i  oncharlrain.of  water  in  the  channel,  6  feet. 

Lighthouse.  The  lighthouse  is  at  the  mouth  of  Bayou  St.  Jean,  has  one  small  fixed  light,  e'evutud 

48  feet  above  the  ordinary  surface  of  the  lake,  and  can  be  seen  in  a  clear  night  about  ei^jht 
miles.  It  is  135  miles  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  the  mouth  of  Clioiiinata  River,  35  niiirts  ,S, 
W.  from  the  Rigoletts,  15  indes  S.  \V.  from  Point  Resence,  and  5  miles  north  from  the 
cit}'  of  New  Orleans. 

South,  15  miles  from  Dog  Island,  is  the  north  point  of  the  Chandoleur  Islands,  which 
run  to  the  southward,  and  witli  Grand  Grosier  and  Isle  nu  Briaton,  which  bend  to  the  S, 
W.,  nearly  join  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi  River.     They  will  be  described  heiiat'ter, 

Li,%ht.  On  the  north  end  of  tlie  North  Chandeleur  Island,  there  is  a  fixed  light,  55  foot  hiijh. 

Chanddeur  CHANDELEUR  ISLANDS.— From  Passe  a  TCJutre,  (one  of  the  ei  rninces  of  the 

Islands.  Mississippi.)  the  coast  doubles  to  the  westward,  and  soon  to  the  northward,  to  tliP  piiinl- 

lei  of  '.^9°  27',  in  which  latitude  lies  Islo  au  Breton,  which  is  a  group  of  smull  keys,  vvhise 
western  limits  are  5  miles  distant  from  the  coast,  so  that  it  forms  a  biiy.  called  I'nzii  Bav, 
in  which  there  are  4  or  5  fathoms,  with  some  shoals  of  less  water.  East  of  Isle  iiu  lire- 
ton,  is  the  Isle  of  Grand  ({rosier,  from  which  a  ledge  runs  N.  N.  E.,  and  bn-iiks  to  tin 
Isle  of  Palos,  which  is  the  southernmost  of  the  Chandeli'urs.  There  is  a  gooil  pa^saje 
inside  the  Chandeleurs.  with  H  to  II  feet  waUM-.  but  a  good  pilot  is  requisite.  Fimn  Ut 
au  Breton  a  shoal  stretches  two  miles  S.  \V..  bold  at  the  very  point.  .Shelter  cnii  ho  had 
from  a  N.  E.  wind  inside  this  island,  but  the  navigation  is  difficult  for  strangers,  and  re- 
quires touch  survey  to  describe  it  properly. 

The  whole  of  the  Chandoleur  Islands  are  very  low,  with  some  myrtle  l)U3hes  upoi 
them,  and  form  a  chain  of  coast  very  nijurious,  and  to  be  dreaded  by  navigators,  not  only 
that  you  cannot  see  them  at  a  regular  distance,  but  because  the  winds  at  .S.  K.  (whichj 
blow  hard  in  winter,)  are  right  on  the  coast:  nevertheless,  there  is  a  gooil  shcltiM- (nnll 
ships  to  the  westward  of  the  north  extreme  of  tiio  Chandeleurs,  called  the  Road  (ifNiiso,! 
where  the  heavy  English  men-of-war  lay  dunn:;  the  siege  oi'  New  Orleans.  Tins  is  tin 
only  good  shelter  for  large  men-of-war  on  the  whole  coast  of  Florida,  (Tampii  Buvaiii 
Pensacola  for  srnHll  sized  frigates  excepted,)  not  only  because  it  i"  '!;'tV<nded  frotn  winJi 
on  shore,  but  because  there  is  no  l)ar,  breakers,  nor  impediment  whatever,  to  yonretiter- 
ing  it  in  all  weathers.  To  enter  the  road  of  Naso,  you  have  only  to  run  so  as  tu  doubhl 
the  north  point  in  5  or  G  fathoms  water,  which  will  be  one  mile  from  the  lanil,  and  tliei 
navigate  from  west  round  to  soutli,  keeping  in  4,  5,  or  6  fathoms,  ai.cording  to  the  draltoll 


I  the  ship,  and 
Smiles;  but 
the  north  poii 
the  whole  co 
but  tlioro  is  I 
the  beach.  ] 
ducfd. 

North-west 
Island ;   west 
mIIwI  St.  Mig 
Cat  Island  is  t 
rfiy  little  wall 
lar;;rt  shoal  rur 
Ihiii  half  a  mil 
mter ;  the  an 
in  -I  mid  5  fath 
iiiildle,  which 
181!)  cut  a  Sinn 
of  ii'i'id  water, 
Miiiid.  5   miles 
Isl  iiid ;  from  tl: 
leaves  a  chi 
ii:;il"iy  drop  int 
I  Isluiiil,  which  is 
(Jkvkr.\l  Ob 
off  It  bank  of  so 
I  IuJh  28"  50',  bu 
th«Siitid-bank  t 
'  wliolft  of  it  that 
)  const  is  very 
fccsi'JHs  is  often  i 
and  from  VV.  to 
and  September, 
I  tnikini;  the  land, 
.Vhw  Oi-lean.s.| 
Ion  this  part  of | 
I  til  the  eastward 

lint  is,  when 
[hero;  but  if  yoi 
'  'nt  to  witidwnn 
Ifss  distance  of 
I  tliH  quality  anc 
Tbi!  making 
laccniiiing  to  the 
Jtimnil  into  tho 
|abuiits;  ami  if  boi 

■Shoul,:   3-,;lj  gtl 

IE.  tioi::.^?riv'  ol'it 

]sO!llii,\  ..  ;'•   '  ■  /^ 

|p'iniili-i  I  .rt.-  ; 
«vii.  thu  s„  J,  jj 
JHipsiiniiiern  iJmi 
pom  P.'iisacola  i. 
|iit  fi'M  or  twelve  . 
liiif,  as  navigat 
|cl  III  ly  or  fog!5y 
F'  "iiflif,  the  80 
[linvij;:iting  to  the 
J'i'Xi'd  lit  time.s  w 
>|"mIIi.|  of  the  Ihi 
>■  of  .soundit; 
tvifh  very 
'ton  Key 

iiiJ  if  Cijaise 
'eli'ui-S!  and  if  yi 
"  fi-'iiit  of  the  CI 
'l"iiB  :  80  that  tin 
>ignu]  that  they  ai 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


275 


hip  Till. 
B  wide, 
es  long, 
111  some 
;,  on  the 

There 
[mving  a 
1,  and  Iq 

=1  Sound, 
d  on  the 
a,  30  feet 
>Sjh  Puss 
s,  distant 
8  ohnnnel 
ring  more 
I  hetween 
Lhe  Island 

nee  of  the 
vine  more 
,0  Horsno, 
5  sound  by 
d  l)Pt\veen 
[obile  Biiy, 
e  nortli  of 
our;  t'ups? 
h   /\)i 

I   ^J;.lll:ll;n;, 
ns  witli  the 

ayou,  brin» 
.usuiil  depth 

;lit,  Pioviiti'il 

iil)i)Ut  ei^lit 

inilrts  S. 

td  from  tlie 

uids,  whirh 
d  to  the  S. 
hortafter, 
(mt  \\\'^\[. 
iices  of  the 

)  tllP  |)ilV«l- 

keys,  wlinse 

1  I'.iza  Biiy, 

islo  lui  Brs- 

hrciil<s  to  tlie 

ood  \)!\mit 
Friiiii  Me 
r  ciiii  III!  hiiii 
I'ors.  mill  re- 
hushes  upon  I 
tors,  not  iiiiH'l 
S.  K.  (which I 
8liclt«M-t'or»i 

Olid  of  N'lmj 
Tliisistln 
m|);i  BiVV»'"l| 

I  from  wiiiilil 
to  your  Pi'tef-j 
>  lis  to  lioubltl 
mid,  iiiiii  'lw| 

til  the  dralWI 


the  ship,  and  you  may  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  when  the  north  point  bears  N.  N.  E.,  distant 
0  iniJRs;  hut  if  you  wish  deeper  water,  you  must  not  run  so  fur  south,  hut  anchor  when 
the  north  point  hears  E.  N.  E.,  in  5  tx)  G  fathoms  water.  In  the  Cliandeleurs,  and  almost 
the  whole  const  of  the  Mexican  Gulf,  you  can  get  water  by  digijinf;  wells  in  the  bench, 
but  tliero  is  no  other  wood  on  the  Chaiideleurs  than  the  drift  logs  left  in  abundance  on 
the  heach.     Its  lands  produce  nothing  but  the  myrtle,  from  which  the  green  wax  is  pro- 

ducfd- 

North-wosterly  of  the  north  extremity  of  the  ChanJeleurs,  14  miles  distant,  is  Ship 
Ishind ;  west  of  which,  8  milos,  is  Cat  Island,  and  to  the  southward  of  this,  various  keys, 
jiilled  St.  Miguel,  run  and  extend  out  from  the  coast  of  the  inlands:  between  these  and 
Cat  Island  is  the  pass  into  Blind  Lake  and  Lake  Ponchartrain,  in  both  of  which  there  is 
Td'V  little  wiiter,  especially  in  Blind  Lake.  Betwee  i  Cat  and  Ship  Islands  there  is  a 
Iflijrt  shoal  running  out  from  the  east  point  of  the  first,  which  leaves  a  channel  of  less 
ihiii  hiilf  a  mile  wide,  to  enter  to  the  northward  of  them  ;  this  channel  has  good  12  feet 
ffiiter;  the  anchorage  is  N.  and  S.,  with  the  west  end  of  Ship  Island  ?  of  a  mile  distant, 
in  4  iind  5  fathoms.  Ship  Island  is  long,  E.  and  W  ,  and  very  narrow,  and  widest  in  the 
niillle,  which  is  partly  covered  with  pines,  but  barren  at  both  ends.  The  hurricane  of 
li^l!)  cut  a  small  channel  through  Ship  Island,  li  mile  froiri  its  west  end  :  in  it  is  a  well 
of  irooJ  water,  wnich  is  on  its  north  coast,  and  about  midway  the  island.  East  from  Ship 
l^liiini.  .5  miles  distant,  lies  the  west  end  of  Horn  Island,  and  between  the  two  lies  Dog 
Uliiid;  from  the  first  a  shoal  runs  out  to  the  oast,  which  not  only  embraces  the  Dogs, 
leaves  a  channel  of  only  150  fathoms  wide  ;  the  l)ar  has  24  fathoms,  when  you  iinine- 
(liitHly  drop  into  5  fathoms.  East  of  Horn  Island  lies  Pettit  Bois  Island,  then  Dauphiu 
Islaiil,  which  is  on  the  \V.  side  of  the  entrance  into  .Mobile. 

(iKNKRAL  Obskrvations.-— The  whole  coast,  from  Mississippi  to  Cape  St.  Bias,  sends 
olT  a  hank  of  soundings  to  a  great  distance  from  the  shore,  whose  edge  runs  out  to  lati- 
tuJrt  28"  •'50',  but  the  depth  is  very  unequal;  this  inequality  is  very  clean.  If  you  except 
thu  sand-bank  that  lies  in  the  vicinity  of  Gape  St.  Bias,  you  will  find  no  danger  in  tlis 
ivhole  of  it  that  cannot  be  prevented  by  care  and  the  use  of  the  lead ;  and  as  the  whole  of 
lliR  const  is  very  low.  having  few  visible  marks  to  distinguish  it  in  \ts  whole  extension,  and 
busi'les  is  often  cloudy  and  foggy,  exposeil  by  the  continuation  of  winds  from  S.  to  W., 
iimUVoin  VV.  to  N..  which  blow  with  great  fiM'ce  in  winter,  and  by  hurricanes  in  August 
Mil  September,  nil  which  create  the  necessity  of  saying  something  on  the  method  of 
miliin»  the  land,  and  navigating  its  coast. 

Mew  Orleans.  .Mobile,  and  Pensacola,  are  the  .three  important  points  of  destination 
on  this  part  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico;  to  go  to  either  of  which  it  is  best  to  mnkii  well 
to  the  eastward  of  them  respectively,  when  comiiig  from  anyplace  S.  E.  of  them  ; 
thiit  is,  when  you  have  the  winds  easterly,  which  is  the  wind  that  predominates 
here;  hut  if  you  come  from  the  westward  of  them,  you  have  no  other  resource  hut  to 
beat  to  windward  from  that  point  of  the  coast  which  you  have  made,  and  tlie  gr(!ater  or 
Ifssihstance  of  it,  according  ns  you  are  best  accommodated,  with  respect  to  the  aeason, 
tliB  quality  and  size  of  your  ship,  &c. 

Thi'  making  to  the  eastward  of  your  destination  is  necessnry  to  be  more  or  less  distant 
acconlin:^  to  the  confidence  and  security  you  have  in  the  situation  of  the  ship,  so  that 
b mini  into  tho  Balizn,  you  will  look  for  soundings  in  the  meridian  of  29°  30',  or  there- 
abouts; nnii  if  hound  to  Pensacola  or  Mobile  in  the  meridian  of  (Jape  St.  Bias. 

Shoii'i  ■  '  '.u  strike  .soundings  in  latitude 2!)°,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  awhile,  so  as  to  make  it 

E.  not:  <"rly  ofit:  that  is  to  make  its  bearing  W.  southerly,  to  prevent  falling   into  the 

Isoiiilin  i.i'  ■  "i' i  j)arallels,  especially  in  winter,  when  it  is  best  to  run  heading  for  the  mid- 

'f  •  '.':■  v'lan'jirturs  :  in  this  route  you  find  no  regularity  in  soundings,  as  whatever  the 

Ipiiriiili'i  r;H>'  ii"  ,v<)U  will  ns  oi'ten  get  more  water  ns  le.ss :  nevertheless,  from  20  fathoms 

Jiwii,  the  sii  J.,Jin!^n  are  very  regular;  and  from  the  meridian  of  Pensacola  westward,  to 

Ihesiiuihern  liiiiiis  of  the  Cliandeleurs,  you  will  uet  10  fathoms  10  miles  from  the  coast; 

ifi'O!!!  PiMisacola  eastward,  you  have  10  fathoms  at  4  miles  from  the  coast,  and  2o  fathoms 

lotti-n  or  twelve  miles. 

lint,  as  navigating  for  the   Balize,  you  may  want  an  observed  latitude,  and  have  it  so 

Icliuly  or  fog^y  as  to  impede  making  the  land  :  in  such  circumstances,  or  to  run  f)r  it  in 

Itlii- tiiijiit,  the  soiindiiigs  will  servo  as  a  secure  guide,  for  which  you  must  recollect  that 

i:iivii;;iting  to  the  westward,  if  you  find  40  to  .'>()  fathoms,  loose  mud.  sticking  to  the  touch, 

|in:\i'il  lit  times  with  small  black  and  white  sand,  it  is  a  certain  signal  that  you  are  in  the 

IliiiMllel  lit  the  Bali/e,  and  from  that  depth  to   less  wafer,  you  will   always  find  the  same 

iV  of  soundings  :   but  if  from  40  to  ')0  fathoms  to  less  water,  you  get  bottom  of  fine 

:,  ivith  very  little  mud  or  without  it,  you  will  he  in  the  parallel  of  hetween  the  Balivue 

1    '     'ton  Kry  or  Island  :  if  you  get  small  white  siind,  you   are  in  the  parallel  of  said 

pj,  "iij  if  Ciiarsesand  and  snail  shells,  you  will  bo  in  a  parallel  between  said  key  and  Chiin- 

Beieiirs;  and  if  you  get  coarse  sand,  with  (iravel,  small  stones,  and  large  shells,  you  will  be 

liifront  of  the  Cliandeleurs.     From  the  Bali/.e  to  the  westward,  the  bottom  is  of  sand 

Miine  ;  so  that  those  from  the  southward   who  look  fur  the  Bali/,e,  sand  alone  will  be  u 

kigniil  that  they  are  west  of  it. 


•■/ 


876 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


When  navignting  N.  W.  and  N.,  from  the  getting  40  or  50  fathoms,  snnd,  and  in  di. 
miuishing  the  bottom  or  depth,  if  the  quality  of  soundingti  does  not  vary  till  in  10  or  12 
fathoms,  you  are  to  the  southward  ot  the  Balize  :  but  if  in  this  N.,  or  N.  W.  route,  you 
have  crossed  mud,  or  ooze,  and  entered  in  10  fathoms,  you  find  sand,  then  it  is  a  signal 
that  you  have  crossed  the  mouth  of  the  Balia»,  and  drawing  in  with  Breton  Island  nnd 
the  Chandeleurs.  The  better  to  explain  these  souudiugs,  we  shall  place  them  in  form 
of  a  table. 


In  the  parallel  of  the  Bnlize, 

Crossing  these  soundings,  you  cross 

this  parallel. 


Loose  mud,  sticky  to  the  touch, 

mixed  at  times  with  small  fine 

black  and  white  sand. 


In  the  parallel  of  between  the  Balize  and   }         Fine  sand  with  very  little  mud  or 
Breton  Island  or  Key.  ^  sand  alone. 


In  the  parallel  of  Breton  Island. 


Fine  white  sand. 


In  the  parallel  of  between  Breton   Island 
and  the  Chandeleurs. 


Coarse  sand  and  small  shells. 


In  the  parallel  of  the  Chandeleurs. 


Coarse  sand,  with  gravel,  small  stones, 
and  large  shells. 


'  of  the  Balize,  the  bottom  is  sand  alone. 


When  you  come  in  l(,.>i.ing  for  the  Balize.  either  in  its  parallel  or  that  of  the  CIind- 
deleurs,  you  must  take  care  not  to  get  foul  of  the  land  at  night,  but  maintain  your  pusi- 
tiou,  in  15  or  20  fathoms,  at  anchor  or  under  way;  but  if  you  do  not  wish  to  deluy,  for 
more  safety,  you  may  stretch  in  towards  the  Balize,  to  anchor  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  out- 
side the  bar. 

If  the  running  in  for  the  land  has  been  in  the  parallel  of  the  Chandeleurs,  as  soon  nsyou 
get  10  or  12  fathoms,  you  will  steer  S.  S.  W.,  trying  to  maintain  this  depth,  witliuut 
danger  of  running  aground,  or  among  shoals,  as  is  shown  by  the  following  brenknge  la 
the  soundings : — 

In  this  S.  S.  W.  route  there  is,  in  the  middle  of  the  soundings,  a  good  mark  to  know 
the  place  of  the  ship,  which  is,  as  soon  as  you  arrive  in  a  parallel  with  the  S.  end  of  the 
Chandeleurs.  which  is  as  far  up  as  Alcatraces,  the  depth  begins  to  augment  to  12,  14,  iitid 
18  fathoms;  which  is  athwart  with  the  Poza.  This  augmentation  ceases  as  soon  as 
you  arrive  abreast  of  Pass  I'Outre,  where  you  find  anew  the  10  fathoms;  this  kiiuw- 
ledge  is  of  importance  in  looking  for  the  Balize  with  security,  so  as  not  to  pass  tothesouth. 
ward  of  it. 

In  running  as  above,  be  careful  not  to  get  into  less  than  10  fathoms,  when  stretcliinj; 
from  E.,  or  from  S.  to  W.,  because,  from  this  depth  to  teas,  you  cannot  weather  the 
Biilize  with  the  wind  at  E.,  and  you  have  no  opportunity  for  running  for  the  ruud  uf 
Naso.  as  follows : — 

Placed  in  10  fathoms  water,  in  a  S.  E.  gale,  (and  no  appearance  of  the  wind's  cdnsing) 
nnd  getting  into  less  water,  you  have  the  resource  of  navigating  to  the  northward,  soiid- 
ing  continually  to  maintain  8  or  10  fathoms,  so  as  to  coast  the  Chandeleurs,  and  you  will 
know  you  have  passed  the  northernmost  point;  if  you  lose  the  oozy  souiidingij,  sam- 
times  mixed  with  white  shells,  which  is  fuund  oiTthe  Chandeleurs, and  finding  tinewhite 
and  black  sand,  you  may  steer  W.,  and  run  in  10,  B,  and  6  fathoms  to  anchnr,  undershel- 
ter,  in  the  road  of  Naso,  as  the  atmosphere  is  cloudy  ;  in  such  weather  you  can 
discover  nothing,  and  to  get  to  this  anchorage,  there  is  no  other  guide  than  thoieiid; 
but  if  you  can  see  the  land,  you  will  easier  get  to  the  anuhonige,  as  you  have  only  lo 
double  the  spit  of  sand  which  runs  off  the  N.  E.  end  of  the  Chandeleurs,  on  whiciithe 
sea  breaks  with  easterly  or  south-easterly  winds. 

This  convenient  resource  will  be  better  if  embraced  as  soon  as  you  consider  the  piissinj 
or  weathering  the  Balize  doubtful,  as  here  you  have  your  choice  of  water  fVoni  3  to  7 
fathoms,  sheltered  from  winds,  in  3  fathoms,  from  N.  E.,  and  in  7  fathoms  from  wiiidi 
from  E.  round  on  the  southern  board  to  S.  W.  It  is  also  necessary  to  advise,  that  a) 
soon  as  the  winds  haul  round  to  between  W.  and  N.,  you  should  lose  no  time  in  gcltlDH 
out  of  this  roadstead,  as  the  water  will  fall  from  4  to  G  feet. 

It  is  ngood  rule,  in  running  for  the  Balize,  to  get  soundings  in  any  parallel  betwMO 
29°  10'  and  29°  30'  or  35',  to  get  in  25  fathoms,  from  whence  the  Balize  will  bear  S.  W.; 
from  25  fathoms,  in  any  parallel  between  29°  10'  ond  29°  35',  the  Balize  bears  S.  W.; 
und  by  steering  that  course  you  will  hit  the  Balize  about  the  N.  £.  Pass. 


W 


bjiyed  for  dn> 
without  tou( 
(iiiys.  The 
vessels  of  the 
Isliind  cannot 
avoideil. 

The  S. 
stripes,  showi 
on  the  south 
the  liirbonrd 

A  iiglithou 
showing  a  rei 
building  is  pai 
The  princi] 
twoeti  3  and 
S.  S.  E.  from 
butnpproachi 
you  will  have 
™«y  run  in  tl 
see  tho  lighthi 
westerly:  tht 
prevent  being 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


277 


If  yonr  dostination  is  Mobile  or  Pensncola,  you  should  run  in  for  the  land,  the  east- 
ward of  them  respectively,  not  only  to  avoid  passing  the  port,  but  because  landmarks 
are  so  wanting,  and  the  const  so  low,  that  a  stranger  has  nothing  to  guide  himself  by,  ex- 
cept the  lighthouses,  the  former  of  which  shows  two  lights,  one  fixed,  the  other  revolv- 
ing, and  the  latter  a  revolving  light,  which  may  be  some  guide  to  the  navigator  :  neverthe- 
less, the  soundings  indicate  sufficiently  well  the  meridian  in  which  the  ship  is  found  ;  a 
little  more  or  less,  if  you  attend  to  the  quality  of  coarse  sand  and  coral  found  outside  of 
Innd,  which  is  a  sure  indication  that  you  are  oflT  the  east  end  of  Santa  Rosa  Island,  where 
you  find  the  same  quality  of  soundings  as  ufT  Tampa  Bay  and  the  other  parts  of  East 
Florida,  but  can  cause  no  equivocation,  because  the  points  are  so  distant  from  the  one  now 
treated  of. 

Directions  for  the  M'snsaippi,  and  to  prevznt  falling  to  the  Westward 


Lighthouse. 


Should  you  take  your  departure  from  the  Tortugas,  on  one  of  which  is  a  lighthouse, 
on  leaving  them  make  a  N.  W.  course  good,  and  you  will  fall  into  the  latitude  of  the  Ba- 
lize,  20  leagues  to  the  eastward;  keep  on  to  latitude  29°  20',  when  you  may  steer  W., 
or  \V.  h  S.,  to  25  fathoms,  then  haul  to  S.  W.  for  the  Balize,  taking  care  not  to  pass  its 
Intitude  in  the  night  time,  and  you  may  make  sure  of  seeing  Frank's  Island  light. 
Should  the  weather  be  thick,  keep  in  16  fathoms,  and  you  will  fall  in  on  Passe  a 
rOutre,  where  pilots  are  always  stationed:  but  should  you  see  the  land,  or  ve<<sels  at 
anchor,  if  the  wind  will  permit,  haul  to  S.  S.  W.,  or  more  southwardly,  and  lead  along 
in  13  fHthoms. 

On  Frank's  Island  the  lighthouse  at  the  entrance  of  the  River  Mississippi  is  built.     It    Lighthouse, 
contains  a  fixed  light,  elevated  78  feet  above  the  ordinary  surface  of  the  sea.  and  can  be 
seen,  in  clear  weather,  6  leagues  distant ;  your  best  course,  running  fur  the  light,  is  due 
W.,  and  vessels  may  safely  anchor  in  10  fathoms  water. 

The  following  bearings  from  Frank's  Island  lighthouse  are  the  mean  of  a  number  of  ex- 
periments by  compass : 

Piisse  a  rOutre,  N.  N.  W.,  distant  2  leagues:  S.  E.  Pass,  S.  S.W.,  one  and  a  half 
Ien!;ue. 

S.  W.  Pass,  S.  W..  distant  23  miles,  but  from  it  the  light  cannot  be  seen,  on  account 
of  the  cypress  growth  lining  the  sides  of  the  pass  itself,  as  well  as  the  intervening  mud- 
bunks,  which  are  generally  covered  with  bushes. 

Should  it  be  very  foggy,  as  it  sometimes  is  in  summer  and  fall,  eitheranchor  in  12or 
15  fiUhoms  water ;  or  stretch  to  the  northward,  ns  the  currents  to  the  southward  of  the 
bnr  sot  strong  along  the  land  to  the  southward,  and  by  keeping  to  the  southward  you  will 
be  liiible  to  be  driven  to  the  southward  of  the  south  point,  in  the  latitude  of  which  you 
will  have  .15  fathoms,  within  three  miles  of  the  land.  A  large  bell  has  been  provided, 
which  will  be  kept  tolling  by  night  and  by  day,  whenever  from  fog,  or  any  other  cause,  the 
light  or  lighthouse  cannot  be  seen  at  least  four  miles,  at:  which  di^taace  it  is  calculated  the 
bell  may  be  heani  in  moderate  weather. 

In  coming  from  the  sea,  the  S.  W.  Pass  is  said  to  have  advantages,  there  being  but 
few  shoals.  The  water  is  very  deep  close  to  the  bar,  and  the  softness  of  the  mud  sucli 
ns  to  do  little  harm  to  a  vessel,  even  should  she  ground.  Vessels,  after  making  the  light, 
are  often  blown  to  the  southward  of  the  Balize.  where  they  have  been  known  to  lie  em- 
bayed for  days  and  weeks  together.  Ships  drawing  IB  feet  have  been  ttiken  over  this  bar 
without  touching,  whereas  ships  drawing  I4i  feet  water  often  lie  on  the  S.  E.  bar  for 
diiys.  The  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  Passes  are  subject  to  changes,  although  much  frequented  by 
vessels  of  the  largest  class.  From  the  S.  W.  Pass,  22  miles  distant,  the  light  on  Frank's 
Isliind  cannot  be  seen.  Profiting  of  this  pass,  these  delays  may,  in  a  great  measure,  be 
avoided. 

The  S.  W.  Pass  light  is  65  feet  high,  painted  white  and  black  in  perpendicular 
stripes,  showing  two  fixed  lights,  one  elevated  30  feet  above  the  other.  It  is  on  an  island 
on  the  south  side  of  the  Nine  Feet  Channel,  about  three  miles  inside  the  bar,  and  left  on 
the  larboard  hand  on  entering  the  river. 

A  lighthouse  is  also  built  or.  a  shoal  or  island,  near  the  south  point  of  South  Pass,    Lighthouse. 
showing  a  revolving  light,  which  is  left  on  the  starboard  hand  going  into  the  river.     The 
building  is  painted  black  and  white,  in  horizontal  stripes,  05  feet  high. 

The  principal  entrances  to  the  Mississippi  are  the  N.  E.  Pass,  lat.  29°  07'  25",  be- 
tween 3  and  4  miles  S.  E.  of  the  light;  that  of  the  S.  E.  Pass,  lat.  29°  08',  4  or  5  miles 
S.  S.  E.  from  the  light ;  and  the  S.  W.  Pass,  22  miles  from  the  light  on  Frank's  Island  ; 
but  approaching  the  Balize,  you  should  keep  2  or  three  leagues  to  the  northward,  by  which 
you  will  have  good  soundings  to  guide  you.  When  you  have  struck  soundings,  you 
muy  run  in  the  parallel  above  directed  into  18  or  even  IG  fathoms,  and  you  will  then 
see  the  lighthouse  on  Frank's  Island,  and  have  the  Block  House  or  Balize  bearing  south- 
westerly :  the  anchorage  is  good  every  where,  and  should  it  fall  calm,  a  light  kedge  will 
prevent  being  drifted  by  the  current,  which  is  sometimes  pretty  strong  on  the  coast,  but 


Lighthouse. 


MM 


278 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


it  is  much  gfronger  in  the  latitude  uf  the  river's  mouth  than  elsewhere,  and  no  sountjingg 
until  you  come  close  in  with  the  lund.  In  runuing  from  Pusse  a  I'Outre  for  the  umiQ 
bar  at  the  S.  £.  Pass,  in  the  night,  it  is  not  safe  to  keep  in  less  than  15  fathoms  water- 
in  the  day  time  vessols  may  approach  within  B  or  lU  fathoms,  observing  to  kee\)  the  If-ad 
going.  Being  oil  I'asse  u  I'Outre  in  15  fathoms,  in  order  to  go  round  the  N.  E.  Puss  in 
lU  fathoms,  tlio  course  is  S.  S.  £.,  distant  2  leagues ;  from  tlience  to  the  ancltoruge  ulT 
the  bar,  S.  S.  W.,  Ij  league.  The  Block  House  at  the  Balize  bears  from  the  beyt  an. 
chorage  to  wait  for  a  fair  wind  to  come  over  the  bar,  W.  by  N.  H  1i.,  distant  2  leiigues 
where  will  be  tbund  8  to  11  fathoms.  At  the  entrance  of  the  S.  £.  channel  on  the  bur 
the  Block  House  bears  N.  W.  by  W.,  distant  5  miles. 
Common  COMMON  ERKOR  OF  STRANGERS.— Captains  not  acquainted  on  the  const, 

error  of  nre  frequently  alarmed  when  they  come  near  the  river,  by  the  appearance  of  the  wiitei' 

Sirangtrs.  particularly  during  the  first  summer  months,  when  the  river  is  high,  for  at  that  time  the 
fresh  water  of  the  river  rushes  out  with  great  force,  and  being  lighter  than  the  ocean  wa- 
ter,  floats  on  the  top,  making  an  appearance  altogether  singular  and  alarming;  for  where 
the  fresh  water  has  not  entirely  covered  the  salt  water,  but  leaving  spots,  it  has  the  up. 
pearance  of  rocks,  the  river  water  being  of  a  milky  color,  while  the  other  is  quite  duik 
and  changes  suddenly.  When  the  river  is  low,  the  white  muddy  water  extends  nbuuts 
leagues  ott',  and  when  high  about  5.  On  coming  into  it,  it  ripples  like  shoal  breakers,  but 
your  soundings  are  regular. 
On  the  set-  ON  THE  SETTING  OF  THE  CURRENT.— The  current  sete,  with  very  Utile 

ting  of  the        variation,  to  the  east;  and  when  any  variation  is  experienced,  it  is  either  to  the  uortii  ur 
current.  south  of  the  river's  mouth.     It  is  very  evident  to  every  man  of  reflection,  that  so  iuige  a 

column  of  water,  rushiug  into  the  ocean,  must  spread,  when  it  is  no  longer  confined,  and 
produce  diflerent  currents,  until  it  has  found  its  level,  and  will  be  found  to  vary  from  the 
'  original  course,  in  proportion  as  you  approach  the  edges:  allowing  the  current  to  set 
due  east,  1  have  known  two  ships  to  come  intoth?  rive>'  at  the  same  time,  and  the  unc 
complain  of  a  southerly,  and  the  other  of  u  northerly  current,  and  that  because  the  one 
had  been  to  the  south,  and  the  other  to  the  north  of  the  river's  mouth ;  however,  as  every 
stranger  should  get  into  a  proper  latitude  before  he  comes  within  the  influence  of  iis 
current,  I  do  not  think  it  necessary  to  say  any  more  on  that  subject. 
Entrance  of  ENTKANCE  OF  THE  RIVER— The  land  at  the  entrance  of  the  Mississippi 
t/te  Kiver.  River  is  nothing  more  than  mud-banks,  continually  increasing,  with  reeds  and  rushes 
growing  upon  it,  at  the  height  of  10  or  12  feet  above  the  water.  The  lighthouse  od 
Frank's  Island,  or  vessels  at  anchor,  are  generally  the  first  you  discover.  The  geneml 
winds  are  from  the  N.  E.,  and  you  should  avoid  getting  to  the  southward.  The  wiiidj 
nnike  a  difference  over  the  bar,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Mississippi,  and  the  general  depth 
of  water  is  from  11  feet  G  inches  to  14  feet. 

In  lut.  29°  04'  N.,  you  will  strike  soundings  in  45  or  47  fathoms,  soft  mud,  the  Balize 
bearing  W.  |  S.,  21  miles  distant,  when   in  15  or  18  fathoms,  soft  sticky    mud,  yuu  will 
Bee  the  Balize  bearing  S.  W.,  if  clear  weather.     With  the  Balii^e  bearing  S.  W.,  niij 
into  not  less  than  12  futhoiiis,  on  aci-ount  of  some  mud-banks,  scarcely  disueruihio  ubovr 
the  surface,  until  the  Balize  bears  W.  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  W.,  in  10  latlioms.     The  Ik- 
lize  bearing  N.  W.  is  good  ground  to  anchor,  and  advantageous  for  getting  under  way  to 
go  over  the  bar.     In  foggy  weather  run  no  further  in  for  the  land  than  15  fathoms,  aiiJ 
it  is  preferable  anchoring  in   light  breezes  to  being  drifted  about  by  the  currents,  wliith 
are  uncertain.     From  the  bar,  ur  entrance  of  the  Mississip|>i  Kivur,  to  New  Orleans,  i.« 
120  miles. 
Coast  7cestof       COAST  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.— West,  47  miles  from  the  S.  W.  Pass, 
the  Missis-       is  the  east  end  of  Timbiu!  •    Island  ;  in  this  distance  the  coast  bends  to  the  N.  W.  and  X 
tijijH.  VV.,  forming  a  bight  in  the  cot.^"^  in  which  is  the  entrance  to  Barrataria  Bay.     The  whole 

coast  in  this  bight  is  low,  and  covered  with  a  kind  of  rushes,  with  the  exception  of  nt'ew 
trees  to  the  cast  of  Barrataria  Bay,  The  course  from  the  S.  W.  Pass  to  Barrtitaria  I'ar 
is  W.  N.  W.,  and  the  distance  35  miles.  In  navigating  between  Timbalier  Island  and  the 
S.  W.  Pass,  you  should  not  come  in  less  water  than  4  fathoms.  The  coast  to  tlie  N.  L 
of  Barrataria  takes  n  turn  to  th«  S.  W,,  and  you  may  know  the  entrance  to  the  buy  by  a 
settlement  on  the  east  of  the  harbor,  'J'he  bay  is  about  10  miles  wide  in  every  dircctiuii: 
its  depth  varies  from  6  to  12  feet.  On  the  sea  side  it  is  covered  by  (iiaiid  Terre  I^liiiil, 
which  leaves  between  it  and  the  main  two  entrances,  the  eastern  of  whijh  is  lilliiij,'U|i: 
and  the  western,  called  the  Grand  Pass,  aflbrds  on  the  bar  9  feet  water.  To  the  eastil 
Timbalier  Island  the  La  Fourcbe  discharges  itself  by  several  mouths;  a  bar  luukesulf 
from  the  east  end  of  this  island,  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  about  two  miles. 

Timbalier  Island,  lies  nearly  E.  and  W.,  but  bends  to  the  northward  at  the  western]. 
It  is  10  miles  long,  and  fronts  n  bay  in  which  there  are  from  2  to  4  feut  water.  A  ^IkihI 
extends  from  its  west  end  2  miles,  in  a  west  direction,  as  far  as  the  east  end  of  Cnyu  Isl- 
and, which  is  the  next  succeeding. 

The  east  end  of  Cayo  lies  N.  W.  from  the  west  end  of  Timbalier  Island,  2  miles  dis- 
tant; it  is  4  miles  in  length  from  east  to  west.     Fresh  water  may  be  found  on  its  euil 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


279 


end,  nnd  likewise  in  a  small  bight  to  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  island.  Good  anchorage  for 
Teasels  drawing  6  feet  water  is  found  at  the  east  end ;  to  take  it,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
bring  the  S.  E.  |)oint  to  bear  N.  E.,  and  steer  for  it,  and  with  your  lead  for  your  guide, 
when  near  it,  haul  a  little  to  the  eastward,  until  the  point  is  N.,  when  you  may  steer  and 
nrichur  as  close  to  the  island  as  you  please.  W.  S.  W.  from  Cayo  Island,  H  mile  dis- 
tant, is  another  island  of  about  2i  miles  in  extent,  nnd  2  miles  further,  on  the  same  course, 
i9  the  east  end  of  Vine  Island.  The  shoal  water  extends  some  distance  otf  the  island 
lying  between,  and  you  should  not  come  nearer  the  shore  than  2  miles.  Vine  Island  is 
about  six  miles  long,  running  W.  S.  W.,  and  is  separated  from  the  Ship  Isle  by  a  small 
creek.  Ship  Isle  is  11  miles  long,  and  runs  west  until  near  its  west  end,  when  it  turns 
to  the  N.  W.  Fresh  water  can  be  found  at  its  west  end,  which  is  called  Racoon  Point. 
A  sbonl,  on  which  the  water  breaks,  lies  W.  S.  W.,  18  miles  distant  from  Racoon 
Point,  lilt.  29°  01' ;  between  the  point  and  the  shoal  you  will  have  from  4  feet  to  24  fath- 
oms. A  shoal  likewise  lies  in  the  meridian  of  the  point,  to  the  southward,  between 
which  and  the  point  are  2  to  5  fathoms.  Vessels  drawing  5  feet  may  anchor  under  Ra- 
coon Point,  by  bringing  the  point  to  bear  N.,  and  running  for  it,  and  giving  it  a  berth  of 
200  yards  ;  haul  round  the  point,  nnd  anchor  in  7,  8,  or  9  feet  water.  The  bays  formed 
behind  the  islands  lust  mentioned  are  shoal,  having  only  from  2  to  4  feet  water,  and  the 
shore  to  the  north  of  them  is  marshy.  Racoon  Point  is  about  7  miles  from  the  main, 
which  runs  about  W.  N.  W.,  41  miles,  to  Point  Au  Per.  This  part  o'  the  coast  is 
shual,  as  at  2  miles  from  the  coast  you  have  6  and  7  feet  water,  and  for  the  witole  distance 
it  is  marshy. 

On  Point  Au  Per  is  a  lighthouse,  showing  a  fixed  light,  elevated  about  70  feet  above  Lighthouse. 
the  level  of  the  sea,  lat.  29°  19'  N.,  long.  91*^  22'  W.,  and  serves  as  a  guide  for  vessels 
going  into  Achafulaya  Bay ;  it  bears  from  Belle  Isle  .S.  S.  E.,  12  miles,  and  from  the  en- 
trnnce  of  the  river  S.  by  W.,  10  miles ;  from  the  outer  buoy  E.  by  S. ;  going  in,  the  buoys 
ore  all  left  on  the  starboard  hand,  except  in  the  narrows,  where  there  are  two,  and  you 
go  between  (hem. 

From  S.  W.  Pass  to  Belle  Isle. 

On  leaving  S.  W.  Pass,  steer  W.  by  S.  about  18  leagues  ;  this  course  will  carry  you 
in  7  fiithoms  water  off  Timbalier;  the  coast  from  thence  to  Racoon  Point,  a  distnnce  of 
nbout  II  leagues,  may  be  approached  within  one  mile,  or  less.  South  8°  E.,  Hi  miles 
distant  from  Racoon  Point,  is  the  west  end  of  Ship  Island  Shnnl.of  twofeet.  on  the  eastern 
end;  it  is  6i  miles  in  extent  in  an  E.  and  W.  direction.  It  is  always  safest  to  pass  between 
thoshoiiland  Racoon  Point,  keeping  the  lead  going.  Give  the  point  a  berth  of  2  miles,  and 
yon  will  not  have  less  than  2  fathoms  water.  The  course  from  hence  to  Point  Au  Per  is 
nbout  N.  W.  i  W.,  northerly,  distant  10  lengues.  It  is  best  to  keep  the  lead  constantly 
going,  and  approach  as  near  the  land  as  your  draught  of  water  will  permit,  say  10  feet, 
to  avoid  running  past  the  liglit.  as  in  hazy  weather  you  cm  scarcely  see  the  light  in  21 
fiithoms  water;  latitude  of  the  point  29°  19'  N.  Bring  the  light  to  bear  E.  liy  S  ,  steer 
W.  by  N.  7  or  8  miles,  till  you  have  Tucka  Hummock  bearing  N.  N.  W. ;  steer  for  it 
till  you  have  Belle  Isle  bearing  N.  E.  by  .N.;  then  haul  up  into  the  bay  E.  N.  E. ;  the 
strunger  must  then  be  guided  by  stakes,  which  designate  the  channel. 


Rabbit  I.        Tucka  Hum.  Bayo  Sulle. 


Belie  Isle. 


One  channel  is  to  bring  Belle  Isle  to  bear  N.  N.  E.  and  steer  in  for  it,  but  this  channel 
is  iiiti  iciite,  nnd  not  generally  used.  Vessels  drawing  over  7  feet  will  find  much  difficulty 
in  getting  into  the  river. 

The  highest  part  of  Belle  Isle  is  130  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  It  can  be  seen  at 
a  considerable  distance,  there  being  no  land  resembling  it  on  the  coast. 

ACH/VPALAYA  BAY  AND  RIVER.— When  you  pass  Racoon  Point  steer  W.  by    Achafalaya 
S.  3  miles,  and  you  may  then  haul  up  N.  W.  i  \V.  for  the  Point  Au  Per ;  you  will  cross  Bay  and  Ri- 
the  bank  in  7i  feet  water,  when  you  bring  the  lighthouse  to  boar  E.  by  N.;  steer  N.  60°  ver. 
W,  until  Belle  Isle  bears  N.  by  E.,  then  N.  56°  W.  for  the  barrel  stake  ;  Belle  Isle  will 
then  bear  N.  30°  E. ;  then  steer  N.  50°  E.,  until  the  lighthouse  bears  S.  57°  E. ;  steer 
for  it  until  Belle  Isle  bears  N.  12°  W.,  from  thence  E.  3°  S..  until  the  light  bears  S.  3,i° 
E.;  thence  N.  47°  E.,  until  the  light  bears  S.  i  E. ;  thence  N-  32°  E.  for  Deer  Island, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river ;  there  are  many  stakes  pointing  out  the  chnimel  and  shoals, 
but  little  dependence  can  be  placed  on  them,  as  vessels  in  coming  up  or  gomg  out  oftea 
pull  them  adrift. 


2S0 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


mc^nfalaya 
Bay. 

Floating 
light. 


Dirtctiona. 


Marsh  Isle. 
Light. 
From  Point 
Au  Fer  west- 
ward. 


ACHAFALAYA  BAY. — A  Flouting  Light  has  been  moored  at  the  entrance  of  Acha. 
faltiyn  Bny,  on  the  following  bearings: 

Point  HU  Fer, E.  22°  south,  distant  12  miles. 

Xj6IIB  l0lPt  •■•••••••••••••••••••IN*   Uti     0R8l«  & 

Tucka  Hummock, N.  22°  west. 

Turn  Stake, N.    5°  west,  1^  mile. 

S.  W.or  outer  Stake S.   38=»  east. 

DiBKCTioNs. — Bring  the  Floating  Light  to  bear  N.  W.  i  W.,  and  run  directly  for  her. 
You  will  leave  the  outer  or  S.  W.  stake  on  your  larboard  hand.  When  up  witii  tliu  liuht 
vessel  you  must  anchor  near  her  on  the  N.  E.  side,  as  you  cannot  proceed  further  with- 
out  H  pilot,  or  until  daylight.     At  full  sea  there  are  12  fefct  water  in  the  channel. 

Vessels  bound  for  the  Cote  Blanche,  after  passing  the  barrel  stake,  must  steer  fur  Rnb. 
bit  Island,  until  Deer  Point  bears  north,  then  steer  for  it  until  up  with  it,  thence  N.  by 
W.  i  W.  until  up  with  the  Canal  of  Bayou  Sale;  here  vessels  anchor. 

MARSH  ISLE. — On  the  western  end  of  this  island  there  is  a  revolving  light,  90feej 
high,  showing  the  entrance  to  Vermilion  Bay. 

FROM  POINT  AU  FER  WESTWARD,— The  coast  to  the  west  of  Point  Au 
Fer  is  shoal  for  some  distance  from  the  shore,  until  you  are  up  with  Tiger  Point,  which 
may  be  known  by  a  large  ridge  of  high  land,  covered  with  oak  trees.  In  this  dli^tnnce 
which  is  about  60  miles,  there  is  no  navigntion  of  consequence  to  the  west  of  Beiio  I«]h. 
a  number  of  small  islands  and  shoals  to  the  west  of  Belle  Isle,  and  a  large  island  bound 
the  coast  until  within  10  miles  of  Tiger  Point,  and  form  behind  them  Vermilion  Bay,  which 
communicates  with  the  sea  at  the  east  and  west  points  of  the  island.  This  bay  has  from 
5  to  9  feet  water  in  it,  and  in  the  western  strait,  which  is  the  clearest,  there  is  a  bur  with 
5  feet  water  on  it. 

Beyond  Tiger  Point  the  land  runs  west,  about  8  miles  to  the  Bayous  of  Great  and  Little 
Constance,  which  have  bars  at  their  entrances. 

From  these  Bayaus  the  coast  lies  W.  ^  N.  to  the  mouth  of  tho  River  MermentRo.  dis- 
tant 15  miles;  this  piece  of  coast  is  swampy  and  without  trees,  but  the  beach  is  gund; 
tho  river  has  from  4  to  5  feet  water  on  the  bar  at  its  mouth,  and  the  land  for  2  leagues  up 
the  river  is  swampy  ;  it  thence  rises  and  is  well  covered  with  wood. 

W.  by  N.  30  miles  from  Mermentao  is  the  river  Calcasu,  and  20  miles  W.  from  the 
Calcasu  is  the  mouth  of  the  River  Sabine,  and  the  boundary  between  the  United  StHtes 
and  Mexico:  in  all  this  distance  there  is  a  good  beach,  clear  and  without  trees,  but  in 
some  placen  it  is  swampy :  the  Sabine  has  a  bar  at  its  entrance  with  from  6  to  8  feet 
water.  A  shoal,  having  3i  fathoms,  lies  from  the  mouth  of  the  River  Sabine,  E.  by  N., 
about  10  to  12  miles. 

Courses  by  Compass  from  the  S.  W.  Pass  of  the  Mistissippi. 

To  Racoon  Point W.  |  S.  distant  33  leagues 

To  clenr  the  shoal  of  do., W.  by  S.  i  S.  "       .33 

To  Pass  del  Cavallo W.  by  S.  ••  120 

To  Arnnzas  Inlet W.  by  S.  i  S.  "  132 

To  Corpus  Christi W.  by  S.  4  S.  "  140 

To  Brazo  de  Santiago,          ,   S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.    •'  149 

To  Rio  de  Tampico, S.  W.  "  205        •' 


COA$$T  FRO.U  THE  ISABIIVE  WEST  TO  T/tMPlCO. 


THE  coast  from  the  Sabine  lies  W.,  and  then  trends  S.  W.  as  you  approach  the  en- 
trance to  Galveston  Bay,  »  distance  of  about  50  miles,  the  whole  of  which  is  clean,  hav- 
ing about  3  fathoms  within  a  mile  of  the  shore. 
Light  Ship.         LIGHT  SHIP. — There  is  a  Light  Ship  moored  off  Galveston  Bar. 
Galveston  GALVESTON  BAY. — The  entrance  into  this  bay  is  between  point  Bolivar  onth« 

Bay.  N.,  and  the  east  end  of  the  St.  Louis,  or  Galveston  Island,  on  the  S. ;  between  them  are 

four  channels. 

Should  it  be  your  intention  to  go  into  Galveston  Bay,  be  careful  to  haul  to  the  south, 
when  the  wind  is  from  that  quarter,  to  avoid  being  hemmed  in  to  the  north,  in  which  case 
you  will  be  obliged  to  take  tho  north  pas8r>.ge,  which  has  but  7i  feet  water,  and  will  only 
carry  you  as  far  as  the  point ;  to  take  this  passage  you  will  keep  along  the  north  shore, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


281 


ind  when  nenr  up  wilh  the  entrnnce,  lenve  n  shoiil  which  is  dry  nt  low  wnter,  iouth  of 
you ;  you  will  have  8  or  9  feet  wnter  until  neiirly  up  with  the  point,  when  it  will  shiiolen 
toli  teet,  Rud  soon  after  deepen  to  9  and  10  ;  continue  niong  gliore  iibout  a  mile,  when 
•ou  will  hiive  2  and  2ji  fnthoms ;  here  you  must  anchor,  ns  you  cannot  poHS  this  next  point 
with  more  tbim  4  or  3  feet,  on  account  of  a  hnnk  which  extends  fmm  the  dry  shoni  above 
mentioned,  all  the  way  south  of  you,  until  it  turns  quite  round  the  point  to  the  west. 
Hero  you  are  safe  in  a  common  !<;ale. 

Nearly  a  mile  to  the  south  of  the  above  passaee  is  another  with  9  feet,  the  course  info 
wliich  is  N.  W.,  leaving  the  dry  shoal  on  the  starboard  hand  ;  and  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  south  of  this  is  another,  hnving  13  feet;  the  course  into  which  is  also  N.  W.,  and 
after  piiHsing  the  shoni,  which  lies  to  the  south  of  you,  you  may  steer  direct  for  the  north 
point  of  GiilvHRton  Island,  nnd  having  passed  the  bar,  you  will  have  3, 4,  and  5  fathoms  till 
up  with  the  point,  which  pass  within  one  hundred  yards,  gradually  increosing  your  dis- 
tance as  you  pass,  when  you  will  see  the  bank  on  the  north  bar,  which  is  steep  to;  steer 
then  to  the  S.  W.  up  the  channel  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  till  you  see  a  small  bunch  of  bushes 
about  two  --r  three  mdes  from  the  point,  which  bring  to  bear  S.  E..  ond  anchor  in  3  or  4 
fathoms.     Fresh  water  may  be  had  near  the  bushes. 

Should  you  wish  to  go  in  by  the  South  Pass,  keep  along  the  beach  of  Galveston  Island 
in  2  fathoms,  until  near  the  point,  when  you  will  not  have  more  than  10  or  11  feet,  haul 
round  tlie  point  as  before  directed,  and  steer  S.  W.  for  the  anchorage. 

Galveston  Island  is  about  20  miles  long,  and  trends  N.  E.  and  S.  W. ;  it  is  low,  but  you 
cannot  mistake  it,  as  there  are  three  single  trees  about  the  middle ;  at  the  wefit  end  there 
is  n  wide  pass  with  n  small  island  nearly  in  the  middle  of  it,  and  back  of  it,  about  7  miles 
distnnt,  is  a  long  wood,  called  Oyster  and  Chocolate  Dye  Wood. 

From  the  S.  W.  end  of  Galveston  Island,  the  coast  continues  S.  W.,  distance  15  miles 
to  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Brazos,  and  you  will  have  3  nnd  4  fathoms  water  at  24  or  3 
miles  from  the  shore.  As  you  come  up  with  the  mouth  of  the  river  you  will  see  a  long 
house  on  the  N.  K.  point,  called  Michael's,  and  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  mouth  you  will  see 
the  Woodlands  of  Brnzos,  distant  about  7  or  8  miles  from  the  beach.  The  bar  nt  the 
entrance  has  from  44  to  5  and  6  feet  water  on  it,  but  like  all  the  other  eutrances  it  is  sub- 
ject to  change. 

At  the  port  of  Velasco,  which  is  at  the  mouth  of  Brazos  River,  there  are  regular  pilots 
well  ncquiiinted  with  their  business,  and  a  vessel  drawing  six  feet  water  can  enter  the 
ri»er  without  difliculty. 

S.  W.  from  the  mouth  of  the  Brazos  12  miles,  is  the  entrance  to  Bnyou  St.  Bernard, 
which  is  narrow,  nnd  has  from  5  to  7  feet  at  times ;  as  you  approach  it  you  will  see  the 
woodlands  back  of  the  beach  at  the  distance  of  8  miles. 

In  running  down  from  Boyou  St.  Bernard  for  Pasa  del  Caballo,  the  land  trenches  some- 
what in,  but  the  general  course  is  about  S.  W.,  and  the  distance  55  miles ;  you  will  puss 
a  small  bnyou  about  8  miles  from  St.  Bernard.  This  boyou  has  a  range  of  woodland  which 
runs  nearly  to  the  beach,  at  the  end  of  which  is  the  bayou.  After  passing  this,  the  lund  is 
low  all  the  way.  and  you  may  keep  in  3,  6,  and  7  fathoms 

MATAGORDA,  or  PASA  DEL  CABALLO.— The  entrance  of  Matagorda  Bay 
lies  between  n  long  peninsula  land,  without  trees,  which  begins  at  the  river  Carney,  mak- 
ing westward,  and  covering  the  Bay  of  Matagorda.  Its  termination  forms  the  eastern 
entrance,  and  is  called  Deckrose  Point,  having  a  custom  nnd  several  other  houses  on  it. 
The  east  end  of  St.  Joseph's  Island  forms  the  west  point  of  entrnncs,  and  presents  a 
higher  ridge  of  land,  (covered  partially  with  grass)  than  any  part  of  the  coast  for  GO  miles 
east  or  west.  The  pilot's  house  is  on  this  point.  In  coming  from  the  eastward  you  must 
keep  in  six  fathoms  water,  until  this  point  bears  N.  N.  W.  Then  keep  the  pilot  houses 
just  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  high  ridge,  which  will  bear  N.  N.  W.  to  N.  W.  by  N. 
and  standing  thus,  you  will  cross  the  bar  in  9  feet,  according  to  tide;  when  you  will  steer 
fur  the  point  of  St.  Joseph's,  north-easterly  of  the  pilot  houses;  having  the  best  water 
close  to  the  breakers,  along  the  west  shore — until  the  houses  on  Deckrose  Point  bear  N. 
N.  E.,  you  will  steer  up  for  them,  and  have  a  snnd  islnnd  on  your  starboard  side,  with 
breakers  extending  from  it  to  the  bar,  and  to  Deckrose  Point ;  from  which  some  spots  of 
sand  extend  towards  the  channel.  You  must  keep  your  lend  going  to  avoid  them ;  and 
you  will  find  four  or  five  fathoms  when  up  with  the  point,  where  you  may  anchor  within 
a  cable's  length  of  the  custom-house,  or  proceed  up  the  bay.  The  channel  from  the  bar 
to  Deckrose  Point  is  well  defined,  and  the  distance  six  miles ;  but  in  approaching  the  point, 
a  large  middle  ground  lies  on  the  western  side  of  you,  which  come  no  nearer  than  two 
and  one  fourth  fathoms. 
A  buoy  has  been  moored  nt  the  entrance  of  this  Pass. 

Vessels  bound  in  should  leave  the  buoy  to  the  eastward,  at  a  distance  of  from  fifteen  to 
eighty  yards. 

Eleven  feet  can  be  carried  in  at  the  top  of  high  water,  and  plenty  of  room  inside,  with 
good  anchorage,  in  four  fathoms. 
From  Pasa  del  Cubullo  to  Arnnza  Inlet,  the  course  is  about  S.  W.     'i'he  land  curves 


I 


Matafforda, 
or  Fasa  Del 
Caballo. 


mmm 


SSSBSFW?'*"*'^ 


2b2 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Arunza  Inlet. 


Smna'i. 


■omHwhiit  in,  nnd  tho  difttanco  la  40  tnllHii.  It  IIom  in  lat.  27°  55'  N.  All  the  const  is  low 
niiJ  whoii  you  Qt't  about  halt'  tlie  (listiiiice,  you  will,  in  cinar  weather,  see  lomu  woddjund 
bat-k  of  tlio  liiiy,  but  nothiii;;  vory  roniiirknblu  on  the  coiiat.  The  entrance  id  vitry  |,^p, 
row,  and  not  more  tiian  7  and  8  feet  at  low  water.  The  north  point  is  soinuwhiit  hbh 
witli  a  low  Hand  point  strotchiii):  to  the  south  point.  ' 

AllANZ.V  INLIiT. — In  goinj»  in,  bring  the  south  point  to  bear  W.  by  S.,  or  W,  by 
N.,  and  after  crossing  tho  bar,  stoor  direct  for  the  south  point,  taking  caro  tho  tile  (1,,^, 
not  allect  you,  as  it  is  very  strong,  and  you  may  go  within  pistol  shot  of  the  point,  hitul- 
ing  to  tiie  north  as  soon  as  you  have  passed  it,  and  take  your  soundings  in  10,  11,  nnij  ^t, 
feet;  or  you  may  anclior  as  soon  as  you  pass  the  south  point  400  yards,  in  3  fathoin>i.  \r 
you  intend  going  up  the  bay,  continue  in  the  above  soundings,  till  you  get  up  with  the 
Doi'tli  point,  leaving  a  long  flat  on  the  west.  The  chaniiel  is  very  narrow,  and  cuurae 
about  N.  by  E..  or  N.  N.  K.,  about  '2  miles. 

.South  of  Aran/.a  the  coast  runs  S.  W.  i)y  S.,  or  S.  S.  W.,  to  Corpus  Christi,  distant 
about  'J5  miles.  The  coast,  after  leaving  the  point  3  miles,  is  high  and  hilly  all  the  way 
with  more  dry  sand-hills. 

.S.  by  K.  from  the  entrance  to  Cor:)U3  Christi.  distant  92  miles,  ia  tho  Barra  de  Shh- 
tiago ;  and  10  miles  fnther  to  the  south  is  the  entrance  to  tlie  Rio  del  Norte;  niidwny 
between  them  is  Koca  Chica,  which  enters  into  the  siiine  lagoou  ns  the  Barra  de  Sun- 
tiago,  and  on  which  you  will  have  4  feet  water. 

B  ut  few  vemiels  enter  the  Ri(»  del  Norte,  the  trade  to  IVIatamoras  being  carried  on  through 
tlie  liarra  de  .Santiago,  which  affords  a  depth  of  7  feet  water  on  its  bur,  while  the  river  uf. 
fords  but  iilxait  (>  fitet. 

In  runniiig  down  tor  the  Bra/.os,  between  the  months  of  March  and  Septeniher,  he 
careful  lo  keep  to  tho  south  of  '2i>°  N.,  for  should  you  full  in  to  the  aouthwanl  of  the  Ur, 
you  will  find  it  very  easy  to  make  your  northing,  as  a  continued  current  is  runniiiir  iiDrth- 
eriy,  of  from  two  to  tliree  knots  per  hour.  Should  you  fall  in  with  the  land,  not  hiivjiw 
hn(l  an  observation  previous,  so  as  to  know  if  you  are  north  or  south  of  the  bar,  by  ^uinK 
to  the  mast  head  you  will  see  if  you  are  to  the  northward,  a  large  lagoon  of  wutur,  nud 
scarcely  be  able  to  see  the  main  land. 

N.  B. — This  lagoon  extends  to  the  north  of  28*'  .^O'  latitude,  and  is  a  certain  sign  of 
your  being  to  tho  north.  If  you  are  to  tho  south  of  the  river,  you  will  find  your  wnier 
of  a  muddy  green  color,  and  no  lake  to  bo  seen  on  the  inai  Je  from  the  mast  lieml.  If 
your  vess(d  is  in  the  vicinity  of  the  river,  the  water  will  be  the  same  as  approachin;;  the 
Mississippi.  If  you  fall  in  between  the  river  and  the  bar  of  Santiago,  you  will  be  able  to 
discern  a  large  house,  that  stands  on  an  eminence  at  the  entrance  of  Boca  Chica,  n  Utile 
narrow  itilet.  situated  5  miles  south  of  the  Braxos.  Vessels  bound  here  betwoon  .S(^p- 
tembnr  and  March,  will  do  well  to  keep  as  near  tho  2Gth  degree  of  north  latitudo  ns  pos- 
sible, as  the  current  ia  then  altogether  governed  by  the  winds.  With  tho  exce|)tiuii  of  no 
east  wind,  the  current  is  northerly. 

A  while  lliig  will  signify  that  a  vessel  cannot  enter,  and  will  never  be  shown  except 
there  is  danger  in  entering,  and  will  be  hauled  down  when  the  danger  ceases. 

A  red  tiag  will  bo  hoisted  to  know  your  draft  («f  water,  which  you  can  answer  by  hoist- 
ing your  flag  as  many  times  as  j-our  vessel  draws  feet  of  water. 

When  a  blue  Hag,  it  will  tell  you  the  pilot  is  coming  out  to  take  you  in;  or  if  you  dratr 
too  much  water,  and  will  have  to  lighten. 

A  white  and  red  flag  will  be  hoisted  for  you  to  anchor,  with  two  flags  in  a  range,  nnd  in 
(our  or  five  fathoms  water,  and  a  lighter  will  be  sent  out  to  you  immediately. 

A  white  and  blue  flag  signifies  that  you  may  haul  otf  foi  the  night,  as  it  is  too  late  to 
enter,  but  you  will  be  attended  to  in  the  inorning. 

Any  vessel  appearing  off  the  harbor  in  distress,  will  be  {.  omptly  attended  to,  on  innkln; 
the  usuid  signal,  viz.:  the  ensign,  union  down.  I  would  rocommend  a  white  square  ling 
with  a  large  black  ball  in  the  centre,  as  a  signal  much  quid  >r  discerned. 

Other  directions  for  vessels  bound  to  Texas. 

From  tho  S.  W.  Pass  of  the  Mississippi,  stoor  W.  S.  W.  one  hundred  miles,  with  tlie 
wind  at  S.  E.,  to  avoid  the  flat  ground  of  the  Oyster  Bank,  which  lies  off  VermiliuiiBaj, 
This  bank  is  large,  and  has  from  2  to  3  and  5  fathoms  on  the  outer  part,  and  on  the  inner 
part  2  and  2j  a  long  distance:  W.  by  8.  course  will  cross  this  bunk  at  times  in  3  nnd  I 
fatlioms,  soft  bottom.  As  the  current  is  so  uncertain,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  know 
when  you  make  your  coursn  good.  After  passing  this  shoal,  you  may  steer  fur  the  Brj- 
zos  without  fear,  and  soon  be  on  soundings  again,  and  have  from  16  to  2U  fathoms,  till  jvi 
gradually  shoal  jour  water  to  9,  8,  7,  and  6  fathoms.  Should  you  wish  to  go  for  Pii-i  1 
delCabullo,  on  a  W.  S.  W.  course,  you  will  have  soundings  from  20  to  10  fatlioms, "5. 
inlies  distant;  and  when  in  8  fathoms,  you  will  see  the  land  20  miles  in  clear  weiithrr. 
More  south,  the  water  is  much  deeper;  ami  you  will  have  7  fathoms  close  to  the  lauil, 
changing  suddenly  to  18  fathoms,  12  miles  from  the  land. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


8S3 


Tlie  course  from  the  S.  W.  Pubs  to  Bi)rrntnrm  is  W.  N.  W.,  niid  dbtiiiice  37  miles. 
Ship  lalonil  is  iiPMi'iy  in  the  siime  lutilude  its  the  S.  W.  Puss. 

Tlie  cui'i'oiit  on  the  whole  coiiDt  is  geiienilly  governed  liy  the  winds ;  hut  ninre  rnpid 
currtinis  set  to  the  souih  in  ii  nortli  wind  thiiii  in  iiiiy  otlier.  Vhsi<h|!«  fiiiiiiiK  south  of  the 
purt,  with  a  north  wind,  will  find  it  iilnioHt  inipossihle  to  hold  their  own  in  ii  stroiii;  hri-f/n. 
WluMi  bound  to  the  eastward  for  New  OrleiiUH,  your  bt-ttor  wiiy  iH  to  go  no  neiircr  the 
liinil  tliHU  forty  miles,  until  m  the  liilitude  of  its  entrnnce,  iis  you  will  iiy  that  hiive  no  i:ur- 
rt'iit  to  hurt  you:  but,  on  soundinj^s  and  in  shore,  the  current  runs,  in  moderate  weather, 
regulxr  ebb  and  flood,  and  the  easterly  current  but  a  small  part  of  the  time.  The  tide  at 
tlie  passes,  in  commim,  rises  2,  2j,  and  in  sprinit,  3  feet,  and  oidy  hi  '.!4  hours;  but  it  is 
nltugethor  governed  by  the  winds.  In  heavy  winds  on  the  coaHt,  it  is  known  to  run  in  36 
hours,  and  sometimes  4H  ;  and  on  n  sudden  change  of  wind  to  the  north,  it  will  run  out 
iialuiig.  in  moderate  weather.  Sometimes  there  is  a  half  tide,  which  rises  nearly  to  hijjh 
water,  but  seldoiri  runs  in. 

Kroni  the  Rio  del  Norte  the  coast  treiids  S.  3"  E.,  7  miles,  then  S.  15°  W.,  29  miles,  to 
the  Barra  de  Sail  Fernando  or  River  Tigre,  on  the  bur  of  which  there  are  nearly  3  feet 
lit  luw  water ;  for  the  whole  distance  the  land  is  low.  '1  he  water  of  this  river  is  bracUish 
tVoin  tiio  communication  it  has  with  the  lugoun,  and  is  only  fresh  after  the  rains;  on  tlie 
guulli  coast  of  the  bay  funned  by  it,  there  is  a  good  pool,  where  any  urgent  necessity  may 
lie  relieved. 

Fiuni  Rio  de  S.  Fernnndo  the  coast  continues  S.  in  nearly  the  above  direction  23  miloa 
10  tlie  Bocas  Ciegns  or  Cerrados,  which  are  four  openings  in  the  space  of  a  leiiuue,  and 
through  which  the  sea  enters  when  there  are  heavy  gales :  they  may  be  distinguished  3 
or  4  leagues  at  sea,  and  they  communicate  with  Madre  Lagoon,  which  extends  nearly  to 
the  Biirra  S.  Anda.     The  land  from  R.  St.  Fernando  to  Bocas  Ciegas  is  low. 

S,  ^  W..  about  24  leagues  from  Bocas  Ciegas.  is  the  entrance  to  the  River  St.  Aiider; 
the  shore  for  the  whole  of  this  distance  is  low  and  sandy  :  on  the  bar  there  are  G  feet  wa- 
ter, iitid  the  hills  of  Corrigo  and  Palnia  serve  as  maiks  for  it,  the  bed  of  the  river  being 
miilwiiy  between  them,  and  forming  a  part  of  a  large  lagoon,  whose  shores  are  low.  Eight 
li!a|<Hes  up  the  river  is  the  town  of  Santa  de  la  Marina.  The  lagoon,  after  the  bar  is 
crossed,  and  before  you  enter  the  river,  is  full  of  shoals,  and  you  have  only  one  channel 
of  11  or  12  feet  water,  but  in  the  river  you  have  4  or  5  fathoms. 

Fruin  the  Barm  de  St.  Ander  the  coast  runs  S.  3°  E.  18  leagues  to  the  Barrn  del  Tor- 
(lu;  all  the  bottom  is  good  in  this  distance,  save  that  there  are  some  detached  rocks  three 
leagues  to  the  south  of  St.  Ander,  where  they  extend  2  miles  from  the  coast ;  on  the  Barra 
del  Tordo  there  are  scarce  3  feet  at  low  water. 

The  marks  for  crossing  this  bar  are  those  double  hills  called  the  Martinez;  they  lie  west 
from  it,  and  to  the  N.  W.  of  Martinez  in  the  interior  you  can  see  the  nioge  of  high  land 
culled  Tamiiolijias  stretching  in  that  direction. 

South  of  Biirra  del  Tordo  10  miles,  is  that  of  Trinidad.  The  bottom  is  good,  except 
soKie  pointed  rocks  here  and  there,  none  of  which  extend  further  than  2  miles 
fruinthe  shore.  All  the  shore  of  this  coast  is  sand  or  low  hillocks,  of  which  those  about 
2  hmuuus  south  of  Barra  del  Tordo  nre  of  greater  elevation  than  the  rest,  and  are  called 
the  Hill  of  Chapopote  or  Comandanto:  on  Burru  del  Tiinidad  there  are  but  2  feet  water. 

S.  i  E.  7  miles  from  Trinidad  is  Barra  Ciega,  and  within  a  lagoon  extending  the  whole 
diitiiuce.  The  coast  is  clear,  save  near  the  shore  the  bottom  is  rocky.  West  from  Ciega 
Bnr  is  the  hill  of  Metiite.     Barra  Ciega  has  3  feet  water  on  it. 

From  Barra  Ciega  to  Tampico  Bar  the  coast  runs  S.  by  W.,  and  the  distance  is  19 
miles.  The  const  is  cleiu',  save  some  pointed  rocks  which  extend  south  of  Ciega  6  miles, 
alter  which  it  is  clear. 

Uknkral  Obskrvations  on  the  coast  from  Tampico  to  Galveston  Bay,  (from  the 
Deriotero.)— The  greater  part  of  the  lagoons  that  are  formed  on  this  coast  have  not 
more  than  3  or  4  feet  water,  at  their  greatest  depth,  and  some  parts  of  them  nre  quite 
dry  except  in  the  rainy  season.  From  August  to  April  these  coasts  nre  dangerous,  on 
account  of  the  heavy  sea  upon  them,  and  which  makes  it  impossible  for  n  ship  to  ride  at 
her  iincliors ;  for  in  this  season  the  E.  S,  E.  wind  blows  with  great  violence  for  2  or  3  days 
before  it  shifts  to  the  north;  but  in  the  other  months,  from  April  to  August,  the  naviga- 
liiin  is  very  good  and  secure  ;  the  current  always  setting  to  the  north  and  N.  E.,  wliich 
fucilitates  increasing  the  latitude  ;  and  although  the  east  winds  prevailing  from  A|)ril  to 
Juno  send  in  much  sea,  yet  a  ship  may  ride  at  her  anchors  in  7  or  S  fathoms,  in  a  case  of 
iiecodsily;  in  such  a  situiitioii  she  will  be  in  sight  of  the  shore  ;  but  if  possible,  it  will  be 
more  Hdvisal)le  to  keep  under  sail,  'i'lie  land  breezes  are  frequent  in  the  summer  from 
midiiiglit  until  1)  and  10  in  the  morning,  when  tiiey  yield  to  the  sea  breeze  ;  but  this  only 
tiikeu  place  so  high  as  26<i°  of  latitude,  where  the  mountain  range  terminates;  all  the 
other  parts  are  very  flat,  low  and  swampy;  on  which  but  little  rain  fiills,  which  is  the 
chief  cause  in  producing  the  land  winds. 

We  have  followed  the  northern  coast  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  ns  far  as  Tampico,  it  being 
more  coiiviMiient  to  continue  on  thus  fur;  we  will  now  resume  the  description  of  the 
Uulf,  commeuciug  with  Cape  Catoche  and  ending  with  Tumpicu. 


Hi 

i    '\ 


tammm 


2S4 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


GULF  OF  MEXICO. 


\t 


In  Ihia  Chapter  the  bearings  are  the  true. 

Gulf  of  OULF  OF  MEXICO. — The  Mpxicro  Buy  in  nn  immnnae  gulf.  surrounrlH  nr  sn- 

AI/:xico.  cinsnd  on  nil  piirta,  excnpt  on  thn  8.   K. ;  the  IhIiiikI  of  Culxi  ndviincitiii  conHulHrnlily  to 

tli»  wn<<t,  formn,  with  this  S.  K.  oponin<;,  two  straits  or  chnnnels  ;  orio  on  tho  south  with 

Cnp«»  (!iit()(!ho,  hy  which  ii  communicntion  is  opened  between  the  (Julf  iind  the  Carib. 

bean  Son,  nod  the  other  on  the  onst,  with  the  south  const  of  Floridn.  wliich  comihuni- 

cntes  with  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  so  that  these  nre  the  only  two  routes  lending  into  the  Mexj. 

can  Oulf. 

Ctpe  Catoche      C\PE  CATOCHE  TO  POINT  XICaLANOO.— The  N.  E.  land,  or  knee  of  Yu- 

to  Point  cntan,  has  several  islands  at  n  short  distance  from  it ;  these  are  Cannun,  MeijeroH,  Blim. 

X'calango.      quilla,  and  Contoj' ;  the  last,  which  is  the  northernmost  onr>,  lies  about  7  miles  from  the 

main  coast;  its  shore  is  clear,  and  you  may  pass  at  'i  miles  from  it,  in  0  fathoms ;  botWHHn 

it  and  the  coast  there  appears  to  be  anchorage ;  but  this  part  is  imperfectly  known.    The 

north  point  of  Contoy  lies  nearly  east,  true,  twelve  miles  from  Capo  Catoche. 

Capo  Catoche  has  two  islets  nloni;  its  shore,  which  extend  out  scarcely  n  mile  from  it 
and  form,  with  the  island  of  Jolvos,  two  mouths,  called  Joujou  nn'l  Neuva,  fit  for  cnnueg 
only.  From  the  said  cape  the  coast  bimds  somewhat  to  the  south  of  west,  for  the  digtance 
of  18  miles,  to  the  western  extreme  of  .Tolvos  Island,  which  forms  the  Bocas  del  Conil; 
this  coast  is  foul,  having  a  rocky  bank  with  little  water  extending  off  to  the  distance  of  3j 
miles.  Between  Jolvos  Island  and  the  main,  a  lake  is  formed,  obstructed  by  various  isJotj 
and  grassy  spots,  ami  fit  only  for  canoes. 

From  the  Bocas  de  Conil.  the  coast  continues  to  the  W.  by  N.,  about  50  miles,  to  the 
Rio  Lagartos,  (Lizard  River,\  when  it  inclines  VV.  13°  S  .  the  distance  of  .35  lea;;uns.  to 
Punta  Piedras,  or  Rocky  Point.     All  the  coast  from  Cape  Catoche  is  very  low  ami  flnt, 
wiihont  any  remarkable  (tbjects  upon  it,  exci-pting  a  Cairn,  or  little  mount  of  stuMRi*.  in. 
tentionally  raised  by  the  passing  Indians  on  the  very  beach  of  Lngnrtos,  .38  miles  W.  frnm 
Cnpe  Catoche,  which  may  be  known  by  its  resemblance  to  a  hat,  and  the  little  woody 
hills,  which  nre  comprised  between  this  and  the  Vigia,  or  Lookout,  of  the  River  La<;iir. 
tos;  next  to  it  is  that  of  Sllan.  where  water  may  be  procured  with  facility  ;  to  the  '    i|(. 
out  of  Silan  follows  that  of  Santa  Clara,  to  which  succeeds  thatof  Telchnnc,  whi 
water  m;iy  be  procured;  next  comes  that  of  Y"gil,  then  that  of  Chuburna,  an 
finally,  the  Castle  of  Sisal.     None  of  these  Lookouts,  (Vigias.)  except  the  Caii. 
garios  and  Castle  of  Sisal,  can  be  seen  farther  off  the  shore  than  from  6  fathoms  of  water, 
From  the  Cuyo,  or  Cairn,  nt  Lagartos,  lo  Chnburna,  you  may  anchor  without  (mt.  ig 
from  4  fathoms,  outward,  but  not  nearer  land,  as  there  are  many  stones,  shnaU,  nml  haiiki 
and  rucks,  which  cannot  bo  easily  ascertained  by  the  lead,  because  they  aro  covortMJ  witii 
R  coat  of  sand,  and  thus  they  cut  the  cables,  whereby  anchors  are  lust ;  in  addition  to 
which  the  depth  often  suddenly  diminishes  upon  them,  and  therefore  vessels  are  in  iiiucli 
danger  of  getting  nground,  nnd  of  being  lost. 

The  Castle  of  Sisal  is  built  on  the  shore,  close  to  the  sea,  and  near  to  it  are  tiirooor 
four  houses,  used  for  depositing  nriiclns  of  merchandise,  that  are  trnn8|)orted  coiistwise. 
to  bo  taken  to  Merida  ;  and  also  for  receiving  the  produce  sent  from  Merida  and  otherin. 
land  places  of  this  province.  At  the  castle  there  is  abundance  of  water,  and  it  cnii  be 
procured  with  the  greatest  ease. 

Upon  Point  Piedras  there  is  n  little  mount,  named  No-te-perderas,  ( Do  not  loose  your- 1 
self,)  and  which  is  huen  from  Sisal  Shoal,  or  at  14  miles  off.     From  this  point  the  ciiii!i  | 
rounds  about  to  the  S.  W.,  for  thirty  miles,  to  Point  Desconocida,  forming  the  N.  W, 
front  of  the  Peninsula  of  Yucabm ;  this  coast,  as  well  as  the  former,   may  be  seen  well  I 
from  54  fathoms  of  water,  and  is  commonly    named  the   Pnlmares  ;  for,  among  the 
wood  with  which  it  is  covered,  many  Palmitos,  (Cvbbage  Palms)  nre  seen,  though  there 
are  none  on  the  other  parts  of  this  coast.     On  the  const  of  Palmas  no  one  ought tii 
anchor,  for  the   bottom  is  of  stones,  covered  with  u  thin  coat  of  sand,  which  deceive)  | 
the  lead. 

From  Point  Desconocida  the  coast  trends  to  the  south,  but  rather  inclining  to  the  easl,  I 
true.  23  miles,  to  Las  Bocas,  (The  Mouths,)  which  are  two  little  inlets  formed  hytlit 
coast;  in  front  and  very  near  to  them  are  two  very  little  islets.     From  the  Bociis, die 
coast  continues  to  the  south,  with  some  inclination  to  the  west,  true,  to  the  di.stanceofii 
miles,  or  to  .Inyna,  which  is  another  inlet  of  the  coast,  at  the  mouth  of  a  river :  in  fnui  [ 
of  this  there  is  another  islet;  there  is  also  an  islet  named  Piedras,  ^or  Rocky)  Islet,  iiif| 
way  betweun  the  Bocas  and  Jayna. 

From  Jayna  the  const  continues,  with  some  inclinntion  towards  the  west,  true,  to  the  I 
distance  of  21  miles,  towards  the  River  of  St.  Francisco,  wliich  is  4i  miles  to  the  N.£  | 
of  Cnmpeche,  the  only  point  of  commerce  on  all  this  coast. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


9S6 


Thfl  eonit  between  Point  DoBconocidii  ntul  the  River  of  St.  Krnncis,  cnnnnt  be  men 
fnrlher  oli'  tliun  IVuiii  three  or  t'uur  futlioiim  dttptli,  iiiiil  then  it  aiipuurs  to  the  viuw  with  vii- 
riou«  brenkB,  which  louli  lilie  very  low  littj-ii ;  all  uf  it  i»  rtinuukiihly  hIhiIIow  unii  cJoaii,  hu 
tliiit.  with  the  lead  in  hand,  thuie  in  not  the  leuitt  diin);i>r  ou  the  whutii  uf  it,  exct^pling 
tlint  wliii:li  nrises  from  the  hull  of  a  sunken  vesMtd,  whicli  linH  to  the  we8t  uf  the  IhIh  I'iu- 
ilrim,  and  in  Ji  futhuini  water,  to  which,  veaiiels  navigating  in  thid  depth,  ought  to  give  a 

berth.  .  «     ,,        . 

Kroin  the  River  of  St.  FranciHcu,  the  coast  continuea  to  tho  S.  W.,  for  twelve  miles, 

tu  Puiiit  Morris,  hi  which  space  the  CuNtle  uf  St.  Jnsef  is  the  lirst  thing  seen  ;  nflorwards, 
the  city  uf  Canipi'che  ;  to  it  fullows  the  Castli)  uf  St.  Migutil ;  noxt  cutntts  tho  tuwn  of 
Lurinu;  afterit  succtxidsa  tMiint  uf  the  cuaHt  extending  uul  to  ihu  sua,  and  which  in  named 
Point  i^inrtin ;  the  next  to  it  is  Puint  Morros.  All  tliis  front  uf  luaKt,  which  furnm  the 
giiiilioriigo  of  Canipeche,  nniy  be  seen  plainly  fiuni  4}  fathums;  hut  ihu  water  is  hu  xhal- 
|.i\v  that  yuu  will  tind  3'i  fathunis  at  15  miles  from  tlie  land,  and  2:1  fathoms  at  4  niilos 
iVuin  it.  The  unchorn^e,  thtireforo,  needs  no  pilot,  nor  any  particular  advice  for  taking 
it;  fur  oncu  arrived  at  the  depth  convenient  fur  the  vessel's  diaughtuf  water,  yuu  may  let 
01)  yuur  anchur,  renniining  as  if  in  the  middle  uf  the  ocean  ;  hence  icHults  an  immnnso 
lubur  in  diHcharging  and  loading  cargoes  ;  for  even  those  vessels  which  can  approach  near- 
est tu  the  land,  remain  4j  miles  distant  from  it.  In  order  tu  diminish  this  lalxn'.  and  tu 
luaiiiige  8u  that  bouts,  ligliters,  or  launches  nniy  go  to  and  return  tVom  the  shore  under 
Mil,  thuy  anchor  to  the  west  uf  the  tower.  In  this  Hiichurage,  altliuugh  upen  entirely  to 
thv  north  and  N.  W.  winds,  wliich  in  tho  season  blow  with  great  furcu,  thuie  is  nut  any 
tiiin;{  to  fear,  for  they  do  not  raise  any  sea  uf  consequence,  and  vessels  remain  at  ancliur 
with  sufficient  safety.  _ 

To  the  west  uf  i'uint  Morros,  and  rather  more  to  the  south,  it  is  not  so  shallow;  and 
accurding  tu  inforinatiun,  four  fathoms  may  be  found  there,  at  u  league  fi-om  the  land. 
Any  Olio  who  approaches  this  coast,  with  the  object  uf  wuudiiig  and  watering,  uught  tu 
enueiivur  to  take  this  lust  anchorage,  in  tlie  vicinity  uf  which,  and  sumuwliat  to  the 
euutli,  is  tlio  town  of  Chumpotoii,  where  tliey  muy  provide  themselves  with  the  aiticles 
required. 

Frum  Point  Morrus,  the  coast  trends  S.  25°  W.  36  miles,  to  Point  Javinul,  forming, 
88  it  wore,  a  bend  in  tlie  coast ;  as  it  approaches  ihe  latter  point,  the  hind  trends  more  to 
the  WHBt,  and  S.  G0°  W.,  61  miles  distant  from  it,  is  Point  Xicalaii^  ,  which  is  the  west- 
ern extreme  of  the  Lagoon,  or  Lake  of  Terminus.  This  lagoon  is  a  great  bay,  about  40 
miles  wide,  and  having  about  30  miles  of  bight;  between  its  two  outer  and  extreme  points 
ore  two  islunds,  which  shelter  it ;  the  western,  named  Carmen,  is  the  largest.  At  the 
western  extremity  of  Carmen  is  a  garrison,  named  that  of  Sun  Felip  (S.  Philip.)  Be- 
tween this  and  Point  Xicalango  is  the  principal  enterance  to  tlie  lugcon,  with  ratiier  more 
thnn  'J  fiithonis  of  deptli,  and  of  it  we  are  informed  only  that  it  is  veiy  dilficult  to  enter, 
and  that  it  is  absolutely  necessaiy  to  have  a  pilot. 

THE  SOUNDINGS,  OR  BANK  OF  CAMPECHE — The  Cainpeche  Bank  is  a    Sounditigi^ 
grout  bank,  whicii  extends  from  tlie  north  coast  of  Yucatan  us  far  as  latitude  '.'3°  50',    or  Bank  q/' 
and  fruin  the  coast  of  Cumpeche,  to  the  west,  us  far  us  the  ineridiun  of  9'2°  30' ;  the  depth    Campech*. 
B8  well  us  tho  quality  of  soundings  on  it  are  so  uncertain,  that  it  is  not  possible  to  uscer- 
tnin  your  situation  on  it  by  the  lead.     This  Bunk  hua  been  surveyed  by  Capt.  R.  Barnett, 
Royiil  Navy. 

The  quality  of  the  soundings,  from  18  fathoms  towurds  the  shore,  does  not  preserve  regu- 
larity ;  for  sometimes  it  is  gray  sund  with  gravel,  at  others,  gravel  alone,  and  at  others, 
sand  with  shells  and  coral;  thus  it  alternates,  until  to  the  N.  W.  of  Point  Piedras,  where 
the  Boundings  are  on  stone  or  rock,  which  makes  a  very  good  mark  to  know  u  vessel's 
tituntinn  by,  and  to  enable  her  to  shape  a  course  with  security,  so  as  to  pass  between  the 
Tiiiingles  and  Baxo  Nuev»,  which  is  the  channel  that  ought  to  be  preferred  for  ruuning 
off  thn  bnnk  on  its  western  side. 

THK  ARCAS  nre  three  islets,  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  5  miles.     They    The  Areas. 
\  are  the  southernmost  upon  the  western  edge  of  these  soundings,  and  lie  almost  nearly 
I W.  by  N.,  83  miles  from  Cainpeche.     They  form  of  themselves  a  good  harbor,  which 
niny  be  entered  on  the  N.  W.  or  S.  side,  ns  is  most  convenient,  and  without  any  other 
[cnre  than  to  avoid  the  spits  stretching  from  them.     The  N.  W.  entrance   may  be  taken 
I  by  bringing  the  south  part  of  the  N.  E.  Island  (which  is  also  the  largest)  on  with  the  mid- 
dle of  the  S.  K.  island,  bearing  nearly   S.  E.  by  £.;  this  will  carry  you  clear  of  a  spit 
jwhicli  runs  out  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  greater  island,  and  which  is  the  object  that  shelters 
[the  anchorage  from  the  northerly  swell.     To  enter  by  the  south  passage  between  the 
[largest  island  and  the  westernmost  island,  you  ought,  to  be  cureful  to  avoid  the  reefs  that 
lextend  from  the  large  island  to  the  S.,  and  to  the  W.   N.  W.,  forming  n  slionl.  which 
|benrs  from  the  south  extremity  of  the  snid  island  N.  W.  i  W.,  nearly  half  a  mile,  and 
vhich  forms  the  true  channel  between  that  and  the  westernmost  urea,  of  two  cables' 
ength  in  width. 


I 


886 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  wpsternmost  isliind  sends  off  reefs  to  the  W.  N.  W.  and  W.  S.  W. ;  also  at  ■> 
and  lii  ciililes)'  length  tVoin  ihe  noitli  point  of  the  liirge  islands  there  are  three  foul  reefs 
exteinlidi;  to  the  west,  the  furthest  of  which  is  4  ciibles'  length  from  the  ptiid  point.  ;  i,ia 
an(.li(inij;e  is  very  superior  in  northerly  fjulesto  tiiiit  of  Ciinipeclie  ;  and  as  there  is  depth 
in  it  (or  nil  c-lasses  of  vessels,  lie  who,  under  such  circumstances,  cnn  catch  it,  will  fimj 
himseli  well  sheltered  tind  secure. 

The  .S.  E.  Artn  '.a  surrounded  hy  reefs,  separiiti-d  from  it  bv  a  space  of  about  a  chI)Ib'3 
length  in  breadth.  This  islet,  with  the  n-efs  at  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  jurgo  one,  foin, ., 
chiiiinel  of  two  short  cables'  length,  with  from  5  to  15  fathoms,  on  sand,  stone,  and  gnivej 
by  which,  in  case  of  necessity,  and  iiccoi'diug  to  the  situution  a  vessel  is  in,  an  entriuica 
to  the  Hiichorage  may  be  attempted.  > 

Tlie  centre  of  the  Areas  is  in  lat.  23°  13'  N  ,  long.  91°  59'  4"  west. 

Cahezo.  C  \\>\'//jO,  we  beli'.'ve,  does  not  exist. 

The  Bishops.  TH  K  BISH()I*S  are  two  shoals  of  'Ji  and  3  fathoms.  The  South  Bishop  is  in  Int 
20°  -J')'  N..  Ions.  ■i°  14'  W.;  t'.ie  North  Bishop  is  in  lat  20°  30'  N.,long.  P2°  13'30"w! 

Tricngles.  TKIANCtLES  are  two  groups  of  keys.     The  S.   E.  Triangles  are  tvvo  islets  2  inijps 

distant  f'roiii  each  other,  but  connected  by  a  reef.  On  the  S  W.  Key  there  is  a  boncoii 
of  3j  feet  liigh.  'I  lie  bank  has  an  extent  of  3i  miles  in  a  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  direction- 
tiieriMitre  is  in  lat.  20°  54'  N.,  long.  92°  14'  30'-  W.  ' 

The  N.  W.  Triangle,  on  which  tliere  is  a  beacon  o,"  38  feet,  is  in  lat.  20=  58'  N.,  Inn-*. 
92°  18'  ,30"  W.  There  is  a  channel  of  5  miles  in  width  between  the  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 
Tri'm'jies,  2B  fathoms  water. 

BttTo  Nuevo.  BAXO  NUKVO. — This  dangerous  shoal  lies  in  lat.  21°  61'  N.,  and  lung.  02°  (i'  W. 
It  is  iiliout  2  cables'  length  in  extent,  being  a  small  key  surrounded  by  rocks,  the  sea  break- 
ing friiihtfully  over  all.     On  this  there  is  a  beacon  of  35  feet. 

Key  Arenas,  KEV  ARENAS  is  couiposed  of  a  mass  of  coral  heads,  usually  termed  brain  stones. 
Tlie  windward  side  is  comfxised  entirely  of  this  coral,  but  the  others  are  interniixod 
\v":h  fine  and  course  sand.  The  deposite  from  the  boobies  and  other  birds  has  raised  this 
mass  to  a  height  of  11  feet  above  the  ocean,  and  on  tiie  southern  extreme  a  beacon  of 
stones  has  been  erected,  the  top  of  which  is  20  t'eet  above  the  sea.  Instead  of  a  jpiicious 
bay,  as  in  the  admiralty  chart,  the  anchorage  is  a  miserable  cove,  in  which  there  is 
scitrcely  room  for  three  small  vessels,  and  by  no  means  a  pleasant  place  to  be  ciniolit 
with  a  westerly  wind.  A  vessel  should  anchor  under  the  windward  reef,  in  G  or  7  futh- 
oms,  in  preference  to  this  cove,  and  she  will  have  sufficient  room  to  get  under  way  shuuH 
the  wind  come  from  that  quarter.  Light  variabh  winds  and  calms  generally  preceda 
them. 

The  channels  between  tlu  reefs  are  distinctly  seen  from  aloft.  Should  the  wenthor 
be  dai'k,  however,  it  is  not  so  :  then  run  with  the  extreme  west  end  of  Key  Arenas  beiir- 
ing  N.  iN.  W.  i  W.,  until  it  subtends  an  angle  of  85°  with  the  er  jternmost,  or  Stony 
Key ;  or  when  this  bears  N.  E.  by  E.,  then  liaul  up.  and  choose  your  anchorage  in  10, 
7,  or  5  fiithoms,  observing,  close  under  the  reef  there  is  more  siielter  from  S.  E.  winils, 
(Aliich  at  times  throw  in  a  heavy  swell.  Should  the  wind  be  at  N.,  or  N.  E.,  run  with 
the  west  end  of  the  Key  Arenas  S.  W.  by  S..  until  .Stcmy  Key  subtends  an  angle  of  95'', 
or  when  it  b  lars  S.  E.  by  E.  4   E.,  then  proceed  as  before. 

Tides.  Tin-  tides  here  are  precisely  the  same  as  at  Alacran.     High  water,  at  "ull  and  chunks, 

about  5  A.  M.,  the  fall  being  about  one  inch  per  hour.  Lat.  22°  7'  10"  N.,  long.,  'JV  'W 
30  '  \V. 

Al'ieran.  ALACRAN. — Erom  the  survey  of  Don  Ciriaco  de  Cavallos,  in  1802,  we  supposed  the 

port  (if  Alacran  capable  of  admitting  small  craft  only.  It  is  true,  a  vess(d  drawin;;  11  fwt 
may  pass  over  the  rocliy  heads  between  Perez  and  the  South  Spit,  wiiich  in;i!<e  the  imi- 
tranc*  intricate,  still,  with  the  wind  to  the  south  of  east,  whicli  it  generally  is  in  the 
n>":iriiig.  or  rather  before  noon,  a  vessid  drawing  18  feet  may  sail  in.  It  is  one  of  ihosn 
liariiors  that  can  only  be  taken  by  eye,  and  tVom  aloft  ever}"  shoal  may  be  [)l,iiiily  seoii, 
A  vesstd  entering  should  pass  close  to  the  .South  Spit,  and  run  N.  i  W.,  until  withiiu 
cables'  length  of  I'ere/.  Spit :  then  haul  close  around  it.  keeping  in  the  blue  water,  lunliiii- 
rhor  with  the  huts  W.  by  N..  one-fourth  of  a  md(^  The  Whitewater  on  I'ere/,  .Spit  c;iii 
plaiidy  b"  traced  from  the  island,  coming  in  from  the  westward,  with  the  huts  l)("jnii« 
N.  an  I  N.  W.  by  .N.  There  are  he;ids,  with  IG  feet  over  them,  a  quarter  of  a  niih^olf 
from  the  reef;  therefore  the  eastern  extreme  of  i'ere/-  Spit  should  not  be  brought  tub.ar 
to  the  eastward  of  N.  E.  by  E. 

Alacran  afTords  a  very  secure  harbor,  the  dry  reefs  protecting  it  as  effffctually  as  woull 
the  land.  The  outside  anchorage,  two  cables  north  of  the  South  Spit,  in  six  fntiinim 
r:,d  a  half,  coral  sand,  is  very  safe  with  nil  but  westerly  winds,  which  are  rare,  and  give 
timely  warning. 

Tide.  The  tide,  if  it  can  be  fo  called,  is  very  remarkable.     It  was  new  moon  on  llie  25th  if 

March,  alii'ut  3  in  the  afternoon  ;  on  the  following  day  the  tii'  •  fell,  frtun  G  A.  .M.  to 6 
P.  M..  7i  inrdies.  and  the  next  day  13  inches,  the  wind  being  from  E.  N.  E.  to  E.  S.  K. 
niodernte.     Again,  on  the  2Gth   April,  two  days  after  the  new   moon,  wind  in  the  smiie 


im 


BLUNT'S  AMKRICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


2S7 


and  S.  E. 


Lreiiiis  liRiir- 
■it,  or  Stony 
lontjie  ill  10, 
K.  winils, 
,  run  with 
)i;le  (if  %')\ 


iiiiipD.scdthe 
iwiii;;  11  fei't 
;ik('  till!  I'll- 
iy  is  III  the 
)iie  III'  llinse 
pl.iiiily  scon. 
ilil  williiiu 
■liter,  luni  Hu- 
rt'/, S|llt  CM 

lints  \wmii 
of  II  milcolf 
nuj;littubear 

illy  lis  woul'l 

six  fiitimiiis 

mv,  and  giie 

the  Q.5tli  nf 
)  A.  iM.to6 
t.j  K.  S.  K. 

in  the  same 


direction,  rnther  '.osb,  it  fell  26  inches,  from  7  A.  M.  to  (5  P.  M.  This  wns  n  very  unu- 
jiml  tiJoi  nnd  se.eriil  rflet's  were  quite  dry  thiit  wer«  not  seen  hefore  iihove  wuter.  Wo 
miiy  suppose  tliis  rising  of  the  waters  in  tlie  morning  to  liiive  been  occasioned  hy  the  liind 
iiid  sea  winds,  (the  few  inches  are  scarcely  worth  noticing,)  the  ruenn  hk^ight  being  iibout 
noon.  * '"  the  plan,  therefore,  there  miiy  be  sometimes  a  foot,  more  or  less,  than  there 
ijiown.  The  fisiiermen,  we  found  on  ii  second  visit,  lire  supplied  with  water  from  the 
niiiinliiiuli  a  strong  proof  that  it  cannot  be  procu.od  at  Alac.an.  The  dampne:»s  of  the 
atmosphere  was  remarkable,  the  sails,  wet  with  salt  water,  exposed  to  the  burning  fun 
fur  two  or  three  days,  would  not  dry,  and  the  fog  in  the  morning  was  regular  and  very 
uncomfortable.  The  main  reef  forms  a  regular  segment,  ronvc  ving  to  the  N.  K. ;  its 
buse,  or  extreme  length,  tending  N.  W.  by  N.,  14  miles.  The  lead  does  not  give  sutfi- 
jiciit  warning  of  approach ;  the  abrupt  descent  from  20  fathoms  to  dry  rocks  is  very  re- 
nwrkftl)!".  as  are  the  shelves  on  the  wej-t.  side,  from  7  to  "J-l  fathoms,  in  it  ship's  length. 
Tlie  nature  of  the  deep  water  stmndings  is  very  fine  sand  :  that  called  grey,  white  and  yel- 
l,nv, is  much  the  same  kind;  a  horn  protractor  laid  on  white  paper  will  be  the  exact  tint. 
This  will  be  found  the  predominant  color  on  the  ground  of  (;umpeche  Bank.  To  the 
pastwiird  of  the  Alacrans  there  is  no  appearance  of  soundings,  with  a  constant  current  to 
the  N.  VV.1  f'Oin  ""e  to  one  and  a  half  knot  per  hour.  The  dry  sand  bores  are  conveni- 
eiiijv  situated  for  our  work.  Three  of  the  siuiie  stars  as  were  discovered  at  Paian's  make 
tliei''i:li  north  bore  in  Int.  2vJ"  32'  15"  N.  These  sand  bores  soon  get  covered  with  grass, 
ij  ,  iliire,  and  various  kinds  of  herbs,  when  above  water.  The  first  formation  of  all  is 
liranclies  of  dead  coral.  These  are  found  by  digging  to  the  level  of  high  water  mark,  and 
is  nro!ml)ly  the  reason  the  Alacrau  does  not  contain  fresh  water.  All  the  keys  swarm 
ffitli  boobies  and  man-of-war  birds,  with  their  yonig.  The  only  eatable  kind  are  plovers 
and  siind  pipers.  Fish  of  all  kinds  are  very  abiinda.it,  particuhirly  grampus  and  rock  cod. 
The  fishermen  dry  them  for  the  (3umpecho  market;  ihoy  had  nets  for  taking  them  and 
tlie  Hiiwksbill.     Turtle  are  also  plentiful. 

The  Alacrans  are  in  22°  32'  15"  N.  latitude, 
8!J°  43'  00"  W.  longitude. 

ISLAND  BF.RMIJA  does  not  exist. 

THK  NK(iKILLO  does  not  exist. 

SISAL  SHOAL.— This  Hank,  (the  centre,)  lies  in  lat.  21°  20'  44"  N.,  and  long.  90" 
9'3G"  W.,  in  a  direction  N.  31"  W.,  true,  from  Sisal  Castle.  The  least  wafer.,  i  it  is 
nine  feet,  and  it  is  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile  in  a  N.  N.  \V.  and  S.  S.  E.  direction. 
In  the  cliiinnel,  between  it  and  the  shore,  are  not  more  than  seven  fathoms,  with  tolerably 
regular  soundings, 

MADAGASCAR  .SHOAL  is  a  most  dangerous  narrow  coral  ledge,  lying  in  a  direc- 
tion nearly  east  and  west,  about  a  mile  and  a  (|ua  ter  long,  covered  with  dark  gras>,  and 
hiiviiij;  in  one  part,  towards  the  western  end,  only  ')  feet.  The  latitude  and  longitude  of 
tlie  two  extremes  are  as  follows  : 

East  end,  21°  2fi'  Ofi"  N.,  90°  17'  30"  W. 
West  end,  21° -JC  18"  N.,  90°  18'  48"  \V. 

Itscentrelies  N.  42°  W.,  214  miles  from  Sisal  Castle;  and  in  the  channel,  between  it 
and  tlio  Sisal  Bank,  from  which  its  centre  lies  N.  56''  W.,  ten  miles,  there  are  ten  fath- 
oms water.  The  celebrated  inouiit,  No-te-perderas,  the  Spaniards'  mark  for  keeping 
clear  of  Sisal,  is  becoming  indistinct,  in  consequence  of  the  destruction  of  the  trees. 
These  descriptions  are  from  the  surveys  of  Ciipt.  Barnett,  H.  M.  S.  Thunder;  the  longi- 
tuiies  aie  farther  to  the  westwaid  than  laid  down  in  the  charts,  but  we  prefer  his  as  more 
authentic. 

TO  CAMPECHE.— Ifbound  to  Campeche,  get  intothe  latitude  ot  ri^  0' ;  then  steer  To  Cam- 
W.  i  S..  100  mil(!s,  sounding  frequently;  and  having  pood  soundin;;8  on  the  bank,  you  pecht. 
lUiiy  then,  with  great  confidence,  keep  in  the  scmndmgs  laid  down  in  the  chart,  either  in 
goiiiu  within  the  shoal  of  Sisal,  or  without  it :  but  in  fine  weather,  1  should  always  jirefer 
iiiiikiiig  the  land  to  the  eastward,  and  then  run  down  along  the  coast  in  5  or  (J  fathoms. 
On  iippniiiching  Sisal,  keep  the  land  freely  on  board  by  your  soundings;  nnd,  in  doing  so, 
you  avoid  the  risk  of  running  on  it,  either  by  day  or  night,  for  you  will  see  the  Castle  of 
Sisal  live  or  six  miles  olf,  and  you  may  run  down  to  five  or  six  fathoms.  The  great  ad- 
v;iiitaj;e  of  this  will  be,  the  certainty  of  land  winds  olf  shore,  frtmi  about  4  o'clock  in  the 
nfiernoDii  until  7  or  8  the  next  morning;  the  sea  bree/.e  setting  in  generally  from  the 
northward  and  eastward.  If  you  are  in  a  vessel  drawing  mere  than  12  feet  water,  avoid 
1  shoal  laid  down  in  the  .Spanish  chart,  on  which  2^  fathoms  only  are  found  :  this  shoal 
lies  ull"  the  village  of  .layna,  about  10  miles,  which  village,  or  any  part  of  the  const,  cannot 
j  be  seen  olf  deck  ;  therefiire  great  caution  is  necessary  in  running  for  m  leaving  Ciimpeehe, 

The  town  of  Campeche  is  situated  in  latitude  li)"  4!)'  N.,anil  longitude  !I0^  "\V  ;!()''  \V. 
I  of  Greenwich.     Prucuedinjj  fur  the  anchorage   from    the  northward,    and   having  ad- 


Si$al  Shoal. 


Madagascar 
iilioal. 


I  luiimiii.  iiiHiiiii. 


'■^«!w  .iiwjajiii.u^yip 


28S 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


# 


Port  La- 
cuna. 


VRiicod  towHrds  Point  Doflconoddn.  on  the  N.  W.  partof  Yucntan,  distant  from  its  or  9 
miles,  your  dppth  of  water  will  be  from  five  to  six  fnthoma ;  from  ttiia  proceed  to  the 
southward,  about  S.  by  \V.,  observing  that  you  must  go  no  nearer  to  the  shore  than  6 
fathoms,  until  you  are  ns  far  oa  the  lat.  of  20°  0'  N. ;  then,  being  in  that  latitude,  and  your 
depth  of  water  six  fathoms,  if  clear  weather,  you  will  seethe  land,  which  is  very  low  and 
difiicult  to  make  out ;  from  this,  if  ths  wind  will  allow  you.  steer  E.  S.  E.,  or  .S.  E.  by 
E.,  until  you  make  the  land  out  plainly.  Thera  are  two  lari?e  white  forts,  one,  Foil  St, 
Michael,  on  the  top  of  the  hill,  which  will  firat  be  discerned,  and  it  maybe  seen  in  Int.  190 
56',  m  5i  fathoms;  and  another,  recently  constructed.  St.  Michael  is  the  foit  noarest 
Lerma.  and  Lerma  is  five  miles  west  of  Campoche.  Keep  fort  St.  Michoal  E.  by  §.,  „f 
E.  S.  E.,  and  as  you  approach  the  land,  the  new  fort  will  be  discovered  on  the  beach  :  and 
when  this  fort  is  in  the  range  of  Fort  St  Michael,  keep  them  so,  and  run  in  within  six 
miles  of  the  land;  you  will  then  have  2\  fathoms,  which  depth  you  will  carry  twoinijes- 
then  you  will  have  24  fathoms  for  one  inMe.  and,  as  soon  as  you  nsjain  have  2^  fiithotng' 
come  to  an  anchor.  When  you  have  4?  fathoms,  the  steeples  of  Campeche  are  just  j^ 
sight,  from  a  frigate's  deck;  and  when  in  44.  the  church  at  Lerma  can  be  seen  from  the 
deck,  the  Point  Morros,  which  is  ths  S  W.  extreme  of  the  land,  will  bear  .S.  S.  ^..Hnd 
Campeche  E  ;  and  whei: 'i  24  feet,  which  is  the  depth  I  should  propose  for  a  frigate  to 
anchor  in,  the  tops  of  the  houses  at  Campeche  are  just  well  in  sij|;ht,  from  the  deck,  hear- 
ing S.  83°  E.,  Fort  St.  Michael  S.  73°  E. :  Lerma  Church,  at  t*^  3  bottom  of  the  hill.  s. 
66°  E.,  and  Point  Morros,  the  S.  W.  extreme  of  the  land,  S.  19°  E. ;  your  distance  from 
the  town  will  then  be  94  miles,  in  lat.  19°  53'  47" ;  and  long.  90°  37'  30"  W.  Sliould 
your  ship  be  of  less  draft  of  water  than  a  frigate,  proceed  on  for  Fort  St.  Michael,  keep- 
ing it  bearing  as  above,  and  anchor  in  what  depth  you  please,  but  within  34  fathoms ;  jq 
this  direction  the  bottom  is  bad,  being  covered  with  large  shells,  and,  of  course,  dangerous 
to  anchor  in. 

In  the  event  of  running  for  Campeche,  in  hazy  weather,  which  often  is  the  case  on 
this  coast,  in  the  fore  partof  the  day,  I  should  recommend  proceeding  as  follows:  After 
you  reach  the  lat.  of  20°  0'  N.,  haul  up  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  keeping  your  load  gi)ins>;  ami, 
should  you  not  see  the  land,  endeavor  to  get  into  the  hit.  of  19°  54'  before  yo  1  are  in 
less  than  44  or  5  fathoms  water.  So  soon  as  you  consider  yourself  in  tliis  'iatitiule,  pro. 
ceed  to  the  eastward,  until  you  shoalen  your  water  to  what  may  appear  best  to  anchor 
in ;  taking  care,  if  you  have  to  beat  up,  not  to  pass  to  the  southward  of  19°  52'.  nor  to  the 
northward  of  19°  56',  lor  between  these  two  latitudes  is  tlie  deepest  water,  and  anclioras 
near  the  latitude  of  19°  54' as  possible. 

In  lat.  20°  12'  and  long.  90°  41',  there  i"  a  small  spot  of  ground  with  only  15  feet  of 
water  on  it;  but,  running  along  shore,  and  keeping  in  6  fathoms,  you  will  pass  to  the 
Westward  of  it:  the  soundings  near  this  part  are  very  irregular,  altering  soinetimea  a 
fathom  and  a  half  between  two  casts ;  there  is  no  other  part  on  the  bank  whore  x[\u  \i 
the  case. 

The  town  of  Campeche  is  a  walled  town,  with  four  gates,  N.,  E.,  S..  and  W. ;  the  north 
gate  leads  into  the  town  from  the  sea  by  a  pier  of  obout  50  yards  long ;  but  the  water  is  do 
shallow  that  small  boats  only  can  land,  and  then  only  at  high  watet ;  the  rise  is  about 
three  feet. 

Though  Campeche  is  walled,  it  has  only  a  few  guns  on  each  angle;  the  military  force 
does  not  exceed  500  ;  the  town  is  abundantly  supplied  with  all  kinds  of  stock  ami  Indiiin 
corn,  but  no  water  except  in  tanks.  The  principal  wells  are  at  the  south  gate  about  hull 
a  mile,  and  that  not  good.  The  population  appeal's  great,  and  the  natives  active  and  well 
made. 

During  my  stay,  (from  June  10th  to  July  10th,  1817,)  I  observed  the  tides  wore  veiy 
irregular,  and  greatly  influenced  by  the  wind;  so  that  ships,  (with  the  wind  olf shore) 
must  poy  attention,  if  drawing  much  water,  to  get  under  way,  and  run  out  further  into 
deeper  water.  On  the  2d  July,  the  Fame,  then  drawing  17  feet,  and  lying  in  'i^  fath- 
oms, giounded  with  an  off-shore  wind,  and  in  a  few  hours  had  only  1 4  feet  along  side,  and 
for  three  days  never  more  than  164  feet,  until  the  wind  shifted  to  the  northward,  audhail 
she  not  been  a  remarkably  strong  vessel  would  have  strained  very  much. 

Vessels  with  hempen  cables  ought  to  bo  careful  in  picking  out  a  clear  berth,  ns  n  num- 
ber of  vessels  were  formerly  in  the  habit  of  heaving  out  stone  ballast  where  they  Iny; 
this  is  now  prevented,  by  a  fine  of  500  dollars  being  laid  on  a  vessel  that  does  ho.  Sam! 
ballast  is  allowed  to  be  thrown  overboard,  by  shifting  the  vessel  often,  so  that  theroL«  no 
danger  of  banks  being  formed  by  it. 

PORT  LAdrUNA. — The  port  of  Lnguna,  or  town  of  Carmin,  as  it  is  callefi  br  the 
Mexicans,  lies  on  the  west  end  of  the  Island  of  Carmin.  about  one  mile  within  the  S,  W. 
iwint  of  the  island.  The  bar  makes  out  from  5  to  6  miles  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  it,  in « 
N.  W.  direction.  The  latitude  of  the  point  is  18°  38'  N.,  ond  long.  91°  49'  \V.,  bj 
tlie  mean  of  three  chronometers :  hit.  of  the  middle  of  the  anchoring  grouud  1B°  37'  12', 
the  S.  W.  point  bearing  N.  W.  4  W.,  by  compass,  a  short  mile  distant. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Ships  bound  to  Lnguna  should  endeavor  to  make  land  to  the  windward  ;  if  they  fall  in 
Ifith  Port  Royal,  it  may  be  known  by  an  island  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance,  which 
Lprecisely  the  plan  that  Laguna  is  laid  down  on  the  common  charts;  but  it  is  a  mistake, 
I  u  there  is  no  island  to  be  seen  at  the  Lagoon,  but  a  snnd-bank  which  the  sea  breaks  all 
I  oier  in  rough  weather,  which  cannot  be  seen  until  you  come  into  3  fathoms  water  on  the 
I  (jtrance  of  the  bar :  the  middle  part  of  the  sand-bank  bears  N.  W.  i  N.,  by  compass,  about 
]  miles  disbmt  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  island.  Inside  of  tlie  sand-bank  is  a  passage  for 
Ismail  craft. 

Run  down  the  island  of  Carmin  at  4  or  5  miles  distant,  in  from  44  to  54  fathoms,  sticky 
I  lottoin,  all  the  way  from  Port  Royal,  but  to  the  east  of  Port  Royal,  you  will  have  hard  bot- 
tom, after  getting  into  7  or  8  fathoms. 
The  entrance  ofLaguna  does  not  open  until  it  bears  south,  but  if  any  shipping  are  in 
I  nort  you  will  see  their  masts  over  the  land  before  you  open  the  harbor. 

To  go  over  the  Bar. — After  opening  the  harbor  part  off  shore  until  Cape  Xicalango 

tors  VV.  S.  W.  by  compjiss,  three  miles  distant,  then  steer  for  it,  butkeep  your  lead  going, 

[  come  in  no  less  than  3  fathoms,  until  a  small  Indian  village,  on  Xicalango  Island,  bears 

I  S.or  S.  4  E.  by  compass,  then  steer  directly  for  it,  and  keep  that  bearing  until  the  Church 

jthe  centre  of  the  town  bears  E.  by  compass,  then  haul  up  for  it  and  anchor  before  the 

I  lown,  near  the  shore  as  you  please. 

There  are  from  124  to  134  feet  on  the  bar,  hard  mud;  pilots  come  off  with  the  land 
I  breeees  in  tJie  morning,  in  canoes,  with  one  or  two  sails. 
Strangers  had  better  anchor  in  3  or  4  fathoms,  after  opening  the  harbor,  and  wait  for  a 
lilot.    The  water  shoalens  quick  after  opening  the  harbor,  from  54  to  34  fathoms,  but  there 
I  is  no  clanger  by  keeping  your  lead  going. 

THE  COAST  FROM  POINT  XICALANGO  TO  VERA  CRUZ  AND 

TAMPICO. 

Courses  in  this  Chapter  the  true  Courses. 

From  Point  Xicalango  the  coast  trends  about  W.  a  distance  of  32  miles,  to  the  River 

I  of  San  Pedro:  and  all  this  part  is  called  Loe'^zar,  (Mud  Bank,)  because  the  bottom  is  of 
mud  so  soft  and  loose,  that  there  have  been  mstnnces  of  ships  having  been  driven  upon  it 
tv  the  norths  without  receiving  much  injury  in  their  hulls.     The  land  is  high,  and  is  called 

I  tiie  Altos,  or  H  eights  of  San  Gabriel. 
From  the  River  San  Pedro  it  is  S.  75^  W.,  55  miles,  to  the  River  of  Tupilco ;  the 

I  coiist  between  forms  a  bight  of  about  5  miles  in  depth  within  the  line  of  bearing,  and 
liMiuit  the  River  Tabasco,  that  ofChiltepec  and  Dos  Bocas,  or  Two  Mouths.  The 
baisofSan  Pedro  and  Chiltepec  have  7  or  8  feet  water  over  them;  theit^  are  4  feet  in 
the  Dos  BocHS  and  Tupilco.  That  of  Tabasco,  which  is  the  deepest,  forms  two  mouths, 
sipiimted  by  the  Isle  del  Buey,  or  Ox  Island;  the  easternmost  of  tln'so  has  7  feet,  and  the 

I  westernmost  9  feet  water ;  all  these  bars  are  subject  to  shift,  exci         -  that  of  San  Pedro, 

1  which  istixed  about  midway  between  the  two  points  of  the  river. 

Buey  Inlet  varies  from  8  to  11  feet,  fine  while  sand  ;  you  can  alw(i\ ■^^  get  a  pilot.     Ten 

I  miles  to  the  eastward  the  palm-tiees  commence  veiy  thick.  The  town  ol  St.  JuanBap- 
tista  is  75  miles  up  the  river  ;  and  12  miles  from  the  bar  the  river  forms  three  bruuches,  on 

I  the  westernmost  of  which  the  town  is  situated. 

Tabasco,  by  Lieut.  Geo.  M.  Totten,  U.  S.  N. 

"Tlie  bar  of  the  Tobasco  River  may  be  considered  passable  at  all  seasons  of  the  year  for 
IvesseU  drawing  10  feet  water;  though  there  are  times  immediately  after  a  Norther, 
(when  there  is  as  little  as  8  feet ;  but  in  one  or  two  days  the  current  of  the  river  wears  the 
lihnnnolto  its  usual  depth. 

"I  surveyed  the  bar  in  the  early  part  of  March,  1848,  and  have  since  crossed  it  many 
Itimes,  never  with  less  than  ten  feet,  sometimes  with  eleven,  and  once  with  thirteen,  in 
IScpt.,  ie48. 

I  "The  water  will  be  found  deepest  during  the  months  immediately  preceding  the  season 
[of  north  winds,  when  the  current  of  the  river  has  had  a  long  time  to  act,  in  clearing  out 
|thc  channel  on  the  bar. 

"The  water  in  the  river  is  highest,  and  the  cun-ent  more  rapid  during  the  rainy  season, 
Iwhen  1  hiivii  known  a  single  norther  to  bank  the  bar  uj)  from  10  to  8  feet  water. 

'  No  vessel  should  load  inside  deeper  than  to  10  feet  draught,  or  they  may  have  to  wait  a 
Imonth  before  getting  out. 

"  The  pilots  are  good,  and  keep  a  good  lookout  for  vessels  approaching,  getting  on  board  in 
bod  time." 


289 


I  From  the  River  Tupilco  the  coast  forms  a  bight  or  bay  i 
iif  Santa  Aim,  distant  from  tlie  former  31  miles,  S.  52*  W. 


bay  as  far  us  the  bar  of  the  Lagoon 


19 


290 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Alvarado. 


All  the  const,  from  Xicalango  to  Santa  Ana,  is  clean ;  so  that,  from  the  Lodnzar  to 
Chiltepec,  there  are  4  or  5  fathoms  at  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  10  miles  beirt\)en 
Chiltepoc  and  Santa  Ana :  the  quality  of  the  bottom  between  Lodazar  and  Chi'tene 
is  mud  ;  between  Chiltepec  and  Dos  Bocas,  mud  and  rotten  sheila ;  from  t^s  Bocns  t 
Tupilco,  coarse  olive-colored  sand;  and  between  Tupilco  to  Santa  Ana,  coarse  sun! 
with  shells,  and  in  some  parts  gravel.  There  is  mud  in  the  mouths  of  all  these  liver 
as  far  out  as  the  heads  or  points  of  the  bars.  The  whole  of  the  shore  is  rather  low  tlinr 
otherwise,  and  from  about  2  leagues  to  windward  of  the  San  Pedro  to  the  (Jhiltepec,  it  i 
covered  with  palm  and  mangrove  trees,  and  thence  to  Santa  Ana,  with  mangroves  and 
miraguanos. 

From  the  bar  of  Santa  Ana  west,  25  miles,  is  the  River  Goazacoalcos,  and  in  the  inter- 
mediate space,  the  River  Tonala  discharges  its  waters. 

The  River  GohzhcomIcos  is  '  .iown  by  its  east  point  forming  a  scarped  morro,  orhill,t]ic 
west  point  being  very  low.  S.  34°  W.  from  the  said  east  point  of  the  river,  nt  tljcdiv. 
tance  of  four  miles  and  four-tenths,  there  is,  on  a  height,  a  vigia,  or  lookout  tower,  \\% 
a  house  at  its  foot,  which  serves  as  a  warehouse  or  magazine  of  gunpowdo.'- ;  and  somewhat 
more  to  the  east,  a  corps  de  garde  with  a  battery,  which  has  a  flag-staff  a  its  oust  part,  mid 
which  serves  as  a  mark  for  the  bar  of  the  river.  When  this  bears  S.  13°  30'  W.,  it\vi|| 
direct  you  over  the  middle  of  the  said  bar,  tlie  depth  of  which  is  2\  fathoms,  increiising  qs 
you  pass  it  from  7  to  13  and  15  fathoms. 

At  the  distimce  of  13  miles  west  from  this  bar  is  that  of  the  River  Barrilla,  which,  wiih 
tlio  River  Goazucoalcos,  forms  an  island  called  Barrilla. 

N.  20°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  10  miles  from  Barrilla,  is  the  point  of  San  Juiin  witlmn 
islet,  and  at  N.  35°  W.  from  it,  distant  17  miles,  is  that  of  Zapotilan,  from  which  it  trends 
N.  49°  W.,  for  the  distance  of  11  miles,  to  the  Point  los  Morrillos,  and  aftcirwnrds .\, 
59"  W.,  7  miles,  to  Roca  Partida.  West  from  Zapotilan  Point,  distjmt  one  Ifiiicue,  j, 
the  boca,  or  mouth  of  Soutecomapa  Lagoon,  and  S.  S.  E.  from  Point  los  Morrillos 
there  is  a  vigia,  or  watch-towin-.  Tlie  coast  between  Barrilla  and  Roca  Purfidu  funnj 
the  base  of  the  sierras,  or  mountains  of  San  Martin,  on  the  highest  summit  of  wliidi  jj 
the  volcano  of  Tuxtla,  which  broke  out  in  March,  1793,  and  whence  eruptions  still  con- 
tinue. This  mountain  can  bo  (H.-tinctly  seen  at  Vera  Cruz,  which  is  distant  25  Ipiisies, 
When  it  is  in  active  state,  the  flames  by  night,  and  the  column  of  smoke  by  day  iifl'ord  ai) 
excellent  landmark. 

ALVARADO.— N.  86°  W.,  distant  27  miles  from  Roca  Partida,  lies  the  Imr  nt'Alvs. 
rado,  which,  though  it  has  not  so  great  a  depth  of  water  as  that  of  the  Gon/.acoulcos,  will 
admit  vessels  of  9  or  10  feotdiuft.  On  the  intermediate  coast  is  the  vigia  or  lookout  of 
Tuxtla,  and  that  of  Barrancas. 

The  entrance  to  Alvarado  is  very  narrow,  and  cannot  be  seen  until  boariii'j;  S.  byE.to 
S.  by  W.     It  is,  however,  known  by  a  remarkuble  sniid-bluft",  and  appears  thus : 


S.  15°  W. 

Vessels  bound  here,  on  making  the  usual  signals  for  a  pilot,  by  firing  a  cun  imil  1,iir 
ing  colors,  will  be  furnished  without  delay.      A  pilot  proceeds  from  town  in  a  iiirii;iii,(,r| 
canoe,  manned  by  8  or  10  men. 

The  anchoriigc  off  the  bar  is  iiidilTfieiit,  and  iiffcr  the  month  of  .'^e])teiiih('r,  vciy  itu-l 
gerouM,  as  chould  a  shi])  be  caugiit  here  in  a  north  wind  h\w.  must  inmifably  pj  on Vhuuf 

unless  she  can  cross  the  liar,  and  that  c inly  l)e  done  by  vessels  diiiwiu';  ](l  I'l'ct  or!' 

These  winds  come  on  so  quick,  iind  a  cm  i  ent  runs  so  strong  to  leewiiid,  tliiit  it  in  vcn  iiii| 
probai)l(«  a  ship  would  work  oil'  the  coast. 

During  the  rainy  season  the  current  nms  constantly  out  of  the  river,  and  it  Vt'(|iiiif,s  dl 
the  hail  you  can  make  to  iross  the  bar:  if  tln^  ship  siiould  be  of  such  dnil't  ns  to  ri'iiiktl 
uncertain,  a  person  should  be  iirocmed  fioni  town,  who  could  tidk  with  llic  pilut  (liiciiiiy.sl 
tlie  least  mist^ike  might  be  fatal.  In  18-M  I  (tossimI  this  bar  without  touching',  dniraf 
11  feet,  in  a  very  fast  vessel,  while  a  dull  sailer  of  li'ss  dri.tl  directly  struck  and  wTiitiJ 
pieces. 

The  anchonige,  after  you  are  in,  is  gooil,  and  about  2  miles  from  thi!  bur,  dlicrlKoppiyl 
site  the  town. 

N.  44"  W.,  distant  21  n)i'  s  from  the  liar  of  Alvamdo,  is  the  River  S;;lii(l()Clii(n,\viiicl 
is  the  southernmost  j)art  of  the  anchorage  of  Anton  I  i/.urilo.  All  this  coiist,  iVonitkl 
River  Santa  Ana  to  the  River  .Salado  (.'liico,  is  e(|i;,,ily  clear  as  that  to  liic  ciunviK,! 
mud  on  all  that  part  on  which  we  have  written,  fiorn  the  La'j;oon  of  Tcniiiiids  Ic t!sf 
Bast  mentioned  place,  it  is  very  dangt!rous  to  andioi  i  roni  Oclolicr  to  Apiil,  ;iii  iioroi 
•of  the  norths  blowing  directly  on  the  shore;  and  it  oiiglit  not  to  lie  iipproiiclicd  williiii| 
vessel  Uiat  cannot  enter  over  the  burs  which  huvo  been  described ;  for  it  might  ciai 


ANTON 

therefore  br 

boiiriags;)  tl 

are  two  mil 

bow, — there 

for  it     As  J 

steer  for  tlie 

Shoiil.    As  y 

joiir  larboarc 

Vou  will  no^ 

300  to  400  y 

not  go  in  lesi 

your  water,  i 

from  IC  quid 

soon  us  you  j 

era  and  easto 

jilsise.    Blani 

in  C  flithoins  w 

The  lioldinr 

cnmstiince  of  i 

from  nny  quai- 

Shi|)s,  in  ap[ 

to  avoid  the  ou 

are  ivy  at  low 

all  liinRs, 

In  (i;)p!-oHchi 
you  from  inakii 
ships  to  mnke  t 
N.  27^  W., 
Jniin  d,!  Uluii, 
iVcqa.'uted  tli.i 
take,i),iitii;ulail 
stenJ,  covered 
erected. 

The  principii 
Mva,  niul  the  h 
fir  inlfin  I  to  tin 
Tuxti.i,  on  tile 
Vera  Ci'uk  S. 

Tho  Peak  of 
It  in  of  a  coninii 
and  continued  i 
jbustion.  Its  hm 
jkuown,  OS  it  8ho\ 
"i^  l:!ii!;iies  from 
Th'j  Cofre  d,' 
!9'  N.,  about  13 
nil  I'nngo  to  the 

'Jireclinnsfur  V, 
Til"  linrhor  of 
P'o  walla  of  tho 
Till.'  ciistle  is  bui 
foiii  it  to  tho  N. 
►lit  iibovu  water 
Pliiiids  and  reefs 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT,  291 

happen,  in  spite  of  nil  exertions,  that  you  miiy  be  driven  upon  the  coast,  seeing  that 
the  norths  are  veiy  strong,  and  with  thom  there  is  no  way  of  getting  off. 

The  anchorage  of  Anton  Lizardo,  which  is  distant  12  miles  from  Vera  Cniz,  is  form-  '  ," 

5(1  by  various  shoals  and  reet^,  with  clean  channels  between  thom,  of  very  easy  access,  ' 

especially  when  a  fresh  wind  causes  the  sea  to  break  on  the  shoals.  These  shoals,  al- 
thougli  they  attbrd  no  shelter  against  the  winds,  break  olf  the  soa  so  mucli  that  ships  ride 
very  safe  and  securely  at  their  anchors,  even  during  the  hardest  north  gales.  The  an- 
cliora!,'0  is  spacious,  and  fit  for  eveiy  class  of  vessels,  for  which  reason,  and  because, 
with  the  norths,  it  is  to  leeward  of  Vera  Cruz,  n  thorough  knowledge  of  it  is  of  the  ut- 
most importance  to  those  who  cannot  reach  that  port  with  those  winds. 

Directions  by  Commander  F.  En<^le,  United  Stales  Navy. 

ANTON  LIZARDO. — Sacrificios  and  Green  or  Verde  Island  cannot  be  mistaken;  AntonLizar- 
therefore  biing  Green  Island  to  boar  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  steer  .S.  E.  by  S.  (compass  do. 
boiirings;)  this  will  carry  you  in  sight  of  Blanquilla,  n  shoal  which  breaks.  Wlien  you 
are  two  miles  from  Green  Island,  you  can  see  a  blank  on  the  hills  on  your  larboard 
|),rtv,— there  are  a  number  of  patches,  but  this  is  the  largest,  and  nuwt  southerly — steer 
for  it  As  you  approach,  you  will  observe  the  houses  and  limo-kilu  on  Anton  Lizardo; 
steer  for  them,  keeping  them  open  on  the  larboard  bow  until  you  are  near  Blanquilla 
Slioiil.  As  you  pass  in,  keep  a  cable's  length  from  tho  light  green  water,  the  shoal  on 
Yoiu'  larboard  hand.  You  will  bo  steering  about  S.  E.  by  E  ,  doubling  to  E.  i  N. 
Vou  wiil  now  be  one  mile  from  tho  beach,  whore  there  is  a  breaker  extending  from 
3110  to  40f)  yards  towards  Blanquilla.  Here  your  eye  and  lead  are  your  best  guide.  Do 
not  go  in  less  than  6  or  8  fathoms  on  the  Blanquilla  side  of  the  channel.  If  you  shoal 
your  water,  steer  towards  the  shore,  and  you  will  deepen  from  8  to  16  fathoms,  and 
from  IG  quick  to  8  and  2  fathoms.  The  channel  is  half  a  mile  wide  at  least.  As 
eoon  as  you  pass  Blantjuilla,  or  as  soon  as  it  is  on  >vith  Salmedina,  which  is  tb'>  south- 
ern and  eiistern  Island,  you  can  haul  up  gradually  to  the  eastward,  Kteeiing  wl  ere  you 
p'.eise.  Blanquilla  bears  \V.  i  N.,  and  Salmedina  E.  i  N.  from  the  ship.  vVo  ai"e 
in  0  fathoms  water,  and  good  holding  ground,  about  one  mile  from  the  island. 

Tha  holding  ground  is  excellent,  being  formed  of  thick  sand  and  clay  ;  and  from  this  cir- 
cmnstnnro  of  the  wind  on  this  part  of  die  coast  never  blowing  any  more  tlian  a  fresh  breeze 
from  any  quarter  except  tlio  N.  and  N.  N.  W.,  the  anchorage  is  as  secure  as  most  harbors. 

Shi|)3,  in  approaching  Anton  Li/.ardo  from  the  southward,  should  bo  particularly  careful 
to  avoid  the  outer  shoals,  which  He  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  anchorage,  about  9  or  10  miles,  and 
ore  liiy  at  low  water;  and  as  the  tide  rises  seldom  more  than  4  feet,  must  be  dangerous  at 
all  times. 

In  approacliiug  tho  land  in  tho  winter  season,  there  is  frequently  a  haze  which  prevents 
voiifrnm  making  it  out,  until  you  are  close  upon  tho  shoals ;  it  is,  therefore,  nmch  safer  for 
ships  to  make  the  land  to  the  northward. 

N.  27^  W.,  at  about  4  leagues  distant  from  Point  Anton  Lizardo,  is  the  castle  of  San 

Jnnn  d>i  Ulua,  which  forms  the  Harbor  or  Port  of  Vera  <  ruz,  which  is  more  kiiovi'n  and 

fvcqui'iited  th.in  all  the  others  in  the  Mexican  Gulf,  and  likewise  the  most  dangerous  to 

take,  p.uticulai ly  daring  northerly  gales.     It  is  not  a  commodious  harbor,  but  an  open  road- 

I  stead,  covered  with  several  islands,  on  one  of  which  the  fortress  of  San  Juan  de  Ulua  is 

i  erected. 

The  principal  landmarks  to  vessels  advancing  tow,ivd<  V(!ra  Cruz,  are  tlin  Pe;ikof  Ori- 

I  zava,  and  the  high  land  to  the  north  of  it,  called  t'le  Cofre  de  Perole,  both  of  wiiich  are 

t'lrialiiiil  to  the  westward  of  Vera  Ci'iiz.      Still  further  f  om  tho  city  is  tho  volcano  do 

[Tuxti.i,  on  tiie  eastern  part  of  the  sierras  or  mountains  of  San  Martin,  and  bearing  from 

I  Vera  Cruz  S.  E.  by  E.,  about  78  miles  distant. 

Tlie  Peak  of  Oil/,  iva  is  in  lat.  U}''  3  N.,  and  01  mil-.>s  W.  0='  S.,  true,  from  Vera  Cruz. 
lit  i;)  of  a  conical  form,  and  always  covered  with  snow.  This  mointain  burst  forth  in  lo4.'3, 
land  continued  in  action  20  yeai*s,  since  which  time  there  has  bee'i  lui  api)i  a-ance  of  cuni- 
Ibustion.  Its  height  is  2,\)Al  En.iiish  fathoms  abuvo  the  level  of  tho  .-^ea.  It  may  be  readily 
Ikuowii.  as  it  shows  in  tho  form  of  un  isosceles  trian<,lo.  ami  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of 
ISo  bullies  from  tho  coast. 

Tli'J  Cofre  d.!  Peroto  is  2,332  fathoms  above  the  level  of  tho  sea.  It  stands  in  lat.  ID" 
E9'  N.,  about  13  leagues  from  tha  nearest  part  of  the  coast.  It  is  the  higliost  of  the  moun- 
aia  ningo  to  the  north  of  Orizava. 

'}ireclinns  for  Vera  Cruz,  by  Capt.  Juhn  Mackellar,  of  his  Majesty's  skip  Pique,  1317. 
Tii!^  harbor  of  Vera  Cruz  is  formed  by  the  walls  of  the  town  on  the  south  sidt;,  and  by 
Bio  walls  of  the  Ciu«llo  of  S.in  Juan  do  Ulua,  where  tho  li.^hllnnifio  .'^taiids,  on  the  north. 
The  ciistle  is  built  on  an  ishmd  ojjposite  tho  town,  and  has  a  Urge  rm^l'  of  rocks  running  otf 
torn  it  to  tho  N.  E.,  nearly  2  mdes.  Tlii-t  recF  is  called  tho  Gidlega,  and  always  shows  a 
Wt  iihove  water.  Tho  harbor  is  bounded  on  thi;  S.  E.  and  E.  sides  by  three  or  foursnrall 
piiindsnnd  reefs  witli  good  passages  through  between  them.     On  the  N.  W.  side  ia  tho 


wrnmiKT 


.1  nwiipHHw  ■ 


292  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 

principal  entrance,  on  account  of  the  eliips  getting  easier  in  and  out;  and  that  lathe 
only  Bide  which  is  clear  and  open  to  seaward. 

1.  This  port  has  a  ver)'  good  revolving  light  on  the  N.  \V.  of  the  Castle  of  San  Junndo 
Ulua;  tlie  centre  of  the  lantern  is  elevated  89  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  the  light 
is  on  tlie  same  principle  as  the  generality  of  revolving  lights  in  the  English  Channel,  hnvinj 
21  lamps  with  reflectors,  making  7  lamps  on  each  side  of  a  triangle,  which  makes  the  rev- 
olutions  of  the  lights  its  follows :  Fnmi  the  first  M])pearance  of  the  Hght,it  is  about  (i  seconds 
bright;  then  succeeds  u  fidiit  glimmering  for  40  seconds,  and  so  on  alternately.  This  light ' 
may  be  see.i  12  miles  olF  at  sea  in  clear  weather.  ' 

li.  In  running  for  this  port,  I  should  reconunend  you  to  get  into  the  latitude  of  I90  go' 
before  you  pass  the  95th  degree  of  longitude,  and  from  that  proceed  to  the  westAvard,  keen' 
ingin  that  latitude:  by  doing  so  you  will  pass  10  miles  to  the  northward  of  Anegiidude 
Fuera,  and  approach  Vera  Cruz  6  miles  to  the  northward  of  all  the  shoals  that  lie  off  from  '• 
it.     If  in  the  night  time,  a  good  lookout  must  be  kept  for  the  light,  on  the  larboiird  bow 
and,  on  making  it,  stand  on  to  the  westward  unlil  it  bears  S.  S.  W.  from  you:  then,  if  jii 
the  latitude  of  19°  120',  you  will  be  8  miles  from  the  N.  N.  E.  side  of  the  shoals  off  tho 
harbor.    Hero  bring  to,  with  the  ship's  head  to  ttie  northward,  observing,  during  the  niglit  I 
not  to  approach  nearer  to  tho  light  than  5  or  0"  miles,  and  to  keep  it  bearing  from  you  be- 
tween S.  S.  W.  and  S.     The  S.  S.  W.  bearing  will  keep  you  clear  of  any  shoals  tlmt  mnv  1 
lie  to  the  ea8t^vard  of  the  light,  that  is,  more  than  2  miles  from  it;  and  the  south  benrin" 
will  keep  you  clear  of  the  N.  W.  shore.     At  daylight,  in  getting  sight  of  the  town,  steer  | 
for  it,  observing  the  following  directions: 

3.  Before  you  approach  nearer  than  3  or  4  miles  of  the  town,  bring  the  largest  domed- 
top  steeple,  in  the  centre  of  the  town,  to  bear  S.  |  E.     It  will  then  appear  with  two  ehnrp 
spire-topped  steeples  close  to  it,  on  the  west  side  and  on  a  small  hill  behind  the  town.  I 
There  is  a  division  between  part  of  a  hiil  that  is  covered  with  grass,  and  part  that  is  conr- 
ed  with  sand.     This  division  will  be  on  witli  the  steeples  bearing  as  above ;  the  grass  purt  I 
to  the  S.  E.,  and  the  part  covered  with  sand  to  tho  N.  W.     With  this  mark  proceed  on 
to  the  southward,  along  the  west  side  of  the  Gallega  Reef:   your  soundings  here  will  I 
be  regular,  from  10  to  5  fathoms;  and  when  you  are  so  far  as  to  bring  the  S.  W.  sideotl 
the  square  building  that  the  lookout  house  stands  on  in  the  fort  to  touch  the  N.  E.  side  f 
of  the  lighthouse,  bearing  about  E.  S.  E.,  steer  for  it,  taking  care  not  to  open  the  light- 
house to  the  N.  E.  of  tho  lookout  house,  until  you  are  close  to  the  castle.    Thisimrlil 
will  carry  you  up  to  the  lighthouse;  then  steer  round  it  to  the  southward,  and  aiiclior 
close  to  the  south  side  of  the  castle,  in  from  5i  to  4^  fathoms. 

During  the  months  of   November.  December,  January,  February,  and  March,  i .. 
strong  northerly  winds  prevail,  and  at  times  blow  very  sti'ong,  which  occasion  a  ooiisidor- 1 
able  sea  in  the  liiivlK)r :  and  as  the  gj'ound  is  not  good  for  holding,  I  should  rccoinnie 
mooring  in  tlieso  months  with  the  small  bower  to  the  N.  W.,  and  best  to  the  N.  E.,  in  I 
order  that  you  niiiy  ride  by  both  anchors,  with  the  wind  at  north,  and  lay  your  stiiaiiil 
anchor  astern,  which  will  b(<  sufTicient  to  hold  you  with  the  land  wind,  which  seldom  blmv-I 
with  any  force.    During  other  months  of  the  year,  moor  with  your  small  bower  to  the  N,  \V„ 
and  best  to  the  S.  E.,  in  order  to  Imve  an  open  howser  to  the  eastward. 

4.  There  is  no  regular  tide  hei'c?;  but  in  moderate  weather  there  is  one  ebb  mid  one  flood 
in  24  hours,  orrallier  oiiiM'iscMind  one  fidl  in  that  time;  for  it  is  the  case  sometimes  that  tlie  I 
tide  runs  to  the  N.  W.  for  three  or  four  days,  and  the  same  to  the  S.  E.;  but  itnppeaisl 
to  be  governed  chiefly  by  the  winds  blowing  in  the  same  direction :  as  the  wind  bl 
its  rise  and  fall  is  from  two  to  three  feet;  but  in  strong  breezes,  sometimes  there  is  neitlier| 
rise*  nor  fall  for  thret^  or  four  dtiys. 

5.  The  Hiichonige  at  Vera  C"ruz  is  extremely  bad,  and  if  once  you  part  there  is  iio| 
chanc((  of  saving  your  shi|),  having  nothing  but  broken  ground  to  the  leeward  of  you. 

The  men-of-war  of  the  country  always  moor  with  the  small  bower  to  the  N.  W.,iiio| 
fathoms,  and  the  best  lM)wer  cable  to  the  rings  in  the  Castle  of  San  Juan  de  Uhm,  \ 
n  cable  over  the  stern  to  the  S.  S.  \V.,  in  6  fatlioms,  by  which  mode  they  lie  so  close  underl 
the  castle,  that  they  are  in  a  greiit  measure  sheltered  from  the  violence  of  the  N.  nndN.' 
W.  winds.  I  anchored  in  June,  1H17,  by  bringing  the  S.  W.  angle  of  Fort  St.  Juaiil 
bear  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  about  tiOd  yards  off;  from  which  bearing  only  four  guns  frointiel 
castle  or  outworks  could  be  brouylit  to  bear  on  the  ship.  This  position  may  he  taken kj 
running  in  to  the  southward  of  tin*  castle,  between  tho  shoals  of  Galleguilla  and  Bianquilkl 
which  always  show  themselves,  and  round  tho  Gallega  Reef,  in  5  fathoms  until  you  briijl 
the  bastion  of  St.  Ciispin  (on  the  soutli  corner  of  tlie  castle)  to  boar  N.  E.  by  £.}£.[ 
Drop  your  anchor  on  a  a  quarter-spring,  to  act  according  as  tlio  wind  and  circumstii:icej| 
may  require. 

The  town  of  Vera  Cniz  furnishes  no  certain  supply  of  any  kind  for  ships,  exceplii!! 
water,  and  that  bad,  and  during  the  winter  months  dithcult  to  get  off,  as  the  sea  brcibl 
with  so  much  violence  on  the  pier  as  to  prevent  boats  from  landing  for  three  or  fuurdiyfl 
at  a  time.  As  the  sea  and  land  breezes  throughout  the  year  are  regular,  there  k  seldoml 
any  difficulty  in  going  in  or  out  of  the  harbor.     Duiiug  the  months  of  August,  Sc|)tcuilieri 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


293 


^i  October,  the  rain  sets  in,  with  close  sultry  wenther,  and  the  vapors  arising  from  the 
ijjrehy  giound  make  the  season  extremely  subject  to  the  yellow  fever,  of  which  many 
liundreds  die  yearly,  equal  to  a  tenth  part  of  the  whole  population,  particularly  strangers. 

^rief  dirertions  for  Vera  Cruz,  communicated  to  Captain  Livingston,  by  Don  Cayetano 

Olivella,  1819.* 

Run  in  for  Punta  Gorda{lat.  19°  144')  until  the  castle  of  San  Junn  de  Ulua  bears  S. 
g,  by  S.,  and  then  keep  away  to  the  south-eastward  until  you  bring  that  cnstle  to  bear 
ji,  E.  You  will  then  steer  so  as  to  keep  the  foremost  shroud  of  the  vessel  always  on 
irith  the  castle,  that  is,  the  foremast  shroud  of  the  larboard  side,  the  bearings  to  be  from 
ilie  wheel  or  tiller  of  the  vessel.  Keeping  it  so  will  lead  you  clear  of  the  reef  into  the 
lujclionige. 

In  case  of  parting  one  anchor,  never  attempt  to  let  go  another,  but  make  soil  immedi- 
jtely,  mid  run  the  vessel  right  for  the  Mole,  The  current,  which  runs  with  gient  velo- 
(itv,  will  not  allow  you  to  fetch  the  Mole ;  but  steering  for  it,  you  will  fetch  the  beach 
at  the  S.  E.  end  of  the  city,  by  which,  at  least,  the  lives  of  those  on  board  will  be 
sived:  whereas,  were  you  to  take  time  to  let  go  another  anchor,  it  would  not  bring  you 
up,  but  you  would  infallibly  go  on  either  the  Lavcndera  Shoal,  the  Isle  of  Sacrificios, 
or  the  veef  of  rocks  off  Punta  de  Hornos,  in  either  of  which  cases  not  a  soul  could  be 
saved. 

You  anchor  under  the  Castle  of  Sun  Juan,  and  neai*  to  it,  the  centime  of  tlie  castle  walls 
I  k'liring  N.  N.  E.  J  E.,  or  thereabout. 

Vessels  should  always  keep  their  fore-topmost  staysails,  and  such  others  as  may  be  re- 
I  quired  to  run  them  on  the  beach,  ready  bent. 

The  reefs  generally  show,  either  by  breaking  or  by  the  water's  being  discolored.     You 
J  moor  with  the  bower  anchors  to  the  N.  W.  and  N.,  and  a  sti'eam  anchor  out  astern  to 
I  the  S.  W. 
VERA  CRUZ,  from  the  French.— To  enter  into  the  Port  of  Vera  Ci-Ui,  by  the  best    Vera  Crwt. 
lassftge,  it  is  necessai'y  to  follow  the  range  of  the  steeple  of  St.  Francisco  and  the  square 
I  tower  of  the  Porochial  Church,  and  ns  soon  as  you  have  brought  the  bastions  of  St.  Pedro, 
St.  Crispin,  and  Fort  Ulua  in  a  range  one  with  another,  steer  immediately  for  Point  Hor- 
nos, and  approach  little  by  little  the  curtain  to  the  south  of  the  Forti'ess,  under  which  tlie 
1  ships  are  ordinarily  anchored. 

If  you  wish  to  enter  by  the  east  passage,  jou  take  first  the  lino  of  the  steeples  of  Mer- 
I  ced  and  of  Suint  Santiago,  and  when  you  have  reached  the  line  of  the  two  bastions  already 
1  mentioned,  you  steer  for  Fort  Conception,  then  dkect  towards  the  curtain  soutli  of  the 
Foitress,  as  soon  as  you  come  to  discern  the  middle. 

The  best  anchorages  neoi*  Vem  Cruz  are  to  the  S.  W.,  and  near  the  Island  of  Sacrifi- 
Icios,  in  eight  fathoms ;  or  to  the  south  of  the  Island  of  Verte,  13  and  14  fathoms,  muddy 
I  bottom. 

Between  Pajaros  and  the  Island  of  Sacrificios  there  is  a  good  shelter  from  the  uoith 
I  mnd,  but  only  for  a  small  number  of  vessels. 

There  is  but  one  tide  in  the  24  hours ;  its  movement  is  very  iiTegular ;  during  summer, 
I  at  full  and  change  of  moon,  low  tide  takes  place  in  the  evening,  from  3h.  to  7h.,  and  high 
I  in  the  morning,  from  7h.  to  9h.  In  wnter  it  is  to  the  conti-aiy,  low  tide  takes  place 
linthe  morning.  In  the  quadratures  these  two  incidents  of  the  falling  and  rising  of  the  sea 
Itake  place  at  the  middle  of  the  day  and  midnight.  The  greatest  difference  obsei-ved  in 
|the  level  of  the  waters  is  21  feet. 

During  winter,  and  generally  with  the  wind  north-west  to  N.  N.  E.,  the  cun-ents  rua 
IS.  S.  E.  to  S.  E.,  and  sometimes  to  the  E.  S.  E. ;  their  greatest  quickness  is  about  2  miles 
Ian  hour.  In  summer,  and  almost  always  when  the  wnd  is  from  the  east,  they  direct 
Itlu'inselves  W.  N.  W.,  or  to  the  N.  W.  ;  their  greatest  velocity  is  then  about  one  mile. 

Near  the  elevated  Innd  of  Bernal  and  the  point  of  Delgada,  these  cuiTents  are  stronger, 
land  are  directed  either  to  the  north  or  to  the  south,  according  to  the  season  or  tlio  most 
powerful  wind. 

During  the  squalls  of  winter,  there  are,  at  20  leagues  from  the  point  of  Delgada,  cur- 
rents which  run  between  the  N.  E.  and  the  N.  W.,  obscure  weather  and  continual  rain, 
s'iiile  near  to  the  coast  the  sky  is  frequently  sufficiently  clear  to  make  the  landing-places 
pasy. 

The  Roadstead  of  Anton  Lizardo  offers,  without  exception,  the  safest  ancliorage ;  they 
biichor  at  the  south  of  the  roef  of  Chapas,  where  they  find  a  bottom,  tlio  holding  ground 
pf  which  improves  the  nearer  they  approach  the  Island  of  Salmedina. 

You  can  orcasionally  anchor  to  the  south  of  the  reefs  of  Medio,  of  Cabeza,  or  of  outer 
jlnegada. 
The  upper  part  of  the  lantern  of  the  lighthouse  is  89  feet  above  tlio  moan  level  of  the  sea. 
Longitude  of  the  light,  96"  8'  36".     Lat.  19°  12'.     Variation,  8°  22'  E. 


'Theee  directions  for  entering  appear  to  be  particularly  adapted  to  small  vessels. 


294 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


in- 


prom  Pera 
Oruz  to  the 
River  Tam- 
oieo. 


TABLE 

Of  the  distances  of  the  Peak  ofOrizava,  in  the  Province  of  Vera  Cruz,  according  to  the 
apparent  angles  of  elevation  ;  supposing  its  real  height  above  the  level  of  the  sea  to  4 
2795  toisea,  or  5970. 4  English  yards,  and  the  lerreslriul  refraction  one-sixteenth  of  the  in 
tcrcepted  arc,  by  Don  Josrf  Juaquini,  Ferre. 

I 
Use  of  thk  Table. 
Tho  first  column  indicates  miintime  miles ;  the  spcontl 
tlie  npiJiircnt  imp;iilHr  iiltitudcs  of  the  Ponk  of  Ori/.avH 
coiTesponding  to  the  miles  stntod  ;  the  third  indiciitcs  tlin 
vui-intion  f)f  tlie  im;;iilMr  altitude  in  3  miles  of  disUuice  to 
31'  48",  and  in  6  miles  to  1'  52". 

EXAMPLE. 

Suppose  that  tho  altitude  of  the  Peak  above  tho  hoii- 
zon  of  the  sea,  was  obsoi-ved  to  bo  0°  59'  0",  and  tliiit  tlio 
depression  or  dip,  was  10'  20"  ;  what  is  the  distimco  bp- 
tween  the  vessel  and  the  Peak  of  Orizava? — Hoi  izoiitm 
angle  obsei-ved  corrected  for  the  eri'or  of  the  instiunicn, 

obseiTed  with 0°  59'  OO" 

Dip  of  the  horizon 10  20 

Apparent  altitude  of  the  Peak  48  40 
On  consulting  the  table,  it  will  be  seen  that  this  nnnli. 
is  comprehended  between  105  and  108  miles  distfincc,  liin] 
without  any  other  operation,  it  is  at  once  secMi  that  it  jj 
nearly  106  miles;  but  if  it  is  desired  to  determine  it  with 
gi'eater  accuracy,  note  tho  difference  for  3  miles  in  tiie  iin- 
gular  altitudes  between  the  two  distances  that  an  nearest 
whicli  is  3'  59'',  and  the  difference  between  the  angle  ob' 
sei*ved  and  that  corresponding  in  105  miles  of  distance  is 
1'  43 ;  thcrefoie  tho  true  distance  will  be  =  105  J. 
3'  X  1'  43". 

=106'  —  18",  or  105'  42". 

3'  59" 

FROM  VERA  CRUZ  TO  THE  RIVER  TAMPICO.— From  the  harbor  of  Vera  | 
Cruz  the  coast  trends  about  N.  53^  W.,  a  distance  of  11  miles,  to  tho  River  Antijiia, 
where,  with  some  siimosities,  it  extends  N.  20°  W.,  6  miles  fartlier,  to  the  Point  linj 
River  Chiicalacas,  thus  forming  a  bay  named  that  of  Antigua.  From  Chacaliiciis  it  run- 
tiimes  in  the  same  direction  N.  20  W.,  6  long  miles  farther,  to  tho  Point  of  Zeni|wiilii, 
forming  also  between  the  two  a  bight  extending  to  the  westward,  and  in  which,  at  the 
distance  of  3  miles,  the  River  Juan  Angel  disembogues.  From  Zempoala  tliB  coast 
trends  to  the  west^vnrd,  and  forms  a  regular  bay  with  Point  Bernal,  which  lies  abnut  10 1 
miles  N.  21°  W.  from  Zempoala  Point.  This  Point  Bernal  boars  from  Vera  Cruz  N.  29: 
28"  W.  _ 

On  the  south  side  of  Point  Bernal,  and  at  the  distance  of  about  a  mile,  there  is  an  islet  | 
called  Hernal  Chico,    which  bears  from  Vera  Cruz  N.   31°  52'  W.,  and  which,  iis  well 
as  all  the  coast  of  the  bay,  is  very  clear;  there  is  room  to  pass  between  it  and  tho  |ioini  I 
in  5   and  5i  fathoms  water  without  risk.     To  the  south  of  it  there  is  shelter  iisiiiiistl 
winda  from  the  N.  W.  quarter  as  far  as   north,  but  none  from  NNnnds  to  the  eiistwnnl  of  I 
north.     To  anchor  in  this  bay  there  is  no  need  for  any  other  guide  tlnm  the  lend,  there  f 
being,  nt  h;tlf  a  mile  from  the  beach,  4i  fathoms  water.     Off  the  coast,  iK^tweon  Zem|)o- 
ala  iiiul  Bernal,  there  is  a  shoal  which  is  visible,  and  which  lies  north  a  little  eiisterlv  I 
from  Zempoala  Point,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles,  and  at  a  similar  distance  tVoni  the  (wt 
abreast  of  it.     It  is  necessary  to  bo  cautious  of  it,  especially  in  tlie  night  time ;  nnd  wiili 
large  ships  it  should  always  be  passed  on  tho  outside,  for  in  the  channel  between  it 
the  shore,  there  is  a  ridge  of  rocks  running  off  tiie  land  on  which  there  are  not  fourfi 
oms  water. 

From  Point  Bernal  the  coast  runs  north,  a  distance  of  four  miles  to  that  of  Marin  An- 1 
drea,  which  bears  from  Vera  Cruz  N.  26°  32^'  W.  From  Point  Mariii  Andreii  tlieilii- 
tance  is  nine  miles  N.  IS''  W.  to  I'oint  Delgada,  whence  the  coast  trends  N.  33°  W.,11) 
miles  to  Point  Piedras,  from  which  the  direction  of  tho  coast  continues  N.  ,'53MV.a| 
distancf^  of  70  miles  to  the  River  'i'uspnin;  from  this  river,  the  distance  is  15  iiiiJpsN. 
15°  W.  to  the  bar  of  Tanguija,  and  thence  it  is  23  miles  N.  10°  W.  to  Cape  Rob.  I 
which,  by  obsei-vutions,  is  in  latitude  21°  35'  N.,  and  1°  14'  45"  west  longitude  from  Vera 
Cruz. 


(Votn  the 

Apparent  AokIoi  | 

UiHerencp  1 

I't'iik 

in  niilos. 

63 

66 
69 

of 

UltV.ltlUU, 

KnJti 

iiiileii. 

2" 

2 

12' 58" 

4  21 

56  23 

8' 

7 

7 

6 

6 

6 

37" 

58 

25 

66 

30 

07 

72 

48  28 

75 

42  02 

78 

35  32 

81 

29  25 

84 
87 
90 
93 
96 
99 

0 

23  40 
18  12 
13     1 
8     4 
3  21 
58  51 

5 
5 

6 

3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
6 
6 
5 

45 
28 
U 
67 
43 
30 
20 
08 
59 
51 
42 
35 
28 
39 
15 
57 
41 
24 

102 

0 

54  31 

105 

0 

50  23 

108 

0 

46  24 

111 

0 

42  33 

114 

0 

38  51 

117 

0 

35  16 

ViO 

0 

31  48 

126 

0 

25     9 

132 
138 

0 
0 

18  54 
12  57 

144 

0 

7  16 

1,50 

0 

1  52 

<-/ 

BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


296 


Between  Cnpe  Roxo  and  the  River  Tuspnin  there  are  various  Hhouls  and  islets  lying  at 
,  dUtunce  from  the  const,  which  form  good  breakwaters  and  excellent  anchorages,  shel- 
teriid  from  the  norths.  The  first  and  the  southernmost  is  the  shoal  of  Tuspnm,  lying 
jbout  11  miles  N.  (>0°  E.  from  the  river  of  that  name  ;  on  this  shoal  there  are  some  very 
iiiiiill  islets,  and  on  the  S.  W.  piirt  of  it  there  is  good  anchorage  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms 
pter,  on  coarse  sand,  nt  about  2  cables'  length  from  its  edge.  About  N.  W.  from  thin 
jhoiil,  iind  nt  a  distance  of  12  miles,  is  the  Bnjo  de  Eumcdio,  or  Middle  Shoal,  which  is 
jutiint  from  the  coast  and  east  of  the  River  Tan-niijo  eight  miles ;  this  shoal  is  much 
jiDiillur  than  the  preceding,  but  it  ntfords  good  anchorage  on  the  S.  W.  part,  in  54,  7,  or 
gfiitlioins,  on  sand.  North,  somewhat  to  the  east  of  this  shoni,  and  at  the  distance  of  3i 
miles,  IS  that  named  Tanguijo  Shoal,  which,  on  its  S.  W.  part,  presents  better  anchorage 
than  either  of  those  just  mentioned.  The  channels  formed  between  these  two  shoals 
are  very  clear,  with  a  good  depth,  and  between  them  and  tho  coast  there  are  no  dangers 
but  what  are  visible. 

OlFCape  Roxo  are  the  Islands  Blanquilla  and  Loboz;  the  first,  which  is  a  bank  with 
several  small  islets  on  it,  lies  E.  S.  E.  of  the  cape,  distant  about  5  miles  ;  south  a  little 
easterly  from  it,  and  at  the  distance  of  siy  miles,  is  the  Island  Loboz,  in  lat.  21°  26"  N.« 
and  long.  1°  8'  45''  W.  of  Vera  Cruz,  r  .-om  the  north  side  of  this  island  a  great  rocky 
ihnal  extends,  which  leaves  a  strait  of  only  three  miles  wide  between  it  and  Blanquilla ; 
gnd  iu  the  middle  of  this  strait  thoro  is  a  shoal ;  so  that  the  utmoHt  caution  is  required 
in  piissing  through  it.  To  the  S.  W.  of  these  islands  there  is  an  excellent  anchorage, 
well  sheltered  from  the  norths,  and  which  requires  no  particular  instructions  for  reach- 
ing it. 

All  the  const  which  we  have  described  from  Vera  Cruz  to  Cnpe  Roxo  is  clear  and 
deep,  and  without  any  other  dnngers  thnn  th?  rocky  ridges  which  stretch  off  from  Juan 
Angel,  in  the  Bay  of  BernnI  and  at  Point  Gorda ;  and  throughout  the  whole  of  it  there  is 
abnnli  of  soundings  extending  from  the  shore  8  or  10  leagues,  and  is  so  deep  that  at  one 
ortwo  miles  from  the  beach  there  are  from  4i  to  6  fathoms.  The  land  is  not  very  high, 
and  terminates  almost  at  every  part  in  a  sandy  beach,  is  covered  with  brushwood  and 
snmll  trees,  which  are  very  thick,  and  show  their  verdure  at  a  moderate  distance ;  and 
althuiigh  there  are  no  prominent  marks  to  distinguish  the  land  by,  the  latitude  will  be  suf- 
ficient to  point  out  what  part  of  the  coast  the  ship  may  be  on.  Nevertheless  it  may  serve 
in  some  cases,  to  know  thai  Mount  St.  Juan  and  the  Island  Blanquilla  bear  S.  65°  W.  and 
N,  65°  E.  from  each  other. 

From  Cnpe  Roxo  the  coast  rounds  or  trends  to  N.  19°  W.,  a  distance  of  7  miles,  and 
forms  the  front  of  the  cape ;  and  thence  to  the  mouth  of  Tampico  River,  the  bearing  and 
distance  are  N.  34°  W.  43  miles.  The  River  Tampico  is  considerable,  and  has  a  suf- 
ficient depth  of  water  for  ships  that  draw  less  than  12  feet ;  the  Bar  lies  N.  VV.  and  S.  E., 
on  which  there  is  more  or  less  water,  according  to  the  currents  of  the  river ;  it  is  situated 
by  good  observations  in  latitude  22°  15'  30"  N.,  and  long.  I''  42'  33"  W.  from  Vera 
Cruz  Although  in  this  line  of  const  there  are  no  marks  which  can  be  distinguished  but 
by  pilots,  nevertheless,  a  height  which  is  to  the  southward  of  the  mouth  of  the  river  may 
serve  ns  n  guide ;  (it  is  the  highest  land  between  Cape  Roxo  and  the  bar,  where  the 
iieights  of  Macnte,  Chnpapote,  and  Martiner  commence,)  nnd  also  the  opening  of  the 
land  formed  by  the  river's  mouth,  which  is  easily  distinguished  at  the  same  time  as  the 
surf  on  the  bar.  You  may  anchor,  as  before  said,  in  any  depth  you  please,  as  the  ground 
is goud  for  holding;  the  only  inconvenience  being  the  sea  raised  by  the  wind,  and  the 
heavy  sea  during  the  calm  nights. 

About  5  miles  within  the  bar,  upwards,  there  is  a  little  channel  on  tho  southern  bank, 
wliicli  lends  to  llio  Ingotm  of  Tampico,  or  Old  Town,  with  three  islets  in  it;  and  at  the 
entrance  of  the  Old  Town,  or  that  of  Tampico,  bears  about  S.  S.  \V.  from  the  bnr,  distant 
scarcely  5  mili^s.  To  the  N.  W.  of  that  channel,  there  is  another  which  lends  to  the 
turn  of  Altamin  ;  and  10  leagues,  in  a  strnight  line  from  that  of  Tampico,  up  the  river,  is 
that  of  Panneo ;  nt  all  three  towns  provisions  of  every  sort  may  bo  obtained.  On  the 
const,  comprised  between  Tnnguijo  nnd  the  River  Tnmpico,  in  which  Cnpe  Roxo  is  situ- 
ated, there  is  nothing  more  than  a  narrow  tongue  of  land,  which  separates  the  lagoon  of 
Tumiagua  from  the  sea. 

Directions  fur  Tampico  Anchorage  and  Bar,  by  Capt.  John  Mackellar  of  H.  B.  M. 

Ship  Pique,  1818. 

Tampico  Bnr  is  situnted  in  Inf.  22°  15'  56"  N.  nnd  long.  97°  50'  18"  W.,  the  variation 
of  the  conipns  8-"  25'  E.  As  the  Innd  is  low  nil  round  this  pince,  and  having  nearly  the 
same  nppenrance,  it  is  rnther  difficult  for  a  stranger  to  find  out  the  entrance  of  the  river ; 
on  that  account  I  would  recommend  proceeding  in  the  following  manner: — 

Ships  coming  from  the  eastward,  and  having  got  soundings  in  60  fathoms,  ought  im- 
mediately to  got  into  the  lat.  of  22^  16'  or  22°  18'.  and  from  that  make  a  west  course. — 
If  the  latitude  can  be  ascertained,  this  is  the  most  certain  method  of  making  a  good  land- 


■SW^»" 


296 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


fall;  but  in  tho  event  of  your  not  being  able  to  get  your  Intitude,  and  mnliing  your  Inm] 
to  the  northward  or  Bouthwiird  of  tho  river,  it  may  bo  known  thus  :  in  tho  liititudo  of  goo 
there  is  ii  range  of  hiiibII  hillH  not  higher  than  largo  bouBes;  this  land  is  S.  by  E.  by  com. 
pass  about  5  or  6  leagues  from  the  bar.  In  latitude  Qii°  9',  and  apparently  4  iniieg  in  i-hore' 
on  the  fall  of  a  clitf,  stands  the  town  of  Tampico,  which  may  be  seen  from  the  Ht<a,  imi 
is  the  only  town  on  this  part  of  the  coast :  in  the  south  end  ot  it  there  are  two  long  whifg 
houses,  like  barracks  ;  the  rest  appears  to  be  scattered  houses  off  to  the  N.  N.  W.  From 
this  town  to  the  anchorage  off  the  bar,  it  is  north  C  or  8  miles.  The  entrance  to  tho  rivtr 
cannot  be  made  out  more  than  4  or  5  inilos  off,  as  there  is  nothing  more  than  throe  or  four 
small  huts  on  tlie  south  side  of  tho  entrance.  I'o  the  north  of  the  river,  in  int.  '2V  33' 
and  3  or  4  miles  in  shore,  there  is  n  smnil  flat  hill ;  this  appears,  when  you  ui'(>  G  or  7 
miles  off,  in  the  shape  of  a  flat  boat,  bottom  upwards;  between  this  and  the  etitrnnio 
of  the  river,  the  white  sand  covers  the  tops  of  the  small  hillocks  along  the  shore,  iiavinu 
the  appearance  of  small  sand-hills,  rather  than  of  sandy  beach.  These  are  the  only  oh. 
jects  that  can  be  pointed  out  to  be  of  any  assistance  to  a  stranger  in  making  the  land. 

Having  mado  the  river  out,  and  intending  to  anchor,  bring  the  entrance  of  it  to  beiir  S 
W.  or  S.  W.  b\'  W.,  and  run  in  on  that  bearing  until  you  are  in  8  or  7  fathoms,  and  theii 
anchor ;  your  distance  from  tho  shore  will  be  alx)ut  three  miles.  The  bottom  is  very  go„(j 
and  clear,  being  fine  soft  mud,  and  holds  well  to  tho  noithward  of  the  river,  with  pluntv 
of  room  to  get  under  way,  should  it  come  on  to  blow;  but  this  anchorage  is  not  in  tho 
least  sheltered  from  either  wind  or  sea;  and  during  the  winter  months,  that  is,  from  No- 
vember to  the  middle  of  April,  when  tho  northerly  gales  prevail,  no  vessel  is  sufe  horo  that 
cannot  go  into  the  river ;  for  these  gales  blow  with  such  violence  that  it  is  inipossiblo  fur 
any  ship  to  remain  at  her  anchors;  and  in  the  event  of  the  wind's  coming  to  tin;  etistwnrd 
of  north,  you  cannot  caiTy  sail  to  clear  the  land.  Therefore  particular  attention  ought  to 
be  paid  to  tho  appearance  of  the  weather ;  and  as  soon  as  there  is  the  least  sign  of  its 
blowing,  get  under  way  and  make  sail  to  the  N.  £.  until  you  are  off  soundings ;  then  brini; 
to  for  a  change  of  weather.  These  gales,  in  general,  blow  from  N.  W.  by  N.  to  N.  by 
.  W.,  and  I  Iv.ve  never  seen  them  to  the  eastward  of  noith. 

The  entrance  of  the  river  is,  I  think,  the  most  dangerous  I  have  ever  seen.  Tne  gene- 
ral depth  of  water  on  the  bar  is  from  8  to  14  feet;  and  the  strong  run  of  the  river  com- 
ing out  and  meeting  the  surf,  makes  one  continual  sheet  of  broken  water,  the  bur  beiiiT 
composed  of  quicksand,  which  shifts  with  every  gale  of  wind  ;  and  even  in  a  fine  dny  niid 
smooth  water  at  the  anchorage,  the  bar  has  a  very  alarming  appearance  to  a  strnnger. 
It  is  attended  with  much  greater  danger  on  coming  out  in  a  boat  than  in  going  in,  nnd 
coming  out  with  the  wind  blowing  in,  ought  to  bo  well  considered  before  you  attempt  it; 
for  should  you  be  prevented  from  pulling  out  by  the  heavy  sea  and  wind,  you  will  fmj 
great  difficulty  in  getting  back  against  the  stream  of  the  river ;  and  winding  your  bent  is 
attended  with  greater  danger  than  all  the  rest.  Within  the  river  there  are  from  3  to  5 
fathoms  of  water,  and  it  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  broad.  It  is  navigiiblo  about  30 
leagues  from  its  entrance.  About  5i  miles  up,  is  the  old  village  of  Tampico  :  it  stnnddon 
the  south  side  of  the  river,  or  rather  on  the  south  side  of  a  lake.  Boats  can  only  go  wiili- 
in  half  a  mile  of  it. 


BERMUDAS,  OR  SOGER'S  IS^LAIVDS. 


General  Instructions  for  making  the  Bermuda  Islands. 

Latitude.  Longitude. 

Saint  George's  Town,  at  the  eastern  end 32°  24'  N.  64°  38'  W. 

"Wreck  Hill,  at  the  western  end .32    ]7i  64    52 

S.W.  Breakers 32    11  64    49 

Variation  7.01  W, 

Ltgr,:noiue.  A  lighthouse  has  been  erected  on  the  southern  part  of  Bermuda,  in  latitude  32"  14' N., 

and  longitude  64°  50'  west  of  Greenwich,  on  which  a  revolving  light  was  exhibited 
the  Ist  of  this  month,  and  will  be  exhibited  every  night  from  sunset  to  sunrise, 
May.  1846. 

It  is  elevated  365  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  in  clear  weather  may  bo  seen  from 
the  deck  of  a  frigate  7  or  8  leagues.  It  is  higher  than  the  adjoining  land,  nnd  in  day  time 
will  appear  like  a  sail.  It  is  visible  all  round  the  island,  with  the  exception  of  an  area  of 
10  degrees  between  S.  64°  W.  and  S.  74°  W.  by  compass,  and  within  this  area  it  will 
be  intercepted  by  high  land. 


BLUNT'S  AMERCIAN  COAST  PILOT. 


297 


Bermuda  is  Hlwnys  approached  with  more  gnfety  from  the  southward,  and  in  running; 
for  it  at  night  or  in  thick  weather,  cure  should  be  taken  not  to  get  to  the  northward  of  3;^° 
9'  iiititude,  bofore  seoini;  the  light  or  the  land. 

Ill  coining  from  the  S.  E.  the  light  should  not  be  brought  to  the  southward  of  W.  by  S., 
or  Bp|ii'oucli  nearer  than  6  or  7  miles  during  tho  night.  Coming  from  the  westward  it 
fihould  not  be  approached  nearer  than  10  or  12  miles  until  it  bears  to  the  northward  of 
N.  K.  by  E. 

With  the  light  between  N.  E.  and  W.,  tho  coast  is  free  from  danger,  and  may  bo  safe- 
ly npproaohed  within  3  miles. 

Any  vessel  getting  sight  of  the  light  from  the  northward  had  bettor  haul  off  immediately, 
as  tlie  roofs  extend  all  round  from  the  S.  VV.  to  tho  N.  and  N.  E.,  from  15  to  16  miles. 

Tills  light  will  show  a  bright  flash,  continuing  for  6  or  8  seconds,  and  repeated  once 
every  minute.     Between  the  flashes  the  light  will  bo  seen  about  10  miles  distant. 

HAMILTON  is  at  the  west  end  of  tho  island,  and  Is  the  seat  of  government 

Tile  North-west  Cut  into  Hamilton  is  cidled  the  "  Chub  Cut."  and  a  ship  runs  into  tho 
harbor  in  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  and  admits  a  draught  of  18  feet  water.  The  South- 
west Cut  into  Hamilton  is  called  the  "  Hog-fish  Cut,"  and  a  ship  runs  into  the  harbor  in 
three-fourths  of  an  hour,  and  admits  a  draught  of  '20  feet  water. 

Tliore  are  branch  pilots  in  attendance  at  tho  above  stations. 

A  steamer  is  furnished  from  the  dock-yard  for  vessels  when  wanted ;  the  dock-yard  is 
7  or  8  miles  from  the  cuts. 

The  winds  in  winter  are  mostly  westerly  and  north-westerly. 

High  water,  full  and  change,  at  St.  George's,  one-quarter  past  8.  Common  tides  rise 
about  4  feet :  but  on  tho  springs,  or  in  gules  of  wind,  frequently  to  ti  and  7  feet.  Tho 
Hoods  in  the  ofling  set  to  the  N.  E.  and  tho  ebb  to  tho  S.  VV.,  but  near  tho  shore  they 
run  iu  various  directions.  These  islands  being  surrounded  with  innumerable  shoals, 
much  precaution  is  necessary  in  approaching  them.  The  principal  dangers  lie  to  the 
westward  and  northward,  and  extend  from  the  land  between  3  and  5  leagues,  in  a  duo 
west  line,  from  their  south-western  point  (round  northerly)  to  a  N.  N.  E.  one,  from  Da- 
vid's Head,  their  eastern  extreme.  Tho  remainder  of  the  coast  forming  their  southern 
nnd  enstern  bimndary.  may  be  approached  in  every  part  within  a  mile,  and  in  several 
phtces  to  less  than  half  that  distance. 

On  account  of  the  previdence  of  westerly  winds  in  tVie  Atlantic,  it  has  become  the  ge- 
neral practice  for  all  vessels  bound  to  the  Hermudas,  to  make  the  land  from  the  westward, 
by  getting  into  their  latitude  about  tho  G8th  degree  of  longitude,  and  then  steering  an  oast 
course  till  they  become  visible. 

When  running  down  a  parallel  for  Bermudas,  with  a  largo  wind,  and  not  making  the 
land  towards  night,  but  expecting  to  he  near  it,  no  vessel  in  this  situation  ought  to  lie  to, 
but  should  rather  turn  to  windward  under  an  easy  sail  until  daylight,  because  of  a  pro- 
bable current,  which  is  variable,  and  it  is  known  that  vessels  have  been  carried  by  it  out  of 
their  reckoning  to  the  distance  of  many  leagues,  and  brought  them  unexpectedly  among 
the  rocks.  The  land  not  being  high,  (for  Gibs'  Hill,  the  highest  land  in  tlie  islands,  is  but 
little  more  than  180  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea)  it  cannot  be  seen  at  any  great  distance 
from  a  sinall  vessel.  Add  to  this  the  thick  hn/.o  that  frequently  prevails  here,  particularly 
in  fiuH  weather,  renders  making  the  land  somewhat  difficult,  and  at  times  precarious,  un- 
less the  latitude  be  accurately  ascertained,  for  instances  have  happened  of  vessels  missing 
the  islands  :  and,  after  a  fruitless  search,  steered  for  the  American  coast,  in  order  to  take 
afresh  departure  for  running  down  the  latitude  again. 

The  rocks  and  shoals  of  Bermudas  lie  N.  E.  by  E.  and  S.  W.  by  W..  about  9  leagues, 
and  in  breadth  about  5.  Wreck  Hill  forms  the  west  point,  nnd  St.  David's  Head  the 
east.  Round  the  west,  north-west,  and  north  sides,  it  is  a  continued  and  very  dangerous 
ledge  of  rocks,  beginning  at  the  Long  Bar,  the  south  part  of  which  lies  six  miles  W.  S. 
W.  from  Gibs'  Hill ;  trending  thence  N.  K.,  it  is  called  the  Club  Heads,  which,  oft'  Wreck 
Hill,  lies  9  miles  from  the  shore.  The  ledge  hence  rounds  to  E.  N.  E.,  and  joins  the 
North  Rock,  which  is  always  above  water,  and  lies  N.  N.  W.,  12  miles  from  Catharine 
Point.  From  tho  North  Hock  the  reef  roun'Js  to  E.  and  E.  S.  E.,  and  ends  hi  Mills' 
BreRkor,  which  dries  at  low  water,  and  lies  at  N.  E.,  6  miles  from  Catharine  Point,  and 
N.  N.  E.  from  St.  David's  Head.  The  outer  edge  of  the  ledge  is  close  and  compact, 
leaving  no  passage  through  it  for  ships,  excepting  a  small  one  near  Wreck  Hill,  another 
by  the  North  Rock,  and  one  round  Cathamo  Point.  Round  the  outer  edge  of  the 
ledgo  is  a  margin  of  so'^ndings,  of  from  one  to  two  miles  broad,  having  from  9  to  14  fath- 
oms on  it.  There  are,  likewise,  soundings  for  two  miles  from  the  shore  round  the  N. 
E.,  E.  and  S.  E.  sides  of  the  island  ;  but  as  t  lo  water  here  is  deeper,  it  would  be  pru- 
dent for  those  who  suspect  themselves  near  the  longitude  of  Bermudas  in  the  night,  or 
in  thick  weather,  while  between  the  latitudes  of  32"  and  32*^  40'  to  keep  a  lead  constantly 
going:  being  assured  that  at  14  fathoms  they  will  strike  the  ground  in  time  to  avoid  dan- 
ger.   The  lead  might  be  encased  with  tallow,  for  the  greater  certainty  of  striking  ground. 


Hamilton. 


Tides. 


998 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


This  prcnution,  I  nm  peraundod,  would  prevent  mnny  oftho  wrecks  that  constantly  hap- 
pen hero. 

Th«M-e  iH  H  rocky  hiiiik  lyhiR  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  W.  from  Gibs'  Hill,  (S.  W.  p„,.t  (,f 
BennudiiH)  from  '.)  to  5  loii);u(!8  distnnt.     Viirious  djipthn.  from  17  to  45  fiithoiiis,  mooti  it. 

'I'he  Inlitudo  of  ■'J'J*'  8'  N.,  Iwiiiji;  two  mdes  to  the  Houtiiwiird  of  every  diinniT,  HPomJ 
best  U(bipted  in  fine  wenMier  for  this  purpose,  iind  will  bring  you  in  Hij;ht  iif  Wreck 
Hill,  whii'li,  being  of  nronie  form,  nnd  hiivingn  voicnnic  itppeiirunce,  Ih  thi*  more  reiinuk- 
iibln.  The  moment  this  hill  becomes  shut  in  witit  the  ntlior  lands,  or  is  no  longitr  ilmtiri- 
gni8hal)le,  yuu  will  pnss  the  only  dimger  to  be  npprehended  otT  ihe  southern  pnit  of 
these  iHliinds  called  the  S.  W.  HrenlterH,  (which  do  not,  however,  lie  more  iliim  IJ  niiln 
from  the  land,^  and  may  then  immediately  close  in  with  and  steer  along  the  «oulh-i«i|gt- 
ern  shore,  within  a  mile,  till  you  have  got  the  length  of  Castle  Harbor,  or  brought  Da- 
vid's Head  to  bear  about  N.  by  E.,  where  you  must  wait  to  receivji  your  pilot,  tiikinc 
cnre,  during  that  time,  not  to  be  drifted  to  leeward,  us  the  currents  generally  set  to  thu 
enstward. 

Should  you  meet  with  n  contrary  wind,  or  the  weather  bo  extremely  ha/,y,  bifme  you 
have  got  sight  of  land,  it  will  be  prudent  in  the  night  not  to  stand  to  the  northward  of  iij" 
4'  or  5' ;  and  if  the  whid  should  be  inclining  to  the  southward,  I  would  recomnioiul  luit 
beyond  .'JvJ'"". 

If  bound  to  Bermudas  from  England,  or  from  any  part  of  Europe,  I  should  ri-coai- 
mend  a  direct  course  to  be  steered  as  long  as  the  winds  permit;  but  the  moment  tlicy 
become  contrary,  tti  get  to  the  southward  into  the  trades,  and  then  run  down  tin-  re- 
maining longitude,  taking  care  to  haul  to  the  northward  in  sufficient  time  to  reiicli  tlii> 
latitude  of  32°  H',  ubont  the  fiS"  of  longitude,  and  then  proceed  as  above  describod ;  but 
should  fair  winds  continue  the  whole  imssage,  the  land  may  be  made  with  erpiid  siifety 
from  the  eastward,  by  steering  for  them  in  the  latitude  of  ■'j'i"  18'  N.,  wliicli  is  two 
miles  to  the  southward  of  David's  Ileiid,  their  south-eastern  extreme,  and  oirwliicji 
head  there  is  no  danger  beyond  linlf  a  mile,  care  being  taking  not  to  come  to  the  noitli- 
ward  of  that  latitude  until  you  inive  brought  the  head  to  bear  W.  S.  W.,  on  which 
bearing  it  maj'  be  approached  with  safety  till  within  one  mile  thereof,  or  till  joxi  -eceivi' 
your  pilot. 

In  the  course  of  making  the  land  from  the  eastward,  should  the  wind  become  con- 
traiy,  or  the  weather  prove  dark,  hazy,  nnd  tempestuous,  come  not  during  the  night  to 
the  northward  of  ;}2^or  U'i"  6',  in  which  latitude,  if  you  should  bo  found  to  have  run 
past  the  islands,  you  nust  proceed  us  before  described,  in  making  them  from  the 
westward. 

Sliips  bound  from  the  southern  ports  of  America,  within  the  Gulf  Stream,  should  steer 
well  to  the  southward,  perhaps  as  much  as  S.  S.  E.,  until  they  get  within  ,'5  or  4  miles  of 
the  latitude  of  Cape  Halteras,  and  then  steer  S.  E.  by  E.  until  they  get  into  the  In  iiude 
of  Sa-"  5'.  Thus  you  will  avoid  crossing  the  Gulf  Stream  where  it  is  very  brond,  and  ju 
direction  far  to  the  eastward,  nnd  pass  it  where  it  nlfects  your  latitude  more  than  your 
longitude;  and,  of  course,  be  of  less  consequence  to  the  ship's  reckoning;  and,  liy  steer- 
ing thence  set  far  to  the  southward  as  S.  E.  by  E.  you  will  fall  into  the  latitude  of  Uermu- 
das.  at  4  or  T)  leagues  of  longitude  to  the  westward. 

You  shoidd  by  no  means  i-un  for  these  islands  unliss  sure  of  your  latitude  ;  nnd  nlwnys 
make  tlu'Mi  from  the  S.  W.  if  possible,  looking  out  in  time  for  the  land,  as,  owing  to  the 
set  of  thct  (Julf  Stream,  nnd  the  general  tendency  of  the  currents  to  the  eastward,  ships  Irani 
the  const  of  America  will  almost  always  be  far  ahead  of  their  reckoning 

Having  ascertained  your  latitude,  and,being  well  to  the  westward,  get  into  the  pnniih'l  of 
32°  i}' ;  thcMi  steer  due  east.  Tliis  course  will  bring  you  to  the  island,  pasf<iiig  about  4 
miles  clear  of  the  south  end  of  Club  Head,  a  very  dangerous  shoal,  lying  across  tlio  west 
end,  nb  ut  S  ujiles  from  the  land,  with  not  more  than  12  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  as  well  as 
the  S.  W.  Breakers,  which  lie  about  one  mile  and  a  halfS.  S.  W.  from  the  soutlicniinust 
land,  being  the  shoalest  |)art  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  of  considerable  length,  lying  panillcl  with 
the  shore.  .Should  the  wind  in  the  night  incline  to  the  northward,  keep  in  3'.'"'  7'  N.,  if  to 
the  southward,  in  Si'"  2'. 

You  must  avoid,  by  all  means,  nmning  in  the  night,  without  having  a  good  (ibscivation 
the  preceding  day,  nnd  being  pretty  sure  of  your  longitude.  Follow  these  directions, 
and  you  will  first  make  Wreck  Hill,  (which  is  high  land  on  the  wf^stern  extreme  of  the 
islands)  and  the  land  trenching  from  it  to  the  S.  E.  Having  passed  the  .S.  W.  Iheiikeis. 
the  land  lies  about  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.,  having  danger  no  more  than  half  a  mile  off, 
and  that  generally  visible  ;  you  may  run  safely  nlotig  shore  at  a  mile,  until  you  pass  Ciistio 
Harbor,  which  is  easily  known  by  the  castle  on  an  island  on  the  starbonrd  hand.  You 
should  bring  to  oflf  the  eastern  part  of  this  harbor,  and  wait  for  a  pilot,  who  will  soon 
come  off,  and  carry  you  into  St.  George's  Harbor.  But,  should  vou  be  jjressed  for 
time,  or  the  pilot  not  come  off,  you  may  haul  round  by  the  breaker<  alter  havitig  pnssed 
the  islands,  which  form  the  south  part  of  Castle  Harbor,  into  St.  George's  Road,  briuijing 
CD  the  following  marks  : 


BLUNTS   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


299 


stantly  hnp- 

W.  pnrtof 
lis,  II I'll  on  it, 
"K'T.  Hcmns 
t  «!»'  Wreck 
oi'o  niiimik- 
""K«'r  ilitttiii- 
u'lii  piut  of 
lIiiiii  U  niilo 

I  80lllll-(.,i8t. 

l)roiij;lit  Dii- 
|)ili)t,  tiikiii)! 
y  Ht't  to  tho 

',  before  you 
iwaid  of  ii'j" 
uminutiil  not 

lould  rccoin- 
tumioiittlii'y 
own  the  rc- 

tO    lOlU'll  till' 

■8<'iil)ii(l ;  but 
I  oquiil  siit'ety 
rtliicli  is  two 
lul  oir  which 
to  tho  iionh- 
•1  on  which 
I  yo^u  -eceive 

l)oconip  con- 
the  night  to 
to  hiive  run 

Dm  from  the 

should  steer 

4  miles  of 

tho  111  itude 

'oiid,  luid  its 

•()  than  your 

11(1,  liy  steer- 

of  Berinu- 

nnd  always 
owing  to  the 
d,  ships  from 

le  pnriillel  of 
In^  about  4 
)ss  tho  west 
!r,  IIS  well  as 
loiithoriiinost 
piiriilli'l  with 
-"  r  N.,  if  to 

obscrvntion 
o  diiTclioiis, 
romc  of  the 
Hroukers. 
If  n  mile  olT, 

pass  Cnstle 

and.  You 
ho  will  soon 

pressed  for 
(iviiij;  passed 
lad,  briujjing 


K  high  island,  noxt  to  the  N.  E.  pnrt  of  tho  siintll  onos  off  Ciiatlo  Hnrbor,  has,  at 
its  pastern  uxtrnmo,  a  blulf  rocky  point,  cullod  St  David's  Head,  having  breakorn 
off  it  about  lialf  n  niiln.  Tlio  northornrtiont  land  in  siglit,  after  you  haul  round  St. 
David'H  Head,  ii^  lulled  St.  Catharine's  Point;  bring  thit  point  to  bear  VV.  N.  \V.,  nnd 
St.  David's  Head  S.  i  \V.,  nnd  you  will  bo  in  as  ^ood  ii  berth  ns  any  in  tho  road, 
with  7  or  8  fathoiiiH  water;  but,  in  every  part  of  these  roailB,  you  inuHt  bo  guided 
by  the  eye  wliere  to  drop  yournncluir,  clear  of  foul  ground,  whicii  is  every  where  «!nsily 
seen,  owing  to  tlie  cieiirness  of  tlio  water,  nnd  tho  whiteness  of  the  sund.  where  the  an- 
chorage is  safe. 

In  case  you  havo  becm  driven  to  tho  cMistward  of  llio  inlands,  (a  Hituation,  however, 
which  you  are  to  avoid  with  the  utinottt  care,)  you  niny  run  for  Ihein  in  liititudo 
■M"  14'  N.,  which  will  bring  yon  to  them  5  or  ()  miles  to  tho  southward  of  St. 
David's  Head,  for  which  you  may  haul  up  upon  making  tho  land  ;  but  you  are  not  to 
run  in  till  you  are  far  enough  to  the  S.  W.  to  follow  the  directions  before  given  tiir  com- 
ing from  the  westward,  should  you  malie  sail  for  Uermudas  from  any  part  of  the  (J ulf 
Stream,  or  without  it. 

GrcHt  allowance  is  vocomiuondod  for  being  to  tho  eastward  of  your  reckoning,  and  try 
to  full  into  the  parallel  of  latitude  above  mentioned,  in  longitude  70"  or  71°  VV. 

Kt  the  soundings  do  not  extend  more  than  a  mih^  and  a  half  from  the  land,  on  the  soutli- 
orn  side  of  the  iHlands,  a  correct  latitude  nnd  good  lookout,  togetlier  with  a  strict  attention 
tn  these  instructions,  is  absolutely  necessary. 

Other  directions  in  cominfr  from  the  westward. — On  coming  from  tho  westward,  the  .S. 
W.  points  of  the  land  ought  to  bear  K.  N.  K.  before  you  como  within  4  leagues  of  the  land, 
when  you  may  steer  directly  for  it  without  danger.  The  breakers  on  tho  south  ^'ide  nl- 
WiVH  show  themselves,  so  that  a  ship  niay  safely  approach  within  gun-shot  fioiii  the  S.  W. 
eiiil  lO  the  S.  E.,  and,  wlien  getting  to  the  eantward  of  the  (;aslU>,  round  info  St.  (jeorgo's. 
Do  not  go  further  to  tho  northward  than  to  keep  Cooper's  Island  open  within  St.  David's 
Houd  till  you  get  a  pilot. 


Other  direc- 
tions. 


WEST   iniDIES^. 

VR'  ^\I  the  Holo-in-tho-wallto  the  west  end  of  Hog  Island,  or  tho  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor o.  Nt-w  Providence,  the  bearing  is  S.,  and  tho  distance  15  leagues.  But  allowance 
in  sailing  must  be  miidofor  the  current,  which  genorally  sets,  with  considerable  strength, 
between  Abaco  nnd  tlie  Berry  Islands.  At  (Jroat  Egg  Island,  and  in  its  vicinities,  tho  cur- 
rents are  very  uncertain,  and  there  much  caution  is  necessary. 

Vessels  from  the  eastward,  in  generiil,  had  best  make  tho  coast  of  Elouthera,  in  a  track 
between  the  parallels  of  25*^  20' and  SS"*  30',  not  exceeding  tho  latter,  or  the  pariillel  of 
Harbor  Island. 

On  leaving  the  Bird  Rock,  whoii  bound  for  New  Providenco,  it  is  best  to  make  Wat- 
ling's  Island,  proceeding  along  the  west  :  ido  of  that  island,  or  between  it  and  Rum  Key, 
forn  good  dei)nrture.  You  must  be  careful  not  to  nppninch  tho  little  Island  caii:)d  Con- 
ception Ishmd,  because  a  long  and  dangerous  reef  extends  in  a  N.  N.  E.  diiedion  from 
that  island  above  7  miles. 

Harbor  Island  lies  in  latitude  3")'^  ol',  but  a  reef  extends  about  .*?  miles  from  its  north 
shore,  to  which  a  berth  must  be  given,  there  being  several  rocks  near  to  the  outer  edge, 
nearly  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water.  The  wiitiM-  is,  however,  perfectly  dear,  nnd 
they  may  be  seen  from  the  foreyard  or  bowsprit  end,  in  time  to  be  easily  avoided.  The 
bank  extends  W.  and  W.  by  N.  to  Egg  Island,  a  distance  of  7i  leagues,  and  a  reef  ox- 
tends  from  that  island  nearly  4  miles  in  a  N.  N.  \V.  direction.  Having  advanced  to  the 
northward  of  the  Cow  and  Bull,  otf  Harbor  Island,  the  course  to  Egg  Island,  the  western- 
most isle  of  tho  range,  is  VV.  by  N.,  nnd  the  distance,  to  clear  the  reef,  8  leagues. 
On  running  niong  shore,  you  will  jiass  some  rocks,  called  tlie  Perno  Rocks  ;  but  the  isl- 
ands are  toochisdy  connected  to  be  jjarticularly  distinguished. 

Egg  Island  is  a  small  island,  covered  with  brush-wood,  with  a  rise  of  land  in  the  middle 
of  it.  Being  off  this  island,  keep  well  out  to  avoid  tho  reef,  the  pitch  of  which  lies  with  the 
centre  ofthe  island  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  On  rounding  the  reef,  you  will  open  a  small  rocky  i-l- 
aml,  situated  to  the  south  of  Egg  Ishind,  called  Little  Egg  Island.  Tho  course,  by  com- 
pass, hence  to  tho  lighthouse,  or  Nassau  Bar,  will  be  S.  \V.  by  S  ,  10  leagues,  and  to  the 
DouglnsPnssage,  eastward  of  the  harbor.  .S.  by  W.,  8  leagues. 

The  keys  between  Egg  Island  and  Providence,  upon  tlio  edge  of  the  bank,  form  a  bay, 
as  represented  on  the  chart,  ani  the  reef  is  steep  to.    Of  course,  vessels  passing  in  the 


mmmmm 


mifj.W'MK 


300 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Nas$au  Bar. 


Bearings. 


Tides. 


Euuthera. 


winter,  or  during  the  prevalence  of  northerly  winds,  must  cnjtiously  avoid  being  em- 
bayed thero,  as  the  only  shelter  is  an  inlet  between  the  eastern  end  of  Rose  Island  and 
the  Boohy  Rocks,  where  there  is  a  depth  throughout  of  27  feet.  But  in  sumnior,  as 
northerly  winds  then  seldom  prevail,  and  the  trade  wind,  generally,  the  shore  nmy  be 
kept  well  ou  board:  and  especially,  because  the  current  may  sweep  you  past  the  haibor 
of  Nassau,  which  could  not  be  regained  without  difficulty. 

The  town  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  island,  sheltered  on  the  north  by  Hog  Island,  nnd 
stands  at  ihe  westward  of  the  harbor.  It  may  be  distinguished  at  a  distance  by  meiiiis 
of  the  Government  House,  which  is  a  large  white  house  on  the  top  of  a  hill,  seen  over 
Hog  Island.  Bring  this  to  bear  S.  S.  W.,  or  S.  S.  W.  i  \V.  By  keeping  it  so  until 
within  2  or  3  miles  of  Hog  Island,  or  perhaps  sooner,  a  pilot  may  be  obtained. 

The  entrance  into  the  harbor  is  at  the  western  end  of  Hog  Island,  which  is  distiiiguisli- 
ed  by  the  lighthouse.  It  has  18  feet  of  water,  with  sandy  ground.  The  latter  is  not 
good  for  holding.  In  the  middle  of  the  harbor  there  is  a  bank  of  3  or  4  feet  water ;  but 
there  is  a  channel  on  each  side  of  considerable  extent. 

NASSAU  BAR. — Vessels  approaching  Nassau,  in  tempestuous  weather,  when  the 
pilot  cannot  cross  the  bar,  by  observing  the  following  directions,  may  come  safe  over 
when  the  pilot  will  be  r'^ady  to  receive  and  conduct  them  to  their  anchorage  : 

On  a  white  flag  being  hoistpd  on  the  point  of  Hog  Island  near  the  lighthouse,  a  sninll 
white  flag  flying,  will  be  in  readiness  within  the  bar,  the  vetfsel  will  then  steer  in,  j;ivini; 
the  point  of  Hog  ^"'-.ik;  about  80  fathoms  distance,  nnd  keeping  Toney's  Rock  (a  small 
rock  within  the  bar,  on  which  a  beacon  is  erected)  and  the  west  end  of  Fort  Clitirlotte 
barracks  in  one  ;  keep  this  course  until  you  bring  the  whit«  flag  on  the  point  to  bear  east; 
then  put  your  helm  to  the  starboard,  anu  keep  for  the  boat.  It  sometimes  happens  that 
the  sea  breaks  from  point  to  point,  even  in  im/derato  weather.  When  this  is  the  case, 
nnd  the  wind  should  be  to  the  south  or  east,  it  would  not  bo  prudent  for  vessels  of  a  large 
draught  of  water  to  enter,  as  there  are  not  more  than  17  feet  water  at  low  tide  on  the  bar. 
By  order  of  the  Commissioners  of  Pilotage. 

The  Douglas  Passage  nnd  New  Anchorage  are  situated  on  the  east  and  south  sides  of 
Rose  Island,  to  the  e-.stwnrd  of  Nassau  Harbor.  The  entrance  is  denoted  by  beacons 
fixed  on  two  rocks,  celled  Douglas'  Rocks,  which  form  the  entiiince,  and  a  black  buiiy, 
which  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  reef  stretching  from  those  rocks,  and  situate  at  N.  by  E. 
i  E.,  179  lathoms  from  the  high  or  upper  beacon.  These  beacons  can  be  seen  froni  the 
deck  of  a  frigate,  when  steering  in  ii  line  between  Egg  Island  and  Nassau. 

1  he  black  bjoy  above  mentioned  is  plavcd  in  9  feet  water  ;  but  at  a  boat's  length  from 
it,  there  is  a  depth  of  four  fathoms.  Opposite  to  it  is  the  end  of  a  reef  which  extends 
from  Booby  Island,  leaving  a  passage  of  ICO  fathoms  in  breadth,  which  has  a  depth  of  four 
fathoms  at  very  low  tides. 

To  steer  for  this  anchorage,  bring  the  beacons  in  a  lino,  bearing  nearly  S.  E.  by  E., 
and  steer  directly  for  them,  until  you  bring  Booby  Island  end  on  ;  then  haul  up  for  tb« 
buoy,  passing  it  on  the  starboard  side  and  to  the  eastward,  at  the  dista>)ce  of  about  30 
fathoms.  When  past  the  buoy  every  danger  may  bo  seen,  and  you  may  haul  round  to 
the  westward,  and  anchor  in  44  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  with  the  beacons  in  one, 
bearing  N.  W.  by  W.,  distant  about  2  miles,  where  you  will  be  well  sheltered  from  N. 
W.  winds. 

A  fiigate  drawing  18  or  20  feet  of  water,  may  proceed  to  the  S.  E,  side  o'' '  ose  Island, 
and  aii.horin  a  quarter  less  five,  at  about  six  miles  from  the  town  of  Nassau,  >  ell  shelter- 
ed from  N.  W.  winds,  and  from  the  S.  E.  by  the  bank. 

The  direct  bearing  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall  to  Providence  Bar,  or  lighthouse,  is  S.  3 
W.,  15  leagues.  Tl'.e  bearing  and  distance  from  the  Hole-in-the-wall  to  the  pitch  ul 
E{;g  Island  Reef,  are  S.  E.  J  S.,  20  miles. 

Those  Iwund  to  New  Providence,  who  are  unacquainted  with  the  Douglas  Passage  and 
the  New  Anchorage,  should  not  attempt  to  pass  the  Hole-in-the-wall  with  a  N.  W.  wind, 
when  blowing  strong,  there  being  no  safe  anchorage  hereabout. 

In  the  event  of  making  the  Hole-in-the-rock  or  Ecj;  Ishind  in  the  afternoon,  with  a  strong 
wind  from  the  N.  E.,  you  should  haul  close  round  Egg  Island  Reef,  nnd  s^eer  S.  by  W. 
8  leagues,  for  the  Douglas  beacons  ;  nnd  having  made  the  beacons,  bring  thoin  in  one, 
bearing  nearly  S.  E.  by  E.,  and  steer  for  them.  Keep  your  lead  going,  and  you  will  inive 
gradual  soundings.  When  in  0  fathoms  you  may  anchor  with  the  marks  in  one,  fine 
sandy  bottom,  well  sheltered  from  northerly  winds  by  the  rocks,  &c. 

At  Nassau,  New  Providence,  nnd  in  the  entrance  of  tiie  New  Anchorag(!,  and  in  its 
channels,  the  tide  runs  at  the  rate  of  4i  miles,  and  rises  4  feet  at  the  springs,  and  the 
currents  have  much  force. 

ELEUTHERA  is  one  of  the  largest  islands,  nnd  is  of  very  irregular  shape.  Its  north- 
west enil  bears  N.  E.  }  N.,  distant  about  14  leagues  from  the  east  end  of  Now  Provi- 
dence; it  thence  extends  south-eastward  about  14  leagues  to  Palmetto  Point;  and,  lastly, 
about  S.  i  E.,  12  leagues,  to  its  south  end,  denominated  Powell's  Point,  being  of  irregu- 
lar breadth,  from  2  to  4  mil(;8.     The  E.  and  N.  E.  shores  are  washed  by  the  Atlantic 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  C  JAST  PILOT. 


301 


'n?siij;e  anil 
W.  wind, 

ith  a  strong 
S.  I)y  W. 
cm  ill  one, 
u  will  liHve 
II  one,  fine 

,  iiml  in  its 
;!*,  mid  the 

Its  north- 
row  Provi- 
iind,  lastly, 

of  irregu- 
lie  Atlantic 


Ocean,  while  on  the  west  is  the  shallow  and  smooth  water  of  the  bank.     On  the  west  side 
giB  the  settlements  of  the  Rock  Sound. 

GUANAHANI,  OR  CATT  ISLAND.— The  N.  W.  end  of  this  island  lies  about  8i    Guanahani, 
leagues  E.  i  S.  from  Powell's  Point,  in  Eleuthera;  it  thence  extends  south-eastward  15  or  Call  Isl- 
leugues,  having  a  breadth  of  3  to  7  miles.     Its  eastern  side  is  lined  by  a  reef,  on  which    and, 
the  sea  continually  breaks,  and  renders  it  inaccessible  :  on  the  S.  \V.  side  is  good  anchor- 
age.    This  island  was  the  first  land  seen  by  Columbus,  who  landed  here  on  the  12th  of 
October,  1492.     By  hiin  it  was  called  St.  Salvador,  but  it  is  now  commonly  culled  Catt  Isl- 
nnd.     Between  its  N.  W.  end  and  Powell's  Point,  at  the  distar^ce  of  4i  leagues,  S.  E. 
from  the  latter,  is  the  N.  W.  end  of  Littlo  Catt  Island,  joining  to  Catt  Island  by  a  bank 
which  surrounds  both  of  them. 

Between  the  south  end  of  Eleuthera  and  Little  Catt  Island,  is  a  channel  of  3  leagues 
wide,  called  Ship  Channel. 

LONG  ISLAND,  so  called  from  being  peculiarly  narrow  in  proportion  to  its  length,  is  Long  Island. 
17  leagues  in  length  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.     The  north-west  end  lies  8i  leagues  south 
from  Catt  Island,  and  its  south-east  end  bears  from  the  Bird  Rock  at  the  west  end  of 
Crooked  Island  W.  by  N.,  8  leagues.     There  is  an  anchorage  on  its  east  side,  called 
Great  Harbor,  whence  it  exports  salt. 

EXUMA,  &:c. — The  islands  called  Great  and  Little  Exuma,  lie  to  the  westward  of  Exum,a,S^'c. 
Long  Island,  and  to  the  southward  cf  Catt  Island.     Their  chief  produce  is  salt,  and  the 
Great  Isle  has  a  port  of  entry. 

North-westward  of  Exuma,  to  the  distance  of  22  leagues,  on  the  eastern  edge  of  the 
Great  Bunk,  are  a  number  of  little  islands,  distinguished  by  the  name  of  Exuma  Keys  ; 
to  these  succeed  several  others  in  a  more  northerlj-  direction,  to  the  distance  of  eight 
leagues;  the  northernmost  of  which,  called  Ship  Channel  Key,  lies  E.  by  S.,  10  leagues 
from  the  east  end  of  New  Prov'dence. 

Between  the  bank  which  su  l  unds  the  Catt  Islands  an('  the  east  edge  of  the  Great  Ba- 
hama Bank,  is  a  channel  6  leagues  wide,  called  Exuma  Sound,  on  the  western  side  of 
which  is  a  key,  called  Leeward  Stocking  Island  ;  and  farther  northward,  between  Ship 
Channel  Key  and  the  bank  that  surrounds  Eleuthera,  is  Rock  Sound,  of  about  4  miles  in 
width,  at  the  north  part  of  which  you  suddenly  find  2  fathoms  water  ;  this  is  denominated 
the  Twelve  Feet  Channel. 

WATLING'S  ISLAND,  which  lies  14  leagues  to  the  east  of  the  S.  E.  point  of  St.  Walling's 
Salvador,  is  about  4i  leagues  in  extent,  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  and  is  of  moderate  height.  Island. 
It  has  a  pretty  little  town  on  the  south  side,  and  on  approacViing  in  that  direction,  you 
will  see  several  houses  on  the  summit  of  a  hill,  and  appearing  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the 
island.  Off  the  S.  E.  point  are  two  renmrkable  rocks,  called  Hinchenbroke  Rocks.  On 
the  east  side  of  the  island  are  a  number  of  sandy  spots.  It  is  one  of  the  most  dangerous 
reefs  of  the  BaliamaS;  extending  about  7  miles,  having  several  rocks  or  heads  which  can- 
not be  perceived  by  the  color  of  the  water  before  you  are  close  upon  them,  and  which 
have  5,  4,  7,  9,  and  10  fathoms  water  between  them,  and  a  current  setting  W.  and  W. 
.S,  W.  into  Exuma  Sound.  Otf  the  north  side  are  the  dangerous  rocks  called  the  White 
Rocks,  and  a  reef  extends  outward  4  or  5  miles  to  the  N.  W. ;  ve3sels  ought,  therefore, 
to  be  very  careful  in  rounding  them.  There  is  a  small  reef  projecting  from  the  S.  \V. 
point,  but  it  always  shows  itself. 

Captain  Dowers,  of  the  Navy,  has  stated  that,  in  the  route  from  New  Providence  to 
Jaimiica,  in  1814,  when  "  passing  along  the  west  side  of  Watling's  Ishnd,  about  one  and  a 
half  mile  from  the  sandy  beach,  with  the  S.  by  W.  point  bearing  S.  W.,  just  at  dusk  we 
discovered  a  ledge  of  breakers,  (about  a  ship's  length  east  and  west,)  close  to  us. 

"  When  about  a  cable's  length  to  tbe  westward  of  them,  we  had  tlie  following  bearings, 
viz, :  a  remarkable  black  rock,  close  to  the  shore,  and  breakers  in  one,  E.  S.  E. ;  tbe  N. 
W.  point  of  the  island  E.,  the  S.  W.  point  S.  by  E. 

"  We  had  5  fathom?  at  about  2  cables'  length  to  the  northward,  and  deepened  our  wa- 
ter gradually  as  we  increased  our  distance  to  the  westward.  No  bottom  with  hand  line, 
about  half  a  mile  outside ;  the  water  of  the  same  color  as  the  ocean ;  at  this  lime  land 
was  distinctly  seen  from  mast-head,  bearing  S.  W.,  and  very  low." 

RUM  KEY. — No  reef  of  any  extent  lies  off  this  island,  except  Pindar's  Reef.  This  Rum  Key. 
lies  off  the  N.  W.  part  of  the  island,  extending  out  north  about  two  miles.  There  is  a 
small  reef  very  close  in,  near  the  S.  E.  harbor  ])oint.  The  shore  in  general  is  bold ;  and 
if  a  trifling  reef,  shoals,  or  sunken  rocks  are  known,  tb'^y  are  chiefly  on  the  north  side  of 
the  island,  not  frequented  by  any  shipping,  and  lying  very  near  the  shore.  The  S.  W. 
point  is  a  sand-sjjit,  with  very  bold  water  on  either  side  of  it ;  vessels  of  any  size  can  an- 
chor within  200  yards,  and  procure  fresh  water  from  wells  dug  near  the  beach. 

With  the  exception  of  Pindar's  Reef,  vessels  of  any  size  can  approach  with  safety  any 
part  of  the  island  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  many  places  (particularly  tbe  west  end) 
within  150  to  200  yards. 

Tbe  west  side  of  Pindar's  Reef  is  very  bold ;  vessels  may  run  a  north  course  so  close 
along  as  to  throw  a  biscuit  on  it.  The  east  part  of  the  island  shows  white  clifls ;  more 
northerly  again,  black  clifis. 

[  Pui....'-,  N.VV.Hi:».torvDapt 

I  PROVINCIA'..   LiDRARY 

'_  VIGTOHIA,  B.  G,  _ 

B^B^M^^— ^B^l^— ^^1^— i^^^—^^^^^^^IJI         -^XU    .   ■  II      IL        .1 ..LUM  I         ^IMH        >i     i  I    I    Til      HIT!  "lllin'llll'l  — ^—^»J^^—i 


mifimo 


PUP" 


ll.^iiiin  iiiH)  I  .fi^^ 


302 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Conception. 


Atwood's 
Key. 


The  Croolctd 
Islands. 


Cattle 
Itland, 


Fortune 
hLand. 


Tho  vessels  that  load  nt  Old  Pond  run  down  the  south  aide  in  going  to  sea,  round  the 
wost  em],  Ueeping  to  tho  eustwnrd  of  Litlle  Island,  in  sight,  distant  13  miles,  and  to  the 
westward  of  Wnlliiig's  Islands,  about  20  miles  from  Rum  Key. 

If  the  vessels  returning  homeward  cannot  pass  to  the  eastward  of  Rum  Key,  and  are 
oblif;ed  to  take  to  tho  south  side,  they  should  keep  cl  )Be  in  with  Rum  Key,  and  well  jn 
witli  the  west  end,  which  would  allow  them  to  pass  well  to  windward  of  Little  Island 
Variation,  5^  E. 

'J'here  are  settlements  all  round  tho  island.  Rum  Key  has  two  salt  ponds;  the  old 
salt  pond,  situated  on  the  south  side  of  tho  island,  nearest  the  end.  The  anchorage  is 
good  about  half  a  mile  from  the  beach,  and  will  admit  vessels  of  any  size,  affording  shel- 
ter from  tho  S.  E.,  E.  N.  E.,  and  round  to  N.  VV.  Pilots  will  go  out  on  vessels  making 
the  usual  signals.  There  is  always  a  considerable  quantity  of  large-grained  salt  forsnlti 
and  every  dispatch  given  while  loading. 

Carmichael  Pond,  a  new  one,  is  uc  the  west  end  of  the  island,  and  the  facilities  for 
procuring  suit  are  good ;  the  anchorage,  an  open  roadstead  at  the  west  end,  and  imnipijj. 
ately  off  the  pond,  is  pi-otectod  by  tho  inland,  with  the  wind  from  N.  by  E.  round  to  S 
E.  by  S.  Not  far  from  the  beach  ia  a  signal  flag-staff;  vessols  may  anchor  off  it,  withiii 
250  yards  of  the  shore.  Sliovld  the  anchorage  prove  rough,  by  tho  wind  gettin"  out 
WMsterl}',  vessels  can  easily  wei,^h  anchor  and  run  round  Sandy  Point.  A  few  minutes 
after  weighing  anchor  a  vessel  wiil  he  out  to  sea.  The  salt  is  carried  along  side  in  boats 
and  put  on  t<hipboard. 

CUNCKPl'lUN  is  a  liltio  island,  surrounded  by  a  reef,  and  lii^s  hi;lf-way  between 
Rum  Knv  and  Catt  Island.  From  its  N.  side  a  reef  extends  5  miles  to  the  N.  N.  K.  and 
N.  N.  W.,  which  was  not  known  until  the  year  1812,  at  which  time  tho  British  fiitrntg 
Southampton  was  wrecked  upon  it.  'J'his  reef  is  accounted  one  of  the  most  dangerous 
in  the  IJiihainns,  li;iving  several  dangerous  rocks  or  heads,  wi:ich  cannot  bo  perceived  bv 
the  color  of  tho  water  before  you  ure  close  to  them. 

ATWUOD'S  KKY  is  3  leagues  from  east  to  west,  nnd  narrow  from  north  to  south. 
Tho  island  is  surrounded  by  a  white  shoal,  bordered  with  a  reef.  Off  the  west  end  the 
reef  extends  out  one  league  ;  and  under  this  point,  in  the  extent  of  another  league, alonj 
shove,  there  is  an  o|)CMiiMg  or  interval  in  tho  reef ;  and  here  vessels  may  anclini' in  tha 
white  ground,  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  but  very  close  to  tho  shore.  Off"  tho  edge  of  the  wiiito 
ground,  no  soundings  are  to  bo  found.  To  tho  east  of  the  island  are  two  small  islets; 
the  outer  one  at  a  leiiguo  and  a  half  from  the  shore  ;  those  are  surrounded  with  reefs  auii 
white  shoals. 

Atwood's  Jvey  is  low,  with  bushes,  and  presents  the  same  ajjpenrance  as  the  other  isles 
in  this  passage.  Its  greatest  breailth,  which  is  in  the  middle,  is  about  3  miles;  for  eiich 
extreme  terminates  in  a  point.  The  reef  on  Iho  north  side  breaks,  and  extends  above  2 
miles  from  the  land.  Tlie  saino  reef,  contiiming  to  the  west,  forms  a  head,  which  is  a 
mile  and  a  half  to  the  southward  of  tho  point.  "  On  the  south  side,  about  2  miles  li'oni 
the  west  point,  you  may  anchor  at  3  cables'  length  from  tho  land,  and,  for  linlf  a  loiinue 
nt  least  along  the  shore,  sheltered  from  westerly  and  N.  1'..  winds.  Having  brouyhf  ihe 
west  end  N.  N.  W.,  about  one  niilo  oil",  we  saw  that  end  was  a  point  only,  and  that  the 
other  side  rounded  away  E.  N.  E.,  full  of  breakers,  which  worn  at  least  two  miles  fioin 
it;  we  al.-^o  saw  some  ahead  of  us,  and  to  leeward  :  wo  were  obliged  to  haul  our  wind, 
and  stand  for  tho  anchorage  iJivre  mentioned,  on  the  south  side  of  the  island.  This  an- 
chorage extends  ai)ont  a  mile  each  way  from  whence  wo  were,  and  about  3  cables'  length 
from  tlic  island.  Yon  may  I. 't  go  your  anchor  in  8  fathoms,  sand  and  broken  shells,  hut 
it  is  not  good  holdini;  giouod." 

THE  CRUOKEIJ  I  LAiNDS.— Of  this  singuhir group  the  best  idea  may  be  funwi] 
by  lel'erritjg  to  the  particular  plan  of  them.  The  potiitions  appear  to  bo  well  ascortiiiiiej; 
and  |)arficulariy  of  l.'iisllo  Isle,  or  Soutli  Key.  I'itt's  Town,  u  sefJement  on  tlio  N.  W. 
part  dl  the  northern  island,  is  tho  port  of  entry. 

CASTLE  l."^L.\Nl)  is  an  islet  lynig  oU'tho  south  end  of  the  southern  Crooked  Island; 
between  i.ie  sfvenil  white  rocks,  one  of  which  is  very  reniarkablo,  ap])earing,  wlienyiu 
first  inid»o  it,  like  a  white  I'ort  or  casth*,  from  which  the  islet  lakes  its  name.  Tlie  |)(isi- 
tioii  of  the  i^Iet  is  22"^  7'  45"  N.,  and  74''  1!)'  W.     Variation  4°  40'  E. 

iJr.iwt-en  Ciistio  Island  and  lOitniie  Island  the  land  forms  a  great  indent,  named  tho 
(ireai  Ihty.  at  tho  eiili'anco  of  wliicli  lie  tho  I'ish  Keys.  'J'hcse  keys  are  not  tobeir)- 
preached  loo  near.  IJftwcen  ('asllo  Ishind  and  Salina  Point,  is  a  line  sandy  buy,  ciillej 
Janniica  Hay,  wherein  ships  may  anchor  in  'J  fathoms,  well  sheltered  from  S.  \V,  winds. 
To  til'-  i\.  E.  iif  this  bay  arc  two  Wi'lls,  wiili  cxcellfnt  water,  and  woixl  may  be  obtiincJ. 
I'Oll  rCNK  l.SliANlJ,  di^linguishl■d  by  its  salt  puiiils  and  wharfs,  is  rather  more  than 
10  miles  in  length,  anil  1  i  in  breadth.  It  lies  nearly  N.  N.  E.  and  .S.  S.  W.  The  fi'ulh 
end  is  very  bi>|.|.  Ofj'  its  north  end  art*  two  islets;  and  a  little  to  the  north  of  ihi*!!! 
islets  i.s  a  sandy  point,  known  liy  tint  nam.'  of  tiie  French  Wills.  From  this  asiniillscMle- 
nient  wM  be  seen  on  the  hi^h  land  to  the  ni^rthward.  A  ves.-el  may  nnclior  in  8  fullioin;, 
with  the  French    Wells  due  east,  2  unles.     'J'he  author  should  bo  let  go  inunodiatelj 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


303 


miles  iVom 

mil'  a  Ipiigue 

iM)iii;iit  ihe 

uihI  timt  the 

miles  iVoiii 

our  wiiiil. 

This  an- 

ibk's'  iength 

shells,  l)iit 

be  formed 
asci'i'tiiiiif'!; 
tiio  N.  W. 


named  tlio 
lot  to  bii  ii|i- 

h;iy,  CiilleJ 

W.  \viii.l<. 
\ni  ohii.iiic'J. 
•  V  tiiDi'o  tliaii 

Tho  fi'uili 
•th  of  these 
t;illiillK''.llf- 
II  S  fiitlioiii;, 

ninodiutely 


The  Bird 
Rock,  or 
Passage 
Islet. 


when  on  the  bank,  only  taking  care  to  pick  out  a  clear  spot.  At  this  place  are  several 
yteWs  of  excellent  water,  which  give  name  to  the  point :  stock  and  wood  ulao  may  he  ob- 
tained here. 

THE  BIRD  ROCK,  or  PASSAGE  ISLET,  is  a  low  islet  off  the  N.  W.  point  of 
Crooked  Isliuid.  A  very  dangerous  reef  extends  2  miles  from  it,  in  a  N.  N.  W.  direc- 
tion ;  it  then  trends  in  a  circular  direction  to  the  E.  S.  F.,  or  towards  the  shore.  This 
reef  forms  the  Bird's  Rocks  anchorage,  which  is  rathar  indifferent,  the  ground  being 
partly  foul. 

Southward  of  the  Bird  Rock  is  a  sandy  bay,  called  Portland  Harbor,  in  the  middle  of 
which,  close  to  the  beach,  is  a  well  of  spring  water.  'J'he  best  anclioroge  in  this  place 
is  off  the  first  rocky  point  to  the  southward  of  the  f.andy  bay,  at  about  3  cabins'  length 
from  the  shore,  in  7  or  8  fathoms.  You  may  anchor  as  soon  as  j.  are  on  the  bank, 
with  the  Bird  Rock  bearing  nearly  N.  N.  \V.,  but  without  great  cautioa  the  anchor  will 
be  lost. 

If  you  anchor  in  the  sandy  bay  above  mentioned,  you  must  be  careful  to  avoid  a  rocky 
hend,  having  only  16  feet  of  water  on  it,  and  which  lies  off  the  ci-ntre  of  that  bay.  at  about 
three-fourths  of  the  distance  between  the  beach  and  the  edge  of  the  soundings. 

CROOKKD  ISLAND  PASSAGE  is  the  best  of  all  the  windward  passages  for  ships  Crooked  M- 
to  sail  through.  and  Passage. 

The  prevailing  winds  being  from  the  north  quartei",  as  soon  as  you  enter  the  passage 
you  will  find  smooth  water  and  plenty  of  sea-room.  In  the  event  of  its  blowing  strong 
fiom  the  N.  N.  W.,  or  N.,  you  will  find  good  anchorage  under  the  south  end  of  For- 
tune's Island,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  with  the 
point  bearing  N.  VV.  by  N.,  and  the  sand-breaker  E.  i  S.,  just  on  the  edge  of 
soundings. 

There  is  also  nnchoroge  at  Bird  Rock,  but  the  ground  is  very  rocky.  Wood,  water, 
and  stock  can  be  procured. 

Of  the  Crooked  Island  Passage,  the  Count  Chastenet,  de  Puysegur  says,  this  is  the 
longest  of  these  passages,  but  it  is  fur  the  most  convenient  for  ships  coming  out  of  the 
Bay  of  Gonaives,  or  from  the  southern  ports  of  Hnyti,  and  for  those  which  are  bound  to 
the  United  States.  These  commonly  take  their  departure  from  Cape  St.  Nicholas  ;  and 
being  'Z  leagues  from  the  cape  in  the  offing,  must  steer  N.  by  W.,  23  leagues,  to  make 
the  S.  \V.  point  of  Heneagua.  This  course  will  generally  lead  2  leagues  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  point. 

When  you  are  opposite  the  west  point  of  Great  Heneagua,  at  two  leagues  off,  steer  N. 
N.  \V.  2°  or  3"  W.,  for  25  leagues,  when  you  will  make  Castle  Isle,  which  you  may  ap- 
proach within  two  miles,  or  nearer,  without  fear.  If  you  should  depart  from  Heneagua 
in  the  evening,  it  would  be  better  to  steer  N.  W.  k  N.  for  17  kugues,  to  avoid  the  Hog- 
sties;  then  to  haul  u]),  and  make  a  good  N.  by  W.  course ;  when,  having  run  8  leagues, 
you  would  be  one  league  to  the  westward  of  Castle  Island.  The  Hobart  Breakers  lie 
Iibftui  3  leiigues  to  the  S.  W.  of  Castle  Island, 

Shunl  1  you  make  Heneagua  towards  noon  or  afternoon,  it  will  be  best  to  drop  anchor 
in  tilt)  N.  W.  or  Great  Bay,  and  get  under  way  at  midnight,  or  at  2  in  the  morning,  ac- 
cording to  the  strength  of  the  breeze,  and  steer  N.  W.  i  N.,  until  you  have  run  IG  or  17 
leiigues  ;  then  haul  up  N.  N.  W.,  or  N.  by  W.,  when  there  will  bo  daylight  for  any  thing 
tliiough  the  rest  of  the  passage.  But  should  there  he  light  baffling  winds  in  the  night, 
with  [)rol)ahly  a  weather  current,  keep  the  lend  going,  and  you  will  avoid  the  Hog.^ties, 
lis,  ill  advancing  towards  them,  there  will  be  found  soundings  of  50  to  30  and  20  fathoms. 
Frou)  the  west  end  of  Castle  Isle  you  steer  N.,  or  N.  by  W.,  seven  and  a  half  leagues, 
to  m;ii»e  tlie  west  end  of  Long  Key.  This  course  and  distance  will  lend  within  a  league 
of  it.  Continue  in  the  same  direction,  to  make  Bird  Rock,  off  the  western  extreme  of 
Clunked  Island.  Having  thus  run  G  leagues,  you  will  be  one  and  a  half  league  west  of 
this  iLilot ;  so  that  the  direct  course  from  Castle  Isle  to  the  end  of  the  passage  is  N.  5® 
W,,  14  leagues. 

When  you  are  come  to  tliis  place,  you  suppose  yourself  out  of  the  passage  ;  neverthe- 
less, should  the  wind  happiMi  to  tlie  N.  E.,  or  E.  N.  E.,  you  have  to  fear  Watling's  Isl- 
and, which  hears  from  Bird  Island  N.  4°  W.,  true,  23  leagues;  therefore,  to  avoid  it, 
you  uuuht,  in  leaving  the  passag(>,  to  keep  as  much  to  the  eastward  as  the  wind  will  per- 
mit; but  should  the  wind  be  at  S,  E.,  and  you  steer  at  N.  F.,  you  would  make  Atwood's 
Key;  so  that,  kee])ing  the  wind  when  you  are  out,  yon  must  observe  not  to  steer  higher 
to  the  eastward  than  N.  E.,  nor  more  to  leeward  than  N.  by  E. 

DIANA  BANK  is  a  bunk  of  five  miles  in  extent  from  east  to  west,  and  three  milcR  in  Diana  Bank. 
a  north  nnJ  south  direction.     From  Com.  R,  Owen's,  R.  N.,  surveys,  who  has  surveyed 
sill  the  windwiii'd  passages,  it  appears  there  are  not  less  than  nine  fathoms  on  it.     The  cen- 
tre is  in  Int.  22^  31'  N.,  long,  74*^  4fi'  W. 

CiiRKK.NTs. — You  have  little  occasion  to  fear  the  currents  in  this  passage,  which, 
in  n  frrsli  breeze,  are  scarcely  percej)tible;  but,  in  calms  and  light  winds,  they  may  set 
you  to  the  westward,  but  slowly  and  so  feebly  that,  in  a  passage  so  .short,  you  need  not  to. 


Currents. 


304 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


IVinds. 


Mira-PoT- 
Vos. 


High  wafer. 
Ragged  Isl- 
ands. 


Tilts. 


mind  them,  eapocinlly  os  you  genornlly  make  it  with  a  large  winJ.  Nevertheless,  in  the 
months  of  Juno,  July,  and  August,  when  culms  or  light  westerly  winds  are  coininoii 
you  may  experience  a  current  setting  to  the  west,  strong  enough  to  alter  your  course' 
which  effect  only  can  happen  in  this  passnge,  and  is  occasioned  by  the  proximity  of  tlio 
extensive  shoiils,  forming  tlio  chimnol  of  Biihiima,  and  tliose  of  Providence  Island,  l^ 
this  season  it  would  bo  [iropor,  if  you  have  wind  suffiriunt  to  make  you  go  more  tliiin  two 
knots  an  hour,  to  allow  a  quarter  of  a  mile  an  hour  for  the  current  setting  to  tlio  west- 
ward; if  you  go  three  knots  and  upwards,  this  allowance  will  be  unnecessary. 

Winds. — The  N.  E.  trade  generally  prevails  here,  except  from  October  to  April 
which  are  considered  as  the  winter  months:  during  those  monlhs  you  have,  sonirtiines' 
strong  gales  from  the  N.  W.,  and  very  variable  weather;  particularly  about  the  full  niid 
change  of  the  moon,  which  ought  to  be  guarded  against. 

The  MIR,\-POR-VOS,  an  assemblage  of  barren  rocks,  with  one  low  sandy  islet,  lies 
to  the  west  of  Castle  Island,  in  2-2'^  7'  N.,  on  a  shoal  similar  to  that  of  the  Hogsties.  They 
are  very  dangerous,  and  should  bo  carefully  avoided,  particularly  when  the  islands  bear  jii 
a  N.  W.  diiection. 

When  the  wind  blows  from  the  northward,  they  break  very  heavy,  and  nt  all  tiini-s  a 
heavy  swell;  the  current  generally  sots  from  the  N.  E.  one  mile  per  hour.  On  the  west- 
ern side  is  an  indilVerent  anchorage;  the  east  side  is  bold,  and  on  the  S.  E.  side,  at  uiuil.) 
distant,  there  are  from  •20  to  '25  fathoms,  coral  and  rocky  ground.  As  theso  keys  nre  to 
leeward,  thi-y  are  not  often  seen  by  vesscds  in  ranging  along  Castle  Island ;  however,  if  jt 
is  necessary  to  turn,  you  may  approach  the  bank  within  half  a  league.  All  the  dau'er- 
ous  parts  break,  and  the  white  ground  will  give  you  notice  in  good  time.  You  m;y,  if 
you  chose,  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  Mira-por-vos,  with  the  precaution  only  of  notiip- 
preaching  too  near.  Captain  Willian  Doweus  was  passing  this  way  in  an  evening  of  Jan. 
uary,  1814,  and  came  suddenly  on  a  reef  stretching  out  from  the  S.  \V.  Key,  which  bore 
east,  2i  miles.  Captain  Dowers  says,  "We  had  10  fathoms,  sand,  while  in  stays;  but 
observed  black  rocks  and  less  water  in  many  places. 

"This  reef  appears  to  run  oil"  west  for  3  miles,  ond  then  extends  to  the  S.  S,  R.  for 
some  distance.  We  counted  ten  above  water.  They  are  all  barren  rocks,  excopiinir  (ijj, 
S.  W.,  which  is  a  low  sandy  island,  nbuut  a  half  a  mile  in  length,  and  covered  with  brush- 
wood." 

The  Mira-por-vos  range  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  The  midrllo  of  the  group  baiirs  W., 
11  miles  from  Castle  Island.  In  making  thorn  you  will  gain  soundings  in  11  futlioin.s;  nml 
nt  three-quartere  of  a  n,'de  thence  may  pass  to  tho  westward  of  them  ;  but  the  geiieral 
channel  ia  between  them  and  Castle  Island.     High  water  full  and  change  Oh.  ;)Oni. 

RAGGED  ISLANDS. --These  have  been  surveyed  by  Commander  R.  Owen,  R.N. 
The  Flag-staff  is  in  lat.  •22'^'  11'  40"  N.,  long.  75'^  44''  07"  W.  If  bound  to  them  from  the 
Windward  Islands,  a  N.  W.  course  from  Cape  Maize  will  fetch  it,  distance  4.3  li-ii^^uej. 
Vessels  bound  to  Ragged  Island  should  pass  1.5  miles  to  tho  northward  and  eastward  if 
Key  Verde,  thence  .-iteer  W.  by  compass  for  Ragged  Island.  The  island  is  surrounded  bv 
muny  dangers,  whose  positions  are  shown  on  the  chart.  All  masters  of  vessels  bound  to 
it,  in  coming  up  the  straits,  had  best  keep  the  Cuba  shore  on  board  until  they  run  up  as 
high  as  the  well-noted  high  hills  of  Givari,  which  is  a  saddle  liill;  then  steer  ns  iilxjve 
directed,  and  if  they  exceed  8  feet  draft  of  water,  keep  tho  island  under  their  lee,  mid 
run  tho  shore  close  on  board  until  they  bring  tho  thig-stalf  and  houses  to  bear  due  south, 
then  you  will  open  tho  entrance  into  the  harbor,  w  hen  you  must  haul  in  S.  W.;  then 
ahead  of  you,  a  small  key,  with  store-houses  on  it,  will  appear,  and  at  your  ontninco  into 
the  harbor,  a  low  black  roek  will  appi'ar  on  your  .starboard  side  ;  give  it  a  berth,  and  in  run- 
tiing  in,  you  will  observe  a  large  red  Cal  Maiik  on  j'our  larboanl  side,  which  you  nny  rini 
close  to  until  you  come  abreast  of  a  low  black  point  of  rock  on  the  same  (juarter,  and  whn 
you  come  abreast  of  a  couple  of  cannon  mounted  thereon,  you  may  drop  your  iinchoriii 
3  or  4  fathoms  water,  imtil  a  pilot  boards  you,  utdess  he  may  iiave  mot  you  on  tlieuulsil'. 
Ragged  Island  is  distinguishable  froiu  all  oilu'r  sounding  keys  by  a  lofty  hill  about  the  mill- 
die  of  it,  tho  number  of  houses  and  enclosure.^,  as  well  as  the  (hig-statf  that  appeiiraonit. 
Vessels  running  far  from  Capo  Mai/.e  oi-  IJarracoa  geiujrally  make  Key  Verde,  closoiip 
to  which,  eitluM'  to  wind  wan!  or  leeward,  there  is  plenty  of  water  for  vessels  of  aiiydndi. 
South  of  Ragged  Island,  distant  10  miles,  there  are  three  small  keys  close  to  e.icii  other, 
called  the  Hrothers,  that  have  iVom  '2  to  3  fathoms  water  close  up  to  them.  St.  Di)niiii;o 
Key  lies  .S.  i  E.  of  Ragged  fsliind,  distant  0  leagues,  to  leowaril  of  which  there  is  plenty 
of  water;  but  no  vessel  should  attempt  to  edge!  tho  bank  to  windward  of  it  until  yuiinre 
close  under  the  lee  of  Key  Verde,  as  there  are  many  dimserous  ledgo.sand  rocks  betwist 
them,  on  the  eilge  of  the  straits,  on  wliirli  m:uiy  vivssels  have  been  lost. 

Remnrks  on  the  ncli'in  of  the  rhh  an  I  Jlow  of  tiiles  at  Hugged  Island,  hy  Dl'.ncan 
T.WLoR. — From  the  lirst  of  January  to  the  last  of  April  they  (low  from  1(1  to  1^"  inche', 
and  the  tide  that  flow.s  an  hour  after  the  rising  of  the  moon,  is  uniforady  U  or  8  iuches 
higher  than  tho  tide  which  flows  after  tho  setting  of  tho  moou. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Thftve  frequently,  during  the  above  months,  observed  them  not  to  flow  more  thnn  from 
g  to  12  indies.     Tlie  spring  tides,  during  the  above  months,  generally  rise  from  6  to  10    Tides. 
inches  higher  than  the  common  tides. 

From  the  beginning  of  May  to  the  first  of  October,  both  tides  grndunlly  flow  till  they 
arrive  nt  the  height  of  from  10  inches  to  2  feet  4  inches,  find  from  18  inches  to  3  feet  6 
inches,  and  then  continue  diminishing  until  the  month  of  January. 

Diredionsfor  sailing  from  Jamaica,  through  the  Windward  Channel  and  Crooked  Island 

Passage. 

Those  who  nro  bound  from  Jiimaica  to  Europe,  or  any  part  of  the  north-eastward, 

it  is  recommended,  if  possible,  to  take  the  Crooked  Island  Passage  in  preference  to  any 

other.      From  Point  Morant,  Jamaica,  you  should  endeavor  to  goio  easting  as  soon  as 

possible;  and  by  taking  advantage  of  the  wind's  shifting  from  N.  N.  E.  to  east,  which 

itgonendly  does  in  the  night,  you  will  gain  ground  very  fast;  and  by  working  up  under 

Cnpe  Dame  Marie,  on  Hayti,  you  avoid  a  strong  set  to  theS.W..  caused  by  the  trade  wind. 

There  is  found,  however,  at  times,  great  difliculty   in  working  around  Cape   Maize, 

owing  to  the  strong  lee  current  which  generally  prevails  with  a  strong  N.  N.  E.   wind, 

niiiticularly  in  the  months  of  January.  February,  March,  and  April,  during  which  months 

tiu(  strong  northerly  winds  prevail.     This  current  is  found  to  run  strongest  between  Cape 

Mni/.e  and  Cape  Dame  Marie  (or  Donna  Marie,)  the  stream  occupying  a  space  in  breodth 

eqiiiil  to  the  distance  between  the  contracting  points,  anil  runs  at  the  rate  of  two  knots  an 

lidur,  setting,  during  the  strong  N.  E.  winds,  to  the  S.  W.  between  the  N.  E.  end  of  Ja- 

iii«ica  and  the  Morant  Keys. 

Some  commanders,  after  clearing  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  have  stood  ov^r  to  the  Cu- 
ba shore,  in  order  to  round  Cape  Maize;  but  they,  also,  }iiive  found  a  strong  lee  current, 
«nd  having  little  or  no  land  wind  to  assist  them  in  working  along  the  south  side  of  that  land 
in  the  months  above  mentioned,  they  have  at  last  been  obliged  to  bear  up  for  the  Gulf 
Passage. 

It  is  to  be  understood  that  the  following  directions  nre  not  intended  as  a  standing  rule 
for  working,  at  all  times,  around  Cape  Maize.  In  the  fine  season  there  are  variable 
wliiils,  and  the  current  is  sometimes  in  your  favor,  of  which  every  advantage  should  bo 
taken,  according  to  circumstoncea  : 

In  sailing  between  Capo  Mnize  and  Cape  St.  Nicholas,  the  Montngnes  de  la  Hotte,  or 
GraiKt  Anse  Mountains,  (the  westernmost  high  land  of  Hayti,)  are  often  seen.  They 
limy  be  descried  at  the  distance  of  30  or  40  leagues:  and  by  their  situation  and  bearing, 
become  a  good  guide  in  working  up  the  Windward  Channel. 

hi  sailing  from  Port  Royal  to  windward,  and  finding  a  strong  lee  current  against  you, 
stand  well  out,  and  work  in  the  stream  of  the  Morant  Keys,  endeavoring  to  get  to  the 
eastward  of  those  keys  as  soon  os  possible.  The  Morant  Keys  are  by  no  means  danger- 
ous. US  they  can  at  all  times  of  the  day  be  seen  at  a  sufficient  distance  to  avoid  the  dangers 
that  surround  them  ;  under  the  N.  W.  side  is  anchorage. 

Having  made  the  .Morant  Keys,  stand  well  to  the  eastward,  and  keep  working,  in  a 
direct  line,  for  the  high  land  over  Point  Boucan,  which  is  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  Capo  Tibu- 
ron ;  and  by  not  standing  furtlicr  to  the  westward  than  with  Cape  Tiburon  bearing  N. 
E.,  you  will  avoid  the  stream  of  the  current  and  gain  ground  very  fast.  When  you  have 
advanced  as  far  to  the  northward  as  17°  40  ,  yon  will  sometimes  meet  with  a  counter 
current,  and  it  frequently  happens,  particularly  in  the  night,  tiiat  squalls  are  met  with 
from  the  southward,  which  are  caused  by  the  highlaiiils  of  Mayti.  In  this  case,  keep  well 
to  the  eastward  of  t"\e  Isle  Nava/.a,  between  it  and  Cape  Tiburon.  With  frequent  flaws 
of  wind  in  your  favor,  endeavor  to  get  clo.ie  under  Cape  Tiburon,  and  keep  working  along 
that  slun'c,  wliidi  is  very  bold,  to  Cape  Dame  Mario;  and,  by  not  standing  further  off 
fhore  than  7  or  8  miles,  you  will  find  very  little  current.  It  has,  however,  been  observed 
that  l)\j  keeping  too  close  in  with  the  land  about  the  S.  W.  end  of  Hayti,  you  may  be  be- 
calmed for  a  month. 

In  the  channel  between  Cape  Nicholas  and  Cnpe  Maize,  the  current  sets  with  great 
strengtii,  particularly  on  the  Cuba  side,  where  it  iiowevor  varies  with  the  seasons.  It  is, 
tliciefore,  necessary  to  work  up  to  Cape  Nichidas  before  you  attempt  to  weather  Cape 
Maize;  and  by  keeping  within  the  line  of  Cape  Nicholas  and  Cape  Dame  Marie,  you  will 
Work  to  windward  very  fast.  When  Capo  Maize  is  brought  to  the  westward  of  north, 
you  may  venture  to  stand  across  the  channel  to  the  northward,  and  you  will  generally,  as 
you  stand  over,  find  the  wind  more  easterly.  Fetch  over  to  the  Grant  Heueagua,  as  that 
island  sliouhl  always  be  made  if  possible. 

In  proceeding  from  off  Capo  Maize  for  the  Crooked  Island  Passage,  make  the  land  of 
Heneagua  if  it  be  possible,  as  short  departures  are  best  in  navigating  among  these  islands, 
particularly  as  the  currents  are  found  in  various  directions. 

On  proceeding  from  Great  Henetngua  to  Castle  Island,  you  should  leave  Heneagua  so 
as  to  allow  sufficient  time  fur  entering  the  Crooked  Island  Passage  before  dark,  or  in  the 

30 


306 


f 


'.■;|  'il 


"Ti^^^rfimiii ,  I  I 


306 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Brown's 


The  Hog- 
siies. 


Great  Hene- 
agua,  or  In- 
agua. 


evening,  so  rb  to  nrrive  there  by  daylight  in  the  morning.     The  Intter  is  generally  pre- 
ferred.    The  course  from  Orent  Henenguii  to  Castle  Island  is  N.  W.  by  N. 

Having  ont«tied  between  Castle  Islnnd  and  the  Mira-por-vos,  the  course  to  Long  Kev 
is  N.  by  W.  J  W.,  7  or  8  leagues.  Towards  the  northern  end  of  Long  Key  ia  a  rise  of 
land,  with  a  niig-Htiiti'  on  the  summit.  In  advancing  towards  this  place,  you  will  perceive 
a  Hiindy  point,  called  the  French  Wells,  otf  which  there  is  good  auchoruge  fur  meu-of- 
war,  in  7  futhonis,  about  two  miles  from  shore. 

From  abreast  of  Fish  Keys  to  the  Bird  Rock,  off  the  N.  W.  point  of  Crooked  Ishmd 
the  course  and  distance  are  north,  8i  leagues.  You  may  run  along  shore,  there  belnJ 
no  danger  but  what  may  be  seen  in  the  day.  The  Bird  Rock  lies  in  lat.  22°  5U',  luuif 
74''  -3'. 

When  you  get  abreast  of  this  Key,  you  may  with  safety  haul  up  N,  E.,  if  the  wind  per. 
mits,  to  go  clear  of  Watling's  Island.  It  is  very  dangerous  to  approach  Walling's  l!<leitj 
little  wind  o>-  calms,  the  current  setting  wholly  on  it :  as  it  is  very  rocky  and  steen  to 
there  would  be  no  possibility  of  saving  the  ship.  Captain  Hester  observes  in  liia  Juur. 
Dais,  that  it  had  been  remarked  of  late  years-  by  those  who  have  passed  both  wayg 
through  the  Croked  Island  Passage,  that  in  going  to  the  northward  you  can  seldom  cipnr 
Watling's  Island,  after  you  have  passed  Crooked  Island,  without  beating  to  win  J  wind' 
and  going  to  tlie  southward,  after  you  are  past  the  Mira-por-vos,  and  the  Hogsties,  jtjs 
ditlicult  weathering  or  rounding  Cape  Maize. 

BROWN'S  SHOAL.— For  our  knowledge  of  this  danger  we  are  indebted  to  Capt. 
Livingston,  who  has  given  us  the  following  account  of  it :  "  Brown's  Shoal,  10  leagues 
S.  S.  K.,  by  compass,  from  Key  Verde,  was  seen  by  Capt.  William  Brown,  of  the 
schooner  Union,  of  Plymouth,  Mass..  who  stated  to  me  that  it  is  of  considerable  extent 
and  that,  fioin  the  manner  in  which  the  sea  broke  over  it,  he  does  not  suppose  there cmi 
be  more  than  2  or  3  feet  water  on  the  shoalest  part.  Latitude  and  longitude  inl'eried 
from  the  position  of  Key  Verde.  2P  33'  N.,and  74^  55'  W. 

THE  HO(iSTIKS  are  three  low  keys,  encompassed  to  the  eastward  by  a  reef  of  5 
miles  in  extent.  The  South  Key  is  in  lat.  21=  40'  30"  N..  long.  73°  50'  W.  They  lie 
at  the  distance  of  II  leagues  N.  by  W.  I  W.  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Heneagua.  About 
them  are  many  rocks  and  broken  ground,  and  when  it  blows  hard  the  sea  breaks  over 
them  all.  The  southernmost  is  the  smallest,  and  bears  from  the  middle  key,  wliich  is 
the  largest,  S.  S.  E.  1'he  snnillest  requires  a  good  berth,  it  being  shoal  all  round;  but 
you  may  sail  close  to  the  largest,  and  anchor  in  4  or  6  fathoms,  with  that  key  beiirinji  {.', 
S.  E.    About  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Hogsties  is  a  depth  of  18  and  i2U  fatlionis. 

GREAT  HENKAGUA,  OR  INAGUA.— Great  Heneagua  is  rather  low,  and  cannot 
be  seen  at  a  considerable  distance,  in  consequence  of  the  haze  which  constantly  previiilj 
in  these  latitudes.  In  nniking  the  west  end  there  ia  no  danger  whatever.  Two  sinniv 
bays  at  that  end  atl'ord  good  anchorage.  From  the  trade  wind's  blowing  over  the  i^bimj, 
tiie  noi'thernmost  bay  is  the  best.  Stand  in.  and  you  will  perceive  the  line  0'°  nouii(hii;i9 
by  the  color  of  the  water,  extending  about  half  a  mile  from  the  beach.  80  soon  ii8\uii 
are  in  soundings,  let  go  your  anchor,  in  6  or  7  fathoms. 

This  island  is  about  15  leagues  in  length,  and  10  miles  in  breadth  The  iMxIy  of  it  lie.) 
in  lat.  21°  .")'  N.  Fresh  water  may  be  procured  in  the  northprnmosl  buy,  on  the  west 
side,  at  a  small  distance  from  the  beach. 

A  shoal,  marked  doubtful,  which  is  exhibited  on  some  charts  as  lymg  off  the  S.  W. 
end  of  Great  Heneagua,  has  been  carefully  sought  for,  and  said  nut  to  exist,  but  wetiiiuk 
otherwise. 

On  the  night  of  March  17, 1842,  the  Steamer  Clarion,  Capt.  B.  'WiHiams,  drawing  loj 
feet  wiiter,  struck  on  this  shoal  and  knocked  off  part  of  her  false  keel. 

Capt.  W.  supposes  it  to  be  about  S.  W.,  15  miles  distant  from  the  S.  W.  point  ul 
Heneagua;  it  beitig  night,  he  could  not  see  the  land. 

M.  Chastonet  de  Puysegur  says,  "  Great  Heneagua,  like  all  the  islands  wliidi  bounj 
the  Windward  Passages,  is  very  low,  with  small  hunmiocks,  which,  at  a  distance,  fijiiii-ar 
like  detached  i.«lets.  The  land,  in  clear  weather,  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  uf  5iir( 
leagues,  and  you  need  not  fear  coming  within  half  a  league  on  the  western  side.  Iiu 
iine  bay,  which  you  leave  on  your  starboard  side  when  going  through  the  passiige.yuD 
may  anchor  on  while  bottom,  choosing  your  ground  by  your  eye,  as  in  many  pinisof 
such  bottom  then*  are  stones  which  sometimes  rise  to  u  considerable  height  above  tlie 
level  of  the  sand." 

There  are  some  rocks  about  tlie  S.  W.  point,  with  a  reef  which  stretches  out  to  nearlj 
the  extent  of  a  mile.  In  the  bay  between  this  and  the  west  point,  called  Siialiuw  liav, 
you  may  anchor  close  in.  Tlio  bay  is  surrounded  by  a  reef,  which,  however,  shows 
itself,  although  there  are  2  or  3  liithonis  over  it.  Without  the  reef  is  a  white  sniid,  to  ili« 
distance  of  3  cables'  length,  and  on  this  is  the  anchorage,  in  7  or  8  fathoms.  Faitlieroul, 
in  a  line  between  the  two  point,"',  which  lie  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  from  each  olIuT.iB 
15  fathoms,  is  rocky  ground.  This  bay  is  not  so  deep  as  tlie  Great  Bay,  but.  ns  tiieluinl; 
is  less  Bteep,  ships  are  not  su  liable  to  drive  here ;  ueitlier  is  the  landing  bo  easy,  but  lkr« 


aud  a  half 
huge  rocks 
a  mile  long, 
rocks  under 
eels  to  go  til 
Captain  . 
and  tliree-qi 
a  mile  and  a 
Passage  Is|, 
uuder  a  trop 
t\vin  the 
^s,  tile  but 
bios'  (engtli 
distant  7  mil 
}'"U  niislit  be 
^^'.  point,  wl 
astlieS,  S, 
m\  on  wlijcl 
dines  to  the 
anil  having  so 
inland,  are  tw. 
point,  wliicli 
cos  Passage. 

nave  been  desi 
nitlicrto  but  jit 
'  Wis  a  rock  wh 
,'^'K.  of  the 
from  the  N. 
[pilot,  "wostol 
p-deofthelan 
l^-audN.  W 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


307 


rally  pre- 

Long  Key 
is  a  rise  of 
ill  pt^rceive 
ir  ineu-of. 

ked  Islnnd, 
liere  being 
'  5UMong. 

e  wind  per- 
iod's Uie  in 
ml  steep  tu 
11  his  Juur- 

both  wiiys 
leKlom  clpur 

win  J  wind; 
[ogsties,  it  is 

ted  to  Capt, 
I,  10  lengues 
rown,  of  tlie 
irable  extent, 
096  there  ciiii 
:ude  inferred 

y  a  reef  of  5 

V.  They  lie 
eugua.  About 
II  breaks  over 
key,  which  is 
[ill  round;  liut 
iey  bearinii  E. 
20  frtlhonis. 
^w,  and  cannot 
itantly  prevmls 
Two  siimlT 
iver  the  if^liiml, 

of  kOUImIiii;:) 

u  soon  iis)uii 

Ixnly  of  it  lies 
,•,  uii  the  west 

off  the  S.  W, 

,  but  we  tliiuk 

8,  drawing  mi 

s.  W.  point  uf 

which  hounil 
[Stance.  u|)|)f«t 
ancu  of5iir6 
ern  side.  I" 
piissiige,  yo« 
many  P"r's<i'" 
ight  above  tte 

L  out  to  nearly 
n  Shallow  Bay, 
Jowever.  show) 
lite  sand,  to  ilw 
Kavlliermt, 
ettchotlu'r,ii 

lut.  as  tW '»'"'' 
leasy.butllier* 


are  clear  places  in  the  reef.     There  is  no  water  but  in  the  raioy  season;  then  it  is  not 
very  good,  as  it  lies  among  the  mangrove  bushes 

THE  GREAT  BAY  is  sheltered  from  the  north  by  the  N.  W.  point,  and  from  the  The  Great 
south  by  the  west  point.  This  bay  is  two  and  a  half  loiigu^s  wide, and  one  deep;  and  Bay. 
all  along  the  shore  there  is  a  border  of  sand  4  cables'  length  wide,  on  which  you  will  have 
5  futiioms,  at  a  pistol  shut  from  the  sho-e,  to  15 j  fathoms ;  and  at  half  a  cable's  lenjjth 
from  that,  45  fathoms  of  water.  If  you  should  be  there  in  the  season  of  the  norths,  you 
miiy  anchor  under  the  iN.  W.  point,  so  as  to  be  sheltered  from  the  W.  N.  W. ;  and  if 
there  when  the  southerly  winds  prevail,  you  may  anchor  under  the  south  point  so  as  to 
be  sheltered  from  the  W.  S.  W.  There  are  not  more  than  four  or  five  points  of  the 
westerly  winds  which  could  hurt  you ;  but  they  are  not  to  be  feared,  as  they  seldom 
blow,  nnd  never  violently.     It  is  easy  landing  all  round  the  bay. 

Having  rounded  the  N.  W.  point,  you  will  see  a  little  iaiet  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  nnd  a  ledge 
of  reefei  for  more  than  a  league  along  the  shore,  and  upwards  of  a  mile  from  it.  This 
const  will  be  known  by  a  hummock,  (le  Mornet,)  the  only  one  on  the  north  side,  which 
is  lower  than  the  Houtli,  and  covered  with  bushes. 

At  the  eastern  part  of  the  north  side  of  Heneagua  is  a  bay,  3  leagues  wide,  and  nearly 
one  deep,  where  you  may  anchor,  but  will  be  sheltered  from  southerly  winds  only.  This 
bay  is  little  known.  At  about  a  mile  from  the  S.  E.  point  is  a  little  islet,  and  around  it 
the  bottom  ajipears  white:  upon  this  you  may  anchor  at  about  a  musket  shot  from  the 
isliind.  Tiie  white  bottom  continues  along  the  south  part,  with  here  and  there  some  reefs 
with  breakers. 

STATIRA  SHOAL,  on  which  H.  M.  Ship  Statira  was  lost,  bears  south,  nearly  34    Statira 
miles  from  the  south-east  point  of  Inagua.  Shoal. 

LITTLE  HENEAGUA.— This  island,  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  the  N.  E.  point  Little  He- 
of  Great  Heneagua,  is  low  and  uneven,  except  a  little  mount  or  hummock,  which  is  at  an  neagua. 
equal  distance  from  the  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  points;  not  fur  from  the  shore,  almost  round 
the  island;  it  is  sandy,  except  at  the  S.  E.  point,  where  a  ledge  of  rocks  stretches  off  and 
breaks,  nearly  one  mile  and  a  half.  On  the  south  side  there  is  a  white  bottom,  bordered 
with  a  reef,  at  the  foot  of  which  is  n  depth  of  40  fathoms.  This  island  is  divided  from 
Great  Heneagua  by  a  deep  channel,  a  league  and  half  in  breadth. 

CUIDADO  REEF. — This,  on  the  authority  of  Com.  R.  Owen,  we  believe  does  not    Cuidado 
exist.  Reef, 

MAYAGUANA,  or  MARIGUANA,  is  an  island,  8  leagues  in  length,  between  the    Mayaguana, 
piirftllels  of  '22^  18'  and  22°  30'  N.     It  is  surrounded  by  a  reef,  which  runs  above  a  league    or  Marigu- 
aud  a  half  to  the  eastward.     On  the  eastern  part  of  this  reef  are  several  keys,  and  5  or  6    ana. 
huge  rocks  above  water.     Near  the  northernmost  part  of  it  is  an  islet,  three-quarters  of 
a  mile  long,  with  a  small  key  to  the  S.  W.  of  it.     The  rest  of  the  reef  is  bordered  with 
rocks  under  water,  on  which  the  sea  breaks.     On  the  south  side  is  a  passage  for  small  ves- 
aels  to  go  through,  and  be  sheltered  by  Mayaguana  on  one  side,  and  the  reef  on  the  other. 
Captain  M'Gowan  was  lately  cast  away  on  Mayaguana  Reef.     He  says  it  lies  a  mile 
and  tliree-quurters  farther  out  than  the  charts  show.     I  previously  considered  that  it  did, 
n  mile  and  a  half.     He  has.  I  understand,  determined  the  position  of  some  points  in  tha 
Piissage  Islands,  and  found  u  spring  well  on  Heneagua;  a  matter  of  much  importaQoe 
under  a  tropical  sun. 

From  the  S.  W.  to  the  N.  W.  point  of  Mayaguana,  the  coast  is  clear,  and  forms  two 
bays,  the  bottoms  of  which  are  of  white  sand,  where  you  may  anchor  at  about  two  ca-> 
blcj'  length  from  the  land.  The  two  points  lie  N.  N.  E.  and  hi.  S.  W.  from  each  other, 
distant  7  miles.  It  is  very  necessary  to  be  acquainted  with  these  anchoring  places,  aa 
you  might  be  caught  here  with  a  north  ;  then  it  would  be  better  to  anchor  urtder  the  N, 
\V,  point,  whore  you  would  be  sheltered  from  the  N.  N.  W.,  N.  E.,  E.  S.  E-,  and  as  far 
iistliB  S.  S.  W.,  and  that  by  the  island  and  reefs,  which  run  a  long  league  to  the  N.  W., 
nnd  on  which  tlio  sea  breaks  with  great  violence.  From  the  N.  W,  point  the  coast  in- 
clines to  tlie  E.  and  E.  S.  E.,  forming  a  kind  of  liay,  bordered  by  reefs  3  miles  flroin  land,.  ^ 
and  having  soma  passages  for  vory  small  vessels.  .\t  the  east  point  of  this  bay,  a  little 
inland,  are  two  little  hillocks;  then  the  coast  trends  E.  S,  E.  full  live  leagues  to  the  east 
point,  which  we  have  already  described.  M.yuguanu  and  Caycos  Islands  form  the  Cay- 
cos  Passage. 

Tbeb'KENCH.  or  PLANA  KEYS,  between  Mayaguana  and  the  Crooked  Islands,    J%e  French, 
,  have  been  described  by  the  pilot  of  the  Englo,  a  Froiich  ba-k,  as  follows  :  "  These  keys,    or  Plana 
;  hitherto  but  little  known,  have  boon  said  to  be  throe;  but  what  pruba'/iy  gave  rise  to  that,    Key$, 
\  Wiis  a  rock  which  appeared  out  of  water  as  high  as  a  boat.     It  is  about  half  a  mile  to  the 
>  N.  E.  of  the  laraest  island,  among  the  reefs  and  banks  east  from  wliich.  4  miles  distant 
[from  the  N.  E.  point,  lies  a  dangerous  rock,  oven   with  the  water's  edge."     Says  the 
Ipilot,  "  wo  stood  for  the  French  Islands,  and  anchored  in  the  white  water  on  the  west 
bide  of  the  largest,  about  two  cables'  length  from  it,  sheltered  by  a  reef,  which  runs  to  the 
[N.andN.  W.  Smiles. 


308  "  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•'  This  islnnd  is  no  more  thnn  3  miles  north  and  south,  nnd  half  hs  much  enst  nnd  weat 
The  eiiBt  nnd  north  sides  nre  surrounded  by  rpufs  which  brealt.  Tiie  Hnchurnee  ja 
about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  south  point,  near  wliich  is  a  landing  plucn;  n,,,] 
by  digging  two  ortiiree  feet  in  the  sand,  you  will  got  good  fresh  water.  Some  EngliDh 
people,  who  were  wrecked  here,  had  made  a  pond,  which  dried  up  on  the  Eagle's  fiijinn 
tour  casks  out  of  it,  but  in  a  quarter  of  an  hour  it  was  ns  full  as  ever.  It  is  very  oiir- 
prisiug,  that  at  about  ten  |)ace8  from  it  there  is  a  salt  water  pond.  This  islnnd  is  lo^ 
and  almost  even,  though  when  you  nre  at  a  distance  there  appear  some  sninll  risings 
which  diversify  a  little  its  appearance.  The  ground  is  nothing  but  snnd  or  rock,  with 
some  bushes  upon  it,  tit  only  for  tiring.  The  other  island,  which  is  the  siniillftBt,  Hug 
east  and  west,  about  two  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  first ;  but  tlie  pasHa^e  between 
tliem.  made  very  narrow  by  the  reefs  on  both  sides,  is  not  a  mile  wide,  and  is  tit  only  for 
small  craft." 

On  Mayaguana  and  Alwood's  Key  Passage — translated  from  the  French, 

This  passage  may  be  very  useful  and  convenient: 

1.  For  ships  intended  for  Crooked  Island  Passage,  nnd  meeting,  nf>er  they  nre  pnst 
Heneagua,  with  the  wind  nt  north,  N.  N.  W.  or  N.  W. ;  then,  not  being  able  to  sail  up 
to  Castle  Islnnd,  they  are  obliged  to  sail  to  the  southward  of  these  islnnds,  going  ujotig 
the  Planas  or  French  Keys,  and  between  Mayaguana  and  Atwood's  Key. 

2.  For  those  intending  to  go  through  this  Caycos  Passiige,  who,  when  advanced  to  the 
West  Caycos,  if  the  wind  is  at  N.  N.  E.,  would  be  obliged  to  sail  to  the  southward  uf 
Mayaguana,  and  to  puss  between  this  islnnd  nnd  Atwood's  Key. 

3.  When  they  nre  nbout  pnssing  between  the  two  islnnds,  if  the  N.  N.  E.  wind  is  too 
nenr,  they  may  advance  westward,  nnd  snil  between  Atwood's  Key  nnd  the  CrooLed 
Island. 

It  is  therefore  of  great  importnncethntyou  should  be  ncquninted  with  the  dnngers,  nnd 
also  witli  the  pinces  where  you  may  nnchoraljout  these  islands.  Jf,  in  going  for  CrooLcd 
Island  Passage,  the  wind  obliges  you  to  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  Crooked  Idiindsnnd 
the  FreiKih  Keys,  it  is  usual  to  sail  miil-chnnnel,  between  the  H<)gstio»  nnd  Cnsilo  lelnnil, 
from  which  they  are  dislnnt  11  leagues,  nnd  then  iinike  the  PInnas,  which  are  in  Int.  'a' 
3(5',  or  therenbout.  They  bear  N.  by  E.  from  the  Hogsties,  about  19  lenmies,  and  iioo 
leagues  to  the  enstwnrd  of  the  N.  E.  point  of  Crooked  Islands.  Vou  muy  sidi>ly  pass 
them  nnd  the  latter,  keeping  mid-chiinnel,  or  rnther  over  to  the  French  Keys  ;  for  m  ciUb 
of  necessity  you  may  anchor  on  the  west  side  of  the  largest  of  them. 

Passage  between  Crooked  Islands  and  Atwood'$  Key. 

Those  who  nre  obliged  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  French  Keys,  may  go  betwopn 
Crooked  Island  and  Atwood's  Key,  which  is  a  very  godd  passage,  5  leagues  wide.  Alter 
hnving  tlie  French  Keys  nbout  n  league  to  the  eastward  of  you,  make  your  course  N.  .\, 
K.,  n  little  eastwardly,  10  leagues;  you  will  then  get  sight  of  the  east  point  of  Atwood's 
Key,  which  you  must  not  approacli  nearer  than  4  or  5  miles  ;  but  having  brought  it  .S, 
W.  from  you,  2  or  3  leagues,  there  is  nothing  to  be  leared. 

It  is  necessary  to  observe  thnt  the  norths  in  this  passage  nre  very  dangerous  winds.anJ 
may  throw  you  upon  the  reefs,  which  bonier  all  the  banks  on  the  enst  side  of  the  Crook- 
ed Islanils;  tiiis  happened  to  the  French  innn-of  war,  the  Orox,  173(1,  which  whs  verv 
nenr  being  wrecked,  and  was  obiiaed  to  anchor  clo-oe  to  them  in  foni  grouml. 

BeiiiK  ill  sight  of  the  Frencli  Keys,  you  may  also,  nccording  to  circunistanres,  pnssto 
'the  southwnrd  of  them,  giving  them  a  berth  of  4  or  G  miles;  and.  having  cleart'd  them, 
■stnnd  away  to  the  northward,  to  sail  between  Atwood's  Key  and  Mayiigunnii,  which  is  a 
vfine  clear  passage. 
lite  Caycot.  The  CA  VCO.S. — '!  he  Caycos  are  nn  nssemblnge  of  severnl  islnnds  and  islets,  whici 
enclose  a  white  bank,  some  parts  of  which  are  very  shnllow,  und  others  tolenibK  deep, 
There  are  five  principal  islnnds,  viz.,  the  Fast  (,'aycos,  the  (irand  Cnyco.  the  NortiiCflvco, 
tlie  North-wester  Providence  Cayco,  and  the  Little  or  WestCayco:  these  Ibnnasenii- 
circle  from  the  enst  to  the  west,  round  by  the  north,  and  are  terminated  on  the  souli 
pnrt  by  a  great  bank,  on  which  there  nre  from  3  to  15  feet  water.  I 

The  northern  part  of  these  islands  is  bordered  with  a  white  shoal,  on  which  is  a  reef, 
extending  half  a  league  from  the  shore  :  at  the  N.  E.  part  the  white  slioal  extends  out- 
ward a  whole  league;  and,  nt  its  extremity,  is  n  reef  called  Basse  .St.   Philipp,  or  St. 
Philip's  Keef,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  with  violence.     At  a  cnble's  lengtli  to  ihe  nortk  | 
fliid  enst  of  this  shoni,  you  will  not  hnve  less  than  7  fathoms.     South  of  it  the  white  b 
torn   extends  to  the  south,  and  approaches  imperceptibly  towards  the  shore;  you  W  I 
4   or  6  fathoms  between   it   and  the  shore,  which   in  an  urgent  case  leaves  a  sun  I 
passage. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


309 


From  the  south  point  iif  the  Little  Cnyco,  a  chain  of  breultera  extends  to  the  east  three 
leBguea,  after  which  they  decrease,  trending  southward  and  we!)tward.  to  join  a  sandy  islet 
cnlled  French  Key.  This  is  low,  wirh  some  bushes  on  it.  and  bears  from  the  south  point 
of  Little  Cnyco  nearly  E.  S.  E.,  five  leagues.  The  reef  from  the  French  Key  stretches 
to  the  south  seven  and  a  half  leagues,  to  join  another  sandy  islet,  which  has  not  more 
tlinn  20  paces  extent,  and  is  entirely  drowned  at  high  water;  all  this  part  of  the  reef  is 
bold,  ftn<'>  n*  'he  water  breaks  pretty  strongly  upon  it,  you  readily  see  it;  but.  south  of 
tlie  sandy  islet,  there  are  no  breakers,  and  you  cannot  have  notice  of  the  edge  of  the  bank, 
but  by  the  whiteness  of  the  water. 

Frotn  this  snndy  islet  the  bank  sweeps  a  short  league  to  the  south,  then  to  the  S.  E. 
jix  |en£;ues,  whence  it  trenches  to  the  east  five  and  a  half  leagues,  and  N.  N.  W.  two  and 
a  half  leagues  to  abreast  of  the  southern  islets,  which  are  situated  more  than  a  league 
within  the  white  water. 

From  the  sandy  islets,  as  far  as  abreast  of  the  southern  ones,  the  bank  is  very  danger- 
ous; you  cannot  see  any  land,  and  come  suddenly  from  a  sea  without  bottom  into  2  or  3 
fathoms.  The  color  of  the  water  is  the  only  thing  that  can  warn  you  of  the  danger ;  and 
this  is  by  no  means  certain,  for  navigators,  accustomed  to  see  on  the  surface  of  the  water 
the  sliRdow  of  clouds,  which  sometimes  has  the  appearance  of  shnals,  are  oflen  lulled  in- 
to a  fatiil  security.  No  motive  then  ought  to  induce  you  to  approach  this  part  of  the 
bault.  and  you  will  do  right  to  keep  at  a  good  distance. 

If,  after  having  been  turned  to  windward  several  days  in  this  neighborhood,  you  have 
not  seen  the  land,  the  safest  way  is  never  to  cross  the  latitude  21°  in  the  night,  but  to 
wait  for  daylight ;  then,  should  you  perceive  any  change  in  the  water,  which  indicates 
white  grounds,  without  seeing  either  land  or  breakers,  you  may  be  sure  you  are  on  the 
western  side  ;  when  you  may  steer  N.  W.  i  W.  to  fetch  the  little  Cayco,  and  go  through 
the  passage  to  the  leeward  of  these  islands. 

Should  you  see  the  southern  islets  bearing  about  north  or  N.  W.,  you  may  stand  on 
upon  the  white  water,  in  from  7  to  12  fathoms;  then  make  a  tack  or  two  to  get  to  wind- 
word,  and  gn  through  the  Turk's  Island  passage  which  is  to  windward  of  the  Caycos. 

So  soon  as  you  see  the  southern  islets,  the  bank  is  no  longer  dangerous,  and  you  may 
goon  it  as  far  as  one  or  one  and  a  half  league  :  south  and  S.  W.  of  these  islands  you  will 
not  have  less  than  7  fathoms,  and  generally  from  9  to  11. 

The  channel  between  the  Caycos  and  Turk's  Islands  is  four  leagues  across  in  the  nar- 
rowest part :  it  is  a  good  passage,  and  without  any  danger  ;  you  may  come  within  half  a 
league  of  the  Caycos,  and  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  islets,  without  fear.  Through  this 
passage  you  may  turn  with  great  safety,  and  will  not  fool  the  current,  if  you  do  not  come 
within  one  and  a  half  league  of  the  shore. 

A  shoal  called  the  Swimmer  Bank,  is  on  the  western  side,  in  lat.  21°  05', long  71°  31'. 
This  shoal  was  discovered  some  years  since,  by  Mr.  Cooper,  master  of  the  vessel  Speed- 
well.   It  is  dangerous,  and  should  not  be  approached  without  great  caution. 

You  will  find  an  anchorage  on  the  white  shoals,  near  the  south  point  of  the  Great  Cay- 
co, which  may  shelterships  that  do  not  draw  more  than  15  or  Iti  feet ;  west  of  this  point 
there  is  a  fresh  water  lagoon. 

The  best  anchorage  for  small  vessels  is  to  the  west  of  the  North  Cayco,  near  the  small 
Island  of  Pines,  in  the  inlet  which  that  island  makes  with  Providence  Island.  Within 
the  reefs  that  border  that  part  of  the  coast,  lies  L'Anse  a  I'Eau,  (Watering  Bay)  where 
you  anchor  in  3  fathoms,  upon  a  white  bottom :  there  is  good  water,  and  it  is  the  water- 
ing-place of  the  Providenciers.  You  will  discover  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  by  coasting 
along  the  reef,  from  the  rounding  in  of  the  coast,  after  passing  the  west  point  of  the 
Three  Maries  and  Booby  Rocks.  When  you  perceive  a  groat  extent  of  white  water 
within  the  reef,  you  must  send  your  boat  to  find  the  channel,  and  moor  her  in  it.  making 
use  of  your  lead  ;  and.  if  you  want  to  get  in,  be  not  afraid  of  coming  near  the  reef. 
When  xou  are  once  within  the  reef,  you  may  let  go  your  anchor  in  3  fathoms ;  you  may 
go  farther  in,  by  towing  or  turning  with  caution  ;  the  entrance  is  not  more  than  half  a 
league  or  two  miles  from  the  shore. 

Atthe  N.  W,  point  of  Providence  Key,  the  reef  terminates.  There  is  anchorage  off 
the  coast  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  but  you  must  range  the  shore  pretty  close  to  be  on  the 
White  Shoals,  bringing  a  steep  hummock,  seen  a  quarter  of  a  league  inland,  to  bear  S. 
W. ;  then  you  will  see  the  shoal  recede  a  little  from  the  shore,  and  afford  a  large  space 
for  the  turning  of  the  ship.  Four  miles  south  of  the  N.  W.  point,  a  reef  commences 
from  the  coast,  running  S.  W.  westerly  2i  leagues  :  this  reef  is  terminated  by  a  small 
,  sandy  islet,  almost  under  water. 

From  this  sandy  islet  the  reef  runs  in  to  the  eastward,  and  afterwards  trenches  out  to 
I  join  the  north  part,  off  the  Little  Cayco,  which  is  surrounded  with  white  shoals. 

The  Little  Cayco  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  Providence  Cayco, 
I  which  is  of  a  middling  height,  and  of  a  white  color ;  you  may  range  along  the  N.  W.  part, 
Iclose  to  the  edge  of  the  white  grounds;  t'le  west  part  is  very  bold  to  the  south  point, 
Iwhere  you  may  anchor  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms,  on  white  bottom. 


■i' 
« 


mmm^ 


^^mm 


"tfrnm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Of  the  CnycoB  and  MRyagunna  PasRngeB,  Captain  LivingBtnn  haa  laid,  "  For  vegnelg 
bound  from  North  America  to  Jnmiiica,  I  considnr  the  Caycoo  I'nssHKe  preferal)lti  to  tlmt 
of  Turk's  Islands,  which  haa  been  commonly  used;  because,  if  you  can  only  digtiiictlv 
make  out  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Caycos,  and  bring  it  to  bear  E.,  or  K.  by  N..  hownvor 
dark  the  night  may  be,  you  may  run  safely,  steering  at  first  S.  W.  i  W.  by  conipugg,  5 
Jpagnes,  and  then  S.  by  W.  till  daylight;  by  which  course  you  run  no  risk,  eitlmr  jujin 
the  Caycos  Reefs  or  the  Heneagua;  and,  however  fast  your  vessel  njay  sail,  you  Imve 
more  distance  than  you  can  run  in  one  night  before  you  can  make  Hayti  or  St.  DuidIdvo 
liy  steering  this  coarse,  or  rather  these  courses,  you  also  avoid  all  danger  of  being  drai;. 
ged  by  a  lee  current  down  upon  the  coast  of  (Juba." 

The  Caycos  Passage  is  also  recommended  as  the  best  passage  for  ships  bound  from 
Cape  Haytien,  formerly  Cape  Franfois.  when  the  winds  are  not  steady  from  the  E.  S. 
E.  You  will  always  go  with  a  large  wind,  which  is  of  great  advantage ;  imd  will  nvoij 
all  the  white  grounds  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  Caycos,  which  it  has  been  custoiniiry  to  nmke. 
This  custom  of  coming  to  the  white  grounds  is  very  dangerous;  but  there  is  no  risk  Id 
making  the  land  some  leagues  to  Reward  of  rhe  Little  Caycu. 

In  leavingthe  cape,  you  must  steer  a  N.  by  W.  course  ;  and  after  having  tinia  run  25 
leagues,  you  will  find  yourself  3 j  leagues  S.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayoo;  then  you  niiiy  hm\ 
your  wind,  first  as  high  as  north  only,  on  account  of  the  reefs  olf  Sandy  Key,  wliidi  lie 
to  the  north  of  Little  Cnyco;  after  which  you  may  steer  N.  by  E.  6  or  6  leagues,  whin 
you  may  haul  up  N.  E.,  or  continue  to  steer  north,  without  auy  fear.  Having  run  lo  or 
12  leagues  on  this  course,  you  will  be  out  of  the  passage. 

If,  when  you  are  two  leagues  8.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayeo,  the  winds  do  not  permit  vou 
to  steer  N.  by  E.,  or  to  make  a  good  north  course,  after  having  run  13  It-ngutts,  witlidnt 
getting  sight  of  Mayaguana,  the  best  way,  if  night  comes  on,  is  to  tack  and  stand  to  the 
8.  E.  3  or  4  leagues;  then  tack  again  to  the  north,  and  you  will  weather,  by  3  uf  4 
leagues,  the  breakers  off  the  east  point  of  Mayaguana. 

If,  when  you  are  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  Little  Cayco  two  or  three  leagues,  and  the  wind 
will  not  suffer  j'ou  to  lay  north,  you  must  not  attempt  to  go  to  windward  of  Miiyngunnn 
but  must  fetch  the  channel  between  it  and  the  French  Keys.  Vou  steer  fur  i.  N,  W. 
i  N.  Having  run  18  leagues,  you  will  come  in  sight  of  the  S.  W.  point  of  Miiyiiguima, 
which  ought  to  be  north  of  you,  two  leagues  distanf ;  you  do  not  run  any  risk  in  ii|i|iro(K'b- 
ing  this  point,  which  is  safe.     A  small  white  extends  from  it,  with  three  fatbums 

water  on  it  almost  close  to  the  shore. 

When  you  have  doubled  the  west  end  of  Mayaguana,  so  as  to  bring  it  to  bear  east,  you 
may,  if  the  wind  permits,  steer  N.  In  that  case  you  will  pass  4  or  5  leagues  to  the  wind- 
ward of  Atwood's  Key  ;  but  if  your  course  is  not  better  than  N.  by  W.,  after  having  run 
on  12  or  13  leagues,  and  the  night  corneson  before  you  can  see  that  island,  iucl<  nnd 
stand  on  for  5  or  6  leagues.  Tlien,  if  you  can  make  good  a  N.  by  W.  course  on  the 
other  *ack,  you  will  weather  the  eastern  breakers  of  Atwood's  Key,  at  about :!  leagues. 
81iould  you  be  2  leagues  from  the  west  point  of  Mayaguana,  and  the  wind  will  piTinit 
you  to  nuike  a  course  only  N.  N.  W..  after  having  run  thus  fi  leagues,  you  will  gee  the 
French  Keys,  bearing  nearly  W.  N.  W.,  2  leagues.  You  may  pass  to  windwordor  to 
leeward  of  them,  as  the  wind  may  admit.  When  you  are  2  leagues  N.  N.  W.,  or  N, 
W.  by  N.  from  them,  upon  running  in  that  direction  12  or  13  leagues, you  willheout 
of  the  passage.  You  nmst  not  go  in  the  least  to  the  northward  of  this  course,  ns  the 
breakers  olf  the  west  pointof  Atwood's  Key  bear  nearly  N.  N.  W.  from  the  westernmost 
of  the  French  Keys. 

The  French  Keys  are  very  low ;  thoy  bear  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mayapunim  N.  \Y. 
i  N.,  8  leagues.  You  may  go  ])retty  close  on  the  east,  north,  atid  south  sides;  the  white 
bottom  which  encloses  them  being  pretty  steep.  On  the  N.  W.  of  the  Inrge  isliinci,  ihe 
reef  running  out  some  little  way,  it  is  necessary  to  give  it  a  goo<l  berth.  Vou  iiiiiyan. 
chor  in  the  S.  W.  part  on  the  white  bottom,  but  very  close  to  the  shore.  'Jhere  is  a 
small  lagoon  of  fresh  water,  supplied  entirely  by  the  rain.  The  isles  have  beeo  previ- 
ously  described. 

On  leaving  Cape  Haytien,  you  will  generally  find  the  wind  at  S.  E.  or  F..  .S.  E.,  and 
near  the  shore  the  current  runs  to  windward  ;  these  are  two  powerful  induceineiitg  to  en- 
gage you  to  steer  N.  E.,  or  N.  N.  E.,  fo,  the  Turk's  Island  Passage ;  but,  at  about  I'lor 
II  o'clock,  the  wind  generally  chops  round  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  Being  then  o  or 
6  leagues  from  the  coast,  and  the  current  no  longer  felt,  you  would  necessarily  make  the 
white  grounds  to  the  southward  of  the  Caycos.  This  circumstance  has  ciuised  many 
Bhi|)wrecks,  merely  from  the  eagerness  of  going  20  leagues  to  windward,  in  a  voyugeuf 
perhaps  1500  leagues.  Under  these  circumstances,  I  would  advise  mariuurs  from  the 
cape  to  steer  at  once  for  the  Little  Cayco. 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


311 


Additional  Remarks  on  the  fJnatts,  Met,  Sft.,  which  form  the  Windward  Pas$age»t,  by 
ieveral  French  and   English  Navigators. 

CAYCOS  PASS  AOE,  <kc.,  by  Cnpfnin  Henter.— After  hiivinj5clpnri»iltlio  oast  end  of   Caycos  Pas- 
Jnninicn.  Bnyg  tlio  Ciiptiiin,  I  would   endeavor  to  get  to  the  enfltwnrd  ax  fimt  iis  |)ua9ible,    sage. 
tiikins:  every  advantage  of  wind.     In  so  doing,  wlien  advanced  to  Cape  Niclioliis,  I  would 
rircfiT  the  beatinn;  up  as  hijfh  as  the  Island  of  Tortue.  (or  Tortuga,  or  Turtle  Inland)  and 
take  niy  departure  for  the  Caycos  PaKsage,  thinking  it  leas  tedious  and  dilficult  than  the 
iw^siige  by  Crooked  Ixland. 

From  the  Mido  to  the  west  ond  of  Tortue,  in  latitude  20°  5'  20",  the  course  is  N.  E. 
\W  K.,  about  11  leagues.  It  ia  all  n  bold  clear  shore,  giving  it  2  or  3  milea  berth.  The 
^.  K.  part  is  foul  3  or  4  miles,  but  from  that  part  down  to  the  west  end  it  is  bold  ;  and 
the  west  ond  ia  as  nteep  as  n  house-ai'le.  When  the  high  hill,  which  is  seen  over  Poiut 
Pilix,  bears  S.  W.  by  K,,  then  the  east  end  of  the  island  is  between  yon  and  it. 

From  otfthe  midillo  ot  the  Island  Tortue,  to  go  between  Honoagua  ami  the  Caycos, 
lake  your  departure  in  the  evening,  steering  north  bv  compass,  taking  cure  not  to  run 
mnre  than  18  leagues  at  the  most  before  daylight,  with  the  distance  ort"  from  it  includtid, 
(ttakingyour  departure;  when,  if  you  See  nothing  of  the  east  end  oftireiit  Ileneagua, 
ciintiniie  your  course  for  7  or  8  leagues,  and  you  will  not  fail  of  seeing  the  Little  Caycos, 
or  Little  Honeagua. 

Yon  may  borrow  near  to  the  Caycos,  and  haul  your  wind  to  N.  E.,  which  will  clear 
yiiu  of  Mayaguana  and  its  reef,  th«  outer  point  of  which  lies  in  latitude  2'2"  20',  then  you 
are  in  the  open  ocean,  clear  of  every  thing. 

If  you  finti  a  leeward  current  or  a  scant  wind,  between  Heneagua  and  the  West  Cny- 
cn,  80  that  you  cannot  weather  Mayaguana  and  its  reef,  you  may  bjar  up  and  sail  under 
the  lee  or  west  end  of  Mayaguana,  there  beifig  no  danger  hut  what  you  miiy  see,  to  sail 
between  Mayaguana  and  the  French  Keys,  which  is  a  wide  and  fair  ohamiol.  Then 
vdU  liHUl  your  wind  to  windward  of  Atwood's  Key,  which  lies  in  latitude  of  •J:P  11'.  In 
joins  through  either  of  these  passages,  there  i  a  greater  advantage  gained,  with  less 
trniihle,  and  sooner,  than  by  Crooked  Island  Passage.  Though  I  think  that,  in  time  of 
wiir,  it  would  be  very  tedious  and  difficult  to  attempt  any  of  them  with  a  convoy;  not 
only  because  you  are  infallibly  exposed  to  he  annoyed  by  cruisers  and  privateers,  but 
nj-io  beciiuse  of  the  almost  itnposBibility  of  keeping  a  number  of  vesnels  togftlier  in 
tiiPSB  narrow  channels.  As  for  the  Turk's  Island  Passage,  in  sailing  to  the  norlliwnrd, 
I  would  not  offer  to  mention  it.  looking  upon  it  to  be  both  tedious  and  hii/.ardous:  but 
incoming  from  the  northward,  it  is,  in   my  opinion,  a  very  easy,  safe,  and  expeditious 


Caycos,  S(t..  translated  from  the  French. 

The  Little  Cayco  extends  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  .S.  W.,  about  7  milea,  being  its  whole 
length.  You  may  anchor  all  along  the  western  side,  there  being  4  or  5  fathoms  water 
dose  to  the  land;  but  it  is  hard  bottom,  and  too  near  the  shore.  At  thu  N.  E.  |)()int 
Isnimnk  of  rocks,  extending  to  the  N.  E.  near  a  mile,  on  which  the  sen  breaks  ;  there  are 
2  Hnd  ::  fathoms  close  to  it. 

The  length  of  the  Little  Cayco  has  been  measured  in  a  boat  in  a  fresh  breeze,  and 
smooth  water,  the  log  hove  frequently,  and  there  was  not  any  difference  in  the  going 
ami  coining  back,  therefore  it  ia  probably  very  exact.  This  island  is  of  low  land,  whose 
border  is  of  sharp  stones,  which  resound  like  a  bell ;  it  is  the  worst  ground  which  can  be 
seen;  there  are  neither  salt-pits,  savannahs,  nor  freshwater.  On  the  north  aide,  about 
3flfl  puces  from  the  shore,  there  j^^row  in  the  sand  a  few  lataniers,  which  always  denote  u 
bad  ground  :  the  iidand  parts  are  covered  with  hushes.  There  are  some  ponds  with 
brackish  water;  and,  as  rain  ia  not  uncommon  here,  people  who  have  the  misfortune 
to  he  cast  away  on  this  isle,  may  obtain  fresh  water. 

By  good  observations,  the  latitude  of  the  S.  W.  point  is  21°  ,36'.  longitude  72°  26'; 
you  may  run  along  the  south  side,  very  close  to  it.  upon  the  White  Bank,  in  ;>  or  6  fnth- 
onis,  and  no  reef.  When  that  point  I)ear8  north,  you  will  have  a  full  view  of  all  the  Cay- 
cos Bunk.  This  ellow  is  a  shelter  against  the  north,  for  there  are  5  or  G  fathoms  of  wa- 
ter close  to  the  breakers,  which  are  very  near  the  land. 

Although  the  westside  of  the  Little  Cayco  is  quite  clear  of  rocks,  and  there  are  f!  or  7 
fathoms  within  musket  shot  of  the  shore,  so  that  you  may  anchor  there  ;  yet  the  best  place 
to  unchor  (and  which  is  moat  known)  is  under  the  N.  W.  point,  rather  within  it,  in  8  fath- 
oms, sandy  bottom  :  there  you  are  shehered  from  easterly  breezes.  It  is  prudent,  how- 
ever, to  have  another  anchor  S.  by  W.,  in  14  fathoms,  clear  ground  :  this  precaution  will 
secure  you  against  a  auddeo  westerly  wind  ;  and  by  that,  in  case  it  ahould  continue,  you 
get  easier  under  way. 


-rtm^^ 


312 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Cavue  Cuve. 


The  north  Kido  of  the  Little  CByco  is  covered  hy  a  reef.  beKmninfE  off  tho  N.  W.  point 
and  stretching  n»  fur  ns  the  (Jrent  Ciiycu.  This  reel'  is  tlie  only  difficulty  in  tho  pnHHnue 
between.  It  is  neitrly  4  leagues  from  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Little  ('iiyco  to  thi*  N.  W. 
point  of  the  (trciit  Cayco,  and  the  reef  extends  along  that  H|)ai-e  ;  that  is,  nn  far  ti8  the 
wcKtern  point  of  the  Great  Cayco,  which  is  about  2^  miles  diHtant  from  the  N.  W.  iioint 
of  the  island.  To  the  southward  of  the  lust  point  is  Canoe  Cove,  (L'Aimit  uu  Ciiiiot  \ 
the  only  good  anchornge  in  this  western  part,  of  which  we  shall  Hpeak  horcafitir. 

On  the  west  side  of  the  reef  there  is  a  little  key,  called  Sand  Key,  bciirini:  niirtli-wost- 
erly  from  the  cant  part  of  the  Little  Cayco.  It  is  very  low,  and  has  a  ro»'f  on  iin  ||„f(i, 
part.  Many  ships  have  been  lost  on  it,  by  its  not  having  been  laid  down  in  tint  ciuirts- 
for,  after  their  running  along  the  west  side  of  the  We^t  Cayco,  they  have  hunjttil  tu  ilij 
eastward  for  the  Providence  Cayco:  whereas,  when  you  have  run  along  tlio  t'oriiirnilidut 
a  It-ague,  you  should  make  a  N.  by  W.  course,  to  give  a  berth  to  the  Little  Koy,  and  ilm 
reef  which  stretch^  to  the  northward  of  it. 

To  the  southward  of  the  islet,  between  that  and  the  reef,  is  a  passage  of  about  1  j  injle 
to  the  bank.  Without  the  islets  are  10,  8,  and  ti  fathoms;  in  the  middle  4  fathunis,  und 
within  it,  3  ;  but  then  you  immediately  come  into  2  fathoms. 

From  Sandy  Key  the  reef  runs  N.  N.  E.,  'J  leagues,  being  bordered  with  wliitu  wnter 
on  which  yon  have  lU  fathoms,  within  musket  shot  of  the  reef  that  joins  the  N.  W.  imrt 
of  the  Groat  Ciiyco,  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Canoe  Cove. 

It  hns  hiippened  that  ships  hitendhig  to  go  through  the  Caycos  Passage  have  miido 
Little  Henoagua,  either  by  inattention  or  from  the  currents.  To  make  suro  of  hoiim 
far  enough  to  the  windward,  when  bound  from  Cape  Ilaytien,  you  should  uiiikn  your 
course  good  N.,  or  N.  by  E.,  25  or  26  loagues,  and  you  will  soo  tlio  white  wiitiM-  on  ijip 
banks,  which  you  may  run  along  the  distance  of  a  league,  without  fttar.  On  iIih  west- 
ern edge  of  the  bank  is  the  islet  called  Sandy  Key,  which  you  nniy  approai^li  wiijiin  ilmt 
distance;  then  make  a  N.  W.  course,  and  4  leagues  from  Sandy  Key  you  wiilBfo  Kicmii 
Key;  when  the  latter  is  north  from  you,  thence  steer  VV.  by  N.  V>i  liagucs,  wliieii  will 
bring  you  south  from  the  little  Cayco  ;  and  being  past  this,  you  are  to  make  a  N.,  or  N, 
by  E.  course,  as  before  directed. 

According  to  the  survey,  made  with  great  care,  the  white  bank  and  the  reef  continue 
between  the  French  Key  and  the  Littio  Cayco.  You  naiy  run  along  them  very  noiir.ia 
lU  fathoms,  and  you  will  see  the  openings  in  the  reef,  throu<;li  which  small  vobstls  gu  iu 
upon  the  bank. 

The  reef  which  borders  the  White  Hank,  fimi  the  Little  Cayco  to  French  Key,  he. 
gins  one  league  east  from  the  former,  and  it  always  breaks.  You  nniy  stuml  very  iieiir 
it  coming  from  st-a;  but  if  you  are  upon  the  bank,  you  mu.-^t  take  great  cart<,  for  liidt' n 
mile  within  you  will  tind  but  3  fathoms  water;  and  in  getting  nearer  it  sluiiileiiii  vi-iv 
quickly.  Here  is  a  great  deal  of  swell,  it  being  o])en  to  the  breezes.  The  bottom  is  siiiid, 
and  good  holding  ground. 

Particular  Observations  on  the  Little  Cayco,  Sfc.,fr(jm  the  Journal  of  the  Emerald, 

"Being  at  noon,  with  the  Hope,  a  small  vessel,  off  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  Little  orWpst 
Cayco,  a  mile  from  it,  we  ran  along  the  west  side  at  that  distance,  and  then  niiide  tlio 
Hopo  anchor  in  7  fathoms,  hard  sand,  within  hall' a  cable's  Ittngth  of  the  N.  W.  point. 
Seeing  that  the  vess«'l  drove,  llie  bank  being  very  steep  and  rnirrow,  and  the  weallicr  in- 
clined to  he  squally,  we  preferred  keeping  under  sail,  and  nuide  several  trips,  iii'i'|iiiii; 
wt'll  in  with  the  land,  at  one  mile  distance.  Along  the  reef,  on  the  west  siile,  wo  lamleii 
very  easily  in  some  hollow  places,  filled  with  sand,  and  made  hy  the  sea  in  liie  .siiiilv 
stones  which  compose  the  island.  Ojiposite  these  holes,  at  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
from  the  N.  W.  j)oint,  is  the  best  anchoring. 

"  The  west  side  of  the  Little  Cayco  runs  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.,  about  5  miles  and  a 
half.  On  this  side  is  the  anchorage,  sheltered  front  the  trade  winds  ;  nean-r  llm  iiurili 
part,  (which  is  nothing  hut  a  steep  border  of  sand.)  at  a  cable's  hMigth.  yon  iiiiciioi-at 
about  a  pistol  shot  from  the  shore,  in  Bfiilhoms;  at  two  ships' length  there  are  1  j  t'atliiiiiii<; 
and  at  half  a  cable's  length  farther,  there  was  no  ground  under  the  ship.  It'  yuii 
want  to  stay  there,  the  best  way  will  be  to  have  the  outer  anchor  in  l/j  fnlliiaiis  wuier, 
and  to  cany  another  on  shore.  There  is  noswell  with  the  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  S.  E.  breezes, 
liowever  hard  thej'  may  blow." 

CANOE  COVE. — This  little  bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  Providence  Cayco,  and  iiiiiy 
be  of  great  use,  as  there  is  water  enough  for  all  sorts  of  ships,  sheltered  from  Ilic  imitlis, 
which  you  should  always  guai'd  against  in  this  |)assage.  'i'lio  largest  ships  niiiy  andiur 
in  6  or  7  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom,  looking  out  for  a  clear  grounil,  and  liere  and  tiiere 
you  will  tind  it  rocky.  You  are  sheltered  from  the  N.  to  the  E.,  and  to  the  S.  K.  In  S. 
The  anchoring  is  within  the  west  point,  which  you  bring  to  bear  Ts.,  faking  erne  nut  to 
come  near  the  reef,  which  runs  round  tl)is  point  for  a  quarter  of  a  league  :  the  reef  cnilj 
there,  and  does  lajt  begin  again  till  near  two  miles  farther  tu  leeward  ;  then  it  must  beiii  S. 
by  W.  from  you. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


319 


From  the  N.  W.  point  oF  tho  Little  Ciiyco  to  this  cove,  is  N.  N.  W.,  3i  lomtues ;  but 
you  inuDt  nitike  h  more  wuaterjy  course,  in  order  to  uvuid  tho  reef  and  the  Little  Key 
•IrHiidy  spoknn  of. 

WATKRINO  BAY  nnd  PINE'S  KEY— To  the  N.  E.  of  the  N.  W.  point  of  Pro-    Watering 
fidtincn  Ciiyeo  tho  coast  formB  a  bight,  tlio  two  poinia  of  which  uro  5  leiigueii  asunder;    Bay  ana 
betwBf'n  tlioni  is  Wiitering  lliiy  and  I'ino's  Kny.  Pine'i  Key. 

At  this  anchorage  you  ure  shtdtored  from  the  N.  E.  to  the  S.  S.  W.,  passing  by  the 

eiDt' 

Tiio  greatest  ndvantago  of  Pine's  Key  is  n  great  lagoon  of  frenh  water,  sufficient  for  50 
gliinn:  It  is  very  drinkulilo,  unii  not  fur  from  the  l)each. 

The  bottom  is  too  while  nour  the  land  and  in  thi<  cove  for  you  to  catch  large  fish  with  a 
geinii ;  but  you  must  go  in  a  boat  on  the  edge  of  tho  reef  without ;  and  you  will  succeed 
itijl  Ijt'lter.  if  you  sail  over  with  vour  lines  alloat. 

Kroin  the  eiist  part  of  Pine's  Key  you  may  descry  all  tho  islands  and  keys,  which  are 
jciiltei'od  within  the  Cayco,  from  N.to  S.  E. 

The  I'liilowing  remarks  on  the  Caycos,  lie,  have  boen  wiiUen  by  Capt.  Livingston  : 

"Tlie  whole  of  the  north  side  of  the  Caycos  is  bounled  by  a  reef,  through  which, 
though  there  are  various  openings,  they  ought  not  to  bo  uttompted  by  a  stranger  without 
apiiut.  Vessels  ought  not  to  near  the  laiiil  within  a  leaguu  a.<d  a  half,  in  running  down 
to  the  norlhward  of  the  Caycos.  Watering  Buy  is  extremely  dangerous,  and  is  most 
jiicorreclly  laid  down  in  every  chart  I  have  seen.  The  Providence  Caycos  ore  bordered 
to  the  OHstwMrd,and  northward,  and  westward,  by  as  dangerous  reefs  as  1  oversaw;  among 
which,  if  a  vessel  once  gets  em>>!:yed,  it  is  next  to  impossible  that  she  can  escape.  The 
Ameiican  sioopof-war  Chippewa,  the  ship  Aimwell,  of  London,  and  Brig  Messenger, 
Cuiiiblcy.  were  all  lost  upon  these  reefs  in  181U,  within  a  few  weeks  of  eacrh  other  ;  and 
two  days  afier  the  Aimwell  was  lost,  a  vessel  narrowly  escaped  the  same  fate  :  to  this  I 
wilt)  nil  eye  witness,  as  I  oiiserved  th.i  Aimwell  on  shore  before  darK,  and  laid  to  all  night, 
with  the  view  of  rendering  her  assistance;  and  when  daylight  came,  I  perceived  a  brig- 
aiitiiio  complet(dy  embayed  ;  and  those  on  board  of  her  seemed  to  discover  their  error, 
and,  |.nifiting  by  the  wind's  being  at  the  time  off  shore,  escaped. 

•'After  rounding  tho  N.  W.  point  of  the  Caycos,  nnd  bound  to  the  southward  through 
the  passage,  having  brought  the  N.  W.  point  to  bear  E.,  or  E.  by  N.,you  iitay  run  safely 
erea  in  the  darkest  night,  steering  at  first  S.  W.  j  W.,  by  compass,  5  leagues,  and  then 
S.  by  W.  till  daylight.  By  these  courses  you  will  clear  the  elbow  reef  otf  Sandy  Key, 
between  tlie  Providenciers  and  Little  Caycos,  and,  at  tho  same  time,  keep  sufficiently 
to  windward  of  the  Heneagua  and  Bishop's  Slioul." 

The  Caycos  are  connected  by  a  reef  of  coral  rocks,  nnd  there  is  no  dnngtir  of  thorn  in 
the  day,  as  tho  white  water  shows  itself.  Vessels  making  the  land  about  dark  should 
never  attempt  to  run  through  this  passage  in  tho  night,  unless  sure  of  their  situation. 

EAST  CAYCOS.— Cockburn  Harbor  is  in  latitude  21°  19'  N.,  longitude  71°  27'  30".    East  Caycos. 
The  Harbor  is  one  mile  in  depth,  and    the    course,   is    N.  W.,  when  the  harbor  ia 
opt-n. 

High  water  at  7  o'clock.     Tide  rises  three  feet.     Depth  of  water  about  14  feet.  High  water. 

TUKK'S  LSLAND  PASSAGE.— There  are  three  principal  islands.  Grand  Turk,    Turk'tM- 
Salt  Key,  and  Sandy  Key,  which  they  always  make  who  go  through  the  passage.  andPatsage. 

The  western  side  of  those  islands  is  bold,  and  they  may  be  approached  very  near,  al- 
though there  is  a  white  shoal,  with  many  rocky  spots,  which  extends  about  a  quarter  of  a 
leajjue  from  the  shore. 

You  may  anchor  in  two  places  off  tho  Grand  Turk  :  one  towards  the  middle  of  the 
ishind,  opposite  the  huts,  the  other  olf  the  south  part  of  the  island  ;  but  neither  of  thoin 
c;iii  be  considered  as  good.  You  let  go  your  anchor  as  soon  as  you  are  on  the  white 
ground,  and  take  care  to  find  out  a  clear  bottom,  as,  in  some  places,  the  points  of  rocka 
rise  to  within  8  or  10  feet.  After  you  luive  let  go  yoor  anchor,  and  veered  to  half  a  cable 
under  your  stern,  you  will  not  get  any  ground.  Off  the  south  part  of  the  island  the  an- 
chonigo  is  of  more  extent,  and  you  will  tind.  on  the  point  near  which  you  anchor,  a  la- 
guou  of  water  that  may  sei-vo  for  cattle.  The  white  shoal  S.  W.  of  Sundy  Key  de- 
creiises  gradually  to  5  fathoms,  half  a  league  from  the  shore. 

Eiist  of  these  islands  are  several  islets,  which  are  connected  by  white  grounds,  with 
very  little  water  on  them  :  they  are  bold  on  the  east  side,  and  surrounded  with  a  white 
ground  that  extends  to  tha  southward  and  S.  \V. 

TURK'S  ISLAND  PASSAGE.— This  passage  is  very  short  and  good:  but  you 
cunnot  always  be  sure  of  fetching  it  from  Cape  Huytien.  You  ought  to  steer  N.  E.  i 
K.,  luid  the  wind  often  will  not  admit  running  so  much  to  the  eastward  ;  it  is  therefore 
reuoininended,  in  leaving  the  cape,  to  keep  the  wind  as  close  as  you  can,  with  the  early 
breeze,  and  tack  so  as  to  fetch  tho  Grange  before  night.  You  will  generally  bring  it  to 
beiir  S.  K.,  or  S.  S.  E.  If  the  ship  sails  well,  or  has  been  favored  by  the  breeze,  you 
inny  bring  it  to  bear  S.,  whence,  making  good  a  N.  N.  E.  course,  you  need  not  tack  until 
you  have  run  18  or  19  leagues.     If  your  last  course  should  nut  have  been  bettor  thuu  N. 


IJ"»'  i'"f 


314 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Sand  Key. 


Endymion 
Shaal. 
The  Swim- 
mer, 


by  E.  or  N.,  you  must  be  particularly  cautious  not  to  pass  the  latitude  of  21°.  In  th,, 
night,  when  you  think  you  are  near  that  latitude,  be  sure  to  sound;  and  the  mninpnt  yuu 
have  bottom,  about  ship  and  stand  the  other  way  till  morning!;,  when  you  may  again  tnck 
and  fetch  to  the  windward  of  the  white  shoals  of  the  Cayeos. 

The  white  bottom  is  '/ery  readily  seen  :  you  may  run  on  the  edge  of  the  hanit  to  the 
southward  of  the  Southern  Keys  for  a  league,  or  perhaps  a  league  and  a  half,  in  from  7 
to  14  fathoms  ;  but  farther  on  tlibre  are  rocks,  with  threo  fathoms,  at  most,  on  them.  In 
the  day  time  you  may  stand  on  to  the  northward,  (supposing  that  you  have  not  seen  the 
land,)  nndyoH  will  desfiy  the  Southern  Keys  of  the  Cayeos  ;  or,  if  further  to  the  wind- 
ward,  Sandy  Key.  You  must  he  careful  not  to  go  to  leeward  of  the  white  shoiils  which 
extend  south  of  a  small  tandy  islet,  which  is  entirely  drowned  at  high  water.  It  is  very 
didicult  to  be  seen,  and  yoii!*  lead  even  cannot  give  you  warning,  as  you  fall  suddenly  into 
three  fathoms. 

To  the  south-westward  of  Sand  Key  lies  the  Endymion  Reef  or  shoal,  which  ig  de- 
Bcribed  below. 

When  you  have  Sand  Key  bearing  E.,  at  the  distance  of  2,  3,  or  4  leagues,  steering  N. 
by  E.,  or  N.  N.  E.,  8  or  10  leagues,  will  entirely  clear  you  of  the  passage.  In  gdinj 
th'ough,  keep  the  Turk's  Island  side  on  board,  in  order  to  avoid  the  Reefs  of  St.  Philip, 
wliich  extend  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  tho  Grand  Cayco, 

Sand  Key  is  one  mile  long,  and,  '.n  fine  weather,  may  be  seen  3  leagues  off;  when  you 
ai'e  to  the  southward  of  it  you  wouhi  take  it  for  two  islands,  its  middle  part  beina;  a  low 
drowned  land.  On  the  west  side  are  7  or  P  fixthoms,  upon  the  bank  which  bordui's  the 
key,  at  the  distance  of  3  leagues,  and  joins  u  reef  that  extends  a  mile  from  the  noith 
point  of  it. 

The  south  point  has,  at  about  two  cables'  length,  three  rocks  close  to  each  other,  by 
which  't  may  be  known:  Lut,  to  have  them  open  and  clear  of  the  iand,  you  must  not  be 
far  off,  nor  bring  them  to  the  eastward  of  N.  K. 

The  most  certain  mark  by  which  you  may  know  Sand  Key,  is  that  from  the  N,  E,iind 
the  VV.  N.  W. ;  you  will  see  no  othei-  island,  and  the  sand  upon  it  is  quite  white  in  ilm 
sun.  The  anchorage  is  only  known  by  the  white  water,  from  C  to  4  fiithoitis  within 
swivle  shot  of  it;  but  ships  which  draw  miirii  water  nmst  anchor  about  half  a  miliMiir, 
brin'^ing  the  south  point  to  bear  S.  E.,  and  the  middle  of  it  from  E.  to  E.  by  N,;  tlis 
north  rocks  there  cover  you  as  far  as  N.  N.  E.,  and  you  may  easily  get  under  Wiiy  with 
any  wind,  as  the  norths,  which  are  most  to  be  feared,  blow  oidy  along  the  (;oast,  m  tliiit 
the  west  side  may  be  reckcmcd  a  good  roadstead.  A  ship  which  may,  by  some  iiccidput, 
have  been  prevented  from  sailing  through  the  passage,  would  find  a  good  shelter  lieir, 
and  miiihl,  without  difticuliy,  wait  for  a  more  favorable  wind.  Tim  reef  on  the  north 
part  of  the  key  stretches  from  it  north  a  little  westerly,  a  long  mile,  when  it  makes  a  little 
hook  to  the  S.  \V.,  but  breaks  every  where,  and  within  pistol  shot  there  are  8  futlionis; 
though  you  must  not  como  so  near  on  the  other  jiarts  of  the  island,  for  here  and  tiifie 
are  some  rocks,  which  have  otdy  2  fathotns  water  upon  them.  The  east  side  has  high 
breakers  quite  to  tho  shf)re. 

Sand  Key  is  low  and  barren,  being  burnt  by  the  sun,  and  continually  beaten  by  the 
winds  and  the  S(>n  :  it  prorhices  some  smtdl  buslies  only. 

SAND  KKY. — Sand  Key  may  be  seen  aboui  3  leH};ues  off:  it  makes  at  first  Hket'irps 
islands,  beini;  formed  of  two  little  hillocks  and  a  roeU,  known  by  the  name  of  Split  Kock, 
thouuh  there  is  wale'  knee-deep  between  it  and  the  key.  This  rock  serves  to  (listini;(iish 
Sand  Key.  over  which  it  is  proiiable  that  the  sea  breaks  in  all  the  noiths,  and  othi'r  iin- 
petuous  winds,  for  it  is  very  low  ;  you  may  easily  land  upon  it  under  the  hillock,  wlieiv 
there  was  formerly  a  pyramid. 

This  key  ir  scarcely  more  than  1300  geometrical  paces  (of  5  feet  each)  long.  From 
tho  south  end  the  reef  runs  of!"  three-quarters  of  a  mile  .''?.  ar)d  S,  by  \V.,  at  the  end  of 
which  are  three  rocks,  wliich  always  l)reak  and  show  themselves.  The  hilloek  on  the 
south  part  is  joined  to  that  nf  tho  middle  part  by  a  low  land,  which  looks  like  a  S!ivaiiii;ih: 
ntid  troiii  that  to  flm  west  puirit,  th><  land  is  also  very  low  and  I'vtm  ;  you  cannot  himl  lieiv, 
nor  must  you  anchor  near  this  part,  but  towards  the  south,  wliere  all  tlii^  dan i^ers  show 
thems(!lves.  From  the  N.  W.  p«>oit  is  a  reef  to  the  N.  by  W.  North  N.W.,  inca-etliniii 
miles,  and  about  a  swivel  shot  from  the  end  of  this  reef,  is  a  large  rock,  always  ahovc  v li- 
ter;  three  rjr.irters  of  a  mi--  from  w+hcIi  you  have  (i  fathoms,  rocky  ground.  Vou  (mii- 
not  land  at  the  east  side,  wtuch  is  sitns/Minded  with  rocks.  The  anchorage  may  lie  inmln 
very  convenient,  by  carrying  an  an(^!»Hir,  with  two  or  three  hawsers,  to  the  westward, iiml 
then  you  would  clear  the  islimd  with  every  wind.  H'.t  in  the  months  of  May  and  .liiiie, 
you  had  r)i'tt«»r  anchor  about  a  mife,  nr  a  mite  and  a  half  off,  to  be  less  exposed  to  the  swell 
sent  in  liy  the  S.  E.  bree/.e.  whu-h  is  genenilly  violent. 

the' ENDYMION  .^H(>\L   has  on  it  four  feet  water,  and  boars  S.  S.  W.  i  W, 
6^  m\{f*  friuo  (treat  Sand  Key. 

TIIK  SWlM.MEll.  on  the  S   E.  Elbow  of  the  Cayeos  Bank,  has  but  7  fectwateron 
it,  and  bears  from  the  Endymion  Shoal  W.  )  S.,  14  miles  distant. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


316 


South-west  of  SHody  Key  is  a  white  shoal,  extending  about  24  miles  from  shore,  on 
,fliich  miiy  be  found  fiDin  7  to  9  fiithoins. 

SALT  KKV,  orthe  LITTLK  TURK.— When  you  leave  Sand  Key,  and  steer  for 
Salt  K<!y,  you  mnut  ttike  u  north  course  along  the  reef,  which  runs  off  more  than  one 
^iile;  on  flifSH  b()arin<;9  fnnn  you,  you  come  almost  within  a  stone's  throw  of  it;  for  at 
lliiit  distance,  rht're  are  8  fathoms.  Haviny  gotten  round  the  head  of  it.  you  are  to  make 
aN.  N.  E.  course  to  the  Little  Turk,  which  you  may  then  see:  and  you  will  lose  the 
soundings  so  soon  as  jou  have  brought  the  reef  anylliing  to  the  southward  of  you.  It  is 
two  leagues  from  the  reef  to  tiie  N.  W.  point  of  the  Salt  key,  near  which  you  may  an- 
jlior;  but  the  bunk  is  very  steep  :  for  when  your  anchor  is  gone  in  five  fathoms,  within 
iiiusitPt  shot  of  the  shore,  you  will  find  tiie  ship  in  '<J0  fathoms,  and  no  ground  a  very  littlo 
\my  astern.  You  bring  one  point  N.  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  by  N..  and  the  other  |)oint  S.  by 
\V.,  or  S.  S.  W. ;  you  must  look  for  clear  ground,  or  you  will  have  your  cable  cut  with 
the  rocks.  These  places  are  fit  only  when  the  trade  wind  is  settled  :  for  you  must  not 
be  caught  here  with  any  other. 

Salt  Key  is  N.  by  E.  from  Sand  Key,  and  lies  N.  by  E.  like  the  two  others;  it  k~  of  a 
iriiingular  form,  its  length  something  more  thiin  tiireo  miles  :  it  is  higher  than  Sand  Key, 
and  you  will  see  here  and  there  some  little  risings  or  hillocks,  and  a  great  many  bushes 
ami  small  trees,  fit  only  for  fire-wood. 

GRAND  KEY,  or  GRAND  TURK— Having  advanced  to  the  north  point  of  Salt 
Key,  you  will  seo  the  Great  Key  bearing  N.  N.  E.  Si  leagues ;  so  soon  as  you  are  clear 
of  tlie  reefs,  which  stretch  otf  from  the  Little  Turk,  t  ,..  cables'  length,  it  will  be  found 
tliiit  the  bank  continues  from  ihis  N.  E.  by  N.,  to  the  i,/>Jlh  point  of  the  Great  Key,  for 
wiiich  you  should  make  a  N.  N.  E.  course,  thiiusih  you  might  run  along  the  west  edge 
of  the  bank  in  4  fathoms,  or  might  indei'd  anchor  upon  it,  as  you  would  bt>  sheltered  from 
the  trade  wind  by  the  bank  and  its  keys.  Yon  must,  however,  bo  cautious  in  steering 
N.  E.  of  a  reef  that  runs  olf  from  Cotton  Key  W.  by  N.,  seldom  showing  itself  in  mode- 
riite  weather,  and  stretching  as  far  as  the  soutli  point  of  the  Great  Key. 

If  yi)U  mean  to  anchor  on  the  west  side,  which  is  nmch  like  the  Salt  Key,  (though 
notsi)  gtntd  as  the  Siind  Key.)  you  hiid  better  keep  along  the  i)iiuk,  lest  you  get  too  far 
tu  tiie  loewiird,  and  haul  in  west  from  a  hillock,  which  njay  bo  plainly  distinguished  when 
ne;iiiy  in  :  the  bank  is  very  steep,  and  looks  shoal ;  but  you  will  liiid  4  or  5  fathoms  water 
very  cliise  to  the  bind.  You  must,  however,  stand  in  only  upon  wliitrf  water,  till  you 
biiiig  Kiiglisli  I'onit  K.  by  N. ;  olf  that  point  are  some  breakers  (piite  close  to  the  shore, 
iiiidtliere  is  slioa!  water.  When  the  before  mentioned  hillocks  bear  K.  by  S.,  you  may 
uiidwr  within  hiiif  a  cable's  length  of  the  isliind,  looking  out  for  clear  ground;  English 
point  will  then  bea''  north,  and  tlii^  South  I'oint  S.  E.  ;  your  anchor  will  be  in  4  or  5 
fiillioins,  tlie  ship  in  S)  or  10.  and  the  stiMii  in  00,  V'.').  in'  perhaps  no  ground  to  be  found. 
llwill  lie  piinlent  in  st;iying  hiwe  to  observe  wlic)  the  trade  wind  dies,  for  yon  hnvo  very 
little  riioiii  to  turn  ;  you  should  also  alwiiys  buoy  _^-  mr  cables,  for  the  sandy  bottom  is  full 
uf  liiifie  stones,  among  which  cables  and  andnjrs  '   ive  often  been  lost. 

Till!  vessels  which  load  salt,  generally  anchor  to  '■lie  northward  of  English  Point,  that 
being  nearer  to  the  Salt  Pond;  but  neither  the  sheiie-r  nor  the  ground  are  so  good  as  at 
till' oilier  place.  No  pasjii;.  is  to  be  found  to  the  t'lUthward  of  this  island,  but  for  a 
buiit,  lis  tlieiti  is  a  reef,  which  is  a  lirancli  of  that  surio'.'iiding  the  weather  side  of  these 
keys  and  banks.     The  (treat  Key  Ini.s  llio  best  groniid  of  thu  three  islands. 

Uf  till'  two  salt-ponds  which  are  on  the  key.  one  only  furnishes  salt ;  it  is  about  4200 
yiirils  Willi',  and  its  middling  breadth  above  -JOO.  It  produces  three  times  as  much  as 
till'  puiiil  uf  Salt  Key  ;  but  the  grain  of  the  salt  is  coarser,  and  not  so  bright  as  that  of 
tlie  liittcr. 
The  liititndo  of  the  north  noint  of  the  (irand  Turk  is  21°  ;!0'  N. 
St^UARE  IIANDKEIICHIEE.  r  .MOUdioIR  qUAKKE  SHOAL.— This  is  a 
biiiilv (if  ;>!  miles  in  extent,  in  an  rust  iiiid  westdireciuin  ;  the  eiistern  etui  is '2t  mil.^s  v/ide, 
luiiuiiiji  nearly  north  and  south  On  the  N.  K.  point  of  the  bank,  in  lat.  2\°  06'  N.,  long. 
"U  ;!0'  W.,  tiuire  is  a  shoal  that  oreaks;  anil  on  the  northern  edge  of  the  bank  there  are 
two  large  shiinls,  each  of  six  miles  ni  extent.  The  S.  W.  end  of  the  bank  is  in  lat.  20° 
at)',  long.  71°  W.     The  .S.  E.  end  is  clean,  having  on  it  fnnn  9  to  \r>  fathoms. 

Ships  ought  never  to  venture  within  any  part  ot  the  white  grounds,  because  they  may 
often  full  fioin  14  fathoms  to  10  feet ;  if,  by  accident,  they  find  themselves  in  the  middle 
of  thi'iii,  the  best  way  is  to  lack,  and  go  out  the  same  way  they  come  in,  ranging  along 
liio  ;;i'ouii(ls. 

SILVER  KEY  B.VNK. — This  Rank  isof  great  extent:  the  N.  W.  point  being  in  lat. 
'20"  54',  long.  0!)°  .')(>',  rumiing  soiith-imsterly  iO  miles;  thence  southwesterly  2()  miles; 
thence  west,  a  little  north,  to  lat.  'J0°  Iri'  N.,  long.  70°  O'J'  W.  On  the  north-eastern 
eils;«  of  the  bunk  there  is  a  shoal  of  coral  rocks  a-wash.  of  17  miles  In  extent,  in  a  soiilh- 
eiislerly  direction,  and  of  a  triangular  form.  The  western  edge  of  the  bank,  with  the 
exeeiuion  of  the  N.  W.  point,  and  a  reef  in  lat  '-'0°  '27'.  long.  70°  0',  is  clear. 

Vo'j  experiei.'ce  on  the  eilges  of  the  shoals  weak  currents,  which  generally  follow  the 
uiiactiuiis  of  those  edges.     On  the  Siiuuro  Handkerchief  th;'y  are  scarcely  felt ;  on  the 


Salt  Key,  or 
the  Little 
Turk. 


Grand  Key, 
or  Grand 

Turk. 


!!     il 


Square 
Handker- 
chief, or 
M'luchoir 
Qutirre 
•Shoal. 


Silver  Key 
Bank. 


316 


BLURT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Silver  Key 
Passage. 


Bajo  Navi- 
dad. 


S.  E.  part  of  the  Silver  Keys  you  find  them  setting  to  the  west  and  N.  W. ;  but  a  ehort 
league  from  the  grounds  their  effect  is  not  perceivable. 

In  genorul  you  ought  not  to  mind,  in  your  reckoning,  the  weak  currents  which  exist  in 
these  pHS3iig(!S,  thpy  being  no  where  to  bo  feared. 

SILVER  KEY  PASSAGE. — Should  you,  by  any  circumstance,  be  forced  to  go 
from  Cape  Haytien,  through  the  Square  Handkerchief,  you  must  at  the  departure  make 
your  course  good  N.  E.  by  E.  and  E.  N.  E.  If  the  wind  suffer  you  to  steer  thnt  course 
you  would  finss  in  the  mid-channel:  but  if  you  are  forced  to  turn,  and  should  not  eet' 
sight  of  the  Ilaytien  shore,  after  you  have  once  got  into  the  longitude  of  70°  20',  you 
must  not  pass  the  latitude  of  20°  2u' without  frequently  heaving  the  lead.  If  you  come 
M  far  as  20°  35'  without  getting  ground,  you  have  nothing  to  fear  from  the  Silver  Keys 
swid  must  only  look  out  for  the  Square  Handkerchief,  which  is  not  dangerous  on  thesou'ih' 
the  bottom  giving  yon  notice  in  10  and  15  fathoms.  In  the  latter  case,  continue  to  get  to 
the  north-eastward,  mid  when  you  come  into  the  latitude  of  21°  20'  N.  you  will  be  en- 
tirely out  of  tli«  passas;e.  A  very  strong  current  is  found  to  set  to  the  .S.  VV.  through 
tlje  Silver  iiui  Handkerchief  Passage*,  after  strong  breezes,  from  the  N.  E.,  particularly 
on  the  derr««w»  of  the  ntoon. 

BAJO  N  i  VfDAD.— The  north  point  of  this  bank  lies  in  long.  68°  40'  W.,  and  Int. 
SW"  VI  >'.,  ii'id  f'xtends  in  a  southerly  direction  about  25  miles  ;  it  is  12  miles  wide  in  the 
ce'Wtr*'.  ami  h«»'»ni  it  from  14  to  26  faihoms  water,  and  is  perfectly  free  of  danger.  Ves- 
sels biiuiid  to  til'  tiirAx  side  of  St.  Dumingo,  can  liuve  an  excellent  opportunity  of  cor- 
recting flieir  loiiuifij/Je  by  running  liir  riiis  liank,  wliich  is  laid  down  from  the  recent  sur- 
veys of  Cu|)r.  R.  t  'Wfii,  R.  N.,  and  published  by  E.  &  (J.  W.  Blunt,  183.'). 

In  passing  iw  tlie  svuM'thward  of  Porto  Rico,  a  lookout  should  bo  kept  for  a  rock  or  shoal 
(if  not  more  tlii*n  one;  which  certainly  exists  there,  although  its  exact  situation  is  not  yet 
known.  This  (t,»nger  has  been  noticed,  where  it  is  stated  that  an  American  sciiooner 
struck  upon  it  ill  1H17.  in  latitude  alnmt ','0°  N  ;  and  we  have  since  met  with  anoilier 
notice  which  states  that,  ••  at  50  miles  north  from  Porto  Rico,  Captain  Baxter,  in  the  brig 
Robert,  struck  on  a  rock,  and  remained  several  hour*." 

General  Directiuns  making,  and  navigating  an,  the  Coast  of  Cuba. 

In  the  rainy  si^ason,  or  season  of  the  sonilierly  winds,  vessels  bound  from  Europe  to 
Cuba  ouiilit  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  Porio  Rico  »nd  Hayti  or  .St.  Domingo;  ami  ijn- 
riiig  the  season  of  the  norths,  they  should  pass  to  the  southward  of  these  isliinds,  unless 
their  port  of  destination  retpiires  them  to  do  otherwise.  There  are  other  reasons  for 
adliering  to  this  inoile  of  navigating.  In  Cuba  the  port*  to  which  vessels  are  IkhukI  from 
Europe,  may  Oe  reduced  to  two  :  these  are  the  .St.  Jago  de  Cuba  and  the  Havana,  if 
bound  to  the  lirst  it  is  necessary,  in  every  season,  to  direct  your  cunrs^e  ilirecily  to  it; 
that  if<,  in  tiie  season  of  the  norths  to  steer  from  Cape  Tibur m,  the  S.  VV.  point  ol  Hayii, 
in  order  to  make  s.jiiie  point  on  the  south  side  of  Cuba,  th«-  »  .ndward  of  the  iiitended  port, 
or  eveti  lo  wiiitlwuid  of  Guniiiaiiamo  ;  and,  in  the  season  of  the  souths,  to  steer  from  (jii|ie 
Nicholas'  Mole,  on  tlie  N.  W-  coast  of  Hiiyi!.  almost  wesi  for  the  |)ort,  making,  in  the 
first  place,  the  various  poims  of  the  cwast  of  Cuba,  which  are  after  described.  Buti'" 
bound  to  Haviina,  attention  should  iihvays  Im'  paid  to  the  «eason  ;  that  is,  if  your  pus- 
sage  is  male  in  tlie  time  uf  the  nortlis,  you  sliould  go  to  tiie  south  of  Cuba,  nlihoui;li 
ymi  have  to  return  tlie  di!»'.ince  tjetweon  ("ape  .Xntonio  and  Havana;  because  this  iiicun- 
venieiice  is  not  comparable  to  that  which  inighr  be  occasioned  on  the  north  side  by  a 
hard  north,  which  would  not  only  expose  a  vessid  to  h^'avy  risks,  but  might  relatd  the 
voyiige  much  loiiiii^r  llian  the  lime  rr'piired  lo  reaidi  Havaint  from  (^ape  Antonio ;  fur 
this  distance  m  ty  i)e  workefi  iip  in  a  ci**'*rt  time,  as  you  may  navcj  llie  iiH^istiiiice  of  the 
cunenttu  the  eastward,  as  in-'ri  particut,.rly  described  in  the  directions  for  the  Strait  of 
Florida. 

Those  navigating  on  the  sontli  of  CuW.  who  have  no  occaoion  to  (ouch  at  Triniilad, 
or  any  part  of  that  coast,  should  give  it  *  jjood  olfiiig,  and  j/roceed  to  the  west  from 
Capi'de  Cruz.  Here  it  maybe  observed  (S^Ht,  at  the  distance  of  35  leagues  fnan  tli.it 
Cape,  is  the  western  end  of  the  low  island  c:illed  the  (  aymiinbrack,  tlu'  .\,  K.  eiidol' 
which  is  surrininded  by  an  extensive  'lef,  the  making  of  wliirli  is  dangerous  by  iiiKJit,  be- 
cause a  reef  extends  from  it  4  miles  out  to  sea  ;  and  alloWan<  e  must  always  be  iiliidi)  fur 
the  current,  which,  although  variable,  is  neiieralt/  (H'MVHlent  here.  The  safest  coursenp- 
pears  to  li--  to  the  noriliward  of  the  <  'uyiiiaiis. 

'I'he  navigation  on  the  north  of  (.'nba  istlmt  uf  the  R«lMma  or  Old  Chant.iaj.  For  \\\\i 
channel  it  is  ciistomnry  to  take  a  pilot,  wh'-  may  be  er!^2>*d  eiflier  at  Agn.<dilln,  on  the 
N-  W,  coast  ol"  I'orto  Rico,  or  at  Baracoa,  "■  Cuba,  us  ivxt/ted  '.lereafter.  If  approatli- 
ing  Baracoa,  for  this  purpose,  it  will  be  reipimile  to  d«terini«»e  the  ship's  pi, ice.  in  ilji' vi- 
cinity of  (Jape  May  si  I  for  otherwise  you  niiiv  ItJipiien  •<■  (,tli  into  I'-.'wnrd  ol  HHriicoa: 
and  («veii  witiiniit  the  necessity  I'Cilling  fur  .■  pii"'.  it  wiH  tx'  proper  tu  make  the  Iniid  ni 
the  uei^hburhuuU  uf  the  capt>,  lur  the  sake  uf'ii  Ue^Mrtu/e  luMtct*  b>  iliu  westward,  undlor 


wmmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


317 


correcting  any  error  produced  by  current.  The  remnrUiihlo  point§  of  nil  this  const  will 
bo  described.  Those  descriptions  must,  of  course,  be  especially  regarded,  and  strictly 
attended  to. 

We  hiive  already  noticed  that  in  this  chnnnel,  independent  of  any  current,  there  is  a 
reguliir  tide.  Tiie  current  itself  is  very  uncoriaiii,  iind  no  doubt  fluctuates  according  to 
the  variations  of  tlie  (lulf  Stream,  winds,  <Src.  It  sometnnes  sets  E.  fcs.  E.,  at  other  times 
\V.  N.  W..  and  ngain  ceases.  With  every  precaution,  a  vessel  ought  not  to  cross  the 
meridian  of  Point  iNIaternillo,  without  having  made  and  remarked  it  well ;  as  all  the  care 
of  the  most  zealous  and  attentive  navigator  may  otherwise  be  of  no  avail  to  keeji  him  clear 
ofdiH  Muciras  Shoal,  on  the  north  side,  which  shows  no  symptom  of  its  exi.fience  until 
a  vessel  is  aground  upon  it.  If  obliged  to  beat  up  at  night,  it  ought  to  be  done  so  as 
not  tu  prolong  the  tack  more  than  will  completely  and  certainly  clear  the  Mucaras. 
Hiiving  passed  over  the  night  in  this  manner,  so  soon  as  it  is  clear  day,  steer  so  as  to 
muke  the  coast  and  recognize  it  well.  If  it  be  not  iu  sight,  steer  to  the  south  until  you 
make  it. 

Hiiving  once  recognized  Maternillo  Point,  direct  your  course  so  as  to  pass  Guincho, 
or  Ginger  Key,  at  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  if  by  night;  or  make  it  by  day,  and  thence 
keep  over  towards  the  edges  of  the  Great  Bank  and  Salt  Key  Bank,  rather  than  to  the 
keys  of  the  coast  of  Cuba,  which  offer  few  marks  that  can  be  depended  on;  and  an  up- 
proacli  to  which  is  therefore  dangerous.  You  will  have  passed  all  these  keys  when 
Hbreast  of  Point  Ycacos,  and  may  thence  proceed.  But  the  safest  way,  ns  before  noticed, 
is  towards  the  southern  edge  "f  the  Salt  Key  Bank,  passing  thenco  to  the  westward,  ac- 
cording to  judgment,  the  state  of  the  current,  &c. 


1$LA.1[|>  OF  CUBA. 


CUBA. — This  is  the  largest  island  in  the  West  Indies,  and  is  situated  at  the  western   Cuba. 
pxtremiiy  of  ihe  mnltiiudeof  islands,   keys,  and  banks, which  sejjarate  the   Caribbean 
Sea  frdin  the  At iantie  Ocean.     Its   length,  from  Cape  Maysi,  on  the   eafct,    to  Cape  St. 
Aiifimio,  on  the  west,  is  about  208  leagues  :  its  breadth  is  unequal,  being  from  12  to  24 
Ifiiiiues. 

Ciipe  iMiiyj^i,  the  most  easterly  point  of  the  south  part  of  Cuba,  is  sittiated  in  or  near 
hu.  ■■>[)-'  15'  N.  ami  long.  74^  7'  30"  W.  The  point  itself  is  a  low  beach,  and  canrot  be 
clearly  seen  until  you  nre  nearly  up  v^'ith  it.  Landing  on  it  is  extremely  dungert  ■  for 
H  reel' extends  from  it  nearly  a  mile  to  the  eastward  ;  ami  advancing  towards  it  d.ring 
the  night  is  very  unsafe,  unless  you  have  previously,  in  daylight,  marked  the  high  lands 
of  the  interior  counli-y,  either  of  Cuba  or  of  Hiiyti.  From  tins  point  the  coast  trends 
tip  the  N.  \V'.,  MU'I  rounds  to  Kivor  Maysi,  at  a  mile  from  the  tape.  I'^rom  this  river  to 
I'oint  Annies,  which  is  another  mile,  nearly  in  the  same  direction,  the  coast  is  bounded 
hy  a  reef,  wliich  extends  out  alxuit  a  cable's  length,  and  has  a  break  at  the  mouth  of 
file  Maysi.  Kroni  i'.iint  A/.ules  the  land  begins  to  rise,  and  the  coast  is  clean  and 
trends  iihont  W.  N.  \V.  for  '}  miles  to  Punta  Frayle,  or  1"  riar's  l^oint,  whence  it  i^xtenda 
west  *)  mill's,  to  tlie  River  Vamuri,  and  (•oiitinuts  iu  the  same  direction  J  miles  more,  to 
the  Harbor  of  Miita.  All  this  coast  is  veiy  clean,  and  you  may  run  along  it  within  half 
u  mile. 

'I'lie  Uarljorof  .Vliita  is  vrry  snudl.  and  too  sliallow  to  admit  vessels  drawinc  more  than 
IJIi^et.  To  enter  it  you  base  otdy  to  kt'ep  in  iniiJchannel,  and  anchor  in  from  14  to  18 
feet  water,  almost  in  the  middle  cii  the  l)ay.  All  the  shores  have  shoal  \v  iter  from  them, 
sothiit  there  is  a  space  of  only  2  cables'  length  in  diameter,  in  which  there  is  sulficieiit 
dei'h  t'ur  anchoring. 

Krom  Puerto  de  .Mala  the  coast  trends  nearly  N.  W.,  G  miles,  to  Port  Mnj'ana,  and  at 
2  short  mill's  from  it  is  the  mouth  of  the  River  Boma.  This  piece  of  const,  as  well  aa 
the  preceiliiig,  is  very  clean. 

I'oint  Miijaim  and  Baracoa  Point,  which  lie  nearly  east  and  west,  2  miles  distant  from 
each  other,  form  a  bay,  in  the  east  part  of  which  is  the  anchorage  of  Play  a  de  Miel, 
(Molasses  HiMich.)  and  in  the  west,  the  iiiMuth  of  the  l*ort  of  Bararoa  ;  in  the  middle, 
lietween  thesr  two  tin-  imragi-s,  is  the  town  of  Bararoa,  standing  on  the  S.  E.  pnuit  of 
the  hiirhiir  of  (lie  same  name.  In  this  town  dwell  tlie  pilots  for  (he  liahanni,  or  Old 
Channel;  and  tiu'refore  vessels  which  have  not  previously  engaged  one  at  the  Aguadillu, 
ill  I'la'to  Kiou,  come  here  fur  one. 

The  anclioraue  of  Playa  de  iMiel  is  very  open  to  the  norths.  To  anchor  in  it,  you 
have  only  to  approach  Point  iWajana,  and  anchor  something  to  the  south  of  it,  in  from  10 
to  30  fatlinrn-i.  (in  a  sandy  bottom,  taking  care  imt  to  get  to  the  east  of  that  point,  where 
y  u  would  I)'-  mmodiately  iu  4,  or  oven  iu  less  tlian  4  fathoms  of  water,     The  general 


IV ll|pM]l.lll|W  I   -VI 


iiiiLuiuiupiiipii^ppi 


•^w^^mii^m-rmy^^m 


318 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


object  of  coming  to  Burncoa  being  only  to  obtain  a  pilot,  there  ia  iio  necessity,  jn  that 
case,  to  anchor  ;  but  approaching  Point  Mnjana,  even  within  two  cables'  length,  if  y,ju 
choose,  fire  a  cannon  or  gun  and  a  pilot  will  come  off  diroctly.  As  the  Playa  de  Miel  is 
entirely  open  to  the  norths,  in  the  season  of  them,  it  is  much  exposed ;  and,  therefore 
any  vessel  under  the  necessity  of  anchoring,  should  steer  at  once  fur  Bnracou,  to  tlie  en- 
trance of  which  there  is  no  obstacle,  as  it  is  completely  clean,  having  no  danger  but  what 
may  be  seen  ;  and  consulting  the  plan  of  it,  you  may  choose  the  spot  to  anchor  in  which 
best  suits  the  draught  of  water  of  your  vessel. 
Baracoa  BARACOA  HARBOR,  though  secure  and  sheltered,  has  the  great  inconvenience  of 

Harbor.  presenting  its  mouth  to  the  breeze,  and  a  great  swell  consequently  sets  in ;  and,  being 

able  to  get  ont  of  it  with  the  land  breeze  only,  vessels  are  often  detained  mucli  time  in 
it  during  the  norths,  when  the  land  breeze  is  not  frequent :  but  in  the  rainy  season  you 
may  almost  reckon  on  having  it  every  night.  The  Anvil  Hill  of  Baracoa.  (El  Yunque 
de  Banicon,)  which  is  a  little  mountain  about  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  hnrlior,  ig 
an  excellent  mark  to  recognize  it  by,  as.  in  clear  days,  it  may  be  discovered  iit  a  distHnce 
of  mure  than  12  leagues,  and  appears,  over  the  other  high  laud,  lilie  the  flat  top  of  an 
anvil. 

From  the  Harbor  of  Baracoa  the  coast  trends  almost  true  north,  3  miles  to  Point 
Cunas,  which,  although  very  clean,  ought  not  to  bo  approached,  because,  being  com- 
pletely open  to  the  breeze,  there  is  always  a  heavy  swell  setting  upon  it.  From  Point 
Canns  to  the  Harbor  Maravi  is  2  miles;  the  coast  trends  nearly  west,  and  is  very  clean. 
PortMaravi  PORT  MARAVI,  though  small,  is  well  sheltered  from  the  norths.  Its  entraice  is 
not  difficult,  for  you  have  only  to  keep  in  mid-channel,  which  is  less  than  a  cable's  length 
in  width  ;  and  running  in  for  the  middle  of  the  bay,  anchor  as  soon  as  an  islet  which  is 
on  its  western  side  bears  in  the  same  direction. 

From  Maravi  the  coast  trends  nearly  north,  making  a  bend  (or  bight)  to  Point  Van 
and  from  thence  it  runs  to  the  N.  W.,  forming  another  bend  to  Port  Navas,  which  is  an 
opening  of  about  two  cables'  length  in  extent,  in  all  directioi.s,  with  its  mouth  to  the  north- 
therefore,  useful  only  as  a  shelter  from  the  breezes.  To  enter  it,  no  more  is  necessiiry 
than  an  inspection  of  the  plan.* 

From  Port  Navas  to  Port  Cayaguaneque,  the  distance  is  only  two  short  miles.    Cajn- 
guaneque  is  fit  for  very  small  vessels  only,  and  its  entrance  is  only  40  yards  wide.    The 
plan  will  give  a  perfect  knowledge  of  it,  and  of  the  difficulties  which  present  themselves 
in  taking  it. 
Taco.  TACO. — Three  and  a  half  miles  from  Cayaguaneque  is  the  Harbor  of  Taco.    It  if 

well  sheltered  ;  but  though,  in  its  interior,  there  is  a  depth  for  any  class  of  vessels,  yet  its 
entrance  has  a  bar  with  only  from  13  to  18  feet  on  it,  and  it  is  also  obstructed  l)y  rockv 
shoals  with  little  water  on  them,  which  stretch  out  from  both  shores  ;  but  as,  on  nccouii't 
of  the  bar,  vessels  drawing  only  10  or  12  feet  water  should  go  in,  those  will  run  no  risii 
in  running  over  the  shoal*,  and  therefore  may  take  this  harbor  by  keeping  in  mid-chan- 
nel ;  and  when  once  past  the  entrance,  they  may  direct  themselves  to  tliat  pait  of  the 
harbor  which  suits  them  best. 

From  the  harbor  of  Taco  to  Point  Jaragua  is  2i  miles;  and  the  const,  which  is  a 
sandy  beach,  is  clean.  At  Point  .laragua  it  ceases  to  be  so,  though  all  between  it  and 
Cape  Maysi  maybe  run  along  at  a  mile's  distance.  Point  Jaragua  sends  out  a  reef 
which  stretches  to  the  N.  W.  of  it;  this  point  is  the  eastern  one  of  the  auchcnisie  of  the 
same  name,  which  is  only  an  opening  in  the  reef,  by  wiiich  a  vessel  may  enter  upon  the 
bank  or  shoal,  and  find  shelter  from  the  sea,  behind  the  reef.  The  break  or  induth  is 
only  two-third's  of  a  cables"  length  wide  ;  and  from  it  to  8on)o  islets  which  are  to  the  S. 
W.  of  it,  the  distance  is  two  cables.  The  islets  are  three  in  number;  the  southern  one 
is  the  lar.'iest ;  the  anchorage  for  large  vessels  extends  only  till  you  are  K.  and  VV.,  true, 
with  the  south  part  of  the  middle  islet:  as  fui'ther  in,  there  are  only  12  to  18  feet  of 
water.  To  take  this  anchorage  it  is  nof-essury  to  sail  outside  the  reef,  which  extends 
out  from  Point  .laragua,  until  the  east  part  of  the  great  islet  bears  in'iuly  S.  W.,  then 
steer  directly  for  it ;  and  if  the  ves.sel  be  large,  anchor  as  soon  as  \ou  are  E.  and  W. 
with  the  iiiiildle  islet,  in  G  fathoms,  on  a  sandy  bottom  :  but  if  th(<  ve>>sel  draw  not  moM 
than  14  feet,  you  miiy  run  farther  in.  kee()iiic.  'i  you  choose,  wiihiu  a  quiirterof  a  cnM« 
of  the  great  islet,  and  about  a  cable's  length  lr<p>ii  the  middle  of  it,  you  may  anchor  in 
19  feet,  on  clay.  You  may  also  enter  tli.-  mouth  without  attending  to  tliu  given  niink- 
ation  of  S.  W.,  because  the  reef  itself  wliow»  the  opening.  This  harbor  should  never 
be  taken,  except  in  a  case  oi  neci-«»ity,  as  there  can  be  no  other  motive  li<r  vessels 
coming  to  it. 

From  Point  .Taragun  the  coast  trends,  ft^-*!  hi  the  N.  \V  ..  and  afterwards  to  the  uortii, 
forming  II  f»reiit  buy  to  Point  (Juiirico,  whH!h  is  7  miles  distant  from  the  ormcr.  TIih 
reef  which  extends  to  Point  Jaragua,  i\i>U"d8  the  whole  of  it,  and  stretches  out  ahout;^M) 


"The  plan*  rcfi^rred  to  in  these  directions,  i 
trioual,"  published  at  Madrid  in  laod. 


thnae  of  the  "  Portulano  de  lit  Amurica  Seteu- 


w^l^^f^m^^^mf^ 


">T"^pr'(i"siw""'"w' 


^^tm/mmmmmmmi 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


3L9 


;i)  the  uorlli, 

(Ut  tll)OUt»0 

murica  Settu- 


miles  from  Point  Ouarico.  In  approaching  this  side  of  Cuba,  be  careful  not  to  mistake 
Guarico  Point  for  Cape  Maize,  it  being  cliingerou3  at  night  and  in  thick  weather,  when 
you  cannot  recognize  and  use  as  marks,  the  eastern  lands  of  the  island,  and  particularly 
whon  you  are  uncertain  of  your  latitude. 

From  Point  Guarico  the  coast  trends  nearly  N.  W.,  8  miles,  to  the  River  Moa;  it  ia 
all  bordered  by  a  reef,  which  extends  about  2  miles  out  to  sea.  Almost  N.  by  W.  from 
the  mouth  of  that  river,  and  between  the  reef  and  the  shore,  is  an  islet  named  Cayo  Moa, 
which  od'ers  an  excellent  anchorage,  sheltered  from  all  sea.  It  is  entered  by  an  opening 
in  the  reef,  almost  due  north  from  the  mouth  of  the  river.  This  opening  ia  about  2  cables' 
length  in  width,  and  continues  W.  by  S.,  forming  the  channel  and  anchorage,  until  the 
east  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears  north.  To  take  it,  run  along  the  east  side  of  the  reef  until 
up  with  the  opening,  which  will  be  when  the  eastern  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears  W.  by  S. ; 
und  then  steer  S.  W.  until  the  south  part  of  Cayo  Moa  bears  W.  N.  W.  i  W.;"then 
steer  W.  i  S.,  and  continue  ho  till  you  anchor  to  the  southward  of  the  eastern  part  of 
Cayo  Moa,  in  6i  or  7  fathoms,  upon  clay.  The  plan  of  the  port  will  give  a  perfect  idea 
of  tliis  anchorage;  for  recognizing  or  finding  which,  some  mountains  about  4  leagues  in- 
land, named  the  Sierras  de  Moa,  may  serve  as  landmarks. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Moa,  the  coast  trends  about  west ;  it  is  all  bounded  by  a  reef 
which  extends  2  or  3  miles  from  it,  as  far  as  Port  Yoguanequo,  which  is  11  miles  distant 
from  the  former.  On  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  between  it  and  the  reef,  are  two  keys, 
the  eastern  one  named  Burros,  (Asses,)  and  the  western  Arena  (Sund;)  these  keys  may 
serve  as  marks  for  knowing  this  part  of  the  coast.  The  Harbor  of  Yaguaneque  is  tit  for 
smnll  vessels  only,  because  its  bottom  is  shallow  and  unequal,  and  its  entrance  narrow 
and  difficult  to  take,  for  the  mouth  is  formed  merely  by  a  break  in  the  reef.  To  take 
this  port,  it  is  necessary  to  follow  the  edge  of  the  reef  to  windward,  until  you  come  to 
the  opening,  which  lies  N.  W.,  two-thirds  of  a  mile,  from  Arena  Key;  then  steer  to  the 
southward,  keeping  along  the  edge  of  the  weather-reef,  because  the  lee-reef,  which 
commences  when  you  are  west  from  Arena  Key,  narrows  the  out  unce  ao  much,  that 
there  is  scarcely  a  cable's  length  of  width  in  the  channel.     It  is  fit  forsinull  craft  only. 

(JANANOVA. — A  mile  and  a  half  from  Yaguaneque  is  the  Port  of  Cananova,  which    Cananova. 
is  properly  an  opening  of  the  coast  only,  and  must  be  entered  by  another  opening  through 
the  reef. 

Three  miles  to  tho  westward  of  Cananova  Harbor  is  that  of  Cebollas,  which  is  alike 
most  difficult  to  enter,  or  to  get  out  of,  and  therefore  unfit  for  large  vessels. 

TANAMO. — Ten  miles  vest  fron.  Cebollas  is  Port  Tanamo ;  and  the  intermediate  Tanamo. 
coast  is  fuul,  with  a  reef  which  extends  out  about  2  miles  from  it.  Tanamo  ia  a  large 
harbor,  and  fit  for  vessels  of  any  denomination;  to  enter  it,  you  must  run  along  the  edge 
of  the  windward  reef  until  you  f.ndthe  opening  in  it;  then  steer  S.  4  E.  until  you  have 
passed  the  leeward  point,  when  you  may  keep  away  up  the  elbow  which  the  channel 
makes,  in  the  middle  of  which  you  ought  to  keep;  but  no  more  is  necessaiy  than  to  give 
a  berth  of  a  third  of  a  cable  to  all  that  is  visible.  With  the  plau  and  your  eye,  no  farther 
directions  are  needful. 

CABONICO  AND  LIVISA. — From  Tanamo  the  coast  trends  west,  10  miles,  to  the  Cahonico 
entrance  of  the  harbors  of  Cabonico  and  Livisa ;  a  reef  extends  also  2  miles  from  this  ami  Liviim 
piece  of  coast.  These  two  harbors  have  one  common  entrance,  wliich  divides  within 
into  two  branches  ;  one  to  the  eastward,  lending  to  Cabonico,  and  the  other  to  the  west- 
ward, leading  to  Livisa.  To  enter  these  harbors  you  must  go  in  by  the  opening  in  the 
reef,  and  then  3teer  for  the  windward  point  until  it  boars  8.  4  E.,  and  then  being  near  it, 
keep  mid-channel,  avoiding  a  reef  which  runs  out  fmm  liio  windward  shore,  and  which 
lies  out  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  interior  point.  You  may  approach  within  a  third 
of  ft  cable  of  the  leeward  shore ;  once  abreast  of  the  interior  points,  steer  for  the  channel 
of  tlie  harbor  you  wish  to  take,  without  any  other  care  than  to  neep  mid-channel. 

NIPE. — From  those  ports  the  coast  continues  foul,  having  it  reef  about  W.  N.  W..  5  Nipe. 
niileB,  to  the  Harbor  of  Nipo.  This  bay,  for  its  magnitude  and  depth,  is  very  extensive, 
iind  has  "<ciouH  entrance.  Tlie  harbor  is  always  accessible,  for  with  either  the  breeze 
or  the  no>'.;,8,  you  will  run  in  with  a  free  wind  ;  coming  out  is  quite  the  reverse,  for  tliis 
requires  the  land  breezes,  which,  as  we  have  spid  before,  are  often  very  rare  in  tho  sea- 
Bua  of  «V,.  ni>rt,hs. 

To  >  Minguish  this  part  of  the  coast,  the  mountains  of  Cristal  may  serve  as  marks  ; 
these  NO  a  continuation  of  the  Cordillera,  (or  range,)  which  comes  from  Baracoa,  and 
extends  to  the  south  from  Port  Livisa,  at  about  13  miles  inland.  Tho  Pan  of  Samii,  to 
the  west,  is  also  another  excellent  mark  of  rocogniaanco;  its  figure  being  such  that  it 
cannot  bi'  mistaken,  beraiHe  the  summit  of  it  forms  r.  table.  It  rises  on  the  land  to  the 
north  ()'"  Nipe  and  RiinoH,  ml  is  ahnost  N.  and  S.,  truiN  with  the  Harbor  of  Sanm;  and 
lis  the  niouiitains  of  Crisi.il  terminate  to  the  east,  and  the  Pan  of  Sama,  which  begins  to 
I'ise  orailuallj  almost  from  Point  Mulaa,  form  an  opening  oi-  break  in  tlm  chain  of  hills  or 
niouiitiiiiis,  it  is  almost  impi osibie  for  any  one  to  mistake  the  place.  The  Pan  of  Sama 
may  bo  seen  20  miles  oil. 


•^•fmmm^f'mmm^mm 


820 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Banes.  BANES. — From  the  Harbor  of  Nipo  the  coast  trends  N.  W.,  1 1  miles,  to  the  Port  of 

Bniiea :  it  is  all  clean,  and  may  be  run  along  at  half  a  mile's  distance.  The  Harbor  of 
Banes  has  its  entrance  in  the  middle  of  a  bay  formed  by  the  coast,  and  which  hasSi  miles 
of  opening,  whence  it  narrows  into  the  entnmce  of  the  port,  which  is  only  a  cable  iind  a 
half  in  width,  so  that  it  resembles  a  funnel.  The  shores  of  both  the  bay  and  the  channel 
are  uncommonly  clear  and  deep  to,  and  you  have  to  fear  nothing  but  what  is  seen.  Only 
thus  could  this  port  be  entered  witVi  facility,  na  its  entrance  is  so  tortuous,  and  with  such 
elbows  and  turnings,  that  you  must  alter  your  course,  almost  in  an  instJint,  from  S.  to  N 
It  is  excellent,  as  a  place  of  shelter,  for  any  class  of  vessels.  It  is  extremely  difficult' 
however,  to  get  out  of;  because  its  mouth  stands  open  to  the  trade  wind,  and  it  is  neces- 
sary to  avail  yourself  of  the  land  breeze  to  get  out  clear,  at  any  rate  as  fur  as  the  middle  of 
the  bay,  that  you  may  have  room  to  tack  and  clear  yourself  from  the  rest  of  it.  as  well  us 
of  the  coast,  which  there  trends  about  N.  by  E.,  10  miles,  to  Point  Mulas,  and  whith  is 
foul,  with  a  reef  thot  stretches  a  mile  from  it. 

Point  Mulas.  POINT  MULAS. — To  enable  any  one  to  recognise  Point  Mulas,  which  on  acrount 
of  its  being  very  foul,  and  lying  farther  to  the  northward  than  any  of  the  anterior  const 
may  be  very  sus|)iciou8,  the  marks  already  given  may  suffice;  these  being  t'le  niountains 
of  Cristal  and  Pan  of  Sama. 

About  5  miles  N.  W.  from  Point  Mulas  is  Point  Lucretin,  which  is  clear  and  high- 
the  coast  thence  continues  to  the  west,  with  some  inclination  to  the  south,  for  13  miles' 
to  the  Port  of  Sama,  forming  a  hay  named  Rio  Seco  (Dry  River.)  All  this  coast  is  very 
clear  and  scarped,  excepting  the  bay,  which  has  a  beach. 

The  Port  of        THE  PORT  OF  SAMA  is  fit  for  vessels  only  which  do  not  draw  more  than  12  feet 

Sama.  of  water ;  and  as  the  shores,  both  of  its  entrance  and  the  interior,  are  very  clean,  the  in- 

spection of  the  plan  will  atford  all  the  necessary  instruction  for  taking  it.  You  niiiy  know 
this  part  of  the  coast  and  harbor  by  the  Pan  of  Sanui,  and  a  hill  or  mountain  lienr  its 
western  part,  which  is  pretty  long,  and  lies  N.  W.  and  S.  E.,  and  the  top  of  it  seems  to 
be  plain  and  equal,  and  at  its  west  end  are  scarped  rocks  which  seem  white,  and  where 
much  honey  is  made.  From  this  slope  a  sandy  beach,  named  Gaurdalaboca,  continues 
to  the  west :  to  the  south  of  it  may  be  seen  a  detached  hill,  in  the  form  of  a  s  igar-louf, 
and  to  the  S.  W.  a  small  mountain  covered  with  trees,  the  top  of  which  fmnis  a  thble, 
ond  which  is  laimed  Mesata  do  Naranjo  (Little  Orange  Table.)  Between  the  hill  and 
the  mountain  is  Port  Naranjo,  which  is  5  miles  distant  from  Sama. 

Port  Naranjo.  POR'P  NARANJO  is  a  good  harbor  for  vessels  of  every  class.  Its  windward  point 
may  easily  be  known  by  being  high  and  scarped,  while  the  rest  is  of  beach.  To  take  tlio 
harbor  you  must  sail  without  the  reef  until  the  windward  point  bears  S.  i  E.,  when  you 
may  sail  towards  it,  taking  care  to  give  it  a  cable's  length  berth,  to  keep  clear  of  a  shoal 
which  surrounds  it,  and  stretches  out  about  two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it.  It  is  also  ne- 
cessary to  be  cautious  of  another  shoal,  which  stretches  out  from  the  leeward  toiist,  nud 
which  sallies  out  to  the  north  of  the  exterior  sloping  point,  about  one  cable  and  ono-ihird. 
What  ought  to  be  done  is,  to  run  in  rnid-clianiiel  until  you  are  past  tlie  two  points  ot' 
the  entiance  ;  and  so  scon  as  you  are  well  past  tliiit  to  windward,  you  may  hiif  up,  and 
anchor  in  a  bight  formed  by  the  enst  coast,  at  about  two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it,  imd  in 
10  fathoms  water,  opposite  the  spot  where  the  mangroves  come  down  sons  to  bo  Iwtlied  j 
with  the  water. 

This  harbor  has  the  peculiar  advantage  that  a  vessel  may  sail  either  in  or  out  with  the 
breeze. 

From  Port  Naranjo  the  coast,  which  is  a  foul  lieach,  trends  W.,  24  miles,  to  Point 
Presquera  Nuevo,  which  is  sloping  and  clean;  thence  it  descends  W.  S.  W.,  3  tiiiles,  lo 
Port  Vita,  and  is  very  cl?an.  This  little  port  is  very  good  for  vessels  wliitli  ilo  not  draw 
more  than  l>*  feet,  and  the  inspection  of  the  chart  of  it  will  be  a  sutlicient  guide.  Three 
miles  to  the  west  of  Vita  is  another  small  harbor,  named  Bariay,  at  the  mouth  of  which 
there  is  shelter  from  the  breezes,  but  ordy  in  the  interior  from  the  norths.  Very  sniiill 
vessels  otdy  can  get  up  there.  The  coast  between  Vita  and  Bariay  is  very  deiin.  A 
mile  to  leeward  of  Bariay  there  is  anoth«»r  port  named  .Jururu,  the  entrance  to  wliithij 
very  diffKult,  being  very  narrow;  and  although  vessels  drawing  20  feet  niiiy  enter ii, 
only  small  vessels  ought  to  do  so. 

Gihara,  or  (ilBARA,  OR  XIBKRA. —  Five  miles  west  from  Tururu  is  the  Harbor  of  (liliani   [is 

Xibera.  entrance  is  ,'>  cables  in  breadth,  and  completely  open  to  tin-  north.      The  coast  hetweni 

it  and  Jururu  is  very  clean.  'i'o  find  the  po-i,  three  hdls,  or  mounts,  whicli  are  to  k 
8i!en  to  tliH  south  of  it,  and  which,  at  a  grea.  distance  appear  to  be  ijilaiids,  iire  excellent 
marks.  The  first  and  most  easterly  of  these  is  nnmnl  ."^iHa  de  ( Jibara  (Smidle  of  (iil)iira:| 
the  middle  one  resembles  the  shajje  ot  u  sugar  boiler;  aikl  to  the  west  of  the  tliird  «ie 
some  hills  of  a  regular  height. 

From  Port  (libara  the  coast,  which  is  clean  and  slopint;,  trends  to  the  north.  J  iiiilef, 
til  Point  Brava,  from  vvliich  follows  N.  W.  10  mill-*'  of  the  same  kind  of  coa.st,  to  I'linta 
Mangle,  (Mangrove  I'oint.)  and  from  it  continues  h  iiiiles  in  the  same  direction,  but  itis 
a  eandy  beucli,  and  clean.      From  this  |Joint  it  treuds  west,  but  's  fuul,  with  a  reef  ol  'i 


BLUNT's  American  coast  pilot. 


331 


miles,  to  Puerto  del  Padre.    All  this  land  is  low,  and  on  the  coast  may  be  seen  some 
small  palm-trees,  called  Miraguanas.    At  the  west  side  of  Port  Padre  there  are  two  little 

mounds,  very  close  together. 

PUERTO  DEL  PADRE.— The  harbor  of  Padre  is  excellent,  and  fit  for  any  class  Puerto  del 
and  number  of  vessels.  Its  entrance  is  long,  and  only  2  cables  in  width ;  its  shores  are  Padre. 
very  clean,  and  have  deep  wator.  To  enter  this  harbor  it  is  necessary  to  navigate  out- 
side the  reefs,  until  the  east  point,  named  Jarro,  bears  S.  by  E.  i  E.,  when  you  may 
plane  the  prow  to  the  outer  leeward  point  of  the  entrance  channel ;  and  it  is  necessary 
not  to  confound  this  point  with  another,  which  is  to  the  N.  E.,  upon  the  same  coast,  and 
which,  for  distinction,  is  named  Guinchoa.  The  last  has  an  islet  of  the  same  name  very 
close  to  it,  and  it  may  assist  much  in  finding  the  mouth  of  this  harbor.  Running  for  the 
before  mentioned  point  to  leeward,  and  then  close  past  the  S.  E.  part  of  Guinchos,  no 
more  remains  than  to  steer  for  the  channel,  without  its  being  necessary  to  beware  of  any 
more  than  what  is  visible. 

From  Port  Padre  the  coast  follows  to  the  west,  5  miles,  to  Point  Piedras,  or  Rock 
Point.  Hore  is  the  entrance  of  the  great  Bay  of  Malagueta,  which  is  no  more  than  a 
bigoon  formed  in  the  interior,  in  consequence  of  the  land  being  low  and  wet.  The  coast 
iben  trends  N.  N.  W.,  5  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Covarrubias,  from  which  it  trends  W.  N. 
W„  10  miles,  to  the  Harbor  of  Manati.  All  this  coast  is  foul,  with  a  reef  which  stretches 
out  from  it  about  2  miles. 

PUERTO  DE  MANATI — The  harbor  of  Manati  may  be  known  by  a  mount,  which   Puerto  de 
mj  be  discovured  inland  from  it,  shaped  like  a  sugar-loaf.     It  is  called  the  Manueco,    Manati. 
and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  15  or  20  miles.     Close  to  the  west  of  this  may  be  seen 
iinotber  hill,  not  quite  so  high  as  it,  which  is  called  Fardo,  or  the  Table  of  Manati,  which, 
when  seen  in  one,  or  shut  in  with  the  Manueco,  looks  like  one  hill,  and  presents  to  the 
view  the  appearance  of  the  Saddle  of  Gibara,  which  appearance  has  deceived  many,  and 
s  dangerous  to  navigation. 
This  Harbor  of  Manati  may  be  considered  as  a  lagoon,  formed  in  low  wet  land,  with  a 
long,  narrow,  and  crooked  channel  in  it,  and  in  which  there  is  depth  of  water  for  small 
vessels  only  ;  as  this  channel,  throughout  its  extent,  is  bordered  with  shoals  of  6  and  8 
feet  of  wiiter,  it  is  running  much  risk  to  enter  it  with  middling  sized  vessels,  and  much 
more  so  with  ships  of  war. 

Three  miles  N.  N.  W.  from  Point  Manati  is  Point  Brava,  which  is  foul,  with  a 
reef.  The  coast  thence,  which  is  also  foul,  with  a  reef,  trends  about  west,  for  5  miles, 
to  the  port  of  Nuevas  Grandos  (Great  News.)  To  enter  this  port,  which  is  fir,  only  for 
vessels  of  12  feet  draft,  it  is  necessary  to  go  in  at  the  break  in  the  reef;  and  the  reef  lies 
out  6  cables,  or  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  coast,  and  follow  in  afterwards  all  that 
distance  by  a  channel  v;hich  the  reef  forms,  and  which  in  some  places  is  only  half  a 
cable's  length  in  breadth.  This  channel  is  very  crooked,  and  therefore  any  one  who  is 
not  well  acquainted  runs  much  risk.  So  soon  as  you  are  abreast  of  the  points  of  the 
harbor,  you  may  run  along  the  coost  at  the  distance  of  one-quarter  of  a  cable,  without 
any  fear. 

NUEVITAS  DEL  PRINCIPE.— From  Nuevas  Grandes  the  coost  trends  about  Nuevitas  Del 
N.  W.,  11  miles,  to  the  Harbor  of  Nuevitas.  It  is  all  foul,  with  a  reef,  and  may,  as  Principe. 
well  as  the  harbor,  be  recognized  by  three  mounts  of  short  extent,  which  rise  within 
the  harbor.  There  are  also  three  islets  in  the  harbor,  named  the  Ballanates.  These 
seem  high  to  the  east,  and  diminish  towards  the  west.  Nuevitas  Harbor  is  a  large  bay, 
with  ranny  shoals,  but  fit  for  any  number  and  class  of  vessels.  To  enter,  it  is  necessary 
to  nvoiil  its  windward  or  east  point,  to  which  you  ought  not  to  approach  nearer  than  a 
cable's  length,  but  approaching,  if  you  chose,  within  half  a  cable's  length  to  the  leeward 
point;  but  the  best  way  is  to  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  which  is  very  long  and 
crooked. 

From  mid-length  of  the  channel,  going  in,  the  coasts  send  out  shoals,  to  keep  clear  of 
which  requires  good  practice,  which  practice  is  equally  necessary  in  the  interior  of  the 
buy. 

POINT  MATERNILLOS  LIGHT,  ('  Colon')  is  situated  on  the  Point,  in  lat.  21°  39'   PoinlMater 
30"  N.,  long.  77°  11'  W.    It  is  obout  110  feet  south  of  the   Point.     It  is  a  revolving  nillos  light. 
light  of  tlio  first  order,  time  of  revolution  one  minute,  height  of  the  light  above  the  sea 
191  feet. 

From  Nuevitas  the  const  trends  nbout  N.  N.  W.  to  the  ""oint  of  Maternillos,  and  is 
tory  clean.  From  Point  Matertiillos  it  trends  about  W.  N.  W.,  and  is  bordered  with  a 
ruef  whicli  stretches  out  a  mile  and  a  half.  All  the  coast  from  Maternillos  rises  a 
litllo',  and  nearly  at  the  eml  of  il,  and  about  14  miles  from  Maternillos,  there  is  a  little 
mount,  culled  'hut  of  Juan  Dunue,  which  forms  a  kin<l  of  table.  At  this  point  com- 
niancoHii  gnmt  white  shonl  or  bank,  which  extends  fur  to  the  west,  and  upon  which  are 
many  keys  and  reefs.  Here  we  cease  from  describing  the  coust,  as  being  of  no  use  to 
navigation,  and  begin  to  describe  the  edge  of  the  white  ground  or  shoal,  with  islets  audi 
teys  upon  it, 

SI 


rTff^^ir^^pfv^ 


«i.ii.  I  1  ilWfffVffii 


322  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

About  W.  N.  W.  from  the  Point  of  Junn  Danue,  but  almost  joined  to  it,  there  ig  o 
little  islot,  and  in  the  same  direction,  and  at  the  distance  of  6  miles,  is  the  isliind  GuRiabn 
This  isliind  mny  be  known  by  four  little  mounts,  which  lie  almost  in  a  line,  east  and  west 
The  first  three  may  readily  bo  seen,  but  it  is  not  so  with  the  fourth,  which  being  of  less 
eleyation  than  the  third,  remains  hidden  by  it :  but  as  you  advance  to  the  westward  It 
opens  out,  and  the  wliolo  four  may  be  perceived.  At  about  4  or  5  leagues  beyond  these 
hillocks  appear,  as  it  were,  many  islets,  caused  by  the  lower  lands  of  the  coasts  being  in- 
visible above  the  horizon. 
Key  Romano,  KEY  ROMANO,  &o.— To  tho  west  from  Guajaba,  at  the  distance  of  8  miles  lies  Key 
^yc.  Romano,  nn  island  stretching  N.  W.  and  S.  E.,  in  which  direction  it  is  IG  leagues  in 

extent.  This  land  properly  consists  of  two  islands,  separated  by  a  channel  half  a  mile 
wide.  The  eastern  isle  has  some  heights,  which,  in  the  middle  of  it,  form  a  kind  of  sad- 
dle. The  western  isle  is  of  low  wet  mangrove  land.  Key  Romano  lies  considerably 
within  the  white  grounds,  and  two  small  keys,  called  Key  Verde,  and  Key  Confites,  lie 
nearly  N.  i  W.  from  its  easternmost  height ;  the  first  at  the  distance  of  7,  and  the  second 
at  12  miles.  Key  Verde  lies  N.  W.  i  \V.  from  the  west  part  af  Guajaba,  and  Key  Con- 
lites  N.  W.  by  N.  Between  these  t\vo  keys  is  an  anchorage,  which  may  be  taken  in  case 
of  necessity. 

The  Key  Verde,  or  Green  Key,  lies  4f  miles  S.  by  E.  from  Key  Confitos,  and  a  reef 
extends  from  it  northward,  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half.  From  Key  Confites  n 
reef  likewise  extends  to  the  southward  one  mile,  and  there  is  a  clear  passrige  of  moro 
than  2  miles  within  these  reefs. 

In  order,  tiierefore,  to  gain  this  anchorage,  when  coining  from  the  eastward,  you  must 
stand  in  for  tho  passage  formed  by  these  reefs,  keeping  a  little  nearer  to  Confites  than  to 
Key  Vordo;  and  when  the  middle  of  Confites  bears  due  N.  \V.  by  N.,  and  the  middle  of 
Key  Verde  S.  by  W.,  you  will  bo  on,  or  nearly  on  the  edge  of  tho  bank.  Tlien  lay  the 
ship's  head  W.  N.  W..  and  stand  on  in  this  direction,  until  tho  southernmost  part  of  Key 
Confitos  boars  N.,  when  you  will  stand  N.  N.  W.,  or  a  little  more  to  tho  northward. 
Having  at  length  brought  tho  south  end  of  Confites  N.  N.  E.,  half  a  mile  distant,  you 
may  let  go  tho  anchor  in  3i  or  4  fathoms,  on  sandy  ground. 

In  getting  under  weigh  from  this  anchorage,  should  the  wind  not  allow  you  to  stand  to 
tho  S.  K.,  you  must  bear  away  to  tho  N.  VV.  by  N.,  until  you  have  cleared  n  roof  of  rocks 
extending  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  N.  W.  from  Confites  Key;  after  which  you 
may  s'and  to  the  north,  in  order  the  sooner  to  gain  tho  main  channel. 

Worit  from  Koy  Verde  there  is  a  round  key,  named  Palomus,  (pigeon's)  with  various 
other  small  ones  in  its  neiglil)orhood.  To  the  northward  is  the  island  numed  Koy  de 
Cruz,  (Key  of  the  Cross,)  which  is  about  13  miles  in  extent,  N.  by  W.and  S.by  E,  To 
tho  N.  E.  of  this  isle,  ami  at  tho  distance  of  3  miles,  there  is,  on  the  very  edge  of  the 
grounds,  a  shoal,  named  Tributario  de  Minerva,  which  lies  N.  41°  W.  from  Key  Confites, 
at  12  miles  distance. 

The  edge  of  the  grounds,  which  is  roef,  stretches  out  a  mile  and  a  half  from  .Tuan  Dn- 
nue,  2i  miles  from  (Juiijaba,  and  from  the  E.  N.  E.  to  N.  E.,  from  tho  high  part  of  tho  Key 
Romano,  forms  an  opening,  l)y  which,  according  to  report,  a  vessel  may  enler,aud anchor 
in  6  fathoms,  upon  sand,  but  good  holding  ground  :  but  as  wo  cannot  guarantee  tiiid,  any 
one  wlio  makes  the  attempt  ought  to  exert  great  caution. 

From  this  opening  the  reef  rises  again,  but  makes  the  opening  already  described  be- 
tween tho  Key  Verde  and  Key  Confites;  and  thence  the  edge  of  the  ground  continues, 
sometimes  foul,  and  nt  others  without  reef,  to  tho  Tril)utario  Shoal.  This  shoal  brenks 
with  a  fresh  breeze,  and  shows  ulxive  tho  surface  at  low  water.  Six  miU»3  W.  by  N, 
from  it  is  Key  Haril,  (Hnrrei  Key.)  and  farther  to  the  west  is  Great  Paredmi  Key.  The 
edge  of  the  grounds,  which  is  sometimes  foul  and  sometimes  clean,  lies  out  2  miles  from 
Key  Hiiril,  and  one  and  a  half  mile  from  the  nortli  part  of  the  (ireat  Paredon.  Tlie  lat- 
ter key  alfords  good  nnch(n"uge,  for  either  the  time  of  breezes  or  land  winds.  To  ascer- 
tain and  take  it.  remember  tlint,  at  a  coble's  length  to  the  north  of  its  north  point,  tiiere 
is  a  small  round  key,  which  you  nugiit  to  lenvo  on  the  larboard  hand  wlniii  going  in,  and 
passing  within  from  half  a  cable  to  a  cable's  length  from  it.  You  anchor  as  soon  as  you 
are  sludtered  from  tho  land  of  tho  (Jreat  Paredon,  in  tlio  deplii  of  water  lliat  suits  the 
vesstd's  draft.  On  entorintj  you  will  leave  to  starboard  another  key,  rathrr  larger  than 
tho  one  you  leave  to  larboard:  it  is  called  the  JMiddle  Pannlou,  and  lies  aljout  2i  milo3 
from  the  first. 

From  the  Middle  Paredon  to  the  west,  there  is  another  large  key,  called  Coco,  from 
the  middle  of  which  to  the  west  end  there  is  anchorage  on  its  norfli  side. 

To  tho  west  of  Coco  follow  the  grou|)s  of  trees  calhnl  St.  Philip's,  Guilorraos,  anil 
Santa  Maria's.  To  the  west  of  these,  and  at  the  distance  of  10  leagues  from  (Joco  Key, 
lies  that  called  Key  Francis.  Key  Fra' '-is  maybe  known  by  a  white  llng-stafr  with  a 
pale  topmast,  and  a  half  barrel  on  the  I  ,  painied  red,  and  two  pilot  houses  near.  The 
flag-staff  is  on  a  low  point  of  rocks  at  mo  west  point.  If  th»'  pilots  are  there,  they  will 
hoibt  tho  Spanish  (lag  near  one  of  the  houses,  but  will  not  come  outside  of  the  point, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


323 


Yon  vanj  stnnd  in,  giving  the  |:A)int3i  miles  berth,  nnd  if  tliore  is  no  pilot  there,  run  in  S. 
till  n  sqimre  white  spot  nt  the  head  of  the  bny  benrs  K,  N.  E.,  nni\  then  run  for  it  till  tlie 
llag-8tnft"  bi'nrs  N.  or  N.  N.  W.,  nnd  nnchor  in  34  or  4  fiitlioms,  a;oo(i  holding  ground. 
Oo  not  nnchor  off  the  point,  (the  point  bearing  east.)  there  being  5  fathoms,  and  rocliy 
bottom,  and  danger  of  losing  anchors;  or  you  niiiy  anchor :  the  point  bearing  N.  E. : 
bDtrun  into  34  or  4  fathoms,  as  outside  of  4  fatlioms  it  is  rocl<y  bottom.  The  land  to  the 
westward  of  Key  Francis,  trends  to  the  S.  E.  and  N.  VV. ;  to  the  eastward  of  the  key, 
E,  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  The  Armedinas  Shoal  bears  N.  W.  4  W.  from  Key  Francis, 
about  10  miles,  and  always  breaks,  and  is  about  3  miles  from  the  land.  Westward  from 
this  key  is  another  portion  of  keys,  one  of  which  cannot  be  distinguished  from  another 
without  difficulty,  as  they  are  so  much  alike. 

S\QUA  LE  GRANDE. — This  port  has  been  recently  opened,  nnd  a  chart  published 
attbe  expense  of  Moss.  Drake.  There  are  9  feet  water  at  tlie  anchorage.  There  are 
tiiree  entrances  ;  the  easternmost  one  is  in  long.  80°,  nnd  tho  western  one  is  in  80"  08'. 
An  inspection  of  the  chart  is  necessary  to  safe  navigation. 

The  edge  of  the  grounds  from  Kej'  Francis,  and  even  something  before  that,  is  clean, 
and  the  lead  will  there  warn  you  before  you  are  in  any  dnngor  upon  it.  Nevertheless, 
there  is  considerable  risk  from  the  Baxo  Nicolao,  or  Nicliolas  Siionl,  whicli  in  a  spot  of 
sand,  lying  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  northward  of  the  other  keys,  and  is  46  fath- 
oms long,  and  5  fathoms  wide.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  reef  to  the  N.  E.,  N..  and  IN.  W., 
to  the  distance  of  a  cable  and  a  half.  Two  miles  to  the  west  from  it  another  shoal  breaks, 
which  is  named  the  Alcatraces,  and  as  these  shoals  present  great  dangers  *n  the  naviga- 
tor, it  is  necessary  to  give  some  -marks  to  recognize  them  by,  and  which  will  indicate  the 
position  of  a  vessel  in  respect  to  the  shonls. 

Among  other  mountains  which  are  on  the  land  of  Cuba,  and  about  S.  S.  E.  and  S.  from 
these  shoals,  the  Sierra  Morena  (Black  Mountain)  is  the  best  known.  It  is  long,  and  lies 
N,  W.  and  S.  E.  The  S.  El  head  of  it  is  moderately  higli,  and  upon  its  extremotios  are 
various  points  or  peoks  (pichanchos.)  Of  tliose  peaks  the  two  wliich  are  on  the  N.  W. 
extremity  of  the  Sierra  (mountflin)  are  high,  nnd  lie  N.  and  S.,  true,  witli  Nicolao  Shoal. 
A  little  more  to  the  west  of  the  Sierra  Morena  rises  another  mountain,  with  three  heights 
on  it,  of  which  the  middle  one  is  the  highest;  it  lies  S.  by  W.,  true,  from  the  Nicolao 
Shoal.  These  heiglits  are  named  the  Tetas  de  la  Bella,  (IBelle's  Paps,)  and  being  N.  and 
S.,true,  with  the  middle  one  of  them,  you  will  bo  alt^o  N.  and  S.  with  the  Bay  of  Cadiz 
Key,  and  past  both  the  Nicolao  and  Alcatraces  Shoals. 

To  the  west  of  the  Tetas  de  la  Bella,  two  mountains  are  seen.  The  first  is  of  regular 
extent;  tne  second,  or  westernmost,  very  long,  and  nt  the  end  of  it  are  two  hills,  named 
Sierra  de  Iiimones,  (Lime  Mountain.)  which  runs  S.  by  W.,  true,  with  the  western  ex- 
tremity of  the  Bay  of  Cadi/,  Key.  Farther  to  t'lo  west  lies  out  another  mountain,  of  pro- 
portioned extent,  named  Santa  Cliira ;  and  someithing  to  the  west  of  it  may  be  seen  the 
Paps  of  Caniaricoa,  of  which  there  are  four,  tliough  in  some  positions  there  do  not  ap- 
pear to  be  so  many.  The  middle  one  is  tlie  largest,  and  lies  S.  W.  with  the  western- 
most part  of  Key  Cruz  del  Padre  (Key  of  the  Father's  Cross.)  'i'hoso  mountains  are 
the  highest  which  are  on  the  north  coast  of  Cuba:  but  it  is  to  be  remarked  timt  tliose 
which  are  to  the  east  and  west  of  them  are  very  e^ual  to  those  of  the  west;  indeed,  are 
little  less  elevated  than  these  mountains  themselves.  Such  are  the  lands  that  are  seen 
in  the  interior  of  the  island,  from  the  proximities  of  the  Nicolao  Slinal. 

The  White  Ground  still  trends  to  the  west.  There  are  many  keys  upon  the  edge  or 
border  of  it,  and  the  edge  is  dangerous,  having  some  reefs  on  it.  The  ground  and  keys 
terminate  at  Point  Tacos.  The  keys  named  ftlono,  Piedras,  and  Moiiillo.  are  the  west- 
ernmost on  the  reef.  Those  afford  good  anchorage,  whore  shelter  from  the  swell  of  the 
norths  may  be  found. 

THE  yCACOS  KEYS.— The  north-eastward  of  Port  Ycacos,  at  the  distance  of 
about  a  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  bank,  lie  the  throe  islands  called  by  the  Spaniards  Cayo 
Mono. 

PIEDRAS  AND  MONILLO. — These  keys  afford  convenient  anchorage  to  vessels 
which  cannot  advantageously  use  the  Harbor  of  Miitanzas.  The  southernmost  and 
smnlle.st  is  the  Monillo,  which  lies  at  the  distance  of  3  miles  from  Point  Ycacos.  From 
.^Ionillo  to  the  Cayo  do  Piedras,  (Rocky  Key,)  the  distance  is  only  half  a  mile,  and  from 
the  Intter  to  Mono  Key  it  is  2  miles.  At  a  mile  and  a  quarter  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Mono 
there  is  a  dangerous  reef. 

CARDKNAS. — On  Cayo  Piedras  or  Stone  Key,  tliere  is  n  lighthouse  94  feet  high  ;  it 
is  a  revolving  ligtit;  time  of   revolution  one   minute  lifty  seconds  of  light,  and  ton  of 


Saqua  Le 
Grande. 


The  Ycacos. 
Keys. 

Piedras  and 

Monillo . 


Cardenas. 

Lighthouse, 


On  Cayo  Diana,  which  is  about  4  miles  S.  of  Cayo  Piedras,  there  is  a  light  49  feet 
liigh;  it  is  a  fixed  light,  red  and  white. 

Bring  the  light  on  Piedras  or  Stone  Key  to  bear  south,  distant  5  miles,  then  steer  S.  E. 
iE.for  a  small  ivund  island,  distant  about  2  miles.  When  you  are  within  a  quarter  of  a 
milo  of  this  island,  you  will  perceive  two  islands  to  the  eastward,  one  bearing  S.  S.  E. 


Light. 


334 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  the  other  S.  i  E.     Steer  for  the  moat  western  extremity  of  the  one  bearing  S.  S.  G, 

•  until  within  half  a  mile  of  it,  and  then  take  tho  middle  channel  between  them.  ' 

There  are  two  spar  buoys  on  each  side  of  this  channel,  painted  white,  with  a  gtrin  of 

white  bunting  bent  on  to  tbeir  tope.     There  ia  also  a  lookout  station  erected  upon  tlie 

island,  on  the  larboard  hand  going  in.     It  is  a  great  clumsy  log  hvuse,  with  a  high  plat< 

form  upon  it,  and  I  have  been  told  a  light  is  sometimes  carried  upon  it;  but  during  mv 

stay  there,  a  period  of  several  months,  I  have  never  seen  it  lit.     Upon  the  island,  on  tho 

>        starboard  side,  is  a  large  fmhing-house,  built  of  logs,  with  the  gable  end  towards  the 

water.     When  you  have  reached  the  centre  of  the  channel,  so  that  the  spar  buoys  are 

upon  either  beam,  steer  S.  W.  i  W.,  for  the  centre  of  the  three  hills,  and  tho  town  of 

Cardenas  will  soon  open  on  your  larboard  bow ;  and  when  it  boars  S.  W.  by  S.,  haul  up 

for  it,  and  come  to  in  from  9  to  11  feet  water. 

Pilots  can  always  be  obtained  in  pleasant  weather,  by  making  tho  pro|)er  signals.  la 
heavy  weather,  however,  they  are  unable  to  board  you,  their  light  skill's  being  utterly 
unfit  for  a  heavy  sea.  If  you  make  tlie  harbor  in  heavy  weather,  you  will  have  to  take 
your  vessel  in  without  a  pilot.  The  channel  is  an  intricate  one,  abounding  in  shoals  and 
reefs,  which  put  out  from  the  numerous  islets  that  fill  the  harbor ;  but  by  observing  the 
above  directions,  vessels  of  10  feet  draft,  and  under,  will  be  brought  in  safely. 

Joceno  lies  to  the  east  of  Cardenas,  distant  about  6  miles.  It  is  nothing' but  a  collec- 
tion of  warehouses  for  the  storage  of  molasses  and  sugar,  and  has  not  depth  of  water  suf- 
ficient even  for  the  small  schooners  that  ply  along  the  coast. 

The  anchorage,  in  regular  soundings,  of  5  to  7  fathoms,  bottom  of  sand,  is  to  the  south- 
ward of  Mono,  and  on  the  east  and  south  of  Piedras,  where  ships  may  lie  defended  IVoin 
any  sea,  coining  from  the  noithward.  The  ground  is  sandy  and  clean,  with  from  5  to  6 
fathoms,  and  vessels  here  may  at  all  times  get  under  sail.  To  take  the  anchorage  eo  suun 
as  you  discover  the  keys,  stand  for  the  middle  of  either  passage,  and  let  go  tiiu  anchor  at 
pleasure.  It  is  only  necessary  that  in  approaching  from  the  N.  E.  you  must  take  care  to 
avoid  the  reef  above  mentioned,  lying  to  the  north-eastward  of  Mono. 
Matamai.  MATANZAS. — From  Point  Ycacos  tlie  const  trends  to  the  S.   W.  and  W.  S.  W.  14 

miles,  to  the  Point  of  Maya,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  tho  great  Bay  of  Miitanzas. 
You  may  run  along  this  coast  at  the  distance  of  a  league.  Tho  Pan  of  MatnnztiH,  wliivh 
distinguishes  the  bay,  appears  from  this  direction  like  an  insulated  mountain,  Imving  a 
round  surface,  and  without  peaks,  water-courses,  precipices,  or  other  inequalities,  ex- 
ctipting  a  suinll  fissure  near  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  sunmiit,  wliich  can  hai'dly  be  nuticoJ 
at  a  distance,  being  of  so  little  depth.  When  bearing  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.,  it  appears 
like  one  round  hill ;  but  on  any  other  bearing,  another  appears  on  each  side  of  it,  ad- 
joining, and  not  so  high.  The  land  to  the  eastward  is  even,  though  not  very  low;  but  it 
begins  to  rise  at  Mutnnzas  with  a  gradual  slope,  and  to  the  west  the  coast  may  be  aeoo  ut 
the  distance  of  8  leagues,  but  it  is  alike  even  or  level,  without  any  remarkable  height, 
other  thnn  the  pan,  wliich  appears  over  it. 

The  liaibor  of  Matanzas,  which  is  at  tho  bottom  of  the  bay,  is  well  sheltered  from  tlie 
nortiis,  but  it  has  several  reefs.  The  Derrotero  says  it  is  difliciilt  to  got  out  of  this  place; 
for,  as  there  is  not  room  to  bent  out,  it  is  necessary  to  get  clear  of  it  with  the  lai.d  breeze, 
which,  during  the  season  ot  the  norths,  occurs  but  seldom.  The  harbor  is  oi  isy  en- 
trance, but  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  some  slionls  which  lie  almost  in  the  very  aui  mirage, 
To  accuniplish  this,  it  is  advisable  to  keep  along  the  leeward  coast,  at  the  distance  of  two 
or  three  cables'  length,  passing  Point  Maya  ut  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  while 
it  bears  to  tlie  southward.  VVith  the  vessel's  head  nearly  south,  you  pass  the  western 
shore  at  the  distance  above  mentioned ;  and  so  soon  as  you  see  the  Castle  of  St.  tSeverJ. 
no  bearing  W.  4  S.,  steer  in  that  direction,  until  the  houses,  which  will  be  seen  in  the  S. 
W.  corner  of  the  bay,  bear  S.  35°  W.,  when  you  must  steer  towards  them,  and  anchor 
so  soon  as  the  Castle  of  St.  Soverino  boars  between  N.  W.  j  W.  and  N.  W.  i  N.,  wliere 
you  will  have  5  or  6  fathoms  of  water,  or  loose  clay  or  ooze. 

'J'o  get  out  of  this  harbor,  it  is  best  to  clear  yourself  by  towing,  or  by  the  aid  of  the     i 
land  breeze,  if  you  have  any,  at  a  time  when  you  consider  the  weather  as  settled,  and     { 
there  is  no  appearance  of  norths  coming  on.     If  agreeable,  you  may  cross  over,  and  come 
to  an  anchor  on  the  bank  or  shoal  point  of  Maya,  which  will  be  a  proper  situation  to  make 
sail  from,  wlien  convenient. 

Rtmarks  on  the  Harbor  of  Matanzas,  by  Mr.  Bellamy. — "  This  harbor  is  easy  of  ac- 
cess, and  capable  of  holding  a  great  number  of  shipping  of  different  sizes,  completely 
sheltered  from  all  winds,  except  those  from  the  N.  K.  quarter,  which  send  in  a  heavy 
sea.  The  anchorage  is  partly  protected  on  the  N.  E.  by  two  shoals,  named  Baxo  Nuivo, 
or  New  Slioal.  and  La  Laja.  On  tho  shallowest  part  of  the  New  Shoal,  which  is  also 
the  northeiumost,  is  a  buoy,  with  a  pole  and  a  white  flag,  in  2  fathoms  water,  and  on  the 
soHthortiniost  (La  Laja)  is  a  pole  with  a  white  flag,  in  2  feet:  the  principal  entrance  is 
between  the  two  flags,  and  the  channel  is  about  2  cables'  length  wide.  These  (lags  are 
very  small,  and  nt  times  cannot  he  seen  at  more  than  half  a  mile  distant;  and  as  they  are 
badly  fixed,  very  often  break  adrift.  Therefore  a  stranger  ought  to  pay  strict  attentioa 
to  the  leading  mark,  and  keep  a  good  lookout  for  the  shallow  water. 


BLUNT'S  AMERCUN  COA.ST  PILOT. 


336 


>•  The  lending  mnrk  is  the  south  side,  or  notrh  in  the  pnn,  on  with  n  Inr^e  white  house, 
itnnding  on  a  hill  nt  the  hack  of  the  town,  nnd  is  the  wesreriunost  house  visible,  bearing 
\V.  S.  W.  i  W.,  by  compass.  This  mnrk  will  carry  a  vosael  in  mid-i^hannnl  botwoon 
the  shoiils  ;  and  when  the  Castio  of  Sf .  Severino  bears  from  N.  W.  i  W.  to  N.  W.  4  N., 
you  miiy,  if  in  a  lurj^e  ship,  anchor  in  frotn  5  to  10  fathoms,  and  at  the  diHtance  of  a  mile 
from  tlio  town.  Small  vessels  may  anchor  farther  up,  within  one-third  of  a  mile  from 
the  town,  according  to  their  draft  of  water. 

"  Thwre  nro  also  two  other  good  channels  into  Matanzas :  one  between  the  New  Shoal 
sml  tlio  Ca«tlo  of  St.  Severino,  having  8  or  9  fathoms  in  it ;  and  tho  other  to  the  south- 
wnrd  of  the  South  Bank ;  but  tho  middle  chnnnel  is  that  preferred. 

••The  Spanish  plan,  in  tho  Portulano  de  la  America  SetentrionnI,  published  nt  Madrid, 
in  1800,  is  very  incorrect,  with  respect  to  both  distance  nnd  soundings,  and  should  not  be 
reiiod  on.  The  tides  rise  and  fall  at  times  botwenn  2  and  3  feet;  but  they  are  influenced 
by  tho  winds,  and  very  irregular.  It  is  not  so  difficult  to  get  out  of  this  place  as  has  been 
(lescriliBd.  During  the  19  days  thnt  we  lay  hore,  the  sea  and  land  brenzes  were  regular  ; 
nnd  in  the  event  of  their  not  being  so,  vessels  may  beat  out  at  almost  any  time,  if  acquaint- 
ed with  the  place." 

The  Dorrotero  continues:  From  the  Harbor  of  Miitnnzas  tho  coast  rounds  to  the  N. 
W.,  to  the  Punta  de  Guanos,  which  is  the  most  projecting  point  to  tho  northward,  and 
is  distant  fi'oni  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  or  bay  about  4  miles.  From  Point  Guanos  the 
const  runs  almost  (west)  W.  i  N.,  n  distance  of  40  miles,  to  the  Morro  of  the  Havana  : 
it  in  nil  clnnn  and  bold  to,  nnd  may  be  run  along  nt  the  distance  of  a  league,  or  loss,  if  re- 
quired ;  iniismuuh  ns  there  is  no  other  risk  than  a  rocky  shoal,  of  11  fnot,  extending  two 
miles  from  the  land,  19  miles  from  Point  Guanos,  which  stretches  off  from  the  coast,  be- 
tween the  Rincon,  or  Corner,  and  the  Punta  de  Tarara,  or  Cobre.  Along  this  coast  are 
soundings  on  sand,  which  extend  more  or  less  from  shore,  nnd  of  which  the  edges  nre 
steep  and  clear,  so  that  you  suddonly  pass  from  100  fathoms  to  20.  With  the  load  going 
there  is  no  risk  running  along,  because  the  soundings  will  warn  you  of  the  limits  into 
which  you  stand  without  danger;  and  in  good  weather  you  may  pass  the  night  by  drop- 
ping n  kedge  upon  these  soundings,  which  manoeuvre  may  sometimes  be  convenient, 
either  to  avoid  passing  your  port,  if  tho  wind  blows  fresh  at  night,  or  that  you  may  not 
lose  ground,  if  the  land  breeze  is  light  or  calm,  as  the  current  constantly  runs  eastward, 
at  the  mean  rate  of  one  mile  per  hour.  The  hdls  or  mountains  of  Jaruco,  which  rise 
nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  coast,  is  a  point  which  serves  to  recognize  it  by,  and  ascer- 
tain your  situation. 

HAVANA. — This,  ns  noticed,  is,  in  point  of  imporbince,  the  principnl  harbor  of  Cuba, 
nnd  has  been  scribed  as  one  of  the  best  in  the  world,  being  deep  enough  for  vessels  of 
tho  liirjit'st  class,  sufficiently  capacious  to  receive  a  thousand  ships  of  wnr,  nnd  so  safe  that 
vessels  ri'le  securely  without  cable  or  nnchor.  The  entrance  is  by  a  channel  half  a  mile 
long,  80  narrow  that  only  a  single  vessel  <  an  ent«r  ut  once,  and  fortified  through  the  whole 
distance  wi'h  platforms,  works,  iit)d  artdlery.  The  mouth  of  this  channel  is  secured  by 
two  strong  ciistles,  ns  exhibited  in  the  ti,rure  bononth.  Thnt  on  the  eastern  side,  cnlled 
Morro  Castle,  is  built  in  the  form  of  a  1  'gle,  fortified  with  bastions,  and  mounted  with 
forty  pieces  of  cannon,  almost  level  with  'water.  U'  the  opposite  side  of  the  channel 
is  another  strong  fort,  cnlled  the  Punta  C.  'e,  connected  with  the  castio  town,  on  the 
north.  The  city  ih  situuted  on  the  western  sule  of  the  harbor,  and  is  sun-out/ded  by  ram- 
parts, bastions,  and  ditches. 


Havana. 


The  Mot  ro  Castij,  Liglulwuse,  and  Entrance  to  Havana. 

MORRO  LIGHT  is  ujjoo  Marro  Castle,  and  is  144  feet  high;  it  is  a  fixed  light  when 
seen  from  a  less  distance  than  30  miles;  beyond  that  distance  it  has  an  eclipse  of  2b 
seconds  in  every  eight  minutes. 

The  entrance  U)  Havana  is  between  the  Morro  Castle  and  Fort  Punta:  here  it  is  about 
one  fourth  of  a  mio  wide,  and  the  direction  is  S.  E.  by  E. ;  the  chaimel  narrows  so 
much,  that,  when  you  nro  one  half  of  a  mile  from  the  M')rro,  it  is  only  six  hundred  feet 
wide.    The  best  water  is  nearest  to  the  Morro  side. 


MOTTU  light. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


1.0 


I.I 


!.25 


■  50     i"^" 


Hi 


125 


2.2 


US   120 


1.8 


U   11.6 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STi)i2UT 

WIBSTER.N.Y.  MSSC 

(716)  872-4503 


^"4 


O 


■x> 


C^ 


>(V 


■^ 


l/.A 


O 


^ 


mp^pnf" 


"?w 


i.ipiiimpiiaii 


■p«V<^<w<mii  nm'jf  j.MHi.  I  ji.jjuu-  Mi\>j  <!pmm<ippiipi|p 


326 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


In  passing  the  first  castle,  (Morro,)  you  must  not  conne  to  anchor,  as  a  reef  lies  off  the 
stDrbuai'd  hand  ns  you  enter,  which  is  dangerous. 

The  Harbor  of  Havana  may  be  distinguished  at  a  distance  by  the  Paps  of  Managua 
which,  B9  already  stated,  lie  on  the  meridian  of  the  entrance ;  while  the  land,  both  to  the 
eastward  and  westward,  is  low  and  equal,  with  the  exception  only  of  the  Mono,  or  little 
hill,  surmounted  by  the  fortifications  and  lighthouse.  At  6  leagues  to  the  eastward,  the 
Hills  of  Jaruco,  or  Iron  Hills,  may  bo  seen.  These  are  of  moderate  height,  and  detached. 
The  tables  of  Mariel  are  about  6  leagues  to  the  westfvard ;  and  in  advancing,  not  only 
these,  but  the  Hill  of  Cavunas,  may  at  times  be  seen.  [The  form  of  the  harbor  can  be 
best  understood  by  reference  to  the  j)articular  plan  of  it,  from  the  survey  of  Don  Jose 
Del  Rio,  by  whom  the  position  of  the  INIorro  Castlo  has  been  determined  and  delineated 
on  a  chart,  published  by  E.&G.  W.  BLUNT.]  The  entrance  in  hes  nearly  S.E.  by  E. and 
N.  W.  by  W.,  and  it  is,  tiierefore,  very  difficult  to  enter  when  the  breeze  is  not  to  the 
northward  of  E.  N.  E.  The  breeze  enters  at  about  lOh.  A.  M.,  and  blows  until  sunset : 
and  therefore,  it  is  only  between  these  hours  that  you  can  sail  into  the  port.  It  is  very 
difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  sail  in  when  the  breeze  is  from  E.  N.  E.  to  S.  E.,  which  it 
often  is  in  the  rainy  season,  and  sometimes  even  in  the  dry  season.  Under  such  circum- 
stances, the  only  resource  is  to  anchor  in  the  Morro  Shoal,  or  Bank,  and  enter  by  towing 
or  warping,  when  the  breeze  takes  oft",  which,  as  already  stated,  is  at  night.  As,  on  en- 
tering, these  difficulties  are  to  be  encountered,  so,  on  going  out,  you  will  not  be  quite  free : 
for  when  the  breeze  comes  to  the  N.  E.,  which  it  often  does  in  the  dry  season,  or  that  of 
the  norths,  it  is  not  only  inconvenient,  from  the  wind's  being  scant,  but  also  because  a 
swell  sets  into  the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  which  renders  this  operation  much  exposed  to 
danger.  Generally  speaking,  it  is  best  to  enter  about  mid-day,  and  to  gu  out  at  the  dawn 
of  the  day.  Should  the  wind  be  scant  for  setting  in,  it  is  advisable  to  anchor  outside  tbe 
Morro,  and  tow  or  war])  in  at  night. 

In  approaching  the  Havana  from  the  eastward,  care  phould  be  taken  to  avoid  a  shoal 
spot,  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  tiie  shore,  and  on  which  the  ship  Mariner,  of 
Port  Glasgow,  grounded  in  1815.  The  vessel  drew  about  17  feet  of  water  ;  and  from  the 
ehoal  of  Morro  Castle  bore  about  S.  S.  W.,  distant  one  mile.  This  notice  is  given  iVom 
the  information  of  Mr.  Cooper,  who  was  mate  of  tlie  ship  Jane,  of  Glasgow,  then  in  com- 
pany with  the  Mariner. 

The  Morro  Bank  affords  anchorage  safe  enough  in  the  time  of  the  ordinary  winds  and 
land  breezes,  but  is  much  exposed  in  the  season  of  the  norths,  and  in  the  hurricane 
months.  It  is,  therefore,  advisable  to  anchor  so  as  to  have  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  open, 
and  to  be  extremely  vigilant,  lest  you  should  be  surprised.  To  direct  yourself  ioto 
the  harbor,  the  eye  may  suffice,  for  in  the  channel  there  is  no  other  danger  thai,  the 
shallows,  which  stretch  out  from  eacli  side.  That  on  the  Morro  side  does  not  extend 
one-third  of  a  r^ble  from  the  shore.  To  avoid  tho  loewnrd  shoal,  it  is  requisite  not  to 
go  farther  from  the  eastern  shore  than  a  cable's  length  ;  working  your  vessel  so  us  to  run 
along  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  coast  on  the  N.  E.  side,  the  mid-channel  being  at 
about  three-quarters  of  a  cable's  length.  When  once  abreast  of  the  middle  of  Castle 
Blanca  on  the  N.  E.,  which  will  be  when  you  are  abreast  of  the  N.  E.  or  front  side  of 
the  city,  you  may  keep  away,  and  anchor  opposite  to  the  eastern  part  of  the  city,  at  what 
distance  you  choose.  The  largest  ships  may  approach  near  enough  to  lay  u  plank  on 
shore. 

At  a  short  distance  without  the  Morro  Castlo,  to  tho  S.  W.,  is  a  very  small  shoal,  with 
5  fathoms  over  it.  This  bank  is  to  be  feared  only  when  there  is  much  swell  on  ;  and  at 
other  times  tho  largest  ships  may  pass  over  it  without  touching.  Even  when  the  water 
begins  to  shoalen,  ynu  need  not  be  afraid  of  it,  as  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  tho  Morro, 
you  will  be  perfectly  clear  of  it.  Finally,  if  you  wish  to  i)ass  in  without  any  risk,  send  a 
boat  to  place  herself  on  the  Ca|,^tan  Shoal,*  which  will  serve  you  for  a  mark ;  then  steer 
so  as  to  pass  outside  of  her,  and  you  will  be  free  from  all  danger. 

A  respectable  English  navigator,  in  giving  directions  for  the  Havanii,  has  said,  "Od go- 
ing in,  with  the  winil  from  the  eastward,  keep  as  close  to  the  Morro  as  possiblt;.  So  soon 
as  you  are  within  it,  you  may  mret  with  flaws  and  variable  winds  ;  and  should  you  be 
obliged  to  let  go  an  anchor,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  shorten  sail  and  veer  cublu  quick- 
ly, as  the  ground  at  tho  entrance  of  the  harbor  is  not  very  good  for  holding.  All  shipj 
lying  in  the  channel  of  tho  liigoon,  moor  head  and  stern.  There  are  two  wrecks  lying 
rather  more  than  2  cables'  length  within  the  entrance  of  tho  harbor,  and  denoted  by  buoys 
with  sinnll  flags  ;  the  channel  lies  between  them." 

Ships  of  war  and  large  merchu-.it  vessels,  generally  warp  up  the  harbor,  and  anchorolT 
the  sheers  or  arsenal,  where  there  is  sufficient  room  for  a  great  number  of  ships  to 
moor,  in  from  7  to  5  fathoms. 


•The  Cajmtan  la  the  projecting  edge  of  the  shelf  within  tho  Morro,  at  about  a  cable's  length 
A  aiuiilar  projection  farther  in,  on  the  same  dide,  is  the  I'astora  or  Sbep- 


from  tho  lighthouse 
herdosB. 


BLUNTS   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

From  the  Morro,  or  Castle  of  Hnvana,  to  Punta  de  Ycacos,  (or  Yacos,)  the  distance 
istwenty  leagues,  and  the  coUrse  nearly  E.  |  N.  From  this  point  maybe  seen  the  Loaf 
or  Pan  of  Matanzas,  to  the  W.  S.  W.  This  hill,  which  is  the  northernmost  that  you 
will  d6?J»y  to  the  eastward  of  the  Havana,  lies  over  the  Bay  of  Matanzas,  and  constitutes 
the  giiind  point  of  departure  for  ships  bound  hence  to  the  northward,  through  the  Strait 
ofFloiida. 


Pan  of  Matanzas  to  the  E.  S.  E. 


827 


ISIiArVD  OF  €V1IA. 


SOUTH  COAST. 

WE  now  commence  with  the  south  coast  of  Cuba  from  Cape  Maysi,  proceeding  regu- 
larly westward  to  Cape  Antonio,  including  the  Isle  of  Pines,  &c.  From  Cape  Antonio 
we  continue  to  describe  the  coast  eastward  along  the  north  side  to  Havana. 

The  greater  portion  of  the  coasts  of  Cuba  are  extremely  foul.  Those  most  clear  are 
the  southern  coasts,  from  Cape  Maysi  to  Cape  Cruz,  the  N.  E.  coast  from  Cape  Maysi 
to  Punta  [Point!  Maternillo,  and  the  N.  W.  coast,  from  the  Port  of  Mariel  to  Matan- 
zas. On  the  other  parts  are  many  shallows,  keys,  and  reefs,  so  thickly  planted  and  so 
numerous,  that  in  many  places  they  form  barriers,  which  prevent  access  to  the  coast  oi 
the  island. 

The  land  to  the  south-westward  of  Cape  Maysi,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  it,  begins 
to  be  high  and  clean,  and  it  trends  about  S.  W.  i  W.,  6  j  miles,  forming  a  small  bay, 
with  a  sandy  beach,  named  Caia  de  Ovarado.  From  this  cala  or  cove,  the  shore  trends 
tibout  S.  S.  W.,  4  miles,  to  Punta  Negra,  or  Point  Negra,  whence  it  winds  more  to  the 
W.  S.  W.,  about  4  miles  more,  to  Punta  Caleta;  v?8  miles  W.  4  S.  from  which,  lies 
Point  Savuua-la-Mar,  and  4  miles  to  the  westward  from  the  latter,  is  the  Port  of  Baiti- 
qaeri. 

The  'Derrotero'  says  that,  "  From  Cape  Maysi  to  Point  Negra,  the  shore  ought  not 
to  be  approached  nearer  than  two  leagues  ;  for,  as  there  is  no  inducement  to  approach  it, 
surely  it  would  be  foolish  to  run  in  upon  a  coast  which  lies  completely  open  to  the  breezes, 
and  along  which  there  is  no  anchorage,  although  it  is  clear,  and  has  no  unseen  danger. 
From  Point  Negra  to  Baitiquera,  there  is  no  risk  in  running  along  shore,  at  the  distance 
of  a  mile ;  and  along  this  part,  and  to  the  leeward  of  the  various  points  thereon,  you  may 
anchor  in  the  depth  of  water  which  suits  you,  from  35  to  7  fathoms ;  but  the  best  bottom 
is  in  16  fiithoms,  where  you  will  be  at  a  good  distance  off  shore.  In  this  place,  several 
rivers  discharge,  from  which  you  may  provide  yourself  with  excellent  water,  and  plenty 
of  firewood  may  be  procured." 

The  Cape  Bueno,  or  Ocoa  Point  of  the  English  charts,  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Punta  de  la  Caletas  of  the  Spanish  :  and  it  has  been  said  by  a  British  navigator,  "  With- 
in this  cape  is  the  Bay  of  Ocoa,  in  which  there  is  anchorage.  The  marks  for  anchoring 
are,  the  easternmost  point  bearing  E.  S.  E.,  about  one  mile  and  a  half,  when  the  Table 
Land  of  St.  Nicholas'  Mole  will  bo  in  a  line  with  the  point.  You  may  anchor  in  any 
water,  the  depths  being  from  35  to  7  fathoms,  but  16  and  18  are  the  best;  and  plenty  of 
fish  may  be  caught  with  hook  and  lino.  Two  fresh  water  rivulets  run  into  this  bay,  the 
one  named  Rio  du  Miel,  or  Honey  River,  lying  2  or  3  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  an- 
chorage ;  the  other,  which  lies  nearer,  is  to  the  eastward,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  east- 
ernmost foully,  but  it  is  generally  dry,  from  the  unfrequency  of  rain." 

The  Harbor  of  Baitiqueri,  already  mentioned,  is  very  small,  and  has  a  very  narrow 
entrance;  it  has  only  from  15  to  20  feet  of  water,  and  therefore  is  fit  for  small  vessels 
only;  it  is  well  sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  the  rivulet  of  the  same  name,  which  runs 
into  the  interior  of  the  harbor,  afl'ords  an  opportunity  of  watering.  There  is  rather  more 
than  a  cable's  length  between  the  two  other  points  of  the  entrance ;  but  a  rocky  roof,  with 
from  10  to  17  feet  on  the  edge  of  it,  runs  out  from  the  windward  point ;  and  there  is,  also, 


328 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Ouanlanamo, 
DT  Cumber- 
land Harbor. 


■  reef  running  out  about  a  quarter  of  cable  from  the  leeward  point.  Between  these  two 
reefs  lies  the  entrance  channel,  which  is  only  50  yards  wide,  and  continues  thus  narrow 
for  about  a  cable's  length,  after  which  it  widens  as  you  approach  the  two  interior  points- 
and  the  depth  of  the  water  admits  of  approaching  the  shore.  ' 

From  Baitiqueri  the  coast  trends  about  W.  S.  W.,  true,  for  5  miles,  to   Point  Tortn- 

Fiilla,  from  which  it  follows  W.,  true,  3  miles,  to  the  river  Yateras;  S.  W.  4  miles  is 
oint  Mal-Ano;  and  at  3  miles  west  from  the  latter,  lies  Puerto  Escondido,  (Hidden 
Port.)  All  the  coast  between  Baitiqueri  and  Port  Escondido  is  clean,  and  may  be  safely 
sailed  along  at  tlie  distance  of  a  mile.  ^ 

Port  Escondido  forms  an  anchorage  sheltered  from  all  winds :  in  the  interior  of  it  are 
various  bays,  fit  for  all  classes  of  vessels,  but  its  entrance  is  very  narrow,  for  between  the 
outer  points  there  is  only  one  cable's  length;  and  as  each  of  them  sends  out  a  reef  of 
which  the  winuward  one  lies  out  a  third  of  a  cable,  the  channel  is  only  90  yards  wide  ■ 
it,  however,  luckily,  has  no  windings,  and  the  whole  length  of  the  strait  is  not  more  than 
a  cable  and  a  half;  and  as  to  outer  it,  you  roust  steer  N.  43°  W.,  it  may  always  be  done 
with  a  free  wind,  even  if  the  breeze  is  at  N.  £.  The  most  prudent  mode  of  entering  this 
harbor,  is  to  order  a  boat  to  be  placed  on  the  outer  point  of  the  windward  reef,  which  is 
neaily  in  mid-length  of  the  channel,  and  which  will  serve  as  a  mark  to  sail  in  by.  You 
have  then  only  to  bring  the  vessel's  head  in  the  direction  above  given,  and  run  on  in  that 
direction,  passing  close  to  the  boat,  until  you  have  passed  the  inner  point  to  leeward 
where  you  may  ancnor  in  5  or  6i  fathoms,  clay  ground. 

As  there  is  no  town  on  this  harbor,  nor  any  proper  leading  marks  for  running  in,  it  is 
proper  to  allow  the  vessel  sufficient  room  to  alter  her  course  from  windward  to  N.  43^ 
W.,  the  course  for  entering  the  harbor.  We  therefore  recommend,  although  the  wind- 
ward coast  of  the  entrance  may  be  passed  at  half  a  cable's  length,  that  it  should  not  be 
passed  at  less  than  3  or  4  ;  because  thus,  although  in  luffing  to,  the  vessel  may  pass  the 
demarkation  given,  (N.  43°  W.,)  yet  there  will  be  room  to  rectify  this,  by  luffing  to 
windward  before  you  are  between  the  points,  so  as  to  gain  the  proper  bearing,  wliich  is 
absolutely  necessary,  as  the  channel  cannot  otherwise  be  passed  without  danger.  Any 
one  wishing  to  run  farther  up  the  harbor,  instead  of  bringing  to  in  the  anchorages  we 
have  mentioned,  may  easily  do  so  by  the  eye,  by  towing,  or  even  under  sail;  but  for  this 
it  is  necessary  to  consult  a  plan  of  the  harbor. 

Puerto  Escondido*  having  no  commerce,  it  is  seldom  that  any  vessel  in  bound  into  it: 
and  if  in  any  storm  or  hurricane,  one  is  obliged  to  seek  anchorage,  we  would  rather  advise 
every  exertion  to  be  made  in  order  to  reach  the  next  harbor  to  the  west,  named  Guanta- 
namo ;  because,  if  it  be  difficult  to  enter  Port  Escondido  in  good  weather,  it  must  be 
much  more  so  in  storms  and  obscure  weather ;  and  it  will  be  by  no  means  strange  if, 
without  a  pilot,  or  even  with  one.  a  vessel  might  be  driven  on  one  of  the  reefs  of  the  en- 
trance; or,  what  is  still  worse,  might  get  on  the  rocks  at  some  point  of  the  coast,  which 
might  be  mistaken  for  the  entrance  of  this  harbor. 

GUANTANAMO,  or  CUMBERLAND  HARBOR,  a  very  extensive  and  excellent 
harbor,  lies  more  than  24  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Maysi,  and  4  leagues  from 
Puerto  Escondido.  The  coast,  in  the  latter  distance,  forms  some  very  small  sandy  coves, 
and  it  is  very  clean.  The  entrance  of  Guantanamo,  between  the  two  outer  points,  is 
more  than  a  mile  broad.  The  Derrotero  says — "The  east  point  may  be  approached 
without  fear,  as  there  is  no  danger  but  what  is  visible.  The  coast  trends  nearly  north, 
about  a  mile  and  a  quarter,  whence  it  changes  to  the  N.  E.  to  form  the  harbor.  On  the 
windward  side  of  the  entrance,  and  at  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  within  the  outer 
point,  a  rocky  shoal  stretches  from  the  shore,  upon  the  edge  of  which  are  from  4  to  5 
fathoms  of  water ;  this  shoal  is  rather  more  than  a  cable's  length  broad,  and  may  be  easily 
avoided  by  attending  to  the  subsequent  directions.  On  the  western  side  there  is  also  a 
reef  of  rocks,  but  it  is  narrower  than  that  on  the  east.  To  enter  this  harbor,  it  is  necessary 
only  to  place  your  vessel  so  as  to  pass  its  windward  point  at  the  distance  of  one  or  two 
cables'  length,  and  thence  luff  up  to  N.  W.  by  N.,  on  which  course  you  must  continue 
until  the  north  point  of  the  River  Guantanamo,  or  Augusta  River,  bears  west;  you  may 
then  change  your  course  to  N.  by  W.,  until  you  have  the  interior  point  of  the  windward 
shore  bearing  east,  when  you  will  be  clear  of  the  reef  which  stretches  from  it.  You 
may  next  haul  by  the  wihd,  and  anchor  where  it  may  suit  you  best;  or,  if  you  wish  to 
run  into  the  interior  of  the. harbor,  and  the  breeze  will  not  allow  you  to  lay  through,  you 
may  beat  in  with  the  assistance  of  the  lead  only." 

The  following  remarks  on  the  Harbor  of  Guantanamo,  were  made  by  an  officer  un  the 
Jamaica  station,  in  16U9: 

"  The  appearance  of  a  remarkable  spot  of  land,  on  the  side  of  a  hill,  at  a  distance  in- 
shore, determines  the  situation  of  Cumberland  Harbor,  which,  if  you  fall  in  to  the  west- 
ward, exactly  resembles  a  kite,  and  is  totally  open  when  it  bears  N.  E.  i  £.;  but  if  you 


*Puerto  Escondido,  or  Hidden  Port,  is  well  termed  so,  as  T  have  been  within  less  than  a  mile 
of  the  entrance  of  it,  and  could  not  make  it  out  distinctly.— A.  L. 


mmmm 


PMa*«Ma<B 


^mmmmmm 


mmommm 


mmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

,re  far  to  the  southward,  it  win  either  be  partly  or  entirely  hid,  unless  you  are  far  enough 
to  the  westward  to  bring  it  over  the  hills  on  that  side  of  it." 

The  following  directions  for  sailing  in,  have  been  given  by  Mr.  J.  Town,  from  obser- 
vatinns  made  by  him  in  1817 : 

-  on  coming  in  you  will  observe,  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  a  remarkable  light  yellow 
(or  brown  and  white)  cliff;  bring  this  cliff  to  bear  about  N.  by  W.  or  N.  by  W.  i  W., 
and  run  in  with  that  beaiing  until  you  open,  on  the  eastern  side,  a  small  sandy  point, 
ffith  two  huts  on  it.  This  point,  called  Fisherman's  Point,  cannot  be  mistaken,  as  there 
ia  uo  other  snudy  point  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor.  After  you  have  opened  Fisher- 
man's Point,  with  the  beaiing  above  described,  you  may  steer  N.  N.  E.,  and  when  Fish- 
erman's Point  bears  E.  by  S.,  haul  up  N.  E.  or  N.  E.  by  E.  and  anchor  in  6  or  7  fath- 
oms, muddy  bottom.  The  best  marks  for  anchoring  are,  Fisherman's  Point  S.  by  E.  or 
S.  S.  E.,  the  west  head  of  the  harbor  S.  W.  ^  W.,  and  the  light  yellow  cliff  W.  i  S., 
in  7  fathoms. 

"Oil  coming  in  from  the  eastward,  you  may  keep  in  as  near  to  the  east  head  of  the 
entrance  as  you  please,  there  being  10  fathoms  close  to  it;  after  passing,  run  to  the  west- 
ward, and  bring  the  aforementioned  bearings  on,  which  will  clear  the  reef  that  lies  off 
the  point,  a  little  to  the  S.  W.  of  Fisherman's  Point.  The  marks  for  the  south  end  of 
this  reef,  which  has  heretofore  been  described  as  a  single  rock,  ai'e,  the  two  huts  on  Fish- 
erman's Point  on  with  each  other,  bearing  N.  E.  by  £.,  and  the  point  within  the  East 
Head  S.  by  E..  West  Head  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  entrance  of  Augusta  River  W.  i  S.. 
the  yellow  cliff  N.  W.  by  N.  The  marks  for  the  north  end  of  the  reef  are,  the  N.  E. 
hutabout  its  breadtliopen  to  the  northward  of  the  S.  W.  hut,  bearing  N.  E.  by  E.  |  E., 
the  point  within  the  East  Head  S.  i  E.,  the  entrance  of  Augusta  River  W.  S.  W.  The 
reef  Hps  N.  by  "W.  and  S.  by  E.  about  li  cable's  length,  and  50  fathoms  in  breadth.  It 
has  17  feet  water  on  its  shoalest  part,  3<i  fathoms  within  it,  and  5  fathoms  close  to  the 
outer  edge,  which  is  about  2i  cables'  length  from  the  shore. 

"  On  coming  in  from  the  westward,  you  may  approach  the  point  to  a  cable's  length,  as 
it  is  steep  to ;  but,  from  the  appearance  of  the  point  at  a  distance,  a  stranger  would  sup- 
pose there  was  a  reef  extending  from  it ;  at  least,  when  you  are  within  a  quarter  of  a 
mile.  After  you  are  within  this  point,  haul  more  to  the  eastward,  as  there  is  a  flat  that 
extends  from  the  entrance  of  Augusta  River,  in  a  straight  direction  for  the  yellow  cliff; 
this  flat  extends  nearly  one-third  of  the  distance  across  the  harbor  towards  Fishevman's 
Point ;  but  the  soundings  to  and  along  it  are  very  regular. 

"If  the  wind  is  off  the  land,  and  you  have  to  work  in,  your  lead  will  be  the  best  pilot 
nheu  standing  to  the  westward ;  but  in  standing  to  the  eastward,  be  careful,  and  do  not 
approach  the  land  nearer  than  three  cables'  length,  as  the  reef  already  described  ia 
steep  to. 

"In  running  in,  with  the  marks  described,  you  will  be  wihtin  the  points  before  you  get 
soundings :  after  which  the  soundings  are  very  regular,  from  18  to  6  fathoms." 

Augusta  River  is  narrow  at  the  entrance,  and  has  only  12  or  14  feet  water  at  about  one 
quarter  of  a  mile  up.  You  may  go  up  the  river  by  keeping  the  starboard  shore  onboard, 
or  go  into  a  large  lagoon  on  the  larboard  side. 

When  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  bears  nearly  north,  5  or  6  miles  distant,  the  land  to 
the  westward  of  the  harbor  and  the  Morro  Castle  of  St.  Jago  de  Cuba  will  be  in  a  line, 
bearing  W.  i  N.,  and  the  outermost  land  to  the  eastward  E.  N.  E. 

From  Guantanamo  to  Point  Barracos,  the  coast  trends  nearly  true  west,  26  miles  ;  it 
b  generally  clean,  and  you  muy  run  along  it  at  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Point  Barracos 
maybe  known  by  a  morro  or  hill  which  rises  on  it.  From  this  point  the  coast  bends  to 
the  north-westward,  and  forms  the  Bay  of  Cabo  Baxa,  (Low  Cape,)  whence  it  trends 
west  to  tlie  River  luragua.  The  space  between  Cape  Baxa  and  luragua  is  named  los 
Altares,  or  the  Altars,  because  the  coast  forms  three  beachy  bays,  separated  from  each 
other  by  high  scarped  mounts.  The  River  luragua  is  10  miles  distant  from  Point 
Barracos. 

From  the  River  luragua  the  coast  continues  nearly  west,  12  miles,  to  the  entrance  of 
Ihe  Port  of  St.  Jago  de  Cuba ;  it  is  all  clean,  and  may  be  run  along  at  the  distance  of  a 
mile.  The  Rivers  De  Surdinero  and  De  Aqundores  disembogue  upon  it ;  and  near  this 
last  may  be  seen  some  suiiiU  houses,  inhabited  by  water-carriers. 

ST.  JAGO  DE  CUBA  LIGHT  is  a  revolving  light,  221  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
sea;  time  of  revolution  five  minutes. 

The  HARBOR  of  St.  JAGO  DE  CUBA  is  very  good;  but  the  entrance  being  nar- 
rowand  crooked,  is  difficult  to  take.  On  the  east  point  stands  the  Morro  Castle,  and  a  little 
farther  in  Estrolla  (Star)  Castle,  which  is  separated  from  the  Morro  by  a  bay,  at  the  end 
ofwhich  is  another  small  fort  or  battery.  A  rocky  shoal  mns  out  from  the  windward 
i  coast,  which  extends  out  about  2|)  cables'  length  from  the  Morro  Point ;  and,  on  the  lee- 
ward aide,  another  shoal  runs  out,  about  a  cable's  length  south  of  the  point.  The  chan- 
nel lies  between  these  two  shoals.  At  its  entrance  is  a  cable's  length  in  width,  and  far- 
ther in,  is  reduced  by  about  a  third  of  a  cable ;  so  that,  when  abreast  of  the  bay,  which  is 


229 


St.  Jago  de 
Cuba  light. 
The  Harbor 
of  St.  Jago  de 
Cuba. 


<inippp 


W!Pf^»ri"»"WW«H^pil  -I  Ml  II  i  -■liuwuii,<l|5l.  , 


"TIBIIfSWOPIfl'ii'llWI  ■^ 


ifiniiiii  I  ^^pnitpvpaii 


330  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

between  the  Morro  and  Estrella  Castles,  which  is  the  narrowest  part,  it  is  only  two-third 
of  a  cable  in  width ;  and  from  this  it  continues,  with  the  same  width,  until  you  pasH  Cdd^ 
Smith,  when  the  harbor  begins  to  open.  ^^ 

To  taite  this  port  you  ought  to  sail  half  a  lengue  oi*  two  miles  off  the  shore,  until  th 
'  Esterella  Castle  bears  N.  E.,  when,  placing  the  vessel'H  prow  in  that  direction.'nnd  steer* 

ing  the  same  course,  you  will  enter  the  channel  formed  by  the  reefs ;  but,  so  soon  as  voii 
are  abreast  of  the  Morro  Point,  within  a  quarter  of  a  cable's  length  of  which  you  rtiav 
pass,  you  may  begin  to  keep  away  ;  so  that,  when  up  with  the  battery,  which  is  at  the 
bottom  of  the  bay,  between  the  Morro  and  Estrella  Castles,  the  vessel's  hend  shall  be  N 
i  W.,  which  course  it  is  necessary  to  follow  until  you  are  past  Cape  Smith,  when  voii 
may  anchor.  ' 

The  necessity  you  are  under  (from  the  crookedness  of  the  entrance)  of  keeping  away 
four  points,  viz.:  from  N.  E.  to  N.,  renders  it  almost  needful  that  a  large  vessel  should 
have  sufficient  space  to  make  the  turn  in  To  this  end  we  advise  that,  so  soon  as  vou 
are  abreast  of  the  Morro  Point,  you  ought  to  begin  to  keep  awny ;  for  without  this,  you 
may  very  easily  get  ashore  at  the  Estrella  Castle.  It  must  here  be  remarked,  tbt  it 
would  be  improper  to  keep  the  vessel's  prow  away  to  the  north  at  once,  though  It  may 
Bomettmes  be  done  under  favorable  circumstances;  for,  by  doing  this,  you  incur  a  risk  of 
getting  ashore  on  the  corner  of  the  leeward  reef. 

The  distance  between  the  Morro  Point  and  abreast  of  the  battery,  at  the  bottom  of  the 
bay,  on  the  east,  is  one  cable's  length ;  with  the  knowledge  of  this,  the  pilot  will  know  how 
to  regulate  the  steerage,  and  trim  the  sails.  Sec,  ^s  may  be  necessary  to  gain  his  purpose 
and  according  to  the  facility  with  which  the  vessel  can  be  worked. 

At  the  bottom  of  this  harbor,  on  the  N.  E.,  is  the  city  of  St.  Jago,  or  of  Cuba,  which 
IB  the  most  ancient  city  in  the  island. 

From  St.  Jago  de  Cuba,  the  coast  continues  to  the  west,  forming  various  bays,  with 
anchorages  of  little  importance,  the  knowledge  of  which  is  alone  useful  to  consteri).  Up- 
on this  coast  are  the  high  Copper  Mountains,  (Sierras  del  Cobie,)  which  are  about  11 
miles  distant  from  St.  Jago.  In  clear  weather  these  mountains  have  been  seen  33 
leagues  oti*. 

Forty  miles  W.  by  S.  from  St.  Jago  de  Cuba  rises  another  very  high  mountain,  named 
the  Peak  of  Tarquinn,  which  is  an  excellent  landmark.  Cape  Cruz  is  the  last  place  oo 
this  part  of  the  island  where  the  coast  is  clean.  It  lies  more  than  30  leagues  from  St. 
Jago,  and  you  may  run  along  the  whole  intermediate  coast  at  the  distance  of  a  league, 
or  even  less ;  but,  as  there  is  no  motive  to  induce  one  to  approximate  it  so  much,  it 
Beems  more  ndvisaiile  for  those  bound  to  the  westward,  to  run  along  at  2  or  3  leagues  dis- 
tance from  the  shore.  At  Cape  de  Cruz  commences  a  white  bank,  which  extends  60 
leagues  to  the  north-westward,  and  terminates  at  Trinidad.  Upon  this  bank  are  keys  and 
reefs  without  number,  which  form  channels  of  more  or  less  width.  Of  the  keys  on  tho 
edge  of  the  bank,  the  principal  are  those  called  the  Cayos  de  las  Doce  Leguas,  or  the 
Twelve-league  Keys,  the  whole  range  of  which  extends  not  less  than  20  leagues  in  a  W. 
N.  W.  direction. 
Santa  Cruz.  SANTA  CRUZ. — Vessels  boundtothe  abovenamedportof  SantaCruz,  and  beingun- 
acquainted  there,  are  very  likely  to  incur  a  great  amount  of  detention,  and  likewise  uneasy 
feelings  to  the  Master,  upon  account  of  having  not  so  much  as  a  mention  of  it  in  any  direc- 
tion book,  as  was  the  case  with  myself  and  the  master  of  an  American  schooner  about  the 
same  time.  The  proper  channel  through  the  Cays  to  Santa  Cruz  is  the  Channel  of  Cuetro 
Reales.  Steering  up  N.  by  W.  by  compass  from  Cape  Cruz,  will  fetch  a  chain  of  cays  stretch- 
ing east  and  west,  nearly,  eleven  in  number.  The  entrance  of  the  channel  is  between  | 
the  two  westernmost  caj's,  which  are  large,  and  distant  from  each  other  6  miles,  and  is 
about  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  easternmost  one,  immediately  to  the  eastward  of  I 
which  is  a  small  sandy  cay,  unlike  any  other  about  here,  and  serves  as  an  excellent  inarli ' 
for  the  channel.  There  is  constantly  one  pilot,  (perhaps  more  now,)  on  one  of  the  ciiys 
near  the  sandy  cay,  who  stops  there  one  month  and  then  is  relieved  by  another.  The 
entrance  of  the  ctiannel  bears  from  Cape  Cruz  N.  by  W.  i  W.  A  knowlidge  of  these] 
facts  would  have  saved  much  uneasiness;  because,  on  referring  to  the  ciiart,  nn  un- 
acquainted person  would  directly  decide  that  the  best  channel  was  the  one  named  tlio  I 
Este  Channel  on  the  charts.  'The  marks  by  which  we  entered,  are  ns  follows;  it  is 
bouniled  on  the  west  side  by  the  eastern  head  of  the  Twelve-league  Cays,  and  on  the 
east  side  by  three  cays,  and  a  bank  runs  off  from  either  side,  leaving  the  cliannel 
very  narrow  and  nearly  in  the  middle;  our  ship  drew  14i  feel,  and  wo  l)roughtthree 
-%, .  cays,  which  are  inside,  (and  form  a  triangular  figure,)  to  bear  North-east  by  North, 

and  then  hauled  up  north,  when  we  had  a  small  round  cay  directly  ahead,  for  which  we 
steered  until  quite  over  the  shoal  water,  and  which  makes  an  excellent  mark  to  steer  by.  I 
We  carried  .3i,  3 J.  and  one  cast  of  3.     When  the  eastern  head  of  the  Twelve-Iengue 
cays  bears  N.  N.  W.,  and  the  flattest  cays  on  tho  eastern  side  of  the  channel  East  by 
North,  there  will  be  the  shoalest  water,  from  which  the  course  up  is  N.  E.  byN.il 
N.  passing  between  the  cays  that  form  a  triangle,  leaving  one  on  the  larboard  hand  and  two  j 
on  the  starboard ;  the  depth  of  water  between  which  will  be  from  10  to  13  fathoms.  Wiienl 


BLUNT'S  AMERION  COAST  PILOT. 


331 


ily  two-thirds 
rou  pa88  Cape 

lore,  until  the 
ion,  and  steer- 
so  soon  as  you 
hich  you  may 
.vhich  is  at  the 
5Hd  shall  be  N, 
itb,  when  you 

keeping  away 

0  vessel  should 
io  soon  as  you 
thout  this,  you 
marked,  thptit 

though  ".t  may 

1  incur  a  risk  of 

e  bottom  of  the 
:  will  know  how 
lin  his  purpose, 

of  Cuba,  which 

rious  bays,  with 
» coasters.  Up- 
ch  are  about  1 1 
e  been  seen  33 

nountain,  named 

the  last  place  on 

leagues  from  St. 

nee  of  a  league, 

te  it  so  much,  it 

or  3  leagues  dis- 

hich  extends  60 

nnk  are  keys  nnd 

the  keys  oa  tho 

Leguas,  or  the 

leagues  in  a  W. 


the  eastern  head  bears  W,  by  N.,  and  tho  flattest  cay  to  the  eastward  E.  i  S.,  the  depth 
of  water  will  be  from  6  to  7  futlioina,  and  quite  clear  of  the  shoal  water.  It  is  high  water;  High  water. 
full  and  change,  at  12  o'clock  ;  the  water  risep  rbout  4  feet,  but  the  tides  are  not  regular 
about  the  cays,  sometiuies  eni'Iier  uiid  sometimes  later,  and  appear  to  be  very  much  in- 
fluenced by  the  wind.  Near  to  the  main  land,  in  the  first  of  the  morning,  the  wind  is 
more  northerly  than  any  other  part  of  the  day,  and  draws  round  gmdually  after  the  sun, 
frequently  going  so  far  as  west.  After  the  sun  sets  there  is  an  interval  of  calm  which  is 
succeeded  by  the  land  wind. — (From  Capt.  M.  B.  Custard,  1850.) 

To  coast  along  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys,  and  being  3  miles  to  tho  southward  of  Cape 
de  Cruz,  steer  W.  N.  W.  f  W.,  with  which  course  you  will  run  along  tho  odgo  of  the 
lank ;  and,  having  run  l'2i  miles  in  this  dirt  ction,  alter  your  course  to  N.  W.  i  N.,  with 
vhich  you  will  enter  upon  the  bank  in  40  fathoms,  on  sand  and  rocks  ;  keep  tliis  course 
for 23  miles,  when,  with  the  edge  in  sight,  jou  will  leave  it  in  nearly  50  fathoms.  Con- 
tiauing  the  same  course  17  miles  more,  you  will  ugain  find  40  fathoms,  or  less,  and  soon 
afterwards  will  see  Livisa  Key  to  the  N.  N.  E.,  and  ahead  will  be  seen  the  eastern  head 
of  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys. 

Having  recognized  these  two  points,  you  must  run  along  on  the  bank,  but  without  get- 
ting along  into  less  than  4  fathoms,  until  you  find  yourself  3  miles  to  the  south  of  the 
eastern  head,  and  in  7  fathoms  water,  over  a  bottom  of  sand  ;  you  must  then  run  W.  by 
U,  With  this  course  you  will  shortly  run  off  the  bank,  and  may  coast  along  the  Doce 
Leguas  Keys,  at  the  distance  of  a  league,  wthout  any  four  ;  ond  having  run  21  i  miles, 
Eteer  W.  N.  W.  18i  miles,  and  you  will  then  have  tho  Boca  de  Caballones  (or  mouth 
of  the  Cab.illones  Channel)  open ;  and  it  may  be  easily  known,  as  it  is  broader  than  any 
other  to  the  eastward,  and  because  the  S.  and  E.  points  of  its  entrance  are  very  low,  and 
the  edges  at  the  water  of  Sobo>'uco  Rock. 

Having  ascertained  your  situation  from  seeing  this  Boca  or  Channel,  you  may  con- 
tinue coasting  along  the  keys,  at  the  distance  of  three  miles,  continuing  on  the  preceding 
course ;  and  having  run  21  miles,  you  will  see  to  the  northward  a  great  opening  formed 
by  the  keys,  which  is  the  Boca  Grande  ;  passing  by  it,  pursue  the  same  course,  keeping 
the  Cinco  Balas,  or  Five  Balls'  Keys,  in  sight,  at  the  distance  of  two  leagues,  and  noting 
that  a  reef  extends  3  miles  to  the  S.  W.  of  Key  Breton.  The  latter  is  the  westernmost 
of  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys,  nearly  in  a  line  between  Key  Breton  and  Puerto  Casilda.  On 
the  main  of  Cuba,  is  the  Placer  de  la  Paz,  a  sand-bank,  having  on  its  eastern  part  good 
anchorage,  and  no  where  less  than  14  fathoms,  on  sand  and  shells. 

ADMONITIONS. — If  night  comes  on,  when  you  are  in  the  vicinity  of  Cape  de  Cruz,  Admonitions. 
or  to  the  south  of  it,  as  assumed  in  the  preceding  directions,  you  must  steer  W.  i  S., 
for  14  miles,  and  thence  N.  W.  |  W.,  to  keep  completely  free  of  the  Doce  Leguas  Keys: 
continue  this  course  till  daylight,  changing  it  afterwards  so  as  to  make  and  recognize 
these  keys,  and  thus  include  yourself  i.i  the  route  already  recommended. 

Should  night  overtake  you  in  the  traverse  between  Cape  de  Cruz  and  the  Eastern 
Head,  when  it  might  suit  you  to  anchor  on  the  bank,  you  may  do  so  on  any  part  of  it, 
observing  only  that  the  edges  of  the  banks  are  rocky,  and  that  to  get  clean  ground,  you 
ought  to  run  in  upon  it  into  20  or  even  10  fathoms,  on  sand. 

If  night  falls  when  you  are  coasting  along  the  Doce  L'iguas  Keys,  as  already  directed, 
steer  true  west  until  you  consider  yourself  from  3  to  3i  leagues  from  them,  ond  even 
tlien  continue  tho  same  course,  considering  that  hereabout  the  current  sets  N.  E.  and  S. 
W.,  and,  if  the  tide  happens  to  set  in,  it  is  very  possible  to  get  aground  on  the  reef :  hence 
DO  precaution  ought  to  be  omitted  which  similar  cases  require. 

If,  when  in  sight  of  the  Canal  de  Caballones,  you  wish  to  anchor  in  its  mouth,' from  a 
case  of  emergency,  you  can  do  so  without  getting  into  le.ss  than  3  fathoms,  on  sand  ;  and, 
incase  of  being  unable  to  continue  your  course  to  the  south  of  the  keys,  you  can  shape 
yourconrse  so  as  to  descry  tho  land  of  Cuba,  passing  between  the  Bergantin  and  Manuel 
Gomez  Keys,  in  12  fathoms,  on  clay  ;  following  afterwards  to  tho  north,  to  make  the  Anna 
Marin  Keys,  and  giving  a  berth  to  the  Shoal  of  Yagua,  which  you  leave  to  lariioard,  and 
to  some  heads  which  are  to  the  east  of  it,  and  which  should  be  left  to  starboard.  Having 
seen  the  last  keys,  and  placed  yourself  about  a  league  from  thorn,  you  must  steer  for  the 
coast;  or  act  as  directed  in  the  instructions  lor  this  interior  navigation. 

MANZANILL  A. — The  reef  which  extends  two  miles  off  Cape  Cruz,  can  be  passed  Manzanilla. 
within  50  yards,  in  3  fathoms  water.  This  reef  is  very  steep.  As  soon  as  you  have 
passed  tho  reef,  haul  in  for  the  land  ;  you  will  then  have  2i  fathoms  water  within  one-half 
a  mile  of  the  beach.  The  first  point  from  the  capo  is  called  Point  Cidrado  ;  this  cape  lies 
N.E.,  6  miles  from  Cape  Cruz.  The  uncliorago  is  good  from  tho  Cape  to  Manzanilla  in 
the  sloop  channel.  In  passing  Point  Calrado,  you  will  have  3  fathoms;  as  soon  as  you 
have  passed  the  point,  you  will  have  from  8  to  10.  This  point  should  be  passed  within 
one-half  a  mile.  Three  fourths  of  a  milo  from  Point  Calrado,  in  a  N.  W.  direction,  lies 
ashoal;  it  extends  about  3  miles  in  the  samo  direction.  Six  rniles  from  Point  Calrado, 
in  a  N.  K.  by  E.  direction,  is  Point  Balona ;  this  point  has  a  shoal  extending  off  from  it, 
ina  N.  W.  direction,  li  mile.     Three  aiilos  N.  W.  from  Point  Balona,  lies  what  the 


PMHPPVPimp 


mm 


332 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


pilots  call  the  Balona  Shoal ;  the  shoal  extends  N.  W.  2|  miles.  Three  miles  fromPoiQt 
Balona,  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  lies  a  small  key,  called  by  the  Pilots,  Mona  Key ;  this  jiey 
lies  close  to  the  main  land,  and  cannot  be  seen  as  a  key  in  passing  along  in  the  channel 
The  shoal  water  extends  off  this  key  about  a  mile.  Two  miles  distant,  in  a  N.  W.  (];! 
rection,  is  what  the  pilots  call  the  Mona  Shoal ;  between  there  are  G  fathoms.  Back  of 
the  Mona  Key  is  Lime  River,  being  the  first  fresh  water  about  the  cape.  N.  by  H.  ? 
miles,  as  estimated  by  the  pilots,  lie  two  small  keys,  called  by  the  pilots  Swago.  N.,'  4 
miles  from  Swago,  lies  a  group  of  keys,  trending  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.,  4  niilos,  called 
Sloop-Channel  Keys.  There  are  two  shoals  lying  W.  by  N.  of  the  Swago  Keys.  From 
Sloop-Channel  Keys  the  passage  is  clear  to  Manzanilla. 

N.  W.  by  W.,  7  miles  from  Point  Balona,  commences  the  Great  Bank,  which  extends 
75  miles.  Between  this  and  the  reef  before  mentioned,  lies  the  main  channel  to  Mao- 
zanilla. 

A  pilot  can  most  always  be  found  at  Cape  Cruz.     There  are  but  four  pilots  at  Man- 
zanilla, and  in  some  cases  a  vessel  might  be  detained  for  want  of  otie. 
City  of  Tri-        The  City  of  TRINIDAD,  is  situated  in  lat.  21°  42i',  long.  80°  4'.     It  lies  on  high 
nidad.  ground,  about  three  miles  from  the  sea :  the  River  Guanraho,  or  of  Trinidad,  passes 

rather  more  than  hnlf  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  falls  into  the  sea  ot  a  little  to  the 
south  of  it.  Trinidad  communicates  with  the  sea  by  this  river,  from  the  mouth  of  which 
it  is  three  short  miles  distant ;  by  Puerto  Casilda,  from  which  it  is  distant  two  milug  and 
a  half,  and  by  Puerto  Masio,  the  distance  from  which  is  4^  miles.  The  mouth  of  the 
River  Guanrabo  is  to  the  north  of  the  point  of  Maria  Aguilar,  at  which  the  white 
grounds  extending  from  Cape  de  Cruz  terminate.  The  harbors  of  Casildu  niid  MhsIo 
are  to  the  eastward  of  this  point,  and  to  arrive  at  them  a  vessel  must  enter  upon  the  white 
grounds. 

Directions  for  sailing  from  Cape  de  Cruz  to  the  neighborhood  of  these  ports  have  al- 
ready been  given.  We  have  only  to  repeat,  that  it  is  always  advisable  to  keep  a  good 
lookout,  and  the  lead  going,  especially  by  night.  Having  recognized  Key  Grande,  con- 
tinue the  N.  W.  course  until  Key  Breton  bears  N.  E.,  bringing  it  the  distance  of  9  miles. 
From  this  spot  a  N.  N.  W.  h  W.  course,  38  miles,  will  bring  you  to  another,  fror.i  which 
the  Pan  de  Atiucar,  or  Sugar-loaf  Hill,  will  appear  on  with  the  most  easterly  of  the  hills 
of  Bonao,  which  are  some  high  ridges  immediately  to  the  westward  of  it.  In  this  navi- 
gation the  keys  culled  the  Zarzaand  Machos  will  be  seen  from  without;  and  when  the 
leading  mark  above  given  is  on,  you  will  still  be  in  sight  of  the  Machos,  and  of  nnothervery 
small  key,  named  Puga;  the  latter  is  rendered  remarkable  by  the  breaking  of  the  sea  up- 
on it,  and  it  will  bear  about  N.  i  W.,  a  mile  distant.  From  the  same  spot  the  Key  Blanco 
will  be  seen,  bearing  about  N.  N.  W.  jI  W.  This  key  is  remarkable,  both  as  the  west- 
ernmost key  on  the  bank,  and  because  its  shore  is  bordered  with  white  rocks. 

The  place  where  you  ought  to  enter  upon  the  White  Ground  is  between  the  Keys  Pu- 
ga and  Blanco ;  to  do  which  you  must  steer  so  as  to  pass  about  half  a  mile,  or  rather  less, 
from  the  reef  of  Puga,  which  reef  always  shows ;  and  in  the  passage  you  will  always  have 
6  fathoms  of  water.  Having  passed  Puga,  you  must  steer  N.  i  W.,  in  order  to  anchoria 
4  fathoms,  sand  and  weed,  with  the  south  part  of  Key  Blanco  W.  i  S. :  that  is,  if  the  ap- 
proach of  night,  or  waiting  for  a  pilot,  render  it  necessary. 

On  the  route  between  Key  Grande  and  Key  Blanco,  no  one  need  bo  at  any  loss,  who 
has  the  particular  chart  of  the  navigation  between  the  Rio  Guanrabo  and  the  Boca 
Grande.  By  it  may  be  seen  that  any  one  who  wishes  to  enter  upon  the  bunk  by  the  Boca 
Grande  may  always  do  so,  provided  his  vessel  does  not  draw  more  than  14  feet  of  water; 
and  it  may  even  sometimes  be  convenient  to  run  in  here  to  anchor,  under  the  shelter  of 
Key  Grande  or  those  of  Cinco  Bnlas.  in  case  of  bad  weather  coming  on,  which  will  fre- 
quently happen,  and  which  is  much  to  be  feared  in  August,  September,  and  October; 
or,  if  he  does  not  choose  to  anchor  in  the  shelter  of  these  keys,  he  may  run  in  until  he 
recognizes  the  key  called  Rabi-horcado,  which  he  will  leave  on  the  larboard  hand,  aod 
will  afterwards  see  Cayo  Bargayo ;  having  passed  to  the  eastward  of  the  latter,  ho  may 
run  N.  N.  W-,  without  fear,  being  guided  in  running  by  the  vessel's  draft  of  water;  and 
entering  by  the  Machos  Channel,  he  may  run  for  Masio  or  Puerto  Casilda,  as  he  sees 
proper. 

The  key  called  Blanco  de  Zarza  lies  N.  by  W.,  8  miles  from  the  Cayo  Zarza  de  fuera, 
and  half  a  league  to  the  southward  of  Punta  del  Caney.  Between  this  key  and  the  coast 
there  is  anchorage,  as  there  also  is  in  various  other  places  hereabout,  which  will  be  found 
more  or  less  commodious,  according  to  the  winds  and  draft  of  the  vessel.  The  keys, 
in  general,  are  but  little  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  their  low  shores  have  00  ex- 
tent of  beach ;  but  rocky  banks  stretch  out  to  a  shoit  distance  from  their  points ;  except- 
ing, however,  those  which  form  the  Machos  Channel,  which,  within  the  strait,  are  very 
clean. 


mmmm 


m^ 


m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


333 


The  Coast  from  the  River  Jatibonica,  westward  to  Port  Casilda,  Trinidad,  Sfc. 

The  coast  between  Point  Jatibonico  and  Point  Pussnbanno,  in  a  distance  of  two 
leagues,  forms  a  bay  with  2i  and  3  fiithoins.  The  shore  is  drowned  and  covered  with 
mangroves.  At  Point  Jatibonico  the  river  of  the  same  name  enters  the  sea.  To  water 
jg  it,  you  must  ascend  the  river  for  a  league.  Many  cedar  and  mahogany  trees  are 
brought  down  this  river,  and  many  vessels  take  in  cargoes  here.  Three  miles  to  the 
nest  of  Passabanao  is  the  Estero  de  las  Caovas,  (Mahogany  Creek,)  in  which  small  craft 
notdrawnig  above  6  feet  may  find  shelter  from  the  south-east  winds.  After  Estera  de 
las  Caovas,  at  three  miles,  follows  Point  Manati,  on  which  there  are  some  wells  of  to* 
leroblo  awoet  water.  Point  Manati,  with  Point  Tolete,  which  lies  two  leagues  to  the 
vest  of  it,  form  a  small  bay,  in  the  middle  of  which  is  the  nioutli  of  the  Estero  Nuevo, 
(New  Creek.)  Point  Tolete  and  Point  Zarza,  4^  miles  distant,  form  another  bay,  in 
which  is  the  Estero  de  San  Marcos,  witli  very  little  water  at  its  entrance.  On  the  eas- 
tern part  of  Point  Zarza,  the  river  disembogues  itself.  By  this  river  there  is  much  traffic 
carried  ou  with  the  town  of  Sancti  Espiritu.  which  is  13  leagues  inland.  West  of  Zarza 
Point  is  the  creek  of  the  same  name,  with  7  feet  water,  where  small  vessels  may  find 
shelter  from  the  south-easters,  as  they  may  also  to  the  westward  of  Point  Zarza,  under  the 
lee  of  8  reef,  which  runs  out  from  tlie  VV.  S.  W.  of  it  for  nearly  a  mile,  and  which  forms 
a  bay,  with  a  clayey  bottom,  of  3  and  3i  fathoms. 

A  league  to  the  west  of  Point  Zarza  is  Point  Caney  ;  between  is  a  small  bay,  with  3 
and  5  fathoms,  clay  and  grass  bottom.  On  the  west  of  Point  Caney  is  the  Estero,  (creek,) 
the  8Hme  name,  with  7  feet  of  water.  To  the  south  of  this  point  is  Cayo  Blanco  de  Zai'za, 
(the  White  Key  of  Zarza,)  and  between  the  reef  which  runs  out  from  it  and  the  point 
there  is  a  good  channel,  navigable  for  any  vessel,  which,  as  before  said,  may  find  good 
Bhelterto  iho  west  of  the  key.  Beyond  Point  Caney,  on  the  west,  is  the  Desembarcadero 
de  Mangle  (Mangrove  Mouth.)  Two  leogues  west  of  Point  Caney  is  Point  Ciego ;  be- 
tween is  a  bay  with  from  3  to  5  fathoms  :  in  the  middle  of  it  is  the  River  Tallabacoa, 
which  bus  very  little  water  in  the  dry  season  ;  and  that  of  a  brook,  at  a  very  short  dis- 
tance to  the  westward  of  Point  Ciego,  is  always  preferable.  After  Point  Ciego  comes 
that  of  Yguanojo,  at  which  is  the  river  of  the  sunie  name,  the  woter  of  which  is  excel- 
lent, but  to  procure  it,  it  is  necessary  to  ascend  the  river  for  a  league.  One  league  and  a 
halt'  west  from  Point  Yguanojo  is  that  of  Agabama,  to  the  eastward  of  which  run  out  the 
Caycos  de  Tierra,  (Keys  of  (he  Land,)  which,  with  Point  Yguanojo,  form  a  bay  called 
St.  Pedros,  having  from  31  to  6  fathoms,  on  clay. 

The  Caycos  de  Tiorra,  with  Point  Agabama,  form  anotlier  small  bay,  having  7,  5,  and 
4  fathoms,  on  clay  and  sand.     At  Point  Agabama  is  the  river  of  the  same  name. 

The  shores  from  Agabama  to  Point  ('asilda  are  drowned,  and  covered  with  mangroves 
(literally,  watery  mangrove  land ;)  and  from  Casilda  to  Point  Guanrabo,  they  are  ot  sand 
and  scarped  rock.  Relative  to  the  interior  of  the  land,  we  shall  only  notice  that  the  Po- 
Irelillo,  which  is  the  highest  point  of  the  mountains  above  Trinidad,  may  be  seen  in  clear 
(lays  at  21  leogues  off,  and  the  Sugar-loaf  (Pan  do  Azucar)  and  it  are  excellent  marks 
for  accurately  ascertaining  your  position. 

From  Boca  Grande  the  reef  forbids  entering  on  the  bank  as  far  as  the  Outer  Zarza, 
between  which  and  the  Outer  Macos  there  is  a  spacious  entrance,  with  depth  for  any 
vessels.  Neveitheless,  if  when  in  sight  of  Key  Breton,  and  to  leeward  of  Boca  Grande, 
you  wish  to  anchor  upon  the  bank,  in  order  to  regulate  the  time  for  making  Puga  and 
Cayo  Blanco,  or  for  any  otlier  course,  it  may  be  done  by  steering  towards  Key  Breton, 
until  the  N.  W.  part  of  that  key  bears  E.  |  N. :  but  in  running  thus,  sound  frequently, 
antil  you  have  from  4  to  3  fathoms,  on  sand,  when  you  may  anchor.  If  the  wind  will 
not  allow  you  to  steer  in  for  the  anchorage  directly  east,  and  you  aie  obliged  to  beat  to 
windward,  observe  not  to  prolong  the  tacks  to  the  northward  longer  than  until  the  N. 
W.  part  of  the  key  bears  E.  S.  E.,  or  the  south  tack  further  than  until  tho  same  point 
of  tho  key  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  Between  these  bearings  you  may  work,  tack  and  tack,  till 
you  reach  the  anchorage,  in  which  there  is  a  shelter  from  the  winds  from  N.  by  E.  to 
S.  W.,  caused  by  the  cordon  of  reefs  and  keys  which  lies  in  these  directions.  All  these 
reefe  show  above  water,  and  the  outer  part  of  them  lies  nearly  3  miles  S.  W.  from  the 
i  west  part  of  Key  Breton. 

Any  large  vessel  seeking  shelter  from  the  weather,  or  any  other  cause,  upon  tlie  bank, 
j  may  enter  between  the  outer  Zaraa  and  outer  Machos,  and  may  run  over  the  whole  of 
the  interior  of  the  bank,  there  being  sufficient  depth  for  vessels  of  any  class,  and  for  this 
the  chart  is  the  best  guide. 

Tides — We  shall  now  terminate  this  part  of  the  subject  by  remarking  that  the  tides 
produce  streams  more  or  less  rapid,  and  in  various  directions,  according  to  the  channels 
which  the  reefs  form  :  but  they  are  of  very  little  importance,  because  the  greatest  rise  of 
water,  which  is  at  the  time  of  the  new  moon,  is  not  more  than  a  foot  and  a  half,  except 
I  with  S.  £.  winds,  when  it  sometimes  rises  3  feet. 


Tides. 


HPllwww»mi"ww»i^|iww«^p? 


rrmnr' 


334 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Ma$io,  Port  MASIO,  PORT  C ASILDA,  AND  TRINIDAD.— To  ontor  Port  Masio,  being with- 
CasilUa,  and  in  the  bunk,  steer  N.  i  W.,  until  tlie  Hoiith  part  of  Koy  Blanco  boars  W.  |  S.,  in  which 
Trinidad.  situation  you  will  find  4  fathoms,  on  clapr  an(i  weeds,  or  grm»  (yorba.)  From  thence  run 
N.  50°  w.,  with  which  coui-se  you  will  run  along  the  middlti  of  the  channel  of  Masio 
which  is  formed  by  a  shoal  extending  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Key  Blanco,  and  a  nhnal,  with 
some  heads  nearly  even  with  tho  water,  on  the  land  side  ;  and  you  must  continue  thug 
till  you  have  Point  Jobabo  N.  }  W.  This  point  may  easily  bo  known  by  a  sandy  beach. 
You  must  then  luff  up  with  tJie  prow  to  the  west  point  of  the  harbor ;  and  HtoerinB  N, 
N.  W.,  take  care  to  keep  a  very  littlo  away  until  you  are  paat  tho  Guard-house  Point 
that  you  may  keep  clear  of  the  reef  which  runs  out  from  it.  Bein);  past  this,  keep  tho 
prow  as  above  directed  to  tho  west  point,  until  near  the  entrance,  when  jou  may  run  up 
the  middle  of  it  by  the  eye,  because  tho  edges  of  tho  slioals  show  distinctly,  and  the  eye 
and  lead  are  tho  best  guides.  Having  run  up  the  middle  of  the  entrance,  luff  up  N.  by 
E.  until  having  passed  the  points,  and  being  in  4  or  3i  fathoms,  you  may  anchor  where 
it  suits  you,  being  cautious  solely  of  a  clay  bank  which  runs  out  from  the  binding  place 
on  tho  west  shore,  and  the  exti'emity  of  which  is  in  one  with  the  west  point  of  the  port 
at  south. 

Passing  in  for  Masio,  you  leave  the  bay  of  Caballones  to  tho  starboard ;  and  if  you  wish 
to  anchor  in  it,  for  shelter  from  the  N.  and  S.  E.  winds,  you  may  do  so  by  keeping  in  the 
middle  between  the  two  points  which  form  it,  and  directing  yourself  mid-strait,  and  with 
the  prow  N.  E.  by  E.,  anchor  when  you  are  in  3i  fathoms,  clay  or  ooze. 

3b  enter  Port  Casilda,  obsei-ve  the  same  route  as  that  given  for  Port  Miisio,  until  the 
south  part  of  Key  Guayo  is  on  with  the  south  part  of  tho  main  land  of  Casilda,  in  which 
direction  is  tho  mouth  or  opening  of  Jobabo,  by  which  you  ought  to  enter,  and  keeping 
away  in  this  position  to  run  in  the  middle  of  it,  tho  eye  and  lead  will  fiiciiitate  tho  en- 
trance, which  is  1 10  yards  wide,  with  4  fathoms  of  water.  Being  at  tho  went  of  this 
opening,  at  a  cable's  distance,  steer  W.  S.  W.,  sailing  in  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms,  clay,  until 
you  bring  Point  Casilda  on  with  the  north  point  of  Cayo  Ratones,  at  which  moment  place 
the  prow  to  the  westernmost  part  of  tho  city  of  Trinidad,  avoiding  the  reef,  which  nins 
out  S.  S.  VV.  from  Cayo  Guayo,  and  which  will  be  passed  so  soon  as  you  biing  th ^  aouth 
part  of  tills  key  on  witli  the  south  part  of  Tabaco.  Afterwards  steer  towards  the  east- 
ernmost part  of  the  city,  until  you  bring  the  south  part  of  Key  Ratones  on  with  tho 
westernmost  part  of  the  high  hills  of  tho  Rio  Honda,  when  you  will  steer  towards  these 
objects  until  you  pass  the  slioal  Eumedio  ;  and  following  the  same  mark,  with  the  pre- 
caution of  keeping  a  little  to  starboard,  you  will  pass  clear  of  Point  Casilda,  which  is 
rathor  foul ;  and  passing  on  for  the  interior,  go  to  tho  south  of  Key  Ratones,  giving  n  berth 
to  tlio  point  of  it;  uaving  passed  which,  you  may  steer  N.  W.  |  W.,  and  shortly  after- 
wards anchor  in  3  or  3i  fathoms,  on  clay. 

You  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  these  channels,  if  circumstances  require  it,  upon  n 
clayey  bottom.  You  may  also  take  Port  Casilda,  entering  from  the  channel  of  Agabama, 
by  the  nortli  of  Key  Guayo,  or  from  the  west  of  Key  Blanco,  and  by  the  breaks  or  mouths 
in  this  part  of  the  reef,  as  Boca  Grande,  tho  Negrillaand  Mulatas;  but  the  entrances  are 
dangerous,  and  there  are  no  proper  leading  marks. 

To  enter  the  mouth  of  Guarabo,  or  Trinidad  River,  steer  outsido  the  bank,  and  run  in 
without  fear,  even  within  a  musket  shot  of  the  shore,  which  in  this  place  is  very  clean; 
nnd  running  on  at  the  sumo  distance,  you  will  see  the  bay  at  the  entrance,  formed  by 
the  point  of  Ciriales  to  the  south,  and  the  point  of  the  River  Canas  to  the  north ;  and  when 
you  have  it  well  open,  direct  yourself  (with  Uttlo  sail  set)  so  as  to  pass  nearer  Point  Canas 
than  Point  Ciriales,  for  it  is  much  cleaner.  Sound  Irequently,  however,  and  if  in  a 
large  vessel,  anchor  immediately  upon  getting  bottom,  because  the  anchorage  is  ol  a  very 
small  extent.  If  the  vessel  is  small,  you  may  run  in,  steering  towards  the  south  shore  of 
tho  bay,  keeping  the  prow  between  two  sandy  benches,  which  are  the  only  onosonit; 
and  when  in  G  or  8  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  you  may  anchor. 

Having  now  described  this  navigation,  it  is  necessary  only  to  add,  that  Masio  is  prefera- 
ble to  Casilda,  not  only  on  acccount  of  its  deeper  water,  and  tliat  you  can  sail  out  of  it  with 
the  trade  wind,  but  that  it  is  more  easy  to  take,  and  does  not  require  a  pilot ;  while,  on 
the  contrary.  Port  Casilda  cannot  be  entered  without  one.  Its  anchorage  is  not  more 
than  4  cables'  length  in  extent.  It  is  very  difficult  to  get  out  of  it  with  the  trade  wind; 
nnd,  finally,  to  obtain  water,  it  is  necessary  to  send  boats  to  the  River  Guarabo.  Port 
Masio  is  therefore  the  only  one  which  vessels  intending  to  load  or  discharge,  or  remain 
any  time  at  Trinidad,  ought  to  take. 

From  the  River  Guarabo  the  coast  westward  is  very  clean,  and  you  may  run  niongit 
nt  the  distance  of  a  league.  For  8  long  miles  it  trends  W.  |  N.,  as  far  as  the  west  point 
of  the  River  Honda ;  from  this  it  continues  N.  \V.  by  W.  i  W.,  9  miles,  to  the  Point  of 
San  Juan,  which  is  well  marked,  as  the  coast  afterwards  trends  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  for  a 
long  mile,  to  the  River  Guagimico. 

Between  tho  River  Guarabo  nnd  the  Point  of  San  Juan,  the  Rivers  Gunnayara,  Caba- 
gan,  Honda,  Yaguanabo,  and  St.  Juan,  run  into  the  sea.    In  all  these,  coasting  vessels, 


BLUNT'S  AMEHICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


336 


which  do  not  draw  more  than  6  feet  ■ometimes  anchor.    To  get  fresh  water  in  any  of 
thenii  it '»  neceflsary  to  proceed  a  league  up  from  their  mouths. 

Along  this  part  of  the  coast  the  water  is  deep,  and  the  bottom  clean,  excepting  a  little 
^ef,  wblcli  Btratches  out  between  the  Rivers  Ynguanitbo  and  Sim  Juan,  and  wliich  does 
not  extend  from  the  coast  so  nmch  us  half  a  mile.  The  shuro  is  scraped,  and  ul'sohuru- 
corock.  The  land  is  mountainous  or  hilly  for  a  little  to  the  west  of  San  Juan's  Po>nt, 
andat  it  commence  the  mountains  of  iSan  Juan,  or  of  Trinidad. 

From  tlie  River  Guagimi^o  the  coast  trends  14  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  to  the  Coloradoa 
PoiDtt  which  is  the  east  point  of  Port  Xiigua,  and  is  so  clean  that  it  may  be  run  t  lunt;  at 
less  than  hulf  a  cable's  length.     The  land  is  level  without  mountains,  and  in  it  thu  rivers 
Ga»il«">  Oavilancito  and  Aramno,  are  mot  with ;  but  they  are  of  little  importance. 
CIENFUEGOS  LIGHT  is  a  revolving  light,  82  feet  high.      It  is  on  Point  Colorados.    Cienfuegos 
The  Port  or  Harbor  of  Xagua,  or  Jagua,  is  very  Hpacious,  secure  at  ail  times,  and  has   light. 
ijeep  water,  but  its  entrance  is  veiy  narrow  and  crooked.     The  east  point,  named  Colo- 
rjdos,  and  the  west,  Subi;nilla,  or  de  la  Vigia,  are  the  exterior  points  of  this  port,  and  the 
diBtaiice  between  them  is  a  large  mile.     The  windward  shore,  from  Point  Colorados, 
IrendaN.  W.  i  N.,  2  miles,  to  Point  Pasn  Caballos,  whence  it  sweeps  to  the  N.  by  E., 
about  two-thirds  of  a  mile,  to  Point  Milpa,  which  is  the  interior  eastern  point  of  the  strait. 
The  leeward  shore  of  the  entrance  follows  nearly  the  same  direction  as  the  windward, 
and  niu't'ows  the  channel  so  much,  that  opposite  Point  Pasa  Caballos  it  is  only  a  cable  and 
a  third  in  width,  and  thus  it  continues  to  Point  Milpa. 

To  tnler  Port  Xagaa,  pass  Point  Colorados  at  the  fourth  of  a  cable's  length ;  but  shuu 
the  exterior  coast  to  windward,  as  a  roof  stretches  from  it,  and  it  cannot  be  npproa<  hed 
nearer  than  a  mile;  you  run  on,  inward,  preserving  the  same  distance  of  a  quartt,.  of  a 
cable,  until  you  arrive  at  Point  Paaa  Caballos,  when  you  nmst  lulf,  for  the  jjurpose  of 
keeping  in  mid-channel,  or  rather  nearer  to  the  leeward  side;  and  so  soon  as  abreast  of 
the  interior  points,  place  the  vessel's  head  towards  the  S.  E.  point  of  Cnyo  de  Carenas, 
and  proceed  thus,  in  order  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  lies  to  the  northward  of  Point  Milpa, 
andof  which  you  will  be  clear  when  the  northern  point  of  the  Key  Alcatrnz  bears  oast. 
When  once  thd  interior  points  are  passed,  you  may  anchor  where  you  please,  a  chart  of 
the  harbor  being  a  sufficient  guide. 

Thetown  of  Fernandina,  or  Cienfugos,  is  in  the  harbor  of  Xagua.  You  can  carry  in 
ISfeetwater,  and  it  is  the  third  town  in  importance  on  the  south  side  of  the  island. 
Rise  of  tide  two  feet.  Tide. 

The  coast  west  Xagua,  or  Jagua,  is  all  of  soboruco  rock,  and  without  any  bank  or  shoal, 
for  nearly  214  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Caleta  Buena  (Good  Cove  ;)  it  thencu  trends  W.  N. 
W.  i  W.,  C>\  miles,  to  the  east  point  of  Cochinos,  or  Swine's  Bay. 

COCHINOS  BAY  is  formed  by  the  point  above  mentioned,  and  another  point  which  Cochinos  Bay. 
iiesW.  by  N.  from  it.  The  last  is  named  Punta  del  Padre  (Father's  Point.)  The  bay 
extends  13  miles  to  the  N.  N.  \V.  The  edge  of  its  eastern  coast  is  of  soboruco  rock, 
without  a  bank,  until  at  about  a  mile  from  the  shore,  when  bottom  is  found  in  15  fathoms, 
oQsand  and  rock,  diminishing  the  depth  rapidly  towards  the  coast.  The  western  coast  ia 
a  sandy  beach,  and  sends  out  a  bank  to  a  short  distance,  but  all  of  it  is  a  rocky  bottom. 
Iq  the  northern  part  of  the  bay  is  a  landing  place,  which  leads  to  the  stock  farms,  (Haci- 
endas de  Ganado,)  but  it  is  little  frequented,  on  account  of  its  having  so  little  bank,  and 
the  little  that  is  having  generally  a  bottom  of  sharp  rocks. 

Point  Padre  is  very  low,  with  a  sandy  beach.     S.  E.  from  it,  at  the  distance  of  6} 

I  miles,  lies  Piedras  Key,  which  is  low,  and  of  small  extent.     A  little  to  the  east  of  the 

I  point  thHiiiiiik  which  borders  the  west  coast  of  the  bay  continues  towards  the  south,  and 

g  the  edge  of  it  is  a  reef,  which  almost  joins  the  north  part  of  Piedras  Key.     The 

I  eastern  side  of  this  reef  is  very  steep  to,  and  has  some  openings,  of  3  and  4  fathoms, 

which  nilow  a  passage  on  the  bank.     The  most  frequented  one  is  tliat  formed  by  the 

southern  extremity  of  the  reef  and  Piedras  Key,  both  because  the  key  serves  as  a  mark 

forlt,  and  because  il  has  a  greater  depth  of  water  than  any  of  the  others.     The  break 

which  termM"»U!8  this  reef  ends  to  the  westward  at  the  Lavandera  (Washerwoman) 

I  Rocks,  whicli  lie  about  4  leagues  W.  i  N.  from  Piedras  Key. 

From  Padre  Point  to  that  of  Don  Cbristoval,  all  the  coast  is  broken  with  lagoons,  form- 

Dgmany  keys,  with  groups  of  mangroves,  having  their  roots  growing  in  the  water,  or  so 

Icloseto  it  that  the  water  washes  in  among  them,  and  having  no  navigable  channels.    In 

ithis  large  space  is  comprehended  Cayo  Blanco,  the  south  side  of  which  is  a  sandy  beach ; 

1  there  is  fresh  water,  in  holes  at  its  eastern  part.    On  that  side,  at  the  distance  of  a 

e  and  a  half  from  the  shore,  is  the  Lavandera  Reef,  which  extends  two  miles  east 

I  west.    The  west  point  of  it  lies  west  15|  miles  from  Point  Padre,  and  with  another 

[key  which  lies  totlie  N.  W.,  forms  the  Boqueron  (Little  mouth)  of  Calvario,  which  has 

■little  depth. 

The  Boqueron  of  Calvario,  with  the  southern  extremity  of  Diego  Perez  Key,  which 

ies6  miles  distant  from  it,  S.  W.  by  W.,  forms  the  Bay  of  Cazones,  which  extends  in- 

ud,  N.  W.  by  W.,  for  about  7  miles.    At  the  bottom  of  this  is  Masio  Key.     There  are 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

various  Bmnll  chsDoeli  nt  the  bottum  of  the  bny,  formed  by  Masio  Key,  which  are  con- 
necro«l  with  lagoons,  lying  along  its  sides,  and  it  the  north  end  of  it.  To  the  south  of 
this  key  is  a  bank  of  3  or  4  fathoms,  sand  and  rock;  but  it  is  of  no  use,  there  being  no 
communication  thence  to  the  main  land  of  Cuba.  At  the  ilistance  of  more  than  u  mile 
and  a  half  to  the  oast  from  the  south  point  of  Diego  Perez  Key,  a  reef  begins,  wlilch 
stretching  out  with  a  turn  to  the  S.  E.,  unitos  with  the  eastern  part  of  the  Jitrdinellog' 
and  is  steep  to.  Between  the  same  point  of  Diego  Perez  and  the  commencement  of  tlie 
reef,  there  is  a  passage  on  to  the  western  bank,  which  begins  with  7  fittbomM,  Imt  in  a 
short  distance  has  only  14  feet.  Four  miles  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  same  point  thore  is 
another  channel,  with  first  3  fathoms,  and  very  soon  after  only  2.  There  is  no  goud  mark 
for  it,  and  the  former  is  most  frequented. 

S.  W.  by  W.,  a  mile  and  nine-tenths  from  the  Point  of  Diego  Perez,  lies  the  soutli. 
ernmost  part  of  Pnlanca  Key,  after  which  follow  in  order  to  the  N.  W.  by  W.,  true 
the  chain  of  keys  named  Sal  and  Fabrica,  and  which,  connecting  with  the  main  land  uf 
('uba,  at  Don  Cristoval's  Point,  form  inumeruble  passages,  hut  with  very  little  wnter. 
The  southernmost  keys  of  this  chain,  named  tiointo.  Cacao,  and  Palanca,  are  the  innrkg 
for  vessels  sailing  along  the  bank,  which  has  no  more  in  many  places  than  11  feet  of 
water,  and  its  bottom  of  fine  white  sand,  is  studded  with  heads  of  ro(  ks,  with  only  r;  f^et 
over  them,  but  their  color  indicates  what  they  are.  This  passage  is  bounded  by  tlie 
keys  above  mentioned,  another  key,  Rabihorcado,  to  the  south,  and  the  edge  of  the  Jar- 
dines  Bank. 

From  Palanca  Key,  which  lies  12i  miles,  W.  N.  W.,  true,  from  Flamenco  Key,  the 
western  Fabrica  Keys  take  a  turn  to  the  N.  E.  by  N.,  true,  towards  the  main  land,  nnd 
they  form  a  passage  or  channel  with  another  chain  of  keys,  to  the  woat  of  thum,  ciillcd 
Don  Christoval's. 

Don  (Jhristoval's  Point  lies  N.  N.  W.,  2  miles  from  PalancM  Key ;  and  from  it  tlie 
coast,  wluch  is  low  and  swampy,  trends  VV.  N.  W.,  for  18f^  miies,  to  a  little  key,  which 
lies  at  the  entrance  of  a  small  bay  called  IMatahambre.  The  interior  of  the  country  nlon? 
this  part  of  the  coast  is  firm  land,  and  is  called  the  Savannas  of  Juan  Luia.  To  the  south 
of  it  extendL  a  chain  of  keys  which  are  also  called  Juan  Luis'  Keys.  There  is  a  pnssnge 
between  tliem  and  the  coast,  as  there  is  also  between  the  east  part  of  thorn  and  tne  weat 
part  of  Don  Christoval's ;  only,  however,  in  any  of  the  cliannela,  for  vessels  which  do  not 
draw  more  than  1 0  feet. 

N.  W.,  at  the  distance  of  3  j  miles  from  the  little  key  which  lies  in  the  mouth  of  Mata- 
hambre,  the  Great  Mangi"ove  Point  nnd  the  swampy  land  ceases.  From  this  point  tlio 
coast  trends  to  the  N.  N.  E.  and  N.  E.  for  a  short  distance, and  then  to  the  east,  to  foim  the 
Ensenada,  or  Bay  of  Broa,  which  extends  inland  in  that  direction  about  7  leagues.  Oa 
the  north  it  is  bounded  by  the  Point  of  Mayabequo,  which  Ues  N.  by  W.,  15j  miles  dis- 
tant, from  the  Punta  Oorda.  The  shores  of  tliis  bay  are  all  of  mangrove  and  swnmpy 
land ;  and  on  its  noith  side  are  ^he  branches  of  the  Cienega,  or  Shallow  Lake,  which  the 
natives  of  the  country  have  distinguished  by  the  names  of  the  Rivers  Guinea,  Guanamon, 
Mora,  Nueva,  and  Belen,  as  liir  as  Mayabeque  Point.  In  this  bay,  as  well  us  in  tlie 
whole  space  of  sea  comprehended  between  the  const  of  Batavano  and  the  keys  in  front  of 
it  as  far  as  the  Cayamas  Chnnnel,  the  depth  is  from  3  to  4  fathoms,  on  clay. 

To  the  N.  W.,  and  about  a  mile  distant  from  the  Point  of  Mayabeque,  is  the  livcrof 
that  name,  in  which  vessels  trading  to  Batavano  can  easily  provide  themselves  with  water. 
From  this  river  the  coast  trends  \V.  i  S.  to  the  anchorage  of  Batavano,  which  is  eight  and 
a  half  miles  distant  from  it. 

From  this  place  the  coast  trends  to  the  west.  13  miles,  to  Point  Cayamas  ;  hut  in  the 
Intermediate  space  lies  the  Point  of  Cagio,  and  the  river  of  the  sumo  name,  in  which  the 
Batavano  vesels  sometimes  also  procure  water. 

The  River  Cagio,  formed  by  the  branches  of  the  Cienega,  runs  into  the  anchorage  of 
that  name,  in  which,  at  a  moderate  disbince  from  the  const,  from  2<l  to  3  fathoms  water 
are  found,  sheltered  from  all  winds  by  the  chain  of  keys  which  lies  in  front  of  it.  The 
bight  of  the  Cienega  comprehended  between  its  mouth  and  the  main  land,  is  more  exten- 
sive than  that  of  Batavano  or  Mayabeque,  and  the  lands  around  it  are  woil  cultivated. 

Cayamas  Point,  and  the  chain  of  keys  to  the  south  of  it,  form  the  channel  of  thesnme 
name,  which  has  7  feet  of  water;  this  chain  of  keys  extends  with  a  bend  to  the  S.  E.bj 
S..  about  11  miles,  when  it  forms  the  channel  of  La  Hacha,  which  divides  it  from  another 
chain  of  keys,  which  extends  from  this  place  as  fur  as  Cruz  Key,  lying  13  miles  S.  byE. 
i  E.  from  Batavano.  The  Canal  de  la  Hacha  has  1 1  feet  of  water,  and  is  much  frequented 
by  vessels  trading  to  Batavano,  when  they  either  enter  or  anil  out  to  tlie  wostwmd  of  the 
Isle  of  Pines  and  Cayos  de  San  Felipa  (St.  Philip's  Keys.) 

At  a  short  distance  to  the  westward  of  Cruz  Key  lies  another,  called  Rcdondo,  under 

which  the  vessels  l>  longing  to  Batavano  secure  themselves  in  the  season  when  the  fiesh(or 

stormy)  S.  E.  win<     blow :  that  is,  in  the  months  from  July  to  October,  (hurricuno  moatlis) 

which  are  much  to  be  feared  on  all  this  coast. 

To  the  southward  of  Cruz  Key,  at  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  lies  Monte  Key  Key 


pw«^^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  337 

nad  between  is  a  channel  with  34  fathotng,  clay.  Thin  channel  k  the  largest  of  thoio 
lendiuK  to  Batavano,  nlthou,1  nare  must  ho  taken  to  keep  clear  of  a  spit,  which  ruui 
QUt  »bout  7  iriiles  to  th«!  S.  >V.  of  the  key;  and  to  the  heads,  which  are  to  the  south  of 
tbdSA  keys,  forming  the  !'orth  side  of  the  channel. 

From  Cayauias  Point  the  coast  of  Cuba  trrnds  \V.  by  N.  {  N.,  forniirijj  areKularbay, 
called  Engenada  de  Majana,  and  which  tefnitmtos  to  the  south,  at  Point  Salinas,  which 
liei  lOf'j  miles  to  the  W.  S.  W.  from  the  former.  In  the  internuuliato  space,  and  near 
CayamHS  Point,  is  the  mouth  of  the  river  (luanima,  at  which  the  Ciene^a  ends. 

S.  W.  i  W.,  12,''j  miles  from  Salmas  Point,  a  little  point  stretchi^s  outward.  At  a 
iliort  distance  to  tho  north  of  it  is  the  Creek  of  Savana-la-Mar,  which  is  much  frequented 
by  trading  vessels.  From  the  same  point  the  const  continues  forminj;  a  bay  with  Media- 
cam  Point,  which  lies  15  A  miles  to  tho  S.  W.  of  the  former. 

Between  this  coast  and  the  Hank,  or  Middle  (>round,  on  which  stand  the  keys  to  the 
northward  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  the  depth  of  water  is  from  .1  to  4  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of 
clay,  except  a  spit  with  one  and  u  half  and  two  fiitlunns,  which  stretches  out  from  the         . 
southernmost  key  about  two  lengues,  to  the  S.  W.  i  W.  of  tlio  Uuaninui  Keys.     The 
extreniity  of  tlie  spit  lies  S.  |  E.,  5^  miles  from  Salinas  Point. 

The  Ouanima Keys  aro  included  in  the  ^roup  wliich,  to  tlie  westward,  forms  the  Chan- 
nel of  La  Hacha,  and  are  situated  to  the  southward  of  the  River  of  Uuanima  and  of  Point 
Cttvainas. 

S.  I  E.,  12  miles  from  Mediacasa  Point,  lies  Dies  Key,  between  which  ind  that  point 
is  the  passage  for  vessels  trading  from  this  quarter  to  Batnvano.  Dios  Key  is  low,  and  of 
small  extent;  it  is  detached,  and  the  bank  on  which  it  stands  turns  to  the  eastward,  and  '* 

unites  with  that  which  surrounds  the  keys  to  the  north  and  east  of  the  Lslo  of  Pines.  It 
abo  forms  a  channel  with  the  Indian  Keys,  and  those  of  St.  Philip,  with  from  3  to  4  faiii- 
0019  depth  of  water. 

From  Mediacasa  Point  the  coast  trends  W.  by  S.,  true,  for  alwut  two  leagues,  after 
which,  following  S.  and  S.  W.,  it  terminates  at  Visga  Point,  forming  the  bay  of  Ayini- 
guas;  this  point  lies  S.  W.  i  S.,  distant  lOi  miles  from  the  former. 

About  S.  I  E.,  lOi  miles  from  Fisga  Point,  lies  tlie  easternmost  of  the  Keys  of  San 
Felipe,  from  which  tliis  chain  of  keys  continues  in  a  westerly  dire*  tion  as  far  as  the  me- 
ridian of  Ouama  Point;  between  these  keys  and  the  Indian  Keys,  there  is  a  ])asBago, 
with  two  fathoms  of  water;  and  the  depth  in  tho  space  of  sea  comprehended  between 
the  coast  and  the  north  piut  of  them  is  generally  from  4  to  5  fathoms,  on  clay  and  weeds. 
From  Guama  Point  tlio  coast  follows  to  tho  west,  for  about  '2  J  leagues,  to  the  Point  and 
Creek  of  Guano,  where  the  Bay  of  Cortez  begins.  From  this  place  the  coast  runs  W.  by 
N,,  true,  for  about  two  leagues,  to  the  bottom  of  the  said  bay ;  and  tho  inconsiderable 
rifers  of  San  Juan,  Martinez,  and  Galafre,  disembogue  in  it. 

About  W.  S.  W.,  true,  at  the  distance  of  three  lengnes  from  the  Point  of  Guano,  dis- 
embogues the  River  Cuyajuatoje :  to  the  S.  E.  of  which,  at  the  distance  of  alxml  a  mile, 
begin  three  little  keys,  which,  extending  themselves  in  tho  turn  ujoro  to  the  east,  for  about 
a  league,  form,  with  the  main  hmd  of  Ciiba,  tho  Lagoon  of  Cortez,  which  has  about  3 
fathoms  of  water;  but  tho  little  passes  formed  by  tho  keys  have  not  more  than  7  feet. 
Some  huts  have  been  established  on  them  by  persons  who  fish  for  hawksbill  turtle,  or  tho 
turtle  which  produces  the  toitoise-shell. 

The  sontliern  exti'emity  of  this  lagoon,  which  is  on  a  parallel  with  the  Keys  of  San 
Felipe,  and  about  5  lengues  distant  from  them,  is  the  termination  of  the  Buy  of  Cortez,  in 
which  there  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water,  on  a  grassy  bottom.  About  two  miles  to  the  east 
of  the  south  end  of  said  lagoon,  begins  the  deep  water;  the  edge  is  very  steep :  it  begins 
with  7  and  8  fathoms  on  a  rocky  bottom,  and  continues  on  so  as  to  join  the  coast  close  to 
the  northward  of  Point  Piedras. 

Point  Piedras  lies  about  S.  by  W.  from  the  Lagoon  of  Cortez,  7  miles  distant ;  the  coast, 
which  is  low,  but  of  firm  land  and  rocky,  with  spaces  of  sandy  beach  at  the  shore,  ranning 
Dearly  in  the  same  directiou. 

From  Point  Piedras  the  coast,  which  has  no  bank,  runs  nearly  S.  W.  by  S.  to  tho 
Point  Liana,  distant  about  5  miles.      This  point  is  low,  and  has  no  other  marks  to  dis- 
tinguish it  than  the  difteront  directions  of  tho  coast,  and  some  huts  near  it,  and  to  the  west 
of  it  there  is  a  small  sandy  beach.     To  tho  S.  E.  a  reef,  which  is  very  stoop  to,  extends 
j  out  about  two  cables'  length. 

From  Liana  Point  the  coast  trends  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  and  more  southerly  to  Point  or 
I  Cape  Leones,  and  then  again  follows  the  first  of  these  directions  as  far  as  Capo  Corrientes. 
All  this  piece  of  coast  is  of  high  soboruco  rock,  and  without  danger  at  a  stone's  throw  dis- 
tance. 

CAPE  CORRIENTES  ends  in  a  low  point,  with  a  sandy  beach;  and  to  the  S.  W.  Cape  Corrien- 
I  of  it  a  short  bank  sti-etches  off,  on  the  edge  of  which  are  15  fathoms;  and  close  to  the  tes. 
I  shore  there  are  some  rocks  on  which  the  sea  breaks. 

From  the  Cape  the  coast  trends,  without  any  bank,  N.  3"  E.,  true,  for  about  a  league, 
I  to  Cape  Cayman,  or  the  Point  of  Maria  Gorda,  and  from  it  to  the  bottom  of  tho  bay,  N. 

22 


mfmmmmm 


338  BLUNT'S    AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

40"  E.  The  place  called  Mnria  Qordn  is  remarkable,  being  of  soboruco  rock,  scarped 
Bnd  higher  than  any  other  part  of  the  bay  ;  from  it  the  bank  again  begins  to  run  oflf  {vitli 
bad  holding  gi'ound,  the  bottom  being  rocky ;  although  farther  to  the  north,  and  from  the 
inflection  which  the  roast  makes,  the  bottom  is  sand ;  and  very  near  the  beach  an  anchor 
may  be  let  go  in  6  fnthomH,  with  the  precaution  of  having  a  cable  on  shore,  as  the  edge  of 
die  bank  is  very  steep.  This  is  the  only  anchorage  in  this  bay,  and  affords  shelter  for  the 
strong  trade-winds,  and  S.  E.  winds :  none  of  the  rest  of  the  bay  has  any  bank.  Thp 
water  met  vnth  in  the  lag<  i  ns  of  Maria  (Jorda,  is  brackish ;  but  the  fresh  may  be  perceived 
rising  in  bubbles  in  the  middle  of  the  salt,  and  near  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  and  about  G 
'  yards  distant  from  the  water's  edge.  With  industry  and  in  case  of  necessity,  it  may  be 
obtained  in  a  drinkable  state. 

From  tho  bottom  of  Corrientcs  Buy  the  coast  trends  west,  true,  to  the  Balcones,  which 
is  a  short  piece  of  coast  of  high  soboruco  rock.  From  this  place  it  continues  W.  S.  W 
to  Holandes  or  Olaudes  Point.  This  point,  which  bears  nearly  west,  5i  leagues,  from 
Cape  Corrientes,  terminates  to  the  westward  of  the  buy  of  that  name.  Near  and  to  tho 
east  of  it  begins  a  reef,  which  extends  in  that  direction  about  half  a  mile,  but  oifers  no 
danger,  as  it  lies  very  close  along  the  coast,  and  is  very  steep  to.  Point  Holandes  has  an 
agreeable  appeai-ance,  having  a  resemblance  to  the  curtttinsof  a  wall,  and  extending  ^\-ith 
this  figure  about  two  miles,  beyond  which  it  descends  in  a  kind  of  falls  or  steps,  and  tha 
shore  continues  woody  after  passing  it. 

From  Point  Holandes,  or  Olandes,  tho  "  :i8t  trends  nearly  west  to  tho  point  of  Cayue- 
lo8,  which  is  tlie  southernmost  point  of  the  front  of  Cape  San  Antonio,  or  Cape  Antonio, 
Lighthouse.         CAPE  ANTONIO  light  is  a  revolving  light,  107  feet  high;  time  of  revolution  one  min- 
ute. 

The  westernmost  point  of  the  capo  is  called  PocilloB,  or  Little  Wells  Point;  and  from 
this  the  coast  trends  N.  9*^  E.,  true,  throt^-tenths  of  a  mile,  or  thereabout,  to  Sorda  or  Denf 
Point,  whence  the  coost  inclines  more  to  the  north-eastward. 

To  tho  eastward  of.  and  near  Cayuelos  Point,  extends  the  bank,  which  thence  sur- 
rounds the  cape  half  a  mile  from  shore,  and  continues  on  to  the  northward,  where  it  forms 
the  Colorados  Bank.  Its  depth  begins  with  from  20  to  25  fathoms,  on  a  rocky  bot'.om  and 
diminishes  regularly  towords  the  coast,  with  some  spots  which  have  a  sandy  bottom. 

The  front  of  Cape  Antonio  is  of  low  land,  very  rocky,  and  its  shore  appears  with  mix- 
ed streaks  of  soboruco  rock  mid  sandy  beach.  It.  its  wells,  called  those  of  Cueva  dela 
Sorda,  (Deaf  Woman's  Cave,)  and  the  Pocillos,  (Little  Wells,)  water  is  abundant  and  of 
good  quality.  ^ 


Cape  Antonio,  (A,)  bearing  N.  W.  i  N.,  true,  dist.  5  miles. 


Cape  ConitMitcs  looks  very  much  like  Capo  Antonio;  and  in  order  to  ascertain  it, ob- 
serve it  is  rather  level  land,  of  moderiite  height;  but  being  near  or  olf  it,  in  clear  weather, 
some  hills  in  Cuba,  named  the  SicMrus  del  Kosario,  which  stand  toward  the  north  coast, 
may  be  seen,  hearing  nearly  true  north.  They  are  the  only  hills  that  can  be  er..  ;"iOmii 
similar  situation,  and  present  two  suiinnits  only  to  tho  view. 


Cape  Curri(!ntP8,  (A,)  bearing  N.  35  E.,  true,  distant  4  miles. 

The  Isle  of  Pines,  Jardines,  and  Jardinillos. 

Tho  form  (if  the  bank  and  reef  which  surround  the  isles  or  keys  called  the  JardinP!. I 
&c.,  can  be  best  understood  by  reference  to  the  chart.  Towards  the  N.  E.,  on  this  J 
bunk,  is  Diego  Perez  Key,  already  noticed,  and  the  edge  of  the  bank  thence  extendstui 
the  S.  E.,  forming  a  bight  at  the  Megano  or  Sand  Islet  of  Biscayno,  whence  it  cxti'Ddsl 
to  the  easternmost  key  of  tho  .Tardines.  From  the  north  end  of  the  latter,  t\  reef  stretchfsl 
out  to  the  eastward,  about  n  mile,  and  the  bank  extends  in  the  same  direction  about  ;!| 
leagues,  and  nearly  two  north  and  south,  with  u  depth  of  15  fathoms  at  the  edges,  and ' 
or  H  on  the  whole  of  it,  excepting  the  |)roximityof  the  key,  where  4  fathoms  are  t'oumLl 
on  sand  and  rocks.  This  key,  as  well  as  all  those  which  follow  to  the  westward,  underT 
the  name  of  Jardinillos,  which  extend  as  fur  as  Key  Largo,  are  regularly  high,  and  scar])*^! 
■t  the  shores. 


To  the 

ffater,  wi 
ffith  reoff 
miles  the 
Largo  J 
the  Jardin 
ffestns  fii 
dered  wit! 


tinues,  wit 
is  5  league 
go  Key,  th 
other,  and 
£n«tem  H( 
the  sooth  8 
begins  with 
pidiy  to  the 
JACK  a 
bthoms  wal 
shoal  there 
M.  S.  Picki 
Rosario  K 
gives  name, 
ward  of  it.  i 
Passage  Ko^ 
reef,  is  a  tlii: 
the  sides,  an< 
Vessels  smu 
From  the. 
19  miles,  to 
named  Abalo 
The  outer  eci 
miles,  except 
to  the  south  o 
ivith  some  set 
The  ISLE 
height,  and 
trends  S.  W 
known,  being 
From  this  poi 
httle  point,  w 
inated  Playa 
From  the  v 
for  8  leagues, 
snd  from  the 
fishing  vessels 
Point  Pederni 
rocliy,  with  sh 
From  Pederm 
Frances,  whic 
chorage  and 
extends  about 
ssndy  beach,) 
wiudioftheA 


Sierras  de  ki 


w 


Key  Frances! 
«'llie  deep  Bay 
'e«gueg,  nil  wat 
I"  Ine  Lagoon  - 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


339 


scarped, 
n  off  with 

from  the 
an  anchor 
he  edge  of 
ter  for  the 
ink.  The 
)  perceived 
Dd  about G 
,  it  may  be 

)nes,  which 
W.  S.  W., 
igueB,  from 
r  and  to  the 
lit  oifers  no 
tndes  ha8  an 
ending  with 
;eps,  and  the 

it  of  Cayue- 
[ipe  Antonio. 
tion  one  min- 

,nt;  and  from 
3orda  or  Deot 

I  thence  sur- 
vhere  it  forms 
ly  bot'om,and 
y  bottom.  I 
^ars  with  mix- 
f  Cueva  dela 
)undnut  and  of 


i3certainit,ol)- 
clear  weather, 
e  north  coast, 
beec...  "Oniii 


To  the  S.  W.,  about  2  leagues  from  the  easternmost  key,  follows  the  edge  of  the  sboal 
water,  with  a  westerly  direction  thence  west  for  four  leagues.  It  is  studded  or  streaked 
<>ith  reefs,  as  far  as  a  key  which  lies  a  league  to  the  west  of  Trabuco.  For  about  5  i 
miles  the  same  edge  forms  a  bend,  as  it  approximates  the  east  end  of  Key  Largo. 

Largo  Key,  which  extends  W.  S.  W.  and  E.  N.  E.  13i  miles,  is  the  ensternmost  of 
the  Jardines,  under  which  name  are  comprehended  all  of  those  which  follow  it  to  the 
ffest  as  far  as  the  Isle  of  Pines.  The  south  side  of  Key  Largo  is  a  sandy  beach,  bor- 
dered with  a  reef,  which  runs  out  about  a  mile  from  the  east  end,  and  afterwards  ap- 
nroaches  nearer,  so  as  almost  to  join  the  west  end  of  the  key,  whence  the  same  reef  con- 
tinues, without  any  break,  W.  by  S.  and  W.  by  N.,  true,  to  the  Rosario  Channel,  which 
|j  5  leagues  distant  from  Key  Largo.  On  the  very  reef,  and  near  the  west  point  of  Lar- 
m  Key,  there  are  two  rocky  keys,  named  the  Ballenates,  distant  a  league  from  each 
other,  and  they  are  of  moderate  height.  In  all  the  space  comprehended  between  the 
gastern  Head  of  the  Jardinillos  and  the  Rosario  Channel,  the  bank  which  extends  along 
the  sontb  side  of  the  keys,  does  not  extend  farther  out  than  one  or  two  miles.  Its  edge 
begins  with  15  and  18  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  rocky  bottom,  and  the  depth  diminishes  ra- 
pidly to  the  very  reef  itself. 

JACK  TAYLOR'S  REEF.— This  dangerous  reef,  on  which  there  is  less  than  two  jack  Tayior's 
fathoms  water,  lies  south  nine  miles  distant  from  Largo  Key,  between  which  and  the  Serf. 
shoal  there  is  deep  water ;  it  is  placed  on  the  charts  on  the  authority  of  Lt.  Holland,  H. 
M.  S.  Pickle. 

Rosario  Key,  the  west  end  of  which  bears  north,  Irae,  from  the  channel  to  which  it 
elves  name,  forms  a  channel  of  3  and  4  fathoms  of  water,  with  another  key  to  the  west- 
ward of  it.  named  Cnntiles ;  but  its  outlet  on  to  the  interior  bank,  to  the  westward  of  the 
Passage  Keys,  has  not  more  than  10  feet  of  water.  The  opening  or  channel  through  the 
reef,  is  a  third  of  a  mile  in  width,  with  a  depth  of  3  fathoms  in  the  middle.  It  is  steep  at 
the  sides,  and  at  half  a  mile  from  its  north  part  there  is  a  reck,  which  shows  above  water. 
Vessels  smuggling  into  Cuba  generally  enter  and  sail  cut  by  this  passage. 

From  the  Rosario  Channel,  the  reef  trends  S.  W.  i  W.  lOmiles;  then  W.  N.  W.  |  W. 
19  miles,  to  join  the  east  point  of  the  Isle  of  Pines.  In  this  space  are  included  the  keys 
named  Abalo,  the  Aguardientes,  Campos,  Matias,  and  many  others  which  have  no  names . 
The  outer  edge  of  the  bank  is  parallel  to  the  reef,  and  generally  extends  out  about  two 
miles,  excepting  opposite  of  Abalo  Key,  where  it  runs  out  almost  3  miles,  at  about  7  miles 
to  the  south  of  the  key.  The  least  water  on  all  this  bank  is  5  fathoms,  on  a  rocky  bottom, 
with  some  scattered  spots  of  sand. 

The  ISLE  OF  PINES,  when  first  seen,  appears  mountainous  or  hilly,  of  a  moderate 
height,  and  the  tops  of  its  mountains  very  sharp.  From  its  east  point  tlie  south  coast  The  Mr  of 
trends  S.  W.  i  S.  for  5X  miles,  with  sandy  beach,  as  far  as  a  point,  which  may  be  easily  Pinet. 
known,  being  of  high  soboruco  rock,  and  having  a  detached  rock  (farallon)  very  near  it. 
From  this  point  the  const  continues,  without  any  bank  along  it,  for  seven  miles,  to  another 
little  point,  which,  with  the  former  point,  are  the  boundaries  of  the  piece  of  coast  denom- 
inated Playa  Lnrga  (or  Long  Beach.) 

From  the  western  point  of  Playa  Larga,  the  const  continues  W.  and  W.  5°  N.,  true, 
for  8  leagues,  to  Cocodrillo,  (or  Crocodile  Point.)  which  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island ; 
and  from  the  latter  to  the  cove  of  the  same  name,  is  3i  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  In  this  cove 
fishing  vessels  sometimes  take  shelter.  The  coast  continues  N.  W.  for  8^''^  miles,  to 
Point  Pedernalcs.  All  the  ground  between  this  and  the  west  of  Playa  Larga  is  low  and 
rocky,  with  shores  of  soboruco  rock,  and  may  be  coasted  along  at  less  than  half  a  mile. 
From  Pedernales  Point  the  coast  bends,  (forming  a  bay,)  N.  W.  by  N.,  2jl  mil^s,  to  Key 
Frances,  which  is  the  westernmost  point  of  the  island.  Near  the  point  are  found  the  an- 
chorage and  watering-place  of  Puerto  Frances.  This  little  roadstead,  the  bank  of  which 
extends  about  half  a  mile,  with  a  depth  of  5  fathoms,  on  sand,  (and  the  shore  is  also  a 
sandy  beach,)  is  much  frequented  by  vessels  coming  for  timber,  and  affords  shelter  from 
winds  of  the  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  quarters. 


Sierras  de  hi  Canada. 


La  Daguilla. 


Caballos. 


[i  the  Jardines.! 

N.  E.,  ontbisl 

lence  extends tol 

lience  it  cxtcndsl 

Inri'pfstretchesI 

llirection  nlwut  1 

le  edges,  and  1 

llioms  are  (mm 

vestward,  under] 

Igh,  und  Bcarpp'' 


Isle  ol■Pinc.^,  when  tlic  Muiiiit  La  Daguilla  bore  N.  53^  W.,  true,  25  mileB. 

Key  Frances  is  separated  from  the  const  by  a  small  channel,  and  forms  the  west  point 

Uftlie  doepBay  of  Siguanea.     From  that  point  the  coast  trends  to  the  S.  E.,  for  five 

leagues,  all  watery  or  swampy,  and  broken  into  keys;  thence  it  turns  to  the  N.  E.,  up 

to  the  Lagoon  of  Siguanea,  which  lies  at  the  foot  of  the  hills  of  the  same  name,  and  has 


'mmimmi^fmmmw 


■* 


Hema 


340  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

from  4  to  6  fatboms  of  water,  but  its  entrance  has  not  more  tbnn  9  feet ;  from  it  branche 
offa  strip  of  water,  which,  iu  nearly  an  E.  and  W.  direction,  divides  the  island  into  tw' 
parts.     At  the  foot  of  the  hills  of  Sigunnoa  there  are  two  filters  of  excellent  water,  which 
at  a  short  distance  from  the  beach  rise  out  of  the  land. 

From  the  Lagoon  of  Siguanea,  the  coast  trends  N.  W.  by  VV.  i  W.,  for  10  niilpg,  to 
little  point  which  forms,  to  the  west,  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  de  los  Indies,  (Indiiin  River  \ 
whence  the  coast  continues  N.  W.  7,*^  miles,  to  Buenavistn  Point,  which  is  the  north. 
ernmost  point  of  the  Bay  of  Siguanea,  and  is  lOA  miles  N.  N.  E.  from  Key  Frnnres 
Siguanea  Bay  extends  17i  miles  N .  W.  and  S.  E.,  and  has  from  2J  to  4i  fathoms  water 
on  a  grassy  bottom  ;  but  the  passage  between  Key  Frances  and  the  southernmost  of  thn 
Indian  Keys,  has  not  above  3^  fathoms,  on  sandy  and  grassy  bottom. 

The  Indian  Keys,  separated  by  small  channels,  extend  themselves  to  the  N.  W.  hv 
W.  from  the  southernmost  of  them,  which  is  8  miles  distant  from  the  northeinniost 
The  southern  extremity  lies  N.  4  W.  from  the  point  of  Key  Frances,  9^  miles  distant; 
and  4/5  mile"  W.  |  S.  from  Buenavista  Point ;  in  the  channel  between  them  and  thelat- 
tei,  there  are  from  4  to  6  fathoms  water,  on  clayey  and  grassy  bottom. 

From  the  Point  of  Buenavista  the  coast  inclines  to  the  eastward  as  far  as  the  Coveol 
Barcos,  and  the  point  of  that  name,  which  terminates  it  to  the  north,  and  lies  4  loaeues 
N.  E.  by  E.  from  the  former.  From  the  last  point  the  coast  trends  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  to  a 
short  distance,  and  afterwards  E.  N.  E.,  true,  to  the  northernmost  part  of  the  island 
which  lies  31  miles  distant  from  Barcos  Point.  From  the  northernmost  point  the  coasi 
continues  E.  4  N.,  5J  miles,  to  a  little  point  which  lies  to  the  N.  E.  of,  ami  close  to 
Nuevas  River ;  thence  it  follows  E.  by  S.,  true,  about  5  miles,  to  the  high  hill,  called 
Ojos  del  AgUH.  This  hill  or  mountain  is  one  of  the  highest  in  the  island,  scarped  or  pre- 
cipitous on  the  north  side  ;  ond  close  to  are  3  fathoms  water.  Nearly  in  the  middle  be- 
tween this  point  and  the  former,  is  the  mouth  of  the  R^er  of  Casas,  which  rises  at  the 
foot  of  the  hills  of  the  same  name  ;  ond  which,  togethflir  with  Nuevas  River,  are  the  most 
frequented  in  the  Isle  of  Pines  by  those  carrying  on  tromc  with  Cuba. 

In  the  same  direction,  from  the  mountain  of  Ojos  de  Agua,  at  the  distance  of  5  miles 
is  the  hill  of  Vivigogua,  also  precipitous  and  of  moderate  height :  from  this  hill  the  coast 
runs  S.  E.by  E.,  44  miles,  to  Salinas  Point,  and  thence  continues  S.  E.  by  E.,  ';-i'„  miles 
to  another  point,  to  the  north  of  the  River  Guayabo,  and  between  the  two  diseuibogues 
the  River  of  Santa  Fe,  which  hasexcellent  water.  From  the  first  aspitruns  out,wbich 
separating  about  2  miU's  from  the  coast,  joins  it  again  at  the  river. 

From  the  last  point  the  coast  winds  to  the  "'^uthward  as  far  as  the  eastern  mouth  of 
the  Cienega.  This  part  is  named  San  Juan  ;  and  in  the  space  is  comprehendeil  Muktas 
Point  and  the  River  Guayabo,  which  disembogues  close  to  the  north  of  it.  From  the 
eastern  mouth  of  the  Cienega,  (which  divides  tlie  island  in  two,)  the  coast  trfimls  S,  E. 
to  Piedra  Point,  which  lies  N.  by  W.,  true,  from  the  east  point  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  dis- 
tant two  miles. 

From  the  Bay  of  Siguanea  to  Nuevas  River,  the  shore  is  all  watery  ond  covered  wilt 
mangi'oves;  and  from  this  river  to  that  of  Santa  F6,it  is  firm  land,  continuing  generally 
so,  though  with  some  watery  places,  as  far  as  the  east  head  of  the  island. 

From  the  Bay  of  Siguanea.  as  far  as  the  River  Guayabo,  the  coast  may  be  run  nlonpat 
two  miles  distance,  in  3  and  34  fathoms  water,  on  a  clayey  and  grassy  bottom  ;  but  a  pjs 
Bage  farther  to  the  eastward   is  prevented  by  the  shallow  bank  which  surrounds  the  Jar- 
dine  Keys,  and  is  here  coiinectt-ii  with  the  Isle  of  Pines. 
Jitdiau  Keys,        INDIAN  KEYS,  &c. —  From  Key  Frances  the  edge  of  the  deep  water  follows  nearly 
.t^.  N.  W.,  114  miles,  as  fiu'  as  the  parallel  of  the  southernmost  Indian  Keys,  and  at  7  niilej 

to  the  west  of  it;  and  continuing  from  thence  to  the  northward  and  N.  W.,  so  as  to  ap- 
proximate the  most  northerly  of  the  Indian  Keys,  it  then  extends  so  as  to  pass  about  a 
league  to  the  southward  of  the  easternmost  of  the  Keys  of  St.  Felipe.  ratiniria|)ariillel 
to  those  keys,  us  far  as  the  middle  of  the  chain  ;  whence  it  n(Mirs  them  to  within  a  mile. 
and  continues  along  them  at  that  distance,  ns  far  as  the  westernmost  key.  on  the  parallel 
of  which  it  runs  off  to  join  the  mainland  of  Cuba,  near  Point  Pitidras.  {Jenoially,  Croni 
Frances  Key  to  the  parallel  of  the  southernmost  Indian  Key,  from  1.'}  to  2-^  fathonis  are 
found  at  the  edge  of  the  bank ;  from  the  last  named  key  to  tlie  meridian  of  thu  casti'm- 
raost  of  the  St.  I'elipe  Keys,  from  30  to  TjO  fathoms;  to  the  southward  of  thesis  kcys.aj 
far  as  the  wi^sternnujst,  '.)  to  10  t'utiioms;  and  between  it  and  the  main  land  of  Culia,  alioul 
20  fathoms,  exce|)t  in  the  proximity  of  tlie  latter,  where  it  slioalens  to  7  or  8  tathom, 
The  bottom  of  the  whole  is  rocky  ;  and  vttry  soon  after  enKM-ing  on  the  bank,  tlio  d(>pili^_.  --.-,.„ 

diminishes  to  5,  4,  and  3  fatiioms,  on  sand.     All  these  keys  have  sandy  beaches  towanii^B!?  '"'  within  tii 
the  south.  ■nnue  so  inaccun 

This  great  bank,  which  we  have   now  described  from  east  tr)  west,  is  sturliieilwitli^B™"^''' 
keys,  which,  witlj  the  coast,  and  among  themselves,  form  the  outer  chanai^JHot' Diego^B   ^"^  I'''o  of 
Perez,  of  llui  Rosario,  of  Siguanea,  and  of  Cortez ;  which  afford  a  |)as8age  ti)  liatinano.^B''""'' "'^''ount  o| 
by  the  inner  narrows  of  Don  Christovid,  Las  (jordas,  Monte  Rey,  and  of  Lu  nacha,all^B""/'\'h"  isJatL 
with  n  doplli  of  11  foot,  except  Monte  Ray  or  Redondo  Key  Passage,  which  has  2!|fatli-K?"'"'*'J«',  in  anl 
oms,  on  clay.  W-^'  "•'  "'o  oast  [ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


§■ 


341 


Remarks  on  Cape  Antonio,  the  S.  W.  of  Cuba,  and  the  Isle  of  Pines,  by  Captain 

Livingston. 

At  about  two  cables'  length  to  the  northward  of  the  pitch  of  the  Cape,  you  may,  when 
(lie  wenther  is  moderate,  land  with  your  boats,  picking  out  by  the  eye,  the  best  place 
iiinone  tlio  rocks.  At  about  50  yards  within  the  first  trees  or  bushes,  you  will  perceive  a 
space  of  about  two  acres  in  extent,  clear  of  wood.  On  the  opposite  side  of  that  opening, 
where  the  wood  again  commences,  and  at  about  10  or  15  yards  into  the  wood,  you  will 
meet  with  very  sharp  coral  rocks,  among  which  are  two  wells,  in  cavities  of  the  rocks, 
of  about  7  feet  deep.  I^he  water  of  the  northernmost  well  is  excellent,  that  of  the 
southernmost  not  so  good,  but  yet  very  palatable.  There  is  a  good  rolling  way  from  them 
totlie  beach,  but  boating  large  casks  oflf  is  attended  ^vith  difficulty,  from  sharp  rocks  which 
lie  underwater.  We  filled  five  or  six  puncheons  at  these  wells  on  the  12th  of  August, 
1817,  and  were  not  delayed  altogether  more  than  three  hours. 

There  are  plenty  of  excellent  gray  land-crabs  at  Cape  Antonio,  which  are  quite  safe  to 
eat  there  being  no  manchioneal  ti'ees  herealjout :  also  plenty  of  pigeons,  and  other  biids, 
some  of  which  are  likewise  excellent. 

There  is  a  fisherman's  hut  and  a  turtle  crawl  on  the  southernmost  part  of  the  cape,  at 
wiiich  vou  may,  in  the  fishing  season,  generally  find  a  person  to  point  out  the  wells ;  but 
ffhatlhnve  said  will  enable  any  person,  who  looks  carefully,  to  find  them,  though  a  per- 
joniaay  be  within  8  or  10  yards  of  them  and  not  perceive  them,  without  a  good  lookout. 
Men  sent  for  water  should  always  have  their  shoes  on,  to  protect  their  feet  from  the 
sharp  rocks.  There  is  abundance  of  sponge  to  be  found  at  the  cape,  although  it  is  by  no 
means  of  first  rate  quality.  The  fisherman's  hut  is  one  of  the  best  marks  for  Cape  An- 
tonio, when  coining  from  the  eastward.  Oft'  the  cape,  about  two  miles  out,  the  current 
often  sets  very  strong  to  the  S.  E.  When  the  current  sets  thus,  it  is  advisable  for  handy 
working  vessels  to  keep  pretty  close  in  shore,  by  doing  which,  they  will  avoid  the  strength 
of  the  current :  this,  however,  is  to  be  understood  as  applying  only  to  vessels  coming  from 
the  eastward. 

ISLE  OF  PINES. — The  most  dangerous  error  in  the  charts  and  tables,  of  the  po-  Isle  f^' Pines 
sitionsof  places  on  the  south  side  of  Cuba,  is  that  of  the  latitude  of  the  Isle  of  Pines, 
ffliich  is  uniformly  stjited  as  lying  in  21°  2'i'  N.,  whereas,  the  S.  E.  point  lies,  by  a  very 
excellent  observation,  taken  on  the  9lh  of  August,  1817,  in  21°  31'  37"  N.,  my  observa- 
rion.and  my  mate's  also,  agreeing  exactly  in  making  our  own  latitude  21"  29'  37",  and 
both  of  us  agi'ceing  in  opinion  that  the  land  was  fully  two  minutes  due  north  from  us. 

Tliis  error  of  latitude,  and  the  prevalent,  though  most  erroneous  idea,  that  the  cur- 
rent sets  always  from  the  eastward  towards  the  Channel  of  Yucatan,  has,  I  have  reason 
to  believe,  deceived  many;  as,  after  sighting  the  Caymans,  and  shaping  their  course  for 
Cape  Antonio,  (more  generally  for  Cape  Corrientes,)  the  easterly  current,  which  often 
rans  very  strong,  causes  them  to  make  the  Isle  of  Pines ;  and  finding  the  latitude  quite 
lilTerent  from  that  assigned  to  it,  are  completely  at  a  loss  to  know  what  land  they  have 
nade,  or  fall  into  the  more  fatal  error  of  supposing  it  Cape  Antonio  ;  atid,  hauling  round 
iheS.  W.  point  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  get  embayed  among  the  Cayos  de  los  Indies  ;  and, 
iierhnps,  are  finally  lost  in  the  bay,  as  was  the  case  with  a  very  fine  ship  a  few  years  since. 
[have  twice  made  the  Isle  of  Pines,  when  I  considered  myself  to  the  westward  of  it; 
mcewhen  I  ox])ccted  to  have  made  Cape  Corrientes,  and  again,  when,  liud  it  not  been 
(or  a  lunar  observation,  I  should,  from  the  courses  steered,  have  thought  us  abreast  of 
Cape  Antonio.  On  the  latter  occlusion,  my  mate  and  myself  calculated  the  probable  ef- 
fect of  the  current,  from  the  courses  steered,  distance  run  by  log,  latitudes  observed,  and 
time  elapsed,  after  we  passed  the  Grand  Cayman,  taking  also  the  land  fall  made  into  ac- 
count. iMy  mate,  an  intelligent  young  man,  made  the  current  set  S.  07"  E.,  at  the  rate 
of  fi3  knots  per  day.  The  result  of  my  own  calculation,  perhaps  not  so  carefully  worked 
as  his,  gave  E.  S.  E.,  and  two  and  a  half  knots  per  hour,  which  nearly  corresponds  with 
Mr.O'Harra's. 

I  had,  some  time  since,  the  misfortune  to  be  upset  in  n  small  schooner,  belonging  to 
iKingston,  Jamaica,  about  two  leagues  from  tho  south  coast  of  the  Isle  of  Pines;  two 
jyies,  (passengers,)  and  one  man  were  drowned  ;  and  tho  remainder  of  us,  with  difficulty, 
Iraade  the  land,  (owing  to  the  current's  carrying  us  oflf  shore  and  to  tho  eastward,)  after 
Idbout  13  hours  of  unceasing  exertion.  As  many  vessels  have  been  cast  away  on  this 
Island  within  the  last  four  years,  and  many  more  probably  may  be,  while  the  charts  con- 
ItiDue  so  inaccurate,  I  subjoin  the  following  remarks,  the  results  of  my  own  painful  expe- 
Irience. 

The  Isle  of  Pines  is  very  thinly  inhabited,  but  I  found  it  very  difficult  to  obtain  any 
Ipxact  account  of  the  actual  population.  Most  of  tho  inhabitants  reside  in  the  north 
jiart  of  the  island;  indeed,  so  far  as  I  could  learn,  there  are  only  three  houses  on  tho 
Ijonth  side,  in  an  extent  of  twenty-one  leagues.  One  of  these  is  situated  near  Calabash 
My,  at  the  east  end  of  the  island,  and  the  other  two  nearly  2  leagues  from  Puerto  Fran- 


wmmmm 


342  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

ces,  or  Siguanea  Bay.     Thore  is  also  a  fisherman's  hut  on  Key  Frances,  sometimes 
called  Bush  Key ;  but  it  is  inhabited  only  about  five  months  in  theyear,  viz :  from  March 
''  to  August,  being  the  season  for  catching  the  hawksbill  turtle,  from  which  the  tortoise  shell 

is  got. 

The  houses  are  very  hard  to  find,  being  all  concealed  among  the  trees,  at  a  considerable 
distance  from  the  shore;  and  it  is  perfectly  in  vain  for  a  stranger  to  attempt  finding  them 
as  the  paths  which  lead  to  them  are  no  better  than  cnttle-tracks ;  and  there  are  so  many 
of  the  latter,  intersecting  the  woods  in  every  direction,  that,  unless  a  person  is  acquainted 
with  the  place,  he  must  run  much  risk  of  losing  himself  in  the  woods,  and  of  being 
starved  to  death:  but  he  may  possibly  fall  in  with  some  of  the  inhabitants  or  their  dogs: 
the  latter  are  very  sagacious,  and  I  have  known  one  of  them  to  save  two  men's  lives  by 
conducting  them  to  his  master's  house. 

Water  is  to  be  found  in  some  places,  but  in  very  few  quite  fresh.  There  is  none  quite 
close  to  the  west  end,  except  at  Puerto  Frances,  where  about  15  yards  to  the  westward 
of  the  most  westerly  clitTs  in  the  island,  a  small  path  leads  into  the  woods,  by  fullowing 
which,  a  well  of  excellent  water  may  be  found,  at  about  half  n  mile's  distance  from  the 
beach;*  it  is  in  a  hollow  place,  about  8 or  10  feet  below  the  surrounding  ground,  and,  un- 
less when  the  sun  is  almost  vertical,  is  little  affected  by  its  beams ;  and  is,  consequently 
in  general,  extremely  cool  and  refreshing.  Casks  cannot  be  rolled  from  the  well,  but 
all  the  water  must  be  carried  by  men  in  small  casks,  buckets,  or  demijohns.  There  is  not 
sufficient  water  to  supply  a  vessol  of  any  size ;  but  it  may  afford  seasonable  relief  in  case 
of  necessity,  and  1  dare  say  supply  two  puncheons  in  6  or  8  hours. 

There  is  a  kind  of  small  beans,  which  grow  upon  a  species  of  vine  along  the  ground 
and  arc  enclosed  in  a  rough  pod  ;  they  are  sweet  to  the  taste,  but  extremely  poisonous 
and  are  therefore  to  be  avoided. f  To  persons  who  may  unfortunately  be  in  the  same 
predicament  as  I  was,  that  is  destitute  of  food  or  the  means  of  procuring  i*^,  it  may  be 
interesting  to  know  that  the  thatch-tree,  a  species  of  Palmetto,  grows  on  the  south  coast 
of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  in  the  most  arid  places,  and  is  sometimes,  as  far  as  I  can  judge,  60 
feet  high.  This  tree,  when  young,  atl'orda  a  wholesome  and  not  unpalatable  focd.  Cut 
or  break  over  a  thatch-tree,  of  7  or  8  feet  in  height,  and  tearing  down  the  leaves  in  the 
neck,  or,  more  properly  speaking,  at  the  junction  of  the  leaves  to  the  trunk,  you  vWl 
find  a  part  of  the  inside,  about  as  thick  as  a  man's  wrist,  very  white,  and  of  considerable 
length,  and  which  tastes  like  something  between  a  Swedish  turnip  and  the  common  cab- 
bage. I  did  not  know  this  when  I  remained  five  days  without  anything  to  eat,  excepting 
some  raw  shell-fish ;  and  for  four  days  out  of  the  five,  we  were  constantly  passing  thatch- 
bushes. 

During  the  nine  days  I  remained  on  the  south  side  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  the  current 
constantly  set  strongly  to  the  eastward.  The  whole  coast,  from  the  east  end  of  the  isl- 
and to  the  S.  W.  point,  is  bold  close  tu  ;  but  off  the  S.  W.  point,  and  between  that  and 
Puerto  Frances,  dangerous  reefs  extend  out  to  sea,  to  a  considerable  distance. 

I  regretted  much  that  the  loss  of  my  instruments  did  not  permit  ine  to  renew  my  ob- 
servations for  latitude  on  shore  ;  but  the  day  before  the  vessel  upset  I  had  a  good  obser- 
vation, corroborative  of  that  of  the  9th  of  August,  1817.  I  am,  therefore,  certain,  tlint 
the  latitude  is  incorrect  in  all  charts  I  have  seen. 

The  Eio  de  Santa  Fe  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  island  ;  on  the  south  side  there  are 
no  rivers,  unless  it  may  be  possible  some  small  ones  may  empty  themselves  into  some  of 
the  esteros,  or  salt  lagoons.  We  wadod  across  all  those  that  we  mot  with,  excepting  one, 
near  their  junction  with  the  sea.  There  are  one  or  two  other  rivers  on  the  north  side, 
but  that  of  Santa  Fe  is  the  only  one  that  has  2  fathoms  of  water  at  its  entrance ;  though 
some  have  much  more  than  that  depth  inside,  but  with  bars  at  their  entrances. 

There  is  some  mahogany  and  plenty  of  lignum-vito;  in  the  island  ;  also,  I  believe,  very 
fine  lancewood. 

In  Puerto  Frances,  or  Siguanea  Bay,  I  am  of  opinion  that,  with  good  ground-taciile,s 
vessel  may  ride  out  almost  any  gale  :  so  far,  however,  as  I  could  judge  from  its  appear- 
ance from  the  shore  ;  and  shelter  may  bo  found  under  the  lee  of  Ihe  reefs.  A  Spanish 
fisherman  informed  me  that  it  was  a  much  better  place  than  it  w.is  generally  thought  to 
be,  and  had  clean  ground,  bottom  of  fine  white  sand  all  over,  within  the  reefs,  with  from 
3  to  3i  and  4  fathoms. 

On  approaching  the  Isle  of  Pines  from  the  southward,  the  first  objects  you  will  dis- 
cover are  three  very  remarkable  peaked  hills  or  mountains,  on  what  aro  called  the  Sier- 
ras de  St.  Pedro.     The  land  appours  extremely  arid  and  barren.     The  greater  part  of  it  | 
on  the  south  side  is  covered  with  wood,  among  which,  however,  many  cattle  and  pigs  find 
pasturage. 


*  A  fallen  tree  lies  across  the  path  half  way  to  the  well,  and  may  probably  remain  there  for  many 
yearn,     t  These  beans  grow  on  open  spots  near  the  ahoro. 


BLUNT'S  AiMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


*' 


ua 


Between  the  Isle  of  Pines  {ind  Batavnoo  there  is  a  great  number  of  keys,  with  shoal 
\rater  between  them.  Among  the  roots  of  the  mangrove  trees  on  them,  are  many  and 
excellent  cray-fish. 

^be  Spanish  master  of  a  schooner  told  me  that  he  had  entered  among  the  Jardines, 
,gd  went  quite  through,  carrying  not  less  than  7  fathoms ;  and  I  am  disposed  to  believe 
him,  only  I  consider  its  entrance  must  be  much  narrower  than  what  we  found  the  deep 
mter  between  the  Batavano  and  the  Isle  of  Pines  Keys ;  as,  from  the  deck  of  a  schooner 
of  about  40  tons,  wo  could  not,  when  in  mid-channel,  see  both  at  the  same  time.  In  tlie 
noighborhood  of  it  are  immense  quantities  of  the  palmetto  real,  or  cabbage-tree. 

JARDINES. — In  all  the  Jardines  excellent  fresh  water  may  be  found  by  digging  a  Jardines. 
feff  inches  deep  in  the  wand,  at  a  very  short  distance  from  the  sea,  according  to  my  infor- 
mation, "  not  more  than  half  a  yard ;"  while  in  the  Caycos  de  San  Felipe,  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  no  fresh  water  can  be  procured.  On  the  Jardine*?  are  also 
pleDty  of  thatch-trees.  Some  of  the  Spanish  fishermen  have  remained  six  or  sevei;  days 
iita  time  on  one  of  the  Jardines,  living  upon  the  heart  of  the  thatch-treo,  and  upon  the 
water  got  by  digging  as  before  described. 

The  North-west  Coast  of  Cuba,  from  Cape  Antonio  to  Point  Ycacoa  and  Matanzas. 

Having  already  given  the  description  of  Cape  Antonio,  &c  ,  from  the  Derrotero  and 
the  notes  of  Captain  Livingston,  we  shall  here  only  notice  that  the  cape  has  since  been 
described  as  a  low  snndy  point,  with  a  flag-staff  upon  it,  and  several  huts.  Ffom  Cape 
Antonio  the  coast  sweeps  to  the  N.  E.,  and  thence  to  the  K.  and  E.  N.  E.,  in  a  broken  and 
variegated  form,  which  can  be  best  understood  by  reference  to  the  chart.  Without  this 
coast,  to  the  W.,  W.  N.  \V.,  and  N.,  is  the  extensive  bank  and  reef  called  those  of  the 
Colorados,  after  described,  which  are  naturally  divided,  and  ought,  therefore,  to  be  dis- 
tinguished by  different  names,  that  is  to  say,  the  Antonio  Bank  and  Colorados. 

Following  the  Colorados,  to  the  east,  are  the  Banks  and  Reefs  of  Isabella,  whicli  ter- 
minate at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  called  Bahia  Honda,  in  longitude  83°  7'.  A  too  near 
approach  here  is  very  dangerous,  as  the  reefs  are  generally  very  steep,  and  tlie  current 
from  the  gulf  sets  along  them  mostly  from  the  N.  W.  to  W.  and  S.  W.,  whence  it 
sweeps  along  the  edge  of  the  bank,  near  the  shore,  round  Cape  Antonio,  and  thence  east- 
ward towards  Cape  Corrientes,  &c. 

The  Denotero  says,  that  "  between  the  bank  (that  of  San  Antonio)  and  the  reefs  and 
keys  of  the  Colorados  there  is  an  interior  passage,  for  vessels  of  11  or  12  feet  draft,  but 
much  experience  is  required  for  taking  it ;  and  all  vessels  are  recommended  to  pass  out- 
side, keeping  well  away  from  the  edge  of  tlie  reef,  which  is  very  steep  to  ;  and  near  it  a 
vessel  may  be  entangled  by  eddies  proceeding  from  the  general  current  of  the  strait" 

Mr.  Finlnison  says,  when  you  are  abreast  of  Cape  Antonio,  you  will  perceive  the  dis- 
colored water  on  the  bank,  and  should  take  care  not  to  approach  too  near,  particularly  in 
li»ht  Avinds,  the  edge  being  steep  to,  with  generally  a  current  setting  over  it. 

Mr.  Gauld  says  it  is  high  water  at  Cape  Antonio,  on  full  and  change  days,  about  9h.  High  water. 
Mm.,  and  that  the  vertical  rise  is  18  inches.     The  flood  sets  to  the  southward,  (the  flood, 
therefore,  bends  with  a  southerly  current ;  and  thus  it  appears  to  continue  eastward, 
within  the  Isle  of  Pines,  tScc.)  and  the  ebb  northward.     The  velocity  is  about  three-quar- 
ters of  a  mile  in  an  hour. 

From  Cape  Antonio,  the  bank,  which  appears  of  a  whitish  color,  with  only  10  or  12 
feet  water  on  it,  trends  north,  by  compass,  about  8  miles,  whence  the  edge  turns  gi-adu- 
aliy  round  to  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  north-eastward,  to  bit.  22°  8',  with  very  uneven  soundings, 
from  6  to  3  fathoms,  rocks  and  sand.  To  the  eastward  and  southward  the  soundings  do- 
crease  from  6  fathoms  very  gradually  to  the  shore,  all  fine  sandy  ground.  The  late  Mr. 
Owen,  of  Jamaica,  said  the  edge  of  the  bank  is  clean  all  along,  and  steep  to,  and  that  he 
had  run  along  it,  at  a  vei"y  short  dist)uice,  in  a  lino  of  battle  ship,  guided  by  the  eye,  and 
himself  keeping  at  tl  t>     .ast  head. 

In  proceeding  from  Cape  Antonio  to  the  northward,  there  is  a  bank  of  10  and  15  fath- 
oms, and  which  is  12  miles  N.  N.  W.  4  W.  from  the  cape.  In  the  day  time  you  inay  safely 
take  the  jmssiige  between  this  shoal  and  the  edge  of  the  bank ;  but  in  the  night,  or  hi 
thick  weather,  it  is  better  to  make  sure  of  passing  outside  of  it.  It  is  also  proper  not  to 
forget  the  bank  of  Sanclio  Pardo,  which  lies  about  (J  leagues  to  the  W.  by  N.  from  Cape 
Antonio,  a  near  approach  to  which  is  unnecessary. 

If,  when  at  Capo  Antonio,  the  wind  comes  to  the  north,  it  will  be  best  to  maintain  your- 
self to  leeward  of  the  cape,  eithi-r  on  short  boards,  or  by  coming  to  anchor;  because,  with 
.«uch  a  wind,  in  place  of  advancing  on  your  passage,  you  would  probably  bo  caught  in  a 
jalc  or  storm. 

The  Colorado  Reefs  and  Keys  are  very  extensive.  The  S.  W.  extremity  lies  in  uboui 
ii"  37'  N.  and  84°  4G'  W.  The  whole  are,  in  general,  steep  to.  Of  the  principal  rocks 
or  keys,  the  westernmost,  or  Black  Key,  shows  it.self  above  water  like  tlie  hull  of  a  ship, 
and  may  be  seen  4  miles  off;  the  other  two,  Colorados,  or  Red  Keys,  are  not  seen  unless 


"wrw^ijspijui  1111)11, 1 


344  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  .    ' 

the  weather  be  quite  cahn  ;  they  hiivo  notiibove  2  foetof  water  on  them  ;  and  to  the  west- 
ward no  ground  is  to  be  found  nt  a  short  distance,  or  less  than  a  mile.  The  channel  be- 
tween  is  a  half  a  mile  wide.  Between  the  Blacit  and  Red  Keys  is  a  depth  of  4  futhoms 
but  very  foul  ground.  Capt.  Street,  in  his  accoun,'  of  these  rocks,  gives  the  following  detail  • 
•'  We  took  our  departure  from  4  or  5  leagues,  cbreast  of  Cape  Antonio,  and  made  our 
way  good  N.  E.  by  N.,  15  leitgues,  and  then  foJl  upon  the  Colorados  in  3  feet  water 
They  were  about  me  dry  in  several  places,  without  any  distinction  of  swells  and  break- 
ers :  we  saw  flocks  of  pelicans  sitting  upon  the  reddish  white  sand.  In  this  place  we 
could  see  no  dry  land  from  the  top-mast  head,  though  very  clear  weather,  but  we  saw  to 
the  east  of  us  three  hummocks  on  Cuba;  the  innermost,  or  biggest,  bearing  E.  by  N.  so 
near  us,  that  we  could  see  other  hummocks  within  and  without  these  three,  and  low 
land  trending  away  from  the  innermost  hummocks  to  the  southward,  and  likewise  the 
hummocks  almost  join  with  the  low  land  between  them.  All  this  we  could  see  on  deck' 
or  but  two  or  three  ratlings  up  ;  but  the  three  aforesaid  hummocks  ye  raised  upon  deck 
when  we  were  about  8  or  10  leagues  off  our  aforesaid  station  of  5  hagues  to  the  west- 
ward of  Cape  Antonio." 

The  high  lands  of  Cuba  are  in  many  places  particularly  marked.  The  principal  lands 
thus  remarkable,  in  regular  succession  from  west  to  oast,  have  be(in  enumerated  as  fol- 
lows; the  High  Lands  of  Buonnvista,  the  Coxcomb,*  the  Saddle  Hill,  Dolphin  Hill,  Ta- 
bles of  Mariel,  Maiden's  Paps,  to  the  southward  of  the  Havana,  Iron  Hills,  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  Havana,  and  the  Pan,  or  Loaf,  or  Hill  of  Matanzas,  to  the  S.  VV.  of  the  port 
of  that  name.  Tlie  appearances  of  all  these  may  be  seen  on  the  new  chart  of  the  Gulf 
and  Wmdward  Passages,  as  well  as  on  the  old  chart  by  Mr.  Romans.  Those  noticed 
in  the  Derrotero,  are  the  Hills  of  Rosario.f  the  Gap  of  Yoldal,  (we  presume,  the  notch 
in  the  Coxcomb,)  the  Pan  of  Cavanas.  or  Dolphin  Hill,  the  Tables  of  Mariel,  the  Tetas 
de  Managua,  or  Alaideu's  Paps,  the  Sierra  de  Jaruco,  or  western  part  of  the  Iron  Hills 
and  the  Pan  of  Matatr/.as.  These,  it  is  added,  are  all  points  from  which  a  ship's  situa- 
tion maj' be  ascertained  in  clear  weather:  but  it  frequently  happens,  in  hazy  weather 
that  they  cannot  be  seen  from  sea  at  5  league^  olf. 
Bahia  Hon-  BAHIA  HONDA,  &c. — Theharbor  called  Bahia  Honda,  or  Deep  Bay,  is  sivuatod at 
da,  SfT.  the  eastern  end  of  that  range  of  islands  and  reefs  distinguished   > .'  the  name  of  Isabella, 

Its  entrance,  according  to  the  Spanish  officers,  is  in  latitude  22°  59',  longitude  83''  71'. 
When  you  are  before  that  entrance,  it  bears  nearly  south,  but  you  cannot  get  iu  till  the 
sea  breeze  comes  on,  at  about  ten  in  the  morning. 

Bahia  Honda  is  a  spacious  and  well-sheltered  harbor,  but  the  points  which  form  its 
entrance,  as  well  as  the  interior  points,  are  bordered  with  a  reef  and  edge  of  shallow 
water.  The  outer  point,  on  the  east  or  windward  side,  is  named  El  Morillo,  (Little 
Morro,)  from  its  presenting  a  rising  ground.  From  this  a  shoal  extends  two-thirds  of  a 
mile  to  the  N.  W.,  having,  however,  at  its  extremity,  a  depth  of  5  fathoms.  The  outer 
point  on  the  west,  is  Punta  Pescadores,  (Fisherman's  Point,)  from  which  a  reef  extends 
to  the  N.  N.  K.  about  one-third  of  a  mile.  The  distance  between  the  two  points,  which 
are  nearly  east  and  west,  true,  from  each  other,  is  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile ;  but  the 
channel  formed  by  the  edges  of  the  shoals  is  only  a  cable  and  a  half  in  width. | 

At  a  third  of  a  mile  within  the  exterior  points  are  two  others,  Punta  del  Cayman,  on 
the  west,  and  Punta  del  Real,  on  the  east;  and  between  these  the  breadth  of  the  channel 
does  not  exceed  2  rabies'  length.  From  Point  Real  the  edge  of  the  bank  extends  at  the 
distance  of  two-thirds  of  a  cable  ;  but  from  Point  Cayman  not  more  than  half  a  cable's 
length.  At  half  a  mile  further  in.  the  harbor  opens,  and  you  arrive  off  Punta  del  Care- 
nero,  wliich  is  on  the  eastern  side.  At  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  Point  Care- 
nero  is  an  island.  Key  Larga,  or  Long  Key.§  the  west  point  of  which  (Punta  di  Difuntos) 
lies  a  little  more  to  the  west  than  Point  Carenero,  and  it  may  therefore  be  seen  from  the 
sea. 

To  enter  this  port,  it  is  requisite  to  keep  nt  some  distance  from  the  toast,  and  outside 
the  edcjescf  the  reefs,  till  you  are  N.  ij  VV.,  from  the  mouth,  when  you  tniiy  run  for  it. 
When  near  it,  or  at  about  the  distance  cf  a  mile,  you  may  perceive  Point  Difuntos;  nnd 
placing  your  vessel  most  carefully  to  S.  3  E.,  you  may  stet'r  in  that  direction;  as  with 
that  course,  keeping  Point  Difuntos  open,  in  the  mid-channel,  you  will  run  in  witli  suf- 
ficient water,  18  to  (>  fathoms.  When  abreast  of  Point  Carenero  you  will  see  to  the  W. 
S.  W.  a  long  point  on  tlie  west  side  of  the  harbor,  named  Punta  de  Mangles,  or  Man- 
grove Point. II     With  this  in  sight  you  may  now  steer  to  the  S.  W.,  and  when  you  have 


With  the  Coxcomb   Mountain  bearing   S.  A  B.,  yoti  will  be  in  Ion; 
for  the  charts  of  this  port  are  yet  inaccurate  and 


*Mr.  Kinlaison  says, 
84'^  \V." 

tl'robably  the  high  lands  of  Bucnuvista; 
contradictory. 

tin  a  lute  description  of  Bahia  Honda,  by  a  British  officor,  it  is  said  that  it  may  be  known  bya 
remarkable  tower  and  a  small  hut  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  and  a  largo  plnutatiou  on 
a  round  bill  just  on  tin-  back  of  it,  and  two  srnill  huts  about  1 J  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  west 
point  of  the  entrance.      ^  Wood  island  of  the  Old  English  Charts.     ||  Long  Point  of  the  ulJcharti. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


346 


Ivill  be  in  \m 


nrriwd  on  a  line  betweer  it  aijd  Point  Difuntos,  you  may  anchor  in  7  fothoms,  upon  clay; 
or,  if  mo'"^  convenient  >ou  may  luff  up  to  the  eouth-eustward  of  Point  Difuntos,  and 
drop  your  anchor  in  6  fathoms,  same  ground.  There  is  also  anchorage  to  the  northward 
of  Key  Largo,  between  it  and  Punta  del  Carenero,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  which  may  be 
foUDci.  after  sailing  in  by  the  lead,  along  the  reef  on  the  eastern  side. 

THE  BAHIA  BANK  lies  rather  more  than  5  leagues  to  tlie  N.  W.  by  N.  from  the 
mouth  of  the  Bahia  Honda.  It  extends  nearly  east  and  west  a  league  in  longth,  and  ia 
iijjouthalf  a  league  broad.  On  this  bank  you  may  come  to  an  anchor,  taking  caro  that  you 
do  not  go  too  near  the  rock  that  lies  in  the  middle  of  it.  There  is  no  wnter  on  the  rock, 
nnd  when  the  breeze  blows  strong  the  sea  breaks  over  it;  but  on  the  bank  are  6,  5,  and  4 
fathoms  of  water.     This  bank,  wo  believe,  does  not  exist. 

PUERTO  DE  CAVANAS,  or  PORTO  DE  CAVANAS.— This  harbor  lies  rath- 
er more  than  4  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Bahia  Honda.  It  has  an  extensive  reef  on 
each  side  of  its  entrance;  yet  it  is  a  fine  bay  to  sail  into,  having  5  and  6  fiithoms  at  the 
^ntraace,  deepening  to  8  and  10  within,  with  room  enough  for  several  hundred  sail  of 
ships.  The  Uerrotero  says,  you  may  run  along  the  coast  between  Bahia  Honda  nnd  this 
plnce,  at  the  distance  of  2  miles.  Porto  Cavanas  is  a  good  anchorage,  sheltorod  from  all 
winds,  and  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels.  It  may  be  known  by  a  round  hill,  which  forms  n 
gap  or  break,  and  upon  the  summit  of  which  there  is  a  grove  of  trees,  and  by  another  hill, 
named  the  Pan  of  Cavanas  (Dolphin  Hill.)  The  latter  descends  gradually  towiirdd  the 
east,  until  it  ends  in  low  level  land,  which  continues  for  a  long  league,  until  it  meets  the 
table  Innd  of  Mariel.  In  addition  to  these  nnirks,  you  may  see  upon  the  coast  two  rows 
of  hillocks,  which  resembles  shepherds'  huts,  and  irom  which  the  place  has  derived  its 
name.  These  hillocks  lie  to  the  eastward  ot  Bahia  Honda,  and  the  Pan  of  Cavanas  ap- 
pears as  if  in  the  middle  of  them. 

To  enter  this  harbor,  you  ought  to  open  the  mouth  well  out,  until  you  are  on  its  meri- 
dian, and  that  of  the  east  part  of  an  island,  (Isia  Larga,)  which  is  within  the  harbor,  on  its 
west.  Steer  S.  J  E.,  until  past  the  reef  of  Punta  Longa,  on  the  east  side,  when  you 
may  lufl"  up,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms.  Be  cautious,  in  advancing,  not  to  touch 
on  the  reefs  on  either  side;  that  to  windward  extends  out  more  than  half  a  mile,  and  that 
to  leeward  about  2  cables'  length.  At  the  extremity  of  Punta  Longa,  the  reef  extends 
out  only  two-thirds  of  a  cable;  but  the  channel  here  is  only  two  cables  in  breadth.  Ano- 
ther reef  extends  the  same  distance,  northward,  from  the  eastern  point  of  Larga  Island. 
PUERTO  DEL  MARIEL,  or  PORT  MARIEL,  which  is  4!i  leasucs  to  the  east- 
ward of  Port  Cavanas,  is  large,  well  sheltered,  and  fit  for  any  class  of  vessels.  You  may 
know  when  you  are  to  the  north  of  it  by  the  Tables  of  Mariel,  which  are  moderntely 
high,  nnd  form  very  broad  table  lands  or  hills.  On  approaching  these  you  will  perceive 
larious  white  patches.  The  coast  hence  trends  to  the  eastward,  towards  the  Havana, 
and  is  very  low.  In  proceeding  towards  the  latter,  you  may  descry  the  Paps  of  Managua, 
commonly  called  the  Maiden's  Paps,  which  are  two  round  hillocks,  lying  on  the  meridian 
of  the  port.  To  the  westward  of  Mariel  the  coast  is  likewise  low,  for  a  long  league, 
until  it  rises  and  forms  the  Hill  of  Cavanas.  Farther  to  the  west  may  be  distinguinhed 
other  high  lands  in  the  vicinity  of  Bahia  Honda,  and  which  seem  to  rise  from,  or  to  be 
surrounded  by  the  water. 

2'o  enter  Port  Mariel,  you  have  only  to  steer  towards  the  western  extremity  of  the 
Tables ;  and  having  recognized  it,  may  run  in,  along  the  windward  shore,  at  the  distance 
of  a  cable's  length.  This  will  lead  clear  of  the  reef  which  borders  the  coast,  and  on 
which  the  sea  breaks.  Having  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  well  open,  place  your  vessel's 
head  towards  a  small  rocky  key,  which  lies  off  the  leeward  point;  and  so  soon  as  you  are 
within  two-thirds  of  a  cable  from  it,  steer  S.  |  E.,  or,  what  amounts  to  the  same,  steer  in 
tliat  direction,  when  the  leeward  point  of  the  interior  part  of  the  entrance  has  the  same 
bearing.  Continue  this  course  until  you  pass  the  round  tower,  which  you  will  see  on  the 
windward  side.  You  may  then  luff  to  port,  (larboard,)  so  as  to  maintain  yourself  at  a  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  eastern  shore,  and  you  may  anchor  upon  it,  where  you  please,  in  8 
or  10  fathoms  water.  If  more  agreeable,  you  may  run  into  the  interior  of  the  harbor,  for 
which  a  reference  to  the  plan  of  the  harbor  will  be  a  sufficient  guide.  We  only  add,  that 
as  the  narrowest  part  of  the  entrance  is  only  50  yards  wide,  it  is  requisite  to  be  very  cau- 
tious on  entering  with  a  large  vessel. 

It  fonietimes  happens  that  strangers  mistake  the  land  to  the  westward,  and  about  Ba- 
hia Honda,  for  the  table  land  of  Mariel;  but  it  is  to  be  oliservnd  that  the  latter  is  not  so 
high,  and  is  more  regular  than  any  land  near,  or  to  the  westward  of  Bahia  Honda. 


The  Bahia 
Bank. 


Puerto  de 
Cavanas. 


Puerto  del 
Mariel. 


•npW^WWWWIWlH.  II  .'•Vi^'ii^'ifii    ;"V*1IU>I>' 


•'•w^ 


346 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


J:   i^i' 


IIAYTI,  OR  SAINT  OOlllliWGO. 


Dttecho. 


MonaPai- 
sage. 


Mona  and 
Monito. 
Mona  Island 


THIS  island,  once  more  cnlled  Hayti,  its  original  name,  was  discovered  by  Coiunibo 
(Colon,  or  Columbus,)  in  1492.  By  Columbo  it  was  called  Hispaniola;  but  giving  the 
name  of  St.  Domingo  to  a  city  which  he  founded  in  1494,  the  whole  island,  in  process  of 
time,  came  to  be  so  called.  At  length  the  island  was  divided  into  two  parts,  under  the  res- 
pective governments  of  Spain  and  France,  when  the  name  of  Hispaniola  was  limited  to 
the  eastern  or  Spanish  portion. 

The  principal  towns  are,  the  city  of  Cape  Haytien,  formerly  Cape  Franpois,  in  the  N. 
W.,  the  city  of  St.  Domingo,  in  the  S.  £.,  Port  au  Prince,  Leogane,  and  the  Mole  of  St! 
Nicholas,  in  the  west. 

We  commence  the  description  of  the  shores  of  Hayti  with  the  Mona  Passage  and  east- 
ern coast,  and  thence  proceed  in  succession  with  the  southern,  northern,  and  western 
coasts,  as  this  seems  to  be  for  the  mariner  the  most  convenient  mode  of  arrangement. 

The  Mona  Passage  and  Eastern  Coast  of  Hayti,  from  Cape  Raphael  to  the  Island  Saona, 

The  channel  called  the  Mona  Passage,  between  Porto  Rico  and  Hayti,  is  26  leagues 
in  breadth,  and  generally  clear  and  safe,  with  the  exception  of  shoals  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
coasts  of  the  two  islands.  On  the  N.  E.  side,  the  land  of  Porto  Rico  is  low,  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  harbor  of  Arrecibo,  until  it  reaches  Punta  de  Pena  Agujereadn,  (or  Point  of 
the  Holed  Rock,)  where  a  kind  of  cliffy  high  land  begins,  which  trends  S.  W.  rather 
more  than  a  mile,  to  Point  Bruguen,  the  north-westernmost  point  of  Porto  Rico.  The 
coast  again  declines  in  height,  and  forms  a  convex  bow  to  Punta  de  Penas  Blancas, 
(Whitestone  Point,)  the  north  point  of  Aguadilla  Bay. 

DESKCHO,  or  ZACHEO.— This  little  island,  nearly  covered  with  trees,  stands 
like  a  beacon  in  the  ocean,  at  th"  distance  of  lli  miles  W.  i  N.  from  Point  St.  Fran- 
cisco, or  Porto  Rico.  It  appeal  .ike  a  green  mountain,  800  or  1000  yards  broad  at  the 
base,  and  is  so  high  as  to  be  seen  at  12  leagues  off.  The  coast  is  generally  clean,  and 
there  is  no  danger  but  what  may  be  seen. 

MONA  PASSAG'*'. — We  found  the  winds  generally  light  in  this  passage,  and  but 
little  current.  The  Island  of  Zacheo,  bearing  W.  by  N.  i  N.  11  miles  from  Aguadilla 
Bay,  may  be  seen  on  a  clear  day  from  any  part  of  it.  It  is  high,  and  very  bold.  We 
frequently  approached  it  very  close,  without  observing  any  danger,  or  getting  soundings 
near  it.  Off  the  north  and  south  ends  there  are  a  few  rocks,  but  close  to  the  shore  it  is 
covered  with  small  brushwood,  and  the  landing-place  is  on  the  south  side. 

Report  of  the  Master  of  the  U.  S.  Ship  Macedonian,  for  (he  month  of  April,  1845.— -In  the 
Mona  Passage  met  with  a  current  of  1^  knot,  setting  nearly  north  ;  about  lat.  28°  N„ 
long.  71°  W.,  a  current  of  U  mile,  running  W.  23d  instant,  lat.  35°  45'  N.  long.  72" 
^y.,  entered  the  Gulf  Stream  ;  left  it  in  lat.  37°  32'  N.,  long.  72>»  08'  W.  I  found  the 
direction  of  this  current  to  be  about  N.  E.  by  N.,  2  knots  per  hour:  the  highest  tempera- 
ture of  which  was  77°,  the  mean  76°,  being  15^^  warmer  than  the  water  imraodiateljr 
bordering  it. 

MONA  AND  MONITO.— These  isles  lie  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  Mona  Passage, 
towards  the  south. 

MONA  ISLAND. — This  island  is  nearly  level,  and  of  moderate  height.  We  could 
not  see  it.farther  than  18  miles  on  a  clear  day.  Its  north-east,  south-east,  and  south- 
west sides,  are  bounded  by  a  reef  a  quarter  of  a  mile  off  shore.  At  the  distance  of  tm 
miles,  we  ran  along  these  sides,  but  saw  no  other  danger  than  a  reef  which  extends  one 
mile  and  a  half  off  the  south  point. 

The  S.  W.  point  (to  the  northward  of  which  is  the  anchorage)  is  sand,  long  and  low, 
with  brushwood  and  small  trees  on  it.  There  is  a  reef  off  this  point,  about  a  quarter  of 
a  mile  in  length,  to  the  westward. 

We  anchored  here  in  his  Majesty's  ship  Arachne,  with  the  sandy  point  bearing  S.  by 
W.  one  mile  and  a  half;  Island  of  Monito,  N.  4  E. ;  N.  W.  Point  of  Mona,  (high  Bod 
bluff,)  N.  E.  i  N. 

We  came  to  our  anchorage  from  the  northward,  passing  Munito  to  the  westward  witiiiii 
6  miles,  but  had  no  soundings ;  neither  could  we  see  broken  water,  or  any  danger  between 
it  and  Mona.  This  island  is  the  resort  of  innumerable  quantities  of  boobies ;  its  sides  are 
very  white,  and  are  inaccessible.  Our  anchorage  was  off  the  sandy  bay  formed  by  the 
S.  W.  point,  (bearing  as  above  mentioned,)  sandy  bottom  ;  this,  tho  N.  W.  side,  is  also 
bounded  by  a  reef,  about  three  cables'  length  from  shore  :  the  passage  through  it  is  nearly 
in  the  centre  of  the  bay,  but  it  is  narrow,  and  a  boat  must  pick  her  way  through.  The 
soundings  are  very  regular ;  we  found  4  fathoms  close  to  the  reef;  and  there  would  be  no 
danger  in  anchoring  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  it,  bearing  in  mind  it  ia  open  to  all  west- 
erly, and  from  south  to  gouth-east  winds. 


mmt 


wmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

\tre  landed  on  the  sandy  beach,  and  found  the  w«*t  end  of  the  island,  which  is  low, 
covered  with  small  trees,  brush^rood,  and  at  a  few  cleared  spots,  white  grass ;  in  the  lat- 
Kf  of  which  were  small  pools  of  fresh  water,  apparently  dug,  but  of  bad  quality  :  around 
tbeae  w6  found  the  print  of  the  hoofs  of  cattle  and  horses,  or  mules,  very  recently  made, 
gi  was  evident  by  the  sun  not  having  hardened  the  soil.  These  pools  of  fresh  water  were 
on  the  south-east  side  of  the  sandy  point,  about  one  mile  and  a  half  from  the  landing. 
^e  did  not  find  any  signs  of  habitation  or  inhabitants :  and,  excepting  the  before  men- 
tioaed  fresh  water  pools,  we  saw  no  possibility  of  obtaining  water.  A  small  quantity  of 
lireffood  might  be  obtained,  but  with  labor.  The  remarks  on  this  island  in  the  Colum- 
bian Navigator  are  imperfect :  they  give  the  anchorage  in  the  following  bearings  ;  Mo- 
nito  Island,  N.  by  W. ;  S.  W.  point  of  Mona,  S.  E. ;  but  it  is  not  possible  to  bring 
these  bearings  on. 

I^ear  the  west  point,  however,  some  vessels  anchor,  in  order  to  procure  grass,  when 
engaged  in  carrying  cattle.     The  island  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  6  leagues. 

Monito  is  an  islet,  the  greatest  extent  of  which  scarcely  reaches  to  two-thirds  of  a  ca- 
ble's length ;  it  is  much  Ion  er  than  Mona,  and  in  shape  resembles  a  shoemaker's  last ; 
OD  ite  surface  no  bush  is  seen,  and  it  is  the  perpetual  resort  of  immense  numbers  of  boo- 
by birds.  The  pilots  of  these  coasts  state  that  there  is  a  clean  and  deep  passage  between 
itnnd  Mona. 

EASTERN  COAST  OF  HAYTI,  OR  OF  ST  DOMINGO.— The  eastern  shore 
ij generally  low,  but  the  land  may  be  described  at  the  distance  of  10  leagues.  Cnpe  En- 
mnno,  tne  easternmost  point,  lies  in  lat.  18"  344',  and  long.  68°  204'.  From  this  point 
the  land  of  Porto  Rico  may,  in  clear  weather,  be  seen. 

From  Cape  Enganno  to  Cape  Raphael,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W.  by  W. 
14  leagues;  at  about  3  leagues  to  the  south-eastward  of  the  latter  the  land  rises,  and  so 
continues  to  the  cape. 

Cape  Raphael  is  of  moderate  height,  and  appears  at  a  distance  like  an  island.  It  is 
distinguished  by  a  conical  peak  island,  which  resembles  a  sugar-loaf,  and  is  commonly 
called  the  Round  Hill.  The  shore  eastward  is  not  only  low  but  foul,  and  ought  not  to 
be  approached  nearer  than  a  league.  At  rather  more  than  half  way  from  Cnpe  Ra- 
I  towards  Cape  Enganno,  is  Point  Macao,  on  the  S.  W.  of  which  is  a  little  town  of 


347 


Eastern 
Coast  of 
Hayti,  or  of 
at.  Domigo. 


the  same  name. 

Cape  Enganno  ia  low  by  the  sea,  and  a  shoal  extends  from  it  nearly  3  miles  to  the  N. 
E.  This  shoal,  having  little  water  on  it,  must  have  a  good  berth.  Cape  Enganno.  bear- 
ing W.  by  S.  6  leagues,  makes  with  two  heads  like  a  wedge. 

From  Cape  Enganno  the  coast  trends  to  the  S.  W.  and  south  to  Point  Espada,  which 
is  low  and  bordered  by  a  white  shoal  and  reef.  From  this  point  to  the  S.  W.  the  coast 
forms  a  bay  called  Higuey,  and  a  smaller  one,  Calamite :  both  are  very  foul,  with  reefs. 
To  the  southward  of  the  latter  is  the  Island  Soan,  having  a  channel  of  considerable  breadth 
between  it  and  the  land  of  Hayti ;  but  it  is  so  obstructed  as  to  be  impassable  to  any  but 
imall  craft. 

To  the  Southern  Coast  of  Hayti,  from  Soan  to  Cape  Tiburon. 

THE  ISLE  OF  SOAN,  which  lies  off  the  S.  E.  Coast  of  Hayti,  is  about  13  miles  in 
length  from  east  to  west.  It  is  covered  with  trees,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  white  shoal 
to  the  distance  of  nearly  two  miles.  The  positk..n  of  the  eastern  point  of  this  isle,  ac- 
cording to  the  Spanish  observers,  is  lat.  18°  12',  and  long.  68°  314'.  At  the  western  end 
are  several  islets  on  the  bank.  Five  miles  south  of  the  east  end  of  Soan,  there  is  a  rock 
that  sometimes  breaks. 

From  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  Soan  to  Point  Caucedo,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay 
ofSt.  Domingo,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  W.  4  N.  164  leagues.  The  coast  between 
is  in  general  tolerably  clean  ;  for  there  is  only  one  place,  the  Playa  de  Andres,  (Andrew's 
Beach,)  which  has  a  reef,  and  this  stretches  out  to  sea  about  a  league  ;  but  at  four 
leagues  from  Soan,  is  the  little  island  of  Santa  Catalina,  (St.  Catherine,)  the  eastern 
part  of  which  is  narrow,  and  the  western  foul. 

On  the  west  of  Cape  Caucedo  is  an  anchorage,  named  La  Caleta,  which  affords  shel- 
ter from  the  breeze.  The  coast  hence  sweeps  to  the  westward,  to  form  the  great  bay 
of  St.  Domingo,  at  the  bottom  of  which  the  river  Ozama  disembogues.  On  the  western 
bank  of  this  river  stands  the  city  of  St.  Domingo.  Along  all  the  front  of  the  Bay  is  a 
sand  bank,  the  Estudios,  having  5,  6,  and  8  fathoms  water,  and  extending  about  half  a 
mile  out  to  sea.  On  this  bank  vessels  anchor,  but  with  some  risk,  especially  in  the  season 
of  the  souths,  which  raise  a  heavy  swell,  and  there  is  no  shelter  from  these  winds ;  added 
to  which  the  coast  is  wild  and  rocky,  without  any  beach,  and  the  sea  breaks  on  it  with 
riolence.  The  safe  anchorage  is  within  the  river,  but  it  has  a  bar  of  rock  which  prevents 
fessels  drawing  more  than  13  feet  from  taking  it;  and  even  these  are  in  danger  of  striking 
duriag  the  souths. 


H3  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

To  anchor  on  the  Estudios  Bank,  it  is  neceuary  to  coast  the  windward  land  from  Cape 
Caucedo,  at  the  distance  of  from  three  cables*  length  to  half  a  mile.  It  is  very  cloan  and 
deep,  and  only  on  the  eastern  point  of  the  river  is  there  a  shoal  of  little  water;  tills  stretcheg 
out  about  two  cables'  length,  and  to  keep  clear  of  it  you  must  not  haul  to  the  northward, 
in  any  degree,  until  the  west  point  of  the  river  bears  north. 

The  city  of  St.  Domingo,  which  is  the  metropolis  of  tho  eastern  division  of  Havti  Ig 
situated,  according  to  the  late  observations,  in  latitude  IB''  28',  and  longitude  6<J'^'  5U'. '  It 
>  stands  on  the  right  or  western  bank  of  the  River  Ozama,  the  entrance  to  which  may  be 

known  by  a  great  fort  on  that  side.  To  the  westward  of  this  fort  is  a  liirge  savanna, 
which  forms  an  amphitheatre,  and  makes  a  beautiful  prospect.  The  harbor  is  vnry  com- 
modious, and  ships  may  lie  close  to  tho  shore  to  take  in  their  lading,  by  planks,  from  the 
wharves. 

Tho  city  is  built  on  a  rocky  point.    The  streets  ore  at  right  angles,  N.  and  S.  and  E. 
and  W.,  and  have  footways  of  brick.     The  greatest  part  of  the  town  is  built  with  mnrble 
found  in  tho  neighborhood,  and  in  the  style  of  the  ancient  houses  of  Franco  and  Italy, 
The  more  modern  houses  are  of  clay,  which  acquires  the  haidness  of  stone  or  of  wood 
I  thatched  with  the  leaves  of  the  palm  tree .     The  cathedral  is  spacious  and  magnificent! 

The  population  is  computed  at  more  than  20,000.  The  fortifications  have  been  judi- 
cloudy  constructed,  and  the  town  is  surrounded  by  a  thick  wall. 

To  sail  into  the  harbor,  run  in  directly  towards  the  church  with  aflat  steeple,  and  to 
within  n  mile  of  it.  Here  you  will  have  15  fathoms  of  water,  nearly  opposite  tho  eastern 
point,  and  a  little  within,  off  n  small  fort  on  tho  larboard.  Run  in  directly;  you  cannot 
do  amiss.     Towards  the  sea  there  is  no  danger. 

It  has  been  said,  that  since  this  description  was  written,  the  depth  of  the  harbor  haj 
been  reduced  by  an  accumulation  of  sand  ;  caution  in  entering  is  therefore  necessary. 

In  navigating  off  this  coast,  allowance  must  always  be  made  for  tho  currents,  which  set 
mo  t  frequently  to  the  eastward ;  and  there  is  very  commonly  an  indraught  into  the  Bay 
of  Nave,  to  the  west ;  which  must,  of  course,  in  some  degree,  affect  the  navigation  to- 
wards that  of  St.  Domingo. 

Remarks  and  Directions  for  St.  Domingo,  by  Capt  Mackelter. 

"  The  anchorage  is  about  three  quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  is  open  to  all 
winds,  from  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  to  S.  W.  by  W.,  and  when  the  sea  breeze  is  at  all  to  the 
Boutliward,  there  is  of  course  a  very  heavy  swell.  The  bottom  is  of  black  sand  and  mud, 
apparently  a  good  holding  groun<l.  Ships  intending  to  anchor  here,  and  being  round 
i'oint  Naiso,  with  the  tower  in  sight,  ought  to  keep  well  to  the  eastward ;  and  when  the 
tower  bears  N.  N.  W.  they  may  steer  for  it,  keeping  it  in  that  bearing,  until  within  a 
mile  and  a  half  of  it;  then  bring  the  west  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  river,  on  which 
stands  a  signal-tower,  to  bear  N.  i  E.,  and  in  a  line  with  some  houses  on  the  east  side  of 
tf<e  river;  these  houses  stand  within  the  river's  mouth,  on  a  small  sandy  beach ;  and  by 
keeping  thoni  in  one  with  the  west  point  of  the  river,  bearing  N.  i  E.,  will  carry  you  in- 
to tlie  best  anchorage. 

"  On  coming  within  a  mile  of  the  town,  you  will  get  soundings  of  40  or  50  fiithoms; 
the  next  cast  15;  then  10,  and  from  that  it  shoalens  gradually  to  the  shore.  Tlie  bank 
being  very  steep,  I  should  recommend  to  ships  having  the  wind  free,  to  shorten  BaiiiQ 
good  time,  and  run  in  with  their  sails  clued  up :  by  doing  this  you  get  your  soundings 
true  ;  and  so  soon  as  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  let  go  your  anchor,  not  waiting  to  round  to,  sa 
there  is  but  little  room. 

"  Tho  east  point  of  tho  entrance  of  the  river  is  a  flat  rocky  point,  and  stretches  con- 
siderably out  farther  than  the  west  point.  The  east  point  will  be  the  nearost  land  to  you 
when  you  anchor,  bearing  about  N.  E.  The  whole  of  the  town  is  on  the  west  side  of 
the  river,  and  has  been  well  fortified,  but  the  fortifications  at  present  are  out  of  repair, 
The  river  forms  an  excellent  harbor  inside  ;  but  has  a  bar  of  solid  rock  at  its  entranoe, 
with  never  more  than  134  feet  water  on  it.  The  pilots  here  affirm  that  the  anchorage 
outside  is  perfectly  safe  ;  in  my  opinion  it  may  be  well  enough  to  stop  a  day  or  two  in 
that  season  of  the  year  when  the  weather  is  settled  ;  but  not,  on  any  account,  should  a 
ship  anchor  here  during  the  hurricane  months. 

"  I  had  no  opportunity  of  determining  the  situation  of  this  place  while  lying  here,  I 
got  the  latitude  at  anchor  by  two  stars,  one  on  tho  north  and  tlie  other  on  the  south;  ihej 
gave  the  anchorage  18°  27',  and  the  town  was  nearly  a  mile  north  of  us.  I  should  say 
the  latitude  of  the  town  was  about  18°  28',  but  not  to  be  depended  upon. 

Point  Naiso  is  the  western  point  of  the  bay  of  St.  Domingo  ;  and  to  clear  it  in  going 
out  from  that  anchorage,  you  must  steer  S.  by  W.,  or  S.  S.  W.,  and  having  run  14  miles 
on  either  of  these  courses,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  it. 

From  Naiso  Point  the  coast  trends  about  S.  W.  ind  W.  S.  W.,  and  is  so  clear  that 
you  may  run  along  it  at  less  than  2  miles.  It  then  sweeps  to  the  westward  towards  Nare 
Bay.  in  which  there  are  various  harbors  and  anchorages. 


m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


349 


Salinas  Point,  ou  the  east  lide  of  Nave  Bny,  ia  in  latitude  IS*^  12',  longitude  70°  3G'. 
prom  this  point  the  coast  extends  to  the  N.  E.  a  mile  and  a  half,  to  Caldem  Point,  where 
s  large  bight  begins  to  form.  Here  is  an  inlet  of  two  miles  to  the  east,  in  which  every 
class  of  vesaols  iniiy  anchor  in  the  greatest  security,  sheltered  from  both  wind  and  sea. 
flie  mouth  of  this  harbor  (that  is,  the  space  which  intervenes  between  Culdeni  Point 
and  the  nearest  land)  is  hair  a  mile  wide  but  the  good  and  deep  channel  is  reduced  to  a 
cable's  length ;  for  a  rocky  shoal,  at  the  edge  of  which  there  are  4^  futUnins  water, 
gtretcbus  out  about  3  cables'  length  from  the  coast;  and  another  of  the  same  kind,  and 
with  the  same  depth  of  water  at  its  edge,  runs  out  to  half  a  cable  from  Calderu  Point. 
The  depth  of  water  in  this  channel  is  from  7  to  8  fathoms,  on  oozy  sand.  Although  this 
harbor  is  large,  the  ledge  of  rocks  which  borders  the  coast  rounds  the  whole  interior  of  it, 
and  reduces  it  much  ;  it  is  also  further  reduced  by  various  rocky  shoals  in  the  very  an- 
chorage, but  they  have  between  them  good  and  deep  channels.  As  these  shoals  obstruct 
it  60  much,  it  is  extremely  difficult,  even  with  a  good  knowledge  of  it,  to  enter  it  under 
lail,  and  totally  impassible  if  you  are  not  acquainted  wit>i  it.  In  addition  to  this,  on  ac- 
count of  the  narrowness  of  the  channel,  you  cannot  work  in,  and  therefore  no  one  should 
enter  into  this  bight  otherwise  than  by  warping  or  towing ;  having  previously  anchored 
to  the  north  of  Caldera  Point,  and  at  about  a  cable's  length  from  it.  In  order  to  this,  you 
must  keep  within  2  cables'  length  from  Salinas  Point,  and  preserve  the  same  distance 
notil  you  are  past  a  small  point,  which  the  coast  forms  between  Salinas  and  Caldera 
Point,  which  is  foul,  and  sends  out  a  rocky  shoal,  on  which  there  are  no  more  than  2  or 
Sfathoms  water.  Having  passed  that  point,  which  is  called  Rancheras  Point,  you  may 
run  within  less  than  oii>3  cable's  lengtli  of  the  coast,  if  you  choose  to  make  Calderu 
Point,  and  anchor  in  its  vicinity.  If  tiie  wind  is  not  favorable  for  obtaining  this  situation, 
jou  init>  :>!nk  in,  but  take  care  on  both  boards,  to  tack  in  S  or  lU  fathoms,  that  you  may 
keep  clear  of  the  ledges.     If  once  anchored  outside,  you  must  get  a  warp  carried  out  by  ^ 

Tour  bouts,  (whxh  must  also  examine  and  ascertain  the  proper  channel,)  and  having 
warped  two  or  three  cables'  length  farther  in,  you  will  be  in  a  very  secure  and  well  shel- 
tered anchorage. 

From  Caldera  Point  the  coast  trends  towards  the  N.  W.  to  the  Point  and  River  of 
Ocoa;  whence  it  roturns  towards  the  N.  E.,  and  forms  a  very  extensive  roadstead,  which 
is  sheltered  from  the  breezes:  but  the  bank,  which  is  of  sand,  is  so  steep,  that  the  an- 
chors are  apt  to  drag,  and  the  cables  sometimes  fail,  being  damaged  by  the  loose  stones 
which  are  in  the  bottom.  From  these  reasons  vessels  may  anchor  very  near  the  land, 
and  send  a  cable  ashore,  which  they  make  fast  to  some  of  the  palm-trees  that  are  on  the 
bank,  having  also  a  cable  laid  out  for  the  changes  of  wind  which  take  place  in  the  night 
from  the  W.  and  W.  N.  W.,  and  which  render  it  necessary  for  those  who  take  this  an- 
chorage to  wait  until  the  breeze  comes  in,  which  happens  at  10  A.  M.  With  the  breeze 
you  leave  Ocoa  Point  well  prepared  to  receive  the  gusts  of  wind  which  come  off  the  coast, 
lor  they  are  very  heavy. 

From  Ocoa  Roadstead  the  coast  follows  to  the  north  for  four  miles,  and  then  to  the 
west  eight  more,  where  it  begins  to  take  to  the  south,  to  form  the  west  coast  or  shore  of 
the  great  bay. 

Near  the  turn  where  the  coast  begins  to  descend  to  the  south,  there  is  a  harbor  named 
Escondito,  or  Hidden  Harbor,  which  lies  nearly  N.  W.  from  Salinas  Point.  The  mouth 
of  this  is  more  than  half  a  mile  in  width,  and  to  enter  it  you  must  keep  near  its  south 
point,  which  is  clean  ;  and  the  water  is  so  deep  that  at  half  a  cable  from  it  there  are  5^ 
and  6  fathoms.  A  reef  stretches  out  a  cable's  length  from  the  north  point.  Haifa  mile 
within  the  harbor,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  middle  of  its  mouth,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal, 
which  is  two  cables  in  extent  from  N.  to  S.,  and  one  from  E.  to  W.,  and  upon  which  a 
vessel  must  run,  if  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  harbor,  and  steering  N.  W.  To  avoid  it 
jrou  must  keep  within  two  cables'  length  of  the  south  shore,  and  anchor  about  half  a 
mile  within  the  harbor,  but  not  farther  in  with  large  vessels,  for  the  depth  diminishes  so 
that  at  two  cables'  farther  in  there  are  only  15  feet  water.  You  can  also  anchor  to  the 
north  of  the  shoal,  in  5  fathoms,  taking  care  not  to  run  farther  in  than  3  or  4  cables'  length 
from  the  mouth.  In  fine  weather  this  harbor  is  excellent  for  vessels  which  do  not  draw 
more  than  13  feet,  which  may  enter,  and  be  sheltered  from  all  winds.  Frigates  and  ships 
of  the  line  remain  always  exposed  to  some  swell  from  the  S.  E.,  and  had  better  be,  in 
this  case,  near  the  south  than  the  north  |)art  of  it, 

BKA.TA  POINT,  or  LITTLE    CAPE   MONGON,  is  the  southernmost  point  of  Beata  Point, 
Hayti.    Its  bearing  and   distance  from    Punta  de  Salinas  are  about  S.  W.  -i   W.,  16   or LittleCapt 
leagues.    Of  the  coast  between  we  have  no  particular  description.     Eight  miles  to  the    Mongon. 
north-eastward  of  Beata  Point  is  Cape  Mongon,  and  between  these  points  appears  the 
high  mountaiuous  land  of  Bauruco. 

ISLE  OF  BEATA.— This  island  lies  to  the  south  of  Beata  Point,  and  is  li  league   Isle  of  Beata. 
in  length  from  N.  to  S.,  and  about  2  miles  broad  from  E.  to  W.     It  is  low,  and  covered 
nith  bushes.     There  is  a  breaker  off  the  N.  by  E.  side  of  it,  stretching  towards  Cape 
Mongon,  at  the  extremity  of  which  is  a  white  shoal,  that  rery  much  narrows  the  passage 


•^^^mr 


'w^m^^i''* 


'^^pipppiPiiir 


360 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


AllareUi- 


Poinl  Afj^u- 
jas. 


Jaquemel.  or 
Jactnel. 


between  Dentn  and  the  iliore.  In  the  pniBnge  nre  but  3  fBthoms  of  water.  There  ii  g|, 
chorage  to  the  weatWHrd  uf  Beata,  between  it  and  the  shore,  in  7,  8  and  10  fnthoma 
•nndy  and  weedy  bottom,  with  the  N.  W.  end  bearing  about  N.  by  E.,  or  N.  N.  K.,  oag 
mile,  and  the  S.  W.  end  S.  by  W.,  four  mileg. 

East  of  the  isle  the  water  is  deep,  and  there  is  no  ground  at  a  short  distance  from  it 
with  AO  fathoms  of  line.  Tliore  is,  nevertheless,  a  shoal  stretching  from  tlie  H.  W.  point 
to  which  u  small  berth  should  be  given,  as  there  are  no  more  than  4  fathoms  of  water 
west,  3  caljles'  length  from  the  \m\nt.  When  the  hitter  bears  E.  S.  E.  you  miiy  haul  ud 
from  the  N.  W.  end.     In  the  anchorage  there  is  good  fishing. 

The  Krayles,  or  Friars,  a  number  of  steep  rocks  above  water,  lie  west  three  lengueg 
from  Brata.  The  sea  breaks  over  part  of  them,  and  they  are  so  bold  to  that  vessels 
may  sail  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  round  :  but  it  will  be  prudent  not  to  approach  witliin 
a  mile. 

Near  all  the  isles  off  the  main  coast  the  bottom  may  generally  be  seen  ;  but  nenr  tho 
shor  >  of  Ilayti  tho  water  is  very  deep.  The  coast  hereabouts  is  a  flat  of  white  and  Jianl 
rocks,  about  40  feet  high,  in  which  appear  large  holes  and  breakings,  with  some  prickir 
shrubs. 

ALTAVELA,  or  the  little  Mount,  a  high  rocky  islet,  lies  at  the  distance  of  five 
leagHes  south  from  Beata  Point,  in  latitude  17°  28',  and  longitude  about  71°  38'.  Tlie 
islet  is  peaked,  but  its  summit  has  a  rotundity  resembling  the  upper  part  of  a  bell,  Iti„ 
generally  seen  before  any  other  land  in  the  vicinity,  particularly  from  the  southward,  and 
appears  like  u  domo  emerging  above  a  mist  or  fog.  Being  very  bold,  it  may  be  approaclied 
with  safoty. 

At  the  distance  of  two  and  a  half  leagues  N.  N.  E.  from  Altavela  lies  the  south  end  of 
Beata  Ittland.  Between  ia  a  good  and  very  deep  channel.  There  cannot,  however,  be 
any  motive  for  preferring  a  passage  between  these  islands  to  passing  southward  of  Alta- 
vela :  and  therefore  vessels  bound  to  the  westward  from  Ocoa  Bay,  may  steer  S.  S.  W, 
22j  leagues,  and  a  west  course  will  then  lead  well  to  the  southward  of  Altavein;  a  more 
southerly  course  is,  however,  to  bo  preferred,  in  order  to  avoid  danger  should  the  wind 
become  scant,  with  a  westerly  or  W.  by  N.  current,  which  has  often  been  foun  I  to  pre- 
vail here  with  considerable  strength.  I 

POINT  AGUJAS,  or  the  False  Capo,  bears  from  Beata  Point  W.  N.  W.  i  W,6  I 
leagues,  and  from  the  Frayles  N.  W.  by  N.  3  leagues.  Cape  Lopez  bears  N.,  true  5 
miles  from  Point  Agujas.  The  coast  between  forms  a  bay,  affording  good  unchorage. 
From  Cape  Lopez,  Cape  Roxo  bears  N.  by  W.,  24  leagues,  and  between  \n  the  Enje- 
nada  sin  F<indo,  or  Bottomless  Bay ;  from  this  bay  the  coast  trends  to  the  N.  W.,  and 
at  5  leagues  from  Capo  Roxo  is  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  de  Pedernaleg,  or  Pitre's  Cove, 
which  constituted  tho  old  limit  between  Hispaniola  and  Hayti.  At  this  place  is  a  good 
anchorage,  which  it  is  easy  to  take,  a  bank  hero  extending  along  shore,  and  there  is  oo 
risk  in  nearing  the  coast. 

From  Cape  Lopez,  the  promontory  called  Morne  Rouge,  or  Red  Hill,  bears  N.  W. 
12  leagues.  A  league  and  a  half  to  the  eastward  of  iVIorne  Kouge,  is  the  vilhige  of  Sale 
Trou,  or  Foul  Hole,  where  there  is  a  good  anchorage  for  vessels  drawing  less  than  16 
feet :  larger  ships  may  anchor  there,  but  they  must  lie  farther  out,  where  the  ground  ii 
not  so  good. 

From  Morne  Rouge  the  const  trenches  io  a  little  to  the  northward,  then  out  again  E. 
S.  E.  to  the  Anses  a  Pitres,  or  PitreCove.  All  the  coast  is  clear,  and  may  be  approach- 
ed with  great  safety,  as  noticed  above. 

There  is  good  anchorage  at  the  Anses  a  Pitres,  and  of  very  easy  access.  At  2  milet 
from  the  shore  the  water  is  very  deep.  All  the  coast  hereabout  appears  white,  beioc 
chalky.  You  may  anchor  either  before  the  plain  of  Anses  a  Pitres,  or  southward  of  s 
small  capo  before  the  mouth  of  a  river,  which  is  considerable  enough  to  be  easily  distin- 
guished. The  water  is  smooth,  and  you  will  be  well  sheltered  in  (>  or  8  fathoms,  good 
ground,  or  in  4  fathoms  ond  better  ground  nearer  shore. 

From  Morne  Kouge  the  coast  rounds  to  Cape  Jaquemel,  or  Jacmel,  which  bears  from 
the  former  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  29  miles.  From  Capo  Jaquemel  Capo  Marchaud  bears  N. 
by  E.  4  E.,  distant  rather  less  than  2  miles. 

In  approaching  Morne  Rouge  from  Cape  Jaquemel,  it  may  be  known  by  its  white 
hummocks. .  The  const  in  the  space  between  forms  several  little  creeks,  wherein  small 
vessels  may  anchor;  but  in  none  of  them  will  they  be  sheltered. 

JAQUEMEL,  or  JACMEL. — Between  Cape  Jaquemel  and  Cape  Marchnud  liet 
the  Bay  of  Jaquemel,  in  the  u|)per  part  of  which  there  is  anchorage  for  shipping  of  every 
class.  The  town  of  Jaquemel  stands  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  to  the  east  of  the  River 
(luache.  which  has  several  mouths  in  the  beach.  This  bay,  which  is  2  miles  in  doptli, 
was  surveyed  by  Captain  Matkellar  and  tho  officers  of  the  British  ship  Pique,  in  1817; 
and  from  this  survey  it  appears  that  in  tho  middle  of  it  no  bottom  could  be  fouudat  70 
and  8U  fathoms ;  but  the  bank  around  the  coast,  which  is  about  3  cables'  in  breadth,  has 
from  20  to  3  fathoms,  shoaling  to  the  laud.     On  this  bank,  upon  the  N.  E.  side  of  lbs  | 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


361 


diy,  it  K  dangeroui  reef,  nearly  half  a  mile  long,  the  outer  edge  of  which  la  3  cnbloa' 
leDgtii  from  the  there.  To  rhe  wettwnrd  of  ihia  reef,  and  oppotite  the  town,  in  the  nn- 
cbornKei  having  from  6  and  7  to  3,  and  in  one  tpot  2^  fathonia.  You  may  tail  in  with 
A  reniarltablu  white  clitf,  the  latt  clitf  on  the  wettern  tide,  bearing  from  W.  i  N.  tu 
^.\V.  i  Nm  until  the  wharf  near  the  middle  of  the  town,  comoa  on  with  the  eoHtcrn 
,jde  of  nn  old  battery,  bearing  N.  by  E.  j  E.,  nnd  witii  tliin  murk  on  you  lulf  up  tu  the 
inchomge.  which,  at  half  u  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  town,  haa  tlio  depths  above 
nieotioned. 

jBquemel  Harbor  may  be  distinguished  at  a  distance,  by  the  sudden  cut  ofl'  or  drop  of 
a  bill,  seen  over  another  long  hill  at  the  upper  part  of  the  harbor.  Running  in  towards 
tliat  drop  will  lead  directly  to  the  entrance. 

BAYENfcTTE.— From  Cape  Jaquemol  Cape  Bayenette  lies  nearlv  W.  i  S.,  distant  Dayenellf.. 
3  leagues.  The  latter  may  be  known  by  the  white  hummocks  und  clitls  on  its  extrumitv. 
Tiiiscape  forms  the  south  side  of  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  which  is  open  to  the  iS.  E. 
[\»  DBtne,  Bayenette,  signilies  clear  bay,  and  is  supposed  tu  huvo  been  given  from  its 
put  depth  of  water,  and  being  entirely  clear  of  shoals.  Thia  bay  it  unsheltered,  but 
there  is  anchorage  on  the  north  side  near  the  shore. 

LA  VACHE. — From  Cape  Bayenette  to  the  east  point  of  La  Vuche,  the  bearing  La  Vache 
and  distnnce  are  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  thirteen  and  a  half  leagues.  The  isle  is  three  leagues 
luiig  and  about  one  broad  ;  it  is  hilly,  and  at  the  distance  of  six  or  seven  leagues,  appears 
Ijlie  HD  assemblage  of  small  islands.  The  south  side  is  bold,  and  along  the  north  reef  ex- 
teDds  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length.  From  off  the  east  point  is  a  white  shoitl,  con- 
nected with  the  reef,  extending  from  an  islet  to  the  N.  W.,  called  La  Fulie,  or  the  Fool's 
Rock. 

From  the  Fool's  Rock  to  the  N.  W.  end  of  La  Vache,  there  is  a  range  of  islets  and 
shoals,  among  which  are  some  narrow  passages.  On  the  north  side  of  La  Vache  is  ii 
bay,  called  the  Bale  de  Feret,  where  there  ia  good  anchorage,  but  it  is  accessible  only  to 
those  who  are  well  acquainted.  The  northernmost  of  the  islets  above  mentioned,  is 
Grosse  Ciiys,  called  also  Caye  de  I'Eau,  or  Water  key,  which  is  readily  known  by  a  greut 
tuft  of  lufgc  trees.  It  is  bold  to,  and  at  some  distance  from  its  north  side  there  is  good 
anchorage,  in  from  15  to  3U  fathoms. 

The  western  end  of  La  Vache  forms  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  great  bay, 
called  Bay  of  the  Cayos;  and  from  its  8.  W.  Point,  called  Point  Dinmuut,  Point  Abucou 
bean  nearly  W.  by  8.  five  miles.  In  mid-channel  between,  there  is  a  depth  of  25  fath- 
omi,  thence  decreasing  *owards  the  island.  From  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  isle  a  white 
rocliv  spit  extends  to  the  south,  having  from  7  to  5  fathoms  over  it,  at  about  two  miles 
Irom  shore. 

Remarks  on  the  Anchorages  mthin  La  kache,  by  Captain  Mackellar,  1817. 

"TheN.  W.  point  of  La  Vache  is  in  latitude  18^  6' N.,  longitude  by  chronom- 
eter, &c.  73°  43'  15"  W.  Variation  6°  20'  E.  Ships  coming  from  the  westward,  and 
intending  to  anchor  here,  ought  to  round  Abacou  Point,  at  a  good  mile  oil',  as  a  reef 
stretches  to  the  S.  E.  to  nearly  that  distance  from  it.  Having  rounded  this  reef,  there  ia 
nothing  in  the  way,  and  you  may  steer  for  the  N.  W.  point  of  Ln  Vuche.  At  half  way 
between  it  and  Abacou  Point  there  are  soundings  in  15  fathoms,  and  the  bottom  thence 
ihoalens  gradually  to  the  island.  The  best  anchorage  here  is  with  the  N.  W.  part  of 
the  island  bearing  E.  N.  E.  in  5  fathoms ;  you  will  then  bo  about  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  from  the  shore,  on  a  white  sandy  bottom.  The  soundings  all  over  this  part  are  so 
very  regular,  that  you  can  hardly  err  in  anchoring  any  where,  so  long  as  you  keep  the 
N.  W.  point  of  the  island  bearing  to  the  northward  of  east.  From  the  N.  W.  point  to 
the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island  the  soundings  are  not  so  regular,  nnd  strangers  ought  not 
to  come  nearer  than  in  7  fathoms,  especially  near  the  S.  W.  point,  for  a  reef  stretches 
from  it  to  the  southward  not  less  than  two  miles,  having  very  foul  ground  with  irregular 
Handings  to  upwards  of  a  mile  or  more.  Therefore,  ships,  coming  from  the  eostward 
aod  intending  to  anchor,  ought  to  keep  Abacou  Point  bearing  west  until  the  west  point  of 
La  Vache  bears  north.  They  may  then  haul  in  to  the  northward  and  steer  for  the  an- 
chorage. 

"  About  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  town  of  Aux  Cayes,  which  stands  to  the  north, 
there  are  three  small  white  clifls  close  to  the  sea  side  ;  and  the  mark  I  have  generally 
run  in  and  out  by,  is  the  easternmost  cliff  bearing  north,  and  in  a  line  with  a  small  round 
hill  on  the  highest  land  behind  it;  and  anchoring  with  this  mark  nearly  on  the  N.  W- 
point  of  La  Vache,  bearing  E.  N.  £.  or  N.  £.  by  E. 

"  The  whole  of  this  large  bay  to  the  westward  of  La  Vache  is  clear,  and  the  soundings 
very  regular  while  you  keep  the  west  end  of  the  island  bearing  to  the  northward  of  east. 
To  the  northward  of  this  1  had  no  opportunity  of  sounding,  although  I  am  well  aware 
thaf  bqtwe^D  La  Vache  and  Aux  Cayes,  the  bay  is  covered  with  large  reefs,  and  several 
are  above  water." 


mm^^'m 


mmm 


353 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  Caycs, 
St.  Louis,  ffc. 


CavaUlon 
Bay. 


Baie  du 

Mesle. 


Bay  of  S:. 
Louis. 


THE  CAYES,  ST.  LOUIS,  &c — Point  Abacou  is  composed  of  two  points  or 
reofs,  which  stretch  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  seaward  ;  but  you  may  pass  witljoutfear 
at  the  distance  of  half  a  league,  and  will  find  no  ground  with  a  line  of  40  fathoms.  Th» 
town  of  the  Cayos  bears  from  Abacou  Point  nearly  north,  four  leagues.  In  sailing  to- 
wards this  pliico,  and  approaching  Point  Diainant,  before  noticed,  you  will  not  find  the 
white  ground  for  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  it ;  and  the  ground  is  good  in  6 
or  7  fiitlioms.  With  Point  Diamant  bearing  east  there  are  soundings  all  across.  There 
is  good  unchorago  to  the  west  of  Diainaiit  Point,  and  farther  to  the  northward  opposite  a 
sandy  cove,  in  from  G  to  7  fathoms,  bottom  of  mud  and  sand. 

To  go  into  Aux  Cayes  you  range  along  the  N.  W.  Point  of  La  Vache.  in  6  fathoms 
water ;  and  you  steer  nearly  N.  by  E.  to  mulio  on  your  starboard  hand,  the  white  hum- 
mocks of  Cavaillon.  You  will  then  leave  on  the  larboard  hati  i  a  large  reef,  surrounded 
with  a  white  shoal,  which  takes  up  almost  all  the  middle  of  tlie  bay.  When  vou  have 
brought  the  town  to  bear  N.  W.  i  W.,  you  must  haul  up  two  points  to  windward  of  the 
town,  standing  towards  the  Company's  Islet,  where  you  may  anchor  if  you  do  not  mean 
to  go  into  the  road ;  if  you  do,  you  shorten  sail  a  mile  .om  the  shore,  and  wait  For  a  pilot. 
The  channel  is  two-thirds  of  a  cable  in  breadth.  Shii)3  drawing  more  than  13  feet  water 
cannot  go  in;  those  of  15  and  17  feet  water  always  anchor  at  Chateaudin,  half  a  league 
to  the  westward,  and  which  is  separated  by  shoals  from  the  port. 

To  anchor  in  the  road  of  Chateaudin,  (coming  from  the  mooring  of  La  Var.he,)  W. 
or  W.  N.  W.  off  Diamant  Point,  in  8  or  11  fathoms,  you  must  steer  directly  for  Torbec 
which  is  a  small  town  very  easily  distinguished,  in  the  cod  of  the  bay;  this  tack  will  be 
about  N.  VV.  When  you  are  within  about  two  miles  of  the  shore,  you  will  discovern 
little  wliito  flag,  wliich  is  on  a  shoal ;  you  doul)le  it  to  the  westward  at  about  half  a  ca- 
ble's length,  leaving  it  on  the  st<irboard  hand  ;  when  you  have  brought  it  to  bear  south 
you  steer  along  the  coast  for  the  road  of  Chateaudin,  and  anchor  in  (5  or  7  fathoms,  mud! 
In  ail  this  passage,  if  you  keep  the  proper  channel,  you  cannot  have  less  tnan  from  7  fo9 
fathoms,  and  often  12  and  16,  muddy  ground. 

In  advancing  towards  the  Tapion  of  Cavaillon,  you  must  not  approach  too  near  its  S. 
E.  side,  as  a  shoal  of  only  C  feet  water,  called  Le  Mouton,  or  the  Sheep,  lies  S.  E.  from 
the  (vistern  point,  at  the  distance  of  about  half  a  mile.  There  is  a  depth  of  8  fathoms 
between  it  and  the  coast. 

CAVAILLON  BAY  is  spacious,  although  its  anchorage  is  of  small  extent.  Ths 
coast  on  the  western  side  is  very  steep,  and  the  bottoni  full  of  rocks ;  but  there  is  an- 
choring ground  on  the  eastern  side,  opposite  a  coast  covered  with  mangroves,  which  may 
be  approached  without  fear,  the  bottom  being  clean,  with  5  fathoms  close  to  the  shore. 

This  bay  affords  shelter  from  the  sea  breezes,  by  the  eastern  point  of  an  island,  which 
leaves  a  passage  into  the  Baie  des  Flanmnds,  next  described. 

Baie  des  Flamands.  or  Flamingo  Bay,  lies  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  Cavaillon  Bay, 
and  extends  upwards  towards  the  N.  K.  Its  entrance  and  shores  are  clear  and  bold,  and 
it  is  tile  place  where  ships  lie  up  in  the  hurricane  months.  There  is  a  good  careeuing 
place,  and  anchorage  in  every  part. 

BAIE  DU  MESLE. — From  Fhmingo  Bay  the  coast  extends  E.  by  N.  two  miles  to 
the  (irand  Baie  ''j  Mesle,  all  over  which  tho  anchorage  is  good;  but  as  the  entrance  is 
broad  and  open  to  the  southward,  there  is  no  shelter  from  southerly  winds.  The  coast 
hence  continues  its  direction  to  Point  Pascal,  half  way  towards  which  is  the  Petite  Baio 
du  Mesle,  in  which  a  vessel  may  anchor,  but  it  will  not  be  sheltered  even  from  the  sea- 
breeze. 

Off  the  Great  Bay  du  Mesle  is  a  shoal,  lying  like  a  bar  across  the  bay,  and  extending 
opposite  the  point,  which  is  to  tho  westward  of  the  Little  Bay  du  Mesle.  This  bank  has 
not,  in  some  places,  more  than  from  13  to  18  feet  water ;  it  is  very  narrow,  and  leaves  a 
passage  of  throo-ciuartcrs  of  a  mile  only  between  it  and  tho  coast.  To  tho  southward  it 
extends  about  lialf  a  league  from  shore. 

To  go  into  tho  Great  Bay,  with  a  ship  drawing  more  than  15  feet,  you  must  keep  close 
to  the  shore  on  the  west(4-n  side,  steering  by  Pointo  Paulin,  which  forms  that  side  of  the 
entrance. 

BAY  OF  ST.  LOUIS.— Tho  great  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  lies  between 
Point  Pascal,  wliicli  is  steep  and  wide,  and  a  little  isle  called  Orange  Key  :  the  hearing 
and  distance  from  one  to  tho  other  being  E.  i  N.,  rather  more  than  half  a  leaguii.  Tiiis 
isle  n:ay  bo  si'on  from  the  entrance  of  the  Cayes,  thirteen  miles  distant,  wheiieo  it  ap- 
pears iH^arly  in  a  line  with  the  southern  extremities  of  the  intermediate  coiijt. 

About  two-thirds  of  u  mile  N.  E.  I;y  N.  from  I'ascal  Point  is  the  Vigie  or  Old  Look- 
out P.iint ;  betwe(^n  is  a  cove,  called  tho  Baie  du  Paradis.  When  otf  the  Vigio  Point 
you  will  liavd  tile  whole*  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  in  sight.  The  bay  is  shut  in  on  the 
t'astern  side  by  Capo  Bonite,  which  bears  from  the  Vigie  Point,  N.  E.  i  E.,  distant  one 
mile  and  threo-f|uarter8. 

In  proceeding  to  the  ancliorago  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis,  run  along  past  Point  Pascal 
and  *'oiut  Vigie,  arij  thence  along  tlivS  Wvislorn  coast  of  tho  bay,  in  8  or  10  fatiioms  wa- 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


353 


points  or 
houtfear, 
ms.  Th» 
Bail'mg  to- 
>t  fiud  the 
good  ia  C 
3.  There 
opposite  a 

6  fathoms 
^hite  hum- 
lurrounded 
II  vou  have 
irurd  of  the 
u  not  mean 
;  for  a  pilot. 

I  feet  water 
ilf  a  league 

i&rhe,)  W. 
for  Torbec, 
tack  will  be 

II  discover  a 
t  half  a  ca- 
beur  south, 
thorns,  mud. 
1  from  7  ro  9 

0  near  its  S. 
9  S.  E.  from 
i)f  8  fathoms 

xtent.    The 
there  is  an- 
I,  which  may 
the  shore, 
sland,  which 

nvnillon  Bay, 
nd  bold,  anil 
careeuing 

two  miles  to 
eiitraace  is 
The  const 
Petite  Baio 
roiii  the  sea- 
extending 
'his  bauk  has 
and  leaves  o 
southward  it 

St  keep  clns! 
It  side  of  the 

lies  bPtween 

the  bearin; 

ja;4Uii.    This 

hene'o  it  ap- 

St. 

•  Old  Look- 

Vigio  I'nint 

lut  ill  on  the 

,,  distant  one 

Point  Pascal 
fathoms  wa- 


ter. The  anchornge  is  west  of  the  Old  Fort,  about  n  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  western 
shore,  and  so  situnted  that  tho'iown  may  be  seen  from  it,  beiwoen  the  Old  Fort  and  shore, 
in  the  bottom  of  the  buy.  The  Old  Fort  is  on  an  island  of  rocks  towards  the  middle  of 
the  bay,  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  town.  In  the  passage  betwepu  it  and  the 
shore,  there  is  a  depth  of  siii  fathoms. 

Id  the  anchorage  before  the  town,  culled  the  Little  Anchorage,  the  greatest  depth  is  5 
fathoms. 

S.  S.  E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Old  Fort,  and  west  of  Capo  Bonite,  at 
nearly  the  name  distance,  is  a  shoal  called  Le  Moutoii,  (The  Sheep.)  There  is  a  good 
passage  between  it  and  the  shore,  as  well  as  between  it  and  the  Old  Fort;  but  the  depth 
of  water  is  less  on  ths  eastern  than  on  the  western  side  of  the  buy. 

Between  Orange  Key  and  the  shore,  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  there  uro  two  islets  and  some 
jlioal  ground ;  the  first  of  which,  next  to  Orango  Key,  is  called  Rat's  Key.  You  may 
pass  iiito  the  Bay  of  St.  Louis  through  a  small  passage  immediately  on  the  north  side  of 
this  Key. 

AQUIN  BAY. — One  mile  and  a  half  E.  by  N.  from  Orango  Key,  is  Moustique  Key,  Aquin  Bay. 
a  little  island  clour  of  shoals,  unless  very  close  in  shore.  You  may  pass  without  or  with- 
in it,  at  the  distance  of  ono-eii^hth  of  a  league,  in  10  fathoms.  Cape  St.  George  is  north 
of  Moustique  Key,  and  N.  W.  of  a  key  called  Caye  a  Ramiers,  (or  Pigeon's  Key,)  which 
bears  E.  by  N.,  two  miles  from  Moustique  Key,  and  is  known  by  a  white  hummock, 
ruther  steep,  and  seen  at  some  distance.  There  is  a  deep  p;issage  between  it  and  Mous- 
tique Bay,  by  which  ships  pass  into  the  great  Bay  of  Aquin. 

South  of  Caye  a  Ramiers  is  a  shoal,  extending  half  a  league,  whicli  lias,  on  its  middle 
part, only  3  fathoms.  East  of  the  same  key  is  a  small  isle,  called  L'Anguille,  or  the  Eel, 
and  to  the  N.  E.  is  another,  called  Le  Regale;  the  throe  form  an  cqui-lateral  triangle, 
having  each  side  half  a  league  in  length. 

E.  N.  E.,  three  quiirters  of  a  league  from  Caye  a  Ramiers,  lies  the  west  end  of  the 
Great  Key  of  Aquin,  which  is  two  miles  in  length,  and  distinguished  by  two  very  re- 
markable white  hummocks.  It  extends  E.  and  E.  by  N.,  true,  and  its  south  side  is  bold 
to;  but  the  white  shoals  of  L'Anguille  oxt(M)d  to  its  western  point,  so  as  to  prevent  a 
passage  between  it  and  Caye  a  Ramiers,  for  ships  that  draw  more  tlian  12  or  14  feet. 

East  of  Aquin  Key,  at  the  distance  of  a  short  quarter  of  a  league,  is  a  wliite  insulated 
rock,  called  Lo  Diuinant,  or  tlio  Diamond ;  to  the  eastward  of  this,  at  the  distance  of  two 
cables'  length,  is  the  Point  of  Morno  Rouge,  or  Red  Hill.  Thus  the  eastern  end  of 
Aquin,  the  Diamond  Rock,  and  the  point  of  Morne  Rouge,  form  tlio  two  passages  into 
the  bay.  All  the  islands  and  shores  are  bold.  In  the  Morne  Rouge  Passage  are  Sand 
6  fathoms  water,  and  in  that  between  Aipiii  Key  and  the  Diamond,  (>,  7,  and  8.  The 
bay  is  extensive,  and  trenches  consiilenibly  inland,  but  the  water  is  shallow,  and  there  are 
only  3  fathoms  at  a  distance  from  shore. 

The  point  of  Morno  Rouge  may  be  rtmilily  known  at  a  distance,  by  three  very  high 
white  huminocks,  called  the  Tapions  of  Aquin,  which  together  form  a  groat  cape,  under 
which  is  an  anchorage,  in  10  ami  12  fathoms,  at  a  distance  from  land.  This  bottom  con- 
liiiues  as  far  as  the  Petite  Bale  des  Flamatids,  or  Little  Flamingo  Bay,  which  is  VV.  N. 
W..  a  league  and  a  (juarter  from  tho  Tiipioiis  of  Aquin. 

To  enter  the  passage  into  A(|uin  Bay,  liotsvecn  Oayo  a  Ramiei's  and  Moustique  Key, 
before  mentioned,  steer  N.  N.  K.,  so  as  to  ^ot  into  tlio  mid",hannel  between  tlio  shore 
and  the  island.  Ilavimj  doubled  Key  a  Ramiers,  you  will  see  La  Regule,  which  is  a  very 
low  isle  of  sand  ;  leave  this  on  tiie  starb uard  side,  keeping  in  mid-channel  between  it  and 
the  shore;  then  haul  up  for  A(|uin  Key  as  imnh  as  tlio  wind  will  permit,  and  anclior  to 
the  northward  of  it  in  C  or  7  fathoms,  or  faillier  in,  at  pleasure. 

Ge.neual  Rkmarks. — Observe  that  iVoiii  I'oiiit  I'ascal  all  the  capes  are  broken  and 
steep,  and  from  the  iS.  and  t^.  E. ;  anil  as,  on  all  this  coast  the  land  is  wliiti%  many 
white  hummocks  will  be  seen.  Aijuin  has  two,  abrjve  montioned  ;  but  the  casternmosl 
and  highest  are  those  of  Morne  Rouge  ;  and,  with  r.ttention,  it  will  be  ini|)ossiblo  to  mis- 
take them.  From  the  point  of  Morno  Rouge,  or  tlio  liuinmucks  of  Aqnin,  tho  true  di- 
rection of  the  coast,  after  haviiMT  ti'onchi'd  in  to  form  the  I'otite  Baio  des  Flamaiids,  is 
east,  southerly,  10  leagues  to  Cape  Biiinet.  T'lio  wliolt!  of  this  coast  is  free  from  danger 
and  bold  to,  but  has  no  !)ay  or  anchorage,  or  shelter  li-oiii  the  common  breeze.  Two 
i  leagues  and  a  half  westward  of  Baiuot  the  coast  is  iron-bound,  and  tlie  water  near  it  of 
great  depth. 

POINT  ABACOU  TO  CAPE  TIBURON.— F—-,  Point  Abacou  to  Point  a  Gra- 
I  vols,  the  bearing  and  distance  aro  west,  southerly,  L'i  leuj  i")s.     Tho  latter  is  low,  not 
easily  distinguishable,  and   has  froquoiitly  been   mistaken  lor  the  laud  of  Port  Sulut,  u 
jsiunll  cove  lying  a  league  farther  to  the  N.  N.  W. 

From  Point  Gravois,  N.  \V.  by  N..  4  leagues,  there  is  a  bight  of  half  a  league, 
I  in  which  ancliorage  may  be  found.  This  bight  lies  about  two  miles  to  the  southward 
lof  Les  Coteaux.  From  this  spot  to  a  largo  hummock,  called  Les  Chardoniers,  which 
[iivery  romarkable  at  a  distance,  tho  bearing  and  distance  are  nearly  W.  N.  W.  10  miles. 

23 


PoinlAbar.cu 
to  Cape 
Ttbuwn. 


w^m^wr- 


354 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

From  Lea  Chnrdoniers  to  the  Fond  des  Anglois,  or  English  Bottom,  the  coast  ex- 
tends W.  by  N.,  4  milos,  nnd  n  bny  thenct  rounds  to  within  a  JeRgue  and  a  half  of  Polnte 
de  Bieux  Boucnn,  or  Boucan  Point.  All  this  part  is  safe,  but  it  has  no  anchornge 
A  ship  may,  indeed,  anchor  very  near  the  land,  but  it  is  every  where  exposed  to  the  sea 
breeze. 

From  Boucan  Point  to  Point  Burgos,  which  is  a  low  point,  the  coast  trends  westward 
4  milos.  Botvvoon  these  places,  off  a  point  called  Aigrettes  Point,  there  are  some  wbiti' 
shoals,  rocUs,  and  breakers ;  but  their  extent  is  not  more  than  half  a  league. 

The  Northern  Coast  o/Hayti,  or  St.  Domingo,  between  Cape  Raphael  and  St. 

ISicolas'  Mole. 

(Variation  generally  about  5°  E.] 


Cape Ra- 
phael. 


C'lfr 
na. 


")•• 


Samavii  Kay, 


Samana  Ba>j . 


CAPE  RAPHAEL  is  of  moderate  height,  and  lies  in  or  about  lat.  19°  2',  nnd  long, 
G8°  50'.  It  has  already  been  described.  Krom  this  capo  to  Cape  Samann,  the  Lenrini- 
and  distance  are  N.  W.  4  W.,  nearly  7  leagues.  Between  the  two  is  Saimiia  B 
about  10  leagues  deep,  so  that  you  con  scarcely  see  tlie  land  at  the  bottom  of  it ;  but 
appears  to  the  eye  is  very  high  double  land. 
Sama-  CAPE  SAM  AN  A  is  a  broken  rugged  point  of  land,  which  appears,  from  a  great  dis- 
tance, like  a  ship  with  her  topsails  down,  and  seems  not  to  join  the  main,  but  on  n  neaier 
approach,  this  shape  changes.  The  cnpe  makes  with  two  points,  both  alike,  bluff  and 
sleep,  about  the  height  of  Beachy  Head,  in  the  English  Channel,  but  not  so  white.  Tliey 
are  4  or  5  miles  asunder,  with  a  small  l)ay  and  harbor  between  them.  At  2  or  3  miles  tu 
the  westward  of  the  wesiornniost  jjoint,  there  is  very  high  land,  which  fulls  down  to  the 
waterside,  nnd  is  twice  as  high  as  Cape  Samana. 

SAMANA  BAif. — There  is  good  anchorage  in  Banistre,  or  Lavanfados  Road,  on  the 
south  side  of  the  peninsula  of  Samana.  In  odvancing  for  this  place,  observe  that  when 
Cape  Samana  boars  N.  W.  by  W.,  about  a  league,  it  appears  like  two  points,  the  west- 
ernmost of  which,  as  you  come  farther  in,  you  should  bring  open  with  a  wiiite  spot  of 
sandy  ground,  which  may,  at  lirat,  be  mistakt-n  for  one  of  the  sand  keys,  although itis 
connected  with  the  main  shore.  In  order  to  ascertain  the  true  point,  observe  that  in 
coming  about  it,  it  will  appear  as  if  a  small  rock  were  lying  off  it,  which,  on  a  nearer  np. 
proach,  will  be  found  to  join  to  the  land.  The  soundings  are  uncertain.  Having  wel 
shot  into  the  bay,  you  may  have  10  fathoms,  and  then  no  ground  in  20. 

Or,  being  off  Cape  Samana,  and  intending  for  this  port,  sail  S.  S.  W.,  3  or  4  miles,nloi)'| 
shore,  (you  may  go  within  a  mile,  for  it  is  bold  to,)  to  Point  Valandros,  or  Blue  Point!  I 
which  has  two  or  three  bia-.^k  rocks  lying  near  it.  When  at  the  length  of  this  pointsteetl 
thenco  west  about  half  a  mile,  and  you  will  leave  three  keys,  which  are  high  and  wooJvJ 
a  mile  from  you  on  your  larboard  side.  \Viti»  the  westernmost  of  the  three  keys  heario; 
S.  S.  W.,  you  may  anchor  in  I'j  fiithoms,  half  a  mile  from  shore,  and  have  goudwatei'! 
Then  Lavantados,  or  Banistre  Key,  will  bear  W.  by  N.,  1  mile  off. 

There  is  good  easy  riding  in  this  harbor,  in  from  7  to  3  fathoms.     You  may  also  f 
good  fresii  water  in  many  places,  with  plenty  of  fish  and  fowl.     Here  is  commonly  a freslii 
breeze  from  the  eastward  all  day,  and  open  to  the  north. 

The  preceding  paragrapf'^-i-tf  from  the  French  of  tlio  Count  Chastenet  de  Puysegur.l 
itc.     The  following  from  tlui  S|)anish  Derrotero. 

.SAMANA  BAY. — From  Capo  Raphael  the  coast  trends  nearly  west,  andforrasa 
gulf,  shut  in  to  the  N.  W.  by  the  peninsula  of  Samana.  The  east  point  of  this peniii- 1 
sula.  n:uned  Cape  Samana,  lii's  7  it-agnes  N.  \V.  by  W.  h  W.  from  Capo  Raphael.  Thi<| 
bay,  which  is  inore  than  11  leagues  in  extent,  from  east  to  west,  and  4  from  north  lul 
noiitli,  is  obstructed  and  almost  shut  up  liy  u  great  reel',  which  extends  from  the  soutlil 
coast,  and  so  far  to  the  north,  that  a  channel  of  only  3  miles  in  width  remains  between  ill 
and  the  peninsula  of  Samana.  Th>'  northern  extremity  of  this  reef  is  marked  by  soniel 
keys  or  i>lets,  the  largest  of  which,  calli'd  Cayo  Lavantados,  must  be  left  on  the  larboardl 
hand  on  going  into  the  bay.  Within  there  are  several  anchorages,  but  little  frequentodJ 
us  there  is  scarcely  any  cctmmerce  here.  The  first  anchorage  is  on  the  coast  ofilinr 
peninsula,  and  near  the  entrance  of  the  bay  ;  it  is  named  the  Caronera  Chico,  (orLiitlel 
("arenage:)  to  enter  and  aiichnr  here,  it  is  necessary  to  approach  within  half  n  mile  oil 
r<iint  \'alandras,  which  is  the  S.  V..  point  of  the  peninsula,  and  to  keep  along  theedge 
of  the  coast  at  this  distance,  until  sheller(>d  by  Vinas  Point,  when  you  may  anchor iu'il 
fathoms,  taking  care  to  keep  half  n  mil((  from  a  key,  named  the  Key  of  the  Carenetol 
Chico,  which  is  at  the  west  part  of  the  road,  and  has,  to  the  south  of  it,  either  four  orl 
live  small  islets.  Behind  this  kr>y,  and  between  It  and  the  coast,  is  the  proper  anrhoif 
age  ;  but  it  is  much  narrowed  by  shoals,  and  must  be  entered  by  war|)ing.  Point  Vin«s| 
is  easily  known,  as  it  bears  trmt  north  from  the  wett  part  of  liavantados  Key.  In  tliel 
entrance  then;  is  nothing  to  be  feared,  becuttse  there  is  no  danger  but  what  may  be  wflll 
neon  ;  and  (mly  inward  fnmi  Point  Viinis  is  there  a  shoal,  having  on  it  two  feet  of  waterP 


by  coming  nc 
So  soon  as  pa 
ought  to  placi 
Escondido,  or 
bottom  of  the 
south  of  the  I 
Bay,  you  mus 
to  anchor  in  tl 
From  this  a 
which  there  \i 
violent.  Two 
in  the  interior 
interior  of  the 
From  Espui 
of  the  bny,  yo 
which  there  is 
and  about  sout 
ther  in  there  i 
aground.  To 
tor  the  south  ( 
account  of  the 
you  will  (idl  to 
which  affords  f 
Point,  when  ci 
length  of  it. 

The  entranc 
with  the  land  I 
Cape  Sainan 
ing  it  you  may 
ii^  even  morel 
Si'cen,  nnd  cov( 
"olbeappi'oncli 
and  forms  a  gri 
liiul,  fi'om  wlii<: 
vessels  to  visit  j 
"lOIJ  Cnpe  V 
','ois  may  bo  see 
"'Mntain  inlam 
'^hips  cnniiii;; 
'lii'ir  making  tii 
iwticuhir  care 
'his  track  tiiey 
'l"\y  Will  pass  cl 
■'"i"g  towai<ls 
<JI^D  CAPE 
™t  in  the  form 
''"Po  Ciibron,  in 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


356 


10  keep  clear  of  this  shoal,  bear  in  mind  that  it  bears  enst,  a  long  mile  from  Vinas  Point. 
By  following  the  coast,  as  we  have  directed,  at  the  distance  of  half  n  mile,  you  will  go 
safe  fionri  it;  but,  for  greater  certainty,  keep  something  to  starboard,  when  you  will  sound 
inSfiithoms  water;  for,  in  the  channel,  between  it  and  the  coast,  there  are  6i  and  7 
fathoms. 

A  league  and  a  half  to  the  west  of  the  Carenero  Chico,  is  the  Puerto  de  Santa  Bar- 
bara, or  of  Sainana :  the  anchorage  here  is  very  narrow  at  the  entrance,  which  is  formed 
l)V  a  grcnt  reef,  that  runs  out  to  the  east  from  Point  Escondido,  the  S.  W.  point  of  the 
harbor:  and  on  this  reef,  rise  several  keys  or  islets,  of  which  the  outermost  is  named  Tro- 
nezon;  the  second  is  the  Greater  Carenero;  and  the  third,  Cayo  Escondido,  is  very  near 
the  Point  Escondido,  on  the  west.  There  is  not  only  this  reef  at  the  entrance,  for  the 
Dortli  coast  sends  off  two,  which  stretch  far  to  the  south,  and  form  two  bays :  of  these 
the  first  is  called  Aguada,  or  Watering  Bay,  and  it  has  Point  Gomero  for  the  N.  E*  point 
of  its  entrance.  The  second  roadstead  lies  between  the  two  reefs.  In  Aguada  Bay  there 
is  good  anchorage,  in  6  fathoms,  clay;  the  second  anchorage  is  very  narrow,  but  has  7 
tiithoms  water.  To  the  west  of  these  two  reefs  and  roadsteads,  lies  the  principal  harbor 
andnuchornge  of  Samana,  with  a  depth  of  5  and  6  fathoms,  on  clay,  which  is  found  to 
ihe  south  of  the  town.  To  enter  this  harbor  it  is  necessary  to  run  along  the  north  coast, 
at  half  a  cable's  distance,  and  steer  to  the  west,  taking  care  neither  to  get  nearer  to,  nor 
tiuther  from  Point  Gomero,  than  half  a  cable  ;  for  you  will  thus  run  in  mid-strait;  and  by 
keeping  farther  off,  you  would  incur  the  risk  of  getting  on  the  southern  reefs,  or, 
bv  coming  nearer,  get  on  those  of  Point  Gomera,  which  lie  out  ono-third  of  a  cable. 
So  soon  as  past  Point  Gomera,  you  may  see  a  little  rivulet  in  Aguada  Bay;  and  then  you 
ought  to  place  the  prow  direct  for  the  western  extremity  of  Carenero  Key,  until  Point 
Escondido,  or  its  key,  bears  W.  i  S.,  when  you  may  run  about  W.  by  N.,  towards  the 
bottom  of  the  harbor,  and  perfectly  free  from  the  northern  reefs,  and  may  anchor  to  the 
south  of  the  town,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  upon  clay.  If  you  wish  to  anchor  in  Aguada 
Bay,  you  must  run  in,  luffing  up  to  the  northward  so  soon  as  past  Point  Gomero,  in  order 
lonnchor  in  the  middle  of  it,  and  about  S.  4  E.  from  the  rivulet  of  Aguada. 

From  this  anchorage  the  coast  of  the  peninsula  continues  bold,  and  with  roadsteads,  in 
which  there  is  nothing  to  fear,  except  the  south  winds,  which,  in  their  season,  are  often 
violent.  Two  leagues  to  the  west  of  Samana  lies  Point  Espanola,  with  an  islet;  and  thence, 
in  the  interior  of  tho  bay,  there  is  no  establishment  whatever.  A  large  cluy  bank,  in  the 
iiiteriorof  the  bay,  runs  out  more  than  two  leagues. 

From  Espanola  Point,  in  which  you  will  be  well  to  the  west  of  the  reef  at  tho  entrance 
of  the  bay,  you  should  steer  to  the  south  for  the  Bay  of  Perlas,  or  of  St  Lorenzo,  in 
which  there  is  no  necessity  to  run  far  in;  and  it  may  suffice  to  anchor  at  its  entrance, 
iindobout  south  of  Arenas  Point,  which  is  the  north  point  of  this  bay;  for,  although  far- 
ther in  there  is  sufficient  depth,  yet  there  are  sand-banks,  on  which  you  might  easily  get 
aground.  To  find  this  bay,  it  is  better  to  make  tho  land  to  the  east  than  to  the  west; 
for  the  south  coast  of  Samana,  from  Perlas  Bay  to  the  west,  is  very  wild  and  unsafe,  on 
account  of  the  many  islets  along  it.  Steering  from  said  Point  Espanola,  to  the  S.  i  E., 
you  will  full  to  tho  east  of  the  bay,  and  make  a  little  town,  named  Savanna  de  la  Mar, 
which  ndbvds  anchorage  for  very  small  vessels  :  and  thus,  lis  soon  as  you  discover  Arenas 
Point,  when  crossing  over,  steer  towards  it,  and  .you  may  approach  within  a  cable's 
length  of  it. 

Tho  entrance  of  Samana  Bay  is  effected  with  the  regular  breezes ;  but  you  can  get  out 
with  tho  land  breezes  only,  which  blow  by  night. 

Ciipe  Samana  is  of  considerable  height,  and  steep  down  to  the  water's  edge;  on  nenr- 
ing  it  you  may  also  discover  Cape  Cnbroii,  which  is  N.  W.  from  it,  nearly  3  leagues  :  this 
is  even  more  high  and  scarped,  or  steeper,  than  tho  former,  and  tho  coast  between  is 
;;rcen,  and  covered  with  largo  trees:  on  it  there  are  some  islets,  and  as  it  is  foul,  it  should 
not  be  approached  nearer  than  one  league.  From  (.'ape  Cahrontlie  coast  takes  to  the  west, 
ami  forms  a  great  bay,  called  Escocesa  Bay ;  the  coasts  of  this  bay  are  low,  and  very 
'  il,  from  which  re.ison,  and  as  there  is  neither  town  nor  establishment  in  it  to  induce 
vessels  to  visit  it,  they  ought  to  proceed  direct  from  t^ape  Cabron  to  Cape  Viejo  Francois, 
or  Old  Cnpo  Franeois,  which  lies  15  leagues  from  it  W.  N.  W.  ^  VV.  (Jld  Capo  Fran- 
I'ois  may  be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  at  the  distance  of  10  leagues.  It  is  known  by  a 
iiiountaiii  inland,  whi(.'li  may  be  seen  at  tho  distance  of  15  leagues. 

Sliips  coming  from  the  eastward  towards  the  N.  E.  coast  of  Ilayti,  should,  previous  to 

iheir  making  tlie  island,  run  down  between  the  latitudes  of  19°  20'  and  19°  .')0',  taking 

I'lirticuliir  care  not  to  jjass  eithiM'  to  tlio  northward  or  Koiithward  of  these  latitudes.      In 

I  ihis  truck  lliey  will  make  tho  land,  either  by  Capo  Cabron,  or  ( 'Id   Cape  Francois,  and 

I  ilicy  will  pass  clear  of  the  Silver  Key  Bank  on  tlie  one  side,  and  tho  current  commonly 

"ling  towards  Samana  IJay  on  the  other. 

OLD  CAPK  FRANX'UIS.— The  point  of  the  Old  Capo  is  rather  low,  and  stretches    Old  Cipf 
I  tut  in  the  form  of  the  snout  of  a  porjwise;  at  5  or  U  leagues  distant,  to  the  N.  N.  W.  of   Franfm*. 
(!ip«  Ciibron,  ilia  clear  day,  the  Old  Cape  is  seen  making  like  an  island,  whose  ends 


i»JAM»W(».«*PP'"^iPII||||piP!r 


356 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Puerto  de 
Plata. 


Ysahella,  or 

Isabella 

Point. 


slope  gradually  into  the  sea 

to  the  north-westward  of  it,  you 


When  you  have  made  Cape  Cabron,  being  4  or  5  leagups 
ju  must  sail  13  or  14  leagues  N.  W.  j  W.,  nrid  you  win 


you  will 


pass  5  leagues  to  the  northward  of  the  Old  Cape;  then  steer  W.  by  N.,  when,  havin? 
run  15  leagues,  you  will  see  Point  Casrouge  at  about  3  leagues  distant  from  you;  cou- 
tinno  on  for  5  Ieague8,when  Vsnbella  or  Isubella  Point  will  bear  S.  W.  4  W.,  distant  4 
leagues  ;  having  advanced  thus  fur,  you  have  nothing  to  fear,  and,  if  neccssiiry,  you  niav 
keep  within  half  a  league  of  the  shore,  the  coast  being  very  clear.  ■' 

At  about  4  leagues  olF  to  the  northward  of  Old  Cape  Franfois  its  point  appears  liken 
porpoise  snout,  projecting  to  the  eastward ;  and  3  leagues  farther  west  is  a  ))oint  named 
Cabo  de  la  Roca,  or  Rocky  Cape,  very  much  resembling  it,  and  projecting  to  the  west- 
ward. The  coast  between  lies  W.  i  N.  and  E.  i  S.;  it  is  low,  rather  stoep  to  the  sea 
side,  and  covered  with  trees  remarkably  green. 

Towards  the  point  of  the  Old  Cape  a  mountain  is  perceived  inland,  which,  in  clear 
weather,  can  be  seen  15  leagues  olf,  and  is  a  good  mark  to  poiui.  it  out. 

There  is  some  foul  ground  laying  off  the  pitch  of  the  cape,  an  J  i  harbor  a  little  tothe 
westward  of  it  for  small  vessels.  When  sailing  from  Cape  Samana  to  Old  Cape  Francois 
which  is  about  6  or  7  hours'  sail,  you  see  a  point  of  land  on  the  east  side  of  the  cape,  wliicll 
oflentimes,  at  first  sight,  j'ou  suppose  to  be  the  cape,  but  coming  nearer,  you  will  see  your 
mistake.  And  when  you  are  due  north  of  Old  Cape  Franfois,  you  will  perceive  to  the 
eastward  of  the  cape  a  very  steep  point,  which  seems  to  be  divided  from  the  main,  and 
running  off  the  land,  rises  higher  and  higher  in  such  a  manner  that  the  highest  pan  of  it 
lies  open  to  the  sea,  so  high  that  you  cannot  see  the  land  within. 

When  from  Old  Cape  Francois  you  sail  for  Monte  Christi,  observe  to  steer  a  more 
norther  y  course  in  hauling  off,  giving  a  good  distance  between  you  and  the  shore,  be- 
cause the  currents  always  set  upon  it;  and  unless  you  do  this  you  will  run  the  hazard  of 
being  ashore. 

From  Cape  de  la  Roca,  the  land  trenches  in  to  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  and  forms  a 
bay  pretty  deep,  which  is  sheltered  by  reefs.  This  const  trends  to  ttie  W.  N.  W, 
and  rising  in  height  to  the  northward,  comes  to  Punta  Macuris,  or  Point  Miiscury,  wliich 
bears  \V.  i  N.  from  Capo  do  )a  Roca.  This  point  is  high,  and  its  shore  bold  ;  itservesas 
a  mark  for  the  small  harbor  of  St.  Jago,  which  is  3  leagues  distant  from,  and  to  the  east- 
ward of,  Puerto  de  Plata. 

PUERTO  DE  PLATA,  or  Port  Plata,  lies  17  leagues  from  the  point  of  the  Old 
Cape,  and  bears  from  it  west.  It  is  known  by  a  mountain  at  some  distance  inland,  wliicli 
appears  insulnted  like  the  (Jrnnge,  although  not  in  so  precise  a  manner.  This  mountaio 
which  is  called  Isabella  de  Torre,  has  a  large  white  place  on  it,  caused  by  a  slide,  in  the 
great  rains  of  1837  and  1838.  I^his  is  a  good  mark  for  the  port,  and  you  must  runforit, 
until  you  discovtM'  the  fort  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain,  in  running  in,  keep  midway  be- 
tween the  points;  and  as  soon  as  round  the  point,  on  the  larboard  hand,  lot  go  your  an- 
chor, in  3i  fiithoiiis.     There  are  not  now  any  mangrove  bushes. 

On  approaching  the  coast,  you  will  descry  to  tho  westward  agreat  cape,  very  high  and 
steep;  the  extremity  of  this  is  Punta  del  Algarroba,  or  point  Casrouge,  which  is  readily 
known  by  its  magnitude.  'i 

The  bight  from  Port  Plata  to  Point  Casrouge,  is  bordered  with  reefs  close  to  the  shore, 
and  does  not  admit  of  any  anchorage. 

Old  Capo  Francois  and  the  great  Point  of  Algnrroha.  or  Casrouge,  bear  from  eackl 
other  W.  i  N.  and  E.  4  S-,  19i  leagues.  When  at  the  distance  of  aboutG  l('!i;i;uestoty 
northward  of  Casrouge,  you  will  see  a  low  |)oint  [)rojecting  out  to  tho  westward,  whicliu 
remarkable  by  its  having  tho  ap|)earance  of  being  detached  from  tho  coast  lilie  an  island; 
it  is  Ysabeliii,  or  Ifabollu  Point,  the  iiortliernn)ost  point  of  Ilayti. 

YSACELLA,  or  ISABHIjLA  POINT,  according  to  the  Isite  observations,  lies  in  liiii-| 
tudo  lO"^  69',  longitude  71°  10'  30",  and  at  iho  distance  of  4i  leagues  \V.  N.  W.  jW 
from  Algarroba,  or  Ciisrougo  Point.  To  the  eastward  of  it  lies  the  dee|)  bijjlit,  calla 
Puerto  Caballo.  or  Port  Cavallu.  In  the  bight  between  these  is  an  anchorage  tor  vessel) 
drawing  lv>  or  13  I'eet  water,  and  sheltered  by  the  reel's:  the  entrance  is  readily  kiiuivi 
by  running  to  it  along  tho  I'eefs. 

On  the  western  wide  of  Isabella  Point  is  a  more  extensive  nuehorage,  nnd  niore  ea«y 
gain  (hiin  that  gf  ilie  east,  but  tho  ground  in  mai  y  places  is  foul;  there  is  a  depth  olTioii 
6  to  7  fathoms  water. 

From  Isabella  Point  to  tho  (jrange,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  W.  S.  W.  |  W., 
leagues.     The  coast  betw(!en  is  bordered  with  reefs,  among  which  the  entrances  are nar) 
row  Rtid  diini:;erou8. 

West  oflsalxdla  Point  is  Punta  Rocn,  or  Rocky  Point,  tothe  westward  of  whicli 
an  anchorage  for  largo  vessels,  which  being  very  bad,  oughtto  boused  only  in  case 
necessity. 

Togiiin  this  anchorage,  you  must  haul  very  close  to  Rocky  Point,  and  anchor  so 
as  you  are  in  12  fathoms,  white  bottom. 


This  nnc 

Boon,  lies  a 

THE  G 

jj  eeeii  at  a 

insulated,  a 

8  barn,  fron 

my  npproa 

Grange  Poi 

cables'  lengi 

are  the  isleti 

HAUT-f 

shoal,  of  not 

s[K)ton  the  8 

Close  to  it  is 

ground  has  g 

not  be  some 

Grange  bean 

each  other,  t 

MONTE 

another  reef, 

extends  near 

mile  broad. 

other  parts  w 

to'l,  5,  6,  anc 

20to25allai 

ooarse  sand. 

of  the  rocks  ai 

end  of  a  grovt 

and  the  key,) 

byW.    The 

With  Isnbe 

mthout  the  si 

tothe  nortliwi 

should  you  bo 

and  the  const, 

of  the  high  lat 

leagues. 

In  sailing  be 
to  the  north  wf 
always  sets  up 
There  is  an 
tie  Frnyle,  or 
onis;  but  und 
tlier  in,  with 
Haytien. 

Id  approach 
from  Cabrns  I; 
ingthe  anchoi 
of  E.  i  N.,  but 
The  Shoal  o 
as  far  ns  Manz 
tt  the  distance 
rise  the  islets  _ 
The  islet  name 
from  the  enstw 
these  seas,  has 
irregular  in  its 
fathoms.     You 
been  well  exam 
MANZANI 
anchorage  in  J!l 
turns  to  the  we 
cends  to  the  noi 
Picolet  form  a 
first  of  tiiese,  n. 
about  2  leagues 
's  Guarico,  or  t 


r 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


367 


;lose  to  the  shore! 


This  nnchorage,  which  is  sheltered  by  the  reefs  that  stretch  N.  N.  W,  from  Punta 
RocHilies  about  4  leagues  from 'Isabella  Point. 

THE  GRANGE. — The  Grange  Point  is  known  by  the  mountain  of  that  name,  and  TheGrange. 
jjjeed  at  a  great  distance  before  you  perceive  the  sea  coast.  This  mountain,  whicli  is 
insuiated,  and  stands  upon  a  low  peninsula,  has  very  much  the  appearance  of  the  roof  of 
II barn,  fioin  which  it  takes  its  name,  Grange.  The  north-west  part  of  it  is  bold,  and  you 
mny  approach  it  within  a  quarter  of  a  league,  or  even  less.  Close  to  the  west  part  of  the 
Grange  Point  is  a  rocky  islet,  named  the  Froyle,  or  Friar;  and  from  its  S.  W.  part,  at 3 
cables'  length,  is  another,  somewhat  larger,  and  named  Cabras,  or  Goat's  Islet.  These 
are  the  islets  of  Monte  Christi. 

HAUT-FOND.— Two  leagues  to  the  N .  N.  E.  of  the  Grange  Point  lies  a  white  Haut-Fond. 
shoal,  of  not  more  than  2  cables'  length  each  way,  called  the  liaut-fond ;  there  is  a  small 
5|H)t  on  the  shoal,  with  only  25  feet  of  water,  on  which  the  Vijle  de  Paris  struck  in  1781. 
Close  to  it  is  a  depth  of  6  fathoms,  then  10  and  15  and  suddenly  no  ground.  The  white 
ground  hns  generally  scattered  rocks,  so  that  it  cannot  be  ascertained  whether  there  may 
not  be  some  spots  on  it  even  with  less  than  25  feet.  When  you  are  on  this  shoal,  the 
Grange  bears  S.  by  W.  i  W. :  you  will  then  have  the  islets  of  Monte  Christi  open  of 
each  other,  the  westernmost  of  them  bearing  S.  S.  W.  i  W. 

MONTE  CHRISTI  RKEF.— About  3  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Haut-fond  lies  Monte  Chris- 
another  reef,  on  which  the  British  ship  'I'orbny  struck  and  lost  her  rudder,  in  1783.  It  ti  Reef. 
extends  nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  length,  and  half  a 
mile  broad.  On  the  shoolest  part  the  points  of  rocks  stand  up  like  sharp  spires.  On 
other  parts  were  seen  white  patches  of  sand.  The  shoalest  water  3  fathoms  ;  thence  3 
to4i5>  6,  and  7  fathoms.  It  is  steep  to,  and  has  from  15  to  17  fathoms  close  to  it,  and 
20to  25  nil  around.  The  bottom  is  soft  in  '^'0  fathoms;  and  in  some  places  you  will  have 
coarse  sand.  The  water,  when  smooth,  is  very  clear,  so  that  you  may  see  the  pinnacles 
ofthe  rocks  as  you  pass  over  them  in  a  boat.  From  the  shoal,  in  3  fathoms,  the  eastern 
end  of  a  grove  of  trees,  open  to  the  south-westward  of  Monte  Christi,  (and  between  it 
and  the  key,)  bore  S.  E.,  and  the  Mount  of  Cape  Francois  (now  Cape  Haytien)  S.  W. 
by  \V.    The  variation  ot  the  same  time  was  G°  20'  E. 

With  Isabella  Point  bearing  S.  W.,  distant  4  leagues,  the  course  and  distance,  to  pass 
without  the  shoals  called  the  Haut-fond  and  Monte  Christi  Reef,  will  be  a  few  degrees 
to  the  northward  of  west,  17  leagues;  and  then  the  latter  will  bear  about  S.  E.  But 
should  you  bo  up  with  Isabella  Point,  and  prefer  the  mid-channel  between  these  shoals 
and  the  coast,  a  W.  by  S.  course,  16  leagues,  will  clear  the  shoals  and  bring  you  in  sight 
of  the  high  land  of  Cape  Haytien,  (formerly  Cape  Franpois,)  at  the  distance  of  about  5 


In  sailing  between  Old  Cape  Frnnrois  and  the  Grange,  be  careful  to  keep  sufficiently 

to  the  northward  in  hauling  off,  that  you  may  not  be  driven  ashore  by  the  current,  which 

always  sets  upon  the  coast. 
There  is  anchorage  under  the  Grange  to  the  west:  to  take  it  you  must  "inge  along 

he  Frnyle,  or  Islet  of  Monte  Christi,  and  let  go  your  anchor  so  soon  as  you  lave  6  fath- 
[  oras;  but  under  tbo  south  side  of  Cabras.  the  westernmost  islet,  you  may  anchor  far- 
1  ther  in,  with  4  iathoms.     From  the  Grange  you  may  see  the  mountains  ai)ove  Cape 

Haytien. 
[    Iq  approaching  this  anchorage  you  must  be  cautious  of  a  shoal,  which  lies  W.  by  S. 

from  Cabras  Isle,  at  the  distance  of  a  long  mile  :  to  keep  clear  of  it,  on  entering  and  leav- 
I  ins  the  nnchorage,  take  care  not  to  bring  Cabras  Isle  to  bear  any  thing  to  tUo  northward 
I  of  E.  j  N.,  but  on  the  contrary,  keep  it  rather  to  the  southward  of  that  bearing. 

The  Shoal  or  Bank  of  Monte  Christi  extends  14  miles  to  the  west,  and  to  the  south 
I  as  far  as  Manzanilln,  or  Manchioneal  Point;  and  it  thence  continues  to  border  the  coast 

St  the  distance  of  half  a  mile,  more  or  less,  according  to  its  sinuosities.  On  this  bank 
I  rise  the  islets  named  the  Seven  Brothers,  which  are  low,  and  covered  with  mangroves. 

The  islet  named  Monte  Grande  is  the  most  remarkable  of  all  of  them  :  it  is  the  seci  .id 

from  the  eastward,  and  has  high  trees  upon  it.  This  bank,  as  well  as  many  others  in 
I  these  seas,  has  a  very  white  bottom,  and  is  very  dangerous,  because  the  bottom  is  very 
1  irregular  in  its  depth,  with  stones  and  rocks;  you  may  have  8,  and  immediately  after  3 
I  fathoms.  You  should  therefore  avoid  sailing  on  this  or  similar  banks,  unless  they  have 
I  been  well  examined  and  sounded. 

MANZANILLA  BAY,  <Scc. — To  the  east  of  Manzanilla  Point  there  is  an  excellent 
lanchorage  in  Manzanilla  Bay  :  from  this  bay  the  coast  trends  in  to  the  S.  E.,  and  then 
jturns  to  the  west,  in  which  direction  it  continues  to  a  distance  of  8  leagues,  when  it  as- 
Icends  to  the  north,  and  terminates  with  Point  Picolot.  The  Grange  Point  with  Point 
iPicoletforni  a  great  bay,  in  whicli,  besides  Manznnilla  Bay,  there  are  two  harbors ;  the 
I  first  of  these,  named  Bayaha,  or  Port  Dauphin,  is  to  the  S.  \V.  of  Manzanilla  Point,  and 
|about2  leagues  from  it;  and  the  second,  nt  the  western  extremity  ofthe  baj',  is  knojvn 
las  Guarico,  or  the  City  of  Capo  Haytien,  or  City  ofthe  Cape. 


Manzanilla 
Bay,  Sfc 


^^mm 


mmm^iF 


mm 


358 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  const  from  Bnynha  to  the  west  is  bounded  by  a  whito  bank  and  reef,  on  the  edee 
o  f  which  there  are  from  50  to  80  fathoms  :  between  the  reef  and  the  coast  is  a  channel 
with  2  or  3  fathoms  of  water,  to  which  there  are  various  passes  in  the  reef,  linowQ  to  the 
coasters  and  pilots  only. 

The  navigation  from  Grange  Point  to  Manzaniiln  Point  should  be  made  on  the  white 
h:  A  of  the  Seven  Brothers;  it  is,  therefore,  very  necessary  to  know  the  channel;  and 
though  you  may  proceed  on  the  outside  of  the  islets  and  the  bank,  extending  to  the  west- 
ward, it  follows  that,  in  doing  this,  vessels  must  get  much  to  leeward,  and  are  then  obliged 
to  beat  up  to  the  anchorage.  Tlie  delay  in  following  this  route  is  not  so  grent  when 
bound  to  Buyoha,  or  Port  i.auphin  :  but  the  channel  for  crossing  the  bank,  which  weare 
about  to  describe,  being  very  safe,  it  does  not  seem  requisite  that  any  one  should  go  round 
about,  but  that  all  should  proceed  as  follows  : 

Having  passed  near  the  Grange  Point,  steer  W.  i  S.,  without  going  to  the  southward 
of  that  bearing  until  you  are  to  the  north,  or  on  the  Meridian  of  Yuna  Point,  which  is 
low,  and  bears  S.  W.,  true,  5  miles,  from  Grange  Point;  the  vessel,  havins:  arrived  at 
this  situation,  should  now  steer  towards  Yuna  Point,  until  the  islet  named  Monte  Chico 
which  is  the  easternmost  of  the  Seven  Brothers,  bears  west ;  whence  you  must  steer  S. 
W.,  leaving  to  starboard  the  Islet  or  Key  Tororu,  which  is  the  southernmost  of  the  Seven 
Brothers;  and  v»hen  you  mark  it  ut  about  N.  by  E.,  you  must  steer  S.  i  E.  until  you 
have  Manzanilla  Point  E.  i  N.,  when  you  must  haul  to  the  wind  on  the  larboard  tuck  to 
take  the  anchorage,  if  you  can  ;  and  if  not,  you  must  prolong  the  stretch  to  the  south- 
ward 08  far  as  necessary,  to  enable  you  to  get  into  the  bay  upon  the  other  lack,  iu  the  un- 
derstanding that  you  may  run  along  the  whole  of  the  south  shore  at  half  a  niilo,  or  even 
less.  In  running  by  the  way  we  have  pointed  out,  you  will  find  upon  the  bank  7  to  8 
fathoms  of  water,  on  sandy  clay,  and  you  may  anchor  on  any  part  of  it  comniodiously, 
especially  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  eastern  keys,  Monte  Chico,  and  Tororu  ;  and  it  may  eveu 
be  convenient  to  anchor  in  case  of  night  coming  on,  by  which  the  inconviences  arising  from 
darkness  may  be  avoided. 

The  edge  of  this  bank  is  so  steep  that  from  12  to  20  fathoms  you  nipidly  puss  into  100 
fathoms:  and  of 'he  same  nature  is  Manziinilla  Bay  ;  for  from  7  fathoms  you  .insstolOO 
in  the  short  distance  of  5  cables'  length  :  from  which  reason  an  anchor  should  never  bo 
let  go  until  the  depth  has  been  previously  ascertained  by  the  lead,  keeping  in  mind,  that 
the  best  anchorage  is  in  from  G  to  10  fathoms,  on  a  stiff  clay  bottom,  which  the  anchors 
catch  well,  and  at  less  than  half  a  mile  from  the  shore. 

In  the  River  Tnpion,  (E.  S.  E.  of  Manzanilla  Bay,)  and  also  in  that  of  Axabon,  to  the 
S.  E.,  water  may  be  conveniently  got,  and   you  may  cut  wood  on  any  part  of  the  coast 
that  is  desert  and  uncultivated.     Iu  this  bay  there  are  always  fresh  land  breezes,  which 
facilitate  much  the  communication  between  Bayaha  and  Monte  Christi :  fur  those  to 
whom  the  breeze  is  contrary,  navigate  at  night  by  aid  of  the  land  breeze.     In  Manzanilla 
Bay  no  hurricanes  are  felt,  which  is  an  advantage  of  great  consideration. 
Ttu  Harbor        THE  HARBOR  OF  BAYAHA,  or  PORT  DAUPHIN,  is  one  of  the  finest  ports 
ufBayaha,or   in  Hayti:  for  to  its  great  extent  it  adds  shelter  equal  to  a  dock,  with  an   excellent  claj 
Port  Dau-       bottom,  and  the  depth  does  not  exceed  12  fathoms,  nor  is  it  less  than  5  fitthunis,  which 
phin.  are  found  at  half  a  cable  from  the  shore;  but  notwithstanding  these  singtiliir  qualities,  f  I 

the  difficulty  of  entering  and  getting  out  of  it,  in  consequence  of  the  narrowness  and  foul- 
ness of  the  channel  or  mouth,  is  considered,  it  will   beseen  that  it  would  nut  answer  for 
any  vessel  on  actual  service  to  enter  and  be  shut  up  in  a  harbor  from  which  she  could  not 
sail,  unless  at  night,  with  the  land  breeze,  and  thus  exposing  herself  not  only  to  the  dau- 
ger  of  getting  aground  on  the  shoals  of  the  entrance,  but  also,  in  case  of  the  land  breeze  I 
failing,  she  may  both  lose  the  time  tor  getting  out  and  the  object  for  doing  so.    The  in- 
terior of  this  harbor  needs  no  description  more  than  the  chart,  by  which  it  may  beseen 
that  its  entrance  is  only  a  cablo  and  two-thirds  in  width  ;  and  this  narrow  breadth  coo-  j 
tinues  inwards  to  the  distance  of  a  short  mile.     The  several  points  which  are  in  this  [ 
sage  render  the  entry  still  more  difficult.      The  risk  of  this  consists  in  a  shiilluw  riJ;e  I 
which  borders  both  sides cf  the  channel;  and  which,  at  the  points,  stretches  uut  more 
than  hidfacable,  and  reduces  the  channel  to  one  cable's  length  in  width.    Again,  this 
channel  being  serpentine,  it  is  necessary  that  a  vessel,  in  running  in,  should  take  tho  luroi  | 
with  much  dexterity  and  promptitude,  in  order  to  avoid  getting  aground.     It  is,  therefore  I 
necessary  to  enter  this  harbor  wlion  tho  breeze  is  to  the  iiorthwanl  of  E.  N.  E. ;  for,ifl 
more  sc^nt,  an  attempt  to  take  tho  entrance  will  be  impracticable.     Keeping  well  in  the  I 
middle  of  the  channel,  you  pass  close  to  the  White  ShonI,  which  runs  out  from  tho  wind- 
ward point  of  it:  and,  when  ubronst  of  it,  you   must  luff  uj)  so  as  to  i)liii)  the  prowl 
towards  tho  second  point  on  tho  windward  side,  so  as  to  free  yourself  from  tho  leJsel 
which  lies  off  the  second  point  to  leeward  ;  and  so  soon  as  you  have  this  abeam,  ont 
larboard  side,  you  must  lulf  up  for  tho  last  point  to  windward,  till  you  have  passed  the  I 
third  leeward  point,  when  you  may  run  in  and  anchor  between  Port  Dauphinandtheli  ' 
isle  called  Tuuuntos  Island,  without  approaching  near  tho  N.  E.  part  of  the  latter,  be  I 


mmmmmmm 


tmwm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

cause  a  shallow  bank  stretches  off  it.  From  what  has  been  said,  it  may  be  seen  that  the 
liarbor  requires  no  other  direction  than  that  of  an  eye  accustomed  to  run  in  mid-channel 
tiirough  a  devious  passage ;  and  he  who  linows  how  to  do  this,  need  never  get  ashore 
here;  for  his  eyes  will  direct  him  when  to  lufTand  when  to  brar  away,  without  particular 
leading  marks.  From  the  mouth  to  the  third  leeward  point  you  cannot  anchor,  from 
ffant  of  space  to  turn  the  vessel,  and  because  the  bottom  is  of  sharp  rocks.  The  tide,  Tide. 
at  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  flows  here  at  7h.  A.  M.,  and  springtides  rise  5i  feet,  but 
neaps  only  34  <eet. 

THK  HARBOR  GUARICO,  or  CAPE  HAYTIEN,  is  no  more  than  a  bay. 
formed  by  the  coast,  and  shut  to  the  east  and  north  by  n  group  of  roefs  which  rise  upon 
llie  White  Bank,  extending  outward,  at  this  placo,  more  thim  a  league.  Those  bound 
to  this  port  ought  to  run  from  the  Grange  Point  towards  Picolet  Point,  outside  the  Seven  Hen. 
Brothers,  and  to  placo  themselves  so  that  they  may  run  down  towards  Point  Picolet,  with 
the  vessel's  head  to  the  S.,  or  S.  S.  W.  In  this  direction  they  may  approach  without 
fear,  within  the  distance  of  a  musket  shot,  and  miiy  wait  for  a  pilot,  as  convenient;  but, 
if  obliged  to  take  the  anchorage  without  one,  they  must  steer  from  Point  Picolot  S.  E. 
and  S.  E.  by  E.,  leaving  a  white  flag,  (if  there,)  on  the  larboard  hand  ;  and  which, placed 
upon  the  northern  extremity  of  a  reef,  serves  fttr  a  beacon,  taking  care  to  carry  plenty  of 
sail  to  clear  a  red  flag,  which  they  will  see  a  little  afterwards,  and  which  must  be  left  half 
a  cable's  length  to  the  starboard;  and  so  soon  as  thoy  have  this  flag  on  their  beam,  they 
uav  steer  for  the  city,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms. 

those  who  go  out  from  Manzanilla,  or  Bayaha,  (Port  Dauphin.)  to  the  cape,  ought  to 
steer  ti)  the  northward  until  Picolet  Point  boars  to  tlie  southward  of  the  true  west,  and 
then  direct  their  course  to  the  west,  as  convenient ;  for  they  will  b  ■  clear  of  the  white 
bauk  off  Point  Picolet;  but  if  bound  to  the  east,  they  must  run  to  the  northward  until 
the  Grange  Point  boars  to  the  southward  of  the  truo  east,  in  order  to  clear  the  Seven 
Drothers'  Bank. 

The  Count  Chastonet  de  Puysegur,  in  his  directions  for  the  coast  of  Hayti,  gives  the 
following  for  Capo  Haytien,  &c.  These  were  written  in  1787,  but  they  include  some 
descriptions  not  given  iu  the  Derrotero,  and  we  therefore  insert  them  here,  with  a  trifling 
correction. 

"Ships  bound  from  the  eastward  to  Cape  Fraufois,  always  make  the  Grange ;  for  the 
coast,  in  tiie  environs  of  the  cape,  offers  nothing  remarkable,  unless  thoy  be  near  enough 
to  distinguish  the  hummock  of  Picolet,  and  the  rock  of  that  name,  lying  to  the  north,  and 
very  near  the  hummock.  Having  brought  Monte  Christi  to  the  south,  distant  about  a 
leapie  nnd  a  half,  the  proper  course,  in  order  to  fall  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Picolet 
Point,  is  between  the  W.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  ijy  W.,  distant  9  leagues. 

"The  mnrk  is  surer,  when  you  approach  the  cape  from  the  (Jrange,  in  steering  W. 
S.  W.  and  S.  W.  by  W. ;  for,  in  this  last  position,  the  hummock  of  Picolet  must  appear 
to  project  in  the  sea  more  than  the  rest  of  tho  coast.  The  best  mark  that  can  be  given 
is,  that  the  hummocks  which  are  to  the  west  of  the  road  of  the  cape,  are  the  highest  of 
all  this  part;  besides,  you  can  distinguish  in  them  large  white  spots.  With  some  atten- 
tion you  will  discover  Point  Picolet,  which  is  lower  than  the  said  hummocks,  and 
seems  to  lose  itsolf  among  them.  This  point  terminates  the  road  of  the  capo  on  the 
west  side;  in  coming  near,  you  descry  Fort  Picolet  itself,  built  upon  the  point,  iit  whose 
cad  lies  the  rock  of  the  same  name,  which  is  not  discernible  at  a  greater  distance  than 
a  league. 

"  So  soon  as  you  have  descried  Fort  Picolot,  you  steer  directly  against  it,  because  you 
must  sail  very  near  that  fort  to  enter  the  road,  whoso  opening  is  boi'derod  with  dangers 

I  or  keys,  which  you  leave  on  the  larboard  in  coming  in.     We  would  advise  no  stranger  to 
attempt  the  channel  without  a  pilot,  for  whom  he  must  wait  in  the  ofTing. 
"At  hnlf-past  ten  tho  wind  comes  to  tho  E.  S.  E..  but  it  nmst  blow  from  the  N.  E.  to 

I  carry  you  into  the  harbor,  for  you  are  obliged  to  steer  S.  E.,  and  even  E.  S.  E.  The 
breeze  is  very  regular.     The  land  wind  blows  in  the  evening,  and  often  during  tho  night ; 

j  but,  about  10  or  11  in  the  morning,  after  an  interval  or  calm,  it  turns  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  or 
N,  E.    So  that  at  12  o'clock,  ships  are  able  to  enter  the  harbor. 
'The  city  of  Capo  Haytien  is  under  Picolet  Mount.     There  is  no  danger  in  running 

j  iofor  Picolft  Point,  if  you  keep  it  bearing  from  S.  .S.  W.  to  S  S.  E.  Siiould  you  not 
have  time  to  wait  for  a  pilot,  you  must  range  along  Picolot  Point,  having  it  about  S.,  or 

(  S.  S.  W..  at  the  distance  of  a  short  musket  shot 

"  To  sail  into  the  harbor,  bring  Point  Picolet  to  bear  S.  by  W.  -i  W.,  and  steer  S.  .| 

1  W,  A  reniarkal)lf  mountain  called  the  Bishops'  Cap,  will  then  be  seen  directly  ahead  : 
bring  this  mountain,  which  appears  in  three  points,  in  a  line  with  a  remarkable  hummock, 
by  the  water  side,  in  the  harbor,  which  will  boar  S.  by  W.  Steering  in  this  direction 
will  lend  to  tho  westward  of  the  outer  reef,  named  Le  Coque  Veille.  The  water  gen- 
erally breaks  on  this  reef,  which  has,  (or  had,)  a  buoy,  or  white  flag  upon  it.  Continue 
in  the  same  direction,  leaving  the  buoy  at  the  distance  of  about  15  fathoms  on  the  lar- 
board side,  until  a  small  rock,  standing  detached  a  little  from  Picolet  Point,  appears  just 


359 


The  Hartar 
Guarico,  or 
Cape  Hay- 


i^l«iP"l»P»PP!P!IIP»H|P 


■MipiiMI'     ^ 


wm 


mmm^m 


360 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


open  of  that  point.  Now  haul  to  the  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  S.,  keeping  the  rock  just  open 
and  you  will  pass  between  the  Coquo  Vnille  and  Le  Grand  Mouton  Bank,  a  bank  hnvlne 
a  buoy,  or  flag,  on  its  eastern  edge,  which  is  left  un  the  starbuiird  side.  The  Petit  Mou- 
ton, a  danger  that  always  breaks,  and  n  shoal,  named  Trom|,v.>se,  with  a  buoy,  or  whitg 
flag  on  it,  are  to  be  left  on  the  larboard  side.  You  must,  therefore,  have  sufficient  sail 
r  out  to  weather  round  the  Grand  Mouton  Bunk,  giving  a  buoy,  or  flag  u()on  it,  a  berth  of 
half  or  two-thirds  of  a  cable's  length  ;  and  having  passed  it,  steer  for  the  town,  and  you 
may  anchor  where  you  please,  in  H  or  'J  fathoms,  good  ground. 

"  A  ship  cimnot  enter  the  harbor  unless  the  wind  bo  at  N.  E.,  as  she  is  obliged  to  steer 
S.  E.  by  S.,  and  even  S.  S.  E.  The  breezes  are  very  regular;  they  come  from  the  land 
in  the  evening,  and  very  often  during  the  night;  but,  at  about  10  or  II  in  the  niorninn 
after  an  interval  of  calm,  they  chop  about  E.  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  Strong  norths  heave  "a 
great  swell  into  the  bay." 

The  town  is  on  the  western  side,  about  two  miles  from  Point  Picolet,  in  hit  19°  4G'  20" 
long.  72°  14'. 

PurtFran^oia.  PORT  FRANCOIS. — From  Point  Picolet  the  coast  trends  west  to  Honornt  Point 
which  is  the  north  point  of  Port  F'rancois,  whence  a  reef  stretches  out  a  cable's  Icngtji 
to  the  N.  W.  At  its  extremity  are  3  fathoms  of  wnter.  The  anchorage  off  Port  Fran- 
fois  is  a  small  bay,  and  about  two  cables  in  extent.  Between  the  points  of  the  bay 
there  is  good  shelter  from  the  breezes.  To  enter,  you  must  run  along  the  edge  of  the 
reef  of  Honorat,  which  is  on  the  north  side  ;  and  after  having  gone  about  two  cables  to 
the  S.  S.  E.,  you  may  anchor  in  H  or  10  fathoms,  on  clayey  sand,  about  S.  W.  by  W 
^••oni  the  fort. 

Bay  of  AcuL  BAY  OF  ACUL. — From  the  south  jmint  of  Port  Francois,  a  reef  extends  as  farng 
the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Acul,  without  leaving  any  practicable  pass.  The  Bay  of 
Acul  is  extensive.  It  has  three  entrances,  but  the  western  is  the  best ;  the  eastern  bein^ 
narrow  and  devious.  The  first  entrance  is  between  Uat  Islet  and  Sandy  Islet,  situated 
on  the  reefs  extending  from  Port  Francois,  and  which  sliut  in  the  entrance  to  tlie  N. 
and  N.  E.  That  to  the  N.  W.  is  shut  in. by  other  reefs  and  shoals,  which,  though 
among  themselves  they  have  only  difficult  and  narrow  passages,  form  an  exc^'ilent  chiin- 
nel  with  the  west  coast  of  tlio  buy.  The  three  channels  into  the  harbor  are  called  the 
East,  the  Middle,  and  the  West,  or  Limbe  Channels.  To  enter  any  one  of  these  chDn- 
nels,  it  is  necessary  to  approach  on  the  outside  of  the  White  Bank,  extending  alon" 
shore  between  Port  Francois  and  the  Bay  of  Acul,  until  Rat  Islet  bears  S.  by  VV.  i  w' 
and  so  soon  as  you  are  a  league  from  the  Sandy  Islet,  you  will  plainly  see  Trois  Maries 
Point,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay  ;  and  npproching  nearer,  you  will  iilso  see  a 
low  point  on  the  western  side,  in  the  inteiior  of  the  bay,  named  Point  Belie,  which  is 
known  by  a  clump  of  trees  that  is  upon  it.  Having  recognized  these  points,  bring  them 
in  a  line,  and  steer  in  with  this  mark,  keeping  by  small  variations  of  course,  the  depth  of 
10  fathoms.  Thus,  you  will  run  in  mid-channel,  which  is  not  more  than  a  cable's  lenoth 
wide,  and  the  bottom  of  clay.  On  both  sides  of  it  there  are  white  banks,  with  4  fiithoiiis 
of  water  on  their  edges.  It  is  necessary  to  notice  that  you  must  have  recognized  the 
two  points  which  serve  for  the  leading  mark  at  two  miles  from  Trois  Maries  Point;  for, 
from  that  distance,  it  is  necessary  to  come  in  by  the  mark  described.  In  thick  or  hiay 
weather,  when  these  objects  cannot  be  seen  at  the  proper  distance,  you  must  not  ittteiiipt 
to  enter  by  this  channel.  At  about  four  cables'  length  within,  the  channel  begins  lo 
widen,  so  that  when  Rat's  Islet,  which  you  leave  to  the  starboard,  bears  N.  W.,  you 
may  anchor  in  from  14  to  18  fathoms.  All  the  reefs  which  lie  within  Rat  Island  are 
visible. 

To  enter  by  the  Middle  Channel,  you  must  run  outside  the  bank  until  Rat  Islanil  benrs 
S.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  placing  the  prow  in  that  din-ction,  steering  that  course,  and  keeping 
in  9  fathoms  of  wnter,  you  will  pass  very  near  to  some  reefs  which  are  about  one-quarter 
of  a  league  to  tln'  northward  of  Rat  Islet.  These  are  easily  seen,  and  it  is  necessary  to 
approach  thonj  ^vithin  a  cable's  length  on  the  larboard  hand,  and  to  lulfup  to  S.  E.i  or 
S.  E.  by  E.,  to  pass  along  the  norlli  side  of  that  which  stretches  to  the  ensl  from  Rat 
Islet,  and  which  nmst  l)e  left  to  starboard.  Having  once  got  to  the  S.  E.  of  Rat  Islet, 
'  you  may  anchor  as  above  stated.     All  the  reefs  show  clearly,  and  therefore  tlit'ie  is  no 

danger  in  taking  this  channel  when  the  winds  allow  you  to  shnpe  the  proper  courses ;  but, 
if  you  cannot  do  this,  you  ought  not  to  take  it,  as  there  is  not  room  for  working  in.  In 
case  the  wind  becomes  scant  in  the  channel,  you  must  anchor  in  a  moment,  anil  you  will 
oe  free  from  ilanger  ;  for  the  holding  ground  is  very  good,  being  hard  clay,  and  you  are 
sheltered  from  the  swell  of  the  sea. 

The  West,  or  Limbe  Channel,  is  the  best  and  widest,  for  you  n)ay  work  in  it,  if  requi- 
site. To  enter  by  this  channel,  run  outside  the  bnnks  or  shoals,  until  Point  league,  on 
the  west  side  bears  south.  This  jmint  lies  between  Limbe  and  Grand  Boucand  i'oints. 
That  of  Limbe  is  ihe  north-westernmost,  and  has  an  islet  at  its  base. 

Point  league  is  easily  kiiown  by  the  scarped  or  blulf  rocks  which  form  it:  nnd  from 
its  being  the  only  one  of  any  elevation  lying  to  the  south  of  Limbe.     So  soon  as  Point 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


361 


league  bears  inuth,  steer  towards  it,  and  ns  you  get  nenr  it  you  will  see,  to  larbonrd, 
tJie  breniting  of  a  reef  of  considerable  extent,  tmmed  Coqueveiile,  on  the  edge  of  which 
there  ure  5  fathoms  of  wiiter;  having  recognized  this  reef,  tailing  care  to  pass  in  mid- 
channel  between  it  and  Point  (cogue,  in  10  or  15  fathoms  of  water,  and  with  nearly  a 
g,  E.  course,  with  which  you  must  run  in,  amending  successively  a  little  to  ttie  east, 
to  1)898  about  3  or  4  cables'  length  from  Grand  Boucand  Point.  You  may  then  anchor 
totho  west  of  Trois  Marios  Point.  If  obliged  to  tack,  you  must  prolong  the  tncks  un- 
til very  near  the  reefs,  on  the  supposition  that  their  breakers  aflbrd  the  best  marks  for 
jvoitlinR  them :  and  that,  at  the  very  edge  of  them,  there  are  5  and  6  fathoms  of  water. 
\'ou  inoy  also  prolong  the  tacks  to  a  cable  from  the  coast,  without  any  risk  ;  for,  though 
Boucanii  Point  is  foul,  the  reefs  show  above  water,  and  have  8  and  10  fathoms  up  and 
^own  nt  their  edge.  Tho  anchorage,  or  place  which  we  have  ossigned  for  anchoring,  be- 
tween Rat  Islet,  Trois  Maries  Point,  and  Buucand  Point,  is  not  properly  thot  which  is 
called  the  Bay  of  Acul ;  but,  as  there  is  good  shelter  in  it,  those  who  have  no  occasion  to 
make  o  long  delay,  or  to  discharge,  may  avoid  entering  the  bay. 

To  enter  the  Bay  of  Acul,  you  must  not  approach  Trois  Maries  Point  nearer  than 
three  cables'  length,  for  it  is  foul  and  shollow  ;  and  as  soon  as  you  are  past  it,  steer  to- 
naidsthe  Point  of  Morno  Rouge,  (Red  Hill,)  on  the  east,  which  you  may  pass  at  about 
yf  (I  cable's  length,  in  order  to  give  a  berth  to  a  shoal  which  lies  off  Belie  Point,  op- 
misita.  Having  passed  Morne  Rouge  Point,  you  will  see  a  fine  cove,  on  the  same  side, 
called  the  Lombard  Cove,  in  which  you  may  anchor  in  7  fathoms  water,  at  about  a  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  shore.  From  this  cove,  southwoi'd,  into  the  interior  of  the  bay, 
ihere  are  many  shoals  ;  and  no  one  should  pass  the  covo  who  has  not  a  practical  know- 
ledge of  them.  In  the  route  above  described,  you  will  always  find  from  10  to  15  fathoms 
of  wnter,  on  clay. 

Between  Trois  Maries  Point  and  that  of  Morne  Rouge,  in  a  lino  with  them,  and  about 
half  n  i^i'"  f'""*"  ^^^  '""'"'•  fliere  is  a  shoal  of  small  extent,  which  you  will  shun  by  taking 
care  to  pass  ot  not  less  than  three  cables'  length  from  Trois  Maries  Point,  and  not  to 
place  the  ship's  head  towards  Morne  Rouge  Point  until  you  are  at  half  the  distance  be- 
tween the  two  points.  The  anchorage  of  the  Lombard  Cove  is  a  natural  rock.  In  Acul 
Bay  it  is  difficult  to  get  water;  the  best  is  ou  tho  eastern  side  of  the  cove,  between  Trois 
Maries  and  Morne  Rouge  Points. 

■  ANSE  A  CHOUCHOU,  or  CHOUCHOU  BAY.— To  Point  Limbe  follows  that 
of  Margot,  which  has  a  round  islet,  lying  rather  farther  out  than  that  of  Limbe.  It  is 
very  useful  to  make  this  islet,  in  order  to  direct  yourself  to  Chouchou  Bay.  which  lies 
two  miles  west  from  it.  In  this  bay,  there  is  a  good  depth  of  6  or  7  fathoms  ;  to  enter  it 
you  must  keep  towards  the  east  point,  which  has  6  fathoms  close  to  it ;  and  so  soon  as 
you  have  possed  it,  and  tho  vessel  begins  to  lose  headway,  you  mny  anchor ;  for  tho 
niomentyou  enter  under  the  point  the  breeze  calma,  and  the  little  you  have  comes  ahead. 
This  happens  even  when  the  wind  is  very  fresh  without  tho  bay.  To  the  west  of  this 
bay,  there  is  a  snmll  one,  called  La  Rivioro  Salee,  or  Salt  River  Cove,  which  has  little 
depth,  and  is  fit  for  small  craft  only. 

FOND  LA  GRANGE. — Four  miles  westward  from  the  Bay  of  Chouchou  is  that  of 
Fond  la  Grange,  or  the  Grange  Bottom,  (500  fathoms  broad :  and  the  west  point  of  which, 
named  Pnhniste,  is  distinguished  by  a  chain  of  reefs  extending  nearly  a  league  to  the 
west,  and  almost  to  Point  d'Icague.  Fond  la  (xrange  is  a  good  roadstead,  and  in  case 
of  necessity,  a  ship  of  the  line  may  ride  in  it;  for,  throuiihout  it,  there  are  not  less  than 
Cfutlionis  wnter,  and  at  less  than  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore.  To  enter  in  it,  you 
must  pass  near  the  east  point,  and  anchor  in  about  the  middle  of  the  buy.  on  clayey  sand. 
At  a  short  league  westward  from  Palmiste  Point  lies  that  of  league.  The  coast  betweea 
is  foul,  with  sunken  reefs,  which  advance  half  a  league  out  to  sea. 

PORT  PAIX. — Eight  miles  from  Point  d'Icague  is  that  of  the  Carennge,  which  is 
I  the  northernmost  headland  of  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  which,  from  a  distance,  may  be 
mistaken  for  Point  d'Icague.  Tho  coast  between  is  very  clear.  From  this  point  tha 
coast  trends  S.  \V.  by  S.  to  form  the  cove  of  Port  Pais.  To  enter  here  you  must 
avoid  the  east  shore,  because  from  a  point  which  lies  a  little  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  town  a 
reef  stretches  out  about  a  cable's  length,  and  immediately  without  it  there  is  a  depth  of 
13  fathoms,  with  oozy  saml.  To  avoid  this  reef,  keep  in  tho  middle  of  the  entrance, 
which  has  only  three  cables'  length  in  breadth,  and  anchor  to  the  N.  W.  from  the  town, 
1  in  12  or  13  fntlioms,  on  clavev  sand,  about  a  cable  and  a  half  from  tho  shore. 

CH.\NNKL  OF  TOKTUE.— Nearly  north  from  Point  d'Icogue  is  the  cost  point  of 
iTortue  or  Tortugas  Island,  which  extends  nearly  east  and  west,  and,  in  that  direction,  is 
|al)out6  leagues  in  extent,  but  only  1  from  N.  to  S.  All  its  north  side  is  iron-bound,  and 
hteepto,  and  the  south  side  is  for  tho  most  part  bounded  by  a  white  shoal  and  reefs. 
iTIinoiily  good  anchorage  in  Tortue  is  that  of  Bassaterre,  on  its  south  side,  at  a  league 

ialuiir  from  the  east  point.  It  is  formed  by  the  shore  and  the  reefs  which  run  out 
Ifrom  it,  and  no  vessel  drawing  more  than  14  or  15  feet  can  enter  it.  The  passoge  is 
I  narrow,  but  eusy  to  fetch.     You  must  keep  the  weather  reefs  on  board,  leaving  tL..m  on 


Anse  a  Chou- 
chou, or  Chou- 
chou Bay- 


Fond  la 
Grange. 


Port  Pair. 


Channel  of 
Tortue. 


"     l|llvjpi«|l|l    lUliPIIIIIP 


368 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


the  Btnrbonrd  hand,  nnd  steer  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  to  double  the  roefx  you  Innve  on  tlm 
larbonrd  hand.  Do  not  be  afraid  of  coming  near  the  land,  and  anchor  in  fzood  ground 
80  8oori  na  you  have  brnusht  the  lee  reef  to  bear  S.  W.  Large  ohips  may  como  to  nn- 
chor  outside  of  the  reef,  upon  white  ground,  a  mile  to  leeward  of  Bassaterre. 

To  the  eastward  of  Bassaterre,  towards  Portugal  or  the  oast  point,  there  are  several 
bays  or  coves,  in  which  boats  or  schooners  may  anchor,  but  nothing  of  larger  size. 

The  channel  which  the  Isle  of  Tortue  forms  with  Ilayti,  is  G  miles  wide,  and  fit  for 
every  class  of  vessels,  which  may  commodiously  beat  in  it,  and  often  with  great  iidvHn- 
tagesfor  getting  to  windward,  when  the  currents  in  it  run  to  the  eastward,  which  they 
do  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year;  for  rarely,  and  only  during  souths,  do  they  clmnge 
their  direction  to  west.     In  the  latter  case,  it  is  necessary  to  advance  northwiud,  (imi 
get  6  or  7  leagues  from  the  Tortue,  to  beat  to  windward.     When  boating  in  the  Toitue 
Channel,  you  ought  to  stand  on  within  less  than  a  mile  of  the  coast  on  uvery  tack;  fur 
towards  the  coasts  the  current  is  stronger,  and  the  wind  more  favorable,  than  in  mid- 
channel.     As  thiMo  are  several  bays  on  each  side,  the  sotting  of  the  current  is  noithfr 
uniform  nor  in  the  same  direction.     You  will  sometimes  see  it  run  in  nunioruus  di- 
rections; nnd  Boinotimes,  in  the  middle  of  the  channel,  it  will  run  contrary  to  the  currunt 
in  shore. 
Port  Paix  to       PORT  PAIX    TO    ST.  NICOLAS'  MOLE— Four  leagues  from  Port  Pnix  lies 
St.  Nicolas'      Port  Moustiquo.     The  coast  between  is  clear,  and  blulF  or  scarped.     Port  Moustlquu 
Mole.  has  scarcely  an  opening  of  4   cables'  length  :  its  bottom  is  unequal,  and  impeded  wjtli 

rocks,  which  render  it  necessary  to  examine  it  with  the  lend  before  j-ou  let  go  nn  nnchor; 
for  between  the  two  outer  pointE  you  cannot  fmd  bottom  with  40  fathoms  of  lino. 

At  a  league  and  a  half  from  Port  Moustiquo  is  Port  a  i'Ecu,  and  the  const  between 
the  two  is  rocky,  steep  to,  and  bluff.  This  cove  is  bettor  than  Port  Moustique,  but  notsu 
easy  for  largo  ships,  as  its  entrance  is  narrow,  in  consequence  of  a  reef  whicli  stretches 
off  about  two  cables'  length  from  its  eastern  jmint,  and  upon  which  there  are  not  more 
than  3  fathoms  water.  To  take  this  anchorngo,  it  is  necessary  to  keep  near  to  the  reefj 
off  the  enst  point,  and  haul  by  the  wind,  ranging  olong  the  roof, '.»  anchor  in  8  or  10  fnlh- 
oms  in  the  centre  of  the  cove,  on  clay,  and  about  N.  N.  £.  from  a  house  which  ia  at  tbe 
bottom  of  the  bay. 

Six  miles  from  Port  n  I'Ecu  is  the  anchorage  of  Jenn  Rabel,  which  is  good,  sufo,  and 
easy  to  take.  On  approaching  this  place  you  ought,  without  any  foar,  to  approximate 
the  reef  on  the  east  side,  which  has  10  fathoms  close  to  its  edge.  The  anchorage  for 
large  ships  is  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  eastern  breakers,  in  ]'2  or  15  fathoms; 
and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  shut  in  the  two  points  which  are  on  the  enst  coast,  for 
though  it  is  possible  to  run  farther  in,  yet  it  is  not  advisable ;  for  the  depth  suddenly  di- 
min'shes,  and  the  bottom  is  not  very  clean. 

Should  you  be  to  the  north-west  of  Jean  Knbel,  at  a  short  league's  distance  from  tbe 
,  land,  and  half  the  island  of  Tortue  open  with  the  point,  you  will  find  60  fathoms  of  water, 

oozy  ground,  and  a  little  farther  out  80  fathoms. 

From  .Tonn  Rabel  the  coast    forms  a   great    bight   to    the  southward,  as  fnr  as  tbe 
peninsula,   called   Presque   Isle,  or  the  Mole,  the  western  point  of  which,  enlled  the 
Mole  Point,  lies  13  miles  W.  S.  W.  from  it.     All  the  shore  between  is  rocky,  nnd 
does  not  offer  any  shelter.     At  all  times  the  currents  here  are  very  perceptible  near  the 
shore,  and  general!}'  set  on  it.     At  two  leagues  in  the  offing  they  are  less  so,  niid  run 
to  the  north-oast.     Near  the  peninsula  they  are  much  stronger,  and  commonly  set  to- 
wards the  north. 
St.  Nicolas'         ST.  NICOLAS'  MOLE,  BAY  OR  HARBOR.— This  harbor  is  large  and  spacious 
Mole,  Bay       at  its  entrance,  but  narrows  towards  the  town,  which  you  will  descry  as  soon  as  you  have 
<rr  Harbor,       doubled  the  cnpo.     You  may  stand  very  close  to  either  shore,  but  it  is  advisable  to  allow 
on  the  south  side  more  room  for  veering  than  on  the  north  side,  as  there  is  no  nnchoriiij 
ground,  which  you  have  on  the  north  side,  tiiough  very  near  the  shore.     The  anchorage 
is  before  the  town,  and  under  the  barracks,  in  1.5  or  18  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.     In  guiu; 
in,  you  must  be  prepared  against  the  puffs  or  squalls,  which  como  down  from  the  lami 
with  such  violence  as  to  endanger  the  masts. 

Within  the  bay  or  harbor  you  will  bo  sheltered  from  every  wind.  There  is  a  line  river 
to  water  nt,  nnd  places  where  a  ship  may  be  careened  with  her  side  to  tbe  shore.  When 
it  blows  hard  it  is  diflicult  to  get  to  the  anchorage  ;  and  if  yuu  are  not  quick  in  iL'ttiiig  ^o, 
the  anchor  may  fall  from  6  to  30  and  35  fathoms. 

The  Derrotero  says  that  the  north  coast  from  Cnpo  St.  Nicolas  sends  out  a  white 
bank,  which  stretches  about  one-third  of  a  cable  from  the  shore,  and  on  which  there  (ire 
3  and  4  fathoms  water.  The  south  shore  has  also  its  white  bank,  which  extends  out 
about  a  cable's  length  from  an  interior  point  S.  W.  of  tho  town,  upon  which  there  is 
a  battery.  From  this  point  the  white  bank  extends  directly  to  the  Fort  Point,  tho  N. 
E.  end  of  the  town  :  and,  therefore,  when  to  the  northward  of  that  point,  you  must  not 
prolong  the  ttick  to  the  south  farther  than  to  bring  the  north  part  of  tho  town  to  bear 
east.     You  should  also  be  aware,  tbut  on  the  south  coast,  and  a  little  to  the  west  of  \he 


BLUNT'S  AMERCIAN  COAST  PILOT. 


363 


(1  spncious 

you  have 

)io  to  nllow 

iuichoriiis 

iiiichorage 

111  gmi 

111  the  land 

(I  line  river 
re.  When 
letting  go, 


ibove  mentioned  point,  no  bottom  hns  been  found ;  therefore  you  ought  to  look  out  and 
tack  in  time.  On  the  northern  tuck  tliero  is  not  no  much  danger;  for  it  is  possible  to 
let  go  nn  anchor,  although  it  must  he  dune  vory  near  to  I  he  shore.  In  the  anchornae, 
which  ia  well  sheltered  from  all  winds,  vossols  pass  the  dungorous  season  uf  tne 
hurricnnps. 

Ill  >;'*"'8  ""^  y"  ^'"  *^®'  **•  ^^^  southward,  the  point  of  the  capo  which  forms  its  en- 
trance ;  and  farther  to  the  southward  you  will  then  descry  the  Point  du  Cap-ii-Foux,  or 
of  Fool's  Cape.  The  lattnr  lies  5i  miles  to  the  southward  of  St.  Nicolan'  I'oint;  and 
ihecuust  thence  extends  2^  leagues  mure,  nearly  in  the  same  direction,  to  the  Point  a  la 
Perle,  or  Pearl  Point. 

The  sea  hree/.e  at  the  Mole  is  from  N.  E.  by  N.  It  comos  on  at  8  in  the  mnrnin?,  and 
blows  very  strong  till  10  or  11  at  night.  Thi)  land  breo/.o  comcm  on  moderately  at  S.  E. 
Itcoiitiiinos  till  (j  in  the  morning,  then  dies  away,  and  it  is  colm  till  8.  If  bound  to  the 
northward,  ships  generally  weigh  at  8  or  10  at  night,  when  the  sea  breeze  begins  to 
^luckeu  enough  to  run  them  out. 

Directions  for  sh)j)s  bound  to  Cape  Haytien,  Sfcfrom  the  ]Vi*lward. 

In  advancing  from  the  westward  towards  Capo  Haytien,  give  the  N.  E.  part  of  Tortue 
Island  n  good  berth :  and  after  you  get  to  windword  of  the  east  end  of  the  island,  you  will 
descry  the  cape. 

The  land  to  the  west  of  Port  Paix  shuts,  to  the  northward,  a  low  point,  and  rises  gni- 
(lunlly  towards  the  south  to  a  high  mountain,  with  a  sugar-loaf  top,  and  then  it  declines 
oiitlie  Baino  side  to  a  large  valley,  whence  it  rises  quickly  to  a  prodigious  high  moun- 
tain, smootli  at  tho  top.  and  the  highest  land  in  this  part  of  Hayti.  Tlie  high  land  after 
this,  to  tho  southward,  is  of  sugar-loaf  form,  with  a  little  one  to  tho  south  of  it,  which 
are  both  10  or  12  miles  in  the  country.  The  next  high  land,  or  point,  which  is  seen  by 
the  water  side,  is  Cape  Haytien.  The  land,  at  first,  makes  like  a  saddle  ;  but  on  nearer 
approach,  a  low  point  will  appear,  which  shuts  from  tho  eastward  tho  eastern  part  of  tho 
saddle-land.  This  is  Point  Picolot,  or  the  Capo  Land,  tho  extremity  of  tho  capo  already 
described. 

M.VNZANILLA  BAY. — Ships  from  the  westward  may  with  safety  jirocecd  to  Man-    Mamandla 
zaniilii  Biiy.    It  is  quite  clear,  and  may  be  approached  within  one-third  of  a  mile  in  every    Bay. 
part  of  it. 

The  Seven  Brothers,  which  have  been  described,  are  mostly  barren,  with  reefs  about 
tbein.  There  is  some  wood  upon  them,  and  plenty  of  fish  all  round.  You  need  not 
approach  the  western  part  of  them  nearer  than  two  leagues,  until  you  see  the  bay.  On 
advancing  into  this,  there  will  bo  found  10  fathoms  water,  at  about  tliree-quurters  of  a 
mile  from  shore. 

The  river  Massacre,  formerly  a  boundary  of  the  Spanish  and  Haytien  territories,  falls 
into  tho  bay  to  the  eastward  of  Port  Dauphin  ;  but  it  will  lie  very  difficult,  if  not  impossi- 
ble, to  water  there,  as  you  must  go  u|)  the  river  nearly  two  leagues  to  obtain  it. 

Tonuchor  pio|)erly,  so  as  to  have  the  best  shelter,  run  along  the  insido  of  Mnnzanilla 
Point,  and  drop  in  G  fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  All  the  anchoring  places  are  within  the 
Spanish  lino,  where  the  land  is  low,  marshy,  and  covered  with  mangroves.  Tho  bay  is 
as  easy  to  go  in  as  to  got  out,  having  regular  land  and  sea  breezes,  and  being  quite  secure 
from  any  swell.  A  ship,  having  lost  her  anchors,  may  run  in  upon  the  muddy  shore. 
Tho  landing  is  very  easy.  Here  are  game  and  fish  ;  and  bullocks,  cows,  and  hogs,  may 
be  purchased. 

THE  ROAD  OF  MONTE  CHRISTI  is  more  open  than  Mnn/.anilla  Bay,  although    The  Road  oj 
in  it  there  is  good  anchorage  ;  well  sheltered  from  the  N.  E.,  E.,  and  S.  E.,  which  are  the  MunteChfisti, 
strong  breezes ;    and  during  the  norths  you    may  anchor  in   5  or  4   fathoms,   under 
Cabra,  the  islet  of  Monte  Christi.     Tho  same  resources  may  bo  found  here  as  in  Man- 
zauillti  Bay. 

"  Tlie  anchorage  at  the  Grange,"  snys  a  navigator,  "  is  less  spacious  than  that  under 
Point  Ysiibelln,  but  it  is  more  sheltered  from  the  uortlis  by  tho  islet.  Ten  ships  of  war 
might  easily  be  anchored,  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms,  within  jiistol  shot  of  this  islet,  which 
makes  half  a  league  distance  from  the  islet  to  tho  reef  that  is  as  far  from  the  shore.  Wo 
bad  four  strong  breezes,  which  might  bo  called  gales  of  wind,  yet  we  rodo  witli  only  half 
a  cable,  and  had  not  occasion  to  freshen  hawse, 

" The  islet  Cabins,  or  Cabra,  is  nearly  half  a  circle  of  200  fathoms  diameter,  and  has 
a  hillock  about  the  height  and  length  of  .'30  feet,  with  a  cut  in  the  middle,  of  near  10  fa- 
thoms ;  and  this  is  what  breaks  olF  tho  sea  and  winds.  The  French  had  made  there  a 
very  good  salt-work,  which  tho  Spaniards  have  let  go  to  ruin.  It  differa  from  those  at 
Turk's  Islands,  produces  better  salt,  and  is  more  convenient,  as  you  may  introduce  the  salt 
water  as  you  want  it,  in  tho  several  pans. 

"  The  landing  is  easy  every  where.  Very  good  hay  is  made  on  the  island :  it  is  a  kind 
of  dog's  grass,  which  they  pull  up  by  the  roots.     That  which  grows  by  the  river's  side 


364 


DLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


ii  conrsnr.  Tho  river  (St.  Jap;o)  it  ono  longue  from  tlio  iainnd  to  tlio  S.  W.  of  tho 
town,  nnd  innrked  hy  ii  tuft  of  troes.  Tim  wntor  in  vHry  good,  nnd  oiisily  ({ni.  'p|,„ 
boat  inny  go  in  at  \ug,\\  wntor,  iind  nt  about  imlf  ii  cnlilu't*  litngtii  witliin,  you  will  fm,]  j^ 
freati,  tlio  rurreiit  hoin^  bo  Htrong  tlint  tho  miit  wiitor  i-iiiinot  got  in.  Vou  Imvo  ((itinriiinlY 
a  quiirter-wind  to  t'otcli  it  in,  iiiid  liring  it  buck.  Iloro  in  voiy  good  tisliinir,  |„„|_  ..J^ 
inny  iiiiul  tiio  Hpine,  iih  well  lis  noni'  tho  nlioro.  On  tlio  liirbmird  Hido  of  tiio  town,  n\mut 
II  limguo  from  tlio  Hlioro,  it  ia  (,'oud  aliooting.  You  will  find  plenty  of  wood-jiigouns  am) 
India  fuwia." 

The  WesUrn  Coaati  of  Haytior  St.  Dnm'mgo,  between  St.  Nicolas'  Mole  and 

Cape  Tiburon. 

In  prorofding  from  St.  Niciiolna'  Mole,  ns  iilrcndy  obsorvod.  you  will  doscry  to  tho  south. 
'  wnrd  tiio  I'oiiit  dii  Cii|)-nu-Koux  or  of  Fool's  Ciipo,  wliicli  lios  .'ii  niiiost  to  tlio  Hoiitliwiird 

of  St.  NicIioIhs'  I'oiiit;  nnd  tlio  roust  tlionco  trends  2i  leiiguo*  iiioro,  noiirly  in  tJKt  snino 
direction,  to  tlio  I'oint  de  In  I'orlo,  or  I'oinl  I'oiiit. 

Tills  piirt  of  tlio  const  is  steep,  witliout  niiy  alioltor  ;  but  iiero  it  is  gonenilly  n  ciilin, 

Tile  currents  iii-siioro  aut  to  tlio  northwiird,  mid  two  leagues  in  the  ofTing.  to  tliu  W.  anri 

W.  S.  \V. 

Platte-forme,       I'LATTI-^FORME.  or  I'LATKORM,  &o.— From   I'oint   do  In    Po.l«   tlin  cost 

or  Platform,     rounds  to  tlio  soutli-onstwnitl  nnd  oast,  to  tlio  point  of  tlio  i'liitform,  which  ir^  ntthedis- 

<1^.  tnneo  of  .1  lengues  from  tho  former.     This  point  is  easily  distinguishod,  ns  well  liy  its  flat 

form  as  by  its  being  tho  southernmost  of  this  part  of  tho  islnnd.     'i'lie  ancliorni^u  is  b(,>. 

fore  n  smnll  sandy  cove,  nt  the  bottom  of  which  some  liousns  nro  seen.     You  aiicliiirni'nr 

the  shore  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  woivly  bottom.     At  this  plnco  water  may  bo  obtained  after 

rnins,  but  there  is  none  to  hi*  hnd  nt  other  times. 

To  anchor  under  the  Vial  form,  bring  its  soutliornmost  point  V,.  by  S.,  tho  westernmost 
point  in  sight  W.  N.  W.,  the  wnteriiig  pltice  N.  N.  10.  'I'lion  como  to  in  nbout  0  futli. 
oms.  In  deeper  wnter  the  ground  is  foul:  nnd  tho  nenrer  the  shore  the  clearer  tlie  bot- 
tom. The  bank  ia  very  stoe])  for  two  cnblea'  length.  Without,  10  fathoms  smindinttj 
will  not  be  found.  Tho  bay  is  very  convenient  for  cruizing  ships  to  heol  nnd  boot-top 
in  tcc. 

Prom  the  Platform  Point  to  Point  a  Pierre,  on  the  south  side  of  tho  entrance  of  the 
Port  of  (Jotiniv(!S,  tiio  bearing  nnd  distnnco  nre  E.  18^  .S.,  10  lenguos.  Tho  point  in  higii 
nnd  steep  nnd  nil  the  const  between  is  snfo,  nnd  mny  bo  rnnged  very  near.  Tiiore  is  an- 
chorage, even  for  large  shijia.  nt  Ilenne  Bay  nnd  nt  I'ort  l^imont,  but  it  ought  to  be  used 
only  in  case  of  necessitj'.  In  tho  winter  months  there  nre  tornndoes  or  gales  nf  wini) 
nimost  every  night,  coming  from  tho  .S.  E.,  some  of  which  nre  violent;  and  unless  you 
have  business  on  this  part  of  the  const,  it  is  best  to  stand  olT  two  or  throe  Itingues,  bo  that 
you  may,  with  any  wind,  keep  to  the  westward. 
ISonvres.  GONMVES. — Tho  bay  of  (lonnivos,  or  Gonnaheeves,  as  the  French  pronounce  it,  'm 

V('ry  largo  nnd  fine,  the  nnchorage  excellent,  nnd  the  ontrnnce  very  easy.  You  niiige 
along  tho  shore,  at  half  n  league  or  two  miles  distance,  steering  nearly  oast,  nnd  let  go 
your  nnchor  in  from  10  to  (i  fathoms,  ooze.  You  will  find  from  the  ontrance  under  Co- 
nnives Point,  which  is  low  nnd  one  mile  east  of  Point  Pierro,  15  nnd  Vi  fatiioms;  the 
wnter  decrenses  as  you  get  into  tho  bay.  When  you  nre  n  good  half  league  from  the 
land,  and  two  miles  from  the  Debercndaire,  (or  landing  place,)  you  will  have  (i  fathoms. 
After  you  have  douliled  the  point,  leaving  it  on  your  Inrbonrd  hnnd,  you  will  see  Fort 
Castres  on  n  point  of  land,  which  you  must  not  npproach  too  near,  as  tlioro  is  n  key  that 
lies  nbout  a  mile  south  of  the  point. 

Observe  thnt  from  the  south  point  of  tho  entrniiirt,  n  reef  extends  to  the  N.  E.  to  the 
distnnce  of  n  (piarter  of  a  mile.     It  is  nearly  steep  to  from  (J  fathoms. 

Captain  Mackellar  says  thnt  the  harbor  of  (loo'ii.es  is  nn  excellent  one,  nnd  rnpnbieof 
containing  nny  number  of  ships  of  tho  largest  si/.i  ,  completely  shut  from  all  winds;  it  is 
of  very  easy  nccoss,  nnd  genernlly  clear,  excepting  a  small  reef  that  extends  al)out  two  la- 
bles'  length  from  Fort  Castries,  on  tho  north  sicbt.  'I^lie  latitude  of  the  town  is  19°  SH 
41",  nnd  its  limgilude  72°  41'  7"  W.     Vnr.  .5°  ,'JO"  E.  1H17. 

Ships  intending  to  anchor  nt  (lonaives,  nnd  linving  advanced  to  Point  Pevis,  on  tho  north 
side  of  the  entrance,  will  gain  soundings  in  15  or  11)  fathoms,  and  have  the  town  in  sisht, 
bonring  about  E.  by  N.,  thoy  may  proceed  for  tho  town  on  that  benrinsj,  keepiiiniii  miJ- 
chnrinel,  ornny  wny  nenr  it ;  then  souiiflingH  will  bo  very  regular.  When  w(dl  up  ihi) 
harbor,  you  will  see  Fort  Custries,  wliicii  stniids  on  tho  north  side,  on  the  to|)  of  a  small 
hill,  about  one  mile  without  tho  town.  When  this  fort  bears  N.  liy  I'',  h  E.  you  will  have 
7  fathoms  in  mid-channel,  fine  soft  mud.  When  it  bears  N.  by  W.  i  W.  in  5i  w  (i  falh- 
oms,  th''"  J(!em8  to  be  the  best  nnchornge,  nnd  as  close  in  ns  a  ship  of  war  ought  to  go.  I 
havLi  oeen  so  far  up  the  harlior  as  to  have  Fort  Castries  bearing  N.  W.  in  4  fathoms:  but 
the  best  nnchornge  is  with  it  benring  N.  by  W.  j  W.,  and  the  middle  of  the  town  K.  i  N., 
nearly  in  mid-chnnnel. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


366 


The  iounflingd  nil  over  the  liiirbor  nro  «o  vory  r(«>{uli»r,  thiit  it  is  not  noconwiry  to  Tinvo 
iniirltH  lor  rutmiiiK  in  unci  outr  by ;  hut  in  tli«  uvimiI  ol'  hiiviii;;  to  hciit  with  tlie  ti(>ii  broozo, 
youiniixt  notHtitnil  too  nuiir  Fort  CiiHtri«H,  um  tliuru  ia  u  sniiill  riuif  extunilin);  from  it  to 
,1,0  Hiiutliwiiril :  tilt)  mark  (or  koopiii^  clear  of  tiiiH  roof,  ix  ii  !iirK«  tron  bchirul  tlio  town  ' 

,11,  with  tho  iiortiuirninost  houmm,  Injuring  K.  by  N.;  but  this  rccfHtrftcht'H  to  ho  short  a 
(liiliiiictt  that  a  HJiip  will  nnarcoly  HtaiiiJ  tto  nciir  tint  hIioio  iis  to  touch  it.  In  ftiindiiiK  to 
the  south  Hi(li)  of  thu  harbor,  ^ivo  tho  Nhoro  a  ^ood  borth  until  without  thu  innxr  liuiat, 
uud  lifter  tlmt  you  may  stanil  iVom  short)  to  shoro,  by  your  IimuI,  with  HiJiity. 

ST.  MARC,  or  ST.  MARK— From  Point  St.  Pinrro,  without  the  ontranco  of  tho 
P,iiy  of  Oonaivos,  Iho  dislanco  to  Capo  St.  Miirk,  in  a  ilirtMlion  nmiily  nouth,  is  nuarly  St.  Alar c,  or 
seven  lra(j;uiiH.  A  leaguo  anil  a  half  to  tho  northward  of  St.  Mark's  Ihiy  is  a  lnw  point,  St.  Mark. 
wliicli  appears  at  a  dlstunco  llko  an  iHlaml,  and  forms  a  ciipo  that  is  cidled  La  I'oint  du 
Moriio  au  Diablo,  or  tho  Dov't's  Blulf  Point:  it  points  out  tho  mouth  of  tho  Kivor  Ar- 
tilionitii,  which  falls  into  tho  soa  two  miles  northward  of  tlio  point.  Tlioro  ia  an  unchor- 
ngetlii)  wholo  len^^th  of  this  coast  for  small  vosaols  only. 

Ciipo  St.  Mark  is  high,  niid  of  a  round  form;  you  wdl  descry  at  a  grout  distance  the 
hillock  which  forms  it,  and  stands  only  one  milo  from  tho  sea  side. 

The  openin,!,' of  tho  Hay  of  St.  Mark  lies  to  tho  north  of  the  cape;  it  extends  ono 
lengue  within  the  land,  and  tho  water  in  it  has  a  great  depth.  Ships  anchor  in  tho  bot- 
tom of  tho  bay  under  tho  town,  in  15  or  16  fathoms  of  water;  small  vessels  may  come 
into  less  water,  but  thoy  will  bo  very  near  tho  shore.  In  tho  KmiXh  side  of  the  bay  is  ii 
piece  of  foul  ground,  extending  two  miles  from  a  blulV  point  to  the  S.  K.,  and  uu  which  a 
reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables'  length  from  tho  coast. 

Thefollowing  Description  of  the  Navigation  between  the  riulform  and  St.  Mark,  is  given 
by  Capt.  Heater,  an  English  navigator. 


ounce  It,  ij 
You  niiige 
and  let  go 
miller  Go- 
toais;  tho 
t  IVoni  the 
fiitlioni«. 
see  Fort 
a  key  that 


i.  E.  to  the 

niprible  of 
^iiiils ;  it  ii 
DUt  two  Ill- 
is  19°  % 

n  tlio  north 
wii  in  sight. 
)iii^ia  iiiiJ- 
,vcll  up  ihn 
p  of  a  small 
)U  will  linve 
i  or  (i  fatli- 
lit  to  go,  1 
thorns:  but 
,va  E.  i  N.. 


"About  9  leagues  eastward  of  the  Platform  is  the  fine  bay  in  tho  harbor  of  tJonaives.  All 
ulongtliit)  i:oaHt  you  nro  sure,  about  10  o'clock  in  tho  forenoon,  to  have  the  sou  breeze, 
which  lasts  till  nij;ht,  imd  then  you  have  the  wind  olf  shore  ;  therefore  you  may  stay  till 
thnttime,  before  which  there  is  little  or  no  wind  at  all.  If  you  intend  to  go  into  Go- 
niiivcs,  you  must  keep  a  good  distance  olf  tho  south  point,  which  is  Hat  for  a  cons  id  ero- 
HedistiiiK'e.  When  you  are  about  the  point  open  with  tho  bay.  you  will  descry  u  small 
inland,  which  you  must  leave  on  your  larboard  side,  and  run  in  with  your  lead  in  10  or  12 
fiithoiiis  of  water.  You  may  also  run  along  close  by  the  island  if  you  choose,  in  4  or  5 
I'athoins. 

•' Aluiut  two  leagues  to  the  southward  of  Gonaivos  is  Artibonite  Point,  and  two  leogues 
fiirtlior  south,  Artibonito  River.  In  sailing  from  Gonaivos  to  tho  latter  place,  it  ia  good 
to  keep  your  lead  ;  for,  as  you  como  near  the  river,  you  will  find  the  water  shoaleu  to 
iibout  4  fathoms,  and  after  that  deepening  again  to  7  or  8  fathoms. 

"This  place  is  very  remarkable,  the  land  being  high  and  uneven  laiil  a  bold  clear  shore 
nil  nlong  to  tho  northward,  from  tho  IMatforin  to  (lonaivos.  When  you  have  run  8  or  9 
jengucs  E.  S.  E.  i  K.,  you  will  then  see  tho  land  ahead,  or  eastward,  very  low  by  the 
waterside  and  prodigious  mountains  over  it;  this  low  land  reaches  from  Gonaives  to  the 
southward  of  Artibonite  River,  about  a  milo  ;  audits  south  end,  somewhat  higher  than 
the  rest,  appears  like  a  table  land,  overgrown  with  weeds  and  green  trees;  this  is  the 
Devil's  Blulf:  round  its  south  end  is  the  liay  of  St.  Mark,  tho  other  point  of  which  you 
can  see  to  tho  S.  W.  of  the  Devil's  Bluff.  To  anchor  olf  the  river  bring  tho  south  end 
of  tlie  low  laiiil  to  boar  south,  tlireo  miles  distant ;  and,  as  you  run  in,  you  will  see  five 
orsixsniall  Iihuhos  by  tlio  waterside;  bring  them  to  bear  E.  S.  E.,  two  miles;  then  the 
river  will  bear  S.  E.  On  the  starboard  side,  or  tho  south  side  of  tho  entrance  of  the 
river,  there  is,  likewise,  a  small  hole,  which  you  may  see..  15o  sure  to  keep  these  bear- 
inss,  and  you  will  be  upon  a  fine  level  bank,  whore  you  may  anchor  in  what  water  you 
please,  from  'JO  to  (i  fathoms.  15ut,  if  you  go  within  J  miles  of  tho  shore,  you  will  drop 
off tliat  blink  from  G  fathoms  to  120,  the  next  cast;  then  50  or  (iO,  and  then 'JO  or  100 
fitlioins,  within  less  than  half  a  mile  of  the  shore,  and  from  that  to  .'),  at  once.  When 
you  are  ut  anchor  at  Artibonite,  you  may  soo  tho  Platform,  bearing  W.  N.  W.,  about  10 
leagues. 

"  Artibonite  River  is  not  a  place  of  great  note,  because  it  ebbs  almost  dry  at  low  water; 
neither  is  there  any  town  in  this  jilaco,  but  only  some  |)lantiitions,  five  or  six  miles  up  tho 
river;  there  you  can  have  good  water,  but  no  wood.  Tho  sea  wind  comes  ou  at  noon,  at 
N.  \V.,  till  10  at  night,  and  tlie  land  wind  at  E,  by  S.,  till  Sin  the  morning." 

Fioin  St.  Mark's  Point  tho  coast  of  Ilayti  trends  nearly  S.  E.,  true,  six  and  a  half 
leagues,  to  [jii  Souffriere,  or  Vazes  Point;  and  thence  E.  S.  E.,  five  leagues,  to  Port  au 
Prince.  Tho  coast  is  generally  clean  and  boUl,  and  you  may  run  along  it  at  the  distance 
of  a  mile,  in  10.  15,  and  '20  fathoms  of  water,  in  proceeding  thus,  you  will  first  per- 
ceive tho  Magazine  of  Moutroui,  and  af torwaads,  the  villages  of  Arcahais,  or  Arcahaye, 


mmm- 


(nMiifmpiippHR''">VN.< '"■•■■    >-■!>"'  I  ^m.mtmm « 


36G 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


nnd  Boucnssin ;  and  fiiinlly,  the  city  of  Port  nu  Prince.  Off  the  coast,  at  about  half 
way  between  St.  Mark's  Point  and  Port  au  Prince,  are  three  small  islets,  called  the  Area- 
dins,  which  are  situate  at  nearly  a  league  from  the  shore,  and  separated  by  channels 
about  half  a  mile  in  breadth.  Near  these  islets,  on  every  side,  the  depths  are  5  and  (i 
fathoms. 

To  the  E.  by  S.  of  Boucnssin,  and  very  near  the  coast,  is  Mouton,  or  Sheep  Key.    A 

passage  ought  never  bo  atteinped  within  this  key;  near  il,  on  the  outside,  llio  const  is 

,  clear  and  water  deep.     About  t'.vo  leagues  to  the  southward  of  this  island  is  the  roadstead 

Foso  ;  this  to  the  l\.  E.,  and  Lamentin  Point  to  the  S.  W.,  form  the  entrance  of  the 
Bay  of  ]?ort  au  Prince.  To  the  westward  of  this  roadstead  is  an  extensive  bank,  with  a 
cluster  of  islets,  of  which  the  easternmost  is  distant  about  two  miles  from  Foso  Roadstead 
and  the  southerninost  throe  miles  from  Lamentin  Point.  There  are,  besides,  two  other 
islets,  which  lie  almost  in  the  direction  of  the  two  points  of  the  bay,  and  which  are  four 
miles  from  Foso  Road,  and  two  from  Lamentin  Point. 
Poic  du  POR  r  AU  PRINCE.*— The  shore  at  the  bottom  of  Port  au  Prince  Bay  is  vary  foul, 

Prince.  and  has  a  largo  group  of  islets.     These  form  the  inner  anchorage;  and  to  gain  this,  the 

aid  of  a  pilot  is  indispensable  ;  but  the  Grand  Road  is  without  the  reefs,  and  may  be  entered 
without  a  jjilot. 

Those  bound  to  Port  au  Prince  from  'he  N.  W.,  after  having  made  St  Mark's  Point, 
may  sliapo  tlioir  course,  either  to  pass  between  th«  Arcadiiis  and  the  coast,  or  between 
them  nnd  the  Island  Uonave :  the   firnt  appears  to  be  the  best  route,  for  thus  the  foul 
'  grounds  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Gonnvo  must  bo  avoidorl :  it  is  also  to  be  observoJ  that  the 

wind  in  the  channel  id  generall}'  from  the  N.  E. ;  the  nearer,  therefore,  you  pnss  to  iho 
main  land,  the  more  free  will  you  run  to  the  eastward.  Again,  almost  every  atternooii, 
in  the  rauiy  season,  there  are  tornadoes  in  the  channel,  which  compel  vessels  to  lie  to, 
and  to  keep  on  boards  or  tacks,  that  they  may  not  fill  upon  tho  reefs  of  Gonave.  If  you 
can  foresee  the  gale,  it  will  bo  best  to  gain  an  anchorage  near  Arcahais  Point,  and  there 
ride  it  out;  or,  you  may  anchor  to  the  northward  of  Leogano,  on  the  south  side  of  the 
channel,  upon  the  ground  extending  from  Gonave  Island,  as  shown  in  the  chart.  When 
past  the  Arcadins,  your  course  will  bo  about  S.  E.  by  S.  to  get  near  Lamentin  P  nnt.  If 
caught  ly  night  to  tlie  eastward  of  this  point,  here  you  may  anchor.  From  the  point  to 
the  anchorage  of  Port  au  Prince,  the  distance  is  fiiur  miles;  and  to  make  it  you  must 
steer  towards  the  city,  and  anchor  about  half  a  Uiile  outside  the  islets,  in  10  or  Ij 
fathoms. 

The  channel  between  the  Arcadins  and  coast  is  two  niles  wide,  and  in  the  middle  of 
it  you  will  iievir  have  more  than  29,  nor  less  than  10  fuuioms.  The  water  decreases  to- 
wards the  Arcadins  to  6  or  8  fathoms,  corally  ground  ;  at  tho  tame  distance  from  theo". 
posite  shore  is  tho  like  depth,  with  n'uddy  bottom. 

From  Pearl  Point  tj  the  entrance  of  St.  Mark's  Channel,  midway  between  Ciipe  St. 
Mark  and  the  Island  of  Gonave,  the  course  and  distance  are  S.  E.  i  E.,  sixteou  leagues. 
This  will  bring  you  to  the  westward  of  Cape  St.  Mark,  for  which  you  may  steer;  or,  you 
may  continue  tho  same  course  six  leagues  farther,  which  will  lead  clear  of  the  Arcadins. 

Should  it  do  night  when  you  enter  the  channel  of  St.  Mark,  you  should  steer  S.  S,  E, 
i  E.,  in  order  to  clear  die  Arcadins  and  the  eastern  end  uf  Gonave  Island.  Having  ruu 
about  four  leagues  on  this  track,  the  course  will  be  about  S.  E.  by  E.,  five  leagues,  to  make 
Foiot.  Lamentin,  which  is  on  tho  south  side,  to  the  westward  of  I'otl  r.n  Prince.  You 
may  range  along  this  coast  without  fear,  only  avoiciiiig  tho  shoals  of  the  sandy  key,  whicii 
lie  at  a  short  league  northward  of  the  point.  Should  you  pass  this  point  in  the  night,  yon 
would  do  right,  alter  you  have  run  a  mile,  or  a  mdo  and  a  half,  to  anchor;  you  will  tiiid 
12  or  18  fithonis  water,  the  ground  good,  and  the  witer  alwny.><  smooth. 

You  may  be  forced  to  turn  in  this  channel,  but  you  must  not  go  so  near  to  tlio  Gonave 
as  to  the  St.  Domingo  side  ;  the  latter  being  sale,  may  be  approached  any  whore,  within 
half  a  league. 
*  The  Arcadins,  as  before  noticed,  are  not  to  be  feared  :  n  shoal  stretches  out  from  thoin 

n  mile,  or  half  a  league  at  most,  with  5  or  G  fathoms  on  it;  on  the  edge  of  the  wo.'it  ami 
south-west  sides,  you  will  have  from  10  to  15  fathoms,  corally  ground  :  but  there  is  good 
ground  to  bo  found  in  8,  Vi,  and  1.'3  fathom.-^,  coarse  sand  ami  shells. 
r;,»flrt'v:  GONAVE   ISLAND.— Tho  groiitest  length  of  Gonave  Island  is  10  leagues  fl.  S.  E. 

Island.  and  W.  N.  W.:  its  breadth,  which  is  very  regular,  is  nearly  two  and  a  half  leagues. 

This  island  was  surveyed  in  1TH7,  by  .M.  de  Lieudo  de  Sepmanville,  who  has  given  tho 
following  description  of  it.s  coiists  and  tho  adjacent  dangers. 

The  most  dangerous  reefs  are  those  which  lie  to  the  S.  E.  of  Petite,  or  Ijittl(>  Gonave, 
which  is  situate  near  the  S.  !'^.  point  u\'  the  great  island.     These  seem  to  be  joincl  with 


the  land  of  the  Little  (ionave,  and  stretch  more  than  a 


hiagiu)  into  the 


olViing,  h  ini;  ni 


•  See  Plan  by  Cnui,  W.  0«en,  published  by  E.  &G.  W.  )'lant,  1833 


mm 


mmmm. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  367 

about  800  toisea,  or  nearly  a  common  English  mile  from  the  shore.  A  vessel  may  pasa, 
in  on  urgent  case,  betwe-  i!hem  and  the  Little  Gonuve;  but  the  attempt  would  be  im- 
prudent, especially  if  tlu  nd  bo  not  well  set  in,  ns  the  currents  are  very  strong  and 
irregular.  I  have  observe  however,  that  in  this  part,  they  run  more  generally  to  the  N. 
U.  E  ,  nnd  between  the  twn  Gouaves. 

Small  vessels,  drawing  8  or  9  feet  of  water,  r  find  a  good  anchornge  to  the  west  of 
the  Little  Gonave,  which  .nay  be  best  entered  from  the  southward. 

The  N.  E.  point  of  Gonave,  called  Galet  Point,  is  low,  and  bordered  with  n  reef,  which 
stretches  along  the  east  coast,  towards  the  south,  and  extends  1100  toises,  (1170  English 
fathoms,)  opposite  the  place  called  Trou  a  1" Eau,  or  Water  Hole:  within  id  a  white  i 

ground,  where  there  ai'e  from  4  to  6  fathoms  of  water.  * 

To  sail  near  this  reef,  which  every  vessel  can  do  that  draws  9  or  10  feet,  you  must,  in 
coming  from  the  east,  take  a  channel  which  is  opposite  to  a  fisherman's  hut.  There  are 
several  other  channels,  which  are  easily  known  by  the  no.i-appoaranco  of  white  ground. 
About  88  fathoms  within  the  reef,  you  may  range  along  tho  coast  as  fur  as  Anse  a  Galot, 
or  Gnlet  Cove,  in  case  the  wind  should  fail.  There  is  anchorage  every  where ;  but 
the  places  to  be  preferred  are  Piron  Cove,  Consantin's  Hole,  and  especiidly  Galet  Cove, 
which  are  veiy  convenient ;  the  hold  is  good,  and  the  reels  sheltci-  you  from  the  swell  of 
the  sea. 

The  several  anchorages  on  the  north  coast,  for  boats  or  schooners,  are,  L'lslet  n  Marc, 
Grand  Lagoon,  and  Bahama  Channel,  where  you  are  equally  sheltered  ;  the  remainder 
ot"  the  coast  is  likewise  bordered  with  reefs,  but  they  are  very  near  the  shore,  and  you 
tind  there  no  anchorage. 

The  western  part  is  an  iron-bound  coast,  along  which  you  may  ran/ro  pretty  near;  but, 
it  is  not  so  from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Point-a-Retoures,  where  you  may  find  a  number  of 
small  detached  reefs,  almost  even  with  the  water.  Several  smidl  vessels  may  anchor  in 
that  pnit,  on  the  spot  named  Les  Baleines,  or  the  Whales,  but  not  without  a  pilot  well 
iicqunhited. 

The  only  place  where  tw^  or  three  large  ships,  such  as  frigates,  can  anchor,  is  La  Baie 
ilu  Pare,  o'  Park  Bay,  which  lies  to  the  N.  W.  of  Point  Fantnsque,  the  south  point  of 
the  islr.riJ ;  but  coming  into  it  is  dangeious,  on  account  of  several  detatched  reefs,  which 
iire  never  seen. 

ROCHE  LOIS. — The  reef  called  Rochelois  had  been  fatal  to  many  ships,  and  was  Rockelois. 
still  much  feared  by  navigators,  its  true  situation  having  never  been  well  ascertained  :  it 
lies  in  the  channel  which  separates  the  south  coast  of  the  Gonave  from  that  of  Hayti. 
M.  Le  Compte  de  la  Luzerne  ordered  me  to  survey,  and  determine  the  position  of  that 
reef.  I  went  and  anchored  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  rocks,  which  aro  above  water : 
1  landed  on  these  rocks,  where  I  took  four  observations  of  latitude,  as  well  as  the  bearing 
of  all  the  objects  in  sight ;  and,  having  measured  the  whole  extent  of  t^')  shoal,  I  found  its 
breadth  to  be  2000  toises,  (2130  fathoms,)  in  a  direction  N.  and  S.,  iioarly,  and  its  length 
:il.55  toises,  (33G0  fathoms,)  from  E.  to  W. 

The  rocks,  called  Pirogues,  which  are  towards  tlie  middle  of  this  reef,  were  already 
known  ;  I  found  their  extent  to  be  125  toises,  (133  fathoms  ;)  they  are  quite  uncovered 
at  low  tide,  but  three  heads  only  are  perceived  at  high  water.  M.  Le  Compte  de  Oias- 
tenet  Puysegur,  who  had  occasion  to  explore  the  extent  of  this  reef,  says,  in  his  ac- 
"ount  of  the  navigation  along  the  coast  of  St.  Domingo,  that  the  rocks,  which  show 
tliemselves  at  low  water,  are  the  cnly  things  to  be  feared  on  the  Rochelois  :  but  I  have 
found  two  other  shoals  of  very  small  extent,  which  are  very  dangerous,  since  they  have 
wilj-  two  fathoms  water.  They  lie  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  rocks  in  the  middle,  one  at  800 
toises  distance,  and  the  other  at  300.  There  may  be  some  other  dangers  on  the  Roche  ■ 
lois,  but  T  could  not  make  myself  sure  of  it,  having  been  only  four  days  on  that  expe  i- 
tion.  Prudence  requires  tliav,  \vitli  a  large  ship,  you  should  avoid  it  entirely  :  there  is 
more  room  for  tacking  to  the  north  of  that  roof  than  to  the  southward  of  it :  you  are  otdy 
to  keep  at  the  distance  of  one  mile,  at  least,  from  Gonave,  if  you  pass  by  the  north; 
whereas,  in  passing  by  the  south,  you  iiay  range  along  the  Hay ticu  coast,  which  is  clear 
ai.J  safe. 

The  latitude  of  the  middle  of  the  Rochelois,  deduced  from  the  four  observations,  is 
18°  ."7'  20"  N. 

This  reef  has  bee  .  surveyed  by  Com.  R.  Owen,  and  is  placed  upon  E.  &  G.  W. 
Rl':nt'a  charts,  on  liia  authority.  Mr.  George  W.  Reed,  of  Miragone,  in  February,  1845, 
iilso  examined  it. 

PORT  AU  PRINCE,  to  the  WESTWARD.— On  leaving  Port  an  Prince,  when    Port  au 
bound  to  Petite  Goave,  you  may  range  along  the  south  coast,  at  the  distance  of  one  or    Prince. 
two  miles,  all  the  shores  being  bold  and  safe,  as  far  as  Point  Leogane. 

From  Point  Lamentin  to  Leogane  Point,  there  is  no  anchorage ;  but  you  will  find  a 
sood  bottom  for  anchoring  between  the  latter  point  and  the  anchorage  off  the  town  of 


V: 


wm 


mmm 


36S  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

From  Leognne,  the  coast  trends  to  the  south,  and  forms  the  Bay  of  Gnind  Goiivoanj 
Petite  Goiive,  whicli  are  separated  by  a  point  and  a  hill,  named  the  Tapion,  or  Hum. 
mock  of  Goave.  You  enter  into  Petite  Goavo  Bay,  by  leaving  on  the  larboanl  hnnj 
an  islet  which  is  very  near  the  coast,  and  which  lies  to  the  north  of  the  town;  to  the 
westward  of  this  ii-let  you  may  anchor  in  9,  12,  and  15  fathoms.  Petite  Goavo  ig  iq 
leagues  from  Portau  Prince;  but,  us  you  are  ibiced  to  double  Point  Looga!'  >,  the  run  i-i 
longer. 
Miragoanr.  MIRAGOANK. — From  the  Hummock  of  Petite  Goave  to  the  Tapion  du  T  )u  Chou- 
chou,  or  Hummock  of  Miragoano,  the  coast  runs  west,  oigiit  miles;  thence  W.  i  S,  six 
and  a  half  miles,  to  the  careening  island,  or  Miragoane  Buy. 
^'  For  a  stranger  bound  to  Miragoane,  and  olf  the  west  end  of  Gonave,  give  it  a  berth  of 

3  or  4  miles,  and  steer  E.  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  E. ;  or  keep  tlie  Gonave  side  of  the  chim- 
nel  best  on  board  to  clear  Rocholois.  Steer  up  in  the  same  way  until  the  highest  hum- 
mock on  Gonave  bears  north.  This  hummock  is  the  western  part  of  the  table  land  so 
called,  and  from  the  west  end  of  Gonave  appears  like  a  high  mountain.  When  this  high. 
est  land  bears  north,  steer  S.  or  S.  i  E.  for  Miragoane.  The  land  about  Miragoane  may 
be  known  by  a  remarkable  clearing  up  and  down  the  side  of  the  mountain,  presentin'" 
the  appearance  of  a  long  narrow  grass  field  scorched  by  the  sun.  This  is  G  or  7  miles  to 
the  east  of  the  town.  Continue  standing  in  for  this  mark  until  near  the  land,  when  tbo 
town  of  Miragoane  may  be  seen  to  the  westward. 

To  anchor  at  Miragoanj,  you  come  within  a  mile  of  the  careening  island,  when  you 
perceive  a  small  town  at  the  foot  of  a  niountain,  and  some  mangrove  islands  to  the  west- 
ward. You  keep  the  mid-channel,  between  tlie  first  islet  and  the  shore,  where  the  village 
is  situated,  and  come  to  an  anchor  witliin,  in  from  18  to  8  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  This 
anchorage  ought  not  to  be  taken  without  a  pilot;  the  channel  is  not  more  than  a  cable's 
length  in  width,  and  you  must  anchor  so  soon  as  you  are  within. 

From  Miragoano  Careening  Island,  jthe  coast  bends  in,  and  forma  the  bay  of  that  name, 
It  is  shut  in  on  the  north  by  Frigate  Island,  a  small  islet,  from  which  a  white  sboal  ex- 
tends half  a  league  to  the  eastward,  and  nearly  north,  to  the  anchorage  at  Mirn"oaDf; 
which  obliges  you,  in  coming  in  or  going  out;  to  keep  the  island  shore  very  close  alwarj, 
From  this  place  the  coast  trends  west,  to  the  village  of  Rocholois,  which  is  situated  attiu 
foot  of  a  largo  hummock. 

From  Miragoane  the  const  to  the  westward  is  clear  and  deep;  and  beycmd  Rocheloij, 
are  seen  the  towns  i  L'Ansoa-Veau  and  Petit  Trou.  From  the  last,  the  coast  forms  a 
large  bay,  Banidairos. 

BARADAIRES'  BAY. — From  the  village  of  Rochelois  to  the  entrance  of  tlio  Bay  of 
Baradaires,  tlie  coast  runs  W.  5  leagues.  Baradaires  Bay  is  formed  on  the  S.  E.  by 
Roili'Ifts  Point,  and  on  the  N.  W.  by  the  Bee  du  Marsouin,  or  the  Porpoise  Snout; 
these  points  bear  from  each  other  nearly  N.  VV.  and  .S.  E.,  four  miles.  Near  thoeiist 
coast  of  the  bay  there  is  an  island,  with  several  islets,  which  send  out  a  reef  and  shallow, 
that  almost  join  the  western  coast,  leaving  a  pass,  or  channel,  of  only  five  or  six  cables' 
lenglh  in  breadlh.  To  |)roce(!d  inio  tiie  bay,  you  keep  along  the  peninsula  of  the  Bee, 
and  come  info  from  8  to  10  fathoms.  There  ij  a  good  depth  of  water  in  the  miJdIeof 
the  bay,  which  is  of  great  extent;  but  there  are  several  weedy  shoals,  which  prevent 
yiiir  going  in  without  a  pilot,  well  acquainted. 
TheCay-  TIIK  CAYMITES,   etc.— Tiie  northern  extremity  of  the  Bee  do  Marsoun,  nnJ  'lie 

mites.  north  pi>i-t  of  (irand  Caymile  Isl.ind,  bear  nearly  \V.  N.  '\"'.  and  E.  S.  E.,  four  leagues. 

Th'i  coast  west  of  the  peninsula  of  the  Bee  bends  in  ;o  the  southward,  andfuniisa 
bight  ;  thence,  rounding  out  a  little.it  trends  W.  by  N.,  as  far  as  I'oini  .lerciuiio.  Tim 
bight  atid  tJreat  Cay  mile  Island,  form  a  large  bay,  called  Cay  mite  Bay,  where  there  is 
very  good  anchorage  for  all  sorts  of  vessels.  You  may  couk^  to  it  without  a  pilut,  and  an- 
chor under  ilui  island,  in  what  depth  you  (dioose.  You  may  also  ijrocecil  to  I'liinianlj 
Bay,  iKiar  tlu!  peninsula,  ranging  along  tlio  peninsula  side,  luid  anchor  opposite  a  siiD'lv 
beacii,  in  what  depth  you  please. 

The  bay  of  (Jayiriites  prc^sents  several  very  fine  iirudiorages,  very  easy  to  corneal  willi 
the  assistance!  of  the  lea(l  alune;  but  there  is  n(>t  a  good  passage  between  the  (InnidCiiy- 
mite  and  the  shore  ;  and  you  will  not  lind  mure  than  13  feet  water  upon  \.\u\  white  shoals 
of  the  I^iltle  Cayniite,  or  of  l'\incau(l  Islet ;  and  then  ther<!  are  several  coral  roe  ks,  which 
rise  within  two  or  thrtio  feet  of  the  surface  of  the  water,  so  that  n(j  vessel,  but  verysinal! 
ones,  ev(!r  attempt  it  without  a  pilot.  Tiieso  white  siioals  extend  3  leagues  W.  S.  W. 
from  the  (Iriind  Cay  mite. 
Jeremie.  .1 KKEMIH.  — Erom  the  north  part  of  the  Grand  Caymite  to  tho  I'oint,  Riviero  Salce, 

or  ('a()e  Rosa,  which  is  one  ami  a  half  li-ague  \V.  .\.  W  .  of  I'oint  .leie.iiie,  is  aiiieanJa 
half  leagues;  this  .Salt  River  I'oint  is  the  nortluirnmost  point  westwai  I  from  I'ortaii 
I'rince.  Uinlrr  I'oint  .Jeremie  is  tho  village  of  that  name,  whose  aiichnrage  is  vtiy  sniiill, 
and  not  proprr  for  large  ships;  schooners  and  small  vessels  may  anchor  within  the  reef, 
but  I'o  ships  which  draw  upwards  of  I'ior  I  I  feet  shmild  ever  anchor  hero,  exci^pl  incase 
of  necessity,  there  being  no  shelter  for  thei.i:  in  short,  it  is  a  bad  uuchorage,  which  must 
be  avoided  during  the  norths. 


BaraJa' 
Bay. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


369 


1  Goavo  and 
1.  or  Hum- 
•boar.  I  hand 
own;  to  the 
Goavo  is  10 
\  the  run  is 

T  -m  Ciiou- 
W.  4  S.,  six 

it  a  berth  of 
of  tho  chiin- 
li^liust  hum- 
tal)lo  land,  so 
ion  tiiishigh- 
ragoane  may 
u,  presenting 

or  7  miles  to    I 
lid,  when  tbo 

id,  when  you 
to  tho  west- 
are  the  village 
lottoni.  This 
than  a  cable's 

of  that  name, 
lite  shoal  ex- 
iit  Mirai^uanc ; 
•  close  aboard, 
siiuatedattlit 

ind  Rochelois, 
D  coast  foniis  a 

\  of  tho  Bay  of 

tho  S.  E.  by 

poise  Snout; 

Near  tho  east 

af  ami  shallow. 

ir  six  cables' 

I  of  the  Bee, 

tho  middle  of 

liich  prevent 

rsnuii,  and  'he 
)ur  leas;ues. 
I,  and  forms  a 
;(nMnio,    Tbij 
li(M'e  there ij 
pilot,  and  an- 
te) I'liiniaiifi'! 
iposito  a  siiiiily 

n  ('OHIO  at  with 
he,  (InindCiiy- 

((  white  sbiiali 
al  roclis  whicli 

hut  very  small  ] 
uos  W.'S.  W. 

lliviero  Salce, 
e,  is  iiiiiB  iiiiJii  ' 
1  from  I'ort  an 
is  vi-ry  small. 
within  the  reel', 
,ox(H^|)l  iuciSB 

e,  which  must  I 


From  Cape  Rosa,  or  Salt  River  Point,  to  Cape  Dame  Marie,  or  Donna  Maria,  the 
coast  trends  W.  S.  W.,  13  miles. 

All  this  shore  is  safe  and  bold  within  a  quarter  of  a  league ;  it  does  not  present  any 
shelter,  although,  in  case  of  necessity,  you  might  anchor  in  the  Anse  a  Claire,  or  Clair 
gay,  which  is  li  league  from  Salt  River.  This  bay,  or  rather  cove,  is  so  very  small,  that 
tvfo  ships,  100  feet  long,  would  be  embarrassed  by  each  other:  it  can  only  serve  asa  shel- 
ter to  very  small  vessels,  and  is  easily  discovered  by  keeping  along  shore. 

CAPE  DAME  MARIE,  or  DONNA  MARIA.— So  soon  as  you  descry  Cape  Dame 
Marie,  by  the  false  cape  of  that  name,  and  are  half  a  league  distant  from  it,  you  will  strike 
soundings  of  from  15  to  18  fathoms,  and  may  range  along  this  cape,  at  the  distance  of  a 
quarter  of  a  league,  in  from  8  to  12  fathoms,  weedy  bottom. 

To  anchor  in  the  Bay  of  Dame  Marit,  you  must  keep  the  shore  on  board,  steering 
about  S.  E.,  tho  wind  being  generally  adverse;  and  with  your  lead  you  come  to  an  an- 
chor W.  N.  W.  of  a  large  white  tapion,  or  hummock,  on  which  stands  a  buttery,  and 
within  a  musket  shot  of  which  you  will  find  5  fathoms.  There  is  anchoring  bottom  all 
over  this  uay ;  a  mile  from  the  shore  you  will  have  from  4  to  6  fathoms,  and  at  2  miles, 
from  6  to  10.  You  will  be  sheltered  from  the  winds  between  the  north  and  south,  pass- 
ing by  the  east;  notwithstanding  which,  ships  that  lie  in  8  or  10  fathoms  will  feel  the 
swell,  if  there  is  a  fresh  breeze  without.  In  entering,  keep  about  half  a  mile  off,  but  not 
less,  in  order  (o  keep  clear  of  a  reef  which  extends  to  the  length  of  a  cable  and  a  half  to 
the  west  from  the  cape.  Preserve  this  distf.nce  from  the  coast  until  past  the  False 
Cape,  to  *^""  southward  of  Cape  Dame  Marie,  and  which  is  also  foul.  When  once  past 
False  Cape,  you  may  haul  to  the  wind,  which  is  generally  scant  in  the  bay,  to  get  the 
vessel's  head  to  S.  £.,  with  which  course,  and  keeping  the  load  going,  you  may  gain  the 
anchorage  as  above. 

From  Cape  Dame  Marie  the  coast  runs  S.  by  W.,  5  leagues,  to  Point  des  Irois,  and 
'orms,  at  that  distance,  several  bays  and  coves,  where  vessels  may  anchor.  In  general, 
/'iThc'e  may  run  in  along  this  coast  with  her  lead,  and  anchor  in  any  part,  there  being 
1,1  h,  or  any  danger  under  water,  the  ground  gradually  increasing  towards  the  shore. 
.  S.  by  W.  of  Cape  Dame  Marie,  24  leagues  distant,  and  about  half  a  league  off 
iVint  Ministre,  or  Minister  Point,  are  some  rocks,  called  Les  Baleines,  or  the  Whales. 
These  rocks  are  above  water,  and  surrounded  with  a  white  shoal,  which  does  not  extend 
more  than  half  a  cable's  length  from  them,  and  on  which  are  4  fatVioms.  A  ship  can  sail 
between  it  and  the  shore.  In  the  mid-channel  she  will  have  6  fathoms,  and  may  go  as 
close  as  she  pleases  to  take  them  on  the  off  side.     The  sea  always  breaks  on  this  shoal. 

One  league  to  the  S.  S.  E.  from  the  Whales  lies  Pierre  Joseph's  Islet,  where  a  con- 
voy may  anchor.  The  anchorage  is  very  good  and  easy,  and  large  ships  anchoi-  to  the  S. 
W.  of  the  islet. 

All  along  this  western  coast  you  have  ground  at  2  leagues  from  the  shore,  the  depth 
gradually  increasing  as  you  leave  the  land;  so  that,  in  general,  you  will  find  4  and  5  fath- 
oms, at  one  mile  distant;  10  or  12  at  2  miles,  and  regularly  from  15  to  17,  at  3  miles. 
When  you  get  into  30  fiithoms,  you  will  lose  soundings  suddenly. 

POINT  DES  IROIS,  or  IRISH  POINT,  as  the  English  sailors  call  it,  is  the 
westernmost  point  of  Hayti.  It  is  not  very  high,  though  reniarkable  from  a  small  hum- 
mock on  its  extremity,  which  appears  detached  from  the  coast,  and  mokes  like  on  island. 
This  point  forms  tho  north  part  of  the  Bay  des  Irois,  or  Irish  Bay.  You  may  range  very 
close  to  the  land  n  lu  north  side  of  tho  bay,  there  being  from  9  to  18  fathoms,  touching 
the  shore. 

Theancho...  .  .j  the  N.  W.  of  a  black  rock,  which  is  seen  a  little  way  to  the 
southward  o'  I  ;  r.vn.  It  is  in  from  9  to  10  fathoms,  shelly  ground.  You  may  anchor 
likewise  to  tii«  .  jir!,v/u''i  of  the  rocky  islet,  N.  N.  W.  of  a  small  hummock,  towards 
the  middle  of  the  u . v  'iMio  depth  is  here  from  8  to  9  fathoms,  sandy  and  muddy 
ground. 

The  bay  is  exposed  to  southerly  winds.  There  is  always  a  great  sea  within,  and  tho 
Debarcadaire,  or  landing  place,  is  of  course  a  bad  one.  It  is  situated  in  tho  eddy  of  the 
currents,  which  set  to  the  northward,  on  the  west  side,  and  to  the  S.  E.  on  the  east 
coast.  Besides,  the  sea  in  the  oiling  is  alternately  agitated  with  violence  by  the  N.  E. 
and  east  breezes,  which  prevail  on  the  west  coast,  and  by  the  S.  E.  winds  that  blow  on 
the  south  coast.  Irois  Bay  is  terminated  to  the  south  by  Cape  Cnrcasse,  which,  with 
Cap  a-Foux,  or  Fool's  Cape,  forms  a  large  roundish  point,  whose  end  is  at  Cape  Ti- 
buron. 

CAPE  '  '3UR0N. — Theso  three  capes,  seen  at  a  distance,  form  but  one,  which  is 
I  called  Oh;"'  ■  'i  ,.)uron,  and  is  very  easily  known  by  its  form  and  height.  It  is  a  large  moun- 
I  lam,  very  k'"!     whose  top  is  rounded  like  the  back  of  a  dosser,  or  French  band-basket, 

lid  comes  )^/  n^iinily  down  towards  the  sea. 

Cape  Tiburnn,  properly  speaking,  is  5  miles  S.  25°  E.  of  Irish  Point,  and  forms  the 
I  entraace  of  1  iburon  Buy,  which  is  to  the  eastward  of  it.     Its  situation  is  latitude  18°  19' 
25",  longitude  74°  27'  32".     You  will  get  no  ground  at  50  fathoms,  2  cables'  length  from 

24 


Cajie  Dame 
Marie,  or 
Donna  Ma 
ria. 


Point  Des 
Irois,  or 
Irish  Point. 


Cape  Tibu 
Ton. 


mi'm 


370  i  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

the  conBt,  between  Cnpe  Carcasse  and  very  near  Cape  Tiburon ;  but  off  the  latter,  at 
that  (listaiice,  you  will  have  from  24  to  30  fathoms,  and  a  little  farther  out,  quickly  logg 
soundings. 

On  the  north  shore  of  Tiburon  Bay,  the  water  is  deep  to  within  2  or  3  cables'  length 
of  the  rocks,  and  within  half  a  cable's  length  you  have  6  and  7  fathoms,  stiff  cluyish 
ground.  On  the  east  and  S.  E.  shores  you  have  4  and  4i  fathoms,  fine  muddy  ground 
within  R  cable's  length,  all  round.  The  edge  of  soundings  runs  as  the  buy  forms,  hnll'  a 
mile  from  its  head.  You  may  anchor  any  where  in  the  bay ;  but  bring  Point  Biiri;oj 
the  south  point,  (which  is  foul,)  S.  by  E.,  and  the  pitch  of  Cape  Tiburon  W.  N.  W.Ju 
*  4  or  5  fathoms.     From  that  to  6  or  9  is  very  good  ground.      Wooding  and  wiiteriiig  jn 

plenty.  You  may  either  land  your  casks,  and  roll  them  over  a  narrow  neck  of  land  into 
the  river,  or  fill  them  in  your  bouts  with  buckets. 

Directions  for  making  the  Island  Hayti,  and  its  different  Ports. 

■* 

[From  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas,  &c  ] 

i; 

If  a  vessel  is  bound  to  a  port  on  the  north  coast,  she  may,  as  we  have  already  shown, 
at  once  get  into  the  latitude  of  Cape  Cabron,  without  making  any  of  the  Curribbe  or 
Virgin  Islands.  By  this  she  will  go  clear  of  the  dangerous  Isle  of  Anegada,  and  be  sure 
of  not  getting  to  leeward  of  her  port  of  destination.  Having  made  Cape  Cabron,  no 
more  is  to  be  attended  to  than  to  follow  the  coast,  at  a  proper  distance  from  the  project- 
ing points,  and  without  getting  into  the  bays  it  forms,  until  approaching  your  destined 
port,  when  you  may  keep  so  near  to  the  coast,  to  windwarJ  of  it,  as  to  make  sure  not  to 
pass  it.  If  bound  to  t,  i  o^-t  on  the  south  coast,  it  is  proper  to  make  the  Island  of  St. 
Bartholomew,  passing  is  ?  li  "ide,  and  run  down  by  the  south  of  Porto  Rico,  to  mnke 
the  Island  of  Saona,  if  yo  >>  'und  to  the  harbor  of  St.  Domingo,  or  to  Ocoa  Bay;  hia 

if  not,  you  may  proceed  at  to  make  Beata  and  Altavela,  passing  to  the  south  of  tlieni, 

and  so  directing  yourself  as  to  approach  the  coast  to  windward  of  your  port  of  destina- 
tion, in  sufficient  time  to  be  certain  of  not  overrunning  it.  Those  bound  direct  forlmrborj 
on  the  west  end  of  the  island,  ought  to  make  the  north  side  in  the  rainy  season,  or  season 
of  the  souths,  and  the  south  side  in  the  dry  season,  or  that  of  the  norths :  thus  they  free 
themselves  from  the  dangers  and  anxieties  wliich  the  souths  cause,  in  the  first  instance, 
and  which  the  norths  cause  in  the  second;  for  it  is  well  known  to  every  seaman,  that  not 
only  is  an  off-shore  wind  not  dangerous,  but  that  it  allows  of  continuing  your  voyage;  for, 
though  it  may  blow  very  hard,  it  can  raise  no  sea,  and  you  can  regulate  the  sail  accurdini' 
to  circumstances. 

In  navigating  from  leeward  to  windward,  this  island  affords  thi;  very  great  advantage 
of  land  breezes.  It  is  well  known  that  the  nearer  you  are  to  the  land,  the  fresher  these 
winds  are,  and  therefore  the  further  you  can  run  with  them  :  thus,  in  this  case,  it  answers 
to  keep  as  near  along  shore  as  you  can,  which  is  sufficiently  easy,  and  keeping  in  minJ 
the  particular  description  of  it,  you  need  not  fear. 

If  it  be  a  matter  of  indifference  to  you,  whether  you  beat  up  the  north  or  south 
you  ought  to  choose  the  first  in  the  season  of  the  souths,  and  the  second  in  the  sensimofl 
tlie  norths;  and  this  is  the  more  requisite,  as  when  you  are  running  from  windward  to 
leeward,  you  h  ive  not  the  sumo  necessity  to  keep  near  land,  as  when  bound  from  leewnnl 
to  windward;  and  it  is  very  certain  that,  in  the  latter  case,  if  either  a  north  or  so 
catch  you,  when  very  close  on  their  respective  coasts,  fatal  consequences  may  ensue;  but  I 
if  it  be  not  a  matter  of  indifference  to  you  which  side  you  work  to  windward  on,  ortliatj 
you  must  of  necessity  take  ono  in  preference  to  the  other,  notwithstanding  the  obstnclej, 
the  risk,  at  greatest,  is  not  such  as  ought  to  thwart  a  navigator  from  this  track,  who  knuwj  I 
thai  in  proportion  to  his  difficulty  must  bo  his  vigilance  and  activity. 

Relative  to  the  currents  which  may  be  found  along  the  shores  of  Hayti,  we  mny 
that  their  effects  may  be  looked  upon  us  inconsiderable.  Some,  however,  allirniamij 
suppose,  that  there  are  currents  of  a  m'lU^  an  hour  setting  to  the  westward ;  hut,  forour- 
selves,  we  can  oidy  say,  that  we  have  no  foundation  for  such  an  assertion,  but  ratlierhaie| 
grounds  for  thinking  them  of  littlo  importance. 

The  Windward  Channel  between  Hayti  and  Jamaica. 

By  the  Windward  Channel  is  meant  that  channel  which  lies  between  Hayti  on  tbel 
one  side,  and  Cui)a  and  Jamaica  on  iIk;  other.  The  coasts  which  form  it  on  the  east] 
and  north  have  already  been  described,  and  the  coastsof  .lamaica are  described  hereafter.l 
The  breadth  of  the  channel  between  Cape  Tiburon,  in  Hayti,  and  Morant  Point,  tliel 
eastern  end  of  Jamaica,  is  31  leugues,  in  a  W.  S.  \V.  direction;  and  to  the  northward ofl 
this  line  is  the  little  isle  called  Navaza,  and  a  dangerous  shoal  bank,  culled  that  of  the! 
Formigas;  to  the  southward  is  a  bank  of  soundings,  but  clear  of  dangers,  and  the  Moraall 
Keys,  with  their  surrounding  bank.  These  we  shall  describe  in  order. 
Navaza.  NAVAZA  is  about  2  miles  in  length,  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.,  and  about  U  i 

broad  at  its  widest  part.     It  was  surveyed  in  1803  by  Mr.  Francis  Owen,  Master,  K.N.i| 


fflotio  heigl 
the  deck  of  i 
pendicular  cl 
surfnce  of  th 
the  westwar 
Id  every  othi 
iouthera  side 
fourths  of  a  i 
the  north  sid( 
crossing  this 
will  have  34, : 
75  fathoms. 
&  fathoms. 
a  little  more  f 
tiio  shore.     1 
cod  and  red  sr 
taukof  fine  \^ 
with  tlie  follov 
Dame  Marie, 
From  Nava: 
14  leagues. 
From  Cape 
lad  distance  ar 
byW.  J  W.,  ; 
THE  FOR 
nearly  9  miles 
the  westward  i 
Point,  Jamaica 
by  W.,  38  mil: 
than  13  or  14  f 
great  swell  upo 
thorns,  there  wi 
On  the  eastern 
westward  the  w 
The  centre  o 
orer  Plantain  ( 
W.  by  S.,  leads 
THE  MOR. 
E.  from  the  eas 
crescent,  and 
Sand  Key,  Savi 
of  any  of  them. 
keys  lie  betwee 
anchoring  grouti 
Key  a  berth  of 
it,  and  you  will 
from  the  N.  E. 
Key  bears  E.  bv 
Ihe  S.  W.  Key" 
5  to  6  fathoms, 
tain  that  the  boti 
These  keys  a: 
•Morant,  Jumuict 
4  miles,  there  ai 
gravel.    With  tl 
W^.iW..(imih 
III  order  to  as( 
Point,  or  the  eu 
otiicr  N.  W.  i  . 
pfl".  is  to  be  see 
of  the  keys. 
I  "l8o,  when  co 
iner  noticed,  to  i 
|»estward. 
Be  very  cautio 
le  current. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


371 


wbo  Bays,  "This  island  is  a  flat  level  rock,  apparently  of  volcanic  origin,  is  above  300 
feet  in  height,  and  covered  wdth  small  shrubs.  It  may  be  seen  on  a  clear  day  from 
the  deck  of  a  line-of-battle  ship,  about  7  leagues.  Every  part  thereof  shows  a  rocky  per- 
pendicular cliff,  except  a  small  space  on  the  northern  side,  which  is  but  little  above  the 
surface  of  tlie  sea.  From  the  western  extremity  of  the  island,  a  coral  reef  stretches  to 
(lie  westward  about  100  fathoms,  on  which  are  only  27  feet,  with  15  fathoms  all  round  it. 
In  every  other  part  there  nro  12  fathoms  water  close  to  the  shore.  On  the  western  and 
southern  sides,  soundings  from  16  to  40  fathoms,  sand,  extend  to  the  distance  of  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile,  on  which  you  may  anchor  and  lie  smooth  in  a  strong  sea  breeze.  On 
the  north  side  the  bottom  is  rocky,  and  the  bank  does  not  extend  beyond  half  a  mile.  In 
crossing  this  island,  on  its  eastern  side,  at  the  distance  of  about  one-third  of  a  mile,  you 
will  have  34,  25,  and  18  fathoms ;  and  at  h'llf  a  mile,  38,  and  soon  after  no  gi'ound,  with 
;5  fathoms.  At  the  distance  of  li  mile  from  the  east  end.  no  bottom  will  be  found  with 
•230f«thoms.  The  N.  W.  end  bearing  N.  or  N.  by  E.,  and  the  .S.  E.  point  E.  S.  E.,  or 
8  little  more  southerly,  you  may  anchor  in  16  fathoms,  fine  sand  about  half  a  mile  from 
tho  sliore.  There  are  great  quantities  of  sea  fowls  on  the  island ;  and  round  the  rocks, 
cod  and  red  snappers  in  abundance.  Between  Navaza  and  Cape  Tiburon  there  is  a  small 
bank  of  fine  white  sand,  with  plenty  of  fish  thereon.  The  depth  is  from  14  to  16  fathoms, 
with  tlie  following  bearings :  Navaza,  W.  i  S.;  Cape  Tiburon,  E.  S.  E.  i  E.;  and  Cape 
Diiitie  Marie,  N.  E.  i  E.,  by  compass. 

From  Navaza  to  Cape  Dame  Marie,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 
14  leagues. 

From  Cape  Tiburon  to  Morant  Point,  which  is  tho  east  end  of  Jamaica,  the  beai-ing 
i  sod  distance  are  W.  S.  W  i  W.,  34i  leagues ;  and  from  Navaza  to  tho  same  point,  S.  W. 
byW.  i  W.,  23  leagues. 

THE  FORMKi AS,  or  ANTS,  are  some  dangerous  coral  spots  upon  a  sand-bank, 
pearly  9  miles  in  length,  extending  in  a  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  direction,  about  10  leagues  to 
the  westward  from  Navaza.  Its  eastern  part  bears  N.  E.  by  N.,  40  miles  from  Morant 
Point,  Jamaica ;  and  from  the  body  of  the  shoal,  the  N.  E.  end  of  Jamaica  bears  S.  W. 
by  W.,  38  miles.  The  eastern  part  is  the  shoalest,  not  ^having,  in  some  places,  more 
thttB  13  or  14  feet  of  water.  The  edge  here  is  nearly  steep  to,  and  there  is  generally  a 
great  swell  upon  it.  In  standing  over  the  bank,  when  the  depth  increases  to  7  or  7i  fa- 
thoms, there  will  be  a  sudden  increase  to  13  and  15  fathoms,  and  thence  no  bottom  at  20. 
I  On  the  eastern  edge  the  bottom  is  dark,  and  not  easily  seen  in  hazy  weather ;  but  to  the 
I  westward  tho  water  is  discolored,  and  appears  lighter. 

The  centre  of  the  bank  is  about  18°  30'  N.,  and  75°  40'  W.     The  fall  of  the  high  land 
I  over  Plantain  Garden  River,  which  is  the  easternmost  high  land  on  Jamaica,  bearing  S. 
W.  by  S.,  leads  directly  on  the  bank. 

THE  MORANT  KEYS.— These  keys,  which  lie  at  the  distance  of  32  miles  S.  S. 

E.from  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  consist  of  four  low  islets  or  kej's,  situate  in  form  of  a 

crescent,  and  are  surroun'led  by  a  dangerous  reef.     They  are  distinguished  by  N.  E.  Key, 

Sand  Key,  Savanna  or  Bird  Key,  and  S.  W.  Key.      You  may  approach  within  2i  miles 

of  any  of  them.     The  reef  on  tho  eastern  side  is  a  most  dangerous  ledge  of  coral.    The 

keys  lie  between  lat.  17°  24'  and  17°  28',  long.  75°  55'.     To  the  N.  W.  of  them  is  good 

lancboring  ground,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  white  sand  and  shells.     To  anchor,  give  the  N.  E. 

IKeya  berth  of  li  or  2  miles ;  and  when  tho  S.  W.  Key  bears  S.  by  E.,  steer  directly  for 

lit,  and  you  will  pass  close  to  westward  of  the  rocky  spit,  that  extends  to  the  westward 

Ifrorathe  N.  E.  Key,  and  has  but  little  more  than  3  fathoms  over  it.     When  the  N.  E. 

JKey  bears  E.  by  N.,  or  E.  N.  E..  you  may  haul  more  to  the  eastward,  and  anchor  with 

Ithe  S.  VV.  Key  bearing  S.,  or  S.  by  W.,  and  Savanna  Key,  the  next  to  it,  S.  E.,  in  from 

Isto  6  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.    As  there  are  some  spots  of  coral,  it  is  requisite  to  ascer- 

Itain  that  the  bottom  be  clear. 

These  keys  are  only  7  or  9  feet  above  the  water.  Tho  body  of  them  lies  from  Port 
iMorant,  Jamaica,  S.  S.  E.,  i  K.,  about  11  leagues.  With  tho  keys  bearing  S.  W.,  nearly 
14  miles,  there  are  about  18  fathoms  water,  stony  ground,  mixed  with  fine  red  speckled 
jgravel.  With  them  S.  W.  by  S.,  about  4  mil<>s,  there  are  IG  fathoms ;  and  when  S.  S. 
|W.i  W.,  ti  miles,  there  are  23  fiithoius,  with  ground  as  above. 

In  order  to  ascertain  when  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  the  keys,  observe  that  Morant 
iFoint,  or  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  and  the  north-east  end  of  the  same,  bear  from  each 
lotlior  N.  W.  i  N.  and  S.  E.  ^  S.,  so  that  when  the  north-east  end,  which  is  high  and 
IT,  is  to  be  seen  on  that  bearing,  or  to  the  westward  of  it,  you  will  be  to  the  eastward 
lof  the  keys. 

1  Also,  when  coming  in  from  tho  southward  for  Jamaica,  by  keeping  Yallah's  Hill,  here- 
kfler  noticed,  to  the  northward  of  N.  W.  i  N.,  you  will  pass  clear  of  the  keys  to  the 
|»estward. 

I  very  cautious  on  approaching  the  keys  iu  the  oigbt,  lest  you  be  driven  on  them  by 
He  current. 


The  Fonni- 
gat,  or  AnU. 


The  Morant 
Keys. 


372 


JLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Morant 

Point. 

Light. 


In  turning  between  the  Morant  Keys  and  the  enst  end  of  Jamnica,  there  is  a  good  8 
leagues  of  turning  ground;  and  as  it  seldom  happens  that  the  land  is  not  descried  before 
night,  its  bearings  may  direct  in  turning  or  sailing. 

Capt.  Mackeller  tells  us  that  the  cocoanut  trees  formerly  on  Morant  Keys  have  been 
cut  down  since  1816,  iind  there  is  not  a  shrub  of  any  kind  to  be  seen,  except  a  few  small 
cocoanut  bushes  on  the  N.  £.  Key.  Very  great  care  should  be  taken  in  approachiog 
the  N.  E.  Key,  on  either  side,  as  it  is  foul  to  a  great  distance  off;  and  vessels  intendin? 
to  anchor  at  the  keys,  ought  not  to  come  on  the  white  water  at  all,  that  is,  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  N.  E.  Key,  until  they  are  far  enough  to  the  southward  to  have  the  south 
part  of  the  N.  E.  Key  bearing  E.  by  N. ;  they  may  then  haul  up  to  the  eastward  of  Sa- 
vanna, or  Bird  Rey ;  and  when  it  bears  S.  E.,  and  the  S.  W.  Key  S.,  or  S.  i  W.,  anchor 
in  5  or  6  fathoms.  If  it  is  necessary  to  work  up  to  this  anchorage,  with  the  wind  east 
you  may  stand  to  the  S.  W.  Key,  by  your  leod,  not  going  nearer  than  5  or  6  fathoms;  but 
the  reef  off  the  N.  E.  Key  is  steep  to,  and  you  will  have  6  [fathoms  at  one  cast,  and  the 
next  3,  or  perhaps  less ;  therefore,  in  working  up,  keep  the  point  of  the  N.  E.  Key  al- 
ways to  the  northward  of  E.  by  N.,  after  you  are  in  the  white  water. 

Directions  for  the  Windward  Passages,  which  is  ihe  principal  channel  to  the  norlh-east- 
ward  of  Jamaica,  including  those  for  sailing  to  and  from  Jamaica,  and  thence  to  Ntw 
Providence,  Havana,  Europe,  Sfc. 

Ships  from  Europe,  when  bound  to  Jamaica,  generally  take  the  broad  and  safe  chan- 
nel between  the  islands  and  Gaudaloupe,  but  they  may  pass  it  with  equal  safety  between 
St.  Bartholomews  and  Saba,  or  St.  Eustatins,  and  thence  make  the  parallel  of  17°  oq/ 
to  the  southward  of  Hay  ti,  or  on  the  meridian  of  70'^  W.  When  thus  far  advanced  they  j 
may  continue  W.  i  S.,  until  they  make  Altavela,  or  the  Little  Mount,  which  lies  off  the 
southern  point  of  Hayti,  as  already  described.  They  R'ill  thus  avoid  the  dangers  in  | 
the  vicinity  of  Neiva  Bay,  towards  which  there  is  frequently  an  indraught,  as  before 
noticed. 

Should  you  happen  to  miss  Altavela,  you  may  probably  make  the  land  of  Jacquemel,  j 
or  Jacmel,  before  described  ;  or,  if  not,  with  the  next  great  promontory,  of  which  Point 
Abacou  and  Point  a  Gravois  are  the  extremities.    Jacquemel  may,  as  already  shown,  be  j 
distinguished  from  sea  by  the  sudden  cut-off  or  drop  of  a  hill,  seen  over  nnotlier  long  t 
at  the  upper  part  of  the  harbor.     This  murk  leads  directly  to  the  harbor's  mouth. 

The  Isle  a  Vache  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Abacou,  and  forms  the  channel  to  Aui  I 
Cayes,  &c.  From  Altavela  to  the  east  end  of  the  Isle  a  Vache,  the  bearing  and  distance  I 
are  W.  by  N.,  42i  leagues.  From  the  east  end  of  the  Isle  a  Vache  to  Point  Abacou," 
W.  by  S.,  14  miles;  thenco  to  Point  a  Gravois,  W.  J  S.,  2i  leagues. 

When  off  at  sea,  abreast  of  the  Isle  a  Vache,  the  middle  of  a  saddle  mountain overl 
Port  St.  Louis  bears  nearly  N.  by  E.,  and  then  the  eastern  end  of  a  Vache  is  bet\veenl 
it  and  the  ship.  The  island  is  low,  though  hilly,  and  lies  so  under  the  land  of  the  maio,  I 
that  it  is  not  distinguishable  f'-ora  it  at  uny  considerable  distance.  At  6  leagues  off  itapf 
]]ears,  as  already  said,  like  au  assemblage  of  small  islands.  The  water  towards  it  g 
ens  gradually. 

The  saddle  mountains  over  St.  Louis,  which  are  called  the  Grand  Anse  Mountains, nre| 
the  second  high  mnge  from  the  west  end  of  Hayti.  The  westernmost,  which  is  t 
highest,  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  30  or  40  leagues  off,  on  both  sides  of  the  islandj 
Observe,  however,  that  after  noon  the  exhalation  of  vapor  is  sometimes  so  great  aslol 
render  them  invisible.  Be  cautious,  at  such  times,  of  making  the  land,  lest  you  run  ool 
the  dangers  of  the  Isle  a  Vuchw 

From  Point  a  Gravois  to  Cape  'ii.,  :ron,  the  bearing  and  distjince  are  N.  W.  by  W.jj 
W.,  13  leagues.  The  land  about  Cape  Tiburon  is  so  high  as  often  to  be  seen  ut  morel 
than  20  leagues  off. 

Morant  Point,  the  easternmost  extremity  of  Jamaica,  already  noticed,  bears  from  Poi 
a  Gravois,  W.  i  S.,  42  leagues;  and  from  Capo  Tiburon,  W.  S.  W.,  31  leagues. 

In  running  for  Jamaica,  from  the  west  end  of  Hayti,  or  the  Isle  of  Altavela,  be  caul 
tious  of  running  too  far  north,  lest  you  should  get  on  Morant  Point,  this  point  beiaj 
extremely  low.  In  thick  hazy  weather  it  may  possibly  bo  approached  so  near  as  tomakel 
it  difhcult  to  weather ;  the  wind  setting  right  on,  and  the  current  always  going  to  lemvarJ.I 
By  keeping  the  proper  parallel,  (17°  45',)  you  will  run  down  without  danger,  and  niatel 
Yallah's  Point,  off  which  you  are  sure  to  meet  with  pilots,  who  will  conduct  you  to  Porip 
Royal  Harbor,  if  required. 

Sailing  Directions  for  the  Coast  and  Harbors  of  Jamaica. 

MORANT  POINT. — On  this  point  there  is  a  revolving  light,  time  of  revolution  onJ 
minute.     The  tower  is  painted  white,  and  is  103  feet  above  the  lovel  of  the  sea.    m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


373 


centre  of  the  light  96  feet,  and  can  be  seen  in  clear  weather  21  miles.  Yallah's  Hill 
bears  from  the  lighthouse  W.- 1  S. ;  Nortb-East  Point  N.  W.  i  N. ;  and  the  Moraut 
veys  S.  S.  E.  i  E.,  33  miles  distant.     Latitude,  17"  56'  N.     Longitude,  76°  11'  W. 

MORANT  POINT  TO  KINGSTON— The  southernmost  high  land  of  Jamaica 
to  the  eastward  of  Port  Royal,  is  Yallah's  Hill,  which  is  very  remarkable.  The  middle 
of  this  hill  is  20  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Port  Royal  Point.  When  the  fall  of  this  hill 
bears  W.  i  N..  steering  W.  by  S.  will  carry  a  vessel  a  league  or  more  to  the  southward 
of  the  east  end  of  the  island,  which  is  very  low.  The  latitude  at  noon  will  be  a  guide  ; 
for  when  Yallah's  Hill  bears  W.  h  N.,  11  or  12  leagues  distant,  the  ship  will  be  in  lat. 
170  50',  or  17"  51'. 

Should  you  make  the  southernmost  high  land,  bearing  W.  S.  W.,  9  or  10  leagues 
distant,  when  bound  to  the  south  side  of  the  island,  you  must  haul  up  S.  W.,  to  clear 
the  east  end,  which  will  not  be  in  sight  at  a  greater  distance  than  4  leagues ;  and  observe, 
ilso,  that  a  current  frequently  sets  to  the  northward  around  this  end  of  the  island. 

From  off  Morant  Point,  or  the  east  end  of  Jamaica,  when  bound  to  Port  Royal,  ships 
ghoald  keep  at  a  distance  of  4  miles  from  shore,  until  past  Morant  Bay,  as  the  coast  from 
the  east  end  to  the  southward  of  Rocky  Point  is  lined  with  a  reef  that  stretches  nearly  2 
miles  outward,  and  over  a  part  of  which  the  sea  generally  breaks. 

To  the  westward  from  Rocky  Point  the  coast  continues  rocky  to  about  one  mile 
from  the  shore,  as  far  as  Morant  Bay ;  it  is  then  clear  to  the  white  cliffs  called  the  White 
Horses,  off  which  there  are  some  rocks,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  shore. 

From  the  White  Horses  to  Yallah's  Point,  the  distance  is  one  league.  In  running 
down,  whon  the  former  bear  north,  and  Yallah's  Point  west,  you  will  have  soundings, 
and  frequently  see  the  bottom  in  7^,8,  9,  and  10  fathoms;  and  on  approaching  Yallah's 
Point,  the  water  will  be  found  to  deepen  until  you  lose  soundings. 

From  Yallah's  Point  to  Cow  Bay  Point  there  is  no  danger;  the  latter  is  bold  to,  as 
well  as  all  the  coast  to  the  '.v^stward,  as  far  as  Plum  Point.  The  course  and  distance 
between  the  two  Points  are  W.  by  N.,  8  miles;  but  sLould  you  be  3  or  4  miles  from  Cow 
Bay  Point,  you  must  stt  er  more  to  thu  northwrd. 

Plum  Point  is  the  south-east  point  of  the  Palisadoes ;  you  may  run  in  boldly  for  it,  and 
approach  its  extremity  within  half  a  cable's  length,  having  nothing  to  fear  until  abreast 
ofit,  or  between  it  and  the  Middle  Ground,  in  the  entrance  of  the  eastern  channel  to 
Port  Royal. 

When  you  have  brought  Rock  Fort  N.  by  E.,  you  will  come  on  a  cross  ledge  without 
the  entrance  of  the  channel,  and  must  then  bring  the  leading  mark  on,  which  is  the  north 
part  of  the  Apostle's  Battery  and  the  magazine  of  Fort  Charles  in  a  line.  This  mark  is 
to  be  kept  on  until  you  are  abreast  of  Lime  Key.  When  thus  far  advanced,  steer  a  little 
to  the  southward  towards  Rackham  Key,  giving  Lime  Key  a  good  berth,  until  Port 
Royal  Point  comes  open  between  Gun  Key  and  Rackham  Key.  Now  steer  in  mid- 
channel  between  these  keys,  and  immediately  after  passing  them,  proceed  directly 
towards  Port  Royal  Point,  till  you  bring  the  fall  of  Yallah's  Hill  on  the  centre  of  Gun 
Key,  which  will  bring  you  between  the  Knoll  and  Port  Royal  Point;  you  may  approach 
the  point  within  half  a  cable's  length,  and  by  sailing  close  to  it,  you  will  also  pass  between 
it  and  the  Harbor  Knoll,  which  lies  to  the  westward  about  the  length  of  a  cable  and  a 
half,  with  19  feet  on  it. 

Having  passed  the  point,  steer  to  the  northward  till  the  Admiral's  Penn  comes  to  the 
north  of  Gallows  Point.  This  mark  leads  you  clear  of  Old  Port  Royal,  where  you  may 
I  anchor  abreast  of  the  Dock  Yard,  or  even  before  you  come  to  it.  With  a  land  or  north 
vind,  the  channel  between  Gun  Key  and  Port  Royal  is  to  be  prefoiTed  :  then  the 
Twelve  Apostles'  Buttery  on  the  south  angle  of  Fort  Charles  loads  you  clear  of  Gun  Key 
Reef. 

Strangers,  in  case  of  necessity,  may  pilot  their  ships  down  to  the  anchorage  in  the 
I  channel,  even  when  the  marks  are  not  to  be  seen,  as  nothing  is  to  be  feared  on  the  side 
of  the  Palisadoes,  which  is  low  and  bushy.     They  must  only  keep  within  half  or  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  Plum  Point,  and  steer  down  by  the  Palisadoes,  till  they  bring 
I  Lime  Key  to  bear  S.  S.  E.,  or  S.  E.  by  S.,  then  they  anchor  in  15,  16,  or  17  fathoms, 
I  near  the  middle  of  the  channel. 

SHOALS  IN  THE  EASTERN   CHANNEL  OF  PORT  ROYAL.— The  most 
I  remarkable  shoal  in  the  Eastern  Channel  is  the  Middle  Ground,  or  Eastern  Middle 
Ground,  which  lies  one  and  a  quarter  mile  S.  S.  W.from  Plum  Point;  it  consists  of  two 
patches,  rocky  bottom  ;  the  east  patch  having  12  feet,  and  the  west  patch  (about  70  fath- 
oms to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  the  other)  having  9  feet ;  they  are  divided  by  a  narrow  swash, 
1 10  fathoms  deep,  ond  both  break  with  strong  sea  breezes. 

A  beacon,  with  a  small  triangle,  about  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  has  been 
I  erected  on  the  Palisadoes,  between  Great  and  Little  Plum  Points.     When  bearing  N. 
lb}  W.,  by  compass,  or  in  one  with  Kingston  Church,  it  will  lead  clear  to  the  eastward  of 
I  the  East  Middle  Ground. 
You  may  sail  within  the  Middle  Ground,  or  without  it  to  the  southward,  as  necessity 


Morant 
Point  to 
Kingtion. 


Shoals  in  tlie 
Eastern 
Channel  of 
Port  Royal. 


Beacon. 


374 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


requires  :  but  to  the  northward  is  the  best  and  aafest  channel.     The  soundings  in  that 
channel  are  uneven,  from  7  to  19  or  20  fathoms;  but  when  you  aro  past  tho  Mildle 
**  Ground  they  iire  regular,  from  19  to  13  fathoms,  between  Rncltham  and  Gun  Keys. 

The  first  key  you  meet  with,  in  steering  from  the  Middle  Ground  towards  Port  Royal 
is  Lime  Key,  from  the  north  end  of  which  a  reef  stretches  about  a  cable's  length  ;  your 
eye  is  the  best  mark  for  it,  as  it  is  generally  seen ;  to  the  westward  of  the  key  lies  anotlier 
shoal,  with  8  or  10  feet  upon  it. 

The  Knoll  off  Fort  Royal  Point  is  the  third  shoal ;  it  is  a  small  hard  coral  bank  to  the 
southward  of  the  point,  with  only  16  feet  water  upon  it.  If  your  ship  draw  12  or  13  feet 
water,  you  must  be  careful  to  keep  clear  of  it. 

To  go  within  the  Knoll,  the  loading  mark  is  to  bring  the  highest  bush  on  Gun  Key 
(which  is  neai'  the  middle  of  it)  in  one  with  Ynllnh's  Point ;  you  have  then  10  fnthoms 
water,  and  tho  channel  is  70  fathoms  wide.  The  mark  to  strike  the  Knoll  is  the  south 
point  of  Gun  Key  on  the  high  hill  of  Yallah's,  or  a  ship's  length  open  of  Yallidi'H  Point' 
the  best  mark  is  the  church  on  tlie  seventh  or  eighth  embrasure  of  the  fort,  Sandy  Key 
just  open  with  Lime  Key,  and  you  will  have  16  or  17  feet  of  water. 

To  go  between  the  Knoll  and  the  Western  Middle  Ground,  which  lies  about  300  fiith- 
oms  to  the  south-westward  of  it,  the  leading  mark  is  Tnie  Land's  Hummock  within 
Yallah's,  on  the  southernmost  part  of  Gun  Key,  or  Yallah's  Point,  well  open  to  the 
northward  of  tlie  north  point  of  Rackham's  Key.  This  channel,  which  is  the  widest,  and 
has  12  fathoms  )f  water,  is  mostly  used  when  biken  with  the  land  wind. 

The  anchorage  is  good  all  over  Port  Royal  Harbor  :  but  the  best  anchoring  for  ships 

that  are  bound  for  sea,  is  in  9  fathoms,  with  a  notch  on  the  east  side  of  a  high  mountain 

called  the  Leading  Notch,  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Fort  Augusta,  and  Rackham 

Kev  in  one  with  Port  Royal  Point. 

South  Chan-       SOUTH  CHANNEL  OF  PORT  ROYAL — To  go  to  sea  from  Port  Royal,  you 

»el   rf   Fort   make  use  of  the  South,  or  the  New  Channel ;  the  small  craft  generally  go  through  the 

Royal'  East  Channel,  but  it  is  to  be  avoided  by  large  vessels,  unless  they  are  prime  sailors,  and 

have  a  strong  land  breeze  or  north,  with  an  appearance  of  its  lasting  long  enough  to  cniry 

them  through. 

When  bound  through  the  South  Channel,  you  should  get  under  way  with  the  land 
wind,  so  soon  in  the  morning  as  you  can  see  the  marks,  observing  that  the  current  then 
sets  most  commonly  to  the  westward.  The  general  leading  mark  is  the  Leading  Notch 
in  one  with  the  magazine  of  Fort  Augusta,  which  is  the  easternmost  building  of  the  fort. 
This  mark  lends  ships  of  16  or  17  feet  water  clear  through  ;  but  in  a  line-of-bnttio  ship, 
tlie  notch  should  be  kept  very  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine,  until  Hellshire 
Hummock  comes  open  with  Fort  Small. 

To  keep  well  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  be  careful  not  to  bring  the  church 
steeple  upon  the  corner  of  the  wall  with  embrasures,  until  Yallah's  Hill  is  brought  in  one 
with  Lime  Key.  In  case  j'ou  should  not  see  Yallah's  Hill  Point,  look  out  for  a  hummock 
on  Hellshire,  and  when  it  is  open  of  Salt  Pan  Hill,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the 
Middle  Ground. 

The  Middle  Ground  is  a  large  coral  bank,  which  often  breaks,  with  only  3  foot  on  it  in 
the  middle ;  the  north  and  west  sides  are  almost  steep.  On  its  N.  W.  edge  lies  a  buoy 
whose  marks  are,  Port  Royal  Tower  on  the  fourth  embrasure  of  Fort  Charles,  counting 
from  tho  westward,  and  Hellshir-   ^    nmock  on  the  flR-^-staffof  Fort  Small. 

When  you  have  opened  Hellsnirt    lummock  with  Fort  Small,  you  steer  out  with  the 
Lending  Notch  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine,  which  carries  you  between  the 
Drunken  Man's  Key,  the  Turtle  Heads,  and  the  South  Knoll ;  or,  to  avoid  these  heads, 
you  aro  to  haul  up  so  as  to  bring  the  church  steeple  to  the  easternmost  part  of  the  fort,  \ 
and  continue  to  keep  that  mark  until  the  South  Key  is  brought  on  with  Yalluh's  Point. 
Then  you  may  haul  to  the  westward,  if  the  wind  will  permit.     But  if  you  should  not  | 
keei>  up  the  lending  mark,  and  the  church  steeple  should  come  near  tho  corner  of  the  I 
foit,  you  must  then  come  to,  or  tack  and  stand  in.     Tho  mark,  when  ashore  on  tlie  Turtle 
Heads,  is  the  church  steeple  upon  the  magazine  of  the  fort,  and  Spanish  Town  Laud  JD$t  | 
open. 

When  Maiden  Key  is  open  a  ship's  length  to  the  southward  of  Drunken  Man's  Key,  I 
you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  South  Knolls,  and  should  bring  the  Leading  Notch  in 
n  line  with  the  magazine,  which  will  bring  you  close  to  tho  westward  of  the  Little  Por- 
tuguese, in  8  or  9  fathoms  :  when  Yallah's  Hill  comes  to  the  southward  of  South  Key,  I 
you  are  then  clear  of  the  Portuguese,  and  may  haul  to  the  S.  E.,  giving  South  Key  a 
berth  of  about  a  mile. 

Drunken  Man's  Key  is  a  narrow  ledge  of  rocks  just  above  water,  covered  with  sorae  I 
loose  sand,  that  gives  it  the  appearance  of  a  sand-bank.     To  the  southward  of  it,  about  bulf  | 
a  mile,  there  is  a  shoal  which  breaks  with  strong  sea  breezes ;  and  between  it  and  Drunk- 
en Man's  Key  is  a  channel,  having  6  or  7  fathoms  of  water. 

The  Turtle  Heads  are  three  dangerous  spo^s,  with  10  or  11  feet  of  water  on  their  | 
shoalest  part,  and  deep  water  close  to  them.    The  South  Knolls  to  the  S.  E.  of  these  i 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


376 


tretwo  bidhII  patches,  about  70  fnthoma  asunder,  with  23  feet  water  on  them.  And  to 
tlie  S.  Ity  W.  of  these  lies  One-Bush  Reef,  which  always  breal(s,  and  is  almost  steep  to. 
The  Three-Fathom  Bank  is  a  large  coral  shoal,  with  19  or  20  feet  of  water,  which  breaks 
with  strong  sea  breezes.  A  small  patch,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  S.  S.  E.  of  it, 
lias  '20  feet  of  water;  it  is  called  the  Warrior's  Bank,  from  the  British  ship  Warrior  hav- 
ing lost  her  rudder  there  in  1782. 

Tho  Little  Portuguese  is  the  southernmost  shoal  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  south  chan- 
Qel,    It  has  from  22  to  39  feet  water  over  it,  and  in  general  a  great  swell. 

When  Portland  makes  as  an  island,  open  about  three-quarters  of  a  point,  or  a  point, 
with  Hellsliire,  you  will  be  to  the  southward  of  the  Three-Fathom  Bank  and  Warrior. 

It  frequently  happens  that  the  land  breeze  fails  before  a  ship  can  get  clear  of  the  chan- 
pel;  and  there  is  sometimes  a  long  interval  of  calm  between  the  land  and  sea  breezes. 
Should  this  occur,  it  will  be  requisite  to  anchor  so  soon  as  the  breeze  fails,  or  there  will 
te  danger  of  being  set,  by  the  swell,  on  the  Three-Fathom  Bank,  or  One-Bush  Reef. 
By  inattention  to  this  precaution,  there  have  been  instances  of  ships  slipping  or  cut- 
tJDg  their  cables,  when  the  sea  breeze  has  come  on,  and  running  into  Port  Royal  to  save 
the  ship. 

The  best  anchorage  is  within  the  length  of  the  Little  Portuguese,  with  the  leading 
notch  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  magazine  of  Fort  Augusta.  Then,  if  the  wind 
chHiiges  southerly,  a  ship  may  easily  return  to  Port  Royal,  or,  with  the  common  sea 
breeze,  may  proceed  to  sea. 

When  cleor  of  the  channel,  if  bound  to  leeward,  you  may  steer  S.  by  W.,  or  not  far- 
ther to  westward  than  half  a  point  more  westerly,  in  order  to  avoid  some  shoal  spots  that 
lie  to  the  south-eastward  of  Wreck  Reef. 

Wreck  Reef  always  breaks.  This  d*inger  lies  about  a  mile,  or  little  more,  to  the  S.  E. 
from  Hellshire  Point,  and  is  about  a  mile  in  length  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.  There  is  a  chan- 
nel for  smnll  craft  between  it  and  Hellshire  Point.  About  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  the 
reef,  there  is  a  shoal  spot  of  3<l  fathoms,  with  7  fathoms  around  it. 

To  sail  tkrough  with  the  sea  breeze. — Shijjs  of  war,  or  those  that  sail  well,  may  safely 
proceed  to  sea  from  Port  Royal,  if  they  can  lay  S.  by  E.,  or  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  it, 
if  the  foregoing  precautions  be  strictly  attended  to.  When  through  the  channel,  sound- 
ings will  be  found  of  10  and  11  fathoms,  if  steering  S.  by  W.,  until  Portland  bears  W. 
N.W. 

The  shoals  in  generol,  when  the  sea  breeze  prevails,  may  be  distinctly  seen  from  the 
iimst-head.  They  appear  of  a  brownish  color,  being  covered  with  large  branches  of  coral. 
The  greatest  part  of  them  are  very  steep,  having  a  depth  of  several  fathoms  close  to  them. 
The  bottom  of  the  channels  between  is  mostly  soft  mud  or  clay. 

Ships  bound  to  windward  from  Port  Royal,  if  they  can  weather  the  Middle  Ground  by 
the  time  the  sea  breeze  comes  on,  may  pass  through  the  Eostern,  or  Windward  Channel, 
and  thus  they  may  gain  6  or  7  miles  more  to  windward  than  by  going  through  the  South 
Chaoael.  Small  sloop-rigged  vessels  generally  pass  this  way ;  but  to  others  it  is  hazard 
ous;  because,  if  the  land  breeze  fails,  with  an  interval  of  calm,  a  swell  may  come  on 
ahead,  and  be  extremely  dangerous. 

NEW  CHANNEL  OF  PORT  ROYAL — The  New  Channel  lies  to  the  eastward 
of  the  South  Channel,  and  almost  parallel  to  it ;  it  is  certainly  preferable,  on  many  ac- 
counts, to  the  South  Channel ;  it  has  smooth  water  till  you  come  to  South  Key,  with 
good  BDclioring  grou  nd,  easy  riding,  and  a  facility  of  going  to  sea  to  the  southward  with 
the  sea  breeze,  as  far  as  S.  E.,  ice. 

The  leading  mark  to  enter  this  channel,  is  a  remarkable  Hat  hummock  on  the  moun- 
tain to  the  N.  N.  W.  of  Port  Royal.  When  the  middle  of  this  hummock  is  in  a  direct 
line  with  the  white  house  standing  to  the  N.  W.  of  Fort  Augusta,  it  leads  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  harbor  and  Point  Knolls,  as  well  as  between  the  east  edge  of  the  Western 
Middle  Ground,  and  the  west  end  of  Rackham's  Key  Shoal.  Steer  with  these  marks  on 
till  a  remarkable  round  hillock,  to  tlie  westward  of  Stony  Hill  Barracks,  comes  open  to 
the  eastward  of  Gun  Key. 

After  you  have  opened  this  hummock,  you  steer  away  to  the  southward,  keeping  it 
open  till  a  saddle  in  the  mountains  to  the  N.  W.  comes  in  a  line  with  Fort  Small. 
Then  you  bring  the  same  hummock  on  the  centre,  or  west  edge  of  Gun  Key  ;  which 
marks  carry  you  to  the  westward  of  the  shoals  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel,  and  about 
aqunrter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  Great  Portuguese.  So  soon  as  Portland  ap- 
pears like  an  island,  you  may  haul  to  the  eastward,  being  clear  of  the  reef  and  shoals  of 
South  Key. 

The  shoals  in  this  channel  are,  1.  The  Western  Middle  Ground,  (on  the  east  side  of 
which  there  is  a  buoy,)  and  the  small  shoals  to  the  southward  of  this  ground. 

2.  The  Great  Bay  Shoal,  which  has  IG  feet  lF<\st  water,  and  a  flouting  beacon  in  18 
feet. 

3.  The  Four  Fathom  Knoll,  is  a  very  small  spot,  with  no  less  than  24  feet  water  on  it, 
aad  deep  water  all  around.     Ships  of  20  fiset  draft  may  sail  over  it,  as  the  water  is  smooth. 


New  Chan- 
nelof  PoU 
Royal. 


Lonir's 


W/iarf,  S^e. 


376        '     V  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Between  Great  Bny  ShoRl  and  South  Key  Breakers,  there  are  two  shoals;  the  north- 
ernmost, at  about  half  a  mile  S.  by  W.  from  the  former,  is  steep,  and  a  small  pnrtof  It 
appears  just  above  the  surface  of  the  water.  This  shoal  always  shows  itself  by  the  rip. 
pling  on  It.  About  half  way  between  this  and  the  breakers  lies  the  second  shoal,  havJDg 
only  16  feet  of  water.  ' 

The  South  Key  Breakers  have  a  buoy  upon  them.  The  marks  for  the  west  edge  of 
this  rnef  are,  the  leading  notch  open  n  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  capstan-house,  and  a 
saddle  mountain  to  the  N.  W.  and  Fort  Small  in  one. 

Half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  these  breakers  is  the  Eighteen-Feet  Reef,  romnrk- 
able  by  the  great  swell  upon  it.  To  the  westward  of  that  reef  lies  the  Great  Portu- 
guese, which  is  the  southernmost  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel. 

The  preceding  description  of,  and  directions  for,  the  South  Channels,  may  be  consid- 
ered as  more  for  the  use  of  the  pilot,  than  of  the  general  navigator.  Ciiptiiin  Livjim. 
ston  has  said,  •'  I  think  the  Derrotoro  is  right  in  omitting  directions  for  any  of  the  rlian- 
nels  at  Port  Royal,  Jamaica,  excepting  the  eastern  one,  as  directions  for  the  Southern 
Channels  are  absolutely  useless:  because  no  one  who  is  unacquainted  ought  to  be  fooj. 
hardy  enough  to  attempt  carrying  any  vessel  in  or  out,  except  by  the  Eastern  Channel 
even  with  the  most  correct  instructions  and  most  accurate  chart." 
Old  Harbor,  OLD  HARBOR,  LONG'S  WHARF,  dec— Mr.  Leard's  directions  for  these  barboni 
are  as  follow :  Being  clear  of  the  South,  or  New  Channels,  steer  to  the  southward,  or  S. 
by  W.,  and  give  Wreck  Reef  a  berth  of  two  milos;  and  then  edge  away,  and  bring  tlie 
fall  of  Braziletto  Hill  to  bear  W.  }  N.,  or  W.  by  N.,  and  steer  for  it :  this  will  lend  you 
to  the  southward  of  the  foul  ground  off  the  Pelican  Keys;  and  as  you  approach  them 
you  will  see  Pigeon  Island,  which  is  low  and  bushy,  in  a  direction  of  the  full  of  Brozi- 
letto  Hill;  keep  it  so,  and  pass  the  Pelican  Keys  in  7i,  7,  and  6j  fathoms;  and,  as  you 
steer  down  with  those  marks  on,  you  will  see  a  remarkable  hummock  on  the  mountain 
to  the  northward,  called  Cudjoe  Hill :  (it  is  like  a  jockey's  cap.)  When  this  hammock 
comes  on  the  west  extremity  of  the  slant  fall  of  Goat  Island,  and  will  bear  N.  j  W,,  then 
haul  to  the  N.  W.  by  N.,  tor  Old  Ha'-bor.  This  last  mark  leads  yo>'  "lear  to  westward 
of  Dry  Shoal,  part  of  which  is  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  you  w'll  see  it, 

You  will  have  from  6i  to  6,  or  54  fathoms;  and,  after  you  have  jiassed  Diy  Shoal, 
continue  steering  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  you  will  deepen  your  water  to  8  fathoms. 

And  as  you  approach  Careening  Key,  will  shoalen  it  to  seven  and  six  fathoms.  You 
must  give  Careening  Key  a  borth  of  nearly  half  a  mile,  to  avoid  o  reef  that  runs  from  it 
to  the  south-east;  and  steer  direct  for  the  wharfs  at  Old  Harbor,  and  anchor  in  4^  or4 
fathoms,  keeping  clear  of  the  reef  on  the  south  side  of  the  harbor,  which  genernllr 
shows  itself. 

The  most  frequented  and  best  channel  for  entering  into  this  great  bay  is  between  Peli- 
can and  Bare-Bush  Keys;  and  to  t»ike  it,  those  who  come  from  Cow  Point  must  steer 
W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  9  leagues,  and  until  the  slope  of  the  Brnziletto  Mountain  bears  W.  by  N, 
With  this  mark  and  bearing  you  proceed  to  Pigeon  Island,  &c.  The  Braziletto  Moun- 
tain cannot  be  mistaken,  it  being  the  northernmost  of  the  two  which  are  seen  to  the 
west,  and  the  southern  is  of  a  round  shape.  The  opening  which  these  mountains  forms 
is  the  point  to  bo  used  as  the  leading  mark,  bearing  W.  by  N.,  as  above. — Derrotero,  Sn. 

Long's  Wharf  and  Salt  River. — If  you  are  bound  to  Long's  Wharf,  in  sailing  to  the 
northward  of  Pigeon  Island,  there  is  a  small  white  shoal  of  only  1 8  feet  on  it ;  it  shoaiens 
gradually  on  the  east  end,  and  bears  north  from  Pigeon  Island,  distanco  one  mile.  The 
south  edge  of  Round  Hill  just  open  with  the  Braziletto  Hill  leads  oa  it.  You  may  sail 
between  this  shoal  and  Pigeon  Island,  in  8,  7,  6,  or  5  fathoms  ;  but  to  the  northward  is 
the  straightest  course.  After  passing  Pigeon  Island  steer  to  the  n  jrth-west,  and  bring 
the  top  house  about  one-third  from  the  north  side  of  the  large  openin,  or  gap  in  the  moun- 
tains; this  mark  leads  between  the  reefs  to  the  anchorage  at  Long  s  Wharf,  in  4  or3j 
fathoms. 

Sail  River  Anchorage. — If  you  are  bound  to  Salt  River,  after  passing  Pigeon  Island, 
keep  the  south  part  of  Braziletto  Hill  open  a  littlo  on  your  larboard  bow,  which  will  lead 
you  close  to  Salt  Island  ;  you  may  go  either  to  the  northward  or  southward  of  Salt  Island, 
but  the  north  passage  is  the  best.  You  may  pass  within  a  cable  and  a  halfs  distance  of 
Solt  Island,  on  the  north  and  west  part :  on  the  south  part  is  a  reef  which  shows  itself, 
and  is  steep  close  to  it.  There  is  a  reef  extending  along  on  the  east  side  of  Long  Isl- 
and, which  you  see;  and  also  a  reef  extending  from  the  Salt  River  Shore  to  the  east- 
ward, which  sometimes  breaks.  Therefore,  steer  round  the  north  end  of  Salt  Island,  at 
about  two  or  two  and  a  half  cables  distance  from  it ;  and  then  steer  towards  the  entrance 
of  Salt  Rivor,  until  you  bring  the  south  edge  of  Pigeon  Island  almost  in  a  line  with  the 
south  edge  of  Salt  Island :  keep  them  in  that  direction,  and  when  you  are  in  4^,  4,or3il 
fathoms,  anchor,  according  to  the  size  of  your  ship.  If  you  are  in  a  low  vessel,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  go  a  little  up  the  shrouds,  to  see  Pigeon  Island  over  Salt  Island.  The  south 
end  of  Pigeon  Island,  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of  Salt  Island,  leads  on  the  edge  of  the 


Long's 
Wliarfand 
Salt  River. 


Salt  River 
Anchorage. 


«M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT, 


377 


West 

bor. 


Har- 


j,lt  River  Reef.    There  is  good  anchorage  under  the  west  part  of  Saltlslaad.  in  five 
^tiioms  nnd  a  half,  good  holding  sround. 

Ptake  Bay. — To  sail  into  this  bay,  give  the  reef  that  runs  off  Rocky  Point,  a  berth  of   Peake  Bay. 
icable's  loQf^th,  or  more,  and  steer  towards  the  north  part  of  the  sandy  beach,  and  an- 
chor in  4i,  4,  or  3i  fathoms,  good  holding  ground.     The  reef  off  Rocky  Point,  and  the 
,eef  OD  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  are  nearly  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water,  so  that 
yousenomlly  see  them.     There  is  a  great  sea  in  this  bay,  with  strong  sea  breezes. 

\Ytit  Harlwr. — The  entrance  into  this  harbor  is  between  two  coral  reefs,  that  are 
Dearly  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water ;  and  the  heads  of  coral  frequently  show  above 
water.  The  channel  between  the  reefs  is  above  half  a  mile  wide,  with  6  and  tii  fathoms 
jj,  jt.  There  is  very  good  anchorage,  with  smooth  water,  just  to  the  westward  of  the 
north  reuf,  in  5j,  5,  or  4  fathoms,  good  holding  ground.  The  land  to  the  westward  does 
sot  »\wvr  any  mark  that  I  could  find  to  guide  you  into  this  anchorage,  but  it  is  not  difficult. 
j^i  you  go  to  the  westward  in  the  west  harbor,  the  water  shoalens  to  8  or  9  feet.  It  is 
IJM  sboul  on  the  south  side,  towards  the  mangroves,  and  smooth  water. 

Going  to  Sea  Jrom  Old  Harbor,  Long's  Wharf,  8fc — Ships  generally  get  under  way  Ooin^  to  sea. 
ffith  the  land  wmd,  so  as  to  get  clear  of  the  reefs  near  the  anchorage,  before  the  sea 
breeze  comes  on.  Being  clear  of  the  reefs,  you  may  turn  out  with  the  sea  breeze,  and 
Qiay  go  on  either  side  of  Pigeon  Island.  The  channel  between  Pigeon  Island  nnd  the 
reef  of  the  Half  Moon  Keys  is  two  miles  wide,  with  deep  water;  but  the  smoothest  water 
ij  to  the  northward  of  Pigeon  Island.  You  may  stand  towards  Ooat  Island  and  Cnbarita 
Point,  by  your  lead:  the  soundings  are  gradual,  and  tack  when  you  come  to  5  or  4j) 
fstlioms.  If  the  sea  breeze  should  bp  very  strong,  you  may  anchor  under  Dry  Shoal, 
tail  wait  for  the  land  wind.  But,  with  moderate  sea  breezes,  any  ship  may  turn  out 
between  the  keys  and  reefs.  Being  as  far  to  the  eastward  as  Dry  Shoal,  and  in  standing 
totlie  southward,  your  leading  mark  for  the  channel  between  Bare-Bush  Key  and  Mor- 
rii'  Sboal,  is  Cudjoe  Hill,  on  the  slant  fall  of  Goat  Island,  the  same  as  for  Dry  Shonl ; 
keep  it  so  until  the  Half  Moon  Keys  come  in  one ;  then  you  are  to  the  eastward  of  Mor- 
ris' Shoal,  and  may  edge  away  a  little,  keeping  the  Cudjoe  Hill  about  a  large  sail's  breadth 
OD  the  lower  part  from  the  slant  of  Ooat  Island,  which  mark  will  lead  you  along  the 
white  water  on  Bare-Bush  side  to  sea.  But  if,  in  standing  to  the  southward  from  Dry 
Shoal,  you  find  that  you  cannot  weather  Morris'  Shoal,  which  you  will  know  by  the 
fall  of  Cudjoe  Hill  not  being  within  a  sail's  breadth  of  the  fall  of  Ooat  Island;  in  this 
caeeyou  must  tack  to  the  northward,  when  Bare-Bush  Key  bears  E.  S.  E.,  or  when  a 
saddle  bill  to  the  north-west  of  Pigeon  Island  is  juat  coming  on  the  north  end  of  Pigeon 
Island.  And,  in  standing  to  the  northward,  tack  when  the  fall  of  Brazilotto  Hill  comes 
en  the  centre,  or  near  the  north  end  of  Pigeon  Island ;  you  may  approach  the  white 
•ater  on  the  side  of  Bare-Bush  to  5  fathoms.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  Morris' 
Shoal  and  Half  Moon  Keys ;  but  it  is  dangerous  to  approach  the  latter  on  the  south-east 
side,  for  you  will  have  from  6  or  7  fathoms  to  12  feet,  in  one  or  two  casts  of  the  lead.  To 
iheE.  S.  £.  and  S.  E.  of  Bare-Bush  Key,  distant  about  one  mile,  are  some  spots  of 
coral,  with  from  3^  to  5  fathoms  on  them,  and  7  fathoms  close  to  them.  And  to  the 
inuthward  and  S.  S.  E.  of  the  Portland  Keys,  distant  about  two  miles,  are  some  spots  of 
3i  and  4  fathoms  on  them.  After  you  have  passed  those  keys  in  sailing  to  the  westward, 
come  DO  nearer  Portland  than  two  or  two  and  a  half  miles,  or  7  or  8  fathoms ;  for,  the 
reef  off  Rocky  Point,  which  is  the  west  part  of  Portland,  extends  nearly  two  miles  from 
the  point  to  the  southward. 

It  is  said,  that  about  thirty  years  ago,  ships  sailed  over  MoiTis'  Shoal ;  if  so,  it  must  have 

I  grown  fast,  for  there  is  not  at  present  more  than  9  or  10  feet  on  the  north  edge  of  it,  and 

B  great  8\;i  ^ll  in  general.     Marks  fur  the  east  end  of  it ;  Cudjoe  Hill,  about  half  way  from 

the  fall  of  Goat  Island,  upon  the  low  and  bushy  land  towards  the  rising  to  the  westward ; 

lisrising  is  commonly  called  Little  Goat  Island  ;)  and  the  Half  Moon  Keys  about  four 
degrees  open,  and  north  part  of  Bare-Bush  Key  bearing  £.  |  S.     Marks  for  the  west  end       ' 
are,  Cudjoe  Hill,  on  the  afore-mentioned  rising  of  Little  Gont  Island,  and  Bnre-Bush  Key 

iring  £.  }  S.    It  is  in  length  little  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  in  breadth  about 
I  one-sixth  of  a  mile,  and  shoalens  too  sudden  for  your  lead  to  be  a  guide  in  standing  to- 

rards  it. 

PORT  ROYAL  TO  PORTLAND.— In  proceeding  towards  Portland,  observe  that 
Wreck  Reef,  which  is  a  large  shoal  composed  of  dry  rocks  and  breakers,  lies  about  half 
way  between  Port  Royal  and  Old  Harbor,  at  the  distance  of  more  than  a  mile  from  the 

'  ore.  This  danger,  which  appears  in  the  day,  consists  of  two  parts,  having  between 
them  a  channel  of  4  fathoms  water.  Ships  passing  in  the  night  should  approach  no 
nearer  than  in  1^  fathoms,  or  come  to  an  anchorage  until  morning.  Within  the  reef  there 
iigood  shelter,  and  tolerable  anchorage,  in  4  and  5  fathoms,  bottom  of  sand  with  shells 
and  mud.     Here  vessels  occasionally  ride  during  the  prevalence  of  a  breeze,  &:c. 

From  Port  Royal  to  Portland,  the  distance,  on  a  circuitous  course,  is  9  leagues.     Iq 
I  this  track,  when  clear  of  the  South  Channel,  give  Wreck  Reef  a  berth  of  2  miles. 


Port  Royal 
to  Portland. 


378 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT 


The  Port- 
land Ruck, 


The  Soutk- 
icest  break- 
ers. 


There  ars  snundinss  outward  as  fnr  na  with  the  oHRternmost  land  of  HnlUhire  bearins 
N.  h  Bm  and  Rocky  Point,  or  the  southernmoit  Innd  of  Portland,  N.  W.  j  N.  With 
these  bearing*,  Boiiiidinf^s  have  been  found  of  from  17  to  23  fathoms,  and  the  next  coat 
no  ground  at  80  fatlionM,  although  not  a  ship's  length  from  the  former. 

The  Pedro  Keys ;  from  the  remarks  of  II.  M  S.  Winchester,  Captain,  the  Hon. 

W.  Wellsley,  R.  N. 

THE  PORTLAND  ROCK  is  elevated  from  15  to  20  feet  above  the  level  of  thn  spb, 
The  Winchester  rounded  it  on  the  south  side,  and  brought  it  to  boar  oast,  «^arryiii(r  fr,,,,, 
10  to  14  fathoms  water,  on  a  sandy  bottom,  with  pieces  of  coral.  In  this  bearing  n  vcsiH!! 
might  anchor  with  safety  in  moderate  weather. 


Carlisle,  or 

Withy-wood- 

Bay. 


We  made  the  latitude 17'    7'  23"  N. 

—longitude 77     25  20    W. 


havin 


which  is  only  20"  different  from  De  Mayne'a  meridian  distance  reduced ;  he 
considered  Port  Royal  in  76°  52'  38 '  W.,  whilst  we  use  76°  49'  W. 

Wo  stood  from  the  Portland  Rock  to  the  S.  W.,  carrying  from  12  to  15  fathoms,  nnd 
having  these  soundings  farther  to  the   southward  than  laid  down  by  the  chart.    We 
saw  the  Eastern  Breakers,  so  called  by  De  Mayne :  they  appeared  to  have  an  extent 
of  about  two  cables'  length,  with  two  small  rocks  above  water,  and  wore  breaking  in  y||  I 
quarters. 

Near  these  the  water  shoaled  to  8  fathoms  and  a  half;  and  when  they  (the  rocks)  bore  i 
N.  N.  E.,  distant  4  miles,  we  had  only  7i  fathoms,  the  Pedro  Keys  just  then  cominnin 
sight.     Steering  W.  by  S.,  we  soon  after  had  no  bottom,  having  got  into  the  indonCns  i 
shown  in  De  Mayne's  chart,  so  that  the  shoalost  water  we  had  must  have  been  very  near 
ll:e  edge  of  the  bank.  j 

We  did  not  go  nearer  than  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  eostward  of  the  Pedro  Keys,  and 
had  no  soundings  with  the  hand-lead  ;  but  the  chronometers  gave  the  centra  of  tlie  mid- 
dle key  77°  47'  13"  W..  or  58^  13"  west  of  Port  Royol. 

THE  SOUTH-WEST    BREAKERS.— They  are  dangerous,  and    require  n  strict  I 
lookout.     The  sea  breaks  over  two  small  rocks,  not  more  thon  three  feet  obove  the  level  | 
of  the  sea,  constantly,  but  so  irregularly,  that  from  the  deck  of  a  vessel,  and  in  n  ninde- 
rate  breeze,  a  high  breaker  might  nut  be  distinguishable  ot'tener  than  once  in  5  niinute;,  I 
and  the  ordinary  ones  would  be  taken  for  waves.     In  the  Winchester,  with  a  good  mast- 
head lookout,  we  passed  within  three  miles  of  these,  without  their  being  discuvoroil. 

On  the  west  side  they  are  bold  to.     Having  stood  to  the  northward  on  the  bank,  pajg. 
ing  them  at  the  above  named  distonce,  wo  carried  11, 12,  and  10  fathoms  for  six  miles, 
When  the  breaker  bore  S.  S.  W.  about  that  dista.ice,  we  tacked,  and  stood  for  it;  and  I 
when  about  three  miles  distant,  the  soundings  became  irregular,  varying  from  11  to  8i| 
fathoms. 

We  were  at  noon  as  near  to  it  as  one  mile,  bearing  east,  and  we  had  not  less  tlinn  nine  j 
fathoms. 

The  whole  breaking  part  does  not  extend  more  than  1  or  14  cables'  length;  but  it  is  to  I 
be  supposed  there  is  foul  ground  to  the  eastward  of  it  for  a  mile  or  so.     The  ocean  color 
of  the  water  above  it  was  remarkable  even  in  soundings,  and  I  should  be  for  this  reason 
cautious  in  approaching  it  to  the  eastward. 

Latitude  of  South-West  Breaker 16°  47'  56"  N. 

Longitude  of  do 78     10    32   W. 

or  1°  21'  32"  west  of  meridian  of  Port  Royal,  which  is  nearly  a  mile  to  the  eastward nf| 
De  Mayne's  reduced. 

The  Pedro  Shoals  (BivoraBank  of  the  Spaniards)  have  been  regularly  surveyed, and  | 
the  representation  of  them  in  the  charts  is  to  be  relied  or..     Of  the  Cascabel,  or  Rntile- 
snake,  which  is  supposed   to  distinguish  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  Pedro  Bank,  it  does  not  I 
exist,  ns  there  has  been  an  accurate  survey  of  the  bank,  and  it  was  not  to  bo  found. 

CARLISLE,  or  WITHY- WOOD  BAY,  to  the  west  of  Portland,  isanopenbav; 
winds  from  W.  to  S.  E.  Its  S.  E.  extremity  is  the  rocky  point  of  Portland,  fromwliichl 
a  spit,  of  12  feet  of  water,  extends  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  We<l-| 
ward  of  Rocky  Point  is  a  bank,  called  Robertson's  Shoal,  on  some  part  of  whicli  there! 
are  only  6  feet  at  low  water.  The  outer  edge  of  thiu  shoal  is  one  mile  and  a  hnlfwesti 
from  Rocky  Point.  The  form  of  the  shoal  is  nearly  oval,  from  Et  to  W.  Its  breadth,  | 
N.  and  S.,  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

To  sail  into  the  bay,  bring  a  remarkable  round  l^i}!  to  bear  nearly  north,  and  steertorl 
it,  until  Rocky  Point  comes  almost  on  with  the  ea^if  point  of  Portland.  Hence,  round- 1 
ing  Robertson's  Shoal,  you  may  come  to  an  anchor  in  from  5  to  4  fathoms.  With  tlie| 
bill  above  mentioned  N.  by  E.,  there  is  a  spot  of  2\  fathoms,  at  about  2i  miles  from  1 


mmm 


m 


Allif(ator 
Pond  Key. 


Brune  Bank. 


Pedro  Bay. 


Entrance  of 
Black  River. 


Port  Royal 
to  Black 
River. 


.UNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  379 

lieach.  With  the  fort  N.  E.,  or  N.  N.  E.,  is  the  bout  pluco  to  nnchor  in  for  londin^,  bo- 
tiujo  y""''  Ixint"  (^tn  1""  lioth  nshorA  mid  ubroiid  with  tho  Hea  winds.  No  tidos  hero,  but 
((troiiR  wnsterlv  current  genernlly  runs  in  fho  ofTutg.     Vur.  G°  60'  E. 

,\!oiiK  tho  coast  to  tho  woHtward,  to  tho  distniico  of  nearly  twenty  miles  from  CnrliHlo 
Jhv.  »t  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  from  shore,  there  is  a  regular  dopth  of  <i  and  4i 
faliioHis. 

ALLIGATOR  POND  KEY.— AlliKator  Pond  Key  is  a  key  just  above  the  surface  of 
lli(i  witter,  with  a  reef  all  round  it.  Its  distance  from  the  shore  is  al)out  four  miles,  and 
teuels  may  approach  it  by  the  lead,  or  on  seeing  the  breakers.  There  is  good  anchorage 
for^miill  vessels  along  shore,  between  it  and  the  miiin,  in  3  and  4  fathoms. 

BRUNE  I3ANK,  a  small  bank,  having  on  it  a  little  more  than  4  fathoms,  with  12  or  13 
(loxe  to  it,  lies  six  miles  S.  K.  by  compass,  from  Alligator  Pond  Key.  Tho  shoal  is 
about  a  mile  and  three-quarters  in  extent,  from  oast  to  west,  and  one  mile  and  a  half  in 
breadth  :  it  has  from  4  to  G  futhomi  water  on  it,  and  the  outer  edge  is  about  8  miles  from 
the  shore. 

PEDRO  BAY,  Sec. — In  Pedro  Bay,  to  the  westward  of  Pedro  Bluff,  there  is  good 
anchornge  for  any  vessels,  but  it  is  open  to  southerly  winds.  The  load  is  hero  the  best 
piide  for  anchoring.  The  coast  hence  to  the  westward,  nearly  to  Parratee  Point,  is  bold 
to,  Off  Parrotee  Point  is  a  small  reef;  and  to  the  N.  W.  of  this  point  is  Black  River, 
which  is  formed  by  extensive  reefs.  To  clear  these  reefs,  keep  Pedro  Bluff  open  with 
parrntue  Point. 

lie  entrance  of  Black  Rivir  is  between  two  reefs,  and  has  not  more  than  8  feet  water. 
Tosiiil  into  the  river,  when  advancing  from  the  eastward,  keep  Pedro  Bluff  open  of  Par- 
mttie  Point,  till  you  bring  the  church  on  with  a  gap  in  the  highland,  or  to  bear  N.  E. ; 
then  steer  directly  for  tho  church,  which  will  carry  you  into  tho  best  of  the  chaunel.  It 
igfull  of  heads  of  coral  rocks. 

PORT  ROYAL  TU  BLACK  RIVER;  by  Mr.  Town,  1817.— On  leaving  the 
South  Channel  of  Port  Royal,  when  bound  to  the  westward,  you  may  clear  Wreck  Reef 
by  lieeping  the  Magazine  of  Fort  Johnson  open  of  St.  George's  Rocks,  until  Portland 
bears  went ;  thence  you  may  alter  your  course  along  the  land,  as  there  are  do  dangers  to 
be  appreliended.  until  you  approach  Alligator  Key,  about  4  miles  S.  E.  1^  E.,  from  which 
iitiie  Brune  Reef,  already  described. 

Pedro  Bluff  is  very  remarkable,  and  may  be  known  from  any  other  land  on  tho  coaat. 
*t4  or5  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  bluff,  there  is  a  remarkable  white  spot  in  the  cliff 
^d  the  White  Horses,  which,  when  you  first  make  it  from  the  eastward,  appears  like 
mner  under  sail,  close  to  the  'and. 

.n  Parratee  Point  to  Luana  Point,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  W.  by  W.  i 
W.,  9  miles.  The  coost  between  forms  the  bay  of  Black  River,  which  is  obstructed  by 
t  number  of  reefs,  all  of  which  lie  within  the  line  of  the  two  exterior  points,  and  a  course 
N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  will  therefore  laad  clear  of  them.  The  bay  does  not  appear  to  have 
been  regularly  surveyed.  The  main  channel,  which  is  between  two  reefs,  has  only  18 
feet  of  water. 

If  going  to  Black  River,  or  its  bay,  when  advancing  towards  Parratee  Point,  take  care 
Dot  to  approach  the  point  nearer  than  one  mile,  as  there  is  a  reef  extending  off  to  the  S. 
\V.  nearly  a  mile.  Your  leoding  marks  into  this  bay,  to  the  anchorage  where  merchant 
ships  lond,  will  be  the  church  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  a  large  cotton-tree :  run  in 
with  this  mark,  until  you  are  within  half  a  mile  of  the  town,  and  anchor  in  about  18  feet. 
Large  ships,  that  cannot  approach  so  near  the  town,  should  anchor  under  the  eastern 
shore,  in  8  or  9  fathoms.  Your  best  mark  for  anchoring  is,  Pedro  Bluff  shut  in  about  a 
cable's  length  of  Parratee  Point,  in  9i  fathoms,  with  the  town  bearing  about  N.  E.  by  E. 
j  E.  There  is  a  very  dangerous  reef  lying  on  the  western  side  of  this  bay,  with  only  4 
feetof  water  on  the  shoalest  part.  There  is  also  a  coral  bank,  nearly  in  the  middle  of 
the  bay,  with  only  2i  fathoms  over  the  shoalest  part. 

From  Luana  Point  the  coast  continues  clear  for  a  league  and  a  half  to  the  N.  W.,  but 
itthence  becomes  foul,  and  so  continues  to  Bluefield's  Bay,  &c.  'The  direct  course  and 
distance,  cleor  of  danger,  from  Luana  Point  to  South  Nogril,  the  S.  W.  end  of  Jamaica, 
areW.  N.  W.  i  W.,  nearly  10  leagues. 

South  4  leagues  from  Bluefield's,  hes  a  rocky  bank,  discovered  in  1821,  with  from  13  to 
1 20  fathoms  on  it. 

BLUEFIELD'S  BAY. — This  part  of  the  coast  is  environed  by  reefs,  and  the  an-  Bluefield's 
i  chorage  here  for  large  ships  is  without  a  rocky  ledge,  which  stretches  from  Crab  Pond  Bay. 
Point  to  the  west  of  Bluefield's,  and  joins  the  reef  of  Savanna  la  Mar.  Vessels  coming 
from  the  eastward,  to  anchor  in  the  bay,  must  keep  down  by  the  outside  of  the  reef,  or 
keep  the  land  to  the  eastward  open  of  the  point,  until  the  leading  mark  is  brought  on, 
which  ia  the  overseer's  house,  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  tavern,  bearing  N.  E. 
bjiE.  iE.  For  anchoring,  bring  the  overseer's  bouse  and  tavern  in  a  line,  N.  £.  by 
I  E.  j  E.,  and  the  easternmost  point  E.  S,  E.     Ships  drawing  16  or  17  feet  water,  moy 

1  over  the  rocky  ledge,  in  3i  or  4  fathoms,  with  the  overseer's  house  and  tavern  ua 


mm^^w^ 


'^mm 


•^nfinmm^ 


q9iPlippni{pi.injil ,  III.  .,iiiiLyi,.pij,iii|  ipmip 


380 


Savanna  la 
Mar. 


Western  end 
of  Jamaica. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

above,  antil  over  the  ledge,  which  may  be  known  by  finding  a  sandy  bottom,  and  a  depth 
of  Si  or  6  fathoms.  The  waterir^  place  is  to  the  northward  of  the  Bluff  Point,  on  tiie 
lee  side  of  the  bay.  Water  may  also  be  obtained  at  a  stream  off  Bluefield's  River,  near 
the  tavern. 

In  steering  in,  keep  the  itad  going,  and  be  ready  to  anchor,  as  the  water  shculens  rather 
suddenly. 

SAVANNA  LA  MAR.— The  coast  from  Bluefield's  to  Savanna  '-  Maris  rocky, Id 
some  places,  to  the  distance*  of  two  miles  from  the  shore.  The  entrance  to  Savanna  la 
Mar  is  very  narrow,  and  lies  between  a  small  reef  called  the  Middle  Ground,  (on  which 
there  is  a  depth  of  only  four  feet,)  and  another  reef  having  7  or  8  feet  over  it.  In  the 
channel  tbere  is  a  depth  of  19  or  20  feet.  The  leading  mark  in,  is  a  large  gap  on  the 
highland,  called  the  Dolphin  Head,  in  aline  with  a  remarkable  large  tree  on  the  lowland 
to  the  eastward  of  the  town,  and  bearing  N.  i  W.  This  mark  lei^s  close  to  the  Middle 
Orouod,  which  will  be  seen.  After  passing  the  latter,  hanl  to  tho  eastward,  and  an 
chor  in  17,  16,  or  15  feet  .<'  water.  This  channel  should  never  be  attempted  withoata 
pilot. 

A  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  former  channel,  is  the  Great  Channel  of  tja- 
▼anna  la  Mar,  which  is  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  has  a  depth  of  24  to  19  and  13  feet  towards 
the  shore.  To  sail  through,  in  mid-channel,  it  is  only  requisite  to  bring  the  fort  on,  bear- 
ing N.  N.  E. 

On  the  southorn  extremity  of  the  bank  extending  from  shore,  between  Savanna  la  Mar 
and  John's  Foiut,  the  British  ship  Monarch  struck,  in  1782,  upon  a  bottom  of  coral. 
This  extremity  liei  with  John's  Point  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  will  be  avoided 
by  keeping  ono-half  of  the  high  laud  of  South  Negril  open  to  the  southward  of  John's 
Point. 

In  traversing  hereabout,  it  is  necessary  to  be  very  particular  in  the  use  of  the  lead,  for 
the  bank,  which  extends  along  the  front  of  Bluoiield'a,  and  thence  to  opposite  Savanna  la 
Mar,  Sec.  '.a  rocky,  and  has  on  its  edge  from  20  to  24  feet  of  water ;  and  on  it  as  on  the 
Whif)  Lanks,  there  are  many  shoals  with  little  water  on  them,  some  of  which  uncover, 
and  m my  have  breakers.  Without  the  edge  of  the  reef,  and  very  near  to  it.>  are  5  fath- 
oms or  water,  which  augments  to  13  fathoms  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  edge 
of  the  bank :  the  depth  Ihernfore  is  the  best  guide,  for,  when  you  get  from  8  to  10 
fathoms,  you  will  be  from  ono-third  to  half  a  mile  from  the  edge  of  the  reef;  and  when 
you  get  13  fathoms  you  will  be  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  it ;  and,  pursuing  your 
route,  you  should  not  keep  in  the  depth  of  8  or  10  fathom'j,  but  in  that  of  13  to  15;  for 
only  in  the  vicinity  cf  the  anchora;^e  '.iey  are  for  takirg,  should  vessels  get  into  the  first  I 
of  these  depths.  The  anchorage  u  Savanna  la  Mar  is  of  the  same  nature  as  that  of  | 
Bluefield's  :  large  ships  must  anchor  outside  of  the  reef,  and,  in  such  a  situation,  they 
will  not  be  sheltered  from  the  sen,  from  east  round  to  S.  by  W.  It  seems  probable  that 
buch  will  very  seldom  come  to  this  place,  because  they  here  run  much  i  isk  of  losing 
their  anchors ;  as  the  instant  there  is  tho  least  appearance  of  the  wind  freshening,  tiioy 
must  make  sail.  Such  vessels  as  do  not  draw  more  than  12  or  13  feet  of  water  may  an- 
chor upon  the  bank,  and  behind,  (or  in  the  lee  of  the  reefs,)  in  15  or  16  feet  rf  water, 
with  the  town  bearing  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  distani  You 
may  cross  over  the  edge  of  the  bank  so  soon  as  the  wharves  at  Savanna  la  Mhr  bt^.r  N. 
W.  by  W.,  which  will  be  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  windward  of  the  Eastern  Cbh.  nel, 
(that  is,  if  the  vessel  is  on  the  edge  of  the  reef,  or  near  it,)  and  sending  a  boat  to  be  placed 
to  the  westward  of  the  M  iddle  Ground ;  it  will  serve  for  a  guide  and  buoy  ;  and  then  you 
have  only  to  shave  close  to  the  boat,  as  the  mean  to  keep  clear  of  the  reef  to  leeward. 
The  boat  may  proceed  with  the  leading  mark  as  above,  or  may  steer  northerly  until  slie 
comes  to  the  odge  of  the  reef,  which  runs  along  to  the  east  of  the  anchorage;  and,  i(ecp- 
ing  n'ong  tho  southern  edge  of  tliis  reef,  she  must  thence  steer  N.  W.  i  N.  so  soon  as  the 
wharf  ot  Savanna  la  Mar  bears  on  that  rhumb ;  with  thia  course  she  will  pass  over  the 
)ock. 

WESTERN  END  OF  JAMAICA.— From  St.  John's  Point  to  south  Negril,  the 
coast  is  bold  to,  or  high  and  steep.  The  indent  between  South  and  North  Negril,  is  called 
I^egrii,  or  Long  Bay,  and  affords  tolerable  anchorage.  Close  to  the  south  side  of  North 
Negril,  is  Negril  Harbor,  a  small  harbor  with  good  anchoring  ground  for  small  vessels; 
and  to  the  north  are  Orange  Bay  and  Half-moon  Ba},  places  fit  for  drogers,  &c.  Six 
miles  to  the  N.  E.  from  North  Negril  is  Green  Island  Harbor,  and  about  2i  miles  from 
the  latter  is  Davis  Cove.  These  are  places  seldom  resorted  to,  but  by  those  who  go 
thither  on  purpose  to  load,  and  have  pilots. 

A  rock,  with  24  feet  water  on  it,  was  seen  some  years  since  by  one  of  the  ships  in  a 
convoy  lying  to,  about,  as  well  as  I  can  recollect,  40  miles  west  of  Negril  Point,  Jamaica; 
and  I  am  pretty  certain  it  was  in  lat.  18°  24'.  It  was  noticed  in  public  orders  ntPort 
Royal. 

Between  Negril  and  North  Pedro  the  coast  is  bold,  excepting  at  Green  Island,  which 
U  low,  and  environed  by  a  reef,  nearly  even  with  the  water.  From  Pedro  Point  to  the 
harbor  of  Lucea,  vessels  may  stand  within  a  mile  of  the  shore. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


381 


Mr.  Town  says,  a  ship  jaiug  off  the  west  end  of  Jamaica,  and  bound  to  any  port  on 
ihe  north  side,  should  endeavor  to  round  the  points  called  South  and  North  Negri!,  as 
close  as  she  can:  for  the  current,  in  general,  seta  to  the  N.  E.  if  proceeding  for  the 
Harbor  of  Lucea,  you  may  know  its  entrance  by  a  remarkable  notch  in  the  mountain, 
(tiled  the  Dolphin  Head.  At  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  harbor  there  is,  also,  a  re- 
garkablo  white  spot  in  the  land,  which  may  be  seen  eight  or  ten  miles  off. 
HARBOR  OF  LUCEA.— This  harbor  is  one  of  the  best  on  the  north  side  of  the  Harhar  of 
iiland.  It  is  safe,  there  being  little  danger  in  sailing  in  or  out.  The  N.  E.  point  is  ca!!-  Lucea. 
ed  Lucea  Point,  and  on  the  western  point  stands  the  fort.  Vessels,  having  opened  the 
lurbor,  stand  directly  in,  only  giving  the  Fort  Point,  on  the  western  side,  n  berth,  as  a 
reef  stretches  from  it,  on  the  extremity  of  which  there  is  generally  a  buoy.  To  sail  in, 
brlDg  the  remarkable  kuountain,  called  the  Dolphin  Head,  open  to  the  westward  of  Bar- 
ban  Hill,  which  has  a  house  on  the  top  of  it,  and  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor,  bear- 
ing nearly  S.  by  £.  Continue  on  in  this  direction,  until  the  fort  bears  west,  when  you 
vill  be  within  the  Fort  Reef.  Hence  proceed  towards  the  town  on  the  west,  and  anchor 
in  5  or  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  with  the  fort  bearing  from  N.  by  W.  to  N.  N.  W., 
and  Lucea  Point,  at  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  from  N.  N.  £.  to  N.  N.  E.  i  E. 

Those  approaching  this  place  from  the  eastward,  must  observe  to  keep  at  least  three 
miles  from  shore,  until  past  Buckner's  Reef,  which  lies  off  Mosquito  Cove,  and  sometimes 
breaks.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that,  around  Iiucea  Point,  and  to  the  north-eastward, 
there  is  a  vor'^j  flat,  extending  out  to  a  considerable  distance. 

Within  tbe  point  the  reef  extends  to  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore.  It  is  nearly  steep 
to,  and  the  headb  of  coral  sometimes  appear  above  water. 

For  passing  clear  of  the  edge  of  the  eastern  bank,  the  mart,  is  Malcolm  House,  which 
itandsoQ  a  small  hill  or  rising  at  the  east  end  of  Lucea  Town,  brought  on  the  east  end 
of  the  fort,  and  kept  so  until  you  bring  the  Dolphin  Head,  as  already  mentioned,  to  the 
westward  of  Barbara  Hill.  This  mark  leads  through  8,  7,  and  6  fathoms,  then  deepen- 
ing to  13,  and  shoaling  again  into  the  harbor. 

MOSQUITO  COVE,  an  excellent  harbor,  lies  three  and  a  half  miles  to  the  eastward  Motquito 
of  the  harbor  of  Lucea.  Here  a  hundred  sail  of  merchant  ships  may  lie  securely  from  Cove. 
all  winds.  The  channel,  at  the  entrance,  is  little  more  than  a  cable's  longth  iu  breadth, 
but  widens  inward  to  where  the  harbor  has  from  7  to  4^  fathoms.  The  bottom,  in  gene- 
ral, ia  muddy.  To  sail  in  you  may  pass  to  the  eastward  of  Buckner's  Reef,  or  over  its 
eastern  end,  in  5i  or  6  fathoms.  The  course  into  Mosquito  Cove  is  nearly  S.  E.  by  S., 
but  it  should  not  be  attempted  by  a  stranger  without  groat  caution,  as  the  entrance  is  much 
coDtracted  by  a  reef  from  the  eastern  side. 

MONTEGO  BAY. — The  northern  point  of  Montego  Bay  lies  in  latitude  18°  324'.  MontegoBay. 
Thia  is  a  good  bay  with  the  wind  from  N.  N.  E.  to  the  eastward  and  southward :  but  it 
is  open  to  the  north  and  west ;  and  the  northerly  wind,  in  December  and  January,  has  fre- 
quently driven  vessels  on  shore. 

To  sail  in  from  the  eastward,  give  the  point,  on  coming  down,  a  berth  of  two  miles,  in 
order  to  avoid  a  reef  which  extends  from  it,  and  which  may  be  distinctly  seen  from  the 
bowB,  when  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  When  you  open  the  town  you  may  approach  the  reef 
vbicb  is  pretty  steep,  into  10,  9,  or  8  fathoms,  and  will  see  the  bottom.  You  now  haul 
round  towards  the  town,  but  must  not  venture  to  anchor  until  you  have  well  shut  in  San- 
dy Point,  (without  the  bay  on  the  north,)  with  Old  Fort  Point.  For,  with  Sandy  Point 
ia  sight,  there  are  from  35  to  30  fathoms,  and  the  bank  is  so  steep  that  the  anchor  will 
not  hold.  If  a  ship  drives  off  she  will,  with  a  sea  breeze,  he  in  danger  of  grounding  on  the 
lee  reefs.  The  mark  for  the  best  anchorage  is,  the  baiTacks  upon  the  hill  in  a  line,  or 
nearly  so,  with  Radwick's  Stone  Wharf,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay.  The  gi-ound  here 
is  good  in  11,  10.  and  9  fathoms.  On  entering  from  the  westward  with  a  fair  wind,  the 
church  bearing  east  leads  directly  to  the  anchorage. 

The  following  descriptions  and  directions  are  those  of  Mr.  Town :  Montego  Bay  af- 
fordagood  anchorage  for  30  or  30  vessels,  except  during  the  prevalence  of  stroi  ^  north 
winds,  which  generally  commence  in  the  beginning  of  November,  and  end  in  the  latter 
endof  February.  With  the  general  trade  wind,  which  is  from  the  N.  E.  to  the  E.  N. 
E.,  ships  will  ride  here  with  perfect  safety.  There  is  a  small  harbor,  or  cove,  in  the  N. 
E.  part  of  the  bay,  which  will  hold  from  10  to  12  vessels.  This  is  the  only  safe  place  for 
ihipa  during  the  strong  north  winds. 

On  coming  into  this  bay  with  the  sea  breeze,  which  is  from  N.  E.  to  E.  ^N.  E.,  you 
should  endeavor  tn  get  well  to  the  eastward  before  you  attempt  to  run  in. 

The  leading  mark  ibr  clearing  the  Old  Fort  Reef,  which  extends  from  the  anchorage 
in  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  the  northernmost  point,  is  the  Boge  Road  end  on,  bearing 
south,  or  south  a  little  westerly.  Proceed  with  this  mark  until  Mont°igo  Church  comes 
open  of  Old  Fort  Point ;  then  haul  in  for  the  8.  E.  part  of  the  town,  and  when  Sandy 
Point  is  shut  in  with  Old  Fort  Point,  you  may  anchor  in  from  17  to  10  fathoms,  fine  sand 
and  mud.  The  reef  off  and  to  the  northward  of  Old  Fort  Point,  lies  nearly  one  mile  and 
s  quarter  from  the  shore :  advance,  therefore,  no  nearer  to  the  point  northward  uf  Old 
Fort  Point  than  two  milea. 


'I     ■■PfW 


,\»WIHi '.'.'.*•' 


3S2 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


About  5  miles  to  the  westward  of  Montego  Bay  is  a  small  creek,  a  bay  without,  which 
is  called  Great  Roads.  lo  this  bay  merehaut  vessels  lay  to  load;  there  being  a  shoal  ex- 
tending nearly  the  whole  of  the  way  across,  which  affords  good  shelter  for  ships  lyiDv 
here  during  the  north  winds.  ° 

All  ships  lying  either  in  Montego  Bay  or  at  Great  Roads,  pay  harbor  dues,  at  the  rate 
of  one  shilling  per  ton,  register  tonnage;  and  in  the  event  of  any  ship's  going  into  the 
Inner  Harbor,  at  Montego  Bay,  she  is  charged  one  halt-|iBnny  per  ton  for  every  dny  that 
she  may  lie  in  this  harbor,  in  nddition  to  the  fee  that  is  paid  for  anchoring  in  tho  bay. 

If  bound  from  Montego  Bay  to  the  eastward,  I  would  recommend  leaving  the  bay  in 
the  evening,  so  soon  as  the  land  wind  comes  off,  which  will  generally  run  you  clear  of 
the  bay,  and  in  a  good  ofiing  for  the  sea  breeze.  It  is  generally  recommended  to  beat  to 
windward  close  to  the  land,  in  order  to  have  the  advantage  of  the  eastern  currents;  but 
I  am  of  opinion  that  the  only  advantage  you  have  by  keeping  in  shore  is,  that  you  meet 
the  land  wind,  which  sometimes  will  carry  you  well  to  the  eastward  during  the  night,  for 
the  current  sets  to  the  westward  as  often  as  to  the  eastward.  If  your  destination  be  Fnl- 
mouth  Harbor,  endeavor,  if  by  night,  to  keep  the  shore  close  aboard,  and  the  land  wind 
will  lead  you  to  the  eastward. 
Peak  of  Tar-  PEAK  OF  TARQUINO. — lu  working  hence  to  windward,  in  clear  weather,  when 
quino.  Cuba  is  visible,  a  remarkable  hill  will  be  discerned.     This  is  the  Pico  de  Tarquino,  the 

highest  land  on  this  side  of  Cuba,  which  bears  from  Montego  Point  N.  L.  |  N.,  distant 
35  leagues ;  from  St.  Anne's  Bay,  N.  by  E.,  284  leagues;  and  from  the  east  end  of  Ja- 
maica,  N.  N.  W.,  40  leagues,  by  which  you  may  judge  how  far  you  are  to  windward  on 
any  other  bearings.     The  Peak  of  Tarquino,  &c.,  have  already  been  described. 
Falmouth  FALMOUTH  HARBOR,  or  MARTHA  BRAE — This  harbor,  which  lies  6  leagues 

Harbor,  or      to  the  eastward  of  Montego  Bay,  is  a  bar  harbor.    Its  channel,  or  entrance,  is  very  nar. 
Martha  Brae,  row,  not  more  than  16  or  17  feet  in  depth,  and  too  intricate  to  be  attempted  without  a 
pilot.     The  town  of  Falmouth  is  situate  on  the  western  side  of  the  harbor,  througliout 
the  greatest  part  of  which  there  is  a  regular  depth  of  from  5  to  10  fathoms. 
Marabona  MARABON A  BAY. — At  about  3  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Falmouth  is  Mambona 

Bay.  Bay,  which  is  very  remarkable.     It  has  a  low  pleasant  plantation  close  to  it;  pnd  on  the 

hill  over  it  is  a  large  house  or  castle,  formerly  the  residence  of  Brian  Edwards,  Esq,,  his- 
torian of  the  West  Indies.     Within  a  league  to  the  eastward  of  this,  is  the  small  harbor 
of  Rio  Bueno. 
Rio  Bueno  RIO  BUENO  AND  DRY  HARBOR.— Rio  Bueno,  which  lies  nearly  4  leagues 

and  Dry         to  the  eastward  of  Falmouth,  is  a  bay  exposed  to  all  winds  between  N.  and  W.  N.  W., 
Harbor.  and  has  but  indifferent  anchorage,  the  bank  being  sioep.     It  is  seldom  visited  by  otherthan 

merchant  vessels,  which  go  there  to  load.  From  the  entrance  to  the  place  of  anchor- 
age, the  distance  is  about  2  miles.  The  harbor  is  formed  by  two  reefs.  A  ship  may  lie 
with  the  point  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  in  9,  8,  or  7  fathoms.  Dry  Harbor,  which  lies  3  miles 
more  to  the  eastward,  is,  however,  a  good  harbor  for  small  vessels,  although  its  cliannei  be 
narrow,  and  has  a  depth  of  only  16  feet. 
St.  Anne's  ST.  ANNE'S  BAY.— The  entrance  of  this  bay  lies  in  lat.  18°  31',  long.  77°  15'.  It 

Bay.  is  nan-ow,  and  lies  between  two  reefs,  which  have  on  their  edges  3  and  3i  fathoms,  deep- 

ening abruptly  in  the  channel  to  10  and  1 1  fathoms.  The  enti-ance  is  less  than  half  a  cable's 
length  in  breadth,  and  lies  with  the  barracks  on  the  rise  of  the  hill,  bearing  nearly  S.  i  E,, 
but  it  is  not  to  be  attempted  without  a  pilot.  With  a  northerly  wind  a  stream  of  consider- 
able strength  sets  outwards  through  the  channel ;  this  is  occasioned  by  the  great  quantity 
of  water  thrown  over  the  reefs  by  the  swell.  In  passing  in,  as  the  water  is  clear,  vessels 
generally  pass  close  to  the  western  reef,  on  the  st«ubo(>rd  side. 

Mr.  Town  says,  St.  Anne's  Bay  lies  about  12  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Dry  Harbor. 
This  bay  may  be  known  by  its  having  a  very  regular  row  of  cocoanut  trees  around  it,  close 
to  the  water's  edge,  and  the  town  of  St.  Anne,  which  stands  on  the  side  of  thehillonthe 
S.  E.  side  of  the  bay.  The  houses  stand  close  to  the  woter's  edge  on  the  western  side, 
and  the  plantations  are,  in  appearance,  in  a  state  of  cultivation  nmch  superior  to  any  west- 
ward of  this  place.  The  harbor  of  St.  Anne  is  snmll,  and  is  close  to  the  town.  You  may 
anchor  here  in  from  6  to  9  fathoms,  good  ground. 
Ocho  Rial.  OCHO  RIOS,  which  lies  7  miles  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Anne's,  is  an  anchorage  open 

to  the  nortli  and  N.  W.  winds.  To  enter,  you  sail  by  a  reef  which  spits  off  from  tho  east- 
ern side  of  tho  bay,  hauling  up  and  bringing  the  westernmost  part  of  it  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  to 
N.  W..  in  7  fatlioms.  There  is  another  reef  to  the  southward,  but,  as  the  water  isverj 
clear,  it  will  be  soen.  This  is  a  small  harbor,  frequented  by  merchant  vessels  only,  which 
go  there  to  load. 
Ora  Cabeca.  OR  A  CAB  EGA,  10  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Ocho  Rios,  is  another  anchorage,  ex- 
posed like  the  former  to  north  and  N.  W.  winds.  To  sail  in  here  when  advancing  from 
the  eastward,  first  make  Galina  Point ;  in  order  to  which,  when  off  at  sea,  bring  the  west- 
ernmost high  land  of  the  Blue  Mountains  S.  S.  E.,  which,  thus  kept  on,  will  load  to  tlie 
point.  To  anchor,  give  the  small  reef  on  the  east  side  u  berth,  and  when  the  westernmost 
bluff  point  bears  W.,  or  W.  by  N .,  anchor  iu  5{|,  G,  or  7  fathoms. 


but,  on  a  nearc 


WiiP"WP 


wm 


^mmm 


mm. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


383 


Galina 
Point. 


Captain  Livingston  says,  it  is  not  generally  known  that  in  Allan's  Hole,  which  is 
jorined  by  reefs  level  with  the  -water  on  the  one  side,  and  the  eastern  shore  of  the  bay 
on  the  other  side,  vessels  drawing  from  10  to  12  feet  may  lie  as  secure  as  in  any  harbor 
in  Jamaica.  When  once  inside  the  reefs  the  bottom  is  quite  clear,  and  the  reefs  com- 
pletely break  the  sea  off.  Vessels  drawing  not  more  than  12  feet  of  water  may  warp 
into  tills  place.  At  the  north  end  of  the  reef  is  an  islet,  with  bushes  on  it,  divided  from 
(he  main  land  by  a  narrow  and  shallow  channel.  Allan's  Hole  has  two  entrances  ;  one 
through  the  reef,  which  is  extremely  narrow,  and  one  by  the  point  of  tho  reef;  but  nei- 
tlier  ought  to  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 
GALINA  POINT  lies  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Ora  Cnbeca.  This  point  is  low.but 
tiie  land  to  the  southward  of  it  is  high ;  and  in  making  it  from  the  westward,  a  remarka- 
ble round  hill  that  stands  within  the  point,  will,  on  its  first  appearance,  form  the  point ; 
liijt,  on  a  nearer  approach,  the  land  slopes  off  to  the  northward  to  a  low  point. 
PORT  MARIA.— The  entrance  of  this  harbor  lies  in  lat.  18°  27',  and  long.  76°  53'.  Port  Maria. 
Its  anchorage  is  open  to  N.  N.  £.,  N.,and  N.  W.  winds.  In  coming  in,  the  high  island, 
named  Caburita  Island,  must  be  seen,  and  its  northern  point  should  have  a  berth  of  two 
cables'  length.  You  may  haul  into  the  bay,  and  anchor  with  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  isl- 
and N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  by  N  ,  at  the  distance  of  about  a  cable  or  a  cable  and  a  half's  length. 
Small  vessels  drawing  10  feet  of  water,  may  anrhor  between  the  island  and  the  main. 
The  bottom  is  foul  in  the  outer  part  of  the  bay,  and  many  ships  have  injured  it  by  heav- 
ing over  their  ballast.  There  is  not  room  for  more  than  ten  or  twelve  vessels  to  lie  here, 
as  the  foul  ground  extends  nearly  over  the  whole  harbor. 

From  Port  Maria  the  coast  trends  E.  S.  E.,  6  miles,  to  Blowing  Point;  thence  it  con- 
tinues S.  S.  E.  i  E.,  about  5  miles,  to  Anotta  Bay. 

ANOTTA  bay,  which  lies  about  11  miles  to  the  S.  E.  of  Port  Maria,  has  its  anchor-  Anolta  Bay. 
I  tee  open  to  N.  and  N.  W.  winds.  To  sail  in,  give  the  reef  on  the  eastern  side,  which  is 
called  the  Schoolmaster,  a  sufficient  berth ;  theu  steer  down  until  you  bring  the  tavern, 
ibulMing  easily  known,  S.  by  W.  or  S.  When  advanced  within  the  Schoolmaster,  haul 
a  little  to  the  eastward,  rind  have  the  anchor  clear,  the  bank  being  steep  and  narrow.  The 
irat  sounding  will  be  10  or  9  fathoms.  Let  go  in  7  fathoms,  which  is  about  a  quarter  of 
smile  from  shore,  with  good  holding  ground.     Be  cautious  of  anchoring  on  the  western 

ve  of  the  bank,  as  it  will  not  hold,  and  you  may  be  .n  danger  of  getting  on  shore  to  the 
I  westward. 

A  brig  of  war  was  lost  on  the  outer  reef  a  few  years  ago.  I  have  oflen  heard  her 
name  during  my  residence  at  the  bay,  but  it  has  escaped  my  memory.  She  was  so  fur 
out  that  no  one  bad  any  suspicion  that  she  was  in  the  least  danger  ;  and  it  was  only  in 
cuDsequence  of  her  loss  that  they  discovered  the  reefs  lay  so  far  out.  Mr.  M'Donald, 
harbor  master  and  senior  pilot  at  the  bay,  surveyed  the  reefs;  but  he  informed  me  his 
survey  was  forwarded  to  Port  Royal,  to  be  produced  at  the  trial  of  the  officers  nf  the 
rig  which  was  lost.     What  I  have  stated  above  was  from  his  information. 

The  earthquake  felt  in  Jamaica,  in  1811,  was  particularly  severe  at  Anotta  Bny.  Part 
I  of  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  ?  .  and  where 
lessels  used  to  anchor,  there  is  now  no  bottom  to  be  found  ;  or  at  lenst  i  n  >  >>  been  as- 
sured none  has  been  found,  though  I  heard  somebody  at  the  bay  say  that  it  tms  been,  at 
170  fathoms.  When  this  spot  sunk,  a  vessel  was  riding,  with  a  kedge  out  in  that  direc- 
tion to  steady  her.  In  an  instant,  us  an  eye-wituess  assured  me,  she  seemed  as  if  going 
down  stern  foremost,  and  then  suddenly  rising  again,  swung  round  at  once.  This,  it  was 
I  toon  discovered,  was  occasioned  by  her  kedge  being  swallowed  by   the  bottom  of  the 

t  when  it  sunk  ;  and  the  sudden  rise  of  the  vessel  again  was  caused  by  the  hawser, 
I  bent  to  the  kedge,  giving  way,  or  the  timber  to  which  it  was  attached  yielding. 

Anotta  Bay  is  an  extremely  unhealthy  place  ;  so  is  Port  Maria ;  but  Ora  Cabeca  is  a 
I  tolerably  healthy  situation. 

Of  Anotta  Buy,  Captain  Livingston  says,  "  This  is  the  wildest  road  I  ever  saw.     No 

I  vessel  ought  to  enter  it,  without  being  uncommonly  well  found  in  ground-tackle.     They 

ought,  by  all  means,  to  have  chain  cables.    The  following  is  from  memory  only  :  The 

reet  off  Gibraltar  Point,  the  Schoolmaster,  is  much  more  dangerous  than  is  generally 

supposed.    The  late  Mr.  Angus  M'Donald,  the  harbor  master,  informed  me  that  it  ex- 

[tends  fully  4j  miles  out;  and  some  places  have  only  from  6  to  9  feet  of  water,  while 

[there  are  gaps  or  gateways  through  them,  with  as  many  fathoms.'" 

PORT  ANTONIO,  which  lies  about  8  miles  from  tho  N.  E.  end  of  Jamaica,  was  for-    Port  An- 
I  merly  a  king's  port,  where  there  are  still  to  be  seen  the  remains  of  a  careening  wharf,    tonio. 
Ucc.    It  is  formed  by  nature  into  two  harbors,  divided  by  a  peninsula,  on  which  stands  the 
town  of  Titchfield,  to  the  N.  and  N.  W.  of  which  lies  the  island  called  Navy  Island,  ex- 
I  tending  E.  and  W.,  and  about  half  a  mile  in  length. 

I  To  sail  into  the  eastern  harbor,  fii-st  bring  the  eastern  part  of  the  Blue  Mountains  to 
[bear  about  S.  S.  W.,  and  steer  in  that  direction  until  you  approach  near  Folly  Point, 
I  the  east  point  of  the  eastern  harbor.  Next  bring  the  church  (which  is  a  large  square 
I  building,  on  the  side  of  the  hill  in  tlie  S.  W.  part  of  the  bay)  on  witli  the  second  wharf 


■■npB««liiiHKa«m>ni< 


^i^m 


384 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tides. 


from  the  westward,  bearing  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  you  will  thus  pass  safely  into  the  harbor  i 
But  observe  that  on  approaching  the  fort,  (which  stands  on  the  western  side,  upon  the  I 
point  of  Tltchfield  peninsula,)  to  open  the  church  to  the  eastward  of  the  wharf.  When  I 
the  fort  bears  N.  W.,  you  may  anchor  in  8,  9,  10,  or  11  fathoms,  good  holding  ground.! 
The  bottom  is,  indeed,  so  stiff,  that  it  is  rather  difficult  to  get  up  the  anchors.  I 

The  preceding  directions  must  be  paiticularly  attended  to,  la  order  to  avoid  a  r«ef  I 
which  stretches  from  the  eastern  end  of  Navy  Island,  as  well  as  from  the  point  of  the! 
peninsula.  The  eastern  side  of  the  harbor  is  shoal,  and  there  is  a  reef  nearly  in  the  mid- 1 
die.  having  over  it  only  8  or  10  feet  of  water. 

To  sail  into  the  western  harbor,  after  having  brought  the  church  well  open  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  fort,  proceed,  under  easy  sail,  into  the  entrance  of  the  channel  betweeal 
Navy  Island  and  Titchfield,  bringing  long  building,  which  is  a  store-house,  standing  on  I 
a  hill  to  the  westward,  open  of  the  ao  -th-western  point  of  Navy  Island.  T?hi8  mark  isl 
to  be  kept  on  until  the  church  appears  open  to  the  westward  of  the  peninsula;  then  haul  I 
round  to  the  S.  W.,  and  anchor  in  from  7  to  4  fathoms,  where  there  is  good  grovid. 

A  channel,  called  the  Hog  Channel,  leads  directly  from  sea  into  the  wester  harbor  l 
from  the  west  end  of  a  long  reef  that  extends  from  Navy  Island;  but  it  is  crooked  andl 
narrow,  has  only  13  or  14  feet  of  water  on  the  western  part  of  it,  and  is  therefore  usedl 
only  by  small  vessels.  I 

The  tides  here  are  not  regular,  being  influenced  by  the  winds.  The  variation  in  I771 1 
was  7°  15'  E.,  and  it  is  still  nearly  the  same.  I 

Of  Port  Antonio,  Mr.  Town  says  the  western  harbor  is  the  best,  the  eastern  beingl 
open  to  the  north  winds.  When  entering  the  port,  with  the  sea  breeze,  keep  as  nearlri 
in  mid-channel  between  Navy  Island  and  the  main  as  you  can.  Run  in  with  the  leadiog 
mark  on,  and  anchor  in  about  6  or  7  fathoms.  If  in  a  small  ship,  anchor  in  4  or  5  fath- 
oms, as  the  ground  without  the  latter  depth  is  foul.  i 
PortMorant.  PORT  MORANT — This  is  a  good  harbor,  but  the  reefs  extend  to  the  distance  ofj 
half  a  mile  from  shore,  on  each  side  of  the  entrance,  and  the  breadth  of  the  channel  be-l 
tween  is  only  a  cable's  length  and  a  half.  As  the  direction  of  the  entrance  is  N.  j  W.,| 
it  can  be  attempted  only  with  the  sea  breeze,  or  between  the  hours  of  10  and  2  in  theday.l 
To  sail  in,  aship  must  lay  N.,  or  N.  by  E.,  until  the  leading  mark  is  on.  This  inarkissi 
remarkable  house,  which  stands  upon  a  hill,  in  a  line  with  the  east  end  of  the  easterof 
most  red  cliff  bearing  N.  i  W.  With  this  murk  you  may  sail  into  the  bay  with  safety.l 
Take  care  not  to  approach  too  near  the  reefs,  but  bring  the  marks  exactly  as  described.l 
You  will  thus  have  9,  8,  74,  7, 6^,  6,  5,  and  a  quarter  less  5  to  4  fathoms  of  water.  There! 
is  anchorage  in  6i  and  7  fathoms,  with  the  leading  mark  on,  and  Pero  Battery,  which  isl 
on  the  eastern  side,  bearing  E.  S.  E. 

The  CAYMANS  are  three  islands  lying  between  the  meridians  of  79'  30',  and81°| 
35'  W.,  and  parallels  of  19°  10',  and  19^  45'  N.     The  larger  and  westernmost  is  naraedl 
the  Grand  Cayman,  the  second,  the  Little  Cayman,  and  the  easternmost  the  Cayniai 
Brack. 

The  Grand  Cayman  was  regularly  surveyed  by  Mr.  George  Gauld,  in  the  year  1773|l 
but  that  gentleman  ascertained  neither  its  true  latitude  nor  its  longitude. 

The  GRAND  CAYMAN  is  about  8  leagues  long,  and  two  and  a  half  broad.  Thel 
S.  E.  end  lies  in  latitude  19°  16'  N.,  and  the  N.  E.  point  in  latitude  19°  22'.  TheeasH 
ern  end  is  surrounded  by  a  reef,  extending  a  mile  and  a  half  from  shore,  which  thencsl 
extends  along  the  north  and  south  coosts.  Off  the  S.  W.  point  there  is  also  a  kevaDiij 
reefs,  to  which  a  good  berth  must  be  given.  The  N.  W.  or  W.  point  is  3  leagues  frdiil 
the  S.  W.  point,  and  between  is  the  spot  called  the  Hogsties,  where  there  is  n  smalhil-l 
lage,  off  which  you  may  anchor  in  from  12  to  7  fathoms,  by  bringing  the  southernniostl 
house  to  bear  E.  by  S.  at  half  a  mile  from  short  The  bottom  is  rocky,  but  you  may  seel 
the  ground  where  you  lot  go,  as  the  wnter  is  vi  ly  clear;  it  will,  however,  be  propertol 
buoy  up  the  cables,  and  steady  the  ship  with  a  Hinall  anchor.  I 

Coptain  Dalzel,  in  some  obsirvations  on  passing  the  Grand  Cayman,  has  said,  "Thel 
island  is  low,  covered  with  cocoanut  and  other  trees,  and  of  greater  extent  tiian  people! 
who  never  saw  it  generally  imagine.  The  north  side  forms  u  buy,  across  the  mouth  oil 
which  runs  a  reef  of  sunken  rocks,  which  may  be  readily  seen  in  the  diiy  time,  betore| 
you  are  near  enough  to  run  any  kind  of  risk.  It  is  totally  impossible  for  any  tiling  b 
small  craft  to  anchor  on  this  side,  for  there  are  no  soundings  close  to  the  reef,  and  t 
deepest  water  over  it  is  6  foot,  though  there  aro  2  or  3  fathoms  within  it.  The  sni 
vessels  of  the  island  go  in  here,  as  tl  3y  do,  likewise,  on  the  south  side,  which  is  also  fo 
and  not  to  bo  approached  by  stranoers. 

"The  west  end  of  Grand  Cayman,  which  is  best  inhabite  und  mostly  resorted  to, ill 
the  only  place  where  large  vessels  can  come  to;  though  even  here  it  is  but  iuditrerfDtT 
anchorage;  for,  without  the  utmost  care,  you  are  iu  danger  of  getting  your  oal)lesc'!i| 
by  the  rocks;  or  may,  perhaps,  let  go  your  anchor  in  a  piine  where  it  ninnot be pu'l 
chased.  Our  anchor  got  under  the  shelf  of  a  rock,  and  we  had  two  days'  hard  woriitol 
purchase  it ;  nor  could  we  have  weighed  it  at  all,  if  we  hud  not  borrowed  a  small  anchorl 


The  Cay 
mans. 


Thf  Grand 
Cayman. 


^mmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


9B6 


iation  id  1771 1 


':;e  rode  by  our  only  anchor,)  and  backed  with  a  swivel.  This  luckily  hooked  another 
^e,|f:  we  hove  upon  the  cable'that  was  fast  to  it,  and  then  with  much  difficulty  purchased 
jurown  anchor  from  under  the  rock.     We  came  to  in  11  fathoms,  but  most  of  the  in- 

kabitniits  say  that  H  fathoms  is  the  anchorage. 

I'Your  first  soundings  going  in  are  about  17  fathoms,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  offshore; 
ifter  which  you  shallow  your  water  2  or  3  fathoms,  every  ship's  length,  till  you  get  into 
(fathoms,  where  you  may  come  to  in  one  of  the  white  holes.  These  holes  are  patches 
of  sand  among  the  rocks,  which  you  can  easily  see  when  looking  over  the  side.  Let  a 
careful  person  look  out  forward,  to  pick  a  large  hole,  and  be  sure  you  let  go  your  anchor 
well  towards  the  weather  side  of  it,  that,  when  you  veer  away  cable  it  may  not  come 
upon  the  rocks.  If  it  should  come  to  blow,  and  you  are  in  danger  of  dragging  your  anchor 
lovrards  any  of  the  shelves,  you  must  heave  it  up  again.  You  can  plainly  see  your  an- 
ther as  often  as  you  please,  and  you  can  easily  distinguish  the  rocky  bottom  from  the 
Ltliite  holes,  by  its  blackness.  Observing  the  above  directions,  you  cannot  get  amiss; 
perhaps  you  do  best  not  to  take  a  pilot,  as  they  are  not  over  careful. 

"The'west  end  forms  a  kind  of  double  bay  ;  the  southernmost  is  the  road.     Give  the 
1  middle  point  a  good  berth,  as  some  rocks  lie  off  it :  you  need  not  heave  the  lead  until 
you  see  the  bottom,  for  you  will  get  no  ground  till  then."  * 

The  Grand  Cayman  is  inhabited  by  many  persons,  descended  from  the  old  buccaniers, 

I  esclusive  of  negroes.     The  climate  and  soil  are  singularly  salubrious ;  the  people  are 

vigorous,  and  commonly  live  to  a  great  age.     They  raise  various  produce  for  their  own 

use,  find  have  some  to  spare.     As  navigators,  their  chief  employment  is  to  fish  for  turtle, 

and  to  pilot  vessels  to  the  adjacent  parts. 

Refreshments  may  be  obtained  here ;  as  fowls,  turtle,  yams,  plantains,  cocoanuts,  &c., 
I  bat  no  beef  nor  mutton.  Water  is  procureu  by  filling  a  bucket,  about  twenty  yards  from 
I  tk  beach ;  the  well  bearing  N.  N.  E.,  or  N.  by  E..  from  the  anchoring  place. 

FiomtheS.  W.  end  of  the  Grand  Cayman  to  Cape  Corrientes,  the  true  bearing  na-} 
I  distance  are  N .  47°  W.,  74  leagues  ;  and  to  Cape  Antonio  N.  51°  W.,  84  leagues. 

THE  CAYMAN  BR\CK  is  very  level  land,  covered  with  small  trees,  and  at  a  short    Cayman 

fctance  presents  a  smooth,  unbroken  surface,   very  like  Navaza,  except  towards  the  S.    Brack. 

I W.  point,  where  there  is  a  small  bunch  of  trees,  a  little  higher  than  the  rest,  apparently 

logwood  trees,  as  they  are  small  leafed.     The  S.  E.  point  appears  very  bluff,  and  the 

I  south  side  also  very  bold  :  we  ran  down  it  at  less  than  a  mile  distant,  and  saw  no  danger 

lofimy  liind,  except  the  breakers  on  the  shore.     From  off  the  S.  W.  point,  which  is 

low  and  sandy,  a  reef  runs  off  an  eighth  of  a  mile,  but  you  can  easily  see  the  breakers, 

land  even  the  colored  water,  a  mile  and  a  half  distant.     We  were  not  far  enough  to  the 

[eastward  to  ascertain  whether  any  reef  extended  from  the  east  end  or  not;  but,  from  the 

appearance  of  the  S.  E.  point,  I  should  think  that  if  there  are  any  reefs,  they  do  i 

I  not  extend  to  the  southward  of  the  east  point.     The  east  end  of  the  Cayman  Brack  is 
1  llie  liighest,  and  with  a  slight  but  even  declination  towards  the  west  end.     The  Cayman 

Bnicii  is  considerably  higher  than  the  Little  Cayman,  and  before  leaving  the  Cayman 
iBriick  you  wdl  raise  the  Little  Cayman,  of  which  you  will  not  at  first  discern  scarce 
lunjr  thing,  except  three  large  cocoanut  trees  on  the  east  end  ;  and  which,  at  a  distance, 
lappeiir  like  two  vessels  at  anchor.  These  cocoanut  trees  are  the  only  ones  I  saw  on 
Ito  islHiid.  These  islands  are  separated  by  a  deep  channel,  and  are  resorted  to  by  the 
Itmtiers. 

C.VYMAN  BANK.— A  bank  was  discovered  in  July,  1839,  having  on  it  from  17  to  15    Cayman 
Ifallmms  water.  Bank, 

It  is  about  4i  miles  long,  in  an  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  direction,  and  from  a  mile  to 
\\\  mile  in  width. 

The  northeastern  end  is  in  long.  81°  32'  W.,  lat.  19°  20'  N.;  the  south-western  point, 
lions.  81°  36'  W.,  Int.  19°  18'  N. 

I'ICKLE    Bank. — On  this  bank  there  are  from  14  to  17  fathoms  water.     It  runs    Pickle  Bank, 
litout  W.  by  N.  4  N.     It  lies  in  lat.  '20"  18'  N.,  long,  80°  23'  W.     It  was  discovered  by 
llieut.  Holland,  in  H.  M.  S.  Pickle,  in  August,  1840. 


THE  li^LAIVD  OF  PORTO  RICO. 

THIS  island  is  thirty  leagues  in  length,  and  throughout  this  extent,  from  east  to  west, 
i  a  chain  of  mountains,  witli  branches  diverging  to  the  north  and  south,  and  extending 
0 the  coasts.  The  whole  are  covered  with  wood, and  in  the  intervals  are  fertile  valleys 
Ind  plains,  watered  by  more  than  fifty  rivulets,  in  the  sands  of  which  gold-dust  has  been 
pud.  Thehighost  summits  of  the  mountains  are  called  the  Peaks  of  Layoonita.  They 
pe  oflen  covered  with  snow,  and  may  be  seep,  from  a  great  distance. 

25 


mmmmimimmtm^im* 


■^Mfr^^iimimRpippiPippiMP 


mmmmm 


386 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Light. 


High  jvater. 


Vieque,  or 
Crab  Island. 


Carlit,  or 
Serpent's  Isl- 
and. 


The  cnpital,  St.  Juan,  stands  on  the  western  part  of  an  islnnd  on  the  north  .,„„ 
which  forms  a  good  harbor,  defended  by  a  citadel,  called  the  Morro  Castle,  and  other 
works.  The  town  is  populous  and  well  built;  the  see  of  a  bishop  and  the  residence  of 
the  governor. 

The  northern  i^oast,  which  extends  like  the  southern  coast,  nearly  east  and  WHst,  is 
but  imperfectly  known.  It  is  rugged  and  uneven,  having  many  rocks  and  isleta  on 
which  the  sea  breaiis  heavily.  Fifty  miles  north  from  Porto  Rico,  Captain  Baxter,  In 
brig  Robert,  struck  on  a  rock,  and  remained  several  hours.  The  town  of  St.  Juan, 
which  stands  at  the  distance  of  9  leagues  from  Cape  St.  Juan,  is  the  N.  £.  point  of 
Porto  Rico.  I 

There  are  no  large  bays,  either  on  the  northern  or  southern  coast,  and  a  vessel  mar 
generally  run  along  the  former  without  any  risk,  at  the  distance  of  three  miles,  and  along 
Uie  south  coast  at  five ;  fully  observing,  in  the  latter  case,  to  give  sufficient  berth  tu  the 
small  isle,  called  Dead  Chest,  which  lies  about  half  way  between  the  S.  E.  and  S.  W,  { 
points  of  Porto  Rico. 

On  the  Morro  there  is  a  light,  170  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  a  revolving  light,  shoffing  I 
eight  seconds  of  light  to  one  hundred  and  fourteen  seconds  of  darkness. 

The  harbor  of  St.  Juan  *  is  very  capacious,  and  the  largest  ships  may  lie  there  with 
the  utmost  safety,  in  5,  6,  and  7  fathoms.  The  entrance  is  along  the  island  on  which 
the  town  is  erected,  and  between  the  Morro  Point  and  three  islets,  called  the  Cubras,  or  | 
Goat  Islands.  South  of  the  latter  is  a  small  islet,  occupied  by  a  little  square  fort,  or  castle, 
called  the  Canuelo,  which  defends  the  western  side  of  the  harbor.  The  chanuel  is  gen- 
erally buoyed. 

The  western  and  southern  sides  of  the  harbor  are  flat  and  shoal.  The  western  side  of  I 
the  entrance  is  rocky,  but  in  the  channel  the  ground  is  generally  of  gi'avel  and  snud,  with  [ 
a  depth  of  5,  6,  7,  and  8  fathoms.  From  the  south  side  of  the  town,  a  low  point  of  land  I 
extends  to  the  southward,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  shoal.  Ships  generally  ride  to  the  I 
eastward  of  this  flat,  and  out  of  the  wash  of  the  sea,  occasioned  by  the  trade  wind,  which  | 
commonly  sets  directly  into  the  harbor. 

If  you  make  the  harbor  with  the  wind  southerly,  you  must  run  into  the  phannel  with  I 
all  the  upper  sails  well  set,  in  order  to  preserve  your  way,  when  you  come  under  the  lee  I 
of  the  Morro,  and  have  a  boat  out  for  towing,  or  to  carry  out  a  warp,  both  of  which  are  j 
frequently  necessary.  It  ia  high  water  in  the  harbor  at  8h.  21m.,  on  the  full  and  change; 
and  the  greatest  rise  is  about  one  foot  and  a  half. 

Off  the  eastern  coast  of  Porto  Rico  ar  e  numerous  keys  and  rocks,  which  cannotbe 
proar-hed  by  large  vessels,  and  therefore  serve  as  a  rendezvous  for  smugglers,  &c. 
fore  these  are  the  Isles  Culebra  and  Vieqne,  or  Snake  and  Crab  Islands.  The  passasejl 
among  these  isles  and  rocks  are  generally  deep ;  but  no  one  may  venture  in  who  is  not  I 
intimately  acquainted  with  the  place. 


Passages  between  St.  Thomas' 


Island  and  Culebra  and  Crab  Islands. 


In  this  channel  there  are  soundings,  with  20  fathoms,  on  the  west  side  of  it ;  and  a 
proaching  either  the  island  of  Culebra  or  Vieque,  it  is  shoaler.  We  had  10  fathom  I 
with  the  following  bearings  : — East  end  of  Crab  Island  S.  by  W.  i  W. ;  east  endofCulel 
brita,  N.  by  W.  |  W.;  and  Sail  Rock,  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  The  currents  set  through thisl 
channel  strong  to  the  westward,  which  would  render  it  necessary,  in  case  of  being  bef 
calmed,  to  anchor  before  you  are  drifted  on  the  western  shore. 

VIEQUE,  or  CRAB  ISLAND — It  is  of  moderate  height,  and  well  wooded.  Thel 
S.  W.  end  is  hilly,  and  to  the  westward  it  is  low  and  uneven.  On  the  west  end  isalowl 
and  sandy  point;  and  with  it  bearing  N.  by  E.,  about  one  mile  and  a  half,  is  thenucliorf 
age.  In  working  in,  do  not  bring  this  point  to  the  southward  of  east,  as  there  are  mil 
merous  shoals  between  it  and  the  east  side  of  Porto  Rico.  We  found  the  soundJDjsl 
regular,  and  li  mile  from  shore  you  will  have  6  fathoms.  The  shore  should  nott 
approached  nearer,  as  the  soundings  there  are  irregular,  and  the  ground  rocky.  Tliertl 
are  a  few  settlers,  principally  on  the  north  end.  There  are  two  sandy  bays  on  thewestl 
side  :  the  northernmost  is  bold  and  the  bottom  of  sand.  Vfou  may  approiich  ittowitliioj 
three-fourths  of  a  mile,  with  4  fathoms.  The  southern  one  has  a  rocky  bottom  :  souudf 
ings  irregular. 

CARLIT,  or  SERPENT'S  ISLAND,  sometimes  called  the  Groat  Passage  Isl 
is  more  than  6  miles  in  length.  It  has  numerous  reefs  and  keys  about  it,  which  require| 
a  large  berth  when  passing.  Off  its  eastern  side  is  Culebrita,  or  Little  Passage  M 
from  the  south  end  of  which  a  dangerous  reef  extends  to  the  S.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.,thifl 
miles.  To  the  west  of  the  southern  part  of  this  reef  is  the  harbor  of  Culebra,  which  ul 
two  miles  in  extent  from  the  entrance.  There  are  two  channels  into  this  harbor,  whicbl 
are  divided  by  a  bed  of  rocks,  and  bordered  with  reefs,  but  the  interior  is  clear  and  secure,  j 

*  See  Plan  published  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt,  1833. 


prunfor^his 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


387 


Great  caution  is  required  wtiqn  entering ;  but  a  pilot  lives  in  the  port.  Plenty  of  wood, 
water  and  fish,  may  be  obtained.  The  neighboring  keys  ace  famous  for  the  great  num- 
ber of  tropical  birds  which  breed  here. 

The  course  through  the  Virgin's  Passage,  on  the  east  of  Vieque  and  Calrit,  is  N.  W. 
by  K.,  or  rather  N.  N.  W.,  in  case  of  a  calm  and  lee  current ;  the  western  side  being 
foul,  and  without  wind,  it  is  dangerous.  Continue  on  this  course  until  Cape  St.  Juan, 
ihe  N.  E.  point  of  Porto  Rico,  beuis  W.  by  S.  or  W.  S.  W.,  and  you  will  be  clear  of  all 
danger. 

If  you  are  bound  down  the  south  side  of  Porto  Rico,  observe  you  will  see  the  S.  £. 
point  of  that  island  when  lying  at  anchor  at  Crab  Island  ;  it  bears  from  thence  S.  W. 
\V.  i  W.,  or  W.  S.  W.,  about  4i  leagues,  and  is  called  Pasqua,  or  S.  E.  Cape.  You 
may  run  down  till  you  come  abreast  of  that  cape,  within  tliree  or  four  miles  of  it,  and  then 
iteer  west ;  and  by  the  time  you  have  run  three  leagues  down  past  the  cape,  and  it  bears 
N.  G.,  you  will  see  a  large  breach,  or  shoal,  two  or  three  miles  in  length,  which  lies  three 
or  four  miles  from  the  coast.  By  keeping  a  mile  or  two  without  the  breach,  in  running 
down,  you  will  descry  a  small  building  by  the  water  side,  which  is  a  guard-house ;  and  by 
running  down  as  directed  until  the  guard-house  bears  N.,  or  a  little  to  the  wentherr-ost 
of  that  bearing,  you  may  haul  in  N.,  or  N.  by  E.,  for  it,  and  anchor  in  4  fathoms,  with 
the  house  bearing  N.,  or  N.  by  E.,  one  mile  distant,  and  the  west  end  of  the  breach  S.  by 
E.  This  place  is  called  Guayamo,  or  Yamma  Bay,  which  may  be  known  by  a  windmill  on 
ill,  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  anchorage,  and  is  much  frequented,  though  there 
13  no  other  shelter  from  the  effects  of  the  sea-breezes  than  the  reef.  In  going  in,  although 
i  you  give  the  west  end  of  the  reef  a  good  berth,  you  must  keep  the  lead  going.  The 
soundings  are  irregular,  from  5  to  7  or  8  fathoms,  whence  it  shoalens  gradually  in  shore. 
The  land  by  the  water  side  is  low,  but  up  in  the  country,  high  and  uneven,  as  before  ex- 

lained.    In  going  out  of  Guayamo  Bay  run  S.  S.  W.,  or  S.  W. 

From  Guayamo  Bay  the  next  trading  place  is  Salinas,  a  good  place  to  lie  in.  '1  he 
I  Caxa  de  Muertos,  or  Dead  Chest,  may  be  seen  from,  ond  is  a  guide  to  it.  When  at  the 
distance  of  from  two  to  tliree  leagues  from  Guayamo  Bay,  you  may  steer  W.  i  S.,  passing 
several  keys  to  the  northward,  which  lie  near  the  shore;  then,  having  run  to  a  sufficient 
distance,  haul  in  for  the  western  end  of  the  outermost  of  these  keys,  and  about  a  mile  or 
a  mile  and  a  half  off  that  end  is  a  reef,  or  sunken  key,  whicli  cannot  be  seen,  but  the  sea 
breaks  over  it ;  leave  this  to  the  westwwd,  and  run  with  the  westernmost  key  on  board, 

within  a  cable's  length.     This  key  is  bold  to,  but  shoaler  to  leeward,  towards  the  breach. 

The  guard-house  is  three  or  four  mi'es  from  this  key,  and  may  be  seen  before  you  get 

within.  You  may  run  in  boldly  for  two  miles  towai'ds  the  guard-house,  and  anchor  within 
I  a  mile  of  the  same,  in  four  or  five  fathoms,  good  ground,  and  moor  to  the  north-west. 

^VIlen  at  anchor  at  Salinas,  with  the  guard-house  bearing  N.  i  E.,  there  is  a  good  water- 
I  ing  place  close  to  the  water  side,  a  kind  of  lagoon,  which  will  be  about  N.  by  W.  from  the 
I  ship,  and  half  a  mile  to  westward  of  the  guard-house.     The  water  oppears  white  to  nearly 
ague  without  the  key.     The  soundings  are  from  12  to  7  fathoms,  very  gradual,  and 
I  there  \s  no  danger. 

Within  the  key  above  mentioned,  there  are  several  other  keys  a  little  to  the  eastward 
jof  it;  and  in  running  in  you  will  see,  at  about  three  leagues  to  westward,  two  small  koys 
latn little  distance  from  each  other,  one  appearing  double,  tlie  other  single;  you  leave 
Itheinto  windward. 

In  quitting  Salinas,  steer  outward  in  the  same  way  as  you  entered.  When  without  the 
Itty steer  S.  S.  W.,  until  the  Dead  Chest  bears  west;  you  may  then  run  down  boldly, 
Ipviug  that  isle  the  berth  of  a  milo.  There  is  a  small  key  about  a  cable's  length  from  the 
Is,  \V.  end  of  the  Dead  Chest,  to  which  n  berth  of  a  mile  and  a  half  should  be  given. 
lYou  may  then  haul  in,  and  anchor  under  the  lee  of  the  isle,  at  pleasure,  in  from  7  to  12 
lliithoins.  With  the  west  point  of  the  small  key  S.  by  E.  i  E.,  one  mile  and  a  half  distant, 
laii(i  the  north  end  of  the  IJead  Chest  N.  E.  i  E.,  there  are  10  fatlioms  of  water,  at  a  mile 
Ifroni  shove. 
CAXA  DE  MUERTOS,  or  DEAD  MAN'S  CHEST— This  island  is  on  the  south 
!  of  Porto  Rico,  and  bears  E.  h  S.,  36  miles  from  Cape  Roxo.    When  made,  it  appears 

1  the  form  of  a  wedge.  The  north  end  is  high,  the  centre  low,  and  the  south  end  has  a 
Kiir-loaf  mountain,  which  at  a  distance  appears  a  detached  island.  Tlie  anchorage  is 
jm  the  west  side,  off  the  low  land,  half  a  mile  off  shore,  in  8  fathoms,  in  the  following 

gearings: — Souih-east  point  of  the  small  island,  connected  to  Caxa  by  a  reef  above  water, 

•  W.;  the  only  sandy  bay  S.  by  E. ;  the  north-west  point  and  northern  peak  in  one,  east. 

There  is  no  danger  on  the  west  side  of  this  island,  and  off  the  low  land  the  soundings  are 

fegular;  but  to  the  northward  of  it  the  water  is  deeper,  and  you  will  have  17  fathoms 

klose  to  the  shore.    Off  the  southward  of  the  island  there  is  a  shoal,  which  breaks,  about 

plf  araile  off  sViore. 
PONCE. — Tho  town  und  harbor  of  Ponce,  lie  about  5  leagues  to  the  east  of  Guanico. 

[fo  run  for  *h\n  port  keep  a  mile  off  the  small  key  oft'  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  Dead  Man's 
It,  and  run  N.  W  i  N.,  or  N.  W.  by  N.     The  land  is  low  near  tlie  water,  covered 


'«*fWi*'l!l«'  »""■ 


888 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


with  mangrove  bushes  and  some  cocoanut  trees ;  but  the  houses  are  also  low,  so  that 
you  will  not  see  them  until  you  open  the  harbor.  In  running  over,  you  will  gee  a  low 
sandy  island,  which  you  leave  on  the  lurboard  hand.  It'  it  blows  fresh,  the  reef  which 
you  turn  round  on  the  starboard  hand,  will  appear  as  though  there  were  breakers  ncross 
the  mouth  of  the  harbor ;  but,  as  you  approach,  you  will  find  the  breakers  do  not  miike  olf  I 
far  from  the  bushes.  You  may  pass  them  within  two  cables'  length,  and  keep  Dearest  < 
the  shore  on  the  southern  side  of  the  harbor. 

In  proceeding  on  a  west  course  towards  Cape  Roxo,  that  cape,  when  first  seen,  np. 
pears  low,  grey,  and  like  two  keys.  A  shoal,  called  the  White  Grounds,  encompitsses 
the  cape,  and  extends  to  the  S.  W.  At  2  or  3  leagues  to  the  eastward  and  westward  of 
this  cape,  there  are  10,  12,  and  15  fathomb.  It  is  a  coral  bank,  and  close  to  the  outer  edgi 
no  bottom  is  to  be  found.  The  southern  extremity  bears  from  the  cape  S.  W.  i  W.,  i 
or  9  miles. 
Ouanko.  GUANICO. — On  this  coast  the  best  anchorage  is  in  the  harbor  of  Guanico,  5  leagues  I 

to  the  eastward  of  the  Morillos:  it  is  (it  for  vessels  of  all  classes,  with  from  oi  to  3  t'liih- 
oms  of  water,  which  latter  depth  is  found  in  its  interior.      The  bottom  is  of  sand 
gravel.     The  mouth  of  the  harbor  is  in  the  middle  of  the  bay,  formed  by  the  point  and  I 
clilf  of  Brea  (Pitch  Point)  on  the  west,  and  that  of  Picua  on  the  east.     In  the  neigh- 
*  borhood  of  this  last  are  two  islets,  and  from  them  to  Punta  de  la  Meseta,  which  is  tlie  I 

east  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  there  is  a  reef,  which  reaches  out  from  tiie 
coast  about  a  mile,  and  nearly  forms  a  circle,  uniting  at  one  end  with  the  islets,  and  at  | 
the  other  with  Punta  de  la  Meseta. 

Between  Punta  de  Brea  and  Punta  de  los  Pescadores.  (Fisherman's  Point,)  which  I 
last  is  the  west  point  of  the  mouth  of  the  port,  the  coast  forms  another  bay,  of  which  I 
the  mouth  is  shut  by  a  reef  that,  running  out  from  Punta  de  Pescadores,  ends  on  tiiel 
south  side  of  the  bay,  about  a  mile  within  the  point  and  cliff  of  Brea.  It  is  necessary  I 
not  only  to  give  a  berth  to  the  reef  which  runs  from  Punta  de  Picua  to  Punta  de  lu  Me- 
seta, but  also  to  a  rocky  shoal,  which  stretches  out  a  short  half  mile  from  it. 
■»  To  enter  this  harbor  you  must  steer  on  the  outside  of  these  banks  or  reefs.     To  do  I 

this,  bring  the  Punta  de  la  Meseta  exactly  in  one  with  one  of  the  Paps  of  CerroGordoJ 
which  are  at  some  distance  inland.  If  you  run  in  with  the  point  in  one  with  the  western  I 
Pap,  you  will  have  the  bank  very  close,  but  will  have  10  fathoms  of  water;  hut  if  you | 
run  in  with  Punta  de  la  Meseta  in  one  with  the  eastern  Pap,  you  will  pass  without anyl 
risk  whatever.  You  will  have  passed  the  shoal  when  the  islets  at  Punta  Picua  bear£,| 
i  N.,  or  perhaps  a  little  sooner. 

If  you  advance  to  the  harbor  by  Punta  de  Brea,  or  Pitch  Point,  you  may  puss  Ihiil 
point  or  bluft'  at  a  cable's  length,  and  thence  steer  to  within  the  Punta  de  la  Mesela,! 
passing  it,  if  necessary,  at  a  quarter  of  a  cable's  length,  and  thence  proceeding  for 
interior  of  the  harbor,  only  observing  that  you  may  make  bolder  with  the  suuth  thdol 
with  the  north  side  of  the  entrance.  You  may  anchor  where  you  please,  iu  4  or  ok 
oms  of  water. 
Mayaguez.  MAYAGUEZ. — By  Capt.  Andrew  Scott,  1846. — The  best  leading  mark  in,  is  a  1 
about  10  miles  inland,  with  a  double  summit,  called  Montoso,  in  range  with  the  custom-{ 
house,  (which  has  one  steeple,)  beiiring  E.  by  S.  i  S. 

In  beating  in,  stand  to  the  N.  until  the  custom-house  and  church,  (which  has  twol 

steeples,)  come  in  range,  sounding  for  the  Manchiis,  and  to  S.  tack,  before  Montoso  ranseJ 

'-.''  with  the  church,  until  you  have  over  5  fathoms  inside  the  bur:  when  the  land  S.  ot'tiu-f 

anagiva  shuts  in  behind  it  you  are  inside  all  the  reefs  south  of  Algarroba. 

The  Manchas  extend  about  3  miles  W.  N.  Westerly  from  Algarroba  Point:  thesniinil- 
ings  upon  them  are  very  irregular;  the  least  water  found  was  2i  fiithoms;  tiie  hottoiul 
shows  very  plain,  the  brown  spots  being  generally  shoalest:  they  break  sometimes  inj 
rough  weather.  There  is  a  good  channel  inside  from  Anasco  Bay,  giving  Algarroba Reeff 
a  small  berth,  and  taking  care  not  to  haul  round  it  until  iVIontoso  opens  to  the  south  of  aj 
white  sugar-house  chimney,  (Vice's,)  wliich  stands  conspicuously  near  the  shore,  iN'.of 
Puntilla. 

Algarroba  Reef  is  nearly  bare,  and  is  bold  to  the  south-westward.    Vigo's  white chim-j 
ney  on  with  Montoso,  is  the  mark  for  it.     They  intend  to  erect  a  lighthouse  on  the[ 

The  Puntilla  Reefs  are  nearly  dry,  and  bold  to  the  south-westward. 

The  church  and  Montoso  in  range,  lead  into  12  feet  water,  on  the  bar. 
\  Montoso  shut  in  with  a  hill  south  of  the  church,  having  a  remarkable  red  road  upon  thij 

side  of  it,  is  the  range  for  Piedra  Blanci,  which  has  only  8  feet  water  in  one  spot. 

The  Rodriguez  Reef  is  dry  in  several  spots,  and  always  shows  itself.     There  is  apm 
sage  through  the  midst  of  it,  about  N.  E.  by  E.;  least  depth  12  feet,  green  water.    TJ 
the  N.  and  N.  N.  W.,  for  nearly  two  miles,  the  soundings  are  irregular,  and  tiiere  arf 
probably  spots  having  less  water  than  what  is  marked. 

Zacheo  Island  is  22  miles  N.  60°  W.  (true)  from  Guanagiva,  and  2i  N.  62°  W.  fronj 
Algarroba. 


W, 


r 


mmm^ 


mmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  389 

Lnt.  of  custom-house,  N 18*  13'  00" 

Loog. of        do  (by  French  survey )W.  from Grnenwich.. 67  12   45 

Do  do  (English  charts)        W.  do  ..67  08   00 

Tides  rise  and  fall  two  to  four  feet ;  time  irregular. 

Description  of  Porto  Rico,  from  the  "  Derrotero  de  las  Antillai"  Sfc.  Tidet. 

Tliis  island  is  31  leagues  'n  length  from  east  to  west,  and  11  leagues  in  breadth  in  the 
broadest  part.  The  N.  E.  point  of  it  is  named  Juan,  (St.  John's  Head,)  where  the  range 
of  mountains,  called  Luquillos,  commences.  The  highest  part  of  these.  El  Yunque.  or 
the  Anvil,  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  68  miles.     The  range  continues  to  the  westward  ' 

vltli  many  intervals  or  openings,  until  it  ends  at  the  hill  named  Silla  de  Caballa,  (Horse's 
Saddle,)  which  is  to  the  southward  of  Arrecibo. 

The  (larbor  of  San  Juan  requires  a  pilot.  The  harbor  of  Arrecibo  is  about  9i  leagues 
more  to  the  west ;  it  has  a  small  town  on  its  wester .i  side,  and  a  good  river,  but  is  little 
Irequented,  being  open  to  the  north  winds.  From  It  rrecibo  the  coast  trends  nearly  true 
(test  to  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  island.  The  land  here  is  generally  low,  until  it  reaches 
PuntA  de  Pena  Agujereada,  (or  Point  of  the  Holed  Rock,)  where  a  kind  of  cliffy  high 
land  begins,  which  trends  S.  W.,  rather  more  than  a  mile,  to  Point  Bruguen,  the  north- 
westernmost  point  of  Porto  Rico.  The  coast  again  declines  in  height,  and  forms  a  con-  , 
tex  bow,  to  Punta  de  Penas  Blancas,  (Whitestone's  Point,)  the  north  point  of  Aguada 
Bay. 

AGUADILLA  BAY,  called  Aguada  on  some  charts. — From  the  Point  Penas  Blan-   Aguadilla 
m,  the  little  town  of  Aguada  bears  S.  S.  E.,  2  miles.    In  the  bay  before  the  town,  or   Bay, 
rather  village,  is  anchorage  for  the  largest  ships,  with  shelter  from  the  sea  breeze.    This 
bay  may  be  entered  at  any  hour  of  the  day,  with  facility  and  safety ;  but  not  at  night,  as 
)  breeze  then  dies  away,  and  a  calm  ensues.     There  is  excellent  water  to  be  obtained 
I  atarivulet  which  pusses  through  the  middle  of  the  village.     The  situation  of  the  latter, 
I  as  given  by  the  Spanish  officers,  is  Int.  18°  25' 53",  long.  67°  C  20'.  *   , 

This  bay  is  much  frequented  by  vessels  bound  from  Europe  to  Cuba,  both  on  account 
I  of  the  facility  with  which  they  can  procure  refreshments,  and  because  pilots  for  the  Ba- 
hama, or  Old  Channel,  may  always  be  found  here.  If  intending  to  anchor  in  Aguada 
Bay,  after  rounding  Point  Bruguen,  keep  about  three  cables'  length  from  tlie  shore,  in 
order  to  give  berth  to  a  shoal  which  spits  out  from  Punta  de  las  Palmas ;  whence  to  that 
of  Penas  Blancas,  you  may  approach  the  coast  nearer,  as  it  is  very  clean;  and  at  half  a 
cable's  length  from  the  shore  you  may  find  four  fathoms  of  water. 

To  anchor,  bring  Point  Aguada  N.  N.  W.,  2  or  3  miles,  the  church  tower  E,  N.  E., 

I  the  Island  of  Zacheo  W.  by  S.,  when  you  will  be  in  10  fathoms  water,  about  three  cables' 

length  from  the  shore  :  there  is  a  good  river  of  fresh  water ;  the  sea  in  general  smooth, 

with  usual  trade  wind  ;  but  should  the  wind  incline  to  the  northward,  avoid  anchoring, 

I  or  weigh  as  soon  as  it  sets  in. 

At  S.  W.  by  W..  74  miles  from  the  village  of  Aguada,  is  Point  St.  Francisco,  with 

I  various  rocks  about  it.     All  the  coast  between  has  a  beach,  with  many  shonls,  formed  by 

I  rivers  that  empty  themselves  into  the  sea.     At  two  cables'  length  from  the  coast  are 

Ufathoms  of- water,  with  bottom  of  rocks  and  sand;  but  there  is  no  anchorage.  ^  At  S. 

W.  by  S.,  rather  less  than  half  a  mile  from  Point  St.  Francisco  is  Point  Guigero,  the 

I  vestenmost  Point  of  Porto  Rico,  otherwise  called  El  Rincon.    About  it  the  ground  is 

hoal,  with  many  rocks. 

Remarks  on  Aguadilla  Bay,  <^.,  hy  Capt.  John  Mackellar,  R.  N. 

"The  town  is  in  lat.  18°  24'  57",  and  long.  67°  8'  15".  In  proceeding  for  the  anchor- 
I  age  from  the  northward,  you  may  run  round  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island,  about  S.  W., 
orS.  S.  W.,  within  a  mile  of  the  shore;  your  depth  of  water  will  be  20  or  25  fathoms. 
Point  Bruguen,  the  N.  W.  point,  is  a  high  steep  cliff;  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of 
it  18  Point  Palmas,  a  low  sandy  point,  covered  with  trees.  The  latter  forms  the  north 
I  side  of  the  bay  ;  and  in  rounding  you  must  give  it  a  berth  of  a  mile,  as  a  reef  stretches 
lolf  atthnt  distance.  Having  rounded  this  reef,  with  the  bay  fairly  open,  you  will  see 
Ithetown,  lying  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  the  bay,  with  straggling  houses  to  the  S.  W.,  for 
I  two  miles.  The  anchorage  is  before  the  town  and  near  the  shore.  The  whole  of  the 
I  bay  is  perfectly  clear,  with  the  exception  of  the  white  reef,  (Penas  Blancas,)  extending 
Ifrom  Point  Palmas  ;  and  you  may  stand  to  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore  any  where, 
Iforthe  depth  of  water  will  not  be  less  than  7  or  8  fathoms.  The  marks  for  anchoring 
hre,  a  large  house  standing  by  itself,  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  north  end  of  the 
Itovvn.  Between  it  and  the  town  is  a  small  battery  of  three  guns.  Bring  this  house  to 
Ibear  N,  E.  4  N.,  the  church  steeple  E.  4  S.,  and  the  north  point  of  the  bay  N.  by  W. 
jHere  you  will  have  18  fathoms,  and  very  good  bottom,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  shore. 
IThe  anchorage  is  very  good  further  in  shore,  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms.    If  you  moor, 


^pp^" 


l«pWf^p^pw""^WWF' 


■■i 


300 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Skoals  off  the 
West  Coast, 


lay  your  anchor  in  10  fhthoma,  and  outer  one  from  15  to  18.  There  is  alao  good  anchor- 
age in  from  20  to  24  fathoms,  but  there  you  are  more  liable  to  drive  olf  the  bank.  In 
shore  the  anchorage  is  so  extensive,  that  you  can  hardly  err  in  anchoring  any  way  before 
the  town.  The  winds  are  frequently  variable,  and  render  it  difficult  to  get  up  to  the  an- 
chorage. At  times  the  sea  breeze  blows  fresh  over  the  land  from  the  N.  £. ;  then  you 
may  beat  in  with  ease. 

"  In  the  winter  months,  when  the  north  wind  blows  strongly,  there  is  a  heavy  swell  into 
the  bay,  and  groat  surf  on  the  beach.  Large  ships  ought  not  then  to  anchor  liirtiierin 
than  from  23  to  25  fathoms  ;  they  will  thus  have  room  to  get  under  way  and  work  out 
in  event  of  its  coming  on  to  blow ;  and,  as  the  west  point  of  the  bay  bears  from  the  on- 
chorage  S.  W.  i  W.,  a  ship  will  lay  out  with  the  wind  at  N.  W.,  and  may  run  through 
between  Zacheo  and  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island. 

*'  Sliips  coming  from  thtt  southward  for  Aguada,  may  also  pass  between  Zacheo  and 
the  island ;  and  when  Zacheo  bears  W.  by  S.  they  will  have  the  bay  fairly  open,  and  mny 
work  up  as  above  ;  talking  care  to  keep  the  west  point  of  the  island  bearing  to  the  south- 
ward of  east ;  for,  olf  it,  there  is  foul  ground  all  the  way  to  the  southward,  as  far  us  Cape 
Roxo,  but  all  clear  to  the  northward. 

"  From  Point  Guigueni,  (says  the  Derrotero,)  the  coast  trends  S.  E.  by  S.,  three  and 
a  half  miles,  to  Punta  de  la  Cadena,  having  one  small  bay,  named  Del  Rincon,  which, 
although  well  sheltered  from  the  sea  breeze,  has  a  very  unequal  bottom,  and  is  full  of 
rocks.  After  Punta  de  la  Cadena  follows  that  of  Algarroba,  which  lies  S.  E.  j  S.  from 
the  former.  Between  these  points  lies  the  bay  of  Annsco,  fit  for  vesBols  of  any  size,  in 
which  they  will  bo  completely  sheltered  from  the  norths,  or  north  winds.  The  coast  h 
all  beach,  and  the  bank,  or  shallow  water,  which  extends  from  it  about  half  a  mile,  is  pro- 
bably formed  by  the  F..iver  Anasco,  which  disembogues  at  this  place. 

"The  Punta  de  Algarroba  is  the  north  point  of  the  Bay  of  JMayaguez,  and  lies  nearly 
N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  with  the  south  point,  named  Punta  de  Guauagiva :  the  distance 
between  them  being  about  4  miles. 

"  The  anchorage  of  Mayaguez  is  well  sheltered  fr»m  the  norths,  and  fit  for  brigs  and 
ships,  provided  they  are  not  very  large  ;  but  a  good  knowledge  of  its  entrance  is  necessary, 
in  order  to  avoid  a  shoal,  which  stretches  out  about  half  a  mile  from  Punta  del  Algarroba, 
It  is  necessary,  also,  to  give  a  berth  to  the  Puntilla,  or  Little  Point,  for  a  reef  stretches 
out  about  two  cables'  length  from  it. 

"  To  the  westward  of  Punta  del  Algarroba,  and  about  a  large  mile  from  the  const,  tliere 
is  a  rocky  shoal,  named  Las  Manchas,  with  4  fathoms  of  water  on  it ;  but  vessels  may 
pass  very  well  between  it  and  the  shore. 

"  A  little  without  the  line  of  the  two  points,  and  about  half  way  between  them,  isn 
rocky  shoal,  stretching  nearly  N.  and  S.  Its  length  is  about  half  a  mile,  and  its  greatest 
breadth  not  much  less;  it  is  named  Baxode  Rodriguez,  (Rodrigo's  Shoal.) 

"  To  anchor  in  the  part  of  the  bay  which  is  best  sheltered,  having  rounded  the  Little 
Point,  (Puntilla,)  place  yourself  in  such  a  situation  that,  when  the  Island  Desecheois 
directly  astern,  you  will  have  the  highway  of  the  town  of  San  German  exactly  ahead. 
St.  German  is  upon  a  hill,  which  is  pretty  high  and  pointed.  The  highway  is  of  red  earth, 
and  winding  like  a  snake ;  and  there  can  be  no  danger  of  mistaking  it,  as  there  is  no  other. 
Run  thus  until  being  something  to  the  southward  of  the  Little  Point,  you  mny  lulf  up 
and  anchor  within  it,  in  either  3  or  4  fathoms,  as  you  may  think  proper.  The  River 
of  Mayaguez  runs  into  the  sea  at  the  bottom  of  this  bay  ;  and  in  it  the  schooners  and 
sloops  for  the  most  part  winter,  as  it  is  the  best  anchorage  on  the  west  const  of  the 
island. 

'♦  South  from  Punta  de  Guanagiva,  about  5i  miles,  is  Puerto  Real  do  Cabo  Roxo:  its 
figure  is  almost  circular,  and  the  extent  fi'om  west  to  east  is  about  three-quarters  of  n  mile. 
At  its  entrance  are  3  fathoms  of  water,  and  in  its  middle  16  feet.  The  entrance  is  by  a 
very  narrow  channel,  near  the  south  point  of  the  harbor,  and  from  the  north  point  a  great 
reef  stretches  out,  which,  doubling  Cnyo  Fauduco,  ends  at  Puxto  de  Veras. 

"S.  S.  W.  from  this,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles,  is  the  Punta  de  Guaniguilln,  which 
is  the  north  point  of  a  bay  named  Del  Boquoron  ;  this  is  so  full  of  reefs  as  not  to  allow 
anchorage.  Punta  de  Melones,  (Melon  Point,)  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  bay,  is 
distant  from  the  first  (Guaniguilla)  about  two  and  a  half  miles,  or  a  little  more  ;  and  nearly 
West  from  this  point,  at  about  six  and  a  half  miles  distant,  is  the  Baxo  de  Gallardo,  (Gil- 
liard's  Shoal,)  of  which  we  shall  speak  heai-after.  Along  the  whole  of  the  west  coast 
the  Monte  (or  Hill)  de  la  Atalaya  may  be  seen.  It  is  the  highest  and  most  northerly 
peak  of  the  two,  which  are  seen  on  the  highest  part  of  the  mountain  range,  and  which 
stands  S.  E.  by  E.,  true,  from  the  Punta  de  San  Francisco,  and  which  docM  not  niter  the 
appearance  of  its  shape,  even  when  you  are  to  the  southward  of  the  Isle  Desm  lii'n  " 

SHOALS  OFF  THE  WEST  COAST.— Besides  the  shoals  on  this  const  already 
noticed,  there  a"fl  several  other?,  which  we  shall  now  describe. 

"  Ist.  That  denominated  Baxo  Negro,  (Black  Shoal,)  which  is  a  reef  of  very  small 
extent,  and  upon  which  the  sea  always  breaks.    It  is  distant  from  the  nearest  coast  alwut 


mm 


mmt 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 
3)  milos,  nnd  lies  W.  S.  W.  i,  W.  From  Punta  Guanugiva,  and  S.  ]  E.  from  Punta  de 

"jd.  That  called  Media  Luna,  (Half  Moon,)  which  is  a  reef  of  about  two-thirds  of  a 
mile  in  length,  north  and  south,  and  about  two  and  a  half  ciibluit'  length.  The  sua  nl- 
nn  breaks  upon  it ;  it  is  about  5  miles  from  the  coast ;  half  a  mile  from  it,  about  E.  N. 
C,  tiioft^  are  three  rocks  which  show  above  water,  and  on  which  the  sea  always  breaks. 
The  northern  extremity  of  the  reef  is  nearly  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Punta  de  6uanagiva 
li  south  from  Punta  de  Ouiguera. 

"3(1.  That  named  Las  Coronas,  (the  Crowns,)  which  are  shoals  of  sand,  on  which  at 
times  the  sen  breaks,  and  the  extent  of  which,  in  all  directions,  is  scarcely  a  mile.  It  is 
iboutthree  and  a  half  miles  distant  from  the  coast,  and  boars  nearly  S.  W.  by  S.  from 
Puiitftde  Guanagiva,  and  S.  i  E.  from  Punta  de  Guiguera. 

'4th.    A  shoal  which  lies  to  the  westward  from  Punta  de  Gunniguilla  at  the  distance 
I  of  two  miles.    It  may  be  about  two  cables'  lengtli  in  extent,  and  there  are  throe  fathoms 
of  water  upon  it ;  the  bottom  is  rocky.     It  bears  S.  by  W.  i  W.  from  the  Punta  de  Gu- 
anagiva, and  S.  I  E.  from  Punta  de  Guiguera. 
"5th.  Baxo  de  Gallardo,  which  is  almost  due  west  from  Punta  de  Melones,  and  six 
miles  and  a  half  distant  from  it.    Its  extent  is  about  throe  cables'  length,  and  the  least 
depth  of  water  on  it  is  3  fathoms,  with   rocky  bottom.     It  lies  with  the  Isle  Desechoo 
I  bearing  N.  by  W.  ?  W..  Monto  de  Atalaya  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  the  southern  extremity 
loftlieMorillosE.  S.  E." 

The  South  Coast,  from,  West  to  East. 

From  the  Morillos,  or  Little  Hills,  in  the  S.  W.,  to  Cape  Malapasqua,  which  is  the 

I  S,E.  extremity  of  the  island,  the  coast  is  of  double  land,  and  is  very  foul,  with  reefs, 

I  islets  and  shoals,  which  stretch  out  from  it.     In  the  middle  of  it  is  the  Island  Caxa  de 

Muertos,  or  Coffin  Island,  distant  from  the  Coast  4  miles,  and  foul  on  both  its  N.  E.  and 

I  on  its  S.  W.  sides. 

Directions  for  maldng  Porto  Rico,  Sfc. 

By  those  advancing  from  the  eastward,  and  bound  for  Porto  Rico,  every  precaution 
must  be  taken,  so  iis  to  avoid  the  dangers  of  Anegada.  This  island,  the  last  of  the  Vir- 
gins to  the  N.  E.,  is  so  low,  that  it  may  be  considered  rather  as  a  dangerous  shoal,  than 
L'  an  islnnd.  If  navigating  with  care,  and  with  certainty  of  the  situation  of  the  vessel, 
nothing  is  easier  than  to  cross  the  meridian  of  Anegada  on  a  parallel  above  IQ^,  and  so  to 
ran  down  afterwards  on  Porto  Rico,  as  to  make  the  land  to  windward  of  your  destined 
port:  thus  you  will  not  be  obliged  to  beat  up  again  for  a  distance  overrun,  at  the  ex- 
pense of  both  time  and  labor.  But  as  it  may  happen,  among  the  multitude  of  those 
who  navigate,  that  some  one  may  be  misled  by  an  erroneous  reckoning,  and  find  himself 
in  this  predicament,  we  recommend  it  to  such,  in  order  that  they  may  avoid  the  dangers 
of  Anegada,  and  also  avoid  overrunning  Porto  Rico,  that  they,  at  all  times,  shape  a 
course  to  make  the  islands  of  St.  Bartholomew  and  St.  Martin's,  (or  the  parallel  of  18°,) 
because  these  islands  are  high  and  clean,  and  there  is  no  danger  of  being  wrecked  on 
them,  although  sailing  by  night,  or  in  thick  weather,  so  that  you  have  a  league  of  hori- 
zon ;  for  that  distance  hero  affords  time,  either  to  steer  so  as  to  take  some  of  the  channels, 
or,  in  case  you  prefer  it.  to  haul  by  the  wind,  and  wait  for  day  light,  or  for  clear  weather. 
Neither  is  there  a  risk  of  passing  them  without  seeing  them  ;  and  even  if  by  a  combina- 
tion of  circumstances,  wliich  will  be  very  strange,  this  should  happen,  they  could  not 
(ail  on  the  following  day  to  see  some  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  by  which  the  situation  of  the 

I  vessel  might  be  rectified.  In  choosing  either  of  the  channels  between  St.  Bartholomew 
and  St.  Martin's,  or  between  the  latter  and  Anguilla,  we  should  prefer  the  latter,  because 
it  h«8  no  detached  islets  lying  off  from  the  principal  lands ;  and,  therefore,  running 
tiirough  it,  even  at  night,  it  is  not  so  unsafe.  Having  run  through  any  of  these  channels, 
the  course  must  be  made  to  the  south  of  the  Virgins,  and  thence  to  the  N.  W.,  so  as  to 
make  the  Cape  of  St.  Juan  of  Porto  Rico,  and  having  recognized  this,  you  have  only  to 
run  afterwards  as  may  best  answer  for  your  port  of  destination. 
From  the  Island  of  Porto  Rico  you  may  escape  from  the  region  of  the  general  or  trade 

I  winds,  into  that  of  the  variables.  .Tiorely  by  steering  to  the  north  ;  and  as  this  island  is  so 
far  to  windward,  it  is  easy  to  gain  nil  the  easting  that  is  necessary  for  going  to  the  lesser 
Antillas,  or  Caribbee  Islands.     You  may  gain  thus  to  windward,  and  beating  with  the 

I  breeze  without  being  under  the  necessity  of  running  into  liigh  latitudes  to  catch  the  vari- 
"es.    On  Porto  Rico  you  cannot  count  on  land  breezes  to  facilitate  the  getting  to  wind- 

I  ward,  for  on  the  next  coast,  the  utmost  is  that  the  breeze  calms  at  night,  but  no  land  breeze 
proceeds.  Lastly,  from  this  island,  you  may,  on  one  stretch,  catch  any  point  of  the  Co- 
lombian Main,  from  Laguayra  to  leeward.  « 


391 


mm 


mm 


392  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Oeneral  Direetionifor  the  making  of,  and  navigating  among,  the  Caribbee  hlandt, 
[From  the  Derrotero  de  laa  Antillu.] 

As  to  choosing  the  north  or  south  part  of  any  of  these  isles  for  makine  your  laod-riili, 
yon  ought  to  consider,  firstly,  which  point  is  nearest  to  the  port  or  rona  to  which  you 
are  destined ;  and,  secondly,  the  season  in  which  you  go.  In  the  dry  season,  it  is  to  be 
remembered  that  the  winds  are  gonurally  from  the  north-eastward,  and  in  the  rainy  tea- 
son  they  are  often  from  the  south-eastward.  Thus,  in  the  dry  season,  it  is  best  to  maike 
the  north  side,  and  the  wet  season,  the  south,  but  without  losing  sight  of  the  first  cud. 
sideration. 

There  can  be  no  mistake  in  recognizing  any  of  the  Antillas ;  and,  in  making  St.  Bur- 
tholomew's  and  St.  Martin's  alone,  can  there  be  any  doubt  on  seeing  at  once  the  emi- 
nences or  heights  of  various  islands.  That  this  may  not  mislead  any  one,  they  must 
remember  the  following  instructions  : 

When  in  the  parallel  of  St.  Bartholomew's  at  less  than  four  leagues  off,  if  there  be  no 
fog  or  haze,  the  islands  of  St.  Eustatius,  Saba,  St.  Kitt's,  Nevis,  and  St.  Martin's  appear 
plainly. 

The  mountain  of  St.  Eustatius  forms  a  kind  of  table,  with  uniform  declivities  to  tlie 
east  and  west.  The  top  is  level,  and  at  the  east  part  of  this  plain  a  peak  rises,  which 
makes  it  very  remarkable.  To  the  west  of  the  mountains  seems  to  be  a  great  strait,  (in 
consequence  of  the  lands  near  it  being  under  the  horizon,  or  seeming  drowned,)  ami  to 
the  west  of  that  there  then  appears,  as  it  were,  another  long  low  island,  the  N.  W.  part 
of  which  is  highest ;  but  it  is  necessary  not  to  be  deceived,  for  all  that  land  is  part  of  tlie 
land  of  St.  Eustatius.  From  this  station  Saba  appears  to  the  N.  W. ;  it  is  not  eo  hi^h 
as  St.  Eustatius,  and  apparently  of  less  extent  than  the  western  part  of  St.  Eustatius, 
which  is  seen  insulated. 

The  N.  W.  part  of  St.  Kitt's  is  also  seen,  formed  by  great  mountains,  in  appearance aa 
elevated  as  St.  Eustatius,  with  low  land  at  the  east ;  to  the  eastward  of  this  low  land,  Nevis 
will  be  seen,  apparently  higher  than  all  the  others. 

The  lands  of  St.  Martin's  are  notably  higher  than  those  of  St.  Bartholomew's;  and 
this  island  appears  also  when  you  are  some  leagues  farther  distant  from  it  than  from  St, 
Bartholomew's. 

When  there  are  any  clouds  that  binder  St.  Martin's  from  being  seen,  there  may  be 
some  hesitation  in  recognising  St.  Bartholomew's ;  and  thus  it  is  proper  to  notice  thnt 
the  latter,  seen  upon  its  own  parallel,  appears  small,  and  with  four  peaks,  trending  noith 
and  south,  and  occupying  almost  its  whole  extent ;  and  if  you  are  not  more  than  8  leagues 
from  it,  you  will  see,  also,  the  appearance  of  an  islet  to  the  north,  and  another  to  the  south, 
at  a  very  short  distance.  As  this  island  has  neither  trees,  high  mountains,  nor  thickets, 
it  is  not  subject  to  fogs ;  and  it  may  therefore  be  seen  odener  than  St.  Martin's,  St.  Kitt's 
Nevis,  St.  Eustatius,  and  Saba ;  it  is  therefore  advisable  to  keep  its  appearauce  m 
mind. 

At  8  leagues  to  the  east  of  St.  Bartholomew's  you  may  see  Nevis,  very  high;  from  it 
to  the  west  the  strait  called  the  Narrows,  and  then  the  lands  of  St.  Kitt's,  appearing  to 
rise  out  of  the  water,  and  which  continue  increasing  in  height  to  the  westward,  so  that 
the  westernmost  of  two  mountains,  which  are  at  the  west  part  of  it,  is  the  highest.  This 
mountain,  which  is  higher  than  that  called  Mount  Misery,  has  to  the  west  of  it  a  gentle 
declivity,  terminating  in  low  land ;  and  it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  any  other.  To  tbeirest 
of  this  you  may  also  see  the  large  strait  towards  St  Eustatius ;  but  from  this  situatioe 
you  will  see  only  the  high  S.  E.  part  of  that  island,  or  rather  its  mountain,  in  consequence 
of  which  it  appears  like  a  very  small  island,  while  its  mountain  seems  to  be  lower  than 
Mount  Misery  ;  but  it  is  easily  known  from  the  table  which  its  top  forms,  by  the  uniform 
declivities  to  the  east  and  west,  and  by  the  peak  on  the  S.  E.  part  of  it.  Snba  seems, 
from  this  situation,  equal  in  size  to  the  visible  part  of  St.  Eustatius;  but  it  shows  oniyaa 
eminence  without  peaks,  with  uniform  declivities,  and  almost  round. 

If  a  small  islet  appears  to  the  west  of,  and  very  near  to  St.  Eustatius,  that  must  not 
confuse  you  ;  for  it  is  the  N.  W  extremity  of  that  island  ;  and  on  getting  nearer,  you  will 
perceive  the  land  which  connects  it  with  the  S.  E.  part.  Mount  Misery,  on  St.  Kitt'$, 
11  which  has  a  very  high  and  sharp  peak  on  the  eastern  part  of  its  summit,  seems  nt  a  dis- 
tance to  be  the  summit  of  Mount  Eustatius ;  but  it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  sucli,  if  you 
attend  to  ita  surface,  being  more  unequal  than  the  table  land  at  the  top  of  St.  Eustatius, 
and  that  there  is  another  less  elevated  mountain  to  the  east,  and  with  gentle  declivities, 
which  show  much  land  to  the  east  and  west  of  the  high  peak. 

On  no  part  of  Mount  Misery  can  any  resemblance  be  traced  to  a  man  carrying  another 
on  his  back,  and  which,  according  to  a  saying,  was  the  reason  why  Culumbo  named  this 
island  St.  Kitt's. 


'W 


lilandi. 


ur  land-fKll, 
which  you 
I  it  18  to  be 
le  rainy  aea- 
eat  to  make 
>e  first  CUD* 


A^-Wfi^ 


ing  St.  Bar- 
ice  tliu  eml- 
I,  they  must 

If  there  be  do 
rtiti's  appear 

livitieg  to  the 
rises,  which 
ent  strait,  (in 
rnpd,)  and  to 
>N.W.pnrt 
is  part  of  tlie 
is  not  BO  hi<;h 
$t.  Eustatius, 


.V 


iippearance  us 
iW  Innd,  Nevis 

lomew's;  and 
than  from  St, 


.A- 


there  may  be 
to  notice  thm 
rending  north 
liiin  8  leiigueg 
r  to  the  south, 
,  nor  tliici\ets, 
lin's,  St.  Kilt's 
ppeurauce  in 

high;  from  it 

,  iippearingto 

[twnrd,  80  that 

.ighest.  Tills 

of  it  a  gentle 

To  the  west 

this  8ituntioQ 

_  consequence 

|be  lower  than 

the  uniform 

Saba  seems, 

Lhows  only  an 

Ihat  must  not 
Jarer,  you  will 
I,  on  St.  Kitt's, 
leems  ataihs- 
■  such,  if  you 
ISt.  Eustntius, 
Itle  declivities, 

rying  another 
Ibo  named  tliis 


iW|B»,««ff.l', 


■"^WW^TW" 


\s 


VI KG IX  ISLANDS 


r      - 

'>5 

1-; 

1 

^'i 

L  1 

2 


\ 


< 

1 

1. 

> 

> 

5                       4      .,             t^^ 

•<• 
r 

iitii 

■8 
S 

i 

X 

^C'      ^' 

1 

<    < 

■5       ( 

'*4 


^v     :_ 


1 


i| 


(•« 


■!»ilt^'' 


^ 


r't^ 


t  « 


'i'^ 


^  ^. 


^f^ 

*«-^ 

*^*» 


^: 


'W- 


<.'* 


*«k«t») 


'7 


.y,;i-  >: 


/•///'//<.;,/  h\   I'.iiiiuiiiii  s  (.111  >(•  uiiiiii  /;:'/  /;; 


'^mi^fmnmmfT' 


'^Uipi<l 


nnn^BPiii  I   II 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


393 


When  you  are  6  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Bartholomew's  its  N.  W.  extremity  ap- 
Lars  insulated  and  has  the  aiJpearance  of  a  pretty  large  island,  on  the  top  of  which 
llere  are  four  small  steps,  (like  steps  of  stairs,  Escalones,)  with  a  considerable  strait  to 
Le  south,  between  it  and  the  principal  island.  In  the  middle  of  this  strait  you  may  also 
IfAasnialler  islet.  This  is  really  one  of  the  islets  which  surround  the  island ;  but  the  first 
lEOoly  the  N.  W.  point,  to  the  north  of  which  you  will  also  see  some  islets :  all  these  are 
loach  nearer  St.  Bartholomew's  than  St.  Martin's. 

Finally,  to  navigate  from  one  of  the  Antiilos  to  another  of  them,  there  is  no  more 
(ouble  than  what  a  simple  navigation  requires:  but  it  is  something  greater  when  you 
lliite  to  get  from  leeward  to  windward;  yet  this  will  be  reduced  to  a  trifling  considera- 
InoD,  if  the  navigation  ia  made  by  the  straits  which  are  to  the  north  of  Martinique,  and  in 
Ijhich  the  currents  are  weakest ;  but  the  same  does  tiot  follow  in  the  southerly  straits,  in 
Iwbich  the  waters  set  with  more  vivacity  towards  the  west ;  and  it  would  be  impracticable 
Iljthe  straits  of  Tobago,  Grenada,  and  St.  Vincent,  in  which  the  waters  run  ut  the  rate 
lelDOt  less  than  two  miles  an  hour. 


-//^n 


*  : 


WliVDWARD  AND  LEEWARD  IISLAlVDi^. 

UNDER  the  denomination  of  Windward  Islands,  we  include  the  whole  range  from  the 
IVirgins  to  Trinidad  ;  and  under  that  of  Leeward  Islands,  the  range  which  exists  between 
iTriiiidRii  and  the  Gulf  of  Maracaybo. 

The  Windward  Islands  appear  at  a  distan'^e  as  if  united  together  :  but  there  are  many 
Ideepchnnuels  botween  them,  through  wh-  'i  those  acquainted  sail  with  safety. 

The  Passage  Isles,  which  are  den':i)dencies  of  Porto  Rico,  and  the  Isles  of  St.  Croix, 
lor  Siinta  Cruz,  which  lie  to  the  southward,  were  originally  included  under  the  general 
Inaineof  the  Virgin  Islands. 

The  western  division  (Danish)  includes  the  Islands  of  St.  Thomas  and  St.  John,  with 
Itiie  numerous  islets,  as  those  of  St.  James,  Montalvan,  or  Little  Saba,  Savanna  or  Green 
lliland,  the  Brass  Isles,  Hanseiitic,  and  others.  The  eastern  division  (British)  includes 
iToitola,  Virgin  Gorda,  Anegada,  Jost  Van  Dyke's  Isles,  the  Thatch  Isles,  Normand's, 
IPeter's,  Salt,  Coopers',  Ginger,  Beef,  Camanoa,  Scrub,  and  Guana  Isles,  with  a  number 
lof  islets  in  their  vicinity.  The  whole  group,  Anegada  excepted,  is  high,  craggy,  and 
Imostly  bold  to. 

Toitola,  a  few  miles  to  th«^  N.  E.  of  St.  John,  is  the  principal  of  the  English  Virgin 
[Islands.  It  is  nearly  5  leagues  long,  and  2  broad,  but  badly  watered,  and  has  the  name  of 
|l)cing  unhealthy.     The  entrance  is  wide,  with  plenty  of  water. 

The  town  is  situated  on  the  south  side,  at  the  bottom  of  a  bay  2  miles  deep,  witii  a 
Ipretty  good  road  at  the  entrance,  with  12  fathoms  water,  good  ground. 

Virgin  Gorda,  that  is,  the  Great  Virgin,  or  Penniston,  more  commonly  Spanishtowu 
llsland,  lying  to  the  eastward  of  Tortola,  is  formed  of  elevated  land,  and  is  watered  even 
Iwoi'se  than  Tortola.  The  island  has  two  good  hiirbors,  the  largest  of  which  is  hat  called 
[East  Bay,  on  the  northern  side,  wherein  you  njay  anchor  very  safely  in  from  5  to  10  or 
llifntlmms,  to  leeward  of  the  island  called  the  Prickly  Pear;  but  the  entrai.re  is  narrow, 
Ibeinj;  obstructed  by  a  reef  on  each  aide.  The  next  harbor  is  that  called  the  Great  or 
IWeslBay,  which  is  in  some  degree  sheltered  to  the  west  by  the  islets  called  the  Dogs. 
iThe  roiidstead  here  has  very  good  holiiiiig  ground,  of  sand  and  ooze,  in  8  to  10  fathoms 
Icfwnter.  In  the  smaller  buy,  (Nilled  Thomas  Bay,  more  to  the  S.  W.,  vessels  may  an- 
Jclior  before  the  town,  in  fi  or  8  fathoms :  but  there  is  a  reef  in  the  middle  of  the  bay, 
Iwhich  stretches  north  and  south ;  and  there  are  likewise  many  rocks  in  the  bottom,  which 
Icbale  the  cables. 

The  course  from  Saba  to  Virgin  Gorda  is  N.  W.  by  W.  northerly,  above  26  leagues. 
IWhen  Virgin  Gorda  boars  from  you  N.  W.  by  N.,  7  leagues  off,  the  Virgins  appear 
|lilie  three  islands,  with  a  great  many  small  ones  about  them  ;  the  middlemost  is  the  long- 
est, iind  when  you  come  within  .'i  hMgues,  they  seem  lis  if  they  were  joined  together. 
The  best  mark  for  Virgin  Gorda  is  an  in>ii  i.itoil  hill,  of  moderate  height,  standing  near 
m  miildle  of  it,  and  which  i.^  easily  known  by  its  being  alone.  This  hill,  in  clear  weather, 
play  be  seim  ot  the  distance  of  7  leagues. 

Mr.  Lockwood,  who  «ui'veyed  those  isles,  says  that  under  the  lee  of  Virgin  Gorda,  the 
kround  is  so  clear,  that  300  sail  might  anchor  in  the  space  between  the  Dogs  and  the 
■Pulley.  The  North  Sound,  he  adds,  is  a  perfectly  secure  port,  and  of  great  capacity. 
The  entrance  between  the  two  reefs  is  not  difficult  to  discover. 

ANE(jADA,or  AN  AGADA,  is  the  most  northern  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  and  is  unhnp-   Aneqada,  or 
|iily  celebrated  for  the  number  of  wrecks,  accompanied,  in  many  instances,  with  a  heavy    Anagada. 
p  of  life,  which  it  has  occasioned. 


394 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST 'PILOT. 


Fallen  City, 
or  Old  Jeru 
salein. 


Tortolx 


Anegnda  is  nbout  the  size  of  Virgin  Gorda,  but  so  low  that  its  coasts  are  inundated  nt 
high  tides,  and  it  has  not  even  the  smallest  hummock  on  its  surface.  You  may  discern 
over  It  two  high  hills  on  Virgin  Gorda,  which  appear  like  a  great  hummock.  There  is 
good  water  on  the  low  part,  near  the  south  point. 

Within  the  last  20  years  above  50  vessels,  mostly  American,  have  been  lost  on  this 
dangerous  island  and  the  reefs  surrounding  it,  which  has  been  caused  by  the  strong  north- 
westerly current,  which  prevails  there  most  of  the  time  ;  its  average  set  being  about  one 
knot  per  hour  in  that  direction. 

Those  bound  to  St.  Thonms,  or  any  of  the  islands  in  that  parallel,  will  find  it  necessary 
to  take  every  opportunity  of  ascertaining  their  latitude  at  night,  as,  from  the  causes  above 
stated,  there  will  always  bo  a  great  uncertainty  in  their  position. 

'J'he  whole  of  the  windward  side  of  Anegada  is  bordered  with  a  dangerous  reef,  which 
thence  continues  under  the  name  <>{  the  Horse-shoe,  about  4  leagues  to  the  S.  E.,  and 
terminates  at  E.  N.  E.,  7  miles  from  Point  Pejaro,  the  oast  end  of  Virgin  Gorda.  There 
are  swashes  in  the  reef,  but  on  manj-  parts  only  2  to  (i  feet  of  water.  On  approaching 
the  isle  from  the  north-eastward,  the  hill  on  Virgin  Gorda  will  appear  over  it  like  a  gre»t 
hummock,  and  by  this  mark  the  rela:ive  situation  of  a  vessel  may  be  known. 

From  the  observation  of  R.  H.  Schomburgh,  who  has  made  a  plan  of  this  dangerous 
island,  it  appears  that  tlie  greatest  nun:Her  of  wrecks  on  Anegada  occurs  in  tlio  months 
from  March  to  June,  and  that  vessels  of  largo  burden  strike  usually  on  the  roefs  to  the 
south-east,  while  smaller  ones  generally  go  on  shore  further  west,  which  he  inii)utes  to 
the  wind  whicli  blows  frequently  from  S.  and  S.  E.  from  March  to  June,  thereby  in- 
creasing the  north-westerly  current,  in  consequence  of  which  vessels  bound  during  that 
time  for  these  islands,  are  more  subject  to  error  than  at  any  other  period,  and  that  hght 
liodies  being  more  influenced  by  the  current  than  lieavy  ones,  is  the  cause  of  the  small 
vessels  going  on  shore  farther  to  the  westward. 

FALLEN  CITY,  or  OLD  JERUSALEM.— A  very  remarkable  cluster  of  bro- 
ken rocks,  to  the  southward  of  Virgin  Gorda,  bears  this  name.  They  appear  to  have 
been  thus  left  by  some  great  convulsion  of  nature.  To  the  southward  of  these  is  a  large 
bluff  rock,  called  Round  Rock,  next  to  which  follows  Ginger  [sland.  Betwe-^n  the  two 
latter  is  the  general  entrance  into  Sir  Francis  Drake's  Channel,  which  is  called  the 
King's  Channel,  it  being  the  best  passage  inward  for  those  bound  to  the  Road  of 
Tortola. 

TORTOLA. — The  following  directions  for  sailing  through  the  King's  Channel  to 
Tortola,  have  been  comniunicated  by  Mr.  Bac!:I-,ouso : 

"  To  run  through  Sir  Francis  Drake's  or  the  King's  Channel,  between  tho  Round  Rock 
and  (linger  [island  towards  Tortola,  so  soon  as  you  make  the  land  of  Virjiiti  Gorda.  steer 
for  the  S.  W.  end  of  it,  W.  N.  W.  northerly;  and  when  you  are  within  six  or  seven 
leagues  of  it,  you  will  raise  the  high  land  of  Tortola,  and  also  the  highest  keys  and  isiiinds 
to  the  eastward  and  southward  of  it;  that  is,  beginning  with  the  easternmost  or  Round 
Rock,  Ginger  Island,  Cooper's  Island,  Salt  Island,  Dead  Chest,  Peter's  Island,  and  Nor- 
man's Island. 

Having  these  keys  in  sight,  steer  for  the  south  end  of  Round  Rock,  whicli  you  cannot 
mistake,  for  within  tiiree  or  four  leagues  of  Bound  Rock,  you  will  raise  the  low  keys 
called  the  Broken  City,  or  Old  Jerusalem,  which  keys  extend  from  the  S,  W.  end 
of  Virgin  Gorda,  in  a  S.  S.  W.  direction,  to  within  two  cables'  length  of  the  north 
side  of  Round  Rock:  these  keys  are  the  more  remarkable,  not  having  tiie  least  earth 
or  verdure  on  them,  but  are  merely  heapR  of  large  stones,  resembling  tlie  ruins  of  a  city 
or  island. 

When  at  the  distance  of  two  or  three  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  these  keys,  having 
the  Round  Rock  N.  W.  westerly,  steer  for  the  south  sidt«  of  the  rock,  keepinc  if  on 
board  as  you  run  through;  that  is,  keep  al)out  one-third  of  the  breadth  of  the  chaunci 
from  it  towards  Ginger  Island  :  this  caution  is  necessary  in  case  of  light  winds,  when 
strong  leeward  currents  may  liurry  you  close  to  Gingc^r  Ii^land.  The  course  through  Is 
nearest  N.  W.  by  W.  by  compass.  The  Round  Rock  is  a  barren  slate  rock,  and  the  east- 
ern cliH's  of  Ginger  island  are  also  full  of  slate.  The  channel  is  about  half  a  mile  over; 
you  nniy  pass  safely  within  a  cable's  length  of  Round  Rock,  at  which  distaiico  we  suuinied 
II  and  15  fathoms,  no  ground. 

Having  passed  Round  Rock  to  the  \V.  N.  W.  of  you,  on  the  island  of  Tortida,  you 
will  SCO  a  negro  town,  a  white  dwelling-house  and  a  fort.  Keep  to  the  westward  of  thjj 
mark,  steering  W.  by  N.and  W.  As  you  run  down  towards  Tortola,  the  (Nistcrnniest 
point  of  Tortola  Road  bears  nearest  west,  by  compass,  fi'orn  the  Round  Rock,  and  iniikes 
ns  shown  in  the  plate.  Von  may  see  with  a  glass,  at  the  same  time,  the  fort  and  llng-stiili' 
on  the  west  point  of  the  harbor,  from  which  extends  n  dangerous  reef:  the  eastern  poiiit 
is  a  craggy  blulT,  with  a  footpath  or  rond  winding  around  it.  The  first  soundings  in  run- 
ning down,  (with  the  hand-line,)  were  found  abreast  of  th<!  east  end  of  (iiugcr  Island,  15, 
13,  and  12  fathoms.  The  course  from  W.  to  W.  by  S.,  which  soundings  continued 
nearly  to  the  east  point  of  tho  road. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


895 


It  is  particularly  to  be  observed,  that  there  is  a  bay  to  the  westward  of  Road  Harbor, 
jjllitd  Sea  Cow,  or  Rogue's  Bay,  which,  by  strangers,  may  be  mistaken  for  the  road,  as 
ihepoiiits  make  alike.  Therefore,  when  drawing  near  the  eastern  side  of  Road  Harbor, 
if  jou  have  any  doubt,  look  to  the  S.  W.  quarter,  and  you  will  see  four  remarkable  per- 
pendicular rocks,  called  the  Indians,  oft'  the  N.  W.  end  of  Normand's  Island,  and  bearing 
j.W.  by  S.  (See  the  plate.)  At  this  time  the  easternmost  point  of  Tortola  Road  will 
bfnr  nearest  to  W.  N.  W.  4  W.  With  ihis  bearing  on  we  sounded,  and  had  8  fathoms 
about  liiilf  a  mile  from  Tortola.  Come  no  nearer.  We  found  no  ground,  after  8  fathoms, 
jiithe  next  cast  with  14  fathoms  of  line  :  and,  thinking  it  bold,  we  borrowed  to  the  shore, 
having  the  point  N.  N.  W.,  but  again  found  that  it  had  suddenly  shoaled  to  4  fathoms, 
then  at  3  cables'  length  from  the  shore.  Hauled  off"  W.  S.  W.  and  deepenei'  in  two  or 
three  casts  to  7  fathoms ;  and,  at  the  fifth  cast,  no  ground  at  15  fathoms.  Be  cautioud  to 
keep  at  least  half  a  mile  from  the  point. 

Yoii  now  open  the  Road  of  Tortola,  and  keep  your  eye  on  the  easternmost  or  weather 
shore  of  the  bay.  On  the  third  bluff"  point  in  you  will  descry  a  battery,  (Fort  Shirley,) 
abreast  of  which  ships  of  war  anchor.  Keep  to  the  westward,  until  you  open  the  next 
point  to  the  northward  of  this,  on  which  stands  Fort  George,  or  the  citadel,  with  a  flag- 
stuff;  bring  this  citadel,  (see  the  plate,)  north  westerly ;  then  haul  in  and  steer  for  it. 

As  you  steer  in  for  the  citadel  on  the  above  bearing,  keep  in  ]  0  fathoms  of  water ;  in- 
ijeed  tbe  mark  will  lead  you  in  14,  12,  and  10  fathoms.  You  anchor  abreast  the  point  of 
the  first  battery,  with  the  battery  bearing  N.  E.,  but  the  mark  for  letting  go  the  anchor 
istlie  flag-staff"  of  the  battery  on  the  west  point  of  the  bay,  in  one  with  the  south  end  of 
the  guard-house,  which  is  close  behind  the  battery  :  depth  10  fathoms,  and  about  one  ca- 
ble's length  from  the  shore.  The  western  battery  will  bear  nearest  S.  W.  by  W.,  west- 
erly. Moor  with  your  stream  to  the  N.  N.  E.,  because  the  ground  is  foul ;  and,  should 
)ou  part  your  bower,  your  stream  will  check  you  into  the  bay,  and  clear  the  reef  of  the 
western  point  of  the  road. 

The  merchant's  anchorage  is  in  from  10  to  13  fathoms,  on  the  western  side. 

In  proceeding  outward,  from  Tortola,  you  sail  outwoids  through  the  southern  channel, 
between  the  west  end  of  Normand's  Island  and  the  east  side  of  Flanagan,  or  between 
tiie  latter  and  the  east  end  of  St.  John's  Island. 

Mr.  Lockwood  says,  "  In  the  passages,  and  also  in  Drike's  Channel,  the  current,  run- 
ning quick  over  the  foul  ground,  causes  a  ripple,  which  wears  the  appearance  of  danger. 
The  anchorage  at  Tortola  is  not  good  ;  and,  when  the  convoys  rendezvoused  in  that  neigh- 
borboud,  experienced  masters  of  merchantmen,  usually  anchored  uuder  Peter's  or  Nor- 
mand's Islands,  both  of  which  have  good  bays." 

Current,  &c. — About  Vugin  Gorda,  and  the  passage  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  the  cur- 
rent runs  regularly,  setting  eastward  during  the  moon's  passage  from  the  horizon  to  her 
ztMiitli,  and  from  her  setting  till  she  arrives  at  nadir,  and  to  the  westward  while  the  moon 
passes  from  zenith  to  the  horizon,  and  from  nadir  till  her  rising.  The  rate  varies,  ac- 
cording to  the  breadth  of  the  channels,  from  two  to  five  and  a  half  knots,  and  the  rise  is 
from  20  to  40  inches. 

ISLAND  OF  ST.  JOHN.— This  island  is  2  leagues  broad  and  4  in  length,  has  no 
heights  or  eminences  of  importance.  The  north  and  south  coasts  are  clift'y,  and  the  for- 
mer rather  foul ;  as  is  also  the  east  coast.  The  island  is  said  to  be  the  best  watered  of 
any  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  and  its  harbor,  called  Coral  Bay,  is  reported  to  nll'ord  as  good 
shelter  as  any  harbor  in  the  West  Indies.  An  inlet  on  the  west,  having  4  fathoms  with- 
in it,  is  a  complete  natural  dock,  where  a  frigate  may  careen  or  refit,  lashed  to  tho  shore 
on  encli  side. 

The  following  description  and  remarks  on  this  place  have  been  extracted  from  those  of 
Captain  Hester : 

"  The  east  point  of  the  harbor  is  called  Moor's  or  North  Point.  The  walls  of  the  for- 
tress upon  it,  which  are  white,  may  bo  seen  from  the  distance  of  seven  or  eight  leagues. 
From  a  little  without  Moor's  Point  quite  into  the  harbor,  there  are  regular  soundings, 
with  from  10  to  5  fathoms  of  water. 

"With  the  wind  any  degree  to  tho  northward  of  east,  you  may  lie  into  the  entrance 
of  the  linrbor  :  but  if  it  be  to  the  southward  of  E.  S.  E.,  you  must  anchor  without  the 
point,  anil  warp  in.  Tho  Governor's  house  and  part  of  the  town  are  not  above  half  a 
mile  within  tho  point  on  the  east  side ;  but  there  is  a  large  harbor,  with  lagoons,  &e. 
aliiive  tlnit;  though  English  ships  of  wor  seldom  go  higher  than  tho  Governor's  house. 
You  niiclior  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  weather  shore,  in  5  fathoms  of  water, 
5ood  ground,  and  run  a  stream  anchor  to  tho  S.  W.  by  reason  of  tlie  land  breeze,  which 
is, at  most  times,  betwixt  the  S.  S.  E.,  south,  and  S.  S.  W.     You  moor  N.  E.  and  S.  W. 

"Observe,  in  coming  in,  to  leave  one-third  of  the  channel  to  windward  from  Moor's 
Point,  and  two-thirds  to  leeward  towards  the  key  called  Duck  Island,  and  you  will  not 
have  less  than  5  fathoms  of  water. 

"  There  is  a  small  bank,  which  does  not  show  itsolf,  and  lies  directly  off  from  the  gate, 
itacnliie's  length  from  the  shore,  with  only  10  feet  over  it.  The  watering-place  is  at 
the  south  side  of  the  town,  just  without  the  south  gate,  but  it  is  brackish." 


Current,  Sfc, 


Island  of 
St.  John. 


ULIIlMllpp^i 


""fPI'PPPPiiPiiP^ESvIIW'™^ 


39G 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Island  of  Sf, 
Thomas. 


Lighthouse. 


If  you  nre  bound  to  Porto  Rico  from  the  enstward,  night  coming  on,  and  you  off  tho 
E.  N.  E.  part  of  St.  John's,  you  will  take  notice  of  the  easternmost  high  land  ;  it  ig  in, 
land  a  little  from  the  east  end  of  the  island,  which  is  low.  You  may  ri;u  to  tho  west- 
ward till  you  bring  that  highland  to  bear  S.  by  E..  and  then  bring  to  till  morning.  1)^ 
take  great  care  that  this  high  land  does  not  deceive  you,  for  it  lies  a  long  way  in  thn  coun- 
try, and  it  is  all  low  land  by  the  water  side.  In  the  morning  make  sail ;  you  may  seethe 
walls  and  works  all  white  about  Moor's  Point. 

From  the  south  point  of  St.  John's  Island,  called  Ram's  Head,  to  the  entrance  of  St, 
Thomas'  Harbor,  the  course  is  about  W.,  five  and  a  half  leagues ;  from  the  north  Me 
of  Santa  Cruz,  N.  N.  W.  i  N.,  ten  leagues.  The  latitude  of  St.  Thomas'  town  is  18° 
22'  N. 

ISLAND  OF  ST.  THOMAS.— The  eminences  of  this  island  are  almost  lii(e  thoso 
of  St.  John's,  and  descend  gently  towards  tlie  shore.  The  entrance  into  the  hnrbnv  is 
very  easy  and  commodious  ;  the  town  has  more  commerce  than  any  other  of  the  Virgin 
Islands,  and  is  always  well  supplied  with  every  requisite,  being  a  kind  of  warehouse  or 
depot  of  rich  merchandise  ;  it  has  a  regular  careening  place,  and  is  defended  by  a  fort 
and  several  batteries. 

In  running  down  from  St.  John's  to  St.  Thomas'  Harbor,  you  leave  Bird  Key  to  the 
southward  of  you.  and  you  continue  your  W.  N.  W.  course  till  you  come  down  to  Buck 
Keys  ;  they  are  much  lower  and  longer  than  Bird  Key,  before  mentioned,  and  the.e  is  a 
small  opening  of  no  consequence  between  tiiem.  You  leave  these  keys  to  the  south- 
ward of  you  about  one  mile,  and  then  steer  N.  W.,  when  you  bring  them  S.  E..  and  con- 
tinue that  N.  W.  course  about  t^vo  or  three  miles  till  you  bring  the  harbor  open  ;  then 
haul  in  for  the  town  N.  by  W.  or  N.  N.  VV.,  giving  the  east  shore  all  along  a  good  berth, 
and  run  within  half  a  mile  of  the  fort,  which  is  white,  and  plainly  seen  at  the  east  of  the 
town.  You  anchor  in  .5  fathoms  water,  fine  clear  ground  :  it  is  a  fine  harbor,  whore  you 
are  landlocked  from  all  winds,  but  from  tho  S.  by  W.  to  the  S.  E.  by  S.,  which  piirt  lies 
open  to  the  sea ;  but  the  wind  seldom  blows  in  unless  it  is  in  the  hurricane  months, 
There  is  a  rock  above  water  in  the  harbor's  mouth,  (called  Prince  Rupert's  ClilV,)  which 
you  leave  to  the  eastward  of  you;  you  may  make  bold  with  the  west  side  of  it  Ijiittliere 
is  no  passage  witl.'rn. 

The  channel  between  the  main  island  and  Buck  Island,  is  but  one  and  a  half  mile 
broad,  and  at  the  entrance,  in  the  fair  way,  lies  a  rock,  called  Packet  Rock,  vliicli  is  a 
hard,  whitish,  rocky  shoal,  the  S.  W.  point  of  which  is  from  the  flng-stafTon  iVIuhlenfcldfs 
Battery,  (the  eastern  battery  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.)  S.  57°  E..  2180  fathoms, 
and  from  the  northern,  or  nearest  point  of  Buck  Island,  N.  4°  E.  1050  fathoms  distiince. 

This  sunken  rock  or  shoal  extends  from  its  S.  W.  point  in  a  depth  from  C  feet  water, 
E.  N.  E..  upwards  of  15  fathoms  in  length  to  54  feet — in  the  centre  of  the  depth  nre  9 
feet.  From  54  feet  water  it  inclines  a  half  point  to  the  north,  upwards  of  a  quarter  ca- 
ble's length,  with  a  depth  of  12  and  9  feet  water. 

The  whole  shoal  is  consequently  little  above  40  fathoms  in  length,  and  iias  a  dircctinQ 
of  nearly  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W. ;  its  position  being  one-third  the  distance  from  .St. 
Thomas  to  Buck  Island.  The  passage  between  this  sunken  rock  and  Buck  Island  isppr- 
foctly  free,  with  good  soundings  from  10  to  144  fathoms.  The  way  to  clear  tliis  shoal  is 
to  keep  Buck  Island  close  on  board. 

Enlranre  of  the  Harbor  of  St.  Thomas. — A  lighthouse  has  been  erected  on  the  Mali- 
lenfeldt's  liattery.  at  the  east  side  ofthe  entrance  ofthe  port  of  St.  Thomas,  lat.  IB''  19' 30'. 
The  elevation  of  this  light  is  95  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  and  is  visible  at  the  distance 
of  5  leagues  to  an  observer,  tho  height  of  whose  eye  is  1."?  feat  above  the  level  of  tlie  sea. 
The  hght  is  red,  whicli  is  produced  by  glass  ])anes  of  that  color.  In  the  S.  E..  S.  am) 
S.  W.,  the  light  can  thus  bo  distinguished  from  those  of  the  city  and  neighborliood. 

It  will  be  lighted  every  night  from  half  an  hour  after  sun-sot  until  half  an  hour  hethre 
sun-rise. 

To  avoid  the  hidden  rocks,  called  the  Triangles,  iying;  outside  In  the  ensfward.—T') 
clear  these  rocks  in  passing  to  tho  westward,  the  eastern  angle  of  tho  light  must  be 
brought  to  bear  N.  by  W.  4  W.,  in  a  line  with  the  S.  \V.  corner  of  an  out-huiMiii;:, 
painted  white,  and  (standing  to  tho  northward,)  this  range  carries  you  within  a  calilc's 
length  of  the  Triangles,  and  is  the  least  distance  at  which  it  will  bring  you ;  and  the  more 
you  keep  the  building  covered  by  the  lighthouse,  the  greater  will  l)e  your  ilistiiiice  t'roai 
these  rocks.  The  out-building  is  about  65  feet  to  the  northward  of  the  lighthouso,  and 
will  be  lighted  during  the  nisrht,  and  visible  in  clear  weather. 

Prince  Rupert's  Rock,  which  is  nearly  in  tho  middle  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor, 
will  be  always  white-washed,  and  visible  at  night. 

From  St.  Thomas'  Harbor,  if  bound  to  Porto  Rico,  being  in  tho  offing,  steer  W.  hy  X. 
till  you  come  down  the  length  of  tho  west  end  of  tho  island,  whicli  is  about  3  h'mwi 
from  the  harbor.  You  will  see  a  small  island  calleil  Little  I'assage,  about  1  or  o  milfs 
to  the  westward  of  tho  west  end  of  Little  St.  Thomas.  Little  St.  Thomas  is  n  .sunll 
island,  that  almost  joins  with  the  west  end  of  the  Great  Island ;  there  is  a  small  opening 


mim 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


397 


betweei  them,  but  of  no  nolo.  There  is  likewise  n  ehnnnel  of  amnll  importance  between 
Little  Pnssnge  nnd  Little  St. .Thomas;  buHhero  are  two  otlier  islands  before  you  come 
ijown  to  the  west  end  of  that  is  and.  The  easternmost,  just  to  the  leeward  of  the  har- 
bor, is  called  Water  Island,  nnd  almost  joins  with  the  main  land;  nb/iut  two  or  throe 
miles  to  leeward  of  that,  is  n  rocky  island,  about  half  a  mile  round,  whicli  lies  ii  mile 
(rorn  the  shorn,  and  is  called  Little  .Saba;  it  is  foul  all  round,  and  must  have  a  good 
liPilli.  All  the  shore  along  those  islands  must  be  left  on  your  starboard  hand.  In  run- 
ning down  till  you  pass  Little  Passage,  you  have  soundings  all  the  way,  but  deep  in  some 
places. 

VV.  S.  W.  i  S.  from  the  mouth  of  St.  Thomas'  Harbor,  above  4  leagues,  and  S.  W. 
1)V  S.  7  miles  from  the  west  point  of  tlie  island,  lies  a  remarkable  rock  in  the  middle  of 
tiie  channel.  It  is  round,  rugged,  and  double  pointed,  as  high  us  Heachy  Head,  and  may 
beseon  5  or  6  leagues  otf,  being  all  white;  it  appears  at  some  distance  like  a  sail,  whence 
it  bus  been  called  St.  Thomas'  Carvel,  or  St.  Thomas'  Hoy.  This  rock  is  bold  to  all 
round,  and  may  be  seen  6  or  6  leagues  off.. 

Remarks  on  the  Passages  in  general,  from  the  '^Derrotero  de  las  Antillas." 

The  straits  between  the  Dog's  Isles  and  Virgin  Gorda  are  all  excellent,  and  are  those 
tv  which  the  entrance  into  Drake's  Channel  is  made  from  the  northward.  The  chan- 
nels to  the  southward  are,  that  between  Salt  Island  and  the  Dead  Chest,  or  Peter's  Isl- 
and; that  between  P'lter'a  and  Normndd's  Islands;  and  that  iietween  Normand's  Isle  and 
Flaniigan  Key.  The  pass  between  the  Dead  Chest  and  Salt  Island,  when  used  forgoing 
out  of  Drake's  Channel,  requires  the  breeze  to  be  steady,  that  it  pass  not  froiii  E.  S.  E. 
towards  S. ;  for  otherwise  you  will  be  apt  to  get  entangled  with  Peter's  Island,  as  tho 
water  sets  strongly  towards  the  strait  which  it  forms  with  the  Dead  Chest,  and  the  swell 
also  aids,  (which  is  likewise  heavy,  when  there  is  a  fresh  wind,)  as  it  diminishes  the  ves- 
sel's v.'ny.  and  increases  her  lee-way. 

But,  it  is  to  be  noted  that,  at  about  half  a  mile  to  the  E.  N.  E.  of  the  Dead  Chest,  is 
a  rock,  having  over  it  only  12  feet,  and  on  which  the  Blonde  frigate,  and  several  vessels 
have  struck 

Vessels  which  navigate  by  the  south  of  the  Virgins,  commonly  pass  between  Bird's 
Key  or  Frenchman's  Cap  and  Buck  Island ;  and  all  those  who  run  for  the  southward  of 
the  'irgins  for  St.  .luan's  Head,  in  Porto  Rico,  pass  through  the  channel  between  the 
Siiil  Rock  and  Savanna,  or  Green  Island. 

Tiie  sea  along  the  whole  of  the  west  coast  of  Virgin  Gorda  is  tranquil  during  the  time 
of  tiie  breezes,  and  you  may  anchor  along  the  whole  length  of  it,  in  the  certainty  of  not 
hiiviiig  more  than  10  fathoms,  nor  less  than  8  fathoms  at  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  the 
qimlity  of  the  bottom  is  cotnmonly  sandy. 

On  the  west  coast  of  Norman's  Island  there  is  a  harbor.  Man-of-war  Bay,  which  is 
much  better  sheltered  and  more  secure  than  that  of  Virgin  Gorda;  for  in  it,  and  as  far 
(18  Kluiiagan  Islet,  the  sea,  during  the  breezes,  is  as  calm  as  a  bath.  Within  this  harbor 
tlii'V  lid  not  experience  gusts  of  wind,  and  it  also  appears  that  the  breeze  in  it  is  light, 
when  it  is  fresh  outside.  As  the  interior  of  the  harbor  is  to  windward  of  its  points,  and 
itisnot  more  than  half  a  mile  wide,  large  vessels  cannot  beat  up  into  it;  and,  therefore, 
when  these  come  from  the  north,  it  is  necessary  that  they  should  shave  the  point,  and 
lulf  up  rtn<l  anchor  in  about  the  middle  of  the  harbor's  mouth,  wai'ping  or  towing  in  af- 
lorwards,  if  tliey  have  to  make  a  long  stay  ;  for  if  not,  they  will  lie  very  well  at  the  very 
mouth,  if  it  bo  not  in  the  hurricane  season.  On  ctmiing  in  from  the  south,  they  must 
]iiuh)rig  the  tack  to  the  nortH,  in  the  certainty  that  they  will  find  no  unseen  danger;  and 
when  far  enough,  they  must  heave  about  to  manoeuvre,  on  the  south  tack,  as  already  di- 
rected. If  the  wind  with  which  you  run  to  take  this  harbor  should  be  from  the  north, 
you  niuy  run  farther  in,  and  lie  us  if  in  a  dock  ;  but  it  is  necessary  to  furl  your  sail  smart- 
ly; for  with  norths  there  are  flaws  of  wind  which  might  cause  you  to  drive,  and  there 
is  110  room  for  manoeuvring.  Keep  in  mind  that  about  a  league  to  the  .S.  S.  E.  of  the  fS. 
W,  point  of  Norman's  Islands,  there  is  a  rock  of  suuill  extent,  which  has  not  more  than 
nine  feetwiiter  on  it.  On  this  rock  !he  frigate  Santa  Monica  struck,  and  subsequently 
liiuiulprcd.  The  situation  of  this  rock  is  not  well  ascertained ;  for,  though  the  brigau- 
tines  under  the  command  of  Don  Coamo  Churruca  made  every  exertion  to  find  it,  they 
never  could  succeed. 

ST.  CROIX,  or  SANTA  CRUZ,  is  the  southernmost  of  the  Virgin  Islands,  and  lies 
W,  by  N.  from  Sandy  Point,  in  St.  Kitt's,  33  leagues.  It  is  not  very  high,  though  full  of 
hummocks,  two  of  which,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  higher  than  the  rest.  At  the  S.  W. 
end  of  the  island,  there  is  a  flat  extending  outwards  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  ;  and  the 
whole  of  ilie  south  side  is  bordered  with  reefs,  which  render  an  approadi  dangerous  to  a 
stranger.  The  island  is  scantily  watered:  and  with  wood,  which  can  be  procured  only 
at  a  high  price. 


5<.  Croix  or 
Santa  Cruz. 


•v^^imr 


'W^W 


398 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  C0AS1  PILOT. 


Island  of 
Sombrero. 


There  are  two  towns,  ono  on  the  north  and  the  other  on  the  west  side.  The  first  and 
chief  is  Christiunsticd,  the  cii|)itiU  of  the  Danish  West  India  Islands,  lying  on  the  south 
side  of  II  liarbor,  protooted  to  seaward  by  extensive  reefs,  and  on  the  land  by  a  fortress. 

The  chief  town,  called  Christianstied,  is  situated  at  the  bottom  of  a  bay  on  the  north 
coast,  under  the  ciiniions  of  a  fortress  which  defends  the  principal  harbor.  The  other 
town,  named  Fridei'ickstiud,  lies  on  the  west  side,  about  half  way  up  on  the  niiddie  of  a 
spacious  bay,  wheroin  shi|)s  may  anchor  at  pleasure,  in  from  3  to  10  fathoms. 

From  the  town  of  Christianstied  to  the  S.  W.  point  of  St.  John's  Island,  the  course  is 
N.  by  E.  about  10  leiigues.  In  the  channel,  about  six  miles  S.  by  W.  of  this  point,  lies 
a  remarkable  round  rock,  called  Bird  Key,  which  is  about  one  quarter  as  largo  as  Redondo 
near  Montserrat. 

The  harbor  of  Chrlstiansta3d  is  difficult  of  access,  and  shoal  in  soverel  places.  It  is 
defended  by  the  fort  of  Louisa  Augusta,  situated  on  a  neck  of  land  which  trends  from 
the  eastward,  and  by  that  of  Sophia  Frederica,  situate  on  Loot's  Key,  an  inlet  north  of 
the  town,  under  the  guns  of  both  of  which  vessels  must  pass  to  the  anchnrngo.  This 
is  ono  of  the  handsomest  towns  in  the  West  Indies  ;  its  principal  streets  being  wide,  Ion" 
and  straight,  and  intersect  each  other  at  right  angles.  " 

The  greatest  length  of  St.  Croix  from  E.  to  W.  is  20  miles.  On  advancing,  its  north 
side  presents  a  chain  of  eminences  almost  like  those  of  the  Virgin  Islands.  At  about 
a  league  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  the  East  Point,  and  half  a  league  from  the  north  const, 
there  is  an  island  named  Bokken,  or  Goat  Island,  which  appears  at  a  distance  like  n  p»rt 
of  the  coiist.  Between  this  island  and  St.  Croix  there  is  a  passage,  but  it  is  bad  nnd  lit- 
tle frequented.  The  east  point  of  Goat  Island  sends  out  a  reef  a  mile  and  a  quarter  to 
the  E.  S.  E.;  there  are  others  stretching  to  the  N.  and  N.  W. 

The  west  coast  of  St.  Croix  is  clean  ;  the  south  coast  is  very  foul,  and  requires  much 
practice,  either  to  navigate  near  it,  or  enter  into  its  bays,  of  which  there  are  two,  as  showa 
ou  the  chart. 

To  enter  the  port  of  Christianstied  much  practice  is  required,  and  therefore  a  pilot  must 
be  taken. 

By  A.  Lang.—''  The  eastern  point  of  St.  Croix  is  in  lat.  17°  45'  30"  N.,  Ion.  64"  04' 
W. 

The  eastern  point  of  Buck  Island,  lat.  17°  47'  18"  N.  Ion.  64°  36'  40"  W. 

A.  Lang's  observatory,  (elevation  400  feet,)  lat.  17°  44'  32'  N.,  Ion.  64°  41'  W. 

Full  nine  nautical  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  the  east  end  of  St.  Croix,  and  about 
eleven  nautical  miles  E.  by  N.  from  the  E.  point  of  Buck  Island,  commences  the  enstcni 
extremity  of  an  extensive  bank  or  shoal,  the  northern  Hmits  of  which  round  off  thence 
to  the  N.  W.,  soon  afterwards  stretch  westerly,  inclining  at  last  to  the  southward  of  a 
westerly  direction,  towards  Buck  Island  eastern  shoals,  with  which  it  may  be  considered 
as  connected.  The  northern  edge  of  this  shoal  is  a  narrow  coral  ledge,  of  several  mih 
in  length,  on  which  five  and  a  half  fathoms  of  water  is  the  least  depth  yet  found:  the 
more  common  depth  being  6,  6i,  and  7  fathoms. 

Along  the  whole  line  of  the  northern  edge,  and  to  the  very  eastern  extremity  of  the 
bank,  where  there  are  not  less  than  seven  fathoms  water,  I  haveobserved  the  sea  to  break 
in  an  awful  manner,  during  severe  gales  of  wind,  and  sometimes,  also,  in  moderate  weather 
during  the  great  northerly  ground  swell,  whicli  occasionally  sets  in  during  the  winter 
months. 

A  line  of  direction,  drawn  from  my  observatory  E.  24°  15'  30"  N.,  passes  through  the 
shortest  part  of  the  northern  edge  of  this  coral  ledge,  through  its  whole  length,  until  it 
approaches  the  eastern  limits  of  the  shoal,  where  it  rounds  off  to  the  S.  E.  and  S.  ust'iir 
as  the  bearing  E.,  15°  50'  N.  from  my  position.  I  consider  its  most  eastern  p.irt  to  bear 
from  my  observatory  E.  17°  20'  N.,  which  will  place  it  in  lat.  17''  49'  25"  N.,  Ion.  I4^ 
24'  40"  W.  from  Greenwich,  having  there  seven  fathoms  and  a  half,  which,  in  comiii? 
from  the  eastward,  you  at  once  strike  from  an  ocean  depth.  At  this  spot  the  eastinid  of 
St.  Croix  is  distant  nine  and  three-quarters  nautical  miles.  In  approaching  the  northern 
edge  of  the  shoal  from  the  northward,  you  at  once  get  from  an  ocean  dejxh  upon  its 
shoalest  part,  passing  which,  and  standing  to  the  south,  the  water  gradually  deepens,  on 
a  clean  sand  bottom,  during  the  short  time  taken  in  crossing  the  bank  when  standing  in 
this  direction. 

The  bearings  from  the  position  are  given  from  the  true  meridian,  taken  from  my  nstro- 
nomical  circle.     The  bank  is  the  resort  of  many  whales  during  spring  and  summer." 

ISLAND  OF  SOMBRERO.— Between  the  Virgin  Islands  and  thatof  Anguilln.lies 
a  small  rocky  island,  about  two  miles  in  length  ;  it  consists  of  a  very  fliit  eminence,  witli- 
out  any  hummock  upon  it,  covered  with  birds  from  the  southward.  You  cannot  descry 
this  island  farther  off  than  5  or  6  leagues  at  most. 

This  wretched  island  is  rugged,  steep  and  barren ;  a  little  camphor  and  grass  are  the 
only  vegetable  productions  which  appear  on  its  surface;  the  little  water  that  lodges  in 
the  cavities  of  rocks  during  rains,  soon  evaporates.  You  may  anchor  on  the  west  sjilc 
of  it.  The  cliffs  are  steep  to,  and  are  from  40  to  15  feet  high.  In  1792  an  American 
brig  ran  against  it  and  her  crew  crept  from  her  yard  arm  to  the  cliff  top.    The  brig  dis- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


399 


engaged  herself,  and  drifted  down  to  Virgin  Gorda,  where  the  bull  and  cargo  became  a 
prize  to  the  wreckers. 

The  latitude  of  Sombrero  is  18  38'  N.  and  its  longitude  is  63°  30'  W.  Two  leagues 
off  Sombrero,  when  it  bears  from  E.  N.  E.  to  E.  by  S.,  is  found  from  35  to  22  fathoms, 
uneven  ground  and  rocky  bottom.  It  lies  about  14  hnif^ues  E.  by  S.  from  the  island  of 
Anegnda,  and  12  leagues  due  east  from  the  reef  lyio'^  oH'  the  S.  E.  end  of  it.  In  going 
between  the  two  you  have  5,  0,  7,  8,  and  10  fathoms  of  water.  The  course  from  Sabu 
to  Sombrero  is  N.  W.  by  N.  4  N.,  distant  20  leagues. 

I'he  passage  to  leeward  or  windward  of  Sombrero,  is  very  clear  and  safe ;  there  is  no 
swell.  The  winds  are  generally  favorable  for  going  out,  and  wlien  once  you  are  past 
Sombrero,  all  obstacles  are  at  an  end. 

Anguilla,  and  the  Islets  in  its  vicinity. 

Anguilla  lies  E.  by  N.  4  N.  and  W.  by  S.  4  S.,  above  two  leagues  to  the  north  of  St. 
Jliiitin's;  it  is  a  low,  flat  and  withered  island,  without  any  mountains,  so  that  it  cannot 
be  seen  farther  otT  than  4  or  5  leagues.  The  onchoring  ground  is  good  on  the  south 
side,  because  the  current  there  has  no  force,  on  account  of  a  long  lodge  which  stretches 
off  S.  E.  from  the  east  poitit.  On  the  south  part  of  the  west  point  there  lies,  about  one 
mile  from  the  shore,  a  small  island,  not  above  100  fathoms  in  length.  To  the  N.  W.  by 
W.  of  the  west  point  of  Anguilla,  distant  about  4  leagues,  lie  several  small  islands,  tho 
principal  of  which  are  Dog  and  Prickly  Pear  Islands,  between  which  is  a  good  channel. 
Tiie  first  is  the  easternmost ;  the  second,  which  is  the  largest  of  all,  lies  farther  than  any 
of  them  to  the  west,  save  a  little  rock  that  is  almost  joined  with  it  on  the  west  side.  It 
isaboat  one  mile  in  length,  and  has  a  few  inhabitants.  All  these  islands  are  very  low, 
and  cannot  be  seen  farther  off  than  4  or  5  leagues. 

Bearings  taken  and  remarks  made  in  sailing  between  the  above  mentioned  Islands,  by  an 

experienced  Navigator. 

"When  we  came  to  sail  so  far  out,  I  found  that  the  highest  top  of  St.  Eustatia  came 
even  with  the  top  of  Brimstone  Hill,  and  that  the  two  southernmost  points  of  St.  Kitt's 
and  St.  Eustatia  were  in  one,  and  bore  N.  W.  by  N.  At  the  same  time  Fort  Tison  bore 
N.  E.  easterly,  when  Sandy  Point,  and  Tumble-dowu-dick,  or  the  northernmost  part  of 
St.  Eustatia,  came  in  one,  and  bore  W.  N.  W. 

"The  direct  course  from  the  west  end  of  St.  Kitt's  is  N.  N.  W.  to  St.  Martin's  west 
end,  and  so  through  between  the  Dog  and  Prickly  Pear.  For  when  you  are  within  half 
a  mile  of  the  west  end  of  St.  Martin's,  the  southernmost  land  of  St.  Bartholomew  comes 
in  one  with  the  southernmost  land  in  sight  of  St.  Martin's,  and  they  bear  S.  E.  by  E., 
and  then  Saba  will  bear  S.  by  W.,  westerly.  By  the  aforesaid  bearings  of  St.  Bartholo- 
mew and  Saba,  if  you  see  either  of  them,  you  may  by  them  know  how  to  direct  your 
course  for  the  west  part  of  St.  Martin's. 

"  The  west  part  of  St.  Martin's  and  the  west  end  of  Anguilla,  bear  N.  N.  W.,  north- 
erly. When  the  N.  E.  part  of  Anguilla,  the  north  side  of  Prickly  Pear,  and  the  middle 
of  Dog  Island  bear  all  in  one,  it  is  east  and  west.  Three  miles  north  of  Dog  Island,  I 
observed  at  noon,  and  found  the  latitude  18"  26'  N.,  and  the  variation  2°  30'  E.  At  the 
same  time  St.  Martin's  showed  itself  beyond  Anguilla  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  by  W." 


Bearings. 


Dog  Island  N.  N.  E.,  distant  one  league. 

The  following  particulars  of  Anguilla,  &c.  are  from  the  Derrotero  do  las  Antilles,  &c. 
Anguilla  is  situated  to  the  north  of  St.  Martin's,  and  separated  from  it  by  a  channel,  of 
which  the  least  width  is  four  miles.  It  is  extremely  low,  and  has  neither  the  smallest 
liili  nor  prominence.  Its  soil  is  very  sandy  and  sterile,  and  both  fresh  wate-  and  wood 
are  very  scarce.  The  town  is  on  the  cast  side,  near  the  N.  E.  end.  It  is  very  small, 
and  has  no  commerce.  The  bay  is  shut  almost  entirely  with  reefs,  and  id  therefore  of 
very  little  value.  To  the  N.  E.  of  the  east  end,  there  is  an  islet,  Angniliita.  which  is 
1  still  much  lower.  It  is  very  clean  on  its  south  side,  and  has  12  fathoms  water  on  the  side 
I  of  the  channel  which  separates  it  from  Anguilla,  which  channel  is  nearly  half  a  mile  in 
I  width.    On  passing  here,  when  running  from  windward  to  leeward,  Anguillita  seems 


400 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


part  of  Anguilln,  Bnd  the  strait  between  them  cnnnot  be  seen  until  you  iire  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  meridinn  of  the  former.  Off  the  east  end  of  Anf^uillita  are  four  rocks,  on 
whidi  the  Bea  breaks  with  violence,  but  they  do  not  he  farther  out  than  two  cables' 
length,  and  at  h^»H  than  a  mile  there  are  2i  fathoms,  on  sand,  gradually  increa8ing  to  30 
fatiioniH  at  4  miles. 

The  chnnnel  between  St.  Martin's  and  Anguilla  is  excellent,  and  fit  foranyclasaor 
number  of  vessels;  for  it  has  not  less  than  13  fiitlioms  of  water,  and  the  depth  is  in  gonpral 
from  l.J  to -JO  fiitiioms,  of  sand  and  gravel;  and  near  both  coasts  it  does  not  decrcnss  to 
less  than  7  fiithoms.  The  only  thing  which  is  to  be  avoided  is  the  Spanish  Rocl«,  \ym 
within  a  mile  from  the  N.  E.  end  of  St.  Martin's,  on  the  south  side. 

The  Hritish  biig  Sulfoun,  Capt.  Melville,  was  wrecked  off  the  Island  Anguilln,  on  a 
rock  called  (iridriin,  about  one  mile  from  Scrub  Island,  east  of  Anguilla. 
St.  Martin's,  ST.  MAR'IMN'S  is  divided  from  Anguilln  by  the  channel  above  described.  It  is  dj. 
vided  between  the  Dutch  and  the  French,  and  contains  a  great  number  of  hills,  or  rather 
huge  rocks  covered  with  heath,  which  may  be  seen  above  10  leagues  off.  The  sliapeia 
very  irregular,  and  the  western  coast  is  comparatively  low.  Rains  very  seldom  full  here 
and  as  the  soil  of  the  plains  and  valleys  is  sandy,  they  are  consequently  unfruitful.  The 
island,  destitute  of  rivers,  has  fountains  and  cisterns,  which  afford  good  and  drinkiible 
water  for  the  |)lanters.  The  air  is  very  healthy,  the  shore  full  of  fish,  the  sea  rarely  dis- 
turbed, and  the  anchorage  safe  every  where  about  the  island,  especially  with  a  N.  E, 
wind.     Wood  is  scarce  and  dear. 

The  principal  town,  Phillipsburg,  lies  on  the  S.  W.  side,  in  a  harbor  called  Great  Bay, 
which  has  8,  9,  and  10  fathoms,  good  sandy  ground.  Near  it  are  three  salt  ponds,  where 
n  great  (|uantity  of  salt  is  made.  This  is  the  chief  place  of  the  Dutch  quarter,  the 
French  quarter  being  to  the  north. 

'i'he  Derrotero  says,  St.  Martin's  has  many  heights  and  hollows,  but  no  mountain  of 
conse(|uence.  On  the  S.  W.  side,  in  Fhillipsburgh  IJay,  vessels  anchor  more  commodi- 
ously  than  in  any  other  in  the  island.  The  town,  the  capital  of  the  Dutch  part,  extends 
in  the  direction  of  the  shore.  On  (he  south  side  of  this  harbor  stands  an  eight-gun  fort, 
called  St.  Peter's,  and  on  the  N.  W.  point  is  Amsterdam  fort.  ThesT  twe  forts  defend 
the  entrance.  The  harbor  has  from  3  to  4  fathoms  of  water,  on  fine  sand  ;  Imt  on  the 
line  between  the  two  exterior  points,  are  from  6  to  !)  fathoms,  and  vessels  of  a  lar;,'e  draft 
go  no  farther  inward  than  this  line.  About  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  this  bay  is  a  nici; 
named  the  Man-of-war,  which  has  only  10  feet  of  water  on  it,  and  is  about  2i  niihles' 
length  in  circumference.  The  point  of  it  on  which  there  is  the  least  water,  may  be  foiinii 
by  bringing  the  S.  E.  point  of  Simson's  Bay,  which  is  to  the  N.  VV.  of  Pliilipsbuifjli  liav, 
on  with  the  high  point  of  the  westernmost  mountain  in  St.  Martin's;  and  on  the  opposiie 
direction,  by  bringing  the  flag-staff  at  the  Governor's  house,  which  is  at  the  eastern  m\ 
of  the  town,  on  with  another  large  house  which  stands  on  the  top  of  the  hills  to  the  north 
of  the  bay.  The  last  house  may  be  known  by  its  standing  to  the  east  of  a  great  tamiuind 
tree,  which  is  insulated  and  separated  from  the  other  trees.  In  addition  to  liiese  inarks, 
>  it  may  be  kept  in  mind  that  the  shoal  is  exactly  S.  38°  W.,  true,  from  tiio  White  Puiiit, 

wliich  is  the  western  point  of  the  bay,  and  S.  G-"  30'  E.,  true,  from  Port  Amsterdam.  At 
8  third  of  a  cable's  length  around  this  rock,  or  shoal,  6,  7,  and  8  fiitlioins,  with  rocky  bot- 
tom, are  found. 

On  the  N.  W.  const  there  is  n  bay  named  Marigot  Bay,  open  to  N.  W.  winds,  and 
having  a  depth  of  from  4  to  7  fathoms  on  sand:  at  thj  bottom  of  it  stands  the  town 
of  Marigot,  which  belongs  to  the  French,  and  which  is  deftMidod  by  a  fort  to  the  uortii 
of  it. 

To  the  east  of  the  N.  E.  end  of  St.  Martin's  is  an  inlet  named  Hat  Island,  which  isvery 
bare,  and  surrounded  by  reefs  close  round  it.  The  channel  between  it  and  St.  Miirtiii's 
is  a  mile  broad  and  passable.  The  shoal  named  the  Spanish  Rock  lies  nearly  two  niilH 
W.  N.  W.  of  Hat  Island.  This  is  a  very  small  rock,  the  least  water  on  which  is  3  feet, 
Wlien  passing  to  the  north  of  Hat  Island,  and  near  to  it.  in  order  to  steer  to  the  N.  W'., 
be  careful  to  give  a  sufficient  berth  to  the  rock.  The  strait  between  this  island  ami  St. 
Bartholomew's  is  10  miles  wide.  It  is  without  shoals,  sunken  rocks,  or  any  other  invi-i- 
ble  dangers;  but  those  bound  through  it,  and  not  dcistiiied  for  any  of  these  islands,  ought 
to  leave  to  the  south  all  the  islets  to  the  N.  \V.  of  St.  Bartholonnnv's,  and  to  tlio  north  all 
those  of  St.  Martin's.  The  navigable  channel  is  thus  reduced  to  a  league  and  a  half  in 
width.  The  ordinaiy  depth,  untd  touching  the  islets,  is  from  13  to  20  fathoms,  but  al- 
most always  upon  rocks,  and  j'ou  may  safely  run  within  half  a  mile  of  the  islets.  The 
navigation  of  this  channel  is  excellent,  not  only  for  those  going  from  windward  to  leeward, 
hut  also  for  those  bound  from  leeward  to  windward;  but  attention  must  be  paid  to  keep 
clear  of  the  rock  called  the  Man-of-war,  before  described. 
St.  Bartholo-  ST.  BARTHOLOiWEW'S.— St.  Bartholomew's  S.  W.  end  bears  from  S'andy  Point, 
mew's.  in  St.  Christopher's,   N.   i  E.,  distant  10  leagues.     It  lies  E.  and  W.,  and  is  five  or  sis 

leagues  long.     The  middle  part  is  very  high  land.     Its  shores  are  extremely  dangerous. 
^^.  chiefly  on  the  north  part,  where  there  are  many  rocks  above  and  under  water,  and  the 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


401 


Piindy  Point, 
is  five  ui  six 
_,  dungeroiis. 
liter,  and  the 


ipproRching  tliem  requires  nn  experienced  pilot ;  but  it  enjoys  the  advantn;;o  of  having 
ivory  good  liiirbur,  of  tin  exci'Ment  liold,  in  which  ships  of  iiny  size  iiro  perfeclly  sliol- 
tereJ  t'runi  all  winds.  The  idlnnd  of  St.  Bnrtholomew's  sippeiirs  fit  first  iiltnost  round, 
inican  be  seen  nine  or  ten  loiigues  off.  K.  i  N.,  fourteen  tongues  distiiiit  from  the 
jjliind,  lies  a  large  b«d  of  rocks,  about  'JO  yards  squiiro.  On  the  west  side  of  it  is  u  swell. 
The  rock  is  sharp  pointed,  and  sometimes  covered.  When  the  sea  fiilU,  it  is  about  four 
feet  dry. 

Vessels  bound  for  this  isl  ind  from  the  eastward,  should  endeavor  to  run  down  the  south 
gide,  and  keep  as  near  the  shore  os  possible.  There  are  several  rocks  on  the  south  side, 
liutnll  above  water,  and  buld  to,  the  largest  of  which  is  a  long  tint  key  called  Turtloback. 
From  Turfleback  round  Point  Negro,  xhc  coost  is  clear  and  bold. 

Vessels  bound  in  for  the  harbor  should  keep  about  200  fathoms  from  the  shore,  and 
when  iibreast  of  the  first  battery,  liiy  olf  and  on  and  wait  for  the  |)ilot.  A  stranger  should 
not  enter  the  harbor  without  a  pilot,  as  the  channels  are  narrow,  and  tlie  wluds  often 

biiffling. 

There  are  three  channels  by  which  vessels  enter  the  harbor,  according  to  the  winds, 
fiz.;  Siiuth,  South-west,  and  North-west  Channels. 

The  South  Channel  has  a  good  dupth,  but  it  is  dangerous  for  a  stranger  to  attempt,  as 
a  rocky  reef  extends  from  the  middle  key.  called  the  S.iints,  two-thirda  across  the  chan- 
nel; but  should  a  vessel  be  compelled  to  run  in  without  a  pilot,  keep  the  main  shore 
close  aboard,  and  anchor  when  within  the  second  battery,  in  4  fntlioms.  With  the  wind 
at  east,  the  South-west  Channel  is  the  best,  and  with  a  N.  E.  wind  the  North-west 
Channel  is  the  best,  as  it  is  the  broadest  of  the  three. 

The  north  side  of  the  island  is  perfectly  safe  ;  there  are  several  keys  and  small  islands, 
but  the  channels  between  them  are  all  bold  and  free  from  danger  with  the  wind  atN.  E. 
I  woidd  recommend  to  those  bound  in,  to  run  down  the  north  side  of  the  island,  dou- 
ble the  west  point,  and  stand  in  for  the  harbor.  The  Buleliie,  or  Whale,  is  a  rock  150 
fathoms  west  from  the  key  called  the  Islets,  in  front  of  the  harbor,  is  even  with  the  water, 
and  h»9  a  point  standing  up  like  the  fin  of  n  whale.  Vessels  can  pass  all  around,  within 
10  fathoms  of  the  rock. 

On  the  west  side  of  the  island  is  the  town  of  Gustavia,  pleasantly  situated  ot  the  foot  of 
a  hill,  forming  three  different  sections,  and  in  the  centre  is  the  careenage,  with  whorves 
alliiround.  On  the  south  west  side  of  the  water  are  several  ship  wharves,  with  conve- 
niences for  careening,  caulking,  and  carpenters'  work  well  executed,  and  at  a  moderate 
I  expense.  The  careenage  can  contain  60  sail,  and  the  road  from  3  to  400  shipping,  good 
holiiing  ground,  from  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  and  6  fathoms,  sandy  bottom. 

Ahout  the  island  of  St.  Bartholomew  the  flood,  at  ii;;w  and  full  moon,  runs  S.  E.,  and 
it  ij  then  high  water  at  lOh.  and  30m.  P.  M.,  while  the  sun  is  farthest  to  the  north  of  the 
e(|Untor,  but  comes  about  two  hours  sooner  in  the  following  months,  till  the  sun  gets 
furthest  to  the  south,  when  it  is  high  water  at  lOh.  30ni.  A.  M.,  and  it  runs  afterwards 
1  the  same  proportion  back  again.  The  winds,  wirudi  are  of  long  continuance,  somo- 
I  times  iiiiike  a  trifling  difference.  The  horizon  is  also  lowest  at  the  time  when  the  sun 
is  furthest  to  the  north  of  the  line  :  and  so  to  the  contrary.  The  greatest  difference  in 
the  ebbing  and  flowing  is  18  inches;  but,  in  general,  only  10  inches. 

D.WGKROUS  ROCK.— S.  51°  E.,  12  miles  from  the  S.  E.  point  of  St.  Dartliolo- 
mew's,  lies  a  dangerous  rock,  nearly  even  with  the  water's  edge. 

S\B.\. — The  island  called  Sal)!i  belongs  to  the  Dutch.  It  is  very  high,  and  its  shores 
I  bluti'  and  clean.  On  the  S.  W.  part  is  a  small  town,  built  in  a  plain,  but  liid  from  the 
seaby  very  high  hills,  except  to  the  southward.  A  very  high  mountain  coiisiitutos  the 
centre  of  the  island.  The  island  appears  like  a  steep  rock,  of  a  round  fonn  ;  it  is  about 
nine  miles  in  circumference,  accessible  only  on  the  south  side,  on  wiiich  there  is  an  in- 
tricate and  artificial  path  leading  to  the  summit,  which  admits  only  one  man  at  a  time. 

It  is  said  that  the  bottom  may  be  seen  all  round.  On  the  N.  W.  side  there  is  a  rock, 
I  called  the  Diamond,  standing  nt  about  a  musket  shot  from  the  shore,  and  which  iip|)enr3 
atar  off  like  a  sail.  There  is  an  extensive  bank  of  soundings,  extending;  seven  leagues  to 
t!w  southward  and  S.  S.  W.  of  the  island,  as  shown  on  the  chart,  having  on  it,  within 
tlwt  distance,  from  12  to  17  fathoms.  Beyond  these  soundings,  to  the  south,  no  bottom 
is  to  he  found.  At  four  miles  to  the  southward  ofdie  i-ilaiid  there  is  a  shoal  spot  of  3  or 
4 1'lthoms,  on  which  the  sea  breaks,  during  galea  of  wind,  but  the  exact  spot  has  not 
Ibeen  ascertained. 

THK  ISLAND  OF  ST.  EUSTATIUS  makes,  at  a  distance,  like  a  steep  rock, 
Irisins;  out  of  the  sea,  and  in  n  sugar-loaf  form,  ascending  upwards  in  a  round  hill,  but,  on 
I  a  nearer  approach,  its  figure  changes,  and  it  appeal's  longer.  The  rock  is  composed  of 
Itwo  mountains,  whoso  middle  land  is  pretty  even.  The  eastern  mountain  is  much  higher 
jthanthat  to  the  N.  W. ;  it  is  hollow  in  the  middle,  the  excavation  being  the  crater  of  an 
I  exhausted  volcano,  which  has  proi/ibly  constituted  the  island  :  the  bottom  is  pretty  nearly 
loaalevel  with  the  town,  and  is  frequented  by  sportsmen  in  pursuit  of  game. 

■  i  L  V^^  History  DeH3t. 


High  water. 


Dangerous 

Rock. 

Saba. 


The  Island 
of  St.  Eus- 
tatius. 


isJCIAL.  LIBRARY 
VICTORIA,  B.  C. 


403 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Nevis  and 
St.  Kilt's. 


Mev 


IS. 


The  town  stands  on  tho  south  siJe,  and  ia  divided  into  two  piirta,  called  tho  Upper  and 
Lowoi*  Towns.  The  liitter  \«  on  tho  shore  ;  it  consists  of  shops  and  warehouses,  und  j. 
inhabited  in  tho  day  only,  as  tho  inhabitants  pass  their  nights  and  holidays  in  tho  upper 
town,  50  or  GO  foot  aljove  tho  lovol  of  ilio  sou,  to  which  they  climb  by  ineiins  of  gtepg 
cut  in  tho  roclv.  Tho  lower  town  consists  of  a  single  street,  and  is  very  indilfereotly 
built. 

Tho  nncliorngo,  which  is  off  tho  town,  is  not  of  tho  host ;  tliore  is  a  swell  wiieo  tlie 
wind  blows  from  tho  .S.  E.  <juurtor,  and  limlitii^  is  rondorod  vory  diHicult  by  tlie  niem 
and  continual  broaliin;;  of  tho  waves  aijaiiist  tho  shore.  If  bound  into  tho  road,  give  tliit 
oaHtorn  point  a  Hmall  berth,  and  anchor  in  1'.^  fathoms,  before  the  town.  The  gniutniin 
mostly  coarso  sand  and  coral,  and  morchantmon  buoy  up  their  cables.  Tho  iinciiuijnj 
marks  nro,  tlio  dinrch  bearing  E.  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  by  E.,  about  throe-quarters  of  u  mil,. 
from  shore;  and  tho  west  end  of  the  bay,  culled  Interloper's  Capo,  N.  W.  by  N.  Ves- 
sels may  even  anchor  further  in  tho  ofTing,  in  14  or  15  fathoms,  similar  grounil.  The 
road  is  much  IVe(|iienl('il,  ami  ships  aro  often  tiicio,  even  in  the  hurricane  months;  hut 
in  this  season,  tho  wind  must  bo  attentively  observed,  as,  on  tlie  smallest  indicatiuu  of  u 
squall  from  the  southward,  they  shoull  innnediatoly  proceed  to  sea. 

The  Dorrotero  says,  "  This  island  shows  itself  from  the  S.  W.  The  only  hill  wiiicli 
it  has,  is  situated  near  tho  S.  E.  extremity,  and  extends  to  the  west,  descending  tolera- 
bly gently,  and  comes  down  to  the  shoro  at  tho  place  whore  tho  town  and  anchuingojj 
situated.  Tiio  latter  is  so  bad  that,  being  open  to  S.  and  S.  W.  winds,  (when  tho  breeze 
even  comes  to  the;  southward  and  eastward,)  so  much  swell  comes  in  as  to  incommaiji) 
tho  vessels  nmch,  and  prevent  landing  on  the  shoro  conveniently  ;  tho  depth  in  this  road- 
stead is  from  7  to  1-2  fathoms,  on  suiid,  and  vessels  in  it  must  remain  at  single  uiichor, 
ready  to  make  sail  the  moment  the  wind  comes  on  shore,  which,  however,  does  not  fre- 
quently occur.  The  channel  between  it  and  St.  Christopher's  is  excellent,  and  without 
any  danger  whatever." 

NEVIS  AND  ST.  KITT'S  are  high,  and  their  eminences  may  be  descried  ntthe 
distance  of  eighteen  leagues  ;  they  are  separated  by  the  Narrows,  a  channel  of  half  a 
league  wide,  but  which,  though  there  is  depth  enough  in  it  for  every  class  of  vessels, 
ought  not  to  be  attomptod  by  a  stranger  without  a  pilot,  as  it  is  obstructed  by  soveiii 
shoals. 

NEVIS  is  n  small  island,  which  may  bo  readily  u    iwn,  being  low  on  both  sides, anJ  | 
very  high  in  tho  middle.     Tiio  top  of  tho  liigh  land,  which  to  those  athwart  it,  N.  orS., 
makes  like  a  saddle,  roaches  fur  al>ove  tho  clouds.     Tho  plantations  are  on  the  sidesofit,  I 
near  the  bottom.     On  the  western  side  aro  two  brooks  of  fresh  water,  three  toierablr  | 
roadsteads,  on  tlin  piincipal  of  which,  near  tho  S.  W.  end,  ia  Charleston,  the  principil 
town  of  the  island.  ^ 

As  tho  horos  of  the  southern  and  western  sides  aro  very  low,  ships  must  not  approach 
near  to  thctn  in  the  night,  as  they  are  not  to  bo  distinguished  from  the  high  land  behiaij 
them.  From  the  S.  and  S.  W.  |)oints  there  are  reefs  stretching  off  to  the  distaucu  of  | 
nearly  half  a  mile,  which  of  course  must  also  be  carefully  uvoidod. 

Tlio  Derrotoro  reports  that  there  is  a  shoal  olF  the  windward  coast  of  Novig,  the  | 
situation  of  which  has  not  been  ma  le  known  ;  all  that  is  known  of  it  being,  that  aa  Eoglii 
sloop  touclied  on  it  at  two  leagues  from  tho  shore.     It  is  added  that  an  English  ship  of  the  I 
line  also  touclied  upon  a  ruck,  nearly  two  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Nevis.     This  may  proh 
be  the  same. 

The  narrows,  or  straits,  between  St.  Kitt's  and  Nevis,  is  rather  more  than  half  a  league  I 
broad,  and  lies  N.  E.  and  S.  W.     Nctarly  in  mid-chunnel,  at  tlio  eastern  end,  therein 
remarkable  hi;;!!  rock,  called  Booby  Island  ;  and  nearly  one  mile  and  a  half  to  theS.W, 
of  this  island,  aro  two  otliors,  called  tho   Cows.     The  channel,  which  hasadeptholl 
from  3  to  12  fathoms,  is  between  these  rocks  and  St.  Kitt's;  for  on  the  southern  side  | 
there  are  several  shoids. 

An  extensive  shoal,  from  a  miln  to  a  mile  and  a  half  in  breadth,  and  five  iniloskij,  I 
from  N.  W,  to  S.  E.,  lies  without  tho  eastern  end  of  tho  Narrows.  Tho  passages  in  I 
are,  therefore,  between  its  noi'tli  end  and  St.  Kitt's,  and  between  its  south  end  anJNovis.  j 
Tho  southern  half  of  tho  slioal,  which  is  the  roudost,  is  rocky,  and  has  not,  in  soiuo  p.irts,  I 
a  greater  depth  than  10  feet.  Thoro  is  idso  a  dangerous  patch  of  18  foot  of  water,  near  | 
the  north  end. 

In  sailing  u))  to  the  Narrows,  botW(^en  this  bank  and  tho  Isle  of  Nevia,  bring  Boobjl 
Island  W.  N.  W..  and  keep  it  so  until  tho  Cows  boar  S.  W.  by  W.  This  leads  cleiu' ui I 
tho  reef,  whence  you  may  |)roceo(l  as  shown  hereafter.  In  sailing  in  from  tho  north- j 
ward,  before  arriving  at  the  Narrows,  Hooliy  Island  will  bo  seen  nearly  in  midway  of  the  I 
chaimel.  In  sailing  downwards,  that  i.sle  is  to  bo  kept  on  the  larboard  side,  keeping ovorl 
towards  the  shore  of  St.  Kitt's.  The  south  part  of  Nevis,  kept  open  to  the  westward  off 
Booby  Island,  will  clear  the  roef.  The  Cows  are  also  to  bo  left  on  the  lurboaiilEidp.l 
keeping  over  to  the  shore  of  St.  Kitt's,  in  4i,  6,  or  6  fathoms,  good  ground. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


403 


The  Road  of  Novis  is  on  tho  west  side  of  the  isliiiid.     In  npproachins;  It  from  the 
I  joulhwnrd,  jiivo  tlio  Fort  Point,  on  which  tliere  is  a  tixod  liRlit,  noar  Charleston,  a  berth    Lighliwuie, 
i,far<iH<  to  avoid  a  siioal  which  lies  to  the  southward  of  that  point;  tiien  luff  up,  nnd 
i,D;hor  in  from  10  to  7  fatlioms,  ^ood  ground,  witii  the  fort  bearing  is.  E.,  tho  S.  E. 
I  part  of  St.  Kitt's  N.  i  E. ;  dintaiico  olfshi.re,  about  one  mile. 

In  runiiiiiil  from  Novis  to  Bassotorro,  you  will  cross  u  bank,  on  tho  shoalost  piirt  of  which 
llierenro  4  fathoms,  or  quarter  less  5.  It  is  not  quite  n  mile  over,  and  its  miildle  lies  .S. 
|)V  \V.,  westerly,  from  tho  Nag's  Head,  or  the  south  end  of  St.  Kitt's,  two  miles. 

ST.  KITT'S. — The  centre  of  this  island  is  occupied  by  a  ereat  number  of  high  and    St.  Kitt's. 

Il^fren  immnlains,  intersected  by  rocky  precipices,  and  almost  impa.ssiiblo,  and  among 

L-iiJcii  there  are  several  hot  springs.     Mount  Misery,  which  is  an  exhausted  volcano, 

Ljiuju  hiinil  is  hidden  in  tho  clouds,  is  the  highest  of  all  these  mountains,  its  peipondicu- 

lirheiglit  beinn  3711  feet.     The  assemblage  of  hills  makes  the  island  appear,  on  an  ap- 

Lroach  from  the  sea.  like  a  huge  mountain,  covurod  with  wood;  but  advancing  nearer, 

(he  const  bcfomes  less  abrupt,  and  Uio  ascent  of  tho  mountains,  rising  one  above  another, 

I  will  be  seen  cultivated  as  high  as  possible.     The  S.  E.  side,  on  sailing  along  at  two  leagues 

ktsiice,  appears  like  several  detached  islands.     Tho  N.  \V.  part  is  the  highest,  but  de- 

Idjnes  gradually  to  the  sea. 

Tho  bottom  of  the  great  crater  of  Mount  Misery  is  a  level  of  fifty  acres,  of  which 
liffflp  lire  covered  with  a  lake,  and  the  rest  with  grass  and  trees;  amongst  the  latter 
1  IS  mountain-cabbage.  Streams  of  hot  water,  impregnated  with  sulphur,  still  issue  from 
I  ilii>  fissures. 

Thu  principal  town  is  that  of  Basseterre,  on  the  south  coast,  situate  at  tho  mouth  of 
|, river,  which  opens  into  n  bay  called  Basseterre  Roud.     Sandy  Point  Town,  towards 

)N.\V.,  is  also  a  town  of  consequence.     There  is  no  harbor  whatever,  pnd,  on  the 
I  contrary,  a  surf  continually  beats  on  the  shore,  which  is  sandy,  and  prevents  any  tree  or 
|«harf  being  erected  upon  it,  and  also  makes  landing  ahvajs  inconvenient;  sometimes 
liiiDgerous.     Owing  to  this,  the  inhabitants  are  imder  the  necessity  of  landing  and  ship- 
pins  lieavy  goods  in  the  manner  practised  at  Montserrat. 

SOUTHERN    SIDE    OF   ST.  KITT'S.— In  sailing  off  tho  southern  coast  of  St.  Southern  side 
iKill's.  the  following  lands  are  to  be  particularly  noticed,  namely,  the  Nag's  Head,  or   of  St.  Kitt's. 
lioulh  end  of  St.  Kitt's,  on  which  there  is  a  high  hummock  ;  tho  high  lands  on  each  side 
|of  Frigate  liay,  the  bay  at  the  northern  end  of  the  isthmus  whicli  connects  the  northern 

) southern  parts  of  St.  Kitt's;  Monkey  Hill,  a  high  mountain  to  tho  northward  of  the 
llown  of  Basseterre  ;  and  Brimstone  Hill,  another  high  mountain,  with  a  square  fort  on  it, 
liothe  eastward  of  Sandy  Point  Town  in  the  west. 

In  proceeding  from  the  southern  side  of  Nevis  towards  Basseterre,  you  may  cross  a 
lliaiik  lying  oir  the  Narrows,  on  which  the  least  depth  is  about  4  fathoms.  It  is  rather 
Imre  than  a  mile  in  breadth,  and  its  middle  part  lies  nearly  two  miles  S.  S.  W.,  westerly, 
Ifrom  the  Nag's  Head,  above  mentioned.  Advancinj;  towards  Basseterre,  nnd  having 
Ipassed  the  south  end  of  Novis,  tho  course  will  be  N.  W.  by  N.  When  olf  Frigate  Bay, 
|run  ill  until  the  Nag's  Head  appears  to  tho  southward  of  the  mountain  in  Nevis ,  or  until 

;  hummock  on  the  Nag's  Head  appears  on  with  the  sfluthern  i)art  of  the  top  of  the 
same  mountain;  keep  this  mark  on  until  a  single  tree  on  the  green  ridge  behind  tho 
Itown  of  Basseterre  comes  on  witli  the  edge  of  Monkey  Hill,  or  begins  to  shut  in  behind 
lit;  you  may  then  anchor  in  10  or  9  fathoms,  mud  or  clay,  with  tho  fort  on  tho  east  side 
Toftho  town  bearing  north,  about  iiulf  a  mile  distant,  and  the  west  point  of  the  bay  W.  by 
In,  Vessels  from  the  westward,  when  bound  for  the  road,  may  run  in  with  the  single  ' 
Irec  ftbove  mentioned  just  open  to  tlie  eastward  of  Monkey  Hill ;  nnd,  when  the  points  of 
feh  innd  on  each  side  of  Frigate  Bay  begin  to  shut  in  on  each  other,  the  water  will  bo 
■uuiid  to  deepen  from  7  to  10  fathoms,  aft'U-  having  passed  over  a  rocliy  ridge  into  clean 
iraund. 

The  following  remarks  on  sailing  from  Nevis  to  Bassotorro,  have  been  made  by  Mr. 
packhouso:  "In  sailing  past  tho  island  of  Nevis  for  Ba.ssoterio  Bay,  give  tho  S.  W. 
Kiinta  ijprlh  of  a  mile  and  a  half,  and  steer  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  there  is  no 
t'n^er.  You  may  anchor  in  7,  P,  or  9  fathoms  of  water,  coarse  sandy  bottom,  with 
Fashion  Fort  bearing  N.  K.,  the  Half  Moon  Battery  N.  W.  by  W.,  nnd  tho  town  N.  N. 
h'.   You  ciinnot  wood  nor  water  hero." 

Old  Road  lies  five  and  a  half  miles  to  the  westward  of  Basseterre.  In  sailing  close 
Jlong  shore  to  this  jilace,  the  embra.  ures  of  the  low  battery  on  Stony  Point,  (the  eastern 
wint  of  the  bay,)  will  first  appear.  Tho  town  on  low  ground  will  then  come  in  sight, 
Kith  its  ileuses  iiiterniixed  with  trees.  Tho  anchoring  place  i.s  nearly  mid-way  between 
ftony  Point  and  tho  town.  In  sailing  to  this  spot,  run  first  so  far  to  leeward  as  to  fetch 
[upon  a  wind,  or  nearly  so;  and  then  stand  in  under  easy  sail,  directly  for  the  gully  to 
pe  eastward  of  the  town  ;  and  when  the  church  of  St.  Thomas,  standing  nearly  a  mile 
) the  westward,  is  brought  on  with  tho  flag-staff  on  Brimstone  Hill,  you  may  anchor, 
inbout  a  cable's  length  from  tlie  lioach,  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  stony,  but  good  ground. 
fresh  water  here  is  obtained  by  the  casks  being  landed  nnd  rolled  about  100  yards,  then 


404  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

filled  lit  tho  running  gully,  nnd  floatod  oflT  to  tho  bont.  Thoro  is  a  grent  surf  on  tho  rocky 
shore. 

Tho  rciiiiirks  miule  by  Mr.  niirkhoufin  on  Old  Roiid,  nro  na  foilowB: — "  (iivo  the  oait- 
ern  ponit  ii  t-iiiiill  borth,  nnd  niiclior  n  littl«  to  tho  niNtwiird  ut'  a  rod  h(iU8«,  nliroiiHtorn 
iiir}.'o  j;ully,  in  lO.ll.orl'i  fathoms  of  wiiter.  If  you  go  iibroabt  of  tho  town,  y(iu  will 
noon  be  olf  the  bank.  The  mark  for  anchoring  is  Old  Uond  Fort  by  tho  II<m1  I1oiik(){\j 
by  W.  half  a  mile,  and  the  oxtreme  pointtt  !S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  You  cnnnot  wood  here 
but  watiM'ing  is  extri'iiiely  convenient." 

Sandy  roint  Town  Ilea  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Brimstone  Hill.  Off  this  town, nnd 
to  the  iiiHtward  of  it,  tho  bank  is  narrow,  and  the  gronud  rocky  :  iho  anchoring  pjucu  jj 
conufciuenliy  to  tho  westward,  at  iiboiit  a  cable's  length  from  shore,  in  from  !)  tn  i.) 
futhoiiis,  and  the  mark  for  anchoring  is,  tho  btreet  extending  from  tho  liindlDg  pjuf.),^ 
througii  the  middle  of  the  town,  end  on.  In  running  along  shore  to  the  anciiunigB,  you 
muKt  cautiously  avoid  n  rouf  stretching  half  a  iiiilo  from  Cliarles  Fort  Point. 

Ecmarks  made  in  Basseterre  Road  and  Old  Road. 

In  BasBetorro,  which  is  a  large  open  bay,  tho  marks  of  the  nnchorago  are  iis  follow; 
The  long  point  of  Nevis  S.  S.  K.,  Nag's  Head  S.  K.,lilulV  Point,  VV.  i  N.,  the  town  of 
Basseterre  north,  distiince  olf  Khore  linlf  a  mile,  depth  of  water  7  fathnms;  WdoJ  pur- 
chased,  water  better  and  easier  got  at  Old  Road,  about  one  and  u  linlf  league  fruin  licuce; 
tides  none. 

Ill  llie  Uld  Road  the  following  are  the  murks  of  the  anchorage,  vi/,. :  tho  long  point  of  I 
Nevis  8.  K.,  southerly;  Stony  Fort  K.  S.  E.,  tho  westeriimoHt  point  of  Old  Kniid,  N. 
W.  by  N.,  Stony  Point  S.  K.  i  Fi.     Deptii  of  water  where  the  anchor  lay,   lO.J  fiitlioni!, 
ono-thirdof  a  cable  out — wind  olf  the  land  ;  l.'i  fathoms  under  tlie  stern — west  distance  I 
olf  shore  two-thirdsof  a  mile.     You   bind  your  casks,  roll  tliein  about  lUU  yards, uui] I 
fill  tliuiii  at  a  running  gully  ;  then  float  them  off  to  the  boat.     A  great  surf  and  a  rocky  I 
shore. 

Barbuda.  BARBUDA.— Tho  greatest  extent  of  Barbuda,  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.,  is  15  mih,- 

Its  highest  land  cannot  bo  discerned  at  more  than  six  leagues  off.  The  greater  partofl 
the  (ousts  of  this  island  are  very  foul  and  dangerous.  In  its  iiroximities,  it  is  not  uiicoraf 
mon  to  sound  with  BO  or  GO  fathoms  at  the  prow,  nnd  liiive  only  4  or  5  futhnnis  iitibl 
stern  ;  tlio  reef  extends  several  miles  to  tho  S.  E.  from  the  island,  and  the  rocky  sounij.l 
ings  continue  to  the  soutli  as  fur  us  mid-strnit  between  it  and  Antigua,  where  'J  liilhoiiii,| 
on  the  same  kind  of  bottom,  have  bec'ii  found.  'J'o  tho  N.  and  N.  W.  the  reef  exteniiil 
outwiird  to  the  distance  of  5  miles,  and  here  lie  tho  wrecks  of  llie  British  ship  Woalwicbl 
and  of  a  brig,  which  was  under  the  convoy  of  that  ship. 

'I'hero  is  anchorage  in  a  wcdl  sheltered  road  on  the  western  side,  where  sliips  raayl 
ride  in  9,  1^',  or  l-l  fiithoms  of  water;  or  within  the  reef  in  .3^  fathoma,  four  miles  abotel 
Palmetto,  on  the  south-west  point.  There  is  also  iinidiorago  off  the  S.  W.  coast,  in  jjl 
fathom.-,  sandy  bottom,  with  J'almetto  Point  N.  W.  by  W.,  three  miles,  and  Cocoa  l'uiiil,f 
the  south  ])oiiit  of  tho  island,  1<^.  by  S.,  4  miles  distant. 

Antigua.  ANTKiUA  has,  in  general,  a  rocky  shore,  and  is  surrounded  by  many  dantjerou 

reefs.  The  climato  of  this  island  is  commonly  hotter,  less  healthy,  and  the  huniciineii 
more  fre(|uent  than  those  of  Barbiuloes.  There  being  no  rivers,  and  but  few  sprind 
nnd  those  brackish,  tho  inhabitants  are  obliged  to  preserve  tho  rain  water  in  cislermj 
Excessive  droughts  frequently  impede  and  destroy  vegetation. 

Antigua,  however,  derives  considerable  advantage  from  the  circumstances  of  liaviii| 
several  excellent  harbors,  particularly  English  Harbor,  on  the  south  side,  wliicli  isciipil 
ble  of  receiving  the  largest  sliips  of  war  in  tho   .lavy  ;    here  also  is  a  dock-yiird,  wiiJ 
stoi  es  and  all  miiteriiils  and  conveniences  tiir  repairing.  Iieaving  down  and  ciireb'nin2slii|i 
To  tho  westward  of  English  Harbor  is  the  liiirbor  of  Falmouth,  and  to  wiiidwiiid,  isWilj 
loualiby  Bay.     At  tho  eastern  end  of  tlie  isliiiid  is  Nonsuch  Harbor;  and,  on  the  nortl 
side,  is  the  town  and  iiarbor  of  farkham,  dtc.     The  coii.«ts  are.  in  gencnii,  veiyl 
especially  on  the  N.  and  N.  E.,  whence  many  roefs  extend  out  to  the  distance  of  moij 
than  a  league. 

Tho  town  of  St.  John,  on  tho  N.  W.  side,  is  the  capital.  This  town  is  situatpdontl 
harbor  of  tho  same  name,  in  which  there  is  a  fiullicient  depth  for  niercliaiit  v'sselsj 
perfect  security  in  all  winds.  Ships  from  tho  eastward  generally  make  for  the  S.l 
coast  of  tho  island. 

Willoughby         WILLOUCJHBY  BAY.— Tho  first  harboron  the  S.  E.  side  is  that  called  WilloushlJ 

Bay.  Bay,  on  the  western  L'ido  of  which  is  a  little  islanrl,  culled  Sandy  Island,  enviioneilioj 

short  dibtanco  by  sunken  rocks.  From  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay  a  long  narrow  ref 
extends  more  than  two-thirds  over  the  entrance,  and  to  within  lialf  a  mile  of  SaKJ 
Island.  The  passago  is  therefore  between  the  island  and  the  reef;  nnd  evon  in iw 
efaannel  between,  there  is  a  shoal  having  only  9  feet  over  it,  culled  the  Weymouth, wb 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


405 


lifjonly  half  n  milo  from  Snndy  l.^liind,  iindon  whirh  tlio 
•'0 nciKons (IiowikmI,  in  Mairli,  IHW.     ll«twu«'ii  Siuuly 


Mail  Pncknt  Miiri.i  wni  IdrI,  nnd 
•.lOpciKonsdiownod,  It)  iMBirn,  iM'.'ii.  imiwm'ii  Miiiily  IsliitKl  mid  itiix  bIioiiI,  thnrn  is  a 
liepth  of  4  fiitlioins  :  between  it  and  tiii!  wost  end  of  tlin  rnuf  tlwro  iiro  7  futlioins,  and  tlin 
c'liHniiel  iii^vidxr.  At  a  niil»  within  tho  onti'itiice  tliuro  iH  t<oi)d  anciiunigo,  in  4  and  5 
filliomn;  in  iioini;  up,  it  is  roconiinonddd  to  iKirniw  towiird  tlif  InrboanI  siioro. 

KNfJfilSlI  HAllBOR. — Tliia  liailidr  is  pi'itectly  Hufii,  and  Vim  cIdho  under  tlm  west 
nnrt  of  till!  eiistornmost  iiiuli  land,  ho  as  to  ntfurd  a  sliidter  in  all  winds*;  and  sliipH  nf  war 
ronimoiily  lii!  lifM-o  diirinn  tlio  Inirricanes.  In  the  hay  witliont  tlm  linrh  ir  »hi|w  may  an- 
cliur  i»  •'>■  *'•  •"' '''  fallioins.  Tliey  must  warp  in,  and  cannot  liooxecpting  N.  N.  K.  Tiioro 
are,  Kcaeriiliy,  flulteringa  of  wind  from  tlie  liiuh  laiui. 

Ill  onturiin,'  tho  iiarbor  nivo  tho  Old  IIorHit-shoe,  or  low  battery  point,  on  tho  starhoard 
iiJo.ft  good  berth,  and  keep  as  nearly  as  poHsible  in  niid-cliaiinel,  between  that  ami  llio 
opposite  point,  on  which  stands  Fort  Barclay,  until  yon  jret  into  the  bay  on  the  eastern 
<iJe,ciillyd  Freeman's  Hay.  In  this  bay  there  are  inoorinj;s  f(n'  shippini;,  and  good  aii- 
clioniRe  lieiico  up  to  tho  atore-liouses  on  the  western  nide,  in  .'{,  4,  iimi  5  fathoms.  The 
«nt«ris  generally  smooth.  Il  is  not,  however,  pi-rlectly  safe  for  a  utrr.nuer  to  conduiit  a 
ship  in,  IIS  the  enlranoo  is  narrow  and  rather  shoal.  When  you  are  oi;  the  liarbor,  a  pilot, 
or  the  muster  attendant,  will  come  on  board. 

Large  ships  lie  at  proper  moorings,  but  smiill  ones  lie  with  one  anchor  to  tho  E.  ,S.  E., 
nnd  thtt  other  made  astern,  on  shore.  There  are  four  moorings  for  slilfis  in  Freoman's 
liny,  just  within  tho  harbor's  mouth,  tho  best  bower  to  the  westward,  and  tho  muorings 
on  shore  to  the  eastward. 

Wood  and  water  are  not  to  be  obtained  hero  You  may,  however,  obtain  the  latter  at 
Fnlmouth,  about  a  mile  and  a  half  to  leeward.  It  is  not  very  good,  being  suit,  muddy  aud 
brackish. 

FALMOUTH  HARBOR. — To  sail  into  this  harbor,  run  close  in  towards  tho  westeru 
point,  called  Proctor's  Point,  nnd  you  will  pass  clear  of  a  ledge  of  sunken  rocks  called 
the  Bishops,  which  lie  toward  tho  middle,  just  within  the  entrance,  and  termlniite  a  shoal 
j  esteniling  from  tho  eastern  point,  on  wh  ch  there  is  a  redoubt  fur  the  protection  of  the 
harbor;  beyond  these  rocks  there  is  good  anchorago  in  from  3  to  0  t'lthoms  water. 
There  is  a  battery  on  an  islet  within  for  the  defence  of  tho  town,  on  tho  western  side  of 
I  the  hiirbor;  beyond  which  there  ia  a  spring  of  fresh  water. 

Vessels  bound  to  .St.  John's  Iiarbor,  from  the  south  side  of  the  island,  on  approaching 
I  westward,  must  give  the  coast  a  berth  of  .'!  or  4  miles,  until  they  come  abreiist  of  John- 
ion's  Point,  (the  S.  W.  point  of  the  isliiii<l,)  in  order  to  avoid  the  dangeroiH  reefs  which 
I  lie  about  2  miles  from  shore,  eastward  ami  north-westward  of  the  point.  If  bound  to  the 
I  north-westward  from  English  Harbor,  tho  course  to  abreast  of  Johnson's  Point  is  first  W. 
jby  S.,  orW.  S.  \V.,  about  8  miles:  then  hauling  towards  the  N.  N.  VV.,  and  keeping 
lliie  lend  going,  still  keeping  at  the  above  mentioneil  distance  from  the  island,  steer  for 
ISandy  Island,  tho  little  island  lying  to  tho  westward  of  St.  John's  IloaU,  and  about  7  miles 
|N.  by  W.  from  Johnson's  Point. 

Or,  in  sailing  from  off  English  Harbor,  to  the  westward,  when  to  leeward  of  Falmouth 
jHarbor,  keep  the  small  battery  on  tho  eastern  side  of  tho  entrance  of  that  harbor  open 
Iwith  the  western  point  of  the  same,  until  you  are  off  Carlisle  Bay,  or  Old  Road.  Tlie 
Ibluiriand  of  English  Harbor  being  then  kept  upon  without  that  of  Old  Road,  will  load 
|clenr  of  Johnson's  Reef,  in  a  depth  of  about  18  fathoms. 

On  the  western  side  of  Antigua,  at  about  halfway  up,  and  nearly  a  league  to  tlu^Huuth- 
Iward  of  Snndy  Island,  is  a  large  harbor,  called  Five  Islands  Harbor,  and  so  called  from  a 
Icluster  of  five  remarkable  little  islands,  which  lie  nearly  in  a  lino,  about  half  a  mile  east 
f\i  west,  off  the  point  on  its  south  side.  About  three-quarters  of  a  milo  to  the  northward 
bfthe  hnrhor,  and  close  in  shore,  is  another  conspicuous  little  island,  called  tho  Hawk's  Bill. 
iWheii  you  have  approached  so  far  to  leeward  with  tho  mark  above  mentioned,  namely, 

'  I  blurt' of  English  Iiarbor  kept  open  without  that  of  Old  Road,  as  to  have  the  Hawk's 

iopen  to  the  westward  of  tho  Fivo  Islands,  you  will  be  clear  of  the  reefs,  and  may 
lack  up  towards  Sandy  Island.  In  approaching  this  island,  keep  it  on  your  starboard 
WW,  in  order  to  avoid  several  shoals  extending  to  tho  distance  of  a  mile  from  shore,  to  the 
p.W.  of  Five  Islands  Iiarbor. 

Should  the  wind  permit,  you  may  run  within  Sandy  Island  ;  but  it  is  bettor  for  stran- 
lers  to  go  to  leeward  of  it,  at  the  distance  of  not  less  than  two  cables'  length,  so  as  to 
jvoid  a  roof  which  stretches  from  its  southern  side  to  tho  .S.  W.  Be  careful  not  to  stand 
pove  three  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  island,  lost  you  bo  caught  by  a  leo  current,  or 
luch  on  the  shoals  which  lie  to  tho  northward.  By  keeping  in  1  j  fathoms,  you  may  pass 
learof  the  island  in  the  night. 
IROAD  OF  ST.  JOHN'S.— This  roadstead  lies  about  li  mile  oast,  a  little  northerly, 

om  Sandy  Island.  It  lies  in  lat.  17°  10',  or  very  nearly  so.  The  western  point,  on  the 
kath  aide,  which  forms  the  bay,  is  called  tho  Ship's  Stern,  at  about  a  mile  north  of  which 
pre  ia  a  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks,  with  not  more  than  3  feet  water  over  thorn,  called 
p  Warrington.    Here  are  breakers  in  a  wind. 


English 
Iiarbor. 


Falmoutli 
Harbor. 


lioad  of  St. 
John's. 


•w. 


406 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  roHd  lies  the  southward  of  the  Warrington  Rocks,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  6  to 
10  fathoms.  The  anchorage,  which  i«  2  or  3  cables'  lengtli  within  the  rocks,  lies  with  the ' 
Ship's  Stern  S.  W.  by  W. ;  Fort  James  on  the  north  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor 
E.  S.  E. ;  and  the  Warrington  N.  by  W.,  or  with  the  flag-staff  of  Fort  James  on  with 
the  north  side  of  the  island  in  the  harbor,  called  Rat  Island,  where  there  are  from  5  to  7 
fathoms  water,  and  good  holding  grounil- 

The  middle  of  the  Warrington  Rocks  lies  with  the  northern  part  of  the  buildings  on 
Fort  James  on  with  Rat  Island  above  mentioned.     Close  to  the  westward  of  them,  in 
the  depth  of  9  fathoms,  the  largest  of  the  Five  Islands  appears  open  to  the  WKtwnrd  of ! 
the  Hawk's  Bill.     The  western  part  shoalens  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  breakei^, 
but  the  eastern  part  is  bold  to. 

Ships  bound  to  the  road  stanu  on  upon  a  wind  for  half  a  mile  above  Snndy  Island; 
then  tack,  and  run  close  in  to  the  Ship's  Stern  ;  but  be  sure  not  to  get  farther  to  wind 
ward  than  to  open  the  Hawk's  Bill  without  the  land,  or  to  bring  it  in  a  line  with  the  eiist- 
ernmost  af  the  Five  Islands,  When  thus  far  in,  if  standing  to  the  northward  towards  the 
Warrington,  you  liirist  tack  so  soon  as  the  flag-staff  of  Fort  James  appears  on  with  the 
middle  "f  Rat  Island. 

To  sail  up  within  Sandy  Island,  bring  the  wiisternmost  of  the  Five  Islands  N.  by  E.  J 
E.,  and  keep  them  open  on  the  starboard  bow,  which  will  lead  clear  of  danger. 

At  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  westernmost  of  the  Five  Islands,  you  will  be  in  the 
channel ;  keep  Sandv  Island,  as  before  mentioned,  on  the  starboard  bow,  until  you  open 
the  Hawk's  Bill,  and  then  luff.  The  eastern  side  i/  Snndy  Island  is  nearly  bold  to,  and  - 
in  the  day,  the  shoaling  may  be  seen.  The  Ship's  Stern  is  bold  to.  After  the  Hnwk's 
Bill  bears  E.  by  S.  you  may  haul  up  as  near  to  it  as  you  choose,  there  being  11  futhoms 
of  water  close  to  it.  In  steering  for  the  harbor,  keep  along  the  south  shore,  which  is  all  j 
clear. 

There  is  a  bar  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  which  stretches  from  the  north  sidn  S. 
W.  to  the  land  on  the  south  side.     The  deepest  water.  14  feet,  is  on  the  soutlienimost  | 
part  of  the  bar.     The  depth  on  the  northern  pint  is  about  12  feet. 
Notthernakle       NORTHERN  SIDE  OF  THE  ISLAND.— The  northern  and  western  constsofl 
of  the  Island.    Antigua  are  environed  by  numerous  reefs,  (as  shown  on  the  chart.)  between  wliioh  and  | 
the  land  there  is  a  good  channel  for  shipping.     At  the  N.  E.  jjnrt  there  are  nlso  a  num- 
ber of  small  islands,  of  which  two  or  tlireo  of  the  outermost  are  called  tlio  Bird  hlandj. 
The  whole  are  encompassed  by  reefs,  which  renders  them  inaccessible  to  sliiijping.    Of  I 
the  latter,  the  northernmost  is   a  narrow  ledge,  part  of  which  is  sotnetiines  dry.    This 
ledge  stretches  N.  E.  about  a  mile  from  the  northernmost  Bird  Island.     Af-hoalof3| 
fathoms  lies  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  end  of  the  jedje,  be- 
tween which  and  the   Bird  Islands  Reef  tliere  is  a  clear  channel   of  ^  atut  fi  t'atlioiiij, 
The  white  water  from  the  shoal  nniv  fretjuently  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  u  iiiilo  a»ui  a  | 
half. 

'  no  HARBOR  OF  PARII.VM  lies  at  the  distance  of  2  miles  westward  of  the  Bird 
Islands  Ledge.     This  harl)or,  though  large,  will  admit  small  vessels  only.     Thutownij] 
situated  on  tha  south  side  of  the  harbor. 

A  little  iilnnd,  called  the  Prickly  Pear,  lies  o(T  the  west  point  of  the  entrnnco  of  Piir- j 
ham  Harbor,  and  about  4  miles  dun  west  from  the  north  end  of  the  Biul  Islamic  Ledzc 
In  advancing  towards  this  "sland,  and  thence  to  Boon's  Point  two  miles  to  the  wesfWiird  I 
of  it,  !)■)  sure  not  to  get  over  to  tin?  northward,  as  the  reefs  on  that  side  are  extremely 
dangc^rous,  and  in  some  ])art:i  not  more  than  a  mile  from  the  coast. 

From  lluon's  Point,  logo  clear  of  the  Warrington  Rocks,  on  the  northern  sido  of  St.  I 
John's  Road,  the  course  and  distance  are  W.  S.  W.,  southerly,  4  miies. 
The  iSoYih-  The  NORTHERN  LEIXJHS  off  the  north  const  of  Antigua,  connnencc  with  tlip  I 

cin  Lrii<r(,s.  rock  cmIIimI  Addison's  Rock  on  the  cast,  and  terminate  with  the  reef  called  the  Diiimoml 
Reef  on  the  west.  Addison's  Rnck  is  a  shoal,  having  on  soin(!  parts  only  4  feet  (if  wnter, 
and  lying  nearly  north  of  the  twrt  on  Harnacle  Point,  upon  tlie  western  siile  of  the  en- 
trance to  Parham  Harbor.  It  has  a  depth  of  about  ',}  fathoms  aroood  it.  Wiiliin  a  short  I 
distance,  N.  by  W.,  westerly,  from  \(Mison's  Rock,  there  are  two  other  slxiab  of  nboiitl 
n  liithon)s  :  and  half  a  mile  thence.  v\  st,  is  a  reef,  sometimes  above  wnter,  ami  nailed  the 
Horse-shoe.  This  ,'cef  bears  noi"  ^tie  mil«  and  a  ([uarter  distant  from  the  Priiddy  Pear, 
close  to  the  wotward  of  the  IL^  -.•-shoe,  mid  l)etween  it  ntid  the  groat  cluster  of  reeb 
which  slrt'tch  to  the  westward,  iliere  is  k  ..-hanne!  of  5  fathoms. 

At  a  sliort  distance  to  the  westward  of  Beggar's  Point  (the  point  to   the  f.o-.itliward  ot  1 
the  Prickly  Peai)  there  is  a  windmill:  and  at  the  distanc^e  of  one-third  of  a  niih'  to  the 
S.  \V.  tli"re   is  another.     These  rni'!^  form  the  mark  for  sailing  thiough  the  channel  "n 
the  western  sido  of  the  Horse-shoi      and  steering  S.  by  W.  between  them,  will  lend  a 
vessel  thriiu/h. 

A  Hfn  HI  shoul  of  only  5  feet  of  water.  Ii'>s  ,S.  W.  by  W.,  at  the  distance  of  nearly  n  iniln 
and  a  half  from  the  Ilorsi'-shoc.  and    n'urly  at  the  Siime  distance  N.  W.  by  W.  I'rnni  the  I 
I'rickly  I'cai-.     There  is  also  a  shoal  siretchitii;  half  a  mile  from  tins  wesiern  ?ide  o!  t 
Prickly  Pear,  which  nniy  bo  seen  during  the  day. 


The  Harbor 
of  Parham. 


wemmm 


^mm 


mmmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


407 


"apt.  Brndshaw  has  observed,  that  there  are  so  many  shonis  and  rocky  spots  without 
iho  great  reefs  above  mentioijed,  that  it  is  dangerous  to  come  too  near.  That,  in  par- 
ticular, called  the  Diamond,  lies  a  mile  to  the  west  of  the  reef,  and  in  the  channel  bo- 
Hfeen  you  have  6  and  5i  fathoms.  You  will  be  in  this  channel  whilst  ycu  keep  the 
western  side  of  the  leeward  Sister  in  a  line  with  the  flag-statf  of  James  Fort.  The  Dia- 
mond is  of  a  circular  form,  and  one  mile  in  extent :  the  depth  of  water  over  it  is  from  1 
to  9  feet.  To  avoid  it,  when  coming  in  from  the  N.  W.,  bring  the  Ship's  Stern  to  bear 
S.  by  E.  before  you  haul  up  with  the  fort,  and  then  look  out  for  tlie  Warrington  Rocks. 
If  the  wind  will  serve,  you  may  pass  close  to  the  westward  of  the  westernmost  Sister, 
and  yon  will  thus  weather  the  Warrington,  which  l)ears  north,  above  a  mile  from  the 
Ship's  Stern.  The  westernmost  part  slioalens  from  the  breakers  a  full  cable's  length,  but 
10  the  eastward  it  is  bold  to. 

Eejnarks  on  the  Coast  of  Antigua. 

[P'rom  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas.] 

On  approaching  Willoughby's  Bay,  upon  the  S.  E.  coast,  great  caution  is  required, 
1.  order  to  avoid  its  rocky  shoals,  and  a  pilot  will  bo  requisite  lor  strangers  who  enter 
here. 

From  this  bay  the  coast  continues  .o  the  westward  very  clear,  and  in  it  you  will  soon 
find  ENGLISH  HARBOR,  which  is  an  excellent  port,  hiiving  i    .'ock-yiini  and  careen-    English 
iiigpliice  for  vessels  of  any  size.     The  strnit  of  this  hjii-bor  is  aiii.a  \\  cuble's  length  in    Harbor. 
width,  and  in  the  middle  of  it  there  are  from  4  to  5  fathoms,  niul  3  fiithoms  nt  a  quarter 
iil'ttciiblo  from  the  points.     After  J^nglish  Harbor,  that  nf  FALMOUTH  follows,  and    Falmouth. 
ihence  the  coast  begins  to  be  foul,  sending  out  for  more  than  two  cables'  length  from  it, 
ver)'  dangerous  rocky  r'^efs.     'J'hns  it  continues  to  CARLISLE  liA  Y,  or  the  Old  Road.    Carlisle  Bay. 
From  Carlisle  Bay  to  Johnson's  Point,  tlie  south-west  point  of  the  island,  tin;  coast  ex- 
tends to  the  north,  but  has  a  rocky  shoal,  of  the  length  of  2i  miles,  which  lies  at  a  mile 
and  n  half  from  the  coast.     Between  this  slioal  and  the  coast  there  is  a  passage  fit  for  any 
vessel,  but  it  ought  not  to  bo  attempted  witliout  a  pilot. 

Fruin  Johnson's  Point  the  coast  continues  to  the  north,  to  the  FIVE  ISLANDS,  on   Five  Islands. 
the  south  side  of  the  harbor  of  that  name;  and  another  shoal  of  rocks  and  sand  extends 
between  these  points,  which  lies  about  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  coast.     The  depth  be- 
tween is  very  unequal,  and  the  navigation  therefore  dimgerous. 

From  the  Five  Isles  the  coast  forms  a  great  bay,  named  Five  Islands  liaibor,  of  which 
the  north  point  is  called  Pelican  Point.  At  about  two  miles  from  the  N.  N.  E.  of  this 
pnint,  is  tbo  point  called  the  Ship's  Stt^rn,  which  is  the  S.  W.  point  of  St.  John's  Pny. 
Between  the  two  points  is  a  sarjd-bank,  which  extends  o'lt  above  n  mile  from  the  coa  it, 
and  its  edge  is  nearly  on  the  meridian  or  south  of  Sandy  I^'and,  an  islet  two  miles  to  the 
west  of  tlio  Ship's  Stern.  A  reef  surrounds  Sandy  Island,  ':r.d  is  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
i'l  extent  from  N.  E.  to  the  S.  W. 

Two  miles  to  the  N.  E.  by  N.  of  the  Ship's  Stern  are  tv>  :>  islets,  named  the  Sisters, 
which  are  three-quiu'ters  of  a  mile  b.  \V.  by  W.  from  Corbi/. -n's  Point,  on  which  tliero 
is  II  fort. 

Between  the  two  Sisters  and  Sandy  Island,  and  just  within  this  iine  of  direction,  is  the 
rocky  shoal  called  the  Wariington,  which  has,  in  its  shoaler  part,  not  more  than  3  feet  of 
wnter. 

The  town  of  St.  John,  situated  nt  the  bottom  of  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  is  the  capital 
of  the  i>;|imd,  and  centre  of  its  commerce.  We,  therefore,  give  directions  which  may 
guide  liny  one  to  tlie  anchorage.  The  north  roust  of  this  island  is  very  foul,  as  already 
noticed;  it  is,  therefore,  more  advisable,  on  .nlvancing.  to  Muik(>  tiie  island  on  the  south 
side,  and  direct  your  course  so  as  to  pasn  about  two  mili>H  to  the  south  of  its  southern- 
most points,  and  continue  steering  true  w^st.  hut  nothing  to  the  north,  until  the  western- 
most pai't  of  the  Five  Islands  bears  noith.  when  you  may  Inlf  up  to  N.  N.  W.  ;  with 
wiiicli  course  yon  will  pass  about  a  mile  from  the  outermost  part  of  the  Irisli  Bank,  a 
shoiil  of  siind  and  rock,  and  yiiu  will  follow  it  until  the  Five  Islands  iiear  east;  when,  if 
tile  wind  allows,  you  will  stee.-  so  as  to  pass  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  S.  E.  side 
ol'  Siiiidy  Island,  uikitig  cai'o  not  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  N.  E.  by  N.,  that  you  nniy 
keep  clfiir  of  the  si:nd-!)iink,  which  extends  from  the.  coast  between  Pelican  Point  and 
the  Ship's  Stern,  until  Sandy  Island  bears  north,  when  you  may  Inlf  to  the  wind  nil 
yoiiciiii:  and,  if  you  can,  place  the  vessel's  head  towards  the  Siiip's  Stern  Point,  which 
is  Very  (dean,  and  (idlow  on  towards  the  road  withiii,  and  anchor  in  5  or  (i  fiithoms  water, 
nearly  south  from  the  Warrinuton  Shiial.  If,  when  passini;  between  Sandy  Islnnd  ami 
the  const,  the  wind  will  not  permit  yonr  approiudi  to  the  Ship's  Stern  Point,  you  nnty 
fulldw  tli(!  tuck  until  Fort  Iliimilton,  which  is  the  middle  one  of  the  fliree  slanding  on 
tile  const  to  the  nortli  of  the  town,  bears  east ;  then  <;(i  iihoiit  on  the  other  tack,  and  con- 
liuue  L"iiiting,  taking  caro  not  to  prolong  the  north  tuck  more  than  until  Hamilton  Fort 


■mmi  *  ■  I 


40S 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


bears  east;  or  go  nbowt  even  rather  sooner :  but  the  south  tack  you  may  follow  until  you 
are  within  ii  cable's  length  of  the  shore  of  Ship's  Stern  Point,  for  it  is  very  clean. 

If,  when  to  the  west  of  the  Five  Islands,  the  wind  will  not  permit  you  to  puss  to  the 
S.  E.  of  Sandy  Island,  you  must  steer  lothe  north  until  the  north  point  of  Saudy  hiaiid 
bears  east,  southerly,  and  theu  you  will  haul  by  the  wind,  and  prolong  the  stretch  until 
30U  can  weather  Sandy  Island  on  the  other  tack;  and  having  weathered  it,  you  will  beat 
in  as  above  stated  ;  that  is  on  the  north  tack,  until  you  are  nearly  west  of  Fort  Hiuniitou  • 
and  on  the  south  fick,  to  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  const,  near  the  Shi])'s  Stern. 

To  proceed  to  the  northward,  from  the  road  of  St.  John,  it  is  necessary  to  give  11  berth 
to  the  rockv  shoal  called  the  Diamond,  and  others,  which  extend  west  almost  to  the  me- 
ridian cjt'  the  Worritigton  ;  and  the  northernmost  part  of  which  is  nearly  five  miles  dis- 
tant tVjiu  the  Ship's  Stern  Point.  To  ed'ect  this  you  must  steer  from  the  aiichonce 
wtioiit  N.  W.  by  N.,  but  nottiiiig  to  the  north  of  that,  until  Sandy  Island  bears  from  south 
towaril*  east,  and  then  you  iniiy  steer  north,  which  you  will  continue  until  the  Sisters 
bear  S.  E.  by  S.,  when  you  iiiity  haul  to  the  wind,  and  pursue  your  route,  accordiug  to 
destinatkitfl. 

If,  having  made  tllie  north  part  of  Antigua,  you  wish  to  anchor  at  St.  John's,  you  ought 
to  steer  trwe  «p««t,  fMMing  outsude  of  all  the  shoals  ;  that  is,  avoiding  the  north  coust  by 
about  ftwr  MilwK,  vmM  Sand  Island  bears  south,  a  little  easterly,  when  you  may  steer 
towards  it,  unttl  yo*  are  due  west  from  the  northernmost  land  of  Antigua;  thence 
steer  for  .Ship's  Stern  Potnt,  and  so  run,  until  being  something  to  the  south  of  Fort 
Hamilton,  you  may  haul  'jy  the  wiad,  or  slm|fte  the  most  convenient  course  to  gain  the 
anchorage. 

The  channel  betw^n  (>rMdnloiipe  and  Antigua  is  most  excellent,  and  does  not  offer  the 
least  danger. 

The  channel  betwotMi  Antigua  and  Barbuda,  on  the  contrary,  is,  at  times,  dangerous, 
particularly  between  May  and  November,  during  which  season,  no  one  should  pass 
through  if,  because  there  are  many  calms  in  it,  alteruamg  with  very  heavy  squnlls  of  wind; 
and,  as  the  depth  of  the  cliiiiiuel  is  so  unequal,  and  the  bottom  tVocjuently  rocky,  an 
anchor  cannot  bo  let  go  ivhen  the  calms  come  on,  and  the  risk  is  incurred  uf  buiug 
driven  upon  the  rocks,  either  on  one  side  or  the  other,  by  currents  that  nuiy  occasionally 
prevail  here. 
Moiitserrat  MONTSERRAT  AND  REDONDO.— There  is  no  harbor  in  the  Island  of  Mont- 

and  Redondo.  serrat,  and  the  greater  part  of  the  coast  is  so  encompassed  with  rocks  as  to  render  riding 
dangerous,  in  case  of  a  Imrricane  or  tornado.  The  princifMii  roadstead  is  olf  the  town, 
and  there  are  two  others  shown  in  the  chart,  namely  :  Old  Koad  and  Ker's  Bay;  liutin 
all  these  a  surf  beats  continually  on  the  shore.  Large  hea»jr  goods  are  therelbre  land- 
ed and  shipped  by  means  of  a  bout,  called  a  Moses,  manned  by  expert  rowers;  who,  when 
they  see  what  is  termed  a  lull,  or  abatement  of  the  surge,  push  ashore  and  lay  the  broad- 
side of  the  Moses  on  the  beach,  so  as  to  roll  out  or  admit  ihe  l»i.^sheads,  'Sec.  Colton, 
rum,  and  other  commodities,  which  will  bear  the  water,  are  g'-uerally  floated  olFor 
ashore. 

It  has  been  recommended  to  those  who  lie  near  this  island,  wb«n  the  state  of  the  at- 
mosphere indicates  an  approacliint;  tornado,  to  get  under  way  for  Antigua,  or  St.  Chris- 
topher's, according  to  the  wind  and  other  circumstances. 

The  Spanish  description  says,  "  Monsterrat,  which  lies  nearly  S.  S.  E.  and  N.  N. 
W.,  is  a  great  rock,  formed  ii)y  iw  t  mountains.  The  M.  E.  part  is  remarkably  high, 
scarped,  or  clilfy,  and  clean.  The  i«1.ind  tias  not  the  sm.illi;i»t  bay,  nor  any  breakers,  ex- 
cept they  break  upon  the  very  shore,  which  you  may  come  to  near  as  almost  to  touch  it, 
without  the  least  risk.  The  N.  W.  point  m  also  high  am!  scarped,  (or  clilfy,)  and  l)lulf, 
The  highest  parts  of  the  island  iiMty,  in  cluur  weather,  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  til'toen 
leagues. 

The  S.  E.  part  is  higher  than  tin  i<  W..  but  it  has  a  gentler  dt-i'livity,  and  whore  it 
joins  the  sea  i.s  rather  low  ;  the  south  i)art  is  also  very  clean  ;  but,  when  the  breeze  south- 
easts,  the  •^ea  breilk^-  upon  it  with  much  force  The  road  is  an  o|)eniiig  of  some  depth, 
which  atfunis  shelter  only  when  the  breeze  is  N.  f.  'T\i\*  reiiders  it  impossible  for  large 
vessel.*  to  anchor  in  it,  and  none  frequent  it  but  soiiie  small  (»««»«,  lo  carry  away  tlio  pro- 
duce (if  the  island,  which  they  take  to  Antigua. 
Redondo.  REDOND),  which  lies  three  leagues  to  the  N    W.  from  the  noith  end  of  Montser- 

rat,  is  a  very  high,  round,  barren,  and  uninhabited  <■•:■  ii^  the  appearance  of  11  hay- 

cock, and  which  may  be  seen  iVoni  the  distance  nf  :)  igues.     'I'liHie  is  aiadioriigo 

on  the  west  ,iide  of  it,  in  the  dupth  of  1  i  fathoms       You  i«»(*y  »pproiii!i  111'    isle  on  piflier 
side,  it  being  steeji  to.     Ou  the  S.    E.  side  is  a  Irftle  islet,  cMe»i  the  J'innacio,  wluch  is 
nearly  joined  to  the  land. 
Aves.or Birds'      AVES,  or  BIRDS'  ISLAND,— This  little  soliUry  isle,  whvtb  takes  its  nniiie  t'l  mi 
hland.  the  multitude  of  sea  fowl  with  which  it  is  always  cover"  I,  h<"   A-zrvwrcrng  to  the  Spanish 

chart,  in  bit.  1.5'^  od' and  long.  6;i"  4:;        It  is  extri'irtxty  .-.w,  .k."  surrounded  -ly  a  sniiily 
beach.     In  the  middle  it  is  somewbiil  higher  than  at  its  extremiuos.  and  has  some  tioos. 


IP 


mi 


wmm 


^"PPPH^WPiliiP* 


"jpp 


■'^'Pmii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


409 


Xhere  are  reefs  on  its  S.  £.  and  N.  W.  sides,  which  extend  out  to  a  short  distance,  and 
gn  which  the  sea  always  breaks.  The  length  is  about  three  cables,  from  N.  to  S.,  and 
nearly  the  same  from  E.  to  W.  The  height  is  about  12  or  15  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
,ea,  At  the  western  part  of  it  there  is  good  shelter  from  the  sea,  where  a  vessel  may 
gnciior  in  10  or  12  fathoms  of  water,  on  a  sandy  bottom.  This  island  may  be  seen,  in  u 
clear  diiy,  at  3d  or  4  leagues  off,  but  the  flight  of  birds,  at  the  setting  of  the  sun,  will  al- 
wnys  point  out  its  situation. 

Father  Lavnl  says,  that  there  is  anchorage  on  the  S.  W.  side,  nthalf  a  pistol  shotfrom 
;|)ore;  in  3i  fathoms,  white  sand.  He  adds,  there  is  neither  pond  nor  a  spring  of  fresh 
water  on  the  island :  but,  it  is  supposed,  that  by  digging  ut  the  distance  of  150  or  200 
paces  from  the  shore,  water  might  be  found. 

On  the  west  and  N.  W.  sides,  are  two  islets,  or  barren  rocks,  white  with  the  dung  of 
birds,  which  resort  there.  These  islands  are  connected  to  Aves  by  shoals  and  breakers, 
which  may  be  seen. 

Mr.  James  Finluison,  (M.  R.  N.,)  describes  the  Isle  of  Aves  os  follows: — "  The  Island 
of  Aves  lies  in  lat.  15°  40'  N.,  long.  63°  33'  W.,  variation  4°  20'  E.;  it  is  a  low  small 
isiaud  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  length;  you  will  not  see  it  farther  off  than  six 
or  eight  miles;  broken  water  extends  from  both  eids  of  the  island,  about  half  a  mile 
from  it.  Ships  must  be  careful  that  they  keep  near  the  parallel,  in  the  nigh'',  time,  as 
it  \i  impossible  to  see  it,  being  so  very  low  ;  there  is  a  slight  covering  of  grass  on  the  top." 
The  position  of  Aves,  ns  given  in  the  French  Tables,  is  15°  30'  18"  N.,  and  63°  38'  17" 
W.  The  mean  of  the  three  statements  is  15°  40'  N.,  and  long.  63°  38'  W.  A  positive 
determiniition  seems  to  be  still  a  desideratum. 

GUADALOUPE. — The  form  of  Guadaloupe  is  very  irregular,  as  shown  by  the  chart,  Guadaloupe. 
and  the  laud  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  an  arm  of  the  sea,  called  the  Riviere  Saleo,  or 
Salt  River;  a  stream  diminishing  in  width  from  50  to  15  fathoms,  and  of  which  the  sound- 
ings are  in  some  places  deep  enough  for  a  ship  of  five  hunderd  tons,  whilst,  in  others, 
there  is  scarcely  water  enough  for  a  bark  of  fifty.  Tlie  length  of  this  strait  is  about  two 
leagues,  and  no  scene  can  be  more  pleasant  than  the  passage ;  the  water  being  clear  and 
still,  and  the  banks  on  each  side  lined  with  mangroves  and  palmettos,  which  afford  excel- 
lent refreshment,  and  shelter  from  the  heat. 

The  western  division  of  the  island,  which  is  the  most  important,  is  divided  into  two 
parts,  by  a  ridge  of  very  high  rugged  mountains,  extending  north  and  south;  so  high, 
indeed,  that  the  continual  cold  suliers  nothing  to  grow  iiut  fern,  and  some  useless  trees 
covered  with  mo.ss.  Towards  the  south  point  there  appears,  in  the  middle  region  of  the 
air,  a  mountain  called  La  Soulfriero,  or  the  Sulphur  Hill,  which  is  about  5,500  feet  in 
height  above  tho  level  of  the  sea.  This  mountain  exholes  a  thich  black  smoke,  mixed 
with  sparks,  vtsible  in  tho  night.  From  the  mountains  flow  mriny  streams,  that  carry 
I'ruitt'uluess  into  the  ()liuns,  and  attemper  the  burning  nir  of  the  climate. 

The  eastern  division  of  the  island,  distinguished  by  the  ninno  of  Grand  Terre,  has  not 
been  so  inucli  favunMl  by  nature  as  the  western  piirt:  indeed,  it  is  less  rough,  and  more 
level,  but  it  wants  springs  and  rivei's;  the  soil,  more  sandy,  is  not  so  fertile,  nor  is  its  cli- 
mate so  lioalthy.  Its  pi'incipal  town.  Port  au  Potre,  or  St.  Louis,  is  a  place  of  consider- 
alie  trade. 

The  chiftf  town  of  Ciuadalouj.'e  is  that  named  Basseterre,  situated  on  the  west  side, 
neiii'  the  south  end  of  the  island. 

The  English  ship  Temple,  being  at  anchor  at  Bassetciio  Roiul,  hud  the  westornmost 
part  of  tho  Saintes  and  some  part  of  tlie  western  side  ot  Dominica  in  one,  bearing  S.  E. 
by  S.;  Montsorrut,  at  tho  same  time,  bore  N.  W.,  northerly,  and  the  westernmost  part 
(if  Basseterre  Buy  N.  W.  I)y  N.,  disf;iut  one  mile. 

The  Klore,  French  frigate,  being  moored  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  in  this  road,'in  1772, 
in  7  fathoms,  sandy  ground,  and  the  small  anchor  in  .'i7  fiithoms,  similar  ground,  had  the 
following  bearings  by  conipass:  Tho  fort  to  tho  S.  \V.  of  the  town,  S.  E.  by  E  ,  tho 
church  N.  E.;  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  town  iN.  by  W.;  Point  Irois  N.  N.  W. ;  and  the 
southernmost  point  ol    Dominica  S.  E.  by  S. 

Should  you  be  bound  from  tho  road  of  Basseterre  to  Antigua,  tho  best  way  is  to  weigh 
iitnii^ht,  and  sail  at  so'jli  a  distance  from  the  shore  as  to  ki'op  the  land  wind,  that  it  may 
carry  you  to  the  northern  part  of  the  ishind  by  moridng,  where  you  will  have  the  sea 
wind  to  carry  you  across.  Should  you  act  otherwise,  you  may  be  cauglit  by  the  baffling 
winds  tVoni  under  the  high  lands.  Ofl"  the  N.  W.  point  of  (iuitdaloupe  there  is  a  small 
but  remarkable  high  roi'li.  called  !lo  a  la  Anglois,  or  Englishman's  Head;  it  appears 
gray,  and  particularly  ui^iiiiguishoe  tliis  coast,  and  there  is  no  passage  within  it. 


m 


iS'?l"-i|'.WIJII  X"<H»lj« 


lil|p.B,ll>l  II     if^^li|in.ini;^|llil,tl.5UJl^v,i«y»H      I    l|Rf,!^|pp|||Kp|li 


'-'q;;j-<~i' 


410 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


*  •    I  .  i^  Remarks  on  Ouadaloupe. 

•  ■  \i  -         ■ 

[From  the  Derrotero  do  las  Antillas,  &c.] 

This  island,  the  mountnins  of  which  niny  be  seen  in  clenr  woother  nt  the  distanco  of  20 
leagues,  is  divided  into  two  almost  eqnnl  parts,  by  n  channel  navigable  solely  for  boats niid 
Grand  Terre.  canoes.  The  eastern  part  is  named  GRAND  TERR]'-,  and  the  western  part  is  subJi- 
vided  into  two,  by  the  mountains;  the  east  being  named  Cabes  Terre,  and  tiio  west  Bas- 
seterre. The  capital  of  this  island  is  St.  Louis,  or  Point  a  Petre,  on  the  western  part  of 
Grand  Terre,  at  the  south  entrance  of  the  Riviere  Salde,  or  channel,  which  iseparntes  it 
from  Cnbes  Terre.  The  anchorage  of  Point  Petre  is  sheltered,  and  vessels  wiiich  hnvn 
to  remain  at  Guadaloupe  winter  in  it.  In  the  hurricane  season  it  is  necessary  to  iiiive;i 
*  pilot  to  take  this  anchorage.     If  bound  to  it,  you  proceed  towards  the  town  of  St.  Louis, 

taking  care  not  to  get  to  the  west  of  it,  but  keeping  to  the  southward  and  eustward,  tlmt 
is,  you  must  make  it  to  the  N.  W.  of  you. 

On  the  S.  W.  point  of  IJassetorre  stands  the  town  of  the  same  name,  which  is  the  most 
considerable  in  the  island,  and  the  centre  of  its  commerce.  Tiiis  is  the  reason  wliy  it  is 
generally  resorted  to.  The  ancliorage  here  is  a  very  incommodious  unsheltered  road- 
Btead,  where  there  is  a  constant  swell:  its  bottom,  at  the  edge,  is  so  steep,  that  at  two 
cables'  length  from  the  shore,  there  are  80  and  100  fiithoms.  The  ground  is  not  gomi, 
and  these  circumstances  make  it  necessary  to  keep  close  to  the  shore,  and  lot  !;o  one 
anchor  in  20  or  30  fiitlionis,  on  clay,  and  hnng  to  it,  without  letting  go  another,  that  you 
moy  be  ready  to  sail  the  moment  that  winds  from  the  S.  E.  quarter  come  on. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Basseterre,  you  may  approach  as  near  to  the  west  roust  ns 
you  choose,  so  far  to  the  northward  as  the  hill  named  Gros  Morne,  which  is  the  N.  W. 
extremity  of  this  part  of  the  islan  1. 

I*  very  one  bound  to  Guadaloupe  ought  to  take  the  south  part  of  it,  for  the  principal 
commercial  ports  are  on  it.  If  bound  to  Point  a  Petre,  you  ought  to  ap[)roncii  within 
two  miles  of  the  south  const,  or  (Jrand  Terre,  and  continue  at  that  distance  to  the  Point 
and  Bay  of  Fergeanf,  on  which  is  the  town  of  St.  Louis,  whence  you  ougnt  to  taije  n 
pilot  to  carry  you  into  Point  a  i'etre. 

On  this  coast  there  are  two  roadsteads,  with  towns  at  them,  the  first  called  S.  Fran- 
cois, and  the  second  St.  Anne's.  Between  the  last  and  Fort  Louis  there  is  another 
town,  a  little  inland,  named  Ije  Gosier,  which  is  nearly  north  from  an  island  of  tlu'smne 
name.  From  this  island  to  the  west,  in  about  two  miles  ot  the  coast,  are  G  or  8  fathoms 
of  water. 

If  bound  to  Fort  Royal  or  Basseterre,  direct  yourcourse  so  as  to  approach  CahesTerro 
about  Point  St.  Sauveur;  then  follow  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  or  tiierenhoiiis, 
and  pass  about  half  a  cable's  length  from  Point  du  Vieux  Fort,  or  Old  Fort  Point,  whicli 
is  the  southernmost  point  of  Petit  Terre,  and  luff  up  immediately  when  round  it,  in  order 
to  keep  at  the  same  distance,  of  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  coast,  until  you  are  oppo- 
site the  town,  where  you  must  anchor. 

It  ought  to  be  observed  that,  when  sailing  either  to  the  northward  or  southward,  to  i 
leeward  of  Guadaloupe,  you  ought  to  keep  within  two  miles  of  the  shore,  as  by  doincsc 
you  may  have  the  atlvantago  of  a  light  lant!  brce/e,  which  will  bo  almost  aUvays  suffiricnt  | 
to  pass  it  before  day  ;  but,  getting  farther  off  the  coast,  it  is  no  uncommon  tliiiii;  to  lie  four 
or  five  days  absolutely  becalmed.     Any  one  who  is  not  able  to  get  ne.ir  ilie  laiidof  (iuad- 
nloupe,  that  is,  within  the  distance  of  two  miles,  must  i)ositivcly  pass  at  7  or  8  leiis^ues  | 
from  it  to  avoid  the  calms. 
Lighlfwusi.  On  tho  10th  of  July,  1810,  a  lenticular  fixed  lisihf,  of  the  third  order,  was  liuhtcd  onllic  i 

eastern  end  of  Terre-de-bas,  ou,o  of  tho  islets  of  Petite  Terr(!,  near  Guailaioupe.    It  is 
in  lat.  N.  IC^  10'  2!)  ",  and  long.  W.  from  Greenwich  61°  0,V.  \ 

'J'ho  lantern  is  108  feet  above  the  level  of  tho  sea,  at  high  water,  spring  tides,  and  is  | 
visible  in  fine  weather,  5  marine  leagues. 

The  light  bears  S.  30"  4')'  E.  from  the  extremity  of  Point  des  Chnt(Mii;\,  llio  oiistpr' 
pointof  Guadaloupe;  from  the  western  point  of  l)esc:ida,  it  bears  S.   '>"  W'.;  and  froiir  1 
tho  eastern  point  of  the  same  island,  S.  32°  15'  W. 

The  reef,  called  Balein(!  du   Suil,  which  is  tln^  most  •oullierlv,  and  the  niosi    listaiit  j 
one  from  Petite  Terre,  bears  from  the  light  .S.      •'  \V.,  disii.ut  half  a  mile. 

The  soundings  to  the  eastward  of  the  lii;ht  nre  from   1 '!  to  '20  fathoms,  at  the  distiruei 
of  2  miles;  nearer  than  which  it  should  n't  be  approached. 
Pelile  Terre.        PETITK  TERRE  is  a  smuli  sandy  -'Uind.  (Ii»iilpil  mto  two  parts  by  a  shallow  -iian- 
nel.     It  lies  directly  in  the  fair-way.  or  m  a  line  hi>tween  the  eastern  coast  of  >li.  e-di 
lanto  and  tho  Isle  Desirade.     Captain  Bishop  hi»s  said,  "Tliero  is  pretty  iznod  iin.  iioraje  | 
by  I'etite  Terre,  to  the  westward,  at  2  mdes  fi<    i  shore,  m  7  futhoms  of  water.' 
Point  Petre.         PtMNT  PETRE. — Point  Chateaux,  the  eani   -nmftsi  land  of  (luadalouiie.  iscon.pnspd  j 
of  irregularly  shajiod  rocks,  some  of  winch  appear  reMly  to  tumble  over  into  the  wiicr 


mmm 


pwpupppwww 


mf> 


^af^mummm 


in 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


411 


:  tiilps,  and  is  I 

ilii'  oiistcrr 
.  ;  ;iuil  from  I 


i;il!o\v  •Iwn- 
,t'  .Ml.  ■t'-(ia- 
111  niiriiorage  | 

iter." 
is  (Miir.iiiispii  I 
o  the  w  Iter 


From  this  point  you  may  keep  down  the  south  side  of  the  island,  within  about  two  miles 
of  the  shore,  until  you  p.iss  an  islnnd  called  Lo  Grosier,  which  is  the  first  island  you 
come  to,  and  between  which  and  the  main  island  there  is  no  passage,  and  only  a  small 
opening.  From  this  island  to  near  the  harbor,  you  may  go  alonj;  in  the  edge  of  the  white 
\vater.  When  up  with  Isle  Le  Grosier,  you  will  discover  a  building  on  a  hdl  near 
ihe  water,  which  is  called  a  fort,  although  it  has  not  much  the  appearance  of  one.  About 
a  mile,  or  a  mile  and  .i  half  from  the  fort,  is  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  Point  Petre. 
In  soiling  along  here,  you  will,  if  not  too  far  off  shore,  observe  an  island  so  low  that  the 
mangrove  bushes  appear  to  stand  in  the  water,  from  which  a  reef  extends  off  some  dis- 
tance to  the  westward.  A  little  to  the  westward  of  the  last  is  another  island,  larger  and 
higher,  with  cocoanut  trees  and  some  houses  on  it,  where  the  pilots  stop,  from  which  a 
large  reef  extends  off  in  an  easterly  direction.  Between  these  two  reefs  is  the  entrance 
to  the  harbor.  A  little  inside  the  low  island  are  several  large  square  buoys,  near  which 
you  pass,  leaving  them  all  on  the  starboard  bund.  There  are  several  islands  to  the  wvM- 
ward  of  those  already  mentioned,  among  and  around  which  the  ground  is  foul,  so  that  ves- 
sels lying  off  and  on  should  keep  to  windward. 

While  I  was  on  shore  my  ninte  sounded  in  3  fathoms,  on  a  small  piece  of  shoa'  ground, 
nearly  S.  by  E.  from  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.  Point  Petre  is  one  of  the  best  in  the 
West  Indies,  and  pilots  are  readily  obtained.  The  Saintes, 

THB  SAINTES,  MARIE-GALANTE,  DESIRADE,  &c.— Those  islands  arc  de-  Marie-Gal- 
pendencies  of  Guadaloupe,  from  which  island  Marie-Galaute,  the  principal,  is  11  miles  ante,  Desi- 
distant.     The  channels  between  them  are  gcnernlly  clear  and  deep.  rade,  ffc. 

THE  SAINTES— The  assemblage  of  liltle  islands,  called  the  Saintes,  or  All  Snints,    Tlie  iSaintes. 
were  so  denominated  from  having  been  discovered  by  the  Spaniards  on  All  Saints'  Day. 
They  are  bold  to,  and  so  happily  arranged  as  to  form  as  fine  a  road  for  shipping  as  any  in 
tlie  neighborhood. 

The  two  largest  islands  are  called  Terra  d'en  Hnut,  or  the  Upper  Land,  and  Terre 
d'cn  Bns,  or  the  Lower  Land.  The  first  is  the  easternmost,  ar.d  contains  the  town,  oi' 
rather  village,  which  is  situated  about  halfway  down,  on  its  western  side.  He.  ween  tViis 
town  and  a  small  island  to  the  N.  \V.  is  the  anchorage,  which  is  nenrly  half  a  mile  broad, 
and  has  a  depth  of  16  to  14,  10,  and  (i  fiitlioms.  On  the  Torro  d'en  Has  is  a  neat  wooden 
cliurch,  with  two  convenient  creel's  for  anchorage  and  landing. 

The  islands  have  constantly  a  fresh  breeze,  let  the  wind  blow  from  what  quarter  it 

may. 

On  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  upper  island  in  a  mountain,  called  Mont  de  Fillos,  the  summit 
of  which  is  813  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  which  is  therei'ore  a  proper  station  foi- 
asigiinl  post.  To  the  N.  W.  of  this  mountain,  on  the  north  coast  of  this  island,  is  a  re- 
mariial)le  promontory,  called  the  Suaar  Loaf,  which  servos  as  a  gtiide  <o  ships  coming  in 
from  the  northward;  for  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.,  it  leads  between  a  rork  callccl  the  Whale, 
nndn  imiik  lying  more  to  the  north-westward,  at  the  entrance  of  the  channel,  within  which 
ships  may  haul  round  to  the  road. 

In  passiiin;  out  hence  to  the  wi-stward,  keep  over  towards  the  south  shore,  in  order  to 
avoid  a  slioal  which  lies  at  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length  from  the  south  point  of  the  isl- 
and to  the  north-westward. 

It  is  said  that  there  is  a  sunken  rock  lying  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  northward  of  these 
islands,  of  which  the  particulars  are  unknown. 

IriARIK-GALANTE. — The  limd  of  Marie-Galante  is  of  moderate  height,  an.l  it  rises   Marie-Ga- 
emdunlly  towards  tlie  north.     On  the  south  luid  eastern  sides  are  several  sunken  rocks  lante. 
and  dangerous  reefs,  some  of  which  extend  nearly  -i  league  to  sea  ;  but  the  western  side 
is  a  fair  shore,  with  good  anchorage  in  several  i)laces.     The  town,  Hasseterre,  which  is 
protected  by  a  fort,  stands  on  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  island. 

Along  the  eastern  shore  are  lofty  perpendicular  rooks,  that  shelter  vast  numbers  of 
tropical  birds.  The  western  shore  is  (bit,  and  the  ground,  in  general,  i?-  proper  for  culti- 
vation. It  has  several  large  caverns,  where  crabs  are  found,  with  many  little  streams  and 
ponds  of  fresh  wa)   '•. 

DESIKADE,  I.    wESEADA.'*— Tliis  is  a  small  rocky  island,  destitute  both  of  wood  Desirade,  ur 
;ui(l  fresh  water,  but  wlieieon  some  cottim  is  cultivated.     The  island  lies  nearly  E.  N.  E.   Desrudn 
andW.  S.  VV.,  sVwped  like  a  galley,  the  eastern  end  making  like  the  head  or  prow,  and 
tlie  western  eii  1  *\e  '.iie  tilt.      Hut  on  advancing  towards  the  north  side,  some  while 
broken  jmtch.'S  wrM  appear,  like  heaps  of  sand  with  red  streaks  in  them.      On  this  side 
there  an  soiik'  rocks  under  water. 

Tlu  r  Is  Mnehorage  off  the  S.  W.  part,  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  some  houses  standing 
near  the  ^liore.  Vou  may  anchor  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms  o*"  water,  taking  cnre  to  look 
nut  tor  n  clear  sp'  .,  us  the  giuuud  la  rocky.      When  at  anchor,  Potito  Terre  will  bear 


*Prn|uvrly  n<'siderndi  It  was  the  first  land  which  robiiiibo  made  on  1ii«  second  voyage  to 
AmfiHH,  Hiid  111-  f;;ivi'  it,  tlie  iiiiiiii'  of  tb  lU'sircd  iNbuid,  because  he  bad  for  n  long  time  before 
bii'ii  bi'utiag  about  in  this  vast  tnn  i  i.|  vvnti  r-,  witliout  seeing  any  tiling  but  sea  and  skies. 


mmmmm 


vv"  ^tmvi'm^ 


812 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Boutli,  easterly,  nnd  Point  Chntenux  W.  by  S.     The  Intter  is  the  enstornmoBt  point  of 
Gundiiloupn,  nnd  miiy  be  knuwu  by  a  hummock  on  it.     Between  it  and  Detjiinde  tliere  are 
22  nnd  23  fathoms  of  writer. 
Moal  Guada-     MOAL  (lUADALUPE. — This  port,  which  is  often  visited  by  vessels  from  tlio  United 
lupe.  States,  and  also  from  other  ports,  is  W.  N.  W.,  11  miles  from  Poinle  Clialeau,  andeig),. 

teen  miles  W.  from  the  north-east  end  of  the  Island  of  Deaoadn.  The  ontiaiico  to  it  \» 
between  two  reefs,  which  protect  it;  but  when  the  sea  is  heavy,  which  is  often  the  case 
it  breaks  entirely  across  the  channel,  which  prevents  vessels  from  passing  in  or  out,  and 
causes  such  a  sea  in  the  harbor  that  it  is  difficult  to  land  or  take  in  cargo. 

When  once  in  you  moor  head  and  stern  with  your  bower  chains  to  anchors  secured  in 
the  rockson  each  side  of  the  harbor.  With  the  wind  from  S.E.  by  E..  nnd  to  tlie  southwnrd 
of  it,  vessels  cannot  enter;  nnd  when  it  blows  from  N.  E.  by  E.,  nnd  to  the  northward  of 
it,  they  cannot  leave  this  place.  It  is  not  uncommon  for  vessels  to  wait  from  six  to  twelve 
days  for  a  chance  to  get  in,  and  I  was  nine  days  waiting  for  an  opportunity  to  get  out  after 
I  was  ready  for  sen.  Vessels  drawing  over  thirteen  feet  of  water  should  not  visit  this  place. 
The  hire  of  a  launch  is  from  twenty  to  twenty -five  francs  per  day,  and  should  you  dnninge 
one,  which  is  sometimes  the  case,  will  have  a  pretty  round  sum  to  pay  furtho  repairs  of 
it.  Sand  ballast  can  be  had  for  the  trouble  of  taking  it  from  the  beach.  Stone  ballast  costs 
$1  per  ton,  put  on  board.     Water  costs  $1  per  100  gallons. 

The  town  contains  about  4000  inhabitants,  nnd  is  18  miles  from  Pointe  a  Petre,  overa 
good  road,  and  through  a  well  cultivated  part  of  the  island. 

WM.  iMABEE,  Master  of  brig  Petrel. 
Dominica.  DOMINICA  has,  properly  speaking,  no  harbors;  but  there  are  good  and  sale  anchor- 

ages along  the  western  side,  all  of  which  is  bold.  Ships  are,  however,  exposed  to  west- 
erly winils,  as  in  the  other  islands;  but  those  winds  prevail  only  in  the  winter  months. 

The  chief  town  is  that  called  Roseau,  or  Charlotte  Town,  on  the  S.  W.  aide  of 
the  island.  In  its  road  vessels  may  anchor  in  from  15  to  25  fathoms,  good  holdio? 
gi'ound.* 

Betweon  3  and  4  miles  from  the  north  end  lies  a  noble  bay,  called  Prince  Rupert's 
Bay,  from  the  famous  Prince  Rupert's  anchoring  there,  which,  besides  its  safety,  its  iiiiig. 
nitude,  tlio  depth  of  water,  nnd  the  goodness  of  the  anchorage,  has  the  advuiiti.iu;o  of  three 
fresh  rivulets  running  into  it.  Fleets  destined  to  other  parts  of  the  West  Indies  coniinoiilv 
come  to  anchor  in  this  bay,  for  the  purpose  of  supplying  themselves  with  wood  and  water. 
for  which  lliero  are  excellent  conveniences. 

Scott's  Head,  or  Point  Cachacrou,  the  south  point  of  Dominica,  is  a  high  rock,  having 
a  flag-stalfon  it,  which,  from  a  distance,  appears  like  an  island. 

The  town  of  Roseau  is  about  C  miles  to  the  northward  of  Scott's  Head,  and  will  be 
readily  discerned  when  sailing  along  shore.  Merchant  ships  generally  anchor  in  the  bay 
olftlie  south  end  of  the  town,  but  ships  of  war  in  the  smaller  bay  to  the  northward,  calleil 
Woodbridge  Bay,  abreast  of  a  gibbet  erected  near  the  beach,  and  appearing  on  with  the 
middle  of  a  large  cane-tield.  To  come  to  an  anchor  here,  run  in  under  easy  sail,  nearly 
op|)08ite  to  the  gibbet,  and  let  go  the  moment  you  get  proper  .soundings. 

The  course  and  distance  from  Roseau  to  Prince  Rupert's  Bay,  are  nearly  N.  N.  W., 
17  miles.  The  coast  between  is  generally  bold  and  ste(^p. 
Barbadoes  to  BARI3.\DOES  TO  DO.MINICA,  &c.— If  you  are  bound  to  Dominica  from  Barba- 
Dominica.  does,  you  must  steer  N.  N.  W,  till  you  have  |)assed  Martinique,  and  a  N.  W.  course 
will  then  carry  you  to  the  northward  of  Dominica.  Leaving  Mario-(}alunte  on  tlui  star- 
board side,  haul  up  close  in  with  the  north  point  of  Dominica;  you  will  see  a  round  bluff 
making  like  an  island,  at  some  distance;  go  round  that  blutf,  and  you  open  the  buy;  turn 
into  the  north  part,  and  anchor  in  7,  8,  or  i)  fatlion:.-<.  You  will  mho  the  nioulli  ol  a  Lirge 
river,  which  anchor  to  the  noithvvardof  half  a  mile,  and  you  will  be  opposite  a  siiiall 
river,  which  you  water  at,  tlie  best  in  tins  l),iy;  tlio  great  river  is  brackish.  Tliine  ij 
another  river  to  tin*  southward,  where  you  may  anchor  in  (i  falhonid,  clear  ground;  but 
in  10  fathoms  you  will  have  coral  rocks. 

The  north  point,  above  reforrt.'d  to,  is  that  called  Cape  Melville ;  and  the  bluff  is  Prince 
Rupert's  Head,  which  forms  the  ninth  side  of  tb«>  bay. 

When  turning  into  the  bay,  its  southern  sidn  will  be  in  siaht;  which  is  a  low  point 
with  a  remarkable  high  hill  over  it,  calUnl  Rolla's  Ht-ad  and  Mill.  I'rinco  Rn perl's  Head. 
on  the  north  side,  is  distinguished  by  two  fortilied  hills,  called  the  ('abrits,  wliicli  aro con- 
nected to  the  main  by  a  low  marshy  neck.  At  the  bottom  of  the,  bay,  which  is  a  mile 
deep,  is  the  town  of  Portsmouth,  consisting  of  housi-s  irrenuliirly  placed:  westward  of 
Portsmouth,  on  a  rising  ground,  at  the  imnM'  part  of  thi'  marsh  whu-li  connectstlie  (Jabrits 
to  the  main,  there  ia  a  small  plantation,  culled  Cuttiju  Hill,  witli  a  few  small  houses.   Over 


•This  is  the  description  formerly  given,  but  Mr.  Dackhjuse  describe-  ,i»  follows:  "There  is 
no  ilanger  in  froing  in.  and  there  are  6  ami  7  fathoms  at  b;ilf  a  (lable's  Itinglh  tVorn  shore.  Ymi 
lay  one  anclior  in  7  or  8  fatboius,  the  other  in  40  fuiboins,  viiry  b  "/  ground.  The  anchoring;  mark 
in  to  briiiL'  the  fort  N.  E," 


mmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  413 

the  town  nppenrstwo  high  sugnr-lonf  hills,  to  the  southwnrd  of  which  is  n  high  mountain, 
ffhose  Bummit  is  involved  in  clouds.  To  tlio  southward  of  Portsmouth,  nt  tho  distnnee  of 
nearly  n  mile  nnd  a  hnlf.  nod  on  low  ground  nenr  the  bench,  is  n  pinntiition,  called  Picnrde 
Estnte;  nnd  nearly  midway  between  Picnrde  Estate  and  Holla's  Head  is  a  fiiio  plantation, 
called  that  of  Mount  Allen. 

Nearly  midway  between  Portsmouth  and  Picarde  Estate,  in  the  valley  on  the  southern 
side  of  the  two  sugar-loaf  hills  that  appear  over  the  town,  is  the  river  called  Indian  River, 
ffliich  falls  into  the  bay. 

V^^he'i  working  into  the  bay,  you  may  stand  boldly  over,  from  side  to  side,  which  is  a 
distnnee  of  noaily  3  miles.  The  bay  is  rather  move  than  a  mile  deep.  Prince  liuport's 
Head  and  Rolla's  Head  are  both  so  steep  that  either  may  be  approached  to  the  distance 
ofn  ship's  length.  When  o(f  Mount  Allen,  you  irniy  stand  towards  it  so  as  to  bring  n 
(\n«\e  tamarind  tree,  which  stands  to  the  northward  of  the  middle  of  I'ortsmouth,  on 
witii  the  highest  land  behind  it.  You  may  stand  towards  Picarde  Estate,  until  a  little 
hill  to  the  west  begins  to  open  with  the  cultivated  part  of  Mount  Allen  Estate,  without 
llie  western  edge  of  Rolla's  Hill.  When  standing  towards  the  marsh,  between  the 
Ciibrits  and  Cotton  Hill,  you  should  tack  in  9  or  7  fathoms,  according  to  the  fahijj's  draft. 

From  tho  inner  part  of  tiio  Cabrils.  round  the  bay  to  the  western  side  of  the  cultivated 
part  of  Mount  Allen  Estate,  n  shelf  stretches  from  the  beach,  which  is,  in  general,  ii 
cable's  length  broad;  off  Indian  River,  is  a  cable's  length  and  a  hall';  at  alxiut  that  dis- 
tance there  are  3  fathoms  of  water ;  thence  it  gradually  deepens  to  5,  7,  and  10  fathoms, 
and  then  suddenly  to  15,  20,  nnd  2b  fathoms.  The  clearest  ground  is  in  the  shoal  water; 
for  without  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  it  is  rocky.  The  best  anchorage  is  off  tho  tamarind 
tree,  as  above  mentioned,  nnd  the  coast  seen  over  the  low  land  within  the  Cabrits,  on  with 
the  western  part  of  Cotton  Hill,  or  on  with  the  drain  at  the  western  end  of  it.  Should 
you  be  to  the  southward  of  the  tamarind  tree,  you  must  run  in  until  the  highest  ground 
on  the  western  side  of  the  cultivated  part  of  Mount  Allen  Phintalion  is  open  without  the 
western  side  of  Rolla's  Hill.  With  either  of  those  marks  the  ground  is  nmddy,  and  tho 
depth  is  from  9  to  7  fathoms.  There  is  anchorage  farther  out,  in  from  12  to  '20  fathoms, 
iiue  dark  sandy  bottom,  at  from  one  to  throe  cables'  length  from  shore,  with  the  tama- 
rind tree  E.  M.  E. 

There  is  good  fishing  nnd  good  hauling  for  tho  seine  throughout  tho  bay.  Tho  water 
of  the  small  nvors  is  to  be  preferred,  that  of  the  larger  being  buickish. 

Remarks  frorn  the  Dcrrotero,  Sfc. 

The  Dorrotero  says  that  Dominica  is  the  liighest  of  all  the  Antillas  :  it  has  much  wood, 
and  is  very  fertile.     All  its  coasts  are  clean,  and  you  may  approach  within   less  than  ii  ^ 

mile  of  tliem.  On  the  west  coust  they  experience  great  calms,  which  extend  6  miles 
out  at  sea  ;  and  here  it  is  necessary  to  navigate  under  moderate  sail,  and  with  much  cau- 
tion, on  account  of  tho  heavy  gusts  that  abruptly  proceed  from  the  oiienings  and  valleys 
of  the  mounrains  ;  for,  if  caught,  you  may  sustiiin  serious  damage  from  them.  Tliis 
isliind  has  neither  harbor  nor  secure  anchorages ;  tne  best  are  those  of  Ro'.cau,  on  the 
south  part  (;f  tlu»  west  coast,  and  Rupert's  Bay,  in  the  northern  part  of  the  same  coast; 
in  both  roadsteads  they  anchor  at  less  than  2  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  and  in  front 
of  the  towns;  there  i.i  no  need  of  instruction  for  going  to  them,  for  there  is  no  hidden  v 

danger. 

After  what  has  been  said  of  the  calms  nnd  gusts  of  wind  on  the  west  side,  it  seems  that 
the  best  way  to  avoid  them  will  be,  lor  thosa  bound  to  Rupert's  Bay,  to  make  tho  north 
part  of  the  island;  and  for  those  bound  to  Roseau,  to  make  the  south.  Tho  channel 
between  Miirliniquo  and  this  island  oilers  no  danger  whatever;  and  tho  currents  set  to 
the  N.  W.,  liiit  they  are  of  little  importance. 

ST.  ESPRIT  liEEE,  in  lat.  14-^  37'  N.,  long.  58°  59'  W.,  so  named  from  having  St.  Esprit 
been  diiicovered  by  the  captain  of  the  French  ship  St.  Esprit,  in  1817,  and  afterwards  Reef. 
supposed  to  have  been  sounded  on,  as  mentioned  in  tho  r2th  edition  of  this  work,  from 
onboiud  of  11.  M.  ship  North  Star,  Lord  Wm.  Paget,  in  Februory,  1833.  It  appears, 
however,  lliat  the  reef  does  nut  exist,  as  Sir  Georgti  Cockburn  desj)alchcd  the  Arindne, 
Sapphire,  Vestal,  Forte,  nnd  Victor,  H.  M.  ships,  then  on  the  West  India  station,  in 
Jiiiniiiry,  1834,  and  after  a  close  examination,  the  captains  reported  no  such  shoal  could 
bo  found. 

MARTINIQUE  is  about  12  leagues  in  length,  nnd  lies  N.  W. '  y  N.,  and  S.  E.  by  S.  Martiniqu  e 
lia  breiiiJIli  is  (!stn'iiiely  une(|ual,  and  scarcely  any  where  more  than  4  or  5  leagues  ;  and 
if  you  include  the  iiroinonKuies,  which  project  in  nnmy  places  one  or  two  leagues  be- 
yuiiil  the  n^st  of  the  island,  its  circiimlerence  will  include  above  30  leagues.  The  land 
isvery  uneven,  and  nvei'y  where  intersected  with  large  hummocks,  in  the  form  of  sugar 
luiives.  'J'liree  mountains  rise  above  th(!se  miiumernble  hummocks,  tho  highest  of  which 
has  boon  a  volcano;  it  appears  like  tho  crown  of  u  hat,  and  may  bo  plainly  seen  from 
every  side  of  the  island. 


7ifBFF  .«<   'wwn 


I«'>'|IP 


414 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 

Th«  principnl  towns  ure  those  iinmed  St.  Pierre  (St.  Poter)  iind  Fort  Roynl,  both  on 
the  wobttMii  side  of  tlio  iHlaiid.  The  latter,  whioh  is  very  advuntagoously  Bituated  near 
nn  excolloiit  Ijarbor,  and  under  cover  of  a  peninsula  entirely  occupied  by  u  fort,  ia  the 
residence  of  the  governor.  It  stands  on  the  north  side  of  a  doop  Ijay,  called  Cul  deSac 
or  Royal  Buy,  and  is  situated  to  the  N.  W.  of  tlie  fort.  A  little  harbor  on  the  east  of  it 
is  called  the  Careenage.     Here  are  all  the  conveniences  iiir  refitting  ships  of  wur. 

On  every  side  of  the  island  are  largo  bays  containing  good  harbors  and  sandy  coves ' 
but  some  of  tluMU  do  not  allord  ])rot(;ction  during  the  hurricanes. 

The  DIllKCT  and  TllL'K  course  from  the  north  end  of  Barbadoes  to  Point  Siiljnes, 
the  south  point  of  Martinique,  is  N.  W.,  distant  31  leagues;  but  tho  course  to  bo  tiiiteii 
should  ijo  N.  \V.  by  N.,  to  allow  for  a  lee  current.  Point  .Salinas  is  low,  and  has  olF  it 
three  rocky  islets  ;  when  those  boar  west,  you  may  see  between  them  and  tho  point.  To 
the  westward  of  the  islets  there  aro  several  dangers. 

The  Diamond  Rock,  which  lies  oil'  tho  .S.  W.  point,  is,  according  to  the  description  of 
Captain  Hester,  about  twice  tho  size  of  the  cupola  of  St.  Paul's  in  London,  and  ueariy 
as  high.  To  the  N.  E.  of  it  is  Great  Diamond  Cove.  There  is  no  sailing  wuhiu  tlie 
rock,  but  on  the  south  side  it  is  bold. 


the 


Port  Salines. 


Diamond  Rock 


Martinique  :  the  Diamond  bearing  \V.  by  N.,  and  Point  Salinos  distant  2  or  3  leagues. 

Having  made  tho  Diamond,  the  course  thence  to  Fort  Roynl  Bay  is  N.  N.  W.,  ;j 
leagues.  The  track  is  free  from  danger,  and  the  shores  bold.  When  you  see  the  bav 
open,  haul  up,  and  tho  fort  will  bo  in  sight ;  turn  up  towards  it  until  it  bears  N.  by  E.,or 
N.,  when  you  may  anchor  on  a  bank  in  8  fathoms,  or  olf  the  bank  in  from  11  to  17  fath- 
oms, which  is  tho  best  ground.  The  bank  liiis  coral  on  it,  but  is  not  rocky. 
Fort  Hoyal  FORT  ROYAL  BAY.— Tho  bay  of  Fort  Royal,  by  its  position  on  the  west  side  of 

lid  J  Martinique,  alVords  a  shelter  from  the  reigning  winds,      i  during  tlio   wliole  of  the  drv 

season,  its  dilferent  anchorages  oll'or  all  the  same  degree  of  safety  during  this  piirtofthi 
year,  and  we  have  no  other  motive  in  jjrefcri'ing  one  place  to  tho  other  for  aiicliorino, 
than  the  superior  facility  of  entering  or  loaviiig  wliicli  some  places  afford  over  others. 
and  tlieir  neighborhood  to  places  with  which  we  wish  to  conununicalo.  Jt  is  dilferent 
during  tho  rainy  season,  wlnui  wo  have  to  fear  gusts  of  wind  and  sudden  changes  iu  the 
atmosi)liore.  At  this  season  we  must  ronounco  the  advantage  of  comin,'.;  to  iniciior  in 
favorable  situations  for  getting  a  ship  under  sail,  and  mufet  seek  a  refuge  in  a  situation 
sheltered  by  surrounding  land,  secure  front  the  i.c;i(lents  to  which  we  miglit  otlierwisc 
be  exposed.  We  shall  presently  point  out,  among  those  anchorages,  tho  most  secure 
ones,  and  tho  means  of  entering  tliem. 

The  Bay  of  Fort  Royal  is  nearly  oi  miles  wide  between  Point  Negro  and  Cape  So 
lomon,  which  we  shall  regard  as  its  western  limits.  It  narrows  so,  that  as  wo  reach  the 
middle  of  its  length,  it  is  reduceil  to  two  miles  in  Vvidtli,  and  preserves  ab.iut  tliis  mean 
breadth.  Its  greatest  de[)th  is  nearly  7  miles,  in  an  K.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  direction. 
This  great  bay  of  water  encloses  a  multitude  of  batd\s  of  gravel  and  coral,  which  en- 
cumber it,  anil  greatly  (limii.i-iijeH  tlie  navigable  purl.  These  baidts  produce  a  change  in 
the  color  of  the  sea,  b}'  which  they  aro  easily  known,  and  servo  as  a  guide  tln'ouRh  the 
passes,  which  they  limit.  They  are  generally  vi-ry  perijondicuhir,  and  form  irregular 
curves. 

F(M't  Royal,  tho  capital  of  the  i.-iaiid,  and  the  stmt  of  government  (d' the  coliny,  is  situ- 
ated on  the  north  side  of  the  bay.  and  1  {  mile  IC.  N.  E.  of  i'oint  Negro.  Thiscity,ol 
which  the  pu|)nlation  is  nearly  lOOit,  wifiuiit  including  tlui  garri^^on  of  Fort  Bourbon,  li 
built  on  a  low  fliit  |)iecc  uf  ground,  fin'miMl  probably  by  iIk!  alluvial  deposites  of  the  River 
Madame,  which  forms  its  western  boundary.  U  is  hounded  south  by  tho  s(!n,  oust  hv 
the  careening  place,  north  by  u  canal  which  serves  to  communicate  with  the  careeiiin!; 
l)Iace,  the  stores  of  the  port,  and  the  River  Madame.  The  streets  are  stniiglit.  and 
crossed  by  others  at  riglil  angle.-.  At  its  eastern  extremity,  near  tho  careening  place, 
there  is  a  fine  parailo  called  tho  ."-^avaniiah,  which  forms  the  glacis  of  Fort  Saint  Luni;, 
eli'vated,  like  the  rest  of  the  ground,  only  3  or  1  fei^  above  the  .surface  of  the  sea. 

Fort  .'^l.  Louis  (on  which  tliert!  is  a  li.\ed  ll'^hl)  is  built  on  a  peninsula,  tcriniiiutod  nn 
all  sides  by  steep  rucks  of  a  coiisi  IiM'able  heiglit,  especially  on  the  we.-itern  p;n't.  This 
peninsula  extends  (J'JO  yards  i-oulh  of  tlic^  I'arad'  ,  and  separates  tin;  careening  phicefroni 
the  (iernian  Ancliorage,  which  is  situated  beti  en  the  city  and  Pn',. it  N(!gio.  ll  is  iiol 
accessible  from  the  land,  except  i)y  a  tnirrow  isthmus,  which  joins  it  to  tlio  .Saviinnali 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 


416 


Oo  the  east  side  it  is  defended  by  a  bank  of  gravel  and  uiadroporic  rocks,  which  atrctchos 
S.sod  S.  W.  iibout  half  u  rriilu. 

'flie  Oerinnii  Ancliuriigo  hug  for  its  limits  to  the  nurth,  iiftor  leaving  Point  Negro,  u 
(Qiist  o(  middling  eleviitiun,  whoso  almost  perpendicular  shorea  terminate  before  reaching 
.\liiili»ine  Kiver,  by  a  little  wharf  built  for  a  londing  placo.  Karther  to  the  east,  near  the 
[leiiiDSuia  of  Fort  St.  Louis,  and  on  the  site  of  the  city  of  Fort  Royal,  we  find  the  soil 
compusud  of  grey  sand,  which  is  terminated  by  u  handsome  beach,  where  you  can  land 
with  groat  facility  ut  all  times. 

I'ho  anciiorago  extends  westwardiy  as  far  as  the  Virgin  Bank,  situated  G  cables'  length 
S.  S.  K.  from  Point  Negro.  It  is  bounded  south  by  the  .Mitau  13ank,  and  near  Fort  Si. 
Louis  by  the  l)anks  from  this  fort.  On  the  western  extremity  of  these  banks  is  a  pier, 
ancliored  in  ID  feet  Wiitor,  and  G  cables'  length  S.  35°  \V.  from  the  llag-stalf  of  the  foit. 
Fruin  Virgin's  Bank  to  the  southward  of  the  church  of  Fort  Royal,  the  soundings  de- 
crease gradually  from  134  to  41  feet,  on  a  line,  on  whicli  the  flag-statf  of  Fort  St.  Louis 
wars  N.  34°  E.  This  line  indicates  the  best  place  to  come  to  anchor.  If  you  quit  this 
liQj),  either  to  the  N.  or  S.,  you  will  find,  at  diHurent  distances,  the  madreporic  rocks, 
wbich  are  dangerous  to  come  to  anchor  on,  ou  account  of  the  asperities  of  the  bottom. 
Some  of  them  rise  suddenly  50  feet  above  the  bottom  of  mud  by  which  they  are  sur- 
rounded. 

It  is  on  tliis  line  of  bearing  relative  to  the  llag-staff  of  tho  fort,  and  nearly  S.  i  W.  of 
Madame  Rivor,  in  from  90  to  110  feot  water,  that  government  vessels  usually  anchor. 
i'be  vessels  of  commerce  usually  approach  nearer  the  fort  and  the  savannah. 
You  can,  if  necessary,  anchor  on  the  Mitau  Bank,  the  leiigtii  of  which,  in  an  E.  7nd 
\V,  direction,  is  half  a  mile,  and  the  moan  with  three  cables'  length ;  but  you  should 
anchor  about  the  centre  of  the  bank,  in  from  8  to  0  fathoms,  as  this  part  offers  few  irre- 
{ularities,  and  where  the  risk  of  damaging  your  anchor  and  cable  is  loss.  In  unciioring 
too  neur  the  edge  of  this  bank,  you  will  expose  your  cables  to  be  cut,  and  your  anchors 
to  bo  caught  in  the  crevices  of  the  rocks.  For  greater  security,  however,  we  advise  you 
not  to  anchor  on  this  bunk,  except  with  a  chain  cable. 

The  highest  part  of  this  bank  is  covered  with  24  feet  water,  and  is  situated  one  mileS. 
36»  W.  from  the  south  extremity  of  Fort  St.  Louis. 

Wo  are  not  certain  that  Virgin's  Bunk  is  composed  of  madreporic  rocks.  The  highest 
iiartof  this  bank  has  51  feet  water. 

With  tho  winds  from  E.  to  E.  N.  E.,  which  almost  alwoys  blow  hero,  you  cannot 
reach  Gorman  Anchorage  without  making  several  tacks,  but  this  offers  no  dilHculty,  for 
tbereis  only  one  dangerous  bunk  at  tho  entrance  of  Fort  Royal  Bay,  which  is  tho  Bank 
ot'Gros  Islet,  on  tho  shoalest  part  of  which  are  21  feot  water.  This  bank  is  situated 
me  mile  and  seven-tenths  north  of  Islet  Ramicrs,  and  about  tho  sume  distunce  from 
Point  Npgro. 

Tho  permanency  of  tho  winds  from  the  east,  from  Novombor  to  July,  makes  the  Ger- 
iimn  Anciiorago  perfectly  safe.  It  is  oidy  in  the  nioiillis  of  August,  September,  and  Oc- 
tober, that  it  is  necessary  to  quit  it  and  seek  refugo  in  the  careening,  at  tho  Three  Islets, 
oral  tho  Cohodu  Lamentin,  wliich  we  shall  pn-sontly  describe. 

The  port  of  the  Careenage,  by  its  situation  east  of  Fort  St.  Louis,  aftbrds  a  shelter 
ironi  all  winds  which  would  endanger  a  vessel  ut  the  Gorman  Anchorage.  It  is  a  little 
i)iiy,  four-tenths  of  a  mile  wide,  bounded  west  by  tho  peninsula  of  Fort  St.  Louis,  and 
easi&y  Point  Carriere.  A  point  of  small  height  divides  this  bay,  near  tho  marine  esta- 
iilishiaeiit,  into  two  parts,  one  of  which  communicates  with  tho  canal  which  surrounds 
ibocity,  and  the  other,  which  is  more  spacious,  is  encumbered  with  bunks  of  gravel  and 
lUiuiiepoiic  rocks.  The  port  of  the  Careenage  extends  from  tho  mouth  of  the  canal  to 
ibi!  nortli  and  south  extremity  of  Fort  St.  Louis.  Its  widtli  is  scarcely  a  cable's  length 
at  its  entrance,  and  diminishes  gradually,  so  that  vessels  stationed  there,  the  number  of 
which  is  oftentimes  very  great,  have  not  sufficient  room,  and  are  obliged  to  preserve  their 
respective  situations,  to  moor  to  anchors,  secured  to  the  foot  of  tho  walls  of  the  fort. 

There  is,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Careenage,  a  little  lo  the  north  of  a  line  from  Point 
Cariiero,  to  tho  extremity  of  Fort  St  Louis,  a  coral  bank,  which  narrows  very  much  tho 
iinchoring  placo.  This  bank  is  situated  east  of  tho  barracks  of  the  fort;  is  near  a  cable 
and  a  half's  length  from  N.  N.  E.  to  S,  S.  W.,  and  has  only  from  8  to  9  feet  water  on  it 
ut  its  shoalest  part.     Its  north  point  is  marked  by  a  pier. 

The  channel  of  the  Careenage  is  between  banks  of  gravel  and  madreporic  rocks,  which 
extend  on  one  side  four  cables'  length  south  of  Fort  St.  Louis,  and  on  the  other  side 
tbree  cables'  length  S,  S,  W.  from  Point  Carriere.  Small  vessels  find  here  space  enough 
for  beating  in,  but  others  should  not  attempt  it  except  with  a  leading  wind. 

We  advise  you  not  to  pass  the  Grand  Seche  Shoal,  It  is  probable,  however,  that  the 
shoalest  part  has  not  less  than  30  feet  water. 

South  of  the  mouth  of  Monsieur  River,  and  in  a  bend  of  tho  Grand  Seche  Shoal,  is 
an  excellent  anchorage,  where  you  can  anchor  in  70  to  80  feot  of  water,  with  a  bottom 
if  clayey  mud.     This  anchorage  is  bounded  north  by  the  banks  extending  from  Point 


wnnpp 


41G 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


twu 


Carriere,  nt  the  entrnnce  of  the  Careenage,  and  south  by  the  southern  part  of  the  Qrand 
Seche  Shoiil. 

Near  Point  Sullo  id  the  ontraneo  to  the  Cohe  du  Lntnetin,  a  buy  extending  1.',  of  a 
niilo  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.  Its  greatest  width  perpendicular  to  its  lenjjth,  itt  IJ  |„j|^ 
and  the  entrance  seven-tentlis  of  a  mile  wide.  The  River  Lainertin  winds  throusli 
drained  lands,  and  enters  the  bottom  of  this  bay. 

One-quarter  of  a  mile  S.  S.  W.  from  the  entrance  of  the  River  Lainentin,  is  PoJut 
Milli,  rtMnarkable  fur  a  handsome  building  situated  on  the  highest  point. 

M:my  banks  of  gravel  and  rucks  occupy  a  considerable  space  in  the  Cohodu  Liiinentin' 
the  largest  extends  from  Point  JMilli  W.  S.  VV.,  4  cables'  length,  dividing  the  bay  into  twi 
parts,  where  you  can  anchor  on  a  bottom  of  mud,  with  excellent  holding  ground 

The  next  anchorage,  that  of  the  Three  Islands,  is  one  of  the  most  important  in  the 
bay  of  Fort  Royal.  'I'liis  anchorage  is  easily  known  front  the  ap|)oarance  of  the  sur- 
rounding land,  and  particularly  by  a  small  island,  called  the  Great  Islet,  which  is  situated 
half  a  mile  from  the  south  side  of  the  bay,  and  south  from  Red  Hill  -^  miles  djstiint, 
Great  Islet  is  composed  of  two  distinct  parts  ;  the  first  part  has  a  round  sum niit,  imj 
descends  gradually  to  the  sea;  the  second  part,  on  the  contrary,  has  an  abrupt  rise  of 
70  yards  from  the  bed  of  the  sea ;  and  is  terminated  on  the  top  by  a  little  rocky  pbiteau 
covered  by  a  slight  vegetation,  composed  of  small  bushes  and  herbs,  dried  up  fur  tlieinost 
of  the  time  by  the  sun.  The  anchorage,  as  well  as  the  village  of  the  '1  hreo  Islimdj 
takes  its  name  from  three  small  ishinds  situated  near  the  coast,  forming  a  triiin^le.  By 
its  position,  defended  by  banks,  which  break  olf  tlie  sea  caused  by  westerly  winds,  this 
anchorage  is  a  very  safe  one  during  the  rainy  season,  but  it  contains  a  number  of  bunks 
which  diminish  the  space  of  the  anchorage.  The  place  for  anchoring  to  which  we  give 
the  preference,  is  on  the  middle  of  a  line  drawn  from  the  eastern  of  the  three  siiiiill  is|. 
ands  to  the  top  of  Great  Islet.  In  going  farther  south,  we  meet  witli  banks  reaciiiui' al- 
most to  Great  Islet. 

A  bank  of  gravel  and  madroporic  rocks,  covered  with  but  two  to  three  feet  of  water, 
surrounds  almost  entirely  the  western  part  of  Great  Islet,  and  extends  to  within  five  and 
a  half  cables'  length  of  Point  Rose.  This  bank  limits  to  the  N.  and  £.  the  anchorage  of 
the  Three  Islets. 

From  Point  du  Bout,  S.  5G°  W.,  is  the  Isle  Ramiores,  a  rock  elevated  2')  yards  above 
the  sea.  It  is  HB|)ariiti'd  fi-om  the  coast  by  a  channel  about  a  cable  and  a  hiilf  s  length 
wide,  and  in  depth  8  to  9  feet.  A  fort,  built  on  the  highest  p  u't,  defends  the  entrance  lo 
the  bay. 

Between  the  Diamond  Rock  and  Fort  Royal  Harbor  there  are  three  small  coves,  tlio 
southernmost  of  which  is  called  Little  Diamond  Cove,  and  the  others  Grand  and  Petite 
Ance  d'Arlet,  or  Ai'lot  Coves.  At  the  S.  \V.  corner  of  the  harbor  there  is  a  small  ;;reen 
islet,  strongly  forlilied.  called  Islet  Anx  Riunieros,  or  J'igoon  Island,  from  whi(;h  the  fort  | 
bears  nearly  N.  by  E.  In  working  into  the  harbor,  by  keeping  the  lead  going,  uudkv- 
ing  weathered  Pigeon  Isbind,  you  may  anchor  at  i>leasure. 

On  the  south  side  of  I'igeon  Island  there  is  a  little  roadstead  for  smidl  vessels,   In 
order  to  gain  this  place,  those  who  are  well  acquainted  go  round  tlio  N,  E.  puintof  tlio 
islet,  and  turn  in.     The  south  shore  is  steep.     Tii'i  anclhu'ago  lies  with  the  western 
of  the  isle  bearing  north,  N.  by  \V.,  or  N.  N.  W.,  in  7.  8,  and  9  fathom-t,  clBn-grou 
Be  cautious  of  approaching  too  near  the  eastern  shore,  as  a  bank  stretches  from  it,  which 
breaks  with  a  great  swell. 

Dsscription  of  tht  Buy  and  Harbor  of  Triniti/,  bij  Munsieur  Monier. 

Leaving  the  island  of  St.  Mary,  the  coast  trends  nbuui.  E.  Gl)°  S.,  to  tho  bntlomof  the 
Harbor  of  Trinity,  wliich  is  distant  from  this  islaml.li  miles,  and  is  defended  by  ii  Iwnler 
of  reefs  which  surround  it  in  almost  every  direction.  It  forms  little  bays  of  sm.ill  dufitli, 
separat(!d  from  each  other  in  many  places  by  high  steep  points,  in  other  jjIucos  of  but 
middling  elevation  ;  among  others  wo  distinguish  Fort  Point,  situated  towards  the  north  j 
part  of  tho  City  of  Trinity. 

You  will  remark,  before  arriving  at  tho  bottom  of  the  harbor,  an  islet,  distant  from  the  I 
preceding  const  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  lying  near  a  mile  and  a  half  north  of  Fort 
Point,  ind  a  littlo  iwtni)  than  that  distance  from  the  islet  of  St.  Mary,  from  which  itbws 
S.  58^  E.  This  islet,  known  by  tli(!  name  of  St.  Aubiii,  intlicates  the  entrance  of  the  har- 
bor of  Trinity,  to  ves**els  coming  by  the  Dominica  Channel.  Its  a])pearanco  and  pojition 
make  it  easily  distinguished.  It  appears  high  and  steep  in  all  parts,  and  its  highest  part 
is  coveriMl  with  bushes,  ini\ed  with  :i  few  trees.  You  can  go  on  the  north  side  as  neiu  m 
you  please,  for  i*  is  perfectly  safe  on  this  si.le ;  but,  on  the  south  side,  it  presents  ii  sreat 
shoal  of  mii(lre|ioric  I'ocks,  scattered  towards  the  edyes,  with  projectnig  irregular  rocks, 
miiny  of  which  are  ut  tlii!  level  of  the  sea.  At  the  south  |)nrt  of  this  shual,  which  I 
stretches  near  half  a  mile  S.  of  the  islet,  is  a  bank  of  white  sand,  formed,  probably,  by  the  ] 
attrition  of  tlte  blocks  uf  coral  detached  by  the  violence  of  the  waves. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


417 


Thelalund  of  St.  Aubin  is  also  inaccessihle  at  tliH  E.  S.  E.  Bide,  heciiuso  of  n  clinin  of 
ihaliowa,  which  extendi  nbuut  V*^  ciiblus'  length  olF,  and  on  which  the  s«a  often  breaks. 
ThiscbiiiD,  covered  with  14  to  21  feet  of  water  only,  forma  the  western  limit  of  the  chan- 
gel  which  leads  lo  the  anclioriigo. 

From  whatever  quarter  you  may  come,  you  may  l)e  directed  in  tho  proper  course  to 
tike  I'ur  tho  harbor  of  Trinity,  by  the  view  of  a  rock,  wliicli,  from  a  diHtiince,  apiiiars 
liltdB  vessel  under  sail,  and  for  this  reason  is  culled  Ciirvel  Rock.  I  his  rock,  elevated 
96  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  is  totally  devoid  of  voj^etation,  and  dialinguished  by  a 
pointed  summit,  whitened  by  the  dung  of  the  numerous  flocks  of  sea  birds.  It  is  an 
eicellent  distinguishing;  point  for  every  vessel  from  Europe  or  the  United  States,  bound 
to  Trinity,  or  to  any  of  the  anchorages  of  the  enstern  coast,  because  it  is  to  the  wind- 
ward of  all  the  anchorages  and  ports  on  this  part  of  tiie  island.  Tho  depth  of  water 
aruuml  it  being  considerable,  you  can  approach  it  iis  near  as  you  wish,  but  the  swell  of 
the  sea,  caused  by  the  direct  and  permanent  action  of  tho  trade  winds,  renders  landing 
Jni09t  iinpoasible, 

AcliiiiiiH'l  more  than  a  mile  and  a  half  wide,  exists  between  the  Carvel  Rock  and  tho 
(astpnrtof  a  peninsula  to  which  it  has  given  its  n;une.  This  j>eninsulii,  remarkable  for 
its  great  projection  from  the  east  coast,  forms  tho  harbor  of  Tiinity  by  its  junction  to 
that  part  of  the  coast  near  the  Island  of  St.  Aubin,  and  si-jiiirutos  this  andiorage  from 
timt  at  the  bottom  of  cralleon  Bay,  by  an  isthnius,  but  little  elevated,  and  only  half  a  mile 
wide,  on  which  is  tho  plantation  of  Beau  Scjouv,  and  al.Ho  a  wind-mill,  which  is  ono  of 
the  most  remarkable  objects  in  tho  neighborhood  of  Trinity.  The  Carvel  Peninsula  ex- 
I  tends  in  a  direction  E.  27°  N.,  near  six  miles  :  the  land  increases  in  height  towards  the 
E.  as  far  08  Tartan  Hill,  situated  about  tho  middle  of  its  length,  the  highest  point  of 
which  is  623  feet  above  tho  level  of  the  sea;  from  llienco  the  land  decreases  in  height, 
1  again  rises  in  a  very  sensilde  manner  towards  the  east  extremity  ;  and  throughout 
)  whole  extent  shows  in  general  a  vegetatir)n  much  less  vigorous  than  tho  other  parts 
I  of  the  Island.  To  the  nortli  of  the  peninsula  tho  reddish  steej)  shores,  of  little  elevation, 
Ibrmthe  edges  of  many  straits ;  in  other  places  are  sandy  bays,  in  wiiicli  you  cannot  pen- 
etrate by  reason  of  the  reefs  which  border  thorn,  or  the  swell  of  tho  sea,  whicli  insinu- 
ites  itself  in  the  small  intervals  where  the  reefs  are  interrupted. 

Ttirtan  Bay,  situated  near  the  islet  of  t'lis  name,  is  the  largest  and  deepest;  but  the    Tartan  Bay. 
I  coral  rocks  by  which  it  is  encumbered  almost  every  where,  leave  only  a  narrow  pass 
jiracticable  only  for  boats. 

Opposite  tho  harbor  of  Trinity,  a  chain  of  madreporic  rocks  stretclies  from  the  oxtre- 
I  mity  of  the  Carvel  Peninsula  towards  the  Sugar  Loaf  Rock,  in  a  direction  generally  W. 
N.  W.  Its  surface  is  nncqual  in  many  parts,  forming  slioni  banks  of  great  extent,  which 
cause  n  very  heavy  sea.  ''he  mofit  remnrkoble  of  all  is  tho  Loup  Ministre  :  wo  have 
sounded  there  in  10  feet,  and  profiting  by  the  circumstance  of  very  calm  weather,  we 
estimated  the  shoalest  part  at  7  feet.  Tliis  slioid  part  is  always  indicated  by  heavy 
breiiliers,  and  in  general  they  can  easily  b(^  distini;  jislied  frm  >  a  vessel's  deck  or  masts ; 
otherwise,  far  from  being  an  object  ef  apprehension,  if  contributes  the  better  to  judge  of 
the  position  of  the  dangers  relative  to  the  coast,  n<'  I  the  distance  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
Itoavoid  them,  when  bound  into  the  harbor  of  Trit, 

The  term  Loup  (Wolf)  u«<ui  at  Martinique  to  dt-,     mte  tho  pre <  eding  shoal,  is  usually 
[applied  to  nil  the  banks  cov.red  by  a  smnll  <piantit>     ('water,  and  on  which  the  sea 
breaks  at  intervals.     Wo  shiill  have  occasion  to  use  thi»  term  ficquently  in  a  further  d«- 
I  scriptii  n  of  the  coasts. 

Between  the  Loup  Ministre  and  the  north  part  of  the  Corvel  Peninsula,  the  bottom  is 
I  covered  with  banks  of  different  sizes,  on  many  of  which  wo  found  bul  3.i  liithoms  of 
water.  It  is  not  necessary  to  pass  tliem  in  enter  ng  or  leaving  the  Ijarbor  of  Trinity; 
I  for,  as  you  would  be  obliged  to  pass  the  great  chi'ti  of  niadrejjoric  rocks,  of  wi  eh  the 
I  Loup  Ministre  forms  a  part,  you  might  be  exposed,  in  passing,  to  some  dangtTOUa  rocks, 
[which  may  not  have  been  discovered  by  us  in  soundiMg,  or  receive  a  groat  sliock  from 
be  sen,  should  the  wind  freshen  ever  so  little. 

There  exists,  south  of  the  Islet  of  St.  Auben,  more  tlinn  hidf  a  mile  off,  a  bank,  ex- 
Itending  S.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E..  over  half  a  niilc!,  and  on  which  wo.  found  24  to  22  feet 
Iwater.  Here  the  chaii.'  of  shoals  which  lies  off  tho  hiiri)or  of  Trinity  ceases.  A  bottom 
lof  white  sand  is  found,  'mnicdiately  on  the  west  side,  in  I'l  to  18  fathoms  water,  and 
I  stretches  W.  N.  W.,  the  general  liircctioii  of  the  reefs,  to  the  Loup  St.  Mary,  situated 
jN.  N.  E,  of  .St.  Mary's  Islet,  a  in, It'  diiiiimt.  This  shoal  occupies  a  space  of  three  ca- 
|bles  in  length  by  one  in  width,  and  tli>?  shoalest  water  wo  found  «n  it  was  32  feet.  Tt  is 
[best,  however,  not  to  pass  over  it,  n'l.with.'tanding  tho  great  quantity  of  water  by  which 
lit  is  covered ;  for  the  sea  there  is  alw.iys  h.javy,  and  oftentimes  breaks,  particularly  when 
Ithe  winds  blow  from  tho  E.  N.  E.  to  llio  N.  E.  strongly  from  these  points  :  the  soundings 
lare  at  the  least  25  fathoms,  loss  than  a  cable's  length  from  the  Loup  St.  Mary  ;  and  in  the 
jchannel  which  separates  it  from  the  islet,  tho  depth  of  water  varies  from  18  fathoms  to  9. 
The  passage  between  tho   Loup  Ministre,  the  Loup  St.  Mary,  and  the  Islet  of  St. 

27 


I*   ^^- 


%^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


Jf:  iil  IIM 

^  1^    12.2 
i  IZ    12.0 


1.4 


6" 


1^ 

1.6 


P 


7a 


e 


7. 


4"  .^ 


/ 


%   > 


O-^ 


/A 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  Hk}U  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.V.  t4580 

(716)  872-4503 


Ii^'"^pp«pppp 


''''^lipwpfwiilpplppljp 


418  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Aubin,  are  at  least  a  mile  wide,  and  are  frequented  by  vessels  bound  to  Trinity ;  but  \t 
is  very  importiint  not  to  get  in  with  the  chiiin  of  the  Loup  Ministre,  for  you  would  ex 
pose  yourself  in  passing  over  the  shonis,  where  the  soundings  nre  scarcely  4i  fathoms  ti- 
very  greet  danger  from  the  sea.  You  will  take  the  precaution  to  l«eep  your  distance 
until  the  Islet  St.  Aubin  bears  S.  i  E.,  true,  ut  the  distance  of  nearly  2  miles,  the  direc- 
tions given  for  this  courso  being  very  noor  the  west  part  of  the  banks  of  which  we  have 
just  spoken.  You  should  not  deviate  from  this  course  to  the  eastward,  (whether  you  have 
a  fair  wimi  or  must  beat  in,)  till  you  open  the  Island  of  St.  Aubin  to  bear  S.  i  K,,  ^^^ 
or  seven  cables'  length  distance.  You  may  then  stretch  towards  the  southern  limits  of 
the  madreporic  rocks,  and  when  you  are  W.  N.  W.  o.*"  the  Loup  Ministre,  and  you  have 
got  sufficiently  to  windward  to  be  N.  E.  i  E.  of  the  small  island  of  St.  Aubin,  and  W.  of 
the  Loup  Ministre,  you  must  steer  S.  i  W.  for  this  anchorage,  guiding  yourself,  however 
through  the  passage  by  the  sight  of  the  reefs  which  line  it  east  and  west.  You  may 
come  to  anchor  east  of  Fort  Point,  between  the  two  chains  of  reefs,  and  in  the  whole  space 
comprised  between  this  position  and  the  bottom  of  the  harbor  the  anchorage  is  excellent 
It  is  sheltered  from  the  prevailing  winds,  which  generally  vary  only  from  the  N.  E.  to  the 
S.  E.,  passing  easterly.  The  winds  from  the  N.  and  N.  i  E..  are  the  only  ones  which 
cause  any  swell,  because  their  direction  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  entrance;  but  these 
winds  blow  very  rarely,  and  are  not  fo  bo  foured  except  in  the  winter  season. 

It  is  oftentimes  mure  difficult  to  get  out  of  the  harbor  of  Trinity  than  to  enter,  par. 
ticularly  when  the  winds  are  E.  N.  E. :  taking  care,  however,  to  tow  your  vessel  so  as 
to  approach  as  near  as  possible  to  the  banks  which  limit  the  anchorage  to  the  east,  which 
may  be  done  without  inconvenience,  as  these  banks  are  to  windward;  you  will  then  be 
able  to  double  a  little  rock  detached  from  the  reef  which  surrounds  Fort  Point,  and  on 
which  there  are  but  7  fathoms  of  water.  After  having  passed  to  the  north  of  this  dan- 
ger, which  is  about  two  cables'  length  E.  N.  E.  from  the  fort,  the  passage  will  present  i 
much  less  difficulty,  as  the  pass  widens  much,  and  is  marked  through  the  greatest  part 
of  its  extent  by  lines  of  breakers,  which  border  it  almost  without  interruption.  The 
Mitau  Bank,  covered  with  11  feet  of  water  only,  and  the  banks  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  the  I 
Islet  of  St.  Aubin,  are  the  only  dangers  which  the  breakers  do  not  render  alwayt  am. 
rent;  but  it  is  not  necessary  to  prolong  your  distance  as  fur  as  the  Mitau  Bank  to  piss 
clear  of  the  banks  of  the  Islet  of  St.  Aubin. 

Once  outside  of  the  Islet  of  St.  Aubin,  you  will  make  your  course  westward  of  the  I 
Loup  Ministre  ;  and  in  case  you  want  to  go  towards  the  entrance  of  the  Dominica  Chan- 
nel, you  may  pass  inside  of  Loup  St.  Mary,  or  outside,  opening  the  wind-mill  of  Beaa 
Sejour  a  little  tu  the  oast  of  the  Islet  of  St.  Aubin  to  avoid  this  bank. 

The  reef  to  the  south  of  the  Islet  of  St.  Aubin,  does  not  extend  to  the  shore.   Be- 1 
tweon  it  and  the  border  of  breakers  which  surrounds  the  coast,  there  is  a  channeloti 
about  n  cable's  length  or  more  wide,  and  in  which  the  soundings  are  from  5  to  6  fathoms, 
with  n  L)  ttomof  white  sand.     This  narrow  passage  is  frequented  by  boats;  as  for  res- 
sel<,  they  should  not  attempt  it. 

The  Corvel  Channel,  which  we  have  before  mentioned,  is  used  by  vessels  of  a  great  | 
draught  of  water,  but  as  it  does  not  shorten  the  route  to  the  Harbor  of  Trinity,  oi 
other  anchorages  on  the  east  coast,  and  as  there  are  great  inequalities  in  the 
and  the  violent  currents  oftentimes  cause  a  heuv^  seu,  it  is  but  rarely  used.    The  least  | 
soundings  we  ever  found  there  nre  40  feet. 

Trinity,  next  to  Saint  Pierres  and  Fort  Royal,  is  the  most  commercial  place  in  the  j 

colon}'.     The  city  extends  along  a  beach  of  sand,  which  terminates  to  the  north  at  Fort  I 

Point.     Its  length  is  about  3400  feet,  its  breadth  is  very  small.     Since  the  hurricanes  of  I 

1813  and  1817,  there  is  no  remarkable  edifice.     The  River  Epinette  crosses  ittowardsl 

the  southern  part,  after  having  watered  a  narrow  valley  planted  with  SLgar  canes.   Ills  I 

a  watering  place  which  may  answer  for  vessels  anchored  in  the  road  ;  but  to  have  pure  I 

and  limpid  water,  it  is  i.^cessary  to  go  to  the  interior  a  considerable  distance.    Durio;! 

our  stay  ut  Trinity,  the  crew  of  the  Eclair  preferred  procuring  their  water  ut  a  springail 

the  plantation  of  Beau  Sejour.  I 

Fort  Royal         FORT  ROYAL  to  ST.  PIKRRR.— The  N.  W.  point  of  the  Fort  Royal  Huboris 

to  iS7.  Pierre,  low,  though  bold,  and  has  .i  masked  bntteiy  on  it.     To  the  N.  W.  of  this  jwint,  aboafJ 

miles  distant,  there  is  a  rivulet  of  fresh  water,  and  a  village  called  Case  des  Navires,ofl 

which  there  is  excellent  anchorage,  from  abreast  of  its  westernmost  houses  to  abreastofl 

a  battery  east  of  it.     The  anchoring-^^round,  or  bank,  reaches  only  to  the  distance  of  a| 

cable's  length  and  a  half  from  the  shore.     Within  half  a  cable's  length  of  the  beach, 

water  is  shoal,  deepening  thence  to  3  fathoms  on  the  outer  part,  and  to  5,  7, 10, 15, 13.| 

and  25  fathoms,  at  a  cabio's  length  distance  :  off  the  battery  the  ground  is  clean,  i 

ing  to  soft  mud  abreast  of  the  westernmost  houses.     Withoui;  the  depth  of  24  fathoms.! 

the  ground  is  hard  and  gravelly.  I 

*  In  order  to  anchor  in  this  road,  you  must  turn  to  windward  before  you  stand  in,  untill 

the  easternmost  cluster  of  houses  in  the  village  appears  on  with  the  middle  of  tlie  vallejl 

behind  them;  then  steer  in  with  this  mark.     Wiieu  the  point  between  CasedesNaviresI 


mifim 


?'-V?-9| 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


419 


and  the  next  villnge,  called  Case  Pilote,  opens  without  the  land  to  the  N.  W.,  you  will 
he  entering  on  the  bank  in  43  fathoms :  then  steer  so  as  to  have  the  westernmost  house 
of  the  cluster  above  mentioned  on  with  the  middle  of  the  valley;  and  with  Le  Grosse 
pointe,  o!i  '^he  south  side  of  Port  Royal  Harbor,  shut  in  behind  Point  Negro,  you  may 
jfliorpjnige  ship  in  18  or  20  fathoms.  Small  vessels  may  stand  farther  in,  with  the 
same  m  rk,  to  the  depth  of  9  or  7  fathoms. 

ST.  i'lERRE,  (St.  Peter,)  the  trading  town  of  Martinique,  lies  about  4  leagues  to  St.  Pierre. 
theN.  W-  "f  ^"""t  Roya'-    It  is  built  partly  upon  the  rising  grounds  at  the  foot  of  a  ridge 
of  hills-  and  partly  along  the  shore  of  a  spacious  circular  bay,  which  forms  an  open  road 
to  the  southward  and  westward. 

The  best  anchoring  place,  called  the  Frigate's  Anchorage,  lies  in  the  southernmost 
part  of  the  road,  (when  you  see  some  steep  cliffa  and  rocks.",  in  7  fathoms,  gravelly 
Lund.  If  you  bring  the  highest  steeple  of  the  town  N.  |  E.,  and  Point  Carbet  (on  the 
Lnth  side  of  the  road)  south,  you  will  have  7  fathoms,  oozy  ground. 

The  French  frigate  La  Flore,  be-pg  moored  in  this  road,  in  1772,  with  one  anchor  in 
i5fatlioms,  fine  sand,  and  the  other  in  4i  fathoms,  same  ground,  had  the  following  bear- 
".j5  by  compass,  the  variation  at  the  same  time,  was  3°  52'  E. 

piint  Precheur  N.  W.  by  N.  3="  N.,  the  Giilley's  End  N.  9»  W.,  the  Black  Friar's 
Tower  N.  .3°  W.,  the  Negroes'  Chapel  E.  2'  N  ,  Point  Carbet  S.  4"^  W. 

If  you  intend  to  stay  some  time  in  this  road,  it',  proper  you  should  lie  with  one  anchor 
1  close  to  the  shore,  to  the  S.  E.  or  E.  N.  E.,  (or  even  on  shore,)  and  the  other  to  the 

N.  W. 

in  the  hurricane  months,  that  is,  from  the  15th  of  July  to  the  15th  of  October,  ships 
I  cannot  lie  with  safety  in  this  road,  and  the  French  ships  are  generally  obliged  to  leave 

it  on  the  15th  of  July  at  farthest.    If  they  are  to  remain  for  a  longer  time  at  Mar- 
i  tinlque  they  retire  into  Fort  Royal  Bay,  where  they  lie  secure  against  the  hurricanes ; 

they  mny  also  find  shelter  in  Trinity  Bay  to  the  windward,  and  on  the  north  side  of  the 

Mr.  Backhouse,  in  his  description  of  the  Road  of  St.  Pierre,  has  observed  that  "  there 

I  are  30  and  40  fathoms  at  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore ;  but  farther  off  than  that  you 

will  be  off  the  bank.     They  generally  lay  one  anchor  in  25  or  30  fathoms,  and  the  other 

ill  12.    The  marks  with  which  we  anchored  were  the  fort  S.  by  E. ;  the  great  church 

I  N.,  offshore  one  cable's  length,  in  24  fathoms. 

In  sailing  from  Case  Navires  to  St.  Pierre,  you  will  pass  the  village  and  battery  of  Case 
I  Pilote,  and  those  of  Fort  Capet  and  Carbet.     Between  the  latter  is  the  promontory  called 
I  Morne  aux  Boeufs,  which  bears  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  distant  54  leagues,  nearly,  from  the 
Diamond  Rock. 

The  anchorage  in  this  bay  is  far  from  offering  adequate  security  to  the  many  vessels  that 
I  frequent  it  from  Europe,  West  Indies,  the  United  States  and  Gulf  of  Mexico.  Its  being 
esposed  to  nil  winds  from  S.  S.  W.  to  N.  W.  by  W.,  renders  it  particularly  dangerous 
(luring  the  winter  months,  as  well  as  towards  the  commencement  and  at  the  end  of  that 
season,  by  reason  of  the  sudden  squalls  of  wind  then  frequent.  The  ground  swell  is  then  often 
experienced  with  a  violence  that  afterwards  causes  great  damage.  In  the  other  parts  of 
the  year,  the  road  of  St.  Peter's  is  almost  entirely  exempt  from  these  dangers,  and 
I  it  is  a  shelter  from  the  reigning  winds,  which  blow  from  the  E.  to  the  E.  N.  E.,  and  the 

enometion  of  the  grand  swell  is  much  nearer  and  less  dangerous  ;  the  only  inconve- 
I  nience  it  occasions  is  to  impede  considerably  the  communications  with  the  city,  and  some- 
I  times  to  render  them  impracticable. 

Vessels  surprised  at  the  anchorage  by  strong  winds  from  the  open  sea,  or  from  a 
Ibeavy  ground  swell,  find  themselves  in  a  critical  situation.  If  they  cannot  tow  out,  or 
I  brat  out,  they  are  oftentimes  thrown  ashore  by  the  enormous  surges  ;  if  instead  attempt- 
I  ins;  to  go  to  soa  they  remain  at  anchor,  their  loss  is  almost  certain,  particularly  if  they 
Ihave  not  chain  cables  :  for  the  continual  shocks  of  the  sea  cause  them  to  drng  their  an- 
chors, or  if  they  hold,  the  agitation  of  the  sea  causes  the  cables  to  part,  and  in  eitlier 
Icasetiiey  drive  on  shore  and  soon  go  to  pieces.  With  the  intention  of  preventing  such 
Ishipwrecks,  the  colonial  government  orders  nil  French  vessels  to  quit  the  road  of  St. 
J  Peter  at  the  commencement  of  the  winter,  and  obliges  them  to  depart  for  Europe,  or 
IpHss  this  seiison  in  the  bay  of  Fort  Royal,  either  at  the  Careenage  or  at  the  port  of  the 
1  Three  Islets. 

Tiie  best  anchorage  in  St.  Peter's  Road  extends  from  Point  St.  Martha  to  the  south  n, 

lextremity  of  Thurin's  Bay.  The  soundings  in  this  i)art  have  less  declivity  than  in  the 
lother  part  of  the  road.  They  foriri  relative  to  the  depth  which  exists  before  the  city  a 
lllat space  of  less  depth,  called  the  Plateau  of  Carbet.  You  may  anchor  on  this  plateau 
lin  21  fathoms,  two  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  but  you  must  not  anchor  farther  off, 
Iparticulariy  if  you  are  west  of  a  little  ravine  where  the  steepness  in  the  rocks  round  the 
IBayof  Thurin  is  interrupted,  as  atthis  place  wo  found  160  to  160  feetwater,  and  a  bot- 
|ti)m  of  irregular  rocks,  on  which  many  anchors  have  been  lost. 


pw^ 


ry^ 


I'  "wj^jllFW"! .    IIHJVII^VJI 


WWI-T"*^ 


420 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Island  to  St 
Pierre. 


The  anchornge  for  merchantmen  extends  from  Point  St.  Martha  to  the  river  des  Per 
which  bounds  the  city  to  the  north.     French  veBsels  occupy  the  space  south  of  the  pj'' 
Bertin,  and  foreign  vessels  north  of  this  place.     In  these  two  parts  of  the  road  the  sonnH^ 
ings  having  a  very  rapid  increase  towards  the  sea,  you  are  obliged  to  come  to  anchor  at 
cable  and  a  halfs  length  froiii  the  shore,  and  to  moor  by  the  head  to  an  anchor carr'  S 
on  shore.     It  is  important  to  bury  your  anchors  very  deep  in  the  sand,  thnt  thev  m 
resist  the  violent  shocli  to  which  vessels  are  exposed  from  the  ground  swell.    It  is  ni'^ 
necessary  to  take  the  precaution  to  have  your  cables  tight,  to  prevent  your  vessel  chun" 
ing  her  position,  and  avoid  falling  on  board  other  vessels.  ^' 

A  littli)  distant  from  the  Place  Bertin,  W.  N.  W.  from  the  marine  hospital,  and  at 
cable's  length  distance  from  the  shore,  is  a  bottom  of  rock  called  Hospital  Key,  and  " 
which  foreign  vessels  are  obliged  to  anchor.  Its  breadth  gradually  diminishes  in  approach" 
ing  the  shore,  but  on  the  western  side  it  terminates  abruptly  by  an  almost  perpendicuia 
wall,  so  t.iat  from  50  to  96  feet,  the  soundings  found  off  the  key,  you  suddenly  have  from 
166  feet  to  213  feet,  which  are  imraedintely  outside  its  western  limits.  It  is  necessary  i 
sound  before  anchoring  on  this  key,  ond  let  go  your  anchor  in  60  feet  water,  ns  in  soin! 
farther  off,  at  a  cable  and  a  half's  length  for  example,  you  expose  your  cables  to  be  cut 
by  the  rocks  which  form  the  limits  of  this  key. 

North  of  this  key,  and  in  approaching  it  from  the  river  Des  Feres,  the  anchorage  be- 
comes more  and  more  difficult,  by  reason  of  the  declivity  of  the  soundings.  At  lees  thao 
2i  cables'  length  from  the  mouth  of  this  river,  the  depth  is  550  feet,  and  farther  off  von 
will  find  no  bottom  with  600  feet.  '' 

Voriotion  at  Fort  Royal  Buy,  1824,  2°  47'  N.  E. 
North-east-  NORTH-EASTERN  SIDE  OF  THE  ISLAND  TO  ST.  PIERRE.-Ships  ad- 

ern  side  of  the  vancing  from  the  eastward,  off  the  north  side  of  Martinique,  generally  take  their  depar- 
ture from  La  Carvaelle,  or  the  Carvel,  a  remarkable  rocky  islet,  lying  about  Ij  mjie  off 
the  N.  E.  point.  In  running  thence  along  the  coast,  you  must  cautiously  avoid  the  effect 
of  flurries,  or  sudden  and  partial  gusts  of  wind,  which  frequently  proceed  from  the  nar- 
row openings  of  the  mountains;  and  if  the  top-gallants  are  up  you  must  keep  a  good 
lookout  after  the  halliards.  For  it  is  to  be  observed,  generally,  that  the  mountains  inter- 
cept the  course  of  the  trade  wind,  and  consequently  occasion  calms  and  variable  ^Tiods 
to  leeward. 

This  side  of  the  island  is  well  cultivated.  You  will  distinguish  the  plantations  to  tie 
very  summit  of  the  hills,  which  are  themselves  covered  with  trees  and  grass,  exceptioj 
only  the  Mount  Felee,  or  Bald  Mountain,  the  highest  of  those  hills,  and  the  only  oueth^ 
is  barren. 

Point  Macouba,  the  northernmost  point  of  the  island,  is  disting[uished  by  n  waterfall 
or  kind  of  torrent,  falling  into  the  sea  from  the  top  of  a  high  rocky  coast.  About  five 
miles  to  the  W.  S.  W.  from  Point  Mocouba  lies  a  round  rock  detached  from  tlieland, 
called  the  Pearl,  to  the  southward  of  which  ore  the  little  islets,  called  those  of  Preclieur, 
or  Preacher.  Next  follows  the  point  of  the  same  name.  Soon  after  Point  Precheur 
presents  itself,  which  ends  in  a  flat  hummock,  with  a  plantation  on  it,  then  the  town  of 
Le  Precheur.  Beyond  Precheur  Point,  you  will  discern  two  others,  in  a  line,  namelv, 
the  Morne  aux  Boeufs,  before  mentioned,  to  the  southward  of  the  road  of  St.  Pierre,  aid 
tlie  Diamond  Rock  to  the  southward  of  Fort  Royal. 

Between  the  north  end  of  the  island  and  St.  Pierre,  there  are  several  villages,  protected 
by  batteries.     The  coast  is  very  steep  and  clear  of  danger. 

Havinj;  doubled  Point  Precheur,  you  will  descry  the  ships  which  lie  at  anchor  in  ' 
road  of  St.  Pierre,  as  they  all  have  awnings  to  protect  them  from  the  intense  heat  of 
sun.     You  would  take  (hem  nt  first  sight  for  so  many  white  houses,  whose  rtiufs  are  t 
like  a  terrace :  you  cannot  come  to  anciior  close  hauled :  for  the  winds,  which 
prevail  from  the  E.  and  E.  N.  E.,  will  compel  you  to  traverse  up  to  the  road. 

Remarks  on  the  Navigation  about  Martinique,  from  the  Derrotero  de  las  Aniillai,M 

The  land  of  this  island  is  high  and  rocky,  and  may  be  discerned  at  about  15  1 
off.  Its  eastern  part  is  full  of  bays,  but  they  afford  little  shelter,  and  are  frequented bjl 
coasters  only.  From  the  South  Point,  or  Point  Salines,  along  the  western  const,  tothel 
North  Point,  Point  Macouba,  you  may  approach  within  a  mile  of  the  coast  without  aDjI 
danger.  I 

The  principal  anchorages  of  Martinique  are  those  of  Port  Royal  and  St.  Pierre.  Thit| 
of  St.  Pierre  is  an  open  roadstead,  which  affords  shelter  from  the  general  breezes  onlj: 
and  vessels  tliat  are  obliged  to  remain  in  Martinique  during  the  hurricane  seiison,  g 
Fort  Royal  to  pass  it  over.  The  fortress,  called  Fort  Royal,  is  on  a  tongue  of  I 
which  runs  nearly  half  a  mile  to  the  south  into  the  sea;  from  the  S.  W.  pnrtofthitl 
tongue,  a  shoal  of  sand  and  rock  stretches  out,  but  it  may  easily  be  discovered  by  thel 
color  of  the  water.  By  the  eastern  side  of  this  point  is  the  harbor  and  arsenal,  wherel 
vessels  anchor  in  the  greatest  safety  ;  but  they  enter  into  it  only  in  the  eaasou  of  faurti-f 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

^ei. «"  fo'  I***®  purpose  of  careening ;  its  bottom  is  excellent,  with  a  depth  of  from  6 
(,10  fathoms.  The  city  is  about  one  fourth  of  a  mile  to  the  north  of  this  point,  and  at 
^e  sea  side  on  the  west  part,  in  Flamingo  Bay,  which  is,  therefore,  the  anchorage  for 
jwrchant  vessels;  and,  indeed,  generally,  for  uU  vessels  which  are  not  to  remain  long  at 
Jlirtinique. 

'  If  you  appro.ich  Martinique  on  the  north  side,  and  mean  to  anchor  in  the  road  of  St. 
lurre,  you  mny  haul  in  as  close  as  you  choose  for  Macouba  Point,  and  should  run  along 
lliecoast  afterwards  so  as  to  pass  the  outside  of  the  Islets  du  Seron,  which  lie  on  the  N.  W. 
point  of  the  island;  and  from  these  you  may  shave  the  Point  du  Precheur  (Preacher'a 
point)  within  half  a  cable's  length,  in  order  to  run  and  anchor  in  front  of  the  town  of  St. 
Pierre,  or  B  litilo  to  the  south  of  it;  keeping  in  mind  that  the  coast  is  so  steep,  that  half 
a'cabie'B  lengtli  from  it  you  will  have  4  or  5  fathoms  water,  and  33  or  40  fathoms  at  3  ca- 
bles' length.  Vessels  moor  with  two  anchors,  one  to  the  west  in  35  or  40  fathoms,  and 
one  to  the  east  in  4  or  5  fathoms  ;  it  is,  however,  better  to  have  a  cabl^  on  shore  in  jilace 

j  of  the  anchor  to  the  east,  that  you  may  not  drag  with  the  strong  gusts  of  wind  which 
come  over  the  land. 

if  you  are  bound  to  Fort  Royal,  you  will  steer  from  Pointe  Precheur  to  Morne  aux 
JcEufs,  which  is  the  south  point  of  the  Bay  of  St.  Pierre  :  and  from  it  you  will  sweep 

I  ilongthe  coast  to  shave  Point  des  Negres,  (Negro  Point,)  from  which  you  must  haul  to 
(rind  all  you  can,  in  the  understanding  that,  from  the  said  point  to  Flamingo  Bay,  you  may 
sJiaTe  the  coast  without  any  risk. 

jVs  it  is  necessary  to  beat  up  from  Negres  Point  to  the  anchorage,  keep  in  mind  that 
Jie shoal  which  runs  out  from  Fort  Royal  Point,  extends  to  the  west  as  far  as  the  meri- 

I  dian  of  a  brook  which  runs  into  the  sea,  to  the  westward  of  the  city :  and  thus,  when 
you  mark  the  said  brook  at  north,  you  must  not  prolong  the  south  tuck  farther  than  to 
bring  ^ort  Royal  Point  a  little  to  the  northward  of  east,  but  ought  rather  to  go  about  be- 
fore you  bring  it  to  bear  east,  and  anchor  on  the  other  tack,  opposite  the  city.     If  you 

I  have  to  enter  the  hat-bor,  it  is  advisable  to  take  a  pilot. 

Those  approaching  Martinique  from  the  southward,  must  steer  so  as  to  pass  close  to 
Jie  Diamond  Rock  and  Point,  and  shave  Cape  Solomon,  where  the  course  is  nearly  north, 

I  but  nothing  to  the  east  of  it,  until  Point  Noire  bears  east;  from  this  situation  you  will 

liiiui  by  the  wind  to  take  Flamingo  Bay,  or  enter  into  the  harbor,  as  may  be  requisite,  it 

Ibeiag  well  understood  that  you  can  anchor  in  any  part  of  the  Great  Bay. 

I  If  coming  from  the  south,  and  bound  to  St.  Pierre,  you  must  steer  from  Solomon's 
Cipe  to  Morne  aux  Boeufs,  hauling  in  to  anchor  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  town,  as  already 

[directed. 

J   It  is  almost  a  matter  of  indifference  what  part  of  Martinique  you  make:  only  in  case 

I  of  the  wind's  being  free  from  the  N.  iC,  you  may  consider  it  preferable  to  make  the 

1  Dorth  side. 
The  strait  between  St.  Lucia  and  M  rtinique  is  clear  of  all  danger ;  the  breeze  is  al- 

Uays  steady  in  it,  and  its  current  is  scai    ely  perceptible. 

The  hi  nd  of  St.  Lutia. 


491 


St.  Lucia  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.,  3  or  4  leagues. 

About  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  west  of  the  Sulphur  Hill,  on  the  sea  shore,  stand  two 
ligh  peaks,  called  by  the  French  Les  Pitons,  and  by  the  English  the  Sugar-loaves  :  they 
Ilie  very  near  each  other,  but  between  theni  there  is  opening  enough  to  distinguish  both 
|oD  coming  from  the  southward. 

On  the  western  side  of  the  island,  at  the  distance  of  about  three  leagues  from  its 
Inorthern  cape,  is  Port  Castries,  or  the  Careenage,  one  of  the  harbors  in  the  Windward 
jlslands,  having  deep  water  and  good  ground  all  over  it.  These  careening  places  have 
|l)een  formed  by  nature,  which  require  no  whorfs,  and  only  a  capstan  to  turn  the  keel 

ove  giound.     Thirty  line-of-battle  ships  might  lie  securely  here  unmoored,  during 

e  hurricanes.  No  ships  can  enter  without  warping  in ;  but  there  is  always  a  breeze 
Itocarry  them  out:  and  in  less  than  an  hour  the  largest  squadron  may  be  in  the  offing. 
iThe  shores  are  so  bold,  that  a  first  rate  man-of-wiu*  may  approach  within  six  yards  of 
Itiieiii. 

Nearly  a  league  to  the  southward  of  the  Careenage  lies  the  Grand  Cul  de  Sac,  or 
|Grand  Bay  :  and  nearly  two  leagues  to  the  northward  of  the  same,  is  the  Bay  of  Gros 
;:  these  places  form  excellent  roads  for  ships  of  war. 


■i',wB.i»vmp^|w 


-MH'i^w^fJUPi .  '.itPHpi 


422  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

When  bound  from  the  northward  to  the  Careenoge,  you  will  see  a  bluff  two  Jeaeu 
to  the  leeward,  which  may  be  approached  boldly ;  you  must  haul  close  in  to  see  the  hw 
bor,  then  run  into  it  as  for  as  you  can  fetch,  and  warp  in.     When  the  sun  shines  nil  th 
dangers  may  be  seen.  ' 

Should  you  have  occasion  t»  anchor  off  the  south  coast,  you  may  do  so  in  Old  Fort  Bav 
(Anse  de  Vieux  Fort,)  under  the  S.  E.  bluff,  unto  which  you  may  turn  till  you  brin 
Point  Moulacique,  the  southern  point,  to  beor  S.  S.  W.,  and  then  anchor  in  7,  8,  or  10  fa 
thoms,  good  ground.  At  the  north  pari  of  this  bay  there  is  a  nver,  which  runs  into  the 
sea.  If  you  water  here,  it  must  be  by  proceeding  half  a  mile  up  with  the  boat;  unless 
after  great  rains,  when  you  may  fill  at  the  entrance. 

Remarks  on  St.  Lucia.  > 

,»■■ 

[From  the  Derrotero,  &c.] 

The  Island  of  Santa  Lucia  shows  high,  and  in  detached  hills,  with  various  peaks  suf. 
ficiently  visible  :  in  particular,  two,  at  its  extreme  S.  W.  part,  called  the  Pitons,  which 
maybe  seen  at  the  distance  of  IG  leagues;  they  are  black,  and  covered  with  wood. 

At  the  N.  W.  part  of  this  island  there  is  an  islet,  named  the  Gros  Islet,  whicli  is 
rather  more  than  a  mile  distant  from  Point  Salines,  to  the  S.  W.  Between  Snjines 
Point  and  the  Gros  Islet,  there  is  a  rock  named  Burgaux.  To  the  soiih  of  the  islet  is 
the  Baj'  of  Gros  Islet,  or  Roadstead  of  St.  Croix,  with  excellent  anchorage  for  everv 
class  of  vessels,  having  a  depth  of  from  17  fathoms  down  to  5  fathoms,  which  lue  found 
at  half  a  mile  from  the  coast ;  between  the  coast  and  the  Gros  Islet  there  is  a  passage 
for  small  vessels  only,  it  being  impeded  by  a  shoal,  on  which  there  are  only  two  fHthnmsot 
water.  The  Gros  Islet  is  foul,  and  you  ought  not  to  approach  nearer  to  it  than  two  ca- 
bles' length. 

Near  Brolotte  Point,  to  the  south  of  Gros  Islet  Bay,  there  is  an  islet  which  forms  a 
strait,  practicable  for  any  vessel,  it  having  7  fathoms  of  water  in  it.  This  islet  is,  lilie  the 
Gros  Islet,  foul,  and  you  must  not  oppronch  nearer  to  it  than  two  cables'  length ;  the  coast, 
on  the  contrary,  is  clean,  and  a  rock,  which  is  also  clean,  lies  about  a  cable's  leng'h  out 
from  it.  On  nil  this  const  there  are  from  8  to  10  fathoms,  ot  half  a  mile  from  it.  and  you 
may  anchor  in  any  part,  though  the  safest  anchoroge  is  in  the  road  of  St.  Croix,  where 
there  is  good  shelter  from  the  sea. 

About  a  mile  and  a  half  to  the  S.  by  E.  of  Brelotte   Point,  there  is  a  rocky  shoniex. 
tending  nearly  in  thnt  direction,  which  is  n  mile  in  length,  and  about  two  cabins  in  breadth;  I 
its  distance  from  the  coast  is  more  than  half  a  mile.  This  is  the  only  danger  on  nil  the  west- 
ern side  of  St.  Lucia,  on  which  there  are  excellent  anchorages,  but  principnlly  in  the  I 
Careenage,  which  is  two  leagues  to  the  S.  by  W.  of  the  great  islet,  and  the  best  harbor 
in  the  Lesser  Antillas,  with  excellent  anchorage,  very-clean,  and  three  natural  coves  in 
the  interior,  and  such  steep  shores  that  they  might  serve  as  wharves,  or  moles,  at  which  | 
the  largest  men-of-war  may  be  hove  down.     This  harbor  has,  however,  the  disadvantage 
that  you  cannot  enter  it  except  by  towing  or  warping,  it  being  impossible  to  bent  in,  on 
account  of  its  narrowness;  but,  in  oxchnngo,  it  is  easy  to  get  out  of  it,  even  witiialaree 
squadron:  as  you  must  enter  either  towing  or  warping,  it  is  sufficient  to  say  tiiat the  j 
south  point  sends  out  a  very  shallow  tongue  of  sand  to  the  N.  W.,  and  that  the  north 
point  is  deep  anl  clean,  and  you  may  approach  within  a  quarter  of  a  cable's  length  of  it, 
without  giving  n  berth  to  more  than  the  rocks  which  are  seen. 

The  strait  between  this  island  and  St.  Vincent's  is  subject  to  tornadoes,  nnd  stronj cur- 
rents to  the  W.  N.  W. ;  and  as  Port  Castries  and  the  Bay  of  St.  Croix  nro  towards  the 
northern  exti  emity  of  the  island,  it  is  advisable  to  make  the  land,  when  bound  to  them,  | 
from  the  northward. 


"he  Island  of  St.  Vincent's. 


St.  Vincent  bearing;  S.  by  W.,  about  4  miles. 

From  Bequia  to  St.  Vincent's  the  course  is  north  about  two  leagues.    The  channel 
between  those  two  islands  is  very  good  to  come  through,  if  hound  from  Barbadoestol 
the  Salt  'i'ortuga,  or  the  Spanish  Main;  and  there  are  smuU  trading  vessels  which  work 
up  through  it.     St.  Vincent's  is  about  5  leagues  long,  nnd  lies  nearly  N.  and  S.  mi\ 
v..  and  W.     The  north  end,  which  is  much  higher  than  the  south  part,  is  inhabited  by 


^""WPPP 


P^i!lW 


"mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


423 


ibout  2000  natives,  or  Caribs.  On  the  north  end  there  ia  a  volcano,  called  La  Souf- 
friere,  or  Sulphur  Hill,  near  Spanish  Point.  On  the  west  side  of  the  island,  which  is 
bold,  are  several  bays,  having  all  of  them  fresh  water  rivers;  and  on  the  S.  W.  side  you 
make  good  anchorage,  as  near  or  as  far  off  as  you  please,  especially  in  Kingston  Bay, 
where  the  chief  town  is  situated.  But  the  best  bay  of  the  island  is  Balair  Bay.  When 
you  turn  up  between  St.  Vincent's  and  i  aquia,  you  will  see  a  large  bluff  of  land,  and 
jU9t  to  the  windward  of  that  is  Balair  Bay,  or  Callinqua.  The  shore  is  bold  on  each 
jide.  Run  in  to  19,  20,  or  15  fathoms,  and  anchor.  There  are  two  rivers  which  run 
iDfo  the  sea. 

The  course  from  Carlisle  Bay  to  the  south  end  of  St.  Vincent's  is  W.,  northerly,  33 
leagues.  If  you  intend  to  anchor  in  Kingston  Bay,  you  will  see  a  small  high-peaked  isl- 
and, called  Young's  Island  ;  pass  the  bay  to  leeward  of  this  island,  and  go  round  a  long 
sloping  point :  you  may  borrow  within  a  piijtol  shot :  but  if  the  wind  takes  you  short,  you 
niay  anchor  in  35  fathoms,  and  warp  in.  There  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks  close  on  the 
weather  shore,  within  6  fathoms. 

On  the  west  side  of  the  island,  which  is  bold,  there  are  several  bays,  all  of  them  having 
fresh  water  rivers ;  and  on  the  S.  W.  side  ships  may  anchor  at  pleasure,  especially  in 
Kingston  Bay,  on  which  the  chief  town  of  the  island  is  situated. 

The  best  bay,  howe  er,  for  shipping,  is  that  culled  Calliaqua,  or  Tyrrell's  Bay,  at  the 
south  end  of  the  island.  This  may, be  known  by  a  high  blulf  which  will  be  seen  when 
turning  up  between  St.  Vincent's  and  Bequia,  which  lies  on  the  leeward  side  of  the  bay. 
The  shore  is  here  bold  on  each  side.  Run  into  19,  20,  or  15  fathoms,  and  anchor. 
There  are  two  rivers,  which  run  into  the  sea. 

Kingston  Bay  is  completely  open  to  the  S.  W  ,  and  is  more  than  a  mile  in  breadth. 
The  town  is  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  close  to  the  water  side ;  the  anchorage  good,  the 
soundings  regular,  with  a  bottom  of  dark  sand,  apparently  clear,  and  forming  a  good  hold- 
ing ground.  The  wafer  is  deep  on  each  side  of  the  bay,  and  you  may  round  the  eastern 
head,  called  the  Old  Woman's  Point,  as  closo  as  you  please,  there  being  20  fathoms  at 
not  more  than  200  feet  from  the  shoi-e.  The  best  anchorage  for  a  frigate  is  with  the 
court-house  bearing  north,  in  19  or  20  fathoms,  not  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
the  be  ich.  There  is  n  light  current  setting  along  the  bay,  but  it  is  not  regular.  The  tide 
rises  nbout  4  feet.     Fresh  water  is  good,  and  easily  obtained. 

PRINCESS,  or  BARAWALLY  BAY.— This  litlle  bay  lies  five  and  a  half  miles  to   Princess,  or 
the  north-westward  of  Kingston,  and  its  north  side  is  formed  by  rocks,  called  the  Bottle   Barawally 
and  Glass,  between  which  and  the  main  there  is  a  passage  for  boats.     There  is  no  danger   Bay. 
in  going  in ;  and,  in  coming  from  the  northward,  you  may  haul  close  round  the  Bottle  and 
Glass.    When  round  this  point,  luff  up  as  much  as  possible,  and  you  will  open  the  town  ,  ; 

barmcks,  bearing  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  which  may  be  kept  thus  until  the  Bottle  and  Glass 
Poiut  bears  N.  W.;  you  will  then  be  in  about  22  fathoms,  with  sandy  ground. 

All  along  the  Bottle  and  Glass  side  is  rocky,  but  the  bottom  of  the  bay  ail  sandy  and 
good  ground.  If  you  moor  in  and  out,  which  is  used  for  ships  of  war,  you  may  warp  in, 
and  Iny  your  inner  anchor  in  12  or  13  fathoms  of  water,  and  your  outer  anchor  will  be  in 
32  fathoms.     Moor  a  cable  each  way 

THE  GRANADINES,  or  GRANADILLOS.— The  Granndincs  form  a  chain  of  in-    The  Grana- 
numerable  rocks  and  barren  spots,  good  for  little,  which  extend  to  N.  E.  by  N..  for  about   dines,  or 
16  or  18  leagues.     Some,  however,  are  of  consideruhlo  size  and  value,  particularly  Ca-    GranadiUos. 
riuacou  and  Uequia,  both  inhabited,  and  producing  good  coffee  and  cotton.     Cariuacou  lies 
about  G  leagues  N.  by  E.  i  E.  from  the  N.  W.  of  Grenada.     It  is  of  a  circular  form,  of 
about  6  miles  in  length  and  breadth,  and  has  a  commodious  harbor. 

Bequiii,  called  also  Little  Martinique,  is  the  northernmost  of  the  Granadines,  and  lies 
about  2  leagues  south  from  St.  Vincent's.  On  the  west  side  it  has  a  very  good  sandy 
bay,  where  you  may  ride  occasionally;  and  wood  is  to  be  got  there,  with  plenty  of  fish, 
but  no  water.  The  little  islands  to  the  southward  of  Bequia  are  very  fair,  and  near  them 
you  may  stand  boldly,  havin;;  neither  rocks  nor  dangers  you  need  to  fear. 

N.  by  E.  course  from  Point  Laurent,  or  the  N.  W.  point  of  Grenada,  will  carry  you 
clear  along  the  Granadines. 

ObservK  that  towards  the  south  part  it  is  rather  dangerous  to  come  near  in  the  night. 

ISLAND  OF  GRENADA. — Thuro  is  good  unclioring  ground  along  tho  coiists,  and  Islandof 
on  the  eastern  and  western  sides  are  several  small  bays  and  creeks,  commodious  for  ves-  Grenada, 
seis,  as  well  as  for  the  landing  and  shipping  of  goods. 

Tho  principal  town  is  that  of  ST.  GEORGE,  in  the  .S.  W.  quarter  of  the  island,  which  St.  George. 
is  sltuiited  on  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  formerly  called  La  Grande  Bay.  This  bay  is 
formed  by  a  point  called  Molenior's  Point,  on  the  north,  and  Cabrit,  or  Goat  Point,  on 
the  south.  The  distance  between  these  points  is  3J  miles.  The  space  between  is  not 
entirely  clear,  as  a  coral  reef  extends  out  to  a  considerable  distance  from  Point  St.  Eloi, 
which  lies  a  mile  to  tho  south-eastward  of  Molenier's  Point;  and  there  is  a  sand-bank, 
of  only  17  or  18  feet  of  water,  on  which  coral  is  beginning  to  grow,  at  some  little  distance 
olT  the  fort  point,  ou  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 


424 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


OreenvUle. 


St.  Oeorge's 
Bay. 


The  chief  bay  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  island,  is  that  called  G  eenville  Bay,  which  ii 
open  and  protected  by  extensive  reefs. 

The  town  of  GREEN  VILLK  is  n  port  of  entry,  having  its  distinct  cuBtora-house  m. 
tablishnient.     The  villiiges  are  generally  on  the  shipping  buys  around  the  island. 

On  the  south  side  of  ihe  island,  iinuiediutely  on  the  western  side  of  the  point  of  Po^ 
Jeudy,  and  2  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Salines  i^oiut,  lies  the  harbor  called  Caluvine  n, 
Egmont  Harbor,  which  is  very  dee]),  and  where,  it  is  said,  sixty  men-of-war  could  r'jde 
in  safety  without  anchors.  The  entrance  is  nearly  half  a  mile  in  breadth.  Within,  itg 
peculiar  conformation  is  such,  that  it  may  be  considered  as  forming  two  harbors,  nnnielv 
the  Outer  and  Inner  Ports.  Tlie  entrance  into  the  latter  is  narrow,  and  its  length  rather 
more  than  half  a  mile.  The  depth  in  the  greater  part  is  7  fathoms,  with  exrelleiit  lioij. 
ing  ground,  being  every  where  a  soft  oozy  bottom.  Tho  ships  may  here  he  blonplde  of 
the  warehouses,  and  take  in  their  lading  with  great  ease  and  convenience;  after  whicii 
they  may,  with  very  little  trouble,  be  towed  into  the  outer  harbor,  which  enjoys  tbig  pe. 
culiar  advantage,  that  ships  can  sail  in  or  out  with  the  common  trade  wind. 

In  sailing  off  the  south  side  of  the  island,  there  is  little  danger  until  you  getto  the  west- 
ward of  Fort  Jeudy  Point.  But  thence  to  the  rocks  named  the  Grampuses,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  keep  n  good  offing,  as  the  ground  in  shore  is  very  fuul,  and  full  of  reefs,  T^g 
Grampuses  lie  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  olf  the  land,  with  tho  point  called  Pirogue 
Point  bearing  N.  ^  W,  They  appear  just  above  the  surface,  and  there  is  a  pasBage 
within  them,  but  it  is  not  deemed  safe. 

Off  the  north  side  of  the  island,  in  ihe  channel  between  it  and  Redonda,  or  Round  Isl- 
and, there  stands  a  remarkable  rock,  called  London  Bridge,  (from  its  having  a  natural 
arch  in  it,)  and  from  the  south  side  of  which  extends  a  reef.  This  rock  may  be  easily 
avoided  by  keeping  over  to  the  north  side  of  the  channel.  Hence,  and  along  the  west 
coast  of  the  island,  the  shore  is  bold,  all  along  to  the  point  of  St.  Eloi,  whence  a  coral  reef 
extends,  as  before  explained. 

Pt,  David. 
Orison,  Redonda.  La  Tente,  Pierced  Rock, 


Islets  off  the  North  end  of  Grenada. 

ST.  GEORGE'S  BAY.— When  sailing  into  St.  George's  Bay,  from  the  northward, 
give  Molenier's  Point  a  small  berth.  You  may  run  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  it,iB 
8  or  !)  fathoms.  Tho  point  ia  low,  with  some  straggling  trees  on  it,  and  makes  like  an 
island.  When  near  the  point  you  will  see  St.  George's  Fort  bearing  S.  S.  E.  Keep 
your  luff  for  the  fort,  and  when  you  cannot  fetch  near  enough  to  anchor,  with  the  fort 
bearing  east,  tack,  or  you  will  be  in  danger  of  running  on  tho  Three-Fathom  Bank,  before 
noticed.  The  soundings  are  very  regular  from  Molenier's  Point — soma  casts  20, 13, 9, 
and  12  fathoms;  and  in-shore,  towards  the  fort,  from  9  to  5  fathoms :  the  bottom  is  foul, 

To  sail  within  the  Three-Fathom  Bank,  or  Middle  Ground,  you  may  be  directed  by 
two  white  houses,  over  the  town,  about  half  way  up  the  hill.  Keep  them  open  with  the 
north  end  of  the  fort,  and  run  directly  in,  until  you  see  a  single  tree  to  the  southward, 
upon  a  litile  hill,  open  a  good  snil'ti  breadth  to  the  northward  of  a  liirge  tree  close  to  the 
shore;  you  will  thim  be  within  the  bunk,  and  nniy  pass  the  fort  point  at  the  distance  of 
half  a  cable's  length,  in  4  and  5  fathoms.  In  tho  mouth  of  the  harbor  there  are  15  fath- 
oms of  water,  but  it  shoalens  very  fast  to  the  southward. 

The  best  anchoring  ground  in  St.  George's  Bay  is  off  the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  at  about 
a  cable's  length  frotn  the  fort,  with  the  two  while  houses,  above  mentioned,  open  to  the 
southward  of  the  fort:  but,  if  you  anchor  in  the  bay  off  tho  town,  the  houses  must  be 
open  to  the  northward  of  the  fort,  and  bear  E,  S.  E. 

In  advancing  towards  St.  George's  Harbor  from  the  southward,  it  must  be  observed 
that  after  passing  Point  de  Salines,  there  is  a  very  dangerous  coral  reef  lying  between 
that  iKtint  and  Goat  Point,  with  only  2  or  3  feet  over  it  in  the  shoalest  part.  This  bank 
lies  with  the  signal  staff  of  Fort  St,  George  in  one  with  the  house  that  has  two  little 
turrets,  or  pavilions,  situated  on  the  top  of  a  hill  a  little  to  tho  eastward  of  the  redoubts 
on  Hospital  Hill.  Witli  this  mark,  you  will  be  in  a  line  with  the  reef,  and  must  give  it 
an  offing.  The  bank  is  about  a  mile  in  length,  lying  parallel  with  the  shore.  Within  it 
there  is  a  narrow  channel,  through  which  small  craft  frequently  pass. 

In  running  from  the  eastward  towarrls  Point  de  Salines,  you  will  see  Islet  Rameur,  a 
very  small  island,  lying  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  nearest  shore,  and  nearly 
a  mile  from  the  point.  Give  that  islet  a  berth  of  a  mile,  and  do  not  attempt  to  pass  within 
it,  as  the  passage  is  shoal.  To  Point  de  Salines  it  ia  sufficient  to  give  a  berth  of  half  a 
mile,  as  at  that  distance  there  are  7  fathoms  water.  So  soon  a^  you  lass  the  point,  the 
bay  will  be  open.      You  must  now  carefully  avoid  the  bank  above  debcribed,  which  you 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


426 


«illbave  passed,  when  a  remarkable  house,  like  a  sutniner  house,  upon  n  high  point  close 
to  ihe  end  of  the  reef,  bears  S.  E.     On  the  bank  the  sea  frequently  breaks. 

To  sail  into  the  harbor  you  leave  the  Three-Fathom  Shoal,  as  before  directed,  on  the 
jtarboard  hand,  and  run  in  close  under  the  fort,  and  then  warp  up.  The  ground  is  all 
clear,  and  the  harbor  capable  of  containing,  with  the  utmost  safety,  a  large  fleet  of  ships 
of  the  line. 

You  will  generally  be  obliged  to  work  up  into  the  bay,  as  it  lies  open  to  the  westward, 
unci  the  trade  wind  blows  directly  outward.     The  true  entrance  of  the  port  is  from  W. 

S  w. 

GREENVILLE  BAY. — This  port  lies  about  half  way  down  the  inland,  on  the  east-  Oreentille 
ern  side,  and  all  those  bound  for  it  must  bo  very  cautious,  and  not  go  to  leeward  of  it ;  Bay. 
for,  if  they  do,  they  must  pass  round  Point  de  Salines,  and  turn  to  windward,  on  the  other 
side  of  the  island,  as  the  current  sets  so  strongly  to  the  southward  that,  with  the  prevail- 
jo£  winds,  the  fastest  sailing  vessel  cannot  lead  up.  They  should  heave  to  a  little  to 
windward  of  the  Greenville  Rock,  which  lies  to  the  north-eastward,  (off  Telescope  Point,) 
and  is  round,  pretty  high,  and  steep  on  all  sides.  Upon  firing  a  signal,  a  pilot  will  come 
off,  and  take  charge  of  the  ship. 

The  marks  for  going  in  are  two  white  beacons,  formed  at  the  head  in  shape  of  a  dia- 
mond. One  stands  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  south  end  of  the  town,  at  high  water 
mark;  the  other  a  little  inland,  on  the  side  of  the  road  leading  over  the  mountains. 
They  bear,  when  in  a  line,  N.  74°  W.  By  keeping  them  thus  you  may  run  directly  in, 
under  an  easy  sail.  Be  careful  to  steer  very  small,  as  the  channel  between  the  rocks  is 
rery  naiTow,  not  being  a  ship's  length  across.  After  you  are  through  the  narrow,  if  your 
siiip  draws  more  than  13  feet,  you  must  come  to  at  the  mooring  chain,  and  lighten. 

This  harbor,  to  those  acquainted  with  it,  is  safe  and  commodious,  being  sheltered  from 
all  winds.  Yet  it  is  impracticable  to  a  stranger,  the  lead  being  no  guide ;  and,  if  you  once 
get  too  near  the  rocks,  the  current  sets  so  strongly  that  you  cannot  get  off  again. 

Remarlcs  on  Grenada. 
[From  the  Dorrotero  de  las  Antillaa.] 

■I 

Any  part  of  Grenada  may  be  safely  approached  to  within  less  than  two  miles.  On  ita 
weitern  coast  are  many  bays  lit  for  anchoring  in,  but  the  principal  is  that  in  which  stands 
the  town  and  harbor  of  ST.  GEORGE,  or  Fort  Royal.  This  bay  is  about  one  league  St.  George. 
from  the  Salines,  or  the  S.  W.  point.  Between  that  point  and  Fort  St.  George,  there 
is  a  rocky  shoal  and  banks  of  sand,  with  coral.  The  rocky  shoal  is  half  a  mile  in  extent 
from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is  two  cables'  length.  On  all  its  edges 
there  ere  6  and  7  fathoms.  It  bears  N.  25°  E.,  true,  three-quarters  of  n  mile  distant 
from  Point  de  Salines,  and  the  northernmost  part  of  it  lies  tjearly  W.,  or  W.  by  N.,  from 
Goat  Point,  at  about  three  cables'  length.  Goat  Point  is  the  southernmost  point  of  St. 
George's  Bay.  The  first  sand-bank  is  a  mile  in  extent,  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.,nnd  its 
greatest  breadth  is  three  cables'  length.  The  least  water  on  it  is  3i  fathom?,  and  close 
to  it  are  6i  and  7  fathoms.  Between  it  and  the  coast  the  depth  increases  to  10  futhoms. 
The  western  extremity  lies  nearly  north  from  Goat  Point,  and  at  the  distance  of  half  a 
mile.  The  second  bank,  on  which  there  are  not  more  than  S  fathoms  of  water,  lies  S. 
59°  W.,  true,  from  the  fort,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile.  The  greatest  extent  of  this 
bank  is  three  cables'  length. 

Behind  the  point  on  which  the  fort  stands  is  the  harbor,  which  is  only  three  cables' 
length  in  depth,  and  into  which  vessels  go  to  load  and  unload,  or  to  be  careened  This 
place  is  as  well  sheltered  as  the  best  harbor  can  be,  and  vessels  of  the  greatest  burthen 
can  haul  alongside  the  shore,  in  a  depth  of  8  or  10  fathoms. 

Grenada  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  7  or  8  leagues;  and,  as  the  principal  harbor  is 
bj  the  S.  W.  point,  the  best  way  is  to  make  and  haul  in  for  its  south  side. 

To  the  south  of  Point  Pirogue,  on  the  south  coast,  there  are  some  rocks  even  with  the 
water's  surface,  which  are  called  the  Grampuses,  and  which  lie  out  about  two-thirds  of 
a  mile  from  the  point.  At  night  it  is  necessary  to  be  certain  how  you  run.  that  you  may 
lieep  clear  of  them.  To  the  westward  of  Pirogue  Point,  nearly  half  a  league,  there  is 
an  islet  named  Glover's  Island,  which  is  very  clean,  and  has  44  fathoms  of  water,  at  a 
cable's  length  from  it.  To  take  St.  George's  Bay,  you  ought  to  poss  about  a  mile  with- 
out Glover's  Island,  and  at  half  a  mile  with  Point  de  Salines,  steering  to  the  north  so 
soon  ns  you  have  passed  the  latter,  until  Goat  Point  bears  east ;  then  luff  to  the  east- 
ward, nnd  place  the  prow  to  Point  St.  Eloi,  which  is  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of 
the  Fort  St.  George.  Thus  you  will  pass  safely  outside  of  the  shoals.  So  soon  as  the 
point  on  which  the  fort  stands  bears  east,  you  will  have  passed  the  last  shoal,  and  may 
beat  up  between  it  and  Point  St.  Eloi,  taking  care  neither  to  prolong  the  tacks  to  the 
south  of  the  fort,  nor  within  less  than  two  cables'  length  of  St.  Eloi's  Point,  which  sends 
out  some  rocks  to  the  west. 


m^ 


wmm 


48C 


Light. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

The  anchorage  is  to  the  west  of  the  town,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  const,  where 
you  mny  let  go  an  anchor  in  6  or  9  fulhoms.  The  bottom  ia  very  various,  for  you  mav 
equally  find  cliiy,  eand,  or  rocks.  Vessels  intending  to  make  a  short  stay  only,  brine  to 
iuthis  place,  with  only  one  anchor;  but  those  which  have  to  make  u  stay  and  unlund  nn 
into  tlie  harbor,  where  they  moor  with  four.  ' 

Some  charts  depict  a  bank  and  a  shoal  to  the  S.  W.  of  Point  do  Salines,  with  13  nDd4' 
fathoms.  In  the  strait  between  Grenada  and  Tobago,  the  water  has  been  found  to  aet 
S.  70°  W.,  with  the  velocity  of  a  mile  and  a  half  an  hour. 

^  sr  Tlic  Island  of  Barbadoes. 


BiirbaJuc^  bearing  W.  M.  W.,  ubout  6  leagues. 

Barbadoes,  which  lies  out  of  the  line,  and  to  windward  of  the  Caribbee  Isiniids,  isQi 
moderate  height,  and  generally  level,  although  there  are  a  few  hills,  of  easy  ngcont.  'fi,,, 
island  may  be  seen,  in  fine  clear  weather,  10  or  11  leagues  otT.  The  east  oiid  ia  mudi 
lower  than  the  other  parts  ;  but,  on  coming  from  thu  eastward,  or  when  the  nortli  etiil 
of  the  island  bears  W.  by  N.,  ond  the  S.  W.  point  about  W.  S.  W.,  then  the  enstei,) 
part  appears  the  highest  From  the  eastern  part  to  the  southward  the  land  is  ovon.and 
declines  towards  the  sea ;  but,  between  the  eastern  and  northern  points,  it  is  uueveo 
nigged,  and  broken. 

The  S.  E.  coost,  from  So)ith  Point  to  Kitriages  on  the  eastern  point,  is  enclosed  by  a 
ledge  of  rocks,  colled  the  Cobblers,  from  one  of  the  most  remarkable  among  tlicm.  Thev 
extend  about  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  you  must  bo  careful  to  avoid  thoin  in  tlio  nioht, 
At  South  Point,  whore  the  rocks  terminate,  there  is  a  flat  spit,  which  must  have  a  berth 
as  it  runs  off  above  a  mile  to  the  W.  S.  W.  In  the  day  time  you  moy  see  how  fur  it  ex' 
tends  by  the  white  water. 

The  principal  town  of  Barbndoos  is  that  called  Bridgetown,  situated  ot  the  nioutliofa 
little  rivulet  on  the  north  side  of  Cailisle  Bay,  upon  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  island. 

Those  bound  to  Bridgetown  should  always  endeavor  to  make  the  south  side  of  the 
island,  by  sailing  on  or  near  the  parallel  of  thirteen  degrees.  In  the  latitude  of  Barba- 
does, at  about  seventy  or  eighty  leagues  to  the  eastward,  you  will  find  the  water  discol- 
ored and  thick,  ns  if  there  were  soundings,  though  there  are  none  ;  by  this  iiidicntluo 
if  met  with,  your  situation  will  be  nearly  ascertained.  Wiien  you  approach  the  island, 
you  mny  run  along  within  three  miles  of  the  shore,  until  you  advance  towards  Need- 
ham's  Point,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  light,  which  forms  the  south  side  of  Carlisle  Biiy, 
You  mny  haul  up  and  anchor  in  Osten's  Bay,  to  the  westward  of  South  Point,  by  avoid- 
ing the  spit  above  described,  where  you  will  find  ground  in  7,  8,  9,  or  10  fatiioiiis  wiitor, 
This  bay  is  rocky  ;  but  the  best  ground,  which  is  tolerably  good,  lies  with  a  mill  close  by 
the  water  side,  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  bearing  E.  by  N.,  or  K.  N.  E. 

In  Carlisle  Bay,  ulso,  the  ground  is  foul, and  apt  to  chafe  the  cables.  In  haiillnt;  in  for 
this  place,  give  Noedhnm's  Point  a  berth  of  a  quarter  of  a  inilu,  to  avoid  a  reef  which 
stretches  from  it,  and  always  breaks.  You  may  then  run  in  till  you  bring  Charles  Fort, 
on  Needham's  Point,  to  bear  S.  E.,  and  the  steeple  N.  N.  E. 

There  is  also  anchorage  in  this  buy  in  25  fathoms,  fine  sandy  bottom,  with  Needham's 
Point  S.  E.  il  S.,  the  church  N.  N.  E.,  and  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  buy  V.  VV.  by  N, 

The  long  mark  for  the  reef  of  Needham's  Point,  is  a  house  standinj;  upon  the  hill 
above  the  north  end  of  the  town,  open  with  the  outermost  or  southoriitnnst  fluii-stiifToD 
Needham's  Point;  and  the  thwart  mark  is  the  three  fliig-st^iffs  in  oim'.  Witii  tliPiibove 
mentioned  house  on  the  hill  open  to  the  northward  of  the  church,  the  ground  isibul, 
but  to  the  southward  it  is  more  clear ;  and  with  the  house  just  open  to  tlio  soutinviirdof 
the  church,  there  is  an  anchorage  in  about  12  fathoms  :  the  other  marks  for  which  aie, 
a  road  to  the  eastward  of  the  town  directly  open,  the  fort  S.  S.  E.  i  E.,  and  I'oliciin  Point 
N.  W.  by  N.     The  tide  is  almost  imperceptible. 

On  the  leeward  side  of  the  island,  N.  N.  W.  from  the  northern  port  <if  Ciuli«le  Bay, 
are  several  shoals,  called  the  Pelican  and  Half-acre  Shoals,  the  outermost  of  which  lies 
about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  off. 

Before  Speightstown,  which  lies  between  eight  and  nine  miles  to  the  northward  of 
Bridgetown,  and  which  is  defended  by  three  forts,  vessels  occasionally  ride. 

There  is  a  bank  lying  about  throe  hundred  miles  to  the  windward  of  Barbadoes,  called 
Glassionieres,  from  the  name  of  the  French  Admiral  who  first  reported  it,  but  subsequent 
information  confirms  it. 


"^1^ 


""^im. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  487 

TOBAGO,  like  Burbndooi,  lios  out  of  the  lino,  and  to  windward  of  the  Caribboe  Isl-   Tobago, 
,QJg,    The  land  in  the  northern  part  is  so  high  aa  to  be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  at  the 
distance  of  15  leagues. 

Tliouffh  Tobago  doea  not  possess  nny  harbors,  properly  so  called,  yet  it  has  several 
irood  bay:* ;  which,  considering  that  from  their  southern  latitude  tliey  are  ntiver  exposed 
W  dangerous  gules  of  wind,  are  equally  convenient  and  secure  to  shipping.  For  this 
reason  tho  men-of-war  stationed  at  the  Curibbeo  Islands,  frequently  repair  hither  for 
tafety  in  the  hurricane  months. 

Tlie  principal  towns  are  Scarborough  and  Georgetown,  situated  on  the  south  sido  of 
the  island,  and  its  roadHtond  is  in  Man-of-war  Bay,  on  the  north  side.  The  vertical  rise 
of  tho  tide,  "d  the  full  i>.nd  change,  is  only  four  feet.  The  currents  near  the  island,  are 
very  strong  and  uncertain,  especially  between  it  and  Trinidad.  The  N.  E.  trade  wind 
prevails  all  the  year  round. 

The  course  usually  taken  from  the  island  of  Burbadues  to  the  S.  £.  side  of  Tobngo,  is 
south,  rather  easterly,  so  as  to  allow  for  the  current,  which  sets  most  frequently  to  the 
X.  W.,  and  BO  as  to  '^ot  several  leagues  to  windward  of  the  island. 

If  you  make  Tobugo  towards  the  evening,  and  are  afraid  of  running  in  with  it,  you 
must  not,  by  any  means,  lie  to,  but  stand  to  tho  southward  under  an  easy  sail,  otherwise 
llio  current,  which  always  sets  either  to  tho  N.  W.  or  N.  E.,  may  occasion  your  losing 
si^htof  the  island;  and  it  is  possible  that  a  N.  W.  current  may  curry  you  so  far  to  lee- 
vard  as  to  render  it  difficult  to  regain  it. 

Ships  JHJund  to  the  bays  on  the  N.  W.  sido,  should  always  endeavor  to  make  the  north 
end  of  the  island,  which  is  bold  and  clear.  A  cluster  of  largo  bold  rocks,  called  Melville's 
Rocks,  lien  olf  the  N.  E.  point.  Of  these  tho  westernmost  is  very  remarkable,  having  a 
large  hole  in  it,  from  north  to  south.  You  may  run  as  near  to  these  rocks  as  you  choose, 
jnd  along  tho  const  hence  to  the  Man-of-war  Bay. 

PORT  SCARBOROUGH  LIGHT  is  upon  Point  Bawlet.     The  ligh<^    ..  a  bright  Port  Searbo- 
white  one,  and  is  elevated    127  foet  above  the  level  of  tho  sea.     Vessels  approaching    rough  Light, 
Sciirborou^li,  from  the*windwnrd,  and  coursing  down  the  coast,  steering  S.  W.,  will  not 
dijcera  tho  light  until  it  bears  W.  \  S. ;  when  it  is  brought  to  bear  W.  N.  W.,  tlio  Mini- 
ster Rock  must  be  looked  out  for:  it  bears  E.  S.  E.  from  the  light,  distant  half  a  mile. 
Continue  to  steer  W.  S.  W.  until  the  light  boars  S.  W.,   then  steer  W.  N.  W.  until  * 

the  light  l)ears  N.,  then  you  will  have  passed  the  light,  and  must  steer  N.  W.,  for  the 
harbor,  giving  attention  to  a  proper  distance  from  the  land.  When  you  are  well  inside 
of  the  lighthouse,  and  have  lost  sight  of  the  light,  bo  guided  by  the  soundings,  us  the 
depth  decreases  gradually.     Anchor  when  you  aro  in  from  C  to  G\  fathoms. 

MAN-OF-WAR  BAY. — This  bay  is  not  only  the  best  in  Tobago,  but  is  one  of  tho    Man-of-war 
best  harbors  in  the  West  Indies,  having  sufficient  de|)th  for  the  largest  ships  close  to  the    Bay, 
shore.    Tho  distance  from  Melville's  Rocks  to  North  Point,  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  this 
bay,  is  about  three  miles.    In  sailing  in,  haul  round  this  point,  when  you  will  have  the 
bay  open,  and  you  must  be  careful  not  to  be  taken  aback,  the  wind  being  very  fluttering 
under  tho  high  land. 

You  will  And  no  soundings  until  close  up  in  the  bay,  and  then  from  40  to  10  fathoms. 

Having  entered,  turn  in  and  anchor  ns  far  to  windward  ns  you  can.  After  you  are 
shut  in,  you  will  see  the  little  bay  on  the  eastern  sido,  called  Pirate's  Bay  ;  get  as  near  to 
that  bay  as  you  can  :  you  will  find  all  clear  ground,  and  may  anchor  in  from  12  to  14, 
16  or  17  fiithoms.  If  you  cannot  turn  in,  you  may  anchor  in  35  or  40  fathoms,  and  warp 
up.    In  Pirate's  Bay,  is  the  watering  place  in  the  rainy  season. 

On  the  south  shore  of  tho  bay  you  may  anchor  in  lii  or  18  fathoms,  at  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  from  shore,  and  have  good  water  at  all  times,  half  »  mile  from  the  anchorage  ;  but 
thnro  is  a  grout  surf,  which  makes  watering  hazardous. 

The  western  side  of  the  bay  is  n  good  place  for  fishing  ;>but  there  is  a  small  shoal 
called  the  Cardinal,  lying  within  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  on  that  side,  about  hulf-way 
down  the  bay. 

Nearly  two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Point  Corvo,  the  western  point  of  Man-of-war 
Bay,  are  some  bold  rocks,  called  the  Brothers  ;  and  in  the  same  direction,  at  a  league  and 
ahoir  fidiii  tliiil  point,  are  some  others  of  the  same  description,  called  the  Sisters,  close 
towhuh  iliero  is  a  di^pth  of  40  fathoms.  All  the  coast  hereabout  is  bold  to.  From 
abreast  of  the  rocks,  the  south-west  end  of  tho  island,  which  is  low  and  sandy,  may  be 
seen. 

COURTLAND  BAYS. — Tho  first  bay  from  the  northward,  on  the  western  side  of  Courtland 
the  island,  excepting  a  few  for  small  vessels,  is  that  called  Great  Courtland  Bay,  the  Bays. 
northern  point  of  'vhich,  called  Guana  Point,  lies  13  miles  to  the  south-westward  of  the 
Sisters.  To  this  pui;?t  n  berth  nmst  bo  given,  as  a  rock,  called  the  Beef  Barrel,  which 
breaks  nt  low  water,  lies  just  off  it.  There  is  anchorage  in  G  fathoms,  but  good  fishing 
in  9  or  10  fathoms,  eitlior  with  the  seine  or  with  the  hook  and  line.  The  ground  is  clear, 
only  that  there  are  a  few  stumps  of  trees  close  up  to  the  mouth  of  the  river.  If  the 
wind  hangs  to  the  southward  of  east,  you  will  ride  very  roughly,  and  if  at  N.  E.,  will  roll 


498  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

very  much.  In  the  bay  you  will  have  the  common  trade  wind  all  day,  and  an  ofT-ihore 
breezn  dur  the  night.  If  you  arrivo  in  the  night,  and  do  not  care  to  push  furtlie  bay 
you  may  find  very  good  anchorage  to  windward  of  the  cliflT,  in  from  six  to  twunty  fath! 
omi,  regular  soundings. 

To  the  southward  of  Great  Courtland  Bay  is  Little  Courtland  Bay,  having  vory  good 
anchorage  within  tho  windward  point,  which  is  pretty  bold.  Vessels  ride  moro  safe  and 
■mnothly  horn  than  in  the  former. 

Between  Man-of-war  Bay  and  Courtland  Bay.  are  the  bays  colled  Bloody  Buy,  Peale. 
tuvier'fl  Bay,  Knglifihman's  Bay,  and  Castnna  Bay,  which  have  safe  anchorage  for  vessels 
of  one  hunilied  and  fifty  tons. 

At  the  S.  W.  end  of  Tobago  is  Sandy  Point  Bay,  in  the  bottom  of  which  Hhipa  mn. 
anchor  in  6  fathoms.  When  you  weigh  for  this  place,  be  sure  of  a  breeze  to  cniry  you 
without  the  roof,  called  tho  Buckoo,  which  extends  from  Little  Courtland  Bay  to  Broffn's 
Point,  and  is  dry,  in  some  places,  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  from  shore.  If  it  bocaltn 
tho  current  may  set  you  on  tills  reef.  At  the  distance  of  two  cables'  length  from  the 
brealiers  you  will  be  safe  to  enter  Brown's  Point  Bay;  haul  close  round  the  reef,  ami 
having  passed  the  point,  anchor  as  above. 
Eaitem  E  ASTKRN  COAST.— About  three  and  a  half  miles  S.  S.  E,  from  Melvillo's  Rocks 

Coast.  lies  the  small  island  called  Little  Tobago,  near  whicli  there  are  several  islets  nnd  rocks, 

Within  these  is  tho  bay  called  Tyrrel's  Bay,  in  the  bottom  of  which  vessels  of  150  tons 
may  anchor,  in  7  fathoms.  Tho  ground  between  Little  Tobago  and  tho  main  is  vory  foul, 
and  the  currents  very  strong  and  uncertain.  In  sailing  off  this  part  of  the  coast,  ships 
must,  therefore,  lioep  well  to  the  southward,  allowing  for  a  N.  W.  current,  which  uiinoat 
constantly  prevails  about  Little  Tobago. 

At  the  distance  of  three  and  a  half  miles  to  the  southward  of  Little  Tobago,  is  Pedro 
Point,  and  rather  less  than  two  miles  from  Pedro  Point  lies  a  high  rocky  islet,  called 
Queen's  Island.  Between  these  points  is  the  bay  called  King's  Bay,  which  hiis  good  an- 
choring  ground  in  every  part  within  the  windward  point,  ir  from  G  to  20  fathoms  of  wa. 
ter.  The  land  on  the  eastern  side,  being  high,  intercepts  the  trade  wind,  and  the  swell 
from  the  eastward  is  apt  to  set  a  vessel  down  to  the  leeward  point;  the  best  time  to  sail 
.  out  is  early  in  the  morning,  about  daybreak,  when  the  wind  blows  fresh  from  the  Inolon 

the  norltiward. 

South-westward  from  Queen's  Island,  ot  the  distance  of  a  league,  lies  a  similar  islet, 
called  Richmond  Island ;  and  one  league  and  a  half  from  the  latter,  in  the  same  direction, 
is  a  lesser  islet  called  Smith's  Island.  These  islets,  being  situated  off  projecting  points 
of  the  coast,  are  conspicuous.  Nearly  a  mile  west  of  Queen's  Island  is  u  large  diy  rock, 
called  tho  Iloxburg.  and  between  lies  the  bay,  named  Queen's  Bay.  Between  the  Roj- 
burg  Rock  and  Richmond  Island  is  Hog  Bay.  in  which  the  ground  is  foul.  To  the  N. 
W.  of  Richmond  Island  is  the  little  Bay  colled  Halifax  Bay,  which  is  noticed  hereafter. 
From  Halifax  Bay.  extending  nearly  to  Smith's  Island,  there  is  a  dangerous  Imnk  ami 
reef,  half  a  league  broad,  called  the  Great  River  Shoal,  on  which  the  depth,  in  several 
places,  is  only  three  fathoiiis. 

In  running  down  for  Quaen'a  Bay,  which  lies  within  Queen's  Island,  ai  above  men- 
tioned, give  the  latter  a  good  berth  until  you  open  a  large  house,  having  a  gnllery,  on  a 
rising  ground,  fronting  the  quay,  which  is  the  only  one  of  that  description  in  the  bay. 
Continue  on  this,  without  borrowing,  until  you  bring  this  house  in  a  line  with  one  on  the 
hill  above ;  and  keep  this  mark  on,  if  the  wind  permits,  until  you  are  two  cables'  length 
from  the  shore ;  then  haul  your  wind  and  anchor  about  150  fathoms  from  shore,  in  five 
fathoms,  fine  ground,  abreast  of  the  watch-house  on  the  beach.  Should  the  wind  bead- 
verse,  you  must  let  go  an  anchor  and  warp  up.  In  soiling  outward,  attend  to  the  same 
mark  as  in  sailing  in,  without  getting  over  to  windward. 

The  dangers  are  so  numerous,  from  Queen's  Boy  to  the  west  end  of  the  island,  that 
no  stranger  should  venture  without  a  pilot.  The  most  accessible  boys  are  tlioso  describ- 
ed as  follow : 

Halifax  Bay,  to  tho  N.  W.  of  Richmond  Island,  as  before  mentionod,  is  a  good  bay 
for  vessels  of  150  tons,  but  a  shoal  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance.  The  next  is  called 
Barbadoes  Bay,  and  lies  to  the  leeward  of  Smith's  Island.  To  avoid  Great  Kivcr  Shoal, 
in  sailing  for  Barbadoes  Bay,  or  to  the  westward  of  it,  keep  Little  Tobago  opoii  without 
Richmond  Island,  with  Smith's  Island  bearing  N.  W.,  you  may  luff  up  for  the  bay,  on 
cautiously  avoiding  a  reef  of  coral  rocks,  whioli  stretches  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's 
length  from  Granby  Fort  Point,  on  the  windward  side.  Within  this  reef  before  George- 
town, there  is  good  ground,  in  from  12  to  7  fathoms;  particularly  with  a  silk  cotton-tree 
on  the  beach  in  a  line  with  the  flag-staff  on  tho  top  of  the  hill. 

Rocky  Bay,  on  which  the  town  of  Scarborough  is  situated,  is  a  deep  bay,  generally 
safe  ;  but  a  heavy  swell  rolls  in  with  the  breeze,  especially  when  it  is  to  tho  south  of  east. 
It  lies  five  and  a  half  miles  to  the  westward  of  Borbodoes  Boy.     In  sailing  towards  this 

5 lace,  keep  L  if ''o  Tobago  open  of  Richmond  Island,  as  above  directed,  to  avoid  Great 
Liver  Shoal ;  u  A  next  observe  tliat  the  Chesterfield  Rock  is  a  danger  which  must,  also, 


m 


BLUNT' S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

1^  ceutiousty  avoided.  This  is  a  sunken  rock,  having  only  7  feet  over  it,  and  on  \  'hich 
the  ten  frequently  breaks.  It  lies  at  half  a  mile  from  shore,  about  two  nml  u  half  miles 
10  the  goulhwiirdof  Ornni.y  Fort  Point,  and  at  the  snme  distance  to  windward  of  the  oast 
tide  of  Rocky  Bay.  You  may  sail  clear  within  it,  with  Richmond  Inland  open  between 
Smith's  Island  and  the  main  ;  and  without  it,  by  koopinn  Richmond  Island  open  without 
Smith's  island ;  for  Richmond  and  Smith's  IslandH  in  a  linn,  lead  directly  on  it. 

When  past  the  Chesterfield  Kock,  vou  haul  in  lor  Scarborough  Point,  which  \j  a  bold 
bluff  P^>i"^  wit'i  a  foft  on  the  hill.  There  is  no  danger,  provided  you  keep  the  weather 
ihore  well  on  board,  till  you  open  the  nain  street,  which  extends  directly  up  the  hill. 
With  this  mark  ^'ou  may  anchor  in  from  7  to  9  fnthoms,  being  the  only  clear  part  of  the 
l«,y,  It  is  re<iui8ite,  even  hero,  to  buoy  up  the  cables.  No  stranger  should  attempt  to 
leave  the  harlmr  without  a  pilot,  as  it  would  bo  extremely  hazardous.  The  channel  be- 
tween Scarborough  Point  and  the  reefs  is  less  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  breadth, 
and  the  dangers  extend  thence  to  the  end  of  the  Island. 

In  the  channel  between  Tobago  and  Trinidad  there  is  a  dangerous  shoal,  having  only 
from  17  to  21  feet  water  upon  a  considerable  portion  of  it,  and  lies  directly  in  the  channel 
of  vessels  going  from  Tobago  to  Trinidad,  as  also  of  vessels  coming  from  Deinerara  and 
rounding  tlie  southern  extremity  of  Tobago  on  their  voyage  home.  The  slioalost  part 
lies  S.  20°  W.  from  Brow's  or  Crown  Point,  distant  about  two  miles  and  a  quarter,  and 
from  Point  Columbus,  Island  of  Tobago,  S.  67°  W.,  distant  three  miles  and  a  quarter, 
and  upon  the  ebb  tide  there  is  genei.slly  u  current  of  .3  miles  an  hour,  setting  about  N. 
\V.  by  W.,  probably  caused  by  the  outlet  of  the  waters  of  the  river  Oronookn.  In  this 
chnniiel,  or  strait,  the  current  runs  to  the  westward  at  the  rate  of  two  miles  per  hour ;  but 
gothnt  when  approaching  Trinidad,  the  direction  of  the  current  is  towards  the  N.  W., 
and  near  Tobago,  towards  the  S.  W.  On  the  N.  E.  part  of  Tobago  the  current  sets  to 
tlie  oorth-westward  with  more  velocity  than  is  stated  above. 


489 


THE  ISLAIVD  OF  TRIiVlDAD  AI%D  OlJIiF  OF  PARIA. 

Complied  chiefly  from,  the  Directions  and  Svvey  of  Captain  Columbine. 
All  tlie  bnarin^B  given,  whothor points  or  degrees,  are  true  bearings,  unless  otherwise  expressed. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  TRINIDAD  is  of  considerblo  magnitude,  containing,  accord-  The  Island 
lug  toconiputation,  2012  square  British  statute  miles.  It  presents  a  front  to  the  eastward  of  Trinidad. 
of  nearly  42  geographic  miles,  from  Point  Galere  to  Point  Galeota,  its  N.  E.  and  S.  E. 
extremes;  the  latter  bearing  from  the  former  S.  7i°  W.  From  Point  Galeota  the  South 
Coast  extends  56  miles  westward  to  Point  Icaque,  or  Icacos;  and  from  the  latter  to  Mona 
Point,  which  is  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  the  island,  it  is  43  miles  in  a  N.  N.  E.  dimction. 
The  North  Coast  extends  eastward  from  Mona  Point,  about  46  miles,  to  that  of  Galere. 
A  range  uf  high  mountains  extends  all  along  the  North  Coast,  which  maybe  seen  at  the 
distance  of  11  or  12  leagues;  and  these  stretch  to  the  southward  above  3  leagues  on  the 
East  Coast.  The  south  side  is  also  bordered  by  a  range  of  mountains,  but  considerably 
inferior  in  height  to  those  on  the  north  side  ;  and  near  the  middle  of  the  East  Coast  is 
another  range,  extending  to  the  W.  S.  W.  The  other  parts  of  the  island  are  principally 
low  and  level  land,  with  some  savannas. 

GULF  OF  PARIA. — Between  the  Island  of  Trinidad  and  the  main  land,  there  is  a  Gulf  of 
large  space,  or  opening,  called  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  afl'ording  secure  shelter  to  ships  :>f  oli  Paria. 
classes;  as  they  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  it  without  the  smallest  risk,  and  in  any  con- 
venient depth  of  water.  This  great  Gulf  may  be  entered  by  two  channels,  one  to  the 
north,  the  other  to  the  south :  that  to  the  north  is  divided  into  several  small  channels  by 
some  islands ;  and  that  to  the  south  has  an  islet  in  it  surrounded  by  rocky  shoals,  whicn 
are  dangerous. 

NORTH  COAST  OF  TRINIDAD.— From  Point  Galere,  the  North  Coast  of  Trini-  Nmlh  Coast 
dad  stretches  first  S.  eSi"  W.,  29  miles,  to  Point  Chupara,  and  thence  S.  76>'  W.,  14i  of  Trinidad. 
miles,  to  Point  Corozal ;  whence  it  bends  to  S.  684°  W.,  about  4  miles,  to  Point  Mona. 
All  this  const  is  bounded  by  rocky  shores ;  and,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  part,  with 
steep  mountains,  thickly  covered  with  wood,  close  down  to  the  sea,  which  breaks  in  a 
heavy  surf  along  the  whole  extent,  and  renders  landing  impossible,  except  at  a  very  few 
places.  The  land  immediately  about  Point  Galere  is  not  above  50  feet  high ;  it  rises  to- 
wards the  west,  and  about  Toco  begins  to  connect  itself  with  the  chaiu  of  mountains 
which  extend  along  the  whole  north  coast,  from  Rio  Grande  to  the  Bocas.  Of  these, 
that  of  Maraccos,  called  by  the  Spaniards  Cerro  de  las  Cuevas,  is  the  highest,  being 


"%<p 


11 1 IIIPU  ».«IIWWRS"K!l|f<PPfiHr' 


430  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

2947  foet  nbove  the  surface  of  the  sen,  and  not  two  miles  from  the  sea  coast ;  those  t 
the  eastward  are  estimated  from  aoOO  to  2500  feet  high,  and  those  to  the  westward  nt 
less  than  2000. 

Between  Mona  Point,  and  that  of  Chupnra,  there  are  some  bays;  but  so  much  swell 
sets  into  them,  and  the  wind  is  so  uncertain  and  light  close  to  tlio  shore,  that  it  ig  dan- 
gerous  to  anchor  a  ship  in  any  of  thorn,  except  in  Escouvas  and  Maraccas.  Of  these 
the  first  from  the  westwnrd  is  Macaripe.  a  cove  in  which  there  are  from  7  to  ,'3i  fiithoinf 
water,  sheltered  froii  the  N.  E.  winds,  and  defended  by  two  batteries  :  this  lies  about  3 
miles  to  the  eastward  of  Mona  Point,  and  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Point  Corozal 
The  next  is  Chute  d'Eau,  at  the  distance  of  five  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Point  CoiozaV 
this  is  also  a  small  sandy  cove,  deriving  its  name  from  some  rills  of  water,  which,  as  tliev 
descend  from  the  hills,  are  projected  over  the  rocks  in  various  directions.  Olftheensr 
point  of  this  cove  is  an  islet  of  the  same  name;  and  about  1|  milt  to  the  eastward  u!\' 
is  isle  aux  Vaches,  an  islet  lying  close  to  the  east  point  of  another  cove  or  bay,  in  wiiich 
there  is  anchorage  in  from  12  to  8  fathoms,  sheltered  from  N.  N.  E.  winds.  About  K 
1}  mile  from  Isle  aux  Vaches,  is  the  west  point  of  Maraccas  Bay,  having  to  tlie  eiLstwniii 
of  it  u  small  bay,  called  Mai  d'Estomac,  in  which  there  is  no  shelter;  this  point  lies  (j 
miles  to  tho  eastward  of  Point  Corozid. 
Maraccas  MARAC('AS  BAY. — This  bay  is  a  mile  wide,  and  about  the  same  depth,  )mviniTfio.ti 

Bay.  16  to  10  fathoms,  on  mud,  at  its  entrance,  decreasing  gradually  to  8  anil  7  fiitlionis  oii 

sand,  near  the  middle.  It  is  open  tc  .he  north,  but  is  ca|)ablo  of  nironling  more  shelter 
than  any  other  on  this  part  of  the  coast ;  the  land  about  it  is  level  for  a  conr-ideiuble  space, 
Two  miles  farther  nonli-eastward  is  Escouvas  Bay,  five-sixths  of  a  mile  wide,  and  iibout 
half  that  in  depth,  with  from  10  to  5  or  4  fathoms  water  in  it.  The  east  point  of  thi« 
bay,  on  which  there  is  a  battery  to  defend  it,  is  1^  mile  S.  W.  from  the  west  pnit  oi 
Point  Chupara.  Here  is  anchoriiso  at  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  tho  oust  point,  jr, 
9  fathoms  water,  sand  and  mud,  with  the  fort,  (Abercroinbio,)  bearing  E.  N.  E.,  and  tlie 
large  house  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay  S.  by  W.  Escouvas  is  a  better  anclionine  ilum 
Maraccas  Bay  ;  the  latter,  although  much  larger,  being  more  subject  to  calms  and  suilJen 
shiftings  of  the  wind. 
Point  Chu-  POINT  CHUPARA. — Point  Chupara  is  scarped  and  cliffy,  and  extends  aboutn  niik 

para.  nearly  oast  and  west.     At  tho  distance  of  700  feet  to  tho  westward  of  its  west  extremity, 

is  H  rock,  on  which  tho  sea  generally  breaks  and  the  reef  extends  about  halt'  a  mile 
eastward  from  its  east  extremity.  From  this  point  the  coast  inclines  to  tho  cast  south- 
eastward, being  a  sandy  beach  ;  and  at  the  distance  of  tliree-quarters  of  a  niilo  is  the 
entrance  of  tho  little  river  Chupnra,  fit  only  for  boats.  Here  the  coast  ngiiia  trend* 
eastward;  is  partly  composed  of  clitfs,  and  at  the  distance  of  3J  miles  is  tho  iiioiith  ot 
the  little  river  Macapou,  similar  to  that  of  Chupara.  Nearly  3  miles  fuither,  in  tlit 
,j  same  direction,  in  the  east  part  of  a  small  sandy  cove,  is  the  little  river  Pnrin.  of  the 

same  description  as  the  former  :  a  sniall  islet  liosott'tho  east  side  of  the  cove,  close  to 
the  shore,  called  Paria  Islet;  2d  miles  to  the  westward  of  this  islet,  and  about  one-third 
of  a  mile  olffrom  the  rocky  points  on  the  east  side  of  the  River  Macapou,  there  is  a  reef 
of  rocks  ;  there  are  also  several  other  rocks  lying  at  a  short  distance  from  shore,  betweet, 
Chupara  and  Paria,  but  none  so  tar  off  as  the  reef  just  spoken  of.  About  two  milps 
eastward  of  Paria  Islet  is  Trou  Bouille  Rio;  the  shore  between  being  chiefly  rocky  cliliV 
with  two  i.slots  lying  near  it.  Nearly  1|  mile  farther,  in  the  same  direction,  niul  at  tlit 
east  end  of  a  sandy  beach,  is  the  mouth  of  the  little  river  Mandamus,  iiiivin^'  betweei, 
a  projecting  rocky  point;  this,  like  the  former,  will  admit  nothing  but  boats.  Hence  llic 
coast  trenils  to  east  north-eastward  3  miles,  to  Point  Matelot,  which  lies  14  miles  N.Sr 
E.  from  Point  Chupara. 

From  Matelot  Point  to  Rio  Graiidn  Point,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  80°  E..  7; 
miles;  at  about  a  mile  to  tho  eastwiird  of  the  former  is  Lo  Petit  Matelot :  au'l  betwecii 
these,  close  to  the  eastward  of  a  rocky  spot,  is  the  entrance  of  Shark's  River-  siniiliir  tt 
those  already  (lescrii)e(l.  The  coast  thence,  to  within  half  a  mile  of  Uio  (innide,  i< 
chiefly  rocky  and  high,  with  a  few  sandy  buys.  Rio  Grande,  contrary  to  its  iippelliitiori, 
is  a  small  river,  like  those  before  mentioned;  it  lies  abimt  S.  W.  by  S.,  tlirec-(]aarter3  o: 
a  mile  from  the  point  of  that  name,  tho  shore  between  being  B(;arped  :  from  the  entrance 
of  the  river  a  sandy  beach  extends  westward  about  half  a  mile,  having  oil"  its  west  extrem- 
ity two  islets,  or  rocks,  the  outermost  of  which  lies  nearly  one-third  of  a  mile  tVnin  shore 
A  vessel  may  anchor  in  9  lathoms  water  at  one-third  or  two-fifths  of  a  mile  W.  by  .N 
from  Rio  (Jrande  Point,  (otV  which  is  an  islet  or  rock,)  with  the  east  end  of  the  siindv 
beach  bearing  about  S.  by  E.  \  E.  Tho  coast  from  hence  trends  nearly  |].  -j  miles,  l^ 
Point  Sans  Souci;  the  shore  being  chiefly  scarped. 

From  i*oint  Sans  Souci  to  Heel's  Point,  (called  by  tho  .Spaniards  Toco  Point.)  the  bear- 
ing and  distance  are  .S.  87"  E.,  4,^  miles.  Here  the  coast  bends  in  a  little  to  the  snuth- 
warii.  and  is  of  the  same  descrii)lion  as  the  anterior.  About  E.  by  .S..  i.'i'  miles  from 
Sans  Souci  Point  is  Toco  Point,  with  some  islets  or  rocks,  lying  close  to  it ;  and  between 
it  and  Reiffs  Poiut,  to  the  west  south-westward  of  tho  latter,  is  Toco  Bay,  where  ii  sliip 


'WPP^'il^Wlf' 


""m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


431 


niav  anchor  at  about  three-qnartera  of  a  mile  from  the  land,  in  12  fathoms  water,  muddy 
nfluntl.  with  Reefs  Point  bearing  E.  by  S.,  Harris'  house  (at  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  bay, 
Hjjfliigily  distinguished,  being  the  largest  in  that  neighborhood,)  S.  S.  E.  i  E. ;  or  farther 
wutiiward,  in  12  rr  14  fathoms,  with  Reefs  Point  E.  by  N.,  and  Harris'  house  as  before  : 
buttliis  is  not  a  good  place  to  lie  at,  as  a  great  swell  sets  in. 

From  Reefs  Point  the  coast  trends  S.  61°  E.  nearly  14  mile,  to  Point  Galore,  which, 
m  before  noticed,  is  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  island.  The  land  between  is  of  a  moderate 
lieiglit.  A  reef  extends  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  shore  along  all  this  space,  and 
<liculii  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  depth  of  12  fathoms.  There  is  also  a  rock  to  ^ 
tlioeiistwiird  of  Point  Galere,  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  often  visible,  but  on  which 
the  sea  always  breaks;  and  there  is  reason  to  suspect  that  some  sunken  ones  lie  still 
further  out,  and  also  within  it. 

Tiie  whole  of  the  north  coast  is  bold,  with  the  exception  of  the  places  already  men- 
tiooed;  and  the  soundings  extend  several  miles  off,  and  are  almost  regular.  Four  miles 
iN,  by  W.  from  Point  Galere,  there  are  22  fathoms  ;  half  a  mile  further  off,  40  fathoms, 
saedaiid  mad.  Three  and  a  half  miles  north  from  Point  Sans  Souci  there  are  23  fath- 
oms; nt  the  same  distance  N.  by  W.  from  Rio  Grande,  20  fathoms;  and  at  a  similar 
dijtance  N.  N.  W.  from  Point  Matelot,  17  fathoms.  N.  by  E.,  54  miles  from  Paria,  there 
are  13  fathoms ;  N.  by  W„  24  miles  from  the  River  Macapou,  21  ;  and  N.,  throe-fourths 
of  a  mile  fromChnpara  Point,  16  fathoms.  There  are  78  fathoms  5  leagues  N.  by  W. 
from  Escouvas ;  and  43  fathoms  54  miles  north  from  Miiraccas  Bay.  North  64  miles 
from  Point  Coro/.al,  there  are  60  fathoms ;  and  at  7  leagues  N.  by  E.  from  Boca  Mona, 
l)3fatlioms.  These  depths  decrease  gradually  towards  the  shore,  very  close  to  which 
are  8,  7  and  6  fathoms. 

The  bottom  being  every  where  good,  sand  and  mud,  a  vessel  having  occasion  to  anchor, 
may  clioose  her  anchorage  on  any  part  of  this  coast,  with  the  precaution  not  to  go  into 
any  of  the  bays  to  leeward  of  iMaraccas  ;  as  the  high  mountains  there  prevent  the  wind 
from  blowing  home,  and  the  swell,  in  such  a  case,  renders  itdiflficult  to  manage  a  ship. 

At  Rio  Grande,  on  the  full  and  change  days  of  the  moon,  it  is  high  water  at  4h.  30m. ;    High  water. 
and  between  this  and  Point  Chupara,  the  last  two  hours  of  the  ebb,  and  sometimes  the 
whole  of  it,  sets  to  the  eastward  along  the  sliore. 

EAST  COAST  OF  TRINIDAD.— The  range  of  liigli  mountains  extending  along    East  Coast 
the  north  coast  of  this  island,  from  west  to  east,  continues  on  the  east  coast  as  far  as  Point    of  Trinidad. 
Salibia.    The  highest  part  of  the  range,  as  before  saiil,  is  near  the  meridian  of  Escouvas  ; 
on  tlie  east,  the  most  elevated  part  is  near  Point  Salibia. 

The  general  bearing  of  the  east  side  of  the  island,  from  Point  Galere  to  Point  Galeota, 
isS.  74'^  W'l  about  414  miles.  Cape  Galere,  as  before  said,  is  comparatively  low  and 
rocky,  with  a  heavy  sea  constantly  breaking  on  it;  and  S.  7-4^  W.  from  it,  l.i  mile,  is 
Point  la  Forest,  having  between  a  rocky  bay,  in  which  there  is  no  landing.  From  Point 
la  Forest,  S.  40°  W.,  44  miles,  lies  Point  Guoyamau.  Between  these  the  coast  forms  a 
bay,  on  the  shore  of  which,  and  nearly  midway,  is  the  little  settlement  of  Cumana. 
From  Point  Galere  to  Cumana  the  const  is  very  rocky.  Cumana  consists  of  3  or  4  plan- 
tations, situated  on  land  tolerably  even,  and  rising  with  gentle  ascent  from  a  sandy  bay, 
wiiich  always  affords  good  landing,  although  quite  unsheltered,  and  as  much  exposed  to 
the  east,  and  to  the  consequent  violence  of  the  ocean,  as  the  rest  of  the  coast,  along 
whose  whole  extent,  except  at  this  s|)ot,  a  tremendous  surf  breaks.  At  throe-fourths  of 
a  mile  olf  tliore  are  9  fathoms  water,  whence  thedeptli  decreases  gradually  to  the  shore. 
From  Cumana  to  Point  Guayamau,  a  distance  of  24  miles,  the  shore  consists  of  some 
points  of  rocks  and  sandy  beaches.  From  the  latter  point  it  becomes  cliffy  to  within 
ihreo-fuurtlis  of  a  mile  of  Balandra  Point,  and  then  a  sandy  beach  alnic  t  to  the  point 
itself,  which  terminates  in  a  scarped  rock,  and  bears  from  Guayamau  Point  S.  40''  W., 
at  the  distance  of  4  miles.  Balandra  Bay  is  to  the  westward  of  the  point:  it  is  not  largo 
or  deep  enough  to  shelter  any  vessel  larger  than  u  trading  schooner,  in  from  24  to  4 
i'athonis.  The  north  part  of  this  bay  is  n  sandy  bench,  and  at  its  west  end  a  mountain 
torient  discharges ;  the  shore  thence  is  clitfy  as  far  as  Salibia  Point,  which  is  nearly  a 
mile  S.  48^  W.,  from  that  of  Balandra.  The  coast  now  bends  more  to  the  westward  ; 
and  nt  the  distance  of  nearly  two  miles  W.  S.  W.  5  W.,  is  Patura  Point,  to  the  N.  E. 
uf  which  is  Salibia  Bay,  when,  a  small  vessel,  drawing  8  feet  water,  may  find  tolerable 
shelter  within  a  small  rocky  islet  on  the  north  side.  There  is  also  anchorage  about 
a  quarter  or  a  third  of  a  mile  t)  the  southward  of  the  islet,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  but 
more  exposed.  This  islet  lies  four-fifths  of  a  mile  from  Salibia  Point ;  the  rocky  shore 
extends  nearly  as  far,  and  thence  to  Patura  Point  is  a  sandy  beach.  About  W.  by  N., 
half  a  mile  from  the  islet,  is  the  entrance  of  Salibia  river,  fit  only  for  boats ;  and  a  little 
lo  the  westward  of  it  is  a  tolerably  good  landing  place.  Patura  Point  has  a  small  islet, 
or  rock,  near  it,  and  the  coast  is  cliffy,  though  somewhat  lower  than  before,  for  about 
two-fifths  of  a  mile,  whence  it  turns  abruptly  to  the  southward.  Salibia  is  nt  the  foot 
of  the  range  of  mountains  which  extends  along  the  northern  coast;  and  here  ends  the 
rocky  quarter  of  P  ;^nt  Galere.     From  hence  to  the  southward  is  a  long  eaudy  shore, 


•^>ni«f^pigi!^l^lf^a;i||pwppM*iiqf^p(«r!nif!«R|U.uw  iflPllli.J;iJ|IIiJ»^Jl|»JJi»,w«'4J(»i«pi'»iJ»'.'»i""iV' 


432  BLUNTS   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 

the  interior  being  a  vast  extent  of  land,  apparently  level,  and  of  a  moderate  height,  with 
a  few  distant  insulated  hills  arising  out  of  the  plain ;  the  whole  covered  with  a  con 
tinued  forest. 

We  have  just  said  that  the  const  turns  abruptly  to  the  southward,  and  is  a  anndy  shore 
It  continues  of  the  same  description  so  fur  as  Munznnilla  Point,  which  is  9|  mlleg  s,  go 
£.  from  Pntura  Point,  with  a  surf  breaking  along  its  whole  extent,  so  heavily  as  to  ren 
der  landing  on  any  part  of  it  totally  impracticable.  This  is  called  Patura  Buy ;  near 
the  middle  of  it  the  River  Oropuche  discharges  itself  through  the  surf,  and  over  a  very 
bad  bar.  " 

At  Manznnilla  Point  the  const  turns  suddenly  to  S.  W.  by  W.  and  W.  S.  W.,  fo. 
about,  1 J  mile,  chiefly  roclcy,  but  forming  a  small  sandy  bay,  or  harbor,  of  the  snme  name 
sheltfired  by  some  rocky  islets  lying  near  its  east  point.  This  bay  has  a  depth  of  ^^(g' 
sufficient  for  any  vessel  not  drawing  more  than  9  feet:  and,  although  very  small,  itj. 
the  best  on  all  the  east  coast  of  the  island.  A  reef  of  rocks  stretches  from  Manzanilln 
Point  eastward,  rather  more  than  half  a  mile;  ond  nearly  2  miles  S.  49°  E.  frouitiie 
same  |.^'nt  are  three  rocks,  above  water,  over  which  the  sea  always  breaks.  Half  a  mile 
S.  71°  \V.  from  these  rocks  is  another,  so  small,  that  it  scarcely  makes  the  sea  break 
and  is  not  to  be  seen  until  you  are  close  to  it.  Vessels  from  the  north  may  run  with 
great  safety  between  the  reef  which  stretches  off  from  the  point  and  these  rocks;  but  the 
wind  will  scarcely  permit  a  square-rigged  vessel  to  lay  her  course  through  this  channel 
from  the  southward.  There  is  also  some  foul  ground  about  two-fifths  of  a  mile  E.  N.  E. 
from  the  three  rocks,  on  and  near  which  the  sea  breaks  in  very  bad  weather.  It  shoals 
suddenly  from  9  to  4|  fathoms.  A  ship  may  anchor  off  Manzanilln  Bay,  in  5  fathoms 
water,  with  the  leewardmost  of  the  rocky  isIetH  at  the  entrance  of  the  bay  beanne  N 
W.  about  the  distance  of  3  cables'  length,  and  Manzanilla  Point  N.  N.  E.  This  is  by 
far  the  best  anchorage  on  the  coast,  as  a  ship  from  hence  will  always  have  plenty  of  room 
to  make  sail  in  case  of  necessity.  Here  the  flood  and  ebb  streams  both  set  north-east- 
ward. Nearly  W.  S.  W.,  about  34  miles  from  Manzanilla  Point,  is  the  e;<st  end  of  Le- 
bnmche  Mountains,  which  thence  extend  west  south-westward.  This,  by  estimation,  is 
about  1000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  forms  a  conspicuous  mark  to  knowtlib 
part  of  the  coast  by. 

Cocos  Bay.  COCOS  BAY. — Close  to  the  westward  of  the  cliffy  shore,  on  the  west  side  of  Man. 

zanilla  Bay,  is  the  mouth  of  the  little  River  Lobranche ;  and  hence  the  coast  again  turns 
abruptly  to  the  southward  as  far  as  the  River  Orotoire,  a  distance  of  lO-i  miles ;  tlie  shore 
being  all  n  sandy  bench,  nearly  straight,  with  the  surf  breaking  heavily  on  it.  This  is 
called  Cocos  Bay,  from  its  shore  being  b'^  Jerod  by  a  narrow  grove  of  cocoanut  trees  7 
or  8  miles  long.  Near  the  middle  of  the  bay  the  River  Mitan  discharges  its  waters, 
About  half  a  mile  eastward  of  the  mouth  of  the  Orotoire  River,  is  a  landing  place  behind 
a  rocky  point,  on  the  north  side  of  a  scarped  promontory,  which  advances  Ij  mile  into 
the  sea,  and  presents  a  front  of  high  cliff  to  the  eastward,  of  about  a  mile  in  length,  N.  N. 
E.  and  S.  S.  W.  This  is  called  Mnyero  Point,  (but  by  the  Spaniards,  Cape  Guatarc) 
Several  rocks  nnd  reefs  lie  off  its  N.  E.  part  to  a  considerable  distance  ;  and  it  should  not 
be  approached  from  the  east  nearer  than  n  mile,  as  there  are  only  3  fathoms  at  the  distance 
of  four-fifths  of  u  mile  from  it,  in  that  direction  ;  but  n  vessel  may  anchor,  iit  nenrija 
mile  to  the  northward  of  this  promontory,  in  5  fathoms,  good  ground,  having  the  N.  E, 
part  of  the  point  bearing  S.  E.  \  S.,  and  the  westernmost  rocky  bluff,  which  is  near  the 
mouth  of  the  Orotoire,  S.  W.  \  S.  Mayero  Point  is  remarkable  at  the  distance  of  5  or 
6  leagues,  from  advancing  into  the  sen,  and  also  from  the  almost  equal  «levatii)n  of  the 
whole  tongue  of  land  that  forms  it.  It  lies  nearly  11  miles  S.  13°  W.  from  i\lanzanilla 
Point. 

Mayero  Bay.  MAYERO  BAY. — From  the  south  part  of  Mayero  Point,  the  land  continues  high 
and  scarped  for  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  to  the  W.  N.  W.,  whence  a  low  sandy  beach 
begins,  turning  to  S.  by  \V.  and  S.,  and  continues  of  the  same  description,  with  low 
land  in  the  interior,  as  far  as  Point  Galeota,  which  is  I'JJ  miles  S.  8°  W.  from  Mayero 
Point.  The  space  between  these  points  is  callod  Mnyero  Bay  ;  and  at  its  northern  part 
the  water  is  sufficiently  smooth  to  afford  good  landing  for  two  or  throe  miles,  although  it 
is  as  much  exposed  to  the  east  as  the  middle  nnd  southern  parts,  where  a  heavy  surf  I 
breaks  ;  and  off  this  part,  also,  a  vessel  may  anchor,  as  there  are  about  6  fathoms  at  \\ 
mile  off,  nnd  it  shonis  gnulually  to  the  shore.  To  the  southward  of  Mnyero  Point  are 
some  phmtations,  nnd  at  the  distance  of  3  miles  a  church. 

PoirUGaleota.  J'OINT  (iALEOTA,  as  we  have  before  said,  is  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  island.  Several 
rocks  lie  off  it,  but  they  are  all  above  water;  and  at  the  distance  of  three- quarters  of  a 
mile  to  the  E.  and  S.  E.  of  it,  is  a  depth  of  10  fathoms.  This  promontory  is  of  modotate 
elevation,  and  may  be  discovered  from  the  north-eastward  at  the  distance  of  6  or  7 
leagues.  The  soundings  extend  ton  considornble  distance  off  to  the  eastward,  aud shoal 
grndually  to  the  land  ;  these  will  bo  best  understood  by  inspecting  the  chart. 

SunkenRock,  SUNKEN  R(JCK. — Before  we  quit  this  part  wo  ought  not  to  omit  mentioning  a 
dangerous  ruck  that  lies  G  or  7  leagues  from  the  land,  nltliough  we  are  not  acquainted 


»PIIII^P"W 


'wmm^Wffn 


mimmm 


^mmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  433 

(fith  its  precise  situntion.  The  surveyor,  (Capt.  E.  H.  Columbine,)  when  searchin;;  for 
it  in  the  direction  that  wbb  pointed  out  to  him,  found  a  bank  of  16  fnthoma,  with  deep 
water  all  around  it,  on  which  it  is  supposed  to  exist.  This  bank  lies  7  leagues  S.  37^° 
K,  from  Point  Galere,  and  N.  82*^  E.  from  the  mountain  of  Lebranche,  distant  6i  leagues 
from  Miinzanilla  Point.  There  is  no  doubt  of  its  existence,  a  vessel  having  been  wrecked 
upon  it ;  Hid  it  has  been  seen  by  several  persona  at  very  low  spring  tides ;  it  is  a  very 
,L||  rock,  and  8tenp  close  to. 

SOUTH  COAST  OF  TRINIDAD.— From  Point  Galeota  to  the  Point  de  la  Grande    South  Coast 
Cnlle.  it  is  4  miles  S.  75°  W.     The  coast  between  forms  Guaya-Guayara  Bay,  which  is   of  Trinidad. 
fpacious,  with  a  sandy  shore,  but  so  shoal  that  nothing  can  be  sheltered  in  it,  except  very 
small  vessels,  there  being  only  3  fathoms  water  a  mile  from  the  land.     A  rocky  shoal 
lies  nearly  in  the  middle  of  it,  and  there  are  several  rocks  near  Galeota  Point,  but 
Ihey  nre  all  above  water.     From  Point  de  la  Grande  Calle  the  coast  trends  S.  by  W.  4 
\V., «"  scarped  and  rocky,  to  Point  Casa  Cruz,  a  distance  of  5i  miles.     All  along  this 
part  there  are  5  fathoms  water  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from   the  land.     From  Point  Casa 
Cruz  the  coast  runs  nearly  west,  with  several  inflections,  about  32  miles,  to  Point  Tabaro, 
the  shore  being  chiefly  scarped,  with  two  or  three  spots  of  sandy  beach,  and  a  few  rocks 
at  the  projecting  points.     From  Point  Tabaro  the  coast  trends  W.  by  N.,  about  24  miles, 
to  point  Herin,  a  projecting  point  of  sand,  with  some  rocks  lying  off  it.     Nearly  5 
jjiles  W.  by  N.  from  the  latter  lies  Islot  Point.     The  coast  between  is  sandy,  and  forms 
a  small  hay,  called  Herin  Bay,  in  which  there  are  3  or  4  fathoms  water.     The  coast 
from  hence  trends   W.  S.  W.,  nearly  6  miles,  to  Point  Quemada,  the  shore  being  all 
jandy.    About  midway  lies  Point  Chaguaramas.     About  3  miles  to  the  westward  of  Point 
Queinnda  is  Point  Icacos,  or  Icaque,  the  south- western  extremity  of  the   island.     We 
iiave  already  said  that  Point  Galeota  may  be  distinctly  made  out  at  the  distance  of  6  or 
'leagues.    From  this  point  the  land  begins  to  be   more  elevated,  and  continues  so  along 
the  south  coast.     No  part  of  this  coast  can  properly  be  called  mountainous,  although  it  is 
very  hilly  ;  but  these  gridually  diminish  from  the  vicinity  of  Point  Herin  towards  Point 
Icacos,  which  is  quite  low  and  flat.     The  hill  of  Guaya-Guayara,  at  the  eastern  extremity 
of  this  riinge,  and  about  li  mile  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Point  do  la  Grande  Calle,  is  7C0  feet 
high  by  admeasurement.     This  may  serve  as  a  guide  whereby  to  estimate  the  height  of 
the  others.    There  is  a  watering  place  about  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  Point  Casa  Cruz, 
where,  with  a  little  trouble,  water  may  be  obtained  from  a  mountain  stream  that  falls  into 
awell  on  the  beach.     Five  fathoms  will  be  found  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  shore,  in 
which  depth  you  may  run  along  the  coast;  but  it  is  more  advisable  to  keep  at  2   miles 
from  the  land.     You  will  then  be  in  8  or  10  fathoms,  and  clear  of  all  risk.     At  the  dis- 
tance of  3  or  4  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Icacos,  a  reef  of  rocks  lies  upwards  of  a 
mile  from  the  land.     It  does  not  show  itself,  but  some  red  cliffs  on  the  shore  will  nearly 
point  out  its  situation.     After  passing  Point  Quemada,  you  may  approach  the  shore  to  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  without  tlie  least  risk.  . 

POINT  ICACOS,  or  ICAQUE,  is  a  sandy  promontory  advancing  into  the  sea  in  a 
circular  form,  but  so  steep,  that  at  half  a  cable's  length  there  are  8  or  9  fathoms  water. 
From  its  S.  W.  part  it  first  runs  northward,  al)out  li  mile,  to  Point  Corral,  and  thence 
Dortb-eastwurd,  li  mile,  to  Point  Gallos,  which  has  two  or  three  islets  lying  off  its  west 


Point  Icacos, 
or  Icaque. 


WEST  COAST  OF  TRINIDAD.— From  Point   Icacos  to  Port  d'Espagne,  the 
I  bearing  and  distance  are  N.  Sii'^  E.  43  miles.     All  this  part  is  low,  excepting  Mount  Na- 
parima,  which  is  round,  and  602  feet  high.     In  clear  weather,  it  may  be  seen  at  8  leagues 
[distance,  and  is  a  good  mark  within  the  Gulf  of  Paria. 

From  Point  Gallos,  before  mi.'ntionnd,  to  Point  Cedro,  it  is  5i  miles  N.  61°  E.,  the 
[coast  between  forming  a  hay  of  the  same  name,  the  N.  E.  part  of  which  is  flat  at  a  coa- 
jjiderable  distance  off.  From  the  point  a  spit  projects  westward,  and  at  its  extremity, 
I  two-thirds  of  a  mde  from  the  point,  is  a  rock  called  the  Barrel  of  Beef.  A  shoal  of  9 
[feet  lies  also  about  3  miles  N.  E.  4  E.  from  the  same  point.  N.  62'^  E.,  at  the  distance 
[of  14  miles  from  Point  Cedro,  is  the  N.  W.  oxtreinitv  of  Capo,  or  Point  Brea,  or  Pitch 
[Point.  Between  these  the  shore  forms  two  shallow  bays,  separated  by  Guape  Point. 
[Cape  Brea  presents  a  front  of  twoorthroe  miles  in  extent,  (jnijecting  to  the  N.  W.,  and 
[within  it  is  a  wonderful  lake  of  pitch  or  bituminous  matter.  In  the  bay  to  the  southward, 
I  about  a  mile  from  Point  Brea,  there  are  two  small  rivers  of  excellent  fresh  water  close  to 
jtbe  bench. 

From  the  north  part  of  Point  Brea  to  Mount  Naparima,  the  bearing  and  distance  are 
[N,  69'  E.  9i  miles,  and  from  the  latter  to  Point  Cascaal,  the  coast  trends  N.  6"  W.,  11 
jrailes.  The  shore  between  Cape  Breu  and  Point  Cascaal  forms  a  deep  bay,  with  shallow 
■water,  into  which  several  rivers  disembogue  ;  of  those  the  first  is  the  Sibaira,  at  about  li 
Iniile  to  the  S.  W.  of  Mount  Naparima.  Between  this  river  and  the  mount,  at  two-thirds 
lof  amile  from  shore,  lies  a  farallon,  or  rock,  and  to  the  W.  N.  W.  of  it,  full  2  miles,  the 
Iwater  is  shallow.  At  the  foot  of  the  mount,  on  its  west  side,  is  Petit  Bourg,  and  to  the 
lurthward  of  it  are  the  little  rivers  Taronga  and  Guaracaro.    About  2J  miles  to  the 

28 


West  Coast 
of  Trinidad. 


4 


434 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Gaspar 
Grande. 


Chaguara- 
mus  Bay. 


High  water. 


Escondido 
Harbor. 


Diego's  Isl- 
ands. 


Colorat. 


northward  of  Petit  Bourg  is  Stony  Point,  at  the  western  end  of  the  middle  range  of  hill 
The  coaat  thence  trends  about  N.  i  W..  8i  miles,  to  CascanI  Point,  bordered  with  »hg\  I 
low  water  to  the  distance  of  4  miles  off.     About  S.  E.  by  S.,  li  mile  from  Cnscnn!  Point 
is  the  mouth  of  the  little  river  Coura,  and  IS  mile  N.  E.  i  E.  from  the  same  point,  is th  t 
of  Cnrapichima,  of  a  similar  description.    From  hence  it  is  N.  13^°  W.,  9  miles,  to  iCf  i 
d'Espagne ;  the  land  between  is  low  and  swampy,  through  which  the  little  riveVa  Cli'^  f 
gouane,  Aripo,  and  Arouca,  discharge  their  waters. 

Here  we  discontinue  the  description  of  this  coast  from  the  south,  resume  it  again     I 
the  Bocas,  and  conclude  at  Port  d'Espagne. 

Mona  Point,  as  we  have  before  said,  is  the  N.  W.  extremity  of  the  island.    From  j 
thence  to  Taitron's  Point,  or  Punta  del  Diablo,  it  is  little  more  than  11  mile  S.  8"  R 
At  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  former  lies  the  north  point  of  an  islet,  called  (he 
Careenage  of  Mona,  which  runs  in  north-eastward  more  than  half  a  mile,  and  has  from 
17  fathoms,  at  the  entrance,  to  4  and  3  at  the  extremity.     At  the  head  of  this  inlet  or  I 
bay,  a  ship  of  the  line  might  lie  secure  to  the  shore,  land-locked.     Off  the  sandy  siilire  I 
which  forms  the  east  side  of  it,  there  is  a  bank  which  shoals  suddenly  :  it  will  therefore 
be  necessary  to  keep  on  the  opposite  shore,  if  you  should  have  occasion  to  'voikupsol 
far.     Taitron's  Bay,  called  also  Ensenada  del  Infante,  lies  to  the  northward  of  Taitron's 
Point,  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  and  of  nearly  the  same  depth,  having  a  siindy 
beach  at  its  head,  and  a  depth  of  15  fathoms  at  the  entrance.     The  high  land  betweeol 
these  bays  is  1400  foet  above  the  surface  of  the  sea.     Westward  from  these  points  lie 
the  three  islands,  Mona,  Huevo,  and  Chaca-chacare,  which  form  the  Bocas,  and  which 
will  be  described  hereafter. 

GASPAR  GRANi^E— S.  4°  W.,  one  mile  from  Taitron's  Point,  lies  the  westpoint 
of  (Jaspar  (irande,  named  Espolon  (Cock's-spur.)  This  island  extends  eastward  iipurly 
li  milo  to  Punta  de  la  Reyna,  the  east  point,  and  is  about  half  a  mile  broad.  Its  eleva- 
tion is  considerable,  the  highest  part  being  337  feet ;  and  its  coasts  form  some  coves,  or 
little  bays,  in  which  small  vessels  may  anchor. 

From  Taitron's  Point  the  coast  of  Trinidad  runs  S.  73°  E.,  ibur-fifths  of  a  mill, to 
Punta  de  San  Jose,  whence  it  bonds  in  to  the  N.  E.  and  E.,  li  mile,  and  thence  to  ilie 
S.  S.  W.,  about  two-thirds  of  a  milo,  to  Punta  San  Carlos,  being  the  west  part  af  Clia- 
guaramus  Peninsula.  This  point  lies  almost  2  miles  S.  63°  E.  from  Taitron's  Puim, 
one  and  one-tenth  mile  S.  60°  E.  from  Punta  do  San  .lose,  and  740  yards  to  the  eastwari 
of  (jasj)ar  Grande.  Gasparilla  Island  lies  to  the  southward  of  Punta  de  San  Jose,  and 
has  an  islet  on  its  north  side.  This  island  forms  two  passages  :  that  on  the  north  is  ijO 
yards  wide,  with  5  to  15  fathoms  water;  and  that  on  the  south,  between  it  and  Gajpar 
Grande,  is  740  yards  wide,  with  from  9  to  14  fathoms  water. 

CHAGUaRAMUS  bay  is  comprised  between  Gaspar  Grande,  on  the  S.  W., the 
west  side  of  the  peninsula  on  the  east,  and  the  land  on  the  north.  It  is  spacious,  and 
affords  good  anchorage.  The  shores  are  bold,  except  off  the  large  plantatidii,  which 
is  situated  in  the  principul  valley  on  the  north  side,  whence  a  shoal  of  1  to  3  fatiioiiij 
extends  600  yards  oft".  Its  outer  edge  trends  to  W.  N.  W.,  and  is  very  steep.  Ves- 
sels may  anchor  in  this  bay  any  where;  but  the  most  convenient  spot  for  watering, is 
in  12  fathoms,  with  the  east  end  of  Gaspar  Grande  bearing  S.  by  E.,  and  Tiiitioifj| 
Point  in  a  lino  with  I'unta  do  San  Jose.  There  is  a  wreck  of  one  of  the  Spanish thips 
of  the  line  that  wore  burnt  here  at  the  taking  of  the  island.  It  lies  in  17  fallioins water, 
having  the  western  Diego  l.-Iand  open  1^  10'  of  j^unta  San  Carlos,  and  the  north  ei- 
trctiic  of  Gaspar  Grande  \V.  by  S.  Avoiding  this  wreck,  a  ship  or  two  may  water  very 
well  hero. 

At  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  it  is  high  water  by  the  shore  at  3  o'clock,  and  itrisei 
about  fi  feet;  t)ut  at  the  anchorage  the  flood  stream  runs  until  half-past  3  o'clock.  The 
flood  runs  to  the  eastward,  and  continues  only  5i  hours:  the  ebb  runs  to  the  westnard.j 

ESCONDIDO  IIAUBOR.— To  the  northward  of  Punta  San  Carlos,  or  KscoiiJido, 
is  a  little  hiivbor,  named  Escondido.  From  this  point  S.  S.  E.  j  K..  fou r- tenths uf si 
mile,  is  Prince's  Point ;  and  thence  to  the  east  end  of  Chaguaramus  Peninsula  it  isaboitl 
E.  N.  E.  Ij'j,  mile.  From  this  latter  point  to  another  point  at  the  west  side  of  Lynch'il 
Bay,  it  is  N.  55^  E.,  1,',  mile.  To  the  N.  \V.  of  the  east  point  of  the  peninsula, iicarlJ 
half  a  mile,  is  an  inlet,  or  bay,  called  the  Careenage,  an  excellent  harbor  for  uierchaBtl 
ships,  hut  too  slioal  for  men-of-war,  there  being  only  from  10  to  23  feet  water.  North-| 
eastsviird  from  this  bav  is  another,  with  2j  to  4  fa.homs  in  it. 

DIEliOS  ISLAN  DS.— To  the  S   and  S.  E.  of  Prince's  Point,  about  ono-thirdol'i 
mile,  lie  Diego's  Islands,  two  in  number,  of  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent  p;ich,aiiii| 
the  same  distance  asunder,  N.  E.  by  E.  j  E.,  and  S.  W.  by  W.  4  W.     There  isapKX 
passage  between  them  of  9  to  12  fathoms  water,  >'nd  also  between  them  and  Priuce'J 
Point,  of  20  to  25  fathoms. 

COL'  iRAS. — The  Coloras  ere  a  cluster  of  small  islands,  five  in  number,  occHpyind 
space  of  four-tenths  of  a  mile.     They  lie  IJ  mile  E.  j  S.  from  the  easternmost  of  Die  j 
go's  Isles,  and  1 J  mile  8.  E.  from  the  east  point  of  the  peninsula.     There  appears  tob 
a  passage  between  the  two  southernmost  and  the  others. 


»%' 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


435 


Port 
d'Espagne. 


Light. 
Tide. 


PORT  D'ESPAGNfi. — From  the  point  on  the  west  side  of  Lynch'a  Bay,  the  coast, 
with  some  inflections,  trends  E.  S.  E.,  a  distance  of  53  miles,  to  Port  d'Espagne,  and 
tiiere  turns  about  S.  S.  E.  1^  mile  to  the  River  Caroni,  which  in  the  rainy  sea.4on  pours 
out  a  furious  stream.  The  water  in  the  road  of  Port  d'Espagne  is  very  shallow,  there 
being  only  3J  fathoms  at  a  mile  and  a  half  off.  It  is  extremely  foul  and  muddy  there, 
and  nearer  to  the  shore  it  is  proportionably  more  so.  At  about  li  mile  off  from  the 
shore,  with  the  round  white  tower  on  a  hill  near  the  town  bearing  N.  E.  by  E.,  there 
are  Si  fathoms,  very  soft  mud,  but  ships  may  anchor  any  where.  The  ship  will  turn  the 
soft  mud  up  long  before  she  gets  into  a  good  anchoring  place,  which  should  be  in  about 
3  feet  more  water  than  she  draws.     The  water  is  always  perfectly  smooth. 

LioHT. — On  the  Jetty  Port  d'Kspagne,  there  is  a  square  tower,  51  feet  above  high 
water,  contiiining  a  fixed  light,  which  can  be  seen  5  miles. 

The  tide  flows  here,  on  full  and  change  days  of  the  moon,  at  half  past  5  o'clock  :  the 
flood  comes  from  the  west,  and  the  ebb  from  the  S.  E. ;  and  the  water  is  slack  about  li 
hour,  both  at  high  and  low  water.  The  course  of  the  tides,  both  ebb  an'l  flood,  being 
each  checked  by  an  opposing  shore  in  this  corner  where  the  town  is  situated,  they  natu- 
rally must  deposite  there  much  of  the  mud  which  they  carry  along  with  them  :  hence 
the  quiintity  of  mud  in  the  anchorage. 

The  coast  of  the  main  land  is  low  and  swampy,  opened  by  a  great  number  of  rivers 
and  channels  falling  into  the  Gulf;  of  these  the  deepest  and  most  ft-equented,  is  the 
Guarapiche,  by  which  a  trade  is  carried  on  with  the  interior  of  Cumaua :  it  is  navigable 
foi  schooners  and  large  balaxues. 

Description  of  the  Islands  which  form  the  Bocaa. 

The  northern  passages  into  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  between  the  N.  W.  end  of  Trinidad, 
three  islands  lying  off  it,  and  the  coast  of  Paria,  were  by  Columbus  called  Bocas  de  Bra- 
m,  from  the  velocity  of  the  current  which  he  found  setting  through  them.  This,  how- 
ever, is  very  various  in  its  strength,  though  constant  in  its  direction  to  the  northward. 

MON.\  ISLAND. — The  throe  islands  which  form  the  passage  are  Mona,  or  Ape's  Monalsland. 
Ishind,  Huevo,  or  Egg  Island,  and  Chacha-Chacare.  The  first  is  about  2J  miles  in  length 
from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  and  li  mile  in  breadth ;  it  consists  of  two  lofty  hills,  from  which 
the  liuul  on  the  south  side  shelves  down  to  the  sea,  in  ridges  singularly  sharp  :  the  high- 
est of  these  hills,  at  the  north  part,  is  1013  feel  above  the  surface  of  the  sea.  On  the 
east  side  of  the  island  are  two  bays;  the  noi'thernmost  named  Morris'  Bay,  the  other 
Dehert's,  besides  some  coves ;  to  the  westward  of  these,  on  the  south  side,  are  some 
others.  The  N.  E.  point  of  this  island  bears  about  S.  W.  by  W.,  distant  half  a  mile 
from  Mona  Point,  and  the  S.  E.  point  W.  N.  W.  J  W.  1330  yards  from  Taitron's  Point ; 
but  in  the  narrowest  part,  the  channel  is  not  quite  one-third  of  a  mile  wide.  This  is 
called  Boca  Mona;  it  lios  nearly  north  and  south, and  has  from  23  to  47  fathoms  water  in 
it.  A  cluster  of  rocks  lies  about  300  yards  E.  N.  E.,  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  Monalsl- 
and; these  have  8  fathoms  close  to  them. 

HUEVO.  or  EGG  ISLAND,  is  the  next :  this  is  of  a  semi-circular  shape,  forming  a 
bay  on  its  S.  W.  side.  Its  N.  E.  point,  near  to  which  lies  the  Umbrella  Rock,  is  distant 
one  and  one-tenth  mile  W.  by  S.  from  the  N.  W.  part  of  Mona  Island,  and  thence  ex- 
tends U  "I'le  about  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  Its  south  point  lies  one  mile  W.  N.  W.  |  W. 
from  the  S.  W.  point  of  Mona.  Huevo,  near  its  N.  E.  point,  is  655  feet  above  the  sur- 
face of  the  sea.  The  channel  between  it  and  Mona  is  called  Boca  Huevo,  or  more  com- 
monly the  Umbrella  Passiigo,  from  the  rock  of  that  name :  the  course  through  is  about 
S,  W.  by  S.  and  N.  E.  by  N. ;  and  its  narrowest  part,  which  is  near  the  S.  W.  entrance, 
is  about  three-quai  tors  of  a  mile  wide,  with  a  depth  of  more  than  100  fathoms. 

UHACHA  CHACARK  is  the  westernmost  of  the  three  islands;  Point  St.  Jago,  the 
east  point  of  this  ishind,  lios  three-quarters  of  a  mile  nearly  W.  S.  VV.  from  the  south 
point  of  Huevo;  and  thence  extends  about  N.  W.  i  N.  one  and  four-fifths  mile  to  the 
north  point,  .oar  which  is  an  islet;  and  thence  turns  about  S.  by  W.  i  W.,  nearly  the 
same  distance,  'j  S.  W.  point.  From  the  latter  to  Point  Antoine,  the  S.  E.  point, 
tiie  coast  runs  about  E.  4  N.  li  mile  ;  and  from  this  point  to  that  of  St.  Jago,  N.  E.  by  E. 
about  three-quarters  of  n  mile.  Between  the  latter  points  a  deep  bay  is  formed  north- 
westward, with  siife  anchorage,  but  difficult  to  get  in  or  out  of,  except  by  warping.  At 
the  further  end  of  this  bay  of  Chacha-Chacare,  which  nearly  divides  the  island  into  two 
parts,  is  a  low  sandy  neck  or  isthmus.  To  the  southward  of  this  beach,  and  on  the  west 
side  of  the  island,  are  some  scattered  rocks,  at  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore  ;  and 
there  is  a  small  rock,  with  2i  fathoms  on  it,  lying  one-third  of  a  mile  west  from  the  S.  W. 
point  of  the  island,  and  S.  25i°  W.  from  its  N.  W.  extremity.  Tue  whole  of  the  high 
land  of  the  peninsula  of  Chnguaramus  open  to  the  southward  of  the  rock  at  the  S.  W. 
point  of  (Miacha-Chttcore.  cleais  it  on  the  south  side  :  the  angular  altitude  of  the  high  hill 
on  that  point,  from  the  top  to  the  sea,  at  its  foot,  taken  in  a  boat  anchored  on  the  rock,  is 
7°  50'.    This  hill  is  426  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  sea ;  the  north  part  of  the  island 


Huevo,  or 
Egg  Island. 


Chacha-Cha- 
care. 


PPWPBBT 


436 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


High  water,    has  an  elevation  of  810  feet.    Here  it  is  high  water,  on  full  and  change  days  of  the  moo 
at  30  iniuutes  after  2  o'clock.  "' 

There  iu  another  rock  lying  off  the  S.  W.  point  of  Chaca-Chacare,  with  only  g  f- 
water  on  the  shoalest  part  of  it,  at  low  water,  with  very  deep  water  all  round ;  it  j^  ^l 
40  yards  in  rircuniference.     This  rock  was  discovered  on  the  morning  of  the  %\\,  \ 
June,  1809,  by  Ciiptain  Sughree,  of  thf  Ship  Samuel,  of  London,  drawing  17  fgy,"! 
water,  who  struck  and  remained  fust  upon  it  for  several  hours.     While  this  ship  w 
aground  two  others  passed,  one  on  each  sida  without  touching,  although  not  at26fathoii 
distant.    The  bearings  by  compass  from  the  bhip  were,  Chacha-Chacure,  S.  VV.  pujnt  l< 
N.  E.,  El  Plata,  or  Goose  Island,  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.;  and  the  S.  E,  eudof  Culnun,, 
Paria,  W.  by  S.  '"'' 

The  channel  formed  by  Chacha-Chacare  and  Huevo,  is  called  Boca  Navios,  or  Shi 
Passage  ;  it  lies  S.  E.  by  S.  and  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  is,  at  the  narrowest  jwint,  the  S.  W** 
entrance,  two-thirds  of  a  mile  wide.     To  tlie  westward  of  this  island  is  Boca  Graude  ni' 
great  extent,  and  almost  free  from  danger. 

Description  of  the  Bocas. 

The  great  depth  of  water  in  the  three  largest  of  the  Bocas,  namely,  Nuevo,  I^^yj. 
and  Boca  Grande,  prevents  anchoring  in  any  part  of  them,  except  in  case  of  absolute  n 
cessity,  very  close  to  the  shore.     A  ship  may  anchor  any  where  in  Boca  Monu,  but  iu3o 
or  40  fatlioms,  in  mid  channel.     The  beds  of  these  channels  are  much  deeper  thnn  'h 
bottom  either  wilhin  or  without  them  ;  us  if  they  had  been  thus  worn  awuy  by  tliRcun 
otunt  operation  of  tlie  Northern  Current,  which  runs  through  them.     In  autumn  jtij  r. 
pidity  at  times  is  so  great,  that  ships  are  frequently  driven  out  again,  after  huving  entered 
one  of  the  pussuges  with  a  good  breeze  ;  duiing  the  rest  of  the  year  its  rate  may  cum. 
monly  be  estimated  to  be  about  12  or  3  knots  ;  but  close  to  the  S.  W.  point  of  Clmcbii-Cha. 
care,  it  runs  much  stronger.     Except  in  Autunm,  the  tide  of  flood,  which  sets  tliruu^h 
them  into  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  has  a  considerable  power  towards  the  top  of  high  water  m 
checking  this  current;  and  at  spring  tides,  the  water  is  frequently  perfectly  slack  iu  Boca 
Monu  for  iin  hour;  and  very  ueaily  so  in  Boca  Huevo. 
Boca  Mona.        Boca  Muna. — In  the  Boca  Monu,  (the  eastern  mouth,)  at  ebb  tide,  the  currtntruns 
outwurd  with  a  velocity  of  li  or  2  miles  nn  hour,  and  s  >  newhat  less  at  ordinurytlwij' 
so  that,  with  the  exception  of  about  an  hour  near  the  top  of  a  spring  flood,  it  ulwaysruiij 
outwurd.     Eor  this  rouson,  und  becuuse  it  is  subject  to  calms  and  eddy  winds,  occusioned 
by  the  great  elovutio-i  of  the  coast,  from  being  very  narrow,  (not  exceeding  one-third  of 
a  mile  in  width.)  long  and  winding,  and  consequently  full  of  eddies,  it  should  uotbb  at- 
tempted by  a  ship  except  in  a  case  of  necessity,  although  it  is  the  windwurd  one;  but 
High  water,    either  of  the  others  sliould  be  preferred.     It  is  high  water  here,  on  full  and  change  dajj 
of  the  moon,  at  50  minutes  after  3  o'clock. 

A  ship  muy  anchor  any  where  in  the  south  part  of  this  passage,  and  all  along  the  soutli 
side  of  Mona.     Dehert's  Bay  atibrds  excellent  anchorage,  and  there  is  deep  water  tiir  in. 
to  it ;  a  ship  anchored  off  the  mouth  of  it  in  15  fathoms,  on  cluy,  with  the  south  pointbeat- 
ing  S.  W.  by  S.,  and  found  the  ground  so  tough  tliat  it  was  with  great  difticulty  tiieaii- 
choi'  was  weighed. 
Boca  Huevo.       BOCA    HUEVO,  EOG  PASSAGE,  (or,  as  it  is  now  more  commonly  called,  the 
Egg  Fas-        Purusol,  or  Umbrellu  Passage,)  is  safe  to  attempt  to  run  in  at,  if  the  wind  banostoilie 
sage.  N.  E.,  us  it  will  then,  probably,  blow  quite  through  the  passage;  but  ut  any  rate,  if  the 

ship  cunnot  stem  the  current,  there  is  ample  room  to  back  and  till  her  out  agiiiii.   The 
shores  nru  bold,  but  care  nmst  be  taken  to  avoid  u  rock  at  the  S.  W.  point  of  iMuiia:  al- 
though it  is  not  above  a  ship's  length  from  the   point,  the  eddy  of  the  flood  tide  ill  the 
springs  sets  directly  over  it.     At  ebb  tide  the  current  sets  through  with  rather  less  velo- 
city in  the  former;  and  during  the  last  two  hours  of  flood,  it  is  nearly  slack  water: 
on  this  account,  it  being  the  shortest,  being  to  the  windward  of  the  other  two,  undbeio; 
entirely  clean,  it  is  considered  the  best  for  entering  the  Gulf.     It  is  advisable  to  keep 
closer  to  the  Island  of  iiuevas  than  to  that  of  Mona,  to  avoid  being  becalmed  by  thebrt 
land  of  iMona,  and  also  because  the  current  inclines  to  the  N.  E. 
Boea  Navios,       BOCA  NA  V10.S,  or  SHIP  PASSAGE,  may  bo  safely  entered,  if,  when  ashiphaob 
or  Ship  Pas-  round  the  N.  W.  end  of  Huevo  at  a  quarter  or  one-tliird  of  a  mile  distance,  she  can  lie 
tage.  up  high  enough  to  bring  the  south  end  of  the  island  on  her  starboard  bow,  so  us  tu  bate 

the  curieiit  under  her  loo  ;  otherwise  it  will  be  improper  to  attempt  it,  as  the  current 
does  not  run  tairly  out,  but  rather  inclines  down  on,  Chacha-Chacare.  With  a  llowiii: 
tide,  it  runs  with  a  velocity  of  li  mile  per  hour;  but,  at  the  ebb,  frequently  at  the  rate 
High  water,  of  3^  or  4  mdes.  It  is  high  water,  on  full  and  change  days  of  the  moon,  at  39  minutes  after 
3  o'clock.  Although  the  entrance  by  this  channel  is  practicable  only  under  the  ubuve  cir- 
cumstances, with  a  flood  tide  ;  yet,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  far  superior  to  tiie  Bocailueic 
for  getting  out  of  the  Gulf;  but,  it  is  necessary,  iu  so  doing,  to  pay  attention  totbesetof 
the  current,  us  we  have  just  mentioned,  and  also  to  the  following  : — 


■WW^" 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 
June  5,  1804,  at  7  t*.  M.,  His  Majesty's  ship  Ulysses  weighed  from  Chnguflramua 


487 


BnV  but,  falling  calm,  it  was  10  o'clock  on  the  following  morning  before  she  reached  the 
•nuth  P"'"*"  °^  Huevo,  with  an  intention  of  going  through  Boca  Navios.  Here  was  found 
ttch  a  strong  current  fitting  round  that  point  to  the  E.  S.  E.,  that,  being  unable  to  stem 
ishe  Wrts  lot  drive  out  through  the  Umbrella  Passage,  which  took  up  two  hours  to  per- 
Lm  owing  to  a  number  of  eddies  and  opposite  currents,  formed  by  the  tide  of  flood 

.(jiJginto  the  Gulf,  and  contending  against  the  usual  stream  setting  outward.  It  was 
\\ah  water  in  the  Bucas  that  day  at  about  half  past  12  o'clock,  being  three  diiys  before 
ihe  new  moon. 

BOCA  GRANDE. — In  this  channel,  at  ebb  tide,  the  current  runs  with  less  velocity  BocaOrande. 
thiin  tlirough  either  of  the  others,  and  at  flood  there  is  scarcely  any.     It  is  also  very  clean, 
ffitli  the  exception  of  the  sunken  rocks  lying  off"  the  S.  W.  point  of  Chacha-Chacare,  and 

fsiitficient  breadth  to  tack  at  pleasure  ;  but,  being  the  leewardmost,  it  is  only  resorted 
to  in  case  of  having  failed  to  effect  a  passoge  by  either  of  the  preceding. 

Eemarks  on  the  Currents  on  the  Coasts  of  Trinidad  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Paria. 

CURRENTS    IN  THE  VICINITY  OF  TRINIDAD.— We  have  already  stated    Currents  in 
that  the  western  Equinoctial,  or  Tropical  current,  occasioned  by  the  trade  wind,  being    the  vicinitij 
confined  by  the  trending  of  the  Coast  of  South  America,  is  thrown  in  a  collected  force   of  Trinidad. 
upon  Trinidad,  and  runs  there  with  great  strength  ;  we  have  now  further  to  observe, that 
tha  force  of  this  current  is  still  further  'ncreased  along  its  shores  by  the  obstruction  which 
thoisiiind  itself  presents  agamst  the  free  course  of  the  stream  ;  and  by  the  waters  of  the 
Orinooco,  which  flowing  through  vast  plains,  subject  to  periodical  inundations,  and  dis- 
charging itself  into  the  ocean  near  this  island,  greatly  increased  the  current  in  its  vicinity, 
naiticuiarly  about  the  months  of  August  and  September,  when  that  river  is  at  its  greatest 
heiaht.    The  River  Amazon,  also,  collecting  the  waters  of  almost  half  the  southern  con- 
tinent, may,  perhaps,  though  at  the  remote  distance  of  280  leagues,  contribute  somewhat 
10  its  strength. 

These  currents  vary  much  in  their  velocity  at  different  times,  without  any  apparent 
cause.  It  is  said  they  run  strongest  in  the  declining  quarters  of  the  moon ;  but,  of  this  no 
s'ltijfnctorv  pi'oof  has  hitherto  been  obtained.  Adapting  itself  to  the  coast,  the  current 
runs  to  the  northward,  along  the  east  side  of  Triuidiid.  and  takes  a  western  direction  be- 
tween the  Island  Tobago  and  Point  Galero,  round  which  it  runs  with  such  accumulated 
sirenith,  that  it  is  scarcely  possible  for  a  square-rigged  vesst^l  to  beat  against  it,  round  that 
point!  although  there  are  instances  of  its  having  been  effected. 

Piissini'  Point  Galore,  it  runs  along  the  North  Cunst  close  to  the  shore,  for  a  few  leagues, 
asfiir  as  Rio  Grande;  but  there  it  often  quits  the  shore,  and  takes  a  W.  N.  W.  direction, 
jncreRsin"  its  distance  from  the  land  till  it  gets  to  the  northward  of  the  Bocas,  where  it 
seldom  prevails  within  5  or  6  leagues,  being  repolled  by  the  current  which  runs  out  of 
these  passages  :  there  the  two  streams  blend  and  run  to  the  westward. 

Along  the  South  Coast  it  always  runs  to  the  wostwar  1,  seldom  less  than  IJ  or 2  knots, 
near  Point  Galeota,  but  often  more ;  and  as  the  opposite  shore  of  South  America  con- 
tracts the  channel  towards  Point  Icaque,  or  Icacos.  its  velocity  is  much  accelerated  there, 
anilmiiy  he  estimated  generally  at  .3  knots,  but  it  frequently  runs  still  stronger. 

file  channel  between  the  Coast  of  America  and  the  S.  \V.  point  of  Trinilad.  is  called 
the  Serpent's  Mouth,  through  which  the  current  enters  the  Gulf  of  Paria,  dispersing  it- 
self over  it.  Near  the  shore  of  the  Gulf,  it  is  subject  to  the  influence  of  the  tides  ;  but, 
in  the  middle,  it  always  runs  to  the  northward  towards  the  Bocas ;  where  its  channel 
beiti"  again  contracted,  its  velocity  is  proportionally  increased.  Having  passed  these 
striiifs,  the  body  of  this  water  preserves  its  northerly  direction  for  5  or  6  leagues,  before 
it  fails  into  the  common  course  of  the  stream  of  the  ocean,  which  is  there  W.  N.  W. 
Cut  it  is  to  bo  observed,  that  so  soon  as  it  has  passed  the  Boca-,  a  considerable  part  di- 
I  ver^estothe  K.  N.  K.,and  either  runs  with  some  rapidity  to  the  windwanl,  or  so  thorough- 
Iv  destroys  the  effect  of  tlie  western  ciirreor,  that  a  ship  will  seldom  fail  of  working  up, 
at  least  to  Point  Chuparn,  with  ease,  by  keeping  within  a  moderate  distance  of  the  shore. 
This  easterly  current  frequently  exteuids  to  a  considoralilo  distance  further  iilong  the 
North  Coast,  as  was  experienced  in  the  month  of  June,  1804,  when  His  Majesty's  ship 
Ulysses  worked  up  to  Rio  Grande  from  Huevo,  in  25  hours,  although  she  never  went 
more  than  ^  knots. 

Thiit  part  of  the  stream  which  goes  out  of  the  Boca  Grande  on  tho  west  side,  turns 
t  round  tho  N.  E.  point  of  Paria,  and  runs  down  that  coast  with  such  velocity,  that  if  a 
ship  bound  to  Trinidad  should  fall  in  with  the  land  to  leeward  of  this  point,  though  ever 
so  little,  she  must  immediately  stand  to  the  northward  agaiti,  at  least  so  far  as  13"  of  lat., 
t  out  of  the  great  force  of  the  current,  and  work  uj)  to  G'-onada  before  she  again  attempts 
'  the  Bocas.     Even  then,  if  she  cannot  lie  S.  K.  by  S.  at  least,  her  reaching  thein  will  be 
I  very  doubtful ;  and  her  best  mode  of  proceeding  will  be  to  go  through  the  passage  be- 
tween Kick  'em  Jeuny  and  Carriacou,  in  order  to  weather  Grenada,  before  she  gets  into 


•'^mi^^^^m 


■«iap<^«pp*iF 


438  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

the  strong  lee  current  that  prevails  between  that  island  and  Trinidad.  This  currunt  ren- 
ders it  very  difficult  for  ships  to  fetch  Point  Saline,  in  Ureniida,  from  the  nocna;  tliev 
generally  only  reach  about  4  or  5  leagues  to  leeward  of  (hat  isluud;  hence  the  necesaitv 
of  working  to  windward  on  the  North  Coast  of  Trinidad.  ^ 

Practical  Direclionsfor  making  the  Island  of  Trinidad,  and  for  entering  the  Gulf 

of  Paria. 

[From  the  Dcrrotero  do  las  Antillas.] 

It  has  been  already  observed,  that  from  July  to  November  is  called  the  rainy  season  In 
this  country,  in  which  the  general  trade  wind  is  very  light,  and  veering  to  K.  S.  E.  Hiid 
S.  E. ;  and,  that  in  the  other  months,  it  blows  fresh  from  N.  E.,  or  E.  N.  E.;  this  cir- 
cumstance, and  the  two  channels  by  which  the  Gulf  of  Paria  may  be  ontertnl,  occiisjons 
the  preference  to  be  given  to  the  south  entrance  during  the  rains,  and  to  the  other  (Imjim 
the  dry  season.  It  is,  therefore,  obvious  that  Trinidad  should  be  approiiclu-d  wiih  (Jm,. 
regard  to  the  season  :  from  Decemberto  June  the  object  is  to  make  it  about  Point  Galere 
and  from  July  to  December,  about  Point  Galeota.  These  two  points  being  the  N.  E. 
and  S.  E.  extremities  of  the  island,  cannot  fail  of  being  known.  A  ship  coming  frum  ihg 
eastward,  and  making  the  body  of  the  island,  will  see  the  mountain  of  Lebraiiciie  iiliend 
of  her,  and  a  flat  low  shore  extending  from  ihence  about  4  leagues  to  the  norlliwind 
where  it  is  bounded  by  the  northern  range  of  high  mountains.  Tu  the  soutliwiird  of  Le- 
branche  will  be  seen  another,  and  more  extensive  low  shore,  at  the  extremity  uf  ^iiich 
are  the  hills  of  Guayn-guayare.  The  range  of  high  mountains  which  extends  tilonj;  th^ 
northern  coast,  may  be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  at  the  distance  of  II  leagues,  but  Point 
Galere  cannot  be  distinguished  at  more  than  3  leagues,  from  being  low. 

The  soundings  oft"  the  eastern  coast  of  the  island,  to  the  distance  of  17  leagues,  furnish 
a  safe  method  of  rectifying  the  place  of  a  ship  arriving  from  the  eastward,  and  under rir- 
cumstances  of  night,  or  cloudy  weather,  will  save  much  time  ;  for  being  in  ihepiirHJlHof 
the  island,  it  is  necessary  to  try  for  soundin;^s,  which  moy  be  done  without  nioredilnyof 
inconvenience  than  that  •'  trying  at  about  every  20  miles,  when  the  ship  is  suiipoaed  to 
be  nearing  the  lunc.  T.  y  depth  of  water  and  latitude  will  give  the  situation  of  the  ^liip 
with  tolerable  precision.  Knowing  this,  no  more  is  requisite  than  to  steer  for  the  P(jiii|j 
Galere  or  Galeota,  according  to  the  season  of  the  year,  for  entering  tlie  Gulf  either  by  iho 
north  or  south  passage.  It  is  necessary,  however,  to  bo  cautious  of  the  sunken  rock  that 
lies  about  7  leagues  S.  E.  3  S.  from  Point  Galere.  But,  as  it  frequently  happens  liimi 
or  3  days  eliipso  without  obtaining  a  meridian  altitude,  it  is  very  pobfible  thnt  tlie  inarincr 
supposing  h  mself  to  be  in  the  parallel  of  Trinidad,  miiy  oclually  be  in  that  of  Tobiigo, 
or  even  of  Grenada,  as  the  current  sets  with  such  violence  to  the  N.  VV.:  for  this  rpiison 
no  opportunity  of  observing  the  latitude  either  by  the  moon,  a  star,  or  by  altitud«9ot'tlie 
sun,  before  and  after  he  hus  passed  the  meridian,  should  be  neglected.  It  is  al^^o  ndvis- 
able  to  make  the  land  rutlior  to  the  south  than  to  the  north  of  either  of  the  \mn\},  as 
the  currents  will  always  favor  working  to  the  northward.  The  facility  is  still  greater  in 
times  of  the  N.  E.  winds  for  gelling  up  from  Point  Galeota  to  Point  G.ilere.  The  pas- 
^  sage  may  also  be  made  from  the  liitter  to  the  former,  but  not  with  so  nnich  eiise.    So 

soon  as  one  of  the  points  or  capes  has  been  made  out  distinctly,  the  route  to  the  niuutlis 
of  the  Gulf  is  as  follotvs: 

From  Point  Galere  a  ship  may  run  along  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  two  railes,  wiiii 
an  understanding  of  its  being  quite  clean,  as  before  described. 

Point  Corozal  may  be  upi)roiichcd  to  half  a  mile.  It  will  then  be  better  to  close  more 
upon  the  land,  to  reach  the  mouths  with  greater  facility. 

Directions  for  the  Bocas. 

From  the  description  already  given  of  the  ishmds  which  form  the  Bocns,  and  nlsoot 
the  Bocas,  it  is  evident  thot  the  Boca  Huevo,  or  Umbrella  Passage,  shonld  he  chuspii 
for  entering  the  Gulf;  and,  that  the  best  time  is  with  a  (lowing  tide,  and  with  n  wind  that 
will  ensure  the  ready  working  of  the  ship  ;  but.  if  there  be  a  four  knot  breeze,  tlieruij 
no  necessity  to  wait  for  the  tide.  At  night,  if  th(!  weather  bo  clear,  there  is  no  inconve- 
nience in  entering  the  Huevos  Channel,  as  the  only  risk  is  of  getting  too  close  tuonoof 
the  little  islets,  and  which  is  almost  impossible  to  hajipen  ;  but,  if  calms,  scant  winds. 
want  of  tide,  darkness,  or  excess  of  caution,  should  determine  the  mariner  to  wait  tora 
more  favorable  opportunity,  he  moy  anchor  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  const,  in 
18  or  20  fathoms,  except  the  wind  be  N.  E.,  which  raises  a  heavy  sea;  in  such  a  case 
he  will  do  better  by  keeping  under  sail,  and  making  short  tacks  on  and  olf  shore.  Aimi! 
the  coast  from  Point  Toco  to  Point  Chupara,  the  bottom  is  soft  nmd  ;  on  the  meridian 
of  the  latter  point  it  is  coarse  sand  and  fine  eravel :  and  to  the  west  of  it,  su  far  as  the 
mouths,  it  is  mud  of  a  greenish  color.  These  differences  in  the  bottom  will  point  out 
witli  sufficient  accuracy  what  part  of  the  coast  the  ship  is  on. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

WThen  a  ship  hns  passed  through  either  of  the  chnnnels,  she  should  be  kept  close  to 
lliowind,  on  the  larboard  tack,  in  order  to  got  away  from  the  mouths,  and  near  the  c-ist 
gf  Triniil)"^  i  nnd  she  should,  in  general,  be  continued  on  this  tack  bo  long  as  the  flo  d 
liile  ia9t8<  that  she  may  go  on  the  starboard  tack  so  soon  as  the  ebb  begins,  with  a  cei  • 
I  taintv  of  reaching  the  anchorage,  or  at  least  within  a  very  little  of  it.  It  may  probably 
appeiir  to  some  persona,  more  eligible  to  make  several  tacks  after  entering  the  Gulf,  and 
'  fticuliiriy  so  if  the  larboard  tack  is  not  the  most  advantageous ;  but  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  the  strongest  currents  are  in  the  narrows ;  and,  therefore,  from  remaining 
near  the  mouths,  in  consequence  of  having  made  several  tacks,  it  would  not  be  extrnor- 
diimry  if  the  ebb  tide  should  force  them  tlirough  the  channel  again,  or  compel  them  to 
anrlioi'to  prevent  it ;  and  oven  if  neither  of  these  circumstances  should  take  place,  the 
pbl,  will  be  found  unfavorable  for  gaining  the  Port  d'Espagne.  On  the  other  hand,  by 
Ijiiving  stood  on  the  larboard  tack  within  the  Gulf,  if  necessary,  as  far  as  the  parallel  of 
Mount  Nnparima,  the  ebb  tide  will  then  very  favorably  assist  the  ship  on  the  starboard  tack, 
nerhnps,  so  much  as  to  reach  the  anchorage,  or  it  will  bo  gained  by  another  short  board. 
If  culms  or  very  light  winds  prevent  gaining  ground  by  keeping  under  sail,  the  kedge 
anchor  may  be  let  go  ;  it  will  be  sufficient  to  hold  against  the  strength  of  the  tide,  and 
the  use  of  large  anchors  should  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible  ;  because,  as  they  bury 
ihemselves  so  deep  in  the  soft  mud,  there  is  considerable  trouble  in  weighing  them.  In 
Port  d'Espagne  ships  may  anchor  in  the  S.  W.  part,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  according  to  the 
ship's  draft:  moor  N.  W.  nnd  S.  E. 

At  about  4  miles  within  the  Bocas,  soundings  may  be  got  with  the  hand  line,  in  20 
fathoms;  from  whence,  in  standing  southward,  the  water  soon  shoals  to  14,  13,  and  12 
fathoms,  which  depths  will  continue  several  miles;  but  the  soundings  are  not  quite  regu- 
lar, tliough  nearly  so,  there  being  some  einull  banks  with  6  or  7  fathoms  on  them,  5  or  6 
leagues  from  the  shore.  When  about  6  or  7  miles  from  Point  Brea,  the  depths  will  in- 
crease suddenly  to  17  and  18  fathoms  :  the  latter  will  continue  until  about  2i  miles  from 
Ibe  shore  :  the  water  then  shoals  gradually  to  3  fathoms,  about  the  length  of  a  cable  and 
aliaiffiom  the  beach.  The  best  anchorage  off  this  part  of  the  island  is  with  the  town  of 
Brea,  which  consists  of  5  or  6  old  houses  near  the  beach,  bearing  about  south,  or  S.  by  E., 
one  mile  ott'lhe  shore,  in  6  or  7  fathoms. 

Running  down  the  coast  to  the  southward  from  Point  d'Espagne,  observe  that  about  8 
miles  from  it,  and  off  a  point  of  mangroves,  there  are  only  24  fathoms,  at  li  mile  from 
the  shore.  To  the  north-westward  from  Napariitia  Hill  about  7  miles,  there  are  24  fath- 
oms, 2  miles  distant  from  the  land,  nnd  this  bank  is  steep,  with  10  fathoms  not  far  without 
it,  Gu  into  no  less  than  4i  fathoms  between  Point  Brea  nnd  Point  Cedro ;  from  the  latter 
toPoitit  los  GalloB,  the  shore  is  flat,  and  a  ship  may  bo  guided  by  the  lead. 

The  following  remarks  on  Boca  Huevo  were  made  in  September,  182G,  by  Captain 
Samuel  Chambers,  of  his  Majesty's  ship  Druid.  He  says — "  As  had  been  recommended, 
we  tried  the  second  passage  two  different  evenings,  approaching  it  with  a  fine  breeze ; 
but  when  almost  through,  botli  times,  the  current  forced  her  out ;  nnd  the  second  night, 
bad  not  the  boats  been  ready  down,  and  she  n  quick  ship,  she  must  have  gone  on  shore. 
According  to  calculation,  this  was  at  flood  tide.  We  immediately  bore  up  for  the  great 
Bocas,  where  we  soon  got  through ;  therefore,  I  by  no  means  recommend  any  passage 
but  the  largo  one,  as  the  advantage  is  trifling  comparative  with  the  safety  of  your  ship. 
For,  when  through  either,  in  less  than  an  hour,  with  a  moderate  breeze,  you  come  in  13 
fathoms  water,  when  you  may  anchor." 

In  going  through  the  Great  Bocas,  be  careful  of  the  rock  that  lies  W.  S.  W.  from  the 
S.  W.  point  of  Chaca-Chacaro.  as  well  as  that  which  lies  one-third  of  a  mile  due  west 
from  it. 

Description  of  and  Directions  for  the  South  Channel, 

So  soon  as  the  ship  has  reached  Point  Gnleota,  she  should  be  kept  along  the  shore  of 
the  island  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  or  less  ;  at  the  distance  of  two  miles  she  will  be  in 
from  7  to  9  fathoms,  clear  of  all  risk;  and  although  it  may  be  perceived  that  the  water 
is  of  different  colors,  particularly  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Heriu  and  about  it,  there  is 
uo  reason  to  be  suspicious  of  shoals,  as  the  variety  of  colors  is  occasioned  by  the  cur- 
rent. On  clearing  jfoint  Quemnda,  she  may  near  the  shore  to  a  quarter  of. a  mile,  with- 
out the  least  risk,  to  gain  that  channel  which,  under  the  existing  circumstances,  maybe 
most  convenient. 

The  First  Channel  is  formed  by  Point  Icacos,  or  Icaque,  and  a  shoal  lying  to  the  west 
of  it,  distant  about  half  a  mile,  and  which  is  from  east  to  west  about  two  cables'  length, 
with  li  fathom,  rocky  bottom.  In  the  chnimel  there  are  9  fathoms  water.  Point  Ica- 
cos, as  before  said,  is  a  sandy  promontory,  advancing  into  the  sea  in  a  circular  form,  but 
so  steep,  that,  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  it,  there  are  7  or  8  fathoms.  The  current  in 
this  channel  sets  to  the  S.  W.  at  the  flood,  with  a  velocity  of  2i  miles  per  hour,  and  N. 
W.  with  the  ebb,  at  the  rate  of  3  and  3i  miles. 


439 


'7  •"""**<''wwi^mii^^' 


mmm 


■^^■VMIF 


440  BLUNT'S    AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

The  Second  Channel  is  formed  by  the  rocky  ■hoal  nnd  a  bank  of  rock  and  tn^y  < 
lying  to  ihe  N.  W.,  upon  which  there  are  4  fathoms.     This  point  bears  from  Point  U  ill 
S.  60°  W.,  distiint.T  miles,  and  from  Icncos  N.  73°  W.,  distant  2  miles.     The  niente"! 
extent  of  it  is  three-quarters  of  n  mile,  N.  W.  and  S.  E.     The  currents  in  ihig  ciinnn  i 
Bet  in  nearly  the  same  direction  as  in  the  preceding  one.     Its  breadth  is  about  n  mile 

The  Third  Channel  lies  l)etween  the  bank  last  mentioned  and  the  Islote  del  SoMnd 
(Soldier's  Islot.)  with  the  reefs  and  shoals  on  the  S.  and  S.  E.  of  it.  This  chnnnej  i' 
about  two  short  miles  from  east  to  west.  About  2i  cables  from  the  reef  off  the  eimt  nnr't 
of  Soldadu  there  are  6  fathoms  water,  in  mid-channel  8,  and  near  the  bank  5i.  At  flodi 
tide  the  current  sets  W.  by  S.,  with  the  velocity  of  .34  miles ;  and  with  the  ebb  N.  \V 
and  W.  N.  W.,  at  the  rate  of  4  and  4i  miles  per  hour. 

The  Fourth  Channel  is  formed  by  the  Soldado  with  the  reefs  and  shoals  on  the  south 
of  it  and  the  main  land.  The  breadth  of  it  is  about  4  miles.  The  currents  iilwnys  set 
to  the  N.  W.  nnd  W.  N.  W.,  with  a  velocity  of  4i  or  5  miles  per  hour,  in  nii(l-cli[,n„„| 
and  near  Soldado ;  but  at  half  a  mile  from  the  main  it  runs  only  from  li  to  2  miles. 

To  enter  the  First  Channel,  it  is  only  necessary  to  near  Point  Icacos  at  about  acnblo's 
length,  luffing  up  by  degrees  as  it  is  passed,  nnd  then  steering  north,  to  pass  ot  a  conve- 
nient  distance  from  the  Points  Corral  and  (xallos.  This  passage  can  never  bo  nttendoH 
with  difficulty,  either  by  day  or  night,  especially  at  ebb  tide,  as  the  current  will  keen  the 
ship  clear  of  the  shoal:  and  if  it  should  be  necessary  to  anchor,  there  will  be  no  riek  of 
getting  aground,  as  the  shoal  will  be  at  least  3  cables'  length  distant  from  the  ship. 

To  enter  the  Second  Channel,  it  will  be  necessary,  after  having  passed  Point  Qupnin- 
da,  and  approached  the  const  to  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  to  place  the  shi|)'s  head  towiirds  Sol- 
dado,  nnd  keep  her  so  until  Point  fJallos  comes  open  of  Point  Corral,  and  then  luff,  but 
without  goinj;  to  the  N.  N.  E.,  until  Point  Corral  bears  east ;  she  may  then  be  kept  nione 
the  coast  of  Trinidad. 

To  pass  through  the  Third  Channel,  the  ship's  head  ought  to  be  placed  lownrds  the 
Soldado,  in  the  same  manner  as  for  the  second,  and  kept  in  that  direction  until  Point  Ga|. 
ios  bears  N.  <>7°  E. ;  then  luff  up  to  N.  until  the  south  front  of  Point  Icncos  bears  S.  E, 
by  E.,  nnd  Point  Gnllos  N.  83"  E. ;  then  run  along  the  coast  of  the  island. 

To  pass  through  the  Fourth  Channel,  you  have  only  to  pass  nt  2  miles  S.  of  tho  Sol- 
dado, and  when  it  bears  N.  E.  luff  up  to  N.,  and  kee])  luffing  by  little  and  little  to  const 
along  the  Islaml  of  Trinidad.  Care  must  be  Taken  not  to  get  within  2  miles  of  the  Sol- 
dado, observing  that  the  current  will  set  the  ship  strongly  to  the  N.  W. 

Hence  it  resuKs,  thnt  at  any  time  a  ship  may  enter  Ihe  gulf  by  the  South  Channels, 
even  by  night,  if  not  very^dark  ;  that  the  First  Channel  is  the  best  not  only  bpciiuse  it  Is 
the  windward  one.  but  by  keeping  the  luff,  every  danger  will  be  avoided,  especially  with 
the  ebb  tide.  In  fact,  there  can  be  no  danger  whatever,  if  an  anchor  be  ready  to  let  go  in 
case  of  a  sudden  calm,  or  other  cause,  that  might  carry  the  ship  towards  the  shoiil.  in 
the  night  time  either  of  the  channels  can  be  more  easy  to  enter  than  the  first ;  i()r  as  the 
point  must  necessarily  be  passed  within  a  cable's  length,  every  im|)ediment  from  darkness 
will  be  avoided,  because  at  so  short  a  distance  it  can  be  very  distinctly  seen. 

But  however  easy  the  entrnnce  into  the  Gulf  by  these  channels  is,  if  any  circumstance, 
either  of  calm  or  want  of  daylight,  may  render  it  advisable  to  wait  some  time  befuie  at- 
tempting it.  the  ship  can  be  anchored  on  the  south  coast  of  Tritiidad  ;  for  if  kept  under 
way  and  tacking,  as  the  current  always  sets  inward,  it  will  be  very  difficult  to  maintain  a 
detei minute  |)osition. 

On  getling  through  the  channels  into  the  Gulf,  steer  for  the  west  coast  of  Trinidad, 
and  keep  along  it,  at -'i  or  3  miles  distant,  as  far  as  Hren  Point.  Port  d'Espiifrnnisnot 
above  Si  leagues  from  this  point,  and  steering  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  the  buildings  in  it  will  soon 
be  discovered.  If  this  course  cnnnot  be  made  good,  recourse  must  be  hud  to  tackinj; 
but  the  boards  must  not  be  stretched  within  4  miles  of  the  shore,  on  account  of  the  shoid 
that  lies  olfit ;  and  if  standing  into  the  Hay  of  Nnpnrima,  it  will  be  necessary  to  he  ciirc- 
ful  of  two  shoals,  one  west  of  the  mount,  distant  about  2i  miles,  and  the  other  8.  T")°\V, 
of  it,  distant  4  miles.  In  proceeding  from  Brea  Point  to  Port  d'Espagne,  the  depilis 
are  from  7  to  12  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  3  miles  from  the  point ;  then  14  fathoms  lor 
about  a  mile;  after  which,  18  or  li)  fathoms  for  nearly  10  miles;  and  then  a  gradual  de- 
crease to . 5  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  2iS  miles  S.  S.  W.  from  the  town. 

Good  fresh  water  may  be  obtained  from  two  small  rivers  in  the  bay,  about  a  mile  to 
the  southward  of  Point  Brea  ;  at  high  water  a  boat  may  land  close  to  it.  Wood  can  be 
procured  in  abundance  with  little  trouble,  as  the  trees  are  very  large,  and  close  to  the 
water  side. 

In  September,  1821,  his  Majesty's  ship  Forte,  Cnpt.  Sir  T.  J.  Cochrane,  passed  over 
a  bank  with  only  4  fathoms  water  on  it,  at  about  4  or  5  miles  northward  of  the  Soldiulo, 
and  the  same  distance  from  the  shore.  The  Captain  says,  "  I  felt  a  very  strcmg  smell  of 
tar,  or  pilch,  and  observed  some  of  the  former  floating  on  the  surface,  which  no  doubt, 
oozed  from  the  bank  below.     I  have  since  lea<-ned  it  is  composed  of  pitch,  and  that  there 


^mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

IfRipoton  it  with  only  3  fitthoms  water;  but boing  suddenly  called  from  the  station,  I 
1„k1  no  time  to  ascerUia  that  fact." 


441 


THE  COAST  OF  COLOMBIA,  FROIVI  THE  OIJLF  OF 
PARIA  TO  CARTIIAGENA.* 

IN  the  description  of  the  Island  of  Trinidad  and  the  DrnRon's  Mouth,  (Bocas  de  Dra- 
509,)  it  was  said  that  the  fourth,  or  Boca  Grande,  is  formod  by  the  Island  of  Chaca-Cha- 
care  niul  tlie  main  land.  The  most  projecting,  or  N.  E.  point  of  the  coast  forms  a  lofty 
steep  isleti  called  the  Morro.  This  lies  about  4  leagues  N.  78°  W.  from  Point  Mona,  in 
Trinidad.  From  the  Morro  the  coast  runs  westward,  with  a  little  inflection  to  the  south, 
for  the  dlHtance  of  1!)  miles,  to  the  Bay  of  Moxillones,  whence  it  trends  a  little  northward 
toCnpt'  Tres  Puntas,  (Three  Points,)  which  is  distant  from  the  Morro  50  miles,  due  west. 
The  whole  of  the  land  along  this  space  is  high  and  mountainous,  and  the  shore  perfectly 
clean,  bo  that  it  may  be  run  along  by  at  halt'  a  mile  distant.  At  the  distance  of  a  mile  there 
are  from  30  to  40  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of  muddy  sand. 

Cnpe  Tres  Puntas  is  the  most  northerly  cape  of  all  this  part  of  the  coast,  and  it  contin- 
ues to  be  equally  as  clean  and  deep  as  the  preceding  part  to  the  Bay  of  Unare,  a  distance 
of  two  miles. 

Ui,:  "e  Ua\  presents  a  good  anchorage,  sheltered  from  the  trade  wind.  To  enter  it,  it 
is  necessary  to  keep  about  a  mile  from  the  N.  E.  point,  which  is  fronted  by  a  rocky  shoal 
extending  h  .If  a  mile  out;  then  stand  in  and  anchor  in  5,  or  44  fathoms,  sandy  bottom, 
immediately  on  getting  round  within  the  point.  A  little  river  falls  into  this  bay,  and  on 
the  liill  to  the  east  of  it,  there  is  an  Indian  town  named  San  Juan  de  Unare.  The  S.  W. 
point  of  the  bay  sends  ofl'  a  reef,  with  several  islets  upon  it,  to  the  distance  of  half  a  mile. 
Fussing  outside  of  them,  and  at  about  two  cables'  length  from  the  most  northerly  one, 
will  clear  every  danger. 

From  Unare  Bay  the  coast  continues  to  run  west,  with  some  inflections  to  the  south, 
for  the  space  of  10  miles,  whence  it  turns  gradually  to  the  northward  of  west  for  9  miles 
farther,  to  Ciipe  Mala  Pascua,  between  wliich  and  Cape  Three  Points  all  the  shore  is 
clean,  and  may  be  coasted  at  a  mile's  distance,  in  8  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  'Pho  bearing 
and  distiiiice  from  Cape  Three  Points  to  that  of  Mala  Pascua,  are  S.  83i°  W.  20i 
miles. 

TESTIGOS  ISLANDS.— Nearly  N.  4  W.  from  this  cape,  at  the  distance  of  40 
miles,  lie  the  little  islands  called  the  Testigos.  'J  hese  consist  of  seven  principal  islands, 
besides  severnl  farallones,  or  high  rocks.  The  passages  between  the  islands  are  free  and 
clean,  luul  may  be  run  through  without  any  risk  whatever;  but  the  contrary  is  the  case 
with  those  between  the  rocks,  for  they  are  very  narrow.  All  those  islands  may  be  ap- 
proached to  the  distance  of  two  cables'  length,  or  even  nearer  if  necessary,  excepting 
that  which  lies  most  to  the  north-eastward.  This  is  surrounded  by  a  reef  extending  half 
a  mile  iVoni  it.  Between  the  islands  the  bottom  is  sandj',  and  will  admit  of  anchoring  in 
case  of  necessity.  The  principal  island,  called  Testigo  Grande,  (Great  Testigo,)  lies  N. 
W.  and  S.  E.,  about  2J  miles  in  length.  The  S.  W.  part  affords  good  anchorage,  shel- 
tereu  from  the  trade  wind,  with  a  depth  of  8  to  15  fathoms,  coarse  sand.  It  may  be  ap- 
proached either  by  the  N.  W.  or  S.  E.  side.  If  by  the  former,  it  must  be  on  the  outside 
of  the  roek  that  lies  off  it ;  if  by  the  latter,  the  passage  is  between  the  great  island  and 
another  lying  S.  W.  of  it.  The  channel  is  sufficiently  spacious;  for  at  the  narrowest 
part,  between  the  rock  and  the  east  side  of  the  little  island,  another  about  a  cable's 
length  from  the  S.  W.  coast  of  the  large  island,  it  is  half  a  mile  wide,  with  a  depth  of  84 
to  9  fathoms,  on  red  gravel. 

The  Testigos  may  be  seen  from  the  distance  of  5  leagues.  The  Great  Testigo,  called 
Goat  Island,  abounds  with  land  tortoises.  It  is  not  inhabited,  except  in  the  season,  by 
Uirtlers.  It  appears  a  bold  shore,  and  has  a  sandy  bench  near  its  north  end.  August  27, 
18'2fi,  his  Majesty's  ship  Valorous,  Captain  the  Earl  of  Huntington,  anchored  here  in  16 
fathoms,  on  sandy  bottom,  about  1 4  mile  from  shore,  the  north  end  of  the  island  bear- 
ing iN.  4  E.,  and  the  south  end  E.  S.  E.  4  E. ;  found  the  current  setting  west  north-west- 
ward, 14  mile  per  hour.     No  fresh  wnter  to  be  had. 

Between  these  islands  and  the  coast,  there  are  soundings.  About  5  miles  to  the  S.  S. 
E.  of  them  lies  a  large  bank  of  sand,  with  44  and  54  fathoms  water  on  it,  which  should 
be  avoided  by  large  ships. 

*  From  the  Oerrolcro  de  las  Islaa  Antillas,  &c.  &c.  &c.,  segundo  cdicion,  Madrid,  1820. 


Tesligos  Isl- 
ands. 


'^'J"  ! 


'»»w^. 


442  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

From  CHpo  Mnla  Pitacun  tho  nonitruns  nenrly  west  7  or  8  tnlloB  to  the  Morro  of  Pofj^ 
Santo.     Thin  Morro  is  joiiHid  lo  tli«  Hhoro  by  n  littlo  low  Bitmly  tongue ;  mid  very  tii>|i 
to  thu  Morro  on  the  wost,  lies  un  iaiot  rallud   Porto  Sitnto.     To  the  wt'stwiird  nf  th 
Siindy  tongue,  ia  iin  auchoriiKe  sheltered  tVoui  the  tnidewhid,  in  4^  to  Sj  t'litlidiiiH  \vut« 
Bund  iind  mud.     The  north  Hide  of  tlie  Morro  and  ieilaiid  may  he  approiichoil  to  :>  ciiliL,' 
lengtli  if  nereHcary.     To  gain  the  anchoriige,  imrnndiiitely  after  piiNHing  the  iMliind,  stij.. 
S.,  or  S.  by  W.,  and  anchor  in  4i  or  5i  fiilhoniM,  ho  soon  as  nlieltur  from  tlin  wind  jHdi, 
tained  ;  but  taking  care  not  to  get  to  tlio  eiiHtwiird  of  the  wentern  part  of  tlie  iHlct,  bocm,/ 
there  Ilea  a  bank  in  that  direction  with  otdy  .')  fathoma  water  on  it.     Southward  fruai  the 
Morro,  and  about  2  leaguea  inland,  Htandi*  the  mountain  of  Porto  Santo. 

From  thiH  l)ay  the  count  inclinea  to  W.  S.  W.  for  the  opace  of  .3}  miles,  and  him)(|<|(i|T 
a  hank  with  little  water  on  it,  about  half  a  mile,  and  extending  all  the  way  to  the  point  „f 
Hernan  Vasquez,  which  forms  another  little  buy,  with  an  anchorage  of  5i  to  (i^  fiiihoin, 
water,  sheltered  from  the  trade  wind.     From  u  river  that  disembogues  into  the  liny  of 
Hernan  Vaeque/.,  fresh  water  may  be  obtained;  and   to  the  southward  of  its  \vi's|«rn 
point,  off  which  ia  a  ainall  iHlet.  sfandH  the  town  of  Carupano  :  two  miles  west  of  Caru- 
pano  are  the  Point  and  Morro  of  Salinea,  or  of  .Farro,  with  an  islet  near  it,  wliicli,  witj, 
the  point  of  Elernan  Vasqiiez,  forma  tho  liny  of  Carupano,  including  that  ul  Ileiiiim 
VaHquez.     There  are  two  Hhoals  at  the  entrance   of  thiH  bay,  lying  a  little  to  the  imitii. 
ward  of  the  parallel  of  Point  Hernan  Vasquez.  and  westward  of  the  tneridiiin  of  Ciirimn. 
no:  of  thene  the  first  hna  2]  fathoms  on  it,  with  Hi  close  to,  and  lies  one  mile  W.  N.  \V 
from  the  point;  tlie  other  lies  11  mile  W-  §  N.  from  the  same  point,  and  l\  milo  N,  R 
from  Point  Salines:  this  has  Ij  fathom  on  it,  with  4|  fatiioms  close  to  it.     A  third  sIidhI 
of  31  fathoma,  with  5  ch>8e  to  it,  lies  within  the  bay,  at  three-ciuarters  of  a  mile  \V.  S, 
W.    i  \V.  from  Point  Hernan  Vascpiez,  and  tho  same  distance  north  from  the  town  df 
Carupano;  and  westward  of  the  town  there  is  a  bank,  with  little  water  on  it,  extiMnlinir 
from  the  shore  northward  nearly  tliree-quarters  of  u  mile,  and  one  mile  E.  N.  K,  tVuiQ 
the  islet  of  Point  Salines. 

Morro  Blan-       MURKO  BLANCO. — From  the  Point  and  Morro  of  SaHnes  to  Morro  Blanco, n  ilij. 

CO.  tance  of  3  miles,  nearly  west,  the  coast  is  clean,  with  several  patches  of  small  rucks  Ivinf 

close  to  the  shore  :  nearly  south  of  this  Morro,  and  about  three  leagues  inland,  thu  Mouq! 
tuin  of  San  Jose,  or  St.  Joseph,  may  bo  seen. 

From  Morro  Blanco  to  the  westward,  a  bank  runs  off,  with  little  water  on  it,  tlmt  does 
not  permit  the  coast  to  be  approached  nearer  than  -'  iniU's  :  on  this  part  of  it,  tlion' nrp, 
1st,  the  Point  and  Moro  of  Padilla,  known  by  an  islet  and  several  rocks  exteiulin};  to  a 
little  distance  from  it:  lid,  the  Point  and  Morro  of  Tiiqiiien  which  projects  furtlicr  riortli. 
ward  than  the  preceding,  and  ia  also  surrounded  by  several  islets:  3d,  the  Moiro  iit'  Lf- 
branche.  which  is  joined  to  the  nutin  by  a  low  sandy  and  swampy  tongue  of  lutnl ;  and 
4th,  the  Morro  de  la  Esmeralda,  or  Emerald  Morro,  which  is  an  islet  separiited  tVoiiulie 
coast  by  a  channel  of  nbout  half  a  cable's  length  wide.  Between  Lebranche  luid  tlie 
Emerald  Morro,  at  a  moderate  distance  from  the  land,  lie  the  (tarrapotas  Islets;  hut  I'ruin 
rocks  and  shoals  there  is  no  passage  between  them :  there  is,  however,  betwt'un  the  most 
southerly  islet  and  the  main  laii<l,  a  good  passage;  but  the  better  way,  always,  is  tu  souq 
the  outside  of  them,  especially  with  largo  ships.  From  Morro  Jilanco  to  the  iiointof 
Taquien,  the  distance  is  3i  milea,  N.  83i°  W.,  and  thence  to  the  Emerald  iMorio,  ;j 
miles,  S.  73'^  W.  Southward  of  the  latter,  and  about  13  niilea  inland,  will  bo  seen  Muuiit 
Redondo. 

Esmeralda  ESMP^UALDA  BAY. — To  the  westward  of  the  Emerald  Morro  there  iaforiiwla 

Bay.  large  bay,  but  it  is  obstructed  by  a  bank,  with  very  irregular  soundings,  wlili  li  cxtcmls 

from  the  middle  of  the  Morro  about  south  and  S.  W.,  nearly  a  mile,  then  .S.  W.  In  8,  to 
within  one-third  of  a  mile  of  the  coast,  whence  it  turns  to  the  eastward,  and  runspiiml- 
lei  to  the  shore,  at  about  that  distance  from  it.  In  the  bay  and  on  the  bank,  tiiiMiiire 
three  islets,  culled  the  Cascabels,  lying  nearly  east  and  west.  On  going  to  anchor  in  this 
bay,  ships  may  puss  as  close  as  may  be  necessary  to  tho  north  and  west  of  Eiiienilil  Inl- 
and, and  anchor  under  shelter  of  it,  at  the  distance  of 'J  cables'  length,  in  5i)  tu  G^  fiitlioiiij 
water,  sandy  mud. 

From  this  bay  the  coast  runs  west  about  5  miles  to  tlie  Point  ond  Morro  of  Mnnza- 
nilla,  all  the  way  bounded,  ut  the  distance  of  one-third  of  a  mile,  by  u  bank  wliicliex- 
tends  from  the  Emerald  Isle.  'J'he  Point  of  Mutiziinilla  forms  a  buy  ;  but  it  is  oljstnictid 
by  the  same  bank  of  which  we  have  spoken,  and  which  terminates  at  the  first  steep  puint, 
about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  to  leeward  of  the  bay;  it  not  only  impedes  entrance  into  the 
bay,  but  also  prevents  steering  to  the  southward  before  getting  to  the  westwanl  of  the 
said  steep  point.  From  this  situation,  west  of  the  point,  the  coast  is  quite  ciciin  for 
the  space  of  8  miles,  to  Point  (iuurupoturo,  where  another  bunk  begins,  ami  cxti'inis 
two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  const.  About  one  inile  N.  E.  of  Point  (luaniputiiiolies 
a  sunken  rock  that  must  be  carefully  avoided.  A  little  eastward  of  this  point,  amJ  iilmiit 
a  league  inland,  will  be  seen  tho  peak  of  u  mouutuiu,  culled  Pico  del  Este,  Peak  of  the 
East. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


443 


Thrpfl  miles  we»tward  from  Ouiiriipnturo  Point,  is  that  of  Escui'-^  BInnco,  or  White 
^.  1^1,1  I'oiiit,  thu  roimt  liuioK  8t<tii|)  and  hi^h;  hut  frotii  ihnt  the  const  runs  out  uhout 
k  W..  v«"y  '°w  "'"'  8Wiiiii|iy,  for  tlio  gpticiiof  'i{  iiiijita,  wheru  thoro  riues  u  Moiro  ciill- 
J  Cliii'coI">''><  wiiich  foriDH  ii  point,  projitctin^  into  tho  goii  nInioHt  '2  inijes.  From  tliii 
'^l„((l,„coii«ttMlie8  II  southerly  direr, ion  and  forms  nf{r«Mit  hiiv,  in  which,  lit  U  mile  w«»t 
Lin  tilt'  middle  of  the  said  Morro,  there  iti  h  litile  isliind  cnlled  Curilies ;  nt  iihoutn  mile 

est  of  Ciiribes  Inland  is  an  inlet  called  Do  Lolios,  or  the  Wolf,  with  a  rock  close  t<»  thr 
•ast piirt  of  it.  The  shonl  bank  that  beftins  at  (luarapoturo  Point,  oIhii  borders  this  pat. 
I  lliH  const,  and  reaches  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  Morro  Point;  it  thence  coii- 
liiiucs  to  Ciiribes  Iwland,  whence  it  turns  to  the  south,  beiirioK  so  close  upon  the  shore  that 
iCiiymiin  Point  tho  southernmost  and  westernmoHt  of  iho  bay,  it  dooM  nut  extend  more 
,1,1,11  linif  II  mile. 

[^  8"  E.  from  Chncnpata,  nt  the  distance  of  17  miles,  lies  the  eastern  point  of  the 
lelawl  MurRniitn,  formiiiK  with  tho  Main  land  a  channel,  11  miles  wide.  In  tho  middle 
oflliis  chiiniiel  are  the  Coche,  or  Coach,  and  Cuajjua,  or  Cubiigua  Islands;  nnd  as  a 
iit'?cri|)lio"  of  the  coasts  on  both  sides  of  this  channel  will  be  necpssary,  we  will  first  |)ro- 
ffcd  iiloiig  that  of  the  main,  bo  far  as  Aruya,  and  then  return  to  Margarita  and  the  other 

Kioin  the  Point  and  Morro  of  Cayman,  the  const  is  level  toward  the  west,  the  only 
Balieiit  points  being  those  of  Tuna,  a  mile  and  n  half  from  tho  precediiie,  and  tho  j)oint 
and  Mono  del  Castillo,  2  miles  beyond  Tuna.  From  Castillo  Point,  the  coast  inclines 
foiiiewliHt  to  the  north,  as  far  as  the  Point  and  Mono  of  La  Pena,  a  distance  of  4  miles: 
lliis  point  lies  S.  77°  W.,  144  niih's,  from  tho  Morro  of  Chacopnta.  From  tho  point  of 
Ln  Pi'iii'i  l''"  '"'"^^  descends  somewlmt  to  the  southward  of  west  to  Point  (Jordii.  a  dis- 
tniice  of  lif  miles,  from  which  it  forms  a  bay  with  a  very  Hat  shore  nnd  beach  to  Point 
Guiiibin,  orCJuarimiiche,  forming  a  piece  of  steep  and  high  land,  which  rises  above  the 
|(,w  liiiul,  nnd  seems  insulated  by  it ;  along  tho  shore  of  the  bay,  there  is  n  steep  point  of 
little  extent,  cnlled  Minus.     From  Point  Gorda  to  that  of  Cuachin,  it  is  6.1  miles. 

From  Point  Guuchin  the  shore  continues  low  and  flat,  so  fur  as  Puntn  del  Escarceo, 
or  Kilily  Point,  where  it  rises  n  little  ;  the  distance  from  one  to  the  other  is  3i  miles  ;  the 
latter  bears  from  tho  Point  La  Penn  N.  85°  W.,  12i  miles.  Point  Escarceo  jjresents 
a  front  extending  half  a  mile,  the  western  extremity  of  which  is  called  Point  Cardon, 
whence  the  const  bends  to  S.  4!)'  W.,  a  distniico  of  2\  miles,  to  Point  Aniya,  the  whole 
spnce  being  a  very  low  sandy  bendi.  About  half  a  mile  from  Arnyn  Point  is  nnuther, 
ciillcJ  T'oint  Chicn.     On  Ariiya  I'oint  there  nre  u  few  smnll  houses,  inhabited  by  jieople  ' 

employed  in  the  snit  works.  All  the  coast,  from  Point  Cayman  to  that  of  Escniceo, 
semis  otF  n  bank  nb' ut  half  a  mile  from  shore,  nnd  which  from  tho  latter  point  extends 
four  miles  westward,  forming  what  is  cnlled  the  Araya  i?hoiil,  tho  south  edge  of  which 
lerniimites  at  Point  Chica,  to  the  southward  of  Point  Araya.  This  will  bo  cleared  on 
tliB  80iitli  side  by  bringing  the  most  southerly  of  the  houses  on  the  point  to  bear  east. 
Tlience  Hcuthward  the  coast  may  be  npproached  at  2  cables'  length  ;  for  although  the 
gandy  bench  is  very  (hit,  at  that  distance  there  arc  5  or  ti  fathoms  water.  The  beach  con- 
tinues for  2  miles  about  S.  S.  E.  to  Punta  de  Piedras,  formed  by  the  western  extremity 
of  the  Ridge  of  Guaranache;  this  point  shows  a  front  of  about  half  a  mile,  nnd  immedi- 
ately within  it  the  Iniid  rises  ton  lofty  hill;  on  the  south  part  of  it  stands  a  cha|)el,  or 
eaiictuaiy.  dedicated  to  the  Virgin  of  Agua  Santa.  Tho  coast  continues  in  the  same 
direction  of  S.  S.  E.,  to  Point  Barragon  ;  at  first  it  is  low  and  sandy, nnd  afterwards  steep, 
but  nil  of  it  is  so  clean  ihiit  it  may  be  coasted  at  n  cable's  length.  On  the  south  point 
of  llio  little  Buy  of  Araya,  where  the  liigh  land  of  Point  Barrngon  begins,  there  is  n  cas- 
lloinn  ruinous  state.  From  Point  Barrngon  the  const  continues  high  and  very  clean, 
uliouf  S.  E.  by  S.,  n  distance  of  2  miles,  to  Point  Caney,  from  whence  it  changes  its  di- 
rection to  S.  E.  by  E.,  and  continues  for  nither  more  than  a  mile  to  Puntn  de  Arenas,  or 
Sandy  Point,  which  is  the  southernmost  jiartof  this  const,  and  northernmost  of  the  Gulf 
of  Cnriaco.  From  Point  Caney  there  is  u  bank  extending  along  the  coast  as  far  as  half 
a  mile  south  of  Point  Arenas. 

Hero  wo  suspend  our  description  of  tho  const  nnd  return  to 

THE  ISLAND  OF  MARCiAKlTA.— The  greatest  length  of  this  island  is,  from    The  Island 
east  to  west,  about  37i  miles  ;  it  is  mountainous,  and,  when  seen  at  a  short  distance  from    of  Murga- 
the  north,  it  ap))ears  like  two  islands,  from  n  spnce  of  low  swnmpy  Innd  in  the  middle  of  rila. 
it.    On  the  enstern   jjiirt  there  are  several  heights,  thnt  mny  be  seen  in  clenr  wenthor 
from  Cnpe  Three  Points,  a  distance  of  24  leagues  ;  nnd  on  the  west  part  a  ridge  of  heights 
called  Mncnnno.     The  eastern  point  is  nnmed  Bnllena,  and,  as  before  snid,  lies  N.  8°  E. 
fn  in  Chacopnta  Morro  ;  the  coast  runs  thence  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  to  Cnpe  La  Isia,  a  dis- 
tanee  of  13  miles,  forming  the  N.  E.  side  of  tho  inliiiid.     The  whole  of  it  is  clean,  only 
sending  off  a  bank  of  about  3  cables  in  breadth;  two  islets,  named  Isles  of  the  Cape,  lie 
about  a  mile  and  a  half  south-eastward  of  the  cape,  and  about  hnlf  a  mile  from  shore. 
From  Cape  La  Isin  the  const  runs  S.  W.  by  W.  to  Point  La  Gidern.  a  spnce  of  7  miles, 
all  clean ;  there  is  also  an  islet  lying  1^  mile  N-  E.  by  N.  from  tlte  point,  named  La  Ga- 


^> 


■^^F" 


i]l  n^wjipi^iii 


np^iipV  wi  I.II 


414 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST   PILOT. 


The  Fraylcs. 


Sola  Islet. 


leru,  having  between  them  14  fathoma  water,  on  sand  and  shells.  From  Point  La  6 
lera  to  Point  Maria  Libre,  it  is  S.  W.  5  S.  3i  miles ;  between  these  points  there  isaibro' 
bay*  with  a  bank  edging;  the  shores  of  it,  which  in  thb  centre  runs  off  nearly  a  mile,  q 
the  shore  opposite  to  the  widest  p:irt  of  the  bank,  stands  an  Indian  village.  " 

Point  del  Tunar  bears  from  that  of  Maria  Libre  N.  83°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  ii' 
miles  :  in  the  intermediate  space  there  is  a  very  large  bay.  running  about  5  miles  inlaiK? 
The  whole  of  this  bay  is  very  clean,  and  presents  no  other  danger  than  the  bank  wliicli 
borders  it,  which,  at  the  widest  part,  extends  only  about  half  a  mile  from  the  land :  th 
shore  at  the  extremity  of  the  bay  is  a  low  swampy  beach.  A  reef  of  considerable  exten! 
runs  off  in  a  N.  N.  E.  direction  from  Point  del  Tunar.  From  this  point  the  co^t 
trends  about  W.  by  S.  for  8  miles,  to  Point  del  Tigre,  the  whole  vory  clean,  and  may  h 
coasted  within  half  a  mile;  from  the  latter  point  the  land  bends  to  S.  72°  W.  for  2';  milj., 
to  the  Morro  of  Robledar,  and  thence  S.  S.  W.  a  distiinno  of  4i  miles,  to  the  Puntadj 
Arenas,  which  is  the  western  extremity  of  the  island.  The  bank  of  shallo  /  water  which 
surrounds  the  coast,  extends  about  14  mile  from  the  western  part  of  the  island,  between 
the  Morro  of  Robledar  and  Point  Arenas.  Abo  t  N.  W.  i  N.  44  miles  from  Point  Are- 
nas, and  W.  4  S.  4  miles  from  the  Morro  of  Robledar.  lies  the  eastern  edge  of  a  rocky 
shoal,  named  thoOstial,  having  on  its  shoalest  part  44  fathoms;  it  thence  extends  ahout 
N.  W.  by  W.  3  miles,  and  is  nearly  a  mile  wide.  Between  it  and  the  Morro  of  Rohle. 
dar,  there  are  from  5  to  7  fathoms,  on  sand  and  mud ;  to  the  northward  and  westward 
tha  soundings  extend  to  a  considerable  distance;  but  on  the  S.  W.  side,  at  a  shurtdis! 
tanc<),  the  water  is  very  deep. 

Three  miles  and  a  half  about  S.  W.  from  Bnllona  Point,  are  Point  Moreno  and  Mor. 
ro:  the  intermediate  coast  forms  a  spacious  bay,  on  the  north  side  of  which  stands  the 
town  of  Pampatar.  Nearly  in  a  line  between  the  two  points,  and  about  midway,  lies  the 
little  islet  called  Blanco,  which  is  very  clean  ;  the  passage  between  it  and  the  land  is  very 
safe.  All  parts  of  this  bay  afford  anchorage  in  7  and  8  fathoms  waljr,  at  two-thiidj  of  a 
mile  from  the  beach  :  with  the  trade  wind  blowing  fresh  it  is  rather  exposed,  as  .hereij 
no  shelter;  and  although  such  a  wind  does  not  send  in  much  sea,  it  will  be  advisahle  lo 
anchor  in  such  a  position  that,  in  case  of  necessity,  there  may  be  room  to  run  freely  for 
the  Morro  Moreno,  which,  if  occasion  require,  may  be  passed  on  the  east  side,  at  the 
distance  of  a  cable's  length. f 

From  the  Morro  Moreno,  the  direction  of  the  coast  is  S.  W.  4  W.  for  a  space  of  6 
miles,  to  Mosquito  Point;  the  land  between  forming  a  groat  bay,  on  the  north  piut  uf 
which  stands  the  town,  so  called,  of  La  Mar,  but  more  correctly,  a  cluster  of  straw  hutj. 
The  coast  from  Moreno  Point  to  that  of  Mosquito  is  so  foul,  that  it  would  be  haziiiilous 
to  get  within  two  miles  of  it ;  the  same  character  may  be  given  to  that  faither  west- 
ward. Prom  Mosquito  Point  to  Punta  de  Mangles,  or  Mangrove  Point,  the  beaiini; and 
distance  are  S.  83"^  W.  104  miles;  the  coast  between  is  very  foul,  from  arochj  skd 
that  extends  off  about  a  mile.  From  Mangles  Point  the  shore  turns  to  the  noi'tliwarl 
forming  a  bay  between  it  and  Point  Piedras,  a  distan'ie  of  3t  miles  :  from  the  latter  point 
it  runs  farther  northward,  forming  another  bay  with  Point  del  Pozo.  which  is  distant  Cj 
miles  from  the  preceding.  Point  del  Pozo  lies  10  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  4  W.  frnin  Puint 
Mangles  ;  and  from  the  former  to  Point  Arenas,  the  bearing  and  distance  are  W.  by  N",, 
12  miles,  .ill  that  part  of  the  coast  from  Mangles  Point  to  Arenas  Point  is  like  the  pre- 
ceding. //uL  and  should  not  be  appnii.chod  to  less  than  two  miles. 

THK  FR.VYLKS. — Nine  miles  E.  N.  eastward  from  Cape  la  Isla,  in  Margaritii, lis 
a  group  of  islet-H,  called  the  Frayles,  or  the  Fiiars,  of  which  tho  southern  most  is  the 
largest.  They  are  all  very  clean,  exco[)t  the  northernmost,  which  is  surrounded  by  a 
reef  extending  about  two  cables'  length  from  it. 

SOLA  ISLET. — Ahout  12  miles  N.  E.  4  E.  from  tho  largest  of  tho  Frayles,  lies  the 
little  islet  called  .Sola,  which  is  very  clean.  From  .Sola  to  the  Tostigos,  the  distance  is  J) 
miles.  Tho  passage  between  the  Tostigos  and  Sola,  Sola  and  tho  Frayles.  tiie  Frayles 
and  Margarita,  are  all  so  clear  that  ships  of  all  sizes  may  use  them  in  any  kind  of  weather. 


"Mr.  Williurn  Waddy.  Master  of  H.  M.  S.  L'Aniiablfi,  in  \m  remarks  on  this  bay  says,  "In  apprDrt- 
inR  it  iVoin  the  northward  and  westward  ih'  soundiiis^s  will  ho  rei^iilar,  iVom  ;tO  lathoaH  iit  th'  (lisMiivoi 
4  iei^tiati  to ))  fiilh')ms<.  Pu'^s  the  i^lut  of  (julera  at  a  discrctiituiiry  dislaiiui^  and  in  haaUn^  ruiiiiil  Pniiii 
la  (jalera.  which  is  hififh  an<l  Ijjuir,  you  will  see  a  tian  opt'n  bay,  whiro  you  niuy  rido  at  aachur  iasaloiy, 
ill  from  10  to  i  t'athoiiis,  with  foiM  hi  (ialcru  bearini;  N.  ii.  j  C.,  distant  al)i)nt'.i  miles." 

tllis  M  ij'^stv's  sloop  IJ.irhi.io.w,  John  Fleipiii:;  B<(|.,  eomiiiinder,  anchored  bere  in  .fanaiiry,  I"!'). 
IJe  says  "  .Ships  from  the  eastward  h  ivin:;  approaeh  ul  Utillena  I'oint  to  about  a  mile,  slioald  od^v  awav 
to  till!  S.  \V..  sounding  in  I'^iand  10  (Hthoms  water,  until  f-'ort  La  (wirrinta  comcis  oiten:  this  I'prt  isiiiia 
point  of  hind  over  I  he  sea,  ahout  half  a  utile  lothi"  east  sou  lli-easi  ward  of  Fort  St.  Carlos,  which  issiluitfj 
m  the  midille  of  the  town.  With  Kort  l.a  Curranta  l)cariu^'  N.  \V.  i  N.,  by  couipass,  disiaat  owe  mil?, 
there  is  i^ood  anchoraj^e  in  8  fathoms  wali.-r;  l)at  this  is  not  a  safe  and  advantageous  hay  for  a  lli'i'l  tori;ii- 
dezvous  iu,  there  lieinsf  little  sli  'lt''r  as^aiiMt  any  wiMther,  and  a  great  scarcity  of  water  and  every  spedes 
of  provision.    'Die  forts  commanil  the  ancliora-jG." 

"In  sadiiia;  out  of  I'amiiatar  Uav  and  houud  to  the  westward,  pass  to  the  westward  of  Blanco  IsW,  on 
account  of  a  reef  lying  oil"  its  S.  E.  side,  wiiich  iiiukcs  it  dangerous  to  borrow  near  it  in  liiat  diroi.'iiira,'' 


iiiPi«**i^nnpniiBf«mMiipp^nniPP^P^ 


"^i«PiPpi"»«»W^P 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

iTiannel  between  Margarita  and  the  Main. — In  this  channel  there  are  two  large  ial- 
I  .  the  easternmoBt  oue  is  called  El  Coche,  or  the  Coach;  and  that  on  the  west,  Cu- 
taguii,  or  Cuiigurt.  Coche  Island  is  low,  lying  W.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.,  about  6  miles  in 
I  n£tii>  and  2i  miles  wide.  It  is  surrounded  by  a  rocky  shoal  and  reef,  which  extend 
fonithe  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  points  about  a  mde  and  a  half,  and  form  two  channels :  that 
nthe  north,  with  the  Island  of  Margarita,  which,  in  its  narrowest  part,  is  two  miles 
"cross ;  and  tha't  on  the  south,  with  the  main  land,  of  nearly  similar  breadth  in  its  most 
'  jJqJj  part.  In  both  of  them  the  passages  are  perfectly  clear,*  the  bottom  very  good, 
'  1  a  vessel  may  ride  at  anchor  in  either  of  them  as  securely  as  in  a  harbor. 

Cut'iigua  is  smaller  than  Coche  Island,  and  lies  nearly  east  and  west;  it  is  about  5  miles 
I  J  dDd  2  miles  wide.  From  the  east  point  there  are  a  shoal  and  a  reef,  extending  out 
bciii't  a  mile.  The  north  and  south  sides  are  very  clean  ;  but  on  the  west  side,  a  rocky 
sliofl(  extends  about  one-third  of  a  mde  from  the  shore.  This,  like  Coche  Island,  forma 
channels, — one  on  the  north  with  Margarita,  and  the  other  on  the  south  with  the 
main  land — both  very  clear.  In  the  narrowest  part,  which  is  between  the  shoal  and  reef 
which  stretches  out  from  the  east  end  of  Cubagua,  and  the  bank  that  extends  off  from 
Mangles  Point  in  Margarita ;  the  width  is  34  miles. 
In  navigating  the  North  Channel  of  these  islands  no  other  care  is  necessary  than  that 
of  keeping  in  the  middle  of  the  passage  ;  for,  by  so  doing,  the  banks  of  Margarita,  that 
fruin  the  N.  W.  of  Coche  Island,  and  thnt  from  the  east  end  of  Cubagua,  will  all  be 
cleared ;  but  for  greater  certainty,  the  most  northerly  little  point  of  Cubagua  may  be 
broui'iit  to  bear  west ;  which  course  may  then  be  kept  on  to  pass  Mangles  Point,  and  then 
edging  a  little  to  the  northward,  so  as  to  pass  a  cable's  length  to  the  northward  of  the  said 
uorih  point  of  Cubagua,  every  danger  will  be  avoided. 

To  navigate  the  South  Channel,!  you  ought  to  pass  near  to  the  Caribes  and  Lobos 
Ijliinda,  by  which  you  will  clear  the  bank  that  extends  to  the  S.  E.  from  Coche  Island. 
and  tiience  shape  a  westerly  course  without  fear,  as  the  three  Tuna  Islets,  lying  off  Tuna 
Point,  are  very  clean,  and  may  be  passed  between,  if  necessary.  From  these  islets,  west- 
ward, the  channel  widens  considerably,  and  consequently  requires  less  care.  In  all  these 
channels  it  is  advisable  to  anchor  at  night,  in  any  part  of  them,  when  the  ship  is  bound 
toAiayaor  Cuinana,  lest  the  current  should  carry  her  to  leeward;  and  also  because 
these  ports  should  always  be  entered  in  the  day  time,  that  the  shoal  off  Point  Araya,  and 
the  shallow  bank  of  Cumana,  may  be  avoided. 

To  sail  to  the  ANCHORAGE  of  ARAYA,  the  only  danger  to  be  avoided  is  the  shoal 
off  Point  Araya,  which,  as  before  observed,  extends  2i  miles  to  the  N.  W.  of  it.  This 
may  be  effected  by  standing  on  about  3  miles  from  the  point  before  the  course  is  altered 
to  tiie  southward ;  or,  what  is  nearly  the  same  thing,  to  make  no  southing  until  having 
got  out  of  soundings.  But  if  it  should  be  thought  preferable  to  use  land-marks,  be  care- 
ful not  to  cross  the  parallel  of  Point  Escnrceo,  until  the  westernmost  peak  of  four,  on 
the  height  of  Macanao,  in  Margarita,  bears  north,  a  little  easterly ;  for  when  it  bears  N. 
b"  E.  it  will  clear  the  west  extremity  of  the  shoal  about  half  a  mile.  The  Island  of  Cu- 
bii'iua  will  also  afford  a  mark;  for,  by  bringing  the  west  point  of  it  to  bear  N.  E.,  the 
western  edge  of  the  shoal  will  be  cleared  two  miles.t     Hence  it  appears,  that  a  ship 

•His  majesty's  sloop  Sapphire,  A.  Montgomerie,  Esq.,  commander,  when  beating  to  windward  in  the 
souili  |)a!i?uge,  on  the  i9tli  of  April,  lU^l,  struck  on  a  sliuul  of  15  I'eet  water  j  tlie  Alorro  of  Chacojiata 
lieiiriiig  about  E.  ^.  E.  J  E.,  by  L'oiiipusM,dislunt  '2^  miles,  and  the  west  end  ot  Caribes  island  about  ti.  j 
E.,  i  miles. 

(Ills Majesty's  sloop  Hellelte,  J.  L.tiitli,  Esq.,  commander,  ran  through  this  channel  on  the  7lhof 
Mari'li,  i^'2'>-  He  pas-ed  ihree-quarli-ri  of  a  mile  to  tlie  nortliwaul  of  Point  Chacopala,  in  7J  fallioms 
Wilier,  (having  gradually  slioaled  from  tiui  depth  of  ID  fathoms  to  the  eastward  )  and  steered  directly  lor  the 
Isliiiid  Liihos,  ill  which  lack  lie  hud  iioi  less  than  41,  nor  more  than  5  fathoms,  until  arriving  abreast  of  the 
said  island.  After  passing  it,  thn  water  began  to  dee|)en  fast,  but  the  wind  blowing  strong  from  the  east, 
Willi  an  appearance  ol  foul  weather,  he  liauled  towards  the  S.  W.  side  of  Co<'lie  Island,  where  ihe  shoal 
extends  only  a  short  distance  otf,  shortened  sail  and  anchored  in  9j  fathoms  water,  on  mud,  about  3  miles 
oll'shore, »  with  the  west  of  Oocho,  a  low  sandy  point,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N  ,  by  compass  ;  the  S.  E.end 
S.Jfc;.,LobodslandS.E.I)yE.  jE..and  Morro  de  I'ena  S.  W.  j  W.  On  the  bth,  at  6h,  3(Jm  A  M  ,  he 
weighed,  and  atier  running  22  miles  W.  by  ti  from  the  anchorage  saw  while  colored  woter  on  Araya  Shoal 
ahead;  hauled  up  to  the  N.  \V.  to  avoid  il,  liavingfound  that  a  VV.  by  S  course  would  not  clear  it ;  at  11, 
A.  M,  passed  close  round  \h  western  edge,  and  gradually  hauled  in  for  Point  Piedras,  &c. 

t  His  Majesty's  sloop  Ksk,  Edward  Lloveil,  Esq.,  commander,  run  aground  on  this  shoal,  on  the  20th  of 
Aagiijt.  Is2l,  having,  at  the  time,  Araya  Point  beaiing  S.  I'J.  by  E.,  by  compass,  distant  0  miles,  by  estlma- 
tioa.    Siihjoiaed  is  an  extract  fioin  the  log  b.iok,  whence  we  hiiV';  obtained  the  inlormiition : 

"  P,  M  [""resh  breezes  and  fine,  running  along  the  land  between  Margarita  and  the  main.  At  4h  Point 
Araya  south,  0  or  7  miles;  at4h.  loiii ,  ti  mimed  sail  and  hauled  more  to  the  wind  ;  at  4h  25m,,  the  ship  un- 
derapressof  sail.rnnnlngut  theia>eof  lU  knots,  S,  S.  W  ,  by  compass,  being  about G miles  from  Point 
Amya,  and  (by  the  leadsman  ill  botli  chains)  In'.)  fail.v/ins  w  ''•>r,  suddenly  shoaled,  and  immediately  alier- 
war(l,>Iruck  the  ground.  Shortened  and  lurlcd  sails;  hoisttJ  ^utthl.^  boats,  and  sounded  in  every  direc- 
tionround  the  ship ;  laid  the  stream  anchor  out  N.  W.,  in  3  fathoins  ;  at  Oh.  parted  thj  stream  cable,  of 
which  tKJ  fathoms  were  lost,  Point  Araya  then  bearing  S.  E.  by  E." 

It  I'ariher  appears  that  the  sea  broke  very  iiigh  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  ber ;  and  that  the  soundings 
allroiind  were  very  irregular.    On  the  23d,  alter  being  lightened,  she  got  oil'. 

>  Hii  Majetty'iship  Valorous,  Cant.  J.  MiirrHjr.ancliored  oft  the  wett  end  of  Coche  Island,  at  about  IJ  mile  offshore, 
iD7fal)iomi,  mudily  bottom  ;  with  the  N.  W.  eiiil  oftlir  island,  alow  sandy  point, bearing  N,  K.  by  N  ,  its  S.  W.  poiat 
tut ;  Cultigua  Island  W. }  N,,  and  Point  MangUi,  in  Margarita,  N.N.  W.  i  W.    Ttiis  anchorage  is  «erj  good. 


445 

Channel  be- 
tween Mar- 
garita and 
the  Main. 


Anchorage 
of  Araya. 


f  I  J^f  lil;i'<!' 


niimnifnnifiw'Mi  lei 


446 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


77ic  TowTi 
anrf  For<  of 
Cumana. 


bound  to  Araya  and  having  run  down  the  South  Channel,  between  Coche  and  Cub 
gua  on  the  north,  and  the  main  land  on  tlie  south,  should  pass  about  a  mile  to  the  north' 
ward  of  Point  Eacarceo,  and  stuer  west  until  the  west  [wint  of  Cubagua  bears  N  F 
when,  by  altering  the  course  to  the  southward,  she  will  pass  two  uiilea  distant  from  th ' 
west  edge  of  the  shoal ;  and  if  it  be  desirous  to  keep  closer  to  it,  to  avoid  gettinw  so  mn  ? 
to  leeward,  it  may  be  done  by  steering  west,  until  the  westernmost  peak  of  Mucatmo  be "^ ' 
N.  5°  E.,  or  rather  more  easterly  ;  then  bring  her  head  to  the  southward,  and  she  w'^^i 
pass  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  from  it.     Keep  on  the  south  course,  until  she  gets  abiei 
of  the  southernmost  house  on  Point  Araya,  then  haul  to  the  wind,  in  order  to  fetch  int* 
the  little   Bay  of  Araya,  which  will  be  known  by  the   Fort  on  the  south  side,  and  il" 
Sanctuary  of  Our   Lady  of  Agua  Santa  on  the  north  side,  and  on  the  south  slope  of  Gu ' 
ranche.     In  this  bay,  and  also  on  every  part  of  this  coast,  as  far  as  Point  Arenas,  a  «|,;" 
may  be  anchored  in  any  convenient  depth :  and,  if  desirable,  at  a  cable's  length  from  ih 
shore. 

In  like  manner,  in  doui)ling  Point  Araya  from  the  northward,  that  is,  from  CubnTuj 
or  Margarita,  the  parallel  of  Point  Eacarceo  should  not  be  crossed  to  the  eastWHid  of  the 
bearings  before  given ;  and  if  by  any  accident  you  happen  to  do  so,  you  should  immedi- 
ately steer  in  an  opposite  direction,  until  you  are  due  west  from  Point  Escarceo  ■  and 
then  west,  until  the  proper  bearings  come  on — namely,  the  westernmost  peak  of  Mhch. 
nao,  N.  5"  E.,  or  rather  more  easterly  ;  when  you  should  steer  south,  so  as  to  be  nble  ta 
haul  to  the  wind  on  getting  abreast  of  the  southernmost  house  on  Point  Aniya,  On 
coming  from  the  north,  the  soundings  will  also  bo  a  good  guide,  either  by  keepini;  cm  q, 
them  altogether,  or,  at  least,  by  not  getting  into  loss  than  35  fathoms,  until  after  ciossiuo 
the  parallel  before  mentioned.  " 

There  are  a  shallow  bank  and  reef  stretching  about  half  a  mile  south  from  Point  Are- 
nas, which  have  been  already  spoken  of  as  the  North  Point  of  the  Gulf  Cariacou,  which 
runs  35  miles  inland  to  tho  eastward  :  at  the  broadest  part  it  is  8  miles  across,  and  niav 
be  considered  as  a  spacious,  well-sheltered  harbor,  there  being  good  anchorage  in  evert 
par*  of  it ;  but  the  best  is  in  36  fathoms.  Tho  shores  are  very  clean,  and  may  be  ap- 
proached to  half  a  mile,  or  even  a  less  distance,  except  in  the  vicinity  of  Cutnaiia,  where 
a  shallow  bank  extends  about  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  On  tlie  tiortli  side 
there  are  two  harbors,  called  the  Little  and  the  Great,  or  Bishop's  Lagoon;  tl.e  furnier 
is  very  small,  but  the  latter  is  spacious  :  and,  besides  having  from  8  to  18  fiithoms  water 
is  so  clean  that  there  is  no  danger  except  what  is  visible.  Its  entrance  is  12  miles  from 
Point  Arenas.  Within  the  Gulf  there  is  no  town  of  consequence,  or  other  inducement 
for  ships  from  Europe  to  visit  it;  tho  main  object  of  attraction  for  all  is  Cumnnn,  whicli 
is  situated  on  the  South  Point  of  the  entrance  into  tho  Gulf.  This  point  is  low  anl 
sandy,  with  a  bank  running  from  it  to  the  west  and  south,  so  steep  that,  from  10  fiitiwms, 
there  are  almost  immediately  5  ;  and  from  5.  a  ship  would  be  aground  before  gettin"  an- 
other cast  of  the  lead.  Tho  edge  of  the  bank  runt)ing  eastward,  lies  nearly  east,  from 
the  point,  about  4  miles,  to  Puma  Baxa,  or  Low  Point,  whence  it  turns  to  suutli-easi- 
ward  with  the  coast,  narrowing  by  degrees  to  the  vicinity  of  Mount  Blanco,  wheru  it  ter- 
minates on  a  clean  shore. 

The  edge  of  the  bank  that  runs  southward  from  the  point  is  very  close  to  the  shore, 
forming  with  it  the  mouth  of  the  River  iManzanares,  or  Cumana,  whence  it  increases  in 
breadth  to  tho  S.  W.  so  much  that,  N.  W.  of  the  Escarpado  lloxo,  a  little  mount,  witii 
a  red  clilf,  south  of  the  town,  it  reaches  about  a  mile  from  the  shore;  from  this  point  it 
narrows  ai;ain.  and  i.      iinatns  at  Point  Piedras. 

The  TOWN  and  FORT  of  CUMANA,  stand  on  tho  high  land  of  the  point,  on  the 
banks  of  the  Manzanaros,  or  Cumana  River;  on  tho  low  land,  and  near  to  the  beach, 
stands  an  Indian  town,  separated  from  Cumana  by  the  river.  Tho  aiichoriiue  is  iieailv 
in  front  of,  or  to  the  westward  of,  the  river's  mouth,  on  the  south  |)oiiit  of  wliich  is  an- 
other fort.  In  order  to  ft^tch  this  anchorage,  ship.s  should  steer  from  Point  Cancyto- 
wards  Escarpado  Roxo,  but  not  more  to  windward,  until  tho  Bank  olVl'uiita  do  Arenas 
is  cleared.  Having  passed  it,  they  should  keep  to  tho  wind,  and  sieer  direct  lor  il:e 
mijuth  of  tho  river,  which  will  be  known  by  the  fort  already  spoken  of.  Keop  the  leal 
going;  and  on  getting  a  depth  of  water  suitable  for  tho  size  of  the  vesssel,  let  go  an  an- 
chor, with  which,  and  a  stream  anchor  towards  the  shore,  the  ship  will  be  moored*  if 


*  His  Maji'stv's  ship  Vnlorons,  ('apt  .1.  Murray,  nncliorfid  liero,  in  February,  1S31,  at  about  JJor) 
cables'  l^n'.,'ih  (rorn  tlie  jiliorc,  in  II  fathoms  water,  on  mud  and  clay,  with  the  low  sandy  point  ni  liipei- 
trance  ofslie  river  beannif  N.  j  E  .  bycDrnpass,  di>tanl  I  cables'  leiiglh,  and  Fort  Sau  Antonio,  on llieki 
al>uve  the  town,  east  Tho  bank  .nlielvt's  olF  vorv  suddenly,  which  occasions  vessels  to  iinclior  neiiiiie 
bench,  in  1  l,N,  and  li  liilhoms,  on  jrood  jrroimd.  'fo  llie  northward  and  otl'ltie  lijrtoii  tlie  heiicli.it^lifliei 
od'nuick  r  still ;  hut  to  the  smithward.  the  shoal  wat<(r  extends  I'arl her  oll'shoK!.  Tlie  lifllelln  sl(iii|).  J. 
Siiiuh,  Ksq  ,  commander,  in  Mareh,  IW.J,  anchored  in  ','0  liilhoins,  on  mud,  with  \\\v  easlleon  the  lull  anJ 
church  iiione.  li.  i  N  ,  liy  compass  ;  the  lort  on  the  Ix-ach  N.  N.  K.  J  E.;  and  the  Had  Clill,  (Kscariiailo 
Roxo,)  .S.  J  v..  This  is  al)OUt  three-i|iiarter.s  of  a  mile  oll'shore,  ami  is  c|uiic  an  outside  Ik  I'lli ;  "  ..,  .„us- 
sary  to  steady  the  ship  with  a  stnniin  to  the  .S.  \V.  The  ri.se  and  ftill  of  the  tide  is  from  I  to  0  It'cl.  ilinJ 
wuicr  may  l<e  ubtuiaud  in  thu  little  river  to  the  uortbwurd  oi  the  tort  on  the  beach.  Ttiu  wmd  always  blows 
ofl'the  sliore. 


siiore.    It 
wind  at  liny 
Point  Maiia 

Knmi  Poi 
Punta  An  Ti 
length  from 
mile?,  wlienc 
Tiijiillo  Bay, 
Hiirbor  of  .M 
easteriiiiiost  ( 
third  the  We 
clfiin,  tiieie  I 
whidi  extenc 
II  small  shallii 
tivoen  tliese  i 
shi|i9of  any 
nnchofiim,  in 

The  only  . 
,\.  W.,  lit  tl 
half  II  mile  in 
iiig  between 
going  outside 
direction. 

To  the  SOI 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


447 


from  a  scant  wind,  or  fronfi  the  current  having  sot  the  vessel  to  leeward,  it  should  be 
necessiiry  t"  vvork  to  windward  to  gain  the  nnchornge,  when  standing  to  the  Bouthward, 
ghesiiould  tack  before  Fort  St.  Antonio,  which  is  situated  on  the  most  elevated  part  of 
the  town  of  Cunmna,  bears  to  the  northward  of  east,  in  order  to  keep  clear  of  the  project- 
■  2  point,  off  the  bank  off  Escarpado  Roxo  :  to  the  northward  there  is  do  danger,  and  the 
(^,,,.(1  mny  bo  prolonged  according  to  judgment. 

To  the  S.  W.  of  the  Escarpado  Roxo,  and  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Punta  de  Piedras, 
the  River  Bordones  disembogues  its  waters;  and  from  this  latter  point  tlie  coast  lies 
nearly  west,  fur  the  dist^mce  of  3';  miles,  in  some  parts  scarped,  and  in  others  a  sandy 
beiicli.  to  Port  Kscondido,  which  is  a  bay  running  about  half  a  mile  inland,  and  3  cables" 
length  wide  at  the  entrance.  In  the  middle  of  it  the  depth  is  44  fathoms,  on  sand,  but 
neifrer  to  the  shore,  only  3  and  2.  Off  the  West  Point  there  are  some  rocks,  which  may 
Ije  hvokIbJ  by  passing  a  little  more  than  a  cablo's  length  from  it. 

From  the  West  Point  of  Port  Escondido  the  coast  trends  about  west  for  the  distance 
of  Ij  niile,  to  Punta  de  Campanarito.  all  of  which  is  scarped,  and  very  clean,  except  one 
sunkoa  rock,  about  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  coast,  and  2  or  3  cables'  length  to  the 
westward  of  the  West  Point  of  Port  Escondido. 

From  Point  Campanarito  to  the  Morro  and  Vigia,  or  Signal  Tower  of  Mochima,  the 
dig'nnce  is  |  of  a  mile  :  between  them  is  a  very  fine  bay,  varying  in  depth  of  water,  from 
IC  fiithoins  to  5i,  which  will  be  found  within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore.  Every  part 
of  the  bay  is  clean ;  and  only  orf  the  north  and  west  sides  of  Point  Campanarito  there 
are  a  few  rocks,  extending  somewhat  less  than  half  a  cable's  length  from  it,  but,  never- 
theless, it  ought  not  to  be  passed  nearer  than  one. 

About  W.  S.  W.  from  the  Signal  Tower  of  Mochima,  a  little  tongue  of  land  projects 
ami  forms  the  east  point  of  the  Harbor  of  Morhima,  which  is  capacious,  beautiful  and 
well  alieltered.  The  shores  are  indented  with  several  coves,  or  little  bays,  which  are  so 
iniiiiy  natural  docks.  The  depth  of  water  is  very  regular,  no  whore  exceeding  14  fath- 
oms, or  being  less  than  4i  ;  the  latter  from  one  to  one  cable  and  a  half's  length  from  the 
shored,  which  ore  generally  very  clean.  By  keeping  at  the  distance  of  li  cablo's  length 
frnia  every  visible  obstruction,  all  danger  will  be  avoided.  To  these  good  qualities  may 
be  iidJed  that  of  sailing  in  and  out  wifh  the  trado  wind,*  altogether  making  it  the  best 
hiirbor  in  this  part  of  America  ;  indeed  it  may  be  reckoned  one  of  the  best  in  the  world. 
About  a  mi  e  to  the  westward  is  the  harbor  of  Manare,  which  is  also  an  excellent  port. 
The  depth  of  water  is  from  14  to  4i  fathoms,  the  latter  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  the 
shore.  It  is  very  clean,  and  as  the  entrance  is  spacious,  it  may  be  entered  with  the  trade 
wind  nt  any  time,  and  quitted  with  equal  facility.  The  west  point  of  the  harbor  is  called 
Point  Manare. 

From  Point  Manare  the  coast  runs  about  W.  S.  W.  for  the  distance  of  14  mile,  to 
Punta  de  Tigrillo,  which  sends  out  a  reef  on  every  ride,  to  the  distance  of  half  a  cable's 
jeni'th  t'loin  it.  The  coast  thence  trends  to  the  southward  and  eastward,  n  distance  of  24 
miles,  whence  it  returns  to  W.  by  S.  for  5  miles,  to  Punta  Gorda,  forming  what  is  called 
Tiiiillo  Bay,  at  the  farther  extremity  of  wliich  there  is  a  canal  communicating  with  the 
Hiirbor  of  Mochima.  In  the  entrance  of  this  bay  there  are  three  islands  :  the  first  or 
easteriiinost  one  is  named  Venados ;  the  second  or  middle  one  the  East  Caraca;  and  the 
third  tlie  West  Caraca.  The  shores  of  the  bay,  as  well  as  those  of  the  islands,  are  very 
clean,  there  being  only  off  the  north  point  of  Venados,  called  Point  Campanarito,  a  rock 
ffhicli  extends  about  a  cable's  length  from  it;  and  from  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  same  island, 
a  small  ahallnw  bank  running  off  a  considerable  distance.  All  the  ])assaue3  or  straits  be- 
tween these  islands,  and  also  between  them  and  tho  main  land,  are  free  and  navigable  for 
siiipsof  any  class ;  and  although  some  of  them  are  narrow,  there  is  sufficient  room  for 
anchoriiii;,  in  case  of  necessity. 

The  only  danger  to  be  avoided  is  a  rocky  shoal,  called  tho  Caracas,  which  lies  about 
N.  W.,  at  tho  distanci.  of  rather  more  than  a  mile  from  the  Ivist  Caraea.  It  is  about 
h;ilfa  mile  in  extent  from  east  to  west.  There  is  not,  however,  much  risk  ;  for  in  pass- 
ing between  it  and  the  Caracas,  it  will  bo  avoided  by  keeping  near  to  the  latter,  and  in 
going  outside  of  it,  keeping  to  tho  northward  of  Point  Manare  will  clear  it  in  that 
direction. 

To  the  southward  of  Punta  Gorda.  distant  3  miles,  lies  Punta  del  Escarpado  Roxo, 
(Red  Slope  Point.)     Those  form  the  entrance  of  tho  Gulf  of  Santa  Fe,  which  runs 


*  His  Maji'sty'satoop  Sappliire,  A.  Montgomcrie,  Esq.,  roiiimandcr,  visited  this  harbor  in  April,  1821. 
Cupt.  .M.  ol)Si'ivc!!.  tliat  lli()ai;h  tliu  aiicliora^^olM  f;ooil  lliroushoiit,  tliP  most  scciiro  is  iiifilhcr  thi!  two  first 
easlniii  liiijlits,  iiiooiiii^  Willi  a  rahlo  or  Itawser  to  l\u:  shore.  'I'lic  liarhortiiav  bi'  (MitoriMJ  « jlli  the  trade 
wind  ;  aail  us  there  in  (it-iioraliy  a  laad  Uroezo  luriiiirtlie  iiii;Iit,  it  i*  easy  of  e;;ross;  tliouuli  tVoin  the  lirst 
cuslcra  bi^ht.  a  ship  may  sail  out  at  aay  thiii;  with  seuhroczo.  Water  may  lie  obtained  iiltho  south  end 
of  ihe  hiilior,  froai  th«  Kiver  Mocliim.i,  thoimli  it  liy  no  iiieaiis  desi-rves  tha^  apiiclhition,  lieiiijr  only  a 
smuh  slicani  at  any  lime ;  and  lhoii>r|i,  it  cleari'd  a  little  aliiivf  its  moiitli,  ciiougll  luij^ht  bti  had  for  itiiy 
number  of  ships,  yet  it  cun  at  no  lime  bo  aucuuaicd  a  good  watering  placu. 


40 


■^»^"W^l^pH»»^p^^^||BP 


"m  <nm  I  vnKn^m^mminKT' 


"^^mm 


448 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


about  6  miles  inland  to  the  eastward.     All  its  shores  are  very  clean ;  but  at  the  eotran 
at  about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  nnnh  const,  lies  a  foul  rock,  that  should  not  be  a^^' 
proHched  within  two  cables'  length.     The  depth  of  water  ia  this  gulf  is  from  27  to  fa 
fathoms,  on  mud  bottom. 

From  the  I'oint  of  Escnrpndo  Roxo  the  coast  inclines  to  the  southward,  and  then 
the  westward,  for  2i  miles,  to  Puntii  de  la  Cruz,  forming  a  bay  that  is  very  clean  n  \ 
affords  excolJent  anchorage,  callod  tlio  bay  of  Santa  Cruz.     About  W.  S.  W.,  onemjl 
from  the  latter  point,  lies  tlie  eaHternmost  of  tho  little  islands  called  the  Arapoa,  extenH* 
ing  altogether  to  the  westward  about  half  a  mile.     They  are  very  clean,  except  in  tl 
strait  between  them,  which  is  impassable  on  account  of  a  bank  and  reef  that  unites  the  * 
together.     The  passage  between  the  easternmost  one  and  the  coast  ia  open,  and  wjtho", 
danger.     Off  the  western  part  of  the  westernmost  island  there  are  two  rocks,  butth 
are  very  clean.  ^ 

From  Puntade  Cruz  the  coast  continues  westward,  inclining  a  little  to  tho  southwnni 
nearly  4  miles,  to  Punta  Comona;  the  whole  of  it  clean,  and  navigable  within  two  cable ' 
length  of  the  shore,  without  the  least  risk.  Westward  uoni  Punta  Comona,  almost  tw 
miles,  is  Punta  de  Pertignlete,  in  which  space  there  is  a  flap  bay,  with  12  fathoms  wnte" 
within  a  cable's  length  of  the  shore.  In  the  farther  part  of  this  bay  there  is  « gum)' 
beach,  where  I  wo  small  rivers  discharge  their  waters.  It  is  all  very  clean,  except  on  the 
eastern  p:irt,  which  send»  off  a  reel'  about  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore. 
Monos  Island.  MONUS  ISL  AN  D. — In  front  of  this  bay,  and  about  3  cables'  length  to  tho  northward 
of  Pertignlete  Point,  lies  the  south  coast  of  the  Island  iMonos.'or  Guaracaro,  the  slioresof 
which  are  steop  and  clean.  About  2  cables'  length  from  the  north  side  there  is  a  lock  anil 
a  foul  reef,  which  should  not  bo  approached  nearer  than  half  n  cable's  length;  tiiu  channel 
between  Monos  and  tho  rock  is  very  clean,  with  25  fathoms  water,  and  in  saiiinothroush 
it  will  be  best  to  keep  closer  to  the  island  than  to  the  rock.  The  channel  botwee*!  MouL 
and  the  coast  is  also  very  clean,  with  45  to  50  fathoms  water  in  the  middle  of  it,  um]  near. 
ly  the  same  depth  near  to  the  island,  which  should  be  kept  close  on  board,  if  uuy  thin? 
prevents  running  through  mid-channel.  ' 

One  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  Pertigalete  Point  is  Point  Guanta,  and  between 
them  is  formed  the  Bay  of  Pertigalete,  within  which  there  are  several  islets,  mid  a  little 
^  river  disembogues  into  it.     In  case  of  anchoring  here,  it  will  be  necessary  to  kippciejf 

of  the  west  side  of  Pertigalete  Point,  passing  it  ut  a  cable's  length  at  least,  to  avoid  a  reef 
which  runs  out  from  that  part.  It  is  also  necessary  to  be  careful  to  avoid  a  reef  and  rfioji 
from  the  centre  of  the  bay  ;  which  will  be  cleared  by  not  getting  any  thing  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  most  easterly  part  of  the  fust  islet  to  the  north.  With  this  attention  aslim 
may  be  anchored  nearly  north  from  the  mouth  of  the  little  river,  in  4i  fathoms  water  at 
about  li  cable's  length  from  the  beach  on  the  east  side. 

To  the  wiistward  of  Punta  de  Guauta,  and  3  miles  distant,  is  Punta  de  Bercantin; 
between  the  two,  and  about  a  mile  from  the  first,  is  the  little  bay  of  Guanta,  in  theinuuth 
of  which  lie  several  islets  and  rocks,  with  very  narrow  channels  between  them,  ihouit|i 
very  clean  and  navigable.  Within  the  bay  there  are  from  15  to  9  fathoms  water,  atliiilf 
a  cable's  length  from  the  shore  :  at  the  west  front  of  the  bay  a  reef  runs  off  nbout  J  ca- 
bles' length  ;  but,  by  keeping  over  to  the  eastern  side,  which  is  very  clean,  every  dilRcultv 
will  be  avoided. 
The  Punta  THE  PUNTA  DEL  BERGANTIN  has  n  foul  reef,  which  runs  off  atout  n  calilej 

del  Bergan-      length,  and   extends  about  a  mile  to  the  southward.     On  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  point 
Uh.  there  is  an  islet,  so  very  foul  all  round  as  not  to  leave  a  clear  passage  between  it  and  tiie 

point,  from  which  the  coast  continues  west,  forming  Borgaiitin  Bay,  the  southern  side  of 
which  has  a  foul  reef  that  borders  the  coast  westward  as  far  as  the  Morro  of  Biii'tcloaa, 
This  Morro  has  high  land,  lying  nearly  north  and  soutli  one  mile  in  extent,  uiidjiiJDed 
to  tho  main  land  by  a  very  narrow  isthmus,  or  tongue  of  .^und,  rather  more  thun  a  mile  in 
length. 

Tho  distance  between  Punta  del  Bergantin  and  the  Morro  of  Barcelona  is  4^  miles, 
and  the  coist  inclines  to  the  southward,  forming  a  large  bay  called  Pozuelos  Bay;  a'J 
this  track  of  shore,  which  is  a  sandy  beach  and  very  low  land,  sends  o(f  a  shallow  banka 
mile  into  the  sea.  Therefore,  in  navigating  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  it  is  lulvisublo  tosleer 
directly  from  Bergantin  Point  for  tho  north  jwint  of  tho  Morro,  which  is  stee)  mid  clean, 
and  may  bo  [lassod  within  a  cable's  length:  or,  should  it  bo  thought  preferable  to  j;o  into 
the  bay,  the  lead  must  be  kept  going,  to  a  oid  getting  into  less  than  7^  fatiioms  water, 
sandy  bottom. 

Tho  western  side  of  the  Morro  of  Barcelono  is  foul,  and  ought  not  to  be  approaclied 
nearer  than  two  cables'  leng'h  :  from  its  north  point  to  Punta  Maurica,  which  is  to  the 
southward  of  it,  the  distance  is  about  4  miles;  the  coast,  a  low  sandy  bunch,  rounds  in 
to  the  eastward;  and  in  this  part  the  River  of  Barcelona,  discharging  itself  into  the  sea, 
forms  a  large  bank  of  Handy  mud.  About  1^  mil)«  inland,  on  the  left  bank  of  tiie  river, 
stands  the  city  of  Barcelona.  To  anchor  in  tho  bay,  tho  lead  will  prove  the  best  guide, 
fur  being  very  shoal,  ouch  ship  may  take  a  bertli  suitable  to  its  draft  of  water. 


mm 


*^^<^<"ilP 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


449 


is  4^  miles, 
1()8  Hay;  a'J 
Liilliiw  Ijiinka 
tiiiMo  to  steer 
'■)  iiiiil  clean, 
|l)ie  tu  go  into 
IlioiDd  water, 

approaclieil 
■ch  id  lu  the 
\\],  rounds  in 
liiito  tliu  sea, 
lot"  till'  river, 
best  guide. 


On  the  coast  from  Cape  Manare,  besides  the  Caraca  Islanda,  already  noticed,  there  are 
veral  others,  called  the  Picudas,  the  Chimanas,  and  the  Borracha.     The  Great  Picuda 
fi  to  the  westward  of  the  West  Caraca,  with  which  it  forms  a  cliannel  rather  more 
C  n  a  mile  vnhe,  free  from  all  danger,  except  a  sunken  rock  that  lies  about  2  cables' 
1  nstli  to  the  eastward  of  the  east  point  of  Picuda.     This  isli.nd  lies  about  S.  W.  and 
M  E.  and  is  little  more  than  a  mile  in  length  :  its  shores  are  very  clean :  to  the  north- 
ffirdof  its  east  extremity  there  are  two  rocks — the  first  about  one,  and  the  other  three 
bles'  length  off.     About  S.  W.  by  W.  from  the  Great  Picuda,  at  the  distance  of  3| 
"'le3  lies  the  second    Picuda — an  islet  of  a  circular  figure,  about  3  cables'  length  in 
"ttent,  and  very  clean.     About  S.  S.  E.  from  it,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  is  the  east 
Chiinnnn,  another  islet  less  than  the  preceding,  and  equally  clean.     Two  miles  further 
«e3ti9the  east  point  of  the  second  Chimana,  which  lies  east  and  west,  about  IJ  mile  in 
I  njth  and  also  very  clean ;  to  the  eastward  of  it  are  two  little  islets,  the  newrest  being 
ilmtone  cable's  length  off  and  the  other  5  cables;  and  on  the  west  side  is  another  little    • 
tjet  about  a  cable's  length  distant.     About  S.  W.,  'i  cables'  length  from  the  west  point  of 
the  second  Chimana,  lies  the  east  point  of  the  Great  Chimana,  which  island  is  of  a  very 
irresnlar  figure,  and  in  its  greatest  extent,  about  E.  by  S.  and  W.  by  N.,  3i  miles.     To 
the  westward  of  it,  about  one-third  of  a  mile,  lies  the  West  Chimi.na,  joined  to  the  Great 
Chimana  by  a  shoal  of  rocks  and  snnd,  extending  a  full  half  mile  to  the  northward  of  the 
nortk  axtremity  of  the  Great  Chimana ;  on  this  shoal,   and  midway  between  the  two 
■liBtls,  there  is  an  islet ;  also  another  at  a  short  distance  from  the  west  extremity  of  the 
West  Chimana ;  and,  finally,  to  the  southward  of  the  east  part  of  the  Great  Chimana 
lies  the  South  Chimana;  that,  in  its  greatest  extent  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  measures  two 
miles.    This  island  forms  two  channels;    one  on  the  north  with  the  Great  Chimana, 
about  a  cable  and  a  half  wide,  and  very  clean,  with  a  depth  of  20  fathoms,  on  mud ;  and 
other  to  the  south,  between  the  island  and  Punta  del  Bergantin,  half  a  mil^  wide, 
and  very  clean ;  in  passing  through  it,  the  reef,  which  extends  about  a  cable's  length  from 
Bernantin  Point,  is  the  only  danger  to  be  avoided.      Between  the  Great  and  the  South 
Chimana,  there  are  several  islets,  all  very  clean. 

From  a  recapitulation  of  what  has  been  s,aid  of  the  Picudas  and  Chimanas,  it  appears 
that  these  islands  and  their  islets  are  clean  and  steep  to  ;  the  only  dangers  being  the  rock 
inn  the  east  of  the  Great  Picuda,  and  the  shoal  in  the  channel  between  the  Great  and  the 
West  Chimana ;  consequently,  all  the  channels  or  passages  between  these  islands  and 
their  islets  are  navigable,  although  some  of  them,  from  being  very  narrow,  are  not  so  eli- 
de for  large  ships ;  this  circumstance,  however,  is  a  matter  of  choice  for  the  navigator; 
lin  other  respects  he  has  no  hidden  danger  to  guard  against. 

BORRACHA  ISLAND,  (Drunken  Woman's  Island,)  is  about  3  miles  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  West  Chimana  :  it  lies  nearly  north  and  south,  in  which  direction  it  is  rather 
Lore  than  2  miles  in  length,  and  1^  at  its  greatest  breadth.  All  the  east  and  north  sides 
of  it  are  clean ;  but,  on  the  N.  W.,  a  very  foul  rocky  bank,  with  very  little  water  on  it, 
Kteiids  to  a  considerable  distance,  having  on  it  several  little  islets  :  all  of  which  should 
passed  on  the  outside,  at  2  cables'  length  distance  from  the  most  westerly.  From  the 
,juth  extremity  of  the  island  a  large  sand  bank  runs  off  about  S.  S.  V'''.,  on  which  are 
lituated  an  isl^t,  called  Borracha  ;  near  the  island,  two  small  islets,  called  the  Borrachitos, 
iiihedis'ince  of  two  large  miles  from  the  Borracha.  They  should  always  be  passed  on 
IP  south  side,  at  the  distance  of  3  cables'  length  from  the  southernmost  of  them  ;  for, 
'tween  them  aud  the  Borracha,  as  well  as  between  it  and  the  principal  island,  the  water 
very  shallow. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Barcelona  the  coast  trends  to  the  S.  W.  and  westward,  for  the 
ipace  of  32  miles,  to  the  Morro  of  Unare,  which  lies  about  W.  S.  W.  |  W.,  34  miles 
"  im  the  Morro  of  Barcelona.  It  thence  inclines  to  the  northward  of  west,  then  N.  W.; 
..1  lastly,  north  to  Capo  Codora,  distant  from  the  Morro  of  Unare  57  miles  N.  W.  by 
iv.  3  W.,  and  from  that  of  Barcelona,  85  miles  N.  76°  W. 

The  whole  of  this  const  is  low  land,  on  which  are  seen  the  Morros  of  Piritu,  and  of 

'nave,  distant  7  miles  from  each  other.     The  water  is  shallow  along  it,  but  it  is  vf  .-y  clean, 

jid  in  approaching  it  the  lead  will  be  a  sufficient  guide.      The  two  islands  of  Piritu  lie 

learlv  12  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  anchorage  of  Barcelona,  and  about  3i  miles  from 

le  shore;  they  lie  nearly  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.,  are  low  like  the  coast,  and  have  a 

)ef  extending  a  cable  and  a  halPs  length  from  them.     There  is  a  passage  between  the 

[0  islands,  but  it  is  hazardous  to  attempt,  on  account  of  the  reefs  on  each  side,  which 

ive  a  channel  of  only  2  cables'  length  wide,  with  5i  fathoms  water.     The  passage  be- 

een  the  islands  and  the  main  land  is  free  for  ships  of  any  size ;  and  in  going  through  it 

lere  is  no  necessity  for  any  other  guide  than  the  lead. 

Ahout  due  north  from  the  Morro  of  Roldar,  at  the  N.  W.  point  of  Margarita,  about 
I  miles,  lies  the  southernmost  of  seven  islets,  called  the  Hermanos,  or  Brothers:  which 
luthernmost,  at  the  distance  of  2  miles  therefrom,  is  called  Pico ;  and  from  it  to  tlie  next, 
bich  is  the  largest,  aud  called  Orquilla,  the  distance  is  3  miles ;  the  others  lie  to  the 


Borracha 
Island, 


29 


'^P^PfPPf  J«llii(li«niu  <  il,»ii. 


«i  ii» |fpiiw^nn«Ri|pi^ 


^^<^^<<i^"PMmiiipMRi" 


450 


Blanca. 


Tortuga. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

north  nnd  N.  N.  W.  of  it :  they  are  nil  very  clean  and  steep  to;  so  that  there*are  n 
soundings  in  the  pnennges  between  tliem.  " 

BLANCA. — To  the  westward  of  the  northernmost  of  the  Hermnnos,  nt  thedistnn 
of  74  iiiIIps,  lies  the  Island  Blancn,*  or  BInnquilla,  about  6  miles  in  extent  from  noith? 
soutl),  and  3  from  eiist  to  west :  it  is  very  flat  and  sterile,  and  the  coasts  are  very  clei  " 
except  the  S.  W.  point,  where  there  are  soverol  ridges  of  rocks  extending  nhout  3  cuhip ! 
length  from  the  shore ;  some  ports  of  the  west  side,  and  off  the  north  point,  where  ther' 
are  some  foul  rocks  extending  2  cables  from  the  shore.  On  the  N.  W.  part  there  isa* 
anchorage,  in  from  18  fathoms  nt  a  mile  from  the  shore,  to  6  or  7  at  3  cables'  length  from 
it;  nil  the  bottom  being  sand.  On  the  west  side,  about  half  way,  ot  a  cove  in  the  beach 
there  is  a  Cazimba,  spring,  or  well,  where  fresh  water  may  be  obtained.  '    ' 

TORTUGA. —  Westward  from  Mnrgnritn,  nt  the  distance  of  47  miles,  liestheeiisten,) 
of  this  Island  Tortuga,  (Turtle  Island,)  whicli  thence  extends  about  12  miles  to  the  wim 
ward,  nod  is  about  5  miles  at  its  greatest  breadth.  All  the  east  and  N.  E.  sides  nreverv 
clear,  except  at  Punta  Delgadu,  the  N.  E.  extremity,  where  n  reef  extends  off  about  nZ 
cables'  length:  the  south  side  is  also  dean  ;  but,  at  the  .S.  E.  |)artare  several  islets.  Thn 
west  point  of  the  island  is  named  Punta  de  Arenas,  from  which  to  the  north  point,  ciillerl 
Punta  Norte,  there  are  so  many  banks,  that  it  will  be  necessary  to  keep  the  lend  goin? 
while  passing  that  space.  On  this  side  there  is,  first,  Anguila  Key,  lying  about  half ! 
mile  from  the  shore,  the  intermediate  channel  being  very  foul  with  reefs  ;  second,  C'avo 
Hcrradura,  or  Horse-shoo  Key,  forming,  with  the  coast,  a  channel  of  one  milo  wide, but 


too  dangerous  to  bo  attempted  by  large  ships :  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  this  key,  nrijj. 
of  rocks  extends  about  2i  cables'  length  eastward;  thirdly,  the  Tortuguillos  Keys, two 
in  number,  entirely  surrounded  by  a  bank,  with  little  water  on  it.      The  nnchoi imc  jt 
between  the  Tortuguillos  and  its  coast :  it  may  be  entered  from  the  sAv 
lorth,  through  the  channel  formed  by  the  Tortuguillos  and  Herradiiiii  Key 
iruge,  and  in  all  the  channels,  the  greatest  depth  of  water  is  from  ()\\oU 


by  a  bank,  with  little  water  on  it.      The  nnclio'i  age  at 
this  island  is  between  the  Tortuguillos  and  its  coast :  it  may  be  entered  from  the  sAv 
or  from  the  nort'      "  •     -       •  ■  ••  .  .       ,     ^  ... 

At  the  anchorage,  imu  m  un  mo  tiiuuijeis,    uic   giciiitrst   uu|jiii  ui    wiiici  la  noai  lit  to*)  I 

fathoms,  with  sandy  bottom  in  the  middle.     In  going  in  tlie  only  care  required  is  uot  to 
go  into  a  less  depth  than  Gj  fathoms. 


Description  of  the  Coast  of  Caracas  and  the  Frontier  Islands,  from  Cape  Codtra  to  Cam 

St.  Roman.  ' 

Cape  Codcra.  CAPE  CODER  A,  a  place  well  known  on  this  coast,  is  a  very  round  morro,  or!,.. 
to  tlie  north  of  which,  about  a  mile,  a  tongue  of  low  land  projects,  and  is  so  clenntiinutl 
half  a  fable's  ItMigth  from  it  there  are  9  fathoms  water,  on  sandy  bottom.  On  the  west  I 
side  this  tongue  forms  a  very  fine  anchorage,  named  Pwerto  Corsarios,  or  Privateer's Ijav  I 
to  enter  which  it  is  only  uocessary  to  double  the  west  point  of  the  tongue,  close  to  wliich  I 
there  is  a  f'arallon,  or  rock,  and  anchor  so  soon  as  there  is  shelter  from  the  wind,  where- 1 
ever  the  depth  of  water  may  be  suitable;  with  an  understanding,  thatat  2 cables' Icinili I 
from  the  shore  there  are  7  fathoms  water,  on  sandy  bottotn.  At  the  south  extremity  o 
the  bay,  the  coast,  for  a  sjiaco  of  about  3  cables'  length,  is  a  low  swampy  beiuh,  to  tin 
Westward  of  which  it  is  foul,  with  a  reef  stretching  about  half  a  cable's  length  froiiiiiel 
shore.  The  west  point  of  the  bay,  named  Caracoles,  has  on  the  north  side  a  rockckiel 
to  it,  from  which  a  reef  extends  about  a  cable's  length. 

From  Cape  Codera  the  high  mountains  of  Caracas  are  visible,  extending  enst  aiil 
west  many  leagues.  Nearly  14  miles  N.  i  W,  from  the  cape,  lies  an  islet,  which  ap- 1 
peors  like  a  sliip  under  sail ;  it  is  very  clean,  except  nbout  n  musket  shot  to  the  iiorthj 
where  there  are  two  sunken  rocks,  having  between  thoin  and  tlie  islet  a  cliunaelotgriiati 
depth.  I 

From  Point  Carocoles  the  coast  runs  in  the  direction  of  W.  N.  W.,  a  distance  aim 
miles,  to  Point  Mat^pa,  whence  it  trends  W.  by  S.  24  miles,  to  Point  Chuspa,  which  lil 
the  eastern  extremity  of  an  anchorage  of  the  same  name.  All  this  space  is  bordeid  ty [ 
a  reef,  wliich  extends  one  mile  northward  from  Point  Maspa,  mid  terminates  nt  point  C'Iim.' 
pa  ;  for  this  reason  it  should  not  bo  coasted  at  a  less  distance  than  2  miles. 

The  anchoriige  of  Chuspa  is  excellent:  from  tlio  Point  Chuspu,  which  is  the  N.E.I 
point  of  the  bay,  the  coast  runs  about  S.  W.  for  a  milo  nnd  a  half,  to  the  tnouth  uf  ihel 
River  Chuspa,  on  the  oast  bunk  of  which  stands  the  town  of  Chuspa,  about  two  cables'] 
length  frou)  the  beach. 

From  the  mouth  of  the  river  the  coast  rounds  to  the  westward  for  the  distance  of  Ij 
mile,  to  Point  Curuau;  to  the  southward  of  which,  at  about   ono-third  of  a  mile  iiilandj 
stands  the  town  of  Curuau.     From  Point  Chusjja  to  that  of  Curuau  the  shore  is  veryj 
clean,  and  the  only  guide  required  for  entering  the  anchorage  will  bo^the  lead;  but,  Iroml 


*  Mr.  \V.  Wiiddy,  iiiiiHtor  of  H.  M.  S.  L'Aniiablc,  in  bis  roamrk  says,  "This  island  ajipcars  low,  »iii| 
whitt;  l;llfl'^4.     You  Uiiy  sail  round  it  without  the  leuBt  diinger.  uudnmy  anuliorin  tljed>:|illiolliorSliilli-r 


oins,  in  Dumpier  s  Bay,  lniviaR  the  S.  W.  puiat  of  llio  island  b. 
'i'bu  gruuud  is  a  white  saudy  uuze.    The  currcat  sets  regular  I'l 


1).  uriagN.  J  E.,uhoutthe  distuncoul'aniiie.l 


uui  t.  to  west."— March  1),  I/9(i, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


451 


jtCurunu  the  coast  is  very  foul,  with  a  reef  extending  2  cables'  off.  and  continuing 
to  La  Pun'ft  ^^^  Frayle,  (Friar's  Point,)  with  a  fiiriillon.  or  rocli,  of  the  same  name, 
Inut  tt  cable's  length  from  it.  This  point  is  nearly  4  miles  from  Point  Curuau ;  between 
h  two  points  there  is  a  projection  to  the  north,  called  the  Sabana;  and  to  the  north  of 
Pes  a  banlv.  the  south  edge  of  which  is  about  a  mile  from  the  shore  :  its  greatest  extent 
•'  bout  a  niilw  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.,  on  rocky  bottom;  and,  although  the  general  depth 
""it  is  fio™  8  ^°  '^^  fathoms,  in  some  places  there  are  only  3i,  and  even  less  than  3  ;  for 
°"i,Ui  reason  it  should  be  carefully  avoided.     ^-  ■'      -      •■      "         -  •  ■•  ^' 


It  lies  3  miles  from  the  anchorage  of  Chus- 


I  ■  andi  a*  *"  fetching  that  place  it  will  be  necessary  to  pass  near  to  Point  Chuspa,  there 
r  be  but  little  risk  in  approaching  it;  it  will,  however,  be  entirely  cleared,  by  taking 
r°e  to  be  to  the  northward  of  the  parallel  of  Point  Chuspa,  before  crossing  the  meridian 

From  Point  del  Frayle  the  direction  of  the  coast  is  S.  86°  W.,  for  the  distance  of  29i 
„;ia»  to  the  anchorage  of   Lugunyra,*  on  every  part  of 


Ijiiles,  to  the 


hiilf  ftini'O'  "'"  ®^*"*  "'  "^  '"1*''**''-  shot's  distance,  from  the  shore 
THE  POllT  OF  L.\(»UAYRA,  with  respect  to  its  commo 


which  a  ship  may  be  anchored 


a  distanco  of  9' I 


THE  POllT  OF  L.\(»UAY  KA,  with  respect  to  its  commerce,  is  the  principal  one    The  Port  of 
I  this  const:  it  cannot  properly  be  called  either  a  harbor  or  a  roadstead,  but  a  continued    Laguayra. 
it  with  a  little  sinuosity  between  Point  Carabellora  on  the  east,  and  Cape  Blanco  on 
lUwest;  consequently,  it  affords  no  shelter  from  winds  in  the  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  quar- 
I,  rs'  and  the  trade  wind  from  the  eastward,  which  constantly  prevails,  sends  in  a  heavy 
I,    To  prevent  ships  from  thwarting  the  sea  when  the  wind  subsides,  or  falls  calm, 
Lvare  generally  moored  with  a  cable  astern  to  the  westward  :  the  bottom  is  good  hold- 
•/srouiid,  and  at  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore  there  are  nearly  3  fathoms  water.     In 
his  anchorage,  it  is  seldom  that  any  other  wind  than  the  trade  is  experienced,  which, 
linwever,  soiiietimes,  for  short  intervals,  does  veer  to  the  wesi ;  in  which  case,  the  posi- 
ionof  the  ship  should  bo  changed,  and  her  head  planed  to  the  westward  :  there  are  seldom 
fcnvland  winds,  but  there  are  squalls  from  the  S.  E.,  during  the  rainy  season.    Although. 
toni  the  nature  of  its  locality,  Laguayra  cannot  be  considered  as  a  port  or  an  anchorage, 
Cet  fioin  the  nature  of  the  climate,  it  is  both,  in  which  with  fresh,  or  indeed  with  hard 
tales  ships  at  anchor  are  not  exjjosed  to  danger.f     Ships  from  sea,  bound  to  the  nnchor- 
mll  Laguayra,  will  have  a  good  mark  in  a  very  high  and  steep  peak,  called  the  Peak 
fcf  Cares,  situated  about  9  miles  inland,  and  20  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  anchorage. 
Ataiiout'lO  miles  to  the  westward  of  this  peak  is  another,  called  the  Peak  of  Niguatar ; 
y  thence  a  range  of  mountains  extending  towards  Laguayra,  among  which  the  Silla  de 
Caracns,  (Saddle  of  Caracas.)  and   Mount  Avila,  may  be  very  well  distinguished ;  the 
titer  being  about  two  miles  inland,  and  nearly  on  the  meridian  of  the  anchorage.     It  is 
iiivisable  to  make  the  land  well  to  windward  ;  there  will  then  be  no  danger  in  running 
Jown  to  the  anchorage.    Cal)les  are  sometimes  injured  here  by  some  anciiors  lost  by  the 
fcnslishin  one  of  their  expeditions  against  this  place. 
Froia  the  nnchoriige  of  Laguayra  the  coast  first  runs  west  for  the  distance  of  six  miles, 
ind  thence  west  by  south  twenty  and  a  half  miles,  to  the  little  harbor  of  Cruz,  and  is  . 
ufficiently  clean  to  bo  run  down  at  the  distance  of  a  mile.     This  port  is  a  small  indent 
ji  the  coast,  with  an  entrance  about  one  and  a  half  cable's  length  wide,  and  two  cables  in 
[stent  inward  ;  very  clean  ;  for  at  half  a  ship's  lengtVi  from  the  coast,  all  round,  there  are 
lur  ^id  a  half  fathoms  water.     At  its  south  extremity  a  little  river  discharges  its  waters, 
LolTits  eastern  point,  called  Point  la  Cruz,  there  is  a  rock  close  to  it.     Were   it  of 
teater  capacity,  this  anchorage  would  be  excellent ;  but  it  is  so  small  as  to  be  eligible  for 
mall  \.jS3e!s  only. 

I  From  Point  la  Cruz  the  coast  trends  S.  82°  W.,  a  distance  of  23  miles,  to  the  Bay  of 
(ata.    It  is  all  very  clean,  and  may  be  approached  with  safety  to  the  distance  of  a  mile. 


'AbnutSmilosto  tliernstwardof  Laeaayra  is  tlio  little  villnse  ot"  Muciito,  sitanted  in  a  smnll  bay  of 
iiliiiiiiie,  tinii  isiuicxccllontpiaco  for  wiitorins.  'I'lio  wntori.^  proounid  from  three  iron  pijios.  or  spouts, 
kant about  iil  lent  IVoin  the  liciK'li.  Thnre  i>t  Kood  niiciiorasn  all  ovnr  tku  buy,  and  liie  souiuliiiKs  are 
trv  regular  in  iipproiichiai  the  watoriiiu'  pluco.  Oti  i^oinsr  in  towiirds  thn  village  keep  the  wateriag 
%n  in  a  line  witli  the  N.  W  corner  ot'  the  cliiipel,  and  the  hi;;hcst  coeou-nut  tree,  over  tlie  east  angle 
jlhclbrt,  west  1)1' the  viiliiL'fi. 
I  Tliere  is  a  df  ptii  of  Ju  I'lithoms  at  about  throe-quarters  of  a  inUe  Ironi  the  shore,  with  a  street  of  the 

iU.ii."!, close  hy  the  wiiteriiij;  place,  upeii,  or  enil  on;  and  the  oafternniost  point  about  a  sail's  breadth 
Jpciiof  the  point  to  the  westward  of  it.  Koniark  book  of  II.  'S\.  S.  Salisbury,  Capt.  John  Wilson,  1819. 
ftCaptiiin  P.  Chiuiiir  says.  "  Laj^uayra  cannot  be  called  any  thing  else  than  a  dangerous  roadstead ; 
Vastlie  trade  wind  blows  right  along  shore,  by  being  jirepared  n  ship  may  always  clear  the  land. 
|he  town  and  Ibrti'icationa,  which  may  bo  dii'tingiiished  at  a  long  distance,  mark  the  anchorage;  the  lor- 
ier  bearing  S.  !)■  li;.,  in  a  depth  of  10  fathoms,  at  1 J  mile  from  the  shore,  is  as  secure  as  any  other.  The 
■IWsare  very  heavy,  and  oftentimes  it  is  dangerous  to  attempt  landing.  The  ground  is  very  bad  for 
lliiiii',  and  in  a  good  strong  sea  breeze  von  nittv  expect  to  bring  your  anchors  home." 
[Capt  G.  G.  Lenuock,  in  his  remarks  on  this  jilaee,  observes  that,  "although  during  the  hurricane  of 
llo,at  the  Leeward  Islands  they  did  not  experience  any  wind  here,  yet  there  was  a  ver^;  heavy  swell  at 
leanchoruge,  which  tlrove  the  vessels  from  their  anchors  on  shore,  and  dashed  them  to  pieces  against  the 

kk«." 


ip««imPiiPPlinMH«ppiPHipp 


452 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

or  less.     About  2  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  this  bay,  nnd  6  miles  inland,  will  be  gi 
Monte  de  la  Meseta,  (Table  Mountiiin.)  and  at  about  the  same  distance  inland,  on  the  m  l 
ridian  of  Cata,  another,  called  Mount  Ocumure.     These  will  serve  as  marks  for  takin  I 
Cata  Bay,  or  the  anchorage  of  Ocumare,  which  is  farther  to  the  westword.  M 

Cata  Boy  is  half  a  mile  wide  at  the  enti'ance,  ami  about  as  much  in  depth.  At  th  I 
eastern  point  there  is  an  islet  lying  almost  close  to  it;  and  from  this  point  the  shor'l 
trends  to  the  south  to  the  extremity  of  the  bay,  where  a  river  fulls  into  it,  throwing  up! I 
bank,  with  little  water  on  it,  which  extends  almost  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore.  Kv,L  i 
other  part  of  the  bay  is  clean,  with  a  depth  of  water  from  25  to  H  fathoms,  about  U  2} 
ble's  length  from  the  beach.  ' 

Two-thirds  of  a  mile  westward  from  the  west  point  of  Cata  Bay,  is  the  eastern  pointl 
of  tlie  Bay  of  Ocumare,  in  which  there  is  very  good  anchorage.  An  ialot  lios  otl'theeajt! 
point,  in  a  N.  W.  direction  forming  with  it  a  strait,  or  channel,  of  about  hiilf  a  cable's  f 
length  wide,  very  clean,  and  with  a  depth  not  less  than  6  fathoms.  In  taking  the  anchor.  I 
age  in  this  bay,  pass  close  to  the  islet,  and  steer  to  the  south  until  shelter  is  obtiiinud  from  I 
the  wind ;  then  anchor  iu  6  or  6i  fathoms,  on  sand,  at  about  a  cable's  length,  or  a  i 
more,  southward  of  the  islet.  The  bay  has  many  banks  in  it,  but  the  load  Is  aeoojl 
guide.  Care  must  however  be  taken  ;  for  as  the  anchorage  narrows  to  the  southward  f 
a  large  ship  may  possibly  touch  the  ground,  unless  attention  be  paid  to  luff,  and  stopj 
headway  in  time.  A  river  fulls  into  this  bay  to  the  southward  of  the  islet,  having  oajul 
banks  u  few  fishermen's  huts.  f 

Two  miles  and  a  half  westward  from  the  islet  of  Ocumare,  lies  the  east  point  of  a  bay 
called  Cienega  de  Ocumare,  (the  Bog  or  Quagmire  of  Ocumare,)  whicli  is,  in  fact  no] 
more  than  a  swampy  opening  iu  the  land,  and  which,  between  shoals  of  a  reef,  hits al 
channel  of  12  to  4i  fathoms  water.  The  west  point  of  this  buy  is  formed  by  im  isoliHejl 
morro  that  rises  on  the  low  land.  The  anchorage  is  very  bad,  and  fit  only  for  small  coast-f 
lug  vessels. 

One  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  Morro  of  Cienega,  is  the  Harbor  of  Turia-i 
mo,  which  is  excellent,  and  capable  of  receiving  every  class  of  ships.  At  the  exteriorl 
points  it  is  about  a  mile  broad,  but  decreases  inwards  to  two-thirds  of  a  mllo.  Fromibel 
entrance  to  its  south  extremity,  is  about  two  miles,  and  the  general  depth,  in  mid-cL, 
uel,  is  ii-om  25  to  18  fathoms,  on  mud  and  sand.  All  its  shores  are  bordered  by  a  reef  I 
extending  off  about  one-third  of  a  cable  :  therefore,  by  not  approaching  nearer  tlmn  half  a  I 
cable's  length,  all  danger  will  be  avoided.  At  the  farther  extremity  of  the  harbor, diel 
river  Turiamo  discharges  itself  on  a  sandy  beach.  Off  the  east  point,  at  a  cable's  le 
iu  a  N.  W.  direction,  lies  Turiamo  Islet. 

From  the  harbor  of  Turiamo,  westward,  at  the  distance  of  9  miles,  is  Porto  Cab  . 
This  part  of  the  shore  is  very  clean,  and  may  be  coasted  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,! 
There  are  various  detached  islands  lying  off  it  to  the  eastward  of  Porto  Cubello;  audl'orl 
sailing  by  or  between  them,  sufficient  information  will  be  obtained  by  inspcting  the  PlaQi 
of  the  Port,  published  at  the  Hydrographicul  Office,  which  includes  all  these  isliinds.* 

Porto  Cabello  is  a  channel  formed  by  several  islets  and  tongues  of  low  land,  cover 
with  mangroves.  Ships  desirous  of  entering  must  be  warped  into  it;  audtiioseoft 
largest  size  may  be  made  fast  to  the  mole,  not  recjuiring  even  the  use  of  a  pltuik  tola 
from  them.  The  mouth  of  this  channel  opens  into  a  spacious  bay,  with  excellent  a 
chorage,  in  10  to  12  fathoms,  sandy  mud,  and  well  sheltered  from  the  trade  wind,  fiei 
in  4i  fathoms,  will  be  near  enough  to  the  beach,  which  is  rocky  and  foul.  ThebestI 
berth  is  about  west  from  the  harbor's  mouth,  at  the  distance  of  3  or  4  cables'  lengtli,in| 
11  or  12  fathoms.  In  this  harbor,  all  Spanish  merchant  ships  that  go  to  LnguHyia,arel 
careened,  and  winter.  Each  shij),  so  soon  as  she  has  delivered  her  cargo  ut  Liiguiiyra,r 
proceeds  to  Porto  Cabello  for  greater  security,  to  receive  such  repairs  as  iniiy  he  iieccs-j 
sary,  and  take  in  \y,ut  of  the  homeward  bound  cargo.  She  then  returns  to  Ligiuyraj 
to  complete  her  lading.  At  Porto  Cabello  there  is  always  a  body  of  good  shijiwrigl 
&c.,  ahliuugh  it  is  not  very  numerous.  Ships  of  war  should  only  enter  the  harboi  wbenl 
it  ma}  he  necessary  to  careen  them  ;  for  other  purposes  it  is  not  only  useless,  butitisl 
prejudicial.  They  should,  therefore,  always  remain  in  the  bay;  for  the  excessive  lieatl 
in  tile  harbor,  the  mangroves  with  which  it  is  surrounded,  added  to  any  degree  of  lutein- [ 


*It  appeurs,  by  the  remarks  of  Captain  Jfunes  Murray,  of  H.  M.  ship  Valorous,  tlmt  tiiere  iaietji 
good  and  spacious  aucliorago  lietweHn  Isla  Lar^a,  or  Long  Island,  and  the  main,  and  about  liinite Ml 
windward  of  Porto  Cabello.  There  is  pleaty  oi  room  for  a  large  Aeet,  in  10  or  12  falhojns  wiiter.  Voul 
may  sail  into,  or  out  from,  this  anchorage,  through  between  any  of  the  islands ;  but  tlio  liest  iiasMMBl 
considered  to  be  round  the  east  end  of  Long  Island,  between  it  and  the  main,  in  order  to  take  abcrtliwUl 
to  windward. 

The  Valorous  anchored  here  on  February  27, 182;},  in  eleven  fathoms,  with  the  S.  W.  end  of  Lonfl 
Island  bearing  N.  N.  \V.,  by  compass,  distant  two  cables'  length;  the  east  end  of  the  island  eutt, iwJ llie| 
fjrt  on  the  hill  above  Porto  Cabello,  VV.  S.  W.,  distant  3  or  4  miles.    This  is  n  very  good  place  to 
wood ;  and  fresh  water  may  be  procured  from  the  river  on  the  main  a  little  to  leeward. 

It  is  necessary  to  bfl  cautious  of  a  shoal  that  lies  about  a  cable's  length  to  the  soutiiward  of  tlie*ejt| 
end  of  Long  Island. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


463 


lofrance,  occasion  almost  immediate  attacks  of  puti'id  fevers  and  the  black  vomit,  both  of 
Ifhich  are  very  futol  to  Europeans. 

The  coast  to  leeward,  or  to  the  westward  of  Porto  Cabello,  forms  a  great  boy,  called 
iTucacas.  or  the  Gulf  of  Triste,  (Doleful,  or  Dreary  Gulf,)  in  which  there  are  several 
Iklels.  With  the  trade  winds  it  is  a  lee  shore,  and  rather  dangerous.  Sliips  from  Eu- 
,j  should  keep  cleor  of  it.  as  there  can  be  no  inducement  to  take  them  in.  Point  Tu- 
Lcas,  the  north  point  of  this  gulf,  bears  N.  28°  W.,  25  miles  from  the  mouth  of  Porto 
I  Cabello:  therefore,  vessels  bound  westward  from  that  port  should  steer  about  N.  by  W., 
iDiitil  they  ore  abreast  of  Point  Tucacas,  or  N.  N.  W.,  if  they  intend  to  keep  close  in  with 
Ixp  point,  in  order  to  take  the  anchorage  at  it,  called  Chichiriviche. 
I  Point  Tucacas,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  light,  is  formed  by  a  low  swampy  land,  cov- 
L,ed  with  Mangroves,  which  projects  out  from  the  high  lond  about  a  mile.  On  the  east 
likle  of  it  there  is  a  key,  about  a  mile  in  length  from  S.  E.  to  N.  W.,  called  Sombrero,  be- 
ItweeD  which  and  the  coast  there  is  a  channel  barely  half  a  mile  wide;  and  although  there  are 
1 11  fathoms  water  in  it,  it  is  dangerous  from  shoals,  and  the  reefs  extending  from  the  coast. 
L  key  on  the  N.  E.  side  of  it  is  also  surrounded  by  a  reef  of  two  cables'  breadth,  which  should 
I  not  be  approached  at  less  than  a  mile  distant.  From  Point  Tucacas,  which  is  to  west- 
Iward  of  the  most  northerly  port  of  Sombrero  Key,  the  coast  runs  about  N.  W.  It  is 
I  low  and  foul,  with  a  reef  half  o  mile  broad,  which  extends  so  far  as  the  mouth  of  the  harbor 
I  of  Chichiriviche,  distant  3  miles  from  the  point.  This  harbor  is  formed  by  low  lands  co- 
hered with  mangroves ;  and,  although  well  sheltered  from  all  winds,  with  Bi  fathoms, 
Itnod  holding  ground,  the  entrnnce  to  it  is  a  little  difficult  on  account  of  shoals  and  reefs. 
I  The  east  point,  called  Chichiriviche,  presents  a  front  of  rather  more  than  a  mile  in  length, 
Ifrom  which  a  reef  runs  off  about  three  cables'  length,  having  on  it  several  islets  that  must 

passed  on  the  outside.     To  the  north  of  these  there  is  a  key,  called  Peraza,  with  a 

1  reef  nil  round  it,  half  a  cable  broad.  This  key,  and  the  islands  off  the  point,  form 
|a channel  two  cables'  length  wide,  with  upwards  of  7  fathoms  water.  To  the  westward 
lof  Peraza  Key  lies  another,  colled  Chichiriviche  Key,  larger  than  the  former,  and  also 
Isurrounded  by  a  reef  a  cable's  length  broad.  Between  these  two  there  is  a  channel 
Irather  more  than  two  cables'  length  wide,  with  6  and  7  fathoms  woter  in  it.  To  the  west 
lof  Chichiriviche  Key  lies  the  west  point  of  the  harlior,  forming  between  them  a  cliannel 
|of  3J  cables'  length  wide,  with  5i,  6,  and  7i  fathoms.  There  are,  however,  two  shoals 
Iid  it,  with  only  2  fathoms  water  over  them.  A  half  a  mile  north  from  Chichiriviche  Key, 
Itiiere  is  n  large  one,  called  Salt  Key,  from  the  salterns  in  it.  This  key  is  also  surrounded 
Ibyareef,  nearly  a  cable's  length  broad,  except  on  the  S.  W.  part.  Finally,  about  N. 
IbyE.,  at  the  distance  of  14  mile  from  Salt  Key,  lies  Borracho  Key,  which  is  very 
Ifoul,  with  a  reef  extending  half  a  mile  from  the  N.  E.  and  S.  points  of  it.  All  this  part 
lof  the  sea  just  described  is  of  so  regular  a  bottom,  that  at  somewhat  more  than  one  half 
iBrailofrom  the  coast  there  are  64  fathoms,  which  depth  continues  so  far  as  2  miles  north 
lof  Borracho  Key,  where  there  are  14  fathoms,  on  sandy  mud.  To  enter  this  harbor, 
lobserve  that  on  getting  abreast  of  the  northernmost  part  of  Sombrero  Key,  which  should 
[always  be  passed  on  its  outside,  place  the  ship's  head  towards  Peraza  Key,  and  on  ap- 
Iproaching  it  steer  west,  so  as  to  pass  in  the  middle  of  the  strait  between  it  and  the  islets 
loffthe  point,  until  Peraza  Key  bears  N.  E.  by  E.,  and  then  S.  W.  by  W.,  edging  towards 
Ithe  south,  so  soon  as  the  largest  islet  off  Point  Chichiriviche  bears  east ;  thence  run  un- 
Ider  shelter  of  the  point,  luffing  up  to  S.  S.  E.,  and  there  anchor  in  64  fathoms,  mud. 
■The  plan  of  this  harbor  will  show  all  that  is  necessary  to  be  done,  either  in  going  in  or 
|coinin<;  out. 

From  the  Harbor  of  Chichiriviche  the  direction  of  the  coast  is  N.  N.  W.  J  W..  for 
lie  distance  of  J  8  miles,  to  Point  St.  Juau ;  the  ground  in  all  that  track  is  so  regular,  that 
latthe  distance  of  4  uiiles,  there  are  only  14  fathoms  water  ;  the  only  danger  is  a  small 
il,  called  La  Piragua,  lying  off  a  little  point,  named  Mnnatie,  about  four  and  a  quarter 
Imiles  before  arriving  at  Point  St.  Juan  :  it  does  not,  however,  extend  more  than  a  mile 
Ifrom  the  shore. 

Point  St.  Juan  forms,  on  its  west  side,  a  large  bay,  but  so  shallow,  that  at  a  mile  from 
Ithe  beach,  there  are  no  more  than  34  fathoms  water.  N.  W.  of  the  point  there  are  two 
Ikeys;  the  first,  half  a  mile  distant,  called  St.  Juan's  Key:  and  the  second,  nearly  2  miles 
Ifarther,  named  the  N.  W.  Key.  On  the  N.  W.  side  of  Point  St.  Juan,  a  reef  stretches 
loff  about  2  cables'  length  ;  and  the  Key  of  St.  Juan  is  surrounded  by  another  about  half 
Itlwt  breadth.  The  N.  W.  Key  is  also  surrounded  by  a  reef  that  extends  out  about 
'  a  mile  from  its  S.  E.  point,  having  on  it  several  keys  and  islets.  The  anchoi'- 
|«ge  is  to  the  S.  W.  of  St.  Juan's  Key  :  in  order  to  take  it,  it  will  be  necessary  to  pass 
Ito  the  northward  and  westward  of  that  key.  and  anchor  in  any  depth  of  water  suitable 
Ito  the  ship's  draught.  It  is  directed  to  pass  outside  of  St.  Juan's  Key,  because  the  chan- 
jnol  formed  between  it  and  the  point  is  eligible  for  small  vessels  only;  not  alone  for  its 
prrowness  and  the  foulness  of  the  reef,  but  because  the  greatest  depth  of  water  is  only 
'1  fathoms. 


Light. 


454 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  Rogues. 


From  Point  St.  Juan  the  dii-pction  of  the  const  is  nbout  N.  fiO°  W.,  forfhedwtnn  J 
of  19  miles,  to  Point  Ubero,  the  whol«  Hpiico  being  clenn,  nnd  the  (htptlig  xee\i\,  \ 
but  there  is  ii  farullon,  or  rock,  lying  near  ii  rocky,  or  clirt'y  piirt  of  the  Bhore,  nhnJ 
8  miles  from  toint  St.  Juan,  ciiik'd  Penon  del  Soldiido.  On  Iho  wost  side  of  Poj'j 
Ubero  there  is  a  bay,  but  being  very  shallow,  it  scarcely  atl'ords  any  sholter  fminf  J 
Bhips  from  the  trade  wind.  About  N.  N.  W.,  one  and  a  half  mile  from  this  point,  Hk.! 
is  n  bank,  over  which  the  least  depth  is  four  and  a  half  fathoms  :  on  it  thoro  nrn  c./i 
loose  rocks. 

From  Point  Ubero  to  that  of  Znmuro  tlie  distance  is  12  miles  N.  W.  by  W.;  andfromi 
Point  Zamuro  the  coast  runs  N.  77°  W.,  forming  various  sinuosities,  for  the  distiuice  A 
25  and  a  half  miles,  to  Point  Manzanilln  ;  and  thence  S.  83°  W.,  14  miles,  to  Point  TavJ 
matayma.  All  this  coast  is  cluan,  and  the  soundings  regular,  requiring  no  otlicr  guiilii 
than  the  lead  to  run  along  it  at  hidfu  league  distance;  and  in  the  inteiior  mo  scvitifl 
heights  that  may  be  seen  far  at  sea.  Hetween  the  Points  Monzanilla  and  'rnviniii3y|,,J 
the  coost  bends  in  to  the  southward;  nnd  at  the  distance  of  5  miles  S.  f>2^  W'.  tiunitlnL 
former,  is  the  Bay  of  Cumarebo,  being  a  sandy  beach,  so  called  ;  tlie  town  of  tlie  mnX 
name  standing  ou  a  hill  at  the  distance  of  3  miles  S.  K.  from  it.  N.  N.  W.,  G^  miles I'loml 
the  sandy  beach,  and  N.  G5°  W.,  7i  miles  from  Point  Mouzanillii,  lies  the  rocky  hiinkolT 
Cumarebo,  with  5s  fathoms  wnteron  it,  ond  from  11  to  18  fathoms  very  near  to  it.  FroJ 
Point  Taymatayma  the  coast  trends  S.  W.  by  W.,  about  4  miles,  to  Point  des  Friivl(.)L 
on  the  east  side  of  the  Bay  of  La  Vela  de  Coro,  This  bay  has  on  ancliornge,  inid.jnl 
proceeding  to  it,  no  other  guide  than  the  lead  is  required,  as  the  bottom  is  rcj;ulHr  m, J 
clean.  At  the  S.  E.  pr>rt  of  the  bay  stands  the  town  of  La  Vela  de  Coro  ;  nnd  aliouttwol 
miles  inland  to  the  eastward  of  it,  an  Indian  Village,  called  Carrizal.  The  Kivcr  C'oiol 
falls  into  the  sea  1^  mile  west  of  the  town.  I 

From  the  River  Coro  the  coast  turns  abruptly  to  N.  W.  %  N.,  forming  a  chnin  of  sanj 
hills  about  ID  miles  in  length,  uniting  the  Peninsula  of  Paraguano  with  the  const;  tlie<el 
sand  hills  are  called  the  Isthmus  of  Medanos,  or  Sand  Hills.  The  eastern  ('iiiif<t  of  tlii)| 
Peninsula  trends  true  north  for  13  miles,  to  Point  Aurii  ula,  which  bears  N.  24"  W,  fniul 
the  bay  of  Coro,  and  distant  33  miles  :  all  the  coast  has  very  regular  souudingtt,  there  be-l 
ing  18  fathomb  at  the  distance  of  10  miles  from  it.  I 

From  Point  Auricula  the  coast  trends  from  N.  by  W.  to  N.  W.  \  N.,  a  distance  of  IcJ 
miles  to  Point  Tumatey  ;  and  thence  about  W.  N.  W.,  3.J  miles,  to  Ciipts  Sun  Rdniiml 
the  northernmost  land  of  the  Peninsula.  The  mountain  of  Santa  Anna,  on  the  Pei)ii]su.| 
la  Paraguana,  may  be  seen  from  the  sea  at  the  distance  of  many  leaguers. 

Due  north  from  Cape  Codera,  at  the  distance  of  23i  leagues,  lies  the  island  of  Orchiliil 
rather  flat;  its  greatest  extent  is  from  east  to  west.  On  its  north  coast  are  some  ]itak«, 
tlie  highest  of  which  is  at  its  western  extreuiity.  Off  the  east  end  a  key  runsiotliel 
northward  about  3  miles ;  and  to  the  westward  of  it,  a  great  rfc/ extends  in  tlmtdirec-l 
tion,  nearly  half  the  length  of  the  island:  there  are  several  keys  on  the  leef.  Alliiiel 
rest  of  the  coast  is  clean,  and  may  be  a|)proached  to  a  cable's  length.  On  the  S,  W,  part,! 
near  the  western  extremity,  there  is  a  very  clean  sandy  beach,  in  front  of  which  tlicieijf 
good  anchorage,  well  sheltered  from  the  trade  wind,  in  G  and  7  fathoms  water,  wiiliinil 
cable  and  u  half  of  Iho  beach.  Haifa  mile  W.  N.  W.  from  the  west  point  of  the  islanJj 
there  is  a  high  rock,  very  clean  and  steep,  forming  a  passoge  eligible  for  siiips  of 
burthen. 

S.  W.  i  W.  from  Orchila,  and  S.  E.  by  E.  3  E.  from  the  east  end  of  the  Rorcii9,therel 
is  a  shoal  with  3  fathoms  water  ;  the  form  of  the  shoal  is  nearly  round,  and  is  iibuutll| 
mile  round.     Long,  corrected  by  the  Roccas,  06^  27',  hit.  11°  42'. 

The  ROQUE8. — Twenty-two  miles  to  the  westward  of  Orchila  lie  tlie  Roqiipsjni 
assemblage  of  k)W  keys  raised  on  a  very  dangerous  reef.  This  grouj)  occupies  iisiiacef 
of  12  miles  from  north  to  south,  and  23  from  east  to  west ;  of  which  the  S.  E.  Key, 
named  Grande,  is  i!  miles  from  cast  to  west,  and  nearly  the  same  in  breadth.  To  lliel 
westward  of  it  is  Key  Sal,  ujiwards  of  7  miles  in  length,  nearly  east  and  west,  veiy 
narrow ;  and  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  Key  Sal,  there  lie  a  great  nuiiibtr  oS 
smaller  ones,  without  any  passage  between  them.  The  northernmost  group  wn^Am 
of  El  Roque,  nearly  two  mdes  in  length,  E.  by  .S.  and  W.  by  N.;  the  French  KmJ 
four  in  number;  the  N.  E.  Key,  Naman's  Key,  nnd  Pirate  Key.  All  the  exteriorkey^ 
on  the  edge  of  the  reef  may  be  passed  nt  a  mile  distance,  exce])t  on  the  nai-tern  sidej 
whore  the  reef  extends  upwards  of  three  miles  beyond  them.  The  pnssnu'es  bi'tweei 
the  keys  must  not  be  attempted,  as  most  of  them  are  barred  by  tlie  reef,  except  uij 
tlie  weft  side  of  El  Roque  Key,  where  there  is  on  entrance  into  a  very  (ino  bay,  forraeij 
by  the  other  keys  and  reefs,  in  which  there  are  from  13  to  20  fathoms  water;  bnti 
foul  rocky  bottom  frequently  does  great  damage  to  the  cables.  The  anchonise  is  onl 
the  west  side  of  the  key,  in  17  or  18  fathoms  water,  on  sand  ond  mud,  nnd  about  tbreej 
cables'  length  from  the  beucli.  The  Roque  Key  may  be  easily  distinguished  by  seveiaf 
peaks  on  it,  that  may  be  seen  at  a  moderate  distance.  It  will  bo  most  prudent  tu  givd 
nil  these  keys  a  wide  berth,  as  the  vicinity  of  them  will  be  perilous  to  a  ship,  particuliirljj 
at  uigiit. 


BtUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


466 


he  Rorciis,  tlierd 


LionTHOWSE. — Thnre  is  a  Lighthouse  hniltling  on  Cnyo  Ornntle.  Ligktltouse. 

PORT  KL  ROQUE — In  October,  1827,  vvliilo  li'w  MnioHtyN  »loop  Arnchne,  cnptain  Purlel  Roquf 
\V.  R-  ^'  I'pttmiin.  Iiiy  iit  the  above  nnchorngn,  a  very  ilno  hurbor  whs  iliHCovcrod  to 
,|,e  (MUtwnrd  of  El  Roquo,  and  surveyed  by  lieutenant,  now  commnndor.  PL  O.  Johnes  : 
i,  \i  gheiterod  on  the  north  by  the  French  Keys,  from  the  eii.it  by  the  N.  E.  Key 
gnJ  tlio  reef,  and  on  the  south  by  Pirate  and  Namnn's  Keys,  and  their  reefs. 
from  the  Plnn  published  at  the  Hydrogrnphical  Office,  it  will  bo  H«en  llmt  there  is  a 
spncP  of  i**""^'  two_  miles  in  length,  and  half  a  mile  wide  at  the  narrowcHt  part  betweon 
,l,e  reefs,  whom  ships  may  anchor  in  from  12  to  14  fathoms,  and  five  entrances,  or  out- 
Iclj,  quite  clean. 

Tlie  instruction  says, "  Port  El  Roque  presents  considoruble  advnntii};e8,  as  a  safe  and 
(diivenient  anchorage,  over  that  which  seems  to  have  been  lieretofore  nnido  use  of  by  ,, 

jlii|W  of  war,  and  in  which  his  majesty's  sloop  Aroclino  came  to  ancdior;  as  it  will  be 
ftideiit  by  a  reference  to  the  Plan,  that  from  whatever  quarter  of  the  compass  the  wind 
iflijlit  blow,  a  vessel  could  scarce  find  a  difficulty  in  getting  to  sea.  Nor,  from  the  man- 
ner in  which  it  is  locked  in,  by  tlie  keys  and  reefs,  (a  circumstance,  of  course,  productive 
of  tt  constant  smoothness  of  water,)  is  it  probable  she  shouhl  receive  any  injury,  should 
jjer  commander  deem  it  necessary  to  ride  out  a  gale  at  her  anchors. 

"Beside  which,  a  ship  will  find  another  important  advantage  over  the  old  anchorage — 
that  of  having,  almost  invariably,  a  clear  unobstructed  trade  breeze  across  the  reef,  which 
cnn  bring  with  it  no  decaying  vegetable,  or  other  impure  eflluvia,  to  render  the  place  un- 
wholesome :  a  circumstance  not  unlikely  to  occur,  to  the  detriment  of  a  ship's  company's 
benltli,  in  the  road  where  the  Arachne  lay,  from  its  leeward  proximity  to  a  mangrove 

nwi'sli. 
•>  The  channels  are  clean,  and,  without  an  exception,  steep  to  the  reefs  on  either  side, 

ffhicb  are  of  coral,  and  have  scarcely  sufficient  water  on  their  edges  for  a  four-oared 

m:  thus  displaying  by  the  contrast  betwoen  the  shades  of  deep  and  shallow  soundings, 

j9ecure5;uide  to  a  stranger  on  entering.     The  bottom  is  mostly  of  a  hard  sandy  nature, 

tliough  there  was  found  a  patch  of  stiff  clay  oft'  the  N.  E.  point  of  Pirate  ICey.  in  thirleou 

fathoms. 

"The  islands,  with  the  exception  of  EI  Roque,  appear  to  be  of  a  coral  formation,  with 
nlii'htsniidy  soil,  thickly  covered  with  the  siiinphire  plant:  most  having  salt  marshes, 
either  in  tlioir  intericu"  or  just  within  the  reefs,  whicli  are  skirted  with  mangrove  and 
oihcrlimlier  trees,  alfording shelter  to  innumerable  families  of  boobies,  and  other  aquatic 
birds;  as  the  marshes  likewise  abound  in  several  delicious  kinds  of  the  snipe  genus,  that 
are  by  no  meiuisdfficult  to  be  got  at. 

"Fish  of  excellent  quality  may  be  caught  in  plenty,  either  with  a  seine,  (the  method 
we  adopted,)  orl)y  anchoring  in  a  boat  near  the  reefs,  and  employing  hook  ami  line  for 
that  purpose.  The  only  quadruped  that  came  und(M' observation,  was  a  small  descrip- 
lim  of  nit,  several  of  which  were  mot  with  in  visiting  the  peaks  of  El  Roquo.  Those 
lieii'lits  are  of  limestone,  which  is  removed  by  slaves,  and  burnt  in  a  kiln  at  their  foot, 
(the  property  of  a  Dutchman,)  and  then  conveyed  to  the  island  of  Curazao,  to  be  made 
use  of  in  the  erection  efforts,  and  for  other  government  purposes.  Turtle  are  met  witli, 
but  not  numerous. 

"Ships  requiring  pmall  plank,  fiine  wood,  bonts's  knees  and  breast  hooks,  can  bo  well 
supplied  for  the  labor  of  cutting  them,  though  it  is  recommended,  should  time  admit 
ofit,  tohave  it  always  barked,  split,  or  sawed  up,  beftire  embarkation,  as,  should  the  sap 
lodge  upon  decks  or  any  thing  else,  the  stains  would  be  found  difficult  to  eradicate. 
There  is  a  well  of  water  upon  the  S.  W.  end  of  El  Roquo.  The  supply  is  uncertain, 
never,  however,  O/iceeding  80  gallons  a  day.  The  lime  burners  obtain  what  they  make 
use  of  by  digging  wells  in  the  sand  ;  and  although  that  which  was  tasted  was  of  an  in- 
different quality,  it  is  not  improliable  that  by  a  deeper  excavation  better  may  bo  procured. 

"  A.  stranger,  in  running  for  the  harbor,  is  recommended  to  puss  to  the  westward  of  tlie 
peaks,  and  then  stretch  across  towards  Blackman's  Key,  which  may  be  easily  known 
as ippearing,  without  the  use  of  a  glass,  like  ii  single  largo  rock,  (though  actually  a  low 
islet  with  bushes  on  it,)until  ho  can  fetch  thiough  the  south  channel,  which  will  ojion 
clearly  to  sea  at  the  bearing  of  N.  1G°  E.,  per  compass,  when  he  can  pass  with  safety 
between  Pirate  Key  on  the  larboard,  and  a  small  dry  sand-bank  on  the  starboard  side 
both  of  which  are  bold  within  the  channel :  but  areei'  extends  33,3  fathoms  off  the  S.  S. 
W.end  of  the  former,  which,  like  all  others,  is  easily  traced  from  a  vessel's  deck  by  the 
eye. 

"On  the  full  and  change  of  tlie  moon,  it  is  high  water  at  4h.  30m.  P.  M.     Spring  tides    High  water. 
rise  3  feet  perpendicular." 

ISLA.S  DE  AVES. — Thirty  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Roques  are  the  Islas  de    hlasde 
Aves,  (Birds' Islands,)  which  are  two  groups  of  keys,  rising  upon  two  distinct  reefs,  and    Aves, 
forming  between  them  a  channel  of  9  miles  in  breadth.     These  keys  are  very  low  aud 
flat;  and  as  the  east  group  has  a  reef  extending  4  miles  to  the  north  from  it,  and  the  west- 
em  another,  extending  6  miles  in  the  same  direction,  it  results  that  an  approach  to  thetu, 


"•f^fWO-P^PIW^'^ 


•  pill 


456 


Buen  Ayre 
Lif(ht. 
Burn  Ayre 
Island. 


Curazao 
Jiland. 


Lighthouse. 


Lighthouse. 
Oruba  Isl- 
and. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

eiperially  from  tlin  north,  ia  extreinoly  diinKeroua;  aud  therefore  they  ought  to  be  giten 
as  wide  n  berth  to  nii  nny  other  diingnroiia  shonl. 

BUEN  AYRE  LKJHT.— On  Point  Rasa  del  Lncre  there  is  a  lishthoiwo,  contuiujn. 
a  fixed  light ;  this  light  cannot  bo  seen  to  the  northward  :  the  tower  is  75  feet  \unh, 

BUEN  AYRE  ISLAND.— To  the  wostwerd  of  Avos,  and  ut  tho  dJMtunco  oC33„|||p, 
is  the  island  of  Buen  Ayre.  It  is  of  moderiite  height,  with  severiil  mouiitainH  inn]  p,,,,;^ 
on  it,  the  moHt  ulevnfed  of  which  is  close  to  the  north  point.  Tho  siiiith  |M)iiit  uf  tlm 
island  in  rather  low  and  flat,  and  called  Point  Rasa  del  Lacre.  About  tho  tniddjti  uf  ^\^g 
went  shore,  there  is  a  town  and  a  small  fort.  There  also  is  the  anchorage,  whielilHsn 
steep  that  at  ii  cable's  length  from  the  shore  is  a  depth  of  17  fathoms,  and  it  iiicriuscj 
so  rapidly,  that  at  a  cable's  length  further  out  there  are  GU  fathoms.  Fur  iIiIh  roumin  it 
is  necessary  to  run  out  and  make  fast  a  cable  to  the  shore.  Small  ships  should  ulwuvj 
be  prepared,  in  order  to  prevent  the  onchor  from  dragging  ;  for  should  she  he  drivtiu  Iru'ni 
the  anchorage,  it  will  cost  much  trouble  to  regain  it.  From  the  west  part  of  the  michor- 
age,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  lies  an  iriland  named  Little  Buen  Ayre;  and  although  tho 
passage  formed  by  it  on  the  N.  E.  will  admit  ships  of  any  size,  yet  it  will  ho  prt»fHiiibl«  to 
use  the  S.  W.  channel,  as  being  more  free,  both  inward  and  outward.  Tliere  is  no  ilim. 
ger  whatever  to  be  apprehended  at  tlie  distance  of  a  cable's  lenglli  from  all  the  cunst  of 
liuen  Ayre,  except  on  the  east  side,  where  a  reef  runs  out  in  some  places  inuro  than  Imif 
n  mile ;  but  the  N.  E.  and  S.  E.  points  are  very  cleon. 

CURAZAO  ISLAND. — Twenty-seven  miles  westward  from  the  south  point  of  Bucu 
Ayre  lies  tho  S.  E.  |)oint  of  tho  Island  Curazao.  It  thence  extends  aijout  N.  W.  i  \V,, 
35  miles,  but  the  greatest  breadth  does  not  exceed  (>  miles.  It  is  moderately  lij^l),  ^yjiij 
some  mountains,  that  may  be  seen  from  a  considorahe  distance  at  sea.  All  its con^iti*  aro 
very  clean,  and  may  be  passed  at  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length,  without  risk.  S.  E.Ly 
E.  from  the  S.  E.  point,  namad  Canon,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles,  there  is  n  litilo  |uw 
sandy  island,  named  Little  Curazao,  which,  although  very  clean,  is,  fiom  its  l(i\viie>.j, 
dangerous  at  night  and  in  tiiick  weather.  Lieutenant  D.  F.  Campbell,  says,  "No  part 
of  this  island  appears  elevated  more  than  6  or  8  feet  above  the  level  of  tho  son,  exupt 
that  on  the  west  end  there  are  two  small  clumps  of  mangrove  busliPH.  showinj;  Jiiirlief 
than  the  rest  of  this  land.  The  crew  of  a  Dutch  National  Corvette  had  htum  e.nplojei] 
(1826)  in  erecting  on  the  east  end  a  large  cairn  of  stones,  having  on  its  top  an  ulJ  tree 
and  be.iring  ut  a  distance  a  great  resemijiance  u^  a  martello  tower.  It  bears  tVuiii  tlie 
mountain  of  Sta.  Barbara,  on  the  S.  E.  side  of  Curazao,  E.  by  S.,  by  compass.  He  pusseJ 
within  half  a  cable's  length  of  the  N.  E.,  N.,  and  N.W.  sides  of  the  island,  aud  got  uubut- 
torn  with  a  line  of  40  fathoms." 

Light. — On  Little  Curazao  there  is  a  lighthouse  containing'  a  fixed  light,  40  feet 
high. 

The  Island  of  Curazao  has  many  bays  and  harbors,  the  principal  of  which,  where  ilie 
whole  commerce  of  the  island  is  carried  on,  is  St.  Ann's  on  the  west  coast,  situHtediit 
the  distance  of  14^  miles  from  Point  Canon.  To  the  eastward  of  this,  about  G  miles  is 
another  bay,  named  Sta.  Barbara.  In  proceeding  to  the  Harbor  of  St.  Ann,  it  will  |)e 
proper  to  make  Point  Canon,  so  as  to  run  down  the  coast  at  one  or  two  miles'  distaoce, 
taking  care  not  to  get  to  leeward  of  the  harbor's  mouth,  as  the  current  sets  witlicoa- 
siderable  strength  to  the  westward.  The  entrance  is  very  narrow,  and  formed  by  Uiui'ues 
of  low  land.  That  in  the  inner  part  also  forms  large  lagoons.  On  tho  oasturii  \m[ 
stands  Fort  Amsterdam  and  the  principal  town  of  tho  island,  inhabited  by  PrutestantsaDj 
Jews.  On  nil  islet  close  to  the  west  point  there  is  a  buttery,  which,  with  Fort  Amster- 
dam, Aeiends  the  mouth  of  the  harbor;  and  on  the  western  shore  stands  the  town  in- 
habited by  the  Cotholics.  The  channel  leading  into  the  bay  runs  in  about  N.  E.  by  .N., 
is  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long,  and  a  cable's  length  broad,  oxcei)t  between  tiit<l'url*at 
the  entrance,  where  it  is  barely  half  that  i)i?adth.  Tho  towns,  wharfs,  and  niii)»ii/,ines, 
are  on  the  banks  of  this  channel,  where  «!s(i  ships  anchor  and  are  careened.  To  inter 
the  channel  it  is  necessary  to  keep  the  wit;Jward  coast  close  on  board,  but  not  witliiu  hall' 
a  cable's  length,  as  there  are  rocks,  and  :  Iso  a  reef,  extending  about  one-third  of  a  cable 
from  it:  and  on  getting  abreast  of  the  batteries  on  the  point  of  Fort  Amsterdmn,  lull 
enough  to  bring  the  ship's  head  towards  the  battery  on  the  islet  at  tlie  west  point,  mid  then 
stand  inward  through  the  middle  of  the  channel.  The  Dutch  always  have  a  luuucli  ready 
to  assist  in  towing  ships  into  the  harbor. 

Lighthouse. — There  is  a  fixed  lighten  the  south  side  of  St.  Ann's  Harbor. 
ORUBA  ISLAND. — At  the  distance  of  43  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  most  north- 
erly part  of  Curazao,  lios  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  Island  of  Oruba,  which  extends  tliiiice 
nearly  N.  W.  17  miles,  and  4  miles  wide.  Although  low,  there  are  some  heijjlits  upon 
it,  that  may  be  seen  at  a  moderate  distance  off,  particularly  one,  which,  from  its  resem- 
blance to,  IS  called  the  .Sugar-loaf.  All  the  eastern  coast  is  very  clean,  and  hns  some 
'plots  close  to  it.  On  the  western  coast  there  is  a  chain  of  keys,  extending  almost  so  far 
as  the  west  point.  These  may  be  coasted  on  the  outside,  at  the  distance  of  two  cables' 
length,  if  necessary.  This  island  lies  to  the  northward  of  Cape  St.  Roman,  the  inteime- 
diute  channel  being  13  miles  wide,  and  very  clear. 


B^UI'T  S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


467 


LiiitPtmnt  D.  F.  Campholl,  cnnuimnding  hm  ISlnjoMty'B  icliooner  ivionkpv, 
Oruba  in  Sofitembor,  IHJO.  From  hia  rmimrk*  wo  extract  tlio  rullowiiij; : — Tlio  iiilimd 
\t  niailt<riitety  |liigh ;  thu  ^itiist  part  ovimi,  uiid  graduiilly  lowtirini;  to  ii  point.  The  wnitt 
(iiil.at  aitiHtiiiice,  upnourH  liku  brokun  liuniinuckx.  Tint  Sugiir-loiif  Hill,  which  ia  ulxtut 
:niilu8  to  thu  N.  W.  point.  \a  the  hJKhoHt  in  thn  inliind,  nnd  may  bu  Heon  ut  tho  diHlance 
„l'  Id  ur  >'0  milei.  A  chain  of  low  huHhy  keyHatrutchiis  along  thu<  Houth  Hhore,  bold  to, 
ligvinf!,  at  a  cable's  length  oir,  no  Hounding  with  the  hiind  lead.  iHieHo  keys  terminate 
111  R  rocky  iHh^t,  conaidentlily  higher  than  the  root,  alMiit  3  miUm  to  the  weiitward  of  the 
eaut  point,  and  2  cabli's'  length  off  shore.  About  3  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Sugar- 
liiiit' tlioro  is  a  projecting  point,  having  an  opening  between  tho  keys  to  leeward  of  it. 
Tu  iHkn  the  shelter  affurdod  by  this  pomt,  it  is  necessary  to  g(!t  close  in  with  the  liind  so 
fur  til  windward  as  tho  Sugar-loaf,  and  run  along  shore  t<\\  tho  port  ijcars  N.  N.  W.,  when 
the  fliiK-Htiiif  will  come  on  with  a  small  red  house  standing  by  itself  on  a  hill  behind.  These 
iiiarliskept  in  u  line  will  lei;d  clear  of  a  rocky  ledge  at  the  extremity  of  tho  point.  Tu  lee- 
viird  it  IS  all  clear.  When  far  enough  in  to  be  sheltered  from  tho  breey.e,  you  may  an- 
chor ill  *  to  5  fathoms,  on  sandy  bottom.  There  are,  however,  some  rocky  patches  to  be 
carefully  avoided.  It  is  piirticulaiiy  necessary  for  a  stranger  to  get  close  in  with  tho  keys 
well  to  windward,  otherwise  the  current  will  sweep  him  so  far  past  the  opening  as  will  re- 
quire half  a  day  to  beat  up  again.  There  is  also  good  anchorage  in  from  5  to  Iv!  fatlioms 
under  the  west  end  of  tho  island  ;  but  as  procuring  provisions,  or  temporary  ri>fit.  can  bo 
Ilia  only  iiiduceinents  for  visiting  Oruba,  it  isadvisablo  to  go  into  tho  hnrbur.  which  is  dis- 
liiiguislmd  by  the  town  along  the  beach,  close  to  leoward  of  the  sandy  point,  and  named 
I'urt  Coballos.  Tho  pilots  are  skilful  and  attentive  ;  and  the  anchorage,  within  tho  reefs 
and  close  to  the  town,  in  3  fathoms  water,  sandy  bottom,  is^veiy  good.  Fresh  water  is 
iciirco,  there  being  no  spring.  It  is  collected  in  tanks  iu  the  months  of  September  and 
October,  but  is  good  and  wholesome." 

The  following  is  from  tho  remarks  of  Capt.  T.  W.  Carter,  of  his  Majesty's  ship  Emu- 
lous. October  1,  1815  : 

"  Tho  btist  anchorage  about  tliis  island  is  on  the  south  sidn,  about  4  or  5  miles  to  the 
north-westward  of  the  village.  Yon  may  anchor  on  a  white  shoal  in  about  7  fathoms, 
with  n  low  and  very  white  sandy  point  bearing  N.  i  E.,  a  remarkable  mountain,  iienily 
resembling  a  sugar-loaf,  at  tho  back  of  the  town,  E.  by  S.,  and  the  easternmost  extremity 
of  the  land  S.  E.,  at  three-quarters  of  mile  off  shore.  You  must  look  for  a  clean  spot 
todrop  your  anc!'.or,  as  some  parts  are  rocky.  Water  may  be  procured  here  by  digging 
il'ew  feel  iu  the  sand,  at  a  short  distance  from  tliu  beach." 

The  Gulf  of  Venezuela,  or  of  Maracaybo. 

From  Cape  St.  Roman  the  coast  runs  S.  C2°  W.  a  distance  of  13  miles,  to  Point  Ma- 
colin.  It  is  all  shallow  and  clciin,"  and  may  be  safely  ap|)roached  by  the  lead.  This 
point,  and  Point  Espada,  (Sword  Point.)  which  lies  nearly  wosf  •'rom  it,  at  the  distance 
of  50  miles,  form  tho  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Venezuela,  or  ot  i^l  iracaybo.  The  south 
extremity  of  this  gulf  opens  into  tho  Great  Lugoon  of  Maraciiybo,  by  a  DelUi  that  has 
but  one  mouth  navigable,  and  that  only  for  vessels  drawing  no  more  than  12  feet  water, 
as  there  is  a  bar,  upon  which  there  is  no  more  than  14  feet.  Hitherto  no  chart  of  the 
coasts  of  this  gulf  lias  been  drawn  from  actual  survey,  nor  is  the  situation  of  the  bar  ac- 
curately laid  down :  yot,  from  practice,  tlie  course  to  it  is  tolerably  well  known,  both 
from  Point  Macolla  and  Point  Espada.  Tho  Hydrographic  Commission,  under  the 
command  of  Captain  Don  Joaquim  Francisco  Fidalgo,  surveyed  and  drew  a  chart  of  that 
part  of  the  east  const  from  Point  Macolla  to  Point  Arenas,  which  is  a  little  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  bar.  The  inspection  of  this  chart  will  prove  a  sufficient  guide;  and  as  the 
water  is  shallow,  but  witliout  banks,  or  detached  islands,  the  lead  is  the  best  guido  that 
can  be  recuinineuded.  The  same  may  be  recommended  for  the  west  coast,  which,  though 
Dot  surveyed,  has  boon  well  explored  ;  and  it  is  ascertained  that  it  may  bo  safely  ap- 
pronchcd  to  the  depth  of  6  or  5  fathoms,  in  every  part.  Those  wlio  enter  tills  gulf  have 
generally  no  other  object  iu  view  than  to  proceed  to  tho  lagoon,  for  the  purpose  of  locd- 
iiig  with  cocoa,  tobacco,  and  other  produce.  We  shall,  therefore,  now  proceed  to  give 
some  instructions  for  navigating  it  with  certainty. 


*  By  the  remarks  of  Capt.  T.  W.  Carter,  of  his  Mnjnsty's  ship  Einidous,  wc  find  that  on  the  30th  of 
September,  1815,  when  standins  towurds  the  shore,  C'iij)o'St.  Koiimn  bciiriai;  E.  l\.  E.  J  E.,  distiint  from 
1*10 15  miles,  and  ol)' shore  about  3  miles,  they  loll  in  with  a  shunt  on  which  the  wutor  broke,  having  close 
to  it  15  fathoms.  IIo  further  adds,  "  The  land  being  very  low  about  this  part  of  the  coast,  it  would  be 
dangcnms  to  heat  up  along  sbore  during  night;  although,  with  the  westerly  current  running  through  tho 
cliannel,  a  strong  counter  current  will  be  found  along  shore,  and  with  the  very  strong  breezes  that  you 
freaucntly  get  in  this  chunnel,  it  is  dillicult  to  get  up,  except  by  beating  in  shore.  You  will,  however, 
find  good  anchorage  all  along  tliispartuf  the  coast,  in  from  6  to  lU  fatlioms;  and  during  the  duy  you 
niiky  see  all  your  danger." 


«* 


mmmmf^ 


458 


Tides. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Beinn  4  1ena;nes  to  the  westward  of  Cnpe  St.  Rorrifin,  and  theneo  steering  S.  W.  hv 
S..  win  take  ii  sliij)  in  8ii;lit  of  the  Mosns  of  l^orojo,  wliioh  nro  some  level  hillnckg'  or 
snnd-liills,  situated  to  the  east  of  the  bar.  From  this  situation  steer  about  west,  kccplniT 
Bt  the  (iistimce  of  2  leajrues  from  the  coast,  and  in  from  4i  to  .'Si  fathoms  water,  until  rha 
Castles  of  Zapara  and  San  Carlos  appear  in  sight :  these  defeufi  the  entrance  of  tlie  |i. 
g[oon,  and  are  placed,  the  first  on  the  eastern  point,  and  the  second  on  the  Wflstein 
They  are  not,  however,  on  the  bar,  but  r.ither  to  the  southward  of  it ;  the  bar  itself  Ijeinn 
formed  by  the  skoals,  which  extend  out  W.  N.  W.  to  the  distance  of  24  or  3  miles  from 
the  Hajo  Seco,  or  Dry  Shoal.  The  sea  breaks  on  nil  these  shoals,  and  the  deeper  wnter 
is  easily  distingnished  by  its  havinc;  no  breakers.  This  will  be  found  by  keeping  nt  one 
and  a  half  cables'  length  from  the  outermost  breakers  off  Bnjo  Seco.  This  Hiijo  Spco 
is  an  islet  of  sand,  which  is  about  a  cable  and  a  half  Dver  in  every  direction  :  it  lies  N.  N. 
E.,  at  the  distance  of  one  and  a  half  mile  from  San  Carlos  Castle,  and  at  about  east  froni 
it  will  bo  seen  the  other,  named  Zapara.  The  island  of  this  name  has  some  very  liijli 
mansrovos;  and  outside  of  it,  in  5i  or  64  fathoms,  the  bottom  is  hard  mud,  mixed  with 
Bond  ;  and  this  is  where  ships  ought  to  anchor,  in  case  of  necessity  ;  observing  that  the 
ground  tackle  ought  to  be  good,  ns  the  prevailing  wind  blows  very  fresh  at  the  pliice. 

Being  oir  Point  Espada,  at  the  distance  of  2  leagues,  and  bound  to  the  bar,  steering  a 
S.  S.  W.  i  W.  course  will  take  a  hhip  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  islet  named  Bajo  Seco. 

On  this  course,  as  well  as  the  former,  the  depth  diminishes  very  gradually  as  you  ad- 
vance southward ;  and  it  will  be  advisable  not  to  approach  the  bar  in  the  night,  but  to 
nin  out  tiaain,  or  make  short  boards  about  1  leairues  from  it,  until  daylight  comes  on, 
The  breezes  in  this  gulf  "re  fresh,  and  from  N.  N.  E.,  which  cause  a  heavy  sea  on  the 
bar  and  all  the  south  shore  ;  so  that  there  is  great  risk  of  getting  aground,  which  must  be 
guarded  against. 

High  water  on  this  bar  takes  place,  on  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  at  a  quarternfter 
5  o'cbick,  afternoon  :  on  spring  tide*,  the  water  rises  from  2  to  24  feet.  The  least  wnter 
on  the  bar.  at  high  water,  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  is  14  feet  8  inches;  and  IG^  feet 
in  the  rainy  season,  which  is  August,  September,  October  and  November. 

The  bar  cannot  be  crossed  without  a  pilot;  and  therefore  as  soon  as  the  ship  is  nearly 
north  and  souih  with  the  Castle  of  San  Carlos,  and  in  .54  fathoms  wnter,  the  course  slimild 
be  altered  to  ihe  west,  until  in  the  depth  of  14  fathoms,  when  the  breakers  on  the  slumls 
will  be  seen  in  a  line,  about  W.  N.  W.  Continue  steering  to  the  westward,  keepiniithe 
same  depth,  until  getting  abreast  of  the  last  breake'  j,  which  will  be  near  the  month,  lieave 
to  on  the  starboard  tack ;  or,  what  is  better,  mnki;  short  tacks  off  and  on,  until  the  pilot 
gets  on  board. 

Steering  for  the  bar,  the  first  object  that  comes  in  s,^ht,  ns  being  the  high.'st  tliore- 
about,  is  the  Isliind  of  Todns,  or  Todos,  which  lies  about  3  miles  to  the  southward  nl'tho 
Cnstle  of  San  Carlos  :  shape  a  cotn-se  towards  this  island,  until  the  castles  and  the  llajo 
Seco  Ciiii  be  seen,  and  then  proce(>d  as  before  directed. 

A  knowledge  of  the  caicf  silinition  of  the  mouth  of  the  bar  is  very  essential:  tliati?, 
to  tlie  westward  of  the  meridian  of  the  Castle  of  San  Carlos:  because,  without  this  infor- 
mation, every  peri^on  would  suppose  it  to  be  between  the  Bnjo  Seco  and  the  ensteiu  ciiast, 
where  Zapara  Castle  stands.  B3'  such  a  mistake,  ihe  shiii  might  be  cast  away  on  the 
shoals,  or,  if  attempting  to  enter  it,  it  would  be  a  prodigy  if  every  person  on  board  did  not 
perish  :  unfortunately,  such  accidents  have  sometimes  occurred. 

Vessels  drawing  from  9  to  12  feet  water,  should  endeavor  to  be  at  the  entrance  nthiih 
water,  to  avoid  all  danger  of  even  touching ;  for  if  she  would  not  answer  the  helm  imme- 
diately, the  peril  would  be  imminent.  In  such  nn  event,  from  tlie  narrowness  of  the 
channel,  shipwreck  would  he  inevitable, 

A  pilot  is  also  requisite  for  getting  over  the  Bar  outward,  and  clearing  the  sliofils:  afier 
whicli,  piu'ticuliir  instructions  for  sailing  out  of  the  Gulf  are  necessary:  for  altlinnshit 
must  be  done  by  working  out,  yet  every  navigaror  knosvs  how  to  regulate  his  tiicks  « 
that  tiiey  may  bo  more  or  less  favorable ;  and  here  ho  may  prolong  either  tack  witliinii 
any  other  guide  than  the  lead.  Ft  is,  however,  necessary  to  remark, that  in  the  (hiiflhe 
wind  generally  shifts  to  the  north,  or  nearly  so.  at  4  or  .5  o'clock,  P.  M. ;  therefore,  en- 
deavors shruld  be  made  to  get  near  the  Western  Coost  about  that  time  in  order  to  lake 
advimtnse  of  it  for  a  long  board  to  the  E.  N.  E. ;  and  to  go  on  the  other  tack  nsnin,  so 
Boon  as  the  wind  rounds  back  again  to  the  eastward  ;  not  only  to  gain  northing  l>y  it.  IjuI 
also  to  get  again  over  the  West  Coast,  to  jnuko  the  best  use  of  the  next  shiftof  wiudw 
the  north. 

Directions  for  Nacigaiins  from  Santa  Martha  to  the  Bar  of  Maracaylo,  hy  Capt. 
Frederick  Ch.amier,  U.  N.,  182G. 

"  In  sailing  from  .Santa  Martha  for  Maraoaybo,  I  rounded  Cape  Aguja  quiie  close,  and 
by  keeping  within  five  miles  (tf  the  foot  of  the  Snow  Mountains,  carried  the  easterlysot 
oi'  the  Magdiilona  up  to  Cape  la  Vela,  and  hud  likewise  lir^ht  winds  from  the  westward. 


•  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


459 


"On  neni'ing  P''  'lo  lii  Hnchn,  you  r.iustket'p  the  lend  going,  as  yo'i  will  be  in  5  and  7 
fathoms  wiiter  tli  nolo  night.  After  piissing  Ciipe  In  Vein,  tho  best  pliin  is  to  irmke 
one  good  stretch  U  on,  niid  tlie  next  morning  you  will  in  till  prol)nbility  wenther  Cnpe 
Chicliiliiicoa  :  in  wi  ich  cnse  you  will  wontV  -r  Puntn  Espnda,  and  be  Hi)ie  to  stand  for  the 
BHr  of  Manirnylio.  You  will  run  the  gr  n- distnnce  from  Puntn  Espnda  in  9  nnd  10 
fatlionis,  and  the  sl'onlingof  the  water  Wi.i  bo  n  guide  to  shorten  sail  for  dayiiglit. 

"The  best  nr.diorage  is  with  the  Castle  of  tlie  Bajo  Seco  in  a  line  with  that  of  St. 
Carlos,  nnd  distant  from  the  latter  about  7  miles,  in  nbout  (!  fathoms  water. 

"  The  entrnnre  of  the  Bnr  is  in  hit.  11°  2':  long.,  by  chronometer,  71  ^  .3'  W. 

»  The  Bnr  uf  Maracaybo  is  n  shifting  bnr ;  formerly  the  entrance  was  by  the  Island  of 
Zaparii,  on  the  west  end  of  which  stands  tho  Old  Fort.  It  then  formed  its  channel  to 
the  southward  of  Bajo  Seco  (which  at  that  time  was  not  above  water,  nlthough  now  na 
island  uf  some  mngniludo,  nnd  the  j)rincipnl  defencf  of  the  entrance,)  but  now  it  seems  to 
have  settled  into  a  permanent  channel  of  13  feet  deuth,  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  Bajo  Seco. 
The  whole  Bar  is  a  quicksand,  and  when  tho  Britjmnrt  grounded  in  passing,  although 
the  stream  anchor  was  towed  in  the  cutter  a  cable's  length  astern,  and  drop[)ed  instantly, 
yet  we  hove  it  up  without  starting  tho  vessel  in  the!  slight.  ;t  degree.  Having  ulrimately 
been  ouliged  to  heave  the  guns  overboard,  the  sand  covered  them  so  deeply,  that  the  buoy 
rcpe.  which  wns  the  snmo  as  is  allowed  for  an  anchor  of  IG  cwt.,  snapped  before  we 
could  raise  the  gun  sufficient  to  sweep  it,  nnd  that  only  the  next  day. 

"To  pass  the  Bar,  ii  pilot  should  always  be  taken  :  the  difficulty  is  to  get  one  ;  an  old 
Spanish  ordinance  being  still  in  force,  that  no  foreign  inan-of-wnris  to  betaken  across. 

"  The  town  of  Mnrncuybo  stands  21  miles  up  tho  lake,  and  you  have  to  pass  over  the 
Tal)lii/.os,  shoals  of  soft  mud,  with  about  10  feet,  in  some  phices,  which  you  may  drag 
through  with  ease. 

"I  came  out  over  the  Bar  against  a  head  sea,  drawing  11  feet  fore  and  nft,  nnd  never 
touched. 

"Water  can  be  p  ocured,  if  you  are  outside  of  the  Bar,  from  the  main  land,  exactly 
Ojiposite  the  fort  of  the  Bajo  Seco :  and,  if  inside,  the  lake  is  fresh  water  10  miles  ubove 
tlie  Dar.  The  seine  may  bo  drawn  any  where  in  tlie  sandy  bays  ;  but  the  alligators  are 
very  plentiful. 

"  Although  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillas  and  others  mention  the  depth  of  water  on  the 
Bar  in  the  rainy  season,  from  August  to  Noveudjer,  to  bo  IGi  foet,  yet  no  more  than  14 


feet,  and  that  only  in  one  place,  could  I  succeed  in  finding. 

indeed." 


The  tides  nre 


very  strong 


Continuation  of  the  Coast  Jrom  Point  Espada  to  Carthagena. 


It  has  been  already  said  that  Point  Espnda  is  tho  west  poi.it  of  the  entrance  to  the 
Gulf  of  Veiie/uela,  or  of  Maracaybo;  from  it  the  coast  treids  about  N.  W.  by  N.  a  dis- 
taiico  of  13  miles,  to  Cape  Cliicliibacoa,  and  is  all  so  clean  nnd  shallow,  that  tho  lend  is  a 
sulficient  guide  :  nnd,  although  the  coast  is  low,  there  nre  several  peaks  which  rise  inland, 
tlie  highest  of  which  nre  named  Sieras  de  Aeeyte. 

From  Cnpe  Chichibacoa,  N.  75°  E.,  at  tho  disnmce  of  10  miles,  p.re  the  Moiiges  del 
Sur,  or  Southern  Monks,  which  are  two  very  small  and  perfectly  clean  islets,  so  that 
they  may  lie  passed  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable's  length,  without  any  fear.  About  N. 
E.  Iiy  E.  from  them,  at  tho  distance  of  3  miles,  tlu're  is  another,  named  Monge  del  I'^ste, 
or  East  Monk,  which  is  also  very  clean  ;  nnd  at  the  distance  of  8  miles  N.  4  W.  from  the 
first  is  another  group  of  seven  islets,  named  Monges  del  Norte,  or  North(!rn  Monks  ;  these 
are  foul  with  a  rcej\  and  ought  not  to  be  nppronched  at  lass  than  a  mile.  The  channels 
which  the  Northern  iM'ijks  form  with  the  enst  and  with  the  .Southern  Monks,  as  wellns 
between  them  and  tho  coast,  are  very  free  and  clean  ;  therefore  there  is  not  the  least 
risk  in  navigating  them. 

From  Cape  Chichibacoa  the  coast  bends  nearly  W.  N.  W.,  25  miles,  to  Point  Gallinns,* 
which  is  the  most  northerly  part  of  all  this  const.  From  Point  (.Tallinas  the  coast  bends 
to  \V.  S.  \V.  a  distance  of  5  miles  to  Point  Aguja,  from  which  a  shoal  bank  extends  a 
mile  out  to  sen.  At  Point  Aguja  the  coast  turns  to  the  southward,  and  forms  a  bay  of 
email  extent,  lamed  Bahia  Honda  Chicha,  or  Little  Bay  Honda,  which  has  very  shallow 
water,  and  atl'ords  no  shelter :  next  to  this  is  tho  Harbor  of  Buhia  Honda,  the  eastern 
point  of  which  is  4  miles  from  Point  Aguja. 


■•.*j 


*  A  Rhoal  of  4}  futhoms,  or  lesa.  On  the  7th  of  July,  1827,  his  Majesty's  ship  Druid,  Cnpt  Samuel 
Chambers,  rauniuK  uluaj;  shore  to  the  westward,  suddenly  shoaled  the  water  irom  10  fallionis  tf)  4J. 
Capt.  Cliuiiibers  siiys,  '•  1  understuml  there  nre  only  '!  i'athonis  lai  it,  anil  it  is  not  in  any  churl  lliut  1  have 
seen.  It^^  latitude  is  l-J"  30'  N  ,  longitude  71"  Ili'itO"  \V.  I'liiut  Uallinas  hours  I'roiu'it  .S.  S.  K.,  distant 
Saiiles,  and  IJ.diiu  Iliinda  S.  S.  \V.  i  \V.  Ships  of  u  huge  druu^iht  of  water  should  not  ^o  nearer  than 
to  bring  tho  low  sandy  lulls  u;:  '.lio  shore  in  sight.  If  clear  weuther,  the  high  luud  of  Chiniuce  will  ba 
seen. 


Hill  imnw!«iii||iiwiifliij^fi!u,j|iif*i|,j|piiuijn  iijim.i„. 


^""^  mwfixiwv.'wii  ^""'^.IPWF^T'^ 


460 

Bahia 
Honda. 


enter- 


Anchorage  of 
Cape  La 
Vela. 


Cape  la  Ve- 
la to  Point 
M(     re. 


Instructions 
for  takiufr  the 
anchorage  oj 
the  city  of  La 
Hacha. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

BAHIA  HONDA  is  a  bay  of  great  extent,  and  its  mouth  is  3  miles  wide.  In  „. 
ing  this  bay  you  have  only  to  be  careful  to  avoid  a  shoal  which  lies  in  the  mouth  of  it' 
and  in  a  line  with  the  2  points  of  the  entrance,  and  which  is  distant  from  the  west  point 
three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  from  the  east  point  a  mile  and  two-lh'rds.  This  bnnk 
whose  greatest  extension  is  nearly  E.  and  W.,  is  about  one-third  of  a  i.  He  in  length, or  n 
little  more  ;  and  the  least  depth  of  water  on  it  is  at  the  east  end,  where  i  .ero  is  only  one 
foot ;  upon  which,  with  the  slightest  wind,  the  sea  breaks.  In  other  respects  the  imv  k 
shallow  and  clean,  so  that  no  other  guide  than  the  lead  is  required  for  choosing  nn  anchor. 
ing  place  in  it,  the  depths  being  from  4  to  8  fathoms.  The  coast  from  Cape  Chichibncoa 
to  this  bay,  is  low  and  level,  but  clean  and  shallow,  so  that  no  other  guide  than  tho  lead 
will  bo  required. 

From  the  west  point  of  Bahia  Honda  the  coast  runs  about  S.  W.  for  the  distnnco  of  ii 
miles,  to  a  largo  Bay,  named  El  Portete,  the  entrance  of  which  is  very  narrow,  nnd  the 
depth  of  water  in  the  interior  will  admit  none  but  small  vessels.  From  El  Portete  the 
coast  trends  about  west,  for  a  distance  of  14  miles,  to  Cape  la  Vela ;  the  coast  is  clean 
and  from  Bahia  Honda  the  land  begins  to  rise  higher.  One  league  before  arriving  at 
Cape  la  Vela  there  is  a  little  hill,  in  form  of  a  sugar-loaf,  against  which  the  sea  breaks 
and  which  projects  about  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  rest  of  the  shore.  From 
this  hill  tho  land  continues  of  a  good  height,  rounding  southward  so  far  as  the  west  point 
which  is  that  properly  named  Ciipe  la  Vela :  about  24  cables'  length  to  the  westward  of 
this  point,  there  is  an  islet,  or  rock,  very  clean  and  steep  to,  which  may  be  passed  at  a 
ship's  length,  if  you  please.  The  channel  between  it  and  the  cape  is  quite  clear,  and 
may  be  run  through  without  risk  of  danger,  there  being  5i  fathoms  in  the  middle  of  it' 
but  it  is  better  to  keep  near  the  islet  than  the  cape,  because  there  are  5i  fathoms  water 
close  to  the  former,  and  only  4,  or  even  less  than  3,  near  the  latter.  The  land  about 
Capo  la  Vela  is  very  sterile,  and  S.  E.  from  it,  about  7  miles  inland,  there  rises  a  raoim- 
tain,  named  Sierra  del  Carpontero,  the  Carpenter's  mountain. 

ANCHORAGE  OF  CAPE  LA  VELA— From  the  cape  the  shore  trends  u  K. 
southward,  forming  a  large  bay,  where  there  is  shelter  from  the  trade  wind  ;  to  t^r. ,  • 
no  other  guide  than  the  lead  is  necessary,  for  all  the  bottom  is  clean  and  so  shiillow,  thai 
at  2  miles  from  the  coast  there  are  5i  fathoms,  and  from  that  the  depth  gradually  dimiu- 
ishes  towards      o  shore. 

CAPE  LA  VELA  TO  POINT  MANARE.— From  Cape  la  Vela  the  coast  runs 
about  south,  with  some  inclination  westward,  23  miles,  to  Castilletis  Point,  whore  there 
is  a  grove  or  group  of  mangroves,  from  which  the  cape  bears  N.  21°  E.  From  tliis 
point  it  trends  S.  74''  W.  14  miles,  to  Manaro  Point,  and  between  tho  two  bends  a  little 
to  the  southward,  with  some  projecting  points.  S.  72°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  13^  miles 
from  Manare  Point,  is  that  of  La  Cruz,  the  intermediate  coast  being  nearly  strai<,'lit,  al- 
though the  Points  of  Almidones,  Pajaro,  and  the  Fonton  de  Jorote,  project  out  a  little. 
Betw  uen  the  two  latter,  at  a  mile  and  a  half  to  seaward,  lies  the  Pajaro,  or  Bird's  Slioal, 
with  2  fathoms  water  on  it,  on  sandy  bottom. 

From  Point  de  la  Cruz,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles  S.  54°  W.,  is  Point  Vela  :  and  at  7 
miles  from  it,  S.  42°  \V.,  are  the  city  anil  river  nf  La  Hacha.  The  const  thence  trends 
S.  G4°  W.  and  S.  53°  W.,  to  Punta  DibuUo,  which  is  314  miles  distant  from  the  city  of 
La  Hacha.  From  Dihulle  Point  the  coast  runs  west,  and  N.  75°  \V.,  to  Capo  San  Juan 
de  Guia,  which  is  distant  384  miles  from  Dihulle  Point.  All  this  coast,  from  Capo  la 
Vela  to  12  miles  east  of  San  Juan  de  Guia,  sends  out  a  bank  of  soundings,  more  or  less 
projecting  into  the  sea,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  charts  published  at  the  Hyilrogrnpliiciil 
Office :  but  it  is  dangerous  on  account  of  several  shoals  on  it,  which  extend  a  considdMblo 
way  off  to  sea.  The  first  shoal,  which  is  already  noticed,  is  that  named  Pajaro  ;  and  the 
second,  named  Navio  Quebrado,  or  Wrecked  .Ship,  is  situated  at  21  miles  troiii  tho  const, 
between  the  Laguana  Grande  and  the  Laguana  Navio  Quebrado,  in  latitude  II '^  2G'  15", 
and  longitude  73°  14'  30"  W. ;  therefore  ships  should  not  approach  tho  coast  nearer  than 
4  leagues;  and  care  should  l)e  taken  not  to  get  into  a  loss  depth  than  20  fathoms.  Tho 
Bhore  is  generally  low;  but  somewhat  to  the  westward  of  flio  city  of  La  Ilaciia,  the 
celebrated  Sierra  Novadas,  or  Snowy  Mountains,  begin  to  rise  inland,  well  known,  not 
only  for  tho  great  elevation,  but  also  because  the  summit  terminates  in  two  peaks  like 
sugar-loaves,  which  are  always  covered  with  snow.  These  mountains  extotiJ  to  the 
V'  istward.  and  terminate  under  tho  meridian  of  Capo  Aguja. 

Instructions  for  taking  the  anchorage  off  the  CITY  OF  LA  HA  CH\.— Although 
wo  have  said  it  is  not  advisable  to  api)r()acli  this  coast,  but  to  sto.M-  a  dircM't  conrsi'  from 
Cape  la  Vela  to  Cape  Aguja,  and  take  care  to  got  into  no  loss  de],*h  than  21)  fathoms, 
nevertheless,  as  vessels  bound  to  La  Hacha  must  of  necessity  stand  iu  for  ihe  siiore,  it  is 
requisite  to  give  some  rule  by  which  they  may  do  it  without  risk.  To  take  the  anchor- 
age off"  the  city  of  La  Hacha,  and  i)eing  near  the  rock  or  faralloti  at  Cnjie  la  Vein,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  steer  S.  53"^  W.  or  5.')''  W.,  with  which  course  ruti  in  sijjht  eftlia 
coast ;  and  having  run  51  miles  they  will  be  on  the  me'idian  of  tho  city  of  La  Ilaclw, 
in  54  to  64  fathoms  water,  on  sandy  bottom,  and  may  then  direct  t'.emsclve  i  \a  tha  an- 


■Py^WP'fJIl'ilW'PiW'-'  "wmmiimmir'mrm'^ 


-r'^'^^ 


.BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  46.1 

hora<'0  without  more  attention  than  by  the  chart  appears  necessary,  observing  that 
1  ir>re  vBi^sels  ouglit  to  stoor  for  the  anchorage  N.  N.  W.  of  tlie  city,  in  5  or  6  fathoms  ; 
on(?  when  tliey  sail  from  it,  they  ought  to  follow  this  course  until  they  are  three  leagues 

The  tnkiivi;  of  this  anchorage,  as  well  as  all  others  which  have  no  secure  distinguish- 
■|iir  iiiiirks,  domanJs  some  vigilance  :  and  as  a  case  may  happen  in  which  a  vessel  may 
L'sjit,  the  bunk  of  44  and  5  fathoms,  on  gravel,  sand,  and  rock,  which  lies  15i  miles  to 
the  w'i'stwarJ  of  the  city  of  La  Hacha,  may  serve  ns  a  mark  for  ascertaining  hor  situa- 
tion.   The  snowy  mountains  of  Santa  Martha  may  also  serve  as  good  marks  for  the  same 

From  Ciipo  San  Juan  de  Guia  the  coast  runs  W  N.  W.,  W.,  and  W.  S.  W.,  a  dis- 
tnnce  of  1-4  miloH,  to  the  north  part  of  the  islet  of  Cape  Aguja,  which  forms  a  promi- 
nent or  ])n)ji'etiiig  front  of  high  hills  scarped,  and  with  deep  water  close  to,  with  several 
coves  or  small  bays,  and  good  anchorages.  The  islet  of  Cape  Aguja  forms,  with  the 
cape,  a  chnnriel  of  three-tenths  of  a  mile  in  breadth:  but  the  passage  is  very  m-rrow,  on 
account  of  the  reefs  which  extend  out  both  from  the  cape  and  the  South  part  of  the  islet ; 
so  that,  although  there  is  water  enough  for  any  vessel,  yet  none  should  attempt  it,  as  by 
go  doing  they  would  run  the  risk  of  being  wrecked. 

To  the  N.  W.  of  the  islet  of  Cape  Aguja  there  are  three  rocks,  or  farallones,  very 
near  ench  other ;  and  the  one  which  extends  farthest  out,  which  is  also  the  largest,  is  at 
•'•e  distance  of  three  cables'  length.  There  is  another,  to  the  westward  of  the  west 
noint,  which  is  higher  than  either  of  the  former,  and  is  also  at  a  short  distance  ;  they  are 
(ill  clean,  and  steep  to.  From  Cape  Aguja  the  coast  trends  S.  31"  W.,  34  miles,  to  Betin 
Point,  whicb.  is  the  north  point  of  the  13ay  of  Santa  Martha,  and  the  south  point  of  the 
Bi^iit'or  Ancon  of  Tagango  ;  the  coast  is  high  and  scarped,  with  some  beaches  and  in- 

SANTA  MARTHA. — The  harbor  of  Santa  Martha  may  be  considered  as  one  of  the  Santa  Mar- 
best  on  thi^  coast.  To  the  westward  of  its  northern  point,  called  Point  Betin,  at  the  dis-  tlia. 
tance  of  half  a  cable,  there  is  a  farallon  or  rock,  named  El  Morrochica,  which  is  very 
clean  so  that  it  may  be  passed  at  half  a  ship's  length,  if  necessary :  between  it  and  the 
point  there  are  from  5  to  8  fathoms  water ;  but  we  advise  that  no  one  should  attempt 
this  |)iis9ai:e.  which  is  so  very  narrow,  as  there  is  nothing  to  be  gained  by  it.  About  4 
cables'  leii  "th  to  the  westward  of  the  same  point  lies  an  islet,  called  the  Morro,  also  very 
clean  sothit  it  may  be  passed  on  either  side  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable's  length. 
There  is  a  fortification  on  this  island,  which,  with  other  batteries  on  the  coast,  defends  the 
harbor  and  city.  Tlie  channel  between  the  Morro  and  the  rock  off  the  point  is  very  open 
and  clean,  with  a  depth  of  water  from  13  to  27  fathoms.  The  bay  is  also  very  clean,  and 
the  bottom  good  ;  there  is  nothing  in  it  to  avoid,  or  give  a  berth  to.  but  a  bank  before  the 
city,  wliicli  extends  out  about  half  a  mile  from  the  beach ;  but  as  the  depth  diminishea 
eraduidly  from  the  edge,  the  use  of  the  lead  will  be  sufficient  to  avoid  all  risk  from  it. 
The  best  anchorage  is  to  the  northward  of  the  city,  as  much  as  possible  within  the  cove, 
or  biisin  :  to  ent(3r  it,  pass  at  about  half  a  cable's  length  outside  of  the  Morrochica,  steer- 
in"  thence  so  as  to  pass  at  about  the  same  distance  from  some  rocks  which  extend  south- 
ward from  the  point;*  having  passed  them,  luff  as  much  as  possible,  and  anchor  where 
me3t  cnnsoiiient,  with  the  precaution  of  being  guarded  against  the  edges  which  extends 
from  tli-  I  )  I  i  and  the  points,  exhibited  in  the  particular  plan  of  the  harbor.  On  enter- 
in"  irj  liii:  'viichorage,  be  particularly  attentive  to  the  sails,  (tec,  for  the  gusts  of  wind 
CL°  u  "  and  very  heavy.  The  River  Man/.anares  disembogues  a  little  to  the  south 
of  tl        '  ,  v.-'nch,  although  not  large,  has  very  good  water. 

?[:  .  !    ■;';  ;TA  MARTHA  TO  THE   RIVER   MAGDALENA.— From  Gaira    From  Santa 
Point,  wii.  !'  13  tbe  south  point  of  Santa  Martha,  the  coast  trends  nearly  south  13^  miles,    Martha  to 
to  the  Ciom  !iii.    /liich  is  a  lagoon,  formed  by  some  of  the  branches  of  the  river  Magda-    the  River 
lena.    From  this  Oiouega  it  bends  to  the  west,  and  W.  N.  W.,  a  distance  of  34  miles,  to    Magdalena. 
the  western  mouth  of  this  celebrated  river,  nnined  Boca  de  Ceni/.a,  leaving  at  8  miles  to 
the  eastward  another,  named  Boca  de  Rio  Viojo,  or  Old  River.     These  streams  form  aa 
island  in  form  of  a   Delta,   named  Isia  de  los  (lomoz,  which   is  6  miles  from   north  to 
south,  and  eight  from  east  to  west.     By  the  two  directions  which  the  coast  takes  from 
Santa  Martha?  it  forms  a  very  largo  bay,  in  the  bottom  of  which  is  the  Cienega.     All  this 
CO, St  is  low  and  shallow  ;  and  from  the  Cienega  towards  the  west,  it  forms  the  Isia  de 


-  Hrobrtbly  thoro  are  sunkea  rocka  Ivingnt  ft  greater  distance  from  Point  Botin  ;  for  Captiiin  S.  Cham- 
1  7  -I'liia  Miji'-tv'a  slii|)  DrniJ,  say's,  that,  ''  iiiivins  boea  driveu  out  from  tiic  anclioriigo  by  heavv 
.  u!.\  « tvvi(  ■ ;  cm  the  morning  of  the  .'7tb  Fotiranrv  i!)JI!,  in  agnin  tiikinu'  the  linrbiir,  the  sliip  ground- 
ed on  u  mek  not  liiij  down  in  the  chart,  and  whieli  bo  bud  passed  iasido  of  on  the  previous  morning. 
It  bore  from  the  east  end  ol  El  Morrocbiea  S.  55"  E.,  from  tlio  S.  E.  of  I'oiiit  Betin,  S.  4U  =>  VV.,  mid  from 
the  West  I'oint,  S.  10 »  VV.,  all  true  bearings.  Oa  its  inside  it  is  quite  perpendicular,  with  5  tathoms, 
(1  •creasing  gruiUially  to  tlio  shore :  its  outside  is  u  quick  descent  to  U,  I'J,  and  15  tathoms;  and  on  the  top 
of  it  are  exactly  V2  leut. 


ipjp|lll||l|lHI»W»Mfyi(IWN»''»'H"l'" 


462  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Snlamnncn,  the  west  point  of  which  is  formed  by  the  Boon  de  Rio  Viejo.  The  wntern 
of  tlie  Cienoga,  nnd  those  which  form  this  islimd,  communicHte  wirli  the  MagJiiloi^j  | 
several  siiiull  cliiimiels.  The  current  of  this  great  river  is'^so  powerful,  that  at  inoio  tlipn 
five  loajjuea  out  at  sea  it  gives  a  rrreeiiisli  color  to  the  water,  resembling  that  over  asliul 
low  bank.  All  the  i)ay  may  be  coasted  by  a  hand  lead,  for  it  is  all  clean,  TliiMVRst 
part  of  Isia  de  los  Gmnez,  and  the  east  part  of  Isla  Verde,  or  Green  Island,  form  the 
Boca  do  Coniza  of  the  River  Magdalona ;  and  in  the  middle  of  this  mouth  there  are  two 
keys. 

The  Isla  Verde  stietches  froin  east  to  west  a  distance  of  5  miles,  and  to  the  southward 
of  it  is  anothor,  of  greater  extent,  called  Sabaiiilla,  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  whinh  is  a  hurbnr 
of  the  same  name,  with  4i|,  5.',  and  (J  fathoms  water,  on  sand  and  mud. 

The  Derrotero  being  silent  on  this  harbor,  wo  introduce  the  following  account  of  jt 
from  dociiniiMits  in  the  Ilydrographical  Office  : 

"Tlie  llarborof  Sabanill  I  is  situated  about  7  or  8  miles  to  the  south-westward  of  th  -  Roca 
de  Coni/.a  of  the  Magdaleiui  River,  and  is  formed  by  the  main  land  on  the  south  ;,je 
and  by  the  islands  Salianllla,  Verde,  and  others,  on  the  north  side.  Its  entrnnce  is  ;i|.! 
twoen  the  point  of  Morro  Hermoso  and  a  shoal  bank  that  extends  about  4  milog  son],. 
Wf'stwa''(l  fioni  the  Isla  Vordo,  and  nearly  2  miles  from  the  west  end  of  Sahaniilu  Islimd 
The  extremity  of  this  bank  has  about  7  feet  water  on  it,  and  lies  about  3  miles  north-east- 
ward from  31orro  Hermoso  Point." 

Directions  fur  Sahanilla  Harbor,  by  Jodrell  Lr.iirh,  Esq.,  Commander  of  his  Makslu's 

sloop  Ontario,  18-20  and  '4:21.  "' 

"On  making  S  •  -ni'lit,  it  may  be  known  by  a  remarkable  table  land  lying  aliout  two 
miles  to  the  westw  i  '  i  o  fort.  On  tlie  east  end  of  the  table  land  is  a  squiiro  him,, 
mock  resemt)ling  a  b:i.  Bring  this  hummock  to  boar  G.  t'l.  \  S.,  and  a  ri>d  clitrwin 

be  seen,  which  steer  din  y  for,  and  you  will  pass  to  the  westward  of  a  slioal,  wiihonly 
7  feet  water  on  some  parts  of  it,  that  extends  4  miles  from  Isla  Verde.  Its  beni-iii^'siire 
the  Red  CiilF  S.  K.  by  >,;  Morro  Hermoso  Point  S.  W.  by  S.  ;  the  west  exti'cinjiv  of 
the  land  S.  \V. ;  and  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island  N.  by  E.  i  E.  These  iioarin^s  wpie 
taken  in  a  l)Oiit,  in  7  feet  water,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank  ;  and  at  the  distance  of  30  vunlj 
from  ir,  tliert;  are  5  fathoms,  increasing  regularly. 

"  When  the  west  extremity  of  the  land  is  shut  in  with  Morro  Hermoso  Point,  you  will 
have  passed  tlus  point  of  the  shoal,  and  may  haul  up  towards  the  fort,  in  from  o^  to  3 
fathoms.  The  bearings  at  the  Ontario's  anchorage  were,  the  fort  N.  K.  ij  E,  ;  west 
point  of  the  ishind  N.  by  W.  |  \V.;  and  Morro  Hermoso  Point  S.  W.  i  W.,  at  ii  quuiti^r 
of  a  mile  from  shore. 

"Wlien  turning  into  this  harbor,  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  a  shoal  on  \s'liir'li  tlie 
Ontario  tailed  when  in  stays.  It  lies  about  a  tpiaitcr  of  a  mile  from  the  Rod  Clili',  wiili 
the  followini;  l)earings : — The  outer  part  of  the  isbind  N.  N.  \V.,  and  the  fort  E.  \.  K, 
On  the  inside  of  this  bank  is  a  reef  of  rocks,  some  of  which  are  above  water.  On  tlie 
outside  the  d.-pths  are  from  G  to  .'Ji  fathoms,  and  on  it  there  are  from  .'i-i  to  -J  t'lthniiH, 
It  is  composcil  of  s  tnd  and  mud,  and  is,  perhaps,  formed  by  the  freshes  of  tiie  small 
rivers  tlirowing  the  mud  into  the  current,  which,  setMng  to  the  westward,  carries  it  iigiiinst 
the  rocks,  and  there  being  stopped,  forms  a  spit,  or  bank. 

"  There  is  also  another  shoal,  or  oyster-bed,  on  which  the  schooners  Kate  nnd  Expeii- 
m<M)t  lost  their  rudders.  Its  marks  are  the  magazine  in  the  fort,  open  a  little  to  th(^  cast- 
ward  of  the  guard-house,  also  in  the  fort,  and  a  remarkiible  notch  in  tlie  l)otloni  of  tlio 
bay  on  willi  a  blulf  point  to  the  nortliward  of  the  custom-house.  Ships  of  war  liavu  no 
occasion  for  going  so  far  up,  as  the  anchorage  is  equally  good  a  mile  below  it, 

"  As  the  wind  generally  lilows  I'rom  the  N.  E.,  ships  are  obliged  to  work  up  to  tiio  an- 
chorage. They  ought  not  to  stand  in-shore  to  less  than  5  fathoms,  nor  to  the  noitlnvard 
into  It'ss  than  .oi,  as  th(!  b;uik  is  stee])  to,  and  on  the  shore  side,  abreast  of  the  KcJ  Clill', 
is  the  reef  above  mentioned. 

"  I  have  been  informed  that  heavy  gales,  or  yreat  freshes  from  the  Magdiilmia,  cause 
the  banks  to  shift.  Durini;  scneral  visits  to  this  harbor,  we  fouml  the  curi'ent  si'ttiiiL' to 
the  westwani,  owing,  perhaps,  to  the  easterly  current,  which,  from  (J. degrade  Ziiiiiba, 
nieets  the  freshes  from  the  Magdalena,  cnusing  an  edily  over  the  outer  bank  into  Saba- 
nilla  Hay,  wdiicdi,  not  bi'in^abh*  to  escape  to  the  eastward,  returns  along  the  soiitlishuro 
of  the  bay,  and  round  the  .S.  W.  point,  to  sea. 

"There  is  no  regular  tide  at  this  pait  of  the  coast,  but  the  water  sometimes  falls  an' 
rises  4  or  .0  feet. 

"  Water  of  an  iudiflferent  quality  may  bo  procured  here  from  the  S.  W.  mouth  of  the 
MagilaliMia  :  but  th(«  bar  is  so  shallow  that  nothing  but  small  boats  can  get  in.  FIivuvoikI 
may  be  ea'^ily  obtained  iu  any  quantity,  the  buacii  near  the  river  being  nearly  uoverod 
with  drift  wood." 


"•^■^■WIF 


'▼''W'linpiPW^" 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


463 


directions  for  entering  Subanilla  Harbor,  by  Capt.  W.  B.  Bigland,  R.  N.,  1821. 

iiTlio  liin'l  to  tlio  oastvvnnl  of  tVie  nnchornge  is  quite  low.  and  full  of  trees.  It  consists 
jif  gi,„ili  if liiuds  lying  about  tlie  mouth  of  tiio  River  Magdtilena.  Tlio  shore  on  the  north 
siJeof  tlieni,  I  believe,  is  safe,  by  attending  to  the  lead  ;  but  I  would  not  advise  any  per- 
son to  npi)roarh  it  nearer  than  2J  miles. 

"Coming  from  the  eastward,  and  having  a  distinct  view  of  the  S.  W.  part  of  the 
low  islands,  and  the  high  land  to  the  southward  of  them,  go  no  nearer  than  'Ji  miles, 
l,ut  coatinue  steering  westward,  until  the  point  of  Mono  Hermoso  bears  about  S. 
liy  W.,  and  then  steer  directly  towards  it,  until  you  bring  a  small  hummock  uiion 
tiie  tiible  land  to  the  southward  to  bear  about  S.  E.,  (some  yellow  faced  clill's  close  to 
thewater,  will  then  be  seen,  and  nearly  on  with  the  said  hummock.)  You  may  then 
ffitli  safety  haul  up  for  it,  and  it  will  lead  you  clear  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  shoal  that 
stretches  off  2|  miles  S.  S.  W.  from  the  low  islands,  with  only  5  feet  water  on  it. 
Keep  tills  latter  mark  on,  and  run  S.  E.,  until  you  get  a  small  whitish  looking  house 
to  tlio  right  of  the  fort,  and  close  to  thewater,  a  little  to  the  eastWiinl  of  the 
ljj»liest  part  of  the  highest  of  three  hills  at  the  buck  of  the  fort,  bearing  E.  i  N. : 
iheu  haul  up  for  it,  which  is  about  as  high  as  a  ship  will  lie,  as  the  wind  is  generally  at 
N.N.E. 

"  i3ut  if,  in  going  in,  you  should  happen  to  get  into  7  fathoms  water,  before  you  have 
the  latter  mark  on,  bear  up  to  S.  W.  immediately,  until  you  deepen  to  9  or  10  fathoms, 
whicliyou  will  soon  do.  The  reason  for  this  precaution  is,  that  if  you  are  without  the 
bauk,  you  may  have  6  fathoms,  and  before  another  cast  of  the  lead  can  be  had,  the  ahip 
be  on  shore. 

"Ob  a  line  with  the  S.  W.  part  of  the  shoal  and  the  main  land,  there  are  not 
more  than  6^  fathoms  water.  Ships  of  a  small  draft  may  anchor  close  to  the  fort,  in  3 
fathoms. 

"There  are  good  turning  marks  for  working  up  to  the  fort,  but  rather  difficult  for 
strangoi'3  to  understand.  In  standing  south-eastward,  be  careful  to  keep  a  good  lookout 
forasiniill  red  or  yellow  spot  in  the  land  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  custom-house,  and  keep  it 
onen  of  the  fort.  In  standing  northward  keep  a  very  small  hillock  on  the  land,  a  con- 
sidernble  distance  elf,  just  open  of  the  south-easternmost  low  land,  though  this  will  not 
bekiiown  unless  pointed  out.  A  frigate  nniy  work  in  by  standing  no  farther  to  the  S.  E. 
than  the  depth  of  5  fathoms,  nor  to  the  northward  than  oi  fathoms.  In  mid-charmel, 
above  the  line  of  the  S.  S.  W.  part  of  the  reef,  tliere  are  no  more  than  (ii  fathoms,  on 
muddy  bottom.  The  soundings  are  very  regular,  but  in  standing  towards  the  reef  it  is 
steep  to. 

"The  fort  is  not  very  conspicuous,  but  may  bo  seen  8  or  9  miles.  It  has  6  guns,  which 
caiinut  be  seen  one  mile  off,  and  a  small  howitzer.  It  in  situated  on  a  rising  bluff  under 
the  high  land. 

"His  Majesty's  sl.ip  Euryalus  anchored  on  May  4lh  in  5i  fathoms,  on  soft  mud,  with 
the  iioithernmost  island  bearing  N.  4o°  E.;  Point  Morro  llermoso  S.  50°  W.;  highest 
redbiutf  S.  55°  E.,  distant  nearly  a  mile;  the  fort  N.  40^  E.:  and  the  custom-house 
N.  41°  E.  On  the  Kith  of  the  same  month,  she  anchored  in  7  fathoms,  on  soft  mud, 
with  the  northernmost  small  island  N.  2"^  E.;  the  custom-house  N.  40°  E.;  tlie  lower 
liuuso  at  the  fort  N.  o6^  E.;  the  double  highest  red  blulf  S.  C0°  E.;  and  Point  Morro 
Herniuso  S.  40°  W. 

"A  fi'igate  miglit  work  up  a  half  or  three-quarters  of  a  mile  nearer  the  fort,  and  anchor 
in  5  fathoms,  to  windward  of  all  the  ro'I-faced  land.  About  3  cal)loH'  length  elf  lies  a  rock 
justabuvo  water,  with  two  others  close  to  its  north  side,  with  2  feet  on  them;  and  an- 
other -JO  yards  N.  E.,  with  4  feet  on  it.  There  are  4  fathoms  close  to  their  iN.  W.  side, 
and  -'i  fathoms  between  them  and  the  shore.  The  custom-house  kept  open  of  the  fort 
clears  tlioin.  Although  those  rocks  are  out  of  the  track  of  vessels  working  up,  it  has  been 
tlioufiiit  i)roper  to  notice  them,  as  they  are  dangerous  for  boats. 

COAST  BETWEEN  ISLA  VERDE  AND  (JALERA  POINT  OF  ZAMBA.—  Coast  between 
From  the  Isia  Verde  the  coast  trends  S.  58°  W.,  for  a  distance  of  33  miles,  to  Galera  Isla  Verde  Sf 
Point  of  the  Island  of  Zamba,  or  Zamba  Point:  the  shore  between  forms  a  bay  of  five  or   Galera  Point 
six  miles  in  depth,  ail  of  it  being  shallow:  for,  at  3  leagues  from  the  shore,  there  are  of  Zamba. 
only  2()  fathoms  of  water,  on  muddy  bottom.     The  Cascabel  and  Palmarito  Shoals  ore 
in  it;  the  first,  very  near  the  coast,  in  the  middle  of  a  little  bay  formed  by  the  Morros,  or 
hills  of  Danias  and  of  Inasco :  the  second  is  more  dangerous,  for  it  lies  at  a  league  otf 
shore,  N.  SG'^  \V.  from  Morro  Pelade,  or  Bald  Hill.* 


'Cnptiiiii  J.  F.  Chapman,  when  comaiumliag  tho  Niintilus  sloop,  oa  tiio  8th  Jaly.  1821,  while  work- 
ing to  wiiuhvard  oa  this  coast,  and  boiajj  about  ;JJ  niiliis  iVoni  tlu;  acurest  shore,  with  fllorro  llermoso 
bearing  about  E.  N.  E.,  distuut  5  or  (3  miles,  btruck  ou  aa  unkuown  rock,  not  three  times  the  size  of  lite 


p*" 


'W^ 


■  '"■'•mm.m^'"*"^"" 


464 

Anchorage 
Galera  de 
Zatnba. 


Negrillo 
Shoal. 


Carthagena, 


Harbor  of 
Carthagena, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

of      ANCHORAGE  OF  GALERA  DE  ZAMBA.— The  Gnlera  Point  of  Znmbais 
low  thnt,  when  thore  ia  a  fresh  breeze,  the  sea  washes  over  the  greater  part  of  it.    t" 
tlie  west,  W.  N.  W.,  and  N.  W.  ofita  western  extremity,  and  at  the  distance  of  •>  mil," 
from  its  most  projecting  part,  there  are  four  small  banks,  of  different  sizes,  with  Si  fotu' 
cms  water,  on  bhick  sand.     Between  these  banks,  and  between  them  and  the  const  tl  ' 
dejjths  are  7,  8,  !),  and  10  fathoms,  black  sand.      This  Galera  Point  of  Zambii  proiecr 
into  the  sea  about  8  miles,  and  forms  on  its  south  part  an  anchorage,  sheltered  from  th 
breezes:  but  in  taking  it,  great  caro  ia  necessary,  on  account  of  the  banks  in  it,  and  f 
the  Tsia  de  Arenas,  or  Sandy  Island,  which  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  Bay  of  Galera  d 
Zamha ;  therefore,  every  one  intending  to  enter  into  this  anchorage,  must  pay  great  at* 
tention  to  the  hand  lead. 

At  S.  20"  W.,  distant  14i  miles  from  Point  Galera  of  Zamba,  is  the  Point  of  Cannas 
which  is  low  at  the  water's  edge,  but  hilly  very  close  to  it.  Between  these  two  point^ 
the  coast  is  of  moderate  height;  and  at  about  one-third  from  Point  Canoas  there  risesu 
hill,  forming  table  land  at  its  top,  with  several  barrancas,  or  reddish  colored  ravines,  upon 
it,  called  Bujio  del  Gato.  On  the  intermediate  coast  there  are  several  dangerous  snots 
Of  these,  the  first  is  the  islet  Casoajal,  which  lies  from  the  Point  (Tiilera  of  Zamba  S.  fja 
E.,  at  the  distance  of  6  miles,  and  from  the  coast  a  long  mile  and  a  half.  North,  and  N 
6°  E.  from  this  islet,  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  and  three-tenths,  and  eight-tenths  of. 
mile,  are  two  little  banks,  with  2  and  4  fathoms  Wiiter  on  them ;  and  there  is  anotiierof 
equal  depth,  lying  N.  58°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  two  shori  miles  from  the  Cascajal.  S 
IA"  W.  from  the  Point  Galefa  of  Zamba,  and  at  the  distanfi  of  seven  short  miles,  is  tlie 
west  rock  of  Bujio  del  Gato  Shoal,  which  extends  a  long  half  mile  from  north  to  soutli 
At  about  N.  N.  E.  from  its  north  extremity,  distant  half  a  mile,  there  is  another  rock 
called  ttie  N.  E.  Ro<:k,  or  Una  de  Gato,  Cat's  Claw.  Ths  depth  on  the  outside  of  thig 
shoal  is  7,  8.  9,  and  up  to  14  fathoms,  at  the  disi;ince  of  2i  miles.  There  is  also,  at  the 
distance  of  3i  miles  N.  31^  E.  from  Point  Canoes,  a  n»cky  bank,  of  3  fathoms  water. 
This  lies  in  the  middle  of  the  Bay  of  Bujio  del  Gato.  We  ought  to  warn  the  navjirator 
that  going  into  this  bay  is  dange'ous,  especially  by  night,  and  if  he  is  compelled  to  do  so 
he  ought  not  to  go  into  a  less  depth  than  20  fathoms. 

NEGRILLO  SHOAL.— The  Point  of  Canoas  has  lying  off  it,  at  the  distance  of  one 
long  mile  and  a  quarter,  S.  49°  W.,*  a  shoal,  called  the  Negiillo,  ofone  quarter  of  a  mile 
extent.  It  is  composed  of  three  rucks,  at  a  short  distance  from  each  other,  in  a  triaofu- 
larform,  with  from  2  to  5  feet  on  them.  All  around  these  rocks,  and  very  near  to  them 
there  are  6,  8,  and  9  fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  rocks,  small  gravel,  and  sand;  and  tile 
channel  between  them  and  the  coast  would  be  practicable,  were  it  not  for  three  sunken 
rocks,  which  make  it  difficult  to  pass.  From  the  Negrillo  Shoal,  the  hill  of  La  Popu,  m 
Carthngena,  bears  S.  44"  W.,  ili9tant73  miles;  and  this  bearing  may,  if  necessary, serve 
to  guide  the  navigator  clear  of  it.  At  S.  50°  W.,  a  short  mile  from  the  southernmost 
Morrito,  is  the  Cabeza  Shoal,  with  2  feet  of  water  on  its  shoal  est  part. 

CARTHAGENA. — From  Canoas  Point  the  coast  trends  to  the  eastward  a  long  mile; 
and  thence  it  bends  round  to  the  southward  3  miles,  where  rise  some  little  hills,  nulled 
Los  Morritos.  From  these,  the  coast,  which  is  low,  and  covered  with  mangroves,  trends 
S.  33°  W.,  5i  miles,  to  ihe  city  of  Carthagena,  which  is  built  upon  tlio  western  part 
of  this  swampy  land.  About  one  mile  and  three-quarters  to  the  east  of  the  city,  rises 
the  hill  of  La  Popa,  on  the  summit  of  which  there  is  a  convent  of  Augustine  Monks, 
and  a  cha])el  or  sanctuary,  dedicated  to  the  Virgin  of  La  Popa.  In  clear  weather, 
this  hill  may  be  seen,  from  the  quarter-deck  of  a  line-of-battle  ship,  at  the  distance  of  10 
leagues. 

HARBOR  OF  CARTHAGENA.— The  little  tongue  of  land  on  which  the  city  is 
built,  extends  S.  S.  W.,  tw>.  ''ort  miles  from  it ;  thenturning  round  to  the  east,  it  forms, 
with  the  main  land,  n.  basin,  which  is  the  anchorage  or  harbor,  and  which  is  as  well  shel- 
tered as  the  best  arsenal.  One  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  exterior  point  of  the  little 
tonguo,of  which  we  have  just  spoken,  is  the  north  point  of  the  island  called  TierraBumba, 


ship^  it  had  II  feet  wnter  on  it,  nnd  6  fnthnnis  all  round  it.  In  a  subsequent  neoount  he  dcscribesit 
bearing  S.  W.  from  Morro  HormoKO,  at  the  sitiiic  distance  from  it,  and  from  tho  nearest  shore. 

The  dhTereiice  in  tlie  given  bearings  of  Morro  HermuHo  precludes  tiie  noHsil)iliCy  of  assigning  to  tliis 
rock  Q  place  in  tlie  clinrt ;  but  it  has  been  thought  advisable  to  insert  tho  above  ancount,  in  orJerto excite 
tiie  vigilance  of  (hose  who  innv  hrreatler  have  to  navigate  on  this  part  of  the  coast. 

•  SUNKEN  ROCKS  OFP  CANOAS  POINT— On  May  mix,  m[),  H.  B.  M.  Spoy,  W, 
James,  commander  struck  on  a  reof  of  rocks,  Canoas  I'oiiit  bearing  N  E.  J  N.,  distant  aboai  three 
miles.  On  examining  this  reef,  it  was  found  to  consist  of  si'veral  lumds  of  rocks,  about  IDU  yards  in 
length,  with  3  to  5  tittnoms  between  them.  7  fathoms  all  round  them,  and  on  the  tops,  wbicli  are  slurp 
pointed,  from  4  to  ."ifeet.    The  current  was  setting  to  the  N.  E.  one  mile  per  hour. 

On  May  5th.  ISJti,  H.  M.  S.  I.«is,  Cant.  H.  Fatton,  struck  on  a  rock,  with  Cnuoan  Point  hearing  N.  E, 
the  e.itiinatcd  distance  from  the  laud  auuut  >'i  or  3  miles.  When  she  struck,  there  were  7 J  futliuiiij  un- 
der tho  main  chains. 

These  rocks  are  evidently  the  continuation  of  the  Negrillo  Shoal,  whidi,  therefore,  has  not  been  cor- 
rectly placed  in  the  Spanish  surveys.    Measures  have  been  taken  to  ascertain  its  extent  and  position. 


■"^ 


BliUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


465 


Spoy,  W. 

about  three 

101)  viirJ;  in 

icli  ure  sliarp 


1  (],e  passage  which  is  formed  between  the  two  is  calletJ  Boca  GrantJe,  and  which 
■  nitificiallyc'"*'"^  in  such  n  manner,  that  only  boats,  and  vessels  drawing  very  little  water, 
'*n  enter  by  it.  Tierra  Bomba  Island  is  about  4  iiiles  from  north  to  south,  and  its  south 
"iiit  is  the  north  point  of  Boca  Chica,  which  is  the  only  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  Car- 
r  n(i.  The  south  point  of  this  entrance  is  the  north  point  of  another  large  island, 
ameil  Baru,  and  which  is  separated  from  the  main  and  by  a  creek  named  Passa  Caballos. 
°  Igiible  by  canoes  only.  On  both  points  of  the  Boca  Chica,  there  are  castles  to  defend 
the  entrance.  That  on  the  north  side  is  mimed  San  Fernando,  and  that  on  the  south,  San 
Josef.  Tiiis  boca,  or  eutraiice,  is  rather  more  than  two  cables'  length  in  width  ;  but  there 
are  parts  of  it  where  the  bunk  of  shallow  water  which  extends  off  from  the  southern  cas- 
.|fc  (Sun  Josef's)  narrows  it  one  half. 

Tliis  entrance  opens  first  into  a  large  and  well  sheltered  bay,  where  there  is  a  depth 
ofl3  and  15  fathoms.  To  the  north  of  this  the  eastern  coast  of  Tierra  Bomba  inchnes 
imvards  the  main  land,  leaving  a  channel  of  a  mile  in  width,  at  the  entrance  of  which 
•nd  in  its  middle,  are  some  slioiils,  wliich  lie  to  the  westward  of  an  islet  called  Brujas, 
.jij  which  is  very  near  to  the  main  land.  Through  this  strait  is  the  entrance  into  a 
secomi  bay,  which  corresponds  with,  or  isopposite  to,  the  Boca  Grande,  and  in  which 
llieie  are  also  1 4  and  1 5  fathoms.  To  the  north  of  this  second  bay  there  is  an  entrance 
of  less  than  half  a  mile  wide,  defended  by  other  castles,  and  which  conducts  into  the 
hiirbor.  This  channel  or  entrance  has  a  shoal  m  the  middle,  which  forms  it  into  two  very 
5,1-row  channels,  but  with  8  to  12  fathoms  water ;  and  the  depth  in  the  anchor.'ge  no 
,.|)ere  exceeds  11  fathoms. 
Hiiviug  given  an  idea  of  the  harbor,  we  shall  now  speak  of  the  exterior  coast  and  the 

BANK  OF  BOCA  GRANDE.— From  Point  Canoas  to  Boca  Grande  there  is  a  large  Bank  of  Bo- 
biink,  on  which  the  depth  of  water  diminishes  gradually  ;  ami  there  are  9  fathoms  at  4  ca  Grande, 
miles,  or  somewhat  loss  from  the  land.  This  bimk  is  named  the  Playa  Grande,  and  ships 
ifliV  anchor  on  it,  m  7  or  H  fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  grey  sand,  in  front  of  the  city, 
^ft'er  Uiissiiig  the  most  norttit-rly  piirt  of  Tie:ra  Bomba,  the  depth  increases  to  20,  30, 
and  40  fathoms  ;  and  at  2  cables'  length  trom  the  shore  there  are  6.  To  the  westward 
(it  Tierra  Bombo,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles,  there  is  a  shoal,  called  the  .Salmedina,  which 
bus  been  much  spoken  of,  on  account  of  the  great  loss  of  ships  which  it  has  caused. 
This  shoal,  wliich  is  a  little  more  than  a  mile  in  extent  from  north  to  south,  and  a  little 
less  from  east  to  west,  lies  with  the  following  bearings  :• 

llie  Head,  or  North  Edge  of  it. 

The  Castle  del  Angel S.  64°  E. 

Hill  of  La  Popa N.  68    E. 

N.  W.   Point  of  Tierra  Bomba N.  80    E. 

Point  Canoas N.  35    E. 

The  South  Head,  or  Edge,  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks. 

Tlie  Tower  of  the  Cathedral N.  55°  E. 

Hill  of  La  Popa N.  62    E. 

N.  W.    Point  of  Tierra  Bomba N.  70    E. 

Point  Canoas N.  33i  E. 

In  addition  to  these  marks,  by  wliich  it  may  with  certainty  be  avoided,  in  running  from 
1  Pliivii  Grande  for  Boca  Chica,  ships  ought  to  get  into  from  6  to  8  fathoms,  to  the  west 
(of  tliocity,  and  ut  the  distance  of  three  short  miles  from  it,  and  then  steer  soutli,  without 
1  inclining  any  thing  to  tlie  westward  ;  and  so  soon  as  tho  depth  increases,  keep  more  to 
[till!  liirbuard  hand,  in  order  to  close  in  with  Tierra  Bomba  to  the  distance  of  half  a  mile ; 
1  and  run  along  thus,  closing  to  witliin  a  pistol  shot  of  the  north  shore,  at  the  entrance  of 
iBoeii  Chica,  avoiding  tho  south  shore,  which  is  foul.  To  enter  Boca  Chica,  and  navigate 
I  witnio  the  bays,  up  to  the  harbor,  requires  a  pilot,  and  one  may  always  be  obtained  at 
I  Boca  Chica. f 

As  the  harbor  of  Carthagena  may  be  made  by  ships  from  the  southward,  it  is  necessary 
Ito  give  some  description  of  the  south  coast,  as  far  ns  tho  islands  of  Rosario,  in  order  to 
Icouiiect  all  the  information  roquiroJ  for  making  the  land  with  correctness  and  safety. 

'These  bouringa  do  not  agree  with  the  poBltinn  of  tho  plioal  in  nny  of  the  charts. 

tAccoidiii^  to  the  reinurks  inaile  by  Mr.  J.  Wliiilboy,  when  iiiiistcr  of  hi'*  Majesty's  ship  Europii,  it  ap- 
Imrs  that  stiipa  huving  occasion  toiiuuhor  and  stop  in  Boca  Chicn,  shoiilii  haul  round  the  "i.  \V.  point  of 
ITierra  Boiuba,  at  the  distance  of  halt'  a  cable's  length,  and  run  along  by  the  beac^h,  until  the  centre  of 
ISan  Ksmundo  Castle  bears  N.  E.,  true,  and  then  arop  an  anchor  in  I'i  lathoms,  at  about  lOU  yf.:ds  triini 
Itlie  beach.  They  may  then  moor  with  two-thirds  of  a  cable  on  the  N  E.  anchor,  and  half  a  cable  on  the 
lb.  W.,  in  16  fathoms,  which  ought  to  be  (he  bearings  of  the  anchors.  When  nioored,  the  centre  of  .San 
iFemandj  Castle  will  bear  N.  E.,  us  before,  the  centre  of  San  Josef  Castle,  E.  S.  E.,  und  the  uxtieiiiity  of 
Sierra  Boinba,\V.N.W. 

30 


466 


and 
Boca 


BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 

We  have  nlrendy  snid  that  tho  south  const  of  Boca  Chica  is  tho  north  const  of  thn  r 
d  Baru.     The  exterior  const  of  this  islniid,  from  the  point  forming  the  enfrnn 
iCB  Chicn,  trends  S.  3bi'^  W.,  for  13  miles,  to  Bnru  Point.     This  const  is  siiffi,.!'".! 


clenn  ns  fnr  as  nn  islet,  nnined  the  Fnrnllon  of  Perico,  from  whicli  to  tho  soiitii  it  U    , 
foul,  with  a  renf.     To  the  westwnrd  of  tliis  latter  pnrt  of  th(!  const,  thiit  is.  from  n,    17^ 
rnllon  of  Perico  southwnrd,  are  the  Islands  of  Kosnrio,  of  which  there  are  four  pi  i,,    "i 
ones,  with  several  smnll  islets.     The  ensternniost  and  southernmost  of  these,  wlinh'' 
also  the  smallest,  is  named  Isln  de  Arenas,  and  it  is  distant  from  the  sliore  of  Hai^n  ,, .     '^ ' 

of  a  j 
i;t  the 


]y  one  mile  and  a  half:  but  the  channel  between  them  is  reduced  to  thrce-fiuint,,,. 
milo,  by  the  reefs  and  shoals  which  extend  fronj  both  sides.      W.  N.  W.  i  W 


distance  of  3i  long  miles  from  Arenas  Island,  is  the  Island  of  Rosnrio;  and  to 


"ii!  iiorili 


ward  of  these  two,  is  that  named  Isia  Lnrga,  or  Long  Island,  which  is  the  lar"i>5f 
which,  with  its  banks,  shoals  and  islets,  extends  out  to  the  westward  fartlmr  ^Imn  .'i 
Rosario  Island.     To  tho  northward  of  the  middle  of  Isia  Larga,  at  a  little  more  thm  i 
miles  distnnt,  lies  the  Islet  Tesoro.  with  a  reef  to  the  westward.     The  ohannfj  hcn^l. 
them  has  from  17  to  25  fnthoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  sand  and  rocks,  from  whicli  1!  " 
Chica  bears  N.  ()3°  K.,  distant  lOi  miles.     By  the  chart  it  bears  N.  57'  E.  '"" 

The  Rosnrio  Islands  are  very  foul,  and  no  one  should  snil  among  them  unii-ss  »,|| 
acquainted  ;  but  nlwnys  keep  nt  a  sufficient  distance  to  the  westward,  in  order  tu  hhh 
tho  shallows  which  extend  out  from  them.  About  S.  S.  W.,  distant  7  mili-s  from  R,,  "' 
Island,  there  is  a  shoal  called  tho  Tnrtuga.  These  islands  are  fertile  in  trees,  ninl  toil ' 
southward  of  them  there  is  good  shtdter  from  the  trade  wind.  Besides  the  Hank  of  R  ^ 
sario  Island,  there  are  two  others,  one  3i  nidos  to  the  W.  N.  W.,  and  the  other '.'A 
S.  W.  by  S.     Both  are  rocks  and  sand,  with  G  and  7  fathoms  water  on  them. 


\  mili'j 


iniiy 

si'i'iptiun 
flof 


Observations  and  Reflections  on  Navigating  on  the  Coast  of  Colombia,  from  the  Brafm' 

Mouth  to  Carthagena.  *      ' 

Reflecting  on  what  has  been  stated  respecting  the  winds  that  are  experienced  onthH 
coast,  it  would  appear  that  nothing  further  need  be  added  to  the  descri])tion  idrenHv livfn 
to  enaldo  tho  navigator  to  prosecute  his  voyage  with  the  greatest  safety.  In  fnct,  iistliero 
is  on  this  coast  only  tho  general  breeze,  or  trade  wind,  neither  iiurricanes  nor  hard  nuiihs 
nro  to  be  feared,  the  first  being  absolutely  unknown,  nnd  the  second,  if  they  do  at  aiiv 
time  occur,  never  excccid  tho  strength  of  the  ordinnry  breeze.  If  in  the  niitiy  sensj' 
that  is,  fi'om  May  to  November,  there  are  sometimes  strong  southerly  winds,  tfiBv  niui 
be  considered  rnther  ns  8(iunlls  with  henvy  rain,  of  short  duration  :  and  a.s  tliev  hliw  ,jif 
shore,  do  but  little  injury.  This  const,  therefore,  esj)ecially  as  far  us  Ciip(f  LaVc 
be  considered  as  a  continued  harbor,  as  far  ns  climate  is  concerned  ;  and  no 
necessary  to  enable  iis  to  avoid  every  danger  upon  it,  than  a  reference  to  the  i|i 
given  ;  for  wo  nro  sure  that  tho  loss  of  a  vessel  upon  it  has  been  very  rarely  ilie  ^ 
a  storm. 

From  Ca[)o  La  Vela  westward,  it  is  proper  t«  give  some  notices ;  for  ns  the  hrpo/jN  I 
es|)ecially  from  Cape  Aguja.  or  rather  from  Point  San  .luan  de  Guia,  are  cxceeliiiJlvl 
strong,  so  much  so,  that  they  may  bo  considered  as  real  gales,  it  becomes  iiec('s,.:iiiy"i'(il 
present  some  rules  for  making  the  ditierent  harbors,  to  |)ri!vent  as  much  iis  pos-iljlf  iiiu<e  I 
jnadvertencies  that,  durin<;  s-ich  unmanageable  winds,  might  prove  of  the  most  seriouj  I 
coiijequences.     The  sh  of  tho  wind,  wlrch  we  have  before  said  .soinetime.'j chiires 

to  S.  and  S.  W..  from  .lun^  to  November,  raises  some  doubt  with  respect  to  tl!(>  nm-A 
tion,  nnd  tlierefore  the  following  reflections  will  not  bo  considered  iircltnaiit ;  fur  tiiijii;hl 
they  may  not  be  necessary  for  those  who  are  acquainted,  they  cannot  fail  of  being  bene- 
iiciul  to  those  wlio  are  not  so. 

The  principal  commercini  establishments  on  tiiis  coast,  nnd  townrds  which  vi'sselsfioml 
Europe  in  general  direct  their  course,  are  Cumana,  Barcelona,  Laguayra,  I'ortu  Ciil)il 
Mnracaybo,  Santa  Martha,  and  Carthagena;  Pampatar,  in  tho  Island  of  .Maiiiinitu,  anjl 
Snntii  Ana,  in  the  Island  of  Curazno.     It  being  a  general  rule  on  this  const,  n:^  well  iij  in  I 
the  whole  Sea  of  the  Autillns,  or  Caribbean  Sea,  to  make  tho  land  to  wiii(hviiid  ufibel 
port  of  destination,  as  n  matter  of  neces.iiity,  to  prevent  the  trouble  coi)SL'(|iifnt  niMiijft- 
ting  to  leeward  of  it,  we  may  say  with  safety,  that  being  onc«  within  the  Son  of  the  An- 1 
tillas,  all  those  who  intend  to  anchor  at  either  Margarita  or   Cumann,  sliould  cluso  wiili 
the  coast  about  Cape  Mala  Pasque,  or  Cape  Tliree  Points  passing  in  preforcnce  ihruuili 
the  ciiannel  which  Margurita  forms  with  the  main  land,  ns  we  have  before  Etuted  ia  thai 
descri|)tion.      This  route  niso  nppenrs  preferable  for  those  who  are  bound  to  Biiicelona,  | 
although  there  certainly  can  be  no  inconvenience  in  their  go;ng  to  the  northward  uf. Mar- 
garita. 

Those  who  are  bound  to  Laguayra  from  Cumana  or  Barcelona,  should  shape  a  direct] 
course  from  Cape  Codera,  passing  always  between  tho  Island  Tortuga  nnd  tlic  const;  I 
those  who,  from  Europe,  or  nny  of  the  Antillus,  are  hound  to  that  port,  should  niivigate| 
to  the  northward  of  Toiluga,  to  approach  the  coast  about  the  eume  cnpe,  or  a  little  to  lee- 


■   " —         y      o 

I  tioiied  lit  the  rate 
so  as  to  reach  Poii 
Ciinoas,  or  on  Pli 
wind  for  the  night 
in  tlie  time  of  tht 
must  be  niaintainf 
I  an  anchor. 

When  we  ndvif 
1  Agujii,  Zninha  anc 
I  lengthened  by  foil- 
I  nriuus  shoals  and 
II  the  description 
I  tiveen  Point  Zaml 
I  large  vessel. 

If,  during  the  se 
I  described  to  Carth 
I  seasuu  of  the  rains 
Itbe  parallel  of  12° 
las 75^  45'  or  76°  ] 
I  by  degrees  to  8.  K 
j  to  make  the  land  I 
j  io  this  season  tho  i 
ItotheS.  W.  Pai 
iDigiit,  but  only  by 
J  la  working  to  w 
I  close  by  the  wind, 
ling  ought  to  be  de( 
Inight,  orsomewha 
Ihas  been  raining  be 
lieii  breeze,  or  thii 
Iwiatioos  take  plai 
Iworking  from  lee« 
|£.  it  will  be  propai 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


467 


J  of  it'  tnking  cnre,  if  thoy  choose  to  muke  thn  rock  callod  tho  Sentinel,  which  lioa  to 
,    portlivvnrd  of  tho  cape.     For  those  bound  to  Porto  Cabello,  it  will  not  be  bo  necessary 
make  Ciipo  Codoni,  as  any  other  point  on  the  const  will  answer  tho  same  jjurpose,  pro- 
Jeii  it  '*"  sufriciontly  to  windward  of  thoir  port. 

*  To  nuiko  Cape  Codera,  or  any  haibor  ujjou  the  coast  to  leeward  of  it,  every  one  may 
it  \a  tho  manner  that  is  easiest,  or  that  he  considers  boat ;  that  is,  he  may  paps  througa 
„y  of  the  straild  or  passages  that  are  formed  by  the  islands  to  tho  northward  of  the  coast; 
'nJuii'S  which,  nothing  more  is  necessary  than  to  attend  to  the  description  of  the  on« 
•hat  he  takes. 

fflioHP  bound  to  Maracayho  from  the  east,  should  got  sight  of  Cape  St.  Roman,  and 
those  from  the  westward  should  make  Point  Espada.  In  running  for  Cape  St.  Roman, 
tliey  n'l'y  I"""*  c'*'"""  *"  ^''*'  northward  or  southward  of  Curazao ;  and  from  that  cape 
ibey  aii'y  '""  "'""S  ''y  tlie  poast,  until  thoy  got  about  '2  miles  to  the  westward  of  Point 
Miiculhi,  wliich  is  the  situation  from  which  the  course  to  tho  bar  is  certain,  aahas  already 
Ln  stilted  in  the  description. 

Should  the  navigation  to  Cape  St.  Roman  be  made  outside  the  islands,  it  should  be 
rerollected  tliat  the  Rocjues  and  tho  Islas  de  Avos  are  extremely  dangerous  on  their  north 
jiJei;  and  to  the  end  that  they  may  be  careful  to  keep  themselves  at  a  sufficient  distance 
froiii'tliom,  especially  by  night,  they  must  not  forgot  to  apply  to  their  reckoning  for  the 
nidit,  a  correction  for  currents  which  they  experience  during  tho  day,  as  deduced  from 
tht  comparison  of  the  dead  reckoning  with  the  points  of  departure  and  landfalls.  The 
duB  observation  of  this  remark  is  very  important,  as  from  what  has  been  before  stated 
rektive  to  tlio  currents,  they  in  this  place  require  particular  attention. 

Tliose  bound  direct  for  Santa  Martha,  or  Carthagona,  ought,  unquestionably,  to  r.avi- 
ciite  outside  all  the  islands,  so  as  to  make  that  of  Oruba  and  the  land  about  Cape  La  Vela; 
for,  having  obtained  a  sight  of  the  latter,  they  may  with  safety  shape  a  direct  course  for 
Cape  Aguja,  in  order  to  reach  the  anchorage  of  Santa  Martha,  as  before  directed.  We 
ineak  of  the  propriety  of  navigating  to  the  northward  of  all  the  islands,  because  by  so 
doin'a  nioie  direct  course  may  be  shaped,  and  tho  distance  be  thereby  shortened,  which 
is  well  known  to  every  skilful  navigator. 

Those  who,  without  touching  at  Santa  .Martha,  go  on  to  Cartliagena,  will  shape  a  direct 
course  from  Cape  Aguja  for  the  mouths  of  the  River  Magdalena,  whence,  by  pass- 
|ii2  about  2  leagues  to  the  westward  of  Point  Zamba,  and  one  and  a  half  from  Point 
Cunoas,  they  may  proceed  direct  to  Boca  Chica,  or  else  anchor  off  Point  Canoas,  or  on 
tliebank  of  Pluya  Grande,  if  they  should  not  be  able  to  effect  an  entrance  into  Boca  Chica 
with  daylight.  Calculation  ought  to  be  made,  in  order  that  the  distance  may  be  propor- 
tioned uttlie  rate  the  vessel  sails  at,  or  the  sailing  of  the  vessel  to  the  distance  to  be  run, 
sons  to  reach  Point  Zamba,  and  thence  take  the  Boca  Chica  by  day  ;  or  anchor  off  Point 
Canoas,  or  on  Playa  Grande,  in  order,  if  possibUs  to  avoid  the  necessity  of  hauling  the 
wind  for  the  night,  which  will  be  troublesome  and  injurious  to  the  ship  and  her  rigging, 
in  the  time  of  the  hard  breezes;  but  if  there  be  no  means  of  avoiding  it,  the  situation 
must  be  maintained  by  short  tacks  off  and  on  ;  or,  if  the  wind  and  sea  will  permit,  let  go 
an  anchor. 

When  we  advise  a  direct  course  to  bo  shaped  from  point  to  point  on  the  coast,  as 
Afuja,  Zamba  and  Canoas,  it  is  not  only  on  account  of  distance,  which  would  be  greatly 
ieugthened  by  following  every  turn  of  the  coast,  but  also  for  the  purpose  of  avoiding  the 
various  shoals  and  dangers  which  lie  between  Cape  La  Vela  and  I'oint  Aguja,  aa  noticed 
in  the  description  of  the  anchorage  of  the  city  of  La  Hacha,  as  well  as  those  lying  be- 
hveen  Point  Zamba  and  Point  Canoas,  among  which  we  recommend  no  one  to  go  with  a 
large  vessel. 

If,  during  the  season  of  tho  breezes,  it  is  necessary  to  follow  the  route  which  we  have 
described  to  Carthagena,  from  any  place  situated  to  the  eastward  of  it,  you  ought,  in  the 
season  of  tho  rains,  or  during  the  vendavalos,  to  steer  true  west  from  Cape  La  Vela,  in 
the  parallel  of  12°,  or  somewhat  more,  in  order  lo  retain  the  breeze,  until  you  get  so  far 
as  75^  45'  or  76°  15',  west  longitude  ;  and  from  that  situation  to  steer  south,  coming  up 
by  degrees  to  S.  K.,  on  getting  into  the  limits  of  the  rains ;  observing  also,  that  it  is  better 
to  make  the  land  to  the  southward  of  Boca  Chica  than  to  tho  northward  of  it;  because 
in  this  season  the  currents  set  to  the  N.  E.,  though  in  the  season  of  the  breezes  they  run 
to  the  S.  W.  Particular  care  should  likewise  be  taken,  not  to  run  in  upon  the  land  by 
Dight,  but  only  by  day  ;  for  at  such  times  tho  land  is  very  hazy. 

lu  working  to  windward  on  this  coast,  froni  Carthagena  to  Margarita,  or  Trinidad,  haul 
close  by  the  wind,  and  make  the  boards  as  long  as  convenient.  The  proper  time  of  tack- 
ing ought  to  be  decided  by  the  daily  variation  of  the  trade  wind,  which,  at  about  12  at 
eight,  or  somewhat  sooner,  comes  off  the  shore  from  about  E.  S.  E.,  or  even  S.  E.,  if  it 
mbeen  raining  before,  and  the  ground  is  soaked;  and  from  9  to  11  in  the  forenoon,  the 
leu  breeze,  ur  that  from  E.  N.  E.,  comes  on.  At  all  distances  from  the  shore  these 
tariatioos  take  place ;  and  the  navigator  may,  and  ought,  to  take  advantage  of  them  in 
iWorking  from  leeward  to  windward  :  therefore  when  at  night  the  breeze  gets  to  the  S. 
£.  it  will  be  proper  to  tack,  and  atretch  off  from  the  land  until  the  morning ;  and  when 


468 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

the  wind  gets  to  the  northward  of  east,  he  ought  to  tack  and  stand  in  towards  the  In  h 
again.     And  if  on  account  of  neiirin^  the  land  lie  cannot  continue  on  the  Hnnio  tncii  u  n 
the  bree/e  changes,  he  ought  to  inalte  short  taclia  along  shore,  until  the  broeze  nt 
changes  tu  E.  S.  E.,  and  then  again  stand  out  to  sea.     By  these  means  two  long  BtrKtch  " 
may  always  be  made,  one  to  the  N.  E.,  the  other  to  the  S.  E. ;  that  is  to  sny,  buth^r  I 
them  within  eight  points  of  the  compass.     By  worlting  to  windward  on  short  tucks  n| 
shore,  this  advantage  cannot  be  obtained,  because  the  breeze  always  blows  along  the  con  f  ' 
unless  sometimes  there  may  bo  a  light  land  wind  in  the  night,  and  before  the  aunri' 
during  the  season  of  the  rains ;  but  they  do  not  last,  and  such  variations  an'ord  but  iJtT  i 
assistance.  ^ ' 

Very  small  vessels  cannot  proceed  upon  this  system  when  the  breezes  are  veryftf 
which  from  Point  Aguja  to  the  Isia  Fuorta  are  like  storms,  with  a  rough  hoi;  soth  >  I 
they  cannot  make  any  way  :  in  these  cases,  it  is  most  advisable  for  them  to  keep  In  ni> 
the  coast  where  the  water  is  smoother.     But  large  vessels,  well  equipped,  and  ciipubln  r 
resisting  these  gales,  or  when  the  breezes  are  moderate,  ought  to  rauke  long  stretclJ 
when  the  wind  will  admit  of  it,  in  the  manner  already  described.  ^ 

Observations  by  Capt.  Don   Tarquato  Peidrola. 

On  the  coast  of  Cartagena  de  Indias,  of  which  I  can  speak  with  certainty,  the  bieezp 
do  not  begin  until  the  end  of  Novombar,  and  generally  with  little  strength  until  themiii! 
die  or  end  of  December,  from  which  time  they  are  powerful,  both  day  and  night;  only 
they  frequently,  but  not  always,  moderate  a  little  between  sunrise  and  nine  or  ten  Iq  iji! 
morning,  when  they  recover  their  ordinary  force.  When  you  are  very  n^ar  the  coasL 
especially  if  it  be  high,  you  may  often  find  them  modoroto  at  tiie  dawn  of  day,  nnd  at 
sunrise  veer  to  E.  N.  E.,  until  9  or  10  o'clock,  when  they  again  blow  in  tlieir  usuiii direc- 
tion, which,  on  this  coast,  is  from  N.  N.  E.  to  N.  E.  Of  these  variations,  those  wiioare 
acquainted  with  the  coast,  and  sail  near  it,  may  take  advantage ;  and  it  mny  he  belter  at  I 
nightfall,  to  anchor  at  the  various  points  which  olfer,  ever  for  largo'vessels.  Intliesei. 
son  which  is  not  of  the  breezes,  that  is,  from  April  or  M»j,  until  December  they  expe- 
rience the  wet  season,  but  not  in  the  other  seasons,  as  has  been  made  manifest ;  addb 
that  a  vessel  which  attempts  to  got  to  windward  outside,  will  not  accomplish  it  withoui  I 
great  difficulty  and  damage,  as  much  from  the  strength  of  the  breeze,  because  the  sea  is 
very  rough  and  short,  as  tar  as  30  or  40  leagues  from  the  coast,  when  it  becomes  longer' 
and  because  being  forced  in  the  night  to  take  in  reefs,  and  that  the  current  driiws  to- 
wards the  N.  W.  quarter,  it  results  that  the  little  gained  by  tacking  is  lost  by  these 
causes.     These  facts  have  been  proved  by  continued  experience. 


COAST  OF  COLO^nBIA,  ]V10$$<i1JlT0,  HONDURAS,  A^O 

YUCATAi^. 

From  Carlhagena  to  Cape  Catoche. 

[From  the  Derrotero  de  las  Antillafl,  kc.  A^c] 

'A«  Rosario        THE  ROSARIO  ISLANDS  and  ISLAND  OF     (ARU,  have  been  described  lai 

Islands  and     the  preceding  section,  and  it  has  also  been  noticed  tha  the  latter  is  8ej)ariitoii  from  tlie  I 

Island  of         main  land  by  a  narrow  channel,  named  the  Paso  Cab    los  (Mori^e  Puss.)    Theiiorilij 

Jiaru.  end  of  the  channel  opens  into  the  first  Bay  of  Ciirthagena  ;  the  soutii  end  of  itintotbel 

N.  E.  part  of  a  great  bay  between  the  Island  Baru  and  the  coast,  which  extends  inwardj 

north-easterly,  nearly  12  miles:  the  points  which  form  its  entrance  are,  the  S.  W-endofl 

the  Island  Baru  on  the  west,  and  Bnrbacoas  Point,  on  the  main  land,  on  the  east.  Tl 

bay  is  named  Barbacoas,  or  the  Little  Gulf  of  Baru  :  it  has  several  slionl  spots  in  ii,li 

is  generally  clean,  with  a  depth  of  3  to  0  and   10  fathoms,  on  fine  siind  iind  ooze;! 

most  general  depth  being  from  4  to  5  fathoms.     In  it  there  is  very  good  shelter  from  ihe I 

breeze ;  and,  in  entering,  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  edges  of  the  shoal  ground  tliati 

extends  from  the  Rosario  Isles,  and  not  to  forgot  the  Tortuga  Bank,  which  lies  at  llie| 

distance  of  10  miles,  S.  42°  W.,  from  Rosario  Island,  with  7^  fathoms  water,  on  siiuda 

rock. 

At  one  mile  N.  41°  W.  from  Barbacoas  P<pint,  is  a  shoal,  the  least  water  on  which  ill 
two  fathoms  ;  and  there  is  another,  lying  S.  80"  W.  2i  miles  from  the  ssime  point,  widil 
from  li  to  3  fathoms  on  it ;  these  are  named  the  Barbacoas  Shoals.  Besides  these, therel 
are  two  others,  named  Atillo  and  Matunilla ;  the  first  lies  N.  25°  W..  distant  3i  uiile!| 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


469 


from  Barbncoas  Point,  with  the  depth  of  one  foot,  on  rock ;  and  the  lecond  lies  N.  E.by 
N,,  nearly  5  inilMS  from  tho  samo  point,  and  has  very  little  water  on  it. 

proiii  Biirbacoas  Point  the  coast  runs  about  S.  8°  W.,  154  miles,  to  the  Fronton,  or 
Bluff  "f  Tigua  :  this  is  oasily  known,  because  a  corro  or  hill  rises  on  it,  which  is  the 
highest  of  any  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  From  this  Fronton,  a  bank,  with  little  water 
01)  It,  extends  to  the  north  n  little  westerly,  about  4  miles,  the  extremity  of  which,  oppo- 
jiieto  I'oint  Comisiirio,  (the  first  projecting  point  to  the  north,)  extends  24  miles  from 
ihore.  From  tho  Fronton  or  Bluff  of  Tigua,  to  the  Boqueron  or  Point  San  Bernardo, 
I,  is  12  miles.  S.  25°  W.  To  tlie  north-eastward  of  Point  San  Bernardo,  and  in  the 
jirectionof  the  coast,  are  two  islets  ;  the  northernmost,  named  Islnta  do  Jesus,  and  the 
I  ^utliern  one,  Cabruna ;  they  lie  respectively  at  4  and  3  miles  from  the  point. 

1'he  point  of  San  Bernardo  is  the  S.  W.  Point  of  u  drowned  mangrove  key  ;  between 
itandthe  coast  there  is  a  narrow  channel,  called  the  Boqueron,  frequented  by  canoes 
BDii  pirogues.  S.  20°  E,  from  the  Point  San  Bernardo,  nearly  2  miles,  lies  a  rocky  bank, 
called  the  Pajarito  (Little  Bird  Rock  ;)  the  least  water  on  which  is  3.i  fathoms,  and  the 
fflost  4i  fathoms. 

To  the  westward  of  San  Bernardo  Point  lie  the  islands  of  the  same  name,  which  are 
eleven  in  number,  including  those  of  Jesus  and  Cebruna,  already  mentioned ;  but  with- 
out including  some  other  small  islets  of  little  consideration.  The  edge  of  the  banks  on 
«liich  tiiese  islands  are  situated,  (extends  to  the  westward  15  miles,  and  nearly  10  from 
oortli  to  south.  Various  little  channels  are  formed  between  them.  The  depth  on  the 
bank  to  the  west  and  south  of  these  islands,  is  very  unequal ;  for  you  may  suddenly  pass 
from  shallow  into  deep  water.     All  the  islands  are  low,  and  covered  with  trees. 

SALAMANQUILLA  CHANNEL— The  Salamanquilla  Channel  lies  to  tho  east- 
I  ward  of  the  San  Bernardo  Islands,  or  rather  between  tho  bank  on  the  E.  ond  S.  E.  sideof 
...J  Island  Salamanquilla,  and  that  on  the  west  side  of  the  islet  Cabruna.  Its  direction  is 
I  N,  47°  £.,  and  contmry,  and  in  the  narrowest  part  is  only  three-tenths  of  a  mile  wide ; 
but  the  depth  is  from  9  to  124  fathoms,  on  clay,  with  5  fathoms  at  the  edges  of  the  banks. 
The  banlis  have  but  little  water  on  them,  and  therefore,  unless  precisely  in  the  middle  of 
the  passage,  there  is  great  danger  of  grounding.  The  channel  is  nearer  to  Salamanquilla 
than  to  Cabruna;  therefore  it  is  necessary  to  pass  nearest  to  the  former;  and  if  the 
weather  be  clear,  the  banks  may  be  seen,  by  which  ships  may  sail  lurough  with  less  risk ; 
but,  in  thick  cloudy  weather,  the  hand  lead  is  the  only  guide. 

SAILING  THROUGH  THE  SALAMANQUILLA  CHANNEL.— To  sail 
[through  this  Channel  from  the  north,  so  soon  as  you  have  passed  to  the  westward  of 
theRosario  Islands,  steer  towards  the  Cerro,  or  Hill  of  Tigua,  bearing  in  mind  that  the 
ikllow  bank,  called  the  Tortuga,  lies  N.  63°  W.  from  that  hill,  which  will  be  a  sufficient 
guide  forgiving  it  a  suitable  berth  :  that  is,  j'ou  must  not  steer  towards  Tigua  Hill  when 
Id  that  direction,  but  either  to  the  southward  or  eastward  of  that  bearing.  St»ind  on  until 
the  easternmost  of  the  Rosario  Islands,  named  Stdnnianquilla,  bears  south,  from  which 
situation  you  may  steer  S.  S.  E.,  until  the  Hill  of  Tigua  bears  N.  E. ;  and  then  steer 
S.  W.,  keeping  the  same  bearing  on  ;  and  keeping  in  mind  what  has  been  previously 
said  of  this  channel,  have  persons  on  the  lookout  for  the  banks,  which  stretch  off  from 
both  sides,  and  which,  as  we  have  before  said,  show  plainly. 

GULF  OF  MORROSQUILLO.— Having  passed  through  Salamanquilla  Channel, 
land  being  opposite  to  San  Bernardo  Point,  you  will  discover  the  Great  Boy  of  Tolu, 
called  also  the  Gulf  of  Morrosquillo,  which  is  formed  by  the  islands  of  San  Bernardo  on 
I  the  north,  nnd  the  Island  Fuerte  on  the  south.  The  latter  lies  with  the  southernmost 
/of  the  former  bearing  N.  46°  E.,  distant  26  miles.  All  this  Gulf  has  a  good  depth 
'of water,  there  being  from  9  to  23  fathoms,  on  green  ooze;  therefore  a  ship  ma>  anchor 
I  in  any  part  of  it  during  the  season  of  liaht  breezes,  calms,  and  variable  winds. 

TOLU.— Thirteen  miles  S.  334°  E.  from  Point  San  Bernardo,  in  the  bottom  of  the 
I  Gulf,  id  the  town  of  Santiago  do  Tolu,  situated  close  to  tlio  sea  :  this  town  lies  13  miles 
IN.  63°  E.  from  tho  mouth  of  the  Harbor  of  Cispata,  and  is  in  lal.  9°  30'  56".  The  land 
lin  the  vicinity  of  this  town  is  plain,  with  savannas,  which  extend  to  the  north,  east,  and 
Isouth,  terminated  on  the  oast  by  a  chain  of  mountains,  ovor  which  there  rises  one  mount, 
Iforming  two  round  hummocks,  named  tho  Tetns  de  Tolu  :  these  lie  12  miles  to  the  east- 
|wardoftho  town,  and  are  useful  marks  for  recognizing  the  coast. 

Ill  order  to  pass  to  tiie  westward  of  the  islands  of  San  Bernardo,  it  is  necessary  to 
Ikeepnt  about  six  miles  from  tho  northernmost  of  them,  named  Tintinpan;  and  then  not 
hteertothe  eastward  of  south,  until  the  point  of  San  Bernardo  bears  E.  by  N.,  in  which 
Idirection  you  may  steer  towards  it,  if  you  cliooso.  It  is  very  convenient  for  those  bound 
jto  Santiago  de  Tolu,  to  enter  by  the  Salamanquilla  Channel;  and  so  soon  as  they  are 
ladvanced  to  abreast  of  San  Bernardo  Point,  they  will  see  the  Tetas  de  Tolu,  with  which 
linark  tliey  can  direct  themselves  to  that  town.  Of  other  hills,  which  are  seen  to  the 
iBouthward,  the  easternmost  is  called  Santero;  it  bears  from  the  point  of  San  Baniardo, 
IS.  5°  W.,  distant  21  miles ;  and  the  westernmost,  named  Cispatrt,  bears  S.  20°  W..  dis- 
Itaat  25  miles  from  the  same  point.     Near  the  north  side  of  this  hill  is  the  harbor  of  Cis- 


Salamttn- 
quill*  Chem- 
ntl. 


Sailing! 
through  the. 
Salaman- 
quilla Chim 
nel. 


QulfcfMw- 
rosquilU. 


Tolu. 


mmm 


470 


Pturta  de 
Cispata, 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


I$La  FuerU. 


CiRpnia  Plill  is  not  so  hi^h  m  that  of  SRntero:  steering  directly  betwepn  thetw 
iik)  direct  to  the  eiilrniico  uf  this  hurbor,  boarlng  in  nnind  what  was  bt'tbin  Kuid       "' 
ERTA  DE  CISFATA— The  mouth  of  Cinpata  Hurbor  lies  S.  IG"  W.,",it  th 
i:i'  of  17i  miloH  from  tho  Point  of  San  Bornnrdo  ;  and  tiio  Point  of  Zapi.te,  wlij-u  * 


pata. 
will  leiK 
PUER'i 

diStancf^  Ot   i/g   iiiimtr  iium  iiiu   L  uiiii  ui   *^tiii   xJtM  liiii  111'  t    uiju  iiiu  i  uiiii  iii   £j)|im,[(*    WllirK  ' 

the  eastern  point  of  tho  hnrl)or,  in  in  latitude  9''  ti4'  19",  and  lon(;itude  75°  51' :  the  ^y  I 

crn  points  are  Terraplen  and   Balaiuira,  distant  from  each  other  one  mile,  and  coveri 
with  high  mangroves,  extending  into  the  water.     From  its  mouth  the  harbor  runs  |n  u 
(54°  W.,  to  the  distance  of  7  miles.     This  harbor  is  well  sheltered  from  sens  ntiil  wind 
and  the  best  anchorage  is  on  tho  northern  shore,  between  Balundra  and  Naviog  Point'.' 
the  latter  being  very  remaikiible  from  its  projecting  out  to  the  southward :  lliiMlmn,,.  ' 
in  this  luubor  will  be  seen  in  tho  Plan  published  at  the  Hydrographicid  Uirire,    '{\ 
hills  of  Santero  and  Cispata  will  serve  to  find  this  harbor  exactly  ;  the  middle  ami  liiDu! 
part  of  the  former  lies  S.  48°  E.,  distant  al)ove  4  miles  from  the  Fronton,  or  Point  f  I 
Zapote  ;  near  this  hill,  and  to  the  westward  of  its  north  part,  is  tho  village  of  Siiritcro  It 
the  distance  of  two  miles  from  tho  little  bay  of  Zapote.     The  highi'sl  points  of  Cisnia 
Hill  lie  S.  27"  .■}()'  W.,  8  long  miles  from  tiie  said  Fronton,  or  Point  of  Zapoto. 

The  River  Sinu  disembogues  into  the  interior  of  Cispata  Harbor :  it  forms  niriiostn 
semi-circle  towards  the  west  and  south,  passing  by  the  southern  slope  of  Cisputu  [|i|L 
including  to  tliis  point,  the  village  San  Barnardo  del  Viento  on  the  left  bnuk,  and  tlie 
villages  of  San  Nicholas  and  Santa  Cruz  de  Lorica  on  tlie  right. 

From  the  Meztizos  Point,  which  is  the  noilhornmost  point  of  Cispata  Hnrhnr.tliRcomt 
runs  S.  81°  W.,  S.  70°  W..  and  S.  G3^  W.,  to  Point  Piedras,  a  distance  of  l/jj  miles;  in 
tlie  intermediate  space,  and  on  the  bearings  mentioned,  are  found  tlie  Cienugn  ilo  Venados  I 
and  Punta  del  Viento,  (Wind  Point,)  between  which  is  the  part  where  the  l)ani<  exteniis 
furthest  from  the  coast ;  for  there  it  extends  3i  miles  northward,  ond  6'i  miles  westwnid  ' 
with  a  depth  of  3,  4,  and  5  fathoms,  on  sand  and  rock,  and  also  on  sand  and  oo/.e. 

Punta  de  Piedras  forms  a  front  in  the  direction  of  S.  40°  \V.,  for  3  miles  :  it  is  of  mod. 
erute  height,  scarped,  and  foul  at  the  water's  edge  :  at  its  N.  E.  end  a  small  bay  m  formed  i 
and  to  the  northward  of  it,  at  the  distance  of  two  cables'  length,  lies  a  little  high  locli  I 
with  some  shoals  half  a  mile  to  the  N.  W.  of  it.  These  shoals  extend  nearly  h  milnfronJ 
N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  and  have  some  rocks  above  water,  and  olhcrs  which  appear  only  at  low 
water:  the  depth  on  them  isfrom'li  to  2  fathoms.  Those  who  run  along  near  this  const 
ought  to  take  care  and  keep  the  lead  constantly  going. 

The  S.  W.  extremity  of  the  front  or  blurt" of  Point  Piedras  is  colled  Point  Rndn-  und 
at  the  distance  of  five  long  miles  S.  3!)°  W.  from  it,  is  Punta  Broqueles,  low  (mil 
with  a  reef  which  extends  out  northward  two  cables'  length.     At  a  short  dista 
this  reef  lies  the  Toro,  or  Bull  Shoal.     Between  Broqueles  Point  and  Rada  Po' 
ba}'  named  Ensenada  de  la  Rada,  which  has  a  low  beachy  shore ;  it  is  shallow,  with  31 1 
fathoms,  on  oozy  bottom,  at  the  distance  of  eight  to  nine-tentlis  of  a  mile.    S.  E.from 
this  bay  a  ridge  of  hills  may  be  seen,  extending  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  having  three  rcmiirk- 
able  peaks,  the  highest  and  largest  of  which  lies  about  5  miles  south-eastward  I'rum  PoiDt 
Broqueles. 

ISLA  FUERTE.— The  N.  E.  end  of  Fuerte  Island  lies  S.  84i°  W.,  at  the  distance 
of  21i  miles  from  Point  Meztizos,  and  from  the  N.  E.  part  of  Point  Piedras  N.  57°  W,, 
6i  miles.  This  island  is  one  mile  and  a  quarter  in  length  from  north  to  south,  and  some- 
what less  from  east  to  west :  it  is  high  in  tlie  middle,  and  covered  with  trees  imd  roval 
palms,  which  appear  above  the  others.  It  can  be  ajiproaclied  at  the  south  point,  niinied 
Arenas  Point,  only ;  becaut;e  it  is  surrounded  by  reefs,  with  various  tJciittered  rocb, 
some  of  which  ap|iear  above  water,  and  others  do  not.  On  tho  back,  on  the  outside  of  ihe 
reefs,  and  even  on  them,  there  are  from  2  to  4  fatlioms  water,  on  rook  and  conrse  sand. 
Besides  these  banl's,  which  surround  the  island,  there  are  two  other  small  ones;  tlieoae  I 
with  44  fathoms  water,  on  sand,  lies  S.  S.  W.  from  the  island,  distant  one  mile;  iiiidl 
other,  with  5i  fathoms  water,  on  sand  and  gravel,  lies  S.  28°  E..  distant  a  long  inilefroni  I 
Arneas  Point.  In  tiie  channel  between  the  ieilaiid  and  the  main  land,  there  are  from  li to 
14  fathoms  water.  The  island  may  be  seen  from  the  deck  of  u  brig  or  schuuner,  at  the 
distance  of  20  miles. 

S.  49^  W.  from  Broqueles  Point,  at  the  distance  of  about  5G  miles,  is  the  Point  of  Ca- 
ribana,  which  is  the  northernmost  point  of  the  (Julf  of  Uraba,  or  of  North  Darien. 

The  intermediate  coast  forms  bays,  trending  inward  G  miles,  or  soiiiewliat  less:  and  in  | 
this  space  is  tlie  front  and  hill  of  Tortugon,  which  is  remarkable;  the  puint.s  of  Arb- 
letes,  or  Little  Trees  ;  San  .Juan  and  Savnnilla:  that  of  Sun  Juan  is  high  and  i-carpei],  | 
the  others  are  low  to  tho  wafer's  edge,  with  beaches  Irom  one  jioint  to  the  other. 
interior  is  a  low  range  of  hills,  terminating  near  tht*  cerros,  or  hills  of  Savnnillii,  wliich  I 
are  about  4  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  the  point  of  tiiat  name.     All  this  coast  has  a  binik  Kind 
along  it ;  so  that,  during  the  season  of  light  breezes,  or  of  variable  winds  and  calms,  sLips 
may  anchor  on  it,  at  any  convenient  distance  from  the  coast,  according  to  tho  size  oftlie 
vessel.     There  are  no  other  obstructions  on  it  than  a  farullon,  which  lies  S.  39"^  W, a 
long  mile  and  a  half  from  Broqueles  Point;  the  Island  Turtuguillu,  which  lies  IG  iiiilei 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT 


471 


s  v"  W. ."""  the  •nnie  point,  nnd  neiirly  west  fnim  tho  Fronton  anil  Ilill  of  TortUKon, 
"Lfiiioie  thiin  4  milos;  )tnd  the  (iipiiitoiiea  Shoal,  wbirh  lion  8.  W.  from  Siiviitiilln 
P  :,,(^  ,tt  the  dititiinct*  of  u  loti^  niilo ;  this  lyiiiK  iioiir  the  Hhoro,  prnHoiits  no  dittiKKr,  nx- 


tlint   [mint,  or  OiKuntonoB    Point.     TortUKuillit    ImIiukI    in 
II  amull  reof  extends  from  it  northward,  with  vury  little 


,iit 
.,i,t  to  tb(iHo  who  run  noar 
l„v,,  Biul  covered  with  trees ; 

watfi'  0"  *'* 
CARIHANA  point. — Oulf  of  Uraba  or  Ditrien. — Point  CKribunii,  ns  we  hiivo  nl-    Corihana 

-iiiijv  8uid,  '\!i  the  northernmost  point  of  the  Oulf  of  Uriibii:  it  in  low,  with  treason  it.    Point 

ml  iunouiidfd  by  rocks  cloHe  to  it.     It  is  reiidily  known,  beciiuao  from  it  the  coast  trends 

II  till!  Houlh  t()  form  tiiu  miiil  (tulf.  and  also  by  the  Clerro  do  Ajjuila,  or  Eagle  Hill,  wliich 

i!i  neiir  it :  this  hill  is  in  latitude  8°  37'  50"  N.,  and  longitude  7'!'^  50'  30"  W. ;  and  from 

it  Ciil'"  Tiliuron,  which  is  the  western  point  that  forms  the  Gulf  of  Darlon,  bears  N.  84° 

\V,,  ■.'!)  aiilt's  distant. 

Ai;uila  Hill,  although  of  moderate  height,  is  remarkable  from  being  insulated  in  the 
Diidtilu  of  low  land. 

SHO\LS  OFF  CARIBANA  POINT.— The  shoals  olTCaribana  Point  are  nt  the  S.    Shoals  off 
VV%nduf  the  bank,  already  described,  as  generally  extending  along  the  coast;  the  outer    Caribana 
corner  of  which,  with  44  fathoms  water,  is  4  miles  N.  W.  by  N.  from  tho  point.  Point. 

In  this  extent,  and  nearly  in  that  direction,  there  are  two  rocks;  one,  at  a  little  dis- 
tiincB  t'roni  the  point,  partly  shows  itself;  and  the  other,  farther  separated  from  it,  with 
very  little  water  on  it.  From  tho  edge  of  the  bank,  in  6  fathoms,  the  depth  increases 
ouwiiriis  to  G  and  7  fathoms,  on  sandy  bottom,  and  successively  to  more  ;  so  that  (i  miles 
\.  W.  from  Caribana  Point,  there  are  9  and  10  fathoms,  on  oozy  sand;  at  11  milos,  21 
fiitlioms.  ooze;  and,  lastly,  at  14  miles,  3'2  fathoms,  also  on  oo/.o.  These  soundings,  with 
the  beiiririgs  of  Aguila  Hill,  may  serve  to  direct  those  who  are  bound  to  the  Gulf;  oD- 
lerviiig  tlmt  so  soon  as  Aguila  Hill  bears  east,  they  will  be  entirely  free  from  the  shoals 
oi'Curibuiia  Point,  and  may  steer  freely  for  the  Gulf  of  Darien,  nearly  to  Arenas  Point, 
ffliich  lies  5if  miles  S.  35"  W.  from  that  of  Caribana ;  all  this  part  having  a  good  depth 

of  wnter. 

GULF  OF  URABA,  or  of  NORTH  DARIEN.— This  Gulf,  as  above  stated,  has  Oulf  of  Ur a- 
itsciitiaiR'e  between  Caribana  Point  on  the  east,  and  Cape  Tiburon  on  tho  west.     All  the  ba,  or  of  JV. 
eastern  and  southern  coasts  of  it,  to  the  Bay  of  Candelaria,  offer  secure  anchorage  at  every  Darien. 
sensoii  of  the  year;  but  the  other  parts  to  Cape  Tiburon  are  very  wild  in  the  season  of  the 
breezes,  nnd  without  any  shelter,  except  for  small  vessels ;  but  in  the  k    ison  of  the  venda- 
vales.  when  there  are  light  breezes,  variable  winds  and  calms,  you  may  anchor  in  any  part 
of  the  Gall",  without  either  wind  or  sea  to  incor.)mode  you. 

ARENAS  POINT. — The  north  and  south  points  of  Arenas  form  a  low  front  of  two  ArenasPoint. 
miles  extent,  and  they  bear  from  each  other  S.  19°  E.,  and  N.  19°  W.     These  two  points 
form  the  eastern  dyke  of  Aguila  Lagoon,  which  extends  from  thence  eastward  5?  miles, 
aiiJ  is  3  miles  from  north  to  south,  with  various  low  islets  in  it;  this  lagoon  commences 
attiie  southern  extremity  ot  Aguila  Hill,  heretofore  described. 

RIO  SALADO. — From  Arenas  Point  southward,  the  coast  trends  eastward  a  distance  Rio  Salado. 
«f5j  miles,  to  the  Rio  Salado.  and  thus  forms  a  tongue  of  sand,  projecting  into  the  sea, 
ami  which,  although  it  is  low,  has  a  sufficient  depth  of  water  near  it,  and  may  be  coasted 
at  less  than  a  mile. 

Froui  tho  Rio  Salado  the  coast  takes  a  southerly  direction,  with  some  inclination  east- 
ward; it  is  all  low  land,  with  hillocks  at  intervals;  and  the  de|)th  on  the  bank  all  along 
it  \i  so  regular,  and  the  bottom  so  clean,  that  it  may  bo  coasted  without  any  other  care 
than  due  attention  to  the  lead.  From  tho  Point  and  Hill  of  Cayman,  which  are  distant 
from  Rio  Siilado  14  miles,  S.  14°  E.,  the  shores  to  the  southward  on  both  sides  of  the  ,r 

Gulf,  80  tar  as  the  principal  mouth  of  the  Rio  Atrato,  are  swampy,  without  even  one  hill  " 

oil  it;  iinil,  from  the  Rio  Suriguilla,  which  is  in  the  southernmost  part  of  the  Gulf,  to  the  • 

Dorth  and  west,  may  bo  considered  as  the  Delta,  where  the  great  river  Atrato,  or  Darien, 
disembogues.  The  B;iy  of  Candelaria,  which  is  formed  by  tho  swampy  land  at  the  mouths 
of  the  river,  bears  from  the  Hill  of  Cayman  about  S.  49'^  W.,  at  the  distance  of  12  miles. 
For  navigating  all  along  this  coast  of  the  bottom  of  the  Gulf,  from  Cayman  Point  on  the 
east  to  the  Bay  of  Candelaria  on  the  west,  there  needs  no  other  direction  than  that  of  at- 
teudingto  the  lead;  nor  is  there  any  danger,  for  a  ship  may  bo  anchored  wherever  it  may 
be  convenient,  or  necessity  may  require. 

The  principal,  indeed  the  sole  object  for  entering  into  tho  Gulf  of  Darien,  can  only 
betoavnilyourself  of  tho  facilities  which  the  River  Atrato  affords  for  conducting  into 
the  interior  the  imports,  and  withdrawing  therefrom  tho  exports:  thus,  notwithstanding 
this  river  branches  into  the  sea  by  many  mouths,  extending  over  a  groat  distance,  and 
forming  the  swampy  and  inundated  lands  just  spoken  of,  yet  only  eight  of  ihem  are  navi- 
gable for  boats  and  launches;  and  of  tho  whole  of  them,  not  one  of  ihem  offers  the 
same  advantage  as  the  Little  Fayson,  or  Pheasant,  which  discharges  into  the  southern 
part  of  the  Bay  of  Candelaria;  inasmuch,  as  ships  anchoring  there,  will  be  sheltered 
from  the  sea,  and  be  ueur  to  the  channel  by  which  their  freights  are  to  be  convoyed 
inlaod. 


472 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Bay  of  Can- 
delaria. 


(Jkoco  Point 
Sf  Anchorage. 


Peaks  of  Ta- 
rena,  Cande- 
lartadeCabo, 
a"<d  Gandi. 


MetH  Tutu- 
matef.  Tam- 
bor,  and  Bo- 
landeros. 


CapeTihuron 


BAY  OF  CANDELARIA.— The  consts  of  the  Bay  of  Candelaria  are  so  very  I 
that  the  greater  part  of  ^hem  are  inundated,  even  at  low  water,  and  bord3red  with  m  *' 
groves,  reeds,  and  rushes,  so  that  only  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  bay  appears  dry.  'ru 
mouth,  or  entiince  of  the  bay,  from  the  N.  W.  point  to  the  S.  E.,  where  the  bran  I 
called  the  Little  Fayson  falls  into  it,  is  about  2  miles  in  width ;  bul  there  is  n  sand-b  '^i! 
which  borders  the  whole  circuit  of  it,  and  extends  out  a  mile  to  the  S.  E.,  from  the  \ 
W.  point,  which  .educes  the  entrance  to  scarcely  a  mile  ...  breadth.  This  shoal  »\  ' 
stretches  off  from  the  S.  E.  point,  but  on'y  to  a  cable's  length  and  a  hiilf;  within  the  h'" 
it  narrows  on  the  south  shore,  but  wide  js  considerably  on  the  N.  W.  side.  Ihe  cl  "^ 
space  of  good  anchorage  is  about  a  mile  and  a  third  each  way.  ^ 

Instructions  for  entering  CANDELARIA  BAY. — To  enter  this  bay,  caution  and 
careful  use  of  the  lead  are  necessary,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  less  depth  than  171  * 
17  fathoms  in  its  entrance,  nor  12  within  it.  This  caution  is  very  necessary,  because  th' 
sand-bank  that  su  rounds  it  Is  so  steep,  that  it  shoals  immediately  from  13  ta  5  fathom' 
and  from  3  to  getting  aground.  By  taking  care  to  prese'-ve  the  proper  depth,  youwii 
go  in  mid-channel,  at  about  four  cables'  length  from  the  S.  E.  point.  It  will  also  b 
advisable  to  have  a  man  upon  the  lookout,  on  one  of  the  yard  arms,  as  the  color  of  ti,^ 
water  indicates  the  channel  and  the  shoals.  On  the  Bar  of  the  Little  Fayson  branch 
there  are  three  feet  water,  and  the  tides  rise  two  feet,  throughout  the  whole  of  the  Gulf 
of  Darien. 

CHOCO  POINT  AND  ANCHORAGE.— From  the  N.  W.  Point  of  Candelaria 
Bay  the  coast  continues  low,  and  covereu  with  mangroves,  in  the  direction  of  N.  W  W 
nearly  5  miles,  to  Revesa  Point:  thence  W.  N.  W.  7  miles,  to  the  Tarena  Keys;  ondll 
this  coast  the  shallow  bank,  thrown  up  by  the  waters  from  the  mouths  of  the  river,  ej. 
tends  outward.  The  principal  mouth  of  the  Atrato  lies  at  about  one- third  of  the  distimcs 
from  Revesa  Point  towards  Tarena  Keys;  and  't  is  necessary  to  keep  at  two  miles  dij. 
tance  from  the  coast.  Revesa  Point,  which  is  also  called  Choco  Point,  forms  n  curve  that 
presents  a  fin'j  anchorage,  well  sheltered  from  the  north  winds  and  breezes;  to  enter  it 
you  have  only  to  keep  about  li  cable's  length  distant  from  the  south  side  of  the  point;  and 
when  you  are  abreast  of  it,  or  to  the  westward  of  it  somewhat  farther  into  tin  bay,  y(m 
may  anchor  in  13  or  14  fathoms. 

PEAK.S  OF  TARENA,  CANDELARIA  DE  CABO,  AND  GANDT.-On  this 
coast,  and  to  the  southward  of  the  Tarena  Keys,  will  be  seen  a  niount,  or  hill,  callelthe 
Peak  of  Tarena,  whence  lies  a  very  lofty  ri<lge,  extending  to  the  N.  W.  of  tiui  vmiouj 
peaks  of  these  heights:  the  "luthernmost  is  called  Candelaria,  and  the  northernniust 
which  is  over  Cape  Tiburor,  is  called  Pico  dt  Ca'.'o,  or  Peak  of  the  Cape;  the  peakiiest 
to  it  southward  is  named  (iandi. 

ISLETS  TUTUMATES.  TAMBOR  AND  BOLANDEROS.— From  Tmn 
Keys  the  coast  runs  about  N.  28°  W.,  a  distance  of  ID  miles,  to  tl;8  Bolnndoros:  itisnH 
high,  and  there  are  various  islets  lying  along  il.  The  first  of  these,  named  Tatumiites 
is  a  group  of  three  islets,  very  clean,  and  lying  about  hnlf  n  mile  from  tlie  const.  To 
these  follow  another  named  Tambor,  which  is  .sepiiratcd  frot.i  the  roust  rather  iiiori'iliiin 
half  a  mile.  Although  this  is  cloan,  it  must  be  borne  in  mind,  that  at  the  distaiireof 
half  a  mile  N.  N.  E.  from  it,  there  is  a  rocky  slioal  which  shows  itsei*",  between  wliidi 
and  the  islet  there  is  a  passage:  but  it  is  always  blotter  to  passi  outside.  To  the  west  of 
this  islet  the  coast  forms  a  baj'  called  Puerto  Escondido,  or  Hidden  Harbor,  whicli,  on 
account  of  its  small  capacity,  admits  small  vessels  only.  To  Tambor  follow  the  Buian- 
deros,  consisting  of  a  hir^er  islet,  with  other  small  rmes  at  its  south  part;  nil  these  are 
clean,  with  deep  water  around  them,  and  do  not  He  farther  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
from  the  coast. 

''  hree  miles  N.  55°  W.  from  the  Great  Bolandero,  and  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile 
trom  the  coast,  lies  the  l'ito?i  Islet,  which  is  very  clean  ;  from  thence  N.  65^  W.,  (i  niilij, 
litfs  Gandi  Point,  torniin^j  a  beacliy  Bay,  named  Tripn  (Jandi.  From  (inmli  Poini  tiie 
coast  follows  about  N.  N.  W.  for  tiio  distance  of  1 3  mile,  to  the  point  of  the  Uivnr  (iniuli, 
with  which  (Jandi  Point  forms  the  bay  of  Estola  or  Gandi,  where  the  rivers  of  tliesf 
names  (iisemlm^ue,  this  buy  is  of  little  im|)<utaiice. 

At  N.  !()•'  W.,  (ii  niilcs  from  (iiiiidi  Point,  lies  the  Tonel  Islet,  very  clean,  with  di'i-;i 
water,  especially  on  its  (^astern  side;  it  is  rather  more  than  a  mile  from  the  coast,  rrom 
this  Islet  to  Cape  'liliuron  it  is  (iA  miles  N.  4-"*  W.  All  this  const  from  tiie  Tarena 
Keys  to  Cape  Tiburon,  is  high  and  steep,  with  deep  water:  but  it  is  very  wilii  in  tile  [Rea- 
son of  the  breezes:  for  which  rcasoi!  it  is  nu)st  prudent  to  avoid  it  durinji;  tlii'se  seufuiis, 
and  to  keep  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  gulf,  as  it  not  only  allbrds  security  and  tlif 
accominodatiot)  of  Hnchoriige  in  every  part,  but.  as  tlii>re  is  no  inronvenieiico  arising 
from  the  sea,  it  is  iiiucli  more  easy  for  working  lo  windward:  and  nnich  time  niii)  be 
saved  liy  it. 

CAPE  TIBURON. — This  cape,  as  before  said,  is  the  N.  W.  boundary  of  the  pilf; 
it  is  rocky,  high,  and  scarpeil :  and  projects  out  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  formine;  an  isth- 
mus, on  the  south  and  west  sides  of  which  are  two  little  harbors.      The  first  of  those  is 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


473 


■0 narrow  as  to  he  of  little  importance;  the  second  is  larger,  and  called  Miel  Harbor,  in 
which  there  is  good  holding  ground,  and  the  greatest  depth  is  from  11  to  12  fatlioins,  on 
«nd  and  clay. 

POINT  AND  PEAK  OF  CARRETO.— Thirteen  miles  N.  62°  W.  from  Cape  Point  8f  Peak 
Tiburon  is  the  Point  and  Peak  of  Carreto,  which  is  the  enstern  point  of  a  little  haibor  of  of  Carreto. 
that  niimo.  Between  the  two  points  n  bay  is  formed  of  about  2i  miles  in  depth,  which 
is  called  the  Bay  of  Anachucuna;  all  its  shore  is  beachy  to  the  foot  of  the  high  moun- 
tains, without  any  remarkable  point.  In  the  N.  W.  part  of  this  bay,  and  at  the  distance 
jftw'p  miles  to  the  southward  of  Point  Carreto,  is  a  little  harbor,  called  Puerto  Escondi- 
,lo  fit  for  smugglers  only. 

CARRETO  HARBOR.- -The  Point  and  Peak  of  Carreto  are,  as  before  stated,  at  Carreto  Har- 
the  eastern  part  of  the  harbor  of  that  name,  the  western  part  being  formed  by  a  cluster  hor, 
of  islets  of  various  sizes:  and  between  these  points  the  greatest  distance  is  a  mile  and  a 
iialfi  but  the  narrowest  pait  of  the  mouth  is  only  a  mile.  This  harbor  is  of  a  semicir- 
cular form,  and  extends  inward  about  a  mile;  the  depth  of  water  in  it  is  not  less  than  34 
fathoms,  nor  more  than  8  fathoms.  Notwithstanding  these  good  qualities,  it  is,  on  the 
contrary,  open  to  the  N.  E.  breezes  and  the  sens  they  raise,  and  has  little  shelter  from 
the  N.  W.:  it  is,  therefore,  only  of  use  during  the  season  of  the  calms  and  variable 

C.iRRETO  SHOALS.— To  the  north  of  this  harbor,  at  the  distance  of  a  long  mile,  CarretoShsah. 
.uere  are  two  little  shoals  near  each  other,  bearing  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  with  54  fathoms  over 
them.o)  rocky  bottom,  and  near  them  from  20  to  25  fathoms ;  with  fresh  breezes  the  sea 
breaks  over  them. 

Seven  miles  N.  48°  W.  from  the  Point  and  Peal,  of  Carreto  is  Punta  Escoces,  or 
Scot's  Point;  on  this  bearing  there  are  clusters  of  islets  of  diflFerent  sizes,  extending  out 
to  N.  N.  E.,  a  long  mile,  from  Punta  de  los  Islotes  ;  to  this  point,  which  is  three  miles 
south-eastward  from  Punta  Escoces.  the  coast  is  high  and  scarped ;  but  from  thence  to 
Punta  Escoces,  it  is  lower,  with  a  bench. 

CAROLINE  BAY. — Punta  Escoces  is  the  S.  E.  of  a  Bay,  named  Caroline  Bay,  the  Caroline  Bay. 
jreat  islet  of  Oro,  or  Santa  Catalinn,  being  the  N.  W.  point,  bearing  from  the  former  N. 
40"  W.,  distant  4  miles  ;  and  from  this  line  of  direction,  the  bay  falls  inward  about  one 
mile  and  two-thirds.  In  the  S.  E.  part  of  this  bay  is  Puerto  Escoces  or  Escondido, 
(Scottish  or  Hidden  Harbor,)  which  extends  inward  in  that  direction  nearly  three  miles, 
and  forms  good  shelter.  There  are  some  shoals  in  it,  which  are  represented  in  the  par- 
ticular plan  of  the  harbor,  by  which  any  vessel  may  run  in  for  the  nnchornge,  wher^  they 
will  find  4i,  54,  6.  and  7  fathoms  water,  on  sandy  b..>ttom. 

GRANDE  DEL  ORO,  SAN  AUGUSTIN,  A  \D  PIEDRAS  ISLET.— The  Isln  Granrfc  rfei 
Grande  del  Oro  is  high  ;  and  at  one  mile  and  eight-tenths  to  the  south  of  it,  there  is  a  Oro,  San  An- 
smaller  island,  called  San  Augustin  ;  and  on  the  same  bearing,  a  little  more  than  a  cable's  o-ws<iw,  and 
jen'th  from  Snn  Augustin,  is  Piedras  Islet,  which  doubtless  takes  its  name  from  the  many  Piedras  Islet. 
rocks  with  which  it  is  surrounded. 

Between  Piedras  Islet  on  the  north,  the  west  point  of  Aglntomate  River  on  the  south, 
andthitof  San  Eulgencia  to  the  S.  W.,  is  formed  the  Eusenuda,  or  Bay  of  Caroline,  or 
Culedonin.  and  the  channel  of  Sasardi. 

CALEDONIA  BAY. — The  Bay  of  Caledonia  is,   strictly  apenking,  formed  hy  \\m  Caledonia 
points  already  mentioned,  which  bear  from  each  other  N.  25°  W.,  and  contrary,  distant  Bay. 
one  mile.    This  bnyis  clean,  and  has  a  good  depth  of  wnter  ;  the  greatest  part  of  its  shore 
is  beach,  and  near  the  middle  of  it  disembogues  the  River  Aglnseniqua.     The  front  or 
point  of  Snn  Fulgencia  is  salient,  scarped,  and  clean  ;  and  it  also  has  a  little  bight  at  its 
western  part,  with  littlp  depth  of  water,  bordered  by  nmngrovesand  various  keys. 

SASARDI  CHANNEL,  S.  E.  ENTRANCE.— Between  San  Fulgencia  Point,  the  Sasardi     ^ 
Great  Oro  Island,  Piedras  Islet,  and  the  Mangrove  Keys  which  lie  to  the  west  of  them,  Cliannel,  S, 
the  Cliaiiin'l  of  .Snsnrdi  is  formed  ;  whose  S.  E.  entrance,  from  edge  lo  edge,  is  about  four  E.  Entrance. 
cables'  leiistli  wide,  n  little  more  or  leas,  and  with  n  depth  ot  8  to  11  fiithoms,  on  ooze; 
and  further  in,  from  7  to  1)  fathoms  ;  as  also  between  the  edge  of  the  *) mk  off  Piedras  Islet, 
andtlie  Hiiy  of  Caledonia,  the  depth  is  from  ()4  to  14  fathoms;  and  the  space  of  sea  be- 
tween this  buy  and  Puerto  Escoces,  is  of  n  good  depth  ;  but  at  S.  55°  E.,  a  short  mile 
from  Piedriis  Islet,  the  sea  breaks  when  the  breeze  is  fresh. 

These  harbors  are  equally  sheltered  from  the  winds  and  sens  of  both  seasons,  and  have 
a  good  (leptli  of  water  :  but  the  Channel  of  Sasardi  and  Bay  of  Caledonia  are  preferai)le, 
because  you  can  either  enter  or  sail  t)ut  from  them  with  all  winds,  with  more  iiicility  and 
less  risk  than  yon  cnn  ei'her  into  or  out  of  Pueito  Escoces. 

SASARDI  CHANNEL,  N.  W.  ENTR\NCE.— At  the  distance  of  4$  miles,  N.Sasar<:: 
hi"  \V.  from  the  east  end  of  the  (Jreat  Oro  Island,  is  the  vest  extremity  of  two  larger  Channel,  N. 
i.'lands,  which,  with  the  reefs  shoals,  and  multitude  of  amuller  islets  extending  thence  to  W.  Entrance, 
the  N.  W.,  form,  with  the  coast,  the  channel  of  Sasardi.     The  N.  W.  mouth  of  this 
channel  is  formed  by  the  said  western  point  of  the  two  large  islands  and  the  front  of  Sa- 
sardi with  an  opening  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile  ;  this  channel  has  many  shoals  in  it, 


»."»4«!MI  WWIP"''.'  )»!"■! 


474 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


and  is,  therefore,  of  uo  utility ;  neither  is  there  any  population  near  it  Those  who  wish 
to  enter  it  must  have  a  free  wind  for  that  purpose. 

Between  the  eastern  point  of  Great  Oro  Island  and  the  N.  W.  mouth  of  the  cliann  1 
of  Sasiirdi  some  reefs  project  out.  with  two  islets  at  the  extremity,  which  bear  from  th 
said  eaatorn  point  of  Great  Oro,  N.  25°  W.,  2  miles  distant,  and  from  the  S.  E.  extreiuit! 
of  the  two  large  islands,  already  mentioned,  about  N.  E.  Also,  at  the  distonce  of  a  miu 
and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  front  or  point  of  Sasardi,  there  is  a  bank  with  little 
water  on  it. 

The  front  of  Sasardi  is  projecting,  round,  scarped,  and  surrounded  by  reefs  close  to 
the  shore.  From  the  most  salient  part  of  tlilis  front,  the  S.  E.  part  of  the  Isbi  de  Pi^Q, 
bears  N.  5'^  W.,  distant  2  miles ;  and  in  the  intermediate  space  the  coast  forms  VHiioua 
open  bays,  of  little  importance,  the  points  of  which  are  scarped,  and  surroundeil  b_v  leefs 
Off  the  west  part  of  the  said  island  is  the  Cienega  of  Navagandi,  with  its  mouth  shut  bv 
reefs  ;  which,  with  the  island,  fortn  a  channel  of  two  cables'  length  wide  in  die  iiairowest 
part,  with  a  depth  of  from  1 4  to  5  fathoms  water. 

The  Isla  de  Pinos  is  high,  with  a  hill  extending  along  it,  on  which  rise  two  remarka- 
ble points,  covered  with  wood  :  its  greatest  extent  is  N.  E.  by  N.  and  S.  W.  by  S  ,  mther 
more  than  a  mile,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is  scarcely  a  mile  :  its  N.  E.  and  south  sides 
are  8cari)od,  and  bordered  by  reefs,  very  near  the  shore.  The  N  E.  point  of  this  jsliuid 
is  in  latitude  9°  1'  30  ',  and  longitude  77°  50'  10".  At  the  distance  of  2  miles  N.  by  \V, 
from  the  north  end  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  is  the  Isla  de  Pajaros,  or  Bird's  Island,  which  is 
low,  narrow,  covered  with  brush  wood,  and  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  have  a  depth  of; 
or  8  fathoms  close  to  their  edges,  on  rocky  bottom.  From  this  point  conimenciis  the 
immense  Archipelago  of  the  Mulatas,  composed  of  islands,  keys,  shoals  and  leeft 
forming  between  them  and  the  main  land  many  anchorages  and  well  sheltered  cliaiinels 
secure  in  all  weathers,  and  terminating  at  Punta  do  San  Bias.  The  interior  of  tlie 
coast  is  a  high  mountain  range,  with  notable  peaks,  whose  situations  are  exhibitwl  in  the 
chart  of  the  coast,  and  may  serve  as  marks  to  direct  to  the  various  anchorages,  i!cc, 
which  it  comprises. 

The  channels  which  are  formed  in  this  space,  are  those  of  Pinos,  Mosqu  tos,  Cuiti 
Zamhogandi,  Punta  Urava,  (Jocos,  Rio  de  Monos,  Ratones,  Phiyon  Grande,  Piiymliisl 
Arevalo,  Mangles,  Moron,  Caobos,  Hohmdes,  Chichime,  and  San  Bios.  These  are  more 
or  less  free,  as  may  be  seen  by  inspection  on  the  chart. 

A  ship  at  the  distance  of  one  league  to  the  northward  of  Pojaros  Islet,  and  steeriiiir 
N.  W.,  25  miles,  and  N.  G5°  W.,  38i  miles,  will  pass  clear  of  all  these  dangors,  mid  will 
be  to  the  north  of  the  easternmost  keys  oi  the  Holandes  Group,  at  the  distance  of  4J  or 
5  miles.  With  these  courses  you  will,  in  the  beginning,  pass  at  li  or  2  miles  uiUsidetlie 
reefs,  and  afterwards  at  4  and  5i  miles ;  but  it  remains  at  the  option  of  the  niivigatorto 
pass  at  a  greater  distance,  if  more  convenient. 
Gulf  of  San  GULF  OF  SAN  BLAS — Seventeen  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  eosternmost  keys 
Bids.  of  the  Holandes  (Jroup  lies  Point  San  Bias,  in  hit.  1)''  34'  36",  and  long.  79°  1'  24  .   h 

is  low,  and  forms  the  N.  E.  boundary  of  the  Gulf  of  San  Bias,  the  mouth  of  which  ex- 
tends N.  and  S.  to  the  anchorage  of  Mandinga,  6  miles,  and  from  tlmt  line  an  enual 
dififance  to  tlie  westward.  Its  coasts  are  low,  with  mangroves,  which  advance  into 
the  sea. 

From  Point  .San  Bias  eastward,  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  three-quarters,  esreiid 
some  reefs,  with  various  keys,  the  easternmost  of  which  is  calle<l  Cayo  Francos.  From 
this,  extending  to  the  S.  W.  and  westward,  there  are  twelve  other  keys;  and  td  the  wi-t- 
ward  of  them  are  many  banks  and  islands,  wiiich  make  part  of  the  Archipelago  ul'the 
Muliitas,  and  form  various  channels. 

To  run  into  and  atitlior  in  the  Gulf  of  San  Bias,  whether  it  bo  in  Baliia  Inglcsa, 

''^  which  is  to  the  S.  W.  of  Point  San  Bias,  or  at  Mandinga,  winch,  as  before  said,  liesKitlie 

south  of  it,  the  must  commodious  passage  is  by  the  chaimel  of  Chichime  and  tlia:ul'Siia 

Bias. 

Chichime  THE  CHICHrME  CHANNEL  is  formed  to  the  west  by  the  keys  oir  Point  San 

Channel.  Bias,  to  tlie  east  by  the  reef  and  group  of  keys  of  Chicliime,  and  t(»  the  south  by  aiiollier 

group  surroundeil  by  reefs,  which  some  call  Cayos  de  Linion,  or  Lemon  Keys. 
Channel  of  THE  Cll  AN  N  KL  (iF  SAN  BLAS  is  formed  by  the  Cayos  do  Linion  to  the  S.  E , 

San  Bias.         and  those  of  San  Bias  to  the  N.  W.     The  first  is  3  miles  in  extent  between  the  steep 

ed;;('s  of  the  reefs  ;  and  the  sei'ond  ono  mile  and  three-(|uarter8. 

Directions  for      DIRKCTIONS    FOR    ENTERING  THE  (ilJLF  OF  SAN  BLAS.— To  entor 

tntirinja  the      this  gulf  it  is  nece,ssarv  to  o|)fn  the  mouth  of  the  clianiud  of  Chichime,  until  yim  nrn  uii 

Gulf  (f  ISan    the  true  meridian  of  the  second  islet,  counting  from  the  westward  to  Cayos  de  Liinon; 

Bias.  from  which  situation  steer  south  towards  it,  until  nbreiist  of,  or  rather  before  yon  get  so 

fur  to  the  south  as  Cayo  Frances;  then  steer  S.  51)^  W.,  through  the  middle  of  .Sun  Bias 

Channid,  which,  as  already  noticed,  is  a  mile  and  three-(|uari(M's  wide  between  the  reefs 

of  the  west  south-westernmost  islet  of  the  Lemon  Keys,  called  (Juliet,  or  the  Co('k,iiiid 

the  reef  which  extends  to  the  southward  from  Cayo  Frances;  thus  directing  yuurjelf to 


■-W9fyi''>fV  <'"'  UJ  III  JlJ?n»«wj]n.i«"i   mniii 


^mmfmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


475 


(he  Bochorngo,  whether  it  be  to  that  on  the  north  side  of  the  gulf,  or  in  Mandinga  Bay. 
To  proceed  to  the  latter,  the  keys  which  lie  to  the  north  of  Mnnditiga  Point  will  serve 
for  B  mark.  Of  these,  the  outermost,  called  Cnbras,  lies  a  mile  from  the  point ;  imu  it 
should  be  noticed,  that  at  nearly  a  mile  N.  10°  W.  from  Cabras,  there  is  a  little  sandy 
tey,  to  which  a  berth  must  be  given,  and  there  is  a  bank,  with  1  and  li  fathom  on  it, 
lying  N-  69°  W.,  distant  a  long  mile  and  a  half  from  Cnbras  Islet.  The  passage  is  be- 
ween  tbis  bank  and  the  little  sandy  key.  The  anchorage  of  Mandinga  is  sheltered,  and 
has  depth  sufficient  for  any  class  of  vessels.  In  the  gulf,  and  extending  out  from  the  bot- 
tom of  it  to  the  distance  of  3i  miles,  there  are  various  islets,  keys,  and  banks,  the  eastern- 
niost  of  which  is  culled  Cayo  Maceta.  To  all  of  these  a  berth  must  be  given,  if  desirous 
ofaoine  fur  into  the  gulf. 

HOLANDES  CHANNEL.— This  is  the  largest  of  all  the  channels  that  are  formed 
by  the  Mulatas  Islands.  Its  mouth  is  formed  on  the  east  by  the  western  extremity  of 
the  reefs  of  the  Holtndes  Group,  and  on  the  S.  W.  by  Icacos  Key.  The  distance  from 
one  key  to  the  other  is  2}  miles,  N.  55°  E.,  and  S.  55°  W.,  and  the  least  depth  in  the 
chftiinel  is  14  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of  sand  :  but  W.  N.  W.  from  Holiindes  Key.  at  the 
(iistanceof  a  little  more  than  li  mile,  there  is  a  shoal,  which  extends  half  a  mile  N.  and 
§.,  with  0  and  6i  fathoms  on  it,  over  rocks.  The  sea  breaks  over  it  when  there  is  but 
little  swell.  It  may  be  passed  either  on  the  east  or  west  side,  but  it  will  be  always  best 
topnsstotlie  eastward  of  it,  and  near  to  the  reefs  of  the  Holandes  Group,  the  breakers 
on  which  will  serve  as  marks.  Proceed  afterwards  towards  the  east  part  of  Icacos  Key, 
and  give  it  a  berth  in  passing.  This  key  or  island  is  of  firm  land,  covered  with  hi^h  wood, 
and  nnmt'd  from  the  abundance  of  icacos  trees  growing  on  it.  From  the  meridian  of 
Icftcos  Key,  on  its  south  side,  the  direction  of  the  Holandes  Channel  is  about  S.  lb"  W., 
to  the  bottom  of  the  Gulf  of  San  Bias.  It  is  clean,  and  has  a  depth  of  21  to  125  fiithoms, 
on  oozy  bottom,  with  a  breadth  of  2i  to  3  miles,  between  groups,  detached  keys  and  reefs, 
but  free  and  commodious  to  turn  in,  in  case  of  necessity,  towards  the  anchorages  already 
described. 

FROM  THE  POINT  OF  SAN  BLAS  WESTWARD.— At  N.  49"  W..  rather 
more  than  half  a  mile  from  Point  San  Bias,  is  the  north  part  of  its  front,  low,  and  covered 
with  mangroves ;  and  in  the  intermediate  space  is  a  little  key,  called  Piedras,  and  other 
shoals,  connected  with  Cayo  Frances.  At  he  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  N.  34°  W., 
from  the  north  point  of  San  Bias,  is  a  key  named  Cayo  Perro,  also  united  to  the  reefs 
extending  westward  from  Cayo  Frances,  and  which  terminate  at  an  island  lying  in  front 
of  Cienega,  a  mile  and  a  quarter  farther  west. 

From  Perro  Key  the  coast  continues  nearly  10  miles  S.  88°  W.,  to  Cocos  Point,  on 
the  east  side  of  the  mouth  of  Escribanos  Harbor.  The  intermediate  coast  continues  low, 
with  reefs  along  shore,  and  somewhat  of  a  bay.  The  moat  visible  objects  on  it  are  Ma- 
gote  Point,  which  is  small,  a  little  salient,  and  has  a  hillock  on  it;  that  of  Cerro  C'olorado, 
which  is  round,  scarped,  and  projects  out  but  a  little  ;  and  that  of  Playa  Colorado,  which 
is  round,  and  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  extend  out  to  acabli''«  length. 

POINT  ESCRIBANOS — Cocos  Point  advances  into  the  -  md  from  it  the  point  of 
Escribanos  bears  S.  t^O*^  W.,  one  mile  and  a  third,  and  in  thJs  s,  .n  liiiy  is  fbrmed,  in  the 
middle  of  which  is  Escribanos  Harbor,  extending  inward  to  the  .-tmtli.  from  it  month, 
half  a  mile.  This  harbor  is  very  shallow,  having  no  more  than  1  and  li  full  iti  wiiter. 
Without,  on  both  sides,  there  are  reefs  with  very  little  water  on  tliem  ;  ami  ,m  iIk;  chan- 
nel, which  is  formed  by  them,  there  are  from  3i  to  6  fathoms. 

ESCRIBA.NOS  SHOALS.— To  the  north-eastward  of  the  mouth  of  this  hiubor  are 
the  ehiials  named  the  Escribanos.  They  are  two  in  number,  and  are  composed  of  reefs 
with  very  little  water  on  them,  and  lying  near  each  other.  On  the  reef  nearest  to  the 
const  is  an  islet  lying  rather  less  than  2  miles  from  Cocos  Point.  This  reef  extends  a 
mile  from  W.  S.  W.  to  E.  N.  E.  The  other  lies  about  W.  N.  W.  fronj  the  said  islet 
or  rock,  and  extends  nearly  a  mile  from  E.  to  W.  Both  are  steep  to,  with  3  and  4  fath- 
oms wnter;  and  on  the  bank  are  from  8  to  12  fathoms,  on  gravel  and  coarse  sand.  In 
the  channel  Ibvmod  by  the  south-easternmost  shoal  and  Cocos  Point,  there  are  from  9  to 
li  fathoniH,  diminishing  to  G  and  5  fathoms  on  each  side. 

Escribiinos  Bank  lies  nearly  N.  W.  by  W.  from  the  shoal  of  that  name,  distant  5i 
miles.  This  extends  N.  56°  W.,  and  S.  5(j°  E.,  nearly  2  miles,  and  has  from  5  to  8 
fathoms  water,  on  rocky  bottom.  To  the  northward  of  its  edge,  about  2  cables'  length, 
from  6  to  31  fathoms  are  found.  In  heavy  seas,  the  water  breaks  on  this  bank,  which 
may  servo  as  a  guide  ;  and  when  it  does  not,  a  lookout  nmst  be  kept  at  the  mast  heads. 
In  the  channel,  between  this  bank  and  the  Escribanos  Shoal,  there  are  from  8  to  17 
fathoms  water,  on  sand,  gravel,  and  rocks.  The  N.  W.  part  of  it  Hes  N.  32o  W.,  distant 
81  miles  from  Escribanos  Point. 

TERUIN  POINT.— Nineteen  and  one-third  miles,  N.  81°  W.,  from  Cocos  Point, 
liesTerrin  Point  and  Pescador  Islet.  Between  the  former  and  Quingongo  Point,  which 
are  distant  from  each  other  8i  miles,  a?ui  on  the  meridian  of  Escribanos  Bank,  is  Culo- 
bra  Islet,  distant  from  Culobru  Point  two-thirds  of  u  mile,  about  N.  N.  W.     Following 


Holandes 
Channel. 


From  the 
Point  oj  San 
Bias  west- 
ward. 


Point  Escri- 
banos. 


Escri:,anos 
^hoali 


iirnn 
Point. 


"^ir^wi^iinii  I 


"WfPWUPPP^ 


476 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

on  to  the  westward,  the  point  and  islet  of  Quengo  are  met  with.     Port  Escoadido,  nh;  l 
ia  somewhat  to  the  westward  of  this  point,  is  only  a  little  cienega,  or  lagoon.     Point  i  h 
guiicliagua,  hnd  that  of  Macolln,  are  the  most  remarkable  points  on  this  part. 

The  range  of  mountains  which  extends  along  this  coast,  from  those  of  Darien  to  thn 
of  Porto  l3eJlo,  are  sufficiently  remarkable;  that  called  Cerro  de  la  Gran  Loma,  or  Go* 
do,  being  rather  more  so  than  the  others.     It  lies  S.  42i°  W.  from  Culebra  Islet,  dista'l 
full  7  miles,  and  may  serve  as  a  mark  for  keeping  clear  of  the  Eacribanos  Shoals  nnH 
Bank.     This  hill  is  a  little  higher  than  the  Cordillera,  in  which  it  is  situated.    Its  ton 
large,  and  of  some  extent.  '* 

Pescador  Islet  lies  about  2  cables'  length,  N.  43°  W.,  from  Tercin  Point,  and  the  point 
is  surrounded  by  reefs,  which  extend  a  cable's  length  to  the  north,  and  holf  a  mile  to  th 
west,  continuing  to  S.  S.  W.,  so  as  to  surround  three  islets,  which  lie  between  that  point 
and  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  ha  '  or  of  Nombre  de  Dies. 

Between  Point  Terrin,  o'  ,1  e  east,  and  the  Islet  Martin  Pescador  and  MnnzBDilh 
Point,  on  the  west,  the  first  of  which  bears  from  Terrin  Point  N.  64°  W..  at  the  dig. 
tance  of  4  long  miles,  and  the  second,  N.  72°  W.,  5  miles,  a  great  bay  {■'  formed,  wIijqI, 
extends  in  nearly  3  miles  to  the  S.  W.,  and  to  the  W.  and  N.  W.,  2  i  lies,  to  the  hot- 
torn  of  the  Buy  of  San  Criatoval.  At  li  mile,  S.  49°  W.,  from  the  eastern  extremity  of 
this  bay,  lies  the  western  point  of  the  harbor  of  Nombre  de  Dies,  surrounded  with  reefs 
as  is  also  the  eastern  point,  although  at  this  part  they  extend  farthest  oft".  This  harbor 
is  small,  and  the  greatest  part  of  its  shores  are  bordered  with  reefs  and  shallows.  Itg 
clear  depth  is  3i,  4,  and  5  fathoms  in  the  mouth.  The  other  parts  of  the  great  bay  of 
San  Cristoval  are  useless  in  the  season  of  the  breezes,  and  the  reefs  from  the  bottom  of 
it  extend  out  nearly  a  mile  towards  Point  San  Cristoval. 

From  Point  San  Cristoval,  distant  2  long  cables'  length  to  the  N.  E.,  lies  an  islet,  called 
Juan  del  Pozo,  surrounded  with  rocks  ;  and  about  S.  E.  from  it,  at  tho  distance  of  half  a 
mile,  is  a  bank  named  Vibora.  Between  this  bank  and  the  Islet  Juun  del  Pozo,  and  be- 
tween the  latter  and  Point  San  Cristoval,  there  is  a  depth  of  9,  10,  and  13  fathoms,  on 
gravel  and  coarse  sand. 

Point  San  Cristoval  lies  S.  88°  W.  3|  miles  from  Terrin  Point;  also,  fron  this  point 
the  Buey  iShoul  bears  N.  60°  W.,  distant  nine-tenths  of  a  mile.  Between  this  skoal 
and  the  reefs  of  Terrin  Point  there  are  from  9  to  12  fathoms  water,  on  rock,  sand,  and 
clay;  and  9,  12,  and  14  fathoms,  on  ground  of  the  same  quolity,  between  the  Buey  and 
Vibora  Shoals.  The  coast  between  Point  San  Cristoval  and  that  of  Manzaiiilio  is  higii 
and  scarped. 

The  Point  of  Manzanillo  is  the  northernmost  of  all  the  coast  of  Porto  Bello.  Iti) 
also  hijih,  scarped,  and  projecting  out,  with  two  hummocks  on  it.  Near  this  pointare 
several  islets  and  a  shoal.  The  greatest  of  these,  named  Munzanilla  Islet,  is  high  and 
scarped,  and  lies  four-fifths  ot  ii  mile  to  the  east.  It  has  three  farallons  to  tlie  north,  of 
which  the  farthest  out  is  distant  a  long  cable's  ItMigth.  At  S.  30°  W.  from  tho  same 
islet,  there  are  three  small  islets,  surrounded  with  reefs,  which  extend  N.  K.nndS.  W.; 
and  also  to  the  east  there  is  another  small  one,  distant  al)out  a  cable  and  a  half;  and, 
lastly,  to  the  N.  N.  E  of  the  said  Man/.anilla  Islet,  at  the  distance  of  four-tenths  of  a 
mile,  lies  the  Islet  of  Martin  Pescador,  extending  about  a  cable's  length  N.  and  S.  All 
these  islets  are  high  and  scarped,  and  between  those  of  Manzanilla  and  Martin  Pescador 
there  are  from  10  to  14  fathoms  water. 

Mair/ianilla  ShonI  lies  N.  W.  of  the  point  of  tho  same  name,  at  the  distance  of  four- 
tenths  of  a  mile.  It  has  very  little  water  on  it.  and  5  and  6  fathoms  close  to  it;  and  in 
the  strait  between  it  and  the  point,  there  are  13  fathoms  water. 

Among  the  mountains  on  this  coa.st,  two  nre  remarkable,  named  Saxino  and  Nombre 
de  Dios,  and  which  may  serve  us  marKs  for  recognizing  the  harbor  of  the  lust  name, 
The  first,  which  is  high,  terminiitt's  in  t^^'>  peaks,  near  each  other,  and  the  north-east- 
ernmost  of  them  is  about  S.  '22'  K.  from  'l'«  rrin  Point,  distant  nearly  7  miles.  Thatuf 
Nonibie  de  Dios,  which  is  to  the  sooth  of  tiii>  harbor,  terminates  in  one  peak,  and  is  dis- 
tant from  Terrin  Point  8  miles  S.  S.  W. 

N.  fio"  W.,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  and  a  half  from  Manznnilln  Point,  is  the  highest 
part  of  Tainbor  Islet,  which  is  high,  round,  and  scarped,  and  which  is  coiiiit'cteii  Inaicif 
of  two  ciibles'  length,  with  the  northernmost  part  of  Vrmidos  or  Hastinicntos  Inland. 
This  isbinil  is  nearly  a  mile  in  length,  N.  K.  and  S.  \V.,  and  forms,  with  ilie  iniiin  land, 
the  N.  K.  channel  of  Hastiinentos  Harbor,  tho  greatest  extent  of  which.  Iiftwren  tiie 
reefs,  is  one  and  a  half-tenth  of  a  mile,  with  5  and  .'ij  fathoms  water,  on  sand.  Tiiis 
island  of  Bastitneiitos  is  foul  oi'  its  .S.  E.,  S,,  and  S.  W.  sides  ;  and  the  lattt^r,  with  (jibre 
Islet,  which  lies  somewhat  to  the  southward  of  west,  Inrms  tho  N.  W.  channel,  the 
narrowest  part  of  which,  between  tho  reefs,  is  three-tern  us  of  a  mile  wide,  with  fnim.'ij 
to  9  fathoms,  on  mud.  Thn  Harlwrof  Baslitnentos  is  of  little  importance,  alt!ioui:hslii>l- 
tored,  with  a  depth  of  34  to  7  fathoms.  All  its  shore^|  iiro  bounded  by  reefs ;  and  the 
customary  anchorage  is  to  the  S.  W.,.S.,  and  S.  E.  of  tlie  south  or  sandy  point  of  Uosti- 
mentos  Island.  ^ 


.BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


477 


GARROTE  HARBOR.— At  S.  51°  W.  from  the  highest  part  of  Tambor  Islet,  at  QarroU 
the  distance  of  2i  miles,  lies  the  mouth  of  Oarrote  Harbor,  formed  by  the  main  land  to  Harbor. 
Ae  south,  by  Great  Garrote  Island,  in  the  east,  and  by  Pelado  Island,  and  other  islets 
•b,cb  follow  to  the  westward  one  mile  and  a  half,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Boquerones. 
The  mouth  of  Garrote  Harbor  is  scarcely  three-tenths  of  a  mile  wide  between  the  reefs 
to  the  west  of  Great  Garrote  Island  and  Pelado  Islet.  Its  first  direction  is  from  north  to 
south,  and  afterwards  to  S.  E.,  with  a  depth  of  from  64  fathoms  in  the  interior  of  the 
harbor,  to  12  and  18  in  the  mouth,  on  mud.  Between  this  harbor  and  that  of  Bustimen- 
ti)g,  rises  the  Hill  of  Garrote.  It  is  of  middling  height,  and  its  top  terminates  in  a  peak, 
at  the  distance  of  seven-tenths  of  a  mile  from  the  coast. 

At  the  distance  of  34  miles  S.  by  E.  from  the  little  bay  of  Garrote,  is  the  Mountain  of 
Capiro,  or  Capira,  high,  and  almost  always  covered  with  clouds.  This  mountain  is  situa- 
ted nearly  east  from  the  city  of  San  Felipe  of  Porto  Bello. 

At  a  short  distance  to  the  southward  of  Capira  is  the  Sierra  or  Mountain  Ridge  of 
Llorona,  extending  nearly  east  and  west.  It  is  the  highest  of  all  on  the  coast  of  Porto 
Bello.  On  the  eastern  part  of  its  top  it  appears  as  if  cut  down  vertically,  forming  a 
peak  called  the  Campana,  or  the  Bell.  From  this  peak  the  ridge  descends  gradually  to 
the  west,  to  near  the  Peak  of  Guanche.  The  appearance  of  this  ridge  is  such,  that  it 
cannot  be  mistaken  for  any  other.  In  clear  weather  it  may  be  seen  at  tlie  distance  of  45 
miles;  but  in  the  season  of  the  fresh  breezes  it  is  generally  covered  with  haze ;  and 
in  the  season  of  the  vandavnles  and  variable  winds  it  may  often  be  seen  between  8  and  9 
in  the  morning,  and  4  and  5  in  the  afternoon  ;  but  in  the  rest  of  the  day  it  is  covered  with 

The  Lavandera  Shoal  lies  N.  6°  E.,  seven-tenths  of  a  mile  from  the  north  extremity 
of  Pelado  Islet,  and  N.  83°  W.,  distant  one  mile  from  Cabra  Islet,  at  the  mouth  of  Uas- 
timentos  Harbor.  This  shoal  ic  ?f  rock,  with  very  little  water  on  it,  and  steep  to,  with 
7j  and  9  fathoms  close  to  the  rock,  on  which  the  sea  breaks.  The  channels  between  it 
and  Cabra  and  Pelado  Islets  have  a  depth  of  from  14  to  17  fathoms,  on  mud. 

BOQUERONES  POINT  AND  ISLETS.— S.  64°  W.  from   the  highest  part  of  Boquerones 
Tanibor  Islet,  at  the  distance  of  three  miles  and  eight-tenths,  lies  the  Point  of  Boque-    Point  and 
rones,  which  is  salient,  high  and  scarped  ;  and  from  it,  almost  on  the  opposite  bearing, 
that  is,  N.  64°  E.,  there  are  five  islets,  called  the  Boquerones.  which  extend  out  about 
three  cables'  length.     Here  terminate  the  reefs  and  islets  which  extend  westward  from 

Pelado. 

CASIQUE  HILL. — Boquerones  Point  has  to  the  south,  at  a  long  mile's  distance,  a 
hill,  named  Casique,  which  terminates  in  a  point,  and  is  of  middling  height.  It  may  sorve 
as  a  mark  for  keeping  clear  of  the  Farallon  Sucia,  or  Foul  Rock,  which  lies  N.  33°  W., 
nearly  2  miles  from  Boquerones  Point.  The  Foul  Farallon  is  at  the  west  end  of  two 
groups  of  islets  and  shoals,  which,  from  S.  W.  to  N.  E.,  extend  six  and  a  half-tenths  of 
a  mile,  forming  a  channel  between  both,  with  4  to  6  fathoms  water.  The  north-eastern- 
most islet,  or  furollon,  bears  N.  88°  W.  from  the  highest  part  of  'i^imbor  Islet,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  nearly  4  miles ;  and  in  this  space  there  are  from  16  to  30  fathoms  water,  on  clay 
and  sand;  and  16,21,  22,  and  25  fathoms,  between  the  said  farallon,  the  islets  of  the 
coast,  and  the  Lavandera  Shoal. 

DUARTE  ISLETS— Three  miles  S.  69°  W.  from  Boquerones  Point,  lies  the 
north  end  of  the  Duarte  Islets,  which  are  4  in  number,  and  extend  S.  25°  E.,  and  N. 
25°  W.,  six-tenths  of  a  mile.  From  the  north-ensternmost  oae  a  reef  extends  a  cable's 
length  in  the  same  direction.  The  southernmost  of  these  islets  are  separated  a  little  more 
than  two  cables'  length  from  the  Point  of  Duarte  on  the  main  land  to  the  southward  of 
it;  and  from  that  of  Sabanilla,  which  bears  N.  64°  E.,  nearly  half  a  mile.  Between  the 
two  straits  there  is  a  depth  of  from  3  J  fathoms,  close  to  the  islet,  to  15.  The  interiue- 
diatB  coast  is  high  and  scarped,  with  some  bays.  The  Point  of  Josef  Pobre  extends 
farthest  out,  and  is  surrounded  with  rocks  and  reefs.  Sabanilla  Point  has  also  h  reef,  and 
some  rocks. 

At  the  distance  of  two  long  miles  S.  24°  W.  from  the  northernmost  part  of  Duarte 
Islets,  is  Drake's  Point,  which  is  the  N.  VV.  |)oint  of  Porto  Bello,  The  intermediate 
coast  is  high  and  scarped,  with  a  little  harbor,  called  Leon,  of  very  little  importance,  and 
bordered  with  reefs,  which  terminate  to  the  N.  N.  W.,  at  a  little  farallon,  distant  four- 
tenths  of  a  mile  from  its  mouth. 

PORTO  BELLO,  or  PORTO  VELO.— The  name  of  this  port  aptly  defines  iU 
capability  of  rocoivrng  and  accommodating  ships  of  every  class.  The  widest  part  of  its 
entrance,  which  is  between  Drake's  Point  on  the  north,  and  the  Islet  of  Buenuvontura 
on  the  south,  is  one  mile  and  one-fifth  ;  and  these  bear  from  each  other  S.  by  E.  and 
N.by  W.  The  narrowest  part  between  Todo  Fierro  Point  and  that  of  Farnesio,  is 
rather  more  than  half  a  mile  wide,  and  these  he  in  the  direction  of  S.  2°  E.,  and  N.  2° 
W.  From  the  last  mentioned  points  the  harbor  extends  inward  E.  N.  E.,  1^  mile  to  the 
inangrovos  at  its  bottom.  The  north  shore  is  clean ;  but  from  the  south  shore  some 
reefs  and  rocks,  with  very  little  water  on  them,  stretch  olf  to  between  1  and  14  cable's 


Islets. 


Casique 
Hill. 


Duarte 
Islets. 


Porto   Bcllo, 
or  Porlo 

Vela. 


^m^m/m^ww^m^vmrnifi 


478 


Frtsh  Water. 


Fram  Forto 
Bdlo  tu 
Ckagres. 


Mnmanilla 
Point. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

len(;tb  ;  and  in  the  bottom,  or  east  part  of  the  harbor,  there  is  a  sand-bank,  which 
vances  2i  cables'  length  from  ihe  mangroves  towards  the  west ;  and  also  ut  N.  26°  W 
from  the  city  mole,  one  and  a  half-tenth  of  a  mile,  there  is  a  very  little  sand-biinli  w'u 
1  and  li  fathom  water  on  it.  The  rest  of  the  harbor  is  clean,  and  sufficiently  doen  li' 
minidhinfr  regularly  from  16  to  8  fathoms.  Ships  of  the  line  ought  to  tenter  this  ha  Iv! 
by  warping  or  towing,  because  there  are  regularly  either  head  winds  or  caltng.  t!^' 
best  aucl'orage  is  to  the  N.  W.  of  the  Battery  of  Santiago  de  la  Gloria,  in  9  or  10  fathn 
on  clay  and  sand  ;  but  smaller  vessels  may  go  nearer  to  the  city,  taking  care  to  avoid  t!,'' 
little  shoiii  Hlready  spoken  of.  ^° 

The  roofii  on  the  south  shore  continue  to  the  W.  S.  W.,  and  W.,  to  the  Islet  Bub 
Ventura,  the  N.  W.  point  of  which  bears  S.  55°  W.,  three  long  cables'  length  from  tl' 
point  ofthe  same  name ;  and  between  this  islet  and  the  point,  there  are  two  smaller  on  '^ 
all  connected  by  reefs.     S.  37°  W.  from  Drake's  Point,  at  the  distance  of  oiie-fjfti,  f"' 
mile,  lies  the  middle  uf  Drake's  Islet,  which  is  clean  all  round,  and  has  a  break  in  th* 
middle  that  appears  tu  divide  it  into  two  parts.     From    this  break  to  the  west,  oDd  N 
65°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  ihree-fifths  of  a  mile,  lie  the  south  and  north  ends  ofth 
Salmedina  Shoal.     The  south  part  consists  of  rocks  a1}ove   water,  over  which  the  « 
breiiks ;  and  the  other  parts  have  from  ;2  to  34  fathoma  water,  on  rocks.     There  is  rf  "* 
water  all  around  it,  and  in  the  channel  between  it  and  the  islet  there  are  from  Utusefath'' 
cms  water,  on  clay. 

At  three  fifths  uf  a  mile  south  from  Drake's  Islet.and  three  and  a  half-tenths  west  fro 
Point  Farnesiu,  lies  the  Faruesio  Shoal,  of  a  triangular  form,  with  3i  to  5  futhoius  wnt 
on  it,  un  a  bottom  of   rock.     There  is  no  paHsage  between  it  and  the  const'  but 
the  cliiinnol  between  it  and  the  Salmediua  Shoal,  there  are  from  16  to  21  fathoniB  wate"* 
on  clay.  ' 

Fresh  Water. — This  harbor  is  surrounded  by  high  hills,  from  which  some  rills,  or  rire 
lets,  descend  on  both  coasts,  and  from  whence  vessels  may  procure  water,  par'ticujarl 
from  that  which  runs  into  the  bay  to  the  westward  of  the  Fort  of  San  Fernando.    J 
curding  to  the  determinations  of  Brigadier  D.  Joaquin  Francisco  Fidalgo,  the  Battery  of 
San  Geronimo,  at  the  city,  is  in  latitude  9°  24'  22''  N.,and  longitude  79°  43'  \V. 

To  the  tiouthward  of  Porto  Beilo,at  the  distance  of  a  long  half  mile,  is  <he  E  ..„„ 
or  Cove  of  Buenaventura,  much  bordered  with  reefs,  and  consequently  of  little  use" 

To  enter  Porto  Bello  when  approaching  it  from  the  north-eastward,  it  is  advisable  to 
approach  tiie  Farallons  of  Duarte,  and  from  them  to  steer  so  as  to  pass  at  about  a  cable's 
lengtli  to  the  N.  W.  of  Drake's  Islet,  by  which  the  Salmedina  Shoal  will  bo  avoided'  but 
never  attempt  tu  pass  between  Drake's  Islet  and  the  shore.  Having  passed  thn  Drake 
steer  tu  the  suuth  and  east,  tu  gain  the  middle  uf  the  harbur,  and  proceed  inward  in  that 
direction,  or  rather  nearest  to  the  north  shore. 

If  bound  into  this  harbur  from  the  southward,  pass  at  about  half  a  mile  from  the  Isk 
Buenaventura,  and  thence  towards  Drake's  Islet,  to  clear  the  Farnesio  Shoal;  then  steer 
N.  E.,  aiul  more  easterly  as  the  harbor  opens ;  and  lastly,  run  in  mid-channel,  or  rather 
nearer  the  north  side,  as  before  directed. 

FROM  PORTO  IJKLLO  TO  CUAGRES.— About  S.  50°  W.,  at  the  distance  of 
nearly  15  miles  from  Drake's  Point,  is  the  western  extremity  of  the  front  of  Longarre- 
nius,  which  with  the  north-easternmost  of  the  Islas  de  Naranjos,  orOranj;e  Isles,  (biraa 
bay,  in  which  are  two  creeks,  called  those  uf  Minas ;  the  Orange  Isles  he  N.  6G*  E.  at 
the  di8tiiiico  uf  43  miles  from  Longarrenios  Point.  The  Minas  Creeks  are  formed  amoDt 
mangroves,  and  tlie  easternmost  one  extends  inward  3  miles  to  the  S.  S.  E.,  is  of  various 
breadths,  and  its  shores  are  bordered  with  reefs.  The  western  creek  is  narrower  and 
shorter ;  it  extends  inward  to  the  south  rather  more  than  a  mile.  At  the  S.  K.  part  of 
the  Orange  Isles,  which  are  low,  covered  with  trees,  and  surrounded  with  reefs,  tiiere  is 
an  auclior^ige,  with  4^,  6,  and  7  fathoms  water,  un  sand. 

In  the  intermediate  part  of  this  coast,  Point  (lorda  is  the  most  projecting,  and  there 
are  several  coves  of  little  consideration-  To  this  point  the  coast  is  high,  with  bnnks  or 
ridges;  and  between  it  and  Buenaventura  Cove,  the  River  Guanche  disembogues: 
Guanche  Hill  bears  from  Point  Gorda  N.  82°  E.,  distant  3J  miles.  From  Point  Gurda 
to  the  S.  \V.,  the  coast  gradually  diininishesin  height,  and  the  remainder  from  the  Fuiut 
of  Rio  (irande  and  the  Creeks  of  .Mums,  is  a  low  coast,  with  mangroves.  'J'lie  Fronton 
of  Longarremos  is  likewise  low,  witli  mangroves,  and  bordered  with  reefs,  as  are  also  the 
points  wliich  form  the  Minas  Creeks;  these  reefs  extend  somewhat  more  than  a  ciibie's 
length  oil',  are  steep  to,  and  at  the  distance  uf  one-third  of  a  mile  there  are  11  fathoms 
water,  on  clay. 

MANZANILLA  POINT. — From  the  Fronton  of  Longarremos,  the  maagrovesex- 
tend  tu  the  S.  W.,  nearly  Id  mile,  to  the  Puint  of  Manzanilla,*  which  is  also  of  maa- 


•  SHOALS  NEAR  POKTO    BELLO.— H.  M.  S.  Tribune,  Capmin  Sir  Neiibett  J    Willoughby 
K.  C  U.,  on  the  lUlh  of  November,  1U21,  struck  on  a  rock  off  Mauzauillu  Point  with  the  Islando] 


mm 


tilt'  Drakei 
wurd  in  that 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  479 

5»ove9i  round,  and  bordered  with  reefs,  to  the  diataace  of  a  long  cable ,  with  a  little  thoal, 
Ltis'jw'""'  3  cables  from  it,  N.  W.  by  N. 
\f.\NZANILLA  HARBOR  ia  formed  between  the  ialetof  that  name  to  the  weat,  and    Manzanilla 
he  iniiio  lund  to  the  east,  extending  in  nearly  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Manzanilla  Point :    Harbor. 
J  is  harbor  is  clean  from  '2i  to  6  fntboma  water.    The  beat  anchorage  for  every  class  of 
^jjpla  is  a  little  to  the  south  of  its  mouth,  and  on  the  east  coast,  iu  5  fitthoma  water,  on 

land  ttiiJ  clay. 

pivo  miles  S.  68°  W.  from  the  front  of  Longarremos  ia  Toro  Point,  which  iathe  weat- 
point  of  Nttoa  Harbor,  the  eastern  one  being  the  north  end  of  JManzanilla  Island,  which 
'  jj,{„,)t  from  Toro  Point  2|  miles.  Toro  Point  is  salient,  high,  scarped,  and  bordered 
with  reefs,  extending  out  about  two  cables'  length,*  with  an  islet  noar  them.  Naos,  or 
jjjyy  Ilaibor,  extends  inward  nearly  4  miles  to  the  south  from  the  middle  of  its  mouth; 
tabreiidth  is  nearly  equal,  narrowing  somewhat  from  two-thirds  of  the  said  distance  :  it 
isctento  the  parallel  of  Point  Limon,  with  a  depth  from  3i  to  64  fathoms  water,  on  sand 
and  ciny;  *'•""  P"'"*  Litnon  fo  the  south  it  is  shallow.  As  this  harbor  is  open  to  winds 
from  N.  E.  to  N.  W.,  i"ound  by  north,  it  can  be  of  use  in  the  season  of  the  variable  winds 
jnd  calms  only. 

From  Toro  Point  the  coast  trends  S.  67°  W.,  nearly  2i  miles,  to  Brujas  Point,  which 
ijof  moderate  height,  and,  like  the  intermediate  coast,  bordered  with  reefs,  which  extend 
july  a  short  diatance  out,  but  surround  an  islet,  named  Mogote  de  Brujas,  which  lies  to 
tlie  JJ.  E.  of  the  point  of  the  same  name,  about  2  cables'  length. 

From  Brujas  Point  the  coast  that  follows  is  lower  than  before,  and  in  the  direction  of 
S  35°  W..  for  2  miles,  to  Batata,  or  Vigia  Point,  so  named  from  having  a  guard-house 

'  jj.  from  this  point  that  of  Chagres  is  a  cable's  length  distant,  and  is  lower  than  the 
former,  bordered  with  low  rocks,  which  show  above  water,  and  reefs  which  extend  out 
to  a  Bliort  distance. 

CHAGRES.— From  Chagres  Pomt  to  the  west  point  of  the  Penon,  or  rock,  on  which  Chagres. 
stands  the  Castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  is  about  14  cable's  length  S.  by   E.     The  Penon   is 
seamed  to  the  N.  W.  and  south,  and  the  Castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  as  we  have  said,  is 
situated  on  it.    This  Penon  to  the  north,  with  Point  Arenaa  to  the  south,  form  ths  mouth 
of  Cbagres  River,  which,  at  the  widest  pai't,  is  two  cables'  length  across,  and  14  where 

narrowest. 

To  the  E.  S.  E.,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  Castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  is  the  little  town 
or  village  of  Chagrea,  conaisting  of  huts,  covered  with  thatch.  The  mouth  of  the  river 
narrows  between  the  Penon  and  bank,  which  extends  out  from  Arenas  Point  in  a  N.  W. 
direction,  to  the  distance  of  a  cable's  length.  In  the  mouth,  and  to  the  south  of  the  Penon, 
there  are  24  and  3  fathoms  water  :  and  the  same  depth  continues,  a  little  more  or  less,  to 
the  distance  of  half  a  mile  up  the  river.  To  the  west  of  the  Castle  of  San  Lorenzo,  at 
the  distance  of  200  varas,  or  92  English  fathoms,  is  a  shoal,  named  Laja,  which  extends 
from  north  to  south  70  fathoms,  and  is  of  rock,  with  very  little  water  on  it.  To  enter  and 
to  sail  out  of  this  river  is  very  dangerous,  and  can  only  be  effected  by  very  manageable 
vessels,  which  do  not  draw  more  than  12  feet :  both  operations  must  be  performed  with 
a  fair  wind,  for  otherwise  the  current  of  the  river,  and  the  various  eddies  it  forms,  from 
the  opposition  of  the  Penon,  Laja,  and  the  west  shore,  will  carrj'  vessels  on  either  one  or 
the  other  of  these  dangers. 

From  Point  Arenas  of  the  River  Chagres,  the  direction  of  the  coast  ia  S.  65°  W.,  one 
mile,  to  the  Point  of  Morrito,  or  Little  Hill  Point:  and  from  thence  S.  38°  W.,  nearly 2 
miles,  to  the  Point  of  Animas  :  all  the  :hore  being  low  with  a  bench. 

S.  36°  W.,  at  the  distance  of  2  long  miles  from  the  last  mentioned  point,  there  is  an- 
other equally  low  ;  and  is  the  last  point  of  the  surveys  of  Brigadier  Don  Joaquin  Francisco 
Fidulfo;  from  whence,  proceeding  onward,  although  we  have  various  accounts,  they  do 
not  m^erit  that  confidence  which  would  entitle  them  to  be  named  Directions. 

Descriptions  of  the  Coast  from  Porto  Bella  to  Chagres,  with  Directions  for  Chagres  and 
Navy  Bays ;  by  Capt.  O.  Sidney  Umith,  late  commander  of  H.  M.  sloop  Bustard. 

"The  land  of  Porto  Bello  is  very  high  and  full  of  hummocks,  whilst  all  that  to  the 
westward  is  comparatively  low,  and  in  the  vicinity  of  Chagres  offers  nothing  remarkable : 
that  to  the  eastward  of  Manzanilla  Point  is  rather  high  and  uniform.  The  Castle  of 
Chagres.  from  the  nature  of  its  position,  cannot  be  seen  from  the  eastward  until  you 
arrive  close  to  it. 


Willoughby 
thelalaudo'i 


Rastimentos  bearing  S.  W.  by  W.,  by  compaas,  distant  3  miles,  and  Monkey  Island  S.  E.  There 
were  3  fati^oms  water  on  it,  and  7  or  8  CuthoinB  round  it.  This  was  accidentally  omitted  in  its 
proper  place.  His  Majesty's  ship  Harpy,  in  February,  1829,  having  Manzanilla  Point  bearing  S. 
W.,  by  compaso,  Tambor  Island  W.  i  S.,  distant  4  uiiies,  and  being  about  3 J  or  4  miles  oft"  shore. 
had  only  6  lathoras  water,  on  rocky  bottom ;  and  then  huuling  to  the  N.  W.,  gradually  deepened  to  20 
fathiiirs, 
*  Cipi.  G.  S  Smith  aad  others,  say  it  extends  off  about  a  mile  north-eastward. 


I  \"»  l.iwm 


I   HHB'""' 


480 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Chagres  Bay.     "  CH  AGRES  BAY — Point  Brujoa  forms  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  bay,  and  when  with 
4  or  5  miles  of  it,  io  nearly  an  east  or  west  direction,  it  cannot  be  mistalten ;  it  appg '" 
to  have  lying  oft'  it  a  small  island,  with  its  sides  of  perpendicular  rock,  and  top  cover"!! 
with  bushes,  which,  on  nearer  approach,  is  found  to  be  connected  with  the  main  InnH 
About  half  way  betwepn  this  point  and  the  castle,  (the  whole  of  that  part  of  tiie  co 
being  steep  to.)  is  a  remarkable  white  patch  in  the  clilf ,  and  close  to  it  a  fine  fall  of  ein' 
lent  water;  but  unless  in  very  fine  weather  and  smooth  water,  it  cannot  be  npproach'd 
witliout  danger  of  staving  the  boat.     When  running  in  for  the  anchorage,  during  nisi 
or  day,  after  passing  Brujas  Point,  keep  it  open  of  the  point  S.  S.  W.  of  it.     Tlie  bj 
anchorage  for  a  large  ship  is  with  the  Brujas  Point  N.  E.,  about  three  miles.    Thefiu 
tnrd  anchored  in  51  fathoms,  with  the  flag-staff  in  the  Castle  S.  E.  ^  E.,  and  Point  Bruia 
N.  E.  }  N .     A  strong  current  sets  out  of  the  river  to  the  N.  N.  E.,  with  grenter  or  leg! 
force,  according  to  the  season,  whether  rainy  or  dry  :  but  at  all  times  it  prevents  you 
riding  with  any  great  strain  with  northerly  winds.     Should  it  come  on  to  blow  heavy  i[ 
would  be  well  to  slip  and  shift  round  to  Navy  Bay.  '' 

"  The  Bar  of  Chagres  Harbor,  or  River,  has  2i  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water;  the  or 
trance  is  rather  difficult,  and  at  all  times  requires  a  fair  wind,  but  when  in,  you  nru  per 


fectly  secure.     1  would  not  recommend  its  being  entered,  if  the  measure  could 


possibly 


I^avy  Bay. 


be  avoided,  or  to  suffer  tlie  boats  to  be  there  at  night.  It  is,  perhaps,  the  most  unheiilthv 
place  known.  The  Bustard's  cutter  was,  by  stress  of  weather,  obliged  to  pass  a  ni"htm 
the  harbor;  tlie  consequent  lo^ts  was,  a  lieutenant  and  seven  men  :  only  one  of  the'aum 
ber  attacked,  recovered.  This  iiappened  between  the  27th  and  30th  day  of  November 
1827. 

"NAVY  BAY  is  about  4  miles  in  depth,  and  3  in  breadth,  open  to  the  north,  and 
formed  by  Point  Manzi,  which  is  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Manzanilla  Island,  to  tjie  eiir. 
ward,  and  Point  Toro,  to  the  westward.  Off  the  latter  lies  a  dangerous  reef,  exteudiiij 
al)out  a  mile  to  the  N.  E.,  which  should  not  be  approached  to  a  less  depth  than  ,5j  faiii; 
oins  water;  Point  Manzi,  on  the  opposite  side,  may  be  approached  with  safety,  by  tbe 
eye,  within  half  a  cable's  length.  The  shores  of  the  Bay,  on  both  sides,  nie  boldfor 
nearly  2  miles  inward,  having  3  fathoms  close  to  the  beach  or  bushes.  Ihe  depth  of  I 
WHter  decreases  very  gradually  between  Toro  Reef  and  the  south  end  of  the  bay,  beini" 
from  7  to  2^  fathoms,  so  that  persons  may  select  their  berth  according  to  their'dnit'tol' 
water;  but  reference  ought  to  be  had  to  the  season  of  the  year.  In  the  rainy  sensQn.by 
far  the  greater  portion  of  the  year,  it  is  best  to  anchor  on  the  west  side,  as  the  winds 
though  variable,  are  generally  from  that  quarter;  and  during  the  season  of  i/romr  «|J 
breezes,  which  are  generally  from  the  N.  E.,  with  occasional  westing,  it  is  better  to  an- 
chor under  Point  Manzi.  The  latter  bore  from  the  Bustard,  N.  h  W.,  by  compass, one- 
third  of  a  mile  distant,  where  the  holding  ground  was  found  very  good  at  4i  fathoms  water 
with  a  little  outset  from  the  bay. 

"  Point  Limon  is  bluff,  and  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  about  three  miles  \vithin 
Toro  Point,  having  a  hut  erected  on  it,  where  there  is  generally  a  guard  of  a  few  soldiers, 
who  communicate  with  Chagres  by  an  intricate  foot-path;  for,  although  the  distance  is 
not  above  4  miles,  it  takes  several  hours  to  accomplish  it.  When  Point  Limon  is  well 
open,  bearing  S.  by  W.,  by  compass,  the  Bay  may  be  entered  with  safety. 

"The  soundings  on  the  const,  between  Points  'I'oroand  Brujas,  at  a  full  mile  offshore, 
are  74,  8,  84.  9.  and  10  fathoms;  and  thence  to  half  a  mile  off  Chagres,  or  Biitata  Point, 
10,  9,  7.  G4>  lid  f"  fathoms;  there  are  54.  with  the  whte  patch  before  mentioned,  bear- 
ing K.  S.  E.;  always  keeping  Brujas  Point  just  open  of  the  point  S.  S.  W.  of  it. 

"Navy  Bay  has  not  a  single  resident  on  its  shore,  besides  the  guard  before  spolienf, 
Landing,  except  at  a  few  places,  is  very  difficult.  Wood  and  cocoa-imts  are  to  be h. din 
abundance:  fish  are  scarce. 

"Some  persons  have  pointed  out  different  spots  where  fresh  water  may  be  obtained; 
but  the  Bustard's  boats,  during  her  slay  here,  from  the  30th  of  November  to  the  11th of 
December,  1827,  were  employed  surveying  and  visiting  every  part  of  the  bay;  and  al- 
though heavy  rains  had  fallen,  water  was  not  to  be  found,  except  in  small  quantities,  in 
stagnant  pools." 

Directions  for  Sailinf^frum  Jamaica,  to  and  upon  the  Coast  of  Colombia  between  Esctuk 
Island  and  Carlhagena,  including  Chagres  and  Porto  Bella,  by  Capt.  J.  Maddk', 
R.  N.  1816. 

Jamaica  to  JAMAICA  TO  ESCUDO  ISLAND  AND  CHAGRES.— "The  current  between 

Escudo  Isl-      the  Island  of  Jamaica  and  the  Spanish  Main,  or  Coast  of  Colombhi,  is  not  always  to  be 

nnd  ff  Cha-    depended  upon  as  setting  to  the  westward,  as  is  generally  supposed;  for  in  crossing  from 

grei.  Jamaica  to  the  Main,  ships  have  been  known  to  be  driven  to  the  eastward  by  the  current, 

50  or  (iO  miles  in  4  or  5  days;  which  can  only  be  guarded  against  by  lunar  observations, 

or  good  chronometei-8.     From  the  month  of  May  till  the  middle  or  end  of  November, 

the  eiist  and  N.  E.  trade  winds  aeldow  blow  home  to  the  Main;  therefore,  ships  Bboulij 


■T"" 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

neter  go  to  the  southward  of  the  parallel  of  eleven  degrees,  until  they  are  40  or  50  miles 
to  the  westwiird  of  their  intended  port;  after  which  they  may  make  h  south  course  good, 
i^lowing  half  a  point  easterly  variation,  and  with  the  winds,  which  in  the  aforementioned 
months  blow  from  S.  W.  to  W.,  and  sometimes  in  the  morning,  after  day-light,  till  8 
o'clocii,  even  at  south,  together  with  the  current,  will  set  them  to  the  eastward,  and 
thereby  gain  the  anchorage.  If,  however,  upon  malting  the  land,  they  should  find  that 
•he  current  has  set  them  to  the  eastward  of  the  intended  port,  and  light  winds  prevail, 
they  should  immediately  stand  to  the  northward,  so  far  as  10°  30',  or  even  11°,  of  lati- 
wde,  in  order  to  meet  the  N.  E.  trade  wind,  and  vviih  it  to  make  good  the  necessary 
vesting  iigain. 

.•The  land  to  the  westward  of  the  River  Chagres,  within  the  Island  Escudo,  is  high, 
and  unless  you  are  close  in  shore,  it  is  impossible  to  discover  that  island;  but  in  a  clear 
()»v,  a  remarkable  high  hill  will  be  seen  to  tho  eastward  of  it,  which  makes  like  a  sugar- 
loaf!  Steer  in  towards  that  hill,  until  you  are  within  3  miles  of  the  shore,  and  then  run 
to  the  BBStward,  at  about  that  distance  from  it,  free  from  danger,  until  you  see  a  fort  on 
aamHll  bluff,  which  is  the  entrance  of  the  river,  bearing  about  E.  by  S.,  or  E.,  according 
to  your  distance  from  the  land.  The  mruth  of  the  River  Chagres  is  strongly  marked, 
by  the  land  to  the  westward  forming  a  blu'"",  and  the  fort  on  the  eastern  side:  the  latter, 
however,  cannot  be  seen  at  a  greater  distance  than  10  or  12  miles.  You  have  good  an- 
chorage by  bringing  the  fort  to  bear  E.  S.  E.,  or  E.  S.  E.  i  E.,  in  from  10  to  6  fathoms, 
gaud  and  mud:  the  Sugar-loaf,  to  the  westward,  will  appear  about  one-third  above  the 
low  land  between  Chagres  and  Escudo,  and  the  two  high  hills  of  Porto  Bello  open  of 
Point  Brujas.  In  mooring,  lay  your  small  bower  to  the  westward,  and  the  best  to  the 
eastward,  as  the  offset  of  the  river  will  generally  keep  the  hawse  clear  during  the  preva- 
lence of  westerly  winds."     Vai  iation  7°  E. 

CHAGRKS  TO  PORTO  BKLLO— "From  the  Road  of  the  River  Chagres  to 
Porto  Bello,  the  course,  by  compass,  is  N.  E.  i  N.;  but  if  you  run  3  or  4  miles  to  the 
northward,  then  a  N.  E.  course  will  take  you  into  the  harbor:  the  distance  is  about  28 
or  30  miles.  I  strongly  recommend,  should  light  winds  prevail,  which  is  generally  the 
case  from  May  to  the  end  of  November,  that  ships  bound  to  the  eastward  should  get  a 
mod  offing,  as  the  current  runs  at  the  rate  of  from  IJ  to  2i  miles  an  hour,  to  the  north- 
ward and  eastward,  and  sets  right  on  the  rocks  to  the  N.  E.  of  Porto  Bello,  particularly 
in  the  rainy  months,  that  is,  as  above  stated,  from  May  to  November.  In  this  season  the 
River  Chagres  has  a  discharge  which  discolors  the  sea,  6,  7,  and  8  miles  olf ;  and  this 
water  meeting  the  sea  cuiTent,  causes  a  strong  set  to  the  eastward. 

"If  you  intend  going  into  Porto  Bello,  the  entrance  of  the  harbor  may  be  known  by 

two  remarkable  trees  on  the  t')p  of  the  hill,  on  the  starboard  or  south  side ;  and  on  a  hill, 

on  the  larboard  side,   is  a  small  signal   post.     In  coming  from  the  westward,  keep 

i  within  3  miles  of  the  shore,  until  you  open  the  town  of  Porto  Bello,  on  the  starboard  or 

Kouth  side  of  the  harbor,  which  will  lead  you  in ;  but  observe,  should  you  have  light 

winds,  to  keep  well  up,  on  account  of  the  Sahnedina  Shoal,  which  lies  in  a  line  with 

Drake's  Islet,  on  the  larboard  hand,  when  going  in,  as  the  current  may  set  you  down 

j  upon  it.    Take  care,  however,  that  you  do  not  shut  the  town  of  Porto  Bello  in  with  the 

land  OR  the  south  side,  as  a  shoal  extends  off  from  the  islet  Buenaventura,  on  that  side. 

You  may  anchor  in  from  10  to  18  fathoms,  on  soft  mud.     There  are  no  other  dangers  in 

going  into  the  harbor,  besides  those  stated.     The  Salmedina  is  frequently  visible,  and 

I  generally  breaks :  it  is  from  50  to  60  fathoms  in  extent,  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.,  and  50 

1  fathoms  in  breadth,  with  6  fathoms  all  round  it,  at  25  fathoms  distance  from  the  breakers. 

It  bears  from  Drake's  Islet,  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance>  W.  4  S.,  by  compass,  dis- 

1  tant  about  300  fathoms;  and  between  is  tho   passage  generally  taken  by  ships  coming 

from  the  eastward  for  Porto  Bello. 

"  During  the  N.  E.  trades  blowing  home,  that  is,  from  December  to  May,  there  is  no 

anger  to  be  apprehended  in  going  through  this  passage,  as  you  may  keep  within  a  ship's 

I  length  of  the  Islet,  and  within  half  a  cable's  length  of  tho  Salmedina ;  between  which  we 

found  from  7  to  14,  and  22  fathoms  of  water.     In  turning  up  to  Porto  Bello,  great  care 

must  be  taken,  when  within  3  or  4  miles  of  the  harbor's  mouth,  that  you  do  not  shut  the 

town  in  with  tho  land  on  the  south  or  starboard  side  of  the  harbor,  in  order  to  avoid  the 

I  lunkea  rocks  off  Buenaventura  Islet. 

"There  are  no  particular  marks  for  anchoring;  but  when  ships  require  refreshment, 

I  and  supplies  of  water  and  wood,  I  would  recommend  their  anchoring  about  a  quarter  of  a 

mile  below  Fort  Fernando,  which  stands  on  the  north  shore,  and  is  easily  seen ;  then  yott 

will  be  abreast  of  the  only  watering  place  in  the  harbor.     In  going  in  with  a  leading  wind, 

keep  the  town  well  open  on  the  starboard  bow,  and  anchor  in  from  30  to  15  fathoms,  or 

1  even  in  12  or  10,  according  to  the  size  of  your  ship. 

"  During  the  months  of  May.  June,  Sec,  to  November,  light  airs  prevail  in  the  harbor, 
I  from  the  S.  W.  and  W. ;  and,  early  in  the  morning,  light  winds  from  the  N.  E.,  down 
{the  harbor:  Therefore,  be  prepared  with  boats  ahead,  to  be  under  way  by  the  dawn  of 
[day.  In  maoring,  let  the  small  bower  be  to  the  northward,  and  the  best  to  the  south- 
Iward."  31 


461 


Chagratp 
Porto  Belk. 


482 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Chagre$to  CHAGRES    TO    CARTHAGENA— "  When  at  the  River  Chngres,  during  ,1, 

Carthagtna.    inontba  of  the  rainy  season,  or  from  Miiy  to  the  end  of  November,  stand  out  to  thn  no  1!^ 
ward,  4  or  5  leagues,  so  soon  ns  you  can  ;  because  the  winds  during  these  muutha  ar*^ 


Etcudo  Isl- 
and. 


Green  Bay. 


to  Beilo,  and  thence  along  the  line  of  coast  from  E.  by  N.  to  E.  N.  E.  and  E.  ,S.  E      i 
seldom  less  than  at  the  rate  of  1^  or  3  miles  an  hour.     Should  you,  however,  be  u° 
Toidttbly  drawn  in  near  the  land  of  Porto  Hello,  be  constantly  on  your  euard.  but  n^.."'' 
u-i.,  :„  .u^  -.„„„;..„  ,...,1  „.  „;,.i,»    „„„i..ot  .,..,„n»  »,ui^u   <•,„„..„...!.,  .uwv  r'        .''""<:«• 


larly  in  the  evening  and  at  night,  against  squalls,  which  frequently  shift  from  the  In  h 
round  the  compass,  with  torrents  of  rain  and  gusts  of  wind  so  as  to  oblige  you  to   i 
all  up.  ""' 

"  When  you  get  to  the  eastward  of  Point  St.  Bias,  and  open  the  Gulf  of  Darien  t)i 
current  appears  to  have  less  effect,  and  generally  draws  in  to  the  south,  S.  by  W.'  n  h 
S.  by  E.;  but  I  strongly  suspect  that  it  is  much  influenced  by  the  prevailing  wind  at  tl 
different  periods  of  the  seasons.  After  passing  the  gulf,  you  may  see  the  islundH  of  s  ° 
Bernardo,  which  lie  to  the  eastward  and  form  a  cluster,  the  centre  of  which  we(°  "" 
to  be  in  latitude  9°  27'  N.,»  longitude,  by  chronometer,  75^  62'  30"  W.     Tl 


are  low,  but  very  remarkable,  when  at  the  distance  of  10  or  12  miles  off,  and  bearing  fro 
£.  to  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  several  parts  of  them  will  appear  like  small  rocks  between  tliej? 
ands :  but  at  the  south  end  of  the  northernmost  island  there  are  two  remarkable  tree 
which  may  be  mistaken  for  a  vessel  at  anchor.      These  islands,  like  the  whole  of  ih' 
coast,  are  covered  with  wood,  and  may  be  seen  about  5  leagues  off. 

"  As  you  proceed  further  to  the  eastward,  you  will  make  the  Islands  of  Rosario,  \,„ 
may  always  be  known  fi'om  those  of  San  Bernardo,  as  they  lie  in  a  trianguliir  form  "amj 
are  long  and  low.  Having  passed  these  islands,  if  the  weather  be  fine,  you  will  seethe 
hill  over  Carthagona,  called  Popa,  on  which  a  convent  and  castle  with  a  aignal-stafTBtaDdi 
and  forms  not  unlike  a  gunner's  quoin.  After  you  get  to  the  eastward  of  the  Rosario 
Islands,  you  w'i'l  find  a  current  sotting  to  the  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  W.,  at  the  rate  of  from  j 
to  2i  miles  '.a  an  hour. 

"In  pioceeding  to  your  anchorage  you  must  steer  to  the  northward,  until  you  open 
the  town  of  Carthagena  to  the  southward  of  the  Popa,  whicli  may  be  seen  ut  the  distance 
of  10  or  12  leagues  off.  In  running  in  from  sea,  you  must  never  bring  the  Popa  to  bear 
to  the  northward  of  east:  either  of  the  above  marks  or  beai-ings  will  lead  clearoftjie 
Saimedina  Shoal,  which  has  only  8  foet  water  on  it,  and  bears  from  the  Popii  S.  W.  by 
W.,  about  8  miles. 

"  The  anchorage  of  Carthagena  is  very  good,  sand  and  mud,  and  from  8  to  6  futhoms 
of  water.  Here  you  are  about  3i  or  4  miles  from  the  city,  and  may  see  a  gateway  on 
tlje  face  of  the  bay,  named  the  St.  Domingo  Gate,  where  you  may  land,  keeping  a  Utile 
to  tiie  westward,  where  there  is  a  good  sandy  beach.  In  the  fine  season  the  winds  gene- 
rally blow  alongshore,  and  seldom  bring  in  much  sea.  The  marks  for  anchoring  are 
the  citadel  on  with  the  lower  or  south  part  of  the  Popa,  or  the  Popa  £.  by  S.  and  tbe 
Boca  Chica  S.  d  E." 

[Prom  the  Journals  and  Remarks  ofOflicerB  in  the  British  Navy.] 

The  Coast  from  Chagres  to  Boca  del  Toro  of  the  Chiriqui  Lagoon,  by  Captain  John  Gaiu 
Graham,  when  commander  of  tl.  M.  elooj>  Icarus,  1824  and  1825. 

ESCUDO  ISLAND.— The  course  from  Chagres  to  the  Island  Escudo  is  W,  byS, 
by  compass,  about  75  miles.  The  island  lies  9  miles  from  the  main  land,  and  its  eastenil, 
by  sights  taken  by  two  well  regulated  chronometers,  was  found  to  lie  in  81°  29' W, 
longitude.  It  is  low,  and  covered  with  cocounut  trees,  and  is  about  li  mile  in  leDcib, 
with  a  reef  of  rocks  extending  from  each  end. 

Point  Valencia  bears  from  this  island  W.  by  S.,  22  miles,  and  may  be  seen  in  clem 
weather.  To  the  eastward  of  the  point  there  are  two  small  keys,  uameil  the  PkiitaJD 
Keys,  and  are  covered  with  trees.  To  the  westward,  about  3  miles,  are  the  three  Tiger 
Keys,  between  which  and  the  main  is  a  passage  about  a  mile  in  breiidth,  having  from 'lo 
16  fathoms  water.     Here  the  current  was  found  setting  strong  to  the  westward. 

GREEN  BAY. — Six  or  seven  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Tiger  Keys  is  the  entrance 
of  the  Chiriqui  Lagoon;  and  8  miles  S.  E.  of  this  entrance  is  Green  Bay,  wiiereyoii 
may  anchor  in  10  fathoms,  about  a  mile  from  the  shore,  abreast  of  an  old  hut  in  the  { 
middle  of  the  bay.  At  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  the  water  shoiils  suddenir. 
Fresh  water  may  be  procured  in  abundance:  it  runs  out  of  a  hollow  ruck  nearly oyil 
yards  to  the  westward  of  the  hut.  There  is  also  a  pool  of  water  close  to  the  hut,  but  ii  | 
is  not  80  good  as  that  obtained  from  the  rock.  Wood  is  plentiful.  Tiiere  are  do  iuhabi- 
tants  within  7  or  8  miles. 


limarks  on  tl 


*  According  lo  the  survey  of  Dod  J .  F.  Fidolgu,  tlie  centre  of  these  islands  lies  in  U"  45'  north  iaiiiudt. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


488 


To  working  out  of  Green  Bay,  two  Binnll  keys  will  be  observed:  they  nre 
,     jillaa,  and  bear  W.  N.  W.  from  Point  Vuloncin.    To  these  a  berth  mu 


named  the 
7  nudillaSi  ""''  "^®'"'  ^'  '^^   **•  "■oiii  i-oiiit  V  uiuiicin.     io  mese  a  uorin  must  be  given, 

account  of  a  reef  which  stretches  to  the  south-eastward  from  them  about  2  miles,  on 
"".  •  I,  the  wnter  breaks  in  most  parts. 

*  Boca  del  'I'oroi  another  passage  into  the  lagoon,  Is  about  10  miles  W.  by  S.  from  the 
7  uHdilln  Keys-  This  may  be  known  by  a  remarkable  rock,  standing  near  the  middle  of 
le  eatrance.  Ships  going  into  the  lagoon  should  keep  the  rock  open  at  about  a  cable's 
unalh  on  the  starboard  side,  until  a  reef  appears  on  the  larboard  side,  which  must  not  be 

moached  to  a  loss  depth  than  4  fathoms,  it  being  very  steep.     Pass  the  end  of  the  reef 
'7  fiitlioms,  and  haul  up  for  the  bay,  where  you  may  choose  your  anchorage  in  from  8 


(o4fiitliom8,  well  sheltered 


The  only  supiilios  to  bo  obtained  here,  are  turtle,  fish,  and  wood. 

Tkf  Chirinui  Lagoon,  by  Douglas  Cox,  Esq.,  Commander  of  his  Majesty's  sloop  Sheer- 
^^  '  water,  in  1810. 

[The  caurseB  and  boaringa  arc  magnetic] 

Chiriqui  Lagoon  is  about  26  miles  long,  and  in  some  places  12  or  13  miles  wide,  with 
several  rivers  ♦ailing  into  it.     The  principal  entrance  into  this  lagoon  is  called  the  Va- 
lencia Channel,  which  is  about  2  miles  wide,  lying  north  and  south,  with  from  23  to  14 
fiitlioms  water.    Its  latitude  is  about  9'='  16'  N.,  and  longitude  81°  58'  W.     The  western 
side  of  this  channel  is  formed  by  the  Zapudillas  and  Water  Key;  the  former  having  a 
reef  on  the  north  side  of  them,  from  the  S.  E.  end  of  Provision  Island  to  about  2  miles 
S  E.  of  the  easternmost  Zapadilla  Key.     Off  the  east  end  of  Water  Key,  a  reef  extends 
jbout  half  a  mile.    The  eastern  side  of  the  channel  is  formed  by  the  Tiger  Keys  and  Va- 
leiicitt  Point.    The  Tiger  Keys  lie  14  mile  from  Valencia  Point,  and  are  four*  in  num- 
ber throe  having  trees  on  them,  and  the  fourth  perfectly  bare,  to  the  S.  W.  of  which  is 
ariicii  just  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water.    On  this  the  sea  always  breaks,  and  there 
lire  17  fathoms  within  half  a  mile  of  it.     There  is  little  or  no  danger  in  going  into  this 
cliaiinei,  by  keeping  a  good  lookout  from  the  mast-head,  until  you  get  within  Water  Key ; 
then  there  is  a  rocky  bank  with  1 1  feet  on  some  parts  of  it.     The  marks  to  avoid  this 
biinli,  is  to  keep  the  two  Zapadilla  Keys  open  of  the  east  end  of  Water  Key,  N.  N.  W.  | 
W,    Ingoing  across  to  the  south  side  of  the  lagoon  to  Chraco  Mola  River,  the  soundings 
are  very  irregular,  there  being  in  some  places  not  more  than  3  fathoms.    By  observing 
the  following  directions,  you  will  not  have  less  than  that  depth  : 

When  abreast  of  Water  Key,  steer  to  the  southward  until  you  bring  the  two  Zapa- 
dillii  Keys  just  open  of  the  east  end  of  Water  Key,  bearing  N.  W.  by  N.;  keep  them  on 
that  bearing  until  the  small  keys  which  lie  off  Valencia  South  Point  come  on  with  the 
North  Valencia  Point,  and  you  will  have  from  18  to  5  and  6  fathoms ;  then  steer  to  the 
W.  S.  W.,  until  the  eastern  Zapadilla  Key  comes  within  half  its  breadth  of  the  east  end 
of  Water  Key,  bearing  N.N.  W.  i  W.,  and  keep  it  thus  open,  or  in  that  direction,  until 
the  North  and  South  Valencia  Points  appear  in  a  line.  You  will  then  bo  on  a  bank  of 
three  fathoms,  which  is  about  half  a  mile  wide  :  and  when  over  it,  the  water  will  deepen 
fast  to  10  and  12  fathoms.  When  you  nre  on  the  bank  of  three  fathoms,  Chraco  Malo 
River  will  bear  about  S.  E.,  4  or  5  miles  distant.  It  is  not  perceptible  until  you  are  within 
2  or  3  miles.  Nine  fathoms  is  near  enough  to  approach  on  the  river  side.  It  has,  how- 
ever two  entrances.  The  best  anchorage  is  off  the  northernmost,  in  9  or  10  fathoms,  on 
mud'dv  bottom,  with  Valencia  Point  l)earing  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  the  oast  end  of  Water 
Key  N.  W.  i  N.,  or  you  may  go  farther  eastward,  in  9  fathoms. 

At  the  head  of  the  river  a  tribe  of  Indians  live,  from  whom  you  may  purchase  hogs, 
fowls,  and  plantains,  by  going  up  to  their  village,  about  23  miles.  The  water  is  perfectly 
resh  lit  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  sea. 

There  is  very  good  anchorage  on  the  south  side  of  the  Zapadilla  Keys,  in  12  or  13  fath- 
oms water,  about  one  mile  off'  either  of  them,  and  little  danger  in  going  in  there,  by  giving 
the  reef  off  the  S.  E.  key  a  berth  of  about  a  mile.  Your  eye  will  be  the  best  guide  for 
you  here. 

Tho  north  entrance  of  the  Chraco  Mola  River  is  in  latitude  9°  1'  36"  N.,  and  longitude 
81°  64'  18"  W.     Variation  of  the  compass  7°  10"  E. 

Ikmarkson  the  Coast  of  Nicaragua,  by  Sir  William  S.  Wiseman,  when  Commander  of 
H.  M.  S.  Sophie,  in  May  and  June,  1820. 

[The  courses  and  bearings  are  magnetic] 

In  his  Majesty's  sloop  Sophie,  we  made  the  coast  of  Nicaragua,  about  30  miles  to  the 
I  eastward  of  the  River  San  Juan,  and  close  to  the  River  Tortuga.     Near  tho  latter  is  tlie 


'  Capt.  J.  G.  Graham  notices  only  three. 


PUP" 


nlv 
lib 


484  BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

mogt  remnrknble  Innri  on  thn  conRt.     It  is  n  hich  hummock,  dhnpncl  at  thn  wp§t  end  lb 
a  ^uii  quoin,  and  ciille<l  tlie  Turtle  Bo^uo.      The  knd  to  the  uHMtward,  im  fur  na  I  c  n 
diMtiugu'iHh,  was  very  low,  und  pt<rtecliy  level.     To  the  wetitwiird  it  was  thn  Hiiiim  furnb,' 
lU  mile!),  whore  tliere  are  three  iiillocks  riain^  inland  near  the  River  Colnradu.    Kr"" 
this  to  Point  San  .luan,  it  la  unitbrnily  level,  very  low,  and  covered  with  Uficn.    ul" 
founded  in  50  fathoms,  on  blue  mud  and  small  shells,  at  about  10  or  11  milox  olT  sIk 
The  wind  variable  from  N.  to  N.  E.,  a  current  running  to  the  S.  W.  about  onp  injl,, ' 
hour.     Oir  this  part  of  the  coast,  particularly  after  rain,  the  water  will  bo  enudi  iJiscdi,,,'!! 
fur  a  considerable  distance  from  the  land  ;  and  if  the  wind  blown  on  shore,  you  will  „i, 
observe  a  ripple  that  has  the  appearance  of  broken  water,  which  is  occnHJonod  i,,  i^ 
outsets  from  the  many  rivers  on  the  coast ;  but  llio  Houndinf;H  are  very  regular,  tlmie  |„,i  ' 
9  and  10  fiitliums  from  3  to  4  miles  olT  shore.     Nevertheless,  at  uight  it  would  niii'\\ 
prudent  to  go  into  less  than  7  fathoms,  as  the  currents  are  constantly  varying,  but  |,||„,|"' 
set  on  shore.     The  anchorage  is  good  all  along  this  part  of  the  coast,  generally  hlug  IX 
und  clay. 

Point  San  Juan  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.,  distant  about  5  miles,  has  the  appenriitice  uf  th 
North  Foreland.  The  land,  though  low,  is  thickly  covered  with  very  hi);li  troos,  whJtS 
gives  it  a  blufl'and  bold  appearance;  but  it  should  not  be  approached  within  a  inili<, »,[ 
observed  the  breakers  extending  half  a  mile  or  more  from  the  point,  in  a  iiorthi>rly  dircc 
tion.  Standing  towards  Point  San  Juan  from  the  eastward,  many  remarkably  hi;>|| trees 
are  seen;  one  in  particular,  stripped  of  its  branches,  has  the  appoarunce  of  a vesnel's 
mast,  and  may  bo  seen  at  a  considerable  distance. 

From  Point  San  Juan  the  land  takes  a  south-westerly  direction  to  the  mouth  of  the 
river,  and  as  near  as  I  could  judge,  about  8  or  10  miles.  You  may  run  aluiii;  In  ^url 
fatlmms.  about  2  miles  oflT  sliore,  till  abreast  of  a  low  sandy  point  on  the  lurbniird  hand 
at  the  entrance  of  the  river,  when  you  may  haul  round  at  about  a  cable's  length  fruniit 
in  5  and  4i  fathoms.  On  the  starboard  hand,  just  within  the  river,  at  about  three  ciiUes' 
length  from  the  point,  there  is  a  bank  with  only  4  or  5  feet  on  it,  which  you  miiy  njnini, 
distinguish  from  tho  ship.  We  anchored  in  the  Sophie  about  a  cable's  longlli  withiuilii 
river,  in  4i  fathoms  water,  on  blue  mud. 
Directiimt,  S(c.  Direclionsfor  the  Port  of  San  Juan  de  Nicaragua. — Bring  the  low  Point  Arenns  about 
S.  W.  by  S.,  and  steer  S.  VV.,  till  the  gable  endsof  the  shepherds'  two  wliite  housps touch 
bearing  S.  K.  by  S.  Steer  for  thenj  S.  E.  by  S.,  till  clump  of  trees  A  is  midwav  be- 
tween Mundovillo  and  Alligator  Points,  E.  N.  E.  4  E. ;  then  haul  to  the  eiistwur  |,  und 
anchor  in  4i  fath'  is,  nmd.  with  Point  Arenas  N.  W.  by  N.  During  tlie  nortli(Ms,hanl 
up  rather  sooner,  and  anchor  otT  i'oint  Mandeville,  in  5  fathoms.  In  going  out,  beware 
of  the  current,  which  sets  on  tho  spit. 

From  Chagret  to  Cape  Catoche. 

[Continued  from  the  Dern)tero.] 

The  description  which  we  have  given  of  the  coast  thus  far,  wo  have  prrsumed  tndl 
by  thiit  name,  because  we  can  safely  say  that  tho  data  from  wbicii  we  Imvn  coinpiiej  it, 
is  essentially  good,  and  therefore  contains  no  error  but  of  a  very  trivial  nnture:  but 
hence  proceeding  onward,  we  cannot  speak  with  equal  certainty,  and  therefore  hate 
tbouKht  it  necessary  to  apprize  the  navigator  with  the  distrust  with  which  we  proceed. 
And  althoufjh  tho  general  course  of  tho  coast  may  bo  considered  as  modoriitel}'  cxiict, 
yet  we  are  in  want  of  the  details  that  are  indispensably  necessary  for  coasting  iilmii'  the 
shore.  Therefore,  until  correct  charts  come  to  liand,  we  shall  content  ourselves  wiih 
giving  such  information  ns  appears  to  us  to  approximate  nearest  to  the  truth,  and  which 
may  be  sufficient  to  enable  mariners  to  make  those  points  of  the  coast  that  are  most  fre- 
quented. 
The  Coast  THE  COAST   BETWEEN    PORTO   BELLO  AND  VALENCIA  POINT- 

between  Pirrlo  From  the  last  low  point  without  a  name,  of  tho  surveys  of  Brigadier  John  J.  F.  Kidnljo, 
Bello  and  Va-  the  coast  trends  about  S.  70°  W.,  a  distance  of  53  miles,  to  the  River  Bclen,  from  wluiice 
Uncia  Pmnl.  it  bends  N.  55°  W.,  8  leagues,  to  Point  Escudo ;  and  thence  it  runs  west  aiinther  fijlit 
leagues,  to  Valencia  Point.  All  this  coast  is  generally  low,  excepting  some  pints  which 
rise  a  little  :  and  the  water  is  deep,  so  that  at  the  distance  of  3  or  4  miles  uir,  there  are 
from  '20  to  40  fathoms,  the  bottom  being  chiefly  mud  and  sand.  Soveial  livors  disini- 
bouge  upon  it,  two  of  which,  besides  Chagres.  namely,  that  of  Indies  and  tli;it  of  Coclet. 
are  navigable,  and  have  communication  with  tho  interior.  The  River  Coclet  is  4'J  iiiiW 
to  the  westward  of  Chagres;  and  between  them  are  4  remarkable  mountains,  twoof 
them  inland,  and  the  other  two  on  the  coast ;  and  as  they  may  serve  for  recognizing  the 
land  by,  we  give  a  description  of  them. 

1.  The  Caladeros  Altos  of  Chagres,  are  two  mountains  situated  on  the  River  Chagre.', 
and  some  distance  inland.     They  lie  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.,*  and  appear  separate 


*  We  prMume  this  should  be  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 


'BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


48« 


from 


each  other,  ai  you  como  from  Porto  Bollo. 


l^arS.  Km  »"J  '''"*  Hpiiarenlly  united,  they  have  tho  siuiie  bH/iriiii;  f'"""  the  Ctmtle  of 
«iin  luMiw.  at  Chiigros;  tlnM-efore,  IhoHo  tjoiiiiil  to  ChiiKros,  from  am,  li 


They  gcein  only  na  one  when  they 
ho  Cimtle  of 

„      ,        ^  have  only  to 

dfiiig  tln'ne  two  mountiiing  In  one,  iind  stoer  S.  K.  for  the  port. 

..,  The  Pilon  of  P4iguel  de  In  Uordii  m  n  mImhIo  nioniiiuiri,  ho  mimed  from  itH  reaem- 
blaiicfl  to  im"K"'"-'""f'  which  \b  goon  inlimd,  iit  nbout  i)  Iwikihih  to  tiio  S.  W.  Uy  S.  from 
L'lm){re».  VVhen  thia  mountain  bears  S.  by  W.,  it  will  be  in  ii  lino  with  tho  llivor  Indiog, 
wbicli  in  5  leagufs  to  the  westward  of  Clinnres. 

3.  Tlie  Sii'rru  of  Miguel  do  la  Horda  ig  of  modcirate  elevation,  and  riaes  upon  the 
„ii,o  const.     It  extends  north  and  aouth,  and  ig  13  leaguea  to  tho  westward  of  Porto 

4,  The  Sierra  of  Coclot,  which  is  somewhot  lower  than  the  former,  lies  to  the  S.  S. 
\V,  of  tiio  River  Coclet. 

flte  Cordillera  of  Veragua  and  Serrania  of  Sulamancn, — BeHides  the  mountains  above 
Jejcribed,  there  are  others  about  7  lengues  ini.ind.  very  well  known,  and  celebrated  for 
Ibeir  great  elevation,  named  the  Cordillera  de  Veragna.  wlich  commence  nearly  to  the 
joutliofthe  River  Coclet,  and  unite  with  tho  Serrania  of  fMilamanca,  nearly  on  the  mo- 
riJiiin  of  Bocas  de  Toro,  which  ends  a  little  to  the  wewtwardof  the  meridian  of  tho  River 
Miitiim,  Both  are  bo  elevated  as  to  bo  soon  30  leagues  out  to  sen,  in  clear  woiither.  At 
the  eii»t  end  of  the  mountains  of  Verogna,  there  is  a  jjnp  resembling  a  riding  saddle,  and 
ijciilleil  the  Silln,  or  Saddle  of  Veragua,  and  which  lies  south  from  the  River  Coclet. 
Tliereforo,  to  find  that  river  from  sea,  you  have  only  to  bring  the  Silla  to  bear  duo  south, 
anJ  steer  in  for  the  shore.  To  the  westward  of  the  Silla  there  is  a  mount  on  the  high- 
er t()|)  of  the  same  Cordillera,  of  the  fiiiure  of  a  house  or  castle,  and  is  cnlled  the  Castle  of 
Cb'ico,  from  which  the  island  named  Kscudo  do  Veraguas.  (Shield  of  Voragua.)  boars 
y,,-i  W.  Therefore,  when  tho  mount  bears  S.  3H°  K.,  the  island  will  be  found  by 
steeling  it)  that  direction.*  Upon  the  west  end  of  the  same  mountain,  may  be  seen  a 
ruinarkiible  peak,  called  Pan  de  Suerre,  so  called  from  the  village  at  its  base.  This  may 
serve  us  a  mark  for  finding  Matinn. 

The  Isliuid  of  Kscudo  is  low,  covered  with  cocoa  and  other  trees,  and  surrounded  oo 
the  cast  and  north  parts  with  various  keys  of  a  chalky  clay,  also  covered  with  trees. 
From  tlie  east  side  a  reef  extends  otf  about  half  a  league,  on  which  the  sea  gonornlly 
breaks.  All  the  island  and  its  keys  are  surrounded  by  a  bank  of  sand  and  gravel,  which 
exundtuut  alwut  5  miles,  on  which,  and  very  near  to  tho  land,  there  are  44  fathoms, 
and  tlie  depth  gradually  increases  outward.  The  island  is  situated  about  three  leagues 
from  the  main  land,  and  in  case  of  emergency,  water  may  bo  procured  from  its  various 
rivul  ',  but  not  without  considerable  trouble,  from  the  scantiness  of  the  streams,  and 
'ointhiir  distance  above  the  beach.  On  the  S.  and  S.  W.  sides  of  this  island  there  is 
t(,u.ii  ci  orage,  sheltered  fr'iin  the  norths  ond  the  breexes.  There  is  also  anchorage  on 
the  blink  to  the  eastward,  but  this  is  not  so  commodious  as  the  other,  not  only  because 
it  is  not  sheltered  from  the  breeze,  but  also  because  the  bottom  is  rocky,  and  may  chafe  the 
cables. 

Fiuin  Point  Valencia,  already  noticed,  and  which,  according  to  tho  pilot  Piitino,  is 
siluiiteii  iu  9°  13'  of  north  latitude,  tho  coast  forms  a  great  bay.  shut  in  by  various  keys 
and  islets,  which  extend  from  that  point.  W.  N.  W..  a  distance  of  It  leagues,  to  Punta 
Gorda  de  Tirbi.  This  great  bay  is  separated  into  two  parts,  by  several  interior  keys. 
The  eastern  part  is  culled  the  Lagoon  of  (^hiriqui,  and  the  western  part  Almirante  Bay. 
They  lire  connected  by  various  arms  and  criioks,  of  little  de])th  of  water.  The  Lagoon 
of  Chii'iqui  may  bo  entered  through  the  channel  which  is  formed  by  Point  Valencia  and 
the  eiisterainost  keys  of  the  group;  and,  according  to  our  iiiformiitioii,  althoug'i  siinllow, 
there  is  depth  of  water  sulTicient,  both  in  the  channel  ond  within  the  Lagoon,  for  vessels 
of  idl  burthens.  Almirante  Bay  must  be  entered  exclusively  by  the  channel  which  is 
formed  by  Puiita  Gorda  de  Tirbi  and  the  westernmost  key.  In  this  mouth,  and  within 
the  bay,  there  is.  from  the  same  authority,  depth  of  water  sufllicient  for  all  classes  of  ves- 
sels. This  chunnel  is  called  the  Dragon's  Mouth,  Boca  del  Diogon,  to  distinguish  it 
from luiotlier  more  to  tho  eastward,  called  Boco  del  Toro,  by  which  only  small  vessels 
CM  enter.  Within  both  bays  the  anchorage  is  as  well  sheltered  and  secure  as  the  best 
iwrbors;  but  as  we  possess  no  information  respecting  them,  we  shall  say  no  more  than 
that  to  enter  in  or  go  out  by  the  Dragon's  Mouth  you  should  give  a  good  berth  to  the 
western  coast,  or  that  of  Punta  Gorda  de  Tirbi,  on  account  of  u  rocky  reef  that  runs  out 
from  it  to  mid-channel. f 


■  By  anothor  chnrt,  the  bfiaring  ia  N.  2°  W.,  anil  S.  2"  E.,  but'ns  wo  havfl  not  tho  means  of  ascertiiin- 
I  ing winch,  or  if  either,  incorrect,  wo  adviae  the  imvisutor  to  use  it  with  caution. 
t  See,  however,  another  account  of  this  luguoa,  and  some  uthor  places  given  hereafter. 


I   flj  I  III 


i!tiWJli(^l 


(j.iiiiiiii  invupiniuii. 


»  ".  -^^rs^grm^m 


■"•IP 


486 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Coastbe- 
tween  Punta 
Oorda  and 
San  Juan  de 
Nicaragua. 


San  Juan  de 
Nicaragua. 


Coastbefween 
Arenas  Point 
and  the  Pi- 
gton  Keys. 


Bluefield's  or 

Blewjield'a 

Lagoon. 


The  pilot  Patino  places  the  northernmost  key  off  Point  Valencia,  called  Zapadilla  i 
latitude  9^  15'  30"  N.,  and  the  northernmost  of  those  of  the  Island  BaEtiraentoa'  t 

go  29'.  ' 

COAST  BETWEEN  PUNTA  GORDA  AND  SAN  JUAN  DE  NICARAGUA 
— From  Pum?  Gordade  Tirbi,  the  coast  trends  about  N.  56°  W.,  a  distHiice  of  14  i„j|  ' 
to  Point  Carreta,  which  is  the  eastern  point  of  a  bay  that  falls  into  the  S.  W.,  \f.^  jJ 
N.  W.  a  distance  of  13  iiiiies,  to  Blanca,  or  White  Point,  which  has  an  islet  near  it 
Thence  the  coast  trends  N.  3°  W.,  26  miles,  to  the  Point  of  Arenas,  which  forms  the 
Harbor  of  San  Juan.  All  this  coast  is  clean,  and  the  water  deep,  and  several  rivers  dis- 
embogue in  it,  of  which  the  principal  is  that  of  Martina,  or  Port  Cartayo,  or  CHnnvo  and 
that  of  Sun  Juan.  The  last  discharges  its  water  by  several  mouths,  one  of  which  enters 
the  very  harbor. 

SAN  JUAN  DE  NICARAGUA.— This  Harbor  of  San  Juan,  or  St.  John,  is  formed 
by  a  low  island,  which,  with  the  coast,  encloses  an  extensive  bay.  On  the  east  part  the 
island  is  nearly  joined  to  the  main  land,  and  tt  e  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  on  the  nngt 
The  west  point  of  the  island  is  called  Arenas  Point,  which  is  situated  in  10*^  56'  N.  jat 
The  bay  is  very  spacious,  but  is  incommoded  with  a  large  bank,  with  a  little  water  od  it 
which  limits  the  extoLt  cf  ihe  anchorage  to  5  cables'  length  from  north  to  south,  and  to  % 
from  east  to  west. 

To  take  the  ,  .ono.nge,  you  have  only  to  cooBt  Point  Arenas  at  the  distance  of  a  half 
one,  or  one  and  a  huli  cable's  length,  according  to  the  ship's  draft  of  water,  and  proceed 
inward  towards  the  east,  so  as  to  taire  the  round  of  the  point,  with  an  understnndinsthat 
at  a  cable's  length  from  the  south  ccast  of  the  island,  which  is  where  you  ought  to  anchor 
there  are  4^  fathoms  water.  The  lead  is  the  best,  in  fact  the  only,  guide  into  the  harbor 
Vessels  in  it  are  securely  sheltered,  there  being  no  sea  to  occasion  inconvenience,  except 
when  the  wind  is  in  the  N.  W.  quarter,  which  is  common  on  this  coast,  from  September 
to  the  end  of  January  or  beginning  of  February. 

The  mouth  of  the  River  St.  Juan  is  exactly  on  the  meridian  of,  or  true  south  frnni 
Point  Arenas,  hv-L  by  it  there  is  a  communication  with  the  Lake  of  NicHrn(;[u<i.  A  little 
to  the  east  of  Point  Arenas,  upon  the  island,  are  some  pits,  or  wells,  where  fresh  water 
may  be  obtained ;  it  may  also  be  pr6cured  in  the  river. 

From  the  Harbor  of  San  Juan  de  Nicaragua,  the  coast  trends  to  the  north,  n  little  east- 
erly, a  distance  of  80  leagues,  to  Cape  Gracias  a  Dios,  (Thanks  to  God,)  and  what  is  pro- 
Jerly  called  Mosquito  Shore.  It  \b  all  low  land,  for  the  high  lands  terniinnte  at  St. 
uan's;  and  in  this  extent  there  are  numerous  rivers  and  Ingoons.  A  bank  of  soundings 
ex»^erds  all  along  it,  being  about  8  miles  from  the  shore,  at  Point  Arenas,  and  running  off 
in  a  north-easterly  direction,  into  latitude  16"  33'  N.,  and  longitude  SI**  W. 

Upon  this  bank  there  are  a  number  of  keys  and  reefs,  and  those  of  Cnp?  Gracias  a 
Dios  are  very  dangerous.  Of  them  we  possess  no  '.vritten  description,  but  we  may  re- 
mark that  this  coast  has  been  recently  surveyed  by  order  of  the  British  Admirnlty,  bv 
Capt.  R.  Owen  and  Lieut,  Barnett,  and  that  the  results  are  published  on  the  General 
Chart  of  the  West  Indies,  1847.  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt. 

COAST  BETWEEN  ARENAS  POINT  AND  THE  PIGKON  KKYS.-Nonh 
of  Point  Arenas,  40  miles  distant,  is  Point  Gordii ;  the  coast  betwep.u  forms  an  extensive 
bay,  called  the  Gulf  of  Matina.  About  Point  Gorda.  and  near  it.  are  se  iil  islets,  whiih, 
with  the  coast,  are  clean  ;  and  the  soundings  are  so  regular,  that  no  othe.  guide  is  neces- 
sary than  the  use  of  the  lead. 

From  Point  Gorda  tha  coast  trends  to  N.  about  3  leagfces  to  Point  Monos,  S  E.  of 
which  there  ara  several  keys  very  clean  ;  and  between  them  and  the  coast  tliere  is  an 
anchorage  in  3  fathoms  water  :  this  anchorage  ought  to  be  entered  from  the  southward 
of  the  islets.  To  the  N.  N.  E.  of  these  islets  there  are  others,  which  rise  upon  the  bunk 
and  reef,  called  the  Pigeons,  extending  about  12  miles  from  north  to  south.  To  the  east- 
ware'  of  all  these,  and  without  the  bank,  lies  a  key,  which,  with  the  Pigeons,  forms  11  ciian- 
nel ;  but  it  is  best  to  avoid  if,  by  sailing  on  the  outside,  as  the  Pigeon's  Keef  will  thereby 
be  entirelv  cleared,  although  it  extends  about  3  miles  north  from  the  islands. 

BLUE'FIELD'S  or  BLE\yFIELD'S  LAGOON— Abreast  of  the  Pigeon  Kw, 
on  the  coRjt,  is  the  southern  point  of  Bluefield's  Lagoon,  which  is  a  buy  exteiiiliiigiiibiiid 
to  ths  westward,  about  10  miles,  and  receiving  in  its  northern  part  a  considcrflhle  river, 
called  Rio  Rscondido.  From  tne  southern  point  of  the  bay,  or  lagoon,  to  tin'  northern 
one.  called  Bluefield's  Point,  the  distance  is  13  miles,  N.  N.  E. ;  the  lathude  of  thispuint 
is  11°  56.  20"  N.,  it  being  the  moan  of  several  observations.  Nearly  on  the  line,  be- 
tween the  two  points,  is  a  key  1 1  miles  in  length,  which  forms,  with  the  points,  twiuhan- 
oels  ;  of  these  ^)ie  northern  is  the  principal  one,  and  has,  in  the  season  of  the  breezes, 
about  2  fathoms  water;  but  at  that  season  it  is  dangerous,  because  there  ia  a  full  (iilfada) 
of  3  feet.  In  the  time  of  the  vendavales,  or  rainy  season,  there  are  2^  fathoms,  without 
any  full,  or  alfada, 

Having  parsed  the  bar,  or  cliannel,  there  are  within  the  hay  5  and  6  futhoms  water, 
upon  cluy  ;  the  anchonige  is  near  the  town,  on  the  N.  E.  side.     To  enter  the  lugoonyoa 


MPBVaMHUM 


487 


Pearl  La- 
goon. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

hive  <>°'y  ^'^  ^^^^  °'°°^  ^^  Bluefield'a  Point,  at  the  distance  of  a  stone's  throw,  for  it  is 
,efy  ciean;  and  the  point  may  be  linownfrom  iu  being  the  highest  land  on  this  part  of 
lie  coast.  When  within,  continue  on  near  the  north  shore,  for  the  south  is  very  foul, 
ind requires  the  utmost  caution;  it  will  be  indispensably  necessary  in  going  up  to  have 
jnchorc  and  cables  all  clear,  to  let  go  at  an  instant  when  the  current,  which  is  moderately 
jtrongi  may  render  such  an  expedient  necessary. 

PEARL  LAGOON.— From  Bluefield's  Point  the  coast  trends  north,  inclining  a  lit- 
tle to  the  we3t,  for  the  distance  of  IS  miles,  to  the  entrance  of  the  Pearl  Lagoon.  Off 
this  part  of  the  coast  is  a  Isey,  called  the  Cayman,  lying  at  the  distance  of  7  miles  from 
Bluefield's  Point,  and  somewhat  more  tiian  half  a  league  from  the  shore.  A  reef  extends 
from  the  north  part  of  this  key  to  the  distance  of  4  miles ;  but  as  every  vessel  ought  to 
pujs  10  the  eastward  of  it,  there  can  be  no  danger  if  the  lead  be  kept  going.  The  entrance 
of  Pearl  Lagoon  has  deeper  water  than  that  of  Bluefield's  -..there  is  also  anchorage  on 
the  outside  of  it,  under  shelter  of  the  north  coast,  which  rounds  to  die  N.  E.,  a  distance  of 
U  miles,  to  Point  Lore. 

To  the  eastward  of  the  Pearl  Lagoon,  and  well  out  from  the  coast,  lies  the  Pit  Key, 
wiiich  is  7  leagues  from  it;  the  Lobo  Marino,  or  Sea  Wolf  Key,*  which  lies  12  miles  N. 
E.  by  E.  from  Pit  Key ;  and  lastly,  the  Islas  de  Mangle,  or  Corn  Island,  which  lie  about 
12  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  latter. 

The  Pit  and  Sea  Wolf  Keys  are  somewhat  foul,  and  should  not  be  approached  nearer 
than  half  a  mile  :  they  are  dangerous  to  navigation,  because  having  14  fathoms  about  them, 
and  no  bank  near  them  with  less  depth,  the  soundings  will  give  no  indication  of  their 
proximity  in  the  night,  or  in  thick  weather.  The  channels  which  they  form  with  the 
Corn  Islands  and  the  coast  are  clean  and  free. 

IThe  co'.'Tses  and  bearioga  are  magnetic]  '' 

ISLAND  OF  ST.  ANDREW.— On  the  Ist  day  of  September,  1818,  his  Majesty's  Island  of  St. 
sloop  Beaver  anchored  in  a  fine  bay  or  cove  on  the  west  coast  of  this  island ;  of  which  the  Andrew. 
following  information  was  obtained  while  lying  ^here.  The  bay  is  spacious  and  clean, 
sheltered  from  N.  by  E.  round  by  E.  to  S.  by  E.;  and  it  appeared  that  a  S.  W.  wind 
would  not  send  in  much  sea.  The  bottom  is  rocky  without  the  depth  of  7  fathoms ;  so 
that  you  must  run  in  until  you  get  upon  the  white  bottom,  which  consists  of  white  sand, 
and  bounds  the  bay,  stretching  off  a  long  mile,  having  good  anchorage  on  every  part  of  it. 
The  Beaver  laid  with  a  small  inlet  lying  nearly  east,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile  off 
shore ;  the  north  point  of  the  bay  bearing  N.  by  W.,  and  the  south  point  S.  by  W.  i  W., 
in  6?  fathoms. 

No  other  directions  are  necessary  for  entering  this  bay,  than  to  steer  directly  in,  and 
anchor  whore  convenient.  To  find  the  situation  of  the  bay  from  the  offing,  look  out  for 
the  highest  part  of  the  island,  near  the  south  endj  on  which  are  two  cocoanut  trees,  very 
conspicuous  by  their  overtopping  the  other  trees,  and  by  being  the  only  cocoanut  trees 
that  show  themselves  on  the  high  land  :  bring  them  to  bear  N.  E.,  or  N.  E.  by  N.,  and 
you  will  find  the  bay  by  steering  in  that  direction. 

It  is  flat  to  the  distance  of  2  cables'  length  from  the  north  point,  with  no  more  than 
2  and  3  fathoms,  deepening  suddenly  to  8  fathoms;  but  this  lying  sii  near  the  shore,  is 
out  of  the  way  of  sailing  in  from  tiie  southward.  But  if  from  the  northward,  running 
alongshore,  with  a  scant  N.  K.  wind,  it  will  be  necessary  to  givi  it  a  berth,  going  no 
nearer  to  the  shore  than  8  fathoms ;  and  keeping  the  south  side  of  the  point  a  little  open 
of  the  larboard  bow,  bearing  nearly  south  ;  and  when  the  two  cocoanut  trees  come  over 
a  remarkable  withered  tree  which  stands  near  a  sondy  place  on  the  point,  bearing  about 
N.  E.,  you  will  have  passed  the  point  of  the  lint,  and  may  haul  in  S.  E.  for  the  anchorage. 
We  sounded  the  north  shore,  and  found  5  fathoms  close  to  it ;  so  far  as  we  sounded  the 
bay  was  all  bold  and  cli  ar. 

There  is  an  inlet  in  the  N.  E.  corner  of  the  cove,  which  would  answer  for  a  careening 
place  for  small  vessels  ;  it  is  also  a  snug  harbor  for  boats.  At  the  entrance  it  is  27  fath- 
oms wide,  and  has  4i  fathoms  water ;  but  this  depth  does  not  continue  more  than  a 
cable's  length,  when  it  shoals  to  3,  and  then  suddenly  to  G  feet.  Two  bi-igs  and  a  frigate 
might  be  moored  in  the  entrance,  in  which  situation  they  would  appear  as  in  a  wet  dock, 
having  hawsers  made  fast  on  shore  from  their  bows  and  quarters ;  but  a  vessel  must  be 
warped  in  stern  foremost,  having  a  bower  anclior  a  c.ible's  liingth  to  the  westward,  as  a 
security  against  the  winds  from  that  quarter,  which  blow  right  in.  The  north  part  of 
the  cove  is  also  a  good  place  to  moor  ships,  having  a  bower  anchor  towards  the  sea; 
they  might  be  moored  with  their  sterns  to  the  shore,  by  the  stream  cable,  or  a  good 
hawser. 


*  According  to  varioui*  mndflm  clinrtii,  thoRR  two  koya  appear  to  be  of  doiibtrul  existence }  but  we 
do  not  venture  to  alter  these  directions  until  wo  have  bettor  accounts  and  data  to  convince  ua  ofu. 


489 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 


Currents. 


TheS.S.W. 
Key$. 


The  E.  S.  E. 
Key$. 


Little  Com 
Itland. 


Tide. 


Oreat  Com 
Island. 


The  island  in  general  presents  a  level  fertile  appearance :  it  is  of  moderate  heisb 
and  may  be  seen  18  or  20  miles  off:  when  seen  from  the  easiward,  itmakeBintwohu 
mocks,  of  which  the  north  one  is  the  highest.  As  we  sailed  along  the  engt  coast  » 
observed  it  to  bo  bounded  by  a  reef,  which  appeared  to  extend  off  4  or  5  miles ;  tliesoufK 
point  of  this  reef,  with  the  shore  inside  of  it,  forms  what  is  called  the  Eustern  Hnibn 
the  entrance  of  which  is  from  the  southward.  The  north  end  is  very  duugerous,  hav J' 
a  low  key  with  a  reef  off  it,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  as  far  as  can  be  seen  fioni  the  detlf 
probably  7  miles ;  it  joins  with  the  eastern  reef,  and  they  together  eucompuss  nil  the  nonli 
end  and  two-thirds  of  the  east  side  of  the  island,  ending  a  mile  or  so  south  uf  the  eniranc 
to  the  Eastern  Harbor. 

The  south  end  is  bold,  as  is  the  west  side ;  you  may  anchor  in  a  bight  near  the  shorn 
to  the  northward  of  the  cove,  near  some  chalky  cliffs :  we  got  soundings  of  9  fniliom 
in  it.  but  the  ground  wcs  coarse.  There  are  no  soundings  until  you  come  very  iiearih' 
shore.  ° 

From  the  hills  you  can  see  the  E,  S.  E.  Keys,  which  lie  7  leagues  from  St.  Andrew's- 
the  S.  S.  W.  Keys  10,  and  Old  Providence  18  leagues.  ' 

The  currents  about  these  islands  are  very  irregular,  setting  occasionally  in  eveiy  dij j. 
tion,  but  generally  to  the  northward  and  southward.  In  going  there,  we  experienced « 
strong  easterly  current;  ih  returning,  a  southerly  one:  and  a  vessel  had  arrived  Irom  the 
Indian  coast  a  short  lime  before,  having  had  calms  nearly  all  the  passage,  and  was  brought 
along  by  a  strong  N.  E.  current. 

THE  S.  S.  W.  KEYS  are  the  southernmost  and  westernmost  of  the  keys  arouni] 
St.  Andrew's  Island,  being  S.  by  W.,  20  miles,  from  the  south  point  of  St.  Andrew'. 
Island.  These  are  three  islets,  which  afford  good  anchoring  ground,  and  i<o  clean  that 
there  is  nothing  to  be  guarded  against,  except  what  is  in  sight ;  for  althoiigh  there  are 
a  few  rocks  round  them,  they  are  too  near  to  be  of  any  interruption. 

THE  E.S.  E.  JvKYS.— About  E.  i  S.  from  St.  Andrew's  Island,  at  the  distanceof 
5  leagues  from  the  south  end  of  it,  there  are  three  keys,  called  the  E.  S.  E.  Keys.  Thev 
are  surrounded  by  a  reef  and  a  bunk  of  7  miles  in  extent,  which  is  very  diingerous,  auj 
although  there  is  aiichonige  for  small  vessels  on  it,  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  -jilot. 

LITTLE  CORN  ISLAND  lies  about  20  leagues  W.  S.  W.  4  W.  fioni  St.  An- 
drews,  and  has  a  reef  round  the  east  side  of  it,  about  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Theisl- 
and  appears  to  be  all  savanna,  bordered  round  the  bench  with  trees:  all  nruiiiid  the  east 
side  there  are  a  great  number  of  cocoanut  trees.  There  is  good  anchornge  in  a  bayoD 
the  S.  W.  side  of  the  island,  where  vou  may  lie  sheltered  from  north  winds;  from  the 
north  and  south  points  of  the  bay  there  are  reefs  run  oft'  to  the  distance  of  2  cables' 
length,  but  there  is  good  room  to  work  in,  and  regular  soundings.  You  niiiy  anchor  in  3 
or  4  fathoms,  sandy  ground,  at  about  a  mile  from  the  shore.  In  nppruachiiig  this  bay 
from  the  northward,  it  is  necessary  to  give  the  north  point  of  the  island  a  berlli  ot  auiile 
in  order  to  clear  the  reef.  The  tide  rises  and  fulls  about  3  feet,  and  there  wiis  a  cunept 
off  the  bay  setting  to  the  southward,  but  not  very  strong.  Latitude  of  the  buy  by  obser- 
vation is  12°  17'  N.  Variation  of  the  compass.  7°  20'  E.  At  the  Porcupine's  anchor- 
age, the  south  point  of  the  i)ay  bore  E.  S    E.,  and  the  north  point  N.  W.  I)y  W. 

GREAT  CORN  ISLAND.— This  island  lies  S.  S.  W.,  10  or  11  miles  from  Little 
Corn  Island  :  it  has  a  reef  off  the  N.  E.  end  of  it,  that  runs  along  the  oust  side,  about  a 
mile  and  a  half  from  the  shore.  The  N.  W.  part  of  the  island  is  pretty  bold  ;  in  the  N. 
V,'.  bay,  called  the  Brigaiitine  Bay,  there  is  good  anchorage  with  the  sea  breeze,  butno 
shelter  from  norths.  'Ihere  is  another,  called  the  S.  W.  Bay,  where  we  Hiicliored  in3 
fathoms.  Oft'  the  point  between  the  two  bays  lies  a  very  dangerous  ledge  of  rocb, 
stretching  from  the  point  to  sea,  nenrly  east  and  west,  about  2  or  2i  nnits,  and  having 
from  10  to  13  feet  water  on  it :  it  does  not  appear  to  be  more  than  2  cable's  leiij^th  mm 
in  any  part,  and  on  the  outer  end  there  is  a  spot  with  only  9  feet  on  it,  where  the  sea 
broke  when  it  blew  strong.  Over  this  ledge  we  were  carried  by  the  uiiskiifuliiess  ot'lbe 
pilot,  and  beat  our  rudder  olV,  close  by  the  point,  where  I  think  wo  hud  the  best  water; 
this  ledge  breaks  oft'  the  sea  from  the  bay,  when  the  wind  is  to  the  wehtwiird  ul'  iiortli. 
In  going  down  the  west  side  of  the  island  for  the  hay,  it  is  necessary  to  {;ive  these  locks 
a  good  berth,  and  not  haul  in  for  tiie  bay,  till  the  S.  W.  point  of  the  isliiiid  bears  about 
E.  S.  E. ;  but,  by  keeping  a  lookout  from  the  mast  head,  you  may  see  tlie  rocks  anil 
round  them,  taking  caie  to  go  no  nearer  to  them  than  G  fiithoms  :  you  may  then  workup 
into  the  bay,  the  soundings  being  regular  from  6  to  2.i  fathoms,  on  fine  siimly  bottom, 
You  may  sail  along  on  the  outside  of  the  reef  to  the  eastward  of  the  island,  iiiid  go  round 
the  S.  E.  point,  which  is  pretty  bold  ;  then  haul  into  the  buy,  and  fetch  faitlier  to  wind- 
ward than  by  going  to  the  westward  round  the  ledge.  The  Porcupine  lay  in  3  fulhom> 
water,  about  half  a  mile  oft'  shore,  with  the  north  point  of  the  bay  bearing  N.  by  W„ 
and  the  JS.  W.  point  S.  E.  4  .S.  We  always  found  a  great  swell  in  the  bay,  settingfiora 
point  to  point,  whichever  way  the  wind  blew  ;  but  it  had  been  constantly  blowing  strong 
without.  The  patch  of  !i  feet  on  the  outer  end  of  the  ledge,  where  the  sea  broke,  bore 
W.  by  N.  fruui  the  anchorage.     The  latitude  observed  at  the  auchurago  is  12^  13' Nm 


^TP^eSPro'^ 


ilillll 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  489 

,nd  the  longitude  83°  3'  W.  We  observed  a  regular  rise  and  fall  of  the  water  by  the 
Jhore;  but  the  current  off  the  bay  ran  moderately  to  the  southward. 

This  island  is  very  conveniently  situated  for  those  bound  to  the  Harbor  of  Bluefielda, 
ffhicb  boms  from  it  W.  by  S.,  distant  14  leagues,  and  which  it  is  very  dangerous  attempt- 
j„»  in  blowing  weather,  with  the  wind  on  shore,  as  there  are  only  12  or  13  feet  water 
on  the  bar ;  but  here,  as  was  our  case,  they  may  stay  iu  safety  till  the  weather  settles, 
that  they  can  ^•''^  '"• 

THE  ISLANDS  OF    SANTA  CATALINA    AND   PROVIDENCE,  separated    The  Islands 
only  by  a  narrow  channel,  may  be  considered  as  one  island.     They  are  situated  about  15    of  ISanla 
leagues  N.  23'='  E.  from  St.  Andrew's.     Cntalina  is  scarcely  any  thing  more  than  a  rock,   Catalinaand 
extremely  craggy,  and  mostly  covered  with  stones.     The  highest  parts  of  it  are  exces-    Providence. 
jively  irrettular,  so  that  it  is  of  no  value,  and  is  therefore  uninhabi^-id.     Providence  ia 
about  4  miles  in  length  from  north  to  south,  and  2  from  east  lowest.   From  the  level  of 
the  sea,  nt  the  most  salient  points,  it  br3;in8  to  rise  with  a  very  gentle  aclivity,  towards 
the  centre,  where,  resembling  an  amphitheatre,  it  forms  four  hills,  crowned  by  a  high 
mountnin.    From  the  summit,  or  cusp  of  the  easternmost  hill,  four  streams  descend 
from  the  same  source,  and  run  down  to  the  shore  in  different  directions,  subdividing  in 
their  course  into  smaller  rivulets  of  most  excellent  water.    The  most  abundant  of  these 
gtreams  in  the  dry  season,  is  that  which  runs  down  on  the  west  side,  into  what  is  called 
Freshwiiler  Buy,  Ensenada  de  Agua  Dulce.    In  clear  weather  the  island  may  be  seen  ^ 

fiom  10  to  12  leagues  off.  It  is,  as  well  as  Cntalina,  surounded  by  a  reef,  that  will  not 
admit  of  coming  within  a  league  of  it,  and  on  the  north  side,  not  nearer  than  4  miles.  It 
is  iahabiied  by  three  or  four  families,  who  cultivate  some  portions  of  it.  Vessels  not 
drawing  more  than  10  or  11  feet,  may  get  in  between  the  reefs,  but  it  is  necessary  to 
have  a  pilot  for  the  purpose. 

MUSKflTKERS.— This  shoal,  of  which  we  have  no  written  description,  is  dangerous.    Musketeers. 
and  has  im  extent  of  8  milea,  in  a  north-westerly  direction.    The  centre  lies  in  13°  33' 
N.  Int..  and  80°  3'  W.  long. 

QUITA  SUENO. — This  is  an  extensive  bank,  of  35  miles  in  length  from  north  to   Quita  Sueno. 
south,  and  13  miles  in  width  from  east  to  west,  having  on  it  from  7  to  20  fathom*  water, 
excepting  on  the  eastern  edge,  which  is  dangerous,  being  a  range  of  shoals  and  reefs,  for 
an  extent  of  23  miles,  ranging  nearly  north  and  south. 

South  point  of  the  bank  is  in 14°  2' N.  lat.,  81°  15' W.  long. 

North  point 14  37        "        81       7         " 

South  point  of  the  shoal  ground 14  7       "       81       7        " 

North    do.  do.  do 14  30       '•       81       7        " 

SARRANA.— East,  52  miles  from  the  eastern  edge  of  Quita  Sueno,  is  the  Snrrana   Sarrana. 
Bank.    It  is  of  a  triangular  shape,  longest  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  being  20  miles  long;  on 
which  point  there  is  a  key.    The  N.  E.  and  S.  sides  are  bounded  by  reefs. 

North  point 14°  28' N.  lat,  80°  17' W.  long. 

East  point 14     24        "        80       8         " 

S.W.  point 14     16       "       80    23        " 

SERRANILLA. — This  is  a  bank  of  25  miles  in  extent  from  east  to  west,  and  20  miles    Serranilla. 
from  north  to  south,  of  different  depths,  from  3  to  30  fathoms.     The  S.  E.  side  is  a  range 
of  lieys  and  breakers ;  the  western  side  is  clean  and  clear,  with  the  exception  of  one  small 
spot,  culled  the  Western  Breaker. 

The  N.  E.  Breaker,  which  may  be  called 

the  N.  E.  point  of  the  bank,  lies  in 15°  47'  N.  lat.,  79°  42'  W.  long. 

The  west  point  of  the  bank,  in 15     45       "        80      7        " 

THE  NEW  SHOAL  is  a  bank  extending  about  13  miles  from  N.  E.  to  S.  W.,  and  7  The  New 
from  east  to  west.  All  the  eastern  part  is  a  reef,  very  steep  to ;  but  on  the  west  side  the  Shoal. 
depth  diminishes  gradually.  On  the  bank,  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  its  northern  ex- 
triiraity,  there  is  a  sandy  key,  situated  in  latitude  15°  52'  20"  N.,  and  longitude  78°  33' 
W.  Tliree  or  four  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  this  key,  you  niny  anchor;  but  take  care  not 
to  get  into  less  than  9  fathoms  water,  because  at  24  miles  W.  N.  VV.  from  it,  a  rock  has 
been  found,  with  only  7  feet  water  on  it ;  and  S.  by  E.  from  it,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile, 
there  is  another,  with  no  more  than  4  feet  water  on  it.  Both  of  them  stand  in  5  fathoms. 
They  are  very  steep,  and  not  larger  than  a  boat. 

THE  BAXO  DEL  COMBO Y  does  not  exist;  for  particular  search  has  been  made    The  Baxo 
for  it,  but  It  could  not  be  found.  del   Comboy. 

The  above  have  all  been  surveyed  by  Capt  R.  Owen  and  Lieut.  Barnett,  and  are 
published  iu  the  General  Chart  of  the  West  Indies,  by  E.  and  G.  W.  Blunt,  1847. 


"WJ«^(>Ifl' 


490 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Great  River.       GREAT  RIVER. — From  Point  Loro,  already  mentioned,  the  coast  trends 

north,  a  distance  of  27  miles,  to  the  Rio  Grande,  or  Great  River.    This  part  of  thecoagl 
is  very  foul,  with  a  reef  which  stretches  off  from  it  about  6  miles.     On  the  southern  ed» 
of  the  reef,  and  east  from  Point  Loro,  there  are  two  keys,  the  easternmost  of  whi^jj 
called  Marron.    To  the  north,  a  little  westerly  from  this  key,  and  at  the  distnnceofo 
miles,  there  is  another,  which  is  outside  the  reef.     Without  these  two  keys  there  ar 
others,  of  which  the  southernmost  are  called  the  Pearl  Keys.     To  these  follow  tiire 
others,  called  the  King's  Keys,  which  lie  east  from  the  mouth  of  the  Great  Rlvnr  at 
the  distance  of  about  13  miles.     Finally,  to  these  follow  the  Mosquito,  Man-of-war,  and 
Sea  Wolf  Keys,  the  last  being  to  the  eastward  of  the  Man-of-wnr  Keys.     The  northern- 
most of  the  Man-of-war  Keys  lies  about  20  miles  distant  from  the  Great  River.    Between 
all  these  keys  there  are  good  channels,  with  from  54  to  9  fathoms  water,  on  clean  mud' 
but  to  take  them  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  pilot,  and  if  you  have  not  one,  you  ought  to  go 
outside  the  whole  of  them.     To  enter  the  anchorage  of  Great  River,  you  should  pass 
between  the  Man-of-war  Keys  and  the  coast;  in  which  channel,  until  you  arrive  at  Great 
River,  there  is  nothing  to  fear  or  attend  to  but  the  lead. 
Prince  Amil-       PRINCE  AMILCA  RIVER.— To  the  N.  by  W.  from  Great  River,  at  the  distance 
ea  Rioer.        of  11  miles,  there  is  another  river,  called  Prince  Amiica,"  from  which,  in  the  same  di- 
rection, and  at  the  distance  of  9  miles,  is  the  Black  Rock  River.     From  this  the  coast 
trends  north,  a  little  easterly,  for  11  miles,  to  the  River  Tongula;  in  front  of  the  mouth 
of  which,  about  5  miles  to  the  eastward,  there  are  some  rocky  shoals,  which  are  the  only 
dangers  along  the  coast,  between  this  river  and  Great  River. 
The  Coast  to        THE  COAST  TO  BRACM  A  POINT.— From  the  River  Tongula  the  coast  trends 
Bracma  about  N.  by  W.,  for  the  distance  of  17  miles,  to  the  River  Warva ;  whence  it  continues 

Point.  to  the  north  for  9  miles,  to  Bracma  River ;  and  thence  it  rounds  to  the  N.  E.,  a  distance 

of  8  miles,  to  Bracma  Point.     This  last  part  of  the  coast,  called  the  Barrancas,  or  Branj- 
man's  Bluff,  forms  a  bay  sheltered  from  the  norths,  and  westerly  winds,  and  in  it  you 
i,  may  anchor,  in  any  depth  that  suits  you,  understanding  that  at  two  miles  aom  the  land 

there  are  4  fathoms,  upon  coarse  gray  sand  and  small  shells.     Great  care  should  betaken 
in  landing  on  this  beach,  as  there  is  a  bank  before  it,  on  which,  with  ever  so  little  wind 
from  the  east,  the  sea  breaks  with  great  force. 
The  Coast  to       THE  COAST  TO  GRACIAS  A  DIOS.— From    Bracma   Point  the  const  trends 
Gracias  a       about  N.  N.  W.,  a  distance  of  6  miles,  to  the  River  Tupapi,  or  Housetana,  whic.i  is 
Dios.  known  by  a  town  situated  about  three-quarters  of  a  league  from  the  beach,  and  djjcerni. 

ble  at  a  gooil  offing,  as  the  ground  is  level  and  bare.  From  Tupapi  the  shore  runs  about 
N.  N.  E.,  a  distance  of  20  miles,  to  the  Governor's  Point,  which  is  known  by  being  more 
salient  eastward  than  any  other  on  this  coast,  and  thickly  covered  with  trees.  From  this 
point  the  coast  trends  to  the  N.  N.  W.,  a  distance  of  12  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  Arenas, 
or  Sandy  Bay,  in  which  there  is  so  little  water,  that,  in  the  time  of  the  breezes,  liiuuches 
pass  with  difficulty ;  but  within,  there  is  a  deep  and  spacious  bay. 

From  Sandy  Bay  the  coast  trends  to  the  north  10  miles,  to  the  River  Guanason,  and 
thence  to  the  Bay  of  Gracias  a  Dios,  it  is  13  miles  in  the  same  direction. 
The  Bay  of        THE  BAY  OF  GRACIAS  A  DIOS  is  formed  by  a  tongue  of  land  extending  to 
Gracias  a        the  eastward  more  than  4  miles,  and  which  aftbrds  a  good  roadstead,  with  winds  from 
Dios.  S.  S.  W.,  round  by  W.  and  N.,  to  S.  S.  E.     The  easternmost  and  southernmost  point 

of  this  tongue  of  land  is  that  which  is  called  Cape  Gracias  a  Dios;  and  from  it  to  the 
south  there  are  several  keys,  of  which  the  last  or  southerimiost  is  called  San  Pio;  nod 
the  south  point  of  it,  called  Arenas  Point,  is  also  the  east  point  of  the  bay.     The  depth 
of  water  in  the  bay  is  from  20  feet,  which  is  found  at  the  entrance,  to  15,  which  is  found 
well  within  it;  and  in  all  parts  of  it  the  bottom  is  soft,  slimy  clay. 
Instructions         INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    TAKING    THK    ANCHORAGE   OF   GRACIAS  A 
for  taking  the    DIOS. — To  anchor  in  this  bay^  if  approaching  it  from  the  north  and  west,  you  liaveonlr 
anchorage  of    to  pass  the  sandy  point  of  Key  San  Pis,  and  then  run  into  the  bay,  and  anchor  in  the 
Gracias  a        number  of  feet  suitable  to  the  vessel's  draugi:t  of  water,  for  all  of  which  you  have  onlyto 
Dios.  attend  to  the  load.     The  only  thing  which  den.ands  a  little  care,  is  not  to  mistiii»u  f'orthe 

Key  San  Pio,  that  which  comes  before  it,  callea  Troncoso  ;  for  having  a  strait  of  ii  mile 
in  breadth  between  them,  and  the  Key  San  Pio  being  very  low,  any  one  coming  from  sea 
may  be  deceived,  and  take  the  strait  between  the  keys  for  the  entrance  ;  but  this  mistake 
may  be  avoided,  if  you  bear  in  mind  that  Key  Troncoso  is  very  siniill,  and  on  the  eontm- 
ry,  that  Key  San  Pio  is  a  mile  in  extent  from  N.  E.  to  .S.  W. ;  and  farther,  in  tliis  strait, 
tliere  is  ho  little  water,  that  scarcely  a  canoe  can  pass,  which  is  the  cause  of  tlie  sen  gen- 
erally breaking  in  it.  To  those  coming  from  the  southward,  iu  order  to  enter  this  buy, 
we  have  nothing  farther  to  recommend. 


*  'I'hnro  in  a  great  variety  in  the  charts  in  the  names  of  (hi»  and  other  rivers  on  tiie  coast,  uJ 
also  of  the  keys. 


'TT'?''"''WPWJ!«w«pi»f" 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  491 

Such  is  the  description  of  this  bay,  given  in  1788,  by  Don  Gonzalo  Vallejo,  who  an- 
chored in  it  in  the  corvette  San  Pio,  under  his  command ;  but  we  ought  also  to  add  what 
T)ju  Josef  del  Rio  reports  of  it,  after  visiting  it  in  1793.  "I  ought  to  make  known  that 
the  anchorage  in  the  Bay  of  Cape  Gracias  a  Dios  is  becoming  lost ;  for  the  cut  of  coni- 
munination  made  by  the  English  from  the  Great  River  Segovia,  acroBS  the  tongue  of  land 
that  forms  the  bay,  for  the  purpose  of  conveying  into  it  the  timber  which  they  bring 
down  that  river,  has  increased  so  much  in  width  that,  from  a  narrow  canal,  it  has  be- 
come a  branch  of  the  river,  and  brings  with  it  so  much  soil,  and  so  many  trunks  of  trees, 
which  has  diminished  the  depth  of  the  bay  so  much,  that  since  the  year  1787,  there  are 
three  feet  less  water  in  the  vicinity  of  Key  San  Pio ;  and  it  is  very  probable,  that  within 
J  few  years,  the  depth  will  be  filled  up,  and  vessels  will  be  obiged  to  remain  on  the  out- 
side, deprived  of  the  shelter  they  at  present  have,  and  which  is  of  so  great  an  advantage 
to  those  who  navigate  on  this  coast  during  the  season  of  the  norths." 

All  the  coast  from  the  River  Tongula  is  clean,  without  any  other  keys  or  reefs  on  the 
bank  than  those  already  described ;  and  those  which  are  between  the  parallels  of  Gover- 
nor's Point  and  Cape  Gracias  a  Dios,  which  are  named  the  Mosquitos  and  Thomas'  Keys. 
These  keys,  with  their  reefs,  form,  with  the  coast,  a  channel  four  leagues  in  breadth 
where  narrowest;  and  although  between  them  there  are  passes  with  the  depth  of  6  fath- 
oni8  or  more  water,  yet  it  is  not  advisable  to  attempt  them,  but  always  run  to  the  west- 
ward, between  them  and  the  coast ;  for  there  can  be  no  risk  in  this  channel,  as  the  lead 
will  give  timely  warning,  either  in  sailing  with  the  wind  large,  or  working  to  windward ; 
for  Bt  half  a  league  from  the  coast  there  are  4i  fathoms,  and  9  in  the  vicinity  of  the  keys ; 
therefore,  by  not  getting  into  less  than  4i  when  standing  westward,  or  into  more  than  8  ' 

fathoms  to  the  eastward,  there  will  not  be  the  least  risk  or  cause  of  anxiety. 

From  the  Bay  of  Gracias  a  Dios,  you  may  steer  S.  S.  E.,  which  course  will  take  you 
in  sight  of  the  westernmost  key  of  this  group,  which  is  a  dark  brown  rock,  that  may  be 
teen  at  the  distance  of  5  or  6  miles.  On  this  route  you  will  have  from  7  to  8i  fathoms, 
and  the  course  must  be  kept  without  going  any  thing  to  the  eastward  of  it,  until  you  are 
west  clear  of  the  southernmost  keys  ;  the  surest  indication  for  which,  will  be  your  getting 
the  depth  of  11  fathoms,  and  thence  you  may  shape  a  course  for  your  voyage. 

FROM  CAPE  GRACIAS  A  DIOS  WESTWARD.— From  Cape  Gracias  a  Dios 
the  const  runs  about  N.  W.  for  the  distance  often  leagues,  to  Cape  False,  which  may 
be  known  from  being  the  highest  land  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  From  the  False  Cape 
g  bank,  with  very  little  water  on  it,  projects  out  to  the  N.  E.  to  the  distance  of  G  miles  : 
but  the  coast  bank  preserves  its  regular  soundings,  and  it  even  seems  as  if  they  extended 
tothe  Snrranilla;  but  however  that  may  be,  it  is  so  little  known,  that  9  fathoms  is  the 
greatest  depth  that  you  ought  to  navigate  in,  because  there  are  various  shoals,  of  which 
the  positions  are  vei-y  doubtful ;  and,  therefore,  to  navigate  with  safety,  you  ought  not  to 
get  into  deeper  water  than  9  fathoms,  nor  into  a  less  depth  than  54  fathoms ;  and  this 
rule  will  hold  good,  either  in  steering  a  direct  course,  or  working  to  windward ;  for  you 
will  thus  be  sure  of  navigating  in  a  clean  channel  of  20  miles  breadth. 

From  False  Cape  the  coast  trends  about  W.  N.  W.  for  a  distance  of  about  35  miles, 
tothe  Lagoon  of  Cartage  or  Caratnsca,  which  is  easily  known  by  its  wide  mouth.  All 
this  const,  like  the  preceding,  is  clean,  with  regular  soundings  along  it;  and,  to  navigate 
on  it,  the  lead  is  a  sufhcient  guide,  so  that  you  may  not  get  into  less  than  54  fathoms  when 
standing  towards  the  shore,  or  into  more  than  9  when  standing  off ;  by  doing  which  you 
will  evade  falling  on  the  Vivorilla,*  &c.,  as  they  lie  about  8  leagues  off  the  coast  north- 
ward. 

From  Cartage  Lagoon  the  coast  trends  about  W.  N.  W.  for  a  distance  of  about  20 
leagues,  to  Brewer's  Lagoon  ;  and  thence,  almost  on  the  same  bearing,  a  distance  of  84 
leagues,  tothe  Rio  Tinto,  or  Black  River. 

BLACK  RIVER,  AND  METHOD  OF  ANCHORING  OFF  IT.— Black  River   Blade  River, 
is  distinguished  by  the  mountains  of  La  Cruz,  which  are  very  lofty,  and  are  the  first  to   and  MetJiod 
be  seen  on  all  the  coast,  after  passing  Nicaragua.     These  mountains  are  a  little  to  the    of  Anchoring 
eastward  of  the  river's  mouth;  on  the  same  river  there  is  a  peak,  named  the  Sugar  loaf, 
because  it  is  of  that  shape.     To  anchor  off  this  river,  bring  the  mouth  of  it  to  bear  south, 
and  Cnpe  Cameron  west,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  11  fathoms  ;  because  in  less 
depth  there  are  many  lost  anchors,  left  by  ships  obliged   precipitately  to  make  sail  when 
the  norths  have  set  in. 

This  anchorage  is  an  open  roadstead,  where,  even  with  the  winds  of  the  breeze,  it  is 
necessary  to  ride  with  two  thirds  of  a  cable  out :  and  so  soon  as  the  wind  falls,  to  heave 
in  to  nciuiy  a-peak,  in  order  to  avoid  fouling  the  anchor.  When  lying  in  this  anchorage 
during  the  season  of  the  gales,  which,  as  we  have  said,  is  from  October  to  February,  the 
utmost  attention  must  bo  paid  to  the  state  of  the  weather  :  and  when  you  see  the  wind 


From  Cnpe 
Gracias  a 
Dios  West- 
ward' 


of  it- 


'  There  are  many  charts  in  which  this  and  other  rocks  do  not  appear ;  but  we  do  not  think  proper  to 
I  titer  these  directions  until  we  have  a  more  correct  account  of  the  sUuation  of  all  of  them. 


''BliPWIiPPPIWIIlipiilP' 


mt^m- 


M,immmw!m»^\, 


492  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

gets  to  the  south-eaBt,  aDd  then  veers  to  south  nod   suuth-west,  you  ought  immedintelv 
to  weigh  the  anchor,  and  make  sail  off  shore,  well  clour  of  the  land,  for  a  gate  will  sure! 
succeed.     Cloudiness,  or  a  foul  appearance  on  the  N.  W.  quarter  duiing  these  nionthn 
is  HD  almost  infallible  sign  of  an  approaching  gale  :  a  swell  from  the  north  is  an  indication 
equally  certain,  that  precedes  the  gale  at  a  moderate  interval.     In  any  of  these  eiijes  th 
loss  of  a  ship  remaining  at  anchor  is  inevitable  ;  frequently  the  wind  will  not  give  ilme  i 
weigh  the  anchor ;  in  which  case  the  cai)le  must  be  slipped,  with  a  buoy  upon  it,  or  even 
cut,  that  you  may  immediately  make  sail,  and  get  clear  from  the  land,  in  order  to  encoun. 
ter  the  gale  under  sail.     These  gales  are  very  violent,  and  raise  a  heavy  sea,  and  there" 
fore,  if  a  ship  is  very  much  distressed,  she  has  the  resource  of  running  to  the  Kay  of 
Gracias  a  Dies  for  shelter,  and  riding  out  the  gale  at  anchor;  and  it  has  been  already  ob- 
served, that  the  lead  is  a  guide  which  there  will  carry  you  clear  of  all  danger.     As  these 
gales  occur  more  frequently  from  the  N.  W.  and  W.,  than  from  the  north,  the  result  is 
that  ordinarily,  the  anchorages  of  Gracias  a  Dies  may  be  considered  as  a  port  to  leewiird' 
to  which  you  can  bear  away  ;  in  which  resource  there  will  be   found  the  adi'antiiDe  of 
being  to  windward  of  the  Black  River,  when  ihe  hard  weather  ceases  ;  because  then  the 
breeze  blows  from  the  east,  and  therefore,  in  a  short  time,  and  almost  without  trouhiu,  you 
can  return  to  your  former  anchorage. 
Black  River       BLACK   RIVER    BAR. — The  Bar  of  Black  River  is  extremely  dangerous,  and 
Bar.  boats  run  great  risk  of  being  upset  on  it,  and  the  crews  on  board  ufthem  of  perishinj 

from  the  very  heavy  sea  there  is  generally  upon  it.  Therefore,  either  lo  enter  or  come 
out  of  it,  it  is  necessary  that  it  should  be  done  in  the  calm  of  the  morning,  before  the  sea 
breeze  sets  in,  and  after  the  land  breeze  has  blown  the  preceding  night.  If  the  breeze 
has  been  tolerably  fresh,  neither  going  in  nor  coming  out  can  be  eflected  ;  sothntcoiti. 
munication  from  tlie  shore  is  far  from  frequent,  and  is  always  very  troublesome  and  dan- 
gerous. 
Coaslto  COAST    TO  CAPE    CAMERON    AND    PUNTA    CASTILLA.— From  Black 

Cape  Came-  River  the  coast  trends  west,  with  some  inclination  to  the  north,  for  a  distance  of  9  miles 
Ton  SfPunta  to  Cape  Cameron,  which  is  formed  by  a  low  tongue  of  land  projecting  into  the  sea.— 
Caslilla.  From  this  Cape  Ihe  coast  trends  U'.  3°  S.,  a  distance  of  20  leagues,  to  Punta  Castilln,  or 

Capo  Honduras  :  it  is  all  clean,  and  also  deeper  than  the  anterior  coast,  so  that  it  should 
not  be  approached  into  less  than  7i  fathoms  water. 

Puiita  Castilla  is  low  ;  and  a  small  sand  bank,  with  very  little  water  on  it,  extends  from 
it  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  westward.  Castilla  is  the  north  point  of  the  Bay  of  Trux- 
illo;  which  at  the  entrance  is  about  7  miles  wide.  This  bay  is  easily  entered,  ns  there 
is  nothing  to  be  guarded  against  except  the  little  bank  off  Point  Castilla.  On  the  south 
coast  of  the  bay  (here  is  a  high  mountain,  called  Guaimoreto,  which  may  be  seen  at  the 
distance  of  24  leagues.  In  making  the  bay  frotn  the  ofTing,  this  mountain  is  a  good  mark 
for  running  in  by;  for,  by  bringing  it  to  bear  about  S.  E..  or  S.  E.  by  S.,  it  will  loud 
clear  of  Point  Castilla,  and  up  to  the  anchorage  off  ihe  mouth  of  the  River  Crisiales, 
which  falls  into  the  south  side  of  the  bay.  This  anchorage  seems  preferable,  not  only 
because  its  contiguity  to  the  river  affords  the  opportunity  of  procuring  water  conven- 
iently, but  also,  because  from  this  spot  Point  Castilla  may  be  easily  cleared,  in  case  of 
being  obliged  to  get  under  way  by  a  gale  from  W.  S.  W.,  west,  or  W.  N.  W. ;  whence 
it  blows  most  frequently  from  October  or  November  until  February.  With  such  win  Is, 
a  simple  inspection  of  the  plan  of  the  bay  will  show  that  there  must  be  a  heavy  sea  in  it; 
and  this  was  experienced  in  the  shiji  Maria,  in  December  and  January,  1800,  which 
having  rode  out  one  or  two  of  these  gales  at  anchor,  was  afterwards  under  the  necessity 
of  quitting  and  taking  shelter  in  Port  Koyal,  in  the  Island  of  Rattan,  as  her  ciiptaincon- 
sidiM'ed  the  anchorage  of  Truxillo  too  hazardous  (o  remain  at  during  the  season  of  the 
norths,  which  was  the  season  ho  was  in  it. 

To  enter  in  or  sail  out  of  this  bay,  no  particular  instructions  are  necessary,  as  there  is 
plenty  of  room  for  working,  without  the  smallest  risk,  observing  only  not  to  iipproach 
Blariquillu  or  St.  Lucas  Key,  nearer  than  half  a  mile  :  this  key  is  off  the  south  coiut, 
about  two  miles  outside  the  buy,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  bank,  with  little  water  on  it,  tlie 
best  guide  towards  which  is  the  lead.  Take  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  5j  fnlluimsin 
its  vicinity,  and  you  will  avoid  every  danger.  Blanquilla  lies  about  a  mile  from  tlm  coast, 
and  you  may  run  through  the  channel  between,  without  any  other  guide  than  the  lead, 
It  was  heretofore  believed  that  this  bay  was  well  sheltered,  and  a  good  place  of  refuge 
during  the  storms  of  winter;  but  this  is  not  the  fact,  and  any  vessel  stationed  on  the  coast 
at  that  season,  ought  to  prefer  Fort  Royal,  in  Rattan,  to  it. 
Ouanaja,  GUANAJA,  of  BONACCA.— North  from    Point  Castilla,  at  the  distance  nf  eight 

or  Bonacca.  leagues,  is  the  Ishmd  of  (iuanaja,  about  three  leagues  in  length,  N.  E.  and  .S.  W.  It  is 
entirely  surrounded  by  keys  and  reefs,  which  extend  a  league  off  from  it.  On  the  oast 
side  of  the  island  there  is  a  very  good  anchorage,  particularly  during  the  north  winds; 
but  it  will  be  necessary  to  pass  between  the  keys  and  reef's  to  enter  it.  The  best  passage 
is  to  the  southward,  leaving  the  southernmost  key  on  the  larboard,  and  another  key, 
lying  N.  by  E.,  half  a  mile  frotn  it,  on  the  starboard.     Endeavor  to  pass  iu  mid-chaDnei, 


'BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


493 


jnd  flteo'"  towar'^s  another  key  that  lies  two-thirds  of  a  mile  west  from  the  northernmost 
of  those  you  have  passed.  It  will  bBar  from  you  about  N.  71°  W.  Vou  ought  aiwiiys 
(0  nafls  between  the  two  last  mentioned  keys,  and  tiien  nothing  remains  but  to  const  along 
,),e  isiiind  to  the  N.  E.,  and  anchor  at  any  convenient  place,  after  getting  under  shelter 
jf  tliolaiid;  observing  to  keep  about  the  middle  of  the  channel,  between  the  island  and 
Hie  keys,  i"  7,  8,  and  9  fathoms  water,  on  muddy  sand.  It  miiy  be  necessary  sometimes 
to  run  for  this  anchorage  in  blowing  weather  from  N.,  N.  W.,  or  \V.,  wh'ich  will  not 
permit  of  entering  it  on  one  stretch.  In  such  a  case,  however,  it  may  be  observed  that 
vou  iiiiiy  work  between  the  three  keys  before  mentioned,  on  the  supposition  that  it  will 
be  sufficient  to  give  them  a  berth  of  a  cable's  length.  The  plan  of  the  harbor  will  clearly 
eliicidiitt'  what  has  been  said  of  it. 

RATTAN.— Westward  of  Guanaja  is  the  Island  Rattan,  about  10  leagues  in  length,  Rattan. 
from  E.  N.  E.  to  W.  .S.  W.  A  reef  runs  off  eastward  from  the  east  point,  to  the  dis- 
i^jceof  12  miles,  on  which  there  are  several  keys  and  islands;  of  these,  the  eastern- 
most is  culled  Biirburet.  The  distance  from  Barburotto  Guaniijn,  is  about  10  miles  ;  but 
the  chiuinel  is  reduced  to  5  miles  only,  by  the  reefs  which  extend  from  both  islands  :  with- 
out groat  experience,  the  passage  through  it  will  be  attended  with  great  danger.  All  the 
North  Coast  of  Rattan  is  bordered  by  reefs,  that  prevent  its  being  safely  approached 
nearer  thnn  a  league ;  and  those  not  well  acquainted  with  the  const,  should  keep  at  a 
Btill  greater  distance.  On  the  South  Coast  there  are  several  good  roadsteads,  but  most 
of  them  are  difficult  of  access  from  the  foul  reefs  at  the  entrances.  Of  all  these  harbors, 
tliat  called  Port  Royal,  on  the  eastern  part  of  the  island,  is  the  principal;  and  of  which 
mention  was  made  when  describing  the  Bay  of  Truxillo,  as  being  well  adapted  for  afford- 
ing shelter  during  the  season  of  the  norths.  It  is  formed  by  the  coasts  of  the  island  on 
the  north  and  west,  and  by  some  reefs  and  keys  on  the  south  and  east :  the  entrance  to 
it  is  by  a  narrow  channel,  scarcely  half  a  cable's  length  wide,  between  the  reefs;  but 
fortunately,  this  narrowness  is  not  more  than  a  cable  and  a  half's  length.  The  east  side 
of  this  channel  is  formed  by  a  reef  extending  from  the  west  side  of  the  island  called  Lein, 
which  is  easily  distinguishable  from  its  size,  and  cannot  bo  mistaken  for  the  other  keys, 
which  are  very  small.  In  attempting  to  enter  this  harbor  without  a  pilot,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  marA;  <Ae  entrance  by  boats  or  otherwise;  and  it  ought  always  to  be  done  with 
the  wind  from  N.  E.,  easterly,  or  from  west,  southerly,  in  order  to  get  clear  within  the 
reef:  we  refer  to  the  Plan  of  the  Harbor,  but  it  must  be  mentioned,  we  cannot  guarantee 
the  correctness  of  it.  In  approaching  the  island  from  the  southward,  great  cau'Jon  is  re- 
quired, to  avoid  a  rocky  shoal  nearly  opposite  the  western  extremity  of  it,  at  the  distance 
of  more  than  4  miles  from  the  coast:  the  channel  between  it  and  the  coast  is  also  olwtructed 
by  several  other  shoals ;  and  although  there  is  a  passage  for  large  ships,  yet  without  an  ex- 
perienced pilot,  they  should  always  pass  on  the  outside  of  it. 

FROM  TRUXILLO,  WESTWARD — From  the  River  Cristales,  in  the  Bay  of 
Truxillo,  the  coast  trends  about  S.  75°  W.,  a  distance  of  32  leagues,  to  Triunfo  de  la  Cruz, 
or  Triumph  of  the  Cross.  This  coast  is  dangerous,  on  account  of  several  reefs,  and  shoals 
which  extend  from  the  south  side  of  Utila;  for  which  reason,  if  there  is  no  cause  for 
keeping  near  the  shore,  or  you  have  not  the  requisite  experience  for  making  the  passage 
without  risk,  we  strongly  recommend  a  course  always  to  the  northward  of  both  the  Co- 
chinos  and  the  Island  tJtila. 

THE  COCHINOS  are  two  rather  large  islands,  clean  on  the  north  side,  but  with  va- 
rious fuul  keys  and  reefs  on  the  south :  between  these  islands  and  the  keys  there  is  a  re- 
guinr  anchorage,  respecting  which  the  only  information  we  possess  ia  a  plan,  that,  on  ex- 
amination, will  present  all  the  instructions  requisite. 

UTILA  ISLAND  lies  about  N.  75**  W.  from  the  Cochinos,  at  the  distance  of  23  Utila  Island 
miles:  the  north,  south,  and  west  coasts  of  it  &ro  foul,  but  the  East  Coast  has  a  good  an- 
chorHge;  to  enter  which  safely,  much  experience  is  requisite.  To  the  S.  W.  of  this  isl- 
and, lies  a  shoal,  called  the  Salmodina,  of  more  than  5  miles  extent;  on  account  of  which, 
when  going  to  the  northward  of  Utila,  observe  to  approach  it  no  nearer  than  two  leagues, 
DDtil  yuu  are  abreast  of  its  western  points ;  you  may  tiien  run  down  for  the  coast  about 
Punta  Sal:  in  doing  which,  a  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  course  will  counteract  the  effect  of  the 
current,  that  hereabout  sets  N.  W.,  and  might  otherwise  drift  the  ship  into  some  difficulty 
with  Long  Reef. 

THE  TRIUNFO  DE  LA  CRUZ  is  a  point  whence  the  coast  rounds  to  S.  S.  W. 
and  S.,  about  7  miles,  and  then  bends  to  the  N.  W.  for  the  space  of  22  miles  further,  to 
Punta  Sttl,  forming  a  great  bay,  sheltered  from  the  breezes,  and  with  good  anchorage  for 
ships  ofevery  denomination.  To  the  north  of  Cape  Triunfo.  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile, 
there  are  some  islets,  two  of  which  are  tolerably  large,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of 
two  leagues;  they  are  clean,  and  by  passing  at  half  a  mile  from  all  that  is  visible,  you  may 
proceed  direct  to  the  anchorage  in  the  eastern  part  of  the  bay,  a  little  to  the  southward 
of  the  point,  in  5^  to  8  fathoms  water,  on  sand. 

PUNTA  SAL. — The  point  at  which  the  bay  terminates  is  called  Punta  Sal,  or  Salt  Punta  Sal. 
PoiDt:  and  at  about  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  it  lie  some  high  rocks,  called  the 


From  Thrux- 
iUo,  westward 


TheCochinot. 


Triunfo  de  la 
Cruz. 


«■« 


494 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


Bishops,  forming  a  channel  navigable  for  boats  onl^.  The  Point  appears  with  some  hil 
locks  und  brulien  ground,  and  to  the  southward  of  it  there  is  a  little  harbor,  culled  Puerto 
Sul,  but  of  which  we  have  no  details:  however,  otf  the  mouth  of  this  harbor,  and  at  the 
round  of  Punta  de  Sal,  you  may  anchor,  under  shelter  from  the  breezes;  but  it  will  be 
necessary  not  to  come  to  in  more  than  12  fathoms,  because  in  17, 16, 15,  and  14,  ibebot. 
torn  is  rocky :  while,  on  the  contrary,  in  less  than  12,  it  is  clean  clay. 

From  Puerto  Sal  the  coast  lies  about  W.  S.  W.,  a  distance  of  8  miles,  totlie  Rlv^. 
Luu,  which  is  large  and  deep :  in  front  of  this  river  there  is  anchorage  on  excellent  hold- 
ing ground,  of  clay,  but  without  the  least  shelter  from  the  norths. 

About  8  miles,  W.  i  S.,from  the  River  Lua,  is  that  of  Chamalacon,  off  which  there  is 
also  unchornge  on  good  holding  ground,  but  also  unsheltered  from  the  norths. 
PortCaballos,  PORT  CA13ALLOS,  or  CAVALLOS.  lies  about  W.  S.  W.  from  the  River  Cha- 
or  Cavallos.  malacon,  and  at  the  distance  of  4  leagues.  This  harlrar  is  formed  by  a  low  point  of  sand 
to  seaward,  on  the  west  side  of  which  there  is  an  anchorage  in  5^  to  4^  fathoms,  uu  sand 
The  harbor  may  be  known  by  a  high  round  hill,  which  is  situated  close  to  the  sea,  on  the 
eastern  coast,  and  at  about  two  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  the  port.  To  enter  tliispoH 
you  have  only  to  keep  clear  of  what  is  visible. 

From  Porto  Caballos  to  Omoa,  the  distance  is  7  miles,  S.  W.  by  W.  Within  this  space 
there  is  a  small  bunk,  with  little  water  on  it,  lying  north  of  some  red  gullies  or  broken 
ground,  which  are  seen  on  the  coast,  and  at  the  distance  of  about  a  league  and  ahalftVom 
them.  To  keepclear  of  this  bank,  take  care  not  to  get  into  less  than  eight  fathoms,  until 
you  have  passed  the  red  gullies;  you  mny  then  steer  direct  forOuioa. 
Omoa.  OMOA. — The  Harbor  of  Omoa  is  formed  by  a  low  point  of  land,  covered  with  man- 

groves, which  projects  out  to  seu.  Upon  this  point  there  is  a  signal  tower,  or  lookout 
whicli  is  well  seen  from  sea,  and  serves  us  a  mark  to  recognize  the  harbor  by.  It  nm 
also  be  known  by  tlie  high  land  rising  from  Omoa,  and  running  westward,  becausHfrcm 
Omoa  eastward  it  is  all  low.  To  enter  into  Omoa,  we  have  nothing  to  say,  only  tlmt you 
may  ])ass  at  a  cable's  length  from  the  mangrove  point,  which  forms  the  harbor;  and  on 
getting  to  the  westward  of  it,  you  ouglit  to  luif  as  much  as  possible  to  the  south  und  east 
to  futch  the  south  part  of  the  point,  with  the  object  of  trying  wliether  you  car  enter  into 
the  basin,  orculdera,  under  sail;  but,  as  it  will  be  necessary  tc  steer  north  for  this  pur- 
pose, the  best  way  will  be  to  get  as  much  to  the  eastward  as  possible,  until  you  are 
abreast  of  the  mouth  of  thebnsin,  and  anchor  tliere  forwar))ing  in. 

From  the  anchorage  of  Omoa,  in  clear  weather.  Cape  Three  Points  may  be  seen 
bearing  about  W.  by  N.  4  N.  All  the  hind  to  the  westward  of  Omoa  is  very  high,  and 
upon  it  rise  3  or  4  summits,  resembling  sugar-loaves;  but  the  coast  is  very  low,  and 
continues  so  to  the  Gulf  of  Honduras.  F'romOnioato  Capo  Three  Points,  the  distance 
is  about  11  leagues,  the  intermediate  coast  trending  a  little  to  the  southward,  so  that  it 
forms  a  bight,  in  which  there  is  generally  a  confused  sea;  and  therefore,  it  is  ndvisahle 
not  to  go  too  near  to  it,  but  rather  to  steer  W.  N.  W.,  or  N.  W.  by  W.,  to  puss  well  clear 
of  Cape  Three  Points.  After  running  a  short  distance  on  these  courses,  you  will  see  at 
the  N.  W.  the  southernmost  keys,  which  lie  off  the  coast  of  Bacnlar,  and  wliich  are  about 
5  leagues  distant  from  Cape  Three  Points.  In  all  the  cliannel  leading  into  the  Gulf  of 
Honduras,  and  as  far  as  Point  Manubique,  the  greatest  depth  of  water  is  23  fathoms. 
Point  Manubique  is  about  3  leagues  W.  by  N.  from  Cape  Three  Points;  and  west  from 
it,  at  the  distance  of  a  league  and  a  half,  there  is  a  bunk,  with  little  water  over  it,  called 
the  Bue}',  or  Ox,  to  which  a  berth  must  be  given. 
Gulf  of  Hon-  GULF  OF  HONDURAS.— Point  Manubique  and  the  Southernmost  Keys  of  the 
duras.  const  of  Bacniar  form  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Honduras,  within  which,  und  ut  S.,  or 

S.  by  E.  form  Munubique  Point,  is  the  Bay  of  St.  Thomas  de  Castilla,  or  St.  'i'hoiuas, 
of  Castile;  und  S.  W.  by  S.,  or  S.  W.  from  the  sumo  point,  lies  the  mouth  of  Rio  Dulce, 
All  this  gulf  is  shoal,  but  with  depth  sufficient  for  sliips  of  every  class;  but  in  nuvigating 
in  it,  you  ought  to  keep  the  lead  going,  and  have  the  anchors  ready  to  let  go,  if  necessary, 
or  if  you  wish  to  anchor.  The  mouth  of  the  River  Dulce  may  be  known  by  a  little  insu- 
lated hill  which  is  somewhat  to  the  westward  of  it.  The  anchorage  is  N.  N.  E.  from 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  in  any  convenient  depth  of  water,  and  the  anchors  must  lie  N. 
W.  and  S.  E. 

From  tlie  River  Dulce  the  const  rounds  to  the  N.  and  E.,  to  Point  Tapet,  which  is 
about  18  miles  N.  W.  from  Manabique;  and  thence  north-easterly  to  Cape  Cutoche, 
which,  with  Cupe  Sun  Antonio,  in  the  Island  of  Cuba,  forms  the  south  channel  into  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico.  On  this  coast  there  is  a  reef  extending  to  the  I'Jth  degree  of  latitude, 
on  which  there  rise  almost  innumerable  keys,  with  various  openings  or  pussnges  through 
them,  by  which  tlie  coast  may  be  approached.  The  southernmost  keys  on  this  reef  are 
the  Zapadilios,  which  are  about  5  leagues  distant  from  the  coast.  Between  this  reel  and 
the  coast  there  is  a  channel,  with  a  good  depth  of  water  in  it,  but  it  is  full  of  dangers;  and 
speaking  generally,  it  may  be  said  that  all  this  pnrt  of  the  coast  is  so  foul,  and  so  little 
known,  that  it  cannot  be  navigated  near  without  great  risk.  There  are  not  only  the  reef 
and  chain  of  keys  already  mentioned,  but  other  foul  reefs  also;  namely,  Long  or  Glorer'i 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Reef,  Fo"'  Keys  Reef,  and  Chinchorro.     Some  of  these  lie  more  than  20  leagues  from 
ijie  cuast,  and  with  it  form  channels  free  and  navigable. 

fhi  Mosquito  Coast,  from  Black  River  to  Point  Bracma,  by  Captain  Oeorge  Counteii, 
when  commanding  H.  M.  sloop  Porcupine,  1786  and  1787. 

[The  courses  and  bearings  are  magnetic] 

Black  River  is  known  by  the  land  over  it,  which  is  the  easternmost  high  lond  on  the 
Mosquito  shore,  and  very  remarliable,  called  Foyer  Hills;  to  the  westword  it  is  nil  high 
jjnj.  Therefore,  if  when  steering  in  for  Black  River,  you  fall  in  with  high  land  to  the 
eastward  of  you,  you  will  bo  certain  of  being  to  the  westward  of  it.  It  is  quite  an  open 
road,  the  shore  lying  nearly  east  and  west:  you  must,  therefore,  lie  at  a  single  anchor, 
aad  be  ready  to  put  to  sea  the  instant  the  north  comes  on,  even  if  you  are  obliged  to  leave 
your  anchor;  as  the  swell  sets  in  so  violently,  there  would  be  little  chance  of  riding  it  out, 
and  in  case  of  parting,  in  all  probability  you  will  be  driven  on  shore. 

The  number  of  anchors  left  here  makes  the  road  very  bad,  as  your  cables  are  liable 
iobe  cut  by  them,  or  in  heaving  up,  to  hook  one;  in  which  case  you  seldom  fail  losing 
your  own,  as  it  is  good  holding  ground;  this  was  the  case  with  us  on  the  27th  of  No- 
vember, 1786.  For  the  above  reason,  it  is  advisable  to  lie  somewhat  to  the  eastward  of 
(he  usual  anchoring  place,  where  you  will  have  clear  ground.  Should  the  wind  come 
to  the  westward  of  north,  you  must  run  to  Cape  Grucias  a  Dies;  but  if  it  should  be  to  the 
eastward,  you  may  go  either  to  Truxillo  or  Bonacca.  The  north  prevails  from  October 
to  February. 

We  aiicliored  in  12  fathoms,  directly  off  the  river,  with  the  Sugar-loaf  of  Foyer  Hills 
bearing  south,  ond  Cape  Cameron  west;  but  with  the  Sugar-loaf  bearing  S.  i  W.,  there 
ij  less  risk  of  getting  foul  of  anchors.  When  the  trees  on  the  low  land  are  seen  from 
the  deck,  you  will  have  80  or  90  fathoms,  from  which  it  shou/s  regularly  to  9  fathoms, 
on  muJdy  bottom.  The  entrance  into  the  river  is  narrow,  and  distinguishable  from  the 
otlier  land  ;  it  has  a  dangerous  bar  across  it,  which  can  very  seldom  be  passed,  except 
in  tlie  morning,  before  the  sea  breeze  sets  in  :  imd  then  only  iu  their  craft :  though  it  is 
eometiuies  smooth  enough  for  a  ship's  boat  to  go  over  in  safety.  H^ing  over  the  bar, 
and  in  the  entrance  of  the  river,  you  must  proceed  up  a  lagoon  on  the  right  hand,  about 
Ij  mile  to  the  town,  or  bunk,  as  they  call  it,  which  is  the  principal  settlement,  and  is 
very  jjleasantly  situated  on  the  left  side  of  the  lagoon,  going  up.  The  town  is  about  a 
mile  long,  and  consists  of  only  one  street ;  at  the  east  end  of  it  there  is  a  buttery  of  12 
guns  en  barbette. 

Good  water  may  be  obtained  a  little  way  up  the  river,  and  plenty  of  wood;  but  both 
must  be  got  off  in  the  country  cruft,  on  account  of  the  bar. 

From  the  Black  River  to  Cape  Gracias  a  Dies,  we  kept  along  shore,  sounding  in  from 
"to  10  fathoms.  Off  Patook  River,  which  lies  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  eastward 
of  Black  River,  we  observed  the  fresh  water,  where  it  joined  the  sen,  form  a  distinct  line 
as  far  as  we  could  see,  being  very  brown  and  muddy,  and  had  the  appearance  of  a  shoal. 
Wlien  in  it,  we  found  the  water  nearly  fresh  ;  at  the  time  of  this  alarming  appearance 
tiiere  was  a  flood  in  the  river. 

Off  the  Caratasca  Lagoon  it  is  shoal  to  some  distance;  we  passed  it  in  6  fathoms, 
keeping  ott'  and  on,  as  we  shoaled  or  deepened  the  water.  On  passing  the  False  Cape, 
be  careful  to  give  it  a  good  berth,  keeping  in  5  fathoms,  as  a  dangerous  shonl  runs  off 
from  it;  then  keep  along  the  shore  iu  5  fathoms  for  the  cape,  which  appears  like  a  bluff 
point,  with  level  low  land  to  the  westward  of  it.  As  you  proceed  to  the  southward,  keep- 
ing in  4i  or  5  fathoms,  you  will  see  near  the  cape  three  small  islands,  with  moderately 
bigli  trees  on  them  ;  but  they  all  join  the  land  by  a  narrow  beach  :  beyond  them  is  a  low 
aaudy  key,  connected  with  the  other  by  n  reef,  and  forming  the  entrance  of  the  harbor, 
it  appears  to  lie  across  the  mouth  of  it.  As  a  spit  runs  from  this  key,  you  must  give  the 
point  a  berth  of  about  2  cables'  length.  There  is  good  anchorage  within  the  spit  point 
in  4  fathoms,  the  said  point  bearing  S.  E.,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  where  the 
Porcupine  anchored,  having  little  wind,  und  there  being  a  great  outset  occasioned  by  a 
fresli  in  the  river.  You  may  bring  the  southernmost  point  of  the  Spit  Key  to  bear  S., 
and  tlie  northernmost  point  S.  E.  by  £.,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  anchor  in  4 
fathoms. 

In  working  up  the  harbor  the  soundings  are  regular,  from  4  to  3  fathoms,  muddy  bot- 
tom. The  town,  which  is  only  a  tow  huts  built  for  the  convenience  of  the  wood-cutters 
squaring  and  shipping  off  their  mahogany,  is  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Haulover,  which 
is  a  cut  they  have  made  from  the  River  Wanks  across  into  the  harbor,  the  river  running 
into  the  sea  by  the  cape.  Through  this  cut,  great  trees  and  logs  have  been  drove,  which 
have  lodged  round  it,  and  formed  a  bar  about  two  cables'  length  off,  over  which  there  is 
barely  water  for  a  boat;  and  it  is  increasing,  so  that  it  is  very  probable  it  will  in  time  spoil 
the  harbor.    Before  this  cut  was  made  there  was  deep  water  close  in,  and  they  brought 


495 


mm 


m^mrmt^ 


496 


Sandy  Bay. 


Trehuppy. 


BrangmaTi's 
Bluff. 


Tide. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

their  wood  through  another  opening  to  the  eaBtward  into  the  hnrbor.  There  being  a  flooj 
in  the  river,  ami  consequently  a  continual  outset,  could  make  no  observations  respecting 
the  tide.     Liilitude  oliserved,  14°  59'  N.  * 

SANDY  BAY  is  the  residonce  of  one  of  the  Mosquito  Chiefs,  nnd  lies  about  9  lengue, 
from  Cape  Qracias  a  Dios,  to  the  southward ;  it  is  low  level  land,  and  only  to  Ixt  tlisd- 
guishod  by  a  gap  among  the  bushes  near  the  bench,  whicli  tlie  Indiana  have  (^ut  tiiruurh 
Lr  nearly  a  inilo,  to  open  a  passage  into  a  spacidiis  lagoon  for  tlieir  craft,  dirocily  ncross 
whidi  is  their  town,  very  near  the  water  side,  in  tiio  midst  of  a  plantain  wailt,  on  which 
and  some  c  issada  roots,  with  turtle  that  they  caich  in  the  season,  is  their  chief  depend^ 
ence  for  support.  The  coast  here  trends  nearly  north  nnd  south  ;  the  Porcupine  Iny  in 
6  fathoms,  about  two  miles  from  the  shore,  witii  the  creek  bearing  S.  S.  \V.  j  W.,  Rtthe 
distance  of  3  miles;  here  we  were  obliged  to  ride  out  a  gale  of  wind,  with  a  linnvysea 
setting  right  on  the  shore.  The  bar,  which  is  off  the  creek,  is  not  above  a  cable's  length 
from  the  shore,  and  has  a  continual  breach  over  it,  without  any  very  heavy  surf;  I  ^^g^. 
over  it  in  one  of  their  craft,  which  the  Indians  are  very  expert  in  managing.  Neither 
wood  nor  water  can  be  procured,  except  iVom  the  Indians,  and  brought  off  in  their  craft 
for  the  ship's  boats  cannot  go  over  (he  bar.     Latitude  observed,  14°  30'.  ' 

II  is  better  to  anchor  farther  southward  off  the  creek,  bringing  it  to  bear  W.  by  S,,  q, 
W.  S.  W.,  for  the  convenience  of  getting  off  from  the  shore.  The  water  rises  imd  falls 
here  a  little,  but  there  is  no  regular  tide. 

TRKBUPl'Y  is  about  7  leagues  to  the  southward  of  Sandy  Bay,  and  is  the  residenoe 
of  the  Indian  Chief  Governor,  who  is  considered  to  be  the  most  powerful  chief  on  the 
Mosquito  Shore.  On  running  down  you  will  see  houses  a  considerable  way  iiiliiiKJ,  which 
is  the  Governor's  Town,  off  which  we  anchored.  The  land  is  not  high,  but  has  theap. 
pearance,  from  the  ship,  of  being  cultivated.  The  Porcupine  lay  in  .5  fathoms,  hBtween 
2  and  3  miles  from  the  shore,  and  3  fi'om  the  bar,  and  found  three  fathoms  very  near  in, 
The  bar  is  at  the  entrance  of  a  small  river,  that  runs  winding  up  to  the  town,  nmi  is  only 
safe  to  be  passed  in  the  country  croft.  It  is  no  bettor  lying  here  than  at  Sandy  Bay,  aj 
it  is  a  straight  shore.  The  bearings  at  the  anchorage  were  Brangman's  Blnlf,  (Point 
Bracma,)  S.  W.  i  W.,  the  river's  mouth  \V.,  and  the  northernmost  land  N.  by  E,  Lati- 
tude observed,  14°  8'  N.     F'ound  a  current  setting  to  the  soutljward. 

Neither  wood  nor  water  to  be  had  hore,ev  n  procured  from  the  Indians,  andhrought 
off  in  their  craft. 

BRANG.MAN'S  BLUPF,  (Point  Braciui)  makes  off  in  a  point  from  where  welay 
off  Trebuppy,  about  the  distance  of  5  miles  and  has  somewhat  of  n  bay  to  the  south- 
ward of  it.  We  ran  in  till  the  bluff  bore  N.N.  E.  i  K.,  and  anchored  in  i\  fathoms, 
about  2  miles  from  the  shore,  with  the  river's  mouth  bearing  N.  W.,  and  the  southern- 
most land  S.  W.  by  S.  At  about  half  a  mile  within  the  siiip  there  were  only  3  fathoms, 
The  appearance  of  the  land  is  much  the  same  as  at  Trebuppy  ;  there  is  a  bar  at  the 
riser's  mouth  ;  and  at  about  two  miles  up  the  river  are  the  few  houses  of  the  inhabitants 
who  have  a  number  of  cattle  and  good  pasturage,  some  of  which  we  procured.  There 
are  no  Indians  living  here.  There  is  a  considerable  rise  and  fall  of  the  tide  in  the  rirer, 
but  at  tlie  anchorage  we  could  only  perceive  a  small  southerly  current.  Latitude  ob- 
served, 14°  3'  N.,  variation  8°  50'  K. 

Wood  and  water  may  be  got  here,  but  they  must  be  brought  off  by  the  inhabitants  in 
their  craft. 


DESCRIPTION  of  the  Swan  Islands,  ifc,  with  Directions  for  Navigativ  s;  frmn  Half 
Moon  Key  to  Balize;  and  from  Ens(lish  Key  Nnrthiuird  past  Mauser  Ki-y,  Turneff; 
by  Capt.  G.  Sydney  Smith,  while  commander  of  H.  M.  sloop  Bustard,  1827-18,'8, 

The  Swan  Islands,  two  in  number,  are  low,  but  may  be  distinguished  from  the  mast- 
head in  clear  weather  at  a  distance  of  5  leagues.  They  are  in  extent  about  4i  miles,  in 
an  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  bearing,  and  have  a  passage  between  them,  in  which  there 
is  only  sufficient  water  for  a  boat :  they  may  be  appproached  on  either  side  with  safety 
to  a  distiince  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  and  at  the  S.  W.  end  of  the  western  island 
there  is  a  fine  sandy  bay,  and  clean  bottom,  wliero  a  ship  may  anchor  in  safety  in  from 
7  to  10  fathoms,  at  half  a  mile  off  shore.  Farther  west,  at  from  Ij  to  2  miles  distant,  the 
bottom  becomes  foul,  with  very  irregular  soundings,  from  10  to  44  fathoms.  A  banliof 
tliis  description  has  been  said  to  exist  off  the  east  end,  where  the  Bustard  obtained  sound- 
ings in  12  fathoms,  on  rocky  bottom,  at  a  mile  distant  from  the  point,  whence  the  deptli 
decreased  gradually  to  5  fathoms,  at  half  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  the  heats  being 
dispatched  to  sound  round  both  islands.  The  easternmost  island  is  infested  with  innu- 
merable boobies,  its  shores  not  accessible  without  gc'eat  danger,  or  injury  to  the  boat 
The  western  island,  on  the  contrary,  is  well  wooded,  with  several  good  landing  places  in 
small  sandy  bays,  which  abound  in  turtle  ;  some  hundreds  of  their  eggs  were  collected 
on  the  beach  in  the  space  of  a  few  minutes;  nnd  several  large  snakes  were  killed  by  the 
boats'  crews,  found  feeding  on  the  eggs.    Cocoanuts  were  in  great  numbers  on  the  nortk 


mmmm 


^m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT 


497 


lids.    Senrch  was  mndo  for  water,  but  without  success,  though  it  might  prububly  have 
luen  found  by  diuKinR. 

Observed  liitiiude  of  the  West  Islnnd,  17°  24'  N.,  longitude,  by  chrononnoter,  83" 
53' W. 

MISTERIOSA  BANK.— North,  90  miles  distant  from  the  Swim  Islands  is  the  Mis-  Mi$lerioaa 
teriosn  Hank  ;  this  bunk  hiis  been    partiiilly  i-xiiniincd  by  Ciipt.  R.  Owen,  of  H.  M.  ship  Bank. 
BlflKSoni.  and  is  inserted  on  the  chart  pubiirthed  by  E.  &  G.  W.  Blunt. 

Mr.  Allen,  formerly  first  liouteimnt  of  the  wliip.  snys,  in  a  note  to  the  author  of  this 
jork.  wo  have  not  entirely  completod  the  examiimtion  of  this  bunk,  but  believe  there  is 
jginidl  key  on  the  north  end  of  it. 

THE  MISTERIOSA  BANK  was  met  with  by  D.  Tomas  Nicolns  de  Villa,  in  his 
pasiiiUP  *"'*""  Truxilio  to  Butavano.  in  April,  1787,  linvins;  sounded  in  11  fathoms,  on 
ffliiteaand  and  stones.  The  liititude  deduced  from  thnf  ohaerviiiion  Ht  noon,  places  this 
bank  in  ia°  48'  42''  N.  Its  looKiiuii-t  is  77°  '.'9'  24"  W.  from  Cadiz,  as  deduced  from 
Puiitii  Caslilla,  at  Truxilio,  (well  nscertiiined  by  Gen.  Don  Tunnis  Ui;iirte.)  allowing  for 
tlie  errors  which  Vdlii  might  have  made  in  five  diiys'  iiiivigation.  AIpo,  on  the  11th  of 
April,  lbO.5,  D.  Josef  Maria  Merlin,  captain  of  a  piirticnlar  frigate,  called  the  Flecha, 
sounded  on  this  bank  in  his  passage  from  Cadi/,  to  Vera  Cru/..  According  to  his  obser- 
vations, the  depths  of  9  and  13  fathoms  were  in  north  latitude  18'^  .52'  42',  and  18°  53' 
36".  His  longitude  was  deduced  from  tlie  spot  where  he  had  1  fi  fiithoms,  on  the  eastern 
tdge  of  the  Sarranilla  (well  ascertained  by  B.  D.  .1.  V.  Fididyo;j  and  if  seems,  after 
milking  all  the  corrections  for  the  action  of  the  currents,  <fec.,  the  longitude  of  Misteriosa 
by  Merlin  is  77°  39'  30",  which,  ditlering  only  10'  from  the  former,  shows  that  the  bank 
Id  well  fixed,  and  not  very  far  from  its  true  situation,  taking  the  mean  of  the  two  longi- 
tudes, 77*^  34'  37  "  west  of  Cadiz,  (83-^  51'  37"  west  of  Greenwich,)  will  be  that  in  which 
we  jilace  it. 

THE  ALBION  AND  MAUD'S  BANK,  described  in  a  former  edition  of  this  work,  Albion  and 
ire  without  doubt  the  Misteriosa  Bank.  Maud'sbank 

(JLOVER'S  REEK.— This  is  biid  down  from  the  surveys  of  Com.  R,  Owen,  of  his  Glovefi  litef 
MnJBSiy's  ship  Blossom,  and  published  by  E.  &  G.   W.  Blunt,  1847.     The  bank  is  ia 
aeiienil  very  dangerou.'.     With  tho  common  trade  wind  the  current  sets  strongly  over 
it  to  the  westward.     The  following  description  has  been  communicated  by  Capt.  J.  Bur- 
nett: 

"Glover's  Reef,  which  has  two  sand  spots  on  the  north  end,  lies  nearly  south  from 
Hilt  Key,  distant  15  miles,  trending  thence  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  to  the  south  end  of  the  reef, 
onwliich  there  are  five  islands  or  keys.  These  may  iMisily  be  known  from  the  southern 
four  keys,  as  they  are  quite  bold  on  the  south  side.  The  keys  are  very  little  detached, 
and  nearly  all  of  the  same  height,  with  numerous  cocoiuiut  trees  on  them.  If,  from 
want  of  observation,  and  strong  current,  you  may  have  gotten  to  the  southward  of  Glo-  ■  V 

ier'9  Reef,  and  the  wind  be  so  far  to  the  northward  that  you  cannot  sail  north  for  Key 
Bukel,  night  coming  on,  you  should  iinchdr  to  leeward  of  the  key,  where  there  is  good 
ground,  in  from  7  to  17  faihoms,  within  half  mile  of  tlie  keys,  and  tliere  either  wait  for 
awiiid,  or  till  you  send  into  English  Key  for  a  pilot." 

BAlilZE,  or  BELIZE. —  Pilots  for  Balize  are  always  in  reiidinesss  at  Half-Moon  Balize,orBe- 
Key,  (the  S.  E.  Key,)  on  the  east  end  of  wliicdi  titaiids  the  liglitliouse,  whoso  lantern  is  lize, 
elevated  about  50  feet  above  the  sen,  which  may  be  seen  in  clear  weiilher  when  4  leagues 
distant — a  circumstance  that  causes  this  route  to  Hali/.o  to  lie  generally  preferred — though 
ill  tlie  season  of  the  north  winds,  that  is,  from  October  to  March,  it  is  considered  by  some, 
and  with  apparent  justice,  best  to  makcf  Miiuger  Ki'V,  the  northeiii  key  on  the  Turneif, 
from  which  you  may  run  with  a  fair  wind  .S.  S.  \V.,  G  leagues,  to  Eoiilish  Key  :  whereas, 
by  ii[)|iroacliing  Half-Moon  Key  at  this  season,  the  prevailing  winds  will  not  allow  you  ''' 

to  fetch  Key  BoUel  from  Hat  Key  Reef,  and  also  gives  you  a  d(>ad  beat  to  English  Key. 
Ithns  been  recominended  by  some  to  niiiko  Boiiacca,  in  Int.  15°  .'{5'  N.:  but  this  island 
iseurronnded  by  reefs,  which  circumt-iance  combined  with  the  strong  southerly  currents, 
at  the  season  alluded  to,  when  gales  from  the  N.  and  N  VV  naiy  be  freepienlly  expected, 
I  renders  it  a  coast  rather  to  be  avoided,  particularly  as  the  only  port  under  your  lee  would 
I  be  New  Port  Royal,  in  the  south  side  of  Rattan — a  iiiojt  desiinble  port  tiir  persons  ac- 
quainted— but  the  entrance  lies  between  reefs,  and  is  intricate,  and  pilots  are  seldom  to  bo 
obtained. 

Olisorved  latitude  of  the  lighthouse  on  Half-Moon  Key,  17"  12'  30'';  longitude,  by 
chronometer,  ^7"  27'  10"  W. 

HAT  KEY  AND  REEF.— W.  S.  W.  of  Half-Moon  Key  lies  Hat  Key,  wliich  is  Hat  Key  and 
wooded,  and  resembles,  in  form,  a  coronet.     A  dangerous  reef  extends  from  this  key  S.  Reef, 
I  by  E.,  3  miles,  to  clear  which,  when  2  miles  south  of  Half- Moon  Key,  they  steer  S.  S. 
I  W.  i  W.,  10  miles.     From  the  edge  of  tho  roof  to  Key  Bokel,  the  course  is  W.,  or  W. 
i  N.,  according  to  the  wind,  7  leagues.  Key  Bokel 

KEY  BOKEL  AND  ANCHORAGE.— Key  Bokel  may  be  known  bjr  its  fine  sandy  and  Anchor- 
I  beach  and  three  or  four  cocoanut  trees,  and  luay  be  rounded  at  half  a  mile  distant,  but  age, 

32 


'     IS 


T^IV 


49g  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•  not  nenrar.     Should  you  w'wh  fo  anrhnr,  n  rioiir  finndy  bottom  will  bo  found,  with  from 

10  to  4  fathoms.  Iho  ccntio  of  tht<  koy  hciiriiiK  fnim  K.  by  S.  to  S.  E.;  iho  K.  S.  K 
boaring  is  prefprn'tl.  It  rs  iidviwible  to  jjiv"  ii  Knod  ocopt!  of  cidihuit  onno,  ng  fniiii  tlinedoe 
of  the  himk  boiim  very  Htfop.  you  iiro  jiiililt*,  in  ciino  of  H(|imlli)  or  fnmh  brnp/,t>g  from  the 
enstwnrd,  to  diivo  off  it  IikI'oio  you  coulil  liiive  timo  to  voer. 
Engliih  Key.  ENGLISH  KKV.— Tho  ((muho  luid  diHtunro  from  hence  to  English  Key  m  n.  \^r 
by  N.,  4  IpiiRues.  It  hns  thioo  coroiiiiut  tn'OH  on  its  rontro,  in  sundy  on  tli«  N.  K.  ij,),,' 
nnd  bushy  to  the  wator'H  odsjo  on  its  S.  and  S.  VV.  Hidi-s,  lying  at  tho  south  sido  of  tlm 
entrnnco  to  tho  cliiiimt'i  to  Hali/.o  •  (JoIPh  Koy  issituiitcd  on  tho  nortli  nido  of  ihcclii,,,. 
nel,  is  vory  small  and  liiinliy,  with  ono  ciicuannt  troo  in  tho  contro,  nnd  sunoundtid  by  a 
sandy  bench.  To  tho  onBtwanl  about  lialf  ii  milo  is  ii  sand  patch,  cnllod  by  lim  pi|,j(j 
"Sand  Boro,"  nonrly  ovon  willi  tiio  watnr's  odgo,  and  roquires  u  good  borth  in  rouinlini; 
Tho  anchorage  is  in  from  H  to  4  fathoms,  with  (ioirs  Koy  bearing  from  N.  by  W.  to  N,  u 
E.,  or  tho  keys  to  tho  northward  of  (lotPa  Koy  in  ono.  From  this  place,  unless  yiwUe.w 
acquainted,  you  cannot  prHfood  without  a  pilot. 

There  is  also  anchorage  in  4  fathom*  at  ".loe's  Hole."  under  'rurneff,  ns  fur  north 
from  Koy  Bokol  as  to  have  English  Key  bearing  N.  W.  by  VV.  Tho  depth  of  watm' be. 
tween  English  and  Golfs  Keys  is  'Jl)  fatlioms.  Pilots  are  generally  found  on  tho  former 
of  those  keys,  waiting  the  arrival  (d'  vessels  coming  in  from  the  northward. 

Tho  course  in  midclmnnel  from  English  Key  to  Balize  is  about  VV.  N.  VV.  till  the  weit 
end  of  Water  Key  liears  north  ;  then  haul  up  to  N.  by  W.,  or  N.  N.  VV.,  till  Golf  Key 
is  on  with  Watt-r  Key.  which  is  the  mark  to  run  over  the  narrows  in  2i  liitboms ;  then 
N.  VV.  and  N.  VV.  by  VV.,  hauling  to  tho  northward  after  passing  tho  miiMlo  ground 
which  has  only  10  feet  water  on  it,  and  lies  from  2  to  2i  miles  from  Uaiizo,  J,',.,,,^' 
tho  narrows  you  will  find  7  fathoms,  decreasing  gradually  ns  you  approach  the  nnclior- 
ago.  The  marks  for  anchoring  off  Bali/.o  aro  the  steeple  of  tho  church  on  with  tiiocon. 
tro  of  Uovernment  House,  nnd  tho  south  end  of  Fort  (leorgo,  situated  on  n  low  Dm 
k  island,  benring  N.   VV.  i    VV.,  where  you  will  have  2  J   fathoms,  on   muddy  bottom.- 

«  Ships  of  greater  drnft  of  water  lie  at  n  considerable  distance  from  tho  town,  and  piocpcd 

to  it  through  a  wider  and  deeper  channel  than  the  ono  described,  having  in  it  3  futiioiri! 
and  upwards. 

The  current  in  tho  anchorage  sets  to  the  southward,  at  tho  rate  of  ono  mile  perliour, 
with  a  rise  and  fall  of  2  feet. 

Supplies  of  all  sorts  are  of  n  very  inferior  description.  Vegetables  are  seldom  to  be 
procured,  and  never  but  in  very  small  quantities.  Beef  is  also  inferior,  nnd  very  scarce, 
Turtle  alone  is  abundant.  'I'ho  water  is  not  good  for  a  voyage,  unless  taken  fr(ua  uliout 
14  miles  up  Iho  river,  except  during  iho  rainy  season,  when  it  may  bo  had  p«rfetily 
fresh,  2  miles  from  its  mouth. 
MdHfrer  Key.  MAUGER  KEY.— The  course  from  English  Key  to  Mnuger  Key  is  N.  E.  by  N.,f, 
or  7  leagues.  It  lies  in  latitude  17<^  ,3(i'  15"  N.,  and  longitude  87^  7'  VV.,  being  the  north- 
ernmost key  on  Turnelf,  with  a  reef  extending  from  it  N.  N.  W.,  2  miles.  To  the  S. 
S.  VV.  is  Crawl  Key,  at  the  .S.  VV.  end  id"  which  there  is  aiuhorago  during  the  rftijular 
trade  winds,  in  4  or  5  fiitlioms.  'I'o  the  eastward  of  Crawl  Key  lies  Three-cnrnereJ 
Key,  all  having  a  great  resemblance  to  each  other,  M auger  Key  being  the  smallost,  and, 
as  before  stated,  the  iiorfheriimost. 

On  Mauger  Key  there  is  a  triangular  light,  hoisted  on  n  flng-stnlT.  formed  by  threolno. 
terns.  The  lights  are  on  the  north-west  point  of  the  Key,  and  bear  from  tho  N.  W, 
point  of  the  reef,  E.  .S.  K..  so  that  a  vessel  by  bringing  the  two  lower  lights  in  ohp,  nt  a 
distance  of  four  miles  from  the  Key,  may  safely  stiape  her  cour'io  S.  S.  W.,  for  Knglijh 
Key,  distant  from  iMauger  Key  about  7  leagues,  where,  if  no  pilot  offer,  by  keepioiithe 
UAhls.  English  Key  lights  well  on  board,  and  a  good  lookout,  a  small  sandy  spot  will  bo  clearly 

seen,  and  anchorage  can  be  had  on  tho  edge  of  the  bank. 

The  latitude  of  the  li'^hts  is  n^  3(i'  N..  longituile  87°  47'  W.  The  upper  light  is  95 
feet  above  the  level  of  tlm  sen,  and  the  two  lower  lights  75  feet.  The  lights  can  be  seen 
distinctly,  in  clear  weather,  attlie  distance  of  from  14  to  15  miles. 

From  Port  Royal,  Jmnairrj,  to  the  Bay  "/  Unn/hiras,  and  thrnre  to  the  Island  of  Cozuml; 
by  Caj)t.  Win.  Sandum,  R.  N.,  in  the  years  1826  and  1828. 

[The  courses  and  bearings  are  magnetic.] 

Swanhlandt.     SWAN  ISLANDS— Left  Port  Royal  for  Bnlize.  Honduras,  on  tho  24th  of  .Iiine, 
1826.     Having  some  doubts  as  to  the  true  situation  of  the  Swan  Islands,  as  they  nrol  ' 


•Copy  of  a  notiee,  dated  Lloyd's  lOlh  May,  1823 — "  Mony  vphspLi,  nt  diflorpnt  limps.  Imvinj  ta 
loat  on  tbo  main  rpef.  wh.'in  pfoiii;;  into  Mnrid  iri.x,  Croin  boiii:;  unnldc  to  dislin>Tui!<b  Knili-b  niiil  GuITi  I 
Keys  (bptwccn  which  is  tlin  only  ship  cIiriiiioI  into  Hiilize)  Iroin  tl  n  niany  other  keys  <.n  the  inninrecf,  I 
Major  Ocnerid  Codd,  liis  Majesty's  .Su|>eririlend.iiit,  has  caused  a  fltig-stufl^  COftiet  bigb,  witli  anoclagw  [ 
figure  on  the  ton,  lobe  erected  on  Engli-<h  Key. 

(Signed,)  "  JOHN  YOUNG,  Agent  for  Hondum." 


•BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST   PILOT. 


499 


,l,)Wn  (liroctly  in  the  tnick  from  .Tiininiru  to  Biill/.o,  I  (lutoriniruid  on  milking  th«»m,  which 

wii»donH  lit  8h.  ,'}t)m.  A.  M.  of  tlio  '.'(iih.      Afier  mtikinu  ilio  otist  onil.  I  run  down  the 

north  niilf.  wliirh  iit  hold,  niid  miiy  \w  iipprDiirinMi  wiiii  HiifHty  to  tln<  diHlMiicii  of  liiill  a 

inilo,  until  witliin  ihrt<equiiitni(i  of  u  milo  of  ilio  wchi  end.  wlioio  slionl  wuicr  and  diin- 

jL«rou8  nicks  lin  olV  full  ono  miki  iind  ii  liidf.     Tho  <Mistfiiminst  of  ilii««e  •nliindH  is  not  low, 

iind  iniiy  liB  ""wn  in  cleiir  w.iiithor  IH  .u-  '.Ml  niilitH  oil'.      I  obwcrvt'd  from  tlio  .naglhoiid,  in 

coHStiii)!  iiloni;  tiio  north  sidn  of  tliKso  ihIiiiiiIh,  ihiit  tlio  dimolorjul  wiitor  extoiidud  ii  full 

mild  off  finin  111"  K-  S.  K.  piirt  iiloiijj  tho  Houth  Hido  to  tlio  west  oiid.  wlioro  it  oxtendod  .    •',• 

otffuil  li   "ide.     Thoy  iiro  two  dihliiict  iidiindH,  toniHM-tiMl  by   a  riof  of  lockM.  niid  w»i|l 

womii'd,  tho  trees  on  tliH  eiiBtornniost  liciiiK  iiiodonitt-ly  liijli.      Tlio  liititiido  of  tlio  oiist- 

erii  end  in  17''  '^i'  ^J"''  N.;  the  lon)^itudo,  hy  chionoinoier,  from  I'ort  lloyul  beinc  G^  66', 

,nnk.-«  tlii«  end  in  S.'J"  48'  W. 

From  Swan  iBland  towards  Balizo,  it  is  neressary  to  (luard  moat  particularly  against 
the  indiiciico  of  the  currents  in  running  down  to  the  hlioroa  of  lloiiduriis.  They  are 
entiroly  induoiiced  by  the  winds,  iiiid  change  their  direction  whon  the  wind  cIuuibrs  ; 
liutonupi"'<"""''i"«  •*'"*'"'"'""'■""''''• '""J '^»78' snu'l' <>'"  'hili/,0,  you  will  fjoiiciiilly  find 
;i strong  curront  8ottin(5  to  tlio  noitliward,  wiiich  must  lio  ctaidod  iiBiiiiist  iiy  fioquont 
obsorvniio-is  during  the  night.  The  snnth-oastornmost  of  the  wiuthorn  four  keys  is  Ilalf- 
Mopn  Key,  so  culled  from  the  form  of  tlin  siiiidy  shoal  pioji  'itirig  from  it.  On  this  key 
iho  iightliouse  is  placed,  in  iat.  17°  12'  30'  N.,  and  long.  87'^  27'  10  '  VV.,  by  chronomo- 
ter.    Mere  the  pilots  for  Biilize  reside. 

'Tho  approach  to  Halizo  from  the  Outer  Ki'ys  is  too  dilTicuIt  to  be  attempted  by  any 
oiiP  not  liaving  a  thorough  and  practical  knowledge  of  it. 

On  leaving  Port  Royal,  .lanu.uy  21»t,  instead  of  steering  to  the  southward  of  west  for 
llie  purpose  of  making  Rattan,  and  iheroliy  insuring  a  more  certain  route  to  tho  light- 
liouso,  'on  Half-Moon  Key.)  ofl"  Halize,  I  was  under  tho  necessity  of  keeping  to  the 
iiurthward,  to  coinmuniciite  near  Co'.umel ;  conseciueiitly  riin  dosvn  on  the  eastern  reef, 
and  found  myself  much  perplexed  in  consequence  of  a  very  strong  current,  which  nin 
to  the  N.  N.  W.  upwards  of  2  niilos  an  hour.  I  could  not  ascertain  tho  latitude  of  the 
North  Key  on  the  eastern  reef;  but  ran  along  by  tho  oiistern  edge  of  tho  reef. 

The  pilot  was  received  us  usual  at  the  lighthouse,  and  sail  made  for  English  Key,  past 
Hat  Key,  and  Key  Bokel.  At  this  tinio  the  remarkable  cocoanut  trees,  with  a  space  be- 
tween, showing  the  clonr  light,  siifficiontly  point  out  English  Key.  I  weiglied  from 
Knglisli  Key,  and  sounded  along  the  shore  of  'ruriiefl'  to  Mauger  K(>y.  and  now  confirmed 
an  opinion  F  formed  two  years  since,  namely: — that  ratiier  than  beat  about  outside  I 
would  endeavor  to  make  Mauger  Key,  (which  I  would  also  do,  if  I  had  made  tin-  North 
Koy,  on  tho  Eastern  Reef,)  and  run  along  the  western  side  of  Turiieir.  at  the  distance 
of  from  2  to  4  miles  olT.  When  about  12  miles  to  the  southward  of  Mauger  Key,  you 
will  see  two  or  three  remarkable  hillocks  on  Turnelf;  from  these  hillocks  English  Key 
will  bear  about  W.  by  S.  From  hence  you  may  steer  across  to  English  Key,  with  less 
chance  of  mistaking  it.  attending  to  the  foregoing  remarks, — namely,  the  space  between 
the  cocoanut  ti-ees.  Tho  courso  from  Miiuger  Key  to  English  Key  is  S.  S.  W.,  20 
miles;  but  I  imagine  there  is  a  great  risk  of  a  stranger's  being  bewildered,  from  the 
similinity  of  the  keys,  near  English  Key,  by  steering  direclly  for  it ;  and  therefore  ro- 
commond  running  along  the  Tuniefl"  shore,  as  above,  in  preference. 

ANCllORAOE  AT  ENGLISH   KEY.— In  anchoring  nt  English  Key.  take  your  Anchorage  at 
loundings  from  GolTs  Key,  and  rouiKJ  towards  Englitih  K«>y,  as  there  is  a  dangerous  spit  English  Ke*f. 
off  the  latter,  called  by  the  pilots,  the  Sand  Bore.     With   English  Key  bearing  S.  W.  i 
S.,aiid  GolPs  Key  N.  by  W..  there  me  H  fathoms. 

I  have  several  times  worked  from  the  above  anchorage  to  Mauger  Key,  and  always 
found  a  southerly  set;  it  is,  however,  inOuenced  by  an  ebli  and  flow  of  the  water,  but 
not  very  strong.  In  tho  Espiegle  I  workcnl  close  l>y  the  edge  of  the  Roof  olf  Mauger 
Key,  and  consider  it  nbout2  miles  olf;  and  at  night  made  the  edge  of  the  reef  when  about 
i  miles  to  the  nortliward  of  it,  and  4  from  Maujjer  Key.  Therefore,  unless  very  dark,  by 
liiiBping  a  good  lookout,  you  may  see  it  in  time  to  avoid  danger. 

I  must  here  caution  navigators   against  a  strong  current,  which  almost  always  sots  be- 
tween Mauger  Key  and  the  opponito  keys,  aiiout  N.  W.;  wIkui  standing  to  the  north-   Current. 
ward,  I  have  most  unexpectedly  been  set  on  the  lee  shore,  when  [  thouijht  myself  many 
miles  off  it.     This  current  sometimes  sets  westerly,  and  then  to  tho  southward. 

I  beat  up  to  the  northward  during  tho  night,  keeping  much  to  tho  southward  and  east- 
ward, to  avoid  tho  danger  of  going  near  the  Triangles.  Early  in  the  morning  sail  was 
made  to  the  northward,  and  the  northern  end  of  Amiiergris  Key  closed  on,  without  hav- 
ing seen  the  Triangles ;  nor  had  we  much  northern  current  during  tho  night.  I  must 
iiere  remark,  that  tho  whole  of  tho  shore  of  the  Ambergris  Key  has  a  reef  about  a  quar- 
ter of  a  mile,  or  a  little  more  off,  in  many  places  dry,  and  the  sea  breaking  on  all  of  it. 

I  continued  working  to  the  north  towards  tho  Island  of  Cozumel.  Tho  coast  of  Ba- 
ealaris  bold,  and  may  bo  approached  in  some  places  within  one  mile;  there  is  a  reef  all 
idong  it,  which,  both  by  tho  color  and  breaking,  plainly  iudicates  itsolf ;  and  off  Bo.iie  of 


600 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cozumel 
Itland. 


the  projecting  points  they  are  plainly  seen  breaking  at  a  considerable  distance  off.  y^u 
have  no  soundings  outside  the  reef,  nor  any  means  of  ascertaining  your  approach  to  it  in 
the  ni^iht. 

Ambergrit  AMBERGRIS  KEY. — The  long  isle,  called  Ambergris  Key,  to  the  northward  of  Bn. 

Key.  lize,  is  said  to  abound  with  oxtensive  fresh  water  lakes;  to  produce  logwood,  Hnd  th 

valuable  kind  of  dye-woud,  naiaed  Brazilletto.  In  must  seasons  it  is  plentifully  Htocked 
with  many  kinds  of  gnme. 

El  Chinehono.  EL  CHINCHOiXO— The  shoal  called  the  NORTHERN  TRIA  NGLii  lies  at  the 
distance  of  13  leagues  to  the  northward  of  Mnuger  Key.  Captain  Burnett  siiys,  when 
the  trade  wind  prevails,  a  current,  often  very  strong,  sets  down  between  MuugeiKev 
and  UiH  Triangle  ;  there  lividiiig  itself,  it  sets  to  the  Bouthward,  between  '''urnelf  and  the 
Main  Reef,  and,  to  the  northward,  between  the  Triangle  Reef  and  Amberjjria  Khv 
With  a  wind  from  E.  to  E.  S.  E.,  as  you  tail  to  leeward  of  the  Triangle,  you  will  have 
a  strong  current  in  your  favor. 

The  south  end  of  the  Triangle  Reef  is  from  four  to  five  miles  broad  :  it  makes  in  two 
points,  between  which  there  is  a  sandy  spot.  From  the  S.  W.  point,  tiie  reel  trends  N 
by-  W.  i  W.  to  the  great  )iey  on  the  centre  of  the  roof;  from  thence  N.  by  E.  to  the 
two  keys  on  the  north  end.  T'le  course  along  shore  to  Cozumel  is  N.  by  £.  4  £,  j^j 
the  shore  pretty  bold. 

COZUMEL  ISLAND. — On  first  making  the  Island  Cozumel,  from  the  north-west 
end  being  much  higher  than  the  southern  vou  are  inclined  to  think  the  island  lies  nearly 
east,  and  west :  but,  on  a  nearer  approach,  »;  will  be  found  to  lie  nearly  in  a  N.  E.  and  S 
W.  direction.  There  ifl  good  anchorage  all  along  the  west  side  of  the  island  at  about 
three-quarters  or  H  mile  from  the  shore,  on  stiff  sand  and  clay  ;  the  anchor  may  bo  seen 
The  bank  running  :>H  alonir  the  western  side  is  free  from  danger,  and  very  stee|)  to,  havi 
ing  from  13  to  10  fathoms  atone  east  of  the  lead.  On  approaching  the  shore  you  plainlv 
see  the  edge  of  the  bank,  which  shows  itself  by  the  discolored  water,  and  a  very  stroni; 
and  turbulent  motion,  caused  by  the  stream  of  current  which  sets  very  atroni' to  the 
northward  outside,  atone  mile  from  the  nhore,  coming  in  contact  with  the  eddy  current, 
whioh  sets  in  a  contrary  direction  along  from  the  edge  of  the  bank.  On  first  seeingthis 
1  WHS  sc.mewhat  alarmed ;  but  on  finding  the  cause,  the  alarm  ceased. 

Anchorage.  ANCJHORAGE. — The   Espeigle  anchored  in  the  first  bend  of  the  const  to  tiie  south- 

ward of  the  N.  W.  point,  having  that  point  bearing  N.  by  E.,  and  the  southern  extreme 
S.  .'^.  W..  I  istant  off  shore  about  lialf  a  mile.  It  is  necessary  to  remark,  that  tlio  land 
from  the  N.  W.  to  the  north  point,  falls  in  to  the  eastwarii.  forming  a  long  deep  bi>rhtof 
8  miles.  About  8  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  N.  W.  [)oi.it,  there  is  a  small  lagoon,  the 
entrance  to  which  is  not  discernii'je  till  very  near  it,  liiiving  ahuut  5  or  6  feet  of  Wiiter  at 
the  inoulh  ;  there  are  many  small  islets  all  about  it,  ami  an  abniidance  of  (isii  of  the  Hnest 
quality.  All  along  the  coast  there  is  an  abundance  of  wood,  and  fish  may  heciiii»hi; 
in  ^orno  places  the  seine  may  be  hauled,  but  generally  speakiiii;,  the  beach  is  lined  with 
small  rocks   near  the  water's  edge.     The  south  end  of  the  island  is  low,  and  Ims  a  lona 


sandy  spit  [)rojecting  from  it. 
bee  any. 


I  have  heard  that  fresh  wafer  is  to  bo  found,  but  did 


not 


Cursory  Remarks  on  the  Northfrn  pari  nf  Cozumel  Island,  by  Anthony  de  Mayne,  R,  y. 

Hutveyor,  February,  1820. 

'^^zumd  hi-         COZUMEL  ISLAND  is  of  a  moderate  height,  extending  N.  E  and  S.  W..  upwanJ? 

ami,  of  7  IcHinies,  and  is  about  "J  leagues  in   breaiith.     Its  east  s-.lo  M[)peare(l  t{>  l)e  free  fmni 

danger;  butofftheN.  E.  point  a  n-ef  runs  out  in  a  N.  E.  by  N.  direction,  npwiinls  of  ;i 
miles:  this  reef  is  steep  to  in  every  part;  and  there  are  10  and  11  fithoniH  cliise  to  the 
lire  ikers,  on  the  N.  E.  extiemity.  Wo  ])nssed  the  northeastern  breakers  at  a  di.stance 
of  liidf  a  mile,  havinu  IJ  fathoms,  and  rouinjing  lliem  gradually,  stood  into  a  liav  on  the 
Wert  side  of  the  inland,  and  there  anchored  it)  (i  liitliotiis.  on  njcky  botto.ii,  at  iiliout'.'^ 
miles  fidii!  the  beach,  wilii  the  N.  E.  point  beai  ing  east,  distant  5  mdes.  Fnaii  tills  spot 
W((  could  plainly  see  the  n.^ni  land  of  IJacala.  to  the  wi^stward,  which  is  rather  low,  willi 
a  nnniber  'f  largo  trees  H'oiig  the  shore. 

Fi'irii  observations  n  wie  at  tkii^  aiicliorage,  we  found  the  N.  E.  |)oiiit  of  Cuzunie! 
silualed  in  latitude  20  ;;2'  N.,  i-rd  longitude  H(i '  44'  £  .'"  VV.  The  north  part  of  the 
island  is  low  arid  swampy,  coverf^i  with  thick  underwood,  but  wo  observed  no  other  tiiiin 
small  tre^s  ;  on  the  south  part,  the  trees  appeared  much  larger,  but  of  the  fustic  or  log- 
wood kind. 

We  could  not  perceive  uxj  discolored  water  or  soundings  off  the  east  side  of  the  island; 
but  off  the  north  part,  or  end.  the  soundings  extend  to  a  consid:^rable  distance  norlliward 
from  the  reef  before  mentioned.  We  found  l,'i,  14.  20,  and  U!  fathoms,  on  rocky  bo'tom. 
In  laiitudo  20°  50',  and  longitude  76'^  40'  we  had  Ki  fathoms  on  na-ky  bottom;  with  strong 
rippling  caused  by  the  current. similar  to  the  Gulf  Stream,  the  sel  being  N-  by  E.,2i  knoti, 
at  this  point  the  bunk  appeared  to  termiuate. 


*       *       BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

We  found  the  current  to  the  eastward  of  Cozumel  setting  N.  by  E.,  at  the  rate  of  2 
knots :  but  to  the  westward,  between  the  island  and  the  main,  it  ran  south-westward,  at 
±e  rate  of  24  knots. 

From  several  observations,  the  variation  of  the  compass  was  found  7i",  easterly. 

The  main  land  opposite  to  Cozumel,  trends  about  N.  N.  E.  J  E.,  to  the  island  Mugeras, 
and  is  all  low  and  woody. 


501 


fHE  COAST  Al^D  RIVERS  OF  TfUYAi^A,  FROlfl  THE 
EQUATOK  AIVD  THE  APTIAZOIV,  WESTWARD 
TO  THE  GULF  OF  PARI  A,  ORTRI;^IDAD. 

THE  COAST  OF  GUYANA,  IN  GENER.VL.— The  country  comprehended  un- 
Jerthe  name  of  Guyana,  extends  southward  from  the  River  Oronoco  to  the  River  of 
Amazons.  The  coasts  of  it  are  generally  low  ;  as  the  numerous  rivers  bring  down  vast 
quantities  of  alluvial  matter,  which  accumulating  on  the  shores,  nas  formed  a  border  of 
low  ground.  This  ground,  between  the  high  and  tow  water  marks,  is  commonly  covered 
with  mangroves ;  at  low  water,  it  appears  like  an  inac  •.  siible  bank  ;  but  with  the  rising 
lide,  it  is  inundated. 

PORTUGUESE  GUYANA. — The  Amazon  is  considered  as  the  first  or  largest  river    Portuguese 
in  the  world.     Mr.  Pinkerton  has  said,  "among  the  grand  rivers  whic.li  wator  the  globe,    Guyana. 
and  diffuse  ftrtility  and  commerce  along  their  shores,  the  Amazon  will  ever  maintain 
tlio  preference. ■'     The  truth  of  this  averment  seema  to  be  unquestionable  ;  the  sources 
of  this  river  being  within  two  degrees  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  about  the  parallel  of  11-'  S., 
and  several  great  rivers  fall  into  it;  these   again  having  innumerable  branches.     The 
course  of  its  grand   stream  is  nearly   east,  across  the  continent,  until  it  falls   into  the 
Atlnntio,  under  the  equinoctial  lino.     The  river  is  baid  to  be  navigable  through  nearly  its 
wiiole  length,  though  impeded   by  many  banks  of  sand,  some  of  which  extend  30  or  40 
leagues.     13elow   its   confluence  with  the  River  Xingu,  at  40  leagues  from  the  sea,  its 
opposite  banks  are  invisible  from  each  other.     At  Ovidos,  more  than  140  leagues  from 
ihe  sen,  its  breadth  is  about  1000  fathoms.     The  tide  is  porcept'ble  to  the  distance  of  150    Tide. 
leagues. 

Tiie  declivity  of  the  bed  of  the  river,  from  Ovidos,  has  been  computed  at  only  four 
feet;  yet  the  immense  body  of  interior  water  gives  it  an  astonishing  impetm  ;  so  that  it 
rushes  into  the  sea  with  amazing  velocity,  and  is  said  to  freshen  the  ocean,  at  times,  to 
the  distance  of  nearly  80  leagues  from  the  shor.  This  rapidity,  on  tlie  return  of  tide, 
Mcasions  a  bore,  called  by  the  Indians,  pororoca.  ■  fiich  is  chiefly  observable  towards  Cape 
.S'orth,  atid  which  surpasses  those  of  other  great  riv.i.'s.  This  phenomenon  always  occurs 
two  duys  before  and  after  the  full  and  change  of  the  rnoon  :  when  at  the  commencement 
of  the  flood,  the  sea  rushes  uto  the  river,  forming  ll;i'eo  or  four  successive  waves,  that 
Ijieak  mountain  high  on  the  bar,  and  raise  the  t^iJe  wiiain  to  its  greatest  elevation  in  one 
or  two  minutes.  It  has  been  said  that  the  elevation  of  these  ridges  of  water  has  amount- 
"dto  not  less  than  200  feet;  but  the  ordiimry  rise  over  the  bar,  is  from  12  to  15  feet. 
The  noise  of  the  irruption  may  be  heard  at  the  distance  of  two  leagues. 

FRENCH  (JUYANA. — The  coasts  of  French  (iuyana  are  much  like  those  of  the    French 
Poituiriiese  or  Brazilian  territory,  and  present  nothing  remarkable  to  the  navigator  ;  the    Guyana. 
whole  being  lined  by  drowned  manffrove  isles  and  mud-banks,  which  bar  the  mouths  of 
the  numerous  rivers.     The  rains  nn  this  coast  prevail  from  January  to  June,  and   form 
stagnmit  ponds  and  marshes,  wtncli  render  the  climate  very  unhealthy.     The   currents 
alonstlie  coast  are  strong  and  irreaular. 

DUTCH  AND  BRIITSEI  GUYANA— Dntch  Guyana,  or  Surinam,  extends  from    Dutch  and 
ilie Marowyne  to  the  Corantine,  an  extent  of  170  miles;  and  British  Guyana,  from  the    British 
Curantino  to  Essoqumo,  un  extent  of  about  120  miles.  Guyana. 

General  Directions  for  the  Coasts  of  Dutch  and  British  Guyana. 

Ships  bound  from  the  windward,  or  Caribbee  Islands,  to  these  coasts,  should  steer  as 
far  to  the  eastward  as  H.  E.,  if  the  wind  will  permit,  on  account  of  the  strong  indraught, 
or  current,  setting  all  times  of  the  year  to  the  westward,  into  and  through  the  Gulf  of 
Paria.  The  moment  you  come  on  to  the  outward  edge  of  the  ground,  you  will  perceive 
the  color  of  the  water  change  to  a  light  green,  and  will  have  from  ,')i  to  45  fathoms.  If 
ill  that  depth  you  should  be  so  far  to  the  southward  as  7"^  2.')',  or  7'^  30'  north  hitilude, 
voun'.ay  steoi-  in  S.  W.,  and  make  the  land  ;  but  if  more  to  the  northward,  keep  your 
"■;ud  till  you  atiain  that  latitude,  you  will  have  very  gradual  soundings  quite  to  the  shore, 
mt  very  shallow;  you  will  be  in  9  fathoms  when  you  first  got  sight  of  the  land  about 

{■•    i.f.:  N.W.Mistory  Dapt. 

pnOVlNCIAL   LirBRARY 
VICTORIA,  B.  C. 


502 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Suiinam 
Rivtr. 


Demernrn ;  but  you  may  run  in  without  fear  in  4  rathnms,  being  attentive  to  your  lend 
As  it  is  the  general  opinion  thiit  there  are  many  unexplored  sand-banks  on  this  coBst  li 
great  attention  to  tho  le,iid  and  the  quniity  of  the  ground  will  be  necessary,  ns  by  thnt 
only  you  will  be  apprised  of  the  danger ;  for,  on  most  parts  of  this  coast,  to  the  eiistward 
of  tho  River  Oronoro,  the  bottom  is  of  very  soft  mud ;  if,  on  a  sudden,  you  (ind  hg-j 
eaudy  ground,  be  assured  some  danger  is  near,  and  immediately  haul  off,  till  you  ^„^. 
find  soft  f;round.  iis  before. 

The  making  of  tho  limd  nil  the  way  from  tlio  Oronoco,  as  far  to  the  eastward  ns  Cnv- 
enne,  is  very  low  and  woody,  and  tliereforo  appears  in  all  parts  so  much  alike,  tlmt  the 
most  experienced  pilots  aro  iVequerilly  deceived.  Your  chief  dependence,  lliRrpf(j|.e  •. 
in  a  true  altitude  ;  if  that,  by  reason  of  thii  k  weather,  cannot  be  obtained,  it  will  he  arivi. 
sable  to  anchor  in  about  six  f.ithonis,  which  you  may  do  with  great  safety,  having  good 
ground,  and  in  gen«»rnl  niodernte  gales  and  smooth  water. 

The  making  of  the  land  about  Demerara  is  the  most  remarkable  of  any  pnrt  of  tho 
coasf  ;  rh*'  woods  in  many  pliiccs  t»eing  burnt  down,  and  cleared  for  cultivation,  iiiiikosthc 
land  :.!  i;.pr:ir  iti  largi'  2aps.  where  the  houses,  &c.,  are  plainly  to  be  seen;  and  if  there 
mf  -  -y  ;..iip(»  lying  at  the  lower  part  of  the  river,  their  mast  heads  may  bo  [ilainly  seen 
t/tovt^  the  ■i'i'*-e,  for  some  distaiue  at  sea. 

W  bound  ita^ithc  Uemerara,  you  must  run  to  the  westward  till  you  bring  tlie  eiitrnnco 
•f  the  river  S.  *«.  W.,  or  S.  by  W  and  either  lie  to,  or  anchor  for  tlie  tide,  in  4  fuibunis 
of  water:  but  *»*•  very  cautioUH  not  t»i  be  hauled  farther  to  the  westward  than  thesse  bear- 
ingp,  for  tl*e  flu.i<ii!  run*  very  stiiiiii;|y  into  tho  Rivi-r  Kssequibo,  at  the  mouth  of  which 
and  at  a  grieiit  cl««ancf«  from  the  bind,  lie  n)any  very  dangerous  sand-banks,  on  some  of 
whi'di  tlieve  ai'e  uot  najre  than  'J  or  10  feet  of  water,  and  the  flood  tides  sots  directly  uu 
them. 

On  many  parts  of  this  coast,  particularly  off  Point  Spirit,  a  league  to  the  eastward  of 
the  Demerani.  the  fl.xpd  tide  sets  directly  on  the  shore,  and  the  ebb  seta  off  to  the  N.  E. 
It  will  be  advisable,  when  calm  and  near  the  land,  to  anchor  there. 

In  the  month  of  December,  there  is.  at  times,  |)articularly  in  shoal  water,  on  '.he  cooiitig 
in  of  the  flood,  a  great  sea.  called  tho  lollers,  and,  by  the  Indians,  pororoca.  It  is  often 
fatal  to  vessels  at  anchor. 

At  the  distance  of  between  lO  and  40  leagues  from  the  coast,  tho  wind  ^jenenillv 
prevails  from  the  E  .*>.  K.,  but  within  I'J  leagno  the  wind  is  variablt? :  in  the  ni(iriiin".'<. 
E.,  and  E.  S.  E.  towards  in)on,  drawing  round  Withe  east;  and  between 'J  aad  rt  ?tij 
generally  to  tho  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  Jv,  or  north.  In  the  night  it  varies  from  K.  by  N  to 
E.  by  S. 

To  get  to  tho  windward  on  thi-^  coast,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  suffer  tlio  southpily 
winds  to  take  you  more  than  Id  bMgues  from  the  land,  at  which  distance  you  sliuuhl  in' 
about  noon  ;  for  by  two  hours  aft  r.  tho  wind  may  pr<viiil  so  far  to  the  mirth,  hs  to  liiv 
you  along  shore.  Hy  H  in  tho  eveiiing  the  north  wiwl  iias  go'.ierally  subsideil,  luul  the 
wind  then  blows  aloie,'  shore  from  the  eastward  :  tlieiel.ro,  with  a  whole  ebli  lielore  vou, 
it  may  be  best  to  ancliuranii  stup  f»r  a  tide.  Hy  dayliiirit  th(>  wind  will  be  foiiinl  to  fiave 
chan:!;ed  to  west,  southerly  :  hetn'c  the  advantage  of  b^mg  near  shore.  Tims  iiidd'ci]. 
iug,  and  taking  advantage  of  the  tides,  a  ship  may  beat  f'  on  Demerara  to  .Siiriiiaiii  in  the 
space  of  three  or  four  day(i. 

SI'HINAM  KIX'i.K.  ft  i»  advisable  liir  ship*  hound  for  Surinam,  when  ciiiniiigfroii) 
the  eastward,  or  long  voyagps,  to  get  into  latitude  .5°  55'  in  the  loiiyitudt*  of  ,'jll'"^  (unless 
thev  have  a  time-keeper,  or  lunar  observation,  to  dcpetid  on  ;)  ns  they  will  liavi'  iin  oppoi. 
tunity,  from  observation  to  obser -.ution,  of  ascertaining  I'lO  current,  which  nliiiDsl  con- 
stantly, olf  the  Marowyr,*'.  runs  10  <>«>  N.  W.  ;  and,  you  .ere  also  to  observe  lliat,  duiin; 
the  rainy  season,  you  cain '^»t  alway^  •(••pend  on  a  iiieridiofml  observation. 

When  arrived  in  the  iiljo  .■  Iniiiiide.  and  hnviii;;  found  im  bottom  with  (iO  fathoms,  they 
ought  to  keep  directly  to  lite  sunt).  »'"st,  bfcaii'-e  it  is  certain  they  are  then  about  the 
meridian  of  (,"ape  North.  01  perlinp-  tr'W  more  to  the  eiwtward,  where  the  ciiiieiit,  with 
uncommon  velocity,  sweeps  ii>  ihe  iiorili  <«id  north  west,  by  which  0110  may  long  lin  pre- 
vented fn.m  gaining  soulliin;:.  Willi  a  .MHtfh-we.-t  course  they  may  tho  sooiie.-t  be  iililii 
to  pass  through  the  ciirront.  anr'  .  nter  the  ixjundary  of  the  tides,  which  shoalil  be  their 
prinripal  aim. 

l-laviriiT  gained  ground  in  tlic  Iitiliide  .'>"  •  '  ••.jy  quoted,  and  a  depth  of  (iO  fiitlluius, 
fine  sand  with  mud.  you  may  be  ceiiiiin  ol  .    .1  rived  newly  to  the  meiidiiinof  Cay- 

enne, at  least  mtt  more  to  the  westward. 

To  the  north  and  X .  h).  from  J')  to  .y/liMgno-  off  fh^  Marowyne  shoals,  are  tliiulcptiis 
of  .'to  to  45  fathoms  of  watiM',  the  bottoM*  r<illt  mud  wtih  fine  sand  and  broken  shells.  To 
the  .\Iarowyne  shoals  you  may  not.  j«  ihr  nii(li(.  »y>f^'mvh  nearer  than  in  10  liitliiim«. 
when  the  Mtundinu'''  will  \>*-  '.'radiially  <'oarser  :  m  biMi^tij^  to  tiie  northward,  you  willliioe 
deeper  wa'er  anil  liner  SM..)..;  .  and  in  10  f.ilioiiw  of  A.rtei .  hoavio^-to  with  your  li-iiil  tu 
tho  nortiiward,  yon  will  drive  rli-ar  enough  of  the  i^hoals  to  the  north-west.  Vou  iiniy 
always  know  wh«'h<'r  you  are     ■  tho  ea.-i«wiiid,  and  cou»i«j«ienlly   to  tho  wiiidwiiid,  I)J 


mmimm 


'BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


■■?■••;«-:■ 


503 


jljose  soundings ;  for  the  ground,  six  leagues  to  leewnrd  of  the  Marowyne,  all  the  way  to 
Dram's  Point,  is  soft  mud.  Your  beet  Iniid-fall  will  be  betwt-en  Post  Orange  and  the 
jlnrowyne  ;  indeed,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  you  should  make  the  land  thereabout. 
The  Marowyne  is  known  not  only  by  the  high  land  lying  at  a  great  distance  inland,  but 
best  of  nil  by  the  appearance  of  its  mouth,  bended  towards  the  N.  E.,  and  in  which  the 
jtrenin  differs  with  nearly  all  the  other  rivers  on  this  coast,  as  no  one  of  them  shows  its 
entrniice  open  in  that  direction.  Its  sand  and  clay-banks  also  lie  dispersed  to  the  N.  E. 
,„d  N.  N.  E. 

The  coast  between  the  Marowvno  and  Surinam  River,  lies  still  uncultivated,  with  the 
only  exception  of  Mr.  Cameron's  plantation:  'and  nothing  but  thick  wood,  of  an  almost  un- 
interrupted uniformity,  presents  itself  to  the  view,  without  the  smallest  emerged  object; 
front  this  reason  ships  ought  to  run  as  near  the  land  as  their  draught  of  water  will  permit, 
which  they  may  do  with  perfect  safety,  there  being  no  knosvn  danger;  to  this  they  are 
the  luoie  compelled  as  the  espying  the  few  existing  marks  requires  the  utmost  attention, 
from  their  being  projected  against  a  wood  the  trees  and  leaves  of  which  are  of  ditterent 
hues. 

Inmaking  Post  Orange,  (which  is  in  longitude  54°  36')  you  will  see  the  Dutch  flag 
hoisted  there,  and  a  few  houses,  of  a  dark  brown  aspect,  lying  nearly  hidden  in  the  forest. 
This  post  lies  nearly  13  leagues  to  the  westward  of  the  Marowyne.  and  at  about  the  same 
liistnnce  from  Bram's  Point. 

It  ought  to  be  remarked  that,  although  in  former  times  there  may  have  existed  some 
likeness  between  Post  Orange  and  Brum's  Point,  at  present  none  such  is  to  be  found  ;  the 
liirge  tree  at  Post  Orange,  mentioned  in  fronier  descriptions,  is  probably  fallen  or  dead, 
aud  the  flag  only  may  serve  to  distinguish  the  spot.  At  Bram's  Voxui,  however,  no  flag 
is  now  to  be  seen. 

Abnut  5  miles  to  the  west  of  Post  Orange  is  the  Motkreek,  (Mot  Kreek.)  where  also  the 
Dutch  flag  is  displayed  as  a  mark  for  ships  ;  a  few  houses,  in  a  similar  manner,  lie  scat- 
tered among  the  trees. 

The  next  mark  you  have  (for  you  must  bo  very  attentive  in  keeping  a  good  lookout)  is 
abreiik  in  the  land,  through  which  appear  the  houses  and  buildings  of  a  plantation  calL^d 
Camfron's  Castle.  The  tuansion,  a  large  structure,  painted  white,  has  a  steeple  upon  its 
roof,  which  makes  it  the  best  mark  on  this  part  of  the  coast. 

From  here  the  mud-bank  begins  to  spread  farther  otf  shore ;  the  lead  is  your  best 
iTuide;  and  by  keeping  all  along  its  edge,  you  will  discover,  in  due  time,  the  buoys,  placed 
along  the  channel  which  leads  over  the  bank  into  the  river.  When  seeing  the  land  lead- 
ins  inward  to  the  S.  W.,  and  marking  the  trees  opposite  the  ship,  you  may  perceive  a 
row  of  trees  along  the  forest  bank,  without  leaves,  and  of  u  singular  bi'own-burnt  aspect; 
these  ti'ei's  have  been  known,  during  at  least  half  a  century,  by  the  name  of  the  h  <-abbe- 
hosch  or  Crab-wood. 

As  Surinam  river  disembogues  itself  towiiid  the  west,  you  may  not  see  its  western 
bunk  before  you  have  discovered  the  outer  vessel,  which  serves  as  a  mark  lo  lead  over  the 
bank. 

In  l-^l™  a  beacon  was  erected  on  Bram's  Point,  but  since  1P.'5'2  it  lias  broken  down, 
toffetlier  with  the  housics,  flag-stnlfs,  and  every  other  object  pr<!viousiy  existing;  so  that, 
atpresenl,  not  the  smallest  trace  of  human  hiibitatiun  is  to  he  seen  there.  Instead  of  the 
beRciin.  tliere  have  been  placed  four  marks  along  the  wiiuivvaid  side  of  the  chatuiel, 
iMiliiij;  ovi-r  the  bank  tow.ird.i  the  rivrr,  w  iic'i  eonsisl  of  two  iron  vessels  with  masts, 
and  two  copper  buoys,  placed  in  the  following  order: 

No.  1. —  The  ouUimnnt  vr.sneL  with  Bram's  Point  snulh  19^  east ;  and  No.  2,  the  other 
vessel,  south  Id'  wi  st.  in  latitude  ol)s<<rved  G"  1'  ."iO  ',  and  lias  'Ji  or  2,-  fatlioms  around  it. 

No.  2  liiiH  Brum's  Point  south  37'^  eiist,  and  Nn.  3,  being  one  of  the  buoys,  south  11° 
east:  it  lies  in  24  fathoms  of  wiiter.     N.  B.   Tlicne  ocarinas  arc  true. 

No.  3  lies  in  2i  fathoms  of  water,  to  the  westward  of  the  sand  biniks  which  extend 
I'loni  Hriiin's  Point,  with  the  eastei-mnost  |)oint  of  land  bearing  N.  74^  E.,  Brain's  Point 
south  (il  '  east,  and  No.  4  south  50"  east.  (Ynu  must  kc(p  a  sharp  lookout  in  going 
from  till  one  to  the  athir,  in  ordir  tojiml  out  tlu  ir  placr.) 

No.  4  lies  to  the  southward,  aixl  close  to  tln^  edge  of  the  sand-banks,  in  3  fathoms  of 
water,  with  Bram's  Point  north  45  east.  To  the  west  of  this  buoy  is  a  pit  or  hole  with 
3.J  fathoms  of  water,  and  which  allord.i  n  good  nnciioiage  for  ships  waiting  for  wind  or 
tide.    N.  B.    These  lir(irin<:s  are  by  o^nijmss. 

Every  depth  above  ^iven  is  at  low  water,  full  ami  cliangeof  the  moon,  when  the  water 
i'm»  0  or  10  feet ;  but  at  the  intervals  only  5A  or  (i  feet.     It  is  high  water  at  C  o'clock. 

Regarding  the  marks,  as  above,  the  only  additional  caution  necessary  is  against  the  set- 
ting of  the  tide  .<  ;  the  flood  sets  with  forc<'  upon  tlic  lee  shore,  ami  the  ebb  rushes  straight 
over  the  sHud-banks;  the  former  is  of  some  importance  to  ships  working  in.  es[tecially 
when  th.'  wind  is  not  sutiicient  to  keep  the  -hip  in  restraint  ;  for  hero  the  bottom,  of  a 
soft  mail,  iit*  now  and  then,  by  suction,  prevented  tlie  ell'ect  of  the  rudder;  and  as.  in 
such  casts,  a  ship  may  not  always  hi  go  au  unchor,  they  havo  been  ijrebsed  deep  in  the 


High 


water. 


504 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.        *V 


High  water. 
Demerara. 


mud,  before  they  could  do  any  thing  to  prevent  it.  This  happened,  even  in  1833,  with 
one  of  the  returning  merchant  ships,  which,  passing  the  bank  against  the  flood,  touched 
but  lightly  ;  after  which  she  ran  till  in  4  feet  of  water  alongside,  and  although  fortuniitelv 
got  off,  she  lost  her  rudder,  besides  a  great  lapse  of  time,  together  with  hard  working  and 
expenses.  As  vessels,  small  craft  excepted,  always  enter  the  river  with  the  flood  tide,  ths 
effects  of  the  ebb  are  to  be  shunned  by  those  who  come  driving  down  the  river;  becausa 
the  tide  will  throw  them  upon  the  sand-bank  which  juts  out  from  Bram's  Point.  This 
bank,  called  Schuipe  Rif  (Shell-shoal)  is  of  a  tenacious  substance,  and  nearly  as  hard  ng 
solid  ground  ;  therefore  care  should  be  taken  not  to  be  driven  upon  it. 

Finally. — No  vessel,  of  any  considerable  draught,  should  enter  the  channel  of  SuriDBm 
■without  the  certainty  of  going  in  at  onco,  at  least  so  far  as  to  reach  the  anchorage  wnsf  ^f 
the  buoy  No.  4  ;  for  getting  aground  hero  is  always  attended  with  some  fatal  consoquence 
during  the  following  ebb-tide,  which  causes  the  ship  to  plough  the  soft  ground  till  she  ji 
fairly  driven  ashore.  If  it  be  evening  or  ebb-tide,  you  had  better  haul  to  the  northward 
and  must  anchor  when  you  have  34  or  4  fathoms  of  water  with  the  outer  vessel,  (No.  j  \ 
bearing  S.  by  E.  or  S  S.  E.,  as,  should  you  lie-to,  the  current  would,  during  the  night 
drift  you  as  far  to  the  westward  as  the  River  Saramacca  ;  and  many  sliips  have  been  three 
to  four  weeks  beating  bark  to  Bram's  Point,  although  the  distance  is  only  7  or  8  leagues 
Nay,  heavy  sailers,  after  beating  muny  weeks,  have  bore  up  lor  Bjrbice,  finding  itunavaij! 
ing  to  contend  against  wind  and  current.  (It  must  however  be  remarked,  they  were 
probably  unacquainted  with  the  mode  of  working  up  along  this  coast.) 

Having  passed  the  buoy  No.  4,  you  havo  only  to  keep  in  mid-channel  with  the  lead 
going.  A  mile  inward  from  Brum's  Point  stands  a  tiag-sfaff.  with  a  few  houses,  destined 
for  a  lazaret;  here  you  may  anchor  in  34  and  4  fathoms  of  water.  Between  this  place 
and  Jagtlust  plantation  you  will  find  the  deepest  water  by  keeping  three-quarters  over  to 
the  eastern  shore.  After  passing  the  first  plantation  called  Rc.solutie,  you  will  find  oiilyo 
fathoms  at  low  water,  and  from  thence  to  within  a  mile  of  the  entrance  of  the  Comowinie 
may  not  bo  improperly  to  meil  tho  Lower  Bar. 

Having  reached  nearly  to  tho  entrance  of  the  Comowinie,  which  brancVies  from  the 
Surinam,  you  must  be  very  particular  in  guarding  against  the  flood,  which  ae-g  stronolv 
into  the  Comowinie,  and  which,  without  great  ])recaution,  would  set  you  on  a  spit  of 
sand,  which  extends  iVoin  Fort  Amsterdam  almost  across  the  Comowinie.  On  tho  other 
hand,  you  must  guard  against  some  simken  rocks,  which  lie  a  little  below  Fort  Amster- 
dam, on  the  western  shore,  so  as  to  keep  between  the  t\vo.  Having  pa-ssed  the  flag-staff 
you  will  have  18  feet  at  low  water;  and  from  thence  to  the  edge  of  the  bar,  the  deepest 
water  in  the  river.  It  is  here  that  those  ships  complete  their  lading,  which  draw  too  much 
water  to  pass  over  the  bar. 

At  Tiger's  Hole  there  are  fi  fathoms  of  water,  which  is  just  al)ove  Governor  Frederici's 
plantation,  called  Voorburg.  Here  yon  will  then  have  a  leading  wind  up  ;  and  by  keepini' 
three-quarters  over  the  eastern  shore  you  will  have  tho  (loe|)est,  water,  11  feet  at  low,  and 
18  feet  at  high  water.  You  may  anchor  abreast  of  Paramaribo,  iti  4  fathoms,  observiiiJ 
that  the  deepest  water  is  close  to  the  town.. 

It  is  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  Bram's  Point,  at  6  o'clock.  The  flood  sets  to  the 
westward,  ebb  to  the  eastward. 

DE.MERAKA. — In  sailing  for  the  coast  of  Demerara  from  the  northward,  you  must 
keep  well  to  windward,  as  the  general  set  of  tho  current  along  the  coast  is  W.  or  W.  N 
W.,  about  two  mill's  an  hour. 

At  the  distance  of 'iO  miles  off  shore  tl.?  currents  vary  according  to  the  wind,  and  it  may 
be  observed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  when  there  is  any  westing  in  the  wind,  a  strong  easterly 
set  will  be  found  along  the  whole  coast ;  and  that  when  the  wind  inclines  to  the  eastward 
the  set  will  then  be  westerly. 

The  trade  wind,  Mowing  between  N.  N.  K.  and  !^.  E.,  causes  the  westerly  set  usually 
found  ;  but  as  the  wind  occasionally  veers  to  the  northward,  and  even  so  far  as  N.  N.W., 
particularly  in  tho  winter  months,  the  easterly  current  above  alluded  to  sometimes  exists. 

The  flood  tide  sets  along  the  coast  S.  W.,  and  tho  ebb  N.  E.  Tlieir  inlhience  is  uot 
felt  beyond  8  miles  o(f  shore. 

As  tho  passage  from  Uemornni  to  Berbice,  or  other  ports  to  windward,  exposes  you  to 
the  general  westsriy  current,  it  is  well  to  keep  .'lose  in  shon',  and  take  Hiivnnt«!;('  "f  the 
in-shore  tides;  ami  shoidil  the  winds  bo  !  ^ht  it  will  be  necessaay  to  anrlii  .  with  iliellood. 

Appearance  of  ific  lam/,  on  Ike  J)i  ■"  ra-  i  ri}n$t- — Nine  miles  to  tho  eastwaad  of  Cucuba- 
no  Point  aro  five  or  six  single  coco.aut  treen ;  ten  miles  further  to  tlni  eastwaril  are  two 
rows  of  the  same  trees,  appearini;  I'l^e  white  rliff*.. 

Twenty-six  tiiiles  to  the  eastw.ird  u\'  lb.-  men 
there  is  a  hillock,  formi'd  by  a  large  roih.o  tree. 
This  towers  above  the  low  land,  and  forms  like 
a  sugar-loaf:   it  is  called  (Jeneral  .Murin     «  tree. 

Forty-six  miles  to  the  eastward  of  tl«*  riv»r     General  Murray'*  Tree,  S.  W.  bv  8.12/ 


mim 


wp 


m^ 


ftprnmimmm 


'BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  606 

,re  two  hillocks  close  together.     They  also  form 
like  BUgnr-lonves,  and  show  themselves  nbovo  the 

loff  Ib""^- 
Vessels  on  the  coast  of  British  Guyana,  and 

bound  to  Demerara,  will  clearly  make  these  ob-  Two  Cotton  Trees,  S.  S.  W.  IIA 

jectfli  "9  t^>^y  olone  alter  the  appearance  of  the  low  land. 

Crab  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  the  River  Berbice,  will  point  this  part  of  tVie  coast  out. 
liiBre  being  no  other  island  between  Demerara  and  Surinam. 

Fourteen  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Berbice  there  is  a  building  close  down  to  the  water ; 
itsgides  and  top  are  white,  and  a  little  to  the  westward  is  a  deep  gap  in  the  land. 

Fifty  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Berbice  there  is  a  patch  of  burnt  trees,  having  the  ap- 
pennince  of  vessels  at  anchor. 

The  intermediate  coast  between  these  ol)ject8  is  low ;  patches  of  trees,  and  a  few  dis- 
persed houses,  alone  altering  its  appearance. 
There  is  no  danger,  if  the  lead  is  kept  well  going. 

Unless  standing  in  for  a  harbor  or  ritrer,  do  not  go  into  less  than  5  fathoms,  as  there  are 
many  bunks  but  little  known  inside  these  soundings.  There  is  anchorage  along  the  whole 
const,  but  be  careful,  if  you  anchor  off  Berbice,  to  have  sufficiently  deep  water  to  prevent 
toucliin?  the  bottom  between  the  hollows  of  the  rollers,  which  break. 

BKRBICJE.— Latitude  and  longitude  of  the  light-vessel  6''  25'  42"  N.,  57°  26'  W.    Berbice. 
Latitude  and  longitude  of  the  Stelling,  170  yards  N.  of  the  Court  House,  6"  11'  48"  N., 
57°  30'  30"  ;  high  water,  full  and  change,  4h.  Oin.  High  water. 

Berbice  light-vessel  carries  one  fixed  light  by  night,  and  a  black  ball  at  the  foremast    Light. 
head  by  day,  painted  black  outside  and  roofed  over  ;  she  has  a  small  jigger  mast  abuft,  and 
lies  in  a  quarter  less  than  three  fathoms,  at  low  water. 

From  the  light-vessel  to  the  entrance  of  the  river  the  course  is  S.  S.  W.,  10  miles. 
To  enter  the  river  all  vessels  have  to  pass  over  a  bar  or  flat  of  6  miles  in  extent,  having 
16  feet  at  high  water,  and  only  7  feet  at  luw  water,  spring  tides. 

All  vessels,  drawing  from  11  to  15  feet,  going  up  the  river,  should  leave  the  light-vessel 
about  an  hour  before  high  water,  and  steer  S.  S.  W.  When  about  2  miles  from  the  light- 
vessel  the  water  will  shoal  to  15  feet,  until  a  tree,  on  a  low  point  to  the  p'lstward,  is  shut 
in  by  a  bluff  point,  bearing  E.  by  S.  i  S.  They  will  then  be  about  2  miles  from  the  en- 
traiice  of  the  river.  The  water  will  then  deepen  from  18  to  20  feet,  and  they  will  be 
over  the  bar.  The  channel  nariows  in  approaching  the  river,  there  being  a  long  mud-flat, 
extending  about  6  miles  to  the  northward,  on  the  western  side,  which  is  sometinios  dry 
allow  water;  and  a  hard  shell  bank  to  the  eastward, on  which  the  sea  breaks  at  low  wa- 
ter, and  which  is  steep  close  to.  The  channel  lies  between  tlie-.e  two  banks,  and  a  vessel 
may  keep  so  fur  to  the  eastward  as  to  shut  in  Crab  Island,  hnlf  way  with  the  eastern 
point  of  the  river,  and  to  the  westward,  so  as  to  open  Crab  Island  from  the  eastern  point. 
When  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  (^astern  point,  open  the  shipping  between 
Ciiil)  Isliiiid  and  the  eastern  point ;  and  when  off  the  east  jjoiut,  wliich  is  5  miles  from 
lliH  town,  steer  south,  or  S.  by  W.  in  .'$4  faihoins,  keeping  close  to  the  eastern  shore,  and 
about  three-quarters  of  a  cable's  It-ngth  off  shore. 

To  avoid  a  shoal  off  the  S.  E.  point  of  Crab  Island,  keep  the  steeples  of  the  two  churches 

toudiing  each  other,  or  about  half  a  cable's  length  olf  the  bushes  on  the  eastern  shore. 

OiF  Point  Canje  there  is  a  muii-baiik  lying  N.  and  S..  of  :>()  fathotus  in  extent,  having 

only  9  feet  water  on  it,  at  low  water.     It  is  half  a  cable's  length  off  shore,  and  the  mud 

on  it  is  very  soft. 

After  passing  Canje  Creek  haul  out  a  little  to  the  westward,  in  order  to  anchor  with  a 
flood  tide,  and  in  17  to  21  feet  at  high  water.  Vessels  drawing  twelve  feet  generally  lie 
aground  here  at  low  water. 

H.  M.  S.  Kliimer's  anchoring  marlis  were  Scntcli  Clmrcli.  or  Northernmost  Church, 
in  one  with  the  centre  of  the  ("oiirt  House  and  Crab  Island,  N    4  W. 

liFRIUCK  TO  DK.MKRARA  —The  <ru^  course  and  distance  from  Berbice   light-    Berbirc  to 
vessel  ti.       .nernia  light-vessel  is  N-  4!)-'  W.  51  miles;  tlie  mufrndic  course  N.  W.  ]  W-    Demerara. 

Leiivintj  Berbice  with  an  ebbtide,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  by  compass  20  miles,  and  then 
N.  W.  bv  W.,  with  which  courses  Demerara  I'ght-vessel  will  be  soon  a-head.  The  N. 
W>\  \  c(.'  rst>  is  to  avoid  the  long  iniul-tlai  lying  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Berbice  light-vea- 
sc'  h:i'  'gal  high  wnter  only  from  12  to  (i  feet  water  oi,  it;  whereas  this  track  will  give 
fr.ii  1  •  to  20  feet,  niiiiMv  bottom.  To  know  when  the  vessel  is  to  the  westward  of  this 
flat,  two  groups  of  trees,  cidled  the  Eighteen  anti  the  Nineteen,  will  be  touching  each 
iitiier,  iicaring  S.  by  E.  In  compass.  Alter  the  course  then  to  N.  \V.  by  W.  by  com- 
pass, an  '  in  approaching  'he  Demerara  lii;ht  vessel  tliero  will  l)e  from  18  to  2()  and  .30 
i'eot  ^".iier,  muilily  botto  ..  Twenty  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Point  Corroliaiia  (the 
eastern  jjoint  of  Denierani  River)  the  coast  assinrtes  a  more  lively  appearance,  the  man- 
grove trees  h.ving  fretpient  i^ajts  in  them,  iliiough  which  the  smoke  is  seen  rising  from 
tile  ditl'erent  facloiies.  There  is  aUo  se»<n  a  very  long  rennnkalde  group  of  trees,  with 
large  tups  and  Bninll  stems,  called  Paradise  Plantations,  with  a  white  factory  building  half 


^Hfl^-^^r-r^ 


Demerara. 
High  water. 


S06  ■     BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

a  mile  to  the  westward  of  it ;  and  as  there  are  no  other  trees  on  this  coast  having  tli 
same  appearance,  it  will  be  a  very  good  guide  to  know  if  a  vessel  is  to  the  eiiBtwni(lo( 
Demerara,  which  frequently  happens  during  the  rainy  seasons  when  the  current  whli.;. 
usually  sets  VV.  N.  W.,  niters  to  N.  by  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  '       '" 

Ships  coming  from  the  Windward  I^lllnd8  and  bound  to  Domerora.  maidng  tlicso  treen 
and  i)eing  in  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  by  steering  W.  S.  W.,  will  make  Demonuu  liplit 
vessel ;  but  they  should  not  shoal  the  water  to  less  than  3  fathoms. 

DEMERARA. — Demerara  light-vessel  is  in  latitude  6°  50'  N.,  longitude  58"  5' 
W,  Time  of  high  water  at  full  and  change  4h.  .3nm.  The  lisht-vessel  is  piiiiitcd  ipii 
has  two  masts,  and  carries  u  fixed  light  by  night,  and  a  broad  red  pendant  by  dny,  tiiiilljo. 
in  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  N.  N.  E.  jj  E.  12  miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Currubunn 
Point. 

The  lighthouse  is  striped  red  and  NVjiite  perpendicularly,  ond  has  a  signal  post  on  the 
top  of  it. 

Ships  bound  into  the  river  have  to  pass  over  a  bar,  one  mile  in  length  and  li  n,,];. 
across,  having  13,  12,  and  8  feet  on  it  at  low  wiit(»r.  On  leaving  the  light-vessel  htcer  S 
W.  by  S.,  or  S.  S.  W.  4  W.,  allowing  for  the  tide,  keeping  the  lighthouse  a  little  on  the 
port  bow.  just  over  the  cathead,  for  eight  miles.  In  this  track  there  will  be  from  i.'4  (u,, 
feet.  When  0  single  large  tree,  (the  high  ciibbage-tree)  on  the  western  sluire  of  tlm 
river  bears  S.  W.  \  W.,  or  the  northernmost;  largo  factory  chimney  on  the  same  side  of 
the  river  bears  S.  W.  \  S.,  steer  S.  W.  i  S..  jiiissiirig  to  the  northward  of  a  black  biiav 
and  a  stalf,  with  a  small  cask  011  it,  called  the  Tub  Beacon  ;  this  track  will  allonl  l(i,  p 
and  20  feet  water.  It  is  not  safe  to  shoal  to  le.ss  tliiin  1(3  feet  in  jiassiiig  the  lieiicon,  gj 
the  ground  is  very  hard  there.  About  W.  S.  W.  of  this  beacon  there  is  a  wliiit.  Iju^y 
in  10  feet,  lying  off  the  N.  K.  point  of  the  river.  Pass  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  be 
tween  it  and  tho  red  buoy,  which  lies  N.  W.  from  it  about  n  mile  and  a  half. 

When  the  lighthouse  bears  S.  by  E.  haul  into  the  river,  and  moor  off  the  townnf 
most  convenient. 

In  coming  from  the  northward,  it  slioiild  be  carefully  remembered,  that  the  lij;litintbf 
lighthouse  can  be  seen  belore  that  (if  the  light-vessel.  Uy  bringing  the  foniier  to  bear 
S.  W.  I)y  S.  it  will  lead  to  the  li};lit-vessel ;  but  if  any  thing,  should  have  hnpiiciicii  lotjui 
latter,  and  the  light  of  the  liglitlioiise  bo  mii-tiikeii  lor  it,  when  bearing  any  lliini;  lothe 
southward  of  S.  by  W.,  or  eastward  of  south,  it  would  lead  to  a  very  hard  SiindbaDk 
having  only  8  feet  on  it.  lying  W.  and  W.  N.  W.  from  the  liglit-vessel. 

The  pilots  for  this  harbiir  an^  very  good,  and  ke(>p  11  shaij)  lookout  for  vessels  comin 

down,  picking  vessels  up  l.j  and  20  miles  to  thi!  windward  of  the  river. 

High  water.         It  is  high  water  (sjiring  tiiles)  at  George  Town  at  4li.  A^iin.  P.  M.     Rise  at  ordiiiar 

Tide.  springs,  0  feet ;  at  neaps,   8  feet.     The  tiii(!  conliiiues  to  llow    on  the  surface   lli.  lOni 

after  high  water,  and  iluring  spring  tides  runs  about  throe  knots  per  hour  at  the  iiiiciior 

age,  in  the  dry  season,  troiii  July  to  November. 

The  distance  from  tJeoige  'J'owii  to  the  sand-hills  up  the  river  is  about  2.')i  mill's,  b\ 

Cajit.  Owen's  Survey.      In  goiiiij  up  to   the  sand-liills  kei-p  the  eastern  slu)i<'  cIohc  ot 

board,  after  passing  the  flats  ntf  I'loviilfiicc,  until  i.lreast  of  Ilowereroeuie  Creek;  ilieii 

haul  over  toward:-*  tlie  |)ciiiit  on  the  west  silore  aiiovi?  (Ilasgow. 

Lighthouse.  The  lightliouse  is  in  lat.  «°  40'  20'  N.,  long.  58'^  11'  2U"  \V. ;  variation,  0'  4S  E.,bv 

Capt.  ( >wen's  ob'iervatiiiiis. 

Spanith,  or  SPANISH,  or  (  OLO.MHIAN  (iU  VAXA.— The  most  remarkable  featuie  i,(  Span 

Colombian        ish  (iii)aiia   is  the  course  of  tlie   River  Oidhoco.     A  ^reat  part  of  the  U|)|)  r  pnrliono 

Guyana.  this   river  was  explore  1  in  tho  year  1800.  by  tho  celebrated  [Juinbolilt.  wim  )iriivui|  it. 

comniunicatioii  with  the  Kio  >('gro,  and,  coiis('(|ueiitly,  with  the  Amn/.oii.     Tlie  nioiilh; 

of  the  t)ronoc(i  are  of  (lallili'inus  iiavii:alio:i.  iiii'l  re(|iiiie  uri  expert  pilot.      t^i'\i-i\  ipltlicn 

ore    navigiible  ;   but  the  chief  is  the   (iri'iit    iMdUlli,  ( IJuca   (I'riiiide,  or   Boca  de  Niivjos, 

whii  li  is  about  0  miles  in  wiilli.     This  is  iikihi  to  the  soulhwiird.  and  in  the  direct  coursi 

of  the  river.      The  isles  of  the   Oiiiiioco.  or   i;itherits    Delta,  which    is  of  pi(Hli;iniis  ex 

tent,  are  possessed  by  the  ( iuaniuinis  n"  I  tlie  >liii  iusas,  t\v(i  iiiiiepeinleiit  tribes  nf  Indians 

The  iiiinliern  part,  opposite  to  Triiiidinl.  is  ovei  (in we. I  from  the.  middle  of  .laiiiiiiiy  lollic 

middle  ot'  June;  and,  during  tills  sea.-oii,  tho  (iuarauiias  dwell  upon  tho  piiliii  trecsiwitb 

which  it  is  covered. 

The  seven  navigiible  channels  into  the  river,  already  mentioned,  have  been  described 
as  follow,  coinmeiicing  iiort|iw>ii'il  : 

The  first  of  tile  naviiiiible  iiioiiths  is  th'-  (!rand  M.inamo.  in  the  (Iiiif  of  Piiiiii:  liie 
second  IS  the  Caiio.  or  Canal  of  I'erdcrnalt  •■*,  '■',  le  uues  -oulli  of  the  ."^olilier'.^  Kbiiid,  ill 
the  entrance  of  tho  gulf:  it  is  lii  fur  l.>ngboats  onlx  :  thr  third  niiruth,  iniined  (  ii|iiii';i,  ij 
7  leagues  to  the  eastw;ird  of  i'erdernales.  iind.  hkewisf.  is  tit  only  for  boats  :  llie  fiiirtb, 
named  Miicareo,  is  (>  bngues  ea.^twardof  (japurii,  and  is  naviualile  by  sitiall  emit:  Mari- 
usas.  the  fifth,  is  12  leiigui's  to  the  sonth-eastwiiid  of  fin-  lourih  ;  but  between  iire  aiiiny 
mouths  navigable  when  the  river  is  high  :  the  s.xld  mouth  is  18  leagues  to  the  siiutliwanl 
of  Miiriusas,   ond   is  navignblo  for  small  vessels;  the  seventh    Boca  (irande,  or  (ileal 


m^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  507 

j(oufh,  13  8  longupa  S.  E.  from  the  sixth ;  its  breadth  is  6  miles  between  the  islands, 
(;jiijTieji)  (Ciiib  Isles)  on  the  N.  W.,  and  Point  Burma  on  the  S.  E.;  but  the  navigable 
jbaiinel  is  not  above  3  miles,  and  is  crossed  by  n  bar,  with  17  feet  at  low  water  :  the  ap- 
pruiicli  to  tl'is  entrance  is  dangerous,  from  the  shoals  ruiming  off  7  miles  eastward  from 
Conercj"  Islimil,  and  2  miles  northward  from  Point  Barma. 

'l"he  llux  and  redux  of  the  tiilo,  aro  felt  in  iho  month  of  April,  when  the  river  is  low- 
j5t,  bcyixi'l  Anfjostura.  at  a  distniice  of  more  than  85  leagues  inland.  At  the  confluence 
of  tlie  Carony,  GO  leagues  from  the  coast,  the  water  rises  one  foot  three  inches.  These 
jjcillutions  of  the  surfaci:  of  1\hi  river,  this  suspension  of  its  course,  must  not  bo  confound- 
e(j  with  a  tide  that  flows  up.  At  the  Groat  Mouth,  near  Cape  Barma,  the  tide  rises  to  a 
felght  of  two  or  three  feet;  but  further  to  the  N.  \V.,  towards  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Paria, 
tlieVii'-B  rises  7,  8,  and  even  10  feet.  Such  is  the  effect  of  the  configuration  of  the  coast, 
anJ  of  tiie  obstacles  presented  by  the  Bocas  del  Drago,  &c. 

The  currents  on  the  whole  of  this  coast  run  from  Cape  Orange  towards  the  north-  Currents. 
west;  and  the  variatiims  which  tho  fresh  waters  of  the  Oronoco  produce  in  the  force  of 
,l,ageiioril  current,  and  in  the  transparency  and  the  reflected  color  of  the  sea,  rarely  ex- 
tend farther  than  three  or  four  iea^uos  E.  N.  E.  of  Congrejo  or  Crab  Island.  The 
waters  in  the  Gulf  of  Paria  are  salt,  tliouah  in  a  less  dogroe  than  in  the  rest  of  the  Ca- 
ribbean Sea,  attributed  to  the  small  mouth   (Bocas  Chicas)  of  the  Oronoco.  and  the  mass 


From  these  reasons  there  are  no  salt  pits 


ol'wiiter  furnished  by  the  river  Guarapiche 
ou  this  coast. 

The  navigation  of  the  river,  whether  vessels  enter  by  the  Great  Mouth  or  by  the  laby- 
rinth of  the  Bocas  Chiciis,  requires  various  precautions,  according  as  the  bed  liiay  be  full 
or  the  waters  very  low.  Tlie  reguliirity  of  those  periodical  risings  of  the  Oronoco  has 
long  been  an  object  of  admiration  to  travellers,  as  the  overflowings  of  the  Nile  furnished 
the''phi'"*"P'""'^  of  antiquity  witii  a  problem  difficult  to  solve.  The  cause  is  similar,  and 
acts  equally  on  all  tho  rivers  that  take  their  rise  in  the  torrid  zone.  After  the  vernal 
equinox,  the  cessation  of  the  breezes  announce  the  season  of  rains.  The  increase  of  the 
rivers  is  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of  water  that  falls  in  the  difterent regions.  This 
Quuntity,  in  the  centre  of  the  forests  of  the  ui)|)or  Oronoco,  and  the  Rio  Negro,  appeared 
toiiip  to  extend  90  or  100  inches  amiuiilly.  The  following  is  the  usual  progress  of  the 
oscilliitii)iis  (if  the  Oronoco.  Imiufciiatcly  after  the  vernal  equinox,  (the  people  say  on 
tbeioth  of  March,)  the  commencement  of  the  rising  is  perceived.  It  is,  at  lirst,  only  an 
inch  ia  ~4  hours  :  somptimes  the  river  again  sinks  in  April;  it  attains  its  mnximum,  or 
jreiitert  height,  in  .July  :  remains  full,  (at  tlu!  same  level,)  from  the  end  of  July  till  the 
25tii  of  .\ii;;i'st,  and  then  decreases  progressively,  but  more  slowly  than  it  increased-  It 
is  at  its  minimum,  or  least  depth,  in  January  and  February. 

Tho  River  Amazon,  according  to  the  informiition  which  lobtained  on  its  banks,  is  much 
less  regular  in  the  periods  of  its  oscillations  than  the  Oronoco;  it  generally  begins,  how- 
ever, to  increase  in  December,  and  attains  its  greatest  height  in  March.  It  sinks  from 
the  month  of  .May.  and  is  at  the  lowest  height  in  flu-  months  of  July  and  August,  at  the 
time  when  the  lower  Oronoco  inundates  all  ihe  surrounding  laiul.  As  no  river  in  .\me- 
ricii  Clint ross  the  o(paator  from  south  to  north,  on  account  of  the  general  coniiguration  of 
the  sniund,  the  risings  of  the  Oronoco  have  im  influence  on  tho  Amazon  ;  but  those  of 
tho  Amazon  ilo  not  alter  the  progress  of  the  oscillations  of  the  Oronoco.  It  results  from 
these  data,  that,  in  the  two  basins  of  the  Amazon  and  the  Oronoco.  the  concave  and 
convex  siuntnits  of  the  cuive  ot'pro'j;ressive  iiicreiise  and  decrease  correspond  very  regu- 
hrly  with  each  other,  since  they  exliiliit  the  diirerence  of  six  months,  which  results  from 
thesituiilion  of  tho  rivers  in  opposite  hemis|)lR'ies.  Tlie  cominencoment  of  the  risings 
only  is  l"ss  tardy  in  tho  Oronoco.  This  river  increases  sensibly  so  soon  as  the  sun  has 
crossed  tiie  equator  ;  in  the  Amazon,  ou  the  contrary,  the  risings  do  not  commence  till 
two  iniiiiths  iift(M'  the  equinox. 

Foreign  i)ilots  admit !)()  feet  for  the  ordinary  rise  in  the  lower  Oronoco.  M.  de  Pons, 
whii  li;i-.  in  general,  collected  very  accurate  notions  dui'ing  his  stay  at  Caracas,  fixes  it 
at  1,'i  fatliiiiiis.  The  heights  naturally  vary,  accordinsr  to  the  breadth  of  the  bed,  and  the 
miinlicr  of  triliut.iry  streams  which  the  principal  trunk  receives.  It  appears  that  the 
lueiin  rise  of  Angostura  does  not  exceed  L'4  or  25  feet. 

When  vess(ds  that  draw  much  water,  sail  up  towards  Angostura,  in  the  months  of  Jan- 
uiiry  hihI  Kebruary,  by  re  ison  of  the  sen  breeze  and  the  tide,  they  run  the  risk  of  taking 
thejirouiid.  'i'lie  navigable  channel  often  changes  its  bre  dth  and  direction;  and  no  buoy 
hnsyot  ln'cn  laiil  down  to  imlicate  any  deposite  of  earth  formed  in  tlie  bed  of  the  river, 
vliere  llir  waters  have  lust  their  original  velocity. 

(Imeral  Description  of,  anil  Directions  for,  the  Coast  of  Guyana. 

[From  llie  "  Derrot.TO  ili-  las  Aatillas,"  Jtc] 

The  roist.  which  extends  lioiii  Cape  Vorth  to  tho  Great  M  uith  of  tho  Oronoco,  which 
isiiiiatiliidti  t^'^  41'  N.,  is  very  low,  mid  •oundinga  off  it  roach  out  a  great  way  to  sea. 


508 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


This  circumstance  ia  the  only  mean  of  nscertnining  with  certainty  the  proximity.    \r.^  < 
other  mnde  of  recognizing  the  coast  is  very  difficult :  for,  in  the  clearest  day,  it  Is  not  nJ 
Bible  to  discern  the  land  at  five  leagues  off;  and  the  nature  of  the  coast  itself  impedes  n 
nearer  approach  than  two  leagues,  on  account  of  the  shonlness  of  the  water,  and  the 
banks  of  sand  and  mud  uf  great  extent  with  which  it  is  obstructed.  ' 

The  harbors  on  this  coast  are  the  mouths  of  rivers  only,  all  of  which  have  bars,  more  or 
less  navigable ;  and  to  enter,  a  practical  knowledge  is  necessary.  I 

From  North  Cape  to  Cape  Cassnpana,  the  land  is  very  low  and  wet,  and  covered  with 
a  thick  wood,  without  any  other  mark  to  recognize  it  by,  than  the  hill  or  mount  of  Mayes  • 
a  kind  of  platform,  insulated  and  hilly,  which  may  be  seen,  in  clear  weather,  at  thodjs' 
tance  of  five  or  six  leagues.  Its  latitude  is  3*^  5'  N.  The  soundings  hereabout  extenii 
far  out  t"  sea.  You  may  sail  along  the  coast  at  three  leagues  from  it,  and  at  that  distance 
have  from  8  to  10  fathoms.  At  10  leagues  from  land,  the  depth  increases  to  l.j  nod  20 
fathoms  :  and,  at  15  and  20  leagues  distaiicn,  there  are  from  25  to  30  fathoms,  witli  bot- 
tom of  soft  ciny,  or  of  fine  sand  of  various  colors.  The  cun-entruns  N.N.  W.,  but.  close 
Tide.  to  the  shore,  varies  according  to  the  tide,  of  which  the  flood  runs  W.  N.  W.  and  the  ebb 

N.  E.,  at  the  rate  of  about  three  miles  an  hour.     It  flows  at  6  o'clock  on  full  and  chanee 
days,  and  rises  from  12  to  15  feet. 
'  The  general  velocity  of  the  current,  outside  the  influence  of  the  tides,  may  be  estima- 

ted  at  two  miles  an  hour.  On  this  account,  in  making  this  coast,  it  is  always  nccessnrv 
to  make  it  in  less  latitude,  (i.  e.  more  to  the  southward,)  than  that  of  your  |)ort  of  desti- 
nation.  It  is  the  custom  of  those  bound  to  Cayenne,  to  endeavor  to  strike  soundings  ohout 
N.  E.  from  Cape  North,  and  20  or  30  leagues  from  it,  at  which  distance  they  find  from 
40  to  50  fathoms  of  water. 

Cape  Casaepour  lies  in  latitude  3'  50';  near  it  there  is  a  great  bank  of  clay,  which  ex. 
tends  5  or  (i  leagues  out  to  sen  :  its  extent,  from  N.  to  S.,  is  about  4  leagues,  with  4 and  5 
fathoms  of  water  upon  it.  On  account  of  tills,  vessels  from  the  southward,  making  this 
cape,  ought  not  to  run  along  the  shore  nearer  than  5  or  G  leagues.  After  havinjj  piissed 
this  i)aiik,  Caj)e  Orange  bears  W.  by  N.,  distant  from  6  to  7  leagues;  at  d,  iilihough 
from  this  place  it  cannot  be  discovered,  yet  its  proximity  may  bo  ascertained  without 
any  doubt;  for,  steering  nnith,  you  will  deepen  the  water  from  5  to  10  fathoinsi,  in  run. 
ning  less  than  a  mile  ;  when  you  find  this  latter  depth,  you  ought  to  steer  W.  N.  \V. 
(or  even  west,  if  necessary.)  to  preserve  the  same  depth.  It  is  to  be  renmiiipd  thnt, 
when  a  vessel  is  near  Cape  Catssnpour,  and  in  5  fathoms  of  water,  she  ouj;ht  nut  to  be 
steered  so  as  to  maintain  that  depth  ;  but  that  it  is  necessary  to  steer  north,  or  even  .N. 
by  E.,  until  you  get  7  fatlioma  of  water,  when  you  will  no  longer  be  able  to  see  tlieliiiid 
from  the  deck,  as  it  is  very  low.  After  steering  the  same  course  for  a  short  time,  in  7 
fatlionis.  you  may  steer  N.  N.  W.  ond  N.  W.,  with  the  same  depth  ;  with  these  courses 
you  will  near  Cape  Orange,  insensibly,  and  make  it  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  Icnjiues, 
when  in  H  or  9  fathoms  of  water.  Detwoen  this  cape  and  Cape  Cassepour,  the  river  of 
that  ruune  disembogues  itself. 

Cap((  Oriinye  may  be  known  by  a  cut  point,  (Punta  Cortndo,)  or  rather,  more  proper- 
ly, a  [mini  which  seems  to  have  been  cut  or  shortened,  which  is  on  the  side  iiexi  i(]  the 
sea,  and  is  tlu!  highest  land  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  same  cape  ;  and  also  by  the  Silver  Moun- 
tains, which  form  various  peaks,  appearing  insulated  and  detached  the  one  from  the 
other,  and  which  are  the  more  remarkable,  as  they  are  the  first  high  land  discovered  in 
coming  from  Cajjo  North.  Approaching  Cape  Orange,  you  may  discover  various  re- 
markable hills,  over  ^he  point  which  furms  the  entrance  of  the  River  Oynpoc. 

Beyond  Ca|)e  Orange  the  coast  forms  a  bay,  of  4  leagues  in  breadth,  in  which  the  great 
River  Oyapoc  disembogues  itscdf,  and  into  which  also  two  other  rivers  of  small  consider 
ation  discharge  their  waters;  the  one  to  the  eastward  is  named  Coripe,  ami  tlnit  to  the 
westward  is  called  Warnari.  The  Silver  Mountains  serve  not  only  as  a  mark  tor  Cape 
Orange,  but  also  for  this  bay  ;  be(;ause,  beginning  to  rise  oo  the  west  coast,  in  a  swampy 
country,  they  come  down  almost  to  the  edge  of  the  sea. 

The  River  Oyapoc  is  two  leagues  wide  at  its  entrance  ;  and  you  may  anchor  in  it  in  4 
fathoms,  clayey  bottom,  keeping  Warnari  west,  at  the  distance  of  three-qnniters  of » 
league.  Mount  Lucas  is  a  small,  but  tolerably  high  hill,  on  the  point  which  divides 
the  rivers  Warnari  and  Oyapoc.  One  league  u|)  the  river,  (Oyai)oc,)  there  is  ii  low 
island,  named  Isia  de  Venados,  which  is  covered  by  very  high  tides.  You  may  puss  to 
the  westward  of  it,  where  you  will  have  4  fathoms  of  water  close  to  the  shore.  After 
the  Isbi  de  Venados,  there  are  some  other  small  i^ilands.  which  do  not  einharruss  the 
navigation  of  the  river.  After  sailing  up  the  river  5  or  6  leagues,  there  is  u  fine  bay, 
which  serves  as  a  harbor,  and  in  which  you  may  anchor  in  4,  5,  or  G  fathoms  of  water, 
and  Hs  near  the  shore  as  you  please.  At  this  place  there  is  a  small  fort  and  a  cuuiitry- 
house. 

About  12  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  (vr  .i  the  RiverOyapoc,  is  the  Riv(!r  Apronnk,  which, 
also,  is  of  some  importance.  Its  entrance  is  two  leagues  wide,  and  it  has  from  U  to  4 
fathoms  of  water.     The  lands  which  form  it  are  very  low,  marshy,  and  covered  with 


!|'   """WM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  §09 

oangroveB.  •  Two  leagues  up  the  river,  nnd  in  the  middle  of  it.  there  is  n  low  and  very 
narrow  island,  of  about  half  a  mile  in  length,  covered  with  wood,  and  named  Fisherman  ■ 
Idand.  To  the  north  of  it  a  bank  of  sand  stretches  ou^  more  than  two  miles,  to  which 
it  is  nPceBsary  to  give  a  berth  when  you  enter  into  the  river.  There  is  a  channel  on  each 
jidfl  of  till'  island.  The  one  to  the  eastward  has  3  fathoms  of  water,  but  that  to  the  wast- 
flaiii  not  more  than  2  fathoms,  >' 

Five  leiipues  north  of  the  mouth  of  this  river  there  is  a  tolerably  high  baro  island,  in 
jliape  reHeiiibliiig  a  half-orange  ;  it  is  called  the  Great  Constable,  to  distinguish  it  from 
,gm«llor  island,  which  lies  half  a  league  from  it,  nearer  the  coast,  almost  level  with  the 
water,  and  which  is  called  the  Little  Constable.*  'J'he  Great  Constable,  (or  Gunner,) 
may  be  discovered  8  or  10  leagues  out  to  sea.  Vessels  bound  to  Cayenne,  direct  their 
fourse  to  these  islands  from  Cape  Orange,  from  off  which  they  bear  N.  N.  VV.,  distant 
leleiigues.  In  this  passage  it  is  necessary  to  keep  in  8  or  9  fathoms.  The  Great  Con- 
stable has  3  fathoms  of  water  all  round  it,  nnd  is  very  clean.  The  little  one  lies  E.  N. 
I  m\  W.  S.  W.  with  the  great  one.  You  may  puss  between  them  in  8  or  9  fathoms 
of  wntor,  observing  to  keep  within  two  musket  shots  of  the  great  one,  and  to  leave  the 
little  one  on  the  larboard  hand. 

N.  N.  VV.  from  the  Great  Constable,  there  is  a  rocky  shoal,  which  sonio  place  at  two, 
oiliers  lit  three,  and  others  even  at  four  miles  distance  from  it.  To  avoid  this  shoal  is 
tiie  principal  reason  for  passing  between  the  Constables.  The  French  ship  of  war  La 
Girondo,  Imund  to  Cayenne,  in  1738,  after  having  passed  between  the  Constables,  leaving 
the  gieiit  one  on  the  starboard  hand,  steered  N.  \V.  by  W.  for  the  Mother  and  Daughters, 
and  soon  after  discovered  the  water  breaking  upon  what  appeared  to  be  rocks,  which  boro 
N.  by  W  ,  about  a  league  distant.  At  the  same  time  the  Great  Constable  bore 
E.by  S.,  and  the  little  one  S.  by  E.  From  this  it  a|)pears  that  the  shoal  lies  N.  39°  W., 
true,  from  the  Great  Constable,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles.  Its  extent  may  be  about  6  ca- 
bles' length,  and  it  lies  N.  W.  and  S.  E. 

The  course  from  the  Great  Constable,  to  pass  outside  the  Mother  nnd  Daughters, 
which  lie  about  6  leagues  distant  from  it,  is  N.  W.  by  \V. ;  with  this  course  you  will 
shoiiien  the  v/nter,  and  will  not  have  more  than  G  fathoms  near  the  Malingre,  (one  of  the 
Mother  and  Daughters,)  near  the  N.  N.  E.  part  of  which  you  may  anchor  in  3  fatlioms, 
at  low  water. 

Four  loaguesf  N.  W.  from  the  Apronak  is  Kan  River,  and  from  it  to  the  River  Orapu, 
ij  reckoned  5  leagues  more.  The  Kiver  Orapu  separates  Cayenne  on  the  east  from  the 
raaiu  land.  It  is  a  fine  river,  its  entrance  being  about  a  league  wide,  and  has  3  fathoms, 
at  low  water.     The  banks  are  pretty  high,  and  covered  with  large  trees.  Cayenne. 

CAYENNE — The  Island  of  Cayenne  is  about  6  leagues  in  extent,  fron  north  to 
south,  anil  its  greatest  breadth  may  be  3  or  4  leagues.  On  the  north  it  is  bounded  by  the 
sea;  on  tlie  west  by  the  River  Cayenne  ;  on  ttie  east  by  the  River  Orapu  ;  and  on  the 
south  by  a  branch  formed  by  the  rivers  Ornpu  and  Cayenne,  which  here  unite. 

Tho'City  and  Fortress  of  Cayenne  are  situated  on  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  Island,  the 
nortli  part  of  which  has  various  hills  and  eminences,  but  the  south  part  is  low  and  wet, 
in  the  season  of  the  rains.  The  harbor  is  to  the  westward  of  the  city,  in  the  mouth  of 
the  River  Cayenne.  The  hills,  oi-  high  lands,  of  which  we  have  spoken,  are  named  Du 
Pont,  Rsinontabo,  Mount  Joly,  and  Maliuri :  and  all  these  are  close  to  the  north  coast. 
A  little  inland  are  those  of  Baduel,  Tigres,  Papaguay,  and  Mathory  ;  and  upon  the  banks 
of  the  Ouya.  that  of  the  Franciscans. 

At  about  a  league,  or  a  league  and  a  half,  or  something  more,  from  the  Island  of  Cay- 
enne, are  the  Islets  of  llemire  ;  they  are  five  in  number,  viz..  the  Child,  the  Father,  the 
Mother,  and  the  Two  Daughters.  The  last  are  two  little  rocks,  very  close  together,  and 
about n  mile  distant  from  the  Mother,  to  the  E.  S.  E.  'J'he  Father  is  the  largest  of  all 
these  islets,  and  bears  E.  N.  E.,  true,  from  Mount  Joly,  on  the  eastern  coast  of  Cay- 
enne Island,  4  njiles  distant.  It  may  be  about  half  a  mile  long,  E.  S.  E.  and  \V.  N. 
W. 

The  Child  is  very  small,  and  lies  about  a  league  E.  N.  E.  from  Mount  Remonfabo,  and 
four  tniles  from  the  Father.  You  may  pass  without  them  at  three  miles,  or  a  little  less 
distance  without  any  risk,  and  with  a  certainty  of  not  having  less  than  5  or  G  fathoms  of 
water.  Betwixt  these  islets  and  the  coast  there  are  al)out  fifteen  feet  of  water,  at  low 
ebb,  but  the  passage  is  dangerous,  on  account  of  a  rocky  shoal  which  lies  in  mid-channel, 
almost  even  with  the  surface  of  the  water.  There  is  also  a  shallow,  which  extends  be- 
tween the  Father  and  Child;  this  shoal  lies  N.  N.  W.  from  Mount  Joly,  and  nearly 
east  from  Mount  Remontabo.  Round  the  Malingre.  the  bottom  is  very  shallow,  and  it  is 
said  that  a  reef  stretches  out  about  two  cables' length  N.  N.  W.  from  its  western  ex- 
tremity. 


*  These  are  the  Gunners  of  the  Engliaii  charts. 

t  The  original  says  six  leagues,  which  dii-tance  appears  to  be  too  great. 


wmmm^ 


510  BLUNT'S    AMERICAN    COAST  PILOT. 

Bosidps  tlipso  islos  thoro  is  nnolher,  nt  about  tliren  longuoa  to  the  W.  N.  \V.  of  tli 
Child,  eiillnd  tlio  Forlorn  Hope,  or  llio  Tiost  Child,  which  lies  iieuily  on  tho  iii'Midiim  „^| 
the  town  of  Ciiyenno,  lit  llm  distiuice  ol'  scvon  iniloa.  ' 

In  ortior  to  ontor  Ciiyoimo,  it  in  iirsi  iib.solundy  imcusaiiry  to  anchor  betwoon  Marmgr 
and  the  Forlorn  Ilopo,  both  for  tlio  pnrpouc  of  riToivhig  u  pdot,  iind  to  wiiit  for  tlieii(J 
80  ns  to  piiHtt  llio  slmilows  iit  tho  »Milniiict>  of  iho  harbor.  IJe.weeii  tho  child  nml  dip  y  ' 
thor,  tho  unchornjio  is  very  inconunodinus;  for  tho  N.  H.  winils  ruiHo  iiiucli  st'u  jn  :. 
which,  (iitcliim;  vensids  on  tho  boiini,  niiik«s  tlmin  roll  iin  if  in  a  storm.  An  niu:l:ii|-  i] 
very  iipt  to  drig,  iiiid  it  is  nt'cessiny  to  Imvo  iinotluM-  all  roady  to  htt  go  ;  unil  ofioa  tiirt.„ 
or  four  days  elapso,  in  which  no  conimunicntion  oaii  bo  had  with  tho  shoro,  la  tins  ^n 
chorage  tliore  uro  from  twenty  to  twonty-llvo  feet,  nt  low  wutor,  tho  bottom  bcini;  J 
clny. 

In  general,  vessels  anchor  to  the  E.  N.  K  ,  N.  E.,  or  north,  of  the  Child,  nt  tho  dig. 
tnnce  of  two  miles;  but  thore  are  some  who  anchor  to  the  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  K.  of  (h^ 
Forlorn  IIo|)e,  at  about  two  miles  distant  from  it.  From  tho  oast  to  tho  .soatii  of  ili^ 
latter,  the  li.'pth  of  water  diminishes  to  lu,  12,  or  cvon  U)  feet ;  and  you  inusl  tiike  gon,! 
care  not  to  place  yourself  between  It  and  the  coast,  because  there  it  even  legs  di'|)tli.  j,, 
//j^'/i  water,  this  place  the  tide  rises  7  or  8  feet ;  and  it  is  high  water,  on  full  and  cliange  days,  m  5 
o'clock. 

N.  W.  by  N.  from  tho  Forlorn  Hope,  nt  the  distance  of  8  or  0  leagues,  arotliroosinnll 
islets,  which  are  so  placed  as  to  form  ii  triangle.  'J'hey  are  called  the  Devil's  Islets 
They  form  a  lino  ami  well  shelti-red  harbor.  Tho  besr  aiurliorago  at  them  is  E.  .s.  K.  nf 
the  most  southerly  islet,  in  5  or  G  fathoms  of  water,  with  a  hard  clay  bottoni,  iitalwutu 
musket  shot's  distiince  from  the  islet.  In  this  islet  there  is  a  reservoir  of  iVosh  wutof  I 
but  it  is  necessary  to  get  the  water  with  small  kegs,  which  can  be  carried,  us  tlio  ruu"li! 
ueas  and  steepness  of  tho  ground  render  it  impossible  to  get  it  with  largo  casks. 

Between  these  islets  and  the  Forlorn  IIo|)e  there  are  5,  (5,  and  7  fathoms  of  wntor,  jt  I 
.1  or  4  leagues  from  tho  land  ;  near  the  Devil's  Islets  are  9,  and  leaving  them  to  the  S 
or  S.  E..  you  will  have  'JO,  ;J0,  and  40  fathoms,  increasing  your  depth  as  you  incrcnso  jour  I 
distance  from  the  islets. 

Six  leai>ues  N.  W.  from  Cayenne  is  the  River  Mncnurin.     The  coast  betworn  is  low 
level,  and  has  many  handsome  houses.    At  L")  ItMigues  N.  W.  from  Macouria  is  tlio  River  I 
Sinnmnri.     This  river  alfords  excellent  anchorage  at '»' or  3  leagues  from  its  niouib,  inj 
which  vessels  are  not  incommoded  liy  the  sea,  bc^cause  the  bottom  is  of  very  softcluy. 

Nineteen  leagues  N.  W.  by  \V  from  Sinainari  is  the  River  Maroni,  which  is  very 
considerable.  Its  entrance  is  about  2  leagues  wide,  but  is  dillTicult  of  access,  on  accouiii  I 
of  the  shoals  of  sand  and  clay  which  are  in  it.  In  this  space  of  coast  the  rivers  Sina- 
mnri,  Aracoubo,  and  Ainaiiibo,  disembogue  themselves,  and  shoals  and  banks  of  clay 
stretch  <iut  about  ;5  leagues  to  sea,  along  the  whole  of  it;  so  that  it  is  indis|Hiiisal)lv ne- 
cessary to  kep|)  at  least  4  leagues  fiom  the  land,  in  5  or  (i  fathoms  of  water.  It  is  also 
to  be  remarked,  that  between  Cayenne  and  Maroni  there  are  many  single  or  ili'lmhe 
rocks,  fome  of  which  are  even  two  lt>agues  from  tlio  shore. 

From  the  River  .Maroni  to  Surinam  River,  the  distance  is  about  .34  leagues.  Tliocom 
trends  W.  by  N.:  it  is  all  so  much  alike,  and  so  low,  that  it  is  totally  impu  ibli'tadistin- 1 
guish  one  part  from  another,  so  as  to  rectify  the  position  of  any  vessel;  he  '  it  is  abso- 
lutely ni'cessary  to  make  tho  Maroni,  in  order  to  b"  sure  of  falling  in  correctly  witli  Siiri- 1 
nam.  This  coa!-t,  also,  has  various  biiiiks  of  clay  stietcliiiig  from  it,  which  rciidei' ii  ne- 
cessary to  keep  at  four  leagues  olF  it.  The  entrance  of  the  River  Surinam,  when  coinin; 
from  the  eastward,  may  be  known  by  its  crow's-bill  point,  which  may  bo  sorii  nt  4  oi .) 
leagues  off,  and  is  tlie  only  land  which,  under  these  circumstances,  can  be  (iiscciiied.  It 
has  u  beacon  on  it,  as  before  mentioned.  The  oiist  shore  is  that  which  is  first  seen;  the 
opposite  cannot  b(!  discerned  until  you  are  in  the  entrance  of  tlio  river,  i;  being  reiniirkaU; 
low  Innd.  which,  as  it  were,  hides  itself  to  the  west. 

To  an(lir)r  in  the  entrance  it  is  nc(  essary  to  bring  the  east  point,  of  wliidi  wp  liafc 
spoken   to  bear  S.  E.  or  S.  E.  by  .S.,  at  the  distance  of  three  leagues,  anchoring  tlion in 
Tidts.  Ah  fathoms  at  low  water.     'J'he  tiiles  (low  at  six  o'clock,  on  full  and  change  days:  nndai 

the  anchorage,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river,  the  flood  tide  sets  from  S.  to  S.  S.  K.,  awl 
the  ebb  from  N.  to  N.  N.  W.     The  least  water  is  two  fathoms  and  a  half.    Wiien  ilic 
wind  is  favorable  for  entering  the  liver,  steer  S.   E.  or  8.  E.  by  E.,  until  tho  east  point  [ 
bears  ea,-t;  then  steer  V,.  i^.  E.  to  anchor  in  T)  fathoms,  on  a  clay  bottom,  at  a  quiiiterof 
«  league  from  tho  east  point,  which  is  naincjd  Bram's  Point,  with  that  point  bearing  N. 9 
W. 

At  one  league  up  the  River  .Suiinam  tho  River  Cmnowinie  discharges  its  Wiitei's  into  I 
it.     'I'lio  entrance  is  defended  by  l''oi  t  Amsterdam,  on  the  soutli  side,  and  by  a  biilterj. 
which  is  on  the  north  part,  so  silmitcd  as  to  defend  the   River  Suiinani  al.-o.    On  tiif 
west  bank  of  tli(!  latter  there  are  various  batteries,  which  cross  their  fires  with  tlio-cii! 
Fort  Amsterdam.      A  little  farther  up  is  the  bar,  upon  which  there  are  not  more  tlw 


TJiB  entrance  ri 


wnm 


.  BLUNTS   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  ill 

IffA  fnthoma  nt  low  wntpr.     Aftnr  piissing  this,  you  find,  on  tlio  wost  shore,  Fort  Zealand, 
jj  tliHtown  of  I'linunuriho,  whiuli  iw  tho  nipitiii  i«f  thisi  colony. 

Four  limKUos  west  of  tho  Kivor  Sunniiin,  tho  Kivor  Siirimnicii  nnd  Copennme  enter 
tli(>»e«  I'y  t'>«  siuno  mouth.  Thoir  bunks  mo  uninhiiljilfil,  miJ  in  their  nriuuths  are  two 
(alhonis  at,  low  wnter. 

Ten  iniii;ne8  west  from  these  rivers,  tin-  River  Corentino  disembogues  itself.  Its  en- 
irniico  isiibout  a  lensuB  in  width,  imt  of  difTicult  iiccoss,  on  account  of  tho  siind  banks  off 
il  which  extend  throe  lengufs  out  to  sen.  Within  tho  river  are  thn-e  isiandx,  wliich  are 
,pry  clean,  running  north  and  soutli;  butweon  you  may  anchor  in  .5  fathoms  of  water. 
fliB  entrance  Rnd  anchorage  are  on  the  west  nide.  Tlie  small  River  Nikesu  also  dis- 
ch»rgP9  its  woters  by  the  same  nioulli  ns  tho  Corentine. 

Five  leagues  west  frotri  tho  Corentine  is  the  River  of  Berbico.  Its  mouth  is  about  a 
league  in  width.  Its  banks  aro  very  low,  anti  covered  with  trees.  In  the  very  mouth 
llesCrab  Island,  which  divides  tho  entrance  into  two  chiinnels.  This  island  is  low  and 
bushy,  »•"!  '8  surrounded  by  a  bank  of  sand  and  clay,  which  prevents  a  nearer  approach 
10 it  tiian  at  least  a  long  musket  shot.  Ii  is  in  length  about  a  mile,  and  half  a  mile  in 
brondth.  The  bank  wliioh  surrounds  it  stretches  about  a  league  to  tho  northward  of  it. 
A  rocky  shoal  extends  from  its  east  point,  to  which  it  is  oiM^essary  to  give  much  attention, 
mvou  must  enter  by  the  east  channel,  on  tho  bar  of  which  there  aro  not  more  than  two 
fntlionis  at  low  water. 
[Directioiis  for  the  Demerara  have  already  been  fully  given.] 

The  Riier  Essequibo  is  very  large.  Its  nioulli  is  three  miles  wide,  but  it  is  full  of 
islands  mill  shoals  which  obstruct  tho  jjassago,  and  remlcr  it  dillTicult  to  enter ;  nnd  al- 
lliDunh  the  islands  and  shoals  f(n'm  channels  deep  enougii  fur  all  classes  of  vesseU,  yet  it 
requires  much  care  and  practical  knowledge  to  enter  tlmm.  Tho  islands  are  numerous, 
low,  and  bushy.  Tho  greater  part  of  them  are  a  league  or  two  leagues  in  length,  but 
very  narrow,  and  lie  north  and  south.  TliiM'e  aro  two  principal  channels  for  entering 
tho  river,  viz.,  the  east  and  wost  channels.  'J'he  eastern  is  the  best ;  tliero  aro  in  it  from 
lite  35  fathoms.  After  having  passed  the  Islands  at  the  entrance,  you  will  see  another 
cluster  of  them,  which  it  is  proper  to  pass  on  tho  oast  side,  where  they  form  so  deep  a 
clinnnel  that  there  are  from  40  to  70  fathoms  in  it. 

At  10  leagues  from  the  entrance  the  fort  is  situated,  upon  an  island  in  the  middle  of  the 
river.    The  town,  or  rather  village,  is  situated  on  tho  west  s  <lo,  in  front  of  the  fcn't. 

At  15  or  IG  leagues  fiom  the  Essequibo,  is  the  mouth  of  tho  River  I'auroma.  which 
is  nlMut  half  n  league  in  width  ;  its  shores  aro  low,  and  covered  with  trees.  The  east 
point  of  tho  entrance  is  named  Cape  Nassau.  Six  leagues  up  the  river,  on  the  eastern 
side,  is  the  fort  named  New  Zealand;  tho  town  or  village,  named  iMiddleburgh,  stands 
at  the  foot  of      "  fort. 

From  the  Kivi-r  Pnuroma  tho  coast  trends,  without  varying  its  appearance,  to  Coco 
Point,  which  forms  a  bay  to  the  south,  and  to  the  westward  has  some  very  high  cocoa- 
nut  trees,  which  aro  the  only  ones  on  all  this  coast,  on  which,  in  general,  there  is  nothing 
else  than  mangroves. 

From  Co(i)  Point  you  ought  to  steer  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  VV.,  with  the  precaution  of 
keeping  in  5  or  G  fathoms  of  water,  in  ler  to  shun  a  liaiik  of  mud,  wliich  lies  about  24 
lea"ues  N.  N.  W.  from  it.  Having  rui  '2  leagues  on  these  courses,  you  will  see  the 
mouth  of  tho  (In  i)  aina,  situate  in  ^''  25'  .  latitude.  The  making  of  tins  mouth  is  very 
necessary  for  tliii-«  who  seeii  the  great  entrance  of  tho  Oronoco,  as  thei  c  is  no  other 
point  wliich  can  be  used  with  certainty  as  a  mark,  sind  it  I'aniiot  be  mistak.-n;  not  only 
becnuse  it  is  the  sole  entrance  or  opening  which  can  i>c  siu-r;.  but  also  on  account  of  three 
little  hills,  or  hillocks,  which  may  bf  M-en,  if  tho  day  be  clf-ar,  bearing  about  S.  W.,  at 
some  distance  inlimd. 

N.  E.  from  this  mouth,  about  3  lea(;,ies  distant,  there  is  a  shool  of  fine  sand,  with  24 
fathoms  of  water  on  it;  and  to  avoid  it,  )ou  must  take  good  care  not  U  shoalen  the  water 
more  than  to  5  fathoms,  luuddy  bottom. 

From  the  mouth  of  the  Guayama  the  const  is  wo<*'ly,  level,  and  low.  nnd  trends  for  8 
leagues  abrut  N.  W.  to  the  Point  of  Mocotnoco;  ntier  which  comes  the  coast  named 
Snbaneta,  vhich  trends  west  about  4  leagues :  it  also  is  covered  with  wood,  level,  and 
lower,  nnd  >he  water  on  it  shallower,  than  the  former.  All  this  coast  is  bounded  by  a 
shallow  bank  of  soft  clay  and  shells,  nnd  sand  with  clay  and  shells. 

RIVER  ORONOCO.  -The  Isle  Congrejo  (Crab  Island)  of  which  the  N.  E.  point  is  River  Oro- 
in  lat.  8°  51'  N.,  has  a  shoal  of  hard  sand,  of  the  color  of  ground  coffee,  which  extends  6  noco. 
leagues  from  its  eastern  part,  and  about  2  leagues  from  the  northern  part  of  the  island  ; 
and  this  renders  the  eiiiranco  of  the  river  dangerous:  for  between  it  and  the  coast  of 
Sabaneta  is  formed  the  L">r  of  the  Grand  Entrance  (A  the  River  Oronoco,  the  depth  of 
which,  at  low  water,  is  15  feet,  and  at  high  water,  only  16  feet;  the  bottom  soft  clay. 
The  bnr  is  about  3  leagues  in  extent  from  N.  to  S.,  and  u  little  less  from  E.  to  W. 

The  const,  which  is  rather  higher  than  the  former,  though  still  woody,  trends  S.  W. 
from  Point  Sabaneta,  about  3  leagues,  and  ends  at  Cape  Barma,  which  forms  the  boun- 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


4 


/. 


A 


£/    /^^^4. 


J 


/. 


^ 


1.0 


I.I 


m 


20 


m 


—    6" 


1.8 


L25  iU   11.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


•a  WliSr  AAAIN  STREET 

WEBSTEM,"   >•    )^5«0 

(716)  872-4501' 


tmm 


^1^ 


ipw^ 


■■1IWWP"™1P 


iip;,j;uj|i!uii  1 1  jiiuwj«i|iap!{;iiJ!>iuiui jiiiim 


612 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


dary  of  this  line  of  coast ;  as  afler  this  it  forms  a  grant  bay,  into  which  the  river  empties 
itself. 

The  coast  which  follows,  from  Isia  do  Congrejo  to  leeward,  is  very  indistinct  from  the 
former;  low  and  all  broken,  forming  different  mouths,  by  which  th^  sm^ill  brnnchesof 
the  Oronoco  discharge  their  waters.  They  are  fit  for  small  vessels  only,  which  have 
pilots,  because  they  nre  full  of  dangerous  sandbanks. 
Light  Vestel.  Light  Vessel. — North  of  Point  Barma,  in  18  feet  water,  there  is  a  light  vessel,  on 
board  of  which  pilots  are  stationed  for  the  river  :  the  light  can  be  seen  9  or  lU  miles  In 
clear  wenther. 
Chand  GRAND  MOUTH  of  the  RIVER  ORONOCO.— After  what  has  been  stated,  we 

Mouth  of  the  need  only  say  that,  having  recognized  the  Boca  de  Gunyama,  you  may  run  along  the 
River  Oro-  coast  at  the  distance  of  5  or  6  leagues,  in  4  or  5  fiithonis,  in  soft  clayey  bottom,  until  Cape 
noeo.  Barma  bears  S.  by  W.,  when  you  may  shape  your  course  for  the  bar ;  still,  however, 

keeping  the  lead  going,  in  order  to  preserve  the  soft  clayey  bottom,  although  even  in  slial. 
low  water ;  as  it  is  better  to  get  ashore  on  the  clayey  mud,  than  to  run  the  risk  of  falljns 
on  the  shoal  of  hard  sand  off  Isla  Congrejo.  If  you  catch  that  quality  of  soundings,  (hard 
sand,  like  ground  coffee,)  yoa  must  immediately  steer  south,  to  recover  the  soft  bottom. 
Following  these  directions,  you  will  near  Cape  Barma;  and  when  about  2  leagues  from 
it,  you  will  see  a  large  island  covered  with  trees,  which  is  that  called  Isla  de  Congrejo; 
and  having  passed  the  bar,  you  will  begin  to  augment  the  depth  of  water  until  you  finds 
fathoms.  When  it  is  proper  to  steer  from  S.  W.  by  S.  to  S.  W.  by  W.  to  keep  mid- 
channel,  understanding  that,  if  you  are  in  less  than  5  fathoms,  soft  bottom,  you  are  too 
much  on  the  maiu  land  side  of  the  channel,  and  must  steer  more  to  the  westward,  tore- 
cover  the  mid-channel ;  but  if  you  find  loss  than  5  fathoms  of  water,  with  a  sand  bottom, 
}ou  are  getting  upon  the  sliual  off  the'  Isla  de  Congrejo;  and,  in  this  case,  must  steer 
more  to  the  southward  to  recover  the  mid-channel.  With  these  directions,  and  atte'ition 
to  the  soundings,  you  may  run  in,  until  the  S.  fc^.  point  of  Isla  de  Congrejo  covers  some 
woody  islets,  which  lie  off  the  N.  E.  point  of  it:  you  may  then  run  close  to  the  island, 
and  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms  of  water,  the  bottom  soft  clayey  mud.  Moor  »ith  a  cable 
ashore,  and  in  this  situation  every  vessel  will  be  secure  anil  well  sheltered  ;  and  it  is  ne- 
cessary at  this  place  to  wait  for  a  pilot  to  conduct  any  vessel  up  the  river  ;  for  withoutoae 
they  may  be  certain  of  experiencing  some  misfortune  or  other.  A  pilot  may  be  en- 
gaged from  any  of  the  small  vessels  of  the  country. 
Tides.  On  all  this  coast  the  tides  are  rapid  and  irregular.     They  are  said  to  be  felt  nshigh  up 

the  river  as  Imataca,  a  village  of  the  Guaraunas  Indians.  As  to  the  times  of  hij;h  water, 
all  thai  the  pilnts  remark  is,  that  at  one-third  ebb,  at  the  rising  of  the  moon,  the  water  of 
the  ( Ironoco  increases  from  April  to  September,  and  decreases  during  the  other  inontiis 
r-f  the  year.  It  is  navigable  for  large  vessels  up  to  the  capital  only,  between  the  months 
ot  May  and  December;  during  the  rest  of  the  year  they  must  stop  16  leagues  furtlier 
down,  not  being  able  to  ascend  higher,  in  consequence  of  a  bar  or  pass,  named  del  Mamo, 
which  at  that  tnne  has  not  more  than  4  or  5  tVet  of  water  on  it ;  and  large  merchant  ves- 
sels, tliert'Kire,  must  employ  lighters  to  load  and  unload  them,  which,  although  there  are 
plenty  of  ihem.  occasions  much  expense. 

The  magnetic  variation,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  is  4°  E. 

From  this  mouth  the  Delta  of  the  River  Oronoco  extends  itself  to  the  interior  of  the 

Gulf  of  I'aria,  rendering  this  portion  of  the  coast  useless,  either  for  trade  or  naviguiion, 

beiirj  no  more  than  a  labyrinth  of  low  muddy  isles,  which  are  drowned  in  the  season  uf 

the  floods  in  the  river.     The  number  of  them  is  unknown  ;  and  t  is  not  easy  to  make  a 

plan  of  tliein,  for  they  are  all  formed  by  tlie  various  channels  into  which  the  Oronoco 

divides,  and  which  may  be  considered  as  useless  for  any  thing,  except  boats  and  canoes. 

The  toiiniiiation   if  this  coast  may  thus  be  fixed  at  the  Grand  Mouth  of  the  Oronoco, 

wliich  we  have  described  ;  and  we  now  proceed  to  mako  some  general  remarks  which 

follow  : 

General  Re-        GKNKRAL  R  EMARKS  ON  THE  COAST  OF  GU VTA N A. —Although  the  wliole 

marks  on  the   of  this  cous't  may  h  ve  no  great  errors  in   the  situation  on  the  charts,  yet  it  must  not  be 

Coast  of  supposed  that  every  point  of  it  is  accurately  placed  :  for  instance,  Point  Barimahadan 

Guyana.  error  of  22  minutes  of  latitude  in  its  position.     The  points  which  have  been  observedare 

inserted  in  the  table  of  latitudes  and  lonyituiles. 

The  mariner  may  confide  in  the  situation  of  these  points  ;  and  it  is  necessary  to  remarii, 
also,  that  on  a  coast  of  which  there  is  scarcely  a  possibility  of  recognizing  the  ditl'erent 
places,  except  by  the  latitudes,  it  is  very  easy  to  niiiko  a  mistake,  and  get  to  leeward  of 
your  port  of  destination.  For  this  reason  it  is  proper  to  run  down  the  coast  from  wind- 
ward to  leeward,  taking  good  care  to  make  the  various  places  out  distinctly.  It  is  also 
proper  to  examine  the  mouths,  or  omi)ouchures  of  the  rivers;  and  what  renders  this 
more  and  moro  necessary  is,  that,  in  the  season  of  the  rains,  there  are  often  days  on 
,  which  the  latitude  cannot  be  observed. 

'Jd.  If  such  is  the  uncertainty  as  to  the  positions  of  the  points,  it  is  no  less  in  respect  of 
the  foundings  at  the  mouths  or  entrances  of  the  rivers.    It  ought  always  to  be  reinem- 


mm 


wmummmf^^ 


lu  .W-.jiiDi 


river  orapties 

itinct  from  the 
ill  brnnchesof 
y,  which  ha»e 

ight  vessel,  on 
or  10  miles  in 

een  stated,  we 
run  along  the 
0111,  until  Cape 

still,  however, 
;h  even  in  shal- 
9  risk  of  falling 
3unding8,  (hard 
iie  soft  bottom. 
2  lengues  from 
It  de  Congrejo; 
until  you  finds 
^  to  keep  mid- 
m,  you  lire  too 
restwurd,  to  le- 

a  sand  hottom, 
ase,  must  steer 
13,  and  atte'ition 
MO  covers  some 
e  to  the  island, 
i)or  with  a  cable 
d  ;  and  it  is  ne- 
for  without  one 
iiut  may  be  en- 

e  felt  as  high  up 
i  of  hijih  water, 
jn,  the  water  of 
6  other  months 
een  the  months 
leagues  farther 
med  del  Manic, 
merchant  ves- 
[ough  there  aie 


interior  of  the 
e  or  nMigaiion, 
n  the  season  of 
easy  to  make  a 
h  the  Oi'onoco 
»iits  and  canoes, 
f  the  Orouoco, 
remarks  which 

ough  the  whole 

t  it  must  notbs 

BHriina  Imd  bo 

en  observed  are 

isary  to  remark, 
g  the  different 
t  to  leeward  of 
last  from  wind- 
ctly.  It  is  also 
lat  renders  this 
often  days  on 


)98 
8 


„  in  respect  of 
to  be  remem- 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  CUAST  PILOT. 

bered  that  all  these  rivers  form  bare,  and  that  the  bars  generally  have  very  little  water  on 
jiem.  The  best  way  for  those  who  have  not  a  practical  knowledge  of  these  entrances, 
ig  either  to  obtain  such  by  means  of  their  boats,  or  not  to  enter  a  river  without  a  pilot. 

3d.  The  wind,  which  from  E.  N.  E.  to  N.  E.,  or  E.  S.  E.and  S.  E.,  always  prevails 
upon  this  coast,  and  the  current,  which  always  runs  W.  N.  W.,  makes  the  lesser  liititude 
to  windward ;  and  hence,  on  all  this  coast,  it  is  very  easy  to  increase  your  north  latitude, 
but  almost  impossible  to  decrease  it. 

4th.  The  general  current,  of  which  we  have  spoken,  must  not  be  confounded  with  that 
which  is  produced  by  the  tides,  the  influence  of  which  is  principally  felt  near  the  coast ; 
and  12  leagues  out  at  sea,  or  9  fathoms  of  water,  may  be  considered  as  their  limits;  as  at 
that  distance  out  at  sea,  no  other  current  than  the  general  one  is  felt :  but  between  that 
and  the  land  no  other  cu'-'-ents  than  those  car.sed  by  the  tides  are  felt.  The  flood  sets  Tides. 
towards  the  coast,  and  the  ebb  away  from  it :  the  tide  flows,  on  full  and  change  days,  at 
Cape  North,  at  7  o'clock  ;  on  the  coast  of  Mayez,  at  6  o'clock ;  at  Cayenne,  at  5  o'clock ; 
and  at  Surinam,  at  6  o'clock. 

5th.  In  addition  to  what  has  already  been  said,  it  is  advisable  for  vessels  bound  from 
Europe  to  Guyana,  to  make  the  land  at-.ut  the  coast  of  Mayez ;  shunning  the  vicinity  of 
the  river  Amazon,  because  it  produces  vast  swellings,  which  are  felt  a  great  distance  out 
at  sen;  and  which,  near  the  mouth  of  the  river,  might  prove  most  fatal  to  the  vessel. 
This  phenomenon,  which  is  known  in  the  Ganges,  and  other  great  rivers,  by  the  name  of 
a  bore,  is  here  called  the  pororoca,  as  already  noticed. 

6th.  Having  made  and  recognized  the  coast,  it  is  necessary  to  run  along  it,  keeping 
the  lead  constantly  going,  so  as  to  keep  in  7,  8,  or  9  fathoms,  taking  care  not  to  get  into 
less  water,  from  fear  of  striking  on  some  of  the  shoals  which  stretch  out  from  the  coast ; 
and  although  with  that  depth,  in  some  places,  the  land  cannot  be  seen  from  the  vessel, 
even  in  clear  weather,  this  can  occasion  little  or  no  inconvenience ;  as  when  near  the 
latitude  of  your  place  of  destination,  it  is  easy  to  |iut  the  vessel  on  the  larboard  tack,  and 
run  in  to  sight  the  land.  Nor  is  there  any  difficulty  in  examining  it,  when  necessary,  as 
you  have  only  to  keep  more  away  on  the  larboard  tack  ;  hut  in  such  cases  it  is  very  ne- 
cessniy  to  be  extremely  careful  with  the  lead.  When  night  comes  on,  and  you  are  near 
the  port  of  your  destination,  it  is  proper  to  anchor  ;  as  also  when  it  is  calm,  within  the 
limits  ufthn  tides,  (described  before,)  as  the  current,  or  set  of  the  flood  tide,  carries  a  ves- 
sel towards  the  coast. 

7th.  Getting  aground  on  this  coast  is  not  generally  attended  with  much  danger,  as  the 
bottom  is  always  of  clay,  more  or  less  soft.  Notwithstanding  this,  no  one  ought  to  navi- 
gate this  part  without  due  care,  as  getting  ashore  not  only  causes  loss  of  time,  but  occa- 
sions much  work  in  carrying  out  anchors,  &c.,  to  get  a  vessel  off".  We  notice  here  that, 
even  when  a  vessel  is  in  the  regular  track,  although  in  9  fathoms  of  water,  she  will  raise 
the  mud  as  if  ploughing  it  with  her  keel.  This  may  cause  uneasiness  to  those  who  wit- 
ness such  a  thing  for  the  first  lime,  though  it  is  the  consequence  of  a  very  natural  cause. 
8th.  The  islands  of  Ramire,  the  Constables,  and  the  Health  Islands,  are  the  only 
points  of  this  coast  which  are  likely  to  cause  the  loss  of  a  vessel,  if  it  gets  ashore  on 
them.  In  order  to  avoid  this,  it  is  needful  to  pay  attention  to  the  currents,  that  they  do 
not  drive  you  upon  them;  and  notto  attemptto  pass  between  the  Constables,  unless  with 
a  free  wind ;  with  the  contrary,  it  is  better  to  anchor  at  three  leagues  from  them,  or  to 
pass  outside  of  them,  taking  care  to  give  the  shoal,  of  which  we  have  already  spoken,  a 
sufficient  berth. 

9th.  On  the  whole  of  this  coast  there  are  no  other  harbors  than  those  formed  by  the 
mouths  of  the  rivers,  the  greater  part  of  which  require  practical  knowledge  to  enter  thera, 
on  account  of  the  bars  and  shallows  which  run  out  from  all  of  them  ;  but,  as  on  all  this 
coast,  storms  are  unknown,  and  there  is  not  the  smallest  risk  in  anchoring  where  one 
di'ems  it  to  be  necessary,  there  can  be  no  necessity  to  run  rashly  for  one  of  these  anchor- 
ages, but  rather  wait  at  anchor  outside  for  a  pilot,  or  till  such  time  as  you  can  obtain  a 
iufficient  practical  knowledge  of  the  place  by  means  of  your  bouts,  so  as  to  be  able  to  take 
the  vessel  in  safety  yourself. 

10th.  When  any  one  wants  to  beat  to  windward  on  this  coast,  or,  what  is  the  same, 
wishes  to  go  from  the  Oronoco  or  Surinam  to  Cayenne,  he  must  work  along  the  coast 
with  the  ebb  tide,  in  from  34  or  4  fathoms  water,  out  to  8  or  9  fathoms  ;  for  though  you 
may  be  shouldered  away  'y  the  current  to  the  N.  E.,  you  will  gain  very  well  en  thejtack, 
to  the  S.  E.,  or  E.  S.  E.,  but  with  the  flood  it  is  necessary  to  anchor ;  for  then  both  wind 
and  current  being  against  you,  you  will  irremediably  be  driven  upon  the  coast. 

llth.  Those  who  from  the  Antillas  are  bound  to  any  port  in  Guyana,  ought  to  keep 
their  larboard  tacks  on  board,  until  in  a  convenient  latitude  to  make  the  land  to  the  south- 
ward of  their  port  of  destination,  which  ought  to  be  more  or  lest  to  the  southward,  accord- 
ing to  the  practice  and  knowledge  of  the  navigator  who  directs  the  vessel;  but  upon  all 
this  const,  especially  from  Cayenne  to  the  Oronoco,  even  the  most  experienced  are  unable 
to  ascertain  the  places  where  they  find  themselves ;  and  without  the  assistance  of  ob- 

33 


513 


jiiw,  I  1  iitm^i^mwf'tW'^"  "*'fti"''"'^>iPIHPP'"W 


614 


Dead  Reck- 
oning. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   CX)AST  PILOT. 

servations  for  latitude,  and  of  prudent  conjectures  on  the  different  appearances  to  winj. 
ward  and  leeward,  they  would  often  commit  very  serious  mistakes.  ' ' 

The  environs  of  Demernraare  the  parts  of  the  coast  easiest  known,  on  accouotofthe 
trees  being  burnt  and  cut  down  to  clear  the  land  for  cultivation;  and  where  these     j. 
have  been  clea  ed  away,  there  are  clear  spots,  or  gaps,  in  which,  (as  already  stated  1 
houses.  Sec,  may  be  plainly  seen.     When  at  a  loss,  it  is  best  to  anchor  till  you  can  cleur 
up  your  doubts ;  as,  although  you  lose  the  time  in  which  you  are  at  anchor,  yet  vuu 
keep  still  to  windward,  which  is  what  interests  you  most;  and  which,  if  lost,  it  would 
cost  you  much  time  and  labor  to  recover. 
.      12th.  DEAD  RECKONING  in  Shoal  Water,  as  on  the  Coast  of  Guyana,  ^c.~.\,  I 
the  greatest  uncertainty  in  the  situation  of  a  vessel  arises  from  the  errors  in  the  doiid 
r  ckoning,  caused  by  currents,  to  diminish  such  errors,  and  render  the  computation  m  re 
correct,  it  is  advisable  to  take   off  the  log-chip  from  the   log-line,  and  to  substitute  a 
leaden  weight,  w  sighing  4, 6,  or  8  pounds,  as  may  be  judged  necessary  ;  this,  takins  the 
bottom,  (when  the  log  is  hove  with  it,  in  place  of  a  log-chip.)  will  not  so  easily  fuHovr 
the  vessel,  or  be  influenced  by  currents.     By  this  mode  it  is  clear  that  the  log  will  ghovr 
the  whole  distance  which  the  vessel  runs,  whether  caused  by  winds  or  by  vurreDts 
Then  having  made  fast  the  log-line,  before  you  haul  it  in,  mark  the  bearing  of  it,  and  i 
the  opposite  point  or  direction  will  be  the  course  which  the  vessel  makes  good.    It  is  clear 
that,  by  this  mode,  thp  course  and  distance  ought  to  be  as  exactly  found  as  if  no  current  ex- 
isted.   If  you  heave  the  log  with  a  chip,  in  the  usual  manner,  as  well  as  a  log  with  a  lead 
attached  to  it,  and  compare  the  distance  by  it,  and  the  course  which  the  vessel  appearsto 
make  by  compass,  with  the  distance   and  course    found   by  the  proposed  method,  you 
will  be  able  to  ascertain  the  direction  and  velocity  of  the  current. 


SOVTH  AMERICA,  SOVTH  OF  THE  EQUATOR. 

WE  now  commence  south  of  the  Equator,  with  the  Island  of  Fernando  NoroDhaandthe  j 
Roccas,  Hs  the}'  have  often  fiillen  in  with  in  the  route  to  South  America. 
Fernando  FERNANDO  NORONHA. — This  island  is  remarkable  by  a  high  rocky  peak  on  its  | 

Noronha.  north  side,  called  the  Fyrnmid,  very  barren  and  rugged ;  and  by  its  S.  W.  point,  named 

the  Hole-in-tho-wall,  which  is  peirced  through,  and  gives  a  free  pessage  to  the  sea. 
The  Pyramid  appears,  at  a  distance,  like  a  very  high  steeple,  or  tower.     The  southside  { 
is  distinguishable  by  a  little  rocky  isle,  that  appears  like  a  statue.     The  island  is  about ' 
^  miles  long,  and '^  or  2jl  broad.     It  has  been  the  rendezvous  of  vessels  employed  in  the  { 

southern  whale  fishery,  ice,  for  procuring  supplies  of  cattle,  sheep,  poultry,  wood  kc;  I 
but  water  is  frequently  scarce.  East  India  ships  have  also  occasionally  touched  here,  I 
when  they  have  been  horsed  to  the  westward  by  the  currents. 

On  approaching  the  island,  no  soundings  will  be  found  until  veiy  close  in.  There  is  no  I 
danger  but  what  may  be  seen,  excepting  a  rocky  spot  off  the  south  side  betwetMi  two  ami  | 
three  miles  from  the  shore,  and  a  rock  at  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  S.  W.  point, 

The  road,  or  principal  anchorage,  is  ou  the  north  side  of  the  island,  being  slieltered  liv  I 
the  north-eastern  land,  and  several  islets  in  that  direction.     The  anchorngo  has  from  10 
to  12  fathoms,  loose  sandy  ground,  at  about  half  a  mile  from  the  citadel  point,  or  nenre.-t 
shore.     It  is  unsafe  to  lie  in  with  northerly  or  N.  W.  winds,  which  are  said  to  previiil 
from  December  to  April ;  in  the  other  months  the  winds  are   mostly  from  the  S.  E.,or  | 
easterly  ;  sometimes  at  N.  E. 

Fernando   Noronha  was  formerly  appropriated  exclusively  by  the  Brazilian  govern- 
«.         ment,  as  a  place  of  exile  for  their  vilest  criminals,  under  the  control  of  u  garrison.    Alllhel 
-''K        little  sandy  bays  and  anchorages  are  defended  by  forts. 

Water  may  be  obtained  here :  but  in  the  dry  season  it  is  sometimes  very  scarce.   In  I 
seasons  of  drought,  which  are  not  uncommon,  the  rivulets  are  dried  up,  and  the  vegeta- 
tion parched.     There  are  but  few  vegetables,  but  plently  of  live  stock  and  fish,  with  an 
immense  quantity  of  doves.     The  fresh  water  is  obtained  from  a  well  near  the  goveruor'i  | 
house,  in  the  cove  called  Water  Bay;  but  the  cask  must  be  rolled  over  some  rocks e 
swung  off  to  the  boat  over  the  impending  surf. 

Wood  is  cut  on  the  larger  islet  to  thd  N.  £.,  called  Wooding,  or  Rat  Island.  This  islet  I 
is  nearly  surrounded  by  rocks,  and  there  is  a  risk  of  staving  the  boat  when  taking  olTthel 
wood,  as  it  is  heavy,  and  sinks  if  thrown  into  the  water.  Should  the  governor  permit  I 
wood  to  be  cut  on  the  main  island,  it  may  be  conveyed  without  much  danger  from  the  Hue  I 
sandy  bays  to  the  westward  of  the  road. 

In  1805,   Captain  Mortimer  found   but  a  small   supply  of  wat..r,  few  vegetables,  I 

.  plenty  of  live  stock  and  fish,  and  an  immense  quantity  of  doves.     On  the  9th  day  of  April,  I 

1827,  H.  M.  ship  Cambridge,  Capt.  J.  T.  Mating,  touched  here,  and  there  were  Btthit| 


mmm 


mm 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


615 


irances  to  wind- 


NoroDhaandthe 


tiine  about  200  'iDhabilaots  on  the  island :  of  these  60  were  soldiers,  under  the  gOTernment  o ' 
g  Prussian  officer,  who,  with  the  assistance  of  an  engineer,  was  repairing  the  fortifica. 
tions  and  erecting  new  points  of  defence. 

From  Tobacco  Point,  or  the  south  point  of  the  island,  a  reef  of  rocks  even  with  the 
water,  extends  half  a  mile  to  the  southward ;  and  to  the  S.  E.  by  E  ,  2i  miles  from  the 
game  point,  is  the  centre  of  a  rocky  patch,  on  which  the  sea  always  breaks.  Within  a 
line  with  these  rocks  the  pyramid  is  shut  in  with  the  highest  hill  on  the  south  side  of  the 
ialand.    Between  this  reef  and  the  shore  is  a  channel  of  from  10  to  15  fathoms. 

The  current  here  commonljr  sets  strongly  to  the  westward,  for  which  due  allowance    The  Roecas. 
must  be  made  in  rounding  the  islands  to  the  N.  E. 

THE  ROCCAS.— These  are  dangerous  low  keys,  16  or  17  leagues  to  the  westward 
of  Fernando  Noronha,  and  on  which  the  Britannia  East  India  ship  and  King  George 
transport,  deceived  by  the  currents,  were  lost  in  1805.  The  keys,  or  islets,  are  sandy, 
ffith  shrubs  upon  them  ;  they  cannot  be  seen  from  the  masthead  in  the  clearest  weather 
gtihe  distance  of  more  than  3  leagues.  At  their  N.  E.  end  is  a  high  rock,  and  the  sea 
breaks  exceedingly  high  all  rouiid  them.  The  ship  Glory,  at  two  miles  to  the  west  of 
the  reef,  found  bottom  at  28  fathoms,  coral  rock.  The  current  here  waa  found  to  set  24 
miles  hourly,  to  the  westward.     Rise  and  fall  of  tide  6  feet.  Tide. 

COAST  OF  BRAZIL,  by  Barm  Rouissin — The  appearance  of  the  coast  of  Brazil  Coaat  of 
is  very  different.  From  the  Island  of  Santa  Catharina  up  to  Olinda  Point,  (60  leagues  Brazil. 
north  of  Cape  Frio,)  the  land  is  very  high  and  woody,  and  can  be  discovered  in  fine  wea- 
ther from  50  to  60  miles  distant,  and  consequently,  with  little  care,  a  vessel  can  make 
jgnd  without  danger.  North  of  this,  in  many  places,  the  land  is  very  low,  and  not  to  be 
perceived  from  that  distance ;  as,  for  example,  between  Espirito  Santo  and  Mount  Pas- 
cal ;  between  the  Bay  of  Porto  Seguro  and  the  Bay  of  All  Saints ;  between  the  Torre 
de  Gracia  de  Avila  and  Cape  St.  Augustine ;  and  finally,  every  where  between  Olinda 
and  the  Island  of  Maranham :  in  all  these  places  the  land  is  more  or  less  low,  few  moun- 
tains can  be  perceived,  being  so  far  in  the  interior. 

Sounding  in  general  is  of  very  little  service  to  indicate  the  distance  from  the  land,  par- 
ticularly from  Point  Santa  Catharina  Island  up  to  Olinda,  on  account  of  the  great  depth 
eveu  at  a  short  distance  from  the  shore,  except  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  Abrolhos. 
It  may  be  generally  stated  that  the  depth  under  the  following  parallels,  is  nearly  this ; 
70  fathoms  at  18  leagues  distant  from  the  land  of  Santa  Catharina ;  40  fathoms  at  12 
leagues  from  the  Paranagua ;  50  fathoms  at  12  leagues  east  from  the  Island  of  San  Se- 
twstiao ;  35  fathoms  at  5  leagues  south-east  of  Joatinger  Point ;  77  futhoms  at  18  leagues 
eouth-east  of  Rio  Janeiro  entrance  :  finally,  more  than  60  fathoms  at  7  leagues  only  from 
Cape  Fiio.  The  depth  of  the  sea  is  very  gi-eat  N.  E.  of  Cape  Frio,  for  at  30  leagues  Depth  of  the 
distant,  in  a  direction  E.  i  S.  of  Cape  St.  Thomas,  we  did  not  find  the  bottom  even  with  Sea. 
100  fathoms.  Soundings  increase  again  E.  and  S.  E.  of  Abrolhos;  generally  speaking, 
it  i.-  in  a  few  instances  not  to  be  depended  on,  that  a  less  depth  than  100  fathoms  is  to  be 
met  at  30  leagues  from  the  coast. 

No  bottom  is  to  be  met,  even  with  200  futhoms,  eight  leagues  only  S.  E.  of  St.  Sal- 
vador, nor  at  12  miles  south  of  this,  although  at  a  distance  of  4  miles  there  are  but  20 
fathoms ;  and  finally,  E.  from  Cupe  Morro  San  Palo,  we  did  not  find  the  bottom  with 
120  fathoms,  although  at  9  leagues  distant.  From  Bahia  to  Olinda  the  coast  is  not  less 
bold,  for  at  9  leagues  east  of  Torre  de  Gracia  de  Avila  the  sounding  is  over  180  fathoms ; 
at  the  same  distance  9  leagues  east  of  the  bar  of  Itapierucu  it  is  over  200  fathoms ;  the 
soundings  are  over  190  fathoms  20  leagues  from  Rio  Real,  and  15  fathoms  are  found 
10  leagues  east  of  Rio  San  Francisco.  Finally,  every  where  up  to  Pernambuco,  there 
are  not  less  than  30  to  40  fathoms  at  9  or  10  leiigues  distant  from  the  shore,  and  between 
Olinda  and  Pernambuco,  from  18  to  20  leagues  distimt  from  the  shore,  the  bottom  is  not 
met  over  120  fathoms.  Though  the  sounding  be  less  north  of  Olinda,  yet  it  is  too  great 
at  a  small  distance  to  be  of  service. 

North  of  Cape  San  Roque,  the  land  being  more  low,  and  extending  into  the  sea,  the 
soundings  decrease  gradually  towards  the  shore. 

From  Monio  Mnlancia  up  to  the  village  of  Amufadas,  there  are  but  15  fathoms  at  16 
leagues  distant,  and  farther  north  the  soundings  increase,  but  it  may  be  taken  as  a  gene- 
ral rule,  that  10  fathoms  are  to  be  met  with  at  the  distance  of  10  or  12  miles,  between 
Amufadas,  and  Jericacoara.  Opposite  the  village  of  Caraca  there  ia  a  spot  where  24  to 
25  feet  only  of  water  are  to  be  met,  over  an  extent  of  three  leagues,  but  it  is  the  only 
place  up  to  Maranham. 

The  coast  of  Brazil  offers  this  particular,  viz.,  that  there  are  two  banks  or  shoals  at  no 
great  distance  from  the  shore,  the  first  of  which  is  not  far  distant  from  the  land,  and  in 
many  places  rises  over  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  in  some  other  places  form  the  breakers  or 
shallow  waters.  The  other  bank,  farther  distant  from  the  shore,  is  not  equally  distant 
any  where.  It  cannot  be  stated  as  forming  shallow  water,  but  it  is  a  fact,  that  between  -'^  ■,., 
this  bank  and  the  former  there  is  a  deep  channel,  separated  from  the  main  sea  by  this 
bank  and  the  small  islands  of  Figuera,  Castillo,  Guemado,  los  Alcatroces,  los  Abrolhos. 
Mtnuel  Luis  Shoal  may  be  considered  as  the  prominent  point  of  this  second  bank. 


-.1 1  IRWI 


516 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  temperature  of  Brazil  varies.  In  the  southern  latitudes  the  winter  is  pretty  se- 
vere. Frost  and  snow  are  not  uncommon  at  Rio  Grande.  The  seasons  may  be  divided 
into  two,  viz.,  the  rainy  season  and  dry  season,  the  last  of  wliich  is  from  September  to 
February.  TKe  rainy  season  continues  from  March  to  September,  but  the  only  mootha 
in  fact  which  may  be  considered  as  rniny,  are  May,  June,  and  July. 

On  the  Brazil  coast  the  south  monsoon  is  from  March  to  September.  The  northerD 
one  from  September  to  March.  The  prevalent  winds,  according  to  the  saying  of  the  Da- 
tives, during  the  south  monsoon,  are  from  E.  8.  £.  and  S.  S.  E.,  and  during  the  north- 
ern monsoon  are  from  E.  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.  ;  this  may  be  the  case  at  sea.  I  will  not 
oppose  this  fact,  having  no  reason  for  it ;  but  I  can  assure,  from  my  own  observation 
that  at  a  short  distance  from  the  shore  I  did  not  find  the  monsoon  so  regular  as  it  is  gup! 
posed ;  in  fact,  the  most  prevalent  wind  at  all  times  is  from  the  eastern  part  of  the  com- 
pass. The  rabnjos  are  very  strong  winds,  blowing  from  the  S.  W.  during  the  rainy  sea- 
son. They  last  three  or  four  days  with  great  force,  not  so  great  when  it  rains,  but  very 
heavy  in  dry  weather.  This  begins  at  the  change  of  the  moon.  The  graint  are  squalls 
and  are  met  more  frequently  in  the  neighborhood  of  Abrolhos  Islands,  and  called  for  this 
reason,  Abrolhos  squalls.  They  are  more  frequent  in  the  months  of  May,  June,  July 
and  August,  and  in  very  rainv  seasons  they  blow  from  E.  S.  £.  They  say  they  arise 
froin  a  white  cloud  of  a  round  shape,  and  of  a  little  appearance  at  frst,  and  by  and  by  in- 
crease to  such  a  force  as  tu  be  dreadful. 

Land  breezes  are  very  regular  on  the  whole  extent  of  Brazil  coast,  but  not  equally 
regular  and  strong,  but  more  so  as  you  approach  the  equator.  At  Rio  Janeiro  they  are 
not  very  regular,  and  very  often  not  at  all  felt.  The  land  breezes  are  more  powerful  in 
the  northern  monsoon,  and  in  the  southern  monsoon,  very  often  the  land  breeze  has  quite 
the  same  direction  as  the  sea  breeze,  this  part  coming  from  the  S.  W. 

It  is  a  general  rule,  that  the  land  breeze  will  be  more  powerful  in  proportion  as  the 
sea  breeze  is  so.  It  may  be  stated,  that  a  vessel  can  depart  from  Brazil  any  day  it 
pleases. 

Generally,  the  more  you  proceed  south  along  the  coast,  the  more  you  mi^st  expect  to 
find  the  wind  coming  from  the  south  and  west,  in  the  rainy  season.  In  thib  ;:ime  of  the 
year,  from  Abagoados  Patos  up  to  Cape  Frio,  they  blow  with  great  violence  from  S.  E. 
to  S.  W.,  and  even  N.  W.  In  this  case  they  turn  into  hurricanes,  and  are  called  pam- 
puiros.  In  the  River  Plata  they  are  very  dangerous.  If  at  sunset,  foggy  clouds,  and 
the  land  appears  more  distinct  at  a  small  distance,  it  is  an  omen  the  wind  will  blow  from 
the  S.,  or  S.  W.,  and  they  will  be  powerful  in  general.  They  last  in  proportion  as  they 
are  more  heavy,  and  lust  longer  if  not  so  dreadful.  When  they  turn  into  a  hurricane, 
they  will  never  last  over  twenty-four  hours.  When  the  wind  hauls  towords  the  east, 
yoa  may  expect  fine  clear  weather.  It  is  to  the  contrary  when  it  nears  towards  the 
west :  easterly  winds  bring  clear  weather ;  westerly  winds  bring  fogs. 

Nothing  positive  can  be  said  respecting  the  regularity  of  the  currents  :  they  generally 
follow  the  direction  of  the  wind,  for  there  is  no  river  of  a  sufficient  magnitude  on  the 
whole  extent  of  the  Brazilian  coast,  capable  of  causing  a  current,  according  to  numerous 
observations.  The  average  running  of  the  currents  is  at  the  rate  of  six-tenths  of  a  mile 
an  hour;  in  the  monsoon  time,  never  over  that  rate,  and  in  many  instances  below  it,  even 
no  current  at  nil.  It  is  only  north  of  Pernambuco,  that  the  current  can  be  considered 
as  permanent,  and  capable  of  causing  some  errors  in  the  day's  work  of  a  ship ;  and,  even 
in  this  case,  it  is  only  when  you  go  along  the  coast  at  no  great  distance,  for  if  distant  at 
sea,  no  current  exists.  From  what  has  been  said  respecting  winds  and  currents,  we  may 
infer  that  no  impediment  exists  in  navigating  the  Brazilian  sea,  from  Santa  Catharinato 
Olinda  Point,  and  it  is  entirely  useless  to  endeavor  to  make  land  more  south  than  the 
place  bound  to,  as  formerly  proscribed.  If  going  to  Olindn,  or  any  other  piiico  more 
north,  up  to  Maranham,  it  is  bptti>r  to  keep  enst  of  the  place  bound  to,  in  onler  to  coun- 
teract the  effects  of  tho  curretits,  which  run  generally  W.  N.  W.,  as  will  be  more  par- 
ticularly stated  when  describing  the  several  harbors,  and  the  manner  to  reach  them. 
Lighthouie.  A  lighthouse,  which  exhil)itsa  revolving  light,  has  been  erected  at  the  entrance  of  Per- 
nambuco, by  which  that  part  of  the  coast  may  be  recognized. 
The  Cape  THE  CAPE  AND  BANKS  OF  ST.  ROQUE.— The  Cape  of  St.  Roque  admits 

and  Banks  hardly  any  description,  for  nothing  particular  exists  by  which  this  cape  may  be  distin- 
i>J'  at.  Roque,  guished  from  the  sandy  beach.  The  color  of  tho  sand  is  white,  but  in  some  places  ap- 
pears of  a  reddish  tinge,  owing  to  the  reflection  of  the  light,  ond  by  this  reason  is  not  a 
very  certain  guide.  From  place  to  place,  bushes  are  to  be  seen  on  the  top  of  the  bench, 
and  some  trees  can  be  discovered  far  in  the  interior,  which  is  not  tho  case  in  coming 
from  the  south.  Cape  St.  Roque  is  not  in  fact  the  most  extreme  end  of  this  great 
elbow  of  the  South  American  land,  for  the  direction  of  the  shore  remains  nearly  the 
same  twenty  miles  farther,  and  it  is  only  at  Calcanar  Point  that  it  changes  its  course  to 
N.  N.  W. 

From  St.  Roque  the  land  lowers  more  and  more,  and  8  miles  distant  it  forms  Cape 


'^^mm 


T-- 


•^^mmm. 


It  it  forms  Cape 


BLUNT' S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

petetinga,  which  cape  offers  no  more  particulars  than  St.  Roque,  and  the  beach  is  of  the 
wme  white  sand. 

The  Portuguese  cosmographer,  Pimentel,  admits  that  near  Cape  Petetinga  there  is  a 
good  watering  place  for  ships,  but  w.  had  no  chance  to  ascertain  that  fact. 

Near  Cape  Petetinga  the  soundings  begin  to  indicate  the  shallow  water  of  the  Banks 
of  St.  Roque.  This  shoal  runs  in  a  direction  parallel  with  the  shore,  nearly  60  miles, 
and  the  average  breadth  may  be  considered  6  miles.  The  channel  between  them  and 
the  main  lond  is  from  5  to  6  miles  wide,  and  it  is  reported  that  vessels  of  a  less  draft  of 
water  than  7  or  8  feet,  can  pass  without  the  least  danger.  The  greatest  distance  from 
the  northern  shoal  to  St.  Roque  is  20  miles. 

Notwithstandiug  the  small  height  of  the  shore  near  these  shoals,  in  fine  and  clear  wea- 
ther, it  may  be  discovered  before  you  reach  them. 

The  whole  extent  we  ascribe  to  the  shallow  water  is  not  equally  dangerous,  and  it  is 
reported  that  places  exist  where  large  ships  may  cross  them.  As  the  whole  coast  is  of 
forr  little  interest,  one  will  do  better  to  keep  at  a  distance  froiu  it. 

The  eastern  breaker  stands  12  miles  distant  from  Calcanar  Point.  The  sea  seldom 
breaks  over  it.  The  next  west  of  the  former,  and  8  miles  distant  from  dos  tres  Irmaos 
Point,  is  called  the  Lavandera,  and  the  third  one,  called  the  Ureas,  stands  12  miles  N. 
E.  i  N.  from  Tubaroa  Point,  and  opposite  St.  Alberto  Bay.  The  sea  breaks  constantly 
with  great  force  on  these  two  last,  particularly  when  the  wind  blows  from  the  sea. 

By  keeping  at  a  reasonable  distance,  there  is  not  the  least  danger  to  be  apprehended. 
We  found  the  soundings  increasing  regularly  and  very  fast,  towards  the  sea,  the  surest 
proof  that  no  more  shallow  water  is  to  be  met,  though  in  many  charts  another  shoal  is 
marked  E.  20°  N.  of  this  place.  This  we  consider  as  an  error,  for  the  reasons  previous- 
ly stated. 

The  soundings  are  of  no  service  to  indicate  the  approach  of  this  place.  The  nature  of 
the  bottom  seems  to  be  the  same  every  where,  and  we  found  it  always  a  mixture  of 
white  madrepores,  intermixed  with  sand,  and  in  some  instances  with  gravel. 

The  green  color  of  the  water,  like  every  shallow  water,  deserves  more  notice,  and  you 
may  consider  yourself  safe  as  long  as  you  have  not  reached  this  green  water. 

The  current  runs  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  W.,  at  the  rate  of  nearly  2  miles  an  hour;  and 
the  tide  rises  from  6  to  10  feet,  according  to  the  new  or  full  moon. 

From  Cape  St.  Roque  to  Ponta  Petetinga,  is  5  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  and  N.  W.  by  N. 
At  the  foot  of  this  hill,  or  eminence,  is  a  stream,  where  you  may  obtain  water ;  and  at 
about  a  musket  shot  from  shore  is  a  high  reef,  near  which  you  may  anchor  in  3  or  4  fath- 
oms; bottom  of  Bund  and  mud.     The  coast,  in  general,  is  flnt  and  barren. 

At  3  lengues  from  Petetinga,  westward,  are  some  rocks  on  the  shore  called  Pedra  da 
Garca,  near  which  any  ship  may  anchor;  and  at  about  15  leagues  to  the  west,  is  the 
Pouta  das  Fedrns,  or  Poin*  of  Rocks,  with  the  rocks  called  the  Three  Brothers.  Of  all 
the  coast  between,  the  countiy  is  bear  and  black,  its  surface  covered  with  sand,  and  it  ap- 
pears like  small  islands. 

Off  the  Pta.  dns  Pedras  are  three  shoals  of  rock,  having  a  channel  between  them  and 
the  main,  of  3  and  4  fathoms.     At  3  leagues  outward  are  reefs  above  water. 

Of  the  River  Guamare  to  the  S.  W.,  the  distinguishing  marks  are  two  inland  sugar- 
loaf  mountains  of  unequal  heights.  To  the  west  is  the  island  Tubarao ;  then  follow  the 
rivers  Amargosa,  Cavallos,  and  Conchas :  of  these  rivers  the  first  two  lead  to  the  Salines, 
or  Salt  Ponds  of  Assu  ;  whence  many  parts  of  Brazil  have  been  supplied.  The  coast 
hence  trends  to  the  Ponta  do  Mel,  or  Honey  Point,  as  shown  on  the  chart.  The  point 
may  be  known  by  its  high  red  cliffs ;  and  hereabout  were,  and  probably  still  are,  some 
palm  or  cocoa  trees. 

At  the  river  Upanema,  situate  as  shown  on  the  chart,  are  natural  salinas,  which,  like 
tiiose  of  Assu,  require  no  artificial  means  for  crystnlliz.ition.  Its  entrance  has  a  bar  of 
little  more  than  one  fiithom  at  high  water,  although  within  there  is  a  depth  of  eight  fath- 
oms. Here  the  land  is  very  level ;  and  on  the  west  of  the  river,  there  are,  as  far  as  a 
field-piece  can  carry,  red  clifl's.  Within  land  is  Monte  Vermelhos,  a  sugar-loaf  hill. 
Ships,  however,  should  not  advance  into  the  bay,  os  it  is  full  of  shallows. 

From  the  River  Upanema  to  the  N.  W.,  the  next  river  of  any  consequence  is  the 
laguaripe,  which  may  be  known  by  a  round  bare  hill  of  sand  on  the  N.  W.,  terminating 
Id  a  rock  below,  and  within  land  a  inountiiin,  having  seven  sugar-loaf  points. 

Five  leagues  inland  from  the  laguaripe  rises  the  range  of  the  Gumame  Mountains, 
which  extend  ten  leagues  in  the  direction  of  east  and  west. 

Commencing  at  about  throe  leagues  from  the  River  Inguoripe.  the  land  for  nearly  four 
leagues,  close  to  the  sea,  appears  dark  and  full,  with  several  openings  like  bays.  At  about 
half  a  league  from  the  commencement  of  these  openings  are  some  white  cliffs,  in  sliape 
iilie  a  schooner,  with  all  sails  set,  and  head  at  east.  So  soon  as  this  full  land  terminates, 
tlie  coast  assumes  a  more  flat  ard  level  appearance. 

Upon  the  south  bank  of  the  River  laguaripe,  at  the  distance  of  about  nine  miles  from 
the  entrance,  is  the  town  of  Aracati.    At  the  entrance  is  a  bar,  narrow  and  dangerous, 


517 


Tide. 


'X 


518 


Seara. 
Light. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT, 
owing  to  BRnd-banlcB  on  each  side ;  nnd  upon  these  the  surf  is  very  violent.    The  sand  i> 


BO  loose  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  that,  even  with  the  coasting  vessels  of  the 


country, 


every  precaution  is  required.  The  river  widens  immediately  within  the  bar,  and  forma 
rather  a  spacious  bay  ;  but  the  port  cannot,  from  the  uncertainty  of  its  depth,  ever  be< 
come  important,  and  it  has,  at  times,  been  nearly  cholied  up.* 

Pimentel  desci  ibes  the  Buy  of  laguaripe  to  the  south-eastward  of  Seara,  which  he 
Bays,  forms  a  small  harbor  to  the  westward  of  some  low  level  land.  The  bay  is  surround. 
ed  by  very  high  perpendicular  cliffs,  against  which  the  sea  breaks  at  half  tide,  it  hns  • 
high  round  rock,  behind  or  within  which  is  shelter  and  anchorage  in  two  and  a  hnlf  or 
three  fathoms.  On  the  N.  W.  of  this  bluff  rock  you  may  anchor  in  the  very  roll  of  the 
sea,  as  it  has  4  and  5  fathoms ;  and  on  the  strand  are  pits  for  watering.  Alongside  of  the 
rock  of  laguaripe,  on  the  east,  the  River  Xaro  falls  into  the  sea :  and,  on  its  west  side 
three  leagues  out  to  sea.  is  a  shallow  of  green  water,  of  5  to  7  fathoms,  with  bottom  uf 
mixt  snnd,  and,  in  some  places,  small  shells. 

SEARA  is  the  most  important  town  upon  this  part  of  the  coast-  The  bay  on  which 
it  stands  is  formed  by  Point  Macoripe,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  light,  37  feetabovethe 
surface  of  the  sea,  (in  lat.  3"  40'  30"  S.,  and  long.  38°  31'  W.,)  to  the  eastward,  and  by 
the  River  Papina  to  the  westward,  an  extent  of  about  4  leagues.  It  is  extremely  opeo- 
its  greatest  depth  being  3  miles.  ' 

Abreast  of  the  town,  and  at  the  distance  of  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  extends  a  rid?e 
of  rocks,  level  with  the  water's  edge,  and  within  which  small  craft  generally  anchor,  the 
entrance  to  the  anchorage  being  around  the  eastern  end  of  the  reef. 

The  land  within  Point  Macoripe  is  a  high  and  irregular  snnd-hill,  terminating  in  the 
point,  which  has  a  tower  near  the  extremity.  Ships  advancing  from  the  N.  E.  should 
not  approach  the  point  nearer  than  three  miles,  and  should  choose  a  berth  wifhontthe 
points  which  form  the  bay.  Tolerable  anchorage  may  be  obtained  by  bringing  the  point 
to  bear  S.  E.  by  E.,  and  the  town  of  Seara  S.,  about  4  miles  distant  from  shore,  In  5 
fathoms,  sand  and  mud.  His  Majesty's  ship  Inconstant,  in  1814,  was  the  first  Enijlish 
ship  of  war  that  had  anchored  here  within  the  memory  of  the  oldest  inhabitants ;  having 
brought  up  in  a  spot  which  had  previously  been  occupied  by  the  American  frigate  Con- 
stitution. 

The  Recife,  or  Reef,  forms  a  complete  ridge,  at  n  conbiderable  distance  from  the  shore 
and  is  to  be  seen  at  low  water.  It  extends  parallel  with  the  shore  for  about  one-quarter 
of  a  mile,  with  two  openings,  one  above  and  the  other  below  the  town.  A  small  vessel 
may  come  to  anchor  between  it  and  the  shore  ;  but  a  ship  can  bring  up  only  in  one  of 
the  openings  of  the  ridge,  or  on  the  outside  of  it.  A  vessel  coming  in  from  tho  nonh- 
ward  should  make  Point  Macoripe,  which  is  a  leiiguo  to  the  eastward  of  the  town,  with 
a  small  foit  on  it,  and  may  thence  bring  up  in  6  or  5  fathoms.  On  the  appearance  of  a 
ship,  tho  town  fort  displays  a  white  flag  upon  a  tall  flag-staff. 

Nortli-eastward  of  Seara,  between  the  reef  and  shore,  is  a  rock,  called  Podra  da  Vel- 
ha,  or  the  Old  Woman's  Rock,  which  may  l)e  known  by  tho  breakers  over  it.  When  a 
vessel  leaves  tho  port  she  may  pass  between  this  rock  and  the  shore,  giving  berth  to  a 
shoal  which  lie^  about  100  yards  to  the  northward,  or  she  may  run  out  between  the  rock 
and  the  principal  ridge,  or  reef. 

On  tho  1st  of  January,  1824,  a  vessel,  commanded  by  Mr.  J.  W.  Matthewson,  was 
wrecked  by  striking  on  the  Pedra  da  Vcllia,  while  lying  to  for  a  pilot.  The  rock  ap- 
peared to  be  in  size  not  more  than  two  or  three  times  the  length  of  tho  ship.  It  lies 
about  ono-third  of  the  way  between  Point  Macoripe  and  the  inner  anchorage,  and  the 
depth  all  round  it  is  3i  fathoms. 

Captain  Matthewson  says,  "In  going  into  tho  bay.  I  kept  tho  lead  constantly  goin;; 
and  when  in  3i  futhotns  wore  ship,  with  her  head  off  shore  ;  at  the  monuuit  before  she 
struck  wo  had  this  depth  of  water.  She  struck  only  twice,  did  not  stop,  and,  ns  quick 
aa  the  lead  could  be  hove,  we  had  3i  fathoms  again.  The  vessel  drew  scarcely  nine  feet 
of  water. 

Tho  broach  may  be  seen  on  the  rock  at  low  water;  but  in  the  day  time,  when  the  sea 
breeze  sets  in,  the  water  generally  tops  and  shows  so  much  alike  that  it  is  nut  easy  to 
distinguish  the  place  of  the  rock  in  the  general  swell. 

The  inner  anchorage,  above  mentioned,  is  betwet^n  the  recife,  or  reef,  and  the  shore. 
You  enter  by  the  eastern  channel  and  go  out  by  tho  western,  when  you  cannot  fetrhnut 
by  the  eastern  one.  Here  a  vessel  lies  at  low  water,  surrounded  by  breakers,  except  in 
the  channels;  and,  as  the  pilots  are  very  inattentive,  it  is,  altogether,  very  dangerous. 
This  is,  nevertheless,  becoming  a  place  of  very  considerable  trade. 
**  From  Seara  the  coast  trends  N.  W.  by  W.,  to  Jericoacoara,t  the  depth  gradually 


■^^ 


*Ko«|er'H  TrnvelH  in  Ilrn/.il,  vol.  1.  p.  \7^>. 


I  with  M'a-v 


'^  f  "  Jericoacoura  i«  u  Imy  covered  with  M>a-wccd.  and  its  coadt  Imre  and  uorren.  It  is  riiil  of  nhallowt, 
fiavjag  near  till!  sjiora  only '-^  fiillKiiiis  Itn  distingiii'^hin);  riiiirk  id  a  line  iiiuli  nioiuituiii,  iiliiio.it  rouDil, 
tt  little  inland,  tho  ground  bruakiujf  near  it,  and  furuiing  others  not  (|uite  so  high." — [I'inientel.J 


T^ 


■"WH^WPi 


mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  519 

iitreM'OK  '^^  ^^'"■® '  *"**  ■  ^-  W.  course  should  be  pursued,  to  avoid  a  spit,  the  base  of 
jhich  extends  fri>m  Mount  Melancias  to  Jericoncoara,  and  terminnfes  in  a  N.  E.  direc- 
^n  from  the  latter,  at  the  distance  of  6  or  7  leagues  off  shore.  Having  run  100  miles 
jpoDtheHbove  N.  W.  course,  including  a  mile  and  a  half  per  hour  for  the  current's 
jjistnnce,  in  soundings  varying  from  11  to  20  fathoms,  change  the  course  to  W.  i  N., 
„hich  is  nearly  the  direction  of  the  coast  from  Jericoacoara  to  Mangues  Point,  and  it  will 
life  you  <^  ^^P^^  °^  *^^  '""^  "^  ^'^^  ^^  ^^^  Island  of  St.  Anna. 

^ ..  When  ships  are  bound  to  Maranham,  from  seaward,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
make  the  land  considerably  to  the  eastward,  as  the  currents,  in  general,  set  very  strongly 
lieween  W.  i  S.  and  W.  N.  W.  If,  in  endeavoring  to  make  the  land,  you  should  be  in 
lat,  about  3=  S.,  on  discovering  it  you  will  be  off  Mount  Melaneias,  or  between  it  and 
Seara ;  if  the  latter,  three  other  mountains  will  be  observed  to  the  S.  S.  E.,  lying  nearly 
g.E.  and  N.  W.  of  each  other,  which  mountains  are  about  7  leagues  to  the  westward  of 
gears,  and  are  easily  seen  from  that  place.  About  this  part  of  the  const  you  will  have  a 
bottom  of  fine  sand  and  shells. 

» If  you  should  make  land  when  you  consider  yourself  in  from  lat.  2°  15'  S.  to  2°  30' 
S.,  and  have  a  bottom  of  small  red  and  white  stones,  you  will  be  off  Jericoacoara ;  if  the 
bottom  consists  of  yellow,  blue,  and  red  stones,  you  will  be  off  Parnahiba  or  Taraonia; 
and  three  mountains,  lying  nearly  in  the  meridian  of  each  other,  in  the  neighborhood  of 
the  latter,  will  be  seen. 

"The  whole  coast,  from  Point  Macoripe  to  Parnahiba,  is  sandy  to  about  half  a  league 
inland,  whence  it  appears  well  cultivated ;  so  that  it  is  easily  distinguishable  from  the  coast 
between  Parnahiba  and  Green  Mangues  (Mangroves)  Point,  which  consists  of  nothing 
but  sand,  without  the  least  sign  of  vegetation." 

That  part  of  the  sea  coast  of  the  province  of  Paiuhy,  extending  from  the  Barra  delguar- 
rassu,  the  easternmost  branch  of  the  Rio  de  Parnahiba  to  the  Barra  de  Tutoia,  is  incor- 
rectly laid  down  in  all  our  charts.  The  distance  between  these  two  mouths  is  about  36 
miles,  in  which  extent  the  Rio  de  Parnahiba  discharges  itself  by  four  others.  Two  of 
the  mouths  of  this  river,  namely,  those  of  Igunrrassu  and  the  Barra  Velha,  ere  only  laid 
down  in  the  charts,  while  the  position  of  the  four  others  is  unknown.  Nou>  this  harbor 
of  Tutoia  is  the  only  one  along  this  extensive  line  of  coast  from  Bahia  de  Todos  os  SantM 
ioihe  River  Amawns,  that  admits  of  the  bar  being  crossed  at  all  times  of  the  moon,  by  ves- 
sdidrawing  H  or  15  feet  water.  Notwithstanding  this,  the  position  of  the  harbor  of 
Tutoia  is  not  only  incorrectly  laid  down  in  some  charts,  but  in  many  which  are  tolerably 
correct  in  other  respects,  Tutoia  is  not  even  mentioned. 

The  bar  of  Tutoia  is  between  7  and  8  miles  wide.  The  masters  of  two  English  ves- 
sels, who  sounded  on  it,  never  found  less  than  5  or  6  fathoms  water,  which  corroborated 
the  extract  of  a  log  of  a  large  Brazilian  brig  of  war  that  had  entered  the  harbor  a  short 
time  previous  to  our  arrival. 

The  bars  of  Igunrrassu  and  Barra  Velha  are  not  navigable.  Tutoia,  as  above  men- 
tioned, is  the  only  port  accessible,  and  is  highly  important  in  a  commercial  point  of  view. 
"Inclining  to  the  shore  and  observing  the  snnd-banks  well  as  you  pass  along,  the  en- 
trance of  the  River  Perguicas  will  easily  be  distinguished.  The  sand  will  now  begin  to 
assume  a  higher  and  more  irregular  appearance  :  this  height  and  irregularity  does  not, 
however,  deserve  the  appellation  of  hills.  When  the  Perguicas  bears  S.  S.  E.  you  will 
begin  to  shonlen  your  water  to  8  or  9  fathoms,  but  a  steady  course  should  be  pursued,  as 
you  will  presently  pass  the  spit  formed  by  the  sand  washed  from  the  river,  and  which, 
meeting  the  natural  course  of  the  current  in  the  offing,  inclines  it  to  the  N.  W. 

"  If  the  day  should  be  fur  advanced  when  you  a'"e  off  this  part  of  the  coast,  haul  to 
the  wind  under  topsails  and  foresails  for  the  night ;  standing  off  into  22  or  24  fathoms, 
and  on  into  12  or  14.  It  would  not  be  advisable  to  haul  the  wind  before  you  are  past 
the  Perguicas,  as,  otherwise,  you  may  !)e  short  of  daylight  for  the  operations  of  the  en- 
suing day.  At  daylight  you  mny  bear  up  under  all  sail,  pursuing  the  former  course  and 
distance  from  the  shore,  and  towards  the  conclusion  of  the  sand-banks  the  land  will 
begin  to  appear  a  little  more  fertile,  and  Green  Mangues  Point  will  easily  be  distin- 
guished." 
ANGKRSTEIN'S  ROCKS.— Lat.  4"^  28'  S.,  long.  37°  6'  W.  soundings  11  feet.  Angerstein's 

Extract  of  a  letter  from  Mr.  John  Bouch,  Master  of  the  brig  Angersiein,  dated  Rio    Rock. 
Jaguaribe.  15th  December  1830. 

"In  lat.  4°  28'  S.,  and  long.  37°  C  W.,  I  came  through  a  cluster  of  rocks,  thirteen  in 
number,  from  two  to  three  fathoms  under  water.  I  ran  close  along  side  of  one ;  it  was 
quite  visible  under  water,  and  I  hove  the  lead  on  it  myself,  and  had  not  more  than  11  feet 
water.  They  are  not  dangerous  by  day,  but  I  should  not  like  to  be  among  them  by  night, 
with  a  sea  on.  The  rocks  being  of  a  dark  brown  color,  they  show  themselves  sufficiently 
for  a  vessel  to  pass  clear  of  them  ;  and  before  the  second  cast  of  the  lead  can  be  got,  you 
are  in  10  fathoms  water.  They  lie  in  a  triangular  form,  about  11  miles  from  the  land, 
with  Ponto  do  Mel  S.  S.  E.  i  £.,  tiie  Rod  Mount  un  the  Return  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  7  or  8 


!»■  JiJ    'wmmF 


IP 


520 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


St.  Marco  ST.  MARCO  BAY. — St.  Marco  Bay  is  that  part  of  the  sea  comprised  between  the 

Bay.  western  coast  of  Marnnham  and  the  main  land ;  its  entrance  lies  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W  • 

its  length  is  over  seventy-two  miles,  and  its  width  six  miles ;    every  where  thn  depth  of 
water  is  sufficient  for  large  vessels,  even  frigates,  which  amy  cast  anchor  near  the  bHrbo 
of  St.  Louis,  situated  on  tiie  western  coast  of  the  Island  of  Maninhttm. 

'J'he  prevalent  winds  being  from  the  east,  vesHeis  bound  to  Maranham  must  endeavor 
to  make  the  first  land  east  of  the  island,  except  in  case  of  a  fair  and  favorable  wind  from 
north  to  west.  ■ 

The  white  sandy  beach,  called  Lancoe  Orandes,  is  the  first  land  a  vessel  bound  to 
•  Maranham  must  endeavor  to  make :  but  it  is  proper  to  observe,  that,  by  an  error  in  the 

I  day's  work,  you  may  be  deceived,  and  mistake  the  Lancoe  Poquenas  for  the  Lnncoe 

Grandes,  and  in  such  case  consider  yourself  west  of  the  Purguicas,  when  in  fact  you  will 
be  on  the  east  of  this  shallow  water  :  to  prevent  such  an  error,  the  surest  way  will  be  to 
keep  at  10  or  12  miles  distant  from  the  shore,  with  from  6  to  10  fathoms  wiiter,  nnd  Boii 
along  the  coast  until  you  reach  the  |;reen  mangle  shore;  from  this  point  you  must  steer 
west;  and  very  soon  nt\er  you  will  discover  the  breakers  of  St.  Ann  Island,  and  the  Isiaini 
itself.  Now  you  must  direct  your  course  round  the  breakers  of  St.  Ann  at  2  orSmiigj 
distance,  until  north  of  them,  and  you  will  be  cortoin  to  have  passed  them  when  St.  Ann 
Island  will  stand  south  a  few  degrees  east  of  you. 

Having  passed  the  northern  breakers  of  St.  Ann,  you  must  steer  again  west,  a  few 
degrees  north,  until  you  discover  the  breakers  of  Corao  Grande,  which  you  inny  ap- 
proach as  near  as  the  former.  From  this  point  you  may  proceed  to  the  harbor  by  tno 
ditierent  courses :  if  you  intend  to  follow  the  first  course,  then  you  must  steer  round 
Corao  Grande,  keeping  at  a  regular  distance,  with  10  or  \'2  fathoms  of  water;  if  the 
second,  you  coost  along  the  western  shore  of  Maranham  Island.  Maranham  Island  is 
easily  distinguished  from  Santa  Anna  Island  by  its  greater  height,  and  its  white  shoreto- 
wards  the  north. 

Tho  first  point  to  be  discovered,  when  keeping  close  to  the  Maranham  Island,  is  Cape 
St.  Marcos,  from  which  the  bay  derives  its  name.  It  is  n  high  land  of  vi>ry  great  de- 
clivity, on  the  top  of  which  a  house  is  to  be  discovered,  with  a  must  for  a  s  sniil.  This 
cape  and  land  project  into  the  sea,  nnd  800  yards  from  the  sea  shore  there  are  many 
rocks  and  sandy  breakers,  which  you  must  nut  appionch,  being  very  dangerous. 

Keeping  always  the  same  course,  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  i  S.,  you  will  very  soon  reach  the 
parallel  of  the  small  fort  of  Sun  Antoni  de  lu  Harra,  situated  at  the  point  of  Areias, 
which  forms  the  northern  point  of  St.  Luis  Hinbor.  That  point  being  part  of  the  rocks 
and  sandy  bank  above  stated,  it  will  bo  dangeioiis  to  approach  too  near,  us  long  us  you 
stand  west  of  it,  but  when  you  shall  have  suili-il  beyond  this  capo  you  may  cnstBiichor. 
Shoal  of  Ma-  SHOAL  OF  MANUEL  LUIZ — At  the  distance  of  77  miles  N.  8°  E.  from  Itaco- 
noel  Luiz.  lomi,  you  will  find  one  of  the  most  danserous  shoals  that  you  can  possibly  meet  wilhut 
sea ;  this  is  called  the  nhoal  of  Munoel  Lnix.  and  wuri  only  known  by  the  number  of 
wrecks  that  happened  before  we  were  able  to  discover  or  assign  its  true  position.  It  con- 
sists of  many  groups  of  conical  rocks,  nearly  even  with  the  water's  edge,  separated  by 
intervals,  irregular  both  in  distance  and  in  depth. 

This  shoal  being  situated  in  a  sen  rarely  exp<>!«ed  to  violent  winds,  breaks  only  for  an  in- 
stant, and  that  when  the  tide  is  quite  low,  so  tliat  it  is  almost  impossible  to  porcpiveiteven 
when  passing  very  near.  Nevertheless,  the  rocks  on  the  surface  which  wo  hiive  explored, 
are  not  more  than  from  5  to  15  feet  under  water  at  low  lido,  while  thern  are  8, 12,  and  10 
iiithoms  close  to  them  ;  thus  you  tnay  encounter  this  danger  suddenly,  and  bo  wrecked 
without  the  hope  of  assistance.* 

The  instantaneous  breakings  rise  in  appearance  like  the  back  of  n  whale,  when  tlir>^f'a 
is  calm  ;  and  when  these  disap|)ear.  they  leave  manses  of  white  f(i;"n,  wliic.ii  uru  wlk 
for  some  lime.  When  the  sky  is  cleor  you  may  discover  tho  rocks  under  wator,  wliich 
appear  in  large  black  patches  :  but  ns  these  patches  are  not  perceptible  until  you  are  tiio 
near,  you  must  not  wait  ti>r  such  indications.  After  twohourn  of  llodd,  and  iit  ilie  iJiHiancii 
of  only  half  a  mile,  it  is  probable  you  will  not  see  one  truce  of  this  danger,  if  the  sea  is 
calm. 

The  survey  which  we  made  of  this  shoal  has  enabled  us  to  be  wellocqnainttd  withits 
approaches  from  the  east,  the  south,  and  from  the  west,  so  us  to  bo  certain  tliat  nuthiii; 
dangerous  exisis  in  these  directions.  I  wish  I  could  state  the  same  with  confidence  res- 
pecting the  approach  from  the  north  ;  but  this  examination  would  have  occupied  me  eidit 
days  more,  nnd  we  had  not  the  opportunity  of  making  it ;  for  tho  following  day,  after  we 
had  discovered  this  shoal,  the  bad  season  set  in  with  violence.  The  weather  would  not 
allow  us  to  make  any  more  astronomical  observations. 

All  the  accounts  that  I  could  collect  of  these  rocks  of  Mnnoel  Luiz  agreed,  in  the 
/  midst  of  contradictions,  in  placing  them  more  to  the  southward  of  the  |)laee  which  I  dis- 


"  The  Venus,  of  Liverpool,  in  1814,  experienced  this  miHfortunn ;  for  liaving  struck  upon  this  fatal  rock, 
■he  went  down  iinniudiatcly,  and  entirely  uisappeared  in  10  or  1'-'  minutes. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


631 


{Ofered  them  in,  and  conflncJ  them  to  much  narrower  limits  than  ihoao  in  which  I 
found  them  ;  it  waa  therefore  most  probable  that  I  had  seen  them  oil.  Nevertheless,  I 
Jo  not  affirm  this;  and  our  survey  having  included  the  approaches  to  these  dangers  in 
th» directions  the  most  important  to  vessels  which  frequent  Maranham,  lam  pleiisod  to 
have  resolved  the  question  of  the  actual  position  of  this  danger  in  its  most  esseniial  parts, 
igreeabjy  to  the  instructions  given  me;  leaving  to  a  more  favorable  opportunity  the 
chsDce  of  discovering  whatever  may  be  further  interesting  for  the  benefit  of  navigation 
in  general.  From  our  observations,  made  at  the  anchorage,  400  toises  to  the  south  of  ■ 
tiie  most  westerly  rock  of  Manool  Luiz,  and  under  circumstances  which  assure  us  of  its 
correctness,  I  place  these  rocks  in  latitude  0'  51'  25"  S.,  longitude  W>  14'  45"  W.,  and 
the  variation  observed  at  the  same  anchorage,  Jan.  29,  1820,  was  0°  57'  E.  The  same 
day,  iu  the  evening  of  which  it  was  full  moon,  we  found  the  rise  of  the  tido  was  12  feet.  Tide 
and  that  it  was  high  water  at  5  o'clock  ;  that  the  flood  ran  for  six  hours  at  the  rate  of 
jix-tenths  of  a  mile  per  hour  to  the  S.  W.  and  the  ebb  ran  N.  E.  for  the  same  perioil, 
and  with  the  same  velocity.  Lastly,  the  nature  of  the  rocks  which  form  this  danger 
appears  1o  be  of  the  same  kind  as  those  of  the  Abrolhos,  and  are  similar  to  most  of  the 
otber  rocks  and  islets  at  a  little  distance  from  the  coast  of  Brazil,  which  we  have  already 
described. 

Such  were  the  observations,  according  to  our  surveys,  of  these  shoals  of  Manoel  Luiz, 
when,  in  1825,  we  were  told  that  another  group  of  rocks  had  been  discovered  nearly  7 
leagues  more  to  the  northward,  and  almost  on  the  same  meridian  i.s  ours.  The  discovery, 
entirely  accidental,  was  made  by  Mr.  Da  Silva,  an  officer  in  the  Brazilian  Navy,  who,  on 
his  route  to  Para,  saw  the  breakers  on  his  passage,  and  discovered  these  rocks.  I  am  not 
acquainted  with  the  particulars  of  this  discovery  ;  but  the  position  given  to  this  new  danger 
is  said  to  be  latitude  0"  32'  S.,  longitude  44°  17'  2r'W.,  and  according  to  the  account  we 
received,  there  does  not  appear  to  be  any  doubt  at  least  of  their  latitude. 

One  question  here  presents  itself,  that  is,  to  which  of  the  two  shoals,  Mr.  Da  Silva's  or 
mine,  ought  we  to  give  the  name  of  Manoel  Luiz  ?  If  you  consult  former  charts  which 
notice  this  shoal,  you  will  find  so  little  agreement  among  them,  that  it  will  be  impossible 
todecide  in  favor  of  one  or  the  other.  They  are  marked  as  only  one  group  of  rocks, 
and  not  any  of  them  are  placed  in  the  position  given  either  by  Mr.  Da  Silva  or  myself.  I 
am  therefore  inclined  to  think  that  these  two  dangers  ought  to  be  considered  as  a  contin- 
uation of  the  same  shoal.  Its  extent,  which  would  be  7  leagues  north  and  south,  having 
occasioned  its  being  met  with  in  many  parts,  will  explain,  in  some  measure,  the  different 
positions  that  have  been  assigned  to  it.  I  agree  that  this  hypothesis  would  not  justify  all 
these  accounts,  because  I  am  informed  that  the  popular  opinion  at  Maranham,  for  exam- 
ple, places  the  shoal  one  degree  more  to  the  southward  than  where  we  found  it,  and 
where  wt  are  confident  there  exists  no  sort  of  danger ;  and  we  may  sny  the  same  respect- 
ing the  danger  discovered  by  Mr.  Da  Silva  ;  however,  it  appears,  beyond  all  doubt,  that 
what  is  called  the  Shoal  of  Manoel  Luiz,  is  only  one  of  the  points  of  the  extensive  shoal 
that  Mr.  Da  Silva  and  myself  have  fixed  the  northern  and  southern  limits  of.* 

We  conclude  this  subject  by  observing,  that  it  appears  to  us  difficult  to  determine  from 
the  soundings,  your  distance  from  the  Shoal  of  Manoel  Luiz ;  the  depth  and  the  nature 
of  the  ground  being  so  variable,  at  a  certain  distance  from  the  danger,  that  you  can  de- 
duce from  them  only  very  uncerta  n  conclusions.  The  soundings  of  white  sand,  speckled 
bliick  and  red,  as  before  mentioned,  being  the  most  common  in  that  part  of  the  sea,  be- 
tween the  meridian  of  the  Coroa  Grande  and  that  of  the  eastern  coast  of  the  adjacent 
continent,  extend  10  or  15  leagues  to  the  noithward  of  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  St. 
Marcos ;  but  these  are  not  without  exceptions,  as  you  will  often  find  soundings  of  a  very 
different  appearance. 

Beyond  this  limit,  as  well  as  to  the  eastward  of  Coroa  Grande,  sand  and  broken  madre- 
pore are  the  most  commonly  met  with.  These  are  nearly  the  same  which  you  so  con- 
stantly inot't  with  all  along  the  coast  of  Brazil  from  the  Abrolhos.  We  found  them  at  the 
extremity  of  all  our  routes  to  the  eastward,  and  on  the  parallel  of  this  shoal ;  and  it  is 
probable  they  extend  much  farther  to  the  northward  and  eastward. 

In  tiid.  Inokeii  inndrepora  are  most  common  in  the  vicinity  of  this  danger,  to  the  east, 
south,  and  west  of  it ;  but  they  are  mixed  sometimes,  though  rarely,  with  coarse  gravel, 
brolten  shells  and  rocks,  but  varying  in  depth  so  much,  that  you  cannot,  by  the  soundings, 
determine  your  distance  from  the  shoal  to  within  5  or  G  leagues. 

MARANHAM. — Alight  is  erected  on  Mount  Itacolomi,  on  the  western  side  of  the  Maranham. 
Bay  of  Ma-anham.  Light. 


*  It  is  letnaikable  that  Captain  Anpleton,  in  1817,  discovered  a  dangerous  shoal  in  latitude  0O45'S.. 
and  about  4  leHgucH  in  ilie  we»iwaru  ot  tlie  reputed  situation  of  the  Bunk  of  Mnnnel  Luiz,  whicli  would 
npiiear  to  lie  pliicud  »oinewliero  between  Rouissinnnd  Da  Silva's  Ro<ks,  and  probably  will  prove  to  be 
aconiinnniion  of  the  same  dancers.  He  >tates  ihcm  to  be  composed  of  sharp  pointed  coral  roclcs,  with 
only  14  and  15  feet  water  over  tliem  in  some  places,  while  close  to  tiiese  shallows  the  lead  will  full  into  40 
fathoms ;  this  description,  in  its  principal  features,  very  much  resembles  that  of  the  Baron. 


HBia 


6M 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


lAghlhouM.         Th      ,Khttioua«  it  k  four-iquare  building,  its  four  aidei  bearing  on  the  four  cunllnii 
points  of  tno  campass ;  is  75  feet  high  from  its  base,  and  147  feet  from  hi^h  water  tnK\i 
at  the  spring  tides.    It  is  n  revolving  light  of  two  distinct  colors,  one  natural  and  the  other 
of  a  reddish  color,  visible  and  invisible,  about  two  minutes  each  revolution,  and  lies  iQ|nti 
tude  3°  09'  N.,  longitude  42°  24'  W.  of  Greenwich. 

Direetiorufor  Maranham,  hy  Lieut.  E.  Stopford,  H,  M.  ichooner  Picklt, 

Vessels  bound  to  IVfaranhnm  may  cross  the  equator  in  longitude  40"  W.,  wiiich  will 
enable  them  to  fetch  ihe  Lancoes  Gnindes,  a  landfall  deservedly  recommended  by  Rnryg 
Rouissin.  It  has  been  customary  to  mnke  the  lighthouse  on  the  Island  of  Santa  Anna 
but  an  error  in  the  longitude  will  be  of  less  importance  by  making  the  Lancoes  Urnndeg' 

A  vessel  arriving  off  Santa  Anna,  and  not  having  sufficient  daylight  to  find  her  way  into 
Ligh(hoiuc.     the  Bay  of  St.  Mark,  may  lay  to  for  the  night  off  and  on  the  lighthouse,  keeping  it  as  near 
south  of  her  as  possible,  distant  6  and  7  miles.     The  light  is  revolving,  and  can  be  aeen 
distant  about  15  miles. 

As  there  is  constiintly  a  heavy  swell  on  the  coast,  anchorage  should  be  avoided  ifposii. 
tie.  as  it  is  both  difficult  and  dangerous  to  recover  the  anchor. 

From  Santa  Anna  a  vessel  should  steer  W.  4  N.,  by  doing  which  she  will  pugg  the 
breakers  off  Coroa  Grande,  at  the  distance  of  about  3  miles,  and  Mount  Itacolomi  \vl||  ij^ 
discovered  bearing  about  west.  When  distant  about  10  or  11  miles  from  the  mount,  alter 
course  to  S.  i  W.,  till  the  fort  and  flag-staff  of  St.  Mark's  are  made  out  nearly  ahead.  St. 
Mark's  Point  should  not  be  passed  at  a  greater  distance  than  a  mile  and  a  half,  that  the 
Bank  of  De  Cerca(on  the  starboard  hand  going  in)  may  be  avoided:  a  reef  of  rocks  runs  off 
from  the  point;  and  to  avoid  these,  it  should  not  be  approached  within  three-quarters  of  a 
mile.  Within  these  limits  a  vessel  may  coast  along  until  Fort  Antonio  bears  E.,  or  E.  by 
S.,  when  she  should  anchor  and  wait  fur  a  pilot. 

A  vessel,  by  following  the  above  route  to  Maranham,  will  avoid  getting  entangled  amoDii 
the  swash-ways  on  the  Coroa  Grande  Shoals,  mentioned  by  Captain  Courteniy  as beine 
so  very  dangerous  to  strangers. 

The  inhabitants  of  Maranham,  in  consequence  of  their  harbor  filling  up,  expect  to  be 
obliged  to  transfer  their  port  of  shipment  to  Alcantra.  Lieut.  Stopford  visited  this  port, 
and  is  of  opinion  that  it  is  preferable  in  every  respect  to  Maranham,  being  easier  nf  access, 
capable  of  containing  more  ships,  and  allowing  them  to  get  in  or  out,  at  any  timo  of  tide 
with  the  prevailing  winds.  The  depth  of  water  is  also  greater.  The  Picklowasan. 
chored  about  one-third  of  a  cable's  length  from  the  shore,  in  7  fathoms  at  low  water,  being 
more  than  in  any  part  of  the  harbor  of  Maranham,  even  at  high  water. 

Captain  Courtenay  represents  the  bottom  along  the  whole  line  of  coast  as  being  com- 
posed of  quicksands,  to  which  he  attributes  the  frequent  loss  of  anchors  by  vessels.  Lieu- 
tenant Stopford  is  of  a  different  opinion,  having  iroquontly  anchored  on  all  parts  of  the 
coast  between  Muraidiam  and  Para.  It  is,  however,  indispensable,  that  vessels  shouldas- 
certain  the  quality  o*  the  bottom  before  anchoring,  as  it  is  foul  in  many  pinces.  The 
Pickle  lost  her  small  bower,  before  Lieutenant  Stopford  was  aware  of  this,  by  nnchorino 
on  rocky  ground.  Vessels  should  be  careful  not  to  anchor  off  St.  Mark's  Point,  as  tlie 
ground  is  foul,  and  many  anchors  have  been  lost  there. 
Route  from  RUUTK   FROM  MARANHAM  TO  PARA.— A  vessel  bound  from  Maranhamto 

Maramam  to  Para,  during  the  rainy  season,  should  get  to  the  northward  of  the  equator  as  soon  as  pes- 
Para.  sible.     She  will  thus  avoid  the  light  batlling  winds  and  calms  which  prevail  in  this  season: 

and  also  the  current,  which  sets  from  E.  N.  E.  to  S.  E.  about  '2  or  3  miles  per  hour,  oc- 
casioned by  tlie  waters  frum  the  various  rivers  and  bays  of  the  coast. 

To  the  westward  of  the  Island  of  Salina  there  are  some  white  cliffs  so  nearly  resem- 
bling those  to  the  eastward  of  that  island,  that  they  have  been  frequently  njistiiken  for 
each  other.  Vessels  mistaking  the  western  cliffs  for  those  east  of  Salinas,  have  stood  oo 
until  they  have  become  lost  on  the  Braganza  Shoal,  or  in  that  equally  dangerous  place 
called  the  Well.  The  utmost  caution  therefore  is  necessary  to  attend  to  the  following  di- 
rections for  anchoring  at  .Salina  : 

Bring  the  town  of  Salina  to  bear  S.  by  E.  and  anchor  in  9  fathoms.  The  whole  coast 
from  Turnivissais  woody,  and  the  white  sand-hills  are  very  remarkable. 

Inturmation  obtained  from  Senhor  Saramar.has.  the  chief  pilot,  by  Lieutenant  Page, 
'  comminder  of  the  U.  S.  schooner  Boxer,  at  Para,  South  America  : 

1.  A  flag  hoisted  on  the  flag-staff  at  Salinas  village,  is  the  day  signal  thnt  a  pilot  maybe 
obtained. 

2.  If  the  pilot  should  not,  however,  come  off  during  the  day,  and  at  night  there  be 
shown  two  lights,  the  pilot  may  be  expected  off  the  following  morning. 

3.  Ifthere  be  three  lights  shown,  the  pilot  has  noboat,  and  musthave  one  from  the  vessel 
''        to  bring  )"tn  off;  in  which  case  the  vessel  must  bring  the  village  of  Salinas  to  bearS.S. 

W.,  in  s     tidings  of  five  or  six  fathoms  water,  when  Point  Atalaia,  (improperly  called  in  the 
charts,  Atasia,)  will  be  distant  about  5  miles.     You  may  here  dispatch  a  boat,  well  man- 


'^*jfc.. 


rfi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  523 

j^,  which  mint  be  kept  close  in  wi«h  the  shore  at  Atalnin.  clenr  of  the  surf,  until  it  meeta 
with  nu  opening  in  the  roef  which  lines  the  coast  in  front  of  the  villiiRe.  through  which  it 
ii)U<t  piws.  I"Bi<le  the  reef,  the  woter  is  quite  smooth,  and  you  may  land  nny  where  upon 
ibe  beifh. 

4.  Tho  boat  should  be  sent  at  hnlf  fluod,  in  order  that  It  may  return  the  same  tide.  It 
iihigh  water  OP  full  and  change  at?  o'clock,  and  off  shore  at  8.     Parn,  June  i,  1832.  High,  f      ,r. 

H.  M.  S.  Fickle  remained  at  anch(  -  one  night  in  7  fiithoms,  with  the  town  bearing  S. 
Ijy  E.,and  had  no  difficulty  in  regal  ing  her  anchor  in  the  morning,  Lieut.  Stopford  ob- 
terves.  that  accidents  have  frequently  iiappened,  and  lives  have  been  lost  by  boats  going 
fur  tlio  pilots  being  swamped  in  the  surf.  They  have  frequently  landed  immediately  un- 
dertlie  town,  wiiich  is  very  wrong,  and  Lieut.  Stopford  recommends  them  to  pass  to  the 
westward  of  the  island:  by  doing  this  n  river  will  be  obserred,  which  leads  up  to  the  town, 
(here  boats  may  land  in  safety,  and  thereby  avoid  the  surf  outside. 

MARANHAM  TO  PARA  —Para,  or  (Jrand  Para,  is  the  northernmost  province  of  Maranhamto 
Brdzil.  nnd  is  celebrated  for  ite  cotton,  sugar,  vanilla,  chocolate,  and  coffee.  The  coast  Para. 
from  the  Hay  of  Maranhnm  to  Para,  is  generally  low  and  sandy,  and  has  many  littlo  inles, 
of  the  name  description,  with  numerous  coves  and  rivulets.  Pimentel  has  described  the 
,l,ole,  but  his  description  is  not  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  modern  navigator,  unused  to 
treep  nl""g  '^e  shore.  Some  of  it  may,  liowover,  be  useful.  A  vessel,  he  says,  bound 
from  Maranham  to  Para,  should  take  her  departure  in  the  morning,  advance  to  the  an- 
ciiorBge  off  the  Aracaji,  or  cliff,  already  described,  thence  stand  out  to  sea,  beyond  the 
shortls  of  Cuma,  (or  Carnaveros  Banks,)  which  may  be  effocted  in  a  run  of  8  leagues. 
Hiiving  passed  these,  you  approach  the  sand-bank  stretching  from  the  western  shorp,  and 
over  which  there  are  6,  10,  7,  6,  5,  7,  and  8  fathoms.  Thus  you  may  proceed  to  the  N. 
f(,  \V.,  orN.  W.  by  N.,  to  the  distance  of  22  leagues,  when  the  ground  of  the  bank, 
white  sand  with  black  specks,  according  to  a  late  survey,  will  be  succeeded  by  coarse  sand 
anJ  giones,  or  brown  sand  and  broken  shells,  with  13  to  17  a.id  20  fathoms  w,:  jr.  Here 
you  will  be  off  the  Island  of  St.  Joao,  or  St.  John,  and  near  the  parallel  of  (jii;   degree 

joutli> 

The  Island  of  St.  Joao  is  nearly  level  with  the  sea,  and  about  3  leagues  long  from  E. 
N.  E.  to  W.  S.  W.  Between  the  N.  K.  end  of  this  island  nnd  Point  Turivazo,  to  the  W. 
X,  Wm  the  distance  is  about  9  leagues.  The  bay  between  affords  shelter,  and  vessels 
miiy  anchor  to  the  N.  W.  side  of  St.  John's  Island,  in  from  C  to  4  fathoms,  sandy  ground. 

At  the  distance  of  IH  leagues  W.  N.  W.  from  Turivazo  Point  Is  Cnpe  Ciurupi,  over 
which  is  a  mountain,  insulated,  and  therefore  remarkable.  This  mount  is  several  leagues 
inland,  and  neir  it  is  another,  somewhat  smaller  and  rounder.  The  coast  here,  as  in  other 
parts,  is,  however,  low,  level  and  sandy,  covered  with  a  dark  brushwood,  and  from  the 
noint  a  shonl,  with  breakers,  extends  3  miles  out  to  sea. 

From  Cape  Gurupi  lothe  River  Cayte,  on  the  western  bank  of  which  is  n  small  town 
of  the  same  name,  the  distance  is  24  leagues,  on  a  course  nearly  west.  At  the  entrance 
of  this  river,  on  the  eastern  side,  are  several  low  islets,  of  the  same  name.  Off  the  shore, 
throughout  this  extent,  the  bottom  is  generally  flat,  and  thtre  is  commonly  7  and  8  fath- 
oms at  3  leagues  off,  with  clear  ground. 

From  the  Cayte  to  the  inlet  of  Maracuno,  tho  distance  W.  by  N.  is  12i  lenguos.  In 
sailing  along,  it  is  proper  to  keep  2  or  3  leagues  off  shore,  in  soundings  of  7  and  8  ft  thorns. 
The  const  here  is  distinguished  by  a  range  or  chain  of  white  sand-hills,  the  highest  of 
which,  Piraussu  Hill,  is  about  3i  leoijues  westward  of  Cayte  Point,  the  western  point  of  fi 

the  mouth  of  the  Cayte.  Piraussu  Hill  appears  like  a  high  bluff,  and  perpendicular 
point,  close  to  the  sea,  with  rod  cliffs  on  its  eastern  side. 

At5i  leagues  W.  by  N.  from  Piraussu  Hill  is  Point  Atalaia,  distinguished  by  a  watch- 
tower,  having  a  gun  which  is  occasionally  fired  when  a  vessel  is  approaching.  O  t  mak- 
ingthis,  and  keeping  a  good  lookout,  the  smoke  may  be  seen.  At  this  place  arc  two  emi- 
nences of  white  sand,  and  immediately  west  of  the  point  is  the  inlet,  or  Bay  of  Maracuno, 
having  5  and  6  fathoms  of  water,  and  good  ground. 

RIO  PARA. — Point  Tigioca,  tho  eastern  point  of  the  mouth  of  the  Para,  is  9  leagues  Rio  Para. 
west  from  Atalaia  Point;  and  within  this,  at  the  distance  of  7  miles  to  the  S.  W.,is  Point 
Tnpua.  Here  an  extensive  bank  extends  2  leagues  from  shore  between  the  two  points, 
and  to  the  northward  are  the  Tigioca  shoals  and  breakers,  the  positions  and  nature  of 
which  can  be  understood  only  by  reference  to  the  charts.  The  passage  in  is  between 
these  shoals,  and  has  a  depth  of  12,  11,  and  15  fathoms,  at  about  11  miles  from  the  south- 
ern shore,  in  latitude  O*'  23'  S.  There  is,Hlso,  a  channel  for  small  vessels,  at  5  miles  from 
shore,  and  along  the  edge  of  tho  Baxo  do  Boronoco,  the  bank  which  extends  from  Point 
Tigioca,  ns  already  noticed. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  PARA.— Vessels  bound  to  Para  should  endeavor  to  make  the  Direetionsfor 
land  about  Salina  or  Cayte,  which  lies  to  the  eastward  of  Salina.  and  is  remarkable  for  its   Para. 
white  sand-hills.     Steering  to  the  westward,  keeping  the  land  in  sight  6  or  7  miles  dis- 
tant, you  will  make  the  Point  Atalaia,  which  has  a  house  near  its  extreme  point,  and  im- 
mediately after  will  see  the  village  of  Salinas,  which  faces  the  sea,  and  easily  perceived  in 


1)1  I    I  iijilll  illlWW^WfW»''y>W>||iB!>gflB«ppWtgffl|ip||jpillTO'l» 


'524 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


clear  weather  by  its  white  buildings.  Here  vessels  take  a  pilot  for  Para,  and  if  oneshould 
not  come  off  by  mai<ing  a  signal,  you  will  have  to  send  the  boat  on  shore  for  one. 

Should  you  not  see  Salinas,  or  find  any  difficulty  in  procuring  a  pilot,  by  attendineto 
the  following  directions  you  will  find  no  difficulty  in  passing  the  shoals,  or  gettiae  ud 
the  river :  ^ 

The  land  between  Salinas  and  Tigioca  runs  about  W.  by  N.,  about  4  leagues.  Toti]* 
westward  of  P,  linns  you  will  see  a  point  of  land,  S.  W.  of  which  are  two  remarkable 
white  sand-hills,  and  by  keeping  a  good  lookout  at  the  mast  head,  you  cannot  pass  them 
without  seeing  them,  they  being  the  only  thing  remarkable  between  Salinas  and  Tigjocg 
and  is  a  good  departure  to  run  between  the  shoals.  Tigioca  lies  about  17  miles  to  the 
westward  of  this  land,  and  is  a  low  point.  You  will  have  running  along,  11,  12,  14, and 
15  fathoms  water,  channel-way,  and  be  careful  in  sounding;  come  no  near pt  the  land 
than  9  or  10  miles,  as  you  approach  Tigioca,  for  fear  of  getting  into  the  Well,  which  is 
a  dangerous  place,  and  oftentimes  deceives  strangers  by  s'.tpposing  it  to  be  a  good  channel 
inside,  ns  most  of  the  books  and  charts  represent,  but  should  never  be  attempted  by  aor 
The  Well  (or  entrance  of  do.)  is  about  5  or  6  miles  to  the  north  and  eastward  of  Point 
Tigioca,  and  has  from  20  to  38  fathoms  water ;  by  getting  that  soundings  you  may  judge 
immediately  you  are  in  the  Well,  for  there  are  no  such  soundings  any  where  about  that 
part  of  the  coast.  Haul  off  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  south  and  east,  to  avoid  the  Bit- 
'  ganca  Bunk,  for  in  that  soundii.^s  you  are  not  far  off  danger ;  perhaps  the  next  souadinm 

you  may  not  have  more  than  2  or  3  fathoms,  and  less,  as  I  have  found  it  to  be  the  case 
in  passing  that  channel  with  a  boat,  and  sounded  all  the  way,  sometimes  not  6  feet,  and 
breakers  both  sides.    I  have  been  the  more  exact  in  pointing  out  the  danger  of  this  chan- 
nel, that  it  may  never  be  attempted  by  any,  and  if  unfortunately  you  should  happen  to  get 
in.  and  your  water  shoalens,  if  flood  tide,  come  to  anchor  and  wait  for  the  ebb,  and  then 
you  should  not  haul  oflf  the  land  too  sudden,  for  fear  of  the  Braganca  Bank,  which  is  in- 
side of  you,  and  which  you  cannot  avoid  seeing,  as  it  breaks  constantly  unless  at  high 
water,  and  the  sea  perfectly  smooth,  which  seldom  happens  to  be  the  case,  tiiat  a  vessel 
can  pass  it  without  seeing. 
Channel  be-         THE  CHANNEL  BETWEEN  TIGIOCA  AND  BRAGANCA  BANKS.-When 
IweenT^gioca  you  make  Tigioca  Point  from  the  mast  ^'ead,  and  running  along  the  land  so  that  you  can 
artdBraganca  see  it  plain  from  the  deck,  (say  9  or  10  miles,)  you  will  soon  discover  the  Braganca  break- 
Banks.  ers  from  aloft,  which  break  very  high  on  the  larboard  hand  going  in,  and  is  the  best  mark 

to  run  in  by.  The  tide  runs  very  rapid  in  this  channel,  and  the  sea  at  times,  and  for  the 
most  considerable.  The  ripple  caused  by  the  tide  at  times  appears  to  a  stranger  like  shoal 
water,  where  there  are  probably  from  14  to  15  fathoms  water  :  and  while  the  Braganca  is 
in  sight,  you  need  not  be  apprehensive  of  any  danger,  for  the  bank  is  steep  close  to  the 
breakers,  und  you  should  pass  within  2  miles  of  them,  or  even  less,  and  wlien  Tigioca 
Point  bears  about  S.  E.  by  S.,  Braganca  distant  about  2  or  3  miles,  you  may  haul  up  about 
S.  W.,  to  avoid  Tigioca  Shoal,  which  lies  outside  of  you,  and  stretches  to  the  south  and 
west,  and  breaks  heavy  at  the  east  part,  but  seldom  seen  going  through  this  channel;  nud 
should  your  water  shonlen,  approaching  said  shoal,  (which  will  not  be  the  case  whilst  the 
land  is  in  sight  plain  from  the  deck,)  haul  more  to  the  south,  and  your  water  will  deepen 
immediately;  you  may  then  proceed  up  the  river  by  keeping  the  Braganca  in  sight,  which 
will  always  be  a  sure  guide  for  going  in,  keeping  them  at  a  distance  'f  ubout  two  mile!, 
more  or  less,  as  the  courses  given  may  be  affected  more  or  less  by  the  tides. 

The  land  between  Tigioca  and  Point  Taiper,  is  broken,  appearing  in  spots  of  small  isl- 
ands, which  makes  them  more  remarkable,  and  near  to  Taiper  is  a  dry  sand-bank,  about 
5  miles  from  the  land,  and  to  the  south  of  which,  abreast  of  Point  Taiper,  is  good  anchor- 
age, in  about  7  or  8  fathoms  water,  and  is  where  pilots  come  to  anchor,  outward  bound, 
to  wait  an  opportunity  of  running  out  between  the  shoals,  on  account  of  beinjn;  lessei- 
posed  to  the  heavy  sea  which  sets  in  with  the  flood  tide,  and  out  of  the  strength  of  it. 

Point  Taiper  is  about  11  miles  from  Tigioca  Point.  The  land  between  Taiper  and 
Vigin  lies  about  S.  W.  by  W.  and  N.  E.  by  E.,  distant  about  17  miles,  between  which, 
keeping  at  a  distance  from  5  to  4  miles,  you  will  have  9  to  10  fathoms  water ;  and  as  you 
aoproach  Vigia,  your  water  will  shoalen  graduuliy  to  8  and  7  fathoms.  The  point  of 
Vigia  is  remarkable  in  coming  from  the  noithward,  and  as  you  draw  to  the  southward, 
another  point  will  open,  which  shows  the  entrance  of  Vigia.  Be  careful  not  to  approach 
too  near  Vigia,  as  there  is  a  shoal  stretches  off  about  N.  W.  by  N.,  2  miles  from  the 
northern  part  of  the  land,  which  forms  thu  entrance;  and  north  from  tlie  southern  pan, 
which  forms  the  entrance  to  Vigin,  2i  or  nearly  3  miles,  hard  sand.  Vigia  is  a  nmall  fish- 
ing town,  and  cannot  be  seen  in  passing,  as  there  is  an  island  in  front  of  it,  which  stands 
some  distance  from  the  entrance. 

Running  along  the  land,  at  the  distance  of  4  miles,  you  will  have  7.  8.  and  9  fathoms  to- 
wards Colaros,  it  being  a  small  village  which  faces  the  water,  and  is  very  easily  distin- 
guished by  its  white  buildings,  distant  from  the  south  point  of  the  land  C  or  7  miles.  Off 
this  village,  or  between  it  and  Vigia,  is  good  anchorage  about  3  miles  from  the  land,  sticky 
bottom.  Be  careful  not  to  come  too  close  to  Colares,  as  there  is  a  reef  of  rocks  that 
stretches  off  nearly  2  miles. 


mm 


MMM 


mm 


'^^mmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

If  oigbt  is  coming  on,  it  is  advisable  not  to  pass  Colares,  bat  come  to  an  anchor  and  wait 
gntil  morning;  and  to  know  when  you  pass  Colares,  your  water  will  deepen  very  soon 
ifter  as  you  approach  the  Bay  de  Sol,  which  will  be  open  to  your  view.  Bay  de  Sol  is  a 
\age  deep  bay,  being  about  4  or  5  miles  wide  at  the  entrance. 

Be  careful  not  get  into  this  bay,  as  it  is  dangerous,  being  full  of  rocks,  and  no  safe 
jnciiorage,  and  has  sometimes  been  taken  for  Bay  St.  Anthony.    Between  Bay  St.  An- 
thony and  Colares  there  is  no  good  anchorage  that  can  be  recommended  with  safety, 
the  water  being  very  deep,  particularly  abreast  the  Bay  de  Sol,  where  you  will  have 
from  16  to  18  and  20  fathoms  water,  which  is  not  the  case  any  where  else  in  tiie  river. 
Colares  bearing  east  about  5  miles,  steer  from  S.  S.  W.  to  S.  S.  W.  i  W.    You  will 
then  pass  two  small  islands  on  your  larboard  hand,  one  abreast  of  the  land,  which  forms 
ihe  Bay  de  Sol,  (S.  part,)  the  other  about  3  miles  to  the  S.  and  W.     Tn  approaching 
iheBe  islands  your  course  will  draw  you  towards  the  land,  but  come  no  nearer  than  two 
miles,  as  there  are  rocks  which  stretch  off  about  Ij  mile,  with  7  fathoms  close  to  them  ; 
therefore  8  or  9  fathoms  is  near  enough.    As  you  draw  up  with  the  south  island,  you 
make  the  Island  of  Tatuock  nearly  ahead.    Be  careful  in  drawing  up  to  this  island  not 
to  come  too  close  to  it,  as  there  are  rocks  stretching  off  it  to  North  Tatuock,  between 
2  and  3  n^iles.     Leave  this  island  on  your  starboard  hand,  after  passing  the  small  island 
previously  mentioned,  4  or  5  miles  :  you  may  then  haul  in  for  the  land  which  forms  the 
Bay  St.  Anthony.     The  shore  becomes  bold  and  without  danger.  '  The  Bay  St.  Anthony 
is  8  fine  clear  bay,  good  anchorage  all  through,  from  5  to  7  and  8  fathoms,  and  by  hauling 
into  the  bay,  if  you  want  to  anchor,  particularly  the  southern  port  close  in,  which  forma 
alee,  you  will  have  the  sea  perfectly  smooth,  good  shelter  from  the  wind,  and  out  of  the 
strength  of  the  tide  :  but  if  you  want  to  proceed  to  town,  steer  across  the  bay,  the  wind 
being  always  fair  for  going  up  ;  you  will  then  see  several  islands;  keep  between  them 
and  the  pomt  which  forms  the  south  part  of  the  bay,  (or  Point  Penheiro)  which  is  close 
to.    When  you  pass  Point  Penheiro  steer  directly  for  the  fort,  which  stands  on  a 
small  island,  giving  it  a  berth  of  half  a  coble's  length  on  tlie  larboard  hand,  where  you 
must  send  the  boat  on  shore  with  your  papers,  or  come  to  anchor;  the  latler  is  prefer- 
able for  a  stranger,  as  the  channel  is  very  narrow.    When  you  weigh  anchor,  steer  for 
Piira,  or  city  of    Belem,  which  will  be  open  and  plain  to  your  view,  distant  obout  5  miles 
from  the  fort,  keeping  the  land  distant  about  one  mile  on  your  larboard  hand,  and  as  you 
approach  the  town,  haul  in  for  the  shipping,  or  custom-house,  the  next  large  building  to 
St.  Anthony's  Church,  which  is  the  first  or  nearest  church  in  coming  up  the  river ;  then 
yoii  may  anchor  abreast  the  custom-house,  where  you  will  have  to  land  your  cargo. 

j^,  Q, there  is  a  shoal  of  considerable  length  runs  between  the  Island  of  Marajo  and 

the  main  land  that  runs  nearly  north  and  south,  which  the  sea  constantly  breaks  on. 
Nearest  distance  of  said  shoal  from  the  main  land  being  abreast  of  Colares,  or  that  part 
of  the  land  which  forms  the  Bay  de  Sol,  distant  7  or  8  miles. 

High  water,  full  and  change,  at  Para,  12  o'clock. 
Do.  entrance  between  the  shoals,         10    do. 
From  the  mouth  of  the  river,  within  Point  Tigioca,  the  distance  to  the  basin  or  anchor- 
age of  Parn,  is  20  leagues.     All  the  western  side  of  the  river  is  shoal,  but  on  the  eastern 
side  are  even  soundings  of  8,  7,  8,  9,  10,  7,  10,  12,  9,  7,  and  6  fathoms.    In  the  basin 
itself  are  fi'om  5  to  3  fathoms. 

A  vessel  direct  from  sea,  with  good  observations,  may  cross  the  equator  on  the  meri- 
dian of  45°,  where  soundings,  from  50  to  40  fathoms,  may  be  found.  A  course  hence 
W.  by  S.  will  lead  towards  Maracuno  Inlet,  on  the  east  of  which  a  pilot  may  bo  ob- 
tained. The  soundings  over  the  bank  decrease  gradually,  from  40  to  15  fathoms:  and 
it  is  to  be  observed  that  the  flood  tide  sets  strongly  to  the  west,  while  the  winds  are  from 

the  east. 

The  flood  sets  into  the  Rio  Para  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour.  The  beginning  from 
the  eastward  is  very  rapid,  and  it  veers  gradually  to  the  N.  E.  and  N.     The  vertical  rise 

is  10  feet. 

Vessels  outward  bound,  from  Point  Tapua,  steer  according  to  the  tide,  keeping  that 
point  S.  E.to  the  distance  of  fifteen  or  sixteen  miles.  With  Cape  Magoary  then  in  sight, 
haul  up  N.  E.  or  N.  N.  i;*.,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  banks  of  St.  Rosa  on  the  west.  The 
rfind  here  being  generally  from  the  eastward,  with  !  equent  squalls,  great  caution  is  re- 
quired. In  thick  weather,  when  Cape  Magoary  cannot  be  seen,  the  approach  to  St. 
Rosa's  Bank  may  be  known  by  the  soundings  becoming  irregular,  which  is  not  the  case 
to  the  eastward  of  the  channel.  The  weather  shoals  should  be  kept  on  board  as  much 
AS  possible. 

PERNAMBUCO  BAY. — Cape  St.  Antonio  is  the  land  which  vessels  bound  to  Per- 
Dambuco  must  endeavor  to  make  first.  The  coast  north  of  Cape  Antonio  forms  a  bay,  in 
the  centre  of  which  Ires  Pernambuco.  At  the  extreme  end  of  this  coast,  N.  17°  E., 
stands  Olinda  Point:  halfway  from  Olinda  Point  to  Semambius,  the  church  of  Nossa 
Senliora  Da  ilosnrio  is  built  on  a  height;  its  two  towers  are  easily  distinguished  when 
coming  from  the  main  sea ;  going  along  the  coast  at  two  to  four  miles  distance,  there  are 
12  to  19  fathoms  water. 


625 


High  water. 


Ptmambuco 
Bay. 


ip'J  JWilWVIi 


'"^1"""'  i'w»-pf^iflii^wfl»!nip^i^"-wii^w««^i||pp«iipi 


626  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

Lighthouse.         At  the  entrance  of  Pernambuco  a  lighthouse  is  erected,  showing  a  revolving  lighf. 

When  you  have  made  Cape  St.  Antonio,  you  must  keep  at  two  or  three  niilHs  from  I 
the  nhore,  until  you  perceive  the   '''ort  of  Picao,  between  the  N.  W.  and  W.  N.  W 
and  then  steer  in  a  straight  line  to  the  fort  built  on  the  breakers,  and  you  will  QearJI 
until  the  cocoa  tree  of  Olinda  (which  stands  between  the  two  highest  buildings  of  tlin 
•  city)  appears  N.  i  E.  of  you.    In  this  situation  you  will  stand  within  two  or  threg 
thousand  yards  of  the  breakers,  which  form  a  key.     This  anchorage  is  not  of  the  best 
large  ships  ought  never  go  nearer,  and  it  is  prudent  never  to  anchor  in  bad  weather'  J 
West  of  the  meridian  of  the  cocoa  tree  of  Olinda,  notwithstanding  the  contrary  ig  j 
rally  prescribed,  going  to  Pernambuco  during  the  northern  monsoon,  it  ia  best  to  u 
land  on  Olinda  Point.     From  Olinda  Point  up  to  the  Fort  of  Picao,  there  Is  a  shoalex. 
tending  two  miles  from  the  shore  towards  the  sea,  which  makes  it  necessary  to  keep  at  I 
three  miles  distance,  and  by  a  depth  of  water  from  8  to  10  fathoms,  until  the  Fort  Pic^o 
sUwids  west,  a  few  degrees  towards  the  north,  by  which  you  will  avoid  the  English  Bank 
which  is  formed  by  sandy  rocks  lying  at  the  southern  end  of  Olinda  Bank.     That  does 
not  extend  further  east  than  the  meridian  of  Olinda  City,  nor  farther  south  than  the  par. 
allel  of  Fort  (^iesco.     The  soa  breaks  there  with  great  violence  in  heavy  wind,  though 
there  are  2  fathoms  of  water.     Small  vessels  may  avoid  it  to  the  west  and  north,  keepiL  i 
at  half  a  mile  from  the  main  land  from  Pernambuco  up  to  Olinda  Point,  but  such  vesseb 
should  not  draw  over  five  feet,  and  it  is  indispensable  to  have  on  board  a  pilot  for : 
place. 

Buoys.  On  the  English  bank  there  are  two  buoys,  a  red  one  on  the  southern  end  and  a  black  I 

one  on  the  northern  end. 

South  of  the  red  buoy  there  is  plenty  of  water  for  any  vessel.     North  of  the  black 
buoy  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

The  Harbor  of  Pernambuco  is  not  a  very  safe  one,  for  vessels  of  a  great  draft  of 
water  are  not  able  to  cross  the  bar;  for  the  swell  of  the  sea  is  very  great  outside,  and  If  | 
too  near  the  shore,  there  will  be  greater  danger,  should  the  anchor  drag  or  the  shipf 
to  the  leeward,  when  getting  under  sail,  which  may  become  indispensable  should  thewl 
turn  S.  S.  E.  or  £.  N.  E.,  as  is  the  case  in  the  months  of  March  and  September.   B. 
ring  the  northern  monsoon  the  prevalent  winds  are  from  the  east,  particularly  at  thetime  | 
of  new  or  full  moon,  and  though  the  weather  is  clear  and  fine  generally,  yet  it  requiresto 
be  careful  in  the  anchorage,  and  the  surest  will  be  not  to  cast  anchor  too  near  the  shore 
the  bottom  being  very  rocky,  and  :  ..(luisite  to  make  use  of  chain  cables  in  this  place 
more  than  in  any  other.     Large  vessels  will  do  well  to  be  all  times  in  readiness  to  get  I 
under  sail,  and  prudence  requires  to  let  fall  every  evening  a  second  anchor  for  safety  da- 
ring the  night. 

If  there  is  any  necessity  to  remain  a  longtime  at  Pernambuco,  the  best  way  will  be  to  j 
cast  the  two  anchors  off  the  cat-head,  toward  the  main  sea,  with  another  toward  the  W, 
„  .  N.  W.,  on  the  stern  of  the  ship,  in  order  to  prevent  the  ship  from  swinging  during  the 

calm  which  conies  after  every  squall  of  wind. 

The  harbor  if  Pernambuco  is  sufficiently  spacious  and  deep  for  vessels  from  10  to  12 1 
feet  draft  of  water;  it  is  divided  into  two  parts;  the  interior  part,  which  is  called  the 
Poco,  (the  Well.)  is  an  anchorage  situated  on  the  northern  end.     The  entrance  is  formed 
by  several  rocks  or  bunks  of  small  stones.     There  are  from   17  to  30  feet  water  on  the  | 
bar,  as  well  as  inside.     The  shore  is  sandy,  and  the  water  decreases  in  depth,  in  propor- 
tion as  you  go  toward  the  land.     The  only  guard  vessels  have  from  the  winds  coining  I 
from  the  sea,  are  the  rocks,  or  breakers,  before  stated ;  but  they  are  very  deficient  for 
that  purpose,  and  during  the  southern  monsoon  this  place  is  not  at  all  safe.     The  second 
part  of  the  fort  is  called  Recife  Port :  it  is  comprised  between  the  natural  quay  of  rockj 
and  the  city  :  it  is  also  called  Mosqueirno.     This  harbor  is  better  guarded  than  the  for- 
mer, by  the  quay  of  rocks,  which,  at  low  water  mark,  are  from  8  to  10  feet  above  the 
sea  ;  but  to  reach  in  the  Musqueirao,  it  is  necessary  to  cross  the  bar,  on  which,  at  low  | 
water  mark,  there  are  but  7  feet  water. 

If  you  wish  to  carry  your  vessel  in  the  Poco  Harbor,  you  must  proceed  as  follows:- 
Being  situated  as  we  have  already  stated,  inside  of  the  English  Bank,  the  cncoatreoof  I 
Olinda  N.  i  E.  of  you,  you  must  see  a  small  pyramid  built  on  the  shore,  in  a  stra 
line  with  the  church  of  San  Aiiiarao,  which  is  surrounded  with  cocoa  trees;  in  this! 
atiun  the  church  and  pyramid  stand  very  near  the  west  of  the  wood,  and  you  must  follow  I 
that  direction  until  you  perceive  south  of  you  Fort  Picao.     If  you  wish  to  go  into  M- 
queirao  you  will  have  to  steer  S.  i  W.  from  that  place. 

Small  vessels  sometimes  used  to  pass  through  the  south  entrance  to  reacli  Mosqueirao,  I 
which  is  at  the  northern  end  of  the  quay  of  rocks,  whereon  Fort  Picao  is  built.  The 
mark  to  direct  your  course  in  this  case  is,  to  keep  the  two  corner  towers  of  the  southern 
end  of  Fort  Brun  in  the  same  direction,  and  consequently  the  one  covering  the  other, 
and  true  west ;  sail  in  this  direction  until  you  see  the  Fort  Picao  south  of  you :  thei 
steer  along  the  western  side  of  the  breakers,  and  you  will  reach  the  harbor.  Thoreisl 
DO  great  danger  in  going  near  the  breakers;  it  is  customary  with  pilots,  when  called,ti)| 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


627 


come  tf)  take  veBsele  lying  in  the  bay.     We  again  repeat,  that  vessels  trading  with  Per- 
nsmbuco  must  not  draw  over  from  10  to  12  feet  wat«r. 

Tiie  two  harbors  of  Pernambuco  are  safer  than  the  bay,  ships  being  sheltered  from  the 
too  great  swell  of  the  sea  by  the  breakers,  or  quay  of  rocks ;  but  when  the  wind  stands 
east  and  blows  hard,  it  requires  to  be  well  secured. 

The  prevalent  winds  are,  as  in  the  tropical  climate,  from  S.  S.  E.  to  N.  N.  E.;  from 
}  arch  to  September,  they  are  more  toward  the  south,  and  sometimes  S.  W.  ;  during  the 
other  six  months  they  stand  E.  N.  E.  and  N.  N.  E. 

THE   COAST    FROM   BAHIA   TO   ST.  AUGUSTINE.— From  Itapuanzinho  The  Coast 
Point  up  to  Itapuan,  the  coast  bears  no  longer  the  same  appearance  as  it  does  pre-  Jrom  Bahia 
fious  to  your  arrival  at  Bahia.     Here  the  shore  is  but  sandy  and  low,  few  trees  are  to  St.  Avgua- 
to  be  perceived  at  a  distance,  and  from  place  to  place  some  cocoa  trees.      All  along  tine, 
the  shore  a  ridge  of  rocks   are  to   be    met,  and  in  many  instances   they  rise   above 
the  level  of  the  sea;  the  one  at  the  Ttapuan  Point,  particularly,  seems  like  small  islands. 
Thirty-eight  miles  farther  N.  45°  E.  of  Itapuan  Point  you  are  opposite  the  Torre  de 
Garcia  of  Avila,  a  kind  of  fort,  built  on  the  top  of  the  coast,  among  the  trees,  and  which 
is  DOW  used  as  a  house  for  signals.    The  coast,  viewed  from  9  to  10  miles  distant,  ap- 
pears like  a  wall  of  great  magnitude  and  equal  height,  except  where  the  two  rivers,  San 
Joannes  and  Jacuhype,  discharge  into  the  sea,  where  a  large  cut  appears  in  this  wall. 
The  depth  of  the  sea  is  very  great  opposite  this  place,  for  being  only  10  miles  distant,  no 
sounding  is  to  be  met.     From  Torre  of  Avila  up  to  Oiteras  of  San  Miguel,  the  shore  ia 
more  high,  but  with  small  hills. 

All  the  coast  from  Rio  Real  up  to  Rio  St.  Francisco  is  low  and  sandy,  with  small  broom 
bushes,  and  small  hills  are  discovered  at  no  great  distance  in  the  interior.  A  vessel  may 
approach  very  near  the  land ;  the  bottom  is  sandy,  with  gravel  and  broken  rocks.  The 
next  river  after  Lio  Real,  is  Rio  Sergipe,  which  is  21  miles  distant  from  Vassa  Barria. 
The  mouth  of  this  river,  when  viewed  at  no  great  distance,  is  easily  distinguished  by  the 
three  small  hills  of  an  equal  height,  all  covered  with  briars,  lying  9  miles  S.  W.  of  the 
bar.    These  hills  are  called  the  Ostres  Irmaos,  (or  Three  Brothers.) 

At  the  mouth  of  the  Sergipe  River,  a  very  white  sand-beach  is  to  be  seen,  whose  color 
strikes  with  the  green  ground  of  the  coast  all  around.  At  the  bar  the  sea  breaks  with 
great  force  at  the  time ;  from  which  we  must  infer  a  shallow  water.  The  rivers  which 
come  next  in  succession  are,  Colindiba  River,  near  the  Miserias  Point,  and  Japaratuba 
Points,  south  of  the  mountains  of  Pacatuba;  the  countiy  round  Colindiba  River,  is  one 
of  the  most  productive  in  sugar,  cotton,  tobacco,  &c.  There  are  but  7  feet  water  at  the 
bar.  When  viewing  the  bar  W.,  the  Mount  Aracajou  stands  a  few  leagues  N.  VV.,  and 
in  the  west  Morro  Tolha  is  discovered.  The  Mount  Arucajou  seems  to  run  in  a  parallel 
direction  with  the  coast,  and  in  its  northern  extremity  a  deep  cut  is  to  be  perceived. 
The  second  mount  bears  the  shape  of  a  Quaker's  hat. 

COLINDIBA  RIVER.—  Vessels  bound  to  the  Colindiba  River  during  the  northerly  Colindiba 
monsoon,  viz.,  from  March  to  September,  should  come  in  with  the  land  in  the  latitude  10°  Rivtr. 
5U'.  Mount  Aracajou  will  be  about  west,  and  will  appear  to  be  near  the  shore.  Steer 
S.  W.  along  shore  in  no  less  than  5  fathoms,  and  the  Atuliiia  will  soon  be  seen,  and  if 
the  flag  is  set,  it  will  be  a  proper  time  to  pass  the  bar;  and  a  flag  will  be  put  out  north 
or  south  as  it  may  bo  necessary  to  steer.  Sometimes  the  pilots  come  outside  the  bar,  but 
not  at  all  times.  When  the  flag  is  set  on  the  Atalaia,  the  pilots  will  be  in  readiness  on 
or  within  the  bar. 

The  Atalaia  on  with  Mount  Cajaiba  will  lead  in  the  channel  over  the  bar.  Course  N. 
W.byW.  4W.,or  W.N.  W. 

If  in  the  southerly  monsoon,  it  will  be  well  to  run  in  whh  the  land  in  latitude  11°  3', 
the  Three  Brothers  will  tlien  be  seen  thus  --^  —  -— ^  and  Mount  Aracajou  to  the  north- 
ward like  a  promontory,  no  land  to  be  seen  beyond  it.  Steer  along  shore  north-easterly 
in  no  less  than  4  or  5  fathoms,  and  the  Atalaia  will  soon  be  seen,  when  you  can  steer  in 
as  directed  above. 

The  Atalaia  has  the  appearance  of  a  tower  with  a  flat  top  and  flag-stalT  in  the  centre, 
but  ia  notliing  more  than  four  large  spars  put  upright,  and  secured  with  rafters  or  beams, 
some  10  or  15  feet  apart;  some  boards  are  nailed  at  the  top,  which  makes  it  look  white 
when  the  sun  is  on  it.     Steer  direct  for  the  flags. 

If  clear.  Mount  Itabayanna  can  be  seen  30  miles,  and  Aracajou  12  or  15,  the  Atalaia  3  to 
Smiles.  There  was  a  small  nun-buoy  on  the  south  sand-head,  in  May,  1842.  This  has 
been  declared  a  port  of  entry. 

The  coast  from  Rio  Idaparatuba  up  to  St.  Francisco  River,  is  very  dangerous  in  a 
strong  S.  E.  wind,  for  vessels  going  near  the  land,  they  having  no  good  chance  to  escape 
the  wind,  and  the  bottom  too  hard  for  the  anchor  to  have  a  good  hold  in  it.  Prudence 
requires  to  keep  at  some  distance  from  it. 

Near  St.  Francisco  river  the  land  ia  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  even  at  a  short 
distance,  for  which  reason  great  care  ia  required  to  make  land  near  St.  Francisco.  The 
only  mountaiDs  to  be  discovered  at  a  distance  are  the  Itabayanna  and  Pacaluba,  but  only 


-"A^Hmi.'  « 


628  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

in  fine  clear  weather,  and  when  exactly  opposite  the  River  St.  Francisco.  The  entrance 
of  this  river  lies  south  of  Man^uinha  Point,  which  is  very  low,  and  all  covered  with  Mon- 
gel  trees.  It  projects  E.  S.  E.,  and,  at  H  mile  distant  from  it,  in  its  direction,  there  are 
dangerous  breakers.  The  north  of  the  entrance  is  formod  by  a  land  more  low  thnn  the 
former,  having  a  white  sand,  and  in  its  projection  into  the  sea  there  are  no  less  dangerous 
breakers  than  on  the  other  southern  points.  It  is  between  these  breakers  you  must  cast 
anchor  until  a  pilot  comes  on  the  bar.  There  are  from  12  to  13  feet  water ;  the  countiv 
is  very  populous,  well  rultivuted,  and  produces  great  quantities  of  sugar  ;  when  near  the 
land  from  St.  Francisco  River  up  to  Alngoas  is  low  and  snndy,  and  a  ridge  of  rocks,  at  no 
great  distance  from  the  shore,  is  to  be  seen.  Many  small  rivers  discharge  into  the  sea 
but  none  of  a  sufficient  depth  to  be  navigated ;  they  may  be  approached  very  near  with- 
out danger. 

Opposite  Cururippe,  three  miles  distant  from  the  shore,  stands  the  rock  of  Dom  RoJ. 
rigo.  This  rock,  as  well  as  several  smaller  ones,  to  be  seen  only  at  low  water  mark 
have  been  designated  by  some  as  the  Cosmographer  Banks  of  St.  Francisco,  and  stated  to 
be  very  dangerous,  but  with  »ut  the  least  reason.  We  found  all  around  this  place  a  great 
depth  of  water,  and  tlie  shallow  wcter  will  not  extend  over  3  miles.  In  supposing  it  to  ex- 
tend as  far  as  the  Iquia,  as  there  is  no  reason  to  keep  so  near  the  land,  one  will  do  better 
at  all  events,  to  remain  at  a  greater  distance  than  four  miles.  An  important  observation 
is  to  bo  made  on  this  part  of  the  Brazil  coast,  and  agreed  to  by  the  natives,  which  ig  this 
that  the  land  breeze,  (luring  the  night  time,  is  hardly  perceived,  when  4  or  5  miles  from 
the  land,  but  at  daylight  it  begins  to  reach  that  distance,  and  seems  to  attract  the  eastern 
wind  towards  the  north  until  13  in  the  morning ;  and  afterwards  the  eastern  wind  returns 
gradually  towards  the  east :  from  that  fact  vessels  may  derive  some  benefit  on  either 
course,  when  obliged  to  bent.  Near  San  Miguel  the  shore  is  very  bold,  and  nearly  80  teet 
high,  and  the  top  perfectly  even  and  horizontal  for  an  open  space  of  15  miles.  When 
coming  from  the  southernmost,  the  village  of  Macayo  is  to  b'^  discovered  on  the  top  of  a 
highland.  The  church  is  easily  distinguished  ;  and  for  this  reason  the  place  deserves  no- 
tice. The  Jaragua  River  empties  below  Macayo,  and  the  point  which  forms  the  north- 
ern land  of  the  mouth  is  covered  with  cocoa  trees,  and  very  animated  breakers  are  to  be 
seen  nt  some  distance  in  its  direction.  North  of  Macayo.  and  from  the  interior,  the  Mount 
of  Marambnya  is  discovered,  even  nt  45  miles  distant.  This  mount  offers  this  particular 
that  the  country  on  which  it  stands,  though  high,  is  very  level  on  every  side  of  its  base. 
The  shore  north  of  Macayo  is  sandy,  and  iVom  place  to  place  of  a  reddish  color ;  low  trees 
are  seen  not  far  distant  from  the  shore.  The  Fort  of  Tamandare,  though  not  very  im- 
portant, deserves  some  notice,  being  the  only  place  affording  a  safe  shelter  between  Biihia 
and  Pernambuco.  This  anchorage  is  formed  by  a  deep  cut  into  a  bold  shore,  and  is  suf- 
ficiently large  and  deep  for  admitting  large  vessels. 

Nine  miles  N.  i  N.  E.  of  Tnmandare  Harbor,  lies  the  small  island,  or  rocks  of  Alexo, 
situated  at  the  mouth  of  the  small  river  Serenben.  Previous  to  your  arrival  there  the  bar 
of  Rio  Fermoso  is  discovered.  When  you  observe  the  two  rocks  of  Alexo  together,  tiiey 
stand  N.  6°  W.:  then  north  of  these  two  rocks,  Monte  Do  Sella  is  discovered  in  the  in- 
terior, which  derives  its  name  from  its  shape,  (Little  Saddle,)  and  may  be  useful  to  as- 
certain the  situation  of  a  ship. 

Being  a  few  miles  east  of  the  rocks  of  St.  Alexo,  you  will  distinctly  perceive  the  Cape 
of  St.  Augustine,  lying  16  miles  N.  18°  E.     This  cape  is  hardly  covered  with  wood  and 
not  very  thick ;  it  is  of  a  moderate  height,  which  decreoses  gradually  towards  tlie  sen.   h 
offers  the  particular  remark,  that  a  steep  beachof  a  red  yellow  color  is  to  be  seen  in  many 
places  of  it:  it  has  a  barren  prospect  when  nenring  it;  on  its  top  there  is  a  church;  to- 
wards the  north  side,  a  little  below  the  church,  fortifications  are  to  be  seen. 
The  Bay  of         THK  BAY  OF  ALL  SAINTS,  or  BAHIA — Vessels  bound  to  Bnhia  during  the 
All  Saints,  or  southern  monsoon,  should  mnke  kind  near  San  Paulo.     If  during  the  northern  inoosoon, 
BuJda.  they  will  do  better  to  mnke  land  north  of  Itnpuan,    which  is  a  little  further  north  than 

Cape  St.  Antonio.  Upon  the  whole,  this  will  depend  on  the  accuracy  of  the  day's  work, 
the  actual  situation  of  the  vessel,  and  the  wind  to  be  met  with  when  near  the  coast.  The 
main  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Bahia,  called  likewise  St.  Salvador,  is  formed  by  the  cape, 
or  promontory,  of  St.  Antonio  on  the  east,  and  by  the  Island  of  Itapnricn  on  the  west. 
The  mean  distance  from  the  Capo  St.  Antonio  to  Itaparica  Island  is  not  loss  than  four 
miles  :  but  the  one-half  only  of  this  channel,  which  is  towards  the  main  Iniui,  is  snfefor 
navigation  of  large  ships.  If  from  the  Morro  San  Paulo,  you  steer  N.  4(!°  E.,  with  5 
favorable  wind,  you  will  pnss  nt  the  proper  distance  of  the  bold  shore  of  Itaparica  Island, 
and  of  the  breakers  of  St.  Antonio;  but  if  you  are  obliged  to  beat,  it  requires  care  to  avoid 
both  places. 

Nothing  is  to  be  feared  by  keeping  at  equal  distance  from  the  main  land,  on  which 
stand  San  Paulo,  Mount  Arod,  Itaparica,  until  you  discover  towards  the  north,  the  Jnbuni 
Point,  which  is  the  eastern  end  of  Itaparica  Island.  Arrived  opposite  Point  Aratiilin,  pi 
are  now  7  miles  from  Jaburu,  and  5  miles  S.  41"  W.  of  Cape  St.  Antonio,  and  nearly  3 
miles  W.  of  the  southern  extretnity«f  the  breakers  ot  St.  Antonio.     From  that  situatioi  ] 


I  f)aii|iui|l|iJi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


529 


m  most  direct  your  course  straight  towards  the  Cape  of  St.  Antonio  until  two  miles  only 
from  the  shore  ;  frona  thence  steer  straight  towards  the  church  of  Bom  Fim,  (situated  on 
4ft  Point  of  Montferrate,)  until  you  reach  the  Fort  Do  Mars,  or  Sant  Marcello,  near 
ybicb  is  the  usual  anchorage. 

The  flat  of  St.  Antonio,  lying  4  miles  S.  i  W.  of  Cape  St.  Antonio,  there  is  no  dif- 
jcuity  to  avoid  it.  and  is  altogether  not  very  dangerous.  It  is  a  sandy  bank  of  a  reddish 
color ;  no  rocks  are  to  be  met  there,  and  4  fathoms  of  water  are  to  be  found  every  where. 
Sucb  is  the  opinion  of  the  natives,  and  of  the  most  experienced  men ;  but  having  per- 
ceived some  pl.ices  where  the  sea  breaks  on  this  bank  during  strong  wind,  I  would  sug- 
gest to  keep  a  distance  from  this  place  with  a  large  ship,  which  is  the  case  when  fol- 
lowing the  course  we  have  described.  The  general  anchorage  for  merchant  vessels  ia 
iDside  of  the  line  drawn  from  the  Fort  of  Marto  Montferrate  Point.  It  is  necessary  when 
going  to  this  anchorage  to  avoid  the  sandy  bank  of  Panella,  which  we  had  no  chance  to 
ascertain,  but  it  is  reported  by  the  natives  as  a  very  shallow  water,  of  3  to  3d  fathoms  only, 
lying  W.  i  N.  from  Fort  Do  Mar. 

It  is  generally  the  case  that  the  wind  permits  you  to  come  to  anchor  in'frontof  St.  Sal- 
»ador,  the  most  prevalent  wind  being  from  E.  and  from  S.  E.,  and  vessels  can  generally  go 
in  by  plying  small  board.  During  the  night  time,  the  breeze  comes  from  several  points 
of  the  compass,  but  more  generally  from  the  land  side.  The  tides  are  perfectly  regular  Tides. 
from  St.  Salvador,  and  the  flood  and  low  water  has  an  equal  time.  The  harbor  is  very 
safe,  and  there  are  only  n  few  instances  when  a  strong  wind  from  the  S.  W.  blows,  that 
tlie  water  is  much  swelled,  and  the  ships  do  not  ride  easy. 

The  course  to  follow  when  going  out  of  St.  Salvador  is  very  near  the  reverse  to  the 
one  to  proceed  in.  When  one  mile  distant  west  of  Cape  St.  Antonio,  and  steering  4i 
miles  S.  S.  W.  of  the  same,  the  shallow  water  will  be  avoided,  and  afterwards  you  may 
go  round  the  cape  into  the  open  sea.  All  the  lands  near  Cape  St.  Antonio  are  tolerably 
high,  if  compared  to  those  on  the  opposite  side.     They  are  of  a  pleasing  appearance,  be-  ' 

iiig  covered  with  trees,  and  a  Inxurious  vegetation  of  a  green  color.  This  shore,  in  fine 
weather,  can  be  discovered  from  30  miles  distant.  On  the  end  of  St.  Antonio  Cape 
stands  a  lighthouse,  containing  a  brilliant  revolving  light,  showing  two  white  sides  and  one  Lighthouse. 
red,  the  latter  to  be  seen  once  in  every  four  minutes,  situate  on  the  same  site  as  the  former 
one,  viz..  Fort  Santo  Antonio  da  Barra,  but  much  higher,  being  above  140  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  and  is  visible  at  a  distance  of  about  2o  miles.  In  the  day  time,  when  the 
lighthouse  bears  W.,  the  Fort  of  St.  Antonio  appears  as  sepr.rated  at  a  small  distance 
from  the  main  land.  Two  and  a  half  miles  east,  a  few  degrees  south  of  the  lighthouse, 
there  is  another  land  point,  on  top  of  which  stand  the  poles  for  signals.  This  last  point 
forms  with  the  Itapuanzinho  Point,  which  stands  one  mile  east  of  a  small  bay.  Many 
houses  are  to  be  seen  along  the  sea  coast. 

ISLE  OF  TRINIDAD  AND  MARTIN   VAS*  ROCKS.— Descriptions  and  Di-    IsleofTrini- 
mlions. — In  approaching  Trinidad  from  the  eastward,  when  running  on  its  parallel,  you    dad  and 
will  make  the  three  islets  or  rocks  of  Martin  Vas',  which  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of   Martin  Vas' 
8  or  9  leagues  from  a  ship's  deck.     These  rocks  are  very  remarkable,  and  cannot  be  mis-    Rocks. 
taken.    They  lie  north  and  south  of  each  other,  the  distance  from  the  outer  rock   being 
about  3  miles.     Tho  central  rock  is  very  high,  with  tufts  of  withered  grass  scattered  over 
its  surface.     The  other  two  are  entirely  barren.     There  is  a  passage  between  the  south- 
ernmost and  central  rocks.     The  northernmost  almost  join.   In  clear  weather  Trinidad  ia 
distinctly  seen  from  the  rocks  of  Martin  Vas',  and  may  be  descried  16  leagues  off". 

The  island  is  about  6  miles  in  circumference,  the  land  very  unequal,  and  at  best  no  more 
than  a  cluster  of  rocks,  with  some  shrubs  in  the  valleys.  Tlie  northernmost  side  is  quite 
barren,  but  to  tho  southward  all  the  interstices  of  the  rocks  are  filled  with  evergreens  of 
sevemi  kinds.  There  is  also  a  quantity  of  sea  fowl  and  rock  fish,  and  many  wild  hogs. 
The  generality  of  tho  wood  is  very  small,  though  there  are  trees  of  eighteen  inches  diam- 
eter towards  tho  extreme  heights. 

Trinidii'"  ,„  ..urrounded  by  sharp  rugged  coral  rocks,  with  an  almost  continual  surge 
breaking  on  every  i)art,  whicii  renders  the  landing  often  precarious,  and  watering   fre- 
quently iinpracticiible;  nor  is  there  a  possibility  of  rendering  either  certain,  for  the  surge 
I  is  often  incredibly  great,  and  has  been  seen  during  a  gale  at  S.  W.  to  break  over  a  bluff 
which  is  200  feet  high. 

The  island  is  supplied  with  very  good  water  from  two  small  streams  down  the  E.  and 
S.  W.  side  of  it;  besides  a  small  issue  from  the  rock  which  forms  the  S.  W.  extremity, 
nctoaeof  them  will  (ill  a  tube  of  six  inches  in  diameter,  and  there  is  a  doubt  whether 
I  those  run  temporary  or  perennial,  though  they  always  produce  a  small  quantity  of  water, 
sufficient  to  preserve  the  existence  of  a  few  wretched  inhabitants.  Lieut.  Thomas  Har- 
rison, from  whose  account  this  detail  of  Trinidad  is  chiefly  extracted,  speaking  of  the  an- 
cliorage,  says  that  they  anchored  otf  the  west  side  of  the  island,  at  a  mile  from  the  shore, 
I  to  be  able  to  weather  it  on  any  tack,  should  the  wind  happen  to  blow  on;  "beingdirect- 
ed,"  continues  that  gentleman,  "to  do  so  by  Captain  De  Auvergne,  who  informed  us  of 
the  wreck  of  the  Rattlesnake,  and  tlie  miraculous  escape  of  tlie  Jupiter  aud  Mercury." 

34 


"HiNinpvf* 


""IP 


^■p 


^mmmt 


wmmw^^m 


^mm 


530  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

They  prudently  nvoided  the  common  anchorage,  which  ia  Rbout  a  musket  shot  from  the 
ahore,  in  18  or  20  fnthoms  water.  On  that  side  there  stands  a  stupendous  arch  or  hole  in 
the  rock,  like  that  of  Fernando  Noronha,  and  two  very  remarkable  rocks,  one  called  the 
Monument  and  the  other  the  Sugar-lonf. 

1'ho  Monument  is  850  feet  high,  of  a  cylindrical  form,  and  almost  detached  from  the 
island,  with  large  trees  growing  on  its  top.  This  had  been  named  in  1700.  by  Dr.  HhHcv 
the  Nine  Pin.  The  Sugar-loaf,  at  ihe  3.  E.  end,  is  1160  feet  high,  of  a  conicuj  toiii,' 
with  trees  likewise  on  its  summit,  and  whenever  it  rains  hard,  a  cascade  of  7()u  {^d 
makes  there  a  beautiful  appearance.  The  arch  is  a  natural  passage  made  by  the  sea 
through  a  high  bluff  of  about  800  feet  high.  It  is  40  feet  in  breadth,  nearly  60  feet  jn 
height,  and  420  in  length ;  the  depth  of  water  above  3  fathoms.  When  the  sea  is 
moderate,  you  may  see  through  this  arch  into  the  only  bay  in  the  island,  and  have  n 
view  of  a  distant  rock  covered  with  trees,  which  renders  the  prospect  extremely  pjctn. 
resque. 

Lieutenant  Hamilton  says,  "  we  first  saw  the  island  on  the  5th  of  June,  on  our  pag, 
sage  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope ;  we  had  then  variable  winds  and  calms ;  and  on  mnkinn 
it  a  second  time,  on  the  8th  of  November,  we  had  exactly  the  same  winds  and  weiither' 
accompanied  with  a  heavy  squall  of  wind  from  the  westward.  During  our  stay  there 
above  two  months,  the  prevailing  wind  was  from  N.  N.  E. :  hence  I  conclude  the  S.  e' 
trade  wind  is  not  to  be  depended  upon,  although  the  island  is  so  far  within  the  tropic  of 
Capricorn. 

The  American  commander,  Amasa  Delano,  visited  Trinidad  in  1803,  and  he  again  de- 
Bcribes  it  as  mostly  a  barren  rough  pile  of  rocky  mounttiins.  What  soil  there  is  on  the 
island  he  found  on  the  eastern  side,  where  there  are  several  sand-beaches,  above  one  of 
which  the  Portuguese  had  a  settlement,  and  have,  he  says,  done  much  to  work  sireeti 
or  roads  over  the  valleys,  levelling  down  small  hills  to  make  the  roads  good.  Thpy  hnd 
^  walled  in  a  number  of  enclosures  for  the  purpose  of  making  fields,  at  the  expense  of  much 

labor. 

This  settlement  was  directly  above  the  most  northerly  sand-beach  on  the  east  side  of 
the  island,  and  has  the  best  stream  of  water  on  the  island  running  through  k.  Itmiclit 
be  possible,  he  adds,  in  pleasant  weather,  to  get  it  off  i''om  this  place,  but  we  got  oursot)' 
the  south  side  from  the  next  best  watering  place  or  stream.  This  falls  in  a  cascade  over 
rocks  some  way  up  the  mountains,  so  that  it  can  bo  seen  from  a  boat  when  passing  jt. 
After  you  have  discovered  the  stream  you  can  land  on  a  point  of  rocks  just  to  the  west- 
ward  of  the  watering  place,  and  from  thence  may  walk  past  it,  and  when  a  little  to  the 
eastward  of  the  stream  there  ia  a  small  cove  between  the  rocks,  where  you  may  lloatyour 
casks  off. 

Wood  may  be  cut  on  the  mountain,  just  above  the  first  landing  place,  and  you  can  take  it 
off  if  you  have  a  small  oak  boat.  The  method  in  which  we  filled  our  water  was  carryiug  n 
in  kegs  and  buckets  to  the  place  where  we  floated  our  casks  on  shore. 

All  the  south  side  of  the  island  is  indented  with  small  bays,  but  the  whole  is  so  iron- 
bound  a  shore,  and  such  a  swell  surging  against  it,  that  it  is  almost  impuNsible  to  land  a 
boat  without  great  danger  in  stiiving  it.     The  south  part  is  a  veiy  remarkable  lii;;h square 
.'  biutrhead,  and  is  very  large.     There  is  a  sand-beach  to  the  westward  of  this  head,  but  I 

should  caution  against  landing  on  the  beach  till  it  is  woll  examined  ;  for  just  at  the  lower 
end  of  (he  beach,  and  amongst  the  breakers,  it  is  full  of  rocks,  which  aro  not  seen  tdl  you 
are  amongst  them.  Where  we  landed  wo  saw  the  remains  of  at  least  two  or  three  hiwtj 
which  had  been  knocked  to  pieces  by  landing.  We  found  plenty  of  goats  and  hoes. 
The  latter  were  very  shy,  but  we  killed  some  of  them  and  a  nunibor  of  goats.  We  saw 
some  cats,  and  these  three  sorts  of  quadrupeds  were  the  only  animals  we  saw  on  the 
island.  If  a  ship  is  very  much  in  want  of  good  water,  it  may  be  sot  at  'Trinidad;  or  if  tlie 
crew  should  have  the  scurvy,  it  is  an  excellent  place  to  recruit  them  in,  as  yon  ciin  eel 
plenty  of  greens  on  the  S.  E.part  of  the  island,  such  as  fine  purslane  and  several  utlw 
kinds.  These,  together  with  the  fine  sweet  water,  would  soon  recruit  a  crew.  A  ship 
must  never  be  anchored  at  this  place  with  common  cables,  or  she  will  he  likely  to  lose  her 
anchors  ;  but  if  she  has  chains  for  her  anchors,  the  rocks  cannot  cut  them.  The  nuviga- 
tion  is  safe  for  a  ship  all  around  the  island  within  the  distance  of  a  mile.  Martin  Vaj' 
Rocks,  or  more  properly  Islets,  lie  about  east.  9  leagues  distant,  but  there  do  not  appear 
to  be  any  dangers  between  them  and  Trinidad. 
Miirtin  Vai'  MARTIN  VAS'  ROCKS. — These  rocks,  as  noticed  above,  are  high  and  ban'ei, 
Rocks.  The  central  une  is  the  largest,  and  it  may  be  seen  from  a  ship's  dock  at  the  distance  of 

,10  leagues.  When  bearing  south,  the  rocks  seem  noarly  in  a  line.  The  nurihcrnanii 
■  central  rocks  are  near  each  other,  but  between  the  central  and  southern  rocks  is  a  good 
channel.  Here  the  Chesterfield,  in  1800.  observed  the  latitude  28°  28',  when  she  hove 
to  in  12  fathoms,  with  the  largest  rock  E.  N.  E.,  about  a  mile,  the  bottom  then  visible,  nnd 
caught  plenty  of  rock  cod  and  other  fish.  The  boat  in  sounding  found  the  depth  decrease 
gradually  over  a  rocky  bottom  to  a  fathom  aod  a  half,  close  to  the  largest  rock. 


^!^ 


m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  ggi 

The  north  rock  is  small  and  most  westerly  ;  all  are  steep  and  inaccessible  :  the  distance 
between  the  er  remities  is  about  3  miles;  that  to  Trinidad,  as  already  noticed,  about  9 
leginieB. 

XSCENCAO,  or  PORTUGUESE  ASCENSION.-An  island  distinguished  by  thia   Aieeneao,  or 
name,  has  formerly  been  described,  and  said  to  be  at  the  distance  of  about  100  leagues  to    Portugueie 
the  westward  of  the  Isle  of  Trinidad.     Doubts  have  long  since  been  entertained  as  to  its    Aicension. 
existence,  and  we  have  the  best  reason  to  believe  that  they  are  verified.     La  Perouse,  in 
1785,  sought  for  it  without  success  as  far  as  the  longitude  seven  degrees  west  of  Trinidad, 
andM.  Krusenstern,  in  1803,  prosecuted  the  search  so  much  farther  to  the  westward, 
that  its  non-existence  within  37"  west  appears  certain.     Add  to  this,  that  the  Governor 
of  St.  Catharine's  informed  Mr.  Perouse  that  the  Governor  General  of  Brazil  had  de- 
gpatched  a  vessel  in  the  preceding  year  to  survey  tlie  island,  but  it  could  not  be  found,  and 
ithad  consequently  been  expunged  from  the  charts. 

Notwithstanding  this,  it  has  been  said  that  land  was  seen  by  the  commander  of  the 
steamer  Telica,  on  her  passage  to  Peru,  in  1825,  which  appeared  to  lie  in  latitude  20°  35', 
and  long.  37°  8',  or  nearly  so.  At  noon  the  vessel  was  in  or  about  20=  20'  S.,  and  long. 
370  28'.  The  island  (if  land)  bore  S.  E.  by  E.  h  E.,  by  compass,  distant  by  estimation 
iboutS  leagues.     But  we  mark  this  as  very  doubtful. 

CONGRESS  BANK.— in  Brackenbridge's  account  of  the   voyage  of  the  U.  S.  Fri-    CoHgreai 
gate  Congress  to  Buenos  Ayres.  in  1817,  it  is  reported  that  Commodore  Sinclair  found   Ba^. 
some  extensive  rocky  (coral)  soundings  of  35  fathoms,  and  lost  them  in  latitude  20°  30' 
S.,  and  37°  30'  W. 

Tk  Coast  between  Rio  Janiero  and  the  Bay  of  All  SainU,  the  Harbor  of  Espirito  Santo, 

Porto  Seguiro,  Ifc.  8fc. 

Leaving  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro  to  proceed  ea.nward,  14  miles  distant,  E.  15°  S.  of 
the  Sugar-loaf,  you  will  find  the  two  islands  of  Marice,  situated  nearly  one  league  from 
the  shore  ;  they  are  not  very  high,  their  southern  shore  ia  quite  perpendicular,  and  there 
is  no  danger  in  going  near  them. 

At  14  miles  farther  N.  77°  E.  of  these  islands,  you  meet  Cape  Negro,  which  is  formed 
by  a  hill  not  very  high,  adjoining  to  the  highest  mountains  to  be  met  with  between  Rio 
Janeiro  and  Cape  Frio,  which,  with  its  dark  green  tinge,  (from  which  it  derives  lU  name,) 
are  quite  sufficient  to  distinguish  it.  There  is  not  the  least  danger  in  nearing  it,  for  even 
at  the  distance  of  3  miles,  the  soundings  are  from  30  to  40  fathoms,  muddy  bottom. 

The  sea  shore  from  Rio  Janeiro  to  Cape  Frio  is  low  and  sandy  :  the  mountains  which 
surround  that  bay  run  first  E.  N.  E.,  until  you  reach  the  meridian  of  Cape  Negro,  and 
afterward  N.  E.,  leaving  an  empty  flat  between,  over  10  leagues  in  extent,  which  is  to  be 
seen  from  the  sea  in  fine  weather  only. 

Between  Cape  Negro  and  Cape  Frio  the  l:md  is  low,  and  a  few  small  hills  are  to  be 
perceived  at  some  distance  from  the  sea  shore,  which  is  there  sandy  and  bushy.  On  the 
top  of  one  of  these  small  hills,  9  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Cape  Negro,  stands  a  church  dedi- 
cated to  Nostra  Damade  Nazareth.  At  no  trrpiit  distance  from  thn  shore  a  ridge  of  rocks 
and  sand  are  to  be  seen  at  low  water,  and  considered  dangerous  by  the  coasting  traders, 
but  without  good  reason,  as  there  are  30  and  40  fathams  water  at  6  miles  distant,  muddy 
bottom,  the  depth  increasing  very  fast  toward  the  sea,  and  at  10  leagues  distant,  from  70 
to  90  fathoms,  bottom  sandy,  rocky,  and  muddy. 

Though  of  little  importance,  it  is  proper  to  state  that  inside  the  beach,  a  flat  of  water 
can  be  seen.  The  depth  of  the  sea  near  Rio  Janeiro  is  very  great,  varying  from  76  to  90 
fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  10  or  15  leagues,  diminishing  gradually  toward  the  land.  The 
bottom  is  a  mixture  of  coarse  sand,  gravel,  broken  shells,  rocks,  and  mud.  In  some 
charts,  S.  S.  E.  from  Cape  Frio,  distant  10  or  12  leagues,  from  20  to  25  fathoms  have 
beeumiuked,  but  wo  believe  it  incorrect. 

CAPE  FRIO  (on  which  there  is  a  lighthouse,  with  a  revolving  light,  which  is  visible  Cape  Frio. 
two  minutes  and  eclipsed  two  minutes,  and  can  bo  seen  40  miles  in  clear  weather.)  is  the  Lighthoiue. 
southern  side  of  an  island  lying  on  the  eastern  end  of  the  beach  of  Marnnbaya.  This 
island  is  rocky;  there  are  trees  o:ily  in  some  places,  and  no  where  is  green  grass  to  be 
seen.  In  fine  weather  it  may  be  discovered  15  leas;ues  distant.  Viewed  from  E.  and  N., 
two  different  hills  are  to  be  perceived  on  Cape  Frio,  the  northern  one  of  which  is  the 
largest  and  highest,  and  on  (he  southern  one  a  kind  of  rock  seems  to  project  and  hang 
over.  Viewed  from  the  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  E.,  those  two  hills  appear  to  be  but  one 
with  tops,  and  at  a. small  distance  from  the  Cape,  in  an  E.  S,  E.  direction,  lies  a  small 
island  of  a  conical  shape.  All  this  shore  is  so  bold  that  30  and  even  40  fathoms  are  to  be 
met  in  every  direction,  oven  at  one  mile  distance,  bottom  almost  every  where  mud. 

Between  the  Island  of  Frio  and  the  main  land  there  is  a  good  channel  for  small  vessels, 
and  a  good  anchorage  for  others  of  any  size.  The  channel  runs  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  It  is 
not  frequently  used,  on  account  of  its  narrowness  at  the  southern  part,  but  the  depth  of 
water  is  every  where  more  than  sufiiicient.    The  northern  passage  is  very  spacious  and 


■iinwi,nin   -r-^mmmrm^mif^ 


filiiiJiininVf  i1||3*n*ppppM'W*i«< 


583  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•afe  against  any  wind  except  N.  E.;  but  by  anchoring  more  north  toward  the  Island  Dog 
Porcos,  you  may  consider  yourself  perfectly  safe,  the  anchorage  being  firm,  and  often 
resorted  to  by  coasting  traders,  who  wait  there  for  favorable  winds,  and  for  a  chance  to 
put  to  sea  through  the  southern  or  northern  passage.  In  time  of  war  this  place  mav  bn 
useful  to  get  information.     Variation  2°  3'  E.,  1819.  ^ 

The  northern  part  of  the  coast  of  Cape  Frio,  together  with  the  islands,  runs  N.  350 
E.  up  to  Anchnva  Islands,  and  forms  with  tliis  last  a  deep  bay,  in  the  inside  of  which 
stand  the  numerous  islands  of  Papagaros ;  several  of  them  afford  very  safe  anchorage  in 
case  of  contrary  wind. 

The  Island  of  Anchoras  stands  at  4  miles  E.  i  S.  from  Cape  Busies;  the  eastern  one 
has  the  appearance  of  a  Quaker's  hat.  I  do  not  doubt,  as  reported  by  native  marJDers 
the  practicability  of  a  large  ship  to  pass  between  them  and  the  main  land.  ' 

North  of  Cape  Busios  lies  the  small  island  of  Branca,  from  whence  another  beach  ex- 
tends to  the  Morro  San  Joao,  or  San  Joam,  and  at  no  great  distance  the  island  of  Feno 
The  land  now  runs  easterly  up  to  Cape  St.  Thomas.  This  gulf,  formed  by  the  const 
between  the  Capes  Busios  and  St.  Thomas,  is  vei  y  near  30  leagues  in  extent,  and  in  the 
middle  of  it,  at  3  leagues  distance  from  the  shore,  lies  the  Island  of  Santa  Anna. 

The  Morro  San  Joam  is  easy  to  be  distinguished,  being  entirely  separated  from  the 
,  "■■■  ••  chain  of  mountains  lying  in  its  rear,  and  its  top  having  a  warlike  appearance. 

At  twenty  miles  N.  i  W.  of  Morro  San  .foam,  another  hill  is  to  be  perceived,  which 
offers  this  particular,  that  its  northern  side  is  quite  perpendicularly  cut,  and  its  top  eoda 
in  a  sharp  point.     It  is  known  by  the  name  of  Fathur  de  Macaye,  or  Macahe. 

The  islands  of  St.  Ann  are  three  in  number.  Viewed  from  S.  S.  W.  and  N.  N.  E. 
they  appear  as  one  only.  The  southern  one  is  the  highest.  The  anchoriigo  in  thn 
channel  is  one  of  the  safest  and  mostconvenif  nt  for  any  kind  of  repairs,  and  to  refit  ves- 
sels of  any  description.  Good  water  and  timber  are  to  be  found  ;  and  at  the  distinice  of 
four  to  five  miles  from  the  shore,  there  is,  in  every  direction,  from  19  to  30  fathoms  of 
water,  and  a  good  mud  bottom. 

From  the  parallel  of  the  Island  of  St.  Ann  up  to  Benevente,  which  stand.)  in  latitude 
20°  53'  50  '  S.,  a  flat  land  projects  cei.aiderably  into  the  sea.  That  low  land  is  known 
by  the  name  of  Gn  js.  Some  navigators  bound  to  Rio  Janeiro,  state  jhat  they  have 
been  deceived  by  thd  similar  appearance  between  the  coast  north  of  Cape  Frio  and  the 
coast  forming  the  bay  of  Rio  Janeiro.  Sucli  an  error  appears  very  extraordinary,  fortlie 
entrance  of  Rio  Janiero  is  on  the  angular  point  of  two  chains  of  mountains,  tiie  enstern 
side  running  E.  i  N.,  and  the  western  side  running  W.  S.  W. ;  whereas  the  Innd  north 
of  Cape  Frio  runs  N.  and  S.,  which  is  quite  an  opposite  direction.  On  the  whole,aain- 
gle  observation  will  relieve  the  doubts  in  that  respect. 
Cape  CAi  i'^  THOMAS. — From  the  Island  of  St.  Ann  to  Benevente  End,  the  land  extends 

Trwmas.  more  and  more  to  the  sea;  and  at  Cape  Thonms  the  mountains  appear  tu  he  thirteen 

leagues  from  the  sea  shore.     This  part  of  the  Brazilian  coast  is  very  low  ;  a  few  trees 
and  small  sand-hills  seem  as  buried  in  the  sea  water.     This  beach  extends  far  in  the  sen 
^  '  and  forms  what  is  called  the  Banks  of  Cape  Thomas.     The  chart  shows  how  fnr  the 

shallow  water  extends.  At  the  distance  of  five  miles  we  found  from  10  to  21  fathoms, 
increasing  regularly  towards  the  sea.  By  keeping  fifteen  miles  from  the  shore  thureii 
not  the  least  danger. 

Though  some  coasting  traders  state  that  places  on  the  banks  are  to  be  mot  with,  having 
2  or  3  fathoms  of  water  only,  yet  the  pilot  we  had  on  board  thinks  differently,  and  noth- 
ing has  been  perceived  by  us  to  indicate  such  a  shallowness. 

The  nature  of  the  bottom  near  Cape  Thomas  is  not  of  a  muddy  naturo,  but  white 
sand  and  broken  shells.  It  should  here  be  observed,  that  this  white  sand,  wliich  exteudj 
80  far  north,  appears  to  begin  only  there,  and  is  never  met  with  farther  south. 

At  a  short  distance  from   Benevente  you  moot,  in  succession,  the  Barra  Guarnpnya, 
(Bald  Island,)  La  Rosa,  and  the  small  islands  of  Guarapari. 
*  The  River  Guarapari  empties  into  the  sen  between  two  hills  covered  with  trees.   On 

the  top  of  the  southern  hill  there  is  a  church  with  a  steeple,  many  houses  and  cucoa 
trees.  The  other  hill  is  called  Perro  de  Cao.  To  proceed  up  the  river  it  is  necessary 
to  keep  Guarapari  Hill  N.  W. 

The  surrounding  coast  is  tolerably  high,  and  every  where  covered  with  small  trees,  nnd 
in  several  places  a  yellow  steep  beach  not  perceived  to  the  southward  of  Benevente.  Tiie 
mountains  in  the  interior  deserve  particular  notice,  being  of  a  conical  sha))e,  and 
ing  to  incline  on  one  side,  which  is  not  to  be  observed  to  the  south  or  north. 
Etpirilo  ESPIRITO  SANTO.— The  Island  Calvada  lies  4  miles  distant  from  the 

Santo.  There  is  no  danger  passing  in  the  channel,  being  from  12  to  20  fathoms  water.    Outside 

this  island,  and  off  the  Island  Rosa,  the  depth  varies  from  12  to  20  fathoms  up  to  £3 
pirito  Santo  Bay.  Keeping  at  the  distance  oi  2  to  7  miles  from  the  shore,  at  nearly  two- 
thirds  the  distance  from  Guarapari  Santo,  you  meet  the  rocky  Island  Jieo,  ond  a  little 
farther  distant  the  Pacotes  Rocks,  which  indicate  the  entrance  of  thn  bay  of  Espirito 
Santo.    The  particulars  which  distinguish  Espirito  Santo  Bay,  are  Monte  Moreno  anil 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT . 


633 


Hertue  Alvara.  Monte  Moreno  is  a  mountain  on  the  nuthern  end  of  the  buy,  ita  north- 
ern base  forming  the  southern  entrance  of  the  river  of  Espirito,  is  of  a  conic  I  shape, 
cofered  in  part  with  wood  ;  no  green  grass  to  be  seen  on  its  eastern  side,  and  may  be 
diwovered  10  leagues  distant.  Vessels  going  up  the  river  must  range  along  it  at  no  great 
distance.  The  two  Pacotes  Roclis  stand  24  miles,  and  are  of  unequal  size.  The  inside 
channel  is  used  only  by  small  vessels. 

Nearly  one  mile  distant  from  Monte  Moreno,  S.  60"  W.,  stands  the  Morro  de  Nozza, 
(Sembora  de  Poria,)  a  roclty  hill  with  little  wood.  The  church,  which  is  built  on  ita 
top,  can  be  discovered  5  leagues  distant.  What  distinguishes  the  hill  called  Mastre 
Alvaro,  is  its  great  height  on  a  low  ground,  appearing  as  entirely  separated  from  the  other 
mountains. 

The  greatest  part  of  the  Bay  of  Espirito  Santo  is  occupied  by  two  islands,  in  a  direc- 
tion N.  N.  W.  of  Monte  Moreno.  Though  the  space  between  this  island  and  th* 
mountain  appears  to  be  wholly  obstructed  by  banks,  and  the  two  rocks,  the  Kalea  (the 
Whale)  and  the  Casello,  (the  Horse,)  yet  a  vessel  not  drawing  over  16  feet  water  may 
easily  go  through  there  without  danger,  as  you  will  not  have  less  than  18  feet  water. 
The  anchornge  we  occupied  in  the  Bay  of  Espirito  Santo  was  not  the  best  one,  because 
we  had  no  knowledge  of  a  submarine  rock  not  more  than  two  cables  distance  from  us, 
where,  from  time  to  time,  the  sea  was  breaking.  The  safest  place  to  anchor  is  the  one 
pointed  on  the  chart,  with  an  anchor. 

Espirito  Santo  is  of  some  importance  to  navigators.  At  one  league's  distance  from 
the  city  of  Victoria,  there  is  good  water.  Wood  and  cattle  can  be  got  in  plenty,  and 
cheap.  The  climate  appears  unhealthy,  being  extremely  damp.  A  rock  called  the 
Pao  de  Hanuar,  (Sugar  Loaf,)  about  2000  yards  from  the  city,  is  of  some  service  to  ma- 
riners, as  you  steer  in  its  direction  after  weathering  Monte  Moreno,  if  you  intend  to  get 
into  the  river.  The  tides  are  not  more  than  4  feet,  and  are  regular  but  in  the  inside  of 
the  bay. 

The  coast  north  of  Espirito  Santo  is  low  and  covered  with  trees ;  and  the  shore,  which 
runs  N.  32°  E.  from  the  Tubaron,  (the  Shark)  up  to  the  bar  of  Rio  Doce,  nearly  16 
leagues  distant,  is  of  a  yellow  red  color. 

From  Rio  Doce  (Soft  River)  the  coast  runs  riorth  and  south  up  to  the  bar  of  San  Ma- 
theo,  a  distance  of  20  leagues.  The  country  in  the  interior  does  not  appear  so  low  as 
the  sea  shore,  but  from  Rio  Doce  to  Mount  Paacoal  the  country  is  very  flat.  There  is 
consequently  no  more  difficulty  in  recognizing  Espirito  Santo  Bay  when  coming  from  the 
south  or  from  the  north,  as  in  the  tirst  instance  Mount  Mastre  Alvaro  comes  next  to  the 
flat  land,  and  in  the  second  instance  it  ends  a  liind  tolerably  high. 

The  shore  from  Tubarao  End  up  to  San  Matheo,  may  be  approached  every  where  at 
the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles.  From  9  to  10  fathoms  water  are  to  be  found  at  such  a  dis- 
tance, sandy  bottom,  sometimes  muddy,  and  with  broken  shells. 

It  is  reported  Rio  Doce  runs  far  in  the  interior,  but  its  mouth  does  not  admit  of  large 
vessels.  It  is  to  be  observed  here,  that  the  numerous  islands  pointed  out  in  some  charts, 
as  existing  at  its  mouth,  is  not  correct. 

The  bar  of  Rio  Seca  lies  ten  leagues  north  of  Rio  Dooe.  Rio  Seca  is  a  stream  only 
in  the  rainy  season.  Two  miles  east  of  Rio  Seca  we  found  no  variation  in  tlie  compass, 
July,  1819. 

The  bar  of  San  Matheo  is  10  leagues  distant  from  Rio  Seca.  Being  far  at  sea,  this 
bar  may  be  distinguished  by  the  breakers  of  the  sea,  which  are  greater  than  on  the  sur- 
rounding places.  The  shallowness  of  the  water,  the  impossibility  for  a  ship  to  cross  over 
the  bar,  and  above  all,  the  little  benefit  to  be  derived  from  this  place,  are  more  than  suf- 
ficient reasons  to  keep  at  a  distance  from  it. 

ABROLHOS. — At  a  distance  of  4  to  5  leagues  from  San  Matheo,  in  a  northern  di-  Abrolhos. 
rection,  and  at  3  to  4  leagues  from  the  land,  the  soundings  begin  to  indicate  the  shallow 
water  of  the  Abrolhos.  This  shallow  place  may  be  considered  to  extend  north  and  south 
from  18  to  20  leogues,  and  east  and  west  not  less  than  20  leagues  :  and  though  the  whole 
oitent  is  not  to  be  considered  equally  dangerous,  yet  a  vessel  not  particularly  bound  to  this 
place,  will  do  well  to  keep  away  from  it. 

The  Abrolhos  Islands,  or  Santa  Barbara  Islands,  are  four  in  number,  not  including  two 
or  three  flat  rocks.  The  two  northern  islands  are  the  highest.  The  western  one  is  near- 
ly 130  feet  above  the  sea;  the  other  115.  They  may  be  perceived  from  the  top  of  a 
frigate,  in  fine  weather,  20  miles. 

Nothing  is  to  be  found  on  these  islands  except  some  reeds  and  cactus.  Numerous 
tribes  of  birds  inhabit  them.  A  few  turtles  are  to  be  met  with.  Fishes  are  in  plenty, 
and  the  fishermen  of  Porto  Secure  repair  there  to  fish,  and  dr"  what  they  call  garoujas. 
This  is  consequently  the  only  thing  a  vessel  can  expect. 

We  have  already  stated  that  the  whole  extent  assigned  to  the  shallow  water  is  not 
every  wliere  dangerous.  In  the  same  extent,  by  our  observations  and  soundings,  it 
appears  that  from  the  E.  S.  E.  up  to  S.  by  N.,  and  W,,  large  ships  may  approach 
from  one  to  eight  miles,  in  fine  weather.     The  only  part  we  bad  no  chance  of  sounding, 


034 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•nd  which  rnnaiDi  consequently  doubtful,  is  that  part  comprised  between  the  S,  and  S 
8.  E. 
W 
show 


West  of  this  island  there  is  a  channel  of  nearly  3  leagues  wide,  where  the  soundinei 
ow  from  10  to  lA  fathoms,  except  in  a  few  places  where  it  shows  only  8  fiitlmms.   Thi 
western  side  of  this  channel  is  formed  by  more  shallow  wiiter,  culled  the  PnitHJag,  (i 
Walla,)  which  is  very  diin^Dnius.     According;  to  the  report  of  the  native  iniiririors,  tl 


or 

tides  are  irregular  on  the  Abrolhos;  the  current  runs  according  to  the  wind,  and  does 
not  run  over  y\  of  a  mile  an  hour.  The  soundings  show  no  mud  over  the  wlmle  extent 
we  ascribed  to  the  shallow  water  of  Abrolhos,  and  if  any  is  to  bo  perceived,  it  in  »  certain 
sign  we  are  no  longer  there.  The  nature  of  the  bottom  in  the  Abrolhos  is  white  sandv 
stone,  mixed  with  broken  madrepore*  in  a  powdered  st^ito.  Sometimes  tliiit  Hiindy  gravel 
is  very  firm  and  combined  with  sand  and  rock,  particularly  in  the  N.  E.  dirt^cton.  In 
the  direction  of  S.  S.  W.  or  N.  E.  by  N  ,  the  bottom  is  very  firm  and  like  toujjh  mortar 
in  which  the  anchors  have  a  good  hold,  though  they  enter  very  little  into  it.  We  have 
no  current  information  respecting  the  Paredes,  which  are  stated  in  the  chart,  accnrdint! 
to  the  saying  of  the  native  mariners,  beginning  at  the  bar  of  Fortalegra,  and  ending  at 
Alcobaca. 

Extract  of  a  letter  from  Capl.  Fitzroy,  of  H.  M.  aloop  Beagle,  to  Capt.  Beaufort,  R,  jy. 
on  the  subject  of  tfie  Abrolhos  Banks,j  dated  '•  Bio  de  Janeiro,  April  10,  1832.       ' 


"  On  the  18th  of  March  we  sailed  from  Bahia,  and  worked  our  way  slowly  towards  the 
eastern  limit  of  the  Abrolhos  Banks.  The  winds,  being  light  and  easterly,  favored  our 
Boundiiiyis  frequently,  and  taking  good  observations. 

"  Having  reached  the  parallel  of  the  island,  to  the  eastward  of  the  easternmost  sound- 
ings laid  down  in  the  charts,  and  finding  no  ground  with  300  fathoms  of  line,  I  bemn  |q 
steer  westward,  sounding  continually,  and  keeping  a  sharp  lookout  at  the  miistiieiid.  At 
2  P.  M.,  on  the  36th,  we  had  no  bottom  with  230  fathoms,  and  at  4  P.  M.  we  found  only 
30  fathoms,  without  the  slightest  change  either  in  the  color  of  the  water  or  in  its  tempera- 
ture, or  any  indication  of  so  sudden  a  change  in  its  depth. 

"  I  directly  hauled  to  the  wmd,  and  worked  back  again  to  the  eastward,  to  hm 
another  opportunity  of  confirming  the  place  of  the  edge  of  the  bank.  Wo  lost  sound- 
ings as  suddenly  as  we  found  them ;  and  in  standing  to  the  westward  a  second  time 
with  a  grapnel  towing  astern  with  200  fathoms  of  lino  wo  hooked  the  rocky  bottom,  and 
straightened  the  grapnel;  but  my  object  in  ascertaining  the  exact  beginning  of  the  bank 
was  gained. 

"  From  that  spot  we  had  soundings  in  less  than  40  fathoms,  until  we  anchored  near  the 
Abrolhos  Islands. 

"  I  passed  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  them,  because  that  side  had  not  been  ex- 
amined; but  time  would  nut  allow  of  my  doing  what  1  wished  while^so  favorable  unoppor. 
tunity  offered. 

"  At  least  a  fortnight  would  be  necessary  to  complete  the  survey  of  Baron  Rouissin 
which  appears,  so  far  as  we  have  examined,  to  be  extremely  correct.  The  souodinesare 
so  irregular,  that  little  dependence  can  be  placed  on  the  lead.  It  is  only  l>y  n  iiiuilitude 
of  soundings,  by  watching  tlio  sea  when  there  is  much  swell,  and  traversing  every  part 
with  a  sharp  lookout  at  the  mast-head,  that  tlte  neighborhood  of  the  Abrolhos,  particularly 
to  the  south-east,  can  be  thoroughly  examined. 

*♦  More  than  once  we  had  four  or  five  fathoms  under  one  side  of  the  vessel,  and  from 
fifteen  to  twenty  under  the  other  side.  The  sauls  de  sonde,  as  the  Frencli  express  it, 
are  surprising. 

"  The  tide,  or  rather  current,  which  we  experienced,  was  continually  to  the  southward 
for  the  three  days  wo  were  near  these  islands,  varying  from  half  a  mile  to  u  rnije  and  a 
half  an  hour. 

"  I  supposed  that  the  bottom  was  chiefly  composed  of  coral  rock,  but  was  surprised  (o 
find  no  coral  excepting  small  fragments  growing  on  the  s(did  rock,  whicii  is  ciiit-tiy  gneijj 
and  sandstones.  As  the  charts'  siiy  'coral  roc/c,'  I  have  sent  a  few  of  the  souruiin"8fi)r 
your  inspection  ;  and  you  will  see  by  them  that  what  has  here  been  called  coral,  is  the 
coating  of  a  solid  rock,  formed  by  the  deposite  of  the  sea-water,  mixed  with  coralline  sub- 
stances, and  what  a  sailor  generally  culls  '  barniicles.' 

"  My  meridian  distimco  of  the  Abrolhos  Rocks  from  Bahia,  their  latitude,  and  tlieirsize, 
agree  precisely  with  those  given  in  the  French  survey  ;  but  between  Baliia  and  Rio  de 
Janeiro,  and  consequently  between  the  Abrolhos  and  Rio  de  Janeiro,  there  exists  a  differ- 
ence of  from  four  to  five  miles  between  us,  this  being  the  only  point  on  which  I  have  found 
any  such  difference  either  on  this  or  on  the  Beagle's  former  voyage. 


*  Every  kind  of  stone  supposed  to  b«  Tormed  b^  inBe:t8,  is  called  by  the  French,  madrepore. 
t  From  the  Journal  of  the  Uoographical  Society. 


"TT 


f'^mm^ 


■na 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST    PILOT. 

"HA*inf!  mnde  both  pnMn){efi,  I  venture  to  observe,  that  going  within  the  Abrolhoacer- 
uioly  shortens  thiU  between  Rio  and  B«hia  very  much ;  but  yet  I  should  not  recom- 
ineml  it  to  nny  vessel  unless  she  hns  reason  to  make  unusual  huste.  The  soundintjs  are 
,pry  irroiiiilar,  varying  suddenly  Irotn  20  to  6  fathoms ;  and  there  are  both  reefit  and 

current^- 

It  appears  from  tho  following,  that  the  Abrolhos  Banii  extends  much  farther  than  has 
doen  laid  down  on  the  charts :— (O.  W.  B.) 

U.  S.  ihip  St.  Louii,  Pemambuco,  Nffvember  2, 1849. 

Dear  Sir — On  my  recent  run  to  this  place  I  got  soundings  on  a  shoal  or  ledge  of  rocks 
not  put  down  on  any  chart  in  my  possession.  There  is  no  danger,  however,  in  passing 
Qverit,  as  the  least  water  obtained  by  me  was  thirty-five  fuihoms. 

It  is  situated  in  latitude  20"  38'  south,  longitude  37"  38'  west,  and  runs  about  N.  E.  and 
§.  \V.  with  an  average  width,  probably,  of  ten  miles,  the  water  deepening  gradually  from 
tiie  centre  towards  the  eastern  and  western  extremities,  to  sixty-five  fathoms,  when  sud- 
denly it  fulls  off  to  no  bottom,  with  one  hundred  fathoms  of  line. 

As  to  its  length,  1  could  form  but  slight  conjecture,  nut  having  time  lo  examine  it, 
though  judged  to  be  twenty  miles  or  more,  from  the  circumstance  of  Capt,  Powell,  on 
his  route  to  Rio,  getting  soundings  about  that  distance  to  the  northward  of  where  I  first 
obtained  it.  The  latitude  and  longitude  given  are  supposed  to  be  about  the  centre  of  the 
shoal,  as  nearly  as  could  be  ascertained  by  cross  soundings. 

Yours,  with  esteem,  H.H.Cocke. 

Lieut.  M.  F.  Maury,  Sup't  Observatory,  Washington. 

Tl:a  little  city  of  Prndo  lies  on  the  mouth  of  the  river  Tncurucu,  a  very  deep  cut 
among'  -  the  trees,  which  are  numerous  on  the  shore,  at  the  place  where  the  river  dis- 
cliiirges  into  the  sea.  There  is  no  danger  near  the  mouth;  even  at  three  miles  there 
are  from  10  to  14  fathoms  of  water.  This  depth  remains  the  same  as  far  as  the  villnge  of 
Columbiana,  situated  E.  S.  E.  of  Mount  Pascal.  Mount  Pascal  is  to  be  perceived  evea 
from  tiie  Abrolhos. 

E,  by  S.,  28  miles  from  Mount  Pascal,  in  a  direction  north  and  south,  and  at  12  miles 
distant  from  the  coast,  the  water  is  very  shallow,  intermixed  with  rocks.  That  danger- 
ous place  is  called  the  Iiacolomis,  and  runs  E.  S.  E.  and  S.  by  W.  There  is  not  the 
least  ilnn^jer  by  keeping  away  13  miles  from  the  shore,  and  when  north  of  Mount  Pascal 
the  land  may  be  neared  to  3  miles,  the  depth  being  from  11  to  24  fathoms. 

Mount  Pascal,  as  we  stated  botore,  is  the  highest  of  the  mountains  perceived  from  the 
Abrolhos.  The  chain  it  belongs  to  runs  nearly  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  The  southern  part  of 
this  mountain  seems  as  if  a  large  square  tower  had  been  built  on  its  top.  Viewed  from 
tlie  east.  Mount  Pascal  appears  of  a  conical  shape,  and  being  the  highest  of  the  whole,  it 
cannot  be  mistaken. 

The  shore  from  Villa  Prado  up  to  Mount  Pascal  runs  N.  10-^  E.  It  is  low,  woody,  and 
its  "enernl  appearance  is  very  much  like  the  shore  between  Itiicolomis  and  Mount  Pascal; 
it  dilfers  only  in  its  yellow  red  colors.  This  red  color  increases  more  and  more  towards 
Poito  Socuro,  and  clie  shore  more  high  and  steep,  and  the  cow-tree  is  more  numerous 
amongst  the  trees  which  cover  the  land.  If  goinp  along  the  coast  you  will  pass  in  suc- 
cession the  bars  of  Gramminuan,  of  .fosima,  of  Frade,  the  small  bay  of  Trancoso,  and 
thechurch  of  Mossa.  In  Senliorada  Judea,  distant  only  two  miles  from  Porto  Securo, 
the  walls  of  that  church  boing  perfectly  white,  it  is  perceived  amongst  the  trees  at  some 
distance  :  there  is  a  small  river  which  empties  into  the  harbor  of  Porto  Securo;  on  the 
bar  there  are  18  feet  at  high  water,  and  only  11  inside;  moreover,  there  are  many  banks 
extending  very  far ;  taking  the  whole  together,  Porto  Securo  is  not  a  good  place  for  ves- 
sels of  sinall  size,  and  of  no  use  for  large  ones. 

From  Porto  Securo  to  Rio  Grande,  there  are  12  leagues  distance;  the  coast  runs  N. 
14''  E  ,  very  woody  :  sandy  banks  and  shallow  water  are  to  be  found  nt  three  miles  dis- 
tance. A  new  cit\ ,  called  Belmonte,  stands  on  the  southern  bank  of  Rio  Grande ;  there 
are  but  two  fathoms  water  on  the  bar- 

From  Belmonte  to  Fort  St.  George  dos  Ilheos,  there  are  twenty  leagues  distance, 
steep  shore  and  equally  woody  ;  depth  of  water  from  seven  to  twenty  fathoms  :  and  nt  5 
miiea  distance,  muddy  bottom  and  broken  madrepore.  At  half  the  distance  from  Bel- 
monte to  Fort  St.  Georges,  you  meet  the  Seras  de  Itaraca,  a  group  of  mountains  on 
which  terminates  the  flat  country  besinning after  Mount  Pascal;  the  southern  mountain 
bears  the  name  of  Commandatui)a,  from  which  the  small  river  derives  its  name.  From 
tlience  up  the  Bay  of  All  Saints  the  const  offers  the  finest  prospect,  being  well  cultivated 
in  the  viilley,  and  the  small  hills  covered  with  wood. 

From  Fort  St.  George,  up  to  the  two  Castellianos  Ends,  19  leagues  distance,  the  const 
is  perfectly  secure ;  tho  largest  ships  may  opproach  it  withiu  two  miles,  without  the  least 


636 


636  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

The  Dm  Cutelhanot  Enda,  beloDg  to  ■  hifih  land  joining  to  Puntade  Muta,  at  the  n 
trennity  of  which  stands  the  small  island  of  Quipe.     The  Muta  Point  nnd  the  inland  „( 
Quipe  form  a  kind  of  basin,  into  which  empties  the  small  river  Acoruhi,  ut  h  Hhurt  dia 
tance  from  the  small  town  of  Camamu.     The  breakers  which  obstruct  the  bay,  do  n  i 
permit  vessels  to  ^o  into  it. 

Beginning  at  this  place  the  coast  seems  dividod  into  two,  and  appears  like  two  iilanda 
This  appearance  is  produced  by  the  low  land  existing  between  the  two  hilly  purta  and 
remains  the  same  till  you  arrive  at  Cape  or  Morro  Snn  Paulo. 

Morro  Sao  Paulo,  from  the  east  end  of  the  bar  of  Uha's  River,  may  be  very  eRgjIy  dia. 
tinguished,  though  not  very  high,  being  higher  than  the  hiuh  Innd  which  stiindg  on  !(■ 
rear,  in  the  norlnern  direction  ;  there  are  on  its  top  two  separated  groups  of  row-treea 
very  apparent.  Morro  San  Paulo  offers  this  particular,  tliut  when  near  it,  tlie  ereen 
verdant  color  of  its  top  seems  spotted  on  the  northern  side  with  large  white  stnitii ;  jn 
fine  weather  these  white  stains  may  be  seen  from  64  miles  diHtance.  Two  milng  enatof 
Morro  San  Paulo  there  are  17  fathoms,  with  good  muddy  bottom.  North  of  San  PruIq 
the  coast  is  low,  sandy,  and  a  reef  of  rocks  runs  along  within  a  short  distance  of  it  Thia 
coast  appears  at  first  connected  with  the  Tsland  of  Tamarica;  but  the  hind  on  this  ig|g|,j 
is  higher  :  the  spHce  between  the  western  side  of  Itaporica  Island  and  the  umin  land 
forms  what  is  called  the  false  entrance  of  Bahia.  This  channel  is  very  crooked,  narrow 
and  too  difficult  to  admit  veosels  to  pass.  ' 

A  vessel  may  steer  in  a  straight  direction  from  Morro  San  Paulo  to  Cape  St.  Antonio- 
but  if  the  wind  blows  too  strong  towards  the  land,  it  is  better  to  keep  a  little  more  to  the 
N.  W.,  until  the  eastern  point  of  Tamarica  Island  stands  north  of  you. 

Description  of  the  Mountains  and  other  objects  which  show  your  approach  to  Rio  Janeiro. 

At  the  eastern  end  of  the  beach  of  MiininbHya  stands  the  large  point  of  Gimmtibii 
where  begin  tlie  high  mountains  which  surround  the  Buy  of  Rio  Janeiro.  Fiomthii 
point,  in  clear  weather,  the  Uland  Redonda  (Round  Island)  can  be  seen,  although  8  ItMnueg 
distant.  That  island  stands  at  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro,  and  a  easily  dis- 
tinguished by  its  round  shape,  and  by  the  ^roen  and  white  color  of  its  shores.  Kioni 
the  same  point,  the  mountain  called  the  Unbia,  or  Main-top,  which  by  its  penuliur  shnpe 
cannot  be  confounded  with  any  other,  and  is,  by  this  reason,  the  surest  murk  for  Rio  de 
JaneTO.  When  arrived  near  Round  Island,  there  is  not  tho  least  difTiculty  in  leHchin; 
Rio  Janeiro.  It  is  unnecessary  to  undertake  the  course  towards  that  place,  unless  you 
are  sure  to  reach  it  before  night-time,  and  for  that  to  wait  for  the  soa  bruuzo,  wliicli  gen- 
erally begins  at  12  or  1  o'clock. 

Some  say  that  it  is  better  to  make  Innd  near  Cape  Frio,  when  bound  for  Rio  Janeiro' 
though  it  will  do  well  for  vessels  coming  from  the  nortli  or  eust,  yet  in  every  other  iuuiBiicu 
it  will  be  wasting  time. 

The  Grand  Island,  the  Morro  Mnranbnya,  and  pnrticnlnrly  tho  Main-top  Mountnin,  nre 
the  surest  guides  for  nearing  Rio  Janeiro,  as  tliey  may  be  seen  at  a  great  distiuiee,  and 
no  fear  in  nearing  the  land. 

There  is  something  peculiar  which  distinguishes  the  appenrancoof  the  Buy  of  RjoJa- 
neiro  from  every  other  place.  When  coining  from  the  K.  S.  E.  up  to  tlie  S,  \V.,  the 
tops  of  the  mountains  bear  a  perfect  resemblance  to  a  man  lying  on  his  back,  in  ii  direc- 
tion W.  S.  W.  and  K.  N.  E.,tho  Mount  Main-top  seeming  to  form  the  head,  and  Alouut 
Sugar-k)af  the  extremities  of  the  feet. 

The  Main-top  Mount  is  Ihit  on  its  top,  and  seems  not  so  large  at  its  base  as  nt  its  top, 
from  whence  it  derives  its  name.  Eight  miles  distant  from  the  mountain  lies  the  Pnuo- 
fasucnr  (Sugar-loaf)  Mount,  a  huge  rock,  which  although  generally  iiulicutcd  ns  the  best 
mark  to  ascertain  the  Buy  of  Rio  Janeiro,  is  not  so,  according  to  my  obsorvations,  being 
not  so  high,  so  distinct,  or  so  near  the  shore,  as  the  Main-tup  Mount.  It  oilers  this  par- 
ticular, that  its  8ha|>e  is  very  conical,  and  it  appears  above  all  the  other  mountains  ut'u  lil<e 
shape  around  it,  and  it  seeiiis  to  incline  a  little  towards  tho  N.  W. 

It  is  very  prudent  to  keep  at  some  distance  from  the  shore,  when  navigating  bptwein 
Rio  Janeiro  and  Cape  Frio,  hecnuso  the  sea  breeze  blows  generally  towards  iho  sliure. 
and  in  like  manner  the  waves  geneiate  a  current,  having  the  same  tendency  pHrliculBrlj 
when  it  blows  from  S.  W.,  and  then  in  case  of  a  sudden  storm  there  will  Le  yome  dan- 
ger in  the  anchorage,  not  being  there  very  safe. 

We  must  repeat  that  it  is  very  prudent  never  to  approach  too  near  the  iclnnds  which 
stand  at  the  entrance  of  the  Bay  ot  Rio  Janeiro,  exce|)t  in  case  you  nre  certain  lo  reach 
the  harbor  during  day-time  ;  for  if  engaged  amongst  them  you  may  be  dnngoruusly  situa- 
ted, in  case  of  a  squitll  of  wind,  which  is  often  the  case :  then  if  not  enabled  tu  reach  the 
harbor  in  day-light,  it  is  better  to  put  to  sea  again. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


AIT 


Direetiomfor  going  in  and  out  of  the  Harbor  of  Rio  Janeiro. 

To  enter  the  linrbor  of  Rio  Tnneiro  it  is  preferred  Renernlly  to  pus  between  the  Island 
Ba»a.  iBnre  Island)  on  which  there  is  a  rovolvinR  liRht,  and  the  Island  of  Para,  (Father  Light. 
lad  Mother,)  the  first  one  nearly  7  miles  from  the  Sugar-loaf,  the  two  last  &i  rail'  §  N. 
419  E.  of  Bare  Island.  They  have  bold  nhores,  and  may  be  approached  v«ry  neak ;  and 
,,eD  if  necessary  a  vessel  can  pass  between  them  and  the  shore.  The  depth  of  water 
between  these  islands  is  from  13  to  23  fathoms.  Standing  one  mile  abreast  of  Bare  Isl- 
ind,  you  ">"*'  perceive  the  western  end  of  the  most  western  island  (Paya)  N.  47"  E. 
from  this  point.  Direct  your  course  during  7i  miles  N.  6°  E.,  until  you  arrive  at  800 
•grda  west  of  the  fortress  of  Santa  Cruz,  which  exhibits  a  fixed  light,  situated  at  the  east-  Light. 
em  extremity  of  the  entrance.  During  that  course  you  will  have  passed  on  your  lar- 
board hand  several  small  rocks  and  small  islands,  which  lie  between  the  Round  Island  and 
ihelsnd  on  the  Main-top  Mount  side,  and  you  will  pass  at  one  half  mile  distance  from 
the  sniall  island  Toucinho,  (Ham  Island,)  which  is  not  far  distant  from  the  Sugar-loaf 
Mount.  There  is  not  the  least  danger.  You  have  only  to  keep  at  a  proper  distance  from 
the  rocks  which  are  to  be  seen.  The  least  depth  of  water  is  7  fathoms  at  the  entrance : 
but  when  in  the  harbor  it  increases  very  fast,  and  at  a  few  yards  from  the  Santa  Cruz 
Baltory  there  are  over  12  and  16  fathoms. 

The  way  wo  prescribe  to  go  into  the  harbor  possesses  many  advantages.  First,  it  en- 
ables you  to  approach  the  Santa  Cruz  fortress  sufficiently  near  to  answer  the  questions 
potto  you  by  the  guard  ;  second,  to  keep  the  ship  at  a  reasonable  distance  from  the  flat 
island  lying  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance,  on  which  is  built  the  Fort  Lnge  ;  and  thirdly, 
tocoriectthe  effect  of  the  current,  which  sets  towards  the  N.  W.  with  the  tide. 

The  passage  between  Fort  Santa  Cruz  and  Fort  Lage  is  the  only  one  used  in  passing, 
iind  the  one  formed  by  Sao  Joao  Point  is  never  UHed  ;  not  on  account  of  deficiency  of 
water,  but  because  it  is  narrower,  more  crooked,  and  the  bottom  being  rocky,  is  not  safe, 
in  cnse  of  necessity  to  anchor.     They  say  the  piissago  through  it  is  prohibited. 

When  at  600  yards  distant  west  from  Fort  Santa  Cruz,  the  course  to  reach  the  best 
anchorage  is  N.  35"  W.,  until  you  arrive  E.  N.  E.  of  Fort  Villegngnon,  which  ynu  may 
pass  at  only  600  yards  distance.  From  that  place  you  will  steer  towards  the  Island  dos 
Ratos,  (Rat  Island,)  and  now,  being  in  sight  of  the  city,  you  may  choose  your  anchorage 
in  from  10  to  20  fathoms. 

Ifj'oudraw  a  line  from  the  flag  of  Fort  Villegngnon  to  the  Cobras  (Snake)  Island, 
that  line  will  separate  tho  anchorage  for  vessels  of  war  from  that  of  the  merchant  vessels. 
The  best  for  vessels  of  war  is  towards  the  E.  N.  E.  of  the  palace,  and  south  of  a  line 
ilrawii  from  Rat  Island  to  the  main  church  in  the  city,  and  the  best  for  merchant  vessels 
is  near  the  city.  The  largest  reach  tliiit  place  by  passing  north  of  Snake  Island,  and 
they  are  separated  from  the  vessels  of  war  by  a  bank,  or  shallow  water,  where  boats  only 
cau  pass,  and  over  which  the  sea  is  constantly  breaking  at  low  water. 

The  sea  and  land  breezes  are  regular,  and  each  last  one  half  of  the  day.  The  land 
breeze  begins  in  the  evening,  continues  during  the  night,  and  stops  nt  nine  or  ten  in  the 
morning;  a  calm  of  one  hour  generally  succeeds  it,  and  at  about  eleven  tho  sea  breeze 
commences. 

Vessels  going  to  sea  will  follow  the  course  opposite  to  that  pursued  when  going  in. 
It  is  best  to  take  your  departure  in  the  morning,  in  order  to  take  advantage  of  the  land 
breeze,  which,  lusting  3  or  4  hours  during  day- light,  enables  you  to  clear  all  the  small 
islands,  and  reach  the  open  sea.  Vessels  used  sometimes  to  go  at  some  distance  from 
the  city  tho  day  previous  to  their  departure,  in  onier  to  have  a  better  chance  of  getting 
to  sell  the  day  after,  with  the  land  breeze.  In  case  the  breeze  should  subside,  it  would 
be  better  to  cast  anchor. 

Dctcriplion  of  the  Coast  comprised  between  the  Island  of  St.  Catharina  and  the  Bay  of 

Rio  Janeiro. 

VOLAGE  BANK,  on  the  coast  of  Brazil,  lat.  26°  44'  S.,  long.  48"  15'  W.     Sound-    Volage 
I  logs  \i\  to  14  fathoms.  Bank. 

His  Majesty's  ship  Volage.  on  her  way  to  St.  Catharine's,  on  the  coast  of  Brazil,  in 
I  September,  1B32,  struck  soundings  in  14  fathoms,  mud.  on  a  bank  which  is  not  laid  down 
on  the  charts  in  the  above  latitude  and  Kmgitude,  calculated  from  the  noon  observation. 
From  thence,  while  the  ship  wassailing  two  miles  west  by  south,  bottom  was  found  with 
1 14  to  12J  fathoms;  after  which,  on  steering  W.  and  W.  S.  W.,  the  water  deepened  sud- 
denly to  23  and  29  fathoms ;  and  these  depths  were  preserved  until  the  Island  of  Arbo- 
I  redo,  at  tho  north  end  of  St.  Catharine's  Island,  was  passed. 

The  above  position  of  the  shoal  depends  on  iliat  of  Fort  San  Jose,  which  was  consid- 
I  ered  to  be  in  lat.  27°  26'  30"  S.,  and  long.  48°  39'  W.  The  variation  was  found  to  be  7° 
[easterly.    Rouissin  pasted  inside  of  the  shoal,  and  dues  not  lay  it  down. 


ftds 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


From  ffio 
Janeiro  to 
the  River 
PlaU. 


Bay  of  llha 
Grande. 


FROIVr  RTO  JANEIRO  TO  THE  RIVER  PLATE— On  quitting  Rio  Janeiro 
the  shore  bends  W.  by  S.  towards  the  grent  point  of  Onaratibn,  where  the  rango  of  mou 
tains  terniiuates  which  surrounds  the  Bay  of  Rio  Janeiro.  From  this  point  you  tnav'' 
fine  weather  clearly  perceive  Redonda,  or  Round  Island,  distant  8  leagues,  which  isllnH 
18  distinguished  by  its  form,  and  the  deep  streaks  of  white  and  dark  green  which  sjon 
down  on  every  side.  You  will  also  discern  La  Gahia  nt  the  distance  of  6  leagues  bear 
ing  E.  N.  E.,  which  is  a  remarkably  formed  mountain,  as  already  described,  and  cannot 
well  be  confounded  with  any  other.  It  therefore  is  the  most  certain  mark  for  Rio  Janel- 
;o,  particularly  when  coming  from  the  southward. 

From  the  Point  of  Guaratiba,  a  W.  S.  W.  course  will  lead  along  the  low  land  of  ^fa. 
ranbaya,  the  wefterii  point  of  which  terminates  in  a  little  hill,  called  the  Morro  do  Ma- 
ranbaya,  at  the  entrance  to  the  Bay  of  llha  Grande.  The  eastern  point  of  tlie  PrnyHHe 
Maranbnya.  or  Maranbaya  Island,  is  separated  from  the  land  of  Guaratiba  by  n  smnll 
chancel,  which  boats  only  can  enter.  This  island  occupies  a  space  of  8  leagues  E.  and 
W.  It  is  very  low, and  you  must  not  appn  ch  it  without  the  greatest  caution,  especinliv 
when  the  weather  is  not  clear.  This  circumspection  is  the  more  necessary  on  accouDt 
of  a  rock,  surrounded  with  shallow  ground,  which  projects  3  miles  to  the  soutliward  from 
the  coast,  about  midway.  By  keeping  about  4  miles  from  the  coast  at  this  part,  you  will 
have  from  22  to  30  fathoms  of  water,  with  a  bottom  of  sand  and  gravel. 

BAY  OF  ILHA  GRANDE.- The  great  Bay  of  llha  Grande,  formed  between  the 
continent  and  the  island  of  this  name,  has  two  entrances.  The  western  one  is  bounded 
by  the  Point  of  Joatinga  and  the  Island  of  Grande  ;  the  eastern  one  by  the  same  island 
and  the  promontory  or  low  land  of  Maranbaya.  Either  of  these  entrances  conducts  von 
into  the  bay,  which  is  calculated  to  receive  the  largest  vessels.  The  pilots  say  "  whole 
fleets  may  enter  there,  and  find  shelter  from  every  wind.  The  soundings  vary  ftom  :jo 
to  7  fathoms  in  the  greatest  pprt  of  the  bay,  and  you  may  readily  procure  wood  and  wa- 
ter  from  many  parts  of  the  coast." 

At  the  distance  of  2  miles  from  the  south  part  of  llha  Grande,  is  the  little  Island  of 
Georgi  Greco,  which  has  a  barren  appearance,  but  will  furnish  you  with  bptli  wood  and 
water.  The  largest  vessels  may  find  anchorage  on  its  northern  side,  and  r>^!freshment8 
may  be  procured  at  the  little  village  of  d'Angra  dos  Roos,  which  is  there  sitiiiited. 

It  (loos  not  ajjpear  that  Baron  Rouissin  penetrated  into  the  interior  of  the  Hay  of  Illu 
Grande;  and  the  information  hJuropeansat  present  possess  of  this  bay  is  very  imperfect, 

This  i)ay  is  bounded  on  the  N.  E.,  and  also  on  the  S.  \V.,  by  the  main  laiul,  and  com- 
prehending a  length  of  full  GO  miles,  and  is  studded  with  numerous  islands  and  places  of 
anchorage,  having  many  villages  on  the  northern  shore.  The  Eastern,  or  Maranbava 
Channel,  leading  into  this  bay,  is  8  miles  wide,  and  maybe  known  by  the  single  bold 
mountain  about  700  feet  high,  which  stands  on  the  low  point  of  Maranbaya.  The  sandy 
flat,  or  Island  of  ISlaranoaya,  is  about  20  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  In  m est  parts, 
especially  near  the  middle  of  the  island,  it  is  quite  barren  ;  in  others  it  is  covered  with 
various  creeping  plants,  which  keep  the  soil  together.  It  exhibits  on  its  sunnuit  a  little 
brushwood,  and  at  its  northern  extremity  some  mangroves.  Towards  the  sea  it  is  steep, 
and  thv  surf  breaks  with  violence  agiinst  it ;  but  towards  the  bay  it  is  level  and  sniouth, 
This  latter  side  abounds  with  shell-fiih  and  sand-larks.  Tlie  herbage  shelters  iiiimvar- 
maililloes,  and  tiiero  are  numerous  deer  and  otlier  animals  of  chase.  There  is  a  church, 
and  some  few  springs  of  good  water. 

The  Island  Grande,  which  bounds  tlie  western  side  of  the  channel,  is  14  or  15  miles 
in  length,  and  lies  in  the  centre  between  the  two  channels.  'l"he  Western,  or  (iairoso 
Channel,  is  three  leagues  wide,  and  botli  ciniiniels  have  deep  water  within  them.  On 
entering  this  passage  there  are  said  to  he  several  small  bays  at  the  wtislern  shore;  and 
in  entering  the  eastern  clianncl  the  o  are  also  the  Hays  of  I'almas,  Albroo,  and  Kschelle, 
all  situated  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Inie  of  (Jrande.  I'alinas  Bay  is  reported  to  have 
good  anchorage,  inasmuch  as  a  vessel  may  lie  hmd-locUfd  within  it,  and  ridinndcrS 
fathoms  water.     The  other  two  are  smaller,  and  have  a  depth  of  5,  0,  and  7  llilhomii. 

The  following  dirticlions  are  from  the  journals  of  Mr.  Bruce,  Muster  of  II.  M.  ship 
Diamond,  in  IH2') : 

'•  The  western  channel  between  the  llha  Grande  and  Joatinga  Point,  may  readily  be 
known  liy  a  rennirkahle  hdl  inliiml,  called  the  Eriar's  Hood;  this  you  should  endeavor  to 
bring  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  then  steer  towards  it  until  you  get  within  2i  miles  of  the  point. 
Keep  at  this  distance  from  the  island,  in  order  to  avoid  the  suiiken  rock,  wliieli  Ih  laid 
down  in  the  chart  alioiil  tnld-chanuel :  we  kept  about  2  miles  oil',  and  saw  a  great  number 
of  islands  over  towards  the  main.  After  passing  Starling  l-'oint.  we  perceived  a  low  and  | 
barren  island,  lying  about  li  mile  from  Ilha(irande;  this  we  left  on  the  starhount  side, 
carrying  it  and  10  fathoms  close  to  it.  We  then  discovered  what  is  called  Tervilln  Isliind, 
and  also  the  town  <d°  Villa  (i  rande  ;  steered  for  the  island  Terville,  and  had  no  where  less 
than  (ii  and  7  fathoms.  (Jreen  Island  lies  so  very  close  Ui  Vilha  (frande,  that  until  you 
get  close  to  it.  it  cannot  be  distinguished  as  an  island.  We  left  this  on  the  starboard  side, 
and  Terville  Isluud  on  the  larboard,  and  hud  9  and  8  fathoms  between  them ;  kept  clo» 


W"''.-J 


p*""""^"     iiipwi,.p^i«jr!»tpw^iWK"iPn 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

I  tollha  Grande,  until  Oabia  Grande  waa  distinctly  perceived ;  then  steered  towards  it,  gra- 
Jaaily  deepening  our  water  to  12  and  13  fathoms."  Mr.  Bruce  observes,  "  I  have  no 
lesitation  in  saying  the  whole  of  these  islands  are  laid  down  too  far  to  the  westward  in  all 
Ae  charts;  for,  if  they  had  been  correctly  delineated,  we  must  have  seen  Barren  Island, 
Plain  and  Green  Islands,  the  moment  we  rounded  Starling  Point;  instead  of  which,  they 
-ere  not  visible  until  we  hud  passed  Vermeille  Point,  so  that  they  must  be  nearer  to 
Escliella  Point.  We  rounded  close  to  the  Island  Gabia  Grande,  in  9, 10,  and  11  fathoms, 
r^i  then  steered  for  the  cluster  ef  islands  which  lies  round  Jagesons,  or  Jagenos  Island, 
ind  came  to  for  the  night  in  14  fathoms,  sandy  ground,  the  extremes  of  the  islands  bear- 
ijj  S.  E.  and  N.  E.  by  E.,  distant  14  mile  from  the  shore.  We  passed  through  between 
the  islands  Fortadaand  a  small  low,  round,  and  well  wooded  one,  which  lies  nearly  west, 
distant  2  miles  from  the  former,  in  16  and  17  fathoms  water.  This  is  a  very  safe  passage 
with  a  lending  wind ;  but  due  east  from  the  woody  island  a  dangerous  reef  runs  otT  about 
I  the  length  of  3  cables,  upon  which  are  only  12  feet  water:  this,  tliorefore.  must  always 
be  carefully  guarded  against. 

"The  best,  most  common,  and  by  far  the  safest  passage  to  Sapatiba.  is  by  keeping  the 
uainlnnd  on  board,  leaving  the  whole  of  tlie  Islands  of  Tncurucu  and  Madi'ira  on  the  lar- 
bourd  side,  and  those  of  Jagenos  on  the  starboard  :  you  will  then  have  10  and  9  fathoms 
of  water  until  you  get  abreast  of  Madeira ;  it  then  gradually  shoalens  towards  the  anchor- 
m  of  Santa  Cruz,  off  which  we  anchored,  with  the  following  bearings  :  Madeira  Island 
W.  bv  N.  i  N..  distant  2i  miles ;  Tncurucu  Island  W.  by  S.  4  S. ;  entrance  of  Tngua 
River  N.  W.  4  N.,  distant  14  mile;  Mount Maranbaya  S.  W., and  Point  Sapatiba  E."^by 
S,  i  S.,  in  5?  fathoms,  muddy  ground. 

"In  sniling  from  hence,  we  kept  the  main  land  on  board,  and  when  we  were  between 
the  Islands  of  Gabia  Grande  and  Fortuda,  caught  a  westerly  wind.  You  may  stand  to- 
wards Gabia  Grande  into  any  depth  you  choose  ;  but  you  must  be  cautious  in  nppmach- 
inirthe  shores  of  Maranbaya.  Stand  not  into  less  than  10  fathoms,  lest  you  get  upon 
the  reefs  on  that  side;  you  will  have  1.5, 17,  10.  and  in  two  casts  only  5  fiithoms  ;  then, 
before  you  get  the  ship  round,  you  will  be  in  4  fithoms  :  with  the  above  soundings,  Ga- 
bia Gninde  bore  N.  N.  W.,  and  Point  Maranbaya  S.  by  E.  It  appears  by  the  water 
I  having  shonled  gradually  when  standing  towards  the  reef,  from  17  to  15,  10.  and  7  fath- 
oms, that  the  western  edge  of  it  lies  with  Point  Maranbaya  S.  E.  4  E.,and  Gabia  Grande 
N.E-4N.  . 

"The  Maranbaya,  or  Eastern  Channel,  is  upon  the  whole  very  safe,  and  may  be  navi- 
ated,  with  common  prudence,  with  very  little  danger.     Should  the  winds  be  light  when 
von  get  within  Point  Maranbaya,  and  the  flood  or  easterly  current  is  making,  you  should 
I  DotbringGnbia(»rande  tothe  northward  of  N.  E.,or  N.  E.  i  N.,  for  the  tides  set  strongly 
I  over  Msranbaya  Reefs,  and  there  are  plenty  places  for  anchorage." 

Point  Jo:itinga,  which  is  the  western   point  of  the  Gairaso  Channel,  has  a  small  islet 
before  it.    This  island,  according  to  Baron  Rouissin,  lies  in  23"  18'  30  '  S..  and  longitude 
1 11'^  39'  W.    This  point,  with  that  of  Cariocu,  terminates  the  southern  part  of  the  high 
land  which  forms  the  vast  bay  of  Ilha  Grande  ;  both  are  very  lofty,  and  may  be  approach- 
ed with  safety  by  all  sorts  of  vessels. 

From  Point  Cariocu  the  land  runs  W.  23'^  S.,  about  9  leagues,  towards  the  Islands  of 
Porcos:  this  group  comprehc-.ida  an  island  somewhat  high,  and  is  accompanied  by  three 
I  other  smaller  ones ;  one  of  tliese  lies  to  the  soutliw  ard,  the  others  to  the  eastward.  The 
pilots  assert  "that  between  this  island  and  the  continent  there  is  a  very  fine  channel, 
I  through  which  large  vessels  may  pass,  and  anchor  in  ])erfect  safety.  You  may,  at  many 
i  parts  of  the  coast,  procure  wo()<l  and  wiiter,  also  cattle  and  other  necessaries  ;  but  you 
I  should  not  attempt  this  passage  without  having  the  advantage  of  a  fair  wind." 

Mr.  Bruce  says,  "  When  I  was  iioar  the  shore  about  the  Island  of  Porcos,  I  took  the 
I  following boarings  ot  a  very  interosti.ig  cluster  of  islands;  between  the  whole  of  which 
there  appear  to  bo  good  and  safe  passages,  with  excellent  anchorages  inside,  sheltered  from 
all  winds.  The  Island  of  Porcos  boro  S.  VV.  4  W.,  distant  VI  miles  ;  the  first,  or  in-shore 
\'dand  about  half  a  p>ilo  fnmi  the  main,  and  situated  abreast  of  a  very  fine  sandy  beach,  N. 
by  E.,  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile  ;  second  island  N.  E.  by  E.,  distant  one  mile  ;  a 
rock,  which  is  10  feet  above  the  levol  of  the  sea,  E.  N.  E.,  distant  li  mile  ;  and  an  island, 
whichappeared  to  bo  24  miles  in  length,  and  forming  a  sort  of  cape  to  this  little  bay,  E. 
[bv  S.,  distant  34  miles;  with  (i  smaller  islets  inside  of  it,  running  to  the  north-eastward 
in  a  semi-circular  form. 

Mr.  J.  Kngledue  of  H.  M.  ship  Boc'f,.rd,  o'>''erves,  "  The  bay  in  Porcos  Island  shows 
I  a  good  roadstead,  being  sheltered  from  all  winds,  t  xcopt  those  from  the  N.  E.  to  the  E. 
by  N.,  which  seldom  continue  long  enough  to  occasion  a  sea  of  any  consequence;  it  may 
therefore  ho  considered  the  best  and  safest  of  any  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  There  is  no 
regular  tide,  and  the  water  does  not  rise  or  fall  above  one  foot.  Shark's  Road  also  has 
good  anchorage  with  all  winds  except  those  from  the  southward,  which  occusiou  a  heavy 
tumbling  sea,  and  render  large  vessels  unsafe." 


689 


W.'\ 


^w 


"•""''P"<rewp«p™" 


«40 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

SAINT  SEBASTIAN'S  ISLAND — Point  Pinwonungo,*  which  is  the  Bonth-east 
ern  point  of  the  Island  of  St.  S  "bastian,  bears  from  Redondo  Island  W.  S.  W.  A  g  5? 
tant  40  j  leases,  and  from  the  Point  Cariocu  S.  W^  i  S.,  distant  49  miles.    It  is  nboiiui  I 


Saint  Sebas-   leagues  in  diameter, 
<uin'<  Island.      


Strait  of  St. 
Sebastian. 


High  water. 


',  and  the  mountains  are  as  lofty  as  those  upon  the  main  Innd  fi- 
which  it  is  separated  by  a  narrow  channel.  This  island  is  visible  15  leagues  off  in  cl""'  1 
weather :  the  shores  are  very  steep,  the  south  point  projects  sensibly,  and  the  coast  turn' I 
directly  to  the  E.  S.  E.  so  far  as  the  S.  S.  E.  point  of  the  island.  The  eastern  cm  ' 
runs  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  meridian.  The  whole  island  is  in  the  form  of  n  J 
angle,  and  the  coast  opposite  to  the  continent  forms  with  it  a  strait,  or  channel,  with  de ' 
bays,  where  you  will  find  excellent  anchorage,  on  a  bottom  of  mud,  having  from  25  to*H  I 
fathoms.  "  While  mentioning  the  qualities  of  the  soundings,"  says  the  Baron,  "I , 
observe  that  on  the  coasts  of  Brazil,  muddy  ground  is  most  always  to  be  found'near  tW  I 
highest  lands."  ""^ 

Many  islands  or  groups  of  islets,  situated  to  the  northward  of  the  Island  of  St.  Seba 
tian,   coritrihute  to  shelter  the  vast  basin  which  the  island  forms  with  the  continent 
The  most  contiguous  is  the  Island  of  Victoria.     Six  miles  E.  28°  N.  of  Victoria  or  i 
the  three  little  islets  of  Ruzios ;  and  11  miles  N.  15°  W.  of  these  lie  tho  Porcoa  IsM 
ands,  already  noticed.     The  passages  between  these  islands  have  water  sijfficient  f 
the  largest  vessels,  like  thnf  between  tho  Island  of  St.  Sebastian  and  the  main :  howevp 
the  passage  between  Victoria  and   St.  Sebastian's  being  contracted  by  a  reef,  which 
stretches  two  miles  to  the  S.  S.  W.  of  the  former,  it  is  somewhat  hazardous  for  large  ve 
sels  to  pass  through  it. 

_  THK  ST  II AIT  OF  ST.  SEBASTIAN  is  formed  between  the  island  and  the  con- 
tinent, and  offers  a  safe  and  commodious  port  for  the  largest  vessels  :  its  general  direction  I 
is  N.  30°  E.,  and  S.  30°  W.,  but  this  course  cannot  be  followed  exactly  throughout  th 
stniit,  on  account  of  the  banks  which  nin  out  from  the  continent  two-thirds  of  itslenMh 
from  north  to  south.     Vessels  coming  from  the  northward,  and  leaving  n  point  situateil 
hiilf  n  mile  from  L' Armacno,  which  is  built  at  tho  head  of  the  north-west  side  of  the  i 
and,  should  first  proceed  S.  16°  W.,  for  about  5  miles,  and  then  S.  45"  V/.,  until  fhev  I 
get  out  of  the  strait.     In  this  passage,  which  is  about  11  miles  in  length,  tho  least  water ' 
will  bo  10  fathoms,  but  more  frequently  from  15  to  20  fathoms,  the  ground  being  alwarg 
of  mud.  which  holds  well.     The  greatest  hreiidtli  between  the  island  and  the  main  is 
about  three  miles,  and  this  is  at  the  northern  entrance;  but  two-thirds  of  this  space  is 
occupied  by  the  banks  just  n)ontioned,  over  which  tiiere  are   not  aliove   throe  fiithoms 
wntor;  so  thiit  yon  must  range  along  tho  shore  of  St.  Sebastian's  Island,  at  tiie  distance 
of  .')00  or  GOO  fathoms. 

The  southern  entrance  is  much  narrower;  novertheless,  all  tho  natives  assure  you  tW  ! 
the  liirtjest  ships  may  navigate  it,  by  only  following  the  direction    of  the  channpj.    y™ 
could  not  wish  for  a  harbor  more  tranquil  than   this  of  St.  Sebastian;  for  environed  by 
high  land,  tho  vessel  ridi's  on  water  which  is  as  smooth  as  though  it  wore  in  a  basin. 

You  will  find  at  St.  .Selmsliim  the  adviintHgos  of  a  good  supply  of  cattle,  poultry, ar- 
rack, and  other  provision.i  customary  to  the  countries  situated  within  the  tro|)ic8.  You 
miiy  obtain  these  very  iMisily,  ami  lit  modenito  prices,  either  at  the  two  principal  estabisli. 
meiits,  or  at  the  hiihitations  of  the  natives,  which  are  scatt(>red  about  in  great  numherj 
in  the  interior  of  the  coast  Fish  are  seldom  very  plentiful,  but  they  are  of  a  oooj 
quality. 

The  ancient  to\vii  of  St.  Sebastian  is  on  the  continent,  nt  the  narrowest  part  of  the 
stniit.  Since  lf^l7  tho  Brazilians  have  projected  another,  to  be  called  Villa  Nova  da 
Priiiee/.a.  situateil  near  the  north  entrance  on  the  island.  It  is  400  fathoms  S,  \V,  of  I 
this  now  establishuietit,  where  there  is  the  best  unchorage  for  men-of-war,  hiivint'  17 
fHthoins  wilier,  on  II  lottom  of  grey  sand.  There  are  u  great  miinv  watering  pliicpsdn 
the  Island  of  St.  Sebastian  :  one  of  the  best  is  at  the  entrance  to  tlie  new  town  anj 
L'Arinacao,  situated  at  the  N.  W.  point  of  the  island,  where  water  is  good  and  eiisily  ob- 
tained.    Wood  for  fuel  may  alco  be  had  on  all  parts  of  the  iidjiicent  continent. 

The  winds  nt  St.  Sebastian  follow,  iilmost  always,  the  <lirection  of  the  strait,  exwpt 
at  night,  when  the  land  breezes  blow  alternately  from  many  points,  without  followin» 
any  reuuliir  law.  During  the  day  the  winds  generally  come  fvoin  the  N.  N,  K.  mid  ihe 
S.  ,'^.  W.,  following  tho  direction  of  the  land ;  but  are  frequently  ititerrupted  by  iiiterrals 
of  culm. 

The  currents  follow  the  same  directions  as  tho  winils,  and  their  velocity  is  proportion-  i 
ate  to  the  force  of  the  hitler;  the  most  common  in  the  straits,  is  from  X  of  a  mile  pet 
hour,  to  1   j"„  of  a  mile. 

'I'lie  tides  have  no  regularity  within  tho  strait ;  nevertheless,  we  thought  wo  could  I 
reckon  that  it  is  high  water,  on  the  days  of  new  and  full  moon,  at  'J  o'clock.  The  riac  of  | 
the  tide  has  been  estimated  at  4  feet. 


•  Thin  point,  iicrordini;  tn  naroii  RnuixHin,  in  in  lalitiiilH  23"  57'  U'i",  and  longitude  4a°  20'  18^' W,; 
but  Cuptiiin  llcywoud,  in  lUlU,  mode  it  only  iu  lungiiudu  46°  'J^  30'^ 


V  I'l'^w" 


•^vqnpinmHM 


^mnummrmmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

The  anchorage  is  situated  in  latitude  23°  47'  26"  S.,  and  in  longitude  45"  27'  W.   The 

I  Ition  was  3=  25'  E.,  in  June,  1819.     We  have  observed  that  the  land  of  St.  Sebastian's 

r^nd  and  that  of  the  neighboring  parts,  is  much  elevated ;  the  hills  are  covered  with 

nod  up  t"  t**®""  Bunimit,  and  have  a  most  agreeable  aspect    The  coasts  are  steep,  and 

*  1  ffl«y  anchor  any  where  at  a  little  disttince  from  them,  on  a  good  bottom ;  and  there  is, 

neral.  ""  danger  but  what  appears  above  water. 
'fbout  W.  S.  W.  i  W.  from  the  southern  enUance  of  the  Strait  of  St.  Sebastian  is 


of  SaDtos,  the  distance  being  nearly  50  miles.     Between  them  you  will  perceive  the 


641 


lit,  except 

foll(ivvin» 

mill  ilie 

iiitorvals 


wo  could 
'lie  rise  of  I 


LesAlcatra- 
zes. 


Sflsame  distance  along  the  neighboring  coast,  you  will  find  a  good  passage,  with  from  12 
"'„.  fiithoms,  on  an  excellent  bottom  of  mud.    Due  east  from  this  island,  at  about  14  miles 


?«tance,  is  a  small  rocky  islet,  called  Toquetoque ;  it  lies  just  off  the  western  entrance 
f  the  Strait  of  St.  Sebastian  ;  and  in  coming  out  or  going  in,  should  always  be  left  to  the 
rthward.    Some  small  rocky  islands  also  lie  close  to  the  shore,  and  to  the  N.  E.  of 

I  1  fit  u|(vn 

'^LES  ALCA'TRAZES.— The  group  of  Alcatrazes  is  composed  of  several  barren 

k9  above  water,  the  largest  of  which  may  be  seen  7  leagues  off.     Viewed  from  the  E. 

Te  it  has  the  appearance  which  painters  commonly  give  to  the  dolphin ;  whose  head, 

nedto  two  little  rocks,  is  turned  to  the  W.  S.  W.  :  another  rock,  larger  than  the  two 

Mter  lies  at  the  distance  of  2  miles  to  the  W.  N.  W.,  while  2  or  3  others  are  situated 

tut  a  similar  distance  to  the  north-eastward.    The  pilots  say  the  bottom  is  not  safe  in 

rt  e  parts  adjacent  to  this  group  of  rocks,  and  that  it  will  be  prudent  not  to  approach  ihom 

rerthnn  4  or  5  miles,  and  that  with  a  fair  wind.     This  precaution  may  be  rendered  ne- 

°'«88rv  by  the  vicinity  of  the  Strait  and  Island  of  St.  Sebastian,  which  cause  the  currents 

to  be  very  considerable  at  this  part.     Mr.  Bruce  assorts,  that  vessels  beating  to  windward 

f  m  Snntos  may  pass  close  to  the  Alcatrazes,  which  aie  steep  to,  and  visible  10  or  12 

llLues  off  in  clear  weather. 

The  summit  of  the  principal  island  of  the  Alcatrozes  is  in  latitude  24°  6'  5"  S.  and  in 

I  nritude  45"  46'  32"  W.     The  variation  in  1819,  was  5"  E. 

ft  will  here  be  proper  to  mention  a  rock  first  seen  by  Manoel  Madeiros,  a  Portuguese 

mmnnder,  on  the  13th  February,  1811,  who  sounded  round  it  at  100  fathoms'  dis- 

r  e  and  was  unable  to  reach  the  ground.     He  entertained  no  doubt  of  the  real  exist- 

of  this  danger,  and  described  it  to  be  a  round  naked  rock,  sometimes  above  water, 

'"d  often  covered  by  the  swell  of  die  sea.     The  mariners  of  Brazil  seem  to  allow  the 

'°  litvof  this  danger,  which  is  said  to  lie  35  leagues  S.  by  E.  from  the  S.  E.  point  of  St. 

rhaJfiHii  and  1-i  leagues  E.  29'  N.  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  St.  Catharine's  Island;  or 

m  lat  25°  41'  20"  S.T  long.  44°  59'  W.  of  Greenwich. 

Baioii  Rouissin  observes,  this  danger  appeared  nearly  in  a  similar  situation  on  two  M. 
S  charts  of  the  Portuguese,  then  in  his  possession ;  and  therefore  he  thought  it  ought 
to  be  pliiced  on  all  maritime  charts  in  future. 

W  i  N.,  distiiut  11  leagues  frotn  the  Aicatrn/.es,  is  the  Island  of  Moela,  upon  which 
a  liditliouse  is  erected,  which  shows  a  fixed  light,  and  is  of  great  assistance  in  entering    dghOwuse, 
this  port.    The  island  is  situated  off  the  eiistorn  point  of  the  Harbor  of  Santos. 

sInTOS.— The  Port  of  Santos  was  formerly  much  frequented  by  Portuguese  ves-  Santos. 
sels  but  is  now  only  of  secondary  importiiuce  :  for  the  riches  of  the  province  of  Rio 
Janeiro,  Biihia,  and  Pernnmbuco,  aciiuire  every  day  a  predominance  more  considerable 
than  iiU'the  southern  provinces.  This  l)ort  is  formed  by  the  continent  and  the  Island  St. 
Amaro  being  only  separated  from  the  former  by  tlie  little  River  Bertioga.  There  are 
two  cntrnncos,  but  only  that  of  the  south  is  nuvij-alile  by  large  vessels:  for  the  other, 
formed  hy  the  River  Uertioga,  is  oulj  fit  for  small  craft.  The  Harbor  of  Santos  will  ad- 
mit larae  ships,  which  may  ride  sheltered  from  all  winds,  except  those  from  the  S.  S.  W. 

The  Point  of  Taypu,  which  forms  the  western  point  of  tho  entrance,  is  in  lat.  24°  1' 
U' S.  nnd  in  long.  4()''  30'  20"  W.  Tho  Point  of  Manduba  is  to  the  eastward  ;  and  on 
the  same  parallel,  about  a  mile  to  the  south-eastward  of  which  is  the  little  Island  Moela, 
which  mny  be  approached  without  danger. 

Tho  following  directions  are  by  Mr.  Bruce,  whose  name  has  frequently  been  intro- 
duced in  tho  course  of  this  work.  ,     x  .     ,  r,    , 

"In  steering  for  Santos  from  the  southward,  you  may  pass  close  to  the  Island  Redon- 
da,  (tho  Quoiraada  Grande  of  Rouissin,)  bearing  N.  E.  i  N.,  distant  1  mile;  it  is  2  miles 
Ions,  and  narrow,  and  lies  about  N.N.  E-  and  S.  S.  W. ;  the  highest  part  is  to  the  S. 
W,,  which  appears  lofty  and  bluff,  and,  with  the  above  bearings,  seems  to  be  round.  N. 
W.  from  this  island  is  another,  distant  nearly  (i  miles;  this  is  small,  and  quite  round,  be- 

iBthickly  wooded,  and  visible  20  miles  off.     After  passing  between  these  islands,  I  per- 

sived  a  rock  12  or  15  feet  high,  and  a  little  larger  than  a  line-of-battle  ship's  lai">cii: 


iiij 
ceived 


18"  W,;  H  i^^jji^g^  ^^  jjjggg  j^y  l^g^  „p,,t,ttr  in  the  charts.)     Tho  following  are  their  bearings  and 


J«lpl,llflJ«lpl 


ppp 


549 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


mil 
byS.' 


>  Snntos  Bay.  I  took  the  following  bearings :  Bird  or  Duty  lalund  (th 

of  Rouissin,)  S.  E.,  distant  4  leagues;  Alcatrazes.  E.  |  N.,  12  or  ii 

3d  Redonda,  S.  W.  i  W.,  10  or  11  leagues;  and  Point  Enge'nho,  north 


estimated  distances : — Large  Island,  perhaps  Redonda,  S.  E.  j  E.,  distant  about6tnil    .1 

small  round  Woody  Island,  S.  W.,  Sj  miles;  and  the  Rock,  N.  E.  |  N.,  about  6  milM.'l 

the  Rock  in  one  with  Redonda^  S.  i  E.;  Rock  and  Woody  Island  in  one  S.  W. 

When  going  into  Snntos  Bay. 

Laage  de  ^antot 

leagues;  supposetl  i.v\u.riiui«,  i^i   tt  .  4   »t  .,  »%#  w*  xm.  lUK^ui^a ,  .««i«  1.  umb  i^n^Hiino,  north  1 

nearly  9  miles;  at  this  distance  we  could  not  see  either  the  Woody  Island  or  the  Rock 

"In  advancing  into  the  River  Santos  you  will  have  10,  9,  8,  and  7  fathoms  water  u 
til  you  near  the  bar,  upon  which  there  are  only  4i  and  5  fathoms  :  the  entrnnce  is  narrow 
but  the  starbonrd  side  is  umch  the  boldest,  and  has  19  fathoms  water  close  to  the  shor    I 
After  pasniiig  the  first  Barra  Grande,  the  water  deepens  to  15  and  16  fathoms,  within  1*9 1 
fathoms  of  the  shore.     Keep  the  starboard  land  close  on  board,  until  you  get  abreast  f  I 
a  few  huts;  then  steer  mid-channel,  keeping  gradun"y  on  towards  the  highest,  or  north  f 
ernmost  hill,  there  being  two  on  the  westernmost  bank  of  the  river,  and  these  are  th 
only  ones,  theref.ire  you  cannot  be  mistaken.     Steer  fiom  the  huts  before  inentioonH 
towards  these  two  hills.     The  reach  is  shallow,  with  not  more  than  3  fathoms  on  it-  ther  I 
the  starboard  side  will  be  found  the  shoab  st;  keep  therefore  close  to  the  hills,  and  vou 
water  will  deepen  to  6  fathoms;  but  having  passed  the  hills,  you  may  again  run  toward! 
the  starboard  shore,  and  when  you  have  passed  about  2  cables'  length,  then  steer  for  th 
fort  on  the  starboard  bank  of  the  river.    This  is  erected  upon  a  perpendicular  rock  closa 
to  which  are  20  fathoms  water:  and  when  you  arrive  abreast  of  this  fort,  you  will  see  ths 
town  of  ^'antos  nearly  open  of  the  point  on  the  larboard  side.     Steer  towards  it,  keeDlnj 
about  2  or  3  cables'  length  from  the  shore,  and  you  will  then  avoid  the  shoal  which  nin« 
from  it,  and  be  perfectly  clear  also  of  the  bank  which  runs  off  the  fort  in  the  direction  of 
the  town,  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  when  almost  up  with  the  town,  you  can  anchor 
The  best  anchorage  will  be  abreast  nearly  of  the  centre  of  the  town,  in  7  fathoms, ona 
bottom  of  mud.     Provisions  are  abundant,  and  good  water  may  be  obtained  by  sendinjn 
boat  about  7  or  8  miles  further  up  the  river. 

"To  enter  this  port  a  pilot  is  not  absolutely  necessary:  for  the  above  direotinns,  if  we|) 
attended  to,  will  be  fully  sufficient  to  carry  you  in,  clear  of  every  danger.  When  you 
get  abreast  of  the  town,  you  will  observe  the  high  land  opposite,  on  the  northern  side  of 
the  river.  You  may  pull  towards  this,  and  round  Carvallo  Point  pretty  close,  by  which 
you  will  open  the  Lago  de  St.  Rita.  This  lake  is  about  four  miles  in  circumference 
Steer  right  up  it  for  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  stretch  directly  over  fora 
low  round  i.sland,  thickly  covered  with  brushwood ;  and  when  you  get  near  to  tills,  yon 
will  perceive  another  island,  somewhat  similar  in  appearance.  Keep  nearer  to  tlie  first 
island,  and  pa.ss  between  them:  then  you  will  open  the  entrance  of  the  rivor,  and  also 
will  observi!  another  branch  or  opening  on  the  starboard  side.  Keep  the  larboarii  shore 
on  board,  and  pull  up  about  3  or  4  n  iles.  You  will  then  find  the  water  freshen,  A  boat 
may  with  ease  inaKo  two  trips  a  day  ;  but  as  the  atmosphere  is  hot  and  sultry,  all  boats 
should  endeavor  to  get  on  board  before  half  after  3  o'clock :  for  at  this  time  it  commonly 
bf'giii«  to  ruin,  and  continues  to  do  so  until  10  at  night.     Wood  is  in  abundance. 

The  Barra  de  St.  Vincent  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Port  of  Santos 
and  was  once  a  good  channel;  but  the  continual  increase  and  accumulation  of  sand  have 
ciiokcd  its  entrance  up,  for  now  it  will  scarcely  admit  canoes  to  pass. 

Le  I.,aag(>,  or  Rock  of  Santos,  lies  Ifii  miles  S.  14"  E.  of  the  Island  Moela;  it  is  a 
smooth  white  stone,  elevated  about  (5  or  8  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  sea;  it  lies ij 
latitude  i-M"  18'  .S.  and  in  longitude  4(i''  17'  W.  Midway  between  this  danger  and  the 
Port  of  Sautos,  there  are  1!*  and  20  fathoms,  with  a  bottom  of  sand  and  mud,  whichij 
tlio  usinil  qiinlity  of  the  ground  hereabout. 

Leaving  the  Port  of  Santos,  th(i  coast  ru'is  S.  W.  towards  the  Village  o*"  Conceicao, 
a  distance  of  8  leagues.  The  land  is  genendly  low  at  tho  water's  edge,  but  lilfjii  in  the 
interior  ;  for  a  chain  of  mountains  runs  along  4  or  5  leagues  inland,  and  the  siiore  is  in- 
tersccti'd  and  l)i-oken  by  several  rivulets,  wiiich,  in  sailing  along  at  a  distanct ,  {jivestoit 
tlie  appearance  of  islands.  This  chain  of  mountains  is  broken  by  the  Harbor  of  Santos, 
but  continues  t(t  run  K.  by  N.  so  far  as  tho  Hariior  of  .Sebastian. 

Tho  Village  of  Conceicao  is  situated  on  a  little  mountain  near  tho  shore,  4  miles  off, 
wlier«<  you  may  an(dior  in  10  or  12  faihotns  water.  To  tho  S.  W.  of  Point  Taypu.  dis- 
tant 20  miles,  is  an  isolated  rock,  elevated  about  10  or  12  feet  nliove  the  surficoofthe 
sea,  which  the  Portuguese  call  Laage  de  Conceicao,  at  a  pistol-shot  distance  from  which 
are  from  12  to  14  fathoms,  sand  and  mud.  Off  this  part  >  ou  may  distinctly  perceive  the 
port  of  Santos.  This  rock  lies  7  miles  to  tlie  E.  .'51°  S.  of  tho  Village  of  Conceicao,  ami 
V>  miles  to  the  N.  4^  W.  from  (Jueimada  (irande. 

The  Islaiiils  of  Qiieimada  are  two  masses  of  rocks,  nearly  barren,  and  distant  from 
onch  other  10  miles,  in  a  S.  E.  and  N.  W.  direction  ;  the  largest,  which  is  firthest  toth« 
S.  E.,  and  nniy  be  seen  7  or  8  leagues  off,  has  a  little  rock  lying  to  the  northward  of  it: 
you  may,  without  danger,  go  between  the  two  Queimadas,  or  pass  between  tbein  and  the 
land. 

In  sailing  along  the  shore  to  the  south-westward,  you  will  racoguize  Buccessivelj  tiw 


^^r^^imfmm 


mmmmum 


wmmmm 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


543 


Hiwr  and  Hill  of  Piruibe,  the  two  isles  of  Queimada.  the  isles  of  Guarnhu,  the  Barra  de 
Unha.  the  Point  da  Jurca,  and  the  River  Iguape.  At  the  distance  of  from  3  to  10  miles 
off  the  land,  you  will  have  a  depth  of  from  8  to  15  fathoms.  The  coast  near  the  shore 
iH^comes  rather  high,  and  runs  in  the  direction  of  S.  50"  W.,  and  the  soundings  opposite 
increase  in  proportion  to  the  elevation  of  the  adjacent  coast. 

IGUAPE  AND  CANANE  A.— The  coast,  troin  the  entrance  of  the  River  Iguape  to  If^uape  and 
the  River  Cananea.  is  called  the  Playa  de  Iguape;  it  is  a  low  sandy  flat,  except  about  the  Cananea. 
middle,  and  cannot  be  seen  unless  you  are  a  very  little  distance  off;  therefore,  in 
jailing  along  it,  you  ought  never  to  come  nearer  the  land  than  2  leagues  ;  nor  into  less 
than  10  or  i->  fathoms  water,  with  a  bottom  of  sand.  This  Playa  de  Iguape  is  separated 
from  the  continent  by  a  lake,  or  natural  canal,  which  communicates  with  the  bar  of  Ca- 
nanea, and  is  called  by  the  Portuguese,  Mar  Pequina,  or  the  little  sea.  This  lake  has 
depth  siifTicient  for  large  vessels,  but  the  bar  of  Iguape  will  only  admit  of  boats.  You 
must  not  confound  this  opening  with  the  Bar  of  the  River  Iguape,  which  is  situated  3 
leaeues  further  to  the  north-eastward,  and  forms  the  entrance  of  the  River  Isuaoe.  situ- 
ated in  lat.  24°  35'  S. 

You  may  anchor  all  along  this  coast  at  the  distance  of  2  oi  3  miles  off  the  Pliiya,  on 
excellent  muddy  ground,  with  from  6  to  10  fathoms  water  ;  but  there  are  no  ports  on  this 
const  accessible  to  large  ships,  and  there  can  be  no  necessity  to  anchor  here,  unless  in  a 
calm,  when  you  have  no  occasion  to  expose  yourself  to  danger. 

After  passing  along  the  Playa  de  Iguape,  you  will  arrive  at  the  Bar  of  Cananea,  and 
at  the  island  of  Bom  Abrigo,  which  lies  to  the  southward  of  the  Bar  of  Cananea,  within 
which  the  Brazilians  coiistruct  their  large  vessels ;  and  the  natives  say.  that  to  enter  the 
rider,  "you  may  pass  with  a  pilot  to  the  southward  of  the  Island  of  Bom  Abrigo  ;  but 
the  common  channel  is  to  the  northward,  although  it  is  encumbered  with  many  shoals." 
The  Island  Bom  Abrigo  is  very  high,  and  overed  with  trees  :  and  vessels  may  anchor 
ata  little  distance  off  to  the  eastward.  There  is  a  little  island  lying  to  the  southward  of  it, 
about  2  miles  to  the  eastward  from  which  there  are  11  and  12  fathoms  water,  on  a  bot- 
tom of  sand. 

The  Bar  of  Cananea  may  be  known  from  seaward  by  two  objects,  both  equally  con- 
jpicuous;  one  is  the  Mountain  of  Cardoz,  situated  inland,  about  5  leagues  W.N.  W. 
from  Bom  Abrigo;  the  other  is  the  Playa  de  Iguape,  or  flat,  consisting  of  little  downs 
of  white  sand,  interspersed  with  brushwood,  which  extends  all  the  way  from  the  Bar  of 
Iguape,  a  distance  of  10  leagues.  Notwithstanding  the  short  distance,  and  the  height 
of  the  chain  of  mountains,  of  which  Mount  Cardoz  constitutes  a  part,  and  predominates 
so  remarkably,  the  fogs  that  prevail  throughout  this  part  of  the  coast  in  the  south  mon- 
soon, will  prevent  your  discovering  the  laud,  and  large  vessels  should  therefore  approach 
the  low  coast  with  the  greatest  precaution.  Mount  Cardoz  is  the  highest  mountiiiii  upon 
this  part,  and  is  situated  in  lat.  24° 54'  45  "  S.,  and  in  long.  48°  12'  26"  W.  The  vaiiation, 
eiengues  off  the  land,  was  7°  E.  in  1819. 

Pimentel.  in  describing  this  part,  proceeds  thus, : — "  From  the  Barra  de  Igunpe  to  the 
Barra  de  Can.inea  the  distance  is  about  30  miles,  die  shores  being  low  and  flat.  Oppo- 
gitetotiie  entrance  to  the  latter,  lies  the  Island  of  Abrigo, dividing  it  into  two  channels, 
bulb  of  which  are  dangerous,  on  account  of  the  breakers  and  shoals  thereabout.  The 
northern  entrance,  called  Barra  Falsa,  is  narrow  and  shallow.  Corvettes  and  small  boats 
only  enter  there.  The  southern  entrance  is  wider  and  deejjer,  and  in  this  channel  ships 
of  burthen  find  a  passage.  Sail  in  towards  the  southern  shore,  keeping  close  in  3  and  4 
fathoms  water;  but  observe  the  bar  is  shifting,  and  consequently  dangerous  to  all  stran- 
gers. The  bar  is  about  a  mile  in  breadth.  Wlieu  you  are  within  you  will  detpeu  your 
waterto  5,  fi.  and  7  fathoms,  and  may  anchor  as  most  convenient  for  your  purpose. 

From  Cananea  southward,  you  will  fall  in  with  a  small  island,  called  Castillo.     This 
is  nearly  opposite  to  the  River  Arrepira,  which  is  now  not  navigable.     Further  on  is 
Figuera,  another  small  island  ;  and  coasting  along,  you  will  reach  the  Barra  do  Supera- 
gui,  admitting  canoes  only.     This  creek  is  divided  from  the  main  entrance  to  the  Bay  of 
Paranagiia  i)y  the  Island  of  Pecas,  near  a  mile  from  the  southern  part  of  which  are  some 
rocks.    These  rocks  form  the  northern  boundary  of  the  channel,  while  the  island  do  Me) 
liesto  the  south.     The  passage  between  is  near  a  mile  in  width.     A  league  oil'  at  sea  are 
only  3i,  4,  and  5  fathoms  ;  but  as  you  approach  the  bar,  it  deepens  to  5,  (!,  7,  and  8  fath- 
oms; in  the  channel  are  44   and  5  fathoms;  and  when  within  you  will  have  5,  6,  and  7 
1  fathoms.    There  is  another  entrance  to  the  southward  of  Mel  Island,  called  Barra  do 
Sul;  but,  like  the  Barra  de  Superngui,  it  is  fit  only  for  boats.     The  course  to  Paranngua 
I  Town  and  the  Villa  Aiitonina  is  due  west.     The  former  is  on  the  larboard  side,  almost  4 
guesfrom  the  bar,  while  the  latter  is  rather  to  the  northward,  and  about  G  leagues  up 
I  the  river.    There  are  several  islands  scattered  about,  but  the  channel  is  generally  clear, 
land  every  known  danger  is  visible." 

Rouissin  says,  that  in  following  the  laud  to  the  S.  westward  of  Bom  Abrigo,  to  the  dis- 
Itsnceof  10  miles,  you  will  meet  the  little  Island  Castillo,  and  8i  miles  beyond  that,  in  the 
I  lame  direction,  the  Island  of  Figo,  or  Figuera,  both  which  have  obtained  theii- names  from 


wmm^^im 


mmmm 


mmmmmmm 


mp^ 


^mm 


^^mmmffm 


ipn 


644 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


their  peculiar  appearance :  the  former  is  somewhat  less  elevated  than  the  latter  bnt 
broader,  and  has  a  ridge  rising  up  in  the  middle,  which  maybe  mistaken  for  a  castle-'  thn 
latter  resembles  a  fig.  They  are  both  nearly  barren,  and  bear  from  each  other  s!  350 
W.,  and  N.  35°  E.  In  drawing  near  to  them,  you  will  have,  at  the  distance  of  1  mije 
from  15  to  10  fathoms,  fine  sandy  ground.  ' 

Pa'":r  -gva  P  ARAN  AGUA. — Having  passed  to  the  southward  of  Figuera,  about  8  or  9  miles,  ynn 
will  open  the  Bay  of  Paranagua.  This  is  a  bay  of  3  or  4  leagues  diameter,  rece'ivin 
many  brooks  and  liitle  rivers :  the  entrance  is  sheltered,  and  at  the  same  time  divided 
into  two  channels  by  a  low  island,  upon  which  are  many  little  hills,  appearing  when 
seen  at  a  distance,  like  several  islands.  This  island,  named  Isle  do  Mel,  has  on  its  nortli. 
eastern  side,  three  little  Islets  das  Palmas.  The  southern  entrance  is  encumbered  with 
breakers,  and  not  navigable.  The  northern  channel  will  admit  of  brigs,  and  manynrn 
built  in  the  bay.  which  is  surrounded  by  forests.  In  navigating  the  northern  passage  the 
pilots  say  you  ought  to  leave  the  Islands  of  Palma  to  the  starboard  ;  tliese  you  will  reco;. 
nize  by  the  palm-trees  with  which  they  are  covered,  but  a  pilot  must  always  be  employed 
for  the  interior  navigation. 

The  water  which  runs  out  of  the  Bay  of  Paranagua  constantly  carries  with  it  the 
alluvial  soil  of  the  country,  which  sensibly  is  diminishing  its  depth,  but  there  is  otherwise 
nothing  material  to  obstruct  its  navigation  ;  and  2  leagues  from  the  two  entrnnces  there 
are  from  5  to  9  fathoms  witter,  the  bottom  being  grey  sand  and  mud.  The  coaet  from 
hence  to  the  Island  of  St.  Catharine,  generally  speaking,  runs  south. 

The  summit  of  the  southern  hills  on  the  Island  of  Mel  is  in  latitude  25°  32'  43"  S.,  and 
in  longitude  48°  25'  40"  W.  The  variation  was  6°  1'  E.  in  1819. 
Guaratuba.  GUARATUBA. — S.  S.  W.  from  the  Barra  do  Sul  de  Paranagua  is  the  Point  of  Jono 
Diaz,  the  eastern  point  of  the  entranco  of  Rio  San  Francisco;  1(5  miles  N.  by  W.  t'nn] 
which  is  tlie  entrance  to  the  River  Guiirntui)a,  from  the  northern  point  of  which  a  pnnicei 
or  shoal  runs  up  the  Barra  do  Sul ;  this  shoal  extends  4  or  5  miles  from  the  siiore,  and  ig 
bounded  to  the  eastward  by  the  little  Islets  of  Coral,  and  by  two  great  rocks,  20  feet  high 
called  the  Itacolomis.  Tlw  shoal  is  not  navigable  except  by  boats  ;  but  you  niayiipproncii 
the  roots  to  seaward  to  the  distance  of  one  or  two  miles,  where  you  will  have  from  10  to 
12  fathoms  water,  the  ground  being  sand  and  mud. 

Pimentel  says,  "  The  entrance  to  tho  River  Guaratuba  is  on  the  north  side,  near  aJarje 
rock,  where  you  will  have  a  de«p  channel  with  6  and  8  fathoms  water;  but  from  this  all 
is  shoal  to  the  southward.  This  river  is  riMiiarkably  rapid,  and  famed  for  its  fisheries. 
Whoever  runs  for  the  harbor  from  the  northward,  should  keep  close  to  the  land,  make 
for  the  point  of  the  rock  above  mentioned,  and  when  about  to  enter,  keep  the  sniHlJllat 
island  astern  :  this  island  lies  about  Ij  mile  to  sea,  and  your  anchorage  will  be  iniinediateiv 
behind  the  hill  to  the  northward,  or  opposite  to  the  hill  on  the  south  side.  TIiih  river  is 
supplied  by  several  others,  of  which  Rio  St.  Joao  is  the  most  considerable,  and  is  said  to 
be  navigable  for  upwards  of  12  loagui's." 
Bio  San  RIO  SAN  FRANCISCO. — "About  16  miles  south  from  Guaratuba  is  tlie  northern 

Francisco,  entrance  to  the  Rio  San  Francisco,  capable  of  accommodating  any  vessel,  and  having  from 
G  to  13  fathoms  in  its  channel.  To  sail  in,  it  is  advisable  to  coast  up  the  land  wiiich  lies 
to  the  southward,  in  (>,  7,  and  8  fathoms  ;  and  when  you  arrive  at  the  headland  where  this 
coast  ends,  you  sliuuld  make  for  tho  northern  point,  taking  care  to  avoid  a  bank  running 
to  the  N .  E.,  which  is  shoal,  having  not  more  tlian  one  fathom  at  low  water ;  and  as  suon 
as  this  north  point  comes  abreawt,  stand  S.  by  W.  for  the  town,  or  for  tlie  Ciiurch  of  St, 
Joze,  built  on  an  eminence,  opposite  to  which  you  may  anclior  in  clear  ground.  This  en- 
trance may  be  known  by  tho  high  woody  land  of  San  Francisco,  which  terminates  iitthe 
hill ;  and  also  by  the  three  i-.lt'ta  lying  two  or  throe  miles  to  the  westward  of  this  hill, 
The  other  entrance  to  the  river,  called  Aracary,  is  six  leagues  to  the  soutiiward,  and  lit 
only  for  canoes ;  but  opposite  are  soine  islands  with  anchorage  and  shelter  from  tlie  sea.ia 
4  and  5  fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  whitish  sand." 

The  Islands  of  Garcia  lie  on  the  parallel  of  the  Point  of  Joao  Diaz,  which  forms  the 
eastern  extremity  of  tiio  Bay  of  San  Francisco,  and  are  situated  alwut  24  miles  from  the 
point.  Fourteen  nules  to  the  southward  of  this  group  of  (larcia  are  the  Tamljuretes  isl- 
ands, from  abreast  of  which  the  coast  turns  more  to  tho  westward,  so  far  as  tlio  River 
Aracary;  near  the  bar,  or  entrance  of  which,  is  another  group,  called  the  Reniedios:  all 
these  ishinda  lie  at  the  distance  of  2,  ',i,  or  4  miles  from  the  coast,  and  are  said  tu  have  pas- 
sages between  them.  The  islands  are  covered  with  trees  ;  but  betwcun  tlie  Kcmedios 
and  the  mouth  of  the  Rivor  Aracary,  the  passage  is  said  to  admit  of  small  vessels  only: 
and  even  then  it  is  not  to  be  depended  on. 

The  River  Aracary,  after  running  a  considerable  way  up,  and  separating  the  Island  of  I 
San  Francisco  from  the  main,  turns  N.  E.  easterly,  and  runs  into  the  sea  at  a  spacious ' 
bay  of  the  same  name,  where  you  may  anchor  in  several  places.  At  2  leagues  from  the 
shore,  N.  N.  E.  from  the  entrance  of  Rio  San  Francisco,  you  will  not  find  more  than 6 
fathoms  water,  on  a  bottom  of  fine  sand.  The  coast  is  flat,  the  land  adjacent  but  little 
elevated,  but  intei'spersed  with  desolate  spots,  which  are  rather  remarkable.  A  few 
leagues  in  the  interior  are  the  Sierras  of  Maratubo,  u  diaia  of  very  high  mountaiDs. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


545 


forms  the 
1  from  the 
Letes  hi- 
ll 0  River 
m\'m:  all 
lliiive  pas- 
li'iuedios 
|iels  ouly; 

i  Island  ol 
gpncious 
J  from  the 
Ire  than  li 
1  but  little 
A  few 


pirectly  south  of  the  Romedios  Islanda,  distant  6  leagues,  is  the  Point  Itapacoroya,  the 
eastern  extremity  of  a  bay,  rather  deep,  and  sheitered  by  the  winds  from  the  south 
nod  west;  hure  are  an  armacao*  and  two  little  rocl<y  islands,  near  which  you  may  anchor 
jisullicient  depth  of  water.  At  the  bottom  of  this  bay  the  land  runs  N.  i  E.,  so  far 
j9  the  Islands  Garcia,  where  you  may  see  another  armacao,  the  whole  distance  being 
13  leagues. 

S.  S.  E.,  7  leagues  and  a  half  from  Point  Itapacoroya  is  the  Point  of  Bombas,  and  be- 
m'en  thorn  are  the  Poicis  of  Cambecudo,  Camboriu,  Ytnpeba,  and  Garopas,  fo»ming 
jeveral  bays.  You  may  safely  sail  along  these  pomts  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles, 
piineutel says,  "the  entrance  to  Garopas  Bay  is  8 or  9  miles  broad,  and  well  sheltered 

from  nil  winds,  with  depth  of  water  enough  for  any  ship.  Two  rivers  discharge  them- 
selves into  this  bay  over  bods  of  white  roclis,  and  the    surrounding  land  is  covered  with 

thick  woods.   To  the  southward  is  Point  Manduri,  from  whence  you  proceed  on  southerly 

to  the  Island  of  St.  Catharine." 

description  of  the  Island  and  Anchorages  of  St.  Catharine,  by  Baron  Rouissin. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  ST.   CATHARINE  is  situated  at  a  little  distance  from  the    Tlic  Island 
continent,  upon  the  parallel  of  28°  S. ;  it  is  sufficiently  elevated  to  be  visible  15  leagues   of  St.  CuOia- 
oiT  in  fine  weather.    At  the  above  distance  you  will  find  70  fathoms;  thence  the  depth   me. 
diminishes  gradually  to  within  4  cables'  length  of  the  coast,  where  there  are  4  fathoms. 

la  approaching  from  the  eastward,  this  island  appears  very  uneven,  being  intersected 
with  mountains  and  deep  valleys:  its  elevation  is  greater  at  the  southward  than  at  the 
northward.  Across  it  the  mountains  on  the  continent  are  a  little  more  elevated  than 
those  on  the  Island;  and  you  will  distinguish  among  tliese  principally  the  Morro  do 
Caniborelln,  which  is  a  branch  of  the  eastern  Cordilleras,  which  extend  from  Rio  Janeiro 

to  this  island. 

About  the  middle  of  the  island,  and  noartho  edge  of  the  sea,  is  n  large  lake,  which  pre- 
sents an  opening  that  may  serve  to  distinguish  it  as  a  landfall.  At  three  leagues  from  the 
eastern  const,  if  you  bring  this  opening  to  bear  west,  the  N.  E.  point  of  the  island  will  be 
about  3  leagues  to  the  N.  W.  All  the  eastern  side  of  this  island  is  safe,  and  rather  steep 
to  and  you  may  run  alongside  many  largo  rocks  on  the  coast  without  danger. 

The  Island  of  St.  Catharine  may  be  entirely  circumnavigated,  and  many  anchorages 
will  be  found  between  the  western  coast  and  the  continent ;  but  the  northern  part  of  the 
channel  is  the  only  one  fitted  to  receive  vessels  which  draw  much  water,  and  it  is  to  this 
part  we  shall  limit  our  description. 

To  enter  by  the  JS'orth  Channel  into  the  Gulf  or  Bay  of  St.  Catharine's. — The  passage  North  Chan 
most  fiequontod,  leading  to  the  anchorage,  is  between  the  north  point  of  St.  Catharine's  nel. 
and  the  Arvoredo,  a  woody  island  situated  N.  N.  E.  from  the  northern  point,  called  Point 
Raim.  Tills  passage  is  rather  less  than  2  leagues  in  extent,  and  does  not  contain  any 
danger.  You  may  approach  it  on  either  side,  oliscrving  only  to  keep  clear  of  the  Mo- 
lenues.f  which  you  will  leave  to  the  southward :  thoHe  are  large  rocks,  and  lie  near  the 
shore.  We  may  say  the  same  of  all  the  points  which  surround  this  passage,  for  you  may 
sail  close,  and  beat  up  to  them  without  the  least  risk  or  danger.  There  are  26  feet  water 
at  600  toises  distance  from  the  N.  \V.  const  of  St.  Catharine's  which  is  the  deepest 
water  in  this  part  of  the  channel. 

The  Anchorage  for  large  vessels  in  the  Bay  of  St.  Catharine's. — When  you  are  within    Anchorage 
the  bay,  you  may  anchor  any  whore,  agreeably  to  tho  size  of  your  vessel ;  by  keeping  in  for  large 
the  middle  of  the  channel,  the  depth  will  bo  sufficient  for  tho  largest  ships,  to  1000  toises   vessels. 
S.bvE.  otV  the  little  Island  Anhatomiriin.     Having  passed  this  point,  in  advancing  to  the 
southward,  tho  depth  gradually  decreases;  and  S.  of  the  Raton  Islands  there  are  not 
more  than  10  or  12  feet  water.     There  is  little  more  depth  west  of  these  islands,  in  the 
liir.ffe  bay,  culled  by  the  natives  Sacco  (Jrande  :  it  is  a  quiet  place  to  ride  in,  and  princi- 
piill)-  frequented  by  vessels  in  the  whale  fisheries  :  but  ships  drawing  any  great  quantity 
ef  water  could  not  have  access  to  it. 

There  is  plenty  of  water  in  all  the  onchoragos  in  the  bay  of  St.  Catharine's.  In  that 
which  vessels  of  war  most  commonly  frequent,  you  will  have  the  following  bearings: — 
North  Point  of  St.  Catharine's,  N.  ci)"  30'  E. ;  middle  of  the  Fort  of  Santa  Cruz,  S.  63'' 
30'  W.;  the  Fortress  St.  Joseph,  S.  55°  30'  E. ;  and  the  point  of  the  Armacaco,  on  the 

continent,  N.  16°  50'  E.  ,     ,  .  ,     ^  .  . 

The  depth  of  the  above  anchorage  is  30  feet ;  and  tho  bottom  la  mud,  of  a  groenisli 

cast. and 'lolds  well.  _  ,      ,    ,         r  .     v.  ,  ,     j 

Here  you  enjoy  almost  always  a  perfectly  tranquu  sea,  under  shelter  ot  the  high  lands* 
with  which  it  is  burrounded,  the  only  exposed  part  being  to  the  N.  eastward;  but  th© 
winds  from  this  part  are  here  very  seldom  dangerous.  


I 


'  An  armacao  is  a  building  used  for  the  purpose  of  converting  tho  blubber  of  the  whales  into  oil. 
t  A  Mine  generally  given  to  those  rocki  ubovo  water  which  have  a  round  and  dark  appearance. 


546 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


Many  places  for  obtaining  watf)r  are  in  the  vicinity  of  this  anchornge :  the  best  la  about 
2  miles  north  of  tlie  Island  Anhatomirim,  upon  ihe  continent,  which  is  supplied  day  and 
night  with  excellent  water,  of  which  you  can  obtain  an  ample  quantity.     Yuu  may  get 

ferraission,  at  a  chonp  rate,  to  take  fire-wood,  eithu;  on  the  continent  or  on  one  of  the 
sles  of  Katon,  and  also  for  repairing  your  vessel,  if  needful.  In  short,  the  principal  town 
of  the  island,  and  the  habitations  near  this  anchorage,  furnish,  at  moderate  prices  all 
kinds  of  refreshments,  ice,  which  the  country  produces.  The  provisions  consist  of  bul. 
locks,  \»gs,  fowls,  maize,  rice,  spirits,  farinlia,  dried  meats,  sugar,  coffee,  all  tropical  fruits 
&;c.  The  Island  of  St.  Catharine's  is,  therefore,  one  of  the  best  ports  at  which  a  vessel 
can  be  supplied  with  necessaries,  after  or  before  a  long  voyage. 

Tlio  anchorages  of  this  island  are  sometimes  plentifully  supplied  with  fish ;  but  the 
success  of  the  fishing  depends  upon  a  variety  of  causes,  with  wliich  we  are  not  well  ac- 
quainted. La  Perouse  found  abundance  ot  fish  in  November,  but  I  was  less  fortunate 
in  the  sumo  month,  and  also  from  May  to  August.  Most  of  the  shores  are  besides  cov- 
ered with  the  bones  of  whales,  which  it  becomes  difficult  to  avoid  in  hauling  the  seine. 

When  you  provide  yourself  with  fire-wood  from  the  country,  it  io  better  to  prefer  the 
young  trees ;  for  the  old  trunks  are  commonly  liollow,  and  filled  with  insects  and  the  ages 
of  reptiles,  which  are  very  often  venomous,  and  might  be  highly  dangerous  on  board  your 
vessel.  It  will,  therefore,  always  be  prudent  to  throw  the  wood  into  the  sea  before  you 
take  it  on  board. 

The  winds  most  frequent  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Catharine's  follow  the  direction  of  the 
channel,  whether  inwards  or  outwards,  but  these  are  seldom  violent:  and  the  storms  are 
not  dangerous  to  vessels  wh'ch  are  well  moored. 

From  March  to  September,  that  is,  during  the  time  called  winter,  or  the  southern 
monsoon,  tho  winds  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  islands  blow  generally  from  the  S.,  or  S. 
S.  W.  Sometimes  they  come  on  with  very  great  violence,  and  are  accompanied  with 
ruin  ;  but  these  gnles  seldom  last  more  than  48  hours.  Towards  the  month  of  October 
the  winds  approach  towards  the  E.  and  N. ;  the  six  following  months  form  the  summer 
and  are  the  hottest  throughout  the  year.  There  are  frequently  storms,  which  come 
from  tho  N.  and  S.  E.  round  by  the  west ;  ond  if  in  this  season  tho  winds  bbw  from  the 
S.  E.,  they  are  accompanied  with  considerable  rain  :  but  in  general,  iiowover,  the  greatest 
quantity  of  rain  falls  during  the  months  of  August  and  September,  although  even  at  this 
Tides.  period  many  years  have  been  exempt  from  it.     The  tides  are  regular  at  the  onciiorage' 

and  it  may  be  remarked,  that  as  they  blow  into  the  north  and  south  entrances  of  tho  strait 
at  the  same  time,  meeting  at  the  anchorage  near  the  town,  they  turn  in  a  similar  manner 
with  more  or  less  velocity,  according  us  they  aro  accelerated  or  retarded  by  the  prevailing 
winds. 

Tlie  common  rapidity  of  the  current  seldom  exceeds  three-tenths  of  n  mile  no  hour  at 

half  tide:  and  tlie  rise  of  the  water  does  not  in  general  exceed  3  feet ;  but  at  the  springs 

the  currents  run  sometimes  one  mile  and  a  hulf  per  hour,  and  then  the  watrr  rises  6  feet. 

High  water.    It  is  high  water  at  the  above  anchorage  at  40  minutes  after  two  on  full  and  change  days. 

If  you  should  find  yourself  under  imy  circum!<tances  to  require  the  protection  of  the 
forts,  this  anchorage  will  not  suit :  you  must  in  thiit  case  draw  near  to  one  of  the  defences 
adjacent:  tliese  are  the  forts  of  Santa  Cruz,  on  the  Island  of  Anhatomirim;  St.  Joseph, 
on  the  Ifjland  of  St.  Catharine's ;  or  the  fortress  of  Raton,  erected  upon  the  largest 
of  the  two  islands  of  that  nomo.  But  tho  shot  from  these  fortifications  do  not  cross  od  | 
any  of  these  points  effectually,  at  least  with  the  artillery  with  which  they  are  at  present 
protected.  | 

The  governor  of  the  province  resides  in  the  town  of  Nossa  Senhora  do  Desterro,  situ- 
ated about  4  leagues  to  tho  S.  S.  E.  of  tho  Fort  of  Santa  Cruz.     The  jjussnge  to  it  being  j 
in  a  strait  well  sheltered,  is  ulinost  always  easy  for  small  vessels;  and  the  communication 
between  all  the  points  is  quick.     Your  depth  decreases  from  G  to  2  fathoms  iu  goingfrom 
the  ii'iovo  anchorages  southward. 

Tlio  position  of  the  flag-stuff  of  Fort  Santa  Cruz,  on  tho  Island  of  Anhatomirim,  is2"'  I 
25' 3:2"  S.,  and  the  longitude  48°  41'  W.     Point  Rupa,  the  north  point  of  St.  Catharine'!, 
is  in  lat.  27°  22'  31  "  S.,  and  in  long.  48°  32'  7"  W.     The  variation  at  the  anchorage,  in  I 
1819,  was  7°  29'  26"  E. 

The  Island  of  St.  Catharine's  nmy  be  made  indifferently  upon  all  parts  of  the  bland, 
and  it  rarely  happcms  that  either  the  winds  or  the  currents  are  strong  enough  to  occa- 
sion any  difTiculty  in  correcting  your  route;  however,  you  ought  to  prefer  making  the  I 
southern  part  of  the  island  in  tlio  suutli  monsoon,  and  the  northern  part  in  the  cootrai;  | 
monsoon. 

Many  little  isles  are  visible  to  tho  northward  of  St.  Catharine's :  the  largest  of  these  it  j 
Arvoredo,  which  has  been  already  described.     Its  distance  from  Points  Ganzos  i 
Zambo  on  the  continent,  and  from  the  Isle  Pedra  do  Galle,  is  nearly  the  same  as  from  I 
the  Point  Rapa  in  St.  Catharine's;  and  you  may  pass  through,  in  great  safety, all tii« 
channels  formed  between  these  islands  and  the  continent.     The  depth  varies  from  24  to 
12  fathoms,  od  a  bottom  of  mud  and  grey  sand  :  you  have  only  to  avoid  the  rocks  and  I 


m'"  m 


:  is  about 

day  and 

may  get 
le  of  the 
I  pal  town 
prices,  all 
iHt  of  bul- 
cal  fruits, 
h  a  vessel 

I ;  but  the 
>t  well  ac- 
I  fortunate 
mies  cov- 
le  seine. 
prefer  the 
id  the  egga 
board  your 
before  you 

ction  of  the 
I  storms  are 

le  southern 
he  S.,  or  S. 
ipnnied  with 
I  of  October, 
the  summer, 
which  come 
bw  from  the 
',  the  greatest 
1  even  at  this 
,e  anchorage; 
19  of  the  strait 
Hilar  manner, 
the  prevaii'ng 

lile  an  hour  at 
nt  the  springs 
■r  rises  6  feet. 
(;i)ange  days, 
Itection  of  the 
the  defences 
;  St.  Joseph,  I 
m  the  largest ! 
lo  not  cross  on 
|are  at  present 

)esterro,  situ- 

Inge  to  it  being  I 

l;ommunicatioQ 

iu  going  from 


|tomirim,is2j' 
^t.  Catharine's, 
anchorage,  in  ] 

of  the  island,  | 
Inough  to  occa- 
fer  making  the  I 
lin  the  contrary 

Igestof  theseiil 
Its  Ganzos  anil 

game  as  from  I 
It  safety,  all  tilt  I 
Vies  from  24 1 

the  rocki  ami  I 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

breakprs  of  San  Pedro,  situated  rather  less  than  3000  toises  (about  3  miles)  W.  N.  "W. 
from  Arvoredo. 

Direetly  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  St.  Catharine's,  is  the  Bay 
J  Tijoucns,  where  there  is  good  anchorage.  Three  iengues  to  the  eastward  of  all  the 
islands,  the  depths  are  from  27  to  31  fiiihoms. 

To  the  above  we  here  add  the  remarks  of  Mr.  Bruce,  who  says.  "There  are  no  par- 
ticular dangers  in  going  to  the  anchorage  of  Santa  Cruz ;  and  in  entering  you  will  carry 
regular  soundings,  13,   12,  and  9  futhoms,  gradually  shoaling  towards  St.  Catharine's 
Island,  until  you  get  abreast  of  Papagaios  Island.     It  then  shoalens  abruptly  from  74  to 
5  and  44  fathoms.     The  best  lending  mark  for  a  large  ship  to  enter,  when  she  is  abreast 
of  the  above  islands,  is  to  haul  over  to  the  westward  until  Great  and  Little  Raton  I^ilandB 
are  in  one ;  then  steer  for  them  until  you  are  nearly  abreast,  or  a  mile  from  Santa  Cruz, 
when  you  may  haul  over  to  the  eastward,  until  you  got  the  southernmost  Raton  Island, 
which  is  the  smaller  of  the  two,  open  of  the  great  island.     Keep  it  just  open,  and  you 
may  anchor  within  a  mile  of  them  in  G  or  7  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  and  well  shel- 
tered.   In  working  out  from  this  anchorage,  when  you  are  standing  to  the  westward,  do 
not  stand  into  less  than  5  fathoms,  for  there  is  a  bank  of  4  fathoms  on  its  eastern  edge,  and 
odIv  3i  a"''  "^  fathoms  on  its  inner  part.     It  lies  rather  less  than  2  miles  to  the  southward 
of  Santa  Cruz.     Standing  to  the  eastward,  you  may  bring  the  Island  of  Arvoredo  on  with 
Point  Groca,  (St.  Jose,)  and  when  you  get  nearly  as  far  as  the  Points  of  Groca  and  Santa 
Cruz  you  may  stand  into  any  depth  you  please.     There  is  good  anchorage  under  Santa 
Cruz'  where  ships  commonly  touch  for  water;  but  the  best  anchorage  is  with  the  small 
Island  Rntones  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  larger  one,  in  54  fathoms.     The  deeper 
water  will  be  found  on  the  eastern  side  ;  but  when  olT  Santa  Cruz,  the  western  side  will 
.  jj,g  boldest.     There  is  but  a  scanty  supply  of  water  inside  of  Santa  Cruz,  which  comea 
from  a  small  rivulet  close  to  the  beach.     Here  you  may  fill  your  casks  in  the  boat,  by 
bailing  with  buckets;  but  this  supply  iu  dry  weather  sometimes  fails.     Wood  may  be 
either  cut  or  purchased." 

The  Island  of  Santa  Catharine  is  of  such  height  as  to  be  discovered  in  fine  weather 
from  45  mi'^s  distant,  at  which  distance  there  are  70  f  ithoms  water,  diminishing  gradu- 
ally towards  the  shore.  Nearing  it  from  the  oast,  it  appears  with  high  mountains  and 
deep  valleys.  Taking  the  whole  together,  the  southern  part  appears  higher  than  the 
northern  side.  The  Morro  Camborello  is  a  mountain  which  np])oars  above  every  other. 
Vessels  may  go  round  this  is'land  with  safety.  The  channel  between  the  main  land 
affords  good  anchoraae,  but  the  best  place  to  cast  anchor  is  on  the  northern  part. 

Santa  Catharine  nlTords  the  best  place  to  refit  a  vessel.  There  is  an  inexhaustible 
Quantity  of  good  water,  to  be  got  without  any  expense;  fuel  and  provisions  of  every  kind 
ata  cheap  rate— such  as  beef,  pork,  poultry,  corn,  sugar,  dried  beef,  arack,  Sec.  &c.  It  is 
then  the  most  convenient  place  for  a  ship  to  stop,  in  case  of  want,  and  for  repairs.  When 
taking  on  board  wood  for  fuel,  it  is  necessary  to  take  young  branches  only,  and  even  to  let 
them  float  in  the  sea  water,  in  order  to  destroy  the  numerous  worms,  as  their  eggs  are 
Terv  dangerous  on  board  of  n  ship.  ,  .  ,        ,,r     , 

The  coast  north  of  Santa  Catharine  is  every  where  very  high.     Woody  mountains 
and  deep  valleys  are  to  be  discovered  all  round.      From  Santa  Catharine  to  the  Bay  of 
San  Francisco,  you  meet  several  small  islands  and  rocks,  and  the  last  are  the  small  Garcia 
Islands,  2  miles  distant  from  Joao  Diaz  Point,  which  point  forms  the  eastern  extremity 
of  the  River  San  Francisco.     San  Francisco  River  is  not  very  deep.     Its  mouth  is  turned 
N.  N.  E.,  and  empties  in  a  largo  bay,  in  which  you  may  anchor  any  where.     The  shore 
of  this  bay  is  flat,  the  surrounding  land  not  very  higli,  but  from  place  to  place  small  hil- 
locks are  to  be  seen,  which  render  that  place  remarkable,  particularly  by  the  cham  of  a 
I  very  high  mountain,  to  be  seen  nearly  at  !)  miles  in  the  interior.      The  Island  of  Sua 
I  Sebastian  is  to  be  seen  45  miles  distant.     The  shores  are  very  bold.      The  whole  island 
taken  together  seems  of  a  triangular  shape.     The  channel  alfords  good  anchorage,  but  is 
nottobe  followed  in  a  straight  line  from  end  to  endi      Banks  connect*  d  with  the  main 
.land,  existing  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  whole  extent,  in  the  direction  of  N.  to  S.,  and 
consequently,  when  coming  from  the  north,  and  starting  from  a  point  situated  one-half 
mile  from  the  armacao,  which  is  constructed  at  the  head  of  the  island,  it  is  necessary  to 
I  steer  first  5  miles  S.  16°  W..  and  from  thence  S.  4o'3  W.,  uutil  you  are  out.     This  route 
lis  nearly  11  miles,  and  the  depth  of  water  from  10  to  20  fathoms.     The  greatest  distance 
[between  the  opposite  lands  is  nearly  3  miles,  but  two-thirds  of  that  space  is  not  safe  for 
Inavigating.    It  is  necessary  to  near  the  shore  of  San  Sebastian  Island,  at  no  less  distance 
Ithan  from  ten  to  twelve  hundred  yai-ds.     The  southern  entrance  is  more  narrow.     The 
Inatives  say  that  very  large  ships  may  pass  through.     San  Sebastian  Harbor  is  one  of  the 
IsafeBtin  the  world,  and  offers  the  same  facihties  us  Santa  Catharinafor  provisions  of  any 
Ikiud. 


647 


iflipwr 


"np»^p^mp^nnp 


^^ 


548 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


From  the 
north  point 
of  St.  Cath- 
arine to  Cape 
St.  Martha 
Orande. 


The  North 
Entrance. 

The  South 
Entrance. 


No.  1— FROM  TIIK  NORTEI  POINT  OF  ST.  CATHARINE  TO  CAPE  ST 
MARTHA  GRANDi:.*— Tho  Ian d  of  tlio  Isl.)  of  St.  Ciitlmiiiie.  and  the  noij^hborinj 
coDtiiuiiit  to  Cupe  ."t.  Mmlhii  Gniiido,  id  veiy  liiali  iiiitl  woody.  The  highewt  iiiountains 
porcoivod  from  this  isluiid  1110  of  tlii)  Cubntiio  cliiiiu,  coveiod  with  cluuds  when  the  winds 
from  tho  south  inoviiii,  and  clear  in  N.  E.  wiiida.  At  aen,  with  a  clour  iiorizon,  the 
coasts  curi  bo  eusily  purcoivt'd  ut  13  leiigiius  diMtance.  The  soundiiigH  nre  tliuro  from  70 
to  8U  iatlioiiiM,  vvitli  a  muddy  liotloni.  In  approaching  tho  coast,  the  soundings  diininiah 
gradually.  At  3  loagucs  di:itant  tho  sounding:*  uro  still  from  37  to  40  fathoms,  nod  30  tu 
30  at  4  milt- 3  distant. 

The  whiilo  coast  is  safo.  Tlio  Emulation  couatod  it  at  3  or  4  iiiiloa  ofV,  and  passed  bti- 
twoon  tho  Irmaos  Inlands  and  MoIccjuch  do  Sul,  in  17  fathoms  wutor.  The  only  duiigors 
to  bo  avoided  are  tho  isilund.s  and  islets,  which  can  be  perceived  ut  3  leagues  oH',  and  rouud 
which  there  are  15  futluims  watur. 

The  usual  anchorages  are  at  Isle  do  Campoxo,  Point  Pinheira,  nnil  La  Lngunu. 

The  two  first  form  shollers  from  southerly  winds;  the  third  ia  only  praclicablu  for 
small  vessels,  drawing  at  the  most  from  7  to  8  feet  of  water,  by  reason  of  a  bar  at  tlio  en- 
trance of  the  Lagune,  neur  the  borders  of  the  lake  where  the  city  of  Laguna  is  built. 

The  Island  of  St.  Catharine  is  about  I)  leagues  long,  aud  its  greatest  width  does  nut  ut- 
ceed  10  miles.  It  forms,  with  the  continent,  a  strait  iu  which  vessels  find  excolleDt  ig. 
choragea. 

The  points  to  distinguish  tho  ontranccs  into  tho  strait  are  the  following: 

THE  NORTH  ENTRANCE.— The  Island  of  Arvoredo,  which  rises  in  tho  form  of 
a  sugar-loaf,  with  two  summits  (seen  at  a  distance.) 

The  Islet  Hadejo,  which  is  in  the  form  of  a  tilliT,  and  without  vegetatioti. 

THE  SOUTH  ENTRANCE.— The  Islet  of  the  Great  Moleque  do  Sul,  which  ro- 
gombks  a  steep  boach  when  seen  from  tho  S.  E.,  and  for  this  reason  is  perfectly  deline- 
ated on  the  coast,  wliich  is  woody. 

The  Isle  Coral  stretching  from  north  to  south,  ami  round  when  perceived  in  this  direc- 
tion.    It  is  covered  with  trees,  and  is  about  li  mile  loug. 

If  you  wish  to  come  to  anchor  north  of  St.  Catharine's,  where  large  ships  ought  to 
anchor,  you  muht  folluw  tho  directions  given  by  Admiral  Rouissin;  but  if  you  wish  to 
come  by  tho  south  bar  to  the  city  of  Nostra  Senhora  do  Desterro,  the  capital  of  the 
island,  you  cannot  do  it  with  a  vessel  drawing  over  13  feet  water.  You  may  govern 
yourself  by  tho  following  directions: 

Steer  for  Cape  Quebra  Cabaco,  leaving  tho  two  Ratone  Islands  on  your  larboard  hand, 
not  less  than  a  mile  and  a  half  distant:  when  you  bring  the  small  Ratone  Island  tobrar 
east,  2  miles  distant,  steer  .S.  E.  until  the  two  rocks  of  Jta|)itinga  do  Norte  are  iu  a  line 
with  Capo  (Quebra  Cabaco.  You  will  then  have  on  your  starboard  hand  a  ftut  rock,  on 
which,  al  low  water,  tlicro  are  but  4  or  5  feet.  As  soon  aa  you  open  this  cape  to  the 
south  of  the  rocks  of  Ita|)itiuga  do  Norte,  stecu"  S.  W.,  and  proceed  ou  this  course  until 
the  rocks  bear  N.  N.  A\'. 

From  thenco  steer  so  as  to  pass  within  4  or  5  cables'  length  east  of  tho  rock  of  Cnpe 
Tres  Henri(pus,  a  wooded  cap'3,  and  more  apparent  than  Cupe  Quebra  Cabaco.  Then 
steer  direct  tor  tlie  little  strait  of  the  city,  taking  caro  to  pass  3  or  4  cables'  length  from 
the  islet  of  Point  do  Lial.  From  this  islet  you  will  enter  tho  little  strait  defended  by 
Fort  Santa  Anna  on  your  left,  and  by  the  battery  of  San  Joao  on  your  right.  You  will 
find  there  a  l)ottom  of  TJ  to  18  fathoms,  and  you  will  perceive,  in  approaching,  the  Jslet 
of  Gato  and  the  Islet  of  Vinlias,  situated  befoi-e  the  city.  You  will  leave  tho  first  on 
your  larboard,  and  come  to  an  anchor  in  1!)  to  :20  feet  of  water,  the  Island  of  Guto  bearing 
by  compass,  ;N.  N.  E.,  the  Islet  of  Vinhas  S.  S.  E.,  and  the  stooplo  on  the  cathedral 
N.  E. 

The  city  of  Nostra  Senhora  do  Desterro  is  situated  in  27°  35'  25"  S.  latitude,  and  io 
48°  34'  9  '  \V.  long.     The  variation  of  the  needle  in  October,  1831,  was  5°  29'  N.  E. 

In  coming  from  the  north  bar  to  tlie  city,  wo  fre(|uontly  found  but  7  feet  of  water,  aod 
a  muddy  bottom  ;  but  the  mud  is  at  least  5  feet  deep,  and  a  vessel  lies  easy  :  at  high  wa- 
ter tho  passage  is  made.  The  Eumlation,  which  drew  13  feet  4  inches,  was  3  dnyscom- 
ing  up  to  the  city.  She  was  dragged  through  tho  mud  by  her  anchors,  when  the  water 
was  low  or  the  tide  weak. 

In  coming  in  by  the  South  Bar,  you  must  have  a  fair  wind,  high  water,  smooth  sea, 
and  fine  weather,  without  which  tho  currents  may  throw  you  on  Fort  Isle,  or  on  the 
Point  dos  Naufragodos,  distant  from  each  other  only  280  fathoms.  The  vessel  sliould 
draw  less  than  15  feet.  The  following  is  the  route  to  take  :  steer  on  a  line  drawn  from 
Coral  Island  to  Fort  Island,  towards  tho  last  island;  when  you  are  abreast  of  the  two 
Islands  dos  Papigios,  (they  are  on  your  left,)  you  will  have  the  tliree  Irmaos  Islands, a 


•  From  tlic  Surreys  of  Mr.  Barral,  (connnnndcr  of  the  French  surveying  brig,  tlie  Emulation,)  wlio 
was  diructod  to  coutinuu  the  survi^ys  uf  Burun  Uouidsin. 


^m^^ 


^mmmm 


ill  in  this  ilirec- 


!  Emulation,)  wb 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

the  MoIequeB  do  Sul  on  your  right,  and  you  will  bring  tlie  cnpo  to  the  N.  E.  to  open 
tbe|m8»nge;  nrrivod  at  this  point,  vou  will  Httn-r  dircrtly  in  tlio  niiddio,  until  you  find 
yourself  south  of  the  Isle  dos  Cnrdos,  rcmiirkiil)!^  by  n  Bini;l(i  troo,  (<lovated  on  tho  sura- 
Piit.  Stpor  then  so  iia  to  pass  enst  of  tho  Isle  dos  Ciirdos  one  or  two  cnhles'  longth  dis- 
tant, mid  from  thenco  continue  until  you  find  yoursolf  K.  or  W.  with  tho  south  point  of 
Encendo  do  IJrito,  half  a  niih^  diMtunt.  Follow  tho  const  oftlio  coiiiini'iit,  until  you  come 
up  to  Cnpo  IVsipioiro  Fundo,  nt  4  oiildos'  length  distant.  You  will  puss  tho  villnfto  of 
Encoado  do  Brito,  iind  nt  a  littlo  distnnco  forwiird  is  n  group  uf  houses  or  cnliins,  form- 
ing the  little  villugo  dos  Cedros.  On  your  right,  nt  n  urent  distnnco,  you  will  perceive 
the  villnge  of  Robeirno,  situntod  on  the  Island  of  St.  Cutlinrino's,  niid  n'linost  before  you 
Isle  Lnrgo. 

Before  nrriving  to  this  Inst,  you  will  hnvo  tonvoid  n  roof  of  rocks  nlwnys  under  wnter. 
You  are  on  this  rei^f  when  the  towers  of  tlio  cntlipdrnl  in  tho  city  nro  W.  of  the  Isle 
Lnrgo,  nnd  those  of  Cnrdos  by  the  fort  of  the  south  bar. 

From  tho  Isle  Lnrgo  steer  N.  until  you  are  olV  the  Isle  dns  Cnscns,  nnd  then  steer  for 
tfi«  ttoeploB  of  tho  city,  till  you  coino  to  tho  unchonige  indicnted  botwoon  Iwles  Onto  and 
Viiihns. 

There  are  on  tho  const  of  the  Island  of  St.  Catharine,  from  Point  Rupn,  the  north 
extremity,  the  following  islands  nnd  islets  ;  tlio  North  MoletnioH.  the  Tslo  Bailejo.  (the 
outward  one,)  the  two  Aranhaa  Islands,  Pavior  Island,  (of  a  middling  height,  and  without 
trees,)  Ciiinpoxo  Island,  tho  three  Irnmos  Islaiid^,  tho  South  Moleques,  throe  large  white 
rocks  which  touch  each  other  (composing  tho  (Jraiid  Moloqiio.)  On  tho  coast  of  tho  con- 
tinent, commencing  at  the  south  bar,  are  tho  following  ishinds  nnd  islets  :  Coral  Island,  S. 
E.  of  Point  Pinhoira;  Ararns  Islands,  (S.  K.  of  Point  nituhn;)  Tocoromi  Islot,  (an  ele- 
vated and  i)orpondicijlnr  rock,)  S;  E.  of  Ararns  Island,  Lobos  do  la  Laguana,  (S.  W.  of 
Arnrnsand  Tocoromi.) 

In  passing  along  tho  coast,  we  find  tho  following  points  nnd  cnpes:  Point  Pinheirn, 
Cq[)C  Gunintuba,  Cape  Cirui,  Cape  Uvidoa,  Point  Viraquora,  Point  Bitubn,  or  Knibitu- 
ba,Mnrro-da-Barrn,  Morro-da-Forro,  Capo  Santn-Marthn-Pequeno.and  Cnpe  Snntu-Mur- 
tha-Uninde. 

At  Point  Bituba  commences  the  bench,  behind  which  is  a  lake  nnd  tho  cities  of  Villa 
Nova,  Snnta  Aimn,  nnd  La  Lagunn.  This  last  is  sitmited  on  the  south  side  of  tho  lake, 
at  one  mile  from  the  bar  within,  in  latitude  28°  28'  23  '  S,,  nnd  48°  50'  17"  W.  longitude. 
This  position  has  boon  determined  on  shore. 

CAPE  SAINT  MARTA  GRANDE  is  remarknido  on  account  of  several  Inrge 
white  rocks  situated  on  the  summit  of  tho  cnpo,  which  miiv  be  taken  nt  n  distanco  for  n 
number  of  houses.  The  latitude  is  28°  ,39'  S.  nnd  the  longitude  48°  49'  49"  W.  The 
variation  of  the  needle  in  Nov(Mnl)or,  1-.31.  was  7°  20'  N.  K. 

No.  2.— FROM  CAPE  SANTA  MAIITA  GRANDE  TO  RIO  GRANDE  DE 
SAN  PEDRO. — This  spnco  of  land,  about  d'j  leagues  in  extent,  has  n  const  extremely 
low,  having,  nt  intervnls,  little  sand  hills  and  brambles.  The  Iniid  can  hnrdly  be  perceived 
in  clear  weather,  from  tlie  mast  hend,  nt  tho  short  (listnnco  of  7  or  8  miles,  and  from  tho 
i»ck  nt  .3  miles  distance  at  tho  farthest.  It  may  be  divided  into  three  ])nrts.  The  first 
ruiisN.  E.  and  S.  W.,truo  ;  wo  will  call  it  the  Beach  das  Torres.  The  easterly  partis 
in  48°  49'  49"  W.  longitude,  and  the  situation  of  the  westernmost  part  is  in  49°  58'  45' 
W,  longitude. 

The  second  part  runs  N.  i  E.  and  S.  i  W.,  true,  nnd  is  called  the  Bench  of  Fernani- 
buco.    The  enstoidy  part  is  in  29°  52'  S.  latitude,  and  49°  58'  4.5"  W.  longitude. 

Tiie  third  part  runs  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  true,  and  is  known  by  tho  name  of  the  Beach 
of  Destretto.  Tho  ensternmost  part  is  in  31°  12'  S.  latitude,  nnd  50^  39'  45"  W.  Ion- 
git  inlo. 

liEACII  OF  TORRES.— Wo  will  remark  here  that  a  chain  of  mountains,  distant 
about  1,5  leagues  from  tho  si>a,  stretches  along  in  the  interior,  and  ends  abruptly  nt  Tor- 
re?. •-'.")  leagues  from  Capo  Santa  Marta  (irande. 

This  beach  may  be  approaidnui  within  3  or  4  miles,  and  has  been  coasted  at  this  small 
distance  by  tho  F'mulation.  It  was  impossible  to  Iind  any  remarkal)lo  ])oints  on  this  route 
to  form  a  triungulation.  I  confined  myself  to  fixing  the  position  of  the  vessel  by  frequent 
observations,  and  from  theiict!  deduced  tho  coast  by  estimating  our  distnnco. 

Wo  found  .'!0  fathoms  of  water,  bottom  of  sand,  nuid,  and  shells,  4  miles  south  of  Cnpo 
Saint  Marta  (iramlo,  and  from  thence  to  Torres,  the  soundings  decrease  to  5  fathoms, 
almost  to  touching  tho  shore  at  this  last  place.  \'ou  can  judge  of  tho  decrease  of  the 
souiiilings,  as  the  distance  between  the  first  soundings  in  30  fathoms,  and  tho  soundings 
at  b  fathiiins,  was  25  leagues. 

BEACH  OF  FERNA.MBUCO.— This  is  also  more  perpendicular  than  tho  first, 
especially  in  the  latitudes  of  30  nnd  31  degrees.  Tho  Emulation  found  40  fathoms  water, 
with  n  bottom  of  sand,  mud,  and  shells,  4  to  5  miles  from  the  sliore.  She  coasted  along 
for  half  a  duy. 


fi9 


Cape  Saint 

Marta 

Grande. 

From  Cape 
Santa  Marta 
Grande  to 
Rio  Grande 
de  San  Pe- 
dro, 


Beach  of 
Torres. 


Beach  of 
FArnambuco. 


■  pi|pu      11      UN 


•00 


Beach  0 
Destretto, 


Hio  Orande 
de  San  Pedro 


Light. 


From  Rio 
Orand  de  San 
Pedro  to  Cape 
Saint  Mary. 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

In  BtnnrinK  oflT  shore  to  the  distnnRO  uf  15  lenguns,  the  louniiingi  augment  pro)(re8iive|r 
to  95  f'nthoiiiH,  with  n  bottom  of  muddy  •iiiiJ  :  ul  a  greHtiir  diHlHticn,  no  bottom  ja  f^^^^Jl 
with  100  fathoms;  nt  10  l«n|{U«^s  diHtiincii,  the  ioundinitii  hi'u  iibout  83  futhoms, 

BKACII  UF  DESTRKTTO.— It  toiminntes  iit  Rio  Uriiiidc  de  yan  I'odro.  You 
will  find  10  to  15  fHthoms  in  coaslinK  aioMK.  nt  ihH  diHtanco  of  3  or  4  milns.  Tlio  Kmu. 
Miori  uoattod  alunff  17  jeiicut'ii  at  tliis  uliort  dJHtaiiuu,  ovor  u  liottom  of  sand.  It  in  nut 
highor  tlian  tlie  l)eucii  of  I'Vrnambiieii,  but  tlioru  am  liiils  of  sand  and  Ichh  Vd^titiition 
Twenty  to  2 1  ieajjuos  S.  K.  of  tliia  beacli  we  find  ;Jd  and  .')!)  futlioms  water,  bottom  of  mJ 
■nd  sand,  and  in  sniiinj;  towards  tlie  land,  tliede  soundings  );rudually  decrease. 

We  will  also  remarli  tiiiit  of  the  llnt'e  beaclies  (liat  of  Kernambuco,  tlie  ensternninDt 
has  more  water  towards  tliu  shore,  and  ulso  ut  a  distance;  un  the  contrary,  that  of  De«' 
trotto  lias  the  least. 

RIU  (iRANDr:  DE  SAN  PEDRO.— The  approach  to  Rio  Orande  do  San  Pedro 
.is  ditficult  on  account  of  the  want  of  elevation  of  the  nei^liboring  land,  it  beiiifr  lo^fuf 
a  distance  of  !)5  leagues  north,  and  40  leagues  south.  You  should  not  attempt  tlm  bur  ex- 
cept when  the  wind  is  N.  E.,  the  weather  very  fine,  and  appearinj;  us  tluiugh  it  wiiuld 
lust  several  days.  You  should  (Miast  aliirifr  the  beach  of  DeHtretto  at  a  small  dlHtniico,  until 
you  perceive  the  tower,  on  which  there  is  a  fixed  li^lit,  G4  feet  above  the  sou,  which  ij 
situated  at  the  north  point  of  tlie  liar,  two  miles  inside.  You  must  not,  if  posaibjeto 
avoid  it,  get  embayed  or  wind-bound  on  the  auuth  side,  because  the  sea  breaks  in  tlio  hIkjj 
water. 

When  you  moke  the  tower,  endeavor  to  get  it  to  bear  north  five  or  six  miles,  tlien  steer 
direct  for  it,  but  be  particular  to  observe  if  a  rtid  flag  bo  hoisted  un  lliu  tower.  If  go,  ji 
sigiiifiea  you  must  approach  and  continue  to  advance  (as  Ion;;  as  the  flag  is  up)  dirnct  fijr 
the  tower,  until  you  see  a  boat,  which  will  be  at  anchor  on  the  bar,  in  which  u  jiilutwill 
be  situated,  showing  fhigs  which  represent  the  depth  of  water  uu  the  bur  us  follows: 

A  blue  flag  over  a  rod  flag,  10  feet. 

A  red  flag  over  a  blue  flag,  10  feet  0  inches. 

A  blue  pendant  over  a  white  flag,  10  feet  104  inches.  \ 

A  white  flag  over  n  blue  pendant,  11  feet  3  inches. 

A  blue  pendant  overu  blue  Aug,  11  feet  7i  inches. 

A  blue  (lag  over  a  blue  pendant,  12  feet. 

A  blue  peudimt  over  u  red  (lag,  I'i  feet  4^  inches. 

A  red  flag  over  a  blue  pendant,  \2  feet  9  inrlies. 

Steer  for  the  boat,  guiding  yourself  by  a  stiifl'with  n  flag,  which  ia  inclined  bythemnD 
in  the  boat  as  follows  :  If  the  stafl'  is  held  upright  it  denutus  you  are  steering  currecijy. 
If  the  staflT  be  inclined  to  [lort,  or  starboard,  you  must  lulfor  keep  off  accordingly.  If  the 
flag  on  the  tower  is  hauled  down,  you  must  nut  npproacli.  From  tlie  tower  they  ulso 
throw  out  lateral  flags,  particularly  in  rough  weather,  to  guide  vessels  keeping  ulT  ur  lull- 
ing, ncctirding  us  the  flags  are  shown  to  N.  and  S. 

Tliere  is  good  ancliorage  hIx  miles  from  the  tower,  wliich  bears  north  six  miles  distRnt' 
but,  as  a  general  rule,  it  is  best  to  avoid  anchuriiig.  At  night  keep  in  ton  fatlioius  wnter, 
or  over,  nnil  bo  v«!ry  careful  to  sound  fre(jiiciitly  when  your  head  is  to  shore.  The  sound- 
ings diminish  regularly  to  live  futliuiiiii,  which  is  close  to  the  breakers.  On  the  bench  to 
the  south  of  the  bur  the  water  decreases  gradually,  but  to  the  northward  it  shelves  more 
suddenly. 

The  bar  changes  every  year,  during  the  winter;  and.  ns  soon  as  the  pilots  hnve  well 
ascertained  the  channel,  the  president  of  the  province  nolifiHs  the  government  nt  Rio  Ja- 
neiro. It  sometimes  happens,  that  it  is  impossible  to  cross  tiie  bar  for  ii  longtime,  nflera 
great  S.  E.  gale. 

The  geographical  position  of  the  tow  F,r  is  3il°  07'  20',  south  latitude,  and  52°  08'  45 
W.  longitude.  The  variution  of  the  nueiile,  in  the  month  uf  November,  1831,  was  8^ 
30'  E. 

E.  by  N.,  12  miles  from  the  light,  tbt>re  is  a  rock  of  8^  and  9  fathoms,  with  14  fathoms 
inside  uf  it. 

No.  3— FROM  RIO  GRANDE  DE  .SAN  PEDRO  TO  CAPE  SAINT  M\RY.- 
lu  this  part  of  the  coast  the  soundings  are  very  shallow  and  variable,  you  are  tliorefi/re 
obliged  to  keep  off.  The  Emulation,  in  33°  30'  30"  S.  Iatitu<le,  and  52-"  19'  45 "  W.  iou- 
gitude,  passed  at  once  from  22  fathoms,  sand  and  mud,  to  18  fathoms,  sand  anJshelJj; 
she  soon  ascertained  the  edges  uf  a  great  bank  extending  from  the  coast  7  or  8  leagues, 
and  extending  to  the  Castillos. 

The  Cnstillos  are  black  and  scarped  rocks,  situated  at  a  very  small  distance  from  the 
land,  in  34°  24'  S.  latitude,  and  53''  40'  45"  W.  longitude.  At  the  north  is  found  an  im- 
mense bay,  in  which  you  find  shelter  from  S.  W.  winds,  but  you  sliould  quit  thia  iiuchor- 
age  as  soon  as  the  winds  vary  to  the  E.  and  the  N.  E. 

South  uf  the  Castillos  is  liahia  Falsa,  of  which  we  shall  speak  hereafter. 

Some  time  before  arriving  at  these  rocks,  if  ynu  coast  along  the  land  11  to  12  miles  in 
coming  from  the  N.,  the  soundings  show  11  to  12  fathoms  water,  with  a  bottom  uf  sand; 


hringand  CStrrenU. 
The  Tidei. 


BLUiT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  5^ 

when  ihellB  Hr«  mlxitd  with  (mnd,  you  are  BtJII  on  the  Orent  Bunk,  nnd  you  iteftr  n  little 
n,ore  to  the  ItirlKxiid  ;  you  will  thoti  p.-rccivo  two  hilU  having  the  form  of  timu,  the  only 
oiw*  which  Clin  Im  hobii  to  (Jiipo  Siiint  Mury. 

No.  4.-WINI)S,  TIOKS.  AND  CURKKNTS.-At  the  I.land  of  St.  C«tharine'..  Winds,Tidt», 
,he  proviiihnj!;  wioiIh  iiio  N.  K.,  N.  W..  S.  VV.,nnd  S.  E.     The  windH  from  N.  W.  bring 
i;oe  woiithor,  and  tho  wind«  from  S.  E.,  in  tlio  winttM-,  are  extremely  riiiny. 

The  tides  nro  not  reKuiar  in  llie  Btriiit  until  tho  iippronchof  a  now  and  full  moon 
difTeretice  botwiyn  hij;h  and  low  water  in,  thoro,  scarce  nliovtt  5  foet. 

Tho  «ea  risen  in  tho  S.  basin  from  the  S.  to  tho  N.,  and  it  -.isos  in  the  N.  basin  from 
ibe  N.  to  the  S.,  in  such  n  manner,  that  the  waters  meeting  from  two  sides  accumulate 
towarda  tho  nty.  built  near  tho  little  strait,  which  sorves  as  a  limit  for  the  whole  strait, 
of  which  the  two  basins  are  composod.  It  fulls  also  in  a  contrary  manner  from  which  it 
t'aei- 

About  tho  bench  of  Rio  Gronde  de  San  Pedro,  tho  winds  from  the  S.  W.,  N.  E.,  N. 
\V.,  and  S.  E.,  nro  usually  the  most  frcKpicnt,  nnd  those  from  the  S.  E.  the  most  violent 
nnd  diinKorous.  A  vessel  surprised  by  a  sudden  squall  from  this  quniter,  on  the  const, 
canoot  get  Hwny  from  it.  lly  u  wind  from  the  E.  S.  E.  the  Emulation,  under  top-gnl- 
iantiniln.  would  have  been  obliged  to  run  on  shore  on  tho  bpncli  of  Torres,  if  tiie  wind 
had  lasted  several  hours  ;  the  sea  broke  in  30  fathoms  of  water,  and  tho  vessel  ran  great 
risk  of  being  dismasted  by  renson  of  tho  great  shocks  that  she  oxperioncod.  During 
tliose  winds  from  tlio  S.  E.,  the  sea  runs  extraordinarily  high,  and  the  currents  run  rapid- 
ly towards  tho  shore. 

Tlio  winds  blow  usunlly  from  the  S.  E.  nfter  having  blown  from  the  S.  W.  These 
last  winds  do  not  usually  blow  until  nfter  tho  N.  E.  winds  liuve  varied  to  N.  W.  nna  W. 
N.W. 

RIO  DE  LA  PLATA.— The  River  Plate  is  55  lengues  wide  nt  its  mouth, nnd  runs    Uiode  la 
nearly  W.  N.  W.  nnd  E.  S.  E..  true.     It  is  formed  by  the  wuters  of  the  Uruguay  nnd    Plata. 
the  Parana,  two  great  rivers  which  receive  tho  wntors  of  an  immense  number  of  other 
rivers,  among  which  may  be  mentioned  tho  Paraguay,  the  Picolmayn,  and  Rio  Grande 
de  Curtiba. 
The  capes  which  mark  the  entrance  are  those  of  Saint  Maria  nnd  St.  Anthony ;  the 

liret  is  situated  on  ttie  nortliern  side,  and  the  second  on  tho  southern. 

The  coast  on  the  nortliern  aide,  comprised  between  St.  Maria  and  the  mouth  of  the 
Uruguay,  is  in  general  high. 
The  coast  on  tho  southern  side,  comprised  between  Cape  St.  Anthony  and  the  mouth 

of  the  Parana  is.  on  the  contrary,  very  low  ;  it  is  on  this  side  those  immense  plains,  known 

under  the  nnme  of  Pampas,  are  found. 
Tlie  river  sensibl)  diminislies  in  width  from  its  mouth  to  the  confluence  of  the  Rivers 

Uruguay  and  Parana.     It  may  be  divided  into  two  parts,  nearly  equal  in  length. 
The  first  extends  from  Cape  Saint  Maria  nnd  Saint  Anthony  on  the  north,  to  the  river 

of  Santo  Lucia,  nnd  to  the  south  to  Point  das  Picdins  de  Son  Borronibon  ;•  the  water  of 

the  river  is  there  jjrackish.     The  second  part  extends  from  ihese  last  points  to  the  con- 

(luenco  of  the  Uruguay  nnd  the  Pninnn;  the  water  is  here  yonerally  swt-et. 
The  depth  of  the  water  in  the  River  Plate  increases  in  going  from  this  confluence  to 

the  8ca,  and  the  bottom  between  the  banks  is  generally  composed  of  mud  and  frequently 

of  soft  snnJ-stone,  to  the  meridian  of  Monte  Video;  from  this   place  it  is  of  oozy  sand, 

sand  only,  sniid  nnd  shells,  nnd  snnd  nnd  prnvel,  ns  far  as   Cape  St.  Antony,  except 

towards  the  north  side,  and  towards  Enscnndn  de  San  Borrombon.  where  it  is  formed  of 

mud.    The  south  side,  from  nenr  tho  River  Salndo  to  near  the  borders,  tho  Ensenadn  de 

Barragan  has  a  border  of  soft  sund-stone  two  to  three  leagues  wide,  on  which  it  is  very 

shallow. 
We  may  consider  the  bottom  of  sand,  sand  and  shells,  and  snnd  nnd  grnvol,  situnted 

cast  of  the  meridian  of  Monte  Video,  ns  forming  an  immense  bunk,  tho  highest  part  of 

which  is  known  by  the  namo  of  tho  English  Bank. 
The  bottom  of  hard  sand,  found  west  of  the  same  meridian,  forms  sundry  banks,  on 

which  the  depth  of  water  is  from  one  to  one  nnd  a  half  fathom  at  the  most. 
Three  cities  are  built  on  the  north  bank ;  the  first,  after  leaving  Cape  St.  Mary,  is  Mal- 

donado;  the  second,  Monte  Video  ;  nnd  the  third,  the  colony  of  San  Sacramento  :  thoy 

belong  to  the   Republic  of  Bunda  Orieutnl  of  Uruguay,  the  chief  of  which  is  Monte 

Video;  from  Monte  Video  to  the  colony  of  Uruguay  is  10  leagues. 


•The  Point  dim  Picilras  de  San  Borrombon  fjrms  with  Cape  St.  Antony  a  great  bay,  called  the  En- 
senadaof  Sun  ltorroinl)on,  in  which  twd  siniill  rivers  (lisoharf;e  theiiifclveH,  the  !Sun  Borrointiun  and  the 
SaUdo:  this  lint  is  tlir  largest,  and  during  the  wiir  between  Hiienos  A.vres  nnd  Uriizil,  served  iisn  refuge 
to  a  great  numlier  of  privmeors;  it  i»  dilBciiit  lo  discover  its  inoiitli ;  the  following, however,  serves  as  an 
iodicationof  it  The  south  side  i«  coveri'd  with  bushes,  which  terminate  at  two  brick  towers,  used  for- 
merly as  lime  kilns ;  unJ  at  the  N.  part  ut  the  entruucc  are  two  banks  of  sandy  land,  on  which  two  bat- 
teries are  built. 


ii«_ij,(pui|iiiiiir,« 


562 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Banls. 


Light. 


,■./., 


IVir.Ui,  tidct, 
'  ".  i  currents. 


niion. 

!^o.  6 — BANKS. — The  first  we  meet  with  coming  from  the  sea,  is  the  English  Bftnli 
ich  breaks  in  35°  11'  S.  lulituda,  and  35°  54'  45"  W.  longitude  ;  it  is  U  mires  south  f 
Lslund  of  F  lores.  " 


wlioie,  is  the  Ortiz;  its  eastern  extremity  is  only 
IJnuk  ;  its  western  extremity  slretchos  to  within 


The  city  of  Buenos  Ayres  is  the  onl/  one  situated  on  the  south  side  of  the  river  •  "t  • 

the  chief  city  of  the  United  Provinces  of  La  Plata;  the  distance  to  Parana  is  5  iea'ffi    ' 

From  Cape  St.  Maria  to  Maldonado,  is  16  leagues ;  from  Maldonodo  to  Monte  ViH** 

21  leagues  ;  and  from  this  last  city  to  Colouia,  28  leagues ;  the  distance  from  Cai)e  S*' 

Maria  to  the  Uruguay  is  thus  75  leagues.  '■ 

From  Cape  St.  Antony  to  Buenos  Ayres  is  45  leagues,  and  from  thence  to  Pam 
50  leagues ;  tiie  soutli  side  of  the  river  is  tlius  25  leagues  less  in  extent  than  the  no  th 
side.  "■ 

On  the  north  side  there  are  many  islands,  and  a  number  of  rocks,  above  and  unl 
water :  there  are  none  on  the  opiK)site  side  as  far  as  Buenos  Ayres.     These  islands  a"' 
Lobos,  8  miles  S.  S.   E.  of  Maldonado,  Goritti,  in  the  Bay  of  Maldonado  Flores,  E  "^'f 
Monte    Video,  13  miles ;  San   Gabriel,  Farnllon,  Lopez,  before  Colonia  and  Hornns  1 
and  G  miles  west  of  this  city.     The  rocks  are  all  a  short  distance  from  the  shore.         ' 
The  islands  situated  at  the  Point  of  Santiago  of  Ensenada  being  very  small  we  do  n 
mention. 

No 
whicl 
the 

The  second  is  Archimedes  Bank,  on  which  an  English  frigate  of  this  name  touciipd 
It  is  very  small,  and  is  situated  S.  \  E.,  (true.)  from  Monte  Video,  at  19  miles  distnnoa 
The  third  is  New  Bank,  formed  within  a  few  years,  very  probably  by  the  sand  driftefi 
from  the  little  bank  of  Ortiz.     It  is  situated  on  the  southern  side  of  the  rivor.    Th 
American  corvette  Vandalia  touched  on  iliis  now  bank 

The  fourth,  and  th^   largest  of  tho  wl 
half  H  mile  wide,  and  is  north  of  New  Bhuk  ;  us  wesioin  exiiuuniy  sirerciios  to  within 
a  very  short  distance  of  Colonia ;  it  is  nearer  the  north  than  the  south  side  of  the  river 
Its  greatest  width  is  1 1  to  1 2  miles. 

The  fifth  is  the  Chico  Bank,  a  dangerous  bank,  by  reason  of  the  irrogulnrity  of  ih. 
soundings  on  the  edges.     It  is  placed  between  the  Ortiz  Bank  and  the  soutji  ^iile. 

The  sixth  and  seventh  are  the  Banks  of  Santiago  and  of  Lara,  and  tln'  eiolitli  lintK 
and  tenth,  those  of  Ciudad,  Cainerones,  and  the  Palmas,  all  situated  on  the  same  side' 
except  tho  Palmas,  wiiich  is  bptw(!on  the  confluence  of  the  Uruguay  and  Farana,  oa  tho 
way  from  Buenos  Ayros  to  Colonia. 

Ii'  going  to  Maldoniido,  thiT'j  is  no  bank  to  fear,  l)Ut  in  going  to  Monte  Video,  you 
muEf  avoid  English  and  Arcliimodes  Banks;  '',  going  to  iJucnos  Ayres  you  Imve  to'pa»j 
all  tiio  banks.  Vessels  do  not  generally  tal:')  a  pilot  in  going  to  Monto  Video,  butthev 
rnreiy  omit  to  take  one  in  going  to  Buenos  Ayres. 

The  pilots  who  conduct  vessels  to  Buenos  Ayres,  live  at  Monte  Video  or  Point  Indio. 
Tliey  keep  r.nder  sail,  or  at  anchor  near  the  coast  in  schooners  or  cutters. 

Tlio  government  of  the  United  Provinces  of  La  Plata,  caused  to  be  placed,  several 
year-  since,  large  buoys  on  tho  eilgos  of  most  of  the  banks,  but  bad  wcatiier  and  the 
Btrou!^  currents  have  caused  them  to  disappear.  The  government  of  Monte  \'iilfio,  Imve 
erected  a  tower  containing  a  revolving  light,  on  tho  Isl»  of  Flores,  elevated  1)9  leot  above 
the  level  of  the  sea;  it  can  bo  perceived  in  tiio  night  nt  15  or  IG  miles  distance, auJ 
serves  to  avoid  the  Eiiglisli  and  Ardiinicdes  Bankb. 

No.  7— \Vl5.'DS,  TIDE.S  AND  CUKRKNTS.— At  the  entrance  of  tho  river, and 
at  Monte  Video,  the  j)revailing  winds  avo  the  N.  F.  and  S.  W. 

At  Buenos  Ayres  and  at  Colonia,  iiiey  are  N.  N.  W.,  S.  E.  and  S.  W. 
IJuring  tlie  summer,  and  in  fine  weather,  the  winds  blow  in  the  whole  river,  witli  con- 
siderable regularity,  from  the  E.  to  tlio  S.  E.  from  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning,  until  suu- 
set.     in  the  night  the  winds  vary  to  the  north. 

The  winds  from  S.  W.  and  S.  .S.  \V.  are  known  about  tlio  River  Plate,  by  tho  name 
of  the  i'aniperos,  from  the  Panipos,  lV(jm  which  thoy  come. 

The  I'unipero  lights  up  the  sky,  the  same  as  the  N.  W.  winds  in  Provence,  and  the 
N.  E.  on  the  eoa.Hts  of  Britany ;  it  blown  usually  al'ti-r  rain,  or  wlien  tho  wind  Ims  varied 
from  the  N.  to  N.  W.,  and  to  \V.  N.  \V.,  and  in  wummer  after  a  cabn  and  verj  hot 
day.  Ol'tentimes  it  conies  all  at  onco,  with  a  strong  wind  from  the  N.  E.,  wiieii  thesiiy 
is  covered  with  clouds;  the  <>\plo.-ion  is  then  sudden  and  very  dangerous ;  aiiditisb''t 
for  vessels  in  tho  River  IMate,  or  the  entrance,  to  get  under  easy  sail,  as  Hoeii  lis  thi'ie 
are  any  indications  of  a  Pampero.*  The  barometer  falls  previous  to  tho  Pan)|ii'ic,  and 
rises  afterwards. 

As  It  rains  oftener  in  winter  than  in  summer,  this  wind  is  more  fre(]ueiitly  in  the  win- 
ter, and  lasts  each  time  from  two  to  three  ilays:  In  summer  it  blows  with  moroviolouce 
and  ceases  sooner;  it  is  then  called  in  the  country  (h«  Turbonada  (Torment.) 


*  'I'lie  KiMiilittion,  in  llie  iii;;lit  of  tlie  Ulsl  of  AuRCst,  lUItU,  It.")  leHfiiics  oil'  (Voin  I.' 
roreniiil   iiinl  topfiiilH,  uus  Hurptisi'd  liv  ii  piiiii|i('i'o,  wbicli  la  two   niiinili'ti  nirriod 
and  forced  her  to  scud  under  bare  jioluv;  a  brig  was  uiisct  in  tliu  river  and  un  cuuniioud  whulecastuii 
vborc. 


•los  Isliiiiil,  imjer 
iwiiv  the  lu|i-™ils 


""^^^^mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


$53 


JUS  ttimU'CMlua 


When  the  weather  is  fair,  and  the  wind  light  and  constant,  the  tidoa  on  this  coast  are 
regular ;  on  the  contrary,  in  bad  weather  and  strong  winds,  the  tides  are  irregular,  ar.d 
form  currents  w       .  otteutimes  run  from  4  to  5  miles  per  hour.  • 

\t  Buenos  Aj  the  sea  is  high  with  the  winds  from  the  S.  E.,  and  low  with  the 
winds  N.  W.  and  •  W'  ^"^  ^''"E?  Y,^^'^^  """^  ^^°  remainder  of  the  northern  side,  the 
river  rises  with  the  winds  from  the  S.  E  nd  S.  W.,  and  falls  with  those  from  the  north. 
The  dilTerence  between  high  and  low  v  jr  on  the  borders  of  the  river,  rarely  exceeds  4 
or  5  feet ;  but  in  strong  gales  from  the  S.  W.  they  sometimes  rise  10  feet.  Tide. 

lathe  months  of  March,  April,  and  a  part  of  May,  the  River  Plate  is  higher  than  in 
[he  other  months  of  the  year,  occasioned  by  the  Rivers  Parana  and  Uruguay.  It  then 
brings  down  trees  and  shrubs,  which  form  little  islands  of  verdure  sufficiently  remarkable. 
This  is  the  epoch  of  the  finest  season  in  this  interesting  part  of  South  America,  of  mode- 
rgte  breezes  and  a  mean  temperature.  During  the  spring,  summer  and  winter,  tlio  winds 
are  very  strong,  and  the  temperature  of  the  atmnaphere  very  variable. 

No.  H.— ANCHORAGES.— Whenever  the  ie.id  shows  mud,  you  can  anchor,  having    Anchorages. 
core,  however,  to  anchor  far  enough  from  the  banks  not  to  bo  drifon  on  them. 

With  the  winds  from  the  S.  the  anchorages  on  the  south  side  are  best,  with  the  winds 
from  the  N.  the  opposite  side  is  preferable. 

Large  vessels  and  frigates  may  go  up  to  Monte  Video ;  vessels  drawing  less  than  17 
feet,  nmy  Ro  "P  ^^  Buenos  Ayros  and  the  Hornos  Islands. 

The  anchorages  which  shelter  from  the  N.  W.,  N.  E.,  E.,  and  S.  E.,  are  Maldonado, 
Monte  Video  and  Hornos.  Those  which  give  shelter  from  S.  W.  winds,  are  Ensenada 
de  Bnrngan  and  Buenos  Ayres. 

Smnll  vessels  may  anchor  at  Cape  St.  Mary,  atthe  entrance  of  the  River  Santa  Lucia, 
find  nt  Coloniaon  the  north  side;  at  llio  Salado  within  Ensenadu  de  Baragau,  and  at 
Riachuelo  near  Buenos  Ayres  on  the  south  side.  " 

You  can  come  to  anchor  at  Maldonado  in  6  to  8  fathoms  water  :  at  Monte  Video,  in 
the  road  iu  5  to  6  fathoms;  in  the  port  in  3  to  34  ;  at  the  Hornos  Islands  in  34  to  44  fath- 
oms; in  the  road  of  Ensenada  de  Baragau  in  about  5  fathoms;  at  Buenos  Ayres  in  tho 
loiiu  in  34  to  44  fathoms  ;  and  near  the  city  in  2  to  3  fathoms. 

In  the  anchorage,  on  the  north  side,  you  should  moor  for  the  S.  W.  winds ;  in  the  others 
for  the  S.E.  winds. 

Of  ull  these  ports  and  roads,  the  best  holding  ground  is  nt  Maldonado.  It  is  much  cov- 
ered with  sand.  In  the  other  places  the  bottom  is  of  soft  mud,  through  which  tho  anchors 
drng  in  sudden  flaws  of  wind.  During  tho  pamperos,  the  Ileinos  Islands  offer  an  excellent 
anchorage,  because  the  sea  is  broken  olf  by  the  f  almas  Bank.  This  last  anchorage  was 
not  known  when  the  Emulation  was  there,  in  September,  1830. 

No.O.-DEPTH  OF  THE  RIVER  AT  THE  ENTRANCE  AND  OFF  THE    Depth  of  Ike 
MOUTH.— When  in  tho  parallel  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  in  the  longitude  of  5-:j°  8'  45",   River. 
which  is  that  of  Rio  Grande  de  San  Pedro,  the  soundings  ;..  the  distance  of  33  leagues 
froii  the  cnpe  are  90  fathoms,  mud  ;  at  25  leogues  the  botloiii  is  sand  or  mud  mixed  with 
shells,  and  show  40  to  28  fathoms  only.     In  going  towards  the  cape,  the  soundings  de- 
crease irregularly. 

On  tho  parallel  of  Castillos,  at  33  leagues  distance,  the  depth  of  the  water  is  58  fathoms, 
and  the  prevailing  ([Uidity  of  tho  bottom  is  sandy. 

In  sailing  on  parallels  farther  south  than  Ci<pe  St.  Mary,  you  will  find  less  water  in  the 
game  ionfiittide,  and  the  depth  diminishes  more  regularly.  At  15  leoguos  from  Cape  St. 
Autoiiio,  the  depth  is  17  fathoms,  bottom  of  sand.  At  28  leogues  Si  E.  from  tho  same 
cape, you  will  have  45  fathoms,  same  quality  of  bottom.  North  ot  tho  capo,  and  5  leagues 
from  the  land,  you  will  have  7  to  8  fathoms  water. 

If  you  shape  your  course  for  tho  English  Bank,  that  is  to  say.  in  the  parall'jl  of  35°  11' 
S.,you  willlind  G  t;i  '  fathoms,  and  a  :iandy  bottom,  5  leagues  before  aii'iving  there. 
You nro  then  nearly  in  .')')'  '3'J'  45"  longitude. 

On  tho  parallel  of  35°  30.,  when  you  roach  tiie  longituile  of  50°  39'  45"  W.,  the  bot- 
tom is  of  fine  sand,  and  the  depth  8  fathoms.  On  tlio  parallel  of  35°  35',  and  to  the  par- 
allel of  Cape  St.  Antonio,  the  bottom  is  sand  mixed  with  shells  and  gravel. 

In  the  latitude  of  35°  20'  S.,  when  you  have  passed  the  longitude  of  the  English  Bank, 
tlie soundings  do  not  reach  above  8  fathoms:  on  the  parallel  of  30°  it  reaches  to  11  and 
12  fathom.  ;  west  of  the  bank,  on  the  same  pMrnllel,  there  are  5  and  G  fathoms  oidy. 

At  "JO  leagues  distance  from  the  entrance  to  tlio  river,  tho  water  loses  its  blue  color,  and 
becomes  green,  tinged  with  yellow, 

In  coasting  along  tho  north  side,  in  sight  or  near  tho  land,  you  will  have  mud  sound- 
ings: running  on  a  parallel  greater  than  that  >t'  Lobos  Island,  you  have  no  soundings  of 
mud  except  iu  tho  neighborliood  of  the  meridian  of  this  island;  at  two  miles  south  you 

"At  tho  lii'uinniiig  of  Man'ii,  I!int,  l\w  Enmlntidii  cxiiioivd  the  soath  sidn;  she  coahl  not  stoni  the 
c'jrri^iii  from  ilu"  N.  W.  in  ni^lit  ol'  I'oint  dus  Piodras  do  ^Sllll  Biirroiulxai,  iililunigh  she  hud  a  liiir  wind 
aud  all  sail  set,  aud  a  (out  '..u^i  Ijrcezo,  she  was  obliged  tu  cume  to  anchor  twico. 


"PI^WIWF 


564  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

have  16  and  17  fathoms  of  water;  and  nt  G  miles,  23  and  24  fathoms,  mud  bottom.    T 
going  from  Lobos  to  Monte  Video,  the  depth  diminiHhes  graduiiliy,  but  irreguliuiy.    T 
the  passages  formed  by  the  hard  sand-banks,  situated  between  Monte  Video  and  Bueno" 
Ayres,  there  are  from  3i  to  64  fathoms  of  woter.  ^ 

PoinUtoRe-       N.  10.— POINTS  TO   RKCOCMZE  IN  MAKING  THE  LAND.—There  are 

cognize.  three.  Cope  St.  Mary.  Lobos  Island,  ond  Cape  St.  Antonio. 

Cape  St.  CAPE  ST.  MARY". — Its  position  determined  on  shore,  is  founc  *o  be  34°  39' i"  § 

Merry.  latitude,  and  54°  9'  45"  W.  longitude.     The  variation  of  the  needle,  in  the  month  of  Fb 

bruary.  1831,  was  10°  7'  N,  E, 

Although  of  but  little  elevation,  the  cape  is  distinguished  by  the  neighborhood  of  two 
little  islands  named  Tuna  and  Palonna,  distant  from  each  other  only  2(i0  feet.    These. 
paration  forms  a  passage  for  small  vessels  drawing  less  than  10  feet  water,  and  is  the  en 
trance  of  a  bay  which  is  sheltered  by  the  cape  and  the  two  islands.     You  find  there  from 
11  to  12  feet  of  water.     It  will  contain  perhaps  7  or  8  vessels. 

The  Island  of  Tuna,  the  smallest  and  tho  nearest  to  the  cape,  is  covered  with  the  cac- 
tus, which  is  peculiar  to  the  sandy  coast.     You  will  remork  also,  in  coming  from  sea 
large  sand-hill  with  a  double  peak,  S.  W.  of  the  cape,  near  a  very  flat  beach.    At  the 
north,  on  a  hill,  is  seen  an  ostablisliment  consisting  of  a  group  of  houses  called  an  Es- 
tancia,  for  raising  cattle.     Near  to  these  houses  are  many  trees,  and  all  about  them  i 
enclosures. 


I  many 


The  coast  to  the  north  forms  a  large  bay.  14  miles  in  extent,  with  a  point  surrounded 
by  the  Puhnarone  and  Castillos  Islands.  The  Island  of  Palmarone,  the  nonrest  to  the 
point,  is  verdant;  the  Castillos  are  barren.  Otherwise,  this  reseniblanco  to  Cnpe  St 
Mary  has  caused  sometimes  one  to  be  taken  for  the  other,  and  has  caused  many  ship- 
wrecks.    It  has  been  named,  for  this  reason.  False  Bay. 

At  2  miles  oust  of  the  Castillos,  are  found  Ifi  fathoms  of  woter,  bottom  of  sand.    From 
these  islands  to  Cnpe  St.  IMary,  at  the  same  distance,  are  found  11  to  14  fatlioins.  jpt^^ 
kind  of  bottom.     At  the  east  of  the  cape,  11  fathoms,  a  bottom  of  sand,  or  sundf  ) '  ^ii 
S.,  at  13  miles  distant,  20  fathoms,  sand;  and  S.  W.,  from  18  to  22  futhonis  I       ' 
mud. 
Me  of  Lobos.       ISLE  OF  LOBOS—It  is  situated  in  35°  0'  51''  S.  lat,  and  in  54°  54'  15"  W.  long., 
and  is  onh  u  mde  in  extent.     It  can  be  seen  15  to  16  miles  off.     It  is  inhabited  by  a  grent 
number  ul     oals,  from  which  it  takes  its  name.     Tho  eastern  part  ought  to  be  avoided,  by 
reason  of  a  chain  of  reefs  which  extends  3  miles  off. 

This  Island  is  without  vogetntion.  Large  vessels  pass  easily  in  the  strait  between  it  and 
the  main  land,  and  lind  tliere  17  fithonis  of  water. 

Its  position  has  lieon  dotorniined  from  the  sea  and  the  Island  of  Qoriti  by  triangulation. 
The  variation  of  the  needle  is  the  same  us  at  Cape  St.  Mary. 
Ca2)e  St.  CAPE  SI'.  ANTON  lO. — Wo  comprehend  under  this  name  a  largo  collention  ofljttle 

Antonu/.  mountains  or  hills  composed  of  sand,  which  stretch  to  the  E.  and  S.,  and  which  are  ter- 

minated in  the  wost  by  a  low  coasi  covered  with  bushes. 

Its  position,  (lHt(Miiiined  at  tho  anchorage,  is  in  Sfr-"  19'  3G''  S.  lat.,56o  47'  15"  \V.|ong. 
The  variation  of  the  needle  was,  in  the  month  of  December,  1831,  13^  30'  N.  E.  Tiie 
point  dotermin«'(l  is  that  whore  the  separation  takes  place  between  tho  sund-hilla  and  the 
low  verdant  roast. 

This  capo  is  surrounded  by  a  bank  of  sand  which  breaks  oftentimes  at  a  considerable 
distance  iVotn  the  iHiid,  extending  N.  and  K.,  and  ought  to  be  carefully  avoideil, 
yavigation  No.    1 1.— N.Wld.VTION   AT    THE    ENTRANCE    AND    IN  THE    RIVER 

ofUu  River.  PLATE. — Tlio  description  that  we  have  niven  of  this  river  naturally  indicates  the  precau- 
tions necos.sai  y  to  take  to  ascertain  the  points  of  the  entrance.  We  think  it  preforablo  to 
make  the  north  side,  as  the  land  is  the  highest, 

Some  navigators  f)retend  that  thoy  can  always  judge  of  their  situation,  out  of  sight  of 
land,  by  the  depth  of  water  ond  the  (|uality  of  the  soundings. 

We  do  not  partake  of  their  security  in  this  rospect,  because,  in  exploring  the  south 
coast  of  Bra'.il.  in  IH31,  we  found  soundings  on  all  tho  coast  nearly  at  the  same  depth  and 
quality  as  towirJs  the  entrance  of  the  river.  Besidtts  the  (ireat  Bank,  whose  position  we 
have  determined  between  tho  Rio  (Jrande  de  San  Podro  and  the  (Jastiilos,  has  tho  same 
sort  of  soundings  we  mot  with  west  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  causes,  by  this  rcHetiibliince, 
uutnerous  errors. 

We  advise  nnirinors  bound  to  the  River  Plate,  io  be  '.veil  assured  of  their  position  by 
frequent  obsorvatif)ns  of  latitude  and  longitude,  ond  to  take  ♦hem  with  tho  groatost  pre- 
caution, as  the  currents  triay  deceive  them  between  the  hours  of  obsi-rvatioii. 

If  th<!  winds  are  well  established  from  the  N.  E.,  making  tho  I.mi'!  ::!"')!it  ','apn  St.  Mary 
has  this  a  Wantage,  t!i;it  you  can  rocogni/.e  a  larger  extent  t)f  land  befire  etitpiinj;  the  river. 
But  in  ulloth.ir  circiruit'iuces  Lobos  Island  his  thiriudvanfago,  tliut  it  oilers  in  ii'ochiiiices 
of  success,  by  thi*  poHition  of  tlio  islari  I,  to  avoid  lieing  win  1  bound  on  th.<  n  >i'tli  ci)ajt,and 
to  beat  uj)  w.th  g.'.)  i'>»r  a  Iv.i  iti.{i».  .M  tkiu,{  thj  land  at  C.ipj  St.  AU)!ii,»  sluiuld  bjcoa- 
sidored  tho  most  diliicultand  dangerous. 


mmm 


m^ 


■HPipnHPiiiMPipi 


mi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


665 


No.  12.-C0URSE  TO  MONTE  VIDEO.-Bring  south  of  Lobos  Island,  at  2  or  3  Coumto 
miles  distant,  the  direct  coui-sefor  Flores  Island  is  W.  7°  N.,  true,  or  W.  i  S.,  by  com-  Monte  Video. 
pasa.  But  we  know  the  River  Plate  is  subject  to  very  variable  currents ;  and  you  should 
steer  in  such  a  manner  as  to  approach  the  north  border  of  the  river,  rather  thp.n  the  south 
jide,  on  account  of  the  English  Bank.  You  will  perceive  in  good  season  the  Tower  of 
Maldonado,  and  the  elevated  land  to  the  east.  In  sailing  along  at  a  distance  of  5  or  6 
miles,  you  will  distinguish  a  point  formed  of  black  rocks,  on  both  sides  of  which,  to  the 
right  and  the  left,  are  sand-beaches.  '1  his  is  Black  Point,  or  Point  Negro  situated  14 
miles  from  Maldonado,  near  a  vast  sandy  bay.  The  high  lands  on  the  city  side  are  re- 
markable for  a  great  while  band,  which  shows  itself  on  both  sides  of  Whale  Point,  which 
is  the  west  extremity  of  the  Bay  of  Maldonado.  ll  is  very  near  the  same  panillel  of  the 
tower  of  the  city,  although  the  Spanish  and  English  charts  place  it  W.  S.  W.  of  the 
tower. 

When  Point  Negro  bears  N.,  6  miles  distant,  the  Island  of  F lores  bears  W.  7°  N., 
true.  The  Island  of  Lobos  is  then  on  the  same  bearing,  about  37  miles  distant,  and  the 
souudings  are  from  13  to  14  fathoms,  with  a  muddy  bottom. 

The  land  north  of  Point  Negro  makes  a  deep  bend,  and  becomes  lower.  In  steering 
along  in  sight  of  land,  you  can  distinguish  the  hills  of  Afilar.  situated  in  34°  47'  15"  S.  lat 
and  65°  31'  8"  W.  long.  When  they  bear  by  compass  N.  by  W.,  and  the  nearest  hiil 
bears  E.  45°  N.,  you  are  then  27  miles  distant  from  Flores.  The  soundings  are  then 
12  to  13  fathoms,  bottom  of  mud,  and  still  on  the  same  rhumb  with  Lobos.  The  hills  of 
Alilar  are  isolated,  and  resemble  two  teats. 

In  running  W.  i  S.,  by  compass,  you  have  to  run  only  12  to  13  miles  to  perceive  f>'om 
mast-head  the  tower  built  on  Flores.  This  island  at  first  resembles  three  islands,  then 
the  lower  part  gradually  shows  itself,  and  at  the  distance  of  5  miles,  if  the  sea  is  low,  the 
whole  island  is  seen.  If  the  sea  is  high,  the  island  at  the  same  distance  appears  in  two 
parts. 

If  it  be  night,  as  soon  as  you  perceive  the  light  on  the  tower,  steer  direct  until  within 
4  miles  distance. 

From  thence  keep  on  the  larboard  side,  leaving  the  island  on  the  starboard  hand,  and 
passing  within  2  or  3  miles  south  of  it :  or  you  can  pass  north  of  Flores,  taking  the  pre- 
caution to  pass  at  a  good  distance  from  the  eastern  point,  to  avoid  a  bank  of  rocks  under 
water,  and  which  extends  a  mile  and  a  half  north.  You  can  anchor  only  north  of  the 
tower  one  or  two  miles  distant.  The  Emulation  anchored  here  in  a  gale  of  wind,  in 
January,  1831. 

Between  Flores  and  English  Bank,  the  bottom  is  mud,  and  the  depth  of  water  7  to  8 
fatboms. 

From  Flores  to  Monte  Video  is  16  miles  in  a  straight  line,  and  you  must  steer  by  com- 
pass W.  by  S.  :  avoid  Point  Brava. 

Point  Bravu,  situated  east  of  the  city,  is  formed  by  a  long  line  of  rocks  stretching  off 
from  the  land.  You  must  give  a  good  berth  to  a  rock  detached  from  the  rest.  A  large 
white  house  is  built  north  of  Brava,  and  another,  a  smaller  one,  is  situated  towards  the 
middle  of  the  rocks.  In  quitting  Flores  you  can,  at  the  same  time,  if  the  weather  be 
clear,  perceive  the  cerro,  or  hill  of  Monte  Video,  and  soon  after  the  steeples  of  the  ca- 
tiiedrnliii  the  city. 

If  t'.ie  vit!,l  is  from  the  N.,  or  N.  E.,  you  ought  to  steer  in  the  night  W.  by  S.,  to 
don'  o  V  ■!.  Brava.  Hut  if  the  wind  is  from  S.  E.,  or  E.  S.  E.,  it  is  prudent  to  steer 
"  :  '  x'na  should,  by  way  of  procoution,  in  either  case,  bring  the  light  of  Flores 
to  !• .  b^  N.,  or  E.  N.  E.,  to  be  assured  that  the  currents  have  not  set  you  towards 
)~  ,     .     , 

When  b  hi;',  of  Monte  Video  bears  N.  W.,  by  compass,  the  point  is  doubled,  and  you 
out  of  sight  of  H  steer  gradual);'  .awards  the  starb-jard  hand,  if  you  would  anchor  in  the  harbor.  A  large 
vessel,  which  can  only  anchor  in  the  opon  road,  should  steer  W.  by  S.  from  Brava,  and 
anchor  in  5  fiithoms. 

South  of  Brava,  one  milo  distant,  there  are  from  5  to  C  fathoms  of  woter. 

On  the  passage  from  Lobos  to  Monto  Video,  and  also  in  tlio  navigation  of  any  part  of 
tlie river,  you  must  estimate  the  distances  run  by  a  ground  log,  that  is  to  say,  by  a  log  of 
which  tlie  "chip"  has  been  replaced  by  a  piece  of  liuid.  If  you  throw  the  common  log 
immediately  after  the  deep  log,  the  dillerence  given  by  the  two  logs  siiows  if  the  currents 
are  in  fuvor  of,  or  against  the  vessel. 

As  any  part  of  the  coast  between  Point  Negro  and  Flores  may  be  approached  within 

ir5  inilos,  it  may  be  well,  in  the  night-time,  to  steer  wide  to  the  starboard.  The  re- 
V '  inghsht  on  the  island,  in  this  case,  may  be  perceived  on  the  lorboard  side,  but  it  will 
bi!  MhV  V-  ret'tify  the  vessel's  course  in  steering  directly  for  it,  and  then  leaving  it  on  the 
iiarbonrd  hiind,  when  you  estimate  yourselves  4  or  6  miles  distant.  You  will  by  this 
means  certainly  go  clear  of  the  English  Bank. 

The  cerrodf  Monte  Video  is  175  feethigh.  They  hove  established  there  a  fixed  light, 
which  can  be  suuii  in  clear  weather  atoiilv  from  5  to  G  miles  distance. 


Light. 


'^■•■(•^'^■V 


566 


Course  k> 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 

Tf  yon  wish  to  go  to  Monto  Video  south  of  the  English  Bank,  you  roust,  in  enterineih 
river,  plnce  yourself  on  tho  pariillel  of  35°  30",  aud  stoor  W.  by  S.  with  northerly  wln^* 
and  W.  S.  W.  with  southerly  winds.  '  """- 

The  soundings  nrontfirst  fine  sand,  then  sand  of  the  usual  kind,  further  on  muddvsn  i 
and  again  mud.  You  will  bo  in  this  Inst  case  on  the  meridian  of  Monte  Vidoo,  nnd  v  ' 
ought  then  to  see  the  hill  of  Monte  Video,  which  can  bo  soon  in  the  dny-time,  in  cl '" 
weather,  9  leagues  distant.  The  geographical  position  of  this  hill  is  34°  53'  2''  s'  liifitn  \' 
and  5C°  W  30"  W.  longitude.  '       ""''' 

If  in  spite  of  your  precautions  you  should  got  in  5  or  G  fathoms  of  water  in  tmssiriff  S 
of  English  Bank,  it  wdl  be  necessary  to  steer  more  to  the  larboard,  and  keep  in  fiom  7  / 
9  fathoms. 

Monte  Video  is  in  34°  54'  11"  S.  latitude,  and  50°  13'  18''  W.  longitude.     The  vari 
tion  of  tho  neodloin  September  and  Do':eniber,  1831,  was  11°  42'  24"  N.  K.  *" 

In  a  thick  fog,  or  in  the  case  of  uncertainty  of  tho  true  position  of  the  shi^ ,  it  is  ||„,. 
to  anchor,  rnther  than  pursue  vnur  course  up  the  Kivj-r  Plate. 

No.  "'        '  ''       '       ''  '       ' 


0.13.— COURSE  TO  BUENOS  AYRES.— Vessels  that  do  not  wish  to -aketh 
Buenos  Ayres,  paamgo  by  the  Island  of  Klores,  must  run  on  the  pnnillel  of  Point  Piednis  de  >nn  Bor 
romboii,  and  steer  true  W.  until  they  make  it.  Its  gpogrn])hical  position  is  350  -^t  in': 
S.  latitude,  57°  9'  VV.  longitude.  This  point  is  vory  low,  and  can  oidy  be  (jprcoivedi 
clear  weather.  You  will  remark  on  the  right  many  woody  hills,  among  which  tlieliiiiji 
est  bears  nearly  N.  \V.  °  ' 

This  hill  is  called  Salvador  Grande.  It  is  situated  between  Point  Piedras  do  .Sfin  Bor 
rombon  and  Point  Indio;  the  hill  situated  E.  of  I^'-'vador  Grande,  is  called  Sulvmior C'hi^ 
CO.     The  pilnti  confound  Indian  Point  with  these  hills. 

From  Poiii  'm  'raa  do  San  Borromi)on  the  course  is  the  same  as  when  the  vessel  haa 
passed  .Monte 

Vessels  that  dm  j  than  9  feet  of  water,  pass  generally  over  all  the  banks  between 

this  last  city  and  But     ,s  Ayres. 

Those  drawing  13  feet,  may  pass  between  Chico  Bank  and  the  south  side. 

Those  drawing  15  feet,  may  pass  between  the  channel  formed  by  Ortiz  Bank  and  the 
north  side. 

Those  drawing  15  or  17  foot,  should  choose  the  passage  between  Ortiz  Buuk  nnd  Chi- 
co Bank. 
Passage  hr.  PASSAGE  BETWEEN  CHICO  BANK  AND  THE  LAND.— On  Icavins Monte 
(tvcen  Chico  Video,  steer  S.  W..  by  coinjiass,  30  miles,  to  avoid  being  drit'tcd  on  the  Ortiz  Ijy  thccur- 
Ziani  anti //jc  rents.  You  must  then  head  VV.  S.  W.  until  you  make  Point  Indio,  or  ratlier  Salvador 
land.  (irande. 

Point  Indio  ia  in  35°  15'  20"  south  latitude,  and  5T°  11'  42"  west  lonf^itudc,  m\-!l 
miles  fiom  IMonto  Video,  it  i*  very  low  and  ciin  only  i)e  known  by  tho  woody  iiills  ia  the 
east  part,  while  the  coast  to  the  west  has  no  hills.  When  yon  reckon  yoursi'lf  9  to  lo 
miles  from  Poitit  Salvador  (inmde,  head  W.  N.  W.,  along  the  land.  You  will  joon  per- 
ceive the  three  ombu  trees*  of  the  Magilali'iia.  and  then  the  church  of  tho  same  iiiiitie, 
When  tho  first  ombu  tree  bears  S.  by  K.,  by  compass,  you  are  tlien  N.  and  S.,  tiue, from 
tho  east  point  of  the  Chico  Bank  ;  when  the  church  is  on  the  same  rhunili,  you  are  in 
the  mi<l(lle  of  tho  channel.  Von  will  liislinmiish  in  a  short  time  a  large  siiii;lo  oiiihu tree, 
on  a  hill,  and  more  distiint.  three  other  ombu  trees,  forming  a  single  gniiip. 

In  sailing  along  with  flic  land  in  sii;ht.  it  is  better  to  stiu-r  lirst  oiie  si(l(\  mid  then  the 
other,  to  ascertain  liie  limits  of  the  bonier  of  soft  sand-stone,  which  we  liave  said  pxisti 
in  this  part  of  the  river,  and  not  to  fpiil  it  more  than  2  or  3  cables'  length,  in  obiuimnj  I 
with  the  lead  alternately  soft  sand-stone  and  mud  ;  by  this  menus  you  will  avoid  the  Clii'  j 
CO  Bank. 

When  you  <listinj;nish  two  small  elevations  cov(>rrd  with  bushes  and  trees,  and  lu 
onibu  tree  by  the  side  of  two  low  houses,  yen  have  passeil  the  narrowest  part  ufihe 
rhiiniiel.  When  you  arc  N.  and  S.,  true,  with  these  clevatinns,  you  are  entirrly dear. 
From  thence  you  may  follow  the  coast,  or  steer  N.  W.,  until  you  nndvc  the  cdgos  ol' ilie 
Ortiz. 

In  the  first  case  it  is  necessary  to  steer  at  a  distance  IVeni  the  land,  twice  asgi'i'iit  aslie- 
fore,  to  avdid  the  Manks  of  Santiai:(i,  Lara,  and  Ciudad.  In  tin?  second  case,  which  istlie 
most  |)rui!enf,  you  must  pay  great  attention  to  tho  soiindiiii;H.  Tho  deplli  iricicast'sal 
first  to  5  fathoms,  at  the  least,  and  then  diminishes  gradually  to  JJi  and  :;  I'litlnims.  As  I 
soon  as  you  have  these  last  soundings,  you  are  on  the  edge  of  Ortiz,  and  you  iiubttlien 
h(>ad  to  the  west. 

This  ceiirse  will  bring  you  towards  tho  .iiouth  side.  Yon  will  soon  see  the  villHjeol'l 
Quilmes,  situated  on  u  liltlo  hill,  on  which  there  are  many  ombu  trees,  and  thuluwers! 


'  This  buoy  was  pi 


•  Tli«  nmliii  in  n  trofi  wliiili  thrives  on  the  bnnlrrs  of  tho  River  Pinto;  it  is  ns  thich  iind  liii'liya;!  1 
wulaut  trt'O  :  its  wood  is  so  ])e(iiliHr,  timt  it  \»  good  tor  nothing,  iiolcvun  to  burn,    it  grow  jvirvrajiiJIy. 


■^pwppi»^ 


f^mmi^ 


''"'mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  567 

„f  Buenos  Ayres,  nnd  the  vessels  anchored  in  the  open  road.  It  is  ns  well  when  these 
different  objects  are  well  distinguished,  to  steer  W.  N.  W.,  to  avoid  the  Ciudad  Hunk. 
\j.  900D  as  the  towers  of  the  cathedral  bear  S.  W.,  you  are  in  the  outward  road  of  the 

'^'f'be  city  of  Buenos  Ayres  is  in  34°  3G'  18"  S.  latitude,  and  58°  23'  57"  W.  longitude. 
The  variation  of  the  noodle,  in  March.  18:51,  was  12°  30'  50"  N.  E. 

PASSAGE  BETWEEN  ORTIZ  AND  THE  NORTH  SIDE.-In  leaving  Monte  Paitage  be- 
Video,  you  may  follow  the  land  along  G  milos  dittimt,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  Panella  tween  Ortiz 
Rocks,  ni-ar  which  is  a  large  iron  buoy,*  secured  by  means  of  a  strong  anchor  and  chain,  and  the  North 

r^iie  Panella  Rocks  are  situated  in  34°  54'  15"  S.  latitude,  and  56°  2G'  W.  longitude.    Side. 
You  are  on  them  when  you  see  Point  das  Yeguas  of  the  hill  of  Monte  Video,  with  the 
(teeples  of  the  city,  and   Point  Espinillo  boars  N.  by  E.,  by  compass,  distant  5  miles. 
These  rocks  are  novor  uncovered,  but  when  the  water  of  the  river  is  very  low,  it  occa- 
sioBB  a  long  eddy,  which  may  bo  easily  distinguished. 

*  Point  Espinillo,  though  low,  is  apparent,  because  it  terminates  the  coast  of  the  hill  of 
Monte  Video,  und  it  forma  the  entrance  of  the  river  of  Santa  Lucia,  11  miles  from  Monte 

jjoio"  N.and  S.,  true,  with  Point  Espinillo,  you  must  steer  W.  by  N.  by  compass, 
inil  follow  the  land  always  at  the  distance  of  G  or  7  miles,  to  avoid  the  little  banks  of  sand 
on  the  borders  of  the  river.  You  will  soon_  perceive  the  high  scarped  mountains,  called 
Banwicas  do  San  Gregorio,  or  Santa  Lucia.  When  you  are  N.  and  S.  with  their  east 
extremity,  called  Point  de  .Tesus  Maria,  steer  \V.  N.  W.,  until  you  bring  this  point  to 
bear  E.  i  N.  by  compass.  Y'ou  must  then  head  to  the  W.,  until  you  make  Point  Sauce,t 
the  only  P'»'"t  oi"  '^J"  •^°"^'  which  is  woody.  The  latitude  is  i>4°  2')'  20  '  S.,  and  the  longi- 
tude 57=  2C' 21"  W. 

From  thence  you  may  coast  along  at  a  short  distance,  until  you  pass  north  of  you  a 
(Treat  bank  of  rocks,  of  which  some  are  out  of  water,  and  are  known  by  the  name  of  the 
Pipas.  You  will  thus  arrive  olV  Point  Colonia,  with  a  considerable  depth  of  water,  but 
iuBvery  narrow  channel  between  this  part  of  the  coast  and  the  Ortiz  Bank. 

When  you  are  before  the  city  of  Colonia,  you  have  in  good  season  on  your  right,  the 
San  Gabriel  Islands,  Faralloii  and  Lejjer,  and  steer  then  S.  W.  for  Buenos  Ayres. 

Tho  navigation  south  of  the  Chico  Bank,  and  north  of  the  Oitiz  Bank,  is  not  practica- 
ble except  with  a  fair  wind  and  a  favorable  current. 

POINT  JESUS  MARIA. — S.  E.,  true.,  from  Point  Jesus  Maria,  and  S.  W.  true, 
from  St.  Gregory  and  Santa  Lucia,  is  a  shoal  of  light-colored  quicksand,  having  on  it 
Kvfilve  feet,  on  which  tho  U.  S.  Frigate  Potomac  struck,  in  December,  1840. 

PASSAGE  BETWEEN  THE  CHICO  BANK  AND  THE  ORTIZ  BANK—   Passagebe- 
You  may  leave  Monte  Video  until  within  !)  or  10  miles  of  Salvador  Grande,  then  you    twtcn  the 
briu<'the  vessel's  head  W.  N.  W.,  to  bring  tho  first  onibu  tree  of  the  Magdalina  S.  E.,    Chico  Bank 
aiidavoid  by  this  course  the  new  bank.     Fiom  this  the  course  is  N.  W.  4  N.  and  the  Or- 

Tliis  course  loads  directly  to  the  edges  of  the  Ortiz  Bank,  and  as  soon  as  you  come  up    tiz  Bank. 
to  this  bank,  and  have  3i  to  3i  fathoms,  bring  the  head  V/.,  until  you  perceive  the  village 
of  Quilmes  and  Baenos  Ayres. 

If  the  winds  are  ohead  and  the  currents  favorable,  you  may  beat  between  Chico  and 
Ortiz  Bank,  but  the  tacks  should  be  short,  and  you  should  prefer  the  neighborhood  of  the 
Ortiz  because  this  bank  is  announced  by  the  progressive  and  regular  diminution  of  the 
souniiin"S.  If  the  currents  are  contrary,  you  should  anchor  between  the  banks,  taking 
rare  to  avoid  the  soft  sand  bottom  which  you  often  meet  in  the  River  Plate. 

No.  14.— COURSE  FOR  THE  HORNOS  ISLANDS.— If  you  are  before  Colo- 
nia goint'  from  Monte  Video  to  the  north  of  the  Ortiz,  leave  the  islands  on  the  right,  and 
fflion  you  bring  the  Island  of  Farallon  to  the  north,  steer  N.N.  AV.,  and  theu  N.  by  W. ; 
Tdu  will  soon  see  the  Hornos  Islands  on  the  same  lino,  tho  last  islands  after  leaving  Co- 
lonia, and  covered  with  small  trees,  and  very  bushy. 
You  will  anchor  N.  W.  from  the  outer  one,  and  at  from  1  to  1 J  mile  off. 
\a  going  from  Buenos  Ayres,  you  must  steer  so  as  to  bring  Farallon  north  of  you, 
and  then  stoer  as  in  the  preceding  c'.se. 

Colonia  is  situated  in  34°  28'  14"  S.  latitude,  and  57°  50'  37"  W.  longitude.     The  va- 
riation of  tho  needle  was,  in  September,  1830,  11°  8'  N.  E. 


Point  Jesus 
Maria. 


Course  fur 
the  Hornos 
Islands. 


'  This  buoy  was  placed  by  tho  Emulation,  in  May  1831,  by  request  of  tho  govcrament  of  Monte  Video, 
to  rfiilace  one  carried  uway  by  bad  wptttlior.  ,    ,        j. 

tThJj  point  is  so  named  from  a  httlo  rivor  of  the  same  name,  before  which,  small  vessels  l)ouncl  to 
Colonia  or  from  the  Uraguay,  anchor.  The  brijt  Star  of  the  South,  camo  near  being  lost  in  attempting 
to  approach  tiiis  point,  on  some  rocks  covered  witii  water,  wliith  were  not  seen,  or  indicated  on  any  chart. 
Fortuiiiiely,  a  brig  anchored  near,  prevented  tho  loss,  by  making  ua  a  signal. 


PTCP^pF" 


568  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Additional  Remarks,  by  Capt.  Heywood,  '         ' 

At  the  entrance  of  the  Plata,*  the  prevailing  winds,  during  the  summer  months  from 
September  to  March,  are  north-easterly,  with  tolerably  clear  weather  over  head  but 
dense  atmjsplu'i  (!  near  the  hwizon.  These  winds  haul  generally  to  the  eastward  as  vo* 
advance  up  the  river;  and,  about  the  full  and  change  of  the  moon,  strong  breezes  from 
the  south-eastward  are  common  at  this  season,  accompanied  with  rain  and  foul  weather 
At  Buenos  Ayros,  during  the  summer  months,  the  S.  E.  winds  are  generally  fresh  io  th 
day-time,  hauling  round  to  the  northward  in  the  night.  ^ 

•'During  the  winter  months,  from  March  to  September,  the  prevailing  winds,  at  th 
entrance  of  the   Plata,  are   S.  W.,  or  more  westerly;  but,  up  the  river,  more  generallv 
from  the  northward  than  the  southward  of  west.  ' 

"  The  winter  season  is  the  best,  in  point  of  weather,  at  Buenos  Ayres ;  for,  the  wind 
being  chiefly  from  the  N.  W.  to  S.  W.,  the  water  is  smooth,  and  the  communication  can 
be  kept  up  between  the  shore  and  the  shipping  with  more  facility.  The  weather  i 
sometimes,  but  not  frequently,  foggy.  Fogs  are  most  common  in  tlie  months  of  July 
August,  and  Sojjtomber,  and  prevail  more  at  the  entrance  of  the  river,  as  far  up  as  the 
S.  E.  tail  of  the  Ortiz,  than  above  the  banks. 

"  As  it  cannot  be  said  that  there  are  regular  tides  in  the  Plata,  but  currents,  as  uncer. 
tain  in  their  duration  as  they  are  irregular  in  their  rate  and  direction,  no  certain  allow" 
ance  can  be  made  for  them ;  therefore,  a  ground-log  should  always  be  used,  to  know 
the  course  made  good,  and  distance  run. 

"  The  tides,  generally  speaking,  when  the  weather  is  fine  and  settled,  and  the  winds 
moderate,  do  not,  in  any  part  of  this  river,  rise  or  fall  more  than  5  or  G  feet;  though  at 
Buenos  Ayros,  nt  the  distance  of  8  miles  from  the  city,  we  found,  in  his  Majesty's  shin 
Norous,  when  the  winds  were  strong  at  N.  W  ,  so  little,  sometimes,  as  15  feet  water- 
while  with  strong  breezes  from  E.  S.  E.  to  S.  S.  W.,  the  depth  was  upwards  of  5  fath! 
oms ;  bur,  except  on  such  extrnordinaiy  occasions,  we  had  between  17  and  22  feet  water 
I  have  heard,  however,  some  marvellous  stories  of  the  river  having  been  ainjott  dried  up 
across  from  Buenos  Ayres  to  Colonia,  during  heavy  westerly  gales. 

"  The  River  Plata  has  many  singularities,  which  I  think  may,  in  a  great  measure,  be 
accounted  for.  from  its  formation  being  so  different  from  any  other  known  river.  Its  en- 
trance being  very  wide  and  very  shallow,  it  is  affected  by  every  change  of  wind  in  a  moat 
extraordinary  manner;  so  much  so,  that  a  shift  of  wind  may  be  predicted  almost  to  a 
certainly,  by  observing  carefully  the  state  of  the  mercury  in  a  barometer,  and  the  set  of 
the  curronr.x,  which  usually  shift  before  the  wind.  In  calm  weather  the  currents  are 
generally  very  slack;  and  then  as  regular,  almost,  as  tides :  setting  up  and  down  the 
river  alternately.  When  the  winds  are  variable,  the  currents  are  equally  so;  and  I  have 
known  the  Noreus  to  be  curront-rode  four  different  ways  in  less  than  six  hours.  When 
thB  current  comes  in  from  the  eastward,  along  the  north  bunk  of  the  Pliitn,  a  north-east- 
ally  wind  may  generally  be  expected  to  follow  ;  and  at  the  same  time,  (should  the  wind 
have  been  previously  to  the  S.  E..)  the  mercury  in  the  barometer  will  fall  a  little-  but 
much  more  if  the  transition  be  quick  from  south-west,  witliout  stopping  in  the  south- 
eastern quarter. 

"When  tlio  wind  continues  in  the  north-east  quarter,  the  mercury  is  more  depressed 
(according  to  its  strength)  than  with  any  other  wind;  and  there  is  usually,  then,  a  set 
into  the  river  on  the  north  bank,  and  out  on  the  opposite.  Indeed,  whilst  the  winds  are 
between  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  E.,  the  current  generally  runs  to  the  westward  past  Monte 
Video,  though  without  much  augmenting  the  depth  of  water  off  that  place,  butfiilingthe 
river  above  thu  banks. 

•'The  winds  between  N.  .'  V..  ond  W.  N.  W.  make  the  water  lowest;  the  out-set 
being  then  strojigest  along  the  south  bank  of  the  river,  past  the  Points  del  ludioand  Me- 
moria  ;  but  very  inconsiderable  along  the  north  bank. 

"Before  the  setting  in  of  a  S.  W.  gale,  or  pampero,  the  weather  is  usually  very  un- 
settled, and  the  winds  unsteady  and  variable  iu  .the  northern  and  north-western  boards, 
preceded  by  a  considerable  fall  in  the  mercury,  though  it  usually  rises  a  little  again  before 
the  wind  sliifts  to  the  south-west,  and  ufceu  continues  to  rise,  even  though  the  wind  may 
increase  from  tnut  quarter. 


"Shoal  off  tub  Rio  ok  la  Plata. — The  l.nurel,  M'Duiiald.  from  London  to  Vaipsraiso,  put  into 
the  riviT  of  La  I'liilu,  on  the  llUh  of  Juno,  18'J'J,  liavinf;  been  obliged  to  bear  up  to  rcjiaiv  some  dumage 
suKfinicd  by  a  heiivy  »ott  bn^aking  on  board  of  her.  Tlie  master  reported  as  follows : — That,  on  the  liih 
of  June,  h«  dim-overed  a  Hhoal  in  lut.  3fi°  2B'  H.,  long,  ■'il"  30'  \V. ;  that  it  appeared  to  be  about  a  mile 
long,  and  the  snine  in  hreailtli,  with  n  nea  breaking  very  high  over  it :  that  it  had  the  appearance  uf  sand, 
and  a  little  wuli-r  on  it.  He  pani-ed  within  half  a  nnir,  and  then  hove  to;  pounded  with  90  fathoms  of 
line,  and  found  no  botioin.  H<>  further  stntcs,  that  ho  hud  a  good  chronometer  on  board,  ftod  was  lii 
luilca  out  uf  his  longitude  when  he  luadu  tlie  port  of  Monte  Video. 


»  Before  these 
oDUSually  high; 
Ijjnk,  which  conti 
prove  that  these  v 
past  Cape  St.  Ant 
tliey  increase  the 
barber  of  Monte  ' 
phere  clear  and  el 
They  are  genenil! 
moderate  from  th( 

•>I  have  never  I 
to  exceed  throe  ki 
it  to  run  at  the  ra 

"As  the  winds 
most  frequently  fn 
and  S.  W.  winter 
ffbole,  most  advise 
tude  of  that  cape. 

"In  latitude  33= 
where  the  depth  o 
bottom  dark  olive-c 

"Inlat.  34°  S., 
crease  quickly,  in 

"Lat.  34°  20' 
ho3  Rock,  the  def 
the  Great  Castelhc 
to  25  fathoms  ;  an 
approach  the  coai 
This  bottom  is  fou 
ceptvery  close  in 

"  To  the  soul  hw 
or  gravel;  and  if  a 
in  for  the  land,  yet 
mud,  which  is  the 
well  as  8  or  9  leagi; 
is  generally  2G  to  1 

"Inlat.  35°  S., 
fathoms  water,  d;ii 
rection.  East  of 
parallel,  the  same 
thesouthwardof  ] 
or  gravelly  ridge, 
long.  52°  30'  W. , 

"Thus  the  app 
taken  in  nuvigatin; 

"I shall  here  in 
which  I  believe  to 

"  'Cape  St.  Mi 
the  westward  of  th 
About  six  miles  no 
(probably  a  fence 

"  '  About  a  mile 
is  remarkable,  beir 
is  a  sandy  beach. 
the  coast  near  it. 
ter  off  Cape  St.  iVl 
tioo,  you  have  8^ 

"  I  am  inclined 
I  here;  for,  in  his  i\ 
Onthel7thof  No 
the  Moato  Video, 
M.  tacked  in  '23  fu 
when  sights  were 
Cape  St.  Mary  bei 
jOgiol2i  fathoms 

•Thereiialightho 
I  h«  lertl  of  the  tea. 


tl 


mm^mmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•'Before  these  winda  set  in  at  Buonos  Ayres,  the  current  runs  up,  nnd  fills  the  river 
nnusually  high ;  at  the  SRtne  time  as  strong  un  out-set  is  oxperiencod  along  the  north 
bank,  wiiich  continues  whilst  the  winds  are  strongest  from  W.  S.  W.  to  S.,  seeming  to 
prove  that  these  winds  force  up,  from  the  southward,  a  large  nccuraulatod  body  of  water 
past  Cape  St.  Antonio,  which  can  only  find  a  passage  out  again  by  the  north  shore,  where 
jliey  increase  the  depth  of  water,  as  well  as  up  the  river,  and  particularly  in  the  shallow 
harbor  of  Monte  Video."  Whilst  these  S.  W.  winds  blow  the  air  is  cold,  and  the  atmos- 
phere clear  and  elastic,  in  a  degree  rarely  to  be  met  with  in  any  other  part  of  the  world. 
They  are  generally  succeeded  by  some  days  of  fine  serene  weather,  the  wind  continuing 
moderate  from  the  southward,  or  varying  to  the  eastward. 

I'l  have  never  known  the  velocity  of  the  tide  or  current,  in  the  River  Plata,  any  where 
to  exceed  throe  knots  per  hour :  but  I  have  heard  it  said,  by  some,  that  they  have  found 
it  to  run  at  the  rate  of  six  or  seven  miles  an  hour. 

» As  the  winds  outside  the  River  Plata,  and  particularly  about  Cape  St.  Mary,  are 
most  frequently  from  the  north-eastward  and  northward,  except  when  the  S.  E.  summer 
and  S.  W.  winter  gales  blow,  about  the  times  of  new  and  full  moon,  I  consider  it,  on  the 
whole,  most  advisable,  for  ships  bound  in  the  river,  to  got  in  with  the  land  about  the  lati- 
tude of  that  c'lpe. 

"In  latitude  33="  S.  the  bank  of  soundings  extends  oflF  the  land  full  thirty-six  leagues, 
where  the  depth  of  water,  in  longitude  50°  -20'  W.,  is  94  fathoms,  and  the  quality  of  the 
bottom  dark  olive-colored  mud,  or  ooze,  as  it  is  all  along  the  outermost  verge  of  the  bank. 
"In  lat.  34°  S.,  and  30  leagues  from  the  land,  the  bank  is  steep,  and  the  soun^^inga de- 
crease quickly,  in  standing  to  the  westward,  to  25  fathoms,  20  leagues  from  land. 

"  Lat.  34°  20'  S.,  nnd  long.  51°  60'  W.,  or  about  30  leagues  east  of  the  Great  Cnstel- 
ho9  Rock,  the  depth  is  63  or  64  fathoms,  dark  mud.  In  standing  in  for  the  land,  between 
the  Great  Castelhos  and  Cape  St.  Mary,  the  water  shoals,  in  a  short  distance,  from  60 
to  25  fathoms  ;  and  the  quality  of  the  bottom  changes  to  sand,  which  grows  coarser  as  you 
approach  the  coast ;  and,  as  far  as  seven  leagues  off  shore,  is  intermixed  with  shells. 
This  bottom  is  f<>un;'.  only  in,  and  to  the  northward  of,  the  latitude  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  ex- 
cept very  close  in  with  ii. 

»  To  the  souihward  of  34°  40'  S..  thn  b:<ctom  is  chiefly  mud,  intermixed  with  fine  sand 
or  gravel ;  and  if  a  ship  happen  to  be  set  to  the  southward  of  Capo  St.  Mary,  as  she  haula 
in  for  the  land,  yet  keeps  to  the  northward  of  Lobos,  she  will  get  out  of  fine  sand  into  dark 
mud,  which  is  the  quality  of  the  bottom,  chiefly,  between  Cape  St  Mary  and  Lobos,  aa 
well  as  8  or  9  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  that  island  ;  and  the  depth  of  water  between  them 
i3  generally  26  to  20  fathoms 

"In  lat.  35°  S.,  and  long.  52°  W.,  or  42  leagues  true  east  of  Lobos,  there  are  about  90 
fathoms  water,  dark  sandy  bottom ;  from  whence  the  bank  of  soundings  takes  a  S.  W,  di- 
rection. East  of  Lobos,  27  leagues,  the  depth  is  25  fathoms  ;  and,  in  steering  in,  on  ita 
parallel,  the  same  depth  nearly  continues  till  very  near  that  island.  But,  if  set  a  little  to 
the  southward  of  Lobos,  the  water  will  shoal  even  lo  10  fathoms,  perhaps,  on  a  hard  sandy 
or  gravelly  ridge,  that  extends  all  the  way  from  the  English  Bank,  in  its  parallel,  as  far  aa 
long.  52°  30'  W. ;  or  full  18  leagues  to  the  eastward  of  the  moridian  of  Lobos. 

"Thus  the  approach  to  this  river  cannot  bo  considered  dangerous,  if  proper  care  bo 
taken  in  navigating,  and  due  attention  paid  to  the  lead,  and  to  the  cours  >  steered. 

"1  shall  here  insert  the  honorable  Capt.  Bouverie's  description  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  &c., 
which  I  believe  to  be  very  correct,  and  his  directions  judicious. 

"  'Cape  St.  Mary  is  a  low  point,  with  rocks  all  about  it.  The  direction  of  the  coast,  to 
the  westward  of  this  cnpe,  becomes  more  westerly  than  at  any  other  part  northward  of  it. 
About  six  miles  northward  of  it  is  a  house,  with  a  row  of  trees  northward  of  the  house, 
(probably  a  fence  of  high  prickiy-pear  bushes,)  which  is  very  remarkable. 

" '  About  a  mile  south  of  the  house  is  a  blulf  point,  with  a  few  rocks  at  the  foot,  which 
is  remarkable,  being  different  from  the  rest  of  the  const,  the  general  character  of  which 
is  a  sandy  beach.  One  cannot  fail  of  knowing  the  cape  by  these  marks,  running  down 
the  coast  near  it.  If  you  are  at  any  distance  oflT,  you  will  not  perceive  them.  The  wa- 
ter off  Cape  St.  Mary  is  shoaler  than  to  the  northward.  Off  the  cape,  in  a  S.  E.  direc- 
tion, you  have  8i  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  4  or  5  miles.' 

"  I  am  inclined  to  think  Capt.  B.  may  have  been  somewhat  deceived  in  hia  estimation 
here;  for,  in  his  Majesty's  ship  Noreus,  I  found  more  water  at  the  distance  he  mentiona. 
Onthe  17th  of  No/ember,  1810,  at  noon,  in  lat.  34°  42'  S.,  and  long,  about  2°  20'  E.  of 
the  Monte  Video,  had  light  winds  from  S.  by  W.,  and  fine  weather.  At  half  past  1  P. 
M.  tacked  in  23  fathoms,  to  stand  in  shore,  and  carried  from  that  depth  to  18  fathoms, 
when  sights  were  taken  for  the  chronometer,  which  made  2"  13'  21"  E.  of  Monte  Video, 
Cape  St.  Mary  bearing  N.  66'^  W.,  and  standing  on,  laying  up  W.  and  W.  by  N.,  tack- 
jDglD  I2i  fathoms  water,  the  prickly-pear  hedge,  (mentioned  by  Capt.  Bouverie,)  being 


559 


'There  is  a  lighthouse  at  Monte  Video,  the  lantern  of  which  is  Tour  hundred  and  seventy-five  feet  above 
I  hs  level  of  the  sea. 


560 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILO. 


on  with  Cnpe  St,  Mary,  (which  is  formed  by  a  low  rocky  islot  nearly  joining  the  Bhore  \ 
bearing  north  by  compass,  and  the  bronlters  stretching  to  the  S.  E.  of  the  capo  ;  N.  7°  v 
about  3  miles,  was  our  distance  from  the  capo.  ' 

'•Captain  Bouvorio,  in  continuiition,  says,  'To  the  noithwnrd  of   the  cnpe,  betwee 
it  and  Palma,  you  have  10  or  1 1  fathoms  at  a  little  distance  from  the  shore.' 

"  '  Ships  in  general  make  the  land  with  N .  or  N.  E.  winds :  therefore,  it  is  iiost  to  ke 
in  tho  latitude  of  the  cape,  or  a  littio  to  tho  northward  of  it,  till  you  get  soundings,  ns  th'' 
current  sets  to  tho  S.  \V.     It  is  better  not  to  make  the  land  north  of  tho  cape,  riot  tlmt  r 
believe  there  is  any  absolute  danger,  but  tho  water  in  many  places  is  shoal  a  lou"  wiiv  oft' 
the  land,  and  woul<l  alarm  any  one  not  acquainted  with  that  circumstance. 

"  '  In  lat.  33°  27'  S.,  and  long.  5J°  9'  W.,  is  a  shoal,  where  wo  found  9  fathoms  wntnr 
I  believe  it  is  a  ridgo  running  in  that  paralUd  of  latitude  all  the  way  to  the  shore.  In  \nt\ 
tude  34?  S.  is  some  tolerably  high  land,  on  which  is  a  Spanish  fortress,  called  Fort  To 
rosa.  It  is  a  scjuare,  with  bastions  at  the  angles.  It  has  three  guns  in  the  fuco  niu)  on 
in  tho  flank,  and  stands  about  a  mile  from  the  beach.  About  G  leagues  N.  N.  E.  from  it  ° 
a  mark  set  up,  as  tho  termination  of  the  Spanish  territories. 

"Being  in  latitude  of  Cape  St.  Mary,  and  having  got  ground  ia  28  or  30  fathoms  m 
ter,  fine  sand  and  shells,  you  may  reckon  yourself  20  leagues  ofl" shore  ;  with  from  15  tooii 
fathoms,  sand  and  clay  nil od,  you  are  not  far  off  the  land.  When  you  have  not  geo 
the  land  before  night,  be  sure  to  keep  to  the  northward  of  the  cnpe  by  your  rockoDJnff" 
to  allow  for  tho  current,  which  sets  to  the  southward.  This  is  tho  ciiso  with  the  nhov 
mentioned  N.  and  N.  E.  winds.  With  S.  and  S.  W.  winds  the  current  runs  strong  tho 
other  way. 

'•  '  1  am  inclined  to  think  that  tho  strong  north-easterly  currents  which  are  to  be  met 
with  oft'  the  mouth  of  the  Plata  when  tho  wind  is  about  to  blow,  or  blowing,  from  the 
south-westward,  do  not  extend  much,  if  at  all,  beyond  tho  bank  of  soundings.' 

"  Agreeing  in  opinion  with  Captain  Bouverie,  that,  generally  speaking,  it  is  advisable 
to  make  the  land  about  Cape  St.  Mary.  I  would  also  recommend,  if  the  wind  should  be 
any  where  between  S.  E.  and  N.  N.  E.,  to  onter  the  river  on  the  north  side  of  the  Eng. 
lish  Bank,  jjassing  Lobos  on  either  side,  accoiding  to  tho  wind  and  state  of  tl  o  weather 
There  is  a  good  passage  between  Lobos  and  the  main,  having  17  to  14  fatlumg  water 
Variation  13'^  easterly,  (IRl  3) 

"  When  within  3  or  4  leagues  of  Cnpe  St.  Mary,  in  17  or  18  fatlionis,  S.  S.  W,,  by 
compass,  is  a  fair  course  to  steer  for  passing  outside  of  Lobos  in  the  night  time ;  for,  \vi[|, 
the  wind  from  tho  eastward,  or  N.  E.,  tho  set  along  shore  into  the  river  must  he  guarded 
against.  Steering  this  S.  S.  W.  course,  tho  depth  of  water  will  increase  to  20  niid  2" 
and  some  casta,  perhaps,  of  24  or  2ft  fathoms,  (if  you  are  set  neither  to  the  Westward 
nor  to  tlie  southward  of  it,)  and  tho  bottom  will  change,  first  to  sandy  mud,  and  then  to 
dark  blue  mud,  ns  you  approach  the  latitude  of  Lobos.  If  you  are  set  to  tho  southward 
in  steering  S.  S.  W.  you  will  not  deepen  so  much.  The  bottom  will  keep  simdy;  and 
when  you  approach  tho  latitude  of  Lobos,  you  will  have  no  more  than  19,  18,  and  17 
fathoms:  but  if  you  aro  set  to  the  southward  of  Lobos  a  few  miles,  you  will  linve  hard 
casts  of  from  IG  to  10  fathoms,  and  may  rest  assured  of  being  on  the  parallel  of  theEn"- 
lish  Bank,  and  may,  therefore,  make  a  west-northerly  course,  true,  till  you  find  tiie  bot- 
tom soften,  as  it  is  all  dark  blue  or  greenish  nmd  in  the  channel,  between  tho  foul  rid™ 
of  the  English  Bank,  and  the  north  shore,  all  the  way  up  to  Monte  Video,  in  thetVir 
way  from  Lobos.  When  off  Lobos,  if  the  weather  threaten,  and  it  should  he  likely  to 
blow,  a  ship  will  find  saf  .  'lorage  in  the  harbor  of  Maldonado,  sheltered  from  soutjier- 
ly  winds  by  the  Island  oi  \^  <itti,  which  bean*  N.  42''  W.,  true,  11  or  12  miles  from  Lo- 
bos. As  I  have  never  been  in  Maldonado  myself,  I  shall  insert  here  what  Cnpt.  Houverie 
Bays  about  it. 

"  'The  Spanish  surveys  of  this  bay  lay  down  a  sufficient  depth  of  water  for  nnysbip 
between  any  part  of  tlio  island  and  tho  main  ;  however,  it  cannot  bo  safely  entered,  liut by 
small  vessels,  except  to  the  westward  ;  and  you  nmst  not  go  farther  iii  than  to  hiing  the  .N, 
W.  point  of  (ioritti  to  bear  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  or  S.  W.  by  S.,  by  compass,  with  4i  or  5 
fathoms,  good  strong  clay.  With  southerly  winds  there  is,  in  tho  east  passage,  n  heavy 
swell;  and  the  water,  from  tho  ground  being  uneven,  breaks  almost  the  whole  way  across 
in  bad  weather.  The  Diamede,  (fifty-gun  ship,)  passed  through  it  to  the  anciiorage  be- 
fore its  dangers  were  known,  and  had  not  less  than  18  feet;  but  there  are  places  where 
there  is  so  little  ns  li  fathom  ;  and  it  is  very  irregular.  There  is  a  bod  of  rocks  to  the 
south  of  Goritti;  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  Tower  of  Maldonado  north,  und  the  outer  part  I 
of  Point  del  Este  E.  N.  E.  i  E. 

•'  'In  tho  direct  line  of  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  from  tho  westward,  is  a  hoJ  of  rocks 
where  there  aro  parts  having  only  3  and  quarter  less  3  fathoms.  The  boaiings,  taken  on 
Uie  rocks  are,  N.  E.  point  of  Goritti,  E.  i  S. ;  N.  W.  point  of  ditto,  E.  by  S.  i  S.i  S. 
W.  point  of  ditto,  S.  E.  by  S. ;  Point  Ballena,  W.  by  N.  4  N. ;  the  hill  of  Tim  de  Azu- 
car,  just  within  the  extreme  of  Point  Ballena. 


.^^ 


■m 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

M  iln  mid-chnnnel,  between  these  nicks  anc]  the  island,  are  Gj  and  7  fiithoms  Their 
distance  from  the  island  is  about  threfe-quarters  of  a  mile.  There  are  7  fathoms  close  to 
them,  ail  round  the  western  side.  The  wnterm«  place  is  on  the  main,  close  bya  batterv. 
rpbe  stream  loses  itsell  in  the  sand,  except  when  swollen  by  heavy  rains,  and  you  have  to 
roll  the  casks  about  60  yards  over  the  sand.     The  water  is  very  good. 

.. .  Having  Lobos  bearing  N.  by  W.,  by  compass,  distant  3  or  4  miles,  you  will  have 
about  18  fathoms ;  and,  m  makmg  a  compass  course,  W.  i  S.,  by  ground  log,  {hnvins 
due  regard  to  the  wind  and  current  at  the  time,)  you  will  make  the  Island  of  Flores 
ahead  of  you.  In  this  track  your  soundings  will  gradually  decrease  from  18  to  12  fathoms 
due  south  of  Black  Pomt,  and  to  7  or  8  fathoms  when  you  approach  within  nine  or  ten 
miles  of  Flores.' 


561 


general  rule  to  be  followed  by  strangers  at  the  River  Plata.  Great  care  and  attention  to 
tbe  course  made  good,  and  to  the  soundmgs,  are  indispensably  requisite  in  those  who 
attempt  to  conduct  vessels  during  the  night,  in  any  part  of  this  river ;  and  even  these  have 
been  but  too  often  insufficient  to  save  ships  from  destruction.  But,  in  merchant  vessels 
Ifear  we  cannot  always  expect  to  find  those  qualities;  and,  therefore,  I  withhold  my 
opinion  of  its  being  advisable  for  them  to  run  in  the  night ;  neither  can  it  be  done  by  men- 
of-war,  without  some  risk. 

"Flores  bears,  by  the  world,  \V.  4=  30'  N.  from  Lobos,  distant  52  miles.  It  lies 
nearly  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  has  a  small  hummock  in  the  middle,  and  one  at  each  end;  that 
to  tlie  S.  W.  being  39  feet  high.  Between  these  the  land  is  low  and  marshy,  and  over- 
flowed sometimes  between  the  central  and  N.  E.  hummock.  It  may  be  seen  at  the  dis- 
tance of  5  or  6  leagues  from  the  ship's  deck  in  clear  weather. 

"There  is  good  anchorage  all  round  this  island,  but  a  reef  extends  in  a  N.  W.  direc- 
tion from  the  north  point  about  a  mile,  Seals  and  sen  lions,  and  various  aquatic  birds  re- 
sort to  the  small  islands  as  well  as  to  Lobos  ;  and  in  the  months  of  August  and  September 
great  quantities  of  very  excellent  eggs  may  be  procured.  With  the  wind  easterly,  boats 
may  land  on  the  western  side  of  Flores,  particularly  in  a  small  cove  very  near  the  S.  W. 
part  of  the  island.  From  Flores,  W.  N.  W.,  the  Caretas  Rocks,  (above  water)  are 
distant  about  5  miles,  and  there  are  5  fathoms  between  them.  The  south,  at  the  distance 
of  11  miles  from  Flores,  is  the  north  part  of  the  English  Bank,  on  which,  in  that  latitude, 
3.5=8'  S.,  there  are  about  12  feet  waier.  The  depth  of  water  between  Flores  and  the 
English  Bank  is  7  fathoms  all  the  way  across,  to  within  a  very  little  distance  of  both. 
Tiie  English  Bank,  in  Int.  35°  12',  generally  breaks,  and,  with  a  low  river,  is  above  water 
in  some  places.  Its  extent,  to  the  southward,  has  not  yet  been  accurately  defined  ;  and 
for  70  or  80  miles  to  the  south-eastward  of  it  the  ground  is  said  to  be  foul  and  uneven,  and 
has  not  been  explored. 

"Between  the  Archimedes  and  the  English  Bank  there  is  aswnsh  of  5  fathoms  water, 
(according  to  Capt.  Beaufort,  of  the  Royal  Navy,  who  explored  those  banks  in  1807,)  and 
as  many  miles  wide. 

"The  shoalest  part  of  the  Archimedes  Bank,  about  2J  fathoms,  is  4  miles  in  extent, 
about  north  and  south,  and  there  are  4  fathoms  all  round  it.  The  centre  of  it  is  in  lati- 
tude 35"  12'  S.,  and  the  Monte  Video  bears  N.  22«  W.,  by  the  world,  from  it,  distnnt  20 
allies.  Besides  this  bank,  there  is  a  small  knoll,  in  hit.  35^  14'  S.,  which  is  true  S.  from 
the  Monte  Video,  21  miles,  and  has  not  more  than  34  fatlioms  of  water  on  it,  and  about  4 
fatiioins  all  round  it. 

"Passing  to  the  southward  of  Flores,  at  the  distance  of  a  couple  of  miles,  you  liave 
Bjor"  fathoms,  and  may  steer  W.  4  S.  to  pass  Point  Uraba,  which  bears  true  W.  4°  N., 
distant  4  leagues  from  the  S.  W.  end  of  Flores.  This  point  is  bolder  to  than  the  land 
totlie  westward,  between  it  and  the  town  of  Monte  Video,  and  may  be  passed  close,  in 
4jor5  fathoms,  at  a  mile  or  a  mile  and  a  half  distant.  The  best  anchorage  for  a  frigate 
off  tlie  town  of  Monte  Video,  is  with  Point  Braba  bearing  W.  by  N.  4  N. ;  the  cathedral 
N.E.  by  N.;  and  the  mount  about  N.  W.  by  N.,  in  34  and  4  fathoms,  2  miles  or  more 
from  the  town,  with  the  harbor  quite  open.     The  bottom  is  all  soft  mud. 

"The  hnrbor  of  Monte  Video  is  very  shoal,  having  only  from  14  to  19  feet  water ;  but 
the  bottom  is  so  very  soft  that  vessels  receive  no  damage  by  grounding  there.  Captain 
Bouverie  says, '  a  S.  S.  W.  wind,  which  blows  right  into  the  harbor,  and  causes  a  good 
deal  of  sea,  always  occasions  the  water  to  rise  a  fathom  or  more.' 

"In  a  long  continuance  of  fine  weather,  the  tides  sometimes  assume  the  appearance 
of  regularity;  but  this  is  not  often  the  case.  They  are  governed  entirely  by  the  winds. 
Tlie  winds  from  the  southward  cause  the  water  to  run  out  on  the  north  shore  strongest. 
Fine  weather  and  a  N.  W.  wind  make  the  water  lowest.  It  is  usual,  in  Monte  Video 
harbor,  to  have  an  anchor  to  the  S.  E.,  and  another  to  the  S.  W.,  and  to  take  one  in 
abuft  from  the  northward;  for  the  wate.'  forced  in  by  the  southerly  wind,  sometimes 

36 


Ik 


663 


BLUNT'S   AMHKIC\N  COAST  PILOT. 


rushes  out  with  astoaishing  rapidity ;  when  the  anchorago  to  the  north  ia  of  the  sreat 
service.  " 

"  The  Monte  Video  is  in  latitude  34°  53'  S.,  longitude  56°  3'  W.  of  Oreonwi  I 
being  1°  24'  W.  of  the  IslBnd  of  Lolios.  and  8°  10'  E.  from  the  cuthedml  ot  Hh^  ' 
Ayrea.  On  the  suniinit  of  this  imiunt  is  h  furtifiod  liuilding,  wliiiiie  biiae  is  4,;  W^^t'^l 
Lighthouse,  inches  by  i20  feet,  used  soinetiinea  for  n  hghiliouae.  The  diiimetor  of  the  lontorri  js  in 
feet  6  inchea,  and  its  elevation  iilxive  the  level  of  the  aen  475  feet.  At  tiie  biiHo  of  tl 
mount  are  aeveial  runaof  excellent  vviiter,  particularly  in  two  amall,  smooth,  aiuiily  buv* 
ou  tho  S.  W.  part  of  it,  where  aliipa  in  the  outer  road  may  supply  thenisuWos  wjili  hu,  I 
and  another  on  the  east  aide  of  the  mount,  just  ubreaat  of  Rat  laland,  adapted  tu  shj 
the  harbor. 


lips  in 


"Giving  tho  proforonco  to  tho  paaaage  on  the  north  side  of  the  Engliah  Bank,  esn 
daily  when  tho  wind  ia  any  where  between  S.  S.  K.  and  N.  N.  E.  on  pa.i^iinr  iji,|, 
because  it  may  be  expected  most  probably  to  ahift,  if  it  does  at  all.  round  by  the  noitli  f ' 
the  westward  ;  though,  perhaps,  not  before  that  wind,  and  the  inaet,  to^retluM-,  inivlit  curr 
a  ship  up  to  Monte  Video  ;  yet  if  tlie  wind  should  bo  to  the  north-westward  at  the  tin 
of  maliing  the  land,  it  may  be  pretty  confidently  expected  to  aliilt  next  In  the  WeHtwiiH 
or  S.  W.,  and  therefore  a  ship  should  not  strive  to  beat  up  round   Lobns  and  tho  north 
channel,  against  an  outaet,  but  stand  at  once  over  towards  Cape  Stk  Antonio,  wheiv  i, 
the  time  she  could  stretch  across,  she  would,  most  likely,  find  a  S.  S.  \V.  wind  ami  V 
W.  current  to  run  up  with,  along  a  weather  shore,  to  Buonoa  Ayrea,  or  to  Montn  yrjii' ' 
if  bound  thither,  pasamg  to  the  westward  of  the  Bank  of  Archimedes,  in  about  6  riitliDi,,' 
water  :  or,  if  the  mount  should  be  seen  in  good  time,  never  to  bring  it  to  bear  to  timwe 
ward  of  north,  tdl  within  5  leagues  of  it. 

"  In  standing  to  the  southward  from  abreaat  of  Cnpe  St.  Mary,  with  tho  wind  suuth 
westeily,  a  ahip  will  have  from  Id  to  24  or  25  fathoms  when  in  tho  latitude  of  L^i  ' 
and  about  12  or  13  leagues  tu  the  eastward  of  it :  and,  making  a  S.  S.  E.  coiii.se  tli' 
water  will  ihon  shoal  to  18.  10,  12,  or  11  fathoms,  in  crossing  tlie  ridge,  wliicli  is  giMn-rnllv 
composed  of  aaiid,  grey  speckled,  mixed  with  atones,  herealiouts;  after  which  tiie  (lemh 
incieiises  gradually  lo  35  or  30  fathoms,  over  a  sandy  bottom,  in  latitude  35'^  10  S  nl 
longitude  53"  25'  W.  In  t»-o  latitude  of  36°  S  ,  and  15  o-  20  miles  failhar  ,o  \\\n\m. 
ward,  you  will  deepen  off  tho  bunk  entirely.  A  ship  having  got  as  far  to  the  south  iis.ifi^ 
S.,  may  consider  herself  in  the  fair  way  tor  proceeding  upon  the  south  side  of  the  Eiiuii  i, 
Bank ;  and,  if  the  wind  serve,  a  true  west  course  may  be  made  good. 

"  In  latitude  30°  S.,  the  depth  of  water  on  the  meridian  of  Capo  St.  IMary  is  33  (•,[1,. 
oma,  and  the  liottom  fine  grey  sand,  like  ground  pep[ier. 

"  Keeping  still  lo  the  westward,  on  that  parallel  of  36'^  .S.,  tho  depth  derreaapsto  19 
or  \n  fathoms,  true,  south  of  Lobos;  and  for  10  leagues  farther  you  have  fioin  thiitto  l.i 
fathoms.  But  if  from  tlie  latitude  of  30°  S.,  on  tho  meridian  of  Lobus,  you  iiiiil(„|,  \y 
by  N.,  or  \V.  by  N.  i  N.  course,  true,  you  will  ahual  the  water  to  8  or  7i  fiiliionn  in 
latitude  35°  45'  .S.,  ou  tho  meriiiian  of  the  English  Bank.  The  cpiality  of  thu  ijnitum 
genernlly.  in  this  track,  is  sandy,  mixed  with  sni  ill  stones;  and  the  nearer  yoti  niipioiieli 
to  the  ridge  of  the  English  Bank,  it  is  intermixed  with  bibi  of  shells,  and  soinutiinej  vvitii 
clay  or  mud. 

'•  From  latitude  35°  45'  S.  duo  S.  of  tho  English  Bank,  a  W.  N.  W.  true  course  to 
latitude  35-'  33'  S.,  will  bring  Monte  Video  to  bn.ir  N.,  by  tho  world,  in  abiMii  (J',  fiihomj 
mud,  at  the  distance  of  13  leagues  from  Point  Piedras;  and  from  this  |)o-iiti(iii'thi!  saina 
true  course  may  bo  made  to  raise  the  land  abuiit  Point  did  Iiidio,  if  b.innil  up  to  liuciioj 
Ayres;  orN.  VV.,  or  more  northerly,  to  get  sight  of  the  Monte  Vidi'o  ;  Invin^  ilm.  n.^rj 
to  the  set  of  the  current,  up^or  down  the  river,  that  you  inay  neither  be  liorsml  on  ihe 
S.  E.  tail  of  the  Ortiz  Flats,  nor  on  tho  western  part  0/  tho  Arcliinmdes  Hank,  i".,, 
bottom  above  this  is  soft  mud,  or  cl>iy,  in  the  chuiinels  tit  for  safe  iinchornge.  In  latiiiiilti 
35°  30'  S.,  or  thereabouts,  and  duo  south  of  the  Archiin  des  B.iok,  orsoiiin  inilos  fntlw 
to  the  eastward,  I  have  been  told  by  some  poraons  they  Imvo  hud  as  little  iis  1  fiitlionij, 
hard  ground. 

"  Ships  leaving  Monte  Video,  to  proceed  up  to  Buenos  Ayres,  must  he  very  (iitnniite 
to  the  lend;  and  the  course  steered  acroaa  tho  river  must  be  very  carefully  rc^nliiieii  liy 
the  set  of  current  at  the  time.  If  the  weather  be  aufficiently  clear,  tlie  iiiomit  is  the  must 
sure  guide,  keeping  it  by  an  azimuth  compasa,  on  the  miignetic  bearing  N.  E.  bv  N,; 
Bod  when  it  sinks  to  an  eye  in  the  top,  a  more  weaterly  course  may  ho  steeriMl  to  raij« 
the  land  about  Point  del  Indio.  This  direction  ia  intended  to  apply  parlirnliirly  to  iVigate.s 
or  any  ships  drawing  mure  than  16  feet  water;  because  it  is  not  ndvisnhle  for  theinio 
cross  the  tail  of  the  Ortiz  flats  much  farther  to  the  westward  than  a  true  S.  W.  course 
fruHi  the  mount  will  take  them ;  fur  with  a  low  river,  i  have  had  barely  3  (  fathoms,  in 
the  Nereus,  with  the  mount  bearing  N.  35"  E.,  by  compass,  distant  10  Imiguos,  At 
other  times,  I  have  aunk  the  mount  on  a  N.  53"^  E.  magnetic  bearing,  and  had  03  much 
as  34  tiilhoms  water ;  but  the  river  was  then  well  tilled. 

"  The  Ortiz  Bank  extouds  from  lat.  34*^  25'  S.  to  lat.  35°  15'  S.    Ships  passing  k- 


'.^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


563 


ho 


eroatest 


Jronnwich; 
"t  Biienos 
;<  4-.'  I'liHt  6 
ntern  is  10 
biisK  of  the 
mmdy  buys, 
s  Willi  nasi) ; 
i  to  ships  in 

B'lnk.  espe. 
.■<sing  L(,bo9, 
tlie  north  to 
,  rninlit  curry 
I  lit  the  time 
lie  wentwiirj 
lid  th«  north 
io,  wlierc,  hy 
wind  mill  xj. 
Mdiiln  Viiieo, 
uiit  5  liitlioins 
ir  to  tha  west- 

3  wind  south. 
udn  ut'  Luboj, 
',.  cciiivrte,  the 
ell  is  generally 
liicli  Iho  depth 

'f-  w  a.,  1111(1 

lar  10  thu  oust.  I 
w  south  lis  :)(i3 
of  tlie  English 

tary  is  33  fath- 

flcrenses  to  19 
(iin  that  to  1.) 
iiiiikt)  u  W, 
falhoiiH,  ia 
f  tlio  iioitora, 
you  iipproiicb 
iiiL'tiiiienvith 

true  course  to 

IDUt  O.j  I'.ltllDIUj, 

itiitn  the  same 

ll|l  to  liui'llOJ 

1114  ilue  re^iirj 

liorsHil  oil  ihe 

15. ink.    Tiw 

;o.     Ill  liititiiiie 

mill!!*  t'lrtliiT 

e  lis  I  fitthuiiis, 

vory  iiUentiie 
ly  ri'^ulaleii  by 
iDiiiit  is  the  most 

N.  !•:.  hy  N.; 
stctTiMl  to  raise 
hirlytotVigiites, 
iihlf  tor  them  10 
S.  W.  course 
y  3  \  fathoms,  in 
10  leiiguos.  At 
nd  had  as  much 

Ibips  passing  be- 


4 


^,„1(.  On  tlie  L.mco  nnnK  ^rne  Biniiiinst  ot  the  Urtiz,  nnd  the  most  south 
the  wreck  of  a  veHsol,  the  must  of  which  serves  iis  .1  honcon,  lyins;  nbout  l"^ 
El  Embudo.  and  8  or  10  miles  west  from  the  S.  K.  buoy  on  the  oltiz,  imd  1 
onflilhtT  side,  us  there  iire  .3  futhoms  very  neiir  it  nil  round,  iind  also  four  I 


iween  the  Oriiii!  nnd  the  south  shore,  hnve  only  to  keep  the  Innd  in  sight,  to  clenr  the 
bank.    On  the  Lhico  Bn"Mthe  sjimnost  of  the  Ortiz,  nnd  the  most  southern.)  there  ia 

3  miles  oust  of 
miiy  be  passed 

onfliuii'i  n..... ■ "  ............... ^  .,.,...  ,1  ,,„  ,uu,„,.  una  niso  tour  huoyw.    There 

i,,go(.d  piissiise  botweiMi  the  Ortiz  Bunk  nnd  Chico,  with  nothing  loss  than  4  futhoms: 
(lie  Ortiz  "ide  is  the  deepest. 

..SoundiiiKH  o"  npproHchini;  the  south  side  of  tiie  Ortiz  Bnnk  nro  reculnr,  nnd  shoulen 
miiuHllv.  When  you  get  hurd  bottom,  keep  off  n  little  iind  deepen  into  34.  4  or  5  futh- 
;„„,9olt  mud.  riie  npproiich  to  tho  Chico  is  not  sufo  on  the  ( )iti/,  side,  us  you  ijet  from 
5  into  2  fithoms  directly,  in  some  phices,  which  makes  it  snfest  to  keep  on  the  Ortiz 
M,lo«f  tiie  middle  pussuge.  The  middle  puasnao  is  soft  mud  until  very  near  the  bunks  • 
the  pasHHiio  between  the  Cliioo  und  tho  shore  is  for  the  most  pnrt  soft  mud  but  ia 
;„any  places  it  will  cliungo  suddenly,  nnd  nppears  to  be  formed  of  hard  and  soft  ridgog 
,lterimf<'ly-  '^  "»  will  curry  54.  ,'J J,  nnd  4  futhoms  in  the  c'.nnnel,  nnd  the  pussnge  is  from 
{ to6  miles  broud.      1  ides  rise  in  the  river  nbout  5  feet  in  settled  wenther.  Tides 

..For Ihe  di.xtunce  of  full  17  miles  to  the  south  enstwnrd  of  the  Oitiz  Beacon  there  is 
jpnerully  ""  '"ore,  nnd  often  le^s  than  Si  futhoms;  the  bottom  tough  clny  nearest  the 
bank;  and  in  some  places  farther  to  the  south-eastward,  soft  mud,  not  more  than  3^ 
fathoms. 

,.  After  sinking  the  mount  nbout  N.  E.  by  N..  nnd  having  34  futhoms,  a  W.  S.  W.  course 
willmi»e  the  land  (if  tho  weather  is  clenr)  about  Point  del  Indio  to  the  eye  at  the  mast- 
heiul;  and  probably  you  will  not  have  more  than  3.i,  or  at  best,  34  fathoms.  The  mount 
and  land  near  I'oiiit  del  Indio  are  sometimes  visible  at  the  same  time. 

..poiiitdel  Indio  is  in  latitude  about  IVt''  16'  S.,  and  0°  .56'  W.  of  the  Monte  Video, 
from  which  it  bears  S  63°  W..  by  the  world,  distnnt  50  miles.  There  is  little  more  than 
3  fathoms  at  the  distance  of  10  or  U  miles,  when  the  river  is  in  n  moan  state  ;  further  to 
the  southward,  and  off  Point  Piedras,  there  is  only  that  depth  14  or  15  miles  off  shore. 
Very  gi'-nt  caution,  therefore,  is  required  In  approaching  if,  nnd  n  constant  lookout 
ihnuld  be  kept  for  tho  land,  as  it  is  very  low,  and  cannot  be  seen  further  than  12  or  13 
luileii,  in  nny  weather,  from  the  deck  of  n  frigate. 

.■When  the  Innd  is  barely  raised  to  un  eye  19  or  20  feet  nbove  the  surface  of  the  water, 
aW.  N.  W.  magnetic  course  will  lend  along  shore,  between  it  and  the  south  part  of  the 
Oiiiz,  which  is  di-itant  about  14  miles  from  if.  and  between  them  there  is  no  where 
niortf  water  tlian  34.  but  mostly  3^  fathoms.  With  a  hii-h  river,  I  have  had  a  quarter 
less 4  fathoms.     The  nearer  the  Orliz,  the  deeper  the  water. 

"In  steering  up  \V.  N.  W.,  with  the  land  seen  from  the  deck,  (if  clear  weuther.)  you 
will  have  .^4  or  .'H  fathoms,  yet  if  the  river  is  low.  perliups  some  casts  of  3  fathoms,  uud 
raiseareiniirkiihle  cdump  of  trees,  called  Kmbudo,  which  are  much  taller  tliun  the  rest, 
hishostnt  the  west  end,  and  lie  in  Int.  35*^  fi'  S.,  and  in  long.  1°  16'  .30  '  VV.  of  the  Monte 
Vi^^eo,  or  .57'  311'  K.  of  the  cntliedral  of  Buenos  Ayres.  At  some  distance  to  the  wost- 
wurd  of  tlio  Embudo  trees,  there  is  another  clump  about  the  same  height;  but  these 
bein;;  highest  at  the  eust  end,  are  sufficiently  distinguished  not  to  be  mistaken  for  the  true 
Embudo. 

"When  in  3i  or  3i  futhoms,  the  Embudo  trees  bear,  by  compass,  W.  S.  W.,  the  S. 
E.cnilof  tlie  Chico  Bank  will  beur  W.  N.  VV..  or  thoreulmuts,  10  or  11  miles  from  you; 
and  you  must  now  determine  from  the  wuter  that  your  ship  draws,  and  tlie  then  direc- 
ti,inof  the  wind  and  sttite  of  the  weather,  whether  you  will  pass  between  the  Chico  and 
the  shore,  or  between  the  Orti/.  and  the  Chico.     I  hiivo  passed  up  und  down  several 
times  liei ween  tho  Chico  und  the  south  shore  in  the  Nereus,  lightened  in  her  diuft  to  18 
fect:i  inches;  but  1  would  never  attempt  itauaiii  from  choice,  now  I  am  better  acquaint- 
ed with  the  middle  channel  iietween  the  Chico  and  the  Ortiz,  nnd  have  every  reason  to 
jbelieve  that  the  miildle  ground  some  charts  lay  down  in  it,  does  not  exist. 
I   ":V  ship  not  drawing  more  thim  15  feet  may  take  either  passage,  nnd  of  the  two,  ought 
Iperliaps  to  prefer  that  to  the  southward  of  the  (^hico  Bank,  particularly  if  the  wind 
iliould  be  well  to  the  southward,  as  slie  might  take  her  soundings  from  the  weather 
ihore,  and  keeping  in  somewhat  more  thiin  her  own  draft,  run  up  along  it,  und  by  not 
eepening  above  ."]  fathoms,  would  ensure  being  to  the  southward  of  the  Chico. 
"The  S.  E.  end  of  the  Chico  Bunk  boars  from  the  Embudo  trees  N.  32°  E.,  true, 
lutant  10  miles,  und  E.  9°  N.,  13  miles  from  Atalaya  church.     Its  latitude  there  is  34° 
fr  30"  S.,  und  longitude  1°  9'  W.  of  the  Monte  Video.     This  bnnk  runs  in  tho  direc- 
on  of  N.  Si-"  W.,  true,  or  N.  65°  W.,  by  compass,  about  13  miles  to  its  N.  W.  end, 
liich  is  in  latitude  34°  48'  50  '  S.,  and  47'  E.  of  Buenos  Ayres  cathedral.     From  this 
\V.  end,  in  14  feet  water,  Atalaya  church  bears  S.  14=  W.,  distant  11  miles;  and 
(lint  Santiago,  forming  the  Ensenudn  de   Burragun,  bears  W.  4°  N.  14  miles  from  it. 
bo  breadth  of  the  Chico  does  not  exceed  12  miles,  or  perhaps  n  mile  and  a  half,  and  its 
Inner  edge  is  about  9  miles  from  the  shore.     The  water  between  it  and  the  shore  is  no 
here  more  than  34  futhoms,  and  the  deepest  water  is  ulong  the  inner  edge  of  the  shoal, 
ithe  distaace  of  half  a  mile  I'rum  it,  ur  less  in  some  places.    About  midway  between  it 


«»WWfW- 


mr 


mmw 


564  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

and  ibe  ihore  there  it  a  quarter  less  three  fnthoniB.  On  aome  parts  of  the  Chico  there 
w  very  little  water,  and  within  the  limits  I  have  aBRigoed  to  it,  do  more  than  14  t'eot 
There  was,  tur  some  years,  the  must  of  a  vessel  called  the  Pandora,  which  was  wrecked 
on  this  sIiuhI,  in  lut.  34°  54'  S.,  about  5  miles  from  its  S.  E.  end,  whicli  proved  an  ex- 
cellent bfiicon  to  guide  ships  passing  it  un  either  side ;  but  it  has  disappeared.  It  ig  very 
necessary  that  three  buoys  should  be  placed  on  this  dangerous  ehoal,  to  mark  its  ceotre 
nud  each  end. 

"To  Hhips  drawing  less  than  15  feet,  it  is  only  further  necessary  to  recommend  care 
and  attention  on  approaching  Point  St.  lago,  which  forms  busby  and  distinct;  and  whea 
it  is  brought  to  bear  to  the  south-westward,  liaul  out  into  the  stream  of  3i  fnthoroi  tu 
round  outside  the  spit,  which  runs  about  N.  VV.,  by  composs,  from  Point  St.  lugo.'at 
least  10  or  11  miles;  its  extreme  point,  in  2  fathoms,  being  5  miles  from  the  shore, 
When  two  remarkable  trees  on  Point  Larn  are  brouglit  to  bear  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  or  S,  S  I 
E.,  by  compass,  you  are  past  the  spit.  This  mark  will  also  lead  a  ship  of  that  draft  of 
water  clear  to  ttie  westward  of  the  spit,  in  running  in  towards  the  Ensennda. 

"  Afti-r  [lassing  the  spitotF  Point  St.  Iuro,  in  3i  fathoms,  a  W.  by  N.  northerly  course  i 
by  compass,  will  lead  up  to  the  outer  road  of  Buenos  Ayres,  where  any  ship  may  safdy 
anchor  in  the  water  she  draws,  if  tlie  river  is  low, 

*'  Frigates,  or  any  vessels  drawing  more  than  16  feet  water,  should  barely  raise  the  l_ ., 
about  Point  del  Indio  to  the  eye  on  deck,  and  borrow  nearest  the  Ortiz ;  more  particulurlv  I 
when  the  Embudo  trees  are  brought  to  bear  as  far  as  S.  W.  by  W.,  (magnetic;)  for,  with 
the  Embudo  bearing  from  S.  W.  to  S.  S.  W.,  the  bottom  is  flat,  off  to  3  fathoms,  full? 
^miles  from  the  shore,  and  chiefly  hard  clay.     Thereihre,  when  the  Embudo  trees  beor  W, 
S.  W.,  by  compass,  and  you  are  about  9  or  10  miles  ofl'  shore,  in  3i  fathoms,  if  you  have 
a  leading  wind,  haul  to  the  N.  W.  by  W.,  or  more  northerly ;  as  may  be  required  to  clear 
the  S.  E.  tail  of  the  Chico,  on  which  a  red  buoy  is  placed,  and  you  will  soon  deepen  your 
water  to  4  fathoms,  and  more  in  the  middle  channel,  between  the  Chico  and  the  Ortiz  I 
Shottl.     The  fair  course  through,  between  them,  is  about  N.  W.  by  W.  •!  W.,  (mngnetic,) 
and  in  mid-channel  the  land  can  just  be  distinguished  from  the  quarter  deck  of  a  frigate. 
Wlien  the  Embudo  trees  bear  S.  20''  W.,  by  composs,  you  will  be  abreast  of  the  S.  E, 
end  of  the  Chico,  and  may  either  take  your  slioal  soundings  along  its  northern  or  outer  I 
edge,  to  about  a  quarter  less  four,  if  the  wind  is  southerly,  or  if  the  wind  be  northerly, 
or  easterly,  borrow  into  a  convenient  depth  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  Ortiz.    I  be- 
lieve the  breadth  of  tliis  middle  channel  may  be  five  or  six  miles,  and  the  depth  of  water  | 
from  4  to  5|),  and  even  6  fathoms,  in  the  fair  way,  about  the  N.  W.  port  of  it,  and  nbr 
that  end  of  the  Chico.      Tlie  quality  of  ground  all  the  way  through  this  char- 
generally  soft  mud,  and  fit  for  safe  anchorogo. 

"The  iN.  W.  pitch  of  the  Chico  Bonk,  on  which  is  a  red  buoy,  as  before  met 
being  passed,  and  the  depth  of  water  5  or  5i  futhoms,  you  may  steer  by  conipnsa  \V.  by  I 
N.  i  N.,  or  W.  by  N.,  for  Buenos  Ayres,  taking  care  not  to  shoal  under  quarter  less  four  I 
otf  *Enseuoda,  till  Point  Lara  trees  bear  S.  S.  E.  A  little  more  than  half  way  from  I 
Point  Lara  to  Buenos  Ayres  there  are  two  other  remarkable  trees.  When  moored  off  I 
Buenos  Ayres,  in  the  Nereus,  in  19  feet  water,  and  the  bottom  soft  mud,  these  trees  bore,  I 
by  compass,  S.  17"  E.,  the  cathedral,  S.  G7°  W.,  and  the  spiro  of  the  Rocoletu  ConvcDt, 
S.  7(i°  W.  Variation,  12i  E.  P.  HEYWOOD." 


■^'. 


RIVER  PI.ATA  TO  RIO  IVEGRO. 

THE  coast  of  the  Pampas,  or  plains  of  Buenos  Ayres,  extends  from  the  River  Plata 
to  the  Colorado  or  Ked  River,  represented  in  Int.  39°  60'  S.  It  is  entirely  (hit,  iind  des- 
titute of  harbors.  The  interior  is  one  vast  plain,  mostly  covered  with  grass  and  clover, 
the  food  of  millions  of  horned  cattle.  The  maritime  part,  next  the  sea,  has  been  called 
by  the  Spaniards  the  Pays  del  Diable.or  Devil's  country,  (no  very  attractive  appellation,) 
yet  the  coust  may  be  approached  with  safety,  ns  the  soundings  are  regular.  I 

Rio  Negro.        RIO  NEGRO.— In  coming  from  the  eastward  to  Rio  Negro,  the  navigator  should 
endeavor  to  make  the  land  in  about  the  parallel  of  40°  52'  S.  and  longitude  e^-'  15' W„| 
when  he  will  first  see  Point  Raza,  which  will  be  readily  known  by  three  remarliablel 
hummocks.     After  approaching  to  within  one  league  of  this  point,  he  may  steer  eouth-l 
west  towards  Rio  Negro,  taking  care  not  to  come  into  less  than  6  or  8  fathoms  water, 
with  a  sandy  bottom.     The  shore  is  a  continuance  of  low  sand-hills,  interspersed  with 
heath  and  brushwood,  until  you  approach  tlie  river,  where  the  hillocks  become  more  ele- 
vated, and  are  composed  of  clean  white  sand,  lying  in  ridges  or  unduhtions,  like  the  waves 
of  the  ocean. 


'  There  is  a  good  harbor  at  this  placa. 


^^■•ii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


A6ff 


About  4  alloi  aouth  of  Point  Rbzb,  is  a  iingulnr  hillocit  of  brunhwood,  hnving  imall 

ibrubB  towards  the  east  eod,  whicii  from  the  sea  appears  lilie  a  drove  of  coMle.  Eight 
miles  to  the  south  and  west  of  this,  is  a  ronmrl<abio  gap,  about  'ii  miles  back  of  thi«  beach. 
A»you  opproach  the  ontrunce  of  Rio  Negro,  the  range  of  white  sand-hillH  will  terminate, 
ind  the  mouth  of  the  river  bearing  W.  S.  W„  appears  high  and  bluff  on  Harrnncn,  which 
iihigh  and  bluff,  terminating  in  a  perpendicular  point,  and  this  point  is  a  table  land,  for 
4  or  5  miles  to  the  westward. 

To  enter  the  Harbor  of  Rio  Negro,  without  a  pilot,  the  south-east  channel  is  to  be  pre- 
lerred  j  and  you  must  keep  along  in  4,  S.  or  0  fathoms  of  woter,  until  you  bring  Point  de 
Mnine  to  bear  N.  W.  Then  steer  for  the  mouth  of  the  river,  observing  to  keep  Point 
Welcome,  which  is  a  remarkable  bluff  promontory,  about  10  yards  opon  of  a  low  point 
off  the  pilot's  house.  Those  morks  are  distinctly  seen,  when  Point  do  Maine,  the  east- 
ern point  of  the  river,  bears  N.  W.  But  beware  of  the  flood  tide,  which  sets  strong  over 
the  north  bank  ;  and  if  your  vessel  draws  more  than  10  feet  of  water,  you  must  not  at- 
tempt to  enter  until  three-quarters  of  flood,  when  you  will  have  from  2  to  2i  fathoms  of 
wnter  between  the  banks,  which  will  deepen  as  you  approach  Point  de  Maine.  The 
brealiers  on  the  bank  are  distinctly  seen,  and  with  a  southerly  wind  it  frequently  breaks 
all  round  the  channel.  Hoving  passed  through  between  the  north  and  south  banks,  you 
will  find  4,  5,  and  C  fathoms  of  water,  but  you  must  bo  careful  ond  keep  the  eastern  point 
on  board  until  you  ore  inside  of  the  point  of  the  borras ;  by  which  means  you  will  clear 
the  inner  bank,  which  extends  two-thirds  of  its  length  outside  the  harbor's  mouth.  la 
this  river,  nt  the  town,  there  are  about  two  hours  flood  tide,  and  commonly  about  ten 
hours  of  ebb  tide,  frequently  running  ot  the  rate  of  five  or  six  miles  nn  hour.  But  within 
the  mouth  of  the  river  the  flood  runs  four  hours,  and  the  ebb  tide  eight  hours,  at  the  rata 
of  three  and  a  half  miles  an  hour.  It  is  high  water  at  the  bar,  on  the  days  of  new  and  High  water. 
full  moon,  at  a  quarter  past  11 ;  and  the  water  rises  there  11  feet  on  the  spring  tides,  and 
8  feet  on  the  neap  tides;  but  when  the  wind  blows  strongly  from  the  S.  E.  the  tide  rises 
from  12  to  14  feet.  There  is  a  regular  tide  along  the  coast,  6  hours  flood  and  6  hours 
ebb,  but  the  flood  tide  inclines  rather  towards  the  shore,  about  N.  E.  by  N.,  at  the  rate  of 
2  or  3  miles  an  hour.  Consequently,  in  entering  the  Rio  Negro,  particular  attention 
muBt  bo  paid  to  the  currents  and  tides,  which  set  strongly  to  the  N.  £.,  round  the  Point 
de  Maine. 

Id  this  river  refreshments  of  all  kinds  can  be  procured. 


EAST  AIVD  WE§IT  PATAGOIVIA,  STRAITS  OF  ITIA- 
«ALHAe.\S,  Am D  THE  SEA  COAST  OF 

TIEURA  DEL  FUE«0.  | 

[From  the  Survey  of  Capt.  P.  P.  King,  R.  N.,  F.  R.  S.,  &c.] 
COAST  OF  PATAGONIA,  FROM  PORT  ST.  ELENA  TO  CAPE  VIRGINS. 

[In  the  following  directiona,  all  the  bearings,  which  are  not  othRrwise  distinguished,  are  corrected  for 
vuriation.  The  lutitudeH  being  all  aouth,  and  the  longitudes  west  of  Greenwich,  and  the  variatiuneast- 
erly,  tlio  distinguishing  letters,  id.,  W.,  and  E.,  have  been  omitted.] 

PORT  ST.  ELENA.-— The  plan  in  the  Admiralty  Chart,  which  is  a  copy  of  the  Port  St. 
excellent  and  correct  survey  by  the  ofliRers  of  the  Spanish  ships,  Atrevida  and  Descu-  Elena, 
biertn,  is  sufiiciont  for  the  navigator :  there  is  also  a  plan  in  Weddel's  Voyage,  that  is 
equally  correct.  The  harbor  may  be  easily  known  by  some  hummocky  hills  on  the  N. 
£.  projecting  point,  on  tlie  eastern  of  which  is  a  remarkable  stone  that  appears  to  have 
been  placed  there  as  a  monumental  record,  but  which  is  a  natural  production.  The  best 
anchorage  is  at  the  N.  W.  corner  of  the  bay,  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  but  not  too  near  to  the 
shore,  for  when  the  sea  is  heavy,  the  ground  swell  breaks  for  some  distance  off.  In 
working  into  the  bay  the  2  fathom  bank  must  be  avoided,  for  which  the  low  island  is  a 
good  mark. 

The  projecting  head,  at  the  north  end  of  the  bay,  is  in 

Latitude 44°  30'  45" 

Longitude,  by  the  mean  of  13  chronometers  from  Goritti,  (River  Plate,) 65     17  25 

Variation  of  the  compass 19     10 

H-  W.  at  full  and  change 4  o'clock. 

Rise  at  springs , 17  feet. 


•"wmmffwi^ 


666 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  wator  thnt  is  contained  in  the  wells,  the  situations  of  which  are  given  from  M 
Weddel's  plnn,  is  too  brbckisli  to  bo  worlh  consideration  ;  nor  is  there  Hiiy  fresh  wut  ' 
to  be  obtained  from  any  part  of  the  hari)or.     Of  fuel  a  temporary  supply  jnay  be  di°' 
cured  from  the  £r>mll  bhrubl>y  tree  that  is  described  in  the  account  of  PortDesire  wlii  li 
is  tol>  I'libly  abundant  here.     Guanacoes,  ostriches,  armadillos,  and  the  cavin,  or  Pat 
gonia  hare,  are  t'>  be  procured,  as  are  also  wild  '*ucks,  partridges,  snipes,  and  mils-  hnj 
fish  seem  to  l)o  scarce.     The  guanaco  affords  an   excellent  lood,  but  it  is  difficult  to  nn 
proach  them:  one  that  was  shot  by  us.  v  hen  cleaned  and  skinned,  weighed  168  pound 
The  Indians  sometimes  visit  this  part  of  (he  coast,  which  is  used  by  them  princ  puHy  fcl 
burying  their  dead. 

In  approaching  Port  St.  Elena  from  the  north  ivard,  there  are  several  rocks  nenrth 
shore,  which  are  very  little  above  f  lie  water,  and  there  is  a  considerable  reef  in  the  offin? 
Biluated  -li  miles.  S.  78"  E.,  from  Cape  Raso,  and  N.  .01«  E.,  8  miles  from  the  N.  e' 
trend  of  the  nort!  head  of  the  port.  It  is  a  dry  rock,  and  is  near  the  extremity  of  a 
ridge,  which  probaoly  projects  off  from  the  latter  point, 'or  there  are  two  dry  rucks  in 
the  same  line  of  bearins.',  one  li  mile,  and  the  other  3 J  miles  from  the  point,  besides 
several  reefs  for  2  or  3  miles  off;  great  caution  should  therefore  be  used  in  iipproiichiiu 
the  coast,  as  the  water  is  deep,  and  if  becalmed,  it  may  be  necessary  to  anclior,  wlijJ 
will  be  in  at  least  30  fathoms  water. 

Should  the  above  reef  bo  as  continuous  as  it  appears,  there  should  be  good  riding  in  the 
bay,  between  Cape  Raso  and  I'ort  St.  Elena. 

Between  the  south  head  of  Port  St.  Elena  and  Cape  Two  Bays,  are  two  bights  in  the 
coast,  the  soutiiernmost  of  which  is  coiisiderai)le,  and  may  probably  afford  a  good  anchor- 
age. Capo  Two  Bays  is  a  rounded  point;  the  hill  close,  to  the  sea,  on  the  most  project- 
ing part  of  the  capo,  being  in  lat.  44*^  ,58' :  the  small  i.^let  of  Arce,  to  the  south-enst  of 


the  cape,  is  in  lat.  45''  0'  50",  and  long.  65'^ 


JO'  yj ' 


and  Raso  Island  is  in  lat.  45°  C 


30" 


'jng.  (io"  20' 11". 

The  coast  trends  westerly  round  Cape  Two  Bays,  and  forms  the  northern  part  of  St. 
George's  (iulf. 

The  southern  limit  of  St.  George's  Gulf,  Cape  Three  Points,  is  very  easily  discovered 
at  sea,  by  its  very  level  outline,  being  a  long  range  of  table  land,  higher  tliiin  iiny  parti 
near  it,  visible  from  the  deck  for  more  than  'JO  miles;  and  to  the  soutli-eiist,  <loliiched 
but  near  the  range,  there  is  a  conical  hill,  which  is  easily  discerned  from  the  tiortl'waid 
but  from  the  norlli-eastt  is  not  seen,  being  conceaicd  by  the  ranges  of  land  hcliitid  it  in  i 
south-west.     At  fii  miles  to  '"e  south-east  of  Cape  Three  Points,  is  Cape;  bliinco,  u  low  I 
rugged  tongue  of  lanii,  ter^  iinaftMj  by  a  rounded  but  very  rugged  hillock,  and  two  snialkr 
ones;  which,  when  first  seen,  appear  to  1)0  islands  detatched  from  the  const      The  neck  i 
of  land  vvliii'h  forms  the  communication  with   the  coast,  is  low  and  sandy,  and  probiibly 
offers,  on  its  south  side,  shelter  from  southerly  winds. 

There  are  several  shoals  off  this  part  of  the  coast,  that  at  low  water  would  doubtless  be 
dangerous.  His  Majesty's  ship  Adventure,  passed  over  two,  and  had  not  less  lliiinfive 
fathoms,  hut  possibly  at  low  water  the  depth  nniy  he  considerably  less  ;  tliey  nre  thrown 
up  by  the  foi'ce  of  the  tide,  which  sweeps  round  the  cape,  into  and  >ut  of  St.  Ueorge's 
Gulf,  witli  grrat  strength. 

The  north  and  south  endsof  the  norlhern  shoal  bear  respectively  t<  mi  Cape  Tiiree  I 
Poirts  and  Cape   Blanco,  east,  distant  from   the  former  7  miles,  and  fro  n  \\u'  hitler  live 
miles ;  conseipienlly,  it  extends  in  a  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  K.  direction,  foroi  niiltis:  it  is  | 
scarcely  a  (|Uarler  of  a  mile  wide. 

The  north  end  of  the  southern  shoal  hears  S.  75**  E.,  7  miles  from  Cape  Blaaco,  i 
expends  in  neiirly  a  south  direction  for  2  miles.     Between  these  shoals  there  :j  u  piissugo  I 
9  iiiili's  wide,  and  tlu!  depth  gradually  increases  to  more  tliiin  15  fnthoins. 

Within  the  outer  shoals  are  two  others,  setMi  by  the  S|)aiiiards  ;  they  are  Iniil  down 
from  the  authority  of  a  chart  communicated  to  me  by  Don  Felipe  Bau/a.  'I'lie  uuler  | 
northiMii  shoal  is  probably  the  one  noticed  l)y  ('oiiunodore  Byron,*  who  desciilii'il  it  to  bear 
from  Cape  Blanco  W.  S.  W.  i  .S.,  'J  blagues,  the  depth  diininishiiig,  as  he  iippniiichcilit  I 
from  the  eastward,  from  13  to  7  fiithoms.  There  is,  however,  nmch  shoiil  (iidiiiKJ  to  the 
north-east;  fir  in  the  year  182!),  havincr  approachtMl  the  land,  and  b(Miig  14  luih-s  I'nnn 
Cape  Three  Points,  bearings  '.]><•■'  W.,  magnetic,  the  di-pth  rather  suddeiily  ^rrrciiseJ 
from  4G  to  14  fathoms,  pebbly  bottom,  so  that  the  foul  ground  extetids  for  14  ur  16  miles 


•Shoai.s  okk  Cape  Hr.ANco. — Mr.  Siitipsna's  Jouriiid  snys   '•  Foainl  varioassouiidiiiiis, tiicsboabl 
WHter  7  tiitliotiis,  on  a  liimk.     'rhi-a  Ciipn  It  iiiiro  lioro  S.  \V.  Iiy  VV.  J  W.,'-'  Ieiif,'iies,  iiinl  llii'  soutliiiioil 
land  ill  "inlit,  so  illi.     'I'liis  hIioiiI  sIiowh  il-:cll  by  ii  nrriit  ripplinf;;  v.k  IiiiiI  12  liilliunis  williDiil  ir  (■!(l^o  lii 
till!  niipliii;;   iiiiil  worr  soon  <;vpr  it,  iiiiil  slri  rt'ij  ilirccily  in  lor  thu  luad.     'I'lio  wiiler  buoii  aiU'r  di!t'|iom'J  | 
vcrv  tn«l ;  at  our  loiiKut"  tVoiii  llic  slioii'  w(-  liii.j  42  fulliciiiis." 

'J'lll'^<lllIld!'.  ihiTcCori',  ili'it  ilio  Adv  iinirc  piisscl,  iin-  llii'  snamas  dio  above.     Ilawkcswortb  iiimdnubt- 
IcHH  iiiMilr  an  I'lT'iiH'iios  1'r.tracl  froi:)  die  'Joiaiaujorc's  Juuraul,  ia  desuribiag  thuiii  lu  be  luur  iiittouJ i)(  | 
Iwu  lcui;u"a  ulV  tlic  uliuru. 


••m^mffrmmm^ 


mmmm^i^mmmimmmmmimmmi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST    PILOT 

to  the  noith-on-.r  of  the  ciipe,  the  ed^e  of  the  bank,  (14  fathoms,)  being  about  8  or  10 
miles  within  the  soundings  of  50  f.ithoms.  On  approaching  iv,  the  quality  of  the  bottom 
becomes  irroguliir,  and  changes  fioin  ooze  to  sand,  and  the  shohl  patches  are  pebbly  ;  so 
tliat  by  attention  to  the  soundings  and  nature  of  the  bottom,  these  shoals  may  be  easily 
avoided. 

A  good  mark  to  avoid  them  is,  not  to  approach  so  near  to  the  cape  as  to  see  the  rugged 
hillock  of  Cape  Blanco,  and  to  keep  the  high  land  of  Cape  Three  Points,  which  is  visible 
from  the  deck,  about  20  miles,  on  the  horizon. 

Thu  flood,  or  northerly  tide,  ceased  in  the  offing  at  4h.  15m.  after  the  moon's  passage, 
which  agrees  very  well  with  the  establishment  olthe  tide  off  P»r.^nin  Island  ;  but  in  t'he 
neigbborhood  of  the  cape,  and  among  the  shoals,  the  tides  may  be  less  regular;  they  pro- 
duct? strong  ripplings,  and  set  with  considerable  strength. 

There  is  reason  to  think  that  the  two  capes"  are  laid  down  erroneously  in  latitude,  and 
that  the  distance  between  them  should  bo  greater;  for,  by  a  latitude  observed  at  sea, 
compared  with  good  bearings  of  the  two  capes,  the  error  of  the  chart  would  be  seven 
miles  too  southerly.  We  had  no  good  opportunity  of  investigating  this  point,  and  the  si- 
tuation assigned  to  them  is  taken  from  the  chart  communicated  to  me  by  Don  Felipe 
Bauzft,  above  referred  to. 

The  coast  line  between  Cape  Blanco  and  Port  Desire  has  been  imperfectly  seen; 
\f' din  the  distance  of  3  to  5  miles  from  the  shore,  however,  there  are  several  small 
patches  of  rock,  which  uncover  at  half  tide,  but  beyond  that  belt  the  coast  is  free  from 
any  known  danger,  and  may  be  approached  by  sounding  in  not  less  than  14  or  15  fathoms  ; 
within  that  limit  the  ground  is  foul.  To  the  northward  of  Port  Desire  the  land  is  low, 
with  a  shingle  beach,  excepting  for  the  first  3  m  les,  where  it  is  high  and  cliffy.  The 
north  point  of  the  entrance  of  the  bay  is  a  steep  blulT,  which  is  remarkable  in  being  the 
only  point  of  that  description  along  the  coast  to  the  northward.  At  3  miles  N.  28^  E., 
tnsgiiPtic,  from  this  bluff,  there  is  a  ledge  of  rocks,  (Surroll's  Ledge,)  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
without  which  the  depth  is  13  fathoms.  The  Tower  Rock  becomes  visible  after  passing 
this  ledge:  it  opens  out  when  the  north  blufi^"  bears  S.  50°  W.,  magnetic.  A  ship  bound 
to  Port  Desire,  or  merely  wiahin/;  to  anchor  in  the  bay  which  fronts  it,  may  procure  a 
good  berth  in  63  fathoms,  at  low  water,  well  sheltered  from  N.  i  W.  toS.  50"  E.,  mag- 
netic, witti  the 

North  Bluff  bearing N.  48=  W.  ) 

Tower  Rock N.  8-,>i  W.  V  Magnetic. 

Penguin  Island 8.504  W.  ) 

This  situation  being  a  little  to  the  southward  of  t'.e  f  lir  way  of  the  port,  and  about  one 
mile  and  a  half  from  the  nearest  shore,  i.s  quiie  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tide  ;  the  bot- 
tom, being  strewed  with  rounded  stones,  is  rather  foul  for  hemp  cables,  but  the  holding 
ground,  although  of  such  suspicious  quality,  seemed  to  be  good;  at  this  place  the  tide 
rogofrom  G?  to  94  fathoms,  a  difference  of  Ifii  f'et. 

PORT  DESIRIv— The  River  of  Port  Desire  has  rather  a  difficult  entrance,  from 
the  strength  of  the  tide  and  its  narrow  width,  and  it  is  rendered  still  more  confined  from 
sevi'ral  rocky  reefs  that  extend  off  the  north  shore  to  nearly  mid-channel.  There  is 
good  anchorage  olf  the  mouth.  By  waiting,  therefore,  for  low  water,  all  the  dangers 
tliat  exist  will  be  seen,  and  the  vessel  easily  dropt  in  with  the  tide,  should  the  wind  be, 
89  it  seii«rally  is,  westerly.  If  it  bo  fair,  it  is  advisable  for  the  ship  to  be  in  the  entrance 
at  slack  water  ;  or.  if  the  breeze  bo  strong  enough,  a  little  before  ;  as  the  water  is  deep 
on  the  south  shore,  there  seems  to  be  no  real  danger  that  may  not  be  avoided  by  a  careful 
iookijut  for  kelp,  whirh  always  grows  upon,  and  therefore  plainly  indicates  the  existence 
of 'dcky  ground.  The  course  in  is  about  S.  Tfi"  W.,  magnetic,  and  the  distance  tVom 
the  entrance  to  the  anchorage  is  one  mile  and  a  half.  The  anchorage  is  off  the  I'uinsf  on 
the  north  shore,  and  the  vessel  shouhl  be  moored  :  the  tide  sets  i  i  and  out  regularly. 

The  river  was  examined  for  10  miles,  but  is  probilily  navigable  to  i.  much  greater  dis- 
tiince4     Four  miles  above  the  ruins  there  is  a  small  peninsula,  ccnnected  by  a  narrow 


667 


Po,-t.  De- 
sire. 


'Cape  Ui.anco  —The  Spanisli  chiirt,  from  wliich  I  hnve  liiiil  down  the  capo,  places  it  in  ialitude  47° 
15 .  iMr.  Mnipsoii's  J  ournal  dt  scribes  it  to  be  in  latitude  47  dog  lOui.,  which  is  only  'J  miles  short  of  wliat 
oiirnliserviitions  ininieit. 

t.Soii*  years  sinrc,  a  Spanish  colony  was  founded  at  Port  Desire,  but  not  answering  the  pur- 
poiie,  it  WHS  sotai  urtcrwur<|s  given  up.  The  ruins  of  the  imHIiccs,  which  arc  of  stone,  and  the 
roiiiiiius  ofu  fruit  garden,  tiiut  ut  our  visit  i>rodi:L'fd  quinces  unj  cherries,  distinctly  point  out  the 
t\m. 

t  l'i>HT  Dr.sinE  —I  have  recommemled  tlie  river  t,i  he  eiitorod  at  youn;;  flood,  lint  Mr.  Simpson  thinks 
lilt  lii?t  (luiirtcrllood  to  be  the  best  time.  If  the  latl.'r  be  Hcloi>toj",  '  would  advise  that  the  ship  sliould 
1"'  luii'liiiri'd  olV  ihi"  entrioicc  iliirin;;  iho  low  water,  in  order  to  see  llie  banks  and  rocks  uncovered,  since 
tlifv  will  not  he  visihlc  al'ior  half  tide. 

tlio  Jimraii;  als,)  in.'ntious  lliut  lln^  Coinmi'dore  found  n  small  run  of  good  fresh  wntnrntahont  2  iinles 
i*.  W.  (if  \\u-.  'I'ow  r  llork.  They  tilled  live  or  six  tuos  of  it.  A  pole  was  erected  near  it,  to  point  tlie 
•put  out  tu  future  visitors. 


■"WW 


§68  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

iathmna  to  the  north  shore  ;  by  sending  n  party  up,  and  stationin;;  men  with  guns  on  th 
'  isthmus,  it  is  very  likely  that  several  guanacoes  nnay  be  shot  as  they  are  driven  across  t- 

for  the  peninsula  is  their  favorite  place  to  feed  upon.     These  animals  are  very  abundai  t 
but  unless  stratagem  be  used,  they  are  very  difficult,  from  their  shyness,  to  be  approach  V 
There  are  some  water  holes  near  the  ruins,  which  generally  contain  water,  but  of 
brackish  a  quality  as  scarcely  to   be  worth  notice.     The  wood,   although  of  very  sninM 
size,  burns  well,  and  is  much  prized  by  sealers  for  that  quality  ;  it  is  a  low  shrubby  tre 
hearing  a  yellow  Hower,  with  a  prickle  at  the  extremity  of  every  leaf.     The  senlers  call 
it  jnccolo,  from  the  small  dimensions  of  the  stem.    The  roots  also  are  dug  up  and  usedfu 
fuel.  ' 

The  outer  side  of  Penguin  Island  is  bold,  and  may  be  passed  very  close  wdthout  dnnser 
for  the  tide  rather  sets  off  than  towards  the  shore.  The  tide  ia  very  rapid,  and  forms 
even  in  a  calm,  strong  ripplings,  which,  in  u  breeze,  must  be  very  dangerous  for  boiits  t' 
pass  through,  and,  indeed,  not  agreeable  for  vessels  of  any  size.  The  flood  sets  to  th" 
northward,  and  during  its  strength,  at  more  than  3  knots ;  for  we  found  the  ebb  to  have 
set  us  15  miles  to  the  south  in  3  hours.  Off  this  island,  the  high  water,  or  the  termina. 
Tide.  tion  of  the  northerly  stream,  takes  place  at  about  4h.,  or  4h.  15m.  after  the  moon's  pas. 

sage  ;  which  is  3ii  or  4  hours  at  least  after  it  is  high  water  at  the  shore. 
Sea  Bear  SEA  BEAR  BAY  is  uue  of  the  best  anchorages  that  I  know  of  on  the  coast,  but  is 

Bay.  difllcult  of  access,  without  a  leading  and  a  fresh  wind,  on  account  of  the  strength  of  the 

tides,  which  set  to  the  northward  tlirough  the  narrow  channels  st^/arating  the  rocky  islets 
that  are  strewed  between  Penguin  Island  and  the  main  land.  The  bottom,  besides  is 
not  only  de»'p,  23  to  30  fathoms,  but  is  very  foul  and  rocky  ;  and  although  a  ship  may  be 
prevented  from  drifting  through  by  dropping  an  anchor,  yet  its  loss,  from  the  foulness  of 
the  ground,  would  be  almost  certain.  In  entering  the  bay,  border  pretty  close  to  the  low 
rocky  point  to  the  soulliward,  to  avoid  a  reef  that  lies  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  without  it- 
hut  us  the  sea  alwa3's  breaks  upon  it,  the  eye  and  a  due  consideration  of  the  tide  are  the 
best  guides.  This  reef  extends  for  some  distance  to  the  eastward  of  the  breakers,  and 
therefore  the  tides,  when  within  it,  set  in  or  out  of  the  bay  but  with  little  strength.  Should 
a  shij)  not  bo  able  to  enter  the  bay,  thero  is  anchorage  off  the  point  between  it  and  the 
reef,  on,  I  believe,  tolerably  clean  ground.  You  will  have  12  or  13  fathoms  off  the  reef- 
then  the  depth  shoals  for  one  or  two  heaves  to  7  fathoms,  after  which  it  deepens  again' 
you  may  then  haul  across  the  hay  and  anchor  at  about  a  quarter  of  a  milo  wilhintiie 
low  rocky  point,  bearing  E.  4  N.,  or  E.  I)y  N.,  by  compass,  in  4  fathoms,  low  water 
avoiding  the  kelp  which  |)roJHct8  off  from  the  low  sandy  beaches  ;  this  is,  however,  suffi- 
ciently distinct,  and  for  further  directions  the  plan  will  be  the  best  guide.  A  small  vessel 
may  easily  turn  in,  but  I  should  hesitate  taking  such  a  step  in  one  that  I  could  uot 
make  quite  certain  of.  When  once  in,  the  anchorage  is  good,  and  protectwl  at  ail  points 
except  between  N.  41"  and  N.  7Hi'  E.  ;  but  from  the  appearance  of  the  beaches  I  do 
not  tliink  a  heavy  sea  is  ever  thrown  into  if.  Thero  is  no  wood  to  be  |)rocurod  of  any 
size,  and  the  few  gallons  of  water  that  are  collected  in  the  wells  at  the  point  so  very  pre- 
carious as  to  be  scarcely  worth  attention.  'J'he  passage  to  the  watering  holes  is  over  a 
small  rocky  i)ar,  which  a  boat  may  cross  at  three-cjuarters  flood;  it  isinitnediatelv  within 
the  eastern  point  of  the  bay  ;  there  is  a  small  spriiig  at  the  north  ona  of  the  third  sandy 
bench,  which  a  herd  of  guanacoes  was  oi)serveil  to  visit  every  morning,  but  as  tho  water 
only  trickles  down  in  a  very  small  quantity,  it  camiot  afford  more  than  a  temporary  sun- 
ply.  'I'wo  of  the  three  wells  at  tho  point  we  found  to  bo  full  of  sea  water,  wliich  had 
iireached  ovttr  the  rocks  ;  the  other  contained  about  forty  gallons,  of  riitlier  a  lirackish 
taste.  Besides  a  good  and  secure  anchorage,  this  place  allonis  no  other  advaiitngus;  it  is 
convenient  for  sealing  vessels  to  anchor  in  N.hilst  employed  iu  their  occupiitiuns  upon 
Penguin  Island. 

.Sea  Bear  Bay  is  in  hit.  47  '  bG'  49",  and  long.  65°  44' ;  variation  20*^;  high  water  at  full 
and  chiin^e  T^li.  45m.,  and  the  tide  rises  2U  feet. 

Spiring's  Buy  is  contained  bewi-en  the  south  head  of  Bear  Bay  and  tho  point  within 
tlie  Siiii!;  ivock  ;  it  forms  a  c(jnsideral)lo  biulit,  but  is  nmrh  exposed,  biMiig  (|iiit()  (ipcn  tu 
tlie  south  and  east,  and  at  tho  conclusion  of  the  S.  VV.  gale,  wiieii  tho  wind  always  veerj 
to  south  mid  south  by  east,  there  is  a  considerable  sea.     The  shore  is  skirtiMl  fur  simiui 

distance  oil  with  many  rocks,  and  tho  bay  aitogellntr  is  (piito   unfit  f ir  anchoriif;n Tho 

land   is  of  the  same   heiulit  as  about  Sea  Bear  Bay,  but  has  more  lumps  or  iioJules  of 
rocky  hills  visible  on  the  outline  of  its  siiiiimit. 

Olfthis  bay,  in  tho  old  chart,  is  laiil  down  a  rock  c;illed  tho  Eildystone.  It  wouliifOfin 
that  this  rock,  and  the  Bellaco  Rock,  disnoverod  by  Nodiiles,  in  1(U!>,  is  the  Hain(Mj,ui;;i'r; 
but  the  whole  coast  between  Cipe  Blanco  an  I  Port  St  Julian  is  much  strewcMl  with 
slioals,  wlii(  h  aro  the  more  dangerous  from  the  strength  of  the  tides  wliicli  set  hi'twetn 
them.  Ill  iia\  iiiating  upon  this  part  of  the  coast,  the  depth  and  ipiality  of  the  s(iiiiidiiii;'i 
are  a  good  cnide.  and,  as  a  general  rule,  when  the  depth  is  more  than  40  fathoms,  tiicreei- 
ists  no  known  danger. 


^^"■^"^PPI" 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


569 


Byron  flnw  this  rock,  but  from  hia  position  of  it  there  seems  to  be  little  doubt  that  it  is 
tbeBalliico  Rocic  of  Nodules.  Mr.  Simpson's  Journal  says,  "it  is  5  leagues  from  the 
shore,  and  is  covered  at  high  water.  It  bears  from  Penguin  Island  S.  S.  W..  a  little 
ffenterly,  distant  14  or  15  leagues,  and  is  in  latitude  48°  36'."  (The  latitude  of  the  bel- 
laco  is  48°  30'  50".) 

In  directing  the  ship's  course  by  night  near  this  coast,  regard  should  be  paid  to  the  tide, 
ffhich  sets  with  considerable  strength,  the  current  running  parallel  with  the  shore. 

The  Shag  Rock  is  a  whitish  mass  of  rock,  perfectly  bare,  lying  about  one  mile  and  a 
hnlf  off  shore  :  two  miles  to  the  south  of  it  are  four  small  dark-colored  rocks ;  and  at  3 
miles  S.  S.  W.  from  it,  there  is  rather  a  large  rocky  islet. 

On  the  land,  and  at  a  short  distance  from  the  coast,  are  three  hills,  which  appear 
ffhen  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Sea  Boar  Bay,  like  three  round-topped  hills,  but  on 
reaching  more  to  the  southward,  they  extend  in  length,  and  form  into  two  hills,  and  at 
J  leagues  to  the  south  of  the  Shag  Rock,  they  appear  to  form  one  mass  of  table  land. 
Watchman's  Cape  is  very  low,  and  may  be  distinguished  by  its  bell-shaped  mount :  at  « 
lengoes  from  the  point  is  a  shoal  with  kelp  upon  it,  on  which  the  least  water  is  3  fathoms, 
but  on  approaching  it  the  depth  gradually  decreases :  there  are  also  many  other  shoal 
patches,  but  are  all  buoyed  with  sea-weed ;  the  ship  passed  between  several,  in  7  and  9 
fathoms. 

The  ground  is  very  foul  and  uneven  for  more  than  4  miles  from  Watchman's  Cape. 
Here  the  coast  trends  round  to  the  westward,  and  becomes  higher.  Being  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  cnpe,  there  appears  a  mount  about  2  miles  from  its  extreme  point,  resem- 
bling Monte  Video,  in  the  River  Plate,  both  in  shape  and  color,  but  not  quite  so  high. 
It  19  called  Monte  Video,  and  in  lat.  48°  18'  55",  and  long.  66°  18'. 

The  Beilaca  Rock,  or  San  Stevan'a  (Stephen's)  Shoal,  which  was  discovered  by  the 
Nodales,  in  1619,  was  searched  for  in  vain  in  the  Descubierta  and  Atrevida's  voyage; 
but  Capt.  Stokes,  in  the  early  part  of  1828,  on  his  passage  down  the  coast,  found  it,  and 
had  an  observation  of  the  sun  close  to  it  for  the  latitude.  It  is  in  latitude  48°  30'  50", 
endlong.  CG"  9'  25".  It  bears  S.  13°  E.,  lOi  miles  from  the  extremity  of  Watchman's 
Cape,  and  S.  E.,  magnetic,  froni  Montevideo.  The  rock  is  a  dark  mass,  about  9  or 
10  feet  above  ihe  water  at  high  tide,  and  has  the  appearance  of  a  boat  turned  bottom  up. 
Within  half  a  mile  of  its  south  aide  the  Beagle  sounded  in  12  and  15  fathoms,  rocky  bot- 
tom, and  on  its  east  side,  at  the  same  disto-ce,  ihe  depth  is  from  20  to  24  fathoms.  The 
jrnund  around  it  being  foul  and  uneven,  the  coast  in  its  neighborhood  should  be  avoided. 
Between  Watchman's  Cape  and  Port  St.  .Julian  the  land  is  of  moderate  height. 

Wood's  Mount  is  visible  from  the  deck  for  at  least  11  leagues,  and  is  a  good  mark  for 
Port  St.  Julian,  being  flat-topped,  and  much  more  elevated  than  the  land  about  it.  The 
trend  of  the  coast  may  also  be  a  good  mark  ;  but  as  the  land  about  Port  St.  Julian  is  high- 
er than  to  the  southward  or  northward,  and  Wood's  Mount  is  so  remarknhle  a  feature,  no 
mistake  can  be  made.  In  a  line  with  the  south  point  of  entrance  the  itmunr  bi'iirs  N. 
86  i  W.  (W.  16  i  S.,  magnetic  )  The  nortli  head,  Cape  Curioso,  is  a  inw  point  jutting 
out  to  the  northward,  formed  by  clitt's  horizonialjy  striitified,  of  wliicli  the  upper  part  is 
white  brown,  and  the  lower  generally  black,  or  with  black  strc 

Keeping  Wood's  Mount  bearing  S.  67°  W.,  by  compiles,  wil  load  you  to  the  south 
head,  which  will  be  easily  distinguished  when  at  the  distance  of  0  ir  8  miles,  or  more, 
according  to  the  state  of  the  weather. 

Tlie  land  to  the  southward  of  Port  St.  Julian  is  uniform,  flat  and  low.  i  is  covered 
bTscruliljV  bushes,  and  fronted  by  a  single  beach.  At  10  or  12  miles  south  of  it,  cnmiug 
fi'om  tho  E.  S.  E.,  a  small  flat-topped  hill  is  seen  over  the  low  coast  hills. 

In  lat.  49'  27',  tho  character  of  the  const  changes  entirely  to  a  range  of  steep  white 
clayclilfs,  the  average  height  of  which  was  calculated,  by  angular  measurement,  to  be 
abiiutSOO  or  330  feet.  They  rise  like  a  wall  from  tho  sea,  which,  nt  high  water,  nearly 
washes  tiioir  base  ;  but  at  low  water  thoy  ai'e  fronted  by  a  considerublo  extent  of  beach, 
I  partly  of  shingle  and  partly  of  mud.  Soinn  short  rocky  ledges,  which  break  at  half  tide, 
lie  olV  certain  parts  of  this  range,  but  none  of  tlio  ledges  extend  for  more  than  a  milo  from 
I  the  sliore.  This  clilf.  range  occasionally  forms  projections,  but  so  slight  as  not  to  be  per- 
ceivfd  when  passing  abreast  of  them. 

Anchorajjes  along  the  coast  may  be  taken  up,  with  tho  wind  ofl"  shore,  at  from  a  mile 
I  to  two  iTiiles  from  tlie  beacli,  in  fnim  9  to  Iv!  and  14  fiitlioms,  oozy  bottom.  In  latitude 
1 4!>  oV  tho  range  of  steep  white  dill's  begins  griidually  to  diinioish  in  height,  and  termi- 
j  miles,  at  i)  miles  farther  to  llie  southward,  in  a  Iciw  point,  forming  tlie  northern  sides  of 
the  entrance  of  Santa  Cru^  River.  It  is  called  in  the  chart  North  Point,  and  is  in  lat.  50° 
I  6' •JO",  anil  (18°  3'. 

."^ANTrV  CllUZ.— The  appearance  of  tho  coast  about  the  entrance  of  the  River  of  Santa  Oruz 

j  Saiifn  Cruz  is  very  remarkablts  and  easy  to  be  known,  from  the  manner  in  which   it 

makes  when  seen  from  the  northwarcl,  and  is  even  more  conspicuous  when  seen  from 

jthe  SDiitliward.     From  tho  latter  direction  a  coa^t  line  of  clitl's  an<l  downs  of  considerable 

height  Id  seen  extending  to  the  southward  of  the  entrance  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reucbi 


ATI 


»i.U»T'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

and  terminnting  nbruptly  to  the  northward  in  a  high,  steep,  flat-topped  cliff,  Mou 
Entrance,  of  which  the  upp:r  part  descends  vertically  ;  the  lower  elopes  off,  and  nnnci 
to  be  united  with  some  very  low  land,  which  will  bo  seen  extending  (according  to  th'.  ""' 
tanre  otF. )  two  or  three  points  of  the  compass  to  the  northward  of  it.     Mount  Entrni  ce  ■ 
at  the  soutli  ontrnnco  of  the  river,  and  is,  by  angular  mensureinent,  356  feet  high.    Th" 
low  land  is  on  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  river  "        * 


The  outer  part  of  the   bar.  on  which,  at  low  tido.  there  ore  14  feet  water. 


IS  m 


nearly 


Tides. 


four  miles  S.  034°  E.  from  Mount  Entrance,  and  9  miled  from  North  Point,  bearing \ 

Fourteen  miles  up  the  river,  on  the  south  bank,  is  Weddel's  Bluff,  a  cnnspicuoi 
headlund  ;  and  11  miles  farther  is  another  called  Beagle  Bluff.  Beagle's  BlulF,  oppn  f 
the  south  entrance,  and  in  a  line  with  tlie  centre  of  Sea  Lion  Island,  bearing  N.  W  | 
W.  A  W.,»  by  compass,  is  the  leading  mark  for  the  passage  over  the  bur.  Witji  tl7 
mark  on,  and  at  high  water,  a  Beagle  crossed  the  bar  in  TJ  fathoms. f  The  IJeiwl" 
Bluir,  a  little  open  of  the  low  po.'nts  of  the  north  side  of  the  river,  is  also  a  leadinir  ni,  n 
to  cross  the  bar.  ^     "'^ 

After  passing  the  bar,  which  is  about  a  n  ile  broad,  there  is   no  impe-liment  to  n  frp 
course  up  the  river,  keeping  mid-way  between  the  narrow  points  of  entn  ice,  until  renclf 
ing  the  shoals  which  project  off  the  east  point  of  Sea  Lion  Island.     The  beat  HnchoiM 
seems  to  be  that  occupied  by  the  Beagle,  on  the  south  side  of  Sea  Lion  Island,  where 
the  water  is  shoaler  and  the  tide  not  so  strong. 

At  Weddel's  lihilf  the  river  divides  into  two  arms.  Tlie  northern  one,  which  trends 
under  the  east  fall  of  the  Beagle  Blutf,  was  examined  by  Captain  Stokes,  for  12  mileq 
above  its  couiinencenient,  where  it  ceased  to  be  navigable,  even  at  high  water.  Its  bed 
was  divided  by  banks  of  sand  into  several  little  fordable  streams,  preserving,  as  fnr  nsthe 
inequnlities  of  the  land  would  permit  the  eye  to  ftdlow  their  course,  a  mean  N.  W.  hyV 
dire(!tion.  'I  lie  stream  at  this  j)art  was  quite  fresh,  but  still  subject  to  the  rpguiiirtbb 
and  flow.  On  the  boat's  n  turn  she  was  left  dry  for  six  hours,  in  the  middle  of  the  (ii.,,, 
nel,  about  two  miles  above  Beagle  Bluff.  At  half  tide  the  boats  took  in  their  water  at  this 
place. 

The  shore  on  the  S.  W.  side  is  a  range  of  clay  cliffs,  of  the  average  height  of  250  feet 
with  grassy  downs,  and  intersected  with  valleys  and  ravines.  On  the  eastern  side,  the 
land  fur  the  most  part  is  low  and  level,  with  a  shingle  beach.  The  aspect  of  tlie  CDu'iitrv 
is  dieary,  tlm  ."oil  gravelly,  and  the  vegetation  scanty,  the  largest  production  of  thiit  nn- 
ture  being  buslie.>(  bearing  iierries,  n<ine  of  which  ex-eed  7  or  8  feet  in  height.  Mimv 
brant,  geese  and  ducks  were  seen,  as  well  as  the  common  sea  fowl  of  those  parts,  such  as 
penguins,  cormorants,  gulls,  ducks,  and  divers.  Several  ostriches  also  niiido  their  an. 
pearance  on  the  beach,  and  liiices  of  guanacoes  were  tibserved. 

The  south-we.stern  arm,  which  is  the  most  consid(!rable  one  of  tlie  two,  wag  PXiiniined 
for  .3,3  miles.  It  was  supposed  liy  Weddel  to  be  of  such  considerable  size  iiml  jntiMvst- 
ing  appearance  as  to  be  likely  to  communicate  with  some  branch  from  the  .Strait  ot'  Mn. 
galhaens.  The  first  reach  of  the  arm  runs  S.  W.  by  W.,  (1  miles,  with  a  rncini  hrcadth 
of  'Ji  miles.  At  1^  league  up,  the  boat  being  anchored  for  the  night  in  inid-rliaiiiiil  in 
12  feet,  was  left  dry  at  low  water.  At  the  |)lace  of  the  first  observation,  on  tiic  imrlh 
side,  in  lat.  49'^  57',  and  long,  fid""  .')3',  the  influence  of  the  tides  had  allogiMlicr  ceased, 
and  the  wafer  was  (|iiite  fresh.  The  stream  ran  be;iufif"nlly  clear  and  pure,  with  tlie  ve- 
locity of  at  least  5  miles  an  hour,  over  a  lied  of  pebbles  mixed  with  dark  sanij:  its  ine;in 
breadth  being  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  depth  in  mid-channel  H  teet.  It  runs  between 
two  nearly  |)aralle|  ranges  of  hills,  abont  4  miles  asunder.  Beyond  tins  the  rem  lies  are 
short,  seldom  more  than  two  miles  long,  formini;  tortuous  courses  betwepii  .■>.  S.  K.  aiil 
W.  by  .S.  The  winds  l)li«w  directly  dnwn,  and  the  rapidity  of  the  stream  wiis  su  great 
that  tile  boat  was  obliged  to  be  trucked  ii|i  the  river. t 

The  examination  terminiifeil  iii  lat.  iiH  !)',  lony.  (i9^  'Jl',  which  is  4.5  inilesinaJao 
west  direction  from  its  month,  but  by  thf  course  of  the  stream  M  miles. 

At  an  anchorage  ouf.-i'le  the  bar,  .Mmint  Kntiimce  bearmg  N.  H-i"^  \V.,  five  miles  elf, 
and  Weddid's  Bluff  N.  O.J"'  W.,  the  Bea;;le  rode  out  a  gnle  from  the  S.  ,S.  \V.  imj 
south,  with  a  heavy  sea,  witiitMit  driving.  'I'lie  snnndings  that  are  marked  in  the  rliiirt, 
outside  the  bar,  were  taken  at  low  wuti^r,  whi^t  the  hlli|>  iiccu()ied  the  ahme  an- 
chorage. 

'J'lie  tides  in  the  offing  were  observed  to  flow  very  regularly  six  hours  eadi  way.  hut  to 
turn  two  hours  later  than  ilie  time  of  high  water  in  shore.  The  flood,  as  licliire,  \v:is 
observed  to  run  tu  the  northward. 


•Thi«i»  the  bearing iriveii  liy  Wivldcl  in  bi'<  Hccoiiiit  of  .'^iiiilii  i  ruz. 

t  'I'h  ■  ri*r  ol'  the  li  ,<•  i*  r(m:*ii|eriilili!.  In  K"'""  out,  alier  crussiai;  die  liiir,  iho  Bcufrle  aiichorcj,  saj 
at  Icev  \nU'  111,.  w.itiT  Iri'l  fill. Ml  Jiir.ei 

I  I'hf  iihuvo  dijaciiiitioii  uf  Suiilu  Cruz  uaj  tlr;  river,  is  tiik'  n  iVoin  the  lute  coniiiiiniJer  Slokis' .MS 
Juurnul. 


mmum 


mmmmmmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  ^1 

The  const  to  the  south  of  the  river  is  bounded  by  n  lodge  of  rocks,  which  nre  either 
dry  »t  hnlt  tide,  or  nre  then  shown  by  n  line  of  bre.ikers;  tiiey  extend  as  far  ..ffHs  three 
miles.  On  one  occasion  the  Beagle  anchored  among  thorn,  and  had  some  difficulty,  and 
notftlilllo  "'-'*'*<'"  escaping.  •"  / 

Between  Coy  Inlet  and  Santa  Cruz  the  coast  trends  lightly  in,  and  is  formed  by  a  sue-  i 

cession  of  ciill  and  intervenmg  low  benches.  Coy  Inlet  is  conspicuous,  as  it  is  the  only 
piirt  of  tho  coast  that  has  the  appearance  of  an  inlet  between  Santa  Cruz  and  Cape  Fair- 
weather. 

Wlien  within  seven  miles  of  its  latitude,  (50°  57'.)  as  well  to  the  northward  as  to  the 
southward  of  it,  n  ship  should  keep  at  the  distance  of  four  or  five  miles  off  the  coast.— 
There  can  bo  no  inducement  to  go  nearer,  as  it  affords  neither  fuel  nor  water ;  and  if 
iDcnutiously  approached,  much  trouble  and  even  danger  may  ensue,  from  the  ledcres  of 
rocks  which  project  at  least  three  miles,  and  perhaps  more,  from  the  coast.  " 

COY  INLET.— There  is  no  account  either  of  Coy  Inlet  or  of  the  Gi.llegos  River  in   Coy  Inlet. 
Cnptuin  Stokes'  Journal ;  what  is  here  given  is  taken  from  the  chart,  and  from  what  oral 
iDtminiition  I  have  received. 

Coy  Inlet  is  n  shoal  salt  water  inlet,  terminating  at  19  miles  from  the  entrance,  and 
fronted  by  a  bar  of  rocks,  leaving  a  passage  only  of  six  feet  water  on  their  south  side; 
inside  there  seems  to  be  a  little  more  than  3  feet  water,  and  in  most  parts  of  the  inlet,  the 
banks,  which  are  of  mud  and  sand,  are  dry  at  low  water;  it  is  useless  for  any  other  pur- 
pose ihiin  to  afford  shelter  to  a  small  boat.  Tho  southern  side  of  the  inlet  is  cliffy,  and  at 
its  terniiniition  receives  the  drains  of  an  extensive  flat  country. 

Thence  to  Cape  Fairweather  the  coast  is  similar  to  the  northern  part,  but  move  free 
from  rocky  ledges,  and  good  anchorage  may  be  had  from  i>  to  6  miles  oft"  shore,  in  from 
7  to  12  and  14  fathoms,  muddy  bottom  ;  the  water  shoaling  gradually  to  the  shore.  The 
bencli  is  of  shingle  to  high  water  mark,  and  then  of  hard  clay  as  far  as  one  hundred  feet 
beyond  the  low  water  limit,  where  a  green  muddy  bottom  commences,  and  the  water 
grudually  deepens.  Tho  outer  edge  of  tho  chiy  is  bounded  by  a  lodge  of  rocks,  on  which 
the  sea  breaks;  it  extends  for  some  distance  parallel  with  the  coast. 

The  flood  sets  to  the  N.  \V.  by  N.  and  the  ebb  S.  E.  by  S.,  6  hours  each  >\ay;  high 
water,  lit  full  and  change,  between  9  and  10  o'clock,  and  the  tide  rises  24  feet. 

In  lilt.  51°  16',  about  17  miles  north  of  the  cape,  there  is  a  ravine  containing  abund- 
ance of  fiesli  water,  which  may  be  obtained,  when  the  wind  is  off  shore,  without  any 
difficulty ;  it  is  standing  water,  and  being  much  grown  over  with  plants,  may  not  keep,  but 
fora  teiiipoinry  supply  it  seemed  to  be  very  good. 

CAPE  E,\IRWE  ATH  ER,  is  the  south  extremity  of  tlie  long  range  of  clay  clifls  that  Cajte  Fair- 
estemls  from  Coy  Inlet,  almost,  without  a  break.  The  ca|)e  resembles  very  much  Ciipe  weather. 
St.  Vincoiit,  on  the  coast  of  Spain;  it  also  bears  a  very  great  resemblance  to  Capo  Virgins, 
forwbicli  ii  has  frequently  been  taKen,  notwithstiiniiing  there  are  more  than  45  miles 
diffeieiico  in  the  latitude  of  the  two  headlands.  This  uiistiiUe  was  made  in  the  Adven- 
ture iis  well  lis  ill  the  Beagle  on  our  first  visit,  when,  no  observation  for  the  latitude  hav- 
iiijl  been  oiitaiiied,  we  were  two  days  at  anchor  olf  it  before  our  error  was  discovered. 
A  siiiiiiar  error  was  also  made  by  one  of  the  ships  belonging  to  the  fleet  under  the  com- 
mimii  of  Loynsa,  in  the  year  1525,  (see  Burney's  Collection  of  Voyages,  vol.  i.  p.  131:) 
1111(1  llie  Nodiilcs,  ill  their  description  of  the  coiit^t.  wain  the  navigator  from  mistaking  tho 
one  for  llie  other  "y  venidode  mar  en  fuera  a  buscar  la  tierra,  fucilmente  podian  hiicer 
deRiiide  (5iilleg(is  el  Cabo  de  las  Virgines;"  (and  In  making  the  land,  Cape  Virgins  may 
easily  \w  mistaken  for  the  River  (iailegos.)     Voyaiie  of  the  Nodules,  p.  53. 

On  the  old  clinrls  of  this  part  of  the  coast,  the  shore  is  described  to  be  formed  of  chalk 
hills,  "like  the  coast  of  Kent:"  the  resemblance  certainly  is  very  great,  but  instead  of 
cliiilk  tliey  lire  of  clay.  They  are  from  3  to  4  hundred  feet  high,  and  are  horizontally 
elriitified,  the  strata  running  for  many  miles,  without  interruption. 

The  iiiierior  is  formed  by  open  piiiins  of  uiiihilatiiig  country,  covered  with  grass  and 
plants,  iiiiiiiiig  which  isaliundance  of  wild  thyme,  but  entirely  destitute  of  trees;  itabouiida 
Willi  giiiiiiiii'oes,  which  may  bo  procured  by  laying  in  wait  at  tlie  water  holes. 

Besiiles  the  pond  above  mentioned,  there  is  no  want  fur  freshwater;  it  may  be  seen 
tricMing  dnwii  the  face  of  the  rlills,  at  short  intervals. 

The  eiitiiiiicc  of  the  River  Giillegos  is  formed  on  the  north  side  by  the  cliffy  land  of 
Ciipe  Faii'wciitlier,  and  on  the  south  liy  a  low  sliiu-e  that  is  not  visible  at  sea  for  more 
tlmn  four  or  five  leagues,  excejiting  the  hills  in  the  interior,  called  the  Friars,  the  Con- 
voiits,  mid  Noitli  Hill.  It  is  fronled  by  extensive  sand-banks,  most  of  which  may  be 
crnssed  at  liiuli  water,  but  at  half  ebb  they  are  nliiiost  dry.  The  entrance  is  round  tho 
south  extremity  of  the  shoals,  which  bear  from  tlit^  south  trend  of  the  cape.  S.  434°  E., 
disliiiit  ten  miles.  Tho  passage  in  is  parallel  with  the  coast  to  the  southward  of  the 
entrance,  taking  care  not  to  open  the  liiiul  to  the  northward  of  Cape  Fairweather's  most 
eiisterii  trend,  which,  when  in  the  fair  way.  should  iiear  N.  40'^  W.,  miignetie.  The 
sliore  on  the  hirlioiird  hand  must  then  be  griidiiiilly  approached,  and,  in  the  present  state 
of  tho  kiioMedgo  we  possess,  the  ship  should  be  anchored  to  awuit  low  water  in  ten 


1!«9PPiRii^m9'<qi 


%^ 


I  III  ■    iif  If  n.1^  I  m 


">iW»l 


679  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

fathomB,  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  shore,  bo  soon  as  the  south  point  begins  to  be  ob- 
served  to  trend  round  to  the  westward ;  the  anchorage  there  is  good,  and  well  sheltered 
from  the  prevailing  winds. 

By  anchoring,  the  passage  in  will  be  easily  detected,  and  may  be  passed  before  the 
shoals  are  again  covered,  which  will  be  a  good  guide  ;  4  fathoms  is  the  depth  at  low  water 
in  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel.  Anchorage  may  be  taken  up  on  the  south  side  for 
to  the  nortiiward  the  banks  are  extensive. 

There  is  also  a  middle,  and  as  it  appears  to  be  the  widest,  may  be  the  best  channel,  fo> 
crossing  the  vm.  The  outer  part  was  not  completely  examined ;  but  no  doubt  there  is  n 
sufficient  depth  of  water  at  three-quarters  flood  for  any  vessel  to  pass  it.  The  southern 
channel,  however,  is  preferable,  from  having  the  land  as  a  guide. 

The  river  runs  in  to  the  westward  for  30  miles,  and  then  winds  more  southerly  be- 
tween two  ranges  of  hills.      Its  banks  are  formed  of  downs,  abounding  with  guanacoes 
and  ostriches.     The  water  is  fresh  at  25  miles  from  the  mouth.     Id  the  entrance,  the 
High  water,   time  of  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  is  8h.  50m.;  the  rise  of  tide,  at  the  springs,  ig  ^g 
feet,  and  the  stream  runs  as  much  as  5  miles  an  hour. 

From  the  south  entrance  of  the  Gallegos  Rivnr,  the  coast,  towards  Cape  Virgiog 
extends  in  a  more  easterly  direction  than  it  does  to  the  uorthward  of  Cape  Fairweather' 
and,  for  the  first  half  of  the  distance,  is  formed  by  a  low  shelving  coast,  that  at  a  few 
leagues  from  the  shore  is  not  visible,  so  that  a  stranger  might  readily  su|)pose  it  to  be 
the  entrance  of  the  Straits  of  Magalhaens.  Thore  are,  however,  some  marks  by  which 
it  may  be  known,  even  should  the  latitude  not  have  been  ascertained.  In  clear  weather 
the  Friars,  and  the  other  hills  near  them,  would  be  visible ;  and  in  thick  weather,  the 
soundings  off  the  cape  will  be  an  infallible  guide ;  for  at  the  distance  of  four  miles  of! 
DO  more  than  4  fathoms  will  be  found,  whereas,  at  that  distance  from  Cape  Virgins, 
the  depth  is  considerable ;  the  bottom  also,  to  the  north  of  Cape  Fairweather,  is  of  mud 
whilst  that  to  the  north  of  Cnpe  Virgins  is  of  gravel  or  coarse  sand ;  and  the  latter  cnpe 
has  a  long  low  point  of  shingle  running  off  it  for  nearly  five  miles  to  the  S.  W.;  nod 
lastly,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  the  distant  land  of  Tierra  del  Fuego  will  be  visible  to  thn 
S.  W. 

At  eighteen  miles  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Fairweather,  the  cliffs  again  commence, 
and  continue  to  Cape  Virgins,  with  only  one  or  two  breaks;  in  one  of  which,  eight  diIIds 
north  of  the  latter  cape,  I  think  a  boat  may  land,  if  necessary.  There  is  good  onchorase 
along  the  whole  coast,  between  the  Gallegos  and  Cape  Virgins,  at  from  two  to  five  miles  olf 
shore;  but  the  bottom  is  rather  stony,  nni  might  injure  hempen  cables.  As  the  cape  is 
approached,  the  ground  becomes  more  foul. 

Of  the  Winds  and  Weather,  Tides  and  Variation  of  the  Compass,  between  CAPE 
BLANCO  and  CAPE  VIRGINS. 

Our  experience  of  the  wind  and  weather  upon  this  part  of  the  coast  was  not  sufficient 
to  enable  us  to  form  any  judgment  of  tho  changes  that  are  liable  to  occur.  The  prevail- 
ing winds,  particularly  towards  the  southern  portion,  are  from  the  south-west,  from  which 
quarter  the  gales  are  the  strongest;  but  near  the  land,  during  the  summer  BeRson.  ther 
veer  about  between  south  and  W.  N.  W.,  and  in  the  winter,  when  the  sun  hns  northern 
declination,  timy  hang  more  commonly  to  the  northward  of  west.  Northerly  winds  are 
accomp.mied  by  misty  or  foggy  weather,  particularly  on  that  portion  of  the  coast  between 
the  Rio  de  la  Plata  and  Port  St.  Elena. 

The  marine  barometer  here  is  of  signal  advantage.  It  is  low  with  a  northerly  wind, 
but  as  soon  as  the  column  has  fallen  to  29  inches  ur  lower,  and  ceases  to  full,  a  cbnnp  of 
wind  from  the  S.  W.  may  be  expected ;  which  commences  with,  or  very  soon  follows, 
tho  ascent  of  mercury  ;  the  wind  then  freshens  and  blows  hard,  and  the  weather  clears 
up.  The  clouds  are  white,  of  large  size,  and  of  rounded  form,  and  the  air  becomes 
elastic,  dry  and  cold.  During  the  existence  of,  and  for  some  days  preceding,  a  northerly 
wind,  there  is  generally  a  very  copious  deposition  of  dew  ;  indeed,  the  appearance  of  it  is 
an  infallible  presage  vt'  the  cha  ngo.  With  northerly  winds,  the  air  is  mild  and  excessirelj 
damp,  but  when  they  blow  from  tho  opijosito  quarter  it  is  cold  and  dry.  The  wind  rare- 
ly blows  from  east,  but  sometimes  obli(juely  towards  the  coast  from  N.  E.  or  S.  S.  E. 

The  flood  tide  sets  to  tho  northward  parallel  with  the  coast.  Near  Cnpe  Virgins,  the 
northerly  tide  ceases  at  about  four  hours  before  the  moon's  passage :  in  the  Unllegos 
River  it  is  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  at  8h.  50m.,  and  rises  4G  feet;  nt  Capo  Fair- 
weather,  at  9  o'cl'>ck,  and  rises  28  feet ;  at  Coy  Inlet,  at  between  nine  and  ten  o'clocli; 
nt  Sant<»  Cruz,  about  lOh.  15m.,  rising  38  feet,  but  in  the  ofling  two  hours  later;  ntSea 
Hear  Bay,  12h.  45m.,  rising  20  feet;  Port  Desire,  12h.  10m.,  rise  18i  feet;  and  iit  Port 
St.  Elena,  at  4  o'clock  in  the  Hl'tornoon,  they  rine  17  feet.  In  tlio  ofiing  of  Port  Desire, 
tho  tides  are  3i  or  4  hours  later  than  they  are  in  shore,  whicli  iu  probably  owing  to  the 
eddy  tide  setting  out  of  St.  George's  Gulf. 


mmmmmimmimm 


mmmm 


mmmm 


BUJNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cape  Vlr- 
gins. 


679 


River  GallegoB,  »*     ^.   ,  »..-  ...  ^^r"  •  "b'""*  •"  '"»y  "*>  consiaerea  auout  yaj".     At  the 
last  place,  according  to  Sir  John  N«rborough,»  the  variation  in  the  year  1670,  was  l?" 
and  Wallis  and  Carteret,t  in  the  year  1767,  found  it  24"  30' ;  so  that  it  has  Bcarcely  altered 
within  the  last  hundred  and  sixty  years.  '' 

Strait  of  Magalheans— Cape  Virgins  to  Fort  Famine. 

CAPE  VIRGINS,  a  steep  cliff,  about  300  feet  high,  (in  lot.  52°  18'  35",  and  lone 
680  16'  55"t)  is  the  southern  extremity  of  the  Putagonitiu  const,  and  the  north  entrance 
of  the  Strait  of  Magalhaens.  There  is  an  appearance  of  a  reef  that  may  extend  off  the 
point  for  half  a  mile,  but  not  beyond  that  distance.  The  Adventure  passed  at  U  mile 
from  it,  sounding  in  8  fathoms,  stones;  and  then  standing  to  tbo  south,  crossed  a  bank  of 
gravel,  sounding  regularly  in  7  fathoms,  until  Duugeness  Point  bore  S.  W.  by  W.,  by 
compass,  when  the  water  deepened.  This  bank  trends  off  more  to  the  southward  and 
eastward,  but  I  believe  ite  termination  is  at  5  miles,  S.  87°  E.,  from  the  extremity  of 
Dungeness. 

I  do  not  imagine  that  any  part  of  it  is  shoal  enough  to  endanger  a  ship,  but  near  its  ex- 
tremity there  are  some  overfalls,  among  which,  the  least  depth  that  we  found,  was  5  fath- 
oms, at  low  wator.§ 

In  rounding  Cape  Virgins,  unless  the  wind  be  easterly  or  southerly,  I  should  recom- 
mend a  ship  to  pass  within  one  mile  and  a  half  of  the  cape,  and  steer  S.  by  E.,  by  com- 
pass, until  Dungeness  bears  S.  W.,  mag. ;  then  to  edge  away  around  the  latter  point,  and 
afterwards  the  coaot  is  clear  to  Cape  Possession.  In  moderate  weather  ships  may  an- 
chor any  vfhere  between  Dungeness  and  Cape  Possession.  The  bottom  is  of  good  hold- 
ing ground,  and  quite  clean.  At  from  3  to  5  miles  from  the  coast,  the  depth  will  be  from 
15  to  20  fathoms. 

We  knew  nothing  of  the  Fueginn  shore,  or  south  side  of  the  entrance.  The  Beagle, 
in  beating  in,  made  a  board  for  8  miles  to  the  southward  of  Dungeness,  and  had  40  fath- 
oms; but  I  believe  the  coast  to  be  of  shoal  approach,  and  to  be  lined  by  a  bank  that  is  con- 
nected to  the  extensive  reefs  which  project  from  Cape  Orange. 

CAPE  POSSESSION  is  a  cliffy  headland  on  the  north  shore,  and  will  be  seen  open-    Cape  Ft 
ing  round  Dungeness,  on  the  magnetic  bearing  of  S.  86'  30'  W. ;  the  distance  between   session. 
tliera  is  20  miles ;  at  10  or  12  miles  to  the  west  of  Dungeness,  Mount  Aymond  will  make 
its  appearance,  bearing  N.  85°  W.,  magnetic. 

POSSESSION  BAY,  which  extends  from  Cape  Possession  to  the  entrance  of  the    Possession 
First  Narrow,  curves  in  to  the  northward  round  to  the  cape,  and  is  fronted  by  an  exten-   Bay. 
give  shoal,  stretching  off  for  more  than  4  miles  from  the  shore,  many  parts  of  which  are 
dry  at  half  tide  :  on  its  south  side  the  depth  diminishes  gradually,  and  offers  good  anchor- 
arge  for  vessels  entering  the  strait,  to  await  the  tide  for  passing  the  First  Narrow. 

On  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  there  are  some  remarkable  hills  of  a  darker  green  hue 
than  othere  near  them  ;  I  have  called  them  the  Direction  Hills  ;  because,  after  passing 
Cape  Possession,  they  afford  a  good  mark  for  approaching  the  Narrows,  which  are  not 
Tisible  until  well  across  the  bay;  by  attention  also  to  their  bearings,  the  shoal  that  extends 
off  Cape  Orange  may  be  avoided.  To  take  up  an  anchorage  on  the  bank,  great  attention 
must  be  paid  to  the  soundings,  which  at  the  edge  decrease  suddenly  ;  it  would  not  be 
advisable  to  anchor  in  less  than  10  or  12  fathoms,  at  high  water,  for  the  tide  falls  6  or  7 
fathoms;  but  as  the  stream  runs  much  weaker  on  approaching  the  edge  of  the  bank,  the 
nearer  to  it  the  better.  A  good  berth  for  anchoring  is  to  get  the  northern  Direction  Hill, 
(which  is  dark  colored  and  very  conspicuous,)  to  bear  S.  56^'  W. ;  Mount  Aymond,  N. 
46' to  50"  W. ;  and  the  highest  (eiisternmost,)  peaked  hillock  upon  Cape  Orange,  about 
S.  S.  E.,  (compass  bearings.)  When  the  hill  above  noticed,  bears  S.  56"  W.,  and  Mount 
Aymond  between  N.  50"  and  60"  W.,||  you  are  in  19  or  20  fathoms,  just  off  the  edge  of 
liiebank ;  about  half  to  one  mile  more  to  the  northward,  or  north-westward,  good  anchor- 
age may  be  selected,  outof  the  strength  of  the  tide. 


os- 


'  Narborouph's  Voyage,  p.  60.  t  Hawkesworth,  vol  i.,  410. 

{By  chronoine'rical  observatiun,  68  deg.  17m.  -56?. 

)  The  shual  soundings  of  5  tiithoms  oli'Cape  Virgins,  bear  from  the  cape,  S.  S.'ideg.  E.  There  is  anchor- 
age under  Dungeness,  with  westeily  winds.  Wallis  anchored  in  10  fathoms,  gravel ;  Cape  Virgins  hear- 
ing N.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  Dungeness  S.  by  W. ;  but  these  l)eariiigs,  when  laid  down  in  the  chart,  do  not 
appear  tu  be  correct.  The  Dolnhin  anchored  at  4  indes  oil'  the  cape,  bearing  N.  i  E  ,  aiid  at  2  or  3  miles 
from  the  extremity  of  the  Ness,  uearingS.  S.  \V.  J  W. 

U  These  beiirings  are  by  compass.    Tbe  variation  of  the  needle  is  22)  deg. 


nM^PMwq* 


wmi^mm 


'^m 


mi 


i74 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


There  is,  however,  a  more  advanced  situnHon  about  half  a  mile  to  the  eRBtwnrdof  th« 
end  of  the  shunl,  that  may  easily  be  taken  up  ;  namely,  that  where  14  fathoms  is  marked 
on  the  plan,  fur  which  the  following  are  the  bearings : — The 

Btaringt.  N  Tthern  Direction  Hill S.  59°  W.  ) 

Mount  Aymonil N.  43"  W.  C  Mag. 

Peak  of  Cape  Orange, S.  22"  E.   ^ 

One  mile  more  in  advance,  to  the  S.  \V.,  would  still  be  a  better  berth,  but  great  cirn 
must  be  taken  not  to  ground  on  the  tail  of  tliu  shoal.  At  about  half  a  mile  or  more  to  the 
eastward,  tho  situation  would  be  more  secure. 

>houl(l  the  distant  land  behind  Cupe  (Gregory  be  seen,  which  makes  with  a  long  blue 
level  strip  of  land,  terminating  at  its  S.  W.  end  wiih  rather  a  blufl"  or  precipitous  t'HlJ.  it 
is  a  good  mark  for  the  above  anchorage.  The  full  or  extremity,  should  be  visible  in  tjie 
space  between  the  southernmost  and  central  of  the  Direction  liilia.  There  is  rIso  n  con- 
spicuous lump  on  the  same  land,  which  will  be  seen  a  little  to  the  eiistwiird  of  the 
northern  Direction  Hill;  and  the  Asses  Ears,  nearly  out  of  sight,  should  be  aeon  ii  little 
to  the  eastward  of  that  part  of  the  shore  of  Possession  Bay,  where  the  cliHy  coiiat  com- 
mences. 

Another  mark  for  the  approach  of  the  bank,  which  is  very  good  when  Mount  Aymond 
bears  more  westerly  than  N.  43^  W..  mag.,  is,  not  to  lose  sight  of  the  Asses  Eiuh.  At 
our  anchorage,  in  6  fathoms,  near  tho  dry  part  of  the  bunk,  they  were  lost  night  of  by  a 
rise  in  tho  land  ;  half  a  mile  to  iho  southward,  at  the  anchorage  marked  1 1  fathoms,  une 
of  them  re- appeared  above  the  land:  Mount  Aymond  at  the  same  time  bearing,  by  com- 
pass, N.  41"  W.,  mag.  But  this  rule  fails  to  the  westward,  or  nearer  the  Narrow,  for  the 
bank  then  trends  more  southerly,  and  the  Asses  Ears  are  visible  at  its  edge;  thn  west 
limit  of  this  rule  is,  as  bdforo  noticed,  when  Mount  Aymond  bears  about  N.  43°  \V, 
mag.  There  is,  also,  another  remark  worth  attending  to;  which  is,  that,  after  niissini! 
Cape  Possession,  Mount  Aymond  assumes  the  appearance  of  a  round  obtusely-peuked 
hill,  with  a  smaller  elevation  on  each  edge  of  its  outline ;  which  appearance  i«  preserved 
until  it  bears  N.  .50°  W.,  mag.,  and  then  the  easternmost  of  the  minor  elevations  gradu- 
ally disappears,  while  the  western  one  becomes  more  conspicuous. 

To  avoid  the  north  shoals,  do  not  get  the  North  Direction  Hill  to  bear  more  southerly 
than  .S.  5f)0  W.,  mag.;  and  the  mark  for  avoiding  the  reefs  that  extend'otf  Cnpe  Oninge 
is  not  to  get  the  same  Direction  Hdl  to  bear  more  westerly  thim  W.  by  S.  \  .S..  inai;..(t'or 
W.  by  S.  i  S.  will  just  pass  witliout  the  edge,)  until  Mount  Aymond  l)ears  N.  48°  W. 
mag.,  or  the  peak  of  Cape  Orange  south,  mug.,  when  the  fair  way  of  tiie  I'^irat  iXarrow 
will  be  o|)on,  bearing  S.  \V.  by  S.,  mag.  'i'lie  north,  or  north-western  .side  of  tho  First 
Narrow,  is  a  cliff  of  moderate  height,  and  makes  like  a  flat  table  laud.  When  ulireast  of 
Cape  Orange,  a  S.  S.  W-  mag.  course  must  be  steered.  The  tide  sets  ri^ht  ihruu"h' 
so  that  in  drifting,  which  with  the  wind  against  the  tide  is  the  safest  and  best  plan,  there 
is  no  daniier  of  being  thrown  upon  the  shoals.* 

The  First  Narrow  was  ct  lied  by  Sarniiento,  Angostura  do  Nuestra  .Senora  do  Espe- 
ranza.  He  describes  it  very  cornctly  to  be  3  leagues  long,  and  less  than  half  n  |«ague 
wide,  with  cliffy  shores  ;  the  tide  running  strong  ;  the  dej)tii  more  than  50  futlioins, sand 
and  pebbles  {cidlao ;)  and  on  the  north  sliore  there  is  a  beach  of  shingle.  In  tiiis  piirt, 
however,  as  discretion  must  be  the  best  guide,  it  will  be  necessary  merely  to  state  liie 
dangers  that  exist.  To  the  north  of  Point  Delgada,  (meaning  thin  or  sleniier.)  the  sJMiro 
is  fronted  by  extensive  shoals  that  dry  at  half  tide,  and  which,  being  dry  wlien  .Sannienio 
passed,  was  called  by  him  Point  Anegada  (drowned  land  ;)  these  shoiilil  not  be  ap- 
proached. Tho  soulli  shore,  also,  for  nearly  5  miles  to  the  west  of  Cape  Oi'aiige,  Ini?  a 
shoal  off  it,  but  it  does  not  extend  to  a  yreat  distance  from  the  beach  ;  beyouil  liiis  iris  not 
safe  to  approach  either  shore  within  half  a  mile,  for  each  is  fronted  by  a  bunk  tiiat  dries 
at  low  water.  The  western  end  of  the  Narrow,  on  the  north  shore,  Siiriiiieiilo's  Poiut 
Baranca,  (meaning  a  clili',)  has  a  considerable  reef  off  it.  upon  which  there  is  a  very 
large  quantity  of  kelp.  Point  Baraiica  boars  from  Cape  Gregory  N.  4f!io  K.,  and  is  1!) 
miles  distant. 

After  emerging  from  the  Narrow,  the  ship  should  be  allowed  to  drift  wiili  the  tide, the 
course  of  which  is  S.  .S.  W..  for  at  least  3  miles,  before  hauling  up  for  Cape  (irej^ory,  in 
order  to  avoid  the  ripplings.  which  rage  furiously  on  eiicl;  edge  of  the  bank.  1  liave  pass- 
ed twice  through  ihom  for  the  sake  of  proving  the  dejith,  and  once  anchori^d  witiiiii  tlii'ni, 
which  gave  me  an  opportunity  of  ascertaining  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  tide;  but  it  only  al- 

*RF.r.F  OFF  Cape  Or*!»ok. — This  reef  extends  olTto  the  E.  N.  K.  for  n  oonsidernblo  (llstanoo,    Bvroa 
»  struck  upon  it.  ns  dj.!  uUo  tlie  Sanw  Ciisilibi.    'I'lio  AdeoMH.u  seiiliiiir  ve.-isci,  in  Uiv'H,  aNo  struck  upon  it 

and  was  left  drv ;  iiiid  the  Hciigle,  in  (loiii!;  to  Iht  assisliirice,  croHfed  the  tiiil  of  it  lit  lii;;h  water,  own- 
sionallv  slriUiii^'  ill"  !;roiiii(l.  HouKaiiivillc  describes  its  position  thus:  "  Wlicii  the  iiillocliii  wliicii  1 
have  iiiinii'd  (tumre  tils  Aymond,"  (Agstis  Eurs,)  "oaly  ullur  two  to  sight  in  form  of  a  guto,  you  arc  up- 
positc  ihe  Huid  rocks." 


mmtmmm 


mmmm 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   COAST  FlL©f . 


tfri 


de  VLspe- 
If  i\  league 
hums,  siiiid 
this  piirt, 
ti)  state  the 
tilt!  sliiiro 
Siirmienio 
nut  l)»  iip- 
ti^i',  iiii:^  II 
ills  It  IS  not 
k  tliiit  dries 
iitii's  I'oiut 
is  a  very 
.,  mill  is  ID 


Point  Bar- 
ranca. 


tered  12  feet :  the  stream  or  current,  however,  set  at  3  iind  4  knots  the  whole  tide,  and 
'  there  wiis  aciircely  five  minutes  ahick  water.     It  is  an  anchorage  tliat  ought  not  to  be  taken 
up  without  the  greatest  necessity,  for  the  ripplings  break  over  the  deck,  and  the  security 
of  the  vessel  is  very  doubtful. 

POINT  BARRANCA  is  a  flat-topped  sand  hill,  the  position  of  which  being  given  in 
the  chart,  its  bearing  will  indicate  the  situation  of  the  ship ;  the  point  on  the  opposite 
side  Suriniento  called  Point  Bnxa  (low.) 

After  ranching  thus  far,  steer  W.  .S.  W.,  by  compass,  until  abreast  of  somn  remarkable 
peaked  hillocks  on  the  north  shore  ;  whore,  if  necessary,  anchoriigo  may  be  had  out  of  the 
tide,  ill  from  6  to  10  fathoms  ;  at  any  part  of  the  no  .::.irn  side  of  the  bay  the  anchorage 
is  good,  upon  a  clay  bottom  covered  with  broken  shells :  the  lead  brings  up  nothing  but 
gbeiis;  underneath,  however,  it  is  of  clay,  and  good  holding  ground. 

It  is  boat  to  anchor  near  the  shore  on  account  of  the  tide,  which  ripples  very  much  all 
over  the  centre  of  the  bay. 

The  peaked  hillock  above  mentioned  is  certainly  Sarmiento's  Point  Nuestra  Senora 
del  Valle  ;  to  the  eastward  of  it  is  St.  .Jago  Kay  ;  and  to  the  westward  his  buy  of  the  Eleven 
Thousand  Virgins.  When  abreast  of  the  r>oint,  the  land  and  bay  to  tho  north  of  Capo 
Gregory  will  be  easily  distinguished :  the  former  will  be  seen  first,  and  resembles  an  isl- 
and, tor  tho  laud  of  the  bay  is  flat  and  lov  •  but  a  very  conspicuous  hummock  will  also  be 
Been  half  way  between  it  and  the  flat  table  land,  as  soon  as  the  land  of  the  cape  becomes 
visible.    The  hummock  is  marked  on  the  chart. 

The  extremity  of  Cape  Gregory  bears  from  the  western  end  of  the  First  Narrow,  S. 
730  W..  (S.  501°  W.,  magnetic,)  distant  22  miles.  The  anchorage  is  from  two  to  two 
miles  and  a  half  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  the  cape,  abreast  of  the  north  end  of  the  sand-hills 
that  form  the  head-land,  and  abtmt  one  milo  from  the  shore,  iu  from  13  to  15  fahoms. 
The  bottom  is  excellent,  a  soft,  but  tenacious  mud,  which,  nea-er  the  shore,  is  of  a  stiffer 
quality.  At  low  water  a  sand-spit  extends  onf  for  one-third  or  nearly  half  a  mile  from 
the  shore,  close  to  which  there  are  7  fathoms  water.  Care  siiould  be  taken  not  to  ap- 
proach too  near. 

M  tho  anchorage  the  tide  turns  to  the  south-westward,  towards  the  cape,  for  two  ond 
8 half  or  throe  hours  before  it  begins  to  run  to  the  westward  in  the  Second  Narrow; 
which  should  be  attended  to.  for  a  ship  will  lose  much  ground  by  weighing  before  an  hour 
or  more  after  the  tide  has  turned. 

Upon  the  summit  of  the  land  of  the  cape,  four- fifths  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the 
eslreme  point,  is  a  remarkable  bush  ;  close  to  which  the  observations  were  made.  The 
bush  is  in  lat.  bi"  39'  3  '  S.,  and  long.  70"  7'  51"  W.  The  variation  of  the  compass  23=" 
34' E. 

The  country  abounds  with  guanacoes  and  ostriches,  and  tho  valley,  two  miles  to  tho 
westward  of  the  cape,  is  frequently  tho  abode  of  the  Patagoniau  Indians :  but  their  prin- 
cipal residence  is  upon  the  low  land  at  the  back  of  Pockttt's  Harbor  and  Quoin  Hill, 
where  guanacoes  are  more  abundant,  and  tho  country  more  open.  Ships  coinina  from 
the  soutliward  also  are  seen  by  them  at  a  great  ilistanco,  so  that  by  the  time  she  reaches 
Ciipe  (iregory  they  have  already  arrived  to  meet  her.  They  do  not,  however,  :  ee  ships 
coming  from  the  eastward  so  easily,  and  wo  were,  on  two  occasions,  two  or  three  days  at 
the  anchorage  before  it  was  known  that  we  were  present. 

They  are  very  friendly,  and  will  supply  guanaco  meal  at  a  small  price.  They  are  fond 
of  beads  and  ornaments,  but  particularly  of  knives,  and  the  larger  they  are  the  better. 
Swords  are  held  in  high  estimation  by  thouj,  as  well  us  li  ad,  for  the  purpose  of  arming 
their  bulas,  an  instrument  used  to  oiitanule  tho  legs  of  tlie  guanacoes  and  ostriches. 

They  also  barter  their  mantles  and  skins;  and  are  fond  of  sugar,  flour  matte,  (the 
Paraguay  tea,)  tobacco  and  horse  gear,  particularly  bits.  For  spirits  they  are  very  eager, 
but  are  contented  with  it  in  a  diluted  state.  At  our  last  interview  they  asked  for  muskets, 
powder,  and  ball,  the  use  of  which  they  have  lenrnnd  from  two  Portuguese  seamen,  who 
left  an  English  sailing  vessel  to  reside  with  them;  but  these  were  not  given,  and  it  is  to 
be  hoped  that  such  weapons  will  not  be  put  into  their  hands. 

THE  SECOND  NARROW  is  about  10  miles  long;  ond  with  a  favorable  tide,  which    Second  Nar- 
runs  five  or  six  knots,  is  very  quickly  passed.     With  an  .adverse  wind  a  ship  will  easily    tow. 
reath  an  anchorage  to  the  north  of  Klizuheth  Island. 

The  north  side  of  tho  Second  Narrow  is  very  shoal,  and  ought  not  to  be  approached, 
for  tho  ground  is  also  very  foul.  There  are  two  or  throe  very  inviting  bights  for  a  ship 
that  is  caught  with  the  tide,  but  it  is  not  advisable  to  anchor  in  them  ;  she  should  rather 
return  to  the  anchorage  olf  Cape  (Jrrogory. 

SUSANNA  COVE  is  where  Sarmiento  anchored  in  8  fathoms,  low  water,  half  a 
lenjuo  from  the  land,  good  bottom  ;  but  as  it  was  exposed  to  the  strength  of  the  tide,  he 
shifted  to  another  anchorage  about  half  a  league  west  of  Capo  (iregory,  where  the  anchor 
WI19  dropped  in  8  fathoms,  but  the  vessel  tailing  on  the  edge  of  the  shoal  in  3  fathoms,  he 
was  glud  to  make  his  escape. 


Susanna 
Cove. 


IPIJII II 


«70 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Narborough's 

PeckeU'a 

Harbor. 


High  water. 


The  south  shore  of  the  Second  Narrrow,  which  Narborough  called  the  Sweepstak 
Foreland,  is  composod  of  clifTs,   and  is.  I  believe,  of  bjld  approach.     The  pruixcii" 
head  in  the  centre  is  Sarniiento's  St.  Simon's  Head,  and  thu  western  end  he  mm  A 
Cape  St.  Vincent,  from  its  rnseniblance  to  that  of  Spain.     To  the  southward  of  tho  m  f 
ern  point  of  this  hoad,  Point  St.  Isidro,  which  is  a  low  sandy  point,  is  Fish  Cove  wh 
Bulkley  and  Cuuiinings  anchored  their  boat;  and  Sarmiento  says,  "We  anchored  hliu 
hind  a  point  bofure  noticed,  called  Santisidro,  in  a  small  bay,  of  low  land  and  simdyben  h 
in  10  fathoms,  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  tho  shore,  but  upon  voering  cable  the  ve«'  i 
was  in  7  fathoms ;  so  that  fearing  she  would  be  loft  dry,  from  the  great  rise  and  fall  f 
the  tides  hereabout,  wo  shifted  farther  out  to  15  fathoms,  but  the  anchor  dragged  and  w" 
subsequently  came  to  in  9  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  where,  at  low  water,  tho  depth  »»  « 
fathoms."*  '        ^  ^ 

Three  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Oracia,  tho  western  end  of  the  Second  Narrow 
on  the  north  side,  isOasy  Harbor,  so  called  by  Narborough  ;  it  is  a  secure  place  foram  ll 
vessels.  The  entrance  is  nearly  two  miles  long,  and  too  narrow  for  large  ships,  unl " 
the  weather  be  moderate,  when  they  might  drop  in  or  out  with  the  tide  :  the  depth  iosid^ 
is  from  .')  to  10  fathoms.  There  is  neither  wood  nor  water  to  bo  got,  and  therefore  n° 
indiicemnnt  to  enter  it:  a  plan  of  it  was  made.  It  is  described  by  Sir  J.  Navborouiihl 
and  Cardova  calls  it  Bird  Bay  (Ensenada  de  los  Paraxos.^)  °  '' 

NARBOROUGH'S  PhX'KKTT'S  HARBOR,  or,  as  Sarmiento  calls  it,  St.  Bar. 
tholomitw's  Bay,  is  H  miles  to  the  west  of  Cape  Gracia,  and,  although  very  ghonl,  offer  i 
a  good  shelter,  if  required,  for  small  vessels ;  but  the  space  is  very  confined  ;  tiie  HDchor 
age  without  is  almost  as  safe,  and  much  more  convenient.  The  distance  botwuen  thn 
two  points  of  entrance  is  nearly  two  miles,  but  from  the  north-east  shore  to  tho  smnliiol. 
and  of  tho  south-west  point,  the  whole  space  is  a  shoal,  upon  the  greater  part  of  wbirh 
the  sea  breaks  in  a  moderate  breeze. 

The  entrance  is  between  the  south-west  point  and  the  island,  and  is  rather  more  thnn 
one-fifth  of  a  mile  wide.     Haifa  mile  outside  tlie  anchorage  is  good,  in  7  fathoms;  ehoal  I 
ground  extend"  Tor  a  quarter  of  a  mile  off  the  point. 

The  bay.  which  is  lormed  by  Peckett's  Harbor  and  Elizabeth  Island,  is  extongive, 
well  sheltered,  with  an  easy  depth  of  water  all  over,  between  5  and  7  fathoms ;  tlie  nature  I 
of  the  bottom  is  clay,  and  offers  excellent  holding  ground.  In  the  centre  is  a  patch  of 
kelp ;  but  it  is  not  known  whether  the  depth  is  shoaler  in  that  part,  or  whether  it  pro- 
ceeds  from  the  bottom  being  rocky. 

The  tide  is  not  strong  to  the  westward  of  the  north  end  of  Elizabeth  lNland,§  but  runs  J 
with  considerable  velocity  in  the  deep  channel  between  it  and  the  Second  Narrow,    To 
the  southward  of  the  island  tho  stream  divides  into  two  directions,  and  very  soon  loses  jta 
strength ;  one  sets  down  the  south  side  of  the  island,  and  the  other  between  tho  ijlaudsof 
Santa  Martha  and  Magdalena.     This  is  the  flood  ;  the  ebb  sets  to  the  northwiiiii.    Tiie  [ 
ebb  and  flow  are  regular,  high  water,  at  the  full  and  change,  being  at  about  12  o'clock,     i 

There  is  good  anchorage,  out  of  the  strength  of  tide,  at  a  mile  to  the  north  of  Point  Sno 
Silvestre;  it  is  convenient  for  a  ship  to  leave  with  the  intention  of  passing  round  Kliiiubeth 
Island.  I  conceive  this  to  be  the  most  difficult  part  of  the  entrance  of  the  Sunit  of  Ma- 
galhaens.  for  the  tide  sets  across  the  passage  with  some  strength. 

The  passage  to  the  west  of  the  island  is  clear,  and  without  dantjer,  by  keepini'  in  the  I 
middle  of  the  channel ;  but  in  passing  down  the  south  side  of  Elizabeth  Isliuui  tlie  shoro 
should  be  kept  close  to,  to  avoid  being  thrown  upon  the  Islands  of  Santa  Martha  iinii 
Magdalena,||  although  I  believe  there  is  plenty  of  water  between  them,  for  Si'niiiento an- 
chored there  in  l!i  fathoms ;  as  well  as  to  clear  the  shoal  that  extends  olf  tho  suutiiwest  I 
end  of  the  latter  inland,  upon  which  we  did  not  find  less  water  than  3  fathoms  upon  any  I 
part;ir  but  the  ground  being  irregular,  and  much  kelp  strewed  about  it,  it  is  not  siife  to 
trust  too  much  to  appearances.     On  all  occasions  it  is  advisable  to  avoid  passinj;  tiiroughl 
kelp;  for  although  it  frequently  shoots  up  from   10,  ond  even  20  fathoms,  yet  wherever  I 
the  bottom  is  rocky,  there  it  is  to  be  found.     Tho  presence  of  this  vegetable  renders  the 
few  dangers  that  exist  in  the  navigation  of  the  strait  of  little  consequence,  fur  it  servtsas 
a  buoy  to  mark  the  existence  of  them,  and  it  is  only  by  a  careless  lookout  that  a  siiip  caa 
be  placed  in  a  dangerous  situation.     Another  advantage  in  kelp  is,  that  by  its  drift  itshuwa 
both  the  direction  and  the  velocity  of  the  tide. 


•  Sonuipnto.  p.  2fi7.  t  Nnrboroiigh,  p.  62  and  124.  t  Ultimo  ViuRc,  p.  lO;. 

^  Elizntioih  Island  wns  so  named  by  .Sir  Frum-is  Urokn.  Sartnionto  pnssod  its  nortli-eusl  end,  aod, 
con'idfrinp  it  h  purl  of  lIiH''oiUiiieiit.  ciillndit  I'oint  San  Siicentre.— (.Surmiento,  p.  2j.').) 

ll'I'lio  iKluiidsul'.Sniitu  Marlliii  uiid  Mugdalpiio,  ho  mimed  by  Surmiunto.  (p.  2.'>1,)  iiuvo  since  he.'ncal'eii 
by  odiiT  name!*;  dio  former  St  Burtbolomiiw,  the  latter  St.  Goorgo's, also  Punguin  Island.— [See .\ar- 
buroiieh'f*  Voyage,  p.  (12.1 

If  Shoul  utT  .Santa  Magdalena.    Simpson's  Joamal  says  there  are  3  fathomi  on  it  in  many  placei;  iIm  | 
least  water  fuuud  by  us  was  5  ratliomd. 


■W!^ 


^^m^m 


mmmmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


677 


frcp.io:. 

St  eim,  aid, 

« hen  called 
—[See  Nar- 

f  placei;  il» 


LAREDO  BAY  offers  good  anchorage  ia  the  centre  and  towards  the  north  side,  and  Laredo Bav. 
p„ticul«.ly  in  the  N.  W.  corner.  Off  the  south  point  is  a  large  patch  of  kelp,  araone  ''''"**' ^"J'* 
Lbicb  the  ground  is  shoal  and  toul.  '^  " 

At  Laredo  Bay  wood  rnny  be  procured,  and  there  is  a  fresh  water  lake  of  a  mile  in  di- 
meter ot  about  halt  a  mile  behind  the  beach,  nnuch  frequented  by  wild  ducks. 

For  the  purpose  of  anchorage  only,  the  bay  need  not  be  entered ;  because  a  very  good 
,nd  secure  berth  may  be  found  at  from  1  to  2  miles  off  it.  in  10  to  13  fathoms,  having  the 
§.  W.  extremity  ol  Llizabeth  Island  on  with,  or  a  little  open  of.  the  trend  of  Cape  Nejrro 
which  is  Byron's  Porpesse  Point.  *    ' 

We  know  scarcely  any  thing  of  the  south  side  of  St.  Philip's  Bay,  or  of  the  coast  be- 
tffeea  Cape  St.  Vincent  aud  Cape  Monmouth.  The  latter  is  a  lee  shore,  and  should 
not  be  approached  when  the  wind  is  northerly,  for  there  seems  to  be  no  harbor  or  shelter 
and  the  anchorage  must  be  much  exposed.  * 

Two  deep  inleto  were  seen  behind  Sweepstakes  Foreland,  from  the  summit  of  the 
table  land  near  Cape  Oregoiy,  one  of  which  may  probably  insulate  it,  but  this  was  not 
ascertained. 

Between  Cape  Negro  and  Sandy  Point,  which  is  Sarmiento's  Catalina  Bay,  good  an- 
chorage may  be  had,  from  one  to  two  miles  and  a  half  from  the  shore.     Here  the  coun-         ' '    ' 
try  begins  to  be  thickly  wooded,  and  to  assume  a  very  picturesque  appearance,  particu- 
larly in  the  vicinity  of  Sandy  Point. 

SANDY  POINT,  Sarmiento's  Cape  de  San  Antonio  de  Padua,  projecto  for  more  than  Sandv  Point 
a  mile  from  th  j  line  of  coast,  and  should  not  be  passed  witliin  a  mile.  A  shoal  projects 
olf  it  in  an  east  direction,  (magnetic.)  The  mark  for  its  south  edge  is  a  single  tree  in  a 
remarkable  clear  part  of  the  couniry,  (a  park-like  meadow.)  near  the  shore,  on  the  south 
lide  of  the  point,  in  a  line  with  a  deep  ravine  in  the  mountain  behind.  One  mile  and  a 
half  from  the  point  wo  had  no  bottom  with  18  fathoms. 

To  the  southward  of  Sandy  Point,  as  far  ns  Point  St.  Mary,  good  anchorage  may  be 
had  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  in  1 1  and  12  fathoms,  sand  and  shells,  over 
clay.  At  the  edge  of  the  kelp,  which  fronts  the  shore,  there  are  5  and  6  fathoms ; 
JO  that  with  the  wind  off  shore,  a  ship  may  anchor  or  sail  along  it  very  close  to  the  coast, 
by  keeping  outside  the  kelp.  The  squalls  off  the  land  are  very  strong,  sometimes  so 
much  BO  as  to  lay  a  ship  on  her  broadside.  It  is  not  prudent,  therefore,  to  carry  much 
gall  in  coasting  this  part ;  and  it  is  necessary  to  have  the  quarter  boats  secured  with  gripes, 
because  the  wind,  for  a  moment,  blows  with  the  force  of  a  hurricane.  These  land  squalls 
are  denominated  by  the  sealers,  "  williwaws." 

POINT  ST.  MARY,  in  lat.  53°  21'  40".  is  12i  miles  to  the  south  of  Sandy  Point,    Point  St. 
and  may  be  known  by  the  land  trending  in  to  the  southward  of  it,  forming  Fresh-water   Mary. 
Bay.    It  has  also  a  high  bank  close  to  the  beach,  with  two  patches  bare  of  trees,  except- 
ing a  few  dead  stumps.     All  the  points  to  the  northward  are  low  and  thickly  wooded 

Asthe  bay  opens,  the  bluff  points  at  its  south  end  become  visible.     There  is  also  a  reraark- 
I  able  round  hill  a  short  distance  behind  the  centre  of  the  bay,  and  a  valley  to  the  south  of 
it,  through  which  a  river  flows  and  falls  into  the  bay. 

It  is  convenient  for  wooding  at.  but  from  the  river  being  blocked  up  by  much  drift  tim- 
ber,  watering  is  difficult.  The  proximity,  however,  of  Port  Famine  renders  this  of  no 
material  consequence. 

When  the  wind  is  from  the  northward,  a  swell  is  thrown  into  the  bay;  but  no  danger 
need  be  apprehended  from  its  being  open  to  the  eastward,  for  the  wind  seldom  blowa 
from  that  quarter,  excepting  in  the  winter,  and  then  rarely  with  great  strength.  If  it 
I  does,  the  holding  ground  is  good,  and  with  good  geer  there  is  no  danger. 

In  standing  into  tlio  bay  from  the  northward,  keep  within  three-quarters  to  half  a  mile 
Ifromtlie  coast,  in  10  or  11  fathoms ;  and  passing  Point  St.  Mary,  steer  on  towards  the 
I  bluff  points  at  the  south  end  of  the  bay,  until  the  south  pitch  of  the  Centre  Mount  bears 
JW.  S.W.,  when  you  will  be  clear  of  the  kelp  that  extends  off  the  north  side  of  the  bay, 
I  among  which  I  believe  there  is  a  sufficiency  of  water,  but  the  ground  is  foul.  Round  its 
ledge  there  are  6  and  7  fathoms.  Having  the  Mount  bearing  as  above,  steer  for  it.  or  a 
[little  to  the  south  of  it.  and  anchor  in  9  fathoms,  sandy  mud  over  clay,  which  will  be  with 
■the  tbiiowiDg  bearings : 

PointSt.  Mary N.  15°  W.) 

OuterTrend N.    9     W. 

Centre  Mount  (south  pitch) S.   74^   W.  I  Mag. 

Entrance  of  River S.   35     W. 

South  Bluff ....S.  21     E.J 

A  good  berth  may  be  ^ad  much  nearer  the  shore  in  6  fathoms,  towards  which  the  depth 

jradually  decreases.    If  the  anchorage  is  used  merely  as  a  stopping  place,  the  first  is  best, 

nr  the  wind  near  the  shore  is  apt  to  blow  and  veer  about. 

Between  Fresh-water  Bay  and  Point  Santa  Anna,  the  coast  is  very  bold,  and  so  steep 

s  to  offer  no  anchorage,  excepting  in  the  bay  that  is  formed  by  the  reef  off  Rocky  Point; 

kut  it  is  siubU  and  incouTenient  to  weigh  from,  should  the  wind  be  southerly. 

37 


578 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Point  Santa 
Anna. 


Port  Famine. 


Should  the  day  be  advanced,  it  ii  better  to  anchor  in  Freah-wnter  Dny  thnn  run  th 
riak  of  being  under  WHy  all  nl^ht,  unleaa  it  bo  in  the  Rummer,  with  uiooii-liuht  and  th 
weather  liltely  to  be  fine.  In  thia  climate,  however,  the  latter  ia  very  douhlful,  for  wat 
ther  changea  ao  auddenly  that  no  dependence  can  be  placed  upon  appearancoa, 

POINT  SANTA  ANNA  will  appear,  on  atanding  down  near  the  coast,  to  be  theter 
miuHtion  of  the  land  ;  it  ia  a  long  point  extending  into  the  aea,  having  at  the  extreinitv 
clump  of  treea.     It  beara  from  Cape  Valentyn  S.  47i°  W.,  mag.     On  upproiiching  it 
the  diatont  point  of  Cape  St.  laidro  will  be  aeen  beyond  it ;  but  there  can  bo  no  doubt  n 
mintalio  in  recognizing  it.  ' 

Along  the  whole  extent  of  the  coast,  between  the  Point  Santa  Anna  and  Eiizobnth  hi 
and.  the  flood  seta  to  the  southward  and  the  ebb  to  the  northward,  and  it  is  hii;h  whIo 
about  12  o'clock  at  full  and  change.  The  variation  ia  about  2.')°  west.  Tho  streiiith  of 
the  tide  ia  not  great,  but  frequently  after  n  southerly  wind  there  is,  in  the  ofling,  Hcur 
rent  to  the  northward,  independent  of  the  tide.  In  winter  the  tides  occaainniilly  tino  vprv 
high,  and  on  one  occaaion,  in  the  month  of  June,  nearly  overflowed  the  wliolo  of  tlie  low 
land  on  the  west  side. 

PORT  FAMINE.— Standing  into  Port  Famine,  paaa  round  Point  Santa  Anna  if 
with  a  leading  wind,  at  one-fifth  of  a  mile,  in  17  fathoms;  but  if  the  wind  is  scnnty  do 
not  get  too  near,  on  account  of  the  eddy  tide,  which  sometimes  sets  towardu  the  point  -■ 
Steer  in  for  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  for  the  summit  of  Mount  St.  Philip,  keeping  it  ov» 
the  centre  of  the  depth  of  tho  bay  ;  that  is,  half  way  between  tho  rivulet,  (which  will  h. 
easily  distinguished  by  a  small  break  in  the  trees,)  and  the  N.  W.  end  of  tiie  cleitibank 
OD  the  west  side  of  the  bay.  Thia  bank  being  clear  of  treea,  and  covered  with  grass  i« 
very  conspicuous.  Keep  on  this  course  until  tho  mouth  of  Sedger  River  is  open,  and 
upon  abutting  in  the  points  of  ita  entrance,  shorten  sail  and  anchor  in  9,  8,  or  7  fathomi 
as  convenient.  The  best  berth,  in  the  summer,  is  to  anchor  over  towards  the  west  side 
in  9  fathoms,  with  Cape  Valentyn  in  ii  line  with  Point  Santa  Anna  ;  but  in  the  winter 
aeasnn,  with  N.  E.  winds,  the  best  berth  is  more  in  the  centre  of  the  bay. 

The  strongest  winds  ore  from  the  south-west.  It  blows  also  hard  sometimes  from 
Bouth,  and  occasionally  afresli  gale  out  of  the  valloy,  to  thn  south  of  Mount  bt.  Philip,— 
Unless  a  long  stay  be  meditated,  it  would  be  suflicient  to  moor  with  n  kddge  to  the  n!  £ 
The  ground  is  excellent  ail  over  the  port,  being  a  stifl' tenacious  ciny.  Landing  may  be 
almost  always  efl'ected,  excepting  in  easterly  gales,  on  one  side  or  the  other.  There  ii 
fire-wood  in  nbundiince  on  the  beaches,  and  wells  containing  excellent  fre8li  water  were 
dug  by  us  at  tho  north-west  extremity  of  the  clear  part  of  Point  Santa  Anmi,  on  the 
bank  above  the  third  or  westernmost  small  shingle  bay.  The  water  of  tlie  rivur,  as  well 
as  of  the  ponds,  of  vliich  there  are  many  upon  the  flat  shore  of  tliu  weaterii  ^ido  of  the 
port,  is  very  good  for  present  use,  but  will  not  keep  in  consequence  of  its  flowin; 
through  on  immense  mass  of  decomposed  vegetable  matior  ;  but  tho  wnter  of  the  wells 
drains  through  the  ground,  and  not  only  keeps  well,  but  is  remarkably  cleiir  and  well 
tasted.  Their  situation  is  marked  on  the  plan,  and  fur  some  time  our  traces  will  not  fail 
to  show  the  road. 

Our  observatory,  the  situation  of  which  is  indicated  by  the  stem  of  n  tree  IG  inches  in 
diameter,  placed  upright,  about  8  feet  under  and  3  above  the  ground,  bunked  up  by  a 
iiit^A  water,  mound  is  in  lat.  53°  38'  1'2",  and  70°  54'.  High  water  at  full  and  change  nt  IJ  o'clock; 
the  ebb  sets  to  the  northward,  and  the  flood  to  the  southward  ;  but  tho  rise  and  fiilllsviry 
irregular,  depending  entirely  upon  tho  prevalence  of  the  winds,  northerly  and  eusnily 
winds  causing  high  tides,  and  westerly  and  south-westerly  low  tides.  The  VHriiition  ji 
about  23°  30'. 

Of  the  tides  in  Possession  Boy  and  the  First  Narrow,  we  have  had  too  little  oxperieoce 
to  enable  us  to  give  a  very  cb^ar  account;  I  shall,  therefore,  hero  conhno  myself  ineruly 
to  auch  observations  as  may  be  of  service  to  the  navigator. 

To  the  south-east  of  Cape  Possession  it  is  high  water  at  4h.  56-n.  bpfnrn  the  mooDjI 
passage  ;  but  the  stream  of  tide  continues  to  run  in  until  two  hours  uftnr  the  water  hat 
ceased  to  rise.     The  easterly  tide  commences  at  2h.  5nm.  before  tha  culmination. 

The  same  is  the  case  us  far  as,  and  even  in,  the  First  Narrow,  excpptinn  in  the  timpi, 
In  the  centre  of  Possessinn  Bay.  near  the  bank,  it  wus  hi<;h  water  at  .'III.  .')lm.  before ihej 
moon's  passage,  and  the  tide  turned  to  the  eastward  ut  noon,  or  Ob.  3'Jiii.  after  the  pas- 
sage. This  observation  was  made  on  the  day  of  full  moon.  The  rise  was  28  feet,  but 
at  an  anchorage  more  to  the  westward,  near  the  south-west  end  ofthe  bank.itruseSo 
feet,  and  ran  at  the  rate  of  six  knots  and  a  quarter.  In  the  First  Narrow  tlie  east«ri{ 
tide  commences  at  noon,  (full  and  change.) 

At  the  anchorage  in  Gregory  Boy  the  easterly  tide  commenced  20  minutes  earlier  tki. 
in  the  First  Narrow.  In  the  Second  Narrow  the  tides  are  two  and  a  half  or  three  houn| 
later  l>efore  they  turn.  To  the  westward  of  the  Second  Narrow  high  nndlowwal 
take  place  regularly  with  the  set  of  the  tide,  and  the  former  occurs,  at  full  and  chaogei 
within  •  few  mioutea  of  noon.  The  rite  and  fall  ia  iuconsiderable ;  the  greatest  we  ei< 
p«ri«Dced  wai  eight  feet. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


679 


Strait  of  Magalhaent,  Dawion  Island,  Admiralty  Sound,  the  Oabriel,  Coekhum.  ant' 

Barbara  Ckannels. 


St 


USKLRSS  BAY  was  examined  in  the  iiope  of  iu  communJcatinR  with  the  supposed    V,eleu  Bay. 
jt.  SebLHtmu  Clmni.el,  ..t  the  old  chnrt«;  but  it  proved  to  be  terminated  by  low  land  * 

r««chii.g.  perhaps,  acrosH  th«  country,  toward.  Cape  St.  K»piritu  Santo.  It  ii  more  than 
30  inileB  deep,  and  trom  12  to  20  wide,  and  ent  rely  exposed  to  the  south-we.t.  The 
north  shore  airords  no  shelter,  but  on  the  south  there  is  an  indentation  of  the  coaat  line 
under  the  hill  called  Nose  Peak,  that  may  possibly  nftord  a  sheltered  anchoraae 

The  termination  of  the  (lat  table  ridge,  extending  to  the  N.  E.  from  Point  Boaueron 
,  DHiiie  of  Sarmiento's,  meaning  an  opening,  is  abrupt  and  very  precipitous 

This  country  abounds  with  guanacoes,  and  the  Indians  are  probably  more  dependent 
OD  hunting  than  fishing  for  their  subsistence,  for  we  observed  their  fires  upon  the  hills  at 
t  distance  from  the  coast.  "^  ' 

DAWSON  ISLAND,  which  fronts  Useless  Bay,  and  the  deep  inlet,  called  Admiralty  Dawion  i«^ 
Sound,  >8  40  miles  long,  and  about  20  broad.  Ita  northern  extremity.  Cape  Valentyn  is  and 
low.  but  becomes  visible  in  passing  down  the  opposite  shore,  between  Sandy  Point  and 
Kresh-water  Bay.  Mount  Graves,  however,  is  seen  from  i  much  greater  distance  On 
the  wostorn  side  of  the  island  there  are  but  two  places  in  which  vessels  can  anchor  viz  • 
Loiniis  Bay  and  Port  San  Antonio,  but  both  being  on  a  lee  shore,  they  are  not  'to  be 
recommended.  Lomas  Bay  la  a  deep  bight,  sufficiently  sheltered  from  S.  W.,  but  quite 
exposed  to  the  north-west  and  westerly  winds,  which,  during  the  winter,  are  thb  most 
prevslent. 

Lieutenant  Graves  remarks  that  Lomas  Bay,  although  only  tolerably  sheltered  from 
the  prevailing  winds,  would,  from  its  extent,  (six  miles  duop.)  and  nature  of  the  bottom,  a  - 
BtirtbUie  cliiy,  allbid  good  shelter  for  vessels  of  any  draft  or  burthen.  The  appearance  of 
til-  shores  also  sooins  to  favor  such  an  opinion,  tor  scarcely  any  drift  wood  was  found 
t.ir('.vn  up,  even  in  those  |)arts  which  were  moat  exposed  to  the  surf.  Wood  is  suffi- 
ciently plentiful,  and  wator  very  abundant.  This  buy  appoart  at  certain  seasons  to  be 
much  resorted  toby  the  Indi.ins,  for  upwards  of  twenty  wigwams  were  seen  near  the 
beach. 

Between  Lomas  Bay  and  Capo  St.  Valentyn,  there  is  no  landing,  even  for  a  boat,  ex- 
cepting at  Presorvaiiou  Cave,  which  aflbrds  only  just  room  enough  to  beach  one  of  small 
lize. 

PORT  SAN  ANTONIO,  which  is  situated  about  the  centre  of  the  westcoast  oppo-    Port  San 
siieUi  San  Nicholas  Bay,  lias  the  appearanco  of  being  well  sheltered,  but  during  a  fort-    Antonio. 
night  that  we  spent  there  we  experienced  so  much  inconvenience,  and  even  risk  from 
llm  violonce  of  the  squalls,  that  we  wore  obliged  to  secure  tlio  vessel  with  three  anchors. 
Wi  „Hu  found  some  difficulty  in   leaving  it,  on  account  of  tlie  baffling  winds,  as  well  as 
,;-«  IV    ow  width  of  the  passage,  for  w«  went  out  by  the  north  entrance. 

r:.is  place  received  the  distinguishing  epithet  of  Port  from  Cordova,  and  is  described 
by  him  to  be  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide;  instead  of  wliich,  it  is  scarcely  one-third  of 
that  widtii,  and  dos.irves  the  name  only  of  a  cove.  It  is  a  very  unfit  place  for  a  ship,  or, 
indeed,  t\)r  any  vessel  to  ontor,  especially  when  there  are  so  many  much  better  places  on 
tht)  opposite  or  continental  shore. 

riie  anchorago  is  formed  by  a  channel  within  the  islands  North  Island  and  San  Juan 
Island,  in  which,  particularly  at  the  north  end,  are  several  isloU.  The  anchor  may  be 
(Iroppod  in  from  10  to  l.'j  fathoms,  off  a  small  bench  in  Humming-bird  Cove,  which  is  si- 
tuated on  the  inner  side,  and  about  half  n  mdo  from  the  south  end  of  San  Juan  Island. 
From  the  west  end  of  North  Island  a  reef  extends  off  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  an(3  to  the 
southward  are  two  small  islets,  which  may  be  passed  on  either  side.  North  Island  is  se- 
paraied  from  San  Juan  Island  by  a  narrow  and  impassable  strait. 

The  south  entrance  is,  perlia|)s.  the  best.  althouj;h  with  a  northerly  wind  the  northern 
should  be  pretoried.  There  is  no  danger  but  what  is  evident:  the  ground,  however,  is 
not  very  clean  until  you  reach  Humming-bird  Cove. 

The  south  entrance  is  tolerably  wide.  In  entering,  haul  round  the  south  point  of  San 
Juan  Island,  for  near  the  shore  of  the  eastern  side  there  is  a  rock  under  water.  Oppo- 
site to  Humming-bird  Cove,  in  a  small  bight,  there  is  a  stream  of  fresh  water. 

PORl'  VALDKZ  is  a  deep  inlet,  fronting  W.  N.  W.,  and  not  at  all  inviting  to  enter.    Port  Faldez. 
From  the  appearance  of  the  hills,  squalls  must  be  very  frequent,  and  blow  with  the  great- 
est violence  ;  fur  trees  are  seen  blown  up  by  the  roots,  in  long  lines,  evidently  caused  by 
the  destructive  force  of  the  winds. 
The  ebb  tide  sets  to  the  north  through  the  channel.  THde. 

THE  GABRIEL  CHANNEL  separates  Dawson  Island  from  the  Tierra  del  Fuego.    The  Gabriel 
It  is  merely  a  ravine  of  the  slate  formation,  into  which  the  water  has  found  its  way,  and    Channel. 
inrobited  the  island.    It  extends  precisely  in  the  direction  of  the  strata,  with  almost  pa- 
nllel  shores.    It  is  25  miles  long,  and  from  half  a  mile  to  one  mile  and  a  half  wide,  the 


sso 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT- 


Mount 
Buckland. 


Port  Cooke. 

Brookei 
Harbor. 

Admiralty 
Soutul. 


Parry  Har- 
bor, 


Non-Entry 
Bay. 
Fox  Bay-. 


Harris  Bay. 
mUes  Bay. 


narrowesi  part  being  in  the  centre.  The  north  dhore  is  a  ridge  of  slate,  rising  abruptly 
to  a  shurp  edge,  and  then  as  abruptly  descending  on  the  opposite  side,  where  it  forms  a 
valley,  which,  nad  it  been  a  little  deeper,  would  have  been  filled  by  water,  and  have  be- 
come another  channel  like  the  Gabriel. 

The  south  sii!**  of  the  Gabriel  Channel  is  formed  by  a  high  mass  of  mountains,  pro- 
bably  the  most  elevaCfid  land  in  the  Tierra  del  Fuego.  Among  many  of  its  high  peaks 
are  iwo  more  conspicuous  than  the  rest.  Mount  Siirmiento  and  Mount  Bucltland.  The 
first  is  G,800  feet  high,  and  rising  from  a  broad  base,  terminates  in  two  peaked  summits 
bearing  from  each  other  N.  E.  and  S.  W.,  and  are  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  nsundHr.' 
From  the  northward  it  appears  very  much  like  the  crater  of  a  volcano ;  but  when  viewed 
from  the  westward,  the  two  peaks  are  in  a  line,  and  its  volcanic  resemblance  ceaHes.  It 
is  noticed  by  Sarmiento  as  well  as  by  Cordova,  in  the  journals  of  their  respective  voyages. 
Sarmiento  calls  it  Volcan  Nevado,  (the  Snowy  Volcano.) 

It  is  the  most  remarkable  mountain  in  the  strait:  but  from  the  state  of  the  climate  nDd 
its  being  clothed  with  perpetual  snows,  it  is  almost  always  enveloped  in  condensed  vapor. 
During  a  low  temperature,  however,  particularly  with  a  N.  '^.  or  S.  E.  wind,  when  the 
sky  is  often  cloudiest;,  it  is  exposed  to  view,  and  presents  a  magnificent  iippearance. 
From  its  great  height  apd  "ituation  it  served  our  purpose  admirably  to  connect  tiie  points 
of  the  survey.  It  was  seen,  and  bearings  of  it  were  taken,  from  the  following  dlstnnt 
stations,  viz :  EI  uueih  Island,  Port  Famine,  Cape  Holland,  Port  Gallant,  and  Mount 
Sky  ring,  at  the  south  entrance  of  the  Barbara  Channel. 

MOUNT  BUCKLAND  is,  by  estimation,  about  4,000  feet  high.  It  is  a  pyramidal 
block  of  slate,  witlia  sharp  pointed  aoex,  and  entirely  covered  with  perpetual  snow. 

Between  tliese  mountams  the  suinmit  of  the  range  is  occupied  by  an  extensive  glacier 
the  constant  dissolution  of  which  feeds  the  innumerable  cascades  that  pour  large  bo- 
dies of  water  down  the  rocky  precipices  overhanging  the  south  shore  of  the  Gabriel 
Channel. 

At  the  extremity  of  the  channel  is  Fitton  Harbor ;  and  on  the  opposite  side  of  Cape 
Rowlette  are  Pur*^  Cooke  and  Brookes  Harbor. 

PORT  COOKE  is  a  very  convenient  and  useful  port.  It  is  sheltered  by  a  high  wooded 
island.     The  anchorage  is  otf  the  rivulet  on  the  west  side,  in  9  fathoms. 

BROOKES  H.\RBOR.,  like  Fitton  Harbor,  is  spacious,  but  not  good  as  a  port,  for 
the  water  is  deep,  and  the  anchorages,  being  in  coves,  are  not  easy  of  access  witliuut  the 
labor  of  towing. 

ADMIRALTY  SOUND  extends  for  4.3  miles  to  the  S.  E.  into  the  land  of  Tierra 
del  Fuego.  It  is  7  miles  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  gnidually  diminishes  tu  3.  Quits 
north  bide  the  shore  is  very  straight,  but  the  south  side  has  two  deep  inlets,  Ainsworth 
and  Parry  H'irbors.  It  terminates  in  a  bay,  aifording  anchorage  in  from  10  tu  15  tutu- 
cms,  but  very  mmh  exposed  to  N.  W.  winds,  which,  I  should  think,  from  the  funnel 
shape  of  the  sound,  would  blo\/  with  furious  strength.  On  the  north  side  of  the  bay  is 
Mount  Hope,  a  lofty  insulated  mass  of  rock,  but  to  the  south  of  it  lies  a  considerable  tract 
of  low  land,  over  which  the  view  W'.is  unobstructed  for  a  considerable  distance,  and  was 
bounded  by  a  distant  mountain,  in  the  direction  of  the  position  of  Ciiptnin  Basil  Hail's 
Volcano.*  in  lat.  b4°  48',  long.  68°.  If  tha  volcano  exists  it  is  most  probably  the  above 
ninuntain,  but  we  saw  nothing  to  indicate  tlie  appearance  of  its  being  in  n-<  eruptive  state. 
It  is  placed  on  the  chart  from  Captain  Hall's  authority. 

In  Ainsworth  Harlmr  there  is  anchorage  at  the  bottom,  on  the  west  sirio.  The  moun- 
tains, at  the  back  of  the  harbor,  are  capped  by  an  enormous  glacier  that  descends  into  tiie 
Bea. 

PARRY  HARBOR  is  about  five  miles  deep  and  three  wide.  At  the  entrance  on  the 
west  side  there  are  two  coves,  either  of  which  offer  a  convenient  stoppiug-pluco  tor  a 
■mall  vessel. 

1'he  eastern  side  of  Dawson  Island  is  very  much  intersected  by  deep  inlets,  particuliir- 
ly  Brenton  Soutd,  and  ita  termination,  Port  Owen,  which  very  nearly  communicates  with 
Lomas  Bii^ ,  the  dividing  land  being  low  and  marshy. 

The  large  central  island  in  Brenton  Sound,  Wickham  Island,  is  high,  and  there  is  a 
remarkably  nharp-peaked  hill  upon  it,  which  is  seen  in  clear  weather  from  "oit  Famine, 

NON-KN  TRY  BAY  was  not  examined.  It  appeared  to  offer  snug  anchorage.  Tiie 
depth  between  the  pointa  of  entrance  was  from  9  to  19  tiithoms. 

FOX  BAY. — The  bottom  and  south  side  are  shoal,  but  the  banks  are  indicated  by  kelp, 
A  rapid  stream  of  water  empties  itself  into  the  bay.  The  anchorage  in  Fox  Bay  is  in 
from  3  to  5  fathoms.  The  north  head,  Steep  Tree  Bluff,  ia  of  bold  approach ;  withia  20 
yards  of  the  she  re  ihe  depth  is  9  fathoms. 

HARRIS  BAY  is  an  indenture  of  the  coast,  two  miles  deep. 

WILLES  BAY«  off  which  is  Offing  Island,  by  which  it  mapr  be  known,  although  of  I 
small  extent,  affords  excelk.it  anchorage,  upon  a  mud  bottom,  in  9  or  10  fatlioms.   The 


A  LooChoa  story,  probably.    See  B.  Hall,s  book.— E  &  G.  W.  B. 


wmm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


6S1 


High  water. 


Mount  Bo- 
queron. 


tide  rises  and  feljs  about  6  feet.  It  is  high  water,  at  full  and  change,  about  12  o'clock. 
At  the  bottom  of  Willes  Bay  is  Philip  Gidley  Cove,  where  a  small  vessel  may  lie  in  per- 
fect security.  There  are  not  less  than  3  fathoma  in  the  entrance,  and  inside,  in  most 
parts,  there  is  the  same  depth. 

CAPE  ST.  VALENTYN  is  the  northern  extremity  of  Dawson  Island.    It  is  low,    Cape  St. 
and  has  a  small  hummock  near  the  pomt.     Between  the  two  points  which  form  the  cape    VaUnttin. 
there  is  a  slight  incurvation  of  the  shore,  which  would  afford  shelter  to  small  vessels  from 
any  wind  to  the  southward  of  east  or  west;  but  the  water  is  shoal,  and  the  beach,  below 
high  water  mark,  is  of  large  stones.    The  coast  to  the  south-west  is  open,  and  perfectly 
unsheltered:  it  is  backed  by  cliffs.     The  bench  is  of  shingle. 

The  opening  of  Magdalen  Sound  was  first  noticed  by  Sarmiento.  Coming  from  the 
northward  it  appears  to  be  a  continuation  of  the  strait,  and  it  is  not  until  after  passing 
Cape  San  Isidro  that  the  true  channel  becomes  evident.  It  extends  in  a  southerly 
direction  for  20  miles,  and  is  bounded  on  either  side  by  high  and  precipitous  hills,  par- 
ticularly on  the  west  shore.  The  eastern  entrance  of  the  sound,  Anxious  Point,  is  a 
low  .mrrow  tongue  of  land,  with  an  island  off  it.  Opposite  to  it  is  a  steep  mountain, 
called  by  Sarmiento  the  Vernal,  (or  summer  house,)  trom  a  remarkable  lump  of  rock  oa 
its  summit. 

Under  this  mountain  is  Hope  Harbor,  a  convenient  stopping-place  for  small  vessels 
bound  through  the  sound.  The  entrance  is  narrow,  with  kelp  across  it,  indicating  a 
rocky  bed,  on  which  we  had  not  less  than  7  fathoms.  Inside  it  opens  into  a  spacious 
basiu,  with  good  anchorage,  in  4  fathoms,  sheltered  from  all  winds,  excepting  the  squalls  ^ 

off  the  high  land,  which  must  blow  with  furious  violence  during  a  south-westerly  eale. 
This  littld  port  is  much  frequented  by  Indians,  for  wo  found  many  wigwams  on  the  south. 
side,  some  of  which  wore  occupied  by  the  women  and  children  of  a  tribe,  the  men  being 
absent  on  a  fishing  excursion. 

To  the  south  of  Hope  Harbi.  .  between  the  Vernal  and  Mount  Boqueron,  is  Stokes' 
Inlet.  It  is  three  miles  long,  with  deep  water  all  over :  there  is  a  cove  on  its  north  side, 
but  neither  so  good  nor  so  accessible  as  Hope  Harbor.  In  the  entrance  of  the  inlet  are 
three  islets,  (Rees'  Islets.) 

MOUNT  BOQUERON,  the  extremity  of  which  is  Squally  Point,  is  a  very  precipi- 
tous and  lofty  mountain,  about  3000  feet  high,  and  having  on  its  summit  three  small  but 
remirkably  conspicuous  peaks.  It  is  the  eastern  head  of  Stokes'  Inlet,  and  forms  a  part 
of  the  western  shore  of  Magdalen  Sound.  The  squalls  that  blow  off  this  during  a  south- 
west gale,  are  most  furious,  and  dangerous,  unless  little  sail  be  carried.  On  one  occasion 
our  decked  sailing  boat  was  7  houi  s  in  passing  it.  The  sound  here  is  not  more  than  2j 
miles  wide.  On  the  opposite  shore,  within  Anxious  Point,  is  an  islet  extending  to  the 
south-east  for  2  or  3  miles,  but  is  narrow  and  unimportant. 

SHOLL  BAY  is  a  small  bight  of  the  coast  line,  5  miles  to  the  south  of  Squally  Point.    Shall  Bay. 
There  is  a  reef  off  it,  the  position  of  which  is  pointed  out  by  kelp. 

On  the  opposite  shore  is  Keats'  Sound.  It  extends  to  the  south-east  for  6  or  8  miles, 
lod  is  between  4  and  5  miles  wide. 

In  the  centre  of  Magdalen  Sound,  abreast  of  the  above  opening,  is  a  rocky  islet;  and 
at  a  short  distance  to  the  southward,  on  the  western  coast,  is  a  bay  and  group,  called 
Labyrinth  Islands,  among  which  small  vessels  may  find  good  anchoraj^e. 

TRANSITION  BAY  is  deep,  and  of  little  importance.     Four  miles  farther,  at  Cape    Transition 
Turn,  the  shore  trends  suddenly  round.     Here  Magdalen  Soand  terminates,  and  Cock-   Bay. 
burn  Channel  commences. 

On  the  opposite  shore,  to  the  south  of  Keats'  Sound,  there  ure  no  objects  worth  no- 
ticing, excepting  Mount  .Sarmiento,  which  has  been  already  described,  and  Pyramid  Hill, 
which  was  found  to  be  2500  feet  high. 

The  bottom  of  Magdalen  Sound  is  6  miles  wide,  but  at  Cape  Turn  the  channel  nar- 
rows to  2  miles,  and  in  one  part  is  not  more  than  l?  mile  wide.  The  south  shore  is  much 
brolien,  and  there  are  many  sounds  penetrating  deeply  into' the  land,  which,  in  this  part, 
according  to  Captain  Fitzroy's  survey  of  Thieves'  Sound,  is  7  miles  wide.  Eleven  miles 
more  to  the  westward,  at  Courtenay  Sound,  the  width  of  the  peninsula  is  not  more  than 
3  miles. 

WARP  BAY.  alt'nough  exposed  to  southerly  winds,  is  a  convenient  stopping-place:    Warp  Bay. 
a  plan  was  made  of  it. 

STORMY  BAY  is  a  very  wild  unsheltered  place,  unfit  for  any  vessels  to  stop  at.     At   Stormy  Bay. 
the  anchorage  the  water  is  deep,  17  to  20  fathoms,  and  the  bottom  rocky.     The  bay  is 
strewed  over  with  shoals,  the  existence  of  which  is  marked  by  kelp;  these  narrow  the 
cliannel  so  much  as  to  render  the  entrance  and  e^it  both  intricate  and  difficult  for  any 
but  a  small  and  hardy  vessel. 

PARK  BAY  is  both  very  snug  and  secure,  with  good  anchorage  in  12  fathoms,  sand   Park  Bay. 
and  mud.    It  has  the  same  disadvantage  as  Stormy  Bay,  in  being  on  the  lee  side  of  the 
channel,  and  is,  therefore,  difficult  to  leave.     There  is,  however,  here,  more  room  to  beat 
out,  and  no  dangers  to  encounter  but  what  are  visible.    At  the  N.  E.  angle  of  the  bay  is  a 


682 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


narrow  isthmus,  not  more  than  500  yards  across,  separating  it  from  Mercury  Sound 
which  was  not  examined.     It  is  laid  down  from  an  eye  sketch.  ' 

In  working  down  the  channel,  the  south  side  should  be  preferred,  as  it  is  a  weathe 
shore,  and  seems  to  be  better  provided  with  coves  and  harbors  to  anchor  in. 
King  and  KING  AND  FITZROY  1SLANL»S,  in  mid-channel,  are  of  bold  approach;  asar 

Filzroy  lal-    also  Kirke's  Rocks  more  to  the  westward.  '         ^ 

ands.  The  flood  tide  sets  to  the  southward,  or  to  seaward,  but  was  not  found  to  run  with  Buf 

ficient  strength  to  benefit  or  impede  a  veseel  beating  through.      The  rise  and  fall  jg  alg 
inconsiderable,  not  being  more  than  6,  or  at  most,  H  feet  at  spring  tides.  " 

There  are  several  anchorages  among  the  Prowse  Islands,  which  are  very  numerong 
and  skirt  the  coast  for  several  miles.  IBehind  them  the  land  trends  in,  and  forms  a  deen 
sound.  The  Adelaide  schooner  anchored  in  a  bay  on  the  north  side  of  one  of  the  islnnd 
opposite  to  Barrow  Head,  in  G  fathoms;  but  there  are  many  places  of  a  similar  nature 
equally  convenient  and  secure.  A  vessel  in  want  of  anchorage,  should  hoist  a  boat,  out 
and  wait  in  the  offing  until  one  answering  the  purpose  be  found.  Kniering  these  deen. 
water  bays,  a  boat  should  always  be  hoisted  out,  and  a  hawser  kept  ready  to  make  thst 
to  the  shore.  It  will  be  frequently  necessary  to  tow  up  to  the  head  of  the  harbors-  for 
from  the  height  of  the  land,  the  wind  generally  fails  or  becomes  biiffling. 

The  distance  across  the  channel,  between  Prowse  Islands  and  Barrow  Head,  isBcarrnlv 

li  mile.  ^ 

DtineUy  DYNELEY  SOUND  extends  for  more  than  9  miles,  in  a  N.  W.  direction,  into  the 

Sound.  interior  of  Clarence  Island.      On  the  west  side  of  its  entrance  is  a  group  of  Lsjands 

affording  several  anchorages,  which  the  chart  will  point  out.      One  of  them,  Eliza  Bay' 

oflTers  shelter  and  security  from  all  winds.     The  bottom  of  Dyneley  Sound  was  not 

examined. 

Melville  MELVILLE   SOUND,  which  forms  the  embouchure  of  the  Barbara  and  Cockburn 

Sound.  Channels,  is  very  extensive,  and  is  completely  filled  with  islands.     Some  of  them  f.Tnof 

large  size,  and  are  all  of  the  most  rugged  and  desolate  character.     1  he  ofiing  is  strewed 

with  clusters  of  rocks :  of  these  the  East  and  West  Furies  are  the  most  reinarkabie,  as 

well  as  the  most  important ;  for  the  passage  into  the  Cockburn  Channel  her  between 

them.     The  former  are  very  neor  the  land  of  Cape  Schomberg.     The  West  Furies  bear 

from  the  Tower  Rock,  off  Cape  Noir,  N.  84"  E.,  25  miles;  and  S.  30°  W.,  n  miles 

from  Mount  Skyring.      The  Tussac  Rocks,  which  are  two  in  number,  bctir  from  tiie 

West  Furies  N.  73°  E.,  4i  miles  ;  and  in  a  line  between  the  East  and  Wtjst  Furies  3 

miles  from  the  latter,  and  '2  from  the  former,  is  a  rock  standing  alone.     It  bears  tVom 

Mount  Skyring  S.  12°  W.,  J2i  miles.      To  avoid  it.  in  entering  with  a  westerly  wiiid 

pass  near  the  West  Furies,  and  steer  for  the  Tussac  Rocks. 

After  passing  those,  there  are  no  dangers  that  we  know  of  in  the  entrance  of  the  Cock- 
burn Channel.  A  reference  to  the  plan  will  show  every  thing  else  that  need  be  noted. 
Mount  Skyring  is  a  very  prominent  object.  It  rises  to  a  peak  to  the  lieiglit  of  3,000 
feet;  and,  being  visible  for  a  considerable  distance,  was  useful  in  connecting  tiie  triiingu- 
lation  of  the  strait  with  that  of  the  outer  cinii^t.  It  was  seen  IVom  Fit-Id  Bay,  at  the 
Dor'h  end  of  the  Barbara  Channel ;  and,  from  its  siiiiimlt,  Capt.  Fit/.roy  obtained  a  bear- 
ing of  Mount  Sarmiento.  Its  summit  is  in  lat.  54°  24'  44",  and  lung.  72°  7'  40'.  The 
variation  is  25°. 

The  southern  entrance  of  the  Barbara  Channel  is  so  very  much  occupied  by  islands 
and  rocks,  that  no  direct  channel  can  be  perceiveil.  The  chart  must  be  referred  to  iih  the 
best  guide  for  its  navigation.  F'or  small  vessels  there  is  neither  <ianger  nor  difllculty; 
tiiere  are  numerous  anchorages  tiiat  they  might  reach  without  trouble,  and  that  wuuld 
afl^ord  perfect  security. 

The  land  hereabout  is  also  described  in  Captain  Fit/.roy's  published  views  of  the  sea- 
coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego,  which  contain  excellent  views  of  the  land  froiii  Ciipo  Pillar  to 
its  eastern  extremity  at  Cape  Diego.  Section  VII.  contains  the  desciiptiun  of  tiic  coast, 
and  references  are  therein  made  to  the  views  of  the  land  in  C«|)t.  Fit/.roy's  work.* 

Among  Miigill's  Islands  there  are  several  coves  and  nnchornges.  Totn's  liiirbur  i) 
good  and  well  sheltered,  excepting  from  the  violent  tiqunlls  off  the  high  land,  which  uri< 
80  frequent  every  where  aiiiDiig  the  coves  of  Tierra  del  Fuego. 

For  sealing  vessels,  however,  it  is  more  safe  and  secure  than  Fury  Harbor,  the  place 
they  usually  frequent.  Evt-ry  thiii^'  that  Fueginn  hnrlxirs  afford  is  to  be  obtained  In  it. 
North  Cove  was  occupied  by  Cnpt.  Fitzroy  in  the  Beagle. 
jFury  Harbor.  FURY  HARBOR,  on  the  .S.  E.  side  of  the  cent  nil  island  of  Magill'a  group,  is  a  ve^ 
wild  anchoragH.  From  its  contiguity  to  the  East  and  West  Furies',  and  tlie  Tusunc 
Rocks,  on  which  seals  are  found,  it  is  much  froquentiul  by  sealing  vessels. f 


•  Views  of  parts  of  the  •«•»  coast «  f  Tierra  del  Fuego,  takt-ii  on  boord  His  Majnsty'H  aurvevlns  vcs«l 
Beagle,  182<.>iiiid  um. 

\  In  the  winiir  ut  1H2fi— 7,  ilie  Prince  of  Saxe  Coburg,  scaler,  was  wrecked  in  Fury  Harbor,  and  the  I 
craw  saved  by  the  Ueaglo'i  liuuts.  ' 


•^""m^^mmmmmmmmimillllfllilllff 


VMM 


"■■■mi 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


583 


BYNOE  ISLAND  affords  an  anchorage  on  ita  N.  E.  side ;  and  Hewett  Bay,  of  which  Bynoe  Itl- 

.  plan  WHS  made,  is  a  good  stopping-place,  either  for  entering  or  quitting  the  channel.  and. 

BROWN'S  BAY  is  more  extensive,  but  also  affords  good  shelter  in  a  small  cove;  Brotcn's 

the  north  entrance  in  8  fathoms,  sand,  among  some  kelp.  ^a-,_ 

NORTH  ANCHORAGE,  for  a  small  vessel,  is  tolerably  secure,  but  not  to  be  recom-  HiJih  An- 

Between  Hewett  Bay  and  North  Anchorage  the  channel  is  strewed  with  many  rocks 
and  shoals,  some  of  which,  although  covered  with  kelp,  only  show  at  half  tide.  Much 
caution  is  therefore  necessary,  and  all  patches  of  kelp  should  be  carefully  avoided. 

The  tide  to  the  northward  of  North  Anchorage,  which  to  the  southward  was  not  of 
•ufficient  consequence  to  interfere  with  the  navigation  of  the  channels,  is  so  much  felt 
to  impede  vessels  turning  to  windward  against  it. 

The  country  here  has  a  more  agreeable  appearance,  being  better  wooded  with  beech 
and  cypress  trees ;  but  the  latter  are  stunted,  and  do  not  attain  a  greater  height  than  15 
or  18  feet.  They  are  very  serviceable  for  boat-hook  spars,  boats'  masts,  &c.  The  wood, 
„|ien  seasoned,  works  up  well. 

BEDFORD  BA.Y  is  a  good  anchorage.     It  is  situated  on  the  N.  W.  side  of  the  nar-    Bedford 
row  part  of  the  channel.    Its  depth  is  from  20  to  8  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  and    Bay. 
perfectly  sheltered  from  the  prevailing  winds.     At  its  entrance  are  several  patches  of 
kelp,  the  easternmost  of  which  has  4  fathoms  on  it.     A  plan  was  made,  including  the 
narrow  channel ;  which,  as  it  is  a  place  likely  to  bo  frequented  by  vessels  navigating  the 
strait  will  be  of  service. 

Here,  as  well  as  throughout  the  Barbara  Channel,  the  tlood  tide  sets  to  the  southward.    Tide. 
(Lieutenant  Graves'  MS.) 

NUTLAND  BAY,  having  Sand  15  fathoms  over  a  sand  and  mud  bottom,  may  be    Nutland 
known  by  two  small  islands,  Hill's  Islands,  which  lie  one  mile  N.  N.  E.  from  the  an-    Bay. 

Between  Bedford  and  Nutland  Bays,  and,  indeed,  as  far  as  the  Shag  Narrows,  the 
channel  is  open,  and  may  be  navigated  without  impediment.     There  are  many  bays  and 
inlets  not  here  described  or  noticed,  that  may  be  occupied,  but  almost  all  require  to  be 
examined.     They  all  trend  far  enough  into  the  land  to  afford  good  shelter,  but  in  many 
the  bottom  is  foul  and  rocky,  and  the  water  too  deep  for  anchorage. 
The  western  const,  being  the  windward  shore,  should,  of  course,  be  preferred. 
FIELD'S  BAY  is  too  exposed  to  southerlv  winds  to  bo  recommended  as  a  stopping-    FieWt  Bay. 
place,  unless  the  wind  be  northerly.     Nutland  Bay  is  a  more  convenient  place  to  start 
from  with  a  view  of  passing  the  Narrows. 

To  the  north  of  Nutland  Bay  is  Borderip  Bay  ;  at  the  bottom,  or  northern  part  of  it, 
are  some  good  coves  ;  but  the  most  convenient  of  them  is  at  the  eastern  extreme  :  it  is 
called  on  the  chart  Dinner  Cove.  It  extends  to  the  north  for  about  a  furlong,  and  affords 
good  anchorage  in  10  fathoms,  sufficiently  well  sheltered  and  distant  from  high  land  to  be 
free  from  the  mountain  squalls,  or  williwaws. 

Round  Dinner  Cove  is  Icy  Sound,  a  deep  inlet,  with  a  glacier  of  considerable  extent 
at  the  bottom,  from  which  large  mnssea  of  ice  are  constantly  falling,  and  drifting  out, 
occupy  the  waters  of  the  inlet.  The  water  is  deep,  and  the  anchorage  not  good,  when 
there  are  so  many  better  places.  Dean  Harbor  is  a  considerable  inlet  trending  in  under 
the  same  glacier,  which  extends  from  the  head  of  Smyth  Harbor  to  a  considerable  dis- 
laince  in  the  south-west.  If  of  a  favorable  depth  it  might  afford  good  anchorage.  We 
did  not  enter  it. 

The  only  navigable  communication  that  exists  between  the  Barbary  Channel  and  the 
rtrait,  is  that  called  the  Shag  Narrows,  on  the  western  side  of  Cayetano  Island.  The 
width  of  the  opening  is  at  least  one  mile  and  three-quarters,  but  the  eiistern  portion  is  so 
filled  with  rocky  islets  and  shoals,  thiit  the  actual  breailtli  of  the  only  navigable  part  at 
the  northern  end,  is  about  100  yards  ;  and  the  widest  part,  at  the  south  end,  scarcely  half 
a  mile— the  whole  length  of  the  passage  being  rather  less  than  2  miles.  It  is  formed  on 
the  west  side  by  a  projecting  point  of  hiiih  laud,  that  gradunlly  trends  round  to  the  west 
ward'  and  on  the  opposite  side  by  throe  islands,  the  northernmost  of  which  is  Wet 
Islimd;  on  the  soutliernmost  is  Mount  Woodcock,  one  of  our  stations  for  the  trian- 

guliition. 

Between  Wet  Island,  where  the  Narrows  on  the  north  side  conunence,  and  the  west- 
em  shore,  tlie  width  is  not  morrf  than  100  to  l.)0  yards,  and  perhiips  300  yards  long. 
Tiirough  tiiis  tlio  tide  sets  as  much  as  7  milns  an  hour  :  the  sides  of  the  rocks  are  steep 
to:  80  that  1  apprehend  no  accident  can  happen  to  a  ship  in  passing  them,  notwith- 
stauding  the  want  of  room  fur  manu;uvring.  At  the  south  end  of  Wet  Island,  the  stream 
of  tide  divides  ;  one  set^  to  the  oastwiird,  round  Wot  Island,  whilst  the  principal  runs 
through  the  Shag  Narrows.  And  in  the  same  manner,  a  part  of  the  southern  tide,  which 
is  the  flood,  after  passiug  Wet  Island,  runs  to  the  S.  E.,  round  the  eastern  side  of  Mount 
Woodcock. 


ipHilfWIAl^'WPiPBIfPPW 


<84 


Smyth  Hat' 
bar. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

All  the  space  to  the  <  astwnrd  of  Mount  Woodcock  is  so  strewed  with  islands  and  rocit 
that  the  passage  roust  be  difficult,  if  not  dangerous.  ' 

To  avoid  the  danger  of  being  thrown  out  of  the  Narrows,  it  is  only  necossarv  to  kee 
the  western  shore  on  board  :  where  there  are  no  indentations,  the  tide  will  carry  a  vesa  1 
along  with  safety.     At  the  north  end  of  the  Narrows,  on  the  west  side,  is  a  sheivin* 
point,  on   which  there  are  5  fiithonis ;  here  is  an  eddy,  but  as  soon  as  the  ve88el  is  one 
within  the  narrows,  (within  Wet  Island,)  the  mid-channel  may  be  kept.     Tn  shootin' 
this  passage,  it  would  be  better  to  furl  che  sails  and  tow  through,  for  if  the  wind  h«  stron^ 
the  eddies  and  violent  squalls  would  bo  very  inconvenient,  from  their  baffling,  und  lavin^' 
the  vessel  upon  her  beam  ends ;  which  frequently  happens,  even  though  every  shI!  h^ 
furled.     It  will  be  necessary  to  have  a  couple  of  boats  out,  ready,  either  to  tow  theBhin'a 
head  round,  or  to  prevent  her  being  thrown  by  the  tide  into  the  channel  to  the  south  nf 
Wet  Island.  ' 

If  anchorage  be  desirable  after  passing  the  Narrows,  there  is  none  to  be  recommended 
until  the  coves  between  Smyth  Harbor  and  Cape  Edgeworth  be  reached. 

Of  these  Dighton  Cove  is  preferable.  The  anchorage  is  oflf  the  sandy  bench,  in  jn 
fathoms. 

Warrington  Cove,  the  next  to  the  north,  also  offers  good  shelter  and  anchorage  but 
both  are  exposed  to  easterly  winds. 

The  tide  in  the  Shag  Narrows,  at  full  and  change,  commences  to  set  to  the  southward 
at  12  o'clock.  In  the  Barbara  Channel  the  flood  tide  was  found  by  Lieutenants  Skyrinv 
and  Uraves  to  sel  to  seaward,  or  to  the  southward ;  as  was  also  the  case  in  Cockburn 
Channel.  Our  experience  of  the  tides  hereabouts  was  not  sufficient  to  justify  our 
making  any  further  observations  upon  them. 

SMYTH  HARBOR  is  about 4  miles  deep,  and  a  half  to  one  mile  wide,  surrounded 
by  high  land,  and  trending  in  a  westerly  direction.  The  water  is  deep,  excepting  jn 
Earle  Cove,  on  the  north  side,  where  vessels  might  lie,  if  necessary ;  but  I  should  thJDk 
it  a  very  wild  place  in  bad  weather. 

The  hills  at  the  head  are  capped  by  glaciers  that  communicate  with  those  nt  tlie  Lead 
of  Icy  Sound.  It  seems  possible  that  all  the  mountains  between  this  and  W  "ile  Sound 
are  entirely  covered  with  a  coating  of  ice. 

Halt  a  mile  S.  E.  from  Cape  Edgeworth  is  a  shoal,  so  thickly  covered  with  kelp  as  to 
be  easily  seen  in  pxssing  or  approaching  it ;  there  are  not  more  than  two  feet  of  water 
over  its  shonlest  part. 

To  pHss  through  the  Barbara  Channel  from  the  north,  it  would  be  advisable  to  stav  at 
Port  (iailant  until  a  lavorable  opportunity  otters;  for  with  a  S.  W.  wind  it  would  neither 
be  safe  nor  practicable  to  pass  the  Shag  Narrows. 

The  N.  W.  wind  prevails  more  than  any  other  in  the  western  jwrtion  of  the  stmit  in 
consequence  of  the  reaches  trending  in  that  bearing.  It  seems  to  be  a  general  rule  here- 
abouts that  the  wind  either  blows  up  or  down  them. 

Between  Cape  Froward  and  the  western  entrance  of  the  strait,  the  wind  is  gflnerally 
fi'om  N.  W.,  although  at  sea,  or  in  the  Cockburn  or  Barbara  Channels,  it  may  be  in  the 
south  or  south-western  boards. 

Strait  of  Magalhams,  from  Port  Famine  to  Cape  Froward,  the  North  Coast  of  Clarenct 
Island,  and  from  Cape  Froward  to  Uie  Jerome  Channel. 

The  Sedger  River,  which  is  fronted  by  a  bar  that  dries  at  low  water,  can  be  entered 
by  boats  at  half  tide,  and  is  navigable  for  3  or  4  miles ;  after  which  its  bed  is  so  filled  up 
by  8tumj)s  of  trees,  that  it  is  difficult  to  penetrate  farther.  The  water  is  fresh  at  half  a 
mile  from  the  entrance,  but  to  ensure  its  being  perfectly  good,  it  would  be  belter  to  fill 
the  casks  at  low  tide.  The  low  land  near  the  mouth,  as  well  as  the  bench  of  Port  Fa- 
mine, is  covered  with  drift  limber  of  large  size,  which  we  found  very  useful  and  service- 
able for  repairing  our  boats. 

The  river  was  called  by  Sarmiento,  Riu  de  San  .Tuan.  In  Nnrborough's  Voyage  itig 
called  Segar's  River,  and  his  boat  is  describeiJ  to  have  gone  up  it  for  9  (?)  iiiiles;  but 
was  there  stopped  from  going  farther  by  "  reason  of  the  trunk  timber  and  Bhonliness  of 
the  water."  Byron  describes  the  river,  which  he  calls  the  Sedger,  in  glowiug  terras, 
but  gives  rather  a  more  flattering  account  of  the  timber  growing  on  its  bntiks  than  it 
deserves. 

Voces  Bay,  or  the  Playa-de-lns-Voces  of  Sarmiento,  is  to  tho  southwnrd  of  the  south 

fioint  of  Port  Famine,  where  the  Seduer  River  falls  into  the  sea.  A  ship  miiy  nnchorin 
roiii  7  to  10  fathoms  off  the  Second  River,  but  the  shelter  is  not  as  good  as  in  Furt 
Famine.  The  Second  River  has  a  shoal  entrance,  but  extends  for  some  distiince  up  the 
valley. 

Between  this  bay  and  Cape  St.  Isidro,  (Point  Shut-up  of  Byron.)  tho  water  is  too  deep 
for  anchorage,  even  cloHetothe  beach.  The  cape  is  tho  termination  of  the  riilge,  whose 
■utnmit  is  Mount  Tarn,  the  most  conspicuous  mountain  of  this  part  of  the  struit.   Itii 


PP" 


^i^^^f^miF. 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  g86 

2502  feet  high  by  barometrical  measurement.  It  is  readily  distinguished  from  nbrenst  of 
Elizabeth  Island,  whence  it  appears  to  be  the  most  projecting  part  of  the  continental  shore 
When  viewed  from  the  northward  its  shape  is  peaked,  and  during  the  summer  it  has  gen- 
erally  some  patches  of  snow  a  little  below  its  summit :  but  in  the  winter  months  its  sides 
,re  covered  with  snow  for  two-thirds  down.  From  abreast  and  to  the  southward  of  Port 
Famine,  it  has  rather  a  saddle-shaped  appearance ;  its  summit  being  a  sharp  ridcre 
extending  very  nearly  for  one  mHe  N.  W.  and  S.  E.,  with  a  precipitous  descent  on  the 
K.  Em  nnd  a  steep  slope  on  the  is.  W.  sides.  The  highest  peak,  near  its  N.  E.  end  is 
inlat.  53°  45'  6",  and  long.  70°  58'  26".  "^      '  «  ^^-  *-•  ena,  » 

There  is  a  low,  but  conspicuous  rounded  hillock,  covered  with  trees,  at  the  extremity 
of  Cape  San  Inidro ;  and  a  rocky  patch  extends  off  it  for  2  cables'  length,  with  a  rock  at 
its  extremity  thiit  is  washed  at  high  water.     It  is  covered  with  kelp. 

EAGLE  BAY,  (Valcarcel  Bay  of  Cordova,)  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  deep;  Eagle  Bay. 
and  its  points  one  inile  apart,  bearing  N.  h.  and  S.  W.  The  anchorage  is  at  the  head 
in  from  20  to  12  fathoms.  There  are  two  streams  of  water ;  but,  being  very  much  im- 
pregnated with  decomposed  vegetable  matter,  gannot  be  preserved  long.  The  woods  here 
gboiiud  with  Winter*  Bark,  of  which  there  Are  many  very  large  trees.  A  small  reef  ex- 
tends for  about  a  cable's  length  oil"  tlie  S.  W.  point  of  the  bay,  on  which  is  an  islet. 
Eagle  Bay  is  not  useful  for  any  but  a  small  vessel,  tlint  can  be  towed  in,  and  then  it  will 
be  necessary  to  steady  her  by  warps  to  the  shore.  The  squalls,  or  williwaws,  ai  times, 
are  very  violent. 

GUN  BAY,  the  next  to  the  westward,  althoagh  small,  affords  anchorage  for  a  single  Gun  Bay. 
vessel  near  the  shore,  at  its  S.  W.  parr,  in  from  8  to  9  fathoms.  Its  points  bear  S.  57o 
W.,  and  N.  57=  E.,  and  are  distant  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  Two  rivulets 
discharge  themselves  into  it,  from  which  water  is  easily  procured.  The  bottom  is  a  stiff 
clay,  and  good  holding  ground.  A  round  hill  of  moderate  elevation,  and  thick!"  v/ooded, 
separates  it  from  Indian  Bay,  the  pointe  of  which  bear  S.  69°  W..  and  N.  6P^  E.,  and  nre 
distant  more  than  li  mile.  From  the  east  point  the  shore  runs  due  west,  curving  round 
at  the  bottom  towards  an  islet  covered  with  trees;  between  which  and  the  shore  there  is 
only  sufficient  depth  for  a  boat  to  pass.  A  rock  about  12  feet  high  lies  to  the  S.  E.,  on 
either  side  of  which  is  an  anchorage,  sufficiently  sheltered  from  the  prevailing  winds,  over 
a  good  bottom,  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms.  The  north  sida  of  the  bay  is  shoal,  caused  prob- 
ably by  the  alluvial  deposit  from  a  river  nearly  in  the  centre.  A  patch  of  kelp  extends  off 
the  S.  E.  point,  for  2  cables'  length,  but  has  9  fathoms  over  it  at  the  centre. 

Neither  Gun  nor  Indian  Bays  are  noticed  in  Cordova's  description  of  the  strait,  although 
they  are  quite  equal  to  any  other  in  the  neighborhood,  for  stopping-places. 

BOUCHAGE  BAY,  which  is  Cordova's  Cantin  Bay,  is  small,  and  the  water  very  deep,  Bouchage 
eicept  near  the  bottom,  where  anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  8  fathoms,  clay.  It  is  Bay. 
separated  from  Bournand  Bay,  (Gil  Bay  of  Cordova,)  by  Cape  Remarquable,  of  Bougain- 
Tille,  which  is  a  precipitous  round-topped  bluff  projection,  wooded  to  the  summit.  At 
two  cables'  length  from  the  base  no  bottom  was  found  with  20  fathoms  of  lino,  but  at  the 
distance  of  50  yards  the  depth  was  20  fathoips.  Bournand  Bay  is  more  snug  and  conve- 
nifiDtthan  its  northern  neighbor,  Bouchage  Bay,  being  sheltered  from  the  southerly  winds 
by  Nassau  Island.  At  the  S.  W.  end  of  a  stony  beach  at  the  bottom,  is  a  rivulet  of  good 
water,  off  which  there  is  good  anchorage,  in  8  fathoms  stiff  mud. 

BOUGAINVILLE  BAY"  (Cordova's  Texada  Bay)  forms  a  basin,  or  wet  dock,  in  BaugainvUle 
which  a  vessel  might  careen  with  perfect  security.  It  is,  from  its  small  size,  great  depth  Bay. 
of  water,  and  the  height  of  the  land,  rather  difficult  of  access,  which  renders  it  almost  al- 
ways necessary  to  tow  in.  On  entering,  the  anchor  should  be  dropped  in  12  fathoms,  and 
the  vessel  steadied  by  warps  to  the  trees,  at  the  sides  and  bottom  of  the  cove.  It  is  com- 
pletely sheltered  from  all  winds,  and  an  excellent  place  for  a  vessel  to  remain  at,  particu- 
larly if  the  object  be  to  procure  timber,  which  grows  here  to  a  great  size,  and  is  both 
readily  cut  down  and  easily  embarked.  A  rivulet  at  the  bottom  affords  a  moderate  sup- 
ply of  water;  but  if  more  be  required,  the  neighboring  buys  will  afford  an  abundance. 

It  was  here  that  M.  de  Bougainville  cut  timber  for  the  French  colony,  at  the  Falkland 
Islands.    To  sealing  vessels  it  is  known  by  the  name  of  Jack's  Harbor. 

In  the  passage  between  Nassau  Island  and  the  main,  the  least  water  is  7  fathoms,  over    Nassau  Isl- 
astilTclHy  bottom,  gradually  deepening  on  each  Mide.     But  the  winds  being  baffling,  and   ands. 
the  tides  irregular  and  rippling  in  many  parts,  a  vessel  should  not  attempt  it  but  from 
necessity. 
NASSAU  ISLAND'S  south  extremity  is  Snrmiento's  Point  Santa  Brigida. 
ST.  NICHOLAS  BAY,  so  named  by  the  Nodales,  in  1018,  (but  previously  by  Sar-   St.  Nicholas 
miento.  Baliia  de  Santa  Brigida  y  Santa  Aguoda,  and  French  Bay,  by  De  Gennes,)  is  not   Bay. 
only  of  larger  size  than  any  of  the  bays  to  the  south  of  Cape  San  Isidro,  but  is  the  best 
anchorage  that  exists  between  that  cape  and  Cape  Froward,  as  well  from  its  being  more 
easily  entered  and  left,  as  from  the  moderate  depth  of  water,  and  extent  of  the  anchor- 
ing ground.    Its  points  bear  from  each  other  S.  58°  W.,  and  N.  68°  E.,  and  are  distant 
two  miles.    Nearly  iu  the  ceutro  is  a  smull  islet  covered  with  trees,  between  which  and 


'■'-"•!'»1P^PH«I 


5S6 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT. 


ex. 


the  shorn  is  n  pRssage  with  9  fathoms  water,  Ptilt'clav.     The  shore  is,  however  frontni 
for  its  whole  length  by  a  shoal  bank,  which  very  much  reduces  the  apparent  extent  oftlM 
bay.     'I  his  bank  stretches  off  to  the  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  th 
edge  of  which  is  steep  to,  and  is  generally  distinguished  by  the  ripple,  which,  with  " 
moderate  breeze,   breaks  at  half  tide.     The  Beagle  anchored  in  the  bay,  at  3  cable  ^ 
length  to  the  N.  E.  of  the  small  central  islet,  in  12  fathoms,  pebbly  bottom  ;  but  the  bfl^ 
berth  is  one-quarter   to   one-third  of  a  mile  to  the  S.  W.  of  the  islet,  in  10  or  li 
fathoms,  muddy  bottom.     Captain  Stokes  recommends,  in  his  journal,  in  coming  jn 
keep  sail  upon  the  ship,  in  order  to  shoot  into  a  good  berth,  on  account  of  the  high  lanil 
of  Nodales  Peak  becalming  the  sails :  and  to  avoid  the  drift  of  the  stream  of  the  riv 
Betting  the  ship  over  to  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay.     I  do  not,  however,  think  that  th' 
stream  of  the  river  can  affect  a  ship  in  any  position  between  the  islet  and  the  pcnk.    T 
taking  up  an  anchorage,  much  care  is  necessary  to  avoid  touching  the  bank.    Lesstha" 
10  fathoms  is  not  safe,  but  in  that  depth  the  security  is  perfect,  and  the  berth  very  eaa" 
to  leave.     In  passing  through  the  strait  this  bay  is  very  useful  to  stop  at,  as  well  frum  th' 
facility  of  entering  and  leaving  it,  as  for  its  proximity  to  Cape  Froward.     The  islet  is  * 
latitude  53°  50'  38",  and  longitude  71°  3'  13".  " 

In  the  middle  of  the  bay  is  De  Gennes  River,  (Rio  del  Valle  Frande  of  Sarmientol 
which  is  of  a  larger  size  than  Sedger  River.  It  is  100  yards  across,  and  apparently  i 
tends  in  a  winding  direction  up  the  valley  for  some  distance.  From  its  entrance  I 
fronted  by  a  shoal  or  bank,  the  form  of  which  must  be  constantly  shifting,  and  its  „„ 
strewed  with  trees  that  drift  out  of  the  river  during  the  winter  freshets,  it  is  far  frombe^ 
ing  an  eligible  place  for  procuring  water. 

From  Ulascott  Point,  the  southern  head  of  the  bay,  a  mountainous  and  high  range  of 
hills  runs  back  for  some  distance.  On  its  summit  are  several  sharp  peaks,  the  most  cod. 
spicuous  of  which  is  Nodales  Peak. 

From  Glascott  Point  the  coast  extends  in  nearly  a  straight  line  to  Cape  Froward  a 
distance  of  7  miles,  the  land  at  the  back  continuing  mountainous  and  woody.  A  point 
formed  by  a  beach  of  shingle,  covered  with  trees  to  within  20  yards  of  the  water's  edce 
and  distant  nearly  3  miles  from  Cape  Froward,  is  the  only  projection,  Betw,>en  thisand 
the  entrance  of  a  rivulet,  which  waters  the  only  valley  that  exists  in  this  space,  an  anchor- 
age at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  in  11  fathoms,  might  be  occupied  during  a  west- 
erly wind ;  but  with  the  wind  more  soutiierly,  it  would  be  too  much  exposed  to  be  safe, 
The  Betigle  anchored  here  at  2  cables'  length  off  the  sandy  bench,  in  11  fathoms, 

CAPE  FROWARD,  the  southern  extremiy  of  the  continent  of  South  America, 
rises  abruptly  from  the  sea.  At  \ta  base  is  a  small  rock  on  which  Bougainville  landed 
as  did  Lieut.  Graves,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  a  set  of  bearings.  The  hill  that  rises 
immediately  above  the  cape,  was  called,  by  Sarmionto,  the  Morro  of  Snutn  Agueda 
Cape  Froward  is  in  lat.  53°  53'  43",  long.  71°  14'  31".  The  ebb  tide  sets  to  the  north^ 
ward,  and  the  flood  to  the  southward,  but  with  very  little  strength.  It  is  liiir|i  water  at 
full  and  change,  at  1  P.  M.  Byron  found  the  depth  of  water,  at  less  than  a  cable's  length 
from  the  point,  40  fathoms.  Midway  between  St.  Nicholas  Bay  and  Port  Snn  Antonio 
we  had  no  bottom  with  25()  fathoms. 

The  north  coast  of  Clarence  Island  extends  from  the  entrance  of  Magdalen  Sound  to 
that  of  the  Barbara  Channel,  the  whole  length  of  which  is  indented  by  sounds  stretchio; 
deeply  into  the  island. 
BougainvilU't     BOUGAINVILLE'S  PORT  OF  BEAUBASIN,  (the  Bahia  Darsena  of  Cordon,) 
Port  of  Beau-  is  sufficiently  pointed  out  by  a  small  rocky  islet  called  i'erigua,  and  the  niountiiin  of  the 
basin.  Vernal,  before  described.     The  other  part  of  the  port  decreases  in  width,  grniJuaiJv,  to 

the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  which  is  formed  by  two  projecting  points,  a  very  sliort  distiiDce 
apart,  and  is  \tiry  shoal,  the  deepest  water  being  only  'i\  fathoms.  Inside,  in  the  bnsio 
there  are  5  fathoms.  It  is  a  very  snug  place  when  once  in,  but  possesses  no  lulvantase, 
since  it  is  on  the  wrong  side  of  the  strait  for  vessels  bounil  through  to  tiio  westward;  for 
the  northerly  or  easterly  wind,  which  would  be  favorable  to  proceed,  would  preventj 
vessel  tsaiiiiig  out  of  it. 
InmanBay,  I.NMAN  BAY.  HAWKINS  BAY,  STAPLES  INLET  AND  SHOLL  HAR. 
HawkinsBay,  BOR,  are  all  deep  inlets,  surrounded  by  high  precipitous  land. 

SlapUs  Inlet        To  the  westward  of  Greeiiougli  Peninsula,  is  Lyell  Sound.     It  is  9  miles  deep,  amlis 
and  Shall  separated  at  the  bottom  from  .Sholl  iiarhor  by  a  ridge  of  hills  about  one  mile  and  a  half 

Harbor.  wide. 

In  the  entrance  of  Lyell  Sound,  are  two  conspicuous   islands,  one  of  whinh  invery 
small.     They  are  called  Dos  Hermanns,  and  ijonr  from  Cape  Froward  S.  48^  W.,  live 
mdi's  mill  a  Inilf. 
Kempe  Har-       KK.Ml'E  HARBOR,  one  mile  and  a  half  within  the  entrance,  on  the  west  side  of 
bor.  Lyell  .Sound,  is  rather  difliriilt  of  access,  but  perfectly  secure,  and  would  liiilil  six  ships, 

.Stokes  (J reek,  on  the  same  side,  more  to  tlie  southward,  also  oilers  good  auchurage;  but 
its  being  out  of  the  way,  can  be  off  no  utility. 


Cape  Fro- 
ward. 


High  water. 


\ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

CASCADE  HARBOR,  AND  MAZZAREDO  BAY.  are  of  less  si.e,  and  therefore 
moreaitHinable,  but  of  the  same  chnracter  with  Lyell  Sound,  viz.,  deep  water,  surround- 
^by  high  land.  1  he  former  is  known  by  the  cascade  which  M.  de  Bougainville  des- 
cribes, from  which  it  derives  its  name.  On  the  headland  that  separates  these  harbors 
from  Lyell  Sound,  is  a  sugar-loaf  hill,  the  position  of  which  is  well  determined,  in  lat.  53° 
57' 32".  Iu"g'  71°  24'  13". 
HIDDKN  HARBOR  has  a  nanow  entrance,  but,  if  required,  offers  good  shelter. 
SAN  PEDRO  SOUND  18  the  most  ext-nsive  inlet  that  we  know  in  Clarence  Island. 
I,  extends  in  the  southerly  direction  for  nearly  thirteen  miles,  and  has  three  other  inlets 
branching  off  into  the  land,  two  to  the  westward  and  one  to  the  eastward.  There  is  a 
mi,  nithough  a  small  anchorage,  on  its  west  side,  one  mile  and  a  half  within  the  en- 
Lncft,  called  Murriiy  Cove,  and  another  close  to  it.  which  is  even  more  sheltered 

FRESH- WATER  COVE,  the  Caleta  de  Agua  dulce  of  Sarmiento,  is  a  confined  and 
inditTerent  place  for  a  ship. 

BELL  BAY  (the  Bnhia  de  la  Campnna  of  Sarmiento)  has  a  very  prominent  anchor- 
,ge.  Brnilley  Cove,  on  its  west  side,  bearing  S.  79°  W.  from  Point  Taylor,  the  eastern 
head  of  the  bay.  It  will  readily  be  distinguished  by  a  small  green  round  hillock  that 
forms  its  north  head.  The  anchorage  is  in  17  fathoms,  and  the  vessel  hauls  in  by  stern- 
fasts  or  a  kedge  into  9  fathoms,  in  perfect  security.  Pond  Buy,  to  the  northward,  has 
good  shelter,  but  it  is  not  of  such  easy  access,  for  it  would  be  necessary  to  tow  both  into 
and  out  of  it. 

MOUNT  POND,  a  peaked  hill  over  the  harbor,  is  a  conspicuous  mountain,  and  is 
risible  from  the  eastward  as  soon  as  it  opens  round  Cape  Froward.  It  has  two  summits, 
one  of  which  only  is  visible  from  the  eastward. 

Between  Cape  Inglefield  and  Point  Elvira  is  St.  Simon's  Bay.  It  is  studded  with 
islands  and  rocks,  and  at  the  bottom  has  two  communications  with  the  Barbara  Channel, 
separated  from  each  other  by  Burgess  Island,  the  easternmost  of  which,  called  Tom's 
Narrows,  is  the  most  extensive  ;  but  this,  from  the  irregularity  and  force  of  the  tides,  is 
not  10  be  preferred  to  the  more  direct  one  of  the  Shag  Narrows,  on  the  western  side  of 
Cayetano  Island  ;  for  there  is  no  good  anchorage  in  St.  Michael's  Channel,  which  leads 
to  it.  ami  it '»  bounded  by  a  steep  and  precipitous  coast.  The  Gonsalez  Narrows  on  the 
west  side  of  Burgess  Island  is  not  more  thim  30  yards  across,  and  from  the  force  of  the 
tide  aod  the  fall  of  the  rapid,  would  be  dangerous  even  for  a  boat  to  pass. 

The  only  good  anchorage  in  St.  Simon's  Bay  is  Miller's  Cove.     It  is  about  3  miles 

within  Point  Elvira,  and  has  3  rocky  islets  oft"  its  entrance.    A  conspicuous  mount  forms 

ie  summit  of  the  eastern  head.     The  anchorage  is  in  5  fathoms,  a  good  bottom,  and 

entirely  sbeltered.     Wood  and  water  are  plentiful. 

Immediately  round  the  east  head  of  Miller's  Cove  is  Point  Langara.     It  is  rather  more 

than  a  mile  long,  and  two-thirds  of  a  mile  wide,  and  trends  in  a  W.  N.  W.  direction. 

The  water  is  deep,  excepting  at  the  head,  and  in  a  cove  on  the  north  shore,  in  either  of 
which  there  is  good  anchorage.  At  the  former  the  depth  is  8  fathoms,  and  in  the  cove 
5fitthoins.  On  the  eastern  side  of  the  buy  are  Sliipton  and  Mellersh  Coves.  Both  are 
surrounded  by  high  land,  and  the  water  being  very  deep,  neither  of  them  afford  anchor- 
age. Ort'  the  head  that  divides  them  are  the  Castro  Islands.  On  the  south  side  of  the 
largest  is  a  very  convenient  cove,  with  a  moderate  depth  of  water.  The  Castellano  Isl- 
ands oonsist  of  five  principal  ones.  They  are  situated  in  the  centre  of  the  bay,  and  have 
no  anchorage  among  them. 

The  coast  from  Capo  Froward  to  Jerome  Channel,  a  distance  of  40  miles,  is  very 
slightly  indented.  The  anchorages,  therefore,  are  few  in  number,  but  they  are  of  easier 
accflss,  and  altogether  more  convenient  than  those  of  the  southern  sliore.  Taking  them 
in  succession,  Snug  Bay,  5  miles  N.  W.  of  Cape  Froward,  is  a  slight  indentation  of  the 
constat  the  embouchure  of  a  small  rivulet,  the  depositee  from  which  have  thrown  up  a 
I  bank  near  the  shore,  on  which  anchorage  may  be  had  in  8  and  9  futhoms.  The  best  an- 
chorage is  half  a  mile  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  the  island,  in  9  fathoms,  black  sand,  the  rivulet 
raoutii  bearing  N.  N.  W.,  three-quarters  of  u  mile.  It  is  much  exposed,  being  open  from 
W.  S.  W.  by  S.  to  S.  E. 

At  Byron's  Anchorage,  in  Snug  Bay,  "Cape  Froward  bore  E.  i  S..5  miles;  the  islet 

in  the  bay  W.  by  S.,  half  a  mile  ;  the  river's  mouth   N.  W.  by  W.,  three-quarters  of  a 

mile.    Shoaled  suddenly  from  17  to  9  fathoms,  but  had  no  ground  until  near  the  island." 

i    Byron,  who  anchored  in  it.  describes  it  as  being  fit  for  his  purpose.    It  is  certainly  a 

convenient  stopping-place  in  fino  weather. 

WOOD'S  BAY,  situated  under  the  lee  of  Cape  Holland,  is  a  convenient  stopping-place 

I  for  ships,  but  only  small  vessels  should  anchor  inside  the  cove.     T'.e  anchorage  is  very 

good  to  the  eastward  of  the  river's  mouth,  at  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  in  17  and  13 

fathoms  water.    Small  vessels  may  enter  the  cove,  by  luffin;;  round  the  kelp  patches  that 

extend  off  the  south  jwint  of  the  bay,  on  which  there  are  'Jj  fathoms. 

Entering  Wood's  Bay.  steer  for  the  gap  or  low  land  behind  the  cape,  and  as  you  near 
the  south  point,  keep  midway  between  it  and  the  river's  mouth ;  or,  fur  a  leading  mark, 


68T 

Caicade 
Harbor,  and 
Mazzaredo 
Bay. 

Hidden 
Harbor. 
San  Pedro 
Sound. 


Fresh-Wattr 
Cffct. 
Bell  Bay. 


Mount  Pond. 


Wood's  Bay. 


mim^fimm 


■"HlF^PWI 


688 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


Cape  Hot 
land. 


keep  a  hillock,  or  conspicuous  clump  of  trees,  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  in  a  line  with 
remnrkabje  peak,  one  or  two  milbs  behind,  bearing,  by  compass,  N.  52°  W.  Anclior  '* 
17  fiithomH,  immediately  when  you  are  in  a  line  between  the  two  points.  Small  vosaei" 
may  go  farther,  into  12  fathoms.  The  west  side  of  the  cove  may  be  approached  nrett' 
near,  and  the  depth  will  not  be  less  than  five  fathoms,  excepting  upon  the  two  fithonf 
patch  that  stretches  olf  the  east  point,  the  extent  of  which  is  sufficiently  shown  bv  tl 
kelp ;  but  on  the  eastern  side  the  bank  shoaled  suddenly,  and  must  be  avoided,  for  rhe'^ 
are  13  fathoms  close  to  its  edge,  upon  which  there  are  not  more  than  2  feet  wuter  Ti,° 
south  point  of  Wood's  Bay  is  in  lat.  53°  46'  33",  and  long.  71°  35'  41".  "        * 

CAPE  HOLLAN  I)  is  a  bold,  high,  and.  although  slightly  projecting,  yet  a  vory  con 
spicuous  headland.  It  is  precipitous,  and  descends  to  the  sea  in  steps,  plentifully  cuvernt 
with  shrubs.     It  is  14  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Froward. 

Near  Cape  Coventry,  and  in  Andrew's  Buy,  anchorage  may  be  had  near  the  shore  if 
the  weather  be  fine.  To  the  westward  of  the  former,  at  half  a  mile  from  the  shore 
there  are  13  fathoms.  ' 

Cordct  Bay.  CORDKS  BAY,  four  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Gallant,  may  he  known  by  ths 
small  bright  green  islet  (Muscle  Island)  that  lies  in  the  entrance  ;  also  by  a  tln-ee-penked 
mountain,  about  1500  or  2000  feet  high,  standing  detached  from  the  surrounding  hjllj 
at  the  Iwttom  of  the  bay.  The  western  entrance,  which  lies  between  West  Point  nnd 
the  reef  o(T  Muscle  Island,  is  two-thirds  of  a  mile  wide.  Within  it  is  a  bay  one  Qiu 
deep,  but  much  contracted  by  shoals  covered  with  kelp.  Between  them,  however,  the 
anchorage  is  very  good  and  well  sheltered.  The  bottom  is  of  sand,  and  the  dejnh  5  nnd 
7  fathoms.  At  the  extremity  of  the  bay  is  a  large  lagoon,  Port  San  Miguel,  tromlinejn 
,  a  N.  E.  direction  for  two  miles,  and  two-thirds  of  a  mile  across.  The  entrance  is  both 
narrow  and  shoal,  and  not  safe  for  a  vessel  drawing  more  than  6  feet.  Inside  the  laeoon 
the  depth  is  from  3  to  13  fathoms.  With  Fortescue  Bay  and  Port  Gallant  ho  near,  the 
probabdity  is  that  it  will  never  be  much  used ;  but  in  turning  to  the  westward  it  wouli] 
be  better  to  anchor  here  than  lose  ground  by  returning  to  Wood's  Bay.  By  enteringthe 
western  channel,  and  steering  clear  of  the  kelp,  a  safe  and  commodious  anchoroge  tnar 
easily  be  reached. 


Fortesciie 
Bay. 


Tide. 


Tide: 


FORTESCUE  BAY  is  the  first  best  anchorage  to  the  westward  of  St.  Nicholas  Bay, 
It  is  spacious,  well  sheltered,  easy  of  access,  and  of  moderate  depth.  The  best  berth  is ' 
to  the  .S.  E.of  the  small  islet,  outside  of  Wigwam  Point,  in  7  c  8  fathoms.  Having  the 
entrance  of  Port  Gallant  open,  small  vessels  may  sail  into  the  port,  but  the  channel  is  ra- 
ther narrow.  The  banks  on  the  western  side,  oflT  Wigwam  Point,  are  distinguished  bv 
the  kelp. 

When  within,  the  shelter  is  perfect ;  but  Fortescue  Bay  is  quite  sufficiently  sheltered 
and  much  more  convenient  to  leave.  In  this  |)art  of  the  strait,  as  the  channel  becomea 
narrowed  by  the  islands,  the  tides  are  much  felt.  There  are  two  good  anchornges  be- 
fore reaching  the  entrance  of  the  Jerome  Channel,  namely,  EliKubeth  Bay  and  Yorit 
Roads,  off  Batchelor's  River.  They  are.  however,  only  fit  for  stopping-pbicps.  There 
are  no  anchorages  among  the  islands  that  can  be  recommended,  excepting  in  the  stmit 
that  separates  the  group  of  Charles'  Islands,  in  which  there  is  security  and  a  convenient 
depth.  When  the  wind  blows  fresh,  there  is  a  hollow  sea  between  Charles'  Islands  oail  I 
the  north  shore,  which  very  much  impedes  ships  beating  to  the  westward. 

At  a  short  distance  to  the  E.  S.  E.  of  Passage  Point  is  a  shoal,  with  2  fnthoms  upon  it.  I 
Elizabeth  Bay  has  a  sandy  beach,  and  a  rivulet  emptying  itself  into  it.    Cordova  recom- 
mends the  best  anchorage  to  be  in  15  fathoms.     Passage  Point  bearing  E.  S.  E.,  distant  I 
half  a  mile,  about  3  cables'  length  from  the  river,  and  to  the  N.  W.  of  a  bank  on  which! 
there  is  much  kelp. 

Mr.  Simpson  describes  the  Dolphin's  Anchorage  here  in  10  fathoms.     Rupert's  Island | 
bore  S.  by   E.,  2  or  3  miles  :  passage  Point  S.  E.  by  S.,  throe-quarters  of  a  mile; 
west  part  of  the  bay  W.  by  N.,  2  miles,  and  a  reef  of  rocks  about  a  cable's  length  from  I 
the  shore  N.  W.  by  W.,  a  quarter  of  a  mile.     The  reef  is  quite  covered  at  liigh  water.  | 
Here  the  flood  set  to  the  eastward,  and  flowed,  at  full  and  change,  until  12  o'clock. 

Captain  Fitzroy  describes  the  anchorage  of  York  Roads,  or  Batchelor's  Bay,  to  be  I 
good  and  convenient :  "  Half  a  mile  off,  a  woody  point,  (just  to  the  westward  of  the  river,) 
bearing  N.  6°  E.,  and  the  mouth  of  the  river  N.  E.,  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  is  a  good 
berth,  because  there  is  plenty  «>f  room  to  weigh  from,  and  space  to  drive,  nhoulii  tiie an- 
chor drag.  The  bottom  is  good  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  but  not  in  a  less  depth.  The  shore] 
is  a  flat  shingle  beach  for  2  miles,  the  only  one  in  this  part  of  the  strait."  Cordova  re- 
commends the  following  as  the  best  anchorage,  at  half  a  mile  from  tho  beach,  therirerj 
bearing  N.  6°  E.,  and  the  west  point  of  the  bay  N.  27°  W. 

The  set  and  change  of  the  tide  here  are  very  uncertain,  on  account  of  the  meeting  of  I 
the  Jerome  Channel  tides  with  those  of  tho  strait,  which  occasions  many  ripplings;  and  [ 
it  would  require  a  better  experience  than  we  possess  to  give  a  correct  explanation.  Capt. 
Fitzroy  says,  that  "  the  tide  along  shore,  near  Batchelor  River,  changed  an  hour  later 
than  iu  the  uffing.     At  Batchelor's  Bay,  by  the  beach,  during  the  first  half  or  one-third 


"•^^MPMHppa 


■pi 


BLONT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 
«f  ihotide  that  ran  to  the  S.  E.  the  water  fell;  and  during  the  hitler  half,  or  two-thirdi. 


589 


it  rose 


\e'.Yt'»  IslaDd 

mile ;  I 
ength  iron) 
lisjli  water. 
lock. 

Bny,  to  b« 

the  river,) 
B,  19  a  good 
ould  tlie  an- 

The  shore 
Cordova  re- 
:li,  the  ricet 

mePlinj  of  | 
jplings ; 
ntion.  Capt.  I 
tn  hour  inter  I 
or  one-third  | 


la  the  offing  it  ran  very  strong."  The  estikbiighnient  of  the  tide  at  thi  entrance 
of  the  river,  by  an  observation  made  by  Captain  Fitzroy,  with  the  moon  eight  days  old, 
would  be,  at  full  and  change,  Ih.  46m.  By  an  observation  made  by  Captain  Stokes, 
two  years  previous,  it  was  found  to  be  2h.  13m.     The  tide  at  the  anchorage  ran  three 

BATCHELOR  river  is  accessible  to  boats  only;  and  in  going  into  or  out  of  its  en-    Batchelar 
trancp,  they  must  be  careful  to  follow  exactly  the  course  of  the  stream,  for  a  bar  lies    Hiver. 

utside.    Largo  boats  cannot  enter  at  half  tide. 

"  At  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Batchelor  River,  is  a  shoal  which  has 
not  more  than  6  feet  upon  it  at  low  water,  and  U  feet  at  high  water.  It  is  about  half  a 
mile  from  the  shore,  and  shows  itself  by  the  weeds  upon  it. 

To  the  tbilowing  islands,  in  the  centre  of  the  straits,  that  form  the  south  limit  of  Eng- 
lish Reach,  1  have  restored  the  names  that  were  originally  given  by  Sir  John  Narbo- 

"sECRETARY  WREN'S  ISLAND  is  a  small  rocky  islet,  rising  abruptly  on  all  aides,    Secretary 
.ndformiog  two  summits.     Near  it  are  some  rocks,  and  to  the  S.  E.  is  a  group  of  small  H^ren's /s/- 
Lk9 ;  and  at  a  mile  to  the  E.  S.  E.  are  two  rocks  above  water,  called  Canoas.     The  is-    and. 
let  hna  no  name  on  Cordova's  Cnart. 
CHARLES'  ISLANDS,  besides  some  smaller  islets,  consist  of  three  principal  islands ;    Charles'  Isl- 
j  in  the  centre  there  is  a  very  good  port,  having  good  anchorage  within  the  islets,  in  13   anda. 
fttlhoms.    It  has  an  outlet  to  the  N.  W.,  and  one  to  the  S  .  W.,  also  a  narrow  point  com- 
municfttes  with  the  strait  to  the  S.  E. 

Opposite  to  Cape  Gallant,  on  the  eastern  island,  near  its  N.  W.  end.  is  a  conspicuous 
■bile  rock,  called  Willis'  Mark.  Next  to  the  westward,  in  succession,  are  Monmouih 
and  James  Islands,  (called  by  Cordova  Isia  de  los  Infantes.)  then  Cordova  Islet,  and  Ru- 
nert's  Island,  and  to  the  westward  of  those  the  island  of  Carlos  III.,  so  named  by  Cordova. 
The  Inst  is  separated  from  Ulloa  Peninsula  by  St.  David's  Sound,  which  is  navigable 
throughout. 

To  the  northward  of  Whale  Pomt,  the  eastern  extremity  of  Carlos  HI.  Island,  is  a 
cove  with  an  anchorage,  in  1.5  fathoms,  close  to  the  shore,  on  a  steep  bunk,  but  bad  ground. 
The  Beagle  and  Adelaide  both  dragged  off  the  bank,  from  the  violence  of  the  squalls  oflF 
the  high  land.  From  the  north  point  of  the  cove  to  Rupert's  Island  is  a  rocky 
ledge.  (Lucky  Ledge,)  over  which  the  tide  sets  with  considerable  strength.  The  Beagle, 
having  dragged  her  anchor  in  the  cove,  was  brought  up  by  ite  hooking  a  rock  on  the  ledge, 
but  it  was  found  broken  on  being  hove  up.  Whilst  there,  the  tide  set  past  her  in  a  north 
and  south  direction,  at  the  rate  of  three  knots  an  hour. 

To  the  westward  of  Cape  Middleton,  of  Narborough,  is  Muscle  Bay,  having  deep 
mter,  and  of  uninviting  character.  Cordova  describes  it  to  be  a  mile  wide,  with  unequal 
loundings,  from  12  to  40  fathoms,  stones.  This  bay  is  not  to  be  recommended,  although 
itappenrs  to  be  well  sheltered.  There  is  an  anchorage  in  from  15  to  30  fathoms  in  Bonet 
Bay,  of  Cordova,  close  to  Carlos  III.  Island.  It  lies  under  the  S.  E.  side  of  some  islands 
oiiposite  to  Batchelor  River.  At  a  short  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Crosstide,  the  N.  W. 
end  of  Carlos  III.  Island,  is  Tilly  Bay,  but  it  has  nothing  to  recommend  it,  particularly 
when  the  much  better  anchorage  off"  Batchelor  River  is  so  close  at  hand. 

CHOISEUL  BAY  AND   NASH   HARBOR,  on  the  Fuegian  Coast,  are  not  in  the    Clioiseul 
least  inviting ;  the  former.  Captain  Fitzroy  describes  to  be  a  large,  deceiving,  harbor-like    Bay. 
bay,  full  of  islets  and  patches  of  kelp,  under  which,  of  course,  there  are  rocks.     Between 
the'islcts,  the  water  is  deep  and  unfit  for  anchorage. 
NASH  HARBOR  is  equally  unserviceable.  NashHarbor. 

WHALE  SOUND,  also  on  the  Fuegian  shore,  at  the  back  of  Ulloa  Peninsula,  is  a    Whale 
large  inlet,  trending  eight  miles  into  the  land,  and  terminating  in  a  valley  bounded  on    Sound. 
each  side  by  high  mountains.     There  is  anchorage  only  in  one  pluce,  the  west  side  of 
Last  Harbor ;  and,  although  this  harbor  appears  large,  the  anchorage  is  small,  and  close 

to  the  shore. 

ST.  DAVID'S  SOUND  separates  Carlos  III.  Island  from  Ulloa  Peninsula.     At  its    St.  David's 
north  end  the  water  is  deep,  but  whore  it  begins  to  narrow,  there  are  soundings  in  it,  on    Sound. 
which  anchorage  might  be  found,  if  there  was  a  necessity  ;  but  I  cannot  imagine  such  an 
occaeion  will  ever  happen  :  should  it,  the  chart  will  be  a  sufficient  guide. 

Slrail  of  Magalhaens,  Jerome  Channel,  Olway  and  Skyring  Waters,  Crooked  and 

Long  Reaches. 

I    THE  JEROME  CHANNEL  was  only  slighly  examined  by  Cordova's  officers ;  for.    The  Jerome 
their  object  being  merely  to  confirm  or  disprove  Sarmiento's  statement  of  the  insularity  of  Channel. 
[the  land  between  it  and  the  Gulf  of  Xaultegua,  now  called  Croker  Peninsula,*  the 

*  Sarmiento  describet  it  to  be  an  island  by  the  Indian  name  of  Cayrayxayiisgua. 


Ilpl    l«ll 


690 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


The  Jerome 
Ctiannel. 


LaKO  de  la  Botella  wns  nione  explored  by  them.     The  continuntion  of  the  Jerome  nam  a 
Id  the  old  charts  Indinn  Sound,  hnvini;  never  been  traced;  and.  therefore,  boine  an  oh^ 
of  great  interest,  it  was  inveatigated  by  Captain  Fit/niv  as  carefully  ns  could  \m  dor^*^' 
the  middle  of  winter  in  an  open  boat.     Tlie  period  of  his  abHence  from  the  Hhin  \^  '" 
ever,  32  days,  not  being  sufficient  to  complete  the  service,  tho  western  shores  of  Ih 
Sky  ring  Water  were  nut  visited ;  and  as  a  further  examination  of  it  will,  prubably  h. 
of  tho  objects  of  the  voyage  he  is  now  preparing  for,  a  brief  descri|)tion  will  bo  suffipi'"'* 

THE  JEROME  CHANNEL  is  narrow,  but  throughout,  free  from  dmigor.    Tk'" 
western  shore  is  high  and  steep,  and  covered  with  trees  ;  the  eastern  shore  is  lower «  I 
less  wooded.     In  mid-channel,  near  its  western  nnd,  nrt«  two  islets  which  hiivn  no  nl 
in  the  Spanish  Clmrt,  unless  the  Tornn  Isles  bo  inttwided  to  represent  them  ;  if  go  tu" 
are  badly  placed.     The  Spanish  Chart  makes  the  channid  (>  mileH  too  long.  '     ^' 

On  the  west  side  of  the  Jerome  are  2  coves,  Wood  Cove  and  Seal  Cove,  that  mnv  h 
used  with  advantage  by  small  vessels.     On  the  eastern  shore,  the  bights.  Three  iJ  ^ 
Bay,  (Cordovii's  Real  Cove.)  and  Coronilla  Cove,  appeared  to  be  couuiiodious.    Ara 
Bay  is  open  and  exposed  to  the  N.  W.  "^ 

Where  the  Las^o  de  la  Botella  joins  the  Jerome,  the  latter  winds  round  tho  north-eosi 
On  its  eastern  side,  behind  the  False  Corona  Isles,  is  Cutter  Cove,  atfording  andiora     I 
for  a  smiill  vessel ;  a  plan  was  made  of  it.     Opposite  is  Nunez  Creek,  with  deop  watdr 

Abreiist  of  the  Corona  Isles,  one  of  which,  the  .Sugar- L'-:;r,  is  about  200  ff>Ht  |||i,|, 
Sullivan  Sound,  penetrating  fur  five  miles  into  the  land  on  the  western  sideof  thurlniin,  i. 
and  at  a  league  to  the  northward  of  tho  Sugar-Loaf,  is  another  opening  to  the  WHstwHrd' 
on  the  north  shore  of  which  is  Bending  Cove;  which,  with  Cutter  Cove,  are  the  odI 
stopping  places  between  Cape  Forty-Five  and  Child's  Ululf.  '  I 

Between  Child's  Bluff  and  Point  Stokes,  theOtway  Water  commences.  Ontliewes 
shore  it  affords  several  commodious  anchorages.  Off  Point  Villiors,  Int.  53°!)'  at  >  i 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  there  are  from  10  to  30  fathoms  ;  iind  the  ijnpth  Au. 
creases  in  advancing  more  northerly.  There  is  anchorage  all  across  tho  norlii-onst  pati 
of  the  water,  in  from  5  to  20  fathoms,  the  bottom  of  sandy  mud. 

Inglefield  and  Vivian  Islands,  at  the  west  end  of  the  water,  are  low,  but  thickly  wood- 
ed. An  isthmus,  6  to  10  miles  across,  separates  the  Olway  Water  from  the  stniit  nnar 
Elizabeth  Island.  From  an  elevated  station  on  the  north  side  of  Fitzniy  Cliiuinel,  this 
narrow  neck  appeared  to  be  low  and  much  occupied  by  lagoons.  The  souih  shore  of 
Otway  Water  is  formed  by  high  land,  with  tip  <i  deep  openings  that  were  not  examined  I 
Brunswick  Peninsula,  a  mass  of  high  moun  i>us  land,  is  the  most  southern  extremity 
of  the  continent.  I 

In  lat.  52°  40',  and  long.  71  j"  W.  is  the  east  entrance  of  Fitzroy  Clinnnel;  it  forms 
a  communication  between  the  Otway  and  the  .Skyring  Waters,  and  takes  a  wiDdiD;! 
course  to  the  N.  W.  for  11  miles,  which  is  easily  navigiited-  A  strong  tide  runniiij; du- 1 
ring  the  neaps  at  the  rate  of  five  or  six  miles  an  hour  in  the  entrance,  and  two  or  three  I 
in  other  parts,  sets  through  it,  six  hours  each  way.  The  rise  and  fall,  however,  were  I 
scarcely  distinguishable. 

SKYRING  WATER  is  10  leagues  long  from  east  to  west.  Its  shores  nre  low.  All 
the  western  extremity  two  openings  were  observed  to  wind  under  a  high  cnstellated- 1 
topped  mountain,  (Dynevor  Castle,)  which  were  supposed  by  Captain  Fitzroy  tocoml 
municate  with  some  of  the  sounds  of  the  western  const.  Through  Eusion  OpcninsJ 
the  southern  one,  no  land  was  visible  in  the  distance  ;  but,  on  a  subscqnent  examinutiinl 
of  the  termination  of  the  Ancon  sin  Salida  of  Sarmiento,  by  Captain  ."Skyring,  noconif 
munication  was  detected.  I 

Of  the  TIDES  in  tho  JEROME  and  INTERIOR  WATERS.— The  tide  was  found 
to  set  through  the  Jerome  Channel  with  great  regularity,  six  hours  each  way.    Tbel 
Spanish  account,  however,  says,  "  The  current  is  always  in  the  direction  of  tliochanuelj 
but  rarely  sets  to  the  N.  W.,  particularly  in  mid-channel  and  the  western  shorn;  on  tliel 
opposite  side,  however,  the  tide  seta  six  hours  each  way,  to  the  N.  W.  and  .S,  K." 
High  water.        The  following  observations  were  made  by  Captain  Fit/.roy  for  the  time  of  liigii  water,! 
at  full  and  change,  at  various  parts  of  the  Jerome  and  its  interior  wiiters,  viz:  intliel 
entrance  of  the  Jerome,  near  Arauz  Bay,  at  1  o'clock  ;  near  Bending  Cove,  Ht  3  o'clock: 
at  Cutter  Cove,  at  4  o'clock ;  on  the  south  shore  of  Fanny  Bay,  at  Gidley  Isliiml,  asalsol 
at  .Martin  Point,  at  5  o'clock  ;  at  In  lefiold  Island,  at  4  o'clock  ;  and  at  the  siime  lioumtl 
the  eastern  entrance  of  Fitzroy  Channel ;  but  at  the  western  end  of  it  at  Ih.  lorn.  Tbef 
variation  of  the  compass  was  found  to  be,  at  the 

Point  of  Isles, 23°  68' 

DonkinCove 23°  40' 

Wigwam  Cove 23°  34' 

Inglefield  Island 23°  56' 

PomtMartiD, 23°  68' 

The  mean  of  which  will  be  23°  49'. 


Skyring 
Water. 


Tides. 


The  portion 
ind  the  ontrani 
Wallis  and  Cai 
would  willingly 
chart  will  show 
probably,  for  sr 
desp  water,  am 
a  heavy  sea  an 
(ths  Island  Bay 
Both  Capt.  Sto 
well  sheltered, 
a^'A  is  much  inc 
other,  as  if  she 
commend  Borja 
plentiful;  undei 
iti  west  side,  as 

As  this  is  an  s 
lubjoined : 

"BORJA  b; 

the  eastward  of 

point,  as  by  its  s 

called  by  the  En 

the  largest  islet 

approniihod  to  hi 

that  impedes  get 

casionnily  come  i 

ing  coast,  and  th 

agaiust  their  effe 

westerly  and  sou 

rarely  blow  hero 

(sinnJl  stones  and 

fetch  of  sea  prev 

being  only  three 

plan  is  to  anchor 

lurf  or  swell  oba 

embarked ;  the  - 

and  the  beach 

with  barberries ; 

Byrou  anchor 

a  plan  of  it,  am 

the  strength  of 

Captain  Stoke 
of  which  the  out 
able  from  a  cunsic 
excellent  leading 

Narborough 
face,  and  of  a  go( 
tie;  it  points  off 
gireighc,  that  it 
atreisht." 

At  not  a  leagui 
upon  it,  but  sho\ 
north  shore,  and 
Abreast  of  Cti 
ward,  at  li  knot 
Between  Bnrj 
Borjtt  Bay  is  so 
Smiwy  Soun( 
while  to  enter, 
within  its  wester 
rounded  by  high, 
be  a  channel  com 
is  disproved  by  i 
The  following 
principnlly  from 
BARCELO 
nodious,  and  ttn 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


591 


The  portion  of  the  strait  comprisod  between  the  western  extremity  of  Ulloa  Peninsula 
,nd  the  oiitrnnce  of  the  Jerome  is  called  Crooked  Roach.  In  the  navigation  of  this  part 
^allis  and  Carteret  sufftired  extreme  anxiefy:  imd  no  one  that  has  read  iheir  journals 
VQuld  willingly  run  the  risit  of  anchoring  in  any  port  or  bay  on  its  southern  shore.  The 
cbsrt  will  show  several  inleto  deep  enough  to  induce  any  navigiitor  to  trust  to  them;  and, 
probablv.  for  small  vessels,  many  sheltered  nooks  might  be  found,  but  they  have  all  very 
leop  water,  and  when  the  wind  blows  strong  down  to  Long  Reach,  they  are  exposed  to 
a  heavy  sea  and  furious  wmd.  The  anchorage  of  Borja  Bay,  within  the  Ortiz  Islands, 
(the  Island  Bay  of  Byron,)  is  so  much  preferable,  that  it  alone  is  to  be  recommended. 
Both  Capt.  Stokes  and  Capt.  Fitzro^  speak  highly  of  it  in  their  journals:  it  is  snug  and 
veil  sheltered,  and  tolerably  easy  ot  access,  but  in  a  gale,  like  its  neighbors,  the  unchor- 
,«fli8  much  incommoded  by  the  williwaws,  which  "drive  the  ship  from  one  side  to  the 
jther,  as  if  she  were  a  light  chip  upon  the  water."  Captain  Fitzroy  says,  "let  me  re- 
commend Borja  Bay  as  un  excellent,  although  small,  anchorage:  wood  and  water  are 
plentiful ;  under  the  coarse  upper  sand  is  a  stiff  clay,  like  pipe  clay.  Avoid  the  islet  off 
jti  west  side,  as  you  go  in  or  out." 

As  this  is  an  anchorage  that  may  be  much  used,  Captain  Stokes'  account  of  it  is  also 
(ubioined:  ,,        •  j  , 

"BOlUA  BAY  IS  situated  on  the  northern  shore  of  Crooked  Reach,  two  miles  to   Borja  Bay. 
the  eastward  of  Cnpe  Quod.     Its  position  is  pointed  out  as  well  by  the  islet  off  its  west 
point,  as  by  its  situation  with  respect  to  El  Moriion,  the  helmet-shape  point  previously 
called  by  the  English,  St.  David's  Head.     The  entrance  1o  the  bay  is  to  the  eastward  of 
the  largest  islet,  and  presents  no  dangers  ;  all  the  islets  and  shores  of  the  bay  may  be 
appronrhed  to  half  a  cable's  length,  even  to  the  edge  of  the  kelp.     The  only  difficulty 
that  impedes  getting  into  the  bay,  arises  from  the  baffling  winds  and  violent  gusts  that  oc- 
casionally come  off  the  movintains  and  down  the  denp  ravines  which  form  the  surround- 
ing coast,  and  the  utmost  vigilance  must  be  exercised  in  beating  in  under  sail  to  guard 
BgaiuBt  their  effects.     The  anchorage  is  perfectly  sheltered  from  the  prevailing  winds,  the 
westerly  and  south-westerly  gales,  and  is  open  only  to  south-easterly  winds,  which  very 
raroly  blow  hero,  and  still  more  rarely  with  violence;  and  as  the  holding  ground  is  good, 
(smnll  stones  and  sand,)  and  the  depth  of  water  moderate,  (14  to  16  fathoms.)  and  any 
fetch  of  sea  prevented  by  the  narrowness  of  the  strait  in  this  part,  the  greatest  breadth 
being  only  three  miles,  it  may  be  pronounced  a  very  good  and  secure  harbor.     The  best 
plan  is  to  anchor  with  the  bower,  and  steadied  to  the  shore  by  a  hawser  or  a  kedge.     No 
surf  or  swell  obstructs  landing  any  where ;  good  water  and  jdenty  of  wood  are  easy  to  be 
embarked  ;  the  trees,  a  species  of  beech,  are  of  considerable  size.     The  shores  are  rocky, 
and  the  beach  plentifully  stocked— as  indeed  are  all  parts  of  the  strait  to  the  eastward — 
with  barberries  and  wild  celery." 

Byron  anchored  in  l3orja  Buy,  as  did  also  Carteret  in  the  Swallow.  The  former  gives 
apian  of  it,  and  calls  it  Island  Bay  He  attempted  to  anchor  in  it,  but  was  pro^  "ntod  by 
the  strength  of  the  tide. 

Captain  Stokes  describes  the  Morrion,  or  St.  David's  Head,  to  be  a  lofty  granitic  rock, 
of  which  the  outer  face  is  perpendicular  and  bare,  and  of  a  light  grey  color,  distinguish- 
able from  a  considerable  distance,  both  from  the  east  and  the  north-west,  and  forming  an 
excellent  lending  mark  to  assure  the  navigator  of  his  position. 

Narborough  thus  describes  Cape  Quod  :  "  It  is  a  steep  up  cape,  of  a  rocky  greyish 
face,  nndof  a  good  height  before  one  comes  to  it :  it  shows  like  a  great  building  of  a  cas- 
tle; it  points  off  with  a  race  from  the  other  mountains,  so  much  into  the  channel  of  the 
Btreight,  that  it  makes  shutting  in  against  the  south  land,  and  maketh  an  elbow  in  the 
itreight." 

At  not  a  league  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Quod,  is  a  rock  which  has  not  more  than  9  feet 
upon  it.  but  shows  itself  by  the  weeds  growing  uiwn  it;  it  is  a  good  distance  from  the 
north  shore,  and  is  in  the  fair  way  working  to  the  westward  round  the  cnpe. 

Abrenst  of  Cape  Quod,  Capt  Stokes  tried,  and  found  the  current  setting  to  the  east- 
ward, at  1  i  knot  an  hour. 

Between  Borja  Bay  and  Cape  Quod  are  two  coves,  too  small  to  be  of  any  use,  when 
Borja  Bay  is  so  much  superior. 

Snowy  Sound,  a  deep  inlet,  unimportant  to  the  navigator,  and  not  worth  any  person's 
while  to  enter,  except  for  nnchoriige  in  a  cove  at  about  a  mile,  and  in  another  at  two  miles, 
within  its  western  head.  It  extends  in  for  10  miles,  and  terminates  in  two  inlets,  sur- 
rounded by  high,  perpendicular,  block  rocks.  Snowy  Sound  was  formerly  considered  to 
ben  channel  communicating  with  Whale  Sound,  and  insulating  Ulloa  Peninsula ;  but  this 
is  disproved  by  Capt.  Fitzroy's  careful  examination  of  it. 

The  following  descriptions  of  the  bays  between  Cape  Quod  and  Cape  Notch,  are  taken 
principally  from  the  Appendix  to  Cordova's  Voyage  to  the  Strait. 

BARCELO  BAY,  the  first  to  the  west  of  Cape  Quod,  seems  to  be  large  and  incom-    BarctloBay. 
modious,  and  strewed  with  small  islets. 


/, 


mm 


1^^ 


699 

Oiomo  Bay. 

Lan^araBay. 
Poiadai  Bay. 

Arce  Bay. 

Florea  Bay. 

Fillena  Cove. 
Ouirior  Buy. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT* 

OSORNO  DAY  fulliiwa.  rdiI,  accordioK  to  Cordovii,  hat  very  de«p  water  all  o^,.. 
there  b«int{  40  iiithoiiiH  witliin  a  cable'ti  laiigth  of  the  beach,  excupting  on  the  west  hhJ 
where  there  ia  a  rnrky  ledge,  with  fruiii  lU  to  'JO  fathoina.  ' 

Next,  to  the  weatward,  ia  LANUAUA  DAY.     it  treiida  in  for  about  a  mile  to  tha 
north-eiiat,  aud  haa  lU  tu  1^  fathoma,  atony  bottom.     It  ii  mora  aheltered  than  the  tw 
former  biiya. 

FUSAUAS  BAY  ia,  nioat  probably,  Wallia'  Lion  Cove.  Ita  weatern  point  in  formod 
by  a  high,  rounded,  and  precipiioua  huudhind,  roaeinbling,  in  Capt.  Wallia'  idnn,  n  lion' 
head;  and  although  Cordova  could  nut  diacover  (he  likeneaa,  yet  it  ia  aufficiently  da. 
BcriplivH  to  point  out  the  buy,  were  the  anchorage  worth  occupying,  which  is  ng,' 
Wiillia  deacribua  it  to  have  deep  waier  cluae  to  the  ahure;  hia  ship  waa  anchored  Iq  An 
futhoiim, 

AKCE  HAY. — Cordova  deacribea  it  to  have  anchorage  in  from  6  to  17  fothoms,  stones 
It  dividoa  at  tho  bottom  into  two  arma,  each  being  half  a  mile  deep.  The  outer  poiuti 
boar  from  each  othor  VV.  N.  W.  and  E.  S.  E.,  half  a  milu  acroas. 

FLURES  BAY  ia,  probably,  Wallia'  (Jood  Luck  Bay;  Cordova  deacribea  it  to  be  very 
amall,  and  exposed,  with  from  (J  tu;.'0  fatbuma,  alone  and  gravel.  At  the  bottom  is  ariv. 
ulet  of  very  good  wator. 

VILLKNA  COVE  hoa  from  15  to  20  fathoma,  and  ia  very  open  and  exposed. 

Tlien  followa  (JUiRIOli  BAY. — It  ia  largo,  and  o|)en  to  the  aouth,  and  probably 
aflorda  good  anchorage  in  covea.  Cordova  deacribea  it  to  extend  for  more  than  a  ieairue 
to  tlie  north,  the  mouth  being  'J  milea  wide.  Ita  weat  point  ia  Cape  Notch,  which  will 
Borvu  tu  recognize  it.  Near  the  entrance  ia  an  iaiand  and  aeveral  rocka;  and  within 
thnm,  on  tho  woat  aide,  are  2  coves,  with  from  15  to  30  fathoma,  atonea.  Beyond  them 
ia  tliu  port,  which  haa  a  narrow  entrance.  A  river  falla  from  a  conaidnrable  height  ioto 
it,  and  by  tho  rapidity  of  the  current,  has  formed  a  channel  of  ooze  in  the  diroition  of 
the  entrance,  in  which  there  ia  good  anchorage,  in  from  '20  to  'J6  fathoma:  on  either  side 
of  tho  channel  the  bottom  ia  atony.  The  port  ia  too  difficult  to  reach  to  make  it  nn  ob- 
ject of  any  value.     Should,  however,  a  atrong  gale  from  the  aouth  or  aouth-wost  obliee  a 

_i  ■-.  *     ;..    ..1...  _i II -I ...: • *K_   _»  „:,i..  „f  *i.„  rt       o    '" 


ship  to  run  in,  ahe  should  avoid  paaaiiig  too  noar  the  west  aido  of  the  narrow;  for  a  reef 

d's  length.     There  ia  also  a  bank  outside  the  narrow,  hut  It 
is  pointed  out  by  kelp. 


Swallow  Har 
bor. 


StewarVi 
Bay. 


extt'otta  otr  it  for  nearly  u  cablo'i 


From  tho  above  description  of  tho  bays  between  Capoa  Quod  and  Notch,  occupyinga 
space  of  I'Jj  milea,  aud  from  the  view  we  hud  of  them  in  passing,  none  seem  to  be  coo- 
veiiient,  or  very  aafe.  The  boat  port  for  ahelter  for  a  ship,  ia  Swallow  Harlwr,  on  the 
opposite  shore;  but  small  veaaela  may  find  many  places  that  a  ship  dare  not  Rpproach 
wliero  every  convenience  may  bo  had ;  for  if  the  water  be  too  deep  for  anchorage,  they 
miiy  be  accured  to  the  ahore  at  the  bottom  of  the  covea,  where  neither  the  awt^li  norths 
wmd  can  reach  lliem. 

SWALLOW  HARBOR  is  li  mile  to  the  weatward  of  Snowy  Sound.  It  is  a  better 
anchorage  for  sliips  than  any  in  the  neighborhood.  The  plan  of  it  is  a  aufiicient  guide 
ttiu  dangera  being  well  buoyed,  and  pointed  out  by  kelp.  It  was  first  used  by  Captain 
Carteret,  in  tho  .Swallow;  and  Cordova  gives  a  short  description  of  it. 

Tho  anchorage  is  under  the  east  sidu  of  tho  island  which  separates  the  hnrborfroni 
Cordova's  Coiulesa  Bay,  and  which  forma  its  west  side.  Wallis  deacribea  tho  harbor  to 
bo  "sheltered  from  all  winds,  aud  excellent  in  every  respect.  There  are  two  channeb 
into  it,  wliich  are  both  narrow,  but  not  dangerous,  as  the  rocks  are  easily  discovered  by 
the  weeds  that  grow  upon  them."  Cordova's  account  of  it  runs  thus — "To  the  west- 
ward of  .Snowy  Sound  are  two  bays,  formed  in  a  bigiit  by  an  island.  The  eastern,  Swal- 
low ILirbur.  has  in  ita  mouth  three  islands  and  a  rock;  besides  strewed  with  kulp,  which 
serves  to  point  out  the  dangers  in  entering.  Within,  it  is  very  well  sheltered  iVom  all 
winds.  The  depth  is  from  4U  to  16  fathoms,  stones,  and  in  some  parts  ou/.e.  This  bay 
is  to  the  aouth  of  Cape  Notch;  and  to  recognize  it,  there  is  a  cascade  falling  down  the 
centre  of  a  mountain  at  the  bottom  of  the  port,  to  the  westward  of  which  are  two  higher 
mountains;  the  summit  of  tlie  eastern  hvi'm^  peaked,  and  the  western  one  rounded. 

Ihe  bay,  tu  the  weatward  of  the  iaiand,  ia  Condesa  Bay.  It  is  full  of  islets  nndrocli!, 
and  the  channel  behind  llie  island,  comnmnicating  with  Swallow  Buy,  is  very  nitrruw." 

At  about  a  cable's  length  off  the  western  point  of  the  entrance  of  Swallow  Harbor,  Cap- 
tain Fil^roy  saw  a  rock  juat  awash.     This  danger  should  be  carefully  avoided. 

STEWART'S  BAY  is  less  tlian  a  league  from  Swallow  Bay.  Of  this  place  Capt 
Stokes  makes  the  following  remarks : — "Stewart's  Bay  afi'orded  us  quite  a  resting  plaee 
for  the  night,  but  it  is  by  no  means  to  be  recommended  as  an  anchorage;  for  though  itii 
sufficiently  sheltered  from  wind  and  sea,  yet  the  rocks,  io  different  parts  of  it,  rendertbt 
passage  in  or  out  very  hazardous:  every  danger  in  it  is  pointed  out  by  rock  weed,  but  it 
is  so  much  straitened  as  to  require  the  utmost  vigilance.  A  plan  of  it  was  made,  and  coa- 
nected  with  the  coast  by  bearings  and  angles  to  Cape  Notch,  and  to  other  fixed  pointii 
The  description  of  the  place  by  Cordova  caunut  be  improved." 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PIF.OT. 


508 


The  account  in  Cordova  is  ae  fdllowH  : 

I'Stewiirt  Buy.  (Ij"  Biiliiti  tin  Stimrdo.)  follows  Condesn  Uny 
isveral  pti'clif*  •'*  '**''P'  ""  indiculioii  of  tlio  iniiiiy  rockn  timt  nxist. 
..|ig  niiirow  and  tortuous;  tlio  dopth  from  I'i  to  IG  futlioins,  stun 

igli't,  forminn  two  niirrow  clmiumlM  loiidiuK  into  ii  port  or  Imsin,  2  cablus'  length  ' 
the  »•'»'«•■"  chiinni'l  is  tho  diM-per,  iind  has  lo  to  -'()  fiitlioms.  Inside  ihe  Insin,  n 
the  eiist  Hide,  ill"  doptli  is  (i  iind  9  riitlioins,  mud.  A  ronf  oxtonds  for  hnlf  a  ciihlo's  length 
toiliB  westward  of  tlio  soutli  end  of  tlio  islot.  It  would  be  difficult  and  dangerous  to  en- 
ter this  small  basin." 

The"  follows  a  deep  and  oxtonsivn  pliamiel,  ol  wliirh  wo  know  only  tliiit  it  extends  to 
the  south  for  fivo  or  six  milns,  and  purhaps,  is  very  siiiiilur,  in  its  tiMinination,  to  Snowy 
«/.iind      It  is  Sarmionto's  Snowy  Channol.     (EnHonada  do  Muclm  Niovo.) 


It  has  nn  island,  besides 
Even  the  best  chnn- 
stones.     At  the  bottom  is 
wide : 
nd  on 


At  this  part  of  tlio  strait,  tho  broadtli  is  about  'J4  milos ;  but,  at  Capo  Quod  it  scarcely 
oeiis  1  i  "'il"*     The  slioros  aro  cortuinly  muoh  loss  vi«r " 


excoeu 


:*rdaiit  than  to  tho  oastward  of 


Ciipo  Q"'"' '  ''"'  ""'^  ""  il'9'"'>l  'w  Corduvt's  account  would  mako  them  appear  to  be  ;  for, 


bo  says ; 


'As 


soon  ns  Capo  Quod  is  pasHiid,  tlui  strait  assumostho  most  horrible  appoar- 
spocto  mas  horri'do,)  havinf;  hi^h   mountains  on  both  sidos.  separated  by 


ince,  (con  fel  aspocto 

ravines  ontiroly  destitute  ot  trees,  from  the  mid-height  upwards.     To  us  it  appeared  that 

the  hills  were  certainly  much  more  Imro  of  vegetatiou  above, ')u:  below  were  not  deficient ; 

the  trees  and  shrubs,  however,  are  of  suiiiU  si/e.     For  the  purposes  of  fuel,  abundance 

f  wood  is  to  be  obtained.     In  the  winter  months  the  hills  a.-e  covered  with  snow,  from 

the  summit  to  tho  base;  but  in  tho  month  of  April,  when  the  Adventure  passed  through, 

no  snow  was  visible  about  them. 

CnptHin  Stokes  remarks,  that  tho  mountains  in  this  part,  (Cape  Notch,)  spire  up  into 

J  of  great  height,  connected  by  singularly  sharp  saw-like  ridges,  ns  bare  of  vegeta- 

Fon  «8  if  tli'^y  '""^  ''°''"  rendered  so  by  the  hand  of  art.     About  their  bases  there  are 

enernlly  some  green  patches  of  jungle,  but  upon  the  whole,  nothing  can  be  more  sterile 

*nd  repulsive  than  this  portion  of  the  strait.     This  account  of  Captain  Stokes  agrees  with 

r  rilova's ;  but  upon  examining  the  coves,  wo  found  them  so  thickly  wooded  with  shrubs 

nd  juDgle,  Olid  small  trees,  that  it  wat,  dilHcult  to  penetrate  beyond  a  few  yards  from  tho 

CAPE  NOTCH  is  n  projecting  point  of  grey  colored  rock,  about  650  feet  high,  having    Cape  Notch. 

A  eu  cleft  in  its  summit.     It  is  a  conspicuous  headland,  and  cannot  be  mistaken. 
'  The  next  place  to  tho  westward  of  Cape  Notch,  that  can  bo  recommended  for  an  an- 

,  0  jg  piiiya  Pnrda  Cove,  wliith  is  well  sheltered,  and,  for  chain  cables,  has  a  good 
hnttom  bein"  of  sandy  mud,  strewed  with  stones :  it  is  half  a  mile  wide  ot  the  entrance, 
d  about  8  quarter  deep.  Round  the  west  side  of  Middle-point  is  a  channel,  a  quarter 
*? smile  long  and  l.')0  yards  wide,  with  six  and  seven  fathoms  water,  communicating 
*  th  a  very  excellent  lilllo  harbor  for  a  small  vessel,  of  ub(mt  a  (lunrter  of  a  mile  in  di- 

""piavB  Parda  Cove  is  easily  known  by  Shelter  Island,  that  fronts  the  inlet  of  Playa 

P  rda.    The  inlet  is  li  mile  long,  and  a  half  a  mile  broad,  but  with  very  deep  water  all 

By  luffing  rounil  the  island,  a  ship  will  fetch  the  anchorngo  in  the  cove;  and,  al- 


InrboT  from 
hiirbor  to 
channels 
•uvsred  by 
I)  the  west- 
]ern,  Swal- 
lelj),  which 
\i\  from  all 
This  bay 
down  the 
[two  higher 
Milled, 
and  rocks, 
Innrrow." 
irbor,  Cap- 
place  Capt 
IstiDg  plaee 
Vhough  it  is 
1  render  the 
Ued,  but  it 
He,  and  COB- 
lied  polotti 


thouehsml  should  not  bo  reduced  too  soon,  yet  tho  squalls,  if  the  weather  be  bad,  blow 
down  the  inlet  of  Playa  Parda  with  great  violence.  Anchor  a  little  within,  and  half  way 
between  the  points  of  entrance,  at  aliout  14  cable  from  tho  middle  point,  in  54  and  6 

Of"Glftcier  Bay,  remarkable  for  a  glacier  at  the  bottom,  and  of  another  bay  to  the  east- 
ward of  it,  we  know  nothing:  the  foi^ner  may  possess  good  shelter,  and,  perhaps,  an- 
Lhoraee-  but  the  latter  is  too  full  of  islands  to  bo  recommended.  Between  Glacier  Bay 
land  PIftVa  Parda,  the  shore  is  bold  but  straight,  excepting  a  small  cove  about  two  miles 
Ifrom  Pliiya  Parda,  which  seemed  likely  to  atVord  slieltor  for  small  vessels.  Off  the  west 
liDDer  point  is  a  reef,  but  within  it  there  seemed  to  be  a  basin  half  a  mile  deep.  Eye 
iilietches  of  these  three  indentations  were  made  as  we  passed  by. 
1  To  the  westward  of  Snowy  Channel  are  several  inlets  affording,  opparontly,  good  shal- 
ter  but  those  we  examined  were  found  to  have  very  deep  water. 

I  Opposite  Playa  Parda  is  n  deep  opening  which  has  more  the  appearance  of  n  channel 
lleadiDE  tbiough  the  Tierra  del  Fuogo,  than  any  openings  to  the  west  of  the  Barbara.  It 
lis  evidently  the  inlet  noticed  by  Sariniento,  and  thus  described  by  him  :— "  a  great  bay, 
llEnsenadal  which  trends  into  the  land  in  a  W.  S.  W.  direction  fm-  more  than  2  leagues, 
Bod  has  an  island  at  its  mouth  ;— we  called  it  the  Abra.  (opening,)  because  we  did  not 
see  its  termination.  On  the  opposite  shore  there  is  another  port  und  grey  beach,  (Puerto 
y  Playa  Parda  )  which  has  an  island  that  shelters  it.  Withm  the  Abra  the  land  is  low 
ind  hummocky :  half  a  leogue  beyond,  (i.  e.  to  the  eastward  of )  the  Abra,  is  a  cove ;  and 
on  the  opposite  shore,  a  league  across,  is  another  cove,  which  forms  a  port,  which  the  In- 
idians  call  Pelepelgua,  and  the  cove  they  call  Exeaqud."  The  cove  Pelepelgua,  may 
robably  be  Glacier  Bay,  and  Exeaquil  must,  of  course,  bo  one  of  the  coves  to  the  east 
Bid  of  the  Abra. 


38 


»94 


BLUNT'S  A>IERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


MariarCa 
Cove. 


To  us,  the  opening,  or  Ahrn,  seemed  to  be  one  mile  nntl  a  half  wide,  with  >in  iL..„ 
the  entrance.     Within,  it  appeared  to  take,  at  first,  a  south,  then  a  S.  W.  courBe"^  "a 
afterwards  \o  trend  round  a  projecting,  low,  hummocky  point  of  the  east  shore,  and  wi  h 
under  the  base  of  a  high  precipitous  ridj;e  on  the  opposite,  or  west  shore,  towards  th 
S.  E.,  beyond  which  its  course  could  riot  be  observed.  ' 

On  the  seaward  const  there  is  a  deep  opening  behind  Otway  Bay,  which,  probably  nia 
communicate  with  it  '     ^ 

The  weather  here  is  generally  so  thick,  that,  although  the  distance  across  be  only  tw 
to  three  miles,  yet  one  shore  is  frequently  roncoided  from  the  other,  by  the  mist- 
which  account  Ctiptnin   Stokep  found  il  impossible  to  form  any  plan  of  this  part  of  th" 
strait,  on  his  passage  through  it.     Captain  Stokes,  in  leaving  Stewart's  Bay,  says  " 
continued  our  progress  K»  the  westward,  having  westerly  and  S.  W.  winds,  with  thj  t 
weather  and  drizzling  rain.     The  coasts  on  both  sides  were  very  rarely  visible  to  us  h 
reason  of  the  thick  -iiist  by  which  thoy  were  capped.     It  is,  however,  a  bold  coast  n 
sach  side,  otherwi  etho  strait  would  bo  utterly  uiinuvigal'le  in  such  weather" 


an 
deep 


MARIAN'S  COVE,  one  mile  and  a  half  to  the  west  of  Playa  Parda,  is  a  convenient 
chorago  :  at  the  entrance  it  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide,  and  more  than  half  a  mil' 
ep  ;  a  plan  was  made  of  it,  which  will  be  a  suilicient  guide.     Captain  Stokes  obsen-  ' 


that  it  affords  shelter  from  the  prevailing  winds  ;  the  anchorage  is  22  fathoms,  cood'i 
ing  ground ;  but  less  water  may  bo  obtained,  if  required,  there  being  8  fathoms  wjthi" 
60  yards  of  the  beach,  at  tlie  bottom  of  the  bay.     In  entering,  the  west  side  should  b 
kept  aboard.  ' 

This  cove  is  about  midway  between  Cr  'o  I'Etoilo  and  Playa  Parda;  and  is  a  very  ad- 
vantageous place  to  stop  at. 

Opposite  to  Cape  I'Etoile,  is  a  bay  with  aiichorngo,  in  17  fathoms,  in  a  well-sheltered 
situation.  From  C'ipe  J' •^.toile  to  the  entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  Xaultegun,  the  shore  ia 
straight  and  precipitous,  and  the  hills  iire  barren  and  rocky.  On  the  opposite  shore  there 
are  a  few  inlets,  but  the  most  useful  one  fur  the  navigator  is  Half  Port  Bay,  rather  more 
than  a  league  to  the  east  of  Cape  Mundiiy.  It  is  iinn^ediately  round  the  south  side  of  a 
deep  inlet.     It  is  merely  a  slight  indontntioii  of  the  coast. 

The  Beagle  anchored  here  on  2  or  .'5  occasions,  and  found  it  to  bo  an  excellent  stopninij. 
place;  the  anchorage  is  within  two-thirds  of  a  cable's  length  of  the  west  point,  in  ifi 
fathoms,  muddy  bottom.  The  situation  of  this  cove  was  ascertained  by  oljservalion  to  be 
in  lat.  53°  11' 3()".  and  long.  73°  14'  57"  \V.,  (or  2°  20'  5G"  W.' of  Port  Famine,] 
There  is  ii  plan  of  this  bay.  '' 

"  The  land  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  anchorage  is  liigh,  and  thickly  wooded  from  its  I 
summit  to  the  water's  edge.  On  the  eastern  side  ii  is  lower,  the  vegetation  more  scanty  I 
and  tile  trees  crooked  and  stunte  1,  and  |)ressed  down  to  the  N.  E.  by  the  prevailiiiffwinds 
S.  W.  by  \V.  from  the  aiiehornge,  is  a  riMniirkable  clid't  in  tlio  summit  of  the  highland 
from  which  a  narrow  stripe  cleared  of  jungle  descends  to  the  water's  edge,  apparentlf 
formed  by  the  descent  of  a  torrent,  or  of  large  musses  of  the  rock.*  The  anchorage  is 
well  sheltered  from  prevailing  breezes,  and  the  holding  ground  is  good:  water  and  fuel 
are  abundant." — Stokes'  M.SS. 

Tliero  is  an  anchorage  under  ('a))o  Monday  for  small  vessels,  in  which  Byron  anchored 
and  nide  out  a  heavy  gale  of  wind.     With  the  exception  of  p  shoal  in  midway  .f  the  en- 
trance, on  whirl'  tlier<!  are  4  fathoms,  it  seems  to  ollrr  a  good  shelter  from  tlie 
wiiid-i.     On  till'  west  side  of  Ciipe  .Monday  is  Cordova's  Medal   Bay.     (Puerto  delal 
Mcdalla.)  of  wlii(  h  a  very  full   but  (loiid  description  is  given  iu  the  appendix  of  Ihatl 
voyagt". 

It  hiiS  according  to  the  description,  an  island  in  the  en. ranee,  which  forms  twochan-l 
nels,  the  easternmost  of  which  is  only  deep  enough  for  boats,  but  the  western  is  i!5  fath- 
oms wide  ;  it  is  strewed  half  way  across  with  kelp  ;  but  between  the  kelp  and  the  isiandl 
is  a  good  anri  clear  |>assai>e,  with  Ii  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  In  the  kelp  there  aio  nutleal 
thiiii  4  futhiiins,  and  inside  it  the  depth  is  !»,  H,  and  7  fathoms,  sandy  bottom.  Toenterl 
this  port,  there  ...-e  no  dan^i-rs  that  are  O'lt  visible,  and  those  are  easil}  avoided;  thejj 
consist  only  of  the  iHlct  in  its  entrance,  and  uomo  patches  of  kelp,  over  which,  howeverpf 
there  is  plenty  of  wafer. 

The  inlf  of  XauU»iua,  improperly  called  Bulkeley's  Chaimel,  is  a  deep  jpeuiag,! 
tren  ling  into  the  Ian  ,  :ii  an  ©•cffierly  direction  for  28  miles,  and  ajjproaching  within  tvfjj 
miles  of  some  of  the  inlets  on  rhe  north-west  side  of  Indian  Sound.  The  ontranceiJl 
about  four  mile?  across,  but  ^i'terwards  expands  to  a  width  of  nearly  15  miles.  At  tin) 
entraixe  is  .Si,  Ann's  Island,  between  which  and  the  south  point,  is  a  navigable  cliannHl 
half  a  mile  wide.  St  Abo's  iHland  is  about  two  miles  long,  and  extends  in  a  W.  N.  W.[ 
and  E.  S.  E.  direction  ,  jtf  its  N.  W.  end  is  an  islet,  uud  there  is  another  cloio  to  its S.| 
W.  extremity. 


The  land  foi 
Jerotne  channe 
The  plan  thi 
who  passed  thi 
accurate  survej 
beeo  examined, 
think  fhere  is  a 
B  mistake  and  j 
no  thorougiifare 

Little  has  bei 
and  fall,  tliey  ar 
at  full  and  chan; 
ly  to  the  enstwa 

Between  Cap 
hours;  and  from 
in  3i  hours.     T 

Strait  of  Maga 


*  Mom  probnbly  by  the  effeti  of  u  gum  of  wind,  which,  (o  the  eoatwurd,  particularly  In  ilu  GjNI 
Cbaanel,  ii  very  cuanuon. 


Between  Eliza 

In  a  henvy  gale, 

the  wider  part  o 

bat  nothing  to  be  i 

ero  Reach.     It  w 

reaching  Cape  Pj 

the  strait  lieroabo 

peatuousone,  lien 

fore  night.     Captii 

ward,  the  wind  sq 

were  directed  du 

when  on  one  shon 

at  the  distance  of 

A  league  to  the 

niiento's  Puerto  Ai 

north,  between  the 

dious  cove  for  a  si 

Id  consuhini^ 
island,  instil, ited  by 
'A bay  funned  in 
island  in  the  easter 
J  E.  point  lies  in  the 
right.)    At  the  ea 
and  a  league  lon;_. 
I  long.    To  tlie  wes 
I  and  the  direction  _ 
two  leagues,  Inis  at 
I  course  of  which  di; 
j  peared  to  bo  a  good 
I  bottom  with  30  fatl 
There  seems  to 
jmilesto  the  west  ol 
I  the  .Spanish  ch'irt  _ 
jitto future  examiniL 
I  there  seems  no  roa 
Of  Upright  i}ay 
jwith  her  stern  in  th 
jthe  cape,  at  about  h 
Jwinds,  found  it  to 
pble's  length  off  n 

the  bay,  in  22 
Ihelter  from  the  prii 
jbottom  requiring  a  v 
fg  cable.  There  i: 
tliored  in  the  south 
|of  the  cape." 


'T';.  name  Xauh 


t.,a 


■""PfPHF 


nnchore^ 
ftheeo-l 

prevailiogl 
lertu  delil 
via  of  thstl 

two  chan-l 
is  'ib  t'ath-[ 

d  the  island! 

are  nui 
To  enter  I 

jidad ;  theyl 

h,  however,! 

ep  jpernDg,! 

within  tw«| 

ontranco  iil 

■es.    Atthil 

\\)W  chnnneJ 

W.N.W.f 

llasotoiuS.1 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  595 

The  land  forming  the  north  side  of  the  strait,  between  the  Gulf  of  Xanltegua*  and  the 
Jerome  channel,  is  called  Croker  Peninsula. 

The  plan  that  was  made  of  the  gulf  was  little  more  than  a  sketch.  Captain  Fitzroy 
who  passed  through  it  in  a  boat,  and  examined  it  to  its  termination,  says  :  "  if  ever  an 
accurate  survey  be  made  of  the  gulf,  it  must  be  when  all  other  gulfs  in  the  world  have 
been  examined,  for  it  is  utterly  useless ;  and  from  the  appearance  of  its  shores  I  do  not 
think  there  is  any  anchorage  m  it.  Therefore,  should  a  ship  be  so  unfortunate  as  to  make 
a  mistake  and  get  into  it,  she  must  keep  under  way  until  she  gets  out  again.  There  is 
no  thoroughfare:'— Fitzroy'>i  Journal. 

Little  has  been  said  of  the  tides  in  this  part  of  the  strait,  and,  indeed,  as  to  their  rise 
and  fall,  they  are  really  of  no  nnportance,  being  little  more  than  4  feet.    It  is  high  water   High  waUr 
atfull  and  change  in  all  parts  within  a  few  minutes  of  noon.     The  currents  set  constant- 
ly  to  the  eastward  with  more  or  less  strength. 

Between  Capes  Notch  and  Quod,  the  current  set  us  two  miles  to  the  eastward  in  3i 
hours;  and  from  Cape  Quod  to  Port  Gallant,  we  found  the  current  had  favored  us  6  miles 
in  3i  hours.     The  ebb  tide  sots  to  the  eastward- 

Strait  of  Magalhaens—Sea  Reach,  including  Capes  Victory  and  Pillar,  and  the  Evan- 
gelists. 

Between  Elizabeth  Island  and  the  western  end  of  Lonsr  Reach,  there  is  very  little  swell. 
In  ahenvy  gale,  or  perhaps,  even  a  strong  breeze,  a  s  .  .t.  sea  may  be  experienced  in 
the  voider  piivt  of  the  strait,  particularly  near  and  to  t\u:  westward  of  Cape  Froward  ; 
bat  nothing  to  be  compared  to  the  confused,  breaking  swell,  that  runs  in  the  sea,  or  West- 
ern Reach.  It  was  felt  by  the  Beagle  when  beating  to  the  westward,  immediately  on 
reaching  Cape  Providence.  There  seems  to  be  no  danger  for  vessels  beating  through 
the  strait  hereabouts,  the  shore  being  bold  to.  Byron  passed  a  night,  and  a  very  tem- 
pestuous one,  here  ;  as  did  also  the  Beagle,  the  latter  not  being  able  to  find  anchorage  be- 
fore night.  Captain  Stokes  upon  this  occasion  writes  :— "  We  continued  beating  to  wind- 
ward, the  wind  squally  and  weather  rainy.  The  coast  on  both  sides  is  bold.  Our  boards 
were  directed  during  the  night,  which  was  very  dark,  by  the  sight  of  Cape  Upright 
when  on  one  shore,  and  of  Cape  Providence  when  on  the  other.  We  commonly  tacked 
at  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  either  shore." 

A  league  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Monday  is  an  inlet,  which  wo  supposed  to  be  Sar- 
miento's  Puerto  Ani^osto.     Upon  its  west  head  is  a  conspicuous  ,)und  mount,  and  to  the 
i  north,  between  the  mount  and  a  projecting  point,  is  a  confined  but  very  snug  and  commo- 
!  dious  cove  for  a  small  vessel,  in  17  fathoms,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  within  the  head. 

In  consulting  the  a|)pendix  to  Cordova's  voyage,  it  would  seem  that  this  projec  ion  is  an 
island,  insulated  hy  tho  inlet  hero,  called  Puerto  A.ngosto.  Thcs  description  runs  thus  :— 
"Abny  formed  in  tho  Tierra  del  Fuego,  between  v'ape  San  lldafonso,  (Upright.)  and  an 
island  ill  the  eastern  part  of  its  mouth.  The  figur '  >f  the  island  is  triangular,  and  its  N. 
E, point  lies  in  the  line  of  bearing  of  Capes  Lunes,  (Monday,)  and  San  Ihlelonso  (Up- 
right.) At  the  oast  end  of  the  island  is  an  inlet  runi/iigto  the  south-west,  1 J  mile  wide, 
andalengue  long,  to  the  loti  n  of  the  bay;  the  S.  >v  side  of  the  island  being  li  mile 
long.  To  the  westward,  the  distance  between  tin  shov.i  and  the  island  is  much  more, 
I  and  the  direction  of  the  second  channel  is  N.  i  W.  TltO  b.iy,  whose  greatest  breadth  is 
tvfoleagues,  has  at  its  bottom,  nml  towards  the  S.  E.  pirl,  the  mouth  of  an  inlet,  the 
course  of  which  disappears  behind  the  mountains,  in  a  S.  i  E.  direction.  There  ap- 
peared to  bo  a  good  anchorage  between  tho  island  and  the  eastern  shore,  but  we  had  no 
bottom  with  30  fathoms." 

There  seems  to  be  no  douiit  that  tho  island  above  described  is  the  projecting  point  4 
miles  to  tho  west  of  Cape  Monday,  anti  the  Sarmiento's  Puerto  Angosfo  insulates  it;  but 
the  Spanish  clnrt  is  so  vague,  an  I  oui-  own  so  imixM-fect  in  its  part,  that  I  prefer  leaving 
itto  future  examination,  rather  rliam  invent  an  island  ;  although,  from  the  Spanish  account, 
therf  seems  no  reason  to  doubt  its  existence. 

Of  Upright  Bay  we  know  little.     The  Adelaide  rode  out  a  gale  from  the  eastward 

with  her  stern  in  the  surf  of  the  beach,  and  tho  Beagle  anchored  under  the  east  side  of 

the  capo,  at  ahout  half  a  mile  S.  W.  of  the   rocky  islet,  and  for  shelter  from  westerly 

winds,  found  it  to  be  very  good.     Of  this  Captain  Stokes  says  : — '•  We  anchored  at  a 

table's  ien;;th  off  a  small  patch  of  liuht-colored  shingle  beach,  situated  at  the  west  eide 

fthebiiy,  in  'JJ  fathoms,   sandy  bottom.     The  anchonige,  though  alfording  excellent 

ihelterfroin  the  prevailing  winds,  is  bad  with  a  soutliorly  one  ;  for  the  eteopnoss  of  the 

ibottom  requiring  a  vessel  to  anchor  close  to  the  shore,  sufficient  scope  is  not  left  for  veer- 

ngcaWe.    There  is  a  plan  of  tho  bay  in  Hawkesworth  from  Byron's  account,  who  an 

hored  in  the  southern  part  of  the  bay,  perhaps  under  tho  lee  of  the  islands  to  tho  S.  E. 

fthe  cape." 


,  GVoiell 


"T''.j  name  Xaultt^^utt  is  from  S:?arinicnto,  who  very  correctly  desrriboa  it. 


696 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Cape 
right. 


Up- 


CAPR  UPRIGHT  banrs  duo  south  5  miles  from  Cape  Providence.     Ithasarort 
islet  II  quarter  of  a  mile  olf  its  east  extremity,  surrounded  by  kelp,  which  also  exte  / 
for  some  distance  from  the  cape  towards  the  islet,  at  the  end  of  which  there  are  7  feth 

nirifl  * 


oms 


Cape  Provi-        CAPE  PROVIDENCE  is  a  rugged  rocky  mountain,  higher  than  the  adjacent 
denee.  '      '      ••'•■■•■  •     >      ■      •       ■     —      >    -• 


coast; 


High  water. 


it  is  deeply  cleft  at  the  top,  and,  when  bearing  about  north,  the  western  portion  of  its  sum 
appears  urcliod,  the  eastern  lower  and  peaked.     When  the  cape  bears  E.  by  S.  m 
distant  obout  li  league,  a  little  round  rocky  islet  will  be  seen  open  of  it,  about  one  quart' ' 
of  a  point  of  the  compass  more  southerly." — Stokes'  MSS.  ' 

There  are  soino  anchorages  on  the  right,  to  the  N.  E.  of  Cape  Providence,  accord! 
to  a  plan  given  in  Hawkesworth's  Collection  of  Voyages,  but  they  are  too  much  out"^ 
the  way,  as  well  as  very  open  and  exjMsed  to  southerly  winds,  to  be  of  use  or  to  olfera 
security  to  vessels  bound  through  the  strait.  ^ 

The  diftance  from  Cape  Providence  to  Cape  Tamar.  is  94  miles:  in  thisspacnth 
knrt  arcb**8  inwards,  and  forms  a  bay  about  a  league  and  a  half  deep.  Captiiin  Stok  ° 
dMcrilttwdfte  coast  to  the  east  of  Cape  Tamar  to  be  formed  into  two  large  bii'lus  bv  th' 
liMd  («f  Cape  I'roviiience  On  the  western  side  of  the  latter  are  several  islanir3,of  vyhj  I 
t«i»'  ar«  riMMpicuouK  ;  tln»y  are  round  and  of  good  height,  and  well  wooded ;  at  a  distan 
lib«ir  Urrn  is  conical,  the  eastern  being  the  lowest.  Between  then)  is  a  passage  lotn' 
^ortanciirtragps.  which  Lieutenant  Skyring,  who  examined  them,  consideioil  even  mo" 
sheltered  tbun  Tamar  Harbor. 

I<"i)ur  n)il<»  to  the  eastward  of  (^ape  Tamar  is  Round  Island,  to  the  N.  W.  of  wli'  h 
ifla  well  sheBirred  anchorajje,  Ijut  with  dee|)  water.    In  standing  in,  pass  midway  betwo 
Round  r-^Hiirl  «id  an  islaml  to  the  westward,  which  lies  close  to  the  shore,  and  liaulroami 
the  latter  to  tli*  mouth  of  a  cove,  in  the  entrance  of  which,  near  the  south  siiore  tiw 
are  .'.3  latlioms.  sand.     Th<^  nhore  to  the  N.  and  N.  E.  of  Round  Island,  is  very'rockv 
On  the  eii!<t  side  of  the  promontory  of  ' 'it|)H  Tamar,  is  the  useful  and  excellent  anchor 
nge  of  Tamar  Harbor.     It  is  scarcely  tl  twilew  wide,  and  rather  more  than  half  a  miledeen' 
Its  entrance  is  not  exactly  free  from  danger,  but  with  attention  to  the  rollowin«  direction!  i 
none  need  be   apprehended.     Tlierc  is  a  suriiM»n  rock  between  a  group  '  t  rocky  jslBtii 
one-t!iird  over  on  the  western  side,  and  a  patch  of  kelp  one-third  towards  the  eastern siiiJ 
of  the  bay.      Witli   a  westerly  wind  it  would  he  mlvisable   to  give  the  outer  rock  ii  bei 
of  1}  cables'  length  to  luoid  this  danger,  on  wliicli  iliere  aro  only  9  foot  of  water,  and  iimdi 
which  the  Beagle  strtiek.  ' 

"  An  excellent  leading  mark  for  this  shoal,  is  a  whitened  portion  of  bare  rock,  ionlvira 
like  a  tombstone,  about  one-third  id"  tiie  way  up  the  .wreen  side  of  the  mountainous  lani 
that  forms  the  coast  of  the  bay.  This  stone  btmrs  N.  76^  W.,  (by  compass,)  fromtbi 
rocks  to  be  rounded  on  entering  the  anchorage.'" 

The  least  water  found  among  tkie  kelp  on  the  east  side  of  the  channel  was  4ifiilhomj 
and  near  and  within  the  eil;;e  tuwarils  the  rocky  islets,  there  are  7  fithonis:  so  that  wii 
the  lead  in  hand,  and  a  lookout  for  kelp,  which  shouH  not  unnecessarily  Ik!  entered  ihei 
i-f  no  real  danger  to  be  apprehended.  The  Beai;t«  Anchored  at  about  one-tliird  of  a  mil 
from  the  back  of  the  bay.  'I'he  plan  will  show  whjit  is  further  aecossaiy  to  be  known 
tile  anchorage. 

High  water  at  full  and  change  takes  place^in  TaMur  Harbor  at  3h.  5in.,  and  theperj 
pendicular  rise  and  fall  is  j  feet. 

The  fl(;od  tide  in  tSw«  pan  jif  the  northern  shore  of  tho  strait  sets  to  the  eastward, ai 
rarely  t^xceeds  hwHiimtle  i.n  hour.  At  this  part  the  strait  is  7  iniiiis  wide;  at  Cape  Phil 
lip,  to  the  westward,  the  breadth  increas.-s  Ui  ■>  leagues  ;  but  at  Capo  I'urkor  it  narroi 
agaiti    l  leagties,  which  l)re«dfli  it  keeps  to  the  «nd. 

To  the  westward  »f  Cape  'J'«inar  is  Tamar  Island.  It  is  high,  and  is  separated  froB 
the  land  of  the  cape  w  u  deop  HiHunel  from  half  to  ime  mile  wide.  Half  u  mile  olf  il 
S.  W.  end  is  u  rock. 

Between  Capes  T.nnar  and  Phdiip,  n  spare  of  4  leagties,  there  is  a  deop  bij^lit,  withti 
openings;  the  easternmost,    mi  *''«udi   are  (ilacior  and  Icy  Sounds,  extends  to  the  .\. 
tor  10  miles  from   the    mouth,   im,W   the  westernmost   is  the  commencement  of  Smytt'^ 
Channel.     The  rocks,  i-allerl  the  .si/agglers.  e»»,.iMl  to  a  considerable  distance  to  tiie 
W.  as  far  as  .T  miles  within  the  line  </  bearm;i  Iwtween  Cape  Phillip  and  Tamar  Islai 

Under  the  lee,  (the  N.  K  ,  )f  (4ipe  Phillip  is  Sholl's  Hay,  in  which  the  Hoagloaiid 
ed  in  18'J7.  Of  this  place  (Captain  Stokf*  writes: — ••  W.  found  there  an  exceiientii 
chorage  in  ITj  fathoms.  It  is  valuable  lV»'  vessels  working  through  the  strait  to  the  m 
ward,  inasmuch  as.  from  the  discontiiinour  MMore  of  the  northern  shore,  (which  here 
formed  into  deeji  bays,)  this  plan**  will  be  murb  more  easily  recofoi/.ed  than  liieaDcli! 
age  on  the  o|iposile  c<iasl :  hesidec  'he  wimls  ^mmk  here,  in  genf-ral,  soincwliat  to 
northward  of  west,  hence  a  better  »*«rting-pla(^  S>r  the  westward  is  oljtained,    Hfre,i 


•  Mr.  Simpaoa  xi'^uv,-.     icrf  about  i  ircf  u«f  w  the  m^m  jf  Cape  U|irigbt,  and  at  Mme  Jistuiceliil 
the  sbure ;  we  did  not  uomivc  it. 


in  every  ancho; 
unless  we  excei 
goose  abounds  1 
qnhdrupeds." 

Of  the  coast  i 

we  know  very  li 

lain  anchorage, 

ly  deep,  precipi 

load  shelves  do  w 

In  the  npiieoc 

lie  useful  to  mei 

ourselves  in  a  ba 

rocks  extending 

tremity  ofthe  ci 

ffbich  is  of  dangi 

To  the  westw 

of  it,  paiticularlj 

canal  trending  to 

ofldands,  from  t 

ceding,  make  the 

is  contained  betw 

W.,  called  Point 

tation  scanty. 

The  eastern  po 
and  to  the  south- 
gua;  and  a  little  h 
it  2  cables'  length 
PORT  URIAl 
with  5,  8,  14,  to  1 
tically,  and  with  o 
from  north  to  sontl 
from  Cape  Providi 
risible:  but  it  is  nt 
little  to  the  enstwn 
To  the  west  of] 
N.  W.  and  S.  E. 
deep  water,  no  grc 
tntheS.  S.  W.ar 
liland  the  channel  | 
channel  is  scarcel 
tains.    The  Indianl 

THEC\.\AL 
is  not  to  be  recoiml 
curity  f(K  vessels  of, 
i«h  officers  tlionghtl 
Tama,  ami  it  is  141 
according  to  Snrinil 
Two-tliirds  of  II  r 
Port  Clinrriira,  a 
W.N.  W.,contai,I 
fore  U8ele,ss.  for  it 

To  the  westwari) 

vessels  may  nhtHinl 

From  Diiihy  Col 

ta'  jeveral     ulentail 

'into  the  s'.iitli-wer 

Valentine  Harbor, 

[tioninCii|)iiiin  Stol 

•gOiWhiciispoins  u\ 

le  island,  then 

iemj  to  he  no 

The  ancli(iiii,j 

luartprofa  mil. 

luth  wi-t 

The  laiitD.te  of  nj 
ariiition  ottlip  coi 
CAPK  rVKV 
2-  53'  1!»",  nod  lorl 


ii'il 
'"] 

I'm 


^o"inqPRi«"piaiiH 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT.  597 

.  every  anchorngo  on  the  strait,  water  and  fuel  are  easily  procured ;  but  nothing  more, 
noless  we  except  the  wild  berries,  (Berberm,  Sp.,)  celery,  muscles,  and  limpets:  the  wUd 
gooie  abounds  here,  but  ito  nauseous,  filthy  taste  renders  it  uneatable.    No  inhabitants,  no 

'"of  the  coast  of  the  strait  on  the  south  side,  between  Cape  Upright  and  Valentine  Bay 
weiinow  very  little  ;  there  are  several  deep  bights  and  spacious  harbors,  which  may  conl 
lain  anchomge,  but,  in  general,  they  are  not  found  in  the  large  harbors,  which  are  most- 
k  deep,  precipitous  chasms  or  ravmes  m  the  rock.     The  smaller  coves,  or  where  the 
hnd  shelves  down  to  the  sea,  are  more  liliely  to  afford  anchorages. 

In  the  np'.iendix  to  Cordova's  worit  are  descriptions  of  some  anchorages,  which  it  may 
beuseful  to  mention  here:  it  says,  "In  rounding  Cape  (Ildefonso)  Upright  we  found 
ourselves  in  a  bay.  not  very  deep,  2  miles  across,  divided  in  its  centre  by  many  islets  and 
rocks  extending  to  the  north ;  the  outer  or  northernmost  of  which  bears  W.  from  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  cape.  One  mile  N.  W.  i  N.  from  the  northernmost  islet  is  around  rock, 
which  is  of  dangerous  approach." 

To  the  westward  of  this  bay  is  another,  3  miles  wide,  and  about  as  deep  ;  the  whole 
of  it  particularly  towards  the  eastern  part,  is  full  of  islets,  and  at  the  bottom  is  a  narrow 
c»nai  trending  to  the  S.  S.  E.  At  the  western  end  of  this  bay,  called  by  Wnllis  the  Bay 
ofWands,  from  the  number  it  contained,  commences  a  third,  which,  with  the  two  pre- 
ceding- make  the  great  bay,  called  by  the  Indians,  according  to  Sarmiento,  Alquilqua.  It 
is  contained  between  Cape  Upright  and  a  bold  projecting  point,  10  miles  to  the  W.  N. 
\^r.,  called  Point  Echenique.     The  country  is  there  described  to  be  poor,  and  the  vege- 

The  eastern  point  of  the  Thud  Bay  has  a  string  of  islets  extending  a  mile  to  the  north; 
and  to  the  south-west  are  several  others.  And  on  its  east  side  is  a  bay  called  Cunviguil- 
pja;  and  a  little  beyond  it,  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  is  Port  Uriarte,  the  mouth  of  which 
^2'cBbles'  length  across. 

PORT  URIARTE  was  carefully  sounded,  but  the  bottom  is  generally  bad  and  stony.  Fori  Uriarte. 
with  5,  8, 14,  to  18  fathoms.  The  harbor  is  surrounded  by  high  mountains,  rising  ver- 
tically, nnd  with  only  a  few  stunted  trees  on  the  shores.  Its  greatest  extent,  which  is 
from  north  to  south,  is  half  a  mile  ;  the  mouth  is  not  visible  until  close  to  it:  its  lioaring 
from  Cape  Providence  is  S.  42"^  30'  W.  There  is  no  danger  in  entering  it  but  what  is 
visible:  but  it  is  not  recommeded  as  a  good  harbor,  from  the  foul  ground  all  over  it.  A 
little  to  the  eastward  also,  of  Point  Echenique,  is  Cape  Santa  Casilda— a  low  point. 

Totho  west  of  Point  Echenique  is  a  harbor  2J  miles  wide,  the  points  of  ontniiice  being 
U.  W.  and  S.  E.  There  is  an  island  in  the  centre  forming  two  channels,  but  with  very 
deep  water,  no  ground  being  found  with  55  fathoms.  At  the  bottom  is  a  canal  trending 
tntlie  S.  S.  W.  and  disappearing  bt'tweoii  the  mountains.  On  the  eastern  side  of  the 
I  island  the  channel  is  at  first  a  mile  wide,  but  afterwards  narrows  gradually  ;  the  wf  rn 
channel  is  scarcely  two  calih'i'  leniitli  across.  The  shores  are  high  precipitous  moun- 
tains    The  ln:lians.  according  to  Siiriuiento,  called  the  pliice  Pucliaclinilgua. 

THE  C  ^NiVL  DK  LA  TRMPESTAD,  (or  Stormy  Channel.)  from  the  description,    The  Canal 
is  not  to  be  recoiiiinended.     The  water  is  very  d-ej)  till  over,  and  the  place  affords  no  se-    dc  la  Tem- 
curity  fiK  vessels  of  any  description.     To  the  westward  is  a  hotter  harbor,  which  tlio  Span-  pestad. 
ish  officers  thought  to'oe  Sarmiento's  Port  Santii  iMonicn.     It  bears  S.  S.  W.  from  Cape 
Tama,  and  it  is  14  mil>^3  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Upright,  but  not  more  than  3  leagues, 
accordiiiff  to  Sarmiento's  account. 

Two-thirds  of  a  mile  to  the  westward,  is  a  i>oint  with  two  islets  off  it,  round  wliich  is 
Port  Chiirrura.  a  deep  and  sjiacitius  hay,  two  miles  wide,  the  points  bearing  E.  S.  E.  and 
W.N.  W.,  containing  two  ports  and  some  coves,  but  with  very  deep  water,  ami  there- 
fore useless,  for  it  would  bo  necessary  to   make  fast  to  the  rocks  to  secure   a  vessel. 

To  the  westward  of  this  we  have  laid  down  a  useful  cove.  Darby  Cove,  in  which  small 
Tessois  amy  olitain  good  shelter. 

From  Darby  Cove  the  coast  extends  to  the  N  .  65°  W.,  for  7  miles,  having  in  the  inter- 
n' jevernl  ndentations,  but  all  with  deep  water;  at  Point  Felix  the  land  trends  deeply 
[in  to  the  south-west,  and  forms  a  hay  5  miles  wide  and  24  deep.  At  its  western  side  is 
Valentine  Harbor,  in  wliich  the  Beagle  anchored,  of  which  there  is  no  written  descrip- 
itioninCaptiiin  Stokes'  Journal ;  the  plan,  however,  will  show  the  nature  of  the  anchor- 
iije,  which  seems  to  be  commodious  and  secure,  and  of  easy  approach.  On  hauling  round 
' '  island,  tliere  me  some  islets  half  a  mile  off.  which  must  be  avoided,  but  otherwise  there 
ems  to  l)c  no  dangers. 

The  anrhordj:!".  as  a  !«4»ppirig-place,  is  in  from  20   to  'jr,  fathoms,  sand,  at  nearly  n 
nnrtrrof  a  mil"  from  either  shore.     A  more  sheltered  situation  may  be  obtained  to  the 

lout  1 1  WW'. 

riie  liiiiwdo  of  the  mount,  (marked  in  the  plan,)  i«  52'  55'  5",  and  longitude  74''  15'. 
arintion  of  the  roinpas9  24°  10'. 

C.\PK  rUHVAS,  the  extr,Mnity  of  an  is  land  that  is  close  to  the  sliore,  is  in  latitude    Cape  Cue- 
2-  53'  lit ',  aod  long.  74^  17'  30".     Between  it  and  Capo  Valentine  the  coast  forms  a  vas. 


d9S 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


bay  with  islands  in  it.     To  the  westward,  also,  of  the  cnpe,  the  coBSt  is  brolten,  and  form 
some  sinuosities.     A  lenguo  N.  W.  i  W.  from  Cape  Cuevas,  is  the  east  part  of  Tnuiilln 
Bay.  which  was  not  exuminod. 

The  Spanish  account  desciibes  it  to  be  Ij  mile  wide,  in  the  direction  of  N.  W.  and  S 
E.,  and  half  a  mile  deep.     At  the  bottom  there  is  a  port  with  an  entrance  half  a  mil 
I  across,  bearing  nearly  N .  and  S.    It  is  a  well-sheltered  port,  trending  W.  S.  W.  for  u 

mile,  with  two  small  basins  at  the  bottom.     The  depth  is  very  great,  but  close  to  the  west 
shore  there  are  8,  10,  to  13  fathoms,  on  sand  and  coral.     Near  the  mouth  the  depti.  : 
great,  and  generally  of  stones.     There  are  several  banks  buoyed  by  sua  wood,  but  i^ 
none  was  there  less  than  7  fathoms  water. 

There  is  plenty  of  wood  and  water  in  Truxillo  Bay,  but  nobody  will  visit  it  in  prefer 
ence  to  Tuesday  Bay,  or,  rather,  the  more  convenient  anchorage  of  Tuesdiiy  Cove 
situated  three-quarters  of  a  mile  south  of  Cape  Cortado.  The  anchorage  is  in  12  to  14 
fathoms.  Tuesday  Bay  is  larger,  and  therefore  more  exposed  to  the  squalls,  but  for  a 
ship  perhaps  might  be  more  convenient. 

On  the  north  shore  of  the  strait,  opposite  to  Capo  Cortado,  is  Cape  Parker,  a  re- 
markable projection,  with  three  hununocks  on  the  summit  of  the  high  land  which  risen 
over  it.  To  the  eastward  the  coast  trends  deeply  in  to  the  north,  forming  a  bay  the 
eastern  head  of  which.  Cape  Phillip,  bears  S.  97°  E.,  9  miles.  There  appeared  to  be 
several  islands  in  the  bay,  and  at  the  bottom  a  narrow  opening,  perhaps  a  channel,  lead. 
ing  to  tht)  north. 

On  the  west  side  of  the  bay  the  coast  is  indented,  and  affords  some  anchornges,  but  the 
approach  is  not  clear.  The  first  bay,  however,  to  the  eastward  of  the  S.  E.  trend  of  the 
cape,  seems  to  afford  a  good  stopping-place  ;  but  it  is  fronted  by  a  considerable  shoal,  with 
two  rocky  islets.     The  depth  is  from  7  to  22  fathoms. 

The  land  of  Cape  Parker  will  probably  turn  out  to  be  an  island.  To  the  westward  of  I 
it  commences  a  range  of  islands,  rocks,  and  shoals,  fronting  a  broken  coast;  that  should 
never  be  approached  but  for  the  purpose  of  discovery  or  seal  fishery.  The  ensternmost 
island  is  Westminster  Hall,  a  high  rocky  island,  and  there  are  two  or  three  other  con- 
spicuous points,  such  as  the  Cupola  and  Observation  Mount,  that  might  be  imticed.  The 
Beanie  run  in  amfingst  the  hreiikors,  and  anchored  near  the  latter,  for  the  purpose  of  as- 
certaining its  position,  and  (ibtaining  beariniiti  for  the  survey. 
Sir  John  SIR  JOHN  NARBCJROUGH'S  ISLANDS  consist  of  eight  or  ten  principal  islands, 

Narbo-  and  perhaps  hundreds  of  smaller  ones.     Behind  them  there  seemed  to  be  a  channel,  and 

roueh's  hi-      amongst  them  are  several  anchorageH,  but  none  to  be  recommended,  especiiilly  when 
ands.  on  the  south  coast  there  are  two  or  three  much  better,  much  safer,  and  of  much  easier 

access. 

It  is  a  dangerous  coast,  as  well  from  tho  immense  number  of  rocks  ufon  which  the  sea 
breaches  very  high,  as  from  the  tides,  which,  near  the  edge  of  the  lino  of  shoals,  sets 
frequently  in  amongst  tliein. 
Skyring  A  le!i;:uo  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Cortado,  is  SKYRING  HARBOR.     Its  entrance  I 

Harbor.  is  one  mile  and  a  (piarter  wide,  and  afterwards  half  a  mile,  and  trends  to  the  S.  \V.  by 

W.,  for  one  mile  and  a  half,  and  then  terminates  in  a  cove  extending  half  a  mile  to  the 
S.  E.,  with  10  fathoms  in  it.     There  are  some  islands  in  it,  and  anchorage  might  be  6-\ 
tained  in  27  fathoms. 

At  3i  miles  fmm  the  west  point  of  Skyring  Harbor  is  the  east  head  01'  the  IIARBORI 
Harbor  of  OF  MKIICY,  (Puerto  de  la  Misi^ricurdia  of  Sarmienlo,  Separation  Harbor  of  Wailij| 
Mercy.  and  Carteret,)  ont!  of  the  Ix^st  anchorages  of  the  western    part   of  the  strait,  and  bein"! 

only  4  miles  within  (.'ape  Pillar,  is  vi  ry  conveniently  placed  for  a  ship  to  iincliorat  lol 
await  a  favorable  epportunity  f.ir  leaving  the  strait.  The  j)lan  will  he  a  sufficient  guide;  1 
for  there  is  no  danger  in  entering.  The  depth  is  moderate,  12  to  14  futhouis,  and  thai 
holdijg  ground  excellent,  being  a  blick  clay.  A  ship  may  select  her  position  ;  but  the! 
one  olf  the  first  bight  round  the  jHiiiit  being  e<;uiilly  well  sheltered,  and  nmch  more  con- 
venii'nt  for  many  purposes,  is  the  best  berth. 

The  observations  for  latitude*  and  longitude  were  made  upon  the  largest  of  ObservatiM I 
Islets,  (he  summit  of  which  was  found  tu  bo  in  lat.  52°  44'  ,'J7",  and  lung.  74^  35'  31",-| 
The  variation  is  23"  4H'. 

Thiee  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  largeni  OlMorvalion  Isl>  t,  is  Capo  Pillar,  upon  which  I 
Ca|)iain  Stokes  landed,  on  the  25lh  of  Krhi  itury.  1h27,  Imt  n(>t  without  conBiiieniWei 
culty.  owing  to  the  great  swell  that  M«>n,  and  nult-ed  always,  prevails  .^-ar  il  ilerehel 
observed  the  latitude.  Captain  Kit/ loy  also  laocied  in  a  cove  under  the  cwpe,  in  r'29,[ 
with  his  instruments,  to  obtain  '■••ir.ims  lumi  its  summit;  but  the  difficiil'  uf  the  asceoii 
was  so  great  that  he  <li  I  nut  ri*k  ihe  dtxttnii  tain  of  thetn. 

The   exlrennty  of  (,'apo  Pihar  is  in  JHt    .>2     42'  •'     ,  and  long.  7^  "      ?>\  ,  aad  Capej 
Victi/ry  in  32°  IG'  10  ",  and  74°  60   jj  .    Theiie  points  form  the  w-sicrn  onliaDce( 
the  strait. 
The  Evan-  "  THE  EVANCKLIST.S,  »»  l)i>  ^  were  named  by  the  early  Spnnisli  nnvt^ators.bnt 

gelittg.  the  Isles  ol  Direction  by  Narboi-ough.  from  their  forming  a.  cajiital  leudiug  uiarii  for  !':»l 


mm 


«M 


599 


nnd  bem;| 


Tide. 


PbservatioD  j 
35' 31".- 

■upoii  vvliifb  I 
|l('nil>lei!iffi-| 
Here  h«| 
|pe,  ill  r'29,f 
iho  ascent  I 

I    HDll  Cup*] 

|eii\iiince  ( 

.iitor9.lrat| 
|iiurkf"V 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

•eBturn  mouth  of  the  strait,  are  a  group  of  rocky  islets,  consisting  of  four  principal  ones, 
gnd  BOii.)  detnched  rocks  and  brenkers.  The  islands  are  very  rugged  and  barren,  and 
suited  only  to  afford  a  resting  place  or  breeding  haunt  of  seals  and  oceanic  birds.  There 
islanding  on  one  of  the  islands,  nnd  nnchornge  round  tliem.  if  necessai^.  The  largest 
and  biehest  may  be  seen,  in  tolerably  clear  weather,  from  a  brig's  deck,  at  the  distance  of 
7  or  8  leagues.*  The  southernmost,  from  its  shape,  culled  the  Sugnr-loaf,  is  in  Int.  .52° 
L,  18",  and  long.  75°  02'  56".  From  the  Sugar-loaf  the  extremity  of  Cape  Pillar  bears 
«  ^00  W.,  23i  miles,  and  from  Cape  Victory,  according  to  Captain  Stokes'  survey.  S. 
Jo'o  W..  11  miles."— [Stokes-  MSS.]  " 

The  tides  here  are  very  variable,  and  sometimes  set  to  the  E.  N.  E.,toward8  the  rocka 
that  front  Cape  Victory  and  Sir  John  Narborough's  Islands. 

Of  the  Sea,  or  Outer  Coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego.  from  Qipe  Pillar  to  Cape  Diego,  in 
■'  Slrail  Le  Maire,  by  Cajilain  Robert  Fitzroy,  R.  N. 

fin  this  section,  references,  (printed  in  Italics,)  are  made  to  a  work  published  by  Cap- 
tnin  Fitzroy,  entitled  "  Views  of  the  Coast,  taken  on  board  his  Majesty's  surveying  vessel. 
Beagle.  1829  nnd  1830."] 

The  western  entrance  to  the  Strait  of  Mognlhaens  is  easily  known  by  the  wide  opening 
between  Sir  John  Narboroiigh's  Islands  nnd  Citpe  Pillar.  The  Evangelists  show  them- 
selves distinctly  at  6  miles  distance.      They  are  four  banen  rocks,  about  100  feet  above 

Oo  the  north  side  of  the  strait,  near  Cape  Victory,  is  n  remarkable  height,  called 

Dinna's  Peak. 

WESTMINSTER  HALL  is  i-en)arkable,  but  the  land  aboutCnpe  Pillar  cannot  be    Westmin- 
mistaiien,  after  a  glance  at  the  chart.  '  sler  Hall. 

In  ninking  the  land  and  approaching  the  strait,  a  ship  should  keep  well  to  the  north- 
ward of  Cnpe  Pillar,  and  should,  indeed,  close  the  Evangelists,  unless  the  wind  has  south- 
•  .  because  there  is  a  strong  current  which  sets  across  the  entrance  of  thi  strait,  directly 
towards  the  dangerous  cluster  of  rocks  called  the  Apostles  nnd  Judge,;.  It  follows  the 
trend  of  the  coast,  and  would  set  a  ship  miiny  luiUs  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Pillai  if  she 
stood  in  for  it  without  making  proper  idlowance.  It  runs  fiom  1  to  2  miles  an  hour,  ac- 
cording to  the  winds  that  are  or  have  been  prc^valent. 

When  fairly  within  the  strait,  a  ship  should  cluse  the  southern  shore.  If  intending  to 
anchor,  the  first  anchorage  is  the  Harbor  of  Mercy,  4  miles  from  Capo  Pillar.  Its  place 
is  shown  by  five  small  ishinds,  round  which  you  pass  and  haul  into  the  anchorage. 

Close  to  Cape  Pillar  are  two  small  rocks,  called  iho  Launches.  They  aro  uot  more 
than  3  cfibles'  length  from  the  shore. 

The  cnpe  and  the  shore  on  each  side  aro  steep  to.  Off  the  cape,  at  2  miles  distance, 
are  60  and  70  fathoms,  fine  sand. 

Pioceeding  alo)ig  the  outer,  or  south-west  coast,  tho  Apostle  nnd  Judge  Eocks  show 
themselvi's.  They  are  some  feet,  from  5  to  50.  above  the  water,  but  many  breakers  show 
oenr  them,  and  indicnto  uii  extensive  reef.  The  outer  rock  is  4  miles  from  tho  land. 
Eleven  miles  from  Cnpe  Pillar  is  Dinlocatiou  Harijor,  a  place  of  refuge  for  an  embayed 
or  distressed  ship,  but  unfit  for  nny  other  jjurpose.  Its  entrance  is  rendered  difficult,  to 
the  eve,  bv  rocks,  on  which  tl.e  sea  breiiks  violently,  nnd  by  two  rocks  under  water,  on 
which  the  sea  docs  not  always  break,  but  wliose  place  is  accurately  shown  in  the  plan  of 
the  harbor.  The  placo  of  Dislocniion  Harbor  is  pointed  out  by  the  height:?,  called  Law 
and  Shoulder  Peaks.  They  are  the  most  remarkable  on  that  part  of  the  coast,  and  im- 
mediately over  the  harbor. 

To  find  the  entrance,  steer  for  the  peaks;  look  out  for  the  weather  nnd  lee  rocks,  both 
sevv'ral  feet  above  water,  the  sea  brenkiiit;  violeiiily  on  them,  and  when  within  4  miles  of 
the'shoie  you  will  distinctly  see  ilie  opening  from  tin-  miist-hea.i.  In  going  in.  avoid  tli« 
two  rocks  lit  tho  entrance,  and  anchor  in  the  ioiiermost  p;irt.  Only  a  small  sliip  cnn  get 
lutngimi  without  u  fair  wind.  The  pn'viuhii;:  winds  send  in  a  swell,  but  the  place  is 
quite  8P*  •'  ■  Water  may  bt'  obtained  veiy  eii-ily.  The  boats  can  lie  in  'i  stream  which 
runs  tVoiH  'Uo  mooniuins,  and  fill  alongside.  Wood  is  plnntilul.  Four  sm;!!  vessels  may 
lie'.nfeciinn.     The  bottom  is  very  even,  from  lo  to  -'5  tiithoms,  fine  white  sand. 

Tin       ranee  is  narrow,  exposed  to  the  prevailing  wind  and  swell,  which  might,  for 
'■■         'ih''  ,  prevent  a  vessel  from  ;;ettin^iiiit  to  sen.     Two  miles  from  Dislocation  Har- 


t),M  IS  *  »pe  Do'seado,  the  highest  luiul  heria'.jout,  and  remarkable.     A  rocky  islet  lies  ono 

niile  oli  shore.  ,      ,     ,       ..._..  ■,       .\       .i 

From  Cape  Desendo  the  const  runs  high  and  unbroken  tor  about  two  miles,  then  there 

isan opening,  not  examiiietl.  t,      •  ^      i. 

Scv'   .,1  isliinds  succeed  f  r  a  spnce  of  two  miles,  atter  wliuli  you  open  Barrister  Bay, 
I  exiiobcd  plate,  lull  of  i»leto,  rocks,  and  breakers,  nnd  unfit  for  any  vessel. 


'  W'l'  WW  then.  JS  inile»  off,  from  llio  Adventure's  deck.— [P.  I'.  K.] 


600 

Cape  Sunday 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

CAPE  SUNDAY  is  the  next  hendland.      It  ia  high  and  prominent.     (See  No.  7  \ 
Two  islets  and  two  dangerous  rocks  lie  ofT  it;  they  nre  shown  in  the  chart.  *    ' 

This  cape  is  one  of  the  cluster  called  the  Week  Islands.     At  their  south  side  is  a  road 
stead,  with  good  holding  in  18  or  20  fathoms,  coarse  gravel  and  sand,  with  patrhes  nf 
rock.     It  is  exposed  to  southerly  winds  and  to  those  frotn  the  west ;  therefore,  IshouM 
not  advise  a  vessel  to  anchor  there.     Between  these  islands  is  a  snug  berth  for  a  smnll  vea 

188.     The  Beagle  lay  at  anchor  there  one  wani,  :' 


there  one  week,  ia 


sel,  quite  secure,  but  difficult  of  access. 
24  fathoms,  good  holding  ground. 

The  eye  must  be  the  chief  guide  in  entering  most  of  these  places.  They  nre  of  one 
description — inlets  between  high  land,  having,  generally,  deep  water,  with  kelp  buoyinff 
the  rocky  places.  Flaws  of  wind  and  violent  gusts  off  the  high  land  render  the  approach 
to  them  difficult,  and,  to  a  large  ship,  iinprncti('al)le. 

There  are,  however,  anchorages  on  this  coast  fit  for  a  fleet,  which  will  be  mentioned 
in  their  order. 

Six  miles  south  of  the  Week  Islands  are  the  Landfall  Islands,  (A'os.  9,  10,  and  in 

named  by  Capt.  ('ook,  from  seeing  them  first  when  ho  visited  this  coast. 


80 

Cape  Tnman.        CAPE  INMAN  is  a  very  remnrkablo  headland  at  their  western  extremity.     (SeeNos 

7,6,  and  9.) 
LatihkiiBay.     Behind  the  island,  of  which  it  forms  the  most  conspicuous  part,  is  LATITUDE  BAY 
an  anchorage  decidedly  good,  though  somewhat  exposed  to  a  swell  thrown  in  by  heavv 
N.  W.  winds.  . 

The  Beagle  rode  out  a  heavy  gale  from  that  quarter,  though  having  anchored  too  far 
in,  she  was  exposed  to  rollers.  The  plan  shows  the  best  anchorage,  (and  the  sketch  an- 
nexed how  to  find  it;  see  JS'o.  11.) 

Between  th«  ishuxls  is  a  snug  berth  for  a  vessel  not  drawing  more  than  12  feet,  in  per- 
fect security,  smooth  water;  and  a  vessel  should  not  moor  in  less  than  10  faihoing  as 
close  to  the  west  shore  as  possible,  with  an  anchor  to  the  eastward,  in  the  event  of  a 
wind  blowing  from  that  quarter.  Water  and  wood  are  plentiful,  as  is  the  case  in  every 
Fuegian  harbor. 
Otway  Bay.  Behind,  or  to  the  tiistward  of  the  Landfall  Islands,  is  OTWAY  BAY,  an  extensive 
space  of  water,  surrounded  by  broken  land,  islets,  and  rucks.  Many  of  the  latter  are 
scattered  about,  and  render  it  unfit  for  any  vessel.  It  is  probable  that  passages  lend  hence 
*  to  the  Straits  of  Magalhaens,  as  de<!p  inlets  run  in  that  direction  as  far  as  the  eye  can 

reach,  from  the  Landfall  Islands.  They  were  not  explored  for  want  of  time,  li  seems 
probablt!  that  a  communication  may  exist  between  this  inlet  and  the  Abra,  in  the  strait 
opposite  Playa  Parda. 

Off  Cape  Ionian  are  several  detached  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  violently,  and 
gives  thoMi  a  formidabiu  appearance.  The  outermostone  is  not  two  miles  from  tlieshore 
and  shows  itself  plaiidy. 
Cape  Sehetky.  CAPE  S(JIIETKY  is  a  reinarkablo  d()ulile-|)caUo(l  height,  at  the  south  extremity  of 
the  Landfall  Islands.  Some  rocks  just  awash  lie  oil'  it,  distant  one  mile.  The  true  course 
along  shore,  after  giving  the  Apostles  a  proper  l)erth,  is  S.  29^  E.,  as  far  as  the  latitude  of 
Capo  Tate.  (i\'o.  12.)  the  southern  limit  of  Otw;iy  Bay. 
Cape  Tate.  Off  CAPE  TATE,  which  is  rather  high,  and  rounded  at  the  summit,  nre  several  clus- 

ters of  rocks,  called  the  College  Kocks.     They  are  only  seen  when  near  the  land. 
Finchamlsl-        THE  FINCHAM  ISfiAND.S  next  are  noticed  in  passing  alongshore.    Therenre 
ands.  many  islets  and  rocks  near,  and  very  many  scattered  between  the  islands  and  Cape  Tiite. 

Asa  reference  to  the  chart  will  show,  tliere  is  no  good  anchorage  litTeabout.  Tlie  const 
is  very  dangerous,  atid  unfit  to  bo  approarhiMl.  The  Beagle  fried  to  anchor  in  Deep- 
wafer  Sound,  but  fiiling  to  find  a  prupcf  di-pth  of  water,  was  obliged  to  drop  her  anchor 
upon  the  shelving  end  of  a  snuill  island,  being  too  far  np  the  sound  to  get  out  again  before 
dark . 
Breaker  Bay.  Between  the  Finchani  Inlands  and  Cape  (Jloucester  is  BREAKKR  BAY,  n  large 
wild  place,  full  of  rocks  and  breakers  and  exjaised  to  all  the  strength  of  llio  west  winds. 
1  had  neithei  tinit*  nor  inrlination  to  examine  it,  fir  I  never  saw  a  place  more  until  furllie 
approach  of  a  vessel.  The  surrounding:  coast  is  broken  into  islands,  islets,  und  rocks,  al- 
most innumerable. 
Cape  Glf)U-  CAPE    (JLOUt'E.STER  is  a  very  remarkable   pnimonfory.  and  cannot  bo  mistaken. 

retler.  (See  I\'us.  13,  11.  1.'),  1(.,  aii</  17.)     At  a  dist4ince  it  appears  to  be  a  high  detatlicil  isliiiiJ; 

but  on  a  nearer  approach,  a  low  neck  of  land  is  seen,  winch  connects  it  with  the  liirjji.si 
of  the  (irafton  Islands.  (.Vo.  18.)  A  rock  (i»n  which  the  sea  brcMiks)  lies  nenrly  ine 
imlo  to  the  N.  W.  There  is  no  other  lisiuiger.  The  capo  may  bo  passed  (|uitii  close, 
being  ^lee|)  to. 
Eutlon  Bay.  Cape  (iloucestor  is  a  guide  to  Kf 'STf)N  BAY,  (.Vo«  1!».  20,  and  21,)  one  of  tliebest 
anchorages  (in  this  coa^l,  <ine  which  can  be  epproached  mihI  lel't  with  any  wiml.  wiiiiiiiil 
risk,  and  in  which  a  fleet  nniy  lie  in  perfect  security  froa  ull  but  tho  S.  E.  wauls,  the 
least  prevalent  of  any  on  this  coast. 


'^'''''f^mmifffmmmtmmmmmmmmM 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


601 


THE  GRAFTON  ISLANDS  extend  nbout  20  miles  in  a  S.  E.  direction  from  Cape    The  OrafUm 
Gloucester.    Between  them  are  several  anchorages,  but  the  best  and  easiest  of  access  is   Islandt. 
CuBton  Bay. 

Passing  Cape  Gloucester,  you  see  a  high  island  to  the  S.  E.,  distant  7  miles.  This  is 
Ipswich  Island.  (Nos.  19  and  20.)  Between  it  and  Cape  Gloucester  is  a  bay,  in  which 
are  ninny  rocks  and  breakers. 

Rounding  IPSWICH  ISLAND,  you  must  give  a  good  berth  to  the  rocks  under  Ipsvnch 
water,  which  lie  one  mile  from  its  S.  E.  extremity.  The  sea  does  not  always  break  Island. 
npon  them,  but  it  does  generally.  Their  place  in  the  chart  mny  be  depended  upon. 
Tnere  is  no  other  hidden  danger.  After  clearing  these  rocks,  pass  close  to  Leading 
Island,  (I^'os.  19  and  20.)  and  steer  for  the  opening  of  Laura  Basin,  which  you  will  see 
under  a  high  peaked  mountain.  (Nos.  19, 20,  and  21.)  Choose  your  berth  by  the  eye, 
if  intending  to  anchor  in  the  bay,  or  work  as  far  up  the  passage  to  the  basin  as  you  think 

per,  then  anchor  and  warp  to  the  berth  marked  in  the  plan. 

The' Beagle  worked  up  all  the  way  against  a  fresh  wind  blowing  directly  out.  There 
is  water  for  a  frigate  in  the  basin,  but  it  is  better  suited  to  a  small  vessel.  Large  ships 
should  anchor  in  the  baj  :  and  as  the  bottom  is  even  and  good,  and  the  bay  capacious, 
exposed  only  to  S.  E.  winds,  which  come  on  gradually  and  seldom  blow  hard,  it  may 
be  considered  n  fit  place  for  ships  of  any  size,  or  for  a  squadron.  Wood  and  water  are 
iilentiful,  and  easy  to  bo  obtained.  The  depth  of  water  in  the  bay  varies  from  5  to  20 
fathoms;  the  bottom  generally  fine  speckled  sand. 

A  large  patch  of  kelp  lies  across  the  entrance  of  the  harbor,  but  there  is  no  danger  be- 
neath it,  excel  t  for  a  line-of-battle  ship,  as  in  one  spot  there  are  four  fathoms  only.  This 
kelD  was  very  closely  examined,  and  its  safety  satisfactorily  proved. 

There  are  other  anchorages  among  these  islands,  but  none  fit  or  desirable  for  a  ship 
while  80  near  Euston  Bay.        ,  ,         ^ 

HOPE  HARBOR  is  one  of  those  formerly  used  by  sealing  vessels. 

Under  ISABELLA  ISLAND  is  an  anchorage  fit  for  a  sealing  vessel, 


but  no  other.- 


Mope  Hat' 

hor. 
Isabella  Isl- 


The  Beagle  passed  a  night  there,  but  not   and. 


Rocks  lie  in  the  way  to  it,  as  the  chart  shows. 

THE  GRAFTON  ISLANDS  are  high,  and  the  remarks  on  the  general  character    The  Grafton 
of  the  coast  are  applicable  to  them.     (See  ]\o.  'il.)    Behind  them  lies  a  passage,  through   Islands. 
which  a  sealing  vessel  has  passed.   To  the  N.  E.  of  it  is  a  mass  of  land,  broken  into  islets 

Having  passed  Cape  Gloucester,  your  attention  is  drawn  to  NOIR  ISLAND,  of  mo-    Noir  Island. 
derate  height,  about  600  feet  above  the  sea,  and  having  a  remarkable  neck  of  land  to  the 
S,  W.,  ended  by  a  rock  like  a  steeple  or  tower,     (^ee  Nos.  22,  23,  and  24.)     One  mile 
south  of  this  point  is  a  sunken  rock,  over  which  the  sea  occasionally  breaks.    Two  other 
breakers  are  in  the  bight  close  to  the  point. 

There  is  a"  excellent  roadstead  under  the  east  side  of  Noir  Island.  Several  ships  mny 
lie  there,  secure  from  all  winds  between  north  and  south  by  the  west,  over  a  clear  sandy 
bottom.  Wood  and  water  plentiful,  and  easily  obtained.  There  is  a  cove  at  the  south 
part  of  the  island,  where  boats  would  bo  penecily  safe  in  any  weather,  but  the  entrance 
is  too  narrow  for  vessels  of  any  kind. 

The  large  space  between  Noir  Island  and  the  Agnes  Islands  is  extremely  dangerous 
for  shipping,  being  scattered  with  rocks,  some  just  awash,  many  showing  themselves 
several  feet  above,  others  under  water.  Still  there  is  abundant  room  to  go  round  the  isl- 
and in  perfect  security  ;  therefore  no  ship  need  fear  being  hampered  by  an  east  wind,  in 
the  event  of  anchoring  in  Noir  Roads.  A  rock  lies  in  the  roads,  and  another,  a  very 
dangerous  one,  4  miles  to  the  eastward.     They  are  exactly  laid  down  in  the  chart. 

Seven  miles  south  of  Noir  Island  are  the  'f'ower  Rocks.  (No.  23.)  They  are  high, 
quite  steep  to,  and  exactly  laid  down  in  the  chart.     A  ship  may  pass  close  to  either  side 

Between  Noir  Island  and  Capo  Schomberg,  on  London  Island,  lie  many  reefs,  and  a 
CTPRt  number  of  detached  out-lying  rocks,  which  render  this  \r,\r\  of  the  coast  extremely 
(liiiiKPrdiis  and  unfit  for  vessels.  No  chart  could  guide  them.  They  must  trust  to  day- 
light iind  clciir  weather,  with  a  good  lookout,  if  necessary  to  enter  or  leave  the  Barbai'a 
Channel,  which  opens  into  this  bny.  _ 

The  Afnes  Islands,  and  those  in  their  neighborhood,  do  not  require  any  description. — 
Tlipv  iiri>'so  fortified  by  out-lying  rocks,  as  not  to  bo  fit  places  for  the  approach  of  any 


Ti'sse 


Niirthward  of  ihem  is  .'^fokes  Bay,  and  to  tho  eastward  a  number  of  islands,  between 
whii'li  is  tho  ll;irbiirj  Channel. 

No  vpRwd  ought  to  entangle  herself  in  these  liibyrinths;  if  she  does,  she  must  sail  by 
eye.  Nnithci  '  hart,  direction,  nor  soundings,  would  be  of  much  assistance,  and  in  thick 
wiMithcr  ber  siluiition  would  be  inowt  precarious. 

llelwpcn  Noir  and  Kempe  Islands  (M".  25)  is  tho  Milky  Way,  a  space  of  sea,  in  every 
\nn  (if  wiiiili  rocks  are  just  seen  awrnth  with,  or  a  few  feet  above  the  water.  On  them^ 
the  sea  continually  breaks.  if  iC  t  i-  ^^'  '  ' "'"        "^ 

PROv'lNC-.IAl-  LJ1-5RARY 
VICTORIA,  B.  C. 


tsta 


^it 


■"""•■ipwl"^" 


602 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Brecknock 
Pasta  ffe. 
Cape  Deso- 
lation. 


The  Bonglo  passed  in-shore  of  them  nil,  close  to  the  Agnes,  Kempe,  nnd  Fury  Islandg* 
but  I  shuuld  not  advise  any  vessel  to  follow  her  track,  nor  is  there  any  probability  of  jt^ 
ever  being  attempted. 

This  part  of  the  coast  only  requires  to  be  known  to  be  the  more  avoided. 

At  tho  south  side  of  Fury  Island  is  Fury  Harbor,  a  bad  place,  unfit  for  any  vessel,^ 
The  Saxe  Coburg  sealing  scliouner  wiis  lost  in  it  in  the  year  1827.  There  is  little  shelter 
and  very  bad  ground.  ' 

Between  Fury  and  London  Islands  is  the  entrance  of  the  Barbaro  nnd  Cockburn  Chan- 
nels.  (No.  2G,  6.^  Rocks  show  themselves  in  every  direction  ;  the  two  clusters  cnljed 
East  and  West  Furies  being  the  most  remarkable.  They  have  been  much  frequented  by 
sealing  vessels'  boats,  fur  seal  being  numerous  upon  them  at  times. 

Four  remarkable  mountains  point  out  the  entronce  to  the  Barbara  Channel  very  dis- 
tinctly. The  Kempe  Peaks  (No.  'J5)  are  high,  and  show  3  points.  The  Fury  Ppnijg 
(No.  '26  a,  and  No.  27)  are  high  and  divided.  Mount  Skyring  (No.  26  a,  26  6,  and  27) 
is  high,  and  has  a  single  peak.  St.  I'aul's  is  similar  to,  nnd  in  one  view,  from  near  Fury 
Island,  appears  verj'  like  the  dome  of  the  cathedral  whose  name  it  bears. 

Tho  situation  of  the  rocks  off  the  chnimel's  entrance,  as  laid  down  in  tho  chart,  isaccu- 
rate;  but  no  vessel  should  attempt  to  pass  them  without  daylight  and  clear  weiither  n 
that  she  may  sail  more  by  a  good  eye  to  the  mnst-hcad  than  by  any  chart. 

At  the  north  side  of  Fury  Island  is  a  snug  and  perfectly  safe  anchorage,  called  North 
Cove.  It  is,  however,  only  fit  for  small  vessels.  When  there,  they  are  in  security;  but 
it  must  be  remembered  that  there  is  no  anchonige  in  the  channel,  nor  until  you  get  into 
tho  cove,  unless  you  close  the  weather  shore,  and  find  a  creek,  in  which  the  anchor  will 
hold  you  temporarily.  At  the  north  side  of  Mount  .Skyring  is  another  onchorage,  Tom's 
Harbor,  fit  for  small  vessels.  Tho  Adelaide,  tender  to  his  Majesty's  sloop  Adventure 
anchored  in  it  when  ex|iloring  these  parts. 

There  are  soundings  over  all  tho  tract  of  sea  between  Noir  nnd  London  Islands, seldom 
exceeding  GO  fathoms,  and  near  the  rocks  diminishing  to  20.  15,  and  10. 

London  Island  is  one  of  n  largo  group  called  the  Camden  Islands.  At  its  east  end  is  a 
safe  anchorage,  called  Townshend  Harbor.  (No.  27.)  The  Horace  Peaks  (A'o.  27) 
point  out  its  situation.  Some  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  breaks  violently,  lie  ofl^  the  islands, 
and  near  the  entrance  of  Pratt  Passage,  They  are  exactly  laid  down  in  the  clinrt.  As 
there  are  no  soundings  in  less  than  50  fathoms  after  passing  these  rocks,  and  getting  into 
the  passage,  you  must  depend  upon  tlie  wind  lasting  to  carry  you  into  or  out  of  the  har- 
bor. The  holding  ground  in  it  is  excellent,  and  though  you  have  tremendous  squalls  off 
the  high  land  to  tho  westward,  there  is  no  fear  of  an  anchor  starting.  The  Bengle  lay 
here  moored  during  the  worst  weather  she  had  on  the  coast.  A  very  high  sea  was  raised 
outside  by  a  violent  southerly  gale,  but  she  remained  in  perfect  security  without  moving 
an  anchor. 

The  lee  side  of  high  land,  as  I  have  elsewhere  remarked,  is  not  the  best  for  anchomge 
in  this  country.  When  good  holding  can  be  found  to  windward  of  a  height,  and  iowliind 
lies  to  the  windward  of  you.  sufficient  to  break  the  sea,  the  anchorage  is  much  preferable 
because  tho  wind  is  steiidy,  nnd  does  not  blow  home  to  the  heights.  Being  to  lee- 
ward of  them  is  like  being  on  tho  west  sido  of  Gibraltar  Rock  when  it  blows  a  strong 
Levanter. 

Between  nnd  to  the  northward  of  these  islands  are  passages  with  deep  water,  numbers 
of  islets  and  rocks,  and  anchorages  opposite  to  most  of  the  valleys,  or  between  tho  islands, 
in  which  small  vessels  could  lie  securely,  if  necessary. 

BRECKNOCK  PASSA(JE  is  wide,  and  clear  of  nil  danger.  T  shoxdd  prefer  enter- 
ing or  leaving  the  n."  'jara  (-'hannel  by  this  way.  rather  than  by  passing  the  Fury  Rocks, 

CAI'K  DK.SOL.\'riON,  the  south  point  of  Basket  Island,  is  n  very  remariiiible head- 
land; (No.  27,)  it  is  rugged,  with  many  peaks. 

The  next  promontory  which  is  aiiproaidied  in  passing  along  the  const,  is  Capo  Castle- 
reagh;  (No.  27,)  it  is  high  nnd  riMuarkalde.  Hetweeii  this  and  Capo  Desdlution,  is  a 
large  space  of  water,  called  Desolate  Bay,  leading  to  Courtenay  Sound,  Thieves'  Sound, 
nnd  Whale-boot  .Sound. 

Rocks  and  breakers  abound,  and  make  these  sounds  quite  unfit  for  shi|)piiig;  no  doubt 
small  vessels  might,  in  clear  weather,  traverse  any  of  these  passages,  but  it  would  iilwaj-s 
be  with  much  risk,  and  should  not  be  attempted  without  un  ade(|uulo  object.  .Such  an 
object  does  not  now,  nor  is  it  likely  to  exist. 

Under  Cape  Castlereagh  is  an  excellent  anchorage,  called  Setwart  Harbor.  It  is  not 
large,  but  for  small  vessels  is  an  excc^edingly  good  place,  being  easy  of  access  with  any 
wind,  having  three  openitigs.  A  vessel  may  anchor  in  the  entrance,  and  wnip  in,  there 
is  no  where  more  than  16  fathoriis,  generally  from  6  to  12.  Wood  and  water,  as  inevery 
Fuegian  hari)or,  are  phuitiful,  and  easy  obtnintid. 

Two  rocks  lio  nearly  in  the  middle,  just  awash  at  high  water.  Tho  plan  shows  their 
place  exactly. 

A  rock,  on  which  the  sea  breaks,  !!-s  one  mile  west  of  tho  middle  opening  to  tho  har- 
bor.    There  is  uo  other  danger. 


wnm* 


mm 


mm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT.  q08 

Farther  to  the  south-enst  are  the  Gilbert  Islands,  off  which,  8  miles,  S.  30°  E  .  from 
C»pe  Cnstlorengh,  are  the  Nicholson  Rocks. 

Between  the  Stew.irt  iind  Gilbert  Islands,  is  Adventure  Passage,  nn  open  space,  with 
deep  water,  clear  of  danger. 

At  the  north-eastern  side  of  the  eastern  Gilbert  Isle,  is  Doris  Cove,  a  safe  anchorage 
for  a  small  vessel.  1  he  Beagle  Iny  there,  moored,  one  week.  There  are  no  hidden  dan- 
gers hereabouts  ;  the  eye  and  the  chart  will  guide  a  vessel  safely. 

I  say  nothing  of  the  large  sounds  and  numerous  passages  lying  to  the  northward  of 
these  and  the  Stewart  Islands,  because  they  are  not  likely  to  be  again  visited 
The  Londonderry  Islands  are  the  next,  they  extend  nearly  to  Christmas  Sound 
TREBLE  ISLAND  is  a  remarkable  height,  having  three  peaks;  it  is  visible  from  3Vc6Z«/riani. 
a  considerable  distance ;  near  it  are  some  straggling  rocks,  shown  in  the  chart 

Nine  miles  S.  22°  E.,  from  Treble  Island,  are  the  Phillips'  Rocks.  They  are  danger- 
ous, though  obove  water,  because  so  far  from  shore,  and  so  low. 

COOKE   BAY  is  a  largo    space   between   Cnpe  Alikhoolip  and  Waterman  Island.    Cooke  Bay. 
Broken  Innd,  islets  and  breakers,  surround  and  make  it  unfit  for  the  approach  of  vessels. 
Its  shores  were  explored  by  the  Beagle's  boats. 

At  the  north-east  is  the  entrance  of  the  Beagle  Channel,  and  a  passage  to  Whale-boat 
Sound,  both  unfit  for  sailing  vessels,  excepting  with  a  fair  wind. 

WATERMAN  ISLAND,  (No.  28,)  is  soon  known  by  the  remarkable  heights  at  its    Waterman 
south  part.     The  southe-rnmost  was  named  by  Capt.  Cook,  "York  Minster."  fiom  its   Island. 
fancied  resemblance  to  that  building.     He  well  describes  it  as  a  "  wild  looking  rock  " 
(No.  28.) 

Eight  miles  west  of  "  York  Minster."  and  5  from  Point  May,  are  the  Capstan  Rocks, 
above  water  about  20  feet.  There  are  no  other  dangers  to  seaward  of  a  line  from  York 
Minster  to  the  Philips'  Rocks. 

Hauling  round  York  Minster,  you  may  enter  Christmas  Sound.  There  is  no  hidden 
danger;  the  chart  and  plan  are  exact.  Adventure  Cove,  (in  which  Captain  Cook  an- 
chored,) is  the  easiest  of  access,  but  it  will  only  hold  one  vessel. 

MARCH  HARBOR  is  large,  with  good  holding  ground,  but  there  are  many  rocky    March  Har- 
places;  and  one  rock,  under  water,  (see  the  plan,)  having  on  it  only  one  fathom;  its    bor. 
place  is  marked  by  very   thick  kelp.     The  Beagle  worked  through  the  narrow  passage, 
round  Shag  Island  from  Adventure  Cove,  and  worked  into  the  innermost  corner  of  the 
harbor  without  using  a  warp;  larger  vessels  would  of  course  find  themselves  more  con- 
fined. 

I  do  not  think  a  vessel  of  more  than  five  hundred  tons  should  attempt  to  enter  Christ- 
mas Sound. 

The  Beagle  lay  moored  in  this  harbor  nil  the  month  of  March,  in  perfect  safety;  but 
her  chain  cables  became  entangled  with  the  rocks,  and  were  not  hove  in  without  much 
difficulty  and  delay. 

FORT  CLERKE  is  n  bad  place  for  any  vessel,  though  quite  secure  when  in  it;  ac-   Port  Clcrke. 
cess  is  difficult,  and  from  its  situation,  it  is  exposed  to  very  violent  squalls. 

PICKERSGILL  COVE,  (named  by  Cooke,)  as  well  as  Port  Gierke,  is  unworthy  of  Pickengill 
notice  as  nn  anchorage.  _  Ccve. 

Cook's  description  of  Christmas  Sound,  is  as  accurate  as  his  accounts  of  other  places. 
His  "Great  Black  Rock"  and  "Little  Black  Rock,"  show  themselves  as  you  enter. 
Near  York  Minster  are  several  rocks  and  islets,  close  to  the  eastward;  one  rock,  on 
which  the  sea  breaks  violently,  lies  2  miles  E.  20°  S.,  fnmi  the  south  extreme  of  the 
Minster.  You  may  puss  it  quite  close.  OIF  the  "  Great  Black  Rock,"  there  are  two  or 
three  breakers,  caused  by  rocks  under  water. 

But  little  current  sets  among  these  islands.  To  seaward  of  them,  and  near  the  head- 
land, it  sets  as  I  before  described. 

The  tides  between  Cape  Pillar  and  Cape  Horn,  ore  regular,  as  regards  their  rise  and 
fall,  and  time  of  high  water,  but  not  so  with  respect  to  their  velocity  and  direction.  It 
appeared  to  me  that  while  the  water  was  rising  upon  the  shore,  the  tide,  (or  rother  cur- 
rent,) set  along  shore  from  the  north-west  towards  the  south-east,  at  the  rate  of  one  mile 
an  hour,  or  more,  according  to  the  wind. 

During  the  six  hours  of  falling  water,  or  ebb  tide,  tliere  was  little  or  no  current  setting 
along  shore. 

At  Ciipe  Pillar  it  is  high  wafer  at  one  o'clock,  on  the  days  of  full  and  change.  At 
York  Minster  it  is  high  water  at  3  in  the  afternoon. 

At  the  intermediate  places  the  time  gradually  changes  from  1  to  3,  as  you  go  to  the 
south-east. 
Further  eastward,  high  water  is  still  later.    At  Cape  Horn  it  is  at  half  past  3. 
The  rise  of  the  tide  varies  from  4  to  8  feet.     It  is  noted  in  each  plan. 
Eastward  of  Christmas  Sound  lio  the  Wood  Islands.     There  is  no  good  anchorage 
among  them.    Passages  and  broken  land  lie  behind  them  to  the  northward. 

OH  Point  Nativity  are  two  islands  and  an  out-lying  rock.  Hope  Island  is  six  miles  to 
the  south-east  of  this  point. 


High  water. 


"^mmm 


w^f^m 


604  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

The  Ildefonsos,  n  lar(;e  group  of  rocks  nnd  isletB,  next  cinim  nttention.  They  are 
thirty-fivo  miles  disinut  from  York  Minster,  nnd  hour  from  thnt  B|iot  S.  41°  E.  Thev 
extend  five  miles  in  a  north-wost  nnd  south-enst  direction,  nre  very  narrow,  nod  nldut 
one  hundred  foet  above  the  bpii.  (See.  No.  '2i).)  They  appear  to  be  the  remains  of  the 
ridge  of  a  mountain,  broken  through  in  many  places  by  the  sea.  You  may  piiHs  close  hv 
them  in  a  vessel,  for  there  ia  no  danger.  Sealers  have  much  frequented  them  for  fur 
seals. 

Neither  Trefusis  Ray  nor  Rous  Sound  afford  anchorage. 
Leading  Hill.     LEADING  IllLL,  (of  Mr.  Weddel.)  is  a  very  remarkable  double-peaked  height:  be- 
yond  it  nre   Duffs  liay,  Morton  and  Henderson    Islands,  and  the  entrance  of  Indian 
Sound  (of  Mr.  Weddei.) 

There  may  be  good  anchorage  between  those  islands.  There  wos  not  time  to  examine 
some  coves  on  ihe  east  side  of  Norton  Inland,  whose  oppoiiranco  promised  shelter  aod 
holding  ;!round. 


CUarhoUom 
Bay. 
Indian  Cove. 


CLEARBOTTOM  BAY  is  at  the  north  end  of  Morton  Island,  nnd  a  good  onchorage. 
It  is  described  in  Mr.  Woddel's  useful  and  interesting  journal. 

INDIAN  COVE,  in  which  also  ho  anchored,  nnd  romainod  some  time,  in  not  a  place 
to  be  recommended  to  vessels.  They  must  go  far  among  the  islands  to  rench  it,  nnd  when 
there  have  a  bad  rocky  bottom,  with  deep  water,  excepting  one  corner,  where  Ihe  Jane 
lay  at  anchor  with  the  Beaufoy.  Many  better  anchorages  may  be  attained  on  this  coast 
with  less  trouble. 
IndianSound.  INDIAN  SOUND  is  a  largo  tract  of  water,  extending  to  the  north-west.  It  is  full 
of  Islands. 

Between  Cape  Weddel,  at  the  enst  side  of  Indian  Sound,  nnd  False  Ciipe  Horn 
(No.  33,^  is  a  tract  of  broken  land,  which  has  not  been  properly  examined.  It  is,  how- 
ever, a  lee-shoro  during  suuth-west  nnd  southerly  winds,  and  therefore  unfit  fur  anchor- 
age. 

On  Henderson  Island  ia  a  high  shnrp-pninted  hill,  which  is  visible  nt  a  great  distance. 
From  its  summit  the  Diego  Ramirez  Islands  ^AW.  30.  31,  and  32,)  were  soen,  though 
fifty  miles  distant.  The  highest  point  of  these  islanda  is  about  150  fiMtt  above  the  sen. 
There  is  no  liidden  danger  near  them.  They  lie  nearly  north  and  south,  and  extend  over 
a  space  of  five  miles. 

A  ship  may  pass  between  the  northern  cluster  and  that  to  the  southward.  Detached 
rocks  lie  off  the  southern  it-lanil :  all  the  outer  ones  are  above  water.  The  southern,  or 
Boat  Island,  has  a  cuve  at  its  north-oast  corner,  in  which  buata  may  land  ;  there  is  water 
on  the  point  close  to  the  eastwanl  of  this  landing  place. 

Their  j)liire  on  the  cliiirt  may  be  depended  upon,  because  they  were  seen  from,  and 
connoctf'd  by  trian;julniion  to  Henderson  nnd  Hermite  Islanda  (Knter's  Peak.)  There 
nre  soundings  on  each  side,  but  too  deep  for  anchorage,  excepting  to  the  south-east,  where 
Mr.  Weddel  lays  down  some  soundings  (in  his  chart,)  which  were  not  found. 

Between  the  Diego  Ramirez  and  the  Hermite  Islands,  there  is  no  danger  of  any  kind. 
False  Cape  FALSE  CAPE  HORN  is  n  very  remarkable  headland.     (No.  S3.)     From  the  enst 

Horn.  or  west  it  looks  like  a  large  horn.     It  is  a  leading  mark  to  the  best  anchorage  ou  this 

coast. 
^'Orange  "ORANGE  BAY." — To  anchor  in  this  bay  you  must  pass  to  the  eastw     !  of  the 

Bay.'"  False  Cnpe  as  close  as  you  please.     Steering  N.  E.  (true,)  for  four  miles  will  .     igyou 

abreast  of  Point  Lort ;  a  bay  two  miles  wide  is  then  opened,  in  which  you  niiiy  anchor, 
if  necessary,  in  ■?  or  10  fathoms,  over  a  fine  sandy  bottom.  Some  rocks,  above  water,lie 
nt  the  north  side.  Beyond  the  point  which  forms  the  north  side  of  this  bay,  is  a  small 
cove,  with  18  fathoms  water  in  the  middlH  ;  l)oyond  it  is  another  cove,  rather  larger,  after 
which  you  o[)en  Scliapenham  Bay  (so  calle()  by  the  Nassau  Fleet.)  A  north  course  C^rtif) 
from  Point  Lnrt  will  take  you  abreast  of  Oriinge  Bay. 
Schapenham  SCHAPENHAM  BAY  is  one  mile  nnd  a  half  wide  ;  there  is  a  small  black  rock, above 
Bay.  water,  rather  to  the  northward  of  its  middle.     A  great  deal  of  kelp,  lying  over  a  rocky 

bottom,  is  seen  at  the  head  of  the  bay.  and  a  large  waterfall  marks  the  place  distinctly, 
There  is  anchorage  in  from  10  to  15  fathoms,  near  the  south  point ;  but  I  should  not  re- 
commend a  vessel  to  use  it,  when  by  going  further  she  may  get  into  an  unexceptionable 
harbor,  or  anchor  off  its  entrance,  in  perfect  security. 

The  land  behind  these  coves  that  has  bpen  mentioned,  is  high  nnd  rugged :  two  singu- 
lar peaks  show  themselves,  which  resemble  sentry-boxes.  Near  the  shore  the  land  ia 
low,  compared  with  other  parts  of  the  coast,  and  has  not  the  iron-bound  forbidding  ap- 
pearance of  the  more  westerly  shores. 

From  the  heights,  sudden  and  strong  squalls  blow  during  westerly  winds.  Being  fen- 
erally  a  weather  shore,  and  regular  soundings  extending  along  it,  there  is  no  difficulty  in 
choosing  or  approaching  an  anchorage. 

Off  Orange  Bay,  anchor  soundings  extend  to  two  miles  from  the  land.  The  openinj 
of  the  bay  is  three  miles  wide,  and  in  that  part  are  eighteen  or  twenty  fathoms,  over  a 
fine  speckled  sand.     Two  islands,  the  larger  having  a  smooth  down-like  appearance,  lie 


Id  the  middlt 
a  single  ro-^k 
vessels :  thu 
every  whore 
ini(,  and  you 
places. 

You  may  j 
point  nut  the 
plentiful ;  tlit 
This  harbor  i: 
tity  of  wood 
Off  the  nor 
they  are,  hov 
Six  miles  > 
saddle. 

Orange  Bai 
he  fair  for  shi 
Islands. 

There  is  no 
past  three. 

Opposite  to 
Peniasuhi,  on  i 
35,  and  'Mi.) 
accurately  laid 
NASSAU  ] 
is  nothing  to  lo 
cessary.     The; 
vice,  for  their  | 
Nassau  Bay 
CHch  coast,  am 
chart,  and  visiL 
wards  Guanaci 
era  Patagonia, 
On  the  souti 
striking  in  tiie 
near,  it  is  more 
hundred  feet  ali 

No  dangers 
without  heail 

WE.sr  Ca, 

lastoa  and  Her 
land  (excefititii; 

In  the  ciiiiin 
setting  itito  X, 
an  hour  with 
rather  towards 

FRANKL1> 
which  nre  show 

In  Nassau  B 
might  cause  a  st 

A  strong  cui 
through  the  Ba 
ing  to  the  wini 
change  of  tide. 

*Bybaroinptrli' 
tTlie  niiiffiPiic 

tilOUpIl  I  llici     'Dt  () 

oronboari!  tin  nIi 
llie  compiiss  wii. 
need  by  llio  fcr.'i 
liornbleniio,  timt  ii 
set  of  bearings  of 
yards  from  tbe  al 
upon  whioli  tbe  c 
Society. 

No  sensibli!  din;, 
variation  of  tbo  en 
bearings,  when  ih. 
neighborhood.— [1 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

In  the  mWdle;  behind  them  is  tho  harbor,  a  square  mile  of  exceilont  nncli,  ruM,  without 
flginRle  ro'.k  orsho.il.  n  tho  two  creeks  nt  the  south  Bi.le.  is  «o<..i  anchomge  for  small 
vessels:  tho  ilopth  ol  tho  water  varies  sroduiilly  from  5  to  20  fathoms.  The  bottom 
every  where,  is  a  line  speok  ed  sand.  The  land  hereabouts  is  low,  comparatively  speak' 
in«,  nnd  you  are  not  annoyed  by  the  violent  squalls  which  come  from  the  lu'lghts  in  other 
places. 

You  may  fio  close  to  the  shore  in  ey,  ry  part,  therefore  no  directions  ar.>  necessary  to 
point  out  tho  way  t<.  the  best  berth,  which  is  mmked  in  the  plan.     Wood  >,m\  water  are 
plentiful;  tho  be.^t  watering  place  is  in  aHtniiil  cove  at  tlio  north  side  called  Witer  Cove 
This  harbor  is  fit  tor  a  (leet  of  hne-of-battlo  ships,  and  could  supply  them  with  anv  ouanl 
tity  of  wood  and  water.  J  S  "" 

Off  the  north  point  are  several  small  islets,  which  must  not  be  approached  too  closelv  • 
.jjgy  iiro   linwiwt>r.  niif.  ot  the  wfiiv.  "^  J  » 

Six 
gaddle. 


they  are,  however,  out  of  the  way 
Six  miles  N.  N.  W.  of,  the  outer  anchorage,  is  a  curious  island  like  a  castle,  or  a  pack- 
(Idle. 

Orange  Bay  is  somewhat  open  to  east  winds,  but  they  seldom  blow  strcine,  and  would 
I  fair  for  whips  bound  westward.     No  sea  can  bo  thrown  in,  because  of  the  Hermit© 


he 
Islands. 

There  is  no  current  hero  worthy  of  notice 
past  three. 

Opposite  to  the  land  lying  between  New  Year's  and  Tokeinika  Sound,  called  Hardy 
Peninsula,  on  the  east  side  of  which  is  Oranj^o  Bay,  are  the  llormite  Islands.     (Nos.  34 


The  tide  rises  six  feet :  high  water  half- 


Tho  southern  are 


2j,  and  3i'>.)     Their  northern  shores  have  not  yot  been  examined 
accurately  laid  down  in  the  chart. 

NASS.\U  lUVr  extends  to  the  north  and  north-west,  into  the  Beagle  Channel.  There 
is  nothing  to  load  a  vessel  into  thene  openings,  therefore  a  description  of  tiiem  is  not  ne- 
cessary. Th.7  may  prove  useful  for  boiits,  and  a  glance  at  tlie  chart  will  bo  of  more  ser- 
vice, for  their  purpose,  than  any  directions. 

Nassau  Bay  is  very  accessible,  and  free  from  dangers.  Anchorage  may  be  found  on 
each  coast,  and  the  only  dangers  are  somo  rocks,  (or  islets)  above  water,  shown  in  the 
chart,  and  visible  at  a  distance  by  daylight.  The  northern  shore  is  low,  particularly  to- 
wards Guiinaco  Coiiit,  where  the  coast  first  bogins  to  show  signs  of  approaching  East- 
«.n  Piihiminin.  i-hiiiiuiiiir  ifH  mc.kv  heilTh^s  tVir  IhvxI  Imul  nml  liiv»  n....il..r  »i:<f. 


era  Patagonia,  changing  its  rocky  heights  for  level  land  and  low  earthy  clids. 

On  the  southern  most  of  the  Ilermito  Islands,  is  Cape  n.)rn.  There  is  nothing  very 
striking  in  the  appoiirance  of  this  promontory,  as  seen  from  a  distance  ;  but,  in  passing 
near,  it  is  more  roinarkablo,  showing  high  black  clKfs  towards  tho  south:  it  is  about  five 
hundred  feet  above  tho  sea.     ( The  Sketches  Njs.  34,  35,  and  3G,  are  failhfuUi/  drawn.) 

No  dangers  exist  to  the  southward,  in  approaching  these  islands— they  may  bo  closed 
without  hesil.    "n. 

WES  r  CAiv;  is  low.  The  land  about  St.  Martin's  Cove  is  high  and  rugged.  Wol- 
laston  and  Herscliel  Islands  have  also  ridges  of  mountains.  Kater's  Peak,  the  highest 
land  (excepting  .Mount  Hyde)  on  the  W  nids,  h  si-vnutoen  hundred  feet  above  the  sea.* 

lathe  cliaimel  between  Kalst^  Ciipe  liorn  and  the  Hermite  Islands,  a  current  is  found 
setting  into  Nassau  Bay,  and  rather  towiir  l^t  the  Hermite  Islands,  at  thf  rate  of  two  knots 
nn  hour  with  iho  flood  tide,  and  abou  'If  a  knot  with  the  ebb.  As  this  current  sets 
rather  towards  Wnst  Cape,  a  good  berti       ust  be  givou  ',)  it  in  passing. 

FRANKLIN  SOUND  is  clear  of  obsu  -tion,  and  h.»-!  no  other  danger  than  those 
which  are  shown  .n  the  chart. 

In  Nassau  Bay  the  compasses  are  much  aflTected ;  they  become  very  sluggish,  and 
nught  cause  a  serious  error  if  not  carefully  attended  to.  \ 

A  strong  current  sets,  at  times,  aii>iin  the  outer  const  of  the  Hermite  Islands,  nnd 
through  tho  Bay  of  .St.  Francis.  It  van -s  from  half  a  knot  to  two  knots  an  hour,  accord- 
ing to  the  wind  and  the  time  of  tide ;  uud,  in  the  bay,  changes  its  direction  with  the 
change  of  tide. 


*  By  bammPtrical  mpasureinent,  1742  feet  nhovo  liijrh  water  mark. — [P.  P.  K.J 

tTliB  miiK'iPtiL'  needle  waa  very  remarkably  uflocU'd  in  mmiy  parts  of  ihe  island.^  of  the  group,  al- 
though I  liiil  '()tol)>erveaiiy  great  dilToreiico,  wliPii  iit  ii  liirttunce  Irom  tlinroek  of  which  they  are  formed, 
oron  board  thi  siiii).  On  one  oocasiun,  on  aacondiiii;  tho  «'iiiiiinit  of  iMuxwell  Island,  in  Port  Maxwell, 
the  compass  wa.  pliiced  for  coavenicacc  upon  the  rock,  wli'ii  the  needle  was  found  to  be  ^^o  much  inflii- 
pncod  by  the  forrusinoiis  nature  of  the  rock,  composed  of  (jiiartz,  with  largo  and  numerous  crystals  of 
hornblende,  that  its  poles  bfcauiu  vnctly  reversed.  An  experiment  was  afterwards  made  by  taking  a 
selof  bearings  of  a  distant  jbjeol,  (tn  prevent  an  error  of  parallax,)  at  several  stations  around,  at  fifty 
yards  from  the  above  luagiietic  ri"-kj  when  tho  extreme  dirt'rence  amounted  to  127".  Tho  block 
upoB  whicli  the  compass  wo~  pl.'t(";d  in  the  first  instance,  is  uuw  ia  the  museum  of  the  Geological 
Society. 

No  sensible  dilTerence,  howcvo.-.  was  found  in  the  valley  at  the  bottom  of  St.  Martin's  Cove,  where  the 
variation  of  the  compass  was  observed  by  several  dilTerent  instruments,  and  compared  with  astronumical 
bearings,  when  the  deviation  did  not  amount  to  mure  than  the  usual  amount  of  the  variation  in  that 
iieighborhood.-[P.  P.  K.] 


West  Cape. 


Franklin 
Sound. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


M    125 


no 


fi 


m 


2.2 


U&    110 


1.8 


1.25      1.4      1.6 

*9 

6"     

► 

Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


^ 


V 


<^ 


N> 


# 


c^ 


33  WfST  M<IN  STRfiET 

WEBSTER,  N.y    i '^A" 

(716)  S73-4S03 


6 


v"0 


ppplipM 


tmmmmmm 


Port  Max- 
well. 


606  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

With  the  sketch  or  chnrt,  no  one  would  require  a  direction  to  point  out  St.  Martin's 
Cove.  Temporary  anchorage  may  be  had  in  the  small  hay  leading  to  St.  Joachim's  Cove 
or  under  the  south  head  of  St.  Martin's  Cove,  where  you  find  from  '20  to  25  fathoms' 
over  a  clear  sandy  bottom.  As  you  approach  the  western  end  of  St.  Martin's  Cove  the 
water  shoals  to  15  and  10  fathoms.  It  is  perfectly  secure,  but  visited  by  very  violent 
squalls  during  a  westerly  wind. 

PORT  MAXWELL  is  a  perfectly  secure  anchorage,  and  untroubled  by  mountain 
squalls,  (or  williwaws,)  but  it  is  rather  out  of  the  way.  Though  it  has  four  openings 
only  two  are  fit  fur  vessels — those  to  the  north  and  east.  The  bast  berth  in  it  has  16 
fathoms  water,  over  a  clear  uandy  bottom.  This  harbor  is  decidedly  good,  thou»h  it  re- 
quires a  little  more  time  nnJ  trouble  in  the  approach. 

The  passages  between  these  islands  have  deep  water,  and  are  free  from  dangers.  What 
few  rocks  there  are,  show  themselves  above  water,  or  are  thickly  covered  with  kelp. 
Some  rocks  lie  off  the  south  end  of  Chanticleer  Island,  too  close  to  be  of  much  consid- 
eration. 

One  mile  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Horn  there  are  three  rocks,  generally  above  water. 
The  sea  always  breaks  on  theni. 

Olf  the  east  point  of  Horn  Island,  are  some  small  rocks  and  breakers.  Off  Cape  De- 
ceit are  several  rocks,  all  above  water ;  and  two  miles  to  the  S.  E.  is  a  cluster  risinv  SO 
or  40  feet  above  the  sen. 

Off  Cape  Horn  the  current  is  as  strong  as  on  any  part  of  the  coast.  Between  it  and 
Cape  Pillar,  it  is  by  no  means  regular;  sometimes  with  a  strong  wind  and  flowing  tide  it 
runs  two  knots  an  hour — at  others  it  is  hardly  worth  notice.*  I  never  found  it  set  totha 
westward  at  any  time  of  tide,  or  with  any  wind. 

The  Barnevelt  Islands,  {Nd.  23,)  lie  11  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  from  Cape  Deceit.  The 
chart  and  sketch  are  a  sufficient  description.  For  the  Evouts  Isles,  (No.  3S,)  I  should 
refer  also  to  the  chart  and  the  accompanying  view;  and  for  the  appearance  of  this  part 
of  the  coast,  from  Cape  Horn  to  Cape  Good  Success,  to  the  Sketch.     {No.  37.) 

The  space  between  Cape  Deceit  and  New  Island  is  free  from  the  hidden  dangers,  as 
far  as  I  am  aware,  but  it  has  not  yet  been  sufficiently  examined. 

In  Georee  Road  there  is  very  good  anchorage  in  6  or  7  fathoms  water,  over  a  sandy 
bottom. 
Lennox  Isl-         LENNOX  ISLAND,  as  well  as  New  Island,  and  indeed  any  part  of  the  coast  here- 
and.  abouts,  may  be  approached  with  confidence,  using  the  lead  and  looking  out  for  kelp. 

There  are  no  shoals,  but  the  water  is  not  so  deep  as  to  the  west  of  Cape  Horn,  neither 
is  the  land  near  so  high. 

At  the  east  side  of  Lennox  Island  is  excellent  anchorage.  Small  vessels  may  go  into 
a  cu/e  in  which  the  Beagle  lay  moored,  but  large  ships  niust  anchor  in  the  road,  which 
is  quite  secure,  and  sheltered  from  all  but  south-east  winds,  with  which  of  course  a  ves- 
sel would  not  wish  to  remain  at  anchor.  To  the  north  of  Lennox  Island  is  the  eastern 
opening  of  the  Beagle  Channel.  It  is  easy  of  access,  but  useless  to  a  ship.  Boats  may 
profit  by  its  straight  course  and  smooth  water.  It  runs  120  miles  in  nearly  a  direct  line 
between  ranges  of  high  mountains,  covered  always  with  snow.  The  highest  are  bfltween 
3  and  4,000  feet  above  the  sea.  This  channel  averages  Ij  mile  in  width,  and  in  general 
has  deep  water ;  but  there  are  in  it  many  islets  and  rocks  near  them. 

A  range  of  high  mountains  runs  uninterruptedly  from  the  Barbara  Channel  to  Strait 
le  Maire.  Mount  Snrmiento,  more  than  5,000  feet  (6,800  feet)  above  the  sen,  is  in  this 
range.  Southward  of  these  mountains  is  a  succession  of  broken  land,  intersected  by  pas- 
snges,  or  large  sounds.  A  boat  can  go  from  the  Week  Islands  to  the  eastern  entrance  of 
the  Beagle  Channel,  without  being  once  exposed  to  the  outside  coast,  or  to  the  sea  which 
is  there  found. 

Some  heights  on  New  Island  were  noticed  by  Cook  ;  they  were  not,  however,  bo  visi- 
ble from  the  west  as  from  the  east  side. 

Good  temporary  anchorage  during  westerly  winds  may  be  obtained  under  New  Island, 
or  near  the  shore  to  the  northward ;  but  I  know  of  no  good  harbor  between  Richmond 
Road  and  Good  Success  Bay.  in  Strait  le  Maire. 

Regular  soundings  are  found  hereabouts,  in  all  directions,  and  the  shoro  is  steep  to. 
Neither  Aquirre  Bay,  Spaniard's  Harbor,  nor  Valentyn's  Bay,  are  fit  for  more  than 
temporary  anchorage  during  northerly  or  westerly  winds.     They  are  much  exposed  to 
the  south.     For  that  purpose  the  chart  is  a  sufficient  guide. 
Tide.  The  tide  is  felt  strongly  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  causinsr  races  and  eddies  near  the  pro- 

jecting points.  In  the  offing,  the  current,  (or  tide,)  sets  towards  Strait  le  Maire,  from  1 
to  3  knots  an  hour,  when  the  water  is  rising  on  the  shore,  nnd  the  wind  westerly.  While 
the  water  is  falling,  it  runs  with  less  strength,  and  with  an  easterly  wind  is  not  felt  at  all. 

*  In  heating  up  to  the  anchorage  in  St.  Martin's  Cove,  at  from  20  to  60  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cap« 
Horn,  I  found  the  ciirmnt  netting  constantly  atfrotnhalf  to  one  mile  per  hour,  the  wind  throughout beiii; 
•outh-wcsterly.— [P.  P.  K.] 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


607 


Cape  Good 
Succtta. 


Good  Success 
Bay. 


The  Bell  Mountain  is  remnrkable  :  it  is  seen  far  at  sea,  from  the  north  as  wel'i  as  from 
the  south.     It  is  high,  and  in  shape  resembles  a  large  bell. 

CAPE  GOOD  SUCCESS  is  high  and  bluff.  {No  40.)  Some  rocks  lie  close  to  it, 
above  water. 

The  land  from  the  Bell  Mountain  to  Good  Success  Bay  is  higher  than  that  near  Len- 
nox and  New  Islands.     It  more  resembles  the  south-west  coast. 

Between  Cape  Horn  and  Stnten  Island,  regular  soundings  are  found,  between  30  and 
70  fathoms,  over  n  sandy  bottom. 

The  soundings  in  Strait  le  Maire  are  similar  near  t'leir  southern  entrance.  Towards 
the  north  the  soundings  diminish  ;  and  2  miles  from  Cnpe  San  Diego  there  are  not  more 
than  30  fathoms  water,  over  a  rocky  bottom.  The  strait  is  clear  of  all  obstacles,  the  tide 
excepted.  The  land  from  Cape  Good  Success  to  Maurice  Cove,  is  higti  and  bold,  with 
water  for  a  ship  as  near  lu  it  as  she  ought  to  go. 

Rather  more  than  two  miles  north-east  of  Cape  Good  Success  is  a  projecting  headland, 
which,  at  first,  appears  to  be  the  cape.  Two  rocky  islets  show  themselves  close  to  it,  and 
from  a  distance  appear  like  a  ship  un'^.er  sail. 

Six  miles  from  these  rocks,  N.  E.  b  •  N.,  is  the  Bay  of  Good  Success.  (No,  40.)  It 
is  a  good  anchorage,  perfectly  safe,  provided  that  a  vessel  does  not  anchor  too  far  in  to- 
wards the  sandy  beach  at  its  head;  for,  during  south-east  gales,  a  heavy  swell  with  dan- 
gerous rollers  sets  right  into  the  bay.  The  best  berth  is  shown  in  the  plan.  Heights  of 
about  1,200  feet  above  the  sea  surround  the  bay  ;  therefore,  with  strong  winds,  it  is  sub- 
jeclto  squalls,  which,  during  westerly  gales,  are  very  violent. 

GOOD  SUCCESS  BAY  is  an  excellent  anchorage  for  vessels  of  any  size  to  stop  in 
to  get  wood  or  water,  but  it  would  not  answer  if  a  vessel  required  to  lie  steady  for  repairs, 
as  a  swell  frequently  sets  in.  It  is  quite  safe;  but  in  the  winter  season,  when  easterly 
winds  are  common,  no  vessel  should  anchor  so  near  the  head  of  the  bay  as  she  might  in 
summer. 

The  "  Broad  Road,"  mentioned  by  Cook,  is  a  good  mark  for  the  bay,  if  the  inbend  of 
(he  land  does  not  sufficiently  point  out  its  situation.    It  is  a  barren  strip  of  land  on  the 
height  at  the  south  side  of  the  harbor.     Maurice  Cove  has  no  good  anchorage  ;  it  is  mere- 
ly a  rocky  bight. 
Hence  to  Cape  San  Diego  the  land  is  much  lower,  and  the  water  near  it  less  deep. 
CAPE  SAN  DIEGO  is  low.     A  ship  may  go  close  to  it.     There  aie  shoaler  sound- 
ings towards  the  east,  for  about  two  miles,  than  in  other  parts  near  here ;  for  a  rocky  ledge 
UDcler  water  seems  to  project  from  the  cape.     On  this  ledge  there  are  overfalls,  strong  ed- 
dies, and  a  violent  race  of  tide  when  the  wind  is  opposed  to  it. 
Beyond  Cape  San  Diego  the  land  suddenly  trends  awiiy  westward. 
CAPE  ST.  VINCENT  is  a  rocky  point,' wiih  low  bluffs  above  it. 
Between  this  point  and  Cape  San  Diego,  is  ■'  Thetis  Bay,"  a  tolerable  anchorage  dur- 
ing west  or  southerly  winds,  though  the  bottom  is  rocky  in  many  places,     lietweon  the 
heads  the  tides  run  with  great  strength  ;  theretbre,  a  »liip  should  anchor  off  a  green  bluff 
at  the  west  side,  and  within  the  line  of  the  heads  she  will  have  from  6  to  1*2  fathoms  of 
water,  over  a  coarse  sandy  bottom,  mixed  with  patches  of  rock. 

Beyond  Cape  St.  Vincent  the  land  trends  to  the  W.  and  N.  VV.  It  is  rather  low  near 
the  sea,  but  in  shore  are  many  hills  partially  covered  with  wood. 

Regular  soundings  extend  to  seaward  for  many  leagues;  and  good  anchorage  may  be 
found  near  the  land,  on  any  part  of  this  coast,  during  westerly  winds. 

The  tides  in  Strait  le  Maire  are  as  regular  as  in  any  part  of  the  world.     They  willassist    Tides. 
a  vessel  materially  in  her  passage,  if  taken  at  the  right  time. 

As  the  strait  is  very  wide,  perfectly  free  from  obstacles  of  any  kind,  the  soundings  re- 
gular, with  Good  Success  Bay  close  at  hand,  in  case  the  wind  or  tide  should  change,  ves- 
sels may  pass  through  without  difficulty  or  risk. 

When  the  tide  opposes  the  wind  and  swell,  there  is  a  heavy,  and,  for  small  vessels,  a 
dangerous  race  of  tide  off  Cape  San  Diego,  whore,  as  I  said  before,  there  is  a  shoal  ledge, 
and  the  tide  runs  very  strongly.  We  found  it  so  in  the  Beagle  at  even  a  neap  flood  tide ; 
but  let  it  be  remarked,  that  en  another  day,  at  the  top  of  the  springs,  being  the  day  after 
full  moon,  we  passed  the  same  spot  at  half  flood,  with  perfectly  smooth  water. 

Though  the  tide  was  running  three  or  four  knots  an  hour  round  the  cape,  and  eddies 
were  seen  in  every  direction,  the  vessel's  steerage  was  but  little  affected  by  them. 

It  is  high  water  on  the  shore  in  Good  Success  Bay,  and  slack  water  in  the  strait,  at  4  in    High  water, 
the  afternoon  on  thefuil  and  change  days,  and  low  water  with  slack  tide  in  the  offing,  at 
10  in  the  morning.     The  tide  rises  perpendicularly  from  6  to  8  feet  according  to  the  wind. 
At  Cape  Pillar,  as  1  before  said,  the  turn  of  tide  is  about  1  o'clock.     Along  the  S.  W. 
and  S.  E.  coasts,  the  time  gradually  increases  to  4  in  the  afternoon  at  this  place. 

From  Cape  San  Diego  to  the  northward,  the  tides  set  north  and  west  along  the  shore, 
from  one  knot  to  three.    The  ebb  sets  in  a  contrary  direction,  but  not  bo  strongly. 


Cape  San 
Diego. 


Cape  St, 
Vincent. 


606 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Tide. 


Staten  Island. 


Gape  St.  An- 
tony,  Middle 
Cape,  and 
Cape  San 
Bartholomew. 


In  Strait  le  Maire  the  flood  tide  runs  from  two  to  four  knots  near  the  cape,  and  fro 
one  to  three  in  mid-channel,  more  or  less,  according  to  the  strength  and  direction  of  th 
wind.     The  ebb  sets  to  the  southward,  about  one  iinot  an  hour.*  ^ 

At  times,  when  a  strong  flood  tide  is  opposed  by  a  northerly  wind,  there  is  an  overfnii 
off  Cape  San  Diego,  like  the  "  Bores,"  on  our  own  coast  and  elsewhere. 

STATKN  ISLAND  is  high,  and  its  mountains  are  generally  covered  with  snow 
Its  shores  lying  towards  the  strait  are  very  bold  and  rugged.  No  danger  is  near  them  ex 
cepting  strong  eddies  and  races,  caused  by  the  tide  near  the  headlands.  ' 

CAPE  ST.  ANTONY,  MIDDLE  CAPE,  AND  CAPE  SAN  BARTHOLOMEW 
are  high,  bluff  promontories.  The  soundings  to  the  northward  are  very  regular,  andeiv' 
notice  of  your  approach  to  Staten  Island,  or  the  Strait  le  JMaire.  '       °  ^ 

General  Observations  upon  the  Appearance  and  Character  of  the  Sea  Coast  of  Tierradel 
Fuego ;  Description  of  the  Anchorages,  and  Remarks  upon  the  Seasons,  Wind,  and 
Weather. 


From  Cape  Pillor  to  Cape  Horn,  the  coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego  is  very  irregular  and 
much  broken ;  being,  in  fact,  composed  of  an  immense  number  of  islands.  It  is  general- 
ly high,  bold,  and  free  from  shoals  or  banks  ;  but  there  are  many  rocks  nearly  level  with 
the  surface  of  the  water,  distant  2,  and  even  3  miles  from  the  nearest  shore,  which  make 
it  very  unsafe  for  a  vessel  to  approach  nearer  than  5  miles,  excepting  in  daylight  and  clear 
weather.  The  coast  varies  in  height  from  8  to  1500  feet  above  the  sea.  Further  in  shore 
are  ranges  of  mountains  always  covered  with  snow,  whose  height  is  from  2  to  4000  feet 
and  in  one  instance,  (Sarmiento,)  5000.  ' 

With  daylight  and  clear  weather,  a  vessel  may  close  the  shore  without  risk,  because 
the  water  is  invariably  deep ;  and  no  rock  is  found  which  is  not  so  marked  by  sea  weed 
'^or  kelp,  as  it  is  generally  called,)  that  by  a  good  lookout  at  the  mast-head,  its  situation  is 
as  clearlyseen  as  if  it  were  buoyed.  By  avoiding  kelp  you  are  sure  of  having  sufficient 
water  for  the  largest  ships,  on  any  part  of  this  const.  At  the  same  ^time  in  must  be  re- 
membered that  kelp  grows  in  some  places  from  a  depth  of  30  fathoms,  and  that  on  many 
pai  ts  of  this  coast  you  may  pass  through  thick  beds  of  sea  weed  without  having  less  than 
6  fathoms  water;  still  it  is  always  a  sign  of  danger,  and  until  the  spot  where  it  grows  has 
been  carefully  sounded,  it  is  not  safe  to  pass  over  it  with  a  ship.  As  an  instance:  after 
sounding  a  large  bed  of  this  weed  in  one  of  the  Beagle's  boats,  and  thinking  ittnightbe 
passed  safely,  a  rock  was  found,  not  more  than  4  feet  in  diameter,  having  only  one  fath- 
om water  over  it. 

Viewing  the  coast  at  a  distance,  it  appears  high,  rugged,  covered  with  snow,  and  con. 
tinued  as  if  there  were  no  islands.  When  near,  you  see  many  inlets  which  intersect  the 
land  in  every  direction,  and  open  into  large  gulfs,  or  sounds,  behind  the  seaward  islands. 
You  now  lose  sight  of  the  higher  land,  which  is  covered  with  snow  throughout  the 
year,  and  find  the  heights  close  to  the  sea  thickly  wooded  towards  the  east,  thou»h  bar- 
ren on  their  western  sides,  owing  to  the  prevailing  winds.  These  heights  nre 'seldom 
covered  with  snow,  because  the  sea  winds  and  the  rain  molt  it  soon  after  it  falls.  Oppo- 
site to  the  eastern  valleys,  where  the  land  is  covered  with  wood,  and  water  is  seen  falling 
down  the  ravines,  good  anchorage  is  generally  found.  But  these  valleys  are  exposed  to 
tremendous  squalls,  which  come  from  the  heights.  The  best  of  all  anchorages  on  this 
coast,  is  where  you  find  good  ground  on  the  western  side  of  high  land,  and  are  protected 
from  the  sea  by  low  islands.  It  never  blows  near  so  hard  against  high  land  as  from  it,  but 
the  sea  on  the  weather  side  is  of  course  too  formidable,  unless  stopped,  as  I  mentioned,  bj 
islets. 

Where  the  land  is  chiefly  composed  of  sandstone  or  slato,  anchorages  abound:  where 
of  granite,  it  is  difficult  to  strike  soundings. 

The  difference  between  the  granite  and  slate,  or  sandstone  hills,  can  be  distinguished 
by  the  former  being  very  barren  and  rugged,  and  of  a  grey  or  white  appearance;  where- 
as the  latter  are  generally  covered  with  vegetation,  are  dark  colored,  and  have  smoother 
outlines.  These  slate  or  sandstone  hills  show  few  peaks,  and  the  only  rugged  places  are 
those  exposed  to  wind  or  sea. 

Soundings  extend  to  30  miles  from  the  coast.  Between  10  and  20  miles  from  the  land 
the  depth  of  water  varies  from  60  to  200  fathoms,  the  bottom  almost  every  whore  a  fine 
white  or  speckled  sand.  From  10  to  5  fathoms  distant  the  average  depth  is  50  fathoms; 
it  vai'ies  from  30  to  100,  and  in  some  places  no  ground  with  200  fathoms  of  line.    Lets 


*  The  flond  tide  sets  through  Strait  le  Mnire  from  the  douthward,  and  along  the  north  and  south  sides  of  | 
Staten  Island  Irom  east  to  west.     It  is  high  wiitcr,  at  full  ami  change,  at  the  anchuragn  within  ibt 
New  Year's  Isles,  as  well  as  on  the  east  side  of  Strait  le  Maire,  at  5  o'clock.    The  current  i<  rer; 
strong,  running  from  4  to  6  knots.     Off  Cape  St.  John  there  is  a  tide  race,  which  extends  for  (UDt 
dislanca  off  tlie  point.— [P.  P.  K.] 


than  5  mile 
40  futhotns, 
nearly  to,  c 
Afl«r  car 
entering,  yo 
enter  tHe  op 
siderably  de 
There  is  i 
it,  which  op] 
wearing  it  a' 
Between  i 
and  the  bottc 
A  small  sh 
she  runs  into 
extremely  da 
Fogs  (ire  € 
vail.    The  su 
overcast  and  c 
Gales  of  w 
the  weather  i: 
Westerly  w 
chiefly  in  the 
Winds  from 
eradualJy— the 
frequently  the' 
dually,  or  shift' 
From  the  m 
and  more  clouc 
Increasing  in  si 
N.  and  N.  W.. 
When  the  fu 
even  while  it  is 
blowing  harder 
you  have  clear  ' 
In  the  S.  W.| 
but  moderntin;,'  <^ 
Northerly  wi 
ner  of  shifts  ant 
season,  which 
longer,  and  the 
long  than  the  sh 
It  should  be  r 
ward,  neither  dc 
and  southerly  w 
anchorages,  and 
The  most  usu 
with  a  cloudy  o\ 
Much  differen 
tudes.    I  can  on 
wmeter,  (Adie's 
ot  course,  corres 
northern  latitude 
maining  the  sam 
There  is  u  con 
•Je  N.  W.  towR, 
the  current  tnkoi 
island,  and  off  to 
!    Much  has  bee 
serious  obstacle  i 
Mistence. 

I  found  it  run 

West— jesa,  or  ins 

near  the  projecriii 

■I  his  current  sc 

this  part  of  the  ccl 

jofnereis,  in  fa 

("foghiKhnndbc 
Mankofgoundin 


^"^"<"'P"P<M"ipP<IWIillliP"^^^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

than  5  miles  from  the  shore  the  som.dings  (ire  ve-y  irrogulnr  indeed,  genernlly  less  thnn 
40 fathoms,  but  m  somo  pii.cos  deeptMnng  suddenly  ti.  100,  or  more:  in  others  a  rock  rises 
nearly  to,  or  iibove  the  siirtiice  ot  the  wnter.  ".naoo 

After  carrying  50.  40.  3'>,  or  'Jo  fathoms,  towards  an  inlet  which  you  are  desirous  of 
entering,  you  wdl  probably  f.nc  the  water  deepen  to  CO  or  100  fathoms  as  .^oon  as  vou 
enter  the  opening:  and  m  the  largo  sounds,  behind  tho  seaward  islands,  the  water  is  con- 
siderably deeper  thnn  on  tho  outside. 

There  is  n  bank  of  soundings  along  tlio  whole  roast,  extondin-ifrom  20  to  30  'riiles  from 
it,  which  appears  to  have  been  torinodby  the  continued  action  of  the  sea  upon  tho  shore, 
wearing  it  away  and  forming  a  bank  with  Us  sand. 

Between  the  islands,  where  there  is  no  swell  or  surf  worth  notice,  tho  water  is  deeo 
and  the  bottom  very  irregular.  *^' 

A  small  ship  may  run  among  the  islands  in  many  places,  and  find  good  anchorage :  but 
she  runs  into  n  labyrmth,  from  which  her  escape  may  be  difficult,  and,  in  thick  weather 
extremely  dangerous.  ' 

Fogs  are  extremely  rare  on  this  coast,  but  thick  rainy  weather  and  strona  winds  pre- 
vail. The  sun  shows  himself  but  little;  the  sky,  even  in  fine  weather,  being  generally 
ofercast  and  cloudy.     A  ciertr  day  is  a  very  rare  occurrence. 

Gales  of  wind  succeed  each  other  at  short  intervals,  and  Inst  several  days  At  times 
the  weather  is  fine  and  settled  for  a  fortnight,  but  those  times  are  few. 

Westerly  winds  prevail  during  the  greater  part  of  tho  year.  The  oast  wind  blows 
chiefly  in  the  winter  months,  and  at  times  very  hard,  but  it  sel  lorn  blows  in  summer. 

Winds  from  the  eastern  quarter  invariably  rise  light,  with  fine  weather;  they  increase 
iradually— the  weather  changes— and  at  times  end  in  a  determined  heavy  gale.  \  ore 
frequently  they  rise  to  the  strength  of  a  treble-reefed  topsail  breeze,  then  die  away  era- 
dually,  or  shift  to  another  quarter.  '  ° 

From  the  north  the  wind  always  begins  to  blow  moderately,  but  with  thick  weather 
and  more  clouds  than  from  the  eastward,  and  it  is  generally  accompanied  by  small  rain. 
Increasing  in  strength,  it  draws  to  the  westward  gradually,  and  blows  hardest  between 
N.  and  N.  W..  with  heavy  clouds,  thick  weatiicr,  and  mucli  rain. 

When  the  fury  of  tho  northwester  is  expended,  which  varies  from  12  to  50  hours,  or 
even  while  it  is  blowing  hard,  the  wind  sometimes  shifts  suddenly  into  the  S.  W.  quarter, 
blowing  harder  than  before.  This  wind  soon  drives  away  tho  clouds,  and  in  a  few  hours 
you  have  clear  weather,  but  with  heavy  squalU  passing  occasionally. 

In  the  S.  W.  quarter  tho  wind  hangs  several  days,  (generally  speaking,)  blowing  strong, 
but  moderating  towards  its  end,  and  graiitin;;  2  or  3  days  of  lino  weather. 

Northerly  winds  then  begin  again  generally  during  the  suininer  months;  but  all  man- 
ner of  shifts  and  changes  are  experienced  from  north  to  south  by  the  west,  dining  that 
season,  which  would  hardly  deserve  the  name  of  summer,  were  not  tho  days  so  much 
longer,  and  tho  weather  a  little  warmer.  Kaiii  and  wind  prevail  much  more  during  the 
long  than  the  short  days. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  bad  wentiier  never  coines  on  sudde.i'y  from  the  east- 
ward, neither  does  a  south-west  or  southerly  gale  s'.ift  suildenly  to  the  northward.  .S.  W. 
and  southerly  winds  rise  suddenly  and  violently,  and  must  bo  well  considered  in  choosing 
anchorages,  and  preparing  for  shifts  of  wind  at  sea. 

The  most  usual  weather  in  these  latitudes  is  a  fresh  wind  between  n  N.  W.  and  S.  W., 
with  a  cloudy  overcast  sky. 

Much  difference  of  opinion  has  prevailed  as  to  the  utility  of  a  liaromefer  in  these  lati- 
tudes,   lean  only  say,  that  during  12  months  constant  trial  of  a  liaronieter  and  sympie- 
Bometer,  (Adie's,)  I  found  their  indications  of  liie  utmost  value.     Their  variations  do  not, 
of  course,  correspond  to  those  of  middl..-  latitudes,  but  they  correspond  to  those  of  high 
[ind:  where  ^|  northern  latitudes  in  a  remarkable  munner,  changing  south  for  north,  (east  and  west  re- 

^^  maining  the  same.) 

listinguished  ^1  There  is  a  continual  current  setting  along  the  S.  W.  coast  of  Tierra  d(^l  Fuego,  from 
|co;  where-  ^1  theN.  W.  towards  tho  S.  E.,  as  far  as  the  Diego  Ramirez  Isliiiuls.  From  their  vicinity 
ye  sinoothet  ^1  the  current  takes  a  more  easterly  direction,  setting  round  Cape  Horn  towards  Staten 
|d  places  are  H  Island,  and  oft'  to  seaward  to  the  E.  S.  E. 

^B    Much  has  been  said  of  the  strength  of  this  current,  some  persons  supposing  that  it  is  a 
I'om  the  land  ^M  serious  obstacle  in  passing  to  the  westward  of  Cap(»  Horn,  while  others  almost  deny  its 

vhere  a  line  ^M  existence. 
Isofiithonu:  ^M    I  found  it  run  at  the  average  rate  of  a  mile  an  hour.     Its  strength  is  greater  during 
line.    Led  ^B  west— less,  or  insensible,  during  easterly  winds.    It  is  strongest  no;u-  the  land,  particularly 
I  near  the  projecting  capes  or  detached  islands. 
^J    This  current  sets  rather  from  the  land,  which  diminislics  the  danger  of  approaching 
1  south  !>i>l»°|  ^Bthis  part  of  the  coast. 

tgfi  wiiliiiitM  ^B  There  is,  in  fact,  much  less  risk  in  approaching  this  coast  than  is  generally  supposed. 
I  'ds'for'ww  ^B^eing  high  and  bold,  without  sand-banks  or  shoals,  its  position  accurately  deteiinined,  and 
|icn  ^^ibank  of  Boundings  extending  20  or  30  miles  from  the  shore,  it  cannot  be  mncfr  feared. 

39 


609 


mm 


1^" 


mmummimi^^iw 


^ammmm 


610  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Rocks,  it  is  true,  abound  near  the  Innd,  but  they  are  very  near  to  the  shore,  and  out  of  a 
ship's  wny. 

A  line  I'l-om  hendlond  to  headlnnd,  (beginning  from  the  outermost  Apostlo)  along  the 
coast,  will  clear  all  danger,  excepting  the  Tower  Rocks,  which  are  high  above  water,  and 
steep  to. 

Gales  of  wind  from  the  southward,  and  squalls  from  tlie  S.  W.,  are  preceded  and  fore- 
told by  heavy  bunks  of  large  white  clouds  risinu;  in  those  quarters,  having  hard  edges,  and 
appearing  very  rounded  and  solid.     {Cumulnni.) 

Winds  from  the  northward  and  north-westward  are  preceded  and  accompanied  by  low 
flying  clouds,  witii  a  thickly  overcast  sky,  in  which  the  clouds  appear  to  be  at  a  great 
height.  The  sun  shows  dimly  through  them,  and  has  a  reddish  appearance.  For  some 
hours,  or  a  day  before  a  gale  from  the  north  or  west,  it  is  not  possible  to  take  an  altitude 
of  the  sun,  although  he  is  visible;  the  haziness  of  the  atmosphere  in  the  upper  regions 
causing  his  limbs  to  be  quite  indistinct.  Sometimes,  but  very  rarely,  with  the  wind  light 
between  N.  N.  W.  and  N.  N.  E.,  you  have  a  few  days  of  beautiful  weather.  They  are 
succeeded  by  gales  from  the  southward,  with  much  rain. 

It  my  be  as  well  to  say  a  few  words  respecting  the  seasons  in  the  neighborhood  of  Cape 
Horn,  ns  much  question  has  arisen  respecting  the  propriety  of  making  the  passage  round 
the  cape  in  winter  or  in  summer. 

The  equinoctial  months  are  the  worst  in  the  year,  generally  speaking,  in  most  parta 
of  the  world.  Heavy  gales  prevail  at  those  limes,  though  not,  perhaps,  exactly  at  the 
equinoxes.  In  August,  September,  October,  and  November,  you  have  the  worstraonths 
in  the  year.     Westerly  winds,  rain,  snow,  hail,  and  cold  weather  then  prevail. 

December,  .January,  and  February  are  the  warmest  months;  the  days  are  long,  and 
you  have  some  fine  weather:  but  westerly  winds,  very  strong  gales  at  times,  with  much 
rain,  prevail  throughout  this  season,  which  carries  with  it  less  of  summer  than  in  almost 
any  part  of  the  globe. 

March,  as  I  said,  n  stormy,  and  perhaps  the  worst  month  in  the  year  with  respect  to 
violent  winds,  though  not  so  rainy  as  the  summer  months.  i 

In  April,  May,  and  June,  the  finest  weather  is  experienced;  and  though  the  days 
shorten,  it  is  more  like  summer  than  any  other  time  of  the  year.  Bad  weather  is  found 
during  these  months,  but  not  so  much  as  at  other  times.  Easterly  winds  are  frequent,  with 
fine  clear  settled  weather.  During  this  period  there  is  some  chance  of  obtaining  a  few 
successive  and  corresponding  observations.  I'o  try  to  rate  chronometers  by  equal  alti- 
tudes, would  be  a  fruitless  waste  of  time  at  other  seasons.  June  and  July  are  much 
alike,  but  easterly  gales  blow  more  during  July. 

The  days  being  so  short,  and  the  weather  cold,  make  these  months  very  unpleasant, 
though  they  are,  |)erhaps.  the  best  fur  a  ship  makitig  a  passage  to  the  westward,  as  the 
wind  is  much  in  the  eastern  quarter. 

I  should  say  that  the  summer  months,  December  and  January,  are  the  best  for  making 
a  passage  from  the  Pacific  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  though  that  passage  is  so  shortandeasy 
thot  it  hardly  requires  a  choice  of  time.  For  going  to  the  westward,  I  should  prefer 
April,  May,  and  June. 

Lightning  and  thunder  are  seldom  known.  Violent  squalls  come  from  the  south  and 
south-west,  giving  warning  of  their  approach  by  musses  of  clouds.  They  are  rendered 
more  formidable  by  snow,  and  hail  of  large  size. 

South-west  Coast,  or  Wcslern  Patagonia,  from  the  Strait  of  Magalhaens  to  Cape  Tres 

Monies. 

Very  small  portions  of  the  soa  coast  of  this  interval  wore  seen  by  us.    The  followiag 
descriptions  are  principally  abstracted  from  the  manuscript  journals  of  the  late  Captain 
Stokes,  Lieutenant  (now  Captain)  Skyring,  and  Mr.  Kirke,  mate  of  his  Majesty's  sur- 
veying sloop  Beagle. 
Owe  Victory       Between  CAPE  VICTORY  AND  LORD  NELSON  STRAIT  the  coast  is  very 
(md  Lord         much  broken,  and  intersected  by  channels  leading  between  the  islands  of  Queen  Ade- 
NdionStrait.  laide  Archipelago,  on  liie  sea  const  of  which,  to  the  N.  N.  E.  of  Cape  Victory,  is  a  re- 
markable pyramidal  hill,  called  Diana  Peak,  which,  in  clear  weather,  is  visible  to  ships 
entering  the  strait.      Capo  Isabel  is  a  steep  rocky  promontory  of  great  height,  with  a 
ppaked  summit,  and  a  shai'ply  serrated  ridge,  having  two  detached  columnar  masses  of 
rock.     Beagle  Island,  lying  ofiT  it,  is  wall-sided;  but  although  tolerably  high,  is  much 
lower  than  the  land  of  the  cape. 
Cirpe  Santa         CAPE  SANTA  LUCIA,  the  westernmost  point  of  Cambridge  Island,  is  high  and 
L»da.  precipitous.     Cape  George,  at  the  south  end,  is  lower,  and  forms  a  bluff  point. 

TheSanBlas      THE  SAN  BLAS  CHANNEL,   DUCK  AND   DUNCAN   HARBORS,  THE 
Ckatmel,  ^.   DUNCAN  ROCK,  and  other  rocks  off  them,  are  inserted  from  the  oral  information  of 
the  master  of  an  American  schooner,  and,  probably,  are  very  incorrectly  laid  down.   Au- 
guita  Island  and  the  White  Horse  were  seen  by  Lieutenant  Skyring. 


i^pn 


^"'*"'^i>PniPP"iP><iiRlilliVMi«iViB|ii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


«u 


SANTIAGO,  the  south  end  of  Madre  de  Dios  Archipelago,  is  correctly 
are  also  the  general  direction  of  the  coast  to  the  northward,  and  the  summite 


Cape  Sand- 
ago. 


Cape  Tkree^ 
Pointt. 


CAPE 

placed,  as  are  ^         __        _ 

of  the  land  that  are  particularized,  •  ■t  :  the  opening  of  West  Channel.  April  Peak,  Tow- 
er Rock,  and  the  bay  to  the  north  of  it,  and  Ciipe  Three  Points,  which  is  the  south  en- 
tran:e  of  the  Gulf  of  Trinidad.  Opposite  to  the  litter  cape  is  Cape  Primero.  the  south 
point  of  the  inounUiinous  Island  of  Mount  Corso,  the  land  of  which  may  be  seen,  in  clear 
weather,  from  the  southward,  at  the  distance  of  10  leagues.  It  forms  the  visible  north- 
ern termination  of  the  coast  line.  Viewed  when  bearing  north,  or  any  point  to  the  west- 
ward of  north,  its  summit  makes  like  a  round  mount  rising  conspicuously  above  the  con- 
tiguous land,  froiii  which  a  small  portion  of  low  coast  extends  for  two  degrees  beyond  it 
to  the  westward.  The  land  of  the  northern  shore  of  tho  gulf  makes  in  mountainous 
ridge  sandpeaks.  the  average  height  of  which  Capt.  Stokes  estimated  to  be  about  3.000  feet. 
CAPE  THllEE  POINTS  rises  to  a  lofty  rocky  mountain,  nenrly  2,000  feet  high, 
the  summit  being  of  peaks  and  sharp  serrated  ridges,  with  a  rl»tached  mass  of  rock  of  py- 
ramidal form  at  the  base,  which  shuts  in  with  the  land  on  the  bearing  of  N.  51°  E. 
The  variation  here  is  20°  58'. 

PORT  HENRY"  is  3  miles  to  the  N.  E.  of  Cape  Three  Points.    The  shore  between    Port  Henry. 
theui  is  lined  for  nearly  a  league  off  with  rocks  and  islets,  of  which  several  scores  might 
be  counted  in  the  space  of  a  square  mile ;  but  they  seem  to  be  of  bold  approach,  and  no 
dangers  probably  exist  that  are  not  above  water,  or  are  not  shown  by  kelp. 

Bound  to  Port  Henry,  a  vessel  should  keep  on  the  south  side  of  the  gulf,  for  the  north- 
ern part  is  strewed  with  many  rocks,  and  seemed  to  be  exceedingly  dangerous.  The 
aoaudings,  also,  are  very  irregular,  and  the  bottom  is  foul  and  rocky. 

The  entrance  of  Port  Henry  will  be  easily  distinguished  by  its  sandy  beach,  since  it  is 
the  first  that  is  observed  on  the  south  shore  on  entering  the  gulf.  It  is  a  small,  light  col- 
ored beach,  with  a  lowish  sandy  cliff  at  the  back,  and  a  round  rocky  and  wooded^mount 
at  its  western  end.  The  Seal  Rocks,  also  in  the  offing,  are  a  good  mark.  They  bear 
N.  12°  E.,  5  miles  from  the  west  point  of  the  entrance,  which  is  about  a  mile  wide.  The 
channel  is  bounded  on  each  side  by  low  rocks,  lying  off  highish  r  mnd  rocky  islets,  that 
may  be  approached  within  one  and  a  half  cable's  length.  The  soundings  are  from  20  to 
26  fathoms,  ou  a  sandy  bottom.  Afterwards  they  decrease  pretty  gradually  to  the  anchor- 
age, which  is  in  9  and  10  fathoms. 

When  the  sandy  beach  bears  S.  19°  E.,  mag.,  the  fair  way  of  the  entrance  will  be  quite 
opsD;  and  a  vessel  may  stand  in,  keeping  the  round  mount  at  the  western  end  of  the 
sandy  beach  on  tho  larboard  bow,  until  nearly  abreast  of  it.  .She  may  then  proceed  up 
the  harbor  as  high  as  convenient,  and  select  her  berth:  for  the  ground  is  quite  clear  of 
danger  to  the  lino  of  rock-weed  which  skirts  the  shores  and  islets.     The  depth  of  water  -^ 

isbetween  12  and  8  fathoms,  and  the  buttom  generally  of  sand  and  mud. 

In  turning  in  U.ere  are  bome  patches  of  kelp  on  each  side,  growing  upon  rocks  that 
wash  at  high  water,  which  must  be  avoided.    Their  positions  are  given  in  the  plan. 

As  the  squalls  off  the  high  land  are  sometimes  very  strong,  it  will  be  advisable  for  a  ship 
to  anchor  as  soon  us  possible,  and  warp  up  to  her  berth,  which,  from  the  smoothness  of 
the  water,  may  be  easily  ert'ected.  Any  security  may  be  obtained  in  this  harbor.  The 
plan  will  show  that  the  basin  at  the  bottom  of  the  harbor  is  a  complete  wet  dock.  Wood 
and  water  at  the  sandy  beach  are  in  abundance. 

It  is  high  water  at  full  and  change  within  a  few  minutes  of  noon,  and  rises  5  feet.  The    High  waUr. 
stream  of  the  tide,  however,  is  very  inconsiderable,  and  never  exceeded  half  a  mile  an 
hour.    The  observations  for  latitude  and  longitude,  dec,  were  made  on  a  rock  at  the  west- 
ern side  of  the  port,  marked  A,  in  the  plan.    The  lat  is  60°  00'  18",  long.  75°  15'  11". 
Variation  of  the  compass,  20°  50'. 

THE  GULF  OF  TRINIDAD  separates  Welhngton  Island  from  Madre  de  Dios. 
It  is  nearly  10  leagues  long,  and  from  4  to  8  miles  wide.  Its  south  shore  or  north  coast 
uf  Madre  de  Dios,  is  very  much  broken,  and,  probably,  contains  many  ports.  None  of 
them  were  visited  excepting  for  night  anchorages.  Under  the  east  side  of  Division  Island 
is  Port  de  la  Morro,  which,  with  Point  Candelaria  and  Port  Rosario,  are  inserted  from 
Sarniiento's  account. 

Ou  the  northern  shore  are  two  opening-like  channels.  The  westernmost  probably 
communicates  with  the  Fallos  Channel ;  the  other,  Sarniiento's  Brazo  de  Norte,  or  North 
Arm,  appeared  to  trend  under  the  base  of  the  range  of  mountains,  among  which  Cathe- 
dral Mount  is  a  conspicuous  object.  From  the  entrance  of  the  strait  this  mountain  re- 
sembles the  spire  and  roof  of  a  church,  and  is  visible  for  more  than  20  leagues.  Between 
die  two  openings  is  Neeshuiii  Bay,  in  wliich  the  Adelaide  found  a  secure  anchorage  in  11 
fathoms.    There  is  also  yood  iiiichoriige  for  a  small  vessel  in  Windward  Bay. 

The  gulf  meets  tho  Wide  Channel  at  its  junction  with  Conception  Strait,  where  the 
channel  is  coiitiactod  by  an  islund  to  the  width  of  one  mile  and  a  half.  There  are  seve- 
ral isles  and  rocks  in  tho  gulf,  of  which  the  most  remarkable  are  the  Seal  Rocks,  before 
mentioneH,  the  Van  Isles,  opposite  the  western  channel,  and  a  group  of  numerous  isl- 
uds  extending  for  a  league  to  the  southward  of  the  land  to  the  westward  of  Neeshan 


The  Gulf  of 
Trinidad 


-T^W 


61d 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 


Picton 
Opening. 


Cape  Dyer. 


BreaJcsea 
Iiland. 


High  water. 


Flinn  Sound 
Point  Bynoe. 


The  Guaia- 
neeo  Islands. 


Bundle 
Pats. 


Bay.  On  the  south  shore  are  also  severnJ  Isles,  but  thoy  nre  near  the  coast,  and  are  par- 
ticularized in  the  chnrt.  The  most  remnrUable  is  Middle  Island,  which,  with  the  reef 
off  its  S.  VV.  end,  is  well  described  by  Sarmiento. 

The  Island  of  Mount  Corso  is  separated  from  Cape  Brenton  by  Spartan  Passage.  For 
more  than  u  league  of  Cnpe  Primero  are  some  extensive  reefs;  indeed  the  whole  line 
of  the  west  coast  of  IVlodre  do  Dies  is  fronted  by  rocks,  someof  which  nre  2  leagues  from 
the  shore.  There  are  regular  soundings  in  the  entronce  of  the  gulf,  but  the  water  deep- 
ens immediately  after  passing  to  the  postward  of  Port  Henry. 

PICTON  OPENING  and  Dynoly  Bay  very  probably  insulate  tho  land  that  sepnrnteg 
them,  of  which  Cape  Montague  is  the  S.  W.  extreme.  There  are  some  rocks  8  or  10 
miles  olT  the  roast  to  the  southward  ;  but  between  Cape  Montague  and  Cape  Dyer  they 
are  more  numerous.  Severol  are  from  8  to  10  miles  off  the  shore.  Many  are  dry,  some 
are  awash,  and  others  show  only  by  the  breaking  of  the  sea.  The  coast  to  the  north  of 
Dynely  Bay  is  very  broken. 

CAPE  DYER  is  in  lat.  48°  5' 55",  long.  75°  34'35".  At  6  miles  S.  86°  W.  from  it 
is  a  rocky  islet,  called  by  Bulkely  and  Cummings  "The  Rock  of  Dundee,"  from  its sira- 
iliirity  "  to  that  island  in  the  West  Indies,  but  not  so  large.  It  heth  about  4  leagues*  from 
the  southernmost  point  of  land  out  at  sea." 

This  rock  is  a  good  mark  for  Port  Santa  Barbara,  from  the  entrance  ot  which  it  bears 
S.  64°  W..  (S.  W.,  mag..)  distant  9  miles. 

At  one  mile  to  the  north  of  the  rock,  the  depth  is  23  fathoms,  and  gradually  decreases 
on  approaching  Port  Santa  Barbara  ;  in  steering  for  which,  as  soon  as  Cape  Dyer  bears 
S.  by  conipiiss,  you  will  hn  close  to  some  rocks,  which  you  should  keep  on  yonr  larboard 
hand.  Abreast  of  this  rock,  one-eighth  of  a  mile  off,  the  depth  will  be  11  fathoms.  The 
channel  hero  is  one  mile  wide,  but  gradually  norrows  on  approaching  the  south-west  end 
of  Breaksea  Island  ;  and  ot  Wreck  Point,  the  west  head  of  the  port,  tho  width  is  about 
one-eighth  of  a  mdo.  There  are  severol  rocks  in  this  passage,  but  as  the  depth  is  from 
6  to  8  fiithoms,  the  anchor  inaj-  be  dropped  and  the  ship  warped  clear  of  them,  io  case  of 
being  becalmed  :  calms,  however,  nre  ot  rare  occurrence  here. 

BREAKSH\ISLAND,  more  than  two  miles  long,  fronts  the  port,  the  hearfs  of  which 
are  three-qnarters  of  a  mile  apart.  In  the  entronce  of  the  port  the  depth  is  34  and  4 
fathoms,  and  gradually  dccvcniies  to  24  fathoms,  but  ut  the  bottom  there  is  o  basin  with  6 
and  8  fathoms  in  it.  This  i.s  a  very  good  harbor,  ond  from  the  rare  opportunity  of  an- 
choring your  .ship  in  a  modnriito  depth,  is  easy  of  access.  It  is  also  readily  tnade  out  by 
its  vicinity  to  the  Dundee  Rock,  which  sorvci  to  point  out  its  position. 

The  west  head  of  tho  port  is  in  latitude  48°  2'  I.")",  and  longitude  75°  29'  45"  :  varia- 
tion 19°  10'.  High  water  takes  place,  utfull  and  change,  at  Oh.  28m.,  nnd  rises  three  to 
four  feet  (nenps.) 

To  the  N.  E.  of  Breaksea  Island  ore  mony  straggling  rocks.  The  Beagle  having  enter- 
ed the  port  by  the  we.stern  entrance,  left  it  by  threading  tho  rocks  to  the  eastward,  ia  doing 
which  she  had  not  less  than  0  fathoms. 

Between  tlio  island  and  the  nioutli  of  the  port,  the  depth  is  from  6  to  7  fathoms,  good 
ground,  which  renders  the  entrance  and  exit  very  cosy. 

FLINN  SOUND  is  a  deep  opening  to  the  postwar  I  of  the  port;  that  was  not  examined. 

POINT  BYNOE,  with  the  grou|)of  islands — Bynoe  Islands,  extending  for  two  miles 
off  it,  is  the  west  head  of  the  Folios  Channel,  which  wos  explored  for  30  miles  without 
offering  any  interesting  feolrire.  Mr.  Kirke.  who  examined  it,  describes  it  to  be  perfectly 
clear  of  rocks,  and  abounding  in  anchorages  for  small  vessels,  although  the  water  is  deep. 
'I'he  bottom  is  sapdy.  Its  general  width  is  one  and  a  half  to  two  miles.  The  western 
side  of  tho  mouth  'u  a  ridge  of  mountains;  tlio  eastern  side  is  much  lower,  and  very  bro- 
ken, nnd  formed  by  many  smiill  islands.  At  five  miles  within  it,  on  the  west  siJe,  is  our 
Lady's  Bay,  of  the  old  charts.  Fallos  Channel  probably  communicates  with  the  sea  by 
Dynely  Bay  and  Picton  Opening:  ond,  beyond  the  latter,  was  suppoijpd  to  coniniunicato 
with  tho  Oulf  of  Trinidod  by  '.'..f  channel  to  the  west  of  Neeshnm  Bay. 

THE  GUAIANECO  ISLANDS,  twenty  miles  in  extent,  are  composed  of  two  prin- 
cipal islands,  ond  many  siniilier  islets — the  westernmost  is  called  Byron  Island,  and  the 
easternmost  Wager  Island.  They  are  separated  by  Rundie  Pass,  called  in  Bulkey's  Nar- 
rative, tho  Lagoon  ;  on  the  west  side,  and  nt  the  north  end  of  it,  is  Speedwell  Bay. 

RUNDLE  PA.SS  is  only  a  i  of  a  mile  wide,  but  perfectly  clear  in  the  whole  extent 
of  its  channel,  excepting  the  northern  entrance  ;  where  it  is  guarded  by  many  detached 
rocks,  which  render  the  entrance  to  Speedwell  Bay  rather  difficult.f     According  to 


*  There  must  be  a  mintnke  liore :  it  flhoiilil  probiibly  have  been  four  milps. 

t  Machado,  the  pilot  whofxplored  this"  cooMt  in  the  "year  1769,  liy  order  of  the  Governor  of  CliiIoe,DoD 
Carlos  de  Keronpcr,  describes  these  islands  at  some  length,  but  with  ii  little  r  jnfiisinn  of  bearings.  The 
north  end  ofKundle  Pass,  he  culls  the  west  end,  and  the  south  outlet,  the  eastern.  Byron's  Inland,  be 
describes  as  being  the  ■outhern  islund.  I  tl  ink  his  Port  Uuilenas  must  be  on  liie  south  side  of  Wager 
Island,  for  he  describes  it  to  be  opposite  to  Cape  Koinan ;  therefore,  Port  Eustaquio  should  be  ondie  noith 
coast,  probably  in  the  strait  within  San  Pedro  Island. 


Byron's  an 
end  of  the 
Bulkely. 
is  also  very 
Tho  Gu 
but,  io  son 
and  a  half, 
however,  il 
The  nori 
Mesier  Ch( 

TARN 
the  coast,  b 
Skyring  the 
however,  tl: 
and,  but  it  ii 
agers,  San  I 
inviting.     T 
priests,  in  tl 
and  to  be  to 
and  opposite 
The  Chan 
from  Machai 
is  only  3  rail 
then  to  divid 
miles  south, 
running  betv 
neither  coves 
no  seals  nor  t 
CAPE  Mi 
opening.     Tv 
scribes,  as  he 
a  league.     Tl 
trance,  and  or 
chors  down. 
Excepting 
Captain  Stoke 
says,  "  were  i 
cally  violent, 
islets,  upon  wl 
driven,  if  the  ^ 
Between  CI 
usual.    In  lat. 
was  an  anpera 
JESUIT  S 
terminates  in 
high  mountain 
cier.    The  lat 
one  part  of  it  if 
is  a  large  islan 
still  more  so  b} 
Separated  b 
Byron's  Narral 
and  thickly  wo 
are  noticed  and 
Bay. 

The  former 
fathoms  at  eigl 
beach,  backed 
four  or  five  mil 
backed  by  inou 
straight-stemim 
wooded  with  st 
prevents  boats 
.  IQNACIO 
lined  by  reefs  e 
„  KELLY  H 
Psoas,  in  the  I 
trends  inwards  i 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


618 


■  which 


finter- 


(iminecl. 
two  miles 

without 
perfectly 

is  deep. 

western 
very  bro- 

e,  is  our 

ihe  sea  by 

municato 

■  two  prin- 
and  the 


key's 


Nat- 


•Cliiloe,Doii 
irings.  Tin 
'a  Inland,  he 
(le  of  Wager 
i  on  the  north 


Tarn  Bay. 


Byron'e  and  Bulkelv'a  Narrntives,  the  situation  of  the  wreck  of  the  Waeer  is  near  the  west 
endof  the  north  side  of  Wager  Island.  Harvey  Bay  and  Good  Harbor  are  mentioned  by 
Bulkely.  Off  the  western  end  of  Byron  Island  are  some  rocky  islets ;  and  iu  north  coast 
is  also  very  much  strewed  with  them,  even  to  n  consideriible  distance  from  the  shore 

The  Gunianeco  Islands  are  separated  from  the  land  of  Wellington  Island  by  a  clear 
but.  in  some  parts,  narrow  passage.  At  its  S.  W.  end  it  is  contracted  by  rocks  to  a  mile 
snd  a  half,  and  at  the  south  end  of  Byron  Island  is  scarcely  a  mile  broad  :  afterwards 
however,  it  widens  to  two  and  a  Imlf  and  three  miles.  ' 

The  north  point  of  Wellington  Island  is  Cape  San  Roman.  It  is  the  west  head  of  the 
JHesier  Channel. 

TARN  BAY  is  about  five  leagues  wide.  The  Ayautau  Islands  are  four  miles  from 
the  coflst,  but  the  interval  is  occupied  by  several  rocky  reefs,  between  which  Lieutenant 
Skyring  thought  there  seemed  to  be  a  sufficiently  clear  passajre.  The  pilot  Machado 
however,  thought  differently.  The  latter  describes  a  small  boat-haven  on  the  larger  isl- 
and, but  it  is  among  rocks.  Opposite  to  Ayautau  is  a  port,  called  by  the  missionary  voy- 
agers,  San  Policarpo,  which,  from  its  exposure  to  the  westward,  I  should  not  think  very 
inviting.  The  ports  of  Tianitau  and  Asauritaun  are  also  mentioned  by  the  missionary 
priests,  in  their  journals.  The  former  is  described  to  have  many  islands  in  its  entrance, 
and  to  be  to  the  northward  of  San  Policarpo ;  and  the  latter  to  be  to  the  south  of  Tianitau! 
and  opposite  to  Ayautau. 

The  Channel's  mouth  of  the  old  chart  is  laid  down,  as  well  as  all  this  part  of  the  coast, 
from  Machado's  account,  who  describes  the  opening,  and  gives  it  latitude  47°  25',  which 
is  only  3  miles  in  error.  We  found  it  to  extend  in  a  S.  E.  direction  for  eleven  miles,  and 
then  to  divide  into  two  arms,  one  trending  15  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  the  other  eleven 
miles  south,  where  they  terminate.  They  are  merely  deep  and  narrow  arms  of  the  sea. 
running  between  steep-sided  ranges  of  mountains.  The  shores  are  rocky,  and  afford 
neither  coves  nor  bighte,  nor  even  shelter  for  a  boat,  and  are  perfectly  unproductive;  for 
no  seals  nor  birds  were  seen,  and  the  shores  were  destitute  even  of  shell  fish. 

CAPE  MACHADO,  in  lat.  47°  27'  35",  long.  74°  26'  10",  is  the  north  head  of  this 
opening.  Two  miles  off  it  are  two  rocks,  which  the  pilot  carefully  and  correctly  de- 
scribes, as  he  also  does  the  rocks  and  breakers  which  extend  off  the  south  head  for  nearly 
a  league.  The  Beagle  twice  occupied  an  anchorage  under  the  Hazard  Isles,  in  the  en- 
trance, and  on  both  occasions  was  detained  many  days  from  bad  weather,  with  three  an- 
chors down. 

Excepting  this  very  bad  and  exposed  anchorage,  there  exists  none  in  the  channel — 
Captain  Stokes  describes  it  to  be  an  extremely  perilous  anchorage.  "The  anchors,"  he 
says,  "  were  in  23  fathoms,  on  n  bad  bottom,  sand  and  coral.  The  squalls  were  terrifi- 
cally violent.  Astern,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable's  length,  were  rocks,  and  low  rocky 
islets,  upon  which  a  furious  surf  raged,  and  on  which  the  ship  must  have  been  inevitably 
driven,  if  the  anchors,  of  which  three  were  down,  had  started." 

Between  Channel's  Mouth  and  Jesuit  Sound,  the  coast  is  more  unbroken  and  low  than 
asual.  In  lat.  47°  17'  are  some  roefs  which  project  two  miles  to  sea ;  behind  them  there 
was  an  anperance  of  a  bight,  which  may  afford  anchorage. 

JESUIT  SOUND,  like  Channel's  Mouth,  is  quite  unfit  to  be  entered  by  any  ship.  It  Jetuit  Sound 
terminates  in  two  inlets,  Benito  and  Julian.     The  former  is  bounded  on  either  side  by 
high  mountains,  and  terminates  in  low  land,  with  a  rivulet  that  originates  in  a  large  gla- 
The  latter  ends  in  high  mountainous  land,  with  streams  of  water  between  the  hills; 


Cape  Ma- 
chado* 


cier. 


one  part  of  it  is  cliffy ;  and  it  has,  on  the  S.  W.  side,  a  long  sandy  beach.  In  its  entrance 
is  a  large  island,  making  the  passages  on  each  side  very  narrow,  and  they  are  rendered 
still  more  so  by  rocks  and  islets. 

Separated  by  Cheap  Channel  from  the  main  is  Xavier  Island,  the  Montrose  Island  of 
Byron's  Narrative.  It  is  eleven  miles  and  a  half  long,  and  four  wide,  and  is  very  high 
and  thickly  wooded  with  lofty  trees.  The  only  two  anchorages  which  the  island  affords 
are  noticed  and  named  by  Machado,  the  northern  one.  Port  Xavier,  the  southern  Ignacio 
Bay. 

"The  former  is  by  much  the  better  place,  being  secure  from  prevailing  winds,  with  17 
fathoms  at  eight  hundred  yards  from  the  shore.  The  south  end  of  the  bay  is  a  sandy 
beach,  backed  by  tall  beech  trees.  The  shore  to  the  south  of  Xavier  Bay,  for  the  first 
four  or  five  miles,  consists  of  a  high,  steep  clay  cliff,  with  a  narrow  stony  beach  at  its  base, 
backed  by  mountains  of  twelve  or  fourteen  hundred  feet  high,  and  covered  by  large  and 
straight-stemmed  trees.  The  remainder  of  the  coast,  to  Ignacio  Bay,  is  low,  and  slightly 
wooded  with  stunted  trees ;  and  its  whole  extent  is  lashed  with  a  furious  surf,  that  totally 
prevents  boats  from  landing. 

IGNACIO  BAY  affords  anchorage  in  9  fathoms.  The  western  coast  of  the  island  is 
lined  by  reefs  extending  two  miles  off,  upon  which  the  sea  breaks  high. 

KELLY  HARBOR  is  situated  at  th-  bottom  of  the  north-east  corner  of  the  Gulf  of 
Penas,  in  the  bay  formed  between  the  land  of  St.  Estevan  Gulf  and  Xavier  Island.  It 
trends  inwards  in  an  easterly  direction  for  eight  miles.    The  land  about  the  harbor  is  high, 


Ignacio 
Bay. 

Kelly  Har- 
bor. 


•uwiii<    iiiwiij«q 


I  J      I   lUfipgil 


^ 


614 


St.  Eitevan 
Oulf. 


Grttjano 
liland. 


River  San 
Tadeo. 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

rugged  and  rocky,  but  by  no  menns  destitute  of  verdure.  In  the  interior  tre  lofty  peoikcd 
andcrngged  rungosof  snciw-covured  mountains.  The  points  of  the  entrnncog  are  two  miles 
asunder,  and  are  tliicldy  woodfd,  nnd  low,  compnred  with  the  adjacent  land;  their  msc. 
oetic  bearing,  is  N.  48"  E.  nnd  S.  48°  W.  Hetween  thfm  is  a  channel  of  fiom  35  to  40 
fathoms  deep,  over  a  mud  hottoni,  without  danger,  to  a  cable's  iengtii  of  the  rucliy  ig|ets 
that  fringe  tho  shore  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile  off.  On  approaching  the  harbor  the  remork- 
able  muddied  appearnnceof  tlie  water  is  rather  startling:  bnt  tho  discoloration  proceeds 
only  fl'om  the  Ircshness  of  the  river,  and  the  streams  produced  from  a  vory  extensive 

5 lacier  that  occupies  many  miles  of  the  country  to  the  north.  The  plan  will  show  the 
epth  of  water.  The  course  in  is  K.  S  E.  by  compass,  until  in  a  line  between  tlie  inner 
north  point,  and  an  inlet  on  the  south  shore  that  is  fronted  by  five  or  six  woudt^d  islets. 
Then  haul  up  along  the  larboard  side  of  the  harbor,  as  close  to  tho  shore  and  ns  tiiraj 
vou  please  to  an  anchorage.  The  best  berth  is  when  the  two  points  of  entrance  are  locked 
tn  with  each  other,  nnd  within  a  cable  and  a  half  of  the  sandy  spit  that  extends  otf  the 
western  end  of  a  high  and  chirkly  wooded  island.  The  ground  is  excellent,  and  bo  te- 
nacious, that  it  was  with  difficulty  that  the  Beagle  lifted  her  anchors.  Shelter,  wood  and 
water,  however,  are  the  only  advantages  oflered  by  the  harbor.  Environed  by  lofty 
mountains,  some  fourteen  and  eighteen  hundred  feet  high,  and  ice  filled  valleys  nnd  ra- 
vines— it  is  chill,  damp  and  dreary.  A  few  birds,  and  a  small  number  of  hair  seals,  were 
the  only  living  animals  seen  by  us.     Nut  a  trace  of  human  beings  was  observed.  vj 

For  knowing  Kelly  Harbor  the  glacier  is  a  capit^il  leading-mark.  It  is  a  large  field  of 
ice,  lying  on  the  low  part  of  the  coast,  about  2  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  harbor.  The 
water  at  the  anchorage,  at  half  tide,  was  perfectly  fresh,  but  was  too  muddied  to  be  fit  for 
immediate  use.  When  in  the  fair  way  of  the  harbor,  the  Sugar-loaf  in  Hollowny  Sound, 
will  be  seen  just  on  with  the  end  of  the  land,  to  the  north  of  I'urcell  Island,  bearing  W. 
1°  N.  by  compass.  The  latitude  of  the  north  point  of  the  harbor  is  46°  5!)',  and  the  long. 
74°  5'  30";  the  variation  about  20°.  The  mountain  on  the  south  shore,  3i  miles  east 
southerly  from  the  north  point,  is  1,540  feet  liigh. 

ST.  KSTEV AN  GULF.— The  entrance  of  this  gulf,  which  is  situated  9  miles  north 
of  the  N.  E.  end  of  Xavier  Island,  is  4  miles  wide.  The  land  on  the  western  side.  Fore- 
lius  Peninsula,  is  a  narrow  tongue  of  land  nearly  5  leagues  long.  The  eastern  side  of  the 
gulf  is  a  long  sandy  bencii,  curving  round  to  the  N.  W.  towards  the  entrance  of  the  River 
San  Tadeo,  between  which  and  Cirujnna  Island,  forming  the  south,  (or  rather  the  west,) 
point  of  entrance,  the  width  is  less  than  b  miles  ;  nnd  at  a  league  farther  to  the  westward, 
it  is  not  more  than  3i  miles  across.  Here,  in  the  centre,  there  is  a  small  islet,  called  Dead 
Tree  Islar'. 

Beyond  this  is  St.  Quentin  Sound.  10  miles  deep;  and,  at  its  N.  W.  corner,  Alduoate 
Inlet  extends  in  for  about  8  miles.  St.  Quentin's  Sound  terminates  in  continuou°  low 
land,  with  patches  of  sandy  beach,  over  which,  among  other  lofty  mountains,  the  Dome 
of  St.  Paul's  is  seen.  The  shores  are  t  liickly  wooded  with  shapely  and  well  grown  trees; 
the  land  near  the  beach,  for  the  most  part,  is  low,  rising  into  mountainous  peaks;  a  little 
distance  in  the  interior  of  which,  some  are  1,500  feet  high,  but  they  are  not  craggy. 

St.  Estevan  Gulf  is  one  of  the  best  harbors  of  the  coast,  being  easy  of  access,  aiidwith 
moderate  depth  of  water  all  over;  with  good  holding  ground,  and  a  clean  l)ottom.  The 
best  ancborngo  is  at  about  2  miles  above  Dead  Tree  Island,  in  from  4  to  G  fathoms,  sandy 
bottom.  This  will  be  at  2  miles  from  either  shore,  but  the  berth  is  perfectly  land-locked; 
and,  if  necessary,  anchorage  may  be  taken  up  much  nearer  to  it. 

CIRUJANO  ISLAND,  above  mentioned,  is  that  on  which  the  surgeon  of  tlie  Wa- 
ger was  buried.*  The  missionary  priests  describe  a  port  on  the  isiiuul,  calli'd  Sun  To- 
mas.  The  island  is  separated  from  the  extremity  of  Forelius  Penint-ula  by  a  strait,  one 
mile  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide. 

The  mouth  of  the  RIVER  SAN  TADEO,  is  easily  distinguislu' 1  on  entering  the 
gulf,  by  the  sand-hills  on  each  side  of  its  entrance,  and  the  bearing  of  tho  vwA  trend  of 
Cirujano  Island  S.  W.  i  S.  (by  compass,  S.  by  W.  %  W.)  A  sandy  beach  extends  tothe 
east  and  west  of  it  for  many  miles ;  the  land  is  low  and  marshy,  and  covered  with  stumps 
of  dead  trees.  It  has  a  bar  entrance,  much  of  which  must  be  nearly  dry  at  spring  tides. 
A  heavy  swell  breaks  upon  it  for  its  whole  length,  so  that  no  opening  or  swatch-way  is 
left,  and  excepting  in  very  fine  weather,  it  is  very  hazardous  to  cross.  At  the  mouth  tiie 
breadth  is  not  more  than  a  quai  ter  of  a  mile :  but,  within  the  entrance  it  opens  ton  basin 
of  some  extent ;  and  at  three  miles  up  it  is  300  yards  wide,  after  which  it  gradually  nar- 
rows. Nine  miles  from  the  entrance,  the  stream  is  divided  into  two  amis;  the  Northern 
or  black  River,  takes  a  northerly,  and  the  other  the  easterly  direction.     The  former  is  a 


*  Of  this  circurastiince  I  was  inrormed  by  Pedro  Onorio,  an  old  soldier,  whom  I  anw  at  Cliiloe,  wlio 
formed  one  of  the  parly  of  tlic  misHiooiir;^  royagers.  I  a,«ked  him  why  it  was  culled  El  Cirujiino,to 
which  he  replied :  "  Po'rque  ttlli  inurioel  cirujuno  del  VViiger."  (Hccause  the  Surgeon  of  the  VVugerdied 
there.)  Pedro  Osorio  knew  IJyron's  party  well,  ulthuugh  it  was  ilB  ycara  since  tiiey  visited  the  island.— 
Bee  aUo  Byron's  Narrative,  p.  147. 


mm 


I  ■-•  •  I  If" 


mn 


^p^^vppm 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 


616 


jtrong  Bnd  rapid  stronm,  quite  uninflueiico.l  by  tiJo.  which,  however,  extends  for  a  Bhort 
distance  up  the  eastern  nrm  ;  after  whinli,  the  current  down  becotnea  oraduiilly  ns  (tionff 
iMinthH  Bhick  River.  The  banks  of  the  latter  are  coinpntatively  borren  to  those  of  the 
Blacii  River,  wliere  the  wood  is  very  thick.  The  courses  of  both  arms  are  very  tortuous 
and  the  bed  of  the  river  set  choked  witli  trunks  and  branches  of  trees,  rs  >o  prevent  its 
complete  exploration,  as  well  as  the  detection  of  the  Desocho,  the  place  where  the  In- 
dians carry  their  canoes  across  the  Isthmus  of  Ofqui. 
PURCELL  ISLAND  is  separated  from  the  land  of  Forelius  Peninsula,  by  n  eood    Purcell  M 

channel.  2  mdea wide ;  it  is  moderately  high,  and  thickly  wooded,  and  i u\  (i  miles  in  cir-    anU 

cuit.  About  mid-chnnnel,  ond  nearly  abreast  of  the  enst  end  of  the  iblmi'l,  is  a  rock  only 
a  few  feet  above  the  water.  The  channel  to  the  south  of  ihe  rock,  is  from  18  to  22  fn- 
thoms  deep,  and  the  bottom  snndy. 

Upon  the  peninsula,  opposite  to  the  west  end  of  Purcell  Tslnnd,  is  nn  isthuius  of  low 
sandy  land,  scarcely  a  mile  wide;  the  one  over  which.  1  think  it  iniiy  be  iiiferrcd  from 
the  narrative,  thut  the  cniioeo  in  whidi  Byron  and  hin  i:onipimions  were  embarked,  were 
carried.  One  day's  journey,  by  land,  to  the  west  of  this  isthmus,  Bvion  licscribes  a  river, 
up  which  the  Indian  jiuides  attempted  to  take  the  Wager's  barge.  This  river,  if  it  exists 
probably  falls  into  Bad  Bay.  '  ' 

The  Beoj;le  anchored  in  BAD  BAY  after  dark,  in  8  <alhoms.  siindy  bottom,  and  left   Bad  Bay. 
it  at  9  o'clock  the  following  morning.      Of  this  place.  Captain  Stokes  remniks:— "At 
daylight  we  found   that  we   had  anchored  at  a  sinnll  buy  about  hiilf  ii  mile  olf  a  shingle  ' 

beach,  on  which,  as  well  as  on  every  part  of  the  slioie,  n  furious  surf  raced,  that  eflfectu- 
ally  prevented  our  landing  to  get  chronometer  sights.  The  mouth  of  tli>-  bsiy  is  N.  30° 
E.,  magnetic,  9  leagues  from  Cape  Ties  Monies,  which,  in  clear  weai,.tir.  may  be  seen 
from  its  mouth.  Like  all  this  shore  of  the  gulf,  it  is  completely  open  to  the  S.  W.,  and 
a  heavy  rolling  sea.  About  9  A.  M.  we  left  it,  smd  proceededto  trace  the  coast  to  the 
south-east. 

To  the  westward,  between  Bad  Boy  andthe  land  of  Cnpe  Tres  Montes.  is  on  extensive 
bight,  16  miles  wide  and  about  12  deep.  The  centre  is  occupied  by  n  group  of  islands, 
called  Marine  Islands,*  upon  which  the  sugnr-loaf,  a  mountain  1840  feet  high,  is  very 
conspicuous;  it  was  seen  from  the  Wager  the  day  before  her  wreck.  Upon  the  main,  5| 
miles  N.  15°  E.,  from  the  Sugar-loaf,  is  another  equally  remarkable  mountain,  colled  the 
Dome  of  St.  Paul's,  2284  feel  high."  * 

NEUiMAN  INLET,  at  the  N.  E.  corner  of  this  gulf,  extends  for  17  miles  into  the  Neuman  In, 
land,  where  it  lerminntes  ;  but  it  is  of  no  use,  as  the  water  is  too  deep  fnr  onchonigo.  It  Ut. 
is  the  resort  of  large  numbers  of  hair  soul.  At  the  north  west  corner  is  Hoppner  Sound, 
nbotit  5  miles  in  extent.  At  its  south-west  end  is  a  deep  inlel,  extending  7  miles  to  the 
S.  W.,ond  reoching  to  within  2  miles  of  the  sea  coast,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  nn 
isthmus  of  low  and  thickly  wooded  land.  Capfnin  Stokes  walked  across  it  to  the  sea- 
bench,  from  whence  he  saw  Cape  Rapcr.  The  Beagle  nnchorod  at  the  bottom  of  Hopp- 
ner Sound,  off  the  mouth  of  the  inlet.  The  mouth  of  the  sound  is  very  much  blocked 
up  by  the  Marine  Islands  ;  but  the  southern  chonnel,  although  narrow,  has  plenty  of  wa- 
ter. On  the  south-west  side  of  the  Marine  Islands  is  Holloway  Sound,  in  which  is  Port 
Otway,  an  inlet  extending  for  5  miles  into  the  land,  in  a  S.  W.  direction. 

The  entrance  to  PORT  OTWAY  is  on  the  west  side  of  Holloway  Sound,  about  14  Port  Otway. 
or  15  miles  distont  from  Cape  Tres  Montes,  and  moy  be  rcodily  known  by  its  being  the 
first  opening  after  passing  the  cape.  Off  the  mouth  are  the  Entniiice  Isles,  among  which 
is  the  Logan  Rock,  having  a  strong  resembluiice  to  the  celebrated  rock  whose  name  it  bears. 
It  is  broad  and  flat  at  the  top,  and  decreases  to  its  base,  which  is  very  small,  and  connected 
to  the  rock  on  which  it  seems  to  rest.  Immediately  within  the  entrance  on  the  west 
shore,  is  a  sandy  lioach,  over  which  a  rivulet  discharges  itself  into  the  bay.  Here  anchor- 
age n  ay  be  had  in  9  or  10  fathoms.  It  is  by  far  the  most  convenient  one  the  port  adbrds. 
The  plan  will  show  the  particulars  of  the  iidet,  which  contains  anchorage  nil  over  it,  but 
thedcipth  is  generolly  inconveniently  great,  from  20  to  30  fathoms. 

CAl'K  TRES   MONTE.S  is  a  bold  and   remarkable  headland,  rising  from  the  sea  to    Cape  Tret 
the  height  of  2000  feet.     It  lies  in   lot.  46°  58'  57",   and  long.  75°  27'  30",  and  is  the  Montes. 
south  extremity  of  the  Peninsula  of  Tres  Montes. 

To  the  northward  of  it  is  Cape  Roper,  in  lot.  4l^°  48'  25".    Rocks  and  breakers  extend 
off  it  for  ,'ialf  a  league  to  seaward. 
POINT  MITFORD  RE  ES,  the  northernmost  land  seen  by  the  Beogle,  is  in  lat.  46°  43'.    Point  Mit- 
Or  THK  WiND  AND  WKATHKR. — The  climate  of  the  coast  of  Western  Patagonia,  de-  Jord  Rett, 
scribed  in  this  section,  is  cold,  damp,  und  tempestuous.     The  reigning  wind  isN.  W.;  but  if 
it  blows  hard  from  that  quarter,  the  wind  is  very  liable  to  shift  suddenly  round  tothe  west- 
ward, and  blow  a  heavy  gale,  which  raises  a  mountainous  cross  sen.     These  westerly 


*  It  was  here  timt  4  Marines  voluntarily  remained  on  shore  Juiing  Byron's  perilous  boat  voyage,  after 
he  wreck  of  the  Wager.    Byron's  Niirralive,  p.  85. 


eio 


BLUNTS  AAIEUICAN   (JUAST  PILOT. 


gales  do  not  genenilly  Inst  long,  but  veer  round  to  the  soulliwnrd,  when  the  weather  if 
the  bnrometcr  risea,  will  probubly  cleiir  ii|i.  Should  llu-y,  howBver,  back  round  to  the 
N.  W.  ii^ain,  nnd  the  Imroiiii'tcr  k«»'p  low,  or  oHtilliile,  tlio  wonlliur  will,  doubtleaa  b« 
worae.  Eiistorly  winds  urn  of  rino  occui  ri'ticH  ;  they  mo  iircoui|miiied  with  fino  clear 
woHther;  but  westerly  wiiida  brin^  with  tlitMii  ii  coiihtuiit  fall  of  ruin,  mid  ii  quick  Buccei< 
eiun  of  hiird  k(|Uh1U  of  wind  :iiid  hull. 

Should  II  vcasel  bo  nonr  tho  const  duriiif?  oiio  of  lho»o  iioithorly  j-iilrs,  it  would  be  ad. 
vianblo  for  hur  to  ninku  iiii  offing  iia  quickly  iiii  poxHiblo,  to  KUiird  iigtiiiiHt  the  sudden  ghift 
to  the  wpstwiird  thiit  isulinofit  icrliiin  to  cimuo.     Tho  ''    ' 


ho  dimovi'iy.  howover.  of  the  luichor- 
,iiy,  iind  St.Quciitin'a  Sound,  has verv 


ngos  of  Port  Henry,  Fort  Siiiitii  Unrbani.  Port  Otwi.j,  imu  ^».  vj,.,  inm  b  ouunu,  nasverv 
much  reduced  tho  (Lingers  of  tho  lee  shore  ;  nnd  a  iefii;<o  in  tiither  of  them  will  iilwavi 
be  prefuriiblu  to  inissiiig  ii  ni^ht  on  this  const  in  a  K"'*'  of  wind. 

Tho  bnroinoter  fulls  with  northerly  and  westerly  winds,  but  rises  with  soulherly.  Itj, 
at  its  minimum  hoi;;ht  with  N.  W.  winds,  and  at  its  iniiKimum  when  tho  wind  is  S.  F 
The  teniperaturo  is  raioly  so  low  as  4(1  decrees,  excepiiii};  in  the  winter  months,  ^j 
Port  Otway,  in  tho^ulf  of  ronas,  thu  maximum  and  minimum  fur  I!)  days,  in  the  inuDih 
of  Juno,  wero  51°  nnd  -JTi". 
Tides.  Of  tho  tipks. — Hinh  water,  nt  most  pails  of  this  coast,  takes  place  within  hiilf  nnliour 

on  either  side  of  noon.  Tho  stream  is  inconsiderable,  and  tho  rise  and  fall  rarely  mure 
thnii  (>  feet. 

'1  he  variation  of  the  compass,  nt  the  western  ontranco  of  the  strait,  is  233°:  m  Poft 
Henry,  21°;  at  Port  Santa  liailiuin,  1!)°;  Xuvier  Island.  v.'0°;  and  at  Port  Otway,  aoi". 

Of  the  Intaior  Sounds  and  Channch  bclwrm  the  Strait  of  Ma  galhauia  and  the  Gulf  of 

Tlie  western  coast,  between  the  Strait  of  Masiilhaep^i  and  the  (Inlfof  Penns,  is  fornied 
by  a  succession  of  islaml  *  of  coiisiderablo  i-xteiit,  the  larjiest  of  which,  W'tdlington  Island 
occupies  a  len<:tii  of  const  of  I.^B  miles.  It  Is  scpaiiited  from  themain  by  the  Mesierand 
Wiiio  Channels;  and  from  Rladro  do  Dins  by  tho  (Jiilf  of  Trinidud.  Madie  de  Dios 
which  is  probably  compo.-ied  of  sevoial  islands,  lias,  for  its  inner  or  eastern  boundary,  the 
Conception  Si  rait. 
Hanover  hi-  HANOVKll  ISLAND  h:is  the  Sarniiento  ainl  Estevan  rhannols  on  its  eaBternside 
and.  and  on  the  south  is  separated  Irom  (^ueeii  Adeliiido  ArchipeIaj;o  by  Lord  Nelson  Strait, 

wh'ch  communicates  by  Smyth  Channel  with  the  Strait  of  Mii^alhiiens. 
Smyth  Chan-       SMYTH  CHANNEL  commences  in  tho  strait  at  Beaufort  IJay,  on  the  eiisternBide 
nel.  of  Capo  l^liillip,  N.  78°  E..  5i  miles  lidiii  which  are  tho   Eiiiiway  Isles;  and  at  a  little 

more  than  (>  miles  fioiii  the  ca|)e,  on  tho  west  slioi(>,  is  the  anchorage  of  Deep  Harbor 
the  entrance  of  wiiich  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide.  The  anchorage  is  about  half  a  mile 
within  tho  head,  ofl'tl.i  entrance  of  a  liif^oon,  in  from  30  to  35  fathoms.  North  aadaoutb 
of  tho  port  are  inlots,  inch  one  mile  deej).  In  enteiinj^,  there  is  a  patch  of  kelp  go  the 
starboard  hand,  and  thf,  shore  is  fronted  fiir  a  short  distance  oil'  by  rocks. 
Good's  Bay.  (iOOD'S  HAY,  the  next  anchorage,  is  better  than  the  last,  the  depth  being  from  20  to 
■.'5  fathoms.  It  is  convenient  for  vessels  going  to  the  northwiird,  but  wlien  Iraund  in  the 
opposite  direction.  North  Anclioraso  will  bo  better,  from  tho  depth  being  less;  but  it  is 
small,  and  the  entrance  is  more  fronted  by  rocks  than  Good's  Hay.  It  is  not  intended  to 
anchor  in  eitluM'of  the  above  places.  The  widest  and  best  channel  is  to  the  eastward  of 
Middle  Island.     'J'lieie  is  a  plan  id"  these  anchorages. 

Off  the  N.  K.  point  of  Shoal  Island  is  a  rocky  patch,  upon  which  the  Adelaide  struck. 
Tho  channel  for  ihi^  next  4  miles  is  rather  intricate  ;  but  all  the  dangers  are  pointed  out. 

Opposito  to  Capi'  r'olwoith  is  CJlai  perton  Inlet,  beyond  which  is  a  considerable  tract  of 
low  country,  u  raie  sight  in  these  regions.  Two  miles  farther,  on  the  eastern  side,  is 
Hose  Harbor,  suitable  t\>y  a  small  vessel;  and  on  the  opposite  shoio  is  Retreat  Bay, 
fronted  by  low  rocky  islet.x.     The  depth  within  is  2i  fathoms. 

Onwards  the  channel  is  clear,  as  far  as  Oako  Bay,  where  the  de|)th  is  !)  fathoms,  but 
the  unchonigo  is  better  iiinoiig  tho  Otter  Islands,  tho  dejith  being  6  nnd  7  fathoms,  and  the 
ground  clean. 

The  channel,  for  tiie  next  8  miles,  becomes  more  strewed  with  islands  nnd  rocks,  and 
has  much  slioal  water  oil' every  low  point.  The  const,  also,  is  very  low  on  the  eastern 
shore,  as  far  as  tho  base  of  Mount  Burney,  which  is  5800  foot  hij^ii,  and  covered  with 
perpetual  snow. 

Tho  best  channel  is  on  the  east  sido  of  the  Otter  Islands,  and  between  the  Summer 

Isles  and  Lonj;  Island,  fur  which  tho  chart  and  u  good  lookout  for  kcl|)  will  bo  sufficient 

guides. 

Fortune  Bay.      EORTT'NE  BAY  is  at  the  south-east  extremity  of,  apparently,  an  island  intlieen- 

truuco  of      deep  chunnol,  which  is,  probably,  oue  that  Mr.  Cutler,  tho  Muster  of  an 


mwrni^mK^ifl 


617 


Jin  the  en- 
Ltor  of  an 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

AmerlcBO  lealing  veiiPl.  pnssfcd  thvough,*  upon  the  ■up|)o»itbn  of  itii  lendine  throueh 
the  land,  ond  insuliitinR  th«  western  shoiw  of  Smyth  Channel,  to  the  norlh  of  Point  Pol- 
mer.  The  latter  is  diBtinguiahed  by  the  nnine  of  llennel  Islund.  Fortune  Hny  \»  n  very 
couvenient  iind  good  Qnchornpe.  the  -leplh  being  modnnite  nnd  bottom  goo.!.  The  best 
berth  i«  within  Low  Isliind,  ui  Ironi  8  to  l'.>  fathomg.  At  the  bottom  of  the  b.»y  in  a  thick- 
ly wooded  vtilley,  with  ii  Iresli  wiiter  streiim.  ' 

A  leugue  to  the  north  of  Point  P"lm«M-,  on  the  oppoeite  shore,  \h  Isthmus  Bny.  iilTord- 
ing excellent  anchornge,  but  open  t^S.W.,  which  here  is  not  of  much  monu-nt.  for  the 
channel  is  only  two  miles  wide.  The  bottom  of  Islhmus  Bny  is  firmed  by  ii  very  niurfir 
(trip  of  liind  sepiiniting  it  from  whtit  I  hiive  no  doubt  is  Siirmiento's  ()riici(>n  Buy  Five 
miles  north  of  Poitit  Palmer  is  Welcome  Buy,  bIho  ntfording  nn  excellent  place  to  anchor 

■"■" ■".     A  plan  was  made  of  it. 

,        ,  „    ,  ,'*'"  ';l'""n«l.  nnd  otf  Inlet  Bay,  on  the  opposite    Sandy  Bay. 

shore,  there  are  good  anchorages.  Both  have  a  moderate  depth,  and  are  shi'ltert'd  from 
the  I 


in  with  moderate  depth  and  good  bottom. 
In  SANDY  BAY,  on  the  east  side  of 
[lore,  there  are  good  anchorages.     Both  1 
le  prevailing  winds,  which  generally  are  north-westerly. 

In  Int.  62°  1'  is  Victory  Passage,  senaraiing  Zach  I'eninsula  from  Hunter  Island  and 
communicating  with  Union  feound,  which  lends  to  the  Ancon  Sin  Salida  of  Sarmienio. 
On  the  west  side  of  Hunter  Island  is  Island  Bay,  with  good  anchorage  both  to  the  uoith 
and  south  of  the  islets.     The  Adelaide  anchored  in  the  latter  in  17  fathoms. 

At  the  south  extremity  of  Piazzi  Island  is  Hamper  Bay,  with  anchorage  in  from  7  to 
15  fathoms.  Hero  the  channel  widens  to  three  miles  and  a  half;  but  at  two  leagues  far- 
ther on,  near  Ceres  Island,  under  the  S.  E.  end  of  which  the  A^'elaide  anchored  in  10 
fathoms,  it  narrows  to  two  milog.  Rocky  Cove  is  not  to  be  recommended,  and  Narrow 
Creek  seems  confined. 

Hence  to  the  mouth  of  the  channel,  which  again  widens  here  to  5  miles,  anil  in  wliich, 
during  strong  north-west  winds,  the  sea  runs  heavy,  we  know  of  no  ancho.ipe;  but  a 
amall  vessel  in  want  will  doubtless  find  many,  by  sending  her  bout  in  search,  i  he  Ade- 
laide anchored  among  the  Diana  Islands,  and  in  Montague  Bay,  having  piiHsod  through 
Heywood  Passage.  The  northern  I'oint  of  Piazzi  Island  is  Sariniento's  West  Point, 
(Punta  del  Oeste,)  and  a  league  to  the  south  is  his  Punta  de  Mas-nl-Oeste,  or  I'c  nt-niore- 
West.  Lieutenant  Skyiing  concludes  the  journal  of  his  survey  of  Smy  ih  Channel  with 
the  following  remarks : 

"So  generally,  indeed,  do  the  northerly  winds  prevail,  that  it  would  be  troublesome 
even  for  a  working  vessel  to  make  a  passage  to  the  northward;  but  it  is  a  safe  channel 
for  Bmall  craft  at  any  time.  The  tides  are  regular  :  the  rise  and  fall  at  the  southern  en-  Tide: 
trance  is  8  and  9  feet,  but  at  the  northern  only  5  and  6.  I'he  flood  tide  always  sets  to  the 
northward,  and  the  strength  of  the  stream  is  from  hiilf  to  one  mile  and  a  half  an  hour; 
BO  that  a  vessel  is  not  so  likely  to  be  detained  here  for  any  length  of  time,  as  she  would  bo 
in  the  Strait  of  Magalhaeiis,  where  there  is  little  or  no  assistance  felt  from  westerly  tides. 
The  channel  besides  is  comparatively  free  from  sea,  and  the  winds  are  not  so  tempeatu- 
ous."— [Skyring'sMS.] 

As  the  sounds  witliin  Smyth  channel  will  never  be  used  for  any  purpose  of  navijj' ition, 
little  need  bo  said  in  a  work  destined  solely  for  tlie  use  of  chipping  frequenting  the  coast. 
The  chart  will  bo  sufficient  to  refer  to  for  every  purpose  of  curiosity  or  inforn.uuon. 
They  possess  many  ancliorages  for  small  vessels,  affording  bolh  shelter  and  security. 

Sanniento  on  his  third  boat  voyage  to  discover  a  passage  through  the  land  into  the 
Straitof  Mogalhaens,  gives  a  detailed  and  very  interesting  account  of  his  proceedings. 
All  his  descriptions  are  so  good,  tliat  wo  had  no  liesilation  in  assigning  positions  to  those 
places  he  mentiouB,  to  all  of  which  his  names  have  been  appended.  Capo  Ano-nuevo 
cannot  be  mistaken,  and  the  description  of  liis  Ancon  Sin  Salidii  is  perfect.  Ho  ^nys 
"the  Morro  of  Ano-nuevo  trends  round  to  the  S.  E.  and  S.  S.  E.  for  a  league,  to  the  first 
water  ravine  that  descends  from  tlie  summit.  In  an  east  direction  from  this,  appears  a 
large  mouth  of  a  channel,  about  two  leagues  off.  We  went  to  it  and  found  it  to  be  a  bay 
without  a  thorouglifare,  forming  a  cove  to  the  north,  about  a  league  deep  ;  so  that  finding 
ourselves  embayed,  we  returned  to  the  entrance,  which  we  had  previously  reached  with 
great  labor  and  fatigue.  This  bight  has  lour  islets.  The  bay,  from  the  islets  to  the  west- 
ward, has  a  sandy  beach,  backed  by  u  low  country  for  more  than  a  league  and  a  half  to 
the  Morro  of  Ano-nouvo." 

The  anchorages  that  were  used  by  the  Adelaide  upon  the  examination  of  the  interior   Anchorages. 
sounds,  were  as  follows : 

LEEWARD  BAY,  exposed,  and  being  upon  the  leeward  shore,  is  not  to  be  reconi-  Leeward 
mended.  Bay. 

WHALE  BOAT  BAY,  about  one  mile  to  the  east  of  Grey  Cape.  Whale  Bjat 

Bay. 


•  We  met  this  intelligent  person  two  or  three  clilTerpnt  tiinea  whilst  employed  upon  the  survey,  nnd  re- 
ceived much  vuluiilile,  and  wiiut  ul'terwurds  proved  to  be  correct,  inturmutiua  t'roiu  hiui,  which  f  am  here 
muchgrulifiej  to  have  au  opportunity  of  acknowledgiag.— [!'.  I'.  K.J 


IP 


VUPPiPIMp 


''^■^■iiii 


618 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


Fog  Bay. 
Easter  Bay. 


Worsley  Bay 
and  Sound. 
Last  Hope 
Met. 


Duappoinl- 
ment  Bay. 


Obstruction 
Sound. 


Sarmienio 
Channel. 


Relief  Har- 
bor. 


San  Estcvan 
Channel. 


Peel  Met. 


High  water. 


Conception 
Strait. 


A  smnll  cove  on  the  north  shore  of  Kirke  Narrows,  about  a  mile  to  the  eastnr  n 
Retford.  '  '^"P* 

FOG  BAY.  two  miles  nnd  a  half  to  the  north  of  the  east  end  of  Kirke  Narrows 

EASTER  BA V,  n  convenient  anchorage  within  White  Narrows. 

The  Canal  of  the  Mountains,  nearly  40  miles  long,  is  bounded  on  each  side  hv  fl 
high  snow-capppfl  Cordillera,  the  western  side  being  by  very  much  the  higher  Innd  b'h 
having  u  glacier  -j'.  20  miles  in  extent,  running  parallel  with  the  canal.     Eighteen  mil 
from  Cape  Earnest,  where  the  canal  commences,  the  channel  is  contracted  to  the  width 
of  about  half  a  mile  ;  otherwise  its  width  is  from  one  to  two  miles. 

WORSLEY  BAY  AND  t^OUND  extend  15  miles  into  the  land. 

LAST  HOPE  INLET  is  40  milej  in  length.  Its  mouth  is  3i  miles  wide,  but  at  8 
miles  the  breadth  is  contracted  by  islands  to  less  than  a  mile,  I'lie  channel  beii)<r  5  to  14 
fathoms  deep.     Beyond  this  narrow  the  Hound  trends  to  the  W.  N.  W. 

These  islets  were  covered  with  black-necked  swans,  and  the  sound  generally  istvell 
stocked  with  birds. 

DISAPPOINTMENT  BAY.— The  land  at  the  bottom  is  very  low,  and  thickly co- 
vered  with  stunted  wood.  .Mr.  Kirke  traced  its  shores  and  found  them  to  be  formed  bv 
a  flat  stony  l)each,  and  the  water  so  shallow  that  the  boat  could  seldom  approach  it  within 
a  quarter  >)f  a  mile.  A  considerable  body  of  water  was  noticed  by  him  over  the  low  Innd 
probalily  a  larger  lagoon,  for  it  communicates  with  the  bay  by  a  rapid  stream  50  ynrds 
wide.  No  high  land  was  seen  in  an  easterly  direction  ;  so  that  the  country  between  Dis- 
appointment  Bay  and  the  eastern  coast  may  probably  bo  a  continued  pampu,  or  plaiu  jju 
the  const  of  eastern  Patagonia. 

OBSTRUCTION  SOUND  extends  for  thirty  miles  in  a  south  by  east  direction, and 
then  for  fifteen  more  to  the  W.  S.  W.,  where  it  terminates.  It  is  separated  from  the 
bottom  of  Skyring  Water  by  a  riilge  of  hills,  perhaps  twelve  miles  across.  Some  water 
was  seen  from  a  height,  about  6  miles  off,  in  the  intervening  space,  but  the  shores  were  so 
carefully  traced  that  Lieutenant  Skyring,  who  examined  it,  feels  satisfied  that  no  com- 
munication exists.  This  question,  however,  will  probably  be  set  at  rest  by  Captain  Fitz- 
roy.  during  his  intended  voyage. 

A  large  plan  was  made  of  these  sound"  to  which  a  reference  will  give  every  desired 
informiition. 

SAR.MIENTO  CHANNEL,  communicating  between  the  east  side  of  Pinzzi  Island 
and  Staines  Peninsula,  continues  to  the  northward  of  the  mouth  of  Peel  Inlet,  where  it 
joins  the  San  Estevan  Channel,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the  Islands  of  Vancouver 
and  Esperanza.    Between  these  is  a  passage  nearly  a  league  wide,  but  strewed  with  islands. 

RELIEF  HARBOR,  at  the  south  end  of  Vancouver  Islimd,  is  11  convenient  anchor- 
age; but  the  best  hereabouts  is  Puerto  Biierio,  first  noticed  by  Sarmiento.  It  affords  ex- 
cellent anchorage  and  a  moderate  depth  of  water,  the  latter  of  very  unusual  occurrence. 
A  small  rove  round  the  north  point,  cidled  Schooner  Cove,  is  well  adapted  for  a  small  ves- 
sel, and  may  be  used  in  |)reference  oven  to  Puerto  Bueno. 

In  v^AN  ESTEVAN  CHANNEL.  Escape  Bay,  although  small,  is  convenient  and 
well  slifltered.  Opposite  the  south  end  of  Esperanza  Island  is  the  deep  opening  of 
Ellen  Bay,  which  may  i)n)bably  bo  a  cliannel  passing  through  and  dividing  Hanover  Isl- 
and. 'J'o  the  north  the  anchordgesof  Pvejoice  Harbor  and  Anchor  R-'y  are  commodions 
and  useful. 

PKEL  INLP'T  extends  in  for  7  leagues,  communicating  with  Piit  Channel,  and  in- 
sulating Chatham  Island,  which  is  separated  from  the  N.  end  of  Hanover  Island  by  a  con- 
tinuation of  the  Sarmiento  and  San  Kstevan  Cliannels.  of  which  the  principiil  fe'atmeis 
the  (tuia  Narrows.*  'Phese  narrows  are  fJ  miles  long,  and  excepting  the  nurlh  end, 
where  it  is  only  one-fifth  of  a  mile  wide,  are  from  half  to  one  mile  broad.  The  tides  here 
are  not  very  rapid.  High  water  at  full  and  change  takes  place  at  'Jli.  8ni.,  the  flood  run- 
ning to  the  southward.  At  the  south  i^itranco  of  .San  Estevan  Channel,  tlie  reverse  is  | 
the  case,  of  which,  for  vessels  |)assing  tlirough.  some  advantage  may  be  taken. 

The  north-west  coast  of  Chatham  Island  has  many  bights  and  coves  fronted  by  islands, 
among  which  is  (iuartl  Bay,  where  the  Adelaide  anchored;   but  the  coiist  is  too  exposed  I 
to  the  sea  and  prevailing  winds,  to  offer  much  convenient  or  even  secure  shelter. 

The  north-west  points  of  Hanover  and  Chatham  Islands  are  more  than  ten  miles  apart,  j 
nnd  midway  between  them  is  situated  Sarmiento's  Innocent's  Island  (Isia  de  lus  Igno- 
centes.) 

CONCEPTION  STRAIT  separates  Madre  de  Dies  nnd  its  island  to  the  soutliwani  I 
from  the  nniin  land.     It  commenc<'H  at  ('ape  .Santiago,  in  lat.  50j°,  nnd  joins  the  Wide 
Channel,  or  Brazo  Ancho  of  Sarmiento  in  50°  5'.     On  the  west  r<ide  (the  eiistern  coast 
of  Madre  do  Dies)  are  several  convenient  anchorages,  particularly  Walk<!r  Buy,  a  bay  to 


•  .'^o  colled  after  Snrinii'nfo's  linnt.     It  wna  by  this  rniitn  Im  piiggod  down  to  the  oxaminnlionnfhii  | 
Ancon  Ssia  Saliilii.     He  di'.Jirilio.s  it  us  u  niirrow,  3U0  paces  wiilu. 


i^pp 


'^"■^mUPPIPiPi 


^ii 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT 

the  north  of  Point  Michael,  nnd  Tom  Bay,  all  of  which  being  on  the  wenther  shore,  af- 
ford  secure  anchornge  ;  but  the  squalls  off  the  high  land  are  not  less  felt  than  in  other 

•""sT.  ANDREW  SOUND  is  four  lenguos  wide ;  but  the  mouth  is  much  occupied  by 
the  Canning  [sles,  upon  the  northernmost  of  which,  at  the  south-west  end,  is  Portland 
Bay,  a  goo^  anchorage  tor  r.  small  vessel,  in  9  fathoms.  The  principal  enlrnnce  of  St. 
Andrew  Sound  is  to  the  nortii  of  Chatham  Island.  It  is  5  miles  wide,  and  at  6  Icaaues 
within,  divides  into  two  arms  ;  the  northern  one  is  5  or  6  leagues  long,  nnd  terminates  : 
but  the  southern  channel,  which  is  Pitt  Channel,  trending  behind  Chatham  Island  com- 
municates, OS  before  mentioned,  with  Peel  Inlet.  ' 

The  anchorage  of  Expectation  Bay,  5  leagues  within  the  sound,  at  the  east  extremity 
of  the  Kentish  Isles,  was  used  by  the  Adelaide  in  her  examination  of  these  inlets 

At  POINT  BRAZO  ANCHO  tlie  Gulf  of  Trinidad  commences,  and  the  Con'ception 
Strait  terminotes;  lor  its  continuation  to  the  north-east  bears  the  name  of  Wide  Channel 
which  is  40  miles  long,  nnd  from  13  to  3i  miles  broad.  ' 

AtSAUMAREZ  ISLAND  it  joins  the  Mesier  Channel,  and  to  the  N.  E.  communi- 
cates with  Sir  George  Eyre  Sound,  which  is  40  miles  long,  and  with  an  average  breadth 
of  4  mileb.  Near  tlie  entrance  on  the  east  side  was  found  a  large  rookery  of  seals  and 
another,  13  miles  further  up,  on  the  same  side,  in  lat.  48°  21'.  "  ' 

The  southern  end  of  the  Mesier  Channel,  for  nearly  10  leagues,  is  named  Indian 
Reach.  It  is  narrow,  and  has  many  islets,  but  the  water  is  deep.  Then  follows  English 
Narrows,  12  miles  long,  and  from  half  to  one  mile  and  a  quarter  wide  ;  but  many  parts 
are  contracted  by  islands  to  400  yards.  The  passage  lies  on  the  west  side  of  the  chan- 
nel, to  the  westward  of  all  the  islands. 

From  the  north  end  of  the  narrows  to  the  outlet  of  the  Mesier,  at  Tarn  Bay,  in  the 
Gulf  of  Penos,  a  distance  of  75  miles,  the  channel  is  quite  open  and  free  from  all  impedi- 
ment. 

THE  ANCHORAGES  in  the  Wide  nnd  Mesier  Channels,  are  more  numerous  than 
we  have  any  account  of.  Those  occupied  by  the  Adelaide  in  her  course  through,  are  as 
follows,  viz : 

FATAL  BAY,  in  lat.  47°  55'  on  the  western  shore,  at  the  north  entrance  of  the  chan- 
nel, insulating  Millar  Island.     This  bay  is  open  and  exposed. 

ISLAND  HARBOR,  on  the  east  shore,  in  lat.  48"  fi'  3",  is  a  small  but  excellent  land- 
locked anchorage,  with  good  holding  ground.  Wood  and  water  close  at  hand,  and  abun- 
dance of  fish. 

WATERFALL  BAY,  in  lat.  48°  17' ;  nt  the  entrance  of  an  inlet  on  the  east  side  of 
the  channel. 

At  this  part  cf  the  Mesier  Channel  the  tides  are  regular,  nnd  run  G  hours  each  way, 
the  flood  setting  N.  by  W. 

WHITE  KELP  COVE,  on  tlio  north  side  of  Lion  Bay,  about  one  mile  within  the 
head,  is  confined,  and  only  fit  for  small  vessels. 

HALT  BAY,  on  the  east  shore,  at  the  north  end  of  tlie  English  Narrows,  in  hit.  48° 
54'.    Here  the  flood  sets  to  thoS.  S.  E.,  and  tlio  tide  being  confined  by  the  narrow  width 
of  the  channel,  runs  with  considerable  strength. 
LEVEL  BAY,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  at  the  south  end  of  the  narrows, 

is  in  lat.  49°  7'  30". 
ROCKT  BIGHT,  opposite  the  north-east  point  of  Snumaiez  Island,  in  from  17  to  12 

fathoms. 
FURY  COVE,  near  Red  Capo,  the  extremity  of  Exmoulh  Promontory.     It  is  very 

confined,  there  not  being  room  for  more  than  two  small  vessels  ;  but  the  ground  is  good, 

and  although  open  to  the  S.  W.,  it  is  a  secure  haven. 
SANDY  BAY  on  the  west  shore  of  Wide  Channel,  in  lat.  49°  45' 30". 
SMALL  CRAFT  UIGH'I',  also  on  the  west  shore,  near  the  south  end  of  the  Wide 

Channel,  is  of  small  size,  but  answers  every  purpose  of  a  stopping-place  lor  the  night. 
OPEN  BAY,  on  the  east  shore,  opposite   the  Gulf  of  Trinidad.     The  anchorage  is 

iheltered  by  two  islands  •  but  it  is  too  exposed  to  trust  a  vessel  in,  and  therefore  not  to  be 

recommended. 
Besides  the  above  ancliornges,  there  are  many  equally  convenient,  and,  perhaps,  much 

better,  that  may  be  occupied  by  vessels  navigating  these  channels.     Every  bight  offers 

an  anchornge.  and  almost  any  may  be  entered  with  safety.     On  all  occasions  the  weather 

ihore  should  be  preferred,  and  a  shelving  coast  is  generally  fronted  by  shonler  soundings, 

and  more  likely  to  offord  moderate  dojith  of  water  than  the  steep-sided  coast ;  for  in  the 

great  depth  of  water  alone  consists  the  difficulty  of  navigating  these  channels. 
I    Throughout  the  whole  space  between  the  Strait  of  Magnliiaens  and  the  Gulf  of  Penas, 

there  is  abundance  of  wood  and  water,  fish,  shell  fish,  celery,  and  birds. 


619 


St.  Andrew 
Sound. 


Point  Brazo 
Ancho. 

Saumarez 
Idand. 


The  Anchor' 
ages. 

Fatal  Bay. 

Island  Har- 
bor. 

Waterfall 
Bay. 


White  Kelp 
Cove. 
Halt  Bay. 


Level  Bay. 

liocky 
Bight. 
Fury  Cove. 


Sandy  Bay. 
Small  Craft 
Bight. 
Open  Bay. 


I 


mmnT'mf 


^PIWipSP^IiPlftWIWIf.'i'MliillP" 


'Wi-  "•'IPP-'^W^Pill 


620  ,       BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST  PILOT. 

RemarJcs  ujwn  the  Passage  round  Cape  Horn,  and  to  and  from  the  Atlantic  and  PaeUie 
Oceans,  through  the  Strait  of  Magalhaens.  ^'^ 

Ships  bound  from  tlm  Atlantic  to  any  of  the  porta  in  the  Pacific,  will  find  it  adyanta- 
geoua  to  keep  within  100  miles  of  the  coast  of  Eastern  Patagonia,  as  well  as  to  avoid  tha 
heavy  sea  that  is  raised  by  the  westerly  gales  which  prevail  to  the  eastward,  and  increase 
in  strength  according  to  the  distance  from  the  land,  as  to  profit  by  the  variableness  of  the 
wind  wlien  fixed  in  the  western  board.  Near  the  coast,  from  April  to  September,  when 
the  sun  has  north  declination,  the  winds  prevail  more  from  the  W.  N.  W.  to  N.  N.  W 
than  from  any  other  quarter.  Easterly  gales  are  of  very  rare  occurrence,  but  even  when 
they  do  blow,  the  direction  being  obliquely  upon  the  coast,  I  do  not  consider  it  at  all  haz- 
ardous to  keep  the  land  on  board.  In  the  opposite  season,  when  the  sun  has  south  de- 
clination,  the  winds  will  incline  from  the  southward  of  west,  and  frequently  blow  hard- 
but  u^  the  coast  is  a  weather  shore,  the  sea  goes  down  immediately  after  the  gale.  In 
this  season,  although  the  winds  are  generally  against  a  ship's  making  quick  proj;resg  vet 
as  they  seldom  remain  fixed  in  one  point,  and  frequently  shift  backward  and  forward  6 
or  8  points  in  as  many  hours,  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  change  so  as  to  keep  close 
in  with  the  coast. 

Having  once  made  the  land,  which  should  be  done  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Blanco 
it  will  be  beneficial  to  keep  it  topping  on  the  horizon,  until  the  entrance  of  the  Strait  of 
Macalhaens  be  passed. 

With  respect  to  tliis  part  of  the  voyage,  whether  to  pass  through  the  Strait  le  Maire 
or  round  Staten  Island,  much  diflerence  of  opinion  exists.     Prudence,  I  think,  suggests 
the  latter ;  yet  I  should  very  reluctantly  give  up  the  opportunity  that  might  offer  of  clear- 
•  ing  the  strait,  and  therefore  of  being  so  much  more  to  windward.     With  a  southerly 

wind,  it  would  not  be  advisable  to  attempt  the  strait ;  for,  with  a  weather  tide,  the  sea 
runs  very  cross  and  deep,  and  might  severely  injure  and  endanger  the  safety  of  a  small 
vessel,  and  to  a  large  one  do  much  damage.  In  calm  weather  it  would  be  still  more  im- 
prudent, (unless  the  western  side  of  the  strait  can  be  reached,  where  a  ship  might  an- 
chor,) on  account  of  the  tide  setting  over  the  Staten  Island  side,  where,  if  ic  becomes 
necessary  to  anchor,  it  would  necessarily  be  in  very  deep  water,  and  close  to  the  land. 
With  a  northerly  wind  the  route  seems  not  only  practicable,  but  very  advantageous,  and 
it  would  require  some  resolution  to  give  up  the  opportunity  so  invitingly  offered.  1  doubt 
whether  northerly  winds,  unless  thej  .ire  very  strong,  blow  through  the  strait — if  not,  a 
ship  is  drifted  ovtir  to  the  eastern  shores,  where,  from  the  force  of  the  tides,  she  must  be 
quite  unmanageable. 

Captain  Fii/.roy,  whose  nnthority,  from  his  experience,  must  be  very  good,  seems  to 
think  there  is  neither  diflicult\  nor  risk  in  passing  the  strait.  The  only  danger  that  does 
exist,  and  that  may  bo  an  imaginary  one,  is  the  failure  of  the  wind.  Ships  passing 
through  it  from  the  south,  are  not  so  liable  to  the  failure  of  the  south-westerly  wind,  un- 
less it  bo  light,  and  then  it  will  probably  be  from  the  N.  W.  at  the  northern  end  of  the 
strait.  The  anchorage  in  Good  Success  Bay,  however,  is  admirably  situated,  should  the 
wind  or  tide  liiil. 

In  pnssing  to  leeward  of  Staten  Island,  the  tide  race,  which  extends  fur  some  distance 
ofl'  (Jape  St.  John,  at  the  N.  £.  end  of  the  island,  must  be  avoided,  otherwise  there  ex- 
ists no  dangers. 

The  anclionige  under  New-year's  Islands,  although  it  is  a  wild  one  and  the  bottom 
bad,  and  the  tide  very  strong,  yet  offers  good  shelter  from  south-west  winds,  and  might 
be  occupied  with  advantage  durmg  the  existence  of  a  gale  from  that  quarter,  since  it  is 
unfavorable  fur  ships  bound  round  the  Horn. 

After  passing  Staten  Island,  if  the  wind  be  westerly,  the  ship  should  be  kept  upon  the 
sttirboard  tack,  unless  it  veers  to  the  southward  of  S.  S.  W.,  until  she  reaches  the  lati- 
tude of  G()°  south,  and  then  upon  that  tack  upon  which  most  westing  may  be  mnde.  In 
this  parallel,  however,  the  wind  is  thought  to  prevail  more  from  the  eastward  than  from 
any  other  quarter.  Never  having  passed  round  Cape  Horn  in  the  summer  season, Iraay 
not  perhaps  bo  justified  in  opposing  my  opinion  to  that  of  others;  who,  having  tried  both 
seasons,  give  the  preference  to  the  summer  months.  The  advantage  of  long  days  is  cer- 
tainly very  grs-at,  but  from  my  experience  of  the  winds  and  weather  during  these  oppo- 
site seasons  at  port  Famine,  I  preferred  the  winter  passage  ;  and  in  our  subsequent  expe- 
rience of  it,  found  no  reason  to  alter  my  opinion.  Easterly  and  tiortherly  winds  prevail 
in  the  winter  off  the  cape,  whilst  southerly  and  westerly  winds  are  constant  during  the 
summer  months;  and  not  only  are  the  winds  more  favorable  iu  the  winter,  but  they  art 
moderate  in  comparison  to  the  fury  of  the  summer  gales. 

Having  passed  the  meridian  of  Cupe  Pillar,  it  will  yet  be  advisable  to  take  every  oppor- 
tunity of  making  westing  in  preference  to  northing,  until  reaching  the  meridinn  of  82°  or 
84°.  which  will  enable  a  ship  to  steer  through  the  north-westerly  winds  timt  prevail  be- 
tween the  parallels  of  50^  and  54°.     (See  Hall's  South  America,  Appendix,) 

With  respect  to  tlie  utility  of  the  Barometer  as  un  indicator  of  the  weather  that  is  ei- 


BLUNT'S   AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

perienced  off  Cnpe  Horn,  I  do  not  think  it  can  be  considered  so  unfailing  n  guide  ns  it  is 
in  the  lower  or  middle  latitudes.  Captain  Fitzroy,  however,  has  a  better  opinion  of  thj 
iodicationsshownby  this  valuable  instrument;  my  opinion  is,  that  although  the  rise  or 
(iili  precedes  the  change,  yet  it  more  frequently  accompanies  it.  The  followin-r  sketch 
of  the  movement  of  the  barometer,  and  of  the  weather  that  we  experienced,  may  not  be 
without  ita  use. 

Being  to  the  north  of  Staten  Island  for  3  days  preceding  full  moon,  which  occurred 
on  the  3d  of  April,  1829,  vve  had  very  foggy  weather,  with  light  winds  from  the  eastward 
and  northward,  causing  a  fall  of  the  mercury  from  21)90  to  L>9-56.     On  the  dav  of  full 
nioon  the  column  rose,  and  we  had  a  beautiful  morning,  during  -.vhich  tlio  high  moun- 
tains of  Saten  Island  were  quite  unclouded,  as  were  also  those  of  Tierra  del  Fuego.     At 
noon,  however,  a  fresh  gale  from  the  S.  W.  set  in.  and  enveloped  tiie  liind  with  a  dense 
mist.    No  sooner  had  thewmd  changed,  than  the  mercury  rose  to  29!)5.  but  fell  a>'iiin 
the  next  morning ;  and  with  the  descent  the  wind  veered  round  to.  and  blew  Ptron-' from 
JJ.  W.,  with  thick  cloudy  weather  and  rain,  which  continued  until  the  following''nof)n, 
when  the  wind  veered  to  S.  W.,  the  barometer  at  29-54,  having  slightly  risen ;  but  after 
the  change  it  fell,  and  continued  to  descend  gradually  until  midnight,  when  W3  had  afresh 
rale  from  the  W.  S.  W.     When  this  wind  set  in,  the  merciiry  rose,  and  continued  to 
rise,  88  the  wind   veered,  without  decreasing  in  strength,  to  S.  S.  W.,  until  it  reached 
29-95,  when  it  fell  again,  and  the  weather  modernted,  but  without  any  change  of  wind. 
During  the  descent  of  the  mercury,  the  sky  with  ns  was  dull  and  overcast,  with  squalls 
of  wind  and  rain,  but  on  shore  it  seemed  to  be  very  fine  sunshiny  weather. 

The  column  now  fell  to  29-23,  and  during  its  descent  the  weather  remained  the  same, 
dull  and  showery  ;  but  as  soon  as  the  mercury  became  stationary,  a  fresh  breeze  set  in 
from  the  southward,  with  fine  weather. 

After  this  to  new  moon,  the  weather  was  very  unsettled,  the  wind  veering  between  S. 
and  W.  S.  W.,  the  barometer  rising  ns  it  veered  to  the  former,  and  fidling  as  it  became 
more  westerly ;  but  on  no  occasion  did  it  precede  the  change. 
The  mean  height  of  the  barometer  is  ai)out  29-5. 
The  mercury  stands  lowest  with  N.  W.  winds,  and  highest  with  S.  E. 
With  the  wind  at  N.  W.,  or  northerly,  the  mercury  is  low;  if  it  falls  to  29  inches,  or 
28-80,  a  S.  W.  gale  may  be  expected,  but  does  not  commence  until  the  column  has  ceased 
to  descend.     It  frequently,  however,  fulls  without  being  followed  i)y  this  chiinge.     In  the 
month  of  June,  at  Port  Famine,  the  barometer  fell  to  28-17.  and  atierwanls  gradually  rose 
to  30-5,  which  was  followed  by  cold  weather,  in  which  the  thermometer  stood  at  l'i°. 

The  following  table  shows  the  mean  temperature  and  pressure  as  registered  at  the  Ob- 
servatory at  Port  Famine,  in  the  Strait. 


621 


ne  distance 
there  ex- 


nt  upon  the 
hes  the  lati- 
1  made.  In 
J  than  from 
lason.linay 
Ig  tried  both 
Idays  is  cet- 
■these  oppo- 
Ijuentexpe- 
Imds  prevail 
T  during  the 
lut  they  art 

Iverv  oppor- 

lin  of  82»  or 

prevail  be- 

■  that  is  ex- 


1828. 


'rcnipnratiiro.   Pressure. 


February,..  51  •! 

March '  49-4 

April '  41-2 

i 

May,., 35-5 

June 32-9 

July 33-0 

August 33-2 


29- 

40 

29- 

64 

29 

57 

29 

30 

29 

•28 

29 

■57 

29 

•23 

Of  the  Passage  to  and  from  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  Oceans,  by  the  Strait  of  Magal- 

haens. 

The  difficulties  that  present  themselves  to  navigators,  in  passing  round  Cape  Horn,  as 
well  from  adverse  winds  as  the  severe  gales  and  heavy  sea  that  they  are  exposed  to,  are  so 
greit,  that  the  Strait  of  Magnlhaens  has  naturally  been  looked  to  as  a  route  by  which 
they  may  be  avoided.  Hitherto  no  chart  has  existed  in  which  much  confidence  could 
be  placed;  but  by  the  present  survey,  the  navigai  ion  through  it  independent  of  wind 
and  weather,  has  been  rendered  much  easier ;  since  a  correct  delineation  of  its  shores, 
and  plans  of  the  anchorages,  have  been  made  ;  and  in  the  preceding  pages  sufficient  de- 
scriptions of  them  have  been  given  to  assure  the  navigator  of  his  phice,  and  furnish  him 
with  advice  as  to  his  proceediDgs.    The  local  difficulties,  therefore,  have  been  removed, 


R!     I 

1 


'il 


,■■»  '■j.»i»i  ^^"fimitm^mmm 


62«  BLUNT'S  AiMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

butthoro  remnin  much  more  serious  ones,  which  T  should  not  recommend  alargeoreven 
iiiiy  but  II  very  nctive  nnd  f.tst-sailing  squiire-rigged  vessel,  to  encounter,  unless  deten 
tion  be  not  an  object  of  importinice. 

For  a  square-rigged  vessel  buund  through  t'.ie  strait,  the  following  directions  willb 
useful: — 

In  the  ensternen  trnnco,  the  winds  will  frequently  favor  a  ship's  nrrivnl  off  the  First  Nar- 
row ;  where,  if  she  selects  ii  good  anchorngo  on  the  bank  whiclj  bounds  ihe  nortliern  sid " 
of  the  channel,  she  tuiiy  wait  an  opportunity  of  passing  through  the  First  Narrow,  and  of 
reaching  Gregory  Uay  ;  whore  also  ii  delay  may  safely  be  made,  for  the  purpose  of  niias- 
ing  the  Second  Narrow,  nnd  univing  iit  the  neighl)orhood  of  Cape  Negro  ;  at  which  \)\ael 
the  difficulties  and  dangers  of  the  eastern  entrance  cense. 

The  dangers  being  carefully  ]<laced  on  the  chart,  nnd  sufficiently  described  in  theure- 
ceding  part  of  this  intMUoir.  nothing  n(»eil  bo  repeated  here;  and  indeed  much  must  be 
left  to  the  judgment  nnd  discretion  of  the  navigator. 

The  passage  of  the  First  Narrow,  the  anchorage  to  the  eastward  of.  and  in  Grecoi-v 
Bay,  the  passage  of  the  Second  Narrow,  the  anchorage  to  the  north  of  Elizabeth  Island 
nnd  the  passage  round  its  south  side,  have  already  been  described.  ' 

Tides.  The  tides  answer  best  for  vessels  eiiterins  the  strait,  at  the  period  of  full  and  change  of 

the  moon,  since  there  are  two  westerly  tiilot  in  the  day.  In  the  winter  season,  if  tiie 
morning  tide  be  not  sufficient  to  carry  a  vessel  through  the  First  Narrow,  she  may  re- 
turn to  Possession  Bay,  select  an  anchorage,  and  be  secured  again  before  night:  or,  in  the 
summer,  if  she  has  passed  the  Narrow,  and  enal>led  to  nnchin-  for  the  tide,  there  will  be 
sufficient  daylight  for  her  to  proceed  with  the  folluwlna  tide  to  Gregory  Bay,  or  nt 
least  to  n  safe  anchorage  otf  the  peaked  hillocks,  on  the  north  shore. 

I  have  twice  ntteni|ited  to  pass  tiio  First  Narrow,  nnd  been  obliged  to  return  to  the 
nnchorage  in  Possession  Bay;  and  twice  I  havepasse'l  through  it  against  a  strotin  breeze 
blowing  directly  through,  by  aid  of  the  tide,  which  runs,  in  the  nari-.-„est  parts,  at  the 
rate  of  10  or  12  miles  an  hour.  When  the  tide  nnd  wind  are  o^  posed  to  each  other  the 
sea  is  very  deep  and  heavy,  anil  breaks  high  over  the  decks;  it  is,  therefore,  advisable  to 
close  reef,  or  lower  the  topsails  on  the  cap,  and  drift  through  ;  for  the  tide,  if  at  the  springs 
will  generally  be  sufficient  to  carry  a  ship  to  an  anchorages  although  not  always  to  oae 
that  it  would  be  safe  to  pass  the  night  at.  On  this  account  it  would  be  prudent  to  return- 
foralthouah  the  holding  ground  is  exceedingly  good,  yet  to  part  in  the  night,  or  drill  to- 
waids,  or  through  the  Narrow,  could  scarcely  happen  without  accident. 

In  leaving  the  anchorage  in  Gregory  Bay,  attention  must  bo  paid  to  the  tide,  which  con- 
tinues to  run  to  the  eastward  in  the  Second  Narrow,  3  hours  after  it  has  commenced  to 
set  to  the  S.  W.  at  the  anchorage. 

With  a  leading  wind  through  the  Second  Narrow,  a  ship  will  easily  reach  an  anchor- 
nge  olf  Laredo  Bay  ;  but  if  the  tide  fails  upon  emerging  from  it,  she  should  seek  for  a 
berth  in  the  bay  to  the  north  of  Flizabeth  Island,  as  near  to  the  island  as  possible,  but  to 
tho  west\vard  of  its  N.  K.end,  to  bo  out  of  the  influence  of  the  tide.  The  depth  of  water 
however,  will  be  the  i)esl  guide. 

Directions  to  pass  round  tho  south  side  of  ElizabetVi  Island  have  already  been  giveo; 
nnd  as  this  part  oilers  some  dangers,  the  chart  and  the  description  should  be  carefully  re- 
ferred to. 

The  only  advice  that  seems  wanting  to  improve  the  directions  of  the  const  from  thisto 
Port  Famine,  is,  with  a  south-westerly  wind,  to  keej)  close  to  the  weather  shore,  in  order 
to  benefit  by  the  flaws  dcwu  tlie  valleys;  but  this  must  be  done  witli  caution,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  sq\ialls  oil  the  high  land,  the  violence  of  which,  tea  [jersou  unaccustomed 
to  them,  cannot  be  well  imagined. 

The  fourth  section  gives  an  account  of  the  anchorages  between  Port  Fan)ino  nnd 
Cape  Froward,  of  which  the  only  couvenieni  one  for  a  ship  is  St.  Nicholas  Bay,  and  to 
which,  if  defeated  in  jjass^lng  round  the  cape,  a  sliiphad  better  return;  for  it  is  easy  to 
reach  as  well  as  to  leave,  and  extremely  convenient  to  sto|)  at,  to  wait  an  opportunity  of 
proceeding. 

From  Cape  Froward  to  tlio  westward,  unless  favorerl  by  a  fair  wind,  it  is  nocnssnryto 
persevere  and  take  advantaj;e  of  every  opportunity  of  advancing  step  by  step.  Thereiire 
several  anchorages  that  a  ship  may  take  up.  such  as  .Sung  Biy,  olf  Wood's  Bay,  near 
Cape  Coventry,  in  Fortesipie  Bay,  Eli/.alioth  Hi'y,  and  Vorke  Roads.  Tlu'so  are  befjre 
described.  To  tho  westWiird,  in  d'ooked  Keach,  tho  anchorages  are  not  so  good,  and  ex- 
cepting Borja  Bay,  none  seem  to  oiler  nmch  couvetiii'uce.  Borja  Biy,  however,  is  well 
calculated  to  supply  tho  de.'icicncty,  although  for  a  sijuare-rigged  vessel  there  must  be  some 
difficulty  in  reaching  it. 
L'jng  Reach.  LONG  KHACli  is  both  long  nnd  narrow,  and  ii!  supplied  with  anchorages  for  a  ship. 
.Such  as  tliey  are.  Swallow  ll.trbor,  Playa  I'arda,  Marian's  Cove,  and  Half  Port  Bay, 
seem  to  bo  the  b(^st.  Iti  thick  W(>ather,  although  tho  (diamnd  is  very  narrow,  yetonesiije 
is  si^arcety  visiblo  from  the  oilier,  and  tlie  oidy  advantage  it  has  over  other  parts  of  the 
strait  is  tho  smoothness  of  the  water.  In  Sea  lleacli  there  is  a  heavy  rolling  swell, witil 
a  short  and  deep  sea,  which  renders  it  very  difficult  to  beat  to  windward. 


Is  for  a  ship. 
llf  Port  Bay, 
1  yet  one  side 
Iparts  of  th« 
;  swell,  wilb 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN   COAST   PILOT.  gjj 

TAMAR  HARBOR,  Valentine  Hnrbor,  Tuesday  Cove,  nnd  the  Harbor  of  Mercy.    Tamar  Har- 

arethebestnnchoruges;  and   he  alter  .9  particularly  cunvouient  to  occupy  io  await  ,u    b^r 
opportunity  of  sailing  out  of  the  strait.  '■'        """ii  "u 

in  the  entrance  the  sea  runs  very  heavy  and  irregularly  during  and  after  a  gale;  so 
thot  a  ship  should  not  leave  her  anchorage  in  the  Harbor  of  Mercy,  without  a  fair  or  a 
lending  wind  to  get  her  quickly  through  it.  .r.  »      u.  a 

For  sraJl  vessels,  particularly  if  they  be  fore-and-nft  rigged,  many,  if  „ot  all  of  the  local 
diflicalties  vanish  ;  and  inlets  which  a  ship  dare  not  or  cannot  approach,  may  be  entered 
With  safety,  nnd  anchorage  easily  obtained  by  them.  A  large  ship  will  perhaps  be  better 
off  in  entering  and  leaving  the  strait  where  there  is  opmi  space,  and  fronueutlv  a  heavy 
jea;  but  for  the  navigation  of  the  strait,  a  small  vessel  Iwi  considerably  the  iidvuntaee 
She  has  olso  the  opportunity  of  passing  through  the  Cockburn  Channel,  should  the  wind" 
be  north-westerly,  which  will  very  much  reduce  the  length  of  the  passage  into  the  Pacific 

One  very  great  advantage  to  be  derived  from  the  passage  through  the  ^•lait  is  the  on' 
portUDity  of  obtaining  us  much  wood ond  water  as  can  be  lequiied,  without  the  least  dif- 
ficulty. Another  great  advantage  is,  that  by  hauling  the  seine  during  the  summer  months 
from  January  to  May,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  or  along  the  beaches  in  Port  Famine  at 
the  first  quarter  flood,  a  iilentilul  supply  of  fish  may  be  obtained.  Excellent  fish  are  also 
caught  at  the  anchoroge  with  the  hook  and  line,  at  all  seasons,  early  in  the  mornin!:  or 
late  in  the  evening.  Fish  may  also  be  obtained  with  the  seine  at  any  other  place  where 
there  are  rivers,  h  resh-wator  Bay  and  Port  Gallant  are  equally  productive.  On  the  outer 
coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego  an  excellent  fish  may  be  caught  in  the  kelp. 

Direclionsfor  passing  through  the  Ulrailof  Magalhaens,  from  the  Pacific  to  the  Atlantic. 

The  advantoge  which  a  ship  will  derive  from  passing  througli  the  strait,  from  the  Paci- 
fic to  the  Atlantic— for  there  must  be  some  great  one  to  induce  the  seaman  to  entangle 
bis  ship  vvith  the  land,  when  fair  winds  and  an  open  sea  are  before  him— is  very  great. 
After  passing  through  the  strait,  the  prevailing  winds  being  westerly,  and  more  frequently 
from  the  northward  than  from  the  southward  of  west,  they  are  fair  for  his  running  up  the 
coast;  or  if  not,  the  ship  is  not  liable  to  recBive  much  injury  from  the  sea,  whiclMs  com- 
paratively smooth ;  whereas,  to  a  ship  passing  round  the  Horn,  if  the  wind  be  N.  W., 
Blie  must  go  to  the  eastward  of  the  Falkland  Islands,  and  bo  exposed  to  strong  gales,  and 
aheavy  beam  sea,  and  hug  the  wind  to  make  hi^r  northing  To  a  small  vessel  the  advan- 
tage is  incalculable ;  for,  besides  filling  her  hold  with  wood  and  water,  she  is  enabled  to 
escape  the  severe  weather  that  so  constantly  reigns  in  the  higher  latitudes  of  the  South 
Atlantic  Ocean. 

Coming  from  the  northward,  it  will  be  advisable  to  keep  nn  offing  until  iho  western  en- 
trance of  the  strait  is  well  under  the  lee,  to  avoid  boino  ihrown  upon  the  coast  to  the  north- 
ward of  Cape  Victory,  which  is  rugged  and  inhospitable,  and  forming,  as  it  were,  a  break- 
water to  the  deep  rolling  swell  of  the  ocean,  is  for  some  miles  olf  fringed  by  a  cross  hol- 
low sea  almost  amounting  to  a  rippling. 

The  land  of  Cape  Victory  is  high  and  rugged,  and  much  broken;  nnd  if  the  weather 
be  not  very  thick,  will  be  seen  long  before  the  Evangelists,  which  are  not  visible  above  the 
horizon  from  a  ship's  deck  for  more  than  4  or  5  leagues.*  Pass  to  the  southward  of  them, 
and  steer  for  Cape  Pillar,  which  makes  like  h  high  island.  In  calm  weather  do  not  pass 
too  near  to  the  cape,  for  the  current  sometimes  sets  out,  and  round  the  cape  to  the  south- 
ward; but  with  a  strong  wind  get  under  the  lee  of  it  as  soon  as  you  please,  and  steer 
along  the  shore.  In  the  night  it  will  be  advisable  to  keep  close  to  the  land  of  the  south 
shore;  and  if  a  patent  log  be  used,  which  no  ship  should  be  without,  your  distance  will  be 
correctly  known.  The  course  alotig  shore,  by  compass,  is  E.  5  S.,  and  if  the  weather 
be  thick,  by  keeping  sight  of  the  south  shore,  there  will  be  no  difliculty  in  proceeding  with 
safety. 

The  Adventure  entered  the  strait  on  the  1st  of  April,  1830.  at  sunset;  and  after  pass- 
ing within  '  u.-  .i  mile  of  the  islets  off  the  Harbor  of  Mercy,  steered  E.  |  S.,  magnetic, 
under  close-reefed  topsails,  braced  by,  the  weather  being  so  squally  and  thick  that  the  land 
was  frequently  concealed  from  us;  but  it  being  occasionally  seen,  the  water  being  quite 
smooth,  and  the  course  steadily  steered,  with  the  patent  log  to  mark  the  distance  run,  we 
proceeded  without  the  least  anxiety,  although  the  night  was  dark,  and  the  squalls  of  wind 
and  ruin  frequent  and  violent.  When  abreast  of  Cape  Tamar,  that  projection  was  clearly 
distinguished,  as  was  also  the  land  of  Cape  Providence,  which  served  to  check  the  dis- 
tance shown  by  the  patent  log,  but  both  giving  the  same  results  proved  that  wo  had  not 
been  subjected  to  any  current ;  whereas  the  account  by  the  ship's  log  was  very  much  in 
i  error,  in  consequence  of  the  violence  of  the  squalls  and  the  long  intervals  of  light  winds, 
I  ivhich  render  it  impossible  to  keep  a  correct  account  of  the  distance.     At  day-break  we 

'  From  the  Adventure's  deck,  the  eye  being  thirteen  feet  above  the  water,  tiiey  were  seen  on  the 
I  koiizon  at  the  distsnce  of  fourteen  milea. 


I 


■  i,  [ 


I 


fimmfimmrmm^mmmmtmmnv'. 


624  BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

were  between  Cnpe  Monday  nnd  the  Gulf  of  Xaultegun;  and  at  8  o'clock  we  were  abreast 
of  PInyii  Piudn,  in  which,  after  a  cnlin  day,  the  ship  was  anchored. 

In  the  summer  senson  there  is  no  occusion  to  anchor  any  where,  unless  the  weather 
be  very  tempestuous,  for  the  nights  are  short  and  hardly  dark  enough  to  require  it,  unless 
as  a  j)recautioniiry  measure,  or  for  the  purpose  of  procuring  wood  and  water,  the  best 
place  fur  which  is  Port  Famine,  where  tho  beaches  are  strewed  with  abundance  of  Wa 
of  well-seasoned  wood,  which  is  very  superior  to  the  green  wood  that  must  otherwise  be 
used. 

NotwitliPtnnding  the  Adventure  experienced  no  current  in  the  western  part  of  the  strait 
there  is  generally  a  set  to  the  eastward,  which  is  more  or  less  felt  according  to  circum- 
stances. The  direction  and  strength  of  the  currents  are  caused  by  the  duration  of  the 
gales. 

The  chart  will  be  a  sufficient  guide  for  vessels  bound  through  from  the  westward  as  fur 
OS  Laredo  Buy,  after  which  a  few  directions  will  be  necessary.  The  land  here  should  be 
kept  close  on  board,  to  avoid  the  reef  off  the  S.  W.  end  of  Santa  Magdaleno.  Being 
abreast  of  it,  boar  away,  keeping  the  N.  K.  extremity  of  Elizabeth  Island  on  the  star- 
board bow.  until  you  see  Santa  Martha  in  one  with,  or  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the 
south  trend  of  the  Second  Narrow,  (Cape  St.  Vincent,)  which  is  the  leading  mark  for 
the  fair  channel  until  you  pass  the  spit  of  shoal  soundings,  which  extends  across  to  St. 
Magd;denu.     There  are  also  shoal  .-iounilings  towards  the  .S.  W.  end  of  Elizabeth  Island. 

At  half  a  mile  off  we  had  5  fathoms.  Capo  St.  Vincent  being  then  the  breadth  of  Santa 
Martha  open  to  the  northward  of  that  island.  Keeping  the  capo  just  in  sight  to  the  north- 
ward of  Santa  Martha,  steer  on,  and  pass  round  the  low  N.  E.  extremity  of  Elizabeth 
Island,  off  which  are  several  title  eddies.     The  tide  here  sets  across  the  channel. 

Now  steer  for  the  Second  Narrow,  keeping  Capo  Gregory,  which  will  be  just  discern- 
ible as  the  low  projecting  extreme  of  the  north  side  of  the  Second  Narrow,  on  the  star- 
board bow,  until  you  are  throe  miles  past  Santa  Martha.  The  course  may  then  be  di- 
rected for  the  cape,  opening  it  gradually  on  the  larboard  bow  as  you  approach  it,  to  avoid 
the  sho.-.l  that  extends  off  it. 

It  you  anchor  in  Gregory  Bay,  which  is  advisable,  in  order  to  have  the  whole  of  the  tide 
for  running  through  the  First  Narrow,  haul  up  and  kei ;  at  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the 
shore.  When  the  north  extremity  of  the  sandy  land  of  the  capo  is  in  a  line  with  the  west 
extreme  of  the  high  table  land,  you  will  bo  near  the  anchorage;  then  shorten  sail, and 
when  the  green  slope  begins  to  open,  you  will  have  14  fathoms;  you  may  then  anchor 
or  keep  away  to  the  N.  K.,  and  choose  a  convenient  depth,  taking  care  not  to  approach 
the  shore,  so  as  to  bring  Cape  Gregory  to  the  southward  of  S.  by  VV.  \  W.,  by  compass. 
The  best  berth  is  with  the  cape  bearing  S.  S.  W. 

Hence,  to  the  First  Narrow,  the  course,  by  compass,  is  duo  N.  E.  by  E."  The  land 
at  the  entrance,  being  low,  will  not  at  first  be  perceiv(>(i,  but  on  steering  on  you  will  first 
see  some  hummocky  land,  making  like  .islands.  These  are  hills  on  the  eastern  or  Fue- 
gian  side  of  the  Narrow.  Soon  afterwords  a  flat  low  sand-hill  will  bo  seen  to  the  north- 
ward, and  this  is  at  the  S.  W.  extremity  of  Point  Barranca.  On  approaching  the  Narrow 
at  4  miles  off,  keep  a  cliffy  head,  4  or  5  miles  within  the  eost  side  of  the  Narrow,  open  of 
the  trend  of  Point  Barranca,  by  which  you  will  avoid  the  shoal  that  extends  off  the  latter 
point.  Vou  should  not  go  into  less  depth  than  6  fathoms.  At  most  times  of  the  tide  there 
are  long  lines  and  patclie.s  of  strong  ripplings  through  which  you  must  pass.  The  shoal 
is  easily  distinguished  liy  the  kelp. 

When  the  ciiiinnel  through  the  narrow  bears,  by  compass,  N.  by  E.  |  E.,  steer  through 
it;  and  tliist.  or  a  N.  N.  E.  course,  will  carry  you  through.  On  each  side  the  bank  ex- 
tends off  for  some  distance  ;  but  by  keeping  in  mid-channel,  there  is  no  danger  until  the 
clitfy  coast  be  passed,  when  reefs  extend  olf  either  shore  for  some  distance,  particularly 
off  Cape  Orange.     The  N.  N.  E.  course  tnust  be  kept  until  the  Peak  of  Cape  Oraiise 


ipe 
bears  S., 


Cape  Orange 
and  the  northern  Di'-ectinn  Hill  W.  S.  W.,  or  VV.  by  S.  i  S.,  by  compass. 
Then  steer  E.  N.  E.  for  (Jape  Possession,  taking  care  not  to  approach  too  near  to  the 
bank  off  Cape  Orange,  or  the  one  on  the  north  side  of  Possession  Bay,  for  which  the 
chart  must  be  consulted. 

For  a  small  vessel,  the  passage  through  the  strait  from  west  to  east  is  not  only  easy, 
but  to  1)0  strongly  recommended  as  the  best  and  safest  route.  Indeed,  I  think  the  pas- 
sage would  be  quite  as  expeditious,  and,  perhnjjs.  mucth  safer,  to  enter  the  Gulf  of  Trini- 
dad, and  pass  down  the  Conception  Strait,  the  Sar»nionto,  or  St.  Estevan  Channels,  and 
Smyth's  Channel,  and  enter  the  strait  at  Cape  Tamar.  In  these  channels  northerly 
winds  prevail,  and  there  is  no  want  of  convenient  and  well-sheltered  anchorages  for  the 
night,  inanj'  of  which  have  already  been  mentioned,  and  multitudes  of  others,  and  per- 
haps much  better  ones,  might  be  found. 


•  If  from  thfi  Scrond  Niirrow,  N.  R.  \  E.  will  be  tlin  compass  course ;  but  I  should  reconanendailii|t 
hnuliag  up  tu  ihu  aurthwutd  until  abreast  uf  Capo  Urcgory,  and  then  to  steer  as  above. 


w^ 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


«9» 


will  fim 
or  Fue- 
le  north- 
he  Narrow 
ow,  open  of 
the  Ifttter 
tiile  there 
The  shoal 


■s, 


only  easy, 
the  pas- 

IfofTrini- 

annels,  BDd 
northerly 

iiges  for  the 
and  per- 


jminendaship 


TIDES. 

TIDE  is  a  oerlodical  motion  of  the  water  of  the  sen,  by  which  it  ebbs  and  flows  twice  Tide$. 
»day.  Thejlow  generully  continues  about  6  hours,  during  which  the  water  ernduallv 
rises  till  it  arrives  to  its  greatest  hei«ht;  then  it  begins  to  ebb,  or  decrease,  and  continues 
to  do  BO  for  about  6  more,  till  it  has  t.illen  to  nearly  iis  former  level ;  then  the  flow  becins 
as  before.  _  When  the  water  has  attained  its  greiitest  height,  it  is  said  to  be  hiek  water- 
end  when  it  is  done  tailing,  it  is  called  loiu  wakr.  " 

The  cause  of  the  tides  is  the  unequal  attraction  of  the  sun  and  nioon  upon  different 
parts  of  the  earth  5  for  they  attract  the  parts  of  the  earth's  surface  ooarest  to  them  with 
a  greater  force  than  they  do  lU  centre,  and  attract  the  centre  more  than  they  do  the  oppo- 
site surfece.  To  restore  the  equilibrium,  the  waters  take  a  spheroitI.il  figure  whose 
longer  asis  is  directed  towards  the  attracting  luminary.  If  the  moon  only  acted  upon 
the  water,  the  time  of  high  water  would  correspond  to  the  time  of  her  passing  the  mo- 
ridian,  following  it  by  tt  given  interval,  which  would  vary  for  different  ports  on  account  of 
the  retardation  arising  from  the  various  obstructions  the  tide  meets  with  in  the  coasts 
bays  and  channels  through  wht~h  it  passes;  and  as  the  moon  comes  to  the  meridian  about 
49m.  later  every  day.  the  tides  would  be  retarded  49m.  daily  :  and  it  is  on  this  principle 
that  the  time  of  high  water  is  calculated  in  most  books  of  navigiitioii,  although  the  time 
thus  calculated  will  sometimes  differ  an  hour  from  the  truth,  owing  to  the  neglect  of  the 
disturbing  force  of  the  suu,  The  effect  of  the  moon  upon  the  tides  is  greaier  than  that 
of  the  sun,  notwithstanding  the  quantity  of  matter  in  the  hitter  is  vtisily  greater  than  in 
the  former ;  but  the  sun,  being  at  a  much  greater  distimce  from  the  earth  than  the  moon, 
attracts  the  different  parts  of  the  earth  with  nearly  the  same  force ;  whereas  the  moon, 
being  at  a  much  less  distance,  attracts  the  different  parts  of  the  earth  with  very  different 
forces.  Accoi-dingto  the  latest  observations,  the  mean  force  of  the  sun  for  raising  the 
tides  is  to  the  mean  force  of  the  moon  as  1  to  2i.  By  the  combined  effect  of  the  two 
forces,  the  tides  come  on  sooner  when  the  moon  is  in  her  first  and  third  quarters,  and 
Jater  in  the  second  and  /omWA  quarters,  than  they  would  do  if  caused  only  by  the  moon's 
attraction.  The  mean  quantity  of  this  acceleratiun  and  retardation  is  given  iu  Table  B, 
«ubjoined.     Its  use  will  be  explained  hereiifler. 

Tlie  tides  are  greater  than  common  about  thirty-six  hours  after  the  new  and  full  moon: 
these  are  called  spring  tides.  And  the  tides  are  lower  thati  common  about  thirty-six 
iours  after  the  first  and  last  quarters :  these  are  called  neap  tides.  In  the  liirmer  case, 
the  sun  and  moon  conspire  to  raise  tlie  tide  in  the  same  place ;  but  in  the  latter,  the  sun 
raises  the  water  where  the  moon  depresses  it.  When  the  moon  is  in  her  perigee,  or 
nearest  approach  to  the  earth,  the  tides  rise  higher  than  they  do.  under  the  same  circuin- 
staoces.  at  other  times ;  and  are  lowest  when  she  is  in  her  apogee,  or  farthest  distance 
from  the  earth.  The  spring  tides  are  greatest  about  the  time  of  the  equinoxes,  in  March 
and  September,  and  the  neap  tides  are  less.  All  these  thiigs  would  obtain  exactly,  were 
the  whole  surface  of  the  earth  covered  with  sea;  but  the  interruptions  caused  by  the 
continents,  islands,  shoals,  &c.,  entirely  alter  the  state  of  the  tides  in  many  cases.  A 
small  Inland  sea,  such  as  the  Mediterranean  or  Baltic,  is  tittle  subject  to  tides,  because 
the  action  of  the  sun  and  moon  is  always  nearl)  equal  at  the  extremities  of  such  seas. 
Id  very  high  latitudes  the  tides  are  inconsiderable. 

Observations  of  the  tides  have  been  made  at  Brest,  by  order  of  the  French  government, 
during  a  great  number  of  years;  and  upon  these  observations  La  Place  has  deduced, 
from  his  theory,  the  corrections  in  the  times  of  high  water,  and  in  the  height  of  the  tide, 
CD  account  of  the  declinations  of  the  sun  and  moon,  and  their  various  distances  from  the 
earth.  Within  a  few  yeors  the  British  government  have  directed  that  observations  of 
this  kind  should  be  made  at  the  naval  stations  on  the  coasts  of  England,  Scotland,  and 
Ireland,  and  a  multitude  of  observations  have  been  obtained,  particularly  at  the  poit  of 
London.  Mr.  Lubbock  has  deduced,  from  these  last  observations,  a  set  of  tables  for 
computing  the  tides  nl  London,  with  the  necessary  corrections  on  account  of  the  situa- 
tions and  distances  of  the  sun  and  moon.  Mr.  VVIiewell  has  likewise  formed,  with  much 
labor,  a  chart  of  the  cotidal  lines  in  the  Atlantic,  Indian,  and  part  of  the  l-*acitic  Oceans ; 
these  lints  being  curve  lines  drawn  through  all  the  adjacent  places  of  the  ocean  which  have 
high  water  at  the  same  time,  as,  for  instance,  at  1  o'clock  on  some  given  day,  at  the  time 
of  new  moon.  These  tables  and  chart  are  published  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Royal 
Society  of  London  for  1831,  1833,  1834,  &c.  They  are  too  extensive  to  be  inserted  in 
this  work. 

From  observations  which  have  been  made  at  various  times  and  by  many  persons,  the 
times  of  high  water,  on  the  days  of  new  ami  full  moon,  in  the  most  noted  places  of  the 
globe,  have  been  collected.  These  times  are  usually  put  in  n  table  against  the  names  of 
the  places,  arransed  in  alpLabetical  order,  as  in  the  tii'e  table  of  the  collection  arcoinpa-^ 

40 


,/ 


wrwrnwi^mrm^^"^ 


6Sft 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

nying  this  work.  By  menns  of  it  the  timoR  of  high  water  may  be  found  by  Tarions  me- 
thods. The  moat  common  rule  preacriijed  tor  this  purpose,  in  boolts  of  navigation  is 
that  depeudingoii  tlie  golden  number  iind  epact,  the  tide  being  supposed  to  be  uniformly 
retarded  every  day.  Tliis  method  will  sometimes  differ  two  hours  from  the  truth :  foV 
this  reason  it  is  not  inserted ;  but,  instead  of  it,  we  shall  make  the  calculation  by  the  ad* 
joined  tables  A,  B,  and  the  Nautical  Almanac.  By  this  method  the  time  of  high  water 
may  be  obtained  to  a  greater  degree  of  exactness  than  from  our  common  Almanacs. 

RULE. 

Find  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian  at  Greenwich,  on  the  given  day 
in  the  Nautical  Almannc.  Enter  Table  A,  and  find  the  longitude  of  the  given  plRce,  in 
the  left  hand  column,  corresponding  to  which  is  a  number  of  minutes  to  be  applied  to 
the  time  of  passing  the  meridian  at  Ureenwich,  by  adding  when  in  tout  longitude,  but 
subtracting  when  in  east  longitude  ;  the  sum  or  difference  wdl  be  nearly  the  time  that 
the  moon  posses  the  meridian  of  the  given  plHce.  With  this  time  enter  Table  B,  nod 
take  out  the  corresponding  correction,  which  is  to  be  applied  to  the  time  of  passing  the 
meridian  of  the  place  of  observation,  by  adding  or  subtracting,  according  to  the  directioo 
of  the  table. 

To  this  corrected  time  add  the  time  of  full  sea  on  the  full  and  change  days;  the  sum 
will  be  the  time  of  high  water,  at  the  given  pliice,  reckoning  from  the  noon  of  the  given 
day.  If  this  sum  be  greater  than  12h.  24m.,  you  must  subtract  12h.  24m.,  from  it,  and 
the  remainder  will  be  the  time  of  higli  water  iienrly,  reckoning  from  the  same  noon;  or 
if  It  exceed  24h.  'tSm.,  you  must  subtriict  ■J4h.  iSm.  from  that  sum,  and  the  temaiuder 
will  be  the  time  of  high,  water,  reckoning  from  the  same  noon  nearly. 


EXAMPLE   I. 

Required  the  time  of  high  water  at  Charleston,  (S.  C.,)  March  17,  1836,  in  the  aAer- 
noon,  civil  account.  ' 

By  the  Nautical  Al'  nnc,  I  find  that  the  moon  passes  tlie  meridian  at  Greenwich  at 
Oh.  21m.;  to  this  I  add  11m.,  taken  from  Tiible  A,  corresponding  to  the  longitude  of 
Chnrletiton.  With  the  sun,  Uli.  32m.,  I  enter  Table  B,  and  find  (by  taking  proportional 
parts)  that  the  correction  is  Oh.  ym.,  which  ia  to  be  subtracted  from  Oh.  32tn.,  (because 
immediately  over  it,  in  the  table,  it  is  marked  sub,;)  to  the  remainder.  Oh.  23m.,  I  add 
the  time  of  hi(>h  water,  on  the  full  nnd  change  days,  7h.  16in.,  (which  is  found  in  the  tide 
table  at  the  end  of  this  collection:)  the  sum,  7h.  38m.,  is  the  mean  time  of  high  water  on 
the  afternoon  of  Maicb  17,  1836,  civil  account. 


EXAMPLE   II. 

Required  the  time  of  high  water  at  Portland,  (Maine,)  May  23,  1836,  in  the  afternoon, 
civil  account. 

By  the  Nautical  Almanac,  the  moon  will  pass  tlie  meridian  of  Greenwich  at  6  hours 
21  minutes,  P.  M.  Tlie  correction  from  ThIjIh  ,\,  coriJ-sponding  to  70^.  (the  longitude 
of  Poriland.)  is  9m.,  which,  beioy;  ailded  tn  dh  iMm..  i;ives  the  lime  of  the  moon's  south- 
ing at  Portland  fih.  3()in.,  ncMirly.  The  immlxM'  in  'i'lible  B,  c()rre8pondiii<>  to  6li.  30in. 
is  49m.,  which  is  to  lie  subtriirtcil  from  fdi.  .'iOiii.  (hccimse  immediately  over  it,  in  the 
table,  is  marked  sub.)  To  the  dirt'eicnce,  .Oh.  41m.,  I  uiid  the  time  of  high  water,  on  the 
full  and  change  diiyM,  lOii.  4.5m.,  nnd  the  sum  is  liih.  2()m.;  consequently  the  high  water 
is  at  16h.  26m.  past  noon  ot  .Mny  23;  tliiit  in,  iit  4h.  2f)m.  A.  M.  of  May  24;  nnd  by  sub- 
tracting I2h.  24m.  from  1()h.  2()m.,  we  hiivo  4li.  2m.,  which  will  be  nearly  the  time  of 
high  water  on  the  afternoon  of  Mny  2.'3,  ]8',if>. 

In  this  manner  we  may  ol)tain  the  timo  of  high  water,  at  any  place,  to  a  cons'derable 
degree  of  accuracy.  But  the  tides  are  so  much  influenced  by  the  winds,  freshets,  Sic., 
that  the  calculated  times  will  sometimes  differ  a  little  from  the  truth. 

Many  pilots  reckon  the  time  of  high  wator  by  the  point  of  the  compass  the  moon  is 
upon  at  that  time,  allowing  45  minutes  for  each  point.  I'hus,  on  the  full  and  change  days, 
if  it  is  high  water  at  noon,  they  say  a  north  and  south  moon  makes  full  sea;  and  if  at 
llh.  15m.,  tliey  say  a  S.  by  E.  or  N.  by  W.  moon  makes  full  sea;  and  in  like  manaer 
for  any  other  time.  But  it  is  a  very  inaccurate  way  of  finding  the  time  of  full  sea  by  the 
bearing  of  the  moon,  except  in  places  where  it  is  high  water  about  noon  on  the  full  and 
change  days. 

When  you  have  not  a  Nautical  Almanac,  you  may  find  the  time  of  high  water  by 
means  of  the  following  Table?  C  and  D;  and  although  the  former  method  is  the  most 
accurate,  yot  the  latter  may  be  useful  in  many  cases.  To  calculate  the  time  of  fullaeaby 
this  method,  observe  the  following  rule : — 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


6i7 


RULE. 

Enter  Table  C,  and  take  out  the  number  which  stands  opposite  to  the  year,  and  under 
the  month  for  which  the  tide  is  to  be  cnlcnlatod.  This  number,  added  to  the  day  of  the 
mootb,  will  give  the  moon's  age,  rejectins  30  wlien  the  sum  exceeds  that  number. 
Against  her  age,  found  m  the  left  h„tHi  column  of  T.ible  D,  is  a  number  of  hours  and 
minutes,  in  the  adjoined  column,  which  bemg  luided  to  the  time  of  high  water  at  the 
given  places,  on  the  tull  and  chnnge  dnys,  will  give  the  time  of  high  water  required,  ob- 
gervlDg  to  reject  12h.  24m.,  or  24h.  4«m.,  when  the  sum  exceeds  either  of  those  times. 

We  shall  work  the  two  preceding  examples  by  this  rule. 

EXAMPLE   III. 

Required  the  time  of  high  water  at  Charleston,  (S.  C.,)  March  17, 1836,  in  the  after- 
goon,  civil  account. 

In  Table  C,  opposite  1836,  and  under  March,  stand  13,  which  being  added  to  the  day  of 
the  month  17,  gives  30,  and  by  subtracting  30,  leaves  0,  the  moon's  age:  opposite  0  in 
Table  D,  is  Oh.  Om.,  which  added  to  7h.  15m.,  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 
change  days,  gives  7h.  I6m.  for  the  time  of  high  water ;  differing  23  minutes  from  the 
former  method. 

EXAMPLE  IV. 

Required  the  time  of  high  water  at  Portland,  (Maine,)  May  23,  1836,  in  the  afternoon, 
civil  account. 

In  the  Table  C,  opposite  1836,  and  under  May,  stand  15,  which  being  added  to  the  day 
of  the  month  23,  gives  (by  neglecting  30)  the  moon's  age  8:  opposite  to  this,  in  Table 
D,  isSh.  39m.,  which  being  added  to  lOli.  4om.,  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 
change  days,  gives  I6h.  24m.,  from  which  subtracting  12h.  24in.,  there  remains  4h.  Om. 
for  the  time  of  full  sea  May  23,  1836.     This  differs  2  minutes  from  the  former  method. 

In  the  third  column  of  Table  D  is  given  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian, 
for  every  day  of  her  age.  Thus,  opposite  1 1  days  stand  8h.  57m.,  which  is  the  time  of 
her  coming  to  the  meridian  on  that  day.  This  table  may  be  of  some  use  when  a  Nauti- 
cal Almanac  cannot  be  procured;  but,  being  calculated  upon  the  supposition  that  the 
moon  moves  uniformly  in  the  equator,  the  table  cannot  be  very  accurate.  The  numbers 
in  this  table  are  reckoned  from  noon  to  noon :  thus  Ih.  A.  M.  is  denoted  by  13h.;  2li. 
A.M.byl4,  &c. 

The  time  of  new  moon  is  easily  found,  by  subtracting  the  number  taken  from  Table 
Cfrora  30.    Ex.  Suppose'it  was  required  to  find  the  time  of  new  moon  for  May,  1836. 
By  examining  the  table,  we  find  the  number  corresponding  to  that  time  is  15;  this  sub 
traded  from  30.  leaves  15  :  therefore  it  will  be  new  moon  the  15th  May,  1836 

When  the  time  of  high  water  is  known  for  any  day  of  the  moon's  age,  we  may  from 
thence  find  the  time  of  high  water,  on  the  full  and  change  days,  by  the  following 

RULE. 

Find  the  time  of  the  moon's  coming  to  the  meridian  of  Greenwich,  in  the  Nautical 
Almanac.  To  this  time  apply  the  corrections  taken  from  the  tables  A  and  B,  (in  the 
same  manner  as  directed  in  the  preceding  rule  for  finding  the  time  of  high  water;)  sub- 
tract this  corrected  time  from  the  observed  time  of  high  water,  and  the  remainder  will  be 
thetimeof  high  water,  on  the  full  and  clinnge  days. 

iVote.— If  the  time  to  be  subtracted  be  greater  than  the  observed  time  of  full  sea,  you 
must  increase  the  latter  by  12h.  24m.,  or  by  24h.  48m.,  nearly. 

EXAMPLE. 


Suppose  that,  on  the  17th  March,  1836,  the  time  of  high  water  at  Charleston,  (S.  C.,) 

"     "  "  "ad 

change  days. 


was  found  to  be  at  7h.  38m.  P.M.:  required  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full  and 


We  find,  as  in  Example  I.,  preceding,  that  the  number  to  be  subtracted  is  Oh.  23m.; 
I  tatiiue  this  from  7h.  38m.,  leaves  7h.  ISm.,  which  is  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  full 
and  cnsoge  days. 

When  we  have  no  Nautical  Almanac,  we  may  find  the  time  of  high  water,  or  the  full 
I  and  change,  by  means  of  the  Tables  C  and  D ;  for  in  the  fourth  example  we  find,  bj 


.1 

f 


iijB'nm  I  I  iTwwifppnr 


■wwwp 


^^^mmt 


698 


BLUNTS  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 

Tnble  C,  thnt  the  moon's  age  whs  8,  corresponding  to  which,  in  the  second  eolamn  of 
Tnble  U,  is  5li.  39in.;  this,  guhtnicted  from  the  time  of  high  water,  4h.,  after  IncreaiinJ 
it  by  I2h.  24m..  (bpciiuse  ihe  gum  to  he  subtracted  is  the  greatest,)  gives  lUh.  46ii),  (^ 
the  time  of  high  wuter  on  the  full  and  change  days. 


Table  A. 

Tablk  B. 

i 

Tablk  D. 

a       a   ^ 

«-d 

i> 

de  of  the  plac 

tion  of  Moon' 
the  Meridiai 

§ 

•c 
u 

6 

Tabi.k  C> 

1^ 

gSSd 

Day 

H. 

M. 

H.      H. 

3       u  « 

f- 

•a  i  £  •§ 

This  Table  it  for  finding  tiie  Moon's 

0 

0 

0 

0    o" 

B 

0   * 

1 

O 

o£ 

II. 

H.     M. 

Age. 

1 
2 

0 

1 

35 
10 

0  49 

1  38 

Hub. 

3 

1 

46 

2    36 

1  Deg. 

Min. 

0 

1 

2 

0       0 
0     17 
0     34 

Add  the  number  taken  from  the  ta- 
ble to  the  dny  of  the  month;  the 

4 
5 
6 

2 
3 
3 

22 
01 
44 

3  15 

4  4 
4    S3 

0 

0 

10  1     1 

3 

0     60 

sum   (rejecting  30  or  60,  if  ne- 

7 

4 

35 

5    42 

20       3 
30       4 

4 
5 

1     03 
1     09 

cessary,)  will  be  the  Moon's  Age 

U 
9 

5 
6 

39 
67 

6  30 

7  19 

40 

5 

6 

1     03 

nearly. 

10 

8 

15 

8      8 

60 

7 

7 

0     35 

11 

9 

19 

8    67 

60 

8 

Add 

12 

10 

10 

9    4C 

70 

9 

8 

0      2 

13 

10 

54, 

10    34 

80 

11 

9 

0     23 

>> 

t 

• 

U 

J3 

.e 

14 

11 

33 

11    23 

90 

12 

10 

0     24 

. 

L. 

5 

f 

. 

, 

OD 

E 

£ 

! 

E 

15 

12 

09 

12    12 

100 

14 

11 
12 

0     14 
0       0 

e 

3 

C. 
< 

a 

3 

3 

OX 

3 
< 

E. 

0. 
CO 

z 

6 

1 

C 

A^ 

16 

12 

44 

13      1 

110  1  15 
120      16 

Suh. 
0     17 

17 

18 

13 
13 

19 
54 

13  50 

14  38 

13 

1836 

12  14 

13 

16 

16 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

130  i   18 

14 

0     34 

185(1 

17 

18 

17 

18 

19 

■20 

21 

•22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

19 

14 

31 

15    27 

!    140  :  19 

15 

0     60 

1851 

•27 

29 

■27 

•29 

29 

1 

2 

3 

6 

5 

6 

7 

,20 

15 

11 

16    16 

150  ^  20 

16 

1       3 

185U 

8 

10 

9 

11 

11 

13 

13 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

21 

15 

56 

17    05 

1    IfiO     2-2 

17 

1       9 

1853 

•.'0|2-.' 

•2(1 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

27 

27 

29 

29 

22 

16 

49 

17    64 

170      23 

18 

1       3 

1854 

1    .-^ 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

8 

8 

10 

10 

23 

17 

57 

18    4-3 

180  '  24 

19 

0     35 

1856 

12113 

12 

!.■! 

14 

15 

16 

17 

19 

19 

20 

21 

24 

19 

17 

19    31 

1 

Add 

lp5ri 

•221 '.M 

2:? 

25 

•-'5 

27 

27 

29 

1 

1 

3 

3 

25 

20 

32 

20    20 

20 

0     02 

1857 

5'  6 

4 

6 

6 

8 

8 

Id 

11 

12 

13 

14 

26 

21 

33 

21      9 

21 

0     23 

1858 

I5'l7 

16 

17 

17 

18 

19 

2(1 

22 

22 

24 

24 

27 

22 

22 

21    68 

22 

0     24 

IH5'J 

•26  '27 

26 

•27 

28 

■i') 

(1 

1 

3 

3 

5 

6 

28 

23 

04 

22    46 

23 

0     14 

186(1 

7  e 

8 

<J 

10 

11 

12 

13 

15 

15 

17 

17 

29 

23 

42 

23    35 

24 

0       0 

1861 

1!J20 

18 

20 

20 

22 

22 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

294 

24 

00 

24    00 

In  all  the  preceding  cnlculntions  of  the  time  of  high  water,  we  have  neglected  the  cor- 
rection arising  from  the  variation  of  the  distances  of  the  sun  and  moon  from  the  earth, 
and  iVom  the  different  dedinntions  of  those  objects.  These  causes  niight  produce  a  cor- 
rection of  lOni  or  l-2m.  in  the  time  of  high  water,  and  sometimes  more ;  but  in  geoenl 
the  correction  will  be  much  less,  and  may  therefore  be  neglected 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


) 

0 

) 

49 

I 

3S 

2 

26 

3 

15 

4 

4 

4 

53 

5 

42 

6 

30 

7 

19 

8 

8 

9 

4G 

10 

34 

U 

23 

12 

12 

. 

62» 


TABLE, 


Showing  the  TIMES  of  HIGH  WATER,  at  the  Full  and  Change  of  the  Moon  or 
some  of  thepnndpal  Ports  and  Harbors  on  the  CoaHs  of  Nwlhand  Llih  Americ! 
with  the  vertical  rise  of  the  tide  in  feet.  •'  *°  '"*  ^'"<"«<'- 


PLAOKS. 


Amazon  River,  (Para). . 

Amelia 

Annapolis,  (N.  Cicotia)  . 
Auu,  Capo 

Aniiupoiw,  (Maryland). 
Andrew*,  St. 


Anticoati  (W.  end) 

Apple  River,  (St.  Lawrence), 
Augustine,  St 


B 


Broad  Bay.. 

Beaver  Vm*  oitr  •  - 

Bwin  jf  Mines,  viz : 

W'ndaor 

8  veu  Isles  Harbor 
Cape  Split , 

Barnstable  Bay 

Berbice 

Bell  Isle,  StraiU  of 

Beaufort,  (N.  0.) 

Bermuda 

Boston  Light 

Boston  (town) 

Buzzard's  Bay 


Cayenne  

CansoCope 

Canao  Harbor 

Casco  Bay 

Charles,  Cape 

Charlkston,  (S.  0.) 

Churchill,  Cupe 

Chediijucto  Bay 

Cocayue  to  Cape  Tormentin 
and  thence  to  Pictou  Harbor 

Coil,  Cape,  Race  Pt 

Country  Harbor  to  White  L 

Bay 

Cumberland  Basin  Fort 

Crane  Island  (St.  Lawrence) 


Delaware  Breakwater  ..... 
Demerara,  entrance  of  River 
Dry  Tortugas  (uncertain) 


Eaitport 

Elizabeth  Town  Point  (New 
Jersey) 


Fear,  Cape  (River) 

Fort  St.  John  (Newfoundland) 
Fox  Iilsnd  (Penobscot) . . . 
Frying  Fan  Shoali 


TIMI. 


30 


12 

7 
11 
11    59 

4    43 

10  45 
11 

11  45 
8      4 


10  45 
8    45 

12 
11 

11  15 


11 

4 


30 


11    30 


46 
30 


11    31 
7    55 


3  45 

8  30 

8  45 

10  45 


45 
21 
20 


7 
11    30 

9 

10    30 
5    24 


8      4 
4    30 


11    13 
8    54 


7 

7  30 

10  45 

7  40 


RISKS. 


riiT. 


11 

7 

30 
13 

25 


9 
7 

36 

31 

40 

9 

11 

7 

3 

5 

12 
5 


8 
13.6 

8 
71 
17 


23 
5 


7.6 
6 


PLAcca. 


Oay  Head 

George's  River .'.'.!."!!! 

Georgetown  Bar !!!!!!! 

Goldsborough '.\\\ 

Gosport  (Navy  Yard)  Va  .... 
Green  Island  (St.  Lawrence). 

Gaudaloiipe  (irregular) 

Gut  of  Canso 


H 

Halifax 

Hampton  Roads  ... 

Harbor  Delute 

Hutteras,  Cape 

Henlopen,  Cupe  ... 

Henry,  Capo 

Hillsborough  Inlet 

Holmes'  Hole 

Hood,  Port 

Howe,  Port 


IJ 


Ice  Cove 

Isle  Verte,  or  Green  Island. 
Jackson,  Port 


K 

Kamoraaka   Isles,    St.  Law 

rence 

Kennelipck 

Kennebunk  


Louisbourg. 


M 


Mnchias 

Mahone    Bay    to    Liverpool 

Hnrbor 

Maniconagan  Bay 

Marbleheud 

Mnrlhu's  Vineyard  (VV.  Point) 

Martinico  (irregular) 

Matane  (&t.  Lawrence) 

May,  Cape 

Meogeney  Bay 

Mobile  (Port) 

Monomoy  Pomt 

Moose  Island 

Mount  Desert 

Mouths  of  the  Mississippi . . . 

N 


TlMI. 


Risia. 


H.   M    rCIT 


7  37 

10  45 
7 

U 
0 

11  45 

8  30 


7  30 


8 

15 

12 

9 

7 

16 

7 

40 

7 

30 

11  48 

7  30 

8  30 


10 

8  40 
8 


4 

10  45 

11  15 


7  15 


11 


8 

8 

1 

12 

11 

30 

11 

6 

45 

u 

12 

15 

8 

45 

6 

12 

2.1 

11 

30 

6 

11 

30 

25 

11 

10 

13 
14 

Nantucket  (shoal) 10  44 

Nantucket 12  30 

Narraganset  Bay 1    7  45 

Na58au(N.  P.) 8 


7 

9 

4 
12 

4.5 
16 

8 


8 
3.9 

54 
5.10 


5 

2 
6 
8 


5i 


12 


S.6 

6 

7 


11 


/ 


' 


i.l 


630 


BLUNT'S  AMERICAN  COAST  PILOT. 


New  Bedford 

Newl)tiry|iiirl 

Nev  Haven 

New  London 

New  and  Old  Ferulle  (New 

foundlond) 

Newport 

New  York  City 

Norfolk 


TIME, 


RIflKS. 


H. 

7 

11 


o 


Ocracock  Inlet 

Old  Point  Comfort 


Poiiamaqunddy  

Penobscoi  River 

Peniacola  Navy  Yard 

Pillars  (St.  Lawrence) 

Pistdlet  Hay 

Placeniia  Harbor  (Newfound. 

land)  , 

Plyniouili 

Portland  

Port  Kico,  St.  Juan's  

Port  Royal 

Porisniouih  

Providence 


Quebec . 


R 

Restignuche  Harbor . 

Rio  Janeiro 

Roman  (S.  C.) 

Raseway,  Port 

Ivoyalt  Port 


9 
11 

II 
8 
5 

11 
8 


M. 

b8 
15 


11  lU  I 

8  U 

1 1  4r> 

7  'l.'i 

8  :i7 

8  31) 


9 
8    S7 


11  30 

10  45 

4  4r, 

5  15 


15 

30 
10 
30 
■{(■> 
30 


6    30 


40 


3 
2 

6    4^ 

5    4U 


Sable,  Cape ,     8 

Sable  Island,  North  side 10    30 

Do.  South  side 8    30 


FKFT 

5 

10 

4 


3.9 


25 
10 
2.3 


8 
11 
12 

4 

G 
10 
26 


ri.ACM- 


7 
4 

8 
6 


(8i, 


Snlotn 

Siiiiibro  Island • 

Sandy  Hook 

Suvuiinuli  Light 

Seal  Island  

ijoven    Islands   Harbor 

Lawrence) 

Shci-pacut  Kiver    

Slii'Iburne  Harbor 

Shopody  Bay  (i^t.  Lawrence). 
Ship  Harbor,  Gut  of  Canso... 
St.  Bariholoniow'a  (irregular). 

St,  Croix  River 

St.  John's  River  (Florida) 

St.  John's  (New  Brunswick) 

St.  Mnry'a  Bar 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor 

St.  Pierre  and  Miquolon 

St.  Salvador 

St,  Simon's  Bar 

Sunbury 

Surinam  (Bram's  Point) 

Sydney   Ilarbor    (Breton  Isl. 

and) 


TIMl. 


Tampa  Bay  (uncertain)  .... 

Tarpaulin  Cove 

Thompson  Island    Key  West 

Tobago  (uncertain) 

Torbay  (Breton  Island)  .... 

Townsend  Harbor 

Traverse    (St.   Lawrence,    I. 

aux  Coudres) 

Trinidad  (Port  Spain) 


Vera  Cruz  (only  one  tide  in 

24  hours,  irregular) 

Vineyard  Sound 

W 

Wood's  Hole 


n. 
11 

8 
7 
7 


M, 

15 
15 
35 
IS 


8    45 

I  40 

10  45 
8  SO 

11  30 

8 

11    30 
8    30 

la 

7 
13 
6 
3 
7 
8 
4 


30 


45 
30 

30 


11  44 

9  53 

8  45 

10  45 

6  25 
3 


11    44 


8    40 


■iitt, 

'•IT, 

11 

7 
8,5 


95 

19 

7 


3.3 

9 

9.6 

3i 

8 

9 


On  the  coast  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  there  are  no  regular  tides:  the  vitind  regulates  the  riM 
«ud  fall. 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITLJES. 


68a 


Nota  Scotia. 

Bnt.  ofSt.  Croix  R 

Maogoine  Iiland,  entrance  St. 

John*!  River 

Cape  Spencer 

Cape  Chignecto 

Haute  Iile 

Annapolis  Gut 

Bryer's  Island  light 

Cape  Fourchu  light 

Seal  Island  light 

Cape  Sable 

Shelburne  light 

Cotflna  Island  light 

Cross  Island  lights 

Sambro  light 

Halifax 

Sheet  Harbor  ent 

Sherbroke 

White  Head  Island 

Cape  Cimso,  Cranberry  Island 

light 

Sable  I.,  E.  end 

do        W.  end 


[Thi*  Table  cimtahm  the  LATiriruK.t  and  lA)N(UTtiii:;,s  «/ //„;  intmt  re 
hlarult,  Shmls,  Cape.',  ^c,  in  llus  work,  fnuiuled  on  tlui  latest  and 
trotu/ni>'!al  Obaervations,  Surveys,  and  Cliart.i.] 

The  Longitudes  are  reckoned  from  the  Meridian  of  Greenwich. 


must  remnrkalik  llwbors, 
most  accurate  A*. 


RiviR  St.  Croix  to  Cafe  Canso. 


Lat. 

D.      M. 

45  00  N 

45  13.5 
45  13 
45  iti 
45  15 
44  43 
44  16 
43  49.5 
43  24 
43  24 

43  38.5 

44  03 
44  20 
44  26.5 
44  38.3 

44  i2 

45  (18.5 
45  11.7 

4.'i  19.5 
43  59 
43  57 


Long 

D.   M. 

67  03  w 

66  OS 
65  55 
64  48 

64  51 

65  44 

66  23 
66  07 
65  58. 
65  36 
65  15. 
64  36 
64  07 
63  33 
G3  35 
iJ2  2D 
62  00 
61  10 

GO  57.;. 
.•■.D  47.3 
60  13.  ( 


Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. 


Cape  Breton. 


Ijut  of  Canso,  S.  ent 

Cape  Hinchinbroke 

Cape  Portland 

Louisburgh 

Cape  Breton 

Scatari  I.,  N.B.pt 

Flint  Island 

Sidney  light 

Cape  Bgmont 

Cape  North 

Island  St.  Paul,  N.  extreme., 

Chetican  Harbor,ent 

Seal  Island 

Cape  Mabon 

Just  au  Corps  I 

Gut  of  Caiiso,  N.  ent 


Cape  St.  George  ...< 

Pictou  I.,  E.  end 

do        light 

Cape  Tormentin 

Richibucto  Harbor,  entrance. 
Cape  EiBqiuminac 


Prince  Edward  I. 
Prince  Edward  I.,  N.  cape . . 
do.  W.  point. 

Red  Head 

St.  Peter's  Island 

Hillsburough  Bay,  ent 

Bear  Cape 

East  Cape 

Richmond  Bay 

Pt.  Miscou,  cnt.Chaleur  Bay. 
Cape  Despair 


Lat. 

D.     M. 

45  30 
45  34 
45  49 
45  53. 

45  57 

46  02 
46  11. 
46  18 

46  53 

47  02 
47  14 
46  40 
46  23 
46  12 
46  00 
45  42 

45  53 
45  49 

45  41. 

46  05 

46  43 

47  04 


47  03 
46  41 
46  26 

46  07 
46  (17 
46  00 
46  28 
46  47 

48  01 
18  25. 


Long. 

D.     M. 

61  14  w 
60  42 

60  05 
60  00 
59  48.5 
59  42 

59  47 

60  U9 
60  22 
60  27 

60  11 

61  00 
GI  15 
Gl  !ili 
Gi  37.5 

61  as 

Gl  5G 

62  33 
G2  40 

63  50 

64  50 
64  51 


64  04 
64  23 
<i4  08 
63  14 

63  10 
G2  29 
62  00 
G.-}  44 
(!4  35 

64  21.5 


Onpe  Gaxpd 

Cnpo  Ro7ier 

Mt.  St.  Louis  River.. 
Cape  Chatin 


Antieoeti  Iiland. 

I.  of  Anticosti,  E.  pt 

do         Observation  Bay, 

N.  pt ., 

W.  pt 

Ellis' Bay  ent..,. 

S.  W.  pt 

S.  pt 


do 
do 
do 
do 
do 


Magdalen  lalandt. 
Magdalen  Is.,  N.  Bird  Rock.. 

Bryon  1.,  E.  pt 

Kii.st  Piiin' 

I'-ntry  lalumi 

VniluT-si  I.,  S.  \V.  pt 

Dtniliimii's  I 


Lut, 

0.      M. 

48  45.2 

48  51.7 

49  14.6 
49  06 


49  08.4 
49  39 
49  57.7 
49  53.3 
49  47 
49  23.9 
49  03.7 


47  51 
47  48 
47  37.6 
47  17 
n  13 
17  16.1 


Long. 

0.     M. 

64  13. 

64  14.8 

65  46.6 

66  48 


61  43 

63  44.41 

64  13 
64  35.1 
64  35 

63  38.81 

62  18 


61  12 
61  27.5 
61  26 

61  45 

62  04 
G2  15.3 


Nl;\VKl)L-.\I)I,ANU. 


Newfoundland, 


Capo  Norman 

Green  Island 

Ferrol  Point 

Rich  Point 

Port  Saunders 

Bay  St.  Pauls,  ent 

Bon  Bay 

Cope  St.  Gregory 

Red  Island 

Cod.Roy  Island 

Cape  Ray 

Connoise  Bay 

Burgco  Islands 

Penguin  Island 

St.  Pierre 

Pt.  May 

C.  Cliapeau  Rouge 

Pt,   Dreein 

Cape  St.  Mury 

Cape  Pine 

Cai'E  Race 

C'.iipe  Race  (Virgin)  Rucks. 

Cope  lialliiid 

Cope  Broyle  Harbor 

Boy  of  Bulls 

Cape  Spear 

St.  Johns 

C.  St.  Francis 

Breakheart  Point 

Trinity  Harbor 

Cape  Bonnvista 

Cupe  Freels 

Funk  Island 

Snap  Ruck 

Cupe  Fogo 

Cupe  St.  John,  N.  Bill 

Horse  Island,  E.  pt 

B.iile  Isle,  N.E.  pt 

(Jrouis  Islanil.  N.  pt 


tT 


Lot. 

D.  M. 

51  38. 
51  24 
51  02 
50  41. 
50  38. 
49  50 
49  33 
49  22 
48  34 
47  52. 
47  36, 
47  40 
47  33 
47  22, 
46  46, 
46  54 
46  53 
46  59 
46  50 
16  38 
46  39, 

46  26 
16  47 

47  05, 
47  18 
47  31). 
47  34. 

47  48 

48  09 
48  22 

48  42 

49  18 
49  45 
49  55 

49  41 

50  00 
50  13 
.50  49 
50  58 


Long. 

D.  M. 

55  56.3 

56  36.8 

57  05.6 
57  27.2 
57  21 

57  51 

58  00 

58  16 

59  16 
59  26.8 
59  20.3 
58  00 
57  43 
57  01 
56  09 
r)6  01) 
55  22 
H  16 
54  13 
53  35 

3  04 
.50  55 
52  5!) 
52  52 
52  47 
52  39 
52  43 
52  49 

52  57 

53  22 
53  05 
53  30 
53  12 

53  44 

54  00 
.55  31 

55  43 
55  29 
.55  35 


'■Hpiiwiiw" 


Mpiigii.iiiliipiiliini. 


634 


LATITDDB9  AND  LONGITUDES. 


Canada. 

Quebec,  N.  bastion, , 

Condres  I.,  W.  pt.  Prairie  Bay 

Green  Island  light 

Port  Neuf. 

Bic  Island 

Bersimis  Point 

Maniconagon  Point 

Cape  St.  Nicholas 


Lat. 

D.     M.N 

51  03.3 


Oroc  Harbor 

Haro  Bay  entrance |51  16 

Cape  St.  Anthony 51  23 


Cape  Bald,., 


Belle  Isle,  N.  E.  point., 
do      S.  point 


Grand  Bank,  Newfoundland... 
do  Southern  edge... 
Cape  Race  (Virgin)  Rocks 


51  39.7 

52  01.3 
51  53 


42  56 
46  26 


Long, 
D.  M.  w 
55  49. 
55  41 
55  31 
55  27.4 


.55  19.1 
55  25 


.50  00 
50  55 


Quebec  to  Belle  Isle. 


Lat. 

D.     M.  N 

46  49.1 

47  24.6 

48  03.4 
48  37.4 
48  25 

48  54.1 

49  06.2 
49  15.9 


Labrador. 

Point  des  Monts 

Egg  Island 

Lobster  Bay 

St.  Margaret's  Point 

Point  Moisic 

Manitoni  Point 

Mingan  Island 

Clearwater  Point y 

Appectetat  Bay 

Nabesippi  River,  ent 

Natashquan  River 

Kegashka  Bay 

Cape  WMtile 

Hare  Harbor 

Grand  Mec-a;tina  Point 

Mistanoque  Island 

Lion  Island 

Greenly  Island 

Forteau  Point 

Loup  Bay 

Red  Bay  Harbor  Island 

York  Point 

Battle  Islands,  S.  E.  island.. 

Cape  St.  Lewis 

Belle  Isle,  N.  E.  point 

do         S.  point 


Long. 

D.     M.  w 

71  16 
70  28 
69  28.2 
69  09 
68  52 
68  41.6 
68  15 
67  53.21 


6  Manheigin  Island  light 

Penmaquid  Point  light 

Bantum  Ledge 

Seguin  Island  light 

Brunswick 

Cape  Small  Point 

Cashes  Ledge,  shoalest  part.. 

Portland,  ligh  thouse 

do       City  hall 

Cape  Elizabeth 

Aganienticur  Hills 

Cape  Porpoise 

Bald  Head 

Cupe  Neddock  Nubble 

Boon  Island  light 


19.7 

38.3 

49.5 

02.5 

11.4 

17.7 

12.9 

12.6 

16.7 

14 

07 

11.5 

10.760 

30.5  59 

44.2|59 

15.8  58 


24.1 

23,3 

25.6 

31.6 

44 

58 

15.7 

21.4 

01.3 

53 


57 
57 
56 
56 
56 
55 
55 
55 
55 
55 


25 

13.2 

06 

47.7 

07.7 

17 

10.5 

30 

01 

15.8 

50.7 

18.3 

09.8 

20.1 

02.9 

15.1 

41.3 

13 

5P 

51.8 

28. 

55.9 

13. 

41. 

19. 

25 


Coast  of  the  United  States  of  America. 


Maine.  Lat. 

D.     M. 

entrance  of  St.  Croix  River...  45  00  t 

"^"ampo  Bello  Island,  N.  pt 44  57 

Wolf  Islands,  northernmost....  44  57.5 

Quoddy  Head,  lighthouse 44  47.5 

Grand  Manan,  N.  E.  head 44  45 

do  S.W.  head 44  34 

Libby  I.  lightho.,  entrance  of 

Machias  Bay 44  32, 

Machiaa  Seal  Is.,  2  lights 44  29 

Petit  Mnnan  light 44  92 

Baker's  Island  light 44  1J.5 

Mount  Desert  Rock  light 43  58.5 

IsleauHaut 43  59 

CaMtine 44  22.5 

[MalinicuB  Island  light 43  46.5 


Long, 

D.     M. 

67  02  w 
66  55 
66  43 
66  58 

66  45 
6J  53 

67  22 
07  05. 

67  52 

68  08 
C8  08 
68  .34 
68  45 
68  49 


New  Hampshire. 

Portsmouth,  light 

Is.  of  Shoals,  White  L  light.. 

Portsmouth 

Great  Boar's  Head 


Maasachutetta. 
Newburyport,  lights  on  Plur  I, 

Ipswich,  lights 

Squam  light 

Stroitsmouth  Harbor  light 

Cafe  Ann,  Thatcher's  I.  lights 


42  48     70  49 

42  41.170  46.5 

42  39.8  70  41.1 

42  39.7  70  35.6 

42  38.3  70  34.7 

do        Eastern  pomtIight|42  34.8  R'C  40.2 

■  30.370  50.5 

32.2  70  47.5 


Marblehead  light 

Baker's  Island,  lights 

Salem,  city  hall 

Boston,  lighthouse 

do     State  house 

Scituate  light 

Plymouth  lights 

Biihngsgate  light 

Race  Point  light 

Cafe  Cod  light 

Long  Point  light 

Chatham  Harbor,  lights.. 

Nauset  lights , 

Monomoy  Point  light 

Shoals  of  George's  Bank 
Great  Shoal,  S.  E.  point. 


Lat. 

.     M. 

43  44n 

43  48 
43  42 
43  41.0 
43  52.5 
43  40.5 

42  56 

43  3^ 
43  39.2 
43  ."•».6 
43  13 
43  21 
43  13 
43  10 
43  08 


43  03.5 

42  58 

43  04.5 
42  56 


do 
do 
do 
do 
do 


W.  pt 

N.  E.pt 

N.  shoal 

Third  shoal 

E.  shoal 

Nantucket,  Sandy  Point  lighi 
do        Brant  Point  light., 
do        Sancoty  Head.... 
Nantucket  South  Shoal* old 
Cape  Pogee  light  (Vineyard).. 
Holmes'  Hole,  W.  Chop  light 

Nobsque  Point  light 

Tari)aulin  Cove  light 

Cutterhunk  light 

Gay  Head  light 

No  Man's  Land 

New  Bedford,  Mariners'  Ch 

Clark's  Point  light 

Dumpling  Rock  light 

Gooseberry  Neck 


42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
42 
41 
42 
42 
42 
41 
41 
41 

41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 
41 


Long, 

I.     M. 

»  15  w 
69  29 
69  35 
69  44 
69  56 

69  48.8 
68  51 

70  12 
70  15.2 
70  11 
70  41 
70  25 
70  34.5 
70  35 
70  29 


70  43 
70  37.3 
70  45 
70  48 


31.5  70  53.9 


19.8 


Rhode  Island. 

Seaconnet  Point 

Newport,  Court  hooao. 
Beaver  Tail  light.. 


21.5 
12.3 
00.1 
51.6 
03.7 
02.4 
02.1 
40.3 
51.6 
33.6 

34 

42 

48 

53 

51 

47 

23.4 

17.4 

17 

04 

25.1 

29 

31.1 

26.2 

24.6 

21 

14 

38.1 

35.5 

32.2 

28.6 


41  26.5 
41  29.5 
41  26.8 


70  53.5 

71  04 
70  43.2 
70  36.8 
70  04.5 
70  14,8 
70  04 
70  10.6 
69  57.2 

69  57.3 

70  00 

67  43 
67  59 
67  47 
67  43 
67  26 
67  19 
70  03 
70  05.9 
69  59 

69  51 

70  27 
70  36,7 
70  39.9 
70  46.1 
70  57.4 
70  50,7 
70  49 
70  55.5 
70  54.2 

70  55.6 

71  02.4 


Goat  Island  light..... |4I  29  3 


71  13.5 
71  19.2 
71  24.4 
71J0J 


*N*w.  40  ST.Ui  <»  il.M 


■wp* 


LATITCDES   AND   LONGITUDES. 


635 


Dutch  bland  light 

Warwick  Neck  light 

Nayat  Point  light 

Providence  Coli '^ 

Point  Judith  light 

Block  Island,  lights 

do         8.  E.  point. 

Watch  Hilllight 

Little  Gull  Island  light..... 


New  York  and  Connecticut. 
Montauk  Point  light,  (E.  end 

Long  Island) 

Cedar  I.  light,  (Sag Harbor)... 

New  London  light 

Plum  Island  light.... 

Saybrook  Point  light 

Faulkner's  Island  light 

Nkw  Haven,  Yule  College.... 

do         light 

Stratford  Point  light 

Black  Rock  light 

Norwalk  Island 

Old  Field  light 

Baton's  Neck  light 

New  York,  City  hall, 

Sandy  Hook  light 


JV.  Jersey  and  Pennsylvania. 

Neversink,  lights 

Barnegiit  light 

Great  Egg  Harbor  entrance... 

Cape  May  light 

Cape  Henlopen  light 

Egg  Island  light 

PuiUDBiiFHU,  Independ.  hall 


Lat. 

0.     M. 

41  29 
41  34 
41  43 

41  49 
41  21 
41  13. 
41  08 

41  18. 


Long. 

N  D.      M.  ' 

.8  71  24. 

2,71  27 

5  71  20. 

671  24. 

.671  29. 

71  35 

71  34 


Lat. 

D.      M.N 

32  4S 
32  32 
32  25.5 


41  04 
41  02 
41  18, 
41  10 
41  16. 
41  12 
41  18, 
41  14, 
41  09 
41  08 
41  02 
40  58 
40  57 
40  42 
40  27 


40  23, 
39  4G, 
39  19 
38  55, 

38  47, 

39  10, 
39  57 


3j72  16. 

9  72  05. 
372  13. 
2  72  21 


6172  39. 
5;72  56. 
9  72  54. 

73  06. 

73  13. 

73  25. 

73  07. 

73  24. 

74  01 
74  00. 


73  59. 

74  07. 
74  35 

8  74  .58. 


0,75  05.5 
4  75  09 
75  09. 


East  Const  of  Florida. 

River  St.    John's,    (General's 
Mount) 

3t.  Augustine,  lighthouse 

5  3ape  Canaveral 

Outer  breakers  ofTdo 

Tortulas  orHuminocks 

8  Hillsborough  Island,  North  pt, 

Hillsborough  Island,  South  pt. 

Mount  Peliido  or  Bald  Head... 

8  Greenville's  Inlet 

5]  Cooper's  Hill 

?and  Hills 

Uiew  Inlet 

Middle  River  entrance 


Maryland  and  Virginia, 

Smith's  Island  light 37  13 

Cape  CharlcB ,...37  03 

Cape  Henry  light 36  56 

Norfolk 36  51 

Old  Point  Comfort 37  00 

Yorktown |37  13 

Petersbuig 137  14 

Richmond |.?7  32 

Washinoton  City,  Capitol.... '.is  53. 

Baltimore ,3'^  17 

AnnapoUs,  Md 'iS  59 


North  Carolina. 

Currituck  Inlet 

Cape  Hatteras 

Deep  soundings  off  do.. 

Ocracoke  Inlet 

Cape  Lookout 

Deep  soundings  oiT  do.. 

Old  Topsail  Inlet 

Beaufort 

Wilmington 

Brunswick 

Smithville 

New  Inlet  entrance 

Cape  Fear 

Deep  soundings  off  do.. 


South  Carolina. 

GsORQETOWtr 

Georgetown  lighthouse 

Cape  Roman 

CnARLESTow,  Fort  Pinckney. 


36  23 
35  14 
35  06 
35  05, 
34  37 
34  28 
34  41 
34  43 
34  14 
34  02 
33  54 
33  56 
33  48 
33  35 


33  22 
33  12. 
33  01 
32  46 


75  52 

76  02 
76  04 
76  19 
76  22. 

76  34 

77  25 
77  27 
77  03 
76  39 
76  33 


75  55 

75  30 

5  75  59 

76  33 

76  40 

76  40 

77  58 

77  58 

78  01 
77  55 
77  04 


79  17 

5  79  10 

,79  24 

i79  55. 


8  Charleston  lighthouse 

iNorih  Eddisto  Inlet 

8Bi;AuroRT,  (S.  C.) 

8  Port  Royal  entrance,  (Bar) 32  09 

3  — ^™..^_ 

Georgia. 

Tybee  light 32 

.271  52     Savannah .'32 

41  12.3  72  06.8St.Ci;therine's  Sound,  (Bar)....  31 

Sapcllo  Bar ....31 

Doboy  Bar 31 

Light  on  St.  Simon's  Island, 

271  51.9     South  point 31 

1  Brunswick 31 

8  St.  Andrew's  Sound 31 

2|S.  point  Cumberland   Island, 


Long.  I 
D.    M.  wl 

79  54.2 

80  10 
80  40 
80  36 


Amelia  Island,  S.  pi.. 


South  Coast  of  Florida. 

Cape  Florida,  light 

Cayo  Lnrgo,  N.  E.  point.... 

Key  Tnvernier 

Old  Matccumbe,  S.  W.  point.. 

Key  Sombrero 

Looe  Key 

Samboes  Keys  (centre) 

Key  West,  S.  W,  point 

Sand  Key,  Cayo  Arena 

Torrugas  Islands  and  Banks, 

N.  E.  part 

N.  W.  part 

S.  E.  part 

S.  W.  part 


Bush  Key  light. 


West  Coast  of  Florida. 

Key  Vacns 

Key  Axi 

Cape  Sable 

Cape  Roman 

Entrance  Bay  Curios 

Tampa  Bay,  entrance 

Anclote  Keys 

St.  Mark's,  lighthouse 

Dog  Island  light 

Cape  St.  George 

(;.,,•-  St.  Bias 

&t.  Joseph's  Bay,  entrance.. 
St.   Andrew's  Island,  N.  W. 

point 

St.  Rosa's  Bay,  entrance.... 

Pensacola,  Town 

Pcnsacoln,  Light 

Mobile  Point,  light 


00 
05 
41 
32 
20 

08 
08 
00 

45 
30 


80  52 

81  08.3 

11 

15 


20.5 

52.2 

27 

28 

35 

32 

14 

01 

47 

42 

32 

18 

08 


41 

18 

59 

51 

38 

33 

27.5 

32.7 

26 

41 

40 

33.5 

31 

36.7 


•34  42 

24  57 

25  04 

25  50 

26  57 

27  36 

28  25 
30  04 

29  43.5 
29  35 
29  39 

29  51.6 

30  03 
30  27 
30  24 
30  19 
30  13.7 


81  22 

81  36 

81  42 

81  39 

81  37 

81  35 


81  33 
81  25 
80  33 
80  28 
80  30 
80  18 
80  11 
80  11 
80  02 
80  03 
80  03 
80  00 
80  00 


80  05.5 
80  16.5 
80  31.5 

80  44 

81  07 
81  24 
81  40 
81  48. 

81  53 

82  47 
82  53 

82  53.2 

83  07 
82  54 


81  05 
81  07 
81  06 

81  66 

82  18 
82  48 
82  54 
84  20 

84  41 

85  04 
85  21 
85  26 

85  37.7 

86  31 

87  10.2 
87  16.9 
87.58 


636 


LATITUDES    AND   LONGITUDES. 


S.  Pass \-2S 

a.  VV  Pass,  pilot slal'iiaB  58.5 

New  Orleans '29  SIJ 

Barrataria ■•ii)  17i 

Bayuu  La  Fourclip '29  06 

Timbiilier  Island,  (Tunljalier,) 
N.  VV.  point |29  n5 


Mobile  Bar , 

Mobile 

Massacre  Island,  W.  point 

Ship  Island,  S.W.  point 

Ciiandelirr  I.-^innds,  N.  point.. 
——  S.  point  Fulos  Island.. 


Lat. 

10 

41.8 


n. 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30  01 

29  40 


Long. 

1).      M.  W 

87  58 
H7  59 


1-2.0  88  Q2 
12.  G  (^8  51 

H8  44 
88  50 


iMiiisiami. 

Key  Breton,  N.  K.  point 29  29 

Mississirri  River — 

Pass  M'outre !29  11 

N.  E.  Pass,  Light 29  08.5 

S.  E.  Pass !29  00 

.>9.7 


entrance., 


Racoon  point 
Bayou  Dt'scurte 

Point  au  Fcr 

Rabbit  Island 

Sabine  River,  entrance 
(.Nlveztown  entrance... 


2"»  03 

29  10 

29  194 

29  29 

29  411.  C. 

'29  17 


89  07 

89  00 
89  01. 
188  57 
89  07.4 

89  20 

90  00. 

89  57 

90  10 

90  23 

9;)  57 


Porto  Rieo. 

Cape  St.  John,  or  N.  E 

Porto  Rico,  St.  Augustine's 

Battery,  western  turret.... 
Point  Bruquen,  or  N.  W...« 

Point  St.  Francisco 

Cape  Roxo,  or  S.  W.  point.. 

Caxa  de  Loa  Muertos 

Point  Coamo 

C.  Mala  Fasqua,  or  S.  E.  pt. 


04 
22 
30 

49 
45 


Islands  ln  'riiE  West  Inpiks 


Windwiird  Islands. 

TRlNinAD 

Port  Spiiin,  (Fort  St.  David,). 

Iciique  Point 

Point  (iaiole 

Point  Galcra 


Tobngo,  N.  E.  point 

Grenada,  (Fori) 

Barbadoes,  (Engineers'  Wh't'.; 

St.  Vincent's',  Kingston 

St.  Lucia 

S.  point 


Maninico,  Diamond  Rock., 
Port  Royal 


Dominica,  Roseau 

riie  Saint's  Island,  W.  point.. 

Mariegiilante,  S.  point 

Uuadabmpe,  Basse  Terre.. 
N.  W.  poio 


Aniigua,  Fort  James., 


Virshi  Islands. 

Montserrni,  N.  H.  point 

Reilondo  I.'^liind 

Nevis,  (!li:irl(  ."ton 

St.  ClirisiiipJK  r's,  or 

Basse  Terre., 

St.  Euf-latia,  Road 

Sal/a,  ••en  I  re 

Avea  (ir  liird's  Island 

Barbuda,  N.  point  

St.  n.irllioloincw,  S.  p<'int 

S^  Mnrlin's,  Marigol  Fort 

Ant'iiill,!,  S.  W.  point 

\nj.'iiilli>tit,  N.  E.  point 

Prickly  Pear 

Siiiiilirero 

St  Croix,  Town 

\n('t.'ii(ln,  S.  ()oint  of  shoal... 

VV.pt 

VirL'in  Ciordn,  E.  P 

Hi.  Jnhn'.'i,  S.  point 

Si.  'I'lioTniis,  Fori  Clirisiinn.. 


Lat,       Long 

M.  N  ^1).      M.  w 

10  39     |(il  31 

llil  57 

()V  00 

't)0  .-it) 

1  lilt  27 

9  61  48.9 
.59 


10  04 
10  10 

10  ,50 

11  20 

12  02 

13  04 

13  12 

14  OG 

13  41 

14  26.6  61 

14  35.9,61 

15  18.361 
15  50.8  61 


MoNA  Island,  £.  point 

Monito  Island, 

Zacheo  or  Dessecho  Island.. 


Lat. 

M. 

18  24N 

18  29 
18  31 
18  SI 
17  57 
17  50 
17  55 

17  59 

18  07 
18  11 
18  24 


65  39 

66  07.1 

67  08 
67  15 
67  08 
66  33 

66  30 
65  52 

67  47 
67  52 
67  27 


St.  Domingo  or  Hispaniola. 

Cape  Bngaiio 

Snona  Island,  £.  part 

Si.  Catherine's  Island 

Si.  Domingo 

La  Catalina 

Aliavelu,  Rock 

Cape  Jaqueinel 

Island  Vaca  (ii  Vache)  E.  end 

Point  Gravois 

Cape  Tiberon 

Navnza  Island 

Cape  Donna  Maria 

Jereniie 

Cayniito 

Petit  Guave 

Leogano 

Port  au  Prince 

I.  Gonave,  S.  E.  P 

N.  VV.  P 


61 
61 
61 


37.7 
16 
01 
00 
02.7 
04.2 
25 
38.4 
15  .52     l61   17 

15  59. .561  44. 3|Capc  Raphael 

16  20     161  50.7 

17  08     61  52.5 


Point  St.  Mark 

St.  Nicola,  Mole 

Tortngas,  E.  point 

Cape  Hayti  Ciiy,  watering  tur' 

Cape  Francois 

Shoal  off  Monte  Chriate 

Monte  Christe 

Grange  Point 

Point  Isabella 

Cape  Samana,  Banisire  Bay, 
S.  side 


47.6  6'2 
56  |62 
08.7.62 


12 
25 
37. 


18  35 
18  12 

18  18 
18  29 
18  08 

17  28.2 

18  10 
18  04 
18  01 
18  20 
18  24 
18  37 
18  37 
18i39 
18  24 
18  30 
18  33 
18  40 

18  58 

19  02 

19  52 

20  02 


19  40 

20  02 
19  54 
19  54 
19  57 


17  17.7,62  12 
17  29      63  00      Kalinouili 
17  41.2  63  13. 5 St.  Ann's 
40..5(;3  38..5,P,irt  Maria.. 
47      62  02     |Annella  Bay 
53..5'62  56.9  N.  E.  point 
05.3|(i3  03 
63  13 
58 
23 
27 
40 
13 
20 
21 
44 


Jamaica. 

Morant,  E.  point... 

Port  Royal,  Fort  Charles., 

Portland  Point 

Pedro  Blnffs 

Savannah-la-Mar,  Fort 

Cape  Necril,  S.  point 

Montego  Bay 


10 
18 


18  20 
18  S.-^.O, 


44. 

32 
41 
311 
18 
21 


62 
63 
(13 
61 
lit 
114 
61 
()4 
«.4 


VIoraiit  Keys,  or  Lus  Paiias. 
Pi.iiiio  Smoals — 
inland  R.,N.  E.  P 

S  iiilli  Ki  y 

Kuck  li\('  ('('ct  above  water.. 

.N.  Pi.  Pedro  Shonl 

I'"ornii;;.'!H  Slioul,  N.  E.  P 

S.  VV.  P 

Li'tle  Cavinaii,  S.  VV.  P 

Civiiiaiiliriick,  E,  P 


68  20 

68  39 

69  00 
()9  52 

70  11 

71  39.5 

72  33 

73  34 

73  53 

74  28 

75  00 
74  23 
74  03 
73  43 

50 
72  33 
72  21 

72  45 

73  13 

72  47 

73  22.1 
|7i!  31 


19  46.472  11.2 


69  53 
7142 
71  34 
71  36 
71  01 


19  10.2.69  15.4 


19  04 


68  52 


76  11,2 
76  50,5 


17  56 

17  56.1 

17  43.577  11 

17  52.577  45 

18  12.378  08 
18  15    |78  24 


18  29 
18  28 
18  27 
18  22 
18  16 
18  09 


177  56 
177  41.51 
77  15 
76  54 
76  45 
76  20.51 


17  25    ;75  59 

17  07.577  28 
16  57    |77  53 

78  15 
78  ,54 
7d50 
176  00 
81)14 
,79  45 


16  48 

17  36 

A  ^   UO 

IS  27 
19  36 
19  44 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITUDES. 


637 


07.ll 


fi8  39 
lB9  00 
ll)9  52 
|70  11 
271  39. 
172  33 
73  34 

73  53 

74  28 

75  00 
174  23 
74  03 
73  43 
i72  50 
l72  33 
79  21 

72  45 

73  13 
,72  47 
,73  22.1 
17;!  31 

472  11.2 
69  53 
17142 
7134 
7136 
[7101 

).269  15. 
68  52 


76  11.2 
176  50.5 
577  11 
577  45 

2.37808.5 
178  24  I 
|77  56 
177  41 .5| 

77  15 
■6  54 
76  45 
76  20.5 


!8 


25    175  59 


07.577  28 

77  53 

178  15 

78  54 


57 
48 


36 

27 

36 

n44 


,„,  50 
176  00 
80  14 
79  45 


Grand  Cayman,  Fort  George, 

W.  end 

E.  P 

Swan  Islands,  E.  P 

New  Shoal,  (Sandy  Key)... 


South  Side  of  Cuba. 

Cape  Maize 

Entrance  Cumberland  Harbor 
St.  Ja8o  de  Cuba,  entrance.. 

Tarquin's  Peak 

Cape  Cruz 

Manzanilla 

Key  Breton 

Trinidad  River 

Bay  Xagua 

Stone  Keys 

Los  Jardinillos,  S.  E.  point  of 

the  Bank 

Canal  del  Rosario 

I.Pines,E.  P 

S.W.P 

Point  Piedros 

Cape  Corrientes 

Cape  St.  Antonio 


North  Side  of  Cuba, 

Sancho  Pedro  Shoal 

Los  Colorados,  S.  W.  P.... 
N.  E,  P 


Bahia  Honda,  entrance... 

Port  Cabanas 

Mariel 

Havana,  (the  Moro) 

Point  Escondido 

Point  Guanos 

Pan  of  Matanzas 

Matanzas..... 

Point  Ycacos 

Key  Cruz  del  Padre,  N.  point 
Las  Cabezas,  centre  N.  point.. 

Nicola's  Shoal 

Key  Verde 

Point  Maternillos 

Nuevitas 21  36 

Point  de  Mulas,  entrance |21  U5 

Tanamo 20  44.5:75  12.2 


Lat. 

D.     M. 

19  14  N 
19  2J 
17  25 
15  52 


20  15 
19  54 
19  58 
19  55 

19  47 

20  20 

21  05 

21  43 

22  02 
21  57 

21  35 
21  33 
21  32 

21  25 

22  00 
21  45 
21  52 


22  01 
22  09 

22  44 

23  01 
23  02.5 
23  03 
23  09.4 
23  08 
23  08 
23  02 
23  03 
23  13 
23  18 
23  K) 
23  14 
23  09 
21  41 


Long. 

I.      M. 

81  24  w 
81  10 
83  51 
78  33 


Providence  Caycos,  N.  W.  pt, 

WestCaycos,  S.  W.  pt 

South  Point  Shoal 


74  06 

75  1.3 

76  00 

76  51 

77  45 
77  20 

79  43 

80  13 

80  42 

81  15 

81  15 

82  03 

82  31 

83  07 

83  55 

84  32 
84  59 


Passage  Islands. 
Great  Inagua    or  Heneasua, 

N.  E.  P .... 

Statira  Shoal,  S.  E.  P. 

S.  W.  P., 

N.  VV.  P, 


Lat. 

D.     M. 

21  50  N 
21  37.5 
21  02.5 


Little  Heneagua,  E.  P.. 
W.  P 


Hogsties  or  Corrolaos 

Lookout  or  Cuidado  Bank. 

.Mayuguana,  E.  Reef. 

N.do 

S.  W.  point 


13.  poin*.  French  Keys,  or  I. 

Planas 

.Mirnporvos,  S.  K^y 

Castle  Island,  or  S.  Key 

Fortune  Island,  S.  P 

North  Kay,  Bird  Island 


21  20 
20  55 

20  55 

21  09 
21  29 
21  29 
21  40 

21  57 

22  20 
22  32 
22  22 


22  41 
22  05 
22  07 
22  32 
22  49.5 


Long, 

D.  M. 

72  20  w 
72  27 
71  42 


73  00 
73  08 
73  38 
73  40 

72  55 

73  06 
73  48 
72  55 

72  40 

73  09 
73  11 

73  27 

74  31 
74  20 
74  23 
74  24 


85  02 
84  48 
84  08 
83  13 
82  59 
82  47 
82  22 
I  51 
81  44 
81  46 
81  40.2 
81  10.2 
80  53 
80  36 
^0  19 
80  14 
77  08 
77  06 
75  31 


Great  Bahama  Bank. 

Crooked  Island,  W.  P 

Acklin's  Island,  N.  E.  P 

Atwood's  Keys,  or  I.  Samana, 

E.  P 

W.  P 


Rum  Key,  E.  P 

Watling's  Island,  N.  E.  P., 
S.W.P 


Conception  o\'  Little  Island 

St.  Salvador,  or  Guanahari,  S. 

E.  P 

N.  P 


Key  Moa 120  43 

Point  Guarico '20  39 

Baracoa,  Town 2)  21 


74  47 
74  41 
74  24 


Caycos  I,  I 

N.  Point  Bajo  Navidad 20  12 

Silver  Key  Bank,  S.  E.  end...  2D  14 

N.  E.  do 20  35 

N.do 20  12 

SquareHanJkerchief,N.E.P.21  07 

S.  E.  P 20  49 

S.W.P 20  55 


Turks  Island,  N.   P.,  Grnndj 

Turk 21  32 

Turks  Island,  Salt  Key 21  20 

Sand  Key 21  11. 

Bndymion  Rocks 21  07 

Great  Caycos  I.,  S.  pt.,  SwimJ 


mer  Shoal 21 

N.  E.  pt.  or  Shoal  Si.| 

Philip 21 

N.  W.  part 21 


North  Caycos,  middle 21 

Booby  Rocks,  ofTdo 21 


05 

42 
53 

5() 

58 


22  48., 

22  44 

23  05 
23  04 

23  41 

24  08 
23  55 
23  50 


illeuthera,  or  Hetera  Island, 

S.P 

N.  P 


68  46 
9  32 

ai  17 
t;9  .52 

70  26 
70  23 

70  56 

71  04 
71  118 
71   10.5 
71   15 

71  27 

71  20 

72  17 
71  .'i7 
71  M 


Vassau,  New  Providence,  light 

Andros  Islands,  S.  P 

N.  E.  P 

Berrv   Islands,   S.  E.   Whale 

Key... 

Great  Stirrups  Key,  centre 

Slack  wood's  Bush 

Little  Isaac,  Eastern 

Treat  Isaac 

licinini  Island,  Southern 

Jun  Key  light 

South  Riding  Rocks 

)rcingo  Keys,  North 

South 


Ginger  Key 

Key  Lobos,  Beacon  20  feet. 
Las  IMucnrns,  Diamond  Point, 

Key  Siin  Domingo 

Key  Verde  Island 

Key  Sal,  Ragged  Island 

Yumn,  or  Lung  I.,  S.  P 

N.  P 


Exuma,  N.  W.  P.. 


Little  Bahama  Banks, 
The  Hole  in  the  Wali«... 

Light  on  do 

E.  point  of  Abaco 

Elbow  Reef. 

Man  of  War  Key 

Great  Gunnn  Kpv 


58.5 


24  09 
24  42 

24  37 

25  34 
25  05. 

23  44 
25  10 

25  25 
25  49 
25  27 

25  51 

26  02 
2.1  44 
25  34.6 
25  14 

24  57 
24  54 
22  4fi 
22  22.5 
22  11 

21  42 

22  02 
22  12 

22  50 

23  45 
23  42 


74  23 
73  51 

73  37 

73  48 

74  46 
74  25 

74  32 

75  05 

75  18 

75  43 

76  08 

76  43 

77  21.21 

77  38 

78  02 

77  44 

77  ,53 

78  03 

78  51 .3 

79  06.S 
79  20 
79  18.4 
79  09 
79  08 
79  08.5 
78  08 
77  33 
77  14 
75  45 
75  10 
75  42 

74  50 

75  18 

76  00 


25  51 

25  51.5 

26  18 
26  34 
26  37.5 
26  42 


77  09 
77  10.6 
76  57 
76  52 

76  57. 

77  114 


■^•^spp 


■""l^pjf^wl 


^PH 


638 


LATITUDES  AND  LONGITUDES. 


Little  Bahama  Bank,  N.  P.. 

Memory  Ruck 

Sand  Key 

Wood  Key 

Great  Bahama,  W.  P 

E.  P 

Salt  Key  Bank. 


Dog  Keys,  N.  W.  P, 

Water  Key 

Do'ble.Headed  Shot  Key,  lijjlit 

Salt  Key 

Anguilla,  E.  P.  small  island... 

Bermuda, 

Georgetown 

Wreck  Hill,  westernmost  land 


I    Lilt. 

p.       M. 

.27  35 N 
.a«  55 
.21)  49 
.36  45 
.26  42 
.26  40 

.24  04 

.!23  .59 

23  56.4 

23  42 

23  29 


32  22.2 
32  18.5 


Long.  I  South  Coast  of  the  Gulf  of 
u.    M.  Mexico. 

79  llw  Vigia 

79  02      Point  Roca  Parlida 

9  01.5  Point  Morillos 

79  02     Pic  de  San  Martin 

79  01      Point  Olapa 

77  48      Point  Misuppe 

Barilla 

79  50     Bar  Uuazacoalcos 

80  17      River  TonatB  

80  27.6  River  St.  Ann 

80  24      River  Cupiico 

79  26      DosBocas 

River  Chittepeque 

River  Tubnsco 

64  37.6|River  St.  Peter  and  Paul 

64  50      Island  Carmen,  Wt.  P 


East  Coast  of  America,  fi.jm  Gui.f  of  Mexico 
TO  Cape  Horn. 


Texas.  |     Lat. 

In.    M. 

Cralveston  Inlet 29  17  n 

W.  P.  Gulviston  kluiid 29  04 

Rio  Bniziw U28.58 

Pnsn  del  Ciiballo i28  24 

Arunzas  Inlet :27  49 

Corpus  Cliristi 127  36.5 

Braze  de  S.inliiiijo i26  06 

Rio  Bravo  del  Morie 25  56 

River  St.  Fernando,  entrance, j25  22 

Inlets  to  Luguna  Madre |25  02 

Bar  de   la    Marine,   entrance 

River  St.  Ander 123  45 

BardclTordo !22  52 

Mount  Commandante !22  48 


Long, 
p.    M. 

94  45  w 

95  26 

95  33 

96  18 

97  04 
97  16 
97  12 
97  12 
97  32 
97  41 

97  58 
97  57 
97  58 


East  Const  of  Mexico. 

Bar  de  la  Trinidad 

Bar  Ciee:a 

River  Tanipico 

Point  de  Xeres 

Cape  Roju 

Tamiaaiia  City 

River  Tuspan,  en'rance 

Point  Piedras 

RiverCazoncs 

Tenestequcpe 

Boca  da  Lima 

River  Toculata,  entrance... 

Mount  Gordo 

River  Nauta,  entrance 

River  Palnias,entrance 

Point  Piedras 

River  de  Santa  Noa 

Point  Delgada 

Point  M.  Andrea 

Point  de  Bemat 

Rivor  St.  John  Angel 

Xalapa 

Peak  de  Orizaba 

Point  de  Zampola 

River  St.  Carlos 

River  Antigua 

Point  Gorda 

Vera  Cruz 

St.  John  de  Ulloa 

Xamapa 

River  Medelin,  entrance.... 

Point  Anton  Lizardo 

Bar  de  Alvarado 

Tlwotalpan 


39 
34 
16 
55 
45 
16 
58 


97  57 

97  58 

98  02 
97  45 
97  22 
97  29 
97  18 

45.5  97  12 
42  97  12 
97    9 


40 

33. 

27 

16 

13 

10 

(10 

55 

49 

43 

40 

32 

32 

02 

30 

26 

20 

15 

12 

12i 

04 

06 

04 

46 

35 


97  04 
97  00 
97  01 
96  47 
96  45 
96  35 
96  30 
96  2() 
96  21 
96  21 
96  20 

96  50 

97  09 
96  16 
96  15 
96  14 
96  04 
9G  0» 
96  08 

95  5R 

96  04 
95  5H 
93  45 
95  36 


'.   Yucatan. 

Point  E.«condido 

Javinal 

Point  Morroa 

Caaipeche 

Point  Desconocida 

Point  Gorda 

Point  Piedras 

Yxil 

St.  Clara 

Bocns  de  Silan...  

El  Cnyo 

Island  Jolvas,  N.  P 

Island  Contoy,  N.  P 

Areas  Island 

North  Bishop 

S.  W.  TiiiMi;r|e 

Niw  Shoal 

Island  Arenas 

Baxo  Nnevo 

Sisal  Fort 

Alucranes 

X.  part  of  Bank  ofl'  this  coast 

N.  E.  do 

I.  de  Mugeres  or  Women's  I., 

Cawkun,  S.  P 

New  River 

River  Bacales 

Bay  A.'tcension,  entrance, 
Island  Cosuniel,  N.  E.  P, 

S.  W.  P 


Honduras. 

Pt.  Tanack 

N.  Triiingle,  N.  Key.... 

Sandy  Key,  S.  P 

S.  P.  Atnbcrgris  Key  I. 

Bamze 

Tunu'dRfef,  N.  Pt 

S.  Pt 


Eiif;lish  Key 

Halt'  Moon  Key  lighthouse.. 

Hat  Key 

Tobacco  Key  I 

Santanilla  or  Swan  J 

Glover's  Reef,  N.  P 

S.  P 


Renegado  Key 

Sapotilla's  Keys,  S.  E.  P., 

Rattan  I.,  E.  P 

W.  P 


Guanaja,  or  Bonacca  I.,  S.  P. 

Cape  Three  Points 

Oinoa 


Lat. 

D.   M. 

18  36  N 
18  43 
18  40 
18  30 
18  34 
IB  21 
18  11 
18  11 
18  18 
18  20 
18  26 
18  26 
18  24 
18  34 
18  38 
18  38 


18  58 

19  10 
19  45 

19  49 

20  46 

21  06 
31  09 
21  30 
21  22 

21  aJ4 

21  30 
21  30 

21  36 
20  13 
30  30.5 
20  55 

20  33 

22  07 

21  50.2 

21  10.1 

22  32.3 

23  43 
23  27 
21  18 
20  42 
20  26 

.20  05 

19  26 

20  36 
20  10 


Long. 


18  w 
11 

.54 

10 
IM  50 
'J4  38 
94  35 

91  a2 

93  5» 
93  49 
93  26 
93  06 
93  02 
98  40 

92  31 
9151 


91  15 
90  58 
90  43 
90  33 
90  36 
90  13 

90  07 
89  24 

89  03 

88  56 
87  43 

87  II 
86  53 

91  59 
93  13 

92  15 
91  50 

91  35 

92  04.V 

90  03 

89  43 

88  43 
80  37 
86  43 

86  58 

87  15 

87  34 

88  03 

86  45 

87  OU 


18  54 
18  44 
18  32 
17  52 
17  29 
17  39 
17  10 
17  19 
17  13 
17  10 

16  57 

17  23 
16  55 
16  41 
16  30 
16  10 
16  33 
16  16 
16  24 
15  .59 
15  47 


87  42 
87  15 

87  18 

88  01 
88  13 
87  41 

87  56 

88  03 
87  34 

87  41 

88  04 
83  51 
87  40 

87  48 

88  n 
88  14 
86  15 
86  51 
86  00 
88  34 
88  01 


LATItUDES  AND  LONGITUDE.S. 


639 


Point  Ssl 

Triunfo  de  la  Cruz 

UiUls,  N.P 

Traxillo 

Cape  Delegado,  or  Honduras. 

Cape  Cameron 

C«pe  False 

Cape  Gracios  &  Dios 


Mosquito  Shore. 
Caxonnes,  W.  P 

— ^  SEP 
AlagarteAlla,  N."  W.  P.!... 

Seranilla,  N.  E.  Breaker 

Seranilla,  W.  Breaker 

Sarranna,  N.  P 

Sarranna,  S.  P 

Muaketeers,  centre 

Providence  I.,  N.  P 

Bracman'a  Bluff. 

Little  Corn  Island 

Great  Corn  Island 

St.  Andrew,  middle 

E.  S.  E.  Keys 

S.  S.  W.  Key  or  Albuquerque 

River  St.  John,  S.  P 

Port  Boco  Toro 


Darien. 

Escudo,  N.  P 

River  Chagre,  entrance.. 

Porto  Bello ■ 

Point  Manzanillo 

Point  St.  Bias 

Point  Mosc  hi  toB 

Isle  of  Pines 

Cape  Tiburon 


Lat. 

D.  M. 

15  53  N 

15  55 

16  06 

15  54 

16  00 
16  02 
15  14 
15  00 


16  07 
16  02 
15  09 
15  45 
15  41 
14  29 
14  15 
13  31 

13  23 

14  02 
12  14 
12  09 
12  33 
12  24 
12  08 
10  57 

9  25 


Cartagena. 

Point  Caribana 

Point  Arboletes 

Island  Fuerte 

S  Barnard,  N.  W.  P 

Caktaoena 

Punta  de  la  Galera  de  Samba. 
West  ent.  River  Magdalen.... 


St.  Martha. 

St.  Martha 

Cape  Ajuga 

Bank  Navio  quebrador. 

Hacha 

Cape  La  Vela 

Point  Gallinas 

Monges  Islands,  N.  F... 

Cape  Chichibacoa 

Point  Espada 

St.  Carlos 


Maraeaybo. 

Makacaybo 

Coro 

Point  Cnrdon 

Point  Macniln 

Cape  St.  Roman 

Island  Oriibn,  N.  W.  P.. 
S.  E.  P 


9  14 
9  19 
9  34 
9  39^ 
9  35 
9  08 
9  01 


oint  Auricula., 


Venezuela. 
'oint  Znmuro 


8  41 


8  38 

8  55 

9  24 
9  49 

10  26 

10  47 

11  05 


11  15 
11  20 
11  26 

11  33 

12  11 
12  25 
12  28 
12  15 
12  04 
10  57 


10  39 

11  21 

11  36 

12  04 
12  11 
12  36 
12  24 
11  .56 


II  2fi 


Long. 

D.  M. 

87  48  w 
87  38 
87  02 
86  02 
86  06 
85  14 
83  21 
83  12 


83  18 
83  08 
8S  27 
79  41 

79  58 

80  16 
80  23 

80  03 

81  20 
83  20 

82  58 

83  03 
81  43 
81  28 

81  52 
83  37 

82  12 


80  57 
79  59 
79  40 
79  32 
79  03 
77  58 
77  50 
77  27 


76  58 
76  30 
76  16 
75  56 
75  38 
75  30 
74  56 


74  18 
74  16 
73  15 
72  59 
72  16 
71  44 
71  03 
71  20 
71  13 
71  44 


71  45 
G9  50 
70  23 
71)  22 
70  00 
70  12 
70  01 
69  56 


f)8  59 


Point  Soldado 

Key  Borracho 

Point  Tucatas 

Porto  Cabello 

Point  St.  John  Andres 

Point  Orlcaro 

Point  Trinchera 

LAfJUIRA 

Carracas 

Ccntinella  I.,  or  White  Rock., 

Cnpc  Codern 

Curacoa  I.,N.  P , 

S.  E.  P 


Little  Curacoa., 
Buenayre,  N.  P. 
S.  P. 


Birds  or  Avcs  I.  Western. 

Eastern 

Los  Roques,  W.  P 

S.  E.  P 


Orchilla  I.,  mid 

Blanca  I.,  mid 

E.  Point  Tortuga  L... 
Seven  Brothers,  mid.. 

Margarita,  W.  P 

E.  P 


I.  Cuagua  or  Pearl  I., 

Friars  I 

LSola 

Testigos  I 

iVIorrode  Unare 

New  Barcelona 

I.  Borracho 


Cumana. 

Cumana 

Pta.  de  Araya 

Morro  Chocopnia 

Escondido  or  Hidden  Port 

Cape  Molapasqua 

Oap"?  Three  Points 

Pcint  Galera 

Point  Pena  or  Salinn 

Dragon's  Mouth 

River  Gaurupiche,  entrance... 

Point  Redondo 

Mouth  of  Oronoco  River 

Cape  Nassau 


Giiayana. 

Essequebo  River 

Ue.merara,  lighthouse 

River  Beibicc,  entrance 

Surinam  River,  entrance... 

Paramaribo 

R.  Marouri,  entrance 

CAVEiV.NFi 

Mouth  of  Oyapock  River.. 

Cape  Orange 

R.  Ca?.>'ipour,  entrance 

Cape  North 


Lut. 

D.     M. 

11  14n 

10  57 
10  51 
10  28 
10  30 
10  34 
10  37 
10  36 
10  30 
10  50 

10  36 

12  24 
12  02 

11  59 

12  19 
12  02i 
12  00 
11  57 


Maranham. 
Northern  mouth  of  River  Ania 

z>>n 

Southern  do 

Cape  Ma!»oaiiy 

Point  TdgiucH 

Pan  

Biy  M  irucuiio 

Cm!  ('  11  •rjior 


50 
47 
48 
51 

10  55 

11  47  A 
10  59 
10  59 

10  49 

11  11 
11  20 
11  23 
10  06 
10  10 
10  19 


10  28 

10  38 

10  42 

10  40 

10  42 

10  45 

10  43 

lU  43 

10  43 

10  12 

9  50 

8  50 

7  32 


7  02 
6  49 
6  23 
5  57 
f'  48 
.,  53 
4  56 
4  14 
4  14 
3  50 
1  49 


Long, 
0.  M, 
68  40  w 
68  22 
68  21 

68  07 
67  50 
67  18 
67  08 
67  02 

67  OU 
66  15 

66  12 

69  17 

68  49 
68  45 
08  31 
68  22 

67  46 
67  32 
67  01 
66  38 
S6  13 

64  41 

65  18 
64  31 
64  30 

63  52 

64  18 
63  49 
63  40 

63  13 

65  22 

64  48 
64  51 


64  16 
64  30 
63  54 
63  29 
63  07 
62  46 
62  34 
61  56 

61  51 

62  43 
61  43 
60  00 
58  40 


58  26 
58  llj 
W1  U 
55  03 
55  00 
53  49 
.52  13 
51  26 
51  11 
51  00 
50  06 


1  IOn 
0  05  s 
0  12 

0  32 

1  28 
0  33 
0  46 


50  00 
49  45 
48  29 

47  58 

48  29 
47  41 
47  06 


1 


••^BWW!*^'  r  »m  ^  ■.'Wi^ 


640 


LATITUDES   AND    LONGITUDES. 


Cape  Gurapi 

Shoal  off  do 

E.  Poinl  of  Island  of  St.  Joao.. 
Vigia,  foil  in  willi  by  M.  du 

Sylvia,  officer  of  the  Bni/.il 

iun  Marine,  in  1824  or  1825 
Vifjia  of  Manuei-Luis,  Wester- 

ly  Rock 

(VIondraIn  Itacolomi 

Ml.  Alletire  (the  summit) 

Alcantara  (west  church; 

RockE.  oflslo  Medo 

City  of  San  Luis  dc  Maranham 

(cathedral) 

Fort  Sam  Antonio  das  Areias, 

the  tlasr  staff. 

Fort  San  Marcos 

Isle   Maranham,   (white   sand 

hills,  north  pan) 

Breokers  of  Coroa  Grande,  the 

north  one 

Northwest  one 

West 

Isle  St.  Anne,  N.  E.  point 

Breakers  of  Isle  St.  Anne,  E. 

point 

Morro  Ale^re 

Lancocs  Grande,  E.  point 

River  Pcjuicas,  E.  point 

River  Tutoya,  entrance 

River  Tapuyu,  entrance 

Mt.  Topuyu,  W.  summit 

Mt.  Ticondiba,  summit 

Point  dc  Jcricacoara,  the  high- 
est sand  hill 

Sand  Hill,  near  the  shore 

Mount  Memoca 

Fernando  Noronha 

Roceas,  (dangerous) 

Pernambuquinho 

Morro  Melancia 

Sand  hill  of  Parati 

Mountains  of  Clara,  1st 

2d.  summit 

3d.      do     

Ith.     do     

')th.     do     

Clara,  steeple  in  the  city 

oint  Macoripc 

Morro  Araca'i,  suinmit 

Point  Hi'idro  (irande 

Rcleiro  Pcqiieno,  remarkabli 

sand   hill 

Morro  'I'lbao 

Poinl  i\r  Mil 

Poii:S  du  'I'tilinifo 

Bri-a!;(  r)  das  Ureas 

'Do.)  di>  la  Lavandcla 

Point  falcaiihar,  HJnmiit 

Point  Petctinya,  low 


Lat. 

D.    M. 

0  39  f 

0  36 

1  1!) 


0  32 


Ihazil. 

Cape  St.  Rngi.T 

Fort  iif  Rio  (iraiKir 

Point  Nrgra,  Mountain 

Point  Pii)a,sand  moimt 

Pialiia  Fenno.-a,  S.  point 

rialiia  (la 'rriiicno,  N.  jioinl 

Churrh  of  St.  Theresa 

Fort  Ciibedello 

Paraniihyha  de  Norte 


51 
09 
17 
24 
30 


2  31 

2  29 
2  28 

2  25 


10 
13 
17 
15 

13 

21) 
2() 
41 
41 
50 
58 
II 


47 
50 
18 
55 
55 
02 
12 
24 
3  58 
3  53 


50 
46 
39 
43 


3  42 

4  42 
4  36 


48 
49 
55 
02 
52 
55 
08 
oo 


5  28 
5  45 

5  53 
(i  13 
()  23 

6  41 
G  57 
(i  58 

7  0(5 


Long, 

D.      M. 

45  56  w 
45  56 
44  50 


44  17 

44  15 

!44  25 
44  20 
|44  23 
44  19 

44  16 

44  17 

44  16 

44  04 

43  58 

44  04 
44  05 
13  38 

13  30 
13  13 
13  00 
12  27 
42  12 
40  50 
10  51 
40  37 

40  27 
40  39 
40  06 

32  24 

33  10 
39  37 
39  20 
38  59 
38  41 
38  46 
38  43 
38  49 
18  48 

38  31 
,S8  31 

39  ;').") 
37  33 

37  19 
37  18 
36  59 
3(i  28 
3i;  19 
36  20 
35  31 
35  20 


17 
15 
12 

04 

(II) 
57 


Lat. 

D.  M. 

7  08  s 
7  26 


35 
36 

47 
57 
01 
8  04 
8  09 
8  21 
8  23 
8  25 
8  36 

8  43 

9  05 
9  16 
9  10 
9  40 


34  53 
31  .M) 
3!  53 


Cape  Blanco,  steep  part 

Point  de  Guya 

Point  das  Pedraa 

Village  of  Pilar 

Fort,  entrance  of  Rio  Ay., 

Nosaa  Senhora  Farinha 

Olindo,  west  tower 

Power  de  Recife,  Pernambuco 
Nossa  Senhora  de  Rosario, 

CArE  St.  Auuustin 

River  Ipojuca,  entrance 

Mount  Sellada,  S.  peak 

Islands  of  St.  Alexio 

Fort  de  Tamandare 

San  Bento 

Village  of  Quinta 

La  Forquilla,  bill 

Frenchmen's  port 

Village  at  the  point  of  River 

AJagoas 9  40 

Morro  Sant  Antonio 9  22 

River  San  Francisco 10  29 

Tabayana  Mountain  summit...  10  47 

Rio  Vasa  Barris 11  11 

Rio  Real,  S.  point 11  28 

I'orre  de  Garcia  de  Avila 12  32 

River  Jacuipc 12  42 

Rock  of  Itapuan 12  58 

Iiapuanzinko,  the  point 13  01' 

St.  Antonio,  N.  W.  lower 13  00 

Point  Caso  Pregos,  Isle   Ita- 

porica 13  08 

Point  Aratuba  do 13  05 

Point  laburn  do 12  57 

Mount  Conceicaodo 13  03 

Morro  Sant  Amarro  do 13  01 

Morro  de  San  Paulo 13  22 

Isle  Boypeda 13  38 

Isle  Quiepi 13  51 

Point  of  Mutn 13  53 

Villa  of  Comas 14  18 

Os  Ilheos,  the  largest  rock 14  47 

Villa  dc  San  George  dos  Ilheos  14  49 

Kio  Cachoeira,  S.  point 14  49 

Villa  of  Unha 14  59 

Morro  de  Commandatuba,  S. 

E.  summit 15  22 

Vill.  of  Commandatuba 15  25 

Village  of  Belmont 15  51 

■'atita  Cruz,  steeple 16  19 

Porto  Seguro,  steeple   of  the 

Cathedral 16  27 

Isolated  Mount 16  52 

Mount  Pascal,  summit 16  54 

Mount  .loao  de  Siam 17  00 

River  Crnniimuam Hi  51 

Columl.iana 17  06 

Villa  Prado,  Fort 17  21 

Alinillios  Islands;  the  largest 

island 17  58 

Kio  do  St..!  Matlico 18  37 

K'io  Docc,  entrance 19  37 

Serra  dos  Reis  Magos,  the  S. 

puimnit 19  50 

Morro  Ahneyda 19  57 

Mcsiro  Alvaro,  summit 20  09 

I'.ipeZiiliarro 20  IG 

"  Pitou"   at   the   north   of  the 

eily  of  Victoria 20  18 

Nossa  Senhora  dc  Penha,  the 

eliureh 20  20 


Long. 

D.     M. 

34  48  w 
34  47 
34  48 
34  48 
34  51 
34  51 
34  51 
34  53 
34  r.6 
34  57 

34  58 

35  11 
35  01 
35  05 
35  17 
35  22 
35  48 
35  41 

35  47 

35  33 

36  23 

37  23 
37  17 

37  20 

38  01 
38  07 
38  22 
38  28 
38  32 

38  46 
38  44 
38  36 
38  41 
38  45 
38  54 
38  57 
38  57 

38  57 

39  00 

38  59 

39  00 
38  59 

38  58 

39  08 
38  56 

38  54 

39  02 

39  03 
39  31 
39  25 
39  37 
39  Oil 
39  12 
39  12 

3S42 
39  45 

39  51 

40  22 
40  20 
40  22 
40  17 

40  23 

40  20 


^m 


^immm':''^  ' 


LATITUDES  AM)  LONGITUDES. 


641 


35  47 

35  35 

36  23 

37  23 
37  17 

37  20 

38  01 
38  07 
138  22 
138  28 

38  32 

38  46 
38  44 
38  36 
38  41 
38  45 
38  54 
38  57 
38  57 

38  57 

39  00 

38  59 

39  00 
38  59 

I  38  5« 


39  03 
39  3i 
3!)  25 
39  37  I 
39  09 
39  Vi 
39  12 

t8  38  42 

37  39  45 

137  139  51 


50 
;u 
09 
IG 

40  22 
40  20 
40  22 
40  17 

18 

40  23 

20 

40  20 

Lot. 

D.  M. 

30  19  s 
30  31 
30  36 
30  39 
30  31 
20  44 
30  48 
30  55 

30  50 

31  33 
31  50 
33  03 
33  35 
33  13 
33  33 


Mount  Morens 

Pacotes  rocks 

Point  Jicu 

Martin  Vas  Rock 

Trinidad  Island 

Guarapari 

Morro  Bo,  (isolated  mount'n,) 

Morro  de  Benevento 

Serra  de  Guarapari 

Mt.  de  Campos,  S.  summit 

Mtns.  of  Furado,  highest... 

Cape  St.  Thomas 

Isle  St.  Ann,  the  largest 

Pic  do  Frade  de  Macahe... 

Morro  San  Joao,  summit,., 

Cape  Buzios,  S.  point |33  46 

Isles  Ancora,  easternmost 33  46 

Cape  Frio,  S.  point 33  01 

Cape  Negro 33  57 

Isles  Maricas,  southernmost...  33  01 

Redondo 33  04 

Rio  Janeiro,  sugar  loaf. 33  56 

LaGabia 33  59 

IsleGeorgi  Grego 33  15 

0.  Pakagaio,  top  of  I.  Grande,  33  11 

Ilha  Grande,  Pt.  Acaya 33  15 

Point  loatinya 33  18 

Pic  de  Parati,  summit 33  19 

Isles  Couves,  largest 33  36 

Isle  Victoria 23  48 

Isle  Buzios,  S.  E 33  44 

Isles  dos  PorcoB,  south  sand 

hill 33  34 

Isle  St.  Sebastian 

Highest  mountain 23  48 

Point  Pirassonungo 23  58 

Alcatrasses 24  06 

Mouton  de  Trigo 33  51 

Lage  de  Santos 24  18 

Isle  of  Santos 34  04 

Point  Grossa 23  59 

'    Taypu 24  01 

Isle  Queimada  Grande 24  28 

Isle  Queimada  Pequena 24  31 

Point  Jurea 34  33 

Mount  Cardoz 34  59 

Isle  Bom  Abrigo 35  07 

Rocher  Castello 35  16 

Rocher  Figo 25  22 

Isle  de  Mel,  south  top 25  33 

Roc  Coral 25  46 

Roc  Itascolomi 25  50 

Point  Joao  Diaz 26  07 

Isles  Tamboretes 26  21 

Isles  Remcdios 36  29 

Point  Itapacoroya 36  47 

Isle  Avoredo,  top 27  17 

We  St.  Catharine,  E.  point 27  36 

do.  Point  Rupa 37  33 

do.  Steeple  of  Nossa  Senhoru 

do  Desterro 27  36 

Point  Viiaquera 28  13 

Isle  (las  Araras 28  18 

Poin'  Bituba 28  16 

Isle  je  Lobos  de  la  Laguna....  28  24 

Morro  da  Barra 28  2!) 

The  Ciiy  de  la  Laguna 28  28 

Cape  St.  Malta  Pequeno 28  39 

"    St.  Marta  Grande 28  39 

Barra  Velha 28  51 

As  Torres 3!)  28 

80 


Long.  I 

I.      M. 

40  19  w 
40  17 
40  33 

28  54 

29  31 
40  33 
40  41 

40  49 

41  08 
41  38 
41  43 
41  UO 

41  46 

42  09 

42  06 
41  56 
41  51 
41  59 

43  35 
51 

43  09 
43  09 

43  23 

44  19 
44  21 
44  29 
44  39 
44  54 

44  58 

45  14 
45  06 

45  10 


45  22 

45  20 

45  47 

45  52 

46  18 

46  13 

46  24 

46  30 

46  47 

46  54 

47  19 

48  12 

47  oS 

48  03 

48  10 

48  26 

48  30 

48  33 

48  40 

48  39 

48  42 

48  44 

48  29 

48  29 

48  33 

48  40 

48  39 

48  37 

48  39 

18  45 

48  50 

48  51 

48  51 

48  50 

49  16 

.'■)0  00 

Beach  of  Fcrnambtico,  ensi 
pnrt 

Bfacli  do  Deairelto,  K.  |)ttit ... 

llio  Grande  de  San  Pedro 

Bunk  of  Sand  and  Shells,  E. 
part 


Lut. 

D.     M, 

29  52  s 

31  13 

32  07 

33  44 


Lus  Cusiillos,  ilie  eusteni  rock,  34  24 


liio  de  la  Plata. 

Cape  de  Rocha,  or  St.  Maria 

Isle  do  Lnbus,  ihe  middle 

City  of  Maldonado,  the  tower, 

Isle  de  Goriti,  English  Tomb 

VVIinle  Point 

Black  Point 

Point  d'Atilar 

"  das  Piedras  Negras  dc 
Saint  Rosa 

Isle  de  Flurcs,  the  Tower 

Monle  Video,  ihe  Calhedral... 

Isle  Ratos  of  Monte  Video 

Cerro  dc  Alonte  Video 

Point  de  I'Espinillo 

La  Panella 

Point  du  Sauce 

The  Colony  of  San  Sacra- 
mento  

Cape  St.  Anloine 

Lc  Salado,  the  entrance 

Hill  of  Juan  Jeronimo 

Point  de  Piedras  de  St.  Bor- 
onibon 

Hill  Salvador  Grande 

Point  de  I'Indio 

First  Ombu  tree  of  the  Mag. 
dalcna 

La  Magdelcna,  the  Church 

Point  de  la  Alalaya 

'     de  Sanliugu 

Point  de  Lara 

Buenos  Ayrcs,  Florida  street, 
No.  87 

Gape  Lubos 


34  39 

35  01 
34  53 
34  55 
34  54 
34  53 
34  47 

34  46 
34  56 
34  54 
34  53 
34  53 
34  50 
34  55 
34  25 


34  28 
36  20 

35  44 
35  29 

35  28 
35  19 
35  15 

35  03 

35  03 
34  55 
34  50 
34  47 

34  36 

36  55 


liio  de  la  Plata  to  Cape 
Horn. 

Cape  Corientes 

Point  de  Neuva 

Si.  Elena 

Cape  Blanco 

Point  Desire 

Port  Si.  Jiilicn,  Cape  Curioso, 

St.  Cruz  Harbor 

iape  Fairweulher 

Jape  Virgins,  northern    poini 
of  entrance   to   Magellan 
Strails 

Cape  Espiriti)  Santo,  summit  5 
miles  iiiland 

Tcna  del   Fiicro,  C.  Petins.. 
Cape  St.  Diego 


37  .59 
42  55 
44  31 
47  12 
47  45 

49  11 

50  09 

51  33 


52  19 


Slalcii  Lain: 

Cape  St.  John,  eastern. 

most  land  near  Capo  Horn., 

C.  Si.  Barllioloniew.... 

C.  del  Medio,  entranci 

to  Le  Miiiri-'s  Sirails 


52  42 

53  45 

54  41 


I 

'54  48 
154  57 


Now  Island  E.  part 

Evout's  Island,  miildlc 

Barnevclt    Islands,  E.  pomt. 
Catf.  Horn,  summit 


.14  49 
55  17 
55  33 
55  49 
55  i)9 


Lung. 
D.     u, 

49  59  w 

50  40 
53  09 

53  31 
53  41 


54  10 

54  54 

55  00 
55  00 
55  04 
55  17 
55  31 

55  44 

55  67 

56  13 
56  15 
56  17 
.'J6  36 

56  26 

57  27 

57  51 

56  47 

57  25 
57  21 

57  09 
57  10 
57  12 

57  10 
57  34 
57  44 

57  55 

58  03 

58  24 
56  47 


57  39 

64  09 

65  17 
65  43 
65  53 

67  35 

68  19 
68  55 


68  17 

68  41 
67  29 
65  02 


63  42 

64  39 

61  48 
66  25 
66  40 

66  40 

67  11 


I 


•I 


lipw^WIHsi^lPWP^IipWPIilww-''  — '■■-    "  — 


PPT""''— R"f«WPIP 


642 


LATITUDES    AND   LONGITUDES. 


I.  Dippo  Rnmires,  S.  pnrl., 
— ^  N    pnrt 


Tnra  del  Fiitgo. 

—  YorUminster.... 

—  C.  Gloucester...- 
■  Cnpe  Pillara,  S.  W.  en- 


trance  to  Mncollan'.i  straits, 
Eviiiigi'list  I.,  W.  eiitraneo  to 
Miiireilan's  straits- 


Falkland  Islands. 
Rddystotie  Rock,  (20  ke.\).... 


Lat. 
n.    M. 
56  27  s 
56  22 


55  24 
54  30 

52  43 

52  24 

51  10 


Long. 

D.     M, 

68  36  \\ 
68  37 


70  02 

73  02 

74  38 

75  03 

5!)  03 


kv  Cape  Bougainville 

Cape  Carysfort 

Berkely  Sound,  (Eagle  Point) 

Cape  Pembroke 

Sea  Lion  Islanda,  easternmost 

point 

Reauchdne  Island 

Cape  Meredith,  S.  W.  point 

Falkland  Islands 

Cape  Split 

Jason  Islands,  (West  Key). 


52  27 
58  51 

5a  16 
51  49 
51  00 


58  54 

59  la 

60  39 

61  20 
6127 


The  Latitudes  and  Longitudes  in  the  preceding  Table  have  been  selected  from  the  most  rec«Dt 
and  best  auihurities. 

Those  of  the  Coast  of  Newfoundland  and  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  have  been  altered  to  correspond 
with  the  recent  observations,  as  far  as  received,  of  the  officers  under  the  direction  of  Sir  Charles 
Ogle,  and  those  made  by  Captain  Bayfield,  R.  N.,  who  is  surveying  the  St.  Lawrence. 

The  po«>''  'ons  of  the  principal  points  of  the  Coast  of  the  United  States  are  altered  to  scree  with 
the  observtt.:ons  made  of  the  Eclipse  of  the  Sun  of  February  12th,  1831. 

The  Bnlize  from  a  number  of  occultations  by  Captain  A.  Talcott,  United  States  CommissiQiMr 
for  the  Northeastern  Boundary  ;  and  the  Sabine  by  Major  J.  D.  Graham,  U.  S.  T.  E.,  one  of  the 
Commissioners  for  determining  the  United  States  Southwestern  Boundary,  and  now  a  Commis. 
sioner  on  the  Northeastern  Boundary  Line. 

In  the  above  cases  it  will  be  seen  that  both  points  have  been  placed  too  far  to  the  westward  m 
all  previous  publications. 

The  West  Indies  arc  adapted  to  the  most  recent  observations ;  among  others,  to  tfaoee  of  Conu 
mander  R.  Owen,  and  E.  Barnett,  R.  N. 

The  Coast  of  South  America,  from  St.  Luis,  Maranham,  to  St.  Catharine's,  from  the  observaoou 
of  Baron  Roussin,  with  the  exception  of  Rio  Janeiro,  which  is  that  of  Capt.  R.  Fitzroy,  R.  N,- 
^rom  St.  Catharine's  to  the  River  Plate,  by  M.  Barral ;  and  from  Port  St.  Elena  to  Cape  HonLbr 
Captains  P.  P.  King,  and  R.  Fitzroy,  R.  N. 


buoys  I 
bered, 
REDb 
with  UK 
either  1 
pendicu 


CAP 

above  th 

TheJi 

uary,  18 

PEN( 
Indian  Ie 
placed  ot 
light  was 
Long  Isli 
thirty  fee 


; 


APPEIVDIX. 


The  attention  of  Shipmasters  is  particularly  directed  to  the  following 
changes,  which  will  be  made  in  the  colors  of  the  buoys  in  our  harbors, 
>ve  suppose  in  May,  1861 : 

By  the  6th  section  of  the  Lighthouse  Bill,  of  1850,  it  ia  enacted,  That  hereafter  all 
buoya  along  the  coaat,  or  in  baya,  haibora,  sounda,  or  channels,  ahall  be  colored  and  num- 
bered, 80  that  pnaaing  up  the  coast  or  sound,  or  entering  the  bay,  harbor,  or  channel, 
RED  buoys  with  even  numbers  ahall  be  passed  on  the  starboard  hand,  BLACK  buoys 
with  uneven  numbers  on  the  port  hand,  and  buoys  with  RED  ond  BLACK  stripes  on 
either  hand.  Buoys  in  channel  ways  to  be  colored  with  alternate  white  and  black  per- 
pendicular stripes. 


CAPE  PINE,  Newfoundland,  page  38— .On  this  capo  there  is  a  lighthouse  302  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea;  the  tower  is  50  feet  high,  painted  red  and  white,  alternately. 

The  lieht  is  revolving ;  time  of  revolution  20  seconds :  it  will  be  lit  on  the  Ist  of  Jan- 
uary, 1851. 

PENOBSCOT  RIVER,  |»a^e  141.— On  the  first  of  November  a  light  was  lighted  on 
Indian  Island,  at  the  entrance  of  Goose  River,  west  side  of  Penobscot  Bay.  The  lantern  is 
placed  on  the  keeper's  dwelling-house,  40  feet  above  sea  level.  It  is  a  red  light.  Another 
light  was  lighted  at  the  same  time  on  Grindel's  Point,  at  the  entrance  of  Gilkey's  Harbor, 
Long  Island,  Penobscot  Bay.  The  lantern  is  placed  on  the  keeper's  dwelling-house, 
thirty  feet  above  sea  level. 

BRANDYWINE  LIGHT,  page  219.— An  iron  lighthouse  has  been  built  on  the 
Brandywine,  the  light  of  which  is  49  feet  above  low  water.  It  is  a  fixed  light,  and 
bears  from  Cape  May  Light  N.  W.  by  W.,  ^  W.,  distant  8  miles.  From  Cape  Hen- 
lopen  N.  {  W.,  12^  miles. 

CAPE  HATTERAS,  page  235— Cape  Hatteras  Light  bears  N.  37°  W.,  distant  about 
8i  nautical  miles  from  the  south-eastern  edge  of  the  9  feet  or  Outer  Shoals. 

To  clear  the  Outer  Shoals,  in  approaching  them  from  the  northward  and  eastward, 
bring  the  lighthouse  to  hear  W.,  in  10  to  12  fathoms  water,  when  run  S.,  keeping  in  not 
less  than  10  fathoms  water,  until  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  W.  i  N.,  when  any  course 
south  of  west  may  be  steered  with  safety. 

In  coming  from  the  southward  and  westward,  keep  in  not  less  than  10  fathoms  water, 
tintil  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  W.,  when  any  course  eastward  of  N.  may  be  steered. 

In  bad  weather,  and  especially  at  night,  do  not  approach  the  Outer  Sliouls  nearer  than 
15  fathoms  water  from  the  northward  and  eastward,  and  12  to  11  fiithoms  from  the  south- 
ward and  westward. 

It  is  necessary  to  watch  the  bearings  of  the  lighthouse,  and  keep  the  lead  going  in, 
beating  around  or  between  the  shoals.  In  approaching  the  shoals  at  night  or  in  bad 
weather,  if  the  lighthouse  has  not  been  seen  before  night,  it  will  not  be  prudent  to  run 
for  it. 

As  10  or  11  fathoms  water  may  be  found  to  the  westward  of  the  shoals,  in  going  out- 
side of  them  froir.  the  southward  and  westward,  do  not  approach  the  land  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  cape  nearer  than  8i  to  10  miles. 

To  pass  between  the  Diamond  and  Outer  Shoals,  from  the  northward  and  eastward, 
bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  W.  in  10  to  9  fathoms  water,  about  4i  niiios  from  it,  and  run 
S.  until  the  water  shoals  to  7  or  8  fathoms  and  the  lighthouse  bearing  N.  W.  i  W.,  when 
run  S.  W.,  carrying  not  less  than  4  fathoms  through  the  channel,  and  deepening  gradu- 
ally to  the  south-western  edge  of  it,  until  in  7  or  8  fathoms,  with  the  lighthouse  bearing 
north. 

In  approaching  this  channel  from  the  southward  and  westward,  bring  the  lighthouse  to 
bear  N.,  in  8  to  7  fathoms  water,  about  4.i  miles  distant  from  it,  and  run  N.  E.  until  in  8^ 
to  9  fathoms  water,  and  the  lighthouse  bearing  N.  W.,  when  the  shoals  will  be  cleared. 

To  pass  between  the  Diamond  and  Cape  Hatteras  Spit  from  the  n  -.thward  and  east- 
ward, bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  in  8  to  7  fathoms  water  2i  miles 


'i   t 


644 


APPENDIX 


difltnnt,  nnd  steer  S.  W.,  Riving  the  end  of  the  spit  nnd  bralters  alwrtlh  oT}  a  mtle.  Oo 
this  course  not  less  ttian  3  jiithonis  will  uu  i'uurid.  When  the  lif(hthouse  bears  N.,  in  6  to 
6  f)itlioiii8  water,  tlie  DiHiouml  will  be  cloiired;  and  whec  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  N,  £. 
i  £.,  in  (i  to  7  fiithuinst  wnter,  the  Spit  will  be  cleared,  and  the  anchorage  in  the  cove  open! 
To  puss  between  the  Diamond  and  the  S[)it  from  the  southward  and  westward,  brias 
the  iJKhthouse  to  bear  N.,  in  5  fnttioins  water,  '2  miles  from  the  breakers  and  point,  aoa 
run  N.  E.  until  in  !)  to  10  futlioiiiii  water,  when  the  shoals  will  be  cleared. 

The  bottom  is  hard  sand  with  an  occasional  small  spot  of  blue  mud.  The  currents  over 
and  in  the  vicinity  of  the  shoals  have  a  velocity  of  3  to  5  l<not8  per  hour,  and  are  greatly 
influenced  in  direction  and  force  by  iliu  winds.  The  surface  water  of  the  GulfStreutn 
extends  to  wiihin  a  short  distance  of  tlie  Outer  Shoals,  for  some  time  after'a  contiouatisQ 
of  nortlierly  and  easterly  winds. 

(ireatest  rise  and  fall  of  tides  at  Hatteras  Cove 5.3  feet 

Meau         "  "  "  "  "     3.3     " 

Least         "  '•  "  "  "     2.2    " 

Lieutenant  T.  A.  Jenkins'  U.  S,  Coatt  Survet. 

HATTERAS  INLET,  Page  230.— Sir :— I  have  the  honor  to  report  that,  in  obedi- 
nnce  to  your  instructions,  I  made  a  re-examination  of  Hatteras  Inlet  in  June  lust,  aad 
found  many  changes  there  from  the  reconnoiMsance  of  the  previous  ye.nr. 

The  entrance  between  the  outer  breakers  liiis  shifted  more  to  the  northward  and  east- 
ward, and  nearer  the  beach  The  east  point  has  washed  away,  and  made  more  to  the 
noriiiward  and  eastward  in  Pamlico  Sound.  The  west  point  has  made  more  out  into 
the  inlet,  and  towards  the  northward  and  eastward. 

There  is  between  the  outer  breaker  from  ten  to  twenty  feet  at  mean  low  water  ;  and 
twelve  feet  can  be  carried  up  to  a  ifood  anchorage  inside  of  the  sand  apita.  Six  feetcu 
be  carried  over  the  bulkheads  into  Pamlico  Sound. 

A  sluice  luu  opened  to  the  nortliward  of  the  east  pr  hit  of  the  inlet,  which  makes  a 
good  liarbor  for  small  vessels.  I  would  not  recommend  buoys  to  be  pbiced  in  tlie  inlet,  as 
it  is  not  in  a  permanent  condition ;  and  they  might  therefore  mislead,  if  any  change 
should  occur. 

Kor  this  reason,  as  well  as  that  the  tide  runs  so  strong  that  vessels  are  in  danger  of 
being  swept  on  the  numerous  sand  pits  or  slioals,  I  would  advise  all  vessels  unncquaiated 
witli  the  inlets  to  take  a  pilot,  wliicli  iiiiiy  be  obtained  by  hoisting  a  flag  at  the  fore. 

I  would  recommend  a  liuuy  to  be  placed  on  Long  Shoal,  in  Pamlico  Sound,  to  prevent 
vessels  touching  on  it,  and  as  a  good  guide  in  making  for  the  bulkhead  from  the  south. 

R.     WAINWRIGHT, 
Assistant  Coast  Survey. 

To  Professor  A.  D.  Bache,  Superintendent  United  States  Coast  Survey. 

BEAUFORT,  NORTH  CAROLINA.  Pa^e  2.37.— This  harbor  is  about  Sj  mUes 
W.  N.  W.  pur  compass  from  the  South  Spit  of  Cape  Lookout,  and  can  be  entered  with 
the  wind  from  all  poiut«  except  W.  and  N.  W.,  carrying  in  17  ft.  and  3|  fathoms,  k)w 
water  nea|). 

On  making  Fort  Macon,  the  breakers  on  each  side  of  the  entrance  will  be  distinctly 
seen  ;  enter  midway  between  the  breakers,  or  with  the  last  Western  Hillock  on  Sliack- 
elford  Point.  1°  28'  open  to  the  left  of  Fort  Macoti;  and,  if  Flood  tide,  approach  without 
fear  the  Western  or  Bar  breakers,  steering  W.  by  N.  i  N.  per  compass,  1}  mile8,or 
until  tlie  extreme  N.  W.  hillock  on  Shacklefurd  Point  is  about  two  oars'  length  open  to 
the  left,  or  wp.stward  of  a  slim  white  Spire  in  Beaufort.,  Then  steer  N.  W.  j  N.,  fol- 
lowiiii;  the  Bur  breiikeiH  until  Beinit<)rt  Spire  bears  N.  2°  26'  E.,  when  haul  up  N.  W. 
by  N.  i  N.,  ruiiiidiiig  Point  Macon  in  6,  7,  5  and  4  fathoms  water,  and  anchoring  off  the 
wlinrf  in  .'Ji  fiitlioius.  good  holding;  ground,  (mud  and  sand.) 

Entering  on  the  Ebb,  give  the  Bar  breakers  more  of  a  berth  than  when  Flood.  The 
Ebb  .sets  slioiiaest  through  mid-cliunnel,  yet  with  considerable  force  over  the  Bar.  The 
flood  over  the  Bar  sets  strong  to  the  northward,  and  is  apt  to  carry  a  vessel  on  the  Middle 
(Ti'ound.     In  leaving,  the  same  precautions  are  to  bo  observed. 

Sliould  a  vessel  get  ashore  on  the  Middle  (iround,  if  Ebb,  carry  out  a  bower  anchor 
with  long  sco|)e  to  channel  without  delay,  for  on  the  Flood  nothing  can  bedoneonac- 
count  of  the  swell  and  strong  current;  moreover,  with  the  Flood,  the  sand  is  all  aliye 
on  llie  iMiddle  (rround,  and  will  not  hold  the  anchor.  If  grounding  on  the  Flood,  wiod 
the  vessel,  if  practicable,  and  let  !>;o  an  anchor  to  keep  head  tu  channel,  as  nothing  further 
can  be  accoinplisiied  until  tlie  tide  slackens. 

This  harbor  is  easy  of  access,  and  alVords  perfect  shelter  from  all  winds. 

Pdots  can  bo  obtained  by  setting  a  sijinal  at  the  Fore.  Vessels  should  heave  toof 
the  S    E.spit,  in  4  fathoms,  convenient  fur  entering  when  boarded  by  the  pilot. 

The  .Slue  should  never  be  attempted  by  strangers.  Nino  feet  at  low  water  neapcaa 
be  carried  in  the  Channel,  winding  near  tu  the  beach  on  Macon  Point.  High  water,  7b. 
4Gni.,  rise  2  feet  9  inches. 


PPt^P-WilPHIiPP 


immmm 


mmmm 


APPENDIX. 


646 


Od  OAK  ISLAND— ptf/f«  239— there  are  two  beacons,  which  nngt  N.  E,  by  N., 
and  S.  W.  by  S. ;  to  run  in,  brin^;  liald  Ilend  iiKlit  to  lieiir  E.  or  K.  by  N. ;  then  run  fur 
it  nntil  the  beacons  on  Oiik  Isliiml  rangu.  thence  the  course  is  E.  N.  K.  to  the  i^ip.  At 
the  enatern  point  of  the  Rip  there  are  7i  feet,  on  the  Western  Bar  7  feet.  High  water» 
about  7h.  30ni.,  rise  about  4  feet. 

GALVESTON,  ^a^e  250. — The  lisht-shipfor  this  harbor  has  been  moored  inside  the 
bar,  in  3i  fathoms  water;  the  Cylinder  of  the  Cuba's  wrecic  bearing  E.  i  N.  and  the 
CathedrHJ  S.  W.  i  S. 

Vensels  desiring  to  enter  the  harbor  without  a  pilot,  should  keep  in  6i  fathoms  until 
the  light-ship  bears  N.  W.,  by  compass,  when  she  will  bo  in  range  with  tlie  outer  and 
inner  buoys;  then  steer  directly  for  her,  passing  close  to  the  buoys,  (on  eitlier  hand;) 
when  up  with  the  light,  haul  up  west  until  midway  between  two  buoys,  (the  one  on  the 
starboard  hand  marks  the  end  of  Perlican  Spit,  the  other  the  "Knoll,")  then  steer  S.  S. 
W.  for  tTie  wharves. 

Masters  of  vessels  unacquainted  with  the  channel,  should  anchor  near  the  light- ship, 
and  not  attempt  to  come  up  to  the  town  witliout  a  pilot. 

Vessels  desiring  a  pilot  should  come  to  in  6i  fatlioms,  with  the  light  bearing  N.  N.  W> 

Page  259, 13th  line  from  bottom,  instead  of  N.  N.  W.,  read  N.  by  W. 

SAND  KEY  JAOU'r,page  259,  will  probably  be  rebuilt,  and  lit  in  Mi\y,  1851. 
It  is  to  be  an  iron  screw  pile,  100  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  revolving  with  six 
seconds  of  light  and  ten  of  darkoess. 

CAPE  CARNAV£RAL,j>a/fe  261. — A  shoal,  5  miles  from  the  shore,  nearly  dry,  ia 
latitude  26°  02'  N. 

CAPE  CARNAVERAL,jpag«  261.— Sir: — I  have  the  honor  to  report  that,  in  obe- 
dience to  your  instructions,  I  have  made  a  reconnoiasance  of  Cape  Cnrnaveral  Shoals. 

Bearing  from  the  lighthouse  by  compass  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  distant  from  it  eleven  and 
three-quarters  nautical  miles,  there  is  a  shoal  with  tifteen  feet  water  on  it  at  low  tide ; 
aud  there  is  one  with  eight  feet  water  on  it  at  low  tide,  eleven  and  one-quarter  miles  from 
the  lighthouse,  and  bearing  from  it  N.  N.  E.  i  E. 

These  shoals,  distant  from  one  another  one  and  n  half  mile,  and  bearing  from  each 
other  E.  by  S.  and  N.  by  W.,  are  the  extremities  of  a  bank  with  three,  four,  and  five 
fathoms  water  on  it. 

With  the  eye  elevated  twenty-six  feet  above  the  sea,  the  land  could  not  be  seen  from 
them  in  n  clear  day  ;  aud  the  lighthouse  was  only  faintly  visible. 

These  shoals  are  the  more  dangerous,  because  deep  water  surrounds  the  bank  on 
which  they  lie. 

In  bad  weather,  breakers  point  out  their  place,  but  with  a  smooth  sea  no  indication  of 
their  existence  is  given. 

A  shoal  runs  out  from  the  lighthouse  very  nearly  five  miles  in  a  S.  E.  j  E.  direction. 
Separated  from  this  by  a  channel  one  mile  wide  and  four  fathoms  deep,  is  a  small  shoal 
with  eleven  feet  water  on  it  at  low  tide ;  it  bears  S.  E.  by  E.  ■}  E.  from  the  lighthouse, 
and  is  six  and  a  quarter  miles  distant  from  it. 

Between  the  lighthouse  and  southeast  shoal  is  a  beach  channel,  with  six  feet  water  in  it 
at  low  tide. 

Though  there  are  deep  channels  between  the  outer  shoals  and  the  lighthouse,  there 
are  numerous  shoal  spots  which  render  the  navigation  through  them  dangerous  to  largo 
vessels. 

Vessels  wishing  to  lie  under  the  Cape  in  northerly  or  westerly  winds,  should  bring  the 
lighthouse  to  bear  N.  E.,  and  anchor  in  fifteen  or  seventeen  feet  water,  about  one-third 
of  a  mile  from  the  beach. 

Directions  for  the  Beach  Channel. — Bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  W.  S.  W.,  and  run 
for  it — keep  the  south  end  of  the  stable  roof  in  a  range  with  the  middle  of  the  light- 
house, until  within  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  of  the  beach.  Then  steer  south  and  pass 
the  Cape. 

At  low  tide,  the  depth  of  water  in  this  channel  is  six  feet.  Especial  caro  must  be 
taken  to  guard  against  the  current,  which  was  found  to  set  strongly  to  the  northward. 
The  lighthouse  and  stable  are  so  close  together  that  the  range  must  be  closely  watched. 

Very  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

JOHN  RODGERS, 
Lieutenant  Commanding  and  Assistant  Coast  Survey. 

A.  D.  Bache,  LL.  D.,  Superintendent  Coast  Survey. 

fVa»hinglon,  Aug.  9,  1850. 


'■,U1,PI  will 


I  ii  .  '*m  iM  ^v'v*"fwn«M«tP 


ip«W| 


«4« 


APPENDIX. 


CARYSFORT  REEF  LIGHT,  0a^«  ^68 — Thia  ii  to  b*  u  iron  teraw  oil*  ud*. 
Iwlieve  will  be  tiniihed  in  1861.  "^    »  •»«  we 


DOG  ISLAND  LIGHTHOUSE, j^a^^e  270— hu  not  ■  black  itrip*. 

SPININU'S  UAV.  page  b6B.—X  rock,  on  which  the  Britiih  ihip  Siriui  itruck  in 
let.  48°  07  south,  long.  65°  37  west.  It  is  12  miles  io  an  E.  N.  £.  diroction  from  Shac 
Island.  * 

CAPB  ST.  BLAS  LIGHTHOUSE— pa^«  271— has  a  red  stripe  around  it. 

SISAL  LIGHT,  oa^e  284.— On  the  Ist  November,  1850,  a  bright  and  flxed  light, 
i(calle(l  St.  Eliniis  Light,)  was  exhibited  from  the  top  of  the  Castle  of  Sisal.  The 
light  will  be  visible  from  ine  north  or  seuwnrd,  and  being  elevated  sixty  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  ocean,  can  be  seen  in  fair  weather  eight  or  10  miles  from  the  castle.  This 
light  will  be  of  gront  service  to  navigators  on  tliis  coast,  not  only  to  those  vessels  bound  ill- 
rect  to  Sisnl,  but  to  those  bound  westward,  and  running  for  Campeachy,  Laguna,  Tobasco 
and  Vera  Cruz,  guiding  them  past  the  dangerous  Shoal  of  Sisal,  which  bears  from  the 
Oastle  of  Sisal  N.  W.  by  N.,  about  14  miles  distant,  and  inshore  of  which  is  a  safe  apd 
wide  channel  of  13  miles  breadth ;  and  nil  navigating  this  coast  can  safelv  run  in  this  route 
by  placing  themselves  in  about  34  fathoms  water,  any  distance  to  windward  (or  east  of) 
Sisfli,  and  pursuing  their  course  westerly  in  from  3  to  4  fathoms  of  water,  and  thus  run- 
ning and  making  the  light  on  the  castle,  which  will  give  them  a  correct  departure  for  any 
of  the  above  named  po  rts. 

Those  bound  to  Sisul  direct,  and  running  for  the  anchorage  in  the  night,  have  only  to 
run  westerly,  being  guided  by  their  lead,  nnd  keeping  in  3  or  3^  fathoms,  making  the  light; 
md  when  it  bears  S.  or  S.  by  E.,  bring  to  and  anchor,  choosing  the  proper  depth  of  water 
for  their  vessel,  with  the  understanding  that  3  fathoms  is  the  usual  anchorage,  and  is  about 
two  miles  and  a  half  from  the  castle. 

BUENOS  AYRES.  page  552.— The  national  bark  Condor  ia  stationed  between  Point 
Indio  and  tlie  eastern  extremity  of  the  Ortiz  Bank,  in  order  to  serve  as  a  light-hulk,  a 
large  light  being  every  night  displayed  from  her  topmast,  that  it  may  serve  as  a  guide  to 
vessels  proceeding  to  or  departing  from  this  port.  The  hulk  lies  from  Point  Indio  N.  E. 
by  N.,  by  compass,  distance  10  miles,  and  from  the  extremity  of  the  Ortiz  S.  by  E.,  dis- 
tance 6  miles,  being  in  lat.  S.  35°  9',  and  long.  5I>°  3'  W.  of  Greenwich.  According  to 
the  instructions  given,  good  experienced  pilots  will  be  constantly  found  on  board  said  hulk, 
who  will  convey  to  this  port  all  vessels  bound  hither. 


1' 


w 


Miiiiiitiiiiiiii-fiwfriif'tftt'iir''^^^--  ■    ^ 


APPEIVDIX.-DECEHIBKR,  1852. 


CAPE  RACE,  Page  13 — A  Beacon,  the  top  of  which  is  205  feet  above  the  loTolof 
the  lea,  has  been  erected  on  Cnpe  Rnce. 

It  Is  of  wood,  painted  red  niid  white,  in  vorticnl  stripes. 

RICHIBUCTO,  Page  88.— Tho  deptli  of  wnter  on  this  bar  is  134  feet  ot  low  water; 
rise  of  tides  4  feet.  It  is  a  dangornus  bnr,  nnd  cim  only  bo  crosHed  with  a  lending  wind 
by  a  square  rigged  vessel. 

EDDY  OR  SANDPOINT  LIOHT,  Page  92.— A  Beacon  Light  on  Eddv  orSand- 

Eoint,  on  the  West  side  of  the  South  ontrancn  to  tho  Strait  of  Canso,  and  is  distinguished 
y  two  White  Lights  horiKontnllypiiicHd  35  font  above  sea  Invel — risonnd  full  (>  feet.  The 
building  \c  square,  puinted  Wliite,  with  a  Black  Diamond  on  the  soawurd  side.     The 
point  is  shoal  Eastwardly  of  tlio  Light  nearly  200  fathoms,  but  the  Northwest  of  it  is  bold 
water,  and  good  anchorage.     The  Tides  are  irregular,  and  very  rapid  round  the  point. 
The  following  bearings  by  Compass  may  assist  vessels  passing  through  the  Strait : — 

From  the  Light  to  Cape  Hogan S.  50°  E. 

"  "        to  Western  headland,  which  intercepts  the  Light,  S.  10     £. 

••  "        to  Bear  Island N.  32  W. 

"  "        to  Pirote  Cove N.  34  W. 

"  ••        toMillCreek N.  39  W. 

ARICIIAT  BEACON,  Page  93.— A  Beacon  Light  on  Point   Marichi,  on  the  East 
aide   of  the  Southern  entrance   to  Arichat  Harbor.     The  building  is  square,  painted 
White,  and  shows  a   White  Light  34  feet  above  sea  level — rise  and  fall  6  feet.     The 
Point  is  bold  to — and  the  following  are  the  bearings  of  tho  principal  Hood  Lights  :— 
From  the  Light  to  Cranberry  Island  Light  over  Winging  Point,  S.  3°  E. 

"  "        to  Winging  Point S.  5     W. 

••  "        to  Ragged  Head  North  Shore  Chebucto  Bay,. .  N.  79  W. 

"  "        to  Madam  Island  East  side  of  entrance  to  Strait 

of  Canso  in  one  with  Jerry  Island  Reef, N.  48  W. 

"     Little  Arichat  Heod N.  40  W. 

PETER'S  ISLAND  LIGHT,  Page  123.— The  Light  Beacon  erected  on  Peter's 
Island,  at  the  South  entrance  of  Westport,  on  the  East  side  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  shows 
Two  White  Lights,  horizontally  placed,  (to  distinguish  it  from  Brier  Island  Light.)  at 
an  elevation  of  40  feet  above  high  water  mark.  This  Beacon  is  intended  to  lead  vessels 
into  Westport,  or  through  Grand  Passage,  and  will  be  seen  on  theapproach  from  Seaward 
and  St.  Mary's  Bay,  until  shut  in  by  S.  W.  point  of  Brier  Island,  bearing  from  it  S.  54° 
W.,  and  Dartmouth  Point,  on  Long  Island  side,  S.  25°  E.,  and  on  the  North  side,  (com- 
ing out  of  the  Bay,)  between  N.  ni°  E.,  and  N.  25°  E.  When  in  the  Passage,  or  fair- 
way through,  tlie  Light  will  be  seen  all  round,  and  can  be  passed  on  either  side  ;  but  the 
Eastern  Passage  is  the  deepest  and  widest,  and  i<>  recommended  to  strangers.  The  best 
anchorage  is  on  the  Brier  Island,  or  Western  akUi  if  the  Harbor.  Rise  of  Tide,  19i  feet. 
HORTON  BLUFK  LIGHT.  Page  124.-  A  Beacon  Light  on  Horton  Bluff,  in  the 
Basin  of  Mines,  95  feet  above  sea  level,  high  water — rise  and  fall,  40  to  45  feet. 

The  building  is  square,  painted  White  ;  stands  60  feet  from  the  Bluff,  and  shows  a 
White  Light,  which  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  over  the  greatest  part  of  the  Basin  of 
Idines,  (after  passing  Cape  Blomidon,)  and  above  the  five  Islands  and  up  Windsor  River, 
until  intercepted  by  the  continuation  of  the  Bluff  to  the  Southward  of  it. 

Course  to  Boot  Island,  entrance  of  Cornwallis  River. N.  14°  W. 

■      «»         »    Cape  Blomidon, N.    2    W. 

••        »   Partridge  Island,  (Parrsboro') N.    2    E. 

"        "    Largest  Group  of  Five  Islands, N.  38   E. 

"        "    West  side  of  River  or  continuation  of  Bluff, S.  35   E. 

GILKEY'S  HARBOR  and  GOOSE  RIVER,  Page  141.— Two  lights  have  been 
placed  at  these  places  ;  thoy  are  towers  on  the  tops  of  the  keepers'  houses. 

MINOT'S  LEDGE,  Page  171.— This  light  wos  blown  down  in  April,  1851.     A 
light  ship  is  moored  there  on  the  following  beanngs,  in  ten  fathoms  wnter : — 
Scituate  Light  S.  by  E  ,  distant  six  miles. 
Boston  Light,  N.  W.  |  W.,  distant  nine  miles. 

MONTAUK  POINT  LIGHT,  Page  200,  is  150  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
BRIDGEPORT  HARBOR,  Page  207.— A  fixed  red  light.  23  feet  high. 
BEACON  ON  ROMEK,  Page  211.— An  iron  beacon  of  an  octagonal  form,  the  black 
ball  on  the  top  being  45  feet  above  high  water,  has  been  erected  on  the  Romer  shoal. 

It  bears  S.  48°  E.,  magnetic,  1840  yards  from  the  Stone  Beacon  on  the  N.  W.  point 
of  Romer,  and  is  a  short  third  of  a  nautical  mile  from  the  S.  E.  point  of  the  shoal :  the 
centre  is  in  8  feet  at  low  water. 

In  going  through  the  Swash  Channel,  when  bearing  N.  E.,  it  should  not  be  approached 
nearer  than  300  yards. 


APPENDIX. 


HOOPE  ll'S  STRAITS,  Page  230.— A  buoy  painted  red,  with  a  white  band  near  the 
top  of  the  spar,  has  been  placed  near  the  surken  wrecit  of  a  collier,  in  the  entrance  of 
Hooper's  Straits,  (Chesapeake  Bay,)  which  is  a  dangerous  impediment  to  vessels  enter- 
ing the  straits  from  the  northward.  The  buoy  is  placed  in  seventeen  feet  water,  seven 
yards  from  the  bow  of  the  wreck,  with  the  following  bearings,  by  compass : 

Light  Ship  in  Hooper's  Straits, E.  by  S. 

Tom's  Point N.  i  W. 

Veflsels  should  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  buoy,  and  approach  it  no  nearer  than 
thirty  yards. 

Asimilar  buoy  has  been  placed  on  Belvidere  Knoll,  S.  £.  from  the  Bodkin,  (Chesa- 
peake Bay,)  and  east  of  the  Swash  Channel,  into  Patapsco  River,  (Baltimore  entrance,) 
with  the  following  bearings,  by  compass: 

Bodkin's  Lighthouse, N.  "W.  i  N. 

Sandy  Point S.  J  W. 

CAPE  HATTERAS,  Page  236.— A  Bell  Beacon,  40  feet  long,  has  been  moored 
S.  S.  £.  i  E.  7<l  miles  distant  from  Cape  Hatteras  Lighthouse.  It  is  in  4  fathoms  water, 
inside  the  outer  shoals. 

There  id  a  Red  Buoy  on  the  North-western  point  of  the  Diamond,  in  4  fathoms. 
BULL'S  BAY,  Page  240.— Fixed  Light.— Bring  the  lighthouse  on  the  N.  E.  of 
Bull's  Island  to  bear  N.  W.  i  W.  by  compass,  and  run  for  it  until  over  the  bar,  then  fol- 
low the  beach  round  by  the  lead,  until  the  point  of  the  island  gives  yon  a  harbor.      This 
course  will  give  you  not  less  than  9  feet  at  the  bnr  at  low  tide :  rise  of  tide  about  6  feet. 

Page  259. — A  Coral  Shoal,  having  on  it  14  feet,  has  been  found,  bearing  from  Bush 
Key  Light,  E.  S.  E.  distance  12  to  14  miles. 

CARYSFORT  REEF  LIGHT,  Page  262,  is  a  Fixed  Light,  106  feet  high,  is  on 
the  Eastern  edge  of  the  reef  m  long.  80°  12'  W.,  lat.  25°  14'  N. 
The  Lii°;ht  Ship  is  removed. 

^APALACHICOLA,  Pages  237,  270.— Dog  Island.  Cape  St.  George  and  Cape 
St.  Bias  Light  Houses  are  all  swept,  we  suppose  blown  down.  No  arrangements  for 
substitutes  as  yet. 

CHANDELEUR  ISLAND,  Page  274.— The  lighthouso  has  been  blown  down. 
TURKS  ISLAND  LIGHT,  Page  313.— A  white  light,  revolving  every  27  seconds, 
with  a  continued  dim  light  between  the  interval  of  the  strong  flashes,  has  been  exhibited 
on  the  north  point  of  the  Grand  Turk. 

The  Tower,  whicb  is  painted  white,  and  60  feot  high,  is  situated  400  yards  S.  50°  W. 
of  the  extremity  of  the  point  in 

Latitude 21=^  31'  0"  N.  - 

Longitude 7i       7  40     W.  ,. 

with  the  centre  of  the  lamps  110  feet  above  the  mean  leve  of  the  sea. 

The  light  is  visible  from  all  points  of  the  horizon,  except  between  the  following  bear- 
ings, when  it  is  ecVpsed  by  the  Cays  lying  to  the  southward  of  the  Grand  Turk. 
Light  eclipsed  between  N.  21°  W.  Magnetic. 
~  W.        do 

W.  do 
E.  do 
E.  do 
E.  do 

Is  clear  weather,  the  dim  light  between  the  flashes  can  bo  seen  distinctly  at  the  dis- 
tance of  7  miles. 

Witfi  a  clear  atmosphere,  the  flash  ii  visible,  with  the  eye  elevated  10  feet,  15  naut.  miles. 

20    "    16 
40    "    18 
80    "    21 
Caution  to  avoid  dangers  off  Cape  Comete,  East  Caicos — Vessels  running  for  the  Turks 
Islands  Passage  from  tht,  northward  must  endeavor  to  make  thi'  lighten  n  bearing  to  the 
westward  of  south,  as  its  range  does  not  extend  sufficiently  far  to  guard  against  the  dangers 
lying  oft"  Capo  Comete,  Eost  Caicos. 

Caution  to  avoid  N.  E.  Reef,  Grand  Turk,  Turks  Islands.— A.  reef  runs  off  from  the 
north  point  of  Grand  Turk,  its  extreme  bears  from  the  light  N.  E.  (magnetic)  distance 
3  miles,  and  from  thence  extends  southerly  ond  runs  parallel  with  the  east  side  of  the  Cay 
at  the  distance  of  two  miles;  consequently,  vesHels  on  making  the  light  between  the  bear- 
ings of  S.  W.  and  west,  should  (if  intending  to  take  the  Turks  Island  Passage)  be  careful 
to  avoid  this  dangor. 

On  the  bearing  of  south  the  light  may  be  safely  approached  to  within  two  miles,  and 
have  the  Passiige  open. 

This  light  cannot  be  seen  from  the  dangers  at  the  southern  entrance  of  the  Turks  Isl- 
ands Passage. 


Do 

do 

do 

N. 

16 

Do 

do 

do 

N. 

8 

Do 

do 

do 

N. 

8 

Do 

do 

do 

N. 

13 

Do 

do 

do 

N. 

21 

Variation  1°  45'  easterly. 


I 


SiHiiTiKiiiftafcil'i  I'j 


^wtaiWiUii'imn-iitti  u  ittttmmmim^*,^^ 


^n 


■Pi 


APPENDIX. 

LEIGHTON  ROCK,  Page  350 — Of  3  feet,  kt.  17°  37'  43"  N. ;  long.  73°   21 
-}i "  W.    South  28°  06'  E.,  29  miles  distant  from  south  end  Isle  Vache. 

BARBADOES,  Page  426 — There  is  a  Revolving  Light  on  the  South  Point  of  the 
Island         irbadoes 

The  »        of  the  tower  is  55  foet  above  the  sea,  from  which  it  is  200  yards  distant,  and 
M  stands  1?    atitude  13°  2'  45"  N..   and  longitude  59°  33'  30"  W.  of  Greenwich.     The 

\  Tower  is  ')0  feet  high,  and  is  °     nted  in  alternate  red  and  white  bands,  each  being  7^ 

feet  in  depth. 

The  Light  is  thus  145  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  revolves  once  in  every  minute ; 
after  an  eclipse  of  14  seconds,  it  again  appears,  gradually  increases  for  24  seconds  to  its 
greatest  brilliancy,  and  then  in  24  seconds  more  is  eclipsed. 

From  the  Light,  Seawell  Point  bears  about  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  Neodham  Point 
W.  N.  W.  h  W.  ;  and  except  from  between  the  opposite  bearings  the  light  is  vinible  in 
ail  directions  from  the  deck  of  a  vessel,  within  the  distance  of  18  miles. 

Vessels  approaching  the  Island  f'om  the  Eastward  are  recommended  not  to 
run  down  their  longitude  to  the  noniiward  of  12°  55"  N  ;  and  ns  soon  as  the  light 
is  discovered  to  bring  it  to  bear  West ;  steering  from  thence  W.  by  S.  and  not  passing  it 
at  a  less  distance  than  two  miles. 

If  coming  from  the  north  eastward  the  light  wMI  not  be  visible  until  it  bears  to  the  west- 
ward of  S.  W.  by  W.,  being  concealed  by  the  hia;h  land  forming  Seawell  Point;  and  if 
kept  in  sight  well  open  to  that  point,  it  will  lead  clear  of  the  Cobblers,  a  group  of 
dangerous  reefs  which  extend  some  miles  from  the  eastern  side  of  the  island.  Mariners 
are  advised  to  give  them  a  wide  berth,  on  account  of  the  prevailing  current  to  the  west- 
ward. 

When  the  light  is  brought  to  bear  N.  E.  a  course  may  be  shaped  for  Needham 
Point;  but  in  hauling  up  in  Carlisle  Bay,  that  Point  should  be  kept  at  the  distance 
of  a  third  of  a  mile. 

LITTLE  CURAZAO  ISLAND,  Page  456.— The  light  on  this  island  is  Red. 

GREAT  CORN  ISLAND,  Page  488.— South  8°  East,  seven  miles  distant,  there  is 
a  rock  above  water. 

PARA,  Page  522. — A  Revolving  I  ight  on  Point  Atalaia — times  of  revolution,  light 
70  seconds,  dark  16  seconds  ;  light  12  seconds,  dark  22  seconds,  every  two  minutes. 

Remember — That  all  the  buoys  on  the  coast  of  the  United  States  are  or  ought  to  be,  on 
entering  the  port.  Red,  with  even  numbers,  on  the  starboard  side.  Black,  with  unoven 
cumbers,  on  the  port  side.    Buoys,  with  Red  and  Black  stripes  on  either  hand. 

Buoys  in  channel  way,  alternate  Black  and  White  perpendicular  stripes. 


I 


J 


